المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:12074
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Mohammed Mallick
Students’ Grade:00/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé WatersUnifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units.(2.5marks)
3- Howthe InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the
textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articlesetc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
Week 9: Interactive activity
9.1 Learning Outcomes:
• Recognize the importance of quality management theory, principles, and practices
applied in businesses on national and international levels.
• State the importance of standardization and quality standards.
9.2 Action Required: (Read)
Quality in Practice: Toyota Motor Corporation, Ltd.
The Toyota brand name has earned an international reputation for quality. The roots of
Toyota Motor Corporation, founded in 1937, stem from the Toyoda Automatic Loom Works.
Sakichi Toyoda invented a loom with an automatic stopping function; whenever a thread
broke or the machine ran out of thread, it stopped automatically. This approach was built into
automotive assembly lines to improve quality and productivity and led to the development of
the “Toyota Production System,” which has commonly become known as lean production. A
significant feature of lean production is the practice of continuous improvement by every
worker, demanding the questioning of every process and testing of all assumptions. Errors
and defects are viewed as learning opportunities to remove waste and improve efficiency. In
1951, Eiji Toyoda instituted a system of creative suggestions based on the motto “Good
Thinking, Good Products,” which is prominently displayed in every production facility. One
example is the Rakuraku seat, a comfortable work chair mounted on the tip of an arm that
allows a line worker to easily get into and out of cramped car-body interiors. In 2000, more
than 650,000 suggestions were submitted—almost 12 per employee—and 99 percent were
adopted. At Toyota, everybody helps whenever they can. Even top and middle managers are
well known for getting their “hands dirty” by helping workers on the production line when
necessary.
Toyota uses games, competitions, and cultural events to promote its 3 C’s: creativity,
challenge, and courage. It trains workers extensively, not only in job skills, but also in
personal development that focuses on positive attitudes and a sense of responsibility.
Toyota’s education system includes formal education, on-the-job training, and informal
education.
Toyota is implementing a direct monitoring system that supports quality. For example, its
French plant is connected by a broadband system to the head office, enabling it to transmit
video, audio, and facility performance data. Engineers in Japan can monitor the data of the
plant’s operation in real time, check machinery utilization rates, diagnose malfunctions, and
provide ideas for improvement. Information technology and e-commerce are also used to
expand relationships with suppliers and customers. For example, customers may request
quotes and gather information that previously was only available to dealers.
Shotaro Kamiya, first president of Toyota Motor Sales, stated, “The priority in receiving
benefits from automobile sales should be in the order of the customer, then the car dealer, and
lastly the maker. This attitude is the best approach in winning the trust of customers and
dealers and ultimately brings growth to the manufacturer.” The guiding principles of Toyota
are as follows:
1. Honor the language and spirit of the law of every nation and undertake open and fair
corporate activities to be a good corporate citizen of the world.
2. Respect the culture and customs of every nation and contribute to economic and social
development through corporate activities in the communities.
3. Dedicate ourselves to providing clean and safe products and to enhancing the quality of
life everywhere through all our activities.
4. Create and develop advanced technologies and provide outstanding products and services
that fulfill the needs of customers worldwide.
5. Foster a corporate culture that enhances individual creativity and teamwork value, while
honoring mutual trust and respect between labor and management.
6. Pursue growth in harmony with the global community through innovative management.
7. Work with business partners in research and creation to achieve stable, long-term growth
and mutual benefits, while keeping ourselves open to new partnerships.
Toyota has approximately 40 production facilities in more than 20 countries and regions
outside Japan. When Toyota began expanding outside of Japan, many believed that the
culture could not be copied or applied to foreign cultures, especially in the United States.
With a focus of incorporating the best elements of Japanese and local traditions, while
avoiding the weaknesses of both, Toyota as proven that its approaches and culture can work
everywhere.
One popular phrase at Toyota is “change or die.” The company continually seeks to redefine
itself to adapt to changes in society and the business environment. Toyota’s recent vision is
captured by the phrase harmonious growth—a harmony between man, society, and the
environment.
We wish to make Toyota not only strong but a universally admired company, winning
the
trust and respect of the world. We must be a company that is accepted
wholeheartedly by
people around the world, who would think it natural if Toyota became No. 1 in size,
since
we provide attractive products that excel in environmental protection and in safety
and
thus contribute immensely to local communities. That is the goal of “Harmonious
Growth” and what I regard as corporate virtue. – Hiroshi Okuda, Chairman
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
1. What do Toyota’s guiding principles mean for its management system? In particular, how
do they reflect the principles of total quality?
2. Many health care organizations have learned from manufacturing companies in their
quality journey. What can nonmanufacturing companies learn and apply from Toyota’s
philosophy and practices? Suggest specific things that education and government might learn.
9.4 Instructions
•
•
Read case study and answer the questions.
Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below
Evaluating Variance from Standard CostsDiscuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Product influencers come in all types. From Instagram influencers to opinion leaders, many of our purchases are led by others. Address the following questions in your Critical Thinking assignment.
Why is an opinion leader a more credible source of product information than an advertisement for the product? Are there any circumstances in which information from advertisements is likely to be more influential than word-of-mouth?
How can marketers use social networks, brand communities, and weblogs to locate new customers and target them?
How can companies strategically use buzz agents and viral marketing? Illustrate with examples.
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 4 to 5 pages in length, which does not include the required title and reference pages, which are never a part of the content minimum requirements.
APA style guidelines.
Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles unless the assignment calls for more.
Review the Sandora Company Case Study and your Week 2 Summative Assessment.
Assume your project team, including stakeholders, is unfamiliar with risk management and needs an overview of risk management principles. You need to train the team so that they understand why the organization needs to address certain risks.
Using the risks identified in your Week 2 Summative Assessment and instructor feedback, create a 10- to 12-slide presentation that includes the following information:
An enhanced, high-level risk matrix of previously identified risks with value or cost of incidence and recommended mitigation strategies to reduce the risks
An outline of a remediation and risk reduction plan
Note: This will be used in your Week 6 Summative Assessment.
A discussion of the business value (cost of each risk happening) for each of the major stakeholders (loss of revenue, market share, goodwill, etc.)
A recommendation of at least 4 project management strategies to meet the organization’s goals as outlined in the case study
Record yourself giving the presentation as if your team will watch it at a later time. Recording ideas:
Use the recording feature and prompts in Microsoft PowerPoint.
Set up a meeting in Microsoft Teams and record your session. You can ask others to join your meeting or present to an empty meeting.
Use Microsoft Stream to record and upload to Blackboard. (You can upload MP4s to Microsoft Stream.)
Use a platform of your choice, as long as you are able to provide a link to your presentation.
Submit your video (either a link or an embedded .mp4), along with your presentation in Blackboard.
Assessment Support
“Record Your Screen in PowerPoint” from Microsoft.
Recording a Microsoft Teams Meeting
View the transcript for “Recording a Microsoft Teams Meeting.”
Submitting a Microsoft Teams Recording to Blackboard
View the transcript for “Submitting a Microsoft Teams Recording to Blackboard.”
Using Microsoft Stream: Recording a Screen or Video
View the transcript for “Using Microsoft Stream: Recording a Screen or Video.”
Resources
Center for Writing Excellence
Reference and Citation Generator
Grammar Assistance
Note: Sandora Company Case Study from Project Management Case Studies (6th ed.). (pp. 429–432), by H. Kerzner, 2022, John Wiley & Sons. Copyright 2022 by John Wiley & Sons. Reprinted with permission.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.Solutions would be given to the tutor to rewrite them in proper way including explanations and justifications
This is a project. The organization I choosed is ” UMCSSA” The University of Manitoba Chinese Students and Scholars Association. Only need to finish 1 to 3 components.
The components of a marketing plan are:
1. Background, Organization, Purpose, Focus
2. Situation Analysis
3. Priority Audience
4. Set Behavior Objectives and Goals
5. Barriers, Benefits, Motivators, Competition, and Influential Others
6. Positioning Statement
7. Marketing Intervention Mix: 4Ps Strategies
8. Determine An Evaluation Plan
9. Establish A Campaign Budget and Find Funding
10. Outline An Implementation Plan
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Chapter 6: Step 3: Selecting Priority
Audiences
Steps in Selecting Priority
Audiences (1 of 2)
1. Segment the Market
• Division into smaller groups.
• Common attitudes about wants, needs, and so
on.
2. Evaluate Segments
• Variety of factors (e.g., size, ability to reach,
how receptive they might)
– Helps prioritize the segments.
– Helps eliminating some segments.
2
Steps in Selecting Priority
Audiences (2 of 2)
3. Select a Priority Segment
• One or a few segments is ideal:
– Helps develop a rich profile.
– Inspires unique campaign strategies.
• Numerous benefits.
– Increased effectiveness.
– Increased efficiency.
– Input for resource allocation.
– Input for developing strategies.
– Addressing equity.
3
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (1 of 8)
Traditional Variables
• Demographic segmentation:
– Variables common to census forms.
– The best predictors of needs, wants, and so on.
– Easiest way to find a priority segment.
• Geographic segmentation.
• Psychographic segmentation.
• Behavior segmentation.
4
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (2 of 8)
Stages of Change Variables (The
transtheoretical model)
• Precontemplation.
• Contemplation.
• Preparation.
• Action.
• Maintenance.
• Termination.
5
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (3 of 8)
Diffusion of Innovation: Social Marketing
Version
• Innovators
• Early Adopters
• Early Majority
• Late Majority
• Laggards
6
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (4 of 8)
Healthstyles Segmentation
• Several segmentation variables
(demographics, psychographics,
knowledge, attitudes, and current
behaviors related to personal health).
• Rich picture of priority audience.
7
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (5 of 8)
Environmental Segmentation
• National studies by Maibach et al.
– Six distinct groups: Alarmed, Concerned,
Cautious, Disengaged, Doubtful, Dismissive
8
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (6 of 8)
Generational Segmentation
• Profoundly influential: The influences may
come from music, movies, politics,
technological advances, economics, and
defining events, such as the COVID-19
pandemic.
• Seven cohorts:
– Tradionalists, Baby boomers, Gen X, Gen
Y, Millennials, and Gen Alpha.
9
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (7 of 8)
Segmenting Midstream and Upstream
• Midstream audiences.
• Upstream audiences.
10
Variables Used to Segment
Markets (8 of 8)
Combination of Variables
• Primary base.
• Show me. Help me. Make me.
11
Criteria for Evaluating
Segments
• Segment size.
• Problem incidence.
• Problem severity.
• Defenselessness.
• Reachability.
• General responsiveness.
• Incremental costs.
• Responsiveness to marketing intervention mix.
• Organizational capabilities.
12
How Priority Audiences Are
Selected
• Budgeting.
• Evaluation criteria:
– Greatest need.
– Greatest readiness for action.
– Easiest and least costly to reach.
– Best match.
13
Ethical Considerations When
Selecting Priority Audiences
• Providing objective data.
• Checking implicit bias.
14
Chapter 5: Steps 1 & 2: Social Issue,
DEI Considerations, Purpose, Focus,
Situation Analysis
Step 1: Describe Social Issue, DEI
Considerations, Background,
Purpose, and Focus (1 of 4)
Social Issue, DEI Considerations, and
Background
• Identify the social issue (e.g., public health
problem, safety concern, environmental
threat, or community need).
• Identify the organization.
• Present the information.
2
Step 1: Describe Social Issue, DEI
Considerations, Background,
Purpose, and Focus (2 of 4)
Purpose
• Answering questions like “What is the potential
impact of a successful campaign?” and “What
difference will it make?”
• Difference from objectives/ goals:
– Objective: what is to be done (behavior objective,
knowledge objective, and belief objective)
– Goals: a desired level of behavior change;
quantifiable and measurable.
– Purpose: ultimate impact/benefit.
3
Step 1: Describe Social Issue, DEI
Considerations, Background,
Purpose, and Focus (3 of 4)
Focus
• Each purpose statement leads to a
different focus.
• Selected to narrow the scope of the plan.
4
Step 1: Describe Social Issue, DEI
Considerations, Background,
Purpose, and Focus (4 of 4)
Focus
• Criteria:
– Behavior change potential.
– Market supply : Is this area of focus already being
addressed adequately in this way by other
organizations and campaigns?
– Organizational match.
– Funding sources and appeal.
– Impact: finding the greatest potential to
contribute.
5
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (1 of 6)
The Microenvironment
• Resources:
– Levels of funding.
– Adequacy of staff.
– Access to expertise.
• Service delivery capabilities:
– Availability of distribution channels.
– Concerns, if any, with current or potential quality of service
delivery.
• Management support:
– Organizational management’s support for the project.
– Briefing the management.
• Issue priority:
– Prioritizing the social issue within the organization.
– Competing issues, if any.
6
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (2 of 6)
• Internal publics: Organizational people or
groups in favor or and against the
program.
• Current alliances and partners: Alliances
and partners of the organization for
provision of additional resources.
• Past performance: Successes and failures
of the organization in regard to projects
such as this.
7
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (3 of 6)
Strengths
– List the major organizational strengths.
– Maximize the points from this list.
Weaknesses
– List the major organizational weaknesses.
– Minimize the points from this list.
8
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (4 of 6)
The Macroenvironment
• Forces outside the marketer’s influence.
– Cultural forces.
– Technological forces.
– Demographic forces.
– Natural forces.
– Economic forces.
– Political/legal forces.
– External publics.
9
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (5 of 6)
Opportunities
• Purpose of scanning: to discover
opportunities.
• Visibility and resources.
Threats
• Potential threats.
• Understanding influences.
10
Step 2: Conduct Situation Analysis,
Review Prior Efforts (6 of 6)
Review Prior Efforts
• Search and review.
• Sharing research, plans.
11
The Role of Exploratory Research
When Choosing Focus
• Exploratory research assists in making
decisions regarding the purpose and focus
of your plan (step 1) and in identifying
strengths and weaknesses (step 2).
• It helps with step 3 (priority audiences)
and 5 (priority audience barriers, benefits,
motivators; the competition; and influential
others) as well.
12
Ethical Considerations When
Choosing Focus
• Ethical dilemmas and challenges.
– Varied ethical considerations.
– Common themes:
• Social equity
• Unintended consequences
• Competing priorities
• Full disclosure
• Responsible stewardship
• Conflicts of interest
• Whether the end justifies means
13
1. No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference . 2. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font . 3. No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism. 4. No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment 5. the reference must be 5 to7 6. the answer should be sufficient 7. Please read and follow the instructions in the attached file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market,
hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment
manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail
products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute
some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends
upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply
Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in
these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply
chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing
stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business
become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products /
service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and
deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one
country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2
or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images
to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its
basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated
supply chain. What is the SCM model used? (2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s
products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable.
(2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by
your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are
effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable
and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide
your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the
future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your
chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
-you must include at least 5 references -format your reference using APA style
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship. Answer the following question: 1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks) 2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their company that resonate with customers? (2 marks) 3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan for the company? (2 marks) 4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its relationships with customers? (2marks) 5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their company’s Web site? (2 marks) The Answer must follow the outline points below: Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.Reference Note: You can support your answer with the course book. You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
XXXXX
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:11573
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:Dr Karim Garrouch
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Module 09: Evaluating Variance from Standard Costs
Evaluating Variance from Standard Costs
Discuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in
managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can
they be addressed?
Directions:
•
Cite your textbooks and cite 2 peer reviewed articles.
•
Textbook name: Managerial Accounting by Carl S. Warren and
William B. Tayler 2020
Warren, C. S., & Tayler, W. B. (2020). Managerial Accounting.
•
Cengage.
•
Read: Chapter 9 in Managerial Accounting
•
The paper should address all components of the question with a 500
word limit
•
No plagiarism
•
The main sources is textbook
•
Headers for each part
1
LEAD LIKE LINCOLN
How to lead like
Abraham Lincoln,
according to a
Harvard historian
AP PHOTO
This undated illustration depicts President Abraham Lincoln making his Gettysburg Address at
the dedication of the Gettysburg National Cemetery on the battlefield at Gettysburg, Pa.,…
By Nancy F. Koehn
Historian, Harvard Business School
July 30, 2018
Record numbers of first-time candidates are staking their claim in
midterm contests all over the country. These people include Native
Americans, combat veterans, members of the LGBTQ community, and
women from both parties. As various pundits and entrenched
2
politicians deride these newcomers, we must remember that many of
our greatest leaders were once unknown and largely untested.
Few people better personified this transformation than Abraham
Lincoln, who had less than a year of formal schooling. As I explain in
my latest book, through ongoing self-education, he made himself into
a skilled attorney, one of the best writers and orators in American
history, and our most revered president. His life’s journey was not
smooth or easy; indeed, Lincoln failed much more frequently than he
succeeded. However, what he learned during his tragedies and
triumphs, including the importance of making tough choices when the
stakes are high, can help rising leaders today.
Here are some of the most important leadership principles we can
glean from Lincoln’s example:
1. Know your mission
2. Look widely at the big picture
3. Focus on no more than three things
4. Solicit advice widely, but take ultimate
responsibility:
5. Be Aware of the trade–offs:
6. Understand the power of doing nothing
7. When critics attack, you must hold the line
Assignment
Read “Abraham Lincoln’s Challenge” in Forged in Crisis. Select one
of the seven leadership principles listed by Nancy Koehn. In a 1-2
page paper, translate 1 principle into three actions demonstrated by
President Lincoln in the reading.
Do not copy from Google, do not resemble another student, adhere to the conditions of the file, and deliver it on time
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Week 9: Interactive Activity
9.1. Content Introduction
Learning Outcomes
1.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy
implementation
2.
Gain insights into the strategy-making processes of different types of
organizations
9.2. Reading
Required
Chapter 7. Strategy Formation: Corporate Strategy
Textbook: Wheelen, T. L., Hunger, D., Hoffman, A. N., & Bamford, C. E.
(2014). Concepts in strategic management and business policy (14th ed.).
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN-13: 9780133126129 (print),
9780133126433 (e-text)
Recommended
Andersson, H., & Janson, G. (2012). Evaluating a corporate strategy: A case study of
Länsförsäkringar. Available
via https://stud.epsilon.slu.se/4453/1/Andersson_et_al_120703.pdf
9.3. Test your knowledge (Max 100 words for every question)
Question 1
How is corporate parenting different from portfolio analysis? How is it alike? Is it a
useful concept in a global industry?
Question 2
What are the tradeoffs between an internal and an external growth strategy? Which
approach is best as an international entry strategy?
9.4. Instructions
•
Answer both questions in the test your knowledge section.
•
Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion
link below (week 8: interactive learning activity).
Important Notes:This is an individual assignment. You must include at least 5 reAll references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 14692
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Mohammed Mallick
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
1) Share a link to recent news article regarding a brand, digital marketing, a brand’s digital marketing, and/or anything we’re learning in class.2) Briefly summarize the news and share your thoughts and opinions (For instance, is this good or bad news for customers? Is this a good idea? Is this an innovative strategy? Does the idea totally suck? Is it tone deaf? Is this a step in the right or wrong direction for the brand?)
Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit
LINK THE BOOK HTTPS://DRIVE.GOOGLE.COM/FILE/D/15QIXFK9UJZC0TTK7J…
Module 09: Discussion
Module 09: Discussion
Change Agents
Are you a change agent?
Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization.
Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance.
Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).
Finally, discuss the challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).
Make sure your content is from YOUR Point of View and that you are not just using words from your references. I need to see your examples of YOU!
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
Discussion Rubric Discussion Rubric – Alternative Formats
Introduction to Inductive and Deductive Reasoning:
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Discuss the difference between Deductive and Inductive reasoning with example.
-Case Analysis (Sorry, You’re Too Smart)
Have you ever been turned down for a job because you were “overqualified”?
Although this may sound like a compliment, it can be disappointing when you are job hunting. Consider applicants who are turned down for jobs because they are “too smart.” This could be determined by pre-employment testing or the interviewer may assume applicants’ cognitive ability based on education level, GPA, or certifications. You don’t often hear someone say that an applicant is “too emotionally intelligent” or “too physically coordinated.” So why does it matter if you are overqualified in cognitive ability?
Employers may argue that cognitively overqualified employees will not perform well in their jobs. The lack of challenge they feel in the job tasks could make them bored and unmotivated and then lead to low performance. In fact, research shows that cognitively overqualified employees perform just as well as other employees, but not necessarily better. If the employees are in leadership positions and are cognitively overqualified, they perform better than other leaders. So if someone tries to tell you that you won’t perform well if you are cognitively overqualified, that’s not a fact.
Employers may also argue that employees who are cognitively overqualified for their jobs will have higher job dissatisfaction. Specifically, they may be dissatisfied with the wages, challenges, and potential for career advancement. In short, these employees see the gap between their current and potential situations and that makes them unhappy at work.
We all don’t have intelligence tests when we are employed, so what about when you perceive you are overqualified in your cognitive skills, but don’t have actual test scores to support your assumption? Employees who perceive they are cognitively overqualified tend to actually be correct. They also tend to have higher levels of openness to experience personality trait from the Big Five model.
7.3 Test your knowledge:(Questions)
1. An interviewer who assumes you have a certain average cognitive ability level because she knows your level of education would be correct according to what test?
2. According to the case, what might a company do to raise job satisfaction and retain employees who are cognitively overqualified?
link the book Stevenson,_W_J_Operations_management_14th_ed_McGraw_Hill_Mcgraw.pdf
– I went over the format for this assignment
-Introduction paragraph
-Respond to each question in the assignment each with an APA heading.
-Conclusion
-Reference – APA style
– with 3 references peer reviewed at least and book source
Module 09: Discussion
Control Charts
Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.
What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?
-an example.
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
Link book https://drive.google.com/file/d/11BY-KprsWjEQzuINj…
Module 09 Discussion
Module 09 Discussion
Evaluating Variance from Standard Costs
Discuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?
– I went over the format for this assignment
-Introduction paragraph
-Respond to each question in the assignment each with an APA heading.
-Conclusion
-Reference – APA style
– with 3 references peer reviewed at least and book source
-an example of the concept.
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
Greeting bro,I need your support to solve the attached file assignment, please follow the instructions and avoid pilgrims also I will provide you in the next message with course material that will help you to answer the assignment file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organization Design and Development (MGT 404)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT404
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained:
Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the basic steps of the organizational development process.
2. Evaluate the strategic role of change in the organization and its impact on
organizational performance.
3. Analyze the human, structural and strategic dimensions of organizational
development.
Assignment Question(s):
You are a management consultant at Miri & Co Partners; you receive an email from one
of your long-term clients stating as follows:
“Following an overhaul of the company and a shift from the conventional model to
telecommuting, several challenges have emerged. First, the majority of the
departments are not meeting their monthly targets. This follows an introduction of
a policy that the most productive employees will receive a monthly bonus.
Secondly, numerous conflicts are emerging from the finance departments. We need
an urgent solution to increase the productivity of this department.” Answer the
following questions:
1. How can the company improve group awareness in the company? (2 marks)
2. What are the disadvantages of restructuring based on functional structure? (2
marks)
3. Should the reward system be individual-based, or group based? (2 marks)
4. What is the role of executive leadership in transformational change? (2 marks)
5. Finally, provide a workable solution to the client in not more than 200 words. (2
marks)
Note:
•
•
•
Use the concepts developed in this course in your answers.
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
make sure to avoid plagiarism as much as possible.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT425-Spreadsheet Decision Modeling
Due Date: 11/11/2023 (End of Week-11) @ 23:59
Course Name: Spreadsheet Decision
Modeling
Course Code: MGT425
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023-2024 (1445 H)
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 15 Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Aligned (PLOs)
MGT.K.1
(1.1)
MGT.K.3
(1.2)
MGT.S.1
(2.1)
MGT.V.1
(3.1)
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Question
Find some structured ways of dealing with complex managerial
decision problems.
Explain simple decision models and management science ideas
that provide powerful and (often surprising) qualitative insight
about large spectrum of managerial problems.
Demonstrate the tools for deciding when and which decision
models to use for specific problems.
Build an understanding of the kind of problems that is tackled
using Spreadsheet Modeling and decision analysis.
Question- 2.
Question- 1
Question-4
Question-3
Assignment Instructions:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the Search Bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach for Sustainable Supplier
Selection under Vague Environment: A Case Study.
Author: Huiyun Lu , Shaojun Jiang , Wenyan Song, Xinguo Ming
Date: 26 July 2018
Assignment Questions: (Marks 15)
Read the above case study and answer the following Questions:
Question 1: Explain the decision-making approach discussed in this case
study (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 2: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making
process involving subjectivity and vagueness? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 3: Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for
manufacturing companies. (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 4: What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to
course and beneficial for you? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Answers:
1
2
3
4
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1
Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction, personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2
Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:-
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3.How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative. (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your answers on the basis of your understanding.
4.Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks, goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task, goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
5.Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN: 11206
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdullah Bubshait
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Paragraph one – Naming the team with a name related to the field of healthy food.
Paragraph two – Writing the names of the female students and their roles.
Paragraph three – Writing the name of each member and their personal goals for joining the team.
Paragraph four – The overall goal of the team and when you consider yourselves truly successful, answering about success on all levels, not just success in partnering with the Chinese brand. “The criteria for success vary from team to team,” and the doctor emphasized that we have taken in one of the previous units the criteria for success and failure defined by the team.
Paragraph five – Answer the 5 stages in team building found in the link provided in the assignment for more information, including them as part of the sources.
1- FORMING
2- STORMING
3- NORMING
4- PERFORMING
5- ADJOURNING
In this question, we are discussing the different stages in our selection of team members. Have we worked together before? Is this our first time working together? How did we overcome the initial barriers, and what strategies or methods did we follow for communication and discussion? (The first time we work together, we don’t know each other beforehand).
The second question:
Paragraph one – What was the main virtual tool we used as a virtual team to communicate and complete the assigned work? Provide an example (e.g., Blackboard, Zoom, Teams, Asana, Trello, Miro). Preferably, choose something different from Blackboard, Teams, and Zoom; the professor suggested searching online for another program.
Also, the second tool (Complimentary) used for informal communication, such as (WhatsApp, Telegram, Snapchat). The required image should not be from the internet; it should be something that actually proves our use of these tools. Provide a screenshot of each tool in use (very important for our names to be visible).
Paragraph two – We must use one of the features available in one of the tools we use and attach a screenshot. For example, sharing the screen during a meeting or presenting a specific file, and discuss it.
Paragraph three – Why did we choose this tool, for example, Zoom, and not Blackboard, and others? What distinguishes the program we chose from others?
Paragraph four – Assuming we have a budget of 10,000… what are the tools available in the market that can serve as a virtual team? Provide only one example.
Paragraph five – How many times did we meet as a virtual team? Attach images from our meetings at different times and indicate the duration of the meeting.
Paragraph six – We search for the Meeting Minutes and explain how it served the team. Create one and include it with the answer, including the date of one of the meetings we had, the time, who attended and who was absent, the agenda, what we discussed, and the action plan for the team.The fourth question:
Paragraph one – Propose a strategy for the success of the marketing campaign for the Chinese company in the healthy food sector.
Paragraph two – 300 words explaining the strategy, including an introduction, the strategy’s overview, and its conclusion (including how to reach the target audience).
Paragraph three – The strategy should include statistics about the Saudi market in the healthy food sector.
Paragraph four – A 200-word response from the representative of the Chinese company to the proposed strategy. Is it suitable for them or not, and why?
Paragraph five – Team members should mention their observations and feedback on the feedback received from the Chinese team’s representative. If there are no comments, express gratitude and begin working with them.
The fifth question:
In 100 words, explain whether our team’s strategy succeeded or failed and talk about our teamwork and how it was. Also, suggest what we can do to improve in the future and so on.
Regarding the sources, as per the professor’s requirements:
– The sources should not be older than 2019, except for the book since it’s an older version.
– The link mentioned in the assignment about team building stages should be included in the sources.
– Only two additional sources are allowed, and they should not be older than 2019.
For each question, the answer should be in a direct format, not as paragraphs. If the project is in the form of paragraphs, two marks will be deducted from each paragraph in the project. (Each question should have its direct answer).
the title for my project
Healthy food
:
1- Team manager: alhanouf
2- Representative: fatimah
3- Technical support expert: manal
4- General member: Tahera
5- General member :zainab
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Names:
Student IDs:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Course Title: Introduction to Virtual
Management
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024 _1st
Term
6.
Course Code: ECOM 201
Instructor Name:
Assignment: 3 Project Presentation- GROUP X
Student Grade:
out of 10
CRN: XXXXXX
Grade Level: High/ Middle / Low
2
The Virtual Team
1. Name:
2. Roles:
3. Collective goal:
3
The Virtual Tool
1.
2.
3.
The Virtual Work Dynamics
1. Virtual Office:
2. Virtual communication:
3. Challenges:
4
5
The Proposed Reports
1.
2.
3.
General Suggestions for Future Teams
1.
2.
3.
6
7
Pictures of Your Virtual Team Process
8
Thank You!
Questions & Feedback
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
“That’s not my job!” “My boss won’t let me.” “Let me go ask my supervisor.” “That’s outside my authority.” We’ve all heard reasons why we are unable to complete a task. Chances are, they are very real reasons that are impeding our progress toward change. To make our change efforts effective, we must be sure we are supporting and empowering the individuals in our group to actually do what we are asking them to do.
Specific questions or items to address:
Read Step 5 “Empower Action” from Kotter and Cohen’s The Heart of Change. First, review the feedback from your instructor on Part 5. Use any new information you gained from the discussion and feedback from your instructor to revise and improve Part 5 of your project. Next, compile Part 6 of your project, explaining what actions you and your team will take to empower people to take action. How will you remove boss barriers, system barriers, information barriers, and barriers of the mind? How will you ‘retool’ the boss? You may find page 121 helpful in reviewing the key points of what to do and not do when empowering action. Be sure your paper touches on the key elements of each as they pertain to your organization.
Be sure to include at least three scholarly references to support your assertions written in your own words. Do not copy word for word from the course text or any other sources. Your submission this week is Part 6 of the final project.
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
Write between 1,000 – 1,500 words (approximately 4 – 6 pages) using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments. The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and non-credible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
Primary sources such as, government websites (United States Department of Labor Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library) and Google Scholar.
Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs, etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased words, values, etc.) in the paper and list on a reference page in APA style.
View your assignment rubric.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Stage for Change in South Carolina Department Corrections
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
September 19, 2023
2
Set the Stage for Change South Carolina Department Corrections
Humans have a natural tendency to prefer established ways of doing things, so it’s understandable
that there may be times when the idea of making a change doesn’t appeal. Companies, remarkably,
all have a similar resistance to change, based on the mistaken notion that their tried-and-true
practices are best. However, in today’s unrelenting corporate scene, change continues to be
unyieldingly rapid, resisting stasis. The very nature of the world is in a constant state of flux, as
shown by demographic shifts, changing tastes among consumers, new discoveries in science and
technology, and a dynamic and ever-evolving economic system. Companies that refuse to change
run the danger of becoming irrelevant in today’s economy (Von Treuer et al., 2018). This paper
will examine the areas within the South Carolina Department of Corrections that need change in
further detail here. In addition, will discuss practical measures the organization may take to aid in
and enhance the change process, so ensuring its continuous viability and efficacy in an everevolving global environment.
South Carolina Department Corrections (SCDC)
The PayScale system was one of the crucial areas where adjustments needed to be made inside the
company. Employee salary is mostly determined by the PayScale, which takes into account factors
including a worker’s rank, length of service, and the difficulty of their job responsibilities, among
others (Temgire & Joshi, 2021). Unfortunately, this company failed to fully realize the benefits of
PayScale, which resulted in resentment among workers who felt their pay did not fairly represent
their efforts. The result was a higher rate of employee turnover as a whole. To forestall more
departures and strengthen the company as a whole, it became clear that the PayScale system needed
to be adjusted.
3
There was also an absence of incentives; workers were not provided with any extra prizes. Reduced
employee motivation is typically linked to a lack of incentives, which in turn leads to lower
productivity and worse quality work. Incentives are crucial in encouraging workers to give their
all at work. To make up for this deficiency, the company should implement a tiered incentive
scheme, rewarding top performers more than those who produce just adequate performance. This
method guarantees that all workers are motivated to work hard for more pay, which improves
productivity as a whole. In addition, the company needed a thorough plan for keeping its current
staff members.
Successful retention strategies focus on keeping excellent employees while also effectively
controlling attrition. Those with longer tenures in the company should be given preference when
making retention choices. Experience and, by extension, quality, increase with time on the job.
South Carolina Department of Corrections has to establish efficient techniques in the area of
personnel retention in order to reap the rewards of doing so (Packard, 2021). The South Carolina
Department of Corrections was chosen for this research on purpose because its recent history is
illustrative of the kinds of revolutionary transformations seen at similar institutions. Several
operational procedures may be implemented by the South Carolina Department of Corrections to
facilitate the smooth implementation of these crucial improvements.
Igniting the Need for Change
The belief that changes is necessary may serve as a crucial driver for an organization’s
achievement. The act of increasing public knowledge and understanding of prevalent problems
and presenting feasible remedies has the potential to attract significant backing (Laig & Abocejo,
2021). The cultivation of a sense of urgency inside SCDC may be facilitated by the initiation of
4
open debates pertaining to the existing status of the organization and its prospective
transformational trajectory.
Forging a Dynamic Coalition
A concerted group effort is required before setting off on a path of complete transformation.
SCDC should proactively form a diverse coalition made up of people from all areas of the
organization with different backgrounds, experiences, and points of view. To secure broad
support for the coming change, it is crucial to form this alliance among other workers.
Crafting a Vision for Change
The implementation of a sophisticated change program may provide challenges for employees
occupying lower hierarchical positions within a company, since they may have difficulties in
adapting to the new program. In order to get the endorsement of one’s team, it is essential to
effectively communicate a comprehensible and compelling vision that resonates with all members.
The clarity and simplicity with which a topic is conveyed are as significant as the concept itself.
Effectively Communicating the Vision
Once the vision has been established, it is critical that it be communicated effectively across the
business. To increase the effectiveness of this message dissemination, the developed coalition
may be used to tap into its many contacts within the organization.
Overcoming Obstacles
Although the first stages are of utmost importance, maintaining an attentive attitude to identify
potential obstacles is crucial. Various factors such as human behavior, societal standards, legal
frameworks, and physical barriers might impede the progress of growth. The South Carolina
Department of Corrections (SCDC) must proactively anticipate these challenges and effectively
5
address them in order to mitigate the potential for extensive disruption, using a meticulous
allocation of its available resources.
Cultivating Short-Term Triumphs
It is important to highlight the advantages of the new method via short-term triumphs in order to
retain excitement and avoid disenchantment. These checkpoints serve as inspiration, but also as
guides for what to do next. Employees are reenergized and their dedication to the change is
maintained as a result of such successes.
Sustaining and Expanding Change
When early goals are achieved, complacency may sometimes build in, which can contribute to the
collapse of the transformation endeavor. According to the findings of Kotter’s study (Kotter &
Cohen, 2012), effective companies intentionally cultivate change and work to integrate it into their
day-to-day operations. On a consistent basis, new objectives and evaluations of the potential for
progress need to be formulated.
Embedding Change in Organizational Values
Changing a company’s culture requires more than just a shift in daily rituals and practices.
Transformation that lasts must be integrated into the very fabric of the business. To make change
stick, SCDC needs buy-in from key decision-makers, training for new staff, and proper
recognition and reward of change champions.
Conclusion
This strategy provides the South Carolina Department of Corrections (SCDC) with a systematic
and comprehensive method for handling the challenges of transition. By adhering to these eight
guidelines, SCDC will be able to foster a culture of change that will make it more flexible, resilient,
and relevant in the face of change. Adopting a sense of urgency, forming coalitions, developing a
6
vision, and communicating it effectively provide the groundwork for a successful transformation,
which is then maintained via the identification of obstacles, celebration of quick victories, and the
fostering of continuous change. Putting an organization’s principles at the center of its
transformation makes it permanent. SCDC recognizes that its dedication to this process is not only
a strategic requirement, but also a necessary method to enable its personnel, increase productivity,
and successfully carry out its goal.
7
REFERENCES
Laig, R. B. D., & Abocejo, F. T. (2021). Change Management Process in a Mining Company:
Kotter’s 8-Step Change Model. Organization, 5(3), 31-50.
Packard, T. (2021). Change Models for Human Service Organizations. Organizational Change
for the Human Services, 292–309. https://doi.org/10.1093/oso/9780197549995.003.0019
Von Treuer, K., Karantzas, G., McCabe, M., Mellor, D., Konis, A., Davison, T. E., & O’Connor,
D. (2018). Organizational factors associated with readiness for change in residential aged
care settings. BMC health services research, 18(1), 1-6.
1
Strategies for Change
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor: Dr. Adam Vaughn
September 26, 2023
2
Strategies for Change – Week 2 (Assignment 1)
Step-1- Increasing Urgency
Particularly, the need for an organization-wide sense of urgency during a change
creates the motivation needed to move away from the present state towards a new state.
Creating a sense of urgency is the first step in Kotter’s 8-step model for change. This step is
crucial to change management as the perception of urgent change results in an organization
establishing a change vision. A lack of urgency results in complacency towards proposed
changes, where there is no desire for better results. Really, urgency is key to justifying the
need for change and acting on it, immediately. Therefore, there is a need for the South
Carolina Department of Corrections (SCDC) to ensure creativity and honest communication
so as to find solutions to the areas of change required. The prerequisites for these changes
include new ideas, new ways of thinking, collaboration, continuous learning, finding
opportunities in crisis, and the implementation of innovative strategies (Friedberg &
Pregmark, 2022). Change efforts must incorporate organizational capabilities to adapt and
innovate.
The Need for Large-Scale Change at SCDC
The corrections sector is one of the three principal components of the criminal justice
system. Thus, there is a need for large-scale change at SCDC to ensure that the department
serves its purpose of retribution, deterrence, incapacitation, and rehabilitation (Russo et al.,
2017). Keller & Schaninger (2019) note that an organization must stir its staff around
enduring transformation themes and measure improvements to scale up. At SCDC, employee
turnover is attributed to the PayScale, where employees feel that the payment system does not
fully represent their efforts in the department. There is also another problem of a lack of
incentives, which is linked to reduced employee motivation and consequently lower
3
productivity. The department needs to work on ways to motivate employees and ensure high
retention in the workplace, which will definitely reflect in the levels of productivity.
Level of Urgency at SCDC
From the above problems at SCDC, there is a low level of urgency observed in
dealing with the problems. Usually, a high level of urgency ensures that there is a balance
between identifying problems, acknowledging them, and finding solutions very quickly. The
management must comprehend that creating a sense of agency has benefits for the
department’s productivity and motivation. At SCDC, employees show a high level of
resentment of the payment system, which can be attributed to the high employee turnover.
In addition, there are no incentives given to the employees to motivate them at SCDC,
leading to low morale. The organizational climate shows that the department deflects
urgency, resulting in the frustration and untrusting nature of the employees to the extent that
the levels of productivity have dropped. Urgency in solving persistent negative issues in an
organization is what is needed. In cases like these, employees make assumptions that the
management does not care about their issues. There is nothing as stressful to dedicated
employees as the management that avoids taking action on issues that have been tabled.
Dealing with the problem of insufficient urgency
First, for organizations that prioritize true urgency in solving issues they face, they see
both opportunities and threats as a chance to do better. True urgency is not just the creation of
a miracle, however, it is the need to solve issues, no matter the circumstances. This requires
hyper-alert behaviors where the management looks for ways to get things right, even if it is
just making statements that move the organization toward a positive and productive direction.
Complacency is dangerous for an organization.
4
Kotter (2008) notes that there is a need to acknowledge what is going on in the
organization and the issues being presented. Things like the productivity of the employees is
a key concern, therefore, employees and what they are doing in the organization should be
assessed carefully. Employee turnover needs to be evaluated. It is not hard to see the
happenings in an organization when there is attention to detail.
I am a naturally action-oriented person, which means whenever I observe a lack of
urgency to solve issues, I am always looking for ways to deal with the issues and make
necessary changes that will bring significant and positive impact. It is indeed frustrating to
deal with unresolved issues everyday at work. Therefore, I will ensure I am a beacon of true
agency for the department. I will help the department manager to see the reality of issues
facing the department such as low productivity and employee turnover. I will also propose a
possible solution such as coming up with a payment system that acknowledges and rewards
employees according to their efforts in the workplace. This in itself is acting with a sense of
urgency. This does not need to be in the form of lecturing the management or confronting
them, but rather showing them what needs to be done. The aim is to create urgency by
addressing the root causes of the issues and deviating the focus from the symptoms. For
instance, some questions to ask can include•
Why are employees resentful?
•
What is affecting the levels of productivity in the department?
•
Why do employees show low morale?
These questions are a good starting point for establishing a good attitude in resolving
the issues in the department. They reflect why it is important to attack the causes of the issues
rather than what the symptoms are and link the insufficient urgency to the results that the
department is trying to achieve. It is like an opportunity in crisis. Furthermore, I will steer
5
honest conversations about the issues the department is facing. Task clarification is important
for enhancing communication with the rest of the departmental staff. It is important to avoid
going off as it may make issues worse and harm the management’s need for activating a sense
of agency. The management must fully grasp the effects of the proposed changes and the real
consequences when no action is taken. In addition, recognize the effects of rewarding positive
changes taken by employees, which demonstrates that moving forward is beneficial for them.
6
References
Fredberg, T., & Pregmark, J. E. (2022). Organizational transformation: Handling the doubleedged sword of urgency. Long Range Planning, 55(2), 102091.
Keller, S., & Schaninger, B. (2019). A better way to lead large-scale change. McKinsey &
Company, 251-220.
Kotter, J. P. (2008). An astonishing lack of urgency (and what you can do about it). Harvard
Business Review. Retrieved from https://hbr.org/2008/10/an-astonishing-lack-ofurgency
Russo, J., Drake, G. B., Shaffer, J. S., & Jackson, B. A. (2017). Envisioning an alternative
future for the corrections sector within the US criminal justice system. Rand
Corporation.
1
Team Building
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
October 3, 2023
2
Team Building
The necessity for change is a constant in the dynamic environment of today’s enterprises.
Organizational change is essential for keeping competitive and relevant, whether it’s to adjust to
market developments, adopt new technology, or react to changing client needs. However, change
is not something that can be accomplished alone; rather, it calls for the establishment of an
experienced and unified leadership group. The success or failure of the change program hinges on
the performance of this team, since they are its driving force and engine. In this research, will
explore the critical function of a leadership team in bringing about organizational transformation.
It emphasizes the importance of personal drive and motivation but also the transforming potential
of a well-organized and inspired team. This paper intends to empower organizational leaders with
the insights and techniques required to build a leading team that not only starts change, but also
ensures its success by focusing on five important components.
Displaying Enthusiasm and Dedication
Leaders must be enthusiastic and committed to reform. These attributes spark collective
imagination and dedication. Leadership enthusiasm and determination will decide the reform
effort’s success or failure. My unwavering belief in the idea has helped the team realize its
potential. When I exhibit excitement for the task, team members are more motivated and engaged.
One person’s zeal may inspire others to join the cause. My purpose is to share my passion in many
3
ways. Frequent meetings or workshops may discuss the change initiative’s goals, benefits, and
business impacts. I’ll use stories to connect with my team and show our potential. I’ll also
emphasize personal-corporate alignment. I may motivate my team by stressing the learning,
growth, and promotion possibilities the transformation effort will give. I’ll also listen to the team’s
feedback to demonstrate my commitment (Wade & Macpherson, 2016). My commitment to the
initiative’s success proves my words. I will set the tone by working hard and boldly tackling
difficulties. I aim to inspire individuals to gladly join our change path via open communication,
achievement recognition, and a shared purpose.
Modeling Trust and Teamwork
Effective team-wide change management requires trust. Trust encourages honest
discussion, collaboration, and less resistance throughout transitions. If team members don’t trust
one other, they may be hesitant to speak out and stall the change effort. I will always be honest in
my actions and words to exemplify workplace trust and collaboration. Transparency requires
sharing information about the change, its reasons, and its impacts. I define consistency as acting
on my claims. Showing my passion for the transition will build my team’s trust (Wade &
Macpherson, 2016). I will listen and consider my colleagues’ opinions. I want to create an openminded team where everyone feels comfortable speaking out. All members are heard and cherished
in our community. Through teamwork and contribution, I wish to demonstrate the way (Masys,
2018). I’ll emphasize collaboration above individual success. This approach encourages
collaboration and stresses our shared goal. I’ll outline everyone’s duties and explain how they fit
into the transformation effort to foster collaboration and friendship. The team will meet
periodically to review progress, raise concerns, and celebrate triumphs. Encourage peer support
and praise to boost cooperation.
4
Structuring the Team
Structuring the change team effectively is pivotal to the success of any organizational
transformation. This section outlines the key roles and responsibilities within the change team,
emphasizes the importance of diversity and inclusion, and delves into the criteria and process for
selecting team members.
Key Roles and Responsibilities
Within the change team, it’s essential to define specific roles and responsibilities to ensure clarity
and accountability.
•
The leader of a change effort is the one who takes the reins, creates the long-term strategy,
and directs the team.
•
Those who are most invested in the success of the change inside their own organizations
will serve as “change champions” to inspire and inform their colleagues.
•
Project Managers- Those responsible for managing the schedule, resources, and outcomes
of the change plan on a day-to-day basis.
•
People who have extensive experience or training in a particular field relevant to the
transition at hand.
•
Specialists in communications are those whose job it is to create and disseminate messages
about organizational transformation to both internal and external audiences.
Diversity and Inclusion
Diversity and inclusiveness are essential for a productive and creative workforce. This necessitates
taking into account individual differences in gender, race/ethnicity, age, experience, and expertise
5
while putting together a team. Greater innovation and improved problem-solving may result from
giving equal weight to differing points of view. Making everyone feel like they belong and have a
stake in the team’s success is what we mean when we talk about inclusion.
Criteria and Selection Process
•
Expertise and skills relevant to the change initiative.
•
A demonstrated commitment to the organization’s values and goals.
•
The ability to collaborate effectively and adapt to change.
•
Strong communication and interpersonal skills.
•
A track record of being a positive influence within the organization.
Nominations should be sought, credentials evaluated, interviews conducted, and fit with the team’s
culture and goals evaluated as part of the selection process. It has to be open, impartial, and
consistent with the aims and principles of the business. Successfully negotiating the complexity of
change requires assembling a diverse, talented, and motivated team.
Injecting Energy into the Group
Motivation and energy are essential for a change team to drive and sustain change successfully. In
this section, we will explore techniques for keeping the team motivated and energized, addressing
potential resistance or skepticism, and maintaining momentum and enthusiasm over time.
Techniques for Motivation and Energy
•
Start by making sure the team understands the change initiative’s main aim and why it’s
vital. When they perceive their contributions to the company’s success, employees work
harder.
6
•
Maintain communication and ensure everyone understands. Regular updates on progress,
milestones, and successes inspire team members.
•
Honor the team’s efforts and achievement with an award. Giving team members
recognition for their individual and collective achievements enhances morale and
motivates them.
•
Let teammates make choices within their area of responsibility. Team members that have
input on the project are more likely to care about its result.
•
Training and advancement: provide them the opportunity to learn and grow. Investment in
your team’s professional progress shows gratitude and commitment to their success.
Handling Resistance or Skepticism
•
In the face of team members’ doubts or objections, it’s important to listen attentively to
their points of view. Try to put yourself in their shoes and demonstrate empathy. There
may be good reasons for the opposition’s vehement attitude.
•
Knowledge and Learning: Explain the rationale for the shift and its anticipated advantages
in a way that is both obvious and convincing. Clear up any misunderstandings and make
sure everyone on the team has the data they need to make smart choices.
•
Participation & Involvement: Team members should be included in all relevant changerelated decision-making and problem-solving. When given a voice in decision-making,
individuals are more inclined to support proposed reforms.
•
Find and use the team’s “change champions” to persuade the minds of any skeptics. These
leaders may inspire others by recounting their triumphs and providing examples of
constructive behavior.
7
Maintaining Momentum and Enthusiasm
Plan periodic team meetings in which progress can be evaluated, accomplishments can be
celebrated, and problems can be discussed. Focus and energy may be preserved via these
gatherings.
I.
Flexibility: -Be ready to make adjustments to the transformation strategy in light of
feedback and new information. Maintaining motivation and avoiding exhaustion,
flexibility is essential.
II.
Learning Never Stops-: Foster a mindset that is always looking for new ways to develop.
Drive home the point that going through a transition may be a learning experience on many
levels.
III.
Mark Significant Achievements- Acknowledge and honor significant achievements when
they are reached throughout the transition. The crew is re-energized by these celebrations
of success.
IV.
Help your team members become more resilient by giving them the tools they need.
Helping team members deal with the stress and anxiety that comes with change is essential.
Avoiding Potential Pitfalls
Creating a change leadership team is complicated by the difficulty of getting everyone on the same
page. There might be opposition to the change if team members don’t understand it or buy into it.
Furthermore, internal strife and arguments within the team might slow development and deflect
attention away from the transformation goals. Disagreements about how to proceed might arise,
as can interpersonally tensions within the group. If not addressed, they may fester into a poisonous
work climate that undermines the whole reform initiative. Establishing open and honest lines of
8
communication is crucial for overcoming these difficulties. Make sure everyone on the team is on
the same page with the change’s vision and goals, and that they are all in line with the larger goals
of the business. Furthermore, create conflict resolution tactics and encourage open communication
within the team to proactively handle disputes and disagreements. Inspire your team to share their
issues in a positive way and work together to find answers that will satisfy everyone. As the team
works through the transition, they may remain on track and keep up a spirit of positivity and
cooperation by placing a premium on alignment and dispute resolution.
Conclusion
Organizations need devotion, thorough preparation, and forceful leadership to form a successful
steering committee during transformation. The leader’s enthusiasm and dedication, trust and
collaboration modeling, organizational structure development, and momentum and enthusiasm
throughout the change journey have all been examined here. It stimulates the team to work harder
and makes everyone feel invested in the result. Open conversation, engaging tales, and crediting
sources are crucial. Every effective transformation attempt relies on teamwork and trust. Direct
contact, active listening, and example may build trust. Open communication and an emphasis on
teamwork above individual successes may help individuals feel comfortable working together to
tackle change. Choose a team with diverse experience and skills to reap the advantages of several
viewpoints. Clear criteria and a transparent selection process may assist ensure team members are
committed to the transformation vision and principles. The squad must have high morale and
manage discontent. Open communication, delegation, and public acknowledgment may encourage
a team, while actively listening and including them in decision-making can help them overcome
objections.
9
References
Gupta, A., Melendez, A. T., Rosenthal, J., & Vrushabhendra, L. (2017). Implications in
Implementing Self-Managed Teams in Organizations.
Masys, A.J. (2018) ‘Teamwork and trust: A socio-technical perspective’, Trust in Military
Teams, pp. 219–249. doi:10.1201/9781315549637-12.
Salas, E., Shuffler, M. L., Thayer, A. L., Bedwell, W. L., & Lazzara, E. H. (2015).
Understanding and improving teamwork in organizations: A scientifically based practical
guide. Human Resource Management, 54(4), 599-622.
Wade, N. T., & Macpherson, A. (2016). Effective Team Building Guide.
Vision for Change
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
October 10, 2023
2
Vision for Change
When it comes to navigating the murky seas of change management, a clear vision is like
a lighthouse. It’s clear that transformation is not a choice but a need in today’s business environment
as we dive into the nuances of change inside the South Carolina Department of Corrections
(SCDC). Executives in the twenty-first century have learned to see change as inevitable because
of the instability and unpredictability of the global economy. Business, for instance, has been
forced by globalization to reject traditional methods in favor of more progressive ones. In addition,
the earlier systems’ rigidity, hierarchical structure, and functionalized nature are antiquated
because of the dynamic and flexible character of the modern market. With its adaptability, crossdepartmental focus, foundation of collaboration, and flat structure, the new organizational model
is ready for the competitive marketplace of the twenty-first century. Organizational
transformations cannot be realized without strong leadership. In particular, visions help chief
executive officers (CEOs) increase the competitiveness and financial performance of their
companies by matching the efforts of their teams with those of the organization as a whole.
Resistance to change, based on the mistaken assumption that established procedures are
foolproof, is a widespread problem in all sectors of the economy. Given the rapid rate of change
in today’s complex environment, however, accepting transition is not an option but a need (Von
Treuer et al., 2018). One of the most important parts of SCDC that needs updating is the PayScale
system. This system has not lived up to its promise since wages are mostly determined by
characteristics including rank, length of service, and job duties (Temgire & Joshi, 2021). As a
consequence, workers are leaving in greater numbers because they believe their pay does not fairly
represent the amount of effort they put in. Adjustments to the PayScale system that are in line with
the larger aim for change are necessary to prevent more departures and strengthen the company.
3
Equally critical is doing something about the lack of incentives. Without these incentives, workers
are less likely to be invested in their job, which leads to poorer output and worse quality. The
problem might be solved by implementing a multi-tiered incentive plan to reward excellence while
also boosting efficiency. It is also important for SCDC to retain its experienced employees.
Recognizing that experience breeds excellence, the company should give preference to employees
with longer tenures (Packard, 2021). The success of these measures depends on SCDC’s ability to
keep talented people on staff All of SCDC’s stakeholders need to have a clear understanding of
the organization’s long-term vision for transformation. This vision must be articulated in a way
that touches every member of the team if it is to gain their support.
The message’s straightforwardness and simplicity are just as important as the vision itself.
It is crucial that once the vision has been defined, it be communicated effectively across the
business. This may be done by capitalizing on the established coalition and drawing on its many
contacts inside SCDC. However, we must recognize that there are many obstacles on the way to
change. hurdles to growth may come in many forms, including human behavior, social norms,
legal frameworks, and physical hurdles (Kotter & Cohen, 2012). Therefore, SCDC must carefully
allocate resources to prevent interruptions by anticipating and addressing these challenges in
advance. Small wins need to be heralded and praised as they provide both motivation and direction
for the future. They inspire workers to recommit to and embrace the transformation. Maintaining
and growing change requires constant work. Companies need to regularly assess their progress
toward new goals (Kotter & Cohen, 2012). Integrating change into SCDC’s culture should become
as natural as breathing.
4
In order for a transformation to last, it must become ingrained in the fabric of the business
itself. The change needs the support of top-level decision-makers and the training of all relevant
staff members. Leaders that push for positive change inside their organizations should be
commended for their efforts. Managers and group leaders need to be aware of the connection
between the structure of their organizations and the goals of their teams. Traditional organizational
systems, for instance, are detrimental to morale and output, and leaders should be aware of this.
Due to their rigid hierarchies and narrow focus, traditional institutions tend to worsen existing
power disparities (Gulati et al., 2016). It’s more challenging to release vision statements and less
likely that objectives will be achieved when there’s a major power difference
Change AgentsAre you a change agent?Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization.Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance.Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
For your assignment you will write an 8 page (excluding title page and reference page) research paper focused on the nature of the health information management (HIM) profession, future trends related to policy, classification systems, and emerging technology, and the potential impact of these trends on HIM professionals and organizations.
Your research paper should address the following:
Health Information Management (HIM) Profession
Definition
Growth of the profession
Occupations
Potential growth of the field
Education
Certifications
Professional organizations
Future Trends and Implications
Trends
Legislative changes
Changes in the classification system
Emerging health information technology
Implications
Legal and ethical considerations
Impact of technology on organizations and stakeholders (e.g. patients, physicians, providers, payors)
Your research paper should be supported by readings from throughout the quarter, and also a minimum of 10 primary,Scholarly sources. This paper should be in proper APA format, which includes a title page, reference page, and APA-formatted references.
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Q1. Discuss with suitable examples why activity-based costing (ABC) is better than the traditional costing system. Provide a suitable numerical example of ABC in the manufacturing sector and show all the necessary calculations required under the ABC system.
(3 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples showing all the calculations of the ABC system. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should not be copied from any sources. (Chapter 7)
Answer:
Q2. “A non-routine decision is one that is taken in response to a non-repetitive, operational scenario.” Comment on this statement and explain with suitable examples the various types of non-routine operating decisions that a company makes under such a scenario. Support your answer with numerical examples along with qualitative considerations involved in making such decisions. (4 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples for various types of non-routine operating decisions. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should not be copied from any sources. (Chapter 4)
Answer:
Q3. ADLG Company has two support departments, SS1 and SS2, and two operating departments, OD1 and OD2. The company has decided to use the direct method and allocate variable SS1 dept. costs based on the number of transactions and fixed SS1 dept. costs based on the number of employees. SS2 dept. variable costs will be allocated based on the number of service requests and fixed costs will be allocated based on the number of computers. The following values have been extracted for the allocation: (4 Marks)
Support Departments
Operating Departments
SS1
SS2
OD1
OD2
Total Department variable costs
16,000
19,000
105,000
68,000
Total department fixed costs
19,500
34,000
120,000
55,000
Number of transactions
50
55
250
140
Number of employees
18
24
47
38
Number of service requests
37
22
26
32
Number of computers
20
25
31
37
You are required to allocate variable and fixed costs. (Chapter 8)
Answer:
Q4. JKL Company processes a direct material and produces three products: P1, P2, and P3. The joint costs of the three products in 2018 were SAR 120,000. The total number of units for each product and the selling price per unit is given below:(4 Marks)
Product
Units
Selling Price per unit
P1
55,000
SAR 70
P2
34,500
SAR 58
P3
10,500
SAR 44
You are required to use the physical volume method and sales value at the split-off method to allocate the joint costs to each product.(Chapter 9)
Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment (2)
Deadline: Saturday 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Cost Accounting
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 14587
Academic Year: 1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Mohammed Arshad Khan
Students’ Grade:
/15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 15)
Q1. Discuss with suitable examples why activity-based costing (ABC) is better than the
traditional costing system. Provide a suitable numerical example of ABC in the manufacturing
sector and show all the necessary calculations required under the ABC system.
(3 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples showing all the calculations of the
ABC system. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should
not be copied from any sources.
(Chapter 7)
Answer:
Q2. “A non-routine decision is one that is taken in response to a non-repetitive, operational
scenario.” Comment on this statement and explain with suitable examples the various types of
non-routine operating decisions that a company makes under such a scenario. Support your
answer with numerical examples along with qualitative considerations involved in making such
decisions.
(4 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples for various types of non-routine
operating decisions. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they
should not be copied from any sources.
Answer:
(Chapter 4)
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Q3. ADLG Company has two support departments, SS1 and SS2, and two operating
departments, OD1 and OD2. The company has decided to use the direct method and allocate
variable SS1 dept. costs based on the number of transactions and fixed SS1 dept. costs based on
the number of employees. SS2 dept. variable costs will be allocated based on the number of
service requests and fixed costs will be allocated based on the number of computers. The
following values have been extracted for the allocation:
(4 Marks)
Support Departments
Operating Departments
SS1
SS2
OD1
OD2
Total Department variable costs
16,000
19,000
105,000
68,000
Total department fixed costs
19,500
34,000
120,000
55,000
Number of transactions
50
55
250
140
Number of employees
18
24
47
38
Number of service requests
37
22
26
32
Number of computers
20
25
31
37
You are required to allocate variable and fixed costs.
Answer:
(Chapter 8)
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Q4. JKL Company processes a direct material and produces three products: P1, P2, and P3. The
joint costs of the three products in 2018 were SAR 120,000. The total number of units for each
product and the selling price per unit is given below:
(4 Marks)
Product
Units
Selling Price per unit
P1
55,000
SAR 70
P2
34,500
SAR 58
P3
10,500
SAR 44
You are required to use the physical volume method and sales value at the split-off method to
allocate the joint costs to each product.
Answer:
(Chapter 9)
Avoid plagiarism and direct copying. Write in your own style. Stick to the required number of words and file instructions.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
sustainability
Article
A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach
for Sustainable Supplier Selection under
Vague Environment
Huiyun Lu 1 , Shaojun Jiang 2 , Wenyan Song 1,3, * and Xinguo Ming 4
1
2
3
4
*
School of Economics and Management, Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China; lhybuaa@163.com
School of Information Engineering, Handan University, Handan 056005, China; hh8582@163.com
Beijing Key Laboratory of Emergency Support Simulation Technologies for City Operations,
Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China
School of Mechanical Engineering, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200240, China;
xgming@sjtu.edu.cn
Correspondence: songwenyan@buaa.edu.cn; Tel.: +86-010-8231-3693
Received: 13 June 2018; Accepted: 23 July 2018; Published: 26 July 2018
Abstract: With the growing awareness of environmental and social issues, sustainable supply chain
management (SSCM) has received considerable attention both in academia and industry. Supplier
selection plays an important role in the successful implementation of sustainable supply chain
management, because it can influence the performance of SSCM. Sustainable supplier selection is a
typical multi-criteria decision-making problem involving subjectivity and vagueness. Although some
previous researches of supplier selection use fuzzy approaches to deal with vague information, it has
been criticized for requiring much priori information and inflexibility in manipulating vagueness.
Moreover, the previous methods often omit the environmental and social evaluation criteria in the
supplier selection. To manipulate these problems, a new approach based on the rough set theory
and ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) is developed in this paper. The novel
approach integrates the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much priori
information and the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria decision-making problem. Finally,
a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar air-conditioner manufacturer is provided to
demonstrate the application and potential of the approach.
Keywords: sustainability; supplier selection; vague information; rough set theory; ELECTRE
1. Introduction
Manufacturing companies today cannot ignore sustainability concerns in their business
because of increased environmental awareness and ecological pressures from markets and various
stakeholders [1–3]. Sustainable supplier selection is critical to enhance supply chain performance
and competitive advantage [4]. This is because suppliers play an important role in implementing
sustainable supply chain management (SSCM) practices and in achieving social, environmental and
economic goals [5]. In this respect, sustainable supplier selection based on the sustainability criteria
(economic, environmental and social) is a critical strategic decision for SSCM [6,7] and it requires to be
further explored methodically to help achieve sustainability of the whole supply chain.
Although many researchers explore the topic of supplier selection, the study on the sustainable
supplier selection is still in the early stage. Most studies of sustainable supplier selection have only
focused on the economic and environmental aspects of sustainability. The social aspect of sustainability
is often omitted in the decision–making for supplier selection. Besides, the problem of supplier
selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making (MCDM) problem. The decision makers always
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622; doi:10.3390/su10082622
www.mdpi.com/journal/sustainability
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
2 of 20
need to make trade-offs between conflicting criteria to select the most suitable supplier. It is difficult to
obtain accurate judgments of decision makers in the process of supplier evaluation, because supplier
selection involves large amount of linguistic information and subjective expert knowledge that are
usually imprecise, vague or even inconsistent. To deal with this problem, fuzzy methods are often
used to select suppliers. However, the fuzzy methods need much priori information (e.g., pre-set
fuzzy membership function) which may increase the workload of decision makers [8,9]. The previous
approaches also lack a flexible mechanism to deal with the subjective evaluations of experts [10,11].
Therefore, to manipulate the above problems in sustainable supplier selection, this paper proposes
a novel integrated group decision method based on the ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant
la REalité) approach and rough set theory in vague environments. Different with methods based on
the compensating accumulation principle (e.g., TOPSIS(Technique for Order Preference by Similarity
to an Ideal Solution)), the ELECTRE method is based on a precedence relation and it can meet
different evaluation requirements by defining undifferentiated threshold, strict superior threshold
and rejection threshold and thus, it has stronger flexibility in decision–making of supplier selection.
Furthermore, the rough number originated from the rough set theory can flexibly reflect the uncertainty
in decision–making process of supplier selection and it does not require much priori information.
In this respect, the proposed novel approach integrates the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria
decision-making problem and the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much
priori information.
The paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents a literature review of supplier selection,
ELECTRE method and rough set. Section 3 develops an integrated rough ELECTRE method for
sustainable supplier selection. In the Section 4, a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar
air-conditioner manufacturer is used to validate the feasibility and effectiveness of the method and a
comparative analysis is also conducted in this section. In Section 5, conclusions and future research
directions are presented.
2. Literature Review
2.1. Evaluation Criteria for Sustainable Supplier Selection
Supplier selection decisions are important for most of manufacturing firms, because a right
supplier can effectively improve the economic benefit of the manufacturing firm [12,13]. In the past,
economic criteria are usually used for supplier selection. The environment and social criteria are
often overlooked. However, with the development of sustainable supply chain management (SSCM),
both the researchers and practitioners are paying more attention to environment criteria and social
criteria in supplier selection [14]. They find it is important to incorporating the social and environment
criteria into the supplier selection process [15,16]. This paper summarizes the sustainable supplier
selection criteria from the economic, environment and social aspects. The details of the recognized
sustainable supplier selection criteria with their sources and descriptions are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Sustainable supplier selection criteria.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Economic criteria
Quality [17,18]
Product quality and reliability level guaranteed by supplier.
Response [5]
The ability for timely response, completing orders on time and reliable delivery.
Cost [19]
Purchasing cost, holding cost, ordering cost and supplier’s bidding price of
the product.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
3 of 20
Table 1. Cont.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Environmental criteria
Environmental
management system
(EMS) [20,21]
A set of systematic processes and practices reducing environmental impacts.
Carbon emission &
resource
consumption [22,23]
Greenhouse gas emissions in producing, transporting, using and recycling the
product and the resource (e.g., energy, power and water) consumption of
the company.
Design for the
environment [14,24]
Design reducing the overall impact of a product, process or service on human
health and environment.
Green image [17]
The image of company in the green aspect, which can be improved by adopting
environmental friendly products or implementing ‘green’ program. It can affect
the purchasing trend of customers, market share and the relationship
with stakeholders.
Social criteria
Product liability [25]
Being responsible for customer health and safety, providing products and
services with high quality and advertising based on real information.
Employee right and
welfare [26,27]
Treating employee with dignity and respect and maintaining a culture of security,
nondiscrimination and equality. Paying to employee shall comply with all
applicable wage laws.
Social commitment [27]
Involving in local community, education, job creation, healthcare and
social investment.
2.2. The Methods of Sustainable Supplier Selection
Selecting the right suppliers to set up optimal supplier networks can help to reduce purchasing
costs and increase the efficiency of the procurement logistics process [28]. Supplier selection is a
multi-criteria decision-making problem. There are some papers concerning sustainable (or green)
suppliers. Dai and Blackhurst (2012) integrate Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) with Quality
Function Deployment (QFD) for sustainable supplier selection [18]. The approach consists of four
stages, that is, linking customer requirements with the firm’s sustainability strategy, determining the
sustainable purchasing competitive priority, determining evaluation criteria of sustainable supplier
and evaluating the sustainable suppliers. Hsu and Hu (2009) develop a method for selecting suppliers
with emphasis on issues of hazardous substance management based on Analytic Network Process
(ANP) [29]. Liu and Hai (2005) provide a method called voting analytic hierarchy process for supplier
selection [30]. Although AHP/ANP methods are more popular in the field of the supplier selection,
they are always used to determine the relative importance weightings of criteria and sub-factors merely.
They need to be integrated with other decision–making techniques. Besides, due to the number of
pairwise comparisons that need to be made, the number of supplier selections is practically limited in
the AHP/ANP-based supplier selection methods. Moreover, the conventional AHP/ANP methods do
not consider the vagueness of decision–making information.
To manipulate the increasing number of the suppliers, data envelopment analysis (DEA) is a
prevalent approach used in supplier selection. This is because DEA can easily handle huge number of
suppliers with little managerial input and output required. Kuo et al. (2012) present a green supplier
selection method using an analysis network process as well as data envelopment analysis (DEA) [31].
ANP which is able to consider the interdependency between criteria releases the constraint of DEA that
the users cannot set up criteria weight preferences. Wu and Blackhurst (2009) propose an augmented
DEA approach for supplier evaluation and selection [32]. Sevkli et al. (2007) develop a new supplier
selection method by embedding the DEA approach into AHP methodology [33]. They conclude that
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
4 of 20
the integrated method outperforms the conventional AHP method for supplier selection. However,
DEA-based supplier selection methods have some drawbacks. The practitioners may be confused with
input and output criteria. Besides, DEA is a linear programming to measure the relative efficiencies of
homogenous decision–making units (DMUs). An efficient supplier generating more outputs while
requiring less input may be not an effective supplier. Furthermore, the conventional DEA also does
not consider the subjectivity and vagueness in the decision–making process.
Beside the multi-criteria decision–making method, some researchers use heuristic optimization
approaches to select proper suppliers. Basnet and Leung (2005) develop an incapacitated mixed
linear integer programming which minimizes the aggregate purchasing, ordering and holding costs
subject to demand satisfaction [34]. They solve the problem with an enumerative search algorithm
and a heuristic procedure. Veres et al. (2017) propose a heuristic method for optimizing supply
chain including intelligent transportation systems (ITS) based vehicles for transportation operations
problems [35]. To solve the multi-product multi-period inventory lot sizing with supplier selection
problem, Cárdenas-Barrón et al. (2015) propose a heuristic algorithm based on reduce and optimize
approach (ROA) and a new valid inequality [36]. Unfortunately, the heuristic optimization approaches
omit the vagueness and subjectivity in the decision–making, which may lead to inaccurate results of
supplier selection.
In order to deal with the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment in evaluation and
selection of suppliers, fuzzy set theory is introduced into the conventional approaches. Considering
time pressure and lack of expertise in sustainable supplier selection, Büyüközkan and Çifçi (2011)
developed a method based on fuzzy analytic network process within group decision-making schema
under incomplete preference relations [37]. To manipulate the subjectivity of decision makers’
evaluations, Amindoust et al. (2012) develop a new ranking method on the basis of fuzzy inference
system (FIS) for sustainable supplier selection problem [6]. Azadnia et al. (2015) developed an
integrated method based on rule-based weighted fuzzy approach [38], fuzzy analytical hierarchy
process and multi-objective mathematical programming for sustainable supplier selection and order
allocation. Grisi et al. (2010) propose a fuzzy AHP method for green supplier selection using a
seven-step approach [39]. Fuzzy logic is used to overcome uncertainty caused by human qualitative
judgments. ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) methods are able to make a
successful assessment of each alternative based on knowledge of the concordance and discordance
sets for all pairs of alternatives. They are often used to select right suppliers [40]. Thus, Sevkli (2010)
proposes a fuzzy ELECTRE for supplier selection [41]. Although the fuzzy methods can deal with
the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment, it requires priori information (e.g., pre-set
membership function). Moreover, the fuzzy methods always convert linguistic variables into fuzzy
numbers with fixed intervals. Therefore, computation results usually do not exactly match initial
linguistic terms, which easily cause loss of information and lack of precision in the final results.
Although these methods have brought great insights to supplier selection literature, most of them
lack flexible mechanisms to handle the subjectivity and the vagueness of decision makers’ assessments.
Although some fuzzy methods of supplier selection (e.g., fuzzy ELECTRE) consider the vagueness in
decision–making information, they require much priori information (e.g., pre-set fuzzy membership
function) which consumes much time and effort of managers. Moreover, the previous fuzzy approaches
use fuzzy number with fixed interval to indicate the uncertainty, which cannot identify the changes in
decision makers’ judgments. For those reasons, there is a clear need for a new formal decision support
methodology for the sustainable supplier selection under vague environment.
3. The Proposed Method
The main objective of this paper is to propose an integrated method for sustainable supplier
selection based on rough set theory and ELECTRE. Besides, vagueness manipulation is also considered
in the proposed approach. A flowchart of the proposed approach is shown in Figure 1.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
Sustainability 2018, 10, x FOR PEER REVIEW
5 of 20
5 of 21
Figure 1.
1. The
Theframework
framework of
of rough
rough ELimination
ELimination Et
Et Choix
Choix Traduisant
Traduisant la REalité (ELECTRE).
Figure
3.1. Determine
Determine the
the Supplier
Supplier Evaluation
Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established. The
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established.
D1,DD12, D
,…,
DkD)k )who
The group
has
k decision-makers
whoare
areresponsible
responsiblefor
for determining
determining and
and the
group
has k
decision-makers
(i.e.,(i.e.,
2 , …,
ranking each criterion (i.e., C1 , C2 , …, Ck ). For the sustainable supplier selection, three aspects we
C2,…,are
Ckeconomic
ranking
eachinto
criterion
(i.e., C1,They
). For thecriteria,
sustainable
supplier selection,
three
aspects
we
should take
consideration.
environmental
criteria and
social
criteria.
should take into consideration. They are economic criteria, environmental criteria and social criteria.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have different
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have
cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set P = { p1 , p2 , · · · , ph }
different cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set
with h ordered judgments, in the manner of p1 ≤ p2 ≤ · · · ≤ ph . Let pi be a random judgment in the
p1 ≤ approximation
p2 ≤≤ ph . Let
P =P and
p1, pd2is,
, ph as
with
orderedof
judgments,
of lower
a
set
defined
thehdistance
P, where din=the
phmanner
− p1 . The
Apr (ppii ) be
and
the upper approximation Apr ( pi ) of the judgment pi can be identified as follows.
random judgment in the set P and d is defined as the distance of P , where d = ph − p1 . The
Lower approximation set:
{
}
lower approximation
Apr( pi ) and the upper approximation Apr
( pi ) of the judgment pi can
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P p j ≤ pi , pi − p j ≤ d
be identified as follows
Lower
Upper approximation
approximation set:
set:
{
≤d
Apr
( (ppi ))==∪∪pp j ∈
j ≤p p
j)d
Apr
∈P
P |pp ≥
, i ,p( p−i −p p ≤
i
Upper approximation set:
j
j
i
i
h
RN ( pi ) = piL , pU
i
{
j
i
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P | p j ≥ pi , ( p j − pi ) ≤ d
(1)
}
}
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
6 of 20
q
Where piL = m ∏ xij
q
n
pU
=
∏ yij
i
(4)
(5)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr ( pi ) and the upper approximation
set Apr ( pi ) of pi respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
For different criteria, experts might give different weights. Use wkj indicate the weight of jth
criterion with kth expert.
With the Formulas (1)–(5)
n
o
n
d j = MAX wm
(6)
j − wj
o
n
m
n
≤ dj
(7)
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≤ wm
Apr wm
j , wj − wj
j
o
n
n
m
≤ dj
(8)
Apr wm
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≥ wm
j , wj − wj
j
q
Lim wkj = m ∏ x j
(9)
q
Lim wkj = n ∏ y j
(10)
where x j and y j are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (wkj ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (wkj ) of wkj respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
h
i h
i
kU
RN wkj = Lim wkj , Lim wkj
= wkL
,
w
j
j
s
w jL =
s
(11)
s
∏ wkL
j
(12)
k =1
s
s
s
wU
∏ wkU
j =
j
(13)
k =1
h
i
We could get the weight of each criterion w j = w jL , wU
j .
3.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Apart from the decision for the weight of criteria, the experts should give the assessment of the
alternatives with consideration of all the criteria. Let’s use rijk to represent the kth expert scores on jth
criterion in ith alternative. The following is the scoring matrix. Aggregate all the scoring matrix.
k
r11
k
r21
Rk =
..
.
k
rm1
k
r12
k
r22
..
.
k
rm2
···
···
..
.
···
k
r1n
k
r2n
..
.
k
rmn
(14)
rf
rf
· · · rf
11
12
1n
f f
r21 r22 · · · rf
2n
e
R= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
..
rf
nm
m2 · · · rg
m1 rf
n
o
reij = rij1 , rij2 , · · · , rijh
(15)
(16)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
7 of 20
Determine the rough matrix with expert ratings.
d = max rijm − rijn
(17)
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≤ rijm , rijm − rijn ≤ d
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≥ rijm , rijn − rijm ≤ d
(18)
q
Lim rijk = m
∏ xij
(19)
(20)
q
Lim rijk = n ∏ yij
(21)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (rijk ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (rijk ) of rijk respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
i
h
RN rijk = Lim, Lim = rijkL , rijkU
(22)
i h
i
h
io
nh
RN reij = rij1L , rij1U , rij2L , rij2U , · · · , rijsL , rijsU
i
h
RN reij = rijL , rijU
(23)
s
rijL =
s
s
s
∏
L , rU
r11
11
L , rU
r21
21
R=
..
.
L U
rm1 , rm1
s
∏ rijkU
rijkL , rijU =
s
L U
r12 , r12
L U
r22 , r22
···
k =1
..
.
L U
rm2 , rm2
(24)
(25)
k =1
···
..
.
···
L U
r1n , r1n
L U
r2n , r2n
..
.
L U
rmn , rmn
(26)
Then, we normalize the rough decision matrix with the weight of criteria.
h
i h
i
L U
sij = rij · w j = rijL w jL , rijU wU
ij = sij , sij
(27)
” L U#
h
i
sij sij
tij =
,
= tijL , tU
ij
Cj Cj
n o
Where Cj = MAX sU
ij
L , tU
t11
11
L , tU
t21
21
T=
..
.
L U
tm1 , tm1
L U
t12 , t12
L U
t22 , t22
···
..
.
L U
tm2 , tm2
..
···
.
···
L U
t1n , t1n
L U
t2n , t2n
..
.
L U
tmn , tmn
(28)
(29)
(30)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
8 of 20
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct some field for the comparison among all the alternatives. We compare
different alternatives in two aspects. One is the concordance and the other is the discordance. Construct
the concordance and discordance matrices.
CS pq = Fj t pj ≥ tqj
(31)
DS pq = Fj t pj < tqj
(32)
CS pq represents the areas that alternative p is better than alternative q and DS pq represents the
areas that alternative p is worse than alternative q.
c pq =
∑
wj
(33)
Fj ∈CS pq
max Fj ∈ DS pq d t pj , tqj
d pq =
max Fj ∈ J d t pj , tqj
L U
L U
−
c12 , c12
· · · c1m
, c1m
L , cU
L , cU
−
·
·
·
c
c21
2m 2m
21
C=
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
L U L U
···
−
cm1 , cm1
cm2 , cm2
− d12 · · · d1m
− · · · d2m
d21
D= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
dm1 dm2 · · · −
(34)
(35)
(36)
By means of the calculation, we could get the rough concordance matrix C and discordance
matrix D.
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
After we get the concordance matrix and discordance matrix, we should determine the threshold
value. Using it to transform the matrix into Boolean matrix. First, we calculate the mean of the all
factors in matrix C and matrix D.
m
m
∑
∑ c pq
c=
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
m
∑
d=
(37)
m ( m − 1)
m
∑
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
d pq
m ( m − 1)
(38)
Compare the factors in matrix C with c and the factors in matrix D with d. According the result of
the comparison, we get the concordance Boolean matrix F and discordance Boolean matrix G.
(
f pq =
(
g pq =
1
i f : c pq ≥ c
0
i f : c pq < c
1
i f : d pq ≤ d
0
i f : d pq > d
(39)
(40)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
9 of 20
F = f pq m×m , G = g pq m×m
(41)
Then we could construct the general Boolean matrix H.
h pq = f pq · g pq
(42)
H = h pq m×m
(43)
According to the above calculations, we could get the general Boolean matrix. It is a basis for the
ranking of the alternatives. If h pq = 1, that means alternative p is better than alternative q.
Step 4: Calculate the pure concordance index and discordance index
By the Boolean general matrix, we could get part relations between all alternatives. Since if
h pq = 1, we know that alternative p is better than alternative q. But if h pq = 0 and we could not infer
the relationship of alternative p and alternative q from other alternatives, then we do not know which
is better. In order to get a rank of all the alternatives, we bring into pure concordance index cˆi and
discordance index d̂i .
Before calculating the pure index, we should transform rough interval into definite number.
Song et al. (2017) has proposed this method. We use ∆−1 represents the calculation of changing rough
interval into definite number [14].
The calculation includes the following procedures.
(1) Normalization
zei L =
zei U =
ziL − minziL /∆max
min
(44)
i
L
zU
i − minzi
i
/∆max
min
(45)
U
L
∆max
min = maxzi − minzi
i
(46)
i
L
where ziL and zU
i are the lower limit and the upper limit of the rough number zei respectively; zei and
zei U are the normalized form of ziL and zU
i respectively.
(2) Determine the total normalized definite value by
zei L × 1 − zei L + zei U × zei U
βi =
(47)
1 − zei L + zei U
(3) Compute the final definite value form zei der for zei by
zei der = minziL + β i ∆max
min
(48)
i
Therefore, we can use this method to calculate the concordance index and discordance index.
m
cˆi =
∑
q=1,q6=i
∆−1 cf
iq −
m
d̂i =
∑
q=1,q6=i
m
∑
p=1,p6=i
∆−1 cf
pi
(49)
m
diq −
∑
d pi
(50)
p=1,p6=i
Step 5: Determine the final ranking
According to the cˆi , we can get a priority in concordance. The bigger value of cˆi the higher place
the alternative would get. We use R1i for the ranking in concordance. The same we can get the priority
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
10 of 20
in discordance by d̂i . But on the contrary, the smaller value of d̂i the higher place the alternative would
get. We use R2i for the ranking in discordance. The final ranking is calculated as follows:
Ri =
R1i + R2i
2
(51)
Ri is the final rank of all the alternatives.
4. Case Study
In this section, in order to validate the applicability and effectiveness of the proposed method, we
use an example to illustrate. We assume that there is a manufacturing company. For the purpose of
choosing a good supplier, they set up a panel of 4 experts. The experts come from various departments
including purchasing, quality and production and planning who are involved in the supplier selection
process. And there are 8 suppliers for selection.
4.1. Implementation
4.1.1. Determine the Supplier Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, the experts make a decision of the criteria. In addition to economic criteria,
environmental criteria and social criteria should also be considered for the sustainable supplier
selection. These criteria consist of three parts, we use C1~10 to represent these ten criteria. They are
Economic criteria including quality (C1), response (C2) and cost (C3); Environmental criteria including
environmental management system (C4), carbon emission & resource consumption (C5), design for
the environment (C6), Green image (C7); Social criteria including product liability (C8), employee right
and welfare (C9), social commitment (C10). The detailed introduction is shown in Table 1. We use
A1~8 to represent alternatives, E1~4 to represent experts.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
After the decision of criteria, experts should evaluate the weight of each criterion. The experts
give their evaluation to the criteria in the Table 2. Firstly, we convert the grades which experts give to
criteria into rough number. Take criterion C1 for example.
Table 2. The grade of each criterion.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
E1
E2
E3
E4
4
3
6
5
6
6
4
4
6
7
5
6
7
5
4
6
4
3
6
4
4
4
5
5
6
5
3
2
6
5
6
4
7
6
5
5
5
4
7
4
According to the Equations (6)–(13) in Section 3,
d1 = 2
Lim w14 = 4 4 × 5 × 4 × 6 = 4.68, Lim w14 = 6
√
√
w1L = 4 4 × 4.31 × 4 × 4.68 = 4.24, w1U = 4 4.68 × 5.48 × 4.68 × 6 = 5.18
The same as the other criteria, following the same procedure, we can get the importance degree of
all the criteria in Table 3.
Table 3. The importance of all the criteria.
Rough Importance
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
[4.24, 5.18]
[3.57, 4.77]
[5.69, 6.70]
[5.06, 5.42]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
[2.63, 3.67]
[6.06, 6.42]
[4.28, 5.60]
4.1.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Different expert might hold different view for alternatives and criteria because of their personal
experience and knowledge. And the true information is just contained in the cognitive vagueness.
According to the evaluation towards the alternatives from the experts, we could get the rough number
of each alternative. We take the data for criterion 1 in Table 4 for example.
Table 4. The evaluation for alternative under the criterion 1.
C1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
6
4
5
4
3
6
7
5
4
3
4
5
5
6
6
4
6
4
6
5
3
4
5
3
5
2
3
5
4
6
7
5
According to the Equations (17)–(26), we use x cab for the cth expert’s evaluation towards alternative
b in criterion a. We can get the rough matrix in Table 5.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
12 of 20
Table 5. The rough matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[4.68, 5.70]
[2.63, 3.67]
[3.65, 5.15]
[4.53, 4.93]
[3.23, 4.16]
[5.02, 5.85]
[5.69, 6.70]
[3.66, 4.69]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.66, 4.69]
[2.22, 3.13]
[5.54, 5.93]
[4.54, 5.38]
[5.69, 6.70]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.06, 4.41]
[4.24, 5.18]
[5.11, 5.79]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.23, 4.16]
[4.24, 5.18]
[6.06, 6.42]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[3.66, 4.69]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.67, 6.17]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.96, 5.29]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.02, 5.85]
[4.24, 5.18]
Note: not all of the data are provided in Table 5 due to the space limitation.
Then, we normalize the rough matrix. According to the Equations (27)–(30). We can get the result
in Table 6.
Table 6. The normalized weighted decision matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[0.57, 0.85]
[0.32, 0.55]
[0.45, 0.77]
[0.55, 0.74]
[0.39, 0.62]
[0.61, 0.87]
[0.69, 1.00]
[0.45, 0.70]
[0.58, 0.86]
[0.41, 0.70]
[0.25, 0.47]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.51, 0.80]
[0.64, 1.00]
[0.52, 0.85]
[0.45, 0.66]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.68, 0.90]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.43, 0.65]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.80, 1.00]
[0.69, 0.89]
[0.47, 0.68]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[0.45, 0.76]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.58, 1.00]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.49, 0.86]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.62, 0.95]
[0.53, 0.84]
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct the concordance and discordance matrices according to the normalized
rough decision matrix. For the construct of the concordance matrix, we take alternative1 and alternative
2 for example. At the first, we should find in which criterion A1 performs better than A2, that means
the score in certain criterion, A1 is higher than A2.
According to the Table 6, we could find in criterion 1, 2, 9, A1 performs better than A2. Add up all
these weights of the criteria. We could get the value of c12 = [13.87, 16.37] in the concordance matrix.
And we can get the concordance matrix in Table 7 by repeat these procedures.
Table 7. The concordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
…
A8
[31.11, 37.19]
[33.63, 39.23]
[7.85, 10.37]
[7.81, 9.97]
[29.01, 35.71]
[19.27, 22.89]
[17.55, 21.08]
[13.87, 16.37]
[19.81, 22.93]
[13.87, 16.37]
[11.35, 14.32]
[22.20, 26.74]
[23.84, 28.67]
[22.09, 26.44]
[11.35, 14.32]
[25.17, 30.63]
[7.81, 9.95]
[7.11, 9.14]
[24.73, 30.11]
[17.04, 21.03]
[16.85, 20.25]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[27.43, 32.48]
[22.89, 27.12]
[28.13, 33.30]
[12.09, 15.55]
[20.67, 25.25]
[25.47, 31.34]
[17.78, 22.25]
–
For the construct of the discordance matrix. First of all, we find the criterion which A2 is better
than A1. And we could find that they are criterion 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10. Then we find the biggest distance
in these criteria. Using it divide the biggest distance between A1 and A2. We can get the value of
d12 = 1. Repeating these procedures and we can get the discordance matrix in Table 8.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
13 of 20
Table 8. The discordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.46
1.00
0.93
1.00
0.64
1.00
1.00
0.37
0.71
1.00
0.53
1.00
0.73
1.00
0.43
0.88
0.91
0.90
0.49
1.00
1.00
0.00
0.37
0.68
0.20
0.27
0.64
0.65
0.22
0.55
0.32
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.32
1.00
1.00
0.97
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.27
0.82
–
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
Based on concordance and discordance matrix, we construct the concordance Boolean and
discordance Boolean matrices. Calculate the concordance index and discorda
Hi I need help with belowControl Charts Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Corporate Finance (FIN-201)
Due Date: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Corporate Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN-201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 10469
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Dr. Samreen Akhtar
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Answer the following questions:
Q1. What are the different ways available for the corporations to distribute income
among the shareholders? Suppose a firm promises to pay dividends of $200,000 every
year in perpetuity with 200,000 shares outstanding. Assume a discount rate of 11.1%.
What is the present value of one of the firm’s shares?
(2 marks)
Q2. What is Stock repurchase? Explain the four ways to implement stock repurchase.
(3 marks)
Q3. Calculate the rate at which a firm can grow without changing its leverage if its payout
ratio is 30%; equity outstanding at the beginning of the year is $9,500,000; and its net
income for the year is $2,000,000.
(2 marks)
Q4. What do you mean by Long term financial planning? Take an example and explain the
sales percentage model of financial planning.
(3 marks)
Answers:
hello i am working in question (Discussion question ) I
attached the question and the instruction inside the file please do everything
step by step as required by instruction
Unformatted Attachment Preview
hello i am working in two question (Discussion question ) I attached the question and the instruction
inside the file please do everything step by step as required by instruction
the instruction should be do it for question
I attached question below in the file and the instruction of question below attached it
Instruction 1 ( write main discussion question + two explanation why choose this answer )
the first one is discussion question the need to write main discussion question 400 words with reference
APA 7 edition and give me (two explanation) why choose the answer of main discussion question
)each explanation 300 words with 3 reference.
when write the answer (should be each question but the main question or main point in Bold color
then the answer below the question or main point with different color to distinguish between
question and answer
Instruction 2- ( reply two student)
need to reply two student each one 300 words should have reference and citation in paragraphs
applied for the reply for student I need separate file for the reply for student with reference ( put in
each file answer it the original answer of student and reply for them )
instruction 3 ( no plagiarism )
no any answer should be from any answer from website like ( study pool or course hero)or any other
website or artificial intelligence should be from articles this home work submit to check Turnitin and
AI contact detector ( AI Text Classifier) found any thing get zero grade
instruction 4 ( reference with link)
provide me in the file included the reference for all articles the use it answer the question and put
behind each link the number of pages of this article the used in answer this question
Note : for reference should be citation in text for all file
Question Please follow instruction directives per your syllabus for this submission.
1- Globalization is a shift toward a more integrated and interdependent world economy.
2- Please explain the difference between the two facets of markets vs production.
Post one initial posting and respond to two other learners using the example posted in your
announcements. Also, remember to use in-site citations and three to five references to support your
thought process to avoid point deductions within this submission.
You are to select a film and examine several concepts of interpersonal communication. The focus will be on how communication is
used to initiate, maintain, and terminate relationships. The film will serve as a vehicle for
learning about interpersonal communication and relationships. You will analyze what the film
has shown about the ways people relate to one another. In your 3-5 paper, you will need: an introduction, conclusion, and bibliography of at least two
sources. You will need a strong introduction and a
conclusion in this paper as well as identify three or four points (concepts) that you found
most enlightening, controversial, or even possibly incorrect. You will be expected to discuss
what individuals did, what happened, and why. Relevant communication theory and text material
should be introduced for each example. You should write this paper as if you were going to
demonstrate your expertise and knowledge to an individual that has little or no knowledge
of communication theory. That “pretend reader” should learn a lot from reading your paper. The paper should be word-processed, double-spaced, 12pt Times New Roman font, with a cover
page.USE MLA FORMATTING WHILE CITING. A document has been attached for more details.
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Abdulelah Alnafisah
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-1
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 14/10/2023 (End of Week-7) @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out
of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
An entrepreneur Start-up
Business Plan
A business plan is any simple plan, not only limited to the business start-up plan that helps the
management to understand the current situation of the enterprises (strengths, weakness,
opportunities and threats) and look forward into the future. A start-up plan is a business plan which
consists of the mission, vision, objectives and action plans for the future of the new enterprises
while the business plan drawn during the operation of the firm is vital for running the firm
effectively, acquire new customers, partners, loans and so on. According to Fiore (2005), a
business plan involves two dimensions; an organizing tool to simplify and clarify your business
goals and strategy, the second one is a selling document that sells the business idea and shows that
a product or a service can make a profit and attract funding and company resources.
Imagine you started a new business as an entrepreneur in Saudi Arabia. Briefly mention the
specific steps which you consider necessary to a successful business plan.
Please, think and share information on the following items:
1. Owners, capital structure and company profile (2 Marks)
a. Your Business Name, Address, E‐Mail
b. Form of ownership: What is the legal structure? Sole proprietor, Partnership,
Corporation….
C. Investment capital
2. Company Business Description (300 – 400 words)
A. Scope and type of business (4 Marks)
What business will you be in? What will you do? What market segment will you
choose?
• Business idea: what is your big idea? Is it a product or a service? What makes your
idea different?
• Mission Statement
• Company’s short-term and long-term goals and objectives.
• Target market and demographics: Who will your customers be? Where do they live?
What is your target market passionate about?
B. Business Philosophy (4 Marks)
What is important to you in your business?
• Describe your Industry: Is it a growth industry? What long-term or short-term changes
do you foresee in the industry? How will your company take advantage of it?
• Describe your most important company strengths and core competencies: What factors
will make the company succeed? What do you think your major competitive strengths
will be? What background experience, skills, and strengths do you personally bring to this
new venture?
• Risk Assessment: Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of your business using SWOT.
•Who is your competition and how do you beat them?
Note: Use APA style of referencing
Answers:
1.
2.
TASK You are a Senior Manager of a product-based company in a developing country. The board of directors would like to capitalise on the growing trend of globalisation which is opening up numerous opportunities overseas. Choose a developed country as your target market. Conduct a country analysis of your chosen target market and provide a strong rationale for the choice of market. Based on the analysis, table a strategic plan for entering the market. The plan must cover the following areas: Market entry methodMarketingOperations PlanHuman Resources Plan The plan must be appropriately justified.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assessment
Using the table below, indicate the Activity type, descriptor and weighting. If your assessment strategy for a
module consists of more than one component each assigned an individual mark (even if these are aggregated
later to form an overall module mark), then you must record each component separately under their
appropriate activity type. For further guidance please contact your Faculty Director of Learning and Teaching.
Activity Type
Activity Descriptor
International
Business Plan
Individual Report
July 2020
Weighting
100%
Length /
Duration
4000 words
Module Template
Alternative
Assessment
None
Week Due
Assignment
TASK
You are a Senior Manager of a product-based company in a developing country. The board of
directors would like to capitalise on the growing trend of globalisation which is opening up
numerous opportunities overseas.
Choose a developed country as your target market. Conduct a country analysis of your chosen
target market and provide a strong rationale for the choice of market. Based on the analysis,
table a strategic plan for entering the market. The plan must cover the following areas:
• Market entry method
• Marketing
• Operations Plan
• Human Resources Plan
The plan must be appropriately justified.
Note: You can choose any existing company from any developing country. You must choose the
core product (or product line) or service within the portfolio of that organisation. Your choices
must be explicitly mentioned. You must choose a target market that they are currently not
engaged in.
See below for the full explanation of the marking criteria
The Topic/title
1. Feel free to discuss possibilities with your lecturer.
2. ‘Describe’ means ‘this is what happened’, ‘Analyse’ means ‘this is why it happened’.
3. Recommendations could relate to the future, or to what others could learn from this situation.
Basic Format:
•
•
A title page, a contents page, an introduction, a main section with sub-sections, and a
recommendation, conclusion and references. Clear headings are essential. Relevant sources of
information should be cited using the Harvard referencing system.
Any areas of doubt need to be raised with your lecturer
The tasks address all the learning outcomes.
The use of a range of information sources is expected – academic books, peer reviewed journal
articles, professional articles, press releases and newspaper articles, reliable statistics, company
annual reports and other company information. All referencing should be in Harvard style.
July 2020
Module Template
MARKING CRITERIA AND STUDENT FEEDBACK
Common Assessment Criteria Applied
1. Research-informed Literature
Extent of research and/or own reading, selection of credible sources,
application of appropriate referencing conventions.
Providing evidence of the appropriate reading/ references that form the basis
of the insights in your essay.
20
2. Knowledge and Understanding of Subject
Extent of knowledge and understanding of concepts and underlying
principles associated with the discipline.
Demonstrating familiarity with the selected concepts/ models used in your
presentation.
20
3. Analysis
Analysis, evaluation and synthesis; logic, argument and judgement;
analytical reflection; organisation of ideas and evidence
Demonstrating conceptual insights into the potential values of the selected
academic concepts/ models.
25
4. Practical Application and Deployment
Deployment of methods, materials, tools and techniques; application of
concepts; formulation of innovative and creative solutions to solve
problems.
Applying your conceptual insights to successfully address the situations faced
by your chosen organisation. Making recommendations for future plans and
strategies.
25
5. Skills for Professional Practice
Attributes in professional practice: individual and collaborative working;
deployment of appropriate media; presentation and organisation.
Quality of the presentation.
10
Potential effectiveness in terms of getting your messages across to your
intended audience. Clarity of expression (incl. accuracy, spelling, grammar,
punctuation, and numeracy)
1. TOTAL
July 2020
100
Module Template
Mar
ks
Awa
rded
Mark
s
availa
ble
This section details the assessment criteria. The extent to which these are demonstrated by you
determines your mark. The marks available for each criterion are shown. Lecturers use a similar
format to comment on the achievement of the task(s), including those areas in which you have
performed well and areas that would benefit from development/improvement.
Level 5 CCCU Grading Criteria (July 2022)
July 2023
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying
from students or other resources without proper referencing will not be
acceptable. No exceptions. At least two Scholarly Peer- Reviewed
Journals are required as references.All answers must be typed
using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Do not make any changes in the cover page.Please follow the requirement in file regarding any references of requirement .Reference should be included.use reference its must be with APA styles please
Unformatted Attachment Preview
sustainability
Article
A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach
for Sustainable Supplier Selection under
Vague Environment
Huiyun Lu 1 , Shaojun Jiang 2 , Wenyan Song 1,3, * and Xinguo Ming 4
1
2
3
4
*
School of Economics and Management, Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China; lhybuaa@163.com
School of Information Engineering, Handan University, Handan 056005, China; hh8582@163.com
Beijing Key Laboratory of Emergency Support Simulation Technologies for City Operations,
Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China
School of Mechanical Engineering, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200240, China;
xgming@sjtu.edu.cn
Correspondence: songwenyan@buaa.edu.cn; Tel.: +86-010-8231-3693
Received: 13 June 2018; Accepted: 23 July 2018; Published: 26 July 2018
Abstract: With the growing awareness of environmental and social issues, sustainable supply chain
management (SSCM) has received considerable attention both in academia and industry. Supplier
selection plays an important role in the successful implementation of sustainable supply chain
management, because it can influence the performance of SSCM. Sustainable supplier selection is a
typical multi-criteria decision-making problem involving subjectivity and vagueness. Although some
previous researches of supplier selection use fuzzy approaches to deal with vague information, it has
been criticized for requiring much priori information and inflexibility in manipulating vagueness.
Moreover, the previous methods often omit the environmental and social evaluation criteria in the
supplier selection. To manipulate these problems, a new approach based on the rough set theory
and ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) is developed in this paper. The novel
approach integrates the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much priori
information and the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria decision-making problem. Finally,
a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar air-conditioner manufacturer is provided to
demonstrate the application and potential of the approach.
Keywords: sustainability; supplier selection; vague information; rough set theory; ELECTRE
1. Introduction
Manufacturing companies today cannot ignore sustainability concerns in their business
because of increased environmental awareness and ecological pressures from markets and various
stakeholders [1–3]. Sustainable supplier selection is critical to enhance supply chain performance
and competitive advantage [4]. This is because suppliers play an important role in implementing
sustainable supply chain management (SSCM) practices and in achieving social, environmental and
economic goals [5]. In this respect, sustainable supplier selection based on the sustainability criteria
(economic, environmental and social) is a critical strategic decision for SSCM [6,7] and it requires to be
further explored methodically to help achieve sustainability of the whole supply chain.
Although many researchers explore the topic of supplier selection, the study on the sustainable
supplier selection is still in the early stage. Most studies of sustainable supplier selection have only
focused on the economic and environmental aspects of sustainability. The social aspect of sustainability
is often omitted in the decision–making for supplier selection. Besides, the problem of supplier
selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making (MCDM) problem. The decision makers always
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622; doi:10.3390/su10082622
www.mdpi.com/journal/sustainability
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
2 of 20
need to make trade-offs between conflicting criteria to select the most suitable supplier. It is difficult to
obtain accurate judgments of decision makers in the process of supplier evaluation, because supplier
selection involves large amount of linguistic information and subjective expert knowledge that are
usually imprecise, vague or even inconsistent. To deal with this problem, fuzzy methods are often
used to select suppliers. However, the fuzzy methods need much priori information (e.g., pre-set
fuzzy membership function) which may increase the workload of decision makers [8,9]. The previous
approaches also lack a flexible mechanism to deal with the subjective evaluations of experts [10,11].
Therefore, to manipulate the above problems in sustainable supplier selection, this paper proposes
a novel integrated group decision method based on the ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant
la REalité) approach and rough set theory in vague environments. Different with methods based on
the compensating accumulation principle (e.g., TOPSIS(Technique for Order Preference by Similarity
to an Ideal Solution)), the ELECTRE method is based on a precedence relation and it can meet
different evaluation requirements by defining undifferentiated threshold, strict superior threshold
and rejection threshold and thus, it has stronger flexibility in decision–making of supplier selection.
Furthermore, the rough number originated from the rough set theory can flexibly reflect the uncertainty
in decision–making process of supplier selection and it does not require much priori information.
In this respect, the proposed novel approach integrates the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria
decision-making problem and the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much
priori information.
The paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents a literature review of supplier selection,
ELECTRE method and rough set. Section 3 develops an integrated rough ELECTRE method for
sustainable supplier selection. In the Section 4, a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar
air-conditioner manufacturer is used to validate the feasibility and effectiveness of the method and a
comparative analysis is also conducted in this section. In Section 5, conclusions and future research
directions are presented.
2. Literature Review
2.1. Evaluation Criteria for Sustainable Supplier Selection
Supplier selection decisions are important for most of manufacturing firms, because a right
supplier can effectively improve the economic benefit of the manufacturing firm [12,13]. In the past,
economic criteria are usually used for supplier selection. The environment and social criteria are
often overlooked. However, with the development of sustainable supply chain management (SSCM),
both the researchers and practitioners are paying more attention to environment criteria and social
criteria in supplier selection [14]. They find it is important to incorporating the social and environment
criteria into the supplier selection process [15,16]. This paper summarizes the sustainable supplier
selection criteria from the economic, environment and social aspects. The details of the recognized
sustainable supplier selection criteria with their sources and descriptions are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Sustainable supplier selection criteria.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Economic criteria
Quality [17,18]
Product quality and reliability level guaranteed by supplier.
Response [5]
The ability for timely response, completing orders on time and reliable delivery.
Cost [19]
Purchasing cost, holding cost, ordering cost and supplier’s bidding price of
the product.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
3 of 20
Table 1. Cont.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Environmental criteria
Environmental
management system
(EMS) [20,21]
A set of systematic processes and practices reducing environmental impacts.
Carbon emission &
resource
consumption [22,23]
Greenhouse gas emissions in producing, transporting, using and recycling the
product and the resource (e.g., energy, power and water) consumption of
the company.
Design for the
environment [14,24]
Design reducing the overall impact of a product, process or service on human
health and environment.
Green image [17]
The image of company in the green aspect, which can be improved by adopting
environmental friendly products or implementing ‘green’ program. It can affect
the purchasing trend of customers, market share and the relationship
with stakeholders.
Social criteria
Product liability [25]
Being responsible for customer health and safety, providing products and
services with high quality and advertising based on real information.
Employee right and
welfare [26,27]
Treating employee with dignity and respect and maintaining a culture of security,
nondiscrimination and equality. Paying to employee shall comply with all
applicable wage laws.
Social commitment [27]
Involving in local community, education, job creation, healthcare and
social investment.
2.2. The Methods of Sustainable Supplier Selection
Selecting the right suppliers to set up optimal supplier networks can help to reduce purchasing
costs and increase the efficiency of the procurement logistics process [28]. Supplier selection is a
multi-criteria decision-making problem. There are some papers concerning sustainable (or green)
suppliers. Dai and Blackhurst (2012) integrate Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) with Quality
Function Deployment (QFD) for sustainable supplier selection [18]. The approach consists of four
stages, that is, linking customer requirements with the firm’s sustainability strategy, determining the
sustainable purchasing competitive priority, determining evaluation criteria of sustainable supplier
and evaluating the sustainable suppliers. Hsu and Hu (2009) develop a method for selecting suppliers
with emphasis on issues of hazardous substance management based on Analytic Network Process
(ANP) [29]. Liu and Hai (2005) provide a method called voting analytic hierarchy process for supplier
selection [30]. Although AHP/ANP methods are more popular in the field of the supplier selection,
they are always used to determine the relative importance weightings of criteria and sub-factors merely.
They need to be integrated with other decision–making techniques. Besides, due to the number of
pairwise comparisons that need to be made, the number of supplier selections is practically limited in
the AHP/ANP-based supplier selection methods. Moreover, the conventional AHP/ANP methods do
not consider the vagueness of decision–making information.
To manipulate the increasing number of the suppliers, data envelopment analysis (DEA) is a
prevalent approach used in supplier selection. This is because DEA can easily handle huge number of
suppliers with little managerial input and output required. Kuo et al. (2012) present a green supplier
selection method using an analysis network process as well as data envelopment analysis (DEA) [31].
ANP which is able to consider the interdependency between criteria releases the constraint of DEA that
the users cannot set up criteria weight preferences. Wu and Blackhurst (2009) propose an augmented
DEA approach for supplier evaluation and selection [32]. Sevkli et al. (2007) develop a new supplier
selection method by embedding the DEA approach into AHP methodology [33]. They conclude that
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
4 of 20
the integrated method outperforms the conventional AHP method for supplier selection. However,
DEA-based supplier selection methods have some drawbacks. The practitioners may be confused with
input and output criteria. Besides, DEA is a linear programming to measure the relative efficiencies of
homogenous decision–making units (DMUs). An efficient supplier generating more outputs while
requiring less input may be not an effective supplier. Furthermore, the conventional DEA also does
not consider the subjectivity and vagueness in the decision–making process.
Beside the multi-criteria decision–making method, some researchers use heuristic optimization
approaches to select proper suppliers. Basnet and Leung (2005) develop an incapacitated mixed
linear integer programming which minimizes the aggregate purchasing, ordering and holding costs
subject to demand satisfaction [34]. They solve the problem with an enumerative search algorithm
and a heuristic procedure. Veres et al. (2017) propose a heuristic method for optimizing supply
chain including intelligent transportation systems (ITS) based vehicles for transportation operations
problems [35]. To solve the multi-product multi-period inventory lot sizing with supplier selection
problem, Cárdenas-Barrón et al. (2015) propose a heuristic algorithm based on reduce and optimize
approach (ROA) and a new valid inequality [36]. Unfortunately, the heuristic optimization approaches
omit the vagueness and subjectivity in the decision–making, which may lead to inaccurate results of
supplier selection.
In order to deal with the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment in evaluation and
selection of suppliers, fuzzy set theory is introduced into the conventional approaches. Considering
time pressure and lack of expertise in sustainable supplier selection, Büyüközkan and Çifçi (2011)
developed a method based on fuzzy analytic network process within group decision-making schema
under incomplete preference relations [37]. To manipulate the subjectivity of decision makers’
evaluations, Amindoust et al. (2012) develop a new ranking method on the basis of fuzzy inference
system (FIS) for sustainable supplier selection problem [6]. Azadnia et al. (2015) developed an
integrated method based on rule-based weighted fuzzy approach [38], fuzzy analytical hierarchy
process and multi-objective mathematical programming for sustainable supplier selection and order
allocation. Grisi et al. (2010) propose a fuzzy AHP method for green supplier selection using a
seven-step approach [39]. Fuzzy logic is used to overcome uncertainty caused by human qualitative
judgments. ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) methods are able to make a
successful assessment of each alternative based on knowledge of the concordance and discordance
sets for all pairs of alternatives. They are often used to select right suppliers [40]. Thus, Sevkli (2010)
proposes a fuzzy ELECTRE for supplier selection [41]. Although the fuzzy methods can deal with
the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment, it requires priori information (e.g., pre-set
membership function). Moreover, the fuzzy methods always convert linguistic variables into fuzzy
numbers with fixed intervals. Therefore, computation results usually do not exactly match initial
linguistic terms, which easily cause loss of information and lack of precision in the final results.
Although these methods have brought great insights to supplier selection literature, most of them
lack flexible mechanisms to handle the subjectivity and the vagueness of decision makers’ assessments.
Although some fuzzy methods of supplier selection (e.g., fuzzy ELECTRE) consider the vagueness in
decision–making information, they require much priori information (e.g., pre-set fuzzy membership
function) which consumes much time and effort of managers. Moreover, the previous fuzzy approaches
use fuzzy number with fixed interval to indicate the uncertainty, which cannot identify the changes in
decision makers’ judgments. For those reasons, there is a clear need for a new formal decision support
methodology for the sustainable supplier selection under vague environment.
3. The Proposed Method
The main objective of this paper is to propose an integrated method for sustainable supplier
selection based on rough set theory and ELECTRE. Besides, vagueness manipulation is also considered
in the proposed approach. A flowchart of the proposed approach is shown in Figure 1.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
Sustainability 2018, 10, x FOR PEER REVIEW
5 of 20
5 of 21
Figure 1.
1. The
Theframework
framework of
of rough
rough ELimination
ELimination Et
Et Choix
Choix Traduisant
Traduisant la REalité (ELECTRE).
Figure
3.1. Determine
Determine the
the Supplier
Supplier Evaluation
Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established. The
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established.
D1,DD12, D
,…,
DkD)k )who
The group
has
k decision-makers
whoare
areresponsible
responsiblefor
for determining
determining and
and the
group
has k
decision-makers
(i.e.,(i.e.,
2 , …,
ranking each criterion (i.e., C1 , C2 , …, Ck ). For the sustainable supplier selection, three aspects we
C2,…,are
Ckeconomic
ranking
eachinto
criterion
(i.e., C1,They
). For thecriteria,
sustainable
supplier selection,
three
aspects
we
should take
consideration.
environmental
criteria and
social
criteria.
should take into consideration. They are economic criteria, environmental criteria and social criteria.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have different
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have
cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set P = { p1 , p2 , · · · , ph }
different cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set
with h ordered judgments, in the manner of p1 ≤ p2 ≤ · · · ≤ ph . Let pi be a random judgment in the
p1 ≤ approximation
p2 ≤≤ ph . Let
P =P and
p1, pd2is,
, ph as
with
orderedof
judgments,
of lower
a
set
defined
thehdistance
P, where din=the
phmanner
− p1 . The
Apr (ppii ) be
and
the upper approximation Apr ( pi ) of the judgment pi can be identified as follows.
random judgment in the set P and d is defined as the distance of P , where d = ph − p1 . The
Lower approximation set:
{
}
lower approximation
Apr( pi ) and the upper approximation Apr
( pi ) of the judgment pi can
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P p j ≤ pi , pi − p j ≤ d
be identified as follows
Lower
Upper approximation
approximation set:
set:
{
≤d
Apr
( (ppi ))==∪∪pp j ∈
j ≤p p
j)d
Apr
∈P
P |pp ≥
, i ,p( p−i −p p ≤
i
Upper approximation set:
j
j
i
i
h
RN ( pi ) = piL , pU
i
{
j
i
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P | p j ≥ pi , ( p j − pi ) ≤ d
(1)
}
}
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
6 of 20
q
Where piL = m ∏ xij
q
n
pU
=
∏ yij
i
(4)
(5)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr ( pi ) and the upper approximation
set Apr ( pi ) of pi respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
For different criteria, experts might give different weights. Use wkj indicate the weight of jth
criterion with kth expert.
With the Formulas (1)–(5)
n
o
n
d j = MAX wm
(6)
j − wj
o
n
m
n
≤ dj
(7)
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≤ wm
Apr wm
j , wj − wj
j
o
n
n
m
≤ dj
(8)
Apr wm
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≥ wm
j , wj − wj
j
q
Lim wkj = m ∏ x j
(9)
q
Lim wkj = n ∏ y j
(10)
where x j and y j are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (wkj ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (wkj ) of wkj respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
h
i h
i
kU
RN wkj = Lim wkj , Lim wkj
= wkL
,
w
j
j
s
w jL =
s
(11)
s
∏ wkL
j
(12)
k =1
s
s
s
wU
∏ wkU
j =
j
(13)
k =1
h
i
We could get the weight of each criterion w j = w jL , wU
j .
3.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Apart from the decision for the weight of criteria, the experts should give the assessment of the
alternatives with consideration of all the criteria. Let’s use rijk to represent the kth expert scores on jth
criterion in ith alternative. The following is the scoring matrix. Aggregate all the scoring matrix.
k
r11
k
r21
Rk =
..
.
k
rm1
k
r12
k
r22
..
.
k
rm2
···
···
..
.
···
k
r1n
k
r2n
..
.
k
rmn
(14)
rf
rf
· · · rf
11
12
1n
f f
r21 r22 · · · rf
2n
e
R= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
..
rf
nm
m2 · · · rg
m1 rf
n
o
reij = rij1 , rij2 , · · · , rijh
(15)
(16)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
7 of 20
Determine the rough matrix with expert ratings.
d = max rijm − rijn
(17)
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≤ rijm , rijm − rijn ≤ d
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≥ rijm , rijn − rijm ≤ d
(18)
q
Lim rijk = m
∏ xij
(19)
(20)
q
Lim rijk = n ∏ yij
(21)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (rijk ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (rijk ) of rijk respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
i
h
RN rijk = Lim, Lim = rijkL , rijkU
(22)
i h
i
h
io
nh
RN reij = rij1L , rij1U , rij2L , rij2U , · · · , rijsL , rijsU
i
h
RN reij = rijL , rijU
(23)
s
rijL =
s
s
s
∏
L , rU
r11
11
L , rU
r21
21
R=
..
.
L U
rm1 , rm1
s
∏ rijkU
rijkL , rijU =
s
L U
r12 , r12
L U
r22 , r22
···
k =1
..
.
L U
rm2 , rm2
(24)
(25)
k =1
···
..
.
···
L U
r1n , r1n
L U
r2n , r2n
..
.
L U
rmn , rmn
(26)
Then, we normalize the rough decision matrix with the weight of criteria.
h
i h
i
L U
sij = rij · w j = rijL w jL , rijU wU
ij = sij , sij
(27)
” L U#
h
i
sij sij
tij =
,
= tijL , tU
ij
Cj Cj
n o
Where Cj = MAX sU
ij
L , tU
t11
11
L , tU
t21
21
T=
..
.
L U
tm1 , tm1
L U
t12 , t12
L U
t22 , t22
···
..
.
L U
tm2 , tm2
..
···
.
···
L U
t1n , t1n
L U
t2n , t2n
..
.
L U
tmn , tmn
(28)
(29)
(30)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
8 of 20
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct some field for the comparison among all the alternatives. We compare
different alternatives in two aspects. One is the concordance and the other is the discordance. Construct
the concordance and discordance matrices.
CS pq = Fj t pj ≥ tqj
(31)
DS pq = Fj t pj < tqj
(32)
CS pq represents the areas that alternative p is better than alternative q and DS pq represents the
areas that alternative p is worse than alternative q.
c pq =
∑
wj
(33)
Fj ∈CS pq
max Fj ∈ DS pq d t pj , tqj
d pq =
max Fj ∈ J d t pj , tqj
L U
L U
−
c12 , c12
· · · c1m
, c1m
L , cU
L , cU
−
·
·
·
c
c21
2m 2m
21
C=
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
L U L U
···
−
cm1 , cm1
cm2 , cm2
− d12 · · · d1m
− · · · d2m
d21
D= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
dm1 dm2 · · · −
(34)
(35)
(36)
By means of the calculation, we could get the rough concordance matrix C and discordance
matrix D.
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
After we get the concordance matrix and discordance matrix, we should determine the threshold
value. Using it to transform the matrix into Boolean matrix. First, we calculate the mean of the all
factors in matrix C and matrix D.
m
m
∑
∑ c pq
c=
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
m
∑
d=
(37)
m ( m − 1)
m
∑
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
d pq
m ( m − 1)
(38)
Compare the factors in matrix C with c and the factors in matrix D with d. According the result of
the comparison, we get the concordance Boolean matrix F and discordance Boolean matrix G.
(
f pq =
(
g pq =
1
i f : c pq ≥ c
0
i f : c pq < c
1
i f : d pq ≤ d
0
i f : d pq > d
(39)
(40)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
9 of 20
F = f pq m×m , G = g pq m×m
(41)
Then we could construct the general Boolean matrix H.
h pq = f pq · g pq
(42)
H = h pq m×m
(43)
According to the above calculations, we could get the general Boolean matrix. It is a basis for the
ranking of the alternatives. If h pq = 1, that means alternative p is better than alternative q.
Step 4: Calculate the pure concordance index and discordance index
By the Boolean general matrix, we could get part relations between all alternatives. Since if
h pq = 1, we know that alternative p is better than alternative q. But if h pq = 0 and we could not infer
the relationship of alternative p and alternative q from other alternatives, then we do not know which
is better. In order to get a rank of all the alternatives, we bring into pure concordance index cˆi and
discordance index d̂i .
Before calculating the pure index, we should transform rough interval into definite number.
Song et al. (2017) has proposed this method. We use ∆−1 represents the calculation of changing rough
interval into definite number [14].
The calculation includes the following procedures.
(1) Normalization
zei L =
zei U =
ziL − minziL /∆max
min
(44)
i
L
zU
i − minzi
i
/∆max
min
(45)
U
L
∆max
min = maxzi − minzi
i
(46)
i
L
where ziL and zU
i are the lower limit and the upper limit of the rough number zei respectively; zei and
zei U are the normalized form of ziL and zU
i respectively.
(2) Determine the total normalized definite value by
zei L × 1 − zei L + zei U × zei U
βi =
(47)
1 − zei L + zei U
(3) Compute the final definite value form zei der for zei by
zei der = minziL + β i ∆max
min
(48)
i
Therefore, we can use this method to calculate the concordance index and discordance index.
m
cˆi =
∑
q=1,q6=i
∆−1 cf
iq −
m
d̂i =
∑
q=1,q6=i
m
∑
p=1,p6=i
∆−1 cf
pi
(49)
m
diq −
∑
d pi
(50)
p=1,p6=i
Step 5: Determine the final ranking
According to the cˆi , we can get a priority in concordance. The bigger value of cˆi the higher place
the alternative would get. We use R1i for the ranking in concordance. The same we can get the priority
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
10 of 20
in discordance by d̂i . But on the contrary, the smaller value of d̂i the higher place the alternative would
get. We use R2i for the ranking in discordance. The final ranking is calculated as follows:
Ri =
R1i + R2i
2
(51)
Ri is the final rank of all the alternatives.
4. Case Study
In this section, in order to validate the applicability and effectiveness of the proposed method, we
use an example to illustrate. We assume that there is a manufacturing company. For the purpose of
choosing a good supplier, they set up a panel of 4 experts. The experts come from various departments
including purchasing, quality and production and planning who are involved in the supplier selection
process. And there are 8 suppliers for selection.
4.1. Implementation
4.1.1. Determine the Supplier Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, the experts make a decision of the criteria. In addition to economic criteria,
environmental criteria and social criteria should also be considered for the sustainable supplier
selection. These criteria consist of three parts, we use C1~10 to represent these ten criteria. They are
Economic criteria including quality (C1), response (C2) and cost (C3); Environmental criteria including
environmental management system (C4), carbon emission & resource consumption (C5), design for
the environment (C6), Green image (C7); Social criteria including product liability (C8), employee right
and welfare (C9), social commitment (C10). The detailed introduction is shown in Table 1. We use
A1~8 to represent alternatives, E1~4 to represent experts.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
After the decision of criteria, experts should evaluate the weight of each criterion. The experts
give their evaluation to the criteria in the Table 2. Firstly, we convert the grades which experts give to
criteria into rough number. Take criterion C1 for example.
Table 2. The grade of each criterion.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
E1
E2
E3
E4
4
3
6
5
6
6
4
4
6
7
5
6
7
5
4
6
4
3
6
4
4
4
5
5
6
5
3
2
6
5
6
4
7
6
5
5
5
4
7
4
According to the Equations (6)–(13) in Section 3,
d1 = 2
Lim w14 = 4 4 × 5 × 4 × 6 = 4.68, Lim w14 = 6
√
√
w1L = 4 4 × 4.31 × 4 × 4.68 = 4.24, w1U = 4 4.68 × 5.48 × 4.68 × 6 = 5.18
The same as the other criteria, following the same procedure, we can get the importance degree of
all the criteria in Table 3.
Table 3. The importance of all the criteria.
Rough Importance
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
[4.24, 5.18]
[3.57, 4.77]
[5.69, 6.70]
[5.06, 5.42]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
[2.63, 3.67]
[6.06, 6.42]
[4.28, 5.60]
4.1.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Different expert might hold different view for alternatives and criteria because of their personal
experience and knowledge. And the true information is just contained in the cognitive vagueness.
According to the evaluation towards the alternatives from the experts, we could get the rough number
of each alternative. We take the data for criterion 1 in Table 4 for example.
Table 4. The evaluation for alternative under the criterion 1.
C1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
6
4
5
4
3
6
7
5
4
3
4
5
5
6
6
4
6
4
6
5
3
4
5
3
5
2
3
5
4
6
7
5
According to the Equations (17)–(26), we use x cab for the cth expert’s evaluation towards alternative
b in criterion a. We can get the rough matrix in Table 5.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
12 of 20
Table 5. The rough matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[4.68, 5.70]
[2.63, 3.67]
[3.65, 5.15]
[4.53, 4.93]
[3.23, 4.16]
[5.02, 5.85]
[5.69, 6.70]
[3.66, 4.69]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.66, 4.69]
[2.22, 3.13]
[5.54, 5.93]
[4.54, 5.38]
[5.69, 6.70]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.06, 4.41]
[4.24, 5.18]
[5.11, 5.79]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.23, 4.16]
[4.24, 5.18]
[6.06, 6.42]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[3.66, 4.69]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.67, 6.17]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.96, 5.29]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.02, 5.85]
[4.24, 5.18]
Note: not all of the data are provided in Table 5 due to the space limitation.
Then, we normalize the rough matrix. According to the Equations (27)–(30). We can get the result
in Table 6.
Table 6. The normalized weighted decision matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[0.57, 0.85]
[0.32, 0.55]
[0.45, 0.77]
[0.55, 0.74]
[0.39, 0.62]
[0.61, 0.87]
[0.69, 1.00]
[0.45, 0.70]
[0.58, 0.86]
[0.41, 0.70]
[0.25, 0.47]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.51, 0.80]
[0.64, 1.00]
[0.52, 0.85]
[0.45, 0.66]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.68, 0.90]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.43, 0.65]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.80, 1.00]
[0.69, 0.89]
[0.47, 0.68]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[0.45, 0.76]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.58, 1.00]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.49, 0.86]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.62, 0.95]
[0.53, 0.84]
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct the concordance and discordance matrices according to the normalized
rough decision matrix. For the construct of the concordance matrix, we take alternative1 and alternative
2 for example. At the first, we should find in which criterion A1 performs better than A2, that means
the score in certain criterion, A1 is higher than A2.
According to the Table 6, we could find in criterion 1, 2, 9, A1 performs better than A2. Add up all
these weights of the criteria. We could get the value of c12 = [13.87, 16.37] in the concordance matrix.
And we can get the concordance matrix in Table 7 by repeat these procedures.
Table 7. The concordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
…
A8
[31.11, 37.19]
[33.63, 39.23]
[7.85, 10.37]
[7.81, 9.97]
[29.01, 35.71]
[19.27, 22.89]
[17.55, 21.08]
[13.87, 16.37]
[19.81, 22.93]
[13.87, 16.37]
[11.35, 14.32]
[22.20, 26.74]
[23.84, 28.67]
[22.09, 26.44]
[11.35, 14.32]
[25.17, 30.63]
[7.81, 9.95]
[7.11, 9.14]
[24.73, 30.11]
[17.04, 21.03]
[16.85, 20.25]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[27.43, 32.48]
[22.89, 27.12]
[28.13, 33.30]
[12.09, 15.55]
[20.67, 25.25]
[25.47, 31.34]
[17.78, 22.25]
–
For the construct of the discordance matrix. First of all, we find the criterion which A2 is better
than A1. And we could find that they are criterion 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10. Then we find the biggest distance
in these criteria. Using it divide the biggest distance between A1 and A2. We can get the value of
d12 = 1. Repeating these procedures and we can get the discordance matrix in Table 8.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
13 of 20
Table 8. The discordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.46
1.00
0.93
1.00
0.64
1.00
1.00
0.37
0.71
1.00
0.53
1.00
0.73
1.00
0.43
0.88
0.91
0.90
0.49
1.00
1.00
0.00
0.37
0.68
0.20
0.27
0.64
0.65
0.22
0.55
0.32
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.32
1.00
1.00
0.97
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.27
0.82
–
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
Based on concordance and discordance matrix, we construct the concordance Boolean and
discordance Boolean matrices. Calculate the concordance index and discorda
Write a 4 to 5 pages (double spaced. Charts, tables can be included) project based on following requirement. Example Attached for reference. APA formatCompany: Farfetch Research the company’s size, global reach and multi-channel strategyProvide a brief history of the companyResearch and report on:Site Traffic (using an online tool such as Similar Web)Use of Mobile and emerging technologies (Apps, Geolocation, AR, etc.)Social Media presenceSummarize your observations about the company’s operation and some future opportunities4 to 5 pages (double spaced. Charts, tables can be included)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
E-Commerce
Midterm
Brand: Under Armour (https://www.underarmour.com/)
Brand History/Background:
“All started with an idea” in 1996 founded by Kevin Plank in his grandmother’s
basement with maxed out credit card line of $40,000 in Washington, DC. Mr.
Plank was able to turn his personal experience and identified key “need” of
athletes which had inspired him to develop his first prototype T-shirt that wicked
moisture and kept athletes cool, dry, and light. His observation/insight turned
Under Armour to 16.2 Billion global company.
The growing trend of health and Fitness among everyday consumers is
increasing sales of sportswear category in the US and Under Armour has strongly
positioned its brand to the market achieving number two position in the US. Mr.
Plank is continuing to innovate its sportswear and also is planning on dominating
the fitness category through tech innovation sportswear, footwear as well as
offering of various health and fitness tech devices such fitness apps, fitness
band, headphones, health box and more.
Company Size, Global reach, and Multi-channel strategy:
The unstoppable rise of Under Armour made the Forbes’ list as one of the most
innovative company, claiming #6 position. Under Armour is not only reporting
aggressive growth in the US but seeing massive global growth as well.
In Q1 2016, Under Armour reported 30% revenue jump in first quarter of 2016, in
which global sales grew 55.6% to almost $150 million. Majority of international
sales was driven by China, as sales in China’s market nearly tripled from the
comparable quarter of the previous year (2015). Under Armour continues to
expand online as well as offline opening more than 25,000+ retail stores
worldwide.
Under Armor plans to become the world’s biggest sports brand, it is an ambitious
goal but their commitment to make all athletes better through passion, science
and the relentless pursuit of innovation had overtaken all the competition and
the only brand that stands their way is Nike. Since the very beginning, Under
Armour had been disrupting the market for sports apparel by providing
innovative product and connecting with the right audience. Its ability to have a
clear and concise strategy brought them to where they are now.
Millennials and GenZ are more than enthusiastic about the brand, and it is
perceived as the “Cooler” brand than Nike. Why? Because we are in the era of
storytelling and UA has been communicating their history and the background
on how it all started in Plank’s grandmother’s basement, we all love successful
underdog story.
Based on Sid Jatia who is the VP of direct-to-consumer and Omnichannel digital
at Under Armour says, they are reaping the rewards of a “more patient”
strategy. From a talent recruiting prospective, Under Armour has extensive
scientific strategy in place to measure an athlete can perform over the next 10
years, for example: Golfer Jordan Spieth was ranked number seven in the World
when UA signed him up and now he is now the champion, Nike passed on
Stephen Curry and went for big name Kevin Durant and now he is one of the
hottest names in the NBA.
Now, Under Armour marketing campaign ‘Rule Yourself/I Will” features these
Athletes sharing their story on overcoming the odds and becoming one of the
best. The powerful marketing message was not only in-line with their brand story,
but consistent across all of their touchpoint channels including in-store, online,
Television, radio, mobile, social and search. The winning campaign strategy
further increased awareness of the brand and successfully increasing traffic to
Underarmour.com.
Site Traffic Analysis:
Today, Underarmour.com drives about 8.9M visits according to Similarweb and
represents a growing 28% of their overall sales, totaling $321 million for the
second quarter of 2016, up from $251 million in the year-ago period. Due to the
tremendous success of the online sales, Under Armour launched its first mobile
shopping app in June of 2016, built on the Under Armour’s connected fitness
platform which means it draws information from the consumers’ health and
fitness story, as well as purchasing behaviors that will help UA to personalize
shopping recommendation.
To continue the success of their online sales, Under Armour uses the Adobe
online marketing suite tool to capture and analyze all online touchpoints to
effectively optimize digital channels to create an engaging online shopping
experience and ultimately increase conversion.
Search Channel Analysis:
For years, Under Armour successfully drove heavy traffic volumes to its website
through search engine optimization (SEO) and paid search (SEM), but they were
trying to find the best solution into how to convert that traffic into higher value
sales. With new sophisticated analytic tools, they were able to analyze
consumers online interaction, product searches, content views, and leading up
to a completed or abandoned sale. That said, I was surprised to find that when I
do search for “performance sneakers” or “sweat resistant sportswear male”
Under Armour did not show within the paid nor the organic placements. Under
Armour is focusing more on branded, promotional, and specific product
keywords. For example: “Free shipping for running shoes”, “Red running Shoes”,
”Blue sweat resistant shirt promotion” and “Stephen Curry Sneaker”
Under Armour uses the full potential of the search platform aligning with
consumer needs by providing images/shopping results and additional sitelinks
that provide more option for the consumer to take an action.
Social Channel Analysis:
Surprisingly when it comes to Social, Under Armour is less active in comparison to
its main competitor Nike. Based on my research, Under Armour is utilizing social
as virtual customer service platform to communicate with customers especially
when it comes to Facebook and Twitter.
Under Armour’s Facebook page has roughly about 5.2Million likes and is being
used as marketing tool to display new product lines, new advertising videos, but
also a place where consumer can freely post about their products and
experiences.
Under Armour’s Twitter page has about 739.3K followers and is being used to
directly talk to their consumers. On the page they also post videos, and promo
codes that can be used to receive discount on underarmour.com
Under Armour’s Instagram has about 2.6mllion followers, not as inspiring and
engaging as Nike’s Instagram page with over 64.5million followers. Under Armour
posts advertising videos, celebs images and from the recent posts, it seems they
are also being used for internal communication.
Mobile Analysis:
When it comes to mobile, Under Armour is a true innovator. Early this year at CES,
Under Armour debuted Bluetooth-connected running shoes, announced a
partnership with IBM’s machine learning Watson technology and took preorders
for Health Box, a kit of three Bluetooth-connected devices.
Currently, Under Armour has about 160+million registered users between its four
fitness apps—fitness recording app Record, personal training app Endomondo,
weight loss coaching app MyFitnessPal and exercise tracking app
MapMyFitness, and with IBM’s Watson partnership, Under Armour will be able to
aggregate data across all apps that uses its machine learning technology and
provide insights to the consumer true health and fitness behavior. Since
consumers are providing their personal information, Under Armour wants to
make sure that there is a mutual value exchange. That said, through machines
learning data points Under Armour make recommendation on how to achieve
health and fitness goals.
Now with the launched of the Under Armour shopping app, all these data
analytic insights can be applied to consumers shopping behavior as well. For
example, a Female who is in their 30’s started their fitness program and its
recorded within my fitness Pal app, and based on her purchasing behavior in
the past, she is very much into Yoga apparels, with this information Under
Armour can promote relevant content, messages, products and offers to
consumers through their shopping app. Increasing chance of conversion.
Summary Observation and Future Opportunities:
Under Armour has very clear idea of what they stand for, a brand that is
committed to provide the very best to “make all athletes better through passion,
design and the relentless pursuit for innovation”
In collaboration and partnership with best data technology companies such as
Adobe/Omniture, IBM’s Watson and coupled with groundbreaking marketing
campaign, and channel strategy made this young brand to find its own place in
the highly competitive health and fitness apparel industry and went from an
underdog to a champion.
Under Armour is perceived as “extraordinary” sportswear appeal brand
because of its humble beginning and its innovative leadership credential. They
should continue to tell their story by creating cultural relevancy among health
mind-set millennials through human connection. One thing, we all know about
millennials is that they are highly social and they are connected 24/7, Under
Armour should also capitalize these behaviors and encourage them to become
loyalist and evangelist of Under Armour. They heard Under Armour’s humble
beginning, they heard talented Athletes that overcame challenges and now it’s
time for Under Armour to hear them by giving everyday consumers to share their
fitness story through highly sharable social media platforms that is not fully being
utilized by Under Armour such as Instagram, Facebook and Twitter.
Under Armour has every platform covered, yet there is huge lack of social
presence and this marketing campaign idea will be an extension of existing
marketing strategy which it will maintain consistency across all media
touchpoints (TV, Radio, SEO, SEM etc), and utilizing social platform as a main
hub to make meaningful connections with target consumers to breakthrough
even further and truly reminding consumers that Under Armour provides “total
solution” when it comes to health and fitness, become the #1 Sports Appeal
company in the world.
Sources:
http://www.uabiz.com/company/history.cfm
http://files.shareholder.com/downloads/UARM/2543942439x0x706954/01F2ED6E68B8-41F4-87B7-D9D243A6948E/UA_News_2013_11_14_Corporate.pdf
http://www.uabiz.com/news/pressReleases.cfm
http://www.latimes.com/fashion/la-ig-under-armour-20160524-snap-story.html
http://www.fool.com/investing/general/2016/01/05/the-best-under-armourheadlines-in-2015.aspx
http://www.underarmour.jobs/why-choose-us/mission-values/
https://www.similarweb.com/website/underarmour.com#overview
https://www.marketingweek.com/2016/05/04/how-under-armour-plans-tobecome-the-worlds-biggest-sport
https://www.prophet.com/thinking/2014/08/i-will-vs-just-do-it-the-under-armoursuccess-story/
http://investor.underarmour.com/investors.cfm
http://www.marketwatch.com/story/under-armour-revenue-growth-continues2016-07-26-9485537
http://fortune.com/2016/07/26/stephen-curry-under-armour-shoes/
http://www.fool.com/investing/general/2016/05/25/the-key-to-under-armours30-revenue-growth.aspx
http://www.foxbusiness.com/features/2016/07/25/under-armour-ready-torebound-after-sports-authority-scare.html
ECO 202 Project Guidelines and Rubric
Competencies
In this project, you will demonstrate your mastery of the following competencies:
Make decisions informed by macroeconomic principles and the business cycle
Determine the economic impact of historical and current events using models of macroeconomics
Assess how changes to macroeconomic policies impact the economy
Scenario
You have just completed your seven-year term as the chief economic policy advisor responsible for managing the economy of the nation of Econland. You are expected to create a report for the incoming administration. In this outgoing report, you will summarize your macroeconomic policy decisions and the economic outcomes for Econland. The purpose of this report is to share the lessons you’ve learned over your term and promote sound macroeconomic decision making moving forward.
Directions
First, assemble the materials that you will need to complete this assignment:
Access the Macroeconomics Simulation: Econland from Harvard Business Review and select either the Rollercoaster or Stagnation scenarios. Once you have completed your final year of your seven-year term, you can access the final reports under the Dashboard and Reports tabs at the top of the webpage. You will use these charts, graphs, and other visualizations to illustrate your report in the indicated areas of the template (for example, Table 1.1). Reach out to your instructor if you have any questions about accessing these resources.
Review and use the Project Template located in the What to Submit section.
The cover page, Table of Contents, and Introduction sections of your report are provided and should remain standard in all submissions except where indicated in the template. You should read the brief Introduction section, as it provides insight into the purpose and structure of the deliverable, and add the high-level descriptions where prompted.
There are placeholders in the template for your data visualizations (e.g., charts, graphs, tables, etc.). These placeholders are meant to give you a rough approximation of the placement of the visualizations that are required. You should replace the placeholders with the appropriate, indicated images in each case. To create an isolated image from the simulation data, it is recommended that you use a snipping tool or other image-editing software to copy and paste your data visualizations into the template. See the relevant tutorials in the Supporting Materials section for more information.
You are expected to reference any source material used in your report with appropriate citations. To support you, a References page has been added to the project template with the citation for the course’s reading already provided. Any other references you add should be cited according to APA format.
Once you have assembled the required materials listed above, you can now begin drafting your economic summary report by completing the following steps:
The first section of your report is the Introduction, in which you will personalize the provided content with the particular information related to your term (i.e., your simulation results) as the chief economic policy advisor for the nation of Econland. Follow the instructions in the template for contextualizing this section, including adding Table 3 from your simulation report to the indicated area of the template (i.e., Table 1.1). Then, add a two- to three-sentence summary specifying which underlying scenario you chose and your overall performance and approval rating.
Taxation Policies: In the Fiscal Policies: Taxation section of your report, discuss the taxation policies of Econland for the public and your successor. Within this section, you should add an image of Table 1 from your simulation results to the indicated area of the template (i.e., Table 2.1). Then, answer the following questions in the paragraphs below the table:
Explain your intent for the taxation policy decisions you made over your seven-year term. What were the macroeconomic principles or models that influenced your decision making?
Identify the impact of your changes to the income and corporate tax rates. How were consumption and investment affected by your tax-policy decisions? Explain these dynamics using specific macroeconomic principles from the course reading.
Compare and contrast the impact of your tax policy decisions with those of current or historical examples in the United States. What do these examples demonstrate about the validity of macroeconomic models? Be sure to cite your research appropriately. (See the Supporting Materials section.)
Government Spending: In the Fiscal Policies: Government Expenditure section of your report, discuss government spending policies of Econland for the public and your successor. Within this section, you should add an image of the “Real GDP Growth” and “Unemployment Rate” graphs from your simulation results and use an aggregate demand and aggregate supply (AD/AS) model to the indicated area of the template (i.e., Figures 3.1 and 3.2). Images of the AD/AS model can be found in the course reading or any reputable online source. Then, answer the following questions in the paragraphs below the figures:
Explain your decision making regarding government expenditure and how it changed based on the macroeconomic conditions. What was the intent of your fiscal policy decisions in response to the given economic climate?
Evaluate your fiscal policy decisions, including how they impacted key macroeconomics factors such as real GDP growth and unemployment. To what extent did your policies yield positive or negative outcomes?
Refer to the AD/AS model to support your analysis in this section of your report.
Monetary Policies: In the Monetary Policies section of your report, discuss the monetary policies of Econland for the public and your successor. Within this section, you should add an image of the “Inflation Rate” graph from your simulation results to the indicated area of the template (i.e., Figure 4.1). Then, answer the following questions in the paragraphs below the figure:
Explain how you changed the interest rate levels and how these changes impacted other macroeconomic factors such as inflation, consumption, investments, GDP, and foreign trade. Provide specific examples to help illustrate.
Compare and contrast the impact of your monetary policies with those of current or historical examples in the United States. What do these examples demonstrate about the validity of macroeconomic models? Be sure to cite your research appropriately. (See the Supporting Materials section.)
Global Context: In the Global Context section of your report, you will expand your discussion from the particular case of Econland to consider the wider global context. Analyze the impacts of openness to trade in general. Why and how are the impacts of monetary and fiscal policies different in a closed economy versus an open economy? Support your claims with specific details from the course reading.
Conclusions: In the Conclusions section of your report, draw your overall conclusions about the relevance and significance of macroeconomics for the public and your successor.
Assess the effectiveness of your economic policy decisions. Did your economic policy decisions produce the anticipated results? Did your macroeconomic principles and models behave in ways that you expected? Provide specific examples to illustrate.
Evaluate how consumer confidence might have impacted the outcomes of your policy decisions for the economy of Econland. Why is consumer confidence a relevant factor for making informed macroeconomic decisions?
Finally, ensure that all of your sources are properly cited using in-line citations and references according to APA format.
What to Submit
To complete this project, you must submit the following:
Economic Summary Report
Your economic summary report should outline the key principles and takeaways of your Econland simulation for your successor. It should also illustrate how the macroeconomic ideas are relevant to the nation’s future economic success.
Template: Project Template Word Document
Use this template to submit your economic summary report, and submit it as a Word document. Sources should be cited according to APA style.
Supporting Materials
The following resources support your work on the project:
Video: How to Use the Snipping Tool (Beginner’s Guide) (for PC)
Use this tutorial for help with snipping, copying, and pasting your data visualizations into your project template.
A captioned version of this video is available: How to Use the Snipping Tool (Beginner’s Guide) (CC) Video.
Resource: Is There a Snipping Tool for Mac?
Use this tutorial for help with snipping, copying, and pasting your data visualizations into your project template.
Resource: APA Style Basics
Use this resource to support your in-line citations and full references in the References section of your project template.
Resource: Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System
Use this resource to support your research for the U.S. Comparisons portions of the Fiscal Policy: Taxation and Monetary Policies sections of your report.
Resource: Congressional Budget Office: Budget and Economic Data
Use this resource to support your research for the U.S. Comparisons portions of the Fiscal Policy: Taxation and Monetary Policies sections of your report.
Resource: White House: Economy & Jobs
Use this resource to support your research for the Fiscal Policy: Taxation and Monetary Policies sections of your report.
Contracts Rules Everything Around MeContracts move every aspect of commerce; big and small; down to every transaction in which you participate; down to the home you buy; the products you buy on Amazon; to the food you buy at the grocery store.What questions do you have regarding the necessary elements required to form a legally binding contract; or in what circumstances is a contract legally formed or not? (15) points will be awarded for a thoughtful question in this discussion thread that proposes a question of law for the class to answer whether a contract was legally formed or not? You must also provide a sufficient set of facts in which to apply the question of law. This can even be from a simple personal experience such as when you select an apple in the grocery store: are you offering to purchase the apple or accepting the advertised offer to purchase the apple? (more facts would be needed here to make this a thoughtfully proposed question but hopefully you get the idea). (25) points will be awarded for a correct, thoughtful response to a question. In your response you must provide a source for the law or laws that support your conclusion (which will be a citation to the textbook). If your response does not have a source of law, then it is merely opinion. Law is formed by caselaw, statutes and regulations; both state and federal; also to a lesser degree by city ordinances. Your textbook summarizes the law to the degree necessary for this course. Please also provide the necessary elements to form a legally binding contract in your answer. Expound in depth where necessary to support your conclusion. It is encouraged to have more than one answer to a question as the first responders are not always correct or awarded full points for having a meaningful response. (40) points total are available per student on the basis of: one question worth (15) points and one answer worth (25) points.
One of the documents are the instuctions and the other document is the chart that you fill in! Please let me know if you have any questions, i will tip for good work!
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ACCT7080-M50 Fall 2023
Project #1 (45 Points)
In this deliverable we will focus on the application of the material you are studying by analyzing the
financial performance of your favorite publicly held company over the last 13 months.
Our focus will be on the latest annual report filed with the SEC and the previous annual report. You
should use the SEC search engine called EDGAR to gather the information from the annual reports. We
will also use Yahoo Finance to discover certain financial performance measurements related to your
company.
Only use a company that files their statements in US dollars and in accordance with GAAP.
Complete the attached Excel spreadsheet. For the amounts, be sure to read the financial statement to
make sure you understand what is represented by each $1. It could be $1, $1,000, $1,000,000 or
$1,000,000,000.
Also, on the Excel Spreadsheet please provide the link to the two annual reports on line 7. For example,
if Federal Express was your company, you would supply this link to its latest annual report:
https://www.sec.gov/ix?doc=/Archives/edgar/data/1048911/000095017022012762/fdx-20220531.htm
Project #1 is due on 10/25/2023 by 11:59 pm. Upload your submission (Excel Spreadsheet provided)
to Canvas.
1
2
3
4
Company Name:
Stock Exchange:
Stock Symbol
Stock Price @9/1/2022
Stock Price @9/30/2023
5
Link
Most Recent Annual Report
Date:
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Inventory
Net Property And Equipment
Goodwill
Total Assets
Total Liabilities
Owner’s Equity
Total Revenue
Net Income after Income & Taxes
17
Did your company have Goodwill on the
balance sheet? If so, what caused it?
18
Using the Cash Flow Statement in the
latest Annual Report answer the following
questions. What is happening to the
company’s Cash position? Increasing or
decreasing? What is the major cause of
the increase/decrease?
19
Did Net Income after Income & Taxes
increase or decrease in the latest annual
report? What was the major reason for
change?
20
Using Yahoo Finance website (Summary
Tab) what is the current EPS (Earnings Per
Share)?
21
Using Yahoo Finance website (Summary
Tab) what is the current PE Ratio (Price
Earnings Ratio)?
22
Using Yahoo Finance website (Statistics
Tab) what is the Profit Margin?
23
Using Yahoo Finance website (Statistics
Tab) what is the Return on Assets?
24
Using Yahoo Finance website (Statistics
Tab) what is the Return on Equity?
25
Has your company been buying back its
own stock? If so, why would they do that?
Would you buy stock today in your
company? Why or why not?
Link
Previous Annual Report
Date:
Percent
Change
*
* Percent Change = (Most Recent Annual Report – Previous Annual Report)/Previous Annual Report
Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization.
Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance.
Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
From 2010 To 2016 work as mechanical Techanican From Jan 2018 to December 21 2018
Work as maintenance planner
From 2019 till Now acting as maintenance supervisor
I ateendened many courses at Saudi Aramco like Enterprise risk management ERM,Hazard Recognition and control ,Job safety analysis, supervisor foundation , Leadership is everyone’s bussiness ,emotional intelligence, edfective communication, effective meeting management, effective time managment , confilct management and ccritcal Thining
Also i have international certification as shown in attached
ERMA Enterprise risk management assoicate certificate
Risk Managemnt From IBMI
GRCA
GRCP
Occupational Safety and Health
Specialist
Occupational Safety and Health
Ssupervisor
Occupational Safety and Health
Manager
Safety Committee
Member
Educational:
I have bachelor degree in Business and administration from King Faisal University GPA:4.67. Graduated on 12 january 2016
and i got master degree in insurance and risk management from King Faisal University GPA 4.83 out of 5. Graduated on Jun 2023
Language :
Arabic
English
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Certified GRC Audit (GRCA)
OCEG and GRC Certify hereby certify that
Abdulmajeed Mohammed Alrubaya
is qualified in Governance, Risk Management and Compliance Audit (GRCA)
having passed the requisite examinations, fulfilling the continuing education requirements,
and adhering to the GRC Certify Code of Conduct.
Original Certification Date: September 20, 2023
Valid Through Date: September 20, 2024
Certificate Number: GRCA-82493142
If you are not the holder of this certificate and want to verify authenticity and current status, contact support@oceg.org.
Scott L. Mitchell
Chair, OCEG & GRC Certify
Certified GRC Professional (GRCP)
OCEG and GRC Certify hereby certify that
Abdulmajeed Alrubaya
is qualified as a Governance, Risk Management and Compliance Professional (GRCP)
having passed the requisite examinations, fulfilling the continuing education requirements,
and adhering to the GRC Certify Code of Conduct.
Original Certification Date: September 20, 2023
Valid Through Date: September 20, 2024
Certificate Number: GRCP-82476960
If you are not the holder of this certificate and want to verify authenticity and current status, contact support@oceg.org.
Scott L. Mitchell
Chair, OCEG & GRC Certify
This is to certify that:
Abdulmajeed Mohammed Alrubaya
Has successfully met all the required standards for the Enterprise Risk Management Associate
Professional (ERMAP) as established and certified by the Enterprise Risk Management Academy
(ERMA) with the professional designation of ERMAP.
Certificate ID
: ERMAP-1121365
Certificate Date
: 04 January 2023
Valid Until
: 04 January 2025
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
Abdulmajeed Alrubaya
Risk Management
2022-11-21
1035005-166-902-1973
Certificate of Professional Program Completion
This is to certify that
Has demonstrated academic excellence with distinction by completing all exams, academic requirements and a minimum
of 48 hours of study on required subjects in the OSHAcademy Professional Development Certificate Program. This
achievement demonstrates commitment and professionalism in Occupational Safety and Health.
Steven J. Geigle, MA, CET, CSHM-E
Director, Instructor
OSHAcademy Safety and Health Training
This training complies with OSHA standards and conforms with
ANSI/ASSP Z490.1 and ISO 45001 guidelines for Safety, Health, and
Environmental (SHE) Training. OSHAcademy training is widely
recognized by government agencies, colleges, technical schools,
and businesses. OSHAcademy training also qualifies for
Continuance of Certification (COC) points toward professional
recertification.
1022689
10/13/2023
48
Student #
Issue Date
Hours
Printed original certificates must include the OSHAcademy
hologram or embossed OSHAcademy seal. All certificates include a
unique QR Code and can be validated through the OSHAcademy
website. www.oshacademy.com/verify
OSHAcademy is a division of
Geigle Safety Group, Inc.
15220 NW Greenbrier Pkwy, Ste 230
Beaverton, OR, USA, 97006
+1 (971) 217-8721
www.oshacademy.com
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks) Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)a. Learning History.b. Storytelling.c. Interviews. Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks) Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1-Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle Waters. (2.5 marks)
2-Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3-How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4-Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: –
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying
from students or other resources without proper referencing will not be
acceptable. No exceptions. At least two Scholarly Peer- Reviewed
Journals are required as references.All answers must be typed
using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Do not make any changes in the cover page.Please follow the requirement in file regarding any references of requirement .Reference should be included.use reference its must be with APA styles pleaseinclude more refreances please
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11940
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Salem Alanizan
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Greeting bro,I need your support to solve the attached file assignment, please follow the instructions and avoid pilgrims also I will provide you in the next message with course material that will help you to answer the assignment file. find the case study attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 12083
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdulrahman I. Almanie
Students’ Grade: / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Justin’s case is one where an entrepreneur and built a successful product and brand and has sold it to a much bigger company, Hormel. It is seemingly a good business and one that has a bright future.
Background
Justin Gold started his business here locally in Boulder, Colorado. The idea of his company came from his personal experience as an active outdoor enthusiast seeking higher quality and better tasting organic food.
He started in his own kitchen, making a variety of nut butter products and was able to package and commercialize the product line to great success.
Watch the below video and research his business yourself to gain a deeper understanding of the path Justin’s has followed.
https://www.viddler.com/embed/f372dde9
Assignment
Write a 2–3-page response that addresses the below questions. State the question and then provide your response. Write in complete sentences (no outlines).
What point of differentiation did Justin first market and why did he do it? (3 points)
Describe Hormel’s multi-brand strategy and give examples of Hormel brands that support the strategy? (3 points)
What is meant in the video (that relates to the chapter reading about brand management) about multi-product strategy? Give an example of Justin’s and another Hormel brand. (3 points)
What responsibilities does the brand managers have at Justin’s vs. the master brand managers? (3 points)
What is meant in the video that Justin’s is a complementary brand to Skippy? (3 points)
Why did Justin partner with Hormel? Be specific with at least 3 benefits. (5 points)
The road ahead. (5 points)
What are some of the challenges that Justin’s is likely to encounter in the next phase of their company, both internally and externally?
What are the benefits that Justin’s gets in combining with a larger organization and what are the risks both short and long-term?
Hi I need help with belowEvaluating Variance from Standard CostsDiscuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
Make
Lincoln
Aston Martin
Toyota
Ford
Chevrolet
Chevrolet
Lamborghini
HUMMER
Toyota
Maserati
Chevrolet
Suzuki
Ford
Chevrolet
Scion
Toyota
Volkswagen
Ford
Lexus
Audi
Volkswagen
Ferrari
Volkswagen
Subaru
Dodge
Acura
FIAT
Buick
Suzuki
Model
MKS
DBS
Camry Solara
Mustang SVT Cobra
Tahoe
Cobalt
Huracan
H3
Sienna
Coupe
C/K 1500 Series
Aerio
Freestar
TrailBlazer
xD
Highlander
Jetta SportWagen
Transit Connect
GS 430
A3
Beetle Convertible
California T
Passat
WRX
Charger
Integra
500L
Verano
X-90
Year Transmission Type
2020 AUTOMATIC
2016 AUTOMATIC
2012 AUTOMATIC
2002 MANUAL
2019 AUTOMATIC
2013 MANUAL
2020 AUTOMATED_MANUAL
2014 AUTOMATIC
2019 AUTOMATIC
2008 MANUAL
2001 MANUAL
2009 MANUAL
2009 AUTOMATIC
2012 AUTOMATIC
2017 AUTOMATIC
2019 AUTOMATIC
2017 AUTOMATIC
2021 AUTOMATIC
2010 AUTOMATIC
2019 AUTOMATED_MANUAL
2019 AUTOMATED_MANUAL
2019 AUTOMATED_MANUAL
2020 AUTOMATIC
2020 AUTOMATIC
2019 AUTOMATIC
2004 MANUAL
2020 MANUAL
2020 AUTOMATIC
2015 MANUAL
Number of Doors
Data from “Car Features and MSRP” compiled by CooperUnion, https://www.kaggle.com/CooperUnion/cardataset
Vehicle Size
4 Large
2 Midsize
2 Midsize
2 Compact
4 Large
2 Compact
2 Compact
4 Midsize
4 Large
2 Compact
2 Large
4 Compact
4 Midsize
4 Midsize
4 Compact
4 Midsize
4 Compact
4 Compact
4 Midsize
2 Compact
2 Compact
2 Compact
4 Midsize
4 Compact
4 Large
2 Compact
4 Compact
4 Midsize
2 Compact
Vehicle Style
Sedan
Convertible
Coupe
Convertible
4dr SUV
Coupe
Coupe
4dr SUV
Passenger Minivan
Coupe
Regular Cab Pickup
Wagon
Passenger Minivan
4dr SUV
4dr Hatchback
4dr SUV
Wagon
Passenger Minivan
Sedan
Convertible
Convertible
Convertible
Sedan
Sedan
Sedan
2dr Hatchback
Wagon
Sedan
2dr SUV
highway MPG city mpg MSRP
26
17 $ 39.010,00
18
12 $ 290.861,00
31
22 $ 21.010,00
24
16 $ 4.059,00
22
16 $ 49.300,00
35
25 $ 15.660,00
21
14 $ 238.500,00
18
14 $ 38.365,00
25
18 $ 28.700,00
15
10 $ 81.013,00
18
14 $ 2.992,00
28
22 $ 15.449,00
21
16 $ 32.755,00
20
14 $ 33.945,00
33
27 $ 16.545,00
25
19 $ 36.590,00
31
24 $ 26.195,00
27
19 $ 25.590,00
23
16 $ 51.375,00
32
23 $ 47.050,00
29
23 $ 32.595,00
23
16 $ 198.973,00
38
25 $ 23.975,00
24
18 $ 31.595,00
25
15 $ 47.995,00
28
22 $ 7.398,00
33
25 $ 19.495,00
32
21 $ 24.475,00
26
22 $ 2.000,00
Field
Sum
Average
Count
Max
Min
Grader – Instructions
Excel 2022 Project
YO22_Excel_Ch06_PS1_Automobiles
Project Description:
Community Auto Sales is considering opening a new location on the east side of town. They need to determine the types of
vehicles that they would like to have on the lot for sale. They have acquired a sample data set of vehicle features and
estimated MSRP (manufacturer’s suggested retail price) and need your help in setting up some analysis so that they can
explore their options.
Steps to Perform:
Points
Possible
Step
Instructions
1
Start Excel. Download and open the file named Excel_Ch06_PS1_Automobiles.xlsx. Grader
has automatically added your last name to the beginning of the filename. Save the file to the
location where you are storing your files.
0
2
Converting plain data sets to Excel Tables can provide easy ways to explore the data.
8
The data on the AutoSample worksheet includes details about vehicles that the company may
be interested in buying for resale. On the AutoSample worksheet, insert a table with headers
using the data.
3
With the table selected, including the headers, create a CarDatabase named range to be
used in database functions later.
2
4
Insert six rows above the table to make room to create an advanced filter.
5
5
In order to create an Advanced Filter you must include the column headings to which you will
be specifying criteria.
Copy the headers in A7:J7 and paste the headings starting in cell A1.
2
6
Using the Advanced Filter, display only the records with an Automatic transmission type, that
are a Midsize vehicle size, with an MSRP of
Purchase answer to see full
attachment
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying
from students or other resources without proper referencing will not be
acceptable. No exceptions. At least two Scholarly Peer- Reviewed
Journals are required as references.All answers must be typed
using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Do not make any changes in the cover page.Please follow the requirement in file regarding any references of requirement .Reference should be included.use reference its must be with APA styles please
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 12064
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Salem Alanizan
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
Project idea: We assume that we are a team with a representative of a Chinese offshore company, and we record all the activities that occur with us in any field you want: cars, fashion, or whatever you want.It must be submitted before completion so that you can edit it if you need.the reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools, procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:Guidelines for the assignment: . It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking. Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template is not used. Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your answer will not be valid. Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial. Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs. Use the footer function to insert page number. Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project. Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing, and format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
– What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
– How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in 2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
– What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the strengths that contributed to its success.
– Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
– Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a)Mass-market cars,
b)Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c)Solar panels.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
I’m working on a management project and need the explanation and answer to help me learn.I want to solve the assighnment and prepare the presentation as the attached template and guidlines.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Names:
Student IDs:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Course Title: Introduction to Virtual
Management
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024 _1st
Term
6.
Course Code: ECOM 201
Instructor Name:
Assignment: 3 Project Presentation- GROUP X
Student Grade:
out of 10
CRN: XXXXXX
Grade Level: High/ Middle / Low
2
The Virtual Team
1. Name:
2. Roles:
3. Collective goal:
3
The Virtual Tool
1.
2.
3.
The Virtual Work Dynamics
1. Virtual Office:
2. Virtual communication:
3. Challenges:
4
5
The Proposed Reports
1.
2.
3.
General Suggestions for Future Teams
1.
2.
3.
6
7
Pictures of Your Virtual Team Process
8
Thank You!
Questions & Feedback
NO AI all requirements in the attachment similarity should be less than 7% plagrisim report is needed for any clarification please ask
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Student ID Number:
Module Code
Module Title
Module Credits
GAC6005
Investment Management
20
Academic Year and
Semester
Examination Board
Level & Block
2023-24, 1st Semester
January 2024
6-1
Method of Assessment
Term
Weighting
COURSEWORK
Mid-term
50%
Module Leader
Module Leader email
Said Al-Amri
Said.alamri@gulfcollege.edu.om
Additional Information (if any)
Version 1
Page 1 of 13
Contents
1. Assessment Details
2. Submission Details
3. Assessment Criteria
4. Further Information
➢ Who can answer questions about my assessment?
➢ Referencing
➢ Submission problems
➢ Unfair academic practice
➢ How is my work graded?
5. IV form
Version 1
Page 2 of 13
Assessment Details
Assessment title
Abr.
Weighting
COURSEWORK
WRIT1
50%
Pass marks for undergraduate work is 40%, unless stated otherwise.
Task/assessment brief:
Muscat: The MSX index closed at 4,871.01 points, down by 0.52 percent from previous close.
The Sharia Index ended up by 0.02 percent at 481.55 points. Al Batinah Power, up 10 percent, was the top gainer
while, Bank Muscat, down 5.17 percent, was the top loser. Shares of OMINVEST were the most active in terms of
number of shares traded as well as in terms of turnover.
Financial Index closed at 7,761.55 points, down 0.72 percent. Prices of Oman United Insurance were up by 1.26
percent respectively. Prices of Bank Muscat, Al Omaniya Financial Services, Oman & Emirates Investment were
up by 5.17 percent, 2.69 percent, and 1.18 percent respectively.
Industrial Index closed at 6,109.81 points, down 0.25 percent. Prices of A’Saffa Foods, National Aluminium, Al
Maha Ceramics were up by 5.56 percent, 3.45 percent, and 0.96 percent respectively. Prices of Raysut Cement,
Galfar Engineering, Jazeera Steel Products were up by 2.86 percent, 1.95 percent, and 0.35 percent respectively.
Services Index was up by 0.79 percent before closing at 1,722.12 points. Prices of Al Batinah Power, Phoenix
Power, Muscat Desalination, OIFC, Sembcorp Salalah were up by 10 percent, 3.51 percent, 2.11 percent, 1.67
percent, 1.22 percent respectively. Prices of Oman Oil Marketing, Majan College, Sharqiyah Desalination were up
by 3.60 percent, 3.57 percent, 0.78 percent respectively.
Available at: https://timesofoman.com/article/128576-omans-share-index-ends-lower-marginally-32
, Accessed: 23 March 2023.
From the above report, you are required to critically analyse the financial asset and portfolio management that
can build investment management strategies and improve effectiveness of asset and portfolio management in
order to attempt the following tasks:
(a) Briefly introduce the major issues of financial assets of the report. (10 marks)
(b) Provide critical discussion on portfolio management process portfolio management theory (30 marks).
Version 1
Page 3 of 13
(c) Identify four financial assets of the report those are worthwhile for short-term investment in long-term (30
marks).
(d) Critically discuss capital asset pricing model for effective investment decision (20 marks).
(e) A summary of the report (10 marks).
***END OF ASSIGNMENT TASK***
Guidelines to Students:
You are required to make a report (2,000 words) according to the requirements of the assignment tasks and the
learning outcomes of the module. Below is the structure or outline with logical flows of the assignment tasks to
complete your report:
Introduction – (a) Briefly introduce the major issues of financial assets of the report (200 words)
Content analysis – (1,600 words)
(b) Provide a critical discussion on the portfolio management process and portfolio
management theory (500 words).
(c) Identify four financial assets of the report those are worthwhile for short-term
investment in long-term (600 words).
(d) Critically discuss the capital asset pricing model for effective investment decision (500
words).
Conclusion – it provides the summary of the analysis with a logical flow of information given in the report (200
words).
Reference – it includes a comprehensive list of references from all sources including books, e-books, online
sources, newspapers, journals and publications using the proper Harvard referencing system (10-15 references).
*************
Word count (or equivalent):
2000
This is a reflection of the effort required for the assessment. Word counts will normally include any text,
tables, calculations, figures, subtitles and citations. Reference lists and contents of appendices are
excluded from the word count. Contents of appendices are not usually considered when determining
your final assessment grade.
Version 1
Page 4 of 13
Academic or technical terms explained:
Submission Details
Submission
Deadline:
Mid – 2nd Nov 2023
After the result
announcement (10
working days) – January
2023 EB
Estimated
Feedback
Return Date
Submission
Time:
9:00 PM
Turnitin:
Any assessments submitted after the deadline will not be marked and will be
recorded as a non-attempt unless you have had an extension request agreed or have
approved mitigating circumstances. See the Gulf College website for more
information on submission details and mitigating circumstances.
File Format:
The assessment must be submitted as a word document and submit through the
Turnitin submission point.
Your assessment should be titled with your:
Student ID number, Module code and Assessment ID,
e.g. 1610200 GAC3000 WRIT1
Feedback
Feedback for the assessment will be provided electronically via Turnitin / MS Teams
/ Face to Face. Feedback will be provided with comments on your strengths and the
areas which you can improve. Module tutors give students two types of assessment
feedback: formative, which is given when the student is working on the completion
of an assignment or coursework, and summative, which is given upon completion of
the module. A comprehensive assessment feedback on your performance will be
given after the announcement of the results. (10 Working Days)
Version 1
Page 5 of 13
Assessment Criteria
Learning outcomes assessed
On successful completion of the module, a student should be able to:
•
•
•
•
Critically evaluate the roles and origins of the global financial markets and the main theories as to how they
work.
Analyse the financial needs and decision making processes
Critically evaluate the role and functions of fund managers.
Have an appreciation of the major issues in investment today.
In addition, the assessment will test the following learning outcome:
•
Critically evaluate the roles and origins of the global financial markets and the main theories as to how they
work.
•
Analyse the financial needs and decision making processes.
•
Critically evaluate the role and functions of fund managers.
Have an appreciation of the major issues in investment today.
Version 1
Page 6 of 13
Marking/Assessment Criteria
Topics
Introduction
Content
analysis
Marks
Allocated
Description
Briefly introduce the major issues of financial assets of the report
10
Provide a critical discussion on portfolio management process and
portfolio management theory.
30
Identify four financial assets of the report those are worthwhile for shortterm investment in long-term
30
= 4 x 7.5 marks
Conclusion
Critically discuss capital asset pricing model for effective investment
decision
20
A summary of the analysis with logical flow of
information given in the report.
10
Total
Version 1
100 marks
Page 7 of 13
AY: 2023-24 / 1st Semester
Marking Criteria/Rubrics
Introduction
Briefly introduce
the major issues
of financial
assets of the
report (10
marks)
Provide critical
discussion on
portfolio
management
process and
portfolio
management
theory. (30
marks)
0
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
100
No answer
No answer
given or a
totally
irrelevant
answer.
Very Poor
An attempt to
answer the basic
requirements of
the task but lacks
clarity; highly
irrelevant ideas and
concepts; highly
irrelevant materials
which reflects very
limited subject
knowledge; no
assignment
objectives set
Poor
Poor discussion of
the assessment
task; irrelevant
ideas and concepts;
irrelevant materials
which reflects very
limited subject
knowledge; no
clear assignment
objectives
Satisfactory
Basic discussion of
the assessment
task; limited ideas
and concepts;
limited use of
relevant materials
which reflects
limited subject
knowledge;
assignment
objectives are
unclear
Good
Good discussion of
points in the
assessment;
relevant ideas;
relevant materials
reflects subject
knowledge;
assignment
objectives are set
Very Good
Very good
discussion of the
points in the
assessment task;
relevant ideas and
concepts; relevant
materials reflects
thoroughness of
subject knowledge;
assignment
objectives are
defined
Excellent
Excellent discussion
of the main points
in the assessment
task; highly
relevant ideas and
concepts; excellent
presentation of
relevant materials
which reflects
thoroughness of
subject knowledge;
clearly defined
assignment
objectives
No answer
given or a
totally
irrelevant
answer.
An attempt to
answer the basic
requirements of
the task but lacks
clarity; very poor
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts; unable to
relate the theories
and concepts to
other fields of
study; unclear
discussion of the
key terms of the
assessment.
Poor understanding
of the theories and
concepts; inability
to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
poor discussion of
the key terms of
the assessment.
Basic
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
limited discussion
of the key terms
needed in the
assessment.
Good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Very good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts in relation
to the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Excellent
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Outstanding
Outstanding
discussion of the
main points in the
assessment task;
highly relevant
ideas and concepts;
outstanding
presentation of
relevant materials
which reflects
thoroughness of
subject knowledge;
clearly defined
assignment
objectives
Outstanding
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Exceptional
Exceptional
discussion of the
main points in the
assessment task;
highly relevant
ideas and concepts;
exceptional
presentation of
relevant materials
which reflects
thoroughness of
subject knowledge;
clearly defined
assignment
objectives
Exceptional
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Version 1
Page 8 of 13
Identify four
financial assets
of the report
those are
worthwhile for
short-term
investment in
long-term
No answer
given or a
totally
irrelevant
answer.
30 marks)
Critically discuss
capital asset
pricing model for
effective
investment
decision (20
marks)
No answer
given or a
totally
irrelevant
answer.
Conclusion/
Synthesis (10
marks)
No answer
given or a
totally
irrelevant
answer.
An attempt to
answer the basic
requirements of
the task but lacks
clarity; very poor
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts; unable to
relate the theories
and concepts to
other fields of
study; unclear
discussion of the
key terms of the
assessment.
An attempt to
answer the basic
requirements of
the task but lacks
clarity; very poor
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts; unable to
relate the theories
and concepts to
other fields of
study; unclear
discussion of the
key terms of the
assessment.
An attempt to
summarise the
assessment task;
very poor synthesis
of the assessment
task; very weak
summary of the
points presented;
very weak position
on the points raised
Version 1
Poor understanding
of the theories and
concepts; inability
to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
poor discussion of
the key terms of
the assessment.
Basic
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
limited discussion
of the key terms
needed in the
assessment.
Good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Very good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts in relation
to the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Excellent
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Outstanding
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Exceptional
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Poor understanding
of the theories and
concepts; inability
to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
poor discussion of
the key terms of
the assessment.
Basic
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
limited discussion
of the key terms
needed in the
assessment.
Good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts; ability to
relate the theories
and concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Very good
understanding of
the theories and
concepts in relation
to the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts;
discussion of the
terms needed in
the assessment.
Excellent
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Outstanding
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Exceptional
understanding and
comprehension of
the theories and
concepts related to
the assessment;
ability to relate the
theories and
concepts to other
fields of study;
discussion of the
key terms needed
in the assessment.
Poor synthesis of
the assessment
task; weak
summary of the
points presented;
weak position on
the points raised
Satisfactory
synthesis of the
assessment task;
satisfactory
summary of the
points presented;
unclear position on
the points raised
Good synthesis of
the assessment
task; good
summary of the
points presented;
clear position on
the points raised
Very good synthesis
of the points of the
assessment task;
very good summary
of the evidences;
strong position on
the points raised
Excellent synthesis
of the main points
of the assessment
task; excellent
summary of the
evidences
presented;
profound position
on the main points
raised
Outstanding
synthesis of the
main points of the
assessment task;
outstanding
summary of the
evidences
presented;
profound position
on the main points
raised
Exceptional
synthesis of the
main points of the
assessment task;
exceptional
summary of the
evidences
presented;
profound position
on the main points
raised
Page 9 of 13
Further Information
Who can answer questions about my assessment?
Questions about the assessment should be directed to the staff member who has set the task/assessment
brief. This will usually be the Module tutor. They will be happy to answer any queries you have.
Referencing and independent learning (Not applicable for Examination)
Please ensure you reference a range of credible sources, with due attention to the academic literature in the
area. The time spent on research and reading from good quality sources will be reflected in the quality of
your submitted work.
Remember that what you get out of university depends on what you put in. Your teaching sessions typically
represent between 10% and 30% of the time you are expected to study for your degree. A 20-credit module
represents 200 hours of study time. The rest of your time should be taken up by self-directed study.
Unless stated otherwise you must use the HARVARD referencing system. Further guidance on referencing
can be found in the on Moodle. Correct referencing is an easy way to improve your marks and essential in
achieving higher grades on most assessments.
Technical submission problems (Not applicable for Examination)
It is strongly advised that you submit your work at least 24 hours before the deadline to allow time to resolve
any last minute problems you might have. If you are having issues with IT or Turnitin you should contact the
IT Helpdesk on (+968) 92841521/ 92841217. You may require evidence of the Helpdesk call if you are trying
to demonstrate that a fault with Turnitin was the cause of a late submission.
Mitigating circumstances
Short extensions on assessment deadlines can be requested in specific circumstances. If you are
encountering particular hardship which has been affecting your studies, then you may be able to apply for
mitigating circumstances. This can give the teachers on your programme more scope to adapt the
assessment requirements to support your needs. Mitigating circumstances policies and procedures are
regularly updated. You should refer to your Academic Advisor for information on extensions and mitigating
circumstances.
Unfair academic practice
Cardiff Met takes issues of unfair practice extremely seriously. The University has procedures and penalties
for dealing with unfair academic practice. These are explained in full in the University’s Unfair Practice
regulations and procedures under Volume 1, Section 8 of the Academic Handbook. The Module Leader
reserves the right to interview students regarding any aspect of their work submitted for assessment.
Types of Unfair Practice, include:
Plagiarism, which can be defined as using without acknowledgement another person’s words or ideas and
submitting them for assessment as though it were one’s own work, for instance by copying, translating from
one language to another or unacknowledged paraphrasing. Further examples include:
Version 1
Page 10 of 13
• Use of any quotation(s) from the published or unpublished work of other persons, whether published in
textbooks, articles, the Web, or in any other format, where quotations have not been clearly identified as
such by being placed in quotation marks and acknowledged.
• Use of another person’s words or ideas that have been slightly changed or paraphrased to make it look
different from the original.
• Summarising another person’s ideas, judgments, diagrams, figures, or computer programmes without
reference to that person in the text and the source in a bibliography/reference list.
• Use of assessment writing services, essay banks and/or any other similar agencies (NB. Students are
commonly being blackmailed after using essay mills).
• Use of unacknowledged material downloaded from the Internet.
• Re-use of one’s own material except as authorised by your degree programme.
Collusion, which can be defined as when work that that has been undertaken with others is submitted and
passed off as solely the work of one person. Modules will clearly identify where joint preparation and joint
submission are permitted, in all other cases they are not.
Fabrication of data, making false claims to have carried out experiments, observations, interviews or other
forms of data collection and analysis, or acting dishonestly in any other way.
How is my work graded?
Gulf College uses Cardiff Metropolitan University’s Generic Band Descriptors (GBD), in conjunction with
programme-specific and/or assessment-specific descriptors that are developed in accordance with the
principles underpinning the generic descriptors, as a reference in marking student work outputs. This is to
ensure that marking is consistent across all Cardiff Met students’ work, including the work outputs of students
in Gulf College.
Assessment marking undergoes a meticulous process to make sure that it is fair and truly reflects the
performance of students in their modules. Marking of work at each level of Cardiff Met degree programmes
are benchmarked against a set of general requirements set out in Cardiff Met’s Guidance on Assessment
Marking. https://www.cardiffmet.ac.uk/registry/academichandbook/Documents/AH1_04_03.pdf
To find out more about assessments and key academic skills that can have a significant impact on your
marks, download and read your Module Handbook from Moodle and your Programme Handbook from the
college website.
Version 1
Page 11 of 13
PresentationSlide 1: Why Choose Expanding in KSA (Saudi Arabia)Slide 2: Their future vision by expanding the brand in KSASlide 3: PESTLE Analysis of KSA regarding the coffee industry**Need to make a very interactive presentation with visuals and professional level.** Also need speaker notes of around 100 words under each slide
There are two parts to this reflection memo. First, describe your understanding of two strategy concepts, shown below, as developed by the relevant reading and classes. Then: how did our discussion of the Ryan Air case deepen/expand/change your understanding of these concepts? In your answer, be sure that you:demonstrate that you prepared the relevant background reading and have understood the concepts as developed in lectures. The most relevent readings are those assigned to Module 7communicate your understanding of the key takeaways from our discussion of the Ryan Air case, explaining how the case discussion created new insights and improved/deepened/changed your understanding of the two concepts. To organize your reflection, first write one paragraph for each of the concepts, then, add one or two additional paragraphs about how our case discussion changed/deepened/expanded your understanding of each of them.This is a reflection: be sure to ground the second part of your answer in your learning and takeaways from our case discussion. What you think about a case before the class discussion may be different from your understanding after the discussion: that “delta” – the insights and new perspectives gained from the case discussion – should be reflected in your memo. For this reason, you must be present in the class sessions where we discuss the Ryan Air case to submit a reflection about the case.Ryan Air Case Memo Concepts: Sustainable (defensible over time) Strategic PositioningCompetitive Advantage and sustainable strategic position
Q1. Reinsurance is a form of insurance purchased by insurance companies in order to mitigate risk. Essentially, reinsurance can limit the amount of loss an insurer can potentially suffer. In other words, it protects insurance companies from financial ruin, thereby protecting the companies’ customers from uncovered losses. (5 Mark)
Questions:
a. How do reinsurance companies work?
b. What are the Reinsurance Contracts?
c. Give example of reinsurances companies in KSA and describe their main services
Q2. What is the concept of “Fair Value? Outline the basic difference between fair value and book value of an asset. Explain the key features of fair value defined by FASB ASC. (5 Marks)
Q3. XYZ Company has the following financial data:(5 marks)
Particulars
Amounts (SAR)
Total Profit for the Year
377,500
General Takaful Assets (Year 2014)
1,390,000
General Takaful Assets (Year 2015)
1,517,500
Cash
11,500
Short-term Investment
23,500
Short term liabilities
85,000
Underwriting Surplus Distributable to Participants/Participants’ Share of Profit
145,500
Gross Contribution
958,000
Net Contribution
662,500
Wakalah Fee
77,500
Commission Paid
28,300
Management Expense
58,000
Net Claim Incurred
287,500
Earned Contribution
632,500
You are required to calculate:
Return on Assets
Quick Liquidity
Surplus Distribution Ratio
Expense Ratio
Claims Ratio
Assignment 2 Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
introductionAnswer scaleResults of the patient experience measurement programOPD Normal PatientsOPD BDU PatientsOutpatient (FMCsInpatient SurveyER Surveyexaplin each one and compiare first half 2023 and third quarter2023
Unformatted Attachment Preview
PLANNING &
DECISION
SUPPORT
Patient Satisfaction Report
PLANNING &
DECISION
SUPPORT
Patient satisfaction survey in Royal Commission Health Services Program in Jubal are measured within the patient experience
measurement survey in 4 medical journey.
Medical Journey
OPD
1
2
OPD
90%
73.2
91.9
FMCs
92%
73.2
91.9
INPATIENT
3
FMCs
4
INPATIENT
90%
84.2
89.7
Emergency room
82%
70.0
86.9
2
EMERGENCY ROOM
PLANNING &
DECISION
SUPPORT
Outpatient
3
PLANNING &
DECISION
SUPPORT
90.00
3
AUG 2023
4
شكراًًكك
-The sample size was determined according to the sample size calculation then the number
of SMS need to be sent was estimated, depend on the allocated SMS from IT. Below are
the criteria sent to IT to select the sample
A) OPD Normal Patients
1. Appointment day = yesterday
2. Visit type = New, or follow up
3. The mobile number must not receive 2 SMSs in the same
month
4. Arrived patients only
5. SMS selection criteria (according to the visits):
12% from Ob/Gyne visits
12% from Internal medicine visits
12% from Dental visits
The other 16 services, choose (4%) from arrived patient
6. Total number of selected patients: 100 daily
B) OPD BDU Patients
1. Appointment day = yesterday
2. Visit type = New, or follow up
3. The mobile number must not receive 2 SMSs in the same month
4. Arrived patients only
5. Total number of selected patients: 70 daily
C) Outpatient (FMCs) :
1. Visit day = yesterday
2. Visit type = New, or follow up
3. The mobile number must not receive 2 SMSs in the same month
4. Arrived patients only
5. SMS selection criteria: select equal number of patients from all
clinics
6. Total number of selected patients: 180 daily
D) Inpatient Survey:
1. Discharge Date = after 5 days from discharged
2. SMS selection criteria: ALL discharge patients
E) ER Survey:
1. Visit Day = after 2 days from visiting ER
2. Total number of selected patients: 150 daily
Patient Satisfactio
Inpatient Satisfaction Survey (2023)
Question
Jan
Feb
March
April
May
June
Q1. How do you rate the overall
care you received during your
stay?
89%
90%
89%
89%
Q2. Would you recommend Royal
Commission Hospital to others?
83%
91%
89%
86%
94%
94%
90%
90%
89%
88%
86%
86%
91%
94%
92%
88%
85%
94%
88%
81%
87%
92%
89%
86%
92%
90%
91%
90%
94%
92%
90%
90%
90%
92%
88%
89%
General
Admission
Q3. How do you rate the efficiency
of admission process?
Q4. How do you rate the staff
introducing themselves to you?
Nursing
Q5. How do you rate the courtesy
of the nurses?
Q6. How do you rate nurses’
responsiveness to call button soon
as you wanted?
Q7. How do you rate nurses’
concern to inform you of what’s
happening?
Physician
Q8. How do you rate physician’s
concern to inform you of what’s
happening?
Q9. How do you rate the concern
the physician showed for your
questions or worries?
Q10. How do you rate the
explanation of what will happen
during the tests and treatment?
Personal matters
Q11. How do you rate staff
attention to your privacy?
Q12. How well your pain was
controlled?
Q13. How do you rate staff
responsiveness to your emotional
needs?
Q13. How do you rate the
responsiveness to your complaints
or concerns you made during your
stay?
90%
85%
88%
85%
88%
86%
85%
85%
87%
85%
82%
81%
91%
95%
91%
90%
92%
89%
86%
91%
88%
94%
87%
85%
83%
85%
86%
85%
72%
79%
73%
70%
Q19. How do you rate the
efficiency of discharge process?
88%
91%
88%
90%
Q20. How do you rate the
information you were given about
caring for yourself at home?
89%
90%
87%
87%
Q21. How do you rate the
explanation given on discharge
medications and the possible side
effects?
90%
89%
86%
87%
March
April
May
June
90%
86%
94%
87%
92%
82%
92%
84%
Q14. How do you rate medical
personnel’ concern to clean their
hands before examining you?
Q15. How aware you were of all
medications you have taken during
your stay?
The room
Q16. How do you rate the room
cleanliness?
Q17. How do you rate the
quietness of hospital
environment?
Q18. How do you rate the food
quality?
Discharge
Outpatient Satisfaction Survey (OPD)
Question
General
Q18. How do you rate the overall
care you received during your
visit?
Q19. Would you recommend
RCHSP-J Outpatient Clinics to
others?
Registration
Jan
Feb
Q1. How do you rate the ease of
registration process?
Q2. How do you rate the courtesy
of the staff in the registration
area?
Nursing
Q3. How well you were kept
informed about delays?
Q4. How do you rate the courtesy
of the nurse?
Physician
Q5. How do you rate the concern
the physician showed for your
questions or worries?
92%
88%
92%
90%
95%
88%
95%
92%
88%
84%
87%
85%
93%
88%
94%
87%
92%
86%
94%
89%
Q6. How do you rate physician’s
efforts to include you in decisions
about your treatment?
91%
86%
92%
87%
Q7. How do you rate the
instructions the physician gave you
follow-up the care (if any)?
92%
84%
92%
87%
92%
89%
94%
90%
88%
82%
92%
84%
92%
92%
93%
91%
Q11. How do you rate the
explanation given of what will
happen during the radiology test?
93%
91%
91%
87%
Pharmacy
Q12. How do you rate the
explanation the pharmacist gave
you about medications?
Personal matters
91%
83%
85%
89%
Q13. How do you rate medical
personnel’ concern to clean their
hands before examining you?
92%
89%
90%
90%
85%
83%
86%
82%
93%
93%
94%
90%
62%
70%
60%
65%
Q8. How do you rate the degree to
which physician talked with you
using words you could
understand?
Q9. Would you recommend this
physician to others?
Laboratory
Q10. How do you rate the concern
shown for your comfort when your
blood was drawn?
Radiology
Q14. How do you rate the
bathroom cleanliness?
Q15. How do you rate the clinic
cleanliness?
Q16. How do you rate the parking?
Q17. How do you rate staff
attention to your privacy?
91%
87%
90%
88%
March
April
May
June
86%
91%
90%
90%
89%
88%
92%
94%
92%
90%
91%
89%
92%
90%
91%
90%
84%
92%
86%
83%
90%
92%
89%
90%
89%
92%
90%
92%
Q6. How do you rate physician’s
efforts to include you in decisions
about your treatment?
87%
90%
89%
90%
Q7. How do you rate the
instructions the physician gave you
follow-up the care (if any)?
88%
91%
89%
90%
90%
95%
91%
94%
86%
87%
86%
89%
92%
90%
92%
94%
Outpatient Satisfaction Survey (FMCs)
Question
General
Q18. How do you rate the overall
care you received during your
visit?
Q19. Would you recommend
RCHSP-J Outpatient Clinics to
others?
Registration
Q1. How do you rate the ease of
registration process?
Q2. How do you rate the courtesy
of the staff in the registration
area?
Nursing
Q3. How well you were kept
informed about delays?
Q4. How do you rate the courtesy
of the nurse?
Physician
Q5. How do you rate the concern
the physician showed for your
questions or worries?
Q8. How do you rate the degree to
which physician talked with you
using words you could
understand?
Q9. Would you recommend this
physician to others?
Laboratory
Q10. How do you rate the concern
shown for your comfort when your
blood was drawn?
Radiology
Jan
Feb
Q11. How do you rate the
explanation given of what will
happen during the radiology test?
87%
91%
88%
91%
Pharmacy
Q12. How do you rate the
explanation the pharmacist gave
you about medications?
Personal matters
89%
89%
89%
93%
Q13. How do you rate medical
personnel’ concern to clean their
hands before examining you?
88%
90%
88%
92%
86%
85%
83%
86%
91%
94%
93%
94%
Q16. How do you rate the parking?
87%
87%
85%
86%
Q17. How do you rate staff
attention to your privacy?
91%
91%
91%
90%
March
April
May
June
83%
84%
80%
81%
72%
83%
78%
80%
Q1. How do you rate the
helpfulness of the person who first
asked you about your condition?
89%
87%
83%
87%
Q2. How do you rate the comfort
of the waiting area?
75%
77%
76%
75%
77%
77%
75%
77%
85%
86%
84%
84%
82%
84%
83%
83%
87%
92%
87%
87%
Q14. How do you rate the
bathroom cleanliness?
Q15. How do you rate the clinic
cleanliness?
Emergency Room Satisfaction Survey
Question
General
Q17. How do you rate the overall
care you received during your
visit?
Q18. Would you recommend
RCHSP-J ER to others?
Arrival
Nursing
Q3. How well you were kept
informed about delays?
Q4. How do you rate the courtesy
of the nurse?
Q5. How do you rate nurses’
concern to keep you informed
about your treatments?
Physician
Q6. How do you rate the degree to
which the physician took time to
listen to you?
Jan
Feb
Q7. How do you rate
the physician’s concern to keep
you informed about your
treatment?
Laboratory
Q8. How do you rate the concern
shown for your comfort when your
blood was drawn?
85%
90%
85%
83%
88%
91%
87%
85%
90%
93%
92%
92%
82%
84%
84%
85%
80%
81%
76%
78%
80%
88%
81%
80%
82%
87%
83%
80%
87%
90%
88%
88%
75%
78%
73%
75%
Radiology
Q9. How do you rate the courtesy
of the radiology staff?
Pharmacy
Q10. How do you rate
the explanation the pharmacist
gave you about medications?
Personal matters
Q11. How well your pain was
controlled?
Q12. How do you rate staff
concern to keep family or friends
informed about your status during
your course of treatment?
Q13. How do you rate medical
personnel’ concern to clean their
hands before examining you?
Q14. How do you rate the
information you were given about
caring for yourself at home (e.g.
taking meds, getting follow-up
care)?
Q15. How do you rate the room
and bedsheets cleanliness?
Q16. How do you rate the parking?
https://www.moh.gov.sa/Minis
try/pxmp/Documents/MoHPXMP-1st-Half-2023.pdf
ient Satisfaction Survey (Overall)
Q2
Q3
Oct
Nov
Dec
2023 Year
Avg.
July
Aug
Sep
89%
91%
89%
96%
92%
90%
89%
96%
82%
96%
91%
89%
92%
96%
88%
94%
93%
92%
87%
91%
86%
96%
91%
89%
91%
92%
86%
95%
91%
91%
88%
92%
89%
92%
91%
89%
89%
92%
86%
90%
89%
89%
90%
95%
92%
93%
93%
92%
90%
96%
88%
96%
93%
92%
90%
92%
87%
93%
91%
90%
86%
86%
79%
95%
87%
87%
85%
91%
86%
83%
87%
86%
83%
87%
84%
81%
84%
84%
92%
92%
89%
95%
92%
92%
89%
94%
91%
94%
93%
91%
88%
91%
87%
52%
77%
83%
85%
88%
85%
96%
89%
87%
74%
74%
77%
80%
77%
75%
90%
94%
84%
87%
88%
89%
88%
94%
91%
85%
90%
89%
88%
93%
88%
78%
86%
87%
88%
Q2
Q3
Oct
Nov
Dec
2023 Year
Avg.
July
Aug
Sep
89%
95%
93%
98%
95%
92%
86%
93%
84%
68%
82%
85%
90%
96%
91%
94%
94%
92%
92%
96%
88%
94%
93%
93%
85%
88%
84%
64%
79%
83%
90%
94%
92%
92%
93%
91%
90%
93%
93%
93%
93%
91%
88%
91%
90%
88%
90%
89%
88%
90%
90%
93%
91%
90%
91%
95%
92%
96%
94%
93%
86%
91%
88%
94%
91%
89%
92%
91%
90%
93%
92%
92%
89%
94%
89%
93%
92%
91%
86%
90%
85%
95%
90%
88%
90%
92%
87%
87%
89%
90%
84%
82%
82%
95%
86%
85%
92%
96%
92%
88%
92%
92%
65%
71%
59%
90%
73%
68%
88%
92%
88%
93%
91%
90%
89%
Q2
Q3
Oct
Nov
Dec
2023 Year
Avg.
July
Aug
Sep
91%
90%
92%
97%
93%
91%
91%
88%
91%
88%
89%
90%
90%
92%
89%
88%
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
79%
86%
89%
87%
85%
86%
72%
81%
84%
91%
88%
93%
94%
91%
91%
91%
91%
92%
96%
93%
92%
90%
91%
91%
88%
90%
90%
90%
88%
91%
94%
91%
90%
93%
94%
93%
89%
92%
92%
87%
89%
90%
89%
89%
88%
92%
92%
92%
90%
91%
92%
90%
90%
91%
93%
91%
90%
90%
86%
89%
92%
89%
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
90%
85%
86%
89%
89%
88%
86%
94%
92%
94%
89%
92%
92%
86%
83%
79%
97%
86%
86%
91%
91%
92%
92%
92%
91%
90%
Q2
Q3
Oct
Nov
Dec
2023 Year
Avg.
July
Aug
Sep
82%
93%
81%
84%
86%
84%
81%
83%
75%
90%
83%
80%
86%
94%
87%
81%
87%
87%
76%
83%
77%
66%
75%
76%
76%
87%
75%
67%
76%
76%
85%
89%
83%
87%
86%
85%
83%
91%
82%
77%
83%
83%
88%
92%
87%
73%
84%
86%
86%
91%
85%
85%
87%
86%
88%
92%
85%
91%
89%
88%
92%
93%
91%
88%
90%
91%
84%
87%
85%
91%
88%
86%
78%
81%
75%
84%
80%
79%
83%
86%
77%
88%
83%
83%
83%
89%
81%
89%
86%
84%
89%
86%
82%
81%
83%
86%
75%
79%
77%
89%
82%
78%
84%
2022 Year
Avg
MoH
PG.
89%
83%
95%
88%
79%
93%
92%
78%
89%
87%
72%
89%
91%
84%
96%
89%
76%
92%
89%
80%
92%
91%
85%
91%
92%
86%
93%
90%
79%
90%
86%
79%
91%
87%
79%
92%
86%
75%
90%
92%
84%
94%
91%
82%
92%
91%
80%
90%
89%
78%
83%
79%
81%
80%
91%
80%
88%
90%
80%
92%
89%
79%
92%
2022 Year
Avg
MoH
PG.
87%
65%
93%
86%
63%
94%
92%
73%
90%
92%
71%
93%
83%
57%
85%
90%
79%
94%
91%
72%
94%
90%
70%
94%
90%
70%
93%
92%
74%
95%
89%
67%
94%
91%
72%
89%
67%
86%
75%
88%
68%
83%
61%
93%
71%
95%
65%
51%
86%
92%
94%
89%
70%
94%
2022 Year
Avg
MoH
PG.
87%
65%
93%
86%
63%
94%
92%
73%
90%
91%
71%
93%
85%
57%
85%
91%
71%
94%
89%
72%
94%
88%
70%
94%
88%
70%
93%
90%
74%
95%
83%
67%
94%
93%
72%
90%
67%
92%
89%
75%
90%
68%
90%
61%
94%
71%
95%
88%
51%
86%
91%
70%
94%
2022 Year
Avg
MoH
PG.
78%
54%
86%
72%
50%
85%
85%
61%
90%
75%
47%
83%
72%
47%
79%
81%
57%
91%
81%
56%
87%
86%
64%
87%
94%
84%
62%
86%
85%
71%
90%
91%
78%
92%
84%
77%
92%
76%
54%
81%
80%
57%
92%
81%
59%
92%
85%
57%
92%
73%
51%
92%
2023 (Result/Q)
OPD
Label
1
Jan
March
April
May
June
OPD 2023
92%
88%
92%
90%
2
OPD 2023
95%
88%
95%
92%
3
OPD 2023
88%
84%
87%
85%
4
OPD 2023
93%
88%
94%
87%
5
OPD 2023
92%
86%
94%
89%
6
OPD 2023
91%
86%
92%
87%
7
OPD 2023
92%
84%
92%
87%
8
OPD 2023
92%
89%
94%
90%
9
OPD 2023
88%
82%
92%
84%
10
OPD 2023
92%
92%
93%
91%
11
OPD 2023
93%
91%
91%
87%
12
OPD 2023
91%
83%
85%
89%
13
OPD 2023
92%
89%
90%
90%
14
OPD 2023
85%
83%
86%
82%
15
OPD 2023
93%
93%
94%
90%
16
OPD 2023
62%
70%
60%
65%
17
OPD 2023
91%
87%
90%
88%
18
OPD 2023
90%
86%
94%
87%
19
OPD 2023
92%
82%
92%
84%
FMC
Label
March
April
May
June
1
FMCs 2023
92%
90%
91%
89%
2
FMCs 2023
92%
90%
91%
90%
3
FMCs 2023
84%
92%
86%
83%
4
FMCs 2023
90%
92%
89%
90%
5
FMCs 2023
89%
92%
90%
92%
6
FMCs 2023
87%
90%
89%
90%
7
FMCs 2023
88%
91%
89%
90%
8
FMCs 2023
90%
95%
91%
94%
9
FMCs 2023
86%
87%
86%
89%
10
FMCs 2023
92%
90%
92%
94%
11
FMCs 2023
87%
91%
88%
91%
12
FMCs 2023
89%
89%
89%
93%
13
FMCs 2023
88%
90%
88%
92%
14
FMCs 2023
86%
85%
83%
86%
15
FMCs 2023
91%
94%
93%
94%
16
FMCs 2023
87%
87%
85%
86%
17
FMCs 2023
91%
91%
91%
90%
18
FMCs 2023
86%
91%
90%
90%
19
FMCs 2023
89%
88%
92%
94%
Jan
Feb
Feb
IP
Label
1
Jan
March
April
May
June
Inpatient 2023
94%
94%
90%
90%
2
Inpatient 2023
89%
88%
86%
86%
3
Inpatient 2023
88%
94%
87%
85%
4
Inpatient 2023
83%
85%
86%
85%
5
Inpatient 2023
72%
79%
73%
70%
6
Inpatient 2023
91%
94%
92%
88%
7
Inpatient 2023
85%
94%
88%
81%
8
Inpatient 2023
87%
92%
89%
86%
9
Inpatient 2023
94%
92%
90%
90%
10
Inpatient 2023
92%
90%
91%
90%
11
Inpatient 2023
90%
92%
88%
89%
12
Inpatient 2023
90%
85%
88%
85%
13
Inpatient 2023
88%
86%
85%
85%
14
Inpatient 2023
87%
85%
82%
81%
15
Inpatient 2023
91%
95%
91%
90%
16
Inpatient 2023
92%
89%
86%
91%
17
Inpatient 2023
88%
91%
88%
90%
18
Inpatient 2023
89%
90%
87%
87%
19
Inpatient 2023
90%
89%
86%
87%
20
Inpatient 2023
89%
90%
89%
89%
21
Inpatient 2023
83%
91%
89%
86%
22
Inpatient 2023
Jan
Feb
ER
Label
March
April
May
June
1
ER 2023
Feb
89%
87%
83%
87%
2
ER 2023
75%
77%
76%
75%
3
ER 2023
77%
77%
75%
77%
4
ER 2023
85%
86%
84%
84%
5
ER 2023
82%
84%
83%
83%
6
ER 2023
87%
92%
87%
87%
7
ER 2023
85%
90%
85%
83%
8
ER 2023
80%
81%
76%
78%
9
ER 2023
88%
91%
87%
85%
10
ER 2023
90%
93%
92%
92%
11
ER 2023
82%
84%
84%
85%
12
ER 2023
80%
88%
81%
80%
13
ER 2023
82%
87%
83%
80%
14
ER 2023
87%
90%
88%
88%
15
ER 2023
86%
85%
84%
83%
16
ER 2023
75%
78%
73%
75%
17
ER 2023
83%
84%
80%
81%
18
ER 2023
72%
83%
78%
80%
19
ER 2023
esult/Q)
July
Aug
Sep
96%
91%
94%
96%
88%
94%
88%
84%
64%
94%
92%
92%
93%
93%
93%
91%
90%
88%
90%
90%
93%
95%
92%
96%
91%
88%
94%
91%
90%
93%
94%
89%
93%
90%
85%
95%
92%
87%
87%
82%
82%
95%
96%
92%
88%
71%
59%
90%
92%
88%
93%
95%
93%
98%
93%
84%
68%
July
Aug
Sep
92%
89%
88%
90%
90%
79%
85%
86%
72%
88%
93%
94%
91%
92%
96%
91%
91%
88%
88%
91%
94%
94%
93%
89%
89%
90%
89%
92%
92%
90%
90%
91%
93%
86%
89%
92%
90%
90%
90%
86%
89%
89%
92%
94%
89%
83%
79%
97%
91%
92%
92%
90%
92%
97%
88%
91%
88%
Oct
Nov
Dec
Oct
Nov
Dec
July
Aug
Sep
96%
88%
94%
91%
86%
96%
91%
87%
52%
88%
85%
96%
74%
77%
80%
92%
86%
95%
92%
89%
92%
92%
86%
90%
96%
88%
96%
95%
92%
93%
92%
87%
93%
86%
79%
95%
91%
86%
83%
87%
84%
81%
92%
89%
95%
94%
91%
94%
94%
84%
87%
94%
91%
85%
93%
88%
78%
91%
89%
96%
96%
82%
96%
Oct
Nov
Dec
Oct
Nov
Dec
96%
July
Aug
Sep
94%
87%
81%
83%
77%
66%
87%
75%
67%
89%
83%
87%
91%
82%
77%
92%
87%
73%
91%
85%
85%
81%
75%
84%
92%
85%
91%
93%
91%
88%
87%
85%
91%
86%
77%
88%
89%
81%
89%
86%
82%
81%
80%
80%
85%
79%
77%
89%
93%
81%
84%
83%
75%
90%
70%
Outpatient
Label
MOH (77.28%)
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
GCC (78.21%)
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
PG (92.65%)
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
Source: MOH 1st half 2023
FMCs
Label
MOH (81.19%)
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
GCC (78.21%)
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
PG (92.65%)
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
Inpatient
Label
MOH (86.42%)
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
GCC (84.33%)
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
PG (85.05%)
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
ER
Label
MOH (69.42%)
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
GCC (68.41%)
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
PG (85.36%)
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
77.28%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
81.19%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
78.20%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
92.70%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
86.42%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
84.30%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
85.10%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
69.42%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
68.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
85.40%
OPD
Month
Responses
from survey
FMCs
SMSs sent
Response
Rate
Responses
SMSs sent
Response
Rate
Jan
Feb
March
86
1,438
6.00%
128
2,987
4.30%
April
69
831
8.30%
126
1,574
8.00%
May
58
1,478
3.90%
104
2,837
3.70%
June
82
965
8.50%
129
1,851
7.00%
July
61
1,098
5.60%
88
2,094
4.20%
Aug
67
1,180
5.70%
110
2,550
4.30%
Sep
60
1,108
5.40%
80
2,070
3.90%
Oct
Nov
Dec
Inpatient
ER
SMSs sent
Response
Rate
Responses
SMSs sent
Response
Rate
54
687
7.90%
115
2,798
4.10%
55
480
11.50%
106
2,453
4.30%
51
639
8.00%
148
2,650
5.60%
59
659
9.00%
134
2,196
6.10%
58
563
10.30%
102
1,820
5.60%
63
574
11.00%
68
2,251
3.00%
68
701
9.70%
118
2,511
4.70%
Responses
Topic: Explain the Army Design Methodology (ADM) activity of framing problems. Moreover, describe the importance of using the ADM key concepts, tools, and techniques for this activity. Provide examples to support your points. Present how you envision facilitating this activity in your organization. Examples should be based on Army missions, etc.
1700-2000 Words not including reference page, or title page (cannot go over 2000 words).
Strong Thesis statement must be the last sentence of introductory paragraph. This section is where you will present the thesis of the essay and clearly articulate
the main points that you will be presenting in the body of the paper.
Reworded thesis must be used in the conclusion as the first sentence to begin the summary of the paper.
Minimum of four sources. Must be scholarly sources, or Army based materials. Formatting of sources needs to be correct based on APA standards.
Minimum of 3 Level One Headings Required. This section should present a well-organized paper based on research, facts, logic and your ideas and experience about the selected focused-area topic. This section should clearly flow from point to point with clear transitions between points. A minimum of three Level 1 headings are required.
Avoid direct quotations
Cite heavily in terms of anything that has a date, or statistics, or is a statement that is not general knowledge will need to be cited.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
Q1. Imagine you are the auditor of an organization and you find that the Trial balance of the financial year does not tally (Dr and Cr are not equal)
What are the types of audit test you would cover, explain with examples.
Explain the assertions you would apply on transactions and events, on Account balances, and on Presentation &Disclosure. (4 Points)
Answer:
Q2. Chapter 4
When an Auditor finds misstatements in entities financial statements which may be the result of fraudulent act, what should be the role of an auditor under that situation? (2 Points)
Answer:
Q3 Chapter 5
‘Audit evidence is all that information, from whatever source, used by the auditor in arriving at the conclusions on which the audit opinion is based.’
Briefly explain the three main concepts of audit evidences. ( 3 Points)
Answer
Q4. Chapter 7
Explain auditor’s documentation Process and procedures of internal control over financial reporting (ICFR) and its types of audit reports. (3 Points)
Answer
Q5 Chapter 8
Explain the Concept of Audit Sampling and types of Sampling Risk. (3 Point)
Answer
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Deadline: 07/10/.2023@ 23:59
Course Name: Auditing Principles and Procedures
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Sem 2023-2024
CRN:
Academic Year:1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained
/Out of 15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
INSTRUCTIONS:
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions:
Total Marks 15
Q1. Imagine you are the auditor of an organization and you find that the Trial balance of
the financial year does not tally (Dr and Cr are not equal)
a. What are the types of audit test you would cover, explain with examples.
b. Explain the assertions you would apply on transactions and events, on Account
balances, and on Presentation &Disclosure. (4 Points)
Answer:
Q2. Chapter 4
When an Auditor finds misstatements in entities financial statements which may be the result
of fraudulent act, what should be the role of an auditor under that situation? (2 Points)
Answer:
Q3 Chapter 5
‘Audit evidence is all that information, from whatever source, used by the auditor in
arriving at the conclusions on which the audit opinion is based.’
Briefly explain the three main concepts of audit evidences. ( 3 Points)
Answer
Q4. Chapter 7
Explain auditor’s documentation Process and procedures of internal control over financial
reporting (ICFR) and its types of audit reports. (3 Points)
Answer
Q5 Chapter 8
Explain the Concept of Audit Sampling and types of Sampling Risk. (3 Point)
Answer
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Public Management (MGT 324)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Public Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 324
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: XXXXXX
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs):
1. Describe the simple and complex issues pertaining to public management
2. Demonstrate different management and leadership styles for different situations
Assignment Questions:
Discuss the following questions:
Q1. “Leaders are born, not made.” In light of this statement, briefly explain the concept of
leadership and its role in organizational development in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Q2. “Leadership strategy is essential for the growth and success of an organsiation”. In light
of this statement, discuss the different leadership approaches to leading an organization and
analyze work and their relevance in the present-day context in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Answers
Greeting bro,I need your support to solve the attached file assignment, please follow the instructions and avoid pilgrims also I will provide you in the next message with course material that will help you to answer the assignment file.Case study in E-text file from page 769- 781
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 12072
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdulrahman I. Almanie
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I have a company that is based online through website and app and it will be for car rental shops so i want to make a contract for the shops so they can put there shop in my website and app and my company name is Carent so the pricing will be i will take 20% from each car and first 3 months will be free and then there will be a subscription feeIt will be like an app and website so it will be b to c business
On successful completion of this assignment the student will be able:
1. To develop abilities to gather, analyse, interpret and evaluate information on
Employee Satisfaction and Engagement related process, practice and laws.
2. To strengthen conceptual and analytical skills in the study of Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement.
3. To apply a range of Employee Satisfaction and Engagement principles and
concepts.
4. To build tangible links between the theory and practice of Employee Satisfaction
and Engagement.
5. To heighten awareness and understanding of Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement in action
6. To develop and present thoughts, arguments and informed opinions in a logical
and coherent way.
7. To demonstrate academic and management research, report writing and
composition skills with academic integrity.
8. To consistently apply the APA system of academic referencing.
9. To demonstrate word processing and IT skills
10.To develop project and time management and execution skills.
11.To develop healthy and functional work habits in progressing confidently and
consistently towards a defined submission
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Learning Outcomes:
On successful completion of this assignment the student will be able:
1. To develop abilities to gather, analyse, interpret and evaluate information on
Employee Satisfaction and Engagement related process, practice and laws.
2. To strengthen conceptual and analytical skills in the study of Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement.
3. To apply a range of Employee Satisfaction and Engagement principles and
concepts.
4. To build tangible links between the theory and practice of Employee Satisfaction
and Engagement.
5. To heighten awareness and understanding of Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement in action
6. To develop and present thoughts, arguments and informed opinions in a logical
and coherent way.
7. To demonstrate academic and management research, report writing and
composition skills with academic integrity.
8. To consistently apply the APA system of academic referencing.
9. To demonstrate word processing and IT skills
10.To develop project and time management and execution skills.
11.To develop healthy and functional work habits in progressing confidently and
consistently towards a defined submission deadline date.
Individual Written Assignment
Based on the Scenario below, design an employee satisfaction survey and develop a
follow up employee satisfaction strategy and plan to promote employee engagement.
Scenario – Stacey is the vice president of HR at ‘ITFast’, a midsized IT sector company.
She has called for an urgent meeting of HR department staff as nearly 100 employees
had given the notice to leave the company in recent weeks. “This is a long list of
escapees….we’re losing them faster than your people can bring them in,” she said,
turning to John, the head of recruiting. “Our turnover rate is up to 35%.” “We are
growing —in revenue, profitability, and reputation, I just don’t understand why people
are leaving us fast” said Stacey. “I need to present these numbers to Mr. Richard Leo
(CEO) at the end of the week, and I can’t do that without a theory on what’s happening
and a solution to propose. That’s why I called this meeting,” said Stacey. “This is even
surprising given that our work culture is our biggest selling point. We don’t treat our
employees just as a cog in the machine, and our company and its managers — Richard
included — will listen to them. That everyone at ‘ITFast’matters.”
PART A -Task: Stacey has hired you as their HR consultant to create and roll out an
employee satisfaction survey that will help her uncover the reasons behind employee
turnover so that she can put new policies in place. Your task is to carefully design the
questionnaire (15 questions) in the light of theories/concepts/Canadian Laws discussed
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
2
in the class. You can use any rating scale to design your questionnaire (for example
Likert, creating ranges for each question – very satisfied to not satisfied at all – refer to
the image given below). Use your creativity to design the questionnaire. • Keep in mind,
you cannot ask any discriminatory questions prohibited by law, in the survey. • For every
question include a line or two to explain the purpose of this question and how will this
question help you to know the causes of employee dissatisfaction and in turn boost
engagement. Avoid lengthy explanations Include at least 1-2 references for each
question you are asking or to support the question rationale and explanations. • You will
also be marked down for every question that seems irrelevant/off the topic. • Create your
own questions from scratch any copied questions from the internet and other sources
will be marked down. You can check secondary sources only for brainstorming not for
copy-pasting. Follow the best practices in survey design.
PART B -Task: based on areas of improvement (identified through survey questions)
in part A – create an employee engagement/satisfaction strategy and plan for ITFast that
will help them reduce employee turnover and boost employee engagement. • Your plan
should have clearly identified strategies/programs (3 strictly), each
5 Steps to successfully completing this assignment:
1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories, Concepts and Frameworks.
2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
3.
Double check your assignment against the marking and assessment rubrics.
4.
Put assignment through Turnitin with a Similarity Score of 20% Or less and an
AI score of 10% or less
5.
Submit the final assignment online via LMS-Brightspace by the stipulated
deadline.
Step 1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories and Frameworks
Finding relevant information about the Employee Satisfaction and Engagement systems
and practices of an industry and company can be challenging and requires you to utilize
the skills of an investigative business journalist. It is critical to understand the industry
first and the dynamics of the sector. It’s like you cannot under a family member unless
you understand the family unit. Read generally on the topic first starting with your core
textbook and then funnel your research into the specifics and micro-aspects of the
topic(s).
Finding Relevant Information:
There is a significant number of resources to draw from and should include the
following: Note: Google should not be your first port of call. Google, Wikipedia will
not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked
down for using them. You can use company websites, Job Market analysis taken from
Statista and
other reliable sources.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
3
UCW Library – on shelf and academic online resources should be your first post
of call. UCW library databases
Industry trade magazines and professional body publications
Company website and HR and career portals
Best Place to Work – Canada, website and league tables.
Please explore all the usual sources such as Google Scholar,
-See Core Textbook and Other Texts Books on Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement and Human Resources Management.
On Line and On Shelf Journals, preferably peer reviewed.
Online Databases and Portals which contains many relevant Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement information in peer reviewed journals.
Set up a “Google Alert” or a “Journal Article Alert” Updates” to get information
on a particular topic be mailed to you on a regular basis.
Secondary References: chase up relevant references listed in the Footnotes &
Bibliographies of Journal Articles and at the back of Textbooks.
Also consider YouTube and Social Media searches.
Ask the UCW Librarian, they are the experts in information finding and retrieval
and are there to help.
Attend the various UCW Library workshops on such topics as “Doing Industry
Research” which are held synchronously and asynchronously.
Step 2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
Writing Up the Assignment: The 2 Ss: Style and Substance are both important.
Substance and Body of Assignment:
Ensure all requirements and parts of the assignment are fully addressed and satisfactorily
fulfilled. Infuse your creativity into the assignment especially in designing a
questionnaire that is graphically appealing and has rating scales of some sort. Research
the best practice and tools in survey design. The use of graphics and/or colors will reflect
creativity. Demonstrative robustness of your research by using at least 10 references –
Google, Wikipedia will not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked down
for using them. You can use company websites, Governmental & provincial websites of
Canada, Labour laws both federal and provincial, updated textbooks, and industry
papers, etc., •
Ensure to Include:
Table of Contents (how to automatically create a table of contents in Word – https://youtu.be/0cNJX6HP7c (7 min you tube clip)
Introduction (a short introduction about the aim and purpose of the report and what you
hope to achieve. Signpost what you are going to do in the assignment and so lead and
guide the reader.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
4
Conclusion
Key takeaways
References/Bibliography (at least 10 references)
Appendices: Will contain any support documentation you wish to include such as
complicated diagrams or tables or visuals, which may impede the flow of reading if they
were in the body of the document.
Style: Assignment Format and Checklist:
Word Count: The assignment should be approx. be 3,000 minimum and 3,500 maximum
words with 10% flexibility on either end.
This excludes any footnotes, references, bibliography or appendices.
Format:
The assignment should be presented in word processed format adhering to the following
guidelines:
Essay style or report style formal structure.
Word only format, not PDF
Table of Contents at front (how to automatically create a table of contents in Word
– https://youtu.be/0cN-JX6HP7c (7 min you tube clip)
Consistent Style of APA Citation Referencing. See the APA Template on the
Library
section
or
watch
this
video
on
APA
guidelines
Clear paragraphing with headings and sub-headings.
Use of plenty of white space, breaking up the text with visual aids, diagrams,
graphs, etc. If too bulky, put in Appendix.
Double line spacing
Numbered paragraphs 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 etc. APA style
Times New Roman 12
Pages Numbered
Minimum of 10 references
Proof Read and Spell Checked
Conclusion (shot conclusion that summarizes your main findings and takeaways from
the assignment – 250 words approx.
References/Bibliography (at least 10 references)
Step 3: Follow and Double Check Your Final Work Against the Assessment and
Rubrics and Marking Scheme Below:
Assessment Rubrics: The rubric contains the criteria upon which the assignment will be marked
against and upon which feedback will be based.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
5
Specific Rubric:
Marking Rubric: Please read and observe the marking rubric carefully.
Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Comments
Subject Matter
(70%)
Key elements of assignments are covered especially all
parts and sub-parts.
Content is comprehensive, accurate, persuasive.
Displays an understanding of relevant theory, concepts
and frameworks.
Demonstrates an application of theory into practice.
Uses relevant and current examples from best practice.
Research is adequate/timely, and citations
are academically valid
Analysis and
Critical Thinking
(25%)
Present persuasive and research informed arguments
Major points supported by specific references.
Clear and logical line of thought and argument
Give own research informed opinion.
Integrate both the theory and practice to reach
new insight.
Organization and Readability/Style and
Grammar /Punctuation/Spelling and APA (10%)
Max.
Grade
Subject Matter (70%)
70
Analysis & CT (25%)
20
Style/Mechanics
(10%)
10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The introduction provides a sufficient background
on the topic and previews major points.
Central theme/purpose is immediately clear.
Structure is clear, logical, and easy to follow with
proper headings.
Subsequent sections develop/support the central theme.
The conclusion follows logically from the body of the
paper
Sentences are complete, clear, and concise.
Sentences are well-constructed with consistently
strong, varied structure.
Transitions between
sentences/paragraphs/sections help maintain the
flow of thought.
Words used are precise and unambiguous.
The tone is appropriate to the audience,
content, and assignment.
Grammar, Spelling and Punctuation
checked.
Reference page is present and properly formatted.
Grade on 100
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
Subtotal
Penalties
100
6
General Rubric:
DESCRIPTOR
Exceptional: Normally achieved by a small
minority of students who have
consistently exceeded performance
expectations in all evaluation criteria.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
GRADE
90-100% A+
(4.33)
7
Excellent: Demonstrates a comprehensive
knowledge and understanding of subject
matter and achievement of learning
outcomes at high levels of performance in
almost all of the evaluation criteria.
Very good: Demonstrates a
comprehensive knowledge and
understanding of the subject matter and
achievement of learning outcomes at well
above average levels of performance in
most of the course evaluation criteria.
Good: Demonstrates substantial
knowledge and understanding of the
subject matter and achievement of
learning outcomes at average to above
average performance levels in most of the
course evaluation criteria
Satisfactory: Demonstrates sufficient
knowledge and understanding of the
subject matter and achievement of
learning outcomes at average levels of
performance in most of the course
evaluation criteria.
Pass: Demonstrates acceptable knowledge
and understanding of the subject matter
and achievement of learning outcomes at
low to average level of performance in
many of the course evaluation criteria.
Fail: Unacceptable performance in most or
all of the course evaluation criteria
85-89% A (4.00)
80-84% A- (3.67)
76-79% B+ (3.33)
72-75% B (3.00)
68-71% B- (2.67)
60-67% C (2.00)
0-59% F (0)
Given the nature of “relative grading” (competition), your grades will normally follow
a normal distribution curve which means Grade A and A+ will be very rare and few as
will Fail Grades.
Step 4.
Put the Assignment Through Turnitin only Once With a Similarity
Score of 20% Or Less and an AI Score of 10% or Less
This course requires you to submit your assignment in electronic form. The electronic
material will be submitted to a service to which UCW subscribes, called Turnitin. This
is a service that checks textual material for originality. Turnitin.com is used increasingly
in North American universities. For additional information please visit:
https://turnitin.com/static/resources/documentation/turnitin/sales/Turnitin_FAQ_Questi
ons_and_Answers.pdf
If you are still unsure what plagiarism means, then please visit www. Plagiarism.org
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
8
The Turnitin Company has recently re-launched Plagiarism.org, an educational and
informative resource on plagiarism and best practices for ensuring originality in written
work. This site, geared toward students and writers in general, offers a wealth of
information specifically about plagiarism, as well as information on how to properly
attribute and cite sources. On Plagiarism.org, you’ll also find an “Ask the Experts”
feature, FAQs, and a resource section with downloadable handouts. Also please visit
the UCW Library website.
On the LMS-Brightspace page for this course part and assignment you will find the
location where you upload the assignment to Turnitin. You can only submit it Once
to Turnitin by the due date.
If you look at the assignment of a previous student who took this course, even just as a
reference, this is still plagiarism and cheating. Always use your own words and your
own voice as it’s your assignment and your ideas only. Even if your English is not
perfect it is always best to put in your own words rather than risk breaching academic
integrity. During exam, you’re not allowed to look at other people’s work under any
circumstances and the same rules apply for assignments.
Consequences and Penalties of Plagiarism and Academic Misconduct: See UCW’s
Academic Integrity Policy: No. 5006. This policy is strictly enforced, and a breach
may ultimately lead to you failing the course and the program.
https://www.ucanwest.ca/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/UCW-Policy-5006-AcademicIntegrity-2023-07-04.pdf
o UCW is a relatively small academic community of faculty and students where
everyone knows each other. Any blemish or damage to your reputation and your
personal and academic integrity will impact your professional standing and future
academic and professional options.
o If you are found guilty of cheating, you will be labelled as a “cheater” and you will
carry this reputation for the rest of your stay in this school and it may appear on your
academic record/transcript when looking for academic references in order to pursue
further studies and or when seeking employment.
Troubleshooting Turnitin:
If you encounter difficulties with your Turnitin submission, try one of these two
strategies (solves it 99% of the time)
1. Wait an hour or two or three and try submitting again.
2. Try using a different web browser or computer.
Important: Please note the Instructor has no control or authority over the Turnitin system
so they are unable to help you if you have trouble with submission. You must contact
the IT department. So, allow sufficient time for any obstacles or delays. It is wise to
submit your assignment couple days before the due date, so you still have time to fix it
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
9
if you experience submission problems. If you submit your assignment at the last
moment and experience submission problems, there is nothing the instructor can do, and
you will incur a penalty for a late submission. If you email an Instructor on the weekends
with problems, they will not be able to reply to you until Monday. So, resolve issues in
a timely manner before the weekend and during the office hours of the Instructor and
UCW IT Department.
Turnitin Similarity Score 20% or Less and an AI Score of 10% or Less:
You may upload your assignment only Once by the deadline so that you are below the
20% comparability score.
An assignment with a comparability score of greater than 20% will be penalized. So
please ensure you have a score of 20% or less before final submission.
Over 30% is normally an automatic failure of the assignment and this will be reported
to the Head of Department and the AIC (Academic Incident Committee) for review
and further action and possible sanctions.
If you use Grammerly as an initial check for similarity score, remember that Turnitin
will add a minimum of extra 15%-20% to the score you get from Grammerly so don’t
rely on it or trust the result.
If you believe you completed an honest assignment but still went over 20%? Then you
need to revisit your refences. If you did an inadequate job of researching for
references, you will end up including many references that other students have already
used, and this will increase your similarity score. There are millions of articles
available to enable you to complete a robust and rigorous literature review and a
systematic research process. Consult the UCW Librarians for help. They are the
experts on finding resources and they are there to help you and make you a better
researcher.
Tips on Lowering Similarity Scores
1. No direct quotes from references (not even one sentence). Always paraphrase.
everything and include proper citation. It is only fair that you acknowledge and give
credit to where you got the idea or concept from.
a. In other words, DON’T COPY ANY QUOTES from the references.
b. DO NOT directly copy the assignment questions to your assignment as this will
increase your similarity score.
2. Carry out a comprehensive review in researching so your references are not going to
overlap with other students’ assignments,
a. If it only took you 30 minutes to find a particular reference, chances are very.
high that previous students already used those so if you use the same reference, it.
will increase your similarity score. That is why Google Scholar should not be your first
port of call.
b. Avoid searching through Google and even Google Scholar and don’t include online
news articles and magazines.
c. Go to the library (not just our school but also other libraries) and search for
books
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
10
d. Search for online for peer reviewed journal articles from scholarly portals and
databases such as EBSCO and JSTOR
e. Sign up for “Journal Article Alerts” from such journal article publishers as “Wiley
Online”.
Step 5.
Submit the Final Assignment Online Via Student Portal (LMSBrightspace) by the Stipulated Deadline.
The stipulated deadline for this assignment is on the cover page as well as in the syllabus.
It is usually Wednesday midnight of the stipulated week. But please double check on
LMS-Brightspace and with your Instructor. Please double check the date and submit it
on time. Put the date in your cell phone calendar. Please build sufficient time into your
planning to allow for Turnitin to produce a comparability report and % in time.
Submit on the LMS-Brightspace page for this course section, on the Turnitin link.
Late Assignments will be penalized at a rate of 10% of the final assignment grade, per
day.
Start Your Assignment NOW! – One Step at a Time! Only 5 Steps!
Do not wait until your assessment topic is covered in a lecture, if applicable, as it may
be too late. So, start your essay NOW with planning and information gathering. Work
on it every day, even if only for 15 minutes.
Be pro-active in your planning and not to rely on JIT (Just in Time) or last-minute
syndrome which is often part of the deadline-procrastination doom loop. Please read
these articles below to gain more insight into the psychology of procrastination and the
negatives of a last-minute approach to work.
1. Thompson, Derek (2014) The Procrastination Doom Loop—and How to Break It?
Delaying Hard Work is All about Your Mood. In the Atlantic August 26th Access full
article at:
http://www.theatlantic.com/business/archive/2014/08/the-procrastination-loop-andhow-to-break-it/379142/
2. Jaffe, Eric (2014) Why Wait? The Science Behind Procrastination: After a Long
Delay, Psychological Science is beginning to Understand the Complexities of
Procrastination in Association for Psychological Science Access full article at:
http://www.psychologicalscience.org/index.php/publications/Employee
Satisfaction
and
Engagement
server/2013/april-13/why-wait-the-science-behindprocrastination.html
How to Create Instant Motivation and Break the Procrastination Habit
Marking/Grading and Feedback Timeline:
Assuming a class size of 20 students it will take two weeks for the Instructor to grade
your assignment and longer with larger classes.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
11
Feedback from the Instructor will be posted usually within the Turnitin version of the
submitted assignment on the LMS-Brightspace.
Instructor, Contact Details and Appointments:
Dr. Pauric P. O’Rourke
PhD, MSc, MBS, LLM, B.A, CTLHR, PGC (Blended Learning), Fellow HEA, CMBE,
CPHR (Canada), SPHR (USA), Chartered MCIPD (UK)
E-Mail: pauric.o39rourke@myucwest.ca
Do Not use MS Teams to communicate with the Instructor.
If you wish would discuss any issue with the Instructor, please speak to them before or
after class and see their posted Office Hours on LMS-Brightspace. Face to face
communication is easier, quicker and clearer. If you need to set up an appointment to
meet in person or on Zoom with the Instructor please give adequate notice and indicate
at least two suitable times within the advertised office hours. . Please use the e mail
message facility on My UCW on LMS-Brightspace if you have to communicate in
writing with the Instructor and Not MS Teams. Please cite in the e mail subject line, the
Subject Name and Section (the most important element), Your Full Name and Student
Number in all correspondence to ensure a timelier response.
E-Mail Etiquette:
If you choose to contact the Instructor by e mail, please ensure that the e mail is written
in a professional, courteous and business-like manner with proper business English and
format, such as Dear Pauric and Best regards etc. Cell phone Text English/Slang is not
acceptable. Failure to do so, will mean that you will not receive a reply. Sending of any
inappropriate or disrespectful communication, attachments or commentary via e-mail or
any form of social media, such as Twitter etc, will be automatically reported to the UCW
authorities for further action and possible discipline and sanction.
When the Instructor answers your e mail and addresses your issue, it is considered
professional courtesy and basic good manners to reply with an e mail of thanks and
appreciation. Always cite your subject name, your own name and student number in all
correspondence to ensure more timely response.
*****
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
12
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023.
The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB anytime in Week 8)
Course Name: Principles of
Management
Course Code: MGT101
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445 H (2023-2024)1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions: Please Read them carefully
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission
making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a
developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of
each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company,
Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was
money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving
on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts
chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale
food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my
grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions
being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the
obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew
ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people
reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was
able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into.
We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So,
when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw
how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky
Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I
didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought
we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first
store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name
after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the
lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to
AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone
in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been
a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity.
We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through
as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with
electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our
objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices
in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying
our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores.
When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20%
on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80%
of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful.
Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does
AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the
company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss
briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ANSWERS:
Choose ONE of the following topics to respond to as your discussion post this week. Your response will be your opinion, but must be supported with logic and/or appropriate facts. Proxy Tourism. In the Young Turks video, the male host justified the presence of a reporter in North Korea because “we need to know what it’s like there”. He felt the presence of other tourists was unjustified. Do you think that our ‘need to know’ through the eyes of the reporter is really just ‘proxy tourism’? Is it any more ethical for a reporter to risk his/her life for us to see, than for any of us to travel (at great risk) to see for ourselves? Political Tourism. Dr. Rami Isaac talked about tourism to Palestinian communities and refugees, and referred to it as political tourism. Do you think that all dark tourism has a political undertone? Why or why not? Ethical Responsibility. The Australian host of the audio segment questioned the ethics of tour operators going to the Chernobyl nuclear site, but did not question the ethics of his friend who purchased the tour package. Where does ethical responsibility lie: with the tourism producer or the tourism consumer? Is it a shared responsibility? Timing. In the discussion for Module 7, many students listed the site of a recent school shooting on their list of places they would not like to visit. For most, the recentness of the event was given as the reason. How do you know when a site is ready for tourism? That is, how soon is too soon to visit a contemporary dark site? How much time has to pass before the site can be experienced appropriately?Multiple Narratives. In the audio interview, one of the guests talked about there being ‘multiple narratives’ at Auschwitz. She suggested that the story of that dark site should be told from different viewpoints, but added that some viewpoints should not be shared. Who gets to decide what viewpoints are acceptable? Would it be appropriate, for example, to let racist Nazi’s explain why they thought their actions at that site were justified and moral?Classmate responses: Class members are required to comment on two (2) other posts. Comments should meaningfully add to the understanding demonstrated in the post, or pose a question to help the commenter improve their understanding. Responses may not challenge personal beliefs or values that may be shared.
There are many examples of unethical business actions over the past few decades that have made headlines. It is important to understand unethical practices to make ethical business decisions.Your task this week is to prepare a 1-2 page written summary as a Word file of a recent business case of unethical behavior with which you are familiar. Begin by researching the case to learn the history of the company or companies involved and how these unethical behaviors were discovered.Be sure to include the following:
Introduce the historical scenario surrounding your selected case. Include any available dates.
Explain how these unethical behaviors occurred for as long as they did.
Evaluate the outcome of events, including relations with internal and external stakeholders.
Support your paper with a minimum of two resources (journal article or web). Citations are not required, however, use APA format with a separate cover sheet and references is required
Attached is a copy of the original assignment that you complete and a copy of an old one a student did previously that scored 85% you can use that as a reference… the tutor wants pictures under every attraction and she also wants statistics eg how many visits a year and how much money is made by visitors come to Dubai and also for the cultural, historical attractions and modern architectural wonders etc if you can list how many visitors each attraction receives and whats the cost to get in and if there any future plans for development on them … she also said you can use the image the 4 A’s that listed in this past students assignment as well as its reference just before listing the 4A’s……and for the appendices she wants a poster of activities/ itinerary for someone visiting Dubai for 7 days( i’ve attached some examples of what she wants), I have also attached the feed back she gave from the assignment you completed as well as the section where she was speaking about the TALC model
From 2010 To 2016 work as mechanical Techanican From Jan 2018 to December 21 2018
Work as maintenance planner
From 2019 till Now acting as maintenance supervisor
I ateendened many courses at Saudi Aramco like Enterprise risk management ERM,Hazard Recognition and control ,Job safety analysis, supervisor foundation , Leadership is everyone’s bussiness ,emotional intelligence, edfective communication, effective meeting management, effective time managment , confilct management and ccritcal Thining
Also i have international certification as shown in attached
ERMA Enterprise risk management assoicate certificate
Risk Managemnt From IBMI
GRCA
GRCP
Occupational Safety and Health
Specialist
Occupational Safety and Health
Ssupervisor
Occupational Safety and Health
Manager
Safety Committee
Member
Educational:
I have bachelor degree in Business and administration from King Faisal University GPA:4.67. Graduated on 12 january 2016
and i got master degree in insurance and risk management from King Faisal University GPA 4.83 out of 5. Graduated on Jun 2023
Language :
Arabic
English
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Certified GRC Audit (GRCA)
OCEG and GRC Certify hereby certify that
Abdulmajeed Mohammed Alrubaya
is qualified in Governance, Risk Management and Compliance Audit (GRCA)
having passed the requisite examinations, fulfilling the continuing education requirements,
and adhering to the GRC Certify Code of Conduct.
Original Certification Date: September 20, 2023
Valid Through Date: September 20, 2024
Certificate Number: GRCA-82493142
If you are not the holder of this certificate and want to verify authenticity and current status, contact support@oceg.org.
Scott L. Mitchell
Chair, OCEG & GRC Certify
Certified GRC Professional (GRCP)
OCEG and GRC Certify hereby certify that
Abdulmajeed Alrubaya
is qualified as a Governance, Risk Management and Compliance Professional (GRCP)
having passed the requisite examinations, fulfilling the continuing education requirements,
and adhering to the GRC Certify Code of Conduct.
Original Certification Date: September 20, 2023
Valid Through Date: September 20, 2024
Certificate Number: GRCP-82476960
If you are not the holder of this certificate and want to verify authenticity and current status, contact support@oceg.org.
Scott L. Mitchell
Chair, OCEG & GRC Certify
This is to certify that:
Abdulmajeed Mohammed Alrubaya
Has successfully met all the required standards for the Enterprise Risk Management Associate
Professional (ERMAP) as established and certified by the Enterprise Risk Management Academy
(ERMA) with the professional designation of ERMAP.
Certificate ID
: ERMAP-1121365
Certificate Date
: 04 January 2023
Valid Until
: 04 January 2025
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
Abdulmajeed Alrubaya
Risk Management
2022-11-21
1035005-166-902-1973
Certificate of Professional Program Completion
This is to certify that
Has demonstrated academic excellence with distinction by completing all exams, academic requirements and a minimum
of 48 hours of study on required subjects in the OSHAcademy Professional Development Certificate Program. This
achievement demonstrates commitment and professionalism in Occupational Safety and Health.
Steven J. Geigle, MA, CET, CSHM-E
Director, Instructor
OSHAcademy Safety and Health Training
This training complies with OSHA standards and conforms with
ANSI/ASSP Z490.1 and ISO 45001 guidelines for Safety, Health, and
Environmental (SHE) Training. OSHAcademy training is widely
recognized by government agencies, colleges, technical schools,
and businesses. OSHAcademy training also qualifies for
Continuance of Certification (COC) points toward professional
recertification.
1022689
10/13/2023
48
Student #
Issue Date
Hours
Printed original certificates must include the OSHAcademy
hologram or embossed OSHAcademy seal. All certificates include a
unique QR Code and can be validated through the OSHAcademy
website. www.oshacademy.com/verify
OSHAcademy is a division of
Geigle Safety Group, Inc.
15220 NW Greenbrier Pkwy, Ste 230
Beaverton, OR, USA, 97006
+1 (971) 217-8721
www.oshacademy.com
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
– All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
– No copy, Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
– Late submission will NOT be accepted.
– Must mention question number clearly in answer.
– You should check for spelling and grammatical errors before submitting the assignment.
– The task must be in word format only, there is no pdf. The file must be saved in word format.
– Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
-Make sure the answer is correct and free from errors.
– Stick to the number of words specified in each question.
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
A business plan is any simple plan, not only limited to the business start-up plan that helps the management to understand the current situation of the enterprises (strengths, weakness, opportunities and threats) and look forward into the future. A start-up plan is a business plan which consists of the mission, vision, objectives and action plans for the future of the new enterprises while the business plan drawn during the operation of the firm is vital for running the firm effectively, acquire new customers, partners, loans and so on. According to Fiore (2005), a business plan involves two dimensions; an organizing tool to simplify and clarify your business goals and strategy, the second one is a selling document that sells the business idea and shows that a product or a service can make a profit and attract funding and company resources.
Imagine you started a new business as an entrepreneur in Saudi Arabia. Briefly mention the specific steps which you consider necessary to a successful business plan.
Please, think and share information on the following items:
1.Owners, capital structure and company profile (2 Marks)
a. Your Business Name, Address, E‐Mail
b. Form of ownership: What is the legal structure? Sole proprietor, Partnership, Corporation….
C. Investment capital
2.Company Business Description (300 – 400 words)
A. Scope and type of business (4 Marks)
What business will you be in? What will you do? What market segment will you choose?
Business idea: what is your big idea? Is it a product or a service? What makes your idea different?
Mission Statement
Company’s short-term and long-term goals and objectives.
Target market and demographics: Who will your customers be? Where do they live? What is your target market passionate about?
B. Business Philosophy (4 Marks)
What is important to you in your business?
Describe your Industry: Is it a growth industry? What long-term or short-term changes do you foresee in the industry? How will your company take advantage of it?
Describe your most important company strengths and core competencies: What factors will make the company succeed? What do you think your major competitive strengths will be? What background experience, skills, and strengths do you personally bring to this new venture?
Risk Assessment: Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of your business using SWOT.
Who is your competition and how do you beat them?
Note: Use APA style of referencing
Answers:
1.
2.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-1
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 14/10/2023 (End of Week-7) @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out
of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
An entrepreneur Start-up
Business Plan
A business plan is any simple plan, not only limited to the business start-up plan that helps the
management to understand the current situation of the enterprises (strengths, weakness,
opportunities and threats) and look forward into the future. A start-up plan is a business plan which
consists of the mission, vision, objectives and action plans for the future of the new enterprises
while the business plan drawn during the operation of the firm is vital for running the firm
effectively, acquire new customers, partners, loans and so on. According to Fiore (2005), a
business plan involves two dimensions; an organizing tool to simplify and clarify your business
goals and strategy, the second one is a selling document that sells the business idea and shows that
a product or a service can make a profit and attract funding and company resources.
Imagine you started a new business as an entrepreneur in Saudi Arabia. Briefly mention the
specific steps which you consider necessary to a successful business plan.
Please, think and share information on the following items:
1. Owners, capital structure and company profile (2 Marks)
a. Your Business Name, Address, E‐Mail
b. Form of ownership: What is the legal structure? Sole proprietor, Partnership,
Corporation….
C. Investment capital
2. Company Business Description (300 – 400 words)
A. Scope and type of business (4 Marks)
What business will you be in? What will you do? What market segment will you
choose?
• Business idea: what is your big idea? Is it a product or a service? What makes your
idea different?
• Mission Statement
• Company’s short-term and long-term goals and objectives.
• Target market and demographics: Who will your customers be? Where do they live?
What is your target market passionate about?
B. Business Philosophy (4 Marks)
What is important to you in your business?
• Describe your Industry: Is it a growth industry? What long-term or short-term changes
do you foresee in the industry? How will your company take advantage of it?
• Describe your most important company strengths and core competencies: What factors
will make the company succeed? What do you think your major competitive strengths
will be? What background experience, skills, and strengths do you personally bring to this
new venture?
• Risk Assessment: Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of your business using SWOT.
•Who is your competition and how do you beat them?
Note: Use APA style of referencing
Answers:
1.
2.
Assignment-1 Rubrics
Criterion/Achievement
Company Profile
(2Mark)
Scope & Business type
(4 marks)
Business Philosophy
(4 marks)
Excellent
100%
Good
(75%
Average
50%
Satisfactory
25%
Clearly
mention all 3
aspects
Perfect
explanation
Clearly
mention only 2
aspects
relevant
Explanation
Only mention
company name
and email
Some
information
Stated clearly 4
factors of
SWOT
Stated with
some relevant
3 factors of
SWOT
Clearly
mention only1
aspect
not clear with
relevant
information
clear with
relevant 2
factors of
SWOT
Some
information
relevant 1 factor
SWOT
Poor
(00)mark
00%
No
information
No
information
is given
No
information
is given
Please adhere to the terms of the file and apply them carefully. Also, my teacher does not like copies, giving zero without mercy
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment (2)
Deadline: Saturday 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Cost Accounting
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year: 1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 15)
Q1. Discuss with suitable examples why activity-based costing (ABC) is better than the
traditional costing system. Provide a suitable numerical example of ABC in the manufacturing
sector and show all the necessary calculations required under the ABC system.
(3 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples showing all the calculations of the
ABC system. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should
not be copied from any sources.
(Chapter 7)
Answer:
Q2. “A non-routine decision is one that is taken in response to a non-repetitive, operational
scenario.” Comment on this statement and explain with suitable examples the various types of
non-routine operating decisions that a company makes under such a scenario. Support your
answer with numerical examples along with qualitative considerations involved in making such
decisions.
(4 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples for various types of non-routine
operating decisions. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they
should not be copied from any sources.
Answer:
(Chapter 4)
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Q3. ADLG Company has two support departments, SS1 and SS2, and two operating
departments, OD1 and OD2. The company has decided to use the direct method and allocate
variable SS1 dept. costs based on the number of transactions and fixed SS1 dept. costs based on
the number of employees. SS2 dept. variable costs will be allocated based on the number of
service requests and fixed costs will be allocated based on the number of computers. The
following values have been extracted for the allocation:
(4 Marks)
Support Departments
Operating Departments
SS1
SS2
OD1
OD2
Total Department variable costs
16,000
19,000
105,000
68,000
Total department fixed costs
19,500
34,000
120,000
55,000
Number of transactions
50
55
250
140
Number of employees
18
24
47
38
Number of service requests
37
22
26
32
Number of computers
20
25
31
37
You are required to allocate variable and fixed costs.
(Chapter 8)
Answer:
Q4. JKL Company processes a direct material and produces three products: P1, P2, and P3. The
joint costs of the three products in 2018 were SAR 120,000. The total number of units for each
product and the selling price per unit is given below:
(4 Marks)
Product
Units
Selling Price per unit
P1
55,000
SAR 70
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
P2
34,500
SAR 58
P3
10,500
SAR 44
You are required to use the physical volume method and sales value at the split-off method to
allocate the joint costs to each product.
Answer:
(Chapter 9)
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Business Ethics and Organization Social Responsibility (MGT
422)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Business ethics and
organization social responsibility
Course Code: MGT 422
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Layla Nasser
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
No
CLO-6
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Write coherent project about a case study or actual research about ethics
Critical Thinking
Consider yourself the Chief executive officer of a small enterprise. The enterprise
updated the compliance policy. Now one of the employee dumped dangerous waste into
a nearby stream.
Questions:
a. Who would you invite into your office and what information would you require?
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
b. How frequently you suggest that Enterprise policies and procedures be updated.
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
c. Prepare a long- and short-term action plan to address the situation. (700 words-5
Marks)
Answers
a.
b.
c.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment (2)
Deadline: Saturday 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Cost Accounting
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 14587
Academic Year: 1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Mohammed Arshad Khan
Students’ Grade:
/15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 15)
Q1. Discuss with suitable examples why activity-based costing (ABC) is better than the
traditional costing system. Provide a suitable numerical example of ABC in the manufacturing
sector and show all the necessary calculations required under the ABC system.
(3 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples showing all the calculations of the
ABC system. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should
not be copied from any sources.
(Chapter 7)
Answer:
Q2. “A non-routine decision is one that is taken in response to a non-repetitive, operational
scenario.” Comment on this statement and explain with suitable examples the various types of
non-routine operating decisions that a company makes under such a scenario. Support your
answer with numerical examples along with qualitative considerations involved in making such
decisions.
(4 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples for various types of non-routine
operating decisions. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they
should not be copied from any sources.
Answer:
(Chapter 4)
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Q3. ADLG Company has two support departments, SS1 and SS2, and two operating
departments, OD1 and OD2. The company has decided to use the direct method and allocate
variable SS1 dept. costs based on the number of transactions and fixed SS1 dept. costs based on
the number of employees. SS2 dept. variable costs will be allocated based on the number of
service requests and fixed costs will be allocated based on the number of computers. The
following values have been extracted for the allocation:
(4 Marks)
Support Departments
Operating Departments
SS1
SS2
OD1
OD2
Total Department variable costs
16,000
19,000
105,000
68,000
Total department fixed costs
19,500
34,000
120,000
55,000
Number of transactions
50
55
250
140
Number of employees
18
24
47
38
Number of service requests
37
22
26
32
Number of computers
20
25
31
37
You are required to allocate variable and fixed costs.
(Chapter 8)
Answer:
Q4. JKL Company processes a direct material and produces three products: P1, P2, and P3. The
joint costs of the three products in 2018 were SAR 120,000. The total number of units for each
product and the selling price per unit is given below:
(4 Marks)
Product
Units
Selling Price per unit
P1
55,000
SAR 70
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
P2
34,500
SAR 58
P3
10,500
SAR 44
You are required to use the physical volume method and sales value at the split-off method to
allocate the joint costs to each product.
Answer:
(Chapter 9)
Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.
What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 600 word limit.
Readings Required:
Module 09 PowerPoint Presentations for Chapters 8, 9, 10
Madhani, P. M. (2020). Lean Six Sigma Deployment in Finance and Financial Services: Enhancing Competitive Advantages. IUP Journal of Operations Management, 19(3), 25–49.
Faisal, T., & Faisal, M.N. (2020). Assessment of total quality management implementation in Indian service industries. IUP Journal of Operations Management, 19(2), 7-28.
Sharma, B., & Rahim, M.A. (2021). TQM and HRM: An integrated approach to organizational success. Journal of Comparative International Management, 24(1), 27-41.
The 2 Independent Samples and Paired Data Samples Excel sheets are needed for this activity.Access the Excel sheets by clicking on the Class Survey Data File Below are 2 Word files: follow the Directions (1) to complete the assignment using the 2 Independent Samples and Paired Data Samples Excel sheets from the Class Survey Data File, and then submit your work using the Assignment Submission Form (2) via the appropriate link —
Brand PerformanceDiscuss the objectives for a business that you think should enhance its brand performance in Saudi Arabia. What KPIs would you use to measure the brand’s performance? Discuss the targets you would set for each KPI. Why?Discuss the necessary actions to improve the brand’s performance.Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
7/3/23, 11:55 AM
ACT-500-MASTER-Managerial Accounting
Name
Discussion 25
Description
25 points
Rubric Detail
Levels of Achievement
Criteria
Exceeds
Expectations
Meets
Expectation
Some
Expectations
Unsatisfactory
Quantity
5 to 6 points
3 to 4 points
1 to 2 points
0 to 0 points
Initial post and
two other posts
of substance.
Initial post and
one other post
of substance.
Initial post only.
Did not
participate.
5 to 6 points
3 to 4 points
1 to 2 points
0 to 0 points
Demonstrates
excellent
knowledge of
concepts, skills,
and theories
relevant to the
topic.
Demonstrates
knowledge of
concepts, skills,
and theories.
Demonstrates
satisfactory
knowledge of
concepts, skills,
and theories.
Did not
participate.
5 to 6 points
3 to 4 points
1 to 2 points
0 to 0 points
Discussion
post(s) exceed
expectations in
terms of support
provided and
extend the
discussion.
Discussion
post(s) meet
expectations in
terms of
support
provided.
Statements are
satisfactory in
terms of
support
provided.
Did not
participate.
6 to 7 points
4 to 5 points
1 to 2 points
0 to 0 points
Writing is well
organized, clear,
concise, and
focused; no
errors.
Some significant
but not major
errors or
omissions in
writing
organization,
focus, and
clarity.
Numerous
significant
errors or
omissions in
writing
organization,
focus, and
clarity.
Did not
participate.
Content
Support
Writing
View Associated
Items
https://lms.seu.edu.sa/webapps/rubric/do/course/manageRubrics?dispatch=view&context=course&rubricId=_76606_1&course_id=_39829_1
1/2
7/3/23, 11:55 AM
ACT-500-MASTER-Managerial Accounting
Print
Close Window
https://lms.seu.edu.sa/webapps/rubric/do/course/manageRubrics?dispatch=view&context=course&rubricId=_76606_1&course_id=_39829_1
2/2
Entries should be 1.5-page single-spaced or 3 pages double-spaced with 12-point font (Times New Roman). Submissions that are not full-length will not receive full credit.
Journals should contain a brief log of what you did, followed by a lengthier critical reflection of your experience. Consider responding to one or more of the following guiding questions:
What did you do that seemed to be effective or ineffective with your student?
How has your understanding of positive psychology and/or service-learning changed as a result of your service-learning experience?
Describe the most difficult/satisfying aspects of your service work.
What do you feel you were prepared/ not prepared for and how can this be improved in the future?
How do you think you are making an impact on the student’s life?
What is the greatest contribution you have made during your service-learning experience thus far?
What behavioral/social-emotional changes have you noticed through weekly observations of the student you are working with?
What changes have you noticed in the student’s relationship with his or her parent(s)? (if you keep in contact with them)
If it is a family member feel free to include how you think your relationship has changed with them.
Rubric
Reflection Journal Rubric (1) (1)
Reflection Journal Rubric (1) (1)
Criteria Ratings Pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeSession ContentBrief summaries of each session (2) is provided in the journal
2 pts
Present
0 pts
Absent
2 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCritical ReflectionMajority of the reflection consists of specific responses to the reflection questions that demonstrate critical thinking, as opposed to consisting primarily of a summary or superficial report of what transpired
3 pts
Present
0 pts
Absent
3 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeTechnical ComponentsEntry is three to four pages double-spaced with 12-point font (Times New Roman) and submitted online through Canvas prior to class on the designated due date.
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First Term
CRN: 11738
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Recognize the basic concepts and terminology used in Strategic Management- CLO1
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Demonstrate how executive leadership is an important part of strategic management- CLO5
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Assignment Questions:
Discuss the following questions:
1. How can value-chain analysis help identify a company’s strengths and weaknesses?
2. According to Porter, what determines the level of competitive intensity in an industry?
Of Porter’s Five Forces, which force has the greatest influence on whether an industry
would be profitable? Why? Give examples for the local market.
3. When does a corporation need a board of directors? Distinguish between the roles of the
board of directors, shareholders, top manager, and CEO. What is the relationship between
corporate governance and social responsibility?
4. Briefly explain the statement, “Settling accounting standards is a political process”.
Notes:
–
Every question is out of 2.5 marks
Maximum number of words for all questions: 1500 words.
Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic management will be highly valued.
Your answers MUST include at least 7 outside references (other than the slides and textbook) using a proper
referencing style (APA).
Using references from SDL will be highly valued.
Good Luck
______________________________________________
Answers
●The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
●Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
●Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
●Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
●Late submission will NOT be accepted.
●Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
●All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
●Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
●Learning Outcomes:
▪Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
▪Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage of the organization-CLO3.
▪Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
▪Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc: Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following questions:
1.Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company (draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2.What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3.What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful? Justify 2pts
4.What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its competitive advantage? 2pts
5.Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✔Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own words.
✔Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly valued.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Product influencers come in all types. From Instagram influencers to opinion leaders, many of our purchases are led by others. Address the following questions in your Critical Thinking assignment.
Why is an opinion leader a more credible source of product information than an advertisement for the product? Are there any circumstances in which information from advertisements is likely to be more influential than word-of-mouth?
How can marketers use social networks, brand communities, and weblogs to locate new customers and target them?
How can companies strategically use buzz agents and viral marketing? Illustrate with examples.
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 4 to 5 pages in length, which does not include the required title and reference pages, which are never a part of the content minimum requirements.
Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.
Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles unless the assignment calls for more.
Review the grading rubric to see how you will be graded for this assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Name
CT_Rubric_100
Description
100 Points
Rubric Detail
Levels of Achievement
Criteria
Exceeds Expectations
Meets Expectations
Some Expectations
Unsatisfactory
Content
33 to 35 points
29 to 32 points
26 to 28 points
0 to 25 points
Demonstrates
substantial and
extensive knowledge of
the materials, with no
errors or major
omissions.
Demonstrates adequate
knowledge of the
materials; may include
some minor errors or
omissions.
Demonstrates fair
knowledge of the materials
and/or includes some
major errors or omissions.
Fails to demonstrate
knowledge of the
materials and/or
includes many major
errors or omissions.
33 to 35 points
29 to 32 points
26 to 28 points
0 to 25 points
Provides strong thought,
insight, and analysis of
concepts and
applications.
Provides adequate
thought, insight, and
analysis of concepts and
applications.
Provides poor though,
insight, and analysis of
concepts and applications.
Provides little or no
thought, insight, and
analysis of concepts and
applications.
15 to 15 points
13 to 14 points
11 to 12 points
0 to 10 points
Sources go above and
beyond required criteria
and are well chosen to
provide effective
substance and
perspectives on the
issue under
examination.
Sources meet required
criteria and are
adequately chosen to
provide substance and
perspectives on the issue
under examination.
Sources meet required
criteria but are poorly
chosen to provide
substance and perspectives
on the issue under
examination.
Source selection and
integration of knowledge
from the course is clearly
deficient.
15 to 15 points
13 to 14 points
11 to 12 points
0 to 10 points
Project is clearly
organized, well written,
and in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Strong
sentence and paragraph
structure, contains no
errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style, or
APA citations and
references.
Project is fairly well
organized and written
and is in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Reasonably
good sentence and
paragraph structure, may
include a few minor
errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style, or APA
citations and references.
Project is poorly organized
and written and may not
follow proper format as
outlined in the assignment.
Inconsistent to inadequate
sentence and paragraph
development, and/or
includes numerous or
major errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style or APA
citations and references.
Project is not organized
or well written and is not
in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Poor quality
work; unacceptable in
terms of grammar,
spelling, APA style, and
APA citations and
references.
Analysis
Sources
Demonstrates
college-level
proficiency in
organization,
grammar and
style.
View Associated Items
Print
Close Window
Select a KSA company you frequently engage with., Use company documents and outside resources to design a content strategy for the chosen company. Be creative!
Discuss how content marketing principles will help you, as the marketer, develop strategies.
Design a content strategy for your selected KSA company.
Detail how your strategy design contributes to the successful support of Saudi Vision 2030.
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
A minimum of four pages in length, not including the title and reference pages.
Formatted according to APA 7th edition and Saudi Electronic University writing standards.
Provide support for your statements with in-text citations from a minimum of four scholarly articles. Two of these sources may be from the class readings, textbook, or lectures, but the other two must be external. The Saudi Digital Library is a good place to find these references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Name
CT_Rubric_100
Description
100 Points
Rubric Detail
Levels of Achievement
Criteria
Exceeds Expectations
Meets Expectations
Some Expectations
Unsatisfactory
Content
33 to 35 points
29 to 32 points
26 to 28 points
0 to 25 points
Demonstrates
substantial and
extensive knowledge of
the materials, with no
errors or major
omissions.
Demonstrates adequate
knowledge of the
materials; may include
some minor errors or
omissions.
Demonstrates fair
knowledge of the materials
and/or includes some
major errors or omissions.
Fails to demonstrate
knowledge of the
materials and/or
includes many major
errors or omissions.
33 to 35 points
29 to 32 points
26 to 28 points
0 to 25 points
Provides strong thought,
insight, and analysis of
concepts and
applications.
Provides adequate
thought, insight, and
analysis of concepts and
applications.
Provides poor though,
insight, and analysis of
concepts and applications.
Provides little or no
thought, insight, and
analysis of concepts and
applications.
15 to 15 points
13 to 14 points
11 to 12 points
0 to 10 points
Sources go above and
beyond required criteria
and are well chosen to
provide effective
substance and
perspectives on the
issue under
examination.
Sources meet required
criteria and are
adequately chosen to
provide substance and
perspectives on the issue
under examination.
Sources meet required
criteria but are poorly
chosen to provide
substance and perspectives
on the issue under
examination.
Source selection and
integration of knowledge
from the course is clearly
deficient.
15 to 15 points
13 to 14 points
11 to 12 points
0 to 10 points
Project is clearly
organized, well written,
and in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Strong
sentence and paragraph
structure, contains no
errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style, or
APA citations and
references.
Project is fairly well
organized and written
and is in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Reasonably
good sentence and
paragraph structure, may
include a few minor
errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style, or APA
citations and references.
Project is poorly organized
and written and may not
follow proper format as
outlined in the assignment.
Inconsistent to inadequate
sentence and paragraph
development, and/or
includes numerous or
major errors in grammar,
spelling, APA style or APA
citations and references.
Project is not organized
or well written and is not
in proper format as
outlined in the
assignment. Poor quality
work; unacceptable in
terms of grammar,
spelling, APA style, and
APA citations and
references.
Analysis
Sources
Demonstrates
college-level
proficiency in
organization,
grammar and
style.
View Associated Items
Print
Close Window
To help you understand how academic research can be applied to real-world problems and to prepare you to better understand your chosen area of interest, you will be asked to write a 5-page research paper. This paper has two purposes: 1) to examine the stream of research in your given area and 2) to understand the practical implications from academic research.
Please note you are required to have a title page for this assignment. The title page should have a title for the paper, your name, the name of the class, and my name. All of this should be spelled correctly. Just like with the references, points will not be given for the title page but will be deducted if the title page is missing or something is not spelled correctly.
Format
Your paper should broken down into the following sections with the headings in italics. The subheadings should be in bold. All headings should be on the left. The paper should be written in 12 point, Times New Roman, and double spaced. The paper needs to follow APA formatting for citations. The references page is NOT a part of the 5 pages. The paper needs to be 5 pages of text with a page break to start the reference section.
Introduction
1-2 paragraphs that do the following:
Define the segment of the industry you are studying and describe a brief history of this segment.
Introduce the main topics of research you have found related to your segment with in-text citations. Remember, if it didn’t come out of your brain, it needs a citation.
Literature Review
This section will be the bulk of the paper. Each student’s paper will be uniquely formatted to different areas of inquiry. This will be the corrected version of homework assignment 2 and the rough draft. A literature review is a long summary of articles related to the area that is being investigated. The purpose of the literature review you are writing for this class is to organize the articles you found last week (and any additional articles that are needed) in order by category. The categories are determined by the main topics of the articles. Then, in each category, you will summarize the research. These summaries must be in your own words. You cannot use any quotations. You must put, in common words, the topic of the research and the findings with citations. Essentially, every sentence should have a citation. Please keep in mind the following for your sections:
This is a summary of the research sorted by topic. Therefore, you should have subsections with headings to state the subtopic. For example, if you are doing research on Airbnb, a common topic of research is the impact of Airbnb on hotels, therefore a heading would be:
Airbnb’s Impact on Hotels
The number of subtopics will be determined by the subject, however a good guideline would be 4-6 subtopics. Each subtopic will be a summary of the articles regarding that topic and should have multiple articles. Follow the formatting of summary provided in the class and on Homework Assignment 2.
The summaries need to be written in the third person. Avoid phrase like “I think” or “I read.”
The summaries need to be written in complete paragraphs with transition sentences. Grammar, spelling, word usage, and proper English are all expected.
Gaps in the literature
This will be the final part of the paper. This section should describe areas that have not been explored by the researchers. To determine what still needs to be studied, you will use the following:
The limitations and future research sections of the articles you reviewed. In this, they discuss things that need to be researched later on. However, you may find some of these have already been researched.
News articles from the last year that detail innovations in the industry that have not been explored by the research you found.
Practical Implications
This section will be a summary of the practical implications from the research articles you reviewed. As a reminder, the practical implications are the recommendations for industry that arise from the research. This section should do as follows:
Provide a 2-3 paragraph summary of the practical implications immediately after the heading. This should describe the practical implications by section. You may write more than 2-3 paragraphs but you may find that there is an overlap in the practical implications by subtopic.
A table that provides the practical implications by article. This can be taken from your rough draft.
Attached are sources, all 25 need to be used. If more is needed, more sources can be used. A sample is provided for the format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Citation information
Abstract
Topic
Dong, H. Z. (2022). Effects Based on the curiosity theory and the stimulus–organism–response
Effectsparadigm,
of robot restaurants’
this study aims
foodtoq
Kishore, T. J. (2023). Digital disruption:
The pervasive
the hyperlocal
impact of the
delivery
COVID-19
and cloud
virus on
kitchen
the food
driven
services
future
Digital
sector
of disruption:
food
in services
India has
theincreated
hyperlocal
post-COVID
cond
de
Shaker, A. K et al.,(2023). Predicting
This research
intention
investigates
to followconsumer
online restaurant
intention
community
to follow online
advice:
community
a trust-integrated
advice. Applying
technology
theact
Predicting
Gu, Q et al., (2023). An exploratory
The useinvestigation
of modern technologies
of technology-assisted
in restaurants
dining
hasexperiences
become a An
trend.
from
exploratory
the
For consumer
foodinvestigation
and beverage
perspective.
ofservi
tech
In
Muhittin, Cavusoglu. (2019).An
Thisanalysis
study aims
of technology
to examine
applications
the utilization
in the
of restaurant
Front of House
industry.
(FOH)
An analysis
Journal
and Back
of Hospitality
technology
of House (BOH)
and
applicatio
Touri
tech
Ahe, Ahn et al., (2018)
Employing Mehrabian and Russell’s stimulus–organism–response
Consumer
framework,
responses
this study
to interactive
examine
Gonzalez, R et al., (2022). Information
Information
andand
communication
communication
technologies
technologies
in food
(ICTs)services
are a key
and
Information
player
restaurants:
in theand
food
a communication
systematic
services and
review
res
te
Doran, D. (2010). RestaurantsThe
andpurpose
technology
of this
– past,
paper
present
is to provide
and future:
a practitioner
a practitioner’s
perspective
viewpoint.
Restaurants
on theWorldwide
impact
and technology
of Hospitality
technology
– past,
an
on
Esposito, B et al., (2022). Service
This innovation
paper investigates
in the restaurant
the extentsector
to which
during
theCOVID-19:
COVID-19 digital
pandemic
Service
technologies
has
innovation
accelerated
to in
reduce
the
service
restauran
custome
inno
Wong, I et al., (2022). Smart dining,
This study
smart
aims
restaurant,
to fill thisand
literature
smart void
service
notquality
merely(SSQ).
to reiterate
International
Smart
the dining,
importance
Journal
smart
ofofContemporary
restaurant,
technologyand
bu
Scarlett, G et al., (2022). Institutions
This study
andaims
technology
to examine
in the
thevalue
influence
co-creation
of institutions
processand
of restaurant
technology
Institutions
consumers:
onand
value
technology
co-creation
a service-dom
in the
outv
Wei, Y et al., (2022). Exploring
The
customer
objectiveperceptions
of this paper
of is
smart
to investigate
restaurants.
customers’
Management,
opinions
Enterprise
Exploring
on artificial
customer
and intelligence
Benchmarking
perceptions
(AI)inasthe
ofa
Ivanov, S et al., (2023). Restaurants
The hospitality
and robots:
industry
publicinpreferences
developed countries
for robot isfood
under
andpressure
beverage
Restaurants
due
services.
to labor
andJournal
robots:
shortages
ofpublic
Tourism
and pref
it isF
In this research, previous
cumulated
showing
Dijmărescu, I et al.,(2022). Neuromanagement
decisionfindings
makingwere
in facial
recognition
biometric
Neuromanagement
authentication as
decision
a mobile
makin
pay
This studyAPPLYING
applied aAN
modified
technology
acceptance
model RESTAURANTS:
Labus, P et al.,(2022). RESTAURANTS:
EXTENDED
TECHNOLOGY
ACCEPTANCE
MODEL. [KORISNIČKO
APPLYING
PRIHVAĆAN
AN EXTE
Stephanie,Hui-Wen,Chuah etThis
al.,(2022).
study aims
You to
don’t
simultaneously
have to tip the
examine
humanthe
waiters
influence
anymore,
of demographic,
You
butdon’t
… Unveiling
have
psychographic
tofactors
tip thethat
human
and
influe
situ
w
This study
validates intention
the unifedoftheory
of acceptance
andofuse
Jeon, H. M et al., (2020). Customers’
acceptance
self-service
technology
restaurant
Customers’
industry:
acceptance
expanding
intention
UTAUT
o
Nam, J., Kim, S et al., (2023). This
Elderly
study
Users’
explores
Emotional
older and
people’s
Behavioral
responses
Responses
to restaurant
to Self-Service
self-service
Elderly
Technology
Users’
kiosks,
Emotional
which
in Fast-Food
have
andalread
Behav
Resta
Fathi, M. D et al., (2023). Enhancing
This research
Digitalaims
Presence
to develop
for Maximizing
a dynamicCustomer
and sustainable
Value inmethod
Fast-Food
Enhancing
for Restaurants.
creating
Digitalcustomer
Presence
Sustainability,
value
for Max
in
Hasanah, F. N et al., (2021). Implementing
Cloud computing
Cloud
enhances
Computing
business
Technology
productivity
on Restaurant’s
in the restaurant
Expenses
Implementing
industry
Monitoring
by
Cloud
combining
System.
Computing
compu
IOP Te
Co
Klouvidaki, M. I et al., (2023).The
Virtual
objective
Restaurants:
of this study
Customer
was to
Experience
assess theKeeps
customer
Theirexperience
Businesses
Virtual
in
Alive.
Restaurants:
digital
Information,
restaurants
Customer
14(7),
and prov
Expe
406
Jin-Kyu, K et al., (2023). How The
Do Self-Service
structure ofKiosks
this paper
Improve
is as COVID-19
follows: First,
Pandemic
we provide
Resilience
an overview
How
in the
DoRestaurant
Self-Service
of the literature
Industry?
Kiosksand
Improve
Susta
discu
Ansel, D et al., (1999). A framework
To encourage
for restaurant
adoption
information
of value-added
technology.
information
Cornell
technology
Hotel and
A framework
inRestaurant
the restaurant
for
Administration
restaurant
business,inform
aQuar
fram
Joo, K et al., (2023). A Study on
Thethe
dimensions
Experience
ofEconomy
the experience
Examining
economy,
a Robot
which
Service
include
in the
esthetics,
A
Restaurant
Study entertainment,
on the
Industry
Experience
Based
education,
Econom
on Dem
Gu, C et al., (2023). The EffectThis
of Using
paperAugmented
examines the
Reality
use ofTechnology
augmentedinreality
Takeaway
technology
Food Packaging
The
in the
Effect
design
to
ofImprove
Using
of packaging
Augmented
Youngfor
Consum
take
Rea
Theoretical foundation / overarching theory used
Main findings
The theoretical foundation of this article is based on the stimulus-organism-response
Food quality perception directly
paradigm,
affects
curiosity
regular
theory,
patronage
and previou
intent
This is a self-driven study grounded in secondary data. Qualitative
Digitally
andpivoted
quantitative
platforms
assessments
such as cloud
are assimilated
kitchens and
from
delivery
credible
a
The data were collected from 360 members of online restaurant
The communities
findings revealed
on Facebook
that trust,and
perceived
analyzedusefulness
using structural
and attitu
equ
This study conducted in-depth interviews with 71 restaurant The
consumers
in-depth
ininterviews
Nanjing and
identified
Wuhan, 26
China.
attributes
Following
of TADEs.
the interview
An ana
Survey data were collected from 500 randomly selected restaurant
For FOH,
technology
the top-five
managers
point ofwho
salesubscribe
(POS) technologies
to Hospitality
usedTechno
are P
The survey sample is 568 consumers who had experienced IRSST.
The results
Structural
revealed
equation
thatmodeling
the functionality
(SEM) was
andused
customization
to test the(ut
pr
The restaurant sector is more and more based on the creation
The
of restaurant
experiencessector
and ICTs,
is more
through
and more
their based
multiple
onpossibilities,
the creationca
o
The paper reviews the development of technology and its
Theapplication
paper cites to
significant
restaurant
examples
operations,
of technological
as viewedinnovation
by a sen
Based on the theory of planned behaviour and perceived riskThe
theory,
pandemic
this study
has accelerated
investigates the
a sample
food-service
of customers
industry’s
residing
digital
in
This study undertook a qualitative research design based on theoretical
“5-S” reflects
synthesis
an extension
from service
of the literature
quality, information
to denote atechnolog
new SSQ
Primary data collection was carried out using a questionnaireThe
through
results
anofonline
this study
survey.
proved
All indicators
that the are
ninemeasured
proposedusing
hypothe
a se
This paper was conducted using a qualitative method, with in-depth
These findings
interviews
perfectly
with six
match
customers
the findings
who have
of thepreviously
literaturevisite
rese
The implications illustrate that the public seems to be generally
Theaccepting
data alsorobots
reveal in
that
food
generally
and beverage
positiveoperations,
attitudes toward
even cons
the
As the analyzed research was published between 2017 and Harnessing facial recognition payment
The results of a self-report survey of 406 respondents analysed
Theusing
results
partial
confirm
leastand
squares
extend
structural
previousequation
researchmodelling
on customers’
indic
Using an online survey, the data were gathered from a sample
Demographic
of 897 Thai consumers
(gender, age,
who
income
had dined
and marital
at a robotic
status),
restaurant
psychogri
The analysis used the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences
Among
(SPSS)UTAUT
22.0 and
constructs,
Analysis performance
of a Momentexpectancy
Structures (AMOS)
was the 22.0
mo
An off-site survey was conducted with individuals who had experience
The resultsusing
showed
SST. that
We analyzed
SST’s reduction,
the dataperceived
using theease
partial
of use
leasto
This study is qualitative and relies on semi-structured interviews.
ThisThe
research
semi-structured
expands the
interviews
dynamic capabilities
permitted greater
theory flexibility
by adding
Theofsolutions
presented
with the
help and
of company observation
This study uses several techniques for data collection consisting
interviews
with relevant
parties
This research study is quantitative and utilized a questionnaire
The
distributed
survey results
to 1097
indicated
participating
a significant
consumers
increase
overinthe
online
internet
food
The data were collected from 408 restaurant patrons in SouthThe
Korea
findings
who are
hadas
used
follows:
self-service
for male
technologies.
customers, assurance,
Three analyses
custow
The article builds its theoretical foundation on the premise that
Theinformation
main findingtechnology
is that while
canthe
significantly
restaurantimpact
industry
thehas
restauran
been s
The study analyzed 292 surveys. Significant differences in theThe
experience
results ofeconomy
the regression
were found
analysis
in terms
revealed
of gender,
that theeducation
experien
This research involves both qualitative and quantitative methods.
Augmented
This paper
reality
examines
technology
the effects
can improve
of augmented
negativereality
evaluations
techn
Practical implications
First, as service quality and high-tech atmosphere perception, especially the latter, have a significantly positive effect on expe
The dynamic and evolving food services in India, catalyzed by the Internet and digital technologies will help academicians stud
Online community designers should focus on creating a user-friendly interface to enhance usefulness perceptions. One way is
Hospitality managers can implement the suggested measures for dining service design and technology management to impro
This is one of the first studies to include a variety of technologies used in restaurants. Most existing studies focus on a single t
With the differential marketing strategies for different target segments in regard to gadget-loving propensity, marketers will
ICTs are basic for managers taking decision at the highest level in food services and restaurants, so ICTs should not be seen a
The paper aligns technological advances with the experiences of a senior professional’s personal experience in operating and
Practical implications are presented for policymakers to catalyse the digital transformation in small- and medium-sized restau
As consumers are becoming increasingly comfortable with self-service technology, auto-payment and ordering systems and r
Technology and institutions need to be built through dialogical interactions and shared understanding to more effectively imp
AI restaurant is a new establishment. Curiosity and uniqueness are the primary motivators for customers who want to try it. M
The research suggests that a critical element in terms of incorporating automation into future food and beverage operations
Subsequent attention should be directed to whether
The results of this study demonstrated the following key conclusions: several crucial conceptual aspects (‘perceived ease of u
The findings of this study help restaurateurs target the correct customers and set up appropriate price fences to safeguard pr
the information on variables that afect the consumer intention to use a self-service kiosk is useful for marketing strategies ai
These results suggest that service providers should create a clear and simple kiosk interface with minimal transaction steps, c
This research provides fast-food restaurant managers with an in-depth explanation of how to implement the digital dynamic
After the system development stage is complete, then apply cloud computing technology to the system. The hosting method
It is important to acknowledge that customers have diverse culinary tastes, which may result in variations in their preference
Restaurant companies should make proper investments in kiosk technology so that the technology delivers what it is suppose
Restaurant operators should carefully assess the potential benefits of IT investments and prioritize projects that align with th
The results also suggest that females may be more suitable target customers than males, therefore, restaurants with menus
The findings of our study provide a design basis for interaction designers working in the restaurant marketing sector who wan
nificantly positive effect on experience intention, robot restaurants can use robot waiters and high-tech atmosphere as promotional poin
ogies will help academicians study the long-term implications of this change, and how it would impact society at large. The paper provide
efulness perceptions. One way is to make the reviews more searchable. For instance, reviews can be segmented based on type of cuisine
xisting studies focus on a single technology or a small number of them. However, this study provides an overall perspective on a variety o
oving propensity, marketers will be able to sway their potential customers’ actual approach behaviors toward using IRSST more efficiently
onal experience in operating and managing restaurants throughout a period of sustained technology change.
small- and medium-sized restaurants. The results may also be beneficial for entrepreneurs who can implement innovative service practic
ment and ordering systems and robotic services, technology in foodservice will continue to play an essential role to better serve diners. Ge
r customers who want to try it. Most customers polled have a favorable opinion of AI restaurants. While most participants cannot accept
e food and beverage operations is encouraging consumers to have generally positive attitudes toward the use of robots in hospitality and
ual aspects (‘perceived ease of use’, ‘perceived usefulness’ and ‘perceived enjoyment’) of technology acceptance of new digital wine men
with minimal transaction steps, clear and simple menu items presented in larger fonts, and accessible color schemes.
implement the digital dynamic capabilities model for executing digital transformation and developing a new dynamic customer value.
the system. The hosting method is carried out so that the restaurant’s expenses monitoring system can be accessed via the link http://cek
erefore, restaurants with menus that cater to female customers may benefit from utilizing robot services. Furthermore, maximizing prom
atmosphere as promotional points to attract potential customers. Second, as food quality perception has a direct effect on regular patro
ociety at large. The paper provides a rich body of contemporary data and analysis in the food services sphere.
gmented based on type of cuisine or restaurant location by adding hashtags to enable members to easily retrieve reviews that fit their pre
overall perspective on a variety of restaurant technologies from FOH to BOH. It also includes mobile POS technologies.
plement innovative service practices in order to reduce interaction and empower cleanliness levels. Moreover, academics can use these r
ntial role to better serve diners. Geared with advanced innovations and intelligent devices, smart restaurants are now more than mere ea
ceptance of new digital wine menu apps in hotel restaurants had significant direct effects on the main outcome of interest, hotel restaura
be accessed via the link http://cekmid-monitoring.digital. This platform aims to provide easy access for users who want to use the system
s. Furthermore, maximizing promotional effects by implementing indirect advertising in dramas that women frequently watch can also be
as a direct effect on regular patronage intention, robot restaurants should pay attention to the evaluations and suggestions of experience
y retrieve reviews that fit their preferences. Another way is to set criteria for writing useful reviews that members can adhere to. Particula
utcome of interest, hotel restaurant customers’ ‘behavioural intention’ to return and spread positive ‘word of mouth’ about it.
ons and suggestions of experiencers on food quality, continuously improve food quality, and introduce the advantages of the robot chef i
members can adhere to. Particularly, they can advise members to share more detailed information about different aspects of their exper
he advantages of the robot chef in making food to customers. They need to recognize the reality that experiencers have low expectations
ut different aspects of their experiences including food quality, menu variety, service, atmosphere and location.
xperiencers have low expectations of food quality, but repeat customers attach great importance to food quality.
hello this will be item 2 of my portfolio I have attached item 1 to go based off what I have utilized. I have also attached the guidelines along with a template and sample. This is APA format. Item 1 of portfolio is attached.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY
1
Annotated Bibliography
Student Name
ENGL110: Making Writing Relevant
Professor Name
Assignment Due Date
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY
2
Annotated Bibliography
Complete References entry here
Paragraph summary and evaluation here (Please read all the assignment instructions word
for word before you complete this task. Also, look at the sample annotated bibliography
attached in this assignment area.)
Complete References entry here
Paragraph summary and evaluation here (Please read all the assignment instructions word
for word before you complete this task. Also, look at the sample annotated bibliography
attached in this assignment area.)
Information in this sample is to help you, not to do your work for you.
Copying and pasting info from this sample into your assignment violates the
university’s academic integrity standards and could constitute plagiarism.
Susie Sample
ENGL110
Professor Willmington
December 5, 2020
Citation Style: APA
Annotated Bibliography
Beilharz, J., Maniam, J., & Morris, M. (2015). Diet-induced cognitive deficits: the role of fat and sugar,
potential mechanisms and nutritional interventions. Nutrients, 7(8), 6719–6738.
https://doi:10.3390/nu7085307.
The three authors of this article are associated with the Department of Pharmacology, School of Medical
Sciences, UNSW Australia. Notes for the article are numerous (126) and substantive, most coming from
journals in medical and nutritional fields, thus enhancing the authors’ credibility. The authors explore
the relationship between intake of high energy (high fat and high sugar) foods and cognitive functions,
primarily short and long term memory. They focus on inflammation and neutrotrophic factors as
impacts from this kind of diet. Interventions are suggested, including the use of omega-3 and curcumin,
to counter cognitive decline related to food intake. This source will be helpful in identifying cognitive
impacts of consuming sugar, as well as options for helping reduce the impairment of memory.
Yeomans, M. (2017). Adverse effects of consuming high fat–sugar diets on cognition: implications for
understanding obesity. Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 76(4), 455–465.
https://doi.org/10.1017/S0029665117000805.
Martin R. Yeomans is associated with the School of Psychology, University of Sussex, in Brighton, UK.
Notes for the article are numerous (125) and substantive, most coming from journals in medical and
nutritional fields, thus enhancing the author’s credibility. Yeomans explores the idea that
overconsumption of diets high in fat and sugar may explain the correlation between obesity and
declines in cognitive functions. This work focuses on the impacts to the hippocampus and impaired
appetite control, seen in a Vicious Cycle Model, in which appetite control is impaired by the high fat and
sugar diets, resulting in increased consumption of poor quality food. Although Yeomans finds
verification of the cycle in research involving both humans and animals, he maintains that further
research is needed. This source will be helpful in demonstrating how interrelated diet and cognitive
functions are and how important it is to limit sugar intake for improved cognitive functions.
1
Portfolio
Ruben Olivas
American Public University System
ENCL1101
Professor Susan Lowman Thomas
12OCT2023
2
Portfolio
Beginning of the Report on the Communication in My Field of Study
Name:
1. This is the program I am studying:
Business administration
2. Here are some ways I learned about professionals in my field:
I have several scholarly and practical resources on Business and Administration discourse
communities. They gave me great advice on confidence, communication, and expectations in this
exciting work atmosphere.
a) Academic databases
I explored business and administration academic resources like the Journal of Finance, the
Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis, the Journal of Marketing Academy of
Management, and the Journal of Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice. Some sites offered
scholarly articles, journals, and research papers by experts. Understanding these published works
helped me appreciate business administration writers and researchers.
b) Industry-specific website
Harvard Business Review, Forbes, and Business Insider were among my sources. Industry
experts wrote articles, blogs, and opinion pieces for these sites. I read these websites to grasp
business styles, opinions, and issues.
c) Social and professional networks
Joining LinkedIn and Twitter business groups and forums to track industry trends and debates. I
observed business communication online by interacting with professionals, joining relevant
groups, and following industry influencers.
3
d) Podcasts, webinars
Practical business podcasts and webinars by pros helped me improve my business and
administration communication skills. These audio and visual channels taught me professional
communication, presentation, and technical skills.
Business Books/Publications:
I studied how successful entrepreneurs write and communicate by reading books by such
businesspeople and respected business periodicals. Their business-related literature offers unique
insights into expressing ideas and knowledge through writing. These learning materials shaped
my view of the Business and Administration discourse community. Analyzing these resources
carefully, I learned important communication ideas that apply to the above professional field.
3. I used this Artificial Intelligence (AI) tool:
ChatGPT
4. Here is what this AI tool said when I asked, “What writing style do professionals in
my field use?”:
Professionals in business typically utilize a formal and structured style of writing characterized
by clarity, precision, and professionalism. Here are key features of the writing style commonly
seen in the business domain:
1. Formal Tone and Language: Professionals in business maintain a formal tone and use
language that aligns with the seriousness and gravity of the subject matter. Slang, jargon,
or overly casual language is usually avoided for clear and precise expressions.
2. Clarity and Conciseness: Business communication emphasizes clarity to ensure a
diverse audience easily understands the message. Complex ideas are presented
straightforwardly and concisely, avoiding unnecessary verbosity or ambiguity.
4
3. Professional Vocabulary and Terminology: Business writing employs specialized and
industry-specific terminology relevant to the sector. Precise use of terminology enhances
communication and demonstrates expertise in the field.
4. Structured and Organized Format: Business documents follow a structured format
with a clear beginning, middle, and end. Information is organized logically, often using
headings, subheadings, bullet points, or numbered lists to aid readability and
comprehension.
5. Professional Formatting and Layout: Business professionals pay attention to
formatting details such as font, spacing, margins, and overall document layout.
Consistent formatting enhances the professionalism and readability of the written
material.
6. Objective and Fact-Based: Business writing presents facts, data, and evidence to
support arguments or proposals. Opinions are typically backed by verifiable information
and are presented objectively.
7. Audience-Centric Approach: Tailoring the communication to a specific audience is
crucial in business writing. Professionals consider their audience’s needs, interests, and
expectations to craft messages that resonate and convey the intended information
effectively.
8. Politeness and Etiquette: Politeness and proper etiquette are important aspects of
business writing. Courteous language and appropriate expressions of gratitude or
acknowledgement contribute to maintaining a positive and professional tone.
5
9. Proofreading and Accuracy: Business professionals pay meticulous attention to
grammar, punctuation, spelling, and accuracy. Errors are minimized through thorough
proofreading to ensure the highest level of professionalism.
10. Adherence to Industry Standards and Guidelines: Writing in the business domain
often aligns with established industry standards, guidelines, or templates specific to the
type of document being created (e.g., business reports, proposals, emails, etc.).
Understanding and effectively utilizing this writing style is vital for successful business
communication, whether in reports, proposals, emails, memos, or other professional
correspondences.
5. Here are MY tips for communicating with professionals in my field (a combination
of my observations and the information I got from the AI tool):
a) Communicate professionally and respectfully: Respect professionals and use formal
language in all communications. This includes emails, presentations, reports, and other written or
spoken communications.
b) Communicate clearly and directly: Prioritize directness in messages. Clarify your goals
and points to help the receiver grasp your message.
c) Tailor Your Speech:
Customize your language and style to your audience. To communicate effectively, know
their background, knowledge, and preferences.
d) Use Accurate and Relevant vocabulary: Use industry-specific vocabulary and jargon to
show understanding and align with professional language.
6
e) Prioritize Actionable Insights and Recommendations: Share facts and analysis with
practical recommendations for professionals to make educated decisions.
f) Write with clear structure and organization: Make your writing logical. Headings,
subheadings, bullet points, and a consistent format improve readability and comprehension.
Use credible facts, research, or proof to support your comments and arguments. Your
speech gains trust by providing facts.
To practice active listening and open-mindedness, actively listen to professionals during
conversations and meetings and be open to varied opinions and ideas. Encourage collaboration
and problem-solving through productive dialogues.
g) Request Feedback and Learn from Interactions Request feedback on your
communication style and interactions. Use this feedback to continue improving your commercial
and administrative communication abilities.
h) Value Time and Efficiency:
Appreciate professionals’ time. Communicate clearly to ensure people get the information
without delay or distraction. These techniques will improve communication with Business and
Administration workers, promoting productive and meaningful relationships.
Question 1
CrimeDate CrimeTime Crime Month Crime Hour
12/31/2015
0:01:00
12/31/2015
0:02:00
12/31/2015
1:00:00
12/31/2015
1:01:00
12/31/2015
1:20:00
12/31/2015
1:30:00
12/31/2015
1:45:00
12/31/2015
2:00:00
12/31/2015
2:30:00
12/31/2015
3:00:00
12/31/2015
3:30:00
12/31/2015
4:00:00
12/31/2015
5:10:00
12/31/2015
7:30:00
12/31/2015
8:00:00
12/31/2015
8:00:00
12/31/2015
8:30:00
12/31/2015
8:30:00
12/31/2015
8:55:00
12/31/2015
9:00:00
12/31/2015
9:15:00
12/31/2015
9:30:00
12/31/2015
9:40:00
12/31/2015 10:00:00
12/31/2015 10:35:00
12/31/2015 10:50:00
12/31/2015 10:51:25
12/31/2015 11:00:00
12/31/2015 11:15:00
12/31/2015 11:40:00
12/31/2015 12:00:00
12/31/2015 12:00:00
12/31/2015 12:00:00
12/31/2015 12:00:00
12/31/2015 12:00:00
12/31/2015 12:20:00
12/31/2015 12:30:00
12/31/2015 12:30:00
12/31/2015 12:30:00
12/31/2015 12:40:00
12/31/2015 13:00:00
Description
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ARSON
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
RAPE
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
Inside/Outside
Weapon
O
I
HANDS
I
I
I
OTHER
O
HANDS
O
FIREARM
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
FIREARM
O
I
O
HANDS
I
O
OTHER
I
O
O
I
O
OTHER
O
OTHER
I
I
O
HANDS
I
I
I
FIREARM
I
O
I
I
I
I
HANDS
O
OTHER
O
OTHER
I
HANDS
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:14:00
13:22:00
13:30:00
13:30:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:05:00
14:30:00
14:45:00
14:45:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:11:00
15:30:00
15:30:00
15:30:00
15:45:00
16:50:00
17:00:00
17:35:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:30:00
18:53:00
19:30:00
19:50:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:22:00
20:25:00
20:30:00
20:30:00
20:55:00
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ARSON
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
O
KNIFE
OTHER
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/31/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
2014
21:15:00
21:20:00
21:30:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:15:00
23:20:00
23:30:00
16:17:00
16:32:00
16:50:00
17:03:00
17:30:00
17:45:00
18:00:00
18:03:00
18:10:00
18:20:00
18:42:00
18:44:00
18:45:00
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:21:00
19:30:00
19:30:00
19:45:00
0:00:00
0:01:00
0:06:00
0:25:00
0:40:00
40
1:00:00
1:01:00
2:10:00
3:26:00
3:26:00
4:30:00
4:45:00
5:00:00
5:30:00
6:41:00
7:00:00
7:00:00
HOMICIDE
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
SHOOTING
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
Outside
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
Outside
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
OTHER
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
OTHER
KNIFE
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
7:00:00
7:02:00
7:30:00
7:30:00
7:56:00
8:00:00
8:00:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:30:00
9:32:00
10:00:00
10:00:00
10:00:00
10:15:00
10:20:00
11:00:00
11:00:00
11:03:00
11:15:00
11:30:00
11:40:00
11:42:00
11:55:00
1157
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:04:00
12:14:00
12:20:00
12:30:00
12:59:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:30:00
14:42:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:29:00
15:30:00
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
SHOOTING
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
ASSAULT BY THREAT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
I
O
O
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
Outside
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
KNIFE
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/30/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
15:46:00
15:46:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:06:00
20:20:00
20:22:00
20:30:00
20:56:00
2051
21:00:00
21:12:00
21:20:00
21:30:00
21:30:00
21:30:00
2134
2145
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:11:00
22:15:00
22:40:00
23:00:00
23:00:00
23:00:00
23:11:00
23:21:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:01:00
0:20:00
0:30:00
0:57:00
0:57:00
1:00:00
1:01:00
1:40:00
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
SHOOTING
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
SHOOTING
HOMICIDE
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ARSON
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
Outside
O
I
O
I
O
O
Inside
Inside
O
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
KNIFE
HANDS
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
2:15:00
2:50:00
3:00:00
3:00:00
3:14:00
3:14:00
3:40:00
4:00:00
5:01:00
5:30:00
6:00:00
6:00:00
7:00:00
7:35:00
8:05:00
8:34:00
8:42:00
8:43:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:30:00
10:15:00
10:30:00
11:00:00
11:02:00
11:05:00
11:17:00
11:30:00
11:33:00
11:45:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:20:00
12:20:00
12:39:00
12:53:00
13:00:00
13:10:00
13:15:00
13:53:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:13:00
1442
15:00:00
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
HOMICIDE
AUTO THEFT
I
O
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
Outside
O
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
15:00:00
15:46:00
15:46:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:30:00
16:46:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:15:00
17:30:00
17:40:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:15:00
18:17:00
18:30:00
18:30:00
19:00:00
19:08:00
19:14:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:38:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:05:00
21:30:00
21:30:00
21:35:00
21:40:00
21:50:00
22:00:00
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
HANDS
OTHER
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/29/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:33:00
22:37:00
22:50:00
22:56:00
2256
23:15:00
23:27:00
23:30:00
23:50:00
23:55:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:05:00
0:30:00
0:40:00
1:00:00
1:12:00
1:30:00
117
2:00:00
2:00:00
2:00:00
2:10:00
2:29:00
2:55:00
2:57:00
3:00:00
3:00:00
3:16:00
3:30:00
4:23:00
4:35:00
5:12:00
5:25:00
5:35:00
6:00:00
6:30:00
6:45:00
7:00:00
7:00:00
LARCENY
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
SHOOTING
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
HOMICIDE
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
LARCENY
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
Outside
I
O
I
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
Inside
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
7:40:00
7:50:00
8:00:00
8:00:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:24:00
9:30:00
9:40:00
9:59:00
10:00:00
10:00:00
10:00:00
10:02:00
10:30:00
10:32:00
11:00:00
11:35:00
11:45:00
11:55:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:07:00
12:20:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:10:00
13:12:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:26:00
14:30:00
14:30:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:00:00
15:45:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:05:00
16:05:00
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – RESIDENCE
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
ASSAULT BY THREAT
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
I
I
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
KNIFE
OTHER
KNIFE
OTHER
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
16:22:00
16:30:00
1623
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:20:00
17:45:00
17:48:00
17:50:00
17:53:00
17:58:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:01:00
18:30:00
18:35:00
18:48:00
18:59:00
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:21:00
19:21:00
19:30:00
19:33:00
19:36:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:30:00
20:39:00
20:59:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:12:11
21:15:00
21:30:00
21:30:00
21:45:00
21:59:00
2134
22:00:00
22:30:00
22:30:00
22:39:00
22:39:00
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
HOMICIDE
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – RESIDENCE
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
RAPE
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
HOMICIDE
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
O
I
Outside
O
O
I
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
I
O
Inside
O
O
I
I
I
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
OTHER
FIREARM
OTHER
KNIFE
OTHER
OTHER
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/28/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/24/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
23:00:00
23:00:00
23:02:00
23:05:00
23:30:00
23:30:00
23:45:00
16:00:00
16:18:00
16:45:00
16:50:00
17:00:00
17:15:00
17:35:00
17:45:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:10:00
18:25:00
18:30:00
18:30:00
18:48:00
1848
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:15:00
19:29:00
19:29:00
0:00:00
0:17:00
0:20:00
0:40:00
1:00:00
1:01:00
1:12:00
1:12:00
1:12:00
1:12:00
1:12:00
1:30:00
1:45:00
112
15:32:00
2:00:00
2:30:00
2:40:00
3:00:00
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
SHOOTING
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
SHOOTING
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
Outside
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
Outside
I
O
O
O
O
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
OTHER
OTHER
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
KNIFE
OTHER
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
3:19:00
3:42:00
3:42:00
3:42:00
4:38:00
4:50:00
4:50:00
5:15:00
6:22:00
6:37:00
6:45:00
6:49:00
7:07:00
8:00:00
8:00:00
8:00:00
8:30:00
8:30:00
8:30:00
8:31:00
9:00:00
9:43:00
9:45:00
9:45:00
10:00:00
10:00:00
10:45:18
11:00:00
11:10:00
11:25:00
11:25:00
11:30:00
11:30:00
11:30:00
11:30:00
11:31:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:15:00
12:20:00
12:35:00
13:00:00
13:36:00
13:40:00
13:48:00
13:50:00
14:00:00
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
RAPE
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
O
I
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
I
O
I
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
OTHER
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
OTHER
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
KNIFE
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/24/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
14:25:00
14:29:00
14:45:00
14:45:00
14:45:00
15:09:00
15:25:00
15:34:00
16:00:00
19:29:00
19:29:00
19:30:00
19:30:00
19:46:00
19:46:00
19:50:00
15:34:00
1929
1929
1929
1929
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:00:00
20:21:00
20:30:00
20:30:00
2049
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:05:00
21:30:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:30:00
22:30:00
22:30:00
22:30:00
22:38:00
22:50:00
22:50:00
22:58:00
23:45:00
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
SHOOTING
SHOOTING
SHOOTING
SHOOTING
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – RESIDENCE
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
HOMICIDE
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
I
O
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
Inside
Inside
Inside
Inside
O
I
I
O
I
I
O
I
O
O
Outside
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
OTHER
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
12/27/2015
12/27/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
23:51:00
23:51:00
0:01:00
0:20:00
0:30:00
0:30:00
1:00:00
1:01:00
1:06:00
1:10:00
1:33:00
2:00:00
3:30:00
3:30:00
3:45:00
4:00:00
4:00:00
4:20:00
4:20:00
4:25:00
4:25:00
4:27:00
5:01:00
5:16:00
5:40:00
6:00:00
6:30:00
6:31:00
0:00:00
0:01:00
7:45:00
8:00:00
8:30:00
9:00:00
9:45:00
11:00:00
11:00:00
11:25:00
11:30:00
11:44:00
11:45:00
11:50:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:00:00
12:15:00
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12:20:00
12:30:00
12:30:00
12:34:00
1245
13:00:00
13:05:00
13:10:00
13:13:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:09:00
14:09:00
14:30:00
14:55:00
15:00:00
15:20:00
15:20:00
15:20:00
15:30:00
15:54:00
15:54:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
16:20:00
16:30:00
16:41:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:28:00
17:43:00
17:43:00
17:58:00
18:05:00
18:10:00
18:15:00
18:27:00
18:29:00
18:30:00
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
LARCENY
HOMICIDE
LARCENY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
LARCENY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
AGG. ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
O
O
I
O
Outside
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
I
O
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
O
O
KNIFE
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
KNIFE
OTHER
HANDS
OTHER
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/26/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
18:30:00
18:37:00
18:40:00
18:45:00
19:00:00
19:00:00
19:30:00
19:45:00
20:00:00
20:29:00
20:30:00
20:30:00
20:30:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:00:00
21:10:00
21:18:00
21:29:00
21:30:00
21:45:00
21:49:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:15:00
22:30:00
22:45:00
23:00:00
23:13:00
23:13:00
23:15:00
23:19:00
23:30:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:01:00
0:01:00
0:15:00
0:17:00
1:00:00
1:00:00
1:32:00
2:00:00
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
O
O
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
OTHER
OTHER
FIREARM
FIREARM
O
I
O
O
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
FIREARM
KNIFE
HANDS
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
2:00:00
2:00:00
2:08:00
2:30:00
2:30:00
3:00:00
3:30:00
3:50:00
4:00:00
4:00:00
4:20:00
4:29:00
4:55:00
5:26:00
5:30:00
5:33:00
5:45:00
5:53:00
6:03:00
6:10:00
6:30:00
6:30:00
7:31:00
7:40:00
8:00:00
8:10:00
8:30:00
10:30:00
10:30:00
11:00:00
11:30:00
12:00:00
12:24:00
12:45:00
13:00:00
13:00:00
13:30:00
13:30:00
13:30:00
13:45:00
13:55:00
14:00:00
14:00:00
14:30:00
15:30:00
16:01:00
16:30:00
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
ASSAULT BY THREAT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ASSAULT BY THREAT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ASSAULT BY THREAT
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
O
O
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
OTHER
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
16:50:00
17:00:00
17:00:00
17:15:00
17:30:00
17:40:00
18:00:00
18:00:00
18:30:00
18:45:00
18:45:00
18:55:00
19:24:00
19:30:00
19:30:00
19:37:00
19:45:00
19:54:00
20:00:00
20:14:00
20:14:00
20:14:00
20:14:00
20:14:00
20:14:00
20:27:00
21:00:00
21:16:00
21:19:00
21:30:00
21:30:00
21:50:00
21:58:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:00:00
22:13:00
22:21:00
22:30:00
22:30:00
23:00:00
23:00:00
23:03:00
23:10:00
23:30:00
23:30:00
23:30:00
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – RESIDENCE
BURGLARY
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – STREET
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
AUTO THEFT
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
LARCENY
ROBBERY – COMMERCIAL
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY FROM AUTO
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
AUTO THEFT
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
FIREARM
FIREARM
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/25/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
23:46:00
23:53:00
23:55:00
2352
15:02:00
15:05:00
15:45:00
16:00:00
16:00:00
0:04:00
0:17:00
0:30:00
0:50:00
1:00:00
1:00:00
1:01:00
1:04:00
1:50:00
1:55:00
2:13:00
2:40:00
2:43:00
2:55:00
3:00:00
3:00:00
3:15:00
3:30:00
4:30:00
4:30:00
5:03:00
5:09:15
6:00:00
6:00:00
6:00:00
6:19:00
6:30:00
8:30:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:00:00
9:24:00
10:00:00
10:30:00
11:00:00
11:20:00
11:35:00
AGG. ASSAULT
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
SHOOTING
LARCENY FROM AUTO
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
ROBBERY – CARJACKING
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
AUTO THEFT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
LARCENY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
AUTO THEFT
AGG. ASSAULT
LARCENY
COMMON ASSAULT
COMMON ASSAULT
BURGLARY
AUTO THEFT
ARSON
RAPE
LARCENY
ROBBERY – STREET
COMMON ASSAULT
ROBBERY – STREET
BURGLARY
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY FROM AUTO
LARCENY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
BURGLARY
LARCENY FROM AUTO
ROBBERY – STREET
LARCENY
AGG. ASSAULT
AUTO THEFT
I
O
O
Outside
O
I
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
OTHER
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
FIREARM
OTHER
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
HANDS
HANDS
KNIFE
HANDS
KNIFE
FIREARM
OTHER
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2015
12/24/2
There are supporting files attached: The case study file for managing 402 Note: Please write only the required number of words and be in your own style
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 11741
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Ghazala Aziz
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks:
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11753
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Dr. Samreen Akhtar
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.
What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
no plagarsim refrences in apa style any Saudi Local company or any Multinational company.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
Instructions:
In this week’s assignment, answer the following questions. It is crucial that you answer
these questions without using any external material. Simply rely on your experience,
point-of-view, and current understanding of project management to answer these
questions. You will be evaluated on your efforts to answer these questions compared to
the validity of your answers. 1. What is the role of a project sponsor?
2. Who decides all the tasks that need to be completed for a given project?
3. How does an organization choose one project over another?
4. How is the budget finalized for a given project?
5. What happens if someone wants to add one extra feature in the project
deliverable half-way through the project?
6. Can a construction project manager run a healthcare-related project
successfully? How? 7. Half-way through the project execution, you learned that a project is running
behind the schedule. As a project manager what would you do?
8. Longer the project duration, the higher the chances of risk. What provisions
would you include in your risk management plan? 9. Upon project completion, you learned that client is not happy with the final
deliverables. What can you do now?
10. When should a project be marked as complete? BUS530 – Project Management
Project Management Concepts – Pre-Assessment
Requirements:
Submit a Word document.
Each answer should be between 4 to 6 lines, double-spaced, Times New
Roman.
APA format, including an in-text citation for referenced works, title, and reference
pages.
Be sure to read the criteria by which your work will be evaluated before you write
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BUS530 – Project Management
Project Management Concepts – Pre-Assessment
Due Date: Sunday 11:59 pm EST of Unit 1
Points: 100
Overview:
Every profession around the world contains its own jargon and lingo and project
management is no different. This assignment is designed to gauge your current
understanding of project management terms and concepts.
Instructions:
In this week’s assignment, answer the following questions. It is crucial that you answer
these questions without using any external material. Simply rely on your experience,
point-of-view, and current understanding of project management to answer these
questions. You will be evaluated on your efforts to answer these questions compared to
the validity of your answers.
1.
What is the role of a project sponsor?
2.
Who decides all the tasks that need to be completed for a given project?
3.
How does an organization choose one project over another?
4.
How is the budget finalized for a given project?
5.
What happens if someone wants to add one extra feature in the project
deliverable half-way through the project?
6.
Can a construction project manager run a healthcare-related project
successfully? How?
7.
Half-way through the project execution, you learned that a project is running
behind the schedule. As a project manager what would you do?
8.
Longer the project duration, the higher the chances of risk. What provisions
would you include in your risk management plan?
9.
Upon project completion, you learned that client is not happy with the final
deliverables. What can you do now?
10.
When should a project be marked as complete?
Requirements:
Submit a Word document.
Each answer should be between 4 to 6 lines, double-spaced, Times New
Roman.
APA format, including an in-text citation for referenced works, title, and reference
pages.
Be sure to read the criteria by which your work will be evaluated before you write
and again after you write.
Evaluation Rubric for Project Management Concepts– Pre-assessment
Assignment
Criteria
Content
Writing
Quality
Answer
Length
APA
Format
Exemplary
Proficient
Needs
Improvement
30 – 39 points
Answers
demonstrate
limited critical
thinking in
applying,
analyzing, and/or
explain course
concept
questions.
Minimal
connections
made through
explanations
and/or examples.
Deficient
50 points
Answers
demonstrate a
high degree of
critical thinking in
applying,
analyzing, and
explain course
concept
questions.
Insightful and
relevant
connections
made through
explanations and
examples.
40 – 49 points
Answers
demonstrate
some degree of
critical thinking in
applying,
analyzing, and/or
explain course
concept
questions.
Connections
made through
explanations,
and/or examples.
25 points
Well written and
clearly organized
using standard
English,
characterized by
elements of a
strong writing
style and
basically free
from grammar,
punctuation,
usage, and
spelling errors.
10 points
20 – 24 points
Above-average
writing style and
logically
organized using
standard English
with minor errors
in grammar,
punctuation,
usage, and
spelling.
15 – 19 points
Average and/or
casual writing
style that is
sometimes
unclear and/or
with some errors
in grammar,
punctuation,
usage, and
spelling.
0 – 14 points
Poor writing style
lacking in
standard English,
clarity, language
used, and/or
frequent errors in
grammar,
punctuation,
usage, and
spelling. Needs
work.
8 – 9 points
6 – 7 points
0 – 5 points
All ten questions
are between 4
and 6 sentences
in length.
Eight or nine
questions are
between 4 and 6
sentences in
length.
Six or seven
questions are
between 4 and 6
sentences in
length.
Less than 6 of the
ten questions are
between 4 and 6
sentences in
length.
15 points
12 – 14 points
9 – 11 points
0 – 8 points
APA format is
present in all the
answers and is
error-free.
APA format is
present in all or a
majority of the
answers; there
are 1 or 2 errors
in format.
APA format is
present in some
of the answers
and/or there are
more than four
errors in format.
APA format is not
present, is limited
in the answers,
and there are
more than 10
errors in format.
0 – 29 points
Answers lack
critical thinking
and do not
explain course
concept
questions.
Superficial
connections are
made with key
course concepts.
Case 3: Segmentation and Targeting
Firms commonly segment customers by their lifestyles and further profile identified segments
using demographic variables. In this case, we will follow this common approach to segment the
sneaker market. Use the “Sneakers Data” on Canvas and perform the following analyses.
First, we use only the lifestyle variables to segment the market as follows:
1. Use the lifestyle variables (d001-d022) as the input for a hierarchical cluster analysis.
You should (a) include the respondent ID in the first grey column of your data and the
lifestyle variables from the first white column and (b) standardize your input data. Your
input data should look like this:
Report the dendrogram and scree plot in the appendix with a clear title. Discuss how
many segments you would like to proceed with and why you chose the number. (0.5%)
2. Suppose you decided to proceed with N segments in Question (1). Conduct a
nonhierarchical cluster analysis with N segments. Report the segment size and the
segment description in the appendix with a clear title. (0.5%)
3. Conduct a nonhierarchical cluster analysis again with N+1 segments. Report the
segment size and the segment description in the appendix with a clear title. (0.5%)
4. Based on your results from Questions 1 to 3, what is the optimal number of market
segments in this case? Why? Please consider the dendrogram or scree plot (i.e., the
statistic fit), whether you can interpret the results and whether the results make sense (i.e.,
the managerial relevance), and whether at least one segment is targetable in terms of its
size and accessibility (i.e., the targetability). (0.5%)
5. Name and describe every market segment you identified in Question (4) based on the
segment description results corresponding to the optional number of segments. You are
encouraged to use a table or paragraphs to present your answer. (1.2%)
6. Based on your results in Question (5), to which segment does the fourth respondent (i.e.,
ID = 4) belong? (0.2%)
1
You have identified different market segments. Next, we want to check whether we can use
demographic variables to discriminate these segments. Demographics that can statistically
discriminate those segments can be used to further profile (or describe the distinct characteristics
of) those segments.
7. We need to create data for a discriminant analysis using the demographic variables
(e001-e004). The first column of your discriminant data is the respondent ID. The
second one is a dummy variable = 1 if the respondent is a male. The third one is a
dummy variable = 1 if the respondent is 24 years old or younger. The fourth one is a
dummy variable = 1 if the respondent lives in an urban area. The last one is a dummy
variable = 1 if the respondent is a student. Overall, your discriminant data (in Excel)
should look like this:
Report the first 10 rows of your discriminant data in the appendix with a clear title.
(0.5%)
8. Conduct a discriminant analysis for the segments you described in Question (5) with
data you created in Question (7). Report the results regarding the descriptors in the
appendix with a clear title. Use the results to describe each segment in terms of
demographic variables. Hint: you can rely on those showing significant differences
among segments. (0.8%)
Now is your time to offer your marketing recommendation based on your findings:
9. Suppose you are going to present your results to the marketing manager of Reebok.
Which marketing segment(s) would you suggest that Reebok should target? Why? To
answer this question, you may also want to consider the following quotes about Reebok
from a news report (https://wwd.com/business-news/mergers-acquisitions/let-reebok-bereebok-is-abgs-mantra-for-the-brand-1235108227/.
“Reebok is one of the few super brands that has the permission to play in any space. Its
position at the intersection of fashion, sports and culture allows Reebok to be elastic
while staying true to its celebrated ethos and unmistakable DNA.”
2
“Reebok’s marketing will also reflect its new ethos. The company just launched “Life Is
Not a Spectator Sport” campaign for spring [2023], a reboot of its original campaign
from the ’80s, featuring a series of short films starring former basketball star Allen
Iverson as well as a lineup of athletes and artists.” (0.8%)
Requirement
This is a group report. A list of group members who contribute to the report should be provided.
If any group member does not contribute to the assignment at all, the other group member
can remove the name of the particular member from the report. You will have an
opportunity to conduct the self and peer evaluation for this assignment.
Your report cannot exceed 4 double-spaced pages with 12-point font and 1” margins on all
four sides (Formatting: 0.5%). Tables and exhibits, which are not subject to the page limit,
should be placed in an appendix. Submit your report on Canvas by 2 p.m., October 25. You can
submit it multiple times by the due. One member can submit the report for the whole group.
3
●The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
●Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
●Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
●Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
●Late submission will NOT be accepted.
●Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
●All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
●Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Question(s): (Marks. 15)
Q1. Fundamental questions for a survey research need to be answered at the design stage are:
1.What sort of survey are you contemplating?
2.What sort of respondent are you targeting?
3.What questions do you want answers to?
4.What response categories are you contemplating?
5.What sequence of questions should you pursue?
6.What is the layout of the survey instrument?
7.How will the sample be selected?
Develop an example of your own on Survey research by answering to all the above questions for a quality design.(5 Marks)
Answer:
Q2. What do you understand by Archival Research? Discuss its importance as a research method and give at least one example of a research paper (preferably Accounting paper) conducted be Archival research (5 Mark)
Answer:
Q3. What are the essential Ethical guidelines that the researcher needs? (5 Mark)
Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment (2)
Deadline: Saturday 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Accounting Research
and Practice
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 403
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 12661
Academic Year: 1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Youssef RIAHI
Students’ Grade:
/15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
● The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
● Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
● Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
● Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
● Late submission will NOT be accepted.
● Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
● All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
● Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks. 15)
Q1. Fundamental questions for a survey research need to be answered at the design stage are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What sort of survey are you contemplating?
What sort of respondent are you targeting?
What questions do you want answers to?
What response categories are you contemplating?
What sequence of questions should you pursue?
What is the layout of the survey instrument?
How will the sample be selected?
Develop an example of your own on Survey research by answering to all the above questions for a
quality design.(5 Marks)
Answer:
Q2. What do you understand by Archival Research? Discuss its importance as a research method
and give at least one example of a research paper (preferably Accounting paper) conducted be
Archival research (5 Mark)
Answer:
Q3. What are the essential Ethical guidelines that the researcher needs? (5 Mark)
Answer:
Kindly I will need you to do the week 4 to 6 assignment and week 4 to 6 quiz on the textbook, the quiz is due on the 27 and the assignment is due on the 30th.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 15)
Q1. Define in Your words
a. Cost Centre
[0.5 mark]
b. Profit Centre
[0.5 mark]
c. Investment Centre
[0.5 mark]
Answer:
Q2. Hamed Company is preparing budgets for the quarter ending June 30, 2019.
Budgeted sales in units for the next five months are:
April
May
June
July
20,000
50,000
30,000
25,000
Required:
a. Prepare Sales budget for April, May & June assuming selling price per unit is SR 15.
[2.5 marks]
b. Prepare production budget for April, May & June if the company wishes ending inventory as
10 % of next month sales units.
[2.5 marks]
Answer:
Q3. Karim Corporation is considering two alternatives that are code-named A and B. Costs
associated with the alternatives are listed below:
1
Alternative A
Alternative B
Supplies costs
SAR 33 000
SAR 33 000
Assembly costs
SAR 48 000
SAR 51 000
Power costs
SAR 32 000
SAR 22 000
Inspection costs
SAR 11 000
SAR 27 000
Required:
a. Which costs are relevant and which are not relevant in the choice between these two alternatives?
[2.5 Marks]
b. What is the differential cost between the two alternatives?
[2.5 Marks]
Answer
Q.4 Karim Industries is a division of a major corporation. Last year the division had total sales of
SAR 43,380,000, net operating income of SAR 4,828,980, and average operating assets of SAR
9,000,000. The company’s minimum required rate of return is 12%.
Required:
a. What is the division’s margin?
[1 mark]
b. What is the division’s turnover?
[1 mark]
c. What is the division’s return on investment (ROI)?
[1.5 marks]
Answer
2
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Change Agents Are you a change agent? Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization. Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance. Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.). Directions: Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit. Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic. No Al allowed ,500 words , Refrences APA7 .
Discuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
I don’t want anything extra, just the existing instructions
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Note:
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Q1. Inventory management in corporations identifies management’s practices, investigate
efficient and effective inventory management approaches, and efficient and effective
inventory management practices, which are key points for an auditor to ensure evidences
for an opinion in the audit report on inventory.
Imagine that you are an auditor of a corporation in KSA and answer the following:
a. Bring out the inventory management process you would follow to check efficient
and effective inventory management practices in the corporation.
b. List done the important functions with examples in the inventory management
process.
c. Explain the audit tests you would cover with related assertions to get assured
evidences
d. Conclude your testing on likely and tolerable misstatements allocated to the
inventory account (Chapter 13)
Answer (5Marks)
Q2. What are the control purposes and management assertions supported by bank
reconciliations? (Chapter 16)
Answer (3 Mark)
Q3. The standard unqualified report is issued when the auditor has gathered sufficient
evidence, the audit has been performed in accordance with PCAOB standards, and the
financial statements conform to GAAP.
Required:
Take an example of a corporation from KSA and explain the important elements necessary
for a standard unqualified report issued by an auditor in reporting of financial statements.
Give examples on each element. (Chapter 18)
Answer (4 Mark)
Q4. Briefly explain Assurance Services, Attest services and Trust Services. (Chapter 21)
Answer (3 Mark)
ECOM 322: Social Media Marketing
1st Semester/2023-2024
Discussion Question
Write a report discussing the following points:
1. Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi
Arabia (In 2022-2023). For each campaign:
▪ Give the reasons behind their success?
▪ What
is
the
added
value
of
this
marketing
campaign
for
the
company/organization?
2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two
years). For each campaign:
▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail?
▪ And what can we learn from them?
Notes:
▪
For each case, provide the following information: Company Name, Campaign Name
and Social media platforms used.
▪
Examples can be a profit or non-profit organization.
Presentation:
▪
Prepare a presentation answering the previous questions and what are the criteria that
guide you to evaluate the campaigns?
Assignment Guidelines:
▪
This assignment is an individual assignment.
▪
All students are encouraged to use their own word.
▪
Your Assignment must include:
▪
Cover page and make sure to include the cover page with all information required.
One mark will be deducted if there is no cover page.
▪
A title that well represents the content of your report.
▪
A “References” section listing all sources included. And ensure that you follow
the APA style in your report.
▪
An opening paragraph.
▪
The main body of your report.
▪
Use Times New Roman, 12 font size, 1.5 line space and adjusted text.
▪
A mark of zero will be given for any submission that includes copying from other
resource without referencing it.
▪
Your report length should be between 600 to 800 words.
▪
Assignment must be in word format only no PDF.
▪
Your file should be saved as: Your name – CRN – ECOM322- Discussion.doc
▪
You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the
assignment.
▪
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of
assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and
grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
▪
The suggested duration for the presentation is 10 minutes with 5 minutes followed
by Q&A.
▪
You are free to choose any slide format and you should make sure having a proper
number of slides; so that you are able to finish on time (Template is attached in the
blackboard).
Submission:
Type
Due date
Point covered
Marks
Report
28/10/2023
@11:59 P.M.
All
10
Presentation
During week 10 &
11
Submission: due on
29/10/2023
at 3:00 PM.
All
5
Note: Submission will be through the Blackboard.
Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. References include at least five
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. please no plagiaism at all .
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Please reply to confirm ?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud AlJohani
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Finish the assignment questions and DCF valuation (according to my classmate’s answer to wirt a new one)Make sure you are good at cooporate finanece, including enterprise value, dcf analysisFinish the assignment questions and DCF valuationplease finish all questions in attached pdf, give specific calculation process and excel workplease show me very specific calculation process in word document. for lst question, you should show me both specifc calculation process and specific and accurate procress in Excel
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Individual Assignment 2 – Due October 24
This assignment is to be completed and turned in individually.
1. You would like to estimate a per-share value of ABC, Inc. Your estimate of the present
value of ABC’s future free cash flows from operations is $800 million. The book value of
its assets is $850 million. The value of debt and lease obligations are $220 million and
$85 million, respectively. ABC Inc. also has cash holdings (non-operating assets) of
$95 million. There are 5 million shares outstanding.
What is the value per share?
Please use the following information to answer questions 2 and 3: Your firm has
outstanding debt equal to $138 million, cash holdings equal to $47 million, and 19
million shares outstanding.
2. Your firm is currently privately held, and you would like to use information from
publicly traded comparables to estimate a price for your stock ($ per share). Your
firm’s expected 2023 EBITDA is $74 million. The industry median ratio of enterprise
value to EBITDA is currently 6.1. What is the market-implied enterprise value of
your firm?
3. What is the market-implied equity price per share?
4. You have completed a DCF valuation of ElectricCar’s operations and estimate an
enterprise value of $915 million. There are currently 11 million shares outstanding.
ElectricCar Inc. has $80 million in debt and $19 million in cash. There are also
1,000,000 warrants outstanding with an average strike price of $15 per share.
Please estimate the equity value per share of ElectricCar Inc. (assuming exercise of
the warrants).
Please use the following information to answer questions (5) through (7).
BoatShare Inc. has just received approval to operate in coastal cities across
Connecticut. In order to begin operations, it will need to purchase 150 new boats at
$37,000 each (i.e., total cost of $5,550,000). To finance this purchase, it will borrow all
$5,500,000 for one year from the bank. There is a 95 percent chance that BoatShare
will generate sufficient cash flow to repay the loan in full with interest at the end of the
year; otherwise, BoatShare will go bankrupt. In the event of bankruptcy, the fleet of
used boats can be sold for $2,200,000; however, the legal and administrative costs to
the bank of seizing and selling them is $400,000.
5. What interest rate will the bank charge for the loan if its expected return on loans to
companies that are similar to BoatShare is 9 percent?
6. Before calculating anything, how is the interest rate charged on the loan that you
calculated in Question 5 affected by the potential bankruptcy costs? That is, do you
expect the interest rate to be higher, lower, or the same as it would be absent these
costs?
7. Please calculate the interest rate if there are no administrative costs associated with
bankruptcy.
8. DCF Exercise: (Valuation Exercise) See spreadsheet: OrganicFood_DCF.xls
Conagra Foods (CAG) is thinking about acquiring OrganicFood Co. and would like to
determine an offer price. Conagra Foods has no plans to change the capital structure
or operations of OrganicFood. OrganicFood’s income statement and balance sheet
data are provided in “OrganicFood.xls”. For your calculations, you may assume that
the appropriate WACC is 10%
a) Calculate the historical free cashflows of OrganicFood, from the 12 month
periods ending September 2019 through September 2023.
b) Forecast free cash flows to the firm from September 2024 through September
2026. You may assume that the income statement and balance sheet
components of free cash flow (relative to sales) remain fixed at their 2023
values.
c) Calculate a terminal value assuming that, after 2026, sales and all components
of free cash flow grow at 2% per year (i.e., the projected 2026 sales growth
rate) in perpetuity.
d) Provide a DCF valuation of the company as of September 2023. That is,
discount the cash flows in (b) and (c).
e) What is the equity value of Organic Food?
Question 1
PV(FCF)
Debt
Lease Obligation
Cash
Equity value
# shares outstanding
Value per share
$
$
$
$
$
800 million
220 million
85 million
95 million
590 million
5 million
118
$
Question 2
Debt
Cash
# shares outstanding
Expected 2023 EBITDA
Industry Avg EV/EBITDA
Market-implied EV
Question 3
Market-implied Equity value
Market-implied Equity per share
Question 4
EV
Debt
Cash
# warrants
Strike price
Cash from exercise of warrants
Equity value
$
$
138 million
47 million
19 million
$
$
74 million
6.1
451.40 million
$
$
360.40 million
18.97
$
$
$
915 million
80 million
19 million
1 million
15
15 million
869 million
$
$
$
Initial # shares outstanding
# warrants
Total shares outstanding (adj)
Equity value per share
11 million
1 million
12 million
$
Question 5
Loan amount
Interest rate charged
Salvage value of used boats
Legal & adminstrative costs
Target expected return (9%)
Bank’s profit
72.42
5,500,000
13.01% (using Goal Seek)
2,200,000
400,000
495,000
Probability
715,789
95%
(3,700,000)
5%
Expected return from BoatShare
495,000
Question 6
The potential bankruptcy costs (especially the direct costs like legal and administrative) redcude the amount the bank e
In order to compensate for this higher risk of loss, the bank will charge a higher interest rate on the loan.
Therefore, I expect the interest rate to be lower than it would be absent these costs.
Question 7
Interest rate charged
12.63% (using Goal Seek)
Bank’s profit
Probability
694,737
(3,300,000)
95%
5%
Expected return from BoatShare
495,000
dministrative) redcude the amount the bank expects to recover in the event of a bankruptcy.
(a)
Free Cash Flow (FCF) Calculation
For the 12 month Period Ending
Currency
EBIT
Tax rate
Taxes
EBIAT
+Depreciation
-Capital Expenditures
-Change in NWC
FCF
Sept-30-2019
USD
Sept-30-2020
USD
Sept-30-2021
USD
Sept-30-2022
USD
1,313.9
32.4%
425.42
888.44
361.48
506.07
22.43
721.42
1,406.4
33.1%
466.12
940.28
386.78
464.14
(14.42)
877.35
1,509.0
34.4%
519.71
989.27
409.99
491.98
332.57
574.70
1,616.6
33.4%
540.17
1,076.39
434.59
538.89
98.02
874.07
Sept-30-2024
Sept-30-2025
Sept-30-2026
(b)
For the 12 month Period Ending
Currency
USD
USD
EBIT
Tax rate
Taxes
EBIAT
+Depreciation
-Capital Expenditures
-Change in NWC
FCF
1,583.5
33.5%
530.21
1,053.34
478.79
478.79
1,053.34
1,621.8
33.5%
543.01
1,078.78
490.35
490.35
1,078.78
(c)
Growth rate after 2026
WACC
Terminal Value
2%
10%
14,098.25
USD
1,662.3
33.5%
556.59
1,105.75
502.61
502.61 (Assume PP&E remain at 2023 leve
(Assume Account receivables, inve
1,105.75
(d)
Sept-30-2024
Sept-30-2025
Sept-30-2026
USD
USD
USD
FCF
Terminal value
Total CF
1,053.34
1,078.78
1,053.34
1,078.78
1,105.75
14,098.25
15,204.00
PV of Future CF @ Sep 2023
13,272.12
(e)
As of September 2023
Total firm value
Total debt
Cash
Equity value
14,284.2
2,049.9
153.5
12,387.8
For the 12 month Period Ending
Currency
Net Working Capital (NWC) Table
Sept-30-2023
USD
1,526.5
33.5%
511.10
1,015.37
461.53
553.84
(89.00)
1,012.06
A/R
Inventory
A/P
NWC
Change in NWC
Sept-30-2018
Sept-30-2019
266.0
676.2
334.0
608.20
266.0
676.2
311.6
630.63
22.43
(Assume PP&E remain at 2023 level)
(Assume Account receivables, inventory, and account payables remain at 2023 level)
Sept-30-2020
238.9
701.2
323.9
616.21
(14.42)
Sept-30-2021
Sept-30-2022
344.4
948.7
344.4
948.78
332.57
347.5
1,066.3
367.0
1,046.80
98.02
Sept-30-2023
313.7
1,025.1
381.0
957.80
(89.00)
OrganicFood Co. Income Statement
For the Fiscal Period Ending
ACTUAL
12 months Sept30-2018
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2019
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2020
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2021
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2022
USD
Revenue
Other Revenue
Total Revenue
4,384.3
4,384.3
5,372.8
5,372.8
5,630.0
5,630.0
6,446.8
6,446.8
6,880.7
6,880.7
Cost Of Goods Sold
Gross Profit
2,506.5
1,877.8
2,814.7
2,558.1
2,973.1
2,656.9
3,637.4
2,809.4
3,858.6
3,022.1
Selling General & Admin Exp.
R & D Exp.
Depreciation
Other Operating Expense/(Income)
673.6
307.3
0.2
878.2
361.5
4.5
863.1
386.8
0.6
892.7
410.0
(2.3)
973.9
434.6
(3.0)
Operating Expense Total
981.0
1,244.2
1,250.5
1,300.4
1,405.5
Operating Income
896.7
1,313.9
1,406.4
1,509.0
1,616.6
Interest (Expense)
(62.5)
(65.2)
(67.1)
(79.8)
(93.4)
Interest and Investment Income
Net Interest Exp.
7.0
(55.5)
2.8
(62.4)
0
(67.1)
0
(79.8)
0
(93.4)
Tax Rate %
Income Tax Expense
Net Income
32.9%
276.3
564.9
32.4%
405.2
846.2
33.1%
443.9
895.4
34.4%
492.2
937.0
33.4%
509.0
1,014.2
Currency
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
Assumptions
COGS / Sales
SG&A / Sales
Depreciation / Sales
54.5%
15.1%
7.1%
EBIT / Sales
23.3%
Revenue Forecast
12 months
Sept-30-2023
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2024E
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2025E
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2026E
USD
6,545.7
6,545.7
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
3,570.2
2,975.5
3,703.7
3,086.8
3,793.1
3,161.3
3,888.0
3,240.3
478.8
490.4
502.6
1,583.5
1,621.8
1,662.3
33.5%
33.5%
33.5%
988.8
461.5
(1.3)
1,449.0
1,526.5
(79.4)
0
(79.4)
33.5%
484.5
962.6
Organic Food Co. Balance Sheet
Balance Sheet as of:
Sep-30-2018
USD
Sep-30-2019
USD
Sep-30-2020
USD
Sept-30-2021
USD
Sep-30-2022
USD
456.7
456.7
283.6
283.6
319.8
24.0
343.9
229.7
229.7
256.4
256.4
Accounts Receivable
Total Receivables
266.0
266.0
238.9
238.9
344.4
344.4
347.5
347.5
313.7
313.7
Inventory
Total Current Assets
676.2
1,398.9
701.2
1,223.6
948.7
1,637.0
1,066.3
1,643.5
1,025.1
1,595.2
5,736.65
5,736.6
5,881.24
5,881.2
5,958.59
5,958.6
6,040.59
6,040.6
6,144.89
6,144.9
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
LIABILITIES
Accounts Payable
Curr. Port. of LT Debt
Other Current Liabilities
Total Current Liabilities
334.0
40.0
102.3
476.3
311.6
70.0
100.8
482.4
323.9
80.0
122.9
526.7
344.4
100.0
146.8
591.2
367.0
50.0
134.1
551.1
Long-Term Debt
Other Non-Current Liabilities
Total Liabilities
1,526.0
30.6
2,032.9
1,130.0
35.6
1,647.9
1,635.4
42.8
2,204.9
1,659.5
105.3
2,356.0
1,807.8
101.1
2,460.0
Common Stock
Additional Paid In Capital
Retained Earnings
Treasury Stock
Total Common Equity
130.2
4,547.9
424.5
5,102.6
135.7
4,575.1
746.1
5,456.9
127.1
4,396.6
866.9
5,390.7
105.7
4,261.2
961.2
5,328.1
79.5
4,125.1
1,075.5
5,280.1
Total Equity
5,102.6
5,456.9
5,390.7
5,328.1
5,280.1
Total Liabilities And Equity
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
Currency
ASSETS
Cash And Equivalents
Short Term Investments
Total Cash & ST Investments
Property, Plant & Equipment (Net)
Total Long Term Assets
Total Assets
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
FORECAST
Sep-30-2023
USD
Sep-30-2024
USD
Sep-30-2025
USD
Sep-30-2026
USD
309.4
309.4
309.4
309.4
309.4
1,058.2
1,539.1
1,058.2
1,058.2
1,058.2
6,237.20
6,237.2
6,237.2
6,237.2
6,237.2
381.0
381.0
381.0
153.5
18.0
171.5
7,776.3
381.0
50.0
137.6
568.6
1,999.9
109.3
2,677.8
41.7
3,965.8
1,091.0
5,098.5
5,098.5
7,776.3
OrganicFood Co. Income Statement
For the Fiscal Period Ending
ACTUAL
12 months
Sept-30-2018
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2019
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2020
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2021
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2022
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2023
USD
Revenue
Other Revenue
Total Revenue
4,384.3
4,384.3
5,372.8
5,372.8
5,630.0
5,630.0
6,446.8
6,446.8
6,880.7
6,880.7
6,545.7
6,545.7
Cost Of Goods Sold
Gross Profit
2,506.5
1,877.8
2,814.7
2,558.1
2,973.1
2,656.9
3,637.4
2,809.4
3,858.6
3,022.1
3,570.2
2,975.5
Selling General & Admin Exp.
R & D Exp.
Depreciation
Other Operating Expense/(Income)
673.6
307.3
0.2
878.2
361.5
4.5
863.1
386.8
0.6
892.7
410.0
(2.3)
973.9
434.6
(3.0)
988.8
461.5
(1.3)
Operating Expense Total
981.0
1,244.2
1,250.5
1,300.4
1,405.5
1,449.0
Operating Income
896.7
1,313.9
1,406.4
1,509.0
1,616.6
1,526.5
Interest (Expense)
(62.5)
(65.2)
(67.1)
(79.8)
(93.4)
(79.4)
Interest and Investment Income
Net Interest Exp.
7.0
(55.5)
2.8
(62.4)
0
(67.1)
0
(79.8)
0
(93.4)
0
(79.4)
Tax Rate %
Income Tax Expense
Net Income
32.9%
276.3
564.9
32.4%
405.2
846.2
33.1%
443.9
895.4
34.4%
492.2
937.0
33.4%
509.0
1,014.2
33.5%
484.5
962.6
Currency
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
Revenue Forecast
12 months
12 months
12 months
Sept-30-2024E Sept-30-2025E Sept-30-2026E
USD
USD
USD
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
Organic Food Co. Balance Sheet
Balance Sheet as of:
Sep-30-2018
USD
Sep-30-2019
USD
Sep-30-2020
USD
Sept-30-2021
USD
Sep-30-2022
USD
Sep-30-2023
USD
456.7
456.7
283.6
283.6
319.8
24.0
343.9
229.7
229.7
256.4
256.4
153.5
18.0
171.5
Accounts Receivable
Total Receivables
266.0
266.0
238.9
238.9
344.4
344.4
347.5
347.5
313.7
313.7
309.4
309.4
Inventory
Total Current Assets
676.2
1,398.9
701.2
1,223.6
948.7
1,637.0
1,066.3
1,643.5
1,025.1
1,595.2
1,058.2
1,539.1
5,736.65
5,736.6
5,881.24
5,881.2
5,958.59
5,958.6
6,040.59
6,040.6
6,144.89
6,144.9
6,237.20
6,237.2
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
7,776.3
LIABILITIES
Accounts Payable
Curr. Port. of LT Debt
Other Current Liabilities
Total Current Liabilities
334.0
40.0
102.3
476.3
311.6
70.0
100.8
482.4
323.9
80.0
122.9
526.7
344.4
100.0
146.8
591.2
367.0
50.0
134.1
551.1
381.0
50.0
137.6
568.6
Long-Term Debt
Other Non-Current Liabilities
Total Liabilities
1,526.0
30.6
2,032.9
1,130.0
35.6
1,647.9
1,635.4
42.8
2,204.9
1,659.5
105.3
2,356.0
1,807.8
101.1
2,460.0
1,999.9
109.3
2,677.8
Common Stock
Additional Paid In Capital
Retained Earnings
Treasury Stock
Total Common Equity
130.2
4,547.9
424.5
5,102.6
135.7
4,575.1
746.1
5,456.9
127.1
4,396.6
866.9
5,390.7
105.7
4,261.2
961.2
5,328.1
79.5
4,125.1
1,075.5
5,280.1
41.7
3,965.8
1,091.0
5,098.5
Total Equity
5,102.6
5,456.9
5,390.7
5,328.1
5,280.1
5,098.5
Total Liabilities And Equity
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
7,776.3
Currency
ASSETS
Cash And Equivalents
Short Term Investments
Total Cash & ST Investments
Property, Plant & Equipment (Net)
Total Long Term Assets
Total Assets
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
FORECAST
Sep-30-2024
USD
Sep-30-2025
USD
Sep-30-2026
USD
lease watch the link below:https://youtu.be/u4ZoJKF_VuA?feature=sharedLinks to an external site. You will then need to review these five property management companies:Equity Residential, E&S Ring, Decron Properties, Greystar, Avenue 5 Write a brief reflection on watching the “Golden Circle” in the context of the five property management companies. Which one would you want to work if given a choice and “why.”
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Current Event assignmentStep 1 – Choose a current event relevant to the weekly class topicStep 2 – Present current event providing the following detail:Thoughts on impact at Administrative levelThoughts on impact at Student-athlete levelRelevance of topicTied to the discussion board topic/ class readings (articles/ ABCs book), case study (from ncaa.com/ the textbook)3-5 PowerPoint slides you should bring topic about a collage athlete or so issue that going from now or 3 weeks latest about the college administration or som student-athletes
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
The first question:
You have the following data about a business organization:
)1(Number of units sold [500,000 units] – (2) Unit selling price [5] pounds – (3) Variable
cost per unit [2.5] pounds – (4) Operating fixed costs [600,000 pounds – (5) Debt ratio |
Origins [4] – (6) modified
Interest on debts [16] – (7) Total assets [2,000,000] pounds – (8) Tax rate on commercial
and industrial profits.]%20[
Required:
a) Estimating the rate of return on equity, the rate of return on investment, and the rate of
return on assets, with a comparison between these rates.
b) Was the debt used to benefit the owners or not? And why?
c) Find the degree of operating, financing, and total leverage, and explain the significance
of each.
second question:
You have the following information about shares A and B:
– )1(The purchase price of share (A) is (120) pounds, and the expected selling prices for
it, after a year, are (132, 124, 122, 116) pounds with probabilities of (30, 50, 15, 5),
respectively, accompanied by cash distributions of (8, 5, 4, 0) pounds, respectively.
– )2(The expected return for stock (B) is (16%), while the standard deviation of its
returns is.)%10(
Required:
A – Calculate the holding period return for each price, from the expected prices of stock
A.
B – Estimate the expected return and standard deviation for stock A.
C – Determine which stock is better between the two stocks, from the perspective of
return per unit risk.
The third question:
You have the following information about shares A and B:
Arrow A
Arrow B
Yield%
Probability of Verification
Yield%
Probability of Verification
36
18
6
30%
40%
30%
24
18
12
30%
40%
30%
required:
[1] – If you know that there is a portfolio made up of these two stocks at a ratio of (40%)
for stock A, (60%) for stock B. What is the expected rate of return and standard
deviation? For this fact?
[2] – If you know that there is another bag whose expected return is (15%) and whose
standard deviation is (12%), which bag is better from your point of view?
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
•
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer-
2. Answer3. Answer-
Please label the case by the number and the name of the case. and for Problem Solving exercise please label it Problem Solving Exercise and the page number. Do the Discussion & Critical Thinking Questions For Each Case You answer can be 3-5 sentences. Problem-Solving Exercises: 3. pp 355 Case 1: Social Networking Inside a Business PP 356 Case 2: War Games: Now More Real Than Ever pp 356 Problem-Solving Exercises: 3. pp 402 Case 1:MobiKash: Bringing Financial Services to Rural Africa pp 403 Case 2: Kramp Group, A Million Spare Parts—and Counting pp 404 Problem-Solving Exercises: 1. pp 441 Case 1: From Stand-Alone to Integrated Applications PP 442 Case 2: Kerry Group Is on Your Table PP 443 Problem-Solving Exercises: 2. pp 494 Case 1: DSS Dashboards Spur Business Growth at Irish Life pp 496 Case 2: Mando: Streaming Inventory Management for Growth pp 496
Think about a topic related to International Communication you want to see discussed in the course
Find and read a journal article, pop-culture article, YouTube video or Podcast that is related to the topic you chose
Write a ~250-word summary about the article, video or podcast. Include the main ideas discussed and briefly mention why you find this topic valuable to be discussed in class.
Post your summary and the article’s bibliography in the respective discussion board.
Part 2
Write an essay, around 1500 words
Learning objectives:
Actively learn about International Communication topics and news
Provide your perspective and examples on the topics seen in the course
Choose one of the following topic, then write an essay about that. Needs to show that you already learn about powerpoint that in the file.
Week 3: Cultural identity and tradition in the globalized world
Week 4: International feminism
Week 5: Indigenous Women’s Movements in the Americas
Week 6: The digital divide and ICTs for development
Problem set: please answer these questions in short answers1-Your buddy mentioned that she is thinking about suing under the qui tam law. You are not sure what that is.a.What is aqui tam provision?b.Can employees who do not work for the government sue under this provision?c.Should the IRS offer aqui tamprovision to reward citizens who help the government recoverunpaid taxes? How many people would you “rat out” if you knew that you could collect, say, 20%of the unpaid taxes, fines, and penalties collected by the government?2-Should whistleblower laws be transformed into mandatory rules that impose punishment on any person who has knowledge of a major financial reporting violation but knowingly fails to act?3.Should the amount of the reward given to a whistle-blower depend on whether the whistleblower acted out of the purest of motives, rather than greed ora desire to impose revenge on an employer or a-coworker?4-.Should coconspirators in any criminal matter be allowed to testify in court? If a whistleblower participated in perpetrating accounting fraud, should shebe eligible to collect a whistleblower reward?10.You currently work in the SEC reporting division of a midsize, publicly traded company. The company has a Board of Directors and an Audit Committee. You have worked there for three years, and you have a cordial but professional relationship with your direct supervisor.The company has a hotline for reporting“improper accounting, fraud, embezzlement, and other misconduct.” The hotline accepts anonymous calls and is staffed by a division of a law firm that specializes in ethics and corporate compliance. The company also has a Code of Conduct that strictly prohibits retaliation against any employee who reasonably believes that mis conducts occurred. In each of the following cases, state whether the likelihood of you reporting misconduct to your direct supervisor is Low, Medium or High:a.Late at night, you saw a colleague place an expensive art object from the company’s front lobby in the trunk of his car and drive away.b.Late at night, you saw the company CEO place an expensive art object from the company’s front lobby in the trunk of his car and drive away .c.You were asked to improperly classify factory rent in General Overhead. It correctly should be capitalized as an element of Work in ProcessInventory. Your colleague told you that, by doing this, the company’s Gross Profit Margin on sales would be higher, at least in the short run. This will lead stock market analysts to upgrade the company’s stock.d.You saw a colleague deliberately book a single sale twice. This results in reported Sales being too high.e.You saw a colleague deliberately move a sale fromJanuary, Year 2, into December, Year 1, by alter-ing the shipping and invoice dates.f.Your company sustained a loss when a burglary occurred. The actual loss was $30,000, but your colleague exaggerated this loss, filing a claim with the company’s insurer to recover for a$70,000 loss.g.A client offered you a bribe during the course of an audit to “look the other way” and accelerate the recording of an installment sale to a high-risk customer entirely into the year that goods were delivered. Under GAAP concerning sales to un credit worthy customers, some of the revenue properly should have been deferred until installment payments are received in a later year.h.You suspect that a member of your internal audit team accepted a bribe because she has approved of a depreciation method for expected environmental reclamation costs that is grossly incorrect.i.A foreign government official demanded a bribe from you to facilitate your company’s shipment of goods “rapidly” through their Customs and Importation Department.j.You suspect that a partner at your CPA firm is sharing confidential information about one of your clients with an outside investor that is trading the client company’s stock.k.You witnessed a fellow employee violating the company’s policy against using the Internet during work hours.l.You witnessed a fellow employee using pirated software at work.
1. Explain the difference between incident command and unified command.2. Research the internet and find an article, video or webpage detailing an emergency incident that used a unified command.3. Post the link to the article, video or webpage.4. Was the command structure effective for this incident? If yes, describe why. If no, what could have been done better?
Uncertainty and an overwhelming number of alternatives are two key factors that make decision making difficult.Discuss how Business Analytics approaches mitigate uncertainty and help us make better-informed decisions.Please refer to the discussion forum rubric for this assignment.Initial discussion forum is due by Wednesday and responses to two of your classmates are due by Saturday.Each week to earn full points on the discussion forums, make sure to include outside sources to support your discussion.
This assignment should be completed in MS Excel There are four excel sheets attached.I have to upload the excel sheet that you will use once you accept the assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Your Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended Dec. 31 2018
2018
Sales
3,074,000
Cost of Goods Sold
2,088,000
Gross Profit
986,000
Selling and G&A Expenses
294,000
Fixed Expenses
35,000
Depreciation Expense
239,000
EBIT
418,000
Interest Expense
93,000
Earnings Before Taxes
325,000
Taxes
94,000
Net Income
231,000
Tax Rate
28.92%
Your
Balan
As of D
Your Company
Balance Sheet
As of Dec. 31 2018
Assets
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Inventories
Total Current Assets
Gross Fixed Assets
Accumulated Depreciation
Net Fixed Assets
Total Assets
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
Accounts Payable
Short-term Notes Payable
Accrued Expenses
Total Current Liabilities
Long-term Debt
Total Liabilities
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Total Shareholder’s Equity
Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
2018
Ratios
Current Ratio
Quick Ratio
Inventory Turnover Ratio
Accounts Receivable Turnover Ratio
Average Collection Period
Fixed Asset Turnover
Total Asset Turnover
Total Debt Ratio
Long-Term Debt Ratio
LTD to Total Capitalization
Debt to Equity
Long-Term Debt to Equity
Gross Profit Margin
Operating Proft Margin
Net Proft Margin
Return on Total Assets
Return on Equity
Return on Common Equity
Your company Comparable Company
Analysis
Homework for Chapter 11: Problem # 2 in the text (Chapter 11)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 11_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Black Diamond, Inc., a manufacturer of carbon and graphite products for the
aerospace and transportation industries, is considering several funding alternatives
for an investment project. To finance the project, the company can sell 1,000 15year bonds with a $1,000 face value, 7% coupon rate. The bonds require an
average discount of $50 per bond and flotation costs of $40 per bond when being
sold. The company can also sell 5,000 shares of preferred stock that will pay a $2
dividend per share at a price of $40 per share. The cost of issuing and selling
preferred stocks is expected to be $5 per share. To calculate the cost of common
stock, the company uses the dividend discount model. The firm just paid a
dividend of $3 per common share. The company expects this dividend to grow at a
constant rate of 3% per year indefinitely. The flotation costs for issuing new
common shares are 7%. The company plans to sell 10,000 shares at a price of $50
per share. The company’s tax rate is 40%.
a) Calculate the company’s after-tax cost of long-term debt.
b) Calculate the Company’s cost of preferred equity.
c) Calculate the company’s cost of common equity.
d) Calculate the company’s weighted average cost of capital.
e) What is the company’s weighted average cost of capital without flotation costs?
WACC WITH FOLTATION COSTS
Source
Debt
Preferred
Common
Totals
Price
Units
Total Market Value
Weight
After-tax Cost
(a)
(b)
(c)
WACC =
(d)
Additional Bond Data
Additional Preferred Data
Additional Common Data
Tax Rate
40% Dividend
$2.00 Dividend 0
$3.00
Coupon Rate
7% Flotation
$5 Growth Rate
3%
Face Value
$1,000
Flotation
7%
Maturity
15
Flotation
$40
WACC WITHOUT FLOTATION COSTS
(e)
Source
Debt
Preferred
Common
Price
Units
Total Market Value
Weight
After-tax Cost
Totals
WACC =
Additional Bond Data
Additional Preferred Data
Additional Common Data
Tax Rate
40% Dividend
$2.00 Dividend 0
$3.00
Coupon Rate
7% Flotation
$5 Growth Rate
3%
Face Value
$1,000
Flotation
7%
Maturity
15
Flotation
$40
Homework for Chapter 12: Problem # 2 in the text (Chapter 12)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 12_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Tough Steel, Inc. is a processor of stainless steel products. The firm is considering replacing
an old stainless steel tube-making machine for a more cost-effective machine that can meet
the firm’s quality standards.
The old machine was acquired 2 years ago at an installed cost of $500,000. It has been
depreciated under the MACRS’s 5-year recovery period, and has a remaining economic
life of 5 years. It can be sold today for $350,000 before taxes, but if the firm decides to
keep it, it can be sold for $100,000 before taxes at the end of year 5.
The first option is Machine A, which can be purchased for $600,000, but will require
$30,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 3year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine will have a salvage
value of $350,000 before taxes. This machine would require an investment in net working
capital of $100,000.
The second option is Machine B, which can be purchased for $550,000, but requires
$20,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 5year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine would have a salvage
value of $330,000 before taxes. This machine requires no investment in net working
capital.
The firm has estimated the following EBIT for all three machines:
EBIT
Year Old machine Machine A Machine B
1
$90,000
$90,000
$120,000
2
$90,000
$10,000
$20,000
3
$120,000
$150,000
$120,000
4
$150,000
$230,000
$200,000
5
$150,000
$270,000
$200,000
The firm’s WACC is 14% and its tax rate is 40%.
a) Calculate the following cash flows for the old machine, machine A, and machine B:
initial investment,
annual after-tax cash flows for each year, and
the terminal cash flow.
b) Determine which machine is more profitable for the company based on
the payback period,
discounted payback period,
net present value,
profitability index,
internal rate of return, and
modified internal rate of return.
Tough Steel, Inc.
Replacement Analysis
Old Machine Machine A
Machine B
Price
$500,000
$600,000
$550,000
Installation Costs
$0
$30,000
$20,000
Original Life
7 years
5 years
5 years
Current Life
5 years
5 years
5 years
Salvage Value @ end of economic life
$100,000
$350,000
$330,000
Current Salvage Value
$350,000
Net Working Capital Investment
$0
$100,000
$0
MACRS’s recovery period
5 years
3 years
5 years
Tax Rate
40.00%
Required Return
14.00%
EBIT:
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Old Machine
$90,000
$90,000 $120,000
Machine A
$90,000
$10,000 $150,000
Machine B
$120,000
$20,000 $120,000
MACRS Calculations
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Old Machine
Machine A
Machine B
Operating Cash Flows
(a) Calculate the Cash Flows
Old Machine
Machine A
Machine B
Incremental Cash Flows
Machine A
Machine B
Initial Outlay & Terminal Cash Flow
Machine A
Machine B
ATCF
Machine A
Machine B
Payback Period
Discounted Payback
Net Present Value (NPV)
Profitability Index (PI)
Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
MIRR
(b) Determine which machine is more profitable for th
Machine A
Machine B Best Choice?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
Machine A
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#NUM!
#NUM!
#NUM!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Year 4
Year 5
$150,000 $150,000
$230,000 $270,000
$200,000 $200,000
alculations
Year 4
(a) Calculate the Cash Flows
Year 5
rmine which machine is more profitable for the company?
Homework for Chapter 12: Problem # 2 in the text (Chapter 12)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 12_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Tough Steel, Inc. is a processor of stainless steel products. The firm is considering replacing
an old stainless steel tube-making machine for a more cost-effective machine that can meet
the firm’s quality standards.
The old machine was acquired 2 years ago at an installed cost of $500,000. It has been
depreciated under the MACRS’s 5-year recovery period, and has a remaining economic
life of 5 years. It can be sold today for $350,000 before taxes, but if the firm decides to
keep it, it can be sold for $100,000 before taxes at the end of year 5.
The first option is Machine A, which can be purchased for $600,000, but will require
$30,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 3year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine will have a salvage
value of $350,000 before taxes. This machine would require an investment in net working
capital of $100,000.
The second option is Machine B, which can be purchased for $550,000, but requires
$20,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 5year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine would have a salvage
value of $330,000 before taxes. This machine requires no investment in net working
capital.
The firm has estimated the following EBIT for all three machines:
EBIT
Year Old machine Machine A Machine B
1
$90,000
$90,000
$120,000
2
$90,000
$10,000
$20,000
3
$120,000
$150,000
$120,000
4
$150,000
$230,000
$200,000
5
$150,000
$270,000
$200,000
The firm’s WACC is 14% and its tax rate is 40%.
a) Calculate the following cash flows for the old machine, machine A, and machine B:
initial investment,
annual after-tax cash flows for each year, and
the terminal cash flow.
b) Determine which machine is more profitable for the company based on
the payback period,
discounted payback period,
net present value,
profitability index,
internal rate of return, and
modified internal rate of return.
Tough Steel, Inc.
Replacement Analysis
Old Machine Machine A
Machine B
Price
$500,000
$600,000
$550,000
Installation Costs
$0
$30,000
$20,000
Original Life
7 years
5 years
5 years
Current Life
5 years
5 years
5 years
Salvage Value @ end of economic life
$100,000
$350,000
$330,000
Current Salvage Value
$350,000
Net Working Capital Investment
$0
$100,000
$0
MACRS’s recovery period
5 years
3 years
5 years
Tax Rate
40.00%
Required Return
14.00%
EBIT:
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Old Machine
$90,000
$90,000 $120,000
Machine A
$90,000
$10,000 $150,000
Machine B
$120,000
$20,000 $120,000
MACRS Calculations
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Old Machine
Machine A
Machine B
Operating Cash Flows
(a) Calculate the Cash Flows
Old Machine
Machine A
Machine B
Incremental Cash Flows
Machine A
Machine B
Initial Outlay & Terminal Cash Flow
Machine A
Machine B
ATCF
Machine A
Machine B
Payback Period
Discounted Payback
Net Present Value (NPV)
Profitability Index (PI)
Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
MIRR
(b) Determine which machine is more profitable for th
Machine A
Machine B Best Choice?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
#NAME?
Machine A
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#NUM!
#NUM!
#NUM!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Year 4
Year 5
$150,000 $150,000
$230,000 $270,000
$200,000 $200,000
alculations
Year 4
(a) Calculate the Cash Flows
Year 5
rmine which machine is more profitable for the company?
Homework for Chapter 13: Problem # 1 in the text (Chapter 13)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 13_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Tebow Endeavors Inc. is evaluating two mutually exclusive investment
projects. The firm has estimated the following NPVs, IRRs, and PIs after
performing scenario analysis using the following probabilities for each
scenario:
Scenario Probability
NPVI
PII
IRRI
NPVII
PIII
1
5%
$1,259,058.48 1.68 36.30% $1,009,622.33 1.34
2
10%
$959,508.26 1.52 31.55%
$783,351.86 1.26
3
15%
$659,958.04 1.36 26.64%
$557,081.39 1.19
4
40%
$360,407.82 1.19 21.52%
$330,810.92 1.11
5
15%
$60,857.60 1.03 16.14%
$104,540.45 1.03
6
10%
($238,692.62) 0.87 10.38% ($121,730.02) 0.96
7
5%
($538,242.84) 0.71 4.10% ($348,000.49) 0.88
IRRII
27.19%
24.51%
21.81%
19.07%
16.29%
13.48%
10.62%
The financial staff is divided about which project is more convenient to
accept: I or II.
a) Determine the expected NPV, PI, and IRR for both projects. Which project
should be accepted based only on these results?
b) Determine the variance and standard deviation of the NPVs, PI, and IRR for
both projects. Which project appears to be riskier?
c) Determine the coefficient of variation of the NPV, PI, and IRR for both
projects. Which project appears to be riskier based on these results only?
d) Calculate the probability of a negative NPV, a PI less than one, and an IRR less
than the firm’s WACC of 15% for both projects.
e) Based on your results on parts (a), (b), (c), and (d), which project should be
accepted?
Homework for Chapter 11: Problem # 2 in the text (Chapter 11)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 11_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Black Diamond, Inc., a manufacturer of carbon and graphite products for the
aerospace and transportation industries, is considering several funding alternatives
for an investment project. To finance the project, the company can sell 1,000 15year bonds with a $1,000 face value, 7% coupon rate. The bonds require an
average discount of $50 per bond and flotation costs of $40 per bond when being
sold. The company can also sell 5,000 shares of preferred stock that will pay a $2
dividend per share at a price of $40 per share. The cost of issuing and selling
preferred stocks is expected to be $5 per share. To calculate the cost of common
stock, the company uses the dividend discount model. The firm just paid a
dividend of $3 per common share. The company expects this dividend to grow at a
constant rate of 3% per year indefinitely. The flotation costs for issuing new
common shares are 7%. The company plans to sell 10,000 shares at a price of $50
per share. The company’s tax rate is 40%.
a) Calculate the company’s after-tax cost of long-term debt.
b) Calculate the Company’s cost of preferred equity.
c) Calculate the company’s cost of common equity.
d) Calculate the company’s weighted average cost of capital.
e) What is the company’s weighted average cost of capital without flotation costs?
Homework for Chapter 12: Problem # 2 in the text (Chapter 12)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 12_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Tough Steel, Inc. is a processor of stainless steel products. The firm is considering replacing
an old stainless steel tube-making machine for a more cost-effective machine that can meet
the firm’s quality standards.
The old machine was acquired 2 years ago at an installed cost of $500,000. It has been
depreciated under the MACRS’s 5-year recovery period, and has a remaining economic
life of 5 years. It can be sold today for $350,000 before taxes, but if the firm decides to
keep it, it can be sold for $100,000 before taxes at the end of year 5.
The first option is Machine A, which can be purchased for $600,000, but will require
$30,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 3year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine will have a salvage
value of $350,000 before taxes. This machine would require an investment in net working
capital of $100,000.
The second option is Machine B, which can be purchased for $550,000, but requires
$20,000 in installation costs. This machine would be depreciated under the MACRS’s 5year recovery period. At the end of its economic life, the machine would have a salvage
value of $330,000 before taxes. This machine requires no investment in net working
capital.
The firm has estimated the following EBIT for all three machines:
EBIT
Year Old machine Machine A Machine B
1
$90,000
$90,000
$120,000
2
$90,000
$10,000
$20,000
3
$120,000
$150,000
$120,000
4
$150,000
$230,000
$200,000
5
$150,000
$270,000
$200,000
The firm’s WACC is 14% and its tax rate is 40%.
a) Calculate the following cash flows for the old machine, machine A, and machine B:
initial investment,
annual after-tax cash flows for each year, and
the terminal cash flow.
b) Determine which machine is more profitable for the company based on
the payback period,
discounted payback period,
net present value,
profitability index,
internal rate of return, and
modified internal rate of return.
Homework for Chapter 13: Problem # 1 in the text (Chapter 13)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 13_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
Tebow Endeavors Inc. is evaluating two mutually exclusive investment
projects. The firm has estimated the following NPVs, IRRs, and PIs after
performing scenario analysis using the following probabilities for each
scenario:
Scenario Probability
NPVI
PII
IRRI
NPVII
PIII
1
5%
$1,259,058.48 1.68 36.30% $1,009,622.33 1.34
2
10%
$959,508.26 1.52 31.55%
$783,351.86 1.26
3
15%
$659,958.04 1.36 26.64%
$557,081.39 1.19
4
40%
$360,407.82 1.19 21.52%
$330,810.92 1.11
5
15%
$60,857.60 1.03 16.14%
$104,540.45 1.03
6
10%
($238,692.62) 0.87 10.38% ($121,730.02) 0.96
7
5%
($538,242.84) 0.71 4.10% ($348,000.49) 0.88
IRRII
27.19%
24.51%
21.81%
19.07%
16.29%
13.48%
10.62%
The financial staff is divided about which project is more convenient to
accept: I or II.
a) Determine the expected NPV, PI, and IRR for both projects. Which project
should be accepted based only on these results?
b) Determine the variance and standard deviation of the NPVs, PI, and IRR for
both projects. Which project appears to be riskier?
c) Determine the coefficient of variation of the NPV, PI, and IRR for both
projects. Which project appears to be riskier based on these results only?
d) Calculate the probability of a negative NPV, a PI less than one, and an IRR less
than the firm’s WACC of 15% for both projects.
e) Based on your results on parts (a), (b), (c), and (d), which project should be
accepted?
Homework for Chapter 14: Problem # 1 in the text (Chapter 14)
NOTE: PLEASE USE THE ATTACHED EXCEL FILE TITLED
“Homework for Chapter 14_Excel” TO SOLVE THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM.
The annual returns of three stocks for the past seven years are given in the
following table:
Year
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
Stock
X
3.00%
9.00%
12.00%
19.00%
23.00%
5.00%
10.00%
Stock
Y
14.00%
7.00%
19.00%
13.00%
-7.00%
-3.00%
9.00%
Stock Z
19.00%
11.00%
5.00%
12.00%
11.00%
7.00%
14.00%
a) Determine the average return and the standard deviation of returns for each
stock. Which stock has the highest expected return and which one has the
highest risk?
b) Determine the correlation coefficient and the covariance between each pair of
stocks.
c) Determine the average return and the standard deviation of returns of equally
weighted portfolios consisting of two stocks (XY, YZ, and XZ) and three
(XYZ) stocks. How do the returns and standard deviations of the portfolios
compare to those of the individual stocks?
d) Create a chart that shows how the standard deviation of the two-stock portfolios
changes as the weight of one of the stocks changes.
e) Use the Solver to determine the minimum standard deviation that could be
obtained by combining each pair of two stocks, and also all three stocks into a
single portfolio.
Does the end justify the means? Assuming the responsibility of leadership, a leader also assumes the ethical boundaries that accompany it. Many leaders have relied on illegal or unethical tactics to achieve their goals. For this assignment, use the Internet to find 2 articles that discuss the decision of the same leader of an organization that was considered illegal or unethical by the authors. Your articles should be found online in the popular press or in a professional journal. Be sure to apply the material from your text to your discussion.
How to Research this topic Tip: Research corporate unethical scandals.
Review different cases, and select 1 organization for your post. Discuss the unethical/illegal issues that leaders at this organization encountered, and then obtain two different authors that addressed the unethical/illegal practices at the organization you selected
Directions
For your first post, describe the key points of each article and detail why the author of the article found it illegal or unethical. Evaluate the leader’s ethical awareness or standards, (apply the course material). This discussion will be at least 300 words. (Be sure to reference your articles in APA format).
Post comments and feedback to 2 classmates.
For your second post, review another student’s post and comment on why you think the leader/s thought they could ‘get away with, or not be punished for, what they did.
Analyze health communication through the lens of a personal health experience. single-spaced no more than 5 pages
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Use course materials to analyze health communication through the lens of a personal health
experience.
Health Narrative
Provides a clear narrative of 2-3 health or health communication interactions and how those
interactions unfolded. Explains how communication was helpful, hurtful, beneficial, etc. Explores
feelings during and after those interactions, and how those interactions impacted health
outcomes.
Analysis
Identifies and explains at least 2-3 concepts from class readings/class topics that relate to and
expound upon ideas explored in the health narrative.
Lessons Learned
Reflects on lessons learned through the analysis of the health narrative. Explains how
communication might be improved in the future; offers best practices for how to manage a
particular health communication interaction given what was learned through the analysis.
References
Uses at least 4 scholarly references, which are cited correctly in APA format both in text and in
a separate references page.
Writing
Writing is free of errors (e.g., grammar errors, spelling errors, punctuation errors, mechanical
errors, etc.); meets page requirements (not over or under requirement); includes all required
sections; running head includes students’ name.
Course topic
Module 1: Introduction to Health Communication
Module 2: Models, Theories, and Frameworks
Module 3: Communication and Health Outcomes
Module 4: Health Information-Seeking
Module 5: Culture, Health, and Health Literacy
Module 6: Communication and Health Disparities
Module 7: Health Communication in Interpersonal and Group Contexts
please see the attched pdf for the following instructions………………..
Unformatted Attachment Preview
CIS415 – Information Resource
Management
Unit 1 Assignment: BMW Case Study
Due Date: Sunday 11:59 pm EST of Unit 1
Points:100
Overview:
In this assignment you will read a case study from your text and respond to the
questions after.
Instructions:
•
•
•
Read: “BMW: Automaker Competes on the Digital Front” (Text, Chapter 1).
In your own words, give a brief synopsis of the case.
Answer all three questions after the case study clearly, concisely and completely.
o Each question answer should be at least 3 paragraphs.
o Each question answer should have at least 1 reference from a reliable
source.
Requirements:
•
Your paper will be at least 3 double-spaced, APA formatted pages not including
title and reference pages.
Be sure to read the criteria by which your work will be evaluated before you write
and again after you write.
Copyright 2022 Post University, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Evaluation Rubric for Unit 1 Assignment
Deficient
Needs
Improvement
(0-2 Points)
The brief
synopsis is
missing or poorly
presented.
(3 Points)
The brief synopsis
is present, but is
missing key
details.
(0-11 Points)
The answer to
the question is
missing or poorly
presented.
(12-15 Points)
The answer to the
question is
present, but is
missing key
details.
Question 2
The answer to
the question is
missing or poorly
presented.
The answer to the
question is
present, but is
missing key
details.
Question 3
The answer to
the question is
missing or poorly
presented.
The answer to the
question is
present, but is
missing key
details.
(0-5 points)
0-2 resources.
(6-7 points)
2 resources.
0-2 pages.
2 pages.
(0-9 points)
Errors impede
professional
presentation;
guidelines not
followed.
(10-11 points)
Significant errors
that do not impede
professional
presentation.
CRITERIA
Brief Synopsis of
the Case Study
Question 1
Total Number of
Resources
Paper Length
Clear and
Professional
Writing and APA
Format
Proficient
Exemplary
(4 Points)
The brief
synopsis is
present, but is
missing minor
details.
(5 Points)
The brief synopsis
is fully and clearly
defined and
presented,
including all
details.
(16-19 Points)
(20 Points)
The answer to the The answer to the
question is
question is fully
present, but is
and clearly defined
missing minor
and presented,
details.
including all
details.
The answer to the The answer to the
question is
question is fully
present, but is
and clearly defined
missing minor
and presented,
details.
including all
details.
The answer to the The answer to the
question is
question is fully
present, but is
and clearly defined
missing minor
and presented,
details.
including all
details.
(8-9 points)
(10 points)
3 resources.
More than 3
resources.
3 pages.
More than 3
pages.
(12-14 points)
(15 points)
Few errors that
Writing and format
do not impede
are clear,
professional
professional, APA
presentation.
compliant, and
error free.
Copyright 2022 Post University, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Open e06c1AutoSales and save it as e06c1AutoSales_LastFirst.
Create appropriate range names for Purchase Price (cell C5), Sales Tax (cell C6), Down Payment (cell C7), Months Financed (C8), APR (cell C9), Down Payment Amount (cell C12), Amount Financed (cell C13), and Sales Tax (cell C14).
Edit the existing name range Tax_Owed to display as Tax.
Apply the range names to the existing formulas and functions in the worksheet.
Create a new worksheet labeled Range Names, paste the newly created range name information in cell A1, and then resize the columns as needed for proper display.
Goal Seek
The customer has budgeted a maximum of $500 per month for the car payment. Currently based on a purchase price of $50,000, a 10% down payment, and 7% sales tax you estimate monthly payments as $688.76. You will use Goal Seek to calculate the optimal purchase price to meet the customer’s budget.
Use Goal Seek to determine the optimal purchase price to reach a $500 monthly payment with all other variables remaining unchanged.
One-Variable Data Table
Your initial calculations were based on a $50,000 purchase price. You want to evaluate the change in down payment, taxes, and monthly payment at various purchase prices. You will create a one-variable data table using substitution values from $20,000 to $75,000 to complete the task.
Start in cell E5. Complete the series of substitution values ranging from $20,000 to $75,000% at increments of $5,000 vertically down column E. Apply Comma Style format to the range E5:E16 with no decimal points and preserve the thick bottom border on row 16.
Enter references to the Down Payment Amount, Tax Owed, and Monthly Payment in the correct location for a one-variable data table.
Complete the one-variable data table and format the results with Comma Style with no decimal places.
Apply Custom number formats to make the formula references display as descriptive column headings. Bold and center the headings and substitution values.
Two-Variable Data Table
Your customer wants to consider the impact of various down payments and purchase prices on the monthly payment. You will create a two-variable data table to complete the task.
Copy the purchase price substitution values from the one-variable data table and paste the values starting in cell J5. Adjust the width of column J as needed.
Type 10000 in cell K4. Complete the series of substitution values from $5,000 to $15,000 at $5,000 increments.
Enter the reference to the Monthly Payment function in the correct location for a two-variable data table.
Complete the two-variable data table and apply Comma Style to the range K4:M15 with no decimal places.
Apply a custom number format to make the formula reference display as a descriptive column heading. Bold and center the heading and substitution values.
Scenario Manager
Up to this point, you have created forecasts based on static amounts; however, it is important to plan for several possible finance options. To help you analyze best, worst, and most likely outcomes, you will use Scenario Manager.
Create a scenario named Best Case, using Purchase Price and Months Financed. Enter these values for the scenario: 40000, and 36.
Create a second scenario named Worst Case, using the same changing cells. Enter these values for the scenario: 50000, and 72.
Create a third scenario named Most Likely, using the same changing cells. Enter these values for the scenario: 45000, and 60.
Generate a Scenario Summary report based on Monthly Payment.
Format the summary as discussed in the chapter.
Use Solver
You realize that while the best-case scenario provides the best price, it may not be economically feasible for the customer. You have decided to continue your analysis by using Solver to determine the perfect combination of Purchase Price, Down Payment, and Months Financed to reach an agreement with the customer.
Load the Solver add-in if it is not already loaded.
Set the objective to calculate a Monthly Payment of $500.
Use Purchase Price and Months Financed as changing variable cells.
Set constraints to ensure the Purchase Price is less than or equal to $50,000, greater than or equal to $30,000, and a whole number.
Set constraints to ensure months financed are less than or equal to 72, greater than or equal to 24, and a whole number.
Solve the problem. Generate the Answer Report. If you get an internal memory error message, remove Solver as an add-in, close the workbook, open the workbook, add Solver in again, and finish using Solver.
Save and close the file. Exit Excel. Based on your instructor’s directions, submit: e06c1AutoSales_LastFirst
Accounting assignment that contains 4 questions I uplthe subject book and the assignment fileAll answers should be clear and well presented with clear examples Please post your answers in the same file Avoid plagiarism so I don’t lose marks There must be at least two references All answers must be typed using Time new roman( size12, double-spaced)
Part 1 (2 short essay)Pose a question, share a quote from the reading, or make a comment about the reading assigned for this week. Draw connections between an idea or example from the reading and something from your own experiences of, and practices vis-a-vis, intellectual property laws and controls today, either to confirm or challenge what the author(s) have argued, or to express confusion or disagreement with the substance, form, or even style of the readings.Reading1:http://www.ip-watch.org/2012/02/27/%E2%80%98balanc…Reading 2: in the fileQuestions and comments will be mostly graded for completion, but only if they pertain to the assigned readings and exhibit some engagement with their letter and spirit. You must reference something specific from the reading and include citations and a works cited page.Do not just summarize the reading. Rote, straightforward summaries of the reading that do not point back to your own experience will not earn any marks.Length requirements: approx. 250 wordsFormatting requirements: Double-spaced, 12-point font, Times New Roman/Arial/Cambria. Citations should be formatted in APA citation style (either 6th or 7th edition), with a bibliography or works cited section at the end of their submission. Part 2 (one essay, 1200 words)Formatting requirements: Double-spaced, 12-point font, Times New Roman/Arial/Cambria.
Citations should be formatted in APA citation style (either 6th or 7th edition). Students
unfamiliar with APA citations are encouraged to review the Purdue Online Writing Lab’s manual
or avail themselves of an online citation generating service.
Submissions should include their student name, number, and course information on the
first page of their submission (e.g., in the header).
Students may use first-person pronouns (e.g., “I,” “my,” etc.) in the course of their work.
Instructions: Choose one of the following topics or themes on which to write your essay.
a. Is the intellectual property system fair to users? Why or why not? What law or policy
reforms might make the system fairer? (Provide one or more examples or focus on one
or more forms of intellectual property to support your argument.)
Is the intellectual property system fair to creators? Why or why not? What law or policy
reforms might make the system fairer? (Provide one or more examples or focus on one
or more forms of intellectual property to support your argument.)
Is the intellectual property system fair to users and/or creators from marginalized
communities? Why or why not? What law or policy reforms might make the system
fairer? (Provide one or more examples or focus on one or more forms of intellectual
property to support your argument.)
Is the intellectual property system fair to developing nations? Why or why not? What
law or policy reforms might make the system fairer? (Provide one or more examples or
focus on one or more forms of intellectual property to support your argument.)
Has the impact of the internet, social media, and/or digital technologies on the
intellectual property system been positive or negative for users? What law or policy
reforms are necessary for the system to deal with digital media and culture? (Provide
one or more examples or focus on one or more forms of intellectual property to support
your argument.)
Has the impact of the internet, social media, and/or digital technologies on the
intellectual property system been positive or negative for creators? What law or policy
reforms are necessary for the system to deal with digital media and culture? (Provide
one or more examples or focus on one or more forms of intellectual property to support
your argument.)
Can the intellectual property system be used in order to address important
socioeconomic, cultural, or environmental concerns? Or is intellectual property actually
contributing to those concerns, or else making it harder to address them? How so?
(Provide one or more examples or focus on one or more forms of intellectual property to
support your argument.)
Students may pursue their own research agenda and pose their own questions (or
modify an existing one), with the prior approval of the instructor.
Do not include the text of prompt or question in your submission, as this will inflate your
Turnitin similarity index score; only include your specific thesis or question (see below).
Draft a one- or two-sentence thesis or question that you want to explore in the paper,
e.g., “In this essay, I will argue that intellectual property and copyright law needs to be
strengthened in order to address the challenge of AI-generated music that reproduces the
sound and style of musical performers.”
Identify and list four (4) academic sources, along with their bibliographical information,
using APA citation style (see above). (Course assigned readings cannot be used; all four
academic sources have to be from outside of the course.) An academic source can
include an article from a peer-reviewed journal, a chapter from a text published by a
university or scholarly press, a paper delivered at a scholarly conference, etc. If you
are unsure as to whether a source can be considered sufficiently academic, you should ask
the instructor to confirm its acceptability.
Provide annotations for each of your sources by explaining how you identified or tracked
down your source. Then summarize the key ideas or arguments of each text, and explain
the relevance and usefulness – as well as strength and weaknesses – of your source for the
completion of the paper, providing reasons as to why it was chosen and how it will help
you to either make the argument or undertake the analysis you want to make or
undertake, or how it will assist you in developing or narrowing down a topic.
An example of an annotation (for a paper for another course) is as follows:
1. Johnston, Josée and Judith Taylor. 2008. Feminist Consumerism and Fat Activists: A
Comparative Study of Grassroots Activism and the Dove Real Beauty Campaign. Signs:
Journal of Women in Culture and Society 33 (4): 941-966.
I found this article on October 2, 2023, by doing a search in the library catalogue using
the keywords “ethical consumerism.” It was among the top five results; I chose it over
the others because it was explicitly addressed to the relationship between
consumerism and activism, and also was article-length, whereas the others were book-
length and focused on other, somewhat unrelated topics, like product placement.
Johnston and Taylor undertake a comparative analysis of the Dove Real Beauty
campaign and the fat-activist performance group, Pretty, Porky, and Pissed Off (PPPO).
The authors argue that both Dove and PPPO seek to challenge the beauty industry, but
that the two campaigns proceed from very different assumptions about how to question
conventional ideals of femininity.
This article will be useful for my essay, which will be on the ethics and politics of
Starbucks’ campaigns for corporate social responsibility. Besides providing useful
background information on how companies today are trying to build their brands’
ethical profiles, the article identifies some of the problems with corporate social
activism. While I will be looking at Starbucks and its promotion of “fair trade” coffee,
many of the broader criticisms that Johnston and Taylor direct against Dove can be
extended to Starbucks. The article makes a strong case for questioning the motives
behind the Real Beauty campaign, but the authors do not really come to any clear
conclusion about whether corporate activism does more harm than good.
Annotated bibliographies will be evaluated according to the following criteria (in order of
importance):
rigour and depth of annotations, that is, how well they summarize the key arguments
or ideas from each source, relate them to the question or topic for the paper they have
chosen, and identify their relative strengths or limitations;
choice of academic sources that are relevant and useful for the chosen topic for the
paper, have been drawn from reputable and reliable scholarly publications or presses,
and could reasonably contribute to their paper;
quality of writing, as reflected both in the attention to proofreading, editing, citations,etc., to limit typographical, grammatical, and other errors, and in the observance of theassignment’s formal and technical requirements, e.g., citation style, spacing andmargins, etc.
Assignment – CEO Report – Global Business Analysis
Several companies are very successful at conducting business in various countries and regions of the world. Your CEO has asked you to select one of the global companies from the list below and provide a report on what general knowledge and “lessons learned” can be gained from the other company relative to how they conduct global business.
Select one of the companies below and provide some background information on them focused on their global presence. Additionally, analyze (both good and not so good) aspects of their global business such as their overall business strategy, how they market, their supply chain, key partnerships, and other relevant aspects that make them successful in the global market. Key findings and recommendations for your CEO are also to be included based on your analysis.
Global Companies: (select one)
Apple – U.S. – technology
Tesla – U.S. – automotive/technology
Coca-Cola – U.S. – consumer goods
Honda – Japanese – industrial
Tata – India – conglomerate
Unilever – U.K. – consumer goods
Saudi Aramco – Saudi Arabia – energy
Tencent – China – technology
Suggested Outline of the report (you are not required to use this outline, but all the topics below must be addressed)
Executive Summary (2-3 sentences only) – what is report about and what were your findings
Part 1 – Description/Background
Part 2 – Analysis of global business operations
Part 3 – CEO Recommendations
Format
Minimum two thousand words/maximum two thousand two hundred words (excludes references); graphs, figures, tables acceptable and are encouraged
PDF document, 12-point Times New Roman font, double-spaced
Minimum of 7 credible references (in paper citations, and full citations at end of paper in APA 7th edition format; encyclopedia, blogs, or textbook are not to be used)
No first person to be used
Grading Rubric
15% – paper length, number & quality of references, organization and flow, presentation format, and grammar
20% – completeness & quality of content for background content – Have you thoroughly informed the CEO of the key aspects of your selected company? Did you use historical data?
50% – completeness & quality of content for analysis – Did you look at various global business aspects? Did you identify both good and not so good strategies/decisions made by the company relative to global business? Did you identify challenges the businesses are facing? Did you apply critical thinking/analysis and not just state the obvious?
15% – completeness & quality of content for recommendations/findings – Are your recommendations succinct and specific? Did you provide a range of recommendations? Are your recommendations supported by facts?
Tips for Success
Writing should be succinct and to the point – do not include superfluous or meaningless information
Use more than 7 references – it will help you understand the material and provide you a broader view of the subject matter
Include a few graphics (tables, charts, etc.) – this is helpful to the reader
Concentrate on the analysis part of this project – exercise critical thinking
Provide actionable recommendations – be as specific as possible
Write a 5 page research paper using APA style and citations. Choose an industry to research and a specific company within that industry to research. The company you choose must utilize digital commerce. In your paper that summarizes what you learned from your research, cover the following components:Describe the macroeconomic environment of the industry that the company is operating in.Describe the microeconomic environment of the industry that the company is operating in. Describe the results of a PESTLE analysis of the company.Describe the results of a SWOT analysis of the company.The impact digital commerce has on each of the above four elements.Describe your opinion of the future profitability of the company. Note: There are no extra points for submitting a longer paper. Strive to be succinct and clear ( no plagiarism )
Group AssignmentsResearch the organization you selected as a team. prepare and present a presentation that highlights the below points:The organization and the industry it operates in (e.g. Blockbuster used to operate in the entertainment business…)The issue selected and whyThe issue tree and how its branches are MECEThis presentation should not exceed 5 minutes in length. Add selected organization presentation which made on module 1. The selected organization is “FORD”And I add the example of our MECE Tree Slide together.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
US Car Manufacturing: Ford
Industry Overview: U.S. Car Manufacturer
• The U.S. is the world’s second-largest market for vehicles sales and
production
• Highly concentrated market
(Mordor Intelligence Research & Advisory, 2023)
(Mordor Intelligence Research & Advisory, 2023)
Company Selection: Why Ford?
• History of disruption:
➢ Founded in 1903, Ford pioneered assembly line manufacturing.
➢Model T was introduced in 1908.
➢ Revolutionized accessibility of automobiles, reshaping the industry.
• Disruptors push the bounds of Ford’s core competencies:
➢ Many electrical vehicle companies (TESLA, BYD, and ETC).
• Incumbent venturing into a new era:
➢ Ford is dedicating more than $50 billion from 2022 through 2026 to develop, and
manufacture electric vehicles, and batteries.
➢ Revolutionized accessibility of automobiles, reshaping the industry.
➢ Invested in electric and autonomous vehicle technology
➢ Partnerships with tech giants like Google and Rivian.
➢ Launch of Mustang Mach-E showcases commitment to innovation.
➢ Maintains a delicate equilibrium between heritage and progress.
➢ Offers valuable insights for established players in navigating disruption.
Current Trends and Disruptive Forces
• New vehicle sales favor EV’s
• Negative margins on EV’s
• Government incentives
• Autonomous vehicles
• Supply chain challenges
• Environmental Regulations
(Routley, 2020)
References
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calhoun, G., & Calhoun, G. (2020). The Ford Dollar: The Mysterious Multiple. Price and Value: A Guide to Equity Market Valuation
Metrics, 1-17. https://link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007/978-1-4842-5552-0_1
Colias, M. (2023). U.S. EV Sales Jolted Higher in 2022 as Newcomers Target Tesla. The Wall Street Journal. Retrieved Sep 8,
2023, from https://www.wsj.com/articles/u-s-ev-sales-jolted-higher-in-2022-as-newcomers-target-tesla-11672981834
Domonoske, C. (2023). Ford is losing a lot of money in electric cars — but CEO Jim Farley is charging ahead. NPR. Retrieved Sep
9, 2023, from https://www.npr.org/2023/08/11/1193083777/ford-electric-vehicles-f150-lightning-jim-farley
History.com. (2018). Automobile History. History. Retrieved Sep 8,
2023, from https://www.history.com/topics/inventions/automobiles
Mordor Intelligence Research & Advisory. (2023, July). North America Automotive Market Size & Share Analysis – Growth Trends
& Forecasts (2023 – 2028). Mordor Intelligence. Retrieved September 7, 2023, from https://www.mordorintelligence.com/industryreports/north-america-automotive-market
Rajan, R., & Dhir, S. (2023). Determinants of alliance productivity and performance: Evidence from the automobile
industry. International Journal of Productivity and Performance Management, 72(2), 281305. https://www.emerald.com/insight/content/doi/10.1108/IJPPM-02-2020Routley, N. (2020). Tesla’s Valuation Surpasses Ford and GM Combined. Visual Capitalist. Retrieved Sep 8, 2023, from
https://www.visualcapitalist.com/teslas-valuation-surpasses-ford-and-gm-combined/
The Economist. (2022). Automotive Outlook 2023. The Economist. Retrieved Sep 8, 2023,
from https://www.eiu.com/n/campaigns/automotive-in-2023-registration-confirmation
Unknown. (n.d.). Top 15 automakers in the world: Car sales rank worldwide. F&I Tools https://www.factorywarrantylist.com/carsales-by-manufacturer.html
Reduced Sales for Blockbuster
Overview: Why Blockbuster’s Video Rentals
dropping?
Competition
• Streaming Service Offerings
➢ Diverse content libraries and exclusive productions.
➢ Personalized recommendations and user interfaces.
• Competitive Pricing
➢ Subscription plans and pricing strategies of streaming services
(Chopra & Veeraiyan, 2019).
➢ Promotions, discounts, and bundles.
Market Trends
• Digitalization of Content
➢ Increasing popularity of streaming services (Netflix, Disney Plus, Max, etc.).
➢ Proliferation of online content platform (Davis & Higgins, 2020).
• Decline in Physical Media
➢ Decreasing demand for DVDs, and Blu-rays.
➢ Rise of digital downloads, and streaming.
Customer Preferences
• Convenience
➢ On-demand availability of content on streaming platforms.
➢ No need for physical trips to rental stores.
• Cost
➢ Monthly subscription models vs. Per-rental charges (Sun, 2022).
➢ Value proposition of streaming services.
Technology and Access
• Device Accessibility
➢ Availability on various devices (smartphones, tablets, smart TVs, gaming consoles).
➢ User-friendly interfaces and apps
• Internet Speed and Quality
➢ High-speed internet requirements for streaming (Sun, 2022).
➢Accessibility issues in certain regions.
References
•
Chopra, S., & Veeraiyan, M. (2019). Movie rental business: blockbuster, netflix, and redbox. Kellogg School
of Management Cases, 1-21.
https://www.emerald.com/insight/content/doi/10.1108/case.kellogg.2016.000220/full/html
•
Davis, T., & Higgins, J. (2020). A blockbuster failure: how an outdated business model destroyed a
giant. https://ir.law.utk.edu/utk_studlawbankruptcy/11/
•
Olito, F., & Bitter, A. (2023). Blockbuster: The rise and fall of the movie rental store, and what happened to the
brand. Business Insider. Retrieved Oct 17, 2023, from https://www.businessinsider.com/rise-and-fall-of-blockbuster
•
Sun, X. (2022). Two Decades and More: Evolution of Netflix’s Business Models and Outlook of Future. In SHS Web
of Conferences (Vol. 148, p. 03032). EDP Sciences. https://doi.org/10.1051/shsconf/202214803032
All information is attached and the rubics in the attachment that I have put on this.Requirements:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MAN6720CBE Section 01CBE Applied Strategic Planning (11 Weeks) – CBE Online Course 2023 Fall Quarter
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Assignment Content
1.
Competency
Evaluate the inclusion of an organization’s infrastructure in strategic planning.
Student Success Criteria
View the grading rubric for this deliverable by selecting the “This item is graded with a
rubric” link, which is located in the Details & Information pane.
Scenario
As part of your responsibilities on the board of a regional strategic committee for your
local Chamber of Commerce, you have been asked to prepare a memo that can be used
for prospective businesses that are new to your local Chamber.
Instructions
The memo should contain information on how organizations can use their
organizational capabilities for strategic planning purposes.
Your memo should include the following:
o An overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic
planning.
o A discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found
in an organizational strategic plan.
o An explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
o Attribution for credible sources for the memo.
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Rubric Details
• Grade for Deliverable 3
100% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
4
B – 3 – Proficiency
3
C – 2 – Competence
2
F – 1 – No Pass
1
I – 0 – Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 1
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 2
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in
an organizational strategic plan.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in an
organizational strategic plan.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in an
organizational strategic plan.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in an
organizational strategic plan.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 3
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 4
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Used credible sources in a well-crafted memo.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Used mostly credible sources in a well-crafted memo.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Used some credible sources in the memo.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Did not use credible sources in the memo.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
Read the attached case study about burnout. Answer the following questions in a Word file and submit.What are the symptoms and reasons for Mark’s burnout?Describe situations where they have had to deal with burnout managers, co-workers or subordinatesIf you were to design a personal plan for Mark, what five strategies would you suggest to him to work on in order to overcome his burnout?Should Mark approach his management team and discuss his burnout situation?How can his organization better help Mark with his burnout challenges?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
case study
Burnout in the Hospitality Industry: The case of a
Restaurant Manager1
By Joseph Lederer, Mathilda Van Niekerk and Fevzi Okumus
Introduction
Burnout has been labeled as the largest occupational hazard of
the twenty-first century (Karatepa et al., 2012). The burnout rate of
people working in the hospitality industry is among the highest of all
industries; it is estimated that every one in seven hotel and restaurant
workers experience employee burnout (Hurley, 2015). This high rate of
burnout may be due to the fact that hospitality front-line employees
are constantly exposed to demanding customers and difficult situations, chronic stress in the workplace and long hours where they need
industry completely. Mark has also worked on improving his qualifications and has been recently awarded a Master’s Degree in Hospitality
Management from a leading university in the USA. Although Mark is
passionate about his work and the hospitality industry, he no longer
feels appreciated by his organization. He also does not see any professional advancement opportunities in the foreseeable future. This case
study will discuss the following questions:
•
What are the symptoms of and reasons for Mark’s burnout?
•
If you were to design a personal plan for Mark, what five strategies would you suggest to him to work on in order to overcome
to provide quality service for 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (Bitner
et. al., 1994; Ledgerwood et al, 1998; Liang, 2012). Burnout has been
formally defined as prolonged stress and frustration at work (Maslach
et al., 2001; Shen and Huang, 2012). It leads to undesirable outcomes
such as lower organizational commitment, job dissatisfaction, increased absenteeism, diminished job performance and turnover
intentions (Karatepe et al., 2012).
Even successful managers who have been working in the hospitality industry for many years, experience job burnout from time to
time, causing them to leave the industry and creating many vacant
positions. These positions are then filled by less experienced managers who have not yet learned the intricacies of the business (Krone, et
al., 1989). While the hospitality industry then suffers quite a loss, other
industries are benefitting from this exodus of workers capitalizing on
their skills, knowledge and experience. The wisdom, human resource
knowledge, as well as the tactical and strategic skills that seasoned
managers bring with them are highly sought after in any service related
industry. This phenomenon is taking its toll on the hospitality industry
as organizations must then begin searching, hiring and training new (inexperienced) managers again (Krone et al., 1989). On the other hand, if
employees are highly engaged in the organization without being burntout, they will perform better, which will result in increased financial
returns due to quality service delivery and satisfied customers. Engaged
employees will therefore provide the organization with increased revenues while burnt-out employees will reduce revenues.
The case study introduces Mark Moore, a 50-year-old Supervisory
his burnout?
•
Should Mark approach his management team and discuss his
burnout situation?
•
How can his organization better help Mark with his burnout
challenges?
Theoretical Foundation
Burnout is defined as a prolonged response to chronic emotional
and interpersonal stressors in the workplace (Maslach et al., 2001). It
entails a stage characterized by a lack of productivity and achievement
at work (Liang, 2012). Furthermore, burnout represents the mismatch
that occurs between what a person should do at work and what the
person would like to do. Therefore, there is a significant disharmony
between the nature of a person’s job and the characteristics of the
person doing the job (Liang, 2012). Three dimensions define burnout
more specifically: exhaustion, cynicism, and inefficacy (Maslach et al.,
2001). Exhaustion occurs when a person’s feelings are overextended
and a person’s physical and emotional resources are depleted. Cynicism refers to uncaring and negative attitudes toward the various
aspects of the job and other people, while inefficacy entails a deterioration of self-confidence. Research found that 72% of employees
are very stressed, 67% are considering switching their careers, 85%
say that their jobs are intruding on their home lives, and 42% are losing sleep because of work (Stern, 2012). Maslach et al. (2001) describe
“six areas of work life that encompass the central relationships with
burnout: workload, control, reward, community, fairness, and values”
Level Restaurant Manager who is experiencing burnout at work. Mark
is considering leaving his current position or leaving the hospitality
Joseph Lederer, Mathilda Van Niekerk and Fevzi Okumus are all affliated with University of Central Florida.
Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Cases
1 This is hypothetical scenario based case study that was written for the purposes of classroom discussions. It was not intended to show effective or ineffective
handling of decisions or to interrogate a managerial situation. Published materials and academic sources were used in the preparation of this case study.
81
(Maslach et al., 2001, p. 414), and conclude that “burnout arises from
who exhibit high levels of neuroticism, low levels of conscientiousness,
chronic mismatches between people and their work setting in terms
and low levels of extraversion (Storm and Rothmann, 2003).
of some or all of these six areas” (Maslach et al., 2001, p. 414).
Burnout is common among hospitality employees and managers
“The biggest price companies’ pay for burnout is a loss of talented people” – this is according to John Izzo, the author of Values-Shift:
in the hospitality industry who are in constant contact with people
The New Work Ethic and What It Means for Business. He notes that “as
and who have high guest interaction levels (Buick and Thomas, 2001).
the economy improves, they will leave the enterprise” (Izzo and With-
The research findings based on a survey where data was collected
ers, 2001). Burnt-out individuals are seen as the “working wounded”
from workers in New Zealand show that burnout is the main cause of
and according to Stern (2012) these employees “show up to work
job dissatisfaction in most areas of the hospitality industry (Neill et
but have lost their motivation and are just trying to get through the
al., 2015). Food and beverage managers’ report higher burnout levels
day unscathed”. In this regard Maslach and Leiter (1998) proposed a
than any managers of other hospitality departments (US Bureau of
model which specified the developmental sequence of burnout in
Labor Statistics, 2015). Together with the increase of manager burnout
three dimensions: Emotional Exhaustion (EE), Depersonalization (DP),
in the hospitality industry, turnover is increasing to between 54%-60%
and Personal Accomplishment (PA). They propose that these dimen-
per year in the USA (US Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2015). Research
sions appear in sequence. EE appears first, as chronic excessive work
in the area of burnout in the hospitality industry is hardly new; in
demands drain an individual’s emotional resources (Boles, et al., 2000,
fact Niehouse (1984) identified three characteristics that distinguish
p. 14). During the DP stage, employees “limit their involvement with
candidates who are likely to experience burnout. The author found
others and distance themselves psychologically” as a coping strategy.
that burnout candidates predominantly experience stress caused by
After this state, employees see that there is a “discrepancy between
job-related stressors; they tend to be idealistic and/or self-motivated
their original optimistic attitude and their current attitude”, and rec-
achievers; and they seek out unattainable goals. Piedmont (1993),
ognizing this discrepancy leads to the final stage of burnout whereas
Dreary (2003) and Storm and Rothmann (2003) found a direct link
employees start “experiencing a feeling of inadequacy” towards others
between high levels of neuroticism and high levels of depersonali-
(Boles, et al., 2000, p. 14). This diminished PA becomes a cycle that af-
zation and emotional exhaustion. Managers experience emotional
fects their job performance. The consequences are a tendency to look
exhaustion and depersonalization especially if they are already pre-
for other job opportunities with a concomitant desire to decrease their
disposed to feelings of anxiety, depression, and if they are unable to
working hours (Kuruüzüm et al., 2008).
deal with stress (Piedmont, 1993). Dreary (2003) found that emotional
As soon as burnout is identified and understood, preventative
exhaustion is often experienced by individuals who exhibit high levels
measures can be proposed (Niehouse, 1984; Stern, 2012). Steps to
neuroticism and those who are emotion-oriented. Sometimes burnout
reduce burnout include having employees and managers work fewer
occurs in individuals who show low openness to experience, those
Table 1
Five ways to combat worker burnout
Gauge employee workloads, happiness, and balance.
Reach Out
When workers feel listen to they are more likely to be productive at work. When ignored, employees are
likely to be less engaged.
To ensure that employees are productive in the long run, make sure they get sufficient rest and relaxation.
Encourage them to recharge
Ensure employees that they will not be punished for taking time off.
Ensure employees that they are valued and must recharge their batteries.
Employees will feel less exhausted if they have flexible work arrangements.
Explore flexible work
arrangements
Offering flexible work arrangements makes you organization more attractive in the eyes of job candidates.
Improve wellness initiatives
A great way to attract potential candidates is a good wellness program.
Increase performance
reviews
Reviews should be done regularly. They are highly beneficial and ensure that employees are engaged and
feel valued (key points to preventing burnout).
A great way to reward employees when it is difficult to offer lavish monetary benefits is flexible work arrangements. Examples may include: alternative schedules, compressed workweeks, job sharing.
Source: Adapted from Ferrara (2009), Ronald et al. (2008) and Stern (2012)
82
Volume 5, Number 4
hours and making suggestions that can reevaluate and improve their
working conditions (Kuruüzüm et al., 2008). Unfortunately, senior lead-
This left Mark with feelings of inadequacy.
Over the years, Mark has worked in many restaurants/bars and
ers feel there is not much that they can do about burnout except to
has paid his way through his undergraduate studies by working in the
hire more managers to decrease working hours for other managers
hospitality business. He was always drawn back to this industry during
in hospitality (Krone, et al., 1989). On the supervisory level, managers
periods of his life when a change was needed. Thus, instead of leaving
who work in the industry simply seem to try to move up the ladder
the position and the industry and shedding his feelings of inadequacy,
as quickly as possible with a view to delegate responsibility to those
Mark decided that he would pursue a Master’s Degree in Hospitality
below them, thus avoiding the long hours and burnout (Krone, et
Management, sponsored by his organization. Mark thought that this
al., 1989). However, in order to take a positive step towards resolving
would give him an advantage and make him more marketable within
burnout issues, companies should address it by asking staff members
his current organization and also to future employers.
what changes they would like to see; as such an approach will help to
develop problem-solving techniques (Stern, 2012).
Companies should consider eliminating unnecessary tasks or
When speaking to Mark, one observes that after 16 plus years at
the current organization, he shows some signs of burnout. For many
years, Mark has found his work challenging and exciting, but he some-
limiting lengthy meetings to no more than 15 minutes along with
times felt he was hitting a wall. However, he has always found ways
emphasizing wellness programs that will help staff reduce stress and
around it. Now he is beginning to feel that he is hitting the walls more
give them a sense of purpose (Stern, 2012). Ronald et al. (2008) sug-
frequently, and he needs too much time and effort to get over them,
gest that companies should provide employees with workshops and
and the recovery time between hits is too short. In essence, Mark
courses on emotional management to delve into the reasons as to
feels bored and inadequate. He believed that when he completed
why employees cannot successfully display emotional labor behaviors.
his Master’s Degree in hospitality, he would find a more exciting and
Such courses may include one-on-one interviews with employees. If
challenging position within the organization or elsewhere. However,
employers find that their employees have performance issues caused
these positions are not materializing and Mark is beginning to feel de-
by low motivation, they can use motivational approaches to increase
pressed and anxious. Mark now exhibits various symptoms of burnout
performance (Ronald, et al., 2008). Jason Ferrara, VP of Corporate
as described by Maslach and Leiter (2005). At first, he did not realize
Marketing at CareerBuilder.com also offers five more ways to combat
that the exhaustion he felt (hourly, daily and weekly) were symptoms
worker burnout (Ferrara, 2009). His strategies are shown in Table 1.
of emotional exhaustion, caused by “chronic excessive work demands”
These can be considered when tackling the issue of employee burnout
that have drained his “emotional resources” (Boles et al., 2000, p. 14).
in hospitality organizations.
Lately, as a coping strategy, Mark has also found himself limiting his
Case: Background to Mark Moore
involvement with others and distancing himself psychologically from
Mark Moore has been working for his organization for over 16 years.
He started in 1999 by opening his first restaurant for the organization.
Mark received his Bachelor’s Degree from Philadelphia College of Textiles
and Science. He started his career as a design consultant for a mid-sized
textile-converting firm in Sydney, Australia and then moved to New York
to work as a costume pattern maker. During his time as a pattern maker
he also worked nights as a waiter to earn extra cash. After working as a
costume pattern maker for three years, Mark decided to earn a Master’s
Degree in Education. He started but did not finish this degree. Mark was
working full-time at local bars around New York until he was offered the
position at his current organization. After working for five years, Mark was
approached to fill a supervisory role as a floor manager. Mark accepted
the role and subsequently managed Blues Café restaurant/nightclub.
During his tenure at Blues Café, Mark was told repeatedly by his senior
manager that if and when there would be any opportunity for promotion,
Mark would be the first one to be considered for the position. However,
when there was an opportunity for promotion, Mark was not offered the
position and it went to a manager hired from outside the organization.
Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Cases
his colleagues, especially his superiors.
Mark considers himself a very good fit for the role and feels that
he is still fulfilling his duties towards guests and those he supervises,
but he is becoming more reckless with the words he uses and more
negative towards his superiors. He feels that it is only a matter of time
until he will start seeing a discrepancy between his original optimistic
attitude and his current attitude. Now that he has recognized this discrepancy, he knows that the reason why he is avoiding his managers
is because he is reaching the final stage of burnout which entails that
he is experiencing feelings of inadequacy towards them. Mark feels
fortunate that he has a highly desirable and well-paid position where
he can make a nominal difference in the organization. Additionally,
Mark has full health insurance, ten paid holidays per year, four weeks
of vacation per year, two personal days per year, 400 hours of paid sick
time, plus five paid days to use when needed.
From an outsider’s point of view, it may seem that Mark is successful.
However, Mark would be willing to give up some of the aforementioned
benefits if he were able to find a more challenging job that better suits
his needs. Mark knows the saying that the ‘grass is always greener on the
83
other side’ but he feels that this position is no longer providing him the
means to be content in his life. Also, he feels that earning his Master’s
Degree should be a beacon for employers to seek him out and offer him a
more suitable position. At this point, however, Mark has applied for about
30 positions for which he is clearly qualified, yet he has only received rejection from within and outside of his organization.
Recently, Mark scored significantly lower on a biennial ‘360’ evaluation than in a previous ‘360s’. Mark does not really care any longer about
his 360 evaluations. This cycle of not caring due to burnout as defined
by the third dimension (feelings of reduced personal accomplishment see Boles et al., 2000) is justified. He feels that his decreased feelings of
competence and his negative self-evaluation has been proven by the
people who evaluated him. At the age of 50, in light also of his feeling
that moving abroad is not a viable option, Mark is ready to leave New
York behind and live closer to the coast in a quieter semi-urban area.
Given the above information, Mark would also have no problem remaining in New York as he has built a life here and has a considerable number
of friends and colleagues. He is involved in a long-term relationship and
his partner is more than happy to move anywhere in the United States
or Europe as his partner telecommutes. Mark sometimes also thinks
about lecturing at a community college after he retires. However, the
main challenge now is how he can overcome his burnout.
Concluding Thoughts and Discussion Questions
Similar too many employees and managers in the hospitality
industry, Mark Moore is one of the ‘working wounded’ individuals
suffering from burnout. Mark’s mental and physical burnout is due to
repetitive work causing boredom, thus exhaustion. His values no longer align with his organization’s values and no professional or personal
growth is likely to take place in him in the foreseeable future. As the
organization has offered little to no professional growth opportunities
in the past few years, his only accomplishment, while extremely relevant, was obtaining his Master’s Degree in Hospitality Management. It
is now important to develop solutions to help the ‘working wounded’
like Mark who are suffering from burnout in the hospitality industry.
These solutions may include a personal plan for Mark, some strategies
that will help him overcome burnout and the role his organization’s
management team should play to assist him. Several questions can
help us analyze the case study and generate discussions.
•
What are the symptoms and reasons for Mark’s burnout?
•
If you were to design a personal plan for Mark, what five strategies would you suggest to him to work on in order to overcome
his burnout?
•
Should Mark approach his management team and discuss his
burnout situation?
•
How can his organization better help Mark with his burnout
challenges?
84
Volume 5, Number 4
Working on the case study will assist students in developing the following student learning outcomes.
1. Name key hotel performance metrics;
2. Define average daily rate (ADR), occupancy (OCC), and revenue per available room (RevPAR); 3. Discuss positive and negative sides of using each of the metrics for hotel performance
evaluation;
4. Interpret data and appraise evidence;
5. Dis0nguish, compare, or contrast diverse points of view and/or alterna0ve conclusions; 6. Ar0culate personal insights about complex issues or problems.
Background Information:
The hotel industry serves the accommoda0on needs of tourists, those visitors who are staying at a des0na0on overnight, but no more than one year (World Tourism Organization, n.d., para. 1). Hotels come in different forms. They may be branded, which means affiliated with a par0cular chain (e.g., Marriot, Hilton, Accor), or independent. Hotels differ in service level that they provide and may be grouped into such categories as economy, midscale, upscale, and luxury. Based on location, hotels may be classified as urban, suburban, airport, or interstate properties.
The hotel industry was comprised of 55,900 hotels in 2018 (Oxford Economics, 2019). These hotels directly (hotel operations) and indirectly (supply-chain employment) supported 8.3 million jobs, which is the equivalent of 1-in-25 jobs in the U.S. Taken all together, hotels contributed close to $660 billion to the U.S. gross domestic product (GDP), and supported $185 billion of local, state, and federal taxes. Given the impact of the hotel industry on the local and national economies, it is important to learn how to evaluate hotel performance. Therefore, the focus for this case study will be on hotel performance metrics. Such metrics may be applied to each individual hotel, a group of hotels, hotels in a given state, country, or worldwide.
Hotel Performance Metrics:
The hotel industry uses a variety of metrics to assess hotel performance and the economic impact of hotel industry. The key performance metrics include average daily rate (ADR), occupancy (OCC), and revenue per available room (RevPAR). Each of these metrics describes an important aspect of hotel operations. And, taken all together, they assist hotel managers in evaluating the performance of their properties from different angles. Let’s explore what these metrics can teach us about the performance of the U.S. hotel industry.
HOSP 3010 Principles of Hospitality and Tourism Management
ADR may be defined as “the average selling price of guest rooms during a specific 0me period, such as a day, week, month, or a year” (Hayes & Miller, 2011, p. 20). ADR may be calculated by dividing the total room sales revenue by the number of rooms sold. In other words, ADR the average price that guests paid for hotel rooms during a specific period. The graph below demonstrates the monthly ADR of the U.S. hotels from January 2011 to June 2020 (Sta0sta, 2019).
Questions:
Please look at the ADR line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about ADR ofU.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how ADR changes from month to month and year to year?
Each line does not seem to fluctuate a lot indicating a minimal change from one month to another. Does this mean the hotels in the U.S. make about the same revenue every month? Why or why not?
Think of a limitation to using ADR alone for hotel performance evaluation. Please describe.
RevPAR may be defined as “the average revenue generated by each available guest room during a specific time period” (Hayes & Miller, 2011, p. 21). RevPAR is calculated by dividing the total room revenue by the number of available rooms. In other words, RevPAR may be understood as an average revenue earned from each room available for sale. An important difference between ADR and RevPAR is that ADR looks at the sold rooms, and RevPAR looks at all rooms that are available for sale in a given hotel during a specific time period. Below is the graph that reports the monthly RevPAR of the U.S. hotels from January 2011 to June 2020 (Statista, 2019).
Questions:
Please look at the RevPAR line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about RevPAR of the U.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how RevPAR changes from month to month and year to year? How does RevPAR compare to ADR? Please explain your observations.
RevPAR lines seem to have larger fluctua0ons within a year compared to those of ADR. Why do you think this is happening?
Please think of a limitation to using RevPAR alone for hotel performance evaluation.
Occupancy percentage (OCC) is the portion of hotel rooms sold during a specific time period. OCC may be calculated by dividing the number of rooms sold by the number of all rooms available for sale. In other words, OCC may be understood as a metric showing how full or empty the hotel is. While two previous metrics look at the average revenue made from each sold (ADR) or available (RevPAR) room, OCC looks at the number the rooms sold in relation to available rooms. Below is the graph that presents the monthly OCC of U.S. hotels from January 2011 to June 2020 (Statista, 2019).
Questions:
Please look at the OCC line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about OCC of the U.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how OCC changes from month to month and year to year? How would you explain such a pattern?
The OCC graph is cumulative for all hotels in the U.S. Could you think of a destination in the U.S. or abroad that would exhibit a different OCC pattern?
Please think of a limitation to use OCC alone for hotel performance evaluation.
JOBS LOST IN TENNESSEE HOTEL INDUSTRY DUE TO CORONAVIRUS PANDEMIC
28,288 DIRECT HOTEL-RELATED JOBS LOST
• 72, 632 TOTAL JOBS LOST SUPPORTING HOTEL INDUSTRY
MISSISSIPPI HOTELIERS SHARING THEIR HARDSHIP
Debbie Davis – Knoxville, TN
“By Monday, March 16, 2020, we were forced to lay-off half of our team, 11 wonderful, service-oriented people. As I write this, Tuesday March 17th, we closing our breakfast buffet to reduce the threat to our guests and team members. We have also shut down two full floors of rooms, and will consider taking even more drastic options just to stay in business.”
Rakesh Patel – Germantown, TN
“As a hotelier in Tennessee I have experienced firsthand…A steep decline in business. We have no choice but to cut hours/staffing. These are our busy months.”
Impact of COVID-19 on the Hotel Industry:
American Hotel & Lodging Association (AH&LA), a major professional association that represents the interests of the hotel industry, prepared reports of the COVID-19 impacts on each state. Please read the above excerpt from the report about the state of Tennessee (AH&LA, 2020, p.1) and answer the following question:
Questions:
10. Using the ADR, RevPAR, and OCC graphs together with the AH&LA report excerpt for the state of Tennessee present your understanding of how COVID-19 impacted the hotel industry in the U.S. What is the trend or pattern that you are seeing?
References:
AH&LA. (2020). Tennessee: COVID-19 impact on state’s hotel industry.
Hayes, D. K., & Miller, A. A. (2011). Revenue management for the hospitality industry. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Oxford Economics. (2019). Economic impact of the U.S. hotel industry. https://www.ahla.com/sites/default/files/oxford201…
Sta0sta. (2019). Hotels in the United States. hVps://www-statista-com.umiss.idm.oclc.org/ study/47531/hotels-in-the-united-states/
World Tourism Organizti0on. (n.d.). Glossary of tourism terms. https://www.unwto.org/ glossary-tourism-terms
Unformatted Attachment Preview
HOSP 3010 Principles
of Hospitality and
Tourism Management
U.S. Hotel Industry
Performance
Learning Outcomes:
Working on the case study will assist students in developing the following student learning
outcomes.
1. Name key hotel performance metrics;
2. Define average daily rate (ADR), occupancy (OCC), and revenue per available room (RevPAR);
3. Discuss positive and negative sides of using each of the metrics for hotel performance
evaluation;
4. Interpret data and appraise evidence;
5. Dis0nguish, compare, or contrast diverse points of view and/or alterna0ve conclusions;
6. Ar0culate personal insights about complex issues or problems.
Background Information:
The hotel industry serves the accommoda0on needs of tourists, those visitors who are staying
at a des0na0on overnight, but no more than one year (World Tourism Organization, n.d., para.
1). Hotels come in different forms. They may be branded, which means affiliated with a
par0cular chain (e.g., Marriot, Hilton, Accor), or independent. Hotels differ in service level that
they provide and may be grouped into such categories as economy, midscale, upscale, and
luxury. Based on location, hotels may be classified as urban, suburban, airport, or interstate
properties.
The hotel industry was comprised of 55,900 hotels in 2018 (Oxford Economics, 2019). These
hotels directly (hotel operations) and indirectly (supply-chain employment) supported 8.3
million jobs, which is the equivalent of 1-in-25 jobs in the U.S. Taken all together, hotels
contributed close to $660 billion to the U.S. gross domestic product (GDP), and supported $185
billion of local, state, and federal taxes. Given the impact of the hotel industry on the local and
national economies, it is important to learn how to evaluate hotel performance. Therefore, the
focus for this case study will be on hotel performance metrics. Such metrics may be applied to
each individual hotel, a group of hotels, hotels in a given state, country, or worldwide.
Hotel Performance Metrics:
The hotel industry uses a variety of metrics to assess hotel performance and the economic
impact of hotel industry. The key performance metrics include average daily rate (ADR),
occupancy (OCC), and revenue per available room (RevPAR). Each of these metrics describes an
important aspect of hotel operations. And, taken all together, they assist hotel managers in
evaluating the performance of their properties from different angles. Let’s explore what these
metrics can teach us about the performance of the U.S. hotel industry.
ADR may be defined as “the average selling price of guest rooms during a specific 0me period,
such as a day, week, month, or a year” (Hayes & Miller, 2011, p. 20). ADR may be calculated by
dividing the total room sales revenue by the number of rooms sold. In other words, ADR the
average price that guests paid for hotel rooms during a specific period. The graph below
demonstrates the monthly ADR of the U.S. hotels from January 2011 to June 2020 (Sta0sta,
2019).
Questions:
1. Please look at the ADR line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about ADR of
U.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how ADR changes from month to
month and year to year?
2. Each line does not seem to fluctuate a lot indicating a minimal change from one month
to another. Does this mean the hotels in the U.S. make about the same revenue every
month? Why or why not?
3. Think of a limitation to using ADR alone for hotel performance evaluation. Please describe.
RevPAR may be defined as “the average revenue generated by each available guest room during a
specific time period” (Hayes & Miller, 2011, p. 21). RevPAR is calculated by dividing the total room
revenue by the number of available rooms. In other words, RevPAR may be understood as an
average revenue earned from each room available for sale. An important difference between ADR
and RevPAR is that ADR looks at the sold rooms, and RevPAR looks at all rooms that are available
for sale in a given hotel during a specific time period. Below is the graph that reports the monthly
RevPAR of the U.S. hotels from January 2011 to June 2020 (Statista, 2019).
Questions:
4. Please look at the RevPAR line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about
RevPAR of the U.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how RevPAR changes
from month to month and year to year? How does RevPAR compare to ADR? Please
explain your observations.
5. RevPAR lines seem to have larger fluctua0ons within a year compared to those of ADR.
Why do you think this is happening?
6. Please think of a limitation to using RevPAR alone for hotel performance evaluation.
Occupancy percentage (OCC) is the portion of hotel rooms sold during a specific time period.
OCC may be calculated by dividing the number of rooms sold by the number of all rooms
available for sale. In other words, OCC may be understood as a metric showing how full or
empty the hotel is. While two previous metrics look at the average revenue made from each
sold (ADR) or available (RevPAR) room, OCC looks at the number the rooms sold in relation to
available rooms. Below is the graph that presents the monthly OCC of U.S. hotels from January
2011 to June 2020 (Statista, 2019).
Questions:
7. Please look at the OCC line graphs from 2011 to 2019. What did you learn about OCC of
the U.S. hotels? Do you see any trend or a pattern in how OCC changes from month to
month and year to year? How would you explain such a pattern?
8. The OCC graph is cumulative for all hotels in the U.S. Could you think of a destination in
the U.S. or abroad that would exhibit a different OCC pattern?
9. Please think of a limitation to use OCC alone for hotel performance evaluation.
JOBS LOST IN TENNESSEE HOTEL INDUSTRY DUE TO CORONAVIRUS PANDEMIC
• 28,288 DIRECT HOTEL-RELATED JOBS LOST
• 72, 632 TOTAL JOBS LOST SUPPORTING HOTEL INDUSTRY
MISSISSIPPI HOTELIERS SHARING THEIR HARDSHIP
Debbie Davis – Knoxville, TN
“By Monday, March 16, 2020, we were forced to lay-off half of our team, 11 wonderful,
service-oriented people. As I write this, Tuesday March 17th, we closing our breakfast buffet to
reduce the threat to our guests and team members. We have also shut down two full floors of
rooms, and will consider taking even more drastic options just to stay in business.”
Rakesh Patel – Germantown, TN
“As a hotelier in Tennessee I have experienced firsthand…A steep decline in business. We have
no choice but to cut hours/staffing. These are our busy months.”
Impact of COVID-19 on the Hotel Industry:
American Hotel & Lodging Association (AH&LA), a major professional association that
represents the interests of the hotel industry, prepared reports of the COVID-19 impacts on
each state. Please read the above excerpt from the report about the state of Tennessee
(AH&LA, 2020, p.1) and answer the following question:
Questions:
10. Using the ADR, RevPAR, and OCC graphs together with the AH&LA report excerpt for the
state of Tennessee present your understanding of how COVID-19 impacted the hotel
industry in the U.S. What is the trend or pattern that you are seeing?
References:
AH&LA. (2020). Tennessee: COVID-19 impact on state’s hotel industry.
https://www.ahla.com/sites/default/files/2020-04/ahla_tn_one_pager_.pdf
Hayes, D. K., & Miller, A. A. (2011). Revenue management for the hospitality industry.
Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Oxford Economics. (2019). Economic impact of the U.S. hotel industry. https://www.ahla.com/
sites/default/files/oxford2019.pdf
Sta0sta. (2019). Hotels in the United States. hVps://www-statista-com.umiss.idm.oclc.org/
study/47531/hotels-in-the-united-states/
World Tourism Organizti0on. (n.d.). Glossary of tourism terms. https://www.unwto.org/
glossary-tourism-terms
You will conduct a close analysis of an episode from our shared ‘core text’ (True Detective, season 2). An assignment sheet, including all details is attached under here and and under Rubrics. Feel free to read through examples from the How to Watch Television book not covered in class. Remember to develop a clear argument about how the episode and/or particular scenes work, and what about it is interesting or remarkable, i.e., why should the reader care about this episode and/or series?
Conduct a close analysis of an episode from our shared ‘core text’, True Detective, season 2. In order to perform successfully your analysis, please discuss in your mid-term paper the characteristics of the series and/or the episode of your choice outlined below. Note that you are NOT required to do external research in order to answer the guiding questions for your analysis. I expect that your writing will be rooted in personal engagement and observations while viewing the series as well as in the required readings on the syllabus. You can choose as your reference style APA, Chicago and MLA. Remember to stay consistent with one citation style throughout the paper. The word limit for your essay analysis is between 2,000 and 2,500 words. Remember to develop a clear argument about how the episode and/or particular scenes work, and what about it is interesting or remarkable, i.e. why should the reader care about this episode and/or series?
a) What type of television show is True Detective? How does it conform to and, simultaneously, expand the definition of a crime series? Is this a show, which explores universal topics of social significance (cultural forum) or an ideologically driven entertainment (hegemony)?
b) What are the physical characteristics of the episode you’ve chosen to analyze: music, narration, colour, action, sound effects, etc.
c) Note how camera angles, lighting, music, narration, and/or editing contribute to creating an atmosphere in this show. What is the mood or tone of the film and how do the producers use the above to create that mood?
d) How does True Detective as a text, and your episode in particular, signify the changes occurring in the construction of TV narratives in the post network era? Do you find these changes appealing to you as a viewer/consumer of TV texts?
e) How is gender constructed—are the male & female characters doing stereotypically gendered things? Are they doing atypical gendered things? Is there any character that breaks with the traditional gender roles? Use specific examples from the episode you are analysing to illustrate your point.
f) To what extent is the television show realistic? Do the characters have real emotions — and a full range of emotions? Is this show a RealFeel show? Do the characters ever do “real” things like go to the bathroom or get dirty? Use specific examples from the episode you’re analyzing to illustrate your point.
g) What techniques of othering (if any) are employed in the television show? Are the characters doing things or finding themselves in situations that are stereotypical to their profession/race/class? Are the characters doing things or put in situations that are presumed not typical to their profession/race/class? Use specific examples from the episode you’re analyzing (or the show in general) to illustrate your point.
h) How do you think the television show producers wanted the audience to respond?
i) Does True Detective appeal to the viewer’s reason or emotion? How does it make you feel?
j) Discuss at least TWO things that True Detective tells you about life in the West or the contemporary condition of man.
k) Discuss True Detective both as a work of art and a commercial product.
l) Imagine yourselves in a situation where you can ask the television producers a question that was left unanswered by the show. What would that question be?
Assessment Criteria
Clear and insightful thesis that remains present throughout your paper and directly relates to your analysis to the questions asked in the outline above:
Clear references to the course material studied so far in class: the essays in Jason Mittel’s How to Watch Television, Amanda Lotz’s writing, the lecture and discussion topics:
Introduction and comment of different approaches to TV analysis. Which is your theoretical background of preference (cultural forum, hegemony, (magical) realism, aesthetics, etc.):
Conclusion, which goes beyond the simple re-cap of your thesis statement: when concluding your essay, ask yourself the question how is the object of my analysis contributing to the larger discussions about television and society? :
In terms of style, I will be looking for a few things: consideration of paragraph structure is clearly evident. Little to no grammatical errors. Sentence structure shows a variety of styles for paragraph flow: long, medium, short, active and passive. Relative use of tense (past or present). Quotes and paraphrased content is properly introduced and referenced in a consistent citation style (MLA, APA, Chicago):
Second Essay (1500 -2000 words)
you will research and present a critical discussion of one major approach to studying television. Put this in the form of An Presentation Essay. I have (arbitrarily) identified nine approaches for you to research and discuss:Technology, Auteur Theory, Production Studies, Audience Studies, Feminist and Gender Perspectives, Critical Race Theory, Screen Theory, the Frankfurt School, and the Birmingham School. You
should expect to consult a few external sources to help develop a snapshot of the historical context, key
thinkers, contributions, and debates of your given approach. You should also offer a brief discussion
of how you might analyze our central course text (True Detective, season 2) using the tools of your
approach. The goal is for you to guide the class toward an understanding of the importance of your approach and the way it relates to the course.
1. Research: you should aim to look at the very least one article (journal, book chapter or popular sources) that explains your theory.
2. Examples – you should provide at least three different examples (from television or cinema) that illustrate the theoretical approach that has been discussed. I encourage you to mention not just names of films or TV shows but to point to specific scenes and sequences that talk portray the theoretical approach.
3. While preparing the research part: look at the historical context, key thinkers and debates that exist within the field. You don’t need to be comprehensive, but you should show understanding of how the theory works and what its limitations are or might be.
4. Speculate about or apply directly your chosen theoretical approach to True Detective. You can look at single episodes, particular scenes, particular characters, or the series as a whole.
5. Organize your presentation in a coherent manner. You need to convince the audience that your case is solid and your story is worth listening to.
6. Your presentation should be (to the best of your ability) visually appealing – use images, scenes, examples that animate the discourse.
7. Speaking duties and research duties should be spread equally among the presenters.
8. The presentation raises questions and invites the class to contribute on the Graffiti wall comments and questions.
Case 9: Dan Price, CEO of Gravity Payments, Established a Minimum Salary of $70,000 for All Employees
Dan Price grew up in a family of seven, whose evangelical Christian parents homeschooled him and his siblings until they were 12. The family had strong roots in reading and studying the Bible, which was a daily activity. Price was very interested in learning the scriptures and reached the finals of a Bible-memorization contest in the fifth and sixth grades.
In 2004 Price, then 19, started Gravity Payments with his brother Lucas. The brothers initially had a 50-50 stake in the company, but about 18 months later Lucas Price ended his direct involvement in the company and Dan Price became the majority owner.
Gravity Payments is a credit card processing company. According to an article about the company in Bloomberg Businessweek, “The day-to-day work at Gravity Payments is pretty unglamorous. Gravity is a middleman between merchants and payment networks, namely Visa and MasterCard, which in turn connect to banks that issue credit cards.” The office is a conglomerate of “desks and computers in bland cubicles—but the space is reorganized every six months so people can sit near different colleagues.” Price does this because he doesn’t want people to get too comfortable.
The corporate home page describes the company as follows: “‘Take care of your team, and they’ll take care of your clients.’ Gravity Payments recognizes the value in establishing an entrepreneurial, goal-oriented, rewarding, honest, and innovative culture, which is what makes our company such a remarkable place to work. We believe in a holistic and balanced lifestyle, supporting our team members with:
$70,000 minimum wage
Unlimited paid time off
Medical, dental, and vision insurance
Bonus opportunities
Flannel Fridays
Company-sponsored outings
Volunteer opportunities
Catered breakfasts and lunches
A survey of comments on Glassdoor reveals a combination of pros and cons about working at Gravity. A sampling of comments includes the following:
Pros:
“I have never worked for a company that cares for their customers more than Gravity. Company culture is the best I have worked with.”
“The company is built on a foundation of community and teamwork. I have built some long-lasting friendships. We are a community of people who are competitive, love to learn, and want to grow.”
“I love the team of people I work with! They value the unique skills and experience that I have, support me in accomplishing my goals, challenge me to bring my best, and inspire me to push to new heights.”
“Gravity Payments offers an incredible opportunity for employees to seize responsibility and grow personally and professionally.… You really do get out what you put in as far as effort being rewarded with additional responsibilities and trust.”
“Management genuinely cares about your success and professional growth. Even though people work hard … the environment is fun and social.”
Cons:
“It can be intimidating to work with such high quality and capable people. Personal sacrifice is often necessary to provide a high level of service and support for our customers and teammates.”
“It’s no secret that this industry is tough. As a rep you have to be very driven and handle plenty of rejection.”
“Be prepared to work long hours …”
“Many days are filled with rejection and apathy.”
“This is not easy work. Anyone who is just looking to do the minimum and collect their paycheck will not be happy nor successful here. Be prepared to operate at 100 percent at all times, as there is rarely down time.”
Price made international headlines in 2015 when he announced his plan to raise the minimum salary of his 120 employees to $70,000. At the time, the average employee salary was $48,000.
He decided to phase in the salary increase over three years. The minimum starting salary became $50,000 in 2015 and $60,000 by December 2016 and $70,000 by December 2017. Price plans to pay for this increase without raising prices to customers by reducing his own salary from about $1 million to $70,000, and by diverting about 80 percent of company profits for 2015. This strategy is critically important because profit margins are slim in this industry, and any price increases are likely to result in a loss of customers.
Many employees were ecstatic at the news of the salary rise. One hundred received an immediate pay increase, and 30 saw their pay double. Others were not so happy and perceived the decision as inequitable. Maisey McMaster, a 26-year-old financial manager, said, “He gave raises to people who have the least skills and are the least equipped to do the job, and the ones who were taking on the most didn’t get much of a bump.” She felt it would have been fairer to give smaller increases with the opportunity to earn a future raise with more experience.
McMaster told Price about her feelings, and according to an interview in The New York Times, he suggested she was being selfish. She quit.
Grant Morgan had a similar reaction in his Times interview. “I had a lot of mixed emotions,” he said. His salary was raised to $50,000 from $41,000. “Now the people who were just clocking in and out were making the same as me. It shackles high performers to less motivated team members.” He also quit.
Some customers left the company because they viewed the pay increase as a political statement or a prelude to higher fees.
A few key events seem to have prompted Price’s decision to raise wages. One was a 2011 conversation with Jason Haley, a phone technician making about $35,000 a year. Haley told Price, “You’re ripping me off.” A surprised Price said, “Your pay is based on market rates.” Haley shot back that “the data doesn’t matter. I know your intentions are bad. You brag about how financially disciplined you are, but that just translates into me not making enough money to lead a decent life.” Price was shocked and upset.
Price also came to feel that pay inequality between himself and his employees was simply wrong. He told a reporter from The New York Times that income inequality “just eats at me inside.”
According to Bloomberg Businessweek, Price’s original pay was “atypical for a company of Gravity’s size” and profitability. The company’s profit was $2.2 million in 2014. Bloomberg Businessweek reported that “at private companies with sales like Gravity’s total revenue, salary and bonus for the top quartile of CEOs is $710,000.… At companies with sales like Gravity’s net revenue, the top quartile pay falls to about $373,000. At those with a similar number of employees as Gravity, the top quartile of CEOs makes $470,000 in salary and bonus.”
Price told a CNBC anchor in 2011 that he was making “probably $50,000” in 2011, which he noted was the “most I’d ever made in my life.” This statement contrasts with data reported in a lawsuit filed by Lucas Price, who retains a 30 percent stake in the company. According to a reporter for Geekwire.com, “The filing discloses Price’s compensation as CEO dating back five years. It says Price received $957,811 in compensation in 2010, $908,950 in 2011, and more than $2 million in 2012, which represented more than 20 percent of Gravity Payment’s $9.9 million in sales that year.”
Price’s compensation is at the heart of his brother’s lawsuit, filed about a month before the wage increase was announced. Lucas Price claims Dan Price was taking millions out of the company, detracting from the financial benefits of being a minority owner.
Bloomberg Businessweek reviewed court papers and stated that the lawsuit claims Price “‘improperly used his majority control of the company’ to overpay himself, in the process reducing what Lucas was due. ‘Daniel’s actions have been burdensome, harsh and wrongful, and have shown a lack of fair dealing toward Lucas,’ the suit alleges.” Lucas Price wants his brother to pay for damages and buy him out.
A judge ruled in July 2016 that Lucas Price had failed to “prove his claims that Dan had overpaid himself and inappropriately used a corporate credit card for personal expenses. The judge also ordered Lucas to pay Dan’s legal fees,” according to a reporter for The New York Times.
What is the problem?
What are the causes?
What solutions will you propose to address the problem? (How do you, as an HR manager address this issue? Think of practical solutions – explain why you think they are appropriate)
Prepare a slide deck summarizing your answers for those questions and with speaker notes.All the materials you need I attahced down below Question 1Qualitatively discuss the benefits and costs of choosing Madison as the target market for the proposed luxury student-housing development.Question 2Explain the feasibility analysis provided in the case and critique it as a basis for decision-making. Your critique should include a discussion of both what is wrong with the technique, as well as what may be wrong with the assumptions within the specific application of the technique in this case.
Part of being a good manager is staying up to date on the latest news, trends, laws, financial happenings, and international situations impacting business. If you look at your newsfeed, you will see many articles that directly relate to the material we study every week. Make it part of your daily habits to check in and review the top business-related articles.Identify an article in the media within the last six weeks that relates to a topic from this week’s assigned reading. You can look at reputed newspapers, journals, online publications, and other sources. The APSU library is an excellent resource. Once you identify an article, submit it along with a paragraph that addresses the following.How do you relate this article to the material we covered in the course?
As head of customer service for a cosmetics company, you are responsible for how your employees communicate with customers, both verbally and in writing. They deal with professional buyers at major retail chain stores and individual consumers. Their communications involve providing product information, answering availability and delivery questions, resolving complaints, and actual selling. You must ensure that your employees’ verbal and written skills and overall communication abilities are all up to the task. You will have to address numerous issues, not the least of which is training and performance evaluation.
Question 1 – Describe a performance evaluation system that would help you determine whether their verbal and written skills are adequate, now and on an ongoing basis.
Question 2 – If you were to develop training to help employees improve these skills, what might be the 2 or 3 most important components of that program and why?
Requirements
Please read the CSCMP learning material for block 2 before writing your paper.
In 500 to 600 words, address the topic raised above. Be sure to identify any sources used to formulate your answers.
This assignment is worth 130 points (13% of your grade). You will be graded for relevancy (focus on the questions), critical thinking (your thoughts), the format used for your paper and references, and your spelling and grammar (use software like Grammarly). See the rubric for details. Note that this assignment will be submitted to Turnitin for review, so your work only, please.
Assignment Policy
Assignments submitted past due will be counted as zero points unless prior permission for late submission is received.
Submissions should fully and clearly answer the question or topic raised. In most cases, this can usually be done in 500 to 600 words. Direct and “to the point” approaches are best. Special instructions will be provided if more is required for a specific topic or issue.
Plagiarism is never acceptable. Assignments will be checked for plagiarism, which, if found, will result in a zero for the assignment.
Grades for written assignments will be evaluated based on the following:
Issue Weight
Relevance 35%
Critical Thinking 35%
Value and documentation of References 15%
Grammar/ Spelling/ Formatting 15%
Directions: Read pages 87-112 in the Desai textbook and answer the following.1. Consider the “who’s who” of capital markets by briefly explaining how each of the following entities influences the information process: a) the equity research analyst; b) the companies; c) the buy side; d) the sell side; and e) the media. (pp. 87-102)2. Describe the process of diversification and explain why it is a recommended approach. (pp. 91-92)3. Distinguish between “going long” and “going short” on stocks. Which approach seems riskier, and why? (pp. 93-97)4. Define asymmetric information and describe two reasons why it is problematic. (pp. 100-103)
I need a clear answers and avoid plagiarism the pages
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Important notes *
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
The pages not less than 5
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Post your pop culture text here. This is the text you will analyze for paper 1. It can be anything you see in pop culture, a music video or song, a film clip, a scene from a TV show, an online forum, an advertisement. It should be short, something you can analyze in a 2-page paper, so if you use a TV show or film or book, select a SPECIFIC SCENE. Post your text here and write a paragraph in response to the two prompts below: 1. Describe specific details from the text you have selected. Focus on something small that you can write about in one paragraph – a particular scene from a movie trailer or TV show, the details you see in an advertisement, a sampling of lyrics and a scene from a music video. Focus on the “signs” or meaningful symbols (such as flags, differently raced and gendered bodies, signifiers of class like gold, rings, fancy cars, clothes, settings like the beach, a club, house or nature): all of these signs convey meaning. Here you spend a paragraph simply describing these signs at work in the text. 2. Analyze the text: how are race, class, and/or gender represented in your text? Focus on specific signs from your first paragraph to provide evidence for your claims. You will receive 80% credit for selecting a strong text and offering some insightful arguments for why you chose it and how you intend to analyze it. Post TWO substantive replies to your peers for 20%. A ‘substantive’ reply cites evidence from the text and/or a concept from class readings.
Please avoid plagiarism and direct copying. Write in your own style and follow the instructions in the file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight: 10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything. Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi Local company or any Multinational company.
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1.Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2.Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3.On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples. (Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4.Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
Their Main functions
Motivational Factors /Drivers
Any local example
Reasons with suitable Examples
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1. 400
Answer 2.400
Answer 3.400
Answer 4.400
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1. 400
Answer 2.400
Answer 3.400
Answer 4.400
Read the case study and answer the given questions;Wichmann wanted to avoid “top-down” approaches in their social media strategy. Based on the article, what are the advantages using the “top-down” approach? Are there any disadvantages? Discuss both.What are the contributing factors in Maerk’s success on Facebook such that they gained more than 400,000 new followers in 11 months?What are the four areas that Maersk focused on? How do they use different social networks across these four areas?How do they evaluate their ROI? Discuss both qualitative and quantitative approaches.Can their social media model be applied to other B2B businesses? What are the prerequisites to be a successful one?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BERKELEY-HAAS CASE SERIES
Maersk Line:
B2B SOCIAL MEDIA—“IT’S
COMMUNICATION, NOT MARKETING”
Zsolt Katona
Miklos Sarvary
The case describes the launch of a social media platform by the largest container shipping company in the world.
Maersk Line garnered over 1 million fans on Facebook, 40,000 followers on Twitter, and 22,000 on Instagram.
They also launched and became active on other social media networks such as LinkedIn, Pinterest, and Google+
and created a social media home base for Maersk Line called Maersk Line Social that published articles and
stories about the company in a less formal manner. The case discusses the organizational aspects of the program launch, as well as pressure from the marketing department to better integrate the largely independent
social media operation into the company’s broader marketing efforts. (Keywords: Social Media, Marketing,
Social Networking)
“In social media, people—whether it’s seafarers or CEOs—don’t want third
person narratives that are pushed out…like press releases or TV ads. They expect
a human touch. And if companies have that, and it’s not in a manufactured way,
they will be rewarded big time.”— Jonathan Wichmann, Head of Social Media,
Maersk Line1
I
n October 2013, Copenhagen, Denmark, was starting to feel the fall chill.
Nina Skyum-Nielsen was excited to take on her new role as the head of
social media at the world’s largest container shipping company, Maersk
Line. Even though she had been working full-time on social media as
the Global Community Manager since June 2013, she was still nervous, however,
because she had some big shoes to fill.
Her prior boss and predecessor, 34-year-old Jonathan Wichmann was about
to leave Maersk Line to join advertising agency Wibroe, Duckert & Partners as a
social media consultant. In his brief two years at Maersk Line, Wichmann had
become a social media megastar in the normally low-profile and traditional world
The full case study version of this article is available through the Berkeley-Haas Case Series at http://
cmr.berkeley.edu/berkeley_haas_cases.html.
142
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
VOL. 56, NO. 3
SPRING 2014 CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
of shipping. In fact, he had become known as a
leading expert on social media in general because
he had helped Maersk Line garner over 1 million
fans on Facebook, 40,000 followers on Twitter,
Miklos Sarvary is the Carson Family
Professor of Business and the faculty lead
and 22,000 on Instagram (as a point of comparison,
for the Media Program at Columbia
Danish brewer Carlsberg’s had 1.3 million and
Business School.
Nissan and Visa both had around 1 million, while
Mediterranean Shipping Company, the second
largest container company, and CMA CGM, the third, had just 4,500 and 11,000 fans
respectively).2
Zsolt Katona is an Assistant Professor of
Marketing at the Haas School of Business
at the University of California, Berkeley.
Wichmann had also helped Maersk Line launch and become active on other
social media networks such as LinkedIn, Pinterest, and Google+ to name a few, and
he had created a social media home base for Maersk Line called Maersk Line Social
that published articles and stories about the company in a less formal manner. Most
remarkably Wichmann has achieved all this with a total budget of less than
$100,000.3
In fact, Wichmann (and eventually a few others) was so successful, that in
2012, Maersk Line not only won the Community Presence in social media award
at the 2012 European Digital Communications Awards, but also the prestigious
Social Media Campaign of the Year award. According to the jury, they chose Maersk
Line as the winner because the company had secured an astounding 420,000 fans on
Facebook and a comprehensive presence on 8 other social media platforms in less
than 11 months. “The company’s social media program has changed the face of
Maersk Line and is an example for other B2B companies to follow,” said the jury.4
As Skyum-Nielsen shook Wichmann’s hand at his farewell party, she felt
proud of herself, Wichmann, and Sara Bathsolm (product manager) for putting
Maersk on everyone’s social media radar and of how they were able to accomplish their original mission of bringing Maersk Line closer to its customers. But
she also felt anxious for the future. What should she do next and what should
Maersk Line’s next social media steps be? Of immediate concern was whether
to support Wichmann’s proposal for scaling up the social media group. In the
current proposal, there was a request for three additional persons (five in total)
and a tripling of the total budget. Was this the right resource base for the scaling
up of activities? On top of the proposal, Skyum-Nielsen was also wondering if she
should change Wichmann’s “winning” approach as she felt increasing pressure
from the marketing department to better integrate the largely independent social
media operation into the company’s broader marketing efforts.
Maersk Line Background
Maersk Line was part of Maersk Group, a collection of shipping and energy
companies that also included APM Terminals, Maersk Oil, and Maersk Drilling.
Through these companies and several others, Maersk Group had 121,000 employees
around the world and $59 billion in revenues in 2012. Specifically, Maersk Line had
revenue of $27 billion in 2012 and 25,000 employees across 325 offices in more than
125 countries.
CALIFORNIA MANAGEMENT REVIEW VOL. 56, NO. 3 SPRING 2014
CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
143
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
EXHIBIT 1. Market Share
Company
Market Share
APM-Maersk
Mediterranean Shg Co
CMA CGM Group
Evergreen Line
COSCO Container
Hapag-Lloyd
APL
CSAV Group
Hanjin Shipping
CSCL
Other
15.2%
12.9%
8.3%
4.0%
3.9%
3.9%
3.7%
3.5%
3.3%
3.2%
38.1%
Source: Compiled from public sources.
According to Maersk Group’s website: “As a group, our business success is
built on a number of strengths: our size and global reach, our financial strength,
our talented employees, our time-honored values, our approach to sustainability
and our drive to innovate. Combined, these strengths form a unique platform
for our continued success and future growth.”5
As the world’s largest container shipping company, Maersk Line had 15 to
17 percent of the market share worldwide (Exhibit 1). Maersk Line transported
manufactured goods, perishable commodities, and everything in between. Its vessels made approximately 70,000 port calls annually to its 100,000 customers.6
Maersk Line had 660 owned and chartered container vessels (47 percent
were owned). The average age of Maersk Line containers was less than five years
due to continuous modernization needs.
Approximately 25 percent of the company’s business went to large clients
like Wal-Mart, Nike, and Tesco, 15 percent to key client freight forwarders (middlemen), 50 percent to smaller customers, and 10 percent to other freight forwarders.7
As the industry became increasingly competitive, Maersk Line emphasized
what management believed to be its key competitive advantages of reliability,
simplicity, and focus on the environment.
B2B Social Media Background
Social media is defined as the way in which people interact to create, share,
and/or exchange information and ideas in virtual communities and networks.
Social media is different from traditional/industrial media and advertising in many
ways such as immediacy, permanence, cost, quality, frequency, and reach.
By 2013, many well-known social media platforms existed such as Facebook,
LinkedIn, MySpace, Twitter, YouTube, Flickr, Tumblr, Reddit, Instagram, and more.
The total time spent on social media in the U.S. on PC and mobile devices increased
144
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
VOL. 56, NO. 3
SPRING 2014 CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
37 percent from 2011 to 2012,8 and Nielsen forecasted that Internet users will
continue to spend more time with social media sites than any other sites.
Traditionally, social media was used more widely and often by B2C (businessto-consumer) companies versus B2B (business-to-business) companies. B2C online
communities typically form around brand promotion for products or services. Some
B2C communities allow customers to interact among themselves to achieve a goal,
improve a skill, and so on. But as social media has become increasingly important,
B2B online communities have begun to grow. Such communities can be professional
networks that might contain content and collaboration opportunities around a
shared business experience. In fact, a recent CMO Survey showed that B2B social
media spending increased 9.6 percent in 2012.9
Users and followers of B2B social media include employees of companies,
customers, industry experts, and other general consumers. According to Forrester
Research, such people use social media platforms for both consumption of information/news and interaction. Forrester estimated that 98 percent are “spectators”
(such as those reading blogs and watching videos), 75 percent are also “critics”
(commenting on blogs and posting ratings and reviews), and 56 percent are
“creators” who publish posts and upload media.10
Users interact with different B2B social media platforms in different ways.
Those who use Facebook for business reasons most often connect with people they
know (71 percent). But 57 percent have also liked a brand or a vendor, 51 percent
have clicked on an ad or sponsored post, and 51 percent have posted on a page owned
by a brand or vendor.11 LinkedIn is used to connect with peers or colleagues (among
LinkedIn users, 88 percent have connected with peers or colleagues in the past month
and 40 percent have participated in LinkedIn groups affiliated with a brand or vendor). Twitter is “primarily a consumption channel” where 86 percent of users who
use it for business activities are reading others’ tweets. Many have retweeted what
they have read (58 percent), 55 percent have posted a tweet, 54 percent have
responded to a tweet, and 42 percent have sought support for a product.12
B2B companies face a unique set of challenges when it comes to social
media: “The biggest challenge is that many companies see social media as a cute
promotional activity when it can be a strategic marketing activity,” says Christine
Moorman, director of The CMO Survey and T. Austin Finch senior professor of
business administration at Duke University’s Fuqua School of Business.13 B2B
companies also face other challenges related to social media—because they are
marketing themselves to businesses, many might perceive social media as being
unnecessary or even boring.
B2B companies who have used social media successfully have thought of the
end-users as being consumers or people who can be influenced and/or engaged. Such
companies have recognized that B2B social media can increase brand awareness,
humanize B2B companies, establish companies as thought leaders, and connect with
customers, prospects, and industry influencers, and potentially even increase sales.
Given this diverse landscape, before embarking on Maersk Line’s social
media adventure, Wichmann wanted to learn more about the best B2B social
media practices. He studied the approaches followed by Dell and GE more closely.
CALIFORNIA MANAGEMENT REVIEW VOL. 56, NO. 3 SPRING 2014
CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
145
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
Dell Computers has been touted by many for its successful B2C and B2B
social media efforts and campaigns. The company successfully developed an online
community on Facebook that includes blogs, message boards, news, and open
membership for employee sites around the world. Furthermore, Dell set up its
Social Command Listening Center in Austin, Texas to monitor social media for
mentions of the brand. This gave them the opportunity to resolve customer service
issues over social media with a high success rate of 98 percent. The biggest upside,
however, was the impact on branding: as customer service handled complaints in
public, they turned dissatisfied customers from “demoters” to promoters.
General Electric has also developed a thoughtful, integrated social media
presence that is “informative, professional, and fun,” according to social media
expert Mark Schaefer.14 “GE distinguishes itself as the only leading industrial
company that places an actual face with its social media efforts—Megan Parker
[Corporate Communications Manager]. She effectively mixes press release reporting with 140-character wit. The real hub of the social media wheel is GEreports.
com, a blog-style information center making effective use of videos and searchby-topic capabilities.”15
The Beginning: Getting Buy-In to Explore
Maersk Line’s entry into social media began in the fourth quarter of 2011 with
a team of one person, Wichmann, and without any external agency support.
Eventually, Wichmann had the support of a community manager and a product
manager, but that wasn’t until mid-2013. From October 2011 to July 2012,
Wichmann only worked 50 percent of his time on social media, shifting to full-time
social in July 2012.16
At the beginning, Wichmann was working in the communications department and had some social media experience from another company. When he
first started, he faced skepticism internally and externally: “When I started, as
far as social goes, we were at zero—absolute zero. People would tell me, ‘We’re
not right for social media, we’re boring, no one’s going to like us, and who will
support us?’ A lot of people inside the company as well as outside just didn’t think
it would take.”17 He elaborated: “The general perception at the company at the
time was that social media doesn’t sound right for Maersk because we are boring
and no one will like us. I thought it was a really interesting task because of that
and because it’s a really conservative industry.”18
Developing the social media strategy for Maersk Line, the four areas of emphasis were: communications, customer service, sales, and internal usage. The goal in a
nutshell was to “get closer to our customers”, while understanding the other opportunities to get better press coverage, gain higher employee engagement, develop more
brand awareness, and so forth. He also added: “At first, we didn’t expect to sell shipping containers through social, though we eventually learned that in fact, we can.”19
Maersk Line’s mission was to get closer to customers—customers who, as
head of channel management Mette Hermund Kildahl said, were not that different from B2C customers: “Approachability and personality are our social media
146
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
VOL. 56, NO. 3
SPRING 2014 CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
keywords. While we are a B2B company, our customers are people who just like
in B2C also would like to interact with us.”20
Maersk Line’s approach to social media was unique, according to Wichmann:
“One thing we’ve been very conscious about right from the beginning is the
widespread tendency to think of social media as the sum of a number of digital platforms…and for companies to consider these platforms as ways to push their products
and news to the consumers. Social media is about communication, not marketing.
It’s about engaging, not pushing.”21
When Wichmann started, he put together a social media proposal for the
Maersk management team that focused on recruiting followers and focusing on
customer insight. He had the support of two key people on the management team
and his plans were approved within a week.
Wichmann wanted to avoid what he felt other large companies tended to do
on social media—use a much more “top-down” approach where they “build up a
business case, get it signed off by management, outsource the actual work to agencies,
plan their posts weeks ahead, and get them approved by legal, et cetera.” Instead, he
wanted a spontaneous and flexible approach that allowed him to engage authentically
with his audience. He explained his approach: “We did the opposite. Management
trusted me to handle social media. We’ve taken a more explorative approach and
focused on getting the culture and the organization onboard.”22 Wichmann also
received flexibility from the legal department.
At the beginning, from October 2011 to January 2013, Wichmann focused on
communication and building a presence on the various social media platforms, as
well as beginning work on a social media study that included a budget for 2014.
From January 2013 on, the team focused on communications, customer service,
sales, and internal usage.
Launching on Facebook
Telling Stories from the Inside
A natural choice for B2C marketers is to first establish their social media presence on Facebook. But B2B is different and the typical route is to focus on blogs, and
to reach professionals on LinkedIn or sometimes on Google+. However, Wichmann
decided to start with Facebook: “We had a big impact on Facebook early on and that’s
where we got all the attention,” he said.23 Initially, he posted a few “boring posts” but
then he discovered Maersk Line’s digital archive with 14,000 photos of ships,
seascapes, and ports, which no one had been using. “I knew that I could share them
and add stories to them,” he said. “That rich history was something I could share that
was unique to Maersk.”24
Beginning in September 2011, Wichmann began putting these photos online
on Facebook under different categories. For example, on September 17, 2011, he
put 42 photos in a post simply called, “Vessels”. People started liking the photos with
comments like “Amazing” or “Big Blue Beuts”. He posted other photos under the titles
“Containers”, “Terminals”, and “History” (black and white photos).
Such photos were interspersed with other posts like, “Maersk Line surge
ahead with a best ever on- time reliability percentage of 82.9% in Q3, according
CALIFORNIA MANAGEMENT REVIEW VOL. 56, NO. 3 SPRING 2014
CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
147
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
to newly released Drewry report on schedule reliability.” And other posts like
“Production on ‘Maersk Alabama’ starring Tom Hanks will begin 13 February
and continue through May, according to state film officials.” Between such posts,
more photos were added under headers like “Management”, which included
photos of the management team in all types of settings. Wichmann continued
to focus on history with photos of the prior CEO, Eivind Kolding.
Often these early Maersk Line posts were professional, but had a whimsical
touch such as one post with a photo of a giraffe on a containership and the text: “A
giraffe on a containership… Read the story of Karaka the giraffe and her journey from
Melbourne to Auckland onboard Maersk Aberdeen: http://on.fb.me/uJmHDy.”
Early on, Wichmann leveraged the public and users who loved to take
photos of Maersk ships around the world. As one example, Wichmann posted a
photo of a Maersk ship in San Francisco along with the commentary: “A Maersk
Line vessel passing under the Golden Gate Bridge just recently. Thank you to
John Sessions who was so kind to email the photo to us!” On such “container
spotters”, Kavs Valskov, Director of Communications said: “They love Maersk
containers. They take photos of them and upload them on the internet. We knew
this phenomenon existed…so we thought, ‘why don’t we do it ourselves?’”25
Once in a while, posts were polls about the users themselves with an early
poll in December 2011 that asked users to pick a category (e.g., “I’m a Maersk Line
customer”, “I’m not a Maersk Line customer, yet”, “I’m a shipping professional”,
and “I’m a shipping enthusiast”). At that point, according to the poll, most of the
followers were customers, but there were a fair amount of shipping enthusiasts
and many in the “Other” category.
In the first 11 months, Maersk Line attracted more than 400,000 people to
their Facebook page. Many of the “Likes” were from employees. This was part of
Wichmann’s strategy to onboard the company’s 25,000 employees so that they
could be leveraged to help achieve virality to their own friends. Valskov said:
“Seven thousand of Maersk Line’s 25,000 employees are seafarers and Facebook
has become an important channel for them to connect with colleagues, people
at home, and follow what the company is up to. They are proud to be sailing
on our big blue ships and love to tell people about it. They publish tons of pictures
from their everyday work including pirates coming close in the Bay of Aden or
dramatic pictures from the bridge in heavy weather at deep sea.”26
Users and fans on Maersk Line’s Facebook page included NGOs, Maersk
Line employees and potential employees, competition, suppliers, regulatory bodies, and shipping enthusiasts and fans. Valskov said that Maersk Line’s Facebook
page had a “surprisingly large crowd of shipping nerds and enthusiasts.”27 Around
15 to 17 percent of Facebook’s fans were estimated to be customers.28
Wichmann said of lessons from these early days: “Don’t manufacture stories
from the inside but just tell the stories of who you are.”29 He also said: “We learned
that at least in our case, companies sometimes don’t even realize who they are, or
who they aren’t—for years we thought we were boring, so we helped convey to
the world the idea that we are boring. But we’re not.”30 His social media strategy
focused on the end user: “So the focus for companies in social media has to be on
148
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
VOL. 56, NO. 3
SPRING 2014 CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
the end user. ‘Will they find this interesting? Will they even share it?’ If not, we
shouldn’t share it…. Of course, that’s not the truth entirely. It also has to be relevant
for us. For a company to share something it has to be about the company—or at least
related to the company somehow. It has to be relevant to both parties.”31
Telling All Stories, Even Negative Ones
But telling stories didn’t mean just telling the positive ones. On June 8, 2012,
Maersk Line posted on Facebook: “Maersk Norwich Whale Strike” and explained
how one of Maersk’s ships had inadvertently struck a whale: “Maersk Line does
everything it can to avoid creating a negative impact on the marine environment.
Despite these efforts, on Wednesday June 6, we saw images of a 12 meter long whale
caught on the bulbous bow of the Maersk Norwich. This image, of a noble and elegant
creature accidentally struck down by a Maersk Line vessel deeply affected us all.”
The response from posters was mostly positive and this post’s “Like” to
“Share” ratio was 1:1 versus the more typical 1:10 in social media. “Usually in this
industry when something happens like that, people try to hide it,” said Wichmann.32 Maersk Line’s post included a Q&A of questions they asked themselves
after the occurrence. Some of the questions were, “What happened after the
whale arrived in port” (a zoologist was called in to examine the whale and determined that the whale was likely dead before the ship hit it); “What do we do in
general to avoid striking whales?”; and others. Wichmann also created a board
on Pinterest called “In Memory of the Maersk Norwich Whale.”
Wichmann felt strongly about authenticity: “It is about not making false
pictures of who you are. That is where the crises occur, when suddenly there is
a hole in the image you have created. Then you see the ugly reality.”33 He added:
“We are already broadcasters in our own right. And in the bigger scheme of
things: we’ve gained influence and control by losing it (as some would term it),
through social media.”34
Wichmann continued to tell moving stories on Facebook too. On September 3,
2012, Maersk Line published a story of Clara Maersk and the rescue at sea of
3,628 Vietnamese fugitives in 1975 with a newly rediscovered and edited video with
footage from the vessel’s arrival in Hong Kong and an interview with Captain Anton
Olsen. Stories like these continued to generate great interest from Facebook fans and
the story was accessed over 839 times, liked by 2,289 fans, shared 34 times, and
received 123 comments.35
The story also received emails and responses from the fugitives themselves
such as the son of the captain of the sinking Truong Xuan ship: “It was a great pleasure for me to hear Captain Olsen’s voice. I wish that I had had an opportunity to
meet Captain Olsen to express my thanks for saving my family and the people on
the Truong Xuan ship. Now seeing him and hearing his voice through this video,
tears rolling down my cheeks, I feel like my wish has been fulfilled.”36
Different Platforms, Different Strategies
While actively posting on Facebook, Wichmann began launching Maersk Line
on other social media platforms such as LinkedIn and Twitter. By the fall of 2013,
CALIFORNIA MANAGEMENT REVIEW VOL. 56, NO. 3 SPRING 2014
CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
149
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
Maersk Line was live on 10 different social media platforms (Facebook, Twitter,
Google+, LinkedIn, Instagram, Vimeo, Flickr, Pinterest, Tumblr, and Instagram).
In general, the company used Facebook to engage with followers in a very
visual and conversational way, Twitter as a news outlet (initially), and LinkedIn as
a platform to reach its customers.37 Wichmann ranked their social media channels
from least to most “corporate” and segmented them into four quadrants (fans,
customers, employees, and experts).
The company also had its own social media hub called Maersk Line Social in
order to have a place to post more extensive stories, a place they could call their
own, and a site where they would have more control over social media. On Maersk
Line Social, followers were more hardcore and comments were very specific. The
medium also allowed the company to post instantaneous information and news.
In 2012, Wichmann conducted a survey with Maersk Line’s customers and
non-customers to better understand how they wanted to interact with Maersk’s
different social media platforms. “We want to have a very different approach to
each and every one,” said Wichmann. “There are often very different people on
different platforms. On LinkedIn, we learned that this is where customers want
to interact with us. They want industry news, service updates (but that’s a local
thing which we’re not doing right now), and they want to have discussions with
us and even co-create products with us.”38
In 2013, Wichmann said: “We’re still on Facebook at the same levels but
moving more towards Twitter and LinkedIn. In many ways, the audiences are
closer to our main target group as a business (LinkedIn). Instagram has been a
story of success for us because it’s a very visual company. Google+ we’re still
struggling with how to use it and the same for Pinterest.”39
Twitter
Maersk Line’s Twitter page had over 81,000 followers by the fall of 2013,
and only followed around 370 users. The Twitter posts were a mix of more serious
news than the Facebook page (retweets from Maersk employees, photos, and
other bits) and were posted three to five times per day on average.
According to the company: “The main purpose of our presence on Twitter
is to share our news with—and thereby influence—the industry, to humanize the
brand, and to interact publicly with our various stakeholders. Also, we plan to use
it for support, and it is an important tool in our ambition to position selected
employees as thought leaders.”40
Initially, Maersk Line’s Twitter use was for more corporate messages, but after
“rediscovering” Google+ and LinkedIn for the most corporate messages, the team
planned to have a “more human approach on Twitter, where we share a variety of content, from hardcore shipping news to photos of sea lions resting on the bulbous bow.”41
Maersk Line’s Twitter audience included the trade press, shipping professionals, customers, and employees and “mostly people from the U.S. and U.K., whose
average income is twice as high as [Maersk Line’s audience] on Facebook.”42
Maersk Line viewed Twitter as a more “influential network”, citing that the Twitter
user is 10 times more influential than an average Facebook user.
150
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
VOL. 56, NO. 3
SPRING 2014 CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
Tweeters included a panel of 10 employees such as the chief commercial
officer, a captain, head of anti-piracy, and several business managers. According
to Valskov, initially, these 10 people were given advice on whom to follow,
how often to tweet, and how to make tweets sound “interesting and less
corporate.”43
LinkedIn
Maersk Line viewed its LinkedIn account as its most corporate platform
and “it’s also the platform that our customers have told us that they would like
to follow us the most,” according to the 2012 survey mentioned above.44
By 2013, the company had 48,000 followers on LinkedIn, of which most
were customers. The company cited data such as LinkedIn users earned twice as
much as Twitter users, and four times as much as Facebook users.45
The company used its LinkedIn account to share business-related news and
to interact with customers in its groups or forums. Although LinkedIn users could
also be Maersk Line’s employees or potential employees, the company consciously
targeted customers as a natural extension of its brand.
Examples of specific content included a post from CNN related to the industry
or an article about the company’s expansion, as well as local content from Facebook
posts or local Twitter accounts. The tone of voice was “more corporate, but still not
robotic.”46 The LinkedIn page also had several tabs, of which one easily accessible
one was “Products & Services”.
The main purpose of Maersk Line’s LinkedIn presence was to “tie our customers closer to us. To ensure that they know what we have to offer and understand our
reasoning for e.g. hiking the rates. But also to listen to them and discuss with them.
Not just to seem like we’re listening, but also in order to improve our products and
services,” according to Wichmann.47
Eventually, Wichmann created groups to engage with customers such as
The Shipping Circle group in January 2012 and The Reefer Circle Group in August
2012 where users required approval to join. The groups were shipping experts
around the world who debated industry challenges and opportunities.
On the Daily Maersk Group that shipped cargo from Asia to Europe, Valskov
said: “We know which customers are using that, we have their email addresses. We
have invited them to be part of this group because we want to be able to monitor
what they say and spot trends. A vibrant conversation with our customers can tell
us much more than a survey.”48
Instagram and Flickr
Instagram was a key piece of Maersk’s social media puzzle. Originally, Wichmann and Maersk started using Instagram because it was a “fun app” and they had a
lot of photos they wanted to share while using the retro filters available on Instagram
to make the photos look older or classic. “Later on, we realized that there was more
to it than that—by inspiring people around the world to take photos of our hardware
(i.e. vessels and containers) using the #maersk hashtag, we tapped into the most publicly visible side of the company,” said Wichmann.49 By the fall of 2013, the company
CALIFORNIA MANAGEMENT REVIEW VOL. 56, NO. 3 SPRING 2014
CMR.BERKELEY.EDU
151
Maersk Line: B2B Social Media—“It’s Communication, Not Marketing”
had 24,000 followers on Instagram and Maersk Line was one of the strongest brands
on the photo platform.
On Instagram container spotters, Wichmann said: “It’s quite interesting how
many people are interested in things like these. We just started using #maersk, and
it just happened naturally, [people would say] we saw one of your containers and
they would send in photos of a specific container with a photo with a filter and sometimes those photos are really good.”50
Wichmann also said: “But does that translate into more containers being
booked? No, not necessarily. And certainly not right here and now. Instead, it gives
us brand recognition and engagement. It’s a way to keep our products and services
both top-of-mind and talk of the town. And achieving that will undoubtedly affect
the bottom line positively—at some point in the future.”51
In terms of Flickr, Maersk Line used it for its functionalities versus building a
community. The company uploaded hi-res photos and grouped them into different
categories. For example, they sent external press requests for photos of the CEO
directly to a link on Flickr.
Google+
The company used Google+, a late
Please avoid plagiarism and direct copying. Write in your own style and follow the instructions in the file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Please refer to attached for details. Require MS Project Software and require to send me MS project file. Please answer only Question 1 ,2 & 3. Requires One thousand words
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Deadline: 12/11/2023@ 23:59
Course Name: Auditing Principles and Procedures
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:1445 H/ 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained
/Out of 15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
IInIIiiiAREFULLY
INSTRUCTIONS:
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Q1. Inventory management in corporations identifies management’s practices, investigate
efficient and effective inventory management approaches, and efficient and effective
inventory management practices, which are key points for an auditor to ensure evidences
for an opinion in the audit report on inventory.
Imagine that you are an auditor of a corporation in KSA and answer the following:
a. Bring out the inventory management process you would follow to check efficient
and effective inventory management practices in the corporation.
b. List done the important functions with examples in the inventory management
process.
c. Explain the audit tests you would cover with related assertions to get assured
evidences
d. Conclude your testing on likely and tolerable misstatements allocated to the
inventory account (Chapter 13)
Answer (5Marks)
Q2. What are the control purposes and management assertions supported by bank
reconciliations? (Chapter 16)
Answer (3 Mark)
Q3. The standard unqualified report is issued when the auditor has gathered sufficient
evidence, the audit has been performed in accordance with PCAOB standards, and the
financial statements conform to GAAP.
Required:
Take an example of a corporation from KSA and explain the important elements necessary
for a standard unqualified report issued by an auditor in reporting of financial statements.
Give examples on each element. (Chapter 18)
Answer (4 Mark)
Q4. Briefly explain Assurance Services, Attest services and Trust Services. (Chapter 21)
Answer (3 Mark)
With so many options available, I want you to pick which method you consider to be your favorite. Give me three positive aspects of this method – they must be part of the reason why it is your favorite training method. Come up with the ideal job training situation (yes, make it up) where your method would best be suited. Convince me, your employer, to allow you to use this method in an upcoming training seminar.You are to create a 1-2 page memo to present your case. Make sure it is clear which method you chose, your three positive aspects, and what type of job you would like this training to be connected to in a seminar.
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10) [20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools, procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that field)?
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks? (provide pictures)
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible tool?
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the team meetings at different times)
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
How did you create a virtual office?
oWhat are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
oGive some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
oSpecify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication process.
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and how customers (target audience) can be reached.
oThe report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in Arabic, translate them).
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the report (one or two comments)
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in the future.
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score. It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template is not used.
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your answer will not be valid.
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
Use the footer function to insert page number.
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing, and format.
Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
I have most of the outline and the annotated bibliography example done I just need help writing the essay and putting the annotated bibliography in the right format in the essay
Topic: Customer Service and Differentiation in the Medical Industry: A Case Study on the Mayo Clinic
Instructions:
Read the “Marketing Excellence” case study on the Mayo Clinic in your textbook, located on page 426.
Address the following questions from your own perspective:a) Explain why the Mayo Clinic is exceptional at customer service. What are the key differentiating points from other hospitals or medical facilities?b) Is there a conflict between wanting to make your patient happy and providing the best medical care possible? Why or why not?
Requirements:
Your initial post should be a minimum of 200 words.
Use research to support your argument. Cite your sources appropriately.
This discussion question is designed to make you think critically about customer service within the healthcare industry and how marketing strategies can impact patient satisfaction and medical care quality. Please make sure to back up your statements with evidence, as that will strengthen your argument and enrich our class discussion.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Read the discussion question at the end of Chapter 5 regarding the standard of proof in criminal cases. Is a “beyond a reasonable doubt standard” too high in a criminal prosecution? Does it allow too many defendants to get “off”? Why is this criminal standard so high? Write a paper (minimum 500 words) in which you take a position on this question and defend your position.
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
9.1: Bond Valuation
Calculate the value of bond that matures in 8 years and 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required
DATA
Years
Face value
PMT
Rate
Problem 9.2: Yield to Maturity
A bond’s market price is 950 SAR. It has a 1000 par value, will be mature in 10 years, and the coupon rate 8 percent annually.
is the bond’s yield to maturity? What happens to the bond’s yield to maturity if the bond matures in 17 years? What is matur
years?
Problem 9.3: Bond Valuation w/Semiannual Coupon Payment
A bond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required yield to maturity is 1
What would be the value of this bond if it pays the coupon payment semiannually?
Problem 9.4: Bond Valuation w/Zero Coupon Payment
A zero coupon bond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The market’s required yield to maturity is 10.5%. What w
be the value of this bond?
9:5: Bondholder’s Expected Rate of Return
A bond matures in 17 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 11% and the market price is 1500 SAR. What woul
the expected rate of this bond?
9.1: Bond Valuation
ate the value of bond that matures in 8 years and 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required yield
8
1000
60
10%
Problem 9.2: Yield to Maturity
d’s market price is 950 SAR. It has a 1000 par value, will be mature in 10 years, and the coupon rate 8 percent annually. What
bond’s yield to maturity? What happens to the bond’s yield to maturity if the bond matures in 17 years? What is mature in 6
years?
Problem 9.3: Bond Valuation w/Semiannual Coupon Payment
ond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required yield to maturity is 14%.
What would be the value of this bond if it pays the coupon payment semiannually?
Problem 9.4: Bond Valuation w/Zero Coupon Payment
o coupon bond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The market’s required yield to maturity is 10.5%. What would
be the value of this bond?
9:5: Bondholder’s Expected Rate of Return
ond matures in 17 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 11% and the market price is 1500 SAR. What would be
the expected rate of this bond?
9.1: Bond Valuation
Calculate the value of bond that matures in 8 years and 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s
required yield to maturity is 10%.
DATA
Years
Face value
PMT
Rate
Answer 9.1
Face Value of Bond
No of Years
Yield to Maturity
Coupon Rate
Annual Coupon Payment (Face Value * Coupon Rate)
Maturity Value of Bond (assumed to be Face Value)
Value of the Bond
Problem 9.2: Yield to Maturity
A bond’s market price is 950 SAR. It has a 1000 par value, will be mature in 10 years, and the coupon rate 8 percent
annually. What is the bond’s yield to maturity? What happens to the bond’s yield to maturity if the bond matures in
17 years? What is mature in 6 years?
Answer 9.2
a.
b.
c.
a. 10 Years
b. 17 Years
c. 6 Years
Problem 9.3: Bond Valuation w/Semiannual Coupon Payment
A bond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required yield to
maturity is 14%. What would be the value of this bond if it pays the coupon payment semiannually?
Answer 9.3
Where,
rate
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = The Value of This Bond
fv = Face Value
Where,
rate
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = The Value of This Bond
fv = Face Value
The Value of This Bond
Annully
Semiannully
Problem 9.4: Bond Valuation w/Zero Coupon Payment
A zero coupon bond matures in 15 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The market’s required yield to maturity is
10.5%. What would be the value of this bond?
Answer 9.4
rate
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = Value of This Bond
fv = Face Value
The Value of This Bond
9:5: Bondholder’s Expected Rate of Return
A bond matures in 17 years with 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 11% and the market price is 1500 SAR.
What would be the expected rate of this bond?
Answer 9.5
rate
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = Value of This Bond
fv = Face Value
The Expected Rate of This Bond
: Bond Valuation
and 1,000 SAR par value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s
yield to maturity is 10%.
8
1000
60
10%
1000
nper
rate
8
10%
6%
SAR 60
SAR 1,000
pmt
fv
SAR 786.60295
m 9.2: Yield to Maturity
ar value, will be mature in 10 years, and the coupon rate 8 percent
hat happens to the bond’s yield to maturity if the bond matures in
What is mature in 6 years?
Yield To Maturity
Where,
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = Bond’s Market Price
fv = Face Value
Yield To Maturity
Where,
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = Bond’s Market Price
RATE(nper,pmt,pv,fv)
8.77127%
10
SAR 80
-SAR 950
SAR 1,000
RATE(nper,pmt,pv,fv)
8.56913%
17
SAR 80
-SAR 950
fv = Face Value
SAR 1,000
YTM is decreased
Yield To Maturity
RATE(nper,pmt,pv,fv)
9.11854%
Where,
nper = Number of Period
pmt = Coupon Payment
pv = Bond’s Market Price
fv = Face Value
6
SAR 80
-SAR 950
SAR 1,000
YTM is increased
8.77127%
8.56913%
9.11854%
Decreased
Increased
uation w/Semiannual Coupon Payment
value. The coupon rate is 6% and the market’s required yield to
of this bond if it pays the coupon payment semiannually?
Annully
14%
15
SAR 60
SAR 508.62656
SAR 1,000
Semiannully
7%
30
SAR 30
SAR 503.63835
SAR 1,000
SAR 508.62656
SAR 503.63835
Valuation w/Zero Coupon Payment
1000*6% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
14%/2
15*2
1000*(6/2)% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate/2 )
1,000 SAR par value. The market’s required yield to maturity is
ould be the value of this bond?
10.5%
15
SAR 0
SAR 223.64842
SAR 1,000
1000*0% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
SAR 223.64842
er’s Expected Rate of Return
value. The coupon rate is 11% and the market price is 1500 SAR.
the expected rate of this bond?
6.16943%
17
SAR 110
-SAR 1,500
SAR 1,000
6.16943%
1000*11% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
1000*8% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
1000*8% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
1000*8% or ( 1000*Coupon Rate )
Hello, I’m happy to contact you. I want you to help me solve this assignment, and here are some conditions that I would like to follow, and there are more in the attached file that has all the questions to be solved.
The Assignment must be submitted on (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Student must mention question number clearly in their answer, Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures cont aining text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Note:
• You must include at least 5 references.
• Format your references using APA style.
• Each answer must not be less than 300 words
I hope you to follow the previous conditions with high accuracy and be careful. Thank you in advance, I will gladly wait for the file of the solution, I am confident in my choice for you, as I trust in your solution and your effort as well.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud alJohnai
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Fill out the Draft for. using, ” investigating gen z attitude considering the influence of social media personas in relation to luxury brands (UK) that approach diversity in their marketing campaign.” as a proposed title for the research. Fill out all other sections and set objectives.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Ethical review form for student research in the Business
School (Form E1)
Students and staff are required to observe the highest ethical standards when undertaking
research, and must comply with the University’s code of practice available here:
https://www.brookes.ac.uk/Documents/Research/Policies-and-codes-ofpractice/ethics_codeofpractice/
The checklist below is intended to help you reflect on possible issues of ethical concern arising
from your proposed programme of research. Guidance on informed consent is here:
https://www.brookes.ac.uk/Research/Research-ethics/Review/Guidelines-for-informed-consent/.
For student templates of these forms, please see: https://www.brookes.ac.uk/Research/Researchethics/Forms-and-templates/UG-Masters/
After completing this Form E1, if your supervisor believes that the research needs full ethics
approval, please complete Form E2 and send to the Faculty Research Ethics Officer Dr Karen
Handley (khandley@brookes.ac.uk). Form E2 (for Business School) is available at:
https://www.brookes.ac.uk/Research/Research-ethics/Forms-and-templates/UG-Masters/
One copy of this signed form must be included in the final submission of the research project.
1. Working title of proposed research:
Role of celebrity influencers on GEN Z on luxury brands
investigating gen z attitude considering the influence of social media personas in relation
to luxury brands (UK) that approach diversity in their marketing campaign.
(influencer marketing on gen z)
2. Research objectives:
3. Who are your proposed research participants?
Gen Z
4. How do you intend to gather data from these participants?
Through interviews.
5. Does your proposed research involve any of the following:
●
●
●
●
●
Deception of participants?
Financial inducements?
Possible psychological stress?
Access to confidential information?
Any other special circumstances?
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
Yes/No
6. If you have answered “yes” to any questions in section 5, how will you deal with these issues?
Signatures:
I confirm that I have read and understood the University Code of Practice on research involving
human participants
Name and signature of student:
Faisal Al Thani
Name of Seminar Leader:
Junior
Coursework Brief
Summary information
Type of assessment:
Individual or group:
Component weighting:
Learning outcomes
assessed
Submission date:
Feedback date:
Report
Individual
Contributes 100% of the total module grade
1-7
Wednesday, 13 December 2023 by 13:00
Following results release day
Assessment instructions
Before you can start collecting your qualitative data, you MUST obtain a pass on your
Ethics Template submission.
Ethics Template Submission
•
•
•
Oxford Brookes University requires you to adhere to some strict guidelines when
collecting data from human participants for research, please ensure that you
familiarise yourself with the guidelines stated in the University Code of Practice for
Research Ethics for Research Involving Human Participants.
You must also submit a completed ethics template available on Moodle which
consists of an E1 Form, Participant information sheet, consent form and data
privacy notice (all combined in one single word document). You cannot start
collecting data/ pass the module unless you comply with the Oxford Brookes
Ethics policy and the ethics template has been uploaded and approved.
If you do not submit your Ethics Template, you cannot collect data and therefore
your assignment will be incomplete and you will fail the assignment. Please note
that while this template does not carry marks, it is still a requirement as it will enable
you to collect data from human participants. In line with the university ethics
policy, you cannot pass the module unless you have submitted your
completed ethics template AND it has been approved.
Please note that you will have one of the following outcomes on the submission of your
ethics template:
1)
Approved: You can start collecting data. IF you receive 100.
2)
Approved with comments: Read and address your feedback before you can
start collecting data. IF you receive 40.
3)
Resubmit: Major changes need to be made, resubmit your ethics template by
Tuesday, 7 November 2023 by 13:00. IF you receive 0.
If you do not submit your Ethics Template and obtain an approval, you
cannot collect data and therefore your assignment will be incomplete and you will
fail the assignment.
For this module, please do not collect data from underage/minor participants. You can
clarify this in your Research Ethics Template by identifying the minimum age range of
your Gen Zer participants.
Final Report (3,000 words)
You are to conduct a qualitative study to address the following aim:
“Critically evaluate and research the attitudes of Generation Z towards
[insert ONE issue of Equality, Diversity, and/or Inclusivity in marketing
practice] and explore these in a qualitative study in a country of your
choice”*
*Note: this is not necessarily the title of your report – you can adjust it
accordingly to reflect your study better
Your task:
There are many contemporary issues that marketers and consumers face. For this
module, we will focus on many contemporary issues that the face in dealing with the
concept of Equality, Diversity, and Inclusion.
For this assessment, you are required to add to existing research in attitudes of
generation Z by exploring and evaluating the specific topic related to contemporary
issues in marketing. For this module, we specifically want you to cover the topic of
consumer behaviours towards the issue and practice of Equality, Diversity, and/or
Inclusivity (EDI). It is important that there is a link between the EDI topic and marketing at the very fundamental level, you need to evaluate consumer (Gen Zer) behaviour.
There is plenty of research on issues in EDI. You are therefore required to narrow down
by choosing ONE category and ONE country (the UK, or other countries if you have
better access to Gen Zer from that particular country) to focus on. Here are some
examples for you to think about
•
•
•
Pink washing
Gender equality in marketing/advertising
Inclusivity/diversity in advertising (race, able-ism, gender, sexual orientation)
You are then required to carry out a qualitative study which includes only ONE of the
following methodological approaches:
Data collection method
Interviews
Number
6-8 participants
Focus Groups
2 focus groups (Min. 3
participants in each)
Duration
Min. 30
minutes/interview
Min. 45 minutes/focus
group
For your final report, you are required to prepare an original paper, which has the
following structure:
•
Introduction
•
Review of Relating Literature
•
Data Collection
•
Findings & Discussion
•
Conclusion
•
References
•
Appendices
Important note: In your appendices, you are required to add the following:
•
•
•
•
A profile of your participants
Your interview/focus group questions
ONE transcript of your data collection method (either just ONE Interview OR Focus
Group, fully translated (if not in English) and transcribed)
ONE E1 form, Participant Information sheet, unfilled consent form and data privacy
notice. Note: these need to be the final forms you used for your participants after
ethics approval, however, they shouldn’t show either your or your participants’ name.
Details for each of the sections follow:
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction: Give an introduction. Identify the topic and the boundaries of your
study. State why this topic is important for marketers and potentially what issues
there are. Present the purpose of your study clearly. (approx. 200 words)
Review of relating literature: Review the relating literature. Describe and
explain aspects of the given topic using frameworks and theories from your
reading. Remember to have an appropriate and broad range of references.
Clearly state the recent problems/issues in this section, as identified by the
literature. Critical views are encouraged – please see the assessment criteria on
pages 8-9 (approx. 1000 words).
Data collection: Using theory explains and justify how you collected date
employing your chosen method, for example that your participants were and how
you approached them and why that was appropriate and ethical. Include details
such as when, where and how they took place, how long did they last, and how
you got the data (approx. 300 words)
Findings & Discussion: Present your findings here. Look at your data from the
interviews or focus groups and analyse if there are any patterns or themes
emerging. What are these themes/topics and how did you infer them? Once
findings are presented, discuss what your interpretation of what they mean. A
good discussion will draw on the literature you have reviewed and state how your
findings are similar, different, or novel. (approx. 1200 words)
Conclusion: Highlight your key findings and implications (for marketing
practitioners and academics) from your study. (approx. 300 words)
Examples of theories that you can apply to your report. Please use at your own
discretion. This is not the exhaustive list – as you read more, you will find out others that
are relevant to your mini project:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Institutional theory
Signalling theory
Subjective social inclusion
Optimal distinctiveness theory
Pink marketing
Cultural intelligence frameworks
Global mindedness and intercultural proficiencies
Sexual stigma
Examples of Gen Zer’s attitudes to evaluate
•
Purchase intention
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brand image
Brand loyalty
Trust
Consumer identity
Brand switching behaviours
Brand’s virtue signaling
Authenticity
Presenting coursework for assessment
Your assignment when submitted should not include your name – we use a system of
anonymous marking to reduce the risk of any unconscious bias. For some authentic
assessments, there may be an exception to this, so please confirm with your Module
Leader.
The length of an assignment is limited to 3,000 words to contribute towards the
development of writing skills and to ensure all work is assessed equitably. We therefore
require you to complete your assignments within the number of words specified in the
assignment brief.
You will need to think carefully about how best to explain your case within the permitted
number of words, using, for example, an appropriate mix of text, drawings, diagrams
and tables, supplemented by information contained in appendices.
Please also remember that a report can be enhanced or damaged through layout,
tables, graphs and charts, including the results of primary data collection should be
included in the body of the text to aid the flow of discussion. Decisions therefore need to
be made about the most appropriate place to use tables etc., to support your case.
The specified 3,000-word count refers to the main body of the report and includes
headings, charts, tables, and in-text citations. It does not include a front cover, title page,
contents page, reference list or appendices.
The authentic and essential requirements for this piece of assessed work are;
•
Presented in Arial font size 12 and double spaced
•
The document should be written in the 3rd person voice
•
Black text on a white background
•
All pages must be numbered
•
Report format i.e. heading and sub-headings should be used
•
Please note: a full list of references, presented in Harvard style, is a requirement.
ALL sources that you use should be cited in the body text of your report and at
the end of the report there should be a full list, in alphabetical order, of all
references that have been cited. Check the library’s referencing guide if you are
in any doubt
Assignment length / equivalent
Whilst we acknowledge that learners will prepare and produce assessments in different
ways and at different paces, an indication as to how much time it will take you to
prepare, produce, edit and submit this assessment is detailed below.
Words that exceed the maximum allowed will not be marked. This is a strict 3000word limit.
The specified 3,000-word count refers to the main body of the report and does include
headings, charts, tables, and in-text citations. It does not include front cover, title page,
contents page, reference list, or appendices.
(** There is no plus or minus 10% **)
Words that exceed the maximum allowed will not be marked. If in doubt, you should
discuss this with the Module Leader before submission.
Use of Turnitin
The new Turnitin policy effective from September 2022 can be found via this link. You
are expected to be familiar with it. It is important to know that the reference list and
quotations are included in the overall similarity report, and that these matches are
expected and not problematic.
For more information on how to interpret your similarity index report, please refer to this
link.
Submission instructions
•
•
Ethics template submission will include four components all combined in one
single document (find the deadlines in Section 3 – Key dates):
•
E1 Form
•
Participant information sheet
•
Consent form
•
Data privacy notice
Your final report must be uploaded to the dropbox in Moodle by 1300 hours on
Wednesday, 13 December 2023.
For electronic submission: Give the file(s) which you intend to upload a name which
begins with your student number. For example ‘12345678_CIMM_MARK6002’
Please do not include your own name anywhere in the file name (or in the assessment
itself).
If you are entitled to an ISP extension or exceptional circumstances request please
submit to the same dropbox.
IMPORTANT – It is YOUR responsibility to ensure that you upload the correct file
to Turnitin; that it is not corrupt; and that it can be opened and read on Brookes
systems. Please take particular care if you use Apple computers to prepare your
work – for example Turnitin does not fully accept .pages format files.
Assessment criteria rubric CW1 (100%)
Assess
ment
Criteria
Adherence
to the
ethics
policy
(LO6)
The failure
to submit
and get an
approval
for your
ethics
template
Outstan
ding
Excelle
nt
Very
Good
85-100%
70-85%
60-69%
Good
50-59%
Ethics template approved
Thresh
old
Pass
40-49%
Margina
l Refer
30-39%
Refer
0-29%
No ethics
template
submitted at
all;
No approval for
(re)submitted
ethics template
before data
collection
will result
in you
failing the
module as
you
cannot
collect
data and
complete
your
report
without it.
Understand
ing the
issues and
critical
review of
literature
(LO1, LO2)
Methodolo
gy (LO4,
LO5)
Exemplary
critical
appreciatio
n and
understand
ing of the
theory and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
manageme
nt and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstrat
ed by the
focus on
the given
contempor
ary issue
Excellent
critical
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstra
ted by the
focus on
the given
contempor
ary issue
Very good
critical
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstra
ted by the
focus on
the given
contempor
ary issue
Competen
t
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstra
ted by the
focus on
the given
contempor
ary issue
Limited or
flawed
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstra
ted by the
focus on
the given
contempor
ary issue
Exemplary
application
of
qualitative
research
tools
designed to
gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developme
nts for the
given
contempor
ary issue.
Methodolo
Excellent
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempor
ary issue.
Methodolo
Good
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempor
ary issue
Methodolo
Competen
t
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempor
ary issue
Limited or
flawed
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempor
ary issue
Inadequat
e and
flawed
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstr
ated by
the focus
on the
given
contempo
rary issue
Inadequat
e and
flawed
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempo
No
evidence
of
appreciati
on and
understan
ding of the
theory
and
concepts
underpinni
ng current
marketing
managem
ent and its
on-going
evolution
as
demonstr
ated by
the focus
on the
given
contempo
rary issue
No
evidence
of
applicatio
n of
qualitative
research
tools
designed
to gain indepth
insights
into the
current
theoretical
developm
ents for
the given
contempo
gy fully
justified
gy fully
justified
gy justified
Some
justificatio
n of
methodolo
gy
Limited
justificatio
n of
methodolo
gy
Research
evidence
and
findings,
and its
critical
enquiry
(LO5)
Exemplary
use of
research
evidence
and critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantiat
e and
where
necessary
refute
arguments
from
current
theoretical
developme
nts in the
marketing
manageme
nt
discipline
Excellent
use of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
arguments
from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Good use
of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
arguments
from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Competen
t use of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
arguments
from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Limited or
flawed
use of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
arguments
from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Presentatio
n of the
report
(LO6, LO7)
Excellent,
engaging,
and
professiona
lly
presented
fully
integrated
paper with
no spelling
/
grammatic
al errors;
excellent
use of
illustrations
, figures,
tables and
appendices
; uses
consistent
referencing
and
reference
list
Profession
ally
presented
fully
integrated
paper with
few/no
spelling /
grammatic
al errors;
appropriat
e use of
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s; uses
consistent
referencin
g and
reference
list
complete.
Structure
is
Wellpresented
well
integrated
paper with
few
spelling /
grammatic
al errors;
appropriat
e use of
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s; uses
consistent
referencin
g and
reference
list
complete.
Structure
is
appropriat
Acceptabl
y
presented
integrated
paper with
few
spelling /
grammatic
al errors;
largely
appropriat
e use of
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s; uses
consistent
referencin
g and
reference
list
complete.
Structure
is largely
Poorly
presented
or poorly
integrated
paper that
would
benefit
from
proofreading;
some use
of
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s but not
always
appropriat
e;
referencin
g
inconsiste
nt and
reference
rary issue
No
justificatio
n of
methodolo
gy
Inadequat
e and
flawed
use of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
argument
s from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Inadequat
ely
presented
and poorly
integrated
paper
needing a
great deal
of editing
and
proofreadi
ng;
little/no
use of
appropriat
e
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s;
referencin
g
inconsiste
nt; gaps in
rary issue
No
justificatio
n of
methodolo
gy
No
evidence
of any
uses of
research
evidence
and
critical
enquiry to
devise,
substantia
te and
where
necessary
refute
argument
s from
current
theoretical
developm
ents in the
marketing
managem
ent
discipline
Unaccept
able
presentati
on of
paper
likely
needing
full editing
and
proofreadi
ng; no use
of
appropriat
e
illustration
s, figures,
tables and
appendice
s; no
evidence
of correct
referencin
g; gaps in
reference
list and/or
Personal
and
corporate
ethics,
values and
professiona
lism (LO3)
complete.
Structure is
appropriate
and flows
logically
appropriat
e and
flows
logically.
e and
flows
logically.
appropriat
e and
logical.
In
designing,
implementi
ng and
reporting
their
programme
of research
the student
has fully
acknowled
ged and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and/or
sensitivities
; has fully
respected
the right to
privacy of
respondent
s; and has
paid
thoughtful
regard to
the wellbeing of
respondent
s. There is
clear
evidence
that the
student has
conducted
him/herself
professiona
lly,
scholarly,
and
ethically in
undertakin
g this
research at
all times.
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has fully
acknowle
dged and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and
sensitivitie
s; has fully
respected
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
thoughtful
regard to
the wellbeing of
responde
nts. There
is clear
evidence
that the
student
has
conducted
him/hersel
f
profession
ally and
ethically in
undertakin
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has
acknowle
dged and
taken into
account
cultural
issues;
has fully
respected
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
due
regard to
the wellbeing of
responde
nts. There
is
unambigu
ous
evidence
that the
student
has
conducted
him/hersel
f
profession
ally and
ethically in
undertakin
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has
adequatel
y
acknowle
dged and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and/or
sensitivitie
s; has
respected
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
due
regard to
the wellbeing of
responde
nts. There
is
evidence
that the
student
has
largely
conducted
him/hersel
f
profession
list detail
is
incomplet
e or
inaccurate
.
Structure
and flow
need
reviewing.
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has
acknowle
dged and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and/or
sensitivitie
s in the
most
basic
terms; has
largely
respected
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
only basic
regard to
the wellbeing of
responde
nts. There
is some
evidence
that the
student
has tried
to conduct
him/hersel
f
reference
list and/or
major
inaccuraci
es.
Structure
and flow
need
major
review.
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has failed
to
acknowle
dge and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and/or
sensitivitie
s; has
failed to
respect
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
little
regard to
the wellbeing of
responde
nts. There
is little
evidence
that the
student
has tried
to conduct
him/hersel
f
profession
ally and
major
inaccuraci
es.
Structure
and flow
need
major to
full
review.
In
designing,
implement
ing and
reporting
their
programm
e of
research
the
student
has failed
to
acknowle
dge and
taken into
account
cultural
issues
and/or
sensitivitie
s; has
failed to
respect
the right
to privacy
of
responde
nts; and
has paid
no regard
to the
well-being
of
responde
nts. There
is no
evidence
that the
student
has tried
to conduct
him/hersel
f
profession
ally and
g this
research
at all
times.
g this
research
at all
times
ally and
ethically in
undertakin
g this
research
at all
times
profession
ally and
ethically in
undertakin
g this
research
ethically in
undertakin
g this
research
ethically in
undertakin
g this
research
Instructions: You are going to compare and contrast the advantages and disadvantages of a paper- based shipping container, a wood-based shipping container and a plastic-based shipping container for use as a distribution package (a non-retail shipping package). You must consider the entire supply chain in your response. Ensure your assignment is in APA format and must include a properly formatted reference list. Your paper must be 1000-1200 words, excluding title page and reference page. Ensure your assignment is posted as a word document attachment.
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.2. No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference . 3. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font . 4. No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism. 5. No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment 6. the reference must be 8 to 10 7. the answer should be sufficient 8. Please read and follow the instructions in the attached file.I will upload Four files: 1. assignment file, 2. Case Study for part one of assignment, 3. Chapter 11&13 for part 2 of assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Final PDF to printer
13
Leadership: Power and
Negotiation
ORGANIZATIONAL
MECHANISMS
Organizational
Culture
Organizational
Structure
INDIVIDUAL
MECHANISMS
GROUP
MECHANISMS
Job
Satisfaction
Leadership:
Styles &
Behaviors
Leadership:
Power &
Negotiation
Teams:
Processes &
Communication
Teams:
Characteristics &
Diversity
Stress
INDIVIDUAL
OUTCOMES
Job
Performance
Motivation
Trust, Justice,
& Ethics
Organizational
Commitment
Learning &
Decision Making
INDIVIDUAL
CHARACTERISTICS
Ability
Personality &
Cultural Values
LEARNING GOALS
After reading this chapter, you should be able to answer the following questions:
13.1 What is leadership, and what role does power play in leadership?
13.2 What are the different types of power that leaders possess, and when can they use those types
most effectively?
13.3 What behaviors do leaders exhibit when trying to influence others, and which of these is most
effective?
13.4 What is organizational politics, and when is political behavior most likely to occur?
13.5 How do leaders use their power and influence to resolve conflicts in the workplace?
13.6 What are the ways in which leaders negotiate in the workplace?
13.7 How do power and influence affect job performance and organizational commitment?
410
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd 410
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
GLAXOSMITHKLINE
I
n 2017, when she took over GlaxoSmithKline (GSK), Emma
Walmsley became the first female CEO of a major pharmaceutical company. Today, she is number 1 on Fortune’s
International 50 most powerful women’s list. GSK, a $38.9
billion British firm, was founded in 2000 when two of the
world’s oldest drug companies merged together. Today, GSK
has three major divisions: pharmaceuticals, vaccines, and
consumer products (such as Excedrin, Flonase, and Tums).
With more than 100,000 employees, leading this organization is no small feat. When Walmsley was initially chosen
as CEO, the reaction was not positive because she was
perceived as a “status quo” selection. Just six weeks into
her tenure, one of GSK’s largest and most vocal shareholders sold all of his stock and publicly called the company “a
health care conglomerate with a suboptimal business strategy.” However, in just two years, Walmsley has won over
many of the company’s critics. One of GSK’s board members
says that Walmsley is “a force of nature” and “the quickest
study I think I’ve ever met.”
After spending 17 years moving up the ranks at L’Oreal,
Walmsley was offered a job as president of GSK’s global
consumer health care division. During Walmsley’s five years
as president, she increased consumer sales 38 percent,
Andy Buchanan/PA Images/Getty Images
from $6.8 billion to $9.4 billion. What really attracted attention, though, was how effectively Walmsley led a major joint
venture with Novartis through to completion. One board
member said, “It is hard to overstate how seamless that integration was.” Although Novartis had a culture that was very
different from GSK, Walmsley was able to use her power
and influence effectively enough to keep most of the highlevel Novartis people engaged and on board. One executive
said, “They spoke so well of her. They felt really respected,
but it was also really clear she was the boss.”
Taking over as CEO was a well-earned, but big step
up. Walmsley said, “I don’t think anyone can fully explain
what it’s like to be a CEO until you’re actually on the job.
The way I define the job is, firstly, in setting strategy for the
company, and then leading the allocation of capital to that
strategy—because until you put the money where you say
your strategy is, it’s not your strategy.”* Walmsley’s push
since becoming CEO has been to redouble efforts into R&D
and refocus on the pharmaceutical side of the business.
One former GSK executive referred to her as a “courageous,
supportive, and demanding leader.”
*Fortune Media IP Limited
411
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd
411
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
412
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
L E A DE R S H I P : P OW E R A N D N E GOT I ATI O N
13.1
What is leadership, and what
role does power play in
leadership?
As evidenced by GlaxoSmithKline, leadership in organizations is complicated. It is a mix of factors that has to do with ideas, behaviors, positions, and so forth. Leaders within organizations
can make a huge difference to the success of a company or group. Much of this success depends
on how effectively they use power and influence in achieving their objectives. You could read
the opening example and anoint Emma Walmsley as a great leader and try to simply adopt her
behavioral examples to follow in her footsteps. However, things aren’t quite that simple. As we’ll
discover in this and the next chapter, there are many different types of leaders, many of whom can
excel, given the right circumstances.
There is perhaps no subject that’s written about more in business circles than the topic of
leadership. A quick search on Amazon.com for “leadership” will generate a list of more than
60,000 books! That number doesn’t even count the myriad videos, calendars, audio recordings,
and other items—all designed to help people become better leaders. Given all the interest in this
topic, a natural question becomes, “What exactly is a leader?” We define leadership as the use of
power and influence to direct the activities of followers toward goal achievement.1 That direction
can affect followers’ interpretation of events, the organization of their work activities, their commitment to key goals, their relationships with other followers, and their access to cooperation and
support from other work units.2 This chapter focuses on how leaders get the power and influence
they use to direct others and the ways in which power and influence are utilized in organizations,
including through negotiation. Chapter 14 will focus on how leaders actually use their power and
influence to help followers achieve their goals.
W H Y AR E S O M E L E A D E R S M O R E P OW E R F U L
T H A N OT H ER S ?
What exactly comes to mind when you think of the term “power”? Does it raise a positive or negative image for you? Certainly it’s easy to think of leaders who have used power for what we would
consider good purposes, but it’s just as easy to think of leaders who have used power for unethical or immoral purposes. For now, try not to focus on how leaders use power but instead on how
they acquire it. Power can be defined as the ability to influence the behavior of others and resist
unwanted influence in return.3 Note that this definition gives us a couple of key points to think
about. First, just because a person has the ability to influence others does not mean they will actually choose to do so. In many organizations, the most powerful employees don’t even realize how
influential they could be! Second, in addition to influencing others, power can be seen as the ability to resist the influence attempts of others.4 This resistance could come in the form of the simple
voicing of a dissenting opinion, the refusal to perform a specific behavior, or the organization of
an opposing group of coworkers.5 Sometimes leaders need to resist the influence of other leaders
or higher-ups to do what’s best for their own unit. Other times leaders need to resist the influence
of their own employees to avoid being a “pushover” when employees try to go their own way.
ACQUIRING POWER
Think about the people you currently work with or have worked with in the past, or think of students who are involved in many of the same activities you are. Do any of those people seem to
have especially high levels of power, meaning that they have the ability to influence your behavior?
What is it that gives them that power? In some cases, their power may come from some formal
position (e.g., supervisor, team leader, teaching assistant, resident advisor). However, sometimes
the most powerful people we know lack any sort of formal authority. It turns out that power in
organizations can come from a number of different sources. Specifically, there are five major
types of power that can be grouped along two dimensions: organizational power and personal
power.6 These types of power are illustrated in Figure 13-1.
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd 412
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 13
FIGURE 13-1
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
413
Types of Power
Organizational Power
Legitimate Power
Reward Power
Coercive Power
Ability to
Influence
Others
Personal Power
Expert Power
Referent Power
ORGANIZATIONAL POWER The three types of organizational power derive primarily from
a person’s position within the organization. These types of power are considered more formal
in nature.7 Legitimate power derives from a position of authority inside the organization and is
sometimes referred to as “formal authority.” People with legitimate power have some title—some
term on an organizational chart or on their door that says, “Look, I’m supposed to have influence over you.” Those with legitimate power have the understood right to ask others to do things
that are considered within the scope of their authority. When managers ask an employee to stay
late to work on a project, work on one task instead of another, or work faster, they are exercising
legitimate power. The higher up in an organization a person is, the more legitimate power they
generally possess. Fortune magazine provides rankings of the most powerful women in business.
As shown in Table 13-1, all of those women possess legitimate power in that they hold a title that
affords them the ability to influence others.
Legitimate power does have its limits, however. It doesn’t generally give a person the right to
ask employees to do something outside the scope of their jobs or roles within the organization.
For example, if a manager asked an employee to wash their car or mow their lawn, it would likely
be seen as an inappropriate request. As we’ll see later in this chapter, there’s a big difference
between having legitimate power and using it effectively. When used ineffectively, legitimate power
can be a very weak form of power.
The next two forms of organizational power are somewhat intertwined with legitimate power.
Reward power exists when someone has control over the resources or rewards another person
wants. For example, managers generally have control over raises, performance evaluations, awards,
more desirable job assignments, and the resources an employee might require to perform a job
effectively. Those with reward power have the ability to influence others if those being influenced
believe they will get the rewards by behaving in a certain way. Coercive power exists when a person
has control over punishments in an organization. Coercive power operates primarily on the principle of fear. It exists when one person believes that another has the ability to punish him or her
and is willing to use that power. For example, a manager might have the right to fire, demote, suspend, or lower the pay of an employee. Sometimes the limitations of a manager to impose punishments are formally spelled out in an organization. However, in many instances, managers have a
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd
413
13.2
What are the different types
of power that leaders possess, and when can they use
those types most effectively?
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
414
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
TABLE 13-1
Fortune’s 15 Most Powerful Women in Business in 2018
NAME
COMPANY
POSITION
AGE
1
Marilyn Hewson
Lockheed Martin
Chairman, CEO, and president
64
2
Mary Barra
General Motors
Chairman and CEO
56
3
Abigail Johnson
Fidelity Investments
Chairman and CEO
56
4
Ginni Rometty
IBM
Chairman, CEO, and president
61
5
Gail Boudreaux
Anthem
President and CEO
56
6
Sheryl Sandberg
Facebook
COO
49
7
Safra Katz
Oracle
Co-CEO
56
8
Phebe Novakovic
General Dynamics
Chairman and CEO
60
9
Ruth Porat
Google, Alphabet
SVP and CFO
60
10
Susan Wojcicki
Google, Alphabet
CEO, YouTube
50
11
Lynn Good
Duke Energy
Chairman, CEO, and president
59
12
Angela Ahrendts
Apple
Senior vice president, Retail and
Online Stores
58
13
Tricia Griffith
Progressive
President and CEO
53
14
Judith McKenna
Walmart Int’l
President and CEO
52
15
Karen Lynch
Aetna
President
55
Source: Bellstrom, K., G. Donnelly, M. Heimer, E. Hinchliffe, A. Jenkins, B. Kowitt, M. Rodriguez, L. Segarra, L. Shen,
J. Vanian, P. Wahba, and J. Wieczner. “Most Powerful Women.” Fortune 178, no. 4 (October 1, 2018): pp. 58–69.
considerable amount of leeway in this regard. Coercive power is generally regarded as a poor form
of power to use regularly, because it tends to result in negative feelings toward those that wield it.
For a great example of someone learning the potential advantage of using organizational power
effectively, see this chapter’s OB on Screen feature.
PERSONAL POWER Of course, the women in Table 13-1 don’t appear on that list just because
they have some formal title that affords them the ability to reward and punish others. There’s
something else about them, as people, that provides them additional capabilities to influence others. Personal forms of power capture that “something else.” Expert power derives from a person’s
expertise, skill, or knowledge on which others depend. When people have a track record of high
performance, the ability to solve problems, or specific knowledge that’s necessary to accomplish
tasks, they’re more likely to be able to influence other people who need that expertise. Consider a
lone programmer who knows how to operate a piece of antiquated software, a machinist who was
recently trained to operate a new piece of equipment, or the only engineer who has experience
working on a specific type of project. All of these individuals will have a degree of expert power
because of what they individually bring to the organization. Angela Ahrendts, SVP at Apple,
appears in Table 13-1 largely because of her expert power. Apple CEO Tim Cook hired Ahrendts,
who was then CEO of the British fashion company Burberry, because he felt that her expertise
in retail could help deliver a vision for the Apple Store. Ahrendts said, “I told him, ‘I’m not a
techie,’ and he said, ‘I think we have 10,000 of those, you are supposed to be here.’”8 There is perhaps no place where expert power comes into play more than in Silicon Valley, where it’s widely
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd 414
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
415
OB On Screen
THE POST
This company has been in my life for longer than most of the people working there have been
alive, so I don’t need the lecture on legacy. And this is no longer my father’s company. It’s no
longer my husband’s company. It’s MY company and anyone who thinks otherwise probably
doesn’t belong on my board.*
With those words, Katherine Graham (Meryl Streep) clarifies her legitimate power to members of
her board, advisors, and newspaper editor in The Post (Dir: Steven Spielberg, 20th Century Fox,
2018). The movie, set in 1971, follows the unauthorized release of the “Pentagon Papers,” a highly
sensitive and classified study commissioned by Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara (Bruce
Greenwood) that detailed U.S. involvement in the Vietnam War. Initially, the papers are leaked to
reporters at The New York Times who begin to run a series of stories on the contents of the study
until a court injunction stops them from continuing. In the meantime, The Washington Post’s editor, Bill Bradlee (Tom Hanks) and one of his reporters find the leak and obtain their own copy of
the study, which Bradlee wants to publish.
Moviestore Collection Ltd/Alamy
Following the death of her husband and father, Ms. Graham unexpectedly becomes the sole
owner and publisher of The Washington Post. An interesting part of the movie is watching the
development of Ms. Graham as a leader who starts to recognize the various types of power
she has at her disposal. For much of the movie, she is steamrolled by her advisors, board, and
employees—who all happen to have a lot more journalistic experience than she has (in addition to
being male). The scene in question is the culmination of the movie’s buildup to a decision as to
whether the paper should publish the papers in the face of legal issues, cancellation of the paper’s
upcoming public offering, and even potential jail time for Ms. Graham. Although she attempts to
use multiple forms of power and influence at times throughout the movie—even in this scene—she
is finally willing to utilize her legitimate power to put an exclamation point on her decision.
*Source: The Post.
perceived that the best leaders are those with significant technological experience and expertise.
At Intel, senior advisor and former CEO Andy Grove “fostered a culture in which ‘knowledge
power’ would trump ‘position power.’ Anyone could challenge anyone else’s idea, so long as it
was about the idea and not the person—and so long as you were ready for the demand ‘Prove it.’”9
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd
415
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
416
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
Referent power exists when others have a desire to identify and be associated with a person.
This desire is generally derived from affection, admiration, or loyalty toward a specific individual.10
Although our focus is on individuals within organizations, there are many examples of political
leaders, celebrities, and sports figures who seem to possess high levels of referent power. Barack
Obama, Angelina Jolie, and Peyton Manning all possess referent power to some degree because
others want to emulate them. The same could be said of leaders in organizations who possess a
good reputation, attractive personal qualities, or a certain level of charisma. Emma Walmsley, as
detailed in our chapter-opening case, clearly wields referent power. Past colleagues refer to her as
having “amazing charisma” and the ability to always speak “with effect.”11
Of course, it’s possible for a person to possess all of the forms of power at the same time. In
fact, the most powerful leaders—like those in Table 13-1—have bases of power that include all five
dimensions. From an employee’s perspective, it’s sometimes difficult to gauge what form of power
is most important. Why, exactly, do you do what your boss asks you to do? Is it because the boss
has the formal right to provide direction, because the boss controls your evaluations, or because
you admire and like the boss? Many times, we don’t know exactly what type of power leaders possess until they attempt to use it. Generally speaking, the personal forms of power are more strongly
related to organizational commitment and job performance than are the organizational forms. If
you think about the authorities for whom you worked the hardest, they probably possessed some
form of expertise and charisma, rather than just an ability to reward and punish. That’s not to say
though that organizational forms of power cannot successfully achieve objectives at times. Some
useful guidelines for wielding each of the forms of power can be found in Table 13-2.
CONTINGENCY FACTORS There are certain situations in organizations that are likely to
increase or decrease the degree to which leaders can use their power to influence others. Most of
these situations revolve around the idea that the more other employees depend on a person, the
more powerful that person becomes. A person can have high levels of expert and referent power,
but if he or she works alone and performs tasks that nobody sees, the ability to influence others
TABLE 13-2
TYPE OF POWER
Guidelines for Using Power
GUIDELINES FOR USE
Legitimate
• Stay within the rights your position holds.
• Communicate your request politely.
• Make sure you describe the purpose of your request.
Reward
• Propose rewards that are attractive.
• Only offer what you can follow through on.
• Be clear on exactly what you are offering a reward for.
Coercive
• Warn people prior to giving punishment.
• Make sure punishment is fair relative to the nature of the lack of
compliance.
• Follow through quickly and without discrimination or bias.
Expert
• Put forth data or other evidence to support your proposal.
• Communicate why the request is important and the justification
for it.
• Be consistent, thoughtful, and honest about requests.
Referent
• Follow through on commitments.
• Do things for others even when not required to do so.
• Support and uphold others when called for.
Source: For a more detailed list of guidelines and discussion, see Yukl, Gary A. Leadership in Organizations, 7th ed. (c) 2010.
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd 416
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
417
is greatly reduced. That being said, there are four factors that have an effect on the strength of a
person’s ability to use power to influence others.12 These factors are summarized in Table 13-3.
Substitutability is the degree to which people have alternatives in accessing resources. Leaders
that control resources to which no one else has access can use their power to gain greater influence. Discretion is the degree to which managers have the right to make decisions on their own. If
managers are forced to follow organizational policies and rules, their ability to influence others is
reduced. Centrality represents how important a person’s job is and how many people depend on
that person to accomplish their tasks. Leaders who perform critical tasks and interact with others
regularly have a greater ability to use their power to influence others. Visibility is how aware others
are of a leader’s power and position. If everyone knows that a leader has a certain level of power,
the ability to use that power to influence others is likely to be high.
MWH, the Broomfield, Colorado, engineering firm specializing in water projects, with $1 billion in revenue, asked 500 employees in all of its departments where they went when they came up
with a new idea. This would allow MWH to determine who possessed certain types of expertise
and who offered the most help to employees. In a sense, MWH was identifying the individuals in
the organization who were likely to have the most power.13 Companies such as Microsoft, Pfizer,
and Google are increasingly using such networking maps to understand the power structures in
their organizations and who holds the most influence.14
USING INFLUENCE
Up until now, we’ve discussed the types of power leaders possess and when their opportunities
to use that power will grow or diminish. Now we turn to the specific strategies that leaders use to
translate that power into actual influence.
Recall that having power increases our ability to influence behavior. It doesn’t mean that we
will use or exert that power. Influence is the use of an actual behavior that causes behavioral or
attitudinal changes in others.15 There are two important aspects of influence to keep in mind.
First, influence can be seen as directional. It most frequently occurs downward (managers influencing employees) but can also be lateral (peers influencing peers) or upward (employees influencing managers). Second, influence is all relative. The absolute power of the “influencer” and
“influencee” isn’t as important as the disparity between them.16
13.3
What behaviors do leaders
exhibit when trying to influence others, and which of
these is most effective?
INFLUENCE TACTICS Leaders depend on a number of tactics to cause behavioral or attitudinal
changes in others. In fact, there are at least 10 types of tactics that leaders can use to try to influence
others.17 These tactics and their general levels of effectiveness are illustrated in Figure 13-2.18 The four
most effective tactics have been shown to be rational persuasion, inspirational appeals, consultation,
and collaboration. Rational persuasion is the use of logical arguments and hard facts to show the
target that the request is a worthwhile one. Research shows that rational persuasion is most effective
when it helps show that the proposal is important and feasible.19 Rational persuasion is particularly
TABLE 13-3
The Contingencies of Power
CONTINGENCY
LEADER’S ABILITY TO INFLUENCE OTHERS INCREASES WHEN . . .
Substitutability
There are no substitutes for the rewards or resources the
leader controls.
Centrality
The leader’s role is important and interdependent with others in
the organization.
Discretion
The leader has the freedom to make his or her own decisions
without being restrained by organizational rules.
Visibility
Others know about the leader and the resources he or she can
provide.
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd
417
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
418
CHAPTER 13
Larry Page (left), CEO of
Alphabet (parent company
of Google), is known for
his willingness to allow
employees to use rational
persuasion (data) to
change his mind on an
issue.
FIGURE 13-2
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
important because it’s the only
tactic that is consistently successful in the case of upward
influence.20 At Alphabet, for
example, data is all-important.
CEO Larry Page has been willing to change his mind in the
face of conflicting information.
Douglas Merrill, former Google
CIO, said, “Larry would wander around the engineers and
he would see a product being
developed, and sometimes he
would say, ‘Oh I don’t like that,’
but the engineers would get
Paul Sakuma/Associated Press
some data to back up their idea,
and the amazing thing was that
Larry was fine to be wrong. As long as the data supported them, he was okay with it. And that was
such an incredibly morale-boosting interaction for engineers.”21 An inspirational appeal is a tactic
designed to appeal to the target’s values and ideals, thereby creating an emotional or attitudinal reaction. To use this tactic effectively, leaders must have insight into what kinds of things are important
to the target. Tony Hsieh does his best to use inspirational appeals when talking about the benefits of
his company’s new organizational structure to his employees at Zappos and what he believes it can
bring the company.22 Consultation occurs when the target is allowed to participate in deciding how
to carry out or implement a request. This tactic increases commitment from the target, who now
has a stake in seeing that his or her opinions are valued. A leader uses collaboration by attempting to
make it easier for the target to complete the request. Collaboration could involve the leader helping
complete the task, providing required resources, or removing obstacles that make task completion
difficult.23 Ginni Rometty, CEO of IBM and number 4 in Table 13-1, is known inside and outside the
organization for her collaborative tactics. Rometty and IBM entered into an alliance with its biggest
rival, Apple, to bring IBM services to Apple’s iOS platform. Apple CEO Tim Cook says of Rometty,
“I think she’s wicked smart. She has an incredible ability to partner and can make tough decisions
and do so decisively. And she sees things as they really are.”24
Influence Tactics and Their Effectiveness
Most Effective
Moderately Effective
Least Effective
Rational Persuasion
Ingratiation
Pressure
Consultation
Personal Appeals
Coalitions
Inspirational
Appeals
Apprising
Exchange
Collaboration
Source: Adapted from Lee, S., S. Han, M. Cheong, S. L. Kim, and S. Yun. “How Do I Get My Way? A Meta-Analytic
Review of Research on Influence Tactics.” Leadership Quarterly 28 (2017): pp. 210–228.
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd 418
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
419
Three other influence tactics are sometimes effective and sometimes not. Ingratiation is the
use of favors, compliments, or friendly behavior to make the target feel better about the influencer. You might more commonly hear this referred to as “sucking up,” especially when used
in an upward influence sense. Ingratiation has been shown to be more effective when used as a
long-term strategy and not nearly as effective when used immediately prior to making an influence attempt.25 Personal appeals occur when the requestor asks for something based on personal
friendship or loyalty. The stronger the friendship, the more successful the attempt is likely to be.
As described in our OB Internationally feature, there are cultural differences when it comes to this
kind of an appeal just as there are with other influence attempts. Finally, apprising occurs when
the requestor clearly explains why performing the request will benefit the target personally. It differs from rational persuasion in that it focuses solely on the benefit to the target as opposed to
simple logic or benefits to the group or organization.
OB Internationally
When Google hired Kai-Fu Lee to be vice president of engineering and president of Google
Greater China, with a more than $10 million compensation package, the company was counting
on his continued ability to use the same skills that allowed him to be a huge success at Microsoft.
What was it that Lee possessed that made him so worthwhile? Lee argues that it was his understanding of guanxi (pronounced gwan-she). In the Chinese culture, guanxi (literally translated
“relationships”) is the ability to influence decisions by creating obligations between parties based
on personal relationships.
Guanxi represents a relationship between two people that involves both sentiment and obligation. Individuals with high levels of guanxi tend to be tied together on the basis of shared institutions such as kinship, places of birth, schools attended, and past working relationships. Although
such shared institutions might “get someone in the door” in the United States, in China, they
become a higher form of obligation. Influence through guanxi just happens—it’s an unspoken
obligation that must be addressed. It is, in a sense, a blend of formal and personal relationships
that exists at a different level than in the United States. There is no such thing as a “business only”
relationship, and the expectation is simply that if you take, you must also give back. Lee (who left
Google) and his guanxi were so great that Google’s Chinese product managers insisted that their
business cards read “Special Assistant to Kai-Fu Lee” and that their desks be placed within 100
feet of his so that they could effectively do business outside the company.
Evidence suggests that companies like Microsoft and Google that possess guanxi have higher
levels of performance. American managers who go to work overseas must be conscious of these
different types of relationships and expectations. In addition to understanding the power of
guanxi, evidence suggests that Chinese managers from different areas (e.g., Hong Kong, Taiwan,
mainland China) have different beliefs when it comes to which influence tactics are the most
effective. There is also recent evidence that the norms around guanxi in China are changing with
time. If anything, it goes to show that managers need to be acutely aware of both general and more
specific cultural differences when trying to influence others in China.
Sources: S. Levy, In the Plex: How Google Thinks, Works, and Shapes Our Lives (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2011);
R. Buderi, “The Talent Magnet,” Fast Company 106 (2006), pp. 80–84; C.C. Chen, Y.R. Chen, and K. Xin, “Guanxi
Practices and Trust in Management: A Procedural Justice Perspective,” Organization Science 15 (2004), pp. 200–9; R.Y.J.
Chua, “Building Effective Business Relationships in China,” MIT Sloan Management Review 53 (2012), pp. 27–33; P.P.
Fu., T.K. Peng, J.C. Kennedy, and G. Yukl, “A Comparison of Chinese Managers in Hong Kong, Taiwan, and Mainland
China,” Organizational Dynamics 33 (2003), pp. 32–46; Y. Luo., Y. Huang, and S.L. Wang, “Guanxi and Organizational
Performance: A Meta-Analysis,” Management and Organization Review 8 (2011), pp. 139–72; M. Wong, “Guanxi
Management as Complex Adaptive Systems: A Case Study of Taiwanese ODI in China,” Journal of Business Ethics 91
(2010), pp. 419–32; M.M. Yang, Gifts, Favors, and Banquets: The Art of Social Relationships in China; (Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press, 1994); X. Zhang, N. Li, and B.T. Harris, “Putting Non-Work Ties to Work: The Case of Guanxi in
Supervisor-Subordinate Relationships,” Leadership Quarterly 26 (2015), p. 37.
coL61557_ch13_410-441.indd
419
11/04/19 08:11 PM
Final PDF to printer
420
CHAPTER 13
Leadership: Power and Negotiation
The three tactics that have been shown to be least effective and could result in resistance from
the target are pressure, coalitions, and exchange tactics. Of course, this statement doesn’t mean
that they aren’t used or can’t be effective at times. Pressure is the use of coercive power t
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted. Important Notes: -1. Support your
submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly,
peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required
in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Each answer must not be less than 300 words To be unique and there is no plagiarismPlease follow the assignment instructions as mentioned in the file
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Read the case study and answer the given questions; Wichmann wanted to avoid “top-down” approaches in their social media strategy. Based on the article, what are the advantages using the “top-down” approach? Are there any disadvantages? Discuss both.What are the contributing factors in Maerk’s success on Facebook such that they gained more than 400,000 new followers in 11 months?What are the four areas that Maersk focused on? How do they use different social networks across these four areas?How do they evaluate their ROI? Discuss both qualitative and quantitative approaches.Can their social media model be applied to other B2B businesses? What are the prerequisites to be a successful one?
Open “Prep 2.2” Excel file that I attached here. Data for the two questions can be found on different sheets. Use the Excel file for computation and charts and a Word document for your written answers.Open “transportation” sheet in “Prep 2.2” Excel file. The city’s Department of Transportation has been keeping track of accidents on a particularly dangerous stretch of highway. Early in this year, the city lowered the speed limit on this highway and increased police patrols. Data on number of accidents before and after the changes are presented in the Excel sheet. Did the change work? Is the highway safer? Construct a line chart in Excel to display these two sets of data and write a paragraph (150 words) describing the changes. Copy-paste the chart from MS Excel to MS Word and add it to your text.Open “gun control” sheet in “Prep 2.2” Excel file.The score of 15 respondents on four variables are reported in the Excel sheet. The numerical codes for the variables can be also found there. Construct a frequency distribution for each variable. Include a column for percentages.Construct pie and bar charts in Excel to display the distributions of sex, support for gun control, and level of education. Provide a paragraph describing the dataset. Copy-paste the tables and charts from MS Excel to MS Word and add it to your text.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Month
Jan
Feb
March
April
May
June
July
Aug
Sept
Oct
Nov
Dec
12 Montths Before 12 Months After
23
25
25
21
20
18
19
12
15
9
17
10
24
11
28
15
23
17
20
14
21
18
22
20
Case number
Sex
1= Male
2= Female
Support of Gun Control
1= In favor
2= Opposed
Level of Education
0= Less than HS
1= HS
2= Jr. college
3= Bachelor’s
4= Graduate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Support of Gun
Control
Sex
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
Level of
Education
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Age
1
1
3
2
3
1
0
1
0
1
4
4
0
1
1
45
48
55
32
33
28
77
50
43
48
33
35
39
25
23
Hi thereCan you help me pleaseI have pdf file, for a trial, I need it as power point presentation pleaseIt should have PP format, The topic of the presentation could be cut and paste to the PP.There are few tables, charts, diagrams and I need them to be in the PP pleaseIt should be professional design and format,
Understand the importance of preparing a financial plan.
Describe how to prepare financial statements and use them to manage the small business
Create projected financial statements.
Understand the basic financial statements through ratio analysis.
Explain how to interpret financial ratios
Conduct a break-even analysis for a small company.
Explain the importance of cash management to the success of the small business.
Differentiate between cash and profits.
Understand the five steps in creating a cash budget and use them to build a cash budget.
Describe fundamental principles involved in managing the “Big Three” of cash management: accounts receivable, accounts payable, and inventory.
Explain how bootstrapping can help a small business avoid a cash crunch.
10.2 Action Required:
The following table shows the questions.
Questions
True
False
The balance sheet provides owners with an estimate of the firm’s worth for a specific moment in time.
The cost of goods sold represents the total cost, including distribution, of the goods sold during the year.
The objectives of cash management are to adequately meet the cash demands of the business and to avoid retaining unnecessarily large cash balances.
Usually, trade credit from vendors is expensive, and small business owners should avoid it.
10.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Answer with a tick mark or write in words which is true, and which one is false.
10.4 Instructions
Answer the question available in the “Test your Knowledge” section.
Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below
(( PLEASE USE YOUR OWN WORDS AND WRITE THE REFERENCE))
Operation management assignment contain 5 questions about case study scenarioAll answers should be clear and well presented with clear examples Please post your answers in the same file Avoid plagiarism so I don’t lose marks There must be five references APA style Each answer must not be less than 300 words All answers must be typed using Time new roman( size12, double-spaced)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Hey, hope all is well. I’ve tried my best with the assignment. Can you go into the Excel sheet and finish the rest of the general ledger and the trial balance? Also, could you look over my general journal.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Continuing Problem–Chapter 2
The transactions completed by PS Music during June 20Y5 were described at the end of Chapter 1. The following transactions were completed during July,
the second month of the business’s operations:
July 1
July 1
July 1
July 2
July 3
July 3
July 4
July 5
July 8
July 11
July 13
July 14
July 16
July 18
July 21
July 22
July 23
July 27
July 28
July 29
July 30
July 31
July 31
July 31
Peyton Smith made an additional investment in PS Music in exchange for common stock by depositing $5,000 in PS Music’s checking account.
Instead of continuing to share office space with a local real estate agency, Peyton decided to rent office space near a local music store.
Paid rent for July, $1,750.
Paid a premium of $2,700 for a comprehensive insurance policy covering liability, theft, and fire. The policy covers a one-year period.
Received $1,000 on account.
On behalf of PS Music, Peyton signed a contract with a local radio station, KXMD, to provide guest spots for the next three months.
The contract requires PS Music to provide a guest disc jockey for 80 hours per month for a monthly fee of $3,600. Any additional hours
beyond 80 will be billed to KXMD at $40 per hour. In accordance with the contract, Peyton received $7,200 from KXMD as an advance payment
for the first two months.
Paid $250 on account.
Paid an attorney $900 for reviewing the July 3 contract with KXMD. (Record as Miscellaneous Expense.)
Purchased office equipment on account from Office Mart, $7,500.
Paid for a newspaper advertisement, $200.
Received $1,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
Paid $700 to a local audio electronics store for rental of digital recording equipment.
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
Received $2,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a wedding reception.
Purchased supplies on account, $850.
Paid $620 to Upload Music for use of its current music demos in making various music sets.
Paid $800 to a local radio station to advertise the services of PS Music twice daily for the remainder of July.
Served as disc jockey for a party for $2,500. Received $750, with the remainder due August 4, 20Y5.
Paid electric bill, $915.
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
Paid miscellaneous expenses, $540.
Served as a disc jockey for a charity ball for $1,500. Received $500, with the remainder due on August 9, 20Y5.
Received $3,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
Paid $1,400 royalties (music expense) to National Music Clearing for use of various artists’ music during July.
Paid dividends, $1,250.
Required
1 Analyze and journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 2.
2 Post the journal to the ledger, extending the account balance to the appropriate balance column after each posting.
3 Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of July 31, 20Y5.
Check Figure: Total of Debit column: $40,750
GENERAL JOURNAL
DATE
DESCRIPTION
Page:
POST.
REF.
DEBIT
2
CREDIT
1 20Y5
2 july
1 cash
3
11
Common Stock
4
5,000.00
31
5,000.00
July 1
Peyton Smith made an additional investment in PS Music in exchange for common stock by depositing $5,000 in PS Music’s checking account.
July 1
Instead of continuing to share office space with a local real estate agency, Peyton decided to rent office space near a local music store.
P. Smith deposited cash in exchange for stock
Paid rent for July, $1,750.
5
6
1 Rent expense
51
7
cash
11
8
1,750.00
1,750.00
July 1
Paid a premium of $2,700 for a comprehensive insurance policy covering liability, theft, and fire. The policy covers a one-year period.
July 2
Received $1,000 on account.
July 3
On behalf of PS Music, Peyton signed a contract with a local radio station, KXMD, to provide guest spots for the next three months.
paid rent for july
The contract requires PS Music to provide a guest disc jockey for 80 hours per month for a monthly fee of $3,600. Any additional hours
9
beyond 80 will be billed to KXMD at $40 per hour. In accordance with the contract, Peyton received $7,200 from KXMD as an advance payment
10
1 prepaid insuranse
15
11
cash
11
12
brought year liability policy
for the first two months.
2,700.00
13
14 july
2,700.00
2 Fees Earned
15
Received on account
41
1,000.00
11
1,000.00
16
17 july
3 Cash
18
Advanced Payment
7,200.00
19
7,200.00
20
21
22 july
3 Expense
23
250.00
Paid account
250.00
24
25 July
4
26
Miscellaneous Expense
900.00
paid attorney
900.00
27
28 july
5
29
Office Expense
Bought office space
7,500.00
30
31 july
Paid $250 on account.
July 4
Paid an attorney $900 for reviewing the July 3 contract with KXMD. (Record as Miscellaneous Expense.)
July 5
Purchased office equipment on account from Office Mart, $7,500.
July 8
Paid for a newspaper advertisement, $200.
July 11
Received $1,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
July 13
Paid $700 to a local audio electronics store for rental of digital recording equipment.
July 14
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
July 16
Received $2,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a wedding reception.
July 18
Purchased supplies on account, $850.
July 21
Paid $620 to Upload Music for use of its current music demos in making various music sets.
July 22
Paid $800 to a local radio station to advertise the services of PS Music twice daily for the remainder of July.
July 23
Served as disc jockey for a party for $2,500. Received $750, with the remainder due August 4, 20Y5.
July 27
Paid electric bill, $915.
July 28
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
July 29
Paid miscellaneous expenses, $540.
July 30
Served as a disc jockey for a charity ball for $1,500. Received $500, with the remainder due on August 9, 20Y5.
July 31
Received $3,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
July 31
Paid $1,400 royalties (music expense) to National Music Clearing for use of various artists’ music during July.
July 31
Paid dividends, $1,250.
7,500.00
8
32
advertisement Expense
Paid 200 for a newspaper ad
Required
200.00
33
34 july
July 3
1 Analyze and journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 2.
200.00
11 Fees Earned
35
36
received for disc jokey for a party
2 Post the journal to the ledger, extending the account balance to the appropriate balance column after each posting.
1,000.00
1,000.00
3 Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of July 31, 20Y5.
37
Check Figure: Total of Debit column: $40,750
General Journal
GENERAL JOURNAL
DATE
1 july
DESCRIPTION
Page:
POST.
REF.
DEBIT
Paid for local audio equitment rental
700.00
3
4 july
700.00
14
5
Paid the receptionist
16
fees earned
Recived Serving as a Disc Jockey for a Wedding Reception
purchased supplies
850.00
Uploading music sets
620.00
620.00
22
17
Advertising expense
paid for local radio station ads
800.00
18
800.00
23
Fees earned
20
served as disc jokey
2,500.00
21
2,500.00
27 utilities expense
23
paid electric bills
915.00
24
915.00
28
26
Wages expense
Paid the receptionist and part time assistant
1,200.00
27
28 july
1,200.00
29
29
miscellaneous expense
Paid miscellaneous expense
540.00
30
31 july
On behalf of PS Music, Peyton signed a contract with a local radio station, KXMD, to provide guest spots for the next three months.
beyond 80 will be billed to KXMD at $40 per hour. In accordance with the contract, Peyton received $7,200 from KXMD as an advance payment
for the first two months.
850.00
15
25 july
Received $1,000 on account.
July 3
The contract requires PS Music to provide a guest disc jockey for 80 hours per month for a monthly fee of $3,600. Any additional hours
21 Music expense
14
22 july
Paid a premium of $2,700 for a comprehensive insurance policy covering liability, theft, and fire. The policy covers a one-year period.
July 2
18 Supplies Expense
12
19 july
July 1
2,000.00
11
16 july
Instead of continuing to share office space with a local real estate agency, Peyton decided to rent office space near a local music store.
2,000.00
9
13 july
Peyton Smith made an additional investment in PS Music in exchange for common stock by depositing $5,000 in PS Music’s checking account.
July 1
Paid rent for July, $1,750.
1,200.00
1,200.00
8
10 july
July 1
Wages expense
6
7 july
CREDIT
13 Rent expense
2
July 3
Paid $250 on account.
July 4
Paid an attorney $900 for reviewing the July 3 contract with KXMD. (Record as Miscellaneous Expense.)
July 5
Purchased office equipment on account from Office Mart, $7,500.
July 8
Paid for a newspaper advertisement, $200.
July 11
Received $1,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
July 13
Paid $700 to a local audio electronics store for rental of digital recording equipment.
July 14
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
July 16
Received $2,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a wedding reception.
July 18
Purchased supplies on account, $850.
July 21
Paid $620 to Upload Music for use of its current music demos in making various music sets.
July 22
Paid $800 to a local radio station to advertise the services of PS Music twice daily for the remainder of July.
July 23
Served as disc jockey for a party for $2,500. Received $750, with the remainder due August 4, 20Y5.
July 27
Paid electric bill, $915.
July 28
Paid wages of $1,200 to receptionist and part-time assistant.
July 29
Paid miscellaneous expenses, $540.
July 30
Served as a disc jockey for a charity ball for $1,500. Received $500, with the remainder due on August 9, 20Y5.
July 31
Received $3,000 for serving as a disc jockey for a party.
July 31
Paid $1,400 royalties (music expense) to National Music Clearing for use of various artists’ music during July.
July 31
Paid dividends, $1,250.
540.00
30 Fees earned
32
33
34
served as disc jokey at a charity ball
Required
1,500.00
1 Analyze and journalize each transaction in a two-column journal beginning on Page 2.
1,500.00
2 Post the journal to the ledger, extending the account balance to the appropriate balance column after each posting.
35
36
3 Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of July 31, 20Y5.
37
Check Figure: Total of Debit column: $40,750
General Journal (2)
GENERAL JOURNAL
DATE
1 july
2
DESCRIPTION
Page:
POST.
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
31 fees earned
served as a disc jockey
3,000.00
3
3,000.00
4
5
31 Music expense
6
Paid royalties
1,400.00
7
1,400.00
8
9
10
31 Dividends
paid dividends
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
General Journal (3)
1,250.00
1,250.00
GENERAL LEDGER
ACCOUNT:
Cash
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
ITEM
1
1
1
1
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
Balance
CJ2
CJ12
CJ2
CJ2
July
ACCOUNT:
REF.
5,000.00
1,750.00
2,700.00
DEBIT
1,000.00
Accounts Receivable
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT NO:
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
Supplies
ACCOUNT NO:
ITEM
1
CREDIT
1,000.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
Balance
5ce388ecc97441556473542aa8b5a1ab
REF.
12
BALANCE
Balance
CREDIT
3,920.00
8,920.00
7,170.00
4,470.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
11
14
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
170.00
CREDIT
ACCOUNT:
Prepaid Insurance
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
july
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT:
REF.
GJ12
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
2,700.00
DEBIT
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
ITEM
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
Accounts Payable
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
ACCOUNT NO:
21
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
250.00
Unearned Revenue
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
ITEM
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
Common Stcok
ITEM
1
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
ACCOUNT NO:
31
GJ2
5ce388ecc97441556473542aa8b5a1ab
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
Balance
23
BALANCE
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
CREDIT
Balance
DATE
17
BALANCE
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
CREDIT
2,700.00
Office Equipment
DATE
15
5,000.00
DEBIT
CREDIT
4,000.00
9,000.00
ACCOUNT:
Dividends
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT:
REF.
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
Balance
DEBIT
Fees Earned
ITEM
1
1
ACCOUNT:
ACCOUNT NO:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
GJ
6,200.00
7,200.00
1,000.00
Wages Expense
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT:
ACCOUNT NO:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
Balance
DEBIT
1
ACCOUNT NO:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
1,750.00
Equipment Rent Expense
ITEM
1
Balance
5ce388ecc97441556473542aa8b5a1ab
CREDIT
800.00
2,550.00
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
REF.
51
BALANCE
Balance
GJ2
ACCOUNT:
CREDIT
400.00
Office Rent Expense
ITEM
50
BALANCE
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
CREDIT
Balance
41
BALANCE
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
CREDIT
500.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
33
52
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
675.00
CREDIT
ACCOUNT:
Utilities Expense
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT:
REF.
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
Balance
DEBIT
Music Expense
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT NO:
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
Advertising Expense
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT NO:
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
Supplies Expense
ITEM
1
ACCOUNT NO:
ACCOUNT:
REF.
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
Miscellaneous Expense
ITEM
1
Balance
5ce388ecc97441556473542aa8b5a1ab
CREDIT
180.00
ACCOUNT NO:
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
REF.
56
BALANCE
Balance
CREDIT
500.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
55
BALANCE
Balance
CREDIT
1,590.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
54
BALANCE
Balance
CREDIT
300.00
POST
DATE
20Y5
July
53
59
BALANCE
DEBIT
CREDIT
DEBIT
415.00
CREDIT
MS Music
Trial Balance
For the Month Ended July 31, 20Y5
Account
Trial Balance
Debit
Credit
Open “Prep 2.1” Excel file that I attached here. Data for the two questions can be found on different sheets. Use the Excel file for computation and charts, and a Word document for your written answers. Question 1: Open “Response Times” sheet.As part of an evaluation of the efficiency of your local police force, you have gathered data on police response time to calls for assistance during multiple years (response times were rounded off to whole minutes). Convert the frequency distributions into percentages and construct a chart appropriate to display all relevant data. Write a paragraph (about 150 words) analyzing the changes in response times and total number of calls over the years. Question 2: Open “Homicide” sheet. Calculate the homicide rate per 100,000 population for each state/province for each year.Which state and which province had the highest homicide rates in 1997?Which state and which province had the highest homicide rates in 2001?Which society (country) seems to have a higher homicide rate?Which society seems to have the largest change in homicide rates? What is the direction of the change?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
21 minutes or more
16-20 minutes
11-15 minutes
6-10 minutes
Less than 6 minutes
Response time 2015 (f)Response time 2016 (f)Response time 2017 (f)
43
44
55
52
55
69
112
145
178
154
197
292
91
114
166
Response time 2018 (f) Response time 2019 (f)
35
45
75
70
180
133
375
395
210
250
USA
State
New Jersey
Iowa
Alabama
Texas
California
1997
2001
Homicides
Population Homicides Population
338 8,053,000
336
8,484,431
52 2,852,000
50
2,923,179
426 4,139,000
379
4,464,356
1,327 19,439,000
1,332
21,325,018
2,579 32,268,000
2,206
34,501,130
Canada
1997
2001
Province
Homicides
Population Homicides Population
Nova Scotia
24
936,100
9
942,900
Quebec
132 7,323,600
149
7,417,700
Ontario
178 11,387,400
170
12,068,300
Manitoba
31 1,137,900
34
1,150,800
British Columbia
116 3,997,100
85
4,141,300
Source: Statistics Canada
All information is attached and the rubics in the attachment that I have put on this.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MAN6720CBE Section 01CBE Applied Strategic Planning (11 Weeks) – CBE Online Course 2023 Fall Quarter
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Assignment Content
1.
Competency
Evaluate the inclusion of an organization’s infrastructure in strategic planning.
Student Success Criteria
View the grading rubric for this deliverable by selecting the “This item is graded
with a rubric” link, which is located in the Details & Information pane.
Scenario
As part of your responsibilities on the board of a regional strategic committee for
your local Chamber of Commerce, you have been asked to prepare a memo that can
be used for prospective businesses that are new to your local Chamber.
Instructions
The memo should contain information on how organizations can use their
organizational capabilities for strategic planning purposes.
Your memo should include the following:
o An overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic
planning.
o A discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be
found in an organizational strategic plan.
o An explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
o Attribution for credible sources for the memo.
Deliverable 3 – Strategic Planning Memo
Rubric Details
•
Grade for Deliverable 3
100% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
4
B – 3 – Proficiency
3
C – 2 – Competence
2
F – 1 – No Pass
1
I – 0 – Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 1
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic
planning.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic
planning.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear overview of organizational capabilities and how they relate to strategic planning.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 2
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found
in an organizational strategic plan.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in an
organizational strategic plan.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in
an organizational strategic plan.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear discussion of the different types of infrastructure elements that can be found in an
organizational strategic plan.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 3
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear explanation of how organizational strategy is different than policy.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 4
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Used credible sources in a well-crafted memo.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Used mostly credible sources in a well-crafted memo.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Used some credible sources in the memo.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Did not use credible sources in the memo.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
After reviewing the resources respond to the following prompts in 300 words:
Define the historical aspect of diversity.
What are some challenges you have faced regarding diversity on a personal and/or professional level?
How can social justice be included in the discussion of diversity?
Assignment 2
For this assignment, choose an assessment. After completing the assessment and reviewing your results, respond to the following prompts:
Discuss your results in detail and any personal biases that may have been revealed around diversity.
How can social justice be included in the discussion to help minimize or eliminate personal biases?
Watch BOTH WorldCom videos and read the WSJ article attached before completing the discussion questions below.
Both WorldCom videos are in the links provided:
Respond to each of the following questions. Use complete sentences and proper grammar.
Explain the fraudulent accounting WorldCom used in committing the fraud.
Describe three (3) important takeaways from the Ernst & Young WorldCom video.
What are your thoughts and feelings about the situation described in the E&Y video?
What aspects of the E&Y video do you agree/disagree with?
Can you identify with the situation described in the E&Y video?
Describe the ethical dilemma(s) in the WorldCom case.
What did you learn from studying this case?
Anything else you want to include.
Attached are all the instructions and the gap allaysis chart that needs to be filled out let me know if you have any questsions.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Gap Analysis
Strategic Goals
Gap Rating
1
Minor
1
2
3
Moderate
4
5
6
7
Major
8
9
7
Major
8
9
7
Major
8
9
7
Major
8
9
Description
2
Minor
1
2
3
Moderate
4
5
6
Description
3
Minor
1
2
3
Moderate
4
5
6
Description
4
Minor
1
2
3
Moderate
4
5
6
Description
MAN6720CBE Section 01CBE Applied Strategic Planning (11 Weeks) – CBE Online Course 2023 Fall Quarter
Deliverable 4 – Gap Analysis
Deliverable 4 – Gap Analysis
Assignment Content
1.
Competency
Assess organizational deficiencies based on gap analysis.
Student Success Criteria
View the grading rubric for this deliverable by selecting the “This item is graded
with a rubric” link, which is located in the Details & Information pane.
Scenario
You work as a strategic business consultant for small business owners. A coffee shop
owner wants to figure out a way to reengineer her business model and address
current operating issues that she is now facing due to social distancing guidelines.
Instructions
Using this template
include following in the gap analysis chart.
Gap-Analysis-Chart.docx
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Create new strategic goals for reopening with respect to the following:
Social distancing guidelines
Use of online ordering
Use of technology
Possible delivery or pickup service
Once the goals are developed, you will rate them on a scale from 1-9:
1-3 = Minor impact to business
4-6 = Moderate impact to business
7-9 = Major impact to business
In addition, write a summary of the following below the template:
o What are your recommendations for each goal listed based on the gap
analysis chart?
o What other gap analysis methodology tools could be used to further support
your recommendations and why?
o Based on each of your recommendations, explain what measurement would
be used to determine the success of the goal and how it would increase
organizational performance.
o Based on your recommendations and analysis, what could be some of the
potential organizational deficiencies of the coffee shop?
o Attribution for credible sources for the gap analysis.
Resources
o
Please click here for the Rasmussen APA Guide.
Deliverable 4 – Gap Analysis
Rubric Details
Maximum Score
4 points
•
Grade for Deliverable 4
100% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
4
B – 3 – Proficiency
3
C – 2 – Competence
2
F – 1 – No Pass
1
I – 0 – Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 1
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed recommendations for each goal based on the gap analysis chart.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear recommendations for each goal based on the gap analysis chart.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear recommendations for each goal based on the gap analysis chart.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear recommendations for each goal based on the gap analysis chart.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 2
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed description of another gap analysis methodology tool that could be used.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear description of another gap analysis methodology tool that could be used.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear description of another gap analysis methodology tool that could be used.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear description of another gap analysis methodology tool that could be used.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 3
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed explanation of measurement to be used to determine the success of the goal
and how it would increase organizational performance.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear explanation of measurement to be used to determine the success of the goal and how it
would increase organizational performance.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear explanation of measurement to be used to determine the success of the goal and
how it would increase organizational performance.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear explanation of measurement to be used to determine the success of the goal and how it
would increase organizational performance.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 4
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Clear and detailed explanation of the potential organizational deficiencies of the coffee shop.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Clear explanation of the potential organizational deficiencies of the coffee shop.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Somewhat clear explanation of the potential organizational deficiencies of the coffee shop.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Unclear explanation of the potential organizational deficiencies of the coffee shop.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
•
Criterion 5
0% of total grade
A – 4 – Mastery
Used credible sources in a well-crafted gap analysis.
0
B – 3 – Proficiency
Used mostly credible sources in a well-crafted gap analysis.
0
C – 2 – Competence
Used some credible sources in the gap analysis.
0
F – 1 – No Pass
Did not use credible sources in the gap analysis.
0
I – 0 – Not Submitted
Not Submitted
0
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.2. No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference . 3. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font . 4. No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism. 5. No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment 6. the reference must be 6 to 9 7. the answer should be sufficient 8. Please read and follow the instructions in the attached file.I will upload chapter 4
Unformatted Attachment Preview
CHAPTER 4
Managing logistics internationally
Objectives
The intended objectives of this chapter are to:
●
identify challenges that internationalisation presents to logistics
management;
●
analyse the structure and management of a global logistics network.
By the end of this chapter you should be able to:
●
understand the forces which are shaping international logistics;
●
understand challenges of international logistics networks;
●
understand how to begin to balance these in organising for international
logistics – bearing in mind risks and sustainability considerations
Introduction
The early roots of logistics are in international transport, which was a central element of many fundamental models in economic theory. In traditional location
theory, for example, transport costs were optimised in relation to distance to
market and production locations. The origins of internationalisation can be
traced back to the expanding trade routes of early civilisations. Discoveries made
in excavations from Europe, Asia, Africa and the Americas reveal artefacts made
hundreds or even thousands of miles away from the site, at the edges of their
respective known worlds. Developments in transport, navigation and communication have progressively expanded our horizons. Measured in transport time
and costs, the world has shrunk to the dimensions of a ‘global village’. Many take
for granted the availability of products from around the world and safe, fast intercontinental travel on container carriers and aircraft. It is in this context that a
clear link exists between logistics and economic development. The connectivity
of all regions of the world is essential for international trade. As a result, many
projects aimed at supporting regional economic development focus on the infrastructure needed to support integration into the global economy.
The logistics dimension of internationalisation conjures up a vision of parts
flowing seamlessly from suppliers to customers located anywhere in the world,
and a supply network that truly spans the entire globe. Often basic products such
as deep-freeze pizzas combine a multitude of locations from which ingredients
are sourced, and an international transport network that links production
110 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
locations to warehouses and multiple stores. The enormous geographical span of
this logistics system cannot be recognised in the price of the product. This can be
explained by transport having become just a commodity in the global village. At
the micro level of the individual company, however, the reality is that there are
few examples of truly global supply chains. There are many barriers to such a
vision. For example, local autonomy, local standards and local operating procedures make the integration of information flow and material flow a challenging
task. Local languages and brand names increase product complexity. Global
supply chains are made more complicated by uncertainty and difficulty of control. Uncertainty arises from longer lead times and lack of knowledge over risks
and local market conditions. Coordination becomes more complex because of
additional language and currency transactions, more stages in the distribution
process, and local government intervention through customs and trade barriers.
But there are many instances where a truly globalised logistics system is not
necessary, and where ‘internationalisation’ is a more accurate description.
Internationalisation is an increasing feature of the majority of supply chains.
International sourcing of component parts and international markets for
finished goods are extending as world trade increases. The move of supply and
production to ‘off-shore’ locations has been steady and stable. However, this does
not mean that internationalisation is without risks. Challenges in migrating
supply to remote locations, breakdowns in product flow, environmental considerations resulting from greater shipping distances and corporate social responsibility considerations are added challenges and considerations.
The factoring in of risks, environmental and social considerations into the
design of international logistics operations has made longstanding logistics formulas more problematic to apply. And it has helped the mindset of logistics managers
to move beyond ‘available everywhere at low cost’ towards a more qualified
approach of ‘available at a certain price and within a defined risk/reliability’.
Within the context of this changing global landscape for logistics, the overall
aim of this chapter is to analyse the internationalisation of logistics, and to
explore how to begin to organise international supply chains. Figure 4.1 shows
the framework for this chapter: drivers and enablers need to be countered by risk
Enablers
• Commoditised
transportation
• Information and
communication
technology
Drivers
• Factor costs
• Economies of scale
Activities
Management of
international logistics
• Network design
• Risk management
• Governance
Risks
• Local responsiveness/time to market
• Inventory and handling costs
• Transportation breakdowns
• Geopolitical threats (war, terror)
Figure 4.1 Decision framework for international logistics
Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
111
factors in organising logistics internationally. Essentially, this means developing
and designing an international logistics network, managing risks and developing
international governance structures, while keeping social responsibility and environmental concerns in mind.
Key issues
This chapter addresses seven key issues:
1 Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation: the trade-off facing
internationally operating businesses.
2 The tendency towards internationalisation: three strategies for improving the
transition to global supply chains.
3 The challenges of international logistics and location: barriers to international
logistics.
4 Organising for international logistics: proposes principles by which international
logistics networks can be organised, including offshoring considerations.
5 Reverse logistics: developing the ‘returns’ process.
6 Managing for risk readiness: two levels of risk readiness and several specific steps
to take.
7 Corporate social responsibility in the supply chain: the need to include social
responsibility in supply chain design.
4.1 Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
Key issue: What are the trade-offs between responsiveness to local markets and
economies of scale?
The business approach towards internationalisation is not taking place according
to any common pattern. In assessing the nature of cross-border logistics, three
questions can be asked:
●
Does internationalisation imply a universal global approach to supply chain
management?
●
Does internationalisation require a ‘global’ presence in every market?
●
Does internationalisation distinguish between the companies that globally
transfer knowledge and those that do not?
The arguments presented in this section suggest that the answer to each of these
questions is ‘no’.
The ‘single business’ concept of structuring the supply chain in the form of
uniform approaches in each country is losing ground. ‘McColonisation’ was effectively abolished when McDonald’s announced localisation of its business in such
areas as marketing and local relations. In response to local crises in quality, and
suffering from local competition, the corporate headquarters were downsized to
help empower the local organisation. (This also means localising the focal firm’s
human resource practices, a point we return to in Chapter 8.) The same applied
to the Coca-Cola Company, which abandoned ‘CocaColonisation’ – based on a
112 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
universal product, marketing, and production and distribution model – for the
same reasons. In favour of local brands and product varieties, Procter & Gamble is
doing the same. In supply chains we find regional variations in the application of
international principles.
This does not mean to say that localisation is the new mainstay. Unilever, a traditionally localised competitor of Procter & Gamble, has announced a decrease in
the number of brands, and has rationalised operations away from strict localisation over the past decade, and probably will continue to do so for a while. Somewhere between local and global extremes, Procter & Gamble and Unilever will
meet each other in a new competitive area.
Looking at the different drivers of internationalisation, three basic global shifts
in international investment and trade have been identified, with a possible
fourth coming to the forefront in modern markets, as listed in Table 4.1. Such
shifts of course have an impact on international trade and the flow of goods. In
particular, destinations change as well as logistics requirements. The ‘fourth generation’ recognises the logistics trade-off between responsiveness to local markets, environmental and risk concerns with the benefits of internationalisation.
Table 4.1 The fourth-generation global shift in Europe
Generation
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Period
1950s–1960s
From 1960
From 1980
Emerging now
Primary drivers
Labour shortage
Labour costs and
flexibility
Market entrance
Responsiveness to
customer orders, risk
reduction, and social
and environmental
responsibility
Shift of labour and
investment towards
European countries
without labour
shortage
Newly industrialised
countries, low labour
cost countries
Eastern Europe,
China, Latin America
Market region for
responsiveness and
lower risk. To lowcost region for social
responsiveness
initiatives
Transport routes
Still significantly
continental
Increasingly
intercontinental
Adding additional
destination regions
Beginning to refocus
on continental
Nature of
international flow of
goods
Physical distribution
of finished products
from new production
locations
Shipping parts to
production locations
and exporting
finished products
Physical distribution
towards new market
regions
Shipping (semi-)
finished products to
markets, reduction of
eco footprint and risk
exposure where
possible
At a company level, generic drivers of internationalisation include:
●
a search for low factor and supply costs (land, labour, materials);
●
the need to follow customers internationally in order to be able to supply
locally and fast;
●
a search for new geographical market areas;
Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
●
113
a search for new learning opportunities and exposure to knowledge (such as by
locating in Silicon Valley – a ‘hot spot’ in development of international electronics, software and internet industries).
The importance of these drivers varies by company and with time. Considering
the sequence of global shifts, proximity to production factors such as labour and
low material costs can be considered more basic than market- or even knowledgerelated drivers. Furthermore, the importance of the respective drivers is dependent upon the internationalisation strategy of the company involved. Table 4.2
provides examples of strategic contexts, and – in the bottom row – the logistics
implications of those strategies. The multi-domestic and global strategies represent two extremes, while the integrated network strategy represents a balance between them. The consequences of this ‘balancing act’ for logistics are analysed
below. Case study 4.1 about Airbus offers illustrations of how complex and comprehensive supply chain management in an international context can be and
how hard it can be to manage against risks for service and value.
Table 4.2 Dimensions of different internationalism strategies
Dimension
Setting in a pure multidomestic strategy
Setting in a pure global
strategy
Setting in an integrated
network strategy
Competitive moves
Stand-alone by country
Integrated across countries
Moves based on local autonomy
and contribution of lead
subsidiaries, globally coordinated
Product offering
Fully customised in each
country
Fully standardised
worldwide
Partly customised, partly
standardised
Location of valueadding activities
All activities in each
country
Concentration: one activity
in each (different) country
Dispersal, specialisation, and
interdependence
Market participation
No particular pattern;
each country on its own
Uniform worldwide
Local responsiveness and
worldwide sharing of experience
Marketing approach
Local
Integrated across countries
Variation in coordination levels
per function and activity
Logistical network
Mainly national; sourcing,
storage and shipping
on a national level and
duplicated by country
Limited number of
production locations that
ship to markets around the
globe through a highly
internationalised network
with limited localised
warehouse and resources
Balanced local sourcing and
shipping (e.g. for customised
products and local specialities)
and global sourcing and shipping
(for example for commodities)
(Source: Based on Yip, 1989, and Bartlett and Ghoshal, 1989)
CASE STUDY
4.1
Launching a new aeroplane at Airbus
When Airbus introduced its Airbus A380 double decker superplane in January 2005 to
the press and the world it was an impressive show that brought out government
leaders and made headlines all over the world. A little while later, however, delays to the
114 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
actual delivery of the first planes were announced. The causes for this were largely
found in the international supply chain and its design.
In October 2006, the then Airbus president and CEO Christian Streiff said: ‘This is a very
long and complex value chain. While everyone on board was on top of their job, the production process . . . not the aeroplane . . . but the production process has one, big flaw –
one weak link in the chain: that of the design of the electrical harnesses installation in the
forward and aft fuselage. To be clear: this is the weak link in the manufacturing chain, this
is the reason why ramping up the production is hampered. But the electrical harnesses
are not the root causes why we at Airbus are in a crisis. The issue of the electrical harnesses
is extremely complex, with 530 km of cables, 100,000 wires, and 40,300 connectors.’
This quote clearly points to the supply chain and design as the cause for delays. In addition to the wiring issues there were some further supplier-related challenges as well. A
lot of different locations are an inherent aspect of the supply chain, not least because
customers and sponsoring countries require a share of the production process to be
located in their countries. So many locations, and design and make tasks are involved.
This created a lot of challenges that needed detailed coordination. For example, one
small component was supposed to be built in a plant in Italy for which a location was
selected, but no permit had been granted by local authorities. It turned out that there
were some very old olive trees on this site that had protected status. This is just one
example of how local considerations can be specific and detailed, hard to predict yet
potentially having a big impact on the supply chain. Additionally a Japanese supplier of
seats was said to have caused further delivery delays. A complex project such as developing and building a new plane across multiple countries and locations can be very
challenging in terms of scale and scope.
When Airbus launched the A380, the early signs of supply chain shortfalls already
existed, but they were well hidden. Under the paint, screws were missing. Behind the
panels, lots of parts were missing. The launch was a great spectacle, but you cannot
hide a supply chain that is not working behind some paint for long . . . .
(Source: quote from: http://blog.seattlepi.com/aerospace/archives/107302.asp)
Question
1 Brainstorm in groups how locating parts of the supply chain around the world might
be more difficult than locating it on a single site and location.
4.1.1 Logistical implications of internationalisation
Internationalising logistics networks holds consequences for inventory, handling
and transport policies.
Inventory
Centralising inventories across multiple countries can hold advantages in terms
of inventory-holding costs and inventory levels that are especially relevant for
high-value products. On the other hand, internationalisation may lead to product proliferation due to the need for localisation of products and the need to
respond to specific local product/market opportunities.
Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
115
Handling
Logistics service practices may differ across countries as well as regulation on
storage and transport. Adjusting handling practices accordingly is a prerequisite
for internationalisation. Furthermore, the opportunity to implement best practice across various facilities may also be possible. Both of these practices assist the
process of internationalisation.
Transport
Owing to internationalisation, logistics pipelines are extended and have to cope
with differences in infrastructure across countries, while needing to realise delivery within the time-to-market. This may drive localisation. On the other hand,
the opportunity for global consolidation may drive international centralisation.
Within this final, central, consideration in the globalise–localise dimension of
logistics, global businesses face a challenge that can be summarised in terms of a
simple trade-off between the benefits of being able to consolidate operations
globally on the one hand, and the need to compete in a timely manner on the
other.
4.1.2 Time-to-market
Time-to-market has particular significance for the management of the global
logistics pipeline. The subject of time is considered in depth in Chapter 5,
although we shall touch on the following issues here:
●
product obsolescence;
●
inventory-holding costs.
Product obsolescence
The extended lead time inherent in international logistics pipelines means that
products run the risk of becoming obsolete during their time in transit. This is
especially true for products in industries with rapid technological development,
such as personal computing and consumer electronics, and for fashion goods
such as clothing and footwear.
Inventory-holding costs
Lead time spent in the logistics pipeline increases the holding cost of inventory.
In addition to the time spent in physical transit, goods travelling internationally
will incur other delays. These occur at consolidation points in the process, such
as in warehouses where goods are stored until they can be consolidated into a full
load, such as a container. Delay frequently occurs at the point of entry into a
country while customs and excise procedures are followed. We review these
issues in more depth in Chapter 7.
116 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
4.1.3 Global consolidation
Global consolidation occurs as managers seek to make best use of their assets and
to secure lowest-cost resources. This approach leads to assets such as facilities and
capital equipment being used to full capacity, so that economies of scale are maximised. Resources are sourced on a global scale to minimise cost by maximising
purchasing leverage and to pursue economies of scale. The types of resource acquired in this way include all inputs to the end-product, such as raw materials
and components, and also labour and knowledge. Familiar features of global consolidation include:
●
sourcing of commodity items from low-wage economies;
●
concentration at specific sites;
●
bulk transportation.
Sourcing commodity items from low-wage economies
Two sourcing issues are used by internationally operating organisations:
●
consolidation of purchasing of all company divisions and companies;
●
sourcing in low-wage economies.
Internationally operating organisations seek to consolidate the purchasing
made by all their separate divisions and operating companies. This allows
them to place large orders for the whole group, which enables them to minimise costs by using their bargaining power and by seeking economies of scale.
At its extreme, a company may source all of its requirements from its range of
a given commodity, such as a raw material or a component, from a single
source.
Internationally operating companies are on a constant quest to find new,
cheaper sources of labour and materials. This trend led to the move of manufacturing from developed industrial regions to lower-cost economies. Examples of
this are:
●
Western Europe to Eastern Europe;
●
USA to Mexico;
●
Japan to China, India and Vietnam.
These developing economies have seen impressive growth over recent years.
This has led to increased prosperity for their people and rising standards of living.
However, these advances in social standards raise the cost of labour and other
resources. Therefore, the relentless search for the lowest production cost has led
to some companies re-sourcing commodity items to lower-wage countries in
Asia, North Africa and South America.
In some cases this movement of facilities around the globe has come full circle,
with Asian companies setting up plants in the UK not only to gain access to the
EU market but also to take advantage of lower overall costs.
Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
CASE STUDY
4.2
117
Logistics in the news
The subject of air miles appears regularly in media headlines today. Here are two contrasting
views of what is happening.
Supermarkets and food producers are taking their products on huge journeys, despite
pledging to cut their carbon emissions. Home-grown products are being transported
thousands of miles for processing before being put on sale back in Britain. Jason Torrance, campaigns director of Transport 2000, the environmental transport group, said
‘we are producing food in one corner of the world, packing it in another and then shipping it somewhere else. It’s mad.’
Dawnfresh, a Scottish seafood company that supplies supermarkets and other large
retailers, cut 70 jobs last year after deciding to ship its scampi more than 8,000km to
China to be shelled by hand, then shipped back to Scotland and breaded for sale in
Britain. The company said it was forced to make the move by commercial pressures.
‘This seems a bizarre thing to do but the reality is that the numbers don’t stack up any
other way’, says Andrew Stapley, a director. ‘We are not the first in the industry that has
had to do this. Sadly, it’s cheaper to process overseas than in the UK, and companies
like us are having to do this to remain competitive.’
(Source: Jon Ungoed-Thomas, Sunday Times, 20 May 2007)
Commissioned by World Flowers, a study was carried out by Adrian Williams of Cranfield
University’s Natural Resources Department to establish the actions needed to reduce
Sainsbury’s [a retailer] carbon footprint regarding Kenyan roses. Results have provided a
fresh challenge to much current thinking on local sourcing and the impact of air freight.
The high environmental cost of heating and lighting for growing roses in the Netherlands
outweighed emissions caused by flying them in from Kenya, with its naturally warm
all-year temperatures. It also indicated that carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions from Kenyan
roses were just 17 per cent of Dutch roses, including the larger impact of CO2 emissions to
high altitude by air freighting. The study found that 6kg of CO2 was produced per dozen
Kenyan roses, as opposed to 35kg for production in the Netherlands. Whereas 99 per cent
of the Dutch emissions were caused by producing the roses, only 7 per cent of the emissions from the Kenyan flowers were accounted for by growing them there. In contrast,
nearly 99 per cent of the CO2 emissions from the Kenyan roses were accounted for by the
6,000km clocked up by air freighting them to the UK.
(Source: http://www.cranfield.ac.uk/cww/perspex)
Question
1 What are the pros and cons of sourcing commodity items in low wage economies?
Concentration at specific sites
Consolidation of purchasing applies not only to commodity goods but also to highvalue or scarce resources. Research and development skills are both high value and
scarce. Therefore there is an incentive to locate at certain sites to tap into specific
pools of such skills. Examples of this are ‘Silicon Valley’ in California and ‘Silicon
Fen’ near Cambridge as centres of excellence in IT. Companies originally located in
these areas to benefit from research undertaken in the nearby universities.
118 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
Companies become more influential in directing such research and benefiting
from it if they have a significant presence in these locations. This is helped if
global research is consolidated onto a single site. While this may mean missing
out on other sources of talent, consolidated R&D gives a company a presence that
helps to attract the bright young minds that will make their mark in these industries in the future, and it allows synergies to develop between research teams.
Activity 4.1
Sales
Distribution
Assembly
Inbound
supply
Materials
R&D
End-customer
Marketing plans
An international logistics pipeline is represented in Figure 4.2 as a set of logistics processes
that are connected together like sections of a pipe. However, the sections may be in different
countries – requiring planning and coordination of the processes on a global scale. The international pipeline therefore has a number of special characteristics, some of which are suggested in
Case study 4.2 on the previous page. Use Table 4.3 to make a list of the characteristics that you
believe make a global logistics pipeline different from one that operates only nationally.
Figure 4.2 The international logistics pipeline
Table 4.3 Characteristics of the international pipeline
Elements of the pipeline
Special characteristics of the international pipeline
Research and development
Material/component sourcing
Inbound supply
Assembly
Distribution
Selling/retailing
Bulk transportation
One of the more obvious advantages of operating a company in a global manner
is the cost advantage of consolidated transportation. Taking Procter & Gamble as
an example, 350 ship containers, 9,000 rail car and 97,000 truck loads are transported every day. The opportunity for cost saving by coordinating these movements and maximising utilisation is significant.
Drivers and logistics implications of internationalisation
119
4.1.4 Risk in international logistics
In addition to time-to-market and inventory risks, events of recent years have
forced companies to adapt to the new supply chain reality of expecting the unexpected. Companies are not only responding to current volatility and geopolitical
risks, they are also developing new risk management approaches based upon the
realisation that decades of globalising supply chains has come at a price: a heightened and different risk profile.
Geopolitical threats
The 2003 SARS crisis and the second Gulf War were major events in and of themselves; they were also consecutive and had huge impacts on supply chain continuity and execution feasibility. Major trade routes had to be altered and global travel
was limited. In addition, structurally heightened government security measures and
screening are indicators of risks involved in international logistics. Logistics making
the global economy a reality can never be a given that deserves no second thought.
Transportation breakdowns
Transportation may be a commodity, but that does not mean that nothing can go
wrong. A several-week strike in the US west coast ports in 2002 lasted long
enough to almost cripple the US economy. With hundreds of cargo ships floating
outside the ports, shipments were not arriving at US destinations. This meant
that factories were shut down and stores were emptying. It also had a ripple effect
on global trade overall. For example, return shipments were delayed because no
ships were leaving the ports either. In addition, with so many ships and containers tied up, other routes could not be served. And in fact a resulting global shortage of containers caused a slowdown of shipments in many other port regions. So
shipments on other routes, in different harbours and even shipments using different modalities were affected.
Risk and security concerns are not a one-time issue but require continuous risk
management. Helferich and Cook (2002) found that this is necessary because, for
example:
●
only about 61 per cent of US firms had disaster recovery plans;
●
those that do typically cover data centres, only about 12 per cent cover total
organisational recovery;
●
few plans included steps to keep a supply chain operational;
●
only about 28 per cent of companies have formed crisis management teams,
and even fewer have supply chain security teams;
●
an estimated 43 per cent of businesses that suffer a major fire or other major
damage never reopen for business after the event.
According to Helferich and Cook (2002) this can partially be explained by the fact
that there are competing business issues, managers might not recognise their vulnerability and might assume that the government will bail them out. Peck (2003) has
published a self-assessment for supply chain risk and an operational-level tool kit.
120 Chapter 4 • Managing logistics internationally
4.2 The tendency towards internationalisation
Key issue: How can we picture the trade-offs between costs, inventories and lead
times in international logistics?
In order to remain competitive in the international business environment, companies seek to lower their costs while enhancing the service they provide to
customers. Two commonly used approaches to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of supply chains are focused factories and centralised inventories.
4.2.1 Focused factories: from geographical
to product segmentation
Many international companies, particularly in Europe, would have originally
organised their production nationally. In this situation, factories in each country
would have produced the full product range for supply to that country. Over
time, factories in each country might have been consolidated at a single site,
which was able to make all the products for the whole country. This situation, in
which there is a focus on a limited segment of the geographical market, is shown
in Figure 4.3a.
The focused factory strategy involves a company’s consolidating production of
products in specific factories. Each ‘focused factory’ supplies its products internationally to a wide market and focuses on a limited segment of the product assortment. This situation is shown in Figure 4.3b.
(a)
(b)
Figure 4.3 (a) Focused markets: full-range manufacture for local markets
(b) Focused factories: limited range manufacturing for all markets
The tendency towards internationalisation
121
Traditional thinking is that this organisational strategy will deliver cost advantages to a global company. While this is true for production costs, the same is not
necessarily true for inventory-holding costs and transport costs.
Activity 4.2
Focused factories have an impact on the important trade-off between cost and delivery lead
time. Make a list of the advantages and disadvantages of focused factories. One example of each
has been entered in the table below to start you off.
Cost
Lead time
Advantages
Lower production costs through
economies of scale
Specialised equipment may be
able to manufacture quicker
Disadvantages
Higher transport cost
Longer distance from market
will increase lead time
4.2.2 Centralised inventories
In the same way that the consolidation of production can deliver cost benefits, so
can the consolidation of inventory. Rather than have a large number of local distribution centres, bringing these together at a small number of locations can save
cost. Savings can be achieved in this way by coordinating inventory management
across the supply pipeline. This allows duplication to be eliminated and safety
stocks to be minimised, thereby lowering logistics costs and overall distribution
cycle times. Both may sound contrary to the fact that the transport pipeline will
extend, owing to the longer distribution legs to customers from the central warehouse in comparison with a local warehouse. Nevertheless, through centralising
inventory, major savings can be achieved by lowering overall speculative inventories, very often coupled with the ability to balance peaks in demand across
regional markets from one central inventory. Figure 4.4 characterises the different operating environments where centralised inventory may be a more relevant
or a less relevant consideration, based upon logistics characteristics.
In product environments where inventory costs are more important than t
Control Charts Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization.What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Please use the attached daily return for GE. Construct histogram with chart output using bin range from -40 to 40 % daily gain or loss. Are GE daily returns normally distributed? What is the takeaway from your finding? run descriptive statistics and calculate the mean, standard deviation etc. are the return left or right skewed and what is your interpretation to Kurtosis? based on the stander deviation finding, if you are investing in GE and applied the empirical rule what is the 95% expected daily return?
Change AgentsAre you a change agent?Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization.Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance.Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
This 2-page mini-paper is the first step to writing your term paper. In this short essay
you will analyze a popular text using the critical methods you learned in our study of
semiotics and deconstruction. These tools include: analyzing how binaries work, how
difference gets set up, how hierarchies are established, how norms get naturalized, etc.
Your mini-paper should lay out the following elements: DO NOT USE ANY FORM OF PLAGIARISM OR AI GENERATED WORK, IT WILL BE DETECTED AND PUNISHED.
*CUT AND PASTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS INTO YOUR PAPER*
EACH HEADING SHOULD BE PRESENT IN YOUR PAPER
1) Introduction: set the scene and state your thesis: What is your main argument? State
your text and why it’s important to study. Preview your two-three main points. Your
analysis should deal with key issues of the course (power, identity, culture, race,
class, gender…)[1-2 paragraphs]
2) Denotative Reading: Describe your text. Describe specific details from the text you
have selected. Focus on something small that you can write about in one paragraph – a
particular scene from a movie trailer or TV show, the details you see in an
advertisement, a sampling of lyrics and a scene from a music video. Focus on the
“signs” or meaningful symbols (such as flags, differently raced and gendered bodies,
signifiers of class like gold, rings, fancy cars, clothes, settings like the beach, a club,
house or nature): all of these signs convey meaning. Here you spend a paragraph
simply describing these signs at work in the text. [1 paragraph]
3) Connotative Reading: Analyze, deconstruct, and critically read the text. Your
goal in this paragraph is to analyze the signs at work in your text that you described in
the previous section. Your tools include: analyzing binaries and hierarchies;
representations of race, class, gender, sexuality; semiotic arrangement of signs. Your
guiding questions are: What meanings does the text convey? What myths give the
signs meaning? Provide evidence and examples from the text to support your
argument. [2 paragraphs]
4) Incorporate one concept from the reading (hegemonic masculinity, controlling
images, whiteness, trace, slippage, etc.—any concept you choose!). Define (use
author’s words, then your own interpretation) and apply the concept to your critical
reading of the text. How does the concept help you analyze the text? Use MLA
format to cite [2 paras]
5) Conclusion: restate thesis; review two-three main points.
Specifications:
Your paper should be 2 pages double-spaced 12-point Times New Roman. Use MLA
for citations. Your paper should be uploaded to turnitin as a Word.doc or
Word.docx
Your paper should be organized: it should be easy follow your line of thinking. Read
your paper out loud. Have at least one peer read your paper and give feedback prior to
turning it in.
Use good argumentation skills: support your claims with evidence from your text
and provide good reasoning for your arguments.
Research and find an article related to Instructional Models and Strategies
Each article critique will be two full pages. The critique is to be typed and double spaced; a 12 point font is to be used with 1-inch margins all around. APA format should be followed. Total 50 points
Each critique will contain:
– A short summary of the article consisting of one or two paragraphs. (10 points)
– One full paragraph of new information learned from reading the article. (10 points)
– One full paragraph consisting of your opinion of how the author presented the information. (10 points)
– Questions that you had after reading the article. (10 points)
Questions that may be addressed can include:
– Who is the intended audience?
– How well is the article suited to the audience?
– What are the strong and weak points of how the author presented the topic?
– Does the author appear to have a bias? If so, explain.
– Does the article make a contribution to the field? If so explain.
– Would you change the article in any way? If so, explain how.
Additional important information:
– The article must accompany your critique (5 points).
You must include the complete and correct bibliographic citation for the article (5 points).
Points
50
Submitting
a file upload
Rubric
Article Critique Rubric
Article Critique Rubric
Criteria Ratings Pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning Outcome 4 Article Critiques SubmittedFour Article Critiques submitted on or before due dates includes the article (x4) 50 points each Total for assignment 200 points
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCritique includes a brief summary of the articleArticle summary consists of 1-2 paragraphs.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeArticle Critique contains New Information LearnedArticle critique contains one full paragraph of new information learned from reading this article.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeYour OpinionArticle critique contains one full paragraph of your opinion of how the author presented the information.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeQuestionsArticle critique contains one full paragraph listing the questions, etc. you had after reading the article.
1 Learning Outcomes:
Recognize the importance of quality management theory, principles, and practices
applied in businesses on national and international levels.
State the importance of standardization and quality standards.
9.2 Action Required: (Read)
Case: The Nightmare on Telecom Street
H. James Harrington, a noted quality consultant, related the following story in Quality Digest
magazine:
I called to make a flight reservation just an hour ago. The telephone rang five times before a recorded voice answered. “Thank you for calling ABC Travel Services,” it said. “To ensure the highest level of customer service, this call may be recorded for future analysis.” Next, I was asked to select from one of the following three choices: “If the trip is related to company business, press 1. Personal business, press 2. Group travel, press 3.” I pressed 1. I was then asked to select from the following four choices: “If this is a trip within the United States, press 1. International, press 2. Scheduled training, press 3. Related to a
conference, press 4.” Because I was going to Canada, I pressed 2. Now two minutes into my telephone call, I was instructed to be sure that I had my customer identification card available.
A few seconds passed and a very sweet voice came on, saying, “All international operators are busy, but please hold because you are a very important customer.” The voice was then replaced by music. About two minutes later, another recorded message said, “Our operators are still busy, but please hold and the first available operator will take care of you.” More music. Then yet another message: “Our operators are still busy, but please hold. Your business is important to us.” More bad music. Finally the sweet voice returned, stating, “To speed up your service, enter your 19-digit customer service number.” I frantically searched for their card, hoping that I could find it before I was cut off. I was lucky; I found it and entered the number in time. The same sweet voice came back to me, saying, “To confirm your customer service number, enter the last four digits of your social security number.”
I pushed the four numbers on the keypad. The voice said: “Thank you. An operator will be with you shortly. If your call is an emergency, you can call 1-800-CAL-HELP, or push all of the buttons on the telephone at the same time. Otherwise, please hold, as you are a very important customer.” This time, in place of music, I heard a commercial about the service that the company provides. At last, a real person answered the telephone and asked, “Can I help you?” I replied, “Yes, oh yes.” He answered, “Please give me your 19-digit customer service number, followed by the last four digits of your social security number so I can verify who you are.” (I thought I gave these numbers in the first place to speed up service. Why do I have to rattle them off again?) I was now convinced that he would call me Mr. 5523-3675-0714-1313-040. But, to my surprise, he said: “Yes, Mr. Harrington. Where do you want to go and when?” I explained that I wanted to go to Montreal the following Monday morning. He replied: “I only handle domestic reservations. Our international desk has a new telephone number: 1-800-1WE-GOTU. I’ll transfer you.” A few clicks later a message came on, saying: “All of our international operators are busy. Please hold and your call will be answered in the order it was received. Do not hang up or redial, as it will only delay our response to your call. Please continue to hold, as your business is important to us.”
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
1. Summarize the service failures associated with this experience.
2. What might the travel agency do to improve its customers’ service experience?
9.4 Instructions
Read Case study and answer the questions.
Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below
(Week 9: Interactive Learning Discussion)(( PLEASE USE YOUR OWN WORDS AND WRITE THE REFERENCE))
Research and find an article related to Student Assessment
Each article critique will be two full pages. The critique is to be typed and double spaced; a 12 point font is to be used with 1-inch margins all around. APA format should be followed. Total 50 points
Each critique will contain:
– A short summary of the article consisting of one or two paragraphs. (10 points)
– One full paragraph of new information learned from reading the article. (10 points)
– One full paragraph consisting of your opinion of how the author presented the information. (10 points)
– Questions that you had after reading the article. (10 points)
Questions that may be addressed can include:
– Who is the intended audience?
– How well is the article suited to the audience?
– What are the strong and weak points of how the author presented the topic?
– Does the author appear to have a bias? If so, explain.
– Does the article make a contribution to the field? If so explain.
– Would you change the article in any way? If so, explain how.
Additional important information:
– The article must accompany your critique (5 points).
You must include the complete and correct bibliographic citation for the article (5 points).
Points
50
Submitting
a file upload
Rubric
Article Critique Rubric
Article Critique Rubric
Criteria Ratings Pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning Outcome 4 Article Critiques SubmittedFour Article Critiques submitted on or before due dates includes the article (x4) 50 points each Total for assignment 200 points
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCritique includes a brief summary of the articleArticle summary consists of 1-2 paragraphs.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeArticle Critique contains New Information LearnedArticle critique contains one full paragraph of new information learned from reading this article.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeYour OpinionArticle critique contains one full paragraph of your opinion of how the author presented the information.
40 ptsFull Marks
0 ptsNo Marks
40 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeQuestionsArticle critique contains one full paragraph listing the questions, etc. you had after reading the article.
After studying Management, do you look at news differently? Choose a recent news article that is related ti the subject Management. Attach a link to the article, describe the topic related to this article, describe what you think was done right or poorly, and why you feel that way.
Evaluating Variance from Standard CostsDiscuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit
According to the textbook, the current world economy is increasingly becoming integrated and interdependent; as a result, the relationship between business and society is becoming more complex. In this assignment, you will be researching a Fortune 500 company from an approved company list provided by your professor. My Company is MGM International
Instructions
Write a 4-5 page evaluation of your chosen company’s performance with respect to its stated values. Do the following:
Summarize the company’s primary products and or services.
Suggest three ways in which primary stakeholders can influence the organization’s financial performance. Provide support for your response.
Describe two critical factors in the organization’s external environment that can affect its success. Support your assertions.
Assess the company’s biggest success or missed opportunity to respond to a recent or current social issue. How did it impact company performance?
The specific course learning outcome associated with this assignment is:
Evaluate the relationship between a business and society based on external environmental factors, stakeholders, and corporate social responsibility issues.
My Company is MGM International
Deliverable Length: 4-6 pagesTheresa and Mike fully support creating a code of conduct for the newly merged JEANSTYLE organization. They have asked you to recommend how they should approach the development of the code of conduct, especially given the need to merge the companies into one team with a shared mission, vision, and values. They are interested in knowing how the code of conduct will help establish the new organizational culture of JEANSTYLE. Review the scenario for this course, and address the following questions: What set of steps should be used to create the code of conduct? What topics should be included in the code of conduct? What impact does a code of conduct have on an organization’s culture?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
Note: All character and company names are fictional and are not intended to
depict any actual person or business.
Knowing that mergers may require a dramatic change in company culture,
you realize that you need to meet with the human resources (HR) and
leadership teams because they will play important roles in the merger. The
leadership team will drive the change, and the HR team will be charged with
managing the change. You have scheduled a meeting with Steve Maine, your
vice president at ALTAP consulting, to consult with him on this project.
“Thanks for meeting me today, Steve,” you begin. “I need to talk through
some of the issues before meeting with the HR and leadership teams at
UWEAR and PALEDENIM. The merger is going well, but it is becoming
apparent that there are some significant change issues that need to be
addressed.”
“I’ve heard good things about your work on this project,” Steve answers. “I’m
sure you have it under control, but I’ll be happy to help where I can.”
“We are dealing with the issues of joining together two very disparate
companies,” you explain. “On the one hand, UWEAR is public and has 100
employees; on the other hand, PALEDENIM is private with only 15
employees. They basically provide the same type of service, but they are
completely different businesses in how they operate inside and outside of the
company.”
You continue, “Yes, and both the employees and managers of each company
have different philosophies and expectations. PALEDENIM employees and
managers have a kind of ‘one-for-all and all-for-one’ attitude. They all chip in
to get the job done. The UWEAR employees and managers look at things
differently. They’re more apt to do their jobs, get them done, and go home
without consideration for what else the rest of the team needs to complete.”
“That is definitely a culture issue,” Steve agrees. “In fact, that is the classic
definition of a culture issue. I’m sure they’re also dealing with the typical
power struggles. I bet everyone is worried about whether their department
will be headed by a UWEAR manager or a PALEDENIM manager.”
1
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
“Exactly,” you say. “I know the intention of the merger is to benefit both
companies, but there are unintended consequences as well. We need to do
whatever we can to help the employees of both companies get through this
with the fewest glitches possible.”
2
Unit 4 IP 1
Student Name
Assignment Title
Colorado Technical University
Date
Unit 4 IP 2
Introduction
Introduce the topics that you will cover in your paper. Use 12-pt., Times New Roman,
double space, and indent each paragraph throughout your assignment. Each paragraph should
answer assignment questions. Include a topic sentence, at least 2 qualifier sentences, and a
transition, for a total of 4 sentences. Use APA in-text citations where your references are used.
Do not change the document margins. The assignment should be 4–6 pages (plus a title page and
a reference page). Please write the paper to the CEOs.
What set of steps should be used to create the code of conduct?
Briefly explain codes of conduct and outline and describe the steps that should be taken
to create a code of conduct for the new company. Please cite sources from the text and the CTU
Library to support your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter subheading.
What should be included in the code of conduct?
Discuss possible topics that could be covered in the new code of conduct and explain
why topics to be covered in an important consideration. Please cite sources from the text and the
CTU Library to support your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter
subheading.
What impact does a code of conduct have on an organization’s culture?
Describe for the CEOs what the potential impact on the culture of the new company a
code of conduct may have. Please cite sources from the text and the CTU Library to support
your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter subheading.
Conclusion
Summarize the main points of your paper. Be sure to proofread your assignment for
organization, grammar, punctuation, and APA style.
Unit 4 IP 3
References
Cite 3–5 sources in APA format. Here are some examples of references cited in APA
format:
Gliddon, D. G., & Rothwell, W. J. (2018). Innovation leadership. Routledge.
https://login.proxy.cecybrary.com/sso/skillport?context=137758
Khan, M. A., Ismail, F. B., Altaf, H., & Basheer, A. (2020). The interplay of leadership styles,
innovative work behavior, organizational culture, and organizational citizenship
behavior. Sage Open, 10(1).
http://dx.doi.org.proxy.cecybrary.com/10.1177/2158244019898264
Kmec, J. (2012, March 13). Where’s the boss? And what counts as “work”? The Society Pages.
https://thesocietypages.org/socimages/2012/03/13/wheres-the-boss-and-what-counts-aswork/
In this course you will conduct a mini study. You will survey 50 people through any method you choose to find out information on your topic. You will then calculate the statistics for your data. It is important to remember your mini study should use quantitative values since this is a statistics course so you can complete the required calculations. When you pick a topic, make sure it is something people are comfortable answering and that you only use adults. Complete this worksheet and then begin your survey once it is graded so that you can write up your results in Module 7.
Item Description
1 State your topic
2 Who is the population for your claim? Justify your statement.
3 What question(s) will you ask in your survey to gather data on your claim? Explain the rationale for each question.
4 What variables will be in your study? What type of variable are they (ordinal, nominal, discrete, continuous, etc)?
5 Where will you post your survey and how will it reach your target population? (Facebook, email, in person, etc)
6 How will you collect your data? (Survey Monkey, Facebook Question, By hand/Excel, etc)
7 What type of sampling method will you use? Justify your choice and cite a reference supporting your decision.
8 What 2 types of graphs that you have learned about are the most appropriate for your data? Justify your statement and cite a reference supporting your decision.
*Hint: think about if your data may have outliers, is quantitative, is categorical vs interval, etc.
9 What 8 descriptive statistics that you have learned about are the most appropriate for your data? Justify your statement and cite a reference supporting your decision. *Hint: think about if the data has outliers, is quantitative, is categorical vs interval, etc. *Note: if you have more than one survey question you can count statistics on EACH*
Length/Formatting Instructions
Length 2 Pages
Font 12 point , Calibri Font, no more than 1″ margins
Program/File Type Submit in Word
Attachments Should be pasted into the Word document if possible.
Referencing system APA referencing system is necessary in assignments, especially material copied from the Internet.
For examples of correct citations, visit the following link:
http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/560/01/
File Name Last Name_ First Name_ MA260_ M4
M4 Assignment Grading Rubric
Your work will be evaluated on the following criteria:
CATEGORY Exemplary Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Unacceptable
Topic and population 20 points
Student provides a clear topic with an appropriate population that is supported with a clear rationale.
16 points
Student provides a clear topic with an appropriate population that is not supported with a clear rationale.
10 points
Student provides a clear topic with an inappropriate population that is not supported with a clear rationale.
4 points
Student does not provide a topic or a population.
Sampling 20 points
Student provides a clear rationale for the sampling method with a citation. Student has a detailed plan of questions to ask and a plan for how to survey the sample.
16 points
Student provides a clear rationale for the sampling method without a citation. Student has a detailed plan of questions to ask and a plan for how to survey the sample.
10 points
Student provides a clear rationale for the sampling method without a citation. Student lacks a clear plan of questions to ask and a plan for how to survey the sample.
4 points
Student provides a clear rationale for the sampling method without a citation. Student does not include a plan for how to survey the sample.
Graphical Representations of data 20 points
Student clearly describes two graphical representations of data that are appropriate for the variables given with no errors.
16 points
Student clearly describes two graphical representations of data that are appropriate for the variables given with small errors.
10 points
Student clearly describes less than two graphical representations of data that are appropriate for the variables given with some errors.
4 points
Student describes graphical representations that are not appropriate for the given variable types.
Descriptive Statistics 20 points
Student clearly describes 8 descriptive statistics that are appropriate for the variables given with no errors.
16 points
Student clearly describes 8 descriptive statistics that are appropriate for the variables given with small errors.
10 points
Student clearly describes less than 8 descriptive statistics that are appropriate for the variables given with some errors.
4 points
Student describes statistics that are not appropriate for the given variable types.
Student makes no errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
8 points
Student makes 1-2 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
5 points
Student makes 3-4 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
2 points
Student makes more than 4 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
Format – APA Format, Citations, Organization, Transitions 10 points
The paper is written in proper format. All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited correctly. Excellent organization, including a variety of thoughtful transitions.
8 points
The paper is written in proper format with only 1-2 errors. All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and most are cited correctly. Adequate organization includes a variety of appropriate transitions.
5 points
The paper is written in proper format with only 3-5 errors. Most sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited correctly. Essay is poorly organized, but may include a few effective transitions.
2 points
The paper is not written in proper format. Many sources used for quotes and facts are less than credible (suspect) and/or are not cited correctly. Essay is disorganized and does not include effective transitions.
Answer the questions below about your data adhering to the outlined criteria in complete sentences. Cite any outside sources that are used.
Item Description
1 Treat your data just as you would one of the datasets from the homework. Be sure you include appropriate measures of central tendency and dispersion etc.
2 Construct a frequency distribution using 5 –8 classes.
3 Create 2 different but appropriate visual representations of your data (pie chart, bar graph, etc). You MUST use Excel to do this.
4 Complete the calculations for the 8 statistics you identified in your worksheet in week 3. You MUST use Excel to do this.
5 Write a brief paragraph describing the meaning or interpretation for EACH of the statistics. For example, if some of the statistics chosen were the mean, median and mode, which is the best measure?
6 Construct a 95% Confidence Interval to estimate the population mean/proportion in the claim.
7 Complete the calculations for the 8 statistics you identified in your What can you conclude from this result regarding the topic?
8 Write up the responses to these questions in an APA paper between 500-1,000 words.
Length/Formatting Instructions
Length 500-1,000 Words
Font 12 point , Calibri Font, no more than 1″ margins
Program/File Type Submit in Word
Attachments Should be pasted into the Word document if possible.
Referencing system APA referencing system is necessary in assignments, especially material copied from the Internet.
For examples of correct citations, visit the following link:
http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/560/01/
File Name Last Name_ First Name_ MA260_ M7
M7 Assignment Grading Rubric
Your work will be evaluated on the following criteria:
CATEGORY Exemplary Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Unacceptable
Confidence Interval: Accurate 95% confidence interval constructed for the data set. 25 points
An accurate 95% confidence level is constructed with no errors. Thorough description of the meaning of the confidence interval is provided containing no errors.
20 points
An accurate 95% confidence level is constructed with at most one minor error. Description of the meaning of the confidence interval is given with no errors.
15 points
An accurate 95% confidence level is constructed with a few minor errors. A minimal description of the meaning of the confidence interval is given but contains minor errors.
4 points
An inaccurate 95% confidence level is constructed. Description of the meaning of the confidence interval is included but contains significant errors.
Conclusions using statistics: A clear conclusion is reached regarding if the claim is valid or not for the data gathered in the survey. 25 points
A clear and thoroughly explained conclusion is reached regarding the validity of the claim.
20 points
A clear and simple conclusion is reached regarding the validity of the claim.
15 points
A conclusion is reached regarding the validity of the claim but minor logical or technical errors are present.
4 points
The conclusion is not clear regarding the validity of the claim. Numerous and/or significant errors are present.
Interpreting Statistical Data: Statistics have been explained in simple terms that are understandable by an audience that is not familiar with statistics. 25 points
The 8 statistics, associated visuals, and confidence interval are explained in simple terms. An audience not familiar with statistics can easily understand the significance of each component and how it relates to the original claim.
20 points
The 8 statistics, visuals, and confidence interval are explained mostly in simple terms. An audience not familiar with statistics can easily understand the significance with minor difficulty.
15 points
The 8 statistics, visuals, and confidence interval are explained but done so in a manner such that an audience not familiar with statistics may not easily understand the significance.
4 points
An attempt was made to explain the 8 statistics, visuals, and confidence interval but an audience not familiar with statistics would not be able to understand the explanation.
Student makes no errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
8 points
Student makes 1-2 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
5 points
Student makes 3-4 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
2 points
Student makes more than 4 errors in grammar or spelling that distract the reader from the content.
Format – APA Format, Citations, Organization, Transitions 15 points
The paper is written in proper format. All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited correctly. Excellent organization, including a variety of thoughtful transitions.
10 points
The paper is written in proper format with only 1-2 errors. All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and most are cited correctly. Adequate organization includes a variety of appropriate transitions.
5 points
The paper is written in proper format with only 3-5 errors. Most sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited correctly. Essay is poorly organized, but may include a few effective transitions.
2 points
The paper is not written in proper format. Many sources used for quotes and facts are less than credible (suspect) and/or are not cited correctly. Essay is disorganized and does not include effective transitions.
Each student will present chapters from the What Great Teachers Do Differently, 17 Things that Matter Most. Each presentation should be no more than 5 minutes and should be presented on the date scheduled. Each of you will present in the schedule listed below. Summarize Chapter 14.
Each student will select a court case to report on. The following format will be used to describe the selected court case:
I. Citation
II. Topic
III. Issue
IV. Facts
V. Findings
VI. Reasoning
The report on this case should be clear and concise using at least 300 words as you describe this court case. This case will be reported both verbally as well as written in Canvas.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
March 2023 (67)
LEGAL UPDATE FOR SCHOOL ADMINISTRATORS
March 2023
Johnny R. Purvis aka Doc*
West Education Law Reporter
August 4, 2022–400 Ed. Law No. 3 (Pages 885-1169) – #16
August 18, 2022–401 Ed Law No. 1 (Pages 1-687) – #17
The Legal Update for School Administrators is sponsored by:
William Carey University School of Education
And
PREPS Inc., Dr. Chuck Benigno, Executive Director
The Legal Update is a monthly update of selected significant court cases in the United
States pertaining to school administration and general school district operations. It is funded and
sponsored by William Carey University’s School of Education and PREPS Inc. If you have any
questions or comments about the selected cases and their potential ramifications, please contact
Johnny R. Purvis by phone (601-310-4559) or email (jpurvis@uca.edu) or Dr. Ben Burnett, Dean
of the College of Education at William Carey University.
Topics:
–
Abuse and Harassment
Athletics
Civil Right
Labor and Employment
Records
Torts
Topics:
Abuse and Harassment
Parents of female student who was killed in school by a male student plausibly alleged that
appropriate school officials were deliberately indifferent to harassment, as an element of a
Title IX claim.
Wiley v. Bd. of Educ. of St. Mary’s County (D. Md., 557 F. Supp. 3d 645), August 30, 2021.
Background: Jaelynn Willey and Austin Rollins attended Great Mills High School in St.
Mary’s County, Maryland. Beginning in 2017 they entered into a romantic relationship. Soon
thereafter, Austin began to physically and verbally pressure Jaelynn to engage in sexual activity,
which she did not want; thereafter, he became possessive, controlling, and manipulative and the
relationship quickly soured. Rollins would text Jaelynn and contact her over social media even
though she repeatedly requested that he stop contacting her In addition he repeatedly texted and
1
harassed her friends at school. Soon thereafter, Rollins’ behavior escalated. He would grab her,
push her, and yell at her outside of her classrooms. In addition, he stalked her on school property
by following her to her vehicle after school, showing up after each class, and following her
around the school’s hallways. Rollins frequently harmed Jaelynn physically, causing pain by
grabbing and squeezing her arms and wrists. In addition, he texted Jaelynn’s friends indicating
that he was planning on killing himself. Jaelynn’s parents advised school officials, including
Jaelynn’s swim coach and teacher, whom they trusted. On March 20, 2018, at the beginning of
the school day, Rollins entered Great Mills High School with a 9mm handgun, walked to
hallway F and shot Jaelynn in the head outside classroom F06. The bullet exited Jaelynn and hit
another student in the leg. Afterward, Rollins continued to walk around the school with the
pistol in hand. Eventually, Rollins was confronted by Deputy Gaskill in a school hallway and
arrested.
The United States District Court, D. Maryland, Southern Division stated the following:
(1) Parents of female high school student who was killed in school by a male student plausibly
alleged that appropriate school officials were deliberately indifferent to male student’s
harassment “as an element of claim” against the board of education and school for student-onstudent sexual harassment in violation of Title IX. Furthermore, school officials had actual
notice of harassment, took no action in response, and school officials’ “inaction” increased
the danger and made female student vulnerable to harassment. The court went on to state:
The parents of the female high school student who was killed in school by a male student
plausibly alleged that “appropriate school officials” had actual notice of the male student’s
harassment”, as an element of claim against board of education in violation of Title IX. The
parents of the deceased female student directly advised the student’s teacher that they were
concerned about the male student’s behavior and expressed concern about their daughter’s
safety. The teacher overhead conversations between female student and her friends about the
male student’s harassment and violent behavior. After hearing the aforementioned
conversations, the teacher related the information and concerns to superiors pursuant to school
reporting policy (“reasonable and prudent person standard”). Therefore, school officials knew
and had knowledge of observed harassment and stalking of the male student toward the
female student.
Athletics
High school did not voluntarily undertake an enhanced duty to supervise the varsity locker
room during summer football training camp.
Dean v. De La Salle of New Orleans, Inc. (La. App. 4 Circuit, 334 So. 3d 425), December 21,
2021.
On or about July 1, 2014, Roland Dean, a high school student, was attending a summer
football training camp at De La Salle High School. At some point, the student-athletes were sent
to the varsity locker room and the head coach and assistant coaches went into the coach’s room
to prepare for a team meeting. At some point the plaintiff (Roland Dean aka Roland) began
tossing a football with other students. Shortly thereafter, Clark (student) begins taunting Roland
about his skills and the two exchanged words. After a verbal exchange the two began shoving,
pushing, and Clark punched Roland in his shoulder injuring (dislocated shoulder with the
clavicle pushed dangerously close to and pressing against a major artery and blood vessels) him.
Due to the injury Roland required extensive surgery, received occupational and physical therapy
2
for many months, and remans partially and permanently disabled to this day. Parents sued the
head coach and assistant coaches seeking to recover various damages caused by the injury. The
District Court, Orleans Parish granted summary judgment for the high school and coaches.
Afterward the plaintiffs appealed to the Court of Appeals of Louisiana, Fourth Circuit. The
Court of Appeals stated that the high school did not voluntarily undertake an enhanced duty
to supervise varsity high school locker room at school during summer training camp held at
school, for purposes of action alleging that the school breached its duty of supervision of its
students with regard to physical altercation that occurred in varsity locker room between two
attendees of the camp. Neither the coaches nor school officials were informed of any specific
immediate threat or of any prior “animus” (hostility or ill feelings) between attendees. The fight
was a spontaneous, unforeseeable act that ended quickly, and it was unreasonable to expect
the school to constantly monitor the locker room.
Civil Rights
School district’s expulsion of a public high school student, based on posting violent song
lyrics to social media, outside school hours and off school property, violated his free speech
rights (U.S. 1st Amendment).
Appeal of G.S. by and through Snyder (Pa. Commonwealth, 269 A. 3d 718), January 7, 2022.
Commonwealth Court of Pennsylvania held that a school district’s decision to expel a
public high school male student (16 years of age and 11th grader) based on his act of posting
violent song lyrics to social media ((Snapchat where he had 60 to 65 followers), outside of
school hours and while not on school property, violated his free speech rights under both the
federal (U. S.) and Pennsylvania constitutions. The speech occurred off-campus, student did not
explicitly target specific students or broader school district community, speech was not distinctly
connected to school activities, student repeatedly and consistently insisted that he neither meant
nor desired to hurt anyone. Furthermore, the student had his character attested to by his parents
and psychologist, who each maintained that the student was not a violent person or a threat to
others. The student’s post: “Everyone, I despise everyone! F— you, eat s—, blackout, and the
world is a graveyard! All of you, I will f—— kill off all of you! This is me, thus is my snap!
Child consuming alcohol was not “expressive conduct” and therefore a public school
district could regulate the student’s conduct without violating the First Amendment.
Cheadle on behalf of N.C. v. North Platte R-1 School Dist. (W.D. Mo., 555 F. Supp. 3d 726),
August 16, 2021.
The United States District Court, W. D. Missouri, Saint Joseph Division held that a child
th
(8 grader on the girls basketball team) consuming alcohol was not expressive conduct, and
thus public school district could regulate the student’s conduct without violating the First
Amendment, in mother’s action on behalf of the child. Plaintiff alleged that school officials’
suspension of her youngster from participating in volleyball games due to the student posting
videos on social media of herself drinking alcohol violated her “free speech rights” under the 1st
Amendment. The “intended message” of a minor drinking alcohol was not apparent. The
child’s alcohol consumption was an illegal act and the her mother failed to identify the
particularized message the child intended to convey through her conduct.
Labor and Employment
3
Black drama teacher did not plausibly allege race-based discrimination in the lack of
second supplemental payment for staging student performances.
Tabb v. Bd. of Educ. of Durham Public Schools (C.A.4 [N.C.], 29 F.4th 148), March 2, 2022.
Black drama teacher (longtime and successful drama teacher) at a public high school with
a magnet program for arts and drama failed to plausibly allege that school board’s failure to pay
him a theater technical director supplement in addition to the theater director supplement that he
already received in connection with staging student performances constituted “race based
employment discrimination in violation of Title VII and Section 1981 (civil rights). Although
the complaint alleged that the teacher worked excessively long hours for his after-school work
with students, the complaint did not allege that the school board mandated those hours as a
requirement of the teacher’s job or that any performing arts teacher in the school district received
more than one performing arts supplement.
Records
Teacher effectuated (made happen) a “prohibited disclosure” under Family Educational
Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) and board policy by transferring confidential education
records to herself.
Ferry v. Bd. of Educ. of Jefferson City Public School Dist. (Mo., 641 S.W.3d 203), January 11,
2022.
The Supreme Court of Missouri, en banc. held competent and substantial evidence
supported school district board of education finding that tenured teacher effectuated a
“prohibited disclosure” within the meaning of The Family Educational Rights and Privacy
Act (FERPA) and school board policies that imposed a duty to keep educational records secure
and confidential when she transferred filed containing confidential student information to her
personal online storage account. In order for the teacher to be terminated under the Teacher
Tenure Act the school district had to demonstrate that the teacher had no legitimate
education interest in accessing and transferring the confidential student information to her
personal online storage account. The plaintiff performed the aforenoted act in an effort to use
them in her discrimination suit against the school district.
Torts
Teacher’s evidence to show (demonstrate) that department had actual notice of hazard was
“insufficient” to demonstrate (show) a “prima facie” (a party’s production of enough
evidence to allow the fact-trier to infer the fact at issue and rule in the party’s favor)
entitlement for summary judgment.
Marazita v. City of New York (N.Y.A.D. 2 Dept., 163 N.Y.S.3d 219), February 16, 2022.
The Supreme Court of New York, Appellate Division held that on a motion for summary
judgment in a personal injury action, evidence submitted by a teacher regarding whether the city
department of education had actual notice of hazardous condition was insufficient to establish
her prima facie entitlement to judgment as a matter of law in action against the city
department of education. The teacher (plaintiff) alleged that when she was assisting students
during school dismissal, she was struck by falling ice on the exterior grounds of the school
building. Evidence “merely” demonstrated (showed) that the department of education “had a
4
general awareness that snow and ice “may” accumulate on the exposed surface of the school
building and air conditioning units during the winter months and did not demonstrate that it was
aware of snow or ice ever previously falling from those surfaces.
A school could not claim enforcement immunity under the Indiana Tort Claims Act (ITCA)
for its “failure” to comply with its own general school dismissal procedures.
Hopkins v. Indianapolis Public Schools (Ind. App., 183 N.E.3d 308), January 31, 2022.
Note: The Court of Appeals of Indiana reversed and remanded this case back to the lower
court. Therefore, the outcome is probably forthcoming at some point in the future.
The writer wanted to include the case due to the nature and importance of the topic.
On August 7, 2018, seven year old DeShawn Yarbrough attended his second day of first
grade at Waldo Emerson School 58 in the Indianapolis Public School District. DeShawn had
ridden the school bus to his school that morning, and at the end of the school day he got in line to
go home on the bus just as he had done the previous day. As he was waiting in line to get on the
bus, a teacher removed DeShawn from the line and informed him that he was designated as a
“walker” and that he should not ride the school bus home. Please note: DeShawn had a “blue
tag” attached to his book bag to identify him as a bus rider. Despite DeShawn showing the
teacher his “blue tag”, he was mistakenly directed to leave the school bus line and go to the area
where designated walkers congregated before walking home. DeShawn home was
approximately 1.2 miles away from his elementary school with many very busy streets in
between his home and the school. The young fellow walked at least a mile in the wrong
direction, approached by a homeless man, chased by dogs which caused him to fall, and crossed
major thoroughfare alone at rush hour. Eventually, a stranger found DeShawn, called the school
and the police to inform them of his whereabouts, and took him to her home. The stranger then
messaged DeShawn’s mother on Facebook to tell her that she had found him.
DeShawn’s parents filed a complaint against the school district and school officials
alleging that the school breached its “duty” of reasonable care, supervision, and wrongful
releasing him to walk home alone.
Note: The local court (The Supreme Court of Marion County, Jason Reyome, Magistrate)
granted summary judgment in favor of the school. Parents appealed to the Court of Appeals of
Indiana.
Thanks for allowing me to serve.
Strength and honor
An Old Retired Teach-Cop
*Note: Johnny R. Purvis retired August 2003, (30.5 years) from the University of Southern
Mississippi (USM) as a professor in the Department of School Administration, Director of the
Education Service Center in the College of Education and Psychology, Executive Director of the
Southern Education Consortium, and Director of the Mississippi Safe School Center at the
University of Southern Mississippi. After retiring from USM, he was hired as a professor in the
Department of Leadership Studies at the University of Central Arkansas (UCA) in August 2003,
and retired December 31, 2013. He also served as teacher, coach, school administrator, and
member of a county school board in Mississippi. In addition, he retired as a law enforcement
officer having served in both Mississippi and Arkansas. He can be reached at the following
phone number: 601-310-4559 or e-mail: jpurvis@uca.edu.
5
MGMT 330 – Exercises #8 & #9: Lists and Dictionaries
Google Folder:https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1pwB5otUS53…
(This exercise will count as double in the final grading)
Objectives:
Skill in creating a list and in doing all operations on a list.
Basic understanding of dictionaries.
Tasks:
(See lecture videos and lecture notebooks for hints)
Download the following file and then upload it to Google Colab: Homework_Lists_Dictionaries_Notebook.ipynb
Complete all 15 code chunks in this notebook.
Download your completed notebook from Google Colab into your computer
Rename the notebook: lastname-firstname-8-9.ipynb, e.g., flintstone-fred-8-9.ipynb
Deliverables:
Upload lastname-firstname-8-9.ipynb to canvas.
In the Canvas comment box provide feedback on the challenges you faced doing the assignment (if any) and/or anything you liked about it (if anything).
Rubric:
A: All tasks questions in the notebook completed correctly and any explanations given are accurate.
B: Most tasks and questions in the notebook completed but with minor errors.
C: Key tasks or questions not completed.
D: Major conceptual issues.
F: Nothing turned in.
make sure to avoid plagiarism as much as possible.
ensure that you follow the APA style in your reference.
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
I Want to help me to solve the assignment and fouces about the requirements inside
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment (2)
Deadline: Saturday 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Cost Accounting
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ACCT 301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year: 1445 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 15)
Q1. Discuss with suitable examples why activity-based costing (ABC) is better than the
traditional costing system. Provide a suitable numerical example of ABC in the manufacturing
sector and show all the necessary calculations required under the ABC system.
(3 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples showing all the calculations of the
ABC system. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they should
not be copied from any sources.
(Chapter 7)
Answer:
Q2. “A non-routine decision is one that is taken in response to a non-repetitive, operational
scenario.” Comment on this statement and explain with suitable examples the various types of
non-routine operating decisions that a company makes under such a scenario. Support your
answer with numerical examples along with qualitative considerations involved in making such
decisions.
(4 Marks)
Note: Your answer must include suitable numerical examples for various types of non-routine
operating decisions. You are required to assume values of numerical examples of your own and they
should not be copied from any sources.
Answer:
(Chapter 4)
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Q3. ADLG Company has two support departments, SS1 and SS2, and two operating
departments, OD1 and OD2. The company has decided to use the direct method and allocate
variable SS1 dept. costs based on the number of transactions and fixed SS1 dept. costs based on
the number of employees. SS2 dept. variable costs will be allocated based on the number of
service requests and fixed costs will be allocated based on the number of computers. The
following values have been extracted for the allocation:
(4 Marks)
Support Departments
Operating Departments
SS1
SS2
OD1
OD2
Total Department variable costs
16,000
19,000
105,000
68,000
Total department fixed costs
19,500
34,000
120,000
55,000
Number of transactions
50
55
250
140
Number of employees
18
24
47
38
Number of service requests
37
22
26
32
Number of computers
20
25
31
37
You are required to allocate variable and fixed costs.
(Chapter 8)
Answer:
Q4. JKL Company processes a direct material and produces three products: P1, P2, and P3. The
joint costs of the three products in 2018 were SAR 120,000. The total number of units for each
product and the selling price per unit is given below:
(4 Marks)
Product
Units
Selling Price per unit
P1
55,000
SAR 70
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
P2
34,500
SAR 58
P3
10,500
SAR 44
You are required to use the physical volume method and sales value at the split-off method to
allocate the joint costs to each product.
Answer:
(Chapter 9)
Primary Task Response: Within the Discussion Board area, write 400–600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. This will be the foundation for future discussions by your classmates. Be substantive and clear, and use examples to reinforce your ideas.Theresa and Mike understand that building the culture they envision for the newly merged company JEANSTYLE requires effective communication, collaboration, and participative problem solving. They envision creating an organization such that Joe and other employees will know exactly what to do when faced with choices that involve ethics. As the first step in embedding clear ethical processes in the organization, they realize they need to devise a code of conduct. Both companies have operated with an unwritten code that was never formalized. You have been asked to help them understand the purpose and content of an excellent code of conduct and how they should go about developing it.Review the scenario for this course, and answer the following questions:What is the purpose of a code of conduct? Evaluate the code of conduct of Levi Strauss, and describe the ethical principles it includes. In your own work experience, have you seen similar ethical principles used in organizations and, if so, which ones?Responses to Other Students: Respond to at least 2 of your fellow classmates with at least a 200-word reply about their Primary Task Response regarding items you found to be compelling and enlightening. To help you with your discussion, please consider the following questions:What did you learn from your classmate’s posting? What additional questions do you have after reading the posting? What clarification do you need regarding the posting? What differences or similarities do you see between your posting and other classmates’ postings?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
Note: All character and company names are fictional and are not intended to
depict any actual person or business.
Knowing that mergers may require a dramatic change in company culture,
you realize that you need to meet with the human resources (HR) and
leadership teams because they will play important roles in the merger. The
leadership team will drive the change, and the HR team will be charged with
managing the change. You have scheduled a meeting with Steve Maine, your
vice president at ALTAP consulting, to consult with him on this project.
“Thanks for meeting me today, Steve,” you begin. “I need to talk through
some of the issues before meeting with the HR and leadership teams at
UWEAR and PALEDENIM. The merger is going well, but it is becoming
apparent that there are some significant change issues that need to be
addressed.”
“I’ve heard good things about your work on this project,” Steve answers. “I’m
sure you have it under control, but I’ll be happy to help where I can.”
“We are dealing with the issues of joining together two very disparate
companies,” you explain. “On the one hand, UWEAR is public and has 100
employees; on the other hand, PALEDENIM is private with only 15
employees. They basically provide the same type of service, but they are
completely different businesses in how they operate inside and outside of the
company.”
You continue, “Yes, and both the employees and managers of each company
have different philosophies and expectations. PALEDENIM employees and
managers have a kind of ‘one-for-all and all-for-one’ attitude. They all chip in
to get the job done. The UWEAR employees and managers look at things
differently. They’re more apt to do their jobs, get them done, and go home
without consideration for what else the rest of the team needs to complete.”
“That is definitely a culture issue,” Steve agrees. “In fact, that is the classic
definition of a culture issue. I’m sure they’re also dealing with the typical
power struggles. I bet everyone is worried about whether their department
will be headed by a UWEAR manager or a PALEDENIM manager.”
1
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
“Exactly,” you say. “I know the intention of the merger is to benefit both
companies, but there are unintended consequences as well. We need to do
whatever we can to help the employees of both companies get through this
with the fewest glitches possible.”
2
Unit 4 IP 1
Student Name
Assignment Title
Colorado Technical University
Date
Unit 4 IP 2
Introduction
Introduce the topics that you will cover in your paper. Use 12-pt., Times New Roman,
double space, and indent each paragraph throughout your assignment. Each paragraph should
answer assignment questions. Include a topic sentence, at least 2 qualifier sentences, and a
transition, for a total of 4 sentences. Use APA in-text citations where your references are used.
Do not change the document margins. The assignment should be 4–6 pages (plus a title page and
a reference page). Please write the paper to the CEOs.
What set of steps should be used to create the code of conduct?
Briefly explain codes of conduct and outline and describe the steps that should be taken
to create a code of conduct for the new company. Please cite sources from the text and the CTU
Library to support your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter subheading.
What should be included in the code of conduct?
Discuss possible topics that could be covered in the new code of conduct and explain
why topics to be covered in an important consideration. Please cite sources from the text and the
CTU Library to support your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter
subheading.
What impact does a code of conduct have on an organization’s culture?
Describe for the CEOs what the potential impact on the culture of the new company a
code of conduct may have. Please cite sources from the text and the CTU Library to support
your explanation. Replace the question above with a shorter subheading.
Conclusion
Summarize the main points of your paper. Be sure to proofread your assignment for
organization, grammar, punctuation, and APA style.
Unit 4 IP 3
References
Cite 3–5 sources in APA format. Here are some examples of references cited in APA
format:
Gliddon, D. G., & Rothwell, W. J. (2018). Innovation leadership. Routledge.
https://login.proxy.cecybrary.com/sso/skillport?context=137758
Khan, M. A., Ismail, F. B., Altaf, H., & Basheer, A. (2020). The interplay of leadership styles,
innovative work behavior, organizational culture, and organizational citizenship
behavior. Sage Open, 10(1).
http://dx.doi.org.proxy.cecybrary.com/10.1177/2158244019898264
Kmec, J. (2012, March 13). Where’s the boss? And what counts as “work”? The Society Pages.
https://thesocietypages.org/socimages/2012/03/13/wheres-the-boss-and-what-counts-aswork/
You can see the attached . I want you to work on the final report file and have all the files from which you need information about the final report.The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space. Main headings use font size of 16 and bold. Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code:
Student’s ID Number:
Semester:
CRN:
Academic Year: 144 /144 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Level of Marks:
Secondary address separator
Secondary address
Text
Text
Text
Text
Thank You
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
PERIODIC REPORT No: 1
Internship Student Report | Month ….
Start Date: _20_/_8_/2023
End Date: __21_/__9_/__2023.
Student’s Name: Zahrah Essa Bomoza
Student’s ID Number: S190053781
Training Organization: Royal Commission Hospital
Trainee Department: Business Development unit
Trainee Supervisor Name: Turki Almalki
Course: MGT430
Faculty Member: Nouf Alhajri
CRN: 10675
Academic Year/Semester: 2023-2024 /1st semester
(Instructions)
➢ This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
➢ Email submission will not be accepted.
➢ Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
➢ Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool.
➢ Late submission will result in ZERO marks being awarded.
➢ This work should be your own, copying from students or other resources will result in ZERO
marks.
➢ Use Times New Roman font 12 for all your answers.
1
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
(Report Components)
Task(s)
New skill(s)
Meeting(s)
What are the activities and tasks given to you during this
month?
I started working at the Royal Commission Hospital under
the management of the Business Development unit.
One of the activities and tasks that I worked on this month in
the Medical Approvals Department.
1-Adherence to discipline, safety, and other procedures.
2- Effective communication with staff and patients.
3- Get to know a department BDU (Business Development
unit) tasks (all below)
• BDU 3 divisions – Utilization, Eligibility, & Contracts.
4- Utilization includes case management, pre-approval, and
insurance.
5-Well understanding of insurance patients and patients’
rights and responsibilities.
What skills did you learn through the month?
The skills you learned during this month.
1- The ability to work under pressure, which helped me
acquire the skill of endurance and patience for the
many important things.
2- Communication skill between patients, staff and
administrative staff.
3- self-motivation.
4- Management time successfully.
How many meetings did you attend?
I attended three meetings this month and it was my first time
joining the team and clarifying the tasks that would be asked
of me. Attendance and departure dates and identify team
members. Then learn in detail about work tasks and get
acquainted with the medical approval system and how to
apply for medical approval.
2
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
What are the difficulties you had this month?
1-Technical challenges: represented in the need to continue
updating training and development tools to keep up with
modern technical developments.
2- Financial challenges: represented in the difficulty of
allocating the necessary budget for training and development,
as well as the challenges of estimating the return on
investment in training and development.
3- Skills shortage challenges: represented in the difficulty of
finding employees with the necessary skills for training and
development, and in updating the current skills of the
organization’s employees to accommodate the new
challenges.
4- Leadership Challenges: These include challenges related
to providing administrative support, good management of
training and development, and bringing about change and
making it continuous.
Difficulty/ Challenge(s)
How did you overcome these difficulties?
1- Keeping pace with the latest developments in the field of
health care and data analysis, enhancing public relations with
patients, and maintaining complete patient confidentiality.
2-Make sure that your business office is provided with
appropriate Internet quality from network providers. But
most importantly, always have a backup plan that you can
fall back on in the event of an unexpected breakdown.
3- I suggest that allocating a special budget to develop and
train our new employees helps encourage team spirit and set
budget and departmental goals.
4- I suggest holding training courses under the supervision of
specialists and administrators to develop new skills for
current employees.
3
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
What did you learn from completing the tasks
Through my training period in the Medical Approvals
Department, my knowledge of business and management
theories turned into a series of practical techniques and skills
that I can now implement in real businesses, all thanks to my
training period that helped me connect what I learned at the
university and the workplace.
Learning
With the actual work experience, I gained confidence in
myself and my abilities to discover that I can handle different
tasks and solve professional challenges. I will also learn how
to rely on myself and make the right decisions in the work
environment. All of this will contribute to improving my
level of self-confidence and progress in my field of work as
an administrative employee.
What did you want to learn more?
1- I want to learn how to get the job done correctly and faster,
and this will help me develop my management skills.
2- Also, I want to adapt to the work team, stimulating
teamwork, and enhancing team spirit among us, especially
since I was feeling isolated at the beginning of my training
period, which caused me difficulty in adapting to the team.
3-Dealing with the medical approval system in a clearer and
more understandable manner.
*Note:
1. This report is a summary of the training activities performed.
2. You may attach additional pages if needed. And student can attach any extra note to this form.
Name: _ Zahrah Essa Bomoza ____ Signature: _____
4
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
PERIODIC REPORT No: 2
Internship Student Report | Month ….
Start Date: 21 / 9 /2023
End Date: 12/ 10/ 2023.
Student’s Name: Zahrah Essa Bomoza
Student’s ID Number: S190053781
Training Organization: Royal Commission Hospital
Trainee Department: Business Development unit
Trainee Supervisor Name: Turki Almalki
Course: MGT430
Faculty Member: Nouf Alhajri
CRN: 10675
Academic Year/Semester: 2023-2024 /1st semester
(Instructions)
➢ This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
➢ Email submission will not be accepted.
➢ Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
➢ Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool.
➢ Late submission will result in ZERO marks being awarded.
➢ This work should be your own, copying from students or other resources will result in ZERO
marks.
➢ Use Times New Roman font 12 for all your answers.
1
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
(Report Components)
What are the activities and tasks given to you during this
month?
1-I worked on Medical PRE-Approval- (In. patient-OUT
patient)
2-I worked on a system best care system (The system works
on requests to the insurance company for the reimbursement
of all costs associated with their treatment.
3- I worked on NPHIES is the national platform for health
and insurance exchange services.
Task(s)
4- I got an idea about (Wassel)
It is a platform that aims to fill gaps in the healthcare system,
making it more efficient, accessible, and responsive to the
needs of providers, payers, and patients alike.
5-Coordinate, monitor and evaluate patient consent and
inquiries per credit and insurance systems. Verify the identity
of the beneficiary before providing the service.
What skills did you learn through the month?
The skills you learned during this month:
1-The ability to deal with patients in an appropriate manner,
and this enhances the practical relations between the
New skill(s)
employee and the patient.
2-Working with the team, by distributing tasks among the
team members so that they can be accomplished easily,
helping others when needed, and requesting assistance from
supervisors when facing a problem.
2
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
3-Increasing team productivity, which leads to faster
completion of tasks.
4-The ability to solve problems and make practical decisions
with confidence.
How many meetings did you attend?
I attended two meetings this month that revolved around
organizing tasks among team members and clarifying how to
Meeting(s)
save medical approvals in the system and the mechanism for
developing the DHS system for uploading approvals.
What are the difficulties you had this month?
1-Lack of information and misunderstanding.
2-Shortcomings in terms of technical and technical support
requirements.
3-Weak communication between departments.
4-The personal interest factor prevails over the public
interest.
5-Negative environment in the workplace.
Difficulty/ Challenge(s)
How did you overcome these difficulties?
1-Contributing to employees’ promotion of the organization’s
goals or policies and enhancing their capabilities and
inclinations.
2-Follow everything that happens within the organization in
real time from anywhere.
3-Linking the organization’s departments into a central
system that allows cooperation among the work team.
3
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
4-Saving a lot of time and effort for employees by providing
many features that facilitate the completion of operations.
5-Make optimal use of all available opportunities so that you
can advance your organization to safety.
What did you learn from completing the tasks
1-Focus on developing my strengths and using them
effectively.
2-The work is completed in a timely manner and is not
postponed.
3-Learn to focus on changing the situation rather than trying
to change a person.
4-Learning from failure situations and exploiting them
positively in my work tasks
Learning
What did you want to learn more?
1-Learn how to manage people
2-The skill of thinking about life
3-Mindfulness is one of the most important mental skills you
can create.
4-I consider mindfulness a “mental” skill, but it touches
many aspects of our lives. It reduces stress, helps reduce
suffering from a lot of pain and illness, and can generally
help us feel healthy, happy, and fit because of the mind-body
connection.3-Take advantage of critical thinking.
5-Leadertship and social influence.
4
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
6-Collaboration, not competition – Employees should be
open to collaboration and the free flow of new ideas within
the team, which is crucial for companies to remain
innovative.
*Note:
1. This report is a summary of the training activities performed.
2. You may attach additional pages if needed. And student can attach any extra note to this form.
Name: _ Zahrah Essa Bomoza ____ Signature: _____
5
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form Number 3 – PERIODIC REPORT
Internship Student Report | Month #?
Start Date:12 /_10/_2023
End Date: ___/_11_/ 2023.
Student’s Name: Zahrah Essa Bomoza
Student’s ID Number: S190053781
Training Organization: Royal Commission
Hospital
Trainee Department: Business Development unit
Trainee Supervisor Name: Turki Almalki
Faculty Member: Nouf Alhajri
Course: MGT430
CRN: 10675
Academic Year/Semester: 2023-2024 /1st semester
(Instructions)
➢ This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
➢ Email submission will not be accepted.
➢ Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
➢ Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool.
➢ Late submission will result in ZERO marks being awarded.
➢ This work should be your own, copying from students or other resources will result in ZERO
marks.
➢ Use Times New Roman font 12 for all your answers.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
(Report Components)
What are the activities and tasks given to you during this
month?
1-Providing excellent service and smooth interaction between
clinical and patient services.
2-Review patients’ data and all entries by medical providers.
Task(s)
3-Follow up and review and cases related.
4-Review insurance patients request.
5-Learn about Revenue Cycle Management (RCM)
What skills did you learn through the month?
The skills you learned during this month:
1-Develop strategies by increasing opportunities to meet and
talk with target contacts.
2- Planning and evaluation and work development.
New skill(s)
3-Attention to detail.
4-Speed in completion.
5-Honesty, honesty, and maintaining patient confidentiality.
How many meetings did you attend?
I attended one meeting and it was about praising the
Meeting(s)
employees’ efforts while positively motivating them,
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
contributing to improving the culture of the work
environment, and offering suggestions freely in order to
develop the company and help in its growth.
What are the difficulties you had this month?
1-Criticism and negativity in the work environment in
general.
2-Selfishness and not giving others the opportunity to
discuss.
3-Interpreting topics based on personal thinking and selfinterpretation.
4-Ask questions that embody hidden intentions.
Difficulty/ Challenge(s)
How did you overcome these difficulties?
1-Prepare well before completing the required tasks.
2-Arranging work on a schedule and contributing to
presenting ideas and discussing them collectively.
3-By acknowledging the mistakes that have been committed,
and not making flimsy justifications or hiding the mistakes,
solutions and suggestions must be put in place to fix the
problem and correct the mistake soon, while taking excuses
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
and giving oneself a new opportunity to amend what has
been vandalized.
4-Show feelings of optimism to the work team.
What did you learn from completing the tasks
1-Negotiation skills
At some point in your career, you will have to make
agreements with employers, co-workers, or outside parties
on minor and even major issues. Therefore, learning the art
of negotiation and compromise in the workplace is essential.
2-Reflect on your recent challenges
3-Documentation
Learning
You will find it easier to analyze what you have learned if you
keep a written record.
What did you want to learn more?
1-Take advantage of critical thinking.
2-Leadership and social influence.
3-Collaboration, not competition – Employees should be
open to collaboration and the free flow of new ideas within
the team, which is crucial for companies to remain
innovative.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
*Note:
1. This report is a summary of the training activities performed.
2. You may attach additional pages if needed. And student can attach any extra note to this form.
Name: _ Zahrah Essa Bomoza ____ Signature: _____
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form No 4- Internship Report Cover Page
Student`s name:
Student`s ID #:
Training Organization:
Trainee Department:
Field Instructor Name:
Field Instructor Signature:
Course Title:
CRN:
Internship Start Date:
Internship End Date:
Academic Year/Semester:
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Total Training Hours /280
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained /30
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Academic Report Guideline(Co-op)
(please do not include this text in the final report, just follow its guidelines and
use the cover page above)
The report should be submitted within two weeks after you finish your Co-op training Program.
In addition, the report should be approximately 3000 – 4000, single –spaced and consider taking the
following format
General instructions for writing the final report:
The report must be written in English language.
The word limit is 3000-4000.
If the report word count is not within the required word limit, marks will be deducted.
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Plagiarism or copying from other sources will result in ZERO marks.
This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This
includes filling your information on the cover page.
Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool. Late submission will result in ZERO marks
being awarded.
First Page
The first page should display the student’s full name, internship start and finish dates, working hours per
week, company/institution name, and the cover page.
The field instructor should sign on the first page.
A Brief Executive Summary of the Internship
A one-page summary of the company/institution and a short account of the major activities carried out
during the internship period.
Acknowledgment
To allow the student to express her/his thankful and gratitude to individuals (such as: field instructor,
academic supervisor, colleagues…etc.) who help them in carrying out and completing her/his training
journey. This part will aid the students to learn basic elements of academic writing. To express their
appreciation in a concise and professional manner.
Table of Contents
Contents of the report with page numbers, list of tables, and list of figures.
Introduction
A brief of the report. The Aim of the report.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Chapter 1: Description of the company
This section should answer the following questions:
What is the full title of the company/institution?
Give a brief history of the company, full mailing address and relevant weblinks
What is the type of ownership of the company/institution?
State the main shareholders and their shares.
What is the sector that the company/institution operates in?
Specify the products and services produced and offered to its customers/clients.
Who are regarded as the customers/clients of your internship company (consider the end users, retailers,
other manufacturers, employees,etc.)?
Provide an organization chart of the company, along with information on the number of employees.
Provide a list of functions performed by different departments/divisions in the internship organization.
Provide an overview off the production system or service procedure (what are the resources, inputs,
outcomes, andconstraints?)
Provide a process chart of a major product and/or service.
The following questions can be classified as your major fit (Finance, Accounting, Ecommerce and
Management).
• What kind accounting/finance/IT//quality/marketing standards and principles are used in the
organization?
• Discuss telecommunication technologies (Database, Instant Messenger, Networking, Ecommerce tools)
used in the company.
• Describe the quality planning and control activities in the internship organization.
• Describe the quality control activities throughout the life cycle of the product/service groups
• What kind of financial analysis and decision-making methods are used by corporate treasurers and
financial managers in the internship organization?
• What types of marketing, selling, and human resources analysis are performed (cost system, evaluation
of consumers, needs, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy)?
Chapter 2: Internship activities
This is the main body of your report. During the internship period, the focus of the training may on the
following types of analysis and questions. You do not have to answer all the questions in the list: •
Describe your working conditions and functions, such as: Who is your supervisor (include his/her name
and his/her position); other team members or co-workers and what their functions are to complement
yours.
• Provide a detailed description about the department(s) that the trainee did her/his training with them.
Adding all sub-divisions for this department(s) if it is available. Student can add to this description a
supported chart.
• Detailed descriptions about all tasks and activities that the trainee did them during her/his training
period.
• Gained skills and how they added value to your work
• Other tasks that are not related to the trainee’s major that done by her/him at the company should be
included in this chapter as well.
• What types of incentives did you get as a trainee to be more proactive and productive?
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
• Describe what kind of working documents and analysis you did there and what experiences you have
gained throughout yourtraining. Provide examples of your work.
• A comparison between theory (things you have learned in the classroom) and practice (things you did or
observed at the company) must be made and highlighted. In this section the student can add a supported
table includes which academic course (s) (course title and code) helped to perform training tasks. For
example, two columns; the first one shows the course name and second column shows the tasks
performed and related to this course.
• Show some work samples that you have encountered/conducted at the company through graphs,
pictures, data, drawings, or design calculations and include them in your report.
• Lessons learnt (what the overall benefits gained from the training program)
Chapter 3: Recommendations
• Advantageous that helped the student in completing the training program.
• Disadvantageous and challenges that faced the student and how he/she did overcome them.
• Recommendations to improve training program in the college.
• Recommendation for the training company. Conclusion Sum up and summary of the training
experience. Reference If it is needed Appendix (option) This will help the instructor to have a background
about the trainee and his/her previous experiences. Also, it helps the students in writing their CVs for
future job application especially for fresh graduates who do not have previous practical experiences.
• Basic information (name, city, contact details…etc.).
• Job objectives.
• Academic qualifications.
• Practical experiences.
• Skills this will help the instructor to have a background about the trainee and his/her previous
experiences
Assessment task 2Reflective essay is 3,500 words 65% (due 5pm Monday October 31st)Answer one of the following questions. In your response, you should demonstrate your awareness of relevant literature, offer a critical assessment of its strengths and weaknesses, and explore how your thinking has evolved over the course of semester. Where appropriate, you should use case study examples to advance your argument.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
School of Culture and
Communication
Mobility, Culture and
Communication
This student reading material has been made in accordance with the provisions of the
part Vb of the copyright act for the teaching purposes of the university. subject reader is
for use only by students of the University of Melbourne enrolled in the above subject.
Assessment task 1
The first assessment task comprises of a five-minute-long class presentation, as well as
a site analysis essay of 1500 words worth 35% of total marks, due the week following
your presentation. Presentation dates will be allocated during your first tutorial of the
semester.
Site Analysis: choose a site. This site will be the focal point for observation and
reflection informed by issues and themes addressed in this subject. You may choose to
undertake a mapping of the site, identify key factors concerning patterns of mobility and
social agency in relation to the site, or outline a new imaginary relationship to the site.
Your class presentation will express the nature of your site, and the connections you
have drawn between the site and key themes from one or more of the weekly readings in
which your presentation is taking place. Your analysis must connect with the
overarching topic of the week you are presenting in.
The 1,500-word essay component is to be submitted via Turnitin one week after your
presentation (for example, if you present in week 3, you will submit your essay
component prior to your tutorial in week 4).
Assessment task 2
Reflective essay is 3,500 words 65% (due 5pm Monday October 31st)
Answer one of the following questions. In your response, you should demonstrate your
awareness of relevant literature, offer a critical assessment of its strengths and
weaknesses, and explore how your thinking has evolved over the course of semester.
Where appropriate, you should use case study examples to advance your argument.
Some Questions for Reflective Essay
1.
How is the rise of digitally networked communications reformulating
experiences of belonging for people on the move in the twenty-first century?
2. How has digital technology underpinned the emergence of ‘global cities’?
3. What is the relation between the growth of personal media and increased
surveillance?
4. What role do the media play in (de)legitimizing people who move?
5. How might AI contribute to the production of new forms of people-technologyplace relations?
6. What new perspectives does the deployment and development of artificial
intelligence influence analysis of world events?
7. What can we say about people-tech relationships within the context of
mobilities?
8. How are the boundaries of home spaces being renegotiated by networked
technologies?
9. What is the relation between the desire for openness to the world and the need
to feel secure at home?
10. To what extent has mobilities research not only challenged some assumptions
and boundaries, but also started to reproduce others?
Punctuality and Late Work
You must come to lectures and tutorials on time. If you are in an online tutorial, please
be respectful of the tutor’s time and efforts and participate in any activities as directed.
Please note that late work is not appreciated. It is your responsibility to submit work by
the due date.
If for some reason you think cannot make a deadline, please discuss the matter with the
subject co-ordinator 7 days prior to the due date. Extensions will only be granted in
special circumstances.
Extensions past 10 working days will not be granted on final pieces of assessment
without an application for special consideration, lodged along with supporting
documentation (see below).
Essays submitted after the due date without an extension will be penalised 2% per
day. Essays submitted after two weeks of the assessment due date without a formally
approved application for special consideration and an extension will only be marked on a
pass/fail basis if
Special Consideration is lodged online at https://sis.unimelb.edu.au/cgi-bin/special-
consideration.pl and the requested supporting documentation must be submitted before
the application will be considered. Please note the timelines for the lodgement of special
consideration. Applications that are lodged outside of these timelines will not be
considered.
Planning Your Workload
It is important to plan your workload in advance. If you leave things to the last minute,
you will often find that someone else is using the book that you want. The best thing to
do is to sit down now with your diary and organize a semester timeline for all your
subjects.
Please remember that having essays for other subjects due at the same time does not
amount to ‘special circumstances’ for requesting special consideration or an extension!
Students’ Responsibilities to Contribute to Their Own Learning
At the commencement of each semester students are made aware, through subject
readers, departmental notice boards, web raft and other means, of their responsibilities to
contribute to their own learning. All students must:
* familiarise themselves with departmental guidelines for assessment;
* be aware of the requirements and due dates for each of the components of assessment,
including examination times;
* ensure that the they take into account the total time commitment to study for each
subject of their enrolment;
* make sure that their studies are not impeded by part-time work or other outside
commitments;
* regularly consult subject noticeboards or wherever subject information is regularly
posted;
* seek assistance if they experience difficulties with any aspect of their studies.
It is also each student’s responsibility to plan their course in a way that satisfies
course requirements by ensuring timely enrolment in the correct number of
subjects at the appropriate year level.
Your are also responsible for your own enrolment in tutorials and lecture for this
subject.
General Notes on Assessment
a) There is an 80% tutorial attendance rule. Your tutorial attendance will be monitored
and without documented evidence explaining tutorial absences of more than 20%
you will FAIL this subject.
b) An extension of time beyond the due date of final examinations will be given only
on submission of a Special Consideration application via the online site detailed
above, and only for a reason that falls within the guidelines for Special
Consideration. A specific date for submission will then be agreed upon and enforced
unless evidence for additional Special Consideration is produced.
c) You are required to keep a copy of all written work submitted for assessment.
d) Brief comments will be included on all assignments, together with a grade on the
following scale: H1 = 80-100%, H2A = 75-79%, H2B = 70-74%, H3 = 65-69%, P =
50-64%, N = 0-49%. All failed essays will be double-marked before being returned.
e) Any request for a reconsideration of the final and official grade for this subject must
be made in writing to the Head of School or the Head of your study area, and give
reasons why reconsideration is justified. You will be required to resubmit all
original pieces of assessment submitted for the subject with your request for
reassessment.
f)
You are advised to take note of the Faculty Policy on Plagiarism:
https://academicintegrity.unimelb.edu.au/home.
g) You may not submit for assessment in this subject any written work submitted in
whole or part for assessment in another subject.
h) All final written work for assessment must be submitted electronically, via Turnitin.
Essays cannot be submitted by fax or email.
You should check details of your enrolment, because you will not receive a formal result
for any subject unless you are enrolled in it correctly. You need to make changes to your
enrolment within the first two teaching weeks of the semester.
Practical Advice to Students How to Avoid Plagiarism and Why is Plagiarism so
Serious?
Plagiarism is defined as ‘the taking and passing off the thoughts, writings, etc, of other
people as your own’. In short, it is intellectual theft. In not crediting the source, a person
is guilty of stealing another’ s research, thinking, writing, or images (intellectual
knowledge in all its forms). It is unacceptable at all times; it is completely unacceptable
in an intellectual environment such as a university. We take a very dim view of students
who engage in plagiarism. If a student is found to have deliberately plagiarised the work
of another — including copying the work of other students — the penalties are severe.
Please note that the use of ChatGPT or other AI-assisted programs to write
assignments. If you do, we will consider this an act of plagiarism. Do NOT use these
programs to write your assignments.
The ‘best outcome’ will be a zero for the particular assessment exercise. You may be
failed outright for that subject. If there is reason to believe that you have made a practice
of plagiarism, university disciplinary action may be recommended which could result in
your expulsion from the university and denial of your degree. Sometimes a student might
inadvertently plagiarise. This is usually the result of inexperience, sloppy note taking, or
a combination of both. With the advent of the Internet and a wide range of other
electronic sources, the rules for correct citation are still being written. In general, you
should try to follow the practice established for citation of written works. The following
notes are to help you avert being suspected of or accused of plagiarising the work of
another person. They include special notes on citation of sources found on the World
Wide Web.
You must cite the source of information in the body of any essay or assignment
(either as a numbered footnote or as an in-text reference) and list the cited source in
the bibliography ordered alphabetically. To do this properly, you need to be careful
about recording the source of each note that you make, whatever the source, be it a book,
a journal, a film or TV documentary, or a source on the Internet. Each note you take
should include certain basic information which enables another person to identify
correctly and locate that source and the origin of your quote or data cited. The methods
vary for different types of sources. In the first reference to any type of item you must
give a description sufficient to identify it.
The School of Culture & Communication Essay Writing Guide provides precise style
requirements for citing references but in general, you are required to note: For books:
Author (full name), Title of book (underlined or in italics), the edition (if not the first),
Place and Date of the publication, and Page Number. For articles: Author (full name),
Title of article (between ‘quotation marks’), Name of journal (underlined or in italics),
Volume and Issue number, Date/Year of publication, Page Number. For World Wide
Web sources: name of organisation providing the service, the title of the home page and
its http://-address (this is the most important reference), the date of creation of that page
(if known) or the date of your access (since pages can change or disappear). Because the
WWW is hyperlink media, pages containing ‘hotlinks’ which allow you to go elsewhere,
it is important that you note the actual location (URL) of the page from which you have
obtained your information. You do that by looking at the Location: field which shows
the http://-address. (Some sites allow you to visit other sites within one of their frames
without changing the root address. You need to note this.)
If you take notes using your word processor running simultaneously with your WWW
browser, using a process of copy and paste, make sure you put quotation marks around
passages which are a direct copy of the Web document to distinguish the copied
passages from notes which are in your own words. For more information on referencing,
visit: https://library.unimelb.edu.au/recite
Seminar Plan
Week 1: July 24
INTRODUCTION: MODERNITY AND MOVEMENT
This topic introduces migration and media as twin optics for understanding the
emergence of contemporary society as a social form based on mobility. The modern
period is commonly associated with change. Ideas of progress, transformation and
discovery are often expressed through the metaphors of movement. Similarly, the
experience of travel and migration, which is a physical act of movement, also became a
more widespread phenomenon during modernity. Migration has been a dominant force
in the reshaping of modern societies, but its meaning has often oscillated between the
poles of threat and opportunity. The advent of cheaper and faster modes for the
transportation of people and commodities has been paralleled by the development of new
means of circulating images and information. The transition from traditional media to
digital networks means that mobility has gained even greater force in contemporary
society. This introductory session will offer an overview on theories of mobility and
communication.
Key issues
•
•
What is the significance of mobility as a social concept?
How has the relation between media and the nation state changed in recent years?
Essential reading
1.1 Hannam, K. M. Sheller and J. Urry (2006) ‘Editorial: Mobilities, Immobilities and
Moorings’ Mobilities 1(1) pp.1-22
1.2 Preibisch, K., Dodd, W., & Su, Y. (2016). Pursuing the capabilities approach within
the migration–development nexus. Journal of Ethnic and Migration Studies, 42(13),
2111-2127.
Further reading
Bærenholdt, J. O. (2013) ‘Governmobility: The Powers of Mobility’ in Mobilities Vol
8(1) pp. 20-34
Urry, J. (2002) ‘Mobility and proximity’, Available online at
http://www.its.leeds.ac.uk/projects/mobilenetwork/downloads/urry1stpaper.doc.
On the relation between media and movement
Castles, S. and Miller. M. (2003) The Age of Migration, New York, Palgrave.
Dragan, K. (2006) Mobility of Imagination, Central European University Press. Massey,
D.S. and Taylor, J.E. (2004) International Migration: Prospects and Policies in a
Global Market, Oxford, Oxford University Press.
Massey, D.S. et al (1998) Worlds in Motion: Understanding International Migration at
the End of the Millennium, Oxford, Clarendon University Press.
Week 2: July 31
GLOBAL PEOPLE MOVEMENTS AND THE CONTEMPORARY NATION
This topic considers how discourses on the different types of migrations within states
and between them. We will also discuss refugee crisis in the world and the management
of migration via media and technology using historical and contemporary approaches.
An alternative model based on complexity theory will then be used to address the global
flows and local affiliations of contemporary society.
Key issues
•
•
•
In what ways are perceptions of national integrity linked to border control?
How do global migration patterns present new challenges for nation states?
Who decides who is a good migrant or a bad migrant?
Essential reading
2.1 Cohen, J. H & I. Sirkeci (2011) ‘Contemporary Movers: International Migration’
Cultures of Migration University of Texas Press pp.68-86 2.3
2.2 Seuferling, P. and K. Leurs (2021) ‘Histories of humanitarian technophilia: how
imaginaries of media technologies have shaped migration infrastructures’. In Mobilities
Vol. 16 (5) pp. 670-687
2.3 UNHCR (2022). Global trends. Forced displacement in 2022. Available at
https://www.unhcr.org/global-trends-report-2022
Further reading
Agier, M. (2016 [2013]) Borderlands: Towards an Anthropology of the Cosmopolitan
Condition. Translated by D. Fernbach. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press.
Cheah, P. (2003) Spectral Nationalism. New York, Columbia University Press.
Kleinschmidt, H. (2006) ‘Migration and the Making of Transnational Social Spaces’,
Australian Centre seminar paper, University of Melbourne, 11 June.
Clarendon Press. Kleinschmidt, H. (2003) People on the Move, Westport, CT, Praeger.
Hammar, T. (2001) ‘Politics of Immigration Control and Politicisation of International
Migration’, in M. Saddique (ed.) International Migration into the Twenty First
Century, Cheltenham, Edward Elgar Press. Massey, D. and Taylor, J.E. (eds.)
International Migration, Oxford, Oxford University Press.
Week 3: August 7
GLOBAL MEDIA, MIGRATION, AND TRANSNATIONAL PUBLIC SPHERE
This topic addresses the new conditions of public culture in the global era. Beginning
from the historic association between media and the public sphere, we examine the
growing need to reformulate the concept in the present. Global networks of
communication are creating the potential for new scales and patterns of social
organization. They are also altering the conditions of public culture in contemporary
cities.
This week we consider benefits and limitations of the role of digital media in the
formation of public sphere(s).
Key issues
• How have media platforms affected the movement from national to transnational
public sphere?
• How can we conceptualise the changing nature of public sphere on the Internet?
Essential reading
3.1 Hallin, D. C. (2020) ‘Media, the Public Sphere, and the Globalization of Social
Problems’. In E. Neveu & M. Surdez (eds.) Globalizing Issues Palgrave MacMillan pp.
321- 335 4.2
3.2 Downey, J. (2014) ‘Flux and the public sphere’. In Media, Culture & Society Vol.
36(3) SAGE pp.367-379
3.3 Papacharissi, Z. (2002) ‘The Virtual Sphere: The Internet as a Public Sphere’, New
Media and Society, 4(1), 9–27.
Further reading
Cammaerts, B. and L. Van Audenhove (2005) ‘Online Political Debate, Unbounded
Citizenship, and the Problematic Nature of a Transnational Public Sphere Political
Communication 22 pp.179-196 Routledge
Downey, J. and Fenton, N. (2003). New Media, Counter Publicity and the Public
Sphere’, New Media and Society 5(2): 185–202.
Gitlin, T. (1998) ‘Public Sphere or Public Sphericules?, in T. Liebes and J. Curran (eds)
Media Ritual and Identity, London, Routledge.
Poell, T. (2009) ‘Conceptualizing forums and blogs as public sphere’, in M. van den
Boomen, S. Lammes, A. Lehmann, J. Raessens & M. T. Schäfer (eds.) Digital Material:
Tracing New Media in Everyday Life and Technology Amsterdam University Press pp.
239-252
Bailey, O., Georgiou, M. and Harindranath, R. (eds.) (2007) Transnational lives and the
media : re-imagining diaspora, Basingstoke [England]; New York : Palgrave Macmillan..
Week 4: August 14
TECHNOLOGY, MEDIA AND MOBILITY – PART 1
In this week, we will talk about the interplay between technologies, media, and work and how
this interaction influences our thinking about people and their relationships with geographical
borders. We will explore the overt and covert influence of socioeconomic status, media, and
state on discussions surrounding labors and refugees across international borders.
Key issues
•
•
•
How technology shapes the experience of a mobile worker and refugees?
How do workers perceive themselves within the global media and tech landscapes?
How is the distinction between good and bad migrants created by the media?
Essential reading
4.1 Ehn, K., Jorge, A., & Marques-Pita, M. (2022). Digital nomads and the COVID-19
pandemic: Narratives about relocation in a time of lockdowns and reduced mobility. Social
Media+
4.2 Nortio, E., Miska, M., Renvik, T. A. & Jasinskaja-Lahti, I. (2021). The nightmare of
multiculturalism’: Interpreting and deploying anti-immigration rhetoric in social media’. New
Media & Society, 23(3) pp. 438-456
4.3 Fish, A., & Srinivasan, R. (2012). Digital labor is the new killer app. New Media &
Society, 14(1), 137-152.
4.4 Lawlor, A., & Tolley, E. (2017). Deciding who’s legitimate: News media framing of
immigrants and refugees. International Journal of Communication, 11, 25.
Further reading
Hardt, M. & Negri, A. (2004), ‘Inventing Network Struggles’, in Multitude: War and
Democracy in the Age of Empire, New York, Penguin Press: 79–92.
Kahn, R. & Kellner, D. (2004) ‘New media and internet activism: from the “Battle of Seattle”
to blogging’, New Media and Society, 6(1), 87-95.
Week 5: August 21
TECHNOLOGY, MEDIA AND MOBILITY – PART 2
We will continue our discussion from the previous week and pivot to how people use
technologies to make sense of their mobilities. We will also discuss how these technological
experiences give state power and opportunity to surveil people on the move.
Key issues
• How do people use technology to make sense of their migrant experience?
• Which factors are involved in variations of those experiences?
Essential Reading
5.1 Andrade, A. D., & Doolin, B. (2016). Information and communication technology and the
social inclusion of refugees. Mis Quarterly, 40(2), 405-416.
5.2 Latonero, M., & Kift, P. (2018). On digital passages and borders: Refugees and the new
infrastructure for movement and control. Social Media+ Society, 4(1), 2056305118764432
Further Reading
Aal, K., Weibert, A., Talhouk, R., Vlachokyriakos, V., Fisher, K., & Wulf, V. (2018,
January). Refugees & technology: determining the role of HCI research. In Proceedings of
the 2018 ACM International Conference on Supporting Group Work (pp. 362-364).
Week 6: August 28
AI, CULTURE, AND PEOPLE ON THE MOVE
Extending our discussion into AI as a specific type of technology, we will explore two main
themes surrounding AI. In the first section, we will look into AI’s impact on culture. This
will help us understand common narratives and perceptions surrounding this specific
technology. We will then move to how these perceptions and ideas contemporary impact
migration management and protocols and the potential consequences associated with these
transformations.
Key issues
• What is our cultural and perceptual understanding of AI?
• How will AI transform people’s ability to move?
Essential reading:
6.1 Amershi, B. (2020). Culture, the process of knowledge, perception of the world and
emergence of AI. AI & SOCIETY, 35(2), 417-430.
6.2 Beduschi, A. (2021). International migration management in the age of artificial
intelligence. Migration Studies, 9(3), 576-596.
6.3 Molnar, P. (2019). Technology on the margins: AI and global migration management
from a human rights perspective. Cambridge International Law Journal, 8(2), 305-330.
Further reading
Bircan, T., & Korkmaz, E. E. (2021). Big data for whose sake? Governing migration through
artificial intelligence. Humanities and Social Sciences Communications, 8(1), 1-5.
Nalbandian, L. (2022). An eye for an ‘I:’a critical assessment of artificial intelligence tools in
migration and asylum management. Comparative Migration Studies, 10(1), 1-23.
Regina, P., & De Capitani, E. (2022). Digital innovation and migrants’ integration: notes on
EU institutional and legal perspectives and criticalities. Social Sciences, 11(4), 144.
Olier, J. S., & Spadavecchia, C. (2022). Stereotypes, disproportions, and power asymmetries
in the visual portrayal of migrants in ten countries: an interdisciplinary AI-based
approach. Humanities and Social Sciences Communications, 9(1), 1-16.
Heimgärtner, R. (2013). Reflections on a model of culturally influenced human–computer
interaction to cover cultural contexts in HCI design. International Journal of HumanComputer Interaction, 29(4), 205-219.
Week 7: September 4
THE HOME IN MOBILE TIMES
In this topic we examine the reconstruction of ‘home’ as both a physical location and
existential space in the context of ubiquitous media. ‘Home’ can be considered as both a
concept of individual domesticity and, in a wider context, an imagined community. How do
we define and negotiate spaces of communal ‘belonging’ in the global present? What is
happening to the ‘privacy’ of the home in an age of ‘reality TV’ and real-time media? What
are the consequences of heightened media exposure for personal identity?
Key issues
• What is the relation between the desire for openness to the world and the need to feel
secure at home?
• How do media transform the spatiality of the home?
Essential reading
7.1 Ahmed, S. (2000) “Home and away: Narratives of migration and estrangement”, pp. 7794 in S. Ahmed, Strange Encounters: Embodied Others in Post Coloniality. Abingdon, Oxon:
Routledge. (Read from ‘Home’ heading on page 86 to 94)
7.2 Maalsen, S. & Dowling, R. (2020). Covid-19 and the accelerating smart home. Big Data
& Society, 7(2), 1-5.
Further Reading
Morley, D. (2000) ‘Ideas of Home’ Home Territories: Media, mobility and identity. London:
Routledge.
Borm, B. (2017) ‘Welcome Home: An Ethnography on the Experiences of Airbnb Hosts in
Commodifying Their Homes’ in U. U. Frömming, S. Köhn, S. Fox & M. Terry (eds.)
Digital Environments Transcript Verlag
Drotner, K. (2005) ‘Media on the Move: personalized media and the transformation of
publicness’ Journal of Media Practice 6(1) pp.53-64
Sloop, J. and J. Gunn (2012) ‘Publicized privacy: Social networking and the compulsive
search for limits’ J. Packer & Crofts Wiley (eds.) Communication Matters: Materialist
Approaches to Media, Mobility and Networks Routledge Rethinking identity; the
contradictions of the individual.
Marwick, A. E., boyd, d (2018) ‘Understanding Privacy at the Margins’, International Journal
of Communication, 12: 1157–1165.
Week 8: September 11
BELONGING IN DIGITAL DIASPORA
This week we look at the formation of diasporic communities in order to question the
structures and flows through which they are constituted. This will critique traditional notions
of ethnic enclaves and question the integrative capacities of the nation state. We will pay
close attention to the influence of new communication and transportation technologies. We
consider the reconfiguration of relationships through ICTs, with particular focus on their role
in mobility and ideas of belonging for refugees, transnational families and diasporic
communities.
Key issues
• How are concepts of ‘belonging’ being renegotiated in contemporary society through
technology?
• What is the relationship between place, persons and emotions?
Essential reading
8.1 Wilding, R. and S. Gifford (2018) “Creating Media, Creating Belonging: Young People
from Refugee Backgrounds and the Homelands Project”, pp. 159-176 in D. Nolan, K.
Farquharson and T. Marjoribanks (eds.) Australian Media and the Politics of Belonging.
London: Anthem Press.
8.2 Wilding, R., & Winarnita, M. (2022). Affect, creativity and migrant belonging. Communication,
Culture and Critique, 15(2), 283-289.
8.3 Madianou, M. (2016) ‘Ambient Co-Presence: Transnational Family Practices in
Polymedia Environments’ Global Networks 16(2): 183-201.
Further reading
Ahmed, S. et al (eds.) (2003) Uprootings and Regroundings: Questions of Home and
Migration, Oxford, Berg. Ang, I. et al (ed.) (2000) Alter/Asians: Asian-Australian
Identities in Art, Media and Popular Culture, Sydney, Pluto Press.
Ang, I. (2001) On Not Speaking Chinese: Living Between Asia and the West, London,
Routledge. Bailey, O.G., Georgiou, M. and Harindranath, R. (eds.) (2007)
Transnational Lives and the Media: Re-imagining Diaspora, Basingstoke; New York,
Palgrave Macmillan, 2007.
J. and S. Macfarlane (2009) ‘Debating the capacity of information and communication
technology to promote inclusion’, pp. 95-104 in A. Taket, B. R. Crisp, A. Nevill, G.
Lamaro, M. Graham, and S. Barter-Godfrey (eds.) Theorising Social Exclusion.
Abingdon, Oxon: Routledge. Marlowe,
J. M., Bartley, A. and Collins, F. (2017) ‘Digital belongings: The intersections of social
cohesion, connectivity and digital media’, Ethnicities, 17: 85–102.
Wilding (2006) ‘Virtual’ intimacies? Families communicating across transnational contexts’,
Global Networks, 6(2): 125-142. 33
Week 9: September 18
MOBILITY, VIRTUAL COMMUNITIES, AND WORLD BUILDING
In this week, we will discuss virtual communities, cosmopolitanism and its connections to
mobility. We will do an in-class exercise which will use the world building technique from
fantasy and science fiction studies to think and create worlds which can address issues
underlying the theme of mobility we have discussed throughout the semester.
Key issues:
• How do virtual communities aid or devours the mobile experience of mobility?
• How can we create better worlds where mobility is easier, faster, and kinder to all
people?
Essential reading:
9.1 Marino, S. (2015). Making space, making place: Digital togetherness and the redefinition
of migrant identities online. Social Media+ Society, 1(2), 2056305115622479.
9.2 Boczkowski, P. J. (1999). Mutual shaping of users and technologies in a national virtual
community. Journal of Communication, 49(2), 86-108.
9.3 Stornaiuolo, A., & Nichols, T. P. (2019). Cosmopolitanism and education. In Oxford
research encyclopedia of education.
Week 10: October 02
METHODOLOGIES OF MOBILITY
Increasingly, academics have turned towards methodologies that accommodate the
complexity of contemporary mobilities. This approach problematizes binary oppositional
models, presenting an argument for the academic methods and personal approaches that
invoke new concepts around relation, thinking and feeling. Here we invoke complexity
theory, affect and relationality to consider how the mobile methods allow us to trace a world
in flux.
Key issues
• What are the affordances of mobile methods for researchers?
• How do we account for complexity within social analysis?
• What is the relationship between mobility (or flux) and immobility (or stasis)?
Essential reading
10.1 Tyfield, D. and A. Blok (2016) ‘Doing methodological cosmopolitanism in a mobile
world’ Mobilities Vol. 11 (4) pp. 629-641
10.2 Büscher, M., J. Urry & K. Witchger (2011) ‘Introduction: Mobile Methods’ pp.1-19 in
Büscher, M., J. Urry & K. Witchger (eds.) Mobile Methods London and New York,
Routledge
10.3 Holton, M. (2019) ‘Walking with technology: understanding mobility technology
assemblages’. In Mobilities Vol 14 (4) pp. 435-451
10.4 D’Andrea A, Ciolfi L and Gray B (eds) (2011) Methodological challenges and
innovations in mobilities research. Mobilities 6(2): 149–160.
10.5 Terroso-Saenz, F., Muñoz, A., Arcas, F., Curado, M. (2022) ‘Can Twitter be a Reliable
Proxy to Characterize Nation-wide Human Mobility? A Case Study of Spain’, Social Science
Computer Review, 0(0): 1-19. Urry J (2000) Mobile sociology. The British Journal of
Sociology 51(1): 185–203.
Further reading
Adey P (2010) Aerial Life: Spaces, Mobilities, Affects. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.
Beck, U. (2016) ‘Varieties of Second Modernity and the Cosmopolitan Vision’. In Theory,
Culture & Society Vol. 33(7-8) pp. 257-270 Bryant, L.R. (2008) ‘Difference and
Givenness’ Northwestern University Press: Evanston, Illinois
Elliott A and Urry J (2010) Mobile Lives. London: Routledge.
Urry, J. (2003) ‘Global Complexities’ Global Complexity Cambridge: Polity Press pp.120140
Week 11: October 09
TOWARDS A NEW UNIVERSALISM
In this week we examine the transformations of political action that have been the result of
the new ideas on diasporic communities, the social practices that produce transnational
networks and the forms of cosmopolitan agency. We will ask how this affects questions of
representation within existing political institutions, the boundaries by which membership is
defined, the relationship between human rights and national rights. Finally, we consider the
rhetoric around digital universalism and the relationship between data and power.
Key issues
• Is the concept of human rights broad enough to embrace the plight of refugees and
strangers?
• Is it possible to have a concept of ethics without borders?
• Is data a ‘universalising’ force?
Essential reading
11.1 Wallerstein, I. (1997) ‘The National and the Universal: Can There be Such a Thing as
World Culture?’ In A. D. King (ed.) Culture, Globalization and the World-System University
of Minnesota Press pp. 91-105
11.2 Milan, S. & E. Treré (2019) ‘Big Data from the South(s): Beyond Data Universalism’.
In Television & New Media Vol. 20(4) 319-335
Further reading
Balibar, E. (2002) ‘The Three Concepts of Politics, Emancipation, Transformation, Civility’,
Politics and the Other Scene, London, Verso: 1–39.
Chan, A.S. (2013) ‘Digital Interrupt: Hacking Universalism at the Network’s Edge’. In
Networking Peripheries: Technological Futures and the Myth of Digital Universalism
Cambridge Mass/ London: MIT Press
Pendenza, M. (2017) ‘Societal cosmopolitanism: the drift from universalism towards
particularism’. In Distinktion: Journal of Social Theory Vol. 18(1) pp. 3-17
Tourraine, A. (2000) Can We Live Together? Cambridge, Polity Press.
Week 12: October 16
REFLECTION
This week we will reflect on the different themes and trajectories we have traced during the
semester, as well as spend time discussing the final essay. There are no prescribed readings
for this week.
The purpose of this speech is to persuade, not simply to argue. You might be able to develop a perfectly
logical argument that is wholly unpersuasive to an audience. Persuading an audience means that you
create community, i.e. you address areas that move your listeners and present your thoughts in a way
that sways their opinion. What is important is that you speak to an issue that affects your audience as a
collective and is debated publicly.
For this purpose, you should write an inspiring, persuasive speech that will make your audience (i.e.
instructors, classmates) vote you into a public office, e.g. Student Union leader, President of a club. This
vote, of course, is fictional, but it should help you picture what is expected of you. Your speech should
convince us to take your side, to believe you, and to act upon what you proposed.
You need to apply everything you have learnt:
• the promotional strategies of advertising to promote yourself and your ideas
• the argumentative and opinionated voice of the op-ed
• the delivery and rhetoric of speeches
Convince us that you are the best candidate for the role you run for.
NOTE: You will need to do research and find a suitable role. Use the correct term and write a speech
specific to this position
Unformatted Attachment Preview
News Folio: Speech assignment
The Speech assignment comprises a political speech that you write (1000 words) and a
reflective essay (1000 words). It is worth 40% of your grade.
General guidelines:
U
Submit one Word document – doc, docx
Word count: Please make sure that both texts are +/-10% of the word count. Please indicate
the word count at the end. Headlines do not count towards your overall word count.
1. Speech – 1000 words – worth 20%
The purpose of this speech is to persuade, not simply to argue. You might be able to develop
a perfectly logical argument that is wholly unpersuasive to an audience. Persuading an
audience means that you create community, i.e. you address areas that move your listeners
and present your thoughts in a way that sways their opinion. What is important is that you speak
to an issue that affects your audience as a collective and is debated publicly.
U
For this purpose, you should write an inspiring, persuasive speech that will make your audience
(i.e. instructors, classmates) vote you into a public office, e.g. Student Union leader, President
of a club. This vote, of course, is fictional, but it should help you picture what is expected of
you. Your speech should convince us to take your side, to believe you, and to act upon what
you proposed.
You need to apply everything you have learnt:
• the promotional strategies of advertising to promote yourself and your ideas
• the argumentative and opinionated voice of the op-ed
• the delivery and rhetoric of speeches
Convince us that you are the best candidate for the role you run for.
NOTE: You will need to do research and find a suitable role. Use the correct term and write a
speech specific to this position.
• Target audience: Your class, i.e. voters between the ages of 20-40 with a University
education, international background, mixed race and gender
• Content:
1. Greeting
2. Introduction: briefly introduce yourself to establish common ground, why you
are here, why you are qualified for this office
3 Agenda: address one agenda item that you passionately care about and that
will be the primary goal of your candidacy (e.g. climate change action,
poverty/homelessness, crime, discrimination, unemployment)
4 . Salutation
Delivery/Formatting of the speech:
You do not need to give the speech, BUT you need to transcribe it as if it were spoken . This
means that paralinguistic features (e.g. pauses, emphasis ) need to be visual in your
submission. We will discuss this more in the tutorial.
U
U
U
U
Think: A speech is meant to be spoken. We need to perceive your speech at its best, when we
mark it.
Further tips:
• Follow your own interest/passion. Topic can be local, regional, national or international –
but it must be of public relevance.
• Use rhetoric devices and narrative technique
• Balance ethos, pathos, logos, and kairos
• Good persuaders do not ignore the opposition, nor do they simply attack the opposition.
They engage with the opposition’s arguments.
• Speak your speech. Deliver it in order to hear which sections work, and which do not.
Research & Referencing
REMEMBER that independent research is essential and part of your grade! You need to
back up your arguments with facts.
If you take information from another source, you must cite this source – otherwise you commit
plagiarism.
For the speech, do not use footnotes or citation in brackets! You are writing a speech that is
given orally. For that reason, please use in-text references and hyperlinks (same as op-ed).
For example, you include statistics of the Australian Government in your speech.
The Australian Government Department of Health estimates that almost half of all Australians
from sixteen to eighty-five years of age will experience mental illness at some point in their life.
Hyperlinking is a very common practice in online writing and will enable you to acknowledge
from where you took a particular point (rather than pass off that point as being your own).
If you do not know how to include hyperlinks in Word, please speak with your tutor.
In addition, please include a reference list. You may use any reference style you like (e.g.
APA, MLA, Harvard etc.). Just be consistent and please indicate the reference style you chose,
e.g. References (APA).
These references do not count towards your overall word count.
References (APA):
Australian
Government Department of
Health. (n.d.). Mental health.
https://www.health.gov.au/healthtopics/mental-health
Feedback round:
Please have a draft of your speech ready for the tutorial in Week 12.
In break-out groups, you will get to deliver your speech. This is going to help you edit your
speech. It’s all work in progress and you will get valuable feedback.
1. Essay – 1000 words – worth 20%
U
Along with your speech, please submit an essay that explains why you wrote your speech the
way you did. Please address:
• Audience: How did your understanding of your audience affect your speech?
• Setting: Where would you give this speech? (e.g. lecture hall, cafeteria, pub in the
evening?) How does this setting influence your speech?
• Content/Agenda: First, provide an overall view of the topic (relevance, impact etc.).
Second, explain how you tailored this topic for your audience. Explain why they will
care/listen.
DON’T: I care about this, so my audience cares about it too. DO:
Provide facts, statistics etc.
• Language: Outline your rhetorical choices including language, paralanguage,
argumentative structure. Which rhetorical elements have you applied and why?
IMPORTANT: The main focus of your essay (i.e. the main chunk of writing) should focus on
content and language. Audience and setting mainly informed your content and language
choices.
Research & Referencing
REMEMBER that independent research is essential and part of your grade! You need to
back up your decisions with facts. The essay is primarily logos and ethos!
If you take information from another source, you must cite this source – otherwise you commit
plagiarism.
In-text citations: Use parentheses, e.g. Smith (2010, 7) explains that …
Note: Footnotes are not used to indicate the source of citations. Use them only to
provide additional information (e.g. a translation, a definition etc.) or to further
discuss a topic. Number them consecutively throughout the text and use single line
spacing.
Reference section: You may use any reference style you like (e.g. APA, MLA, Harvard etc.).
Just be consistent and please indicate the reference style you chose, e.g. References (APA).
These references do not count towards your overall word count.
Feedback round:
Please have a draft of your essay ready for the tutorial in Week 12.
After you have given your speech, you will also get the chance to discuss your choices and to
hear your peers’ opinion on your persuasive strategy. It’s all work in progress.
Formatting
Ensure your work is 1.5 or doublespaced. Ensure that your file name
includes your name.
Keep copies of ALL your pieces on your computer / backed up online.
Reading
Required reading:
Lester, Ada. (2023, May 11). So many young Australians like me will rent forever – it
needs to be made livable and affordable. The Guardian.
https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2023/may/12/so-many-young-australianslike-me-will-rent-forever-it-needs-to-be-made-livable-and-affordable
Bray, T. H., & Christy. (2020, July 29). We Have a Question for Jeff Bezos and Other
Billionaires. The New York Times; The New York Times Company.
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/07/29/opinion/amazon-union-congressantitrust.html?login=email&auth=login-email&login=email&auth=login-email
Stephens, Bret (2017, Aug. 25) Tips for aspiring op-ed writers, The New York Times.
https://www.nytimes.com/2017/08/25/opinion/tips-for-aspiring-op-ed-writers.html
Required reading:
Coleman, S., & Freelon, D. (2015). Introduction: conceptualizing digital politics. S
Coleman & D. Freelon (Eds.), Handbook of Digital Politics (pp. 1–14). Edward Elgar.
https://doi.org/https://doi.org/10.4337/9781782548768
Pond, P. (2020). The Political Public. Complexity, Digital Media and Post Truth Politics:
A Theory of Interactive Systems (pp. 165–192). Springer.
Required reading:
Finlayson, A., & Martin, J. (2008). ‘It Ain’t What You Sayy’: British Political Studies and
the Analysis of Speech and Rhetoric. British Politics, 3(4), 445–464.
Recommended reading:
N., N. (2004, July 27). Barack Obama’s Keynote Address at the 2004 Democratic
National Convention. PBS; PBS. https://www.pbs.org/newshour/show/barack-obamaskeynote-address-at-the-2004-democratic-national-convention
Links to an external site.
History has seen many people exploit the power of rhetoric for their own agenda. In this
lecture, we discuss the abuse of rhetoric, the difference between persuasion and
propaganda, and how to spot spin doctors.
Required reading:
Miller, D., & Robinson, P. (2019). Propaganda, Politics and Deception. The Palgrave
Handbook of Deceptive Communication (pp. 969–988). Palgrave.
Week 11 Reading
In our final week, we share our views on media writing: past, present, and future.
Speech workshopping in seminars this week.
This lecture covers the basics of speechwriting and provides useful strategies to help
you write your own political speech.
Required reading:
Campbell, K. K., Huxman, S. S., & Burkholder, T. (2015). The resources of language.
The rhetorical act (pp. 165–197). Cengage Learning.
Week 12 Reading
In our final week, we share our views on media writing: past, present, and future.
Speech workshopping in seminars this week.
Please have a draft of your speech and/or essay ready for the seminar this week. In
teams, you will get to deliver your speech. This is going to help you edit your speech.
After you have given your speech, you will also get the chance to discuss your choices
and to hear your peers’ opinion on your persuasive strategy. It’s all work in progress.
Make sure you are good at cooporate finanece, including enterprise value, dcf analysisFinish the assignment questions and DCF valuationplease finish all questions in attached pdf, give specific calculation process and excel work
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Individual Assignment 2 – Due October 24
This assignment is to be completed and turned in individually.
1. You would like to estimate a per-share value of ABC, Inc. Your estimate of the present
value of ABC’s future free cash flows from operations is $800 million. The book value of
its assets is $850 million. The value of debt and lease obligations are $220 million and
$85 million, respectively. ABC Inc. also has cash holdings (non-operating assets) of
$95 million. There are 5 million shares outstanding.
What is the value per share?
Please use the following information to answer questions 2 and 3: Your firm has
outstanding debt equal to $138 million, cash holdings equal to $47 million, and 19
million shares outstanding.
2. Your firm is currently privately held, and you would like to use information from
publicly traded comparables to estimate a price for your stock ($ per share). Your
firm’s expected 2023 EBITDA is $74 million. The industry median ratio of enterprise
value to EBITDA is currently 6.1. What is the market-implied enterprise value of
your firm?
3. What is the market-implied equity price per share?
4. You have completed a DCF valuation of ElectricCar’s operations and estimate an
enterprise value of $915 million. There are currently 11 million shares outstanding.
ElectricCar Inc. has $80 million in debt and $19 million in cash. There are also
1,000,000 warrants outstanding with an average strike price of $15 per share.
Please estimate the equity value per share of ElectricCar Inc. (assuming exercise of
the warrants).
Please use the following information to answer questions (5) through (7).
BoatShare Inc. has just received approval to operate in coastal cities across
Connecticut. In order to begin operations, it will need to purchase 150 new boats at
$37,000 each (i.e., total cost of $5,550,000). To finance this purchase, it will borrow all
$5,500,000 for one year from the bank. There is a 95 percent chance that BoatShare
will generate sufficient cash flow to repay the loan in full with interest at the end of the
year; otherwise, BoatShare will go bankrupt. In the event of bankruptcy, the fleet of
used boats can be sold for $2,200,000; however, the legal and administrative costs to
the bank of seizing and selling them is $400,000.
5. What interest rate will the bank charge for the loan if its expected return on loans to
companies that are similar to BoatShare is 9 percent?
6. Before calculating anything, how is the interest rate charged on the loan that you
calculated in Question 5 affected by the potential bankruptcy costs? That is, do you
expect the interest rate to be higher, lower, or the same as it would be absent these
costs?
7. Please calculate the interest rate if there are no administrative costs associated with
bankruptcy.
8. DCF Exercise: (Valuation Exercise) See spreadsheet: OrganicFood_DCF.xls
Conagra Foods (CAG) is thinking about acquiring OrganicFood Co. and would like to
determine an offer price. Conagra Foods has no plans to change the capital structure
or operations of OrganicFood. OrganicFood’s income statement and balance sheet
data are provided in “OrganicFood.xls”. For your calculations, you may assume that
the appropriate WACC is 10%
a) Calculate the historical free cashflows of OrganicFood, from the 12 month
periods ending September 2019 through September 2023.
b) Forecast free cash flows to the firm from September 2024 through September
2026. You may assume that the income statement and balance sheet
components of free cash flow (relative to sales) remain fixed at their 2023
values.
c) Calculate a terminal value assuming that, after 2026, sales and all components
of free cash flow grow at 2% per year (i.e., the projected 2026 sales growth
rate) in perpetuity.
d) Provide a DCF valuation of the company as of September 2023. That is,
discount the cash flows in (b) and (c).
e) What is the equity value of Organic Food?
OrganicFood Co. Income Statement
For the Fiscal Period Ending
ACTUAL
12 months
Sept-30-2018
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2019
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2020
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2021
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2022
USD
12 months
Sept-30-2023
USD
Revenue
Other Revenue
Total Revenue
4,384.3
4,384.3
5,372.8
5,372.8
5,630.0
5,630.0
6,446.8
6,446.8
6,880.7
6,880.7
6,545.7
6,545.7
Cost Of Goods Sold
Gross Profit
2,506.5
1,877.8
2,814.7
2,558.1
2,973.1
2,656.9
3,637.4
2,809.4
3,858.6
3,022.1
3,570.2
2,975.5
Selling General & Admin Exp.
R & D Exp.
Depreciation
Other Operating Expense/(Income)
673.6
307.3
0.2
878.2
361.5
4.5
863.1
386.8
0.6
892.7
410.0
(2.3)
973.9
434.6
(3.0)
988.8
461.5
(1.3)
Operating Expense Total
981.0
1,244.2
1,250.5
1,300.4
1,405.5
1,449.0
Operating Income
896.7
1,313.9
1,406.4
1,509.0
1,616.6
1,526.5
Interest (Expense)
(62.5)
(65.2)
(67.1)
(79.8)
(93.4)
(79.4)
Interest and Investment Income
Net Interest Exp.
7.0
(55.5)
2.8
(62.4)
0
(67.1)
0
(79.8)
0
(93.4)
0
(79.4)
Tax Rate %
Income Tax Expense
Net Income
32.9%
276.3
564.9
32.4%
405.2
846.2
33.1%
443.9
895.4
34.4%
492.2
937.0
33.4%
509.0
1,014.2
33.5%
484.5
962.6
Currency
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
Revenue Forecast
12 months
12 months
12 months
Sept-30-2024E Sept-30-2025E Sept-30-2026E
USD
USD
USD
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
6,790.5
6,954.5
7,128.3
Organic Food Co. Balance Sheet
Balance Sheet as of:
Sep-30-2018
USD
Sep-30-2019
USD
Sep-30-2020
USD
Sept-30-2021
USD
Sep-30-2022
USD
Sep-30-2023
USD
456.7
456.7
283.6
283.6
319.8
24.0
343.9
229.7
229.7
256.4
256.4
153.5
18.0
171.5
Accounts Receivable
Total Receivables
266.0
266.0
238.9
238.9
344.4
344.4
347.5
347.5
313.7
313.7
309.4
309.4
Inventory
Total Current Assets
676.2
1,398.9
701.2
1,223.6
948.7
1,637.0
1,066.3
1,643.5
1,025.1
1,595.2
1,058.2
1,539.1
5,736.65
5,736.6
5,881.24
5,881.2
5,958.59
5,958.6
6,040.59
6,040.6
6,144.89
6,144.9
6,237.20
6,237.2
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
7,776.3
LIABILITIES
Accounts Payable
Curr. Port. of LT Debt
Other Current Liabilities
Total Current Liabilities
334.0
40.0
102.3
476.3
311.6
70.0
100.8
482.4
323.9
80.0
122.9
526.7
344.4
100.0
146.8
591.2
367.0
50.0
134.1
551.1
381.0
50.0
137.6
568.6
Long-Term Debt
Other Non-Current Liabilities
Total Liabilities
1,526.0
30.6
2,032.9
1,130.0
35.6
1,647.9
1,635.4
42.8
2,204.9
1,659.5
105.3
2,356.0
1,807.8
101.1
2,460.0
1,999.9
109.3
2,677.8
Common Stock
Additional Paid In Capital
Retained Earnings
Treasury Stock
Total Common Equity
130.2
4,547.9
424.5
5,102.6
135.7
4,575.1
746.1
5,456.9
127.1
4,396.6
866.9
5,390.7
105.7
4,261.2
961.2
5,328.1
79.5
4,125.1
1,075.5
5,280.1
41.7
3,965.8
1,091.0
5,098.5
Total Equity
5,102.6
5,456.9
5,390.7
5,328.1
5,280.1
5,098.5
Total Liabilities And Equity
7,135.5
7,104.9
7,595.6
7,684.1
7,740.1
7,776.3
Currency
ASSETS
Cash And Equivalents
Short Term Investments
Total Cash & ST Investments
Property, Plant & Equipment (Net)
Total Long Term Assets
Total Assets
EXAMPLE IS BASED ON A U.S. PUBLICLY TRADED COMPANY (Data are from Capital IQ, modified for the assignment)
FORECAST
Sep-30-2024
USD
Sep-30-2025
USD
Sep-30-2026
USD
1. APA format (at lease 5 academic and 2 non-academic sources cited)2. No AI uses3. Similarity below 5%4. Other specific requirements provided in the document
Unformatted Attachment Preview
CMPT641 – Digital Transformation
Dr. Said Baadel
Assignment: Digital Transformation Individual Assignments
Due: Week 5.
Your team has won the contract to plan, oversee, execute the digital transformation at a textile/clothing
and accessories organization that has about 200 employees across two cities. The CEO believes that the
first task is to bring awareness of the transformation to the entire company and create a sense of
urgency to adapt to the new change. As with all capital intensive I.T. projects, there needs to be
research and understanding of how this project will impact the department, organization, customers,
and every other stakeholder. There needs to be a vision and a plan, and how the transformation will be
managed including any potential roadblocks and how to mitigate them.
Part 1 (10%):
The research for this paper will help you to understand the importance of change management in the
digital transformation process.
Using the links found in Week 3: Agile Project Management, Change Management in Digital
Transformation, read the articles and watch the various videos. Using these as your starting point, your
paper will examine the importance of change management and various change management models.
The paper will:
1. Examine and summarize why employees are fearful of change. Provide at least three (3)
examples of employee fears of change.
2. Examine and explore at least two different change management models. For each model,
summarize each model and include a diagram of each model.
3. From your examination of the fears that employees have for change in point 1, explain how
either of the two change models selected in point 2 will alleviate those fears.
4. Summarize why change management is needed in digital transformation. Justify your reasons.
Part 2 (15%):
Before carrying out any transformation, the CEO wants to understand what technology trends exist
today and how they are utilized in various organizations (i.e., business sizes – small, medium, large
enterprises etc.). The textile company has its main office building in one city and a factory in another
where they manufacture clothes and luxury accessories such as handbags. The company uses traditional
ways of manufacturing and getting their products to the customer that involve intensive manual and
unskilled labor.
As a member of the team, you will assess and provide an analysis on current Information and
Communication Technology (ICT) trends that businesses might use for each type of organization size
(Large, Medium, and Small). Provide a report that summarizes and analyzes possible ICT trends for
different companies dealing with different products and services (not necessarily textile). You may use
the following matrix as your guide.
1
CMPT641 – Digital Transformation
Size of Company
Select a business
of each size and
an explanation of
the type of
business.
Include a
diagram/picture
of the business or
organization.
Dr. Said Baadel
ICT Trend 1 for
the selected
business
-Explain the trend
-Diagram of the
technology
ICT Trend 2 for
the selected
business
-Explain the trend
-Diagram of the
technology
For each trend,
provide 3 reasons
why this business
should adapt it.
For each trend
provide 2 risks to
the business if
adopting this
trend?
A Diagram of how
the trend would
be implemented
into the business
Large (250+)
Medium (50-249)
Small (10-49)
Part 3 (10%):
In the form of a video presentation, create a single cohesive video that could be used to convince the
CEO and other stakeholders of the value of these emerging technologies. You also need to highlight
which of these technologies would be suitable for the textile company. The video should not exceed 6
mins.
Requirements for Part 1 & Part 2:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use APA 7th Edition format for the paper. Title page, Table of Contents, Reference page.
No Abstract required.
Part 1 paper must be written as a research essay paper, while Part 2 is a simple report.
The paper must flow some logical flow. Use of headers are required.
The paper will be marked on the rubrics shown below. Ensure your paper follows the rubrics.
There is no minimum word count. The key is whether the paper thoroughly answers the
questions above. Precise and concise writing is recommended.
Turnitin score of less than 5% is required. Turnitin does not count quoted material, title page, or
reference page. Turnitin score only refers to the body of the assignment. Using ChatGPT and
other AI to write these reports is considered plagiarism in this course. Read the AI Policy in the
announcement section on the acceptable use of AI.
A minimum of 5 proper academic references (books, peer-reviewed journal and conference
papers) and 2 non-academic references (minimum total 7). Use of other student’s paper from
any other institution as a reference will not be accepted. Links must be provided for all digitally
accessed documents. The links and reference information must access the page being
referenced otherwise it will not count as a site used.
A well written paper is one where the paper teaches the reader about the topic. Do not assume
that the reader understands your topic or will fill in the blanks of information.
2
CMPT641 – Digital Transformation
Dr. Said Baadel
Topics
•
•
•
•
•
Comments
Subject Matter
(70%)
Key elements of assignments are covered
Content is comprehensive, accurate, persuasive
Displays an understanding of relevant theory
Major points supported by specific references
Research is adequate/timely and citations are
academically valid.
Organization (10%)
•
•
•
•
•
The introduction provides a sufficient background
on the topic and previews major points
Central theme/purpose is immediately clear
Structure is clear, logical, and easy to follow with
proper headings
Subsequent sections develop/support the central theme
The conclusion follow logically from the body of the
paper
Style/Mechanics (20%)
•
•
Title page is present and properly formatted – separate
page
Reference page is present and properly formatted –
separate page
Citations/reference page follow APA guidelines
ProperlyGrammar/Punctuation/Spelling
cites ideas from other sources (5%)
•
•
•
Grammar
Spelling
Punctuation
•
70
Organization (10%)
APA 7th (5%)
•
Subject Matter (70%)
10
Style/Mechanics
(20%)
(10+10+10)
•
•
•
5
5
Readability/Style (10%)
•
•
Max.
Grade
10
Sentences are complete, clear, and concise
Sentences are well-constructed with consistently
strong, varied structure
Transitions between
sentences/paragraphs/sections help maintain the
flow of thought
Words used are precise and unambiguous
The tone is appropriate to the audience,
content, and assignment
Grade on 100
3
Subtotal
100
I need help with my group Project please complete the parts under Nadia name I have 2 parts and I need for each part 2 pages and reference please and this is the group Project pages and references please and this is the project Executive
Summary
(one-page highlight hitting the major points of the paper)
Introduction
In our increasingly interconnected world, the desire to bridge cultural gaps and create international friendships has never been more pronounced. Global Companions, a pioneering service, stands at the intersection of cultural exchange and personal connection. This market analysis research paper delves into the strategic landscape of Global Companions, a unique and culturally enriching service designed to bring Japanese residents and Americans closer through shared experiences and interactions.
Global Companions offers Japanese residents the unparalleled opportunity to rent American companions for an array of social and cultural encounters. This innovative service is committed to not only enhancing individual experiences but also fostering cross-cultural connections. It endeavors to create memorable moments of interaction, thereby cultivating an environment where Japanese locals and Americans living in or visiting Japan can discover, appreciate, and embrace the richness of each other’s cultures.
To comprehensively analyze Global Companions’ market positioning, we will explore the following key market analysis points:
Country Market Assessment: The PESTEL framework will be employed to evaluate the political, economic, social/societal, technological, environmental, and legal factors in Japan. This assessment will offer insights into the host country’s receptiveness to such a service, regulatory compliance, geographical considerations, cultural significance, societal implications, as well as the competitive landscape.
Localization: Understanding the intricate nuances of Japanese culture and societal norms is vital for the successful implementation of Global Companions. This section will scrutinize the extent to which the service adapts and customizes its offerings to align with the Japanese context. It will delve into aspects such as language, traditions, etiquette, and local expectations, highlighting the importance of localization for sustainable growth.
Segmentation: Recognizing the diversity within the Japanese market is crucial. We will investigate how Global Companions segments its target audience, considering factors such as age, interests, and cultural affinity. By tailoring its services to the specific needs and desires of various market segments, Global Companions aims to maximize its appeal and relevance to a broad range of customers.
Positioning: This section will analyze how Global Companions positions itself within the market. It will explore the unique selling propositions, brand identity, and the emotional connections it aims to create between Japanese clients and American companions. The study will also assess the company’s competitive positioning and its ability to differentiate itself from potential rivals.
In this market analysis, we will assess the strategies and considerations that underpin Global Companions’ entry into the Japanese market, as we endeavor to be a center for cultural exchange, international friendships, and transformative social experiences in a market where many people can benefit from it.
Product/Service Choice
Our Service
Global Companions is a unique and culturally enriching service that offers Japanese residents the opportunity to rent American companions as well as local Japanese companions for various social and cultural experiences. Our primary service aims to bridge cultures, foster international friendships, and provide memorable moments of interaction between Japanese locals and Americans living in or visiting Japan.
How It Works:
1. Browse and Select Companions:
Users can explore profiles of available American companions on our platform. Each profile, created using our proprietary system and AI technology, includes details about the companion’s background, interests, language skills, and the types of experiences they can offer.
2. Choose Your Experience:
Users can select from a variety of experiences tailored to their interests and preferences. These experiences can range from language exchange and cultural immersion to casual outings and special occasions.
3. Book Your Companion:
Once a user finds a companion who matches their interests, they can book a date and time for the experience. Payment is made through our secure platform.
4. Meet and Enjoy:
Users and companions meet at a predetermined location, and the adventure begins. Whether it’s exploring the local neighborhood, sharing a meal, practicing language skills, or attending cultural events, the goal is to create lasting memories.
Services Offered:
Language Exchange: Improve language skills through conversation and cultural exchange. Japanese residents can practice English or other languages with their American companions.
Cultural Immersion: Experience American culture firsthand, from holidays and traditions to cuisine and everyday life.
Tourist Guidance: Discover hidden gems and iconic landmarks with the guidance of a local Japanese companion.
Social Activities: Engage in recreational activities such as sports, arts and crafts, or simply enjoy a chat over coffee.
Event Companionship: Attend parties, festivals, concerts, and other events with a friendly American companion.
Elderly Companionship: Provide a service to elderly people in need of companionship or someone to mentor.
Why Choose Global Companions:
Cultural Exchange: Foster cross-cultural understanding and enrich your life with diverse perspectives.
Personalized Experiences: Tailor your interactions to your interests and schedule.
Language Learning: Improve language skills in a natural and relaxed setting.
Friendship Building: Form genuine connections and make friends from around the world
Convenience and Safety: Our platform ensures a safe and hassle-free experience, including secure payment processing, user reviews, and mandatory background checks for all users.
Who Can Benefit:
Japanese Residents: Explore new cultures and languages without leaving your hometown.
Tourists: Enhance your travel experience by connecting with local residents who also speak your language and know the customs of Japan.
Language Learners: Practice language skills in real-life situations with native speakers.
Expatriates: Meet like-minded individuals and build a support network in a new country.
Elderly Residents: Elderly in need of companionship can find a mentee and enrich their lives with much needed social interaction.
Country Choice
Japan
Country Market Assessment
Economic(Japan’s Economy: Monthly Outlook (Aug 2023) (dir.co.jp)) (Immenson)
Japan has the third-largest economy in the world after the USA and China. As of 2022, Japan’s GDP has shown modest growth after periods of stagnation, deflation, and structural economic challenges.
Japan’s aging population and its notorious work-life imbalance have created pockets of loneliness and social isolation. This generates a demand for companionship services. In some cases, people seek these services not only for personal companionship but also for social events or functions, like weddings, where the presence of friends and family members is culturally expected.
Given Japan’s high standard of living and disposable income, many individuals can afford to pay for these services, viewing them as essential for emotional well-being. Moreover the cultural emphasis on societal appearances and the values placed on personal relationships justify the cost of these services for many individuals.
As societal pressures continue to rise and the traditional family model evolves, the industry has potential for expansion. While exact figures might be hard to come by, anecdotal evidence suggests an increasing number of agencies offer these services, especially in urban areas.
Infrastructure/Technology (Immenson)
With the rise of smartphones and digital apps, platforms could be developed to easily connect people to potential ‘friends’ or ‘family’ for hire. A sort of ‘Uber’ for companionship. Many other services currently utilize the internet in the form of webpages to offer and advertise their services.
Japan’s sophisticated digital payment infrastructure, including platforms like Line Pay, makes transactions easy and seamless. This may also provide an opportunity for subscription based models for these services.
As with any digital platform, there would be concerns about privacy and data protection, especially given the personal nature of these services. Protecting user data would among our highest priorities. Japan also lays out stringent rules for personal data handling in the Act on the Protection of Personal Information(APPI).
Government/Regulatory (Immenson)
Currently, the rent-a-friend industry exists in a gray area. As long as the services remain within the boundaries of the law (i.e., no illicit activities), there are no significant legal issues. However, potential regulations may arise concerning the psychological implications and potential for exploitation. As it grows, there might be calls to define and regulate it more clearly, ensuring both the clients and the rented companions are protected.
Like all businesses, these agencies would be subject to business taxes. Any digital platform might also be subject to e-commerce related regulations.
If the industry grows, there might be calls to ensure the rights of the ‘friends’ or ‘family’ for hire, in terms of working hours, benefits, etc. The ambiguity of their roles, however, might pose challenges in defining their employment status.
Social/Societal Trends (Immenson)
Reports suggest that many Japanese individuals, from young adults to the elderly, experience loneliness due to various reasons including overwork, societal pressures, or family estrangement.
Modern Japanese society is seeing a shift from extended family living to nuclear family or single living. This has created voids, especially for older generations.
While some accept the concept of renting a friend or family member as a product of modern life, others view it as a sad reflection of societal disconnect and the decay of traditional relationships.
The rise in awareness of mental health issues may push more individuals to seek these services as a form of emotional support. However, it could also prompt scrutiny from mental health professionals concerning the genuine therapeutic value.
Competition (nadia)
Other rental agencies
Localization of Product/Service (Genevieve)
Localizing a service like Global Companions in Japan involves understanding and respecting the unique cultural and social dynamics of the region. To ensure that our service is well-received and culturally appropriate for Japanese residents, we take several important localization measures. This entails offering a diverse range of companions who are not only fluent in the Japanese language but also well-versed in Japanese customs, etiquette, and cultural traditions. In addition, the service takes into account the unique tastes and interests of the Japanese market, offering curated experiences that align with local preferences. By embracing this localization strategy, Global Companions ensures that its offerings are both culturally sensitive and appealing, thereby strengthening the bonds between individuals from these distinct cultural backgrounds and fostering a genuine appreciation for the richness of each other’s heritage.
The localization of the Global Companions service is intricately tied to various marketing concepts and strategies that enhance its appeal and effectiveness in both the Japanese and American markets.Regular engagement with customers and the collection of feedback is essential in the localization process. By actively seeking user feedback, Global Companions can make adjustments to its services to better meet the expectations and preferences of both Japanese and American users, thus continuously improving the user experience.Utilizing data analytics, Global Companions can continuously assess which aspects of the service are resonating most with each market. This data-driven approach allows for quick adaptation and optimization of marketing efforts to ensure maximum impact.
In essence, localization is not only about translating content but involves a deep understanding of cultural nuances, local preferences, and the effective application of marketing concepts to bridge the gap between cultures. Global Companions’ localization strategy integrates these principles to create a service that genuinely connects Japanese residents and Americans through shared experiences and interactions.
Segmentation Process (Nadia)
Strategy or Objectives (Vision, Objectives)
Segmentation method(s) chosen and why? (Geographic, Demographic, Psychographic, Benefit, Behavioral) (Samarah )
A multifaceted strategy for segmentation is necessary while negotiating the complex Japanese market. A geographic segmentation technique will be used to recognize the geographical differences within Japan that might affect preferences and behaviors. Japan’s varied topography and cultural zones, from the busy metropolis of Tokyo to the serene surroundings of Kyoto, call for a tailored strategy that addresses the unique requirements of each location. This supports the claim made by Kotler and Keller (2016) that geographic segmentation is critical when regional variations affect customer behavior.
Demographic segmentation will be essential when customizing Global Companions’ services to the distinctive qualities of many age groups, socioeconomic classes, and educational backgrounds. To create experiences that speak to the interests and goals of various demographic groups, it is essential to comprehend the demographic makeup of Japan (Kotler, Keller, Brady, Goodman & Hansen, 2017). With this strategy, Global Companions will be able to serve the varied demands of both the more traditional and conservative elder population and the tech-savvy urban millennials.
Behavioral segmentation is achieved by splitting the market according to customer behavior—such as use frequency, loyalty, and purchase readiness. To customize products that meet and surpass the expectations of Japanese customers, it is essential to comprehend their motives, attitudes, and buying habits (Schiffman, Kanuk, & Wisenblit, 2014). Understanding that some people may use its services more often than others, Global Companions divides its target market into usage-based divisions. Global Companions may increase sales and profitability by focusing on regular consumers.
Segment Evaluation (Samarah)
It entails thoroughly examining the selected groups to determine their feasibility and appeal. This means analyzing elements including scale, room for expansion, rivalry, and alignment with the goals of Global Companions. Geographic segmentation evaluation in Global Companions should thoroughly analyze the different regions within Japan. Urban areas like Tokyo, Osaka, and Kyoto may offer a concentration of potential participants, but they also come with high competition and diverse preferences. Rural areas might be less saturated but could present challenges in terms of accessibility and awareness. The evaluation should consider population density, cultural diversity, and infrastructure.
Demographic segmentation evaluation in evaluating demographic segments, Global Companions needs to delve into the nuances of age, gender, income, and education. For instance, understanding the specific preferences of the younger demographic, such as students or young professionals, is crucial. Evaluating the economic status of the target audience can influence pricing strategies, and recognizing educational backgrounds can inform the design of language exchange programs.
Behavioral segmentation evaluation involves understanding how potential participants interact with cultural events, their brand loyalty, and decision-making processes. Behavioral insights are crucial in Japan, where societal norms and etiquette play a significant role. Global Companions should evaluate the preferred modes of participation, engagement frequency, and cultural norms’ influence on decision-making.
Evaluating the segments, Global Companions should give precedence to those that correspond with its objective and strike a balance between their reach and possible influence. Rural sections can provide special chances for community development, while urban parts might supply instant access to a large public. Given the cultural sensitivity of the Japanese market, respect and adaptability to local traditions should be considered in the assessment. Global Companions may get practical insights that guide its marketing tactics, communication platforms, and the personalization of its cultural exchange programs by doing a thorough segment assessment. Positioned for success in the varied and ever-changing Japanese market is this deep grasp of Global Companions.
2.Targeting Strategy (Differentiated) (Samarah)
Using several marketing mixes to target different market categories, Global Companions uses a diversified targeting technique. By customizing its services to meet the unique requirements and preferences of distinct market groups, Global Companions seeks to optimize its attraction and relevance to various clients. Recognizing that every person has unique wants and preferences, the service may serve a broad spectrum of clients by providing multiple experiences and services. The company aims to create a flexible presence that appeals to a wide range of Japanese consumers by customizing its services to meet the distinct requirements and preferences of various geographic, demographic, and behavioral groupings (Porter,1980). After analyzing the various segments, Global Companions needs to implement a targeted approach distinct from the others, customizing its products and services to each group according to its requirements and attributes (Kotler et al., 2017). With this strategy, Global Companions can reach a wider audience and cover the industry as much ground as possible.
Global Companions may concentrate on exciting, dynamic activities that suit the fast-paced lifestyle of young professionals for the urban market. These offers may center on language exchange programs, networking opportunities, and cultural exhibitions. A more laid-back approach focused on the community can be appropriate for the rural population. Small-group cultural seminars, all-encompassing experiences in conventional environments, and extended exchange initiatives could appeal to this market. Customized engagement tactics and material may be developed for various age groups. While older segments may prefer more conventional, face-to-face encounters, younger groups could be more attracted to technology-driven efforts. Global Companions may achieve a firm footing in the Japanese market and establish itself as a center for cross-cultural friendships and interaction by customizing its approach to each segment’s unique demands.
Positioning (Lindsey)
Positioning strategies are imperative to the success of a business because it dictates how people in the market will view the product now and even in the future. There are multiple different types of positioning strategies businesses can use including customer needs, price, quality, use and application, and their competitors. Along with that there are also three levels including comparative, differentiation, and segmentation. Global Companions puts an emphasis on our customer needs and quality in order to uphold our goals and values within our business. Along with that we also focus most on the segmentation level of addressing different needs with different actions to cater to our customers. We focus on fostering genuine relationships and helping form connections which requires lots of adjustments to ensure it is carried out properly and effectively. Through our positioning we highlight our ability to enhance, adapt and explore cross-cultural friendships and expand new horizons. Upholding our values and mission and embodying our core values are of our utmost priority while positioning Global Companions to be successful now and in the future.
Conclusion (Joe)
In a world that increasingly values connectivity, understanding, and cross-cultural friendships, the need for services that facilitate these connections has become more pronounced than ever. Global Companions, a pioneering venture at the confluence of cultural exchange and personal connection, is poised to fulfill this need. This market analysis research paper has taken an in-depth look at the strategic landscape of Global Companions, a unique and culturally enriching service with a mission to draw Japanese residents and Americans closer together through shared experiences and interactions.
Global Companions stands out from the competition through its unwavering commitment to authenticity and cultural enrichment and safety. It differentiates itself by being a service that goes beyond the superficial, aiming to create memorable moments of interaction where Japanese locals and Americans can truly discover, appreciate, and embrace each other’s cultures.
The heart of Global Companions is also its proprietary profile matching system and service offering, which allows Japanese residents to rent American companions for a wide range of social and cultural encounters. This innovative approach not only enhances individual experiences but also paves the way for forging cross-cultural connections, an endeavor of immeasurable value in today’s interconnected world.The emphasis on genuine and meaningful exchanges, as opposed to mere tourism or entertainment, sets it apart from other similar offerings.
Global Companions stands out from the competition through its unwavering commitment to authenticity and cultural enrichment and safety. It differentiates itself by being a service that goes beyond the superficial, aiming to create memorable moments of interaction where Japanese locals and Americans can truly discover, appreciate, and embrace each other’s cultures. The emphasis on genuine and meaningful exchanges, as opposed to mere tourism or entertainment, sets it apart from other similar offerings.
The localization efforts of Global Companions also underscore its commitment to understanding and respecting the intricate nuances of Japanese culture and societal norms. By adapting and customizing its offerings to align with the Japanese context in terms of language, traditions, etiquette, and local expectations, the service ensures its relevance and acceptance within the Japanese market.
The segmentation strategy is designed to cater to the diverse needs and desires of the Japanese market. By recognizing the richness of diversity within the local populace and segmenting the target audience based on factors such as age, interests, and cultural affinity, Global Companions maximizes its appeal and relevance to a broad spectrum of customers.
In terms of positioning, Global Companions creates a unique selling proposition by focusing on the emotional connections it fosters between Japanese clients and American companions. Its brand identity revolves around a shared sense of exploration, curiosity, and appreciation for diverse cultures, effectively positioning itself as a facilitator of meaningful and lasting friendships.
In conclusion, this market analysis illuminates the strategies and considerations that underpin Global Companions’ entry into the Japanese market. As the service endeavors to be a center for cultural exchange, international friendships, and transformative social experiences, it seeks to enrich the lives of many in a world where such connections are not only valued but increasingly vital. Global Companions is poised to make an indelible mark on the landscape of cross-cultural connections and shared experiences.
References
Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2016). Marketing Management. Pearson.
Kotler, P., Keller, K. L., Brady, M., Goodman, M., & Hansen, T. (2017). Marketing Management. Pearson.
Porter, M. E. (1980). Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing Industries and Competitors. Free Press.
Schiffman, L. G., Kanuk, L. L., & Wisenblit, J. (2014). Consumer Behavior. Pearson.
“Culture : Want A Family? In Japan, You Can Rent One : A Tokyo Company Blurs the Line between Reality and Fantasy with Professional Stand-Ins for Relatives.” Los Angeles Times, Los Angeles Times, 12 May 1992, www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1992-05-12-wr-1769-story.html.
Kubota, Yoko. “Tokyo Firm Rents Fake Family, Friends for Weddings.” Reuters, Thomson Reuters, 8 June 2009, www.reuters.com/article/us-japan-weddings/tokyo-firm-rents-fake-family-friends-for-weddings-idUSTRE5571IY20090608.
Moon, Rona. “Lonely or in Need of Female Assistance? Try a Rental Friend in Tokyo!” SoraNews24, 31 Oct. 2013, soranews24.com/2013/10/31/lonely-or-in-need-of-female-assistance-try-a-rental-friend-in-tokyo/.
Rentozo. “Renting a Friend in Tokyo.” Rentozo, 25 Feb. 2023, rentozo.com/blogs/renting-a-friend-in-tokyo/.
Familiarize with the wide variety of methods available (both quantitative and qualitative) to evaluate innovation projects.
Highlight the important role played by managerial assumptions in the accuracy and utility of any measure used.
Emphasize the importance of a balanced R&D project portfolio (i.e. advanced R&D, breakthrough, platform, and derivative).
9.2 Action Required:
Watch the short video in the following link: Video Link
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Q. Discuss how managers should select and balance their R&D portfolio, as well as the advantages and disadvantages of some of the most often used tools for project evaluation.
9.4 Instructions:
Your answers should not exceed a word limit of 100-120.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Business Ethics and Organization Social Responsibility (MGT
422)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Business ethics and
organization social responsibility
Course Code: MGT 422
Student’s Name: Ahmed Ali Alwaheed
Semester: First
CRN: 12079
Student’s ID Number: 190141276
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
No
CLO-6
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Write coherent project about a case study or actual research about ethics
Critical Thinking
Consider yourself the Chief executive officer of a small enterprise. The enterprise
updated the compliance policy. Now one of the employee dumped dangerous waste into
a nearby stream.
Questions:
a. Who would you invite into your office and what information would you require?
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
b. How frequently you suggest that Enterprise policies and procedures be updated.
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
c. Prepare a long- and short-term action plan to address the situation. (700 words-5
Marks)
Answers
a.
b.
c.
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge management in different business environments.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilise knowledge management tools for the benefits of the organization.
9.2 Action Required:
Copy and paste the following link in your internet browser to research article titled “KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES: ACCESS THE RIGHT KNOWLEDGE AT THE RIGHT TIME”. Read the article and answer the question given in “Test your Knowledge Section”. https://www.csirs.org.in/uploads/paper_pdf/knowledge-management-tools-and-techniques.pdf
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Q. Briefly describe the types of knowledge highlighted in this article. Write a short summary about traditional tools of knowledge management highlighted in this article.
Please focus on the assignment requirements to obtain the full grade
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment Title: Saudi Legal Aspects in E-commerce
Objective: The objective of this assignment is to research and analyze the legal aspects of Ecommerce in Saudi Arabia. By focusing solely on Saudi Arabian regulations and laws, you will gain a
deep understanding of how E-commerce is governed in this specific jurisdiction.
Instructions:
Step 1: Topic Selection Choose one specific topic within the field of E-commerce law that you find
interesting or relevant. Some possible topics include but are not limited to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
E-commerce contracts and agreements
Consumer protection in E-commerce
Intellectual Property Rights in E-commerce
Data protection and privacy in E-commerce
Taxation of E-commerce transactions
Dispute resolution in E-commerce
Step 2: Research
a) Conduct thorough research on the legal aspects of your chosen E-commerce topic in Saudi Arabia.
Utilize primary and secondary sources such as Saudi Arabian laws and regulations, legal articles, and
academic papers.
b) Identify and study the relevant laws and regulations governing E-commerce in Saudi Arabia. Pay
attention to any recent developments or amendments.
Step 3: Write an Overview Write a comprehensive overview (500 words) that includes the following:
1. Introduction:
• Provide an introduction to the E-commerce topic you selected.
• State the purpose of the assignment and the focus on Saudi Arabian regulations.
2. Legal Framework in Saudi Arabia:
• Explain the key aspects of E-commerce laws and regulations in Saudi Arabia.
• Highlight any unique features or challenges in Saudi Arabian E-commerce law.
3. In-Depth Analysis:
• Analyze the implications of Saudi Arabian E-commerce regulations for businesses and consumers.
• Provide real-world examples or case studies, if applicable.
4. Conclusion:
•
•
Summarize the main findings of your analysis.
Offer any recommendations or insights based on your research.
Submission Guidelines:
•
•
•
Your assignment should be typed and well-structured.
Your paper should not exceed 500 words.
Include all sources used.
Grading Criteria: Your assignment will be evaluated based on:
•
•
•
•
Depth of research and understanding of the chosen topic.
Clarity and organization of the overview.
Quality of the analysis and insights provided.
Use of proper sources.
Note: Make sure to adhere to the submission deadline provided by your instructor. This assignment
will provide you with valuable knowledge about the legal aspects of E-commerce in Saudi Arabia.
Good luck with your research and analysis!
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation
Gain insights into the strategy-making processes of different types of organizations
9.2. Reading
Required
Chapter 7. Strategy Formation: Corporate Strategy
Textbook: Wheelen, T. L., Hunger, D., Hoffman, A. N., & Bamford, C. E. (2014). Concepts in strategic management and business policy (14th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN-13: 9780133126129 (print), 9780133126433 (e-text)
Recommended
Andersson, H., & Janson, G. (2012). Evaluating a corporate strategy: A case study of Länsförsäkringar. Available via https://stud.epsilon.slu.se/4453/1/Andersson_et_al_120703.pdf
9.3. Test your knowledge (Max 100 words for every question)
Question 1
How is corporate parenting different from portfolio analysis? How is it alike? Is it a useful concept in a global industry?
Question 2
What are the tradeoffs between an internal and an external growth strategy? Which approach is best as an international entry strategy?
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism. Please read these to understand the idea of the assignment and know what is requiredGo through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the
globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry
or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer
or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either
manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The
competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely
delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence
there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep
the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries
in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These
businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in
the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive,
the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen
organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is
enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some
materials that are part of the business, and select 2 or 3 materials out of them
for providing answers to the questions given below. Students can make use of graphs,
tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks) a. Learning History. b. Storytelling. c. Interviews.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Computron Inc. is a public corporation specializing in software manufacturing. The company designs and develops software programs that allow users to create their own documents, apps, animations, and other media content. The company’s sales revenue and profit margins have decreased over the years because of the Covid-19 pandemic and complaints of some parents about the effect of video games on their kids’ social life and academic performance.
The company recently hired Jenny Cochran, a graduate of UC to assist the chairman of the board to turnaround the fortunes of the company. Cochran recommendations included doubling the plant capacity, opening new sales offices outside the home territory, and launching an expensive advertising campaign to boost cash flows and stock price. Cochran believes that undertaking of such capital budgeting projects would increase sales, net income, and free cash flows to boost the stock price.
The corporate tax rate is 40%.
The following financial statement and reports were made available by the finance department for analysis:
Computron’s Income Statement
2019
2020
Net sales
2,059,200
3,500,640
Cost of Goods Sold
1,718,400
2,988,000
Other Expenses
204,000
432,000
Depreciation and amortization
11,340
70,176
Total Operating Costs
1,933,740
3,490,176
Earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT)
125,460
10,464
Less interest
37,500
105,600
Pre-tax earnings
87,960
(95,136)
Taxes (40%)
35,184
(38,054)
Net Income
52,776
(57,082)
Computron’s Balance Sheet
Assets
Cash and equivalents
5,400
4,369
Short-term investments
29,160
12,000
Accounts receivable
210,720
379,296
Inventories
429,120
772,416
Total current assets
674,400
1,168,081
Gross fixed assets
294,600
721,770
Less: Accumulated depreciation
87,720
157,896
Net plant and equipment
206,880
563,874
Total assets
881,280
1,731,955
Liabilities and equity
Accounts payable
87,360
194,400
Notes payable
120,000
432,000
Accruals
81,600
170,976
Total current liabilities
288,960
797,376
Long-term bonds
194,059
600,000
Common Stock
276,000
276,000
Retained Earnings
122,261
58,579
Total Equity
398,261
334,579
Total Liabilities and Equity
881,280
1,731,955
Explain to the chairman of the board three properties of future cashflows that would likely help increase Computron’s value.
What is Computron’s net operating profit after taxes (NOPAT) for 2020?
Calculate Computron’s free cash flow for 2020 if net investment in total operating capital is $671,419.
Explain to the chairman of the board five uses of free cash flow to help maximize the value of the firm.
Explain Economic Value Added (EVA) and compute Computron’s EVA for 2020 if total net operating capital is $1,354,579? The company’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is 10.0%.
Calculate the following profitability ratios for Computron in 2020:
Operating profit margin
Return on assets (ROA)
Return on equity (ROE)
Basic Earning Power (BEP)
Calculate the following asset management ratios for Computron in 2020:
total assets turnover
Days sales outstanding (DSO)
Calculate the following liquidity and debt management ratios for Computron in 2020:
Current ratio
Quick ratio
Debt-to-assets ratio
Times-interest earned ratio
Given the following industry ratios for 2020, how do you evaluate the financial performance of Computron (poor or better) and explain:
a. Operating profit margin
7.20%
b. Basic Earning Power
15.60%
c. ROE
15.40%
d. Return on Assets
10.80%
e. Total Assets turnover
1.5
f. Days sales outstanding
28.00
g. Current ratio
2.50
h. Quick ratio
1.90
i. Debt-to-assets ratio
15%
j. Times-interest-earned
13.00
Computron has a negative free cash flow in 2020. The financial manager explains to the board that there is nothing wrong with value-adding growth, even if it causes negative free cash flows in the short-term. Using return on invested capital (ROIC) performance evaluation approach, determine whether Cochran’s recommendation is adding value. Total operating capital of the company is $1,354,579 and WACC is 10%.
Don′t understand how to set up the sales journal, and sales return journal and how to do the GST adjustments for both the form IR 372 and IR 101.I need question 1 and 2 done, as well as adjustment of IR372 AND IR 101 file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
ACCTN306-23B (HAM) TAXATION
Final Taxation Assignment
Instructions:
•
The assignment consists two questions and you are required to answer both questions.
•
The assignment is a team effort. Each team comprises of 3 students and must only
make one submission. Please state the names and students’ ID numbers of all members
of the team in the submission.
•
Show all workings. Please note that you may lose marks if your answer is not supported
by relevant workings.
•
Round up all figures to the nearest 2 decimal points
•
The assignment must be processed in word document format (no other format will be
accepted, excel format will not be accepted) and use the IRD Returns provided in the
assignment. The assignment must be moodle submitted on or before 12 noon 27
October 2023.
•
Please ensure that your assignment is formatted in proper manner to enable printing
of the document.
•
A penalty of 30% will be deducted on assignments submitted after 12 noon 27 October
2023. Assignments submitted after 48 hours of the due will not be accepted.
•
Please note that your submitted assignment will be processed by the Turn-it-in
programme to detect any plagiarism. Any issues of plagiarism will be taken up for
Disciplinary Action and the student(s) affected may receive a zero mark for the
assignment and/or receive a fail grade for the paper.
1
2
•
Attach the following cover page:
•
•
•
WMS Assignment Cover Sheet
Family Name
Student ID Number
1.
2.
3.
First
Name
1.
2.
3.
Paper Code:
Group
Team
Assignment Name
Final Assignment
Due Date
27 October 2023
•
1.
2.
3.
Attach the following after the cover page:
Names and Student ID of Team Participants: 1.
Items
Marks allocated
1(a)(i) Sales Journal
10
1(a)(ii) Sales Returns Journal
6.5
1(a)(iii) Purchases Journal
10
1(a)(iv) Purchases Returns Journal
3.5
1 (b) IR372
10
1 (c ) GST101A
30
2 (a) IR10
15
2 (b) IR4
15
TOTAL
100
2
2.
3
Marks Scored
3
Question 1 (70 Marks)
Suntex Limited is GST registered company and has chosen the invoice basis for the two
monthly GST taxable period ending 31 March 2023. The company is involved in several
business activities including: purchase and sales of goods and services both in New Zealand
and overseas; land transactions; property investments; and other business activities. The details
of the company are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Name of Company: Suntex Limited
Postal Address: 98, Grey Street, Hamilton
GST Registration: 123-321-483
Bank Details: Bank ABC No. 03-08960-010423618-00
The following information relates to the two monthly taxable period ended 31 March 2023:
• Appendix A: List of credit transactions
• Appendix B: Bank Ledger Account
• Appendix C: Additional information
Required:
Prepare for Suntex Limited:
(a) The following records which can be used as a basis for preparing GST returns for the two
monthly taxable period ended 31 March 2023 (Customers’ and Vendors’ details not required):
(i) Sales Journal
(ii) Sales Returns Journal
(iii)Purchases Journal
(iv) Purchases Returns Journal
(b) GST Adjustment Calculations Sheet IR 372 for the taxable period ended 31 March 2023.
You are required to prepare detail workings to support each item of GST adjustments. Use
the form provided in the link below:
https://www.ird.govt.nz/-/media/project/ir/home/documents/forms-and-guides/ir300–ir399/ir372/ir372-2010.pdf?modified=20200512000525&modified=20200512000525
(c ) Goods and Services Tax Return GST 101A for the taxable period ended 31 March 2023.
You are required to prepare detail workings to support each item in the GST 101A Return.
Use the form provided in the link below:
https://www.ird.govt.nz/-/media/project/ir/home/documents/forms-and-guides/gst100–gst199/gst101a/gst101a-2017.pdf
3
4
Appendix A
Date
2 Feb.
2 Feb.
2 Feb.
2 Feb.
2 Feb.
3 Feb.
3 Feb.
3 Feb.
5 Feb.
5 Feb.
5 Feb.
6 Feb.
7 Feb.
7 Feb.
7 Feb.
8 Feb.
10 Feb.
11 Feb.
12 Feb.
12 Feb.
13 Feb.
14 Feb.
14 Feb.
15 Feb.
15 Feb.
17 Feb.
17 Feb.
19 Feb.
19 Feb.
21 Feb.
21 Feb.
21 Feb.
21 Feb.
22 Feb.
23 Feb.
23 Feb.
25 Feb.
25 Feb.
25 Feb.
26 Feb.
27 Feb.
27 Feb.
28 Feb.
28 Feb.
Reference
Invoice AO1010
Invoice AO1011
Credit Note 99
Invoice ABC 6641
Invoice AO1012
Credit Note 6441
Invoice AOE321
Invoice XYZ 3363
Invoice AOE322
Invoice CHI4988
Invoice AO1014
Invoice AO1015
Invoice AOE323
Credit Note 100
Invoice AO1016
Invoice MNP5318
Invoice AO1017
Invoice AO1018
Credit Note 101
Invoice AO1019
Credit Note 2108
Invoice AOE324
Invoice AO1020
Invoice AO1021
Invoice IND8344
Credit Note 102
Invoice AO1022
Invoice AOE325
Invoice AO1023
Invoice KKL2346
Credit Note 103
Invoice AO1024
Credit Note 104
Invoice AO1025
Invoice AO1026
Credit Note 1242
Credit Note 105
Invoice AO1027
Invoice US4180
Invoice AOE326
Invoice AOE327
Credit Note 106
Invoice AO1028
Invoice KKM9928
Transaction
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1010
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice RSQ481
Export Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Purchases (GST exclusive)
Export Sales (GST Exclusive)
Import Supplies (GST exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Export Sales
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1012
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1015
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice VVW2108
Export Sales
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Import Supplies (GST exclusive)
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1020
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Export Sales
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns Invoice AOE324
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns AOE325
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice CCD1115
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1025
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Import Supplies (GST exclusive)
Export Sales
Export Sales
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1027
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Purchase (GST exclusive)
4
7,425.00
18,562.50
2,846.25
37,125.00
22,275.00
2,277.00
29,700.00
22,275.00
185,625.00
141,075.00
44,550.00
85,387.50
66,825.00
17,077.50
18,562.50
70,537.50
25,987.50
17,820.00
35,862.75
26,730.00
20,493.00
89,100.00
22,275.00
13,365.00
40,095.00
5,123.25
22,275.00
129,195.00
10,246.50
116,325.00
68,062.50
49,500.00
55,687.50
51,975.00
29,700.00
35,578.13
16,394.40
54,450.00
111,375.00
55,687.50
61,875.00
14,231.25
24,750.00
16,087.50
5
Appendix A (continued)
Date
28 Feb.
28 Feb.
3 Mac.
7 Mac
Reference
Invoice ZZX3448
Invoice AOE328
Invoice JJJ2255
Credit Note 107
11 Mac
13 Mac
15 Mac
19 Mac
20 Mac
21 Mac
23 Mac
24 Mac
25 Mac
25 Mac
26 Mac
27 Mac
28 Mac
31 Mac
31 Mac
31 Mac
Credit Note 8122
Invoice AO1029
Debit Note 481
Invoice POT512
Invoice AO1030
Credit Note 108
Invoice SSA333
Invoice AO1031
Invoice AO1032
Invoice AO1033
Invoice AOE329
Credit Note 888
Invoice DDA26
Credit Note 109
Credit Note VV4
Invoice AOE330
Transaction
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Export Sales
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Correction of Sales billing (GST exclusive) Invoice
AO1028
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice JJJ2255
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Correction of Sales Billing Invoice AOE328
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1029
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Credit Sales (GST Exclusive)
Export Sales
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice GGF100
Credit Purchases (GST Exclusive)
Sales Returns (GST Inclusive) Invoice AO1032
Purchases Returns (GST inclusive) Invoice CAL36
Export Sales
5
49,500.00
56,925.00
29,700.00
4,950.00
8,538.75
34,031.25
10,701.90
16,632.00
37,224.00
6,375.60
12,672.00
22,176.00
19,404.00
21,562.50
27,205.20
19,126.80
19,800.00
9,108.00
5,464.80
36,432.00
6
Appendix B
Date
1/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
28/2
1/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
Details
Balance b/d
Cash Sales
Trade Debtors NZ
Trade Debtors Exports
Government Wage Subsidies
(Note 6)
Rent on Residential Property
Lay By Sales (Note 27)
Internet sales overseas buyers
Bank interest on term deposits
Professional services overseas
Internet Sales to New Zealand
Customers
Professional services (Note 9)
Bank Charges
Maintenance
Office Rent (Note 5)
Electricity
Cash Purchases
Trade Creditors NZ
Trade Creditors Imports
Telephone and Broadband
Salaries
PAYE IRD
Bank Interest
Stationary
Loan Repayment
Motor vehicle expenses
Entertainment expenses (Note
11)
Bank interest
Motor Vehicle (Note 12)
Insurance on vehicles
Balance b/d
SAFE Insurance (Note 17)
International development
grants (Note 7)
Cash Sales
Trade Debtors NZ
Trade Debtors Exports
Rent on Residential Property
Internet sales overseas buyers
Bank interest on term deposits
Professional services overseas
Internet Sales to New Zealand
Customers
6
Debit ($)
0.00
170,775.00
370,012.50
532,077.98
Credit ($) Balance ($)
0.00
89,100.00
0.00
259,875.00
0.00
629,887.50
0.00 1,161,965.48
249,046.88
74,230.20
19,923.75
184,892.40
15,654.38
108,157.50
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1,411,012.36
1,485,242.56
1,505,166.31
1,690,058.71
1,705,713.09
1,813,870.59
28,462.50
17,305.20
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
43,149.15
55,786.50
47,817.00
9,108.00
132,350.63
118,233.23
111,003.75
4,440.15
31,878.00
10,531.13
14,800.50
5,692.50
64,350.00
3,643.20
1,842,333.09
1,859,638.29
1,816,489.14
1,760,702.64
1,712,885.64
1,703,777.64
1,571,427.01
1,453,193.78
1,342,190.03
1,337,749.88
1,305,871.88
1,295,340.75
1,280,540.25
1,274,847.75
1,210,497.75
1,206,854.55
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
11,385.00
68,594.63 1,138,259.92
29,031.75 1,109,228.17
96,772.50 1,012,455.67
33,585.75
978,869.92
0.00
978,869.92
0.00
990,254.92
285,421.95
188,137.13
145,158.75
355,325.85
74,230.20
126,999.68
17,248.28
144,191.03
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1,275,676.87
1,463,814.00
1,608,972.75
1,964,298.60
2,038,528.80
2,165,528.48
2,182,776.76
2,326,967.79
212,842.58
0.00 2,539,810.37
7
Appendix B continued
Date
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
31/3
Details
Debit ($)
Penalty interest on late
payment of income taxes
0.00
Trade payment (Note 32)
30,170.25
Computer Equipment (Note
10)
0.00
Legal Fees (Note 18)
0.00
Infringement fees issued by
Hamilton City Council
0.00
Dishonored cheque (Note 24)
0.00
Donation (Note 8)
0.00
Entertainment Expenses
(Note 11)
0.00
Branch Operations (Note 19)
122,047.20
Farm Stay (Note 23)
45,540.00
Sale of land to Sally (Note 21) 128,081.25
Credit ($)
Balance ($)
72,237.83 2,467,572.54
0.00 2,497,742.79
45,824.63 2,451,918.16
18,216.00 2,433,702.16
31,878.00 2,401,824.16
38,822.85 2,363,001.31
53,623.35 2,309,377.96
47,703.15 2,261,674.81
0.00 2,383,722.01
2,429,262.01
2,557,343.26
Appendix C
1) All imported supplies are used for taxable activities.
2) The company has obtained approval form the Commissioner of IRD to use the payment
basis for the two monthly taxable periods commencing 1 April 2023.
3) The following sales invoices have not been settled as at 31 March 2023:
Invoice AO846 $27,225 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice AO953 $13,860 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice AO997 $22,077 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice AO1031 $22,176 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice AO1033 $21,562.50 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice AOE328 $67,626.90
Invoice AO1027 refer to note 14
4) The following purchases invoices have not been settled:
Invoice CAN 2218 $14,577.75 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice DDA 26 $19,800 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice US4180 $111,375 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice SSA333 $12,672 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice POT512 $16,632 (GST Exclusive)
Invoice KKL2346 refer to note 13
5) Rent paid $47,817 for the period 1 March 2023 to 29 February 2024
7
8
6) Government wage subsidies amounting to $249,046.88 is not in relation to the Covid19 wage subsidy
7) $128,081.25 of the development grant relates to administration and activities to improve
the company’s business in New Zealand.
8) The company donated $53,623.35 to a hospice so the hospice can fix its leaky roof. The
payment is made with agreement that, if the money is not used to fix the roof, the
company can ask for the $53,623.35 back.
9) The company received $17,305.20 (GST inclusive) for professional services in relation
to starting a business.
10) The company purchased a computer for $45,824.63 to use for business purposes
11) Entertainment expense that were paid during the current taxable period were in relation
to:
Freebies given to customers promoting business
$17,077.50
Meals employees bought while travelling on business
$22,257.68
Snacks and drinks served at business’s trade display
$28,462.50
Overseas entertainment provided to promote the company’s products
$14,231.25
Entertainment at sports and cultural events (including in a corporate box) $14,345.10
Boat hire and providing food and drinks to people on it
$8,538.75
Food and drink provided for social events in an area set aside for senior
employees
$11,385.00
Total
$116,297.78
12) The company purchased a car for $125,235 trade in an existing car for $28,462.50. The
new car will be used in sales promotion of the business. The old car was used for
business purposes.
13) The company exchange its inventory amounting to $49,500 (GST exclusive) for part
settlement of credit purchases Invoice KKL2346 amounting to $116,325 (GST
exclusive). The balance $66,825 of Invoice KKL2346 remains unsettled.
14) The company received taxable supplies amounting to $24,750 (GST exclusive) for part
settlement of its credit sales Invoice AO1027. The balance of the invoice remains
unsettled.
15) The company wrote off a bad debt (Invoice AO788) of $37,798.20 (GST inclusive).
16) The company recovered a debt (Invoice AO822) of $35,691.98 (GST inclusive) which
was written off in a previous GST period..
17) SAFE insurance issued a cheque $11,385.00 to cover equipment damaged in a fire.
18) The legal fees of $18,216 (GST inclusive) was in relation to a court case for defending
the company against a case filed by one of its customers.
8
9
Appendix C continued
19) The company sold its branch operations in Te Awam Muttu and received $122,047.20.
The branch operations obtain its products from the company’s head office operations
and is dependent on these supplies to operate as a going concern. The branch operations
is a going concern at the time of sale, right up to the time of the transfer to the buyer.
20) The company sold its dairy farm to a GST-registered farmer for $5,692,500. The sale
consists of land and buildings but excluding machinery and herd. The company sent an
invoice to the farmer.
21) The company sold land to Sally (not GST registered) for $111,375 (GST exclusive).
Sally intends to use the land to build a house which is to be used as a principal place of
residence for her family.
22) The company sold land in Tokoroa to Elderly Limited (GST registered) and sent an
invoice for $89,100 (GST exclusive). Elderly limited intends to use the land to build
rest homes or hospice for elderly residents in South Waikato.
23) The company also operates a farmstay. The property for the farmstay has been leased
with monthly leased payments of $19,800 (GST exclusive).
24) The dishonored cheque $38,822.85 was in relation to credit sales Invoice 744 issued in
the previous taxable period but the company has now considered it as bad debt.
25) The company purchased from a door-to-door salesperson supplies used in its business
activities. The cancellation period ends 31 March 2023. The company received an
invoice dated 24 March 2023 for $10,246.50
26) The company bought an equipment on hire purchase on 27 March 2023. The cash price
is $27,437.85 which includes GST. The agreement is for 36 monthly payments of
$1,150.88 totalling $41,431.68
27) The company sold goods amounting to $19,923.75 on lay-by. The goods were delivered
in April 2023.
28) The company received rates invoice from Hamilton City Council for $59,771.25 for
one of its business premises. The invoice date was 20 March 2023 and the payment was
made on 15 April 2023.
29) The company purchased vacant land to construct residential properties for sale. The sale
was finalised on 31 March 2023 and the company received an invoice for $118,800
(GST exclusive) due for payment on 10 April 2023.
30) On 15 March 2023, the company purchased an investment residential property for
$1,188,000 which is not new. The payment is due on 15 April 2023
31) The company agrees to acquire land for $2,475,000 plus GST, if any. In a written
statement provided to the vendor, the company indicates that it is registered for GST,
intends to use the land for making taxable supplies and will not use it for other purposes.
9
10
The payment is due on 31 March 2023 but the company made the payment on 2 April
2023.
32) The trade payment of $30,170.25 was received for agreeing to refrain from carrying on
a taxable activity outside New Zealand.
10
11
Question 2 (30 marks)
Munir Limited is a distributor of computer appliances throughout New Zealand and also carries
out a number of other business transactions. Munir Limited also deals in investments and land
transactions. Set out below is a list of balances extracted from the adjusted trail balance of the
company as at financial year end date 31 March 2023:
Accounts with Debit Balances
Net Loss Brought Forward —1 April 2022
Provisional Tax
Tax paid on Overseas Income
Fringe Benefit Tax
Resident Withholding Tax for Dividends received
Accommodation provided to an employee as part of
remuneration package,
Associated Persons’ Remuneration
Use of Money Interest IRD
Salaries and Wages (Net)
PAYE
Kiwi Saver Contributions
ACC Levies
Bonus, gratuity and retiring allowance to employees
Resident Withholding Tax on Contract Income
Contract Expenses
Revaluation Loss Building
Depreciation Building
Depreciation Plant & Equipment
Depreciation Vehicle
Impairment Vehicle
Purchases
Doubtful Debts
Bad Debts
Audit Fees
Donation to religious organisations in New Zealand
Dividends paid (Net)
Interest Expense
Expenditure related to Rental of Office Building
Inventory as at 1 April 2022
Other Expenses
Amount ($)
193,800
204,000
85,000
98,600
17,000
Accounts with Credit Balances
Rental Income of Office Building
Contract Income
Overseas Income
Interest Income (Net)
Gain from Revaluation of Shares Available for sale
Gains from Revaluation of shares Held for trading
Income
Dividend Income (Net)
Amount ($)
408,000
884,000
297,500
30,600
850,000
1,020,000
58,189,300
244,800
11
61,200
532,100
37,400
3,094,000
765,000
180,200
42,500
73,100
25,500
816,000
238,000
102,000
323,000
127,500
8,500
28,940,800
17,000
34,000
68,000
59,500
367,200
255,000
544,000
425,000
1,411,000
12
Additional Notes:
•
An examination of the ledger account, shows that other expenses comprise of the
following:
$
Professional and consulting fees
68,000
Bank service charges
17,000
Fines and penalties
18,700
Entertainment expenses
42,500
Repairs and Maintenance
408,000
Loss caused by misappropriation by employees
8,500
Expenses in relation to s CW1 Income Tax Act 2007
255,000
Expenses in relation to s CX42 Income Tax Act 2007
425,000
Insurance
68,000
Rates
100,300
1,411,000
•
The cost of inventory as at 31 March 2023 is $382,500 and the net realisable value
of the inventory is $340,000.
•
In accordance with the Income Tax Act 2007, Munir Limited has satisfied the
continuity of shareholder test and therefore the company is allowed to carry forward
the previous years’ loss. The net tax loss brought forward from previous years is
$193,800.
•
The tax depreciation for the year ended 31 March 2023 are as follows:
➢ The annual tax depreciation rate for buildings is 0%
➢ The total tax depreciation for Plant and Equipment is $204,000
➢ The total tax depreciation for Vehicles is $136,000
•
The provisional tax account for year ended 31 March 2023 is as follows:
Provisional Tax A/C
Date
Accounts
Amount
Date
Account
Amount
1/4/2022
Balance b/d
255,000 31/3/2023 Tax Payable
255,000
9/5/2022
Bank
68,000 31/3/2023 Balance c/d
204,000
28/8/2022
Bank
68,000
15/1/2023
Bank
68,000
______
459,000
459,000
•
Details of expenditure related to rental of office building is provided below:
$
Rental Agency Commission
42,500
Apportionment of Repairs and Maintenance
294,100
Apportionment of Insurance
8,500
Apportionment of rates
15,300
Apportionment of Building Depreciation
39,100
Apportionment of interest expense
85,000
Administration
59,500
544,000
12
13
•
Entertainment expenses
Entertainment that promotes business where the public has the same access as
the employees, business contacts and people associated with the business
$1,368.50
Freebies given to customers promoting business
$2,533.00
Meals employees bought while travelling on business
$3,362.60
Snacks and drinks served at business’s trade display
$2,033.20
Overseas entertainment provided to promote the company’s products
$20,768.90
Entertainment at sports and cultural events (including in a corporate box)
$2,895.10
Bottles of wine provided to each customer who buys a company’s product
amounting to more than $1,000
$782.00
Boat hire and providing food and drinks to people on it
$6,801.70
Food and drink provided for social events in an area set aside for senior
employees
$1,955.00
Total
$42,500.00
•
Income for the year ended 31 March 2023 consists of the following:
Sales
Income from trade tie arrangement Note 1
Gains from sale of shares Note 2
Licensing agreements receipts Note 3
Land Transactions Note 4
Income in relation to s CW1 Income Tax Act 2007
Income in relation to s CX42 Income Tax Act 2007
Total
39,999,300
1,700,000
5,100,000
850,000
9,350,000
510,000
680,000
58,189,300
Note 1: Munir Limited entered into an exclusive arrangement with Caltex Limited to
only sell its brand of petrol for a period of 10 years. Munir Limited also undertook that
it would not establish a new service station business within five miles of its existing
business for a period of five years without also agreeing to sell the products of Caltex
Limited.
Note 2: Munir Limited systematically bought and sold shares. There was substantial
repetition and turnover in buying and selling the shares
Note 3: Munir Limited entered into a series of “licence agreements” with various
companies to supply information and manufacturing data to the companies and agreed
to teach their technicians how to grow a new type of KIWI fruit.
13
14
Note 4: The following land transactions were undertaken by Munir Limited:
Purchased a 50 hectare farm in 1 July 2014 for $3.4
million and sold the land to a developer on 30 June 2022
for $6.8 million. The local council rezoned the land from
farming to residential in December 2016. About 22% of
the profit on sale resulted from the zoning change.
Purchased 10 acres, containing a house, garage, and
barn for $2,074,000. The land value portion was
$1,020,000. Council approval was obtained for a
subdivision of seven acres (original land value
$714,000), which was carried out, and the land
subsequently sold for $1,530,000. Costs involved in the
subdivision amounted to $93,500 including professional
services of surveyor, solicitor and valuer; fencing, felling
and planting work, and the excavation of a driveway;
removal of pine trees, a bush regeneration programme,
stock-proof fencing, a site survey, the excavation of a
driveway, and the planting of trees. The buildings and
one acre of the remaining three acres are used for the
Munir Limited’s restoration business.
Improvements costing $102,000 were made to a piece of
land that was purchased in 2000 for $680,000. The
improvements (not minor) were made on August 2008
and the land was disposed for $1,020,000 in April 2022
TOTAL
$6,800,000
$1,530,000
$1,020,000
$9,350,000
Required:
Prepare the following for Munir Limited:
a) Financial Statements Summary (Extract of IR10: all boxes from Box 1 to Box 29) for
year ended 31 March 2023. You are required to prepare details working for each of the
boxes 1 – 29 in IR10. Use the form provided in the link below:
https://www.ird.govt.nz/-/media/project/ir/home/documents/forms-and-guides/ir1–ir99/ir10/ir10-2016onwards.pdf?modified=20230808040834&modified=20230808040834
b) Prepare the Income Tax Return Companies (IR 4: Boxes in Sections 12-32L) for the
period 1 April 2021 to 31 March 2023. You are required to prepare details working for
each of the sections 12 – 32L in IR4. Use the form provided in the link below:
https://www.ird.govt.nz/-/media/project/ir/home/documents/forms-and-guides/ir1–ir99/ir4/ir4-2023.pdf?modified=20230330222413&modified=20230330222413)
14
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
CLO-3. Demonstrate investment arrangements as part of the process for implementing an investment strategy. ( PLO-2.2) CLO-4. Demonstrate the valuation methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities.( PLO-2.3).Assignment Question(s): (Marks 10 ) Q-1. Explain the efficient market hypothesis and the different forms it can take. Relate the efficient market hypothesis to fundamental and technical analyses. ( 2.5 Marks ) Q-2. Explain the relationship between the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows. Break down and analyse ratios in six major categories. Explain how the ratios can be applied to a specific company. ( 2.5 Marks ) Q-3. Describe the characteristics of other forms of fixed-income securities such as preferred stock, money market funds, etc. Develop an investment strategy for investing in bonds. ( 2.5 Marks ) Q-4. Explain the differences among various concepts of yield such as yield to maturity, yield to call, and anticipated realized yield. Describe the techniques for anticipating changes in interest rates. ( 2.5 Marks )
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 14701
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
1.Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world. It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns managers of financial institutions and general public as well.
Question: What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points). Also answer the following questions.
a.Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing. Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action. (1 point)
a.Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up. Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action. (1 point)
b.Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss. (1 point)
c.Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use and implications of the efficient market hypothesis. (2 points)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
1. Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world.
It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns
managers of financial institutions and general public as well.
Question: What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important
evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points). Also answer the
following questions.
a. Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors
are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing.
Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank
and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action. (1 point)
a. Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed
Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is
completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up.
Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action. (1
point)
b. Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss. (1 point)
c. Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the
stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use
and implications of the efficient market hypothesis. (2 points)
Answers:
Please help me with questions attached ( Wright a Business plan for a company ( you can choise any like a new product as an app for buy medical supplies one line por exemple or give me our ideia).we have to Wright a Business plan and also a Power point so thayt I can present it
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BUSNESS PLAN
Task 1 – Business Plan
A. Executive summary:
This should include a short overview of the entire business plan. It should provide a busy
reader with everything
that needs to be known about the new venture’s distinctive nature including summaries of
the problem/gap,
solution, target market, competitor analysis, management expertise, sales forecasts,
financial highlights and
amount of finance needed.
B. The New Business Concept/Business Model:
This section should include a summary of the product/service, the vision and mission
statements based on
the market problem or gap and SMART overall business objectives in SMART terms. It must
demonstrate how you meet the requirements for setting up sustainable business model
operating within internal and external competitive environments.
C. Management Team’s Entrepreneurial Expertise:
Include a brief background profile (educational, industry experience and achievements) of
the top, management team demonstrating their entrepreneurial capabilities and
competences that justify their appointment. Explain the role that you play as an entrepreneur
and the skills you have to turn the business
idea into practical applications. Discuss and justify the venture ownership structure.
D. Market and Competitive Industry Analyses:
This section should present highlights of your market research assessment of the external
and competitive
environments using appropriate tools. Highlight target market, segmentation, targeting and
positioning
strategy and competitor analysis.
E. Marketing Strategy for the new business venture:
Include overall marketing plan, positioning and differentiating propositions, marketing mix,
market entry
and sales process
F. Business Sales and Operations Strategy:
Keep this short and crisp; outline general approach to operations, sales plan, business
location, facilities
and equipment and key milestones. Discuss and justify the legal form of the business
venture.
G. Business Financial Strategy and Risks:
This section should include highlights of start-up costs, sales forecasts, proforma financial
statements
(income statement, balance sheet and cashflow statement), sources of funds and financing
sought and
business risks.
H. Closing summary:
Summarise key parts of the business plan, draw conclusions from your business plan that
are appealing to
investors, make it interesting and demonstrate that the proposed business concept will make
money.
You must also include:
• References – to be to AU Harvard Standards.
• Produce a persuasive presentation in support of a business plan.Appendix – to include a
copy of the PowerPoint presentation from Part 2.
Maximum word count: 2500 words for the business plan
1- No plagiarism, no match please2- Using APA style of references3- Answers between 300-400 words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the
textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
You are provided with two questions. Question 1 requires calculating surplus and shortages when provided with demand and supply of labor. Calculate your answers and show your workings. Question 2 also provides you with demand and supply of Nutella chocolate spread and you are asked to calculate price elasticity of demand and supply. Show your calculations here too. For the mathematical portion, it is important to show your working (calculations) clearly as well as the formulas used for a chance at full credit. The use of paper work or excel is encouraged (If using excel, provide answers that were worked with Excel formulas). Do not put off this assignment until the last moment.
BELOW IS THE HOMEWORK. IT IS ALSO PROVIDED AS AN EXCEL FILE FOR YOUR CONVENIENCE (AT THE END OF THIS PAGE).
Homework 1 (40 points)
Question 1: The table below shows the quantity of workers demanded and supplied in Los Angeles over the past 3 months. Use the table to answer question A-C.
Quantity Demand and Supply of workers in Los Angeles
Annual Salary ($)
Quantity Demanded
Quantity Supplied
Surplus/Shortage quantity
10,000
60,000
1,000
20,000
55,000
5,000
30,000
50,000
5,000
40,000
45,000
13,000
50,000
40,000
15,000
100,000
20,000
20,000
120,000
11,000
30,000
200,000
8,000
35,000
250,000
5,000
40,000
300,000
1,000
45,000
400,000
500
50,000
Fill in the table above (Surplus or shortage quantity). In order to get points, showing workings [Show how the answer was derived for each row]. Simply adding the formula above or below the table is insufficient. Calculations can be provided using Microsoft word, paper, or Excel/Google Sheet. (8 points)
Provide a graph representing the table above. Show the equilibrium quantity and salary. (4 points)
Does this table follow the law of demand and supply? Explain (4 points)
Question 2: Below is a table showing the price of Nutella Chocolate spread and quantity sold at a local store. Use table below to answer questions A-E
Quantity Demand and Supply of Nutella Chocolate spread in a local store
Quantity Demand and Supply of Nutella Chocolate spread in a local store
Price ($)
Quantity Demanded
Quantity Supplied
5
30
4
6
28
6
7
26
10
8
22
14
9
18
18
10
14
22
11
10
28
12
5
30
Use the midpoint method for elasticity to solve questions A-B
Calculate the price elasticity of demand as price moves from $6 to $7 above (8points)
Calculate the price elasticity of supply as price moves from $11 to $12 above (8points)
From question A above, is the price elasticity elastic, inelastic or unitary? (2.5 points)
From question B above, is the price elasticity elastic, inelastic or unitary? (2.5 points)
Graph the table above (3 points). This can be done using paper and pencil, scanned and uploaded in canvas or using Excel.
To get full points, show your workings (calculations) for A and B and explain your answers for C-D
NOTE: ASSIGNMENT CAN BE SUBMITTED IN ONLY FOUR FORMATS:
as an MS Word document,
paper, scanned and uploaded
as an Excel file or
as a Google Sheet file
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Annual Salary ($) Quantity Demanded Quantity Supplied
10,000
60,000
1,000
20,000
55,000
5,000
30,000
50,000
5,000
40,000
45,000
13,000
50,000
40,000
15,000
100,000
20,000
20,000
120,000
11,000
30,000
200,000
8,000
35,000
250,000
5,000
40,000
300,000
1,000
45,000
400,000
500
50,000
1) Fill in the table above (Surplus or shortage quantity). In order
2) Provide a graph representing the table above. Show the equil
3) Does this table follow the law of demand and supply? Explai
Surplus/Shortage amount
age quantity). In order to get points, showing workings [Show how the answer was derived for ea
above. Show the equilibrium quantity and salary. (4 points)
nd and supply? Explain (4 points)
was derived for each row]. Simply adding the formula above or below the table is insufficient. Ca
table is insufficient. Calculations can be provided using Microsoft word, paper, or Excel/Google
, paper, or Excel/Google Sheet. (8 points)
Price ($)
Quantity Demanded Quantity Supplied
5
30
4
6
28
6
7
26
10
8
22
14
9
18
18
10
14
22
11
10
28
12
5
30
Use the midpoint method for elasticity to solve questions A-B
1. Calculate the price elasticity of demand as price moves from $6 to $7 above (8p
2. Calculate the price elasticity of supply as price moves from $11 to $12 above (
3. From question A above, is the price elasticity elastic, inelastic or unitary? (2.5
4. From question B above, is the price elasticity elastic, inelastic or unitary? (2.5 p
5. Graph the table above (3 points). This can be done using paper and pencil, scan
6 To get full points, show your workings (calculations) for A and B and explain your answers for C-D
ng paper and pencil, scanned and uploaded in canvas or using Excel.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia Ministry of Education Saudi Electronic University المملكة العربية السعودية وزارة التعليم الجامعة السعودية الإلكترونية College of Administrative and Financial Sciences Assignment 2 Communications Management (MGT 421) General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. Use APA reference style.All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted. Learning Outcomes: 1.2: Communicate better, knowing that good communicators make better managers and that communication is a dynamic process basic to individuals and organizational life. 2.1: Perform all communication abilities, including thinking, writing, speaking, listening, and assessing the technology. Part I: Write a detailed message to persuade your boss to invest capital resources to develop the product or service for sale. Explain what you will do in case the selected product or service does not initially sell as much as expected. Cite and reference sources using APA formatting. Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience, and purpose. Explain why you selected the channel. Part II: Write a sales pitch to sell the product/service to the end consumer. The sales pitch that you write could be part of a marketing campaign, which can be the verbiage for a commercial, a flyer, a message posted on social network, and so on. Make sure to identify the context, as per the examples, in which the sales pitch will take place. Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience, and purpose and state the channel you have chosen. Explain why you selected the channel.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Communications Management (MGT 421)
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
Use APA reference style.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1.2: Communicate better, knowing that good communicators make better managers and that
communication is a dynamic process basic to individuals and organizational life.
2.1: Perform all communication abilities, including thinking, writing, speaking, listening, and
assessing the technology.
Part I:
Write a detailed message to persuade your boss to invest capital resources to develop the
product or service for sale. Explain what you will do in case the selected product or
service does not initially sell as much as expected. Cite and reference sources using APA
formatting.
Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience,
and purpose.
Explain why you selected the channel.
Part II:
Write a sales pitch to sell the product/service to the end consumer. The sales pitch that
you write could be part of a marketing campaign, which can be the verbiage for a
commercial, a flyer, a message posted on social network, and so on. Make sure to
identify the context, as per the examples, in which the sales pitch will take place.
Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience,
and purpose and state the channel you have chosen.
Explain why you selected the channel.
Instructions are included in the assignmentMinimum of 3 full pages excluding the references is required .don’t copy i need own words.answer the Q with detalis.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Interactive Learning Activity Quality Management (MGT 424) 9.2 Action Required: (Read) Case: The Nightmare on Telecom Street H. James Harrington, a noted quality consultant, related the following story in Quality Digest magazine: I called to make a flight reservation just an hour ago. The telephone rang five times before a recorded voice answered. “Thank you for calling ABC Travel Services,” it said. “To ensure the highest level of customer service, this call may be recorded for future analysis.” Next, I was asked to select from one of the following three choices: “If the trip is related to company business, press 1. Personal business, press 2. Group travel, press 3.” I pressed 1. I was then asked to select from the following four choices: “If this is a trip within the United States, press 1. International, press 2. Scheduled training, press 3. Related to a conference, press 4.” Because I was going to Canada, I pressed 2. Now two minutes into my telephone call, I was instructed to be sure that I had my customer identification card available. A few seconds passed and a very sweet voice came on, saying, “All international operators are busy, but please hold because you are a very important customer.” The voice was then replaced by music. About two minutes later, another recorded message said, “Our operators are still busy, but please hold and the first available operator will take care of you.” More music. Then yet another message: “Our operators are still busy, but please hold. Your business is important to us.” More bad music. Finally the sweet voice returned, stating, “To speed up your service, enter your 19-digit customer service number.” I frantically searched for their card, hoping that I could find it before I was cut off. I was lucky; I found it and entered the number in time. The same sweet voice came back to me, saying, “To confirm your customer service number, enter the last four digits of your social security number.” I pushed the four numbers on the keypad. The voice said: “Thank you. An operator will be with you shortly. If your call is an emergency, you can call 1-800-CAL-HELP, or push all of the buttons on the telephone at the same time. Otherwise, please hold, as you are a very important customer.” This time, in place of music, I heard a commercial about the service that the company provides. At last, a real person answered the telephone and asked, “Can I help you?” I replied, “Yes, oh yes.” He answered, “Please give me your 19-digit customer service number, followed by the last four digits of your social security number so I can verify who you are.” (I thought I gave these numbers in the first place to speed up service. Why do I have to rattle them off again?) I was now convinced that he would call me Mr. 5523-3675-0714-1313-040. But, to my surprise, he said: “Yes, Mr. Harrington. Where do you want to go and when?” I explained that I wanted to go to Montreal the following Monday morning. He replied: “I only handle domestic reservations. Our international desk has a new telephone number: 1-800-1WE-GOTU. I’ll transfer you.” A few clicks later a message came on, saying: “All of our international operators are busy. Please hold and your call will be answered in the order it was received. Do not hang up or redial, as it will only delay our response to your call. Please continue to hold, as your business is important to us.” 9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question): 1. Summarize the service failures associated with this experience. 2. What might the travel agency do to improve its customers’ service experience? Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Interactive Learning Activity
Quality Management (MGT 424)
9.2 Action Required: (Read)
Case: The Nightmare on Telecom Street
H. James Harrington, a noted quality consultant, related the following story in Quality
Digest
magazine:
I called to make a flight reservation just an hour ago. The telephone rang five
times before a recorded voice answered. “Thank you for calling ABC Travel
Services,” it said. “To ensure the highest level of customer service, this call
may be recorded for future analysis.” Next, I was asked to select from one of
the following three choices: “If the trip is related to company business, press
1. Personal business, press 2. Group travel, press 3.” I pressed 1. I was then
asked to select from the following four choices: “If this is a trip within
the United States, press 1. International, press 2. Scheduled training, press 3.
Related to a
conference, press 4.” Because I was going to Canada, I pressed 2. Now two
minutes into my telephone call, I was instructed to be sure that I had my
customer identification card available.
A few seconds passed and a very sweet voice came on, saying, “All
international operators are busy, but please hold because you are a very
important customer.” The voice was then replaced by music. About two
minutes later, another recorded message said, “Our operators are still busy,
but please hold and the first available operator will take care of you.” More
music. Then yet another message: “Our operators are still busy, but please
hold. Your business is important to us.” More bad music. Finally the sweet
voice returned, stating, “To speed up your service, enter your 19-digit
customer service number.” I frantically searched for their card, hoping that I
could find it before I was cut off. I was lucky; I found it and entered the number
in time. The same sweet voice came back to me, saying, “To confirm your
customer service number, enter the last four digits of your social security
number.”
I pushed the four numbers on the keypad. The voice said: “Thank you. An
operator will be with you shortly. If your call is an emergency, you can call 1800-CAL-HELP, or push all of the buttons on the telephone at the same time.
Otherwise, please hold, as you are a very important customer.” This time, in
place of music, I heard a commercial about the service that the company
provides. At last, a real person answered the telephone and asked, “Can I
help you?” I replied, “Yes, oh yes.” He answered, “Please give me your 19digit customer service number, followed by the last four digits of your social
security number so I can verify who you are.” (I thought I gave these numbers
in the first place to speed up service. Why do I have to rattle them off again?) I
was now convinced that he would call me Mr. 5523-3675-0714-1313-040. But,
to my surprise, he said: “Yes, Mr. Harrington. Where do you want to go and
when?” I explained that I wanted to go to Montreal the following Monday
morning. He replied: “I only handle domestic reservations. Our international
desk has a new telephone number: 1-800-1WE-GOTU. I’ll transfer you.” A few
clicks later a message came on, saying: “All of our international operators are
busy. Please hold and your call will be answered in the order it was received.
Do not hang up or redial, as it will only delay our response to your call. Please
continue to hold, as your business is important to us.”
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
1. Summarize the service failures associated with this experience.
2. What might the travel agency do to improve its customers’ service experience?
Answer:
Please write a one to two page double spaced 12 point times new Roman font paper thoughtfully answering You are a computer security trainer for your firm’s 200 employees and contract workers.
What are the key topics you would cover in your initial half-hour basic training program on
security for non-IT personnel? What sort of additional security-related training might be
appropriate once people have the basics covered?
Read the given slide, and sources below in order to understand the requirements.
Change Agents
Are you a change agent?
Discuss your role as a change agent in your current organization, including your traits and characteristics. If you are not a change agent, discuss what type of change agent would benefit your organization.
Share how you influenced the generation, direction, success, or failure of a change initiative or would if given a chance.
Finally, discuss challenges you have as a change agent (e.g., not agreeing with the change, management not truthfully sharing the repercussions of the change, etc.).
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from the given slide and the above sources. Cite the given sources and cite any other sources (Make sure to provide not less than 3 more sources).
Nielsen, K., Dawson, J., Hasson, H., & Schwarz, U. von T. (2021). What about me? The impact of employee change agents’ person-role fit on their job satisfaction during organisational change. Work & Stress, 35(1), 57–73.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 600-word limit.
Plagiarism MUST BE zero.
APA style of writing.
Writing is well organized, clear, concise, and focused; no errors.
Demonstrates excellent knowledge of concepts, skills, and theories relevant to the topic.
No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference .
✨Add references✨
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font .
No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
proper examples and explanations for each questions.
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
Commit to the number of words specified for each question
the answer should be sufficient
TextBook:
Powell, & Baker, K. R. (2013). Management Science: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets. Wiley.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
ر
اإللكتونية
الجامعة السعودية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT425-Spreadsheet Decision Modeling
Due Date: 11/11/2023 (End of Week-11) @ 23:59
Course Name:Spreadsheet Decision
Modeling
Course Code:MGT425
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023-2024 (1445 H)
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of
15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
● The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
● Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
● Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your
information on the cover page.
● Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
● Late submission will NOT be accepted.
● Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
● All answered must be typed usingTimes New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
● Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Aligned (PLOs)
MGT.K.1
(1.1)
MGT.K.3
(1.2)
MGT.S.1
(2.1)
MGT.V.1
(3.1)
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Question
Find some structured ways of dealing with complex managerial
decision problems.
Explain simple decision models and management science ideas
that provide powerful and (often surprising) qualitative insight
about large spectrum of managerial problems.
Demonstrate the tools for deciding when and which decision
models to use for specific problems.
Build an understanding of the kind of problems that is tackled
using Spreadsheet Modeling and decision analysis.
Question- 2.
Question- 1
Question-4
Question-3
Assignment Instructions:
● Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
● On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
● From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
● In the Search Bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach for Sustainable Supplier
Selection under Vague Environment: A Case Study.
Author: Huiyun Lu , Shaojun Jiang , Wenyan Song, Xinguo Ming
Date: 26 July 2018
Assignment Questions: (Marks 15)
Read the above case study and answer the following Questions:
Question 1: Explain the decision-making approach discussed in this case
study (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 2: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making
process involving subjectivity and vagueness? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 3: Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for
manufacturing companies. (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 4: What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to
course and beneficial for you? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Answers:
1
2
3
4
sustainability
Article
A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach
for Sustainable Supplier Selection under
Vague Environment
Huiyun Lu 1 , Shaojun Jiang 2 , Wenyan Song 1,3, * and Xinguo Ming 4
1
2
3
4
*
School of Economics and Management, Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China; lhybuaa@163.com
School of Information Engineering, Handan University, Handan 056005, China; hh8582@163.com
Beijing Key Laboratory of Emergency Support Simulation Technologies for City Operations,
Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China
School of Mechanical Engineering, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200240, China;
xgming@sjtu.edu.cn
Correspondence: songwenyan@buaa.edu.cn; Tel.: +86-010-8231-3693
Received: 13 June 2018; Accepted: 23 July 2018; Published: 26 July 2018
Abstract: With the growing awareness of environmental and social issues, sustainable supply chain
management (SSCM) has received considerable attention both in academia and industry. Supplier
selection plays an important role in the successful implementation of sustainable supply chain
management, because it can influence the performance of SSCM. Sustainable supplier selection is a
typical multi-criteria decision-making problem involving subjectivity and vagueness. Although some
previous researches of supplier selection use fuzzy approaches to deal with vague information, it has
been criticized for requiring much priori information and inflexibility in manipulating vagueness.
Moreover, the previous methods often omit the environmental and social evaluation criteria in the
supplier selection. To manipulate these problems, a new approach based on the rough set theory
and ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) is developed in this paper. The novel
approach integrates the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much priori
information and the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria decision-making problem. Finally,
a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar air-conditioner manufacturer is provided to
demonstrate the application and potential of the approach.
Keywords: sustainability; supplier selection; vague information; rough set theory; ELECTRE
1. Introduction
Manufacturing companies today cannot ignore sustainability concerns in their business
because of increased environmental awareness and ecological pressures from markets and various
stakeholders [1–3]. Sustainable supplier selection is critical to enhance supply chain performance
and competitive advantage [4]. This is because suppliers play an important role in implementing
sustainable supply chain management (SSCM) practices and in achieving social, environmental and
economic goals [5]. In this respect, sustainable supplier selection based on the sustainability criteria
(economic, environmental and social) is a critical strategic decision for SSCM [6,7] and it requires to be
further explored methodically to help achieve sustainability of the whole supply chain.
Although many researchers explore the topic of supplier selection, the study on the sustainable
supplier selection is still in the early stage. Most studies of sustainable supplier selection have only
focused on the economic and environmental aspects of sustainability. The social aspect of sustainability
is often omitted in the decision–making for supplier selection. Besides, the problem of supplier
selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making (MCDM) problem. The decision makers always
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622; doi:10.3390/su10082622
www.mdpi.com/journal/sustainability
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
2 of 20
need to make trade-offs between conflicting criteria to select the most suitable supplier. It is difficult to
obtain accurate judgments of decision makers in the process of supplier evaluation, because supplier
selection involves large amount of linguistic information and subjective expert knowledge that are
usually imprecise, vague or even inconsistent. To deal with this problem, fuzzy methods are often
used to select suppliers. However, the fuzzy methods need much priori information (e.g., pre-set
fuzzy membership function) which may increase the workload of decision makers [8,9]. The previous
approaches also lack a flexible mechanism to deal with the subjective evaluations of experts [10,11].
Therefore, to manipulate the above problems in sustainable supplier selection, this paper proposes
a novel integrated group decision method based on the ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant
la REalité) approach and rough set theory in vague environments. Different with methods based on
the compensating accumulation principle (e.g., TOPSIS(Technique for Order Preference by Similarity
to an Ideal Solution)), the ELECTRE method is based on a precedence relation and it can meet
different evaluation requirements by defining undifferentiated threshold, strict superior threshold
and rejection threshold and thus, it has stronger flexibility in decision–making of supplier selection.
Furthermore, the rough number originated from the rough set theory can flexibly reflect the uncertainty
in decision–making process of supplier selection and it does not require much priori information.
In this respect, the proposed novel approach integrates the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria
decision-making problem and the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much
priori information.
The paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents a literature review of supplier selection,
ELECTRE method and rough set. Section 3 develops an integrated rough ELECTRE method for
sustainable supplier selection. In the Section 4, a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar
air-conditioner manufacturer is used to validate the feasibility and effectiveness of the method and a
comparative analysis is also conducted in this section. In Section 5, conclusions and future research
directions are presented.
2. Literature Review
2.1. Evaluation Criteria for Sustainable Supplier Selection
Supplier selection decisions are important for most of manufacturing firms, because a right
supplier can effectively improve the economic benefit of the manufacturing firm [12,13]. In the past,
economic criteria are usually used for supplier selection. The environment and social criteria are
often overlooked. However, with the development of sustainable supply chain management (SSCM),
both the researchers and practitioners are paying more attention to environment criteria and social
criteria in supplier selection [14]. They find it is important to incorporating the social and environment
criteria into the supplier selection process [15,16]. This paper summarizes the sustainable supplier
selection criteria from the economic, environment and social aspects. The details of the recognized
sustainable supplier selection criteria with their sources and descriptions are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Sustainable supplier selection criteria.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Economic criteria
Quality [17,18]
Product quality and reliability level guaranteed by supplier.
Response [5]
The ability for timely response, completing orders on time and reliable delivery.
Cost [19]
Purchasing cost, holding cost, ordering cost and supplier’s bidding price of
the product.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
3 of 20
Table 1. Cont.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Environmental criteria
Environmental
management system
(EMS) [20,21]
A set of systematic processes and practices reducing environmental impacts.
Carbon emission &
resource
consumption [22,23]
Greenhouse gas emissions in producing, transporting, using and recycling the
product and the resource (e.g., energy, power and water) consumption of
the company.
Design for the
environment [14,24]
Design reducing the overall impact of a product, process or service on human
health and environment.
Green image [17]
The image of company in the green aspect, which can be improved by adopting
environmental friendly products or implementing ‘green’ program. It can affect
the purchasing trend of customers, market share and the relationship
with stakeholders.
Social criteria
Product liability [25]
Being responsible for customer health and safety, providing products and
services with high quality and advertising based on real information.
Employee right and
welfare [26,27]
Treating employee with dignity and respect and maintaining a culture of security,
nondiscrimination and equality. Paying to employee shall comply with all
applicable wage laws.
Social commitment [27]
Involving in local community, education, job creation, healthcare and
social investment.
2.2. The Methods of Sustainable Supplier Selection
Selecting the right suppliers to set up optimal supplier networks can help to reduce purchasing
costs and increase the efficiency of the procurement logistics process [28]. Supplier selection is a
multi-criteria decision-making problem. There are some papers concerning sustainable (or green)
suppliers. Dai and Blackhurst (2012) integrate Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) with Quality
Function Deployment (QFD) for sustainable supplier selection [18]. The approach consists of four
stages, that is, linking customer requirements with the firm’s sustainability strategy, determining the
sustainable purchasing competitive priority, determining evaluation criteria of sustainable supplier
and evaluating the sustainable suppliers. Hsu and Hu (2009) develop a method for selecting suppliers
with emphasis on issues of hazardous substance management based on Analytic Network Process
(ANP) [29]. Liu and Hai (2005) provide a method called voting analytic hierarchy process for supplier
selection [30]. Although AHP/ANP methods are more popular in the field of the supplier selection,
they are always used to determine the relative importance weightings of criteria and sub-factors merely.
They need to be integrated with other decision–making techniques. Besides, due to the number of
pairwise comparisons that need to be made, the number of supplier selections is practically limited in
the AHP/ANP-based supplier selection methods. Moreover, the conventional AHP/ANP methods do
not consider the vagueness of decision–making information.
To manipulate the increasing number of the suppliers, data envelopment analysis (DEA) is a
prevalent approach used in supplier selection. This is because DEA can easily handle huge number of
suppliers with little managerial input and output required. Kuo et al. (2012) present a green supplier
selection method using an analysis network process as well as data envelopment analysis (DEA) [31].
ANP which is able to consider the interdependency between criteria releases the constraint of DEA that
the users cannot set up criteria weight preferences. Wu and Blackhurst (2009) propose an augmented
DEA approach for supplier evaluation and selection [32]. Sevkli et al. (2007) develop a new supplier
selection method by embedding the DEA approach into AHP methodology [33]. They conclude that
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
4 of 20
the integrated method outperforms the conventional AHP method for supplier selection. However,
DEA-based supplier selection methods have some drawbacks. The practitioners may be confused with
input and output criteria. Besides, DEA is a linear programming to measure the relative efficiencies of
homogenous decision–making units (DMUs). An efficient supplier generating more outputs while
requiring less input may be not an effective supplier. Furthermore, the conventional DEA also does
not consider the subjectivity and vagueness in the decision–making process.
Beside the multi-criteria decision–making method, some researchers use heuristic optimization
approaches to select proper suppliers. Basnet and Leung (2005) develop an incapacitated mixed
linear integer programming which minimizes the aggregate purchasing, ordering and holding costs
subject to demand satisfaction [34]. They solve the problem with an enumerative search algorithm
and a heuristic procedure. Veres et al. (2017) propose a heuristic method for optimizing supply
chain including intelligent transportation systems (ITS) based vehicles for transportation operations
problems [35]. To solve the multi-product multi-period inventory lot sizing with supplier selection
problem, Cárdenas-Barrón et al. (2015) propose a heuristic algorithm based on reduce and optimize
approach (ROA) and a new valid inequality [36]. Unfortunately, the heuristic optimization approaches
omit the vagueness and subjectivity in the decision–making, which may lead to inaccurate results of
supplier selection.
In order to deal with the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment in evaluation and
selection of suppliers, fuzzy set theory is introduced into the conventional approaches. Considering
time pressure and lack of expertise in sustainable supplier selection, Büyüközkan and Çifçi (2011)
developed a method based on fuzzy analytic network process within group decision-making schema
under incomplete preference relations [37]. To manipulate the subjectivity of decision makers’
evaluations, Amindoust et al. (2012) develop a new ranking method on the basis of fuzzy inference
system (FIS) for sustainable supplier selection problem [6]. Azadnia et al. (2015) developed an
integrated method based on rule-based weighted fuzzy approach [38], fuzzy analytical hierarchy
process and multi-objective mathematical programming for sustainable supplier selection and order
allocation. Grisi et al. (2010) propose a fuzzy AHP method for green supplier selection using a
seven-step approach [39]. Fuzzy logic is used to overcome uncertainty caused by human qualitative
judgments. ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) methods are able to make a
successful assessment of each alternative based on knowledge of the concordance and discordance
sets for all pairs of alternatives. They are often used to select right suppliers [40]. Thus, Sevkli (2010)
proposes a fuzzy ELECTRE for supplier selection [41]. Although the fuzzy methods can deal with
the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment, it requires priori information (e.g., pre-set
membership function). Moreover, the fuzzy methods always convert linguistic variables into fuzzy
numbers with fixed intervals. Therefore, computation results usually do not exactly match initial
linguistic terms, which easily cause loss of information and lack of precision in the final results.
Although these methods have brought great insights to supplier selection literature, most of them
lack flexible mechanisms to handle the subjectivity and the vagueness of decision makers’ assessments.
Although some fuzzy methods of supplier selection (e.g., fuzzy ELECTRE) consider the vagueness in
decision–making information, they require much priori information (e.g., pre-set fuzzy membership
function) which consumes much time and effort of managers. Moreover, the previous fuzzy approaches
use fuzzy number with fixed interval to indicate the uncertainty, which cannot identify the changes in
decision makers’ judgments. For those reasons, there is a clear need for a new formal decision support
methodology for the sustainable supplier selection under vague environment.
3. The Proposed Method
The main objective of this paper is to propose an integrated method for sustainable supplier
selection based on rough set theory and ELECTRE. Besides, vagueness manipulation is also considered
in the proposed approach. A flowchart of the proposed approach is shown in Figure 1.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
Sustainability 2018, 10, x FOR PEER REVIEW
5 of 20
5 of 21
Figure 1.
1. The
Theframework
framework of
of rough
rough ELimination
ELimination Et
Et Choix
Choix Traduisant
Traduisant la REalité (ELECTRE).
Figure
3.1. Determine
Determine the
the Supplier
Supplier Evaluation
Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established. The
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established.
D1,DD12, D
,…,
DkD)k )who
The group
has
k decision-makers
whoare
areresponsible
responsiblefor
for determining
determining and
and the
group
has k
decision-makers
(i.e.,(i.e.,
2 , …,
ranking each criterion (i.e., C1 , C2 , …, Ck ). For the sustainable supplier selection, three aspects we
C2,…,are
Ckeconomic
ranking
eachinto
criterion
(i.e., C1,They
). For thecriteria,
sustainable
supplier selection,
three
aspects
we
should take
consideration.
environmental
criteria and
social
criteria.
should take into consideration. They are economic criteria, environmental criteria and social criteria.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have different
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have
cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set P = { p1 , p2 , · · · , ph }
different cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set
with h ordered judgments, in the manner of p1 ≤ p2 ≤ · · · ≤ ph . Let pi be a random judgment in the
p1 ≤ approximation
p2 ≤≤ ph . Let
P =P and
p1, pd2is,
, ph as
with
orderedof
judgments,
of lower
a
set
defined
thehdistance
P, where din=the
phmanner
− p1 . The
Apr (ppii ) be
and
the upper approximation Apr ( pi ) of the judgment pi can be identified as follows.
random judgment in the set P and d is defined as the distance of P , where d = ph − p1 . The
Lower approximation set:
{
}
lower approximation
Apr( pi ) and the upper approximation Apr
( pi ) of the judgment pi can
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P p j ≤ pi , pi − p j ≤ d
be identified as follows
Lower
Upper approximation
approximation set:
set:
{
≤d
Apr
( (ppi ))==∪∪pp j ∈
j ≤p p
j)d
Apr
∈P
P |pp ≥
, i ,p( p−i −p p ≤
i
Upper approximation set:
j
j
i
i
h
RN ( pi ) = piL , pU
i
{
j
i
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P | p j ≥ pi , ( p j − pi ) ≤ d
(1)
}
}
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
6 of 20
q
Where piL = m ∏ xij
q
n
pU
=
∏ yij
i
(4)
(5)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr ( pi ) and the upper approximation
set Apr ( pi ) of pi respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
For different criteria, experts might give different weights. Use wkj indicate the weight of jth
criterion with kth expert.
With the Formulas (1)–(5)
n
o
n
d j = MAX wm
(6)
j − wj
o
n
m
n
≤ dj
(7)
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≤ wm
Apr wm
j , wj − wj
j
o
n
n
m
≤ dj
(8)
Apr wm
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≥ wm
j , wj − wj
j
q
Lim wkj = m ∏ x j
(9)
q
Lim wkj = n ∏ y j
(10)
where x j and y j are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (wkj ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (wkj ) of wkj respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
h
i h
i
kU
RN wkj = Lim wkj , Lim wkj
= wkL
,
w
j
j
s
w jL =
s
(11)
s
∏ wkL
j
(12)
k =1
s
s
s
wU
∏ wkU
j =
j
(13)
k =1
h
i
We could get the weight of each criterion w j = w jL , wU
j .
3.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Apart from the decision for the weight of criteria, the experts should give the assessment of the
alternatives with consideration of all the criteria. Let’s use rijk to represent the kth expert scores on jth
criterion in ith alternative. The following is the scoring matrix. Aggregate all the scoring matrix.
k
r11
k
r21
Rk =
..
.
k
rm1
k
r12
k
r22
..
.
k
rm2
···
···
..
.
···
k
r1n
k
r2n
..
.
k
rmn
(14)
rf
rf
· · · rf
11
12
1n
f f
r21 r22 · · · rf
2n
e
R= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
..
rf
nm
m2 · · · rg
m1 rf
n
o
reij = rij1 , rij2 , · · · , rijh
(15)
(16)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
7 of 20
Determine the rough matrix with expert ratings.
d = max rijm − rijn
(17)
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≤ rijm , rijm − rijn ≤ d
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≥ rijm , rijn − rijm ≤ d
(18)
q
Lim rijk = m
∏ xij
(19)
(20)
q
Lim rijk = n ∏ yij
(21)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (rijk ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (rijk ) of rijk respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
i
h
RN rijk = Lim, Lim = rijkL , rijkU
(22)
i h
i
h
io
nh
RN reij = rij1L , rij1U , rij2L , rij2U , · · · , rijsL , rijsU
i
h
RN reij = rijL , rijU
(23)
s
rijL =
s
s
s
∏
L , rU
r11
11
L , rU
r21
21
R=
..
.
L U
rm1 , rm1
s
∏ rijkU
rijkL , rijU =
s
L U
r12 , r12
L U
r22 , r22
···
k =1
..
.
L U
rm2 , rm2
(24)
(25)
k =1
···
..
.
···
L U
r1n , r1n
L U
r2n , r2n
..
.
L U
rmn , rmn
(26)
Then, we normalize the rough decision matrix with the weight of criteria.
h
i h
i
L U
sij = rij · w j = rijL w jL , rijU wU
ij = sij , sij
(27)
” L U#
h
i
sij sij
tij =
,
= tijL , tU
ij
Cj Cj
n o
Where Cj = MAX sU
ij
L , tU
t11
11
L , tU
t21
21
T=
..
.
L U
tm1 , tm1
L U
t12 , t12
L U
t22 , t22
···
..
.
L U
tm2 , tm2
..
···
.
···
L U
t1n , t1n
L U
t2n , t2n
..
.
L U
tmn , tmn
(28)
(29)
(30)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
8 of 20
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct some field for the comparison among all the alternatives. We compare
different alternatives in two aspects. One is the concordance and the other is the discordance. Construct
the concordance and discordance matrices.
CS pq = Fj t pj ≥ tqj
(31)
DS pq = Fj t pj < tqj
(32)
CS pq represents the areas that alternative p is better than alternative q and DS pq represents the
areas that alternative p is worse than alternative q.
c pq =
∑
wj
(33)
Fj ∈CS pq
max Fj ∈ DS pq d t pj , tqj
d pq =
max Fj ∈ J d t pj , tqj
L U
L U
−
c12 , c12
· · · c1m
, c1m
L , cU
L , cU
−
·
·
·
c
c21
2m 2m
21
C=
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
L U L U
···
−
cm1 , cm1
cm2 , cm2
− d12 · · · d1m
− · · · d2m
d21
D= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
dm1 dm2 · · · −
(34)
(35)
(36)
By means of the calculation, we could get the rough concordance matrix C and discordance
matrix D.
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
After we get the concordance matrix and discordance matrix, we should determine the threshold
value. Using it to transform the matrix into Boolean matrix. First, we calculate the mean of the all
factors in matrix C and matrix D.
m
m
∑
∑ c pq
c=
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
m
∑
d=
(37)
m ( m − 1)
m
∑
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
d pq
m ( m − 1)
(38)
Compare the factors in matrix C with c and the factors in matrix D with d. According the result of
the comparison, we get the concordance Boolean matrix F and discordance Boolean matrix G.
(
f pq =
(
g pq =
1
i f : c pq ≥ c
0
i f : c pq < c
1
i f : d pq ≤ d
0
i f : d pq > d
(39)
(40)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
9 of 20
F = f pq m×m , G = g pq m×m
(41)
Then we could construct the general Boolean matrix H.
h pq = f pq · g pq
(42)
H = h pq m×m
(43)
According to the above calculations, we could get the general Boolean matrix. It is a basis for the
ranking of the alternatives. If h pq = 1, that means alternative p is better than alternative q.
Step 4: Calculate the pure concordance index and discordance index
By the Boolean general matrix, we could get part relations between all alternatives. Since if
h pq = 1, we know that alternative p is better than alternative q. But if h pq = 0 and we could not infer
the relationship of alternative p and alternative q from other alternatives, then we do not know which
is better. In order to get a rank of all the alternatives, we bring into pure concordance index cˆi and
discordance index d̂i .
Before calculating the pure index, we should transform rough interval into definite number.
Song et al. (2017) has proposed this method. We use ∆−1 represents the calculation of changing rough
interval into definite number [14].
The calculation includes the following procedures.
(1) Normalization
zei L =
zei U =
ziL − minziL /∆max
min
(44)
i
L
zU
i − minzi
i
/∆max
min
(45)
U
L
∆max
min = maxzi − minzi
i
(46)
i
L
where ziL and zU
i are the lower limit and the upper limit of the rough number zei respectively; zei and
zei U are the normalized form of ziL and zU
i respectively.
(2) Determine the total normalized definite value by
zei L × 1 − zei L + zei U × zei U
βi =
(47)
1 − zei L + zei U
(3) Compute the final definite value form zei der for zei by
zei der = minziL + β i ∆max
min
(48)
i
Therefore, we can use this method to calculate the concordance index and discordance index.
m
cˆi =
∑
q=1,q6=i
∆−1 cf
iq −
m
d̂i =
∑
q=1,q6=i
m
∑
p=1,p6=i
∆−1 cf
pi
(49)
m
diq −
∑
d pi
(50)
p=1,p6=i
Step 5: Determine the final ranking
According to the cˆi , we can get a priority in concordance. The bigger value of cˆi the higher place
the alternative would get. We use R1i for the ranking in concordance. The same we can get the priority
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
10 of 20
in discordance by d̂i . But on the contrary, the smaller value of d̂i the higher place the alternative would
get. We use R2i for the ranking in discordance. The final ranking is calculated as follows:
Ri =
R1i + R2i
2
(51)
Ri is the final rank of all the alternatives.
4. Case Study
In this section, in order to validate the applicability and effectiveness of the proposed method, we
use an example to illustrate. We assume that there is a manufacturing company. For the purpose of
choosing a good supplier, they set up a panel of 4 experts. The experts come from various departments
including purchasing, quality and production and planning who are involved in the supplier selection
process. And there are 8 suppliers for selection.
4.1. Implementation
4.1.1. Determine the Supplier Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, the experts make a decision of the criteria. In addition to economic criteria,
environmental criteria and social criteria should also be considered for the sustainable supplier
selection. These criteria consist of three parts, we use C1~10 to represent these ten criteria. They are
Economic criteria including quality (C1), response (C2) and cost (C3); Environmental criteria including
environmental management system (C4), carbon emission & resource consumption (C5), design for
the environment (C6), Green image (C7); Social criteria including product liability (C8), employee right
and welfare (C9), social commitment (C10). The detailed introduction is shown in Table 1. We use
A1~8 to represent alternatives, E1~4 to represent experts.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
After the decision of criteria, experts should evaluate the weight of each criterion. The experts
give their evaluation to the criteria in the Table 2. Firstly, we convert the grades which experts give to
criteria into rough number. Take criterion C1 for example.
Table 2. The grade of each criterion.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
E1
E2
E3
E4
4
3
6
5
6
6
4
4
6
7
5
6
7
5
4
6
4
3
6
4
4
4
5
5
6
5
3
2
6
5
6
4
7
6
5
5
5
4
7
4
According to the Equations (6)–(13) in Section 3,
d1 = 2
Lim w14 = 4 4 × 5 × 4 × 6 = 4.68, Lim w14 = 6
√
√
w1L = 4 4 × 4.31 × 4 × 4.68 = 4.24, w1U = 4 4.68 × 5.48 × 4.68 × 6 = 5.18
The same as the other criteria, following the same procedure, we can get the importance degree of
all the criteria in Table 3.
Table 3. The importance of all the criteria.
Rough Importance
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
[4.24, 5.18]
[3.57, 4.77]
[5.69, 6.70]
[5.06, 5.42]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
[2.63, 3.67]
[6.06, 6.42]
[4.28, 5.60]
4.1.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Different expert might hold different view for alternatives and criteria because of their personal
experience and knowledge. And the true information is just contained in the cognitive vagueness.
According to the evaluation towards the alternatives from the experts, we could get the rough number
of each alternative. We take the data for criterion 1 in Table 4 for example.
Table 4. The evaluation for alternative under the criterion 1.
C1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
6
4
5
4
3
6
7
5
4
3
4
5
5
6
6
4
6
4
6
5
3
4
5
3
5
2
3
5
4
6
7
5
According to the Equations (17)–(26), we use x cab for the cth expert’s evaluation towards alternative
b in criterion a. We can get the rough matrix in Table 5.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
12 of 20
Table 5. The rough matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[4.68, 5.70]
[2.63, 3.67]
[3.65, 5.15]
[4.53, 4.93]
[3.23, 4.16]
[5.02, 5.85]
[5.69, 6.70]
[3.66, 4.69]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.66, 4.69]
[2.22, 3.13]
[5.54, 5.93]
[4.54, 5.38]
[5.69, 6.70]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.06, 4.41]
[4.24, 5.18]
[5.11, 5.
Make sure to avold plagiarism as much as possible✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph). ✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be accepted.✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles unless the assignment calls for more.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
Make sure to avold plagiarism as much as possibleNote:• You must include at least 5 references.• Format your references using APA style.• Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11753
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Dr. Samreen Akhtar
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization. What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity? Directions: Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles. Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit
The Presentations will be stopped at 10 minutes. Anything beyond 10 minutes will not be listened to (and anything not listened to cannot be assessed)Please see the questions shown in the screenshot. I will send you all the info after being hired, eg PPTs, student access etc. Please send a draft in 12hrs -1 day time, day 2, and day 3 as well. + Will need to draft some questions to ask the teacher and revise base on feedback (Send bk ard in 1 day max)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MKT3SMK Strategic Marketing Assessment 3
Presentation to Buhi Supply Co. Board
Task: Presentation to Buhi Supply Co. Board of Directors
Length: Total length of video recording is 10 minutes maximum
Weighting: 40% of final grade
Due Date: Sunday 29 October, by 23:59 AEST/AEDT
Submission: via the LMS – paste the YouTube link on a Word document and submit via Turnitin link
(see instructions under “Notes for Submission” section)
In this subject, you are engaged in real-world, authentic experiences. You are now a Senior
Marketing Manager at Buhi Supply Co. There is a review underway in the company, and you have
been asked to present to the Buhi Supply Co. Board of Directors. They want to know and understand
what has been happening in the Marketing Division across the past 8 rounds of business and what
your plans are should you be retained as the Senior Marketing Manager at Buhi Supply Co. moving
forward.
The Board of Directors have requested you provide them with a 10 minute (maximum – see “Timing”
subheading below) presentation identifying and justifying your strategic decision-making through
each business quarter and what your recommendations are for the future of the product range
based on all elements of the marketing mix.
As the company’s offices are spread across multiple geographic locations, you have been asked to
present remotely using a common industry tool – Zoom.
You are expected to:
• Present professionally and in-person with you being visible at all times as you present (do
not just record your voice over slides)
• Use PowerPoint slides (or equivalent) – not too many and refer to the La Trobe University
Library guidelines for good presentations
• Include figures, tables, screenshots, etc. from the simulation, as well as any reliable sources
of information (such as academic journal articles, industry articles, textbooks, etc. – all
correctly referenced using the APA 7 style of referencing as appropriate) to help support
your presentation.
Use a clear, logical structure – presentations require an introduction, body and conclusion. For
guidance (this is not mandatory, but is just a suggestion), you could format your presentation as
follows:
• Cover slide: Introduce yourself, your role, and one or two key achievements
• Body: 2-3 slides demonstrating what happened across the past 8 business rounds and why
these things happened – justify your decisions in the role
• Conclusion: 2-4 slides where you present your recommendations to the Board for each of
Product, Price, Place and Promotion (and how this relates to other factors covered
throughout the subject – remember nothing exists in isolation)
This is a capstone subject – it is expected that this is a very professional presentation reflecting all
the employability skills and marketing knowledge you have developed.
1
Timing:
The timing is to be strictly adhered to – 10 minutes maximum. The Board of Directors are
busy and have a very full agenda at this meeting with a lot of senior staff presentations to
hear. They operate under a strict time schedule. Presentations will be stopped at 10 minutes.
Anything beyond 10 minutes will not be listened to (and anything not listened to cannot be
assessed). Make sure the maximum 10 minutes that you have been allocated is not
exceeded.
Sources of information, research and referencing:
It is required that if you utilise external sources of information, you must correctly reference
all sources using the APA 7 style of referencing. To evaluate the different sources of
information available to you, consider current, relevant, authoritative, accurate and
purposeful information throughout all of your writing (see the C.R.A.A.P. framework for
evaluating sources of information). At this stage of your academic careers, you are expected
to use a combination of high-quality, academic journals, industry databases, and other
reliable sources of information. You must correctly use the APA 7 style of referencing in this
report. If these are not done correctly, you will be penalised between 10% and 100% of the
available marks depending on severity.
Special Consideration and Late Submission:
Sometimes unavoidable circumstances occur that might prevent you from submitting an
assignment on time and, in that case, you may be eligible to lodge a Special Consideration
request.
Unless a Special Consideration request has been submitted and approved, no extensions will
be granted. There will be a deduction of 5% per day (or part day) after the submission date.
Late submissions will only be accepted up to 5 working days after the original submission
date or 5 working days beyond any extension (including those granted under any Learning
Action Plan or Special Consideration application).
For more information see Assessment Procedure – Adjustments to Assessment.
2
(Source: Monash University, https://www.monash.edu/student-academic-success/build-digital-capabilities/use-videostreaming-tools/video-assessments)
3
Notes for Submission:
•
To submit your video recording:
• Go to YouTube.com
• Click on Sign in – you can sign in with an existing Gmail account, or create a new
account (which is free)
• Go to Your Channel and click on Create and then Upload Videos (top right of
screen – might be different on different devices)
• Drag and drop video file into the upload screen OR click on Select Files to upload
the relevant file
• Title: Your Name and La Trobe Student Number
• As you go through the various YouTube checks and information you MUST select
UNLISTED from the Visibility drop down list
• Once complete you MUST paste the YouTube video link into a Word document
and submit it via MKT3SMK Assessment 3 Turnitin link
•
If you are experiencing any IT issue you will need to contact the La Trobe Student IT
Support team.
•
Click here if you need support for getting started with Zoom
•
Generative AI tools cannot be used in this assessment task. In this assessment, you
must not use generative artificial intelligence (AI) to generate any materials or
content in relation to the assessment task.
•
Please note that you will be asked to check a box on the site by which you are declaring
that the work submitted is entirely your own, except where material quoted or
paraphrased is acknowledged in the text. You are also declaring that none of your
work has been submitted for assessment anywhere (including La Trobe University)
previously. Any work you submit may be checked by electronic or other means for
the purposes of detecting academic integrity breaches.
•
You will receive an auto-generated email when you have successfully submitted your
assessment. You should check for, and keep, the email receipt for the submission. If
you DO NOT receive this email confirmation it means you have not submitted your
assessment correctly and your assessment will not be marked.
•
DO NOT submit your Assessment via email – this will not be accepted under any
circumstances and will result in a zero mark being awarded.
•
You must keep a backup copy of every assignment you submit, until the marked
assignment has been returned to you. In the unlikely event that one of your
assignments is misplaced, you will need to submit your backup copy.
4
MKT3SMK: Assessment 3 (Presentation) Grading Rubric
CRITERIA
Criterion 1:
Evaluate strategic
directions
Value: 10 marks
Criterion 2
Strategic marketing
decision-making and
development of strategic
recommendations
Value: 20 marks
Criterion 3
Presentation and
communication
Value: 10 marks
N: Does not meet requirements
( 80 %)
Comprehensive range of marketing
strategies from past business
quarters identified and expertly
justified utilising appropriate
research Clear analysis presented.
to identify an array of factors
impacting performance.
Comprehensive coverage of
recommendations based on
marketing mix elements and
factors that impact them.
Identifies an excellent range of
marketing strategies arising from
analysis. Comprehensive level of
detail. logic, relevance,
justification.
Delivery demonstrates effective
preparation with clear voice,
excellent eye contact,
appropriate word choice/use of
terminology, excellent time
management, significant
audience engagement and given
in appropriate attire.
5
Memo
TO
Senior Marketing
Manager
FROM
Siloh Suco
COMMENTS:
As you know, several new Board Members were appointed at the last AGM. As such they
have called an URGENT Board of Directors Meeting for Sunday 29 October.
As Senior Marketing Manager you have been called to provide a 10 minute presentation
on the past 8 rounds of activity and present some clear and compelling strategic marketing
RE
Board of Directors
Meeting Agenda
recommendations for the next 12 months.
Stick to your time limit – they have a packed agenda and are seeing presentations from
every department and division so they will cut you off if you go over time.
Make it good and be sure to impress the Board. They are reviewing all senior positions in
the company so they will be very focused on what you have to say and your strategic
marketing directions for the future.
Below, in a separate link, I have enclosed the Presentation Guidelines for you to follow.
Make sure you read it carefully.
Siloh Suco
Vice President of Marketing
1-List and define the various types of retail stores and name one store that is an example of each type (other than those mentioned in the text).
2.Define the different store layouts and give an example of each that is different from those found in the text.
3.Why does a grocery store have a racetrack layout? How does this type of layout make shopping easier for consumers?
4.What are trend areas? How do they differ from test areas? Theoretically, when should a retailer use the shop area in a store?
5.How do basics differ from key items? What should happen when these types of items go on clearance?
6.Explain the difference between capacity, feature, and signature retail store fixtures. If you are merchandising several dozen different colors of sweatshirts, which fixture should you use and why?
7.How should round racks be merchandised? What is the color methodology the author discusses to successfully merchandise clothing on a round rack?
8.What sort of fixture would you use to merchandise the following items: bras, jeans, men’s dress shirts, and suit separates?
9.What is a slatwall versus a gridwall?
10.What are the guidelines used for accessory presentation? Can you list them all?
Ass 2 :
1.Why is it useful for a merchandiser to divide perimeter walls into sections?
2.Why is it useful for a merchandiser to divide the store with interior walls?
3.What impact does balance have on the effect of wall setups?
4.When is it permissible to treat separates as if they are part of a coordinate group on a wall?
5.Why is it necessary to feature both tops and bottoms in each wall section?
6.Describe why it makes retail sense to show accessories on a wall with a coordinate grouping.
7.Name three merchandising strategies that are supported by dispersing traffic throughout a store and drawing customers to a department’s back walls.
8.When is a consistent or systematic approach to wall treatments especially useful to a visual merchandiser?
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Business Ethics and Organization Social Responsibility (MGT
422)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Business ethics and
organization social responsibility
Course Code: MGT 422
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 12080
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Noorjahan Sherfudeen
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
No
CLO-6
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Write coherent project about a case study or actual research about ethics
Critical Thinking
Consider yourself the Chief executive officer of a small enterprise. The enterprise
updated the compliance policy. Now one of the employee dumped dangerous waste into
a nearby stream.
Questions:
a. Who would you invite into your office and what information would you require?
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
b. How frequently you suggest that Enterprise policies and procedures be updated.
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
c. Prepare a long- and short-term action plan to address the situation. (700 words-5
Marks)
Answers
a.
b.
c.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Notes: Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own words.Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly valued.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
Please follow the attached instructions to complete required assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment Title: Analyze a Case
Books and Resources
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Achieve Centre. (2018, February 20). Conflict escalation & what to do about it.
Baillien, E., Camps, J., Van den Broeck, A., Stouten, J., Godderis, L., Sercu, M., & De Witte, H.
(2016). An eye for an eye will make the whole…
Coleman, P. T., Deutsch, M., & Marcus, E. C. (Eds.). (2014). The handbook of conflict resolution:
Theory and practice.
Friedman, R. A., & Currall, S. C. (2003). Conflict escalation: Dispute exacerbating elements of email communication. Human Relations, 56(11)…
The New York Times (2013, March 28). Key and Peele: Can you be too nice at the office?
Guide to a Successful Case Study Analysis – See Attached.
Laura and Tim Case1 – See Attached.
Instructions
This week, you will begin part one of a two-part assignment. For part one, you will map the conflict in
the resources section (Laura and Tim Case1) and perform a preliminary analysis on the escalation of the
conflict.
In your evaluation, avoid summarizing the case. Instead, analyze the case critically and assess how it
pertains to this week’s readings. Remember, excellent analyses are a combination of critical and
analytical thoughts connected to greater themes presented in the readings – and this is not an easy task.
Be sure to include the following required elements in your assignment:
•
Briefly describe what you consider two or three major issues contained in the case.
•
Explain how these points or issues integrate with the material covered this week and then
explain their relevance to the case.
•
Identify the implications for the parties involved in the case.
•
Provide a brief description of the questions/challenges you have regarding the readings and
explain why they are important.
Do not include the following in your analysis:
•
A summary of the readings
•
A detailed description of the case
•
Any editorials
As you are preparing your response, consider the following questions:
•
What were the roots of the conflict?
•
How do the parties to the conflict view the behavior of the other and pursue their own interests
in the conflict situation?
•
At what point did the conflict become detrimental to the parties involved?
•
How might this conflict extend to the larger workplace?
Length: 8 pages, not including title or reference pages
References: Include a minimum of 5 scholarly resources.
Your assignment should demonstrate thoughtful consideration of the ideas and concepts presented in
the course by providing new thoughts and insights relating directly to this topic. Your response should
reflect scholarly writing and current APA standards.
Notes:
Paper must be in academic format.
Assignment will be submitted via Turnitin.
In a large publishing company in New York, a young woman, Laura, was hired as a copy editor for one of
the many journals produced by the company. Seven other employees worked on this team editing this
Journal, including a senior editor named Tim. Laura had worked there for about a month when she and
her fellow co-workers went for happy-hour after work. Everybody had a great time and had consumed a
fair amount of alcohol. When everybody was leaving the bar to head home, Tim, who had been secretly
attracted to Laura since she started work at the journal, hailed a cab and offered to share the ride with
Laura . Laura accepted the offer. Once she was inside the cab, Tim then suddenly made an aggressive
sexual advance toward her. Horrified, Laura pushed him away and told him to get out of the cab.
Mortified, Tim slinked out of the cab.
The next day, Laura came to work with some apprehension. How would she deal with Tim? Would the
cab incident affect her job? Although Tim did not supervise her, would he try to get her fired? Tim
immediately went to her office and apologized for his extremely inappropriate behavior in the cab.
Relieved at his apology, Laura decided not to pursue the matter through any formal channels in the
office. She figured that since Tim apologized, there was no need to dwell on the incident. After all, Laura
was a new employee, still in the process of learning the office politics and proving herself as being a
competent editor. She did not want to rock the boat or bring negative attention to herself.
Everything would have been okay if Tim had stopped at just one sincerely expressed apology. However,
whenever he found himself alone with Laura, Tim apologized again. And again . He said he was sorry
about the incident at every opportunity he had for three months. This constant apology was awkward
and annoying to Laura . Ironically, by Tim apologizing continuously for his unwanted attention in the cab,
he was foisting another form of unwanted attention upon Laura. When he first started apologizing,
Laura told him that “it was okay”. After three months of many apologies, she reached a point where she
asked him to stop apologizing, to no avail. Frustrated, she confided in a few co-workers about her
unusual dilemma. Consequently, these co-workers lost respect for Tim .
Although the cab incident was not common knowledge in the office, Tim sensed that others knew about
it by the way they interacted with him. The incident became the office “elephant” that the employees
“in the know” saw, but didn’t explicitly acknowledge. Meanwhile, Laura was tired of hearing Tim
apologize and her feelings of discomfort increased. So when another editor position opened up in
another journal division of the company, she applied for the job and was transferred to the other
journal. In her new position, she didn’t have Tim bothering her anymore. But she was unhappy with her
new job. The journal material was very boring. She didn’t work as well with her co-workers as she did in
the previous journal (excepting Tim). She realized that she really enjoyed her old job. She began to
regret her decision to avoid the conflict with Tim by moving to the new job. In an effort to seek advice as
to how to solve her problem, Laura decided to consult with the company ombudsman.
Guide to a Successful Case Study Analysis
A case study analysis must not merely summarize the case. It should identify key issues
and problems, outline and assess alternative courses of action, and draw appropriate
conclusions. The case study analysis can be broken down into the following steps:
•
•
•
•
•
Identify the most important facts surrounding the case.
Identify the key issue or issues.
Specify alternative courses of action.
Evaluate each course of action.
Recommend the best course of action.
Let’s look at what each step involves.
1. Identify the most important facts surrounding the case.
Read the case several times to become familiar with the information it contains.
Pay attention to the information in any accompanying exhibits, tables, or figures.
Many case scenarios, as in real life, present a great deal of detailed information.
Some of these facts are more relevant than others for problem identification. One
can assume the facts and figures in the case are true, but statements, judgments, or
decisions made by individuals should be questioned. Underline and then list the
most important facts and figures that would help you define the central problem
or issue. If key facts and numbers are not available, you can make assumptions,
but these assumptions should be reasonable given the situation. The “correctness”
of your conclusions may depend on the assumptions you make.
2. Identify the key issue or issues.
Use the facts provided by the case to identify the key issue or issues facing the
organization/individual you are studying. Many cases present multiple issues or
problems. Identify the most important and separate them from more trivial issues.
State the major problem or challenge facing the organization/individual. You
should be able to describe the problem or challenge in one or two sentences. You
should be able to explain how this problem affects the strategy or performance of
the organization/individual.
You will need to explain why the problem occurred. Does the problem or
challenge facing the organization/individual come from a changing environment,
new opportunities, etc?
•
To determine if a problem stems from management factors, consider whether
managers are exerting appropriate leadership over the organization and
monitoring organizational performance. Consider also the nature of management
decision-making: Do managers have sufficient information for performing this
role, or do they fail to take advantage of the information that is available?
•
To determine the role of organizational factors, examine any issues arising from
the organization’s structure, culture, business processes, work groups, divisions
among interest groups, relationships with other organizations, as well as the
impact of changes in the organization’s external environment-changes in
government regulations, economic conditions, or the actions of competitors,
customers, and suppliers.
You will have to decide which of these factors—or combination of factors—is
most important in explaining why the problem occurred.
3. Specify alternative courses of action.
List the courses of action the organization/individual can take to solve its problem
or meet the challenge it faces. Are new technologies, business processes,
organizational structures, or management behavior required? What changes to
organizational processes would be required by each alternative? What
management policy would be required to implement each alternative? Remember,
there is a difference between what an organization “should do” and what that
organization actually “can do.” Some solutions are too expensive or operationally
difficult to implement, and you should avoid solutions that are beyond the
organization’s resources. Identify the constraints that will limit the solutions
available. Is each alternative executable given these constraints?
4. Evaluate each course of action.
Evaluate each alternative using the facts and issues you identified earlier, given
the conditions and information available. Identify the costs and benefits of each
alternative. Ask yourself “what would be the likely outcome of this course of
action? State the risks as well as the rewards associated with each course of
action. Is your recommendation feasible from a technical, operational, and
financial standpoint? Be sure to state any assumptions on which you have based
your decision.
5. Recommend the best course of action.
State your choice for the best course of action and provide a detailed explanation
of why you made this selection. You may also want to provide an explanation of
why other alternatives were not selected. Your final recommendation should flow
logically from the rest of your case analysis and should clearly specify what
assumptions were used to shape your conclusion. There is often no single “right”
answer, and each option is likely to have risks as well as rewards.
**Credit: Pearson Education
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
1. Read Chapter 6 – Professional Associations in Leisure ServicesThis chapter provides a brief overview of the various Professional Associations in Leisure Services to give students a look into different career opportunities. Please explore the associations and see what your interests would be. ASSIGNMENT2. List TEN (10) examples of Professional Associations in Leisure Services that are listed in your book. Please list each professional association and give a TWO to THREE paragraph on what the association is about, when and where was/is their last/upcoming conference, who should attend and briefly describe a keynote speaker that presented at that conference or what new research was presented at the conference. Please ensure you have all the above information for EACH professional association you select.
This assignment is an individual assignment.Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Open e07h2Salary_LastFirst if you closed it at the end of Hands-On Exercise 2, and save it as e07h3Salary_LastFirst, changing h2 to h3. Click the 3-Finance sheet tab.
You will calculate the periodic interest rate and number of payment periods before you can calculate the present value of the loan.
Click cell E3, type =B3/B5, and then press Enter.
The periodic rate, 0.438%, is the result of dividing the APR by the number of payments per year.
Click cell E4, type = B4*B5, and then press Enter.
The total number of monthly payments, 36, is the product of the number of years the loan is outstanding and the number of payments per year.
Click cell E2, click Financial in the Function Library group on the Formulas tab, scroll through the list, and then select PV.
The Function Argument dialog box opens.
Click cell E3 to enter that cell reference in the Rate box, click in the Nper box, and then click cell E4. Click in the Pmt box, type -B2, and then click OK.
The result is $19,944.64 based on three years of $600 monthly payments with an APR of 5.25%. You entered a negative sign before the Pmt argument to display the result as a positive value. If you do not enter a negative sign, Excel will display the loan as a negative value.
Apply Accounting Number Format to cell E2. Save the workbook.
Figure 7.33 PV Function
Figure 7.33 Full Alternative Text
Step 2 Insert Formulas in a Loan Amortization Table
Now you will create an amortization table. The column labels and payment numbers have already been entered into the worksheet. You will enter formulas to show the beginning loan balance for each payment, the monthly payment, interest paid, and principal repayment. Refer to Figure 7.34 as you complete Step 2.
Click cell B8, type =E2, and then press Tab.
You entered a reference to the original loan amount because that is the beginning balance for the first payment. Referencing the original cell is recommended instead of typing the value directly in the cell due to internal rounding. Furthermore, if you change the original input values, the calculated loan amount will change in both cells B8 and E2.
Type =B$2 in cell C8 and press Ctrl+Enter. Drag the cell C8 fill handle to copy the payment to the range C9:C43.
The monthly payment is $600.00. You entered a reference to the original monthly payment so that if you change it in cell B2, Excel will update the values in the Monthly Payment column automatically. The cell reference must be a mixed (B$2) or absolute ($B$2) reference to prevent the row number from changing when you copy the formula down the column later.
Click cell D8. Click Financial in the Function Library on the Formulas tab and select IPMT to open the Function Arguments dialog box. Type E$3 in the Rate box and type A8 in the Per box. Type E$4 in the Nper box, type -E$2 in the PV box, and then click OK. Drag the cell D8 fill handle to copy the IPMT function to the range D9:D43.
The IPMT function calculates the interest of a specific payment based on the starting balance of $19,944.64 with a periodic interest of .438% over 36 payments. By keeping cell A8 as a relative cell address, the function adjusts the period to match the specific period of evaluation.
Click cell E8, click Financial in the Function Library, and then select PPMT to open the Function Arguments dialog box. Type E$3 in the Rate box and type A8 in the Per box. Type E$4 in the Nper box, type -E$2 in the PV box, and then click OK. Drag the cell E8 fill handle to copy the PPMT function to the range E9:E43.
To calculate the principal repayment, subtract the interest of the first payment $87.26 from the monthly payment of $600. The remaining portion of the $512.74 payment goes toward paying down the principal owed. Using the PPMT function automatically completed these calculations.
Click in cell F8 and type =B8-E8. Drag the cell F8 fill handle to copy the formula to the range F9:F43.
This formula calculates the ending balance after the first payment is made. The ending balance of $19,431.90 is calculated by subtracting the amount of principal in the payment $512.74 from the balance currently owed $19,944.64. The copied formulas show negative results until you complete the Beginning Balance column next.
Click in cell B9, type =F8, and then press Ctrl+Enter. Drag the cell B9 fill handle to copy the cell reference to the range B10:B43.
The beginning balance of the second payment is also the ending balance of the first payment. The easiest method to populate the column is by referencing the ending balance from the prior month (cell F8). However, this can also be calculated by subtracting the previous principal repayment value (such as $512.74) from the previous month’s beginning balance (such as $19,944.64). The formula results in column F are now positive numbers. The ending balance in cell F43 should be $0, indicating that the loan has been completely paid off.
Select the range B8:F8 and apply Accounting Number Format. Select the range B9:F43 and apply Comma Style.
You formatted the first row of the amortization table with Accounting Number Format and applied Comma Style to the remaining payment rows.
Enter SUM functions in cells C44, D44, and E44.
The total of the monthly payments in cell C44 is $21,600, which includes principal and interest. The total interest paid over the three years in cell D44 is $1,655.36. The total of the principal repayment in cell E44 is $19,944.64, which is the amount of the loan in cell E2.
Select the range C44:E44. Click the Home tab, click Cell Styles in the Styles group, and then select Total. Save the workbook.
Figure 7.34 shows the top and bottom portions of the amortization table with rows 16 through 37 hidden.
Figure 7.34 Loan Amortization Table
Figure 7.34 Full Alternative Text
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Input Area
Name
Bacarella
Günther
Chen
Laing
Garbett
Gomez
Hartvigsen
Ikenberry
Keone
Thunderhawk
Matsumoto
Mentzer
Mercado
Nitz
Sae
Scholfield
Terriquez
City
Atlanta
Chicago
Boston
Atlanta
Atlanta
Boston
Boston
Cleveland
Chicago
Chicago
Atlanta
Boston
Cleveland
Chicago
Cleveland
Atlanta
Chicago
Regions
South
Midwest
Northeast
Region
South
Midwest
Northeast
South
South
Northeast
Northeast
Midwest
Midwest
Midwest
South
Northeast
Midwest
Midwest
Midwest
South
Midwest
Title
Manager
Account Rep
Manager
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Manager
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Comparison Data
Last Day of Year
Minimum Manager Salary
12/31/2024
$
98,000
Hire Date
10/18/2010
11/7/2023
3/9/2023
12/14/2012
9/18/2014
10/11/2016
2/18/2023
4/17/2018
4/3/2020
1/17/2014
4/17/2015
6/26/2019
8/30/2019
8/13/2020
1/8/2020
7/14/2020
4/15/2009
Years
Employed
14.2
1.2
1.8
12.0
10.3
8.2
1.9
6.7
4.7
11.0
9.7
5.5
5.3
4.4
5.0
4.5
15.7
Year Hired
2010
2023
2023
2012
2014
2016
2023
2018
2020
2014
2015
2019
2019
2020
2020
2020
2009
Bonus Decision
Hired before
Hired before
Hired before
Day of Week
Hired
Monday
Tuesday
Thursday
Friday
Thursday
Tuesday
Saturday
Tuesday
Friday
Friday
Friday
Wednesday
Friday
Thursday
Wednesday
Tuesday
Wednesday
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Salary
98,750
69,575
85,800
98,000
77,835
66,725
75,000
65,125
65,125
95,500
79,750
60,450
60,000
61,000
60,000
62,750
70,750
Date
1/1/2013
1/1/2018
1/1/2023
Bonus
Amount
$
7,900
$
$
$
7,840
$
3,113
$
2,669
$
$
1,303
$
1,303
$
3,820
$
3,190
$
1,209
$
1,200
$
1,220
$
1,200
$
1,255
$
5,660
Percent
8%
4%
2%
Raise Status
N/A
N/A
Due For Raise
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Due For Raise
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Name
Bacarella
Günther
Chen
Laing
Garbett
Gomez
Hartvigsen
Ikenberry
Keone
Thunderhawk
Matsumoto
Mentzer
Mercado
Nitz
Sae
Scholfield
Terriquez
Location
Atlanta
Chicago
Boston
Atlanta
Atlanta
Boston
Boston
Cleveland
Chicago
Chicago
Atlanta
Boston
Cleveland
Chicago
Cleveland
Atlanta
Chicago
State
GA
IL
MA
GA
GA
MA
MA
OH
IL
IL
GA
MA
OH
IL
OH
GA
IL
Title
Manager
Account Rep
Manager
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Manager
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Account Rep
Hire Date
10/18/2010
11/7/2023
3/9/2023
12/14/2012
9/18/2014
10/11/2016
2/18/2023
4/17/2018
4/3/2020
1/17/2014
4/17/2015
6/26/2019
8/30/2019
8/13/2020
1/8/2020
7/14/2020
4/15/2009
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Salary
98,750
69,575
85,800
98,000
77,835
66,725
75,000
65,125
65,125
95,500
79,750
60,450
60,000
61,000
60,000
62,750
70,750
Summary by Location
City
State
Atlanta
GA
Boston
MA
Chicago
IL
Cleveland
OH
# Employees
5
4
5
3
Summary Average Salaries
Account Rep
Manager
$
$
69,435
93,350
Account Reps Summary Statistics
Hired Before 1/1/2018
5
Total $ Hired < 1/1/2018
$ 393,060.00
Average $ Hired < 1/1/2018
$ 78,612.00
Highest $ Hired
Purchase answer to see full
attachment
In the second step of the project, after you have conducted background research on the client’s business and had at least one initial meeting with them, you will focus your understanding of their competitive environment as a specific Objective Statement/ Project Proposal for a specific business unit or product category (e.g., Adidas Tennis, Adidas Terrex outdoor, Adidas Originals, Adidas Sustainability). Specifically, working in your student teams create a no more than five (5) PowerPoint slide presentation for your client defining:The organization’s mix of Price, Promotions, Product, and Place tactics; Who do they compete against? Identify at least three (3) close competitors (either within- or across- industries) and describe their competitive position relative your client: What mix of Functional, Symbolic, and Experiential Value do they offer? How does this mix differ from their close competitors? What are the client’s important Tangible Resources, Intangible Resources, and Organizational Capabilities; Discuss the client’s resources/ capabilities mix as: Valuable, Rare, and Inimitable [How would they stack up relative their closest competitors?] at least one (1) of the identified themes as the particular focus for your project: Intense Competition, Changing Consumer Preferences, Digital Transformation, Brand Identity and Relevance, Supply Chain and Sustainability, Innovation and Technology Trends, Emerging Markets, Athlete Endorsements, Global Economic Factors, Managing Counterfeit and Intellectual Property one (1) of below as the focus of your Marketing Capstone Consulting Project: or In addition, provide the client with a sense of the timeline for the project (we will provide our final recommendations by the end of the term), brief backgrounds and bios for your team, and a sense of what the final deliverables will consist of (a written tactical plan as well as at least one case study illustration of what implementation of your recommendations would look like—e.g., Eric Kidwell described using an Apple Store case study help a retail client) – Explore the Apple/Nike failed collaboration in 2006
Now you will write a journal response paper. You will review your work journal entries and create a short reflective essay from some of your entries on what you have learned so far and how you have applied that learning. Your essay should include your experiences, observations, and key concepts. This assignment will be a Turnitin paper of 2 – 3 pages, not including the title page.
Your paper should be formatted in APA style. Include at least one (1) peer-reviewed source related to course material taken in your academic program and scholarly journals.
Job title: Team Lead
Company: Zara
Work description: Invoices/ payment processing, studio scheduling, team management
—————————————————
Do these in order:
Please write a paper (2 page content)
– In correct APA format, write the citation.
– please submit the paper on time and make sure NO PLAGIARISM!!!
Chapter 8 Homework Student Templates – 7th Edition
M8–7
Assume Simple Co. had credit sales of $250,000 and cost of goods sold of $150,000 for the period.
Simple uses the percentage of credit sales method and estimates that 1 percent of credit sales
would result in uncollectible accounts. Before the end-of-period adjustment is made, the Allowance
for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $250. What amount of Bad Debt Expense would the
company record as an end-of-period adjustment?
Credit sales this period
$250,000
Bad debt loss rate (1.0%)
.01
Bad Debt Expense this year
$ 2,500
M8–8
Assume that Simple Co. had credit sales of $250,000 and cost of goods sold of $150,000 for the
period. Simple uses the aging method and estimates that the appropriate ending balance in the
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $3,000. Before the end-of-period adjustment is made, the
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $250. What amount of Bad Debt Expense
would the company record as an end-of-period adjustment?
Desired balance
-Unadjusted balance
Required Adjustment
M8–9
Using the information in M8-7 and M8-8, prepare the journal entry to record the end-of-period
adjustment for bad debts under the (a) percentage of credit sales method and (b) aging of
accounts receivable method. Which of these methods is required by GAAP?
Adjusting Entry for the % of Credit Sales Method (M8-7)
a.
Bad Debt Expense
2,500
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
2,500
Adjusting Entry for the aging receivables method (M8-8)
b.
Chapter 8 Homework – ACCT 220 7th Edition
1
M 8 – 10
Required: Compute the missing amounts.
Principal on the Note
Interest Rate
Time Period
Interest Earned
a. $100,000
10%
6 months
?????
b. $50,000
?????
9 months
$3,000
c. ?????
10%
12 months
$4,000
Exercise 8 – 8
Innovative Tech Inc. (ITI) has been using the percentage of credit sales method to estimate bad
debts. During November, ITI sold services on account for $100,000 and estimated that ½ of 1 percent
of those sales would be uncollectible.
Required:
1. Prepare the November adjusting entry for bad debts.
2. Starting in December, ITI switched to using the aging method. At its December 31 year-end, total
Accounts Receivable is $89,000, aged as follows: (1) 1–30 days old, $75,000; (2) 31–90 days old,
$10,000; and (3) more than 90 days old, $4,000. The average rate of uncollectibility for each age
group is estimated to be (1) 10 percent, (2) 20 percent, and (3) 40 percent, respectively. Prepare
a schedule to estimate an appropriate year-end balance for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
3. Before the end-of-year adjusting entry is made, the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a $1,600
credit balance at December 31. Prepare the December 31 adjusting entry.
4. Show how accounts receivable should be shown on the December 31 balance sheet.
Requirement 1- Prepare the November 30 adjusting journal entry for Bad Debt Expense:
Bad Debt Expense
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
Chapter 8 Homework – ACCT 220 7th Edition
2
Exercise 8 – 8 continued
Requirement 2 – Prepare a schedule for bad debt expense using the aging receivables method.
Accounts Receivable
Total
1–30
31–90
> 90
$ 89,000
$ 75,000
$ 10,000
$ 4,000
x 10 %
x 20 %
x 40 %
$ 7,500
$ 2,000
$ 1,600
Estimated Uncollectible (%)
Estimated Uncollectible ($)
$11,100
Requirement 3 – Based on the gaining receivable method to recognize bad debt expense.
What is the amount of bad debt expense recognized?
Unadjusted Balance
Adjustment for Bad Debt Expense
Desired Ending Balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
$11,100
Adjusting Journal Entry to Recognize Bad Debt Expense using Aging Receivables method.
Requirement 4 – How is this reported on the balance sheet (accounts receivable & AFDA)
The accounts related to accounts receivable can be shown one of two ways on the December 31
balance sheet:
Accounts Receivable
$89,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
($11,100)
Accounts Receivable, Net of Allowance
$77,900
Chapter 8 Homework – ACCT 220 7th Edition
3
Exercise 8 – 9
Fraud Investigators Inc. operates a fraud detection service.
Required:
1. Prepare journal entries for each transaction below.
a. On March 31, 10 customers were billed for detection services totaling $25,000.
b. On October 31, a customer balance of $1,500 from a prior year was determined to be
uncollectible and was written off.
c. On December 15, a customer paid an old balance of $900, which had been written off.
d. On December 31, $500 of bad debts were estimated and recorded for the year.
2. Omit Requirement 2
Requirement 1 – Prepare journal entries for transactions a, b, c and d.
a.
Accounts Receivable
25,000
Service Revenue
25,000
b.
c.
Accounts Receivable
900
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
Cash
900
900
Accounts Receivable
900
d.
Chapter 8 Homework – ACCT 220 7th Edition
4
Exercise 8 – 10
The following transactions took place for Smart Solutions Inc.
2020
Transaction
a.
July 1
Loaned $70,000 to an employee & received a one-year, 10 percent note.
b.
Dec. 31
Accrued interest on the note.
2021
c.
July 1
Received interest on the note. (No interest has been recorded since December 31.)
d.
July 1
Received principal on the note.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries that Smart Solutions Inc. would record for the above transactions.
Journal Entry on July 1, 2020
a.
Adjusting Journal Entry to Recognize Interest Expense for the year on December 31, 2020
b.
Journal Entry on July 1, 2021 when the note matures (Combine the c & d as shown in the lecture)
c/d
Chapter 8 Homework – ACCT 220 7th Edition
5
I am working on a 3 phase project. Phase 1 is done and it is time for phase 2. I am attaching the overall project guidelines as well as phase 1. For this part, I need a powerpoint of at least 3 slides identifying all possible risks of owning a Lowe’s store in Thailand as well as summarizing the costs and benefits. Aside from submitting a powerpoint, I also need to submit a “paper’ that basically incorporates and explains the information used on the slides. For citing sources, please use APA format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BUSI455. International Business. Dr. Oh
Guideline of the Project
Global Business Plan
Homework assignments (Group Project)
• Global Business Plan (170 points):
• This project provide a student a chance to apply key concepts
and theories in IB to the foreign market entry project
• Each assignment posted on Blackboard
• Designed to develop an international business plan and an entry
strategy into a host country
• Expanding globally for a new or an existing product or service
(limited to a consumer product/service)
• Entry mode should be one of FDI forms
• Comprise of three phases and each phase has several modules
• Required to submit three reports:
• Report 1 is worth 30 points
• Report 2 is worth 30 points
• Report 3 + Final is worth 30 points
• Key Deliverables:
• Initial Presentation (GBP Proposal): 20
• Reports 1, 2, 3, and Final: 90
• Presentation: 60 (Phase 1, 2, and 3: 20 * 3)
Foreign Market
Entry Strategy
• Flow of Entry
Decision Process
• Apply to GBP project
Rationale for IB
PESTEL
Distance/Risk
globalEDGE
IB Strategy, Entry
Modes, Org. Structure
Marketing, SCM,
Production, HR,
Distribution
globalEDGE
• Started out in1995. Relaunched as globalEDGE in 2001
• Collection of diverse database related to IB
• Majority of content accessible for free (except diagnostic tools)
http://globaledge.msu.edu/
GBP Project Overview
Firm/
Country
Selection
• US MNE
• Consumer
Product
• Target
Country
• Why?
Proposal
• Rationale
for
selection
• Overview
of firm &
country
Phase 1:
Understan
ding
Business
Context
Phase 2:
Develop
IB Strategy
Phase 3:
Global
Operation
• Why?
• Economic
• Sociocultural
• Political
• Legal Env.
Distance
• Risks
• IB strategy
• Entry mode
• Strategy
diamond
• IB structure
• Marketing
• Product
• Distribution
• Promotion
• Pricing
• HR strategy
• Final Report
Final
Presentation
• PPT slides
• Online PT
• 25 minutes
• Refer to
grading
rubrics
GBP Project Proposal
• Firm/Country Selection:
• Firm/Product selection: select a firm (an American MNE), a
(consumer) product/service, not primarily online business, and
a target country that your team wants to enter
• Target (Host) country selection: preferably one of BRICS
countries (Brazil, Russia, India, China, South Africa); It should
not be one of developed countries, but one of developing or
emerging countries. And it should have a meaningful and
significant market size or critical mass of consumers (maybe, 10
BEM: Argentina, Indonesia, Poland, Nigeria, Vietnam, Chile,
Egypt, Turkey, Mexico)
• Entry mode should be one of FDI forms
• Should be approved by Professor, first-come first-served basis
GBP Project Proposal
• Proposal of Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
• Format: PowerPoint slides
• Submit Presentation Video
• It should cover the name of an American MNE, a product/service, and a target
country. Here are exemplary items of contents in your proposal (refer to the
template posted at BB):
• Firm analysis: The company overview/history/financial performance
(last 3 to 5 years)/Business Strategy & International Business Strategy/
its prior international business operation and experience/lessons
learned from prior foreign market entry (why do you select this
company?)
• The product/service: brief explanation, key value proposition and major
adaption of the product/service for the target market, internationalization
of the product/service (for example, to what extent the firm needs to
adapt and how?), justification of selection, specify a business potential of
a proposed product/service, for example, estimated market size (provide
supporting data) of that business (why this company need international
expansion “NOW”?)
• A target country: overview of the country, market overview, competition
(local/global players in that host country, should provide market share
and strengths and weaknesses of the key players of major players in the
host country), preliminary analysis on political, economic, socio-cultural,
and legal environment, the reasons of your selection, a potential of
business opportunities (why this country?)
• Answer to the questions of why go international and now? And where to
go? (why do you select this country?)
GBP Project Report Guideline
• General guideline for Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
• The semester-long project: cannot develop and complete it at
once in a short period of time. Instead, you’d better proceed it
step-by-step as the semester unfolds
• Expect the University-level quality of the business plan
• Refer to the detailed guideline posted at BB, try to do all
necessary analysis but should present relevant ones
• Should provide quantitative analyses (use globalEDGE)
• After doing key analysis, should provide managerial
implications for your foreign entry and IB
• Refer to the sample report
• Single-spaced, in MS Word format, no page limit
• Required to provide “References” at the end of Report. (Follow
APA style) Do extensive and external research
• Should cite your References in the text (place parenthetical
citation in the text)
• Filename: “Your Firm Name-Report#.docx”
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project
• Phase 1 – Seizing international business opportunity and
understanding different business context in the host country
(Part 1 and 2 in the textbook)
• Required to submit the GBP Phase 1 Report & Presentation
• PHASE 2 – Developing international business strategy to
compete in the host country and organizing a global structure
(Part 3, 4, and 5 in the textbook)
• Required to submit the GBP Phase 2 Report & Presentation
• PHASE 3 – Implementing your Global Business Plan and
international operations in the host market (Part 5 and 6 in the
textbook)
• Required to submit the GBP Final Report (Phase 1, 2, 3 + Executive
Summary + Conclusion) & Final Presentation
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 1 – Identifying and Seizing Global Business Opportunities (Chapter 1 in
the textbook)
• Determine potentials of international markets for a product or service of an
American MNE (it should be a consumer product/service): estimated market size
• Analyze the firm, the product/service (adaptation of it), and the host country
• Market landscape/outlook in the host market
• Specify the business opportunities, justify the potential value of the
opportunities, and clarify the value proposition of such international business
opportunities
• Summarize the reasons why this firm needs to globalize (enter the host country)
and why now
• Managerial implications and insights
• MODULE 2 – Analyzing International Competitors and competition (Chapter 1 in the
textbook)
• Identify domestic (local) and international companies involved in similar business global
business activities (local and global players in the host country) and their market share
• Brief overview of the competitive situation and context of the local and global market
• Brief summary of strengths and weaknesses of your firm and competitors
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 3 – Assessing the Economic-Geographic Environment (Chapter 2 & 3 in the
textbook)
• Examine geographic and economic factors that affect the business environment of a
nation (should be relevant to your business, not list irrelevant ones)
• Exemplary contents:
• Income: GNP/GDP, Per Capita income, average family income, distribution of wealth,
employment, etc.
• Natural resources
• Industry compositions (major industry)
• Population: latest count, growth rates, number of households, working population, age
distribution, density of population
• Size of middle class, household consumption, Market Potential Index (MPI)
• Infrastructure: transportation and communication systems – Modes/types, availability,
usage rates
• Inflation rates, interest rates
• International trade statistics: exports/imports/balance-of-payments/exchange rates
• Trade restriction: embargoes, quotas, import taxes, tariffs, licensing, custom duties
• Foreign ownership restrictions
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 4 – Assessing the Social-Cultural Environment (Chapter 4 in
the textbook)
• Research social institutions, customs, traditions, business practices, and
beliefs influencing business (should be relevant to your business, not list irrelevant ones)
• Exemplary contents:
• Language Spoken/Written
• Religion and religious influences in business and life
• Customs/traditions/manners/habits: food, drinks, clothing, hygiene, myths and
superstitions
• Core values, norms, and attitudes relating to foreign and domestic products
• High-and low-context culture; rankings on Hofstede’s cultural dimensions
• Aesthetics, colors, music, symbolism, etc.
• Social institutions: family life, educational institutions, class systems, etc.
• Business customs and practices: protocols, greetings, keeping time, space, gift
giving, negotiation style, hospitality, etc.
• Demographics, characteristics of demographics and its change over time
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 4 – Assessing the Social-Cultural Environment (Chapter 4 in
the textbook)
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 4 – Assessing the Social-Cultural Environment (Chapter 4 in
the textbook)
• Should be relevant to your business (industry)
The case of Home Depot or Lowe’s
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 5 – Assessing the Political-Legal Environment (Chapter 2 &
3 in the textbook)
• Research political institutions, geopolitical factors, legal context of business
in the host country
• Research the influence of government and regulations on business activities
• Should be relevant to your business, not list irrelevant ones
• Exemplary contents:
• Political ideology
• Roles of politics, political stability and risks, political freedom
• Relationship between politics and business
• Type of government and recent political developments
• Legislation, regulations, or special rules affecting marketing your product
or doing your business in the local market
• Tariffs, quotas, and other restrictions on imports and exports
• Information on subsidies
• The rule of law, legal tradition
• Intellectual property rights: laws, regulations, legal enforcement systems
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 1. Seizing IB Opportunities & Understanding Business Context
• MODULE 5 – Assessing the Political-Legal Environment (Chapter 2 &
3 in the textbook)
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
• MODULE 6 – Managing International Economic (Financial) and
Business Risks (Chapter 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 in the textbook)
• Identify all possible risks in doing business in the host country
such as political, economic, socio-cultural, legal, environmental,
and institutional environments.
• Summarize Costs and Benefits of your foreign market entry
• Specify the differences in doing business between the home and
the host country (Distance Analysis) and provide risk-mitigating
strategies/measures
• Exemplary analysis: CAGE framework*
• Identify methods/alternatives/solutions for reducing such global
business risks (risk management strategies)
• Managerial implications and insights
*Ghemawat, P. (2001) Distance still Matters. Harvard Business Review, 79, (8) pp. 137-147.
Example of Data for Distance Analysis: Heritage Foundation
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
Impact of Distance
Gravity Theory: trade flows have a positive relationship between economic size and
trade, a negative relationship between distance and trade
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
CAGE Framework
United States
Ireland
Risk Level
Cultural
Language
Religion
Values and Social Norms
English
Protestant 46.5%
Roman Catholic 20.8%
Mormon 1.6%
Unaffiliated 22.8%
Highly individualistic;
entrepreneurial
Tradition
Focus on hobbies outside of work
Ethnicities
White 72.4%
Black 12.6%
Asian 4.8%
Other 10.2%
English
Roman Catholic 84.7%
Church of Ireland 2.7%
Other Christian 2.7%
Other/Unspecified 9.9%
Individualistic; open
communication at work
Pub Culture; interpersonal
relationships when not working
Irish 84.5%
Other White 9.8%
Asian 1.9%
Black 1.4%
Other 2.4%
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Administrative
Currency
Legal System
Governmental Intervention
Corruption
U.S. Dollar
Federal Repubilc
Minimal
Minimal
Euro
Parliamentary Republic
Minimal
Minimal
Moderate
Low
Low
Low
Located across the Atlantic Ocean
68,883 sq km
Temperate Maritime
Island nation
Airports, railways, highways; some
improvement needed
Telephone, internet, and cellular
infrastructure
Moderate
Low
Low
Moderate
Geographic
Physical Distance
Size (Land Area)
Climate
Landlockedness
9,147,593 sq km
Mostly Temperate
Large multi-state nation
Transportation
Airports, railways, highways
Communication
Telephone, internet, and cellular
infrastructure
Low
Low
Economic
Per Capita Income
Cost of Labor (Index Points)
Economic Size (GDP)
Tax Competitiveness
Inflation
Population
$62,641
$83,203
80.80
111.98
$20,494,100,000,000
$403,828,175,286
21% Corporate Tax Rate
12.5% Corporate Tax Rate
2.443%
0.488%
327,167,434
4,853,506
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
Purpose of Analysis: Evaluate Country Attractiveness
à then, Develop a Foreign Market Entry Strategy
Benefits
• Size
• Wealth (purchasing power)
• Economic growth
• Factor conditions
Costs
• Political payoffs(corruption)
• Lack of Infrastructure
• Legal costs
Overall
Attractiveness
Risks
• Political: conflict, violence, policy changes, property seizure, regulation
• Economic: economic mismanagement (level of debt, inflation rate ….)
• Legal: contract violation, property expropriation
• Socio-cultural risks
IB Strategy: Balance long-term risks with short-term benefits
of doing business in a foreign country.
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 2. Strategizing/Organizing for GB Activities
• MODULE 7 – Developing International Business Strategy
(Chapter 12 & 13 in the textbook)
• Develop IB strategy to compete in the host market and the
global market
• Identify your overall IB strategy (refer to the taxonomy of IB
strategies in the next slide and the textbook) and its rationale
• Specify the details of IB strategy such as location selection,
entry modes/strategies, primary business strategies (how to
compete and to differentiate your product/service in the host
market), primary business model (economic logic/how to
make profit), and staging strategies (timing, speed, sequence,
scale, partnering)
• Present Diagram of Strategy Diamond and detailed
explanation for each element
• Managerial implications and insights
Types of IB Strategy
Strategy Diamond (5 elements of strategy)
25
IKEAʼs Strategy Diamond
Arenas
Arenas
Staging
• Inexpensive contemporary furniture
• Young, white-collar customers
• Worldwide
• Rapid international
Vehicles
expansion, by region
• Early footholds in each
country; fill in later
Staging
Economic logic
• Economies of scale (global,
regional, and individual-store
scale)
• Efficiencies from replication
Economic
logic
Differentiators
Vehicles
• Organic expansion
• Wholly owned stores
Differentiators
• Very reliable quality
• Low price
• Fun, nonthreatening shopping
experience
• Instant fulfillment
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing IB Activities
• MODULE 8 – Product and Target Market Planning for Foreign Markets (Chapter 12,
13, & 16 in the textbook)
• Identify specific attributes and customer benefits for a proposed international
product or service
• Identify unmet needs à clarify value proposition
• Elaborate product concept, its product life cycle, and adoption potentials
• Specify product cores (no need to adapt) and some product attributes that
need to be adapted in a host market
• Product development and adaptation: which attributes need to be adapted?
Need to introduce a new product?
• Clarify a target market, segments, their profile, size, and characteristics
(segmentation à targeting à positioning)
• Overview of marketing mix
• Exemplary contents:
• Describe your product in detail including special features, value propositions,
reasons to buy, unmet needs
• Attitudes toward foreign products in the host country
• Any strategic adaptation needed: extension, adaptation, or invention
• Sales volume expected
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing IB Activities
• MODULE 9 – Designing a Global Distribution Strategy (Chapter 15 in the textbook)
• Analyze distribution channels and intermediaries for global business operations
• Analyze unique features of distribution systems in a host country
• Figure out distribution landscape in a target market segment
• Distribution channels: Where is the product typically bought by customers in the
host market segments?
• Wholesale distribution: What is the role of wholesalers for the host market
segments targeted?
• Retail distribution: What is the availability of different types of retail stores in the
host markets for the customer segments targeted?
• Specify distribution system, distribution channels, channel objectives and
restraints
• Identify intermediaries, suppliers, and supply chains in a host market
• Analyze channel concentration, length, exclusivity and quality
• Develop and specify your distribution strategy in a global and a host market
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing IB Activities
• MODULE 10 – Planning a Global Promotion Strategy (Chapter 16 in the textbook)
• Suggest advertising messages, media and other promotional activities for an
international enterprise in a global and a host market
• Specify communication mix: social media, mass media, direct marketing, sales
promotion, advertising, word of mouth
• Identify communication barriers in a host country
• Specify target audience, promotional goals/objectives, and media plan (types
of media, target audience, frequency, reasons of selection)
• Proposed promotion budget/expenditures
• Managerial implications and insights
(An example of Communication Plan)
Target Audience
Messages
Media Plan
Frequency
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing IB Activities
• MODULE 10 – Planning a Global Promotion Strategy (Chapter 16 in the textbook)
(An example of Communication Plan)
Target Audience
Messages
Media Plan
Frequency
(Communication Plan Template)
Who (Audience) What (Messages)
How (Media Plan)
When (Frequency)
Owner/Sources
Budget
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing IB Activities
• MODULE 11 – Selecting an International Pricing Strategy (Chapter 12 & 16 in the
textbook)
• Recommend a global pricing strategy based on costs, market demand,
competition, and economic environment
• Price acceptance by local consumers
• Potential demands analysis, any differences in the host markets?
• Pricing objectives and strategies: major pricing strategy when you enter a host
country (skimming, predatory, multipoint pricing, or else)
• Analyze factors (environmental and others) affecting your pricing
• Pricing structure
• Cost of goods sold: price level and why?
• Cost structure: variable and fixed cost, any factors causing
different/increased cost in a host market
• Set the retail price: are there trade tariffs, nontariff barriers, and/or other
regulatory influences on price that will influence the pricing equation used to
determine the retail price to customers, considering your COGS/cost structure
• Total revenue expectations
• Managerial implications and insights
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Phase 3. Implementing GBP
• MODULE 12 – Identifying Human Resources for Global Business
Activities (Chapter 17 in the textbook)
• Gather information on needed personnel for operating your business in a host
country
• Develop an HRM strategy in a host country
• Identify a specific staffing policy, T & D, performance appraisal, and
compensation in details (for an example for “compensation”, you’re required to
provide the compensation approach, details of compensation packages for Expats and
local employees in compensation)
• Managerial implications and insights
Final Report: GBP Phase 1 + Phase 2 + Phase 3 Reports, and
should include an Executive Summary + Conclusion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cover page
Table of Contents
Executive Summary
Phase Report 1, 2, and 3 with your own titles and subtitles (Don’t use the word of Module 1, 2, 3, …)
Conclusions
References
Appendix (data, tables, graphics, and others)
Global Business Plan (GBP) Project:
Detailed Instruction & Guideline
• Please refer to the files posted on Blackboard
• Guideline for GBP Reports
• Instruction/ Guideline
• Learning Goals
• Key purpose of each module
• Key elements
• Key contents
• Resources
• Conduct Research: how to collect data and information
• Managerial implications
• E-Commerce Application
• References
Lowes Report 1
Lowes
• Originally founded by Lucius Smith Lowe in 1921.
• The first store was originally called “North Wilksboro Hardware” and
was located in Wilksboro, North Carolina.
• Went public 1979. (Shane, 2016).
• Currently operates over 1,700 Home Improvement stores in the U.S.
and Canada.
• Uses customer centric approach and ensures employees have skills
and knowledge to fulfill customer needs. (Lowe’s Corporate, 2023)
Prior international
expansion
To date, the only country Lowe’s operates in
outside of the U.S. is Canada.
Previously Lowes had operated in Mexico,
but in 2018 it closed all of its Mexican based
stores.
This came as a result of a drop in quarterly
earnings of $872 million to $629 million.
(Howland, 2018).
Target market and IB strategy
• Our Target market is Thailand’s middle class.
• As of 2015, this group made up 35% of the country’s population.
(Wangkait, 2017).
• Typically, a country’s middle class can be found in urban areas, so it
would be best to start our business in the nation’s capitol of Bangkok.
Target market and IB strategy cont….
• It will be in our best interest to learn as much about the people and
culture before we begin any major activities like opening a store or
distribution center.
• It would be best for our business to hire locally as it would allow for
more seamless customer interactions.
• When we open, it would be best to do so in a lighter capacity, with
only one or two stores to start with.
• It is possible to implement Lowe’s online store, though we may be
restricted to a “Last-mile” only delivery system due to uncertainty in
infrastructure.
Host market
• This chart shows our firm, Lowes,
compared to the top 3 Home
improvement stores already operating
in Thailand by their market value.
(Disfold Data, 2023).
Socio/Cultural Environment of Thailand
Religion
4.30% 1%
0.10%
Languages: Thai
English
Mandarin
Religion: Theravada Buddhism
94.60%
“The predominant Buddhist religion is very tolerant and has
amicable relations with religious minorities” (World, 2010, pg. 14).
Buddhist
Muslim
Christian
Other
(Data gathered from globalEDGE database.) (globalEDGE Introduction, 2023)
Customs/Traditions
•
Constitutional Monarchy
•
Buddhism
•
Traditional Family
•
Holistic Practices
•
Collectivist Culture
•
Treatment of Women
“The traditional Thai adage, “Women are the elephant’s hind legs,” illustrates women’s important role but secondary status in Thai society. Whether they are considered the
front legs or the back legs, there is no doubt that Thai women actively participate in the country’s increasingly industrialized and diversified work force” (World, 2010, pg. 24).
Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions
(Data gathered from: Country comparison tool (hofstede-insights.com))(Hofstede Insights, 2023)
Hofstede’s Cultural Dimensions Explained
Power Distance: High power distance = Greater class separation. “The ancient Thai worship of hierarchy will be
hard to alter, and not all Thais see it as a bad trait since it promotes harmony and simplifies decision-making” (World,
2010, pg. 19).
Individualism: Thailand is a collectivist society. “The society fosters strong relationships where everyone takes
responsibility for fellow members of their group” (Hofstede, 2023).
Masculinity: Low level compared to United States. “This lower level is indicative of a society with less assertiveness
and competitiveness, as compared to one where these values are considered more important and significant
(Hofstede, 2023).
Uncertainty Avoidance: Since Thailand has a high level of uncertainty avoidance, change must be seen for the
greater good.
Long-Term Orientation: Thailand is normative oriented and prefers to maintain traditional values.
Indulgence: Thailand falls right in the middle of the spectrum on indulgence and restraint. This makes it somewhat
difficult to determine whether they lean more to one side or the other.
Business
Customs
• Punctuality
• “Yes” can mean “No”
• Body language cues
• Women in management
• Business hours
Demographics
Ethic Groups
1.30%1.10% 0.10%
Population: 71,697,030 (2022)
69.27% of the population is between ages
15 and 64
Rapid urbanization: 52% of Thailand is
Urban
97.50%
Thai
Burmese
Other
Unspecified
(Data gathered from globalEDGE database.) (globalEDGE Introduction, 2023)
Managerial Implications
•
In order for Lowe’s to be successful in globalizing Thailand, we must account for cross-cultural differences. We must also
be tolerant of Thai customs and religion. Some of the ways that Lowe’s can accommodate this is to honor Buddhist
holidays, showing respect for the monarchy by hanging a picture of the King at all of our locations, learning the local
language and understanding Thai body language.
•
Thailand is a country with a high uncertainty avoidance level. Lowe’s would need to show the Thai people that our
company is about community and the greater good. By doing projects that benefit the community, like building homes for
the impoverished, we can help generate good public relations with Thailand. We can also do this by get behind
government programs like Baan Mankong.
•
Following basic business practices will also be vital for the success of Lowe’s. Opening our businesses on-time and
operating on a regular Thai workday will be beneficial for us. Not following these basic business principles will be seen as
a sign of disrespect to the people of Thailand.
Competition and Competitors
• Lowe’s main competitors in Thailand are
– Siam Global Home
– DoHome
– Home Product Center(HomePro)
•
Image is based off 1 year stock performance
Competition
and
Competitors
Home Product Center
Market
Capital
(USD)
4.5B
Siam Global
DoHome
2.3B
921.3M
Competitors Strengths
HomePro although they are #181 for country rank
They come in at #1 in category rank, meaning they are the top dogs of the home
improvement stores in Thailand
Siam Global ( often called Globalhouse) are ranked 5th in the category rank for home
improvement. Although that may seem average, they are bringing in $500M- $1B annual
revenue
DoHomes, although one of the smaller companies, they saw a 21.4% jump in 2022, mainly
caused by bad weather causing people to need home improvement equipment to repair the
damages. DoHomes is trending upward as they opened 5 large format branches in 2022
Sample Footer Text
Competitor Weakness
•
•
Although DoHome is one of the larger
home improvement they have some
serious weaknesses
•
DoHome’s net profit margin growth rate
in 5 yrs is -13.19
•
They also struggle with their Revenue
Growth quarterly
•
Ideally you want your growth rate
quarterly around 20%……..DoHome’s last
quarter’s revenue growth was 1.39%
•
HomePro’s weaknesses are slow new
store expansions as well as declining
consumer confidence
10/22/23
Global House saw their fair share of issues when it
comes to a flexible infrastructure. Their back offices
were all housed-on premises and when they expanded
across the country the branches had to connect to the
servers at headquarters. This required space, servers,
and monitoring causing operating costs to go up
Consumer confidence Index in Thailand
17
• With families increasingly
choosing to live independently
and with incomes rising,
particularly upcountry,
Thailand’s home improvement
segment has emerged as a
dynamic and particularly
competitive one. In greater
Bangkok alone, an estimated
80, 000-100,000 new houses
and some 30,000-40,000 new
condos are registered every
year.
Competitive situation
• The traditional leader in all
segments of the market, Home
Product Centre, is facing stronger
competition from smaller networks
in specific segments. The
established groups in this segment
– HomePro, Siam Global House,
Central Group’s Power Retail,
Index Living Mall – are all
aggressively expanding their reach
and are banking on sustained
growth in the provincial centers.
Thailand’s Economic/Geographic
Environment
• Current GDP is at around 505 Billion and is
expected to be at around 509 by the end of
year.
• Relies mostly on Agriculture, Fishing,
Mining, and Forestry for their
Natural Resources.
• The biggest industries in Thailand include
the Agriculture sector, Manufacturing
sector and Services sector.
• Inflation Rate currently at 0.88% and Interest
rate is at 2.50% to support long term growth.
Population
• As of 2023, the current population in Thailand is 71,801,279 with a .15% yearly growth rate
with a little bit over 18 million households
• The number of employed people in Thailand reach almost 40 thousand with the exact number
being 39,677.45 and about 35% are middle class
• The population density is 364 people per every square mile
• In Thailand, there are about 51.5% females and 48.8% males
• 13,998,001 of the population are 0 to 14 years old
• 50,007,566 of the population are 15 to 64 years old
Infrastructure
• Thailand offers a number of transportation including:
• Taxi/ Motorcycle Taxi- 80,000 use taxi’s and 185,303 use motorcycle taxi’s with over 51,000 available
• Train/ BTS Sky Train- 1.25 million use the train with 5 major lines available
• Ferry- 12.9 million use the ferry with 63 ferry ports available
• Bus- 73.75 million use the bus with 1.6 thousand available
• (Tuk Tuk) Auto Rickshaw and Songthaew- 3.5 million use Tuk Tuk’s with 30,000 available
BTS Skytrain
Ferry
Taxi
Bus
Auto Rickshaw
Songthaew
Motorcycle Taxi
Train
Trade Statistics
• Over 65% of the economies’ GDP is accounted by the country’s exports
• While exports has increased between the months of July and August, imports has decreased
and been at a steady decrease since May.
• Thailand’s top export partners are the United States (1st), China and Japan.
• Thailand’s top import partners include China, Japan, Malaysia with United States as 4th
highest profitable partner.
• The current exchange rate between US and Thailand is One USD = 36.54 THB
• As of May 2023, The economy’s Balance of Payments is at a deficit of approximately 2.8
billion in USD
Trade/Foreign Ownership Restrictions
• The custom duty rate vary between different consumer goods which is typically between 0% and
35%
• The Import tax for Thailand is 7%, it can include additional taxes for products like
alcohol/cigarettes.
• Due to high tariffs for different sectors, It makes it difficult for US products to get access to the
country’s market.
• Import licenses are required to import certain products/ May include additional fees for products
that doesn’t require a license.
• In order to gain 100% ownership of a company in Thailand, you must have a Foreign Business
License or register through Treaty of Amity. Generally, foreigners are not allowed to own more
than 49% of a company in Thailand.
Government
Structure
• Adopted their constitution in 2007 and it was drafted by a
committee established by the military junta
• Included: rights and freedom of the people, structure of the
government, duties of the Thai people, and direct political
participation of the public
• Government type: Constitutional Monarchy (monarch shares
power with a constitutionally organized government)
• Head of Government:
• King- Maha Vajiralongkorn Phra Vajiraklaochaoyuha
• Prime Minister- Srettha Thavisin
• Foreign Minister- Parnpree Bahidda-Nukara
• Trade Minister- Phumtham We
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
FIN402 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Financial Institutions and
Student’s Name:
Markets
Course Code: FIN402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Umme hani
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
1. Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world.
It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns
managers of financial institutions and general public as well.
Question: What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important
evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points). Also answer the
following questions.
a. Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors
are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing.
Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank
and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action. (1 point)
a. Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed
Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is
completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up.
Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action. (1
point)
b. Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss. (1 point)
c. Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the
stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use
and implications of the efficient market hypothesis. (2 points)
Answers:
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
The a-s-s-e-s-s-m-e-n-t will1) A report explaining and justifying the newsworthy tactic you propose to solve the communication puzzle posed by the selected PR scenario (600 words approx.); 2) The newsworthy tactic, in the form of a media ‘asset’ (700-word media release; or blog entry; or series of social media posts).Please see the questions shown in the screenshot. I will send you all the info after being hired, eg PPTs, student access etc. Please send a draft in 12hrs -1 day time, day 2, and day 3 as well. + Will need to draft some questions to ask the teacher and revise base on feedback (Send bk ard in 1 day max)
During the term you will read the book, complete the assessment, and write a final paper about your strengths. This paper will allow you to examine your strengths and develop a plan. Please use the guide below as your framework and ensure all areas are addressed. I. What Do You Do Best? Of all the things you do well, which two do you do best and why? Which activities do you seem to pick up quickly and why? Which activities bring you the greatest satisfaction and why? II. STRENGTHSFINDER Results What are your top five Signature Themes identified by the Clifton STRENGTHSFINDER? Which theme resonates with you the most and why? • Based on your Signature Themes, what should a manager/supervisor know about working with you and why? • Based on your Signature Themes, what should a co-worker know about working with you and why? • How can a manager/supervisor help you with your strengths more within your current role and why? Updated August 2023 Page 20 of 23 III. Celebrating Successes • What was your most significant accomplishment in the past 12 months? • When do you feel the most pride about your work? • How do you like to be supported in your work? IV. Applying Talents to the Role • What things distract you from being positive, productive, or accurate? • Which talents do you have that could benefit the team if you had better opportunities to use them? • What steps could be taken to ensure you have an opportunity to apply your natural talents to your role? Submit a 5-page paper double-spaced. • Include a cover page and a reference page (not to be included in the 5 pages of paper content) • Use the questions and bullets above as the framework and outline of your paper. • Please provide at least four (4) relevant scholarly references to support your paper in addition to the STRENGTHSFINDER text. • All references should be used as in-text citations. • All work must be completed in APA format. • You MUST submit your paper to the Smarthinking tool for review prior to submission.
make a powerpoint to Define Pfizer’s ESG Strategy with speaker notes (lecture notes has attatched for you reference)case company: Pfizer
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ESG Strategy Overview
ESG Strategy incorporates:
•
ESG related matters into the decision-making process.
•
Environmental and social opportunities, risks and issues an organization
manages and provides progress around.
A methodical process is applied to develop an ESG Strategy.
•
Define ESG Strategy
•
Determine ESG Strategy structure
•
Outline ESG Strategy development process
•
Develop ESG Strategy implementation roadmap
4
Define ESG Strategy
The strategy underscores the importance of ESG to the organization and support to
their customers and communities they serve.
•
Define the company’s mission
•
Develop the drivers / components supporting the company’s mission
•
Obtain support from the leadership team
5
ESG Strategy – Mission
ESG Strategy mission is defined based on:
•
Strategic direction
•
Aspiration
•
Qualitative goals
•
Financial metrics
•
Operations KPIs and KRIs
6
ESG Strategy – Definition and Structure
ESG Strategy defines the company’s aspiration / goal they strive to achieve. This is
the basis for investment decisions, resource allocations / hiring, and financial and
operations performance assessment.
•
Aspiration Definition
•
Environmental / Social / Governance objective statement
•
Strategy Leadership
•
Implementation plan
7
ESG Strategy development process (1 of 4)
Overall, organizations follow these steps to develop their ESG Strategy:
•
•
Perform required analysis and develop ESG goal / aspiration
−
Strategic direction
−
Established initiatives
−
Peer analysis
−
Industry trends
Identify strategy focus areas
−
Markets
−
Stakeholders
−
Sustainable operations
−
Timeline
8
ESG Strategy development process (2 of 4)
Overall, organizations follow these steps to develop their ESG Strategy:
•
Develop strategy structure
−
Focus areas
−
Initiatives
−
Value proposition
−
Competitive advantage
−
Partnerships
9
ESG Strategy development process (3 of 4)
Overall, organizations follow these steps to develop their ESG Strategy:
•
Develop strategy implementation roadmap and plan
−
Capabilities
−
Level of efforts
−
Systems, technology and data
−
Organization structure
−
Training and awareness
−
Governance model
10
ESG Strategy development process (4 of 4)
A successful ESG Strategy development process requires:
•
Collaboration with various stakeholders
•
Industry, peer, customer and regulatory analysis
•
Clearly stated aspiration / ambition
•
Defined ESG focus areas
•
Consensus on ESG strategy and implementation process
11
ESG Strategy maturity model
Organizations are in different stages of the maturity of their ESG Strategy.
•
Stage 1: Organization recognizes the need to address ESG
•
Stage 2: Organization has established disparate ESG initiative(s)
•
Stage 3: Organization has strong leadership support, but ESG initiatives are not fully
aligned with the business strategy
•
Stage 4: ESG is top priority and major initiatives are underway
•
Stage 5: ESG is fully aligned to the business model and strategy
12
ESG communication strategy
Organizations need to define their ESG Communications strategy.
•
Code of Conduct
•
Environmental Policy
•
Supplier Code of Conduct
•
CSR
•
ESG
•
GHG
•
Various disclosures
13
Exercise – Assignment #4
Define the case study company’s ESG Strategy.
14
3 Assignments on preparing the statement of cashflow, Closing Entries and Statement of cashflow
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Required: Minnetonka, Inc. is looking for an accountant who can help the manager to prepare financial statemen
The following financial statements are provided by the accounting manager:
Minnetonka Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2023
Total Revenues
$ 157,000.00
Cost of Goods Sold
$
65,000.00
Gross Profit
$
92,000.00
Operating Expenses
– Salaries Expense
$ 15,000.00
– Depreciation Expense
$
1,500.00
– Insurance expense
$
6,000.00
– Rent expense
$
2,500.00
– Utilities expense
$
850.00
– Miscellaneous expenses $
50.00
Total Operating Expenses
$
25,900.00
Operating Profit
$
66,100.00
Interest expense
$
250.00
Net Income
$
65,850.00
e manager to prepare financial statements. The manager is specifically looking for someone who understands how to prepare
nting manager:
Minnetonka Inc.
Statement of Retained Earnings
For the Year Ended December 31, 2023
Retained Earnings, January 1, 2012
$ 31,000.00
Add: Net Income
$ 65,850.00
Subtotal
$ 96,850.00
Less: Dividends
$
8,000.00
Retained Earnings, December 31, 2012
$ 88,850.00
Fixed Assets purchased during the year:
Land
Equipment
$
$
30,000.00
5,000.00
oking for someone who understands how to prepare the statement of cash flows.
Minnetonka Inc.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2022, 2023
ASSETS
CURRENT ASSETS:
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Supplies
Inventory
Prepaid expense
Total Current Assets
2023
$ 38,350.00
$ 25,000.00
$
8,500.00
$ 27,500.00
$
2,000.00
$ 101,350.00
$
$
$
$
$
$
2022
8,500.00
14,500.00
2,000.00
21,000.00
4,000.00
50,000.00
PROPERTY, PLANT, AND EQUIPMENT
Land
Building (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)
Equipment (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)
Total Fixed Assets
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
13,000.00
8,000.00
21,000.00
Total Assets
$ 155,850.00 $
71,000.00
30,000.00
12,000.00
12,500.00
54,500.00
Minnetonka Inc.
Balance Sheet
mber 31, 2022, 2023
LIABILITIES
CURRENT LIABILITIES:
Accounts Payable
Salaries Payable
Accrued liabilities
Total Current Liabilities
$
$
$
$
2023
10,000.00
5,000.00
7,000.00
22,000.00
$
$
$
$
2022
20,000.00
5,000.00
25,000.00
LONG-TERM LIABILITIES:
Bonds Payable
Notes Payable
Total Long-Term Liabilities
$
$
$
10,000.00 $
5,000.00 $
15,000.00 $
5,000.00
5,000.00
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Total Stockholders’ Equity
Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
$
$
$
$
30,000.00
88,850.00
118,850.00
155,850.00
10,000.00
31,000.00
41,000.00
71,000.00
$
$
$
$
Minnetonka Inc.
Statement of Cash Flow
For the Month Ended December 31, 2023
Cash Flows From Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Net Income:
Depreciation expense
Increase in Accounts Receivable
Increase in Supplies
Increase in Inventory
Decrease in Prepaid Expense
Decrease in Accounts Payable
Increase in Salaries Payable
Increase in Accrued Liabilities
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows From Investing Activities
Purchase of Land
Purchase of Equipment
Net Cash Used in Investing Activities
Cash Flows From Financing Activities
Increase in Bonds Payable
Payment of Dividends
Issuance of Common Stock
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net increase (decrease) in cash during the year
Beginning Cash balance
Ending Cash balance
Required:
Minneapolis, Inc. is a small shop in the neighborhood that sells fruit. The owner of the shop, Ms. Foster, hired yo
Ms. Foster was able to finish the financial statement except the statement of cash flow so she asked you to prep
Ms. Foster prepared the following financial statements.
Minneapolis Inc.
Income Statement
For the Month Ended December 31, 2023
Total Revenues
Cost of Goods Sold
$
$
Gross Profit
$ 205,000.00
Operating Expenses
– Salaries Expense
– Depreciation Expense
– Insurance expense
– Rent expense
– Utilities expense
– Miscellaneous expenses
Total Operating Expenses
455,000.00
250,000.00
$ 18,000.00
$ 20,000.00
$ 8,000.00
$ 3,000.00
$ 2,500.00
$
500.00
$
52,000.00
Operating Profit
$ 153,000.00
Interest income
$
Net Income
$ 161,000.00
8,000.00
The owner of the shop, Ms. Foster, hired you to help with her accounting. The previous accountant got married and left the company.
ement of cash flow so she asked you to prepare the statement of cash flow as your first job.
Minneapolis Inc.
Statement of Retained Earnings
For the Month Ended December 31, 2023
Retained Earnings, January 1, 2023
Add: Net Income
Subtotal
Less: Dividends
Retained Earnings, December 31, 2023
$
$
$
$
$
333,500.00
161,000.00
494,500.00
15,500.00
479,000.00
Fixed assets purchased during the year:
Building
Equipment
$
$
45,000.00
20,000.00
ng. The previous accountant got married and left the company.
low as your first job.
Minneapolis Inc.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2022 & 2023
ASSETS
CURRENT ASSETS:
2023
2022
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Supplies
Inventory
Prepaid expense
$
$
$
$
$
98,500.00
65,000.00
65,000.00
409,000.00
86,000.00
$
$
$
$
$
25,000.00
45,000.00
30,000.00
450,000.00
75,000.00
Total Current Assets
$
723,500.00 $
625,000.00
Land
Building
Accumulated depreciation – building
Equipment
Accumulated depreciation – equipment
$
$
$
$
45,500.00 $
170,000.00 $
(55,000.00) $
60,000.00 $
(20,000.00)
45,500.00
125,000.00
(40,000.00)
40,000.00
(15,000.00)
Total Fixed Assets
$
200,500.00 $
155,500.00
Total Assets
$
924,000.00 $
780,500.00
FIXED ASSETS:
Minneapolis Inc.
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2022 & 2023
LIABILITIES
CURRENT LIABILITIES:
2023
2022
Accounts Payable
Salaries Payable
Accrued liabilities
$
$
$
35,000.00 $
18,000.00 $
12,000.00 $
70,000.00
12,000.00
10,000.00
Total Current Liabilities
$
65,000.00 $
92,000.00
Bonds Payable
Notes Payable
$
$
80,000.00 $
90,000.00 $
100,000.00
75,000.00
Total Long-term Liabilities
$
170,000.00 $
175,000.00
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
$
$
210,000.00 $
479,000.00 $
180,000.00
333,500.00
Total Stockholders’ Equity
$
689,000.00 $
513,500.00
Total Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
$
924,000.00 $
780,500.00
LONG-TERM LIABILITIES;
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Minneapolis Inc.
Statement of Cash Flow
For the Month Ended December 31, 2023
Cash Flows From Operating Activities
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows From Investing Activities
Net Cash Used in Investing Activities
Cash Flows From Financing Activities
Net Cash Used in Financing Activities
Net increase (decrease) in cash during the year
Beginning Cash balance
Ending Cash balance
Operating Activities
Net Income
Depreciation Expense
Current Assets (always opposite)
Current Liabilities
Investing Activities
Long term assets (always opposite)
Financing Activities
Items from owners equity
Items from long term liabilities
Will not include retained earnings
**Remember that the ending cash balance on this sheet should match the ending cash balance on the 2023 bala
ing cash balance on the 2023 balance sheet.
Watermelon Inc. sells juices and ice cream and provides birthday party planner for children.
Watermelon Inc. presents its adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2023 below.
Watermelon Inc.
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31, 2023
Debit
Cash
$ 8,500.00
Accounts Receivable
$ 5,000.00
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
Supplies
$ 1,750.00
Inventory
$ 12,000.00
Prepaid Insurance
$ 2,000.00
Prepaid Rent
$ 4,000.00
Equipment
$ 9,000.00
Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment
Cars
$ 21,000.00
Accumulated Depreciation – Cars
Accounts Payable
Unearned Service Revenue
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Dividends
$ 4,000.00
Sales Revenue
Service Revenue
Salaries Expense
$ 6,000.00
Utility Expense
$ 2,000.00
Insurance Expense
$ 1,000.00
Office Expense
$
600.00
Rent Expense
$ 3,000.00
Advertising Expense
$
750.00
Depreciation Expense
$
550.00
Supplies Expense
$ 3,500.00
Bad Debt Expense
$
450.00
Miscellaneous Expense
$
50.00
Total $ 85,150.00
Prepare the following to enter into January 2024.
Credit
$
1,000.00
$
2,500.00
$ 9,000.00
$ 1,100.00
$
900.00
$ 4,000.00
$ 13,000.00
$ 24,500.00
$ 29,150.00
$ 85,150.00
Required:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Close the revenue account.
Close the expense accounts.
Close income Summary.
Close the dividend account.
Post the transactions to the General Ledger.
Calculate the Ending Retained Earnings Balance.
Prepare the Post-Closing Trial Balance.
Date
Account
Dr
Cr
Sales Revenues
Service Revenues
Rent Expense
Advertising Expense
Dividends
Income Summary
Salary Expense
Utility Expense
Insurance Expense
Depreciation Expense
Supplies Expense
Bad Debt Expense
Retained Earnings
Insurance Expense
Office Expense
Bad Debt Expense
Miscellaneous Expense
Watermelon Inc.
Post-Closing Trial Balance
December 31, 2023
Debit
Total
$
Credit
–
$
–
read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer the following discussion questions and Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 6/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Layla Nasser
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
PS115: Psychology Program and Profession
Unit 1 Journal Template
1. Based on this unit’s readings, what does success mean to you?
2. Using the chart below, identify whether each term is a technique or a strategy. Then, provide a
summary for each of the following terms. Finally, discuss why each is important to be
successful as a psychology student.
Note: A Technique is a procedure or skill for completing a specific task. A Strategy is a plan of
action designed to achieve an overall aim. Example, “What’s your strategy for setting goals?”
Term
Strategy or
Technique?
Summary
Importance for
Success
APA 7
Creative Thinking
Critical Thinking Skills
Related to Research
Time management
Clubs
Professional organizations
Study techniques
Mentors
Motivation
3. Discuss at least two techniques and/or strategies you would use to be a successful
student.
Page | 1
No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference .
✨Add references✨
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font .
No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
proper examples and explanations for each questions.
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
Commit to the number of words specified for each question
the answer should be sufficient
TextBook:
Powell, & Baker, K. R. (2013). Management Science: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets. Wiley.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
ر
اإللكتونية
الجامعة السعودية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT425-Spreadsheet Decision Modeling
Due Date: 11/11/2023 (End of Week-11) @ 23:59
Course Name:Spreadsheet Decision
Modeling
Course Code:MGT425
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023-2024 (1445 H)
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of
15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
● The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
● Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
● Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your
information on the cover page.
● Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
● Late submission will NOT be accepted.
● Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
● All answered must be typed usingTimes New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
● Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Aligned (PLOs)
MGT.K.1
(1.1)
MGT.K.3
(1.2)
MGT.S.1
(2.1)
MGT.V.1
(3.1)
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Question
Find some structured ways of dealing with complex managerial
decision problems.
Explain simple decision models and management science ideas
that provide powerful and (often surprising) qualitative insight
about large spectrum of managerial problems.
Demonstrate the tools for deciding when and which decision
models to use for specific problems.
Build an understanding of the kind of problems that is tackled
using Spreadsheet Modeling and decision analysis.
Question- 2.
Question- 1
Question-4
Question-3
Assignment Instructions:
● Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
● On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
● From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
● In the Search Bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach for Sustainable Supplier
Selection under Vague Environment: A Case Study.
Author: Huiyun Lu , Shaojun Jiang , Wenyan Song, Xinguo Ming
Date: 26 July 2018
Assignment Questions: (Marks 15)
Read the above case study and answer the following Questions:
Question 1: Explain the decision-making approach discussed in this case
study (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 2: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making
process involving subjectivity and vagueness? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 3: Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for
manufacturing companies. (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 4: What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to
course and beneficial for you? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Answers:
1
2
3
4
Manage a Critical IncidentYou are just starting to work with an architect on designs for a new office space for your fast-growing tech startup. She proposes a design that does away with private offices, includes two or three personal cubicles with flexible dividers, and provides lots of flexible open spaces for casual and arranged meetings. She also proposes a shift to “hotdesking” for the sales representatives because they spend a lot of time away from the office. This means that they will not have permanent space and will instead “sign up” to use temporary cubicle desks when they come into the office. You really like the total design concept because it supports collaboration and teamwork while also saving space and facilities costs as the firm grows. But, you’re worried about possible resistance from employees who are used to having private offices and their own desks. You sit down to write a list of “pros” and “cons” for the architect’s proposal. You also make some notes on how to engage the staff with these ideas in order to head off any problems.Questions What’s on your list and what’s in your notes? What kind of change leadership approach do you think will be most likely to work with this group and situation?Answer with 250-500 words
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
-Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
– All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
– No copy, Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
– Late submission will NOT be accepted.
– Must mention question number clearly in answer.
– You should check for spelling and grammatical errors before submitting the assignment.
– The task must be in word format only, there is no pdf. The file must be saved in word format.
– Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
-Make sure the answer is correct and free from errors.
– Stick to the number of words specified in each question.
Explain the difference between exponential smoothing and regression forecasting models. Explain the supply chain assumptions linked to each model and why it is important to validate them before using either the exponential smoothing or a regression forecasting model.
the prompt: The event that we plan on conducting is a flag football game between the current Washington Commanders team and Local High School Area Players. A list of the top high school players in the DMV will be contacted to see if they are interested in the event. This game will be a free event open to the public. The purpose of this event is to draw interest for the Washington Commanders team and to get the fanbase more excited about the upcoming season by getting involved in the community. The goals for this event includes to increase ticket sales for the upcoming season by promoting the team in a positive light. Another goal for this event is to get more fan engagement and more interest for the Washington Commanders by allowing local high school players to have the opportunity to play against commanders players. What you need to complete: SWOT analysis and Risk Management. (Be as clear as you can)
Topic 4: You have been hired as special consultant to the director of Human Resources at McKinsey (or some other firm that hires many business students). 1. Based on the principles of mental accounting, how should McKinsey structure their compensation package to maximize the number of offers accepted (recruiting)? Of course, we are not looking for the following answer: “Increase salaries.” Assume that the total compensation is fixed (including the cost of benefits). 2. How should McKinsey structure compensation to retain employees? Again, take total compensation to be fixed. HINT: How does mental accounting suggest different compensation packages might be required for recruiting and retention?
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
No.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
CLO3 Recognize investment opportunities.
CLO4 Explain the relationship between risk and return.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
1. Imagine you want to travel to US for your “graduation vacation” when you graduate
from college in two years. How much money do you need to put aside right now to
have $10,000 when you travel to US, assuming your bank’s savings account yields a 6
percent interest rate? (Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
2. Three cash flows of $3,125, $3,450, and $3,800 will be given to Ms. Marwa as a
result of her investment. What will the future value of her investment cash flows be at
the end of three years if she can earn 7.5 percent on any investment that she makes?
(Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
3. For computations of present or future values, the annual percentage rate (APR) is not
the proper rate. Justify this assertion. (2 Marks) maximum 5 lines
4. Faisal invested 40% of his portfolio into an investment with an anticipated return of
12% and 60% of his portfolio into an investment with an expected return of 20%.
What is the expected return on Faisal’s portfolio? (2 Marks) (Show your
calculations)
5. Discuss the different types of corporate bonds. (2 Marks) maximum 6 lines
Answer
This is a project about a company called Doctor 2 Me. You need to write about Contribution in 2 pages. I have a sample for you as well. Also I determined this case in a brief summary that I would share it with you so u can get some idea, but your job is only work on CONTRIBUTION of this company.
Exam Content
As a city manager for a mid-size city, you must be able to examine patterns and trends to highlight organizational performance and support organizational strategic planning. One of the ways that is done is through analyzing the statistics. Still, just presenting the numbers is not always the most efficient way to present your analysis.
Scenario
You are a city manager for a mid-size city that is anticipating increases in population and auto traffic as new industries move into the downtown area. Parking spaces are already hard to find and traffic congestion can be problematic from commuters and events like concerts and sports. Before considering adding additional parking, you think it is possible to use existing parking more effectively through a smart parking app that identifies parking space availability in different parking lots throughout the city in real time.
In this assessment, you will demonstrate your skill in information visualization when you present your recommendations to the City Council members who are responsible for deciding whether the city invests in resources to set in motion the smart parking space app.
Preparation
Review the parking space usage file.
Select any 2 parking lots. For each one, review the scatter plot showing the occupancy rate at each time stamp during the week of 11/20/2022 –11/26/2022. Identify whether occupancy rates are time dependent. If so, identify the times that seem to experience the highest occupancy rates.
Research “smart cities” to provide guidance and support for your presentation.
Assessment Deliverable
Create a 10- to 12-slide information visualization presentation including voice-over or screencast video. Include the following in your presentation:
Outline the rationale and goals of the project.
Analyze the box plot charts showing the occupancy rates for each day of the week and interpret the results.
Analyze the box plot charts showing the occupancy rates for each parking lot and interpret the results.
Choose 2 scatter plot charts showing occupancy rate against the time of day over the course of the week and interpret the results.
Make a recommendation about continuing with the implementation of this project.
avoid plaragisime all instructions in the file attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
Research the topic of estimating costs to locate two (2) peer-reviewed academic papers published within the last five (5) years.
Write a paper that compares the methods of estimating costs, found in 10-2c in the CPM textbook.
Include the relative strengths and weaknesses of each, recommendations for use, and at least one (1) successful and one (1) unsuccessful example of each.
Specifically compare & contrast what you learned in this assignment to existing operations &/or culture at your workplace and then describe how/if applying what you learned could produce improvements at your workplace.
Refer to the rubric, available in Canvas, for details on how this will be assessed.
Submit your completed assessment by the Due Date for Module 10 by clicking on the assignment in Canvas and uploading the document.
HU14 PMGT 510 Estimating Costs Research Paper KA2 75%2
HU14 PMGT 510 Estimating Costs Research Paper KA2 75%2
Criteria Ratings Pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCRIT 0.2a Key ConceptCRIT 0.2a Work with Key Concept
threshold: 3.0 pts
4 ptsAdvanced: Work with key concepts/information/process/theory related to a given topic and conduct a thorough analysis by doing five or more of the following: applying or extending them to new predictions, recognizing hidden meanings, drawing inferences, analyzing patterns and component parts, and communicating contrasts and comparisons.
3 ptsProficient: Work with key concepts/information/process/theory related to a given topic by identifying patterns, interpreting challenging concepts, drawing logical conclusions, explaining component parts, and potential applications or extensions to new problems or contexts.
2 ptsEmerging: Work with key concepts/information/processes/theories related to a given topic by distinguishing key elements, illustrating relationships between concepts, describing key information generally, and inferring the importance of specific elements.
1 ptsNovice: Work with key concepts by relating or comparing them.
—
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCRIT 0.2g AnalysisCRIT 0.2g Coherent Analysis
threshold: 3.0 pts
4 ptsAdvanced: Develop and explain a coherent analysis or synthesis using information strongly supported by interpretation and evaluation.
3 ptsProficient: Develop a coherent analysis or synthesis using information sufficiently supported by interpretation and evaluation.
2 ptsEmerging: State a coherent analysis or synthesis using information sufficiently supported by interpretation and evaluation.
1 ptsNovice: Coherent analysis or synthesis missing or not sufficiently supported by interpretation and evaluation.
—
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomePMGT 1.1 InitiatePMGT 1.1 Initiate projects to meet stakeholder needs within constraints.
threshold: 3.0 pts
4 ptsAdvanced: The Project Charter contained the fully detailed sections outlined in the Proficient performance level and included the rationale supported by best practices found in the current literature.
3 ptsProficient: The Project Charter contains the following fully detailed sections: Project purpose, Measurable project objectives, and related success criteria; high-level requirements, High-level project description, boundaries, and key deliverables; Overall project risk, Summary milestone schedule, Pre-approved financial resources, Key stakeholder list, Project approval requirements, Project exit criteria, Assigned project manager, responsibility, and authority level; Name, and authority of the sponsor or other persons authorizing the Project Charter
2 ptsEmerging: The Project Charter contained the required elements. Continue working toward consistent details throughout each component of the Charter.
1 ptsNovice: The submitted Project Charter illustrates an attempt to meet the Proficient performance level. Missing elements from the Charter or inconsistent details require attention.
—
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomePMGT 1.2 PlanPMGT 1.2 Plan projects to meet stakeholder needs within constraints.
threshold: 3.0 pts
4 ptsAdvanced: The Project Management Plan contained the twelve fully detailed sections outlined in the Proficient performance level and included the rationale supported by best practices found in the current literature.
3 ptsProficient: The created Project Management Plan (PMP) describes the project’s execution, monitoring, controlling, and closing occurs. The PMP included the following twelve fully developed sub-plans: change control, communications management, cost management, procurement management, quality management, requirements management, resource management, risk management, scope management, schedule management, and stakeholder management plan.
2 ptsEmerging: The Project Management Plan contained the required elements. Continue working toward consistent details throughout each aspect of the PMP.
1 ptsNovice: The submitted Project Management Plan illustrates an attempt to meet the Proficient performance level. Missing elements from the PMP or inconsistent details require further attention.
—
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeElements
20 pts
4-Advanced 100%
Four methods for estimating cost are compared.
17 pts
3-Proficient 85%
Three methods for estimating cost are compared.
15 pts
2-Emerging 75%
Two methods for estimating cost are compared.
11 pts
1-Novice 55%
One method for estimating cost is explained.
0 pts
0-No Submission 0%
No submission
20 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeApplication
50 pts
4-Advanced 100%
Comparison for estimating cost includes a detailed explanation of the strengths and weaknesses with relevant examples. Recommendations for use are accurate. Examples of successful and unsuccessful are flawless. Demonstrates knowledge of an executive level professional. Comparison includes references to current work environment. Incorporates both what current company is doing well and is not doing well.
42.5 pts
3-Proficient 85%
Comparison for estimating cost includes a detailed explanation of the strengths and weaknesses. Recommendations for use are accurate. Examples of successful and unsuccessful are appropriate. Demonstrates knowledge of accomplished business professional. Comparison includes references to current work environment. Incorporates what current company is doing well or is not doing well.
37.5 pts
2-Emerging 75%
Comparison of strengths and weaknesses needs more detail. Recommendations for use contain errors. Examples of successful and unsuccessful are inaccurate. Demonstrates knowledge of developing business professional.
27.5 pts
1-Novice 55%
Comparison of strengths and weaknesses are cursory. Recommendations for use are incorrect. Examples of successful and unsuccessful are inaccurate. Demonstrates knowledge of an entry level business professional.
0 pts
0-No Submission 0%
No submission, submission is off topic, or submission is incoherent.
50 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeGrammar
10 pts
4-Advanced 100%
Follows proper structure, grammar, and spelling. Little to no errors throughout the work product.
8.5 pts
3-Proficient 85%
Follows proper structure, grammar, and spelling. Few errors are shown.
7.5 pts
2-Emerging 75%
Contains errors in structure, grammar, and spelling.
5.5 pts
1-Novice 55%
Follows some proper structure, grammar, and spelling but contains enough errors to distract.
0 pts
0-No Submission 0%
No submission or no apparent structure or grammar rules followed
10 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeFormat
20 pts
4-Advanced 100%
More than two references from peer-reviewed academic sources are used. The references are less than 5 years old. Format, citations, and references are consistent with APA style guidelines. There are no errors made.
17 pts
3-Proficient 85%
Two references from peer-reviewed academic sources are used. The references are no more than 5 years old. Format, citations, and references are consistent with APA style guidelines. There are minimal, non-repeated errors.
15 pts
2-Emerging 75%
Two references are used but one or more may not be from peer-reviewed academic sources. The references are no more than 5 years old. Format, citations, and references are consistent with APA style guidelines; however, there are a few errors.
11 pts
1-Novice 55%
One or no references are used and are not from peer-reviewed academic sources. Minimal sources used and inconsistently follows APA style guidelines required by the college.
0 pts
0-No Submission 0%
No submission, or does not follow APA styles guidelines required by the college.
20 pts
Total Points: 100
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Contemporary
Project Management
FOURTH EDITION
Timothy J. Kloppenborg
•
Vittal Anantatmula
•
Kathryn N. Wells
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
MS Project 2016 Instructions in Contemporary Project Management 4e
Chapter
MS Project
3
MS Project 2016 Introduction
Ribbon, Quick Access Toolbar, view panes, Zoom Slider, Shortcuts, Scheduling Mode Selector
Setting Up Your First Project
Auto schedule, start date, identifying information, summary row
Create Milestone Schedule
Key milestones, zero duration, must finish on, information
7
Set Up a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Understand the WBS definitions and displays
Enter WBS Elements (tasks), Create the outline,
Insert WBS Code Identifier column, Hide or show subtasks detail
8
Using MS Project for Critical Path Schedules
Set Up the Project Schedule
Set or update the project start date, Define organization’s working and nonworking time
Build the Network Diagram and Identify the Critical Path
Enter tasks and milestones, edit the timescale, understand and define task dependencies, assign task
duration estimates, identify the critical path, understand the network diagram view
Display and Print Schedules
9
Define Resources
Resource views, max units, resource calendars
Assigning Resources
Basic assignment, modify an assignment
Identify Overallocated Resources
Resource usage and Detailed Gantt views together
Overallocated Resources
Finding overallocated resources, dealing with overallocations
Crashing a Critical Path Activity
10
Develop Bottom-up Project Budget
Assignment costs, task costs, various cost perspectives
Develop Summary Project Budget
12
Baseline the Project Plan
First time baseline, subsequent baselines, viewing variances
14
Using MS Project to Monitor and Control Projects
What Makes a Schedule Useful?
How MS Project recalculates based on reported actuals, current and future impacts of variances, define
the performance update process (who, what, when)
Steps to Update the Project Schedule
Acquire performance data, set and display status date, Enter duration-based performance data,
reschedule remaining work, revise future estimates
15
Close Project
Creating project progress reports, sharing reports, export a report to MS Excel, archive project work,
capture and publish lessons learned
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
PMBOK® Guide 6e Coverage in Contemporary Project Management 4e
The numbers refer to the text page where the process is defined.
Project management (PM) processes and knowledge areas 10–11
Project life cycle 7–10, 62–64
Projects and strategic planning 33–37
Organizational influences 102–110
Portfolio and program management 37–42
®
PMBOK Guide, 6th ed. Coverage
Knowledge
Areas
Project
Integration
Management
Initiating
Process
Group
Develop
Project
Charter
60–79
Planning Process Group
Develop Project Management Plan
409–410
Executing Process
Group
Monitoring &
Controlling
Process Group
Closing
Process
Group
Direct and Manage
Project Work 459–460
Manage Project
Knowledge 192–193,
504–508
Monitor and Control
Project Work 460–462
Perform Integrated
Change Control
229–232, 462–463
Close
Project
or Phase
503,
508–511
Project Scope
Management
Plan Scope Management 211–212
Collect Requirements 212–216
Define Scope 216–220
Create WBS 220–229
Validate Scope
500–501
Control Scope
475–476
Project
Schedule
Management
Plan Schedule Management 246
Define Activities 249–253
Sequence Activities 253–255
Estimate Activity Durations 255–258
Develop Schedule 259–267
Control Schedule
476–480
Project Cost
Management
Plan Cost Management 329–330
Estimate Costs 330–341
Determine Budget 342–344
Control Costs 345,
476–480
Project Quality
Management
Plan Quality Management 401–404
Manage Quality
404–406, 469–474
Control Quality
406–409, 469–474
Project
Resources
Management
Plan Resource Management 290–295
Estimate Activity Resources 290
Aquire Resources
138–141
Develop Team 141–157
Manage Team 157–161
Control Resources 476
Project Communications
Management
Plan Communications Management
188–192
Manage
Communications
193–199, 465–467
Monitor
Communications
467–468
Project Risk
Management
Plan Risk Management 360–366
Identify Risks 75, 366–368
Perform Qualitative Risk Analysis 75,
368–372
Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis
372–373
Plan Risk Responses 75, 373–377
Implement Risk
Responses 464–465
Monitor Risks
463–464
Project
Procurement
Management
Plan Procurement Management
431–433, 438–441
Conduct
Procurements
434–438
Control Procurments
441
Plan Stakeholder Engagement 184–186
Manage Stakeholder
Engagement 187–188
Monitor Stakeholder
Engagement 188
Project Stakeholder
Management
Identify
Stakeholders 75–77,
178–184
® Guide), 6th ed. (Newtown Square, PA: Project Management
Source: Adapted from A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK
Institute, Inc., 2017): 31.
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contemporary Project
Management
ORGANIZE
LEAD
PLAN
PERFORM
FOURTH EDITION
TIMOTHY J. KLOPPENBORG
Xavier University
VITTAL ANANTATMULA
Western Carolina University
KATHRYN N. WELLS
Keller Williams Real Estate
Australia • Brazil • Mexico • Singapore • United Kingdom • United States
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
This is an electronic version of the print textbook. Due to electronic rights restrictions,
some third party content may be suppressed. Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed
content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. The publisher reserves the right
to remove content from this title at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it. For
valuable information on pricing, previous editions, changes to current editions, and alternate
formats, please visit www.cengage.com/highered to search by ISBN#, author, title, or keyword for
materials in your areas of interest.
Important Notice: Media content referenced within the product description or the product
text may not be available in the eBook version.
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contemporary Project Management,
Fourth Edition
2019 2015
Timothy J. Kloppenborg
Cengage Learning Customer & Sales Support, 1-800-354-9706
www.cengage.com/permissions
permissionrequest@cengage.com
2017947974
978 1 337 40645 1
Cengage Learning
20
02210
40
125
www.cengage.com.
www.cengage.com
www.cengagebrain.com
Printed in the United States of America
Print Number: 01
Print Year: 2017
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
MS Project 2016 Instructions in Contemporary Project Management 4e
Chapter
MS Project
3
MS Project 2016 Introduction
Ribbon, Quick Access Toolbar, view panes, Zoom Slider, Shortcuts, Scheduling Mode Selector
Setting Up Your First Project
Auto schedule, start date, identifying information, summary row
Create Milestone Schedule
Key milestones, zero duration, must finish on, information
7
Set Up a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Understand the WBS definitions and displays
Enter WBS Elements (tasks), Create the outline,
Insert WBS Code Identifier column, Hide or show subtasks detail
8
Using MS Project for Critical Path Schedules
Set Up the Project Schedule
Set or update the project start date, Define organization’s working and nonworking time
Build the Network Diagram and Identify the Critical Path
Enter tasks and milestones, edit the timescale, understand and define task dependencies, assign task
duration estimates, identify the critical path, understand the network diagram view
Display and Print Schedules
9
Define Resources
Resource views, max units, resource calendars
Assigning Resources
Basic assignment, modify an assignment
Identify Overallocated Resources
Resource usage and Detailed Gantt views together
Overallocated Resources
Finding overallocated resources, dealing with overallocations
Crashing a Critical Path Activity
10
Develop Bottom-up Project Budget
Assignment costs, task costs, various cost perspectives
Develop Summary Project Budget
12
Baseline the Project Plan
First time baseline, subsequent baselines, viewing variances
14
Using MS Project to Monitor and Control Projects
What Makes a Schedule Useful?
How MS Project recalculates based on reported actuals, current and future impacts of variances, define
the performance update process (who, what, when)
Steps to Update the Project Schedule
Acquire performance data, set and display status date, Enter duration-based performance data,
reschedule remaining work, revise future estimates
15
Close Project
Creating project progress reports, sharing reports, export a report to MS Excel, archive project work,
capture and publish lessons learned
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
PMBOK® Guide 6e Coverage in Contemporary Project Management 4e
The numbers refer to the text page where the process is defined.
Project management (PM) processes and knowledge areas 10–11
Project life cycle 7–10, 62–64
Projects and strategic planning 33–37
Organizational influences 102–110
Portfolio and program management 37–42
®
PMBOK Guide, 6th ed. Coverage
Knowledge
Areas
Project
Integration
Management
Initiating
Process
Group
Develop
Project
Charter
60–79
Planning Process Group
Develop Project Management Plan
409–410
Executing Process
Group
Monitoring &
Controlling
Process Group
Closing
Process
Group
Direct and Manage
Project Work 459–460
Manage Project
Knowledge 192–193,
504–508
Monitor and Control
Project Work 460–462
Perform Integrated
Change Control
229–232, 462–463
Close
Project
or Phase
503,
508–511
Project Scope
Management
Plan Scope Management 211–212
Collect Requirements 212–216
Define Scope 216–220
Create WBS 220–229
Validate Scope
500–501
Control Scope
475–476
Project
Schedule
Management
Plan Schedule Management 246
Define Activities 249–253
Sequence Activities 253–255
Estimate Activity Durations 255–258
Develop Schedule 259–267
Control Schedule
476–480
Project Cost
Management
Plan Cost Management 329–330
Estimate Costs 330–341
Determine Budget 342–344
Control Costs 345,
476–480
Project Quality
Management
Plan Quality Management 401–404
Manage Quality
404–406, 469–474
Control Quality
406–409, 469–474
Project
Resources
Management
Plan Resource Management 290–295
Estimate Activity Resources 290
Aquire Resources
138–141
Develop Team 141–157
Manage Team 157–161
Control Resources 476
Project Communications
Management
Plan Communications Management
188–192
Manage
Communications
193–199, 465–467
Monitor
Communications
467–468
Project Risk
Management
Plan Risk Management 360–366
Identify Risks 75, 366–368
Perform Qualitative Risk Analysis 75,
368–372
Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis
372–373
Plan Risk Responses 75, 373–377
Implement Risk
Responses 464–465
Monitor Risks
463–464
Project
Procurement
Management
Plan Procurement Management
431–433, 438–441
Conduct
Procurements
434–438
Control Procurments
441
Plan Stakeholder Engagement 184–186
Manage Stakeholder
Engagement 187–188
Monitor Stakeholder
Engagement 188
Project Stakeholder
Management
Identify
Stakeholders 75–77,
178–184
® Guide), 6th ed. (Newtown Square, PA: Project Management
Source: Adapted from A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK
Institute, Inc., 2017): 31.
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Brief Contents
Preface xx
About the Authors xxix
PART 1
Organizing Projects
1
Introduction to Project Management
2
Project Selection and Prioritization 32
3
Chartering Projects 60
PART 2
2
Leading Projects
4
Organizational Capability: Structure, Culture, and Roles 100
5
Leading and Managing Project Teams 136
6
Stakeholder Analysis and Communication Planning 176
PART 3
Planning Projects
7
Scope Planning 210
8
Scheduling Projects
9
Resourcing Projects 286
10
Budgeting Projects
11
Project Risk Planning 358
12
Project Quality Planning and Project Kickoff 386
PART 4
244
328
Performing Projects
13
Project Supply Chain Management
14
Determining Project Progress and Results 456
15
Finishing the Project and Realizing the Benefits
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
426
498
PMP and CAPM Exam Prep Suggestions 522
Agile Differences Covered 527
Answers to Selected Exercises 532
Project Deliverables 537
Strengths Themes As Used in Project Management
Index 539
[Available Online]
v
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
1.2 Foundational Elements
Project Customer Tradeoff Matrix
Life Cycle and Development Approach
Elevator Pitch
2.4 Organizational Systems
Leader Roles and Responsibilities
Project Selection and Prioritization Matrix
Project Resource Assignment Matrix
3.4 Project Manager Competencies
Selecting Projects
Integration
4.1 Develop
Project Charter
Charter
Assumptions Log
4.2 Develop Project Management Plan
5.1 Plan
Scope
Management
Scope
5.2 Collect
Requirements
Requirements Documents
Scope
6.1 Plan
Schedule
Management
Schedule
Activities
7.1 Plan
Cost
Management
Quality
8.1 Plan
Quality
Management
Resources
9.1 Plan
Resource
Management
Communication
10.1 Plan
Communications
Management
12.1 Plan
Procurement
Management
Procurement
13.1 Identify
Stakeholders
Stakeholder
Register
Duration
Estimates
7.3 Determine
Budget
Network
6.3 Sequence
Activities
6.5 Develop
Schedule
Schedule Baseline
Cost Baseline
Quality
Mgt.
Plan
RACI
Team
Charter
Communications
Matrix
11.1 Plan
Risk
Management
Risk
Stakeholders
7.2 Estimate
Costs
Scope
Statement
Activity List
Milestone List
6.4 Estimate
activity
Durations
Cost
5.4 Create
WBS
9.2 Estimate
Activity
Resources
11.2 Identify
Risks
Risk Register
11.3 Perform
Qualitative
Risk Analysis
Bid
Documents
Make or Buy
Analysis
Resource Requirements
11.5 Plan
Risk
Responses
11.4 Perform
Quantitative
Risk Analysis
13.2 Plan
Stakeholder
Stakeholders
Engagement
Engagement Assessment Matrix
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Realizing
s
PM Plan Baselines Life Cycle
and Development Approach
4.5 Monitor and
Control
Project Work
4.3 Direct and Manage
Project Work
4.4 Manage Project
Knowledge
s
Analysis
Lessons
Learned
Register
4.7 Close Project Closure
Documents
or Phase
Customer
Feedback
Transition Plan
4.6 Perform
Integrated
Change Control
Retrospectives
Scope
Baseline with WBS
5.5 Validate
Scope
5.6 Control
Scope
6.6 Control
Schedule
Resource Histogram
Project Crashing
7.4 Control
Costs
Quality
Reports
8.2 Manage
Quality
8.3 Control
Quality
Scope
Backlog
Burn
Down/Up
Charts
Earned Value
Analysis
Quality
Measurements
9.3 Acquire
Resources
9.4 Develop
Team
Team
Assessments
Team
Assignments
9.6 Control
Resources
9.5 Manage
Team
10.2 Manage
Communications
Agendas
Minutes
Issues Log
Meeting Evaluation
10.3 Monitor
Communications Change
Requests
Progress Report
11.6 Implement
Risk Responses
11.7 Monitor
Risks
12.2 Conduct
Procurements
12.3 Control
Procurements
13.3 Manage
Stakeholder
Engagement
Source
Selection
Matrix
13.4 Monitor
Stakeholder
Engagement
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
About the Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
PART 1
Organizing Projects
CHAPTER 1
Introduction to Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 What Is a Project?
3
1.2 History of Project Management
5
1.3 How Can Project Work Be Described? 6
1.3a Projects versus Operations 6 / 1.3b Soft Skills and Hard Skills
and Responsibility 7 / 1.3d Project Life Cycle 7
7 / 1.3c Authority
1.4 Understanding Projects 10
1.4a Project Management Institute 10 / 1.4b Project Management Body of Knowledge
(PMBOK ) 10 / 1.4c The PMI Talent Triangle 11 / 1.4d Selecting and Prioritizing
Projects 14 / 1.4e Project Goals and Constraints 14 / 1.4f Defining Project Success
and Failure 15 / 1.4g Using Microsoft Project to Help Plan and Measure
Projects 16 / 1.4h Types of Projects 16 / 1.4i Scalability of Project Tools 17
®
1.5 Project Roles 17
1.5a Project Executive-Level Roles 18 / 1.5b Project Management-Level Roles
1.5c Project Associate-Level Roles 20
19 /
1.6 Overview of the Book 20
1.6a Part 1: Organizing and Initiating Projects 20 / 1.6b Part 2: Leading Projects
1.6c Part 3: Planning Projects 21 / 1.6d Part 4: Performing Projects 23
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
21 /
23
24
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
25
25
PMBOK Guide Questions
26
Integrated Example Projects
27
Suburban Homes Construction Project
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
28
Project Management in Action
29
References
30
Endnotes
31
24
27
28
viii
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contents
ix
CHAPTER 2
Project Selection and Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.1 Strategic Planning Process 33
2.1a Strategic Analysis 33 / 2.1b Guiding Principles
Objectives 36 / 2.1d Flow-Down Objectives 37
34 / 2.1c Strategic
2.2 Portfolio Management 37
2.2a Portfolios 38 / 2.2b Programs 39 / 2.2c Projects and Subprojects 39 /
2.2d Assessing an Organization’s Ability to Perform Projects 42 / 2.2e Identifying
Potential Projects 42 / 2.2f Using a Cost-Benefit Analysis Model to Select
Projects 43 / 2.2g Using a Scoring Model to Select Projects 45 / 2.2h Prioritizing
Projects 48 / 2.2i Resourcing Projects 48
2.3 Securing Projects 49
2.3a Identify Potential Project Opportunities 50 / 2.3b Determine Which Opportunities to
Pursue 50 / 2.3c Prepare and Submit a Project Proposal 51 / 2.3d Negotiate to
Secure the Project 51
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
52
52
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
53
53
PMBOK Guide Questions
Exercises
52
53
54
Integrated Example Projects
55
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
56
Project Management in Action
57
References
58
Endnotes
59
56
CHAPTER 3
Chartering Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.1 What Is a Project Charter?
62
3.2 Why Is a Project Charter Used?
3.3 When Is a Charter Needed?
63
64
3.4 Typical Elements in a Project Charter 65
3.4a Title 65 / 3.4b Scope Overview 65 / 3.4c Business Case 66 /
3.4d Background 66 / 3.4e Milestone Schedule with Acceptance Criteria 66 /
3.4f Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints 67 / 3.4g Resource Estimates 69 /
3.4h Stakeholder List 69 / 3.4i Team Operating Principles 69 / 3.4j Lessons
Learned 70 / 3.4k Signatures and Commitment 70
3.5 Constructing a Project Charter 70
3.5a Scope Overview and Business Case Instructions 70 / 3.5b Background
Instructions 71 / 3.5c Milestone Schedule with Acceptance Criteria
Instructions 72 / 3.5d Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints Instructions 75 /
3.5e Resources Needed Instructions 75 / 3.5f Stakeholder List Instructions 75 /
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
x
Contents
3.5g Team Operating Principles Instructions 77 / 3.5h Lessons Learned
Instructions 77 / 3.5i Signatures and Commitment Instructions 78
3.6 Ratifying the Project Charter
79
3.7 Starting a Project Using Microsoft Project 79
3.7a MS Project 2016 Introduction 80 / 3.7b Setting up Your First Project
3.7c Define Your Project 82 / 3.7d Create a Milestone Schedule 83
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
88
88
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
88
89
89
PMBOK Guide Questions
Exercises
81 /
89
90
Integrated Example Projects
91
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
93
Project Management in Action
93
References
96
Endnotes
97
PART 2
Leading Projects
93
CHAPTER 4
Organizational Capability: Structure, Culture, and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.1 Types of Organizational Structures 103
4.1a Functional 103 / 4.1b Projectized 104 / 4.1c Matrix
105
4.2 Organizational Culture and Its Impact on Projects 109
4.2a Culture of the Parent Organization 110 / 4.2b Project Cultural Norms
111
4.3 Project Life Cycles 111
4.3a Define-Measure-Analyze-Improve-Control (DMAIC) Model 112 / 4.3b Research and
Development (R&D) Project Life Cycle Model 113 / 4.3c Construction Project Life
Cycle Model 113 / 4.3d Agile Project Life Cycle Model 113
4.4 Agile Project Management 114
4.4a What Is Agile? 114 / 4.4b Why Use Agile? 114 / 4.4c What Is an Agile
Mindset? 114 / 4.4d What Are the Key Roles in Agile Projects? 115 / 4.4e How Do
You Start an Agile Project? 115 / 4.4f How Do You Continue an Agile Project?
115 / 4.4g What Is Needed for Agile to Be Successful? 116
4.5 Traditional Project Executive Roles 116
4.5a Steering Team 116 / 4.5b Sponsor 117 / 4.5c Customer
Projects Officer/Project Management Office 121
4.6 Traditional Project Management Roles 121
4.6a Functional Manager 121 / 4.6b Project Manager
119 / 4.5d Chief
122 / 4.6c Facilitator
4.7 Traditional Project Team Roles 126
4.7a Core Team Members 126 / 4.7b Subject Matter Experts
124
126
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contents
4.8 Role Differences on Agile Projects
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
126
128
128
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
128
129
129
PMBOK Guide Questions
Exercises
xi
129
130
Integrated Example Projects
130
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
131
Project Management in Action
132
References
134
Endnotes
135
131
CHAPTER 5
Leading and Managing Project Teams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.1 Acquire Project Team 138
5.1a Preassignment of Project Team Members 139 / 5.1b Negotiation for Project Team
Members 139 / 5.1c On-Boarding Project Team Members 140
5.2 Develop Project Team 141
5.2a Stages of Project Team Development 142 / 5.2b Characteristics of High-Performing
Project Teams 144 / 5.2c Assessing Individual Member Capability 147 /
5.2d Assessing Project Team Capability 148 / 5.2e Building Individual and Project
Team Capability 150 / 5.2f Establishing Project Team Ground Rules 153
5.3 Manage Project Team 157
5.3a Project Manager Power and Leadership 157 / 5.3b Assessing Performance of
Individuals and Project Teams 159 / 5.3c Project Team Management Outcomes
5.4 Relationship Building Within the Core Team
159
160
5.5 Managing Project Conflicts 161
5.5a Sources of Project Conflict 162 / 5.5b Conflict-Resolution Process and
Styles 163 / 5.5c Negotiation 164
5.6 Communication Needs of Global and Virtual Teams 166
5.6a Virtual Teams 166 / 5.6b Cultural Differences 166 / 5.6c Countries and Project
Communication Preferences 167
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
167
168
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
168
168
169
PMBOK Guide Questions
170
Integrated Example Projects
170
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
171
171
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
xii
Contents
Project Management in Action
References
174
Endnotes
175
172
CHAPTER 6
Stakeholder Analysis and Communication Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6.1 Identify Stakeholders 178
6.1a Find Stakeholders 179 / 6.1b Analyze Stakeholders
Stakeholders 183
180 / 6.1c Document
6.2 Plan Stakeholder Engagement 184
6.2a Creating a Stakeholder Engagement Assessment Matrix
Relationships with Stakeholders 185
184 / 6.2b Planning to Build
6.3 Manage Stakeholder Engagement
187
6.4 Monitor Stakeholder Engagement
188
6.5 Plan Communications Management 188
6.5a Purposes of a Project Communications Plan 188 / 6.5b Communications Plan
Considerations 189 / 6.5c Communications Matrix 191 / 6.5d Manage Project
Knowledge 192
6.6 Manage Communications 193
6.6a Determine Project Information Needs 193 / 6.6b Establish Information Retrieval and
Distribution System 193 / 6.6c Project Meeting Management 194 / 6.6d Issues
Management 197
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
199
199
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
®
200
200
200
PMBOK Guide Questions
201
Integrated Example Projects
202
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
203
Project Management in Action
204
References
206
Endnotes
207
PART 3
Planning Projects
202
CHAPTER 7
Scope Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
7.1 Plan Scope Management
211
7.2 Collect Requirements 212
7.2a Gather Stakeholder Input and Needs
213
7.3 Define Scope 217
7.3a Reasons to Define Scope 217 / 7.3b How to Define Scope
Scope in Agile Projects 218
217 / 7.3c Defining
Copyright 2019 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contents
7.4 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) 220
7.4a What Is the WBS? 220 / 7.4b Why Use a WBS? 221 / 7.4c WBS
Formats 222 / 7.4d Work Packages 224 / 7.4e How to Construct a WBS
7.5 Establish Change Control
Summary
239
Chapter Review Questions
Discussion Questions
239
240
241
Integrated Example Projects
241
Casa DE PAZ Development Project
Semester Project Instructions
242
Project Management in Action
242
References
239
239
PMBOK Guide Questions
Exercises
232
237
Key Terms Consistent with PMI Standards and Guides
®
226
229
7.6 Using MS Project for Work Breakdown Structures (WBS)
7.6a Set Up a WBS in MS Project 232
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
xiii
242
243
CHAPTER 8
Scheduling Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8.1 Plan Schedule Management
246
8.2 Purposes of a Project Schedule
247
8.3 Historical Development of Project Schedules
247
8.4 How Project Schedules Are Limited and Created
8.5 Define Activities
248
249
8.6 Sequence Activities 253
8.6a Leads and Lags 254 / 8.6b Alternative Dependencies
8.7 Estimate Activity Duration 255
8.7a Problems and Remedies in Duration Estimating
255
256 / 8.7b Learning Curves
8.8 Develop Project Schedules 259
8.8a Two-Pass Method 259 / 8.8b Enumeration Method
258
263
8.9 Uncertainty in Project Schedules 264
8.9a Program Evaluation and Review Technique
265 / 8.9b Monte Carlo Simulation
8.10 Show the Project Schedule on a Gantt Chart
268
266
8.11 Using Microsoft Project for Critical Path Schedules 268
8.11a Set up the Project Schedule 269 / 8.11b Build the Network Diagram and Identify
the Critical Path 270
PMP/CAPM Study Ideas
Summary
275
276
Key Terms Consistent w
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 14265
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Faisal Alhathal
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Cases
629
Economic Development in Bangladesh
When Bangladesh gained independence from Pakistan in
1971 after a brutal civil war that may have left as many as
3 million dead, the U.S. National Security Adviser, Henry
Kissinger, referred to the country as a “basket case.”
Kissinger’s assessment was accurate enough. At the time,
Bangladesh was one of the world’s poorest nations.
Although most of the country is dominated by the fertile
Ganges-Brahmaputra delta, a lack of other natural
resources, coupled with poor infrastructure, political
instability, and high levels of corruption, long held the
country back. To compound matters, Bangladesh is prone
to natural disasters. Most of Bangladesh is less than
12 meters above sea level. The extensive low-lying areas
are vulnerable to tropical cyclones, floods, and tidal bores.
Beginning in the mid-1990s, however, Bangladesh began
to climb the ladder of economic progress. From the early
2000s onward, the country grew its economy at around
6 percent per annum compounded. Today, this Muslim
majority country of 160 million people has joined the
ranks of lower-middle-income nations. Poverty reduction
has been dramatic, with the percentage of the population
living in poverty falling from 44.2 percent in 1991 to
18.5 percent in 2010, an achievement that raised 20.5 million people out of abject poverty. Today, the country ranks
64th out of the 154 countries included in the World Bank’s
global poverty database. It has a considerable way to go,
but it is no longer one of the world’s poorest countries.
Several reasons underlie Bangladesh’s relative economic success. In its initial post-independence period,
Bangladesh adopted socialist policies, nationalizing many
companies and subsidizing the costs of agricultural production and basic food products. These policies failed to
deliver the anticipated gains. Policy reforms in the 1980s
were directed toward the withdrawal of food and agricultural subsidies, the privatization of state-owned companies, financial liberalization, and the withdrawal of some
import restrictions. Further reforms aimed at liberalizing
the economy were launched in the 1990s. These included
making the currency convertible (which led to a floating
exchange rate in 2003), reducing import duties to much
lower levels, and removing most of the controls on the
movement of foreign private capital (which allowed for
more foreign direct investment). The reforms of the
1990s coincided with the transition to a parliamentary
democracy from semi-autocratic rule.
Bangladesh’s private sector has expanded rapidly since
then. Leading the growth has been the country’s vibrant
textile sector, which is now the second-largest exporter of
ready-made garments in the world after China. Textiles
account for 80 percent of Bangladesh’s exports. The
development of the textile industry has been helped by
the availability of low-cost labor, managerial skills, favorable trade agreements, and government policies that
eliminated import duties on inputs for the textile business, such as raw materials. The Bangladesh economy has
also benefited from its productive agricultural sector and
remittances from more than 10 million Bangladesh citizens who work in other nations. Bangladesh is also the
home of the microfinance movement, which has enabled
entrepreneurs with no prior access to the banking system
to borrow small amounts of capital to start businesses.
This being said, the country still faces considerable
impediments to sustaining its growth. Infrastructure
remains poor; corruption continues to be a major problem; and the political system is, at best, an imperfect
democracy where opposition is stifled. The country is too
dependent upon its booming textile sector and needs to
diversify its industrial base. Bangladesh is also one of the
countries most prone to the adverse affects of climate
change. A one-meter rise in sea level would leave an
estimated 10 percent of the country under water and
increase the potential for damaging floods in much of the
remainder. Nevertheless, according to the U.S. investment
bank Goldman Sachs, Bangladesh is one of the 11 lowermiddle-income nations poised for sustained growth.
Sources
W. Mahmud, S. Ahmed, and S. Mahajan, “Economic Reforms,
Growth, and Governance: The Political Economy Aspects of
Bangladesh’s Development Surprise,” World Bank Commission
on Development and Growth, 2008; “Freedom in the World
2016,” Freedom House; “Tiger in the Night,” The Economist,
October 15, 2016; Sanjay Kathuria, “How Will Bangladesh
Reach High Levels of Prosperity?” World Bank blog, January 5,
2017; and Qimiao Fan, “Bangladesh: Setting a Global Standard
in Ending Poverty,” World Bank blog, October 5, 2016.
Case Discussion Questions
1.
What were the principal reasons for the economic
stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for
independence?
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s
enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of
economic progress. What are the main lessons here
that can be applied to economic development in
other nations?
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon
agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks
here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial
and commercial base?
Are opportunities, and by extension, markets, created or discovered? This paper should explore the differences and convergences between creation theory and discovery theory in entrepreneurship. It should be written in 12-point font, 1-inch margins and be no longer than 15 total pages, excluding references. It should use the Academy of Management Perspectives as a template, include a literature review and a description of potential data.
Write a report on the cooperative training period as follows
Facility Name/ Abdullah Hadi Balharith & partners Co
Website/ https://abcoksa.com/
General instructions for writing the final report:
Please use your own words don’t copy and paste
Please use keyboard don’t use handwriting
The word limit is 3000-4000.words
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
I want answer with APA reference and references at least 10#
# I sent the tasks I trained on and the training department (HR management)
#I also sent my information and photos of my work to support the final report
After finishing the report file, I want to make another small presentation file about the training. I have sent the file
#I also sent you some pictures to support the report
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code:
Student’s ID Number:
Semester:
CRN:
Academic Year: 144 /144 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Level of Marks:
Secondary address separator
Secondary address
Text
Text
Text
Text
Thank You
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form No 4- Internship Report Cover Page
Student`s name:
Student`s ID #:
Training Organization:
Trainee Department:
Field Instructor Name:
Field Instructor Signature:
Course Title:
CRN:
Internship Start Date:
Internship End Date:
Academic Year/Semester:
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Total Training Hours /280
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained /30
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Academic Report Guideline(Co-op)
(please do not include this text in the final report, just follow its guidelines and
use the cover page above)
The report should be submitted within two weeks after you finish your Co-op training Program.
In addition, the report should be approximately 3000 – 4000, single –spaced and consider taking the
following format
General instructions for writing the final report:
The report must be written in English language.
The word limit is 3000-4000.
If the report word count is not within the required word limit, marks will be deducted.
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Plagiarism or copying from other sources will result in ZERO marks.
This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This
includes filling your information on the cover page.
Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool. Late submission will result in ZERO marks
being awarded.
First Page
The first page should display the student’s full name, internship start and finish dates, working hours per
week, company/institution name, and the cover page.
The field instructor should sign on the first page.
A Brief Executive Summary of the Internship
A one-page summary of the company/institution and a short account of the major activities carried out
during the internship period.
Acknowledgment
To allow the student to express her/his thankful and gratitude to individuals (such as: field instructor,
academic supervisor, colleagues…etc.) who help them in carrying out and completing her/his training
journey. This part will aid the students to learn basic elements of academic writing. To express their
appreciation in a concise and professional manner.
Table of Contents
Contents of the report with page numbers, list of tables, and list of figures.
Introduction
A brief of the report. The Aim of the report.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Chapter 1: Description of the company
This section should answer the following questions:
What is the full title of the company/institution?
Give a brief history of the company, full mailing address and relevant weblinks
What is the type of ownership of the company/institution?
State the main shareholders and their shares.
What is the sector that the company/institution operates in?
Specify the products and services produced and offered to its customers/clients.
Who are regarded as the customers/clients of your internship company (consider the end users, retailers,
other manufacturers, employees,etc.)?
Provide an organization chart of the company, along with information on the number of employees.
Provide a list of functions performed by different departments/divisions in the internship organization.
Provide an overview off the production system or service procedure (what are the resources, inputs,
outcomes, andconstraints?)
Provide a process chart of a major product and/or service.
The following questions can be classified as your major fit (Finance, Accounting, Ecommerce and
Management).
• What kind accounting/finance/IT//quality/marketing standards and principles are used in the
organization?
• Discuss telecommunication technologies (Database, Instant Messenger, Networking, Ecommerce tools)
used in the company.
• Describe the quality planning and control activities in the internship organization.
• Describe the quality control activities throughout the life cycle of the product/service groups
• What kind of financial analysis and decision-making methods are used by corporate treasurers and
financial managers in the internship organization?
• What types of marketing, selling, and human resources analysis are performed (cost system, evaluation
of consumers, needs, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy)?
Chapter 2: Internship activities
This is the main body of your report. During the internship period, the focus of the training may on the
following types of analysis and questions. You do not have to answer all the questions in the list: •
Describe your working conditions and functions, such as: Who is your supervisor (include his/her name
and his/her position); other team members or co-workers and what their functions are to complement
yours.
• Provide a detailed description about the department(s) that the trainee did her/his training with them.
Adding all sub-divisions for this department(s) if it is available. Student can add to this description a
supported chart.
• Detailed descriptions about all tasks and activities that the trainee did them during her/his training
period.
• Gained skills and how they added value to your work
• Other tasks that are not related to the trainee’s major that done by her/him at the company should be
included in this chapter as well.
• What types of incentives did you get as a trainee to be more proactive and productive?
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
• Describe what kind of working documents and analysis you did there and what experiences you have
gained throughout yourtraining. Provide examples of your work.
• A comparison between theory (things you have learned in the classroom) and practice (things you did or
observed at the company) must be made and highlighted. In this section the student can add a supported
table includes which academic course (s) (course title and code) helped to perform training tasks. For
example, two columns; the first one shows the course name and second column shows the tasks
performed and related to this course.
• Show some work samples that you have encountered/conducted at the company through graphs,
pictures, data, drawings, or design calculations and include them in your report.
• Lessons learnt (what the overall benefits gained from the training program)
Chapter 3: Recommendations
• Advantageous that helped the student in completing the training program.
• Disadvantageous and challenges that faced the student and how he/she did overcome them.
• Recommendations to improve training program in the college.
• Recommendation for the training company. Conclusion Sum up and summary of the training
experience. Reference If it is needed Appendix (option) This will help the instructor to have a background
about the trainee and his/her previous experiences. Also, it helps the students in writing their CVs for
future job application especially for fresh graduates who do not have previous practical experiences.
• Basic information (name, city, contact details…etc.).
• Job objectives.
• Academic qualifications.
• Practical experiences.
• Skills this will help the instructor to have a background about the trainee and his/her previous
experiences
** I need these questions from the attachment answered The last questions on the buttom that highlight with (YELLOW) which are ;
• HOW IS THE ORDERING PROCESS? LIVE CHAT? CUSTOMER SERVICE?
• HOW DO YOU PAY? CONFIRMATION STATUS?
• ENDORSING/PARTNERSHIPS WITH CHARITIES, NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATIONS?
1. CREATE A REFRAME STATEMENT: Use the format below:
‘We used to think ‘X’, now we believe ‘Y’
2. VALUE PROPOSITION STATEMENT: Use the format below
‘Now that we believe ‘Y’, we will be delivering ‘Z’ value through NEW PRODUCT, SERVICES, NETWORKS, PARTNERSHIPS, ETC… to the consumer.
• LIST CONSUMER/CUSTOMERS; SAME AS FOUND IN CONDITIONS – OR NEW?
• NEW CUSTOMER BASE – LIST
• NEW PRODUCTS – LIST
• SERVICES – LIST
• DESCRIBE NEW BUSINESS S (i.e.,INTERNET ONLY, SHOP AT HOME, NEW PARTNERSHIPS, ETC…)
1. PROTOTYPES: ‘How Might We…’
• Simple, descriptions of the idea…
• Existing images found on-line which looks is like or depicts your idea.
• Sketches/drawn images
• Mock Websites
• See examples below…
OUR WINNING BIG IDEA IS CALLED: (name)
1. INTRODUCTORY ‘ELEVATOR SPEECH’ PARAGRAPH OF THIS BIG IDEA (If it helps, use the 5E’s framework to script your story – included below)
• DESCRIBE THE VALUE TO THE CONSUMER
• DESCRIBE THE VALUE TO THE FTD BRAND
2. PROTOTYPES (copy from REFRAME phase where idea orginated)
• Simple, descriptions of the idea
• Existing images found on-line which looks is like your idea.
• Sketches/drawn images
• Mocked Up Websites
3. TECHNOLOGY ASSESSMENT:(HASSAN)
• Reason to believe it’s technically possible: (List)
• New technology using – if any.
4. LIVABILITY:
• A plan to maximize sustainability: (List)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
*This worksheet will be the document you turn in to be graded. Answer the questions in the green
fields.*
ASSIGNMENT:
You are a team of Design Thinking experts brought in specifically by the McDonald’s
Board of Directors. You are being asked to leverage your expertise of using the CRIS
framework to uncover ‘THE’ BIG idea which will help McDonald’s solve the problem of
the increased packaging waste generated by their food and the negative impact on the
environment.
Overview:
TEAM NAME:
TEAM MEMBERS (list):
PHASE 1: CONDITIONS (C)
PURPOSE OF CONDITIONS PHASE: Establish a baseline of information to be referenced in
upcoming Phases by communicating what we already know about the 2023 McDonald’s business AND
the amount of waste generated globally by fast food by answering the questions below. Use the links
below as the basis of your research.
1.
https://corporate.mcdonalds.com/corpmcd/investors.html
2.
https://www.mcdonalds.com/corpmcd/our-purpose-and-impact/our-planet/packagingtoys-and-waste.html
3.
https://takeawaypackaging.co.uk/fast-food-packaging-wastestatistics/#:~:text=Fast%20Food%20Packaging%20Waste%20Facts&text=In%202019%2C%2
0a%20survey%20found,including%20sandwiches%2C%20crisps%20and%20snacks.
4.
https://recycledelic.com/fast-food-packaging-a-significant-contributor-to-the-plasticpollution/
5.
https://sustainablereview.com/environmental-impact-of-takeout-food/
6.
https://www.treehugger.com/slow-progress-recycling-fast-food-waste-1204147
APA Style
1. MCDONALD’S HISTORY AND BACKGROUND: Jordan
•
INTRODUCTORY ‘ELEVATOR SPEECH’; SHORT PARAGRAPH DESCRIBING THE OVERALL
STATE OF AFFAIRS WITH THE CURRENT MCDONALD’S /BUSINESS AND THEIR APPROACH TO
SUSTAINABILITY AND XRECYCLABILITY.
•
•
80% of packaging comes from renewable sources, by 2025 100% will be
“The guest packaging recycling process in our restaurants varies
from market to market. For example, in some markets, our crew collect
and separate recyclable packaging, while in others, the process is
completely off-site, sending customer waste to waste-sorting facilities.
In the U.K., well-established waste separation systems in stores
enable us to capture our paper cups – items made with high-value
material – and recycle them in partnership with a local, specialized
cup-recycling facility.” (corporate.mcdonalds.com)
2. CUSTOMERS/CONSUMER BASE: (Zac)
https://www.start.io/blog/who-is-mcdonalds-target-market-mcdonalds-brand-analysis-audience-marketingstrategy-competitors/#:~:text=According%20to%202020%20data%2C%20the,of%2044%20times%20a%20year.
https://ktla.com/news/money-smart/fast-food-dining-rooms-are-pretty-quiet-thesedays/#:~:text=Dine%2Din%20customers%20now%20represent,%2C%20take%2Dout%20or%20delivery.
•
WHO IS CURRENTLY BUYING THE THEIR PRODUCTS OR USING THEIR SERVICES?
Most of McDonald’s audience is lower middle income families in both urban and rural area. They
are loyal customers, visiting a McDonald’s restaurant an average of 44 times a year. The target
market of McDonald’s includes employees, professionals, as well as students, who are drawn by the
value conscious meal options and free Wifi provided in McDonald’s restaurants.
•
WHY ARE THEY BUYING THESE PRODUCTS?
The McDonald’s target audience is mainly lower to middle class consumers, who are interested in fast,
cheap and convenient food. The typical McDonald’s customers are characterized as ‘easygoing’ and
‘careless’, yet at the same time, they are loyal to the brand and eat fast food regularly.
•
WHAT ARE THEY BUYING?
Ever since the first McDonald’s menu from when the chained opened in the 1950s, French fries.
•
TYPES OF CUSTOMERS (MALE, FEMALE, COUPLES, RETIRED, OLD, YOUNG, ETC…)
The target market of McDonald’s is located globally and covers a broad age group, from kids to senior
citizens. According to 2020 data, the average customer is a married woman, aged 41 to 56, who
particularly enjoys the McDonald’s breakfast.
•
RESTAURANT VS. DRIVE THROUGH REVENUE?
Dine-in customers now represent less than 10% of all sales at McDonald’s restaurants compared to
roughly 25% before the COVID-19 pandemic
3. BUSINESS: Daniel
•
CURRENT SIZE OF BUSINESS – IN DOLLARS
•
23.18 billion U.S. Dollars
https://www.statista.com/topics/1444/mcdonalds/#:~:text=In%20total%2C%20McDonald%27s%20reve
nue%20amounted,billion%20U.S.%20dollars%20in%202022.
•
COMPETITION – LIST
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Burger King
Wendy’s
KFC
Subway
Pizza Hut
Dunkin
Starbucks
Taco Bell
Domino’s Pizza
Panera Bread
•
KEY PRODUCTS AND SERVICES OFFERINGS
•
•
•
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, Coffee, Dessert
Fast-food
Burgers, Fries, Hashbrowns, Sandwiches, Milkshakes, Ice Cream, Expresso
Drinks, Chicken Sandwiches, Chicken Nuggets, Burritos, Pancakes, Cookies
•
OTHER IMPORTANT INFORMATION
4. TECHNICAL ASSESSMENT:
•
IS THEIR WEBSITE UPTODATE? SITE IS EASY TO SHOP? INTERRACTIVE AND ENGAGING?
(Zac)
The McDonald’s website is up to date and is very comprehensive when it comes to whatever you are
looking for. There are articles about the company, the menu of all their items, career information,
special offers, info about the McDonald’s rewards application and information on all their current
locations.
•
WEBSITE MOBILE FRIENDLY? (Zac)
Yes, 5 years ago they launched a mobile app to help with their sales. Around 20% of McDonald’s global
revenue now comes from digital sales.
•
•
•
HOW IS THE ORDERING PROCESS? LIVE CHAT? CUSTOMER SERVICE? Jordan
HOW DO YOU PAY? CONFIRMATION STATUS? Jordan
CAN YOU TRACK YOUR ORDERS? Daniel
•
Track orders through the Mcdonalds app and on the screen at the restaurant it
states who they are serving. If you use delivery services like Uber Eats, Grubhub, and
such they also give you updates through the app.
•
COMPARED TO AMAZON, HOW IS THEIR OVERALL ‘START TO FINISH’
PROCESS? HASSAN
•
Amazon’s start-to-finish process includes packaging goods from suppliers and
sellers to customers, leading to considerable waste in materials used to package the
various products. Mcdonald’s has many customers, especially considering they serve
them multiple items, including drinks and food. Their start-to-finish does include
more materials per customer served and thus is less efficient in producing packaging
waste.
5. LIVABILITY: HASSAN
•
DO THEY PROMOTE RECYCLING?
The company promotes recycling by insisting on packaging items made with recyclable materials
(Langert, 2019).They also purchase the same supplies from manufacturers that use recycled materials,
and that helps promote the activity.
•
SUSTAINABIITY?
Currently, McDonald’s packaging is not sustainable. The company’s global operations consume
considerably more packaging materials than they recycle. More resources are needed to make the
operations sustainable by increasing the quantity of materials recycled from packaging.
•
ENDORSING/PARTNERSHIPS WITH CHARITIES, NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATIONS?
PHASE 2: REFRAME (R)
PURPOSE OF REFRAME PHASE: Analyze the information from the CONDITIONS phase, and identify
a big, disruptive, unique idea which is currently not being recognized. This idea will be big enough to generate
big profits, and turn the business around, reposition the McDonald’s brand and sustain it for the next 5-10
years.
Using service packaging to create McDonald’s Beer and Soda Container Holders partners with Beer
companies.
1. CREATE A REFRAME STATEMENT: Use the format below:
‘We used to think ‘X’, now we believe
‘Y’
2. VALUE PROPOSITION STATEMENT: Use the format below
‘Now that we believe ‘Y’, we will be delivering ‘Z’
value through NEW PRODUCT, SERVICES,
NETWORKS, PARTNERSHIPS, ETC… to the
consumer.
•
LIST CONSUMER/CUSTOMERS; SAME AS FOUND IN CONDITIONS – OR NEW?
•
•
•
•
NEW CUSTOMER BASE – LIST
NEW PRODUCTS – LIST
SERVICES – LIST
DESCRIBE NEW BUSINESS S (i.e.,INTERNET ONLY, SHOP AT HOME, NEW PARTNERSHIPS,
ETC…)
PHASE 3: IDEATION (I)
PURPOSE OF THE IDEATION PHASE: Create as many possibilities as possible that solve for the
REFRAME and VALUE statements which are wanted by the consumer, makes McDonald’s money, technically
feasible (realistic), is not addressed by competition and does no harm to the environment. Minimum 10 unique
ideas total per rubric are required. Reference The 10 Types of Innovation to ensure your ideas are diverse
beyond product solutions…
1. PROTOTYPES: ‘How Might We…’
•
•
•
•
•
Simple, descriptions of the idea…
Existing images found on-line which looks is like or depicts your idea.
Sketches/drawn images
Mock Websites
See examples below…
10 Types model below for reference…
PHASE 4: SELECT (S)
PURPOSE OF THE SELECT PHASE: You are now making a decision as a team on the one (1) single,
big idea chosen from the 10 IDEATION ideas which will propel McDonald’s into the future. Again, the selected
idea is wanted by consumers, makes McDonald’s money, builds the brand, technically feasible (realistic), is not
addressed by competition and does no harm to the environment. The top, big idea – ONLY
OUR WINNING BIG IDEA IS CALLED: (name)
1. INTRODUCTORY ‘ELEVATOR SPEECH’ PARAGRAPH OF THIS BIG IDEA (If it helps, use the
5E’s framework to script your story – included below)
•
DESCRIBE THE VALUE TO THE CONSUMER
•
DESCRIBE THE VALUE TO THE FTD BRAND
2. PROTOTYPES (copy from REFRAME phase where idea orginated)
•
•
•
Simple, descriptions of the idea
Existing images found on-line which looks is like your idea.
Sketches/drawn images
•
Mocked Up Websites
3. TECHNOLOGY ASSESSMENT
•
Reason to believe it’s technically possible: (List)
•
New technology using – if any.
4. LIVABILITY:
•
A plan to maximize sustainability: (List)
For reference, 5E’s framework is below…
5. BRAND BUILDING ROADMAP – An intentional, deliberate
plan for launching this big idea into the market.
‘FROM’ means what’s happening today in that category.
‘TO’ is the future-state which your new idea addresses.
Year 1 Activities: Focus on positively changing the
perception of McDonald’s and the trash they generate.
(HASSAN)
1.
Consumer/Experience
FROM:
TO:
2.
FROM:
TO:
Organizational/Brand
3.
Products
FROM:
TO:
4.
Services
FROM:
TO:
5.
Partnerships
FROM:
TO:
6.
Advertising/Promotion
FROM:
TO:
7.
Pricing
FROM:
TO:
8.
Technology
FROM:
TO:
Year 2 Activities: Build on Yr. 1 activities, and now
focus on making money and taking market share from
the competition.
1.
Consumer/Experience
FROM:
TO:
2.
FROM:
Organizational/Brand
TO:
3.
Products
FROM:
TO:
4.
Services
FROM:
TO:
5.
Partnerships
FROM:
TO:
6.
Advertising/Promotion
FROM:
TO:
7.
Pricing
FROM:
TO:
8.
Technology
FROM:
TO:
Year 3 Activities: Build on Yr. 1 & 2 activities, and now
focus on making money and taking market share from
the competition; expand your winning solution.
1. Consumer/Experience
FROM:
TO:
2. Organizational/Brand
FROM:
TO:
3. Products
FROM:
TO:
4. Services
FROM:
TO:
5. Partnerships
FROM:
TO:
6. Advertising/Promotion
FROM:
TO:
7. Pricing
FROM:
TO:
8. Technology
FROM:
TO:
Examples – for reference:
No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference .
✨Add references✨
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font .
No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
proper examples and explanations for each questions.
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
Commit to the number of words specified for each question
the answer should be sufficient
TextBook:
Schroeder, R. G. (2020). Operations management in the supply chain decisions and cases.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Alzahrani Saeed
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Record a video presentation about Stroh’s 4-stage change model (2015) and Stringer & Aragon’s Look-Think-Act (2021) or AAPR model applied to issues in your organization. Describe the concepts of team learning and shared vision to a chosen or group audience, and explain how concepts create opportunities for improvement within the organization.I need powerpoint and script so I can do video. I need the subject to be a real estate developer who DBFOM student housing and workforce housing
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company or His Family?”
Author: by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication: September 1, 2023
Published: Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1.Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case? [Mark 2]
2.Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques? [Marks 3]
a.Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a.Why-1
b.Why-2
c.Why-3
d.Why-4
e.Why-5
b.Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3.Develop a mind map for decision making, [2 Marks]
4.Write all the alternative choices of your decision. [Mark 1]
5.Make a decision and write the conclusion. [Marks 2]
Answers
1.Answer-
2.Answer-
3.Answer-
4.Answer-
5.Answer-
6.Answer-
7.Answer-
8.Answer-
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Sulaiman Albawardi
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
In this assignment, we will learn that credit cards charge merchants fees for transactions. We will understand how to calculate fees and make corresponding journal entries.
Download AC107 Unit 7 Merchant Fees Template Download AC107 Unit 7 Merchant Fees Template[Excel Spreadsheet]
Follow the instructions found in the template
Rename your spreadsheet adding your last name to the file name (Ex. AC107 Unit 7 Assignment – Calculating Merchant Fees LastName)
Submit your completed spreadsheet
Part 2
In this assignment, we will learn how to prepare journal entries to write off an uncollectable account using the Direct Write off method.
Download AC107 Unit 7 Direct Writeoff Template Download AC107 Unit 7 Direct Writeoff Template[Excel Spreadsheet]
Follow the instructions found in the template
Rename your spreadsheet adding your last name to the file name (Ex. AC107 Unit 7 Assignment – Direct Write Off Journal Entries LastName)
Submit your completed spreadsheet
Part 3
In this assignment, we will learn how to prepare journal entries to write off an uncollectable account using the Allowance method.
Download AC107 Unit 7 Allowance Method Template Download AC107 Unit 7 Allowance Method Template[Excel Spreadsheet]
Follow the instructions found in the template
Rename your spreadsheet adding your last name to the file name (Ex. AC107 Unit 7 Assignment – Allowance Method Journal Entries LastName)
Submit your completed spreadsheet
Part 4
In this assignment, we will estimate the amount for the allowance account by analyzing and aging Accounts Receivable.
Download AC107 Unit 7 Receivable Aging Template Download AC107 Unit 7 Receivable Aging Template[Excel Spreadsheet]
Follow the instructions found in the template
Rename your spreadsheet adding your last name to the file name (Ex. AC107 Unit 7 Assignment – Prepare a Receivables Aging LastName)
Submit your completed spreadsheet
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Calculating Merchant Fees
Lockey Company uses the perpetual inventory system and allows customers to use two credit
cards in charging purchases. With the Oliver Bank Card, a 4% service charge for credit card
sales is assessed. The second credit card that Lockey accepts is the Cooper Card. Cooper
assesses a 2.5% charge on sales for using its card.
November
8
Sold merchandise for $6,000 (that had cost $4,434) and accepted the customer’s Olivers’s Bank
Card.
12
Sold merchandise for $5,600 (that had cost $3,629) and accepted the customer’s Cooper Card.
Prepare journal entries to record the above selected credit card transactions of Lockey
Company. (Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar amount.)
No
1
2
3
4
Date
General Journal
Debit
Credit
Direct Write off Method journal entries
Barlow Company applies the direct write-off method in accounting for uncollectible
accounts.
March
11 Barlow determines that it cannot collect $9,900 of its accounts receivable from its customer Loggan
Company.
29 Loggan Company unexpectedly pays its account in full to Barlow Company. Barlow records its
recovery of this bad debt.
Prepare journal entries to record the above selected transactions of Barlow.
No
1
2
3
Date
General Journal
Debit
Credit
Write off using the Allowance method
At year-end (December 31), Kneller Company estimates its bad debts as 0.60% of its annual
credit sales of $919,000. Kneller records its Bad Debts Expense for that estimate. On the
following February 1, Kneller decides that the $460 account of M Monamy is uncollectible
and writes it off as a bad debt. On June 5, Monamy unexpectedly pays the amount
previously written off.
Prepare the journal entries for these transactions using the allowance method.
No
1
2
3
4
Date
General Journal
Debit
Credit
Aging Receivables
Wright Company estimates uncollectible accounts using the allowance method at December 31. It
prepared the following aging of receivables analysis.
Days Past Due
Accounts receivable
Percent uncollectible
Total
645,500
0 1-30
411,000 105000
1%
2%
31-60
61-90
over 90
51500
33,000 45000
5%
7%
10%
a. Complete the below table to calculate the estimated balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts using
the aging of accounts receivable method.
b. Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a . Assume the
unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $5,100 credit.
c. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expense using the estimate from part a . Assume the
unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $1,600 debit.
Accounts
Receivable
$
Not due:
1 to 30:
31 to 60:
61 to 90:
Over 90:
Percent
Uncollectible (%)
%
x
x
x
x
x
=
=
=
=
=
Estimated balance of allowance for uncollectibles
credit
= debit or credit?
Prepare the adjusting entry to record Bad Debts Expense using the estimate from part a . Assume the
unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $5,100 credit.
Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expense using the estimate from part a. Assume the
unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $1,600 debit.
No
1
2
Date
General Journal
Debit
Credit
General instructions for writing the final report:
Please use your own words don’t copy and paste
Please use keyboard don’t use handwriting
The word limit is 3000-4000.words
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
I want answer with APA reference and references at least 10
#I sent the tasks I trained on and the training department (The cooperative training and Alumni Office)
#I also sent my information and photos of my work to support the final report
#After finishing the report file, I want to make another small presentation file about the training. I have sent the file
#I also sent you some pictures to support the report
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form No 4- Internship Report Cover Page
Student`s name:
Student`s ID #:
Training Organization:
Trainee Department:
Field Instructor Name:
Field Instructor Signature:
Course Title:
CRN:
Internship Start Date:
Internship End Date:
Academic Year/Semester:
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Total Training Hours /280
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained /30
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Academic Report Guideline(Co-op)
(please do not include this text in the final report, just follow its guidelines and
use the cover page above)
The report should be submitted within two weeks after you finish your Co-op training Program.
In addition, the report should be approximately 3000 – 4000, single –spaced and consider taking the
following format
General instructions for writing the final report:
The report must be written in English language.
The word limit is 3000-4000.
If the report word count is not within the required word limit, marks will be deducted.
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Plagiarism or copying from other sources will result in ZERO marks.
This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This
includes filling your information on the cover page.
Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool. Late submission will result in ZERO marks
being awarded.
First Page
The first page should display the student’s full name, internship start and finish dates, working hours per
week, company/institution name, and the cover page.
The field instructor should sign on the first page.
A Brief Executive Summary of the Internship
A one-page summary of the company/institution and a short account of the major activities carried out
during the internship period.
Acknowledgment
To allow the student to express her/his thankful and gratitude to individuals (such as: field instructor,
academic supervisor, colleagues…etc.) who help them in carrying out and completing her/his training
journey. This part will aid the students to learn basic elements of academic writing. To express their
appreciation in a concise and professional manner.
Table of Contents
Contents of the report with page numbers, list of tables, and list of figures.
Introduction
A brief of the report. The Aim of the report.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Chapter 1: Description of the company
This section should answer the following questions:
What is the full title of the company/institution?
Give a brief history of the company, full mailing address and relevant weblinks
What is the type of ownership of the company/institution?
State the main shareholders and their shares.
What is the sector that the company/institution operates in?
Specify the products and services produced and offered to its customers/clients.
Who are regarded as the customers/clients of your internship company (consider the end users, retailers,
other manufacturers, employees,etc.)?
Provide an organization chart of the company, along with information on the number of employees.
Provide a list of functions performed by different departments/divisions in the internship organization.
Provide an overview off the production system or service procedure (what are the resources, inputs,
outcomes, andconstraints?)
Provide a process chart of a major product and/or service.
The following questions can be classified as your major fit (Finance, Accounting, Ecommerce and
Management).
• What kind accounting/finance/IT//quality/marketing standards and principles are used in the
organization?
• Discuss telecommunication technologies (Database, Instant Messenger, Networking, Ecommerce tools)
used in the company.
• Describe the quality planning and control activities in the internship organization.
• Describe the quality control activities throughout the life cycle of the product/service groups
• What kind of financial analysis and decision-making methods are used by corporate treasurers and
financial managers in the internship organization?
• What types of marketing, selling, and human resources analysis are performed (cost system, evaluation
of consumers, needs, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy)?
Chapter 2: Internship activities
This is the main body of your report. During the internship period, the focus of the training may on the
following types of analysis and questions. You do not have to answer all the questions in the list: •
Describe your working conditions and functions, such as: Who is your supervisor (include his/her name
and his/her position); other team members or co-workers and what their functions are to complement
yours.
• Provide a detailed description about the department(s) that the trainee did her/his training with them.
Adding all sub-divisions for this department(s) if it is available. Student can add to this description a
supported chart.
• Detailed descriptions about all tasks and activities that the trainee did them during her/his training
period.
• Gained skills and how they added value to your work
• Other tasks that are not related to the trainee’s major that done by her/him at the company should be
included in this chapter as well.
• What types of incentives did you get as a trainee to be more proactive and productive?
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
• Describe what kind of working documents and analysis you did there and what experiences you have
gained throughout yourtraining. Provide examples of your work.
• A comparison between theory (things you have learned in the classroom) and practice (things you did or
observed at the company) must be made and highlighted. In this section the student can add a supported
table includes which academic course (s) (course title and code) helped to perform training tasks. For
example, two columns; the first one shows the course name and second column shows the tasks
performed and related to this course.
• Show some work samples that you have encountered/conducted at the company through graphs,
pictures, data, drawings, or design calculations and include them in your report.
• Lessons learnt (what the overall benefits gained from the training program)
Chapter 3: Recommendations
• Advantageous that helped the student in completing the training program.
• Disadvantageous and challenges that faced the student and how he/she did overcome them.
• Recommendations to improve training program in the college.
• Recommendation for the training company. Conclusion Sum up and summary of the training
experience. Reference If it is needed Appendix (option) This will help the instructor to have a background
about the trainee and his/her previous experiences. Also, it helps the students in writing their CVs for
future job application especially for fresh graduates who do not have previous practical experiences.
• Basic information (name, city, contact details…etc.).
• Job objectives.
• Academic qualifications.
• Practical experiences.
• Skills this will help the instructor to have a background about the trainee and his/her previous
experiences
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code:
Student’s ID Number:
Semester:
CRN:
Academic Year: 144 /144 H
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Level of Marks:
Secondary address separator
Secondary address
Text
Text
Text
Text
Thank You
I need the attached in a PowerPoint sheet as a presentation up to 15 pages only
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Navigating Organizational Change: Strategies for Effective Implementation
Qutaiba Iqgaider
Dr. Caze
ORG 6011
Cali Miramar University
10/07/2023
2
Navigating Organizational Change: Strategies for Effective Implementation
Introduction
Organizational change is an integral aspect of today’s business world. In a time
characterized by changing market conditions, technological advancements and evolving
customer expectations companies must constantly adapt to remain competitive and resilient
(Virili & Ghiringhelli, 2021). The ability to navigate and execute change effectively can make
the difference, between thriving and stagnating. This paper aims to explore the strategies that
drive organizational change implementation. It explores the importance of these strategies and
how they can be applied in real world situations. As the business landscape becomes increasingly
intricate, understanding and utilizing these strategies becomes essential for organizations not
only to survive but to thrive amidst the challenges and opportunities brought about by change.
Defining Organizational Change
Organizational change is a multifaceted process that aims to modify elements of an
organization, such, as its structure, processes, culture or strategies. The primary objectives
behind this process are to enhance performance and address organizational pressures (Ojogiwa &
Qwabe, 2021). It signifies a shift in how an organization functions, adapts to market dynamics
and positions itself for the future. The scope of change is extensive and covers various aspects.
Firstly, there are changes that involve modifying the hierarchy reporting lines and departmental
configurations within the organization. These changes might include mergers, acquisitions or
restructuring efforts designed to improve efficiency and align with goals.
Secondly, there are initiatives for improving processes that often form part of change
endeavors. Organizations frequently undertake these initiatives to streamline workflows,
3
eliminate bottlenecks and enhance efficiency (Ojogiwa & Qwabe, 2021). Such changes can
entail implementing technologies, revising workflows or reengineering business processes.
Thirdly cultural transformation plays a role in organizational change. It entails shifting the
values, beliefs and behaviors that define an organization’s culture.
Cultural change may be motivated by a desire to nurture innovation, customer centricity,
inclusivity or other cultural attributes that align, with the organization’s vision. Lastly another
aspect of change is reorientation. When faced with changing market dynamics or competitive
pressures, companies may undertake change initiatives. This entails redefining the company’s
mission, vision and strategic goals to stay current and competitive, in their industry.
Challenges in Change Implementation
Implementing change, within an organization can be complex process often accompanied
by obstacles. One of the challenges is employee resistance (Vuksanović Herceg et al., 2021).
Change, whether it’s gradual or revolutionary tends to bring about a sense of uncertainty.
Employees may exhibit resistance towards change due to fears of the unknown concerns about
how it will impact their roles or the potential disruption it may cause to their established routines.
Resistance to change can take forms ranging from resistance like decreased morale or
productivity to more active forms such as voicing objections or even work stoppages. It is crucial
for the success of any change initiative to recognize and address this resistance.
Leadership plays a crucial role in navigating these challenges. Leaders must not only
champion the proposed changes but also create a supportive environment that encourages
acceptance and cooperation among employees (Nnaji & Karakhan, 2020). They should clearly
and transparently communicate the reasoning, behind the change, its benefits and the long-term
4
vision associated with it. Furthermore, leaders should actively listen by seeking feedback and
addressing any concerns raised by employees. This open communication approach fosters and
ensures that employee perspectives are valued throughout the change process. Getting employees
involved in the decision-making and planning stages can make a difference, in reducing
resistance because it gives them a feeling of ownership over the changes.
Moreover, providing training and resources to help employees adjust to processes or
technologies introduced during the change can significantly minimize resistance (Nnaji &
Karakhan, 2020). When employees feel well prepared and supported, they are more inclined to
embrace change, with a positive mindset. Therefore, while challenges naturally arise during the
implementation of change, effective leadership that prioritizes communication, engagement and
employee support can help overcome these obstacles. By addressing resistance and fostering a
culture of adaptability, organizations can enhance their chances of successfully implementing
change.
Change Management Models
In the realm of organizational change, several models and frameworks have been created
to assist organizations in navigating the process of planning and implementing change initiatives
(Harrison et al., 2021). Among these models, Lewin’s Change Management Model and Kotter’s 8
Step Process have gained recognition, for their effectiveness in facilitating change
implementation. Lewin’s Change Management Model is widely regarded as a framework for
comprehending and managing change. This model consists of three stages; unfreezing, moving
and refreezing. During the unfreezing stage, organizations acknowledge the necessity for change
and strive to create a sense of urgency among stakeholders (Harrison et al., 2021). It involves
5
dismantling existing mindsets, routines and processes to prepare for the changes. Throughout this
phase, leaders and change agents aid individuals in comprehending why change is imperative
and what it entails.
Once the organization has embraced the need for change it progresses into the moving
stage. This phase encompasses carrying out the changes and it may involve devising processes,
introducing technology advancements or modifying structures. Effective communication plays a
crucial role during this stage to ensure that employees grasp their roles in driving the change
process (Harrison et al., 2021). The last phase, known as refreezing focuses on solidifying the
changes and integrating them into the organization’s culture permanently. It involves reinforcing
the behaviors and processes to ensure they become the way of doing things. During this stage,
leaders play a role, in grounding the changes in the organization’s culture and ensuring their
longevity.
Kotter’s 8 Step Process is another regarded model for managing change (Harrison et al.,
2021). It provides a framework that emphasizes creating a sense of urgency, building a team and
ingraining changes into the organizational culture. In Kotter’s model context, creating a sense of
urgency involves helping stakeholders understand why change is necessary and what could
happen if no action is taken. This step aims to mobilize support for the change initiative.
Building a coalition team highlights the importance of assembling a group of leaders and change
agents who are fully committed to driving forward with the change effort (Harrison et al., 2021).
This coalition collaborates to communicate the vision for change, involve employees and
navigate any obstacles that arise. These models for managing change provide guidance, for
organizations embarking on change journeys. Organizations can improve their prospects of
implementing change by adopting these methods. This involves acknowledging the need, for
6
change from the start and ensuring that new behaviors and processes are seamlessly integrated
into the organizational culture, for long term effectiveness.
Leadership in Change Initiatives
Effective leadership plays a vital role in implementing organizational change. Leader’s
act as the guiding force for navigating the complexities and obstacles that come with change
(Sambhalwal & Kaur, 2023). Their role encompasses aspects that are vital to achieving favorable
outcomes. First and foremost, leaders driving change must effectively communicate a vision.
This vision should clearly articulate the reasons for change, the desired end result and how both
the organization and its employees will benefit from it. By communicating this vision clearly
employees can understand the purpose behind the change and develop a sense of ownership and
commitment.
In addition to communication, change leaders have an impact on inspiring and motivating
employees throughout the change process (Sambhalwal & Kaur, 2023). They need to instill a
sense of purpose by aligning roles and contributions with the objectives of the change initiative.
Through their enthusiasm and conviction, leaders can inspire employees to embrace the changes
with a positive mindset. Moreover, effective change leaders possess qualities such, as
transparency, empathy and adaptability. Transparency involves sharing information while
addressing concerns honestly about both the advantages and challenges associated with the
proposed changes.
Understanding and acknowledging the emotions and concerns of employees is a part of
empathy. It creates an environment where their perspectives are valued. Being adaptable is
crucial because change initiatives often bring challenges and leaders need to be flexible, in their
7
approach ready to adjust strategies as needed. Leading by example is also an important aspect of
change leadership. When leaders demonstrate the desired behaviors and attitudes associated with
the change, they provide an example for others to follow (Sambhalwal & Kaur, 2023). Moreover,
showing commitment, to the change initiative through actions and decisions reinforces its
importance and credibility.
Communication and Employee Engagement
Effective communication plays an important role in change acting as the linchpin that
holds the change initiative together (Schafer et al., 2021). It is vital to have consistent
communication to ensure that employees are well-informed involved and aligned with the
change’s objectives. Employees should understand the reasons behind the change, how it directly
impacts their roles and responsibilities and the expected benefits. This knowledge empowers
them to adapt confidently and with clarity to the evolving business environment.
Furthermore, actively engaging employees is a catalyst for implementing change. By
involving them in decision-making processes, addressing their concerns and seeking their input
we foster a sense of ownership and commitment towards the change. When employees feel that
their opinions matter and their viewpoints are valued they are more likely to support and
participate in driving the change effort (Schafer et al., 2021). This engagement not only
facilitates a smoother transition but also increases the chances of sustaining long-term change as
employees become advocates for the new direction. In essence, effective change management
relies on both communication and engaged employees. Strong communication establishes a
foundation, while engaged employees provide momentum by transforming a transition into an
opportunity, for growth and development.
8
Cultural Alignment and Adaptability
Achieving cultural alignment plays a vital role in the success of change initiatives. It
involves reshaping the organization’s culture to ensure that it aligns with the desired changes, in
values, behaviors and norms (Naslund & Kale, 2020). A culture that embraces new the direction
not only facilitates smoother transitions but also sustains the change in the long-run. This
alignment requires an effort to communicate and integrate the principles of change into the
organization. Moreover, organizational adaptability and flexibility are critical attributes when
navigating through change. Challenges and unexpected obstacles are almost inevitable to arise
during change initiatives. Organizations that can effectively pivot and adjust their strategies
when necessary are better equipped to overcome these hurdles. This adaptability enables
responses, to changing circumstances and ensures that the change initiative remains on track
even in the face of unforeseen challenges.
Technology and Data-Driven Decision-Making
In the changing world of organizational transformation, technology and data have
become crucial allies (Abdel Rahman, 2023). These two pillars not only improve the
effectiveness of change initiatives but also enable decision-making based on data, which is vital,
for achieving successful outcomes. Data driven decision-making lies at the core of change
management. Organizations can utilize data to identify areas in need of change, monitor
initiatives progress and make informed adjustments based on empirical evidence. By employing
data analytics and metrics organizations gain insights into the effectiveness of their change
strategies enabling them to refine their approaches for successful results.
9
Furthermore, technology tools play an important role in supporting change efforts. They
facilitate communication among stakeholders, collaboration within teams and enhance project
management throughout the process (Abdel Rahman, 2023). Tools like project management
software, collaboration platforms and data analytics software empower organizations to
streamline their change efforts, while ensuring alignment and informed participation from all
team members. In today’s evolving business environment where change is constantly combining
technology with data, decision-making empowers organizations not only to adapt but also to
thrive. This beneficial relationship guarantees that initiatives, for change are based on data,
guided by efficiencies and ultimately, achieve their intended objectives successfully.
Sustaining Change
Effectively implementing change is a significant achievement and it holds equal
significance to ensure the longevity of that change. It is crucial not only to perceive change as a
one-time occurrence but as an ongoing process that demands constant vigilance and adjustment
(Alam, 2022). To ensure the effectiveness and alignment of changes with evolving goals,
organizations need to establish mechanisms for monitoring and evaluation. These mechanisms
can come in the form of feedback loops, performance metrics and periodic reviews. Feedback
loops allow organizations to gather input from employees and stakeholders providing insights
into the impact of the change and identifying areas that may need attention or adjustment.
Performance metrics serve as benchmarks that enable organizations to track progress and
measure the success of their change initiatives (Alam, 2022).
Periodic reviews, whether conducted internally or with expert’s assistance offer
opportunities to assess the effectiveness of change efforts. These reviews can reveal both aspects
10
of the change and areas that may need refinement. By making data-informed decisions about
adjustments and improvements based on these reviews, organizations can ensure that their
changes remain sustainable and aligned with their long-term objectives. Therefore, sustaining
change requires vigilance, adaptability and a commitment, to improvement. Companies that
adopt this approach not only guarantee lasting advantages from their initial transformation efforts
but also position themselves for ongoing prosperity, in a dynamic and ever-changing corporate
environment (Alam, 2022).
Conclusion
In conclusion, in todays paced business world it is crucial to have the skills and strategies
to effectively navigate through organizational changes. This paper emphasizes the importance of
a multifaceted approach that includes strategies, visionary leadership, open-communication,
cultural alignment, flexibility and utilizing technology and data strategically. Furthermore,
implementing change is not the end of the journey; it is equally important to sustain it.
Organizations should commit to monitoring and evaluation by gathering feedback using metrics
and conducting periodic reviews. This ensures that the change remains relevant and effective in
the long-run. By adopting these strategies and following best practices, organizations can not
only thrive amidst changes, but also position themselves as adaptable entities capable of seizing
opportunities that come with change in a changing business environment.
11
References
Abdel-Rahman, M. (2023). Advanced Cybersecurity Measures in IT Service Operations and
Their Crucial Role in Safeguarding Enterprise Data in a Connected World. Eigenpub
Review of Science and Technology, 7(1), 138-158.
Alam, A. (2022). Investigating sustainable education and positive psychology interventions in
schools towards achievement of sustainable happiness and wellbeing for 21st century
pedagogy and curriculum. ECS Transactions, 107(1), 19481.
Harrison, R., Fischer, S., Walpola, R. L., Chauhan, A., Babalola, T., Mears, S., & Le-Dao, H.
(2021). Where do models for change management, improvement and implementation
meet? A systematic review of the applications of change management models in
healthcare. Journal of healthcare leadership, 85-108.
Naslund, D., & Kale, R. (2020). Is agile the latest management fad? A review of success factors
of agile transformations. International Journal of Quality and Service Sciences, 12(4),
489-504.
Nnaji, C., & Karakhan, A. A. (2020). Technologies for safety and health management in
construction: Current use, implementation benefits and limitations, and adoption
barriers. Journal of Building Engineering, 29, 101212.
Ojogiwa, O. T., & Qwabe, B. R. (2021). Leveraging on the management of organisational
cultural change for an improved change outcome in the Nigerian public health
sector. African Journal of Governance and Development, 10(1), 61-79.
12
Sambhalwal, P., & Kaur, R. (2023). Shifting Paradigms In Managing Organizational Change:
The Evolving Role Of Hr. Journal of Namibian Studies: History Politics Culture, 33,
2048-2061.
Schafer, J. A., Varano, S. P., Galli, P. M., & Ford, T. (2021). Police supervisor attitudes toward
organizational change. Journal of Crime and Justice, 44(3), 258-274.
Virili, F., & Ghiringhelli, C. (2021). Uncertainty and emerging tensions in organizational
change: A grounded theory study on the orchestrating role of the change
leader. Sustainability, 13(9), 4776.
I just want to do three parts, which are
1) (A/V Requirements (answer their question and provide information and details of the A/V company you work with at your resort.).
2) ( DMC Services: In the Schedule of Events, they are requesting DMC Services. What DMC does your hotel/resort work with and give an overview of the services of your DMC. Please don’t confuse your DMC with our local DMOs ).
3) Answer the additional questions at the end of the Cvent RFP. (You will find the questions at the end of the PDF file.)
This is an example of RFP you can take a look
(RFP ABOUT WALT DISNEY WORLD) In Orlando
Good afternoon! I’m having some trouble with a writing assignment, and I could use some help please. I have chosen an organization and I’ve written part of the introduction. Attached are the instructions for the assignment. Please let me know if you have any questions. Thanks in advance
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
(Cover page)
2
Introduction
Welcome, new members! This handbook was developed to provide you with essential
information about our organization. The Environmental Defense Fund (EDF) is a nonprofit
organization, developed over fifty years ago, dedicated to making a positive impact on various
environmental challenges across the globe. The EDF currently consists of over three million
members, including over a thousand scientists, economists, lawyers, and policy experts. The
EDF is committed to initiatives such as reducing carbon emissions and methane pollution,
slowing and reversing the negative impacts of global warming, developing sustainable access to
clean water, providing climate resilient food systems, and transitioning to renewable energy
sources.
Our organization has developed strategic initiatives in thirty countries, working
internationally to create a cleaner, healthier, more sustainable Earth. The EDF works in Europe,
China, India, and the United States. Knowledge of appropriate interpersonal communication
skills and understanding key differences in the context of cross-cultural communication is
particularly important as the EDF is a multinational organization. Members of the EDF are
expected to support our initiatives by conducting themselves in a manner that reflects our
organizational mission and values. Members must engage in ethical decision making to uphold
the integrity of our organization. Members are also expected to make environmentally conscious
decisions, serving as role models for others.
Effective communication is critical to our organizational mission, which requires
collaboration with policymakers, leaders, and people all over the world. Our organization values
diversity and inclusion. Members must communicate inclusively in diverse and multicultural
environments. Interpersonal skills are essential to having successful interactions with colleagues,
partners, members, volunteers, sponsors, and other individuals. Interpersonal skills can facilitate
effective communication, efficient teamwork, collaboration, and innovation. Knowledge of
interpersonal skills can enable you to be successful in your role at EDF, as you will be working
with diverse teams to develop innovative ideas and solutions involving environmental
challenges. We understand that navigating multicultural environments can be a challenge due to
cultural differences, particularly in the context of communication. We encourage you to utilize
this handbook as a resource, as it provides valuable information regarding the following topics:
1. Interpersonal Skills
2. Initial Interactions with Colleagues, Customers, and Clients
3. Verbal and Nonverbal Communication
4. Intercultural Communication
5. Interpersonal Conflicts
For more information about our organization and our impact, you may view EDF’s 2022 impact
report at https://impact2022.edf.org.
3
Additionally, please visit https://vision2030.edf.org/ to learn more about EDF’s 2030 initiative.
I need the SPSS output for the attached data. I have filled the questionnaire and I have the final answers in excel. I just need you to run on SPSS and provide me with the tables/graphs for MEAN, STD DEVIATION, Correlation and regression analysis and ANOVA tables only.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Age
Gender
Education level Employee retention
Retention rate is high atCompany
the organization
has Few
lowerpeople
involuntary
leave the
turnover
organization
rate ea
over 55
Male
over 55
Male
45-54
Female
45-54
Male
35-44
Male
Below 25 years Male
Below 25 years Female
25-34
Female
25-34
Female
over 55
Male
35-44
Female
45-54
Male
over 55
Male
35-44
Female
35-44
Female
35-44
Female
35-44
Female
25-34
Male
25-34
Male
25-34
Male
Below 25 years Female
Below 25 years Female
45-54
Female
45-54
Male
45-54
Female
45-54
Male
35-44
Male
25-34
Female
35-44
Female
35-44
Male
35-44
Female
35-44
Male
25-34
Female
Below 25 years Female
25-34
Female
25-34
Male
25-34
Female
25-34
Female
35-44
Male
25-34
Male
35-44
Female
35-44
Female
25-34
Male
35-44
Male
25-34
Female
25-34
Male
over 55
Male
over 55
Female
Diploma
Degree
Masters
Degree
Diploma
Masters
Secondary
Masters
Degree
Diploma
Degree
Masters
Degree
Degree
Degree
Masters
Diploma
Diploma
Degree
Degree
Degree
Diploma
Masters
Masters
Degree
Degree
Diploma
Diploma
Masters
Secondary
Masters
Degree
Degree
Degree
Diploma
Degree
Masters
Degree
Diploma
Degree
Masters
Diploma
Secondary
Degree
Degree
Degree
Degree
Diploma
strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
strongly agree
neutral
strongly agree
agree
agree
strongly agree
strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree
agree
strongly agree
neutral
neutral
strongly agree
strongly disagree
strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
disagree
disagree
agree
agree
strongly disagree
strongly disagree
strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
strongly agree
agree
agree
strongly agree Strongly agree
strongly agree Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
disagree
Strongly disagree
agree
neutral
agree
disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
neutral
strongly agree neutral
strongly agree agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
disagree
neutral
agree
disagree
Strongly disagree
disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
Strongly disagree
neutral
strongly agree neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
strongly agree Strongly agree
strongly agree Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
disagree
agree
disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
strongly agree Strongly agree
strongly agree Strongly agree
strongly agree Strongly disagree
agree
disagree
agree
disagree
45-54
over 55
Male
Female
Degree
Masters
neutral
strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Compensation
Training and Dev
Employee Management
retention isEmployees
crucial
addresses
part
My
getof
employee
organization
market
HR policy
There
competitive
concerns
inis
offers
the
non-monetary
Employees
company
bonuses
tobasic
ensure
salary
The
each
have
workers
benefits
salary
year
room
Igrowth
stay
like
complete
to negotiate
gifts,
longer
is objective
Ivouchers
my
do all
for
courses
assigned
improved
and
every
insatisfactory
time
holiday
courses
pay based
season
and on
mypa
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly disagree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly disagree
agree
disagree Strongly agree
disagree neutral
neutral
neutral
neutral
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
disagree agree
strongly disagree
disagree neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
strongly disagree
disagree agree
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
agree
neutral
strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
disagree disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
disagree disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly disagree
disagree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
disagree neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
disagree agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
disagree neutral
neutral
disagree agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
neutral
strongly disagree
agree
disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
neutral
strongly disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
neutral
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
disagree neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
strongly disagree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
disagree disagree agree
Strongly disagree
disagree agree
disagree
agree
disagree disagree neutral
agree
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
strongly disagree
neutral
agree
agree
disagree agree
agree
neutral
disagree strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly disagree
strongly disagree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
disagree agree
strongly disagree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Job satisfaction
Promotions
Training and
Thedevelopment
company
Trainings
organizes
has are
aEmployees
positive
conducted
regularimpact
The
trainings
areby
management
allowed
known
on to
my
There
sharpen
to
performance
industry
have
isencourages
motivation
Concerns
our
engagements
leaders
skillswork-life
in
raised
More
thewith
company
employees
bybalance
employees
each
In my
other
and
company
perform
workers
are considered
well
there
areand
involved
is career
are
in variou
gifte
in
pro
neutral
Strongly disagree
disagree disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree neutral
agree
neutral
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree agree
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
disagree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
disagree
neutral
agree
agree
disagree neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
disagree disagree agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
disagree Strongly disagree
disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree disagree neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree disagree neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree disagree neutral
Strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
neutral
Strongly disagree
neutral
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
neutral
neutral
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
disagree neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
disagree agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
Strongly disagree
agree
neutral
agree
disagree neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
disagree agree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Promotions
The company
There
increases
is a clear
Responsibilities
salaries
succession
Promotion
of those
are
paths
promoted
assigned
isinintegral
the company
objectively
part of management
and in termsand
of seniority
policymakers
disagree neutral
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree neutral
agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
disagree disagree agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
disagree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree neutral
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
disagree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly disagree
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
disagree disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
disagree neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
disagree agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
disagree neutral
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
disagree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
disagree neutral
agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree
agree
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
neutral
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
disagree agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
Strongly agree
disagree Strongly agree
agree
agree
agree
neutral
disagree Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly agree
agree
neutral
Strongly agree
agree
Strongly disagree
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
disagree
agree
Strongly disagree
neutral
neutral
agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
Strongly disagree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Strongly agree
Appendix II: Research Questionnaire
Part A: Demography Characteristic
Tick where applicable.
1. What is your age in complete years?
a. Below 25 years…………. [ ]
b. 25-34 years……………… [ ]
c. 35-44 years……………… [ ]
d. 45-54 years………………. [ ]
e. Over 55 years……………. [ ]
2. What’s gender?
a. Male [ ]
b. Female [ ]
3. What is your highest education level?
a. Secondary [ ]
b. Diploma [ ]
c. Bachelors Degree [ ]
d. Masters Degree [ ]
PART B: Empirical data section
With respect to questions in this section, please indicate your level of agreement with the
statements.
Levels of Agreement
Strongly
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Disagree
(1)
Strongly
Agree
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
4. Employee retention
LEVELS OF AGREEMENT
a
Retention rate is high at the organization
b
Company has lower involuntary turnover rate
c
Few people leave the organization each year
d
Employee retention is crucial part of HR policy in the company
e
Management addresses employee concerns to ensure workers
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
stay longer
5. Compensation
LEVELS OF AGREEMENT
a
Employees get market competitive basic salary
b
My organization offers bonuses each year
c
There is non-monetary benefits like gifts, vouchers
every holiday season
d
Employees have room to negotiate for improved pay based on
productivity
e
The salary growth is objective and satisfactory
6. Training and development
LEVELS OF AGREEMENT
a
I complete my courses in time
b
I do all assigned courses and my attendance rate is high
c
Training and development has a positive impact on my
performance
d
The company organizes regular trainings to sharpen our skills
e
Trainings are conducted by known industry leaders
7. Job satisfaction
LEVELS OF AGREEMENT
a
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Employees are allowed to have engagements with each
other
b
The management encourages work-life balance
c
There is motivation in the company and workers are
involved in decision making
d
Concerns raised by employees are considered in various
management decisions
e
More employees perform well and are gifted periodically
8. Promotion opportunities
LEVELS OF AGREEMENT
a
In my company there is career progression opportunities
b
The company increases salaries of those promoted
c
There is a clear succession paths in the company
d
Responsibilities are assigned objectively and in terms of
seniority
e
Promotion is integral part of management and policymakers
THANK YOU FOR YOUR PARTICIPATION.
Please read the attached Gaied case, and summarize it into a 4 to 5 pages summary. No Plagiarism. Use only the uploaded documents and cite everything. Tip based on grade given.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Ma er of Gaied
Ne York S a e Ta Appeal Trib.
2012 NY Slip Op 09108 [101 AD3d 1492]
December 27, 2012
Appella e Di ision, Third Depar men
P blished b Ne York S a e La Repor ing B rea p rs an o J diciar La
431.
As correc ed hro gh Wednesda , Febr ar 6, 2013
In he Ma er of John Gaied, Pe i ioner, Ne York S a e Ta Appeal Trib nal e
al., Re ponden .
[*1] Hodgson R ss, LLP, Alban (Timo h P. Noonan of co nsel), for pe i ioner.
Eric T. Schneiderman, A orne General, Alban (Rober M. Goldfarb of co nsel), for
Commissioner of Ta a ion and Finance, responden .
Lah inen, J. Proceeding p rs an o CPLR ar icle 78 (ini ia ed in his Co r p rs an o
Ta La
2016) o re ie a de ermina ion of responden Ta Appeals Trib nal hich
s s ained a deficienc of personal income a imposed nder Ta La ar icle 22.
An a di of pe i ioner’s nonresiden and par – ear residen Ne York S a e a re rns
res l ed in responden Depar men of Ta a ion and Finance iss ing a no ice of deficienc of
personal income a es for he ears 2001, 2002 and 2003. The Depar men concl ded ha ,
d ring s ch ime, pe i ioner had spen more han 183 da s in Ne York and main ained a
permanen place of abode in he s a e. Th s, he as considered b
he Depar men o be a
s a or residen for p rposes of Ta La
605 (b) (1) (B). Pe i ioner challenged he
assessmen , claiming ha he did no main ain a permanen place of abode a he hree- ni
apar men proper
he had p rchased in 1999 in he Boro gh of S a en Island. Follo ing a
hearing, an Adminis ra i e La J dge pheld he assessmen . Responden Ta Appeals
Trib nal ini iall re ersed ha decision b , pon rearg men , he Trib nal, i h one member
dissen ing, re ersed i self and pheld he assessmen . This proceeding ens ed.
Ta La
605 (b) (1) (B) defines a residen indi id al as one ” ho is no domiciled in
his s a e b
main ains a permanen place of abode in his s a e and spends in he aggrega e
more [*2] han [183] da s of he a able ear in his s a e.” Pe i ioner, ho had a home in Ne
Jerse d ring he rele an
ears, did no disp e ha for hose ears he as presen in Ne
York a his b siness for more han 183 da s. Accordingl , he iss e dis ills o he her
pe i ioner main ained a permanen place of abode in Ne York p rs an o he s a e ( ee
Ta La
605 [b] [1] [B]; ee al o 20 NYCRR 105.20 [e] [1]). In making ha de ermina ion,
a arie
of fac ors and circ ms ances ma be rele an incl ding, b
no limi ed o, he e en
o hich he person challenging he assessmen paid li ing e penses, s pplied f rni re in he
d elling, had a ke , had free and con in o s access o he d elling, recei ed isi ors here,
kep clo hing and o her personal belongings here, sed he premises for con enien access o
and from a place of emplo men , and main ained elephone and ili ser ices here in his or
her name, as ell as he her he premises ere s i able for ear-ro nd se ( ee e.g. Ma e of
Schib k Ne Yo k S a e Ta A eal T ib., 289 AD2d 718, 719-720 [2001], l di mi ed 98
NY2d 720 [2002]; Ma e of E an
Ta A eal T ib. of S a e of N.Y., 199 AD2d 840, 842
[1993]; Ma e of Smi h S a e Ta Commn., 68 AD2d 993, 994 [1979]). Pe i ioner had he
b rden of pro ing ha he deficienc assessmen as improper, and credibili
de ermina ions are i hin he pro ince of he a ing a hori
( ee Ma e of S b ban
Re o a ion Co. Ta A eal T ib. of S a e of N.Y., 299 AD2d 751, 752 [2002]). So long as
he Trib nal’s de ermina ion is s ppor ed b s bs an ial e idence, e canno s bs i
eo r
j dgmen for ha of he Trib nal ( ee e.g. Ma e of Ko nbl m Ta A eal T ib. of S a e of
N.Y., 194 AD2d 882, 883 [1993]; Ma e of Smi h S a e Ta Commn., 68 AD2d a 994).
Pe i ioner es ified ha he p rchased he S a en Island proper , hich as m ch closer
o here he orked han his Ne Jerse home, as a place for his paren s o li e and as an
in es men . He s a ed ha his paren s li ed in he firs -floor apar men and ha he
dependen
pon him for s ppor . He ackno ledged ha , d ring he rele an
ere
ears, he as a
regis ered o er in Ne York. Significan l , he Trib nal de ermined ha pe i ioner, in
addi ion o o ning he b ilding, main ained a elephone and he ili ies in his o n name a
he apar men , paid hose bills as ell as all o her e penses for he apar men , re ained
nfe ered access o he apar men , occasionall slep a he apar men , failed o es ablish ha
he kep he apar men e cl si el for his paren s, and did no pro e ha he held he proper
solel for in es men p rposes. These fac al findings b he Trib nal, some of hich ere
s rongl disp ed b pe i ioner, are none heless s ppor ed b s bs an ial e idence in he
record, and s ch fac s are s fficien o s ppor he Trib nal’s de ermina ion ha pe i ioner
main ained a permanen place of abode in Ne York as ha erm has been cons r ed and
applied nder he applicable s a
e ( ee Ta La
605 [b] [1] [B]; ee e.g. Ma e of El-
Te li Commi ione of Ta a ion & Fin., 14 AD3d 808, 810 [2005]; Ma e of Schib k
Ne Yo k S a e Ta A eal T ib., 289 AD2d a 719-720; Ma e of E an
Ta A eal T ib.
of S a e of N.Y., 199 AD2d a 842; Ma e of Smi h S a e Ta Commn., 68 AD2d a 994).
E en ho gh a con rar concl sion o ld ha e been reasonable based pon he e idence
presen ed, e are cons rained o confirm, since o r re ie is limi ed and he Trib nal’s
de ermina ion is ampl s ppor ed b
he record ( ee e.g. Ma e of Ko nbl m Ta A eal
T ib. of S a e of N.Y., 194 AD2d a 883).
The remaining arg men s ha e been considered and fo nd na ailing.
Pe ers, P.J., and Rose, J., conc r.
Malone Jr., J. (dissen ing). As s a ed b
he majori , he iss e dis ills o he her
pe i ioner “main ained a permanen place of abode” p rs an o Ta La
render him a s a or residen . Significan l , he p rpose behind he s a
pro ision is o a
605 in order o
or residence
hose ho “reall and [for] all in en s and p rposes [are] residen s of he
s a e” (Ma e of Tamagni Ta A eal T ib. of S a e of N.Y., 91 NY2d 530, 535 [1998], ce
denied 525 US 931 [1998] [in ernal q o a ion marks and ci a ion omi ed]). To ha end, “[a]
permanen place of abode means a d elling place of a permanen na re main ained b he
a pa er, he her or no o ned b s ch a pa er” (20 NYCRR 105.20 [e] [1]). “Permanen l
main ained” is defined as “doing ha e er is necessar
o con in e one’ li ing a angemen
in a par ic lar d elling place” (Ma e of El-Te li Commi ione of Ta a ion & Fin., 14
AD3d 808, 810 [2005] [in ernal q o a ion marks and ci a ion omi ed; emphasis added]).
Main aining a d elling does no necessaril eq a e o li ing or residing in s ch d elling.
Here, he record clearl es ablishes ha pe i ioner p rchased he proper
loca ed in he
Boro gh of S a en Island as bo h a place for his paren s o li e and as an in es men .
Pe i ioner’s paren s, ho li e in he firs -floor apar men , are 100% dependen
pon him for
s ppor , and pe i ioner pa s all of he e penses for heir apar men . While pe i ioner
occasionall s a ed o ernigh in he apar men , he did so onl a he req es of his paren s
hen his fa her needed help d e o a medical condi ion. There as no bed for pe i ioner hen
he s a ed here, req iring him o sleep on he co ch, nor did he lea e personal i ems here. EZ Pass records s ppor he infreq enc of pe i ioner’s o ernigh s a s in Ne York. As for he
o her apar men s in he b ilding, doc men ar e idence es ablishes ha , e cep for a shor
period of ime, hose apar men s ere ren ed, and pe i ioner claimed he ren al income on his
filed a re rns.
The circ ms ances herein differ from hose cases ci ed b
he majori
in ha pe i ioner
did no change his residence from Ne York o else here; ra her, pe i ioner has li ed in Ne
Jerse since 1994.[FN*] In addi ion, al ho gh he S a en Island residence as close o his
ork place, so as his Ne Jerse home, hich pe i ioner es ified as appro ima el a half
ho r comm e hardl
a ing b an s andard. F r hermore, as no ed in he ini ial decision
of responden Ta Appeals Trib nal, his concl sion is s ppor ed b
he fac ha , af er selling
his Ne Jerse home in 2003, pe i ioner li ed i h his ncle in Ne Jerse hile he b il an
addi ional basemen apar men for himself a he S a en Island d elling before he commenced
li ing here af er he ears rele an in his case. The mere fac ha pe i ioner kep he ke s o
he o her apar men
ni s in he d elling and lis ed ha address as he address here enan
no ices sho ld be sen does no req ire a differen res l .
Considering he p rpose of he s a
or residence pro ision and mindf l ha
e need
no defer o he agenc ‘s de ermina ion beca se he s a or lang age is nei her special nor
echnical ( ee Ma e of E an Ta A eal T ib. of S a e of N.Y., 199 AD2d 840, 841
[1993]), e find ha pe i ioner demons ra ed b clear and con incing e idence ha , d ring
he rele an
ears, he did no li e in he d elling nor did he ha e an personal residen ial
in eres in ha S a en Island proper
(com a e id.; Ma e of El-Te li Commi ione of
Ta a ion & Fin., 14 AD3d a 810; Ma e of Schib k Ne Yo k S a e Ta A eal T ib., 289
AD2d 718, 719-720 [2001], l di mi ed 98 NY2d 720 [2002]; Peo le e el. Mackall
Ba e , 278 App Di 724, 725 [1951]). Considering all of he rele an fac s, e find ha he
Trib nal’s de ermina ion ha [*3]pe i ioner main ained a permanen place of abode i hin he
meaning of Ta La
assessmen
605 o be irra ional and nreasonable, and he income a deficienc
as improper. We o ld herefore ann l he de ermina ion and gran he pe i ion.
Garr , J., conc rs. Adj dged ha he de ermina ion is confirmed, i ho
cos s, and
pe i ion dismissed.
Foo no e
Foo no e *: Pe i ioner filed Ne Jerse income a re rns for he rele an
ears.
Matter of Gaied v New York State Tax Appeals Trib.
2014 NY Slip Op 01101 [22 NY3d 592]
Feb a
18, 2014
Pigo , J.
Co
of Appeal
P bli hed b Ne Yo k S a e La Repo ing B ea p
an o J dicia
La
431.
A co ec ed h o gh Wedne da , Ap il 16, 2014
[*1]
In the Matter of John Gaied, Appellant,
v
New York State Tax Appeals Tribunal et al., Respondents.
A g ed Jan a
Ma e
16, 2014; decided Feb a
f Ga ed Ne Y
18, 2014
S a e Ta A ea T b., 101 AD3d 1492, e e ed.
**22 NY3d a 594 OPINION OF THE COURT
Pigo , J.
On hi appeal, e a e a ked o con ide Ne Yo k’ ” a
o
e iden ” e (Ta La
605 [b] [1] [B]) and, mo e pecificall , he anda d o be applied hen de e mining he he
a pe on “main ain a pe manen place of abode” in Ne Yo k. Pe i ione John Gaied
[*2]con end ha he q e ion ho ld
n on he he he main ained li ing a angemen fo
e f o e ide a he d elling. We ag ee i h pe i ione and hold ha in o de fo an
indi id al o q alif a a a o e iden , he e m be ome ba i o concl de ha he
d elling a
ili ed a he a pa e ‘ e idence.
D ing he ele an ime pe iod, pe i ione
a omo i e e ice and epai b ine
o k, a di ance of abo
a domiciled in Ne Je e . He o ned an
on S a en I land, Ne Yo k and comm ed dail
o
28 mile .
In No embe 1999, he p cha ed a m l ifamil apa men b ilding on S a en I land,
loca ed in he ame neighbo hood a hi b ine . Pe i ione e ified ha hi mo i a ion fo
acq i ing he b ilding a
in e men p ope
o-fold: a a place fo hi elde l pa en
o li e and a an
.
S a ing in 1999, pe i ione ‘ pa en li ed in a fi -floo apa men and elied on
pe i ione fo hei ppo . Pe i ione claimed hem a dependen on hi fede al, Ne Je e ,
and Ne Yo k a e n . He paid he elec ic and ga bill fo he apa men , and main ained
a elephone n mbe fo he apa men in hi name. Ho e e , he in i
ha he ne e li ed a
he apa men and did no keep an clo hing o o he pe onal effec
he e; no did he ha e
leeping accommoda ion a he apa men . While he had ke
o he apa men , he con end
ha he did no ha e nfe e ed acce . He a ed a he apa men onl on occa ion, doing o
a hi pa en ‘ eq e o a end o hei medical need . On ho e occa ion , he o ld leep on
a co ch.
Pe i ione lea ed he o he
o apa men in he b ilding o enan . D ing he ea in
q e ion, 2001 h o gh 2003, he **22 NY3d a 595 filed a fede al Sched le E, hich
epo ed income and e pen e f om en al eal e a e a ocia ed i h he p ope
. He did no ,
ho e e , p od ce eco d o b an ia e he en al income o e pen e epo ed. Ne Yo k
Ci
o e egi a ion eco d indica e ha pe i ione o ed in gene al elec ion in Ne Yo k
in 2000.
In Decembe 2003, pe i ione old hi Ne Je e
e idence in o de o a i f a la ge
2002 fede al a obliga ion. He placed hi belonging in o age and a ed i h an ncle in
Ne Je e
hile eno a ing he boile oom a he S a en I land p ope
addi ional apa men , he e he began e iding in 2004, af e he a
Fo each of he a
o make an
ea a i
ea in q e ion, pe i ione filed non e iden income a
Ne Yo k. Af e an a di , he Depa men of Ta a ion and Finance i
e.
e
n in
ed a No ice of
Deficienc indica ing ha he o ed an addi ional $253,062 in Ne Yo k S a e and Ci
income a e , pl
in e e . The Depa men de e mined ha he a a ” a
o
e iden ” of
Ne Yo k i hin he meaning of Ta La
605 (b) (1) (B) beca e he pen o e 183 da
Ne Yo k Ci and main ained a “pe manen place of abode” a he S a en I land p ope
d ing ho e ea .
Pe i ione o gh a ede e mina ion of he deficienc , conceding ha he a in Ne
Yo k Ci
mo e han 183 da
d ing each ea a i
eb
challenging he de e mina ion
in
[*3] ha he main ained a “pe manen place of abode” a he S a en I land p ope
hea ing, an Admini a i e La J dge (ALJ) i
ed a de e mina ion
. Af e a
aining he No ice
(2009 WL 2491342, 2009 NY Ta LEXIS 86 [NY S Di of Ta Appeal DTA No. 821721,
A g. 6, 2009]) and he eaf e , pe i ione filed an e cep ion.
The Ta Appeal T ib nal ini iall
e e ed he ALJ’ de e mina ion on he g o nd ha
pe i ione did “no ha e li ing q a e a hi pa en ‘ apa men ” and, he efo e, he did no
main ain a pe manen place of abode (2010 WL 2801871, *8, 2010 NY Ta LEXIS 117, *23,
a ailable a h p://
.d a.n .go /pdf/a chi e/Deci ion /821727.dec.pdf a 14 [NY S Ta
Appeal T ib DTA No. 821727, J l 8, 2010]).
The Depa men mo ed fo ea g men , con ending ha he T ib nal’ deci ion failed o
ake in o acco n p eceden ha , in o de o q alif a a a o e iden nde he Ta La ,
a **22 NY3d a 596
a pa e need no ac all d ell in he pe manen place of abode, b
need onl main ain i . Pe i ione oppo ed he mo ion.
On ea g men , he T ib nal, i h one membe di en ing, g an ed he Depa men ‘
mo ion, affi med he ALJ’ deci ion and
ained he deficienc (NY S Ta Appeal T ib
DTA No. 821727, J ne 16, 2011, a ailable a
h p://
.d a.n .go /pdf/a chi e/Deci ion /821727.2.dec.pdf). The T ib nal a ed ha i
ini ial deci ion a “an imp ope depa
e f om he lang age of he a
con olling p eceden ” and concl ded ha ” he e a a pa e ha a p ope
bjec p emi e , i i nei he nece a
e, eg la ion , and
igh o he
no app op ia e o look be ond he ph ical a pec of
he d elling place o inq i e in o he a pa e ‘
bjec i e e of he p emi e ” ( d. a 15-16).
The T ib nal ejec ed pe i ione ‘ a g men ha he p emi e m be main ained fo hi
pe onal
e, finding ha he e i “no eq i emen ha he pe i ione ac all d ell in he
abode, b
impl
ha he main ain i ” ( d. a 19). The T ib nal f
he fo nd ha pe i ione
had no e abli hed ha he p ope
a main ained e cl i el fo hi pa en ‘ e. I fo nd
ha pe i ione a ed o e nigh on occa ion o ca e fo hi fa he , li ed he add e
nde hi
name fo he
ili
and elephone bill , li ed he add e
and had nfe e ed acce
a hi on he o he apa men lea e ,
o he apa men ( ejec ing, a did he ALJ, pe i ione ‘ e imon
ha he did no ha e nfe e ed acce ).
The di en
o ld ha e affi med he T ib nal’ o iginal deci ion in pe i ione ‘ fa o . He
no ed ha he T ib nal con
ed he a
e in i o iginal deci ion “in a p ac ical manne ,
gene all
efe ing o an indi id al doing ha e e i nece a
o con in e one’ li ing
a angemen in a pa ic la d elling place” ( d. a 20).
Pe i ione b o gh hi CPLR a icle 78 p oceeding challenging he T ib nal’
de e mina ion. The Appella e Di i ion, i h o J
de e mina ion, ecogni ing ha al ho gh a “con a
ba ed pon he e idence p e en ed,” i
co
econd
ice di en ing, confi med he
concl ion o ld ha e been ea onable
a ne e hele
“con
ained o confi m, ince [ he
‘ ] e ie i limi ed and he T ib nal’ de e mina ion [ a ] ampl
ppo ed b
he
eco d” (101 AD3d 1492, 1494 [3d Dep 2012]).
The di en foc ed on he legi la i e in en of he a
o
e idence
le and no ed
ha he pa amo n inq i in de e mining he he a a pa e i main aining a
pe manen **22 NY3d a 597 place of abode in Ne Yo k ho ld be he he a a pa e
main ain “li ing a angemen ” in a pa ic la d elling place ( d. a 1495). Appl ing hi
anal i , he di en
o ld ha e fo nd ha [*4]pe i ione did no li e in he d elling o ha e
an pe onal e iden ial in e e
he e, and he T ib nal’ deci ion o hold him a a e iden
a “i a ional and n ea onable” ( d. a 1496).
Pe i ione appealed f om he Appella e Di i ion’ o de , p
an o CPLR 5601 (a).
Ta La
601 and Admini a i e Code of he Ci of Ne Yo k 11-1701 impo e,
e pec i el , Ne Yo k S a e and Ne Yo k Ci pe onal income a on a e and ci
” e iden indi id al .” An indi id al ma be a ed a a ” e iden ” in one of
fi
o a , he
one being he ob io : ha he o he i domiciled in Ne Yo k, i.e. he a pa e ‘
pe manen and p ima
home i loca ed in Ne Yo k ( ee Ta La
605 [b] [1] [A]).
The al e na i e e i fo nd in Ta La
605 (b) (1) (B), hich a e a ” a o
e iden ” o omeone ” ho i no domiciled in hi a e b main ain a pe manen place of
abode in hi
a e and pend in he agg ega e mo e han [183] da
of he a able ea in hi
a e.”
Ci
I i he econd e
ha i a i
mo e han 183 da
d ing each of he ea a i
a o
Yo k.
e he e. Pe i ione concede ha he a in Ne Yo k
e. Th , he he pe i ione i a
e iden depend on he he he main ained a pe manen place of abode in Ne
In Ma e
Co
f Ta ag
Ta A ea T b. f S a e f N.Y. (91 NY2d 530 [1998]), hi
e amined he legi la i e hi o
of he a
a
e, and no ed ha he e had been
” e e al ca e of m l imillionai e ho ac all main ain home in Ne Yo k and pend en
mon h of e e
ea in ho e home . . . b . . . claim o be non e iden ” (91 NY2d a 535,
q o ing Mem of Income Ta B ea , Bill Jacke , L 1922, ch 425). We e plained ha he
a
o
e idence p o i ion f lfil he ignifican f nc ion of a ing indi id al
” eall and [fo ] all in en and p po e . . . e iden of he a e” b
ho a e
“ha e main ained a
o ing e idence el e he e and in i on pa ing a e o a non e iden ” ( d.). “In ho ,
he a e i in ended o di co age a e a ion b Ne Yo k e iden ” (91 NY2d a 535).
The Ta La doe no define “pe manen place of abode,” b
“a d elling place of a pe manen na
o ned **22 NY3d a 598 b
o ned o lea ed b
e main ained b
he eg la ion define i a
he a pa e , he he o no
ch a pa e , [ hich] ill gene all incl de a d elling place
ch a pa e ‘
po e” (20 NYCRR 105.20 [e] [1]). The eg la ion
f he p o ide ha , b a of e ample, “a me e camp o co age, hich i
onl fo aca ion , i no a pe manen place of abode” ( d.).
i able and
ed
The Ta T ib nal ha in e p e ed “main ain a pe manen place of abode” o mean ha a
a pa e need no ” e ide” in he d elling, b
onl main ain i , o q alif a a ” a
e iden ” nde Ta La
e ie i limi ed o he he ha in e p e a ion
compo
605 (b) (1) (B). O
i h he meaning and in en of he a
e in ol ed (Ma e
fSe e
o
C
. Ta
A ea T b., 89 NY2d 1020, 1022 [1997]). We concl de he e i no a ional ba i fo ha
in e p e a ion. No abl , no he e in he a e doe i p o ide an hing o he han
he[*5]”pe manen place of abode” m
ela e o he a pa e . The legi la i e hi o
a
e, o p e en a e a ion b Ne Yo k e de
ie
ha in o de fo a a pa e o ha e main ained a pe manen place of abode in Ne Yo k,
he a pa e m
,a
ell a he eg la ion ,
of he
, him elf, ha e a e iden ial in e e in he p ope
ppo
.
Acco dingl , he j dgmen of he Appella e Di i ion ho ld be e e ed, i h co
he ma e emi ed o ha co
Appeal T ib nal fo f
, and
i h di ec ion o emand o e ponden Ne Yo k S a e Ta
he p oceeding in acco dance i h hi opinion.
Chief J dge Lippman and J dge G affeo, Read, Smi h, Ri e a and Abd -Salaam
conc .
he
J dgmen e e ed, i h co
, and ma e emi ed o he Appella e Di i ion, Thi d
Depa men , i h di ec ion o emand o e ponden Ne Yo k S a e Ta Appeal T ib nal
fo f
he p oceeding in acco dance i h he opinion he ein.
The solution should be short and simple, with easy words related to the curriculum, meet the requirements of the question, and be in a personal style, without copying or similarity, and adding references
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Chapter 7. Strategy Formation: Corporate Strategy
Textbook: Wheelen, T. L., Hunger, D., Hoffman, A. N., & Bamford, C. E.
(2014). Concepts in strategic management and business policy (14th ed.). Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN-13: 9780133126129 (print), 9780133126433 (etext)
Recommended
Andersson, H., & Janson, G. (2012). Evaluating a corporate strategy: A case study of
Länsförsäkringar. Available
via https://stud.epsilon.slu.se/4453/1/Andersson_et_al_120703.pdf
9.3. Test your knowledge (Max 100 words for every question)
Question 1
How is corporate parenting different from portfolio analysis? How is it alike? Is it a
useful concept in a global industry?
Question 2
What are the tradeoffs between an internal and an external growth strategy? Which
approach is best as an international entry strategy?
4.2 Action Required:
•
Watch the short video at the following link
4.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
•
What factors enable small business innovation?
5.2 Action Required:
•
Watch the short video at the following link
www.youtube.com/watch?v=TWh7yrOqPpo – YouTube
5.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
•
Explain the benefits of franchising to the franchisee.
Action Required:
The following table shows the questions.
Questions
True
When the location of the business is critical to its success, it may
be wise to purchase a business in another location.
It is important to develop a list of criteria that a potential business
acquisition must meet.
An important advantage of buying an existing business is the
greater likelihood that it will continue to survive and thrive in the
marketplace.
A new owner of an existing business can generally introduce
change and innovation almost as easily as if the company was a
new business start-up.
6.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
•
Answer with a tick mark or write in words which is true, and which one is false.
Action Required:
• Watch the short video at the following link:
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
•
How is the target market important to the small business
False
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Corporate Finance (FIN-201)
Due Date: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Corporate Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN-201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Answer the following questions:
Q1. What are the different ways available for the corporations to distribute income
among the shareholders? Suppose a firm promises to pay dividends of $200,000 every
year in perpetuity with 200,000 shares outstanding. Assume a discount rate of 11.1%.
What is the present value of one of the firm’s shares?
(2 marks)
Q2. What is Stock repurchase? Explain the four ways to implement stock repurchase.
(3 marks)
Q3. Calculate the rate at which a firm can grow without changing its leverage if its payout
ratio is 30%; equity outstanding at the beginning of the year is $9,500,000; and its net
income for the year is $2,000,000.
(2 marks)
Q4. What do you mean by Long term financial planning? Take an example and explain the
sales percentage model of financial planning.
(3 marks)
Answers:
write the power point in point form, small points instead of the written paragraphs.Use bullets.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
SUPPLY CHAIN DISRUPTION:
PRATT & WHITNEY ENGINE
RECALL CASE STUDY
Student name
Course code
Date of submission
Lecturer name
INTRODUCTION-FUTURE SALES JEOPARDY
• Pratt & Whitney’s latest engine recall jeopardizes future sales and necessitates a detailed analysis of
possible barriers. Apart from the direct financial consequences, a product recall involves expenses related
to production, shipping, and potential legal repercussions. Navigating the competitive landscape and
predicting how competitors will respond to the Pratt & Whitney product recall is equally crucial. This
thorough analysis is critical to preserving the company’s standing in the market and ensuring future sales
success (Kähkönen & Patrucco, 2022).
• Recall-related complications include financial ramifications and dangers to competition. Pratt & Whitney
must take the initiative to control these costs and foresee the reactions of its rivals if it hopes to
maintain a strong market position and protect its future sales.https://www.wsi.com/business/airlines/rtxengine-recall-to-cut-profit-by-up-to-3-5-billion-73f5f41e
SUPPLIER SELECTION STRATEGY
Expanding the Supply Chain for Pratt & Whitney can
enhance its supply chain for future products by
systematically selecting and assessing potential
suppliers. The subsequent scorecard guarantees a
thorough analysis, making it possible to identify
suppliers who are performing well; hence, the
Weighted Supplier Evaluation Scorecard:
Supply Chain Risk Management’s Significance
Choosing suppliers well reduces a number of supply
chain risks:
• Operational Risks: Evaluate the operational
capacity of suppliers to prevent disruptions.
• Developing Criteria: Establish necessary standards
(e.g., quality, reliability, cost-effectiveness).
• Financial Risks: Assess the stability of the
company’s finances to avert potential supplier
insolvency (Monczka et al., 2021).
• Weight Assignment: According to each criterion’s
criticality, assign weights.
• Quality Risks: Prioritize quality standards to avoid
product recalls and damage to your reputation.
• Scoring System: Put in place a system of scoring for
assessments.https://www.prattwhitney.com/en/ourcompany/about/doing-business-with-us
ADDRESSING SUPPLY CHAIN RISKS
General Types of Supply Chain Risks
Operational Risks:
• • Logistics: Evaluate suppliers’ capacities for transportation and logistics.
• • Capacity: Assess how healthy production can adjust to variations in demand.
Financial Risks:
• • Stability: Evaluate the suppliers’ creditworthiness and stability.
• • Cost Fluctuations: Plan and keep expenses under control.
Threats to Excellence:
• • Compliance: Confirm that suppliers adhere to industry regulations and quality
standards.
• • Defects in the Product: Establish protocols to identify and eliminate defects in
components provided (Koberg & Longoni, 2019).
Why P&W Must Take These Risks into Account
a) Brand Reputation: Quality hazards damage P&W’s reputation and erode
consumer confidence.
b) Operational Continuity: Supply chain disruptions resulting from
operational and financial concerns may affect production schedules.
DEMING’S 14 POINTS
Quality management
The Global Supplier Development Plan
• Adopt the new mindset: Transition to a proactive approach
to quality control.
These strategies will fortify Pratt & Whitney’s supply chain
against potential disruptions:
• Encourage quality throughout the organization: Ensure
that Pratt & Whitney values and upholds quality in all
business areas, including its suppliers.
• • Selection Criteria for Suppliers: Establish global supplier
selection criteria that adhere to Deming’s guidelines.
• Prioritize your customers’ needs: Make products and
services that will satiate and stick with your customers
• • Continuous Improvement: Promote a culture of
continuous improvement within the supplier base to
prevent product recalls (Koberg & Longoni, 2019).
Breaking down Obstacles
• • Education and Training: Educate suppliers on the
principles of Deming.
• • Cultural Alignment: To overcome cultural gaps and foster
understanding between people and shared goals.
WORLDWIDE SOURCING FOR HYBRID-ELECTRIC
ENGINES
To achieve its goal of developing innovative hybrid-electric engines, Pratt & Whitney needs to consider the benefits and challenges associated
with global sourcing carefully. Global sourcing may significantly improve responsiveness and cost-effectiveness, especially when handling
supply chain disruptions caused by pandemics, natural catastrophes, or changes in the market.
Advantages:
•
Cost-Effectiveness: Access to a global pool of suppliers can lead to cost savings by utilizing advantageous market circumstances and
competitive pricing.
•
Resilience: By dispersing sources worldwide, one can increase their resistance to regional disruptions and provide a consistent supply
even in trying situations (Carter et al., 2020).
Problems:
•
Logistic Complexities: Managing suppliers across time zones and locales can be challenging.
•
Quality Control: To ensure consistent quality standards between foreign suppliers, robust quality control procedures are required
https://www.prattwhitney.com/en/newsroom/news/2023/06/19/rtx-advances-hybrid-electric-propulsion-demonstrator-with-1m-motorrated-power-m
DESIGNING A PROCESS FOR GLOBAL SOURCING
AT P&W
To enable the successful execution of worldwide sourcing for hybrid-electric engines, Pratt & Whitney needs to concentrate on creating an
organized and effective procedure. This procedure should cover essential elements to guarantee a smooth integration of international
suppliers and optimize the advantages of varied sourcing.
Essential Elements of the Procedure:
•
Supplier Onboarding: Create a comprehensive onboarding procedure to familiarize new international suppliers with P&W’s standards for
quality, expectations, and protocols for collaboration https://www.industryweek.com/operations/article/21271626/pratt-whitney-engineissue-adds-to-airline-challenges
•
Risk Mitigation Strategies: Create plans to handle logistical, geopolitical, and quality-related issues that may arise from global sourcing.
•
Communication Channels: Establish reliable communication channels to provide constant and unambiguous communication with
suppliers across the globe (Koberg & Longoni, 2019).
•
Quality Control methods: To maintain product quality standards, implement strict quality control methods, including routine audits,
inspections, and standardized quality benchmarks.
•
Continuous Improvement: To improve the global sourcing process over time, cultivate a culture of continuous improvement by soliciting
input from internal stakeholders and suppliers.
WORLDWIDE SOURCING BENEFITS AND CHALLENGES
Challenges:
Benefits:
Economies of Scale
•
Global sourcing takes advantage of cost advantages through large-scale production.
•
Competitive Pricing: As supplier competition grows, prices become more competitive.
Expertise Access:
•
Worldwide Talent Pool: Utilizing a wide range of worldwide expertise promotes innovation.
•
Specialized Skills: Technology advances more quickly when specialized skills are available.
Supply Chain Sturdiness:
•
Risk Distribution: The effects of localized disruptions are lessened by geographic diversification.
•
Enhanced Continuity: Provides a steady supply chain even in the face of interruptions (Fritz,
2019).
Challenges
Logistical Complex
•
Transportation: Overseeing the logistics of delivering components from different
places.
•
Coordination: Managing cultural quirks and various time zones.
Quality Assurance:
•
Consistency: Guaranteeing the exact quality requirements among various providers.
•
Respecting various international regulations is known as regulatory compliance.
Difficulties with Communication:
•
Language Barriers: Managing multilingual environments through effective
communication.
•
Managing cultural differences in business practices is the subject of this
section.https://www.industryweek.com/leadership/companiesexecutives/article/21273466/rtx-engine-issue-to-hit-profit-by-up-to-35-billion
GLOBAL SOURCING RESILIENCE: REACTIVITY AND
COST-EFFECTIVENESS
Economies of Scale:
•
Bulk Procurement: Cutting costs by producing goods in huge quantities.
•
Competition among Suppliers: Promoting competition for economical sourcing.
Natural Calamities:
•
Diversified Suppliers: Reducing the effects of a natural disaster that only affects one area.
•
Strategic Stockpiling: Building up reserves to handle unforeseen circumstances.
Pandemics:
•
Risk Mitigation: Segmenting manufacturing across different locations lowers pandemic risks.
•
Remote Operations: To maintain business continuity, enabling remote work.
Market Shifts:
•
Market Flexibility: Changing the source areas to accommodate shifting market conditions.
•
Agile Supply Chains: Creating supply networks that are quick to adapt to changes in the market (Asgari et al., 2016).
DESIGNING A GLOBAL SOURCING PROCESS:
SUPPORTING HYBRID-ELECTRIC ENGINE SOURCING
Evaluation of Suppliers:
• All-Inclusive Standards
• Worldwide Capability Assessment (Karttunen, 2018).
Risk Management:
• Risk Identification
• Mitigation Strategies
•
Framework for Communication:
•
Unified Communication Platform
• Cross-Cultural Training: Offer instruction to improve communication abilities across cultural boundaries.
Regulatory Compliance:
•
Global Standards
• Legal Expertise
RECOMMENDATIONS
Strategic Supplier Selection:
• Establish a robust methodology for evaluating suppliers using a weighted scorecard that includes key performance indicators
(KPIs) pertinent to the quality and dependability standards of Pratt & Whitney.
• Place a strong emphasis on enduring relationships with vendors dedicated to industry regulations and ongoing improvement.
Mitigation of Risk:
• Define and classify broad categories of supply chain risks, including technological, economic, and geopolitical aspects.
• To handle these categories, create a thorough risk management plan that guarantees an early reaction to any disturbances
(Swanson et al., 2018).
Supplier Development Plan:
• To construct an organized supplier development plan, use Deming’s 14 principles for quality.
• Encourage cooperation and knowledge sharing with new suppliers, focusing on quality enhancement and conformity to industry
standards.
CONCLUSION AND SUMMARY
• In summary, Pratt & Whitney must aggressively address supply chain issues to maintain its place in the
cutthroat aerospace sector. The study draws attention to the complex relationships that must be kept to
guarantee the supply chain’s resilience and lessen the effects of product recalls. Pratt & Whitney can
strengthen its supply chain against these disruptions by concentrating on supplier development, selection,
and global sourcing (Ellram & Murfield, 2019).
• A vital supplier evaluation system and using Deming’s 14 criteria for supplier development are essential
to avoid more product recalls. Moreover, strategic measures like global sourcing for hybrid-electric
engines can improve responsiveness and cost-effectiveness in the face of international unpredictability.
• Following these suggestions will help Pratt & Whitney build a strong and flexible supply chain as it
negotiates the challenges of the aerospace sector, protecting the brand and guaranteeing long-term
success in a changing marketplace.
REFERENCES
Monczka, R. M.,
Handfield, R. B.,
Giunipero, L. C., &
Patterson, J. L.
(2021). Purchasing
& supply chain
management.
Cengage Learning.
Kähkönen, A. K., &
Patrucco, A.
(2022). A
purchasing and
supply management
view of supply
resilience for
better crisis
response. Journal
of Purchasing and
Supply
Management,
100803.
Schulze, H., & Bals,
L. (2018).
Implementing
sustainable supply
chain management:
A literature review
on required
purchasing and
supply management
competencies.
Social and
environmental
dimensions of
organizations and
supply chains:
tradeoffs and
synergies, 171-194.
Karttunen, E.
(2018). Purchasing
and supply
management skills
revisited: an
extensive literature
review.
Benchmarking: An
International
Journal, 25(9),
3906-3934.
Ellram, L. M., &
Murfield, M. L. U.
(2019). Supply
chain management
in industrial
marketing–
Relationships
matter. Industrial
Marketing
Management, 79,
36-45.
Asgari, N.,
Nikbakhsh, E., Hill,
A., & Farahani, R.
Z. (2016). Supply
chain management
1982–2015: a
review. IMA
Journal of
Management
Mathematics, 27(3),
353-379.
Swanson, D., Goel,
L., Francisco, K., &
Stock, J. (2018). An
analysis of supply
chain management
research by topic.
Supply Chain
Management: An
International
Journal, 12(3), 100116.
Koberg, E., &
Longoni, A. (2019).
A systematic
review of
sustainable supply
chain management
in global supply
chains. Journal of
cleaner production,
207, 1084-1098.
Carter, C. R.,
Hatton, M. R., Wu,
C., & Chen, X.
(2020). Sustainable
supply chain
management:
continuing
evolution and
future directions.
International
Journal of Physical
Distribution &
Logistics
Management,
50(1), 122-146.
Fritz, M. M. (2019).
Sustainable supply
chain management.
Responsible
Consumption and
Production.
Encyclopedia of the
UN Sustainable
Development
Goals, Springer,
Cham, 1-14.
really need someone to help me to finish my HR written assignmentall requirements are explained in the documentno AI and low similarity,3000-3500words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Learning Outcomes:
On successful completion of this assignment the student will be able:
1. To develop abilities to gather, analyse, interpret and evaluate information on
Employee Satisfaction and Engagement related process, practice and laws.
2. To strengthen conceptual and analytical skills in the study of Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement.
3. To apply a range of Employee Satisfaction and Engagement principles and
concepts.
4. To build tangible links between the theory and practice of Employee Satisfaction
and Engagement.
5. To heighten awareness and understanding of Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement in action
6. To develop and present thoughts, arguments and informed opinions in a logical
and coherent way.
7. To demonstrate academic and management research, report writing and
composition skills with academic integrity.
8. To consistently apply the APA system of academic referencing.
9. To demonstrate word processing and IT skills
10.To develop project and time management and execution skills.
11.To develop healthy and functional work habits in progressing confidently and
consistently towards a defined submission deadline date.
Individual Written Assignment
Based on the Scenario below, design an employee satisfaction survey and develop a
follow up employee satisfaction strategy and plan to promote employee engagement.
Scenario – Stacey is the vice president of HR at ‘ITFast’, a midsized IT sector company.
She has called for an urgent meeting of HR department staff as nearly 100 employees
had given the notice to leave the company in recent weeks. “This is a long list of
escapees….we’re losing them faster than your people can bring them in,” she said,
turning to John, the head of recruiting. “Our turnover rate is up to 35%.” “We are
growing —in revenue, profitability, and reputation, I just don’t understand why people
are leaving us fast” said Stacey. “I need to present these numbers to Mr. Richard Leo
(CEO) at the end of the week, and I can’t do that without a theory on what’s happening
and a solution to propose. That’s why I called this meeting,” said Stacey. “This is even
surprising given that our work culture is our biggest selling point. We don’t treat our
employees just as a cog in the machine, and our company and its managers — Richard
included — will listen to them. That everyone at ‘ITFast’matters.”
PART A -Task: Stacey has hired you as their HR consultant to create and roll out an
employee satisfaction survey that will help her uncover the reasons behind employee
turnover so that she can put new policies in place. Your task is to carefully design the
questionnaire (15 questions) in the light of theories/concepts/Canadian Laws discussed
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
2
in the class. You can use any rating scale to design your questionnaire (for example
Likert, creating ranges for each question – very satisfied to not satisfied at all – refer to
the image given below). Use your creativity to design the questionnaire. • Keep in mind,
you cannot ask any discriminatory questions prohibited by law, in the survey. • For every
question include a line or two to explain the purpose of this question and how will this
question help you to know the causes of employee dissatisfaction and in turn boost
engagement. Avoid lengthy explanations Include at least 1-2 references for each
question you are asking or to support the question rationale and explanations. • You will
also be marked down for every question that seems irrelevant/off the topic. • Create your
own questions from scratch any copied questions from the internet and other sources
will be marked down. You can check secondary sources only for brainstorming not for
copy-pasting. Follow the best practices in survey design.
PART B -Task: based on areas of improvement (identified through survey questions)
in part A – create an employee engagement/satisfaction strategy and plan for ITFast that
will help them reduce employee turnover and boost employee engagement. • Your plan
should have clearly identified strategies/programs (3 strictly), each
5 Steps to successfully completing this assignment:
1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories, Concepts and Frameworks.
2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
3.
Double check your assignment against the marking and assessment rubrics.
4.
Put assignment through Turnitin with a Similarity Score of 20% Or less and an
AI score of 10% or less
5.
Submit the final assignment online via LMS-Brightspace by the stipulated
deadline.
Step 1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories and Frameworks
Finding relevant information about the Employee Satisfaction and Engagement systems
and practices of an industry and company can be challenging and requires you to utilize
the skills of an investigative business journalist. It is critical to understand the industry
first and the dynamics of the sector. It’s like you cannot under a family member unless
you understand the family unit. Read generally on the topic first starting with your core
textbook and then funnel your research into the specifics and micro-aspects of the
topic(s).
Finding Relevant Information:
There is a significant number of resources to draw from and should include the
following: Note: Google should not be your first port of call. Google, Wikipedia will
not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked
down for using them. You can use company websites, Job Market analysis taken from
Statista and
other reliable sources.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
3
UCW Library – on shelf and academic online resources should be your first post
of call. UCW library databases
Industry trade magazines and professional body publications
Company website and HR and career portals
Best Place to Work – Canada, website and league tables.
Please explore all the usual sources such as Google Scholar,
-See Core Textbook and Other Texts Books on Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement and Human Resources Management.
On Line and On Shelf Journals, preferably peer reviewed.
Online Databases and Portals which contains many relevant Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement information in peer reviewed journals.
Set up a “Google Alert” or a “Journal Article Alert” Updates” to get information
on a particular topic be mailed to you on a regular basis.
Secondary References: chase up relevant references listed in the Footnotes &
Bibliographies of Journal Articles and at the back of Textbooks.
Also consider YouTube and Social Media searches.
Ask the UCW Librarian, they are the experts in information finding and retrieval
and are there to help.
Attend the various UCW Library workshops on such topics as “Doing Industry
Research” which are held synchronously and asynchronously.
Step 2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
Writing Up the Assignment: The 2 Ss: Style and Substance are both important.
Substance and Body of Assignment:
Ensure all requirements and parts of the assignment are fully addressed and satisfactorily
fulfilled. Infuse your creativity into the assignment especially in designing a
questionnaire that is graphically appealing and has rating scales of some sort. Research
the best practice and tools in survey design. The use of graphics and/or colors will reflect
creativity. Demonstrative robustness of your research by using at least 10 references –
Google, Wikipedia will not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked down
for using them. You can use company websites, Governmental & provincial websites of
Canada, Labour laws both federal and provincial, updated textbooks, and industry
papers, etc., •
Ensure to Include:
Table of Contents (how to automatically create a table of contents in Word – https://youtu.be/0cNJX6HP7c (7 min you tube clip)
Introduction (a short introduction about the aim and purpose of the report and what you
hope to achieve. Signpost what you are going to do in the assignment and so lead and
guide the reader.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
4
Conclusion
Key takeaways
References/Bibliography (at least 10 references)
Appendices: Will contain any support documentation you wish to include such as
complicated diagrams or tables or visuals, which may impede the flow of reading if they
were in the body of the document.
Style: Assignment Format and Checklist:
Word Count: The assignment should be approx. be 3,000 minimum and 3,500 maximum
words with 10% flexibility on either end.
This excludes any footnotes, references, bibliography or appendices.
Format:
The assignment should be presented in word processed format adhering to the following
guidelines:
Essay style or report style formal structure.
Word only format, not PDF
Table of Contents at front (how to automatically create a table of contents in Word
– https://youtu.be/0cN-JX6HP7c (7 min you tube clip)
Consistent Style of APA Citation Referencing. See the APA Template on the
Library
section
or
watch
this
video
on
APA
guidelines
Clear paragraphing with headings and sub-headings.
Use of plenty of white space, breaking up the text with visual aids, diagrams,
graphs, etc. If too bulky, put in Appendix.
Double line spacing
Numbered paragraphs 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 etc. APA style
Times New Roman 12
Pages Numbered
Minimum of 10 references
Proof Read and Spell Checked
Conclusion (shot conclusion that summarizes your main findings and takeaways from
the assignment – 250 words approx.
References/Bibliography (at least 10 references)
Step 3: Follow and Double Check Your Final Work Against the Assessment and
Rubrics and Marking Scheme Below:
Assessment Rubrics: The rubric contains the criteria upon which the assignment will be marked
against and upon which feedback will be based.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
5
Specific Rubric:
Marking Rubric: Please read and observe the marking rubric carefully.
Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Comments
Subject Matter
(70%)
Key elements of assignments are covered especially all
parts and sub-parts.
Content is comprehensive, accurate, persuasive.
Displays an understanding of relevant theory, concepts
and frameworks.
Demonstrates an application of theory into practice.
Uses relevant and current examples from best practice.
Research is adequate/timely, and citations
are academically valid
Analysis and
Critical Thinking
(25%)
Present persuasive and research informed arguments
Major points supported by specific references.
Clear and logical line of thought and argument
Give own research informed opinion.
Integrate both the theory and practice to reach
new insight.
Organization and Readability/Style and
Grammar /Punctuation/Spelling and APA (10%)
Max.
Grade
Subject Matter (70%)
70
Analysis & CT (25%)
20
Style/Mechanics
(10%)
10
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The introduction provides a sufficient background
on the topic and previews major points.
Central theme/purpose is immediately clear.
Structure is clear, logical, and easy to follow with
proper headings.
Subsequent sections develop/support the central theme.
The conclusion follows logically from the body of the
paper
Sentences are complete, clear, and concise.
Sentences are well-constructed with consistently
strong, varied structure.
Transitions between
sentences/paragraphs/sections help maintain the
flow of thought.
Words used are precise and unambiguous.
The tone is appropriate to the audience,
content, and assignment.
Grammar, Spelling and Punctuation
checked.
Reference page is present and properly formatted.
Grade on 100
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
Subtotal
Penalties
100
6
General Rubric:
DESCRIPTOR
Exceptional: Normally achieved by a small
minority of students who have
consistently exceeded performance
expectations in all evaluation criteria.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
GRADE
90-100% A+
(4.33)
7
Excellent: Demonstrates a comprehensive
knowledge and understanding of subject
matter and achievement of learning
outcomes at high levels of performance in
almost all of the evaluation criteria.
Very good: Demonstrates a
comprehensive knowledge and
understanding of the subject matter and
achievement of learning outcomes at well
above average levels of performance in
most of the course evaluation criteria.
Good: Demonstrates substantial
knowledge and understanding of the
subject matter and achievement of
learning outcomes at average to above
average performance levels in most of the
course evaluation criteria
Satisfactory: Demonstrates sufficient
knowledge and understanding of the
subject matter and achievement of
learning outcomes at average levels of
performance in most of the course
evaluation criteria.
Pass: Demonstrates acceptable knowledge
and understanding of the subject matter
and achievement of learning outcomes at
low to average level of performance in
many of the course evaluation criteria.
Fail: Unacceptable performance in most or
all of the course evaluation criteria
85-89% A (4.00)
80-84% A- (3.67)
76-79% B+ (3.33)
72-75% B (3.00)
68-71% B- (2.67)
60-67% C (2.00)
0-59% F (0)
Given the nature of “relative grading” (competition), your grades will normally follow
a normal distribution curve which means Grade A and A+ will be very rare and few as
will Fail Grades.
Step 4.
Put the Assignment Through Turnitin only Once With a Similarity
Score of 20% Or Less and an AI Score of 10% or Less
This course requires you to submit your assignment in electronic form. The electronic
material will be submitted to a service to which UCW subscribes, called Turnitin. This
is a service that checks textual material for originality. Turnitin.com is used increasingly
in North American universities. For additional information please visit:
https://turnitin.com/static/resources/documentation/turnitin/sales/Turnitin_FAQ_Questi
ons_and_Answers.pdf
If you are still unsure what plagiarism means, then please visit www. Plagiarism.org
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
8
The Turnitin Company has recently re-launched Plagiarism.org, an educational and
informative resource on plagiarism and best practices for ensuring originality in written
work. This site, geared toward students and writers in general, offers a wealth of
information specifically about plagiarism, as well as information on how to properly
attribute and cite sources. On Plagiarism.org, you’ll also find an “Ask the Experts”
feature, FAQs, and a resource section with downloadable handouts. Also please visit
the UCW Library website.
On the LMS-Brightspace page for this course part and assignment you will find the
location where you upload the assignment to Turnitin. You can only submit it Once
to Turnitin by the due date.
If you look at the assignment of a previous student who took this course, even just as a
reference, this is still plagiarism and cheating. Always use your own words and your
own voice as it’s your assignment and your ideas only. Even if your English is not
perfect it is always best to put in your own words rather than risk breaching academic
integrity. During exam, you’re not allowed to look at other people’s work under any
circumstances and the same rules apply for assignments.
Consequences and Penalties of Plagiarism and Academic Misconduct: See UCW’s
Academic Integrity Policy: No. 5006. This policy is strictly enforced, and a breach
may ultimately lead to you failing the course and the program.
https://www.ucanwest.ca/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/UCW-Policy-5006-AcademicIntegrity-2023-07-04.pdf
o UCW is a relatively small academic community of faculty and students where
everyone knows each other. Any blemish or damage to your reputation and your
personal and academic integrity will impact your professional standing and future
academic and professional options.
o If you are found guilty of cheating, you will be labelled as a “cheater” and you will
carry this reputation for the rest of your stay in this school and it may appear on your
academic record/transcript when looking for academic references in order to pursue
further studies and or when seeking employment.
Troubleshooting Turnitin:
If you encounter difficulties with your Turnitin submission, try one of these two
strategies (solves it 99% of the time)
1. Wait an hour or two or three and try submitting again.
2. Try using a different web browser or computer.
Important: Please note the Instructor has no control or authority over the Turnitin system
so they are unable to help you if you have trouble with submission. You must contact
the IT department. So, allow sufficient time for any obstacles or delays. It is wise to
submit your assignment couple days before the due date, so you still have time to fix it
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
9
if you experience submission problems. If you submit your assignment at the last
moment and experience submission problems, there is nothing the instructor can do, and
you will incur a penalty for a late submission. If you email an Instructor on the weekends
with problems, they will not be able to reply to you until Monday. So, resolve issues in
a timely manner before the weekend and during the office hours of the Instructor and
UCW IT Department.
Turnitin Similarity Score 20% or Less and an AI Score of 10% or Less:
You may upload your assignment only Once by the deadline so that you are below the
20% comparability score.
An assignment with a comparability score of greater than 20% will be penalized. So
please ensure you have a score of 20% or less before final submission.
Over 30% is normally an automatic failure of the assignment and this will be reported
to the Head of Department and the AIC (Academic Incident Committee) for review
and further action and possible sanctions.
If you use Grammerly as an initial check for similarity score, remember that Turnitin
will add a minimum of extra 15%-20% to the score you get from Grammerly so don’t
rely on it or trust the result.
If you believe you completed an honest assignment but still went over 20%? Then you
need to revisit your refences. If you did an inadequate job of researching for
references, you will end up including many references that other students have already
used, and this will increase your similarity score. There are millions of articles
available to enable you to complete a robust and rigorous literature review and a
systematic research process. Consult the UCW Librarians for help. They are the
experts on finding resources and they are there to help you and make you a better
researcher.
Tips on Lowering Similarity Scores
1. No direct quotes from references (not even one sentence). Always paraphrase.
everything and include proper citation. It is only fair that you acknowledge and give
credit to where you got the idea or concept from.
a. In other words, DON’T COPY ANY QUOTES from the references.
b. DO NOT directly copy the assignment questions to your assignment as this will
increase your similarity score.
2. Carry out a comprehensive review in researching so your references are not going to
overlap with other students’ assignments,
a. If it only took you 30 minutes to find a particular reference, chances are very.
high that previous students already used those so if you use the same reference, it.
will increase your similarity score. That is why Google Scholar should not be your first
port of call.
b. Avoid searching through Google and even Google Scholar and don’t include online
news articles and magazines.
c. Go to the library (not just our school but also other libraries) and search for
books
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
10
d. Search for online for peer reviewed journal articles from scholarly portals and
databases such as EBSCO and JSTOR
e. Sign up for “Journal Article Alerts” from such journal article publishers as “Wiley
Online”.
Step 5.
Submit the Final Assignment Online Via Student Portal (LMSBrightspace) by the Stipulated Deadline.
The stipulated deadline for this assignment is on the cover page as well as in the syllabus.
It is usually Wednesday midnight of the stipulated week. But please double check on
LMS-Brightspace and with your Instructor. Please double check the date and submit it
on time. Put the date in your cell phone calendar. Please build sufficient time into your
planning to allow for Turnitin to produce a comparability report and % in time.
Submit on the LMS-Brightspace page for this course section, on the Turnitin link.
Late Assignments will be penalized at a rate of 10% of the final assignment grade, per
day.
Start Your Assignment NOW! – One Step at a Time! Only 5 Steps!
Do not wait until your assessment topic is covered in a lecture, if applicable, as it may
be too late. So, start your essay NOW with planning and information gathering. Work
on it every day, even if only for 15 minutes.
Be pro-active in your planning and not to rely on JIT (Just in Time) or last-minute
syndrome which is often part of the deadline-procrastination doom loop. Please read
these articles below to gain more insight into the psychology of procrastination and the
negatives of a last-minute approach to work.
1. Thompson, Derek (2014) The Procrastination Doom Loop—and How to Break It?
Delaying Hard Work is All about Your Mood. In the Atlantic August 26th Access full
article at:
http://www.theatlantic.com/business/archive/2014/08/the-procrastination-loop-andhow-to-break-it/379142/
2. Jaffe, Eric (2014) Why Wait? The Science Behind Procrastination: After a Long
Delay, Psychological Science is beginning to Understand the Complexities of
Procrastination in Association for Psychological Science Access full article at:
http://www.psychologicalscience.org/index.php/publications/Employee
Satisfaction
and
Engagement
server/2013/april-13/why-wait-the-science-behindprocrastination.html
How to Create Instant Motivation and Break the Procrastination Habit
Marking/Grading and Feedback Timeline:
Assuming a class size of 20 students it will take two weeks for the Instructor to grade
your assignment and longer with larger classes.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
11
Feedback from the Instructor will be posted usually within the Turnitin version of the
submitted assignment on the LMS-Brightspace.
Instructor, Contact Details and Appointments:
Dr. Pauric P. O’Rourke
PhD, MSc, MBS, LLM, B.A, CTLHR, PGC (Blended Learning), Fellow HEA, CMBE,
CPHR (Canada), SPHR (USA), Chartered MCIPD (UK)
E-Mail: pauric.o39rourke@myucwest.ca
Do Not use MS Teams to communicate with the Instructor.
If you wish would discuss any issue with the Instructor, please speak to them before or
after class and see their posted Office Hours on LMS-Brightspace. Face to face
communication is easier, quicker and clearer. If you need to set up an appointment to
meet in person or on Zoom with the Instructor please give adequate notice and indicate
at least two suitable times within the advertised office hours. . Please use the e mail
message facility on My UCW on LMS-Brightspace if you have to communicate in
writing with the Instructor and Not MS Teams. Please cite in the e mail subject line, the
Subject Name and Section (the most important element), Your Full Name and Student
Number in all correspondence to ensure a timelier response.
E-Mail Etiquette:
If you choose to contact the Instructor by e mail, please ensure that the e mail is written
in a professional, courteous and business-like manner with proper business English and
format, such as Dear Pauric and Best regards etc. Cell phone Text English/Slang is not
acceptable. Failure to do so, will mean that you will not receive a reply. Sending of any
inappropriate or disrespectful communication, attachments or commentary via e-mail or
any form of social media, such as Twitter etc, will be automatically reported to the UCW
authorities for further action and possible discipline and sanction.
When the Instructor answers your e mail and addresses your issue, it is considered
professional courtesy and basic good manners to reply with an e mail of thanks and
appreciation. Always cite your subject name, your own name and student number in all
correspondence to ensure more timely response.
*****
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
12
Learning Outcomes:
On successful completion of this assignment the student will be able:
1. To develop abilities to gather, analyse, interpret and evaluate information on
Employee Satisfaction and Engagement related process, practice and laws.
2. To strengthen conceptual and analytical skills in the study of Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement.
3. To apply a range of Employee Satisfaction and Engagement principles and
concepts.
4. To build tangible links between the theory and practice of Employee Satisfaction
and Engagement.
5. To heighten awareness and understanding of Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement in action
6. To develop and present thoughts, arguments and informed opinions in a logical
and coherent way.
7. To demonstrate academic and management research, report writing and
composition skills with academic integrity.
8. To consistently apply the APA system of academic referencing.
9. To demonstrate word processing and IT skills
10.To develop project and time management and execution skills.
11.To develop healthy and functional work habits in progressing confidently and
consistently towards a defined submission deadline date.
Individual Written Assignment
Based on the Scenario below, design an employee satisfaction survey and develop a
follow up employee satisfaction strategy and plan to promote employee engagement.
Scenario – Stacey is the vice president of HR at ‘ITFast’, a midsized IT sector company.
She has called for an urgent meeting of HR department staff as nearly 100 employees
had given the notice to leave the company in recent weeks. “This is a long list of
escapees….we’re losing them faster than your people can bring them in,” she said,
turning to John, the head of recruiting. “Our turnover rate is up to 35%.” “We are
growing —in revenue, profitability, and reputation, I just don’t understand why people
are leaving us fast” said Stacey. “I need to present these numbers to Mr. Richard Leo
(CEO) at the end of the week, and I can’t do that without a theory on what’s happening
and a solution to propose. That’s why I called this meeting,” said Stacey. “This is even
surprising given that our work culture is our biggest selling point. We don’t treat our
employees just as a cog in the machine, and our company and its managers — Richard
included — will listen to them. That everyone at ‘ITFast’matters.”
PART A -Task: Stacey has hired you as their HR consultant to create and roll out an
employee satisfaction survey that will help her uncover the reasons behind employee
turnover so that she can put new policies in place. Your task is to carefully design the
questionnaire (15 questions) in the light of theories/concepts/Canadian Laws discussed
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
2
in the class. You can use any rating scale to design your questionnaire (for example
Likert, creating ranges for each question – very satisfied to not satisfied at all – refer to
the image given below). Use your creativity to design the questionnaire. • Keep in mind,
you cannot ask any discriminatory questions prohibited by law, in the survey. • For every
question include a line or two to explain the purpose of this question and how will this
question help you to know the causes of employee dissatisfaction and in turn boost
engagement. Avoid lengthy explanations Include at least 1-2 references for each
question you are asking or to support the question rationale and explanations. • You will
also be marked down for every question that seems irrelevant/off the topic. • Create your
own questions from scratch any copied questions from the internet and other sources
will be marked down. You can check secondary sources only for brainstorming not for
copy-pasting. Follow the best practices in survey design.
PART B -Task: based on areas of improvement (identified through survey questions)
in part A – create an employee engagement/satisfaction strategy and plan for ITFast that
will help them reduce employee turnover and boost employee engagement. • Your plan
should have clearly identified strategies/programs (3 strictly), each
5 Steps to successfully completing this assignment:
1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories, Concepts and Frameworks.
2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
3.
Double check your assignment against the marking and assessment rubrics.
4.
Put assignment through Turnitin with a Similarity Score of 20% Or less and an
AI score of 10% or less
5.
Submit the final assignment online via LMS-Brightspace by the stipulated
deadline.
Step 1.
Research The Scenario and Underlying Theories and Frameworks
Finding relevant information about the Employee Satisfaction and Engagement systems
and practices of an industry and company can be challenging and requires you to utilize
the skills of an investigative business journalist. It is critical to understand the industry
first and the dynamics of the sector. It’s like you cannot under a family member unless
you understand the family unit. Read generally on the topic first starting with your core
textbook and then funnel your research into the specifics and micro-aspects of the
topic(s).
Finding Relevant Information:
There is a significant number of resources to draw from and should include the
following: Note: Google should not be your first port of call. Google, Wikipedia will
not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked
down for using them. You can use company websites, Job Market analysis taken from
Statista and
other reliable sources.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
3
UCW Library – on shelf and academic online resources should be your first post
of call. UCW library databases
Industry trade magazines and professional body publications
Company website and HR and career portals
Best Place to Work – Canada, website and league tables.
Please explore all the usual sources such as Google Scholar,
-See Core Textbook and Other Texts Books on Employee Satisfaction and
Engagement and Human Resources Management.
On Line and On Shelf Journals, preferably peer reviewed.
Online Databases and Portals which contains many relevant Employee
Satisfaction and Engagement information in peer reviewed journals.
Set up a “Google Alert” or a “Journal Article Alert” Updates” to get information
on a particular topic be mailed to you on a regular basis.
Secondary References: chase up relevant references listed in the Footnotes &
Bibliographies of Journal Articles and at the back of Textbooks.
Also consider YouTube and Social Media searches.
Ask the UCW Librarian, they are the experts in information finding and retrieval
and are there to help.
Attend the various UCW Library workshops on such topics as “Doing Industry
Research” which are held synchronously and asynchronously.
Step 2.
Write up the Assignment using the Suggested Format.
Writing Up the Assignment: The 2 Ss: Style and Substance are both important.
Substance and Body of Assignment:
Ensure all requirements and parts of the assignment are fully addressed and satisfactorily
fulfilled. Infuse your creativity into the assignment especially in designing a
questionnaire that is graphically appealing and has rating scales of some sort. Research
the best practice and tools in survey design. The use of graphics and/or colors will reflect
creativity. Demonstrative robustness of your research by using at least 10 references –
Google, Wikipedia will not be considered as authentic sources you will be marked down
for using them. You can use company websites, Governmental & provincial websites of
Canada, Labour laws both federal and provincial, updated textbooks, and industry
papers, etc., •
Ensure to Include:
Table of Contents (how to automatically create a table of contents in Word – https://youtu.be/0cNJX6HP7c (7 min you tube clip)
Introduction (a short introduction about the aim and purpose of the report and what you
hope to achieve. Signpost what you are going to do in the assignment and so lead and
guide the reader.
Mangt & Employee Relations – HRMT 625– Individual Assignment Brief
4
Conclusion
Key takeaways
References/Bibliography (at least 10 references)
Appendices: Will contain any support documentation you wish to include such as
complicated diagrams or tables or v
Hello Please chose one of the following questions and respond and explain. I’ve attached the post for better understanding. APA format 250 words minimum. Thank you
Compile your answers in Microsoft Excel and submit one file. Each problem should be on a separate worksheet. Do not put multiple homework problems on one worksheet.
After watching the video, discuss three main points (each in three sentences of more) that you were unaware of prior to watching and listening to this presentation.
No plagiarism, no match pleaseand Using APA style referenceUsing Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.The Answer should be 4-5 pages
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
Please submit your answers for the following questions.
Discuss the importance and implications of sport consumer attitudes in the field of sport marketing. Using the tri-component model of attitudes, explain how each component influences consumer behavior and provide examples from the sports industry.
In the chapter on sources of attitude formation, the author discusses several external factors that influence the formation of personal attitudes, specifically in the sports context. Discuss the importance and implications of personal direct experience, the social environment, formal communication channels (including traditional and new/social media), and direct marketing in shaping individuals’ attitudes towards sports and sports-related activities. Use specific examples and evidence from the chapter to support your answer.
Drawing from the chapter on Multi-Attribute attitude models, especially the Theory of Planned Behaviour (TPB), discuss how the TPB can be applied to predict sport and recreation behaviour. In your answer, detail the three key determinants of the TPB and provide examples from the sports context to illustrate your points. Additionally, touch upon the challenges and limitations of the TPB in the domain of consumer behaviour.
Analyze the Fan Attitude Network (FAN) model proposed by Funk and James (2004) with particular emphasis on the following components:
1. The role of the “importance property of attitudes” in predicting behavioral outcomes.
2. The interplay between dispositional needs, sport identity, and endearing features in the formation of sport-related attitudes.
3. The significance of the four outcomes (persistence, resistance, influence on cognition, and guide to behaviour) and their implications for consumer loyalty in sports marketing.
Based on the chapter “Application of attitude research: Sport sponsorship research”, discuss the significance of attitude research in the sports sponsorship arena. Highlight the different attitudinal variables and their role in determining the success of a sports sponsorship program. In your discussion, ensure to also explore the importance of sport consumers’ perceptions and how they can influence the overall effectiveness of a sponsorship initiative.
Read the “Up, Up, and Away!” case (attached), and the “Risk Management in Sport”
(attached) pdf and this IAEA stakeholder analysis article for context and imagine you are Don
Nelson.
1. Create a Risk Management Checklist: Using the “Up, Up, and Away!” case.
•
•
•
Identify what you think are the top ten (10) highest impact risks in the “Up, Up,
and Away!” case.
Remove existing data in the Risk Management Checklist template provided.
o By deleting the existing content from the chart. Note, you can NOT use or
paraphrase the risks listed in column 1 of the template or you will lose
points for this assignment. You must delete the risks and to add your own
top 10 risks. This is just a template. Please use your own content.
Fill in your own Risk Management Checklist as follows:
• Insert the date you complete the checklist “[date]”
• Insert your name as the “officer.”
• Insert the top 10 risks you have identified in the “What potential
risks have you identified” column.
• There should only be 10 rows of text)
• Then, insert information for each risk in the following columns:
o Date of assessment (date you complete the
check list)
o Likelihood
o Impact
o Risk Rating
o “What we should do about it.”
o “Who will do it.”
o “When it will be done”
o
2. Create a Stakeholder Matrix: Using the this IAEA stakeholder analysis article do the
following:
• List up to 10 stakeholders and describe the:
o
(a) stakeholder’s key issues and concerns
o
(b) effective communication methods Don should use for each
stakeholder, and
o
(c) the key messages that Don would want to communicate to each
stakeholder.
•
o
You may use the stakeholder matrix example as a template in this
IAEA stakeholder analysis if you prefer or you can submit your answer in
written form using the (MLA format and has a 400 word count max if you
submit in written format).
▪
You can NOT use or paraphrase the content in the stakeholder
matrix example. You will lose points for this assignment if you use
the content already listed in the example. Please use your own
content.
3. Create a Stakeholder Map: Review this video here:
3D%3D&ab_channel=PathwaytoPassingyourCMPexam
(Domain F) and this IAEA stakeholder analysis article.
• Identify all of the stakeholders for Don (from the “Up, Up and Away! case) –
you can use the 10 stakeholders identified in #2.
•
Classify each stakeholder in one of the four (4) quadrants shown in the
stakeholder map in the this IAEA stakeholder analysis article. (e.g., High
Influence and Low Stake).
o
You may draw, fill out a stakeholder map using online templates as noted
in the article or write a list the stakeholders by quadrant per the
stakeholder map.
▪
You can NOT use or paraphrase the content in the stakeholder
map example. You will lose points for this assignment if you use the
content already listed in the example. Please use your own content.
Please do Step 3 and 4 and pull the information you need from the case study attatched. Please pay close attention to the instructions.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
SALES MANAGEMENT CASE: SUMMER C 2023
Getting started . . . a few important notes
1. Please note that the company and products used in this case is not a real company. The names used in the case are
not real and made up.
2. To assist you in your work refer to the canvas module titled: Sales Management Case Reference and Tools.
3. Live with the case the entire semester. Know it inside and out.
4. Before conducting the work for each step, read it thoroughly to make certain you perform all that is asked.
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————-You have been hired as the new sales manager for THE YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY
The CEO, Mr. Jonathan Fitzjarrell (photo to the left), hired you because you portrait the qualities of a
sales manager. With that comes high expectations. Mr. Fitz (he likes this shortened version of his name) is giving you 16
weeks, using a 7 Step Sales Management Process, to build a new sales organization that will meet or exceed the revenue
growth targets of the company. However, you are inheriting issues: people, strategies, internal weaknesses, and other
barriers that have been hindering revenue growth over the past three years. Your immediate focus will be to fix the sales
organization and deliver significant revenue growth. You will be required to think deeply, make critical judgments and
decisions and provide reasoning for your decisions. After completing the 7 step process, Mr. Fitz will approve your proposal
for the new sales organization and how it will generate the revenue growth expected.
In a recent meeting of all department leaders on August 21st, 2023 and at your first meeting with the company, Mr. Fitz
made this statement to the sales organization regarding the start of the 2024 planning process:
“The ice cream business continues to get more competitive. We face pricing, profit, and revenue challenges. We are small
compared to companies like Nestle and Unilever. But we have an opportunity to grow, creating a larger revenue stream and
doing it more profitably. We must be creative. I am asking the marketing team to create new products that excite
customers. I am asking the supply chain team to find more efficient ways to ship our product to our customers. I am asking
the sales team to find revenue growth with existing customers, new customers, new channels of distribution, and effective
ways of promoting our product with our key customers. Bottom line, we need the sales team to plan growth of +$10million
in 2024.”
As the new sales manager, you need to know as much as possible about the current situation at THE YUMMY ICE
CREAM COMPANY. The following information provides you with everything you will need to know about the
current state of the company and sales organization. Dig in and gain a deep knowledge of what you are facing as the new
sales manager. You will need this information to execute the 7 Step Sales Management Process.
THE YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY manufactures, markets, sells and distributes ice cream products in
the Southeast, Mid-South, and Southwest United States. Its headquarters is located in Dallas, Texas. It has two factories,
one in Tupelo, Mississippi and the other in Clovis, New Mexico.
Note: YUMMY ICE CREAM is only sold and distributed in the area within the yellow
borders.
Under the YUMMY brand name, product package design and sizes is standard: Pints and Half Gallon.
YUMMY competitors are abundant and are both national and regional in scope:
In most of region
Florida, Texas
Georgia
New Mexico, Arizona
In entire region
YUMMY also competes with private label brands, products made specific for major retailers (Examples):
HEB in Texas
Publix in Florida
Albertson’s in NM and Arizona
The company competes in the packaged ice cream category.
Sales Managers need to gain knowledge of the market to aid them in making the best strategic sales decisions. The
following provides information on the packaged ice cream industry. Please review them prior to beginning the sales
management process. Much of what you see here will influence your decisions.
YUMMY 2023 Projected Revenue: $100million
Ice Cream Industry Segmentation
Ice cream is a sweetened frozen food typically eaten as a snack or dessert.
The ice cream market is segmented based on product type, category, distribution channel, and geography. By product
type, the market is segmented into impulse ice cream, take-home ice cream, and artisanal ice cream. By category,
the market is segmented into dairy and non-dairy. By distribution channel, the market is segmented into on-trade
and off-trade. Off-trade is further sub-segmented into supermarkets/hypermarkets, convenience stores, specialist
stores, and other distribution channels.
YUMMY is take home, dairy and supermarkets.
Ice Cream Production
In 2021, ice cream makers in the U.S. churned out more than 1.3 billion gallons of ice cream.
The ice cream industry has a $13.1 billion impact on the U.S. economy, supports 28,800 direct jobs, and generates $1.8 billion in direct
wages, according to IDFA’s Dairy Delivers®.
The majority of U.S. ice cream and frozen dessert manufacturers have been in business for more than 50 years and many are still familyowned businesses.
July is the busiest month for ice cream production when nearly 3/5 of all ice cream is produced, followed by June and May.
Ice Cream Marketing
Families are the primary customer group for ice cream retailers.
Ice cream marketing is primarily done on a local or regional level.
While ice cream makers say they are seeing increased demand for non-dairy ice creams and plant-based ingredients, consumers rank
these at the bottom of the list for most-consumed types of ice cream and frozen desserts.
Premium and regular ice cream is 80% of the market, according to ice cream makers.
Two-thirds of ice cream makers say they already use or plan to incorporate more sustainable packaging solutions.
Ice Cream Sales
The average American eats roughly 20 pounds of ice cream each year, or about 4 gallons.
Fortune Business Insights estimates the global ice cream market will reach $97.85 billion in 2027, up from $71.52 billion in
2021—a 37% jump in less than a decade due to the world’s craving for ice cream.
Consumption
The average American consumes approximately 23 pounds of ice cream and related frozen desserts per year.
Regular ice cream is the most popular category of frozen desserts.
Source: International Dairy Foods Association
Relevant Facts
Ice cream market is projected to grow at a CAGR of 5.20% in forecast period, 2022-2029
Retailers report that premium ice cream is most popular with their consumers, while ice cream manufacturers report that regular ice
cream, the kinds usually sold in supermarkets, are most popular with consumers.
Time of year matters when it comes to ice cream. The summer months of June and July are the busiest months for ice cream production
and transportation.
Ice cream is big business. It contributes $39 billion to the U.S. economy and creates nearly 200,000 jobs across the country.
Many ice cream companies are family-owned businesses and have been around for more than 50 years.
Families are the primary consumers for ice cream retailers
Ice cream marketing is usually done at a regional or local level
Distributing Ice Cream Options
Direct to Warehouse: Ice Cream manufacturers ship directly to a retailer warehouse if the retailer has the capability to warehouse it
Direct Store Delivery: Ice Cream manufacturers ship product to individual stores either with their own trucks or contract ice cream
distributors to deliver the product. This method is ideal when retailers cannot warehouse ice cream.
Below is a look at the current CORPORATE level situation at YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY
Corporate Revenue
2021:
2022:
2023 Estimated:
2024 Targeted:
2025:
2026:
$95 million
$97 million
$100 million
$110 million
$120 million
$130 million
The targeted growth of $10million (+10%) in 2024 is aggressive (industry projected growth is 5.2%) but a must to remain
competitive. Mr. Fitz is willing to invest heavily in the sales organization enabling them to become a high performing and
effective team. New strategies, support systems and maybe even new people, will be expected.
Corporate Profit
The company strives to reduce costs while increasing revenue. Mr. Fitz targets 18% net profit each year. How does sales
play a role? Gain a $10million increase in revenue in 2024 less Mr. Fitz’s heavy investment in your organization, the
company will reach the 18% target.
YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY corporate structure
Explanations for each function
Sales Manager: Responsible for sales revenue growth and the management, development, and training of six
sales representatives.
Merchandising Manager: This team is responsible for visiting stores that sell our products. The team helps
customers put our products on the shelves, rotate the product for freshness, hels build displays, and supports
in-store promotions. They also build planograms. Planograms are diagrams or models that indicate the
placement of retail products on shelves to maximize sales.
Supply Chain Manager: Responsible for distribution of products from the warehouse to the customer. Because
the product is sensitive to spoilage risks during shipping, the department manages a distribution network (3rd
party) assisting the company in the careful, quality delivery of products. This department works closely with
production. They depend on the most accurate forecast from the sales organization.
Finance Manager: Responsible for all company finances including accounting processes (balance sheets and
payment records) and budget planning, allocations, and management.
Marketing Manager: Responsible for all marketing related activity to include promoting our brands using
selected media, providing funds for the sales team to promote products with customers and building new
products.
HR Manager: Responsible for all human resource related activity (Hiring, onboarding, and termination),
training, and keeping up with the development of employees. One of the HR managers is a legal expert.
Production Manager: Responsible for the value chain. It begins with buying the raw materials from preferred
vendors, warehousing and manufacturing, testing, and ends with staging (packing) the product for delivery to
our warehouse in Dothan, Alabama. They work closely with the supply chain. They depend on the most
accurate forecast from the sales organization.
IT / Data: Provides technical support for all departments. This includes enhancements and new technologies for
efficiency and effective work. Also includes technical training. In addition, the department supports all functions
with data relating to company goals and strategies as well as data within each department. For example, this
department supplies the sales team revenue data, revenue lifts, sales by region.
Current Strategies and Facts of selected functions within the organization
Marketing
Minimal advertising externally (Some radio and industry print publications) because of their strong belief of
spending money directly with customers. This may be good for the sales team but without external marketing, what
will draw people into your customer’s stores? The most frequent type of in store advertising executed is in store
flyers and instant in store redeemable coupons. The marketing team does not support Buy 1 Get one free events.
Budgets retail customers an annual promotional allowance of 5 percent (of previous year’s sales revenue) to
advertise their product in store. If a customer’s sales revenue of our product last year was $10 million, we have the
opportunity to spend $500,000 the next year with the customer to promote our products in their stores.
Supply Chain
We have distribution of our product in 90 percent of all supermarket stores in the southeastern US region.
The distribution center is in Dothan, Alabama, next to the production facility.
We use two types of vehicles to distribute our products; semis and floaters.
Strategy is to deliver product on time to all customers (The goal is a minimum 90 percent on time delivery rate)
Semi for larger customers and longer hauls
Floaters for smaller customers and short hauls
We use 3rd party DISTRIBUTORS to help use get product shipped to rural areas and customers who
prefer what is called, “direct store delivery”. Instead of shipping our product to store warehouses, we may choose
to use these distributors to ship to each store directly.
NOTE: This is a critical element of YUMMY’s business. See how customers receive product by reviewing, The Sales
Organization’s CUSTOMER overview, later in the case.
Supply Chain Facts:
+ Product shipped to customer warehouses and customers use their own trucks to ship from their warehouses to their stores:
Spoils rate 11%. This means that 11% of all product shipped to customer warehouses spoil. We pay half of what was spoiled.
+ Product shipped using “direct store delivery”: Spoils rate 3%. We pay half of what was spoiled.
Finance
Meet sales promotion activity ROI at 15 percent ($ Promotional spend with customer / Incremental $
sales or lift from promotion: Example . . . $100,000/$1,500,000 = 15 percent)
Each customer contributes at least 20 percent bottom line contribution margin.
Example:
Sales
Cost of Goods (Fixed at 50%)
Cost of Promoting with Customer
Cost of Distribution (Fixed at 20%)
Contribution Margin
$10,000,000
$ 5,000,000
$ 1,000,000
$2,000,000
$2,000,000 (20 percent)
YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY SWOT Analysis
A SWOT (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) analysis is a framework used to evaluate the company’s
competitive position and to develop strategic planning. The SWOT analysis assesses internal and external factors, as well as
current and future potential.
Below is the current “corporate level” SWOT analysis for YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY. Later, you will be
exposed to a specific Sales Organization SWOT analysis.
Let’s take a look at the sales organization you are inheriting as the new sales manager.
YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY sales organization structure
Territory $ Revenue:
$23 million
$18 million
$15 million
$12 million
$21 million
Number of Customers:
10
10
7
8
10
6
Number of Ice Cream Distributors:
2
2
1
3
4
4
High
High
Low
Low
Growth Potential:
Moderate
$11 million
Moderate
Growth potential definition
Growth potential is based on a three-level scale. High denotes a significant opportunity for revenue growth with existing customers (additional devices and longer
contracts) as well as prospective untapped customers. These territories are labeled strategic and investment opportunities exist. Moderate means an opportunity for
growth but not as substantial as those designated as high. These territories tend to be labeled maintenance meaning keep doing what we are currently doing. Low entails
little or no growth opportunities. We call these territories non-strategic. Little or no investment is applicable.
High level Overview of the Sales Organization
•
•
•
•
•
All the territory sales representatives are based in their homes within their assigned territory.
Each territory sales representative manages customers within their territory. They are equipped with training, a
budget to travel and money to spend with customers to promote our product.
There are no specialization roles within the current sales organization.
Virtual meetings are held monthly. Meetings review what is currently happening and why.
The focus is servicing and growing the existing customer base.
Current Sales Strategies
The current sales strategies are weak and do not address ways of improving efficiency and effectiveness and drive revenue.
The CEO has asked you to ignore the current sales strategies. Instead, he is asking that you proceed with Steps 1
and 2 of the sales management process.
Below is the current “Sales Organization” SWOT analysis for YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY.
Sales Organization / Salesperson Performance Assessment
The previous sales manager used a certain skill criterion to measure the performance of each sales representative.
Below is the most recent performance assessment of the current sales team using the criteria:
Note that although some territory sales representatives are performing at higher levels than others do not call for criticism
of lower performers and their overall score. Keep in mind, the skills listed above are the skills the previous manager was
using. For your new organization and what you need to accomplish to grow revenue, newer and more relevant skills may be
necessary for your team to be successful. https://www.templetonparker.com/single-post/The-10-Skills-Employees-inMedical-Device-Sales-Need, https://www.zippia.com/medical-sales-representative-jobs/skills/
—————————————————————————————————————————– —————————————–
The Sales Organization’s CUSTOMER overview (Important information to know)
Your customers think and talk a specific language your salespeople need to understand. Below are terms used by your retail
customers when measuring business performance and the strategic decisions they must make:
1. Sales Revenue
Sales revenue is the income received by a store from its sales of products in the store and in particular, by each department
2. Merchandising
Merchandising is any practice which contributes to the sale of products to a retail consumer.
At a retail in-store level, merchandising refers to displaying products that are for sale in a creative way that entices
customers to purchase more items or products.
3. Shelf Space
Shelf space is allocated to products. For example, a retail store may apportion 3 12 foot shelves for cereal. The intent is to
make the most use out of the space, giving room to various products.
4. In Store Sales Promotions
A sales promotion is an in-store event for a specified and limited period to increase awareness, generate interest and lead
to a purchase. The intent of an in-store sales promotion is to gain incremental sales revenue. Examples of in store
promotions are sampling, Buy One Get One free, 2 for $3, and in store coupons.
5. Profit Margin
A product’s profit margin tells you how much the product sells for above the actual cost of the product itself. If a product
costs the customer $1.00 and the retail price is $1.59, their profit margin is $.59 per unit or 37.1%.
6. Product Turns
Product turns is how fast or slow a product sells off the shelf and through the front check out scanner at a retail store. For
example, if 12 units were put on the shelf on Monday and all 12 sold through the checkout scanner by Sunday, we can say
that product turns of that product are 12 turns per week.
Your customers and buyers are seeking salespeople with the following skills:
1. Bring New Perspectives and Ideas
If customers could diagnose their own problems and come up with workable solutions on their own, they would do so. The
reason that they’re turning to you and your firm is that they’re stuck and need your help. Therefore, you must be able to
bring something new to the table.
2. Be Willing to Collaborate
Customers absolutely do NOT want you to sell them something, even something that’s wonderful. They want you to work
with them to achieve a mutual goal, by being responsive to the customer’s concerns and ways of doing business. Ideally,
customers want you to become integral to their success.
3. Have Confidence in Your Ability to Achieve Results
Customers will not buy from you if you can’t persuade them that you, your firm, and your firms offerings will truly achieve
the promised results. It is nearly impossible to persuade a customer to believe in these things unless you yourself believe in
them. You must make your confidence contagious.
4. Listen, Really Listen, to the Customer
When they’re describing themselves and their needs, customers sense immediately when somebody is just waiting for a
break in the conversation to launch into a sales pitch. To really listen, you must suppress your own inner voice and forget
your goals. It’s about the customer, not about you.
5. Understand ALL the Customer’s Needs
It’s not enough to “connect the dots” between customer needs and your company’s offering. You must also connect with
the individuals who will be affected by your offering and understand how buying from you will satisfy their personal needs,
like career advancement and job security.
6. Help the Customer Avoid Potential Pitfalls
Here’s where many sellers fall flat. Customers know that every business decision entails risk but they also want your help to
minimize that risk. They want to know what could go wrong and what has gone wrong in similar situations, and what steps
you’re taking to make sure these problems won’t recur.
7. Craft a Compelling Solution
Solution selling is not dead. Customers want and expect you to have the basic selling skill of defining and proposing a
workable solution. What’s different now though is that the ability to do this is the “price of entry” and not enough, by itself,
to win in a competitive sales situation.
8. Communicate the Purchasing Process
Customers hate it when sellers dance around issues like price, discounts, availability, total cost, add-on options, and so
forth. They want you to be able to tell them, in plain and simple language, what’s involved in a purchase and how that
purchase will take place. No surprises. No last-minute upsells.
9. Connect Personally with the Customer
Ultimately, every selling situation involves making a connection between two individuals who like and trust each other. As a
great sales guru once said: “All things being equal, most people would rather buy from somebody they like… and that’s true
even when all things aren’t equal.”
10. Provide Value That’s Superior to Other Options
And here, finally, at the No. 10 spot (below everything else) comes the price and how that price compares to similar
offerings. Unless you can prove that buying from you is the right business decision for the customer, the customer can and
should buy elsewhere.
Customer Profile / Where we currently sell our product and where we get our sales revenue.
Customers from left to right represent rank highest to lowest sales revenue customers for YUMMY ICE CREAM
COMPANY In each territory.
*To see a list of all supermarkets/other retailers in each state, go to http://supermarketpage.com/supermarketlist.php
YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY Top Five Highest Revenue Customers
(These customers contribute 50% of the $100 million company revenue!)
This
$14 million
$11 million
$10 million
$8 million
$7 million
Can YUMMY ICE CREAM be sold in other channels of distribution besides supermarket?
What do you think?
Others?
Convenience Stores
Club Stores
———————————————————————————————————————————————————The Retail Customer’s Voice
The sales team needs to know how customers feel about the service provided by the company and the sales organization.
YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY most recent customer OVERALL combined assessment results:
What top management at our customers tell every company they do business with . . .
“Salespeople need to be “consultants” bringing us problem solving solutions by using their internal expertise and resources.
Customers want to defeat eroding margins and grow category sales leveraging the strength of brand equity, strong
marketing campaigns and shopper satisfaction”.
Distributors feedback working with YUMMY ICE CREAM COMPANY
The Sales Management Process
Your proposal to the CEO will follow the sales process within the course required book, “ Building A Winning Sales Force”. It
is important that you take time to search the internet for additional and credible information about the industry.
Each step will be explained with guidelines and hints to guide you through your decision making
STEPS 1 AND 2: DIAGNOSE & BUILDING A STRATEGIC SALES PLAN
(35 points total)
The first step in the Sales Management process is to diagnose what is currently happening in the company. This step is
critical for decision making in Step 2. It is important you deeply review the entire case. It is highly recommended that you
print the case and as you review it, highlight and make notes.
Review the entire case. The SWOT analysis for both the company and your sales organization will provide worthy
information. However, you must go beyond the SWOT because the case provides essential information that will be of value
to you.
Step 1 Diagnosis
As the new Sales Manager, you will be conducting a diagnosis of the current company and sales
organization scenario. Your concern as a sales manager is “what is happening (or not happening)
that may hold you back to grow sales revenue? What is the sales organization doing well now and
continue doing that I can leverage to grow sales revenue?
Part A (10 points): Based on your deep review of the company’s current situation, what sales related impacts*** concern
you? Why? What are the consequences if it continues? An example of a concern of yours could be . . . “I am concerned
about the lack of quality training because my sales team needs to be more influential with our customers and close longer
term contracts. It does not appear that we are investing in training that is critical to today’s sales environment. If we do not
train to current methods, we will fall behind our competition, risk credibility with our customers and see revenue continue to
decrease”.
***A sales impact is a situation that although it may be an issue within another department of the company, it impacts
sales. For example, if supply chain is not shipping product to customers on time, this is a supply chain issue that “impacts”
sales. If this issue is not fixed, customers will begin to look to other suppliers for products! Thus, a loss of revenue.
Provide at least 15 concerns. Feel free to provide more than 15. The more you know, the better positioned you will be to
complete Step 2 of the sales management process. Do not copy and paste content directly from the case. The CEO is
looking for your own interpretation. Do not write your diagnosis in a paragraph format. Use numbers (1, 2, 3 . . .) and
provide at least 4-5 clear, comprehensive sentences for each concern. Points will be deducted if you do not follow these
instructions.
Part B (5 points): The Company and Sales SWOT and other sections of the case identify current strengths. From what you
learned about the company and sales organization in the case, what current strengths existing today can you build on and
leverage to help drive revenue? Why? An example of a strength you can leverage and why could be . . . “Marketing
currently provides high impact tools to help us make a greater impact with our customers. As a result, we have an
opportunity to sell solutions instead of individual products”. Provide at least 5 strengths you can leverage to grow revenue.
Feel free to provide more than 5. Do not copy and paste content directly from the case. The CEO is looking for your own
interpretation. Do not write your diagnosis in a paragraph format. Use numbers (1, 2, 3 . . .) and provide at least 3 -5 clear,
comprehensive sentences for each strength. Points will be deducted if you do not follow these instructions.
For Parts A and B, use the exact format below:
Step 1 Part A Concerns
My Concerns
Why it is a concern
The consequences if it continues
1-15
Step 1 Part B Strengths to Leverage
Strengths to Leverage
How to Leverage
1-5
Step 2 Building a Strategic Sales Plan
Once you have completed your diagnosis (Step 1), you will be constructing your strategic sales plan.
You will review your concerns and identified strengths and translate them into strategies. Before
you begin, review the content below that will help you build strategies that are clear, concise and
impactful.
1. Strategies support corporate goals.
They describe WHAT will be done, HOW it will be done, its benefit and what it will deliver (revenue contribution toward
short term needs and long term benefits). Use the example below as your template to build each strategy. Make sure you
note the WHAT, HOW, BENEFIT and what it will deliver in each strategy as shown in the example below:
“We will build a new sales training program (WHAT) with specific emphasis on selling solutions to our customers. The
training will include how to construct a compelling solution to customer problems, ask pertinent questions and close the
sale. (HOW). The training will improve salesperson’s effectiveness resulting in closing longer term contracts. (BENEFIT). This
strategy will contribute at least $2 million in increased sales revenue (what it will deliver).”
2. Strategies could be built to solve other issues.
We will conduct more meetings (WHAT) within our sales organization and invite other functions like marketing and supply
chain where we see the need. Meetings will be conducted monthly at our Atlanta headquarters with an agenda to include
(1) current state of the business (2) high priority issues and (3) solutions to the issues. At each meeting, we will hold one
valuable skill training module. The meeting will end in a list of actions we will take to solve an issue. (HOW). The meetings
will improve salesperson’s effectiveness and efficiencies resulting resolving issues quicker and seeing positive results faster.
(BENEFIT). This strategy will contribute at least $550,000 in increased sales revenue (what it will deliver).”
The example above includes the need for more training (At each meeting, we will hold one valuable skill training module),
better communication and engagement with other functions of the organization (and invite other functions like marketing
and supply chain where we see the need) and quicker resolutions so that we see immediate sales revenue benefits.
3. Sales strategies need to be “sales” strategies.
As a sales manager, there are concerns you have no control over because it is the responsibility of another function within
the organization such as marketing or supply chain. As a sales manager, you cannot create a strategy such as “to introduce
a new advertising campaign that creates more demand and trial of our product”. This is a marketing role. However, as a
concern of yours, for example, a lack of impactful advertising to convince customers like Publix to put your products in their
stores, it holds you back from growing revenue. Again, as a sales manager you cannot build this as your sales strategy,
however, you could build a strategy that suggests sales having significant impact in building a stronger ad campaign. The
strategy might go something like this:
“We will build a process with specific emphasis to an impactful social media campaign with the marketing team. The
campaign will include how to construct a compelling message not only to consumers, to our customers as well. The message
will position us to create awareness and demand with potential shoppers and credibility with and support from our
customers. The process will include tasks identified collectively and completed by both the marketing and sales teams. This
strategy will contribute at least $2 million in increased sales revenue”.
Even though this initiative is deemed a marketing one, you can decide to make it one of your sales strategies because it
needs sales input to provide insight and decision making from a customer’s point of view. After all, it is your sales team that
works closest to customers like Walmart and Publix. Having customer input on how to define a strong ad campaign is
priceless!
4. Strategies contribute to resolving current issues (inefficiencies and ineffective practices) but have long term benefits
For example, an immediate need could be to expand our distribution base beyond just supermarkets. This may fix a short
term sales revenue need because selling product beyond supermarkets such as in convenient stores and club stores, it
would provide new and quick sales revenue for us. The long term benefit is, as these new channels of distribution and
customers mature, we can invest in them and grow longer term sales revenue growth.
ARE YOU READY?
Building a Strategic Sales Plan is the most important step in the sales management process because the decisions you
make in Steps 3 through 7 will always link back to the plan. You will see why as we progress through the process. The
strategic sales plan will guide your sales team toward revenue growth. SPEND TIME ON THIS ASSIGNMENT!
Part A (15 points): Using your diagnos
please chose one of the following ways. APA format 250 words. Below is the discussion post. And also article is attached below. https://www.bu.edu/articles/2022/pov-artificial-intelligence-is-changing-writing-at-universities/
Each student is required to focus on ONE accounting pronouncement/standard. Locate a pronouncement/standard in the FASB ASC system and study it. Then students must create an informational Blog about it using available online software. Students must choose a standard most interesting to them. Find the relevant standard in the FASB site and create a blog about it. Blogs should be informative / creative and can include text-based articles, images, videos, podcasts if needed to enhance the overall effectiveness of the Blog about your chosen standard. Assuming that you are writing this as an informative resource for Accounting students sitting the CPA exam and an informed interested public. Be sure to explain the correct ways to record/measure transactions and/or disclose your company’s financial statements with regard to the standard of your choice from the FASB ASC. This is to be a professional Blog and Business Writing Rubric should be followed where appropriateRequirements: Standard length of a blog site
Question: Q.1. How are the balance sheets and income statements of finance companies, insurers, and securities firms similar to those of banks, and in what ways are they different? What might explain the differences you observe? Points-5 Q.2. Depositor’s Savings association has a ratio of equity capital to total assets of 7.5%. In contrast, Newton Savings reports an equity capital-to-asset ratio of 6%. What is the value of the equity multiplier for each of these institutions? Suppose that both institutions have an ROA of 0.85%. What must each institution’s return on equity capital be? What do your calculations tell you about the benefits of having as little equity capital as regulations or the marketplace will allow? Points-5
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
FIN401 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Banks Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Umme hani
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
Question:
Q.1. How are the balance sheets and income statements of finance companies,
insurers, and securities firms similar to those of banks, and in what ways are they
different? What might explain the differences you observe? Points-5
Q.2. Depositor’s Savings association has a ratio of equity capital to total assets of
7.5%. In contrast, Newton Savings reports an equity capital-to-asset ratio of 6%.
What is the value of the equity multiplier for each of these institutions? Suppose that
both institutions have an ROA of 0.85%. What must each institution’s return on
equity capital be? What do your calculations tell you about the benefits of having as
little equity capital as regulations or the marketplace will allow? Points-5
Answers:
avoid plagrazem all instructions in the file attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Communications Management (MGT 421)
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
Use APA reference style.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1.2: Communicate better, knowing that good communicators make better managers and that
communication is a dynamic process basic to individuals and organizational life.
2.1: Perform all communication abilities, including thinking, writing, speaking, listening, and
assessing the technology.
Assignment Structure:
Assignment-1
Total
Type
Part-1
Part-2
Marks
5
5
10
Part I:
Write a detailed message to persuade your boss to invest capital resources to develop the
product or service for sale. Explain what you will do in case the selected product or
service does not initially sell as much as expected. Cite and reference sources using APA
formatting.
Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience,
and purpose.
Explain why you selected the channel.
Part II:
Write a sales pitch to sell the product/service to the end consumer. The sales pitch that
you write could be part of a marketing campaign, which can be the verbiage for a
commercial, a flyer, a message posted on social network, and so on. Make sure to
identify the context, as per the examples, in which the sales pitch will take place.
Select the appropriate channel for delivering your message based on context, audience,
and purpose and state the channel you have chosen.
Explain why you selected the channel.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes: Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds. Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world. It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns managers of financial institutions and general public as well. Question: What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points). Also answer the following questions. Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing. Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action. (1 point) Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up. Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action. (1 point)Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss. (1 point)Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use and implications of the efficient market hypothesis. (2 points)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
FIN402 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Financial Institutions and
Student’s Name:
Markets
Course Code: FIN402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Umme hani
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
1. Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world.
It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns
managers of financial institutions and general public as well.
Question: What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important
evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points). Also answer the
following questions.
a. Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors
are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing.
Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank
and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action. (1 point)
a. Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed
Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is
completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up.
Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action. (1
point)
b. Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss. (1 point)
c. Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the
stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use
and implications of the efficient market hypothesis. (2 points)
Answers:
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
C03: Categorize issues and concerns in global sourcing decisions
Prompt:
Discuss the use of Incoterms in international trade. At a minimum, address aspects such as the value Incoterms bring to an agreement, the advantages or disadvantages of using a specific Incoterm, and what companies need to know when using Incoterms.
Information from the International Chamber of Commerce about the newest Incoterms 2020 is available at their site: Which Incoterms rule should I use?
Instructions:
Label your Word document as follows: yourlastname.doc (ex: Johnson.docx)
Write a 1,000 word APA formatted paper on the use of Incoterms in international trade
All charts, graphs, pictures are to go in the appendix (not a substitute for content)
Make sure you use three to five credible and reliable resources; format in APA
Refrain from excessive use of quotes in your response (less than 5%)
Once you submit your document to the assignment folder it will automatically be loaded to TURNITIN.COM within the course. Your similarity scan score must be 20% or less (the following will be excluded: headers, bibliography, etc. prior to instructor grading paper—focus on the content of scan percentage)
Plagiarism will result in an automatic zero for this assignment
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your e-book (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1.What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for independence? Discuss. (Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2.Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can be applied to economic development in other nations? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and commercial base? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
This is an individual assignment.
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Cases
629
Economic Development in Bangladesh
When Bangladesh gained independence from Pakistan in
1971 after a brutal civil war that may have left as many as
3 million dead, the U.S. National Security Adviser, Henry
Kissinger, referred to the country as a “basket case.”
Kissinger’s assessment was accurate enough. At the time,
Bangladesh was one of the world’s poorest nations.
Although most of the country is dominated by the fertile
Ganges-Brahmaputra delta, a lack of other natural
resources, coupled with poor infrastructure, political
instability, and high levels of corruption, long held the
country back. To compound matters, Bangladesh is prone
to natural disasters. Most of Bangladesh is less than
12 meters above sea level. The extensive low-lying areas
are vulnerable to tropical cyclones, floods, and tidal bores.
Beginning in the mid-1990s, however, Bangladesh began
to climb the ladder of economic progress. From the early
2000s onward, the country grew its economy at around
6 percent per annum compounded. Today, this Muslim
majority country of 160 million people has joined the
ranks of lower-middle-income nations. Poverty reduction
has been dramatic, with the percentage of the population
living in poverty falling from 44.2 percent in 1991 to
18.5 percent in 2010, an achievement that raised 20.5 million people out of abject poverty. Today, the country ranks
64th out of the 154 countries included in the World Bank’s
global poverty database. It has a considerable way to go,
but it is no longer one of the world’s poorest countries.
Several reasons underlie Bangladesh’s relative economic success. In its initial post-independence period,
Bangladesh adopted socialist policies, nationalizing many
companies and subsidizing the costs of agricultural production and basic food products. These policies failed to
deliver the anticipated gains. Policy reforms in the 1980s
were directed toward the withdrawal of food and agricultural subsidies, the privatization of state-owned companies, financial liberalization, and the withdrawal of some
import restrictions. Further reforms aimed at liberalizing
the economy were launched in the 1990s. These included
making the currency convertible (which led to a floating
exchange rate in 2003), reducing import duties to much
lower levels, and removing most of the controls on the
movement of foreign private capital (which allowed for
more foreign direct investment). The reforms of the
1990s coincided with the transition to a parliamentary
democracy from semi-autocratic rule.
Bangladesh’s private sector has expanded rapidly since
then. Leading the growth has been the country’s vibrant
textile sector, which is now the second-largest exporter of
ready-made garments in the world after China. Textiles
account for 80 percent of Bangladesh’s exports. The
development of the textile industry has been helped by
the availability of low-cost labor, managerial skills, favorable trade agreements, and government policies that
eliminated import duties on inputs for the textile business, such as raw materials. The Bangladesh economy has
also benefited from its productive agricultural sector and
remittances from more than 10 million Bangladesh citizens who work in other nations. Bangladesh is also the
home of the microfinance movement, which has enabled
entrepreneurs with no prior access to the banking system
to borrow small amounts of capital to start businesses.
This being said, the country still faces considerable
impediments to sustaining its growth. Infrastructure
remains poor; corruption continues to be a major problem; and the political system is, at best, an imperfect
democracy where opposition is stifled. The country is too
dependent upon its booming textile sector and needs to
diversify its industrial base. Bangladesh is also one of the
countries most prone to the adverse affects of climate
change. A one-meter rise in sea level would leave an
estimated 10 percent of the country under water and
increase the potential for damaging floods in much of the
remainder. Nevertheless, according to the U.S. investment
bank Goldman Sachs, Bangladesh is one of the 11 lowermiddle-income nations poised for sustained growth.
Sources
W. Mahmud, S. Ahmed, and S. Mahajan, “Economic Reforms,
Growth, and Governance: The Political Economy Aspects of
Bangladesh’s Development Surprise,” World Bank Commission
on Development and Growth, 2008; “Freedom in the World
2016,” Freedom House; “Tiger in the Night,” The Economist,
October 15, 2016; Sanjay Kathuria, “How Will Bangladesh
Reach High Levels of Prosperity?” World Bank blog, January 5,
2017; and Qimiao Fan, “Bangladesh: Setting a Global Standard
in Ending Poverty,” World Bank blog, October 5, 2016.
Case Discussion Questions
1.
What were the principal reasons for the economic
stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for
independence?
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s
enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of
economic progress. What are the main lessons here
that can be applied to economic development in
other nations?
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon
agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks
here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial
and commercial base?
AVOID Plagraismeall instructions in the file attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wrote a response that highlights one or two key concepts you identified in a Leadership and Ethics case study from the https://mitsloan.mit.edu/teaching-resources-librar…
Throughout this course, you will have the opportunity to apply project management concepts to your Integrative Project (selected in PROJ-610). In this workshop, you will build upon your resource management plan by adding team development tools and techniques and a team performance assessment template and guidelines.
Upon successful completion of this assignment, you will be able to:
Construct a plan for team development.
Distinguish between types of work teams.
Create a team performance assessment to gauge effectiveness and cohesiveness.
Resources
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Video: Creating an Innovative Team – Leadership Training
Video: How to Get Things Done in Project Management
Video: What Is Cross-Functional Team? What Does Cross-Functional Team Mean?
[Note: The inclusion of publicly accessible video links in your courses and program should be considered neither a recommendation nor an endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.]
Background Information
Now that you have a solid understanding of team development concepts, you will build upon your resource management plan for your integrative project assignment. You will start by outlining three tools and techniques you will use for developing your team. Then, you will describe your ideal team type and composition. Finally, you will create a team performance assessment template and process to use for your project. Be sure to explain how each of these aspects of your resource management plan will increase team cohesiveness and effectiveness and gauge team performance.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the following resources, as needed:
PMP Exam Prep, Chapter 9: Resources, “Develop Team”
Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
Creating an Innovative Team – Leadership Training (3:30 min) and/or read the Creating an Innovative Team – Leadership Training Transcript (HTML)
How to Get Things Done in Project Management (4:09 min) and/or read the How to Get Things Done in Project Management Transcript (HTML)
What Is Cross-Functional Team? What Does Cross-Functional Team Mean? (2:59 min) and/or read the What Is Cross-Functional Team? What Does Cross-Functional Team Mean? Transcript (HTML)
In this assignment you will build upon the Resource Management Plan you started in Workshop Two.
Select three team development tools and techniques you plan to use to develop your team. Briefly describe how you will implement each tool and technique and explain how your process will enhance team cohesiveness and effectiveness.
Describe your team type and composition.
Create a team performance assessment template and process to use for your project. How will you measure team performance and gauge success?
Provide a brief introduction to the new plan components to explain how they will enhance team cohesiveness and performance.
Note: You may submit Workshop Two resource management plan components if you have made revisions and would like to request additional feedback, but you are not required to resubmit these components at this time.
Your submission should be a minimum of 350 words.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
When you’ve completed your assignment, save a copy for yourself and submit a copy to your instructor by the end of the workshop using the quick link or the Activities button.
Upon completion of this week’s activities, you will be able to:
Evaluate methods available to an authentic organization for the improvement of its global business ethics processes.
Analyze an ethical dilemma through the application of the ethical decision-making model.
9.2 Action Required:
Read the article available in the following link and answer the questions that follow:
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Haifa Al-Harith
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Teams can be set up in different ways. A team can be matrixed, meaning that the members come from different areas and disciplines. In your career, you may be on hundreds of projects and provide expertise from your own diverse background as part of a cross-functional team. A cross-functional team can tackle problems that span much of the width of a company. Having technical and business project team members has an advantage in cross-training and developing individuals who can work together to solve problems.
Upon successful completion of this discussion, you will be able to:
Apply a biblical perspective to team types and team development.
Resources
Website: Bible Gateway
Background Information
The disciples were a cross-functional team working with Jesus. Some were fishermen, but the team also included a zealot, a thief, a tax collector, and a tentmaker. Jesus was a teacher and led the team to start the initial Christian church.
The scripture talks about how people can help each other move toward a common goal. Moses needed a team of able men to serve as judges over the people in the Exodus. In business, it is useful for a team to come together, share their unique gifts, and work toward a common goal. In one such example, a group of 12 people of different backgrounds came together to usher in Christianity.
Iron sharpens iron, and one man sharpens another.Proverbs 27:17
Complete my joy by being of the same mind, having the same love, being in full accord and of one mind.Philippians 2:2
Moses chose able men out of all Israel and made them heads over the people, chiefs of thousands, of hundreds, of fifties, and of tens.Exodus 18:25
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Read the Introduction and Alignment and the Background Information sections.
Navigate to the discussion thread and respond to the following prompts:
Discuss a time when you had to brainstorm ideas with a group of people to solve a problem. What was interesting or unique about the process?
Did having different backgrounds or disciplines help or hinder the process?
In contrast to some of your prior courses, your initial post is due Day Three of the workshop, not Day Four.
Your initial post should be a minimum of 200 words and at least one reference.
Properly cite and reference one or more of the workshop’s sources in your original post.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
Read and respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings, as well as follow-up instructor questions directed to you, by the end of the workshop. Responses should be at least 100 words.
Your postings also should:
Be well developed by providing clear answers with evidence of critical thinking.
Add greater depth to the discussion by introducing new ideas.
Provide clarification to classmates’ questions and provide insight into the discussion
avoid plagrazem all instructions in the file attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Business Ethics and Organization Social Responsibility (MGT
422)
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
No
CLO-6
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Write coherent project about a case study or actual research about ethics
Critical Thinking
Consider yourself the Chief executive officer of a small enterprise. The enterprise
updated the compliance policy. Now one of the employee dumped dangerous waste into
a nearby stream.
Questions:
a. Who would you invite into your office and what information would you require?
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
b. How frequently you suggest that Enterprise policies and procedures be updated.
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
c. Prepare a long- and short-term action plan to address the situation. (700 words-5
Marks)
Answers
a.
b.
c.
Throughout this course, you will have the opportunity to discuss project management concepts, such as the tools and techniques most pertinent for successful project managers, with your classmates and your instructor. In this workshop, you will submit a discussion post sharing your knowledge of team development stages and the tools and techniques employed by successful project managers to develop teams.
Upon successful completion of this discussion, you will be able to:
Identify tools and techniques for team development.
Describe the stages of team development.
Delineate characteristics of effective work teams.
Resources
Textbook: Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Article: The Five Stages of Project Team Development
Video: Creating High-Performing Project Teams
Video: How to Motivate Your Project Management Team
[Note: The inclusion of publicly accessible video links in your courses and program should be considered neither a recommendation nor an endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.]
Background Information
Now that you have explored the team development process, the stages of team development, and the characteristics and types of effective work teams, you will reflect upon how these concepts will aid you in team development. You will discuss Tuckman’s five stages of team development and how team types may impact progressing through these stages. Additionally, you will share two tools and techniques used to develop project teams and explain how these tools enable team cohesiveness and effectiveness. It is crucial to understand that, in addition to individual team member development, a group that comes together to complete a project must also develop as a cohesive team.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the following resources, as needed:
PMP Exam Prep, Chapter 9: Resources
Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
Read the article The Five Stages of Project Team Development.
Watch the following videos:
Creating High-Performing Project Teams (7:19 min) and/or read the Creating High-Performing Project Teams Transcript (HTML)
How to Motivate Your Project Management Team (6 min) and/or read the How to Motivate Your Project Management Team Transcript (HTML)
Navigate to the threaded discussion and respond to the following prompt(s):
Describe the five stages of team development and their characteristics as discussed by Bruce Tuckman. Does team type impact these stages? If so, how?
List and explain two tools and techniques that are used to develop a team. How do these tools enable teams to be effective and cohesive?
In contrast to some of your prior courses, your initial post is due Day Three of the workshop, not Day Four.
Your initial post should be a minimum of 200 words and include at least one reference.
Properly cite and reference one or more of the workshop’s sources in your original post.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
Read and respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings, as well as follow-up instructor questions directed to you, by the end of the workshop. Responses should be at least 100 words.
Your postings also should:
Be well developed by providing clear answers with evidence of critical thinking.
Add greater depth to the discussion by introducing new ideas.
Provide clarification to classmates’ questions and provide insight into the discussion.
Hello, Please download the attached file to know the requirements of the final project.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Supply Chain final Project
The Supply Chain Council defined supply chain management as Managing
supply and demand, sourcing raw materials and parts, manufacturing and
assembly, warehousing and inventory tracking, order entry and order
management, distribution across all channels, and delivery to the customer.
In accordance with the above-mentioned definition, write a detailed report
about the sustainability in the supply at one of the following topics:
Companies:
1- Sustainable Supply chain management (SSCM)
2- Green Supply chain management
3- Reverse logistics
4- Close loop supply chain
5- Sustainable procurement
6- Green procurement
7- Green logistics
8- Sustainable distribution
9- Supply chain CSR
10- Lean supply chain
You can tackle the above topic from different perspective.
Keys for writing: (example)
Definition, enablers, barriers, motives, strategy, example of the success
company, describing the link between those topics with the company
performance.
Writing Instructions:
– Use font 12, single space, times new roman, minimum of 10 pages
– The project will be assessed on its creativity
– Plagiarism check (Less than 20%)
– There will be oral discussion and presentation for each project.(Under
each slide please write summary note that short explain the object of this slide).
Evaluation will be based on including all the required elements, plagiarism
check, references and on your creativity to make a relationship between
what you have studied and your project.
Throughout this course, you will be provided with many opportunities to synthesize the project management theories and practices you’ve learned about and to apply them to a specific business scenario or challenge. These cases will also require you to reflect upon your experiences that are relevant to project management competencies and processes. In this workshop, you will submit a brief analysis of a case scenario for a company developing a diverse team through team building activities and communications planning for an international project.
Upon successful completion of this assignment, you will be able to:
Examine factors of team diversity.
Compose a communication plan.
Plan effective team building activities.
Resources
Textbook: Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Video: How to Build a Project Team
Video: Project Management Team Building Ideas
Video: 2 Best Team Building Activities – Project Management Training
Video: The Five Dysfunctions of a Team
Video: Project Management Requires Skill Development
Video: What Is Cross-Functional Team? What Does Cross-Functional Team Mean?
[Note: The inclusion of publicly accessible video links in your courses and program should be considered neither a recommendation nor an endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.]
Background Information
Now that you have examined the traditional and the agile project management methodologies, you will reflect upon a specific project scenario that requires you to apply the project management concepts and best practices you have learned about in this workshop. Submit your recommendations for a communications plan and team building activity that will promote team cohesiveness and effectiveness. Think about the lack of colocation as well as factors of differences in culture, race, gender, age, and diversity of thought. Your communications plan should include recommendations for communications technologies and methods for the company’s diverse, virtual team. Additionally, you should describe the value of the team building activity in terms of building an appreciation for the diversity of team members and address how that value outweighs the costs of the activity.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the following resources, as needed:
PMP Exam Prep, Chapter 9: Resources
Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
Read the article Managing Talent: Bringing Out the Best in Your Team.
Watch the following videos:
How to Build a Project Team (4:12 min) and/or read the How to Build a Project Team Transcript (HTML)
Project Management Team Building Ideas (3:03 min) and/or read the Project Management Team Building Ideas Transcript (HTML)
2 Best Team Building Activities – Project Management Training (4:14 min) and/or read the 2 Best Team Building Activities – Project Management Training Transcript (HTML)
Read The Five Dysfunctions of a Team Transcript (HTML)
Read the Project Management Requires Skill Development Transcript (HTML)
What Is Cross-Functional Team? What Does Cross-Functional Team Mean?
In this assignment, you will assume that the team you designed in assignment 2.3 for CafeLatte has been assembled. Some team members, the design team, will be working primarily virtually, while most of the team will be working on the jobsite:
Create a Communication Plan: Identify tools for gathering teams virtually. Make sure to address and plan for communication issues. Additionally, the team needs a central repository for information sharing.
Propose a Team Building Activity: For your virtual team, draft a proposal outlining the plan for your team building activity. It should be inclusive and also encourage an appreciation of your team’s diverse talent and experience. If there is a cost for your activity, justify this cost by communicating the activity’s value proposition.
Your recommendations should be aligned with any potential challenges or issues you foresee for the team and be solidified with project management tools and techniques.
Your submission should be a minimum of 350 words.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
When you have completed your assignment, save a copy for yourself and submit a copy to your instructor by the end of the workshop using the quick link or the Activities button.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
10/22/23, 2:10 PM
Preview Rubric: PROJ640 3.3, 4.3, 5.3 Case Study, 3.4, 4.4, 5.4, 6.4 Integrative Project 2(C) x 4(L) (50 Pt) – 4FA2023 Talent Man…
PROJ640 3.3, 4.3, 5.3 Case Study, 3.4, 4.4, 5.4, 6.4 Integrative Project 2(C) x
4(L) (50 Pt)
Course: 4FA2023 Talent Management (PROJ-640-01B)
Criteria
Content Quality
Grammar, Spelling,
Length, and Citation
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Criterion Score
40 points
39 points
20 points
10 points
/ 40
(40 points possible)
(21-39 points possible)
(11-20 points possible)
(0-10 points possible)
You demonstrate clear,
insightful critical
thinking in the
application of the
project management
concepts, provide
sufficient specific
examples, and show all
your work.
You demonstrate
competent critical
thinking in the
application of the
project management
concepts, provide
limited specific
examples, and show
some of your work.
You demonstrate
limited critical thinking
in the application of
the project
management concepts,
provide no examples,
and fail to show your
work.
You demonstrate little
to no critical thinking
in the application of
the project
management concepts,
provide no examples,
and fail to show your
work.
10 points
9 points
6 points
3 points
(10 points possible)
(7-9 points possible)
(4-6 points possible)
(0-3 points possible)
You use complete
sentences with correct
spelling, punctuation,
and capitalization, as
well as varied diction
and word choices.
You have minor
sentence structure
errors (fragments, runons), with correct
spelling, punctuation,
and capitalization, but
limited diction and
word choices.
You have several
errors in sentence
fluency, with multiple
fragments or run-ons
and poor spelling,
punctuation, and/or
word choice.
You have serious and
persistent errors in
sentence fluency,
sentence structure,
spelling, punctuation,
and/or word choice.
Your assignment
length is correct, and
you follow APA
formatting.
Your assignment
length is correct, and
you follow APA
formatting with only
minor errors
Your assignment
length is inadequate,
and/or you follow APA
formatting, but your
writing contains
several errors.
Total
/ 10
Your assignment
length is inadequate,
and/or you do not
follow APA formatting.
/ 50
Overall Score
Total Points
0 points minimum
https://brightspace.indwes.edu/d2l/le/content/212093/viewContent/3642597/View
1/1
No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference .
✨Add references✨
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font .
No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
proper examples and explanations for each questions
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
Commit to the number of words specified for each questioN
the answer should be sufficient
TextBook:
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behavior: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number: S
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN: 14504
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Moin Uddin
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Describe the different types of budgets and the ways in which organizations rely upon them.
Describe the different forms of managed care organizations.
Compare and contrast the many payment methodologies used in health care.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation
Gain insights into the strategy-making processes of different types of organizations
9.2. Reading
Required
Chapter 7. Strategy Formation: Corporate Strategy
Textbook: Wheelen, T. L., Hunger, D., Hoffman, A. N., & Bamford, C. E. (2014). Concepts in strategic management and business policy (14th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN-13: 9780133126129 (print), 9780133126433 (e-text)
Recommended
Andersson, H., & Janson, G. (2012). Evaluating a corporate strategy: A case study of Länsförsäkringar. Available via https://stud.epsilon.slu.se/4453/1/Andersson_et_al_120703.pdf
9.3. Test your knowledge (Max 100 words for every question)
Question 1
How is corporate parenting different from portfolio analysis? How is it alike? Is it a useful concept in a global industry?
Question 2
What are the tradeoffs between an internal and an external growth strategy? Which approach is best as an international entry strategy?
9.4. Instructions
Answer both questions in the test your knowledge section
Digital assets like cryptocurrency and NFT’s are gaining importance in finance and business. In this module, we will explore the FASB’s position on these new type of assets.
Part 1:
1. Explore Cryptocurrency
You can do your own research as well.
2. What is the FASB doing to regulate these digital assets?
FASB Homes in on Cryptocurrency
FASB’s handout on Digital Assets
From the KPMG library
FASB finalizes crypto rules
Assignment Part 1: Go to fasb.org. Find information about its latest regulation on cryptocurrencies/digital assets. Answer the following questions (1 page)
Why did the FASB want to regulate these “assets”?
How are cryptocurrencies to be treated according to the new rules?
Do you agree with the rules? Why or why not?
Assignment Part 2: Access the Wall Street Journal database from our library. Find the article “More U.S. Companies Wade Into NFTs Despite Lack of Accounting Rules”.
Read the article and answer the following questions: (1 – 2 pages)
What is an NFT? How is one created? How are they valued?
How do you think NFTs should be reported in a business’ accounting records? Why?
What is the SEC? What are its areas of authority? How could the SEC be involved in these accounting and reporting issues?
What is GAAP? What are non-GAAP metrics? How do they differ? How might businesses use GAAP or non-GAAP metrics in accounting for NFTs? What issues could this cause?
What is fair value accounting? How could it be applied to accounting for NFTs?
What is the FASB? What is its area of authority? Why does the organization have authority over accounting rules? What is the FASB doing regarding accounting rules for NFTs?
What are the issues and challenges related to accounting for NFTs? How could these issues be remedied?
Combine both answers into ONE pdf or Word document and upload here. Do NOT upload separate documents for each part of the assignment. PLEASE done use CHATGPT
avoid plagarzem9.1 Learning Outcomes:
Understand the factors an entrepreneur should consider before launching into e-commerce.
Explain the 10 myths of e-commerce and how to avoid falling victim to them.
Explain the basic strategies entrepreneurs should follow to achieve success in their e-commerce efforts.
Identify the techniques of designing a killer website.
Explain how companies track the results from their websites.
Describe how e-businesses ensure the privacy and security of the information they collect and store from the web.
9.2 Action Required:
Watch the short video at the following link
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a3F4T4OssmA9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Explain the guidelines for building a successful Web strategy for a small e-company
9.4 Instructions
Answer the question available in the “Test your Knowledge” section
avoid plagiarismall instructions in the file attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment 1 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• This assignment is an individual assignment.
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-1 students will be able to understand the
LO 1.1: Recognize the overall knowledge management processes, concepts, goals and
strategies within the context of organization.
LO 1.2: Describe how valuable individual, group and organizational knowledge is
managed throughout the knowledge management cycle.
Assignment Questions:
(10 Marks)
This Assignment is a report-based assignment. Read chapter 1, 2 and 3 thoroughly to answer
the Assignment questions.
The Assignment structure is as follows:
A. Conceptual Framework: (5 Marks)
Introduction:
➢ The introduction part must clearly highlight the concept of knowledge and how is
it different from Data, and Information.
➢ Briefly describe the term knowledge management. Explain two basic types of
knowledge.
➢ Why is Knowledge management in present day organisations.
(Provide minimum 3 references to support your answer.)
B. Knowledge management cycle: ( 5 Marks)
➢ Discuss in detail the Meyer and Zack knowledge management cycle and Bukowitz
and Williams knowledge management cycle.
➢ Describe how the major types of knowledge (i.e., tacit and explicit) are transformed
in the Nonaka and Takeuchi knowledge spiral model of KM.
➢ How is the Wiig KM model related to the Nonaka and Takeuchi model? In what
important ways do they differ?
(Support each part of the assignment with Proper references)
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
• Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 ()
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Answer:
Chapter 8 HomeworkComplete the Leader’s Self-Insights for the chapter. Write at least a paragraph for each. Describe in that paragraph your results (specific scores) and what the results mean. Include corroborating examples from your personal experiences and beliefs to support or refute the findings in each of the instruments. Use APA format with 12 font, a heading, and double space.————————————————————————-Only Chapter 8 Please from the uploaded file
Create a unique TITLE for your work
2 Pages in length (600 –700 words)
Set up / Introduce your position
Logic – Clarity in stating your opinion/argument
Why – Delivery of effective statements that support your opinions
Wrap Up – Bring it all together with a strong conclusion
The Ideal sponsor relationship is one in which:
“The business partner, through its association with an event, realizes marketing benefits in EXCESS of its investment and offers an event value BEYOND its financial participation”
Please detail the three things YOU feel were most valuable/interesting/relevant and how they will impact you from this point forward., use it to help trigger YOUR thoughts!
Properties want to keep their uniqueness to be more valuable(commercial value)
Industry categories and the value of exclusivity (plus fragmenting in some categories)
Brand alignment in both directions (Seller – Buyer / Buyer – Seller)
Recommendations for success include being SPECIFIC. BE CLEAR where you stand! Remember: Intro + Support + Strong Conclusion please.
You are required to write an essay (1750 words) that provides a theoretically informed analysis of an issue currently being experienced by companies engaged in international business. The analysis must include at least two photographs, or digital artefacts, that are central to the argument developed in the essay and must include a discussion of the implications for practice and/or policy. Develop an essay on one of the following issues:
1) Identify and critically evaluate what you consider to be the three most important current risks faced by companies engaged in international business. Pay attention to justifying the focus on these three risks.
2) Critically evaluate two disruptive innovations that have impacted on companies engaged in international business. Pay attention to justifying the focus on these two innovations.
3) Compare and critically evaluate linear versus circular economy approaches to the practice of international business.
4) Identify and critically evaluate two contrasting business models developed and applied by international businesses. Pay attention to justifying the focus on these two business models.
5) Critically evaluate two ways in which geographic context matters for the practice of international business. Pay attention to justifying the focus on these two ways.
6) Identify and critically evaluate some of the advantages and/or disadvantages obtained by international businesses that engage in responsible business practices. Pay attention to justifying the focus on these advantages, and/or disadvantages.
Notes:
i) Clearly indicate at the top of your answer which issue you are attempting.
ii) The expectation is that all answers will include at least 12 peer reviewed publications.
My part is SWOT analysis, the task is all except key options, the requirement is to be able to write three to four pages, this time we are writing around Zora in China. The content has a check rate .
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MKTG 4840 – Zara case/research assignment
Use the one-page Marketing Plan handout in Canvas for the structure of your research
paper. One handout has the basic structure; a second has questions you can answer for
each part. The two-page marketing plan outline also posted there is a more detailed
structure. It is not necessary to use everything in that outline, but might be helpful
Your second research project is Zara Goes Global. There are a number of articles posted
in the Zara folder to get you started on your research. You should access at least five
more research sources such as Inditex Annual Reports. Keep in mind that the company
needs to further penetrate existing markets while developing new ones.
A few questions you might consider: How does Zara fit into the Inditex product mix?
Who are Zara’s primary competitors? What should they do to continue (or initiate) sales
growth in attractive markets? And who/where are those target customers? Can Zara
maintain its current distribution model as it expands geographically? What research
might they do to inform future expansion? How can Zara maximize global brand
exposure given its limited promotion budget? In what particular market/county
(excluding the U.S.) can Zara enter for the first time – or expand operations? The
intention would be to increase next year’s sales for the company.
Your team should investigate the company and industry (a minimum of five additional
sources) using an expanded SWOT format and then put together a recommendation in the
form of a brief marketing plan:
1) your market and company analysis
2) clear quantifiable objectives: company-wide AND for a specific country
of your choice (other than the U.S.)
3) a positioning statement strategy and
4) tactical details re: the Marketing Mix and further research
recommendations primarily for your specific target country.
Your case response should be about twelve to fourteen doublespaced pages and at the most fifteen pages long.
Team size is a minimum of two and a maximum of four students.
NOTE – If you are not familiar with SWOT analysis then you should review the PPT and
link on Canvas (SWOT presentation and SWOT help respectively). To understand how to
frame your Marketing Strategy you may also benefit from the PPT stack re: positioning.
Be prepared to discuss your specific country recommendations in class and
give insightful tactics supported by your research re: the elements of the
Marketing Mix (for five attendance points added to the possible 15 points
for the written response = total of 20 points).
S.W.O.T Analysis
Strengths
• High cost performance
•
Committed to environmental protection and insisting on sustainable
development
Weaknesses
Opportunities
•
•
•
•
•
Transform towards high-end and increase product standards
Consumers are also paying more and more attention to environmental
protection and sustainable development
Increase the frequency of designer collaborations, invite celebrities,
influencers to promote products, and increase advertising
China has a huge clothing manufacturing industry chain and a large
labor force
Set up special price areas to attract low-price enthusiasts while
reducing unsaleable inventory
•
Threats
Key Opportunities
According to data from London Stock Exchange Group (LSEG), in the six
months ended July 31, 2023, Zara parent company Inditex’s net profit was 2.5
billion euros ($2.7 billion), a half-year increase of 40%, exceeding
expectations. One of the key factors leading to this growth is that “Zara has
sought to attract more aspirational shoppers by associating its brand with
luxury, as opposed to fast fashion.” Since Marta Ortega Pérez was appointed
chair of Inditex in December 2021, Inditex stock price has increased by
approximately 50%. In her personal interview, she said: “Fast fashion
suggests a compromise to quality, which is completely the opposite of what
we look for.” This shows that what Inditex Group is currently advocating is to
build a high-end brand. This is a major transformation and breakthrough.
Improving quality will lead to higher costs and higher selling prices. At present,
Inditex’s profitability shows the initial success of this decision.
Looking at the needs of today’s Chinese consumers, 40% of users choose
quality (fabrics/cutting/workmanship, etc.) as the primary factor in their
clothing, footwear and hats consumption decisions. This is consistent with the
current brand focus of Inditex Group, and consumers are also willing to spend
more money than before to buy better quality products. “Providing the highest
quality at affordable and stable prices” will give Zara more opportunities in the
Chinese and even global markets.
Zara’s investment in advertising has not been large for a long time, with
annual advertising expenses accounting for only 0.3% of sales. However, in
2018, Zara invited two well-known actors as spokespersons in China for the
first time, which brought real benefits to the brand. The Chinese market
currently relies heavily on traffic and popularity, and celebrity effects are
highly respected among Chinese consumers. Therefore, continuing to invite
celebrities and influencers to promote on well-known Chinese websites such
as Xiaohongshu, Douyin, Weibo, etc., as well as increasing the frequency of
cooperation with designers is the key. At the beginning of this year, Zara
launched a joint collaboration series with Chinese designer brand
CALVINLUO, aiming to promote local design creativity and value, attracting
CALVINLUO’s own fans and a wider audience, thereby increasing brand
sales and continuing to introduce outstanding designers to China and the
world. This is a win-win move, realizing a key opportunity to increase profits.
Potential Threats
Q1. What are the different ways available for the corporations to distribute income among the shareholders? Suppose a firm promises to pay dividends of $200,000 every year in perpetuity with 200,000 shares outstanding. Assume a discount rate of 11.1%. What is the present value of one of the firm’s shares? Q2. What is Stock repurchase? Explain the four ways to implement stock repurchase. Q3. Calculate the rate at which a firm can grow without changing its leverage if its payout ratio is 30%; equity outstanding at the beginning of the year is $9,500,000; and its net income for the year is $2,000,000. Q4. What do you mean by Long term financial planning? Take an example and explain the sales percentage model of financial planning.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Corporate Finance (FIN-201)
Due Date: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Corporate Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN-201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11690
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Firoz Alam
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Answer the following questions:
Q1. What are the different ways available for the corporations to distribute income
among the shareholders? Suppose a firm promises to pay dividends of $200,000 every
year in perpetuity with 200,000 shares outstanding. Assume a discount rate of 11.1%.
What is the present value of one of the firm’s shares?
(2 marks)
Q2. What is Stock repurchase? Explain the four ways to implement stock repurchase.
(3 marks)
Q3. Calculate the rate at which a firm can grow without changing its leverage if its payout
ratio is 30%; equity outstanding at the beginning of the year is $9,500,000; and its net
income for the year is $2,000,000.
(2 marks)
Q4. What do you mean by Long term financial planning? Take an example and explain the
sales percentage model of financial planning.
(3 marks)
Answers:
Hello,Please answer the below listening skills survey as mentioned guidelines below document and screenshots and write the answers as per that
Unformatted Attachment Preview
LISTENING SKILL SURVEY
Listening Skill Survey
Instructions: Place a check mark next to the habit if you use that habit 50% to 100% of your listening
time.
____ 1. If a topic is uninteresting, I tune it out.
____ 2. I work to minimize distractions in my listening environment by putting my phone
on voice mail, turning down the radio, or going to a quiet office for conversations.
____ 3. I tend to respond emotionally to arguments with which I disagree or language I
find objectionable.
____ 4. I refuse to allow unexpected distractions to interfere with my concentration and
focus my mind on the speaker and his/her content.
____ 5. I evaluate and judge the wisdom of what I have heard before checking my
interpretation with the speaker.
____ 6. I work to ignore a speaker’s mannerisms or delivery and focus my attention on
the message.
____ 7. I develop arguments to refute what a speaker is saying so I can answer quickly
when he/she is done talking.
____ 8. I accept the emotional sentiments expressed by the speaker and use these to help
me understand the content of the message.
____ 9. I am easily distracted by the annoying or affected elements of a speaker’s delivery.
____ 10. I try not to let emotional language or strong disagreement with a speaker’s ideas
interfere with my concentration on the message.
____ 11. I don’t write the gist of important conversations on paper for future reference.
____ 12. I try to listen for something useful in even the most dull topics.
____ 13. I am uncomfortable with emotional displays and try to ignore these elements of a message.
____ 14. I look at a speaker’s face, eyes, body posture, and movement, and pay attention to other
nonverbal cues while listening.
____ 15. I tend to drift into other topics and concerns while listening.
____ 16. I use speaker’s pauses and the time he/she spends forming ideas to identify the structure
of the ideas, summarize the content, or anticipate where the argument is headed.
____ 17. I ask questions about what I’ve heard before letting the speaker know what I have
heard and understood.
____ 18. I take notes on the major themes covered in my conversations.
____ 19. I think about other topics and concerns while listening.
____ 20. It is easy for me to ignore the unusual mannerisms of a speaker and focus on the message.
____ 21. I tend to drift into my own thoughts if the speaker speaks slowly or seems to take an unusual
path to his/her points.
____ 22. I often paraphrase or summarize what I have heard before making my own comments.
A Plan for Improvement
In this survey, the even-numbered questions represent effective listening habits. The oddnumbered questions represent ineffective listening habits. Thus, all of the even-numbered
statements that you checked represent your most effective habits while all the odd-numbered
statements that you checked represent your most ineffective listening habits.
Look over your analysis and determine your three most ineffective listening habits. In the space
below, write down those three habits.
Now that you have identified your worst listening habits, develop a plan to change your single
worst habit. Remember that changing ingrained habits requires conscious attention! Practice your
new listening behaviors as often as it takes to become habitual.
To overcome the habit, I plan to do the following:
Assignment for Grades:
1. Working with Data I
Refer to the 2022 Baseball data, which reports information on the 30 Major
League Baseball teams for the 2022 season. (6 points)
a. Develop a 95 percent confidence interval for the mean number of errors
committed (Errors) by each team and interpret the results. (2 points)
b. Develop a 90 percent confidence interval for the mean number of stolen bases
(SB) by each team and interpret the results. (2 points)
c. Develop a 99 percent confidence interval for the mean number of home runs (HR)
per team and interpret the results. (2 points)
2. Working with Data II
Refer to NBA Player Performance data for 2022-23 season (6 points)
a. Develop a 95 percent confidence interval for the mean minutes per game (MPG)
of the NBA players in the 2022-2023 season and interpret the results.
b. Develop a 90 percent confidence interval for the mean 2-point field goal
percentage (@2p in the dataset) of the NBA players in the 2022-2023 season and
interpret the results.
c. Construct a histogram with a normal curve for the 2-point field goal percentage
variable (@2p in the dataset) of the NBA players in the 2022-2023 season. Is this
dataset normally distributed? Explain its distribution.
3. Exercise.com (8 points)
In this excise, we will determine if corporate president/CEOs’ compensations are related
to company performance by constructing a scatterplot. We will examine two types of
travel business corporations: airlines and leisure/event services.
President/CEO annual compensations and company annual revenues of the following five
airline companies will be studied:
For data consistency, I
Delta Air Lines, Inc. (DAL_ Edward H. Bastian)
United Continental Holdings, Inc. (UAL_ J. Scott Kirby)
Alaska Air Group (ALK_ Benito Minicucci)
American Airlines Group Inc. (AAL_ Robert D. Isom Jr.)
JetBlue Airways Corporation (JBLU_Robin N. Hayes)
filtered the corporate
leaders for this
exercise. The
President/CEO/
Director names are
included in the
parenthesis
President/CEO annual compensations and company annual revenues of the following
leisure/event service providers will be compared to those of the airlines:
Carnival Corporation (CCL_Joshua Ian Weinstein)
Cedar Fair L.P. (FUN_ Richard A. Zimmerman)
MGM Resorts International (MGM_ William J. Hornbuckle IV)
Live National Entertainment, Inc. (LYV_ Michael Rapino)
Six Flags Entertainment Co. (SIX_ Selim Bassoul)
You need to find out the above corporate leaders’ compensations and company
revenues from
http://quote.yahoo.com
1. On Yahoo Finance home page, type DAL (ticker symbol for Delta Air Lines Inc.,
tickers for all the companies are provided in parenthesis after the company names
above) in the Quote Lookup target as illustrated below:
2. Click DAL ticker. Basic financial data and an one-day stock performance chart come
up:
3. Click Profile as shown in the above screenshot. A page containing company contact
and key leadership team information comes up.
4. From the Key Executives table, select CEO & Director for this study by writing the
name and annual compensation for 2022 (data for Pay). For Delta Air Lines, Inc.,
CEO is: Edward H. Bastian and compensation was $3.91million in 2022.
5. Then select Statistics on Delta company page (see below).
6. Scroll down the page to Income Statement in the Financial Highlights section, you
will see Revenue of $57.262 billion for Delta Air Lines, Inc. in 2022.
7. Use the list of President/CEO/Director pre-selected for this study and continue to
gather the data for the President/CEO/Director’s salary and company’s revenues (the
reporting period for revenue may vary from company to company due to fiscal year
reporting schedule, but we will use the revenue reported in Yahoo Finance database
for this exercise).
Once you collect all the data, perform the following data entry and analysis:
a. Use four variables for this exercise: CEO name, type of industry (airline or
leisure, or use your own coding to define the two types of businesses), CEO
annual salary and company revenue. You can name these variables the way
you want.
b. Code the type of industry in two categories: such as airline and leisure.
c. Construct a simple scatterplot by setting the markers for the type of industry
and labeling the cases by President/CEO/Director’s name.
d. Discuss the relationship between company revenues and top executive salary.
Is there a relationship between the two variables for all the companies or just
one type of the industry? Can you identify any other relationships between
the two variables?
the details in the word document, the start file is YouCanHelp.2
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
1. Open the presentation YouCanHelp-02 downloaded from the Start File link.
2. The file will be renamed automatically to include your name. Change the project file
name if directed to do so by your instructor.
3. Display slide 1 and adjust the title.
a. Change the Text Fill color to Dark Red, Accent 1, Darker 25% (fifth color/fifth
row).
b. Apply the Text Effect of Bevel and choose Angle (first option/second row).
c. Change the Font Size to 80 pt.
d. Resize the placeholder on the right so one word is on each line and move it
down slightly (Figure 2-182).
Figure 2-182 Slide 1 with picture and title changes
Photo Source: G.K. & Vikki Hart/Getty Images
4. Resize a picture and remove a background color.
a. Select the dog picture on slide 1.
b. Increase the picture size (Height 6″ and Width automatically adjusts).
c. Use Set Transparent Color to remove the white area in the picture.
d. Position the dog picture on the left (see Figure 2-182).
5. Apply a picture style.
a. Display slide 2 and increase the picture size
(Width 8″ and Height automatically adjusts).
b. Apply the Moderate Frame, Black picture style.
c. Choose Align Center and position the picture near the top of the slide.
6. Insert a text box on slide 2 and type the following text:
a. Our operating funds come through donations and pet adoption fees.
7. Format the slide 2 text box.
a. Change the Font Color to White, Background 1 (first color/first row).
b. Change the Font Size to 20 pt.
c. Change the Shape Fill to Black, Text 1 (second color/first row).
2
d. Change the Shape Outline to White, Background 1 and the Weight to 3 pt.
e. Resize the text box so the text wraps on two lines (Figure 2-183).
Figure 2-183 Slide 2 with picture and text box inserted
Photo Source: David De Lossy/age fotostock
f. Choose Align Center and position the text box below the picture.
8. Copy and paste a slide.
a. Select the slide 2 thumbnail and press Ctrl+C.
b. Move your insertion point after slide 3 and press Ctrl+V.
9. Format the new slide 4.
a. Replace the text in the text box below the picture with the words We Need
Your Help!
b. Resize the text box to fit the text and center it horizontally under the picture.
c. Select the picture and change the Color to Orange, Accent color 2
Dark (third option/second Recolor row) (Figure 2-184).
Figure 2-184 Slide 4 with picture recolored
Photo Source: G.K. & Vikki Hart/Getty Images, David De Lossy/age fotostock
3
10. Convert a list to a SmartArt graphic.
a. Display slide 5 and convert the list to a Vertical Bullet List SmartArt graphic.
b. Increase the SmartArt frame Height to 4.7″ so the text size increases.
c. Reduce the Width to 9″.
d. Apply the Cartoon SmartArt Style (third 3D option).
e. Move the SmartArt graphic to the right as shown in Figure 2-185.
Figure 2-185 SmartArt graphic converted from bulleted text and a 3D
Model
11. Insert a 3D Model.
a. Display slide 5.
b. Click the 3D Models button and select Stock 3D Models.
c. Search for the word dog and insert the beagle (Figure 2-186).
Figure 2-186 3D Model
d. Rotate the dog to face the SmartArt graphic. If you are not satisfied with the
rotation, click Reset 3D Model, and rotate again.
e. Change the Height to 2.8″ and position the dog on the left.
4
f. Adjust the spacing as shown in Figure 2-185.
12. Insert a new slide after slide 5 with a Title and Content layout.
a. Type the title Items We Need on slide 6.
b. Insert a table with 3 columns and 5 rows.
c. Type the text in Table 2-18.
Table 2-18
This table provides the column headings and data for the table
created in steps 12a-b.
Cleaning
Paper Products and
Bedding
Dog and Cat Play
Bleach
Paper Towels
Dog and Cat Treats
Pine Sol
Paper Plates
Chewies
Mop Heads
Plastic Containers
with Lids
Collars
Towels
Blankets
Leashes
d. Increase the Font Size to 20 pt.
e. Adjust column width so each column fits the longest line of text (Figure 2187).
Figure 2-187 Slide 6 table completed
f. Center the table on the slide using Align Center and Align Middle.
13. Insert and format two icons on slide 6.
a. Click the Icons button to open the dialog box.
b. Select the Animals category, choose both a cat and a dog icon, and
click Insert.
c. Change the cat Height to 2″ and the Width automatically adjusts.
5
d. Position the cat above the table (Figure 2-188).
Figure 2-188 Icons inserted
e. Change the dog Height to 3.5″ and the Width automatically adjusts.
f. Position the dog below the table on the right.
14. Convert a list to a SmartArt graphic.
a. Display slide 7 and open the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box. In
the Picture group, select the Picture Lineup SmartArt graphic (first option/
seventh row).
• Each picture placeholder is automatically sized.
b. Insert five pictures (going from left to right) by following these steps:
• Click the Picture icon on a shape to open the Insert Pictures dialog box.
• Click From a File.
• Browse to locate the resource files downloaded from the Resources link.
• Select the related picture and click Insert (Figure 2-189):
Figure 2-189 Slide 6 SmartArt graphic picture layout
Photo Source: Helen Sushitskaya/Shutterstock, skynesher/E+/Getty
Images,
sonyae/123RF, Lew Robertson/Getty Images, Thomas Barwick/Getty
Images
6
This table lists the pictures and the order that they should be inserted into the Picture Lineup
smartart graphic.
1
DayCare-02
2
CountryStroll-02
3
RoyalTreatment-02
4
Food-02
5
Groom-02
15. Apply the Gallery transition to all slides.
16. Save and close the presentation (Figure 2-190).
Figure 2-190 PowerPoint 2-6 completed
Photo Source: G.K. & Vikki Hart/Getty Images, David De Lossy/age fotostock,
Photodisc/Getty Images, David De Lossy/age fotostock, Helen
Sushitskaya/Shutterstock, skynesher/E+/Getty Images, sonyae/123RF, Lew
Robertson/Getty Images, Thomas Barwick/Getty Images
17. Upload and save your project file.
18. Submit file for grading.
You
Can Help!
Kelly Sung, Director of Services
Life’s Animal Shelter
Weekly Expenses
Expenses
Electricity
Equipment
Food
Heat
Medicine
Wages
Totals
Totals
$143.31
$1,638.85
$2,416.27
$186.86
$3,725.87
$4,425.18
$12,536.34
Ways to Donate
Donate Funds to LAS
For food and necessary veterinary care of shelter pets
Buy Fundraiser Items
Donated products—most are crafted by volunteers
Good Samaritan Fund
Provides financial help to people so they can help their own pets
Donate Needed Supplies
Household and animal care items
Ways to Volunteer
Assist with day care
Take canine country strolls
Royal treatment with one-on-one play and attention
Assist with food preparation
Assist with bathing and grooming
Summit Ridge Mountain Resorts has decided to expand. Because of the popularity of the resort among the business community and families, Summit Ridge has decided to purchase some apartments for guests and seasonal employees to have an extended stay. Because these will prove to be a long-term investment, Summit Ridge has decided to put all complexes on a remodeling rotation to ensure the apartments each have a modern and functional style.
It is now your job to analyze the information regarding the apartments. The owners are looking for some specific information about rentals by apartment size (such as the number of bedrooms per apartment). Based on current housing interest rates, Summit Ridge is considering a sixth apartment complex and has asked you to perform some financial calculations and analyses to determine how adding this new complex to their portfolio enhances the resort’s financial position. They will then use this information to come up with a marketing plan to attract additional customers to the resort.
Remember that you are making a professional analysis and presentation, so be sure to give some thought to what you are trying to recommend to the management of Summit Ridge and why.
Deliverables
After completing the steps below, turn in one Excel workbook. Rename the workbook with your lastname_first initial_Week9_Lab. xlsx. Example: If your name were Jane Doe, your workbook would be Doe_J_Week9_Lab.xlsx.
WEEK 5 GRADING RUBRIC
Lab 5 – Mountain Statistical Analysis
Step Task Points Possible Points Received Comments
1 Insert Functions
1a Insert nested function for pet deposit 5
1b Insert nested function for Remodeling Status 5
1c Apply professional formatting to data, headers, etc. 3
2a Create a search
2a, b Use the INDEX function to give the rental price based on unit # 5
3 Loan Amortization
3a Complete Summary Calculations based on data provided in Input area 5
3a Calculate Monthly Payment and Total Interest over the life of the loan 3
3B In the loan amortization table., Use a date function for the Payment Date and financial functions for Interest and principle 4
3b Calculate the ending and beginning balance and then copy the rows down to complete at least 10 months of the amortization schedule 5
4 Conditional Functions
4a,b On the Employee Satisfaction worksheet, calculate the average job satisfaction for each role in the company 6
4c,d Calculate the Average salary for all employee types 6
4e Calculate Number and Average salary for Sales & Marketing Directors with >=4 Satisfaction 6
4g Apply Count and average salary to Managers 6
4h Create a Pivot Table based on employee role to compare satisfaction and salary averages 8
5 Documentation
5a,c Add and complete a Documentation sheet with all required information, including sheet descriptions 4
5b Ensure tabs have descriptive names and distinct colors 4
Comment: What you learned from completing this Lab 5
TOTAL POINTS 80 0
Lab Resources
MICROSOFT OFFICE: EXCEL
Lab Steps
Preparation
You will be using Microsoft Excel for this lab.
Be sure you have read the required chapter materials and reviewed the hands-on exercise videos located on the Lesson page before you begin the lab.
Please do not rely solely on the hands-on exercise videos to complete this week’s lab. The videos provide detailed examples walking you through the hands-on exercises. Applying the hands-on exercise examples will provide both practice and instruction of what to complete.
Begin: Open and Save
Download the spreadsheet Copy of Student_File_Week5.xlsxDownload Copy of Student_File_Week5.xlsx
To save the spreadsheet with a new file name,
open the workbook in Excel and
in Excel, click File, then Save as, and rename it as lastname_first initial_Week5_Lab.xlsx (Jane Doe would save the file as Doe_J_Week5_Lab.xlsx).
Step 1: Insert Functions
Select the Search worksheet and then the Pet Deposit column. Create a formula to determine the required pet deposit for each unit. If the unit has two or more bedrooms and was remodeled after 2006, the deposit is $150; if not, it is $100.
The Recommendation column needs a nested function to indicate the remodeling status. If the apartment is unoccupied and has not been remodeled before 2006, then display “Please remodel” in the Recommendation column. Display ” ~ No Change” for apartments that do not meet the former criteria.
Make sure each field has the appropriate professional formatting for titles, headers, currency, percent, and so forth. Your worksheets need to be readable, clean, and professional. Please let spell-check work for you; use this feature to check for spelling errors.
Step 2: Quick Search
Now that all of the rental properties are listed and organized, the owners would like to be able to search through the apartment numbers and return the price of the apartment number listed.
Insert number 1301 in cell B3. B3 is the cell that will be used to research apartment unit prices.
Create a nested lookup function in cell E3. Look up the rental price in column D using the apartment unit number in cell B3. (Use the INDEX function.)
Make sure each field has the appropriate professional formatting for titles, headers, currency, percent, and so forth. Your worksheets need to be readable, clean, and professional. Please let spell-check work for you; use this feature to check for spelling errors.
Step 3: New Apartment Loan Amortization
Summit Ridge Ski owners want to purchase a sixth apartment complex. This decision is under review. Here are the details of their offer. The loan amount is $950,000 with a down payment of $400,000 for 30 years at 5.325%, with the first payment due on January 20, 2017. Please consider the loan calculations and build a loan amortization table on the Loan worksheet. Click on the Loan worksheet to begin.
Enter the loan details provided above in the Input Area and place formulas to create all calculations in the Summary Calculations. The loan payment is at the end of the period.
Create a loan amortization table. The Payment Date column needs a date function. The Interest Paid and Principal Payment columns require financial functions.
Create a custom footer with your name on the left side, the page and page number in the center, and your professor’s name on the right side of each worksheet. Make sure you put the page back to normal view after you insert the footer at the bottom.
Loan Details
Step 4: Conditional Functions
In addition to adding the new apartments to their financial portfolios, the owners of Summit Ridge Ski Resort would like to ensure that they are paying their employees at market value and want to continue to encourage employees to stay with the company. Another phase of your project is to research all employee salaries to see if they have any effect on job satisfaction. Employee satisfaction surveys allow the company to get a pulse for how content employees are. A voluntary survey was administered to a cross-section sample of all employees in the company. This next bit of work will be on the Employee Satisfaction Worksheet.
Calculate the average job satisfaction for Administrative Assistant in cell I5. Format the results with the number format and two decimal positions.
Use the fill handle from cell I5 to copy the function down through the range I6:I11. Make certain to consider the appropriate mixed and/or absolute cell referencing.
Calculate the average salary of all Administrative Assistants and place the result in cell J5.
Use the fill handle from cell J5 to copy the function down through the range J6:J11. Make certain to consider the appropriate mixed and/or absolute cell referencing.
Calculate the number of Sales and Marketing Directors in cell I14 that have a job satisfaction level of 4 or above.
Calculate the average salary of Sales and Marketing Directors in cell I15 that have a job satisfaction level of 4 or above.
Use a process like that demonstrated in steps E and F to calculate the total number and the average salary of Managers that have a job satisfaction of 4 or greater.
Use the Employee Satisfaction data to create a Pivot Table showing the average salary and Job Satisfaction by Position (rows). Format professionally and sort highest salary to lowest.
Step 5: Create a Documentation Sheet
Clean up the formatting of your Excel workbook, taking into account professional appearance.
The Minimum Requirement (per the Grading Rubric)
Insert a new spreadsheet into the workbook. The Documentation sheet should be the first sheet in the workbook.
Make certain each tab has a descriptive name and color for each tab (sheet) in the workbook.
Create the professional documentation worksheet. Be sure to include a description of each worksheet. An image is provided below.
Week 5 Documentation Sheet
Transcript
Finish and Submit
Save your Excel file. Make sure you are aware as to where your files are physically saved. Saving your file often is good practice (Ctrl + s).
Submit one workbook. When submitting the workbook, provide a comment in the comments area explaining what you learned from completing this lab activity. File naming convention: If your name is Jane Doe, then your file should be named very similar to Doe_J_Week9_Lab.xlsx.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Stay a While Longer – Apartments Search
Unit #
Unit # Apartment Complex
1101 Turning Leaf Circle
1102 Turning Leaf Circle
1103 Turning Leaf Circle
1104 Turning Leaf Circle
1105 Turning Leaf Circle
1106 Turning Leaf Circle
1107 Turning Leaf Circle
1108 Turning Leaf Circle
1109 Turning Leaf Circle
1110 Turning Leaf Circle
1201 Turning Leaf Circle
1202 Turning Leaf Circle
1203 Turning Leaf Circle
1204 Turning Leaf Circle
1205 Turning Leaf Circle
1206 Turning Leaf Circle
1207 Turning Leaf Circle
1208 Turning Leaf Circle
1209 Turning Leaf Circle
1210 Turning Leaf Circle
1301 Piedra Springs
1302 Piedra Springs
1303 Piedra Springs
1304 Piedra Springs
1305 Piedra Springs
1306 Piedra Springs
1307 Piedra Springs
1308 Piedra Springs
1401 Eagles Domain Road
1402 Eagles Domain Road
1403 Eagles Domain Road
1404 Eagles Domain Road
1405 Eagles Domain Road
1406 Eagles Domain Road
1407 Eagles Domain Road
1408 Eagles Domain Road
1501 Hickory Ridge Villas
1502 Hickory Ridge Villas
1503 Hickory Ridge Villas
1504 Hickory Ridge Villas
Rental Price
# Bed
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
Rental Price Occupied
$
765.00
Yes
$
765.00
Yes
$
895.00
No
$
895.00
Yes
$ 1,225.00
No
$ 1,225.00
Yes
$
895.00
No
$
895.00
Yes
$ 1,225.00
No
$ 1,225.00
Yes
$
775.00
Yes
$
775.00
Yes
$
875.00
Yes
$
875.00
No
$ 1,050.00
Yes
$ 1,050.00
No
$
875.00
Yes
$
875.00
Yes
$ 1,050.00
No
$ 1,050.00
Yes
$
875.00
No
$
875.00
No
$
900.00
No
$
900.00
Yes
$ 1,355.00
No
$ 1,355.00
Yes
$ 1,355.00
Yes
$ 1,355.00
No
$
875.00
No
$
950.00
No
$ 1,355.00
Yes
$
875.00
No
$
950.00
Yes
$ 1,355.00
No
$
975.00
Yes
$
975.00
Yes
$
550.00
Yes
$
550.00
No
$
550.00
No
$
550.00
Yes
Last Remodel
2005
2003
1999
2005
2007
2005
2005
2009
2008
2009
2011
2010
2011
2011
2005
2005
2000
2000
2005
2005
2008
2001
2001
2001
2005
2005
2011
2011
2005
2011
2011
2011
2011
2002
2002
2002
2011
2011
2003
2001
Pet Deposit
1505 Hickory Ridge Villas
1506 Hickory Ridge Villas
1507 Hickory Ridge Villas
1601 Cypress Trail
1602 Cypress Trail
1603 Cypress Trail
1604 Cypress Trail
1605 Cypress Trail
1606 Cypress Trail
1607 Cypress Trail
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
850.00
850.00
850.00
1,225.00
1,225.00
1,355.00
1,355.00
1,675.00
1,695.00
1,710.00
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
2003
2011
2011
2005
2005
2005
2011
2011
2005
2005
Recommendation
Input Area
Complex Cost
Down Payment
# of Pmts per Year
Years
APR
1st Payment Date
Payment #
Summary Calculations
Loan Amount
No. Periods
Monthly Rate
Monthly Payment
Total Interest Paid
Payment Date Beginning Balance Interest Paid
Principal Payment
Ending Balance
Employee Statistics
ID Number Position
10474 Key Account Manager
11025 Sales Representative
11062 Key Account Manager
11653 Administrative Assistant
14731 Key Account Manager
14869 Support Specialist
15039 Support Specialist
15190 Sales Representative
16015 Sales & Marketing Director
16034 Budget Manager
16754 Sales Representative
18283 Support Specialist
22923 Key Account Manager
24168 Sales & Marketing Director
25280 Manager
27427 Budget Manager
30047 Administrative Assistant
30836 Sales & Marketing Director
31615 Administrative Assistant
33143 Key Account Manager
34737 Support Specialist
36528 Key Account Manager
37828 Sales Representative
38088 Support Specialist
38180 Sales Representative
39483 Support Specialist
39692 Budget Manager
42434 Support Specialist
42694 Budget Manager
43987 Key Account Manager
45418 Manager
45849 Support Specialist
46521 Budget Manager
47711 Manager
49542 Sales & Marketing Director
Salary
Job Satisfaction
35855
41708
47572
30176
45883
32650
32750
45670
89900
55389
49617
35230
44854
77846
70125
62263
30982
84937
32709
45983
33501
48706
45927
31632
49575
37404
65492
35316
68365
41130
72862
30701
66009
74767
97159
3
2
3
4
4
1
3
5
4
2
3
3
2
3
3
4
2
4
4
5
1
5
2
5
3
4
3
2
2
4
3
5
2
4
5
Summary Information
Position
Administrative Assistant
Budget Manager
Sales & Marketing Director
Key Account Manager
Manager
Sales Representative
Support Specialist
Sales & Marketing Directors with >= 4 Satisfaction
Count
Average Salary
Managers with >= 4 Satisfaction
Count
Average Salary
Average Satisfaction
Average Salary
Hi, Please see attached instruction of the assigment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Supply Chain
Supply Chain Diagram Assignment Instructions
Please diagram a supply chain or research a supply chain that you would like to learn about.
Create your diagram in Powerpoint. Use this approach or modify as appropriate to your supply
chain. Make an effort to present a “picture” of the supply chain that could be used to
communicate with the colleagues at your company about an issue of importance in SCM at your
firm.
In the same Powerpoint file (on a separate slide or two), briefly describe the supply chain that
you are diagramming and present one significant strategic challenge that the supply chain is
facing. Write a minimum of 300 words. Clearly state the situation, give examples, facts,
statistics, and/or quotes to aid the reader. Cite the text book, lecture content, or an outside
reference. Use proper grammar and spelling. Be sure to demonstrate that you understand and
can apply the concepts from the course content.
Example of a Supply Chain Chain diagram:
Note please: this is an example template provided you do not have to stick with it. You may use
something similar to this diagram.
Total slide is 4 and Under each slide please write summary note that short explain the object of
this slide.
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Principles of Finance
FIN101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Principles of Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN101
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• This assignment is an individual assignment.
• Due date for Assignment 2 is 28th October 2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
No.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
CLO3 Recognize investment opportunities.
CLO4 Explain the relationship between risk and return.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
1. Imagine you want to travel to US for your “graduation vacation” when you graduate
from college in two years. How much money do you need to put aside right now to
have $10,000 when you travel to US, assuming your bank’s savings account yields a 6
percent interest rate? (Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
2. Three cash flows of $3,125, $3,450, and $3,800 will be given to Ms. Marwa as a
result of her investment. What will the future value of her investment cash flows be at
the end of three years if she can earn 7.5 percent on any investment that she makes?
(Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
3. For computations of present or future values, the annual percentage rate (APR) is not
the proper rate. Justify this assertion. (2 Marks)
4. Faisal invested 40% of his portfolio into an investment with an anticipated return of
12% and 60% of his portfolio into an investment with an expected return of 20%.
What is the expected return on Faisal’s portfolio? (2 Marks) (Show your
calculations)
5. Discuss the different types of corporate bonds. (2 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. Students must mention question numbers clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.The assignment should be no less than 1500 words in length.Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be accepted.Cite at least 6 reputable Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph). The book is attached
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.Use APA style for reference.Please follow the instructions as described in the assignment
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Place of Submission is Blackboard.Weight 10 Marks Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
XXXXX
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Written with simple language3 pages for the review and the 4th page for references. You must at least review 10 research articles. APA citation style. 12 size Times New Roman font. 500 words per page (except the reference page). Total 1500 Your work will be checked for plagiarism. Thus, anyplagiarism in your work will result to a Zero for this assignment. Check file
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Literature Review Guidelines
Choose a topic you are interested in. Preferably a topic you will
work on in your research project course. Consult the chapter on
“Critically Reviewing the Literature” in the textbook, which has
been covered in our second meeting. A homework link will be
reflected on the course’s Blackboard page. This review is out of
20 points and the deadline to upload your work is Thursday
November 2nd at 9 p.m. Points will be deducted for late
submissions.
Your literature review must be written as per the following:
• 3 pages for the review and the 4th page for references.
• You must at least review 10 research articles.
• APA citation style.
• 12 size Times New Roman font.
• 500 words per page (except the reference page).
• Your work will be checked for plagiarism. Thus, any
plagiarism in your work will result to a Zero for this
assignment.
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Principles of Finance
FIN101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Principles of Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN101
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• This assignment is an individual assignment.
• Due date for Assignment 2 is 28th October 2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
No.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
CLO3 Recognize investment opportunities.
CLO4 Explain the relationship between risk and return.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
1. Imagine you want to travel to US for your “graduation vacation” when you graduate
from college in two years. How much money do you need to put aside right now to
have $10,000 when you travel to US, assuming your bank’s savings account yields a 6
percent interest rate? (Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
2. Three cash flows of $3,125, $3,450, and $3,800 will be given to Ms. Marwa as a
result of her investment. What will the future value of her investment cash flows be at
the end of three years if she can earn 7.5 percent on any investment that she makes?
(Show your calculations) (2 Marks)
3. For computations of present or future values, the annual percentage rate (APR) is not
the proper rate. Justify this assertion. (2 Marks)
4. Faisal invested 40% of his portfolio into an investment with an anticipated return of
12% and 60% of his portfolio into an investment with an expected return of 20%.
What is the expected return on Faisal’s portfolio? (2 Marks) (Show your
calculations)
5. Discuss the different types of corporate bonds. (2 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer
Open the Google doc and download the instructions. To sign in to the SAS, click the link and enter my username and password. https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/10LLZQVKdIC…
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Students must mention question numbers clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks.No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism.Use APA style for writing references.each question clear and full answers.Commitment to the number of words mentioned.At least 5 references.Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.Reference APA style You can support your answer with the course book.You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General instructions for writing the final report:
Please use your own words don’t copy and paste
Please use keyboard don’t use handwriting
The word limit is 3000-4000.words
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
I want answer with APA reference and references at least 10
# I sent the tasks I trained on and the training department (Finance)
#I also sent my information and photos of my work to support the final report
#After finishing the report file, I want to make another small presentation file about the training. I have sent the file
#I also sent you some pictures to support the report
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form No 4- Internship Report Cover Page
Student`s name:
Student`s ID #:
Training Organization:
Trainee Department:
Field Instructor Name:
Field Instructor Signature:
Course Title:
CRN:
Internship Start Date:
Internship End Date:
Academic Year/Semester:
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Total Training Hours /280
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained /30
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Academic Report Guideline(Co-op)
(please do not include this text in the final report, just follow its guidelines and
use the cover page above)
The report should be submitted within two weeks after you finish your Co-op training Program.
In addition, the report should be approximately 3000 – 4000, single –spaced and consider taking the
following format
General instructions for writing the final report:
The report must be written in English language.
The word limit is 3000-4000.
If the report word count is not within the required word limit, marks will be deducted.
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Plagiarism or copying from other sources will result in ZERO marks.
This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This
includes filling your information on the cover page.
Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool. Late submission will result in ZERO marks
being awarded.
First Page
The first page should display the student’s full name, internship start and finish dates, working hours per
week, company/institution name, and the cover page.
The field instructor should sign on the first page.
A Brief Executive Summary of the Internship
A one-page summary of the company/institution and a short account of the major activities carried out
during the internship period.
Acknowledgment
To allow the student to express her/his thankful and gratitude to individuals (such as: field instructor,
academic supervisor, colleagues…etc.) who help them in carrying out and completing her/his training
journey. This part will aid the students to learn basic elements of academic writing. To express their
appreciation in a concise and professional manner.
Table of Contents
Contents of the report with page numbers, list of tables, and list of figures.
Introduction
A brief of the report. The Aim of the report.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Chapter 1: Description of the company
This section should answer the following questions:
What is the full title of the company/institution?
Give a brief history of the company, full mailing address and relevant weblinks
What is the type of ownership of the company/institution?
State the main shareholders and their shares.
What is the sector that the company/institution operates in?
Specify the products and services produced and offered to its customers/clients.
Who are regarded as the customers/clients of your internship company (consider the end users, retailers,
other manufacturers, employees,etc.)?
Provide an organization chart of the company, along with information on the number of employees.
Provide a list of functions performed by different departments/divisions in the internship organization.
Provide an overview off the production system or service procedure (what are the resources, inputs,
outcomes, andconstraints?)
Provide a process chart of a major product and/or service.
The following questions can be classified as your major fit (Finance, Accounting, Ecommerce and
Management).
• What kind accounting/finance/IT//quality/marketing standards and principles are used in the
organization?
• Discuss telecommunication technologies (Database, Instant Messenger, Networking, Ecommerce tools)
used in the company.
• Describe the quality planning and control activities in the internship organization.
• Describe the quality control activities throughout the life cycle of the product/service groups
• What kind of financial analysis and decision-making methods are used by corporate treasurers and
financial managers in the internship organization?
• What types of marketing, selling, and human resources analysis are performed (cost system, evaluation
of consumers, needs, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy)?
Chapter 2: Internship activities
This is the main body of your report. During the internship period, the focus of the training may on the
following types of analysis and questions. You do not have to answer all the questions in the list: •
Describe your working conditions and functions, such as: Who is your supervisor (include his/her name
and his/her position); other team members or co-workers and what their functions are to complement
yours.
• Provide a detailed description about the department(s) that the trainee did her/his training with them.
Adding all sub-divisions for this department(s) if it is available. Student can add to this description a
supported chart.
• Detailed descriptions about all tasks and activities that the trainee did them during her/his training
period.
• Gained skills and how they added value to your work
• Other tasks that are not related to the trainee’s major that done by her/him at the company should be
included in this chapter as well.
• What types of incentives did you get as a trainee to be more proactive and productive?
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
• Describe what kind of working documents and analysis you did there and what experiences you have
gained throughout yourtraining. Provide examples of your work.
• A comparison between theory (things you have learned in the classroom) and practice (things you did or
observed at the company) must be made and highlighted. In this section the student can add a supported
table includes which academic course (s) (course title and code) helped to perform training tasks. For
example, two columns; the first one shows the course name and second column shows the tasks
performed and related to this course.
• Show some work samples that you have encountered/conducted at the company through graphs,
pictures, data, drawings, or design calculations and include them in your report.
• Lessons learnt (what the overall benefits gained from the training program)
Chapter 3: Recommendations
• Advantageous that helped the student in completing the training program.
• Disadvantageous and challenges that faced the student and how he/she did overcome them.
• Recommendations to improve training program in the college.
• Recommendation for the training company. Conclusion Sum up and summary of the training
experience. Reference If it is needed Appendix (option) This will help the instructor to have a background
about the trainee and his/her previous experiences. Also, it helps the students in writing their CVs for
future job application especially for fresh graduates who do not have previous practical experiences.
• Basic information (name, city, contact details…etc.).
• Job objectives.
• Academic qualifications.
• Practical experiences.
• Skills this will help the instructor to have a background about the trainee and his/her previous
experiences
Use demand and supply factors to explain and discuss how the demand of and supply for mobile phones are affected in OmanGuidance notes for TMA:The above question should be discussed based on what you learned in Ch. 2 listed in your course materials ECO340. You are going to discuss the different factors affecting the demand and supply for mobile phones in the country you are living in, using an essay structure with a clear-cut layout of an introduction, a body and a conclusion.In your introduction, you need to explain the trend of demand and supply for mobile phones in the country you are living now using a reliable consumption statistical data for the last five years. (300 words) In the body of your TMA, try to explain what determines the demand of mobile phone. Also, do not forget to explain what determines the quantity of a good that sellers of mobile phone products supply. Your discussion, as well as other parts of your TMA, must be based on up-to-date data with complete references. It is recommended to spend no more than 600 words on this part.Your discussion should be based on clear examples supported with proper data. You will need to use your textbook as a reference and published data and information in order to answer the above question. It is expected to provide proper graphs that explain the trend of demand and supply for mobile phones. You may translate your data into diagrams and match the theory with the application you are discussing. This part of your essay has the weightiest part of the TMA and carries the highest proportion of marks.Your conclusion should include a summary of what you have discussed in your essay showing how the policy makers may benefit from your analysis. (200 -300 words).
Make sure to include the cover page with all information required.
-Use font Times New Roman, 12 font sizes
-Use 1.5 line spacing with adjustment to all paragraphs (alignment).
-Use the footer function to insert the page number.
-Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project and references.
-The minimum number of required references is 4.
– report length should be as written in the file.
– must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the assignment.
-avoid plagiarism
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment 2 Questions:
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs. (300 words)
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs. (300-400 words)
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
(300 -400 words)
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Names:
Student IDs:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Course Title: Introduction to Virtual
Management
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024 _1st
Term
6.
Course Code: ECOM 201
Instructor Name:
Assignment: 3 Project Presentation- GROUP X
Student Grade:
out of 10
CRN: XXXXXX
Grade Level: High/ Middle / Low
2
The Virtual Team
1. Name:
2. Roles:
3. Collective goal:
3
The Virtual Tool
1.
2.
3.
The Virtual Work Dynamics
1. Virtual Office:
2. Virtual communication:
3. Challenges:
4
5
The Proposed Reports
1.
2.
3.
General Suggestions for Future Teams
1.
2.
3.
6
7
Pictures of Your Virtual Team Process
8
Thank You!
Questions & Feedback
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Early in the degree program, you took the CliftonStrengths’ Strengthsfinder 2.0. What were your strengths, and how can you leverage these strengths in your awareness of others? How does your awareness of others allow you to build stronger relationships at work? For those of you who may have forgotten or do not have access to the Strenghtsfinder test, you can use this link: https://high5test.com/test/ You can access the book via the CSU Global Library.
Response to student #1 karina— 150 words
Considering my strengths and weaknesses, this isn’t my first time doing skill analysis tests. The results always surprise me, bringing points I just thought of to my attention. These assessments are essential for us to identify issues of improvement and development. Based on StrengthsFinder 2.0 Self-Assessment, my Strengths-Based Leadership is based on Strategic, Arranger, Developer, Futuristic, and Focus. At first, I was shocked by the result. I always wondered how much strategy I use in my decisions. I always evaluate and develop my strategic side because I am not strategic enough. Therefore, I was surprised by the result, with design as my number 1 strong point. Despite the excellent shock, I still have much to develop (Colorado State University Global [CSUG], 2023).
To be a more effective leader, we must know that we are always under construction. To be a good leader, you need to renew yourself every day. Have the humility to recognize your weaknesses and not be afraid to demonstrate them. Therefore, in addition to being a good communicator, this communication must be engaged, bringing the leader and the subordinates closer together. According to Rosari (2019), the strategic leader is a manager who can motivate his team, manage conflicts, offer effective feedback, and overcome obstacles to a business’s greater profitability. This leader is admired by his team and knows how to recognize and value the role of each one in achieving the company’s goals.
This assessment can help me continue my daily development journey to become a better leader. Knowing how to say no skillfully is one of my weaknesses that I need to develop. According to Rosari (2019), strategic leadership must have 04 dimensions of dominant talents: Execution, Influence, Relationship, and Strategic Thinking. In addition, the importance of developing an individual’s skills and talents for their professional success lies in the fact that we live in an era of knowledge, where the competitive advantage of companies lies in the capacity and ability of their central employees (Rosari, 2019).
Student #2 Jayden—- response is 150 words
I have taken the Strengths Finder quiz multiple times in college, my past jobs, and my current job. Every time I usually have at least two strengths in common and then a few new ones as I continue to grow and change. This most recent test has given the following results:
Achiever
Discipline
Deliberative
Learner
Competition
This was unique from the previous times I had taken the tests. Normally I only had strengths in Executing and sometimes Strategic Thinking. This time I had a strength in 3 of the 4 main categories. I was only missing a key strength in Relationship Building. These strengths showcase that I am learning to be more diverse in my leadership style. As an Engineer, I often work in executing and strategic thinking but having strength in influencing will make me more well-rounded (Rath, 2007). Everyone has a variety of skills, strengths, and weaknesses. By rounding out my own strength profile I hope this will help me work better and with a larger variety of personalities. I’m hoping to gain strength in relationship building in the future to further expand my skill set, but for now, I want to really work on utilizing deliberative. This skill spoke to me the most as it mentioned that I would be good at counseling, helping others think through decisions, and inspiring trust (Clifton, 2012). These are all key to the type of leader I hope to become eventually. I work with a ton of very technical individuals, most of them are analysts and engineers. I hope to utilize my different strengths to temper individuals in my group who are quicker to action while also supporting my fellow learner peers in tackling technical challenges.
References
Clifton, D. (2012). Strengths Insight Guide. Gallup. https://www.gallup.com/cliftonstrengths/en/home.aspx
Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used? Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud alJohnai
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
When you open project 1 and 2, you can write project 3 just only write 1 pagersthis is project 3 : For your Portfolio, using what you prepared for Portfolio Project Part 1 and Part 2, you will create a presentation that summarizes the results of your work. You will do this by showing your completed portfolio website to the class while explaining each part. following sections:
Profile: About me > Introduction
Your completed Portfolio Project Part 1 and Part 2 webpages on Mahara (submitted to Moodle)
A short summary webpage (2 paragraphs) on Mahara that addresses the goal of the Portfolio Projects and how you developed the code of conduct and corporate social responsibility practices to be implemented by your online vegetarian catering company.
For the class presentation, you have the option to present to the class in one of two ways:
Give a live presentation to the class of your Mahara website and portfolio webpages.
Play a narrated recording (with your voice) to the class. See the following links on how to do this:
1. The Code of Conduct of your vegetarian catering business, including:
Mission statement and your company’s values
Workplace policies and procedures
Industry compliance and regulations
Disciplinary actions
2. The blog about how Corporate Social Responsibility is to be implemented in your small business:
Explain why you consider it important for your small business to adapt CSR
Describe the practices implemented by your company to be socially responsible
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Portfolio Project Part 1: Code of Conduct for Employees
Mission Statement and Values
Webeny’s mission is to provide the highest standard of catering to our customers,
primarily outlined by accurately meeting the menu requirements of the clients in the safest and
most delicious way. Achieving this mission is supported by the values of understanding,
professionalism, and accuracy. Understanding embodies clear comprehension of customer
expectations. Professionalism is about adherence to actions promoting sustainable relationship
with customers. Accuracy is about meeting every bit of customer expectations.
Workplace Policies and Procedures
Webeny’s policies and procedures bid every employee regardless of the rank, and they
are anchored in every employee’s contract. Customer service: The online nature of our business
necessitates great customer service that allows customers to have an experience that gives them
no reason to prefer alternative business models. Part of achieving great customer service requires
every employee to provide customers with enough and vital information to aid their decision
making. Food quality and safety: All employees have the highest duty to ensure food quality
and safety to seal loopholes for any shortcomings. Professionalism: From dress code to
demeanor, employees should themselves in a manner promoting the professional image of the
business. Respect: Employees are required to address colleagues and customers with utmost
decorum all the time. Transparency: Employees must demonstrate utmost honesty in all their
dealings in the company.
Industry Compliance and Regulations
Industry compliance and regulations are essential for business sustainability. Therefore,
health and safety regulations should be complied with and these include ensuring clean and safe
food preparation. Business licensing should also be appropriately updated to ensure lawful
operation. Lastly, data privacy policies should be observed to guarantee privacy and
confidentiality of client information.
Disciplinary Actions
Lack of compliance with the business code of conduct attracts varying penalties
depending on the magnitude of the contravention. The lowest level of penalty is a warning
followed by demotion from seniority. At the extreme level are suspension and termination for
gross misconduct. Compliance is paramount to avoid penalties.
Portfolio Project Part 2: Implementation of Corporate Social Responsibility
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is an important concept for our online vegetarian
catering company, Webeny. CSR signifies accountability for the social, environmental, and
ethical impacts of our business operations. It involves contributing actively to the improvement
of the society and environment in which we operate (Chiu, 2016). CSR entails a commitment to
not only comply with legal and ethical standards but also engage in proactive activities that
promote sustainable and responsible business practices.
CSR is essential for our modest business for several reasons. It is consistent with our
mission and values, which emphasize comprehension, professionalism, and precision. By
incorporating CSR into our operations, we demonstrate our commitment to these values by
understanding the social and environmental impacts of our catering services, maintaining
professionalism in our customer relationships, and ensuring the accuracy of our CSR initiatives.
In addition, adopting CSR improves our reputation, making us a more desirable option for
consumers who value ethical and sustainable businesses (Kuokkanen & Sun, 2020). It can also
assist in attracting socially conscious investors and qualified workers who wish to be a part of a
business with a positive impact.
Webeny is committed to several CSR practices. By sourcing local ingredients and
minimizing food waste through efficient production and packaging, we will reduce our carbon
footprint. This reduces our environmental impact, thereby contributing to sustainability (Lopez et
al., 2019). This aligns with our mission to provide catering of the utmost quality. We are devoted
to supporting local communities through charitable donations and volunteer labor. This activity
reflects our professionalism and compassion, as we realize the necessity of giving back to the
2
community that supports us. Finally, we will adopt employee wellness initiatives, ensuring a
healthy work-life balance and encouraging the emotional and physical health of our personnel.
This approach to corporate social responsibility aligns with our mission and values by placing a
premium on professionalism, comprehension, and accuracy, as a cheerful and motivated
workforce leads to improved customer service and culinary quality.
Incorporating CSR practices into our small business is not only a moral obligation, but
also a value-adding strategic move. It bolsters our reputation, attracts loyal customers, and
resonates with our company’s fundamental values. First and foremost, embracing CSR improves
our brand reputation, transforming us into a company that not only accommodates customers’
gastronomic needs but also addresses their broader concerns about social and environmental
issues. Moreover, by engaging in CSR, we can engage and attract socially conscious investors
who recognize the long-term benefits of responsible business practices (Farrington et al., 2017).
In the context of our mission and values, CSR provides a tangible means of demonstrating our
commitment to comprehension, professionalism, and precision. By demonstrating our dedication
to responsible business practices, we not only contribute to the greater good but also ensure
Webeny’s long-term success and viability.
3
References
Chiu, P. (2016). Looking beyond profit: small shareholders and the values imperative. CRC
Press.
Farrington, T., Curran, R., Gori, K., O’Gorman, K. D., & Queenan, C. J. (2017). Corporate social
responsibility: reviewed, rated, revised. International Journal of Contemporary
Hospitality Management, 29(1), 30-47.
Kuokkanen, H., & Sun, W. (2020). Companies meet ethical consumers: Strategic CSR
management to impact consumer choice. Journal of Business Ethics, 166, 403-423.
Lopez, V., Teufel, J., & Gensch, C. O. (2019). How a transformation towards sustainable
community catering can succeed. Sustainability, 12(1), 101.
Hi, I am looking for support with the following: Identify a KSA organization and discuss if they follow the three online marketing planning recommendations from your text (See the slide to understand) if you need any clarification please let me know. Provide examples to support your findings. ( Important to provide examples. Identify an organization that uses push-through marketing and an organization that uses pull-through marketing techniques. Share an example of each and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each approach. Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from the attached slide and below sources. Cite from the provided sources and MAKE SURE to cite any other sources (Must be academic) Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 600-word limit. Use the below sources and three more sources. Ahmadzadegan, M. H., Izadyar, M., Deilami, H. A., Banu A, S., & Ghorbani, H. (2020). Detailed study on the features of mobile Applications. 2020 International Conference on Electronics and Sustainable Communication Systems (ICESC), 901–907. Miralles-Pechuán, L., Ponce, H., & Martínez-Villaseñor, L. (2020). A 2020 perspective on “A novel methodology for optimizing display advertising campaigns using genetic algorithms.” Electronic Commerce Research and Applications, 40. Haryanti, T., & Subriadi, A. P. (2020). Factors and theories e-commerce adoption: A literature review. International Journal of Electronic Commerce Studies, 11(2), 87–105. Plagiarism MUST BE zero. APA academic style of writing. Demonstrates excellent knowledge of concepts, skills, and theories relevant to the topic. Writing is well organized, clear, concise, and focused; no errors.
Be careful to avoid plagiarism as much as possible Read the instructions required in the assignment List at least 4 or 5 sources in the form Apa Check for spelling and grammatical errorsBe careful of the number of words required in one question
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 11669
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Mohd Naved Khan
Students’ Grade: / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making process involving subjectivity and vagueness? Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for manufacturing companies. What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to course and beneficial for you?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT425-Spreadsheet Decision Modeling
Due Date: 11/11/2023 (End of Week-11) @ 23:59
Course Name: Spreadsheet Decision
Modeling
Course Code: MGT425
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023-2024 (1445 H)
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 15 Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Aligned (PLOs)
MGT.K.1
(1.1)
MGT.K.3
(1.2)
MGT.S.1
(2.1)
MGT.V.1
(3.1)
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Question
Find some structured ways of dealing with complex managerial
decision problems.
Explain simple decision models and management science ideas
that provide powerful and (often surprising) qualitative insight
about large spectrum of managerial problems.
Demonstrate the tools for deciding when and which decision
models to use for specific problems.
Build an understanding of the kind of problems that is tackled
using Spreadsheet Modeling and decision analysis.
Question- 2.
Question- 1
Question-4
Question-3
Assignment Instructions:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the Search Bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach for Sustainable Supplier
Selection under Vague Environment: A Case Study.
Author: Huiyun Lu , Shaojun Jiang , Wenyan Song, Xinguo Ming
Date: 26 July 2018
Assignment Questions: (Marks 15)
Read the above case study and answer the following Questions:
Question 1: Explain the decision-making approach discussed in this case
study (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 2: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making
process involving subjectivity and vagueness? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 3: Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for
manufacturing companies. (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 4: What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to
course and beneficial for you? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Answers:
1
2
3
4
Analysis of Existing System (5 Marks).
System Evaluation (2 Marks).
Suggestions for the company (3 Marks)
Conclusion (2 Marks).
References (1 Mark).
Analyze the key problems of the existing system used by the company (2). Also, discuss the Information Systems used within the company (3) for example:
Transaction processing systems (TPS)
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems
Functional Area Information Systems
Business intelligence
DSS
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course and it’s related to your selected organization)
Evaluate the current system that the company use (your chosen company) with one of the following options (1):
Success
Partial failure/partial success
Total failure
Then, State the reasons for your choice (1)
Design or choose a system to help the company solve its main problems. State the following:
The new system name (1)
Its features (1)
Problems that will be solved (1)
(If the system that the company uses is successful and does not need to be changed, you can mention that (1), mention its features (1), and mention the problems that it solved or prevented from happening (1).)
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course and it’s related to your selected organization)
Summarize your report (including part 1)
Use APA referencing style format
project 3Make a power-point presentation of your Project work mentioning all the above contents and present in a group (All team members must participate ((1).There must be minimum 10 slides in the presentation with a good background design (0.5), readable font size and style with an appropriate color (0.5).
Presentation must have the following format:
First slide: Group members name and Student id & Title of the Project (1)
Company Profile (1)
Strategies (1)
Technology Involved and Data Management (1)
Analysis of Existing System (1)
Evaluation and suggestions (1)
Conclusion (1)
References (1)
Thomas Pyzdek & Paul Keller: The Handbook for Quality Management, Second Edition: A Complete Guide to Operational Excellence, McGraw-Hill Professional; 2 edition (December 18, 2012). ISBN-13: 978-007179924
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:12074
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Mohammed Mallick
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
Make sure to avold plagiarism as much as possibleEnsure that you follow the APA style and references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 15229
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Nada Alnemer
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Powell, S. G., & Baker, K. R. (2014). Management science: The art of modeling with spreadsheets (4th ed.).Wiley. ISBN: 9781118582695 (print version); ISBN: 9781118801314 (E-copy).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT425-Spreadsheet Decision Modeling
Due Date: 11/11/2023 (End of Week-11) @ 23:59
Course Name:Spreadsheet Decision
Modeling
Course Code:MGT425
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023-2024 (1445 H)
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 15 Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your
information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed usingTimes New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Aligned (PLOs)
MGT.K.1
(1.1)
MGT.K.3
(1.2)
MGT.S.1
(2.1)
MGT.V.1
(3.1)
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Question
Find some structured ways of dealing with complex managerial
decision problems.
Explain simple decision models and management science ideas
that provide powerful and (often surprising) qualitative insight
about large spectrum of managerial problems.
Demonstrate the tools for deciding when and which decision
models to use for specific problems.
Build an understanding of the kind of problems that is tackled
using Spreadsheet Modeling and decision analysis.
Question- 2.
Question- 1
Question-4
Question-3
Assignment Instructions:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the Search Bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach for Sustainable Supplier
Selection under Vague Environment: A Case Study.
Author: Huiyun Lu , Shaojun Jiang , Wenyan Song, Xinguo Ming
Date: 26 July 2018
Assignment Questions: (Marks 15)
Read the above case study and answer the following Questions:
Question 1: Explain the decision-making approach discussed in this case
study (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 2: Why supplier selection is a typical multi-criteria decisionmaking process involving subjectivity and vagueness? (250-300 words) (2.5Marks).
Question 3: Discuss the Sustainable supplier selection that is required for
manufacturing companies. (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Question 4: What is your opinion about this study and how it is connected to
course and beneficial for you? (250-300 words) (2.5-Marks).
Answers:
1
2
3
4
1. Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi Arabia (In 2021-2023). For each campaign:
▪ Give the reasons behind their success?
▪ What is the added value of this marketing campaign for the company/organization?
2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two years). For each campaign:
▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail?
▪ And what can we learn from them?
Notes:
▪ For each case, provide the following information: Company Name, Campaign Name and Social media platforms used.
▪ Examples can be a profit or non-profit organization.
Presentation:
▪ Prepare a presentation answering the previous questions and what are the criteria that guide you to evaluate the campaigns?
————-
Assignment Guidelines:
▪ This assignment is an individual assignment.
▪ All students are encouraged to use their own word.
▪ Your Assignment must include:
▪ Cover page and make sure to include the cover page with all information required. One mark will be deducted if there is no cover page.
▪ A title that well represents the content of your report.
▪ A “References” section listing all sources included. And ensure that you follow the APA style in your report.
▪ An opening paragraph.
▪ The main body of your report.
▪ Use Times New Roman, 12 font size, 1.5line space and adjusted text.
▪ A mark of zero will be given for any submission that includes copying from other resource without referencing it.
▪ Your report length should be between 600 to 800 words.
▪ Assignment must be in word format only no PDF.
▪ Your file should be saved as: Your name – CRN – ECOM322- Discussion.doc
▪ You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the assignment.
▪ Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
▪ The suggested duration for the presentation is 10 minutes with 5 minutes followed by Q&A.
▪ You are free to choose any slide format and you should make sure having a proper number of slides; so that you are able to finish on time (Template is attached in the blackboard).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ECOM 322: Social Media Marketing
3rd Semester/2022-2023
Discussion Question
Write a report discussing the following points:
1. Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi
Arabia (In 2021-2023). For each campaign:
▪ Give the reasons behind their success?
▪ What
is
the
added
value
of
this
marketing
campaign
for
the
company/organization?
2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two
years). For each campaign:
▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail?
▪ And what can we learn from them?
Notes:
▪
For each case, provide the following information: Company Name, Campaign Name
and Social media platforms used.
▪
Examples can be a profit or non-profit organization.
Presentation:
▪
Prepare a presentation answering the previous questions and what are the criteria that
guide you to evaluate the campaigns?
Assignment Guidelines:
▪
This assignment is an individual assignment.
▪
All students are encouraged to use their own word.
▪
Your Assignment must include:
▪
Cover page and make sure to include the cover page with all information required.
One mark will be deducted if there is no cover page.
▪
A title that well represents the content of your report.
▪
A “References” section listing all sources included. And ensure that you follow
the APA style in your report.
▪
An opening paragraph.
▪
The main body of your report.
▪
Use Times New Roman, 12 font size, 1.5 line space and adjusted text.
▪
A mark of zero will be given for any submission that includes copying from other
resource without referencing it.
▪
Your report length should be between 600 to 800 words.
▪
Assignment must be in word format only no PDF.
▪
Your file should be saved as: Your name – CRN – ECOM322- Discussion.doc
▪
You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the
assignment.
▪
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of
assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and
grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
▪
The suggested duration for the presentation is 10 minutes with 5 minutes followed
by Q&A.
▪
You are free to choose any slide format and you should make sure having a proper
number of slides; so that you are able to finish on time (Template is attached in the
blackboard).
Submission:
Type
Due date
Point covered
Marks
Report
28/10/2023
@11:59 P.M.
All
10
Presentation
During week 10 &
11
Submission: due on
29/10/2023
at 3:00 PM.
All
5
Note: Submission will be through the Blackboard.
CHAPTER 9 (Part 1 & 2) – REAL ESTATE LENDERS1. What does FICO stand for? What is a FICO score? What is the range of FICO scores?2. Who are the large institutional Lenders? Who are the noninstitutional lenders? What is the difference between the two? What types of loans does each lender specialize in?3. Compare & contrast the three types of government-backed loans. Name a few advantages and disadvantages of each program.4. Where does the CAL-VET program get the money needed in order to lend out?5. What is the secondary mortgage market? Who or what are Fannie Mae, Ginnie Mae and Freddie Mac? What is a conforming loan? What is a portfolio loan?
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your e-book (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1.What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for independence? Discuss. (Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2.Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can be applied to economic development in other nations? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
3.Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and commercial base? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
This is an individual assignment.
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1.Answer-
2.Answer-
3.Answer-
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Cases
629
Economic Development in Bangladesh
When Bangladesh gained independence from Pakistan in
1971 after a brutal civil war that may have left as many as
3 million dead, the U.S. National Security Adviser, Henry
Kissinger, referred to the country as a “basket case.”
Kissinger’s assessment was accurate enough. At the time,
Bangladesh was one of the world’s poorest nations.
Although most of the country is dominated by the fertile
Ganges-Brahmaputra delta, a lack of other natural
resources, coupled with poor infrastructure, political
instability, and high levels of corruption, long held the
country back. To compound matters, Bangladesh is prone
to natural disasters. Most of Bangladesh is less than
12 meters above sea level. The extensive low-lying areas
are vulnerable to tropical cyclones, floods, and tidal bores.
Beginning in the mid-1990s, however, Bangladesh began
to climb the ladder of economic progress. From the early
2000s onward, the country grew its economy at around
6 percent per annum compounded. Today, this Muslim
majority country of 160 million people has joined the
ranks of lower-middle-income nations. Poverty reduction
has been dramatic, with the percentage of the population
living in poverty falling from 44.2 percent in 1991 to
18.5 percent in 2010, an achievement that raised 20.5 million people out of abject poverty. Today, the country ranks
64th out of the 154 countries included in the World Bank’s
global poverty database. It has a considerable way to go,
but it is no longer one of the world’s poorest countries.
Several reasons underlie Bangladesh’s relative economic success. In its initial post-independence period,
Bangladesh adopted socialist policies, nationalizing many
companies and subsidizing the costs of agricultural production and basic food products. These policies failed to
deliver the anticipated gains. Policy reforms in the 1980s
were directed toward the withdrawal of food and agricultural subsidies, the privatization of state-owned companies, financial liberalization, and the withdrawal of some
import restrictions. Further reforms aimed at liberalizing
the economy were launched in the 1990s. These included
making the currency convertible (which led to a floating
exchange rate in 2003), reducing import duties to much
lower levels, and removing most of the controls on the
movement of foreign private capital (which allowed for
more foreign direct investment). The reforms of the
1990s coincided with the transition to a parliamentary
democracy from semi-autocratic rule.
Bangladesh’s private sector has expanded rapidly since
then. Leading the growth has been the country’s vibrant
textile sector, which is now the second-largest exporter of
ready-made garments in the world after China. Textiles
account for 80 percent of Bangladesh’s exports. The
development of the textile industry has been helped by
the availability of low-cost labor, managerial skills, favorable trade agreements, and government policies that
eliminated import duties on inputs for the textile business, such as raw materials. The Bangladesh economy has
also benefited from its productive agricultural sector and
remittances from more than 10 million Bangladesh citizens who work in other nations. Bangladesh is also the
home of the microfinance movement, which has enabled
entrepreneurs with no prior access to the banking system
to borrow small amounts of capital to start businesses.
This being said, the country still faces considerable
impediments to sustaining its growth. Infrastructure
remains poor; corruption continues to be a major problem; and the political system is, at best, an imperfect
democracy where opposition is stifled. The country is too
dependent upon its booming textile sector and needs to
diversify its industrial base. Bangladesh is also one of the
countries most prone to the adverse affects of climate
change. A one-meter rise in sea level would leave an
estimated 10 percent of the country under water and
increase the potential for damaging floods in much of the
remainder. Nevertheless, according to the U.S. investment
bank Goldman Sachs, Bangladesh is one of the 11 lowermiddle-income nations poised for sustained growth.
Sources
W. Mahmud, S. Ahmed, and S. Mahajan, “Economic Reforms,
Growth, and Governance: The Political Economy Aspects of
Bangladesh’s Development Surprise,” World Bank Commission
on Development and Growth, 2008; “Freedom in the World
2016,” Freedom House; “Tiger in the Night,” The Economist,
October 15, 2016; Sanjay Kathuria, “How Will Bangladesh
Reach High Levels of Prosperity?” World Bank blog, January 5,
2017; and Qimiao Fan, “Bangladesh: Setting a Global Standard
in Ending Poverty,” World Bank blog, October 5, 2016.
Case Discussion Questions
1.
What were the principal reasons for the economic
stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for
independence?
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s
enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of
economic progress. What are the main lessons here
that can be applied to economic development in
other nations?
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon
agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks
here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial
and commercial base?
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
Reference
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
This is just to select a research topic and fill the doc I will attach for you. Please submit it before 11pm on my Moodle portal. Since this class is in person I pretty much told the professor what was my idea for this project. You will do a comparison in Finance statements in a car dealership between two countries. Which is Brazil and USA. I already have a project to guide you, however the project is about sales perspective and not finance perspective. This will be a project that we will build weekly and it will become easier as we move along through the weeks. I hope you did understand lol
Unformatted Attachment Preview
After your Final research topic was approved, prepare the following information and submit the table
for grading to the appropriate link on the Moodle. Thank you.
Tentative research paper title:
____________________________
Confirmed title:
__________________________________
Thesis statement:
__________________________________
_____________________________________
Hypothesis:
______________________________________
____________________________________
_____________________________________
__________________________________________
Stated Objective:
_____________________________________
______________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_________________________________________
A thesis statement, sometimes called
a problem statement, is a declarative
statement (usually one but
sometimes two or more sentences)
that clarifies your specific topic,
presents your opinion of (not merely
facts) the topic, and incorporates
qualifications or limitations necessary
to understand your views.
A hypothesis is a conjectural
statement that guides an argument
or investigation; it can be explored
(and potentially proved or disproved)
by examining data related to your
topic. Conditional in nature, a
hypothesis is assessed using available
information.
A Stated Objective is a brief, wellfocused statement that describes a
research paper that presents
information. Unsubtle and not
arguable, it must define the topic
clearly and narrow the topic when
necessary
The details are in the Word document I provided. You can answer directly in the original document, no additional answer document is required.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
TRADITIONAL HOMEWORK ITEMS – FALL 2023 – ACT 3391
General Instructions for the Traditional Homework – refer to the instructions for traditional item no. 1.
21. (5 points) Receivables and bad debts.
a. Heather uses an allowance method for bad debts. On 01-01-18, Heather’s allowance for doubtful accounts had a $35,000
balance. During 2018, Heather recorded (1) $64,000 of estimated bad debts expense, (2) $29,000 of write-offs, and (3)
$1,500 of subsequent collections of ARs previously written off.
i.
Prepare the entries for the three 2018 events that Heather recorded.
ii.
On the basis of the information given, as of year-end 12-31-18, what was the balance in Heather’s allowance for
doubtful accounts?
iii.
On the basis of the information given, for the year-end 12-31-18, what was Heather’s bad debts expenses
amount?
b.
22.
•
•
•
Sonja’s 12-31-16 unadjusted trial balance shows accounts receivable of $2,500,000 and an allowance for doubtful
accounts of $11,500. During 2016, Sonja wrote off $22,000 of receivables. During 2016, Sonja had $4,000 of subsequent
collections of receivables previously written off. Sonja only records AJEs once each year as of year-end 12-31.
i.
What was the balance in Sonja’s allowance for doubtful accounts as of 01-01-16?
ii.
If Sonja estimates 3% of her ARs will be uncollectible, prepare the AJE she should make to record bad debt
expense for 2016.
iii.
After making the AJE in part (b), what will be the net realizable value of Sonja’s receivables as of 12-31-16?
(2 points) The following information pertains to R for 2015:
R’s 12-31-15 AR aging analysis indicates a required balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts of $107,000.
Per its 12-31-15 unadjusted trial balance, R’s gross accounts receivable balance was $2,500,000.
Per its 12-31-15 unadjusted trial balance, R’s allowance for doubtful accounts balance was $111,000
On the basis of the above, prepare the AJE R should make for the year ended 12-31-15 to adjust its bad debts expense.
23.
•
•
•
•
•
•
(3 points) The following information pertains to R:
Gross accounts receivable balance as of 01-01-15 was $75,000
Allowance for doubtful accounts balance as of 01-01-15 was $4,000
Total sales during 2015 (all sales were on a credit basis) were $870,000
AR write-offs during 2015 were $3,000
R’s 12-31-15 AR aging analysis indicates a required balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts of $4,750.
The NRV of R’s receivables as of 12-31-15 was $90,000.
On the basis of the above, how much cash did R collect from its ARs during 2015?
24. (5 points) On 12-31-18, J sold some inventory to T. J accepted from T a $2,000,000, 10% note receivable. J will collect interest
on the note every 12-31 starting 12-31-19. J will collect the note principle in full on 12-31-20. Under normal circumstances, J
earns 12% on its funds. The cost of the inventory sold was $350,000. Prepare the entries J should make on 12-31-18, 12-31-19,
and 12-31-20.
25. (5 points) Lucy factored $4,000,000 of accounts receivable with Ethel on a with recourse basis on May 1. (Assume the
transaction meets the criteria to be classified as a sale.) Ethel assessed Lucy with a finance charge of $60,000. Ethel retained
$50,000 to cover potential sales returns. Lucy estimated her recourse liability to be $86,000. During May and June, customers
returned merchandise to Lucy on $48,000 of credit sales. All of the returns related to receivables from the $4,000,000 pool of
ARs sold. After taking the returns into consideration, Ethel collected $3,875,000 of the factored receivables. On June 30, Lucy
and Ethel “settled up” meaning Lucy and Ethel paid each other any cash that was due to the other.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Prepare the entry Lucy should make on May 1.
Prepare the entry Lucy should make on June 30.
Based on the above facts, what net profit did Ethel end up earning?
Based on the above facts, what net expense did Lucy end up incurring?
1
To carry out the projects:
1. This is an individual project. You will review an article and summarize it as well as
present your review to the class.
2. Select an interesting scientific article from an academic journal that discusses
operations management (OM) with direct links to journal publishers.
3. The selecting article must be published during the past five years and should have
approximately 6-10 pages and contain: 1. real-world problem(s) 2. OM method(s)
used 3. real (or anticipating) result(s).
4. Review the article and write a short summary of 2 pages (A4 / Times New Roman /
single space / approx. 1200 words) without figure. If necessary, put the figure on a
separate page, which is not counted. Written summary is to be turned in online on
the day it is due.
5. Prepare for a brief presentation (10 minutes) – please provide notes to read on the presentation too.
Areas/Topics to be selected for Project 1:
• Project Management
• Design of Goods and Services
• Quality Management
Project 1 Grading (10 points)
1.Quality of the selected paper (1.5 points)
2. Executive Summary
2.1 Easy to read (1 point)
2.2 Clarity and depth of problem/method/result discussion (2 points)
2.3 Correctness and completeness of the report (1 point)
3. Presentation
3.1 Demonstrate the understanding the topics and methods (2.5 points)
3.2 Readiness and mechanics of presentation (2 points)
Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office Manufacturing units. How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? Describe the management role in the change process?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:14704
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Majed Helmi
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
1-please use your own words don’t copy and paste (no plagiarism), Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable, No pictures containing text will be accepted
2- Please use keyboard (don’t use handwriting)
3-All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
4- I want answer with APA reference, References at least 8
5- The Answer should be with total of 1400 word
Syllabus
Dalkir, K. (2011). Knowledge management in theory and practice (2nd ed.). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. ISBN: 9780262015080 (print); 9780262310581 (e-text).
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge explained by K. Wiig.
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge?
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the knowledge needs of the organization?
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe how they would differ with respect to their goals.
Please provide an answer that is 100% original and do not copy the answer to this question from any other website since I am already well aware of this. I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure that the answer comes up with way less than 18% on Studypool’s internal plagiarism checker since anything above this is not acceptable according to Studypool’s standards. I will not accept answers that are above this standard.
No AI or Chatbot! I will be sure to check this.
Harley-Davidson, Inc. is an American motorcycle manufacturer headquartered in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, United States. Founded in 1903, it is one of two major American motorcycle manufacturers to survive the Great Depression along with its historical rival, Indian Motorcycles.
If you are not familiar with this retail store, visit their website https://www.harley-davidson.comLinks to an external site.
After reading case 5 which has been attached, answer the following questions:
1. If you were CEO of Harley-Davidson, how would you compare the advantages and disadvantages of using exports, joint ventures, and foreign subsidiaries as ways of expanding international sales?
2. In America, Harley has shifted the positioning of its products away from simply motorcycles and more toward being status symbols of a particular lifestyle. What are the implications of cultural factors for positioning in other countries that Harley has targeted for growth—ones like Japan, China, France, and Brazil?
3. Problem Solving. If you were advising Harley’s CEO on business expansion in sub-Saharan Africa, what would you recommend in terms of setting up sales centers and manufacturing sites in countries like South Africa, Kenya, and Zimbabwe? When a new location is targeted, what would you suggest as the proper role for locals to play? Should they run everything, or should there be a mix of locals and expatriates? And if the CEO wants to send expatriates from the United States into some locations, what selection criteria would you recommend, and why?
4. Further Research. Is it accurate to say that Harley is still “on top of its game”? How well is the company performing today in both domestic and global markets? Who are its top competitors in other parts of the world, and how well does Harley compete against them? Does the electric Harley have what it takes to fuel the company’s next stage of global growth?
Requirements: A Minimum 5 Full Page Paper Times New Roman Size 12 Font Double-Spaced APA Format Excluding the Title and Reference Pages
Please provide an answer that is 100% original and do not copy the answer to this question from any other website since I am already well aware of this. I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure that the answer comes up with way less than 18% on Studypool’s internal plagiarism checker since anything above this is not acceptable according to Studypool’s standards. I will not accept answers that are above this standard.
No AI or Chatbot! I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure to include an introduction paragraph with a clear thesis statement in the last sentence of the introduction paragraph and a conclusion paragraph.
Please be sure to carefully follow the instructions.
No plagiarism & No Course Hero & No Chegg. The assignment will be checked for originality via the Turnitin plagiarism tool.
Please be sure to include at least one in-text citation in each body paragraph.
Please be sure to read, use, and cite the website and case provided. Also, please be sure that any additional sources used are credible or scholarly sources published within the last 5 years.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case Analysis: Trader Joe’s
Student Name
David Nazarian College of Business and Economics,
CSUN MGT 360: Management and Organizational Behavior
Dr. Claudia Velasco
1
Discussion.
1. In what ways does Trader Joe’s demonstrate the importance of each responsibility in the
management process—planning, organizing, leading, and controlling?
Trader Joe’s is a highly desirable market that has gathered quite some aCenDon over the years.
Trader Joe’s is known for their quality, not only in the products they provide but also in the way
they treat their clientele (traderjodes.com, 2011). Important responsibiliDes in the management
process include planning, organizing, leading, and controlling. Trader Joe’s manages to ensure
these aspects are always improving, because then business will prosper subsequently. Planning is
an important process to be done in management because it can allow for the best possible
decision to be made. Other than the cost-saving measures they use to aCract customers Trader
Joe’s also likes to plan ways to get new delicious tasDng foods on their shelves. This is a good
tacDc as it will allow their customers to have different opDons, though sDll limit their stock to not
cause decision exhausDon. Trader Joe’s also shows great use of organizing for their business. This
is seen in the way they structure inside their store, to the way they structure their management
and leadership skills. One example of how Trader Joe’s is organized is how they decide what will
go on their shelves. They have a process where they will first search out for delicious foods around
the enDre world, contact manufacturers directly, assign the products a catchy name, and maintain
a small stock (traderjoes.com, 2011). This organized form of product research they use is what
keeps their customers in their stores trying new delicious tasDng foods with a smile on their face.
Trader Joe’s shows excepDonal skills in leadership due to the success in their business over the
years and the happiness of their employees. Providing good leadership to employees will keep
them happy, which in return will reflect on their aQtude towards customers. Happy employees
mean happy customers. How does Trader Joe’s managed to keep their customers happy?
2
They provide starDng benefits such as medical, dental, and vision insurance, company-paid
reDrement, employee 10% discount, and even paid vacaDon. One other good reason Trader Joe’s
has many good leaders as their company’s foundaDon is because they partake in training
programs such as Trader Joe’s University. This program teachers its students how to develop brand
loyalty necessary to cater to the needs of the company and customers. Lastly, Trader Joe’s shows
outstanding ethic in the way they control the business. Managers also are taught at the programs
how to get their part-Dme employees to deliver excellent customer-focused aQtudes that
shoppers come expecDng to see. Trader Joe’s understands that it is important for employees not
only to be generous and helpful, but to also have recommendaDons of their own to customers.
Everyone is encouraged to try and taste different products the store provides so that they can
engage with shoppers more based on personal experiences. The company is also very strict when
it comes to the reviews provided by their customers about their products. They will get rid of
products that have risen in price or have just had bad sales to ensure that their customers can
have what they love on the shelves.
Discussion.
2. What lessons does the Trader Joe’s story offer to aspiring entrepreneurs who want to
get off to a good start in any industry?
Trader Joe’s offers many valuable lessons that can be extracted from their journey. Trader Joe’s
has proven themselves to be successful in the field of business due to their history of successful
leadership allowing them to reach such a point in the industry. One lesson that can be taken away
from Trader Joe’s is their determinaDon to never sacrifice quality to their customers for their
saDsfacDon. Although, other supermarkets will cut down quality to
suffice quanDty, Traders Joe’s has business values to sell items they deem worthy.
3
Another lesson that can be taken away from Trader Joe’s and their story is the importance of
making the business model desirable for anyone. This can be for prospected employees that want
to help join building the company, or even investors that want to help fund certain projects the
company may have. Trader Joe Coulombe, founder of Trader Joe’s, sold the company to German
billionaires and owners of Aldi markets (traderjoes.com, 2011). German billionaires and owners of
Aldi markets saw the direcDon Trader Joe’s was heading in the industry and decided to build on its
enDrety even more. Lastly, another great lesson to extract for aspiring entrepreneurs is the ability
to build a team that can provide excepDonal service to customers. This involves much
consideraDon during the stages of hiring and when leading the team. Trader Joe’s has some
qualiDes that other big markets lack. For example, the human quality of the employees.
Employees are enthusiasDc with customers and make them feel less of a burden when they are
shopping for groceries. Being able to create a good environment for the place people despise to
go is a trick not all can do. These lessons alone will help build an effecDve business in the industry
as they account for the most important people in the business, the customers.
Problem Solving.
3. At the age of 22 and newly graduated from college, Hazel has just accepted a job with
Trader Joe’s as a shift leader. She’ll be supervising four team members who fill part-time
jobs in the produce section. Given Trader Joe’s casual and nontraditional work
environment, what skills will she need, what should she do, and what should she avoid
doing in the first few days of work to establish herself as a successful team leader?
4
Just coming out of college, Hazel must have a good understanding of. managing and leadership.
Her posiDon includes a $70,000+ yearly (including both salary and cash bonus). Some
interpersonal skills Hazel should have while supervising the four team members are authority,
friendliness, and leadership. Authority in the sense of her team members knowing that when
she makes a decision, to trust her because it’s in her best interest to make one that will best
benefit the company. Hazel should also have a friendly aQtude towards the employees to build
a connecDon with them. Employees will feel more inclined to comply and cooperate with Hazel
if they see she is leading the team with confidence and joy.
Leadership is an important skill that Hazel must solidify while working with her team. She must
be able to guide her team and make sure her team is able to work together as well. Leadership
is also acquired through a good understanding of conceptual skills. This is the ability to think
analyDcally and solve or diagnose complex problems that occur in the workplace. One thing
Hazel should do in her first few days of work are to implement organizaDon tacDcs that will
further escalate her team to prosper. She can do this by simply implemenDng the management
process. Here she can plan, organize, lead, and control the use of resources necessarily needed
for their performance goals. Hazel should also make sure she is seQng a good role model by
always staying on task and assigning each team member a task to be done. Efficiency is very
important in the workplace and the team leaders are held accountable for the performance of
their teams. With proper communicaDon and organizaDon, very good work can be put out. On
the contrary, Hazel should avoid allowing her team members to believe that she doesn’t take
her posiDon seriously. This will majorly affect her authority due to their being no credibility
behind her posiDon. Lastly Hazel should avoid being late and always be on Dme. One important
5
aspect of proper leadership is always being on Dme ready for your team. Taking all this into
account Hazel should be an effecDve team leader.
Further Research.
4. Study news reports to find more information on Trader Joe’s management and
organization practices. Look for comparisons with its competitors and try to identify
whether or not Trader Joe’s still has the right management approach and business
model for continued success. Are there any internal weaknesses in the Trader Joe’s
management approach or new practices by external competitors, or changing industry
forces that might cause future problems?
One arDcle about Trader Joe’s suggests, “Trader Joe’s has mastered their business model, but
they are never saDsfied. In fact, they are always looking for new ways to push new ideas as they
feel a deep sense of responsibility to saDsfy their consumers.” (Glenn, 2011). This shows the will
that Trader Joe’s carries to provide for their customers saDsfacDon. They always are looking for
ways to improve. SupporDng this the arDcle also claims, “In fact, they encourage consumer
feedback and ask that consumers complete a simple response card that is available at the front
of every store.” (Glenn, 2011). Trader Joe’s values their customer feedback most and wants to
build new ideas from those. This is a very strategic tacDc that supermarkets like Ralphs, Vons
and Albertson’s don’t do. Lastly, showing Trader Joe’s efforts in quality is this point from the
arDcle, “And it is apparent that Trader Joe’s carefully addresses their diverse consumer needs in
their research & development efforts: from product quality, product origin, packaging to the
subtle aCenDon to detail that cater to the cultural nuances of this consumer.” (Glenn, 2011).
Trader Joe’s wants to be able to provide anyone and everyone willing to shop at their business
6
with something they will like. Contrary to popular belief, the world is now emerging into a world
of technology. People like to use their phone to complete daily tasks as it is more efficient.
Therefore, when comparing Albertson’s market to Trader Joe’s regarding loyalty programs it is
quite drasDc. An arDcle states that ” Albertsons’ Just for U loyalty program, with 24.3 million
registered users, is playing a key role in driving customer transacDons and retenDon. Just for U
has seen a 23.5% year-over-year increase in users, who are spending an average of 2.5 Dmes
more than shoppers not in the program.” (Russell, 2021). Many users are suggesDng and liking
this implementaDon and emphasis on their loyalty program. As more users join, the company is
receiving more purchases. SupporDng claims of the industry shining to a more tech-based side,
the arDcle shares “Digital sales jumped 225% year over year, Albertsons’ third straight quarter
of more than 200% e-commerce growth.” (Russell, 2021). Digital sales and local pick-ups are
part of the new era. Many people have different schedules, and this accommodates perfectly.
Trader Joe’s needs to implement a service like this. They are not as technically advanced as
Albertson’s in the sense of autonomy. Trader Joe’s contains one internal weakness of not having
a strong e-commerce foundaDon.
AdaptaDon is very important in business and Albertson’s is taking advantage. Another part of
the arDcle states, “Albertsons has improved online grocery profitability via reduced operaDonal
expenses, including lower picking costs achieved through labor planning, process improvements
and new sonware that has simplified workflows, according to Sankaran.” (Russell, 2021). This
proves that autonomy can be achieved while also being efficient at the same Dme. Trader Joe’s
must expand into this part of the industry to conDnue further and reach new peaks.
7
References
Home. (n.d.). http://www.traderjoes.com/
Jr., J.R. S., & Bachrach, D. G. (2020). Management (14th Edition). Wiley Global Education US.
https://bookshelf.vitalsource.com/books/9781119497721
Llopis, Glenn. “Why Trader Joe’s Stands out from All the Rest in the Grocery Business.” Forbes, Forbes
Magazine, 3 Oct. 2011, https://www.forbes.com/sites/glennllopis/2011/09/05/whytrader-joes-stands-out-from-all-the-rest-in-the-grocery-business/?sh=33bf9eb24dec
Russell Redman 1 | Jan 12. “Albertsons Keeps up Sales Momentum in Third Quarter.” Supermarket
News, 13 Jan. 2021, www.supermarketnews.com/retailfinancial/albertsons-keeps-sales-momentum-third-quarter
8
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
Place of Submission is Blackboard.
Weight 10 Marks
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11850
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Mohammed Alhashem
Students’ Grade: / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the project). Please refer to the following criteria:
Create 10 slides maximum
The slides should contain the following:
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
A brief description of the virtual team
A brief description of the virtual tool
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
A brief description of the proposed reports
Suggestions for future teams.
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group members.
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN: 13127
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
ECOM 201
[20 marks]
1
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
ECOM 201
2
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
ECOM 201
3
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration, and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
ECOM 201
4
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6
2.
Virtual Team ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6
Roles and Objectives of Team Members ………………………………………………………………………… 6
Collective Goal and Team Building ……………………………………………………………………………….. 7
3.
Virtual Tool ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7
Prime and Complimentary Virtual Tools ………………………………………………………………………… 7
Features of Virtual Tools………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8
Reason for Choosing These Tools and 10K SAR Budget …………………………………………………. 9
Team Meeting and Minutes…………………………………………………………………………………………… 9
4.
Virtual Work Dynamics ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9
Investment in Equipment ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
Workspace Station……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
Technical Challenges …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
Work Ethics in China …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 11
Vacation and Holiday Time ………………………………………………………………………………………… 11
Communication Challenges ………………………………………………………………………………………… 11
5.
Report and Presentation ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 12
Marketing Strategy …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12
Feedback from Company Representative ……………………………………………………………………… 12
Team Response …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 13
Conclusion ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13
References …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 14
ECOM 201
5
ECOM 201 Virtual Team Project
1. Introduction
According to Google Insights, more than half of global consumers use search engines to
study product attributes. They visit brand pages and will look up in the mobile apps. That is why
many marketers try to reach the target audience through virtual marketing. It refers to the
company marketing products and services on the internet. Marketing on the Internet has a
transformative influence on companies (Makrides, Vrontis, & Christofi, 2019). It immensely
influences brands and their relationship with consumers because it allows interaction with
consumers in real-time, irrespective of time and regional differences. Online presence increases
brand awareness at a global level and helps potential customers learn more about the brand.
2. Virtual Team
The CEO has tasked our virtual group to assist a Chinese company in digital marketing that
wants to establish a fashion business in Saudi Arabia. Our virtual group is famous for its unique
solution, named Eccentric. The group’s task is to assist the company in marketing fashion
watches in the local Saudi market. We will establish virtual marketing strategies for the fashion
clothing brand to reach the target audience and increase visibility to stand out from rivals. The
team has one manager, a brand representative, a technical support expert, and a general member.
Roles and Objectives of Team Members
The team manager will create guidelines, schedules, and checkpoints for members to
improve productivity. He will provide support and motivate employees. His primary objective is
to manage the group members and the procedures. The representative from the company will
help promote the product to a target audience. His prime goal is to determine the best means for
advertising fashion watches and connecting with customers. The technical expert will provide
technical assistance to help solve operational issues. His goal is to solve a technical problem. The
general member will participate in team meetings and complete administrative tasks.
ECOM 201
6
Collective Goal and Team Building
Eccentric, emphasizing the Chinese brand and digital marketing, intends to nurture an
association between the brand and the target market. We will take their creations to target
audiences and to influence consumer association with the brand. The team included members
with less familiarity. We needed clear guidance and purpose at the forming stage. We struggled
to reach an agreement over the team’s purpose. Every member tried to overshadow the other.
However, the distribution of roles and responsibilities helped us accomplish our collective goal.
The team manager delegated tasks to each member to focus on the team goal. Every member
effectively works on the allocated task.
3. Virtual Tool
Clear and consistent communication of expectations around goals, roles, tasks, and processes
is essential for successfully managing a virtual team. Communication technology empowers
virtual teams to create and share information and knowledge at extended distances. Virtual tools
establish a sense of physical presence. The virtual team members can distribute and exchange
needed documents (Dávidekova & Hvorecky, 2017). These virtual tools replace physical places
with a virtual presence. Virtual collaborating tools permit professionals to communicate and
collaborate with team members from a distance.
Prime and Complimentary Virtual Tools
We selected Trello for managing group activities. It provides an easy and visual means
for managing projects and organizing tasks. Trello System uses cards created by the user that list
assigned tasks. We can show the progress of each by creating phases as in progress or task
complete. It allows for the addition of many members to events. It also
allows for personalized color codes. We also used Flock and WhatsApp
as complementary tools for messaging and collaboration. Flock offers
messaging and group collaboration. It allows for creating team
discussions around projects and common goals. We also used Flock for
conducting virtual meetings. We used WhatsApp in urgent cases, such as
calling for missing members to appear for unplanned events.
ECOM 201
7
Features of Virtual Tools
Trello helped us create three boards for task development, growth, and Strategy. We have
lists named ideas, to-do, ongoing, and completed in each card. Team members added cards to
ideas. Other members looked at the thoughts. They commented on them and discussed them with
the team. The manager moved the idea after approving it to the To-do list and distributed tasks to
members. Each member started working on the task assigned and moved the card to the ongoing
board. The manager checked if everything was going smoothly. The members having issues will
move their cards back to in-progress to ask for support from tech experts.
Trello also allowed adding due dates. It helped members track the task. In addition, its
update feature helped keep members aware of any changes. Flock was helpful in direct
messaging and video meetings. It helped in file sharing and real-time communication. Its
unlimited chat history helped the team members collect from where they missed. WhatsApp
helped reach the members anytime without cost. The messages were free and private. It allowed
sending one message to all members at one click.
ECOM 201
8
Reason for Choosing These Tools and 10K SAR Budget
The only reason we chose these tools is cost-effectiveness. We do not have that much
budget and would want to use tools that are free of charge and easy to navigate. Suppose we
have a budget of SAR 10,000, then we would like to upgrade our current free service to a
Premium plan. The premium plan comes with additional features of tracking and visualizing
multiple projects. We can create timelines, calendars, and boards with more security and control.
Team Meeting and Minutes
The team members meet daily to update progress on the task. Each meeting continues for
about an hour. Sometimes, a meeting will extend to two hours because of disagreements and
lengthy debates. Team meeting minutes create clarity about team goals and planned agenda.
Team minutes gave insights into each meeting and the significant points for each task. It gave a
glimpse of the decision made. It helped members focus and avoid conflict. One sample of our
team meeting minutes follows:
Attendees
Team Manager, General Member, Tech
Support, Brand Representative
Discussion Topics
•
Overview of Current progress
•
Current Scope and Progress
•
Identify Glitches to fix
Action Items
•
Evaluation of Social media
•
Implement new security features
4. Virtual Work Dynamics
Virtual offices are in trend for improving organizational performances. The shift to work
from home facilitates flexibility in time and location. It enables employees to work with more
ECOM 201
9
responsibilities (Zhang, 2016). Many companies enjoy the benefit of a positive environment
through establishing virtual offices. However, virtual offices also create many challenges and
problems. The team members had to manage and balance work and personal life. They had to
allocate a separate space at home for work. Each member also incurred some expenses- from
buying equipment to purchasing internet packages.
Investment in Equipment
Members set up their workspace station at home. We all invested in buying the latest
equipment to facilitate high bandwidth conversation. We purchased a high-speed internet
package, got a headset, improved the lighting, and colored one wall white. A white background
is always appropriate for video calls.
Workspace Station
We chose an area of the house that was peaceful and away from distractions. We chose a
room that family members will not visit. It was not mandatory. Fewer members also set up a
wireless printer on their table and bought two internet connection packages to use the other in
case one went out of service. We all ensure to keep the workspace station calm and not noisy to
avoid background issues during team meets.
Technical Challenges
Virtual teams do not share the same workspace. It could lead to several challenges
because of a lack of communication and time and zone differences (Indeed, 2023). Our team
encountered several challenges. They were unique to us but manageable. We struggled with
collaboration. Our physical distance caused us to feel separated. Hence, we started a group for
private conversation on WhatsApp to become familiar and engaged with each other. The absence
of office culture leads to different attitudes and belief characteristics at work. Professional
boundaries are necessary for limiting the overlap between personal and office work. We struggle
to create professional boundaries, and our professional duties influence our home life. Many
times, team members will work more than required to produce results. It caused sleep loss, the
feeling of fatigue, and motivation.
ECOM 201
10
Work Ethics in China
The Chinse culture is collectivist. They value hard work. Chinese are not only willing to
work hard. They feel that they are obligated to work hard. Every team member has a role and
duty to the team and each person. They consider failure to meet these obligations shameful
because that person has let down the others in the group. The Chinese work system considers
laziness as letting the entire team down.
Vacation and Holiday Time
We conducted virtual holiday parties over video conferencing tools. We used Google
Meet for this specific purpose only. We send congratulatory messages and share our stories on
personal social media accounts. We FedEx gifts and cakes to the most performing members and
call for a video conference to celebrate it together. Every member was entitled to take a two-day
vacation leave and take an off from work. The members had the same luxury of public holidays.
We did not work on public holidays. We helped the members with their workload on the holiday.
We would take their part and let the members enjoy the day.
Communication Challenges
One of the challenges was the communication barrier. We resolved it using the
collaborating tool and WhatsApp for instant messaging to facilitate regular communication. Lack
of face-to-face interaction would lead to misunderstanding. We regularly conducted video
meetings to foster a sense of connection and familiarity among team members. It encourages
casual conversations and virtual team-building activities. Time zone differences created the most
hurdles. We were very mindful of time zone variations when scheduling meetings. We rotated
meeting times to accommodate different regions and asked all members to make themselves
available on time. Sometimes, we may have to call for an urgent meeting outside the scheduled
timetable. There was always a possibility of unavailability of all team members. The missing
team member had to scroll through the chat history to catch up with the team. It added load to the
existing workload of the absent member. The member had to adjust their daily schedule because
of the communication gap issue.
ECOM 201
11
5. Report and Presentation
Every fashion product needs a feasible marketing strategy to stay ahead of competitors. The
Saudi fashion market will generate $109 billion in revenues in 2023 (Bell, 2021)). Analysts
expect the fashion market to grow annually by 5.7% by 2027. The market estimates also reveal
that about 21.4 million users in Saudi Arabia are willing to buy fashion clothing. The youth is
putting the Kingdom on the global fashion pages. The young population studying abroad is
bringing back different cultures, mixing them with Saudi culture. It creates an excellent
opportunity for the Chinese brand to sell its products. The brand should market its product with a
traditional touch for everyone to notice.
Marketing Strategy
Digital marketing should become a considerable part of the marketing and branding
strategy. The company should use social media platforms for marketing. The youth frequently
use social media platforms to search before every purchase decision. Instagram will pair well to
appeal visually and communicate brand personality. High-resolution pictures will help the brand
stand out. Regularly posting content on social media platforms, blogs, and Google ads will
improve search results. It also encourages customers to engage with the company. The company
may also use paid ads on Facebook to target the specific (youth) market. In addition, to focus on
the target market, the company must connect with fashion Vloggers with a youth fan following
to recommend the product. The youth will view these influencers as a trusted voice. It could lead
to creating new customers and create repeatable customers. The company should constantly
engage with customers to gain brand loyalty.
Feedback from Company Representative
Thank you for sending us your ideas and the marketing strategy that will align with our
goals. Your insight really helped us understand the market trend.
ECOM 201
12
Team Response
We are pleased to know that your experience was a good one. Thank you for entrusting
Eccentric and your kind words. We hope you will not hesitate to let us know if we can serve you
in the future.
Conclusion
Virtual teams have become a significant part of organizational work. The virtual team
comes with many benefits. However, it has its demerits. Team collaboration was challenging due
to time and zone differences. The absence of face-to-face communication leads to many
misunderstandings. We met daily to overcome communication gaps and oversee task progress.
Eventually, our team could propose a marketing strategy to promote the Chinese brand as a
fashion clothing with variation in traditional dress. Promotion on social media platforms,
blogging, and paid ads on Facebook will help attract the target youth audience. The company
should also connect with influencers, having youth following to recommend the brand.
ECOM 201
13
References
Bell, J. (2021). Inside Saudi Arabia’s thriving fashion industry and its global ambitions .
Retrieved from Al-Arabia News: https://english.alarabiya.net/News/saudiarabia/2023/08/30/Iside-Saudi-Arabia-s-thriving-fashion-industry-and-its
Dávidekova, M., & Hvorecky, J. (2017). Collaboration Tools for Virtual Teams in Terms of the
SECI Model. 97-111. doi:10.1007/978-3-319-50337-0_9
Indeed. (2023, September). Challenges of Virtual Teams: Causes and Solutions. Retrieved from
Indeed: https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/challenges-of-virtualteams
Makrides, A., Vrontis, D., & Christofi, M. (2019). The Gold Rush of Digital Marketing:
Assessing Prospects of Building Brand Awareness Overseas. Business Perspective and
Research, 8(1), 4-20. Retrieved from https://doi.org/10.1177/2278533719860016
Zhang, J. (2016). The Dark Side of Virtual Office and Job Satisfaction. International Journal of
Business and Management, 11(2), 40-46. doi:10.5539/ijbm.v11n2p40
ECOM 201
14
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Names:
Student IDs:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Course Title: Introduction to Virtual
Management
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024 _1st
Term
6.
Course Code: ECOM 201
Instructor Name:
Assignment: 3 Project Presentation- GROUP X
Student Grade:
out of 10
CRN: XXXXXX
Grade Level: High/ Middle / Low
2
The Virtual Team
1. Name:
2. Roles:
3. Collective goal:
3
The Virtual Tool
1.
2.
3.
The Virtual Work Dynamics
1. Virtual Office:
2. Virtual communication:
3. Challenges:
4
5
The Proposed Reports
1.
2.
3.
General Suggestions for Future Teams
1.
2.
3.
6
7
Pictures of Your Virtual Team Process
8
Thank You!
Questions & Feedback
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Short answers aren’t acceptedanswers must be provided in details along rich of informationProvide APA as per instructionsCOPY and PASTE aren’t allowed . No exceptions
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
11
Teams: Characteristics
and Diversity
ORGANIZATIONAL
MECHANISMS
Organizational
Culture
Organizational
Structure
INDIVIDUAL
MECHANISMS
GROUP
MECHANISMS
Job
Satisfaction
Leadership:
Styles &
Behaviors
Leadership:
Power &
Negotiation
Teams:
Processes &
Communication
Teams:
Characteristics &
Diversity
Stress
INDIVIDUAL
OUTCOMES
Job
Performance
Motivation
Trust, Justice,
& Ethics
Organizational
Commitment
Learning &
Decision Making
INDIVIDUAL
CHARACTERISTICS
Ability
Personality &
Cultural Values
LEARNING GOALS
After reading this chapter, you should be able to answer the following questions:
11.1 What are the five general team types and their defining characteristics?
11.2 What are the three general types of team interdependence?
11.3 What factors are involved in team composition?
11.4 What are the types of team diversity, and how do they influence team functioning?
11.5 How do team characteristics influence team effectiveness?
11.6 How can team compensation be used to manage team effectiveness?
334
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
334
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
WHOLE FOODS
W
hich grocery store chain comes to mind when you
think of high-quality natural and organic foods?
Chances are the answer to this question is Whole
Foods. Founded in 1980, Whole Foods is now a Fortune
500 company, with sales of nearly $15 billion generated
from its 460 stores and 87,000 employees. Even if there’s
not a Whole Foods market located near you, or you could
care less about whether your food has hydrogenated fats
or artificial colors and preservatives, you may be familiar
with the company because of accolades and coverage from
news and business publications. As examples, the company has been named to Fortune’s list of the “100 Best
Companies to Work For” each year since the list’s inception
in 1998. It’s also one of Fortune’s “World’s Most Admired
Companies” and has appeared on Newsweek’s list of “Top
Green Companies in the U.S.,” and Forbes’ list of “100 Most
Trustworthy Companies in America.”
So, what accounts for Whole Foods’ tremendous growth
and reputation? To sum it up in one word, the answer may be
“teams.” The original idea behind Whole Foods was that the
world was ready for a natural foods supermarket. However,
Brooks Kraft/Contributor/Getty Images
the company’s success has been driven largely by a strong
set of values that are enacted through teams and supportive
team practices. The company believes that teams not only
result in the type of collective learning and intelligence that
promotes incremental progress, but also that teams reinforce a sense of community and dedication to the company,
customers, and other stakeholders in society.
Although many companies claim that they value and rely
on teams, Whole Foods’ belief in teams is all-encompassing.
Each store is structured around 8 to 10 teams, and because
these teams are largely self-managed, they are teams in
the true sense of the word. Team members not only work
together to carry out the responsibilities of their department,
but they also meet regularly to discuss issues, make decisions, and solve problems. Team members are also given
feedback about how well their team is performing relative to
historical standards and to other teams, and their compensation is tied to the performance of their team as well. Because
the fate of team members is shared at Whole Foods, employees are motivated to work cooperatively, and this maximizes
the chance that the interests of everyone are satisfied.
335
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
335
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
336
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TEAM CHARACTERISTICS AND DIVERSITY
The topic of teams is likely familiar to almost anyone who might be reading this book. In fact,
you’ve probably had firsthand experience with several different types of teams at different points
in your life. As an example, most of you have played a team sport or two (yes, playing soccer in
gym class counts). Most of you have also worked in student teams to complete projects or assignments for courses you’ve taken. Or perhaps you’ve worked closely with a small group of people
to accomplish a task that was important to you—planning an event, raising money for a charity,
or starting and running a small cash business. Finally, some of you have been members of organizational teams responsible for making a product, providing a service, or generating recommendations for solving company problems.
But what exactly is a team, and what is it that makes a team more than a “group”? A team
consists of two or more people who work interdependently over some time period to accomplish
common goals related to some task-oriented purpose.1 You can think of teams as a special type of
group, where a group is just a collection of two or more people. Teams are special for two reasons.
First, the interactions among members within teams revolve around a deeper dependence on one
another than the interactions within groups. Second, the interactions within teams occur with a
specific task-related purpose in mind. Although the members of a friendship group may engage
in small talk or in-depth conversations on a frequent basis, the members of a team depend on
one another for critical information, materials, and actions that are needed to accomplish goals
related to their purpose for being together.
The use of teams in today’s organizations is widespread. National surveys indicate that teams
are used in the majority of organizations in the United States, regardless of whether the organization is large or small.2 In fact, some researchers suggest that almost all major U.S. companies are
currently using teams or planning to implement them, and that up to 50 percent of all employees
in the United States work in a team as part of their job.3 Thus, whereas the use of teams was limited to pioneers such as Procter & Gamble in the 1960s, teams are currently used in all types of
industries to accomplish all the types of work necessary to make organizations run effectively.4
Why have teams become so widespread? The most obvious reason is that the nature of today’s
work requires them. As work has become more complex, interactions among multiple team
members have become more vital. This is because interactions allow the team to pool complementary knowledge and skills. As an example, surgical teams consist of individuals who received
specialized training in the activities needed to conduct surgical procedures. The team consists of
a surgeon who received training for the procedure in question, an anesthesiologist who received
A surgical team consists of
specialized members who
depend on one another to
accomplish tasks that are
both complex and important. Why might you not
want to have surgery conducted by a surgical team
that functions like a group?
Photodisc Collection/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
336
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
337
training necessary to manage patient pain, and an operating room nurse who was trained to provide overall care for the patient.
Teams may also be useful to organizations in ways beyond just accomplishing the work itself.
For example, one study revealed that problem-solving teams composed primarily of rank-and-file
workers could boost productivity in steel mills by devising ways to increase the efficiency of production lines and quality control processes.5 Although implementing teams often makes sense in
settings such as these, for which the nature of the work and work-related problems are complex,
teams vary a great deal from one another in terms of their effectiveness. The goal of this chapter,
as well as the next, is to help you understand factors that influence team effectiveness. Fortunately,
there has been over a century of research on this topic that we can refer to in this effort.6
WHAT CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE USED TO
DESCRIBE TEAMS?
This is the first of two chapters on teams. This chapter focuses on team characteristics—the task,
unit, and member qualities that can be used to describe teams and that combine to make some
teams more effective than others. Team characteristics provide a means of categorizing and examining teams, which is important because teams come in so many shapes and sizes. Team characteristics play an important role in determining what a team is capable of achieving and may
influence the strategies and processes the team uses to reach its goals. As you will see, however,
there’s more to understanding team characteristics than meets the eye. Team characteristics such
as diversity, for example, have many meanings, and its effect on team functioning and effectiveness depends on what type of diversity you’re concerned with as well as several additional complicating factors. Chapter 12 will focus on team processes and communication—the specific actions
and behaviors that teams can engage in to achieve synergy. The concepts in that chapter will help
explain why some teams are more or less effective than their characteristics would suggest they
should be. For now, however, we turn our attention to this question: “What characteristics can be
used to describe teams?”
TEAM TYPES
One way to describe teams is to take advantage of existing taxonomies that place teams into various types. One such taxonomy is illustrated in Table 11-1. The table illustrates that there are five
general types of teams and that each is associated with a number of defining characteristics.7 The
most notable characteristics include the team’s purpose, the length of the team’s existence, and
the amount of time involvement the team requires of its individual members. The sections to follow review these types of teams in turn.
11.1
What are the five general
team types and their defining
characteristics?
WORK TEAMS Work teams are designed to be relatively permanent. Their purpose is to produce
goods or provide services, and they generally require a full-time commitment from their members.
As an example of a work team, consider how cars and trucks are manufactured at Toyota.8 Teams
are composed of four to eight members who do the physical work, and a leader who supports the
team and coordinates with other teams. Although the teams are responsible for the work involved
in the assembly of the vehicles, they are also responsible for quality control and developing ideas
for improvements in the production process. Team members inspect each other’s work, and when
they see a problem, they stop the line until they are able to resolve the problem.
MANAGEMENT TEAMS Management teams are similar to work teams in that they are designed
to be relatively permanent; however, they are also distinct in a number of important ways. Whereas
work teams focus on the accomplishment of core operational-level production and service tasks,
management teams participate in managerial-level tasks that affect the entire organization.
Specifically, management teams are responsible for coordinating the activities of organizational
subunits—typically departments or functional areas—to help the organization achieve its long-term
goals. Top management teams, for example, consist of senior-level executives who meet to make
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
337
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
338
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TABLE 11-1
Types of Teams
TYPE OF TEAM
PURPOSE AND
ACTIVITIES
LIFE SPAN
MEMBER
INVOLVEMENT
SPECIFIC
EXAMPLES
Work team
Produce goods or
provide services.
Long
High
Self-managed
work team
Production
team
Maintenance
team
Sales team
Management
team
Integrate activities
of subunits across
business functions.
Long
Moderate
Top management team
Parallel team
Provide recommendations and resolve
issues.
Varies
Low
Quality circle
Advisory council
Committee
Project team
Produce a onetime output (product, service, plan,
design, etc.).
Varies
Varies
Product design
team
Research group
Planning team
Action team
Perform complex
tasks that vary in
duration and take
place in highly visible or challenging
circumstances.
Varies
Varies
Surgical team
Musical group
Expedition
team
Sports team
Sources: Cohen, S. G., and D. E. Bailey. “What Makes Teams Work: Group Effectiveness Research from the Shop Floor to
the Executive Suite.” Journal of Management 27 (1997): pp. 239–290; and Sundstrom, E., K. P. De Meuse, and D. Futrell.
“Work Teams: Applications and Effectiveness.” American Psychologist 45 (1990): pp. 120–133.
decisions about the strategic direction of the organization. It may also be worth mentioning that
because members of management teams are typically heads of departments, their commitment to
the management team is offset somewhat by the responsibilities they have in leading their unit or
teams in their unit.
A Toyota work team is
responsible for vehicle
assembly and quality
control.
Toru Yamanaka/AFP/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
338
PARALLEL TEAMS Parallel
teams are composed of members from various jobs, and
other teams, who provide recommendations to managers
about important issues that run
“parallel” to the organization’s
production processes.9 Parallel
teams require only part-time
commitment from members,
and they can be permanent or
temporary, depending on their
aim. Quality circles, for example, consist of individuals who
normally perform core production tasks, but who also meet
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
regularly with individuals from
other work groups to identify
production-related
problems
and opportunities for improvement. As an example of a more
temporary parallel team, committees often form to deal with
unique issues or issues that arise
only periodically. Examples of
issues that can spur the creation
of committees include changes
to work procedures, purchases
of new equipment or services,
and non-routine hiring.
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
339
The Rolling Stones, an
English rock band formed
in 1962, is an example of
an action team that has
stayed together for an
extended period of time.
Sebastian Gollnow/picture alliance/Getty Images
PROJECT TEAMS Project teams are formed to take on “one-time” tasks that are generally complex and require a lot of input from members with different types of training and expertise.10
Although project teams exist only as long as it takes to finish a project, some projects are quite
complex and can take years to complete. Members of some project teams work full-time, whereas
other teams demand only a part-time commitment. A planning team comprised of engineers,
architects, designers, and builders, charged with designing a suburban town center, might work
together full-time for a year or more. In contrast, the engineers and artists who constitute a design
team responsible for creating an electric toothbrush might work together for a month on the project while also serving on other project teams.
ACTION TEAMS Action teams perform tasks that are normally limited in duration. However, those
tasks are quite complex and take place in contexts that are either highly visible to an audience or of
a highly challenging nature.11 Some types of action teams work together for an extended period of
time. For example, sports teams remain intact for at least one season, and musical groups like the
Rolling Stones, ZZ Top, Aerosmith, Kiss, and AC/DC sometimes stick together for decades. Other
types of action teams stay together only as long as the task takes to complete. Surgical teams and
aircraft flight crews may only work together as a unit for a single two-hour surgery or flight.
SUMMARY So how easy is it to classify teams into one of the types summarized in Figure 11-1?
Well, it turns out that teams often fit into more than one category. As an example, consider the
teams at Pixar, the company that has produced many computer-animated hit films, such as Toy
Story, Monsters Inc., Finding Nemo, Cars, Wall-E, Up, Brave, Monsters University, Inside Out, Finding
Dory, and Coco. On the one hand, because the key members of Pixar teams have mostly remained
together for each film the company has produced, it might seem like Pixar uses work teams.12 On
the other hand, because the creation of each film can be viewed as a project, and because members are likely involved in multiple ongoing projects, it might seem reasonable to say that Pixar
uses project teams. It’s probably most appropriate to say that at Pixar, teams have characteristics
of both work teams and project teams.
FIGURE 11-1
Types of Teams
• Work teams
• Management teams
• Parallel teams
• Project teams
• Action teams
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
339
Team
Types
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
340
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
As you read the descriptions of the different team types, it may have occurred to you that
it’s possible that employees find themselves working in a variety of teams and team types. This
situation arises naturally with parallel teams; however, it occurs often with project, management,
and action teams as well. In fact, estimates are that between 65 percent and 95 percent of people
employed in knowledge-intensive jobs work in multiple teams—often three or four at a time.13
Research on this type of work arrangement, referred to as multiple team membership, indicates
that employees do not identify with each team equally and that these differences have important
implications as to how much effort and commitment employees bring to each of their teams.14
As an example that may be familiar to you, consider your experience as a student. During any
given semester, you may have had membership in two or more teams as part of the requirements
of the courses you were taking. If this is the case, you may have noticed that you did not experience the same type of satisfaction with each team. With some teams, you might have been fully
engaged in the team’s work and with the other team members, while in other teams, you may have
put forth less effort and limited your involvement with your teammates. Regardless of whether
these differences in your attitude and behavior were due to the meaningfulness of the teams’
projects, the time and level of involvement required to complete the teams’ tasks, or perhaps the
drama and stress members of some of these teams created for you, it’s likely these differences
had an influence on how well each team did on projects and assignments and, quite possibly,
the grades you earned in those courses. It turns out that this process unfolds the same way in
the workplace. However, instead of grades, the consequences of how team members’ divide their
attention and effort may be the success of a multimillion-dollar project, and following from this,
whether the team members receive sizable year-end bonuses.
At this point, we should point out that multiple team membership is not necessarily conducive
to organizational effectiveness, especially in complex work contexts where it is critical that members of teams develop tight interpersonal bonds and specialized work routines that can deal with
the unique challenges they face.15 Although employees might like the variety of working in multiple
teams and can learn from their experiences working with different teams and teammates, it takes a
great deal of time and effort to coordinate meeting times with different teams and to switch between
teams and tasks when the time comes. Given these challenges, researchers have begun to consider
actions that managers could take to enhance how employees feel about the various teams in which
they work, particularly those teams that are most crucial to organizational success. As an example,
one recent study found that team leaders who share authority, encourage self-management, and bolster confidence tend to inspire positive team behavior from members, and that, remarkably, these
positive team behaviors carry over to benefit other teams in which the team members also work.16
VARIATIONS WITHIN TEAM TYPES
The Pixar team, shown
here at the Cannes Film
Festival, has characteristics
of both work teams and
project teams. Trying to
characterize this team is
even more complicated
when you consider that
key members are involved
in the management of
the company, and their
involvement in the films
runs parallel to these other
responsibilities.
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
340
Even knowing whether a team is a project team, an action team, or some other type of team
doesn’t tell you the whole story. In fact, there are important variations within those categories
that are needed to understand
a team’s functioning.17 As one
example, teams can vary with
respect to the degree to which
they have autonomy and are
self-managed.18 If you’ve ever
been on a team where members
have a great deal of freedom
to work together to establish
their own goals, procedures,
roles, and membership, you’ve
worked on a team where the
level of autonomy and selfmanagement is high. You may
also have worked on a team
where the level of autonomy
Venturelli/Contributor/Getty Images
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
341
and self-management is low. In these teams, there are strict rules regarding goals, procedures,
and roles, and team leaders or managers make most of the decisions regarding management of
the team with respect to membership. Research has shown that although people generally prefer
working in teams where the level of autonomy and self-management is high, the appropriate level
of self-management with regard to overall team effectiveness may depend on a variety of factors.19
For example, researchers have concluded that high levels of self-management may be most advantageous for teams where team members have high levels of team-relevant knowledge obtained
from outside experts and others in their social networks.20
Another way that teams can vary relates to how the members typically communicate with each
other. Virtual teams are teams in which the members are geographically dispersed, and interdependent activity occurs through electronic communications—primarily e-mail, instant messaging,
group c
Write 2 Copy in different words Read Chapter 5 and the case study at the end of the chapter.Answer your own words, complete independently, and use detailed, complete sentences.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case D Ch. 5 – A Drop in the Bucket (20 points)
Directions:
• Read Chapter 5 and the case study at the end of the chapter.
• Answer your own words, complete independently, and use detailed, complete sentences.
• Save a doc. or docx or pdf and submit. Formats that can’t be read are late.
Late Work: 20% off per DAY
1. In your own words, describe the Four Flows that constitute organizations and provide case examples
Member Negotiation Flow – explain (1-2 complete sentences) and describe 1 corresponding example of it from the
case (1-2 complete sentences)
Self-Structuring Flow – explain (1-2 complete sentences) and describe 1 corresponding example of it from the case
(1-2 complete sentences)
Activity Coordination Flow – explain (1-2 complete sentences) and describe 1 corresponding example of it from the
case (1-2 complete sentences)
Institutional Positioning Flow – explain (1-2 complete sentences) and describe 1 corresponding example of it from the
case (1-2 complete sentences)
2. Provide 2 ideas on what The Prep’s CFO and Board of Trustees could have said/done at the “informative town hall
meeting” with faculty to more effectively resolve the controversy about reducing staff benefits, particularly eliminating
the tuition benefit.
Rubric
In addition to my written comments, the components listed below were assessed on a 1-5 scale, but the individual scale items do not add up to the
total number of points assigned to each section. They were not summed for the score. KEY: 5= excellent; 4= very good effort, above average; 3 =
good, average; 2 = below average, needs significant work; 1 = poor
Content, Style and Mechanics (15)
Selected applicable chapter concepts
Chapter concepts fully explained with elaboration, in own words
Supported concepts by specific, detailed examples
Clear, detailed sentences (without wordiness)
Few or no awkward spots
Correct punctuation & spelling
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
ØExplain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
ü What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
ü How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in 2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
ü What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the strengths that contributed to its success.
ü Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
ü Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a)Mass-market cars,
b)Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c)Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
ü Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
ü What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
üAll students are encouraged to use their own words.
üWrite a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
üUse Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.
üUse proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be accepted.
üSupport your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles unless the assignment calls for more.
üIt is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be graded for this assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 14023
Academic Year:2023-24-1st Semester
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Mohammed Alhashem
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only)
via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks
may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information
on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from
students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO
marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, doublespaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be
considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
➢ Explain of the concepts, models for formulating strategies, defining the
organizational strategic directions and crafting a deployment strategy..
Case Study : Tesla, Inc. in 2018
Please read the case study “Tesla, Inc. in 2018” on page 115 of your
textbook “Strategic Management of Technological Innovation” and answer
the following discussion questions. This assignment is worth 10 marks, with
each question assigned specific marks as indicated.
Question 1 (2 marks):
✓ What were Elon Musk’s and Martin Eberhard’s goals in founding
Tesla?
Analyze and compare their motivations and vision for the company.
Question 2 (2 marks):
✓ How would you characterize competition in the auto industry in
2018?
Discuss the key factors that defined the competitive landscape for
Tesla during that time.
Question 3 (2 marks):
✓ What do you think are Tesla’s core competencies? Identify the
strengths that contributed to its success.
✓ Does Tesla have any sources of sustainable competitive
advantage?
Explain whether these advantages are likely to endure.
Question 4 (2 marks):
✓ Evaluate Tesla’s strategic moves into:
a) Mass-market cars,
b) Batteries (car batteries and Powerwall),
c) Solar panels.
Discuss the motivations behind these moves and the opportunities and
challenges Tesla faced in competing in these businesses.
Question 5 (1 mark):
✓ Do you think Tesla will be profitable in all of these businesses?
Provide a rationale for your assessment, considering the unique
aspects of each business.
Question 6 (1 mark):
✓ What do you think Tesla’s, or more specifically, Elon Musk’s
strategic intent is?
Describe the overarching vision and objectives that appear to guide
Tesla’s direction in 2018.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ Write a three-part essay (i.e., an essay that includes an introduction
paragraph, the essay’s body, and a conclusion paragraph).
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be
accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and
theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal
articles unless the assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe
assignment Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for
grading and review the grading rubric to understand how you will be
graded for this assignment.
Help create business pitch PowerPoint for crossbody dog leash.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Dear Entrepreneur,
This template is meant to serve as a starting point as you build your pitch
deck.
As you develop the content of your slides, you will also need to add an
engaging design and adjust the layouts and headings here as
appropriate. Remember to use striking images and avoid putting too
much text on any one slide for maximum impact.
Tips for each topic are included in the “Notes” section below each slide.
Wish you all the best as you pitch company!
Name of Company
Logo
Name
Founder & CEO
Contact Information
Company Purpose
• {Company} is ____________________ for
_______________ that _________________.
• {Company} sells ______________________ to
______________________ in order to
____________.
Name and Company Name
Customers’ #1 Problem
How are you addressing the need, and how do
other companies fall short of addressing the
problem?
Name and Company Name
Solution/Value Proposition
Name and Company Name
Why Now?
• Note market trends and changes
Name and Company Name
The Market
Note the total market size, target market size,
and the market share your company can
realistically achieve.
Name and Company Name
Customers
• Who are they?
• How do you reach them?
• How will you keep them coming back?
Name and Company Name
Competitive Grid
Competitor
Offerings
Service Prices
Retail Prices
Location
Expertise
Service
Turnover
Capacity
Client Base
Name and Company Name
A
B
C
Competitive Grid
Premium Price
Basic
Luxury
Low Price
Name and Company Name
Milestones
Achieved
Name and Company Name
Looking Ahead
Financials
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Revenue
$
$
$
Expenses
$
$
$
Gross Profit
$
$
$
SG&A
$
$
$
Net Proft
$
$
$
X%
$X Million
GROSS
PROFIT
PROFIT MARGIN
YEAR 3
Name and Company Name
Team
Name
Name
Name
Title
Title
Title
Education
Education
Education
Experience
Experience
Experience
Combined experience or key team dynamic
Name and Company Name
Use of Funds
SEED CAPITAL
USE
AMOUNT
Marketing Spend
12 months
Social Media Ads
$40,000
Sampling
$30,000
TOTAL
$70,000
CEO
$50,000
CMO
$50,000
TOTAL
$100,000
Products
$20,000
Packing & Fulfilment
$60,000
TOTAL
$80,000
Salaries
Product & Delivery
REQUIREMENT
Name and Company Name
TIMELINE
$250,000
This assignment is an individual assignment.Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
1.Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used? (2MM)
2.Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable. (2MM)
3.Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4.What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5.Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1.Answer-
2.Answer-
3.Answer-
4.Answer-
5.Answer-
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to Operations
Management
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 12501
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Mir Satar
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your e-book (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1.What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for independence? Discuss. (Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2.Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can be applied to economic development in other nations? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
3.Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and commercial base? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
This is an individual assignment.
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1.Answer-
2.Answer-
3.Answer-
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
This case analysis provides the opportunity to apply concepts, theories, and frameworks from the content on culture and climate. Culture can be viewed and examined at several levels and from different perspectives. We’ve discussed national, organizational, unit/workplace, and occupational cultures. We’ve also read articles on leadership, motivation, and decision-making that have touched on the role of culture in those areas. The overarching objective is to use the Westjet case as a context for applying and discussing the role of culture (again, defined very expansively and in many forms) in an organization.
Here are the specific parameters of the assignment:
1.Cases: Use the “Westjet” case as material for this thought exercise.
2.Articles and Slides: You should focus on the five articles we have read on culture, using those as the main source of material to apply in your analysis. However, given that culture and climate have been mentioned in many other of our readings – particularly the five included in the first topic of “Strategic Leadership”, feel free to draw on that content as well. Also, note the slides on Climate and Culture, which provide some additional/complementary background material.
3.Objective: Discuss the role that culture and climate have played in Westjet’s formation, growth, success, and reputation. Note: although there are other aspects we could discuss, particularly their strategy and business model, please focus your analysis on the elements of climate and culture.
4.Specifics: Address the following questions specifically, using each as a section heading to structure your discussion.
a.The Role of Culture in Westjet’s Success: begin by discussing in general the role of culture and climate. To what degree are these central to the firm’s competitive advantage? Explain – how and why?
b.Specific Culture/Climate Elements: Identify and discuss several specific elements of the firm’s culture and climate that are particularly significant. These can be specific practices, routines, value/norms, etc. Discuss/explain how/why these things are vehicles for establishing, reinforcing, and maintaining the firm’s culture.
c.Structure and Culture/Climate: Then discuss how culture and structure interact and serve to complement and reinforce one another. Note how particular aspects of the firm’s structure and design are extensions of its culture and values.
d.Leadership and Culture/Climate: What role have the firm’s founders/leaders played in all this? How central are they to the firm’s culture? To what degree can/should a firm’s culture be tied to its leadership?
e.Culture/Climate Challenges: Now consider some of the challenges the firm faces as it grows. What are some of the pressures on its culture and climate? To what degree can or should they try to maintain their culture? Are some practices more expendable than others? What can change and what cannot if they want to continue their success?
f.The Dark Side of Culture: Finally, reflect and comment on the potential dark side of culture. In what ways might Westjet’s cultural norms and practices be a liability? Are there specific elements that concern you and why?
5.Format: Your discussion should be 2 single-spaced pages in length. Each of the questions should be discussed in a single paragraph, and each paragraph should have a heading (to demarcate it). No additional spacing (between sections/paragraphs) is needed. Note: I realize that I’ve given you five different issues to discuss – feel free to emphasize some topics over others (i.e., some paragraphs may be much longer or shorter than others)
I have attached the case and the power point for culture and climate in the post. Please refer to the power point when answering the question. You may also use anything you think that works. I also attached 2 articles that relates to the question if possible do integrate them into the answer
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge management in different business environments.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilise knowledge management tools for the benefits of the organization.
9.2 Action Required:
Copy and paste the following link in your internet browser to research article titled “KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES: ACCESS THE RIGHT KNOWLEDGE AT THE RIGHT TIME”. Read the article and answer the question given in “Test your Knowledge Section”. https://www.csirs.org.in/uploads/paper_pdf/knowledge-management-tools-and-techniques.pdf
9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Q. Briefly describe the types of knowledge highlighted in this article. Write a short summary about traditional tools of knowledge management highlighted in this article.
9.4 Instructions:
· Answer the question in test your knowledge section.
· Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below
1. In 2014, the euro was trading at $1.35 on the foreign exchange market. By 2015, the rate had fallen to $1.10, due to falling European interest rates. Explain the fall in the price of a euro using supply and demand curves, and in words.2. Using shifts in supply and demand curves, describe how a change in the exchange rate affected your industry. Label the axes, and state the geographic, product, and time dimensions of the demand and supply curves you are drawing. Explain what happened to industry price and quantity by making specific references to the demand and supply curves. How can you profit from future shifts in the exchange rate? How do you predict future changes in the exchange rate?
Discuss the implications of just-in-time and lean thinking for logistics.
Apply lean thinking to business processes.
Compare and contrast lean supply with agile supply.
2- Use a reference from the textbook from chapter 15-20 Only (link is attached below)
3- Check Crammer/ plagiarism
4- The attachments are (link of the textbook) (Picture of short description of each chapter) (few other useful videos from Youtube)
5- The length should be at least a good paragraph size that has question, answer, referance from textbook (write down from which chapter/section is taking)
Contracts Rules Everything Around Me
Contracts move every aspect of commerce; big and small; down to every transaction in which you participate; down to the home you buy; the products you buy on Amazon; to the food you buy at the grocery store.
What questions do you have regarding the necessary elements required to form a legally binding contract; or in what circumstances is a contract legally formed or not?
• (15) points will be awarded for a thoughtful question in this discussion thread that proposes a question of law for the class to answer whether a contract was legally formed or not? You must also provide a sufficient set of facts in which to apply the question of law. This can even be from a simple personal experience such as when you select an apple in the grocery store: are you offering to purchase the apple or accepting the advertised offer to purchase the apple? (more facts would be needed here to make this a thoughtfully proposed question but hopefully you get the idea).
(25) points will be awarded for a correct, thoughtful response to a question. In your response you must provide a source for the law or laws that support your conclusion (which will be a citation to the textbook). If your response does not have a source of law, then it is merely opinion. Law is formed by caselaw, statutes and regulations; both state and federal; also to a lesser degree by city ordinances. Your textbook summarizes the law to the degree necessary for this course. Please also provide the necessary elements to form a legally binding contract in your answer. Expound in depth where necessary to support your conclusion. It is encouraged to have more than one answer to a question as the first responders are not always correct or awarded full points for having a meaningful response.
https://saylordotorg.github.io/text_business-law-a… Textbook
Below are useful videos from Youtube that were in the reading
This is a group assessment, we have finished report. This assignment still need presentation, so my part need 200 words script .My part is 4. shareholder communication
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
Executive summary
This report provides a comprehensive overview of Cathay Pacific’s adherence to the Hong
Kong Corporate Governance Code and its corporate governance practices, with a focus on key
provisions and their implications considering a recent incident of discrimination against
Chinese mainland passengers. The analysis assesses the company’s commitment to
transparency, ethics, and shareholder communication.
Cathay Pacific’s outstanding conformance with the Hong Kong Corporate Governance Code
shows its commitment to good corporate governance. With clear roles for the Chairman and
CEO, the board leads and controls the company. Executive and non-executive directors are
balanced, and independent non-executive directors with no significant interests in the company
increase checks and balances. Clear director securities transaction criteria and a pay committee
strengthen the company’s governance.
Cathay Pacific’s corporate governance code emphasizes the critical role of directors in
promoting lawful, ethical, and responsible behavior. The separation of Chairman and CEO
enhances independence in overseeing customer service operations and resolving discrimination
incidents. However, there is room for improvement in aligning board diversity with stated
policy commitments.
Additionally, the company’s governance disclosures, particularly related to directors’
securities transactions and remuneration matters, contribute to reducing information
asymmetry and fostering trust. These disclosures indicate a commitment to ethical behavior
and fair compensation practices.
The report also addresses corporate governance requirements and assesses its practices for
compliance. To prevent discrimination, authority and responsibility must be clearly delegated.
The Chairman’s influence on corporate governance and diversity and inclusion is vital. The
report concludes that Cathay Pacific’s compliance filings show structured corporate governance.
However, the discrimination event highlights the need to apply these principles and incorporate
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
core values into daily operations.
Cathay Pacific’s Shareholder Communications Policy seeks fair and timely business
information access. The organization values stakeholder feedback and maintains transparency
to build trust. But the discriminatory case has highlighted questions regarding corporate
governance code disclosures for shareholder communications. The sustainability report
encourages stakeholders to communicate via several channels to reduce information
asymmetry. It emphasizes stakeholder participation and perspectives in improving company
governance.
Compliance with corporate governance code
By adhering to the stipulations of Hong Kong Corporate Governance Code, Cathay Pacific
ensures it meets the governance expectations and standards of its primary listing venue. For
any analysis or comparison of Cathay Pacific’s corporate governance, using the Hong Kong
Corporate Governance Code as a foundation ensures accuracy and relevance to the
company’s actual operational context.
Code Provision
Status
Brief Explanation
A. DIRECTORS
Cathay Pacific’s board assumes responsibility for
1.
Board’s
Compliant leadership and control and oversees the company’s
Responsibility
business and affairs.
2. Chairman and Chief
Roles of Chairman and CEO are separate. Each has
Compliant
Executive
clearly defined responsibilities.
3. Board Composition Compliant
The board includes a balanced composition of executive
and non-executive directors.
4.
Non-executive
Cathay Pacific has independent non-executive directors
Compliant
Directors
with no material interests in the company.
B. ROLE AND FUNCTION
1. Directors’ Securities
Established written guidelines for directors’ securities
Compliant
Transactions
transactions on terms no less exacting than required
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
standard.
2.
Remuneration
Remuneration committee in place, mainly comprised of
Compliant
Matters
independent non-executive directors.
C. RISK AND INTERNAL CONTROL
1. Financial Reporting Compliant
Regular and transparent financial reporting, with annual
and interim reports.
2. Internal Controls
Established internal controls and risk management
systems reviewed annually.
Compliant
D. COMPLIANCE
1. Delegation by the
Clearly documented authority levels and delegated
Compliant
Board
responsibilities.
2.
Chairman’s
Chairman provides leadership, ensures good corporate
Compliant
Responsibilities
governance practices and procedures are established.
E.
Shareholder
Regular communication with shareholders and fair
Compliant
Communication
disclosure of information.
In the domain of corporate governance, Cathay Pacific exhibits robust alignment with the
guiding principles of the Hong Kong Corporate Governance Code. A central tenet of
effective governance, the clear delineation of board responsibilities, sees complete adherence,
with the board actively assuming its duty for leadership and overseeing the company’s
intricate business endeavors. Reinforcing this governance strength is the distinct separation of
roles between the Chairman and the CEO, thereby avoiding potential conflicts of interest.
This distinction is further buoyed by the board’s balanced composition, combining skills,
experiences, and diverse perspectives to guide the airline’s direction.
The presence of independent non-executive directors, devoid of material interests in the
company, fortifies the company’s checks and balances, ensuring that decisions remain
objective and in the best interest of stakeholders. Cathay Pacific’s scrupulous adherence to
written guidelines governing directors’ securities transactions is bolstering this, an approach
The table does not appear to include all sections and principles with the HKEX code – e.g.
E in your table includes more than just shareholder communication – as this is actually F1.
Where is consideration to remuneration – ‘E’
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
that effectively forestalls potential ethical and legal pitfalls such as insider trading.
Additionally, establishing a remuneration committee, chiefly populated by independent nonexecutive directors, assures that executive compensation aligns harmoniously with both
shareholders’ interests and the overarching corporate goals.
In financial transparency, Cathay Pacific shines with its regular and transparent financial
reporting regime, including issuing annual and interim reports. This transparency dovetails
with the airline’s robust internal control systems, which undergo rigorous annual reviews,
solidifying its commitment to risk minimization and corporate integrity. A pivotal aspect of
its governance structure is the board’s documented delegation protocols, which streamline
decision-making processes and reinforce the necessary checks and balances.
A noteworthy mention is the proactive role of the Chairman, who stands as a beacon
ensuring the instilment and maintenance of good governance practices. Lastly, the emphasis
on shareholder communication is palpable. The airline’s commitment to fostering open
communication channels and ensuring equitable information dissemination underscores its
dedication to nurturing trust and sustaining a healthy relationship with its shareholders.
Ex post analysis of reporting of disclosures
The main issue identified in the news article is the incident of discrimination against Chinese
mainland passengers by Cathay Pacific Airways. This issue is intricately tied to its corporate
governance in terms of the company’s commitment to diversity, inclusivity, and customer
service. In the subsequent sections, we will examine several pertinent corporate governance
disclosures and assess their practical value and effectiveness.
1. Directors
In addition to its fundamental responsibilities for leadership and oversight, Cathay
Pacific’s corporate governance code (2022) underscores the critical role for every director in
shaping a culture that promotes values of acting lawfully, ethically, and responsibly. This
requirement holds promise for resolving the discrimination issue if the leadership can actively
Where is the use of academic literature to support to statements/arguments?
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
lead by example in fostering a culture that values inclusivity and respect for all passengers,
regardless of their background.
The code also emphasizes the separation of Chairman and CEO. Although this aligns with
standard corporate governance practices, it can be regarded as a positive governance practice
in the context of discrimination incidents. This separation enables greater independence in
overseeing customer service operations and making decisions of how similar issues can be
prevented in the future.
In terms of board composition, Cathay Pacific’s Board Diversity Policy (2022) provides an
insight into the company’s commitment to diversity and inclusion within its leadership. It
explicitly states that the company endorses the principle of having a diverse cultural
background and ethnicity on the board. However, according to the information of the
management team available on Cathay Pacific’s official website, there appears to be a lack of
alignment with the diversity commitments promised in the policy: Among the fourteen
executive directors, only one of them possesses prior experience in the mainland aviation
industry.
Additionally, the corporate governance code (2022) states that Cathay Pacific has
independent non-executive directors with no material interests in the company. In light of the
discrimination incident, these independent directors can play a pivotal role in holding the
company accountable and overseeing the review process. It is important for stakeholders to
know that these directors are actively engaged in making unbiased decisions to address the
issue.
In conclusion, the code of directors provides a basic understanding of Cathay Pacific’s
adherence to fundamental corporate governance. And the Board Diversity Policy enhances its
usefulness by explicitly outlining the company’s commitment to diversity and racial equality.
However, there remains a need for more specific disclosures concerning the diversity of
directors, such as publishing reports on the board’s diversity initiatives and efforts,
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
particularly highlighting members with experience in different countries’ aviation industries,
or clearly communicate any possible changes in the board composition to achieve racial
diversity.
What about other types of diversity? Would they not be important in this discussion?
Furthermore, the current disclosure may not effectively address the specific concerns
raised by the discrimination issue. To reduce information asymmetry related to the incident,
Cathay Pacific should consider showing that its actual behavior aligns with its commitment to
its codes. Transparency regarding concrete actions taken in response to incidents like
discrimination, as well as ongoing efforts to promote equality, should be disclosed. This
ensures that the company’s commitment to these values is not just a statement but is reflected
in its everyday operations and directors’ decision-making processes.
2. Role and function
The incident mainly involved employee training and service quality, but it also subtly
exposed a more extensive governance system within the business. Directors’ securities
transactions and remuneration matters are two crucial governance disclosures that stand out in
this situation.
Directors’ Securities Transactions: According to the Code of Directors’ Securities
Transactions of Cathay Pacific Airways, Directors are expressly prohibited from trading in the
company’s securities if they have access to inside knowledge, until the information is made
public (2014). This disclosure said stakeholders in understanding how a company makes sure
its directors don’t use confidential information for their own benefit or to participate in
unethical behavior. For those stakeholders, this is crucial. This disclosure can be said to be an
assurance of a broader culture of compliance and ethical behavior. After experiencing this
discriminating episode, stakeholders will more closely examine the company’s governance
process, be aware of its flaws, and steer clear of similar crises.
I fail to see the link between this discussion and the issue in the article
Remuneration Matters: Another important disclosure is that, according to Cathay Pacific
Airways Limited’s Corporate Control Code, the remuneration committee is mostly made up of
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
independent non-executive directors. The Committee develops a systematic and open process
for creating remuneration policy and makes recommendations to the Board of Directors
regarding matters such as the overall remuneration policy, the structure of the company’s
directors, and senior management (2023). The company is dedicated to providing executives
with pay that is open, equitable, and consistent with shareholder interests. The faith of the
company’s stakeholders was questioned in the context of this discrimination incident, and the
leaders of the company were held responsible for it. The existence of a fair and unbiased
compensation committee helps stakeholders understand and feel more confident about the
rewards and accountability of CEOs.
How does board remuneration relate to the issue?
The code for directors’ securities transactions demonstrates Cathay Pacific’s commitment to
good corporate governance and its positive ethical behavior policy. The makeup of the
remuneration committee evidences that there are checks and balances in place regarding
executive salary. The corporate governance issues resulting from this discriminatory response
cannot be resolved directly by these disclosures, they can only be used as a veiled call to action
for problem-solving and accountability.
Information asymmetry can be decreased by open governance practices. Cathay closes the
information gap about potential insider trading by being open about its directors’ securities
dealings. To ensure that stakeholders are aware of any potential conflicts of interest or bias,
disclose the membership of the pay committee.
In conclusion, corporate governance disclosure is a cornerstone of trust, reassuring
stakeholders that they may tackle challenges with confidence and uphold moral principles and
social responsibilities.
3. Compliance
The incident of Cathay Pacific Airways discriminating against Chinese mainland travelers
is what the news story is mostly about. It raises significant concerns regarding the airline’s
commitment to customer service, diversity, and acceptance, all of which carry substantial
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
implications for the company’s reputation and management practices (2023)..
In the realm of corporate governance, ensuring the adherence to regulations and the rigorous
implementation of best practices holds paramount significance. Terms of recent allegations of
discrimination against passengers from mainland China, this analysis will investigate Cathay
Pacific’s governance framework with a focus on compliance measures.
What is the disclosure you are considering?
The board has clearly outlined the distribution of authority and the corresponding tasks for
individuals and there are set rules that all workers, including those on the front lines, should
follow. However, discrimination occurred, possibly stemming from a lack of training or a gap
in the chain of command. The delegation declaration not only informs everyone of their
respective responsibilities but also places the responsibility on the board to ensure effective
communication of tasks to those lower in the hierarchy. Now that the incident has concluded,
it is crucial to revisit the way these duties are elucidated and provide training once more.
Are you suggesting the board provides tasks to cabin crew? Is this not an operational decision and within the management of the
company?
The Chairman plays a crucial role in shaping the company’s direction and ensuring the
implementation of sound corporate governance practices and procedures. Given their
significant influence on the business and governance, it is crucial to assess the steps taken by
the Chairman in response to the incident. The company’s leaders should quickly condemn all
kinds of discrimination and stress how committed the business is to diversity and inclusion.
Following an incident of this nature, it would also be important for the Chairman to spend
efforts aimed at enhancing the company’s training and educational programs, particularly in
areas like cultural sensitivity and customer service.
In conclusion, Cathay Pacific’s compliance-related disclosures show that the company has
a structured approach to corporate governance. However, the stated discrimination incident
shows how important it is to put these governance principles into practice. It highlights that
effective corporate governance extends beyond mere rule-following, emphasizing the need to
ensure that the company’s core values are manifested in its day-to-day operations.
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
4.
Shareholder Communication
Cathay Pacific Airways Limited has implemented a Shareholder Communications Policy
in adherence to its Code of business Governance (2019). The objective of this policy is to
guarantee that shareholders and prospective investors are provided with equitable and prompt
access to comprehensive and comprehensible business information. The Company also
encourages inquiries and input from its shareholders and prospective investors, and endeavors
to provide suitable and prompt responses. In addition, the Company will engage in
communication with both shareholders and potential investors through a range of channels,
including but not limited to annual and interim reports, official announcements, circulars,
news releases, the Company’s official website, investor relations initiatives, and general
meetings.
That is the relevance of shareholder communication to the issue?
It is evident from the sustainability report that Cathay Pacific Airways Limited
acknowledges the significance of stakeholder input and opinions. The firm endeavors to
uphold the trust and confidence of shareholders and prospective investors by means of this
transparency, thereby augmenting corporate governance. The occurrence of discrimination in
June constituted a blatant infringement upon the company’s adherence to the concerns and
anticipations of its shareholders and other stakeholders. This clearly created a negative
perception among stakeholders in measuring Cathay Pacific’s compliance with corporate
governance code disclosures related to shareholder communications.
In terms of reducing information asymmetry, the sustainability report allows and
encourages stakeholders to contact the company through a variety of channels, which largely
reduces the likelihood of information asymmetry (2019). For example, at the time of the
discrimination incident, various stakeholders were able to give advice to Cathay Pacific. A
small number of stakeholders or outsiders who were unaware of the incident may also be
informed of it by the response provided by the company, such as the possible subsequent
wide dissemination of the incident investigation note in the media. This greatly reduces the
asymmetry of information available to all parties about Cathay Pacific.
Conclusion?
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
Engagement with academic literature?
Reference
Board
diversity
policy
–
cathay
pacific.
(2022).
Retrieved
from
Retrieved
from
communication
policy.
https://www.cathaypacific.com/content/dam/cx/about-us/corporate
governance/20221109-cx-board-diversity-policy-en.pdf
Corporate
governance
code.
Cathay
Pacific.
(2022).
https://www.cathaypacific.com/content/dam/cx/about-us/corporategovernance/202208_CX_Corporate_Governance_Code_en.pdf
Cathay
Pacific
Airways
Limited.
(2019).
Shareholders’
https://www.cathaypacific.com/content/dam/cx/about-us/corporategovernance/cx_shareholders_communication_policy_en.pdf
Cathay Pacific Airways Limited Code for Securities Transactions by Directors. (2014).
Retrieved from https://www.cathaypacific.com/content/dam/cx/about-us/corporategovernance/20160823-CX-Code-for-Securities-Transactions-by-Directors-en.pdf
Cathay Pacific Airways Limited Remuneration Committee -Terms of Reference. (2023).
Retrieved from https://www.cathaypacific.com/content/dam/cx/about-us/corporategovernance/remuneration-ommittee-terms-of-reference-en.pdf
Loo, M., Heriyati, P., Tamara, D., & Sebira, M. H. (2021). When do we fly again? Managing
Group822,510018823,510208088,500256059,510090689,510083452,500022177
Airlines in a Pandemic: Challenges and Recommendations. Turkish Journal of Computer
and
Mathematics
Education,
12(3),
4959–4978.
Retrieved
from
(2023).
Retrieved
from
https://doi.org/10.17762/turcomat.v12i3.2009
Management
team.
Cathay
Pacific.
https://www.cathaypacific.com/cx/en_GB/about-us/about-our-airline/managementteam.html
BUSINESS SCHOOL
Group Assignment
ACCT3031: International Corporate Governance
Semester 2, 2023
The Group Assignment provides an opportunity to interact with other students to negotiate and create a shared
understanding. In completing the Group Assignment, students are expected to demonstrate their ability to
undertake joint research, critically evaluate information, use analytical skills, and apply knowledge from course
materials and other sources.
The group assignment is designed as a collaborative learning experience, where the research of one group
leads a discussion in class on the issues with, or advantages of corporate governance, that will benefit the
entire class.
The group assignment (weighted at 35% of your overall marks) consists of three components:
1. Report: 2500-word report due week 10 (11.59pm, Tuesday 10 October 2023)
2. Critical Analysis: 250-word critical analysis of reports by two (2) other groups due week 11 (11.59pm,
Tuesday 17 October 2023)
3. 10-minute presentation of your report in your allocated workshop in week 12 (a copy of the
presentation slides must be uploaded to Canvas by 9am, Wednesday 25 October 2023)
Groups
Membership:
Students within a group must be allocated to the same workshop.
Size:
5-6 students. Students are to form a group and complete the group nomination in Canvas by
the end of week 5 (5pm, Friday 1 September 2023). A penalty of 5% will be applied to all
students who have not formed a group by the deadline.
Nomination:
The group nomination requires one member of the group self-enrolling in the empty group on
Canvas (see the link in the Assessment page on Canvas) and the remainder of the group selfenrolling into that group.
Number:
The group number to be used for the assignment submission will be provided on Canvas and
will consist of your stream number and the self-sign-up group nomination. If you are in stream
1 and your group nomination is Group 7, your group number will be 107. The group number
must be shown in the header of your report and in the file name (see following).
Contribution:
Each group member is expected to be involved in the preparation, drafting, proofing and
checking of all aspects of this group assignment including ensuring no breaches of academic
honesty. Members will be held jointly responsible for the entire submission and awarded the
same merit mark. In the event of a breach of academic honesty, the penalty may apply to all
group members irrespective of which member(s) caused the breach.
1
Document Properties
Format:
The report is to be prepared using 12-point font (Times New Roman, Arial or Cambria),
paragraphs formatted with 1.5-line spacing, and with margins not less than 2cm.
Header:
Your group number and the SID of all group members is to be shown in the header of your
report on each page.
File name:
The Report and Presentation files must be saved using Your Group Number, ACCT3031,
Semester 2, 2023; e.g. Group107ACCT3031s223.
The Critical Analysis files must be saved using Your Group Number, ACCT3031, Semester 2,
2023, Other Group Number; e.g. Group107ACCT3031s23Group103.
Failure to following the naming requirements will result in a 5% penalty.
Referencing:
Students should follow the rules set out in the APA 7th referencing style. Please refer to the
library site for further information and expectations about consistent referencing:
https://libguides.library.usyd.edu.au/citation/apa7
Word length:
A word length (of 2500 words) has been specified for the report in this assignment, you must
conform to the word length. Where a group exceeds the maximum word length, the group will
incur a penalty of 10% of the total available marks when the submission is 10% above the
maximum word length and an additional 10% for each 10% over-length thereafter.
Note, the maximum word length includes in-text referencing but excludes the reference list
and any appendices at the end of the assessment. See University Policies and Business
School Resolutions on Assessment: https://business.sydney.edu.au/students/policy
Company Nomination Requirements
Each group is required to nominate a company from the list provided on Canvas at the start of week 6 (9am,
Monday 4 September 2023). The nomination of the chosen company is to be made by placing a comment in
the appropriate Discussion Board thread in Canvas that includes your group number. A company can only be
chosen by one group in each workshop on a ‘first come-first served’ basis.
Your group must nominate the selected company by the end of week 7 (5pm, Friday 17 September 2023).
A penalty of 5% will apply to each group that nominates more than one company or does not provide a
nomination by the required date.
Assessment Details
1. Report
(70 marks)
Your group is required to investigate the corporate governance failure or issue identified in the provided
article relating to your chosen company. As part of completing the report, your group will need to identify
and obtain:
2
•
the relevant corporate governance code or requirements of the local stock/security exchange in
the year the corporate governance failure or issue occurred. If the issue has occurred over more
than one (1) reporting period, obtain the code that existed at the end of the period. It should be
noted, some security/stock exchanges do not publish a corporate governance code but include
corporate governance requirements within the listing rules (e.g. NYSE); and
•
the company’s corporate governance disclosures that were provided in the year the corporate
governance failure or issue occurred. If the issue has occurred over more than one (1) reporting
period, obtain the disclosures provided during the final year of the period.
N.B. Disclosures include, but are not limited to, financial reports, annual reports, governance reports,
sustainability reports, and the company website – do not rely solely on a single source document. As part
of the analysis, consider the appropriate theory or theories that can explain an observation, as well as
academic research, and industry reports. The use of media reports or news websites is strongly
discouraged.
Report Brief
Using a company’s corporate governance disclosures and the corporate governance code where the
company is listed, you will critique the usefulness of the company disclosures as a means of increasing
corporate transparency and accountability. This task will be completed via a two-step process:
1. Compare the level or extent of company compliance with the requirements of the corporate
governance code; and
2. Analyse the corporate disclosures to corporate practice.
In effect, you will be reading what the company was disclosing about their corporate governance practices
(in the corporate governance disclosures), with the knowledge of what was really happening within
company (based on the news article). Your group report is to include:
Executive summary (300 words)
An executive summary of the key findings and analysis. The executive summary must provide
sufficient detail for the reader to understand (albeit at a superficial level) the contents of your report.
Compliance with corporate governance code (500 words)
Comparison the level of corporate compliance to the relevant corporate governance code (or listing
rule, where appropriate) of the local stock/security exchange. It is suggested this information is
provided in a table with a brief explanation on the level of compliance/non-compliance.
Ex post analysis of reporting of disclosures (1 700 words)
Considering the corporate governance failure or issue identified in the article, provide an analysis
(what your group considers) of the most relevant corporate governance disclosures provided by the
company (4 would be sufficient) and respond to the following questions:
1. How useful are the disclosures for stakeholders to gauge the level of consideration to, and
compliance with, the corporate governance code; and
2. Are the disclosures an effective tool to reduce information asymmetry.
3
2. Critical Analysis (250 words x 2)
(10 marks)
Each group will be provided, via Canvas, with the Reports from two other groups. Your group is required
to undertake a critical analysis of each Report. Your group must decide how you will undertake the analysis
and report your findings, ideas, or suggestions. However, it is suggested consideration be given to areas
of strength or weakness, missing or incorrect information, agreement or disagreement with the Reports’
analysis, arguments, or findings. Do not comment on spelling or grammatical errors.
The Reports and subsequent Critical Analysis for all groups will be provided on Canvas. All information
identifying the group members will be removed.
3. Presentation (10 minutes + 2 minutes Q&A)
(20 marks)
Taking into consideration feedback provided by other groups in the Critical Analysis, your group is to
present the Report in the workshop. The presentation is to cover a brief overview of the company, what
was being investigated, the analysis undertaken and the key findings.
As part of the marking, your group is required to ask questions of each group where you completed the
Critical Analysis.
Submission Instructions
1. Report
Anonymous marking will be used for this assignment. To enable your mark to be recorded you must ensure
your group number provided in Canvas is shown in the header of the file. The report must be submitted
electronically via Turnitin by the due date as either a .doc or .docx file. Only one submission is required
per group. Where more than one student per group submits the assignment, the earliest submission will
be marked.
2. Critical Analysis
The critical analysis of two group reports must be submitted electronically via Turnitin by the due date as
either a .doc or .docx file. Only one submission is required per group. Where more than one student per
group submits the assignment, the earliest submission will be marked.
3. Presentation
The presentation slides must be submitted electronically via Turnitin by the due date as either a .ppt
or .pptx file. Only one submission is required per group.
Late Submissions
A student or group that submits an assessment late (after the official due date), and is not covered by an
approved Special Consideration, or submits after the extension granted under a Special Consideration, the
penalty of 5% of the Total Available Marks per day or part thereof, until the close date will apply, after which
the student or group will receive 0 marks.
4
Academic Honesty
You are not permitted to use automated writing tools when completing the assessments on this unit of study.
These tools include, but not limited to:
1. typing assistants, such as Grammarly
2. translation tools, such as Google Translate or Baidu Translate
3. automated writing tools, such as ChatGPT
As a student at the University, you are responsible for taking part in your education in an honest and authentic
manner. It is, therefore, expected that you take extra care to ensure that there are no breaches of academic
honesty. All assignments will be manually and electronically checked for plagiarism (copying). Any perceived
breaches of academic honesty will be referred to the Office of Educational Integrity for further investigation
and penalised if verified. You can read more info
Economics Essay Question
1. We discussed the situation of world energy use and its impacts on environment. This question
asks you to observe the data and graphs from online data
source, https://ourworldindata.org/ to answer the following question and explain your answer.
For the following countries, has their economic growth decoupled from CO2 emissions?
The U.S., Japan, China, India, and Germany.
Note: decoupling means two variables do not follow the similar trend. In this question, it means GDP
per capita and CO2 emissions. You will find two CO2 emissions, consumption-based CO2 and
production-base CO2 emission. The following link for the U.S. case, you can “change the country” to
find the graph each of the six countries.
https://ourworldindata.org/grapher/co2-emissions-and-gdp?time=1990..latest&country=~USA
2. In the discussion of capitalism, we discussed how the capitalism as an institution evolves and
shapes the world unevenly. This question asks you read Part I and VI of the following paper and
answer the following question.
Based on the paper, (a) what is the reversal of fortune? (b)What are the two measures (proxies)
used to measure prosperity? (c) What are the two hypotheses researchers used to explain the
reversal of fortune? (d) How does the institutions hypothesis explain the reversal in relative incomes
among the former colonies?
Please refer to the paper Reversal of Fortune: Geography and Institutions in the Making of the
Modern World Income Distribution, Daron Acemoglu, Simon Johnson, James Robinson, Quarterly
Journal of Economics, 117, pp. 1231-1294. November 2002
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Public Management (MGT 324)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Public Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 324
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: XXXXXX
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs):
1. Describe the simple and complex issues pertaining to public management
2. Demonstrate different management and leadership styles for different situations
Assignment Questions:
Discuss the following questions:
Q1. “Leaders are born, not made.” In light of this statement, briefly explain the concept of
leadership and its role in organizational development in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Q2. “Leadership strategy is essential for the growth and success of an organsiation”. In light
of this statement, discuss the different leadership approaches to leading an organization and
analyze work and their relevance in the present-day context in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Answers
Please answer the following two questions:What is the difference between applied research and basic or pure research? Use a decision about how a salesperson is to be paid, by commission or salary, and describe the question that would guide applied research versus the question that would guide pure research.The new management of an old established company is facing problem. The company is currently unprofitable and is, in the management’s opinion, operating inefficiently. The company sells a wide line of equipment and supplies to the dairy industry. Some items it manufactures and many wholesales to diaries, creameries, and similar plants. Because the industry is changing in several ways, survival will be more difficult in the future. In particular, many equipment companies are bypassing the wholesalers and selling directly to dairies. In addition, many of the independent dairies are being taken over by large food chains.How might business research help the new management make the right decision. apa format remember to cite/ reference page no more than 3 pages work.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11940
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Salem Alanizan
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Imagine you are head of the HR department and you have been asked to review five applicants for the sales clerk position at your company. During the interview process, you learn the following about each applicant:
The Applicants
Alice
Alice has 10 years of experience in sales but can be distracted easily. She will not work on commission and cannot work weekends. She can be a little obstinate but has an excellent job history. She also requires ADA accommodations due to an injury sustained during military service.
Mary
Mary has just one year’s experience, but she is very congenial and loves working with people. Her work schedule is very flexible but she can become a little stressed at times and periodically needs to leave quietly and regroup for a short time. Mary also considers herself a human rights advocate with an emphasis on race relations, and is known to voice her opinions related to racial injustice to others.
James
James has seven years’ experience, a master’s degree in business, and aspirations of owning a company in the near future. James is a devout Christian. He is known to make biblical references often, encourages others to attend his church, and has requested 80 hours in advance to attend religious conferences within the next six months.
Sam
Sam has six years’ experience and is willing to work all shifts. Sam is transgender, prefers gender-neutral pronouns (they/them), and is looking for a new job due to bullying at a previous workplace.
Justin
Justin has five years’ experience, is hardworking, flexible, and has a great job history. Justin is also someone you met in college, dated briefly, and have not seen in a few years.
Candidate Selection
Decide which candidate would be the right fit for the sales clerk position.
Describe the thought process that led to your decision and your reasons for not selecting one or more of the other candidates.
Justify your choice, including all of the considerations or factors that influenced your selection.
After reading a few of your classmates’ posts, reply to those from whom you learned something new or posts to which you have something constructive to add. For example:
Discuss what you learned.
Ask probing questions or seek clarification.
Explain why you agree or disagree with your classmate’s main points, assertions, assumptions, or conclusions.
Suggest research strategies or specific resources on the topic.
Select a publicly traded company to research. Evaluate its human resource (HR) and business strategy, HR department job positions, and ways it markets its company regarding human capital. The following are some of the company websites that provide this information:
Allstate: Human Resources CareersLinks to an external site..
State Farm: Human Resources & Training CareersLinks to an external site..
Ford: CareersLinks to an external site..
Marriott. Marriott CareersLinks to an external site..
In addition, refer to the U.S. Bureau of Labor StatisticsLinks to an external site. website, which identifies detailed roles for HRM personnel and offers you some insight into HRM positions.
Write a 2-3 page paper in which you:
Explain how you would ensure the HR strategy is in alignment with the business strategy of your selected company.
Provide a detailed description of the HR Department job positions and associated responsibilities.
Determine which HR job positions you would prefer and explain why.
Analyze how the selected company can establish HRM strategies to improve competitive advantages.
Propose three ways your selected company can increase diversity and remain competitive in the industry.
Support your propositions, assertions, arguments, or conclusions with at least three credible, relevant, and appropriate sources synthesized in a coherent analysis.
Cite each source on your source list at least one time within your assignment.
For help with research, writing, and citation, access the library or review library guides.
Write clearly and concisely in a manner that is well organized, grammatically correct, and free of spelling, typographical, formatting, and/or punctuation errors.
This course requires the use of Strayer Writing Standards (SWS). The library is your home for SWS assistance, including citations and formatting. Please refer to the Library site for all support. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
The specific course learning outcome associated with this assignment is:
Propose how to align human resource strategies with business strategies to increase competitive advantage, including increasing diversity
· Describe the concept of operations functions, supply chain strategy, process selection,forecasting, capacity planning, production forecast methods and schedule operations Action Required:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lZPO5RclZEo (Question):Q. What do you understand by Supply chain Management?
9.1 Learning Outcomes:Describe the concept of operations functions, supply chain strategy, process selection,forecasting, capacity planning, production forecast methods and schedule operations9.2 Action Required: 9.3 Test your Knowledge (Question): Q. What do you understand by Supply chain Management? 9.4 InstructionsAnswer the question in test your knowledge section.Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below (Week8: Interactive learning Discussion
After reading “Sound Reasoning for Useful Answers” in a Chapter 3 and looking for peer review articles, discuss the following questions:What are the two types of discourse?What are the two types of Argument?Please use business examples to distinguish them. apa format remember to cite/ reference page
Hi, looking for support with the following: Read the attached slides and the given sources to understand the requirement. Madhani, P. M. (2020). Lean Six Sigma Deployment in Finance and Financial Services: Enhancing Competitive Advantages. IUP Journal of Operations Management, 19(3), 25–49. Faisal, T., & Faisal, M.N. (2020). Assessment of total quality management implementation in Indian service industries. IUP Journal of Operations Management, 19(2), 7-28. Sharma, B., & Rahim, M.A. (2021). TQM and HRM: An integrated approach to organizational success. Journal of Comparative International Management, 24(1), 27-41. Module 09: Discussion Control Charts Discuss the steps in the control process and apply them to a quality and productivity situation that you are familiar with or can imagine with an organization. What is one thing an organization can do to improve the control process to increase productivity? Directions: Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from the given slides. Cite from the given slides and sources and cite any other sources (Make sure to add not less then 3 more sources) Plagiarism MUST BE zero. APA style of writing. Demonstrates excellent knowledge of concepts, skills, and theories relevant to the topic. Writing is well organized, clear, concise, and focused; no errors
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.Late submissions will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Each answer must not less than300 Words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
• How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
• What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and culturaldifferences affected the communication process.
• How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
rubric is attachad my part is the third question
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Explain what determines the level of economic development of a nation.Identify the macropolitical and macroeconomic changes occurring worldwide.Describe how transition economies are moving toward market-based systems.Explain the implications for management practice of national difference in political economy. Action Required:The purpose of this interactive activity is to demonstrate your understanding of the concepts learned lessons by responding to discussion questions. Test your Knowledge (Question): Discuss how an economy can shift toward a market-based system.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 13880
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Dr. Majed Helmi
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Need it back in 1 hour.For this application assignment, you are going to complete a Bank Reconciliation. Bank reconciliations are a key component of cash and internal controls for an organization and a primary responsibility of the accounting department. The Appendix A for Chapter 6 reviews several cash related items, and bank reconciliations are covered on pages 6-39 to 6-41. In the attached Excel file I have provided the problem instructions on the first tab, the Bank Reconciliation and JE’s workpapers (to be completed by you) on the second tab, and a Quick Reference for bank reconciliations on the third tab that you might find useful in preparing the reconciliation. 1. Your assignment is to complete the Bank Reconciliation (part a) using the format provided in the text, Illustration 6A-1 on page 6-40. Then, you must complete the related journal entries for the reconciliation (part b). You will only be completing this one tab in the Excel workbook (the highlighted orange tab). 2. Once you have completed this tab, rename the workbook with the following format “last name.first name_App2_Ch6” and submit by the due date. This assignment is worth 25 points.HELPFUL HINT: Remember that all journal entries will be an addition to or subtraction from the Cash account – so Cash will always be involved in each journal entry. Also remember the purpose of the journal entries is to take the beginning cash balance (before the reconciliation) and book the debits/credits necessary to make the ending cash balance on the ledger the same as the calculated ending cash balance. Do not combine different events into one journal entry.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Use the textbook Appendix 6A to complete this problem. (pgs 6-39 to 6-41)
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries)
The cash account of Aguilar Co. showed a ledger balance of $3,685.20 on June 30, 2024. The bank
statement as of that date showed a balance of $5,999.25. Upon comparing the statement with the cash
records, the following facts were determined.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Instructions
(a)
(b)
Prepare a bank reconciliation dated June 30, 2024, proceeding to a correct cash balance.
Prepare any entries necessary to make the general ledger correct and complete.
*Assume sales related to deposit errors were on account. HINT: Your adjustment is an Accounts Receivable is
**Assume the check error related to Equipment purchase was on account, meaning the original entry to
Equipment and Accounts Payable was correct. HINT: Your adjustment is an Accounts Payable issue.
the textbook Appendix 6A to complete this problem. (pgs 6-39 to 6-41)
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries)
The cash account of Aguilar Co. showed a ledger balance of $3,685.20 on June 30, 2024. The bank
statement as of that date showed a balance of $5,999.25. Upon comparing the statement with the cash
records, the following facts were determined.
There were bank service charges for June of $43.
A bank memo stated that Bao Dai’s note for $2,100 and interest revenue of $107.25 had
been collected on June 29, and the bank had made a charge of $25.00 as fees for the
collection. (No entry had been made on Aguilar’s books when Bao Dai’s note was sent to the
bank for collection.)
Cash receipts for June 30 for $1,423.40 were not deposited until July 2.
Checks outstanding on June 30 totaled $1,926.70.
The bank had charged the Aguilar Co.’s account for a customer’s uncollectible (NSF) check
amounting to $138.50 on June 29.
A customer’s check for $465 had been deposited correctly at the bank but entered as $435
in the cash receipts journal by Aguilar on June 15.
Check no. 742 correctly written in the amount of $960 had been entered in the cash journal
as $690, and check no. 747 correctly written in the amount of $340.00 had been entered as
$390.00. Both checks had been issued to pay for purchases of equipment which was
entered into the ledger correctly on initial transaction. (HINT- Treat as two separate items on
the reconciliation)
Instructions
Prepare a bank reconciliation dated June 30, 2024, proceeding to a correct cash balance.
Prepare any entries necessary to make the general ledger correct and complete.
*Assume sales related to deposit errors were on account. HINT: Your adjustment is an Accounts Receivable issue
**Assume the check error related to Equipment purchase was on account, meaning the original entry to
Equipment and Accounts Payable was correct. HINT: Your adjustment is an Accounts Payable issue.
(a)
Aguilar Co.
Bank Reconciliation
June 30, 2024
(b) Be sure to provide descriptions. Journalize each item separately.
Date
Account Titles
Debit
Credit
Bank Reconciliation
Balance as per bank statement
Add:
Deposits in Transit
Deduct:
Outstanding Checks
=
Correct Cash Balance
$
+
$
Balance as per Books at Month End
Add:
Notes Collected by Banks
Deduct:
Bank Fees
NSF checks
Add or Deduct:
Book Errors
Correct Cash Balance
Note: All additions or deductions made to the final “Balance per Books”, as calculated, must actually be booked
with a journal entry to get the book balance correct.
Examples:
(1) Notes collected by bank
JE:
Cash
Notes Receivable (principal)
Interest Revenue (interest)
(2) Bank Fees and service charges
JE:
Office Expense
Cash
(3) Book errors for checks (AP)/deposits (AR)
JE:
Cash
Accounts Receivable/Payable
OR
Accounts Receivable/Payable
Cash
Debit
Credit
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
(if under-recorded customer deposit or o
(if over-recorded customer deposit or un
xx
(4) NSF check – a customer check that was deposited to our account that was returned as not funded by the customers acco
JE:
Accounts Receivable
xx
Cash
xx
$
+
+/$
ecorded customer deposit or over-recorded check payment)
corded customer deposit or under-recorded check payment)
funded by the customers account
As
a consultant, you need to develop an in-depth analysis and evaluation
of the selected agency’s ethics, cooperation, leadership, and legal
decisions (if applicable), and then provide recommendations for
improvement. The analysis will be read by the VP of public programs and
client support, as well as by the leaders of the agency for whom you are
working. Therefore, you will research related academic sources and
government websites. Write a 5–7 page paper (including title and
reference page) entitled Part 2: Evaluation of [Selected Agency]’s
Ethics, Cooperation, and Leadership in which you separate the content
into the following sections:Administrative Ethics.Leadership Influences.Strategies for Consideration to Administrative Processes.Recommendations for Improvements to Administrative Processes.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Evaluation of Selected Agency’s Ethics, Cooperation, and
Lea…
Overview
As a consultant, you need to develop an in-depth analysis and evaluation of the selected agency’s
ethics, cooperation, leadership, and legal decisions (if applicable), and then provide
recommendations for improvement. The analysis will be read by the VP of public programs and
client support, as well as by the leaders of the agency for whom you are working. Therefore, you
will research related academic sources and government websites. Write a 5–7 page paper
(including title and reference page) entitled Part 2: Evaluation of [Selected Agency]’s Ethics,
Cooperation, and Leadership in which you separate the content into the following sections:
•
•
•
•
Administrative Ethics.
Leadership Influences.
Strategies for Consideration to Administrative Processes.
Recommendations for Improvements to Administrative Processes.
Instructions
1. Analyze one current event from the past two years and focus on the administrative
responsibility and/or ethical implications to the stakeholders, and the organization.
o To find news items about current events, go directly to the organization’s website
or preview The Center for Public Integrity
•
• Links to an external site., for current event updates on public issues. Select a topic and
review the latest news items about it.
• Assess the primary leadership style of the organization by choosing either democratic,
autocratic, or laissez-faire. Describe one way internal agency leaders and political leaders have
influenced the success or failure of the agency.
• Analyze one strategy for the agency’s future addressing an ethical or leadership issue. List one
improvement the agency needs to make to its service to its primary recipients.
• Based on models that influence public policy and the strategy presented in the previous
criterion:
•
Recommend one strategy that will provide immediate (short-term) improvement and
support to the administrative processes.
• Use at least three quality sources to support your writing. Choose sources that are credible,
relevant, and appropriate. Cite each source listed on your source page at least one time within
your assignment. Include no more than one nongovernment website.
I have a research paper for Customer Service Best Practice class. The instruction will be in the word file.Here is the textbook info : Title: Customer Service: Skills for Success Author: Lucas, Robert W Publisher: McGraw Hill Publishing Company Year Published: 2019 Edition: 7th
ISBN: 10: 1259954072 or 13: 9781259954078
7.1 Learning Outcomes:
Recognize the overall knowledge management processes, concepts, goals and strategies
within the context of organization.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilise knowledge management tools
for the benefits of the organization.
7.2 Action Required:
Watch the short video in the following link and answer the question given in test your
knowledge section.
7.3 Test your Knowledge (Question):
Q: Briefly describe the main points highlighted in the video.
7.4 Instructions
•
•
Answer the question in test your knowledge section.
Post your answer in the discussion board using the discussion link below (Week 7: Interactive
learning Discussion)
Module 09: Introduction
Module 09: IntroductionAttached Files:
Module 09 PowerPoint Slides Module 09 PowerPoint Slides – Alternative Formats (2.468 MB)
This module continues with an examination of international flows of the factors of production, labor, and capital, some of which occur within large multinational enterprises. We will explore multinational enterprises’ (MNEs) strategies and how MNEs seek to gain comparative advantage using organizational means. In addition, we will discuss MNEs and trade theory.
Learning Outcomes
Apply classical trade theory to explain the activities of multinational enterprises (MNEs)
Analyze the welfare effects of transborder flows of labor (migration)
Readings
Required: Chapter 9 International EconomicsDegele, E., & Rambabu, K. (2020). Ethiopia’s FDI inflow from India and China: analysis of trends and determinants. Journal of Economic Structures, 9(1). Retrieved from https://doi-org.sdl.idm.oclc.org/10.1186/s40008-020-00211-7 Sankar, S., Sahu, N., & Pandey, D. (2020). How far is FDI relevant to India’s foreign trade growth? An empirical investigation. Journal of Economic Structures, 9(1). Retrieved from https://doi-org.sdl.idm.oclc.org/10.1186/s40008-020-00212-6
Recommended:Chapter 9 PowerPoint slidesNaz, A., Shaista, A., & Noman, S. (2019). The determinants of income distribution, an empirical analysis of developing countries. Public Finance Quarterly, 64(4), 494-510. https://doi-org.sdl.idm.oclc.org/10.35551/PFQ_2019_4_3Degele, E., & Rambabu, K. (2020). Ethiopia’s FDI inflow from India and China: analysis of trends and determinants. Journal of Economic Structures, 9(1).https://doi-org.sdl.idm.oclc.org/10.1186/s40008-020-00211-7
Module 09: Discussion
Module 09: Discussion
International Growth in Multinational Enterprises
What are some of the factors that limit the international growth of multinational enterprises?
How do regulations and rules varying from nation to nation affect multinational corporations?
What are some advantages and disadvantages of multinational enterprises?
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
Module 09: Introduction
Standard Costs and Variance AnalysisLearning Outcomes
Describe the purpose of standard costs used for manufacturing costs.
Analyze the direct materials price and quantity variances and explain their significance.
Appraise the direct labor rate and efficiency variances and explain their significance.
Evaluate the variable manufacturing overhead rate and efficiency variances and explain their significance.
ReadingsRequired:
Chapter 9 in Managerial Accounting
Falat, K. (2019). Changes in the Product Costing Process Driven by Implementation of an Integrated Information System in a Production Company. EFinanse, 15(4). https://doi.org/10.2478/fiqf-2019-0025
Recommended:
Module 09 PowerPoint Presentation
Ching-Wen Kwang, & Slavin, A. (1962). The Simple Mathematics of Variance Analysis. Accounting Review, 37(3), 415.
Module 09 Discussion
Module 09 Discussion
Evaluating Variance from Standard Costs
Discuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?
Directions:
Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.
Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.
Reply to at least two discussion posts with comments that further and advance the discussion topic.
Milton Friedman’s (1970) essay on “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to
Increase Its Profits” has long been cited by managers, politicians, and business
scholars alike to argue against various forms of social responsibilities of
businesses.
(1) Engage with Friedman’s arguments by reading his famous essay and summarize
his main lines of argument:
Why, according to Friedman, should the social responsibility of business be to
increase its profits?
https://timesmachine.nytimes.com/timesmachine/1970/09/13/223535702.html?pa
geNumber=379)
In the 50 years since the publication, the public debate as well as our understanding
of society and business has moved on. On the 50th anniversary of Friedman’s essay,
in Sep. 2020, The New York Times published a piece with a series of responses to
Friedman.
(2) Engage with these thoughts to collect and systematically arrange arguments:
Why might businesses have other responsibilities than increasing their profits?
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-socialresponsibility-of-business.html)
Submission Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum = 2 pages. If you create more than two pages, your grade will deducted
by 5%. References are not counted in this page limit.
Single-spaced within paragraphs and double-spaced between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch margins and 12-point font (enforced). Smaller/Larger fonts
and margins will be deducted 10%.
Click “Submit Assignment” located at the top right-hand corner to upload your
assignment.
Cite your relevant sources in APA citation and referencing format (this refers only
to the citations/references, not the paper writing style)
This assignment uses TurnitIn, a plagiarism checker to help you verify the
authenticity of your work.
Beware: it is obvious when students only do a portion of the readings and try to
develop a paper around that portion. You should read all of the assigned materials
and demonstrate this in your analysis by integrating the different concepts.
Papers that demonstrate students’ superior ability to integrate the readings and
draw conclusions that are important to managers and/or policymakers will receive a
score of an A, whereas a D score will be awarded to papers that have weak analytical
form and construction.
Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
Ratings
Pts
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the
main take-aways in
a concise and clear
manner
2.5 to >2.13 pts
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Excellent
Good
Thoughtfully addresses
all required elements
and makes explicit
connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use
of high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to
develop ideas.
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete.
Does not
address most of
the required
elements. The
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 pts
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across
the readings
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important
to organizations
Ratings
5 to >4.25 pts
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Excellent
Good
Thoughtfully addresses
all required elements
and makes explicit
connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use
of high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to
develop ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Excellent
Good
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling
content to
illustrate mastery
of the topic.
Uses mostly
appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to explore ideas but
may lack full
development of
ideas.
2.5 to >0 pts
3.75 to
>2.5 pts
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Pts
Incomplete
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development
of topic may
be lacking.
Incomplete.
Does not
address most of
the required
elements. The
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
5 pts
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of
topic is lacking,
underdeveloped or
not directly related
to topic.
2.5 pts
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
Ratings
Pts
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than
two pages; be
single-spaced within
and double-spaced
between
paragraphs. No less
than 1-inch margins
and 12-point font
are acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
2.5 to >2.13 pts
2.13 to >1.88 pts
1.88 to >0 pts
Excellent
Good
Incomplete
Clear and logical
flow, no errors in
grammar or typos.
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few
or no errors in grammar or typos.
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
2.13 to >1.88 pts
1.88 to >0 pts
Excellent
Good
Incomplete
Citations and references
used appropriately.
Some citations or references
missing or not appropriately
utilized
No citations or
references used.
2.5 pts
2.5 pts
please complete 16 problem-solving questions regarding ch3 and 4 . you have 2 attempts per question and unlimited time on each question. score 80% or better. will provide credentials to log in once the tutor is chosen. please save once completed. course Etextbook is included if you need a reference for the questions.( I will show once tutor is chosen).
Please do not copy and paste I do not accept plagiarism. Make the solution clear and conciseI trained at the University Medical Center The information of the institution must be correct
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form No 4- Internship Report Cover Page
Student`s name:
Student`s ID #:
Training Organization:
Trainee Department:
Field Instructor Name:
Field Instructor Signature:
Course Title:
CRN:
Internship Start Date:
Internship End Date:
Academic Year/Semester:
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Total Training Hours /280
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained /30
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Academic Report Guideline(Co-op)
(please do not include this text in the final report, just follow its guidelines and
use the cover page above)
The report should be submitted within two weeks after you finish your Co-op training Program.
In addition, the report should be approximately 3000 – 4000, single –spaced and consider taking the
following format
General instructions for writing the final report:
The report must be written in English language.
The word limit is 3000-4000.
If the report word count is not within the required word limit, marks will be deducted.
The font size is 12, Times New Roman, justified, 1.5 space.
Main headings use font size of 16 and bold.
Add page numbers in the middle bottom of the page.
Plagiarism or copying from other sources will result in ZERO marks.
This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This
includes filling your information on the cover page.
Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool. Late submission will result in ZERO marks
being awarded.
First Page
The first page should display the student’s full name, internship start and finish dates, working hours per
week, company/institution name, and the cover page.
The field instructor should sign on the first page.
A Brief Executive Summary of the Internship
A one-page summary of the company/institution and a short account of the major activities carried out
during the internship period.
Acknowledgment
To allow the student to express her/his thankful and gratitude to individuals (such as: field instructor,
academic supervisor, colleagues…etc.) who help them in carrying out and completing her/his training
journey. This part will aid the students to learn basic elements of academic writing. To express their
appreciation in a concise and professional manner.
Table of Contents
Contents of the report with page numbers, list of tables, and list of figures.
Introduction
A brief of the report. The Aim of the report.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Chapter 1: Description of the company
This section should answer the following questions:
What is the full title of the company/institution?
Give a brief history of the company, full mailing address and relevant weblinks
What is the type of ownership of the company/institution?
State the main shareholders and their shares.
What is the sector that the company/institution operates in?
Specify the products and services produced and offered to its customers/clients.
Who are regarded as the customers/clients of your internship company (consider the end users, retailers,
other manufacturers, employees,etc.)?
Provide an organization chart of the company, along with information on the number of employees.
Provide a list of functions performed by different departments/divisions in the internship organization.
Provide an overview off the production system or service procedure (what are the resources, inputs,
outcomes, andconstraints?)
Provide a process chart of a major product and/or service.
The following questions can be classified as your major fit (Finance, Accounting, Ecommerce and
Management).
• What kind accounting/finance/IT//quality/marketing standards and principles are used in the
organization?
• Discuss telecommunication technologies (Database, Instant Messenger, Networking, Ecommerce tools)
used in the company.
• Describe the quality planning and control activities in the internship organization.
• Describe the quality control activities throughout the life cycle of the product/service groups
• What kind of financial analysis and decision-making methods are used by corporate treasurers and
financial managers in the internship organization?
• What types of marketing, selling, and human resources analysis are performed (cost system, evaluation
of consumers, needs, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy)?
Chapter 2: Internship activities
This is the main body of your report. During the internship period, the focus of the training may on the
following types of analysis and questions. You do not have to answer all the questions in the list: •
Describe your working conditions and functions, such as: Who is your supervisor (include his/her name
and his/her position); other team members or co-workers and what their functions are to complement
yours.
• Provide a detailed description about the department(s) that the trainee did her/his training with them.
Adding all sub-divisions for this department(s) if it is available. Student can add to this description a
supported chart.
• Detailed descriptions about all tasks and activities that the trainee did them during her/his training
period.
• Gained skills and how they added value to your work
• Other tasks that are not related to the trainee’s major that done by her/him at the company should be
included in this chapter as well.
• What types of incentives did you get as a trainee to be more proactive and productive?
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
• Describe what kind of working documents and analysis you did there and what experiences you have
gained throughout yourtraining. Provide examples of your work.
• A comparison between theory (things you have learned in the classroom) and practice (things you did or
observed at the company) must be made and highlighted. In this section the student can add a supported
table includes which academic course (s) (course title and code) helped to perform training tasks. For
example, two columns; the first one shows the course name and second column shows the tasks
performed and related to this course.
• Show some work samples that you have encountered/conducted at the company through graphs,
pictures, data, drawings, or design calculations and include them in your report.
• Lessons learnt (what the overall benefits gained from the training program)
Chapter 3: Recommendations
• Advantageous that helped the student in completing the training program.
• Disadvantageous and challenges that faced the student and how he/she did overcome them.
• Recommendations to improve training program in the college.
• Recommendation for the training company. Conclusion Sum up and summary of the training
experience. Reference If it is needed Appendix (option) This will help the instructor to have a background
about the trainee and his/her previous experiences. Also, it helps the students in writing their CVs for
future job application especially for fresh graduates who do not have previous practical experiences.
• Basic information (name, city, contact details…etc.).
• Job objectives.
• Academic qualifications.
• Practical experiences.
• Skills this will help the instructor to have a background about the trainee and his/her previous
experiences
Please work on all the questions and provide the rationale or show the work when necessary.
Q2. Please fill in each blank by selecting the answer from the Dropdown:
a. When you have 1 million observations and there are only 2 predictors, it is usually better to use [ Select ] [“flexible”, “inflexible”]statistical learning.
b. When the variance of the error term is very large, it is usually better to use [ Select ] [“flexible”, “inflexible”]statistical learning.
c. When the relationship between the DV and IVs is linear, it is usually better to use [ Select ] [“flexible”, “inflexible”]statistical learning.
Q3. Select True/False for each of the following:
a. A fitted value at an observation point for a linear regression model is a linear combination of the observed response values. [ Select ] [“True”, “False”]
b. In a simple linear regression, the least square regression line may not go through the point (). [ Select ] [“True”, “False”]
c. For a simple linear regression, R^2 is the squared correlation between the DV and the IV. [ Select ] [“True”, “False”]
d. Bootstrap is a resampling method with replacement. [ Select ] [“False”, “True”]
Q4. Let be the original sample. Suppose that we obtain a bootstrap sample from this original sample with n observations.
(i) the probability that the 2nd bootstrap observation is is___________
(ii) the probability that the 3rd bootstrap observation is is___________
(iii) the probability that is not in the bootstrap sample is___________
(iv) the probability that is in the bootstrap sample is___________
(v) the probability that the bootstrap sample is (all bootstrap observations are ) is___________
Q5. Suppose that you wish to invest a fixed sum of money in two financial assets that yield returns of X and Y, respectively, where X and Y are random quantities. You invest some percent of your money in X and the remaining in Y. In general, you would like to [ Select ] [“minimize”, “maximize”] the expected return. Since there is variability associated with the returns on these two assets, you may need to [ Select ] [“maximize”, “minimize”] the variance of the investment.
Q6. Identify the predictor variable and the response variable in each of the following situations:
(a) A training director wishes to study the relationship between the duration of training for new recruits and their performance in a skilled job.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
(b) A market analyst wished to relate the expenditures incurred in promoting a product in test markets and the subsequent amount of product sales.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
(c) The aim of a study is to relate the carbon monoxide level in blood samples from smokers with the average number of cigarettes they smoke per day.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
Q7. Suppose you have a simple linear regression model as below:
where is a normal random variable with mean 0 and standard deviation 2.
(a) Identify the values of the parameters , and in the statistical model:
= _________
= _________
= _________
(b) What will be expected value of Y when X=5?
Q8. Which of the following scenario is NOT a classification problem?
( ) We are considering launching a new product and wish to know the required marketing budget to generate the expected amount of sales, based on 20 similar products previously launched.
( ) We want to predict whether an email is a spam and should be delivered to the Junk folder.
( ) We want to identify the handwritten single-digit number from an image.
( ) We are considering launching a new product and wish to know whether it will be a success or a failure, based on 20 similar products previously launched.
Q9. Identify the sample size n and # of predictors p in each of the following scenario:
We conducted a survey with 286 participants responded, to understand how burnout is related to gender, age, education level, fatigue, income, family status, amount of exercise, and health condition.
Sample size n = _______
# of predictors p = ___________
Q10. Suppose we collect data for a group of students in a statistics class with variables X1 = hours studied, X2 = undergrad GPA, and Y = receive an A. We fit a logistic regression and produce estimated coefficient, =−5, = 0.06, = 0.95
(a) Estimate the probability that a student who studies for 20 hour and has an undergrad GPA of 4.0 gets an A in the class. (keep four decimal places)
the probability = ________
(b) How many hours would the student with undergrad GPA of 4.0 need to study to have a 90% chance of getting an A in the class? (keep two decimal places)
Q12. Below is a table of outputs from running a linear regression:
Based on the outputs, answer the following questions by filling the blanks.
(a) What is the estimate of coefficient for the predictor “radio”?
(b) How do you interpret the estimate in (a)?
(c) Which predictor is not significant when the other predictors are included in the model?
Q13. Below is the output from running a linear regression model:
What % of variation from the response variable is explained by this regression model?
____________
Q14. Below is partial output from running a linear regression model:
To improve the model, we may take away one of the predictors from the model. Which predictor should be removed to improve the model? _____________
Q15. From the boxplots below:
what can you conclude? (choose the best answer)
( ) Both “Balance” and “Income” impact “Default” significantly
( ) can’t tell
( )”Balance” does not impact “Default” significantly
( ) Neither “Balance” nor “Income” impacts “Default” significantly
( ) “Balance” impacts “Default” significantly
Q16. Below is the confusion matrix from a classification model:
Predicted positive
Predicted negative
Actual positive
70
2
Actual negative
8
20
(a) What is the overall accuracy of the prediction (in %, with two decimal places)?
(b) What is the overall error rate (in %, with two decimal places)?
(c) What is the specificity (in %, with two decimal places)?
(d) What is the sensitivity (in %, with two decimal places)?
Q17. When you run multiple Logistic Regression models, which of the following is not a good measure for model selection/assessment?
( ) Sensitivity
( ) Accuracy
( ) Specificity
( ) Error rate
( ) Split percentage for training and testing
Q18. Suppose we have a data set with five predictors,
X1 = GPA,
X2 = IQ,
X3 = Gender (1 for Female and 0 for Male),
X4 = Interaction between GPA and IQ, and
X5 = Interaction between GPA and Gender.
The response is starting salary after graduation (in thousands of dollars). Suppose we use least squares to fit the model,
(keep one decimal place)
(a) Predict the salary of a female with IQ of 120 and a GPA of 4.0 _______________
(b) Predict the salary of a male with IQ of 120 and a GPA of 4.0 ________________
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Q2. Please fill in each blank by selecting the answer from the Dropdown:
a. When you have 1 million observations and there are only 2 predictors, it is usually
better to use [ Select ]
[“flexible”, “inflexible”] statistical learning.
b. When the variance of the error term is very large, it is usually better to
use [ Select ]
[“flexible”, “inflexible”] statistical learning.
c. When the relationship between the DV and IVs is linear, it is usually better to
use [ Select ]
[“flexible”, “inflexible”] statistical learning.
Q3. Select True/False for each of the following:
a. A fitted value at an observation point for a linear regression model is a linear
combination of the observed response values.
[ Select ]
[“True”, “False”]
b. In a simple linear regression, the least square regression line may not go through the
point ( ̅ , ̅ ).
[ Select ]
[“True”, “False”]
c. For a simple linear regression, R^2 is the squared correlation between the DV and the
IV.
[ Select ]
[“True”, “False”]
d. Bootstrap is a resampling method with replacement.
[ Select ]
[“False”, “True”]
Q4. Let 1 , 2 , … , be the original sample. Suppose that we obtain a bootstrap sample
from this original sample with n observations.
(i) the probability that the 2nd bootstrap observation is 2 is ___________
(ii) the probability that the 3rd bootstrap observation is 2 is ___________
(iii) the probability that 2 is not in the bootstrap sample is ___________
(iv) the probability that 2 is in the bootstrap sample is ___________
(v) the probability that the bootstrap sample is { 2 , 2 , … , 2 }(all bootstrap observations
are 2 ) is ___________
Q5. Suppose that you wish to invest a fixed sum of money in two financial assets that
yield returns of X and Y, respectively, where X and Y are random quantities. You invest
some percent of your money in X and the remaining in Y. In general, you would like
to
[ Select ] [“minimize”, “maximize”] the expected return. Since there is variability
associated with the returns on these two assets, you may need
to
[ Select ] [“maximize”, “minimize”] the variance of the investment.
Q6. Identify the predictor variable and the response variable in each of the following
situations:
(a) A training director wishes to study the relationship between the duration of training
for new recruits and their performance in a skilled job.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
(b) A market analyst wished to relate the expenditures incurred in promoting a product in
test markets and the subsequent amount of product sales.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
(c) The aim of a study is to relate the carbon monoxide level in blood samples from
smokers with the average number of cigarettes they smoke per day.
Predictor variable:
Response variable:
Q7. Suppose you have a simple linear regression model as below:
=3− +
where is a normal random variable with mean 0 and standard deviation 2.
(a) Identify the values of the parameters 0 , 1, and in the statistical model:
0 = _________
1 = _________
= _________
(b) What will be expected value of Y when X=5?
Q8. Which of the following scenario is NOT a classification problem?
( ) We are considering launching a new product and wish to know the required marketing
budget to generate the expected amount of sales, based on 20 similar products
previously launched.
( ) We want to predict whether an email is a spam and should be delivered to the Junk
folder.
( ) We want to identify the handwritten single-digit number from an image.
( ) We are considering launching a new product and wish to know whether it will be a
success or a failure, based on 20 similar products previously launched.
Q9. Identify the sample size n and # of predictors p in each of the following scenario:
We conducted a survey with 286 participants responded, to understand how burnout is
related to gender, age, education level, fatigue, income, family status, amount of
exercise, and health condition.
Sample size n = _______
# of predictors p = ___________
Q10. Suppose we collect data for a group of students in a statistics class with variables
X1 = hours studied, X2 = undergrad GPA, and Y = receive an A. We fit a logistic
regression and produce estimated coefficient, ̂0 =−5, ̂1 = 0.06, ̂2 = 0.95
(a) Estimate the probability that a student who studies for 20 hour and has an undergrad
GPA of 4.0 gets an A in the class. (keep four decimal places)
the probability = ________
(b) How many hours would the student with undergrad GPA of 4.0 need to study to
have a 90% chance of getting an A in the class? (keep two decimal places)
______ hours would be needed.
Q11. Match the curves below:
Orange Curve B
[ Choose ]
Bias Squared
Error
Test Error
Blue Curve D
[ Choose ]
Bias Squared
Error
Test Error
Red Curve A
[ Choose ]
Bias Squared
Error
Test Error
Purple Curve C
[ Choose ]
Bias Squared
Error
Test Error
Variance
Bayes Error/Irreducible
Variance
Bayes Error/Irreducible
Variance
Bayes Error/Irreducible
Variance
Bayes Error/Irreducible
Q12. Below is a table of outputs from running a linear regression:
Based on the outputs, answer the following questions by filling the blanks.
(a) What is the estimate of coefficient for the predictor “radio”?
(b) How do you interpret the estimate in (a)?
(c) Which predictor is not significant when the other predictors are included in the
model?
Q13. Below is the output from running a linear regression model:
What % of variation from the response variable is explained by this regression model?
____________
Q14. Below is partial output from running a linear regression model:
To improve the model, we may take away one of the predictors from the model. Which
predictor should be removed to improve the model? _____________
Q15. From the boxplots below:
what can you conclude? (choose the best answer)
( ) Both “Balance” and “Income” impact “Default” significantly
( ) can’t tell
( )”Balance” does not impact “Default” significantly
( ) Neither “Balance” nor “Income” impacts “Default” significantly
( ) “Balance” impacts “Default” significantly
Q16. Below is the confusion matrix from a classification model:
Predicted positive
Predicted
negative
Actual positive
70
2
Actual negative
8
20
(a) What is the overall accuracy of the prediction (in %, with two decimal places)?
(b) What is the overall error rate (in %, with two decimal places)?
(c) What is the specificity (in %, with two decimal places)?
(d) What is the sensitivity (in %, with two decimal places)?
Q17. When you run multiple Logistic Regression models, which of the following is not a
good measure for model selection/assessment?
( ) Sensitivity
( ) Accuracy
( ) Specificity
( ) Error rate
( ) Split percentage for training and testing
Q18. Suppose we have a data set with five predictors,
X1 = GPA,
X2 = IQ,
X3 = Gender (1 for Female and 0 for Male),
X4 = Interaction between GPA and IQ, and
X5 = Interaction between GPA and Gender.
The response is starting salary after graduation (in thousands of dollars). Suppose we use
least squares to fit the model,
(keep one decimal place)
(a) Predict the salary of a female with IQ of 120 and a GPA of 4.0 _______________
(b) Predict the salary of a male with IQ of 120 and a GPA of 4.0 ________________
In a 3-4 page paper, please perform the following two items:Select a jurisdiction (city, town, municipality, Tribe, community, or a county if it doesn’t contain any large metropolitan cities; example: the City of Phoenix). It can be where you grew up, where you live now, where you want to work/live, etc. However, it MUST be a local jurisdiction; you cannot choose a State, and should avoid selecting counties that encompass major metropolitan areas as some assignment requirements will be difficult to complete due to competing areas of responsibilities. Because you will ideally be using this jurisdiction for the remainder of your assignments throughout this course, it is highly recommended that you use a jurisdiction that you are familiar with, or can easily research.Provide some background information about the jurisdiction that would be pertinent to an Emergency Manager. Elements you should include in your submission AT A MINIMUM are: population and demographics, key industries, terrain, etc. You’ll also want to pay attention to what resources the jurisdiction has, such as fire/police services (do they have their own, or do they rely on outside agencies for these services?).Do NOT go into the hazards the jurisdiction faces, as we will be accomplishing that as part of the next module.Please feel free to be as creative as you’d like; pictures, maps, and visuals are helpful as long as they illustrate the material you are sharing and are properly cited. All references and citations should be formatted in accordance with APA
– Operation Management Paper 3000 words- APA format- No AI uses- Other requirements provided in the doc attached
Unformatted Attachment Preview
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
ASSIGNMENT PAPER 1
TOPIC: OPERATIONS PERFORMANC OBJECTIVES, OPERATIONS STRATEGY
McDonald’s has come to epitomize the fast-food industry. When the company started in the
1950s, it was the first to establish itself in the market. Now there are hundreds of ‘fast-food’
brands in the market competing in different ways. Originally, McDonald’s competed on low price,
fast service and a totally standardized service offering with a very narrow range of items on its
menu. Over years McDonald’s has focused on its competitive priorities and developed its
operation capability to distinguish its products and services from its competitors in dynamic
business environment.
For this assignment, you are expected to select one brand from a list of A&W, Burger King, Tim
Hortons, Subway, Chipotle. You are expected to visit the selected brand’s branch and observe
the branch’s operation. Your analysis and report should address (but not limited to) following
issues:
At corporate level,
1. An introductory section on the company you have selected.
2. Describe what distinguishes this company from their competitors in the products and services.
3. Describe what is the competitive priority of this company. Furthermore, how the competitive
priority has been developed and maintained over years?
At branch level
1. Describe the branch layout.
2. Describe the customer service process.
3. Discuss on how to define and measure branch’s operations performance.
4. What is your assessment of the branch’s operations performance?
5. Do you think if the branch’s operations performance is in line with the corporate’s competitive
priority?
6. Do you have any recommendation for the performance improvement?
1
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1. Your report must adhere to APA formatting.
2. Other than APA formatting, the structure for the paper is not fixed, if there is a logical flow of
ideas. The length of the paper is not an issue, but preferably in range of 3,000 words,
equivalent to 10 pages (about 300 words per page).
2
RUBRICS
Reference Marks
Satisfactory
Outstanding
Actual
Exceptional Marks
8
14
17
20
8
14
17
20
8
14
17
20
8
14
17
20
8
14
17
20
40
70
85
100
REQUIREMENTS
Need
Work
Introduction to the company
selected and business overview
Analysis on corporate’s operations
performance objectives, competitive
priority, and operations strategy
Analysis on branch operations in
terms of layout, process, and
performance
Personal insights and practical
considerations
Editing, formatting, overall paper
structure and presentation
Total Marks
3
3CO04
Essentials of people practice
Learner Assessment Brief
Assessment ID / CIPD_3CO04_23_01
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in
People Practice
•
•
Version 1 – Released June 2023
Expires June 2024
Please write clearly in block capitals. (You MUST complete all highlighted fields)
Centre number:
8
Centre name:
7
5
Oakwood International
Learner number (1st 7 digits of CIPD
Membership number):
8
Learner surname:
Noor
Learner other names:
Lamyaa
Declared total word count (You MUST
provide your wordcount for each
submission)
5470 Words
Unit code:
3CO04
Unit title:
Essentials of people practice
Assessment ID:
CIPD_3CO04_23_01
Assessment start date:
31 August 2023
Assessment submission date:
31 August 2023
7
4
2
6
8
9
First resubmission date for centre marking
– if applicable
Second resubmission date for centre
marking – if applicable
Assessor name (1st Submission):
Assessor Electronic signature:
Assessor name (2nd Submission):
Assessor Electronic signature:
Assessor name (3rd Submission):
Assessor Electronic signature:
IQA name (if applicable):
IQA signature (if applicable):
Version 1 – Released June 2023
2
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
3CO04
Essentials of people practice
This unit assignment introduces the fundamentals of people practice, ranging from the employee lifecycle
to policies, regulation, and law. It further explores a diverse array of specialist subjects such as recruitment,
talent management, reward and learning and development essential to a career in people practice.
Importantly, this unit enables practitioners to apply their knowledge and skills, building their confidence
and ability to practice progressively.
CIPD’s insight
Talent management (Oct 2022)
Talent management seeks to attract, identify, develop, engage, retain and deploy individuals who are
considered particularly valuable to an organisation. To be effective, it needs to align with strategic business
objectives. By managing talent strategically, organisations can build a high-performance workplace, foster a
learning climate, add value to their employer brand, and improve diversity management.
For these reasons, people professionals consider talent management to be a key priority. The CIPD
Profession Map also recognises talent management as one of the special knowledge areas within the
people profession and sets out the expected standards to follow.
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/resourcing/talent-factsheet
Equality, diversity and inclusion (EDI) in the workplace (Nov 2022)
Promoting and delivering EDI in the workplace is an essential aspect of good people management. To reap
the benefits of EDI, it’s about creating working environments and cultures where every individual can feel
safe, a sense of belonging and is empowered to achieve their full potential. Whilst legal frameworks vary
across different countries, in the UK the Equality Act 2010 provides legal protection for nine protected
characteristics: age, disability, gender reassignment, marriage and civil partnership, pregnancy and
maternity, race, religion or belief, sex and sexual orientation. However, an effective EDI strategy goes
beyond legal compliance and seeks to take an intersectional approach adding value to an organisation,
contributing to the wellbeing and equality of outcomes and impact on all employees.
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/fundamentals/relations/diversity/factsheet
Recruitment – an introduction (Dec 2022)
Good recruitment is vital, especially when labour markets are tight. It ensures that the workforce has the
relevant skills and abilities for the organisation’s current and future needs. Effective resourcing is not just
about filling an immediate vacancy but about impacting the long-term success of the business, using
workforce planning data to understand the skills needed for organisational performance
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/fundamentals/people/recruitment/factsheet
Please note that the purpose of this insight is to link you to CIPD’s research and evidence within the subject area, so
that you can engage with the latest thinking. It is not provided to replace the study required as part of the learning
or as formative assessment material.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
3
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Preparation for the Tasks:
▪
At the start of your assignment, you are encouraged to plan your assessment work with your Assessor
and where appropriate agree milestones so that they can help you monitor your progress.
▪
Refer to the indicative content in the unit to guide and support your evidence.
▪
Pay attention to how your evidence is presented, remember you are advising Clean Quarter Ltd for
this task.
▪
Ensure that the evidence generated for this assessment remains your own work.
You will also benefit from:
▪
Completing and acting on formative feedback from your Assessor.
▪
Reflecting on your own experiences of learning opportunities and continuing professional
development.
▪
Reading the CIPD Insight and Fact Sheets and related online material on these topics.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
4
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Case study
Clean Quarter Ltd is a small start-up business that will open to the public in two months’ time. Friends
Jaspreet and Caroline felt there was a gap in the market for a retailer to sell plastic free food products,
many of which are also organic. In addition, a range of cleaning and cosmetic products will be sold.
Customers will be able to bring their own containers to the store, which can be filled with products of their
choice. An online delivery service will also be available. To reduce carbon emissions, products will be
sourced locally where possible. Jaspreet and Caroline are confident their business plan will work and have
an excellent understanding of their market and products but are less confident about the people side of the
operation. They are aware you are studying the CIPD Foundation Certificate in People Practice and have
asked for your help. As you are their friend and would like to develop your practice, you agree to help and
provide advice in a number of ways.
Task one – written advice (recruitment and selection)
▪
You feel you can contribute and offer advice in relation to different stages of the employee lifecycle.
You decide to explain the stages of the employee lifecycle and how a people practitioner could
contribute to each stage. (AC1.1)
As Clean Quarter Ltd does not yet have any employees, you decide first to advise Jaspreet and Caroline on
how to recruit and select their new employees. You have ascertained that, initially, they will employ three
sales assistants.
▪
Explain the purpose and key content of a job description and person specification. Explain how job
analysis cand be used to decide on the content of these documents. (AC 1.2)
▪
Explain two different recruitment methods that Jaspreet and Caroline could use for the sales assistant
vacancies and why the two methods are appropriate for the role. (AC 1.3)
▪
Explain factors to consider when deciding on the content of copy used in the recruitment methods
you have explained above. You could consider factors such as budget, balance between providing an
accurate and positive image, space available, corporate image. (AC 1.4)
▪
Explain two different selection methods that Jaspreet and Caroline could use for the sale assistant
vacancies and why the two methods are appropriate for the role. (AC 2.1)
▪
Explain what selection records Clean Quarter Ltd should retain and why they should retain these
records. (AC 2.4)
You decide it would be useful for Jaspreet and Caroline to have template letters of appointment and nonappointment for the sales assistant roles.
▪
Write letters of appointment and non-appointment for the sales assistant role. (AC 2.5) There is no
requirement to include evidence of the use of references to wider reading to achieve a high pass for
AC2.5.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
5
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Task One – Written Advice
Your evidence must consist of:
▪
▪
▪
A written response, clearly responding to the 7 questions above.
Approximately 1500 words, refer to CIPD word count policy
Letters of appointment and non-appointment (excluded from word count).
▪
IMPORTANT NOTE: Use of secondary sources is not mandatory at this level. If you use a
secondary source you must include both long and short references. Please use the Reference box
provided to record all your long references. Short references should be included within the
narrative. We advise you read the guidance on how to set out your references on the Oakwood
Learner Hub
Upload the completed Learner Assessment brief, with all 5 tasks completed, through the
Assignments option in the Oakwood Learner Hub.
Please note you can only complete tasks 1 & 2 after attending module 1 and the remaining tasks
after attending module 2. DO NOT ATTEMPT to upload this brief unless all tasks are completed, and
you have attended modules 1 and 2. You can work on tasks 1 & 2 and save this brief for completion
after module 2.
▪
▪
Task One – Written Advice Questions
Explain each stage of the employee life cycle and the role of the people professional in it. (AC1.1)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 300 words
Employee life cycle has various stages: Recruitment and onboarding involve attracting, sourcing, and
selecting suitable candidates for job openings within our organization. Our dedicated team of people
professionals create comprehensive job descriptions, advertise positions, review applications, conduct
interviews, and ultimately make informed hiring decisions. Once a candidate is selected, the onboarding
process plays a crucial role in helping them integrate seamlessly into our organization. This includes
providing necessary paperwork, offering guidance on company policies, and making them feel welcome
from the very beginning. Orientation and training oversee the development and implementation of
training programs that enable our employees to acquire the skills and knowledge necessary to excel in
their roles. This includes both initial training to familiarize them with our processes and ongoing
professional development opportunities to support their growth. Performance management is also a key
aspect of this stage, as we work closely with employees and their managers to set clear goals and
objectives that align with our overall organizational strategy. Regular performance evaluations ensure
continuous improvement and provide valuable feedback. Compensation and benefits responsible for
designing and managing our compensation structure. This includes determining competitive salaries,
bonuses, incentives, and other forms of monetary rewards. Additionally, they administer employee
Version 1 – Released June 2023
6
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
benefits such as health insurance, retirement plans, leave policies, and other perks that contribute to the
well-being of our valuable workforce.
Career development play a crucial role in helping employees plan their career paths within our
organization. They identify opportunities for advancement and growth, provide guidance on necessary
skills or qualifications, and support employees in reaching their full potential. Employee relations, another
facet of this stage, involves resolving conflicts and fostering a positive work environment. Our team
mediates and resolves any issues that may arise between employees and management, ensuring a
harmonious atmosphere that keeps our workforce engaged and motivated.
Personio, 2021
Verlinden, 2020
Explain different ways in which you can prepare information for specified roles. (AC1.2)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 200 words
A job description serves as a crucial document that outlines the scope of a specific role within an
organization. It provides detailed information about the responsibilities, tasks, and objectives associated
with the position. A well-written job description serves as a foundation for various HR processes such as
recruitment, performance evaluation, and setting employee expectations. Clean Quarter LTD’s
Operations Manager role, a comprehensive job description would include elements such as the job title
and department, a summary of the role, specific responsibilities and duties, and information about the
reporting structure. This document outlines the desired attributes, skills, qualifications, and experience
required for an ideal candidate for a particular position. By defining the key criteria, a person’s
specification helps in selecting candidates whose qualifications align with the organization’s needs. Clean
Quarter LTD’s Operations Manager role, the person specification would include details about the required
educational background, necessary experience, skills and competencies, technical qualities, personal
qualities, and even qualities related to teamwork. Lastly, leveraging job analysis techniques can
significantly enhance the accuracy and completeness of job descriptions and person specifications. Job
analysis involves gathering, documenting, and analysing information about a particular job to determine
its duties, responsibilities, qualifications, and expectations.
Indeed, 2023
University of London, 2022
Signeasy, 2021
Explain (two) different recruitment methods and when it is appropriate to use them. (AC1.3)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 250 words
Online job advertisement plays a crucial role in reaching a wide audience and attracting candidates from
diverse backgrounds and locations. By posting job vacancies on LinkedIn CLEAN QUARTER LTD page,
Internal requisition we can effectively communicate the job role, responsibilities, qualifications, and
application process. Firstly, the wide reach allows us to tap into a larger pool of potential candidates.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
7
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Secondly, utilizing targeted keywords ensures that our ad appears to candidates actively searching for
customer service roles. Additionally, the online application process enables candidates to easily submit
their resumes and cover letters, making it convenient for both the candidates and our company. Another
effective method we are considering is implementing an employee referral program. This program
encourages our current employees to refer suitable candidates for open positions within the company. By
incentivizing successful referrals through rewards or bonuses, we can harness the power of our
employees’ network and their knowledge of our company culture and requirements. There are several
reasons why this method is appropriate for Sales Assistant position vacancy at CLEAN QUARTER LTD.
Firstly, employee referrals often bring in high-quality candidates who are most likely to align well with
our company values and work environment. Employees are inclined to refer individuals whom they
believe will fit our company culture and excel in the role. Moreover, this method can yield significant cost
savings in terms of reduced recruitment costs and a faster recruitment process.
Indeed, 2022
Explain factors to consider when deciding on content of copy used in recruitment methods. (AC1.4)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 250 words
Two important aspects of our recruitment strategy: online job advertisements and our employee referral
program. When it comes to online job advertisements, it is crucial for us to consider our target audience
and craft tailored messaging that resonates with them. By doing so, we can attract the specific group of
candidates we are looking for and avoid attracting individuals who may not fit the role well. Failure to
consider this factor may result in a low-quality applicant pool and wasted time and resources for both the
hiring team and the applicants. Therefore, I highly recommend that we invest time and effort into
creating content that addresses the target candidates’ specific needs, preferences, and aspirations.
Moving on to our employee referral program, it is essential for us to clearly communicate the incentives
to our employees. Without clear communication, confusion may arise, and employees may be
discouraged from actively participating in the referral process. By clearly outlining the incentives, such as
monetary rewards, bonuses, or recognition, we can motivate our employees to actively refer qualified
candidates. This will not only strengthen our recruitment efforts but also enhance employee engagement.
Therefore, I suggest we emphasize the importance of effectively communicating the incentives to our
employees. In conclusion, the success of our recruitment method relies on two key factors: tailored
messaging in online job advertisements and clear communication of incentives in our employee referral
program. By investing in these areas, we can attract the right candidates and maximize our recruitment
efforts.
Indeed, 2022
Undercover Recruiter, 2014
Explain (two) different selection methods and when it is appropriate to use them. (AC2.1)
Version 1 – Released June 2023
8
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 250 words
Interviews are a common and widely used selection method in which a candidate directly interacts with
an interviewer or a panel of interviewers. They can take various formats, such as structured,
unstructured, behavioural, and situational interviews. Interviews are suitable for assessing soft skills, such
as interpersonal skills, communication abilities, and cultural fit, which may not be evident from a
candidate’s resume or application. Assessment centres, on the other hand, involve a series of job-related
exercises and simulations that candidates perform while being observed by assessors. These exercises can
include group discussions, presentations, role-playing, in-tray exercises, and case studies. They are
particularly effective in evaluating multiple competencies, such as teamwork, leadership, decisionmaking, and analytical thinking. For roles that require leadership and managerial skills, assessment
centres can provide valuable insights into a candidate’s ability to lead, delegate, and manage teams.
Interviews are particularly appropriate as they provide an opportunity to assess whether a candidate’s
values and behaviours align with the company’s culture. Moreover, if there are any gaps or ambiguities in
a candidate’s application or resume, interviews can help clarify and verify the information provided.
Additionally, situational or behavioural interview questions can be used to gauge a candidate’s problemsolving skills and their approach to challenges. Assessment centres, on the other hand, are effective for
evaluating a larger number of candidates simultaneously, making them especially useful for recruitment
drives or bulk hiring. They allow for the assessment of a wide range of competencies and skills required
for the job, providing a comprehensive evaluation of each candidate.
Indeed, 2022
Explain the selection records that need to be retained. (AC2.4)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: Approximately 250 words
Selection records play a pivotal role in documenting the steps taken to select a candidate for a job role.
They serve multiple purposes, including legal compliance, transparency, and accountability. By retaining
these records, organizations ensure fairness and maintain a thorough record of the recruitment process.
Firstly, it is essential to keep copies of job advertisements and postings, along with details of where they
were published and their active dates. These records demonstrate how the job was presented to potential
candidates and help ensure transparency in the recruitment process. Additionally, they provide evidence
of fairness in reaching a qualified and diverse applicant pool. Moreover, retaining copies of all
applications received for the job, including resumes and cover letters, is crucial. These documents provide
valuable insight into the applicant pool and showcase how candidates’ qualifications were assessed. The
next set of records to keep are related to the shortlisting and interview process. This includes
documenting the criteria used for shortlisting candidates for interviews. It is also important to maintain
records of interview scheduling, interview questions asked, interviewers’ notes, and assessments of
candidates’ performance throughout the interview process. If any assessments, tests, or exercises were
administered, the results and scores should be documented as well. This includes technical tests,
personality assessments, or skill evaluations. In addition, it is necessary to retain records of any reference
checks or background checks conducted on the selected candidate. This includes documentation of
communication with references, their responses, and any findings from background checks.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
9
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Duke, 2023
Write letters of appointment and non-appointment for an identified role. (AC2.5)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. Word count: NO WORD COUNT
Letter of Appointment
Clean Quarters Ltd
29 August 2023
Adam Burns
adamburns@gmail.com
Dear Adam,
Subject: Appointment as Sales Assistant at Clean Quarter LTD
We are delighted to extend this formal offer of employment for the position of Sales Assistant at Clean
Quarter LTD. Your application and interview performance were impressive, and we believe your skills and
experience align well with our requirements. We are excited to have you join our team, and your start
date will be 15 September 2023. You will report directly to Mr. Jon Smith, who will provide the necessary
onboarding and training to ensure a smooth integration into our company.
Your compensation package includes a starting salary of $ 85,000 annually, payable fortnightly, and
standard company benefits, including health insurance, retirement plans, and employee discounts.
Attached is a copy of our Employee Handbook, which provides information about company policies,
procedures, and expectations. We kindly ask that you review it before your start date.
To formally accept this offer, please sign and return a copy of this letter by 6 September 2023. You can
also contact Ms. Alex McTominay at cleanquartershr@gmail.com if you have any questions or require
further clarification.
We are thrilled to have you join Clean Quarter LTD and look forward to your contributions to our team.
Sincerely,
[Student’s Name]
Version 1 – Released June 2023
10
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Managing Director of Operations
Clean Quarter LTD.
Letter of Non-Appointment
Clean Quarters Ltd
29 August 2023
Alex Dexe
Alexdexe@gmail, com
Dear Alex,
Subject: Re: Application for Sales Assistant Position at Clean Quarter LTD
Thank you for your interest in the Sales Assistant position at Clean Quarter LTD and for taking the time to
interview with us. We appreciate the effort you put into the application process and the chance to get to
know you better. After careful consideration, we regret to inform you that we have chosen to move
forward with another candidate for the Sales Assistant role. Our decision was not easy, as we had the
opportunity to interview many qualified individuals.
We were truly impressed by your qualifications and skills; however, we believe another candidate’s
experience and alignment with our current needs better meet our requirements for this position. We
genuinely appreciate your interest in Clean Quarter LTD and wish you every success in your job search.
Please do not hesitate to apply for future positions within our company, as your skills and experience are
notable.
Thank you again for considering Clean Quarter LTD, and we wish you the best in your career endeavours.
Sincerely,
[Student’s Name]
Managing Director of Operations
Clean Quarter LTD.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
11
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
References
Please provide your full long reference list here. The Harvard method is preferable. Please refer to the
guidance on the Learner HUB.
Reference list
Duke (2023). Retention of Search & Selection Records | Human Resources. [online] hr.duke.edu.
Available at: https://hr.duke.edu/policies/hiring/retention-search-selection-records
Indeed (2022). How to write an effective job advertisement (with examples). [online] Indeed
Career Guide. Available at: https://uk.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/jobadvertisement
Indeed (2022). 12 Modern Recruitment Techniques for Your Hiring Process. [online] Indeed
Career Guide. Available at: https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/modernrecruitment-techniques
Indeed (2023). How to write a job description. [online] www.indeed.com. Available at:
https://uk.indeed.com/hire/how-to-write-a-job-description
Personio (2021). The Employee Life Cycle: Success In 6 Stages. [online] Personio. Available at:
https://www.personio.com/hr-lexicon/employee-life-cycle-model-uk/
Signeasy (2021). The ultimate guide to job analysis that every HR professional needs to know |
Signeasy. [online] signeasy.com. Available at: https://signeasy.com/blog/business/the-ultimateguide-to-job-analysis-that-every-hr-professional-needs-to-know/
Undercover Recruiter (2014). 5 Tips for Writing an Effective Job Advertisement. [online]
Undercover Recruiter. Available at: https://theundercoverrecruiter.com/writing-effective-jobadvertisement-tips/
University of London (2022). Human Resources Department at SOAS: Person specifications.
[online] SOAS. Available at: https://www.soas.ac.uk/about/governance/policies-andprocedures/recruitment/recruitment-and-selection-supporting/human-1
Verlinden, N. (2020). The Employee Life Cycle: 19 Tips to Get it Right. [online] AIHR. Available
at: https://www.aihr.com/blog/employee-life-cycle/
Version 1 – Released June 2023
12
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Task two – Simulated interview
To support Jaspreet and Caroline, and develop your own knowledge and skills, you:
▪
Devise selection criteria for the post of Sales Assistant using the job description already written
(Appendix A). Use the selection shortlisting matrix (Appendix B) to shortlist applications against
the selection criteria to determine candidates to be interviewed. Your assessor will provide you
with completed, sample application forms. (AC 2.2) There is no requirement to include evidence of
the use of references to wider reading to achieve a high pass for AC2.2.
▪
Interview one applicant and decide whether they meet the criteria for the post. The interview
could be a panel or one-to-one interview (as determined by your centre). The interview could be
conducted face-to-face or by web conferencing. (AC 2.3) There is no requirement to include
evidence of the use of references to wider reading to achieve a high pass for AC2.3.
[If working as a panel, it is essential that each member of the team actively takes part in devising
the criteria, shortlisting, interviewing and decision-making.
A copy of CIPD STARR Model Interview Questions (Appendix C) has been included, that can be
used when developing interview questions.]
Your evidence must consist of:
▪
The criteria that you devised. (Not included in word count).
▪
Your notes from the shortlisting process or a skills observation feedback form completed by your
assessor as to your part in shortlisting. (Not included in word count).
▪
A video recording of the interview and either a video of the subsequent decision-making process or
notes from the decision-making process. (Not included in word count).
▪
Upload this Learner Assessment brief document with the completed templates and all 5 tasks
completed, through the Assignments option in the Oakwood Learner Hub.
▪
Please note you can only complete tasks 1 & 2 after attending module 1 and the remaining tasks after
attending module 2. DO NOT ATTEMPT to upload this brief unless all tasks are completed, and you
have attended modules 1 and 2. You can work on tasks 1 & 2 and save this brief for completion after
module 2.
Version 1 – Released June 2023
13
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Note to assessors.
Please ensure that all video recordings are retained and, if selected for moderation, uploaded to Rogo
along with other materials for 3CO04. Please ensure that each learner is identified by name in the
recording.
Please ensure that an individual Skills Observation Feedback Form (Appendix D) is completed for each
learner regardless of whether an individual or panel interview is carried out. If a panel interview is
conducted, individual contributions must be clearly and uniquely identified through comments on the Skills
Observation Feedback Form. Each panel should comprise no more than 3 panel members.
Task Two – Simulated interview
Develop selection criteria and shortlist candidate applications for interview for an identified role. (AC2.2)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. No word count for this task.
Complete the selection shortlisting matrix (Appendix B) to shortlist applications against the selection
criteria to determine candidates to be interviewed. You must fill in this document.
You MUST also submit your notes from the shortlisting process – these should be added to the end of the
Learner Assessment brief and labelled clearly with AC2.2
Job Description
Job Title
Sales Assistant
Reporting to
Retail Manager
Main purpose of job
To Provide a friendly and helpful customer
service to retail and online customers
Version 1 – Released June 2023
14
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
1. Provide high quality, excellent customer
service.
2. Handle cash and card payments in
accordance with company standards.
3. Prepare orders for online delivery.
4. Unpack supplier deliveries.
5. Check supplier deliveries against
delivery notes.
6. Replenish shelves and fill product
dispensers.
7. Ensure high standards of hygiene are
maintained and products are not crosscontaminated.
8. Clean up spillages.
9. Clean containers ready for return to
suppliers.
Key tasks
Selection Shortlisting Matrix
Candidate Name:
Attributes
Essential
Desirable
Qualification
Experience
Knowledge
BS, Business Administration
3 years of assistants
Customer service system
3
3
3
Skills
Communication, attention to
detail, well-structured storge
system
Good appearance
Convince with customers
Marketing
3 years of assistants
Customer service system,
Customer satisfaction
Communication, attention to
detail,
Good appearance
Convince with customers
3
3
18
Y
Personal qualities
Additional Requirements
Total-Score
Interview-Y/N
Total
3
Scoring:
0123-
Does not meet criteria
Partly meets
Fully meets
Exceeds
Participate effectively in a selection interview and the decision-making process for an identified role. (AC
2.3)
Short references should be added into your narrative below. Please remember to only list your long references in
the reference box provided at the end of this section. No word count for this task.
A recording and observation sheet of your skills will be evidenced by your tutor.
Start Model Interview Questions
Version 1 – Released June 2023
15
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Situation
How would you handle this situation: customer enters the store looking for a specific product,
but its currently out of stock
Task
Action
Result
Reflect
friendly and helpful behavior, apologize for the inconvenience
How could you react with it: offer an alternative solution, providing the support for the cus
You have a total of two weeks to finish your brand analysis report and should complete the seven steps of this project by the end of Week 4:
Step 1: Review Slate Case File
Step 2: Review the Branding Elements
Step 3: Research Slate’s Competitors
Step 4: Discuss Competitors’ Branding Strategies
Step 5: Present Your Research Results
Step 6: Submit your Brand Analysis Report
Step 7: Complete your Brand Analysis Report
Step 8: Submit Your Work
Project 2: Conducting a Brand Audit
Step 1: Review Slate Case File
INBOX: 1 New Message
Subject: Thinking about the consumer and branding
From: Jillian Best, CEO, MCS
To: You
Attachments:
Slate Case File
Good Morning,
I have attached the Slate case file to this email. It provides additional details you will need to inform your work with Carlos Chance, their head of branding.
Brandingis a very important element of marketing. As you work on this project, it is imperative that you stay focused on the consumer. Remember that a company’s customers do not buy features; they buy benefits, both tangible and intangible. It is also critical to understand customers and how the brand influences their buying decisions.
Best wishes,
Jillian
After you have reviewed the Slate case file and read about branding, proceed to Step 2, where you will examine the elements of branding decisions.
Step 2: Review the Branding Elements
Through correspondences with Carlos about his expectations for the brand analysis report, the focus of your analysis starts to become clear:
INBOX: 1 New Message
Subject: Focus of Brand Analysis
From: Carlos Chance, Head of Branding, Slate, Inc.
To: You
Hello,
Primarily, we want you to examine thebranding strategies of our competitors. This report will function as abrand auditthat allows us to examine our competitors’ strengths, weaknesses, customer expectations, and our own relative position in the market.
These details form the basis of the mainbranding elements. I met with our CEO, Shanice Watts, and she wanted me to emphasize the following eight categories we would like you to analyze in your report about our two biggest competitors:
Slate’s executive teams are really looking forward to your report. Thanks for helping us with this.
Best,
Carlos
When you have finished reading about the branding elements, proceed to the next step, where you will begin your research on Slate’s competitors.
Step 3: Research Slate’s Competitors
Required Readings
Ferrara, M. H. (2013). Handbook of global marketing. Gale.
Building an international brand
Managing a brand across multiple markets
Global brand success stories
To carry out this assignment, you need to understand Slate’s competitors’ brand strategies, their consumers, how to acquire market knowledge through primary and secondary research, and how to use that knowledge to build and support a brand.
To start your research, visit the websites of Slate’s two biggest competitors and review both scholarly and reliable nonscholarly sources to explore their branding decisions. Your research of the two companies should focus on the branding elements discussed in the previous step.
Consult a minimum of three scholarly sources and twelve reliable nonscholarly sources (15 total). Make sure that you use reliable, nonscholarly sources such as Reuters, Bloomberg, Yahoo! Finance, Statista, Barrons.com, Morningstar.com, Money, Forbes, Fortune, Financial Times, The Wall Street Journal, and Harvard Business Review, as well as the UMGC Library databases such as Hoover’s, IBIS World, and ABI/INFORM.
In addition, explore the following branding websites for relevant content:
Then proceed to the next step, where you will discuss branding strategy.
Step 4: Discuss Competitors’ Branding Strategies
Importance of Branding
As you are researching Slate’s competitors, Carlos asks you to participate in a meeting on the importance of branding with his team.
Review the meeting details, then go to the discussion area and begin by posting your main response to Carlos’s questions by Saturday midnight (latest!). Support your arguments with at least one source from the course readings, and three reliable nonscholarly sources derived from your own research. Then respond to at least two postings in the discussion group. Complete all discussion posts and responses by Tuesday midnight (latest!).
Review theMBA Discussion Guidelinesfor instructions on participation in discussions.
In the next step, you will respond to your boss’s request for a vetted list of references you are using to support your report.
Step 5: Present Your Research Results
When you are just about finished with your research, MCS CEO, Jillian Best, decides to check in on your progress. She emails you requesting that you provide a list of the sources you are using for analysis:
INBOX: 1 New Message
Subject: Sources for Slate Project
From: Jillian Best, CEO, MCS
To: You
I know that you’re deep into your analysis of the Slate, Inc. case, but I wanted to preview your work and check in on the sources of information you are using to develop your report. Slate has asked to examine the sources of secondary research that we are using in our report to ensure their quality and originality. Accordingly, I want you to share the list of references you have been using to research Slate’s competitors.
Deliverable:Provide a reference list derived from your research that has a minimum of four scholarly and 16 reliable, nonscholarly sources (20 in all).
I suggest using reliable nonscholarly sources, such as Reuters, Bloomberg, Yahoo! Finance, Barrons.com, Morningstar.com,Money,Forbes,Fortune, Financial Times, Statista, The Wall Street Journal, andHarvard Business Review, as well as UMGC Library databases, such as Hoover’s, IBIS World, and ABI-Inform.
All sources should be referenced using APA formatting.
Thanks for your hard work,
Jillian
Submit your reference list to the Assignments folder. Then proceed to the next step, where you will write your brand analysis report.
Step 6: Submit Your Brand Analysis Report
Required Readings
Chapters 7 and 16
Lancaster, G., & Massingham, L. (2018).Essentials of marketing management(2nd ed.). Routledge.
Deliverable: Based on your research of the two companies’ brands, write an 12 – 13 page report (six pages separately on each company under its own heading, and each brand element discussed and supported separately under its own subheading) that addresses the followingbranding elements:
As you examine these branding elements, your report should also answer the following questions:
How strong are the companies’ brands in the market?
What are the factors contributing to their strengths and weaknesses?
How are these two brands competing against each other? How strong is their global performance?
How do consumers perceive their brands?
Are there any sub-brands? Are there any brand extensions?
Support your work with course readings, scholarly sources, and reliable nonscholarly sources, such as Reuters, Bloomberg, Yahoo! Finance, Barrons.com, Morningstar.com,Money,Forbes,Fortune, theFinancial Times,Statista, theWall Street Journal, and Harvard Business Review, as well as UMGC Library databases, such as Hoover’s, IBIS World, and ABI-Inform. All sources have to be cited using APA formatting, both within the text and in the reference list.
Your report to Carlos should be 12-13 pages, excluding cover page, the reference list, and appendices. Any graphs, tables, and figures should be included as appendices. Your report should have one-inch margins and be double spaced in 12-point Times New Roman font. The report should be organized using headings and subheadings to improve its readability.
By midnight on Saturday of Week 4, submit your report to the Assignments folder.
Step 7: Complete Your Brand Analysis Report
Deliverable: Incorporate any revisions to your final Brand Analysis report.
Also, include the following:
A one-page executive summary that highlights the most important findings of your analysis.
A clear recommendation on Slate’s branding of the new product that they intend to launch, and include your rationale (at the end of the paper).
A one-page table in an appendix at the end of the paper that compares the eight brand elements for the two brands.
Your final report to Carlos should be 11-13 pages, excluding cover page, executive summary, the reference list, and appendices. Any graphs, tables, and figures should be included as appendices. Your report should have one-inch margins and be double spaced in 12-point Times New Roman font. The report should be organized using headings and subheadings to improve its readability.
Submit your final report to the Assignments folder.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
1.Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used? (2MM)
2.Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable. (2MM)
3.Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4.What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5.Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1.Answer-300
2.Answer-300
3.Answer-300
4.Answer-300
5.Answer-300
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Alzahrani Saeed
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Week 3 of our course starts today! For Project 2, you will provide a brand analysis report on two competing brands to inform a company’s decisions on the direction of its branding strategy. The voice-over presentation, Branding-Concepts.mp4 (12:10), helps provide a foundation for branding concepts by introducing you to brand value, equity, strategies, and industry brand valuation approaches. The slides and script, Branding Concepts Slides & Script.pdf, are attached.
– The main Week 3 activities are:
Project 2: Conducting a Brand Audit
After reviewing the Slate Inc. case file and the branding elements, do the following:
A. Research Slate Inc.’s biggest two competitors:
Visit the websites of Slate’s two biggest competitors and review both scholarly and reliable nonscholarly sources to explore their branding decisions. Your research of the two companies should focus on the branding elements discussed in the previous step.
Deliverable: By the end of Week 3, provide a reference list derived from your research that has a minimum of four scholarly and 16 reliable, nonscholarly sources (20 in all; at least!). Company-based sources do not count!
The sources should be scholarly and reliable nonscholarly sources, such as Reuters, Bloomberg, Yahoo! Finance, Barrons.com, Morningstar.com, Money, Forbes, Fortune, Statista, Financial Times, The Wall Street Journal, and Harvard Business Review, as well as the UMGC Library databases, such as Ibis World, Hoover’s and ABI/INFORM. All sources need to be cited using APA formatting. In addition, explore the following branding websites for relevant content:
Go to the discussion area and begin by posting your main response by Saturday midnight (latest!). Support argument with at least one source from the course reading, and three reliable nonscholarly sources derived from our own research. Then respond to at least two postings in the discussion group. Complete all discussion posts and responses by the end of Week 3 at midnight (latest!).
Students cannot see their classmates’ main posts until they post their own main posts. Also, once the week is over, the discussion will be locked, and no further posts (main posts or responses) will be possible. Accordingly, make sure that you post on time.
Are Unions Necessary?
Some people have argued that unions are “unnecessary.” Are they? If unions are unnecessary,
then who will insure that workers’ rights and interests are considered? How? If unions are
necessary, then why are the alternatives to unions inadequate?
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
•
•
•
•
•
Write 750 words using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Right to Work?
Go to the following website: http://www.nrtw.org/rtws.htm. Determine if your state of residence is
a Right-to-Work state. Right-to-Work is a product of the Open-Shop Movement. Conduct
research about this movement. (State website; professional organization; other resources).
Understand its purpose and history. Then analyze the state you reside in. Has “Right-to-Work”
or “Forced Unionization” been successful in your state. Explain why or why not.
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
•
•
•
•
•
Write 750 words using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Repeal the LMRA?
Some union advocates have suggested that NLRB certification procedures are so cumbersome
that unions would be better off if the LMRA was repealed. If labor laws discussed in this chapter
were repealed, how might this affect (a) the formation of unions and (b) the terms and
conditions of employment for employees? Do you think the LMRA should be repealed? Why or
Why not?
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
•
•
•
•
•
Write 750 words using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Recession and Bargaining Power
How does an economic recession affect management’s bargaining power? How is a union’s
power affected? Conduct research and discover three historical examples of recessions
affecting bargaining power. Which party is most negatively affected by a recession? Support
your opinion with outside references.
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
•
•
•
•
•
Write 750 words using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Public vs. Private
Think of a public organization with which you are familiar. Explain how it differs from a private
company in terms of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Nature of its service.
Relationship between its budget and collective bargaining processes.
Bargaining structure and decision-making processes.
Negotiable issues and bargaining tactics.
The right to strike
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
•
•
•
•
•
Write 750 words using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Total: 3,750 words
Harley-Davidson, Inc. is an American motorcycle manufacturer headquartered in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, United States. Founded in 1903, it is one of two major American motorcycle manufacturers to survive the Great Depression along with its historical rival, Indian Motorcycles.
If you are not familiar with this retail store, visit their website https://www.harley-davidson.comLinks to an external site.
After reading case 5, answer the following questions:
1. If you were CEO of Harley-Davidson, how would you compare the advantages and disadvantages of using exports, joint ventures, and foreign subsidiaries as ways of expanding international sales?
2. In America, Harley has shifted the positioning of its products away from simply motorcycles and more toward being status symbols of a particular lifestyle. What are the implications of cultural factors for positioning in other countries that Harley has targeted for growth—ones like Japan, China, France, and Brazil?
3. Problem Solving. If you were advising Harley’s CEO on business expansion in sub-Saharan Africa, what would you recommend in terms of setting up sales centers and manufacturing sites in countries like South Africa, Kenya, and Zimbabwe? When a new location is targeted, what would you suggest as the proper role for locals to play? Should they run everything, or should there be a mix of locals and expatriates? And if the CEO wants to send expatriates from the United States into some locations, what selection criteria would you recommend, and why?
4. Further Research. Is it accurate to say that Harley is still “on top of its game”? How well is the company performing today in both domestic and global markets? Who are its top competitors in other parts of the world, and how well does Harley compete against them? Does the electric Harley have what it takes to fuel the company’s next stage of global growth?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case Analysis: Trader Joe’s
Student Name
David Nazarian College of Business and Economics,
CSUN MGT 360: Management and Organizational Behavior
Dr. Claudia Velasco
1
Discussion.
1. In what ways does Trader Joe’s demonstrate the importance of each responsibility in the
management process—planning, organizing, leading, and controlling?
Trader Joe’s is a highly desirable market that has gathered quite some aCenDon over the years.
Trader Joe’s is known for their quality, not only in the products they provide but also in the way
they treat their clientele (traderjodes.com, 2011). Important responsibiliDes in the management
process include planning, organizing, leading, and controlling. Trader Joe’s manages to ensure
these aspects are always improving, because then business will prosper subsequently. Planning is
an important process to be done in management because it can allow for the best possible
decision to be made. Other than the cost-saving measures they use to aCract customers Trader
Joe’s also likes to plan ways to get new delicious tasDng foods on their shelves. This is a good
tacDc as it will allow their customers to have different opDons, though sDll limit their stock to not
cause decision exhausDon. Trader Joe’s also shows great use of organizing for their business. This
is seen in the way they structure inside their store, to the way they structure their management
and leadership skills. One example of how Trader Joe’s is organized is how they decide what will
go on their shelves. They have a process where they will first search out for delicious foods around
the enDre world, contact manufacturers directly, assign the products a catchy name, and maintain
a small stock (traderjoes.com, 2011). This organized form of product research they use is what
keeps their customers in their stores trying new delicious tasDng foods with a smile on their face.
Trader Joe’s shows excepDonal skills in leadership due to the success in their business over the
years and the happiness of their employees. Providing good leadership to employees will keep
them happy, which in return will reflect on their aQtude towards customers. Happy employees
mean happy customers. How does Trader Joe’s managed to keep their customers happy?
2
They provide starDng benefits such as medical, dental, and vision insurance, company-paid
reDrement, employee 10% discount, and even paid vacaDon. One other good reason Trader Joe’s
has many good leaders as their company’s foundaDon is because they partake in training
programs such as Trader Joe’s University. This program teachers its students how to develop brand
loyalty necessary to cater to the needs of the company and customers. Lastly, Trader Joe’s shows
outstanding ethic in the way they control the business. Managers also are taught at the programs
how to get their part-Dme employees to deliver excellent customer-focused aQtudes that
shoppers come expecDng to see. Trader Joe’s understands that it is important for employees not
only to be generous and helpful, but to also have recommendaDons of their own to customers.
Everyone is encouraged to try and taste different products the store provides so that they can
engage with shoppers more based on personal experiences. The company is also very strict when
it comes to the reviews provided by their customers about their products. They will get rid of
products that have risen in price or have just had bad sales to ensure that their customers can
have what they love on the shelves.
Discussion.
2. What lessons does the Trader Joe’s story offer to aspiring entrepreneurs who want to
get off to a good start in any industry?
Trader Joe’s offers many valuable lessons that can be extracted from their journey. Trader Joe’s
has proven themselves to be successful in the field of business due to their history of successful
leadership allowing them to reach such a point in the industry. One lesson that can be taken away
from Trader Joe’s is their determinaDon to never sacrifice quality to their customers for their
saDsfacDon. Although, other supermarkets will cut down quality to
suffice quanDty, Traders Joe’s has business values to sell items they deem worthy.
3
Another lesson that can be taken away from Trader Joe’s and their story is the importance of
making the business model desirable for anyone. This can be for prospected employees that want
to help join building the company, or even investors that want to help fund certain projects the
company may have. Trader Joe Coulombe, founder of Trader Joe’s, sold the company to German
billionaires and owners of Aldi markets (traderjoes.com, 2011). German billionaires and owners of
Aldi markets saw the direcDon Trader Joe’s was heading in the industry and decided to build on its
enDrety even more. Lastly, another great lesson to extract for aspiring entrepreneurs is the ability
to build a team that can provide excepDonal service to customers. This involves much
consideraDon during the stages of hiring and when leading the team. Trader Joe’s has some
qualiDes that other big markets lack. For example, the human quality of the employees.
Employees are enthusiasDc with customers and make them feel less of a burden when they are
shopping for groceries. Being able to create a good environment for the place people despise to
go is a trick not all can do. These lessons alone will help build an effecDve business in the industry
as they account for the most important people in the business, the customers.
Problem Solving.
3. At the age of 22 and newly graduated from college, Hazel has just accepted a job with
Trader Joe’s as a shift leader. She’ll be supervising four team members who fill part-time
jobs in the produce section. Given Trader Joe’s casual and nontraditional work
environment, what skills will she need, what should she do, and what should she avoid
doing in the first few days of work to establish herself as a successful team leader?
4
Just coming out of college, Hazel must have a good understanding of. managing and leadership.
Her posiDon includes a $70,000+ yearly (including both salary and cash bonus). Some
interpersonal skills Hazel should have while supervising the four team members are authority,
friendliness, and leadership. Authority in the sense of her team members knowing that when
she makes a decision, to trust her because it’s in her best interest to make one that will best
benefit the company. Hazel should also have a friendly aQtude towards the employees to build
a connecDon with them. Employees will feel more inclined to comply and cooperate with Hazel
if they see she is leading the team with confidence and joy.
Leadership is an important skill that Hazel must solidify while working with her team. She must
be able to guide her team and make sure her team is able to work together as well. Leadership
is also acquired through a good understanding of conceptual skills. This is the ability to think
analyDcally and solve or diagnose complex problems that occur in the workplace. One thing
Hazel should do in her first few days of work are to implement organizaDon tacDcs that will
further escalate her team to prosper. She can do this by simply implemenDng the management
process. Here she can plan, organize, lead, and control the use of resources necessarily needed
for their performance goals. Hazel should also make sure she is seQng a good role model by
always staying on task and assigning each team member a task to be done. Efficiency is very
important in the workplace and the team leaders are held accountable for the performance of
their teams. With proper communicaDon and organizaDon, very good work can be put out. On
the contrary, Hazel should avoid allowing her team members to believe that she doesn’t take
her posiDon seriously. This will majorly affect her authority due to their being no credibility
behind her posiDon. Lastly Hazel should avoid being late and always be on Dme. One important
5
aspect of proper leadership is always being on Dme ready for your team. Taking all this into
account Hazel should be an effecDve team leader.
Further Research.
4. Study news reports to find more information on Trader Joe’s management and
organization practices. Look for comparisons with its competitors and try to identify
whether or not Trader Joe’s still has the right management approach and business
model for continued success. Are there any internal weaknesses in the Trader Joe’s
management approach or new practices by external competitors, or changing industry
forces that might cause future problems?
One arDcle about Trader Joe’s suggests, “Trader Joe’s has mastered their business model, but
they are never saDsfied. In fact, they are always looking for new ways to push new ideas as they
feel a deep sense of responsibility to saDsfy their consumers.” (Glenn, 2011). This shows the will
that Trader Joe’s carries to provide for their customers saDsfacDon. They always are looking for
ways to improve. SupporDng this the arDcle also claims, “In fact, they encourage consumer
feedback and ask that consumers complete a simple response card that is available at the front
of every store.” (Glenn, 2011). Trader Joe’s values their customer feedback most and wants to
build new ideas from those. This is a very strategic tacDc that supermarkets like Ralphs, Vons
and Albertson’s don’t do. Lastly, showing Trader Joe’s efforts in quality is this point from the
arDcle, “And it is apparent that Trader Joe’s carefully addresses their diverse consumer needs in
their research & development efforts: from product quality, product origin, packaging to the
subtle aCenDon to detail that cater to the cultural nuances of this consumer.” (Glenn, 2011).
Trader Joe’s wants to be able to provide anyone and everyone willing to shop at their business
6
with something they will like. Contrary to popular belief, the world is now emerging into a world
of technology. People like to use their phone to complete daily tasks as it is more efficient.
Therefore, when comparing Albertson’s market to Trader Joe’s regarding loyalty programs it is
quite drasDc. An arDcle states that ” Albertsons’ Just for U loyalty program, with 24.3 million
registered users, is playing a key role in driving customer transacDons and retenDon. Just for U
has seen a 23.5% year-over-year increase in users, who are spending an average of 2.5 Dmes
more than shoppers not in the program.” (Russell, 2021). Many users are suggesDng and liking
this implementaDon and emphasis on their loyalty program. As more users join, the company is
receiving more purchases. SupporDng claims of the industry shining to a more tech-based side,
the arDcle shares “Digital sales jumped 225% year over year, Albertsons’ third straight quarter
of more than 200% e-commerce growth.” (Russell, 2021). Digital sales and local pick-ups are
part of the new era. Many people have different schedules, and this accommodates perfectly.
Trader Joe’s needs to implement a service like this. They are not as technically advanced as
Albertson’s in the sense of autonomy. Trader Joe’s contains one internal weakness of not having
a strong e-commerce foundaDon.
AdaptaDon is very important in business and Albertson’s is taking advantage. Another part of
the arDcle states, “Albertsons has improved online grocery profitability via reduced operaDonal
expenses, including lower picking costs achieved through labor planning, process improvements
and new sonware that has simplified workflows, according to Sankaran.” (Russell, 2021). This
proves that autonomy can be achieved while also being efficient at the same Dme. Trader Joe’s
must expand into this part of the industry to conDnue further and reach new peaks.
7
References
Home. (n.d.). http://www.traderjoes.com/
Jr., J.R. S., & Bachrach, D. G. (2020). Management (14th Edition). Wiley Global Education US.
https://bookshelf.vitalsource.com/books/9781119497721
Llopis, Glenn. “Why Trader Joe’s Stands out from All the Rest in the Grocery Business.” Forbes, Forbes
Magazine, 3 Oct. 2011, https://www.forbes.com/sites/glennllopis/2011/09/05/whytrader-joes-stands-out-from-all-the-rest-in-the-grocery-business/?sh=33bf9eb24dec
Russell Redman 1 | Jan 12. “Albertsons Keeps up Sales Momentum in Third Quarter.” Supermarket
News, 13 Jan. 2021, www.supermarketnews.com/retailfinancial/albertsons-keeps-sales-momentum-third-quarter
8
The balance sheet of Consolidated Paper, Incorporated, included the following shareholders’ equity accounts at December 31, 2023:
Paid-in capital:
Preferred stock, 8.8%, 95,000 shares at $1 par $ 95,000
Common stock, 454,500 shares at $1 par 454,500
Paid-in capital—excess of par, preferred 1,565,000
Paid-in capital—excess of par, common 2,615,000
Retained earnings 9,445,000
Treasury stock, at cost; 4,500 common shares (49,500)
Total shareholders’ equity $ 14,125,000
During 2024, several events and transactions affected the retained earnings of Consolidated Paper.
Required:
Prepare the appropriate entries for these events:
On March 3, the board of directors declared a property dividend of 275,000 shares of Leasco International common stock that Consolidated Paper had purchased in January as an investment (book value: $800,000). The investment shares had a fair value of $3 per share and were distributed March 31 to shareholders of record March 15.
On May 3, a 5-for-4 stock split was declared and distributed. The stock split was effected in the form of a 25% stock dividend. The market value of the $1 par common stock was $11 per share.
On July 5, a 3% common stock dividend was declared and distributed. The market value of the common stock was $11 per share.
On December 1, the board of directors declared the 8.8% cash dividend on the 95,000 preferred shares, payable on December 28 to shareholders of record December 20.
On December 1, the board of directors declared a cash dividend of $0.40 per share on its common shares, payable on December 28 to shareholders of record December 20.
Prepare the shareholders’ equity section of the balance sheet for Consolidated Paper, Incorporated at December 31, 2024. Net income for the year was $850,000.
see attached : 1,000 words, 8 slide power point included
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Labor Issues
75 words in length
Historically, what were the major issues facing migrant labor? Have they been
resolved?
What role have unions played in addressing migrant workers’ concerns?
What issues remain to be addressed concerning migrant workers today?
Regulations
75 words in length
The United States is one of the most heavily regulated economies in the
world. Do we have too many laws or not enough?
Does the existence of so many laws and regulations hinder or help American
Businesses?
Globalization
75 words length
Does globalization help or hinder the American consumer?
What affect does globalization have on American businesses?
Number of Bargaining Units
75 words in length
Select an organization with which you are familiar, and determine the number
of bargaining units that would be appropriate.
Lockouts
75 words in length.
Analyze the use of lockouts during labor negotiations.
Do there seem to be a variety of reasons lockouts are used?
What advice would you offer:
• union leaders on how to cope with management lockouts and
• managers on when and how to use the lockout as a strategic weapon in
negotiations.
Minimum Wage
75 words in length.
•
•
Raising the minimum wage is continually debated by lawmakers. In fact,
the city of Seattle recently raised their minimum wage to $11 an hour. It
is scheduled to raise to $15 an hour by 2018.
How does raising the minimum wage to $15 help and/or hinder the
American labor force?
Union Membership
This week you will create a PowerPoint presentation
When addressing the topic presented, you must include a minimum of 3 scholarly sources.
PowerPoint presentation should be between 8 slides and use APA format. 550 word min
Topic Presented: Describe the advantages and disadvantages of union membership. Then
share why you would or would not join a union. Your presentation should be interesting and
include graphics.
Please cite your sources in the paper. Use APA style.
•
•
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments.
The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and noncredible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
1. Primary sources such as government websites (United States Department of Labor
Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer
reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library)
and Google Scholar.
2. Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade
journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
3. Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs,
etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased statements, information,
etc.) in the paper and list each source on a reference page using APA style.
Total 1000 words min includes 8 slide power point
The shareholders’ equity of Core Technologies Company on June 30, 2023, included the following:
Common stock, $1 par; authorized, 7 million shares;
issued and outstanding, 3 million shares $ 3,000,000
Paid-in capital—excess of par 12,000,000
Retained earnings 17,000,000
On April 1, 2024, the board of directors of Core Technologies declared a 10% stock dividend on common shares, to be distributed on June 1. The market price of Core Technologies’ common stock was $30 on April 1, 2024, and $40 on June 1, 2024.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries to record the declaration and distribution of the stock dividend.
Note: If no entry is required for a transaction/event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.
Using the concepts from the previous two papers you did for me. You must answer both questions, minimum two to three page, double spaced, 12 point font essay. Accordingly, you should submit a minimum of FOUR to SIX pages.1) Vigorously defend Globalism. Explain why it is superior to Nationalism.2) Pretend you are currently a successful manager at an American company based in California. You have just been told you will be transferred (same level job) to China for a three-year assignment. How will you go about it(Apply Concepts from Culture, National Differences in Political, Economic, and legal Status)? What will you do differently?
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS – USD ($) shares in Thousands, $ in
Millions
Net sales
Cost of sales
Gross margin
Operating expenses:
Research and development
Selling, general and administrative
Total operating expenses
Operating income
Other income/(expense), net
Income before provision for income taxes
Provision for income taxes
Net income
Earnings per share:
Basic (in dollars per share)
Diluted (in dollars per share)
Shares used in computing earnings per share:
Basic (in shares)
Diluted (in shares)
Products
Net sales
Cost of sales
Services
Net sales
Cost of sales
12 Months Ended
Sep. 24, 2022
Sep. 25, 2021 Sep. 26, 2020
$ 394,328
223,546
170,782
$ 365,817
212,981
152,836
$ 274,515
169,559
104,956
26,251
25,094
51,345
119,437
(334)
119,103
19,300
$ 99,803
21,914
21,973
43,887
108,949
258
109,207
14,527
$ 94,680
18,752
19,916
38,668
66,288
803
67,091
9,680
$ 57,411
$ 6.15
$ 6.11
$ 5.67
$ 5.61
$ 3.31
$ 3.28
16,215,963
16,325,819
16,701,272
16,864,919
17,352,119
17,528,214
$ 316,199
201,471
$ 297,392
192,266
$ 220,747
151,286
78,129
$ 22,075
68,425
$ 20,715
53,768
$ 18,273
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS – USD ($) $ in Millions
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents
Marketable securities
Accounts receivable, net
Inventories
Vendor non-trade receivables
Other current assets
Total current assets
Non-current assets:
Marketable securities
Property, plant and equipment, net
Other non-current assets
Total non-current assets
Total assets
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable
Other current liabilities
Deferred revenue
Commercial paper
Term debt
Total current liabilities
Non-current liabilities:
Term debt
Other non-current liabilities
Total non-current liabilities
Total liabilities
Commitments and contingencies
Shareholders’ equity:
Common stock and additional paid-in capital, $0.00001 par value: 50,400,000
shares authorized; 15,943,425 and 16,426,786 shares issued and outstanding,
respectively
Retained earnings/(Accumulated deficit)
Accumulated other comprehensive income/(loss)
Total shareholders’ equity
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
Sep. 24, 2022 Sep. 25, 2021
$ 23,646
24,658
28,184
4,946
32,748
21,223
135,405
$ 34,940
27,699
26,278
6,580
25,228
14,111
134,836
120,805
42,117
54,428
217,350
352,755
127,877
39,440
48,849
216,166
351,002
64,115
60,845
7,912
9,982
11,128
153,982
54,763
47,493
7,612
6,000
9,613
125,481
98,959
49,142
148,101
302,083
109,106
53,325
162,431
287,912
64,849
57,365
(3,068)
(11,109)
50,672
$ 352,755
5,562
163
63,090
$ 351,002
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS – USD ($) $ in Millions
Statement of Cash Flows [Abstract]
Cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash, beginning balances
Operating activities:
Net income
Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash generated by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization
Share-based compensation expense
Deferred income tax expense/(benefit)
Other
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable, net
Inventories
Vendor non-trade receivables
Other current and non-current assets
Accounts payable
Deferred revenue
Other current and non-current liabilities
Cash generated by operating activities
Investing activities:
Purchases of marketable securities
Proceeds from maturities of marketable securities
Proceeds from sales of marketable securities
Payments for acquisition of property, plant and equipment
Payments made in connection with business acquisitions, net
Other
Cash used in investing activities
Financing activities:
Payments for taxes related to net share settlement of equity awards
Payments for dividends and dividend equivalents
Repurchases of common stock
Proceeds from issuance of term debt, net
Repayments of term debt
Proceeds from/(Repayments of) commercial paper, net
Other
Cash used in financing activities
Decrease in cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash
Cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash, ending balances
Supplemental cash flow disclosure:
Cash paid for income taxes, net
Cash paid for interest
12 Months Ended
Sep. 24, 2022
Sep. 25, 2021 Sep. 26, 2020
$ 35,929
$ 39,789
$ 50,224
99,803
94,680
57,411
11,104
9,038
895
111
11,284
7,906
(4,774)
(147)
11,056
6,829
(215)
(97)
(1,823)
1,484
(7,520)
(6,499)
9,448
478
5,632
122,151
(10,125)
(2,642)
(3,903)
(8,042)
12,326
1,676
5,799
104,038
6,917
(127)
1,553
(9,588)
(4,062)
2,081
8,916
80,674
(76,923)
29,917
37,446
(10,708)
(306)
(1,780)
(22,354)
(109,558)
59,023
47,460
(11,085)
(33)
(352)
(14,545)
(114,938)
69,918
50,473
(7,309)
(1,524)
(909)
(4,289)
(6,223)
(6,556)
(3,634)
(14,841)
(89,402)
5,465
(9,543)
3,955
(160)
(110,749)
(10,952)
24,977
(14,467)
(85,971)
20,393
(8,750)
1,022
976
(93,353)
(3,860)
35,929
(14,081)
(72,358)
16,091
(12,629)
(963)
754
(86,820)
(10,435)
39,789
19,573
$ 2,865
25,385
$ 2,687
9,501
$ 3,002
Hello I Have another assignment, could you please do it for me !
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB anytime in Week 8)
Course Name: Principles of
Management
Course Code: MGT101
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445 H (2023-2024)1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Lujain Miralam
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions: Please Read them carefully
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission
making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a
developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of
each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company,
Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was
money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving
on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts
chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale
food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my
grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions
being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the
obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew
ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people
reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was
able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into.
We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So,
when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw
how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky
Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I
didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought
we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first
store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name
after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the
lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to
AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone
in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been
a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity.
We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through
as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with
electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our
objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices
in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying
our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores.
When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20%
on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80%
of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful.
Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does
AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the
company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss
briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ANSWERS:
1. Go to the following page – https://lookerstudio.google.com/u/0/reporting/1b28ce21-77f8-4478-bcc8-edf3f63443ea/page/DjD
2. Follow the instructions all the way through the exercise and name your dashboards and charts with your last name, always do this.
3. Generate a downloadable PDF file of your dashboards in Looker Data Studio and upload it to this assignment.
4. Generate a sharable Link to your Looker Studio report and include it in the comments with your upload.
ALTERNATE ASSIGNMENT
Introduction:
Google Looker Studio: Looker is a data visualization tool that allows the user to look at data from different sources (including outside GA4) and visualize it on various dashboards. See https://lookerstudio.google.com/u/0/navigation/reporting.
Start with a blank report and connect the data from various sources using the “connectors” that are available.
For the purposes of this short introduction to Looker, choose the Google Analytics connector. Based on your account permissions, you will be shown a list of properties you can connect to, pick the Google DEMO (GA4). You can now add data from the Google DEMO to the Looker Studio dashboards you are building. A sample table is added, but we will delete it and start afresh.
Start by adding a table or chart, click on those from the top navigation (graphics), and you will be shown several options. Let’s create a table of the most popular pages. Modifying the table will be very similar to working with an exploration.
Create a simple table with a couple of metrics, such as views, sessions, and total users, but you can also pick other metrics.
Copy the table (Control+C), then paste. Change the style of the copied chart to a time series or any other type you wish.
Add a dashboard (sessions is the default), copy the dashboard, and change the metric to total users. Add the previous reporting period to both dashboards to show the percent change from the previous period.
Copy both dashboards change them into spark charts, and get rid of the previous period comparison.
Change the style using Theme and Layout in the top menu.
Add additional pages (you can add several pages if needed), change the name to page 1 and page 2, etc., or give them names.
Preview the report (eye icon in upper right).
You can export the data as a PDF file once you’re happy.
Export the report (Dashboard) you created to a PDF file and upload it to the Looker CH7 assignment upload.
Exercise 18-18 (Algo) Effect of cumulative, nonparticipating preferred stock on dividends—3 years [LO18-7]
The shareholders’ equity of ILP Industries includes the items shown below. The board of directors of ILP declared cash dividends of $44 million, $80 million, and $270 million in its first three years of operation—2024, 2025, and 2026, respectively.
($ in millions)
Common stock $ 220
Paid-in capital—excess of par, common 1,100
Preferred stock, 8% 800
Paid-in capital—excess of par, preferred 675
Required:
Determine the amount of dividends to be paid to preferred and common shareholders in each of the three years, assuming that the preferred stock is cumulative and nonparticipating.
Determine the amount of dividends to be paid to preferred and common shareholders in each of the three years, assuming that the preferred stock is noncumulative and nonparticipating.
must mention question number clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marksAll answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). add a minimum 5 references in the end of the assignment
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
n Week 2, you created a Systems Thinking Diagram that mapped the stock, inflows, outflows, and feedback loops of your organization. As you become more familiar with your environment and the relationships and interactions between departments and people, you will begin to discover existing strengths and weaknesses. The analysis of the weaknesses and threats to a system is essential during the initial phase to make operational improvements, and it will reveal existing opportunities to plan and execute effective solutions.
VIDEO 1
“- Week one begins with scanning the environment for your project.
It’s part of the analysis phase.
The analysis phase is how you’re going to structure the project selection in the organization and that usually depends on the scope of where you’re at in the organization.
There are three basic levels of where You’d be when your employed, youd be at the unit, the organization and the system And the project that you choose should be commensurate with where your employment is in the organization You’re gonna want to start with a process that starts to look and weigh evenly the variables that you discover in your environment for an idea of what a project might be.
I would begin with a SWOT analysis.
The SWOT analysis really is strenghts, weaknesses, opportunity, and threats with an environment al evaluation And you’ll notice in the SWOT theres an inverse for every piece, so strengths really is weaknesses also So what you do as a strengthen organization is gonna be counterbalanced by what you can improve as a weakness.
There are three kinds of stakeholders in an organization You have the individuals that are shareholders or owners of the organizations, then you have leadership and the staff, and then you have your customers.
Each element of that stakeholder group will have to be prepared in order to interact with how you’re going to scan the environment or how you’re gonna analyze the scope and scale of where your project’s gonna fit.
We’re gonna identify those stakeholders that are key to crafting and narrating the project communicating with those team members of plan a beginning, a middle, and an end of where you’re going to take your project I would suggest that you begin with a Gantt chart of and then communicating that back to leadership so they identify or they can see visually exactly what the steps are for your potential project Nothing can derail a project more than leaders or people that are in the management function that are unaware that this is happening in an organization that they begin to say “hey that needs to stop because it doesn’t have the appropriate approval to begin” This project needs to be highly aligned with the goals that they want for the company That is simply just looking at the strategic mission and vision and the annual goals for your organization and making sure that the project that you’re doing speaks to one of those goals so when you have the alignement of your project to the organizational values, it’s gonna be helpful for you to get buy-in from the leadership.
And then once you actually do the walk, most people should be informed about why you’re doing the walk and most people should understand what your process is for the walks.
So if you’re employed at a unit level, you may not have the opportunity to interview a controller or CFO or financial analyst to understand the impact of your proposal, but what you can do is probably meet with your immediate supervisor to identify that scope and start to leverage people that have the expertise in your organization to bring additional value into the scope of your project so that your project can ultimately be successful and adopted by the organization.
It’s helpful for you to understand with those Gantt and PERT project tools to be able to come back to the team to say “This is where I feel we need human ressource piece or “This is where I think a financial piece would do well or “An operational person needs to be here or “I need a clinician in the scope of processes here to really kind of tease out all of the element that are involved in reducing waste and creating process improvement that are gonna support ultimately the gemba walk You may have been exposed to lean or sigma in the past and you’re really choosing a different methodology for a process improvement initiative that begins by understanding the tacit and explicit skill set of behaviors of your organization.
So this all begins with you walking through an organization and using that gemba walk as a foundation of where to kind of prepare and how to understand the behavior you observe and what you’re teaching.
Where did the organization begin at as far as where it was design to operate and then what actually operating like So that you can see where, what, where the value is gained and lost from your own observation.
So that gemba walk is an opportunity to humbly assess what’s happening in the organization and then look for opportunities to teach and mentor and gain an understanding of why things are happening So it gives you an opportunity to begin that planning process to craft a aha moment for almost everybody that you speak to about what they could do that would make their job a little bit better That can come across in a humble way if you do it Socratically by asking questions like “Do you think that that interactions or “What do you think could have been better about that interaction?” Let’s have a dialogue about improving everything that we do and really pulling efficiency into that model so that we become better and more efficient at how we do our work.”
VIDEO 2
– The SWOT analysis really is strenght, weaknesses and opportunity, and threats with an environmental evaluation That strengths piece is about what you do well in the organization.
And you’ll notice in the SWOT, there’s an inverse for every piece.
So, strengths really is weaknesses also.
So, what you do as a strenght in an organization is gonna be counterbalanced by you can improve as a weakness.
And then, the opportunities are really about where you see the industry going and it allows no matter where your at in the organization, no matter what level, to have a different observation on an opportunity Let’s say you’re in housekeeping, the opportunity could be the contact time that you have to disfecting the room and then the ultimate resulting and hospital induced infections rates.
So, you could look at the environment of having the proper procedure of disinfecting a room and look at the outcome of hospital induced infection So, no matter where you’re at in the scope and scale of the organization, there are different opportunities that you’re gonna be able to see and capture and include in this project.
The threats are those cultural pieces that get brought in to your organization either from the inside or outside that the staff are not necesarily brought in to the team and that’s where you might wanna see or evealuate productive work behaviors or counterproductive work behaviors and an organizational citizenships behavior So, if you can take that SWOT analysis and actually layer it in to your Gantt chart as elements of, we notice that we have these strenght are something we want to build on.
We notice we have these opportunities and their specific projects to look at.
You can layer that Gantt chart with some real meat to improve the organization ”
Complete a SWOT Analysis of your organization. Use the SWOT Analysis Worksheet and complete the following steps:
Complete a preliminary walk around the organization to scan the:
Internal environment for strengths and weaknesses (e.g., workflows, products, personnel, processes).
External environment for opportunities the organization might take advantage of and threats that the organization should mitigate against (e.g., new markets, advances in technology, proposed regulations, competition, etc.).
Follow up with additional research that may provide clarity on elements you are hesitant about or indecisive to list.
Review your systems thinking diagram from Week 2 and determine if there are any details you can add or adjustments you can make to enhance your understanding of the organizational system.
Write an objective for your SWOT analysis.
List the organization’s strengths, weaknesses, potential opportunities, and potential threats.
Select the items that should be prioritized.
Cite 3 reputable references to support your SWOT Analysis (e.g., trade or industry publications or government or agency websites).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
SWOT Analysis Worksheet
Conduct a SWOT Analysis on your employer or
department
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Conduct a preliminary walk around the organization.
Probe your organization and the structure of its system.
Write an objective for your SWOT analysis.
List the organization’s strengths, weaknesses, potential opportunities and potential threats
Select the items that should be prioritized.
Cite three reputable references to support your SWOT Analysis (e.g., trade or industry publications,
government or agency websites, scholarly works, or other sources of similar quality).
Format your assignment according to APA guidelines.
SWOT Analysis Table
Internal or
External
Helpful
Strengths
•
Internal
•
•
What does the organization do
well?
What unique resources can the
organization draw on?
What do other organizations
see as strengths?
Opportunities
•
External
•
•
What opportunities are available
to the organization?
What trends could the
organization take advantage of?
How can the organization turn
strengths into opportunities?
Harmful
Weaknesses
•
•
•
What could the organization
improve?
Where does the organization
have fewer resources than
others?
What are other organizations
likely to see as weaknesses?
Threats
•
•
•
What threats could harm the
organization?
What is the competition doing?
What threats to the organization
expose weaknesses?
1
2
Report Overview
The Master of Health Services Administration (MHA) program offers a strategic blend of
academic knowledge and practical skills to hone leadership abilities, operational understanding,
and strategic insight in healthcare management. As a current team leader in an insurance
company, my participation in this program is not merely an academic pursuit but a calculated
endeavor to enhance my current role and future growth within the organization.
Structural, Behavioral, and Intersectional Attributes
a) Structural Attributes
In the context of my current organization, the structure is predominantly hierarchical,
featuring a clearly defined chain of command. The present structure ensures that decisionmaking is streamlined albeit centralized (Fernandopulle, 2021). The hierarchical structure further
allows for an organized workflow but also presents challenges for those lower in the hierarchy to
influence decision-making.
b) Behavioral Attributes
Behaviorally, the organization leans towards agility and adaptability. The institution is
receptive to changes in the insurance and healthcare industries and quickly implements new
strategies. The present behavioral culture promotes innovation but can sometimes result in rapid
changes that may disorient some team members.
c) Intersectional Attributes
The organizational culture emphasizes a collaborative approach. Teams across different
departments are encouraged to communicate and work together on cross-functional projects.
This intersectionality fosters a sense of community but also requires high coordination.
3
Systems Thinking Diagram
Explanation of Diagram
The systems thinking diagram serves as a comprehensive tool for understanding the
complex dynamics within the organization and offers a framework for strategic planning and
decision-making (Amissah et al., 2020). The ‘stock’ represents the foundational resources vital
for the organization’s functioning. ‘Inflows’ and ‘outflows’ are dynamic elements affecting the
stock. ‘Feedback loops’ allow the organization to monitor and adjust its strategies. The arrows
indicate the direction of influence and interaction among these components (Amissah et al.,
2020). For instance, inflows contribute to the stock, while outflows deplete it. Feedback loops
analyze the effects of outflows and provide insights for adjustments in the stock.
The diagram visually represents the systems thinking approach applied to the organization. It
highlights the four key components:
4
•
Stock: This refers to the foundational resources, such as human capital, financial
resources, and technological assets. Stock is what the organization uses to function and
achieve its objectives.
•
Inflows: These elements feed into the stock, enhancing its capabilities. New recruitments,
financial investments, and technological upgrades are examples.
•
Outflows: These elements deplete the stock, such as attrition, expenses, and technology
depreciation. Outflows are inevitable but can be managed.
•
Feedback Loops: These mechanisms monitor the system’s state and inform adjustments.
Employee satisfaction surveys, customer feedback, and financial audits serve as
examples.
How the MHA Program Benefits Me and My Organization
Skill Augmentation
The MHA program’s curriculum, rich in healthcare management theories and best
practices, significantly augments my skillset. It enhances my understanding of healthcare
systems, which is crucial in the insurance sector. The knowledge gained aids in making more
informed decisions, benefiting client interactions and internal processes.
Emotional Intelligence
One of the program’s core is developing emotional intelligence (Khalil et al.,2023). As a
team leader, mastering this skill is imperative for effective team management. It fosters a positive
work environment, enhances team cohesion, and contributes to higher productivity.
Building Social Capital
The very act of engaging in an advanced degree such as the MHA is a signal to the
organizational leadership about my commitment to personal and professional growth (Park.edu,
5
2023). This initiative aligns well with the organization’s strategic values, thereby accruing social
capital, which can be leveraged for future opportunities.
Conclusion
The Master of Health Services Administration (MHA) program catalyzes personal and
professional development. It augments my current role as a team leader in an insurance company
and serves as a stepping stone for future leadership roles within the organization. From
enhancing specific skills, such as understanding healthcare systems, to developing emotional
intelligence, the program offers a rounded approach to career development.
6
References
Amissah, M., Gannon, T., & Monat, J. (2020). What is systems thinking? Expert perspectives
from the WPI systems thinking colloquium of 2 October 2019. Systems, 8(1), 6.
https://doi.org/10.3390/systems8010006
Fernandopulle, N. (2021). To what extent does hierarchical leadership affect health care
outcomes? Medical Journal of The Islamic Republic of Iran.
https://doi.org/10.47176/mjiri.35.117
Khalil, H., Liang, Z., Karimi, L., Ferrier, J. A., & Liu, C. (2023). Evaluation of a health
administration program and future considerations. Journal of Health Administration
Education, 39(3), 409-428.
Park.edu. (2023, September 26). Importance of a Master of Healthcare Administration (MHA)
degree. Park University. https://www.park.edu/blog/the-importance-of-a-master-ofhealthcare-administration-mha-degree-breaking-things-down/
1
2
Report Overview
The Master of Health Services Administration (MHA) program offers a strategic blend of
academic knowledge and practical skills to hone leadership abilities, operational understanding,
and strategic insight in healthcare management. As a current team leader in an insurance
company, my participation in this program is not merely an academic pursuit but a calculated
endeavor to enhance my current role and future growth within the organization.
Structural, Behavioral, and Intersectional Attributes
a) Structural Attributes
In the context of my current organization, the structure is predominantly hierarchical,
featuring a clearly defined chain of command. The present structure ensures that decisionmaking is streamlined albeit centralized (Fernandopulle, 2021). The hierarchical structure further
allows for an organized workflow but also presents challenges for those lower in the hierarchy to
influence decision-making.
b) Behavioral Attributes
Behaviorally, the organization leans towards agility and adaptability. The institution is
receptive to changes in the insurance and healthcare industries and quickly implements new
strategies. The present behavioral culture promotes innovation but can sometimes result in rapid
changes that may disorient some team members.
c) Intersectional Attributes
The organizational culture emphasizes a collaborative approach. Teams across different
departments are encouraged to communicate and work together on cross-functional projects.
This intersectionality fosters a sense of community but also requires high coordination.
3
Systems Thinking Diagram
Explanation of Diagram
The systems thinking diagram serves as a comprehensive tool for understanding the
complex dynamics within the organization and offers a framework for strategic planning and
decision-making (Amissah et al., 2020). The ‘stock’ represents the foundational resources vital
for the organization’s functioning. ‘Inflows’ and ‘outflows’ are dynamic elements affecting the
stock. ‘Feedback loops’ allow the organization to monitor and adjust its strategies. The arrows
indicate the direction of influence and interaction among these components (Amissah et al.,
2020). For instance, inflows contribute to the stock, while outflows deplete it. Feedback loops
analyze the effects of outflows and provide insights for adjustments in the stock.
The diagram visually represents the systems thinking approach applied to the organization. It
highlights the four key components:
4
•
Stock: This refers to the foundational resources, such as human capital, financial
resources, and technological assets. Stock is what the organization uses to function and
achieve its objectives.
•
Inflows: These elements feed into the stock, enhancing its capabilities. New recruitments,
financial investments, and technological upgrades are examples.
•
Outflows: These elements deplete the stock, such as attrition, expenses, and technology
depreciation. Outflows are inevitable but can be managed.
•
Feedback Loops: These mechanisms monitor the system’s state and inform adjustments.
Employee satisfaction surveys, customer feedback, and financial audits serve as
examples.
How the MHA Program Benefits Me and My Organization
Skill Augmentation
The MHA program’s curriculum, rich in healthcare management theories and best
practices, significantly augments my skillset. It enhances my understanding of healthcare
systems, which is crucial in the insurance sector. The knowledge gained aids in making more
informed decisions, benefiting client interactions and internal processes.
Emotional Intelligence
One of the program’s core is developing emotional intelligence (Khalil et al.,2023). As a
team leader, mastering this skill is imperative for effective team management. It fosters a positive
work environment, enhances team cohesion, and contributes to higher productivity.
Building Social Capital
The very act of engaging in an advanced degree such as the MHA is a signal to the
organizational leadership about my commitment to personal and professional growth (Park.edu,
5
2023). This initiative aligns well with the organization’s strategic values, thereby accruing social
capital, which can be leveraged for future opportunities.
Conclusion
The Master of Health Services Administration (MHA) program catalyzes personal and
professional development. It augments my current role as a team leader in an insurance company
and serves as a stepping stone for future leadership roles within the organization. From
enhancing specific skills, such as understanding healthcare systems, to developing emotional
intelligence, the program offers a rounded approach to career development.
6
References
Amissah, M., Gannon, T., & Monat, J. (2020). What is systems thinking? Expert perspectives
from the WPI systems thinking colloquium of 2 October 2019. Systems, 8(1), 6.
https://doi.org/10.3390/systems8010006
Fernandopulle, N. (2021). To what extent does hierarchical leadership affect health care
outcomes? Medical Journal of The Islamic Republic of Iran.
https://doi.org/10.47176/mjiri.35.117
Khalil, H., Liang, Z., Karimi, L., Ferrier, J. A., & Liu, C. (2023). Evaluation of a health
administration program and future considerations. Journal of Health Administration
Education, 39(3), 409-428.
Park.edu. (2023, September 26). Importance of a Master of Healthcare Administration (MHA)
degree. Park University. https://www.park.edu/blog/the-importance-of-a-master-ofhealthcare-administration-mha-degree-breaking-things-down/
After reading this article, Spirit CEO Says JetBlue Wants to Stop Spirit-Frontier Merger, by David Koenig, https://apnews.com/article/business-hostile-takeovers-b52839e46fa913f79454d5a76ba38c51answer this discussion question in 100 words or less, explain why the CEO of Spirit Airlines should not be sued for breaching his fiduciary duty to his corporation.
Read the attached prompt and use the excel sheet attached to answer the prompt.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Patient Throughput Analysis
Activity: Your case study includes an Excel dataset. Use the dataset to complete the following:
•
•
•
•
Calculate the mean time for each of the patient’s visit components in the dataset (Columns M
through S)
Determine for each patient visit component whether the activity is a value-added, non-valueadded, or non-value-added but essential activity (Hint – you will find the definition of these
categories in your module readings).
Calculate the average throughput time of a patient (Hint – throughput is the total average time
spent from the start of the visit to the end of the visit)
Assuming the data provided, calculate the average throughput time using Little’s Law as
discussed in the text (Hint – Chapter #11 in the textbook).
Your task is to analyze the patient throughput flow using the data, tools, and techniques learned in
this module and the information above. Your assignment is to create a Microsoft Word document
(your document must be Microsoft Word compatible) including all of the following:
o Data Analysis Summary – Discuss each patient visit component in the dataset and summarize
your findings. Include whether or not each activity is value-added, non-value-added, or non-valueadded but essential. Also, indicate the mean time for each component in the patient visit.
Calculate the average total value-added (VA), non-value-added(NVA), and non-value-added but
essential (NVAE) times and discuss the importance of each in relation to the mean total time
patients spend in the clinic (every activity must be identified as VA, NVA, or NVAE_.
o Wait Time Analysis – Based on your findings in the Data Analysis Summary, address each of the
following items:
o Identify and discuss areas of the patient process about which Dr. Millwood should be
concerned (i.e., where are outliers or mean times that can impact the patient experience).
o Identify bottlenecks and constraints as evidenced by data from your analysis.
o What are the mean total and individual component wait times for patients in the clinic across
the patient experience (i.e., are there specific process steps where wait times are higher,
indicating a bottleneck)?
o Identify specific concerns about individual physicians. Drawing conclusions per physician will
require you to analyze wait times by physician. There are multiple ways you can perform this
analysis in Excel, such as the subtotal function or a pivot table.
o What is the mean time physicians and MAs spend with patients delivering care? How are
these metrics important to the patient experience?
o Do average patient wait and care times differ significantly by physician? (Additional credit is
available for statistical analysis but is not required.)
1
o Patient Throughput Analysis
o Assume that the average number of patients in the clinic (waiting room, exam rooms, etc.) is
4.81 patients, and the clinic serves ten patients per hour, according to Little’s Law (found in
your text in chapter #11); what is the calculated average throughput time?
o Compare and contrast your observed average throughput time (from the data) and your
calculated average throughput time using Little’s law. Discuss possible reasons for the
difference between the two values (Hint – think about the flow of patients hourly and daily in
your observation dataset).
o Create a visual (graph) of the average hourly patient flow (hourly trends). Discuss your findings
concerning the hourly trends. See the format example in Figure 1 using example test data.
Your data line will look different. Keep in mind that all graphs must have descriptive titles
and axis titles.
Figure 1 – Format of an Average Hourly Trend Graph
o Create a visual (graph) of the average daily patient flow (Monday through Friday trends).
Discuss your findings concerning the trends by day of the week. See the format example in
Figure 2 using example test data. Your data line will look different. Keep in mind that all
graphs must have descriptive titles and axis titles.
Figure 2 – Format of an Average Daily Trend Graph
2
Submit one(1) Microsoft Word-compatible document to the proper Dropbox for this activity (other file
formats are not acceptable). You should not submit any PowerPoint or other format files. You may
use a tool such as PowerPoint or Excel to create your diagrams, but all of your content (e.g., text,
graphs, diagrams) should be in your Word-compatible document.
An exemplary student submission includes all of the following criteria:
•
•
•
•
•
The document is well-articulated and structured, with three distinct sections with the correct
titles as indicated in the instructions.
The Data Analysis Summary section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses each visit component in detail
o Identifies each component as value-added, non-value-added, or non-value-added but
essential
o Provides the mean time for each component
o Provides the mean total value-added, non-value-added, and non-value-added but
essential times
o Discusses Each of the mean total time’s importance concerning the mean total time
patients spend in the clinic
The Wait Time Analysis section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses a minimum of two areas from the data analysis where Dr. Millwood should be
concerned using supporting evidence and explaining why a concern is warranted
o Identifies a minimum of two potential bottlenecks and or constraints in the process
supported by evidence
o Discusses and analyzes mean patient wait times per physician and examines how the
metric is essential to the patient experience
o Discusses and analyzes mean patient care times per physician and examines how the
metric is essential to the patient experience.
o Discusses whether or not average patient wait and care times differ significantly by
physician
The Patient Throughput Analysis section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses the average throughput time calculated using Little’s Law, comparing and
contrasting the observed average patient throughput time calculated from the data.
o Provides a logical discussion of the possible reasons for the difference between the
Little’s Law value and the observed value of average patient throughput
o Includes a logical visual (graph) of the average hourly patient flow (hourly trends)
o Includes a logical visual (graph) of the average daily patient flow (Monday through
Friday trends)
The document is professional in appearance, with no formatting issues. No grammatical or
punctuation problems are present. All diagrams are professionally embedded.
3
Activity: Your case study includes an Excel dataset. Use the dataset to complete the following:
•
•
•
•
Calculate the mean time for each of the patient’s visit components in the dataset (Columns M
through S)
Determine for each patient visit component whether the activity is a value-added, non-valueadded, or non-value-added but essential activity (Hint – you will find the definition of these
categories in your module readings).
Calculate the average throughput time of a patient (Hint – throughput is the total average time
spent from the start of the visit to the end of the visit)
Assuming the data provided, calculate the average throughput time using Little’s Law as
discussed in the text (Hint – Chapter #11 in the textbook).
Your task is to analyze the patient throughput flow using the data, tools, and techniques learned in
this module and the information above. Your assignment is to create a Microsoft Word document
(your document must be Microsoft Word compatible) including all of the following:
o Data Analysis Summary – Discuss each patient visit component in the dataset and summarize
your findings. Include whether or not each activity is value-added, non-value-added, or non-valueadded but essential. Also, indicate the mean time for each component in the patient visit.
Calculate the average total value-added (VA), non-value-added(NVA), and non-value-added but
essential (NVAE) times and discuss the importance of each in relation to the mean total time
patients spend in the clinic (every activity must be identified as VA, NVA, or NVAE_.
o Wait Time Analysis – Based on your findings in the Data Analysis Summary, address each of the
following items:
o Identify and discuss areas of the patient process about which Dr. Millwood should be
concerned (i.e., where are outliers or mean times that can impact the patient experience).
o Identify bottlenecks and constraints as evidenced by data from your analysis.
o What are the mean total and individual component wait times for patients in the clinic across
the patient experience (i.e., are there specific process steps where wait times are higher,
indicating a bottleneck)?
o Identify specific concerns about individual physicians. Drawing conclusions per physician will
require you to analyze wait times by physician. There are multiple ways you can perform this
analysis in Excel, such as the subtotal function or a pivot table.
o What is the mean time physicians and MAs spend with patients delivering care? How are
these metrics important to the patient experience?
o Do average patient wait and care times differ significantly by physician? (Additional credit is
available for statistical analysis but is not required.)
1
o Patient Throughput Analysis
o Assume that the average number of patients in the clinic (waiting room, exam rooms, etc.) is
4.81 patients, and the clinic serves ten patients per hour, according to Little’s Law (found in
your text in chapter #11); what is the calculated average throughput time?
o Compare and contrast your observed average throughput time (from the data) and your
calculated average throughput time using Little’s law. Discuss possible reasons for the
difference between the two values (Hint – think about the flow of patients hourly and daily in
your observation dataset).
o Create a visual (graph) of the average hourly patient flow (hourly trends). Discuss your findings
concerning the hourly trends. See the format example in Figure 1 using example test data.
Your data line will look different. Keep in mind that all graphs must have descriptive titles
and axis titles.
Figure 1 – Format of an Average Hourly Trend Graph
o Create a visual (graph) of the average daily patient flow (Monday through Friday trends).
Discuss your findings concerning the trends by day of the week. See the format example in
Figure 2 using example test data. Your data line will look different. Keep in mind that all
graphs must have descriptive titles and axis titles.
Figure 2 – Format of an Average Daily Trend Graph
2
Submit one(1) Microsoft Word-compatible document to the proper Dropbox for this activity (other file
formats are not acceptable). You should not submit any PowerPoint or other format files. You may
use a tool such as PowerPoint or Excel to create your diagrams, but all of your content (e.g., text,
graphs, diagrams) should be in your Word-compatible document.
An exemplary student submission includes all of the following criteria:
•
•
•
•
•
The document is well-articulated and structured, with three distinct sections with the correct
titles as indicated in the instructions.
The Data Analysis Summary section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses each visit component in detail
o Identifies each component as value-added, non-value-added, or non-value-added but
essential
o Provides the mean time for each component
o Provides the mean total value-added, non-value-added, and non-value-added but
essential times
o Discusses Each of the mean total time’s importance concerning the mean total time
patients spend in the clinic
The Wait Time Analysis section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses a minimum of two areas from the data analysis where Dr. Millwood should be
concerned using supporting evidence and explaining why a concern is warranted
o Identifies a minimum of two potential bottlenecks and or constraints in the process
supported by evidence
o Discusses and analyzes mean patient wait times per physician and examines how the
metric is essential to the patient experience
o Discusses and analyzes mean patient care times per physician and examines how the
metric is essential to the patient experience.
o Discusses whether or not average patient wait and care times differ significantly by
physician
The Patient Throughput Analysis section
o Addresses each item outlined for this section above
o Discusses the average throughput time calculated using Little’s Law, comparing and
contrasting the observed average patient throughput time calculated from the data.
o Provides a logical discussion of the possible reasons for the difference between the
Little’s Law value and the observed value of average patient throughput
o Includes a logical visual (graph) of the average hourly patient flow (hourly trends)
o Includes a logical visual (graph) of the average daily patient flow (Monday through
Friday trends)
The document is professional in appearance, with no formatting issues. No grammatical or
punctuation problems are present. All diagrams are professionally embedded.
3
Provider, Appointment, Visit
Provider
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Appt Date Scheduled
& Time Visit Length
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/5/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
1/7/2021
15
Appt Sch Time
1/5/21 8:45 AM
1/5/21 8:30 AM
1/5/21 9:30 AM
1/5/21 9:45 AM
1/5/21 10:00 AM
1/5/21 10:15 AM
1/5/21 11:00 AM
1/5/21 11:15 AM
1/5/21 11:30 AM
1/5/21 12:00 PM
1/5/21 12:15 PM
1/5/21 12:45 PM
1/5/21 12:30 PM
1/5/21 1:00 PM
1/5/21 11:45 AM
1/5/21 2:30 PM
1/5/21 3:30 PM
1/5/21 3:45 PM
1/5/21 4:00 PM
1/5/21 3:00 PM
1/5/21 1:45 PM
1/5/21 2:00 PM
1/5/21 2:45 PM
1/7/21 9:45 AM
1/7/21 8:45 AM
1/7/21 9:00 AM
1/7/21 9:15 AM
1/7/21 10:45 AM
1/7/21 10:30 AM
1/7/21 9:30 AM
1/7/21 10:15 AM
1/7/21 11:45 AM
1/7/21 11:00 AM
1/7/21 11:15 AM
1/7/21 11:30 AM
1/7/21 12:30 PM
1/7/21 12:00 PM
1/7/21 12:45 PM
1/7/21 2:15 PM
1/7/21 1:30 PM
1/7/21 1:00 PM
1/7/21 1:15 PM
Begin Check-In
1/5/21 8:01 AM
1/5/21 8:13 AM
1/5/21 9:10 AM
1/5/21 9:13 AM
1/5/21 9:41 AM
1/5/21 10:31 AM
1/5/21 10:44 AM
1/5/21 11:05 AM
1/5/21 11:10 AM
1/5/21 11:17 AM
1/5/21 11:18 AM
1/5/21 11:52 AM
1/5/21 12:34 PM
1/5/21 12:46 PM
1/5/21 1:14 PM
1/5/21 1:38 PM
1/5/21 1:38 PM
1/5/21 1:39 PM
1/5/21 1:39 PM
1/5/21 1:39 PM
1/5/21 1:45 PM
1/5/21 2:07 PM
1/5/21 2:39 PM
1/7/21 8:34 AM
1/7/21 8:39 AM
1/7/21 8:45 AM
1/7/21 8:49 AM
1/7/21 9:19 AM
1/7/21 9:24 AM
1/7/21 9:25 AM
1/7/21 9:51 AM
1/7/21 10:31 AM
1/7/21 11:24 AM
1/7/21 11:26 AM
1/7/21 11:29 AM
1/7/21 11:34 AM
1/7/21 11:41 AM
1/7/21 11:56 AM
1/7/21 12:34 PM
1/7/21 12:48 PM
1/7/21 12:50 PM
1/7/21 1:01 PM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
1/7/2021
1/7/2021
1/7/2021
1/7/2021
1/7/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/12/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/14/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1/7/21 1:45 PM
1/7/21 2:30 PM
1/7/21 2:45 PM
1/7/21 3:00 PM
1/7/21 3:30 PM
1/12/21 8:15 AM
1/12/21 8:30 AM
1/12/21 8:45 AM
1/12/21 9:00 AM
1/12/21 9:30 AM
1/12/21 9:45 AM
1/12/21 9:15 AM
1/12/21 11:00 AM
1/12/21 11:15 AM
1/12/21 3:00 PM
1/12/21 11:30 AM
1/12/21 12:15 PM
1/12/21 1:45 PM
1/12/21 2:00 PM
1/12/21 2:15 PM
1/12/21 3:45 PM
1/12/21 2:30 PM
1/12/21 3:15 PM
1/12/21 3:30 PM
1/14/21 9:00 AM
1/14/21 9:30 AM
1/14/21 9:15 AM
1/14/21 10:00 AM
1/14/21 10:15 AM
1/14/21 8:45 AM
1/14/21 9:45 AM
1/14/21 10:30 AM
1/14/21 11:30 AM
1/14/21 1:00 PM
1/14/21 1:45 PM
1/14/21 1:30 PM
1/14/21 2:00 PM
1/14/21 2:45 PM
1/14/21 2:30 PM
1/26/21 8:45 AM
1/26/21 9:00 AM
1/26/21 9:15 AM
1/26/21 10:30 AM
1/26/21 10:15 AM
1/26/21 10:45 AM
1/26/21 11:00 AM
1/26/21 12:00 PM
1/7/21 1:13 PM
1/7/21 2:34 PM
1/7/21 2:35 PM
1/7/21 3:01 PM
1/7/21 3:03 PM
1/12/21 8:16 AM
1/12/21 8:18 AM
1/12/21 8:19 AM
1/12/21 8:54 AM
1/12/21 8:54 AM
1/12/21 8:59 AM
1/12/21 9:31 AM
1/12/21 10:51 AM
1/12/21 11:02 AM
1/12/21 11:09 AM
1/12/21 11:43 AM
1/12/21 12:01 PM
1/12/21 1:10 PM
1/12/21 1:12 PM
1/12/21 1:17 PM
1/12/21 1:40 PM
1/12/21 2:37 PM
1/12/21 2:53 PM
1/12/21 3:15 PM
1/14/21 7:55 AM
1/14/21 8:35 AM
1/14/21 8:46 AM
1/14/21 8:54 AM
1/14/21 8:54 AM
1/14/21 8:55 AM
1/14/21 9:32 AM
1/14/21 10:59 AM
1/14/21 12:03 PM
1/14/21 12:07 PM
1/14/21 12:42 PM
1/14/21 1:42 PM
1/14/21 2:07 PM
1/14/21 2:40 PM
1/14/21 2:46 PM
1/26/21 7:44 AM
1/26/21 8:42 AM
1/26/21 8:51 AM
1/26/21 9:05 AM
1/26/21 9:34 AM
1/26/21 10:36 AM
1/26/21 10:54 AM
1/26/21 11:55 AM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/26/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
1/28/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
1/26/21 11:45 AM
1/26/21 12:15 PM
1/26/21 1:45 PM
1/26/21 1:00 PM
1/26/21 1:15 PM
1/26/21 1:30 PM
1/26/21 2:00 PM
1/26/21 3:15 PM
1/28/21 9:15 AM
1/28/21 9:00 AM
1/28/21 9:30 AM
1/28/21 10:15 AM
1/28/21 11:15 AM
1/28/21 11:30 AM
1/28/21 11:45 AM
1/28/21 1:45 PM
1/28/21 11:00 AM
1/28/21 1:30 PM
1/28/21 1:15 PM
1/28/21 12:45 PM
1/28/21 12:30 PM
1/28/21 3:00 PM
1/28/21 3:15 PM
1/28/21 3:45 PM
1/28/21 12:00 PM
1/28/21 12:15 PM
1/28/21 2:15 PM
1/28/21 2:00 PM
1/28/21 3:30 PM
2/2/21 8:45 AM
2/2/21 9:45 AM
2/2/21 10:45 AM
2/2/21 9:30 AM
2/2/21 10:00 AM
2/2/21 10:15 AM
2/2/21 10:30 AM
2/2/21 11:30 AM
2/2/21 12:15 PM
2/2/21 12:30 PM
2/2/21 11:45 AM
2/2/21 12:00 PM
2/2/21 11:15 AM
2/2/21 1:30 PM
2/2/21 3:00 PM
2/2/21 1:45 PM
2/2/21 2:15 PM
2/2/21 3:15 PM
1/26/21 11:56 AM
1/26/21 12:00 PM
1/26/21 12:18 PM
1/26/21 12:27 PM
1/26/21 12:27 PM
1/26/21 12:28 PM
1/26/21 1:11 PM
1/26/21 1:23 PM
1/28/21 9:00 AM
1/28/21 9:25 AM
1/28/21 9:30 AM
1/28/21 9:37 AM
1/28/21 9:39 AM
1/28/21 9:49 AM
1/28/21 9:59 AM
1/28/21 9:59 AM
1/28/21 10:15 AM
1/28/21 10:17 AM
1/28/21 10:19 AM
1/28/21 10:45 AM
1/28/21 10:48 AM
1/28/21 11:06 AM
1/28/21 11:08 AM
1/28/21 11:13 AM
1/28/21 12:00 PM
1/28/21 12:01 PM
1/28/21 12:52 PM
1/28/21 1:54 PM
1/28/21 3:38 PM
2/2/21 8:11 AM
2/2/21 8:47 AM
2/2/21 9:05 AM
2/2/21 9:06 AM
2/2/21 9:11 AM
2/2/21 9:15 AM
2/2/21 9:24 AM
2/2/21 10:15 AM
2/2/21 10:18 AM
2/2/21 10:22 AM
2/2/21 10:26 AM
2/2/21 10:49 AM
2/2/21 11:03 AM
2/2/21 12:34 PM
2/2/21 12:53 PM
2/2/21 1:42 PM
2/2/21 2:26 PM
2/2/21 2:33 PM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
2/2/2021
2/2/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/4/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/9/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
2/2/21 3:30 PM
2/2/21 3:45 PM
2/4/21 8:45 AM
2/4/21 9:30 AM
2/4/21 9:15 AM
2/4/21 9:45 AM
2/4/21 10:15 AM
2/4/21 10:30 AM
2/4/21 11:00 AM
2/4/21 11:15 AM
2/4/21 12:00 PM
2/4/21 12:15 PM
2/4/21 12:30 PM
2/4/21 12:45 PM
2/4/21 10:45 AM
2/4/21 11:45 AM
2/4/21 1:00 PM
2/4/21 1:30 PM
2/4/21 1:15 PM
2/4/21 3:15 PM
2/4/21 2:45 PM
2/4/21 3:00 PM
2/4/21 3:30 PM
2/4/21 3:45 PM
2/9/21 8:30 AM
2/9/21 9:30 AM
2/9/21 9:45 AM
2/9/21 10:00 AM
2/9/21 10:30 AM
2/9/21 1:00 PM
2/9/21 1:30 PM
2/9/21 11:00 AM
2/9/21 10:15 AM
2/9/21 2:00 PM
2/9/21 12:00 PM
2/11/21 9:30 AM
2/11/21 9:15 AM
2/11/21 9:00 AM
2/11/21 8:45 AM
2/11/21 9:45 AM
2/11/21 11:15 AM
2/11/21 10:00 AM
2/11/21 10:15 AM
2/11/21 11:30 AM
2/11/21 11:45 AM
2/11/21 12:15 PM
2/11/21 12:30 PM
2/2/21 3:24 PM
2/2/21 3:26 PM
2/4/21 8:28 AM
2/4/21 8:39 AM
2/4/21 8:49 AM
2/4/21 8:50 AM
2/4/21 8:52 AM
2/4/21 9:16 AM
2/4/21 9:19 AM
2/4/21 9:30 AM
2/4/21 9:31 AM
2/4/21 9:32 AM
2/4/21 9:33 AM
2/4/21 9:36 AM
2/4/21 10:38 AM
2/4/21 10:52 AM
2/4/21 11:51 AM
2/4/21 11:53 AM
2/4/21 1:15 PM
2/4/21 1:56 PM
2/4/21 2:49 PM
2/4/21 2:50 PM
2/4/21 2:55 PM
2/4/21 3:09 PM
2/9/21 8:32 AM
2/9/21 8:47 AM
2/9/21 8:51 AM
2/9/21 8:52 AM
2/9/21 9:05 AM
2/9/21 9:37 AM
2/9/21 9:51 AM
2/9/21 10:01 AM
2/9/21 10:04 AM
2/9/21 10:39 AM
2/9/21 11:57 AM
2/11/21 7:41 AM
2/11/21 8:55 AM
2/11/21 9:00 AM
2/11/21 9:02 AM
2/11/21 9:19 AM
2/11/21 9:35 AM
2/11/21 10:14 AM
2/11/21 10:16 AM
2/11/21 11:15 AM
2/11/21 11:17 AM
2/11/21 11:49 AM
2/11/21 11:53 AM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/11/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/16/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
2/11/21 12:45 PM
2/11/21 1:30 PM
2/11/21 1:15 PM
2/11/21 1:00 PM
2/11/21 2:00 PM
2/11/21 2:15 PM
2/11/21 1:45 PM
2/11/21 2:30 PM
2/11/21 2:45 PM
2/11/21 3:00 PM
2/11/21 3:30 PM
2/11/21 3:45 PM
2/11/21 3:15 PM
2/16/21 8:30 AM
2/16/21 9:30 AM
2/16/21 9:15 AM
2/16/21 9:00 AM
2/16/21 8:45 AM
2/16/21 10:15 AM
2/16/21 11:00 AM
2/16/21 11:15 AM
2/16/21 11:30 AM
2/16/21 11:45 AM
2/16/21 12:30 PM
2/16/21 1:00 PM
2/16/21 12:45 PM
2/16/21 2:00 PM
2/16/21 1:45 PM
2/16/21 2:15 PM
2/16/21 2:30 PM
2/16/21 3:15 PM
2/16/21 3:30 PM
2/16/21 3:45 PM
2/16/21 2:45 PM
2/18/21 11:45 AM
2/18/21 8:45 AM
2/18/21 9:00 AM
2/18/21 9:45 AM
2/18/21 10:00 AM
2/18/21 10:15 AM
2/18/21 12:15 PM
2/18/21 11:30 AM
2/18/21 11:00 AM
2/18/21 11:15 AM
2/18/21 12:00 PM
2/18/21 12:30 PM
2/18/21 12:45 PM
2/11/21 12:14 PM
2/11/21 12:18 PM
2/11/21 12:19 PM
2/11/21 12:27 PM
2/11/21 1:09 PM
2/11/21 1:30 PM
2/11/21 2:06 PM
2/11/21 2:17 PM
2/11/21 2:19 PM
2/11/21 2:21 PM
2/11/21 2:23 PM
2/11/21 2:25 PM
2/11/21 3:12 PM
2/16/21 8:37 AM
2/16/21 8:47 AM
2/16/21 8:48 AM
2/16/21 8:49 AM
2/16/21 8:50 AM
2/16/21 8:56 AM
2/16/21 8:57 AM
2/16/21 9:02 AM
2/16/21 11:00 AM
2/16/21 11:55 AM
2/16/21 12:13 PM
2/16/21 12:42 PM
2/16/21 12:43 PM
2/16/21 12:46 PM
2/16/21 12:46 PM
2/16/21 12:48 PM
2/16/21 12:49 PM
2/16/21 12:58 PM
2/16/21 1:00 PM
2/16/21 1:01 PM
2/16/21 2:21 PM
2/18/21 8:36 AM
2/18/21 8:49 AM
2/18/21 8:50 AM
2/18/21 8:53 AM
2/18/21 9:01 AM
2/18/21 10:12 AM
2/18/21 10:36 AM
2/18/21 10:45 AM
2/18/21 11:57 AM
2/18/21 12:05 PM
2/18/21 12:05 PM
2/18/21 12:14 PM
2/18/21 12:27 PM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/18/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/23/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
2/25/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
2/18/21 1:45 PM
2/18/21 2:00 PM
2/18/21 2:45 PM
2/18/21 3:00 PM
2/18/21 3:15 PM
2/18/21 3:45 PM
2/18/21 3:30 PM
2/23/21 8:30 AM
2/23/21 8:30 AM
2/23/21 8:45 AM
2/23/21 9:30 AM
2/23/21 9:45 AM
2/23/21 11:00 AM
2/23/21 12:00 PM
2/23/21 11:15 AM
2/23/21 11:30 AM
2/23/21 11:45 AM
2/23/21 12:15 PM
2/23/21 12:30 PM
2/23/21 12:45 PM
2/23/21 3:00 PM
2/23/21 1:45 PM
2/23/21 2:00 PM
2/23/21 3:45 PM
2/25/21 8:45 AM
2/25/21 10:15 AM
2/25/21 9:30 AM
2/25/21 9:45 AM
2/25/21 10:00 AM
2/25/21 11:45 AM
2/25/21 12:00 PM
2/25/21 12:30 PM
2/25/21 12:45 PM
2/25/21 2:15 PM
2/25/21 1:00 PM
2/25/21 2:00 PM
2/25/21 1:45 PM
2/25/21 3:30 PM
2/25/21 3:15 PM
2/25/21 3:00 PM
3/2/21 1:30 PM
3/2/21 8:45 AM
3/2/21 8:30 AM
3/2/21 9:00 AM
3/2/21 9:45 AM
3/2/21 9:30 AM
3/2/21 10:15 AM
2/18/21 1:17 PM
2/18/21 1:37 PM
2/18/21 2:12 PM
2/18/21 2:14 PM
2/18/21 2:15 PM
2/18/21 3:01 PM
2/18/21 3:36 PM
2/23/21 8:45 AM
2/23/21 8:46 AM
2/23/21 8:50 AM
2/23/21 8:56 AM
2/23/21 9:41 AM
2/23/21 10:11 AM
2/23/21 10:33 AM
2/23/21 11:10 AM
2/23/21 11:16 AM
2/23/21 11:35 AM
2/23/21 12:09 PM
2/23/21 12:43 PM
2/23/21 12:45 PM
2/23/21 1:59 PM
2/23/21 2:15 PM
2/23/21 2:16 PM
2/23/21 3:41 PM
2/25/21 8:41 AM
2/25/21 8:48 AM
2/25/21 9:00 AM
2/25/21 9:35 AM
2/25/21 9:38 AM
2/25/21 10:49 AM
2/25/21 11:18 AM
2/25/21 11:49 AM
2/25/21 12:37 PM
2/25/21 1:11 PM
2/25/21 1:40 PM
2/25/21 1:51 PM
2/25/21 2:01 PM
2/25/21 2:09 PM
2/25/21 3:07 PM
2/25/21 3:17 PM
3/2/21 8:21 AM
3/2/21 8:23 AM
3/2/21 8:35 AM
3/2/21 8:38 AM
3/2/21 8:40 AM
3/2/21 8:42 AM
3/2/21 8:45 AM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/2/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/4/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
3/9/2021
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
3/2/21 10:45 AM
3/2/21 10:30 AM
3/2/21 11:00 AM
3/2/21 11:45 AM
3/2/21 11:15 AM
3/2/21 2:30 PM
3/2/21 2:00 PM
3/2/21 2:15 PM
3/2/21 3:00 PM
3/2/21 3:30 PM
3/2/21 1:15 PM
3/2/21 3:15 PM
3/2/21 3:45 PM
3/4/21 9:30 AM
3/4/21 8:45 AM
3/4/21 10:15 AM
3/4/21 11:30 AM
3/4/21 9:45 AM
3/4/21 11:45 AM
3/4/21 12:45 PM
3/4/21 10:00 AM
3/4/21 11:00 AM
3/4/21 12:30 PM
3/4/21 12:00 PM
3/4/21 11:15 AM
3/4/21 2:00 PM
3/4/21 3:00 PM
3/4/21 3:15 PM
3/4/21 3:45 PM
3/4/21 3:30 PM
3/9/21 11:00 AM
3/9/21 8:30 AM
3/9/21 10:15 AM
3/9/21 8:45 AM
3/9/21 10:00 AM
3/9/21 9:30 AM
3/9/21 11:30 AM
3/9/21 9:45 AM
3/9/21 11:15 AM
3/9/21 11:45 AM
3/9/21 10:30 AM
3/9/21 10:45 AM
3/9/21 12:45 PM
3/9/21 12:30 PM
3/9/21 1:30 PM
3/9/21 3:15 PM
3/9/21 1:45 PM
3/2/21 8:47 AM
3/2/21 10:25 AM
3/2/21 10:33 AM
3/2/21 10:48 AM
3/2/21 10:59 AM
3/2/21 12:38 PM
3/2/21 12:56 PM
3/2/21 12:58 PM
3/2/21 1:02 PM
3/2/21 1:04 PM
3/2/21 1:05 PM
3/2/21 3:01 PM
3/2/21 3:24 PM
3/4/21 8:32 AM
3/4/21 9:02 AM
3/4/21 9:19 AM
3/4/21 9:21 AM
3/4/21 9:22 AM
3/4/21 9:25 AM
3/4/21 9:28 AM
3/4/21 10:18 AM
3/4/21 10:24 AM
3/4/21 10:54 AM
3/4/21 11:36 AM
3/4/21 11:58 AM
3/4/21 1:54 PM
3/4/21 2:20 PM
3/4/21 2:21 PM
3/4/21 2:22 PM
3/4/21 2:33 PM
3/9/21 7:47 AM
3/9/21 8:19 AM
3/9/21 8:20 AM
3/9/21 8:35 AM
3/9/21 8:37 AM
3/9/21 9:18 AM
3/9/21 9:27 AM
3/9/21 9:40 AM
3/9/21 9:50 AM
3/9/21 10:00 AM
3/9/21 10:07 AM
3/9/21 10:28 AM
3/9/21 11:48 AM
3/9/21 11:49 AM
3/9/21 11:50 AM
3/9/21 12:02 PM
3/9/21 1:29 PM
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Anthony
Baker, Antho
What are the pros and cons of Jill’s lack of hotel operational experience?Consider the current challenges of the reservations department. How will Jill’s interpersonal communication skills she learned from working in human resources benefit this department?You are tasked with modifying the management training policies. Provide rationale for changes made.What advice could Joseph give Jill to help her make a decision?
Please read the instrction and only answer QUESTION 8 WOULD BE FINE. I need it in ppt with 1-2 pages speaker notes,
This case, Wells Fargo Online Financial Services (A), will be completed as a group (with no more than four members). Your group will write up and present a case describing the development and implementation of a firm-level balanced scorecard. My reasoning for having you complete this exercise is that you must first clearly understand the business-level scorecard development process before you can effectively develop an HR (and/or Workforce) Scorecard.
This project is designed to be broad and fairly high level — it is not a project that is designed to focus your attention solely on metrics. Rather, it is designed to help you to begin to think strategically about the role of metrics and measurement systems in helping to implement strategy. So, if you are focusing all of your time on determining metrics — HR or otherwise — you’ve missed the spirit of the assignment.
INSTRUCTIONS
Start by reading the case very carefully. Then read it again. And then again.
Describe the OFS’s competitive strategy. What are its associated operational goals?
The case contains a partially completed strategy map. This map has been completed for you in the BHU book (page 35) and also in the handouts. Use the complete map as a basis for project.
Based on the provided strategy map, describe how OFS creates value for shareholders and other key constituencies? What are the “A” jobs at OFS? What does “A” performance look like in these “A” jobs?
Provide metrics for the elements that you believe to be most important across each of the four dimensions of the BSC (financial, customer, operational, and learning and growth). If possible, try and include objectives and initiatives with each measure (don’t worry about targets).
Which function will “own” each of the measures in your scorecard? That is, who will be responsible for collecting, validating, and presenting the data throughout the firm? How often should the data be updated? Will this vary by measure? Are the people responsible for collecting the data the same people responsible for driving the outcomes?
How will you communicate your measurement system throughout the firm? Who will need to be involved? How much time is likely to be required?
Measurement systems often highlight the performance of high and low performing managers and units. How will you roll out your measurement system and persuade (often) skeptical managers to use it? ONLY QUESTION 8
The Evolution of Management Broken Down
This is an article explaining the timeline of the Evolution of Management. The logic of changing
management styles is based on the intent of increasing the efficiency of workers and
organizations based on management practices, which is an outcome of careful observation.
1910s-1940s: Management as Science
Management as Science was developed in the early 20th century and focused on increasing
productivity and efficiency through standardization, division of labor, centralization and
hierarchy. A very ‘top down’ management with strict control over people and processes
dominated across industries.
1950s-1960s: Functional Organizations
Due to growing and more complex organizations, the 1950’s and 1960’s saw the emergence of
functional organizations and the Human Resource (HR) movement.
Managers began to understand the human factor in production and productivity and tools such as
goal setting, performance reviews and job descriptions were born.
1970s: Strategic Planning
In the 1970’s we changed our focus from measuring function to resource allocation and tools like
Strategic Planning (GE), Growth Share Matrix (BCG) and SWOT were used to formalize
strategic planning processes. After several decades of ‘best practice’ and ‘one size fits all’
solutions, academics began to developing contingency theories.
1980s: Competitive Advantage
As the business environment grew increasingly competitive and connected, and with a blooming
management consultancy industry, Competitive Advantage became a priority for organizations
in the 1980’s. Tools like Total Quality Management (TQM), Six Sigma and Lean were used to
measure processes and improve productivity. Employees were more involved by collecting data,
but decisions were still made at the top, and goals were used to manage people and maintain
control.
1990s: Process Optimization
Benchmarking and business process reengineering became popular in the 1990’s, and by the
middle of the decade, 60% of Fortune 500 companies claimed to have plans for or have already
initiated such projects. TQM, Six Sigma and Lean remained popular and a more holistic,
organization-wide approach and strategy implementation took the stage with tools such as
Strategy Maps and Balance Scorecards.
2000s: Big Data
Largely driven by the consulting industry under the banner of Big Data, organizations in the
2000’s started to focus on using technology for growth and value creation. Meanwhile,
oversaturation of existing market space drove to concepts such as Blue Ocean Strategy and
Value Innovation.
It’s 2013. Globalization, advances in technology and increased diversity have put organizational
challenges into hyper drive. Despite the inspirational stories we read about companies like
Zappos, Innocent Drinks and Google, the truth is that most of us are using outdated management
practices and failing to get the most out of our people. Not convinced? Consider this: 65% of
people are unhappy at work, only 14% understand their company’s strategy, and 75% are
seeking jobs as we speak. Now, what do you think that does for your bottom line?
How we lead our people and how we solve problems and innovate, are some of the most
important aspects of Management to get right. In our research, we’ve therefore looked
specifically at two aspects of Management throughout history, and how these will develop in the
future.
1. Management Approach: the style of top management, ranging from:
a. Control (i.e. your boss tells you what to do and how to do it).
b. Set Goals (i.e. your boss sets goals and expectations, but you have more freedom with regards
to how you achieve them).
c. Inspire (i.e. your boss gives you scope and freedom to innovate on both the what and the how).
2. Approach to Innovation / Problem Solving: how leaders solve strategic problems and
develop new products and services. This ranged from:
a. Top Down (i.e. solutions are created and come from the top)
b. Top Down with Bottom Up Data (i.e. the rest of the organization contributes information and
experiences, but solutions are still created at the top).
c. Participatory (i.e. solutions are created collaboratively, and throughout the organizational
levels).
After a century of trying to control people, processes and information, we have come to a point
in organizational history where we need to recognize that what worked before just simply isn’t
enough anymore. Traditional Management is fine if you want compliance, but if you want
innovation and growth, you need to engage your people on a whole new level. Top down control
is a thing of the past. Succeeding in today’s environment requires a management style that
inspires and is participatory.
Over the next couple of weeks I will discuss the future of organizations, and what it really takes
to increase value creation, innovation and employee engagement in today’s business
environment.
Questions:
1. Which decade do you believe impacted society the most from this article? Why?
2. What changes in management do you see in the next 10 years?
3. In the article there are two aspects of management (Management Approach, Approach to
Innovation/ Problem Solving). Reading the three different styles for each one (A,B,C),
which one would you choose? Why?
Read the article Foodservice operators expect labor and product shortages to continue What I like about this article it discusses aspects of restaurant or food service operations that many people don’t think about.Answer the following questions in a post and respond to at least one other student to get full credit. Your comment to another student must be of substance and not simply “I agree”.1. The article discusses various restaurant segments: health care, college and university, K-12, small and medium chains, and business and industry. Of these discussed, which segment’s challenge(s) surprised you the most and why?2. Pick a segment discussed (health care, college and university, K-12, small and medium chains, and business and industry) and provide two potential solutions for the challenges mentioned.
Purpose: To recall and utilize meal functions, menu planning, menu design, and pricing as well as beverage functions, beverage menu planning, and pricing. Task: Design a menu for a full-day meeting. Use the catering menu from attached file You will plan a menu for 300 attendees. Your menu must include: BreakfastMorning breakLunchAfternoon breakReception Dinner Please include/indicate the following: Determine the service style for each meal function (i.e. plated, buffet, action station, etc. – MUST be listed for each meal) Please list each item that will be included on the menu for each meal, including beverages.Prepare a budget for the menu selected. I want to see how much each meal is (for example breakfast is $5.95 per person x 300 = $1785.00) and then total the full menu up by meal/reception and then a grand total. Don’t forget to include tax and gratuity in your budget. For the purpose of this assignment, the tax is 12% and gratuity is 20%. Your budget for the full day should not exceed $75,000Your assignment must be done in Excel. If you don’t have excel
Unformatted Attachment Preview
REFRESHMENT BEVERAGES
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee
$80 per gallon
Fresh Brewed Espresso, Cappuccino, Latte
$6.50 each
Deluxe Herbal Teas
$80 per gallon
Fresh Brewed Iced Tea, Arnold Palmer, Lemonade
$68 per gallon
Orange Juice, Grapefruit Juice, Cranberry Juice
$68 per gallon
Individual Assorted Fruit Juices
$6.00/each
(Apple, Tomato, Cranberry, OJ, Grapefruit)
Milk
$15 per quart
(Whole, Skim, 2%, Almond or Soy)
Individual Chocolate Milk
$4.50 each
Assorted Coca Cola Soft Drinks
$5.00 each
M Bottled Water
$5.00 each
Smart Water
$6 each
Bottled Sparkling Water
$5 each
Assorted Vitamin Water
$6 each
Starbucks Frappuccino
$6 each
Starbucks Doubleshot
$6 each
Freshly Blended Protein Shake
$8 per person
(Choose Two Combinations of Chocolate, or Vanilla Whey Powder and Peanut Butter,
Raspberries, Strawberries, Blueberries, Blackberries or Mango)
Bottled Naked Juice Fruit Smoothies
$7 each
Energy Drinks
$6 each
Powerade
$6 each
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
1|P a ge
VILLAGGIO DEL SOLE BREAK ITEMS
Artisanal Breakfast Pastries
$50 per dozen
(Fruit Danish, Cheese Pockets, Bear Claws, Cinnamon Rolls, Apple Turnovers)
Assorted Miniature French Pastries
$50 per dozen
(Choose Four: Red Velvet Cupcakes, Chocolate Cake, Fruit Tarts, New York
Cheesecake, Banana Cream Pie, Peanut Butter Tart, Coconut Panna Cotta, Tropical
Passion Fruit Panna Cotta, Tiramisu Shooter and Pistachio-Raspberry Shooter)
Fresh Baked Croissants, Coffee Cake, Cinnamon Rolls
$50 per dozen
Soft Bagel Assortment (With Cream Cheese)
$50 per dozen
Assorted Freshly Baked Biscotti
$45 per dozen
Assorted Freshly Baked Muffins
$50 per dozen
(Banana Nut, Lemon-Blueberry, Raspberry, Chocolate Chip)
Assorted “Baby Cakes” Cupcakes (Large Size)
Assorted “Baby Cakes” Cupcakes (Miniature Size)
$50 per dozen
$38 per dozen
(Red Velvet, Chocolate-Orange, White on White, Chocolate Peanut Butter)
Assorted Freshly Baked Jumbo Gourmet Cookies
$50 per dozen
(Chocolate Chip, Peanut Butter, Oatmeal Raisin, Chocolate with White Chocolate Chips)
Dark Chocolate Dipped Rice Krispy Bars
$50 per dozen
Chocolate Dipped Pretzel Sticks
$40 per dozen
Assorted Tea Cookies (Shortbread, Pecan Sandies, Biscotti)
$45 per dozen
Double Chocolate Fudge Brownies, Blondies, Lemon Bars
$50 per dozen
White and Dark Chocolate Dipped Strawberries
$50 per dozen
Assorted Miniature Chocolates (requires 3-day preparation)
$40 per dozen
Assorted Cake Pops
$45 per dozen
Assorted French Macarons
$45 per dozen
Assorted Gourmet Ice Cream Bars or Fruit Bars
$6 each
Assorted Whole Seasonal Fruit
$4.50 per piece
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
2|P a ge
VILLAGGIO DEL SOLE BREAK ITEMS (CONTINUED)
Sliced Fruit Spears in a Rock Glass
$7 each
Fruit Skewers with Yogurt Dip
$6 each
Individual Yogurt
$5 each
Individual Greek Yogurt
$6 each
Fruit Yogurt and Granola Parfaits
$10 each
Granola, Candy Bars
$4 each
Power Bars and Energy Bars
$6 each
Individual Bags of Assorted Chips
$4 each
Individual Bags of Popcorn, Caramel Corn
$4 each
Warm Mini Pretzel Bites with Cheese Sauce & Honey Mustard Dipping Sauce
$25 per dozen
Mini Corn Dogs with Yellow Mustard & Ketchup
$25 per dozen
House-made Trail Mix
$38 per pound
Assorted Deluxe Mixed Nuts
$45 per pound
Bulk Assorted Chips and Cocktail Pretzels
$38 per pound
Deluxe Snack Mix
$45 per pound
Warm Jumbo Pretzels (Yellow Mustard or Cheese Dipping Sauce)
$50 per dozen
Assorted Mini Tea Sandwiches (choice of 3)
$50 per dozen
(Cucumber & Herb Cheese, Smoked Turkey & Cranberry, Black Forest Ham & Swiss,
Rare Roast Beef & Horseradish)
Assorted European Style Open Faced Finger Sandwiches (Choice of 3)
$60 per dozen
(Herb Grilled Chicken Breast with Boursin & Asparagus,
Grilled Shrimp with Serrano Ham, Piquillo Pepper Mayo
Smoked Salmon with Lemon Caper & Dill Cream Cheese)
Traditional Baba Ghanoush (Served in Rocks Glass)
$10 per person
With Pita Chips or Vegetables
Crudités with Hummus (Served in a Rocks Glass)
$10 per person
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
3|P a ge
BREAK PACKAGES
Break Packages are based on a 30 minute time period and require a minimum of 10 guests • Based on price per guest.
Movie Night
$15
Popcorn, Cracker Jacks, Assorted Bags of Chips & Assorted Candy
Sweet Tooth
$16
Assorted Cookies and Mini Doughnut Bites, Chocolate Crémeux, Coffee Anglaise,
Whipped Cream, Raspberry Sauce
Big Chill
$16
Frozen Grapes, Key Lime Mousse Shooters, Oreo Smoothie Shooters, and Eskimo Bars
Smoothies & More
$16
Strawberry-Banana or Seasonal Mixed Berries Smoothies,
Assorted French Pastries, Whole Fresh Seasonal Fruit
Sweet & Savory Factory
$16
Assorted Mixed Nuts, Deluxe Trail Mix, Cocktail Pretzels, Assorted Miniature Tea Cookies
M Signature Break
$16
Assorted Mini Cookies, Double Chocolate Fudge Brownies, Sliced Fresh Seasonal Fruit,
Ice Cream Cart with Assorted Ice Cream Bars
South of the Border
$16
Corn Tortilla Chips, Assortment of Salsas, Guacamole, Vegetable Empanadas,
Cinnamon Churros
Chocolate Fantasy
$17
Double Chocolate Fudge Brownies, Large Chocolate Chip Cookies,
Large White Chocolate Macadamia Nut Cookies, Dark Chocolate Dipped Rice Krispy Bars,
Hot Chocolate with Marshmallows (With Whole & Skim Milk)
7th Inning Stretch
$16
Mini Corn Dogs with Yellow Mustard & Ketchup,
Warm Jumbo Pretzels with Yellow Mustard & Cheese Dipping Sauce,
Bags of Popcorn & Cracker Jacks
Health Nut
$16
Fresh Seasonal Sliced Fruit & Berries, Granola & Energy Bars, Bran Muffins,
Housemade Trail Mix, Celery & Carrot Sticks with Hummus
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
4|P a ge
DAILY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES
To simplify your meeting needs, we offer specialized meeting break packages • Each package contains a breakfast,
mid-morning break, lunch and afternoon break • Minimum of 25 guests • For functions of less than 25 guests, $10/person
increase • Service provided for 90 minutes for breakfast and lunch breaks, and 30 minutes for morning and afternoon
breaks • Condiments to include Butter, Honey and Preserves • Beverages are only during specified time limit • Based on
price per guest. • Selections may not be split between two meal periods. Daily Packages are unable to be customized.
Pricing listed is for the day noted. If menu is selected on a different day, a $5/person additional charge will be applied.
MONDAY
$90
Breakfast
Fresh & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries,
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break -House-made Trail Mix and Rice Krispy Squares
Lunch
Chef’s Soup Selection of the Day
Mixed Greens & Hearts of Palm Salad, Selection of Dressings (V, VE, GF)
Cucumber & Tomato Salad, Yogurt Dill Dressing (V, VE, GF)
Maytag Bleu Cheese Coleslaw (V, GF)
Rotelli Pasta Salad (V, VE)
(Choice of Three)
Genoa Salami, Oven Roast Beef, Rotisserie Breast of Turkey, Pastrami, Smoked Ham,
Solid White Albacore Tuna with Chopped Onion & Pickle Relish, Waldorf Chicken Salad
Aged Cheddar, Jarlsberg, Provolone, Pepper Jack, Lettuce, Tomato, Sliced Onions, Mayonnaise,
Horseradish Aioli, Pommery & Dijon Mustards, Kosher Dill Pickles, Marinated Olives, Pepperoncini
with Assorted Rolls & Breads
Individual Bags of Assorted Chips
Double Chocolate Fudge Brownies, Assorted Gourmet Cookies
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Seasonal Whole Fresh Fruit, Warm Jumbo Pretzels with Yellow Mustard & Cheese Dipping Sauce
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
5|P a ge
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
TUESDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries,
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break
Granola and Energy Bars, Whole Fresh Seasonal Fruit
Lunch
Sun-Ripened Tomato & Basil Bisque (GF)
Antipasto with Hard Cheeses, Salami’s, Roasted Peppers
Assorted Marinated Olives & Grilled Vegetables with Fresh Basil Oil (V, VE, GF)
Baby Field Greens with Classic Italian Vinaigrette (V, VE, GF)
“M” Caprese Salad with Vine Ripe Yellow & Red Tomatoes, Fresh Mozzarella, EVOO & Basil (V, GF)
Wild Mushroom Ravioli, Pink Pomodoro Sauce, Grated Pecorino Romano Cheese
Grilled Chicken, Roasted Potatoes, Sautéed Rapini, Garlic, Red Pepper Flakes, White Wine Sauce
Pan Seared Wild Sea Bass, Olives, Roasted Garlic, Tomatoes, Lemon-Thyme Butter Sauce
Caponata alla Siciliana
Freshly Baked Rustic Ciabatta Rolls & Butter
Cannolis, Amaretto Cake
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Individually Wrapped Cheese Sticks, Assorted Freshly Baked Gourmet Cookies
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
6|P a ge
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
WEDNESDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries,
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break
Oatmeal Fruit Bars, Whole Seasonal Fresh Fruit
Lunch
Marinated Zucchini Salad, Chipotles (V, VE, GF)
Grilled Jicama & Pineapple Slaw, Oranges, Watercress (V, VE, GF)
Roasted Corn, Cumin, Lime, Oregano (V, VE, GF)
Tequila Lime Marinated Char Grilled Chicken
Steak Fajitas, Roasted Peppers, Caramelized Onions (GF)
Sautéed Seasonal Fresh Fajita Vegetables (V, VE, GF)
Refried Beans (GF)
Spanish Rice (GF)
Warm Flour Tortillas
Sour Cream, Guacamole
Cilantro, Lime, Queso Fresco
Blackened Tomato Salsa, Pico de Gallo, Tomatillo Salsa
Caramel Flan, Tres Leches Cake
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Blue & Yellow Corn Tortilla Chips, Blackened Tomato Salsa, Pico de Gallo, Tomatillo Salsa, (GF)
Warm Churros
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
7|P a ge
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
THURSDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries,
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break
Assorted Freshly Baked Muffins, Whole Seasonal Fruit
Lunch
Mixed Baby Greens, Balsamic Vinaigrette (V, VE, GF)
Cobb Salad, Turkey, Hard Boiled Egg, Bleu Cheese, Bacon, Tomato, Ranch Dressing (GF)
Hydroponic Watercress, Tomatoes, Red Onion, Avocado, Roasted Shallot-Balsamic Dressing (V, VE, GF)
Grilled Prime Flat Iron Steak, Heirloom Baby Carrots, Honey, Dill, Chianti Wine Sauce (GF)
Grilled Chicken Breast, Creamy Spinach, Parmesan, Wild Mushroom Marsala Sauce
Pan Roasted Salmon Filet, Rice Pilaf, Tomato Basil Emulsion (GF)
Roasted Garlic Whipped Potatoes (V, GF)
French Green Beans, Garlic, Shallots (V, VE, GF)
Assortment of French Pastries
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Rice Krispy Bars, Assortment of Individual Bag of Chips
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
8|P a ge
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
FRIDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break
Housemade Granola with Citrus Honey Yogurt, Biscotti
Lunch
Sante Fe Salad, Chopped Romaine Lettuce, Roasted Corn, Avocado, Jack Cheese (on the side), Jicama,
Grilled Pineapple, Chipotle Ranch (V, VE, GF)
Spinach Salad, Baby Spinach, Crumbled Goat Cheese, Dried Cranberries, Candied Walnuts,
Champagne Vinaigrette (V, GF)
Tortellini Pasta Salad, Roasted Vegetables with Sun-Dried Tomato Vinaigrette (V)
Rosemary Chicken Breast, Broccolini, Piquillo Peppers, Dijon Cream
Mahi Mahi Vera Cruz, Blistered Cherry Tomato, Caperberries, Queen Olives,
Marjoram Tomato Jus (GF)
Seared Beef Medallions, Grilled Portobello Mushrooms, Balsamic Reduction (GF)
Garlic & Thyme Roasted Heirloom Peewee Fingerling Potatoes (V, VE, GF)
Chef’s Selection of Farmer’s Market Vegetable (V, VE, GF)
Warm Seasonal Berry Cobbler with Vanilla Bean Ice Cream
Lemon Bars
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Fresh Fruit Skewers with Mint Yogurt and Milk Chocolate Dipping Sauces, Mixed Nuts
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
9|P a ge
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
SATURDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid Morning Break
Miniature Fruit, Yogurt and Granola Parfaits and Assorted Breakfast Breads
Lunch
Minestrone Soup (V, VE,)
Classic Caesar Salad ,Hearts of Romaine, Shaved Parmigiano-Reggiano, Toasted Garlic Croutons
“M” Caprese Salad with Vine Ripe Yellow & Red Tomatoes, Fresh Mozzarella, EVOO & Basil (V, GF)
Butternut Squash Filled Ravioli with a Pomodoro Sauce (V)
Chicken Marsala, Forest Mushrooms, Marsala Wine Reduction
Steak Pizziola, Chianti Braised Peppers & Cippolini Onions (GF)
Garlic Roasted Rapini, Dried Tomatoes (V, VE, GF)
Creamy Polenta, Mascarpone & Pecorino Cheese (V, GF)
Assortment of Individual Seasonal Pies
Miniature Berry Panna Cotta
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Chocolate Dipped Pretzel Rods, Lemon Bars
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
10 | P a g e
ALL DAY MEETING BREAK PACKAGES (CONTINUED)
SUNDAY
$95
Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed & Chilled Fruit Juices, Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries,
Assorted Individual Yogurts, Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries,
Choice of one of the Following:
Sausage, Egg and Cheese on an English Muffin
Ham, Egg and Cheese Croissant
Bacon, Egg and Cheese Biscuit
Bacon, Sausage or Chorizo Breakfast Burrito
Egg White Wrap (with peppers and mushrooms)
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Mid-Morning Break
Whole Fruit, Miniature Fluffernutter Sandwiches (Marshmallow Peanut Butter Sandwich on a Parker
Roll)
Lunch
Mediterranean Chopped Salad, Crisp Romaine Lettuce, Kalamata Olives, Feta Cheese (V, GF)
Roasted Red & Golden Beet Salad, Goat Cheese, Toasted Walnuts, Baby Arugula, White Balsamic
Dressing (V, GF)
Organic Red Quinoa Salad, Dried Cherries, Toasted Almonds, Edamame, Citrus Vinaigrette (V, VE, GF)
Herb Roasted Airline Chicken Breast, Provençale Vegetable Ragout (GF)
Pasta Primavera, Penne Pasta, Grilled Vegetables, Roasted Tomatoes, Herbed Garlic Oil (V, VE,)
Basil & Olive Crusted Chilean Sea Bass, Garlic Wilted Spinach (GF)
Yukon Gold Whipped Potatoes (V, GF)
Grilled Asparagus, Pine Nuts and Gremolata (V, VE, GF)
Fruit Tarts
Carrot Cake Squares
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Afternoon Break
Carrot & Celery Sticks with Hummus, Individual Bags of Assorted Chips
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
11 | P a g e
CONTINENTAL BREAKFASTS
Based on 90 minutes for a minimum of 10 guests • Less than 10 guests at an additional $5 per person • Served with M
Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas • Beverages are only during specified time limit •
Based on price per guest.
The Continental Breakfast
$28
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries, Muffins with Butter, Honey & Preserves
The Deluxe Continental Breakfast
$30
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries, Muffins with Butter, Honey & Preserves
Assorted Dry Cereals, Housemade Granola, Whole & Skim Milk
The Healthy Start Continental Breakfast
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Greek and Regular Yogurts
Chef’s Housemade Multi Grain Muffins, Low-Fat Spreads, Honey & Agave Nectar
Assorted Dry Cereals, Housemade Granola with Sliced Almonds, Whole & Skim Milk
Oatmeal, Raisins, Brown Sugar
$32
The M Continental Breakfast
$36
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Individual Yogurts
Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries, Muffins with Butter, Honey & Preserves
Assorted Dry Cereals, Housemade Granola, Whole & Skim Milk
Choice of One of the Following Breakfast Sandwiches:
Warm Breakfast Croissant Sandwich, Eggs, Country Ham, Swiss Cheese
Breakfast Burrito, Warm Tortilla, Scrambled Eggs, Crumbled Bacon, Cheddar Cheese, Scallions,
Salsa, Sour Cream, Hot Sauce
English Muffin, Scrambled Eggs, Sausage Patty, American Cheese
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
12 | P a g e
CONTINENTAL BREAKFAST ENHANCEMENTS
Warm Breakfast Croissant Sandwich
$72 per dozen
(Eggs, Country Ham, Swiss Cheese)
Breakfast Burrito
$72 per dozen
(Warm Tortilla, Scrambled Eggs, Crumbled Bacon, Cheddar Cheese, Scallions, Salsa,
Sour Cream, Hot Sauce)
English Muffin Breakfast Sandwich
$72 per dozen
(Scrambled Eggs, Sausage Patty, American Cheese)
Farm Fresh Eggs & Apple Wood Smoked Bacon
$12 per person
Fruit, Yogurt, & Granola Parfaits
$8 per person
Belgian Waffles served with Warm Maple Syrup, Whipped Cream,
Preserves and Butter
$10 per person
Buttermilk Pancakes or Buckwheat Pancakes Served with Warm Maple Syrup,
Whipped Cream, Preserves, and Butter
$10 per person
Cinnamon Scented Brioche French Toast
$10 per person
Steel Cut Irish Oatmeal
$8 per person
(Cinnamon, Brown Sugar, Agave Nectar, Raisins, Dried Cranberries)
Fresh Bagel Assortment
$50 per dozen
(With Regular & Low Fat Cream Cheese)
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
13 | P a g e
BREAKFAST BUFFETS
Based on 90 minutes for a minimum of 10 guests • Less than 10 guests at an additional $5 per person • Served with
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas • Beverages are only during specified
time limit • Based on price per guest • Selections may not be split between two meal periods. Enhancement of
Assorted Dried Cereals, Housemade Granola with Whole, Skim, Almond and/or Soy Milk – $3.00/person
American Breakfast Buffet
$42
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Individual Yogurts
Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries, Muffins with Butter, Honey & Preserves
Farm Fresh Scrambled Eggs, Garden Snipped Chives
Cinnamon Scented Brioche French Toast, Apple Raisin Compote, Vermont Maple Syrup, Butter
O’Brien Potatoes, Sautéed Peppers & Onions
Choice of Two of the Following Breakfast Meats:
Applewood Smoked Bacon, Turkey Sausage, Grilled Pork Link Sausage, Canadian Bacon,
Chicken Apple Sausage
Spa Mio Breakfast
$42
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Greek Yogurts
Dried Fruits, Whole Wheat Toast & Assorted Deluxe Mixed Nuts
Oatmeal, Banana, Raisins & Brown Sugar
Farm Fresh Scrambled Egg White Frittata, Olive Oil, Roasted Tomatoes, Garden Herbs
Whole Grain Pancakes, Berry Compote
Roasted Sweet Potatoes O’Brien
Turkey Bacon & Chicken-Apple Sausage
The M Breakfast Buffet
$42
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits & Berries
Assorted Individual Yogurts
Assortment of Freshly Baked Breakfast Pastries, Muffins with Butter, Honey & Preserves
Farm Fresh Scrambled Eggs & Chives
Traditional Hashbrowns
Buttermilk Pancakes or Belgian Waffles, Vermont Maple Syrup, Butter, Sliced Strawberries
Choice of Two of the Following Breakfast Meats:
Applewood Smoked Bacon, Turkey Sausage, Grilled Pork Link Sausage, Canadian Bacon,
Chicken Apple Sausage
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
14 | P a g e
BREAKFAST BUFFETS (CONTINUED)
Based on 90 minutes for a minimum of 10 guests • Less than 10 guests at an additional $5 per person • Served with
M Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas • Beverages are only during specified
time limit • Based on price per guest • Selections may not be split between two meal periods
.
South of the Border Breakfast Buffet
$42
Freshly Squeezed Orange, Grapefruit Juice & Assorted Chilled Fruit Juices
Sliced Seasonal Fruits and Berries
Freshly Baked Cornbread with Whipped Honey Butter and Preserves
Build Your Own Breakfast Burrito Station:
Choice of: Chorizo, Diced Ham or Bacon
Farm Fresh Scrambled Eggs, Flour Tortillas, Guacamole, Cilantro, Diced White Onion, Salsa Fresca,
Refried Beans, Tomatillo Salsa, Cheddar Cheese, Sour Cream, Hot Sauce
Traditional Huevos Rancheros
Chorizo and Pappas
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
15 | P a g e
BREAKFAST BUFFET ENHANCEMENTS
Addition to Your Breakfast Buffet. Must be part of an enhancement
*Uniformed Chef’s Required at Fee $225 For Carving & Action Stations
*Deluxe Omelet Station
$14 per person
Choice of Three of the Following:
Red & Green Bell Peppers, Wild Mushrooms, Caramelized Sweet Onions,
Asparagus, Scallions, Haas Avocado, Vine Ripe Tomato, Chives, Artichoke Hearts,
Farmers Market Spinach
Choice of 3 of the Following:
Gruyere, Monterey Jack, Aged Cheddar, Laura Chenel Goat Cheese,
Manchego, Provolone, Crumbled Feta
Choice of Two of the Following Breakfast Meats
Applewood Smoked Bacon, Chorizo Sausage, Saag’s Chicken Apple Sausage,
Housemade Fennel Sausage, Canadian Bacon
Santa Barbara Smokehouse Salmon
$16 per person
Sliced Red Onion, Vine Ripe Tomatoes, Capers, Lettuce, Assorted Bagels,
Regular Cream Cheese, Garlic-Chive Cream Cheese
Fresh Baked Breakfast Breads
$5 per person
Chef’s Selection of Sweet Breakfast Breads
(Banana-Nut Bread, Date-Nut Bread, Cinnamon-Raisin Brioche, Cranberry-Orange Bread)
Nutella, Housemade Apple Butter, Crunchy Almond Butter,
Vanilla-Orange Cream Cheese
*Eggs may be substituted with Egg Beaters for an additional charge of $2 per person
Eggs Benedict or Eggs Florentine
$10 per person
Creamy Hollandaise
Corned Beef Hash
$8 per person
Housemade, Shredded Potatoes, Diced Onion
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
16 | P a g e
PLATED LUNCHES
Minimum of 10 guests • Less than 10 guests at an additional $5 per person • Minimum Three (3) Course Luncheon Menu
to Include Your Choice of Soup or Salad, Entrée & Dessert • Served with M Signature Italian Roast Coffee,
Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas
Choice of One of the Following
Sweet Corn Soup
Lump Crab, Avocado, Corn Kernels, Chive Oil
$12
Chicken Noodle Soup
Chicken Breast, Celery, Carrots, Onion, Wavy Egg Noodles
$10
Silky Butternut Squash Bisque
Maple Cream, Toasted Hazelnuts
$12
Lobster Bisque
Creamy Lobster Bisque, Caramelized Fennel, Lobster Dumplings
$14
Lobster Bisque En Croute
Creamy Lobster Bisque, Caramelized Fennel, Lobster Dumplings, Flaky Pastry Crust
$16
San Marzano Tomato Bisque
Creamy Tomato Soup, Fried Basil, Mini Grilled Cheese
$12
San Marzano Tomato Bisque En Croute
Creamy Tomato Soup, Fried Basil, Flaky Pastry Crust
$14
Tuscan Minestrone
Garlic Confit, Swiss Chard, EVOO (V, VE,)
$10
Tri-Color Salad
Arugula, Radicchio, Endive, Oven Dried Tomatoes, Manchego Cheese,
Balsamic Reduction
$10
Roasted Artichoke Salad
Prosciutto, Peppers, Eggplant, Pecorino, Cherry Tomato Confit, Frisée
$13
Classic Caesar Salad
Hearts of Romaine, Herbed Croutons, Shaved Parmesan
$10
Baby Field Green Salad
Poached Pears, Maytag Bleu Cheese, Candied Pecans, Port Vinaigrette
$12
Spinach & Fennel Salad
Baby Spinach, Orange Segments, Shaved Fennel, Fresh Herbs, Citrus Emulsion
$10
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
17 | P a g e
PLATED LUNCHES (CONTINUED)
Baby BLT Salad
Baby Iceberg Wedge, Shaved Red Onion, Heirloom Cherry Tomatoes,
Crisp Smoked Bacon, Buttermilk Dressing
$12
Caprese Salad
Fresh Mozzarella, Vine Ripe Tomatoes, Baby Arugula, Herb Oil, Balsamic Reduction
$12
Choice of One of the Following
Rosemary Roasted Free-Range Breast of Chicken
Grilled Asparagus, Tarragon Oil, Soft Mushroom Polenta, Natural Chicken Jus
$26
Chicken Saltimbocca
Parmesan Risotto, Broccolini, Lemon, Garlic, Red Chili Flakes
$26
Chicken Wellington
Julienne Vegetables, Truffle Red Wine Sauce
$28
Chicken Breast Dijonnaise
Potato Gratin, Seasonal Greens, Mustard Sauce
$26
Grilled Petit Filet
Roasted Sweet Potatoes, Wild Mushroom Ragout, Pink Peppercorn Sauce
$36
Braised Short Rib
Truffled Potato Fondant, Roasted Root Vegetables, Red Wine Jus
$34
Roasted Pork Loin
Granny Smith Apple & Vanilla Bean Chutney, Mashed Maple Yams,
Root Vegetable Fricassee
$30
Veal Scaloppini
Marsala Mushroom Sauce, Garlic Broccolini, Sage-Mascarpone Polenta
$38
Pan Roasted Wild Sea Bass
Grilled Tomatoes Provencal, Beurre Blanc, Roasted Garlic, Oven Roasted Potatoes,
Herbs, Onions
$42
Grilled Mahi Mahi
Macadamia Butter, Coconut Rice, Baby Bok Choy, Shitake Mushrooms,
Dried Tomatoes
$40
Pacific Seared Salmon
Haricot Vert & Artichoke Fricassee, Potato Rosti, Dried Tomato Vinaigrette
$40
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
18 | P a g e
PLATED LUNCHES (CONTINUED)
Stuffed Prawns
King Crab Stuffed Black Tiger Prawns, Farmers Market Spinach,
Gratin Dauphinoise, Passion Fruit Beurre Blanc
$42
Choice of One of the Following
$10 each
Tiramisu “M” Style
Double Layer Chocolate Brownie
Salted Caramel Sauce
“M” Signature Cheesecake or No Sugar Cheesecake
Raspberry Sauce, Fresh Seasonal Berries
Citrus Scented Crème Brûlée
Fresh Seasonal Berries
Warm Chocolate Lava
Vanilla Sauce
Fresh Baked Apple Pie
Vanilla Anglaise
Banana Bread Pudding
Rum Raisin Sauce
Strawberry Shortcake
Farmer’s Market Strawberries, Angel Food Cake, Fresh Whipped Cream
Exotic Chocolate Dome
Raspberry Sauce
Key Lime Tart
Vanilla Sable, Raspberry Sauce, Fresh Seasonal Berries
“M” Chocolate Cake
Hazelnut Mousse
Fresh Seasonal Fruit Tart
Vanilla Bean Custard, Sable Crust
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
19 | P a g e
LUNCH ON THE GO SELECTIONS
All selections include an individual bag of chips, a piece of whole fresh fruit,
a freshly baked cookie and a bottle of water • Served with appropriate condiments on the side • Request for a
“dismantled” lunch (set buffet style) $5.00 increase per person
LUNCH ON THE GO SELECTION
$40
Choice of up to Three of the Following:
Classic Chicken Caesar Wrap
Chunks of Freshly Prepared Chicken Breast, Romaine Lettuce, Grated Parmesan Cheese,
Classic Caesar Dressing, Whole Wheat Tortilla
Roasted Vegetable Wrap (V)
Grilled & Marinated Seasonal Vegetables, Pesto Aioli, Spinach Tortilla
Turkey Sandwich
Premium Turkey, Provolone Cheese, Iceberg Lettuce, Tomato, Onion, Freshly Baked Kaiser Bun
Ham & Swiss Sandwich
Classic Ham, Swiss Cheese, Freshly Baked Hoagie Roll
Italian Sub Sandwich
Genoa Salami, Mortadella, Fresh Mozzarella, Roasted Sweet Peppers, Freshly Baked Hoagie Roll
Roast Beef Sandwich
Premium Roast Beef, Provolone Cheese, Lettuce, Onion, Tomato, Freshly Baked Kaiser Bun
Southwest Chicken Wrap
Grilled Marinated Chicken Breast, Crisp Romaine Lettuce, Jalapeno Jack Cheese, Chipotle Mayo,
Avocado, Flour Tortilla
Vegan Lettuce Wrap (V, VE,GF)
Green Leaf Lettuce with a Roasted Tomato Hummus, Grilled Julienne Vegetables of Portobello Mushroom,
Zucchini, Yellow squash, Eggplant, and Roasted Red Peppers and Tofu.
Food & Beverage prices are subject to change and do not include current Nevada sales tax and 23% service charge.
Pricing can be guaranteed up to three (3) months in advance.
Jan 17, 2020
20 | P a g e
LUNCH BUFFETS
Based on 90 minutes for a minimum of 25 guests • Less than 25 guests at an additional $10 per person • Served with M
Signature Italian Roast Coffee, Decaffeinated Coffee, Deluxe Herbal Teas • Freshly Baked Rolls & Butter •
Based on price per guest. • Selections may not be split between two meal periods
SOUP, SALAD & SANDWICH BUFFET
$46
Chef’s Selection of Soup Du Jour
Choice of Three of the Following Entrée Salads:
Mixed Green Salad (V, VE, GF)
Tomato, Cucumber, Red Onion, Sprouts, Croutons, Assorted Salad Toppings, Choice of Dressing
Rigatoni Pasta Salad (V, VE, GF)
Grilled Vegetables, Sun-Dried Tomatoes, Pine Nuts, Pesto
Caesar Salad (V,)
Hearts of Romaine, Shaved Parmigiano-Reggiano, Toasted Garlic Croutons
Italian Chopped Salad (GF)
Iceberg & Romaine Lettuce, Genoa Salami, Mozzarella, Tomato, Hard Boiled Egg,
Pepperoncini, Balsamic Vinaigrette
Cobb Salad
Tomato, Avocado, Egg, Maytag Bleu Cheese, Turkey, Applewood Smoked Bacon
Greek Salad
Tomato, Cucumber, Feta Cheese, Kalamata Olives
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1
Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction, personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2
Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:-
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3.How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative. (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your answers on the basis of your understanding.
4.Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks, goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task, goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
5.Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN: 11206
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdullah Bubshait
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
1. Go to the following page – https://lookerstudio.google.com/u/0/reporting/1b28ce21-77f8-4478-bcc8-edf3f63443ea/page/DjD
2. Follow the instructions all the way through the exercise and name your dashboards and charts with your last name, always do this.
3. Generate a downloadable PDF file of your dashboards in Looker Data Studio and upload it to this assignment.
4. Generate a sharable Link to your Looker Studio report and include it in the comments with your upload.
ALTERNATE ASSIGNMENT
Introduction:
Google Looker Studio: Looker is a data visualization tool that allows the user to look at data from different sources (including outside GA4) and visualize it on various dashboards. See https://lookerstudio.google.com/u/0/navigation/reporting.
Start with a blank report and connect the data from various sources using the “connectors” that are available.
For the purposes of this short introduction to Looker, choose the Google Analytics connector. Based on your account permissions, you will be shown a list of properties you can connect to, pick the Google DEMO (GA4). You can now add data from the Google DEMO to the Looker Studio dashboards you are building. A sample table is added, but we will delete it and start afresh.
Start by adding a table or chart, click on those from the top navigation (graphics), and you will be shown several options. Let’s create a table of the most popular pages. Modifying the table will be very similar to working with an exploration.
Create a simple table with a couple of metrics, such as views, sessions, and total users, but you can also pick other metrics.
Copy the table (Control+C), then paste. Change the style of the copied chart to a time series or any other type you wish.
Add a dashboard (sessions is the default), copy the dashboard, and change the metric to total users. Add the previous reporting period to both dashboards to show the percent change from the previous period.
Copy both dashboards change them into spark charts, and get rid of the previous period comparison.
Change the style using Theme and Layout in the top menu.
Add additional pages (you can add several pages if needed), change the name to page 1 and page 2, etc., or give them names.
Preview the report (eye icon in upper right).
You can export the data as a PDF file once you’re happy.
Export the report (Dashboard) you created to a PDF file and upload it to the Looker CH7 assignment upload.
CO7: Develop problem-solving skills and understand sourcing and global logistics ideas
CO8: Compose the results of operations and case studies effectively in writing the results of operations analysis and case studies
Prompt:
This dual-case assignment covers sustainment and global supply chain decision-making, respectively. The first case analyzes sustainment decision making. The second case analyzes global supply chain decision making. After reviewing each case, analyze and respond to the following questions from both cases:
Sustainment:
1. What are the payback periods for the lawn-to-prairie conversion project, the dock blankets, the T-9 lighting fixtures, and the storm water project?
2. Calculate the Net Present Value of the storm water project, given the financial information in the case
3. Evaluate the Pros and Cons of the storm water project both on financial and non-financial grounds and make a recommendation on what Richard Murphy should decide
4. What are the advantages and disadvantages of pursuing LEED, Energy Star, and ISO 14000 certifications?
Global Supply Chain Decision Making:
5. What are the key operations and logistics issues faced by ShelterBox?
6. Who are the various stakeholders that need to be considered in resolving these issues?
7. How should ShelterBox respond to the issues it faces to best satisfy its stakeholders?
8. How do you think ShelterBox should be organized? What are the key responsibilities and functions and processes that need to be established before and during an emergency?
Instructions:
Send your response to both cases in the same one Word document. Do not send in two papers!
The paper should be at least 1,500-words
The paper should be APA-compliant paper comprising your response.
Feel free to emphasize one case over the other, but make sure you answer the questions thoroughly
Minimum 5 full pages of content (Word Document) of strategic material (does not include cover page, abstract, nor reference pages)
All charts, graphs, pictures are to go in the appendix (not a substitute for content)
The paper must provide inline citations to at least five scholarly sources supporting your paper
Refrain from excessive use of quotes in your response (less than 5%)
Once you submit your document to the assignment folder it will automatically be loaded to TURNITIN.COM within the course. Your similarity scan score must be 20% or less (the following will be excluded: headers, bibliography, etc. prior to instructor grading paper—focus on the content of scan percentage
Plagiarism will result in an automatic zero for this assignment
Use data and Excel tool to complete two problems. Show works in excel, and complete the doc, which consists of two multi-question problems.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Name: ________________________________________________________________
Midterm Exam: DESC656
Spring Trimester, 2023
Excel tools and data should be used to complete the exam
problems.
Please save your answers as a PDF and submit using the
Assignments link.
Problem 1.
Using the data set on the Excel regression tool provided, create a regression model
capable of forecasting 5-year average return (DV) of a mutual fund with expense
ratio, net asset value, and Morningstar rank. Morningstar rank has been recoded
into an indicator variable. (2 and 3 star ranks are coded 0, 4 and 5 star ranks are
coded 1).
a. Examine the effects of each independent variable (IV) on the dependent
variable. If you had to select only one IV, what would it be?
b. Using all 3 IVs, what is your % of explained variability?
c. What is the regression equation, using all 3 IVs, to predict 5-year average
return?
d. Using all 3 IVs: Your particular fund has a star ranking of 4-star (coded 1), a
net asset value of 68.11, and an expense ratio of .63. Estimate your 5-year
average return with 95% confidence.
e. Using all 3 IVs: What is your estimate of the mean 5-year average return for
all funds as described in part d (4-star, NAV 68.11, expense ratio .63)? Use
95% confidence.
f. Using all 3 IVs: Is this model significant overall? Be sure to support your
answer with specific results.
g. Remove any insignificant variables. What variables did you remove? What
variable(s) is/are left?
h. After removing all insignificant variables, do you suspect any problems due
to collinearity? Yes/No. Briefly explain.
Problem 2. Remember, you may use the exam Excel tools (and anything in our
Sakai course).
A company is planning a plant expansion. They can build a large or small plant. The
payoffs for the plant depend on the level of consumer demand for the company’s
products. For the large plant, the company expects $85 million in profit if demand is
high and $35 million if demand is low. For the small plant, the company expects $54
million in profit if demand is high and $19 million if demand is low.
The company believes that there is a 72% chance that demand for their products
will be high and a 28% chance that it will be low.
Construct a payoff matrix based on the given information. Remember, you may use
the exam Excel tools
Payoff
What is the decision according to the EMV criterion? What is the MAX EMV?
What is the EVPI and what does this indicate? What does it suggest about this
decision being made?
Is your decision above ‘sensitive’ to the probability of HIGH demand? In other
words, would your decision change if the probability of HIGH demand were less?
Yes/No. Briefly explain and support your answer.
The company may conduct a survey to make a better prediction of demand for their
products. The following probability information has been provided regrading
survey outcomes that might help to predict the probability of demand.
Favorable
Unfavorable
Total
High Demand
.66
.06
.72
Low Demand
.10
.18
.28
Total
.76
.24
1
Using these probabilities and the payoffs, complete the decision tree model in your
Excel file. Input the correct information into the GREEN cells. The spreadsheet
will calculate all EMVs for you once you input the needed information.
Please add a screen shot of your completed tree here:
What would be the EMV assuming that the survey is done? How does this EMV
compare to your MAX EMV on the payoff table, that is, the EMV without the survey?
Should the market research firm be hired at a cost of $100,000? Is the survey
helpful in this case? Be sure to support your answer with specific results from your
models.
payoff
Plant
Large
Small
Payoff Matrix
Demand
High
Low
Probability
Large
Small
Max
0
0
Min
0
0
Min
0
0
EOL
0
0
EVwPI
0
EVoPI
0
1
High
0
0
Regret Matrix
Low
0
0
EVPI
MAX
0.0
0.0
Page 1
EMV
High Demand
Low Demand
Total
Favorable
Unfavorable
Total
Column Conditional Distributions
Total
Row Conditional Distributions
Total
Survey
Favorable
Prob
MAX
0
Do Survey
EMV
0
Unfavorable
Prob
MAX
0
Size
Demand
Payoffs
High
Large
EMV
Prob
0
Low
Prob
High
Small
EMV
Prob
0
Low
Prob
High
Large
EMV
Prob
0
Low
Prob
High
Small
EMV
Prob
0
Low
Prob
1
NAV
2.6
19.47
16.45
12.1
12.51
11.02
13.23
10.95
10.56
23.59
40.37
46.39
24.94
28.88
32.26
54.83
32.12
45.6
35.41
42.45
17.44
15.3
31.92
37.53
16.92
35.73
31.07
49.81
50.67
22.46
13.47
36.58
15.29
24.32
68.54
31.86
13.44
32.58
23.71
48.39
2
Exp Rat
0.45
0.16
0.33
0.58
0.41
0.49
0.45
0.62
0.6
1.1
1.05
1.03
0.97
0.67
0.9
0.86
0.29
0.89
1.29
0.56
1.31
1.32
1.08
1.27
1.18
1.2
1.01
1.44
1.31
0.8
0.53
1.08
1.02
1.32
0.89
1
1.25
0.23
0.64
0.9
3
Morning *
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
4
5-yr
3.49
3.78
4.25
4.31
4.31
4.34
4.41
4.63
5.14
10.47
11.23
12.09
12.32
12.39
12.81
12.99
13.41
13.5
13.98
14.4
15.16
15.31
15.33
15.46
15.67
15.85
15.91
16.7
16.77
16.91
17.23
17.23
17.25
17.77
17.99
18.23
21.35
19.63
21.77
23.46
5
6
7
26.27
25.52
27.86
14.37
53.89
1.36
1.23
1.16
2.1
1.38
1
0
0
0
1
23.68
24.95
32.7
43.27
55.27
8
9
10
Input Column Number
Simple Linear Regression
I.V. (x)
D.V. (y)
Multiple Regression
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
DV (y)
Simple Linear Regression
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0
50
100
Regression Equation: Predicted y = slope (x) + intercep
Slope
Intercept
r2
Mean X
Std. Dev. X
Regression Standard Error
s
150
200
250
n: Predicted y = slope (x) + intercept
if x =
y-hat =
r
Mean Y
Std. Dev. Y
Number of Observations
n
0
Inference for Simple Regression
Confidence Interval for Slope
1-a
Slope
±
±
95%
t * SEb 1
=
=
Significance Test for Slope
Test Stat (t)
Null Hypothesis
Ho: b 1 = 0
Alternative Hypothesis
Ha: b 1 not = 0
p -value
Confidence Interval for Mean Response
1-a
95%
if X
y-hat
±
±
t * SE
y-hat
±
±
t * SE
SS
df
MS
F
0
0
Prediction Interval for Single Observation
1-a
95%
if X
ANOVA Test
Source
Regression
Residuals
Total
Interval
=
=
Interval
=
=
Interval
p -value
Residual Analysis and Outlier Screening (Simple)
y-hat
NQ Plot
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
Residuals
Residual Plot
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
Residuals
Residuals
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
X
0.8
1
Standardized
1.2
Multiple Regression Data
X Variables must be sequential and begin with X1
x1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x2
x3
x4
x5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
y
Inference for Multiple Regression
R2
Adjusted R 2
Standard Error
Y Intercept
Signifcance Tests of Slopes
slope (b )
SE (b )
ANOVA Test of Model Signifcance
Source
SS
df
Regression
Residuals
Total
0
0
t-stat
MS
#DIV/0!
Correlation Matrix: Collinearity Check
Forecasting with Regression Equation
95%
Prediction
Confidence
y-hat
+/- ME
Interval
tiple Regression
p-value
F
Interval
Confidence Interval 95%
p -value
Residual Analysis and Outlier Screening (Multiple)
y-hat
NQ Plot
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
Residuals
Residual Plot
1
0.9
0.8
Residual
Residuals
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
Predicted y
0.8
1
Standardized
1
1.2
Based on the Evolution of the Manager graphic, these are the key things to pay attention to.
Managers must be leaders
There’s a constant debate around whether we need more managers or more leaders. Sadly this
is a fruitless debate that artificially pits the two against each other. When thinking about the
future of work managers MUST be leaders. That is, they are placed in a position of power
because they have earned followers, thought leadership, and respect. If a manager is simply
placed in a position of power because they are able to bring in the most money or are experts at
delegating then they will fail. It’s time we stop referring to managers and leaders as two
separate people. If you haven’t earned leadership then you shouldn’t be a manager.
Managers must embrace vulnerability
We can no longer have managers in the workplace that resemble robots. It’s bad enough that
there is quite a bit of concern around actual robots taking jobs away from humans, the last thing
we need are humans that act like robots. It makes me think of the saying, “I’m not a doctor but I
play one on t.v.” – applied to managers this would be “I’m not a robot but I play one in the
workplace.” Brene Brown said it best when she quipped that there is no innovation without
vulnerability. This is because people want to build relationships with other…people. This
requires trust and a human connection. When managers put up a wall of being stoic, allknowing, emotionless beings, they kill off any hope of innovation, trust, and connection.
Managers embracing vulnerability in the workplace isn’t important because it’s a nice thing to do
but because it’s crucial for effective communication, collaboration, and innovation.
Managers must challenge convention
Why is it that we constantly hear about managers that are “putting out fires?” Managers must be
the fire-starters! That is, they must be constantly thinking of ways that they can challenge the
assumptions that we have around how work gets done. Should managers make all the
decisions? Do we need annual employee reviews? Can anyone in the company be a leader?
Should innovation be a core skill taught to all employees? Can the organization set up a pool of
experimental capital that can be used to test out new ideas? These are the types of questions
and ideas that managers should be thinking about. Today, their stereotypical role focuses on
constraint, control, order, diligence, and sticking with the common assumptions that have long
guided how we work. Instead, managers must heed the word of the band Prodigy to become
“fire-starters.” Managers of the future are very different than managers of the past, they must
evolve.
Questions:
Have managers always been leaders? Why or why not?
Should a manager be unemotional or someone that embraces vulnerability? Why or why not?
Should everyone support each other or should the manager just get support from the
employees?
Do you feel that management has evolved into a more compassionate arrangement in the past
10 years?
Compose a concise 1-2 page paper, utilizing double-spacing, that centers around one of the two following options:
Select a prominent topic with significant implications for business managers, and propose transformative strategies that managers could implement.
Share the most intriguing insights you’ve uncovered thus far regarding the Evolution of Management.
To enhance the depth of your paper, include references from reputable sources, totaling 2 references per paper, all formatted according to APA guidelines. Please be mindful not to exceed the 2-page limit.
Your efforts and contributions are greatly anticipated!
Write a 1-2 page paper, double-spaced, surrounding one of the following:
1. Choose a popular topic that impacts managers in business and tell me how managers could change it.
2. What is the most interesting information about the Evolution of Management you have found thus far?
I expect 2 references in APA format on each paper. Please do not write more than 2 pages.
in text situation for each answer, you have to mention the resources in the same line answer avoid plagiarism it’s required add a minimum of 7 references at the end of the assignment. write in your won word I required
Milton Friedman’s (1970) essay on “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits” has long been cited by managers, politicians, and business scholars alike to argue against various forms of social responsibilities of businesses.
(1) Engage with Friedman’s arguments by reading his famous essay and summarize his main lines of argument:
Why, according to Friedman, should the social responsibility of business be to increase its profits?
Internet: please see article 1 attached
In the 50 years since the publication, the public debate as well as our understanding of society and business has moved on. On the 50th anniversary of Friedman’s essay, in Sep. 2020, The New York Times published a piece with a series of responses to Friedman.
(2) Engage with these thoughts to collect and systematically arrange arguments:
Why might businesses have other responsibilities than increasing their profits?
(You can find the responses here: Second Article please see attachemnt
Make use of supplemental material as well as examples/cases, to demonstrate your arguments.
Submission Guidelines
Maximum = 2 pages. References are not counted in this page limit.
Single-spaced within paragraphs and double-spaced between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch margins and 12-point font (enforced).
Cite your relevant sources in APA citation and referencing format (this refers only to the citations/references, not the paper writing style)
This assignment uses TurnitIn, a plagiarism checker to help you verify the authenticity of your work
Unformatted Attachment Preview
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-thesocial-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility
of Business Is to Increase Its Profits
By Milton Friedman
Sept. 13, 1970
See the article in its original context from
September 13, 1970, Section SM, Page 17 Buy Reprints
New York Times subscribers* enjoy full access to
TimesMachine—view over 150 years of New
York Times journalism, as it originally appeared.
SUBSCRIBE
*Does not include Crossword-only or
Cooking-only subscribers.
About the Archive
This is a digitized version of an article from The Times’s print archive, before the start of online
publication in 1996. To preserve these articles as they originally appeared, The Times does not alter,
edit or update them.
Occasionally the digitization process introduces transcription errors or other problems; we are
continuing to work to improve these archived versions.
WHEN I hear businessmen speak eloquently about the “social responsibilities of
business in a free‐enterprise system,” I am reminded of the wonderful line about
the Frenchman who discovered at, the age of 70 that he had been speaking prose
all his life. The businessmen believe that they are defending free enterprise when
they declaim that business is not concerned “merely” with profit but also with
promoting desirable “social” ends; that business has a “social conscience” and
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
1/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
takes seriously its responsibilities for providing employment, eliminating
discrimination, avoiding pollution and whatever else may be the catchwords of the
contemporary crop of reformers. In fact they are—or would be if they or any one
else took them seriously— preaching pure and unadulterated socialism.
Businessmen who talk this way are unwitting puppets of the intellectual forces that
have been undermining the basis of a free society these past decades.
The discussions of the “social responsibilities of business” are notable for their
analytical looseness and lack of rigor. What does it mean to say that “business” has
responsibilities? Only people can have responsibilities. A corporation is an artificial
person and in this sense may have artificial responsibilities, but “business” as a
whole cannot be said to have responsibilities, even in this vague sense. The first
step toward clarity in examining the doctrine of the social responsibility of
business is to ask precisely what it implies for whom.
Presumably, the individuals who are to be responsible are businessmen, which
means individual proprietors or corporate executives. Most of the discussion of
social responsibility is directed at corporations, so in what follows I shall mostly
neglect the individual proprietor and speak of corporate executives.
IN a free‐enterprise, private‐property system, a corporate executive is an employe
of the owners of the business. He has direct responsibility to his employers. That
responsibility is to conduct the business in accordance with their desires, which
generally will be to make as much money as possible while conforming to the basic
rules of the society, both those embodied in law and those embodied in ethical
custom. Of course, in some cases his employers may have a different objective. A
group of persons might establish a corporation for an eleemosynary purpose—for
example, a hospital or school. The manager of such a corporation will not have
money profit as his objective but the rendering of certain services.
In either case, the key point is that, in his capacity as a corporate executive, the
manager is the agent of the individuals who own the corporation or establish the
eleemosynary institution, and his primary responsibility is to them.
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
2/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
Needless to say, this does not mean that it is easy to judge how well he is
performing his task. But at least the criterion of performance is straightforward,
and the persons among whom a voluntary contractual arrangement exists are
clearly defined.
Of course, the corporate executive is also a person in his own right. As a person, he
may have many other responsibilities that he recognizes or assumes voluntarily—
to his family, his conscience, his feelings of charity, his church, his clubs, his city, his
country. He may feel impelled by these responsibilities to devote part of his income
to causes he regards as worthy, to refuse to work for particular corporations, even
to leave his job, for example, to join his country’s armed forces. If we wish, we may
refer to some of these responsibilities as “social responsibilities.” But in these
respects he is acting as a principal, not an agent; he is spending his own money or
time or energy, not the money of his employers or the time or energy he has
contracted to devote to their purposes. If these are “social responsibilities,” they
are the social responsibilities of individuals, not of business.
What does it mean to say that the corporate executive has a “social responsibility”
in his capacity as businessman? If this statement is not pure rhetoric, it must mean
that he is to act in some way that is not in the interest of his employers. For
example, that he is to refrain from increasing the price of the product in order to
contribute to the social objective of preventing inflation, even though a price
increase would be in the best interests of the corporation. Or that he is to make
expenditures on reducing pollution beyond the amount that is in the best interests
of the corporation or that is required by law in order to contribute to the social
objective of improving the en vironment. Or that, at the expense of corporate
profits, he is to hire “hard core” unemployed instead of better qualified available
workmen to contribute to the social objective of reducing poverty.
In each of these cases, the corporate executive would be spending someone else’s
money for a general social interest. Insofar as his actions in accord with his “social
responsibility” reduce returns to stock holders, he is spending their money. Insofar
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
3/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
as his actions raise the price to customers, he is spending the customers’ money.
Insofar as his actions lower the wages of some employes, he is spending their
money.
The stockholders or the customers or the employes could separately spend their
own money on the particular action if they wished to do so. The executive is
exercising a distinct “social responsibility,” rather than serving as an agent of the
stockholders or the customers or the employes, only if he spends the money in a
different way than they would have spent it.
But if he does this, he is in effect imposing taxes, on the one hand, and deciding
how the tax proceeds shall be spent, on the other.
This process raises political questions on two levels: principle and consequences.
On the level of political principle, the imposition of taxes and the expenditure of tax
proceeds are governmental functions. We have established elaborate
constitutional, parliamentary and judicial provisions to control these functions, to
assure that taxes are imposed so far as possible in accordance with the preferences
and desires of the public— after all, “taxation without representation” was one of
the battle cries of the American Revolution. We have a system of checks and
balances to separate the legislative function of imposing taxes and enacting
expenditures from the executive function of collecting taxes and administering
expenditure programs and from the judicial function of mediating disputes and
interpreting the law.
Here the businessman—self‐selected or appointed directly or indirectly by
stockholders—is to be simultaneously legislator, executive and jurist. He is to
decide whom to tax by how much and for what purpose, and he is to spend the
proceeds—all this guided only by general exhortations from on high to restrain
inflation, improve the environment, fight poverty and so on and on.
The whole justification for permitting the corporate executive to be selected by the
stockholders is that the executive is an agent serving the interests of his principal.
This justification disappears when the corporate executive imposes taxes and
spends the proceeds for “social” purposes. He becomes in effect a public employe, a
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
4/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
civil servant, even though he remains in name an employe of private enterprise.
On grounds of political principle, it is intolerable that such civil servants—insofar
as their actions in the name of social responsibility are real and not just window‐
dressing—should be selected as they are now. If they are to be civil servants, then
they must be selected through a political process. If they are to impose taxes and
make expenditures to foster “social” objectives, then political machinery must be
set up to guide the assessment of taxes and to determine through a political
process the objectives to be served.
This is the basic reason why the doctrine of “social responsibility” involves the
acceptance of the socialist view that political mechanisms, not market
mechanisms, are the appropriate way to determine the allocation of scarce
resources to alternative uses.
ON the grounds of consequences, can the corporate executive in fact discharge his
alleged “social responsibilities”? On the one hand, suppose he could get away with
spending the stockholders’ or customers’ or employes’ money. How is he to know
how to spend it? He is told that he must contribute to fighting inflation. How is he
to know what action of his will contribute to that end? He is presumably an expert
in running his company—in producing a product or selling it or financing it. But
nothing about his selection makes him an expert on inflation. Will his holding down
the price of his product reduce inflationary pressure? Or, by leaving more spending
power in the hands of his customers, simply divert it elsewhere? Or, by forcing him
to produce less because of the lower price, will it simply contribute to shortages?
Even if he could answer these questions, how much cost is he justified in imposing
on his stockholders, customers and employes for this social purpose? What is his
appropriate share and what is the appropriate share of others?
And, whether he wants to or not, can he get away with spending his stockholders,
customers’ or employes’ money? Will not the stockholders fire him? (Either the
present ones or those who take over when his actions in the name of social
responsibility have reduced the corporation’s profits and the price of its stock.) His
customers and his employes can desert him for other producers and employers
less scrupulous in exercising their social responsibilities.
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
5/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
This facet of “social responsibility” doctrine is brought into sharp relief when the
doctrine is used to justify wage restraint by trade unions. The conflict of interest is
naked and clear when union officals are asked to subordinate the interest of their
members to some more general social purpose. If the union officials try to enforce
wage restraint, the consequence is likely to be wildcat strikes, rank‐and‐file revolts
and the emergence of strong competitors for their jobs. We thus have the ironic
phenomenon that union leaders—at least in the U.S. —have objected to
Government interference with the market far more consistently and courageously
than have business leaders.
The difficulty of exercising “social responsibility” illustrates, of course, the great
virtue of private competitive enterprise — it forces people to be responsible for
their own actions and makes it difficult for them to “exploit” other people for either
selfish or unselfish purposes. They can do good—but only at their own expense.
Many a reader who has followed the argument this far may be tempted to
remonstrate that it is all well and good to speak of government’s having the
responsibility to impose taxes and determine expenditures for such “social”
purposes as controlling pollution or training the hard‐core unemployed, but that
the problems are too urgent to wait on the slow course of political processes, that
the exercise of social responsibility by businessmen is a quicker and surer way to
solve pressing current problems.
Aside from the question of fact—I share Adam Smith’s skepticism about the
benefits that can be expected from “those who affected to trade for the public
good”—this argument must be rejected on grounds of principle. What it amounts to
is an assertion that those who favor the taxes and expenditures in question have
failed to persuade a majority of their fellow citizens to be of like mind and that they
are seeking to attain by undemocratic procedures what they cannot attain by
democratic procedures. In a free society, it is hard for “good” people to do “good,”
but that is a small price to pay for making it hard for “evil” people to do “evil,”
especially since one man’s good is anther’s evil.
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
6/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
I HAVE, for simplicity, concentrated on the special case of the corporate executive,
except only for the brief digression on trade unions. But precisely the same
argument applies to the newer phenomenon of calling upon stockholders to require
corporations to exercise social responsibility (the recent G.M. crusade, for
example). In most of these cases, what is in effect involved is some stockholders
trying to get other stockholders (or customers or employes) to contribute against
their will to “social” causes favored by the activists. Insofar as they succeed, they
are again imposing taxes and spending the proceeds.
The situation of the individual proprietor is somewhat different. If he acts to reduce
the returns of his enterprise in order to exercise his “social responsibility,” he is
spending his own money, not someone else’s. If he wishes to spend his money on
such purposes, that is his right, and I cannot see that there is any objection to his
doing so. In the process, he, too, may impose costs on employes and customers.
However, because he is far less likely than a large corporation or union to have
monopolistic power, any such side effects will tend to be minor.
Of course, in practice the doctrine of social responsibility is frequently a cloak for
actions that are justified on other grounds rather than a reason for those actions.
To illustrate, it may well be in the long‐run interest of a corporation that is a major
employer in a small community to devote resources to providing amenities to that
community or to improving its government. That may make it easier to at tract
desirable employes, it may reduce the wage bill or lessen losses from pilferage and
sabotage or have other worthwhile effects. Or it may be that, given the laws about
the deductibility of corporate charitable contributions, the stockholders can
contribute more to charities they favor by having the corporation make the gift
than by doing it them selves, since they can in that way contribute an amount that
would otherwise have been paid as corporate taxes.
In each of these—and many similar—cases, there is a strong temptation to
rationalize these actions as an exercise of “social responsibility.” In the present
climate of opinion, with its widespread aversion to “capitalism,” “profits,” the
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
7/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
“soulless corporation” and so on, this is one way for a corporation to generate
goodwill as a by‐product of expenditures that are entirely justified in its own self‐
interest.
It would be inconsistent of me to call on corporate executives to refrain from this
hypocritical window dressing because it harms the foundations of a free society.
That would be to call on them to exercise “social responsibility”! If our institutions,
and the attitudes of the public make it in their self‐interest to cloak their actions in
this way, cannot summon much indignation to denounce them. At the same time,
can express admiration for those in dividual proprietors or owners of closely held
corporations or stock holders of more broadly held corporations who disdain such
tactics as approaching fraud.
WHETHER blameworthy or not, the use of the cloak of social responsibility, and
the nonsense spoken in its name by influential and prestigious businessmen, does
clearly harm the foundations of a free society. I have been impressed time and
again by the schizophrenic character of many businessmen. They are capable of
being extremely far‐sighted and clear‐headed in matters that are internal to their
businesses. They are incredibly short sighted and muddle‐headed in mat ters that
are outside their businesses but affect the possible survival of business in general.
This short sightedness is strikingly exemplified in the calls from many
businessmen for wage and price guidelines or controls or incomes policies. There
is nothing that could do more in a brief period to destroy a market system and
replace it by a centrally controlled system than effective governmental control of
prices and wages.
The short‐sightedness is also exemplified in speeches by business men on social
responsibility. This may gain them kudos in the short run. But it helps to
strengthen the already too prevalent view that the ptirsuit of profits is wicked and
im moral and must be curbed and controlled by external forces. Once this view is
adopted, the external forces that curb the market will not be the social consciences,
however highly developed, of the pontificating executives; it will be the iron fist of
Government bureaucrats. Here, as with price and wage controls, business men
seem to me to reveal a suicidal impulse.
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
8/9
10/21/23, 6:05 PM
A Friedman doctrine‐- The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits – The New York Times
The political principle that under lies the market mechanism is unanimity. In an
ideal free market resting on private property, no individual can coerce any other, all
cooperation is voluntary, all parties to such cooperation benefit or they need not
participate. There are no “social” values, no “social” responsibilities in any sense
other than the shared values and responsibilities of individuals. Society is a
collection of individuals and of the various groups they voluntarily form.
The political principle that under lies the political mechanism is conformity. The
individual must serve more general social interest— whether that be determined
by church or a dictator or a majority. The individual may have a vote and a say in
what is to be done, but if he is overruled, he must conform. It is appropriate for
some to require others to contribute to a general social purpose whether they wish
to or not.
Unfortunately, unanimity is not always feasible. There are some respects in which
conformity appears unavoidable, so I do not see how one can avoid the use of the
political Mechanism altogether.
But the doctrine of “social responsibility” taken seriously would extend the scope of
the political mechanism to every human activity. It does not differ in philosophy
from the most explicitly collectivist doctrine. It differs only by professing to believe
that collectivist ends can be attained without collectivist means. That is why, in my
book “Capitalism and Freedom,” I have called it a “fundamentally subversive
doctrine” in a free society, and have said that in such a society, “there is one and
only one social responsibility of business—to use its resources and engage in
activities designed to increase its profits so long as it stays within the rules of the
game, which is to say, engages in open and free competition without deception or
fraud.”
https://www.nytimes.com/1970/09/13/archives/a-friedman-doctrine-the-social-responsibility-of-business-is-to.html
9/9
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
A Free Market Manifesto That
Changed the World,
Reconsidered
Milton Friedman’s libertarian economics influenced presidents and inspired
“greed is good.” So what did Friedman get right — and wrong? Today’s business
leaders and economists weigh in.
Introduction by Andrew Ross Sorkin
Published Sept. 11, 2020
Updated Sept. 14, 2020
Sept. 13 is the 50th anniversary of a seminal moment in the world of business: the
publication of Milton Friedman’s essay in The New York Times Magazine entitled
“The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits.”
Friedman, who died in 2006 at the age of 94, was no mere economist; he was a kind
of celebrity. He became a regular on the talk-show circuit. PBS even gave him a 10part series. His economic theories, among the most consequential of the 20th
century, still hold sway over large parts of corporate America, maybe none more so
than this 1970 manifesto on corporate governance. (For more on the historical
context in which Friedman’s essay landed, see this essay by Kurt Andersen.)
At DealBook, we wanted to mark the occasion by stirring a series of discussions and
debates. So, in conjunction with The Times Magazine, we assembled 22 experts
— including C.E.O.s, Nobel laureate economists and top think-tank leaders — and
asked them to respond to Friedman’s essay. Some cited specific passages, and some
took on (and took issue with) Friedman’s entire argument.
You can read the original essay in its entirety here. Below are quotations from
Friedman’s landmark essay, along with the experts’ responses.
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html
1/23
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
DEALBOOK Make sense of the latest business and policy headlines
with our daily newsletter. Get it sent to your inbox.
‘The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits’
MARC BENIOFF, chief executive of Salesforce
I’ll never forget reading Friedman’s essay when I was in business school in the
1980s. It influenced — I’d say brainwashed — a generation of C.E.O.s who believed
that the only business of business is business. The headline said it all. Our sole
responsibility to society? Make money. The communities beyond the corporate
campus? Not our problem.
I didn’t agree with Friedman then, and the decades since have only exposed his
myopia. Just look where the obsession with maximizing profits for shareholders
has brought us: terrible economic, racial and health inequalities; the catastrophe
of climate change. It’s no wonder that so many young people now believe that
capitalism can’t deliver the equal, inclusive, sustainable future they want. It’s time
for a new kind of capitalism — stakeholder capitalism, which recognizes that our
companies have a responsibility to all our stakeholders. Yes, that includes
shareholders, but also our employees, customers, communities and the planet.
MARTIN LIPTON, senior partner at Wachtell, Lipton, Rosen & Katz
The most significant part of the Friedman essay was the headline. For a halfcentury, this phrase has been used to summarize the essay, and Friedman’s earlier
economic writings, in support of “shareholder primacy” as the bedrock of
American capitalism. The Friedman doctrine precipitated a new era of shorttermism, hostile takeovers, junk-bond financing and the erosion of protections for
employees and the environment to increase corporate profits and maximize value
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html
2/23
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
for shareholders. This version of capitalism was ascendant in the 1980s and
continued until the 2008 financial crisis, when the perils of short-termism were
vividly illustrated and the long-term economic and societal harms of shareholder
primacy were becoming increasingly urgent.
Since then, the Friedman doctrine has been widely eroded, as a growing consensus
of business leaders, investors, policymakers and leading members of the academic
community have embraced stakeholder capitalism as the key to sustainable,
broad-based, long-term American prosperity. This is illustrated by the World
Economic Forum’s adoption in 2016 of The New Paradigm and, in 2020, the Davos
Manifesto embracing stakeholder and E.S.G. (environment, social and
governance) principles. Stakeholder governance is the bedrock of American
capitalism now and in the future.
‘The businessmen believe that they are defending free enterprise when they
declaim that business is not concerned “merely” with profit but also with
promoting desirable “social” ends; that business has a “social conscience” and
takes seriously its responsibilities for providing employment, eliminating
discrimination, avoiding pollution and whatever else may be the catchwords of
the contemporary crop of reformers.’
DAVID R. HENDERSON, research fellow with the Hoover Institution
I first read Friedman’s essay a few months after it was published, and I basically
agreed with it. On rereading it, though, I noticed that Friedman criticizes
businessmen who feel responsible for “eliminating discrimination.” I found that
strange. Friedman was surely familiar with his colleague Gary Becker’s work on
discrimination. Becker’s bottom line is that an employer who discriminates against
Black people, for example, gives up the chance to hire a productive person and,
thus, gives up potential profits.
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html
3/23
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
In economic terms, this can show up in two ways. Either overall discrimination
against Black people causes their wages to be lower and so the employer who
discriminates fails to hire a productive person at a discount. Or, if the employer has
a wage schedule for a position, the employer who discriminates against Black
candidates will give up a chance to hire a more productive Black candidate at the
same wage at which he hires a less productive white candidate. So the employer
who doesn’t try to reduce discrimination is actually not acting in the interest of
shareholders — that employer is either paying too much or getting too little.
‘What does it mean to say that “business” has responsibilities?’
HOWARD SCHULTZ, emeritus chairman of Starbucks
I’ve asked this question since opening my first coffee shop in 1986. My answer, a
rebuke of Friedman’s single-minded focus on profits, appeared in our company’s
original mission statement: “We wish to be an economic, intellectual and social
asset in communities where we operate.” We would do this not at the expense of
profits, but to grow them.
Starbucks’s initiatives included providing part-time baristas with health care and
tuition-free college education; volunteering in neighborhoods; talking openly
about racism; and helping impoverished youth find first jobs. The ethos fueling
such efforts — that companies have a responsibility to enhance the societies in
which they flourish — was integral to Starbucks’s ability to employ great people
and attract customers, which in turn drove a 21,826 percent return to shareholders
between 1992 and 2018, the year I stepped down as executive chairman.
If Friedman had balked, asserting that Starbucks could have performed even
better without these “socially responsible” activities, I would have told him what I
told an institutional investor who wanted me to slash health care costs during the
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html
4/23
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
Great Recession, or what I said to a shareholder in 2013 who falsely claimed that
Starbucks’s support of gay rights hurt profits: If you feel you can get a better
return elsewhere, you are free to sell your shares.
In 2013, I stood in front of Starbucks shareholders and posed this question: “What
is the role and responsibility of a for-profit public company?” Friedman’s flawed
answer is not his legacy. His legacy is the question itself — which today’s leaders
must answer with a renewed commitment to balancing moral purpose and high
performance.
‘In a free-enterprise, private-property system, a corporate executive is an
employee of the owners of the business. He has direct responsibility to his
employers. That responsibility is to conduct the business in accordance with their
desires, which generally will be to make as much money as possible while
conforming to the basic rules of the society, both those embodied in law and
those embodied in ethical custom.’
ALEX GORSKY, chief executive of Johnson & Johnson
Friedman is owed respect for his analysis, but this highlights the ways in which
investors and society have evolved over 50 years. Employees care about how
companies function. Many of them are also a company’s shareholders, and they are
calling on leadership to take action on societal issues.
In 1943, as Johnson & Johnson prepared for its initial public offering, Robert Wood
Johnson made clear our responsibilities as a corporation: first to the patients,
doctors and nurses, mothers and fathers and others who use our products and
services, then to our customers and business partners, our employees and our
communities. And, finally, to our shareholders. We are fortunate in having long had
shareholders who have valued this balancing of interests. Now markets
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html
5/23
10/21/23, 6:06 PM
A Free Market Manifesto That Changed the World, Reconsidered – The New York Times
increasingly comprise such shareholders. Our performance over generations,
when the life of an S&P 500 company now averages less than 20 years, is a
testament that companies need not choose between service to a broad group of
stakeholders and generating long-term financial value for shareholders. Revisiting
this essay is a welcome exercise, and a reminder of the importance of self-scrutiny.
MARIANNE BERTRAND, professor of economics at the University of Chicago
Booth School of Business
The shareholder-primacy view of the corporation — which gives little voice to the
workers, customers and communities that are impacted by corporate decisions —
has been the modus operandi of United States capitalism. Why did this view
become so dominant? One rationale was a practical one. Rather than being asked
to balance multiple, often conflicting, interests among stakeholders, the manager is
given a simple objective function. More important, though, was the naïve belief,
dominant in the Chicago school at the time, that what is good for shareholders is
good for society — a belief that rested on the assumption of perfectly functioning
markets. Unfortunately, such perfect markets exist only in economics textbooks.
To be fair, Friedman
Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi Arabia (In 2021-2023). For each campaign:▪ Give the reasons behind their success?▪ What is the added value of this marketing campaign for the company/organization?2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two years). For each campaign:▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail? ▪ And what can we learn from them?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ECOM 322: Social Media Marketing
3rd Semester/2022-2023
Discussion Question
Write a report discussing the following points:
1. Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi
Arabia (In 2021-2023). For each campaign:
▪ Give the reasons behind their success?
▪ What
is
the
added
value
of
this
marketing
campaign
for
the
company/organization?
2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two
years). For each campaign:
▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail?
▪ And what can we learn from them?
Notes:
▪
For each case, provide the following information: Company Name, Campaign Name
and Social media platforms used.
▪
Examples can be a profit or non-profit organization.
Presentation:
▪
Prepare a presentation answering the previous questions and what are the criteria that
guide you to evaluate the campaigns?
Assignment Guidelines:
▪
This assignment is an individual assignment.
▪
All students are encouraged to use their own word.
▪
Your Assignment must include:
▪
Cover page and make sure to include the cover page with all information required.
One mark will be deducted if there is no cover page.
▪
A title that well represents the content of your report.
▪
A “References” section listing all sources included. And ensure that you follow
the APA style in your report.
▪
An opening paragraph.
▪
The main body of your report.
▪
Use Times New Roman, 12 font size, 1.5 line space and adjusted text.
▪
A mark of zero will be given for any submission that includes copying from other
resource without referencing it.
▪
Your report length should be between 600 to 800 words.
▪
Assignment must be in word format only no PDF.
▪
Your file should be saved as: Your name – CRN – ECOM322- Discussion.doc
▪
You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the
assignment.
▪
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of
assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and
grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
▪
The suggested duration for the presentation is 10 minutes with 5 minutes followed
by Q&A.
▪
You are free to choose any slide format and you should make sure having a proper
number of slides; so that you are able to finish on time (Template is attached in the
blackboard).
Submission:
Type
Due date
Point covered
Marks
Report
28/10/2023
@11:59 P.M.
All
10
Presentation
During week 10 &
11
Submission: due on
29/10/2023
at 3:00 PM.
All
5
Note: Submission will be through the Blackboard.
For this assignment you are being asked to produce an essay on the historic, sociological and ethical Perspectives on the smart city phenomenon – based on the literature covered as well as trends, definitions, facts, insights covered in class. Your essay need not to be summary of all content covered. Ideally it reads like a synthesis with a well articulated point of view of your own on where ‘urbanism’ is going, where our cities should be going, where digitalization should be going and why within the context of a modern urban innovation agenda today. We have covered so many aspects of the urbanism, smart city developments and 4IR’s impact on cities in ways that appear binary, but where synthesis is gold: centralized modes of organization versus networked, distributed designs; urbanism as a discipline of urban planning versus urbanism as a discipline of urban complexity and sociology; top down urban innovation management, versus bottom up; digitalization as an art uf urban efficiencies versus digitalization as a design shift. I encourage you to drive your own synthesis
One of the ways of approaching it would be to ask yourself the following question: if I were the Chief Innovation Officer of my City, I would aim for X, use Y, taking into consideration A, B, and C – using the literature in the process. As you may have discovered in class, I take a practical and applied leadership perspective on the content we cover. As noted per the beginning of the course, this is what I expect from you also. Drive thesis, anti-thesis, synthesis and apply. Assume you are that leader that needs to make tough decisions – applying what you have learned in the process. This is what I’m looking for. I will grade on the following aspects:
– Your understanding of the literature we have covered
– Your ability to arrive at your own point of views on the subject matter
– Your ability to translate the above in perspectives that are executable or help a person in charge execute on the topic at hand
– Your ability to arrive at synthesis on topics or aspects that easily polarize
Week 9: Interactive activity
9.1 Learning Outcomes:
Evaluate the strategic role of change in the organization and its impact on organizational performance. CLO2.1
9.2 Action Required:
Required Readings:
Chapter 9: Evaluating and Institutionalizing OD Interventions.
TEXTBOOK: Cummings, T., & Worley, C. (2015). Organization development and change. (10th ed.). Stamford, CT: Cengage Learning. ISBN#: 13 9781133190455 (print), ISBN#: 13 9781285800967 (e-text).
Recommended Readings:
Church, A. H. (2017). The art and science of evaluating organization development interventions. Od Practitioner, 49(2), 26-35.
The Art and Science of Evaluating OD Interventions
Head, T. C., & Sorensen Jr., P. F. (2005). The Evaluation of Organization Development Interventions: An Empirical Study. Organization Development Journal, 23(1), 40–55.
For this assignment, the executives at your company must decide on implementing new technology. It can be a new CRM system, cyber security system, artificial intelligence for production, etc. While you may think the executive should know ‘everything,’ that is not always the case. Your job is to write a whitepaper to inform the firm executives of what they need to know to make an informed decision.
For example, if you are in the clothing industry, you can write about how A.I. is used for supply chain management to speed up production processes. If you are in the education industry, what A.I. technologies are being developed?
The white paper should include the following headings:
Title Page.
Table of Contents.
Executive Summary.
A minimum of three informative headings
Key Takeaways.
Conclusion.
Remember to catch people’s attention. It is always a good idea to include some form of graphics. Be creative!
This module has examples of whitepapers and two templates (files attached) you can use to create your own. You do not have to use the templates.
This writing is NOT an APA formatted paper, but it should include a reference page in APA format.
There is no minimum or maximum page limit, and the reason is that you should be able to know if you have enough or too little information to get your point across. As a guide, if your white paper is three pages, I would suspect that it is too short, given the mandatory headings you must have in the paper.
RUBRIC:
– Formatting is professional, headings help the reader locate key information.
– Executive summary: Executive summary includes enough essential information to serve as a useful decision-making tool on its own.
– Introduction: Introduction clearly states the decision that needs to be made and why it is important, and is useful to the reader.
– Substantive information provided: Paper provides substantive information on at least 3 key issues informing the decision.
– Key takeaways: At least 3 key takeaways are clearly described, and their relevance to the decision is explained.
– Conclusion: Conclusion summarizes the most important insights of the paper, and explains their impact on the decision to be made.
– APA reference list: Reference list uses APA format with no errors.
– Title page and TOC included: Title page and table of contents are included and professionally formatted.
MATERIALS:
– Management Communication (book file will be attached) – Chapter 7: Example Bank, page 16. This page provides links to examples of business reports, including whitepapers.
– (4) So… what exactly is a white paper? – YouTube
– (4) How To Write A White Paper In 4 Easy Steps by author of “How To Write A White Paper In One Day” – YouTube
– (4) What is a White Paper – YouTube
– Overview: Whitepapers are commonly used in business to help solve problems and make decisions. According to an article in MediaSpace Solutions (2011), Whitepapers “…are considered to be the most influential form of business collateral, and 76% of people have used white papers as part of their decision-making efforts” (Xiong, 2011).
Whitepapers can generate leads, educate consumers, and contribute to you being a thought leader in the industry.
A whitepaper addresses a current topic related to an industry or a key question faced by an organization. It is designed to provide background information and data that describes the “state of the art” on that topic or question. It is not persuasive to move the reader to a specific action, as a sales proposal would, and it is not an opinion piece. The tone of a whitepaper is professional, fact-based, clear, and concise.
Whitepapers typically demonstrate the writer’s (and his/her/their organization’s) ability to analyze, synthesize, and present information clearly and effectively. Construct your analysis of the topic on good source material and reliable data. Present your conclusions clearly. This kind of writing showcases your knowledge of a topic, establishes your credibility, and builds your reputation as an expert or innovator in a given area.
Using the text information, in no less than 250 words and APA format or similar Explain why some organizations still fail to deliver human resource strategically • Describe the outcomes and benefits of strategic human resource • Understand how different company strategies might result in the need for human resource to assume different primary roles . Post to fellow student (no specific number of words). Must be enough to look as though it is substantial work.
1. Who is the CFO? Where does this individual fit in the corporate hierarchy? What are his or her responsibilities in an organization? MINIMUM ONE & HALF PAGE REQUIREMENT. Chapter # 1.2. Why are Financial Markets essential for a Healthy economy and Economic growth? MINIMUM ONE PAGE REQUIREMENT. Chapter # 2.3. Explore the 10K or 10Q report of any public company of your choice and Write minimum ONE page as to what info you found in this report. You can explore any report of year 2022. Let me know what public company you are choosing by emailing me.4. Explore the website Marketwatch.com and write TWO pages as to what info you found on the website. Explore different tabs.REFERENCES ARE MANDATORY.Below are 2 files chapter 1 and chapter 2 for questions 1 and 2APA format, Use the APA template located in the Student Resource Center to complete the assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Introduction
Striking the Right Balance
In 1776, Adam Smith described how an “invisible hand” guides companies as they strive for
profits, and that hand leads them to decisions that benefit society. Smith’s insights led him
to conclude that profit maximization is the right goal for a business and that the free
enterprise system is best for society. But the world has changed since 1776. Firms today are
much larger, they operate globally, they have thousands of employees, and they are owned
by millions of stockholders. This makes us wonder if the “invisible hand” still provides
reliable guidance: Should companies still try to maximize profits, or should they take a
broader view and more balanced actions designed to benefit customers, employees,
suppliers, and society as a whole?
Many academics and finance professionals today subscribe to the following modified version
of Adam Smith’s theory:
A firm’s principal financial goal should be to maximize the wealth of its stockholders, which
means maximizing the value of its stock.
Free enterprise is still the best economic system for society as a whole. Under the free
enterprise framework, companies develop products and services that people want and that
benefit society.
However, some constraints are needed—firms should not be allowed to pollute the air and
water, to engage in unfair employment practices, or to create monopolies that exploit
consumers.
These constraints take a number of different forms. The first set of constraints is the costs
that are assessed on companies if they take actions that harm society. Another set of
constraints arises through the political process, where society imposes a wide range of
regulations that are designed to keep companies from engaging in harmful practices.
Properly imposed, these costs fairly transfer value to suffering parties and help create
incentives that help prevent similar events from occurring in the future.
The financial crisis in 2007 and 2008 dramatically illustrates these points. We witnessed
many Wall Street firms engaging in extremely risky activities that pushed the financial
system to the brink of collapse. Saving the financial system required a bailout of the banks
and other financial companies, and that bailout imposed huge costs on taxpayers and
helped push the economy into a deep recession. Apart from the huge costs imposed on
society, the financial firms also paid a heavy price—a number of leading financial institutions
saw a huge drop in their stock price, some failed and went out of business, and many Wall
Street executives lost their jobs.
Arguably, these costs are not enough to prevent another financial crisis from occurring.
Many maintain that the events surrounding the financial crisis illustrate that markets don’t
always work the way they should and that there is a need for stronger regulation of the
financial sector. For example, in his recent books, Nobel Laureate Joseph Stiglitz makes a
strong case for enhanced regulation. At the same time, others with a different political
persuasion continue to express concerns about the costs of excessive regulation.
Beyond the financial crisis, there is a broader question of whether laws and regulations are
enough to compel firms to act in society’s interest. An increasing number of companies
continue to recognize the need to maximize shareholder value, but they also see their
mission as more than just making money for shareholders. Google’s parent company
Alphabet’s motto is “Do the right thing—follow the law, act honorably, and treat each other
with respect.” Consistent with this mission, the company has its own in-house foundation
that each year makes large investments in a wide range of philanthropic ventures
worldwide.
Microsoft is another good example of a company that has earned a reputation for taking
steps to be socially responsible. The company recently released its 2019 Corporate Social
Responsibility Report. In an accompanying letter to shareholders, Microsoft CEO Satya
Nadella highlighted its broader mission:
Our mission to empower every person and every organization on the planet to achieve more
has never been more important. At a time when many are calling attention to the role
technology plays in society broadly, our mission remains constant. It grounds us in the
enormous opportunity and responsibility we have to ensure that the technology we create
always benefits everyone on the planet, including the planet itself. Our platforms and tools
help make small businesses more productive, multinationals more competitive, nonprofits
more effective, and governments more efficient. They improve healthcare and education
outcomes, amplify human ingenuity, and allow people everywhere to reach higher.
Similarly, the Business Roundtable, a group of leading business executives, made news in
2019 when it put out a statement indicating that companies should explicitly account for the
broader interests of stakeholders, not just focus exclusively on shareholders.
While many companies and individuals have taken very significant steps to demonstrate
their commitments to being socially responsible, corporate managers frequently face a
tough balancing act. Realistically, there will still be cases where companies face conflicts
between their various constituencies—for example, a company may enhance shareholder
value by laying off some workers, or a change in policy may improve the environment but
reduce shareholder value. We also have seen examples where leading tech companies such
as Facebook and Google have come under fire for their handling of their users’ private
information. In each of these instances, managers have to balance these competing interests
and different managers will clearly make different choices. More recently, virtually every
organization has faced considerable pressure trying to manage their various constituencies
in the midst of the massive personal and economic dislocation resulting from the
coronavirus pandemic. At the end of the day, all companies struggle to find the right
balance. Enlightened managers recognize that there is more to life than money, but it often
takes money to do good things.
Sources: “Microsoft 2019 Corporate Social Responsibility Report,” microsoft.com/enus/corporate-responsibility/reports-hub, October 16, 2019; “Microsoft 2019 Annual Report,”
microsoft.com/investor/reports/ar19/index.html, October 16, 2019; “Business Roundtable
Redefines the Purpose of a Corporation to Promote ‘An Economy That Serves All
Americans,’” businessroundtable.org/business-roundtable-redefines-the-purpose-of-acorporation-to-promote-an-economy-that-serves-all-americans, August 19, 2019; Kevin J.
Delaney, “Google: From ‘Don’t Be Evil’ to How to Do Good,” The Wall Street Journal, January
18, 2008, pp. B1–B2; Joseph E. Stiglitz, FreeFall: America, Free Markets, and the Sinking of
the World Economy (New York: W.W. Norton, 2010); and Joseph E. Stiglitz, The Price of
Inequality (New York: W.W. Norton, 2012).
Putting Things in Perspective
This chapter will give you an idea of what financial management is all about. We begin the
chapter by describing how finance is related to the overall business environment, by
pointing out that finance prepares students for jobs in different fields of business, and by
discussing the different forms of business organization. For corporations, management’s goal
should be to maximize shareholder wealth, which means maximizing the value of the stock.
When we say “maximizing the value of the stock,” we mean the “true, long-run value,”
which may be different from the current stock price. In the chapter, we discuss how firms
must provide the right incentives for managers to focus on long-run value maximization.
Good managers understand the importance of ethics, and they recognize that maximizing
long-run value is consistent with being socially responsible.
When you finish this chapter, you should be able to do the following:
Explain the role of finance and the different types of jobs in finance.
Identify the advantages and disadvantages of different forms of business organization.
Explain the links between stock price, intrinsic value, and executive compensation.
Identify the potential conflicts that arise within the firm between stockholders and
managers and between stockholders and bondholders, and discuss the techniques that firms
can use to mitigate these potential conflicts.
Discuss the importance of business ethics and the consequences of unethical behavior.
1-1. What Is Finance?
Finance is defined by Webster’s Dictionary as “the system that includes the circulation of
money, the granting of credit, the making of investments, and the provision of banking
facilities.” Finance has many facets, which makes it difficult to provide one concise definition.
The discussion in this section will give you an idea of what finance professionals do and what
you might do if you enter the finance field after you graduate.
1-1A. Areas of Finance
Finance as taught in universities is generally divided into three areas:
(1)
financial management,
(2)
capital markets, and
(3)
investments.
Financial management, also called corporate finance, focuses on decisions relating to how
much and what types of assets to acquire, how to raise the capital needed to purchase
assets, and how to run the firm so as to maximize its value. The same principles apply to
both for-profit and not-for-profit organizations, and as the title suggests, much of this book
is concerned with financial management.
Capital markets relate to the markets where interest rates, along with stock and bond prices,
are determined. Also studied here are the financial institutions that supply capital to
businesses. Banks, investment banks, stockbrokers, mutual funds, insurance companies, and
the like bring together “savers” who have money to invest and businesses, individuals, and
other entities that need capital for various purposes. Governmental organizations such as
the Federal Reserve System, which regulates banks and controls the supply of money, and
the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), which regulates the trading of stocks and
bonds in public markets, are also studied as part of capital markets.
Investments relate to decisions concerning stocks and bonds and include a number of
activities:
(1)
Security analysis deals with finding the proper values of individual securities (i.e., stocks and
bonds).
(2)
Portfolio theory deals with the best way to structure portfolios, or “baskets,” of stocks and
bonds. Rational investors want to hold diversified portfolios in order to limit risks, so
choosing a properly balanced portfolio is an important issue for any investor.
(3)
Market analysis deals with the issue of whether stock and bond markets at any given time
are “too high,” “too low,” or “about right.”
Included in market analysis is behavioral finance, where investor psychology is examined in
an effort to determine whether stock prices have been bid up to unreasonable heights in a
speculative bubble or driven down to unreasonable lows in a fit of irrational pessimism.
Although we separate these three areas, they are closely interconnected. Banking is studied
under capital markets, but a bank lending officer evaluating a business’ loan request must
understand corporate finance to make a sound decision. Similarly, a corporate treasurer
negotiating with a banker must understand banking if the treasurer is to borrow on
“reasonable” terms. Moreover, a security analyst trying to determine a stock’s true value
must understand corporate finance and capital markets to do his or her job. In addition,
financial decisions of all types depend on the level of interest rates; so all people in
corporate finance, investments, and banking must know something about interest rates and
the way they are determined. Because of these interdependencies, we cover all three areas
in this book.
1-1B. Finance within an Organization
The duties of the CFO have broadened over the years. CFO magazine’s online service,
cfo.com, is an excellent source of timely finance articles intended to help the CFO manage
those new responsibilities.
Most businesses and not-for-profit organizations have an organization chart similar to the
one shown in Figure 1.1. The board of directors is the top governing body, and the
chairperson of the board is generally the highest-ranking individual. The chief executive
officer (CEO) comes next, but note that the chairperson of the board often also serves as the
CEO. Below the CEO comes the chief operating officer (COO), who is often also designated as
a firm’s president. The COO directs the firm’s operations, which include marketing,
manufacturing, sales, and other operating departments. The chief financial officer (CFO),
who is generally a senior vice president and the third-ranking officer, is in charge of
accounting, finance, credit policy, decisions regarding asset acquisitions, and investor
relations, which involves communications with stockholders and the press.
Figure 1.1 Finance within the Organization
Details
If the firm is publicly owned, the CEO and the CFO must both certify to the SEC that reports
released to stockholders, and especially the annual report, are accurate. If inaccuracies later
emerge, the CEO and the CFO could be fined or even jailed. This requirement was instituted
in 2002 as a part of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. The act was passed by Congress in the wake of a
series of corporate scandals involving now-defunct companies such as Enron and WorldCom,
where investors, workers, and suppliers lost billions of dollars due to false information
released by those companies.
1-1C. Finance versus Economics and Accounting
Finance, as we know it today, grew out of economics and accounting. Economists developed
the notion that an asset’s value is based on the future cash flows the asset will provide, and
accountants provided information regarding the likely size of those cash flows. People who
work in finance need knowledge of both economics and accounting. Figure 1.1 illustrates
that in the modern corporation, the accounting department typically falls under the control
of the CFO. This further illustrates the link among finance, economics, and accounting.
SelfTest
What three areas of finance does this book cover? Are these areas independent of one
another, or are they interrelated in the sense that someone working in one area should
know something about each of the other areas? Explain.
Who is the CFO, and where does this individual fit into the corporate hierarchy? What are
some of his or her responsibilities?
Does it make sense for not-for-profit organizations such as hospitals and universities to have
CFOs? Why or why not?
What is the relationship among economics, finance, and accounting?
1-2. Jobs in Finance
To find information about different finance careers, go to allbusinessschools.com/businesscareers/finance/job-description. This website provides information about different finance
areas.
Finance prepares students for jobs in banking, investments, insurance, corporations, and
government. Accounting students need to know marketing, management, and human
resources; they also need to understand finance, for it affects decisions in all those areas.
For example, marketing people propose advertising programs, but those programs are
examined by finance people to judge the effects of the advertising on the firm’s profitability.
So to be effective in marketing, one needs to have a basic knowledge of finance. The same
holds for management—indeed, most important management decisions are evaluated in
terms of their effects on the firm’s value.
It is also worth noting that finance is important to individuals regardless of their jobs. Some
years ago most employees received pensions from their employers upon retirement, so
managing one’s personal investments was not critically important. That’s no longer true.
Most firms today provide “defined contribution” pension plans, where each year the
company puts a specified amount of money into an account that belongs to the employee.
The employee must decide how those funds are to be invested—how much should be
divided among stocks, bonds, or money funds—and how much risk they’re willing to take
with their stock and bond investments. These decisions have a major effect on people’s lives,
and the concepts covered in this book can improve decision-making skills.
1-3. Forms of Business Organization
efinancialcareers.com provides finance career news and advice including information on
who’s hiring in finance and accounting fields.
The basics of financial management are the same for all businesses, large or small,
regardless of how they are organized. Still, a firm’s legal structure affects its operations and
thus should be recognized. There are four main forms of business organizations:
(1)
proprietorships,
(2)
partnerships,
(3)
corporations, and
(4)
limited liability companies (LLCs) and limited liability partnerships (LLPs).
In terms of numbers, most businesses are proprietorships. However, based on the dollar
value of sales, more than 80% of all business is done by corporations. Because corporations
conduct the most business and because most successful businesses eventually convert to
corporations, we focus on them in this book. Still, it is important to understand the legal
differences between types of firms.
A proprietorship is an unincorporated business owned by one individual. Going into business
as a sole proprietor is easy—a person begins business operations. Proprietorships have three
important advantages:
(1)
They are easy and inexpensive to form,
(2)
they are subject to few government regulations, and
(3)
they are subject to lower income taxes than are corporations.
However, proprietorships also have three important limitations:
(1)
Proprietors have unlimited personal liability for the business’ debts, so they can lose more
than the amount of money they invested in the company. You might invest $10,000 to start a
business but be sued for
$
1
million
if, during company time, one of your employees runs over someone with a car.
(2)
The life of the business is limited to the life of the individual who created it, and to bring in
new equity, investors require a change in the structure of the business.
(3)
Because of the first two points, proprietorships have difficulty obtaining large sums of
capital; hence, proprietorships are used primarily for small businesses.
However, businesses are frequently started as proprietorships and then converted to
corporations when their growth results in the disadvantages outweighing the advantages.
A partnership is a legal arrangement between two or more people who decide to do
business together. Partnerships are similar to proprietorships in that they can be established
relatively easily and inexpensively. Moreover, the firm’s income is allocated on a pro rata
basis to the partners and is taxed on an individual basis. This allows the firm to avoid the
corporate income tax. However, all of the partners are generally subject to unlimited
personal liability, which means that if a partnership goes bankrupt and any partner is unable
to meet his or her pro rata share of the firm’s liabilities, the remaining partners will be
responsible for making good on the unsatisfied claims. Thus, the actions of a Texas partner
can bring ruin to a millionaire New York partner who had nothing to do with the actions that
led to the downfall of the company. Unlimited liability makes it difficult for partnerships to
raise large amounts of capital.
A corporation is a legal entity created by a state, and it is separate and distinct from its
owners and managers. It is this separation that limits stockholders’ losses to the amount
they invested in the firm—the corporation can lose all of its money, but its owners can lose
only the funds that they invested in the company. Corporations also have unlimited lives,
and it is easier to transfer shares of stock in a corporation than one’s interest in an
unincorporated business. These factors make it much easier for corporations to raise the
capital necessary to operate large businesses. Thus, companies such as Hewlett-Packard and
Microsoft generally begin as proprietorships or partnerships, but at some point they find it
advantageous to become a corporation.
A major drawback to corporations is taxes. Most corporations’ earnings are subject to
double taxation—the corporation’s earnings are taxed, and then when its after-tax earnings
are paid out as dividends, those earnings are taxed again as personal income to the
stockholders. However, as an aid to small businesses, Congress created S Corporations,
which are taxed as if they were proprietorships or partnerships; thus, they are exempt from
the corporate income tax. To qualify for S corporation status, a firm can have no more than
100 stockholders, which limits their use to relatively small, privately owned firms. Larger
corporations are known as C corporations. The vast majority of small corporations elect S
status and retain that status until they decide to sell stock to the public, at which time they
become C corporations.
A limited liability company (LLC) is a popular type of organization that is a hybrid between a
partnership and a corporation. A limited liability partnership (LLP) is similar to an LLC. LLPs
are used for professional firms in the fields of accounting, law, and architecture, while LLCs
are used by other businesses. Similar to corporations, LLCs and LLPs provide limited liability
protection, but they are taxed as partnerships. Further, unlike limited partnerships, where
the general partner has full control of the business, the investors in an LLC or LLP have votes
in proportion to their ownership interest. LLCs and LLPs have been gaining in popularity in
recent years, but large companies still find it advantageous to be C corporations because of
the advantages in raising capital to support growth. LLCs/LLPs were dreamed up by lawyers;
they are often structured in very complicated ways, and their legal protections often vary by
state. So it is necessary to hire a good lawyer when establishing one.
When deciding on its form of organization, a firm must trade off the advantages of
incorporation against double taxation. However, for the following reasons, the value of any
business other than a relatively small one will probably be maximized if it is organized as a
corporation:
Limited liability reduces the risks borne by investors, and, other things held constant, the
lower the firm’s risk, the higher its value.
A firm’s value is dependent on its growth opportunities, which are dependent on its ability
to attract capital. Because corporations can attract capital more easily than other types of
businesses, they are better able to take advantage of growth opportunities.
The value of an asset also depends on its liquidity, which means the time and effort it takes
to sell the asset for cash at a fair market value. Because the stock of a corporation is easier
to transfer to a potential buyer than is an interest in a proprietorship or partnership and
because more investors are willing to invest in stocks than in partnerships (with their
potential unlimited liability), a corporate investment is relatively liquid. This too enhances
the value of a corporation.
SelfTest
What are the key differences among proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations?
How are LLCs and LLPs related to the other forms of organization?
What is an S corporation, and what is its advantage over a C corporation? Why don’t firms
such as IBM, GE, and Microsoft choose S corporation status?
What are some reasons why the value of a business other than a small one is generally
maximized when it is organized as a corporation?
1-4. The Main Financial Goal: Creating Value for Investors
In public corporations, managers and employees work on behalf of the shareholders who
own the business, and therefore they have an obligation to pursue policies that promote
stockholder value. While many companies focus on maximizing a broad range of financial
objectives, such as growth, earnings per share, and market share, these goals should not
take precedence over the main financial goal, which is to create value for investors. Keep in
mind that a company’s stockholders are not just an abstract group—they represent
individuals and organizations who have chosen to invest their hard-earned cash into the
company and who are looking for a return on their investment in order to meet their longterm financial goals, which might be saving for retirement, a new home, or a child’s
education. In addition to financial goals, the firm also has nonfinancial goals, which we will
discuss in Section 1-7.
If a manager is to maximize stockholder wealth, he or she must know how that wealth is
determined. Throughout this book, we shall see that the value of any asset is the present
value of the stream of cash flows that the asset provides to its owners over time. We discuss
stock valuation in depth in Chapter 9, where we see that stock prices are based on cash
flows expected in future years, not just in the current year. Thus, stock price maximization
requires us to take a long-run view of operations. At the same time, managerial actions that
affect a company’s value may not immediately be reflected in the company’s stock price.
1-4A. Determinants of Value
Figure 1.2 illustrates the situation. The top box indicates that managerial actions, combined
with the economy, taxes, and political conditions, influence the level and riskiness of the
company’s future cash flows, which ultimately determine the company’s stock price. As you
might expect, investors like higher expected cash flows, but they dislike risk; so the larger the
expected cash flows and the lower the perceived risk, the higher the stock’s price.
Figure 1.2 Determinants of Intrinsic Values and Stock Prices
Details
The second row of boxes differentiates what we call “true” expected cash flows and “true”
risk from “perceived” cash flows and “perceived” risk. By “true,” we mean the cash flows
and risk that investors would expect if they had all of the information that existed about a
company. “Perceived” means what investors expect, given the limited information they have.
To illustrate, in early 2001, investors had information that caused them to think Enron was
highly profitable and would enjoy high and rising future profits. They also thought that
actual results would be close to the expected levels and hence that Enron’s risk was low.
However, true estimates of Enron’s profits, which were known by its executives but not the
investing public, were much lower; Enron’s true situation was extremely risky.
The third row of boxes shows that each stock has an intrinsic value, which is an estimate of
the stock’s “true” value as calculated by a competent analyst who has the best available
data, and a market price, which is the actual market price based on perceived but possibly
incorrect information as seen by the marginal investor. Not all investors agree, so it is the
“marginal” investor who determines the actual price.
When a stock’s actual market price is equal to its intrinsic value, the stock is in equilibrium,
which is shown in the bottom box in Figure 1.2. When equilibrium exists, there is no
pressure for a change in the stock’s price. Market prices can—and do—differ from intrinsic
values; eventually, however, as the future unfolds, the two values tend to converge.
1-4B. Intrinsic Value
Actual stock prices are easy to determine—they can be found on the Internet and are
published in newspapers every day. However, intrinsic values are estimates, and different
analysts with different data and different views about the future form different estimates of
a stock’s intrinsic value. Indeed, estimating intrinsic values is what security analysis is all
about and is what distinguishes successful from unsuccessful investors. Investing would be
easy, profitable, and essentially riskless if we knew all stocks’ intrinsic values—but, of course,
we don’t. We can estimate intrinsic values, but we can’t be sure that we are right. A firm’s
managers have the best information about the firm’s future prospects, so managers’
estimates of intrinsic values are generally better than those of outside investors. However,
even managers can be wrong.
Figure 1.3 graphs a hypothetical company’s actual price and intrinsic value as estimated by
its management over time. The intrinsic value rises because the firm retains and reinvests
earnings each year, which tends to increase profits. The value jumped dramatically in Year
20, when a research and development (R&D) breakthrough raised management’s estimate
of future profits before investors had this information. The actual stock price tended to
move up and down with the estimated intrinsic value, but investor optimism and pessimism,
along with imperfect knowledge about the true intrinsic value, led to deviations between
the actual prices and intrinsic values.
Figure 1.3 Graph of Actual Prices versus Intrinsic Values
Details
Intrinsic value is a long-run concept. Management’s goal should be to take actions designed
to maximize the firm’s intrinsic value, not its current market price. Note, though, that
maximizing the intrinsic value will maximize the average price over the long run but not
necessarily the current price at each point in time. For example, management might make
an investment that lowers profits for the current year but raises expected future profits. If
investors are not aware of the true situation, the stock price will be held down by the low
current profit even though the intrinsic value was actually raised. Management should
provide information that helps investors make better estimates of the firm’s intrinsic value,
which will keep the stock price closer to its equilibrium level. However, there are times when
management cannot divulge the true situation because doing so would provide information
that helps its competitors.
1-4C. Consequences of Having a Short-Run Focus
Ideally, managers adhere to this long-run focus, but there are numerous examples in recent
years where the focus for many companies shifted to the short run. Perhaps most notably,
prior to the recent financial crisis, many Wall Street executives received huge bonuses for
engaging in risky transactions that generated short-term profits. Subsequently, the value of
these transactions collapsed, causing many of these Wall Street firms to seek a massive
government bailout.
Apart from the recent problems on Wall Street, there have been other examples where
managers have focused on short-run profits to the detriment of long-term value. For
example, Wells Fargo implemented incentives to reward employees for signing up customers
to new accounts. Unfortunately, to obtain bonuses some employees created fake accounts
or signed up customers for unauthorized credit cards. This led to the firing of thousands of
employees, as well as its CEO and other senior managers, and millions of dollars in fines for
Wells Fargo. In addition, the Fed has limited Wells Fargo’s growth so total assets are no
greater than the year end 2017 total until the bank repairs its culture and cleans up its act.
On February 21, 2020, Wells Fargo agreed to pay $3 billion to settle claims, including
$
500
million
that will be returned to investors. Wells Fargo has eliminated all product-based sales goals,
restructured its compensation, and strengthened customer consent and oversight systems.
With these types of concerns in mind, many academics and practitioners stress the need for
boards and directors to establish effective procedures for corporate governance. This
involves putting in place a set of rules and practices to ensure that managers act in
shareholders’ interests while also balancing the needs of other key constituencies such as
customers, employees, and affected citizens. Having a strong, independent board of
directors is viewed as an important component of strong governance.
Effective governance requires holding managers accountable for poor performance and
understanding the important role that executive compensation plays in encouraging
managers to focus on the proper objectives. For example, if a manager’s bonus is tied solely
to this year’s earnings, it would not be a surprise to discover that the manager took steps to
pump up current earnings—even if those steps were detrimental to the firm’s long-run
value. With these concerns in mind, a growing number of companies have used stock and
stock options as a key part of executive pay. The intent of structuring
Read and Answer questions about the two cases listed below. You will find the case questions for each case at the very end of those individual PDF files.Case #1: Ward – this is a disparate treatment (intentional) age discrimination case proven with direct evidence of discriminatory intent.Case #5: Jespersen – this is a leading sex discrimination case alleging discrimination due to different appearance requirements for male and female employees of a casino.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case #1: Ward v. Publix, Case No. 3:14-cv-296 (N.D. Fla. 2016)
[This opinion has been edited by the author for educational use. Edits are indicated through brackets [] or through
the following: ***. In addition, certain language has been bolded or underlined for emphasis. Unless otherwise
indicated, all footnotes have been omitted. In addition, certain case citations have been edited to conform to
BlueBook citation requirements].
Plaintiff Donald Ward filed [this] suit *** alleging one count of age discrimination in employment,
seeking damages and injunctive relief against Defendant Publix Super Markets, Inc. (“Publix”),
pursuant to the Age Discrimination in Employment Act (“ADEA”), 29 U.S.C. § 621 et seq., and
the Florida Civil Rights Act of 1992, Fla. Stat. § 760.01, et seq. *** Now pending is Publix’s
Motion for Summary Judgment (doc. 34). Having fully reviewed the matter, the Court finds that
there is a material question of fact precluding summary judgment in this case.
Background [1]
Ward, who is over age 40, answered an online Publix recruitment job posting for meat cutter
positions in stores throughout the country. On June 5, 2013, Staffing Specialist Daniel Kammeraad
responded to Ward by email, explaining some benefits and career opportunities available at Publix,
including Publix’s policy of promoting qualified associates from within the company. [record
citation omitted]. Kammeraad encouraged Ward to apply at the local Publix store in Pensacola,
Florida, which he did. Ward’s resume touted his meat cutting experience, and, after reviewing
Ward’s qualifications, Store Manager William Gouge and Meat Manager Tyler Stull contacted
him for an interview. Ward was interviewed for a position in the meat department on June 14,
2013.[2]
Within a few days after the interview, Publix decided not to hire Ward. It is undisputed that on or
about June 19, 2013, Stull left the following message for Ward by voicemail:
Hey there Donald, my name is Tyler Stull. I interviewed you for a position here at
Publix on Mobile Highway. We’re gonna go in a different direction, we’re gonna
train one of our younger associates to be a meat cutter, hopefully. So we’re going
to release you back into the pool, so hopefully another store they [sic] can come by
and pick you up.
Stull Decl., ECF No. 36-8, ¶ 11. According to Stull, he was simply describing a current Publix
associate, Corey Beddon (age 24), who in fact was younger than Stull and was a clerk in the meat
department. Stull explained in his declaration that there was no immediate need to hire someone
in the meat department, so he was willing to wait and train a current associate. Beddon was
subsequently trained and promoted to a full-time meat cutter apprentice on March 8, 2014, and
1
[In a footnote, the court stated: For the limited purposes of this summary judgment proceeding, the Court views
“the evidence and all reasonable inferences drawn from it in the light most favorable to the nonmovingparty,” which
in this case is the Plaintiff. *** The Court is mindful that “what is considered to be the facts at the summary
judgment stage may not turn out to be the actual facts if the case goes to trial.” ***]
[In a footnote, the court stated: Whether Ward’s interview went well or poorly, and/or whether
he performed well or poorly on a meat cutting test that was part of the interview, are facts in
dispute.]
2
was reclassified as a full-time meat cutter on September 27, 2014. Ward claims he was not hired
because of his age.
Discussion
Summary judgment is appropriate if the evidence, “shows that there is no genuine dispute as to
any material fact” and the moving party is entitled to judgment as a matter of law. Fed. R. Civ. P.
56(a)***. Summary judgment is not appropriate “if a reasonable fact finder evaluating the
evidence could draw more than one inference from the facts, and if that inference introduces a
genuine issue of material fact.” Jeffery v. Sarasota White Sox, Inc., 64 F.3d 590, 594 (11th Cir.
1995). “[T]he mere existence of some alleged factual dispute between the parties will not defeat
an otherwise properly supported motion for summary judgment; the requirement is that there be
no genuine issue of material fact.” Anderson v. Liberty Lobby, Inc., 477 U.S. 242, 247-48 (1986)
(emphasis in original). An issue of fact is material if it might affect the outcome of the case under
the governing law, and it is genuine if the record taken as a whole could lead a rational fact finder
to find for the nonmoving party. Id. at 248. In evaluating the record on a motion for summary
judgment, courts construe the evidence and all reasonable inferences arising from it in the light
most favorable to the nonmoving party. Adickes v. S.H. Kress & Co., 398 U.S. 144, 157 (1970).
Also, courts will not make credibility determinations or weigh the evidence presented on summary
judgment. Frederick v. Sprint/United Mgm’t Co., 246 F.3d 1305, 1311 (11th Cir. 2001).
Under the ADEA,[3] an employer may not discriminate against an employee who is at least 40
years of age because of his or her age. 29 U.S.C. §§ 623(a); see Sims v. MVM, Inc., 704 F.3d 1327,
1331 (11th Cir. 2013). Liability for disparate treatment under the ADEA depends on whether age
“actually motivated the employer’s decision,” or in other words, whether the plaintiff’s age
“actually played a role in the employer’s decisionmaking process and had a determinative
influence on the outcome.” [citation omitted]. The Supreme Court has clarified that an ADEA
plaintiff “must prove, by a preponderance of the evidence, that age was the ‘but-for’ cause of the
challenged adverse employment action.” Gross v. FBL Fin. Services, Inc., 557 U.S. 167, 180
(2009).
The plaintiff may establish age discrimination by either direct or circumstantial evidence.4 See
Mora v. Jackson Mem’l Found., Inc., 597 F.3d 1201, 1204 (11th Cir. 2010). The Eleventh Circuit
has explained that where an age-related discriminatory-sounding remark is alleged as the
“but for” cause of an employment action, and where resolution of the case depends on whose
account of a conversation a jury would credit, summary judgment must be denied. See id.
Importantly, “the plaintiff will always survive summary judgment if he presents circumstantial
evidence that creates a triable issue concerning the employer’s discriminatory intent.” Sims, 704
F.3d at 1333 (quoting Smith v. Lockheed Martin Corp., 644 F.3d 1321, 1328 (11th Cir. 2011)).
Publix argues that Stull’s voice message is too attenuated to be considered direct evidence of
discrimination and that, standing alone, it is also insufficient as circumstantial evidence to create
3 [In a footnote, the court stated:
Age discrimination claims brought under Florida law are
analyzed under the same framework used to decide actions brought pursuant to the federal
ADEA. *** Thus, there is no need to analyze the state law claim separately.]
a prima facie case of discrimination. The Court disagrees. The voicemail message by Stull, a
decisionmaker relaying an adverse employment decision, is not disputed. In it, Stull said Publix
decided to go with a “younger associate,” and the record confirms that Beddon, who is much
younger than Ward, is now a meat cutter in the department. Whether the statement that Publix was
going with a “younger associate” amounts to direct or circumstantial evidence does not merit
further discussion because on this record, the statement alone is sufficient to create a material
question of fact, regardless of whether it is considered direct or circumstantial. See Mora, 597
F.3d at 1204 (finding a statement that plaintiff was “too old” was direct evidence); see also Van
Voorhis v. Hillsborough County Bd. of County Comm’rs, 512 F.3d 1296, 1299 (11th Cir. 2008)
(finding that an employer’s statement not wanting to hire “any old pilots” was direct evidence);
Damon v. Fleming Supermarkets of Fla., Inc., 196 F.3d 1354 (11th Cir. 1999) (finding an
employer’s statement that he “wanted aggressive young men like himself to be promoted” was
circumstantial). Because a reasonable juror could decide to take Stull’s statement “at face
value” and find that Ward was rejected because of his age, Mora, 597 F.3d at 1205, summary
judgment must be denied. “To conclude otherwise would be to deny Plaintiff the benefit of
resolving all reasonable inferences in h[is] favor as the nonmoving party.” [citations omitted].
Accordingly, Defendant’s Motion for Summary Judgment is DENIED. Trial will be scheduled by
separate Order.
[Editor’s Note: This Order denying Publix summary judgment was entered on January 29, 2016.
On July 27, 2016, the parties agreed to settlement terms, and this case was dismissed as a result of
that settlement on September 7, 2016. This suit was originally filed on May 9, 2014].
Case #1: Questions to Answer Before Class
1) The plaintiff in this case, Donald Ward, applied for an open meat cutter position with
Publix Super Markets, but was not hired. Does the opinion indicate whether Ward had
prior meat cutting experience?
2) After Ward’s employment application was rejected, Ward sued Publix for age
discrimination under the Age Discrimination in Employment Act (ADEA), which
prohibits discrimination on the basis of age. How old is Donald Ward?
3) Regarding the previous question, why does it matter, based on the provisions of the
ADEA, that Ward is “over age 40?”
4) In your view, why does it matter that the person hired over Ward, 24-year old Corey
Beddon, was significantly younger than Ward?
5) Determining whether Ward was the victim of age discrimination boiled down to just one
item of evidence. About five days after Ward’s interview at Publix, Meat Manager Tyler
Stull left the following voicemail message for Ward: “Hey there Donald, my name is
Tyler Stull. I interviewed you for a position here at Publix on Mobile Highway. We’re
gonna go in a different direction, we’re gonna train one of our younger associates to be a
meat cutter, hopefully. So we’re going to release you back into the pool, so hopefully
another store they [sic] can come by and pick you up.” To succeed under the ADEA, a
plaintiff like Ward must prove that his age “actually motivated the employer’s decision.”
According to the court, could a reasonable jury find that this voice mail meets that
standard? Why or why not?
6) What should Tyler Stull have done differently to better protect Publix from potential
legal liability?
7) This suit was filed in May 2014. Although the dispute in this case was relatively simple
and straightforward, essentially boiling down to the meaning of one unartfully worded
voice mail, the case did not get resolved until September 2016. What do you make of
this?
8) From an HR perspective, what is the lesson of this case?
Case #5: Jespersen v. Harrah’s Operating Co., 444 F.3d 1104 (9th Cir. 2006)
[This opinion has been edited by the author to provide focus on the key elements. Edits are indicated through brackets [] or through ***.
In addition, certain language has been bolded or underlined for emphasis. Unless otherwise indicated, all footnotes have been omitted. In
addition, case citations have been omitted or edited to conform to BlueBook citation requirements].
SCHROEDER, Chief Judge.
*** The plaintiff, Darlene Jespersen, was terminated from her position as a bartender at the sports bar in
Harrah’s Reno casino not long after Harrah’s began to enforce its comprehensive uniform, appearance
and grooming standards for all bartenders. The standards required all bartenders, men and women, to
wear the same uniform of black pants and white shirts, a bow tie, and comfortable black shoes. The
standards also included grooming requirements that differed to some extent for men and women,
requiring women to wear some facial makeup and not permitting men to wear any. Jespersen
refused to comply with the makeup requirement and was effectively terminated for that reason.
*** We agree with the [courts below] that on this record, Jespersen has failed to present evidence
sufficient to survive summary judgment on her claim that the policy imposes an unequal burden on
women. With respect to sex stereotyping, we hold that appearance standards, including makeup
requirements, may well be the subject of a Title VII claim for sexual stereotyping, but that on this record
Jespersen has failed to create any triable issue of fact that the challenged policy was part of a policy
motivated by sex stereotyping. We therefore affirm.
I. BACKGROUND
Plaintiff Darlene Jespersen worked successfully as a bartender at Harrah’s for twenty years and
compiled what by all accounts was an exemplary record. *** In February 2000, Harrah’s implemented a
“Beverage Department Image Transformation” program at twenty Harrah’s locations, including its
casino in Reno. Part of the program consisted of new grooming and appearance standards, called the
“Personal Best” program. The program contained certain appearance standards that applied equally to
both sexes, including a standard uniform of black pants, white shirt, black vest, and black bow tie. ***
The program also contained some sex-differentiated appearance requirements as to hair, nails, and
makeup.
In April 2000, Harrah’s amended that policy to require that women wear makeup. Jespersen’s
only objection here is to the makeup requirement. The amended policy provided in relevant part:
All Beverage Service Personnel *** must be well groomed, appealing to the eye, be firm and body
toned, and be comfortable with maintaining this look while wearing the specified uniform.***
Beverage Bartenders and Barbacks will adhere to these additional guidelines:
• Overall Guidelines (applied equally to male/ female):
• Appearance: Must maintain Personal Best image portrayed at time of hire.
• Jewelry, if issued, must be worn. Otherwise, tasteful and simple jewelry is permitted; no large
chokers, chains or bracelets.
1
• No faddish hairstyles or unnatural colors are permitted.
• Males:
• Hair must not extend below top of shirt collar.
Ponytails are prohibited.
• Hands and fingernails must be clean and nails neatly trimmed at all times. No colored polish is
permitted.
• Eye and facial makeup is not permitted.
• Shoes will be solid black leather or leather type with rubber (non skid) soles.
• Females:
• Hair must be teased, curled, or styled every day you work. Hair must be worn down at all times,
no exceptions.
• Stockings are to be of nude or natural color consistent with employee’s skin tone. No runs.
• Nail polish can be clear, white, pink or red color only. No exotic nail art or length.
• Shoes will be solid black leather or leather type with rubber (non skid) soles.
• Make up (face powder, blush and mascara) must be worn and applied neatly in
complimentary colors. Lip color must be worn at all times.
Jespersen did not wear makeup on or off the job, and in her deposition stated that wearing it would
conflict with her self-image. It is not disputed that she found the makeup requirement offensive, and felt
so uncomfortable wearing makeup that she found it interfered with her ability to perform as a bartender.
Unwilling to wear the makeup, and not qualifying for any open positions at the casino with a similar
compensation scale, Jespersen left her employment with Harrah’s.
After *** obtaining a right to sue [letter from the EEOC], Jespersen filed this action in July 2001. In her
complaint, Jespersen [alleged] that the “Personal Best” policy discriminated against women by “(1)
subjecting them to terms and conditions of employment to which men are not similarly subjected, and
(2) requiring that women conform to sex-based stereotypes as a term and condition of employment.”
Harrah’s moved for summary judgment [and] argued that the policy created similar standards for both
men and women, and that where the standards differentiated on the basis of sex, as with the face and
hair standards, any burdens imposed fell equally on both male and female bartenders.
In her deposition testimony***, Jespersen described the personal indignity she felt as a result of
attempting to comply with the makeup policy. Jespersen testified that when she wore the makeup she
2
“felt very degraded and very demeaned.” In addition, Jespersen testified that “it prohibited [her] from
doing [her] job” because “[i]t affected [her] self-dignity … [and] took away [her] credibility as an
individual and as a person.” ***
The record *** does not contain any affidavit or other evidence to establish that complying with the
“Personal Best” standards caused burdens to fall unequally on men or women, and there is no evidence
to suggest Harrah’s motivation was to stereotype the women bartenders. Jespersen relied solely on
evidence that she had been a good bartender, and that she had personal objections to complying with the
policy, in order to support her argument that Harrah’s “ ‘sells’ and exploits its women employees.” ***
In this appeal, Jespersen maintains that the record before the district court was sufficient to create triable
issues of material fact as to her unlawful discrimination claims of unequal burdens and sex stereotyping.
We deal with each in turn.
II. UNEQUAL BURDENS
In order to assert a valid Title VII claim for sex discrimination, a plaintiff must make out a prima facie
case establishing that the challenged employment action was either intentionally discriminatory or that it
had a discriminatory effect on the basis of gender. *** In this case, Jespersen argues that the makeup
requirement itself establishes a prima facie case of discriminatory intent***. Our settled law in this
circuit, however, does not support Jespersen’s position***.
***In Frank v. United Airlines, Inc., 216 F.3d 845 (9th Cir. 2000), we dealt with a weight policy that
applied different standards to men and women in a facially unequal way. The women were forced to
meet the requirements of a medium body frame standard while men were required to meet only the more
generous requirements of a large body frame standard. In that case, we recognized that “[a]n appearance
standard that imposes different but essentially equal burdens on men and women is not disparate
treatment.” The United weight policy, however, did not impose equal burdens. On its face, the policy
embodied a requirement that categorically “‘applie[d] less favorably to one gender[,]’” and the burdens
imposed upon that gender were obvious from the policy itself. [citations in the previous paragraph
omitted].
This case stands in marked contrast, for here we deal with requirements that, on their face, are not more
onerous for one gender than the other. Rather, Harrah’s “Personal Best” policy contains sexdifferentiated requirements regarding each employee’s hair, hands, and face. While those individual
requirements differ according to gender, none on its face places a greater burden on one gender
than the other. Grooming standards that appropriately differentiate between the genders are not
facially discriminatory.
We have long recognized that companies may differentiate between men and women in appearance and
grooming policies, and so have other circuits. [Editor’s Note: Here, the court cited cases from seven
different federal circuit courts of appeal]. The material issue under our settled law is not whether the
policies are different, but whether the policy imposed on the plaintiff creates an “unequal burden” for
the plaintiff’s gender. [citations omitted]. Not every differentiation between the sexes in a grooming and
appearance policy creates a “significantly greater burden of compliance[.]” [citation omitted]. For
example, in Fountain, this court upheld Safeway’s enforcement of its sex-differentiated appearance
standard, including its requirement that male employees wear ties, because the company’s actions in
enforcing the regulations were not “overly burdensome to its employees [.]” [citations omitted].
Similarly, as the Eighth Circuit has recognized, “[w]here, as here, such [grooming and appearance]
3
policies are reasonable and are imposed in an evenhanded manner on all employees, slight differences
in the appearance requirements for males and females have only a negligible effect on employment
opportunities.” [citation omitted]. Under established equal burdens analysis, when an employer’s
grooming and appearance policy does not unreasonably burden one gender more than the other, that
policy will not violate Title VII.
Jespersen [argues] that it costs more money and takes more time for a woman to comply with the
makeup requirement than it takes for a man to comply with the requirement that he keep his hair short,
but these are not matters appropriate for judicial notice. [Moreover,] Jespersen did not submit any
documentation or any evidence of the relative cost and time required to comply with the grooming
requirements by men and women. As a result, we would have to speculate about those issues in order to
then guess whether the policy creates unequal burdens for women. This would not be appropriate.
[citations omitted].
Having failed to create a record establishing that the “Personal Best” policies are more burdensome for
women than for men, Jespersen did not present any triable issue of fact. The district court correctly
granted summary judgment on the record before it with respect to Jespersen’s claim that the makeup
policy created an unequal burden for women.
III. SEX STEREOTYPING
In Price Waterhouse, *** the plaintiff, Ann Hopkins, was denied partnership in the national accounting
firm of Price Waterhouse because some of the partners found her to be too aggressive. [As a result of
Price Waterhouse,] a plaintiff in a Title VII case may introduce evidence that the employment decision
was made in part because of a sex stereotype. [citation omitted]. According to the Court, this is because
“we are beyond the day when an employer could evaluate employees by assuming or insisting that they
matched the stereotype associated with their group.”*** It was therefore impermissible for Hopkins’s
employer to place her in an untenable Catch-22: she needed to be aggressive and masculine to excel at
her job, but was denied partnership for doing so because of her employer’s gender stereotype. Instead,
Hopkins was advised to “‘walk more femininely, talk more femininely, dress more femininely, wear
make up, have her hair styled, and wear jewelry.’” [citation omitted].
The stereotyping in Price Waterhouse interfered with Hopkins’ ability to perform her work; the
advice that she should take “a course at charm school” was intended to discourage her use of the
forceful and aggressive techniques that made her successful in the first place. [citation omitted].
Impermissible sex stereotyping was clear because the very traits that she was asked to hide were
the same traits considered praiseworthy in men.
Harrah’s “Personal Best” policy is very different. The policy does not single out Jespersen. It applies to
all of the bartenders, male and female. It requires all of the bartenders to wear exactly the same uniforms
while interacting with the public in the context of the entertainment industry. It is for the most part
unisex, from the black tie to the non-skid shoes. There is no evidence in this record to indicate that the
policy was adopted to make women bartenders conform to a commonly-accepted stereotypical image of
what women should wear. The record contains nothing to suggest the grooming standards would
objectively inhibit a woman’s ability to do the job. The only evidence in the record to support the
stereotyping claim is Jespersen’s own subjective reaction to the makeup requirement.
*** We respect Jespersen’s resolve to be true to herself and to the image that she wishes to project to the
world. We cannot agree, however, that her objection to the makeup requirement, without more, can give
4
rise to a claim of sex stereotyping under Title VII. If we were to do so, we would come perilously close
to holding that every grooming, apparel, or appearance requirement that an individual finds personally
offensive, or in conflict with his or her own self-image, can [amount to] sex discrimination.
This is not a case where the dress or appearance requirement is intended to be sexually provocative, and
tending to stereotype women as sex objects.*** Jespersen’s claim here materially differs from Hopkins’
claim in Price Waterhouse because Harrah’s grooming standards do not require Jespersen to conform to
a stereotypical image that would objectively impede her ability to perform her job requirements as a
bartender.***
AFFIRMED.
[dissenting opinions omitted].
Case #5: Questions to Answer Before Class
1) Why was Jespersen terminated from her job as bartender at the Harrah’s Reno casino?
2) As the facts indicate, in April 2000, Harrah’s amended its grooming and appearance standards by
including certain sex-differentiated appearance requirements as to hair, nails, and makeup.
Portions of that policy are quoted in the “Background” section of the case. What did that policy
require of males and females in regards to makeup?
3) In this case, Jespersen objected to the different standards for males and females in regards to
makeup. Jespersen based her sex discrimination claim on two separate theories: unequal
burdens and sex stereotyping. Why did this court reject Jespersen’s unequal burdens argument?
4) In the portion of the case dealing with the unequal burdens theory, Jespersen argued that it costs
more money and takes more time for a woman to comply with the makeup requirement than it
takes for a man to comply with the requirement that he keep his hair short. Why did the court
reject this argument?
5) Why did the court reject Jespersen’s sex stereotyping argument? When answering this question,
be sure to address why the court distinguished this case from the sex stereotyping that occurred
in Price Waterhouse v. Hopkins.
6) At the end of the opinion, the court declared: “We respect Jespersen’s resolve to be true to
herself and to the image that she wishes to project to the world. We cannot agree, however, that
[she has a valid] claim of sex stereotyping under Title VII. If we were to do so, we would come
perilously close to holding that every grooming, apparel, or appearance requirement that an
individual finds personally offensive, or in conflict with his or her own self-image, can [lead to a
claim of] sex discrimination.” Do you agree? Why or why not?
5
ETHICAL DILEMMA; From Personality to Values to Political Ideology in HiringBefore analyzing the Ethical Dilemma case on page 168 of the Text, please define and explain Values.Briefly describe the Importance and Organization of Values.What is the difference between Terminal and Instrumental Values?Linking an Individual’s Personality and Values to the Workplace, please describe Person-Job Fit.What is Person-Organization Fit?In the Ethical Dilemma case, do you think an organization has a right to test your political ideology as a condition of hiring? Why or why not?In question 6, can we reliably differentiate values (such as those used to assess person–organization fit) from political ideology reliably? Why or why not?In question 7, do you think it is important to foster political ideological diversity in organizations? Why or why not?
I need guidance to calculate for some financial ratios related to a food truck business such as break-even-point, gross profit margin based on the provided infor
Unformatted Attachment Preview
What is the cost of all the food for the truck?
I attached the cost of all the items I use every day, see attachment, and let me
know if you have any questions. Also, usually I spend about $400 to $500 a
week.
Do you pay for electricity at the farm, and if so, how much is it?
I pay $30 monthly for electricity at the farm. I only use it on Saturday and
Sunday every week.
What is the cost of all menu items?
American Hotdog Plain: $1.12
American Hotdog with tops: $1.50
Brazilian Hotdog: $2.79
Soda: $ 0.47
Water: $ 0.16
Juice: $ 0.30
Chips: $0.38
Meal Deal Combo ( American hotdog+Chips+ Drink)=$2.62 (added with the
most expensive drink(soda) for this price.
Brazilian Combo (Brazilian dog+ chips+Drink) = $3.91
Do you pay a fee in order to accept debit/credit card payments?
Yes, I use Square and pay 2.6%+10 cents per credit or debit card transaction.
• Do you pay others to help with the food truck?
I work alone for now.
How much do you typically sell in a day? In a week?
Sales vary every day, but on average I have been selling this last few weeks
between $700 to $900 daily and about $1600 per week. Last month my
average daily was between $300 to $400 so about $700 to $800 per week.
Cost of using a restaurant’s sink for sanitation?
$150 monthly
Cost of licenses?
Hawker and Peddler State of NH License $50
State of NH Department of State Limit Liability Registration $105
NH Health Department License $225
Trailer Registration City of Litchfield $93
Liability Insurance $299.00 Yearly
State Farm Insurance for accident on the trailer: I think is about $200 every six
months.
What are the total fixed costs (TFC) per month?
Commissary $150
Eletricity$30
YouTube for music on the truck: $13.99
What are the variable costs such as a hot dog cost, bun cost, condiments and
toppings cost, napkins cost, etc.?
I attached in the email all the individual items’ costs.
Also, something that may be important to know is that I must pay Meals and Rental
taxes every month. NH requires taxes on prepared food, so the customer pays 7.83% in
taxes on each item I sell in the truck. The taxes are already included in the prices so
there is no confusion for the customers.
My Menu and Prices are as follows (with taxes included):
American hotdog with or without toppings: $6.50
(toppings available: ketchup, mustard, onions, sauerkraut, relish, chili, and Cheese)
Meal Deal (American Hotdog, chips and drink): $8.50
Brazilian Buffet Hotdog: 1 ½ hotdog in a sub roll with Mayonnaise, onions, tomatoes,
peas, corn, mashed potatoes, casava flour, parmesan cheese, potato sticks, ketchup,
and mustard. $10.00
Brazilian Combo with chips and drink: $12
Chips:1.50
PART 1 DIRECTIONS:
Discussion – Verbal and Nonverbal Messages
For this discussion, you are going to observe a conversation between two people and comment on both their verbal and nonverbal behaviors during the interaction.
First listen to either a conversation you observed outside of your home, such as at school, a grocery store, an elevator, or on a bus. Do not make it obvious you are listening to their conversation, just casually observe. While you are observing, try to answer the following questions and report back about the conversation in your original post.
What do you think the relationship between the two people was?
What do you think they were discussing?
What nonverbal actions occurred in the interaction?
What paralanguage did you pick up on and how did it influence the conversation?
Keep in mind these responses will all be conjecture because you will not know what the true answers are. The point is to see what information you can obtain by simply watching people converse.
For your response post, write 3-5 sentences offering different perspectives and observations based on what your classmate wrote. We all read nonverbal behaviors differently!
classmate to reply to
Jalisa Montgomeryshe/her/hers
10/17/23, 11:01 PM
NEW
The conversation I observed today was between two co-workers while I was at the bank. At this time there were only two bank clerks on shift since it was close to closing time.
The relationship between the two was new developing work relationship between the two co-workers as I could tell the bank teller that was helping me was a little nervous and timid. She did not seem like she wanted to be in the way of the other bank teller when they went to the back to grab papers from the printer and discuss things. When they both walked away I could hear the co-worker who was not assisting me say something as the other teller walked into the room she was in. I could sense it was about the teller that was helping me to finish more quickly because she was ready to lock the doors and she kept looking at her watch
The bank teller that was helping me seem as if she kept letting her co-worker know that she was printing out things and she kept apologizing as if she was in the way of the other co-worker doing her job.
A few non verbal actions that occurred between the two co-workers were the bank teller helping me walking very fast back and fourth to the printer and the desk I was sitting being assisted at in a panic and nervous way because the other co-worker wanted to hurry and lock the doors oft the bank she kept checking the time and looking at the printer.
The paralanguage I picked up on was the teller that was not assisting anyone having a very low tone that seemed tired or irritable. While the other teller seemed a bit shaky with her words and uncomfortable when she spoke with the other teller. The conversation did not seem very genuine or comfortable for either parties.
Written Assignment – Critique of a Speaker
For this assignment, you are going to evaluate the verbal and nonverbal aspects of a speaker’s presentation. An evaluation form is provided below to help guide your assessment of the content (what is being said) and the delivery (how it is said).
You have the option to go out and observe a live event, or you can watch one of the speeches from the Library provided below. The links will take you to important speeches from history.
John F. Kennedy—Inaugural Address
Martin Luther King Jr.—I Have a Dream
Fred Rogers—Address to Congress
John McCain—Return to the Senate
Emma Gonzalez—March for Our Lives
You may also prefer to use a TED Talk, like the following:
Debbie Millman—How Symbols and Brands Shape Our Humanity
Chuck Plunkett—When Local News Dies, So Does Democracy
Elizabeth Stordeur Pryor—Why It’s So Hard to Talk About the N-Word
David Wallace-Wells—How We Could Change the Planet’s Climate Future
Do the following, to complete this assignment:
Print out the Speaker Critique Form (linked above), and familiarize yourself with the elements of the presentation that you will be assessing.
View a presentation, a lecture, a sermon, or some sort of public speaking event. A live event would be great, but one of the Library Video Options (linked above) is acceptable.
During the presentation, complete the Speaker Critique Form; consider including notes to help you remember specific details later.
Write a 2-page paper, using proper spelling and grammar, that addresses the following:
Provide an introduction describing who spoke, what they spoke about, and where you heard the presentation. If you chose to use a library video, be sure to clearly identify its title and provide a link to the specific video within the series.
After the introduction, talk about what parts of the content were done well and what the speaker could have done better. Address at least 2 different elements of content.
Next, talk about what parts of the delivery were done well and what the speaker could have done better. Address at least 2 different elements of delivery.
End with a concluding paragraph, giving your opinion about whether the speaker was effective or not. Explain your reasoning.
As college students, many of us have to tighten our belts as we are faced with limited income that results in budget constraints.
For your initial post, think of a time when you were affected by a budget constraint or an instance in which you experienced diminishing marginal utility. Provide a real-life example and share how you determined your end result. Please address the following questions:
Discuss a budget constraint from your own experience, such as when you had to choose between two goods? For instance, you could share an example of how you budget coffee brewed at home versus Starbucks or Caribou coffee.
Describe how marginal utility was experienced in your situation? For instance, when did you experience total satisfaction?
Going forward, now that you know more about budget constraints, do you anticipate that this will impact your future consumption?
In your reply post, discuss how a peer’s initial post relates to your own. Please be supportive and encouraging in your posts.
Part 2: Written Assignment—Producer and Consumer Theory Report
Distinguish between producer and consumer theory.
You are a junior executive of a new cellular phone carrier called Technologies of the Future (TOF) that competes in the same market as Verizon Wireless, AT&T, and T-Mobile. You have been tasked with providing the Committee Board members of TOF with a report that discusses issues that would be encountered by Technologies of the Future (TOF) when deciding whether TOF and Apple iPhones are substitutes or complementary goods and when analyzing the price elasticity of demand for the competitors’ smartphones. Address the following items in your report:
If the price elasticity of demand is 5, and prices increase by 10%, calculate the percentage change in quantity demanded.
Explain which TOF smartphones and Apple iPhones would be considered substitutes or complementary goods in terms of changes in price, and what impact a change in quantity would have.
Is the cross-price elasticity of demand positive or negative, and why?
Explain which TOF smartphones and phone chargers would be an example of substitutes or complementary goods.
There are 2 different questions one is regarding leadership style and the other regarding organizations. You can use your own sources. Please cite sources used to answer each question. each must only be a paragraph long. Q1) Is the relationship changing between leaders and managers? If so, how?Q2)Research
has shown that over half of the decisions made within organizations fail. What
surprises you about this statement and what might be the cause of almost 50%
failure in making decisions?
Refer
to the book as the main reference.
I
need clear and satisfied answers for the questions.
NO
plagiarism please, I need UNIQUE work.
All
answers must be typed using Times New Roman, size 12, 1.5 line
spacing with adjust to all paragraphs (alignment)
Use
the footer function to insert page number.
No
pictures PLESE, Graph should be drawn in word document not as a picture
Use
APA style (references and in text citation) in the project and references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
•
•
•
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Assignment 2 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
For this week’s homework, we are going to look to the future (and realize it is starting to happen today). ElectReon has developed a new technology that enables EVs to charge themselves while driving on specially prepared roads. That is, to charge themselves!
Here are some resources to review in advance:
Green Roads – ElectReon resources
Video
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7cSCsIFREmgLinks to an external site.
Article + Video
https://www.autoevolution.com/news/sweden-successfully-tests-wireless-charging-road-set-to-revolutionize-mobility-155137.htmlLinks to an external site.
Assignment in three parts:
1. Summarize how this tech actually works.
2. If you were the content manager for ElectReon, how would you use social media to create awareness of this capability? What two social channels do you recommend and why?
3. Provide three creative ideas for using the two social channels you recommend to get your target audience excited about this technology.
After reading through the case study, answer the following questions and be prepared to discuss in the live session (common themes from student responses will be brought into the live session):What individual and family strengths do you notice? What do you see as the presenting problem(s)?What information is missing? What questions do you have of the family in order to better understand their situation?What cultural factors do you want to be aware of and what potential issues of bias and/or overidentification might come up for you? What work will you need to do in order to view this family from a positive multicultural/social justice/feminist lens?What cognitive techniques would you try with Andrew? With his father?What cognitive theory–related homework assignments might be useful for FOC to carry out (share one or two)?What advantages and disadvantages do you see in using cognitive theory as the sole theory of choice?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case: Andrew Smith, 10 years old, Caucasian, male
Primary diagnosis: PTSD
Fourth session with the family
Current medication: guanFacine HCI (Guanfacine hydrochloride—Used to treat high blood
pressure and attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder [ADHD]
Per his individualized education plan (IEP) at school, Andrew is functioning below average,
reading at a 3.2 grade level, writing at a 2.5 grade level, and performing math at a 3.5 grade
level. Based on the Reynolds Intellectual Assessment Scale, he scores average on overall
thinking, reasoning, and verbal processing. Nonverbal reasoning and the ability to briefly store
information and recall it is in the average range.
Both Andrew and father of child (FOC) completed the Child PTSD Symptom Scale, with client
reporting almost no issues and FOC reporting high acuity.
FOC’s consistent concern is around Andrew’s ability to demonstrate empathy and often states,
“What kind of a child am I raising?”
Andrew was admitted to the Mental Health Center of Denver’s Child and Family Services Day
Treatment program at the end of April 2017. During his time in the program, and as previously
reported from his past home-based therapist and school, Andrew struggles with engagement (i.e.,
impulsive and disruptive behaviors [bxs] in the classroom, such as talking out of turn, talking
back to teachers, fighting with peers, low to no mood awareness, and low to no self-regulation
related to PTSD).
The family’s goals are to improve family emotional connection and cohesion, and establish a
healthy family structure on a consistent basis. Andrew lives with his father (not his biological
father, but who adopted him and has full custody); his father’s significant other, who is
considered to be his stepmother (and whom he calls “mom”); and his three brothers (8, almost 7,
and 4 years old). Two of Andrew’s brothers are biological, but his youngest brother is his
(adoptive) father’s and stepmother’s son. Andrew’s two biological brothers have microcephaly,
but Andrew does not.
NOTE: Microcephaly is a birth defect where a baby’s head is smaller than expected when
compared to babies of the same sex and age. Babies with microcephaly often have smaller brains
that might not have developed properly.
Summary of History
It has been reported that Andrew’s biological mother locked Andrew in his room as a child with
his biological brothers for the entire workday when his father was at work (FOC was not aware
of this); the kids had no choice but to go to the bathroom on the floor. When FOC became aware
of this, he broke up with Andrew’s biological mother and sought custody of the children, at
which point she took all three children and was on the run with them for approximately seven
months. FOC is also suspicious of possible sexual abuse during this time because Andrew had
not been circumcised prior to his mother taking him and was circumcised upon his father getting
him back—it was reported to FOC that Andrew had an infection resulting in the need for
circumcision, and he questioned how Andrew would have developed an infection.
Andrew struggles with maintaining a normal sleep schedule; he has fears of being alone,
especially around the restroom and sleeping. FOC reported that he was initially afraid of his
stepmother being alone with him in the bathroom. Andrew still wets the bed with a pattern of it
increasing about every three months and then stopping for about two weeks. He also wets his
pants regularly at school and tries to hide it. Hygiene in general is a concern as Andrew
consistently comes to school smelling of urine and reports cleaning his bed up himself after
accidents. FOC reports that he has Andrew shower every other day. Andrew often wears dirty
and tattered clothes to school and is unwilling to change out of them (even when he has an
accident) to wear clean clothes that FOC has for him at school.
FOC is very logical and pragmatic in his approach to Andrew—however, he does not seem to be
able to view Andrew’s diagnosis the same way. FOC has expressed feeling that Andrew is
manipulative, nonempathetic, and consciously chooses to make poor choices. Thus far, FOC’s
primary form of discipline for Andrew has been for him to write sentences regarding his poor
behavior, which sometimes takes Andrew over two hours to complete (largely due to his
inattentiveness).
The current therapist has been working with Andrew and his father from a cognitive theory
framework, focusing mainly on psychoeducation around Andrew’s trauma history, adjusting
expectations/assumptions, and reinforcing a strength-based approach.
FOC is very talkative, so this has been a slow process as this therapist works to maintain a good
rapport with him, but little gets done during sessions since FOC rants about Andrew
continuously and often without pause.
need help with a portfolio assignment. simple assignment, not complicated. Basically looking at some activities and reflecting about creative confidence, linking those actives to analyse and boost personal confidence etc.. Will provide more details later.
In our next module, we will explore a range of dark tourism sites around the world. For this assignment, select a major dark tourism destination (anywhere in the world) and prepare a Visitor’s Fact Sheet (using the attached template). The fact sheet will include:
1. The name and location of the site
2. An image of the site
3. A description of the event(s) that make the site interesting
4. A history of the site’s development as a tourist destination
5. A description of the market for whom this site is attractive
6. Other details such as operating season/hours, admission fees, purpose of the site, ownership/management
7. A link to an official or otherwise reliable website
8. If available, a link to a youtube video of the site
This assignment will be submitted to Turnitin™.
Instructions
Instructions:
Your paper is due by the end of Week 3. There will be a penalty for late submissions (See Syllabus for Details).
The key to this assignment is to demonstrate your understanding of the topics, not to re-word the text or reference material. Please see Appendix A for the grading rubric on all written assignments.
Please complete the scenario below following these guidelines for your deliverable.
Your assignment must be a minimum of 2 pages double spaced, plus a title page and a reference page for a total of 4 pages.
Make sure you are using at least two (2) academic references.
This submission should be created following APA 6th edition guidelines.
The paper is to follow the APA style guide, Sixth Edition (available via bookstores).
Submit your assignment as a MSWord attachment.
Scenario:
You have been hired as a security consultant to secure the network of a Fortune 500 company.
1. Describe the purpose of a risk assessment , risk scope and identify critical areas for an assessment..
2. Select risk assessment methodology and give your rationale behind the one you chose.
In this activity you will select a systematic review related to either your population (P), intervention (I), or outcome (O) of interest. Explore the systematic review by answering a series of questions about the methods and findings of the study, and upload your answers here.
1. Search for and select a systematic review related to one or more components of your PICO question. What is the title of the systematic review that you chose?
2. How did you find this systematic review?
3. How did the authors of the systematic review find the studies they included in their review (e.g., databases, hand searching)?
4. Were unpublished sources or gray literature used? If so, which ones?
5. What were the inclusion and exclusion criteria used to decide which studies were ultimately included in this systematic review?
6. How many studies did the team first identify (before they started narrowing them down using their criteria)? How many did they ultimately include?
7. What is/are the “take-away” message(s) for social work practice based on this systematic review?
check the attached doc it has full details. Kindly deliver on time and quality work.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Instructions:
Overview
When performing an evaluation to determine the performance or health of a company, it is important
to identify and evaluate any current or potential risks the company might face.
In this assignment, you will perform a risk assessment for TransGlobal Airlines to better understand its
business environment.
Prompt
Perform a risk assessment for TransGlobal Airlines and write a report describing the results.
Specifically, you must address the following rubric criteria:
•
Identification : Identify two risks the company is facing, including at least one high-impact risk.
o
Identify the balanced scorecard component each risk corresponds to.
o
Classify the risk based on these two types:
▪
Operational
▪
Strategic
•
Evaluation : Determine whether the probability and impact of each identified risk is low,
medium, or high. Justify your evaluation of the impact and probability of each risk.
•
Mitigation : Recommend a possible risk-prevention or mitigation strategy for each identified
risk.
Guidelines for Submission
Submit a 1- to 2-page Word document using double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and oneinch margins. Sources should be cited according to APA style.
BASIC BALANCED SCORECARD
COMPANY A
ADDRESS
Category
CITY
123 Rountree Place
STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES
TARGET VALUES
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
YEAR 1
Ensure the business is sustainable.
Net profit
Assess the available operational funds by
subtracting existing liabilities from the existing
Net Working Capital
assets.
FINANCIAL
Ensure the business`s ability to pay for its
routine operating expenses.
Operating Cash Flow
by the shareholder through evaluating the
Increase the net profit
profit by 10%
by 15%
Increase the
Increase the NWC by
NWC by 10%
15%
Increase the
OPC by 10%
Increase
Debt to Equity Ratio
business funds
total liabilities against the net worth of the
by 10%
business or shareholders equity.
Raise the business solvency through the
Increase the
division of the total assets by the current
Current Ratio
liabilities.
YEAR 2
Increase the net
Enhance the efficiency of how the business
can fund its growth and utilize the investments
STATE
Miami
ratio from 3.3 to
Increase the
operating cash flow
by 20%
Increase business
funds by 15%
Increase the ratio to 4
4
production performance, labor, material,
Overall Operational Efficiency
KPI ACTION PLAN DETAILS
BUDGETS
Increase the net
Increase the bulk rate sales. Develop new revenue
Introducing new airline will require new labor
sources through introduction of new airline
supply (40 employees), resources (10
destinations and routes( 10 new destinations).
aircrafts). The budgetary allocation for the
Enhancing the value proposition of the company.
two will be $300 Million.
profit by 20%
Increase the NWC
by 20%
Reduce various costs of business.
Increase the OPC
by 25%
Increase the
business funds by
25%
Increase the ratio
to 8
Reduce and replace the ageing aircraft fleet to an
$50 Million
average age of 8 years and below. Reduce on-
times or speed
Reduce the cycle time
of concluding
by 20 %
Reduce the cycle
time by 10%
ground turnaround time of the aircrafts to 45
minutes.
delivery of
INTERNAL PROCESSES
service ) by 30%.
Ensure the company is able to fully achieve the
Increase
maximum with its resources i.e. human
resource, machinery and equipment, and
Capacity Utilization
matching the operating rates with these
low reject ratio, high delivery performance,
Quality
reduced material costs and customer issues.
Ensure fulfillment of operating margins
Increase capacity
Increase capacity
utilization by
utilization by 20%
utilization by 25%
and
Enhance quality and
performance by
performance by 20%.
10%
Cut process
through eliminating stock-outs, equipment
and machinery faults, reduced employee
capacity
15%
Enhance quality
resources.
Ensure high level of customer satisfaction, a
Process Down Time
down time by
50%
downtime, and eliminated unscheduled
Cut process down
time by 75%
Increase quality
and performance
by 30%.
Cut process down
time by 100%
downtime.
Ensure the company is able to retain its
CUSTOMER/MARKET
customers i.e. whether customers return.
Ensure growth in the customer base
Ensure the company focuses on a viable
customer base.
Ensure the airline company experiences full
capacity through bookings.
Customer Retention
0.66
0.8
Customer Growth
0.22
0.35
Market Segmentation
Proper
High
Seat Occupancy Average
0.74
0.85
33101
EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS/INITIATIVES
time (Delivery
technology, and short lead-times.
ZIP
YEAR 3
Reduce the cycle
Ensure high operating efficiency in terms of
FL
0.95
0.5
Potential Airline
Customers
0.97
Enhance public image, brand loyalty and brand
development to attract new clients.
$10 Million
Enhance public image, brand loyalty and brand
$10 Million
CUSTOMER/MARKET
development to attract new clients.
Ensure 50%
training
LEARNING AND GROWTH
Provide strong communication business and
employee development.
Investment Rate
programs
completion
among
Ensure 100%
Ensure 75% training
training programs
programs completion
completion
among employees
Focus on the development of employees
Employee Turn Over
average
Increase the average
turnover rate
turnover rate from
from 12% to
20% to 40%
20%
among
employees
employees
Increase the
Increase the
average turnover
rate from 40% to
50%
Enhance employees training programs, and
investment in up-to-date technologies
$5 Million
STUDENTS KPI SELECTION RATIONALE
SELECTION RATIONALE
CAUSE-EFFECT RELATIONSHIP
The KPIs in the financial category illustrate the
The sustainability of the business in the long term
profitability of company A, and various
is explained by the business financial position in
improvement contexts of how the company can
terms of making profits.
fund its operations.
Operational efficiency, capacity utilization, quality
Internal processes of Company A are affected by
and process downtime demonstrates the
the overall operational efficiency, the level of
smoothness of internal processes at Company A
capacity utilization, quality standards and the
and how it enhance these issues.
downtime of the company`s internal processes.
The rate of customer retention, customer growth,
The public image, business loyalty, and the
viability of the target market segment and the
development of the brand affects the rate of
average of seat occupancy illustrates or indicates
customer retention, growth of customer base, and
improvement points and the customer or market
access by customers to the services offered by the
position of Company A.
Company A. To transform these concepts,
company must pursue a more diversified market
segment.
The rate of customer retention, customer growth,
The public image, business loyalty, and the
viability of the target market segment and the
development of the brand affects the rate of
average of seat occupancy illustrates or indicates
customer retention, growth of customer base, and
improvement points and the customer or market
access by customers to the services offered by the
position of Company A.
Company A. To transform these concepts,
company must pursue a more diversified market
segment.
Employee turn over and the rate of Company A
Employee turn over and the investment rates
investments showcase the objectives and the goals
affects the level of business` learning and growth.
of the company to learning and growth strategies.
Investments into training programs influences the
employee turnover rates.
3
BASIC BALANCED SCORECARD
COMPANY B
ADDRESS
Category
CITY
987 Jouster Drive
STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES
Earn a high return on investments.
Net Profit Margin
FL
ZIP
Enhance and streamline the internal
operations to deliver quality outputs.
INTERNAL PROCESSES
Work closely with other industrial key players
to maximize value.
Enhance competitive market prices with
competitive services.
CUSTOMER/MARKET
Diversify customer segment.
Efficiency Standards
Industry Functionality
Average Prices
Customer segment
32817
KPI ACTION PLAN DETAILS
YEAR 3
EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS/INITIATIVES
Increase the
Annual Revenue will be increased through entry of
YEAR 1
YEAR 2
Increase the
Increase the
annual
annual
revenue to
revenues to
to $36-38
$30-32
Enhance the
$33-35 million
Enhance the
net profit
net profit
million
Enhance the
margin to
margin to
0.4%
0.6%
Increase
Increase
output by
output by
20%
Increase
25%
Increase
industrial
industrial
partnerships
partnerships
In the long-
In the long-
term
term
Increase
Increase
average prices
average prices average prices
airport transportation. Company B can also increase
by 15%
Add a new
by 20%
Add two
by 25%
Add three
redevelopment of the current services.
customer
customer
customer
segment
segments
segments
annual revenue
BUDGETS
$40 Million
different market segment and region through
opening of new destinations and routes
net profit
margin to 0.8%
FINANCIAL
Enhancing the profitability of the company
KPI TARGET VALUES
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
Annual revenues and growth
STATE
Orlando
Increase output
by 30%
Increase
Third party partnership with different key players in
$2 Million
the industry. Enhance efficiency standards by
engaging and outsourcing from external functions
industrial
partnerships In
the long-term
Increase
Adding multi-service and product packages such as
value of their services through innovativeness and
$3 Million
Adding multi-service and product packages such as
$3 Million
airport transportation. Company B can also increase
value of their services through innovativeness and
CUSTOMER/MARKET
redevelopment of the current services.
Reduce
average
Ensure employee retention.
Average turnover rate
employee
LEARNING AND GROWTH
turnover by
Enhance employee skillset and job standards.
Keep Smart (Learning through training and continuing
education)
Reduce average
Introduction of regulatory refresher courses and self
average
employee
self-study customer service and quality principles
employee by
turnover by
such as Workplace safety, diversity training and
workplace substance use.
Reduce
50% to 9%
Increase
75% to 4.5%
Increase
100% to zero
Increase
internal
internal
internal training
training
training
(regulatory
(regulatory
(regulatory
courses and
courses and
courses and
quality
quality
principles) by
principles) by
quality
principles) by
100%
$1 Million
STUDENTS KPI SELECTION RATIONALE
SELECTION RATIONALE
Category
CAUSE-EFFECT RELATIONSHIP
Market segment significantly determines the
Company B has a limited market segment and few
firm`s revenue level and consequently its net profit
destinations. Adding the destinations will give
margin, because the former and the latter rely on
access to new customers which in turn enhances
the level of sales or business transactions
annual revenue.
FINANCIAL
conducted.
Efficiency standards and Industry functionality
Third party relationships and engagement with
illustrates the performances of internal processes
different industry key players dermines the firms
and how those performances allow the firm to fare
efficiency standards especially because the firm is
or stay competitive in the industry.
able to focus on its key competencies and engage
Average prices and customer segment dictates and
To compete among the big players Ian the
indicates the firm`s performances in the market.
industry, companies must abandon providing
They also demonstrate the firms ability to
cheaper prices but instead raise the level of
generate revenue in the market while also
services that match the customer segment and
highlighting the level of service offered by
quality demands of the industry. The two KPIs
Company B.
determine the next steps of developing into an
innovative market player.
CUSTOMER/MARKET
promotes industrial functionality.
INTERNAL PROCESSES
with professional key players in other areas which
industry, companies must abandon providing
They also demonstrate the firms ability to
cheaper prices but instead raise the level of
generate revenue in the market while also
services that match the customer segment and
highlighting the level of service offered by
quality demands of the industry. The two KPIs
Company B.
determine the next steps of developing into an
innovative market player.
The selection rationale of picking the two KPIs for
The relationship between the two KPIs is that the
company B is to enhance its employee retention
airline transportation industry is a highly intensive
and foster a skilled and appropriate workforce
industry that requires constant enhancement of
essential for developing the learning and growth
skills. To foster a consistent workforce that meets
objectives of the company. Company should
industrial standards, company B must step up its
reduce its 18% turnover rate to ensure a more
internal training to also reduce the average
consistent and productive workforce and also
turnover rate.
enhance the skills of its 40% employees without a
diploma or a post-secondary degree.
CUSTOMER/MARKET
To compete among the big players Ian the
indicates the firm`s performances in the market.
LEARNING AND GROWTH
Average prices and customer segment dictates and
3
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title: “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company or His Family?”
Author: by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication: September 1, 2023
Published: Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1.Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case? [Mark 2]
2.Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques? [Marks 3]
a.Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a.Why-1
b.Why-2
c.Why-3
d.Why-4
e.Why-5
b.Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3.Develop a mind map for decision making,
4.Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
Q1. What are the pitfalls of using excel for budgeting instead of an integrated software module that corresponds with the companies general ledger module?Q2. Why is participatory budgeting a critical accounting policy for the service industry such as the Ritz-Carlton?Q3. Explain using Waterworld, Titanic and Paranormal the budgeting issue and the movie industry. Required Textbook: Cost Accounting (17thEdition), Pearson Custom Business Resources*Electronic version of Pearson book 17th Edition is a substitute
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Budgeting
Have you done a personal budget?
Plan of action for a
specified period
An aid to coordinating
what needs to be
done to implement
that plan
Common Problems
• Too draconian
• Lack of reality
• Not based on historical costs
• Not taking into account costing trends
• Non compliance once completed
The Ongoing Budget Process:
1. Managers and accountants plan the
performance of the company, taking into
account past performance and anticipated
future changes.
2. Senior managers distribute a set of goals
against which actual results will be
compared.
The Ongoing Budget Process:
3. Accountants help managers investigate
deviations from budget. Corrective action
occurs at this point.
4. Managers and accountants assess market
feedback, changed conditions, and their own
experiences as plans are laid for the next
budget period.
Strategy, Planning, and Budgets,
Illustrated
Budgeting
DM Inv
WIP Inv
FG Inv
Budgeting is a walk backwards thru the costing system
COGS
Advantages of Budgets
• Provides a framework for judging performance
• Motivates managers and other employees
• Promotes coordination and communication
among subunits within the company
Components of Master Budgets
• Operating budget—building blocks leading to
the creation of the budgeted income
statement
• Financial budget—building blocks based on
the operating budget that lead to the creation
of the budgeted balance sheet and the
budgeted statement of cash flows
Basic Operating Budget Steps
1. Prepare the revenues budget.
2. Prepare the production budget (in units).
3. Prepare the direct materials usage budget
and direct materials purchases budget.
4. Prepare the direct manufacturing labor
budget.
Basic Operating Budget Steps
5. Prepare the manufacturing overhead costs
budget.
6. Prepare the ending inventories budget.
7. Prepare the cost of goods sold budget.
8. Prepare the operating expense (period cost)
budget.
9. Prepare the budgeted income statement.
Basic Financial Budget Steps
Based on the operating budgets:
1. Prepare the capital expenditures budget.
2. Prepare the cash budget.
3. Prepare the budgeted balance sheet.
4. Prepare the budgeted statement of cash
flows.
Sample
Master
Budget,
Illustrated
Other Budgeting Issues
• Financial-planning software may be employed to
conduct sensitivity (“what-if”) analysis to assist in
the budgetary process.
Citizen Watch
• Kaizen budgeting—
incorporating
continuous
improvement factors
in the budgeting
process.
Swatch
AB Budgeting
• Activity-based budgeting—incorporating
activity-based costing in the budgetary
process.
Ritz-Carlton
• Participatory Budgeting
• “management company” – does not own the
underlying hotel – only promises a rate of
return
• High service, but must watch expenditures
Sensitivity Analysis
Sensitivity analysis is used to assist managers in planning
and budgeting.
Sensitivity analysis is a “what if” technique that illustrates
the impact of changes from the predicted data.
Stylistic Furniture’s budget for 2015.
Types of Responsibility Centers
1. Cost—accountable for costs only
2. Revenue—accountable for revenues only
3. Profit—accountable for revenues and costs
4. Investment—accountable for investments,
revenues, and costs
Budgets and Feedback
• Budgets offer feedback in the form of
variances: actual results deviate from
budgeted targets.
• Variances provide managers with:
– Early warning of problems
– A basis for performance evaluation
– A basis for strategy evaluation
Controllability
• Controllability is the degree of influence that a
manager has over costs, revenues, or related
items for which he is being held responsible.
• Responsibility accounting focuses on
information sharing, not in laying blame on a
particular manager.
Budgeting and Human Behavior
• The budgeting process may be abused both by
superiors and subordinates, leading to
negative outcomes.
• Superiors may dominate the budget process
or hold subordinates accountable for events
they have no control over.
• Subordinates may build “budgetary slack” into
their budgets.
Budgetary Slack
• The practice of underestimating budgeted
revenues, or overestimating budgeted
expenses, in an effort to make the resulting
budgeted goals (profits) more easily
attainable.
Question
• What type of business is most dependent on
budget success for profitability?
• Ie. When is budgeting a critical factor?
Answer:
• The movie industry
• Budgeting is important when the revenue is
not tied to the expenses.
Case Study One: Waterworld
• http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki
/Waterworld
• TRx-VCx-TRC = profit
$100M budgeted cost
$175M spent on production
$60M on marketing
Case Study Two: Titanic
• $100 M initial budget
• $200M spent
• Over $2 billion earned
Case Study: Paranormal Activity
• Budget $15,000
• Gross $195 M
Select, read, and critique research articles from a professional journal or source on a topic relating to teaching.** If you can find an article geared towards Kindergarten students.**The critique should contain three sections: summary, connections to education, and personal reflection. Please attach a copy of the article with the paper.
Each student will be given monthly Legal Updates in Modules. Each student will select a court case to report on. The following format will be used to describe the selected court case:
I. Citation
II. Topic
III. Issue
IV. Facts
V. Findings
VI. Reasoning
The report on this case should be clear and concise using at least 300 words as you describe this court case. This case will be reported both verbally as well as written in Canvas.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
June 2023 (70)
LEGAL UPDATE FOR SCHOOL ADMINISTRATORS
June 2023
Johnny R. Purvis aka Doc*
West Education Law Reporter
October 27, 2022–403 Ed. Law No. 2 (Pages 377-977) – #22
November 10, 2022–404 Ed Law No. 1 (Pages 1-397) – #23
The Legal Update for School Administrators is sponsored by:
William Carey University School of Education
And
PREPS Inc., Dr. Chuck Benigno, Executive Director
The Legal Update is a monthly update of selected significant court cases in the United
States pertaining to school administration and general school district operations. It is funded and
sponsored by William Carey University’s School of Education and PREPS Inc. If you have any
questions or comments about the selected cases and their potential ramifications, please contact
Johnny R. Purvis by phone (601-310-4559) or email (jpurvis@uca.edu) or Dr. Ben Burnett,
President, William Carey University.
Topics:
Abuse and Harassment
Civil Rights
Health
Labor and Employment
Religion
Torts
1
Cases:
Abuse and Harassment
High school football coach was engaged in a state action (An action that is taken directly by the
state or bears a sufficient connection to the state to be attributed to it…football coach employed
by a school district.) when he ordered players to assault a football referee, to subject the coach
to liability under Section 1983 (civil rights). Note: The United States Court of Appeals, Fifth
Circuit, affirmed in part, reversed in part, and remanded the case back to the United States
District for the Western District of Texas.
Watts v. Northside Independent School Dist. (C.A.5 [Tex.], 37 F. 4th 1094), June 27, 2022.
The United States Court of Appeals, Fifth Circuit affirmed in part, reversed in part,
and referred the case back to the Texas court since the school district was not liable. Texas
law clearly established that the assistant football coach engaged in a “state action” when he
ordered his football players to physically assault a football referee during a high school football
game. Due to being a school district employee (under state law) the coach was subject to
liability (not the school district) under Section 1983 (federal civil rights) for the referee’s
substantive due process claim. Note #1: The coach was on the sidelines acting in his role as an
assistant football coach at a public high school, and therefore, the coach could not escape
liability by ordering his players to attack a football referee; furthermore, any reasonable football
coach would have known that he was engaged in a state action when he instructed his players
during a football game. Note #2: The two players who followed the demand of the assistant
coach to “hit the ref,” stated that they followed the coach’s direction to hit the ref, knew what
they did was wrong, but they did it anyway because of their trust in the coach. Note #3: The
assault left the referee with “a turf burns on his forehead, a cut next to his right eye, and a large
abrasion on his left arm. In addition, he received a concussion and experienced “post-concussion
syndrome and an anxiety disorder.”
Virtual learning program was a reasonable accommodation under ADA and Rehabilitation Act
with respect to school district’s reduced COVID-19 restrictions.
L.E. v. Ragsdale (N.D. Ga., 568 F. Supp. 3d 1364), October 15, 2021.
The United States Court, N.D. Georgia, Atlanta Division held that a school district
reasonably accommodated students’ disabilities with respect to reduced COVID-19
restrictions, and the accommodations adequately provided students with meaningful access
to education, and therefore students failed to demonstrate the likelihood of success on the
merits of their failure-to-accommodate claims under ADA and the Rehabilitation Act.
Therefore, evidence did not support “injunctive relief” in the form of a temporary restraining
order (TRO) or a preliminary injunction requiring the school district and school board to
reimplement COVID-19 safety measures such as mask mandates, were provided
accommodations included a robust virtual learning program, in which students were allegedly
performing reasonably well, meeting their grade level standards, and earning high marks. Note:
The plaintiffs were four students with disabilities who attended Cobb County schools. Their
disabilities varied but included acute myeloid leukemia, hypogammaglobulinemia, Duchenne
2
Muscular Dystrophy, bronchiectasis (an airway clearance impairment), chronic severe asthma,
and chronic bronchitis and pneumonia.
Parent of public-school kindergarten student stated a claim under Title IX against school
district for alleged sexual assault and harassment of student.
Moore vs. Freeport Community Unit Sch. Dist. No. 145 (N.D. Ill., 570 F. Supp. 3d 601,
November 8, 2021. Note: The court granted in part and denied in part. The case might be
appealed by one or the other “parts” in the litigation, as the case now stands (sort of like a draw
or tie).
The United States District Court, N.D. Illinois, Western Division held that (1) Under
Title IX claims based on student-on-student harassment, schools and districts that receive federal
funding are liable in damages only where they are deliberately indifferent to the sexual
harassment, of which they have actual knowledge, that is so severe, pervasive, and objectively
offensive that it can be said to deprive the victims of access to the educational opportunities or
benefits provided by the school and (2) Parent of public school kindergarten student stated a
claim for damages against school district under Title IX with allegations that the district
subjected the student to discrimination in which the student was sexually assaulted by a
classmate and, after the assaults, was sexually harassed by the classmate and others on a daily
basis; although the school district had a safety plan, classmate was allowed to be unsupervised
with the student, and student experienced physical and psychological arm from the assaults,
which included behavioral changes, a urinary tract infection, missed days of school,
nightmares, and sleeplessness, leading student to transfer to a private school, and parent
reported continued harassment of student by the classmate, and others at school.
Civil rights
Student’s First Amendment challenge to dress/grooming code and enforcement of same is
governed by Tinker.
N.J. by Jacob v. Sonnabend (C.A.7 [Wis.], 37 F. 4th 412), November 12, 2021.
The United States District Court for the Eastern District of Wisconsin denied the
students’ motion (The 7th grade student wore a T-shirt to school with the image of a revolver and
the inscription “Smith & Wesson made in the USA since 1852) for summary judgment and
granted defendants’ (school officials) motion, and the student appealed. The United States Court
of Appeals Seventh Circuit “vacated and remanded” the case back to the Eastern District Court
and stated that the court must rely on the Tinker’s standard for evaluating a student’s “freespeech claim “which permits restrictions on student speech claim as constitutionally justified if
school authorities can reasonably forecast that the speech in question would materially and
substantially disrupt the work and discipline of the school or invade the rights of others. Thus,
the decision of school officials requires more than a mere desire to avoid discomfort and
unpleasantness that always accompanies an unpopular viewpoint, undifferentiated fear or
apprehension of a disturbance is not enough to overcome the right to freedom of expression.
3
Health
The student’s mother failed to show the likelihood of success on her claim that mask mandates
in response to COVID-19 was a substantive due process violation.
Doe v. Franklin Square Union Free School Dist. (E.D.N.Y., 568 F. Supp. 3d 270), October 26,
2021.
The United States District Court, E.D. New York held that the mother of a minor female
student failed to demonstrate/show a “likelihood of success” pertaining to her claim that the
school’s mask mandate was a substantive due process violation in her lawsuit seeking a
preliminary injunction barring the school district and Commissioner of the New York State
Department of Public Health from enforcing a mask mandate in schools in response to the
COVID-19 pandemic. Despite the plaintiff’s claim that masks are “inimical” (likely to cause a
disadvantage or have a harmful effect).
Labor and Employment
(Very important case for public schools) The school district violated the Free Exercise and Free
Speech Clauses by suspending a football coach for offering private prayers at midfield after
football games.
Kennedy v. Bremerton School Dist. (U.S., 142 S. Ct. 2407), June 27, 2022.
The Supreme Court of the United States held that a school district burdened a high
school coach’s right under the United States’ First Amendment’s Free Exercise Clause by
suspending him for his decision to persist in praying quietly at mid field without his players after
three (N=3) football games pursuant to a school district policy that was neither neutral nor
generally applicable. The coach’s sincerely motivated religious exercise” did not involve
leading prayers with the team or before any other captive audience. Furthermore, school
officials sought to restrict the coach’s actions at least in part because of their religious character,
and the district’s recommendation against rehiring the coach for “not” supervising student
athletes after games was a “bespoke” (refer to definition) requirement specifically addressed to
his religious exercise. Bespoke: A product, service, demand, requirement, etc. specifically
made, designed, required, etc. of a person, employee, etc. The term comes from “industry” that
produces a product/service that is specifically made or designed for a particular type of customer.
The Supreme Court of the United States went on to state that the coach engaged in
“private speech,” not government speech attributable to school district employment, when he
quietly at midfield without his players after three (N=3) football games, for purposes of
determining whether his resulting suspension from his coaching position by the school district
violated the First Amendment Free Speech Clause. The coach did not “offer” his prayers while
“acting within the scope of his duties/employment” (job description); therefore, his job
description “left time for a private moment” after football games to engage in any manner of
“secular activities”. He did not speak pursuant to government policy, he did not seek to convey
a government-created message, and he did not instruct players or engage in any other speech the
school district “paid” him to produce as a coach.
4
Sufficient evidence supported the Board of Review’s conclusion that a “substitute teacher” was
not entitled to unemployment-insurance benefits during the summer break.
Johnson v. Director, Department of Workforce Services (Arkansas App., 645 S.W.3d 352), May
11, 2022.
The Court of Appeals of Arkansas, Division III held that sufficient evidence supported
the decision of the Board of Review concluding that the substitute teacher, who was employed
by the school district had “reasonable assurance of employment” for the next school year under
Arkansas state statute, precluding an award of benefits. Therefore, the plaintiff was not
entitled to unemployment-insurance benefits during summer break. The substitute teacher
provided services to the school district on an as needed basis, and she had been placed on the
school district’s “advised substitute-teacher” list for nine years. In addition, her employment
relationship with the school district did not change during the COVID-19 pandemic.
Public school employee was not qualified for the job, and therefore could not state a
“prima facie cause” of discrimination in action against a public-school board of education.
Jones v. Bessemer Bd. of Educ. (N.D. Ala., 570 F. Supp. 3d 1099), November 4, 2021.
Female school employee was not qualified for the job as “work force coordinator,” and
therefore could not state a prima facie case (produce enough evidence) of discrimination under
ADEA (Age Discrimination in Employment Act) in her legal action against a public school
board of education, alleging that the school board discrimination against her on the basis of her
age (56) when they failed to hire her and instead promoted a younger, less qualified individual.
The plaintiff claimed her supervisor told her she was qualified for the job and could take the
required courses while she was holding the position; however, the supervisor denied ever having
the conversation with the plaintiff. In fact, a “provisional certification” did not even exist for the
position, and even if her supervisor told the plaintiff that she was qualified for the job, she still,
objectively, did not qualify.
Religion
County health department’s order requiring all persons to wear face coverings in educational
settings did not violate the Free Exercise Clause of the 1st Amendment of the United States.
Resurrection School vs Hertel (W.D. Mich., 569 F. Supp. 3d F. Supp. 3d 658, November 3,
2021.
County health department order requiring all persons in educational settings to wear face
masks was relationally related to a legitimate government interest in controlling the spread of
COVID-19 and therefore did not violate the Free Exercise Clause (1st Amendment) of a private
religious elementary school and the parents of the students enrolled at the school. The decision
of the county health department was rational for the county health officer who issued the order.
The health department made its decision on an overwhelming body of evidence in support of
masks from state and federal agencies, despite the existence of competing scientific studies
casting doubt on the effectiveness of masks.
5
Torts
Student’s community services activities at off-school location were not school sponsored or
related, for purposes of allegedly owed duty of supervision.
Neff v. Archdiocese of Miami, Inc. (Fla. App. 3 Dist., 338 So.3d 959), January 26, 2022.
The district Court of Appeal of Florida, Third District, held that a private Catholic high
school within the Catholic Archdiocese did not owe a duty of reasonable care to students with
regard to the locations of community service activating for students to participate in under
required school program, despite contention that a duty existed simply because the school
compiled a list of pre-approved service opportunities, where the school did not exert control over
students. Students could choose freely from among 45 organizations on a community service
list. And the school did not have the final say in assigning students to a particular location for
community service activities. The then-sophomore high school student selected Good Hope
Equestrian Training Center as her “community service project”. While serving at Good Hope
and under no supervision, she was injured when a horse reared up and came down on her foot
causing an injury. The District Court of Appeal of Florid, Third District held that the student’s
community service activities at the equestrian training center were not “school sponsored” or
“school related;” therefore, neither the Catholic Archdiocese nor private Catholic high school
within the Archdiocese owed the student a duty of supervision. This was even though the
“community service program” was required for graduation. Note: This case was selected
despite it being a “private religious school” and a private non-school affiliated provided for a
school required activity. This identical or almost identical situation for a public school and
provider would be both a legal, costly, and public relations nightmare!
Thanks for allowing me to serve.
Strength and honor
An Old Retired Teach-Cop
*Note: Johnny R. Purvis retired August 2003, (30.5 years) from the University of Southern
Mississippi (USM) as a professor in the Department of School Administration, Director of the
Education Service Center in the College of Education and Psychology, Executive Director of the
Southern Education Consortium, and Director of the Mississippi Safe School Center at the
University of Southern Mississippi. After retiring from USM, he was hired as a professor in the
Department of Leadership Studies at the University of Central Arkansas (UCA) in August 2003,
and retired December 31, 2013. He also served as teacher, coach, school administrator, and
member of a county school board in Mississippi. In addition, he retired as a law enforcement
officer having served in both Mississippi and Arkansas. He can be reached at the following
phone number: 601-310-4559 or e-mail: jpurvis@uca.edu.
6
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
References write must be a minimum of 4 sources
Unformatted Attachment Preview
sustainability
Article
A Rough Multi-Criteria Decision-Making Approach
for Sustainable Supplier Selection under
Vague Environment
Huiyun Lu 1 , Shaojun Jiang 2 , Wenyan Song 1,3, * and Xinguo Ming 4
1
2
3
4
*
School of Economics and Management, Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China; lhybuaa@163.com
School of Information Engineering, Handan University, Handan 056005, China; hh8582@163.com
Beijing Key Laboratory of Emergency Support Simulation Technologies for City Operations,
Beihang University, Beijing 100191, China
School of Mechanical Engineering, Shanghai Jiao Tong University, Shanghai 200240, China;
xgming@sjtu.edu.cn
Correspondence: songwenyan@buaa.edu.cn; Tel.: +86-010-8231-3693
Received: 13 June 2018; Accepted: 23 July 2018; Published: 26 July 2018
Abstract: With the growing awareness of environmental and social issues, sustainable supply chain
management (SSCM) has received considerable attention both in academia and industry. Supplier
selection plays an important role in the successful implementation of sustainable supply chain
management, because it can influence the performance of SSCM. Sustainable supplier selection is a
typical multi-criteria decision-making problem involving subjectivity and vagueness. Although some
previous researches of supplier selection use fuzzy approaches to deal with vague information, it has
been criticized for requiring much priori information and inflexibility in manipulating vagueness.
Moreover, the previous methods often omit the environmental and social evaluation criteria in the
supplier selection. To manipulate these problems, a new approach based on the rough set theory
and ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) is developed in this paper. The novel
approach integrates the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much priori
information and the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria decision-making problem. Finally,
a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar air-conditioner manufacturer is provided to
demonstrate the application and potential of the approach.
Keywords: sustainability; supplier selection; vague information; rough set theory; ELECTRE
1. Introduction
Manufacturing companies today cannot ignore sustainability concerns in their business
because of increased environmental awareness and ecological pressures from markets and various
stakeholders [1–3]. Sustainable supplier selection is critical to enhance supply chain performance
and competitive advantage [4]. This is because suppliers play an important role in implementing
sustainable supply chain management (SSCM) practices and in achieving social, environmental and
economic goals [5]. In this respect, sustainable supplier selection based on the sustainability criteria
(economic, environmental and social) is a critical strategic decision for SSCM [6,7] and it requires to be
further explored methodically to help achieve sustainability of the whole supply chain.
Although many researchers explore the topic of supplier selection, the study on the sustainable
supplier selection is still in the early stage. Most studies of sustainable supplier selection have only
focused on the economic and environmental aspects of sustainability. The social aspect of sustainability
is often omitted in the decision–making for supplier selection. Besides, the problem of supplier
selection is a typical multi-criteria decision-making (MCDM) problem. The decision makers always
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622; doi:10.3390/su10082622
www.mdpi.com/journal/sustainability
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
2 of 20
need to make trade-offs between conflicting criteria to select the most suitable supplier. It is difficult to
obtain accurate judgments of decision makers in the process of supplier evaluation, because supplier
selection involves large amount of linguistic information and subjective expert knowledge that are
usually imprecise, vague or even inconsistent. To deal with this problem, fuzzy methods are often
used to select suppliers. However, the fuzzy methods need much priori information (e.g., pre-set
fuzzy membership function) which may increase the workload of decision makers [8,9]. The previous
approaches also lack a flexible mechanism to deal with the subjective evaluations of experts [10,11].
Therefore, to manipulate the above problems in sustainable supplier selection, this paper proposes
a novel integrated group decision method based on the ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant
la REalité) approach and rough set theory in vague environments. Different with methods based on
the compensating accumulation principle (e.g., TOPSIS(Technique for Order Preference by Similarity
to an Ideal Solution)), the ELECTRE method is based on a precedence relation and it can meet
different evaluation requirements by defining undifferentiated threshold, strict superior threshold
and rejection threshold and thus, it has stronger flexibility in decision–making of supplier selection.
Furthermore, the rough number originated from the rough set theory can flexibly reflect the uncertainty
in decision–making process of supplier selection and it does not require much priori information.
In this respect, the proposed novel approach integrates the merit of ELECTRE in modeling multi-criteria
decision-making problem and the strength of rough set theory in handling vagueness without much
priori information.
The paper is organized as follows: Section 2 presents a literature review of supplier selection,
ELECTRE method and rough set. Section 3 develops an integrated rough ELECTRE method for
sustainable supplier selection. In the Section 4, a case study of sustainable supplier selection for solar
air-conditioner manufacturer is used to validate the feasibility and effectiveness of the method and a
comparative analysis is also conducted in this section. In Section 5, conclusions and future research
directions are presented.
2. Literature Review
2.1. Evaluation Criteria for Sustainable Supplier Selection
Supplier selection decisions are important for most of manufacturing firms, because a right
supplier can effectively improve the economic benefit of the manufacturing firm [12,13]. In the past,
economic criteria are usually used for supplier selection. The environment and social criteria are
often overlooked. However, with the development of sustainable supply chain management (SSCM),
both the researchers and practitioners are paying more attention to environment criteria and social
criteria in supplier selection [14]. They find it is important to incorporating the social and environment
criteria into the supplier selection process [15,16]. This paper summarizes the sustainable supplier
selection criteria from the economic, environment and social aspects. The details of the recognized
sustainable supplier selection criteria with their sources and descriptions are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Sustainable supplier selection criteria.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Economic criteria
Quality [17,18]
Product quality and reliability level guaranteed by supplier.
Response [5]
The ability for timely response, completing orders on time and reliable delivery.
Cost [19]
Purchasing cost, holding cost, ordering cost and supplier’s bidding price of
the product.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
3 of 20
Table 1. Cont.
Sustainable Supplier
Selection Criteria
Descriptions
Environmental criteria
Environmental
management system
(EMS) [20,21]
A set of systematic processes and practices reducing environmental impacts.
Carbon emission &
resource
consumption [22,23]
Greenhouse gas emissions in producing, transporting, using and recycling the
product and the resource (e.g., energy, power and water) consumption of
the company.
Design for the
environment [14,24]
Design reducing the overall impact of a product, process or service on human
health and environment.
Green image [17]
The image of company in the green aspect, which can be improved by adopting
environmental friendly products or implementing ‘green’ program. It can affect
the purchasing trend of customers, market share and the relationship
with stakeholders.
Social criteria
Product liability [25]
Being responsible for customer health and safety, providing products and
services with high quality and advertising based on real information.
Employee right and
welfare [26,27]
Treating employee with dignity and respect and maintaining a culture of security,
nondiscrimination and equality. Paying to employee shall comply with all
applicable wage laws.
Social commitment [27]
Involving in local community, education, job creation, healthcare and
social investment.
2.2. The Methods of Sustainable Supplier Selection
Selecting the right suppliers to set up optimal supplier networks can help to reduce purchasing
costs and increase the efficiency of the procurement logistics process [28]. Supplier selection is a
multi-criteria decision-making problem. There are some papers concerning sustainable (or green)
suppliers. Dai and Blackhurst (2012) integrate Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) with Quality
Function Deployment (QFD) for sustainable supplier selection [18]. The approach consists of four
stages, that is, linking customer requirements with the firm’s sustainability strategy, determining the
sustainable purchasing competitive priority, determining evaluation criteria of sustainable supplier
and evaluating the sustainable suppliers. Hsu and Hu (2009) develop a method for selecting suppliers
with emphasis on issues of hazardous substance management based on Analytic Network Process
(ANP) [29]. Liu and Hai (2005) provide a method called voting analytic hierarchy process for supplier
selection [30]. Although AHP/ANP methods are more popular in the field of the supplier selection,
they are always used to determine the relative importance weightings of criteria and sub-factors merely.
They need to be integrated with other decision–making techniques. Besides, due to the number of
pairwise comparisons that need to be made, the number of supplier selections is practically limited in
the AHP/ANP-based supplier selection methods. Moreover, the conventional AHP/ANP methods do
not consider the vagueness of decision–making information.
To manipulate the increasing number of the suppliers, data envelopment analysis (DEA) is a
prevalent approach used in supplier selection. This is because DEA can easily handle huge number of
suppliers with little managerial input and output required. Kuo et al. (2012) present a green supplier
selection method using an analysis network process as well as data envelopment analysis (DEA) [31].
ANP which is able to consider the interdependency between criteria releases the constraint of DEA that
the users cannot set up criteria weight preferences. Wu and Blackhurst (2009) propose an augmented
DEA approach for supplier evaluation and selection [32]. Sevkli et al. (2007) develop a new supplier
selection method by embedding the DEA approach into AHP methodology [33]. They conclude that
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
4 of 20
the integrated method outperforms the conventional AHP method for supplier selection. However,
DEA-based supplier selection methods have some drawbacks. The practitioners may be confused with
input and output criteria. Besides, DEA is a linear programming to measure the relative efficiencies of
homogenous decision–making units (DMUs). An efficient supplier generating more outputs while
requiring less input may be not an effective supplier. Furthermore, the conventional DEA also does
not consider the subjectivity and vagueness in the decision–making process.
Beside the multi-criteria decision–making method, some researchers use heuristic optimization
approaches to select proper suppliers. Basnet and Leung (2005) develop an incapacitated mixed
linear integer programming which minimizes the aggregate purchasing, ordering and holding costs
subject to demand satisfaction [34]. They solve the problem with an enumerative search algorithm
and a heuristic procedure. Veres et al. (2017) propose a heuristic method for optimizing supply
chain including intelligent transportation systems (ITS) based vehicles for transportation operations
problems [35]. To solve the multi-product multi-period inventory lot sizing with supplier selection
problem, Cárdenas-Barrón et al. (2015) propose a heuristic algorithm based on reduce and optimize
approach (ROA) and a new valid inequality [36]. Unfortunately, the heuristic optimization approaches
omit the vagueness and subjectivity in the decision–making, which may lead to inaccurate results of
supplier selection.
In order to deal with the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment in evaluation and
selection of suppliers, fuzzy set theory is introduced into the conventional approaches. Considering
time pressure and lack of expertise in sustainable supplier selection, Büyüközkan and Çifçi (2011)
developed a method based on fuzzy analytic network process within group decision-making schema
under incomplete preference relations [37]. To manipulate the subjectivity of decision makers’
evaluations, Amindoust et al. (2012) develop a new ranking method on the basis of fuzzy inference
system (FIS) for sustainable supplier selection problem [6]. Azadnia et al. (2015) developed an
integrated method based on rule-based weighted fuzzy approach [38], fuzzy analytical hierarchy
process and multi-objective mathematical programming for sustainable supplier selection and order
allocation. Grisi et al. (2010) propose a fuzzy AHP method for green supplier selection using a
seven-step approach [39]. Fuzzy logic is used to overcome uncertainty caused by human qualitative
judgments. ELECTRE (ELimination Et Choix Traduisant la REalité) methods are able to make a
successful assessment of each alternative based on knowledge of the concordance and discordance
sets for all pairs of alternatives. They are often used to select right suppliers [40]. Thus, Sevkli (2010)
proposes a fuzzy ELECTRE for supplier selection [41]. Although the fuzzy methods can deal with
the imprecise or vague nature of linguistic assessment, it requires priori information (e.g., pre-set
membership function). Moreover, the fuzzy methods always convert linguistic variables into fuzzy
numbers with fixed intervals. Therefore, computation results usually do not exactly match initial
linguistic terms, which easily cause loss of information and lack of precision in the final results.
Although these methods have brought great insights to supplier selection literature, most of them
lack flexible mechanisms to handle the subjectivity and the vagueness of decision makers’ assessments.
Although some fuzzy methods of supplier selection (e.g., fuzzy ELECTRE) consider the vagueness in
decision–making information, they require much priori information (e.g., pre-set fuzzy membership
function) which consumes much time and effort of managers. Moreover, the previous fuzzy approaches
use fuzzy number with fixed interval to indicate the uncertainty, which cannot identify the changes in
decision makers’ judgments. For those reasons, there is a clear need for a new formal decision support
methodology for the sustainable supplier selection under vague environment.
3. The Proposed Method
The main objective of this paper is to propose an integrated method for sustainable supplier
selection based on rough set theory and ELECTRE. Besides, vagueness manipulation is also considered
in the proposed approach. A flowchart of the proposed approach is shown in Figure 1.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
Sustainability 2018, 10, x FOR PEER REVIEW
5 of 20
5 of 21
Figure 1.
1. The
Theframework
framework of
of rough
rough ELimination
ELimination Et
Et Choix
Choix Traduisant
Traduisant la REalité (ELECTRE).
Figure
3.1. Determine
Determine the
the Supplier
Supplier Evaluation
Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established. The
First of all, a panel of expert who are knowledgeable about supplier selection is established.
D1,DD12, D
,…,
DkD)k )who
The group
has
k decision-makers
whoare
areresponsible
responsiblefor
for determining
determining and
and the
group
has k
decision-makers
(i.e.,(i.e.,
2 , …,
ranking each criterion (i.e., C1 , C2 , …, Ck ). For the sustainable supplier selection, three aspects we
C2,…,are
Ckeconomic
ranking
eachinto
criterion
(i.e., C1,They
). For thecriteria,
sustainable
supplier selection,
three
aspects
we
should take
consideration.
environmental
criteria and
social
criteria.
should take into consideration. They are economic criteria, environmental criteria and social criteria.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have different
Experts have their own individual experience and knowledge. Therefore, they may have
cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set P = { p1 , p2 , · · · , ph }
different cognitive vagueness for alternatives and criteria. Let us assume a judgment set
with h ordered judgments, in the manner of p1 ≤ p2 ≤ · · · ≤ ph . Let pi be a random judgment in the
p1 ≤ approximation
p2 ≤≤ ph . Let
P =P and
p1, pd2is,
, ph as
with
orderedof
judgments,
of lower
a
set
defined
thehdistance
P, where din=the
phmanner
− p1 . The
Apr (ppii ) be
and
the upper approximation Apr ( pi ) of the judgment pi can be identified as follows.
random judgment in the set P and d is defined as the distance of P , where d = ph − p1 . The
Lower approximation set:
{
}
lower approximation
Apr( pi ) and the upper approximation Apr
( pi ) of the judgment pi can
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P p j ≤ pi , pi − p j ≤ d
be identified as follows
Lower
Upper approximation
approximation set:
set:
{
≤d
Apr
( (ppi ))==∪∪pp j ∈
j ≤p p
j)d
Apr
∈P
P |pp ≥
, i ,p( p−i −p p ≤
i
Upper approximation set:
j
j
i
i
h
RN ( pi ) = piL , pU
i
{
j
i
Apr ( pi ) = ∪ p j ∈ P | p j ≥ pi , ( p j − pi ) ≤ d
(1)
}
}
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
6 of 20
q
Where piL = m ∏ xij
q
n
pU
=
∏ yij
i
(4)
(5)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr ( pi ) and the upper approximation
set Apr ( pi ) of pi respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
For different criteria, experts might give different weights. Use wkj indicate the weight of jth
criterion with kth expert.
With the Formulas (1)–(5)
n
o
n
d j = MAX wm
(6)
j − wj
o
n
m
n
≤ dj
(7)
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≤ wm
Apr wm
j , wj − wj
j
o
n
n
m
≤ dj
(8)
Apr wm
= ∪ wnj ∈ P wnj ≥ wm
j , wj − wj
j
q
Lim wkj = m ∏ x j
(9)
q
Lim wkj = n ∏ y j
(10)
where x j and y j are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (wkj ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (wkj ) of wkj respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
h
i h
i
kU
RN wkj = Lim wkj , Lim wkj
= wkL
,
w
j
j
s
w jL =
s
(11)
s
∏ wkL
j
(12)
k =1
s
s
s
wU
∏ wkU
j =
j
(13)
k =1
h
i
We could get the weight of each criterion w j = w jL , wU
j .
3.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Apart from the decision for the weight of criteria, the experts should give the assessment of the
alternatives with consideration of all the criteria. Let’s use rijk to represent the kth expert scores on jth
criterion in ith alternative. The following is the scoring matrix. Aggregate all the scoring matrix.
k
r11
k
r21
Rk =
..
.
k
rm1
k
r12
k
r22
..
.
k
rm2
···
···
..
.
···
k
r1n
k
r2n
..
.
k
rmn
(14)
rf
rf
· · · rf
11
12
1n
f f
r21 r22 · · · rf
2n
e
R= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
..
rf
nm
m2 · · · rg
m1 rf
n
o
reij = rij1 , rij2 , · · · , rijh
(15)
(16)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
7 of 20
Determine the rough matrix with expert ratings.
d = max rijm − rijn
(17)
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≤ rijm , rijm − rijn ≤ d
o
n
Apr rijm = ∪ rijn ∈ P rijn ≥ rijm , rijn − rijm ≤ d
(18)
q
Lim rijk = m
∏ xij
(19)
(20)
q
Lim rijk = n ∏ yij
(21)
where xij and yij are the elements of the lower approximation set Apr (rijk ) and the upper approximation
set Apr (rijk ) of rijk respectively and m and n are the number of elements in the two sets respectively.
i
h
RN rijk = Lim, Lim = rijkL , rijkU
(22)
i h
i
h
io
nh
RN reij = rij1L , rij1U , rij2L , rij2U , · · · , rijsL , rijsU
i
h
RN reij = rijL , rijU
(23)
s
rijL =
s
s
s
∏
L , rU
r11
11
L , rU
r21
21
R=
..
.
L U
rm1 , rm1
s
∏ rijkU
rijkL , rijU =
s
L U
r12 , r12
L U
r22 , r22
···
k =1
..
.
L U
rm2 , rm2
(24)
(25)
k =1
···
..
.
···
L U
r1n , r1n
L U
r2n , r2n
..
.
L U
rmn , rmn
(26)
Then, we normalize the rough decision matrix with the weight of criteria.
h
i h
i
L U
sij = rij · w j = rijL w jL , rijU wU
ij = sij , sij
(27)
” L U#
h
i
sij sij
tij =
,
= tijL , tU
ij
Cj Cj
n o
Where Cj = MAX sU
ij
L , tU
t11
11
L , tU
t21
21
T=
..
.
L U
tm1 , tm1
L U
t12 , t12
L U
t22 , t22
···
..
.
L U
tm2 , tm2
..
···
.
···
L U
t1n , t1n
L U
t2n , t2n
..
.
L U
tmn , tmn
(28)
(29)
(30)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
8 of 20
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct some field for the comparison among all the alternatives. We compare
different alternatives in two aspects. One is the concordance and the other is the discordance. Construct
the concordance and discordance matrices.
CS pq = Fj t pj ≥ tqj
(31)
DS pq = Fj t pj < tqj
(32)
CS pq represents the areas that alternative p is better than alternative q and DS pq represents the
areas that alternative p is worse than alternative q.
c pq =
∑
wj
(33)
Fj ∈CS pq
max Fj ∈ DS pq d t pj , tqj
d pq =
max Fj ∈ J d t pj , tqj
L U
L U
−
c12 , c12
· · · c1m
, c1m
L , cU
L , cU
−
·
·
·
c
c21
2m 2m
21
C=
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
L U L U
···
−
cm1 , cm1
cm2 , cm2
− d12 · · · d1m
− · · · d2m
d21
D= .
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
dm1 dm2 · · · −
(34)
(35)
(36)
By means of the calculation, we could get the rough concordance matrix C and discordance
matrix D.
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
After we get the concordance matrix and discordance matrix, we should determine the threshold
value. Using it to transform the matrix into Boolean matrix. First, we calculate the mean of the all
factors in matrix C and matrix D.
m
m
∑
∑ c pq
c=
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
m
∑
d=
(37)
m ( m − 1)
m
∑
p=1,p6=q q=1,q6= p
d pq
m ( m − 1)
(38)
Compare the factors in matrix C with c and the factors in matrix D with d. According the result of
the comparison, we get the concordance Boolean matrix F and discordance Boolean matrix G.
(
f pq =
(
g pq =
1
i f : c pq ≥ c
0
i f : c pq < c
1
i f : d pq ≤ d
0
i f : d pq > d
(39)
(40)
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
9 of 20
F = f pq m×m , G = g pq m×m
(41)
Then we could construct the general Boolean matrix H.
h pq = f pq · g pq
(42)
H = h pq m×m
(43)
According to the above calculations, we could get the general Boolean matrix. It is a basis for the
ranking of the alternatives. If h pq = 1, that means alternative p is better than alternative q.
Step 4: Calculate the pure concordance index and discordance index
By the Boolean general matrix, we could get part relations between all alternatives. Since if
h pq = 1, we know that alternative p is better than alternative q. But if h pq = 0 and we could not infer
the relationship of alternative p and alternative q from other alternatives, then we do not know which
is better. In order to get a rank of all the alternatives, we bring into pure concordance index cˆi and
discordance index d̂i .
Before calculating the pure index, we should transform rough interval into definite number.
Song et al. (2017) has proposed this method. We use ∆−1 represents the calculation of changing rough
interval into definite number [14].
The calculation includes the following procedures.
(1) Normalization
zei L =
zei U =
ziL − minziL /∆max
min
(44)
i
L
zU
i − minzi
i
/∆max
min
(45)
U
L
∆max
min = maxzi − minzi
i
(46)
i
L
where ziL and zU
i are the lower limit and the upper limit of the rough number zei respectively; zei and
zei U are the normalized form of ziL and zU
i respectively.
(2) Determine the total normalized definite value by
zei L × 1 − zei L + zei U × zei U
βi =
(47)
1 − zei L + zei U
(3) Compute the final definite value form zei der for zei by
zei der = minziL + β i ∆max
min
(48)
i
Therefore, we can use this method to calculate the concordance index and discordance index.
m
cˆi =
∑
q=1,q6=i
∆−1 cf
iq −
m
d̂i =
∑
q=1,q6=i
m
∑
p=1,p6=i
∆−1 cf
pi
(49)
m
diq −
∑
d pi
(50)
p=1,p6=i
Step 5: Determine the final ranking
According to the cˆi , we can get a priority in concordance. The bigger value of cˆi the higher place
the alternative would get. We use R1i for the ranking in concordance. The same we can get the priority
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
10 of 20
in discordance by d̂i . But on the contrary, the smaller value of d̂i the higher place the alternative would
get. We use R2i for the ranking in discordance. The final ranking is calculated as follows:
Ri =
R1i + R2i
2
(51)
Ri is the final rank of all the alternatives.
4. Case Study
In this section, in order to validate the applicability and effectiveness of the proposed method, we
use an example to illustrate. We assume that there is a manufacturing company. For the purpose of
choosing a good supplier, they set up a panel of 4 experts. The experts come from various departments
including purchasing, quality and production and planning who are involved in the supplier selection
process. And there are 8 suppliers for selection.
4.1. Implementation
4.1.1. Determine the Supplier Evaluation Criteria and Their Weights
Step 1: determine the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
First of all, the experts make a decision of the criteria. In addition to economic criteria,
environmental criteria and social criteria should also be considered for the sustainable supplier
selection. These criteria consist of three parts, we use C1~10 to represent these ten criteria. They are
Economic criteria including quality (C1), response (C2) and cost (C3); Environmental criteria including
environmental management system (C4), carbon emission & resource consumption (C5), design for
the environment (C6), Green image (C7); Social criteria including product liability (C8), employee right
and welfare (C9), social commitment (C10). The detailed introduction is shown in Table 1. We use
A1~8 to represent alternatives, E1~4 to represent experts.
Step 2: determine the weights for the evaluation criteria of sustainable suppliers
After the decision of criteria, experts should evaluate the weight of each criterion. The experts
give their evaluation to the criteria in the Table 2. Firstly, we convert the grades which experts give to
criteria into rough number. Take criterion C1 for example.
Table 2. The grade of each criterion.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
E1
E2
E3
E4
4
3
6
5
6
6
4
4
6
7
5
6
7
5
4
6
4
3
6
4
4
4
5
5
6
5
3
2
6
5
6
4
7
6
5
5
5
4
7
4
According to the Equations (6)–(13) in Section 3,
d1 = 2
Lim w14 = 4 4 × 5 × 4 × 6 = 4.68, Lim w14 = 6
√
√
w1L = 4 4 × 4.31 × 4 × 4.68 = 4.24, w1U = 4 4.68 × 5.48 × 4.68 × 6 = 5.18
The same as the other criteria, following the same procedure, we can get the importance degree of
all the criteria in Table 3.
Table 3. The importance of all the criteria.
Rough Importance
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
[4.24, 5.18]
[3.57, 4.77]
[5.69, 6.70]
[5.06, 5.42]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
[2.63, 3.67]
[6.06, 6.42]
[4.28, 5.60]
4.1.2. Evaluate the Sustainable Suppliers with the Proposed Rough ELECTRE
Step 1: Construct the rough decision matrix
Different expert might hold different view for alternatives and criteria because of their personal
experience and knowledge. And the true information is just contained in the cognitive vagueness.
According to the evaluation towards the alternatives from the experts, we could get the rough number
of each alternative. We take the data for criterion 1 in Table 4 for example.
Table 4. The evaluation for alternative under the criterion 1.
C1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
6
4
5
4
3
6
7
5
4
3
4
5
5
6
6
4
6
4
6
5
3
4
5
3
5
2
3
5
4
6
7
5
According to the Equations (17)–(26), we use x cab for the cth expert’s evaluation towards alternative
b in criterion a. We can get the rough matrix in Table 5.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
12 of 20
Table 5. The rough matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[4.68, 5.70]
[2.63, 3.67]
[3.65, 5.15]
[4.53, 4.93]
[3.23, 4.16]
[5.02, 5.85]
[5.69, 6.70]
[3.66, 4.69]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.66, 4.69]
[2.22, 3.13]
[5.54, 5.93]
[4.54, 5.38]
[5.69, 6.70]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.06, 4.41]
[4.24, 5.18]
[5.11, 5.79]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.23, 4.16]
[4.24, 5.18]
[6.06, 6.42]
[5.23, 5.73]
[3.53, 4.37]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[3.66, 4.69]
[4.68, 5.70]
[4.67, 6.17]
[4.68, 5.70]
[3.96, 5.29]
[4.68, 5.70]
[5.02, 5.85]
[4.24, 5.18]
Note: not all of the data are provided in Table 5 due to the space limitation.
Then, we normalize the rough matrix. According to the Equations (27)–(30). We can get the result
in Table 6.
Table 6. The normalized weighted decision matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
…
C10
[0.57, 0.85]
[0.32, 0.55]
[0.45, 0.77]
[0.55, 0.74]
[0.39, 0.62]
[0.61, 0.87]
[0.69, 1.00]
[0.45, 0.70]
[0.58, 0.86]
[0.41, 0.70]
[0.25, 0.47]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.51, 0.80]
[0.64, 1.00]
[0.52, 0.85]
[0.45, 0.66]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.68, 0.90]
[0.62, 0.89]
[0.43, 0.65]
[0.56, 0.81]
[0.80, 1.00]
[0.69, 0.89]
[0.47, 0.68]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[0.45, 0.76]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.58, 1.00]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.49, 0.86]
[0.58, 0.92]
[0.62, 0.95]
[0.53, 0.84]
Step 2: Construct the rough concordance matrix and discordance matrix
In this step, we construct the concordance and discordance matrices according to the normalized
rough decision matrix. For the construct of the concordance matrix, we take alternative1 and alternative
2 for example. At the first, we should find in which criterion A1 performs better than A2, that means
the score in certain criterion, A1 is higher than A2.
According to the Table 6, we could find in criterion 1, 2, 9, A1 performs better than A2. Add up all
these weights of the criteria. We could get the value of c12 = [13.87, 16.37] in the concordance matrix.
And we can get the concordance matrix in Table 7 by repeat these procedures.
Table 7. The concordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
…
A8
[31.11, 37.19]
[33.63, 39.23]
[7.85, 10.37]
[7.81, 9.97]
[29.01, 35.71]
[19.27, 22.89]
[17.55, 21.08]
[13.87, 16.37]
[19.81, 22.93]
[13.87, 16.37]
[11.35, 14.32]
[22.20, 26.74]
[23.84, 28.67]
[22.09, 26.44]
[11.35, 14.32]
[25.17, 30.63]
[7.81, 9.95]
[7.11, 9.14]
[24.73, 30.11]
[17.04, 21.03]
[16.85, 20.25]
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
[27.43, 32.48]
[22.89, 27.12]
[28.13, 33.30]
[12.09, 15.55]
[20.67, 25.25]
[25.47, 31.34]
[17.78, 22.25]
–
For the construct of the discordance matrix. First of all, we find the criterion which A2 is better
than A1. And we could find that they are criterion 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10. Then we find the biggest distance
in these criteria. Using it divide the biggest distance between A1 and A2. We can get the value of
d12 = 1. Repeating these procedures and we can get the discordance matrix in Table 8.
Sustainability 2018, 10, 2622
13 of 20
Table 8. The discordance matrix.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.46
1.00
0.93
1.00
0.64
1.00
1.00
0.37
0.71
1.00
0.53
1.00
0.73
1.00
0.43
0.88
0.91
0.90
0.49
1.00
1.00
0.00
0.37
0.68
0.20
0.27
0.64
0.65
0.22
0.55
0.32
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.32
1.00
1.00
0.97
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.27
0.82
–
Step 3: Determine the general Boolean matrix
Based on concordance and discordance matrix, we construct the concordance Boolean and
discordance Boolean matrices. Calculate the concordance index and discorda
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
Hello, Please see attached and need two peer replies. Thank you.https://openpsychometrics.org/tests/OEJTS/https://openpsychometrics.org/tests/IPIP-BFFM/
Critically review and evaluate the topic in the following area:
1.
History of computer crime law.
2.
The legal and ethical debates surrounding computer crime legislation. Identify and compare three counties implementing computer crime laws.
3.
The balance between computer security and individual rights.
4.
Based on the best practices in computer crime law worldwide, analyse the key provisions and the components of computer crime laws and discuss the essential requirement that should be applied in the Sultanate of Oman (cybercrime law).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Module Code
Module Title
Module Credits
GIS5007
Law and Digital Security
20
Academic Year and Semester Examination Board
Level & Block
2023-24, 1st Semester
L5-B2
January 2024
Method of Assessment
Term
Weighting
WRIT1
Mid-term
50%
Module Leader
Module Leader email
Ms. Marya AL Amri
marya@gulfcollege.edu.om
Additional information (if any)
This coursework is to be completed individually.
Equivalent to 2000 words.
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 1 of 14
Contents
ASSESSMENT DETAILS …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
SUBMISSION DETAILS ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA ……………………………………………………………………………………. 5
FURTHER INFORMATION ……………………………………………………………………………….. 11
Who can answer questions about my assessment? ………………………………………………… 12
Referencing and independent learning (Not applicable for Examination) …………………… 12
Technical submission problems (Not applicable for Examination) …………………………….. 12
Mitigating circumstances …………………………………………………………………………………… 12
Unfair academic practice …………………………………………………………………………………… 12
How is my work graded? …………………………………………………………………………………… 13
IV FORMS……………………………………………………………. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 2 of 14
Assessment Details
Assessment title
Abr.
Weighting
Research Paper
WRIT1
50%
Pass marks for undergraduate work is 40%, unless stated otherwise.
Task/assessment brief:
Assignment Overview: Computer Crime Laws
Computer crime laws, called cybercrime or electronic crime laws, are legal frameworks that address offences
involving computer systems, networks, and digital technologies. These laws aim to combat various types of
cybercrime and protect persons and companies against unauthorised access, data breaches, hacking, fraud, and
other illegal acts in cyberspace.
Computer crime laws differ from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. However, they often address illegal access (e.g.
hacking), data theft, computer fraud, identity theft, online harassment, distribution of malicious software, and
other cyber offences. These statutes describe prohibited activities, prescribe punishments for violators, and
provide rules for investigation, prosecution, and punishment.
United States Department of Justice, (1986). Computer Fraud and Abuse Act [online]. Available at:
https://www.justice.gov/criminal-ccips/identity-theft/18-usc-section-1030-computer-fraud-and-abuse-act
Tasks:
Critically review and evaluate the topic in the following area:
1. History of computer crime law.
2. The legal and ethical debates surrounding computer crime legislation. Identify and compare
three counties implementing computer crime laws.
3. The balance between computer security and individual rights.
4. Based on the best practices in computer crime law worldwide, analyse the key provisions and
the components of computer crime laws and discuss the essential requirement that should be
applied in the Sultanate of Oman (cybercrime law).
Reference your source materials using the Harvard Style of Referencing.
Report Format and Content Requirement
Write a report that contains the following sections:
I.
II.
Introduction. In this section, write a general introduction about computer crime law and the
significance of computer crime laws in the digital age. Also, include your research objectives (refer to
the assignment overview and task 1). Your introduction should be at least two paragraphs long (about
300 words). Also, properly paraphrase and/or write at least two in-text citations in this section.
Literature Review. This section is an evaluative report of information based on printed and/ or online
sources. The review should contain a description, summary, evaluation, and comparison of the study
with previous research on computer crime law. Support this section with properly referenced
citations. If you present this section in a tabular format, precede the table with a short introductory
paragraph, refer to tasks 2-3
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 3 of 14
III.
IV.
V.
Analysis / Discussion. Based on the best practice in computer crime law worldwide, this section
analyses key provisions and components of computer crime laws and discusses the best essential
requirement that should be applied in the Sultanate of Oman (cybercrime law), refer to task 4
Conclusion. This report section should include the essential findings regarding the strengths and
weaknesses of computer crime laws. Finally, write a recommendation on how to raise community
awareness about computer crime law.
Reference List. List down all the references you cited in the report using the Harvard referencing
style. Ensure that the connections you listed match the citations you made in the report.
Additional instructions:
• Your student identification number must be clearly stated at the top of each page of your work.
• Where appropriate, a contents page, a list of tables/figures, and a list of abbreviations should precede
your work.
• Each page must be numbered.
• Please use Calibri font
o size 14, bold for main titles
o size 12, bold for subtitles
o size 11, regular for the body of each section
o size 9, and italics for the image, chart, or graph captions or labels
• All referencing must adhere to Institutional requirements (Harvard Referencing Style).
• A word count must be stated at the end of your work.
• All tables and figures (if there are any) must be correctly numbered and labelled.
• Upload your partial outputs to MS Teams for formative feedback.
• Your final report must be uploaded to Turnitin for plagiarism checking; college rules on plagiarism apply.
*************
Word count (or equivalent):
2000 words
This is a reflection of the effort required for the assessment. Word counts will normally include any text, tables,
calculations, figures, subtitles, and citations. Reference lists and contents of appendices are excluded from the
word count. Contents of appendices are not usually considered when determining your final assessment grade.
Submission Details
Submission
Deadline:
MID-TERM:
7th of November 2023
Click or tap here to enter text.
Estimated Feedback
Return Date
After the result
announcement (10 working
days) – January 2024 EB
Page 4 of 14
Submission
Time:
9:00 PM
Turnitin:
Any assessments submitted after the deadline will not be marked and will be recorded as
a non-attempt unless you have had an extension request agreed upon or have approved
mitigating circumstances. See the Gulf College website for more information on
submission details and mitigating circumstances.
File Format:
The assessment must be submitted as a word document and submitted through the
Turnitin submission point.
Your assessment should be titled with your:
Student ID number, Module code and Assessment ID,
e.g. 1610200 GIS5007 WRIT1
Feedback for the assessment will be provided electronically via Turnitin / MS Teams / Face
to Face. Feedback will be provided with comments on your strengths and the areas in which
you can improve. Module tutors give students two types of assessment feedback: formative,
which is given when the student is working on the completion of an assignment or
coursework, and summative, which is given upon completion of the module.
Comprehensive assessment feedback on your performance will be given after the
announcement of the results. (10 Working Days)
Feedback
Assessment Criteria
Learning outcomes assessed
On successful completion of the module, a student should be able to:
•
•
•
Demonstrate understanding of the management of data from a legal and ethical context.
Evaluate aspects of security and the forensic analysis of data.
Synthesise the wider application of cloud computing and big data analysis.
In addition, the assessment will test the following learning outcome:
•
•
Demonstrate understanding of the management of data from a legal and ethical context.
Evaluate aspects of security and the forensic analysis of data
Marking Scheme
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 5 of 14
Item
Max.
Marks
Criteria
Introduction
Literature
Review
Analysis/
Discussion
Conclusion
Report
Structure and
Formatting
Basic introduction of computer crime law
6
The significance of computer crime laws in the digital age
6
Research Objectives
3
The legal and ethical debates surrounding computer crime legislation.
10
Comparison of the implementation of computer law in 3 counties
10
The balance between computer security and individual rights.
10
Analyses key provisions and components of computer crime laws
15
Discusses the best key provision that should be applied in the
Sultanate of Oman (cybercrime law)
The key findings regarding the strengths and weaknesses of computer
crime laws.
Write a recommendation on how to raise community awareness about
computer crime law.
The report should be well-formatted, with consistent headings,
subheadings, and numbering. Fonts, spacing, and margins should be
consistent and professional-looking, including Harvard referencing
format.
15
15
30
30
10
20
10
5
Total Marks
Click or tap here to enter text.
Total
Page 6 of 14
5
100
Marking/Assessment Criteria
Grade
% Mark
0
1–9
10 – 19
F
(Fail)
20 – 29
30 – 39
D
(Third)
40 – 49
C
(Lower
Second)
50 – 59
Requirements
No answer has been attempted or evidence of unfair practice.
The work presented for assessment may be incomplete and/or irrelevant and demonstrates a serious
lack of comprehension and/or engagement with the set task. Attainment of the learning outcomes is
minimal and assessment criteria are not addressed.
Misunderstanding or misinterpretation of the set task, providing a short and/or largely irrelevant
response. Consequently, no learning outcomes are met in full although there may be minimal
attainment of about one or two.
Minimal understanding of the set task and will partially have met some of the learning outcomes.
Little knowledge and understanding of the field of study relevant to the task. The limited ability is
shown to communicate simple concepts and/or information. Significant difficulties in the report’s
structure and organisation detract from the clarity and meaning overall. Evidence of individual
reading and investigation is negligible, and the limited referencing of literature and other sources is
frequently inaccurate. Demonstrates some ability to describe and report but very little evidence is
available to indicate an ability to engage in critical evaluation and reflection.
Partial understanding of the set task and some of the associated learning outcomes met at a basic
level. Factual inaccuracies, errors, and misconceptions are evident in important areas and elements
of the assessed work may be irrelevant to the task. If attempted, the presentation of arguments and
more complex ideas may be confused and clumsily expressed. Some enquiry and analysis relevant to
the task attempted but outcomes may be naïve, simplistic, and/or unconvincing. Demonstrates
limited knowledge of current research/scholarship in the discipline. A restricted range of sources is
used but overall, there is an over-reliance on program materials with little evidence of individual
reading and investigation. There are frequent errors in the referencing of literature and other sources.
The work is largely descriptive and arguments, if attempted, are rarely substantiated.
Demonstrates a basic understanding of the set task and an ability to have met the associated learning
outcomes and addresses the assessment criteria at a threshold level. Displays a basic knowledge and
understanding of many aspects of the field of study relevant to the task. Reproduction of information
received from elsewhere (e.g., program materials). Errors and misconceptions will be evident, but
these are outweighed by the degree of knowledge and understanding demonstrated overall. More
success is achieved in describing and reporting information rather than communicating complex
ideas. Generally, the work is appropriately structured although key points may not be logically
sequenced. Some limited analysis and enquiry relevant to the task/discipline included and has
intermittent success in presenting and commenting on outcomes. A limited ability to critically
evaluate and reflect. Although some critical reflection is evident, the balance within the work is likely
to be in favour of description and factual presentation.
A secure understanding of the set task and an ability to have met the associated learning outcomes
and address the assessment criteria at a satisfactory level. Displays a sound knowledge and
understanding of most key aspects of the field of study relevant to the task and there is some
evidence of an ability to apply such knowledge. Some evidence of independent thinking beyond
programme notes. Overall, the structure and format of the work are appropriate. Occasional faults in
the presentation of work, but overall, these do not detract from the clarity of expression. Examples
of research/scholarship referred to in the work demonstrate individual reading and investigative
ability to critically evaluate and reflect although there may be some over-reliance on description and
factual presentation. Arguments are usually substantiated.
B
(Upper
Second)
60-69
70 – 79
A
(First)
80 – 89
90 – 100
Demonstrates a full understanding of the set task and an ability to have met the learning outcomes
and address the assessment criteria at a good level. Detailed knowledge and thorough understanding
of the key aspects of the field of study relevant to the task are shown. There is clear evidence of an
ability to apply such knowledge and, in some contexts, to extend and transform it. Discussion of
complex concepts is often tackled successfully and there is evidence of independent thinking. Displays
an ability to communicate information, ideas, and concepts clearly and succinctly. The work is well
presented and the format appropriate. Key points are appropriately organised, the writing style is
fluent, and the arguments are well articulated. Detailed analysis and critical enquiry relevant to the
task/discipline is undertaken by making use of appropriate techniques and has considerable success
in presenting and commenting on outcomes. There is some linkage between theory and practice.
Examples referred to indicate a breadth and depth of individual reading and investigation that extend
beyond the sources provided. The referencing of literature and other sources is almost always
accurate. Arguments are considered and substantiated and there is evidence of an ability to make
appropriate judgements and to suggest solutions to problems.
Demonstrates a full and detailed understanding of the set task and an ability to have met the learning
outcomes and address the assessment criteria at a very good level. Detailed knowledge and
systematic understanding of key aspects of the field of study relevant to the task are evident. There
is strong evidence of an ability to extend, transform, and apply such knowledge. The student also
demonstrates an ability to engage in a confident discussion of complex concepts and to recognise the
limitations and ambiguity of disciplinary knowledge. Independent thinking and original insights are
also present in the report. The ability is shown in communicating information, complex ideas, and
concepts coherently and succinctly. The standard of presentation is high and the format appropriate.
Key points are logically organised and in written work, the style is lucid and mature. Detailed and
thorough knowledge of current research/advanced scholarship in the discipline. The use of scholarly
reviews/primary sources is confident and a breadth and depth of individual reading and investigation,
extending beyond the sources provided, is apparent. The referencing of literature and other sources
is accurate and in line with academic conventions. An ability to engage in critical evaluation of
concepts/arguments/data and to make appropriate and informed judgements is shown. Arguments
are well developed, sustained, and substantiated. Where relevant, assumptions are challenged and
there is a clear recognition of the complexities of academic debate. Appropriate and sometimes
innovative solutions are offered to problems.
Beyond the above, a full and detailed understanding of the set task and an ability to have met the
learning outcomes and address the assessment criteria at an excellent level is displayed.
Beyond the above, demonstrates a full and detailed understanding of the set task and an ability to
have met the learning outcomes and address the assessment criteria at an out level. Work is of a
standard deemed to be worthy of publication Reference citations extend significantly beyond the
main body of reading normally expected in the discipline/field of study.
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 8 of 14
AY: Click or tap here to enter text. / 1st Semester
Marking Criteria/Rubrics
Cr it er ia
Needs
Improvement (1)
Satisfactory (2)
Good (3)
Very good (4)
Excellent (5)
Introduction
Not
Attempted/
Irrelevant (1)
Not
Attempted/
Extremely
shown with
significant
errors
Limited
knowledge, with
many errors’
misconceptions,
and gaps.
Demonstrates basic
knowledge and
understanding, reproducing
information is a frequent
feature. Errors or
misconceptions will be
evident but outweighed by
the overall understanding.
Detailed, accurate, relevant.
Shows a thorough
understanding of key
aspects of the topic.
Discussion of more complex
legal issues uses often
tackled successfully.
Detailed, accurate, and relevant.
Key points highlighted.
Demonstrates systematic
understanding of all key aspects
of the topic and excellent
breadth and depth of knowledge.
Appreciating any ambiguities in
the area of legal study. Strong
ability to apply legal knowledge
to the key issues of the task legal
study.
Literature
Review
Not
Attempted /
Irrelevant
sources
Over-reliance on materials
provided by the tutor. Little
or no evidence of reading
around the subject.
Referencing present but
contains inconsistencies
and some inaccuracies,
overall Harvard system
used.
Material from a variety of
sources is used extending
beyond those sources
provided, demonstrating
some synthesis of
information. Referencing
relevant and mostly
accurate using the Harvard
system.
A wide variety of sources used
extends well beyond programme
material, showing a strong ability
to synthesise. Academic and
textbook referencing is clear,
relevant and consistently
accurate using the Harvard
system.
Analysis and
Discussion
Not
Attempted/
Irrelevant
sources
No evidence that
any reading of the
subject matter/
around the subject
matter was
undertaken. No
referencing is used
at all or is
frequently
inaccurate.
Little or no
evidence of being
able to undertake
analysis. Fails to
identify or evaluate
different
perspectives or
arguments.
Inconclusive or
lacks an
appropriate
conclusion.
Sound knowledge and
understanding of key topics.
May be a tendency to
reproduce information
received from elsewhere
(e.g. programme materials).
A few errors or
misconceptions may be
present, but not in
important areas. Some
evidence of ability to apply
core legal principles.
Tendency to rely on core
materials and information
provided by tutors although
evidence of some individual
reading. Minor
inconsistencies and
inaccuracies in referencing
using the Harvard system.
At times demonstrates an
ability to undertake
analysis. Evidence of
findings and conclusions are
usually grounded in
appropriate legal authority.
Arguments are usually
substantiated. Some overreliance on description and
factual presentation.
Able to undertake detailed
legal analysis, good
development of arguments
which are substantiated.
Most points are illustrated
with relevant evidence.
Good evidence of
evaluation and ability to
make appropriate
judgments.
Analytical and clear conclusions
are well-grounded in legal
doctrine and authority, possibly
showing the development of new
and innovative solutions to legal
problems. Key points supported
with legal authority, and
alternative perspectives are
critically evaluated. Comments
perceptively on the application of
legal authority to practical
problems.
Click or tap here to enter text.
Fairly superficial and
generally derivative, the
balance of work is in favour
of description and factual
presentation. Some
evidence is mentioned, but
not generally integrated
into the work or evaluated,
although there may be
some limited attempts at
legal analysis and
evaluation.
Page 9 of 14
Cr it er ia
Conclusion
R e p o r t
Structure and
Formatting
Not
Attempted/
Irrelevant (1)
Not
Attempted/Irr
elevant
Needs
Improvement (1)
Satisfactory (2)
Good (3)
Very good (4)
Excellent (5)
None or only one
of the main points
is summarised.
One or two main points are
summarised but in a
manner that is vague or too
general.
Two to three main points
are summarised with some
success. May I have one or
two issues with
organisation, but not to the
point of being a hindrance
All the main points are
summarised with skills and
knowledge; all points are fell in
line and led up to an inevitable
conclusion
The report has
no discernible
structure or
formatting,
making it
difficult to
navigate and
comprehend.
The report lacks a
clear structure and
formatting, making
it challenging to
follow the main
points.
The report has a basic
structure, but the
organisation and formatting
need improvement for
better readability.
The report has a generally
appropriate structure with
headings, subheadings, and
formatting, but with some
inconsistencies or lack of
clarity.
The conclusion somehow
captures the focus of the
research paper; summarises
the main points (aspects) of
the research paper but
needs further elaboration.
The conclusion provides a
recommendation.
The conclusion includes an
ending comment that
inspires the reader to
continue thinking about
your topic.
The report has a clear
structure with appropriate
headings, subheadings, and
formatting, with minor
inconsistencies.
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 10 of 14
The report demonstrates a wellstructured format with
appropriate headings,
subheadings, and formatting.
Further Information
Click or tap here to enter text.
Page 11 of 14
Who can answer questions about my assessment?
Questions about the assessment should be directed to the staff member who has set the task/assessment
brief. This will usually be the Module tutor. They will be happy to answer any queries you have.
Referencing and independent learning (Not applicable for Examination)
Please ensure you reference a range of credible sources, with due attention to the academic literature in
the area. The time spent on research and reading from good quality sources will be reflected in the quality
of your submitted work.
Remember that what you get out of university depends on what you put in. Your teaching sessions
typically represent between 10% and 30% of the time you are expected to study for your degree. A 20credit module represents 200 hours of study time. The rest of your time should be taken up by selfdirected study.
Unless stated otherwise you must use the HARVARD referencing system. Further guidance on referencing
can be found in the on Moodle. Correct referencing is an easy way to improve your marks and essential
in achieving higher grades on most assessments.
Technical submission problems (Not applicable for Examination)
It is strongly advised that you submit your work at least 24 hours before the deadline to allow time to
resolve any last minute problems you might have. If you are having issues with IT or Turnitin you should
contact the IT Helpdesk on (+968) 92841521/ 92841217. You may require evidence of the Helpdesk call if
you are trying to demonstrate that a fault with Turnitin was the cause of a late submission.
Mitigating circumstances
Short extensions on assessment deadlines can be requested in specific circumstances. If you are
encountering particular hardship which has been affecting your studies, then you may be able to apply
for mitigating circumstances. This can give the teachers on your programme more scope to adapt the
assessment requirements to support your needs. Mitigating circumstances policies and procedures are
regularly updated. You should refer to your Academic Advisor for information on extensions and
mitigating circumstances.
Unfair academic practice
Cardiff Met takes issues of unfair practice extremely seriously. The University has procedures and
penalties for dealing with unfair academic practice. These are explained in full in the University’s Unfair
Practice regulations and procedures under Volume 1, Section 8 of the Academic Handbook. The Module
Click or tap here to enter text.
of 14
Page 12
Leader reserves the right to interview students regarding any aspect of their work submitted for
assessment.
Types of Unfair Practice, include:
Plagiarism, which can be defined as using without acknowledgement another person’s words or ideas and
submitting them for assessment as though it were one’s own work, for instance by copying, translating
from one language to another or unacknowledged paraphrasing. Further examples include:
• Use of any quotation(s) from the published or unpublished work of other persons, whether published
in textbooks, articles, the Web, or in any other format, where quotations have not been clearly
identified as such by being placed in quotation marks and acknowledged.
• Use of another person’s words or ideas that have been slightly changed or paraphrased to make it
look different from the original.
• Summarising another person’s ideas, judgments, diagrams, figures, or computer programmes
without reference to that person in the text and the source in a bibliography/reference list.
• Use of assessment writing services, essay banks and/or any other similar agencies (NB. Students are
commonly being blackmailed after using essay mills).
• Use of unacknowledged material downloaded from the Internet.
• Re-use of one’s own material except as authorised by your degree programme.
Collusion, which can be defined as when work that that has been undertaken with others is submitted
and passed off as solely the work of one person. Modules will clearly identify where joint preparation and
joint submission are permitted; in all other cases they are not.
Fabrication of data, making false claims to have carried out experiments, observations, interviews or
other forms of data collection and analysis, or acting dishonestly in any other way.
How is my work graded?
Gulf College uses Cardiff Metropolitan University’s Generic Band Descriptors (GBD), in conjunction with
programme-specific and/or assessment-specific descriptors that are developed in accordance with the
principles underpinning the generic descriptors, as a reference in marking student work outputs. This is
to ensure that marking is consistent across all Cardiff Met students’ work, including the work outputs of
students in Gulf College.
Assessment marking undergoes a meticulous process to make sure that it is fair and truly reflects the
performance of students in their modules. Marking of work at each level of Cardiff Met degree
programmes are benchmarked against a set of general requirements set out in Cardiff Met’s Guidance
on Assessment Marking.
https://www.cardiffmet.ac.uk/registry/academichandbook/Documents/AH1_04_03.pdf
Click or tap here to enter text.
of 14
Page 13
To find out more about assessments and key academic skills that can have a significant impact on your
marks, download and read your
Click or tap here to enter text.
of 14
Page 14
The topic for this paper is: What makes effective non-verbal communication?
To prepare for this assignment, please review the following videos, watch the non-verbal communication by each speaker, and then select one of the speeches and write a memo on the speaker’s body language and non-verbal actions. Use the video resources and other searches to educate you on body language and non-verbal actions.
(4) Martin Luther King, Jr. I Have A Dream Speech – YouTube
(4) President John F. Kennedy’s Inaugural Address – YouTube
(4) The internet of things | Jordan Duffy | TEDxSouthBank – YouTube
The memo scenario: You are writing a memo to your boss who will be giving a speech, and they have asked you to research speeches.
Well-researched discussion on effective non-verbal communication.
Memo format – no page limit.
Introduction and Conclusion must be included.
APA formatted reference page only.
Once you have written and compared your paper with the rubric, please revise, edit, and proofread as needed.
RUBRIC:
– Professional memo format used: Memo is formatted professionally, with no errors.
– Thorough discussion of effective non-verbal communication: At least three aspects of effective non-verbal communication discussed, with sufficient depth of detail.
– Use of valid and relevant sources: Each aspect of effective non-verbal communication is supported by at least 2 valid and reliable sources
– Effective introduction: Introduction is tailored to the audience, “hooks” the reader, and clearly presents the purpose of the memo.
– Effective conclusion: Conclusion is tailored to the audience, summarizes the main points, and would be a useful “brief” for the executive on its own.
MATERIALS:
– Business Communications for Success (Book file attached) – Chapter 11: Nonverbal Delivery, pages 332 – 363
– (4) Nonverbal Communication- Gestures – YouTube
– (4) Body Language of Leaders – YouTube
– (4) 4 essential body language tips from a world champion public speaker – YouTube
– (4) Gestures Around the World – YouTube
– (4) Guidelines for International Correspondence – YouTube
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Business Communication for Success
Business Communication for Success
[Author removed at request of original publisher]
UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA LIBRARIES PUBLISHING EDITION, 2015. THIS EDITION ADAPTED
FROM A WORK ORIGINALLY PRODUCED IN 2010 BY A PUBLISHER WHO HAS REQUESTED THAT IT
NOT RECEIVE ATTRIBUTION.
MINNEAPOLIS, MN
Business Communication for Success by University of Minnesota is licensed under a Creative Commons
Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License, except where otherwise noted.
Contents
Publisher Information
x
Chapter 1: Effective Business Communication
1.1 Why Is It Important to Communicate Well?
1.2 What Is Communication?
1.3 Communication in Context
1.4 Your Responsibilities as a Communicator
1.5 Additional Resources
3
7
16
20
25
Chapter 2: Delivering Your Message
2.1 What Is Language?
2.2 Messages
2.3 Principles of Verbal Communication
2.4 Language Can be an Obstacle to Communication
2.5 Emphasis Strategies
2.6 Improving Verbal Communication
2.7 Additional Resources
29
33
36
42
47
54
58
Chapter 3: Understanding Your Audience
3.1 Self-Understanding Is Fundamental to Communication
3.2 Perception
3.3 Differences in Perception
3.4 Getting to Know Your Audience
3.5 Listening and Reading for Understanding
3.6 Additional Resources
65
72
82
84
90
93
Chapter 4: Effective Business Writing
4.1 Oral versus Written Communication
4.2 How Is Writing Learned?
4.3 Good Writing
4.4 Style in Written Communication
4.5 Principles of Written Communication
4.6 Overcoming Barriers to Effective Written Communication
4.7 Additional Resources
96
99
104
109
113
118
122
Chapter 5: Writing Preparation
5.1 Think, Then Write: Writing Preparation
5.2 A Planning Checklist for Business Messages
5.3 Research and Investigation: Getting Started
5.4 Ethics, Plagiarism, and Reliable Sources
5.5 Completing Your Research and Investigation
5.6 Reading and Analyzing
5.7 Additional Resources
125
130
139
144
151
155
158
Chapter 6: Writing
6.1 Organization
6.2 Writing Style
164
178
6.3 Making an Argument
6.4 Paraphrase and Summary versus Plagiarism
6.5 Additional Resources
187
195
198
Chapter 7: Revising and Presenting Your Writing
7.1 General Revision Points to Consider
7.2 Specific Revision Points to Consider
7.3 Style Revisions
7.4 Evaluating the Work of Others
7.5 Proofreading and Design Evaluation
7.6 Additional Resources
201
204
214
220
224
228
Chapter 8: Feedback in the Writing Process
8.1 Diverse Forms of Feedback
8.2 Qualitative and Quantitative Research
8.3 Feedback as an Opportunity
8.4 Additional Resources
232
243
248
252
Chapter 9: Business Writing in Action
9.1 Text, E-mail, and Netiquette
9.2 Memorandums and Letters
9.3 Business Proposal
9.4 Report
9.5 Résumé
9.6 Sales Message
9.7 Additional Resources
255
261
270
275
282
291
295
Chapter 10: Developing Business Presentations
10.1 Before You Choose a Topic
10.2 Choosing a Topic
10.3 Finding Resources
10.4 Myths and Realities of Public Speaking
10.5 Overcoming Obstacles in Your Presentation
10.6 Additional Resources
299
304
310
319
322
328
Chapter 11: Nonverbal Delivery
11.1 Principles of Nonverbal Communication
11.2 Types of Nonverbal Communication
11.3 Movement in Your Speech
332
339
347
11.4 Visual Aids
11.5 Nonverbal Strategies for Success with Your Audience
11.6 Additional Resources
351
363
365
Chapter 12: Organization and Outlines
12.1 Rhetorical Situation
12.2 Strategies for Success
12.3 Building a Sample Speech
12.4 Sample Speech Outlines
12.5 Organizing Principles for Your Speech
12.6 Transitions
12.7 Additional Resources
368
372
379
382
384
389
392
Chapter 13: Presentations to Inform
13.1 Functions of the Presentation to Inform
13.2 Types of Presentations to Inform
13.3 Adapting Your Presentation to Teach
13.4 Diverse Types of Intelligence and Learning Styles
13.5 Preparing Your Speech to Inform
13.6 Creating an Informative Presentation
13.7 Additional Resources
395
400
404
414
416
422
426
Chapter 14: Presentations to Persuade
14.1 What Is Persuasion?
14.2 Principles of Persuasion
14.3 Functions of the Presentation to Persuade
430
433
436
14.4 Meeting the Listener’s Basic Needs
14.5 Making an Argument
14.6 Speaking Ethically and Avoiding Fallacies
14.7 Sample Persuasive Speech
14.8 Elevator Speech
14.9 Additional Resources
440
446
454
458
462
464
Chapter 15: Business Presentations in Action
15.1 Sound Bites and Quotables
15.2 Telephone/VoIP Communication
15.3 Meetings
15.4 Celebrations: Toasts and Roasts
15.5 Media Interviews
466
468
472
475
478
15.6 Introducing a Speaker
15.7 Presenting or Accepting an Award
15.8 Serving as Master of Ceremonies
15.9 Viral Messages
15.10 Additional Resources
481
483
486
488
491
Chapter 16: Intrapersonal and Interpersonal Business Communication
16.1 Intrapersonal Communication
16.2 Self-Concept and Dimensions of Self
16.3 Interpersonal Needs
16.4 Social Penetration Theory
16.5 Rituals of Conversation and Interviews
16.6 Conflict in the Work Environment
16.7 Additional Resources
494
496
500
504
510
518
525
Chapter 17: Negative News and Crisis Communication
17.1 Delivering a Negative News Message
17.2 Eliciting Negative News
17.3 Crisis Communication Plan
17.4 Press Conferences
17.5 Additional Resources
528
538
544
547
552
Chapter 18: Intercultural and International Business Communication
18.1 Intercultural Communication
18.2 How to Understand Intercultural Communication
556
559
18.3 Common Cultural Characteristics
18.4 Divergent Cultural Characteristics
18.5 International Communication and the Global Marketplace
18.6 Styles of Management
18.7 The International Assignment
18.8 Additional Resources
562
566
572
577
580
586
Chapter 19: Group Communication, Teamwork, and Leadership
19.1 What Is a Group?
19.2 Group Life Cycles and Member Roles
19.3 Group Problem Solving
19.4 Business and Professional Meetings
19.5 Teamwork and Leadership
589
594
602
608
616
19.6 Additional Resources
621
Please share your supplementary material!
622
Publisher Information
Business Communication for Success
is adapted from a work produced and
distributed under a Creative Commons
license (CC BY-NC-SA) in 2010 by a
publisher who has requested that they
and the original author not receive
attribution. This adapted edition is
produced by the University of Minnesota Libraries Publishing through the eLearning Support Initiative.
This adaptation has reformatted the original text, and replaced some images and figures to make the resulting
whole more shareable. This adaptation has not significantly altered or updated the original 2010 text. This work
is made available under the terms of a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike license.
x
Chapter 1: Effective Business Communication
Communication leads to community, that is, to understanding, intimacy and mutual valuing.
–Rollo May
I know that you believe that you understood what you think I said, but I am not sure you realize that what you
heard is not what I meant.
–Robert J. McCloskey, former State Department spokesman
Introductory Exercises
1.
Write five words that express what you want to do and where you want to be a year from now. Take those
five words and write a paragraph that clearly articulates your responses to both “what” and “where.”
2.
Think of five words that express what you want to do and where you want to be five years from now.
Share your five words with your classmates and listen to their responses. What patterns do you observe in
the responses? Write a paragraph that addresses at least one observation.
Communication is an activity, skill, and art that incorporates lessons learned across a wide spectrum of human
knowledge. Perhaps the most time-honored form of communication is storytelling. We’ve told each other stories
for ages to help make sense of our world, anticipate the future, and certainly to entertain ourselves. The art of
storytelling draws on your understanding of yourself, your message, and how you communicate it to an audience
that is simultaneously communicating back to you. Your anticipation, reaction, and adaptation to the process will
determine how successfully you are able to communicate. You were not born knowing how to write or even how
to talk—but in the process of growing up, you have undoubtedly learned how to tell, and how not tell, a story out
loud and in writing.
You didn’t learn to text in a day and didn’t learn all the codes—from LOL (laugh out loud) to BRB (be right
back)—right away. In the same way, learning to communicate well requires you to read and study how others
have expressed themselves, then adapt what you have learned to your present task—whether it is texting a brief
message to a friend, presenting your qualifications in a job interview, or writing a business report. You come to
this text with skills and an understanding that will provide a valuable foundation as we explore the communication
process.
Effective communication takes preparation, practice, and persistence. There are many ways to learn
communication skills; the school of experience, or “hard knocks,” is one of them. But in the business environment,
a “knock” (or lesson learned) may come at the expense of your credibility through a blown presentation to a client.
The classroom environment, with a compilation of information and resources such as a text, can offer you a trial
run where you get to try out new ideas and skills before you have to use them to communicate effectively to make
a sale or form a new partnership. Listening to yourself, or perhaps the comments of others, may help you reflect
on new ways to present, or perceive, thoughts, ideas and concepts. The net result is your growth; ultimately your
ability to communicate in business will improve, opening more doors than you might anticipate.
As you learn the material in this text, each part will contribute to the whole. The degree to which you attend to
1
2 Business Communication for Success
each part will ultimately help give you the skills, confidence, and preparation to use communication in furthering
your career.
1.1 Why Is It Important to Communicate Well?
Learning Objectives
1.
Recognize the importance of communication in gaining a better understanding of yourself and others.
2.
Explain how communication skills help you solve problems, learn new things, and build your career.
Communication is key to your success—in relationships, in the workplace, as a citizen of your country, and across
your lifetime. Your ability to communicate comes from experience, and experience can be an effective teacher,
but this text and the related business communication course will offer you a wealth of experiences gathered from
professional speakers across their lifetimes. You can learn from the lessons they’ve learned and be a more effective
communicator right out of the gate.
Business communication can be thought of as a problem solving activity in which individuals may address the
following questions:
• What is the situation?
• What are some possible communication strategies?
• What is the best course of action?
• What is the best way to design the chosen message?
• What is the best way to deliver the message?
In this book, we will examine this problem solving process and help you learn to apply it in the kinds of situations
you are likely to encounter over the course of your career.
Communication Influences Your Thinking about Yourself and
Others
We all share a fundamental drive to communicate. Communication can be defined as the process of understanding
and sharing meaning (Pearson & Nelson, 2000). You share meaning in what you say and how you say it, both
in oral and written forms. If you could not communicate, what would life be like? A series of never-ending
frustrations? Not being able to ask for what you need or even to understand the needs of others?
Being unable to communicate might even mean losing a part of yourself, for you communicate your selfconcept—your sense of self and awareness of who you are—in many ways. Do you like to write? Do you find
it easy to make a phone call to a stranger or to speak to a room full of people? Perhaps someone told you that
you don’t speak clearly or your grammar needs improvement. Does that make you more or less likely to want to
3
4 Business Communication for Success
communicate? For some, it may be a positive challenge, while for others it may be discouraging. But in all cases,
your ability to communicate is central to your self-concept.
Take a look at your clothes. What are the brands you are wearing? What do you think they say about you?
Do you feel that certain styles of shoes, jewelry, tattoos, music, or even automobiles express who you are? Part
of your self-concept may be that you express yourself through texting, or through writing longer documents like
essays and research papers, or through the way you speak.
On the other side of the coin, your communications skills help you to understand others—not just their words,
but also their tone of voice, their nonverbal gestures, or the format of their written documents provide you with
clues about who they are and what their values and priorities may be. Active listening and reading are also part of
being a successful communicator.
Communication Influences How You Learn
When you were an infant, you learned to talk over a period of many months. When you got older, you didn’t learn
to ride a bike, drive a car, or even text a message on your cell phone in one brief moment. You need to begin the
process of improving your speaking and writing with the frame of mind that it will require effort, persistence, and
self-correction.
You learn to speak in public by first having conversations, then by answering questions and expressing your
opinions in class, and finally by preparing and delivering a “stand-up” speech. Similarly, you learn to write by
first learning to read, then by writing and learning to think critically. Your speaking and writing are reflections of
your thoughts, experience, and education. Part of that combination is your level of experience listening to other
speakers, reading documents and styles of writing, and studying formats similar to what you aim to produce.
As you study business communication, you may receive suggestions for improvement and clarification from
speakers and writers more experienced than yourself. Take their suggestions as challenges to improve; don’t give
up when your first speech or first draft does not communicate the message you intend. Stick with it until you get it
right. Your success in communicating is a skill that applies to almost every field of work, and it makes a difference
in your relationships with others.
Remember, luck is simply a combination of preparation and timing. You want to be prepared to communicate
well when given the opportunity. Each time you do a good job, your success will bring more success.
Communication Represents You and Your Employer
You want to make a good first impression on your friends and family, instructors, and employer. They all want
you to convey a positive image, as it reflects on them. In your career, you will represent your business or company
in spoken and written form. Your professionalism and attention to detail will reflect positively on you and set you
up for success.
In both oral and written situations, you will benefit from having the ability to communicate clearly. These are
skills you will use for the rest of your life. Positive improvements in these skills will have a positive impact on
your relationships, your prospects for employment, and your ability to make a difference in the world.
1.1 Why Is It Important to Communicate Well? 5
Communication Skills Are Desired by Business and Industry
Oral and written communication proficiencies are consistently ranked in the top ten desirable skills by employer
surveys year after year. In fact, high-powered business executives sometimes hire consultants to coach them in
sharpening their communication skills. According to the National Association of Colleges and Employers, the
following are the top five personal qualities or skills potential employers seek:
1. Communication skills (verbal and written)
2. Strong work ethic
3. Teamwork skills (works well with others, group communication)
4. Initiative
5. Analytical skills
Knowing this, you can see that one way for you to be successful and increase your promotion potential is to
increase your abilities to speak and write effectively.
Figure 1.1
Effective communication skills are assets that will get you there.
Maryland GovPics – Baltimore Jewish Council Meeting – CC BY 2.0.
In September 2004, the National Commission on Writing for America’s Families, Schools, and Colleges
published a study on 120 human resource directors titled Writing: A Ticket to Work…Or a Ticket Out, A Survey
of Business Leaders. The study found that “writing is both a ‘marker’ of high-skill, high-wage, professional work
and a ‘gatekeeper’ with clear equity implications,” said Bob Kerrey, president of New School University in New
York and chair of the commission. “People unable to express themselves clearly in writing limit their opportunities
for professional, salaried employment.” (The College Board, 2004)
6 Business Communication for Success
On the other end of the spectrum, it is estimated that over forty million Americans are illiterate, or unable to
functionally read or write. If you are reading this book, you may not be part of an at-risk group in need of basic
skill development, but you still may need additional training and practice as you raise your skill level.
An individual with excellent communication skills is an asset to every organization. No matter what career you
plan to pursue, learning to express yourself professionally in speech and in writing will help you get there.
Key Takeaway
Communication forms a part of your self-concept, and it helps you understand yourself and others, solve problems
and learn new things, and build your career.
Exercises
1.
Imagine that you have been hired to make “cold calls” to ask people whether they are familiar with a new
restaurant that has just opened in your neighborhood. Write a script for the phone call. Ask a classmate to
copresent as you deliver the script orally in class, as if you were making a phone call to the classmate.
Discuss your experience with the rest of the class.
2.
Imagine you have been assigned the task of creating a job description. Identify a job, locate at least two
sample job descriptions, and create one. Please present the job description to the class and note to what
degree communication skills play a role in the tasks or duties you have included.
References
The College Board. (2004, September). Writing skills necessary for employment, says big business: Writing can
be a ticket to professional jobs, says blue-ribbon group. Retrieved from http://www.writingcommission.org/pr/
writing_for_employ.html.
National Association of Colleges and Employers. (2009). Frequently asked questions. Retrieved from
http://www.naceweb.org/Press/Frequently_Asked_Questions.aspx?referal=.
National Commission on Writing for America’s Families, Schools, and Colleges. (2004, September). Writing:
A Ticket to Work…Or a Ticket Out, A Survey of Business Leaders. Retrieved from
http://www.writingcommission.org/pr/writing_for_employ.html.
Pearson, J., & Nelson, P. (2000). An introduction to human communication: understanding and sharing (p. 6).
Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill.
1.2 What Is Communication?
Learning Objectives
1.
Define communication and describe communication as a process.
2.
Identify and describe the eight essential components of communication.
3.
Identify and describe two models of communication.
Many theories have been proposed to describe, predict, and understand the behaviors and phenomena of which
communication consists. When it comes to communicating in business, we are often less interested in theory than
in making sure our communications generate the desired results. But in order to achieve results, it can be valuable
to understand what communication is and how it works.
Defining Communication
The root of the word “communication” in Latin is communicare, which means to share, or to make common
(Weekley, 1967). Communication is defined as the process of understanding and sharing meaning (Pearson &
Nelson, 2000).
At the center of our study of communication is the relationship that involves interaction between participants.
This definition serves us well with its emphasis on the process, which we’ll examine in depth across this text, of
coming to understand and share another’s point of view effectively.
The first key word in this definition is process. A process is a dynamic activity that is hard to describe because
it changes (Pearson & Nelson, 2000). Imagine you are alone in your kitchen thinking. Someone you know (say,
your mother) enters the kitchen and you talk briefly. What has changed? Now, imagine that your mother is joined
by someone else, someone you haven’t met before—and this stranger listens intently as you speak, almost as if
you were giving a speech. What has changed? Your perspective might change, and you might watch your words
more closely. The feedback or response from your mother and the stranger (who are, in essence, your audience)
may cause you to reevaluate what you are saying. When we interact, all these factors—and many more—influence
the process of communication.
The second key word is understanding: “To understand is to perceive, to interpret, and to relate our perception
and interpretation to what we already know.” (McLean, 2003) If a friend tells you a story about falling off a bike,
what image comes to mind? Now your friend points out the window and you see a motorcycle lying on the ground.
Understanding the words and the concepts or objects they refer to is an important part of the communication
process.
Next comes the word sharing. Sharing means doing something together with one or more people. You may
share a joint activity, as when you share in compiling a report; or you may benefit jointly from a resource, as when
you and several coworkers share a pizza. In communication, sharing occurs when you convey thoughts, feelings,
7
8 Business Communication for Success
ideas, or insights to others. You can also share with yourself (a process called intrapersonal communication) when
you bring ideas to consciousness, ponder how you feel about something, or figure out the solution to a problem
and have a classic “Aha!” moment when something becomes clear.
Finally, meaning is what we share through communication. The word “bike” represents both a bicycle and
a short name for a motorcycle. By looking at the context the word is used in and by asking questions, we can
discover the shared meaning of the word and understand the message.
Eight Essential Components of Communication
In order to better understand the communication process, we can break it down into a series of eight essential
components:
1. Source
2. Message
3. Channel
4. Receiver
5. Feedback
6. Environment
7. Context
8. Interference
Each of these eight components serves an integral function in the overall process. Let’s explore them one by one.
Source
The source imagines, creates, and sends the message. In a public speaking situation, the source is the person
giving the speech. He or she conveys the message by sharing new information with the audience. The speaker also
conveys a message through his or her tone of voice, body language, and choice of clothing. The speaker begins
by first determining the message—what to say and how to say it. The second step involves encoding the message
by choosing just the right order or the perfect words to convey the intended meaning. The third step is to present
or send the information to the receiver or audience. Finally, by watching for the audience’s reaction, the source
perceives how well they received the message and responds with clarification or supporting information.
Message
“The message is the stimulus or meaning produced by the source for the receiver or audience.” (McLean, 2005)
When you plan to give a speech or write a report, your message may seem to be only the words you choose
1.2 What Is Communication? 9
that will convey your meaning. But that is just the beginning. The words are brought together with grammar and
organization. You may choose to save your most important point for last. The message also consists of the way
you say it—in a speech, with your tone of voice, your body language, and your appearance—and in a report, with
your writing style, punctuation, and the headings and formatting you choose. In addition, part of the message may
be the environment or context you present it in and the noise that might make your message hard to hear or see.
Imagine, for example, that you are addressing a large audience of sales reps and are aware there is a World
Series game tonight. Your audience might have a hard time settling down, but you may choose to open with, “I
understand there is an important game tonight.” In this way, by expressing verbally something that most people in
your audience are aware of and interested in, you might grasp and focus their attention.
Channel
“The channel is the way in which a message or messages travel between source and receiver.” (McLean, 2005)
For example, think of your television. How many channels do you have on your television? Each channel takes
up some space, even in a digital world, in the cable or in the signal that brings the message of each channel to
your home. Television combines an audio signal you hear with a visual signal you see. Together they convey the
message to the receiver or audience. Turn off the volume on your television. Can you still understand what is
happening? Many times you can, because the body language conveys part of the message of the show. Now turn
up the volume but turn around so that you cannot see the television. You can still hear the dialogue and follow the
story line.
Similarly, when you speak or write, you are using a channel to convey your message. Spoken channels include
face-to-face conversations, speeches, telephone conversations and voice mail messages, radio, public address
systems, and voice over Internet protocol (VoIP). Written channels include letters, memorandums, purchase
orders, invoices, newspaper and magazine articles, blogs, e-mail, text messages, tweets, and so forth.
Receiver
“The receiver receives the message from the source, analyzing and interpreting the message in ways both intended
and unintended by the source.” (McLean, 2005) To better understand this component, think of a receiver on a
football team. The quarterback throws the football (message) to a receiver, who must see and interpret where to
catch the ball. The quarterback may intend for the receiver to “catch” his message in one way, but the receiver
may see things differently and miss the football (the intended meaning) altogether.
As a receiver you listen, see, touch, smell, and/or taste to receive a message. Your audience “sizes you up,”
much as you might check them out long before you take the stage or open your mouth. The nonverbal responses
of your listeners can serve as clues on how to adjust your opening. By imagining yourself in their place, you
anticipate what you would look for if you were them. Just as a quarterback plans where the receiver will be in
order to place the ball correctly, you too can recognize the interaction between source and receiver in a business
communication context. All of this happens at the same time, illustrating why and how communication is always
changing.
10 Business Communication for Success
Feedback
When you respond to the source, intentionally or unintentionally, you are giving feedback. Feedback is composed
of messages the receiver sends back to the source. Verbal or nonverbal, all these feedback signals allow the source
to see how well, how accurately (or how poorly and inaccurately) the message was received. Feedback also
provides an opportunity for the receiver or audience to ask for clarification, to agree or disagree, or to indicate
that the source could make the message more interesting. As the amount of feedback increases, the accuracy of
communication also increases (Leavitt & Mueller, 1951).
For example, suppose you are a sales manager participating in a conference call with four sales reps. As the
source, you want to tell the reps to take advantage of the fact that it is World Series season to close sales on
baseball-related sports gear. You state your message, but you hear no replies from your listeners. You might
assume that this means they understood and agreed with you, but later in the month you might be disappointed
to find that very few sales were made. If you followed up your message with a request for feedback (“Does this
make sense? Do any of you have any questions?”) you might have an opportunity to clarify your message, and to
find out whether any of the sales reps believed your suggestion would not work with their customers.
Environment
“The environment is the atmosphere, physical and psychological, where you send and receive messages.”
(McLean, 2005) The environment can include the tables, chairs, lighting, and sound equipment that are in the
room. The room itself is an example of the environment. The environment can also include factors like formal
dress, that may indicate whether a discussion is open and caring or more professional and formal. People may be
more likely to have an intimate conversation when they are physically close to each other, and less likely when
they can only see each other from across the room. In that case, they may text each other, itself an intimate form of
communication. The choice to text is influenced by the environment. As a speaker, your environment will impact
and play a role in your speech. It’s always a good idea to go check out where you’ll be speaking before the day of
the actual presentation.
Context
“The context of the communication interaction involves the setting, scene, and expectations of the individuals
involved.” (McLean, 2005) A professional communication context may involve business suits (environmental
cues) that directly or indirectly influence expectations of language and behavior among the participants.
A presentation or discussion does not take place as an isolated event. When you came to class, you came from
somewhere. So did the person seated next to you, as did the instructor. The degree to which the environment is
formal or informal depends on the contextual expectations for communication held by the participants. The person
sitting next to you may be used to informal communication with instructors, but this particular instructor may
be used to verbal and nonverbal displays of respect in the academic environment. You may be used to formal
interactions with instructors as well, and find your classmate’s question of “Hey Teacher, do we have homework
1.2 What Is Communication? 11
today?” as rude and inconsiderate when they see it as normal. The nonverbal response from the instructor will
certainly give you a clue about how they perceive the interaction, both the word choices and how they were said.
Context is all about what people expect from each other, and we often create those expectations out of
environmental cues. Traditional gatherings like weddings or quinceañeras are often formal events. There is a time
for quiet social greetings, a time for silence as the bride walks down the aisle, or the father may have the first
dance with his daughter as she is transformed from a girl to womanhood in the eyes of her community. In either
celebration there may come a time for rambunctious celebration and dancing. You may be called upon to give a
toast, and the wedding or quinceañera context will influence your presentation, timing, and effectiveness.
Figure 1.2
Context is all about what people expect from each other.
Toshihiro Gamo – Marriage Matrix – CC BY-NC-ND 2.0.
In a business meeting, who speaks first? That probably has some relation to the position and role each person
has outside the meeting. Context plays a very important role in communication, particularly across cultures.
Interference
Interference, also called noise, can come from any source. “Interference is anything that blocks or changes the
12 Business Communication for Success
source’s intended meaning of the message.”(McLean, 2005) For example, if you drove a car to work or school,
chances are you were surrounded by noise. Car horns, billboards, or perhaps the radio in your car interrupted your
thoughts, or your conversation with a passenger.
Psychological noise is what happens when your thoughts occupy your attention while you are hearing, or
reading,
Each student will write a 1500-word paper that evaluates a modern organization compensation package and how it is utilized to attract, retain, and promote employees. The organization can be an organization that the student is affiliated with or an organization in which the student desires to learn more about. The organization cannot be the same as the one previously evaluated in Assignment 1
Written exams grading criteria:
Systematic, comprehensive research (especially assigned texts — think in terms of
reference to a minimum of three different sources)
Write professionally.
Cite sources in text, correctly.
Logical, coherent, balanced argument
Well used tables/ graphs (bonus)
Follow instructions (debits)
Format:
Papers are to be double spaced with 1 inch margins.
Papers to be written using 12 pt. font (Arial or Times New Roman)
Papers need to be formatted and cited per APA, 6th Edition
Save paper. Do include your name, course number, assignment name, title of the paper and all that at the beginning of the paper, but you needn’t do this on a separate page.
o Especially if you submit the paper electronically, feel free to single space. I can use the comment function in MS Word to insert comments.
Write professionally.
Rule of thumb #1: identify the issue, state the question, identify the main theme, etc.
o Tell your reader in the first paragraph, if not the first line, your purpose: what is the central message of the paper. If you can’t identify a central message, rethink the paper!
Do this as clearly as possible, with a “This paper will…” statement, if necessary?
o Also, close the introduction with a brief summary of how the argument will proceed.
Rule of thumb #2: use a professional tone. Don’t force it. Some tips:
o Do not use first person (e.g. I, my, we, our), or second person (you, your). Use third person. In a professional context you most often are not writing for yourself, you are writing on behalf of an organization, to an impersonal audience.
o Learn the difference between there, they’re, and their; your and you’re; and its and it’s.
o Learn the difference between possessive apostrophes and plural.
o Beware singular/plural inconsistency (e.g. The student lost points for singular/plural consistency in their paper).
o Do not use contractions (e.g. don’t).
o Avoid rhetorical questions (e.g. Why is this the case?).
o Avoid starting a sentence with a conjunction (e.g. The paper was bad. And she started a sentence with and.).
o Get used to gender neutral usages.
Write for an informed lay person on the street, rather than for experts, the uninformed, or your class professor. So do not assume that your reader is in this class, and will know who Professor Harris is, or what we discussed in week three.
Use quotations sparingly. This is meant to be a paper by you, not a collection of selected quotes that you thought were especially relevant to the topic. As a rule of thumb, no more than 10% of your work should be direct quotations.
Otherwise: self explanatory. I have some writing sources listed at the end of the ‘Research’ page on the class website.
The paper must contain at least three references.
Please focus on all I attached you.
Please focus on this paper because the grade about this paper 35.
It’s time to start the application process for your own suggested pilot program at VCC. Tell us about what you want to do. Provide information needed for a proposed implementation plan. Consider the programs you previously researched and what worked for them. How do you want to take their work and improve or adapt them for the needs of Valley City? What is the best way to operate your project and do activities (such as outreach)?The Agency Director and the interns discuss how to proceed with the next step of their project, devising a pilot program for the homeless community.
please edit the qStrategies: How your company (Alhabib) applied these 5 Strategies for Competitive Advantage?? (must be related to MIS) Explain each Strategy in detaied. Information security: very short Data Management: How to use Data Management mentioned in the chapter? Please check Chapter 3 Stakeholders: Explain each Stakeholder separately & Choose 1 stakeholder to discuss
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Name:
Student ID:
Student Name:
Student ID:
Student Name:
Student ID:
Student Name:
Student ID:
Student Name:
Student ID:
Course Title: Management Information System
Course Code: MIS 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 1st Semester/2023-2024 CRN:
Assignment Name: Project – Part 1
Instructor Name: Layan BinSaleh
Student Grade: out of 17
Grade Level: Low/ Middle / High
Table of Contents
Executive Summary ……………………………………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group…………………………………………………………………. 4
PART ONE …………………………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Organizational Profile ……………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Organization details ……………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Purpose ………………………………………………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Organizational Structure …………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Strategies …………………………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Strategies for competitive advantage ………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Most appropriate strategies ……………………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Technology Involved…………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Organization IT infrastructure …………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Hardware ……………………………………………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Software ……………………………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Telecommunication ……………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Information Security ………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Networks ………………………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Other elements ………………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Data Management …………………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Methods to manage and process data ……………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Advantage …………………………………………………………………….Error! Bookmark not defined.
Disadvantage ………………………………………………………………..Error! Bookmark not defined.
Identify The Stakeholder ……………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
Who are the main individuals, groups, or departments affected by the information system?
……………………………………………………………………………………Error! Bookmark not defined.
References
15
Executive Summary
What does the assignment about (1), The name and field of the chosen company (0.5), and
briefly explain the distinct features (1).
Leading healthcare provider Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group (HMG) is
dedicated to providing all-inclusive healthcare services. Although their current information
system is mainly practical, it needs clinical decision support and data integration assistance. We
offer HealthHub Connect, a complete healthcare solution, to deal with these problems. Data
analytics, patient interaction, clinical decision support, interoperability, and telemedicine
integration are prioritized in this system. In addition to aiming to enhance patient care and
operational efficiency, it is consistent with HMG’s commitment to technology innovation (Acebo
et al., 2021). The governance policies of HMG were also reviewed, and their significance for
preserving accountability and openness in healthcare administration was underlined. Our
evaluation and suggested remedies show HMG’s commitment to providing top-notch healthcare
services according to industry norms and utilizing technology to improve patient outcomes.
HMG is positioned for more significant accomplishments in healthcare excellence because of its
journey, demonstrating its dedication to quality and ongoing progress.
Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group
1. Organizational Profile:
Brief background of the business including organization details (1), purpose (1), and
organizational structure (1).
Organization details:
With a solid dedication to providing complete healthcare services, Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib
Medical Services Group is a well-known and diverse healthcare operator ingrained in the
healthcare sector. The firm was founded with the noble goal of offering a comprehensive variety
of healthcare solutions that cater to patients’ and communities’ various and constantly changing
demands.
Purpose:
To fulfil this mission, the organization specializes in creating, running, and overseeing a
broad range of healthcare facilities, covering a rich tapestry of services. This outstanding
portfolio is part of the seamless coordination of hospitals, general and speciality medical
complexes, pharmacies, healthcare facilities, diagnostic centres, and radiology centres.
However, the organization does more for the healthcare system than only providing direct
patient care. Motivated by a dedication to augmenting the availability of necessary healthcare
products and fostering patients’ general welfare, the organization proactively imports, distributes,
and retails a wide array of medical products, medications, cosmetics, and medical equipment and
supplies (ArgaamPlus, 2020). This calculated diversification strengthens the group’s position as a
significant force in distributing essential healthcare products and expands its influence within the
medical industry.
Organizational structure:
The Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group’s organizational structure is
carefully divided into three main sections. First and foremost, the “Hospitals/ Healthcare
Facilities” section assumes a central role as the hub of the company’s activities. It is the
cornerstone for providing excellent medical treatment by founding, running, and flawlessly
administering hospitals, medical complexes, and various healthcare institutions. Secondly, the
“Pharmacies” section becomes an essential component of the healthcare supply chain, focusing
on the wholesale and retail distribution of pharmaceuticals, medical supplies, cosmetics, and a
wide range of other products (Lovell, 2020). Last but not least, the “HMG Solutions / Others”
section captures the innovative and flexible nature of the company. It acts as the group’s dynamic
arm, expanding its reach beyond the core pharmacy and healthcare activities to explore various
healthcare-related services, solutions, and endeavors. The Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical
Services Group’s constant dedication to meeting and exceeding the demands and expectations of
a rapidly developing healthcare landscape is embodied by this multidimensional approach.
2. Strategies:
Types of strategies for competitive advantages:
The Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Group (HMG) has made a name skillfully utilizing
its advantages over competitors.
1. Cost Leadership Strategy: HMG can optimize costs and operational efficiencies to
provide cheaper healthcare services than its competitors. This can be achieved through
streamlining processes, negotiating favorable agreements with suppliers, and adopting costeffective technologies and practices.
2. Differentiation Strategy: HMG can differentiate itself from competitors by offering
unique, high-quality healthcare services. This can be achieved through specialized centers of
excellence, personalized patient experiences, advanced medical treatments, and a focus on
evidence-based medicine. HMG’s collaborations with insurance firms have significantly
impacted its market share and revenue. Proactively engaging with insurance companies has
boosted the number of covered clients, increased its impact in the healthcare industry, and
strengthened its position as a reliable provider of healthcare services. HMG can attract and retain
loyal customers by providing exceptional and differentiated services.
3. Innovation Strategy: HMG can continue to invest in and adopt cutting-edge medical
technologies and innovations. This would allow them to stay ahead of the competition and
provide superior healthcare services. Examples include telemedicine, remote patient monitoring,
AI-driven diagnostics, and robotic surgery. The organization can now provide effective and
remote healthcare services thanks to the introduction of telemedicine, the Tele ICU Command
Center, the Tele Radiology Center, and the Emergency Command and Control Center (Al Habib,
n.d). These technological advancements have improved patient outcomes and satisfaction by
speeding up the delivery of medical care while raising the standard of healthcare services. By
embracing innovation, HMG can deliver improved healthcare outcomes and attract patients
seeking the latest advancements in medical care.
4. Operational Effectiveness Strategy: HMG can focus on continuously improving its
operational efficiency and effectiveness. This can be achieved through lean management
principles, process optimization, staff training and development, and implementing quality
management systems. HMG’s bold ambition to establish three new hospitals in critical areas,
including north Jeddah, southwest Jeddah, and Riyadh, demonstrates its commitment to
expanding geographically. This development serves the healthcare demands of an expanding
population in addition to tapping into expanding markets (Lovell, 2020). By streamlining
operations, HMG can minimize costs, reduce errors, and deliver healthcare services promptly,
which enhances patient satisfaction and increases market share.
5. Customer Orientation Strategy: HMG can strongly emphasize meeting customers’
needs and preferences. This can be achieved through personalized care plans, easy appointment
scheduling, convenient facilities and locations, and excellent customer service. HMG can build
solid relationships and loyalty with patients by putting the customer at the center of its
operations, leading to positive word-of-mouth recommendations and a competitive edge.
Strategies to improve the performance of the organization:
Among the strategies mentioned, the most appropriate ones to improve the organization’s
performance would be the Differentiation Strategy and the Operational Effectiveness Strategy.
The Differentiation Strategy would allow HMG to stand out by offering unique, high-quality
healthcare services. HMG can attract and retain loyal customers by focusing on specialized
centers of excellence, personalized patient experiences, advanced medical treatments, and
evidence-based medicine. This strategy would allow HMG to provide exceptional and
differentiated services that meet the needs and preferences of its patients, leading to positive
word-of-mouth recommendations and a competitive edge. Moreover, HMG’s collaborations with
insurance companies would strengthen its position as a reliable provider of healthcare services.
The Operational Effectiveness Strategy is crucial for HMG to continuously improve its
operational efficiency and effectiveness. By implementing lean management principles,
optimizing processes, and investing in staff training and development, HMG can minimize costs,
reduce errors, and deliver healthcare services promptly. This would enhance patient satisfaction
and increase market share. Furthermore, HMG’s expansion plans to establish new hospitals in
critical areas demonstrate its commitment to meeting the healthcare demands of an expanding
population and tapping into expanding markets. By streamlining operations, HMG could
efficiently manage these new hospitals and maximize their growth potential.
These two strategies would work hand in hand to improve the organization’s
performance. Differentiation would attract and retain patients by offering unique and highquality healthcare services, while operational effectiveness would ensure that these services are
delivered efficiently and effectively.
3. Technology Involved:
IT infrastructure
Dr Sulaiman Al-Habib Medical Group (HMG) has a well-defined IT infrastructure in
place to support its healthcare services. The organization has established networks that enable
smooth communication and data sharing across its various departments and locations. The main
objective of Dr Sulaiman Al-Habib Medical Group (HMG), which is to improve healthcare
services in the Middle East, is supported by a comprehensive digital signage network carefully
developed through the strategic implementation of a robust IT infrastructure. The organization’s
IT infrastructure comprises networks, information security protocols, hardware, software, and
telecommunications systems (Lovell, 2020). Moreover, HMG has implemented robust
information security protocols to protect patient data and ensure compliance with privacy
regulations. The organization also utilizes advanced telecommunications systems to facilitate
efficient and effective communication between healthcare professionals and patients.
Hardware:
▪
Hardware-wise, HMG has installed many screens in its medical facilities, including a
combination of 52″ portrait and 55″ landscape screens powered by 15 Scala players.
Patients in waiting rooms and nursing station zones can access information via these
screens, which act as the network’s visual interfaces. Furthermore, templates for different
signage network components are made using Scala Designer, guaranteeing a unified and
aesthetically pleasing content presentation.
Software:
▪
Software-wise, the Scala technology is essential to controlling and directing the network
of digital signs. Patients can view information about doctors on call, medical capabilities,
general hospital information, patient details, food order status, lab results, doctor
referrals, and much more, thanks to Scala’s user-friendly and adaptable players and
templates. This software integration perfectly aligns with HMG’s goals of removing
manual labor, raising standards, and lowering human error rates (Acebo et al., 2021).
Telecommunication:
▪
To facilitate real-time data transfer and communication throughout its vast network of
medical facilities, telecommunication technologies are essential parts of HMG’s IT
infrastructure. Because healthcare data is sensitive, information security is a top priority.
Information security:
▪
HMG has established strict information security procedures to protect patient data and
guarantee adherence to healthcare data privacy laws.
Networks:
▪
The foundation of the digital signage network is made up of local and wide-area
networks, which enable the smooth distribution of material to screens at various places
throughout Bahrain, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates (UAE). The effective
distribution of information to nursing stations and waiting areas depends on this network
infrastructure.
Other elements:
▪
Other elements of HMG’s IT infrastructure include servers, data storage systems, and
backup systems to ensure data availability and continuity. The organization also utilizes
cloud computing services for scalability and flexibility. Additionally, HMG employs
digital analytics tools to monitor and analyze the effectiveness of its digital signage
network and make data-driven decisions for continuous improvement. Integration with
other healthcare systems, such as Electronic Medical Records (EMR) and appointment
scheduling systems, further enhances the efficiency and effectiveness of HMG’s IT
infrastructure.
4. Data Management:
Methods the organization uses to manage and process data:
Method 1:
▪
Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group (HMG) uses various data management
techniques to guarantee effective and secure user information processing. With an
emphasis on delivering top-notch healthcare services while protecting user privacy, these
techniques cover data collection, storage, analysis, and utilization. In addition to sensitive
medical data, HMG gathers various user data, such as names, addresses, and contact
information. Users’ questions, voluntary platform registrations, and interactions with
healthcare services are how these data are collected (Al Habib, 2023). HMG also utilizes
monitoring devices and tracking mechanisms like cookies to log user activity on its
websites and applications.
HMG employs secure data storage systems and encryption techniques to protect user
information from unauthorized access. The organization also implements access controls
and audits to ensure that only authorized personnel have access to sensitive data. HMG
complies with relevant data protection regulations and laws to safeguard user privacy.
Furthermore, the organization regularly updates its security measures and educates its staff
on data management best practices to maintain the confidentiality and integrity of user
data.
Advantage
▪
Sensitive medical records and analytics are vital to the company and are securely stored
and analyzed. This information is essential for running healthcare programs, keeping
thorough medical records, and evaluating patient data to enable precise diagnosis and
treatment recommendations. Strict information security protocols are in place to secure this
private information and preserve patient privacy.
In addition to tracking website traffic patterns and facilitating necessary follow-up
activities, the collected data also optimizes website presentation for improved user
experience, allows users to access and use services more effectively, and makes data entry
in online forms easier. Data analysis is essential to enhance service delivery and guarantee
that users are promptly informed of any updates or changes in their healthcare.
Disadvantage:
▪
Although these data management techniques provide benefits, including quicker patient
care and individualized healthcare services, they also give rise to privacy problems (Lovell,
2020). Massively accumulating sensitive and personal data requires strict adherence to
privacy laws and robust data protection protocols to address these concerns effectively.
Data security and compliance with applicable laws and regulations are essential to preserve
user confidence and the privacy of medical records within HMG’s healthcare activities.
Method 2:
▪
HMG utilizes data anonymization techniques to enhance data privacy and security. HMG
can protect user privacy while gaining meaningful insights by removing any personally
identifiable information from the data before analysis. This method allows HMG to
perform large-scale data analysis to identify patterns and trends without compromising
individual privacy.
Advantage:
▪
Data anonymization ensures that individual patients’ personal information cannot be
linked to their medical records, providing additional privacy protection. This technique
allows HMG to comply with privacy regulations and maintain patients’ trust by
demonstrating a commitment to safeguarding sensitive information.
Disadvantage:
▪
While data anonymization protects individual privacy, it may limit the accuracy and
depth of analysis. Some valuable insights may require specific patient information, and
anonymizing the data may result in losing those insights. Balancing the need for privacy
and accurate analysis can be challenging, requiring careful consideration and decisionmaking.
Method 3:
▪
HMG employs data integration and interoperability methods to consolidate and
synchronize data from various sources. HMG can produce a thorough and unified image
of patients’ health by combining information from various healthcare systems, Internet of
Things (IoT) gadgets, and patient records. With this technique, care professionals may
better coordinate patient care and make decisions based on a comprehensive
understanding of the patient’s health.
▪
Advantage:
▪
Healthcare services are more effective and efficient because of data integration and
interoperability. A complete view of patient data across multiple systems reduces the risk
of errors, duplicate tests, and miscommunication. Additionally, it enables healthcare
professionals to deliver individualized therapy while considering the patient’s whole
medical history, leading to improved health results.
Disadvantage:
▪
It may be difficult and complex to ensure data integration and interoperability, especially
when working with several systems and information silos. Technical compatibility issues,
data standardization, and system compatibility may arise, requiring significant time and
resources to establish effective data sharing and collaboration among healthcare entities.
Method 4:
▪
It may be difficult and complex to ensure data integration and interoperability, especially
when working with several systems and information silos. Technical compatibility issues,
data standardization, and system compatibility may arise, requiring significant time and
resources to establish effective data sharing and collaboration among healthcare entities.
Advantage:
▪
Data analytics and machine learning enhance healthcare decision-making by providing
evidence-based insights. These techniques enable HMG to identify population health
trends, detect early signs of diseases, and optimize resource allocation. By leveraging
data analytics, HMG can continuously improve its healthcare services, enhance patient
outcomes, and reduce healthcare costs.
Disadvantage:
▪
Implementing data analytics and machine learning algorithms requires skilled data
scientists and advanced technological infrastructure. These qualities can be costly to
develop and retain. Additionally, guaranteeing the reliability and accuracy of the
algorithms is essential since inaccurate or biased predictions can have a big impact on
patient care. Robust validation and testing processes are necessary to ensure the validity
and ethical use of the algorithms.
5. Stakeholders:
▪
The Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Services Group (HMG) information system
substantially impacts several important stakeholders. First and foremost, this system is
used by the Board of Directors, which is the highest governing body, to access and
analyze essential governance papers, guaranteeing adherence to corporate governance
laws and maintaining accountability and openness (Al Habib, 2023). Second, to
successfully implement governance policies and procedures, the Executive Management
team, which includes the Executive Committee, depends on the information system. They
use it to access policies and procedures like the Related Parties Transactions Manual and
the Internal Audit Operational Manual, which help them manage risks, preserve
operational excellence, and ensure best practices are followed.
Furthermore, even if it isn’t stated directly, the information system indirectly affects
workers in various departments. Their daily actions and behavior are expected to be
influenced by Competing Business Standards, Social Responsibility Policies, and codes
of Conduct. Investors and shareholders have a stake in HMG’s corporate governance (Al
Habib, 2023). Furthermore, the information system indirectly positively impacts
regulatory bodies that supervise corporate governance. These authorities are interested in
HMG’s adherence to governance regulations and its capacity to offer accountability and
transparency. The information system helps the company comply with legal requirements
and effectively handle data about governance in preparation for future audits or inquiries.
Various stakeholders gain from the information system, essential to HMG’s governance,
management, compliance, and decision-making processes. It also helps the company
succeed in the healthcare sector.
References
Acebo, E., Miguel‐Dávila, J., & Nieto, M. (2021). External stakeholder engagement:
Complementary and substitutive effects on firms’ eco‐innovation. Business Strategy and
the Environment, 30(5), 2671–2687. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.2770
Al Mutair, A. (2019). Intensive Care Unit Patients’ perception of sleep quality and factors of sleep
disruption: Cross-sectional study. Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib Medical Journal.
https://doi.org/10.2991/dsahmj.k.190530.001
ArgaamPlus. (2020, March 17). Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib group eyes higher market share, says
CEO.
https://www.argaam.com/en/article/articledetail/id/1357490#:~:text=The%20group%20foc
used%20on%20expan
Dr Sulaiman Al Habib. (2023). Dr Sulaiman Al Habib company profile: Stock performance … pitchbook. https://pitchbook.com/profiles/company/433337-41
Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib. (2020, August 17). Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib medical group (HMG) reports
first half net income growth of 9.15%. ZAWYA. https://www.zawya.com/en/pressrelease/dr-sulaiman-al-habib-medical-group-hmg-reports-first-half-net-income-growth-of915-jqdz8h37
Lovell, T. (2020, November 26). Saudi Arabian dr. Sulaiman Al Habib hospital – al khobar
achieves Emram Stage 6. Healthcare IT News.
https://www.healthcareitnews.com/news/emea/saudi-arabian-dr-sulaiman-al-habibhospital-al-khobar-achieves-emram-stage-6
Sulaiman Al Habib. (n.d.). Dr. Sulaiman Al Habib medical services group. Argaam.
https://www.argaam.com/en/tadawul/tasi/sulaiman-alhabib/organizational-structure
Read the case study “Travel Solutions” at the end of Chapter 7 of your textbook, follow the following directions and then respond to the case study questions
A case study is a puzzle to be solved, so before reading and answering the specific questions, develop your proposed solution by following these five steps:
Read the case study to identify the key issues and underlying issues. These issues are the principles and concepts of the course module, which apply to the situation described in the case study.
Record the facts from the case study which are relevant to the principles and concepts of the module. The case may have extraneous information not relevant to the current module. Your ability to differentiate between relevant and irrelevant information is an important aspect of case analysis, as it will inform the focus of your answers.
Describe in some detail the actions that would address or correct the situation.
Consider how you would support your solution with examples from experience or current real-life examples or cases from textbooks.
Complete this initial analysis and then read the discussion questions. Typically, you will already have the answers to the questions but with a broader consideration. At this point, you can add the details and/or analytical tools required to solve the case.
Case Study Questions:
What is your assessment of the situation at Travelink at the end of the case? What are the underlying problems in the organization?
If you found yourself in Will or Robert’s situation, what would you do? Why?
If Will and Robert both decide to stay and try to advance needed changes, what changes would you recommend they focus on and how would you recommend they go about it? Would you, for example, share Will’s documentation of the problems within the company? Why or why not?
Have you ever been in a situation where you were a recipient of change and things went poorly? How did it affect you and others in the organization?
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 4-5 pages in length, which does not include the title and reference pages, which are never a part of the content minimum requirements.
Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.
Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the Turnitin Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for grading. If you are unsure how to submit an assignment into the Originality Check tool, review the Turnitin Originality Check – Student Guide for step-by-step instructions.
Review the grading rubric to see how you will be graded for this assignment.
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11738
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade: /Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.The due date for Assignment 1 is 7/10/2022.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.Late submissions will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.The due date for Assignment 1 is 7/10/2022.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.Late submissions will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to Operations
Management
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 12052
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Farrukh R. Ahmad
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer-
2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
4 word doc problems with 3 starter excel files on Scenario Analytics, Chapter 5 problem 1 for starter excel 5-1,Chapter 5 problem 2 for starter excel 5-2,for chapter 5 problem 3 for this problem, you need to create your own worksheet and chapter5 problem4 for starter excel 5-4I will send the rest of the starter files after I choose a tutor
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Update Details for this Workbook
Last Update by:
Scenarios Updated on:
Scenarios for fiscal year-end:
Cash Outflows Fiscal Year:
First Quarter
Month End
Paid During
AP
Loans
Leases
Salaries
Utilities
Supplies
Total Outflow
$
$
$
25.000
850
600
$
$
$
25.000
850
600
$
$
$
25.000
850
600
Cash Payment Schedule for Accounts Payable
Purchase Amount
$
50.000 November
$
40.000 December
$
30.000 January
$
40.000 February
$
60.000 March
Total Cash Payments
November
December
January
August 29,2023
ccounts Payable
February
March
AP Balance
Payment Model for Accounts Payable
First Month Second Month
Third Month
60%
30%
10%
Loan for Borrowing Cash
APR
Repayment in Years
Amount Borrowed
Monthly Payment
$
3,75%
5
100.000
Lease for New Equipment
APR
Lease Duration in Years
Asset Cost
Residual Value
Monthly Payment
$
$
2,90%
10
250.000
20.000
Chapter 5, Problem 2
The purpose of this exercise is to analyze a worksheet to identify and correct any integrity
flaws. Read the scenario below, then open the Excel workbook related to this exercise. Use
the AnswerSheet worksheet for any written responses required for this exercise.
SCENARIO
Your coworker is analyzing a few financial calculations in Excel and is asking for your
assistance. The workbook contains calculations for estimating the future value of
investments and annual lease payments for equipment. The following was explained in an
e-mail that was sent with the workbook:
•
•
The Investment Plan worksheet shows the investment valuation estimates. I set the time
horizon for each investment to five years. For some reason the outputs for the functions I
used are all negative. I think the numbers are correct, so just assume these values are
positive.
The Lease Payments worksheet shows the equipment we need to lease. I estimated the
equipment cost at $675,000. Our budget is $45,000 a year for lease payments. My
calculations show the annual payments are $52,409.38, so will need to lower the equipment
cost.
ASSIGNMENT
1. Look at the FV function that was used in column F on the Investment Plans worksheet. Why
are all the outputs negative?
2. Your coworker assumes the outputs produced by the FV function are correct, but they are
just negative instead of positive. Do you agree with this statement?
3. Evaluate the function used to calculate the lease payments in the Lease Payments
worksheet. Is the function producing a reliable output?
4. Your coworker believes the annual lease payment exceeds the $49,000 budget. If this is
true, what can you do to adjust the Equipment Cost so the annual payments are exactly
$49,000?
5. Make any necessary corrections to the functions used in this workbook. Set the equipment
cost in the Lease Payments worksheet so the annual payments are exactly $49,000.
Chapter 5, Problem 3
Credit cards can offer people considerable flexibility when it comes to purchasing power.
However, this flexibility usually comes at a cost through a high APR on any unpaid
balances. If only the minimum payment is made on a credit card balance, this debt could be
carried for many years and cost thousands of dollars in interest expense. The purpose of
this exercise is to design an amortization schedule for a credit card where only the minimum
payment is made. Assume the bank charges an APR of 16% and that the current balance
on the credit card is $5,000. The minimum payment is established on a fourteen year
repayment period and payments are made at the end of each month. The design of your
amortization table must include the following:
1. Design is limited to one worksheet.
2. Assume credit card statements are issued on the first day of each month. Show the
statement date for each payment and the statement month on the amortization schedule.
The date for the first statement is 9/1/2020.
3. For each payment, show the total payment, how much of the payment is interest expense,
and how much is used to reduce the balance of the credit card. The schedule should also
show the credit card balance at the beginning of every month.
4. Once the amortization table is complete, use the data to create a PivotTable on a second
worksheet. The PivotTable should show how much total interest is paid each year and the
total interest paid on the $5,000 balance after fourteen years. Also show the total amount of
principal paid each year. The row heading should be the year sorted in chronological order
beginning with 2020. Finally, show the number of payments made each year. Since the first
statement is 9/1/2020, the year 2020 will have four payments.
5. Use column and/or row headings, add titles to your worksheets, and rename the worksheet
tabs with appropriate labels. Also, use appropriate number formats on both the amortization
worksheet and the PivotTable.
Chapter 5, Problem 4
Answer the following questions by executing the required skills on the starter file listed
above. Answer each question in the order it appears. Questions that are preceded with the
letters KO indicate you must only use your keyboard and not your mouse to execute the
required skill.
1. Open the Investments worksheet. In cell B5, enter a function that will calculate the present
value of an investment using the data in the range B2:B4. Assume this investment will be
made at the beginning of the first year.
2. Consider the present value calculation in cell B5. Assume that there is only $275,000 that
can be invested today, but you still need to achieve a future value of $1,550,000. Use Goal
Seek to set the present value calculation to $269,000 by changing the Annual Rate of
Return.
3. In cell B11, enter a function that will calculate the present value of an investment that will
provide funding for the cost in cell B10. Use the data in the range B8:B10 to set up the
function. Assume that payments are made at the beginning of each year.
4. Enter a function in cell B17 that will calculate the monthly payment on an auto loan. Use the
data in the range B14:B16 to create the function. Assume the monthly payment are made at
the end of each month.
5. Enter a function in cell B24 that will calculate the future value of a recurring investment. Use
the data in the range B20:B23 to create the function. Assume that investments are made at
the end of each month.
6. Open the Loan worksheet. Use the necessary data in the range B2:B5 to create a formula
in cell B6 that calculates the Loan Principal.
7. Enter the date 12/17/2022 into cell B7.
8. Enter a formula into cell B8 that displays a date 90 days from the date entered into cell B7.
9. Enter a function into cell B9 that shows the date that occurs on the last day of the month,
one month after the date in cell B8.
10. Enter a function into cell B10 that shows just the year of the date that is in cell B9.
11. Enter a function into cell B11 that calculates the monthly payments for the loan. Use the
data in the range B2:B6 to create the function. Assume that payments are made at the end
of each month.
12. Open the Lease worksheet. Enter a formula into cell B6 that calculates the monthly lease
payments. Use the data in the range B2:B5 to create the function. Assume that payments
are made at the end of each month.
13. Apply protection to the Lease worksheet such that users can edit the range B2:B5. Name
this range Lease Data.
14. Open the Summary worksheet. Use a cell reference in cell B2 to display the value in cell B4
on the Lease worksheet.
15. Use a cell reference in cell B3 to display the value in cell B6 on the Loan worksheet.
16. Enter a formula in cell B4 that adds the values in cells B5 and B11 on the Investments
worksheet.
17. Enter a formula in cell B5 that adds the values in cells B17 and B24 on the Investments
worksheet.
18. Save and close your workbook.
Chapter 5, Problem 1
Evaluating scenarios to determine the amount of cash that will be paid or become an
outflow for a business is a critical exercise. If cash outflows are more than what is planned,
a company runs the risk of not being able to pay its obligations. In addition, it may be very
difficult to borrow additional funds to pay for these obligations which may put the company
at risk entering bankruptcy. The purpose of this exercise is to construct a basic cash outflow
schedule to help a company determine how much cash will be spent during the first quarter.
The company’s total cash outflow for any given month must not exceed $80,000.
Begin the exercise by opening the file named Chapter 5, Problem 1. Questions that are
preceded with the letters KO indicate you must only use your keyboard and not your mouse
to execute the required skill.
1.
2.
Type your name into cell B2 in the Update Status worksheet. This worksheet will serve
as a data internal control as it provides information regarding who is making changes to
the workbook, the date the changes were made, and the fiscal year that is being
estimated.
Type today’s date into cell B3.
3.
This exercise will assume that the company’s fiscal year ends on December 31 every
year. In cell B4, type the December 31 date using one year later from the date entered
into cell B3. For example, if the date typed into cell B3 is 10/20/2020, then the date in
cell B4 should be 12/31/2021.
4.
Open the Cash Flow worksheet. Type the date 1/31/2022 into cell B2. This cash outflow
schedule will show total cash payments for the first quarter. The first quarter for this
company’s fiscal year is January, February, and March which is the same as a calendar
year.
5.
Use the EOMONTH function in cell C2 to show the last day of the next month which is
February. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, the function name “eomonth”,
and an open parenthesis.
6.
Click cell B2 to define the “start_date” argument. Then type a comma to advance to the
“months” argument.
7.
Type the number 1 to define the “months” argument. Then, type a closing parenthesis
and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
8.
The output of the EOMONTH function should be the number 44620. Click cell C2 and
change the format by clicking the DOWN arrow for the number format dropdown menu
in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Select the Short Date option from the number dropdown
list.
9.
Copy cell C2 and paste it into cell D2. Row 2 should now show the last day for each
month in the first quarter.
10. Click cell D1. Enter the YEAR function to show just the year for the date that is entered
into cell B2. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, followed by the function name
“year”, and an open parenthesis.
11. Click cell B2, type a closing parenthesis and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
12. Click cell B3. Use the TEXT function to show the full month name for the date entered
into cell B2. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, the function name “text”, and
an open parenthesis.
13. Click cell B2 to define the “value” argument. Type a comma to advance to the
“format_text” argument.
14. Type an open quotation followed by the letter “m” four times and then a closing
quotation. The “format_text” argument should appear exactly as shown here: “mmmm”.
It is important to remember to include the quotations as shown.
15. Type a closing parenthesis and then tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
16. Copy cell B3 and paste it into the range C3:D3.
17. Open the AP worksheet. Accounts payable (AP) is a significant source of cash outflows
for a company. This account includes items that were purchased on credit where the
company is given an invoice and has a certain amount of time to pay it. For example, a
company may purchase inventory from a supplier to sell to customers. The supplier may
allow the company to pay the invoice in sixty days. The amount owed on this invoice will
appear in the company’s accounts payable (AP) account until the invoice is paid.
18. Click cell C3 and start a formula by typing an equal sign =.
19. Click cell A3 and then tap the F4 key on your keyboard to add an absolute reference to
this cell. This is the value of all the items purchased in the month of November.
20. Type an asterisk * for multiplication.
21. Click the AP Pay Model worksheet tab. This worksheet shows a model of when and how
much the company pays for purchases. Since invoices can vary in how long a company
has to pay, this worksheet shows what the expected pay percent is for all purchases in
any given month.
22. Click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet. This cell shows that 60% of the
purchases in any given month will be paid in that same month.
23. Complete the formula by tapping the ENTER key on your keyboard. Since there were
$50,000 of items purchased in November, 60% or $30,000 will be paid in November.
24. Copy cell C3 and paste it into the range D3:E3. Notice that relative referencing changes
the cell reference that was used from the AP Pay Model worksheet. Also, you will see
that $5,000 of purchases in November will be paid in January. This is why November is
included in the cash outflow schedule for the first quarter.
25. Click cell D4. Start a formula by typing an equal sign =, click cell A4, and tap the F4 key
on your keyboard to add an absolute reference to this cell.
26. Type an asterisk * and then click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet.
27. Tap the ENTER key on your keyboard and then copy cell D4 and paste it into the range
E4:F4.
28. Start a formula in cell E5 by typing an equal sign =, click cell A5 and add an absolute
reference.
29. Type an asterisk * and then click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet. Tap the
ENTER key to complete the formula.
30. Copy cell E5 and paste it into the range F5:G5.
31. Enter a formula in cell F6 that multiplies cell A6 by cell A3 on the AP Pay Model
worksheet. Put an absolute reference on cell A6 in your formula.
32. Copy cell F6 and paste it into cell G6.
33. Enter a formula in cell G7 that multiplies cell A7 by cell A3 on the AP Pay Model
worksheet.
34. Enter a SUM function in cell C8 on the AP worksheet that sums the values in the range
C3:C7.
35. Copy cell C8 and paste it into the range D8:H8.
36. Enter a formula in cell H3 that subtracts from cell A3 the sum of the values in the range
C3:G3. When constructing the formula, add cell A3 first, type a minus sign -, and then
add the SUM function that will sum the values in the range C3:G3. The output should be
zero. This formula is calculating how much of the purchase amount in cell A3 has not
been paid. Since all purchases from November will have been paid by the end of
January, the unpaid amount that would be left in the AP account at the end of the first
quarter would be zero.
37. Copy cell H3 and paste it into the range H4:H7.
38. Open the Loan worksheet.
39. Click cell B5. Begin the PMT function by typing an equal sign =, the function name
“pmt”, and an open parenthesis. The purpose of this function is to determine the monthly
payments for the loan details in the range B3:B4.
40. To define the “rate” argument, click cell B2, type a front slash / for division, and type the
number 12. Since the PMT function is calculating monthly payments, the APR is divided
by 12.
41. Type a comma to advance to the “nper” argument.
42. Click cell B3, type an asterisk *, and then type the number 12. This will convert the
duration of the loan from years to months.
43. Type a comma to advance to the “pv” argument.
44. Type a minus sign – and then click cell B4.
45. Complete the function by typing a closing parenthesis and then tap the ENTER key on
your keyboard. Since there will not be a lump-sum payment at the end of the loan, and
since payments will be made at the end of the month, the last two arguments do not
have to be defined. Excel will assume zero for both.
46. Open the Lease worksheet.
47. Click cell B6. Begin the PMT function by typing an equal sign =, the function name
“pmt”, and an open parenthesis. The purpose of this function is to determine the monthly
payments for the equipment lease details in the range B2:B5.
48. Define the “rate” argument by dividing the APR in cell B2 by 12.
49. Define the “nper” argument by multiplying the lease duration in years in cell B3 by 12.
50. Define the “pv” argument with cell B4. This cell reference must be preceded by a minus
sign.
51. Define the “fv” argument with cell B5.
52. Define the “type” argument with number 1. This lease will assume payments are
required at the beginning of the month. To complete the function, type a closing
parenthesis and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
53. Open the Cash Flow worksheet and click cell B4.
54. Enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell E8 on the AP worksheet. Type an
equal sign =, click the AP worksheet tab, click cell E8, and tap the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
55. Copy cell B4 on the Cash Flow worksheet and paste into the range C4:D4.
56. Click cell B5 and enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell B5 on the Loan
worksheet.
57. Click cell C5 on the Cash Flow worksheet and enter a cell reference that will display the
value in cell B5 on the Cash Flow worksheet. Since the monthly payments are the same
every month, what every value is displayed in cell B5 can also be displayed in cell C5.
58. Copy cell C5 and paste it into cell D5.
59. Click cell B6 and enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell B6 on the Lease
worksheet.
60. Enter a cell reference in cell C6 that will display the value in cell B6.
61. Copy cell C6 and paste it into cell D6.
62. Enter a SUM function into cell B10 that will sum the values in the range B4:B9.
63. Copy cell B10 and paste it into the range C10:D10.
64. The total cash outflow in cell D10 should be $81,534 which exceeds the limit of $80,000.
Use Goal Seek to change the purchase value in cell A7 on the AP worksheet so the
total spend in cell D10 is equal to $80,000. Begin by clicking cell D10 on the Cash Flow
worksheet.
65. Click the What-If Analysis button in the Data tab of the Ribbon and select Goal Seek
from the dropdown menu.
66. Click the “To value” input box in the Goal Seek dialog box and type the number “80000”.
67. Click the Collapse dialog box button next to the “By changing cell” input box.
68. Click the AP worksheet tab and then click cell A7.
69. Tap the ENTER key on your keyboard and then click the OK button on the Goal Seek
dialog box.
70. Click the OK button on the Goal Seek Status dialog box. Goal Seek should have
reduced the amount in cell A7 on the AP worksheet in order to achieve the $80,000 in
total cash outflow for the month of March.
71. Save and close your workbook.
Update Details for this Workbook
Last Update by:
Scenarios Updated on:
Scenarios for fiscal year-end:
Cash Outflows Fiscal Year:
First Quarter
Month End
Paid During
AP
Loans
Leases
Salaries
Utilities
Supplies
Total Outflow
$
$
$
25,000
850
600
$
$
$
25,000
850
600
$
$
$
25,000
850
600
Cash Payment Schedule for Accounts Payable
Purchase Amount
$
50,000 November
$
40,000 December
$
30,000 January
$
40,000 February
$
60,000 March
Total Cash Payments
November
December
January
August 29,2023
ccounts Payable
February
March
AP Balance
Payment Model for Accounts Payable
First Month Second Month
Third Month
60%
30%
10%
Loan for Borrowing Cash
APR
Repayment in Years
Amount Borrowed
Monthly Payment
$
3.75%
5
100,000
Lease for New Equipment
APR
Lease Duration in Years
Asset Cost
Residual Value
Monthly Payment
$
$
2.90%
10
250,000
20,000
Chapter 5, Problem 4
Answer the following questions by executing the required skills on the starter file listed
above. Answer each question in the order it appears. Questions that are preceded with the
letters KO indicate you must only use your keyboard and not your mouse to execute the
required skill.
1. Open the Investments worksheet. In cell B5, enter a function that will calculate the present
value of an investment using the data in the range B2:B4. Assume this investment will be
made at the beginning of the first year.
2. Consider the present value calculation in cell B5. Assume that there is only $275,000 that
can be invested today, but you still need to achieve a future value of $1,550,000. Use Goal
Seek to set the present value calculation to $269,000 by changing the Annual Rate of
Return.
3. In cell B11, enter a function that will calculate the present value of an investment that will
provide funding for the cost in cell B10. Use the data in the range B8:B10 to set up the
function. Assume that payments are made at the beginning of each year.
4. Enter a function in cell B17 that will calculate the monthly payment on an auto loan. Use the
data in the range B14:B16 to create the function. Assume the monthly payment are made at
the end of each month.
5. Enter a function in cell B24 that will calculate the future value of a recurring investment. Use
the data in the range B20:B23 to create the function. Assume that investments are made at
the end of each month.
6. Open the Loan worksheet. Use the necessary data in the range B2:B5 to create a formula
in cell B6 that calculates the Loan Principal.
7. Enter the date 12/17/2022 into cell B7.
8. Enter a formula into cell B8 that displays a date 90 days from the date entered into cell B7.
9. Enter a function into cell B9 that shows the date that occurs on the last day of the month,
one month after the date in cell B8.
10. Enter a function into cell B10 that shows just the year of the date that is in cell B9.
11. Enter a function into cell B11 that calculates the monthly payments for the loan. Use the
data in the range B2:B6 to create the function. Assume that payments are made at the end
of each month.
12. Open the Lease worksheet. Enter a formula into cell B6 that calculates the monthly lease
payments. Use the data in the range B2:B5 to create the function. Assume that payments
are made at the end of each month.
13. Apply protection to the Lease worksheet such that users can edit the range B2:B5. Name
this range Lease Data.
14. Open the Summary worksheet. Use a cell reference in cell B2 to display the value in cell B4
on the Lease worksheet.
15. Use a cell reference in cell B3 to display the value in cell B6 on the Loan worksheet.
16. Enter a formula in cell B4 that adds the values in cells B5 and B11 on the Investments
worksheet.
17. Enter a formula in cell B5 that adds the values in cells B17 and B24 on the Investments
worksheet.
18. Save and close your workbook.
Chapter 5, Problem 1
Evaluating scenarios to determine the amount of cash that will be paid or become an
outflow for a business is a critical exercise. If cash outflows are more than what is planned,
a company runs the risk of not being able to pay its obligations. In addition, it may be very
difficult to borrow additional funds to pay for these obligations which may put the company
at risk entering bankruptcy. The purpose of this exercise is to construct a basic cash outflow
schedule to help a company determine how much cash will be spent during the first quarter.
The company’s total cash outflow for any given month must not exceed $80,000.
Begin the exercise by opening the file named Chapter 5, Problem 1. Questions that are
preceded with the letters KO indicate you must only use your keyboard and not your mouse
to execute the required skill.
1.
2.
Type your name into cell B2 in the Update Status worksheet. This worksheet will serve
as a data internal control as it provides information regarding who is making changes to
the workbook, the date the changes were made, and the fiscal year that is being
estimated.
Type today’s date into cell B3.
3.
This exercise will assume that the company’s fiscal year ends on December 31 every
year. In cell B4, type the December 31 date using one year later from the date entered
into cell B3. For example, if the date typed into cell B3 is 10/20/2020, then the date in
cell B4 should be 12/31/2021.
4.
Open the Cash Flow worksheet. Type the date 1/31/2022 into cell B2. This cash outflow
schedule will show total cash payments for the first quarter. The first quarter for this
company’s fiscal year is January, February, and March which is the same as a calendar
year.
5.
Use the EOMONTH function in cell C2 to show the last day of the next month which is
February. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, the function name “eomonth”,
and an open parenthesis.
6.
Click cell B2 to define the “start_date” argument. Then type a comma to advance to the
“months” argument.
7.
Type the number 1 to define the “months” argument. Then, type a closing parenthesis
and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
8.
The output of the EOMONTH function should be the number 44620. Click cell C2 and
change the format by clicking the DOWN arrow for the number format dropdown menu
in the Home tab of the Ribbon. Select the Short Date option from the number dropdown
list.
9.
Copy cell C2 and paste it into cell D2. Row 2 should now show the last day for each
month in the first quarter.
10. Click cell D1. Enter the YEAR function to show just the year for the date that is entered
into cell B2. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, followed by the function name
“year”, and an open parenthesis.
11. Click cell B2, type a closing parenthesis and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
12. Click cell B3. Use the TEXT function to show the full month name for the date entered
into cell B2. Begin the function by typing an equal sign =, the function name “text”, and
an open parenthesis.
13. Click cell B2 to define the “value” argument. Type a comma to advance to the
“format_text” argument.
14. Type an open quotation followed by the letter “m” four times and then a closing
quotation. The “format_text” argument should appear exactly as shown here: “mmmm”.
It is important to remember to include the quotations as shown.
15. Type a closing parenthesis and then tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
16. Copy cell B3 and paste it into the range C3:D3.
17. Open the AP worksheet. Accounts payable (AP) is a significant source of cash outflows
for a company. This account includes items that were purchased on credit where the
company is given an invoice and has a certain amount of time to pay it. For example, a
company may purchase inventory from a supplier to sell to customers. The supplier may
allow the company to pay the invoice in sixty days. The amount owed on this invoice will
appear in the company’s accounts payable (AP) account until the invoice is paid.
18. Click cell C3 and start a formula by typing an equal sign =.
19. Click cell A3 and then tap the F4 key on your keyboard to add an absolute reference to
this cell. This is the value of all the items purchased in the month of November.
20. Type an asterisk * for multiplication.
21. Click the AP Pay Model worksheet tab. This worksheet shows a model of when and how
much the company pays for purchases. Since invoices can vary in how long a company
has to pay, this worksheet shows what the expected pay percent is for all purchases in
any given month.
22. Click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet. This cell shows that 60% of the
purchases in any given month will be paid in that same month.
23. Complete the formula by tapping the ENTER key on your keyboard. Since there were
$50,000 of items purchased in November, 60% or $30,000 will be paid in November.
24. Copy cell C3 and paste it into the range D3:E3. Notice that relative referencing changes
the cell reference that was used from the AP Pay Model worksheet. Also, you will see
that $5,000 of purchases in November will be paid in January. This is why November is
included in the cash outflow schedule for the first quarter.
25. Click cell D4. Start a formula by typing an equal sign =, click cell A4, and tap the F4 key
on your keyboard to add an absolute reference to this cell.
26. Type an asterisk * and then click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet.
27. Tap the ENTER key on your keyboard and then copy cell D4 and paste it into the range
E4:F4.
28. Start a formula in cell E5 by typing an equal sign =, click cell A5 and add an absolute
reference.
29. Type an asterisk * and then click cell A3 on the AP Pay Model worksheet. Tap the
ENTER key to complete the formula.
30. Copy cell E5 and paste it into the range F5:G5.
31. Enter a formula in cell F6 that multiplies cell A6 by cell A3 on the AP Pay Model
worksheet. Put an absolute reference on cell A6 in your formula.
32. Copy cell F6 and paste it into cell G6.
33. Enter a formula in cell G7 that multiplies cell A7 by cell A3 on the AP Pay Model
worksheet.
34. Enter a SUM function in cell C8 on the AP worksheet that sums the values in the range
C3:C7.
35. Copy cell C8 and paste it into the range D8:H8.
36. Enter a formula in cell H3 that subtracts from cell A3 the sum of the values in the range
C3:G3. When constructing the formula, add cell A3 first, type a minus sign -, and then
add the SUM function that will sum the values in the range C3:G3. The output should be
zero. This formula is calculating how much of the purchase amount in cell A3 has not
been paid. Since all purchases from November will have been paid by the end of
January, the unpaid amount that would be left in the AP account at the end of the first
quarter would be zero.
37. Copy cell H3 and paste it into the range H4:H7.
38. Open the Loan worksheet.
39. Click cell B5. Begin the PMT function by typing an equal sign =, the function name
“pmt”, and an open parenthesis. The purpose of this function is to determine the monthly
payments for the loan details in the range B3:B4.
40. To define the “rate” argument, click cell B2, type a front slash / for division, and type the
number 12. Since the PMT function is calculating monthly payments, the APR is divided
by 12.
41. Type a comma to advance to the “nper” argument.
42. Click cell B3, type an asterisk *, and then type the number 12. This will convert the
duration of the loan from years to months.
43. Type a comma to advance to the “pv” argument.
44. Type a minus sign – and then click cell B4.
45. Complete the function by typing a closing parenthesis and then tap the ENTER key on
your keyboard. Since there will not be a lump-sum payment at the end of the loan, and
since payments will be made at the end of the month, the last two arguments do not
have to be defined. Excel will assume zero for both.
46. Open the Lease worksheet.
47. Click cell B6. Begin the PMT function by typing an equal sign =, the function name
“pmt”, and an open parenthesis. The purpose of this function is to determine the monthly
payments for the equipment lease details in the range B2:B5.
48. Define the “rate” argument by dividing the APR in cell B2 by 12.
49. Define the “nper” argument by multiplying the lease duration in years in cell B3 by 12.
50. Define the “pv” argument with cell B4. This cell reference must be preceded by a minus
sign.
51. Define the “fv” argument with cell B5.
52. Define the “type” argument with number 1. This lease will assume payments are
required at the beginning of the month. To complete the function, type a closing
parenthesis and tap the ENTER key on your keyboard.
53. Open the Cash Flow worksheet and click cell B4.
54. Enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell E8 on the AP worksheet. Type an
equal sign =, click the AP worksheet tab, click cell E8, and tap the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
55. Copy cell B4 on the Cash Flow worksheet and paste into the range C4:D4.
56. Click cell B5 and enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell B5 on the Loan
worksheet.
57. Click cell C5 on the Cash Flow worksheet and enter a cell reference that will display the
value in cell B5 on the Cash Flow worksheet. Since the monthly payments are the same
every month, what every value is displayed in cell B5 can also be displayed in cell C5.
58. Copy cell C5 and paste it into cell D5.
59. Click cell B6 and enter a cell reference that will display the value in cell B6 on the Lease
worksheet.
60. Enter a cell reference in cell C6 that will display the value in cell B6.
61. Copy cell C6 and paste it into cell D6.
62. Enter a SUM function into cell B10 that will sum the values in the range B4:B9.
63. Copy cell B10 and paste it into the range C10:D10.
64. The total cash outflow in cell D10 should be $81,534 which exceeds the limit of $80,000.
Use Goal Seek to change the purchase value in cell A7 on the AP worksheet so the
total spend in cell D10 is equal to $80,000. Begin by clicking cell D10 on the Cash Flow
worksheet.
65. Click the What-If Analysis button in the Data tab of the Ribbon and select Goal Seek
from the dropdown menu.
66. Click the “To value” input box in the Goal Seek dialog box and type the number “80000”.
67. Click the Collapse dialog box button next to the “By changing cell” input box.
68. Click the AP worksheet tab and then click cell A7.
69. Tap the ENTER key on your keyboard and then click the OK button on the Goal Seek
dialog box.
70.
i want to do part 2 and part 3the project about whatsapp i well give you part one and you copmplate paer 2 and 3
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Name:
Student ID:
Course Title: Management Information Course Code: MIS201
System
Academic Year/ Semester:
CRN:
Instructor Name:
Student Grade:
Grade Level:
Low/ Middle / High
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment of MIS201- Management Information System
MIS201 – Project
First Semester 2023-2024
Submission
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Submission: Week 6 Saturday 07/10/2023
Submission: Week 14 Thursday 7/12/2023
Submission: Instructors will manage the date and time for presentation during week 15
40 Marks
Assignment Details
The project involves studying the IT infrastructure of a relevant information system (IS)/
information technology (IT) used by selecting any organization of your choice locally or
internationally
The idea is to investigate the selected organization using the main components of IT
(Hardware, software, services, data management and networking). Infrastructure
Investigation, which is in a selected industry, should be carried out by using articles,
websites, books and journal papers and /or interviews. In the report, you are expected to
discuss:
Project Report Structure: Part 1
Submission: Week 6 Saturday 07/10/2023
Marks: 17 Marks
1. Cover Page (1 Mark).
This must contain topic title (0.25), student names and Students ID (0.5), section number and course
name (0.25).
(You can find the cover page in the blackboard)
2. Table of Contents (0.5 Mark).
Make sure the table of contents contains and corresponds to the headings in the text, figures, and
tables.
3. Executive Summary (2.5 Marks).
What does the assignment about (1), The name and field of the chosen company (0.5), and briefly
explain the distinct features (1).
4. Organizational Profile (3 Marks).
Brief background of the business including organization details (1), purpose (1), and organizational
structure (1).
5. Strategies (4 Marks).
Discuss different types of strategies for competitive advantages (2), and then select and discuss the
most appropriate strategies to improve the performance of the organization (2).
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course and its related to your selected organization)
6. Technology Involved (3 Marks).
How is the organization set up in terms of its IT infrastructure? Discuss the hardware (0.5), software
(0.5), telecommunication (0.5), information security (0.5), networks (0.5), and other elements (0,5).
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course, and it’s related to your selected
organization)
7. Data Management (2 Marks).
Discuss the methods the organization uses to manage and process data (1), and then give one
advantage and one disadvantage of these methods (1).
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course (chapter 3) and link it to your selected
organization)
8. Identify the Stakeholders (1 Mark)
Who are the main individuals, groups, or departments affected by the information system?
(You can choose any stakeholder who has a major influence on the IS or vice versa. You can choose 1
stakeholder to discuss)
Project Report Structure: Part 2
Submission: Week 14 Thursday 7/12/2023
Marks: 13 Marks
9. Analysis of Existing System (5 Marks).
Analyze the key problems of the existing system used by the company (2). Also, discuss the
Information Systems used within the company (3) for example:
•
•
•
•
•
Transaction processing systems (TPS)
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems
Functional Area Information Systems
Business intelligence
DSS
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course and it’s related to your selected organization)
10. System Evaluation (2 Marks).
Evaluate the current system that the company use (your chosen company) with one of the following
options (1):
•
•
•
Success
Partial failure/partial success
Total failure
Then, State the reasons for your choice (1)
11. Suggestions for the company (3 Marks)
Design or choose a system to help the company solve its main problems. State the following:
•
•
•
The new system name (1)
Its features (1)
Problems that will be solved (1)
(If the system that the company uses is successful and does not need to be changed, you can
mention that (1), mention its features (1), and mention the problems that it solved or prevented
from happening (1).)
(You can discuss any points that you learned in this course and it’s related to your selected organization)
12. Conclusion (2 Marks).
Summarize your report (including part 1)
13. References (1 Mark).
Use APA referencing style format
Project Presentation: Part 3
Submission: Instructors will manage the date and time for presentation during week 15
Marks: 10 Marks
Make a power-point presentation of your Project work mentioning all the above contents and
present in a group (All team members must participate( (1). There must be minimum 10 slides
in the presentation with a good background design (0.5), readable font size and style with an
appropriate color (0.5).
Presentation must have the following format:
•
First slide: Group members name and Student id & Title of the Project (1)
•
Company Profile (1)
•
Strategies (1)
•
Technology Involved and Data Management (1)
•
Analysis of Existing System (1)
•
Evaluation and suggestions (1)
•
Conclusion (1)
•
References (1)
Guidelines for the assignment:
✓ Make sure to include the cover page with all information required. One mark will be deducted if
there is no cover page
✓ This is a group project (2-3 students), which is part of your course score. It requires effort, research,
and critical thinking.
✓ Use font Times New Roman, 12 font sizes
✓ Use 1.5 line spacing with adjust to all paragraphs (alignment).
✓ Use the footer function to insert page number.
✓ Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project and references.
✓ The minimum number of required references is 3 for each part (1 and 2).
✓ Your project report length Part 1 should be between 1500 to 2200 words & Part 2 should be
between 1000 to 2000 words.
✓ You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the assignment.
✓ Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of assignment
(Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing
and word count).
✓ Assignment must be in Word format only NO PDF
✓ Your file should be saved as Word doc [Example]: [Your Name] [CRN] MIS201 – Project Assignment
Part 1.doc
Useful links:
✓ http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-to-writeassignments.pdf
✓ APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
✓ About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
✓ About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Name:
Latifa Rumaid Al-Shammari
Njoud Saif Almutairi
Jumana Ali Aldakhil
Student ID: 210027291
S200269209
S210035094
Course Title: Management Information Course Code: MIS201
System
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024
FIRST SEMESTER
Instructor Name:
CRN: 13048
Student Grade:
Grade Level:
Low/ Middle / High
1
2. Table of Contents
3. Executive Summary
4. Organizational Profile
5. Strategies
6. Technology Involved
7. Data Management
8. Identify the Stakeholders
9. References
Answer:
3. Executive Summary :
The chosen company for this assignment is WhatsApp, a cross-platform messaging and voice
over IP service. WhatsApp was founded in 2009 and is currently owned by Facebook.
WhatsApp is a leading messaging application that allows users to exchange messages without
having to pay for SMS. Some key features that make WhatsApp distinct include:
– Cross-platform compatibility: Users can use WhatsApp to message from smartphones, tablets,
and computers. The app works across platforms like Android, iOS, Windows, and web.
– End-to-end encryption: WhatsApp messages are securely encrypted from sending to receiving
devices to keep conversations private.
– No ads or additional fees: Unlike some other apps, WhatsApp does not show ads or charge
additional fees for features. The only charge is an optional subscription fee for business users.
2
– Group chats: WhatsApp enables users to create groups to easily message with multiple people
at once. Group chats are popular for communities, families, friends and more.
– Calls and video calls: In addition to messaging, WhatsApp offers voice and video call
functionality to keep in touch with contacts face-to-face.
In summary, WhatsApp has become one of the largest messaging platforms globally due to its
cross-platform compatibility and privacy features like end-to-end encryption at no additional cost
to users. Its emphasis on messaging groups and multimedia communication has made
it hugely popular.
4. Organizational Profile :
WhatsApp Inc. is a American privately held company founded in 2009 by Brian Acton and Jan
Koum, both former employees of Yahoo.
Purpose:
WhatsApp’s main purpose and core business model is to offer a simple, reliable and private
messaging platform across devices. The company aims to replace SMS messaging and connect
people through seamless communications.
Organizational Structure:
– Facebook acquired WhatsApp in 2014 for $19 billion. WhatsApp operates as an independent
company within Facebook.
– Jan Koum currently serves as the CEO and oversees overall business operations and strategy.
– The company has offices worldwide including headquarters in Menlo Park, California and
London, England.
3
– WhatsApp is divided into key departments including Engineering, Product, Sales, Marketing
and Customer Service.
– Engineering drives new features and innovation on the cross-platform experience. Product
focuses on the user experience.
– Over the years WhatsApp has grown its global team to thousands of employees worldwide
focusing on growth.
WhatsApp follows a flat organizational structure with minimal bureaucracy to enable fast-paced
innovation. Teams are given autonomy but work collaboratively under the broad goals set by the
leadership. This structure has allowed WhatsApp to scale internationally as one of the most
popular cross-platform messaging applications globally.
5. Strategies :
Product Differentiation: WhatsApp differentiated itself early on through its cross-platform
functionality and encryption. It focused on privacy and security to stand out (Wauters, 2010).
Network Effect: By making the app free and easy to use, more people joined which attracted
even more users. This strong network effect makes it hard for competitors to gain traction (Tse,
2016).
International Expansion: The company aggressively expanded globally by making the app
available in many languages and countries. This helped it become the dominant app worldwide
(Greengard, 2015).
One strategy that has been particularly important for WhatsApp’s continued success is its focus
on constant innovation (Kim, 2016). Even though it is a leader, WhatsApp invests heavily in
R&D to continually improve and expand on the core functions of messaging, calls and groups.
4
Examples include the introduction of statuses, payments services (Isaac, 2018) and integration
with desktop platforms (Newton, 2020). These new additions enhance users’ experience and keep
the platform relevant.
By constantly innovating and improving, WhatsApp is able to stay ahead of competitors, address
user needs and lock in its large existing user base that has network effect benefits (Harris, 2014).
This strategy will be increasingly important going forward to maintain WhatsApp’s performance
leadership in the competitive global messaging market (Kemp, 2021).
6. Technology Involved :
Here are the key technologies and IT infrastructure involved at WhatsApp:
Hardware: WhatsApp runs its services on thousands of global servers located in data centers
worldwide to handle the large volume of messaging traffic (Kim, 2016). This includes servers,
storage, networking equipment etc.
Software: As a major communication platform, WhatsApp leverages various software
technologies. It uses JavaScript for frontend code, Erlang for messaging backend, and SQL
databases like MySQL (Chong, 2020).
Mobile Apps: Cross-platform mobile apps are central to WhatsApp’s service. It maintains native
apps for Android and iOS that are regularly updated (Ganapathy, 2018).
Encryption: End-to-end encryption of messages during transit and at rest using the Signal
Protocol ensures privacy and security of communications (Green, 2013).
Networks: Reliable network connectivity is provided through strategic partnerships with telecom
carriers and cloud infrastructure providers like Amazon Web Services, Microsoft Azure and
Google Cloud (McCracken, 2021).
5
APIs: WhatsApp has exposed APIs to allow integration with other platforms and services like
payments (Isaac, 2018).
Information Security: Robust security practices and infrastructure help protect user data and
defend against threats (Newton, 2019). Updates are quickly rolled out to fix vulnerabilities.
By relying on scalable global infrastructure, open-source technologies, encryption and timely
code updates, WhatsApp maintains a robust IT setup capable of handling billions of messages
daily worldwide. This underpins its leadership as a leading digital communication platform.
7. Data Management :
Here are the key ways WhatsApp manages data and the advantage/disadvantage of each:
– User Data Collection: WhatsApp collects users’ profiles, contacts, groups, messages and call
logs. This allows it to customize service but raises privacy concerns.
– Data Storage: Messages are encrypted locally on devices and servers. Backups are periodically
stored on third party cloud services like Google Drive. While secure, cloud storage reliance is a
point of control.
– Analytics: WhatsApp analyzes usage data to improve features, detect bugs and evaluate
growth. However, some data may be shared with parent Facebook for targeted ads.
– Data Sharing: WhatsApp shares limited user data with Facebook for infrastructure, security and
account integrity purposes. Though useful for parent company, it reduces users’ data autonomy.
– Data Processing: Messages are processed on WhatsApp’s global servers to coordinate deliveries
between users on different networks and platforms. This enables seamless multi-device
experience but requires vast resources.
A key advantage of WhatsApp’s data methods is how encryption and infrastructure allow
customizable service across billions of users. A disadvantage is over-reliance on networking with
Facebook risks undermining user privacy through unwanted data integration. WhatsApp must
balance functionality, privacy and commercial priorities carefully.
6
In summary, WhatsApp has built robust yet careful data practices to support its massive scale.
Continued focus on user-centric reforms can help address risks to trust from its
complex data linkages.
8. Identify the Stakeholders :
Here are the main stakeholders of WhatsApp:
– Users – Over 2 billion people globally use WhatsApp to communicate privately with friends
and family. Users are the main beneficiaries of the platform.
– Management – Leaders like CEO Jan Koum are responsible for the overall strategy, operations
and financial performance of WhatsApp.
– Employees – Thousands of software engineers, product developers, sales team, support staff
etc. work to build and maintain the platform. Their jobs and skills depend on WhatsApp.
– Investors – Facebook acquired WhatsApp in 2014 for $19 billion. Investors provide capital and
expect reasonable returns.
– Vendors – WhatsApp works with technology providers for infrastructure, cloud services,
bandwidth and other needs. Vendors have business interests.
– Advertisers – While WhatsApp itself doesn’t show ads, advertiser-funded parent Facebook
relies on the platform for insights into targeting ads.
– Regulators – Government agencies regulate areas like privacy, security, competition and ensure
laws are followed. Non-compliance can affect operations.
– Parent Company – Facebook owns WhatsApp and expects it to collaborate and support broader
business goals through integration and data sharing responsibly.
– Developers – Third party developers build tools and services integrated with WhatsApp APIs to
engage users and enhance the ecosystem.
Clear communication and management of expectations of these varied stakeholders is important
for WhatsApp’s sustainable business performance.
7
9. References :
1. Greengard, S. (2015). The WhatsApp effect. Communications of the ACM, 58(10), 20-22.
2. Harris, B. (2014). Building successful networks on WhatsApp. MIT Sloan Management
Review, 56(1), 71.
3. Isaac, M. (2018). WhatsApp to offer peer-to-peer payments in India. New York Times.
4. Kim, W. G. (2016). Strategic directions of WhatsApp: Implications for the hotel industry.
International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 28(8), 1770-1789.
5. Tse, D. A. (2016). The network effect advantage in WhatsApp. HBS Digital Initiative.
8
Consumer Behavior Report on the following three sectors: Jewellery & WatchesSports GoodsFootwearIt must cover;Past 3 year growth data for the three chosen sectors‘Category’ structure (channel composition, online/offline split, level of concentration, etc.)Key players in the three chosen sectors (market leader, market challengers/followers and others)Key issues arising (three per sector)Part a) is not included in the word count but must be limited to two pages
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Coursework 1 Brief
Summary information
Type of assessment:
Individual or group:
Component weighting:
Learning outcomes assessed
Submission date:
Feedback date:
Consumer Behaviour Report
Individual
Contributes 50% of the total module grade
All
01/11/2023
22/11/2023
Assessment instructions
Coursework 1 will be a consumer behaviour report of the Clothing & Footwear ‘Category’
in the UK as found on Mintel. Three sectors within this ‘Category’ must be picked from
Mintel. This coursework is worth 50% of the module mark.
Acceptable sectors within the Clothing & Footwear ‘Category’ currently listed on Mintel
are Optical Goods Retailing, Underwear, Womenswear, Footwear Retailing, Menswear,
Childrenswear, Jewellery & Watches Retailing, Sports Goods Retailing and Fashion
Accessories. Pick three of these sectors for your coursework.
You will find other reports such as UK Retail Trends or Fashion & Sustainability for
example. These should not be picked as your sectors but you can use information
contained in these reports to supplement your work.
Please speak to your module leader or your seminar leader if you are unsure when
picking your three sectors. It is crucial that you pick the right sectors.
This coursework assesses learning outcomes 1-5.
You are to write an individual consumer behaviour report of 1,500 words. Using a
balanced mix of research from academic sources as well as industry sources, you
should investigate and explain consumer behaviour changes within the UK’s Clothing &
Footwear ‘Category’. You should provide evidenced real-world examples for the
observed consumer behaviour changes and use academic theories or theoretical
concepts to help explain the possible reasons for them. Remember to focus as much on
the why as the what. You may wish to consider the impact of the pandemic if relevant.
The report must follow the structure below.
Part a)
A two-page background of the Clothing & Footwear ‘Category’ and the three chosen
sectors. Part a) must include past 3 year growth data for the three chosen sectors,
‘Category’ structure (e.g. channel composition, online/offline split, level of concentration,
etc.), key players in the three chosen sectors (e.g. market leader, market
challengers/followers and others) and key issues arising within/across the three chosen
sectors (three key issues per sector). Part a) must be limited to two pages (anything
beyond the two-page limit will not be marked). Part a) is not included in the word count.
In-text references are needed.
Part a) is worth 10%.
Part b)
A discussion of three consumer behaviour changes exhibited recently/over the last 3
years in the three chosen sectors (one change per sector, evidenced by real-world
examples and underpinned by suitable academic theories or theoretical concepts). No
recommendations should be made. At least one of the changes must be linked to
ethical/sustainability issues as you will need to pick one such issue for Coursework 2.
In-text references are needed.
Part b) is worth 45%.
Part c)
A discussion of three likely changes in consumer behaviour in the near future/over the
next 3 years in the three chosen sectors (one change per sector, evidenced by realworld examples and underpinned by suitable academic theories or theoretical concepts),
which could be the continuation of the changes identified above or new ones. While you
may focus on continuation of changes, you must take care to avoid repetition. No
recommendations should be made. At least one of the changes must be linked to
ethical/sustainability issues as you will need to pick one such issue for Coursework 2.
In-text references are needed.
Part c) is worth 45%.
Additional Guidance:
• Since Part a) is not included in the word count, you should allocate 750 words to
Part b) and 750 words to Part c).
•
Within both Part b) and Part c), allocate 250 words to each consumer behaviour
change.
•
When tackling each consumer behaviour change (250 words per change), use
around 100 words (no more than 120 words) to introduce, describe and evidence
(with a suitable example or two) the change – this must be largely based on
recent data from Mintel and other reliable industry sources such as Passport,
Marketline, etc. The starting point must be Mintel as the sectors (reports) are
from Mintel. The remaining 150 words (no less than 130 words) must be used for
the theoretical underpinning – this is where you must apply one or (no more than)
two suitable academic theories or theoretical concepts to explain the change in
consumer behaviour. The underpinning must be predominantly based on peerreviewed journal articles. Do not overly rely on textbooks and do not use sources
such as blogs and unverified websites.
Presenting coursework for assessment
Your assignment when submitted should not include your name – we use a system of
anonymous marking to reduce the risk of any unconscious bias. The authentic and
essential requirements for this piece of assessed work are;
•
Coursework 1 must be word-processed in 12 point Arial font and double-spaced
•
Use black text on a white background
•
Pages must be appropriately numbered
•
Margins must be set to Normal (all four sides set to 2.54 cm)
•
Any tables/figures/diagrams should be legible, correctly captioned and clearly
identified
•
Title page is required with module name, title and student number (not name)
•
Executive summary and contents page are not required
•
Appendices are not permitted
•
Please write in the third person
•
Avoid bias to any one source and use different sources to enhance criticality
•
Use reliable sources; e.g. peer-reviewed journal articles and industry sources
•
Ensure adequate and consistent citation and a complete reference list
•
Follow the assessment grid for this coursework and seek guidance if needed
•
You will lose marks if you do not fulfil these requirements
Avoid committing any academic offences such as plagiarism
Assignment length
Whilst we acknowledge that learners will prepare and produce assessments in different
ways and at different paces, an indication as to how much time it will take you to
prepare, produce, edit and submit this assessment is detailed below.
It is expected that you will spend approximately 28 learning hours to prepare and
produce this assessment.
The length of this coursework is limited by a set number of 1,500 words to contribute
towards the development of writing skills and to ensure all work is assessed equitably.
We therefore require you to complete your coursework within the 1,500 words as
specified in the assessment brief. There is no leeway.
The specified word count refers to Part b) and Part c) and excludes Part a). The word
count does not include the title page and reference list. The word count does include
headings, tables and in-text references within Part b) and Part c), but not diagrams or
figures (these are for illustration only). Please seek guidance if needed.
Words that exceed the maximum allowed word count will not be marked. If in doubt, you
should discuss this with the Module Leader before submission.
Coursework 1 assessment criteria rubric
Assessm
ent
Criteria
Part a)
Backgroun
d of the
‘Category’
and three
chosen
sectors:
Past 3
year
sector
growth
data,
structure,
key
players,
and key
issues
arising
Outstanding
Excellent
Very Good
Good
85-100%
Outstanding
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
70-84%
Excellent
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
60-69%
Very good
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
50-59%
Good
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
Threshold
Pass
40-49%
Basic/limited
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
Marginal
Refer
30-39%
Weak and
inadequate
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
Refer
0-29%
Extremely
weak and
inadequate
background
and coverage
of the
category/sect
ors.
(10%).
Part b)
A
discussion
of three
consumer
behaviour
changes
exhibited
recently/o
ver the
last 3
years in
the three
chosen
sectors
(one
change
per sector,
evidenced
by realworld
examples
and
underpinn
ed by
suitable
theories or
theoretical
concepts)
(45%).
Part c)
A
discussion
of three
likely
changes
in
consumer
behaviour
in the near
future/over
the next 3
years in
the three
chosen
sectors
(one
change
per sector,
evidenced
by realworld
examples
and
underpinn
ed by
suitable
theories or
theoretical
concepts)
(45%).
Outstanding
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Excellent
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Very good
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Good critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Basic/limited
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Weak and
inadequate
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Extremely
weak and
inadequate
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
the changes
in consumer
behaviour
recently/over
the last 3
years.
Outstanding
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Excellent
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Very good
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Good critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Basic/limited
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Weak and
inadequate
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
Extremely
weak and
inadequate
critical
appreciation,
discussion
and
evaluation of
likely
consumer
behaviour
changes in
the near
future/over
the next 3
years.
CCB Sectors CW1:
Investigate and explain consumer behaviour changes within the UK’s Clothing & Footwear
‘Category’. You should provide evidence real-world examples for the observed consumer
behaviour changes and use academic theories or theoretical concepts to help explain the
possible reasons for them. Remember to focus as much on the why as the what. You may
wish to consider the impact of the pandemic if relevant.
Three Sectors:
● Jewellery & Watches
● Sports Goods
● Footwear
Part a)
A two-page background of the Clothing & Footwear ‘Category’ and the three chosen
sectors. Part a) must include past 3 year growth data for the three chosen sectors,
‘Category’ structure (e.g. channel composition, online/offline split, level of
concentration, etc.), key players in the three chosen sectors (e.g. market leader,
market challengers/followers and others) and key issues arising within/across the
three chosen sectors (three key issues per sector). Part a) must be limited to two
pages (anything beyond the two-page limit will not be marked). Part a) is not
included in the word count. In-text references are needed.
Part b) 750 Words
A discussion of three consumer behaviour changes exhibited recently/over the last 3
years in the three chosen sectors (one change per sector, evidenced by real-world
examples and underpinned by suitable academic theories or theoretical concepts).
No recommendations should be made. At least one of the changes must be linked to
ethical/sustainability issues as you will need to pick one such issue for Coursework
2. In-text references are needed.
Part c) 750 Words
A discussion of three likely changes in consumer behaviour in the near future/over
the next 3 years in the three chosen sectors (one change per sector, evidenced by
real-world examples and underpinned by suitable academic theories or theoretical
concepts), which could be the continuation of the changes identified above or new
ones. While you may focus on continuation of changes, you must take care to avoid
repetition. No recommendations should be made. At least one of the changes must
be linked to ethical/sustainability issues as you will need to pick one such issue for
Coursework 2. In-text references are needed.
This work is important to me. Solve it correctly, without mistakes, withoutplagiarism. Follow the instructions. There is no chance to repeat it.Therefore, you must do a complete and correct work 100%.If you are sure you can do it, accept it
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكةالعربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
FIN402 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Financial Institutions and
Student’s Name:
Markets
Course Code: FIN402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• This assignment is an individualassignment.
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكةالعربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
1. Discuss implications of the efficient market hypothesis for the allocation of funds.
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
The efficient market hypothesis (EMH) has numerous applications to the real world.
It is especially valuable because it can be applied directly to an issue that concerns
managers of financial institutions and general public as well.
Question:What is the efficient market hypothesis? discuss in brief the important
evidence in favor and in against the market efficiency (5 points).Also answer the
following questions.
a. Suppose that you have just read in a reputed journal that investment advisors
are predicting a boom in oil stocks because an oil shortage is developing.
Should you proceed to withdraw all your hard-earned savings from the bank
and invest it in oil stock? Explain your action.(1 point)
a. Suppose that your broker phones you with a hot tip to buy stock in the Ahmed
Feet corporation (AFC) because it has just developed a product that is
completely effective in curing athlete’s foot. The stock price is sure to go up.
Should you follow this advice and buy AFC stock? Explain your action.(1
point)
b. Do Stock Prices always rise when there is good news? Discuss.(1 point)
c. Prepare a practical guideline for small investors who want to invest in the
stock market, the guideline should provide a better understanding of the use
and implications of the efficient market hypothesis.(2 points)
Answers:
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكةالعربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Read the following case study on Jessi and answer the following questions. Main themes from student responses will be addressed during the live session, so come prepared to share your thoughts.What individual and family strengths do you notice? What do you see as the presenting problem(s)?What information is missing? What questions do you have of the family in order to better understand their situation?What cultural factors do you want to be aware of and what potential issues of bias, and/or overidentification, might come up for you? What work will you need to do in order to view this family from a positive multicultural/social justice/feminist lens?Using the Functional Behavior Analysis worksheet you read for this week, what target behavior changes would it be appropriate for you to work on with the family? What questions might you ask to gauge frequency, intensity, and duration of one of the target behaviors you’ve noted above?Background information.https://youtu.be/-6KzZKuQ1lkhttps://youtu.be/yhvaSEJtOV8
Unformatted Attachment Preview
SOWK 4003: Clinical Social Work Theory and Practice
University of Denver, Graduate School of Social Work
The Case of Jessi
Jessi Sanchez, a biracial (Native American, Mexican American) 15-year-old youth, is in the
process of being released home after serving a four-week detainment at Gilliam Youth Services
Center. He lives near Abraham Lincoln High School where he attends as a freshman. His most
recent charge, just prior to being detained, was for bringing a marijuana joint to school and
smoking it in the gym locker room with some friends. His two other charges included
Misdemeanor Trespassing and Misdemeanor Obstructing and Hindering an Officer. Today is
Jessi’s first meeting with the recently appointed in-home family therapist and his family
(appointed by the courts). This initial session is being held at the detention center in their family
conference room, which is customary prior to releasing a child back into the community. Jessi
lives with his biological father, Samuel (31 years old) and paternal grandmother, Rosa (48 years
old). Jessi is nervous about having to participate in therapy with his family because his father
also uses marijuana recreationally, which means there is marijuana in the home on most days.
Jessi and his father enjoy playing PS4 together in the afternoons after school, they also enjoy
rebuilding and selling used low-rider bikes on the weekends. Jessi is a “B” student and enjoys
attending school. He is well liked by his teachers and is seen as the class clown by his peers.
Jessi’s father left Jessi’s mother when Jessi was 7 years old; his mother identifies as Native
American (the Arapahoe nation). Jessi knows that he needs help with quitting his smoking habit
in order to remain at his school of choice, which he actually likes. His probation officer reports
that he will be forced to attend an alternative school if he does not remain out of legal trouble
upon being released from the detention center in two days.
Jessi has been feeling “down” lately. Rosa, his grandmother, is worried about him because his
marijuana use has increased over the past several months and because his motivation to complete
his schoolwork has been steadily declining. She also worries that Jessi has so few friends his age
and often isolates himself in his room, “the only time he comes out is when he wants to play
video games with his dad in the living room.” Jessi is also significantly obese, which is of great
concern to his grandmother and his primary care physician (PCP). He says he does not like
vegetables or fruit, and that he usually has chips with a soft drink for lunch. Jessi has a few
friends he talks to at school, but doesn’t really spend time with kids his age outside of school. He
reports he is not interested in football, which his teachers are always encouraging him to play. He
says he prefers being at home with his dad than with friends his age. Additionally, Jessi reports
that he has often wondered about his mother’s side of the family and that he would love to get to
know them better: “I haven’t seen my mom since I was four, but I don’t remember anything
about her. I asked my grandma and dad why they won’t let me see her and all of them (maternal
side of the family), but all my dad says is that she’s not a good influence for me. And my
grandma doesn’t even answer or say anything when I bring it up. I don’t think that’s cool, but
I’m just a kid and I can’t drive yet.”
please see the doc word attached for the information and instructions.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Information’s:
Event Name: “AI Innovate Summit: Pairing Businesses with AI Innovations”
Description: Join us at AI Innovate Summit, where leading experts and companies in artificial
intelligence gather to showcase cutting-edge AI solutions and tools and educate on innovations
in businesses.
Type of event: Summit
The event that we are proposing is a summit and will allow industry leaders to meet with and
listen to conversations from experts about AI. The summit will feature both panels from experts
about how AI can be implemented into businesses and what we can expect of AI in years to
come, as well as interactive segments that showcase new products and tools that businesses can
utilize to increase efficiency and productivity.
The event will focus on the retail industry – primarily large corporations.
1. 1-2 event goals for the event (what is the purpose/mission or goals for the event)
– Collaboration: Guide partnerships between AI companies and larger businesses looking to
implement AI solutions.
– Education: Teach large businesses the best practices and insights in AI adoption in business.
2.
Key target audience(s)
C-suite executives – CFO, CMO, CIO of major retail corporations
Business owners – retail company owners
AI companies/startups – startups that can provide AI solutions for major retail corporations
AI Researchers and academics – researchers who study solutions for retail and how to use AI in
major corporations.
Prospective Venue: A convention center located in the Bay Area, which is known for its
innovation and tech environment called The Moscone Center located in San Francisco, CA. It’s
considered one of the largest convention/exhibit venues in SF.
Assignment required instructions:
Write about the Landscape Analysis: Research and analysis reports and data. Past and current events
held for the selected industry cluster. The opportunities in the selected industry cluster. US statistics and
include some Hospitality and tourism statistics and insights related with the AI theme and summit, San
Fransisco statistics about the AI events. Write about it based on the event idea above.
I want to solve the attachment and please follow the clear instructions
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 13884
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Karim Garrouch
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
Hi please use chapter 8 of the attached book to answer the questions below. use two quotes from the book in your response. 1. How might conflict be positive?2. Which of the five modes of resolving conflict (Table 1) do you prefer? Explain.3. How can you avoid gunnysacking?4. What are four strategies to prevent conflict?
This work is important to me. Solve it correctly, without mistakes, withoutplagiarism. Follow the instructions. There is no chance to repeat it.Therefore, you must do a complete and correct work 100%.If you are sure you can do it, accept it
Select two or three public companies from the same industry, such as [Ford, Tesla, Mercedes Benz] or [Levis, Aeropostale, Zara].Do some research and see if you can find data that either shows their annual inventory turns for the same time period or allows you to calculate the inventory turns. Can you also find or calculate cash-to-cash or cash conversion cycle time?Discuss your findingsIs there any correlation between how these companies are performing financially and these inventory metrics?Is there any effect on the companies’ brands if they are having problems with inventory?As always – cite any sources you consult…
This work is important to me. Solve it correctly, without mistakes, withoutplagiarism. Follow the instructions. There is no chance to repeat it.Therefore, you must do a complete and correct work 100%.If you are sure you can do it, accept it
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Corporate Finance (FIN-201)
Due Date: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Corporate Finance
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN-201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Answer the following questions:
Q1. What are the different ways available for the corporations to distribute income
among the shareholders? Suppose a firm promises to pay dividends of $200,000 every
year in perpetuity with 200,000 shares outstanding. Assume a discount rate of 11.1%.
What is the present value of one of the firm’s shares?
(2 marks)
Q2. What is Stock repurchase? Explain the four ways to implement stock repurchase.
(3 marks)
Q3. Calculate the rate at which a firm can grow without changing its leverage if its payout
ratio is 30%; equity outstanding at the beginning of the year is $9,500,000; and its net
income for the year is $2,000,000.
(2 marks)
Q4. What do you mean by Long term financial planning? Take an example and explain the
sales percentage model of financial planning.
(3 marks)
Answers:
Exercise 18-11 (Algo) Retirement of shares [LO18-5]
In 2024, Borland Semiconductors entered into the transactions described below. In 2021, Borland had issued 215 million shares of its $1 par common stock at $47 per share.
Required:
Assuming that Borland retires shares it reacquires, record the appropriate journal entry for each of the following transactions:
Note: If no entry is required for a transaction/event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Enter your answers in millions (i.e., 10,000,000 should be entered as 10).
On January 2, 2024, Borland reacquired 11 million shares at $45.00 per share.
On March 3, 2024, Borland reacquired 11 million shares at $50 per share.
On August 13, 2024, Borland sold 1 million shares at $55 per share.
On December 15, 2024, Borland sold 2 million shares at $50 per share.
Discuss Labor and Management: Considerations for Today and the Future
Instructions
Consider the evolving nature of labor and management in our organizations today.
How can human resources, management, and an organization’s leadership serve as strategic business partners? How is it possible to advance the interests of workers and employees under such conditions and constraints?
What initiatives should be considered to redefine labor as capital? Is it reasonable to take such an approach with people in an organization? Why? Why not?
Respond to two of your classmates on different days of the week. Including your initial responses to the previous questions, be sure and post at least once on 3 different days.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your e-book (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1.What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for independence? Discuss. (Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2.Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can be applied to economic development in other nations? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
3.Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and commercial base? (Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
This is an individual assignment.
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1.Answer-400
2.Answer-500
3.Answer-500
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Cases
629
Economic Development in Bangladesh
When Bangladesh gained independence from Pakistan in
1971 after a brutal civil war that may have left as many as
3 million dead, the U.S. National Security Adviser, Henry
Kissinger, referred to the country as a “basket case.”
Kissinger’s assessment was accurate enough. At the time,
Bangladesh was one of the world’s poorest nations.
Although most of the country is dominated by the fertile
Ganges-Brahmaputra delta, a lack of other natural
resources, coupled with poor infrastructure, political
instability, and high levels of corruption, long held the
country back. To compound matters, Bangladesh is prone
to natural disasters. Most of Bangladesh is less than
12 meters above sea level. The extensive low-lying areas
are vulnerable to tropical cyclones, floods, and tidal bores.
Beginning in the mid-1990s, however, Bangladesh began
to climb the ladder of economic progress. From the early
2000s onward, the country grew its economy at around
6 percent per annum compounded. Today, this Muslim
majority country of 160 million people has joined the
ranks of lower-middle-income nations. Poverty reduction
has been dramatic, with the percentage of the population
living in poverty falling from 44.2 percent in 1991 to
18.5 percent in 2010, an achievement that raised 20.5 million people out of abject poverty. Today, the country ranks
64th out of the 154 countries included in the World Bank’s
global poverty database. It has a considerable way to go,
but it is no longer one of the world’s poorest countries.
Several reasons underlie Bangladesh’s relative economic success. In its initial post-independence period,
Bangladesh adopted socialist policies, nationalizing many
companies and subsidizing the costs of agricultural production and basic food products. These policies failed to
deliver the anticipated gains. Policy reforms in the 1980s
were directed toward the withdrawal of food and agricultural subsidies, the privatization of state-owned companies, financial liberalization, and the withdrawal of some
import restrictions. Further reforms aimed at liberalizing
the economy were launched in the 1990s. These included
making the currency convertible (which led to a floating
exchange rate in 2003), reducing import duties to much
lower levels, and removing most of the controls on the
movement of foreign private capital (which allowed for
more foreign direct investment). The reforms of the
1990s coincided with the transition to a parliamentary
democracy from semi-autocratic rule.
Bangladesh’s private sector has expanded rapidly since
then. Leading the growth has been the country’s vibrant
textile sector, which is now the second-largest exporter of
ready-made garments in the world after China. Textiles
account for 80 percent of Bangladesh’s exports. The
development of the textile industry has been helped by
the availability of low-cost labor, managerial skills, favorable trade agreements, and government policies that
eliminated import duties on inputs for the textile business, such as raw materials. The Bangladesh economy has
also benefited from its productive agricultural sector and
remittances from more than 10 million Bangladesh citizens who work in other nations. Bangladesh is also the
home of the microfinance movement, which has enabled
entrepreneurs with no prior access to the banking system
to borrow small amounts of capital to start businesses.
This being said, the country still faces considerable
impediments to sustaining its growth. Infrastructure
remains poor; corruption continues to be a major problem; and the political system is, at best, an imperfect
democracy where opposition is stifled. The country is too
dependent upon its booming textile sector and needs to
diversify its industrial base. Bangladesh is also one of the
countries most prone to the adverse affects of climate
change. A one-meter rise in sea level would leave an
estimated 10 percent of the country under water and
increase the potential for damaging floods in much of the
remainder. Nevertheless, according to the U.S. investment
bank Goldman Sachs, Bangladesh is one of the 11 lowermiddle-income nations poised for sustained growth.
Sources
W. Mahmud, S. Ahmed, and S. Mahajan, “Economic Reforms,
Growth, and Governance: The Political Economy Aspects of
Bangladesh’s Development Surprise,” World Bank Commission
on Development and Growth, 2008; “Freedom in the World
2016,” Freedom House; “Tiger in the Night,” The Economist,
October 15, 2016; Sanjay Kathuria, “How Will Bangladesh
Reach High Levels of Prosperity?” World Bank blog, January 5,
2017; and Qimiao Fan, “Bangladesh: Setting a Global Standard
in Ending Poverty,” World Bank blog, October 5, 2016.
Case Discussion Questions
1.
What were the principal reasons for the economic
stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for
independence?
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s
enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of
economic progress. What are the main lessons here
that can be applied to economic development in
other nations?
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon
agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks
here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial
and commercial base?
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Assignment ContentFor this assignment, you will write a report that details the components of an executive leadership development program for a fictitious company. The fictitious company can be within an organization and industry of your choice. Do not use the name of or information about a real company. After you have chosen a type of organization and industry, include the following items in your report.
Include an introductory paragraph that lists the name and type of fictitious company, the country in which the home office is located, how long the company has been operating, and the number of executive leadership employees. You would end the introduction with a 3-5 sentence overview of the paper. Discuss an executive leadership development strategy. Provide a vision for this strategy. What are the outcomes of having a leadership development program for the organization? How will the leadership development program be structured? This is a cited discussion grounded in what you have read in the literature. Explain how you will assess leadership capabilities for the roles you have structured. How will your leaders develop problem-solving skills and the ability to arrive at sound solutions? Describe any leadership theories that you will use as the basis for your decisions? This is a cited discussion grounded in what you have read in the literature. Describe one assessment tool that you will use to identify leadership capabilities. This is a cited discussion grounded in what you have read in the literature. Explain how the leadership training be facilitated; what methods? What trends do human resource professionals use for leadership training? This is a cited discussion grounded in what you have read in the literature. Describe the benefits that having a formal executive leadership development program will have on the organization (e.g., why a program is important and how it enhances the organization’s competitiveness). This is a cited discussion grounded in what you have read in the literature. End your assignment with a Conclusion. This is where in 4-6 sentences, the findings are summarized. Your assignment must be five full pages in length and include at least one peer-reviewed or academic source from the CSU Online Library, including the Unit Study Guide. Adhere to APA guidelines when constructing this assignment and include in-text citations and references for all sources that are used. As what you are writing is grounded in what you read in the literature, you would include citations in your paragraphs. Please note that no abstract is needed. Please note that no abstract is needed. *I have attached a template that you may want to consider using when writing this paper. The choice is yours. To download the template, please select the three dots to the right of the attachment. Depending on your browser, your download can be found by opening downloads. Also attached is a powerpoint of the fictitious company i did in a powerpoint and maybe it will help.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Title of Paper
Your Name
Columbia Southern University
Training and Development
Dr. Susan Cathcart
Due Date of the Assignment
2
Title of Paper
Introduction
Text starts here. You would include a description of a fictional company. Then you
would end with 3-5 sentences providing an overview of the paper; a roadmap.
Leadership Development Strategy
Text starts here. You must always have paragraph after a heading. You should remember
that what you are writing, unless based on your experiences, should be supported by the
literature and cited. Plan to have a citation in every paragraph. If you do not cite, you would not
receive credit for what you write. Direct quotes are not analysis and should be avoided.
Vision
Text starts here. This is the one paragraph where you do not need a citation. You would
have citations for the rest of your analysis (in each paragraph).
Outcomes of the Program
Text starts here.
Structure of the Program
Text starts here.
Assessing Leadership Capacities
Text starts here. Do not forget to discuss relevant theories.
Assessment Tool(s) for Identifying Leadership Capacities
Text starts here.
Leadership Development Methods
Text starts here. Do not forget to include trends HR professionals use for leadership
training.
3
Impact of Leadership Development Programs
Text starts here.
Conclusion
The conclusion should include 4-5 sentences providing a summary of the facts/findings
for the assignment. This provides closure for the paper. There are no headings or any other
discussions after the Conclusion.
**The assignment requirements provide expectations. You can exceed the page minimum and
the number of references. The organization for the assignment and the words used in a heading
are up to you.
**Please remove my comments and any additional information that I provided.
4
References
FOSTERING KNOWLEDGES H A R I N G AT
I N N O VAT E T E C H I N C .
A B O U T T H E C O M PA N Y
Company Name: InnovateTech Inc.
Location: Silicon Valley, California
Industry: Technology Solutions Provider
Background: InnovateTech is a global
leader in cutting-edge technology
solutions, serving clients across various
industries. Our commitment to innovation
has propelled us to the forefront of the
technology sector (Yang & Yu, 2021).
2
KNOWLEDGE-SHARING
CHALLENGES
Challenge 1: Fear of Job Insecurity
Challenge 2: Lack of Time and Resources
(Cambini et al., 2021)
Challenge 3: Absence of Incentives
3
FEAR OF JOB
INSECURITY
Employees hesitate to share knowledge due to
concerns about job security.
Research suggests that a culture of trust is essential to
mitigate this fear.
Implement trust-building measures, such as
transparent communication and job security
guarantees (Unit I Study Guide, n.d.)..
Encourage open dialogue on the topic.
Promote a culture of psychological safety.
Showcase success stories of employees who shared
knowledge.
(SECTOR & ITU, 2019)
Highlight the long-term benefits of knowledge4
sharing.
Employees are often too busy with their own tasks
to engage in knowledge-sharing.
Studies recommend allocating dedicated time for
knowledge-sharing activities.
LACK OF TIME
AND
RESOURCES
Establish regular knowledge-sharing sessions or
allocate specific hours for this purpose.
Provide resources and tools to streamline
knowledge-sharing (Cambini et al., 2021).
Encourage teams to prioritize and plan for
knowledge-sharing activities.
Recognize and reward proactive knowledgesharing behaviors.
Foster a culture that values continuous learning.
5
Employees need motivation to share knowledge
willingly.
Research indicates that rewards and recognition drive
knowledge-sharing (Unit II Study Guide, n.d.).
ABSENCE OF
INCENTIVES
Introduce a rewards system, including bonuses and public
recognition, for valuable contributions.
Recognize top contributors regularly (Yang & Yu,
2021).
Create a gamification system to make knowledge-sharing
engaging.
Align incentives with organizational goals.
Encourage peer recognition and appreciation.
6
SOLUTIONS FOR KNOWLEDGESHARING
Solution 1: Establish a
Knowledge-Sharing Platform
Solution 2: Implement CrossFunctional Teams (Unit III Study
Guide, n.d.)
Solution 3: Encourage Mentorship
Programs
(Cambini et al., 2021)
7
E S TA B L I S H A K N O W L E D G E S H A R I N G P L AT F O R M
Create a centralized digital platform for
employees to share insights, best practices, and
resources.
Utilize collaboration tools like Microsoft Teams
or Slack for seamless knowledge-sharing.
Ensure user-friendly design and accessibility.
Provide training on platform usage (Unit I Study
Guide, n.d.).
Promote content curation and organization.
Monitor platform engagement and gather user
feedback.
Continuously improve and update the platform
8
based on user needs.
CROSS-FUNCTIONAL TEAMS
Form cross-functional teams with members from
various departments.
Foster collaboration and knowledge exchange
through project-based work.
Monitor progress and reward successful
outcomes (Cambini et al., 2021).
Encourage cross-training among team members.
Rotate team members periodically to broaden
their knowledge.
Ensure clear project objectives and timelines.
Establish regular team meetings for knowledgesharing and updates.
9
MENTORSHIP PROGRAMS
Launch mentorship initiatives to pair
experienced employees with newcomers.
Facilitate knowledge transfer and professional
growth.
Recognize and celebrate mentorship success
stories.
Create mentorship guidelines and training (Unit
III Study Guide, n.d.).
Encourage reverse mentorship for fresh
perspectives.
Assess and track mentorship program
effectiveness.
10
Solicit feedback from mentors and mentees for
PROFESSIONAL TRAINING AND
DEVELOPMENT PLAN
Skil ls and Inte rests:
Enhance te chnical skill s in data analytics, incl uding
adva nc ed da ta m odeling and mac hine l earning.
Develop proficienc y in leader ship, foc using on t eam
mana gement and strate gic decision- making (Cambini et al.,
2021).
Levera ge m y interest in emerging technologies to stay
updat ed on industry t rends.
Goal s:
Shor t-term goal: Attain ce rtificat ion i n advanced data
analytics within the next 12 months.
Mid-term goal: Assume a team lea d role wit hin t wo years,
focus ing on project manage ment and team development.
Long- term goal: Ascend to a senior leader ship position, s uch
as a de partme nt he ad, within five year s.
11
COMMITMENT TO KNOWLEDGE-SHARING
Establish a mentorship program within the department, guided by positive
outcomes.
Encourage cross-training initiatives to promote knowledge exchange among
team members (Yang & Yu, 2021).
Advocate for job rotation opportunities to broaden skill sets and encourage
cross-functional collaboration.
Utilize regular knowledge-sharing meetings to foster a culture of
intentional information exchange and collaborative problem-solving.
8/ 06 /2 0X X
PITC H DEC K
12
References
ambini, C., Grinza, E., & Sabatino, L. (2021). CEBRIG Working Paper.
ECTOR, S., & ITU, O. (2019). Itu-t technical report.
nit I Study Guide. (n.d.). Different Approaches to Training. Columbia Southern Unive
nit II Study Guide. (n.d.). Training-Related Theories. Columbia Southern University.
nit III Study Guide. (n.d.). Knowledge Share and Learning Transfer. Columbia Southern University.
ang, L., & Yu, Q. (2021). Dynamically Enabled Cyber Defense. World Scientific.
13
T H A N K YO U
14
UNIT VII STUDY GUIDE
Leadership Development
Course Learning Outcomes for Unit VII
Upon completion of this unit, students should be able to:
7. Construct a rationale for designing training for leadership competencies.
7.1 Discuss the leadership development strategy for a company.
7.2 Explain assessment tools for identifying leadership capabilities.
7.3 Discuss benefits of formal leadership development programs.
Required Unit Resources
In order to access the following resources, click the links below.
Jenkins, D. M., & Allen, S. J. (2017, Winter). Aligning instructional strategies with learning outcomes and
leadership competencies. New Directions for Student Leadership, 2017(156), 43–58.
https://libraryresources.columbiasouthern.edu/login?url=http://search.ebscohost.com/login.aspx?direc
t=true&db=a9h&AN=126316404&site=ehost-live&scope=site
Leonard, H. S. (2017). A teachable approach to leadership. Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and
Research, 69(4), 243–266.
https://libraryresources.columbiasouthern.edu/login?url=http://search.ebscohost.com/login.aspx?direc
t=true&db=bsu&AN=128817733&site=ehost-live&scope=site
Unit Lesson
Introduction
In this unit, we will explore the human resource role in leadership development, assessing leadership
development needs, identifying competency gaps, and examine the assessment tools and strategies that can
be utilized. This unit will take an in-depth look at training and leadership development.
Leader Development
The ability of an individual to influence a group or another individual toward the achievement of goals and
results is considered leadership (Society for Human Resource Management [SHRM], 2017). In an
organization’s hierarchy, leadership is not specifically attached to a certain position but, rather, can evolve
from opportunities and situations. Also, when considering the subject of leadership in a global context, it
should not be confused with the status, power, or some official authority. The ability to influence across
cultures must be present among global leaders. Hence, it is important that leadership development practices
be geared toward preparing and training leaders to lead in a global economy.
HRM 6303, Training and Development
1
UNIT x STUDY GUIDE
Title
Today we see a global leadership environment across many industries.
(Rawpixelimages, n.d.)
Cultural considerations are vitally important in developing a leadership plan for today’s global environment.
Leader development refers to an organization’s training and professional development program, which is
targeted to assist management and executive-level employees in developing the flexibility, ability, and skills
required to deal with a variety of situations (SHRM, 2017). In this unit, we will explore the role that human
resources (HR) has in leadership development through the training and development function. We will also
explore assessment tools for developing leaders, and lastly, we will examine various leadership development
methodologies.
HR’s Role in Leadership Development
According to Giles (2016), HR plays a dual function when it comes to leadership development. The first
function is that of a leader. HR professionals must consider their own role as leaders and the responsibilities
that come with it. Often, through various functions (e.g., training and development, organizational change
management), HR professionals are in a position that requires them to bring about change that is necessary
to keep the organization competitive and successful.
In addition, HR is responsible for identifying other leaders and potential leaders in the organization to
maximize leadership succession planning efforts. Therefore, HR professionals must assess the organization’s
leaders and their leadership needs on a regular basis. These needs must also be aligned with the
organization’s strategic goals. HR is also responsible for providing leaders and potential leaders with
adequate developmental experiences, relationships, and training needed for the continuation of development.
Assessing Leadership Development Needs
The training professional must begin looking at current leaders in relation to the organization’s goals and
strategies when assessing leadership development needs (Scisco et al., 2017). Some of the things to
consider when analyzing leadership development needs include:
HRM 6303, Training and Development
2
UNIT x STUDY GUIDE
Title
Most jobs, depending on the type and complexity, require a specific set of knowledge and skills. Competency
mapping is often used for leadership or other positions to identify key competencies for a particular position.
These competencies can be tied to behaviors and personal skills that distinguish excellent performance from
the average. The competencies can be used in training and development, recruitment, performance
management, succession planning, job evaluation, and many other aspects of the employees’ work.
A competency assessment is typically a result of the key competencies formed during the mapping
process. The competency assessment identifies the skill gaps against those specific competencies that
the organization considers important. There are some organizations that may have their own competency
assessments. However, many consultants and vendors offer competency assessment tools in various
formats.
An important aspect of performance management within leadership is the coaching and developing of skills
needed to be successful (Fernandez-Araoz et al., 2017). The results from a competency assessment reveal
how well a candidate or employee may perform the required skills needed for the job in relation to its
performance standards. Competency assessments also provide the foundation of an individual development
plan (IDP) and identify the necessary training and development programs needed to cultivate the skills and
abilities needed to perform well. If you recall, the use of IDPs was discussed in an earlier unit.
Assessment Tools for Leadership Development
Some of the tools that organizations use to assess leadership ability include work sample measures. Work
sample measures are assessment tools that require candidates to demonstrate levels of attained leadership
proficiencies. These work samples include situation judgment tests (SJTs), simulations, and assessment
centers.
•
•
Situational judgment tests (SJTs): Prospective leaders are presented with sample situations and
problems that they may encounter in a work environment along with the probable answers.
Candidates are asked to place the answers in order from best to worst, choose the best and worst
answers, or just provide the best answer to the given situation.
Assessment centers and simulations: These are very similar to SJTs in that they can provide a
candidate with a wide range of problem-solving exercises and leadership scenarios. These exercises
or scenarios could include financial or business data analysis, leaderless group discussions, inbasket tests, role plays, and interview simulations. The series of exercises are observed by multiple
HRM 6303, Training and Development
3
raters who give an evaluation on each of the targeted performance factors.
assessors
UNIT xThen,
STUDY
GUIDE collect
their results to provide an overall assessment score.
Title
Though these methods have proven to be highly successful, some methods have shown to be more useful
than others (SHRM, 2017). For example, SJTs, work sample tests, and other tools that require
demonstrations of leadership have high validity. However, they can also be very expensive in terms of design,
development, and delivery.
Emotional Intelligence Assessment Tools
Emotional intelligence (EI) is the ability to competently handle interpersonal relationships along with being
aware of and in complete control of one’s emotions (SHRM, 2017). Many organizations are looking for
leaders who possess strong EI. EI assessment tools are a good way to identify the EI competency within a
leader. EI assessment tools come in many shapes and sizes. There are some that are used for hiring,
spotting high-potential candidates, coaching, and assessing performance feedback. Many of the EI
assessment tools currently found in the open market have not been empirically evaluated (Giles, 2016). The
three empirically evaluated EI assessment tools that have been identified in at least five published journal
articles or book chapters with some empirical data to back their validity are BarOn Emotional Quotient
Inventory, Emotional and Social Competence Inventory, and Genos Emotional Intelligence Inventory.
For more information on additional empirically validated EI assessments, please consult the Consortium for
Research on Emotional Intelligence in Organizations website.
Leader Development Strategies
Many organizations take a formal approach when designing developmental opportunities for leaders. This
approach requires organizational discipline, design, implementation, and sustenance to keep the program
running. Utilizing this approach can be very successful in shielding the organization from succession surprises
and can also be a competitive advantage in a number of other ways.
•
•
•
•
A system-wide approach on leadership development can help build leadership capacity throughout
the organization.
Initiatives in leadership development should align in all levels of the organization and provide a clear
path of the skills and competencies needed to be developed from one level to the next.
Each manager should have an IDP where they are held accountable for making yearly progress.
Leadership development should be integrated into the ongoing work-related experience.
Leader Development Methods
Below you will find a list of effective leadership development methods commonly used in organizations today.
Challenging assignments: Individuals develop leadership capacity by being exposed to a variety of
experiences that test and expand their abilities to handle a number of issues and scenarios. Scisco et al.
(2017) mention how research has validated that high-performing employees tend to perform at their peak
within 2 years of being in a new assignment and that performance declines after that if the individual is not
given new and more challenging assignments. Often, leadership skills do not materialize until an individual is
moved out of his or her comfort zone. Assigning high-performing individuals challenging assignments that are
outside of their expertise will force them to identify collaborative resources and figure out on their own what
they need to do to succeed.
Risk management: With the exposure of more challenging assignments for the employee, the risk of failure
substantially increases. Hence, there should be appropriate support given to the employee to minimize risk.
This can come in the form of training, mentoring, coaching, and other forms of support. At the same time, this
should be balanced by monitoring the amount of support given because too much support may compromise
the value of the experience and keep the employee from developing core leadership competencies such as
problem-solving and drawing on his or her own resources.
Real-life problem-solving in a controlled environment: Some organizations use real-life situations to help
leaders develop the core competencies for which they are searching (e.g., handling a real business mistake
HRM 6303, Training and Development
4
or crisis that is actually happening within the organization). This is typically done
in ax controlled
environment,
UNIT
STUDY GUIDE
such as a leadership development center or in a special taskforce, which allows
the organization to manage
Title
the risk and have some control over the situation.
Training: Often, organizations use formal training to help leaders develop the competencies they need to be
successful in their roles. The training is typically done at a time when the leader may need to know something
in order to achieve a specific result and has the opportunity to use the new knowledge in a real-life situation.
This is where training becomes most effective in developing leadership competencies. Examples of this
leadership methodology are workshops, seminars, or classes.
Training and leadership development are important topics in any organization. Organizations today must have
leaders who are prepared to lead in a global environment. Selecting the right leadership development
methods is key to success.
References
Fernandez-Araoz, C., Roscoe, A., & Aramaki, K. (2017, November-December). Turning potential into
success: The missing link in leadership development. Harvard Business Review, 95(6), 86.
http://search.ebscohost.com.libraryresources.columbiasouthern.edu/login.aspx?direct=true&db=edsg
ao&AN=edsgcl.513826863&site=eds-live&scope=site
Giles, S. (2016). Developing organizational leaders. Society for Human Resource Management.
https://www.shrm.org/resourcesandtools/tools-andsamples/toolkits/pages/developingorganizationalleaders.aspx
Rawpixelimages (n.d.). ID 45539364 [Photograph]. Dreamstime. https://www.dreamstime.com/stock-photopeople-global-business-meeting-image45539364
Scisco, P., Biech, E., & Hallenbeck, G. (2017). Compass: Your guide for leadership development and
coaching. Center for Creative Leadership.
Society for Human Research Management. (2017). SHRM research overview: Leadership development.
https://www.shrm.org/hr-today/trends-and-forecasting/special-reports-and-expertviews/Documents/17-0396%20Research%20Overview%20Leadership%20Development%20FNL.pdf
HRM 6303, Training and Development
5
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight: 10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything. Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi Local company or any Multinational company.
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1.Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2.Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3.On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples. (Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4.Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
Their Main functions
Motivational Factors /Drivers
Any local example
Reasons with suitable Examples
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1. 400
Answer 2.400
Answer 3.400
Answer 4.400
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
I have also enclosed the template sent to you form the early stage of the process (see the communication we had on 26/04/2023) that indicates the methodological elements that need to be discussed in chapter 3. In addition, a chapter example has been enclosed demonstrating how the data could be presented and discussed in the case of focusing on two case studies.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Cardiff Metropolitan University
A Critical and Analytical Study of the Factors Impacting the Performance of the
Beverage Manufacturing Industry: A Comparative Case Study of Coca-Cola and
PepsiCo
Advanced Entry Master of Business Administration
Student Name: Mahmoud Barnawi
Student ID: 20255582
Supervisor: Dr. Vera Ndrecaj
Ethics Code: 2022/23DE0345
Submission Date: 22/04/2023
1
DECLARATION
This work is being submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of MBA
.and has not previously been accepted in substance for any degree and is not being
concurrently submitted in candidature for any degree.
Signed
Mahmoud Barnawi
Date ………………………………………………………………..
STATEMENT 1
This dissertation results from my work and investigations, except where otherwise stated.
Where correction services have been used, the extent and nature of the correction are marked
in a footnote(s).
Other sources are acknowledged by footnotes giving explicit references. A bibliography is
appended.
Signed
Mahmoud Barnawi
Date……………………………………………………………….
STATEMENT 2
I hereby consent for my dissertation, if accepted, to be available for photocopying, interlibrary loan, and deposit in Cardiff Metropolitan University’s e-Repository, and that the title
and summary may be available to outside organizations.
Signed Mahmoud Barnawi
Date……………………………………………………………….
2
SUPERVISOR DECLARATION FORM
Student Name
Mahmoud Barnawi
Supervisor’s Name Dr. vera Ndrecaj
I acknowledge that the above student has regularly attended the planned meetings and is
actively engaged in the dissertation supervision process. They have provided regular, timely
draft chapters of the dissertation and followed the guidance.
Signed ……………………………………….
Date
……………………………………….
3
ABSTRACT
This research study aims to critically assess the factors influencing the performance of the
beverage manufacturing industry. The focus lies on an in-depth analysis of the strategies and
tactics employed by two major players in the industry, namely Coca-Cola and PepsiCo, and
their implications on performance outcomes. The research employs secondary data collection
methods alongside content and statistical analysis techniques. The literature review thoroughly
examines organizational performance and the multifaceted factors impacting the beverage
manufacturing sector. Several well-established theories, including the Resource-Based View
theory, Agency Theory, Institutional Theory, Dynamic Capability Theory, and Stakeholder
Theory, are drawn upon to provide insights into these factors.
Moreover, various external influences encompassing economic, technological, environmental,
regulatory, social, competitive, supply chain, innovation, product development, brand image,
and reputation are identified and discussed. The research’s findings reveal that Coca-Cola and
PepsiCo have adeptly executed strategies and tactics that paved the way for exceptional
performance within the beverage manufacturing industry. The pivotal drivers of performance
within this sector are found to be centered around innovation and product development,
cultivation of brand image and reputation, effective supply chain management, and
commitment to sustainability practices. The study acknowledges a few limitations, including
its reliance on secondary data sources, the absence of comparative and longitudinal data, and
the interpretive research philosophy guiding its approach. Drawing from the study’s insights, a
set of recommendations is put forth to bolster the performance of the beverage manufacturing
industry. These recommendations advocate for investments in sustainable production practices,
a concentrated focus on innovation and product development, supply chain management
enhancements, robust brand images and reputations, and a proactive approach to adapting to
evolving consumer preferences and emerging technological trends.
4
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I want to express my sincere gratitude to all those who have supported me throughout this
research study. Firstly, I would like to thank my academic supervisor for providing me with
guidance and support throughout this project. Her expertise and encouragement were
invaluable in shaping my research and ensuring its success. I am also grateful to the
management and staff of the two beverage manufacturing companies who participated in this
study, for their cooperation and for providing me with the necessary information and data to
conduct this research. I owe an actual debt of gratitude to my family, friends, and community
for being my rock during thick and thin. My academic journey was full of uncertainties, but
they never lost faith in me, and for that, I am forever grateful. Lastly, with their advice,
feedback, and encouragement, I want to express my gratitude to all the others who stepped up
to bring this research to fruition. Their efforts shall forever be etched in my memories.
Thank you all for your support and contributions to this project.
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DECLARATION ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2
STATEMENT 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2
STATEMENT 2 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2
SUPERVISOR DECLARATION FORM …………………………………………………………………….. 3
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS …………………………………………………………………………………………… 5
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ……………………………………………………………………………………… 9
LIST OF TABLES …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
CHAPTER ONE: INTRODUCTION ………………………………………………………………………… 11
1.0 Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 11
1.1 Research Background …………………………………………………………………………………….. 11
1.2 Rational …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 12
1.3 Research scope ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13
1.4 Methodology ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14
1.5 Research Aim, Objectives, and Central Research Questions…………………………….. 15
1.5.1 Research Aim ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 15
1.5.2 Research Objectives …………………………………………………………………………………… 15
1.5.3 Central Research Question ………………………………………………………………………….. 15
1.6 Overview of the Study …………………………………………………………………………………….. 16
CHAPTER TWO: LITERATURE REVIEW ………………………………………………………………. 17
2.0 Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 17
2.1 Definition of Organisational Performance ……………………………………………………….. 17
2.2 Critical Evaluation of Relevant Concepts and Theories of the Organisational
Performance………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 17
2.2.1 Resource-based View (RBV) ………………………………………………………………………. 18
2.2.2 Contingency Theory …………………………………………………………………………………… 18
2.2.3 Theory 3: Institutional Theory ……………………………………………………………………… 19
2 2 4 Theory 4: Dynamic Capability Theory ………………………………………………………….. 20
2 2 5 Theory 5: Stakeholder Theory ……………………………………………………………………… 20
2.3 The Primary Factors Impacting the Beverage Manufacturing Industry …………… 21
2.3.1 Resources and Capabilities ………………………………………………………………………….. 21
2.3.2 Organizational Structure and Management Practices ………………………………………. 21
2.3.3 Institutional Environment ……………………………………………………………………………. 21
2.3.4 Dynamic Capabilities …………………………………………………………………………………. 22
2.3.5 Stakeholder Interest ……………………………………………………………………………………. 22
2.4 Knowledge Gap ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 22
2.5 Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 23
CHAPTER THREE: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY………………………………………………… 24
3.0 Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 24
6
3.1 Definition of Organizational Performance ………………………………………………………. 24
3.2 Critical Evaluation of Relevant Concepts and Theories of Organizational
Performance………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 24
3.2.1 Resource-Based View (RBV) ………………………………………………………………………. 24
3.2.2 Contingency Theory …………………………………………………………………………………… 25
3.2.3 Institutional Theory ……………………………………………………………………………………. 25
3.2.4 Dynamic Capability Theory ………………………………………………………………………… 25
3.2.5 Stakeholder Theory…………………………………………………………………………………….. 25
3.3 The Primary Factors Impacting the Beverage Manufacturing Industry …………… 26
3.3.1 Resources and Capabilities ………………………………………………………………………….. 26
3.3.2 Organizational Structure and Management Practices ………………………………………. 26
3.3.3 Institutional Environment ……………………………………………………………………………. 26
3.3.4 Dynamic Capabilities …………………………………………………………………………………. 26
3.3.5 Stakeholder Interest ……………………………………………………………………………………. 26
3.4 Knowledge Gap ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 26
3.5 Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 26
CHAPTER FOUR: FINDINGS AND EVALUATION ………………………………………………… 27
4.0 Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 27
4.1 Part 1: Presentation of Secondary Data …………………………………………………………… 27
4.1.1 Resources and Capabilities ………………………………………………………………………….. 27
4.1.2 Organizational Structure and Management Practices ………………………………………. 28
4.1.3 Institutional Environment ……………………………………………………………………………. 28
4.1.4 Dynamic Capabilities …………………………………………………………………………………. 29
4.1.5 Stakeholder Interests…………………………………………………………………………………… 29
4.2 Part 2: Evaluation ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 30
4.5 Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 32
CHAPTER FIVE: CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ……………………………. 33
5.0 Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 33
5.1 Conclusions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 33
5.1.1To understand the topic comprehensively, critically evaluate relevant theories and
literature related to the beverage manufacturing industry. ……………………………………….. 33
5.1.2 To identify the key internal and external factors that impact the performance of
Coca-Cola and PepsiCo in the beverage manufacturing industry. …………………………….. 33
5.1.3 To analyze the strategies and tactics employed by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo and
evaluate their effectiveness in enhancing their performance in the beverage
manufacturing industry. ………………………………………………………………………………………. 34
5.1.4 To investigate the relationship between the identified factors and the performance
of the beverage manufacturing industry and provide recommendations for improvement.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 34
5.1.5 To suggest practical solutions and recommendations for the beverage
manufacturing industry based on the findings of this study. …………………………………….. 35
5.2 Contribution of the Research ………………………………………………………………………….. 35
5.3 Recommendations ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 35
5.3.1: Enhance Resource Management………………………………………………………………….. 36
7
5.3.2: Adapt Organizational Structure and Management Practices ……………………………. 36
5.3.3: Align with Institutional Norms and Practices ……………………………………………….. 36
5.3.4: Foster Dynamic Capabilities ………………………………………………………………………. 36
5.3.5: Prioritize Stakeholder Interests……………………………………………………………………. 36
5.4 Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 37
5.5 Limitations …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 37
References ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 39
8
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Quaker OATS
–
The Quaker Oats Company.
Lay’s
–
Lay’s Potato Chips
Doritos
–
Doritos Tortilla Chips
Cheetos
–
Cheetos Cheese Flavored Snacks
Tostitos
–
Tostitos Tortilla Chips
R&D
–
Research and Development
NASDAQ
–
National Association of Securities Dealers Automated
CAFA
–
Critical and Analytical Factors Analysis
BMI
–
Beverage Manufacturing Industry
MNCs
–
multinational corporations
PEP
–
PepsiCo Performance
FIP
–
Factors Impacting Performance
CAS
–
Critical and Analytical Study
FM
–
Beverage Manufacturing
Quotations
9
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1: Resources and Capabilities………………………………………………..28
Table 2: Organizational Structure and Management Practices..………………..29
Table 3: Institutional Environment…………………………………………………..29
Table 4: Dynamic Capabilities………………………………………………………..30
Table 5: Stakeholder Interests………………………………………………………..31
10
CHAPTER ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction
The beverage manufacturing industry is highly competitive and constantly evolving to meet
changing consumer preferences and demands. Major players like Coca-Cola and PepsiCo
dominate the industry and have developed unique strategies and tactics to remain competitive
(Guo & Wen, 2021). The success of these companies is influenced by various factors,
including resource management, stakeholder interests, regulatory compliance, and
technological advancements ( Stone et al., 2020). To better understand the variables that
affect the industry’s success, this study will conduct a comparative case study of Coca-Cola
and PepsiCo. The study will evaluate relevant theories and literature related to the beverage
manufacturing industry and identify the key internal and external factors impacting the
performance of these companies. Additionally, the study will analyze the strategies and
tactics employed by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo and evaluate their effectiveness in enhancing
their performance in the industry (Arati et al., 2021). The study aims to investigate the
relationship between the identified factors and the performance of the beverage
manufacturing industry and provide recommendations for improvement.
1.1 Research Background
The beverage manufacturing industry is a highly competitive and dynamic industry
constantly evolving to meet changing consumer preferences and demands. Major players like
Coca-Cola and PepsiCo dominate the industry and have developed unique strategies and
tactics to remain competitive. The success of these companies is influenced by various
factors, including resource management, stakeholder interests, regulatory compliance, and
technological advancements(Shet et al., 2021). To better understand the variables that affect
the success of the beverage manufacturing sector, this study will compare the performance of
Coca-Cola and PepsiCo. In doing so, it will assess theories and models related to beverage
manufacturing and investigate key elements that affect the outcomes and strategies of these
companies. Several theories will guide the study, including Resource-Based View Theory,
Agency Theory, Institutional Theory, Dynamic Capability Theory, and Stakeholder Theory.
These theories will provide valuable insights into the elements that influence organizational
success.
While existing studies have shed some light on the factors that affect performance in the
beverage manufacturing industry, several knowledge gaps still need to be addressed (Ainali
et al., 2022). These include the potential impact of emerging technologies such as artificial
11
intelligence and Blockchain, the long-term impact of changing consumer preferences towards
healthier and more natural products, the challenges and opportunities associated with
sustainability, the impact of political instability on the industry, and the role of social media
in promoting and addressing changing consumer preferences (Chang et al., 2020). To address
these knowledge gaps, further research and analysis are recommended. This study will
employ secondary data collection techniques to elevate the scope and precision of our results.
Our methodology will entail a wide-ranging comparative analysis, which includes a multicase study or cross-sectional study to reinforce the implications of our findings.
1.2 Rational
The topic of a critical and analytical study of the factors impacting the performance of the
beverage manufacturing industry, with a comparative case study of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo,
was selected due to the significant changes and challenges that the industry is facing. The
beverage manufacturing industry is essential to the global economy and contributes
significantly to job creation and economic growth. However, companies operating in the
industry face numerous challenges in meeting the demands of consumers while maintaining
their profitability (Muchaendepi et al., 2019). Understanding the factors that impact the
industry’s performance is crucial for companies to remain competitive and for policymakers
to develop policies that promote industry growth while protecting consumers’ interests
(Hangoma & Surgey, 2019). The study will provide valuable insights into the industry’s
dynamics and help companies develop effective strategies to maintain their competitive
advantage.
The study’s relevance is significant in the current business environment, where the beverage
manufacturing industry is experiencing significant changes due to changing consumer
preferences and increasing competition. Companies operating in the industry must understand
the factors impacting their performance and develop strategies to remain competitive
(Caiazza & Bigliardi, 2020). By analyzing the factors impacting the industry’s performance,
the study will help identify the key drivers of success for companies operating in the
beverage manufacturing industry. The study is crucial for policymakers and regulatory bodies
to understand the factors impacting the industry’s performance, enabling them to develop
policies that promote industry growth while protecting consumers’ interests. Therefore, the
study’s relevance is vital for the industry’s sustainability and growth, making it an essential
topic to explore.
12
1.3 Research scope
This scope of the research is to conduct a critical and analytical study of the factors impacting
the performance of two major beverage manufacturing companies, Coca-Cola and PepsiCo.
The theoretical scope of the research is related to organizational performance, specifically in
the context of operations management (Hanaysha & Alzoubi, 2022). With a colossal
influence over the beverage industry, Coca-Cola and PepsiCo are massive conglomerates that
manufacture mixed drinks for consumers worldwide. The research will closely examine
specific elements that affect their achievements, like operational strategies, marketing tactics,
supply chain control, and inventive approaches. The comparative case study approach will be
used to analyze the performance of these two companies and identify the differences and
similarities in their strategies. The study will collect company performance information from
secondary data sources (Mikalef et al., 2019). The secondary data sources will include
academic research, industry reports, and company annual reports. The collected data will
identify patterns and trends using qualitative and quantitative research methods. A
comparative study of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo’s performance in the beverage manufacturing
industry will be conducted to add to the existing literature on organizational performance
(Zhang, 2019). This research will reveal critical factors that impact these companies’
performance and provide insights into industry best practices.
Introduction to Case study 1: Coca Cola
Coca-Cola is a multinational corporation primarily producing, distributing, and marketing
non-alcoholic beverages. In Atlanta, Georgia 1886, John Pemberton established the company
as medicinal. Coca-Cola, the company’s flagship item, was initially distributed through
Atlanta soda fountains and became exceedingly popular in no time. Throughout the years,
Coca-Cola has broadened its selection of non-alcoholic beverages, which now involve
carbonated soft drinks, juices, sports drinks, and energy drinks (Abu-Reidah, 2020). The
company’s most successful brand names are Sprite, Fanta, Minute Maid, and Powerade. One
of the top players in the beverage industry is Coca-Cola, which has had many successes in its
history of innovative product launches and marketing campaigns, cementing its brand and
increasing market share. Coca-Cola has firmly committed to environmental sustainability,
implementing initiatives to lessen its impact on the planet. Coca-Cola has consistently been
among the most profitable and largest beverage companies globally. As of 2022, the
company’s revenue was around 97.9 billion U.S. dollars, employing approximately 80,000
13
people worldwide (Ridder, 2023). Coca-Cola’s success can be attributed to its strong brand
recognition, innovative products, and effective marketing strategies.
Introduction to case study 2: PepsiCo
PepsiCo is a global food and beverage conglomerate in Purchase, New York. Pepsi-Cola and
Frito-Lay merged to establish the corporation in 1965 (Rezk, 2020). PepsiCo has since grown
its range of brands and products via acquisitions and internal development. Currently, the
company works in over 200 nations and areas worldwide. The company offers a multitude of
merchandise, including bracing drinks, delectable morsels, fruit nectars, and athletic
beverages. Some beverage brands they sell are Pepsi, Yamulu, Jiachale, Tropicana, Aquafina,
and Lipton ice tea. Also, the company sells snacks such as Lay’s, DORITOS, CheetOS,
Tostitos, and Quaker OATS (PepsiCo, n.d). The company also has healthier snacks and
beverage combinations, including naked juice, Sabra Hummus, and SmartFood popcorn
(Kelloway & Miller, 2019). One of the essential advantages of Pepsi is its marketing and
advertising strategies. The company has invested heavily in high-profile marketing
campaigns featuring celebrities and athletes, which have helped to build brand recognition
and loyalty. PepsiCo has also employed cutting-edge marketing strategies, including social
media campaigns and smartphone applications, to interact with customers and advertise its
goods. The establishment has formulated audacious objectives to diminish its ecological
imprint and amplify its utilization of sustainable power origins. PepsiCo has also
implemented programs to support local communities and promote social responsibility. The
NASDAQ is where PepsiCo’s stock is listed, a publicly traded firm in the current year. As of
2022, the company’s revenue was around 86.39 billion U.S. dollars, employing
approximately 80,000 people worldwide (Ridder, 2023).
1.4 Methodology
The methodological framework employed in this study entailed a comprehensive approach to
secondary data collection techniques. The acquisition of secondary data encompassed an indepth review of industry reports, scholarly literature, and pertinent business records, enabling
a thorough exploration of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo’s accomplishments in the beverage
production sector and their strategic maneuvers. To provide structure and direction to the
analysis, established models of organizational performance, including Institutional Theory,
Stakeholder Theory, Resource-Based View Theory, Dynamic Capability Theory, and Agency
Theory, were employed as theoretical lenses. In order to ensure the robustness and credibility
14
of the research, the sufficiency of the secondary data was rigorously assessed with an
emphasis on meeting the study’s objectives while also evaluating the reliability and
credibility of the data sources. Although the discussion on the research philosophy and
approach initially exhibited ambiguity, it was refined to emphasize an inductive approach.
Furthermore, while the initial rendition lacked an explicit section on the sufficiency and
credibility of secondary data, this has been addressed, underscoring the careful evaluation of
data sources to meet the research goals. The data analysis methodology employed content
analysis, which was systematically conducted with measures such as inter-coder reliability,
triangulation, and member checking, thus unveiling recurring themes and patterns within the
data (Morgan & Nica, 2020). Throughout the research process, stringent monitoring of data
collection and analysis instruments, along with meticulous attention to reliability and validity,
were maintained, thus enhancing the overall robustness of this chapter.
1.5 Research Aim, Objectives, and Central Research Questions
1.5.1 Research Aim
This research aimed to critically evaluate the factors impacting the beverage manufacturing
industry’s performance and analyze the strategies and tactics employed by Coca-Cola and
PepsiCo and their impact on performance.
1.5.2 Research Objectives
1. To understand the topic comprehensively, critically evaluate relevant theories and
literature about the beverage manufacturing industry.
2. To identify the key internal and external factors that impact the performance of CocaCola and PepsiCo in the beverage manufacturing industry.
3. To analyze the strategies and tactics employed by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo and
evaluate their effectiveness in enhancing their performance in the beverage
manufacturing industry.
4. To investigate the relationship between the identified factors and the performance of
the beverage manufacturing industry and provide recommendations for improvement.
5. To suggest practical solutions and recommendations for the beverage manufacturing
industry based on the findings of this study.
1.5.3 Central Research Question
1. What are the main factors impacting the performance of the beverage manufacturing
industry, specifically Coca-Cola and PepsiCo?
15
2. How do the strategies and tactics employed by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo impact their
respective performances in the beverage manufacturing industry, and what
recommendations can be made for further improvement in the industry’s
performance?
1.6 Overview of the Study
Chapter 1: Introduction provides a brief historical development of the industry and its key
players and identifies various factors impacting performance.
Chapter 2: Literature Review reviews the relevant theories and identifies specific factors
impacting the industry’s performance.
Chapter 3: Research Methodology, which describes the research methods and techniques
used in the study, including data collection and analysis approaches and ethical
considerations.
Chapter 4: Findings and Evaluation, which presents the analyzed strategies and tactics
employed by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo and their impact on performance, identifies key drivers
of performance, and provides recommendations for improvement.
Chapter 5: Conclusion and Recommendations, which summarizes the contributions of the
research and provides recommendations for beverage manufacturing companies better to
meet their customers’ evolving needs and expectations.
16
CHAPTER TWO: LITERATURE REVIEW
2.0 Introduction
This chapter critically and analytically reviews the literature on the factors impacting the
performance of the beverage manufacturing industry, specifically focusing on the comparative
case study of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo. The central research question aims to identify and
evaluate the key factors affecting the performance of these two multinational corporations
(MNCs) and compare their strategies and management practices. This is accomplished using
pertinent organizational performance ideas and theories to provide a conceptual framework for
the study issue.
2.1 Definition of Organisational Performance
Organizational performance is how an organization achieves its goals and objectives within
its operating environment. It is a critical measure of corporate success, and as such, it is an
area of great interest to scholars, practitioners, and policymakers. There are numerous
definitions of organizational performance, and in this section, we will critically evaluate three
definitions that view the first concept embedded in our research topic from different angles.
These definitions provide a foundational understanding of how organizational performance
can be measured and evaluated. The first definition highlights the importance of aligning
organizational goals with stakeholders’ needs and expectations (El Khatib e al., 2022). The
second definition emphasizes efficiency, effectiveness, and quality in delivering products or
services that meet customer needs. The third definition recognizes the importance of
adaptability and competitiveness in maintaining an organization’s long-term survival. While
each definition offers valuable insights into organizational performance, they also have
limitations in their narrow focus or lack of guidance on measuring internal factors like
employee engagement or leadership (Slåtten et al., 2019). Therefore, a comprehensive
approach is needed to measure and evaluate organizational performance effectively.
2.2 Critical Evaluation of Relevant Co
1. Please answer the attached questions (Q1 and Q2) according to the instructions below. The answer for first question (Q1) shall not less than full page “A4 size” or one and a half page “A4” as maximum. The tutor shall fill out full page “A4 size” to answer sconed question (Q2), You will see the COPY of Q2 in the attached session # (2). Make sure to answer all the listed questions in Q2(1,2,3 and 4) Read carefully all the attached slides prior to answer Q1 and Q2. The answer for Q1 and Q2 based on what have you understood from all attached sessions. Don’t use the artificial intelligence chatbot.The answer should matach with level of postgraduate student. 2. In New Page , Highlight from where the answers have been REFLECTED (Session 1 or 2 or 3 INCLUDING THE PAGE NUMBER)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Session 1
Leadership & Transformations
1
Sayings on Leadership
2
Without communication skills,
you are less likely to be
successful.
Communicat
ion and You
Communication is the most
valued workplace skill.
Without effective
communication skills, your
career may suffer.
3
Leadership
and You
• Regardless of your professional goals,
you will influence others through
communication.
• To lead is to influence others.
• Enhancing communication
competence can enhance leadership
abilities.
4
The Nature of Communication
• Human Communication is about:
• Making sense
• Sharing sense
• Creating meaning
• Verbal and nonverbal messages
5
The Components of Communication
•
Source: The originator of the message
•
Encoding: Turning thoughts into a code
•
Decoding: Interpreting the message
•
Message: The information communicated
•
Receiver: The person interpreting the message
•
Channel: The means by which the message is expressed
•
Noise: Anything interfering with the interpretation of the message
•
Feedback: The response to the message
•
Context: The environment of communication
6
Leadership
Perspectives
• Leaders help make something happen
• Leaders create the extraordinary
• Leaders are ethical
• What do these perspectives have in
common?
7
Leader
Versus a…
• 1. Manager: A person appointed to
coordinate and facilitate.
• Keep things organized
• A focus on the short term
• Coordinates the work without influencing its
design
• 2. Follower: A person who implements
another person’s plan
• Engage in the work designated by others
8
Leadership
Approaches
• Trait approach an approach to
leadership that focuses on the
psychological and physical attributes
or traits that make leaders effective.
• Functional approach an approach to
leadership that suggests that leaders
perform essential functions, tasks,
and processes that help an
organization or team achieve goals.
Task functions behaviors that help a
team or organization get work done.
9
Leadershi
p
Approache
s
1. Trait approach: A focus on the psychological
and
• physical attributes that make for an effective
leader.
• – Intelligence
• – Confidence
• – Social skills
• -Administrative skills
• – Enthusiasm
• – Honesty
• – Competence
• – Not afraid to speak up
10
Leadershi
p
Approache
s
• 2. Functional approach: Leaders are people who perform essential functions, tasks, and
processes.
• The functional approach to leadership suggests that leaders exist to perform essential
functions or behaviors that help an organization or team achieve its goals. Rather than
identifying personality characteristics or other traits, the functional approach to
leadership divides the essential leadership behaviors or functions that enhance the
workings of a group into two categories:
1. Task function
• Help the team get work done
• Ensure that the task gets completed
2. Process function
• Maintains a harmonious climate
• Promotes a friendly atmosphere
11
Process
functions
(Functiona
l
Approach)
• Leaders who enact process functions help maintain a
harmonious climate by encouraging amiable
relationships among people. To attend to process
functions, leaders listen and respond to others. They
seek to maintain a friendly environment that also
promotes honest, frank discussion. Conflict is a normal
and expected part of working with others. It would be
unusual if there were no conflict among people in
groups. Process leaders focus on managing relationships.
Specific process roles include the following:
• Encouraging reticent members to talk
• Mediating conflict
• Compromising or helping other to compromise
• Gatekeeping: monitoring and acting to ensure some
members don’t talk too much and others don’t talk too
little
12
Task
functions
Functional
Approach
• Task functions are those behaviors that help
the team or organization get the work done.
Whether the leader is appointed or elected,
one of his or her responsibilities is to ensure
that the task the group is undertaking is
completed. But don’t get the idea that only
one person performs these specific
functions. Several different people can
perform task functions. Sometimes the
functions are explicitly assigned to people,
and at other times the functions are
accomplished as sensitive and skilled people
become aware that these task functions
need to be performed.
13
Leadershi
p
Approache
s
• 3. Styles approach: Leaders use 1 of 3
primary leadership styles.
• Authoritarian
• Give orders and control others
• Democratic
• Consult with the group for its input
• Laissez-faire
• Take a hands-off approach
14
Authoritari
an leaders
(Styles
approach
)
• Authoritarian leaders influence by giving
orders and seeking to control others.
Military officers assume this leadership style;
so do dictators like Hitler. But you don’t have
to be in the military or in a dictator-ruled
country to experience an authoritarian
leadership style. Perhaps you’ve been in a
group and wondered, “Who put her in
charge?” Or, maybe you noted that action
needed to be taken, so you asked someone
to do what you thought needed to be done.
15
Democrati
c leaders
(Styles
approach
)
• Democratic leaders, as you might suspect
from the name, consult with others before
issuing edicts. This type of leader seeks to
join in the process of influencing without
bulldozing the group into action it may
resent. Sometimes formal votes are taken,
but the leader or leaders will gauge the
reaction of the group through dialogue and
by reading nonverbal cues. Democratic
leaders are aware of the needs of the team
or organization rather than focused on
achieving their own personal agenda.
16
Laissezfaire
leaders
(Styles
approach
)
• Laissez-faire leaders take a hands-off, laidback approach to influencing others. Laissezfaire is a French phrase that implies
noninterference. This leadership approach is
based on the assumption that the less
direction provided by the leader, the better.
In many ways this type of leader shies away
from actively influencing the group. He or
she influences only when pushed to lead.
17
Leadership
Approaches
Three
more
leadership
styles:
Situational
Select styles as
the
circumstances
change
Transformational
Influence
people to see
the future in
new ways
Servant
Be of service to
the group
18
The
Situational
Leadershi
p
Approach
• The situational leadership approach views
leadership as an interactive process that
links a particular style of leadership with
such factors as culture, time limitations,
group member personalities, and the work
the group needs to do. Sometimes a group
needs a strong, authoritarian leader to make
decisions quickly so that the group can
achieve its goal.
19
Transformatio
nal
leadership
Approach
• Transformational leadership is the process of
influencing people to see the future in new ways.
The transformational leader influences the team or
organization by giving the team a glimpse of the
future, energizing or realigning the culture, or giving
the organization a new structure. The leader
influences by helping team members see all of the
possibilities within the team, including those that
may not yet be visible. Microsoft founder Bill Gates
challenged existing ways of thinking and developed
the world’s largest software development company.
Michael Dell transformed the way computers were
marketed in the late twentieth and early twenty-first
centuries. Entrepreneur Mark Zuckerberg, founder
of Facebook,
20
SERVANT
LEADERSH
IP
APPROAC
H
• To be a servant is to support, nurture, and assist others.
Several researchers have identified a leadership style,
known as servant leadership, in which the leader
explicitly views himself or herself as being of service to
the group or team.
• Robert Greenleaf, one of the first researchers to develop
the concept of servant leadership, described it this way:
• It begins with the natural feeling that one wants to serve,
to serve first. Then conscious choice brings one to aspire
to lead. The difference manifests itself in the care taken
by the servant—first to make sure that other people’s
highest priority needs are being served. The best test is:
Do those served grow as persons; do they, while being
served, become healthier, wiser, freer, more
autonomous, more likely themselves to become
servants?
21
22
Principles of
Leadership
(Add ons)
1. Be aware of your communication
• Be aware of your motives
• Be aware that people perceive
situations differently
2. Effectively use and interpret verbal
messages
• Encode and decode accurately
3. Effectively use and interpret nonverbal
messages
• Encode and decode accurately
23
Principles of Leadership Continued…
4. Listen and respond thoughtfully to others
• Be other-oriented
• Respond thoughtfully to others
5. Appropriately adapt messages to others.
• Make a decision about your communication goal
• Tailor your message to the person receiving it
24
Relationship: An ongoing connection we
make with others
Relating to
Others
Interpersonal communication: When
two people interact to mutually
influence each other for the purpose of
managing relationships
Impersonal communication:
Communication by which you respond
to a person as an object or based on
their role
25
Collaborating
with Others
Group
communication
:
Communication
that occurs
between 3 – 15
people
• Share a common goal
• Influence each other
Team: A
coordinated
group of people
striving towards
a specific
common goal
• Clearly defined roles,
duties, and
responsibilities
• More highly structured
than a group
26
Presenting
to Others
• Public communication: When a speaker
addresses a gathering of people to inform,
persuade, and/or entertain them
• Developing, organizing, and delivering a
presentation
• More formal and structured than group or
interpersonal communication
27
Session 2
Leadership & Transformations
1
Being Aware
of Self and
Others
2
3
Mindfulne
ss
• Awareness of your own and others’
thoughts, actions, and motivations
• Important aspects of mindful leadership:
• Assumptions about followers
• Awareness of organizational culture
• Awareness of ethical issues
4
Identifying Your Social
Style
•Assertiveness: The capacity to make
requests, actively disagree, and express
emotions without attacking others.
•Responsiveness: The capacity to be
sensitive to the communication of others, be
seen as a good listener, make others
comfortable when communicating, and
recognize other’s desires and needs.
5
Your Social Style
AMIABLE: “RELATIONSHIP
SPECIALISTS.” ENJOY
SUPPORTIVE AND HELPFUL
ROLES.
ANALYTICAL: “TECHNICAL
SPECIALISTS.” ENJOY WORKING
IN TECHNICAL POSITIONS.
DRIVER: “CONTROL
SPECIALISTS.” ENJOY WORKING
IN LEADERSHIP AND
MANAGEMENT POSITIONS.
EXPRESSIVE: “SOCIAL
SPECIALISTS.” ENJOY BEING
NOTICED BY OTHERS.
6
7
8
Adapting to Social Styles
STYLE FLEXING: THE PROCESS OF
ADAPTING YOUR COMMUNICATION
TO HOW OTHERS COMMUNICATE.
MAXIMIZES THE COMMUNICATION
“FIT” BETWEEN TWO PEOPLE
AWARENESS OF SOCIAL STYLES IS
USEFUL IN LEADING OTHERS MORE
EFFECTIVELY
9
Classical Approach of Social Styles
• Based on the principle of reward and punishment
• There is one best way to perform a task
• There is a clear leader whose job is to influence workers to perform efficiently and effectively
• Team members have accepted that they are fulfilling a role that is needed
• Communication is typically downward
• Team members are not expected to spend much time collaborating to determine how to work
10
Human Relations
Approach of Social Styles
• Humans are motivated by personal reasons
for working hard or not
• The way people are treated influences how
they work (Hawthorne Effect)
• Working conditions influence how people
work
• Hygiene factors: Basic aspects of a job that
must be present for satisfaction.
• Motivation factors: Aspects of a job that, if
present, will motivate employees to work
harder.
11
Human
Resources
Leadershi
p
• People are resources and can be full partners
in an organization or team.
• Empower people to participate
• Give people control over work processes
• Leaders work side by side with their teams
• Emphasizes both the task and the person
12
13
14
The Nature
of
Organizatio
nal Culture
• The learned pattern of beliefs, values,
assumptions, and rules that are shared by
the people in an organization.
• Affects all aspects of how work is
accomplished
• Influences how people communicate with
each other
15
The Nature
of
Organizatio
nal Culture
• Created through communication
• Communicated both explicitly and implicitly
• Includes multiple factors
• Is multilayered and multifaceted
• Inevitably changes
16
Organizational Culture and Leadership
• Leaders communicate organizational culture through:
• What they pay attention to
• Their reactions to major events and crises
• Their actions as role models.
• How they reward others
• The criteria used to recruit, promote, and “excommunicate” others
17
Be Aware of Ethical
Leadership
Challenges
18
Ethics
• The beliefs, values, and moral principles by
which people determine what is right and
wrong.
• What does it mean to be ethical?
• Being sensitive to others’ needs
• Giving people choices rather than forcing them
• Keeping sensitive information private
• Not intentionally decreasing others’ sense of
worth
• Being honest in presenting information
19
• Leaders have to manage the temptation to
deceive others. Some challenges:
Challenge
of Deceit
• Lying for personal benefit
• Using information for personal benefit
• Denying the possession of knowledge that may
benefit others
• Collecting information that violates others’ privacy
• Disclosing information to people who do not have a
need or a right to that information
20
• Leaders have to be responsible for their behavior and the
behavior of their team members.
• Some challenges:
Challenge of
Responsibility
• Modeling ethical conduct at all times
• Acknowledging and trying to correct ethical problems
• Taking responsibility for the consequences of orders
and actions
• Taking reasonable steps to prevent the unethical
treatment of others
• Operating by the same standards as team members
21
• Leaders have to be consistent in
their approach. At the same time,
leaders must acknowledge personal
differences.
• Some challenges:
Challenge of
Consistency
• Informing team members about the
importance of treating individual
needs
• Informing team members of the
criteria used for making decisions
• When appropriate, sharing the
criteria used for making decisions
22
Using Verbal and Nonverbal Messages (chapter 3)
1
2
Why Steve Jobs Was The Ultimate Communicator
•
Jobs had an amazing ability to speak with passion and make his ideas
understandable and memorable through telling stories and
demonstrations.
•
World’s most exciting and gifted communicator.
•
A Steve Jobs presentation doesn’t just deliver information. It informs,
educates and entertains.
•
He only focused on one idea at a time.
•
Jobs hardly ever used words on his slides; he let the image paint the
picture and reinforced it with stories.
•
Jobs never let the fact that he was a techie and generally speaking to a
tech audience turn his speeches stale with an overload of jargon. He
knew that he needed to connect on a human level and speak about
what a regular person really wanted out of a product rather than just
spewing out impressive specs and features.
3
• https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K4kxkNCayDY
4
Seven Principles of
Transformational Leadership -Creating A Synergy of Energy
“Managers are people who do things right, while leaders are people who do the right
thing (transforming others).” Warren Bennis, On Becoming a Leader
5
1. Principle of
Simplification
• Successful leadership begins with a vision,
which reflects the shared purpose. The
ability to articulate a clear, practical,
transformational vision which answers the
question, “Where are we headed?” Stories
teach this idea – the stonecutters’ tale:
The first stonecutter says, “I’m cutting
stone,” the second says, “I’m carving a
cornerstone,” but the third says, “I’m
building a concert hall.” The third has
vision. Where do seminary students see
themselves – impacting their local church,
their community, the nation, or the world?
For any team, discussing goals, objectives
and vision unifies the members.
6
2. Principle of
Motivation – The
ability to gain the
agreement and
commitment of
other people to
the vision.
• Once the transformational leader is
able to bring synergy to the
organization he must then use various
means to energize (motivate) the staff.
A common way to motivate others is
to challenge them, provide ample
opportunity to join the creative
process, and give them the credit.
7
3. Principle of
Facilitation
• The ability to effectively facilitate the
learning of individuals, teams, and
other reliable and reputable
resources. Peter Senge in The Fifth
Discipline says the primary job of
leadership now is to facilitate the
learning’s of others. The inborn quest
of humans (staff) to learn more and
more becomes the leaders’ greatest
asset to address organizational
challenges. Transformational leaders
have been given a sacred trust of
being stewards of their staff’s
intellectual capital.
8
4. Principle of
Innovation
• The ability to boldly initiate prayerful
change when needed. An effective and
efficient organization requires
members to anticipate change and not
fear it. Leaders must initiate and
respond quickly to change. Team
members successfully influence one
another to assimilate change because
the transformational leaders have
build trust and fostered teamwork.
9
5. Principle of
Mobilization
• The ability to enlist, equip and
empower others to fulfill the vision.
Transformational leaders look for
willing participants who have already
been given formal leadership
responsibilities and also among people
who have not. They desire leadership
at all levels, so they find ways to invite
and ignite leadership all levels. They
introduce simple baby steps to enlist
larger participants.
10
6. Principle of
Preparation
• The ability to never stop learning about
themselves with and without the help of others.
Rick Warren says, “Leaders are learners.”
Transformational leaders realize that the
transformation they pursue in is a reflection of
their own spiritual quest–that they must serve
the world through their giftedness because that
is the only way they truly fulfill their life mission.
With this mindset, moments of being stuck
become moments of total dependence on God.
This is such a rigorous path of learning that
transformational leaders must be in thriving
relationships with others pursuing
transformation. It is within these vital
relationships, life opportunities and obstacles get
saturated in love and support.
11
7. Principle of
Determination
• The ability to finish the race. A leader’s
missions is sometime difficult and their
journey often lonely. Leaders depend on
their stamina, endurance, courage and
strength to finish each day. Because their
focus is not only on raising their own
leadership but the development of others,
the most rigorous and humbling of all
human endeavors, transformational
leaders experience times of self doubt,
grief and fatigue. Transformational leaders
have to develop spiritual, emotional, and
physical disciplines to sustain their high
level of commitment to their cause.
12
Quastion#1# Prior to 2005, the law governing bankruptcy was passed in 1978. What was the effect of that law? How did it lead to the passage of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (BAPCPA) in 2005? What happened as a result of the news 2005 law? 2# In your own words, explain the history of bankruptcy law. Is it provided for by the U.S. Constitution? Where? What legislative body is given authority by the Constitution to pass laws regarding bankruptcy? Do the same bankruptcy laws apply in all states? 3# In some detail, explain the difference between a Chapter 7 and a Chapter 13 bankruptcy. Which of the two is preferable from a debtor’s perspective? 4# BAPCPA requires that a debtor be subjected to the means and median income tests. Explain the median income test and what it means for the debtor if his/her income is above the state median.EditViewInsertFormatToolsTable12ptPara
Answer the following questions completely. Quastion#1# Prior to 2005, the law governing bankruptcy was passed in 1978. What was the effect of that law? How did it lead to the passage of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (BAPCPA) in 2005? What happened as a result of the news 2005 law? 2# In your own words, explain the history of bankruptcy law. Is it provided for by the U.S. Constitution? Where? What legislative body is given authority by the Constitution to pass laws regarding bankruptcy? Do the same bankruptcy laws apply in all states? 3# In some detail, explain the difference between a Chapter 7 and a Chapter 13 bankruptcy. Which of the two is preferable from a debtor’s perspective? 4# BAPCPA requires that a debtor be subjected to the means and median income tests. Explain the median income test and what it means for the debtor if his/her income is above the state median. 5# Explain the means test provided for by BAPCPA. When is it required? What does it mean if a debtor has disposable income? 6# Even though bankruptcy is legal, many people believe it is unethical. What are the ethical issues associated with the bankruptcy process in general? Do you think it is ethical to avoid paying back money you have borrowed? Why or why not?
Company: AmazonEstimate two cost functions for Total Operating Costs (Y) using Selling & Administrative Costs and Research & Development Costs as independent variables (Cost drivers X) for each cost function. 1- Pick a company 2- Use EDGAR, Google Finance, or other sources and collect data about your company 3- You need Total Operating Costs 4- Selling & Administrative Costs 5- Research & Development Costs 6- Run the two regressions 7- Use page Exhibit 10-18 (attached) from the textbook and compare the two cost drivers and write your report.You have to submit an Excel file which includes the regression outputs and thegraphs for both cost drivers, and your comparison analysis.Note: You can use other variables as cost drivers.
You must integrate theory into your responses and your submission must incorporate a minimum of 10 different academic sources. Here is a link to some academic journal articles where you can start your research: Research Paper – Academic Journal
Public concerns about consumers’ digital privacy have been raised around the world
Discuss why digital privacy matters for both consumers and marketers. Suggest ways to mitigate the problems associated with marketers’ intrusion of consumer privacy and to maximise communication effectiveness in the digital era
Your case study will be graded based on the following criteria
Appropriate use of subject concepts/theories (30 marks)
Does the submission successfully incorporate subject concepts and theories? Are all theories and concepts used defined and explained?
Quality of analysis and argument (30 marks)
Does the submission demonstrate a good understanding of subject concepts and theories? Are the concepts and theories well integrated into the discussion to analyse the case study and form a strong argument? Is the submission descriptive or analytical?
Depth of research (20 marks)
Does the submission provide sufficient information about the case and commend a good range of relevant expert resources to support the analysis and argument? Is there a balance of research from academic and non-academic perspectives?
Quality of writing (10 marks)
Is the submission well-structured with effective use of headings and subheadings? Are thoughts and arguments expressed in a clear coherent manner? Does the submission command good grammar, spelling and punctuation?
Referencing (10 marks)
Is referencing consistent? Are concepts and information cited properly? Are any citations or references missing? Is the bibliography formatted correctly?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Scenario 1 – Digital privacy (Week
7)
Public concerns about consumers’ digital privacy have been raised around the world
Discuss why digital privacy matters for both consumers and marketers. Suggest ways to mitigate
the problems associated with marketers’ intrusion of consumer privacy and to maximise
communication effectiveness in the digital era.
•
Kang, H., & Shin, W. (2016). Do smartphone power users protect mobile
privacy better than nonpower users? Exploring power usage as a factor in
mobile privacy protection and disclosure. Cyberpsychology, Behavior, and
Social Networking, 19(3), 179-185.
•
Pentina, I., Zhang, L., Bata, H., & Chen, Y. (2016). Exploring privacy paradox in
information-sensitive mobile app adoption: A cross-cultural comparison.
Computers in Human Behavior, 65, 409-419.
•
Shin, W. (2020) Youth media consumption and privacy risks in the digital era
(Chapter 12). In M. Filimowicz and V. Tzankova (Eds.), Reimagining
Communication: Experience (Vol 2). Routledge
•
Bandara, R., Fernando, M., & Akter, S. (2020). Explicating the privacy paradox:
A qualitative inquiry of online shopping consumers. Journal of Retailing and
Consumer Services, 52 9p. doi: 10.1016/j.jretconser.2019.101947
•
Petronio, S. (2013). Brief status report on communication privacy management
theory. Journal of Family Communication, 13: 6-14.
•
Robinson, S. C. (2017). Self-disclosure and managing privacy: Implications for
interpersonal and online communication for consumers and marketers. Journal
of Internet Commerce, 16(4), 385-404.
•
Lee, L. T (2013). Privacy and social media (Chapter 9). In The Social Media
Industries, edited by Alan B. Albarran, Taylor and Francis, 2013. ProQuest
Ebook
Central, http://ebookcentral.proquest.com.ezp.lib.unimelb.edu.au/lib/unimelb
/detail.action?docID=1143700
•
Youn, S., & Shin, W. (2019). Adolescents’ responses to social media newsfeed
advertising: The interplay of persuasion knowledge, benefit-risk assessment,
and ad scepticism in explaining information disclosure. International Journal of
Advertising, DOI: 10.1080/02650487.2019.1585650
•
Chen, Q., Feng, Y, Liu, L., & Tian, X. (2019). Understanding consumers’
reactance of online personalized advertising: A new scheme of rational choice
from a perspective of negative effects. International Journal of Information
Management, 44, 53-64.
•
Mpinganjira, M., & Maduku, D. K. (2019). Ethics of mobile behavioural
advertising: Antecedents and outcomes of perceived ethical value of
advertised brands. Journal of Business Research, 95, 464-478.
•
Choi, H., Parl, J., & Jung, Y. (2018). The role of privacy fatigue in online privacy
behavior. Computers in Human Behavior, 81, 42-51.
•
Tang, J., Akram, U., & Shi, W. (2021). Why people need privacy? The role of
privacy fatigue in app users’ intention to disclose privacy: based on personality
traits. Journal of Enterprise Information Management, 34(4), 1097-1120.
•
Joeckel, S., & Dogruel, L. (2020). Default effects in app selection: German
adolescents’ tendency to adhere to privacy or social relatedness features in
smartphone apps. Mobile Media & Communication, 8(1), 22-41.
The use of AI (For example: ChatGPT) will be detected immediately and the work will be refunded. Please make sure that you have an idea of what you’re working on. No late submissions, work must be provided by time. Thank you.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
CASE STUDY ANALYSIS
Question 1
(1100 words) [30 Marks]
Work through the case study (following page) using just ONE of the following models of your choice to
reach and justify a responsible and ethical judgment in relation to the case study:
•
•
Model #1: Langenderfer and Rockness Model also known as The American Accounting
Association (AAA) Model
Model #2: The Moral Intervision Model
Clearly identify the decision-making model you are using and then use the subheadings appropriate to
the chosen model to structure your response. There is space to write your response after the case
study.
As you apply your chosen model, ensure your response demonstrates your knowledge of the following
unit learning outcomes:
•
1 Apply ethical theories, principles and decision-making models in arriving at reasoned
and responsible judgements for professional ethical issues in accounting, financial and
corporate settings.
•
2 Apply relevant codes of ethics for accounting/financial professionals in the local and
global contexts.
Mark Allocation will be based on the application of the chosen model as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Understanding facts (3.75 marks)
Stakeholders and key ethical issue(s) (7.5 marks)
Ethical norms, values, and principles (7.5 marks)
Courses of action and their ethical basis (7.5 marks)
Chosen and justified course of action (3.75 marks)
Question 2
(400 words) [10 Marks]
Mark Allocation will be based on two corporate governance issues presented in this company and
propose recommendations to address the limitations (10 Marks)
CASE STUDY
Since joining the university, Haukea has worked as a part-time intern in the Accounting and Finance
Department for Modern Battery Electronics (MBE). MBE is a listed company with subsidiaries in
several countries. About six months ago, Haukea was offered a job as a director for its Pacific Islands
subsidiary.
“We don’t usually offer this opportunity to someone who has only been with the company for a few
years,” said Willow, Haukea’s supervisor. “But in the short time you’ve been with the firm, we feel
you’ve shown a lot of management potential. We also see from your CV you spent a trimester abroad
in the Pacific Islands as part of your work-integrated program. This makes you a better fit than other
candidates since you are more familiar with the culture.” Haukea saw this promotion as a
steppingstone to a much higher position within the company. He agreed to the promotion and arrived
in the Pacific Islands a few months later.
Haukea found the transition in dealing with another culture challenging but rewarding. He especially
appreciated his assistant manager, Tram, who helped him learn the ropes and communicate with the
employees. MBE gave Haukea free rein in running the subsidiary. Its primary performance measure
is the bottom line, and employees are aware of this fact.
A few weeks ago, Haukea noticed something odd about the subsidiary’s waste disposal procedures
of sulfuric acid byproducts. Company procedures stated this waste had to be disposed of safely. The
problem was the missing paperwork employees were required to submit and file with corporate
detailing how they performed the procedure. Haukea could not find any records of any paperwork
ever being filed.
Haukea approached Tram about the issue. “The paperwork is more of a formality,” Tram replied.
“Nobody seems to follow up on it here in the Pacific Islands.” “That’s beside the point,” Haukea said.
“We need to have these systems in place to ensure we dispose of waste properly.”
After more questions, Tram finally confessed that while they usually tried to dispose of the waste
properly, the entire process took too long in a time crunch. This resulted in employees sometimes
dumping the waste in the waterway after paying a small reasonable fee to the local council.
Haukea was shocked. The local waterway is small, and many of the inhabitants in the area use it for
drinking water. “But this is a toxic industrial chemical! How long has this been going on?” Haukea
asked. “Several years now,” Tram stated. He then continued “However, the previous subsidiary
manager, now the CEO of MBE, told us not to worry. He said the sulfuric acid byproduct loses its
effectiveness when mixed with water. You would need to consume a lot for it to be harmful.”
Haukea immediately took action. He ordered a halt to the operations to investigate the matter
further. He called the subsidiary employees together and stated that from then on, they would follow
all procedures for properly disposing of waste. He also reported the situation to his supervisor,
Willow, back home and told her about the previous subsidiary manager’s knowledge and
noncompliance with proper waste disposal.
When Haukea called Willow, he detailed all the changes he made and planned to make. Willow
congratulated him on detecting and immediately stopping the improper disposal practices. Then
Haukea started to discuss how the company should report the situation to the Pacific Islands
authorities and discuss cleanup methods.
Willow was quiet for a while. “Look, Haukea, you must understand that in the Pacific Islands, water
contamination and improper disposal of waste is more accepted than it is here. I’m not sure we
should be worried about cleaning up the waterway, particularly as other companies in the area likely
use the waterway to get rid of waste. We are not the only firm around there, after all.”
“But Willow, people who use the waterway for drinking water might get sick,” Haukea replied. Willow
then responded “I don’t know, Haukea. A cleanup would cost millions of dollars, and we’d probably
be cleaning up the mess of other firms in the area. Additionally, we would probably be given heavy
fines since we’re a foreign company. Besides, you said that people would have to consume a lot of
this sulfuric acid byproduct before they get sick.” Haukea hung up the phone, more confused than
ever. He thought perhaps Willow was right.
Maybe he was overreacting. However, later that day, some reports he requested showed up. The
reports stated that local fishing in the area had decreased dramatically in the past few years, and
some fish importers from Australia have cancelled numerous orders due to water pollution concerns.
Haukea is faced with a difficult dilemma with a range of issues.
Question 1
(1100 words) [30 Marks]
How would you advise Haukea to navigate through the ethical dilemma? Clearly identify the decisionmaking model you have decided to use and then use the subheadings appropriate to the chosen
model to structure your response.
ANSWER HERE
Question 2
(400 words) [10 Marks]
With reference to corporate governance best practice principles, critically evaluate two corporate
governance issues presented in this company and propose recommendations to address the
limitations.
ANSWER HERE
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
Q1. What were the challenges that the new CEO faced in 2008?Q2. How did he respond to these challenges?Q3. Why did culture play a big role in the turnaround?Please note the answer should be 3 lines mi for each question.
Social, cultural, and technological changes have always impacted how we communicate Looking toward the next five to ten years, discuss how you anticipate the needs and expectations of communication professionals to change. What kinds of problems and opportunities should communication professionals expect and how should we prepare for these uncertain developments? request：writing should be no longer than a single page and should not require or use any external sources or citations.
please use your own words don’t copy and paste (no plagiarism)- Please use keyboard (don’t use handwriting)- All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)- I want answer with APA reference, references at least 4- The answer should be total 1100 TO 1200 w##The assignment should not contain sexual orientation or the like
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Business Ethics and Organization Social Responsibility (MGT
422)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Business ethics and
organization social responsibility
Course Code: MGT 422
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Layla Nasser
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
No
CLO-6
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs)
Write coherent project about a case study or actual research about ethics
Critical Thinking
Consider yourself the Chief executive officer of a small enterprise. The enterprise
updated the compliance policy. Now one of the employee dumped dangerous waste into
a nearby stream.
Questions:
a. Who would you invite into your office and what information would you require?
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
b. How frequently you suggest that Enterprise policies and procedures be updated.
(400 words-2.5 Marks)
c. Prepare a long- and short-term action plan to address the situation. (700 words-5
Marks)
Answers
a.
b.
c.
My order: 1- No theft, no match please. 2-You can find the instructions inside the document 3- Please write a paper in the document 4- Write a report on whatever you use to research and what you write in a different document because we will discuss it separately in class Write at least 5 references using the APA style. NB: Please use simple language Put the in-text quote in each. Additions within the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Noof Aldossary
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
A clear and concise title that is no more than 15 words
Introduction
Background information (
Synthesis of the relevant literature (
Research questions or research purpose (
Justification for the project (Proposed Methods
Sample selection (
Data collection (
Data analysis (Expected Outcomes
Theoretical implications/business insights (
Practical implications (References
)
)
)
What is the context?
)
)
) )
) )
APA 7th style (https://owl.purdue.edu/owl/research_and_citation/a… guide/index.html)
Please download the attached data file e06h1Mortgage.xlsm Download e06h1Mortgage.xlsmand follow the instructions (page 443-446, page 453-457, page 464-468 and page 476-479) to complete the hands-on exercises.
In this module, you learned that you can’t be a leader without followers. Leadership, then, is a very personal process, and yet it is anything but a solitary process. Leading is ultimately about people. In this course, the journal will be used for reflection. This is a private conversation between you and your instructor, and you are encouraged to deeply explore the concepts presented.
Prompt
Completing this assignment will give you some insight into how you can best motivate others to follow your vision as a leader.
Now, answer these questions from your perspective as a leader, considering the recommendations you have provided in the GROW model:
Personal Reflection: Why would others follow you as their leader? Explain.
Impact: How would you motivate them to pursue the vision you outline, not because you order them to do so, but because they want to do so enthusiastically on their own?
Feedback: Ask someone you trust and who can be objective, “What is my greatest asset as a leader?” In your journal, record the response and whether you agree or disagree and why.
What to Submit
Submit a Word document using double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and one-inch margins. This assignment should be 1 to 2 pages in length and include references cited in APA format. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
The future is looking bright! You have the entire group revved up like a steam engine ready to roll toward the vision you have crafted. Your vision is specific, detailed, and colorful. It enables your team to see and feel what things will be like when the change efforts are completed. Now that your team is ready, they need to get everyone excited about the change. Chances are it’s not just you and your close team that will be impacted by this change. In order to make change more successful, it’s best to communicate carefully with all the stakeholders to be sure they understand and support the change efforts.
Specific questions or items to address:
Read Step 4 “Communicate for Buy-In” from Kotter and Cohen’s The Heart of Change. First, review the feedback from your instructor on Part 4. Use any new information you gained from the discussion and feedback from your instructor to revise and improve Part 4 of your project. Next, compile Part 5 of your project, explaining what actions you and your team will take to communicate change with stakeholders of your situation and work to gain their buy-in. Be specific in the methods you will use to communicate: when, in what detail, and to whom.
Once you have crafted your communication strategy, draw up a mock questionnaire to survey a few of your key stakeholders. (The survey you devise is only hypothetical-you do not need to actually survey individuals from your change scenario.) The survey should allow you to gage the success of your communication strategy and identify changes that might be necessary in your strategy. You may find the exercise on page 98 helpful in crafting your own questionnaire. You may also find page 100 helpful in reviewing the key points of what to do and not do when crafting your communication strategy. Be sure your paper touches on the key elements of each as they pertain to your organization.
Be sure to include at least three scholarly references to support your assertions written in your own words. Do not copy word for word from the course text or any other sources. Your submission this week is Part 5 of the final project.
The requirements below must be met for your paper to be accepted and graded:
Write between 1,000 – 1,500 words (approximately 4 – 6 pages) using Microsoft Word in APA style.
Use font size 12 and 1” margins.
Include cover page and reference page.
At least 80% of your paper must be original content/writing.
No more than 20% of your content/information may come from references.
Use an appropriate number of references to support your position, and defend your arguments. The following are examples of primary and secondary sources that may be used, and non-credible and opinion based sources that may not be used.
Primary sources such as, government websites (United States Department of Labor Bureau of Labor Statistics, United States Census Bureau, The World Bank, etc.), peer reviewed and scholarly journals in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library) and Google Scholar.
Secondary and credible sources such as, CNN Money, The Wall Street Journal, trade journals, and publications in EBSCOhost (Grantham University Online Library).
Non-credible and opinion based sources such as, Wikis, Yahoo Answers, eHow, blogs, etc. should not be used.
Cite all reference material (data, dates, graphs, quotes, paraphrased words, values, etc.) in the paper and list on a reference page in APA style.
View your assignment rubric.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Vision for Change
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
October 10, 2023
2
Vision for Change
When it comes to navigating the murky seas of change management, a clear vision is like
a lighthouse. It’s clear that transformation is not a choice but a need in today’s business environment
as we dive into the nuances of change inside the South Carolina Department of Corrections
(SCDC). Executives in the twenty-first century have learned to see change as inevitable because
of the instability and unpredictability of the global economy. Business, for instance, has been
forced by globalization to reject traditional methods in favor of more progressive ones. In addition,
the earlier systems’ rigidity, hierarchical structure, and functionalized nature are antiquated
because of the dynamic and flexible character of the modern market. With its adaptability, crossdepartmental focus, foundation of collaboration, and flat structure, the new organizational model
is ready for the competitive marketplace of the twenty-first century. Organizational
transformations cannot be realized without strong leadership. In particular, visions help chief
executive officers (CEOs) increase the competitiveness and financial performance of their
companies by matching the efforts of their teams with those of the organization as a whole.
Resistance to change, based on the mistaken assumption that established procedures are
foolproof, is a widespread problem in all sectors of the economy. Given the rapid rate of change
in today’s complex environment, however, accepting transition is not an option but a need (Von
Treuer et al., 2018). One of the most important parts of SCDC that needs updating is the PayScale
system. This system has not lived up to its promise since wages are mostly determined by
characteristics including rank, length of service, and job duties (Temgire & Joshi, 2021). As a
consequence, workers are leaving in greater numbers because they believe their pay does not fairly
represent the amount of effort they put in. Adjustments to the PayScale system that are in line with
the larger aim for change are necessary to prevent more departures and strengthen the company.
3
Equally critical is doing something about the lack of incentives. Without these incentives, workers
are less likely to be invested in their job, which leads to poorer output and worse quality. The
problem might be solved by implementing a multi-tiered incentive plan to reward excellence while
also boosting efficiency. It is also important for SCDC to retain its experienced employees.
Recognizing that experience breeds excellence, the company should give preference to employees
with longer tenures (Packard, 2021). The success of these measures depends on SCDC’s ability to
keep talented people on staff All of SCDC’s stakeholders need to have a clear understanding of
the organization’s long-term vision for transformation. This vision must be articulated in a way
that touches every member of the team if it is to gain their support.
The message’s straightforwardness and simplicity are just as important as the vision itself.
It is crucial that once the vision has been defined, it be communicated effectively across the
business. This may be done by capitalizing on the established coalition and drawing on its many
contacts inside SCDC. However, we must recognize that there are many obstacles on the way to
change. hurdles to growth may come in many forms, including human behavior, social norms,
legal frameworks, and physical hurdles (Kotter & Cohen, 2012). Therefore, SCDC must carefully
allocate resources to prevent interruptions by anticipating and addressing these challenges in
advance. Small wins need to be heralded and praised as they provide both motivation and direction
for the future. They inspire workers to recommit to and embrace the transformation. Maintaining
and growing change requires constant work. Companies need to regularly assess their progress
toward new goals (Kotter & Cohen, 2012). Integrating change into SCDC’s culture should become
as natural as breathing.
4
In order for a transformation to last, it must become ingrained in the fabric of the business
itself. The change needs the support of top-level decision-makers and the training of all relevant
staff members. Leaders that push for positive change inside their organizations should be
commended for their efforts. Managers and group leaders need to be aware of the connection
between the structure of their organizations and the goals of their teams. Traditional organizational
systems, for instance, are detrimental to morale and output, and leaders should be aware of this.
Due to their rigid hierarchies and narrow focus, traditional institutions tend to worsen existing
power disparities (Gulati et al., 2016). It’s more challenging to release vision statements and less
likely that objectives will be achieved when there’s a major power difference inside a business.
Team leaders should be mindful that when there are clear levels of authority, employees are less
likely to speak out inside SCDC. Therefore, managers should flatten their organizations in an effort
to level the playing field. Companies with flatter organizational structures are better able to
communicate their mission and values to all employees. If managers want to keep their teams from
becoming lost in the shuffle, they shouldn’t succumb to the temptation of entirely flattening the
organizational structure. Leaders of flat teams should be aware that it may be more difficult to
coordinate the efforts of their members. Even with a flat organizational structure, some degree of
hierarchy is useful for facilitating communication and encouraging teamwork.
Managers and team leaders should be aware that the impact and efficacy of visions are
influenced by the means through which they are communicated. Leaders of groups may motivate
their followers by speaking to their shared goals and aspirations. There are a variety of strategies
that managers may use to boost their teams’ productivity. Leaders should first make sure their
teams succeed individually and as a whole. Group leaders should inspire their teams to pursue
individual as well as collective objectives. Profitability and profit margin growth are not only
5
expected of team members, but actively encouraged (Kilpatrick & Silverman, 2005). Cooperation,
cultural fluency, adaptability, and originality are all abilities that may be developed via teamwork.
The second most important thing for team leaders to do is to create and maintain open channels of
communication with their teams. For instance, because inside SCDC is a two-way flow of
information, workers may ask questions regarding the company’s purpose. When there is open
communication between management and staff, employees may wonder about the latter’s goals.
In conclusion, leaders with a focus on the long term should encourage their staff to use
unconventional approaches to addressing problems and making decisions.
Leaders shouldn’t just create their own goals up. The best ideas usually come from group
efforts at work. Managers should encourage employees to consider novel solutions when faced
with a problem. Leaders may energize followers to believe in and work for a common goal.
Leaders may foster staff buy-in for new ideas by using a conversational approach (Jantz, 2017).
Involving workers in strategic decision-making has been shown to increase motivation and job
satisfaction. Participation in SCDC such activities may increase employee motivation and work
satisfaction by making employees feel appreciated by the company and their superiors. Employees
are more invested in their job when they can see the bigger picture of how it contributes to the
business or the project.
The ability of company executives to effectively convey their vision to employees and
customers is crucial to the company’s success. Managers of groups should be mindful that the
people they choose to steer their groups toward their goals will have various degrees of success.
Leaders may motivate their colleagues in a variety of ways, such as via team building exercises,
goal setting, setting a good example, and providing intellectual stimulation. Managers should
also give their staff members a say in developing the company’s strategic plan (Kantabutra &
6
Avery, 2010). Leaders may help their teams develop professionally by giving everyone a say in
the decisions that matter most to the business. This collaborative approach ensures that leaders
and their followers are aiming in the same direction.
The capacity to articulate compelling visions for change is crucial to the success of
organizational transformation. Team leaders should take into account the team’s members,
structure, and channels of communication while developing mission for SCDC. Leaders in flat
organizations may be better able to inspire their teams by sharing appealing ideas for the future.
Leaders and their teams are more committed and enthusiastic when they have a common goal for
the future. Leaders may benefit from their teams’ input to help shape and refine their ideas.
Furthermore, leaders should use a strategy of two-way communication to guarantee that their
followers understand the material presented to them.
7
References
Gulati, R., Mikhail, O., Morgan, R., & Sittig, D. (2016). Vision statement quality and
organizational performance in U.S. hospitals. Journal of Healthcare Management, 61(5),
335-350.
Jantz, R. C. (2017). Vision, innovation, and leadership in research libraries. Library &
Information Science Research, 39(3), 234-241.
Kantabutra, S., & Avery, G. (2010). The power of vision: Statements that resonate. Journal of
Business Strategy, 31(1), 37-45.
Kilpatrick, A., & Silverman, L. (2005). The power of vision. Strategy & Leadership, 33(2), 2426.
Kotter, J. P., & Cohen, D. S. (2012). The heart of change: Real-life stories of how people change
their organizations. Harvard Business Press.
1
Team Building
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
October 3, 2023
2
Team Building
The necessity for change is a constant in the dynamic environment of today’s enterprises.
Organizational change is essential for keeping competitive and relevant, whether it’s to adjust to
market developments, adopt new technology, or react to changing client needs. However, change
is not something that can be accomplished alone; rather, it calls for the establishment of an
experienced and unified leadership group. The success or failure of the change program hinges on
the performance of this team, since they are its driving force and engine. In this research, will
explore the critical function of a leadership team in bringing about organizational transformation.
It emphasizes the importance of personal drive and motivation but also the transforming potential
of a well-organized and inspired team. This paper intends to empower organizational leaders with
the insights and techniques required to build a leading team that not only starts change, but also
ensures its success by focusing on five important components.
Displaying Enthusiasm and Dedication
Leaders must be enthusiastic and committed to reform. These attributes spark collective
imagination and dedication. Leadership enthusiasm and determination will decide the reform
effort’s success or failure. My unwavering belief in the idea has helped the team realize its
potential. When I exhibit excitement for the task, team members are more motivated and engaged.
One person’s zeal may inspire others to join the cause. My purpose is to share my passion in many
3
ways. Frequent meetings or workshops may discuss the change initiative’s goals, benefits, and
business impacts. I’ll use stories to connect with my team and show our potential. I’ll also
emphasize personal-corporate alignment. I may motivate my team by stressing the learning,
growth, and promotion possibilities the transformation effort will give. I’ll also listen to the team’s
feedback to demonstrate my commitment (Wade & Macpherson, 2016). My commitment to the
initiative’s success proves my words. I will set the tone by working hard and boldly tackling
difficulties. I aim to inspire individuals to gladly join our change path via open communication,
achievement recognition, and a shared purpose.
Modeling Trust and Teamwork
Effective team-wide change management requires trust. Trust encourages honest
discussion, collaboration, and less resistance throughout transitions. If team members don’t trust
one other, they may be hesitant to speak out and stall the change effort. I will always be honest in
my actions and words to exemplify workplace trust and collaboration. Transparency requires
sharing information about the change, its reasons, and its impacts. I define consistency as acting
on my claims. Showing my passion for the transition will build my team’s trust (Wade &
Macpherson, 2016). I will listen and consider my colleagues’ opinions. I want to create an openminded team where everyone feels comfortable speaking out. All members are heard and cherished
in our community. Through teamwork and contribution, I wish to demonstrate the way (Masys,
2018). I’ll emphasize collaboration above individual success. This approach encourages
collaboration and stresses our shared goal. I’ll outline everyone’s duties and explain how they fit
into the transformation effort to foster collaboration and friendship. The team will meet
periodically to review progress, raise concerns, and celebrate triumphs. Encourage peer support
and praise to boost cooperation.
4
Structuring the Team
Structuring the change team effectively is pivotal to the success of any organizational
transformation. This section outlines the key roles and responsibilities within the change team,
emphasizes the importance of diversity and inclusion, and delves into the criteria and process for
selecting team members.
Key Roles and Responsibilities
Within the change team, it’s essential to define specific roles and responsibilities to ensure clarity
and accountability.
•
The leader of a change effort is the one who takes the reins, creates the long-term strategy,
and directs the team.
•
Those who are most invested in the success of the change inside their own organizations
will serve as “change champions” to inspire and inform their colleagues.
•
Project Managers- Those responsible for managing the schedule, resources, and outcomes
of the change plan on a day-to-day basis.
•
People who have extensive experience or training in a particular field relevant to the
transition at hand.
•
Specialists in communications are those whose job it is to create and disseminate messages
about organizational transformation to both internal and external audiences.
Diversity and Inclusion
Diversity and inclusiveness are essential for a productive and creative workforce. This necessitates
taking into account individual differences in gender, race/ethnicity, age, experience, and expertise
5
while putting together a team. Greater innovation and improved problem-solving may result from
giving equal weight to differing points of view. Making everyone feel like they belong and have a
stake in the team’s success is what we mean when we talk about inclusion.
Criteria and Selection Process
•
Expertise and skills relevant to the change initiative.
•
A demonstrated commitment to the organization’s values and goals.
•
The ability to collaborate effectively and adapt to change.
•
Strong communication and interpersonal skills.
•
A track record of being a positive influence within the organization.
Nominations should be sought, credentials evaluated, interviews conducted, and fit with the team’s
culture and goals evaluated as part of the selection process. It has to be open, impartial, and
consistent with the aims and principles of the business. Successfully negotiating the complexity of
change requires assembling a diverse, talented, and motivated team.
Injecting Energy into the Group
Motivation and energy are essential for a change team to drive and sustain change successfully. In
this section, we will explore techniques for keeping the team motivated and energized, addressing
potential resistance or skepticism, and maintaining momentum and enthusiasm over time.
Techniques for Motivation and Energy
•
Start by making sure the team understands the change initiative’s main aim and why it’s
vital. When they perceive their contributions to the company’s success, employees work
harder.
6
•
Maintain communication and ensure everyone understands. Regular updates on progress,
milestones, and successes inspire team members.
•
Honor the team’s efforts and achievement with an award. Giving team members
recognition for their individual and collective achievements enhances morale and
motivates them.
•
Let teammates make choices within their area of responsibility. Team members that have
input on the project are more likely to care about its result.
•
Training and advancement: provide them the opportunity to learn and grow. Investment in
your team’s professional progress shows gratitude and commitment to their success.
Handling Resistance or Skepticism
•
In the face of team members’ doubts or objections, it’s important to listen attentively to
their points of view. Try to put yourself in their shoes and demonstrate empathy. There
may be good reasons for the opposition’s vehement attitude.
•
Knowledge and Learning: Explain the rationale for the shift and its anticipated advantages
in a way that is both obvious and convincing. Clear up any misunderstandings and make
sure everyone on the team has the data they need to make smart choices.
•
Participation & Involvement: Team members should be included in all relevant changerelated decision-making and problem-solving. When given a voice in decision-making,
individuals are more inclined to support proposed reforms.
•
Find and use the team’s “change champions” to persuade the minds of any skeptics. These
leaders may inspire others by recounting their triumphs and providing examples of
constructive behavior.
7
Maintaining Momentum and Enthusiasm
Plan periodic team meetings in which progress can be evaluated, accomplishments can be
celebrated, and problems can be discussed. Focus and energy may be preserved via these
gatherings.
I.
Flexibility: -Be ready to make adjustments to the transformation strategy in light of
feedback and new information. Maintaining motivation and avoiding exhaustion,
flexibility is essential.
II.
Learning Never Stops-: Foster a mindset that is always looking for new ways to develop.
Drive home the point that going through a transition may be a learning experience on many
levels.
III.
Mark Significant Achievements- Acknowledge and honor significant achievements when
they are reached throughout the transition. The crew is re-energized by these celebrations
of success.
IV.
Help your team members become more resilient by giving them the tools they need.
Helping team members deal with the stress and anxiety that comes with change is essential.
Avoiding Potential Pitfalls
Creating a change leadership team is complicated by the difficulty of getting everyone on the same
page. There might be opposition to the change if team members don’t understand it or buy into it.
Furthermore, internal strife and arguments within the team might slow development and deflect
attention away from the transformation goals. Disagreements about how to proceed might arise,
as can interpersonally tensions within the group. If not addressed, they may fester into a poisonous
work climate that undermines the whole reform initiative. Establishing open and honest lines of
8
communication is crucial for overcoming these difficulties. Make sure everyone on the team is on
the same page with the change’s vision and goals, and that they are all in line with the larger goals
of the business. Furthermore, create conflict resolution tactics and encourage open communication
within the team to proactively handle disputes and disagreements. Inspire your team to share their
issues in a positive way and work together to find answers that will satisfy everyone. As the team
works through the transition, they may remain on track and keep up a spirit of positivity and
cooperation by placing a premium on alignment and dispute resolution.
Conclusion
Organizations need devotion, thorough preparation, and forceful leadership to form a successful
steering committee during transformation. The leader’s enthusiasm and dedication, trust and
collaboration modeling, organizational structure development, and momentum and enthusiasm
throughout the change journey have all been examined here. It stimulates the team to work harder
and makes everyone feel invested in the result. Open conversation, engaging tales, and crediting
sources are crucial. Every effective transformation attempt relies on teamwork and trust. Direct
contact, active listening, and example may build trust. Open communication and an emphasis on
teamwork above individual successes may help individuals feel comfortable working together to
tackle change. Choose a team with diverse experience and skills to reap the advantages of several
viewpoints. Clear criteria and a transparent selection process may assist ensure team members are
committed to the transformation vision and principles. The squad must have high morale and
manage discontent. Open communication, delegation, and public acknowledgment may encourage
a team, while actively listening and including them in decision-making can help them overcome
objections.
9
References
Gupta, A., Melendez, A. T., Rosenthal, J., & Vrushabhendra, L. (2017). Implications in
Implementing Self-Managed Teams in Organizations.
Masys, A.J. (2018) ‘Teamwork and trust: A socio-technical perspective’, Trust in Military
Teams, pp. 219–249. doi:10.1201/9781315549637-12.
Salas, E., Shuffler, M. L., Thayer, A. L., Bedwell, W. L., & Lazzara, E. H. (2015).
Understanding and improving teamwork in organizations: A scientifically based practical
guide. Human Resource Management, 54(4), 599-622.
Wade, N. T., & Macpherson, A. (2016). Effective Team Building Guide.
1
Strategies for Change
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor: Dr. Adam Vaughn
September 26, 2023
2
Strategies for Change – Week 2 (Assignment 1)
Step-1- Increasing Urgency
Particularly, the need for an organization-wide sense of urgency during a change
creates the motivation needed to move away from the present state towards a new state.
Creating a sense of urgency is the first step in Kotter’s 8-step model for change. This step is
crucial to change management as the perception of urgent change results in an organization
establishing a change vision. A lack of urgency results in complacency towards proposed
changes, where there is no desire for better results. Really, urgency is key to justifying the
need for change and acting on it, immediately. Therefore, there is a need for the South
Carolina Department of Corrections (SCDC) to ensure creativity and honest communication
so as to find solutions to the areas of change required. The prerequisites for these changes
include new ideas, new ways of thinking, collaboration, continuous learning, finding
opportunities in crisis, and the implementation of innovative strategies (Friedberg &
Pregmark, 2022). Change efforts must incorporate organizational capabilities to adapt and
innovate.
The Need for Large-Scale Change at SCDC
The corrections sector is one of the three principal components of the criminal justice
system. Thus, there is a need for large-scale change at SCDC to ensure that the department
serves its purpose of retribution, deterrence, incapacitation, and rehabilitation (Russo et al.,
2017). Keller & Schaninger (2019) note that an organization must stir its staff around
enduring transformation themes and measure improvements to scale up. At SCDC, employee
turnover is attributed to the PayScale, where employees feel that the payment system does not
fully represent their efforts in the department. There is also another problem of a lack of
incentives, which is linked to reduced employee motivation and consequently lower
3
productivity. The department needs to work on ways to motivate employees and ensure high
retention in the workplace, which will definitely reflect in the levels of productivity.
Level of Urgency at SCDC
From the above problems at SCDC, there is a low level of urgency observed in
dealing with the problems. Usually, a high level of urgency ensures that there is a balance
between identifying problems, acknowledging them, and finding solutions very quickly. The
management must comprehend that creating a sense of agency has benefits for the
department’s productivity and motivation. At SCDC, employees show a high level of
resentment of the payment system, which can be attributed to the high employee turnover.
In addition, there are no incentives given to the employees to motivate them at SCDC,
leading to low morale. The organizational climate shows that the department deflects
urgency, resulting in the frustration and untrusting nature of the employees to the extent that
the levels of productivity have dropped. Urgency in solving persistent negative issues in an
organization is what is needed. In cases like these, employees make assumptions that the
management does not care about their issues. There is nothing as stressful to dedicated
employees as the management that avoids taking action on issues that have been tabled.
Dealing with the problem of insufficient urgency
First, for organizations that prioritize true urgency in solving issues they face, they see
both opportunities and threats as a chance to do better. True urgency is not just the creation of
a miracle, however, it is the need to solve issues, no matter the circumstances. This requires
hyper-alert behaviors where the management looks for ways to get things right, even if it is
just making statements that move the organization toward a positive and productive direction.
Complacency is dangerous for an organization.
4
Kotter (2008) notes that there is a need to acknowledge what is going on in the
organization and the issues being presented. Things like the productivity of the employees is
a key concern, therefore, employees and what they are doing in the organization should be
assessed carefully. Employee turnover needs to be evaluated. It is not hard to see the
happenings in an organization when there is attention to detail.
I am a naturally action-oriented person, which means whenever I observe a lack of
urgency to solve issues, I am always looking for ways to deal with the issues and make
necessary changes that will bring significant and positive impact. It is indeed frustrating to
deal with unresolved issues everyday at work. Therefore, I will ensure I am a beacon of true
agency for the department. I will help the department manager to see the reality of issues
facing the department such as low productivity and employee turnover. I will also propose a
possible solution such as coming up with a payment system that acknowledges and rewards
employees according to their efforts in the workplace. This in itself is acting with a sense of
urgency. This does not need to be in the form of lecturing the management or confronting
them, but rather showing them what needs to be done. The aim is to create urgency by
addressing the root causes of the issues and deviating the focus from the symptoms. For
instance, some questions to ask can include•
Why are employees resentful?
•
What is affecting the levels of productivity in the department?
•
Why do employees show low morale?
These questions are a good starting point for establishing a good attitude in resolving
the issues in the department. They reflect why it is important to attack the causes of the issues
rather than what the symptoms are and link the insufficient urgency to the results that the
department is trying to achieve. It is like an opportunity in crisis. Furthermore, I will steer
5
honest conversations about the issues the department is facing. Task clarification is important
for enhancing communication with the rest of the departmental staff. It is important to avoid
going off as it may make issues worse and harm the management’s need for activating a sense
of agency. The management must fully grasp the effects of the proposed changes and the real
consequences when no action is taken. In addition, recognize the effects of rewarding positive
changes taken by employees, which demonstrates that moving forward is beneficial for them.
6
References
Fredberg, T., & Pregmark, J. E. (2022). Organizational transformation: Handling the doubleedged sword of urgency. Long Range Planning, 55(2), 102091.
Keller, S., & Schaninger, B. (2019). A better way to lead large-scale change. McKinsey &
Company, 251-220.
Kotter, J. P. (2008). An astonishing lack of urgency (and what you can do about it). Harvard
Business Review. Retrieved from https://hbr.org/2008/10/an-astonishing-lack-ofurgency
Russo, J., Drake, G. B., Shaffer, J. S., & Jackson, B. A. (2017). Envisioning an alternative
future for the corrections sector within the US criminal justice system. Rand
Corporation.
1
Stage for Change in South Carolina Department Corrections
Staci Barfield
BUS575 Strategies for Change
Instructor Dr. Adam Vaughn
September 19, 2023
2
Set the Stage for Change South Carolina Department Corrections
Humans have a natural tendency to prefer established ways of doing things, so it’s understandable
that there may be times when the idea of making a change doesn’t appeal. Companies, remarkably,
all have a similar resistance to change, based on the mistaken notion that their tried-and-true
practices are best. However, in today’s unrelenting corporate scene, change continues to be
unyieldingly rapid, resisting stasis. The very nature of the world is in a constant state of flux, as
shown by demographic shifts, changing tastes among consumers, new discoveries in science and
technology, and a dynamic and ever-evolving economic system. Companies that refuse to change
run the danger of becoming irrelevant in today’s economy (Von Treuer et al., 2018). This paper
will examine the areas within the South Carolina Department of Corrections that need change in
further detail here. In addition, will discuss practical measures the organization may take to aid in
and enhance the change process, so ensuring its continuous viability and efficacy in an everevolving global environment.
South Carolina Department Corrections (SCDC)
The PayScale system was one of the crucial areas where adjustments needed to be made inside the
company. Employee salary is mostly determined by the PayScale, which takes into account factors
including a worker’s rank, length of service, and the difficulty of their job responsibilities, among
others (Temgire & Joshi, 2021). Unfortunately, this company failed to fully realize the benefits of
PayScale, which resulted in resentment among workers who felt their pay did not fairly represent
their efforts. The result was a higher rate of employee turnover as a whole. To forestall more
departures and strengthen the company as a whole, it became clear that the PayScale system needed
to be adjusted.
3
There was also an absence of incentives; workers were not provided with any extra prizes. Reduced
employee motivation is typically linked to a lack of incentives, which in turn leads to lower
productivity and worse quality work. Incentives are crucial in encouraging workers to give their
all at work. To make up for this deficiency, the company should implement a tiered incentive
scheme, rewarding top performers more than those who produce just adequate performance. This
method guarantees that all workers are motivated to work hard for more pay, which improves
productivity as a whole. In addition, the company needed a thorough plan for keeping its current
staff members.
Successful retention strategies focus on keeping excellent employees while also effectively
controlling attrition. Those with longer tenures in the company should be given preference when
making retention choices. Experience and, by extension, quality, increase with time on the job.
South Carolina Department of Corrections has to establish efficient techniques in the area of
personnel retention in order to reap the rewards of doing so (Packard, 2021). The South Carolina
Department of Corrections was chosen for this research on purpose because its recent history is
illustrative of the kinds of revolutionary transformations seen at similar institutions. Several
operational procedures may be implemented
Write Literature review about Supply chain topic. literature review must be written as per the following: 3 pages for the review and the 4th page for references. You must at least review 10 research articles. APA citation style. 12 size Times New Roman font. 500 words per page (except the reference page). work will be checked for plagiarism. Thus, any plagiarism will not be accepted.
The persuasive speech/ pitch assignment will provide you with the opportunity to demonstrate your ability to craft effective arguments, address counter arguments, and provide credible evidence to support your points. You will research, organize, and prepare a 7-8 minute persuasive speech or pitch on a topic or idea of your choice. It is around 4-5 pages.
This speech is an opportunity to be as creative, innovative, or passionate as you want, but the topic must be academically rigorous and/ or relevant in either or social, political, or cultural sphere that involves the creation of, elimination of, or maintenance of a policy. Use the “Persuasive Speech Questionnaire” to help you.
The topic is whether it is necessary to ban children under 18 from playing violent video games.
Your specific purpose statement will include your scenario in three parts: who we (the audience) are, who you are, and the situation/ place where your argument is taking place.
– Example: The audience is made up of city council members, you are a concerned citizen, and you are arguing for a specific policy change.
– Example: The audience is made up of Disney executives, you are an Imagineer, we are at a meeting regarding the future direction of Galaxy’s Edge in Disneyland
Include at least 4 sources as evidence/ research in your speech. When building your reasoned arguments, it is up to you to decide what is most persuasive, but you should rely on some mixture of propositions of fact, propositions of value, and/ or propositions of policy.
In addition, please give me the outline
Speech content/preparation outline: This will be a typed formal outline that follow’s Monroe’s Motivated Sequence. The outline will include:
-Topic, General Purpose Statement, Specific Purpose Statement, Thesis
-introduction/attention step
-3 Main points/ the need, the satisfaction, the visualization (and their support with corresponding citations)
– Conclusion/ the action appeal.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Name : _ ____________________
Topic: _____ ______________________________________
Policy: ________ ________________________________________________
1. Prove that what you want to discuss is a real problem. How do you know? Share
some facts/proof. What source(s) did you use?
2. What is your stance on the issue and how will you get the majority of your
audience to care about it?
3. What changes to the policy will you suggest that you believe will help solve the
issue?
4. What are people who disagree with you saying about the issue (A.K.A. The
Counterargument)? Have you watched or read at least one segment or article from a
news source that contradicts what you believe?
5. Why do you personally care about the issue? How do you know this is an
educated concern rather than an emotional opinion on a topic?
6. What personal biases have you considered in choosing this topic? We all are
prone to bias, however, many people struggle to acknowledge them. This is
important to always address in any argument.
You are a staff accountant for a regional CPA firm, Earnest & Wilson, CPAs. Vera Simmons, a long-time client, calls you regarding an accident her husband was in early last year. Vera’s husband, Walter, was sitting in his car waiting for a red light to change when he was rear-ended by a drunk driver. He spent months in the hospital, has significant medical problems, and will require ongoing care and treatment. His attorney sued the drunk driver who, luckily, was insured. Walter and Vera are in negotiations in an attempt to settle the suit. You have spoken to her about the accident in the past, but this call is about a possible legal settlement for damages
The insurance company, Wayward Casualty, has offered $1.5 million allocated as follows:
Pain and Suffering $250,000
Lost Wages $200,000
Medical Costs (past & future) $650,000
Punitive Damages $400,000
Vera also explained they will receive interest from the date of the accident to the date of settlement at 7%.
Walter and Vera believe the settlement is reasonable. However, in order to make a decision, she would like to understand the tax consequences of the proposed settlement. She would like you to write a letter so they can review it in detail with the attorney.
Be sure to address each specific allocation item noting whether it is taxable or not. Also, address whether Vera can take a deduction for any medical costs that are reimbursed. Provide references and support for your conclusions.
Other Assignment Guidance
Address:
Mr. and Mrs. Walter Simmons
1900 Pennsylvania Avenue
San Diego, California 92101
Assume that your letter is written on the letterhead of your firm, Earnest & Wilson, CPAs
Use single-spaced, 1” margins, 12-point font in professional business letter format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Federal Tax Coordinator 2d ¶J-5801. Exclusion of income for damages received for
personal physical injury.
The amount of any damages (see text at footnote 2 et seq., below) received on account of personal
physical injuries or physical sickness is excluded from gross income.
1
The term “damages” means an amount received (other than workers’ compensation, see ¶ J-5816.1 ),
through prosecution of a legal suit or action, or through a settlement agreement entered into in lieu of
prosecution.
2
The exclusion applies whether the damages are received by suit or agreement.
3
The exclusion can apply to damages recovered for a physical injury or sickness under a statute, even if
that statute does not provide for a broad range of remedies, and even if the injury is not defined as a tort
4
under state or common law. Thus, damages awarded under no-fault statutes can be eligible for the
exclusion.
5
Damages can be excluded whether received as a lump sum or as periodic payments.
6
Damages, for purposes of the exclusion described above, do not include:
. . . punitive damages (see ¶ J-5815 );
7
. . . amounts received as workers’ compensation; or
8
. . . compensation for pain and suffering resulting from the consensual performance of a service
contract (in the case at issue, to undergo egg donation procedures).
8.1
However, if an action has its origin in a physical injury or physical sickness, then all damages (other than
punitive damages) that flow from that injury or sickness are treated as payments received on account of
physical injury or physical sickness.
9
RIA illustration 1: Damages (other than punitive damages) received by an individual on account
of a claim for loss of consortium due to the physical injury or physical sickness of that individual’s
spouse are excluded from gross income.
10
Damages received on account of personal nonphysical injuries or nonphysical sickness are not excluded
from gross income.
11
Thus, damages received based on a claim of employment discrimination, or injury to
reputation, are not excluded from gross income.
12
Emotional Distress.
Emotional distress is not considered a physical injury or physical sickness for purposes of the exclusion
from income of damages received on account of physical injury or physical sickness.
13
Thus, damages
received on account of emotional distress are not excluded from gross income under Code Sec. 104(a)(2)
(except as provided in the text at footnote 19, below).
14
RIA illustration 2: The exclusion from gross income for damages on account of injuries or
sickness does not apply to any damages received based on a claim of employment discrimination, or
injury to reputation, accompanied by a claim of emotional distress.
15
The term “emotional distress” includes physical symptoms (e.g., insomnia, headaches, stomach
disorders) that can result from the emotional distress.
16
Thus, depression, sleep disorders, or high blood
sugar caused by an individual’s stress from a wrongful termination were not considered personal physical
injury or physical sickness, and were not excluded from his gross income.
17
Similarly, emotional distress
damages for injury to human capital were damages received on account of personal nonphysical injuries
or nonphysical sickness, and not excluded from gross income.
18
However, damages for emotional distress are excluded from gross income to the extent the damages are
either:
(a) attributable to a physical injury or physical sickness; or
19
(b) not in excess of the amount paid for medical care (as described in Code Sec. 213(d)(1)(A) or
(B), see ¶ K-2100 ) and attributable to emotional distress.
20
In this context, the term “damages”
means an amount received (other than workers’ compensation) through prosecution of a legal suit
or action, or through a settlement agreement entered into in lieu of prosecution.
20.1
A settlement payment for illness and medical expenses was not excludable from gross income where a
taxpayer claimed that she suffered from emotional distress symptoms resulting from her depression that
were exacerbated by her wrongful termination. Here, the taxpayer failed to provide evidence that her
physical symptoms of depression were severe enough to rise to the level of a physical injury or physical
sickness.
20.2
Establishing the exclusion.
Whether damages are received on account of personal injury is determined by examining the substance of
the claim, the evidence and arguments presented,
21
and the intent of the payor.
22
RIA observation: Although Fono and Wade (footnotes 21 and 22, above) were decided before
the exclusion for personal injuries was restricted to physical injuries, it seems that the approach to
determining whether damages are for excludable injuries would remain the same.
When a settlement agreement clearly stated that sums paid were compensation for physical injuries and
damages, and/or emotional injuries and damages, the damages received were not excludable from gross
income.
23
Evidence revealing that an emotional distress settlement allocation was motivated, in part, to avoid tax
liability and was devoid of any causal physical injury link, led to the conclusion that the damages received
were not excludable from income.
24
For the effect of the nature of the claims presented on the allocation of lump-sum settlements, see
¶ J-5810 .
Reg § 1.401-1(c) discussed above (in the text at footnotes 3, 4, 8, and 19 through 20.1, above) applies to
damages paid pursuant to a written binding agreement, court decree, or mediation award entered into, or
issued after, Sept. 13, ’95, and received after Jan. 23, 2012. The taxpayers also can apply these regs to
damages under a written binding agreement, court decree, or mediation award entered into or issued after
Sept. 13, 1995, and received after Aug. 20, ’96. If applying these regs to damages received after Aug. 20,
’96, results in an overpayment of tax, the taxpayer can file a claim for refund before the expiration of the
period of limitations for refund claims under Code Sec. 6511 (see ¶ T-7501 et seq.). To qualify for a refund
of tax on damages paid after August 20, ’96, under a written binding agreement, court decree, or mediation
award entered into or issued after Sept. 13, 1995, a taxpayer must satisfy the requirements of §1605 of the
Small Business Job Protection Act of 1996, (SBJPA, PL 104-188).
25
RIA observation: SBJPA §1605 generally amended Code Sec. 104 by repealing the exclusion for
punitive damages and for damages not attributable to physical injuries or physical sickness.
In reversing a district court decision, the Ninth Circuit held (in an unpublished opinion) that if the district
court were to determine that a certain percentage of settlement proceeds had been paid on account of
physical injury, that percentage would apply to the entire settlement, including the amount retained by the
attorney. The Ninth Circuit also said that the district court had erred by failing to consider whether the
taxpayer would be entitled to any deductions for her attorney’s fees and litigation costs relating to the
underlying state court settlement, which may have reduced her overall tax burden for the tax year at issue.
As IRS conceded, any taxable component of the award would generate a (potential) deduction for the
corresponding portion of the attorney’s fee.
25.5
Tax-free recoveries for personal injuries have included damages for:
. . . death of naval officer killed as the result of incident involving the U.S.S. Liberty on June 8, ’67,
received by widow.
26
. . . payments to Vietnam veterans or survivors of deceased veterans from the Agent Orange
Settlement Fund, since the payments are made due to sickness or disability resulting from
exposure by the Vietnam veterans to agent orange during their tours of duty in Vietnam.
27
. . . genuine injuries sustained by the taxpayer/president (who, together with his wife, were the
corporation’s controlling shareholders) in the course of his employment. IRS unsuccessfully argued
that the payment was in part compensation for personal services and in part a dividend. While
acknowledging that the parties did not deal at arm’s length, the court found that both the taxpayer
and the corporation sought the advice of independent counsel, and that they relied on the advice in
good faith.
28
. . . an ex-employee’s settlement payment for allegations that work-related stress exacerbated a
physical condition.
29
. . . compensatory damages paid to a taxpayer received to settle tort claims where the
circumstances, including a substantial passage of time since the alleged tort and the fact that the
taxpayer was a minor at that time, rendered it reasonable for IRS to presume that the compensation
was for the taxpayer’s personal physical injuries, and that all damages for emotional distress were
attributable to the physical injuries.
30
. . . compensatory damages received by an exonerated prisoner under state legislation enacted to
compensate wrongfully incarcerated individuals for their physical injuries, sickness, and economic
losses flowing from their injuries and sickness.
31
RIA caution: Chief Counsel Advice 201045023
(above) was issued before the enactment of Code Sec. 139F (see ¶ J-5850 et seq.) which excludes
from gross income amounts received for wrongful incarceration. The exclusion under Code Sec. 139F
isn’t limited to physical injuries, sickness, and economic losses flowing from injury and sickness.
. . . one-half of an ex-employee’s settlement payment where, notwithstanding that the underlying
claim was based on the tort of intentional infliction of emotional distress, his physical injuries were
the overriding focus of his complaint and figured prominently among the damages for which the
settlement payment was made.
32
. . . a 10% portion of a payment received in settlement of a workers’ compensation claim where the
taxpayer showed that the 10% portion was attributable to the taxpayer’s personal physical injury,
even though the payment was not excludable under Code Sec. 104(a)(1) for failing to satisfy the
requirement that it be “received under a workers’ compensation act ( ¶ H-1351 and ¶ H-1352 ).
32.1
. . . physical injury or smoke inhalation suffered by victims in an incident that was settled by a joint
prosecution agreement.
32.2
The exclusion from income for damages received on account of physical injuries or physical sickness
(footnote 1, above) applies to awards, whether received as a lump sum or periodic payments, under § 406
of the Air Transportation Safety and System Stabilization Act (ATS Act) of compensation to any individual
physically injured and to the personal representative of any individual killed as a result of the
terrorist-related airline crashes of Sept. 11, 2001, as well as to successor beneficiaries of claimants who
die before the entire amount of the reward is paid out.
33
The following amounts were NOT tax-free recoveries for personal injuries:
. . . $70,000 in damages awarded by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) to a
postal worker. The EEOC’s decision stated clearly that the damages were for emotional distress
attributable to discrimination on the job.
33.3
. . . a payment from a state’s worker’s compensation plan that was made pursuant to a domestic
relations order to the ex-spouse of a state employee who was disabled on the job. Neither the Code
nor the regs provide an exclusion from income for amounts paid to former spouses pursuant to a
domestic relations order.
33.5
. . . wages awarded the taxpayer by a jury for his claim that his employer discriminated against him
under the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) by failing to make a workplace accommodation for
him for personal injuries he sustained on the job. Although the taxpayer’s claim would not have
arisen “but for” the injuries, the court stated that the taxpayer’s attempt to turn “what was clearly just
an ADA action into…a personal physical injury claim is a bit of a stretch, to say the least.”
34
. . . payment received to settle a wrongful dismissal suit where the taxpayer lost her job after a
difficult pregnancy. The taxpayer argued that the payment was for physical injuries sustained
during the pregnancy, but there was no reference to injury or sickness in the settlement agreement.
35
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s claims against her insurance company for false sales
practices, where the complaint contained no particularized allegations regarding personal injury,
and merely mentioned emotional harm. The release did not allocate any amount to personal injury,
and the insurance company’s fear of punitive damages motivated it to settle.
36
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s employment discrimination claim. The agreement
stated that the payment was for the taxpayer’s resignation and dropping of all civil rights claims.
The standard form filed by the taxpayer to resign was attached to the agreement, and stated she
was resigning for medical reasons. However, there was no reference to, or mention of, this in the
agreement, and the taxpayer was separately pursuing a worker’s compensation claim on these
issues. Thus, the court held the settlement payment was not compensation for physical injuries or
sickness.
37
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s sexual harassment claim in which she sued for mental
anguish and humiliation. The court stated that the payment was in part for emotional distress, but
the taxpayer failed to establish a physical element to the injury.
38
. . . payment to an employee under a settlement agreement that stated that the employer-bank had
entered the agreement “for the exclusive purpose of avoiding the expense and inconvenience of
further litigation.” The employee, who complained of stress and anxiety after losing his position for
reporting an alleged violation of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, had sued under the whistleblower
provision of that Act.
38.1
. . . payment received to settle a variety of commercial claims, e.g., for fraud, where the taxpayer
failed to show a link between the losses for which he was compensated and any personal injuries or
illness suffered around the same time.
39
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit brought for wrongful discharge, intimidation, coercion, and
harassment under a state workmen’s compensation statute. Under Reg § 1.104-1(c) (footnote 3,
above), the term “damages received” includes amounts received other than workmen’s
compensation. Since the petitioner’s settlement was not for other than workmen’s compensation,
the settlement was not excludable from gross income.
40
. . . payment that was for “exemplary damages,” defined as an example to others and as a penalty
or by way of punishment, was deemed to represent punitive damages, and was not excludable
from gross income.
41
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit filed in state court by a professor against the university that
had employed him, seeking damages for age discrimination, invasion of privacy, defamation,
intentional infliction of emotional distress, and loss of consortium. The evidence of the payor’s intent
for making the payment indicated that the university intended to buy out the professor’s tenured
contract and did not intend to compensate him or his spouse for their personal injuries or for
abandoning their tort claims.
42
. . . payment received to settle an age discrimination lawsuit. The evidence of the payor’s intent
indicated that no part of the settlement paid to the employee was compensation for physical injury
or physical sickness, and the employee made no allegation that the damages were paid for medical
care.
43
. . . payment received to settle an age discrimination lawsuit. The settlement agreement did not
apportion any part of the settlement proceeds to physical injury or physical sickness.
44
. . . payment received to settle an age discrimination lawsuit where the employer treated the
payment as wages subject to withholding.
44.1
. . . payment received to settle a sexual harassment/discrimination law suit against an employer.
The employee did not allege physical injury or sickness in his complaint, but the settlement
agreement was broad and encompassed all possible causes of action, including physical injuries.
However, there was no allocation of a specific amount of the settlement as compensation for
physical injuries or physical sickness. Accordingly, without the allocation, no amount of the
settlement proceeds was excludable from income.
45
. . . payment received to settle a racial discrimination and unlawful retaliation law suit against an
ex-employer where (1) the complaint placed little emphasis on the employee’s physical sickness,
(2) settlement agreement did not allocate any amounts specifically to physical injuries or sickness,
and (3) the employer did not intend for the payments to be in satisfaction of the employee’s claims
of physical sickness. Thus, the employee failed to prove that any portion of the payment received
under the settlement agreement was to compensate him for physical sickness, and was not
excludable as damages for physical injuries or sickness.
45.1
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit filed in federal court by a secretary against her employer
who had refused to act on complaints of racially offensive jokes and slurs at work, and had
attempted to discourage any complaints of discrimination. The settlement agreement stated that
the payment was intended as compensation for emotional distress. Thus, the payment was not
excludable as damages for physical injuries or sickness even if the taxpayer experienced
headaches, insomnia, and stomach disorders, since Congress intended that these physical
symptoms be treated as emotional distress (see discussion at footnote 19, above).
46
. . . payment received in settlement of gender-based discrimination and unlawful retaliation against
an ex-employer, where express language in the settlement agreement stated that the payment was
to be paid as damages for emotional distress due to depression. Accordingly, the payment not
being attributable to physical injury or sickness, but to a nonphysical injury (namely, claims of
suffering gender-based discrimination and unlawful retaliation with respect to employment), was
not excludable from income.
47
. . . payment received in settlement of discrimination and wrongful termination claims against an
ex-employer, where the settlement agreement expressly attributed the payment to emotional
distress and mental suffering. Thus, the payment was not excludable as damages for physical
injuries or sickness.
48
. . . payment received in settlement of a sexual harassment lawsuit by a financial analyst against
her ex-employer, where express language in the settlement agreement stated that the payment
was for damages on account of her emotional distress and not as a result of a physical injury or
physical sickness. Thus, the payment was not excludable from the taxpayer’s income as damages
for physical injuries or sickness.
49
. . . payment received in settlement of various employment related claims by a professor against a
university, where the settlement agreement expressly stated that the university would pay the
settlement proceeds for emotional distress damages only. Thus, the payment was not excludable
as damages for physical injuries.
49.1
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit filed in federal court by a school superintendent against the
school district and school board members who had prematurely terminated his employment
contract. Because the taxpayer had requested compensatory and punitive damages, the court held
that he had sought damages for economic injury, rather than personal injury. Thus the payment
was not excludable as damages for personal injury or sickness.
50
. . . payment received in settlement of a lawsuit filed by an employee alleging various forms of
employment-related claims against the employer, including allegations of “financial loss, and
mental and physical pain and suffering.” The settlement agreement referred to wages, penalties,
and attorney’s fees, but not to any personal injuries or sickness suffered by the employee. The
court held that the employee sought damages based solely on economic injury, rather than
personal injury.
1
. . . payment received in settlement of a lawsuit filed by employee an alleging various forms of
employment-related claims against the employer, including allegations of sex discrimination and
retaliation. The taxpayer claimed that she was exposed to pesticides during her work, and suffered
both physical injuries, including respiratory damage and headaches, and emotional distress,
including mental trauma and memory loss. However, her complaint did not allege that emotional
distress arose from physical injuries, but alleged that emotional distress, anxiety and stress arose
from other grounds in the complaint (e.g., emotional distress attributable to unlawful employment
discrimination based on sex). The settlement agreement expressly allocated the damages paid as
compensation for emotional distress damages only and for attorneys’ fees. There was also was no
evidence that the taxpayer had incurred any expenses in the tax year at issue for medical care
attributable to her emotional distress. Thus, there was no basis for the taxpayer to exclude any
portion of the payment as damages for personal injury or sickness.
2
. . . payment received in settlement of a class action lawsuit filed by U.S. Air Force Officers,
including the taxpayer, who was a member of the class. The complaint had alleged violation of
equal-protection rights by the U.S. Air Force. The settlement agreement stipulated that the
lump-sum payment the taxpayer received was not compensation for physical injuries or physical
sickness. Thus, he could not exclude the payment as damages for personal injury or sickness.
3
. . . payment received to settle a class action brought by employees and former employees against
an employer to recover overtime compensation and liquidated damages under the applicable labor
law. The taxpayer claimed that his excessive work load had caused physical and mental injuries,
but did not bring this claim to the attention of the employer or its attorneys in connection with the
class action. However, even though the settlement agreement provided that “all settlement
proceeds are paid to plaintiffs on account of personal injuries,” this language was held to be
inconsistent with the other provisions of the agreement that clearly indicated that the settlement
was intended to satisfy the claims for back pay and other damages made in the class action.
4
. . . mediation payments received to settle an employer’s violation of Michigan’s “whistleblower”
provision for damages allegedly suffered by an employee where the employee did not (1) incur any
medical expenses, (2) consult with a medical professional, or (3) inform his employer of any
physical injury or sickness.
5
. . . payment received to settle an employer’s violation of Texas’ “whistleblower” provision. The
settlement agreement, rendered in conjunction with a jury verdict, referred to “additional damages”
but did not allocate any of the payment to personal injury or sickness. The Tax Court concluded that
the payments were intended as a substitute for punitive damages and interest, but labeled
otherwise for public policy reasons.
6
. . . payment received to settle a landlord’s retaliatory eviction against a tenant. The complaint
requested damages attributable to economic loss as well as physical and emotional injuries. The
jury’s award, however, divided the damages only by the designations “actual” and “non-economic.”
The Tax Court concluded that given the manner in which the jury award was allocated, the actual
damages portion obviously related to financial or economic losses the taxpayer had suffered as a
result of the retaliatory eviction, and so were not excludable from the taxpayer’s income.
6.1
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit against Santa Clara county, in which the complaint alleged
(1) violation of California’s “whistleblower” provision, (2) infliction of emotional distress, and (3)
defamation. The settlement agreement defined a very general reference to the taxpayer’s claims
against the county and did not allocate between tort or tortlike claims. Further, the taxpayer failed to
demonstrate that the payment she received from the county was on account of personal physical
injuries or physical sickness. The Tax Court held that, absent proof of a specific payment for tortlike
personal physical injuries or physical sickness, no portion of the settlement proceeds was
excludable from the taxpayer’s income.
7
. . . payment received to settle a lawsuit in which the initial complaint to recover compensation
under a contract to perform scientific research as an independent contractor was later amended to
add a claim for damages to the taxpayer’s health. The settlement agreement referred to the
taxpayer’s claims for emotional distress and personal injury, but did not specifically allocate any of
the payment towards settlement of these claims. Even though the personal injury claim was added
at the suggestion of the state court trial judge to expedite settlement, the Tax Court characterized
the references to personal injuries in the settlement documents as tax-motivated language that did
not reflect the economic realities of the settlement.
8
. . . payment received to settle a sex discrimination and harassment claim against an employer. The
settlement agreement did not allocate any part of the settlement payment to personal physical
injury or sickness. Even though the taxpayer testified that the employer’s actions had aggravated a
pre-existing medical condition, there was no corroborating evidence that the taxpayer’s maladies
constituted a physical injury or physical sickness caused by the employer’s conduct.
9
. . . payment that was part of a severance package received in exchange for the release by the
taxpayer of all claims against his employer, including claims of personal injury. The taxpayer
claimed that part of the payment was excludable from income because the only actual or potential
claim he had against the employer was for a personal physical injury (carpal tunnel syndrome).
However, the release did not allocate portions of the payment among the large number of claims
being released. Also, the taxpayer’s signing of a standardized release form used in the termination
of a number of employees indicated that the payment was not on account of personal injuries.
10
. . . payment received in settlement of an employee’s lawsuit against an employer alleging violation
of state law through the use of video and audio surveillance at the workplace, invasion of privacy,
and intentional infliction of emotional distress. The payor’s intent in making the payment could not
be determined from the settlement agreement, which did not allocate the award to any specific
types of damages. Also, the taxpayer conceded in the pre-trial stipulation of facts that no portion of
the settlement proceeds was paid on account of personal physical injuries or physical sickness.
11
. . . payment received to settle a sex discrimination and racial harassment claim against an
employer. The intent of the payor in making the payment could not be determined by the settlement
agreement, which released all claims against the employer and did not mention physical injury or
sickness. Also, there was no evidence linking the settlement proceeds to physical injury or sickness
sustained by the employee.
12
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s suit against Universal Studios for racial harassment
and discrimination. No physical injury was involved.
13
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s “reverse discrimination” claim against the State of
California. The taxpayer was denied a civil service position under an affirmative action program,
despite scoring higher on a merit-based exam than individuals who were hired. Payments the
taxpayer received were not excludable from income, since no physical injury was involved in the
claim.
14
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s discriminatory hiring practices claim against the City
of Chicago, for having violated a prior consent decree and engaging in politically discriminatory
hiring practices. Here, the taxpayer alleged that she had submitted various job applications to the
City of Chicago, but her applications were not given fair consideration. However, she made no
allegation that she had received the payments on account of physical injuries or physical sickness.
Further, there was nothing in the record that suggested that her damages for the City of Chicago’s
discriminatory hiring practices had any physical component.
14.1
. . . payment of $2 million the taxpayer received to settle a contract dispute. The taxpayer’s claim of
tortious interference with contracts related to economic injury, not physical injury. The taxpayer
presented evidence that he suffered hypertension as a result of the dispute, a symptom that could
lead to heart attack, stroke, etc. But the court noted that hypertension itself is a symptom of
emotional distress, payments for which are generally not excludable. The physical illnesses to
which the hypertension could lead did not form the basis of the taxpayer’s claim. (The taxpayer
based his claim on the contract issues and not the health-related issues.) Thus, even if he suffered
physical injuries (which he didn’t), the settlement payment could not have related to them.
15
. . . payment to the taxpayer from a written contract to participate in a gout study. Here, the taxpayer
had been suffering from gout, entered into a written contract to participate in the gout study, but he
did not allege that he suffered from any physical injury or sickness on account of the gout study.
Further, taxpayer did not prove a direct causal link between the payment he received, and the gout
that he has suffered from since 1983. Moreover, the taxpayer testified that he had the contract, but
failed to produce it at trial. Without this contract, the Tax Court could not determine that the
payment was compensation for anything except the taxpayer’s mere participation in the study
15.1
. . . payment received to settle a sexual harassment claim against an employer. The taxpayer
claimed that she had suffered various economic injuries because her employer intimidated her and
the company failed to offer her another job. An arbitrator found no economic injuries, but made an
award to the taxpayer based on noneconomic harm arising from her harassment suit. The taxpayer
contended that under Michigan law, the arbitrator was prohibited from awarding compensation for
emotional distress. Thus, the amount awarded to her must have been for physical harm. The Tax
Court disagreed. In reaching its decision, the court found that the taxpayer’s original claim (1) never
asserted any physical injury or sickness that had resulted from the actions of her supervisor, and
(2) there was no evidence establishing that the taxpayer’s claim against her employer was for, or
that the arbitrator’s award was made on account of, personal physical injuries or physical sickness.
16
. . . payment received to settle disability discrimination and retaliation claims against an employer.
The taxpayer claimed that his former employer had wrongfully failed to accommodate his disability
and, thus, had violated family and medical leave rules. But, the taxpayer’s complaint didn’t mention
physical injury. Nor had the taxpayer sought damages on account of personal physical injuries or
physical sickness. Further, an arbitrator did not particularize the award for any of the taxpayer’s
claims and did not talk about any physical injury, except tangentially mentioning a prior condition
already cured, but made the award to the taxpayer on account of the former employer’s family and
medical leave breaches. Yet, the taxpayer contended that his claim (and the arbitration award)
related to his physical injury, since the claim required wrongful retaliation against a physically
injured employee while on disability leave. The Tax Court disagreed. In reaching its decision, the
court found that the taxpayer had failed to show that either the arbitrator or his former employer had
intended that any of the award was to recompense the taxpayer for his former employer causing or
exacerbating any personal physical injury or physical sickness suffered by him.
16.1
. . . payment received to settle the taxpayer’s wrongful termination suit against his employer. The
taxpayer contended that he suffered phy
Instructions: Complete this case analysis after reading the case study for this week — Case 29: McDonald’s in 2022 – located in our textbook. Please notify the instructor if any of your team members did not contribute to this assignment. Textbook: Dess, G., McNamara, G., Eisner, A., & Lee, S. (2024). Strategic Management: Text and Cases. 11th edition. New York, NY: McGraw Hill.Assignment goal: In lecture, we have now discussed the general and industry environments, which together describe the external environment for a company. Now, we will put these concepts into practice. Our goal is to answer: what external factors might affect McDonald’s strategy? To answer this question, you will need to conduct external analyses! NOTE: I have attached the assignment and the ebook below, which is the 10th edition for the course and will work for the semester. However, for this particular assignment, the subject Case Anaylsis is the only updated content to suit the year 2022. Once the tutor accepts assignment, I will provide images of the actual assignment to read. Please confirm that you are able to access to the ebook. Thankshttps://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1R8xpF1tGc6…
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case Analysis 1: McDonald’s
Instructions: Complete this case analysis after reading the case study for this week
— Case 29: McDonald’s in 2022 – located in our textbook. Please notify the
instructor if any of your team members did not contribute to this assignment.
Textbook: Dess, G., McNamara, G., Eisner, A., & Lee, S. (2024). Strategic Management: Text and Cases.
11th edition. New York, NY: McGraw Hill.
Assignment goal: In lecture, we have now discussed the general and industry
environments, which together describe the external environment for a company.
Now, we will put these concepts into practice. Our goal is to answer: what external
factors might affect McDonald’s strategy? To answer this question, you will need
to conduct external analyses!
1.) First, let’s assess the general environment. Conduct a PESTEL Analysis (24
points).
Although in reality, some factors are more important than others depending on
your company, for this assignment, please identify TWO examples for each factor
below (P – E – S – T – E – L). Thus, two political examples, two economic
examples, etc. If you recall, a general environment analysis applies not only to our
company, but to other companies in the same industry as well. To indicate this
understanding, you should write two sentences per example. The first sentence
should reflect how that example impacts the industry as a whole, the second should
reflect why it is important to the company specifically (McDonald’s in this case).
Political (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Economic (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Sociocultural/Demographic (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Technology (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Environmental (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Legal (4 points)
Example 1:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Example 2:
Industry sentence:
McDonald’s sentence:
Important! Please read. In a proper PESTEL analysis, you would not write the
McDonald’s sentence. The PESTEL analysis is specifically an industry analysis. If
you focus on McDonald’s rather than the industry, you have taken a myopic focus
and will fail to capture trends that are impacting your competition/industry as a
whole, which can cause your company issues later. Additionally, when you discuss
your company specifically, you are discussing internal characteristics of the
company (such as the products you sell, or the competencies and abilities of your
firm). This would fall under an internal analysis. I have you write both in this
assignment to help clarify the differences and how to do this analysis effectively.
2.) Consider the importance of Competitive Intelligence for McDonald’s. Besides
direct rivals (Wendy’s, Burger King, etc.), what other companies might
McDonald’s conduct a Competitive Intelligence report on, and why? (4 points)
3.) Strategic Group Mapping. First, What is a strategic group? (4 points).
On the next page, I have created a strategic map template for you. Please create a
Strategic Map that includes McDonald’s (8 points). You may also create your
own map (using any program of your choice) if you don’t like editing the template!
You can move the yellow circles around, make them bigger or smaller, etc.. Make
sure to label your X and Y axes. Hint: There should be MORE than one company
per strategic group.
Appendix A: Strategic Group Map Template
High
Click to Edit
Click to edit
Click to edit
Click to edit
e
Click to edit
Low
Click to Edit
Low
High
4.) Conduct a Porter’s 5 Forces Model (10 points; 2 points each). You must include
the strength of the force (high, medium, or low) and defend your decision.
Rivalry (high, medium or low force; why?):
Buyer Power:
Supplier Power:
Threat of Substitutes:
Threat of New Entrants:
Then, post your thoughts (hit the reply button below) on Sport Nutrition and whether or not it applies to the topic in the video. Be very specific and compare to one of the specific topics covered in the video.After your post, reply to at least one of your classmates original post (hit the reply button below their original post). Do not reply to a reply.
20 points for your original post and 10 points for replying to your classmates.
As a reminder on your replies:
10 points for your replies to a classmate original posts, not on a reply they left for another classmate. (Click “Reply” at the bottom of their main post):
Your reply to a classmate must be at least 3 substantial sentences. The items below are example of brief, vague or “throw-away” response statements and will not receive credit. It is okay to include them in addition to your 3 substantial sentences, but not instead of your 3 substantial sentences.
Hi David.
Nice to meet you.
I like your post.
Have a good semester.
I posted the same thing.
Your replies must be written in proper sentence for with emojis, emoticons, or text abbreviations (e.g. LOL)
Your reply must relate to what they posted, not only what you posted.
Your reply must be respectful, but may disagree.
If you post that you agree, disagree, like, or dislike something in their post, you must state what the item was and why you felt that the way you did.
Vague or short replies will receive very little credit.
Asking a question does not count as one of your 3 sentences, but you may ask a question in addition to your required respons
https://embed.ted.com/talks/lang/en/david_epstein_…
CORRELATION & LINEAR REGRESSION
LECTURE 3
How to estimate relationships?
DEP. VAR.
Interval/Ratio
Correlation, Regression models
Ordinal (Two Levels)
Logistic regression models
Ordinal (Multiple Levels)
Conditional & Multinomial logit models
SPECIAL CASE
Conjoint analysis
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Correlation
analysis
Multivariate
Simple
Regression
Models
Regression
Models
Shine Sonic Toothbrush Co.
Annual sales for 40 territories (in ‘000s units)
Advertising (TV Spots / Month)
Number of salespeople
Wholesaler efficiency index
See “ShineSonic.xlsm”
Sonic Shine: Descriptive statistics
Statistic
Sales (in 1,000’s)
ADV
Sales People
Wholesaler Index
40
40
40
40
Minimum
220.500
4.000
3.000
1.000
Maximum
667.000
19.000
8.000
4.000
1st Quartile
315.225
7.750
3.750
2.000
Median
398.400
10.000
5.000
3.000
3rd Quartile
507.575
13.250
6.000
4.000
Mean
411.288
10.900
5.000
2.825
15339.821
18.554
2.718
0.969
123.854
4.307
1.649
0.984
Skewness (Pearson)
0.426
0.373
0.348
-0.298
Kurtosis (Pearson)
-0.895
-0.940
-0.999
-0.972
Nbr. of observations
Variance (n-1)
Standard deviation (n-1)
Sonic Shine: ADV & SALES
We want to understand the
relationship b/w ADV & sales.
Correlation analysis
Simple linear regression model
CORRELATIONS …
rXY → correlation between X and Y
Represent the relationship among variables: How the value of
one variable varies in relation to variation in another variable.
BUT correlations don’t imply causation.
CORRELATIONS …
•
Measure strength of the relationship
between two variables.
•
Linear Correlation Coefficient (r):
Measures the linear relationship
between two interval or ratio scaled
variables (X and Y).
•
Pearson Product-Moment Coefficient
CORRELATIONS …
Range between -1.00 and +1.00
Positive correlation: Variables changing in the same direction
Negative correlation: Variables changing in opposite directions
The absolute value of the coefficient indicates strength.
(-.70 implies a stronger association than +.25.)
RELATIONSHIP STRENGHT
CORRELATION
INTERPRETATION
.8 to 1.0
Very strong relationship
.6 to .8
Strong relationship
.4 to .6
Moderate relationship
.2 to .4
Weak relationship
0 to .2
Very weak or no relationship
CORRELATIONS …
Do not run correlations on nominal variables.
Use the Pearson correlation for interval and ratio variables.
Use the Spearman correlation if at least one or both variables are
ordinal.
CORRELATION: Shine Sonic Toothbrush
Correlation matrix (Pearson):
Variables
Sales (in 1000’s)
Advertising (TV Spots/ Month)
Sales (in 1000’s)
ADV
1
0.880
0.880
1
Values in bold are different from 0 with a significance level alpha=0.05
p-values (Pearson):
Variables
Sales (in 1000’s)
Advertising (TV Spots/ Month)
Sales (in 1000’s)
ADV
0
< 0.0001
< 0.0001
0
REGRESSION ANALYSIS
Regression analysis is a technique for quantifying a relationship among
one or more independent (predictor) variables and a dependent variable.
We typically use it to:
• Predict the DV based on values of the IVs.
• Understand how the IVs influence the DV.
SIMPLE REGRESSION MODEL
We want to quantify the
relationship between sales
(dependent variable) and
advertising (independent
variable).
We make an assumption of
a linear association.
Sales = f (ADV)
SIMPLE REGRESSION MODEL
We assume: Linear ADV & Sales relationship.
Random error: Normal distribution
St = α1 + β1At + εt
Sales (territory t)
ADV (territory t)
We want to find the line that best matches
the data. Linear regression analysis finds
that line, which is defined by α1 & β1.
SIMPLE REGRESSION MODEL
Test of:
H0: α= β =0
Ha: At least one ≠ 0
Test of:
H0: α =0
Ha: α ≠0
̂
̂
Test of:
H0: β =0
Ha: β ≠0
How do we find the best line?
What if we want to predict college
GPA based on high school GPA?
The regression line reflects our
best estimate as to what score on
the Y variable would be predicted
by the X variable.
Also known as the “line of best
fit.”
PREDICTION ERROR
SIMPLE REGRESSION MODEL
n
We partition the SST (total sum of
squares) into SSR (sum of squares
for the regression model) & SSE
(sum of squares for error).
SST = (Y j − Y ) 2
j =1
n
(
)
(
)
SS E = Y j − Yˆj
j =1
2
We select the line defined by α
and β that minimizes the sum of
the squared errors.
n
SS R = Yˆj − Y
j =1
2
REGRESSION ANALYSIS
/
=
>
/( − − 1)
We compare the ratio between the MSR and the MSE.
If this ratio exceeds a critical F value, we can conclude that our IV can be
used to predict (to some extent) the DV.
How do we determine the critical F?
The critical F value comes from an F (DFN, DFD) distribution, where
Numerator Degrees of Freedom (DFN)
= Number of independent variables
Denominator Degrees of Freedom (DFD)
= Number of observations minus Number of independent variables – 1
REGRESSION: DON’T FORGET!
The independent and dependent variables (IV & DV) are evaluated on
interval or ratio scales.
The assumptions underlying regression models are satisfied. Please find
a detailed discussion of the assumptions in the Tests for Association
homework template.
MULTIPLE REGRESSION ANALYSIS
Y j = a + b1 X 1j + b2 X 2j + … + bk X kj + e j
Observations: j = 1 n
Predictors: i = 1 k
MULTIPLE REGRESSION ANALYSIS
• Quantify the impact of various simultaneous influences upon one DV.
• Often essential, because omitted variables might bias our estimates, even
when we only have interest in the effect of one independent variable.
• βj measures the amount by which the dependent variable Y changes
when the independent variable X j changes by one unit, all other
independent variables are kept constant.
MULTIPLE REGRESSION: Sonic Shine
St = α + β1At + β2SPt + β3Wt + εt
St = Sales (territory t)
At = Number of TV spots (territory t)
SPt = Number of salespeople (territory t)
Wt = Wholesaler efficiency index (territory t::
4 = Excellent, 3 = Good, 2 = Average, 1 = Poor
REGRESSION: VARIABLE SELECTION
We include a variable when:
It’s a decision variable (ADV, salespeople).
It controls for important factors outside management’s control.
The model is parsimonious.
MULTICOLLINEARITY DIAGNOSTICS
Tolerance (≥ .10)
Variance Inflation Factor (VIF) (< 5)
Bivariate correlation (r ≤ .70)
Otherwise, combine or remove variables!
MULTICOLLINEARITY: Sonic Shine
Correlation matrix:
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Sales (in 1000's)
1
0.776
0.032
0.880
Sales People
0.776
1
-0.190
0.882
Efficiency
0.032
-0.190
1
0.002
Sales (in 1000's)
0.880
0.882
0.002
1
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Tolerance
0.364
0.351
0.883
VIF
2.747
2.847
1.132
ADV
Multicolinearity statistics:
SIGNIFICANCE TESTS: Sonic Shine
Regression of variable Sales (in 1000's):
Goodness of fit statistics (Sales (in 1000's)):
Observations
DF
R²
Adjusted R²
Adjusted R²
40.000
36.000
0.881
0.871
0.871
What is the probability that at least one
of the estimated coefficients is different
from zero?
H0: β1 = β2 = β3 = 0
H1: At least one β is ≠ 0
Does an independent variable have a
“significant” effect on the dependent
variable? OR What is the probability that
an estimated coefficient is ≠ 0 ?
Analysis of variance (Sales (in 1000's)):
Source
Model
Error
Corrected Total
Computed against model Y=Mean(Y)
DF
3
36
39
Sum of squares
527209.081
71043.943
598253.024
Mean squares
175736.360
1973.443
F
89.051
Pr > F
< 0.0001
Model parameters (Sales (in 1000's)):
Source
Intercept
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Value
31.150
12.968
41.246
11.524
Standard error
34.175
2.737
7.280
7.691
t
0.911
4.738
5.666
1.498
Pr > |t| Lower bound (95%) Upper bound (95%)
100.461
-38.160
0.368
18.520
7.417
< 0.0001
56.010
26.481
< 0.0001
27.123
-4.074
0.143
Equation of the model (Sales (in 1000's)):
Sales (in 1000's) = 31.150+12.968*Number of TV Spots + 41.246*Number of Sales People + 11.524*Wholesaler Efficiency Index
Standardized coefficients (Sales (in 1000's)):
Source
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Value
0.451
0.549
0.092
Standard error
0.095
0.097
0.061
t
4.738
5.666
1.498
Pr > |t| Lower bound (95%) Upper bound (95%)
0.644
0.258
< 0.0001
0.746
0.352
< 0.0001
0.216
-0.032
0.143
GOODNESS-OF-FIT STATISTICS
The R-squared statistic (also known as the coefficient of determination)
measures the percentage of variation in the dependent variable
explained by all independent variables included in the model.
The value of this statistic increases with the addition of new independent
variables to the model, even if the added variables have no significant
effect.
GOODNESS-OF-FIT STATISTICS (Cont’d)
The adjusted R-squared statistic adjusts for the number of independent
variables relative to sample size; we use it for comparing competing
models.
Its value decreases if a newly added predictor is not significant; its value
goes up only if a newly added independent variable has a significant
effect.
How to interpret the coefficients?
One extra TV spot / month leads to
a 12,968 units increase in sales,
keeping everything else constant.
One more salesperson leads to a
41,246 units increase in sales,
keeping everything else constant.
Model parameters (Sales (in 1000's)):
Source
Intercept
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Value
31.150
12.968
41.246
11.524
How to compare coefficients?
We consults standardized
coefficients
The number of salespeople
has the largest impact on
sales.
Standardized coefficients (Sales (in 1000's)):
Source
ADV
Sales People
Efficiency
Value
0.451
0.549
0.092
TV (Q3)
R (Q3)
TV (Q8-R)
300
25
300
Overall Revenue Effect (mf = 3), Per store
0.00
0.00
0.00
Overall Profit (Margin = 30%), Per store
0.00
0.00
0.00
Total extra profit (For all 100 stores)
0.00
0.00
0.00
-300.00
-25.00
-300.00
Cost (Per GRP)
Increase in Sales (Per GRP), Per store
Net Effect, Overall
Q2
PREDICTION
Minimum
Mean
Maximum
Q3
TV GRPs
Radio GRPs
TV=40, R=80
40
80
Reference
P. 6
From model
P. 4, Par. 4
P. 2, Par. 1
P. 5, Par. 5
Week
Sales (euros)
TV
Radio
Fuel Volume
26
24,864
74.5
66.5
61,825
27
23,809
74.5
66.5
62,617
28
24,476
90
75
60,227
29
25,279
90
75
63,273
30
26,263
90
75
65,196
31
24,299
90
75
64,789
32
25,671
15
8.5
65,901
33
24,489
0
0
65,474
34
24,416
0
0
65,706
35
23,555
0
0
61,824
36
22,377
0
0
61,810
37
18,969
37.5
68.5
59,697
38
22,924
37.5
68.5
64,729
39
20,449
37.5
68.5
64,570
40
21,171
37.5
68.5
64,005
41
19,729
0
0
64,163
42
20,244
0
0
60,563
43
21,246
0
0
63,694
44
19,603
0
0
60,719
45
22,432
0
0
63,290
46
19,522
37.5
68.5
59,567
47
21,426
37.5
68.5
61,359
48
19,982
0
0
63,303
49
23,529
37.5
68.5
62,780
50
19,067
0
0
61,374
51
19,787
37.5
68.5
58,166
52
19,798
0
0
59,797
1
20,199
0
0
57,557
2
19,859
0
0
59,428
3
19,136
0
0
62,544
4
21,582
0
0
63,209
5
22,383
0
0
64,085
6
20,632
0
0
60,173
7
20,431
0
0
64,855
8
21,460
0
0
60,232
9
22,800
0
0
61,780
10
20,701
0
0
63,111
11
20,151
0
0
62,750
12
22,896
0
0
64,700
13
20,995
225
205
64,302
14
23,216
220
205
64,829
15
22,716
90
240
64,289
16
21,320
0
0
62,447
17
24,332
0
0
63,716
18
25,320
225
205
64,721
19
25,833
0
125
66,107
20
27,415
225
205
66,548
21
24,861
0
260
62,541
22
22,824
0
260
63,578
23
22,824
0
250
63,623
24
24,829
220
205
63,225
25
25,628
90
240
66,714
26
27,039
0
125
67,005
27
27,908
220
205
63,642
28
27,872
95
240
65,753
29
27,279
0
135
65,423
30
27,285
145
130
65,712
31
28,451
225
205
65,262
32
27,195
95
195
64,165
33
27,137
70
240
64,637
34
26,176
0
130
65,000
35
24,950
0
50
68,549
36
22,387
0
260
61,754
37
22,187
0
260
63,510
38
23,048
21
250
65,064
39
23,210
10
0
62,857
40
20,102
0
0
59,950
41
19,975
0
260
61,582
42
21,364
0
250
61,756
43
22,354
0
260
63,033
44
20,098
5
0
60,116
45
23,497
0
0
58,929
46
21,910
0
0
57,984
47
21,323
4
0
56,259
48
19,648
0
0
59,248
49
23,403
0
0
61,171
50
23,238
0
0
62,731
51
20,356
0
0
58,129
52
22,242
0
0
56,720
1
21,854
0
0
63,368
2
20,213
0
0
62,142
3
20,392
0
0
61,986
4
23,403
0
0
61,741
5
23,188
0
0
62,706
6
22,629
0
0
62,368
7
21,741
0
0
63,136
8
24,207
0
0
62,903
9
25,778
0
0
65,109
10
23,919
0
0
61,967
11
22,182
0
0
61,591
12
23,291
0
0
63,247
13
24,011
180
237
62,519
14
23,979
160
208
63,128
15
23,896
150
208
64,331
16
26,873
0
0
65,812
17
27,535
180
237
64,723
18
23,688
160
208
65,052
19
23,922
150
208
63,214
20
24,421
0
0
63,379
21
26,197
0
0
63,623
22
26,765
180
237
62,661
Fuel Price
Temperature
Precipitation (mm)
Visits (1 or 2)
Holiday
104.24
27.9
0.9
7
1
103.97
27.7
1.3
7
1
107.48
29.1
4.8
5.9
1
111.75
30.0
3.1
5.9
1
109.08
29.3
0.0
5.9
1
105.36
28.1
3.6
5.9
1
107.31
26.9
4.8
3.2
1
107.99
28.9
5.6
3.2
1
109.30
27.0
8.5
3.2
1
107.59
24.2
5.7
3.2
1
105.41
24.3
10.6
3.2
1
107.35
23.1
19.2
4.3
0
106.17
21.0
18.3
4.3
0
107.63
20.3
25.8
4.3
0
108.31
20.9
26.8
4.3
0
109.49
19.1
30.3
7.5
0
109.60
19.6
21.5
7.5
0
111.12
18.9
20.2
7.5
1
108.36
14.2
24.6
7.5
1
108.33
13.1
19.2
6.7
1
106.54
13.2
12.1
6.7
0
104.57
12.9
11.3
6.7
0
105.61
11.1
11.2
10.3
0
107.66
10.8
10.3
6.7
0
103.56
10.3
11.6
10.3
0
101.72
9.2
9.0
6.7
1
101.46
9.1
14.3
10.3
1
104.07
9.9
12.9
7.6
1
102.23
9.6
15.3
7.6
0
103.60
11.9
14.4
7.6
0
105.37
10.4
5.1
7.6
0
109.20
11.5
12.3
5.4
0
107.42
11.8
11.5
5.4
0
106.92
10.4
7.3
6.4
0
106.83
12.0
7.4
5.4
0
108.62
12.5
10.1
5.4
1
107.10
11.9
12.3
6.4
1
110.74
12.6
16.0
6.4
0
112.11
14.8
8.4
6.4
0
112.71
14.3
10.7
12.5
0
112.71
15.9
11.3
12.5
0
116.40
16.5
14.9
12.5
1
113.21
17.7
9.4
12.5
1
114.66
16.0
5.0
6
1
114.66
16.3
12.9
6
1
114.97
18.5
13.4
5
1
112.90
21.6
8.5
3
1
111.70
21.2
6.5
6
0
114.10
20.4
7.5
6
0
114.38
21.8
6.6
6
0
112.50
22.6
4.3
5
0
115.99
25.9
3.2
5
0
118.97
25.0
0.0
5
0
116.61
26.1
1.6
3
1
120.22
28.0
3.9
3
1
119.38
29.2
3.5
3
1
119.21
30.7
0.0
0
1
118.00
29.4
3.2
0
1
119.55
29.3
4.3
0
1
123.13
26.2
5.2
0
1
122.81
27.7
10.1
0
1
120.42
27.2
5.3
9
1
133.67
25.1
13.4
9
0
130.72
23.1
20.9
9
0
125.77
23.5
17.1
9
0
126.51
21.4
25.7
7
0
126.30
20.7
25.7
7
0
128.11
19.4
30.0
7
0
124.85
19.2
20.2
7
0
119.66
19.8
20.8
7
1
119.83
18.0
24.4
4
1
118.47
14.1
19.1
4
1
116.09
14.1
11.1
4
0
115.90
14.0
11.7
4
0
116.46
12.9
10.5
7
0
115.50
12.4
10.6
7
0
116.19
11.1
12.4
7
0
119.30
10.1
10.9
2
0
121.07
9.9
15.4
2
1
120.18
9.8
12.4
7
1
122.13
10.3
15.5
2
0
124.31
10.6
14.5
2
0
120.94
10.0
6.9
2
0
121.03
11.7
11.3
2
0
120.33
11.2
11.3
2
0
119.38
10.9
6.2
2
0
118.78
10.5
7.2
2
1
119.85
12.6
9.9
3
1
120.87
11.1
13.3
3
1
122.95
12.8
15.4
3
0
123.51
12.6
7.5
3
0
125.02
13.5
7.3
9
0
125.30
14.9
12.1
9
0
129.63
15.7
14.4
9
1
131.02
15.0
9.0
9
1
131.33
17.3
5.8
6
1
130.95
16.8
12.7
6
1
129.06
17.3
14.6
6
1
129.28
19.7
5.9
6
0
127.19
21.1
6.1
6
0
129.19
21.8
7.3
4
0
TV x H
RxH
TxH
74.5
66.5
27.9
74.5
66.5
27.7
90
75
29.1
90
75
30
90
75
29.3
90
75
28.1
15
8.5
26.9
0
0
28.9
0
0
27
0
0
24.2
0
0
24.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
18.9
0
0
14.2
0
0
13.1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
37.5
68.5
9.2
0
0
9.1
0
0
9.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12.5
0
0
11.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
90
240
16.5
0
0
17.7
0
0
16
225
205
16.3
0
125
18.5
225
205
21.6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
220
205
26.1
95
240
28
0
135
29.2
145
130
30.7
225
205
29.4
95
195
29.3
70
240
26.2
0
130
27.7
0
50
27.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
260
19.8
5
0
18
0
0
14.1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9.9
0
0
9.8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10.5
0
0
12.6
0
0
11.1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
150
208
15.7
0
0
15
180
237
17.3
160
208
16.8
150
208
17.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Variable Name
Week
Sales
TV
Radio
Fuel Volume
Fuel Price
Temperature
Precipitation (mm)
Visits (1 or 2)
Holiday
What this variable means?
Week number (of the year)
Convenience store sales (in euros), per store, on average across all 100 stores in the Marseille area, for that week
Number of TV GRPs that week (1 GRP = 1% of target market saw/heard the ad once)
Number of Radio GRPs that week (1 GRP = 1% of target market saw/heard the ad once)
Fuel volume sales (in liters), per station, on average across all 100 stations in the Marseille area, for that week (all f
Average price of fuel (in cents) in the Marseille area, for that week (across all fuel types)
Average high temperature (in C) recorded in the Marseille area, for that week.
Total precipitation (in mm) in the Marseille area, for that week
The percentage of survey respondents reporting 1 to 2 visits to a EurePet store in previous week (vs. "0 times" or "
This is a "dummy variable;" Holiday = 1 if there was a national or school holiday that week; Holiday = 0 if there was
area, for that week
ea, for that week (all fuel types)
eek (vs. "0 times" or "3 or more times").
oliday = 0 if there was no holiday that week
Purchase answer to see full
attachment
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
For this assignment, you will write a scholarly paper. It requires you to use academic sources, scholarly word choice and tone, and effective use of evidence. Begin with an introduction that establishes an understanding of the purpose of your paper. Clearly present your thesis and a summary of the main points. You will compare and contrast the rights and benefits of a non-union member versus a union member in a unionized bargaining unit. Be sure to include the following points: Summarize the rights of both members in a bargaining environment. Examine the differences for the two member classes when it comes to strikes, concerted action, and other organization efforts. Explain employer conduct that violates employees’ rights. Your paper must be at least three pages, not including the title or reference pages. You may include up to three graphics (not decorative images or pictures), tables, or charts to augment your paper. You must use at least three academic or peer-reviewed sources to support your paper. One source must come from the CSU Online Library, and one may be your eTextbook. All sources used must have citations and references formatted in APA Style. APA formatting of your scholarly activity is otherwise not required.
(Working Document for Wk1 Discussion)
CASE SCENARIO – PAUL’S DISCOUNT TIRES & REPAIRS BUSINESS STRATEGIC PLAN
It’s a Friday at 4:00, and you are looking at the clock – it’s been a tough week at Paul’s Discount Tires & Repairs business, and the week is not over! The global
COVID Pandemic has hit the business hard, and you saw several people working there laid off this week. You feel lucky to be still working as their business
consultant!
The business is family-owned and has been in business for over 21 years. The founder of the company, Paul Wilford, started the company as a small tire shop then
expanded into service repairs. Now Paul’s grandson, Steve Wilford, runs the company, which has grown to several million in annual revenues over the past couple
of years. Steve Wilford stops by your cubicle. He looks worried and worn out from the long workday. Despite that, he greets you warmly.
“You are taking a course in Strategic Management right now, aren’t you?”
Steve asks you.
You reply yes.
“Well, that is great timing,” says Steve, “because I just drafted a 10-year strategy for our business! If I get you a copy, would you mind looking it over
during the weekend and giving me your thoughts?”
You tell Steve that you’d be happy to give your input. Within 5 minutes, a one-page document is on your desk. At the top of the page is written “Paul’s
Discount Tires & Repairs Strategic Plan.” You start to read it in your remote work office at home.
The basics of the plan are highlighted with the following three (3) bullet points:
1.
2.
3.
Paul’s Discount Tires & Repairs core business will continue providing tires and minor vehicle repair services to our retail c ustomers over the
next ten years.
Paul’s Discount Tires & Repairs will beat its competitors by providing the lowest price discount tires, vehicle repairs, exceptional customer
service, and quality work.
Paul’s Discount Tires & Repairs culture is rooted in its 21-year history. Paul’s will overcome the setbacks caused by the COVID Pandemic by
sticking to its core values and cutting costs wherever necessary. Our people will help get us through these tough times.
You look at the bottom of the page and see a post-it note with questions posed to you by Steve.
A.
B.
C.
D.
What is wrong with this strategy?
What is right about this strategy?
We are the market leader in discount tires and repairs in our city, indicating that we currently have a competitive advantage. Wi ll we sustain it
with this strategy?
What is one thing we could do to improve on this strategy?
Directions for Initial Posting:
Write a memo to Steve answering these four questions. Your memo should outline all four questions, and the answers to all fou r questions should be
supported by course materials. (Listed Below)
Theme: Introduction to Strategic Management
Mastering Strategic Management
PDF – Chapter 1 Mastering Strategy
PDF – Chapter 2 Leading Strategically
What is Strategy? It’s a Lot Simpler Than You Think
Martin Reeves: Your strategy needs a strategy
https://leocontent.umgc.edu/content/dam/permalink/ac350355-6269-4981-bb6e-52f3742aca3d.html
What is Strategic Planning? How to Develop a Process
http://www.strategy-business.com/feature/Creating-a-Strategy-That-Works
Tools and Techniques
Ratio Analysis
https://investinganswers.com/articles/15-financial-ratios-every-investor-should-use
Profitability Ratio https://www.readyratios.com/reference/profitability/#ref32
The Balanced Scorecard explained
Professor’s Notes:
•
Use the lettering system indicated below in your memo. Your answers should be listed in sections labeled “A” through “D.”
Be careful to address each question posed. Include APA formatted in-text citations and a reference list. (In this class, all applicable citations should contain the
page or paragraph numbers. The only exceptions are videos or podcasts.)
In-Text Citations – Including Page or Paragraph Numbers
•
Third-person writing is required. The third person means no words such as “I, me, my, we, or us” (first-person writing).
•
Contractions are not often used in business writing, so do not use them here.
MGT421 Communications management
Week-9
Chapter-9
Learning Outcomes:
Recognize and memorize concepts of communication theory as they affect business
organizations and the individuals in them.
1.1
Communicate better, knowing that good communicators make better managers and that
communication is a dynamic process basic to individuals and organizational life.
1.2
Action Required: Read Chapter from textbook
Test your Knowledge (Question):
Discuss how delivering routine messages impacts credibility
Instructions: Post your answer in the discussion board .
Answer should be of 100-150 words
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DOCUMENTING THE RATIOS IN ASSIGNMENT 3
1. Open a new workbook in Excel. (You will need 2 sheets)
2. Open your previous company financial statements copy and paste the Balance
Sheet and the Income Statement on the two different sheets.
3. Label 3 columns to the right of the pasted information with the title ratios, and
put in the last 3 years for calculating a trend. (Lockheed Martin example provided in
modules)
4. Copy and paste the list of ratios that are provided in this document to the balance
sheet and income statement respectively.
5. Input the data for the ratios by using formulas. (Do not simply input data
calculated through another format) For example: Current Ratio = Current Assets/
Current Liabilities. Input this first adding an equals sign ‘=’ then the cells you wish to
manipulate.
6. To obtain ratio formulas, see your textbook.
List of Ratios and their respective documents in which to input the data.
Balance Sheet:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Current ratio
Quick Ratio (Acid-test)
Total Debt Ratio
Debt-Equity Ratio
Equity Multiplier
Income Statement:
1. Inventory Turnover
2. Average day’s sales in
inventory
3. Receivables Turnover
4. Days’ sales in
receivables
5. Total Asset Turnover
6. Profit Margin
7. Return on Assets
8.Return on Equity
7. You may click on the cells in the “Actual Lockheed Ratios” document to see how
each ratio is calculated. For instance, Total Debt is calculated using the formula Total
Assets-Total Equity. As you do each calculation you can click on the appropriate cell
so you do not have to enter each number by hand.
8. Inventory Turnover will show as negative number so use ABS( ) to get the
absolute value of the cell.
9. Some ratios require information from both the income statement and the balance
sheet. These are listed on the income statement. You may click on the appropriate
cell in the income statement and then go to the balance sheet and click on the
appropriate cell and press enter. That will mean you do not have to type in the
numbers themselves. For example, Return on Assets (2019) is calculated by:
=(+B35/’Actual B-S LMT’!B45)
WARNING! This may take you awhile to finish, so keep that in mind IF you wait
till the last minute to complete assignments.
“What concerns me,” remarked the philosopher Epictetus, “is not the way things are, but rather the way people think things are.” If you think you’re creative, you’ll act that way–and vice versa. It’s a self-fulfilling prophecy. As you think, so you are. In what ways are you creative? (From: Roger Von Oech, The Creative Whack Pack.)
Here are a series of questions.
First: In what ways are you creative? Think about it, let your mind wander, think like a kid, and fill one page with ways you are creative. If you get REALLY stuck, think about ways you would like to be creative, then you must identify what to do to get there.
Then: See the big picture. Where does this forum fit into the bigger picture of this class? Of your education? Where does this forum fit into the bigger picture of your life? What does it mean from the perspective of your grandchildren?
Then: Reflect on what strengths you bring to this Dialogue Forum, check your Top Five. What is your greatest strength? What strength beginning with the letter “R” do you have that you can apply to this Dialogue Forum? What emotional strengths do you have that you can apply to this Dialogue Forum? What strength beginning with the letter “M” can you apply to this Dialogue Forum? What spiritual strengths can you apply to this Dialogue Forum?
Finally Write: Reflect on, and write about what life would be like if people had to spend every third year living outside of the country they were born in. How would that change the way we see things? What things might we do differently? Would our own country be the same?
Optional: Write about whatever you would like to write about today. If you can’t think of anything to write about, go to the CliftonStrengths book, open it at random, and write about what is there.
Or, go out and find a Creative website to share with the class. (Please remember to keep your selection in good taste and within moral and ethical parameters.)
The important thing is that you post something of value, something that will show something relating to your readings this week and something that might help another student gain an understanding of your choice.
Adapted From: The Creative Whack Pack by Roger Von Oec
Week 2 – Assignment
Force-Field Analysis
[WLO: 2] [CLO: 2] [NACE: 1, 2, 3, 5 ,6, 8]
Prior to beginning work on this assignment,
•
•
Read Chapters 3 and 4 of the course textbook.
Read Week 2 Lecture Notes.
Describe the concept of force-field analysis and the forces that either drive or restrain the change
process. Using the force-field analysis model, discuss a change initiative that you are familiar
with, and define the key driving forces and key restraining forces that impact the change.
| Prepare
In your paper,
•
•
•
•
•
•
Add an introduction that includes a statement informing your reader what topics
and subtopics the assignment will discuss.
Describe the concept of force-field analysis and the forces that either drive or
restrain the change process.
Discuss a change initiative that you are familiar with, using the force-field analysis
model.
Define the key driving forces and key restraining forces that impact the change.
Create headings for topics and sub-topics.
Note: Refer to the rubric for creating topics and sub-topics throughout your
assignment.
Add a summary conclusion paragraph.
| Write
The Force-Field Analysis paper
•
must be 3 to 4 double-spaced pages in length (not including title and references
pages) and formatted according to APA StyleLinks to an external site. as outlined in
the Writing Center’s APA Formatting for Microsoft WordLinks to an external
site. resource.
•
•
•
•
•
•
must include a separate title page with the following in title case:
o title paper in bold font
▪ Space should appear between the title and the rest of the
information on the title page.
o student’s name
o name of institution (The University of Arizona Global Campus)
o course name and number
o instructor’s name
o due date
must utilize academic voice. See the Academic VoiceLinks to an external
site. resource for additional guidance.
must include an introduction and conclusion paragraph.
o Your introduction paragraph needs to end with a clear thesis statement
that indicates the purpose of your paper.
o For assistance on writing Introductions & ConclusionsLinks to an external
site. and Writing a Thesis StatementLinks to an external site., refer to the
Writing Center resources.
must use at least two credible sources from the University of Arizona Global Campus
Library and/or other credible sources in addition to the course text.
o The Scholarly, Peer-Reviewed, and Other Credible SourcesLinks to an
external site. table offers additional guidance on appropriate source
types. If you have questions about whether a specific source is
appropriate for this assignment, please contact your instructor. Your
instructor has the final say about the appropriateness of a specific
source.
o To assist you in completing the research required for this assignment,
review the Quick and Easy Library ResearchLinks to an external
site. tutorial, which introduces the University of Arizona Global Campus
Library and the research process, and provides some library search tips.
o Review the How to Use Library OneSearchLinks to an external site. video
and/or Leadership ResearchLinks to an external site.tip sheet for
assistance on finding library resources.
must document any information used from sources in APA Style as outlined in the
Writing Center’s APA: Citing Within Your PaperLinks to an external site. guide.
must include in-text citations and a separate references page that is formatted
according to APA Style as outlined in the Writing Center.
o See the APA: Formatting Your References ListLinks to an external
site. resource in the Writing Center for specifications.
| Competencies Learned
This activity will help you practice the following skills:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Office
Written Skills
Problem Formation/Solving
Analytical Skills
Time Management
Confidence
Responsibility
Leadership/Independence
Determination/Motivation
Initiative
Job Hiring Skills
Carefully review the Grading RubricLinks to an external site. for the criteria that will be used to
evaluate your assignment.
Pick one of the articles included in the corresponding Module. The intention is to develop critical thinking by looking into the two sides of an issue in Non-Profit Marketing. So, you will have to search on your own for an additional source to cite, and in 200 words, no less, answer the following questions:What is (or are) the main message(s)? Be thorough and professional.How does he/she/they support his/her/their arguments?Pinpoint facts, stats, references, cite, if possibleWhat are the opposing views?Cite and analyzeWhat are your views on the matter?Balance the two positions.In your own words, discuss the applicability of the piece.I included the article in the corresponding Module. You can choose one from them.
Utilize a set of useful analytical skills, tools, and techniques for analyzing a company strategically;Integrate ideas, concepts, and theories from previously taken functional courses including, accounting, finance, market, business, and human resource management;Analyze and synthesize strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) to generate, prioritize, and implement alternative strategies to revise a current plan or write a new plan and present a strategic plan.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
THE COMPANY IS ConocoPhillips (SEE REFERENCES ON LAST PAGE)
Purpose
This project is the third of four projects. Students will perform an internal environmental
analysis using the tools and concepts learned in the course to date. You will also draw from
previous business courses to understand how organizations develop and manage strategies to
establish, safeguard, and sustain their position in a competitive market.
Students also can review an organization’s objectives and goals and the key functional areas
within the organization. Performing an internal environment analysis helps assess a firm’s
internal resources and capabilities. It plays a critical role in formulating strategy by
identifying a firm’s strengths to capitalize on to effectively overcome weaknesses.
Outcomes Met With This Project
•
•
•
Utilize a set of useful analytical skills, tools, and techniques for analyzing a company
strategically;
Integrate ideas, concepts, and theories from previously taken functional courses
including, accounting, finance, market, business, and human resource management;
Analyze and synthesize strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) to
generate, prioritize, and implement alternative strategies to revise a current plan or
write a new plan and present a strategic plan.
Instructions
Step 1 Specific Company for All Four Projects
The company that your instructor has assigned to you for Project 1 is the company you will
use for this project. The assigned company must be used for this project and in subsequent
projects in the course. Students must complete the project using the assigned company.
Deviating from the assigned company will result in a zero for the project.
After reading the course material, you will complete the steps below.
Step 2 Course Materials and Research
•
You must research information about the specific company and the internal
environment for this project. You are accountable for using the course materials to
support the ideas, reasoning, and conclusions made. Course material’s use goes beyond
defining terms and explains the ‘why and how’ of a situation. Using one or two in -text
citations from the course materials and then relying on Internet source material will
not earn many points on the assignment. A variety of source material is expected, and
what is presented must be relevant and applicable to the topic being discussed. Avoid
merely making statements but close the loop of the discussion by explaining
how something happens or why something happens, which focuses on importance and
impact. In closing the loop, you will demonstrate the ability to think clearly and
rationally, showing an understanding of the logical connections between the ideas
presented from the research, the course material, and the question(s) being asked.
Note: Your report is based on the research results and not on any prepared documentation.
What this means is that you will research and draw your own conclusions that are supported
by the research and the course material rather than the use of any source material that puts
together any of the tools or techniques whether from the Internet, for-pay websites, or any
pre-prepared document, video or source material. A zero will be earned for not doing your
own analysis.
Success: The analysis is based on research and not opinion. You are not making
recommendations, and you will not attempt to position the specific company in a better or
worse light than other companies within the industry merely because you are completing an
analysis on this particular company. The analysis must be based on factual information. Any
conclusions drawn have to be based on factual information rather than leaps of faith. As stated
above, you are expected to use the course materials and research on the specific company’s
global industry and the specific company to ensure success. The opinion does not earn credit,
nor does the use of external sources when course materials can be used. It is necessary to
provide explanations (the why and how) rather than making statements. Avoid stringing one
citation after another, as doing so does not show detailed explanations.
Step 3 How to Set Up the Report
The document has to be written in Word or RTF. No other format is acceptable. No pdf files
will be graded. Use 12-point font for a double-spaced report. The final product is expected to
be 10 – 12 pages. The final project may not be more than 12 pages in length, including all
tables and matrices, but excluding the title page and reference page. Do no use an Appendix.
•
•
•
Those items identified in the technical analysis should appear under the appropriate
heading in the paper. It is important to format the tables/matrices to fit the report and
present the analysis clearly and concisely.
Create a title page with the title, your name, date, the course number, the instructor’s
name.
Create Topic Headings that correspond to exact sections of the project
requirements.
Step 4 Strategic Role of Corporate Strengths/Weaknesses in the Internal Strategy
Analysis
There are three levels of strategy: corporate-level strategy, business-level strategy, and
functional-level strategy. Corporate-level strategies are related to businesses or markets the
specific company successfully can compete within. Corporate-level strategies affect the entire
organization and are formulated by top management using middle and lower management
input. Decision-making about corporate-level strategies is considered complex, affects the
entire company, and relates to an organization’s resource capabilities. Corporate level
strategies align with an organization’s mission statement and ideally are designed around
goals and objectives.
Perform an analysis on:
•
•
•
•
Corporate-level strategies.
Create a partial SWOT table, perform an SW analysis, and discuss the strategic
inferences/implications. Discuss what strategies would allow the company to capitalize
on its major strengths and what strategies would allow the company to improve upon
its major weaknesses.
Create an IFE matrix and analysis. Make sure to explain how the matrix was
developed and discuss the strategic inferences and implications.
Develop a Grand Strategy Matrix. Explain how the matrix was developed and discuss
the strategic inferences/implications at a corporate level and business-unit level.
Step 5 Strategic Role of Internal Resources/Departments/Processes
Perform an analysis on:
•
•
Business-level strategies
o Evaluate the company’s product line, target market.
o Identify and explain business-level strategies.
Functional-level strategies
o Assess the company’s organizational structure, the organizational culture,
marketing production, operations, finance and accounting, and R&D that can be
accomplished by viewing the company’s website, interviews, and surveys.
o Explain how these strategies align with the company’s vision and mission
statements.
Step 6 Strategic Financial Analysis for the Last Reported Fiscal Year
•
Use the company’s income statement and balance sheet to calculate four (4)
key financial ratios. One key ratio must come from each of the four key categories:
leverage, liquidity, profitability, and efficiency. The four (4) specific ratios selection
must come from the following categories.
•
o
o
o
o
•
Leverage Ratios (Long term debt ratio, Total debt ratio, Debt-to-equity ratio,
Times interest earned ratio, and Cash coverage ratio)
Liquidity Ratios (Net working capital to total assets ratio, current ratio, quick
ratio, and cash ratio)
Efficiency Ratios (Asset turnover ratio, average collection period, inventory
turnover ratio, and Days sales outstanding)
Profitability Ratios (Net Profit Margin, Return on Assets, and Return on
Equity)
The selection of the ratios has to be relevant to the specific company, so it is important
to choose wisely.
•
Quote industry financial average ratios correlate to the four (4) financial ratios selected
for the specific company. Explain the importance of the four (4) averages to compare
why averages are important to use. You may find the industry averages by going to the
library. If you cannot find it on your own, reach out to the librarian as these resources
are readily available.
Note: If copied directly from the Internet, a zero will be assigned. When placing any table or
figure in a table, it must be explained in detail.
•
Create a conclusion. The Conclusion is intended to emphasize the purpose/significance
of the analysis, emphasize the significance/consequence of findings, and indicate the
wider applications derived from the main points of the project’s requirements. Finally,
you will conclude the findings of the external environment analysis.
References:
Course Material:
Theme: Executing Strategy Through Organizational Design
Strategic Management
Mastering Strategic Management: CHAPTER 9 ONLY
https://www.opentextbooks.org.hk/ditatopic/17315
Getting Organized Redesigned Right
https://www.mckinsey.com/capabilities/people-and-organizational-performance/ourinsights/getting-organizational-redesign-right
Its not the CEO it’s the leadership strategy that matters!:
https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/its-ceo-leadership-strategy-matters-nicolas-schoenlaub
Value Based Management Analyzing Organizational Culture:
https://www.valuebasedmanagement.net/methods_schein_three_levels_culture.html
Chapter 1 Strategy and Corporate Culture:
Starbucks Corporation is an American multinational chain of coffeehouses and roastery reserves headquartered in Seattle, Washington. Starbucks is the premier roaster, marketer and retailer of specialty coffee in the world, operating in 81 markets. Starbucks’ financial statements are provided in the supplementary material file. Credit Analysisa. Calculate the firm’s current and quick ratios in 2018 and 2019. b. Calculate the firm’s times interest earned ratio and EBITDA coverage ratio in 2019 and 2018. c. Calculate the firm’s CFO-to-total debt and FCF-to-total debt ratios in 2018 and 2019.d. Calculate the firm’s liabilities-to-equity ratio and total debt-to-equity ratio in 2018 and 2019. e. Based on (a) and (d), comment on the trend in the firm’s liquidity risk and solvency risk between the years.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Balance Sheets for the fiscal years 2019 and 2018
1
Balance Sheets for the fiscal years 2018 and 2017
2
Income statements for the fiscal years 2019, 2018 and 2017
Information on the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, Bad Debt Expenses and Write-Offs
Let’s assume that Starbucks discloses the following table in its annual reports:
3
Cash flow statements for the fiscal years 2019, 2018 and 2017
4
Pick one of the articles included in the corresponding Module. The intention is to develop critical thinking by looking into the two sides of an issue in Non-Profit Marketing. So, you will have to search on your own for an additional source to cite, and in 200 words, no less, answer the following questions:What is (or are) the main message(s)? Be thorough and professional.How does he/she/they support his/her/their arguments?Pinpoint facts, stats, references, cite, if possibleWhat are the opposing views?Cite and analyzeWhat are your views on the matter?Balance the two positions.In your own words, discuss the applicability of the piece.
Please diagram a supply chain of a well know companyCreate your diagram in Powerpoint. Make an effort to present a “picture” of the supply chain that could be used to communicate with the colleagues at your company about an issue of importance in SCM at your firm.In the same Powerpoint file (on a separate slide or two), briefly describe the supply chain that you are diagramming and present one significant strategic challenge that the supply chain is facing. Write a minimum of 300 words. Clearly state the situation, give examples, facts, statistics, and/or quotes to aid the reader. Cite the text book, lecture content, or an outside reference. Use proper grammar and spelling.
Weekly Planner
Complete the following steps to plan your weekly calendar.
Review DataLocker’s historic data to help you understand how you can plan your weekly calendar.
Drag and drop or select the activities you want to put in your calendar. Remember to plan your time effectively.
Work Around Planned Meetings
You will find several pre-populated meetings that can’t be removed. These are based on the previous weeks’
activities. They were generated as such: prospecting last week generated discovery calls this week, and demos next
week/deals closed.
Using the provided historic data, calculate the number of prospects per hour so you can plan your week and reach
the target number of prospects. You should derive the average number of prospects per hour from the given historic
data. By analyzing the data, you can derive the prospects per hour, discovery calls per hour, demo prep per hour,
and demonstrations per hour.
You should also analyze the ratios between prospect conversions to discovery calls, discovery calls to
demonstrations, demo preps to demonstrations, and demonstrations to deals closed.
Not scheduling a 1-on-1 meeting with your manager or demo prep can negatively impact your number of prospects,
discovery calls, and demos to deals closed.
Note: DataLocker is trying to hit 47 prospects this week. You will need to schedule the right amount of prospecting
hours to meet the prospect goal.
I’m not quiet understanding what to do and how to figure out where to drag each box. I would like to
learn.
Review the clips from You Be the Judge – Religious Discrimination: Case Argument., Defendant Profile, Plaintiff Profile., Defendant Reaction., Plaintiff Reaction..
Review the cases:
EEOC v. Alamo Rent-A-Car LLC Download EEOC v. Alamo Rent-A-Car LLC, 432 F. Supp. 2d 1006 (D. Ariz. 2006)
Tiano v. Dillards Department Stores, Inc. Download Tiano v. Dillards Department Stores, Inc., 139 F.3d 679 (9th Cir. 1998)
Cloutier v. Costco Wholesale Corp Download Cloutier v. Costco Wholesale Corp., 390 F.3d 126, 136 (1st Cir. 2004)
Assume the role of the judge in the burger joint case. Analyze the legal issues presented by the parties and state how you would rule on each of the issues presented. Remember that your ruling should be based on your legal analysis and not on your own personal views. Use the IRAC method to apply the law to the facts and reach a legal conclusion based on your analysis.
Your legal analysis should summarize the legal framework that applies to religious discrimination cases under Title VII (see EEOC v. Alamo Rent-A-Car LLC [2006], Tiano v. Dillard Department Stores, Inc. [1998], and Cloutier v. Costco Wholesale Corp. [2004]) and then:
Determine whether Ms. Djarra established a prima facie case of religious discrimination against her by Mr. Johnson.
Discuss whether Mr. Johnson made a good faith effort to offer reasonable accommodations to Ms. Djarra or whether Mr. Johnson could not reasonably accommodate Ms. Djarra without undue hardship.
Identify the types of damages available under Title VII and the type and amount of damages to be awarded to Ms. Djarra, if any.
The Religious Discrimination – Reasonable Accommodations analysis
Must be four to five double-spaced pages in length (not including title and references pages) formatted in APA style
Must use at least four credible sources in addition to the course text.
Should follow the IRAC method
Based on the conversation with Guest Speaker 6, Answer the following questions:What were the three major points you learned? Why did those points resonate with you? Explain.What points or information you found questionable or disagree with? Explain why.Based on what you have learned, what will you do as a hospitality and tourism student or a professional? For example, will you, in some way, behave differently? Will you do further investigations or readings? Are there things you will observe more closely or in a different way?
STR Number
204159
135559
135922
153071
104254
106817
100239
166522
106947
104261
104262
107623
100742
107561
106802
107134
197848
138466
138480
107572
138819
123235
107555
107624
107557
128147
140093
139677
138483
147089
102947
100739
138428
100375
105110
105135
105148
105162
107704
170912
105169
154510
105161
105106
154531
105153
Hotel Name
Alt Hotel Toronto Airport
Hampton Inn Toronto Airport
Fairfield Inn & Suites Toronto Airport
Hilton Garden Inn Toronto Airport
Comfort Inn Toronto Airport
Four Points by Sheraton Toronto Airport
Hilton Toronto Airport Hotel & Suites
Hilton Garden Inn Toronto Airport West Mississauga
Days Inn Toronto West Mississauga
DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel Toronto Airport West
Holiday Inn Express & Suites Toronto Airport West
Quality Inn & Suites Mississauga
Comfort Inn Airport West
Sandman Signature Mississauga
Best Western Plus Toronto Airport Hotel
Closed – Independent Toronto Mississauga
TownePlace Suites Toronto Mississauga
Courtyard Mississauga Airport Corporate Centre West
Residence Inn Mississauga Airport Corporate Center West
Sheraton Hotel Gateway In Toronto Intrntl Airport
Comfort Inn Mississauga
Edwards Inn Toronto Mississauga
Four Points by Sheraton Toronto Mississauga
White Knight Motel
Monte Carlo Inn Airport Suites
Holiday Inn Express & Suites Toronto Mississauga
Staybridge Suites Toronto Mississauga
Super 8 Mississauga
Homewood Suites by Hilton Toronto Mississauga
Radisson Toronto Airport West
Quality Inn & Suites Brampton
Comfort Inn Brampton
Courtyard Toronto Brampton
Closed Seahorse Motel Toronto
Shore Breeze Motel
Hilcrest Motel
North American Motel
Silver Moon Motel
Cruise Motel
Closed – Independent Beach Motel
Closed West Point Motor Hotel
Stay Inn Etobicoke
The Sherway Inn
Canadas Best Value Inn Toronto
Old Mill Inn & Spa
Queensway Motel
107212
105166
100139
134392
167482
167816
100738
104271
105152
105096
107575
105111
100247
100297
105167
100137
105134
170895
105119
138948
105125
133551
106925
105095
100066
105155
106808
150003
138227
152001
107079
234626
105157
105124
199500
100250
171392
107553
100267
100365
105165
134194
105131
105129
212047
139361
122328
Deluxe Motel
Closed – Independent Valhalla Inn
Closed Ramada Hotel Toronto Airport
Best Western Plus Travel Hotel Toronto Airport
Hampton Inn Toronto Airport Corporate Centre
Homewood Suites by Hilton Toronto Airport Corporate Centre
Four Points by Sheraton Toronto Airport East
Closed – Independent Moosonee Lodge
Etobicoke Inn
Holiday Inn Toronto Airport East
Radisson Suite Hotel Toronto Airport
Delta Hotel Toronto Airport & Conference Centre
Marriott Toronto Airport Hotel
Sheraton Hotel Toronto Airport & Conference Center
DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel Toronto Airport
Holiday Inn Toronto International Airport
Closed Heritage Inn
Closed – Independent Heritage Inn
Closed Ascot Inn
Best Western Premier Toronto Airport Carlingview Hotel
Hotel Carlingview Toronto Airport
Courtyard Toronto Airport
Embassy Suites by Hilton Toronto Airport
The Westin Toronto Airport
Crowne Plaza Toronto Airport
Rocky Mountain Resort
Comfort Hotel Airport North
Woodbine Hotel & Suites
Residence Inn Toronto Airport
Sandman Signature Toronto Airport
Days Inn Toronto East Beaches
The Broadview Hotel
The Roehampton Hotel
Bradgate Arms
Four Seasons Toronto
Marriott Toronto Bloor Yorkville Hotel
Isabella Hotel & Suites
Closed – Clarion Hotel & Suites Selby
The Anndore House
Courtyard Toronto Downtown
Town Inn Suites
Jarvis House
Closed Hampton Court Hotel
Closed – Independent Minto Furnished Suites
Royal Oak Inn
The Pembroke Inn
Closed – Hilton Garden Inn Toronto City Centre
217766
136917
154218
134182
139583
184137
100268
105098
100187
105123
105142
107059
105173
100737
138326
102305
105150
100144
106803
105100
107577
199774
138557
105097
100279
107622
193568
193005
100240
105159
105163
105138
211734
143192
100249
100162
105168
171099
170625
107482
102320
106926
251184
105113
105115
107211
107209
Ascend Collection The Saint James Hotel
Pantages Hotel Toronto Centre
Dundas Square Hotel
Grand Hotel & Suites Toronto
Econo Lodge Inn & Suites Downtown
Closed – Comfort Inn City Centre Toronto
Ramada Plaza Toronto Downtown
Holiday Inn Toronto Downtown Centre
Closed – Best Western Primrose Hotel Downtown Toronto
Bond Place Hotel
Omni King Edward Hotel
Cambridge Suites Toronto
Whitehouse Hotel
Holiday Inn Express Toronto Downtown
Executive Hotel Cosmopolitan Toronto
Hotel Victoria
Novotel Toronto Centre
Closed Colony Toronto Downtown
DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel Toronto Downtown
Chelsea Hotel Toronto
Marriott Downtown At CF Toronto Eaton Centre
Shangri-La Hotel Toronto
One King West Hotel
Hilton Toronto
Sheraton Hotel Centre Toronto
Camberley Club Hotel
The St Regis Toronto
Le Germain Hotel Maple Leaf Square
Westin Harbour Castle
Fairmont Royal York
Strathcona Hotel Downtown Toronto
Radisson Admiral Hotel Toronto Harbourfront
Delta Hotel Toronto
The Hazelton Hotel
Park Hyatt Toronto
Closed – Four Seasons Hotel Toronto
Hotel 89
Madison Manor Boutique Hotel
Annex Guest House
Closed – Independent The Casa Loma Inn
InterContinental Toronto Yorkville
Closed – Holiday Inn Toronto Bloor Yorkville
Kimpton Saint George
Closed – Independent Sutton Place Hotel
Closed The Windsor Arms Hotel
Waverly Hotel
Closed – Independent Bay Bloor Executive Suites
134195
106767
138074
148066
135778
107210
106948
105102
195568
229970
155367
152897
105104
181938
142405
135137
139935
191414
220203
220559
133180
105141
105144
105126
107584
105099
220027
194588
100741
145767
107127
104992
107686
134530
134531
133148
135152
139974
100280
107560
134183
104784
107550
104785
154842
201499
128324
Windsor Arms
The Alexandra
Studio 6 Toronto
Super 8 Toronto City Center Ontario
Le Germain Hotel Toronto
Marriott Toronto City Centre Hotel
Hyatt Regency Toronto
Closed – Travelodge Toronto
Templar Hotel
Bisha Toronto Hotel & Residences
Hilton Garden Inn Toronto Downtown
Thompson Hotels Toronto
InterContinental Toronto Centre
Ritz-Carlton Toronto
Residence Inn Toronto Downtown Entertainment District
The Soho Hotel
The Drake
Gladstone Hotel
Urban Living Suites
Hotel X Toronto
Howard Johnson Toronto Downtown West
Closed – Four Points Toronto Lakeshore
Closed Lakeshore Inn
Closed Regal Constellation Hotel
Markham Inn
Courtyard Toronto Northeast Markham
TownePlace Suites Toronto Northeast Markham
Monte Carlo Inn & Suites Downtown Markham
Comfort Inn Toronto Northeast
Monte Carlo Inn Toronto Markham
Park Inn Toronto Markham
Closed – Independent Disera Motel
Closed – Independent West Lake Resort
Residence Inn Toronto Markham
Courtyard Toronto Markham
Staybridge Suites Toronto-Markham
Hilton Garden Inn Toronto Markham
Holiday Inn Express & Suites Toronto Markham
Sheraton Hotel & Suites Parkway Toronto North
Best Western Parkway Hotel Toronto North
Travelodge Richmond Hill
Summit Motel
Emerald Isle Motel
Closed Colonial Motel
Novotel Toronto Vaughan Center
aloft Hotel Vaughan Mills
Super 8 Toronto North Vaughan
104991
189758
192154
134260
140112
139788
139771
105365
105366
104995
147658
210936
236131
102559
105154
100270
105103
105140
105147
105118
105146
105108
105130
105107
105114
100296
104845
134388
105132
105120
105145
105158
105116
105133
105171
105151
105160
100744
105122
105127
105172
105105
133648
105117
100142
104843
105170
Closed – Independent Concordian Motel
Homewood Suites by Hilton Toronto Vaughan
Springhill Suites Toronto Vaughan
Courtyard Toronto Vaughan
Residence Inn Toronto Vaughan
Monte Carlo Inn Vaughan Suites
Hilton Garden Inn Toronto Vaughan
New Woodbine Motel
Vaughan Motel
Staybridge Suites Toronto Vaughan South
Homewood Suites by Hilton Toronto Markham
Hampton Inn Toronto Markham
Marriott Toronto Markham
Hilton Toronto Markham Conference Centre & Spa
Travelodge Toronto East
Closed – Independent Inn @ The Creek
Closed The Guild Inn
Idlewood Inn
Montoro Motel
Andrews Motor Lodge
Maple Leaf Motel
New Plaza Motel
Grand Motel
Closed New Lido Motel
Knights Inn Toronto at Kingston Rd
Closed Howard Johnson Plaza Hotel East Toronto
Holiday Inn Express Toronto East Scarborough
Best Western Plus Executive Inn
Hav A Nap Motel
Avon Motel
Manor Motel
Royal Motel
Americana Motel
Henrys Motel
White Star Motel
Park Motel
Roycroft Motel
Closed – Comfort Inn East Scarborough
Super 8 Scarborough Toronto East
East Side Motel
White Swan Motel
Closed BEST WESTERN Toronto
Days Inn Toronto East Lakeview
Andrews Motel
Knights Inn Toronto East
Scarborough Inn
Delta Hotel Toronto East
138638
106972
100225
253092
105149
100251
100163
102022
100254
152907
107593
100224
105112
103653
100740
105156
107570
100600
107706
100141
BMO Institute For Learning
Radisson Hotel Toronto East
Edward Village Hotel
Mary-am Hotel North York
Novotel Toronto North York
Westin Prince Toronto
Closed Inn On The Park
Closed Toronto Don Valley Hotel
Toronto Don Valley Hotel & Suites
Schulich Executive Learning Center
Montecassino Hotel & Suites
Toronto Plaza Airport Hotel
Closed Travelodge Triumph Plaza Hotel
Closed – Independent Bay Village Motel
Comfort Inn Toronto North
Best Western Plus Toronto North York Hotel & Suites
Holiday Inn Express Toronto North York
Closed – Independent Glen Grove Suites
Yorkdale Inn
Holiday Inn Toronto Yorkdale
Address 1
6080 Viscount Rd
3279 Caroga Dr
3299 Caroga Dr
3311 Caroga Dr
6355 Airport Rd
6257 Airport Rd
5875 Airport Rd
1870 Matheson Blvd
4635 Tomken Rd
5444 Dixie Rd
5599 Ambler Dr
5585 Ambler Dr
1500 Matheson Blvd
5400 Dixie Rd
5825 Dixie Rd
5050 Orbitor Dr
5050 Orbitor Dr
5050 Creekbank Rd
5070 Creekbank Rd
Terminal 3
31 Topflight Dr
7040 Edwards Blvd
6090 Dixie Rd
6965 Dixie Rd
7035 Edwards Blvd
40 Admiral Blvd
6791 Hurontario St
6625 Kennedy Rd
6430 Edwards Blvd
175 Derry Rd E
30 Clark Blvd
5 Rutherford Rd S
90 Biscayne Cres
2095 Lakeshore Blvd W
2175 Lake Shore Blvd
2143 Lake Shore Blvd W
2147 Lake Shore Blvd
2157 Lake Shore Blvd
2083 Lakeshore Blvd W
2183 Lake Shore Blvd W
2285 Lake Shore
560 Evans Ave
619 Evans Ave
650 Evans Ave
21 Old Mill Rd
638 The Queensway
City
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Mississauga
Brampton
Brampton
Brampton
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Etobicoke
Etobicoke
Toronto
Etobicoke
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
State
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1554 The Queensway
1 Valhalla Inn Rd
2 Holiday Dr
5503 Eglinton Ave W
5515 Eglinton Ave W
5515 Eglinton Ave W
2180 Islington Ave
65 Enterprise Rd
240 Belfield Rd
600 Dixon Rd
640 Dixon Rd
655 Dixon Rd
901 Dixon Rd
801 Dixon Rd
925 Dixon Rd
970 Dixon Rd
385 Rexdale Blvd
385 Rexdale Blvd
534 Rexdale Blvd
135 Carlingview Dr
221 Carlingview Dr
231 Carlingview Dr
262 Carlingview Dr
950 Dixon Rd
33 Carlson Ct
Rexdale Blvd & Hwy 27
445 Rexdale Blvd
30 Vice Regent Blvd
17 Reading Ct
55 Reading Ct
1684 Queen St E
106 Broadview Ave
808 Mount Pleasant Rd
54 Foxbar Rd
60 Yorkville Ave
90 Bloor St E
556 Sherbourne St
592 Sherbourne St
15 Charles St E
475 Yonge St
620 Church St
344 Jarvis St
415 Jarvis St
40 St Mary St
376 Dundas St E
117 Pembroke St
200 Dundas St E
Etobicoke
Etobicoke
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Etobicoke
Moosonee
Etobicoke
Toronto
Etobicoke
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Etobicoke
Toronto
Rexdale
Toronto
Rexdale
Etobicoke
Etobicoke
Toronto
Etobicoke
Toronto
Toronto
Woodbine
Etobicoke
Etobicoke
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
26 Gerrard St E
200 Victoria St
223 Church St
225 Jarvis St
335 Jarvis St
321 Jarvis St
300 Jarvis St
30 Carlton St
111 Carlton St
65 Dundas St E
37 King St E
15 Richmond St E
76 Church St
111 Lombard St
8 Colborne St
56 Yonge St
45 The Esplanade
89 Chestnut St
108 Chestnut St
33 Gerrard St W
525 Bay St
188 University Ave
1 King St W
145 Richmond St W
123 Queen St W
40 King St W
325 Bay St
75 Bremner Blvd
1 Harbour Sq
100 Front St W
60 York St
249 Queens Quay W
75 Lower Simcoe St
118 Yorkville Ave
4 Avenue Rd
21 Avenue Rd
89 Avenue Rd
20 Madison Ave
83 Spadina Rd
21 Walmer Rd
220 Bloor St W
280 Bloor St W
280 Bloor St W
955 Bay St
22 St Thomas St
484 Spanina Ave
1101 Bay St
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
18 St Thomas St
77 Ryerson Ave
165 Grange Ave
222 Spadina Ave
30 Mercer St
1 Blue Jays Way
370 King St W
621 King St W
348 Adelaide St W
80 Blue Jays Way
92 Peter St
550 Wellington St W
225 Front St W
181 Wellington St W
255 Wellington St W
318 Wellington St W
1150 Queen St W
1214 Queen St W
787 Dundas St W
111 Princes’ Blvd
14 Roncesvalles Ave
1926 Lakeshore Blvd W
2000 Lakeshore Blvd
900 Dixon Rd
50 East Valhalla Dr
7095 Woodbine Ave
7095 Woodbine Ave
7255 Warden Ave
8330 Woodbine Ave
8900 Woodbine Ave
555 Cochrane Dr
7890 Bathurst St
3 Candice Gate
55 Minthorn Blvd
65 Minthorn Blvd
355 South Park Rd
300 Commerce Valley Dr E
10 E Pearce St
600 Highway 7 E
600 Hwy 7 E
10711 Yonge St
11610 Yonge St
8700 Yonge St N
9046 Yonge St
200 Bass Pro Mills Dr
151 Bass Pro Mills Dr
3400 Steeles Ave W
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Etobicoke
Markham
Markham
Markham
Markham
Markham
Markham
Markham
Thornhill
Thornhill
Markham
Markham
Markham
Thornhill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Richmond Hill
Vaughan
Vaughan
Toronto
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
7818 Dufferin St
610 Applewood Cres
612 Applewood Cres
150 Interchange Way
11 Interchange Way
705 Applewood Cres
3201 Hwy 7
7242 Hwy 27
RR 1 6700 Hwy 7
3600 Steeles Ave W
50 Bodrington Ct
52 Bodrington Ct
170 Enterprise Blvd
8500 Warden Ave
20 Milner Business Ct
1625 Military Trl
201 Guildwood Pkwy
4212 Kingston Rd
4274 Kingston Rd
4434 Kingston Rd
4540 Kingston Rd
4584 Kingston Rd
4626 Kingston Rd
4674 Kingston Rd
4694 Kingston Rd
940 Progress Ave
50 Estate Dr
38 Estate Dr
2733 Kingston Rd
2800 Kingston Rd
2740 Kingston Rd
2746 Kingston Rd
2757 Kingston Rd
2785 Kingston Rd
2815 Kingston Rd
3126 Kingston Rd
3137 Kingston Rd
3306 Kingston Rd
3280 Kingston Rd
3300 Kingston Rd
3370 Kingston Rd
2121 Kingston Rd
2151 Kingston Rd
2245 Kingston Rd
22 Metropolitan Rd
8 Dowry St
2035 Kennedy Rd
Thornhill
Vaughan
Vaughan
Toronto
Vaughan
Vaughan
Vaughan
Woodbridge
Woodbridge
Vaughan
Markham
Markham
Markham
Markham
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
West Hill
Toronto
Scarbrough
Toronto
Scarborough
West Hill
Toronto
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Toronto
Scarborough
Scarbrough
Toronto
Scarborough
Toronto
Toronto
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Toronto
Toronto
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
Scarborough
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
3550 Pharmacy Ave
55 Hallcrown Pl
185 Yorkland Blvd
170 Willowdale Ave
3 Park Home Ave
900 York Mills Rd
1100 Eglinton Ave E
1100 Eglinton Ave E
175 Wynford Dr
56 Fine Arts Rd
3710 Chesswood Dr
1677 Wilson Ave
2737 Keele St
103 Snowood Ct
66 Norfinch Dr
50 Norfinch Dr
30 Norfinch Dr
2837 Yonge St
3080 Dufferin
3450 Dufferin St
Toronto
North York
Toronto
North York
North York
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Downsview
Toronto
North York
Downsville
North York
North York
North York
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Country
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Postal Code
L4V 0A1
L4V 1A3
L4V 1A3
L4V 1A3
L4V 1E4
L4V 1E4
L4V 1N1
L4W 0B3
L4W 1J9
L4W 2L2
L4W 3Z1
L4W 3Z1
L4W 3Z4
L4W 4T4
L4W 4V7
L4W 4X2
L4W 4X2
L4W 5R2
L4W 5R2
L5P 1C4
L5S 1Y1
L5S 1Z1
L5T 1A6
L5T 1A8
L5T 2H8
L5T 2W1
L5T 2W1
L5T 2W4
L5T 2Y3
L5T 2Z7
L6W 1X3
L6W 3J3
L6W 4S1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A1
M8V 1A6
M8W 2W1
M8W 2W4
M8W 2W6
M8X 1G5
M8Y 1K3
Rooms
153
200
170
224
99
205
419
152
60
264
178
125
115
224
164
0
173
94
133
474
55
69
145
55
103
92
84
74
108
100
133
102
159
0
17
45
37
24
40
0
0
65
25
47
57
30
Continent
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Sub-Continent
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
M8Z 1T5
M9B 1S9
M9C 2Z7
M9C 5K5
M9C 5K5
M9C 5K5
M9P 3P1
M9W 1C4
M9W 1H3
M9W 1J1
M9W 1J1
M9W 1J3
M9W 1J5
M9W 1J5
M9W 1J8
M9W 1J9
M9W 1R9
M9W 1R9
M9W 1S2
M9W 5E7
M9W 5E8
M9W 5E8
M9W 5G1
M9W 5N4
M9W 6H5
M9W 6K5
M9W 6K5
M9W 7A4
M9W 7K7
M9W 7K7
M4L 1G6
M4M 2G1
M4P 2L2
M4V 2G6
M4W 0A4
M4W 1A7
M4X 1L3
M4X 1L4
M4Y 1S1
M4Y 1X7
M4Y 2G2
M4Y 2G6
M4Y 2G8
M4Y 2S8
M5A 2A5
M5A 2N9
M5A 4R6
48
0
0
80
126
128
200
0
96
192
216
433
424
249
292
451
0
0
0
119
112
168
255
290
528
171
175
54
137
256
50
58
109
115
259
258
39
0
113
575
200
11
0
0
25
50
0
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
M5B 1G3
M5B 1V8
M5B 1Y7
M5B 2C1
M5B 2C2
M5B 2C2
M5B 2C5
M5B 2E9
M5B 2G3
M5B 2G8
M5C 1E9
M5C 1N2
M5C 2G1
M5C 2T9
M5E 1E1
M5E 1G5
M5E 1W2
M5G 1R1
M5G 1R3
M5G 1Z4
M5G 2L2
M5H 0A3
M5H 1A1
M5H 2L2
M5H 2M9
M5H 3Y2
M5H 4G3
M5J 0A1
M5J 1A6
M5J 1E3
M5J 1S8
M5J 2N5
M5J 3A6
M5R 1C2
M5R 2E8
M5R 2G1
M5R 2G3
M5R 2S1
M5R 2T1
M5R 2W7
M5S 1T8
M5S 1V8
M5S 1V8
M5S 2A2
M5S 2B9
M5S 2H1
M5S 2W8
36
106
26
177
50
0
102
513
0
285
301
230
35
195
75
56
262
0
490
1590
461
202
330
600
1372
54
258
167
977
1339
194
157
567
77
0
0
71
23
18
0
209
0
188
0
0
62
0
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
M5S 3E7
M5T 2V4
M5T 2V5
M5T 3B3
M5V 1H3
M5V 1J4
M5V 1J9
M5V 1M5
M5V 1R7
M5V 2G3
M5V 2G5
M5V 2V4
M5V 2X3
M5V 3G7
M5V 3P9
M5V 3T4
M6J 1J3
M6J 1J6
M6J 1V2
M6K 3C3
M6R 2K3
M6S 1A1
M6S 1A2
M9W 1J7
L3R 0A3
L3R 1A3
L3R 1A3
L3R 1B4
L3R 2N8
L3R 5K6
L3R 8E3
L3T 4A5
L3T 4R8
L3T 7N5
L3T 7N5
L3T 7W2
L3T 7X3
L4B 0A8
L4B 1B2
L4B 1B2
L4C 3E1
L4C 4Y6
L4C 6Z5
L4C 6Z8
L4K 0B9
L4K 0E6
L4K 1A2
28
55
79
91
122
348
394
0
27
96
224
105
584
263
256
89
19
37
41
404
43
0
0
0
204
187
112
134
140
83
172
0
0
100
144
120
145
117
311
127
60
29
68
0
149
131
100
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
L4K 1B1
L4K 4B4
L4K 4B4
L4K 5P7
L4K 5W3
L4K 5W8
L4K 5Z7
L4L 1A5
L4L 1A5
L4L 8P5
L6G 0A9
L6G 0A9
L6G 0E6
L6G 1A5
M1B 3C6
M1C 1B1
M1E 1P6
M1E 2M6
M1E 2M8
M1E 2N6
M1E 2N8
M1E 2P4
M1E 2P6
M1E 2P9
M1E 2P9
M1G 3T5
M1H 2Z1
M1H 2Z1
M1M 1M6
M1M 1M7
M1M 1M7
M1M 1M7
M1M 1M8
M1M 1M9
M1M 1N1
M1M 1P2
M1M 1P3
M1M 1P8
M1M 1P8
M1M 1P8
M1M 1R2
M1N 1T5
M1N 1T5
M1N 1T8
M1R 2T6
M1S 1B8
M1T 3G2
0
140
175
144
132
130
155
19
50
184
101
99
209
502
148
0
0
47
17
29
45
30
23
0
62
0
140
95
15
33
13
25
12
12
16
17
39
0
49
52
43
0
61
27
91
61
367
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
Canada
M1W 3Z3
M2J 4R1
M2J 4R2
M2N 4Y6
M2N 6L3
M3B 3H2
M3C 1H8
M3C 1H8
M3C 1J3
M3J 1P3
M3J 2W4
M3L 1A5
M3M 2E9
M3N 1E7
M3N 1X1
M3N 1X1
M3N 1X1
M4N 2J6
M6A 2S6
M6A 2V1
150
238
194
13
260
395
0
0
353
60
104
199
0
0
139
145
163
0
70
370
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
Americas
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
North America
Market
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Toronto
Sub-Market
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Open Date
201207
200303
200403
200904
196905
198911
197101
200908
198810
197706
198211
199006
198206
199006
198901
198806
201208
200511
200508
199107
200510
199906
198906
199102
200008
200706
200604
200506
200906
198406
198606
200510
200306
200109
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Airport/West
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
196306
196206
200009
201003
201003
198812
199103
198606
199112
195406
198607
197106
198501
197006
196706
196705
199105
197806
200105
199001
197406
198206
198710
200804
200503
200804
199206
201707
197406
201210
197506
191006
195506
195706
197106
201312
200512
200003
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
201408
200403
192106
200106
200512
194206
197602
197704
197506
191006
199101
200506
191106
198706
197206
198903
197506
199109
201208
200508
198710
197206
198806
201201
201011
197406
192906
194506
198506
201411
200708
192906
197206
195506
200402
199101
199007
201806
196706
192706
197806
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtown
Toronto Downtow
This is a DBA research class. There are 6 task that has to be completed and 6 discussions . Each task is individual. You can’t do TASK 2 if you haven’t received a passing grade on TASK 1, and you can’t move on to TASK 3, if you haven’t received a passing grade on TASK 1 and TASK 2. This is an 8 weeks course.
However, there are only 6 TASK. There is also a change matrix. Whatever
correction that are mentioned by the teacher, the corrections has to be
made and the work has to be resubmitted. I would like to continue with
the same person once the work has begun. I need someone who understands the requirement and is
willing to do the work, put in the time, and follow the instructions
precisely. I’ve attached the instructions. Please make sure you’re
always available for the 8 weeks once the class has begun. The change
matrix is important and has to be completed as well during the course.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BUSI 885
DISCUSSION ASSIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS
In this course, you will participate in 7 Discussions. The purpose of these discussions is to ensure
that you and your chair understand the work that you have done and the steps needed to finish.
For each discussion, you will write a short, informal thread detailing your work up to this current
module. Your thread should be between 150 – 400 words. No peer replies are required for this
assignment; however, you are encouraged to read your peers’ threads and provide
encouragement to build community.
Doctor of Business Administration
Liberty University
School of Business
BUSI 885
DBA Research Concept Guide
V2.0
1971 University Boulevard
Lynchburg, VA 24515-2269
BusinessDoctoralPrograms@liberty.edu
434-582-3000
March 10, 2020
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Table of Contents
Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
General Guidance……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Study Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Paradigms …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4
Methodology ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
Concept Alignment in a Research Project……………………………………………………………………….. 8
Where to Study & Sample Size ……………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Assignment Instructions…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline ……………………………………………………………………………… 10
Task 2: Research Questions ………………………………………………………………………………………… 12
Task 3: Methodology …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14
Task 4: Research Framework Outline …………………………………………………………………………… 16
Task 5: Draft Research Concept…………………………………………………………………………………… 18
Task 6: Final Research Concept …………………………………………………………………………………… 21
March 10, 2020
Page 2 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Overview
You have reached this point because you have passed all DBA core classes and you are ready to
develop a research concept for your Applied Doctoral Research Project (ADRP). As you work
your way through this course you will conduct research and develop the key elements of a viable
doctoral level research project, culminating in an approved ADRP Concept Paper. While your final
research concept will be approved by your Research Chair once you start your ADRP courses, the
work you put in here will give you a solid starting point and help ensure that you are able to hit
the ground running.
You are no longer a student – This course marks the start of your transition from student to
doctoral candidate. This is a significant milestone that shifts the burden from a professor in a course
teaching you things you do not know to you applying what you have already learned! Your
professor is here to evaluate your work and point out areas for improvement, not teach you how to
accomplish each task. You are responsible for reviewing the guidelines provided and submitting
work that is compliant them. When you hit a roadblock or do not understand a particular aspect of
your research project you need to be able to work your way through the issue by studying the
problem, conducting further research, and determining the best solution.
The DBA ADRP Research Concept Paper will be developed incrementally. Each task listed below
allows you to focus on one aspect of the research concept and then use the approved tasks to build
up to the completed document. It is important that you use approved tasks when you start
combining them into a single document. If you do need to make changes to a previously approved
document, you need to coordinate that with your professor. Finally, do not move to the next task
in the sequence until the current one is approved. As described, these build upon each other so
working ahead could result in significant revisions!
The following tasks will be completed in this course:
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Task 2: Research Questions
Task 3: Methodology
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
Task 5: Draft Research Concept
Task 6: Final Research Concept
Submitting your work – This course is self-paced and you must complete all tasks in order to pass
and move on to the ADRP. Only work on one task at a time and do not move to the next task until
the current one has been approved (Grade of ‘1’ Posted). You can submit your work as soon as
you complete it, just be sure to email your instructor to let them know that you have submitted a
task for review.
March 10, 2020
Page 3 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
General Guidance
This section provides general guidance related to research paradigms, research study type,
methodology, research framework, study location, and sample size. Please review this information
carefully. There are specific research types and methods associated with the degree plan you are
pursuing.
Research Study Type
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990, the Research Study type is a Dissertation
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890, the Research Study type can be either a Case
Study Project or a Consulting Project
Note: Students wishing to conduct the consulting project should be sure to include BUSI 830,
Case Study Research Methods and Consulting Techniques, in their degree plan to gain a better
understanding of the Lean Six Sigma tools that must be used in the research project.
With the dissertation or case study project approach, the student begins by researching the
literature to find a problem, develops a research proposal to study the problem, and then finds an
organization within which to study the problem. With the consulting project approach, the student
begins with an organization with a problem, researches the literature to better understand the
problem, and then develops a proposed solution to the problem. In all three cases, a problem
statement based upon the current literature must be developed.
Research Paradigms
A research paradigm is essentially a worldview that a researcher brings to their study. It represents
the researcher’s view of reality or truth. While there is ongoing discussion regarding which
paradigms exist in the modern research community, it is useful to focus on Positivism, PostPositivism, Constructivism, and Pragmatism for most researchers. Researchers should conduct
independent research on this topic to understand what their research paradigm is as it will shape
how the researcher approaches the problem being studied. It is also important to note that while
some paradigms lend themselves better to certain methodologies, the choice of methodology does
not change the paradigm. This is part of who the researcher is and how they view the world. For
this course and the research project, the researcher should identify which of the following best
describes their view of the world and reality. The researcher should also be able to describe why
that is the case:
Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover.
Post-Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover with the knowledge
that we never will fully understand it.
Constructivism – Reality is determined by the individual and the researcher seeks to
understand that view of reality.
Pragmatism – Focus on the ‘problem’ rather than the view of reality, using any tools
available to understand the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 4 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Methodology
The methodology is how the researcher will study the problem at a very high level, all research
will be conducted using one of the following research approaches. The researcher will need to be
able to explain the application and benefits of each type of research:
Fixed Design using Quantitative Methods
Flexible Design using Qualitative Methods
Mixed-Methods Design using Quantitative and Qualitative Methods
Fixed Designs are fully defined (fixed) as part of the research proposal and following the proposal,
the researcher executes the research and analysis using quantitative tools as described in the
research proposal. Flexible designs on the other hand are defined in a general sense as part of the
research proposal and following the proposal, the researcher is free to adjust (flexible) the research
as is necessary using qualitative tools as described. Mixed-Methods Designs as the name implies,
use a combination of both in relatively equal amounts. This should not be confused with a Flexible
Design that might use a small number of quantitative methods to provide for triangulation of the
data found through the primary qualitative methods, such as the use of descriptive statistics to
show demographics or other relevant numerical data. The choice of research approach is guided
by the research problem, purpose, and research questions.
Within each research approach, there are specific methods (the research tool) that can be employed.
The table below lists the most common methods employed in the three research types of research
designs. Once selected, the method becomes the methodology or specific ‘research design’ for the
study. Please note that the options for conducting your research are limited based upon the track
that you are in (ADRP vs. Dissertation) and by the nature of the DBA degree (Applied Research
vs. Pure Research).
Fixed Design Methods
Flexible Design Methods
Mixed-Methods Design Methods
Experimental
Narrative
Convergent parallel
Quasi-experimental
Phenomenology
Explanatory Sequential
Nonexperimental
Grounded Theory
Exploratory Sequential
Transformative
Descriptive
Case Study
Correlational
Single Case Study
Causal-Comparative
Multiple Case Study
Ethnography
Common Methods for fixed, flexible, and mixed research designs.
March 10, 2020
Page 5 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990 (DBA Dissertation Track) the following designs &
methods can be used:
Fixed Designs
Flexible Designs
Mixed-Methods Designs
Correlational
Case Study
Convergent parallel
Causal-Comparative
Single Case Study
Multiple Case Study
Phenomenology
Ethnography
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890 (DBA Project Track) the following designs can be
used:
Consulting Project – Single Case Study with Lean Six Sigma Framework
Case Study Project – Single Case Study
Note: For the Consulting Project, the Lean Six Sigma Framework provides qualitative and
quantitative tools to be used in the DMAIC process. For the Case Study Project, quantitative tools
will be used for triangulation and descriptive statistics.
An effective way to begin the discussion of methodology is to start with the sentence: “This study
will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design
will be used”
Examples:
This study will be conducted with a flexible design using qualitative methods specifically, a single
case study design will be used.
– Or This study will be conducted with a fixed design using quantitative methods specifically, a causalcomparative design will be used.
When deciding on a methodology, pay attention to the words used in the research questions.
Qualitative research questions are those that seek to understand or explain while quantitative
research questions seek to relate or measure. The goal here is to ensure that there is alignment from
the problem statement to the research questions to the methodology. You will be required to
substantiate your choice of methodology with multiple citations. The bar is high to substantiate
Phenomenology or Ethnography.
March 10, 2020
Page 6 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Research Framework
The researcher should think of the research framework as the ‘word picture’ for the specific
problem statement. Once a person reads the framework and examines the diagram it should be
very clear what the conditions surrounding the problem are as well as how the study is connected
to the literature. Not all studies will have both concepts and theories, and flexible designs such as
a case study will typically rely more on concepts than theories.
Diagram – The research framework diagram should allow the reader to ‘see’ the problem and its
outcomes. The diagram should show 1) the inputs (constructs or variables) and how they relate to
the actors, 2) how action/information/influence flows between the actors, 3) how the actors are
influenced by concepts and theories, and 4) how the outputs (constructs or variables) are
determined. Additional research on Conceptual Frameworks and Theoretical Frameworks will
provide a better understanding of this important part of the research project.
Concepts – These are commonly held views that are not as formally defined as theories that can
be found in the literature that are central to your research problem. The researcher should be able
to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the concept. An example descriptor could be Higher Job
Satisfaction Leads to Higher Productivity. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the concept
and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will typically have
concepts.
Theories – These are formal theories that can be found in the literature that are central to the
research problem. They will have a researcher or researchers connected with them. Examples
include Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, Transformational Leadership Theory, Servant Leadership,
etc. The researcher should be able to provide the formal name of the theory, and then a discussion
of the theory and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will not
always have a theory or theories associated with them. Theories are developed as our
understanding of a problem matures and often flexible studies will be looking at relatively new
research problems.
Actors – These are the key people groups such as leaders, followers, or customers central to the
research problem, as well as the organizations such as the specific business, government entity, or
school that are central to the research problem. The researcher should be able to provide a short
‘descriptor’ for the actor followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the
problem. An example descriptor could be Executive Leaders, Project Team Members, or even
ABC University. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the actor supported by citations.
Constructs & Variables – These are the constructs and independent, mitigating, and dependent
variables found in the research study. Constructs are the broad concepts or topics in a study while
variables are measurable and vary. Independent variables can be thought of as inputs such as
leadership style, level of intrinsic motivation, or even revenue from product sales. Mitigating
variables can be used to group and could include things like gender, age, employment status.
Finally, dependent variables can be thought of as outputs such as job satisfaction, extrinsic
motivation, or productivity. The researcher should be able to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the
construct or variable followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 7 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
An example descriptor could be Leadership Effectiveness, Leadership Style, or Gross Profit.
Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the construct or variable supported by citations.
Concept Alignment in a Research Project
The reader must be able to visualize a straight line connecting the general problem, the specific
problem, the purpose statement, the research questions, and the nature of the study:
General Problem – Overarching business problem related to the candidate’s cognate with the
existence of the problem supported by current literature (less than five years).
Specific Problem – Narrowly focused market(s) / industry (s) / region(s) / organization(s) being
studied to provide insight into the general problem.
Purpose Statement – To study the specific problem, thereby giving insight into the general
problem. In a flexible design, the goal is generally to explore or to understand. In a fixed design,
the goal is generally to measure, compare, or relate.
Research Questions – The broad questions that need to be answered to provide meaningful insight
into the specific problem. These are not interview questions, they are questions that guide the
overall study. In a flexible design, these questions will seek to explain or understand and will
typically include words such as how, why, and what. In a fixed design, these questions will
generally seek to describe, measure, compare or relate variables.
Nature of the Study – The nature of the study describes the researcher’s paradigm, the research
design, and the research method. The researcher will need to be able to describe why the chosen
design and method are the best choice for the research being conducted.
Alignment exists when:
The specific problem is a subset of the general problem
The purpose statement describes a research goal that addresses the specific problem
The research questions address the specific problem and its consequences
The nature of the study identifies a design and method that is consistent with the action
word choices in the purpose statement and the word choices in the research questions
Where to Study & Sample Size
Selecting where to conduct your research study and how many participants will be guided by
several factors:
Fixed Design Dissertations – to provide for statistically significant results that can be generalized
to the overall population, you will need to use a sample size calculator (not gPower which is a
great post hoc test) to determine the right number. For large populations (over 5000) this is going
to be around 380 for each group within the sample based upon a Confidence Level (CL) of 95%
March 10, 2020
Page 8 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
and a Confidence Interval (CI) of 5%. How you define the population determines what you would
like to be able to generalize your results to, which in turn determines the sample size.
Flexible Design Dissertations – The goal here is to reach saturation which is the point at which
you are no longer gaining new information from participants. While various authors will provide
varying ranges for this, the common ground is that saturation will be reached within 25 to 30
interviews for a group.
Consulting Project or Case Study Project – Since the results are not intended to generalize (relate)
to the entire population, a single organization can be used. However, the size of the organization
will need to allow the researcher to interview between fifteen and thirty participants.
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: The researcher may contact an organization
to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study once the problem and research questions
have been approved. See Task 2.
March 10, 2020
Page 9 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Assignment Instructions
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions as a guide,
develop a bullet point outline for the problem statement. Each bullet should be a single sentence.
Following the specific problem sentence include a short sentence describing how this problem is
related to your cognate. Finally, add APA formatted references for the supporting reference
sentences. Following the outline, you will provide an annotated bibliography for each reference
provided. You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Problem Statement Bullet Outline
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years, optional bridge
supporting references sentence, see problem statement white paper)
Specific Problem Sentence
Relationship to Cognate (Not part of the problem statement)
References
Annotated Bibliography for each Reference
APA formatted reference (250 words for each reference)
Description of why this is a credible source (author(s), publication, date)
Summary of the article
Discussion of how this reference supports the existence of the general problem and the
consequences of the problem identified in the general problem sentence.
March 10, 2020
Page 10 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title your word
document as follows: LastName_Task 1 Bullet Point Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 11 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 2: Research Questions
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions and your
approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1 as a guide, develop three to four open
ended research questions that cannot be answered with a yes or no response. Good research
questions are exploratory and not leading that presuppose a cause, outcome, or relationship. Where
appropriate, develop sub-questions that address facets of the overall research questions. Following
the list of research questions, you will discuss how each research question (and sub-questions)
addresses aspects of the specific problem sentence to include the resulting consequences. Finally,
you will discuss how taken together, the research questions (and sub-questions) fully address the
specific problem statement. Include an APA formatted reference section.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (Optional)
Specific Problem Sentence
Research Question 1, use labels RQ1, RQ1a, etc.
Sub question 1a (optional)
Sub Question 1b (optional)
Research Question 2
Sub question 2a (optional)
Sub Question 2b (optional)
Research Question 3
Sub question 3a (optional)
Sub Question 3b (optional)
Research Question 4 (optional)
Sub question 4a (optional)
March 10, 2020
Page 12 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Sub Question 4b (optional)
Discussion of Research Questions
Research Question 1
Research Question 2
Research Question 3
Research Question 4 (optional)
Specific Problem Statement Coverage
Reference Section
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: Once this task is approved, you may contact
an organization to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study. You may not begin to
interview any participants or gather any data until you have the approval to do so in the ADRP
courses. Use the Permission Request Template found in Course Content. You will be submitting
your Permission Request Template in Task 6.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment tab as a word document. Title your word document as
follows: LastName_Task 2 Research Questions_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by you in a
Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the changes made will be
added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once you have made the necessary
revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal to submit
the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 13 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 3: Methodology
This is a narrative assignment rather than a bullet point outline. You will post your submission as
a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Outline for this assignment:
Introductory paragraph – For this methodology paper, including the specific problem
sentence.
Discussion of Research Paradigm
Discussion of Methodology
Summary – For this methodology paper
Reference Section
Discussion of Research Paradigm:
Begin with a theme sentence: “My research paradigm is XXX” Then discuss your research
paradigm and how this is likely to guide your study.
Discussion of Methodology:
Begin with a theme sentence: “This study will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX
method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design will be used”. Then discuss why this is the appropriate
methodology for your study.
Provide multiple citations from multiple authors to support factual assertions about the function of
the design and research paradigm. Reference your problem statement and research questions in
demonstrating why this is the correct methodology and how it fits with your research paradigm.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Methodology_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 14 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 15 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
The body of the document will include:
Concepts – The concepts (i.e. higher productivity is related to higher job satisfaction) that
are related to your research study and are found in the literature. Use a separate sub-point
for each concept. Lead with a descriptor (short name for the concept), and then one to two
sentences that describe how the concept is related to the specific problem.
Theories – The formal theories (i.e. Maslow’s Motivational Theory, Transformational
Leadership Theory, etc.) that are related to your research study and are found in the
literature. Use a separate sub-point for each theory. Lead with the formal name of the theory
and then one to two sentences that describe how the theory is related to the specific
problem.
Actors – The people groups (i.e. leaders, followers, accountants, etc.) or organizations that
are related to your research study. Lead with a descriptor and then one to two sentences
that describe how the actor is related to the specific problem.
Constructs & Variables – The constructs and variables found in your research study (i.e.
profit, leadership style, intrinsic motivation, etc.). Lead with a descriptor and then one to
two sentences that describe how each construct or variable is related to the specific
problem. Include the type for each variable (independent, dependent, mitigating).
References – Include a reference section for citations supporting all factual assertions.
Provide citations for each factual assertion in each category.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Research Framework Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 16 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 4 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 4 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e.
This is a doctorial level business class. This is a DBA research class. There are 6 task that has to be completed and 6 discussions (the discussion is 250 words). Each task is individual. You can’t do TASK 2 if you haven’t received a passing grade on TASK 1, and you can’t move on to TASK 3, if you haven’t received a passing grade on TASK 1 and TASK 2. This is an 8 weeks course. However, there are only 6 TASK. There is also a change matrix. Whatever correction that are mentioned by the teacher, the corrections has to be made and the work has to be resubmitted. I would like to continue with the same person once the work has begun. I’ve failed this class 3x now at the rate of ($3000.00/class). So please i can not afford to fail again. I need someone who understands the requirement and is willing to do the work, put in the time, and follow the instructions precisely. I’ve attached the instructions. Please make sure you’re always available for the 8 weeks once the class has begun. The change matrix is important and has to be completed as well during the course.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BUSI 885
RESEARCH CONCEPT GUIDE: TASK ASSIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS
OVERVIEW
The Doctor of Business Administration Research Concept Guide contains all the information in
order for you to successfully complete all the tasks in this course. Full details are provided for
each task within this guide. You should consult this guide to assist you in completing each
assignment and your program. Each task builds on previous tasks and allows you to
systematically complete your dissertation with timely feedback from your faculty member on
each task.
INSTRUCTIONS
Locate the task you want to complete in the Doctor of Business Administration Research
Concept Guide. Read the information concerning the task. Complete the task requirements.
Submit your task to Canvas. After you submit, your faculty member will review the completed
task and provide feedback. Review your faculty member’s feedback and make any necessary
adjustments to your task. Resubmit your task in Canvas until your faculty member approves your
task and you receive full credit on the assignment.
Note: Your assignment will be checked for originality via the Turnitin plagiarism tool.
Doctor of Business Administration
Liberty University
School of Business
BUSI 885
DBA Research Concept Guide
V2.0
1971 University Boulevard
Lynchburg, VA 24515-2269
BusinessDoctoralPrograms@liberty.edu
434-582-3000
March 10, 2020
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Table of Contents
Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
General Guidance……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Study Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Paradigms …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4
Methodology ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
Concept Alignment in a Research Project……………………………………………………………………….. 8
Where to Study & Sample Size ……………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Assignment Instructions…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline ……………………………………………………………………………… 10
Task 2: Research Questions ………………………………………………………………………………………… 12
Task 3: Methodology …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14
Task 4: Research Framework Outline …………………………………………………………………………… 16
Task 5: Draft Research Concept…………………………………………………………………………………… 18
Task 6: Final Research Concept …………………………………………………………………………………… 21
March 10, 2020
Page 2 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Overview
You have reached this point because you have passed all DBA core classes and you are ready to
develop a research concept for your Applied Doctoral Research Project (ADRP). As you work
your way through this course you will conduct research and develop the key elements of a viable
doctoral level research project, culminating in an approved ADRP Concept Paper. While your final
research concept will be approved by your Research Chair once you start your ADRP courses, the
work you put in here will give you a solid starting point and help ensure that you are able to hit
the ground running.
You are no longer a student – This course marks the start of your transition from student to
doctoral candidate. This is a significant milestone that shifts the burden from a professor in a course
teaching you things you do not know to you applying what you have already learned! Your
professor is here to evaluate your work and point out areas for improvement, not teach you how to
accomplish each task. You are responsible for reviewing the guidelines provided and submitting
work that is compliant them. When you hit a roadblock or do not understand a particular aspect of
your research project you need to be able to work your way through the issue by studying the
problem, conducting further research, and determining the best solution.
The DBA ADRP Research Concept Paper will be developed incrementally. Each task listed below
allows you to focus on one aspect of the research concept and then use the approved tasks to build
up to the completed document. It is important that you use approved tasks when you start
combining them into a single document. If you do need to make changes to a previously approved
document, you need to coordinate that with your professor. Finally, do not move to the next task
in the sequence until the current one is approved. As described, these build upon each other so
working ahead could result in significant revisions!
The following tasks will be completed in this course:
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Task 2: Research Questions
Task 3: Methodology
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
Task 5: Draft Research Concept
Task 6: Final Research Concept
Submitting your work – This course is self-paced and you must complete all tasks in order to pass
and move on to the ADRP. Only work on one task at a time and do not move to the next task until
the current one has been approved (Grade of ‘1’ Posted). You can submit your work as soon as
you complete it, just be sure to email your instructor to let them know that you have submitted a
task for review.
March 10, 2020
Page 3 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
General Guidance
This section provides general guidance related to research paradigms, research study type,
methodology, research framework, study location, and sample size. Please review this information
carefully. There are specific research types and methods associated with the degree plan you are
pursuing.
Research Study Type
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990, the Research Study type is a Dissertation
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890, the Research Study type can be either a Case
Study Project or a Consulting Project
Note: Students wishing to conduct the consulting project should be sure to include BUSI 830,
Case Study Research Methods and Consulting Techniques, in their degree plan to gain a better
understanding of the Lean Six Sigma tools that must be used in the research project.
With the dissertation or case study project approach, the student begins by researching the
literature to find a problem, develops a research proposal to study the problem, and then finds an
organization within which to study the problem. With the consulting project approach, the student
begins with an organization with a problem, researches the literature to better understand the
problem, and then develops a proposed solution to the problem. In all three cases, a problem
statement based upon the current literature must be developed.
Research Paradigms
A research paradigm is essentially a worldview that a researcher brings to their study. It represents
the researcher’s view of reality or truth. While there is ongoing discussion regarding which
paradigms exist in the modern research community, it is useful to focus on Positivism, PostPositivism, Constructivism, and Pragmatism for most researchers. Researchers should conduct
independent research on this topic to understand what their research paradigm is as it will shape
how the researcher approaches the problem being studied. It is also important to note that while
some paradigms lend themselves better to certain methodologies, the choice of methodology does
not change the paradigm. This is part of who the researcher is and how they view the world. For
this course and the research project, the researcher should identify which of the following best
describes their view of the world and reality. The researcher should also be able to describe why
that is the case:
Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover.
Post-Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover with the knowledge
that we never will fully understand it.
Constructivism – Reality is determined by the individual and the researcher seeks to
understand that view of reality.
Pragmatism – Focus on the ‘problem’ rather than the view of reality, using any tools
available to understand the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 4 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Methodology
The methodology is how the researcher will study the problem at a very high level, all research
will be conducted using one of the following research approaches. The researcher will need to be
able to explain the application and benefits of each type of research:
Fixed Design using Quantitative Methods
Flexible Design using Qualitative Methods
Mixed-Methods Design using Quantitative and Qualitative Methods
Fixed Designs are fully defined (fixed) as part of the research proposal and following the proposal,
the researcher executes the research and analysis using quantitative tools as described in the
research proposal. Flexible designs on the other hand are defined in a general sense as part of the
research proposal and following the proposal, the researcher is free to adjust (flexible) the research
as is necessary using qualitative tools as described. Mixed-Methods Designs as the name implies,
use a combination of both in relatively equal amounts. This should not be confused with a Flexible
Design that might use a small number of quantitative methods to provide for triangulation of the
data found through the primary qualitative methods, such as the use of descriptive statistics to
show demographics or other relevant numerical data. The choice of research approach is guided
by the research problem, purpose, and research questions.
Within each research approach, there are specific methods (the research tool) that can be employed.
The table below lists the most common methods employed in the three research types of research
designs. Once selected, the method becomes the methodology or specific ‘research design’ for the
study. Please note that the options for conducting your research are limited based upon the track
that you are in (ADRP vs. Dissertation) and by the nature of the DBA degree (Applied Research
vs. Pure Research).
Fixed Design Methods
Flexible Design Methods
Mixed-Methods Design Methods
Experimental
Narrative
Convergent parallel
Quasi-experimental
Phenomenology
Explanatory Sequential
Nonexperimental
Grounded Theory
Exploratory Sequential
Transformative
Descriptive
Case Study
Correlational
Single Case Study
Causal-Comparative
Multiple Case Study
Ethnography
Common Methods for fixed, flexible, and mixed research designs.
March 10, 2020
Page 5 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990 (DBA Dissertation Track) the following designs &
methods can be used:
Fixed Designs
Flexible Designs
Mixed-Methods Designs
Correlational
Case Study
Convergent parallel
Causal-Comparative
Single Case Study
Multiple Case Study
Phenomenology
Ethnography
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890 (DBA Project Track) the following designs can be
used:
Consulting Project – Single Case Study with Lean Six Sigma Framework
Case Study Project – Single Case Study
Note: For the Consulting Project, the Lean Six Sigma Framework provides qualitative and
quantitative tools to be used in the DMAIC process. For the Case Study Project, quantitative tools
will be used for triangulation and descriptive statistics.
An effective way to begin the discussion of methodology is to start with the sentence: “This study
will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design
will be used”
Examples:
This study will be conducted with a flexible design using qualitative methods specifically, a single
case study design will be used.
– Or This study will be conducted with a fixed design using quantitative methods specifically, a causalcomparative design will be used.
When deciding on a methodology, pay attention to the words used in the research questions.
Qualitative research questions are those that seek to understand or explain while quantitative
research questions seek to relate or measure. The goal here is to ensure that there is alignment from
the problem statement to the research questions to the methodology. You will be required to
substantiate your choice of methodology with multiple citations. The bar is high to substantiate
Phenomenology or Ethnography.
March 10, 2020
Page 6 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Research Framework
The researcher should think of the research framework as the ‘word picture’ for the specific
problem statement. Once a person reads the framework and examines the diagram it should be
very clear what the conditions surrounding the problem are as well as how the study is connected
to the literature. Not all studies will have both concepts and theories, and flexible designs such as
a case study will typically rely more on concepts than theories.
Diagram – The research framework diagram should allow the reader to ‘see’ the problem and its
outcomes. The diagram should show 1) the inputs (constructs or variables) and how they relate to
the actors, 2) how action/information/influence flows between the actors, 3) how the actors are
influenced by concepts and theories, and 4) how the outputs (constructs or variables) are
determined. Additional research on Conceptual Frameworks and Theoretical Frameworks will
provide a better understanding of this important part of the research project.
Concepts – These are commonly held views that are not as formally defined as theories that can
be found in the literature that are central to your research problem. The researcher should be able
to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the concept. An example descriptor could be Higher Job
Satisfaction Leads to Higher Productivity. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the concept
and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will typically have
concepts.
Theories – These are formal theories that can be found in the literature that are central to the
research problem. They will have a researcher or researchers connected with them. Examples
include Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, Transformational Leadership Theory, Servant Leadership,
etc. The researcher should be able to provide the formal name of the theory, and then a discussion
of the theory and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will not
always have a theory or theories associated with them. Theories are developed as our
understanding of a problem matures and often flexible studies will be looking at relatively new
research problems.
Actors – These are the key people groups such as leaders, followers, or customers central to the
research problem, as well as the organizations such as the specific business, government entity, or
school that are central to the research problem. The researcher should be able to provide a short
‘descriptor’ for the actor followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the
problem. An example descriptor could be Executive Leaders, Project Team Members, or even
ABC University. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the actor supported by citations.
Constructs & Variables – These are the constructs and independent, mitigating, and dependent
variables found in the research study. Constructs are the broad concepts or topics in a study while
variables are measurable and vary. Independent variables can be thought of as inputs such as
leadership style, level of intrinsic motivation, or even revenue from product sales. Mitigating
variables can be used to group and could include things like gender, age, employment status.
Finally, dependent variables can be thought of as outputs such as job satisfaction, extrinsic
motivation, or productivity. The researcher should be able to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the
construct or variable followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 7 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
An example descriptor could be Leadership Effectiveness, Leadership Style, or Gross Profit.
Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the construct or variable supported by citations.
Concept Alignment in a Research Project
The reader must be able to visualize a straight line connecting the general problem, the specific
problem, the purpose statement, the research questions, and the nature of the study:
General Problem – Overarching business problem related to the candidate’s cognate with the
existence of the problem supported by current literature (less than five years).
Specific Problem – Narrowly focused market(s) / industry (s) / region(s) / organization(s) being
studied to provide insight into the general problem.
Purpose Statement – To study the specific problem, thereby giving insight into the general
problem. In a flexible design, the goal is generally to explore or to understand. In a fixed design,
the goal is generally to measure, compare, or relate.
Research Questions – The broad questions that need to be answered to provide meaningful insight
into the specific problem. These are not interview questions, they are questions that guide the
overall study. In a flexible design, these questions will seek to explain or understand and will
typically include words such as how, why, and what. In a fixed design, these questions will
generally seek to describe, measure, compare or relate variables.
Nature of the Study – The nature of the study describes the researcher’s paradigm, the research
design, and the research method. The researcher will need to be able to describe why the chosen
design and method are the best choice for the research being conducted.
Alignment exists when:
The specific problem is a subset of the general problem
The purpose statement describes a research goal that addresses the specific problem
The research questions address the specific problem and its consequences
The nature of the study identifies a design and method that is consistent with the action
word choices in the purpose statement and the word choices in the research questions
Where to Study & Sample Size
Selecting where to conduct your research study and how many participants will be guided by
several factors:
Fixed Design Dissertations – to provide for statistically significant results that can be generalized
to the overall population, you will need to use a sample size calculator (not gPower which is a
great post hoc test) to determine the right number. For large populations (over 5000) this is going
to be around 380 for each group within the sample based upon a Confidence Level (CL) of 95%
March 10, 2020
Page 8 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
and a Confidence Interval (CI) of 5%. How you define the population determines what you would
like to be able to generalize your results to, which in turn determines the sample size.
Flexible Design Dissertations – The goal here is to reach saturation which is the point at which
you are no longer gaining new information from participants. While various authors will provide
varying ranges for this, the common ground is that saturation will be reached within 25 to 30
interviews for a group.
Consulting Project or Case Study Project – Since the results are not intended to generalize (relate)
to the entire population, a single organization can be used. However, the size of the organization
will need to allow the researcher to interview between fifteen and thirty participants.
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: The researcher may contact an organization
to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study once the problem and research questions
have been approved. See Task 2.
March 10, 2020
Page 9 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Assignment Instructions
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions as a guide,
develop a bullet point outline for the problem statement. Each bullet should be a single sentence.
Following the specific problem sentence include a short sentence describing how this problem is
related to your cognate. Finally, add APA formatted references for the supporting reference
sentences. Following the outline, you will provide an annotated bibliography for each reference
provided. You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Problem Statement Bullet Outline
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years, optional bridge
supporting references sentence, see problem statement white paper)
Specific Problem Sentence
Relationship to Cognate (Not part of the problem statement)
References
Annotated Bibliography for each Reference
APA formatted reference (250 words for each reference)
Description of why this is a credible source (author(s), publication, date)
Summary of the article
Discussion of how this reference supports the existence of the general problem and the
consequences of the problem identified in the general problem sentence.
March 10, 2020
Page 10 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title your word
document as follows: LastName_Task 1 Bullet Point Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 11 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 2: Research Questions
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions and your
approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1 as a guide, develop three to four open
ended research questions that cannot be answered with a yes or no response. Good research
questions are exploratory and not leading that presuppose a cause, outcome, or relationship. Where
appropriate, develop sub-questions that address facets of the overall research questions. Following
the list of research questions, you will discuss how each research question (and sub-questions)
addresses aspects of the specific problem sentence to include the resulting consequences. Finally,
you will discuss how taken together, the research questions (and sub-questions) fully address the
specific problem statement. Include an APA formatted reference section.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (Optional)
Specific Problem Sentence
Research Question 1, use labels RQ1, RQ1a, etc.
Sub question 1a (optional)
Sub Question 1b (optional)
Research Question 2
Sub question 2a (optional)
Sub Question 2b (optional)
Research Question 3
Sub question 3a (optional)
Sub Question 3b (optional)
Research Question 4 (optional)
Sub question 4a (optional)
March 10, 2020
Page 12 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Sub Question 4b (optional)
Discussion of Research Questions
Research Question 1
Research Question 2
Research Question 3
Research Question 4 (optional)
Specific Problem Statement Coverage
Reference Section
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: Once this task is approved, you may contact
an organization to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study. You may not begin to
interview any participants or gather any data until you have the approval to do so in the ADRP
courses. Use the Permission Request Template found in Course Content. You will be submitting
your Permission Request Template in Task 6.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment tab as a word document. Title your word document as
follows: LastName_Task 2 Research Questions_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by you in a
Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the changes made will be
added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once you have made the necessary
revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal to submit
the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 13 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 3: Methodology
This is a narrative assignment rather than a bullet point outline. You will post your submission as
a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Outline for this assignment:
Introductory paragraph – For this methodology paper, including the specific problem
sentence.
Discussion of Research Paradigm
Discussion of Methodology
Summary – For this methodology paper
Reference Section
Discussion of Research Paradigm:
Begin with a theme sentence: “My research paradigm is XXX” Then discuss your research
paradigm and how this is likely to guide your study.
Discussion of Methodology:
Begin with a theme sentence: “This study will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX
method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design will be used”. Then discuss why this is the appropriate
methodology for your study.
Provide multiple citations from multiple authors to support factual assertions about the function of
the design and research paradigm. Reference your problem statement and research questions in
demonstrating why this is the correct methodology and how it fits with your research paradigm.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Methodology_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 14 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 15 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
The body of the document will include:
Concepts – The concepts (i.e. higher productivity is related to higher job satisfaction) that
are related to your research study and are found in the literature. Use a separate sub-point
for each concept. Lead with a descriptor (short name for the concept), and then one to two
sentences that describe how the concept is related to the specific problem.
Theories – The formal theories (i.e. Maslow’s Motivational Theory, Transformational
Leadership Theory, etc.) that are related to your research study and are found in the
literature. Use a separate sub-point for each theory. Lead with the formal name of the theory
and then one to two sentences that describe how the theory is related to the specific
problem.
Actors – The people groups (i.e. leaders, followers, accountants, etc.) or organizations that
are related to your research study. Lead with a descriptor and then one to two sentences
that describe how the actor is related to the specific problem.
Constructs & Variables – The constructs and variables found in your research study (i.e.
profit, leadership style, intrinsic motivation, etc.). Lead with a descriptor and then one to
two sentences that describe how each construct or variable is related to the specific
problem. Include the type for each variable (independent, dependent, mitigating).
References – Include a reference section for citations supporting all factual assertions.
Provide citations for each factual assertion in each category.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Research Framework Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 16 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 4 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving y
The assignment is to write a five page double spaced paper. All of the details for the assignment should be in the attached document. I have already created the name for the nonprofit and provided an address and phone number. This is in the beginning portion of the attached document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
My fictitious nonprofit that I created is called “Young Ballers Foundation” and our
mission statement is “To improve mental and physical health through team sports and
programs for the youth in the Boston area”. The address of the nonprofit is 20 Hickory
Lane, Boston, MA and the phone number is 978-434-9999.
ASSIGNMENT DESCRIPTION
The grant proposal project is an exercise to engage in how to prepare, evaluate and
support a grant proposal. As Aristotle promised, we learn about good by doing good!
It is a minimum of 5 pages of copy, double spaced with 1inch margins on all sides.
The 5 page minimum does not include the Title page, graphs, or reference list.
You have been charged with the important task of applying for a grant for a fictious nonprofit Organization of your creation.
The Organization is currently funded by federal and state funds, which unfortunately are
slated to be cut in the next fiscal year, (the First Gentleman changed his nonprofit
priorities, and the Commonwealth has cut funding at the discretionary level).
It is up to you to identify a private foundation(s) to fund your Organization.
You are also responsible for creating an abbreviated application, and proposal to meet
the needs of your nonprofit organization.
Your application is to fund operational expenses (rent, utilities, payroll for Staff, and
Programming etc.) so the doors remain open for the next fiscal year.
Your Grant Application is up to $100,000.
Your nonprofit grant application must include;
Organization Name, Address, Contact Information, and Constituents to be served.
In addition the application should include the:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Executive Summary – With no more than a paragraph, provide a summary of your
proposed project and budget cost.
Mission Statement
Organization description –
Program description – Include a narrative that explains the issue you are trying to
solve and how your program addresses those issues.
Outcomes description – Detail the anticipated outcomes of the program
Budget – Please include all expected program costs, including personnel (either as
salary + benefits or hourly rate per activity), materials, marketing, social media,
travel, etc. If the program budget is larger than the grant amount, please identify
which portions will be covered by the grant.
•
•
•
Budget narrative – Include a written description of each line item in the budget, and
also detail the parts of the program the grant funding will fund.
Indirect Cost Rate; provide the category of ICR with budget information.
Closing statement
Please discuss, why your Organization is worthy of receiving funds. Is it grassroots?
Innovative? Are you collaborating with another Nonprofit and external partners ?
Filling a societal unmet need? If possible, note outcomes associated with past funding.
Your writing is to be professional, clear, address only what is requested
There is a limit of five pages (double spaced) for the proposal, including budget and
budget narrative (but not including title page + reference list or graphs, etc). That’s not a
lot of room, given the scope of the assignment, so use it wisely – however, it’s as much
(or more) than most funders would be willing to read first-round. Use everything you
know about business writing, marketing, and effective communication to make it
compelling.
Name___________________________
This assignment is worth 100 points. There are 11 questions/tasks for you to complete. Questions/tasks
1-10 are worth 9 points each and question #11 is worth 10 points.
Assignment Due Date:
The assignment is due Thursday October 26, 2023 by 11:59pm CST. If the assignment is submitted late,
points will be deducted according to the late assignment policy on the syllabus.
Course Coverage:
This assignment covers the material in Modules 7 (Variable Clustering) and 8 (Observational Clustering).
Submission Instructions:
Upload this Word document with your responses/SAS output to the Cluster Analysis Assignment posted
in Module 8.
Scenario, Data Description, and Data Dictionary:
You work for a financial institution that has a line of business in granting and managing credit cards. You
are going to perform a cluster analysis (both variable and observational) to see if you can gain any insight
into your customers credit card usage.
In SAS OnDemand in the sq library there is a data set entitled credit_cards that contains 8,950 rows and
18 variables/inputs. Each row represents a customer. A description of the variables/inputs in
credit_cards is provided in the table below.
Variable/Input Name
CUST_ID
BALANCE
BALANCE_FREQUENCY
PURCHASES
ONEOFF_PURCHASES
INSTALLMENTS_PURCHASES
CASH_ADVANCE
PURCHASES_FREQUENCY
ONEOFFPURCHASESFREQUENCY
Description
Unique identifier for the customer (not to be
used in analysis).
Balance amount left in their account to make
purchases.
How frequently the Balance is updated, score
between 0 and 1 (1 = frequently updated, 0 = not
frequently updated).
Amount of purchases made from account.
Maximum purchase amount done in one-go.
Amount of purchase done in installment.
Cash in advance given by the user.
How frequently the Purchases are being made,
score between 0 and 1 (1 = frequently purchased,
0 = not frequently purchased).
How frequently Purchases are happening in onego (1 = frequently purchased, 0 = not frequently
purchased).
1
PURCHASESINSTALLMENTSFREQUENCY
CASHADVANCEFREQUENCY
CASHADVANCETRX
PURCHASES_TRX
CREDIT_LIMIT
PAYMENTS
MINIMUM_PAYMENTS
PRCFULLPAYMENT
TENURE
How frequently purchases in installments are
being done (1 = frequently done, 0 = not
frequently done).
How frequently the cash in advance being paid.
Number of Transactions made with “Cash in
Advanced”.
Number of purchase transactions made.
Limit of Credit Card for user.
Amount of Payment made by customer.
Minimum amount of payments made by user.
Percent of full payment paid by user.
Tenure of credit card service for user (number of
years customer
Note: Do not use the variable CUST_ID for any analysis in this assignment; this is just a value to identify
each customer.
Reminder of Steps for a Cluster Analysis:
In general, the following steps can be employed when performing an observational cluster analysis like kmeans.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Perform variable selection (we will be using a variable clustering method).
Determine the number of clusters.
Standardize the data.
Perform the observational clustering analysis (via k-means algorithm).
Un-standardize the data (in preparation for visualization/profiling the clusters).
Visualize the clusters.
Profile the clusters (that is, describe the customers based on the values of the inputs/variables
used in the k-means algorithm).
This assignment is going to step you through each of these cluster analysis steps.
Step 1 Variable Selection:
Use the 17 inputs/variables and perform a variable clustering analysis. Use a second eigenvalue cutoff of
0.70.
1. Copy and past the table you used to select the variables that will move forward into the k-means
clustering algorithm.
2
2. Using the table from #1, list the variables that will move forward into the k-means clustering
algorithm. Hint: there should be 10 variables.
3. How did you make the decision to select the 10 variables you listed in part #2?
Step 2 Determine the Optimal Number of Clusters:
Modify the number_of_clusters_code.sas file in the Module 8 folder in SAS Studio and determine the
optimal number of clusters to be used in the k-means algorithm.
Hint: remember to standardize the data before the CCC_PSF_Kmeans_Macro.sas file is used and only use
the variables/inputs chosen from the variable selection process from Step 1.
4. Using the smallest number that both the CCC and Psuedo F statistic agree upon, what is the
number of clusters that should be used in the k-means algorithm?
Steps 3 and 4 are required steps to perform observational clustering (k-means algorithm).
Step 3 Standardize the Data:
Using the variables/inputs selected from the variable selection procedure (Step 1), standardize the data
using the range method. Output the standardized data into a SAS output data set. Output the
parameters of the standardization in a SAS output data set (will need these parameters in a future step
to un-standardize the data).
5. Select Yes or No to the following statement: I have standardized the data in SAS according to the
requirements stated above in Step 3.
☐ Yes.
☐ No.
3
Step 4 Perform the k-means clustering algorithm (observational clustering):
Using the number of clusters stated in Step 2, #4, perform the k-means clustering on the
standardized data. Use 50 iterations. Output a SAS data set that has the cluster number that
each customer was placed into. The CLUSTER variable will contain the cluster that each customer
was placed into.
6. Select Yes or No to the following statement: I have performed the k-means clustering algorithm
according to the requirements stated above in Step 4.
☐ Yes.
☐ No.
Step 5 Un-standardize the data (in preparation for visualization/profiling):
Using the standardization parameters that were saved in the SAS output data set from Step 3,
un-standardize the data from the k-means algorithm that contains the CLUSTER variable
(variable that allocates each customer to a specific cluster).
7. Select Yes or No to the following statement: I have un-standardized the data according to the
requirements stated above in Step 5.
☐ Yes.
☐ No.
Step 6 Visualize the clusters:
Select a random sample of 250 customers and construct a matrix of scatterplots for the clusters
using CASH_ADVANCE_TRX, INSTALLMENTS_PURCHASES, CREDIT_LIMIT, and TENURE.
8. Copy and paste the matrix of scatterplots below.
Step 7 Profile the clusters:
A successful cluster analysis will provide insight into your customers, patients, transactions, etc…
(whatever ‘object’ you are performing the cluster analysis on). Using the matrix of scatterplots,
answer the following questions about the customers in the clusters.
4
9. Which customers have been customers for a longer time? Customers in cluster 1 or cluster 2?
10. Which customers use their credit cards more for installment purchases? Customers in cluster 1 or
cluster 2?
11. Pick one of the scatterplots and make a statement or two about the customers based on two
inputs/variables in the scatterplot. Do not make a statement based on the responses in #9 or
#10.
https://welcome.oda.sas.com/
User Name: sghwy@umsystem.edu
Password: Netwrok123$
5
Read the details of the Larson Property Management Company case scenario on pages 114-115 of the textbook. The Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Larson, and the Chief Financial Officer, Ms. Johnson, would like to increase the efficiency and effectiveness of the HR functions, as well as reduce overall HR costs. Mr. Larson and Ms. Johnson would like you, the HR Director, to serve as the change agent of the project. In this assignment, you will develop a plan and analysis (the planning and analysis phases of the systems development life cycle [SDLC]) of the current business based on the details of the scenario.
Instructions
Write a 2-3 page proposal, in which you do the following:
Introduction and Plan
Detail the current situation for the company, focusing on the issues that the organization is currently facing from using a legacy HRIS. Explain your plan for moving forward to address these issues.
Needs Analysis
Based on the issues the organization is currently facing, identify the new system needs. Identify change team members who will help identify system need, and specify their role and responsibilities.
Interview, Questionnaire, Observation, or Focus Group
Determine how additional data will be collected regarding system needs. Determine how the change management team will collect data during the exploration phase. Specify whether team members will use interviews, questionnaires, observations, and/or focus groups to collect data from end users. Provide at least five essential questions that will be asked of end users via interview, questionnaire, observation, or focus group.
Conclusion
Explain two to three reasons why the company would benefit from adopting an HRIS. Focus on how the HRIS would address the current HR needs of the organization.
Resources
Use at least two quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar websites do not qualify as academic resources.
2 parragraphChapter 2 – Get amazed by the fact that the brain cells contain so much of myelin producing oligodendrocytes!! Myelin protects neurons, so what does it mean to have so much oligodendrocytes in the brain….Brain health is the physical or neurological health?! What is the most impressive knowledge you picked up in Chapter 2?example–While reading chapter 3, the section that stood out to me was the one about where they talked about how the neurons communicated. Scientists didn’t know if it was from electrical current or a chemical reaction. The scientists that found that it is in fact a chemical reaction was Otto Loewi!
Please summarize ONE of the following questions and write your answers in essay format. Use solid facts from the case study business examples and add your own personal critique. Please type your essay into this word document.Essay Question #1: Write a CREATIVE BRIEF for Drunk Elephant to build a global Integrated Marketing Communication plan for the brand now that it is owned by Shiseido. What would be your expansion objectives, strategies and tactics? Include in your answer a recommended media mix that would best benefit the global outreach and brand expansion strategies. Be mindful in your answer of the key elements of Drunk Elephant brand equity and brand DNA.Keep in mind the high purchase price of the brand to Shiseido and the needto create significant global revenue in the next 3-5 years.
For this and all exams, you will be asked a combination of fill-in and short/long essay questions.
Exam grades will be communicated 2-5 days after the exam has been closed. You will be notified of your exam grade via Canvas. If you have questions about your grade, please reach out to me for an office hours appt. so we can go over it together.
A few tips:
Be sure to study the material beforehand so you can answer the questions accurately and not run out of time trying to look up answers during the exam.
Set the timer on your phone so you can keep track of your time as you go.
Fill-Ins require answers that are 1-3 words maximum- answers are terms and concepts not explanations
Review the essay questions first so you’re not caught off guard and can manage your time well.
Don’t get stuck on one question for too long. If you don’t know the answer, skip it and come back to it later.
Avoid leaving any questions blank- better to guess and give yourself a chance to get it right and/or partial credit than leave it blank and insure you will get it wrong.
For the essays, be sure to write these in your own words. Plagiarism in any form: copying and pasting sentences from the textbook, internet, or PowerPoints, AI use, etc…. will result in a zero exam score and a report filed with the VP of Student Affairs.
You must work on your own. Do not share your answers or discuss with anyone, even after completing the quiz. This will insure quiz integrity and fairness to all. You will have 60 minutes to complete this exam (once you start it) up until the deadline. Note that all exams will be automatically submitted at the posted deadline so be sure to start it allowing enough time to complete it before the exam closes.
Please read the statement below carefully before beginning the exam:
ONCE ACCEPTED I WILL GIVE YOU LOGIN INFO TO READ THE CHAPTERS AND LECTURES AND VIDEOS SO THEN YOU CAN TAKE THE TEST
THE TEST IS 13 QUESTIONS AND YO HAVE ONE HOUR TO COMPLETE
Unformatted Attachment Preview
DIALECTICAL THEORY- RDR 2
Coms 351
ASSUMING YOU HAVE…
➢Read RDR 2- “Dialectical Theory”
➢Taken Reading Quiz 7
✓
✓
DIALECTICAL THEORY
A. Theorists: Baxter & Bahktin (1988)
B. Goal: Understand how close relationships are impacted by
ongoing, contradictory tensions and how those are
communicated in the relationship
QUESTIONS TO CONSIDER
➢What’s the difference between internal and external
dialectics?
➢How do you see these at work in a current relationship in
your life?
DIALECTICAL THEORY
C. Assumptions about Relationships
1. Relationships do not exist in a vacuum
2. Relationships persist through ongoing dialogue not monologue
3. Change is a constant (you & your SO* / internally & externally)
*SO = close interpersonal relationships
DIALECTICAL THEORY
All the other people in your lives
You
Your life
Your
relationship
“us-ness”
Your SO
Their life
DIALECTICAL THEORY
D. Key Terms
1. Dialectics- tensions between contradictory needs
✓Vary in intensity
✓Different intervals
✓Always In-Flux
✓Never “resolved”
2. Relational Dialectics- Communicated (dialogue, not just thoughts
unspoken) needs and how those impact the
relationship
DIALECTICAL THEORY
D. Key Terms
3. Utterance Chains- ”stories woven together” (communication context)
✓Who?- nearby vs. distant
nearby- the person you are in the relationship with
distant- third parties- those outside of the relationship
✓When?- already vs. not–yet-spoken discourses
already spoken- all the things you’ve communicated up to now
not-yet-spoken- anticipated communication/response
DIALECTICAL THEORY- RDR 2
Coms 351
DIALECTICAL THEORY
A. Theorists
B. Goal
C. Assumptions about Relationships
D. Key Terms:
➢Dialectics
➢Relational Dialectics
➢Utterance Chains
DIALECTICAL THEORY
D. Key Terms
4. Communicated Needs
Your
needs
DIALECTICAL THEORY
D. Key Terms
4. Communicated Needs
Internal
You vs.
your SO
needs
Your
needs
DIALECTICAL THEORY
D. Key Terms
4. Communicated Needs
Internal
You & your
SO needs vs.
the needs of
others
You vs.
your SO
needs
Your
needs
External
DIALECTICAL THEORY
E. 3 Dialectics
1. Integration & Separation
Internal- Autonomy vs. Connection
Ross & Rachel
Internal
You & your
SO needs vs.
the needs of
others
You vs.
your SO
needs
External- Inclusion vs. Seclusion
Your
needs
External
DIALECTICAL THEORY
E. 3 Dialectics
2. Expression & Privacy
Internal- Openness vs. Closedness
Internal
External- Revelation vs.
Concealment
You & your
SO needs vs.
the needs of
others
You vs.
your SO
needs
Your
needs
External
DIALECTICAL THEORY
E. 3 Dialectics
3. Stability & Change
Internal- Novelty vs. Predictability
Internal
External- Conventionality vs.
Uniqueness
Revolutionary Road- “Paris”
You & your
SO needs vs.
the needs of
others
You vs.
your SO
needs
Your
needs
External
DIALECTICAL THEORY
Your Turn:
Good Will Hunting- California
Participation Activity 7:
Where do you see the internal dialectics at work in this scene (hint- all
three of them are there)
Identify how you see each of the 3 in this scene providing 2-3 sentences
for each (6-9 sentences total).
Number and identify them (1. autonomy connection and so on) in the
textbox providing your explanation of how you see each in the scene as
well as a space in between them so I can read each one easily.
DIALECTICAL THEORY
F. Responses to Dialectics- Which dialectic takes priority?
1. Selection- one need over the other
2. Separation- satisfy in separate situations/relationships
3. Neutralization- compromise to meet both somewhat
4. Reframing- perceptual transformation
DIALECTICAL THEORY
F. Responses to Dialectics- Which dialectic takes priority?
1. Selection- one need over the other
2. Separation- satisfy in separate situations/relationships
3. Neutralization- compromise to meet both somewhat
4. Reframing- perceptual transformation
QUESTIONS TO CONSIDER
➢What’s the difference between internal and external
dialectics?
➢How do you see these at work in a current relationship in
your life?
Media
Multiplexity
Theory (MMT)
Coms 351
Which media channels do you enjoy?
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
A. Theorist: Caroline Haythornthwaite (2005)
B. Goal: To explain the symbiotic relationship between relationships and
media modalities used within/by them.
C. Media Multiplexity: The stronger the relational tie = the more media
channels/modes used.
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
D. Key Terms:
1. Tie strength:
✓time
✓emotion
✓intimacy
✓reciprocity
More = Strong Tie = high cost & high reward
Less = Weak Tie = low cost & low reward
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
D. Key Terms:
2. 4 Ties types
a. Strong
b. Bridging
c. Weak
d. Latent
What
does this
diagram
tell us
about tie
types?
Strong
Bridging
Weak
Latent
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
E. MMT Claims
1. Comm content differs by tie strength not by medium
✓ Medium doesn’t impact content in strong ties (though depth is
impacted)
✓ Ability to choose impacts satisfaction
✓ Switching channels is risky
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
E. MMT Claims
2. Hierarchy of media use is based on group norms
✓ Varies from group to group
Whatsapp
Instagram
Text messaging
Phone calls
Frank
Helen
Pablo
Jani
Mega
Mary
Dianna
John
Jenny
Jonalyn
——————————————————–
Sara
Lacy
Kat
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
E. MMT Claims
2. Hierarchy of media use is based on group norms
✓ Varies from group to group
✓ Stronger ties w/in group use additional channels privately
Whatsapp
Instagram
Text messaging
Phone calls
Frank
Helen
Pablo
Jan
Mega
Mary
Dianna
John
Jenny
Instagram
Marco Polo
Face Time
Jonalyn
Text messaging
——————————————————–
Sara
Lacy
Kat
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
E. MMT Claims
2. Hierarchy of media use is based on group norms
✓ Varies from group to group
✓ Stronger ties w/in group use additional channels privately
(What external dialectal tension is this? )
Media Multiplexity Theory (MMT)
E. MMT Claims
3. The addition/subtraction of media influences weak ties
✓ Adding → positive influence
✓ Subtracting → negative influence
Participation Activity 8
Create Your Social Network Map
• Create a social network map that consists of at least 10 people
• Use solid or dotted lines to indicate strong vs. weak ties
between everyone
• Choose one of your weak ties and list all the media* you use to
communicate with them (do this on your network map)
• Choose one of your strong ties and list all the media* you use
to communicate with them (do this on your network map)
• Take a pic of your Map and upload it on Canvas- Participation
Activity 8
*Rank these in
order with #1
being the media
you use most
often and so on
1-Texting
2- Email
2- Instagram
3- Facetime
1- iMessage
4- Phone
5- Email
COGNITIVE
DISSONANCE
THEORY
Coms 351- Mega
Cognitive Dissonance- Concepts Unwrapped
Cognitive Dissonance
A.Theorist: Festinger (1957)
B.Goal: To understand and predict how people
will respond when they deal with psychological
inconsistencies
C.Dissonance- discomfort created by holding 2
contradictory attitudes/thoughts/behaviors
I love my
spouse
I’m
attracted to
someone at
work
Cheating
is wrong
I don’t
report all
my income
to the IRS
Your turn…
• Phoebe’s Dissonance
Cognition #1
•
+
Cognition #2
=
Dissonance
Your turn…
• Phoebe’s Dissonance
Cognition #2
Cognition #1
“Being a flake is
•
terrible.”
+
“I want to flake
on Joey to go
on a date with
someone else.”
=
Dissonance
Personal Examples?
Harley-Davidson, Inc. is an American motorcycle manufacturer headquartered in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, United States. Founded in 1903, it is one of two major American motorcycle manufacturers to survive the Great Depression along with its historical rival, Indian Motorcycles.
If you are not familiar with this retail store, visit their website https://www.harley-davidson.com
Links to an external site.
After reading case 5, answer the following questions:
1. If you were CEO of Harley-Davidson, how would you compare the advantages and disadvantages of using exports, joint ventures, and foreign subsidiaries as ways of expanding international sales?
2. In America, Harley has shifted the positioning of its products away from simply motorcycles and more toward being status symbols of a particular lifestyle. What are the implications of cultural factors for positioning in other countries that Harley has targeted for growth—ones like Japan, China, France, and Brazil?
3. Problem Solving. If you were advising Harley’s CEO on business expansion in sub-Saharan Africa, what would you recommend in terms of setting up sales centers and manufacturing sites in countries like South Africa, Kenya, and Zimbabwe? When a new location is targeted, what would you suggest as the proper role for locals to play? Should they run everything, or should there be a mix of locals and expatriates? And if the CEO wants to send expatriates from the United States into some locations, what selection criteria would you recommend, and why?
4. Further Research. Is it accurate to say that Harley is still “on top of its game”? How well is the company performing today in both domestic and global markets? Who are its top competitors in other parts of the world, and how well does Harley compete against them? Does the electric Harley have what it takes to fuel the company’s next stage of global growth
– please include a reference page
– all citings must be in APA style
– please have five sources (website can be one of them)
– refer to the case and website while writing (along with other sources)
– USE ATTACHED CASE AS REFERANCE FOR FORMAT AND WRITING STYLE
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case Analysis: Warby Parker
David Nazarian College of Business and Economics
CSUN MGT 360: Management and Organizational Behavior
Monika Avetisyan
September 20, 2023
1
Discussion
1. In what ways can a newer, smaller competitor “punch above its weight” by taking
advantage of the Internet? How can the Internet help be used as a tool to help businesses
avoid some of the costs associated with doing business following more conventional or
“old school” approaches? How do you see the balance of power in industries like the
eyewear industry shifting as customers become more comfortable buying eyewear online?
Times have changed drastically, and we have entered the era of social media, technology, and the
Internet. Back in the day, for a small business to grow and survive, it would have to rely on local
customers and hope that people liked the product or service enough to tell others. Nowadays,
businesses of all sorts can get their product out through the help of the Internet, whether they are
well-known or barely starting. Social media, in particular, has become the primary source for
most people worldwide to either learn about new products/services or be bombarded by pictures
and videos from companies on their feeds. As a smaller competitor, you can use it to your
advantage and push your product into consumers’ minds and, most importantly, their screens. As a
startup company, you first must grab the viewer’s attention so later they can engage in your
product or service. Making “buzz” around your company is essential because once it is there, it
only grows bigger and bigger.
An example of this was when the fashion brand Fashion Nova started putting most of its focus on
its social media account on Instagram. In an interview with the CEO, Richard Saghian, and
interviewer Aria Hughes from WWD magazine, they got into the details of his success. She
stated, “So instead of building out brick-and-mortar locations, he and his team exert their energy
on Instagram by posting every 30 minutes throughout the day and talking to his customers, who
are usually 16 to 35 years old, …” (WWD magazine, Hughes, 2018) By using social media this
2
company was able to maximize sales and create a powerful public image which was highly
beneficial in terms of profit. Also, becoming more active on social media allowed the brand to
work with stars such as Cardi B. and Blac China, who still very proudly support the brand.
Fashion Nova was founded in 2003, but the company did not reach peak sales until its social
media presence grew. So, to revisit the question of how small companies can use the Internet in
their favor, the answer is to have a substantial social media presence where you promote your
product and let consumers know that your brand is present and interactive with its customers. To
continue and answer “How can the Internet be applied as a tool to help businesses avoid some of
the costs associated with doing business following more conventional or “old school”
approaches?”, it is essential first to know that the old approaches included either radio
commercials, mail, or TV. These options were quite expensive, considering there would have to
be an entire production team and other features, which were not cheap. So, the Internet could help
younger and smaller rivals cut costs and improve efficiency. Warby Parker’s DTC strategy showed
this technique. By bypassing traditional distribution methods and “brick-and-mortar retail,” the
company saved money just like Fashion Nova, which also steered far from buying storefronts.
Warby Parker offered high-quality eyewear at prices that challenged Luxottica’s usual pricing
methods thanks to this lean and efficient methodology (Rana, 2019). Businesses can dramatically
grow their consumer base with the Internet’s global reach.
Warby Parker capitalized on this opportunity by building an easy-to-use online eyewear store,
which helped shift the balance of power. Online shopping’s capacity to cross borders appealed to
consumers who wanted to avoid in-store difficulties. Warby Parker’s “Home Try-On program”
allowed clients to try on frames at home, revolutionizing eyewear shopping. This innovation
simplified and made Internet buying more appealing. (Geron 2016). As consumers got more
comfortable buying eyewear online, the industry’s power balance changed. This change is shown
by Warby Parker’s threat to Luxottica’s quasi-monopoly. The rise of agile online disruptors over
3
traditional shops with physical stores illustrated how digital commerce challenges entrenched
industries (Brynjolfsson & McAfee, 2014).
Discussion
2. What impact does Warby Parker’s decision to donate a pair of eyeglasses for every pair
purchased from them have on customers’ perceptions of the company? How does Warby
Parker’s focus on being a significant workplace influence how the company is seen in the
market?
Warby Parker’s strategic actions, especially its charity and workplace culture, have significantly
impacted customer perceptions and the company’s market position. This has helped in Shaping
Customer Perceptions (Duhigg, 2016). Customers now view Warby Parker differently thanks to
the “Buy a Pair, Give a Pair program.” This program emphasized the company’s commitment to
profitability and social responsibility to benefit society. The company’s aim of supplying
affordable eyewear to those in need was now seamlessly integrated with customers’ views of their
purchases to improve the world (Duhigg, 2016). The second impact is the Cultivation of a
Positive Workplace Culture (Heath & Heath, 2020). Warby Parker prioritized employee
satisfaction beyond attracting top talent. Marketing reputation was highly affected, and the
company led its industry with well-written policies, competent leadership, and an inclusive
environment. These adjustments improved its corporate image and resonated with customers, who
increasingly viewed companies that invested in their people and promoted diversity and inclusion
as positive public representations (Heath & Heath, 2020).
Problem Solving.
3. As an operations management consultant, you have been contracted to help a large,
traditionally configured clothing company – Marquee Clothes – to become more
Internet-enabled and competitive in light of customers’ shopping habits, attitudes, and
expectations. The company has a well-established supply chain infrastructure, has more
4
than 50 retail locations, and has been in business for over 20 years. Over the last several
years, with increasing numbers of mall closings, the business has had to shut several of its
stores and is seeing much of the foot traffic that traditionally was its bread and butter start
to decline as well. Sales have been off the last three quarters, and the 56-year-old owner of
the privately held company is concerned that she will have to close more stores if things
do not turn around. Her college-age daughter has convinced her that to compete, the
company will have to undergo a makeover and become a twenty-first-century player with
a fully fleshed-out approach and strategy. What should she do? What are some of the first
things that you would advise? What steps must be taken to help take Marquee Clothes
fully into the twenty-first century?
As an operations management consultant, I would first ask the CEO of Marquee Clothes to open
an online store, which would fill the dent in the closed in-person stores. Opening the online store
would include a complete digital transformation to stay competitive in the 21st century. Along
with the first recommendation, I would ensure the company established a robust online presence
(Ritch et al., 2023) to succeed in the digital age. This would require a captivating, user-friendly
e-commerce site exposing the brand’s items and simplified shopping (Ritch et al. 2023). The
website should be responsive to smartphones, tablets, and laptops. A secure and easy-to-use
payment system would also be necessary to build trust and streamline transactions. Another main
recommendation is implementing an Omnichannel Strategy (Ritch et al. 2023). Marquee Clothes
would need an omnichannel approach to succeed. This method integrates online and offline
buying, letting customers switch between the two. Key elements of this method include: Buy
Online, Pick Up In-Store (BOPIS): This option lets users buy online and pick up in nearby
Marquee Clothes locations. It decreases shipping costs and increases store traffic, which may
increase in-store transactions.
Marquee Clothes would need a unified inventory management solution to coordinate online and
offline stock levels. Providing correct product availability information would reduce customer
5
disappointment and irritation (Ritch et al. 2023). They could also implement interactive shopping
into the websites where customers could upload photos of themselves, and the website would give
recommendations on which items would match them and their body types. “Targeted Marketing
Campaigns” may also be helpful (Ritch et al., 2023). Behavioral data like purchase history,
frequency of visits, and marketing material interaction could segment customers beyond
demographics (Ritch et al., 2023). To increase conversion, Marquee Clothes could send
personalized email campaigns to clients who have abandoned their shopping carts, gently
reminding them of the products left and offering a special discount. The organization could also
use real-time data to send marketing messages based on customer actions. They could notify
customers of new arrivals and limited-time specials in the activewear department if they frequent
it.
The company may also apply “Inventory Optimization” (Ritch et al., 2023). Marquee should also
consider “Investing in Customer Engagement” (Ritch et al., 2023). Customer involvement is
crucial in the digital age, so Marquee Clothes should invest in social media, email marketing, and
loyalty programs to engage customers. Particular strategies could include Social media
participation on Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter, boosting brand loyalty and visibility. Sharing
user-generated content and holding social media contests help build brand community (Ritch et
al., 2023). Organized email campaigns with personalized suggestions and exclusive offers would
help keep clients informed and interested (Chopra & Meindl, 2015). A loyalty program with
prizes for repeat customers could boost customer retention and lifetime value.
Further Research.
4. What is happening now with Warby Parker? What is the billion-dollar company doing
to stay ahead of other competitors and make headway in the eyewear market? What steps
has Luxottica taken to defend itself against Warby Parker’s disruptive tactics?
6
Considering how long Warby Parker has been around, the company is doing exceptionally well.
According to an article by RetailDive, “Warby Parker’s net revenue during the first quarter
increased 12.2% year over year to $172 million…” Looking at this from an economic standpoint,
they increased significantly, which is excellent, especially during these times. This stat also shows
that even though many other companies have risen, Warby Parker has been able to hold their own.
Also, because they have increased in net revenue, they can “…open 40 new stores on a gross basis
with a total projected store count of 240…” (James, May 9, 2023). Warby Parker is doing this to
stay ahead of competitors such as SEE Eyewear, Luxottica, and Ray-Ban and make headway in
the eyewear market by introducing a new virtual feature on their websites, allowing people to try
on glasses before purchasing them. They are introducing other new products as well. Another new
feature is their addition of online prescriptions through virtual eye exams, making it much more
convenient for customers who cannot visit their stores. Even though Warby Parker dominates the
market, so does their competitor, Luxottica. In the Luxus article, it states, “The group’s share of
net profit was rounded up by 50% to EUR 2.1 billion in 2022.” (Michentef, 2023) This is a
massive jump for the brand, and it shows that Luxottica has not been backing down despite
Warby Parker’s efforts of new additions. Also, since Luxottica is a worldwide corporation, they
have stores worldwide, which gives their customers worldwide access, unlike Warby Parker,
which only has stores in the US and Canada. This is a huge advantage, considering customers can
visit their stores anytime. Both are dominating the eyewear market at their own pace, but there
will always be competition between the two brands.
7
References
Hughes, A. (2018, February 28). How Fashion Nova Won the Internet. WWD; WWD.
https://wwd.com/fashion-news/fashion-features/inside-fashion-nova-cardi-b-1202595964/
Brynjolfsson, E., & Mcafee, A. (2014). The second machine age : work, progress, and prosperity
in a time of brilliant technologies. W.W. Norton & Company.
Chopra, S., & Meindl, P. (2016). Supply chain management : strategy, planning, and operation
(6th ed.). Pearson.
Davenport, T. H., & Harris, J. G. (2007). Competing on analytics : the new science of winning.
Harvard Business School Press.
Duhigg, C. (2012). The power of habit : why we do what we do in life and business. Random
House.
T. (2016). Warby Parker’s Vision to Do Good: Turn Profitable. Forbes. Retrieved from
https://www.forbes.com/sites/tomiogeron/2016/04/13/warby-parkers-vision-to-do-good-and-profit
able/?sh=3e4a123a126f
Heath, C., & Heath, D. (2020). The Power of Moments: Why Certain Experiences Have
Extraordinary Impact. Simon & Schuster.
Kumar, V., & Rajan, B. (2017). Creating a Seamless Multichannel Experience: Evidence from a
Field Experiment. Journal of RetGeronailing.
Ritch, E. L., Canning, C., & McColl, J. (Eds.). (2023). Pioneering New Perspectives in the
Fashion Industry: Disruption, Diversity and Sustainable Innovation. Emerald Publishing Limited.
8
Warby Parker revenue up 12.2% in Q1 as it reins in marketing spend. (n.d.). Retail Dive.
https://www.retaildive.com/news/warby-parker-Q1-revenue-jumps-reins-in-marketing-spend/649
785/
EssilorLuxottica topped out in 2022. (2023, September 22). Luxus Plus.
https://luxus-plus.com/en/essilorluxottica-topped-out-in-2022/
9
Read “Building a Backdoor to the IPhone” attached below. DESCRIBEWhat ethical dilemmas did Tim Cook face in this case?EVALUATE In the case, Apple decided not to provide the government with a one-time use backdoor to a suspected terrorist’s iPhone. Do you agree with Cook’s decision? Why or why not? . ARTICULATE LEARNINGLet’s examine privacy in the digital v. physical realms. In the provided case, the FBI was able to hack into the iPhone, without Apple’s help, to retrieve the desired data. Do you believe this was an appropriate course of action, given that the FBI did not know whether or not the information contained on the phone was relevant to their case?What if the data was not in digital form, but instead it was written down in books. Instead of the data being stored on a phone, the books were locked in a room. The only way to access the data, would be to bust down the door. Do you think it would be appropriate for the FBI to bust down the door, again, not knowing whether or not the information contained in the room was relevant to their case?Is there a different standard of privacy in the digital v. physical realms? What’s the difference?
Your task is to continue using your GROW model template you began in Module Two to complete the final three sections:
Identified Gaps—Obstacles
Goal Revision
A Way Forward—Action
Specifically, you must address the following rubric criteria:
In the Identified Gaps—Obstacles section, describe obstacles that might prevent the focus areas you previously identified moving from current state to future state. Consider the following in your response:
Skill gaps, organizational culture, and resources among other things
In the Goal Revision section, for each of the goals you created previously, describe whether they need to be revised:
For the goals that do need to be revised, provide a revision and explain your changes based on obstacles you identified above.
For the goals that do not need to be revised, provide rationale for why this goal should remain the same. Support your response.
In the A Way Forward—Action section, recommend an actionable step that should be taken in order to close the gap between current state and desired future state for each identified focus area and related goal. Your response should include the following for each actionable step:
An explanation on what the step will entail
Identification of stakeholders who will need to be involved
Justification for how this step will help close the gap between current state and desired future state
What to Submit
Submit your answers in the GROW Model Template that you began working on in Module Two. If references are included, they should be cited in APA format. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MBA 530 GROW Model Template
Name: Jason Bailey
Date: 30 Sept 23
Identified Trends
1. Satisfaction in jobs has decreased over the past four years.
2. Recognition and praise scores have been declining. The declining scores in this area
suggest that employees may feel they need to be more adequately appreciated for their
accomplishments.
3. Company and strategy satisfaction has remained relatively stable. Although company
and strategy have remained stable, there is room for improvement in aligning decisions
with the company’s mission and vision.
Employee Survey Results Data
The Excel worksheet is also attached
Focus Areas
1. Address the declining trend in job satisfaction.
2. The recognition and praise system should be addressed.
3. Align decisions with the company’s mission and vision.
Reality—Current State
1. Job satisfaction scores are declining due to factors such as lack of recognition, unclear
expectations, and insufficient supervisor support.
2. Scores for recognizing employees based on merit have decreased, indicating a need for
improved appreciation.
3. While scores for caring about employees and customers are moderate, there is room for
improvement in aligning decisions with the mission and vision.
Desired Future State—Where Would You Like to Be?
1. Increase job satisfaction by 10% within the next two years. It can be achieved by
addressing recognition, clear expectations, and supervisor support.
2. Achieve a 10% increase in favorable responses. It can be achieved by improving
recognition and praise processes.
3. Increase belief in the company’s mission and vision by 10% within the next two years. It
can be done by ensuring decisions align with the mission and vision.
Identified Gaps—Obstacles
1. Obstacles to job satisfaction include lack of recognition, unclear expectations, and
insufficient supervisor support.
2. The obstacle in recognition and praise is a decline in recognizing employees based on
merit.
3. Obstacle in company strategy is the need to better align decisions with the company’s
mission and vision.
Goal Revision
1. Revise goals to focus on specific actions to improve recognition, expectations, and
supervisor support.
2. Revise goals to establish a comprehensive recognition and praise system.
3. Revise goals to emphasize decision-making alignment with the mission and vision.
A Way Forward—Action
1. Implement recognition programs, clarify expectations, and provide supervisor training.
Taking this action will help improve job satisfaction.
2. Develop a structured recognition and praise system, conduct training, and encourage
employee feedback. It will help strengthen praise and recognition.
3. For company and strategy review decision-making processes to ensure alignment with
the mission and vision. Communicate these values to employees, and seek their input.
Evaluate and explain the key changes in the company Balance Sheet over the past two years, focusing on change in the Equity section.
Evaluate and explain the key changes in the company Income Statement over the past two years, focusing on changes in the Profit section.
Evaluate and explain the key changes in the company Statement of Cash Flows over the past two years, focusing on changes in the Cash flows from operating activities section.
Your analysis of what these changes might mean for the company’s future
Each part of your corporate companion project must be uploaded in Canvas by the Sunday 11 p.m. due dates using one of these formats:
Word or Google doc
At least three pages per part EXCLUDING a title page
Text should be double spaced and 12-point font.
You may incorporate charts, diagrams, pictures, video, audio etc. to enhance your submission as long as what you include meets the corporate companion evaluation guide requirements.
You may include audio or video elements to your submission.
OR
PowerPoint or Google Presentation
At least 1 slide per section of each part EXCLUDING a title slide.
You may incorporate charts, diagrams, pictures, video, audio etc. to enhance your submission as long as what you submit meets the corporate companion evaluation guide requirements.
Part of being a good manager is staying up to date on the latest news, trends, laws, financial happenings, and international situations impacting business. If you look at your newsfeed, you will see many articles that directly relate to the material we study every week. Make it part of your daily habits to check in and review the top business-related articles.Identify an article in the media within the last six weeks that relates to a topic from this week’s assigned reading. You can look at reputed newspapers, journals, online publications, and other sources. The APSU library is an excellent resource. Once you identify an article, submit it along with a paragraph that addresses the following.How do you relate this article to the material we covered in the course?
In 2024, Western Transport Company entered into the treasury stock transactions described below. In 2022, Western Transport had issued 150 million shares of its $1 par common stock at $14 per share.
Required:
Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each of the following transactions:
Note: If no entry is required for a transaction/event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Enter your answers in millions (i.e., 10,000,000 should be entered as 10).
On January 23, 2024, Western Transport reacquired 10 million shares at $17 per share.
On September 3, 2024, Western Transport sold 4 million treasury shares at $18 per share.
On November 4, 2024, Western Transport sold 4 million treasury shares at $15 per share.
1. The United Nations has adopted 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), “as a universal call to action to end poverty, protect the planet, and ensure that by 2030 all people enjoy peace and prosperity” (www.undp.org/sustainable-development-goals).
a. Explain whether these 17 SDGs are applicable to the tourism industry. (4 marks)
b. Select any three (3) of the SDGs and explain how they might be applicable to the tourism industry. (6 marks)
2. You are a member of the marketing executive team at New York City & Company (NYC & Company), the destination marketing organization for the New York City. Write a SMART objective and two (2) related tactics for the third quarter of the final year April 2024- March 2025.
3. Consider the following destinations:
The Sunshine Coast, Queensland, Australia
Greater Miami Beach, Florida, USA
New Zealand
Using information from the course Tourism Planning & Policy TCHT1-UC3470 and your prior knowledge, select one (1) destination of your choice. Classify the destination based on its current stage using Butler’s (1980) Tourism Area Life Cycle model. Give three (3) reasons to support your selected stage.
Note well: do not use COVID-19 as part of your explanation.
The picture for this question is attached
4. Give the name of one (1) destination that is a good model of the principles and practice of sustainable tourism. Give one (1) example of what the destination is doing or has done to make the destination more sustainable.
A quantitative analyst uses quantitative methods to help us make business and financial decisions. As a broker dealer firm, we provide advanced suggestions to our investors in the capital market. For “quants,” the goal is to help them identify profitable investment opportunities. The Goal for your work is to improve our model for historical quantitative analysis for certain stocks so we can apply this model to every stock and industry. Please follow the model of the example report and the MATLAB, or R/Python code. BUT these files are only references. For your strong academic background, we wish you can make this model more useful. The purpose for this model and your work is to improve our model for historical quantitative stock analysis and we can analyze more stocks and industry in a faster pace and help our analyst for technical analysis. We have provided you code examples for three different software, R Python and Matlab.
Week 1 – Task 1 Detailed Instruction
Submission List:
Matlab, R, Python code and Quantitative Data Analysis (PPT)
Analysis Areas:
Test of Weak Form Efficiency
In this part of the project, you will need to perform few tests for the weak form efficiency on the stocks and/or the market indices and discuss the empirical findings.
Step 1: Obtain the Data
You need to obtain daily data for 2 – 3 stocks or market indices that is related to THE COMPANY over a span of at least 10 to 20 years.
So you need to find at least one or two competitor of Twilio. (You may obtain the data from Datastream, EIA, or Yahoo Finance. )
You can compute the simple return as:
Rt = [(Yt -Yt-1 ) / Yt-1 ]*100
where is return at time t, Yt is the Adjusted close price at time t and Yt-1 is the Adjusted close price at time t-1
Step 2: Tests of Weak Form Efficiency
You should read about EMH to get guidance about how to interpret and comment on the results of the weak-form efficiency tests as applied to your data.
1) Descriptive Statistics and return distributions
Begin by analyzing the data using the summary statistics (e.g., mean, median, max, min, skewness, kurtosis etc.) in a Table. Provide a few (may be 1 or 2) plots of time series of returns of the data and a histogram of the return distribution for your stocks and indices. Using appropriate wording you should comment on the statistical and economic (if any) interpretation of your data.
2) Autoregressive (AR) Model
You can test to see if the return data in your sample follow a random walk using the AR (1) model:
Rt= σ+ β1 Rt-1 + ℇt
where the dependent variable Rt is the return for the time t, and the independent variable Rt-1 is the return lagged one period for time t-1 .
You can create a one-period lag of return either manually in excel or you simply do that in SPSS, for instance, by using the LAG function under the Transform>Compute variables menu.
You should report and discuss your results.
3) Day of the Week Effect
In this part, you will test and see if the data show any seasonal effects over days of the week.
Note that there is no constant in the above regression; if you want to include a constant you can have only 4 dummy variables. Again, you should report and comment on your findings.
Task 1: Test of Weak Form EMH/Random Walk Model { Use BP(example firm: British Petroleum) Monthly Return Data }
(1) Create BP_1 Variable for t-1 {Hints: Transform….create time series…}
(2) Compute stock return of BP (BP_Ret) {Transform….Compute Variable ….((BP-BP_1)/BP_1)*100
(3) Create a Lag Variable for BP_Ret_1 for t-1 {Hints: Transform…Create time series…}
(4) Compute Logarithmic stock return of BP (BP_LogRet) {Transform…Compute Variable…(Ln(BP)-LN(BP_1)*100
(5) Do a formal test of independence to test H0 : No Autocorrelation { Hints: Analyse…Forecasting …Autocorrelation…Variables (BP_Return), Display (Autocorrelation and Partial Autocorrelation). Can you reject H0 : No Autocorrelation (e.g Reject H0 if p-value is statistically significant)? How do you interpret the results?
(6) Repeat question 5 with BP share prices (instead of BP_Return).Do you observe any difference ?
(7) Estimate Autoregressive 1 (AR1) Model with and without constant term). Do the results tell you anything about the random walk model?
(8) In order to test Weak Form EMH , estimate the following AR(1) Model with the BP_Return (with constant term). Can you reject H0 : β=0 (e.g. Reject H0 if p-value is statistically significant)?
Do the result tell you anything about the EMH/ random walk model?
Ri= σ+ β1 Rt-1 + ℇt…….(1)
(9) Draw scatter plot and line charts to find evidence of Weak Form EMH/Random Walk Model.
Detecting Seasonality in Financial Markets (Day-of-the-Week Effect) {use BP daily price}
(1) Convert DATES into DAYS: Transform….Date & Time Wizard….Extract a part of a date or time variable…Date or time (DATE) and unit to extract (DAY OF WEEK)…Finish.
(2) Convert DAYS into NUMBERS (e.g., Mon=1, Fri=5): Transform…Automatic Recode…..choose New Variable name (DAYS2)….Recode starting from lowest to highest ….Use the same recoding scheme for all variables…}
(3) Create DUMMY Variables from DAYS2 (D1 FOR Monday,D2 for Tuesday,D3 for Wednesday,D4 for Thursday and D5 for Friday): Transform….Recode into different variable…Use Old & New Value option…….
(4) In order to investigate the seasonal effect on financial markets (calendar anomalies),estimate the following OLS regression (or Dummy Variable regression) model to test `Day-of-the-Week-Effect` (WITHOUT CONSTANT):
D1 = 1 if the return is on a Monday and 0 otherwise
D2 = 1 if the return is on a Tuesday and 0 otherwise
D3 = 1 if the return is on a Wednesday and 0 otherwise
D4 = 1 if the return is on a Thursday and 0 otherwise
D5 = 1 if the return is on a Friday and 0 otherwise
(5) Estimate the Following OLS regression (or Dummy Variable regression) model to test if `Monday return` is statistically significant than other days of the week. State Null and alternative hypotheses.
For the following questions, you need to create a WORD document that lists your finds for all of them. So what you have to submit is based on the following questions.
Interpret your response to the follow questions:
(i) Goodness of fit: how well does the model describe the relationship between the variables?{ Look at the adjusted R2 value}.
(ii) Overall model significance: is there a linear relationship between all X variables taken together with Y ? is the ration of explained and unexplained variances greater than 1?{ look at the F-statistic, together with the level of significance from the ANOVA table.
Note that the larger the R2 value, the greater the F value.}
(iii) Do the assumptions underlying the model (e.g., OLS regression) hold?
(a) SAVE predicted and residual values
(b) E(u)=0: the errors have zero mean {Look at the `residual statistics` table)
(c) Cov(ui,uj)=0 : The errors are linearly independent of one another e.g., no autocorrelation {Look at the Durbin-Watson/DW value from `Model Summary` table. If the DW statistic is close to 2, we CAN`T reject ` H0 : No serial correlation`. This means the errors are independent }
(d) Var(u)=σ2 : The Variance of the errors is constant/Homoskedastic/ equal e.g, No Heteroskedastity { Draw scatter plot: Y= Standardized residuals and X= Dependent Variable. IF you see that the errors increase or decrease with an increase of the dependent variable, you`ve got heteroskedascity problem}.
(e) Cov(u,x) =0; There is no relationship between the error and corresponding X variable {Run correlation and covariance between X and residual values. Tips: Analyse…..Correlation…Bivariate…Option…}
(f) U~N(0,σ2): The errors are normally distributed {Draw Histogram for the Unstandardized residuals. Do tests of Normality (Descriptive statistics…explore…dependent list: unstandardized residuals….Plots…normality plots with tests…).if p-values are high/insignificant, we CAN`T reject H0 : Normality. This means the errors are normally distributed}
(g) Is there any multicollinearity problem:? {(i) Look at the correlation matrix to confirm that there is no linear relationship between independent variables (ii) Check tolerance and VIF: Analyse ….Regression…linear….Statistics (check collinearity diagnostics). The tolerance should be above 0.10 and VIF should be below 10}
(h) Model specification: (a) correct functional form (b) no omission of important variables (c) no inclusion of irrelevant variables.
Step 2.
Quantitative Analysis PowerPoint Slides Requirement (Use the PPT example as a reference. It is an example that we did for Twilio.)
Part 1 – Executive Summary (1-2 Slides)
Summarize your major findings based on your target companies.
What is the industry?
What are the company historical highlights?
History (Create a timeline)
Strategy (Overall and recent)
Objectives (Operational and Strategical)
Historical Finance Transactions (M&A and Long-term Investment)
What does the historical data of the company tells you?
Summarize each category into 2-3 sentences.
Part 2 – Major Competitors (1-2 Slides)
Notes: List the name of the competitors and their major businesses.
What are their characteristics?
How are they doing financially and operationally?
Part 3 – Financial Highlights (1-2 Slides)
Search for average ratios in the industry on Marketwatch:
PE Multiple, EV/EBITDA, PBV, ROA, ROE
Compare your company to the industrial average.
Please draw your conclusions based on the formula and principles.
Part 4 – Quantitative Analysis (5-8 Slides)
List your model and explain the following questions. (Transform your report to slides)
Do not show the Screen shots of your graphs, please show more about your findings and conclusions.
(i) Goodness of fit: how well does the model describe the relationship between the variables?{ Look at the adjusted R2 value}.
(ii) Overall model significance: is there a linear relationship between all X variables taken together with Y ? is the ration of explained and unexplained variances greater than 1?{ look at the F-statistic, together with the level of significance from the ANOVA table.
Note that the larger the R2 value, the greater the F value.}
(iii) Do the assumptions underlying the model (e.g., OLS regression) hold?
(a) SAVE predicted and residual values
(b) E(u)=0: the errors have zero mean {Look at the `residual statistics` table)
(c) Cov(ui,uj)=0 : The errors are linearly independent of one another e.g., no autocorrelation {Look at the Durbin-Watson/DW value from `Model Summary` table. If the DW statistic is close to 2, we CAN`T reject ` H0 : No serial correlation`. This means the errors are independent }
(d) Var(u)=σ2 : The Variance of the errors is constant/Homoskedastic/ equal e.g, No Heteroskedastity { Draw scatter plot: Y= Standardized residuals and X= Dependent Variable. IF you see that the errors increase or decrease with an increase of the dependent variable, you`ve got heteroskedascity problem}.
(e) Cov(u,x) =0; There is no relationship between the error and corresponding X variable {Run correlation and covariance between X and residual values. Tips: Analyse…..Correlation…Bivariate…Option…}
(f) U~N(0,σ2): The errors are normally distributed {Draw Histogram for the Unstandardized residuals. Do tests of Normality (Descriptive statistics…explore…dependent list: unstandardized residuals….Plots…normality plots with tests…).if p-values are high/insignificant, we CAN`T reject H0 : Normality. This means the errors are normally distributed}
(g) Is there any multicollinearity problem:? {(i) Look at the correlation matrix to confirm that there is no linear relationship between independent variables (ii) Check tolerance and VIF: Analyse ….Regression…linear….Statistics (check collinearity diagnostics). The tolerance should be above 0.10 and VIF should be below 10}
(h) Model specification: (a) correct functional form (b) no omission of important variables (c) no inclusion of irrelevant variables.
EXAMPLE PYTHON CODES
Here are example PYTHON codes for the two steps, please find this attachment and work on it.
except the way below, Regression output showed Prob(JB) <0.05, reject the null hypothesis that it is normally distributed
"""
import seaborn as sns
def normal_errors_assumption(model, features, label, p_value_thresh=0.05):
from statsmodels.stats.diagnostic import normal_ad
print('Assumption 2: The error terms are normally distributed', 'n')
# Calculating residuals for the Anderson-Darling test
df_results = calculate_residuals(model, features, label)
print('Using the Anderson-Darling test for normal distribution')
# Performing the test on the residuals
p_value = normal_ad(df_results['Residuals'])[1]
print('p-value from the test - below 0.05 generally means non-normal:', p_value)
# Reporting the normality of the residuals
if p_value < p_value_thresh:
print('Residuals are not normally distributed')
else:
print('Residuals are normally distributed')
# Plotting the residuals distribution
pyplot.subplots(figsize=(12, 6))
pyplot.title('Distribution of Residuals')
sns.distplot(df_results['Residuals'])
pyplot.show()
print()
if p_value > p_value_thresh:
print(‘Assumption satisfied’)
else:
print(‘Assumption not satisfied’)
print()
print(‘Confidence intervals will likely be affected’)
print(‘Try performing nonlinear transformations on variables’)
normal_errors_assumption(model, X2, y)
“””
Assumption 3: No Autocorrelation
Performing Durbin-Watson Test:
Values of 1.5 < d < 2.5 generally show that there is no autocorrelation in the data
0 to 2< is positive autocorrelation
>2 to 4 is negative autocorrelation
Reflection essays should integrate readings and class discussions. You may choose one of the following prompts for your essay.What are obstacles to “community development”?Do you think it is easier to do development in rural or urban communities?Who should determine if a neighborhood needs to be developed or redeveloped? And why?Should we invest in people rather than places?Reflection essays should be three pages in length (approx. 900 words), typed in Times New Roman, size 12, double-spaced. Outside sources are okay to utilize but please also utilize the one provided.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Action Strategies for
Community Development
In politics one hears “where you stand,
depends on where you sit.” The same can
be said about strategies for neighborhood
development. The answers to fundamental
questions like: “Where do we start?”,
“What do we want to achieve?” and “How
do we get there?”, will be much different
depending upon where one is “sitting” in the
community development process.
Our starting point is the neighborhood
organization – and that makes all the
difference in building strong communities.
While the perspective of the book is
neighborhood residents and organizations,
the approach is to create critical
partnerships among the many individuals
dedicated to community development.
These include
• neighborhood residents
• volunteers and paid staff of community
organizations like neighborhood
groups, local churches, and Community
Development Corporations
• employees of area or region-wide
community development organizations
like the local affordable housing builders
and the Enterprise Foundation
• the staff members of school districts,
city planning offices, social service
agencies, health care providers,
economic development organizations,
and other similar groups.
Many people working together are
necessary based on a critical appreciation
of the importance of neighborhood
organizations and local residents.
The stepping off point comes from the
inspiring efforts of a low income community
in Boston called the Dudley Street
Neighborhood. Their story is in a book titled
Streets of Hope. After many years of work,
Dudley Street residents said their strongest
tools were: “the concept of the master plan
and the action of aggressive community
organizing.” (Medoff & Sklar, p.265)
This chapter will cover why this is so and
what it means in terms of neighborhood
planning.
What Is Covered In This Chapter?
The following topics will be addressed
below:
• Lessons from a short history of
neighborhood planning.
• A definition of “social capital” and why
social capital is of critical importance to
neighborhoods.
• Values that underlie community
development work.
• Three different planning models for
community development: Rational
Planning, Assets Based Community
Development, and Community
Organizing. We will talk about what
they are, how they work, and in which
situations they are used.
• Some long-term guidelines for
neighborhood development activity.
• Roles of planners and roles of
organizers.
Dudley Street Neighborhood Initiative
The needed critical partnership for
community development involves
convergence of the work of many,
coming together from neighborhood
homes, businesses and churches; local
school rooms and offices, government
agencies; banks and developers’ offices;
and many others. This coming together
requires an unwavering dedication to
neighborhood improvement, social capital,
1
and empowerment. It also requires
an understanding and sympathy for
the bureaucratic requirements of job
descriptions, demands, and hierarchies. It
means creatively engaging the programs of
large organizations like local governments
and school systems that reach out to
communities, such as Community Oriented
Policing and Community Schools.
acre, about 30% greater than in Bombay,
India at the time. Tenements often were
poorly built and dangerous. By 1900, more
than two-thirds of New Yorkers (2.4 million
individuals) were living in tenements as
defined by law. (Ford, pp. 84, 187, 202)
The approach is about openness,
communication, creativity, empathy,
patience, and flexibility. It is always with
one’s eyes on the prize of safe, enjoyable,
and well-functioning neighborhoods.
A Short History of Planning, or
“What Is Past Is Prologue”
The field of urban planning began as
neighborhood planning and had its roots in
the teeming tenement districts of New York
in the 19th Century. The city was a sleepy,
mostly rural place in 1800 with only 60,000
residents. As New York changed from a
merchant and finance center to an industrial
one, it expanded rapidly. There were once
farms and cottages in the upper part of
Manhattan. By 1860, the population grew
to 814,000 and the city entered the 20th
century with 1,850,000 residents. (Ford,
Slums & Housing, pp. 72-79, 140)
Confronted by this rising tide of humanity,
property owners greedy for quick wealth
prevailed on the New York Commission to
subdivide the city into a grid block system
of 25’ x 100’ lots. This was the most
flexible and marketable subdivision of land
(“the most cheap to build”) and few sites
were left for public facilities. Into this
dense grid were built the housing tenement
buildings – often two buildings to a lot, each
rising four to seven stories. One floor of
the tenement typically contained four small
apartments with two rooms (sometimes 12’
x 10’ and 10’ x 6’ in size). Each room might
contain as many as six persons. Owners
were dividing the living spaces into the
smallest area capable of holding human life.
By 1890, one section of New York had an
average density of nearly 1,000 persons per
Lower East Side of Manhattan
Compounding the press of sheer numbers
was the virtual absence of sanitary sewer
and water facilities. Privies were located
in tenement basements and in small open
areas between buildings on the small lots.
By the close of the century, the City was
described as “one elongated cesspool.”
Regular epidemics of typhus, typhoid,
yellow fever, cholera, dysentery, and
smallpox broke out. (Ford, p. 130)
In the midst of this squalor, urban planning
emerged from the activities of the
Settlement House workers. The first U.S.
Settlement House was University Settlement
established by Stanton Coit in 1886 in the
Lower East Side of Manhattan. The first
Settlement workers were from the middle
or wealthier classes, inspired by religious
tenets of service, and lived among the
people whose lives they worked to improve.
(Coit in Pacey, Readings in the Development
of Settlement Work)
2
Their goals and circumstances in these
neighborhoods drew them into a wide range
of community improvement efforts. (Lurie,
Encyclopedia of Social Work, p. 690) These
included:
• availability of regular education,
kindergarten, pre-school, and afterschool programs;
• recreation, parks and playgrounds;
• sanitation, potable water, and garbage
collection;
• libraries;
• public safety;
• legal aid;
• social services for the elderly, homeless,
and the disabled;
• health care;
• job training; and, above all,
• housing reform.
The settlement house workers focused on
the neighborhood as a whole, attempting
to create a “harmonious whole” by
strengthening the family and residents
working cooperatively to eliminate local
problems. In the course of their work, many
Settlement workers recruited and trained
local leaders. (Alden in Pacey, p. 56)
Tammany Hall politicians had their hands
in the profits of the tenements. They
controlled the Department of Buildings,
appointment of judges, real estate
transactions, and public works projects.
While they garnered the political support of
tenement residents through small favors,
the reformers of the era knew that these
politicians “sell out their own people” and
“cause the troubles they relieve.” (Steffens,
Shame of the Cities, pp. 211-212)
Housing reformers focused on the obvious
need for effective, government regulations.
Scores of studies between 1800 and 1900
by State legislative committees, mayor’s
committees, charitable and religious
organizations, professional associations, and
other governmental agencies underscored
the abhorrent tenement conditions.
Tenement Housing laws were drafted in
1867, 1879, 1887, and 1895, but even
when adopted they did little more than
prevent conditions from worsening. “Model
tenements” projects were built by reformers
but had little impact on over-all conditions
because a handful of good dwelling were
built while tens of thousands of slum units
were raised. (Ford, p. 202) Some of the
commentaries seemed to place blame on
immigrants for their condition: “congregated
armies of foreigners …. They bring with
them destitution, misery, and too often
disease.” (DeForest & Veiller, The Tenement
Housing Problem, p. 72)
It was not until an effective political
force coalesced between 1884 and 1901,
uniting the housing reformers, Settlement
House workers, social service groups,
community and religious leaders, that
progress was made. Jacob Riis had written
local newspaper articles about the plight
of tenement residents for 20 years,
culminating in the book How the Other
Half Lives (1890). A series of widely
publicized public meetings were organized
by the Tenement Housing Committee
in 1900 attended by more than 10,000
people. After 15 years of effort to educate
the public, the housing reform movement
in New York gathered enough strength
to break through the obstructions of
politicians, bureaucrats, and tenement
owners and enact the first truly effective
set of regulations, the Housing Reform Act
of 1901. (DeForest & Veiller, pp. 110-115,
Ford, pp. 123-124)
The description of inhumane conditions
and a sound program for improvement
were finally joined with a moral and ethical
position and effective political organizing
to overcome economically and politically
entrenched interests. Nearly 100 years of
facts and moral suasion had been ineffective
absent an organized political force.
Virtually all the leaders in the housing
reform movement had Settlement House
backgrounds. These workers understood
that it was not “contrivances [schemes,
technological or otherwise] but persons”
who will save society. (MacMahon in Pacey,
p. 108)
The preceding section described the
broad scope of the Settlement House
workers’ activity. Their methodology very
nearly defines neighborhood planning
3
for community development today. The
approach “looks for results . . . to the
neighborhood as a whole. Its first business
is to survey its field, to find out what
needs to be done. Then it seeks to make
contacts—to get in touch with all the
elements that go to make up the social
life of the neighborhood, to organize and
correlate the neighborhood forces for good,
that conditions may be improved for all.”
(White in Pacey, p. 92)
In 1909, Benjamin Marsh, the former
leader of the Committee on Congestion of
Population in New York, published one of
the first planning texts, An Introduction
to City Planning. The book strongly
emphasized the need for a community plan
and government regulation to achieve the
plan’s objectives. (Marsh, An Introduction
to City Planning, New York: Committee on
Congestion, 1909)
primarily by leaders of the Settlement
House movement. At its modern
emergence in the U.S., planning was
equated with neighborhood planning and
addressed a wide range of issues including
schools, housing reform, public health,
transportation, expansion of parks and
recreation, and more effective public
services. (Proceedings of the First National
Conference on City Planning, 1909) Over
time, this comprehensive approach
became more and more fragmented into
hundreds of specialties in land use planning,
architecture, social services, housing,
economic development, and so on. The
approach here of neighborhood planning
for community development strategically
pulls together these threads within the
boundaries of the neighborhood and
reclaims what was lost nearly 100 years
ago.
There is a strong line of connection
between the Settlement workers active
toward the end of the 19th century and
the Dudley Street activists in Boston nearly
100 years later. It always has been “the
concept of the master plan and the action
of aggressive community organizing” that
made the difference.
Social Capital: What It Is and Why
It Is Important.
We are all aware of financial capital
– wages, wealth, property. But we seldom
think of something that is more important
than financial capital – the concept of “social
capital.” Social capital is more important
to neighborhoods than financial capital,
physical capital, and even human capital,
and this section discusses why.
Marsh, An Introduction to City Planning
The first National Conference on City
Planning, also held in 1909, was organized
A visitor to the United States in its early
years, Alexis de Tocqueville, observed that a
key quality of our country was the tendency
of people in communities here to get
together to solve common problems. This
action is what we have come to mean by
social capital. (de Tocqueville, Democracy
in America)
4
Social capital is:
• Located in neighborhood places.
• A broad and dense network of personal
relationships based on families,
friendships, and acquaintances.
• A large number of formal and informal
associations and neighborhood
institutions.
• Rooted in family life.
• A high level of involvement in
community life.
• Community norms of behavior and
values.
• Feelings of trust among neighborhood
residents.
• A process of communicating acceptable
behavior and values, monitoring actions,
and taking action when the norms are
violated.
• A shared belief in the neighborhood’s
capacity to organize itself to take action
in relation to needs.
• Connections among neighborhood
businesses, churches, schools, and
organizations.
• Linkages to extra-neighborhood assets
such as teachers, business owners,
bankers, elected officials, social service
officials, police, court officials, and
religious leaders.
• Effective neighborhood action. (See
esp. Sampson in Ferguson & Dickens,
pp. 253-265)
Social capital is no more complicated than
the ordinary actions of neighbors to know
one another, help each other, and work to
improve the neighborhood.
It all seems obvious, but the vast array
of governmental officials, bureaucrats,
business and development leaders, and
school administrators and teachers often
act, either consciously or not, to marginalize
neighborhood residents’ ability to improve
their own communities.
The following sections illustrate ways that
social capital has been found to improve
neighborhoods and people’s lives, as well as
how its absence frequently has disastrous
consequences.
Public Safety
People studying crime and public safety
have different views about its causes.
Some believe that high rates of crime
and fear are based on the break-down
of primary institutions (family, church,
kinship, neighborhood) and social bonds.
Others think that crime and disorder is
based on differing values of certain people
(“subcultures”, e.g. gangs). This is related
to the concept of a “culture of poverty.”
(Lewis, Working Papers, pp. 3-11) (Recent
studies found, however, that lower income
African-Americans and Latinos in high crime
areas actually are less tolerant of crime and
deviance than Whites.) (Sampson, p. 254)
Some studies linked crime, delinquency, and
disorder with poverty, high mobility, singleparent households, divorce, race, domestic
violence, immigration, and neighborhood
diversity. These do not look beyond the
simple associations to understand the
ways by which these conditions have led to
problems.
When other studies look at how social
capital affects crime and disorder, they
found something very interesting. In
neighborhoods with characteristics
apparently related to public safety
problems (e.g. low incomes, single-parent
households, high immigration, etc.), but
high social capital, the connection was
greatly reduced or disappeared. (Sampson,
pp. 259-261) In other words, social capital
intervened in and reduced the connection
between a number of social and economic
problems and crime, delinquency and
disorder. An important key for action was
found.
This perspective also points to something
else: that crime and fear of crime reduce
social capital by making people fearful,
isolating them in their houses, causing them
to be distrustful of one another, and making
it more difficult to work together.
5
stereotypes of low-income people especially,
fueling their sense of powerlessness and
frustration. In such schools, neighborhood
social capital is actually broken down.
Social Capital and Public Safety
This view provides the foundation for
Community Oriented Policing (COPs) and
other techniques to forge partnerships
between neighborhood residents and the
police in insuring safety. These partnerships
attempt to build and strengthen
neighborhood social capital. (Trojanowicz
& Bucqueroux, Community Policing: How to
Get Started and Skogan, On the Beat)
Studies of the relationship between
community involvement and student
success show that many schools are missing
important opportunities for success. Anne
Henderson has been publicizing this linkage
for more than 20 years. (Henderson, A New
Wave of Evidence, 2002) Her work shows
that parental involvement in education has
positive outcomes on student achievement.
Involvement has been shown to improve
attendance, discipline, achievement, selfesteem, graduation and continuation to
postsecondary education, and reduce
parent-staff conflict. When schools address
the needs of students in a family context,
students also do better in school
Schools
Over time education has been increasingly
professionalized (teachers are service
providers, and students and parents are
passive clients). Responsibility has been
delegated by parents and communities
to educators, resulting in standardization
of what is learned, and separation of
schools (physically and socially) from
neighborhoods.
Sixty years ago, a perceptive teacher noted:
“Many schools are like little islands set apart
from the mainland of life by a deep moat of
convention and tradition.” (Carr in Minzey &
LeTarte, Reforming Public Schools, p. 63)
In many schools, low achievement,
disorder, and high failure rates are the
norm. The parents and residents of
these neighborhoods are seen by some
teachers and school administrators as
lacking assets and motivation, perhaps
even as threatening to the schools and the
students. Schools are kept in isolation from
the community. This reinforces negative
Henderson’s work also shows that the more
parents are involved in schools, the more
they attempt to improve other community
conditions, also enhancing student
achievement. Her work underscores the
importance of social capital in improving the
lives of students, parents, and communities.
In the world of education, this partnership
has been called “Community Education.”
Community Education is the concept of
service to the entire neighborhood by
providing for all the educational needs of
all its members. Local schools serve as the
catalyst for engaging community resources
to address community problems. (Minzey &
LeTarte, pp. 52-59)
6
The Texas Communities Organized for
Public Services (COPS) found that “the
most common strategies for accumulating
social capital did not develop within the . .
. schools but rather in . . . neighborhoods.”
(Shirley, Community Organizing for Urban
School Reform, p. 253)
Human Services
The same story can be told about the
professionalization of human services.
Settlement House workers, now claimed
as their own by the social work field, were
active in the late 19th Century when little
distinction was made between the physical
and the human condition of neighborhoods.
Afterwards, community service became
institutionalized in federal, state, and
local agencies especially during the
Great Depression. As early as 1922, one
Settlement worker wrote: “when the idea
[service program], explored and developed .
. . by individuals, has made good, the State
comes along, appropriates it, and makes it
part of its own machine. Voluntary effort
has . . . triumphed all along the line when
it finds itself extinguished by the State.”
(Carruthers in Pacey, p. 151)
Over time, humans became categorized
and translated into an almost bewildering
number of needs. Helping one another
became a job. Neighbors were reduced
to “statistics” and categorized as clients.
Social services now are fragmented, crisis
oriented, suffering from insufficient funding,
and their effectiveness is frequently
questioned. John McKnight, one of the
leaders in social change, wrote: “The power
to label people deficient and declare them
in need is the basic tool of . . . oppression.”
(McKnight, p. 16)
Just as in the fields of public safety and
education, those in human services began
to realize the importance of social capital
and to see people as part of place-based
communities. Studies showed that family,
friends, and neighbors were the primary
sources for those seeking and receiving
help. (Froland, etc., Helping Networks,
p. 17) These “informal care-givers” were
found to be as helpful, or more helpful, than
professionals. Informal helping is voluntary,
spontaneous, based on the individual,
sensitive to personal preferences, flexible,
based on self-reliance, reciprocal, and
simply perceived as part of every day life.
(Froland, pp. 21-26, 35)
The most effective informal helping occurred
in social networks that featured:
• diversity,
• quality,
• interconnectedness,
• formal and informal organizations
• supportive, communicated, and enforced
traditions, norms of behavior, attitudes,
and
• neighborhood stability. (Froland, pp. 4041, 137-149)
A distinct approach to human service
work grew up around informal helping
networks and what are called “ecosystem”
approaches. (Meyer & Mattaini, in Mattaini,
7
The Foundations of Social Work Practice,
1999, pp. 3-19) The more traditional goals
of individual and family well being were
expanded to community development.
The main task for human service workers
became to identify and foster community
helping networks, working with them,
supporting and strengthening them.
Kretzman and McKnight take a different
approach that arrives at this place from a
different starting point – the neighborhood.
Their Assets Based Community
Development (ABCD) approach started
with community residents, identifying their
individual and organizational resources, and
building from there. This method is covered
below in this chapter and in the chapter on
neighborhood based human services.
In all, the U.S. workforce has become more
polarized by income and resources. Jobs
with the greatest growth in total numbers
are those paid the lowest wages and
with the least claim to benefits – service
workers, retail sales, cashiers, clerks,
janitors and cleaning people, nursing aides,
food counter workers. (Florida, The Rise of
the Creative Class, p. 71)
Economic Development
The United States went through a massive
economic restructuring starting in about
1970. While more than 40% of all jobs
at the start of the 1970s were lost during
that decade, the economy grew from
about 70 million jobs to 90 million in the
same period. (USDOL, Office of Secy, The
“New Economy”, http://www.dol.gov/asp/
programs/flsa/report-neweconomy) Older
cities like Baltimore, New York, Philadelphia,
and St. Louis lost more than half of their
manufacturing jobs during the past three
decades and employment shifted from cities
to suburbs.
Incomes of the bottom 1/5th of households
have fallen while those of the top 1/5th
have increased rapidly. The wages of nonsupervisory workers dropped nearly 20%
between from 1970 to 1990. (“Spiraling
Down: The Decline of Real Wages”, Dollars
and Sense, April 1992) The percentage
of year-round workers paid low wages
increased by 50%, to nearly 20% of all
workers, just from 1979 to 1990. The
percentage of families with children in
poverty increased by more than 30% during
this period. (US Bureau of the Census,
“Workers with Low Wages: 1964 to 1990”,
1992; US Bureau of the Census, “Trends
in Relative Income: 1964 to 1989”, 1991;
Medoff & Sklar, p. 192)
The “Creative Class” of high-tech workers,
business managers, financiers, engineers,
lawyers, analysts, designers and so on, has
doubled in size and has prospered. (Florida,
pp. 68-70, 72-77)
In the course of the massive social
dislocation produced by economic change,
social capital has been pulled apart,
left in shambles in many low income
neighborhoods, and sometimes rebuilt in
other places.
In this context, some economists have
concluded that by asking people “to
consider the economic landscape from
a social perspective, new appreciation
of market power and opportunities . . .
emerge.” (Gittell & Thompson, in Saegert,
etc., Social Capital and Poor Communities,
p. 120)
Social capital can been found to foster
neighborhood economic development in
many ways. These include:
• securing financing;
• hiring, retaining, and training good
employees;
• identifying markets;
• finding suitable and affordable facilities;
• obtaining technical assistance related
to accounting, business law, analysis,
marketing, and management; and
8
•
gaining support from local government
including public safety, city services,
and infrastructure. (Gittel & Thompson
in Saegert, pp. 115-135; Dickens in
Ferguson and Dickens, esp. pp. 404423)
articulates how planners and other agency
staff members may help neighborhood
efforts.
By the last tally, there were more
than 3,000 Community Development
Corporations (CDC) in the U.S. (Natl. Cong.
For Com Ec. Dev., Coming of Age, 1999)
These organizations are producing houses
and jobs and providing social services in
an evolving comprehensive approach to
neighborhood development. CDCs provide
good examples of how social capital can be
drawn upon and built up by neighborhood
economic development activities.
Personal values and the community’s
vision are the bedrock upon which all
neighborhood development is built, guiding
strategies and programs. They are the
fundamental litmus test against which
actions should be reviewed.
In summary, social capital has been found to:
• create and sustain neighborhood public
safety,
• foster educational success,
• meet human service needs, and
• foster economic development.
Neighborhood planning focused on
building social capital shows how these
efforts can be pulled together in a place;
provides a foundation for neighborhood
planning by identifying the starting
point of community development;
illuminates how neighborhoods can make
thoughtful decisions about approaching
community development; describes where
neighborhoods begin these efforts; and how
Back to Basics: Values and Vision
Without leadership that embodies personal
values that are consistent with community
development, programs are destined to
lose their way. What are these values? An
all-inclusive list is not possible, but these
values that are shared by different religious
communities – Muslim, Christian, Jew,
Hindu, Buddhist. They are held by people
who do not have theistic convictions such
as those in the Society for Ethical Culture.
Quite simply, they include humility, love,
service (good works), selflessness, respect
for community, reverence for life, and
include living one’s life according to these
principles.
Contemporary community development is
rooted in scriptural values. Notably, these
include the Interfaith coalitions supported
by Industrial Areas Foundation and Gamelial
Foundation organizers. Base Ecclesial
Community (BEC) organizing is mostly seen
in Latin America but is being used in Latino
neighborhoods in the U.S. presently. (Hanna
and Robinson, pp. 172-177)
The second critical foundation of community
development is long term vision for the
future. A vision statement is a description
of what the community will be like in the
long-term (such as 20 to 25 years), when
the community has been successful in its
efforts. The vision is comprehensive in
scope and covers topics such as young
people’s lives, education, housing, people
who are challenged by drug and alcohol
dependency, senior citizens, and so on.
Each of the parts should be a clear and
compelling expression of the community’s
love and respect for one another and its
9
hopes for the future. As a whole, it is a
shining expression of faith and a compass
that directs activities.
The Means of Community
Development
Our values and vision guide us forward.
The end product of what should be created,
supported, expanded is neighborhood social
capital. The examples above related to
Public Safety, Education, Human Services,
and Economic Development all point to the
critical importance of good social capital to
community development.
This effort is not so simple, because
underlying all the efforts to improve
schools, build affordable housing, provide
alternatives to gangs and drugs for young
people, and so on, is the matter of power.
Individuals, groups, and agencies that share
the same objectives often fight over who
has the authority to undertake the work.
Social capital is power and it should reside,
in large measure, within the neighborhood.
10
Three Paths of Action
The approaches to improving the
neighborhood can be reduced to the
following approaches:
• Rationale Planning,
• Asset Based Community Development
(ABCD), and
• Community Organizing.
The table below summarizes the key
differences among these.
Assets Based Community Development,
in contrast, emphasizes mobilizing local
resources to improve the community,
carrying out this work locally.
Community Organizing takes a different
approach: the process is controlled within the
neighborhood, but it is focused on bringing
external resources to bear on community
problems.
Community organizations and planners
should be familiar with all of these
approaches. Each can be, and should be,
used depending on the circumstances, as
will be addressed below. Let’s move now to
a review of each community development
approaches: their natures, assumptions,
strengths and shortcomings.
Rational Planning, by and large, assumes
that external resources will be used to
improve the community and control over
the process and programs is outside the
neighborhood.
11
Rational Planning Model
Rational planning is the de-facto standard
for government agencies. The uses to
which this approach is applied are quite
large. All the following types of plans use
the basic elements of Rational Planning and
share many of the underlying assumptions:
• neighborhood,
• comprehensive,
• corridor and center,
• transportation,
• human service,
• housing,
• educational plans and so on.
“Couldn’t people
see what he
had done? Why
weren’t they
grateful?”
Caro on Robert
Moses in The
Power Broker
Modifications of the Rational Planning model
to address some of its shortcomings are
called “equity” planning and “consensus
building”, also discussed below.
It is unfortunate that this approach is called
“rational” or “scientific” planning because
it implies that those who disagree with
its outcomes are irrational or unscientific.
Rational findings and recommendations can
be quite different, for example, for rental
property owners and for their tenants.
There are several potential biases inherent
in Rational Planning that must be addressed
for it to achieve legitimacy. In the most
basic way, the plan process assumes
that everyone affected by the plan, the
“stakeholders” brought into the planning
process, are equally equipped in the tools
of “rational” analysis: verbal expression,
literacy, facility using socio-economic data
and maps, and so on. It is unethical to limit
certain people’s participation in the planning
process based on these preconditions and
doing so short-changes the educational
function of neighborhood planning.
A plan sometimes, however, can be
worse than no plan at all if it embodies,
legitimates, and sustains the status quo
of inequality and unacceptable human and
physical conditions. The Rational Planning
led to this outcome in center city urban
renewal of the 1950s and 1960s and in
many of Robert Moses’ projects in New York
City. This section includes preconditions
suggested for neighborhood organizations
to meet when participating in a Rational
Planning process.
Elements of Rational Planning
The handbook of planning, The Practice of
Local Government Planning, contains the
following chart of the Rational Planning
process. (Hoch in So, pp. 23-24) This
outline is from the State of California
and therefore contains greater emphasis
on environmental review than other
governments might include.
The mere effort, the mere intention to
plan, is liberating individually and for the
neighborhood. Withholding the opportunity
to plan for the neighborhood may be the
greatest way for those in power to sustain
powerlessness, inequality, and poor
conditions.
12
Step 3. In this step, plan participants
first identify the actual conditions in the
community in relation to the goals first.
(What are the barriers to overcome? What
are the community’s strengths?) The
information to be collected is informed
by the goals. Only after this background
data has been collected and discussed do
participants consider why the unacceptable
conditions exist (cause and effect).
Step 4. As result of the steps above,
people are better informed about both their
community, t
No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA Style Reference .
✨Add references✨
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font .
No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
proper examples and explanations for each questions.
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
Commit to the number of words specified for each question
the answer should be sufficien
TextBook: Hill, C. W. L. & G. T. Hult (2021). International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Cases
629
Economic Development in Bangladesh
When Bangladesh gained independence from Pakistan in
1971 after a brutal civil war that may have left as many as
3 million dead, the U.S. National Security Adviser, Henry
Kissinger, referred to the country as a “basket case.”
Kissinger’s assessment was accurate enough. At the time,
Bangladesh was one of the world’s poorest nations.
Although most of the country is dominated by the fertile
Ganges-Brahmaputra delta, a lack of other natural
resources, coupled with poor infrastructure, political
instability, and high levels of corruption, long held the
country back. To compound matters, Bangladesh is prone
to natural disasters. Most of Bangladesh is less than
12 meters above sea level. The extensive low-lying areas
are vulnerable to tropical cyclones, floods, and tidal bores.
Beginning in the mid-1990s, however, Bangladesh began
to climb the ladder of economic progress. From the early
2000s onward, the country grew its economy at around
6 percent per annum compounded. Today, this Muslim
majority country of 160 million people has joined the
ranks of lower-middle-income nations. Poverty reduction
has been dramatic, with the percentage of the population
living in poverty falling from 44.2 percent in 1991 to
18.5 percent in 2010, an achievement that raised 20.5 million people out of abject poverty. Today, the country ranks
64th out of the 154 countries included in the World Bank’s
global poverty database. It has a considerable way to go,
but it is no longer one of the world’s poorest countries.
Several reasons underlie Bangladesh’s relative economic success. In its initial post-independence period,
Bangladesh adopted socialist policies, nationalizing many
companies and subsidizing the costs of agricultural production and basic food products. These policies failed to
deliver the anticipated gains. Policy reforms in the 1980s
were directed toward the withdrawal of food and agricultural subsidies, the privatization of state-owned companies, financial liberalization, and the withdrawal of some
import restrictions. Further reforms aimed at liberalizing
the economy were launched in the 1990s. These included
making the currency convertible (which led to a floating
exchange rate in 2003), reducing import duties to much
lower levels, and removing most of the controls on the
movement of foreign private capital (which allowed for
more foreign direct investment). The reforms of the
1990s coincided with the transition to a parliamentary
democracy from semi-autocratic rule.
Bangladesh’s private sector has expanded rapidly since
then. Leading the growth has been the country’s vibrant
textile sector, which is now the second-largest exporter of
ready-made garments in the world after China. Textiles
account for 80 percent of Bangladesh’s exports. The
development of the textile industry has been helped by
the availability of low-cost labor, managerial skills, favorable trade agreements, and government policies that
eliminated import duties on inputs for the textile business, such as raw materials. The Bangladesh economy has
also benefited from its productive agricultural sector and
remittances from more than 10 million Bangladesh citizens who work in other nations. Bangladesh is also the
home of the microfinance movement, which has enabled
entrepreneurs with no prior access to the banking system
to borrow small amounts of capital to start businesses.
This being said, the country still faces considerable
impediments to sustaining its growth. Infrastructure
remains poor; corruption continues to be a major problem; and the political system is, at best, an imperfect
democracy where opposition is stifled. The country is too
dependent upon its booming textile sector and needs to
diversify its industrial base. Bangladesh is also one of the
countries most prone to the adverse affects of climate
change. A one-meter rise in sea level would leave an
estimated 10 percent of the country under water and
increase the potential for damaging floods in much of the
remainder. Nevertheless, according to the U.S. investment
bank Goldman Sachs, Bangladesh is one of the 11 lowermiddle-income nations poised for sustained growth.
Sources
W. Mahmud, S. Ahmed, and S. Mahajan, “Economic Reforms,
Growth, and Governance: The Political Economy Aspects of
Bangladesh’s Development Surprise,” World Bank Commission
on Development and Growth, 2008; “Freedom in the World
2016,” Freedom House; “Tiger in the Night,” The Economist,
October 15, 2016; Sanjay Kathuria, “How Will Bangladesh
Reach High Levels of Prosperity?” World Bank blog, January 5,
2017; and Qimiao Fan, “Bangladesh: Setting a Global Standard
in Ending Poverty,” World Bank blog, October 5, 2016.
Case Discussion Questions
1.
What were the principal reasons for the economic
stagnation of Bangladesh after its war for
independence?
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s
enabled Bangladesh to start climbing the ladder of
economic progress. What are the main lessons here
that can be applied to economic development in
other nations?
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon
agriculture and textile exports. What are the risks
here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial
and commercial base?
Data Interpretation [WLOs: 4, 5] [CLOs: 1, 2, 3, 4]You are planning a case-control study of lung cancer to test the hypothesis that vegetable consumption is protective against lung cancer. In one or two paragraphs, explain the study design. Would you match on smoking? Explain, but without going into detail on how you would reduce design bias.Guided Response: The results of an epidemiologic can be affected by confounding. The astute epidemiologist needs to be able to assess the possibility of confounding when examining a study that finds associations between and exposure and a health outcome. Review several of your classmates’ posts and respond to a minimum of two of your peers. In the text of your post, identify techniques that might have been used to reduce bias in the design and analysis phases of the study.
Use the same organization as in previous weeks’ projects. Over the last five weeks, you have completed a great deal of research regarding your chosen organization. Based on what you’ve learned, you’ve identified a social cause that you believe fits nicely with your organization’s ethical culture. For your last assignment, you will compile this information into a presentation appropriate to be presented to your organization’s senior management.
Note. You may leverage your previously completed assignments as you compose your final presentation. However, material should not just be copied and pasted. Material should demonstrate continued development based on your study in the course.
Tasks:
Summarize your chosen global, publicly traded organization. Who is it? What does it do? Who does it do it to?
Propose the social cause for your organization and how it supports the mission, vision, and values of the organization.
Analyze the key strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT). How does your proposed social cause support the strengths and opportunities of your organization while helping your organization to overcome its weaknesses and threats.
Assess the ethical principles and frameworks used in making your selection. Include a discussion of the internal and the external impacts you expect to make with this choice.
Evaluate any ethical challenges this social cause might present to your employees.
Justify why it is important for your organization to actively participate in a CSR program and promote a global citizenship effort, including the contribution of the proposed social cause.
Prepare a 12-15 slide Microsoft PowerPoint presentation that highlights each of the five topics outlined above. You should use the notes section of each slide in the PowerPoint presentation to provide the supported (citations) details for your presentation. The slides should provide the key ideas for your executive audience.
Submission Details:
Use APA style for citations/references.
Name the presentation SU_BUS3001_W5_LastName_FirstInitial.ppt
Submit your document to the Submissions Area by the due date assigned.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Place of Submission is Blackboard.
Weight 10 Marks
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case 1
Panda Sunglasses
How Should a Start-Up Business with
a Social Mission Market Its Sunglasses
with Bamboo Frames?
V
incent Ko showed his entrepreneurial potential in high
school in Rockville, Maryland, when, as a young hockey
player, he invented a drying rack for hockey pads that he sold
to his teammates, then on eBay, and finally on a Web site for
the company he created. A few years later, while attending
George Washington University in Washington, D.C., Ko and
two friends, Luke Lagera and Mike Mills, were inspired by
the growing social entrepreneurship movement and the success of companies such as TOMS shoes, a company founded
by Blake Mycoskie that donates a pair of shoes to someone in need for every pair it sells. One day while walking
through the Georgetown shopping district, the friends noticed a display of sunglasses and decided to create a business
that would market cool sunglasses and provide eye examinations to someone in need for every pair sold. In keeping with
the idea of a socially responsible company, Ko suggested
that they make their sunglasses frames from eco-friendly
bamboo, a lightweight, sturdy wood that grows extremely
fast. Having grown up in China, Ko was familiar with the
properties of the renewable wood and knew that it was the
perfect material from which to make sunglasses frames.
They created a company, Panda Sunglasses, and set out
to find companies that could make the product they envisioned. Ko knew bamboo was the most commonly used wood
in China, so the team began looking for a company in China
to manufacture the frames to their specifications. Not only
did they find a Chinese wood shop that would make their
sunglasses frames, but they also located a Chinese eye wear
manufacturer to produce the polarized lenses. Pairing the two
companies gave them their unique, stylish sunglasses, which
float. They created a Web site and began selling them at $120
a pair. Through a connection that Lagera had, the young
entrepreneurs found an ideal partner in the Tribal Outreach
Medical Association (TOMA), a nonprofit organization that
provides eye examinations and other health services for tribal
communities. They quickly reached a deal: For every pair of
Panda Sunglasses sold, the company would pay for one eye
exam through TOMA.
The entrepreneurs’ next challenge was to market their
unique sunglasses and their potential to help people in need.
They knew that without sales, their effort at “conscious capitalism” would be for naught. None of the three cofounders
had any experience in the retail industry, but they learned
quickly on the job. The young men had just graduated and
took “regular” jobs to pay their bills, but they remained
690
dedicated to making Panda Sunglasses a success. After testing sales of their sunglasses online, the trio began applying for
spots in various trade shows geared toward accessories. One
of the shows they applied to was the prestigious ENK International trade show, which attracts more than 250,000 buyers
and press members from across the globe. Companies that are
accepted to the juried show find sales leads that generate total
sales of more than $1 billion. Mills sent Ko an e-mail in which
he joked that they would be willing to set up in a broom closet
at ENK if their application were accepted. Ko forwarded that
e-mail to executives at ENK, who responded with, “We’ll find
you a booth instead.” At the ENK show, Ko says he and his
cofounders, fresh out of college, created a booth that featured
a giant bamboo backdrop that attracted a great deal of attention. At one point, they struck up a conversation with three
women, who they learned were buyers from the retail chain
Nordstrom. The trade show opened many doors for the young
company, and less than two years after starting, Panda Sunglasses was generating annual sales of $350,000.
Questions
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of
Panda Sunglasses use their companies’ social missions
to attract customers and promote their businesses?
2. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses define
a unique selling proposition for their company that
resonates with customers?
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda
Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company.
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses’s business model. Can you identify other revenue
streams that could support the company? How can the
company strengthen its relationships with customers?
5. How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use
social media to market their company and its products?
What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate
more sales from their company’s Web site?
Sources: Based on Nancy Dahlberg, “Start-up Spotlight: Panda,” Miami
Herald, June 29, 2014, http://www.miamiherald.com/2014/06/29/v-print/
4207736/startup-spotlight-panda.html; Olga Khazan, “Panda Glasses
Are TOMS Shoes for Your Face,” Washington Post, May 24, 2012, http://
www.washingtonpost.com/blogs/on-small-business/post/panda-glassesare-toms-shoes-for-your-face/2012/05/23/gJQAsOPhlU_blog.html;
Alicia Ciccone, “Vincent Ko, Panda Sunglasses: Sustainable Bamboo
Eyewear That Gives Back,” Huffington Post, May 25, 2012, http://www
.huffingtonpost.com/2012/05/25/vincent-ko-panda-sunglasses_n_1544043
.html; “Panda Sunglasses Are More Than Meets the Eye,” Asian Fortune,
April 25, 2014, http://www.asianfortunenews.com/2014/04/pandasunglasses-are-more-than-meets-the-eye/; Zach Gordon, “Alums’
Business Aims to Help the Needy,” The Hoya, May 17, 2012, http://www
.thehoya.com/alums-business-aims-to-help-the-needy/.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dina Sharqawi
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Please read Cultural Analyst.docx and The Cultural Audit presentation.docx for this assignment.I have also uploaded the outline, speech script, and slides used in the speech that I have done before. I hope you can know the direction I want to take. Then I also uploaded the peer reviews of my last speech by classmates. I hope you can use it as a reference to improve the content of this speech.Please make more pictures and fewer words PPT.Example PowerPoint: https://www.canva.com/design/DAFxoLgjrzo/QXBoBFj1j…
Unformatted Attachment Preview
The Cultural Audit presentation is both a synthesis of the root
culture and projection for future cross-cultural
communication needs.
Consider reviewing the following past examples of cultural
audits in our program blog,
How can Cultural Audits influence the Information
Age?Links to an external site.
https://inspireandinfluence.cps.northeastern.edu/201
8/11/01/how-can-cultural-audits-influence-the-infor
mation-age/
Following your Cultural Audit Outline as your map
As a reminder below is the sample outline (Your outline does
not need to follow these exact headings).
I. Cultural Field Statement
II. Cultural History Impact
III. Cultural Politics Impact
IV. Cultural Linguistics Influence
V. Synthesis of the Cultural History, Politics, and Linguistics
VI. Recommendations for the Cultural Field’s Future
The presentation is to cover the board points of the culture
and in-depth analysis within 7-9 minutes.
Consider the following presentation elements should include
the analytical findings of the following constructs in the
culture of interest.
▪ Overview of the root cultural beliefs and values
▪ Key historical elements influencing the culture’s future
▪ Key political elements predicting the culture’s future
▪ Key linguistics influencing the culture’s communication and leveraging for
communication strategies
▪ Recommendation for future cross-cultural communication strategies related
to the field
▪ Provide the an APA Reference list of the resources used in the audit
presentation, no need for the annotated bibliography
Presentation Engagement
o
Keep in mind you are the expert of your cultural field
and we are your audience
o
Focus on the purpose and meaning of each visual and
word in the presentation
o
More is not always better, sometimes it is overwhelming
– Think => What do I want my audience to remember?
Final recording due Saturday Week 6. Share your draft during
Week 6 class.
Cultural Audit Presentation Rubric
1
Outline and Annotated Bibliography
I. Cultural Field
A. People
My cultural field primarily encompasses individuals hailing from traditional Chinese families who
harbor aspirations of carving out a career in the international fashion industry. These individuals
often find themselves shouldering the responsibility of being role models within their families,
which instills a strong sense of duty and ambition in them.
B. Context (action)
The contextual landscape in which this cultural field thrives is a fascinating interplay of traditional
Chinese values, contemporary aspirations, and the ever-evolving global fashion landscape.
Participants in this field actively engage in cultural exchange through the medium of fashion,
leveraging their social media platforms as vehicles to promote emerging niche brands and
facilitate cross-cultural understanding.
C. Outcome or Field
The outcome of this cultural field is a harmonious fusion of Chinese and international cultures
within the sphere of fashion. This field endeavors to create meaningful connections between
individuals across the world while fostering an appreciation for diverse cultures through the prism
of clothing and style. It is a field characterized by passionate fashion enthusiasts who are
committed to breaking down cultural barriers through their work.
II. History
A. System Approach
2
The historical evolution of this cultural field can be comprehensively understood through a
systems approach. It was catalyzed by China’s late 20th-century opening to the world, which
ushered in exposure to international fashion trends and ignited the spark of global fashion
aspirations among Chinese youth. This historic shift set the stage for the emergence of a new
generation of fashion enthusiasts with a global outlook.
B. Greatest Cultural Impact
The most profound cultural impact on this field materialized with the advent of social media
platforms in the early 21st century. Chinese youth, like myself, harnessed the power of these
digital platforms to not only showcase their fashion acumen but also to connect with like-minded
individuals on a global scale. This digital revolution gave rise to a platform for cross-cultural
dialogue and fashion exchange that continues to shape the field today.
III. Political
A. Description of Power
The political dynamics intertwined with this cultural field are underpinned by a complex
interplay of both domestic and international factors. In China, government policies pertaining
to internet usage and content regulation wield significant influence over the field’s participants.
Moreover, global trade relations and diplomatic ties have a substantial bearing on the
accessibility and presence of international fashion brands within the Chinese market.
B. Impact of Politics
Politics exert a multifaceted impact on this cultural field. Domestically, government
regulations in China regarding social media and online content can significantly mold the
reach and influence of individuals engaged in fashion promotion via digital platforms. On the
3
international front, trade policies and diplomatic tensions can either facilitate or impede the
accessibility of foreign brands in China, thus directly affecting the experiences and
opportunities of fashion enthusiasts in the field.
IV. Synthesis of the Cultural History and Politics (Overall learning)
My cultural field represents a vibrant tapestry of individuals originating from traditional Chinese
backgrounds who passionately aspire to make their mark in the international fashion industry
while concurrently acting as cultural ambassadors. This unique cultural field’s historical trajectory
traces its roots to China’s historical opening up to the world but finds its most profound cultural
impact in the digital age with the ascent of social media platforms, which have provided a global
stage for fashion enthusiasts to share their visions.
The political dimensions woven into this field’s fabric are intricate, encompassing both domestic
regulations governing internet usage and international trade dynamics that determine the
accessibility of foreign fashion brands in China. These political forces underscore the need for
cultural awareness, adaptability, and a keen understanding of the political landscape for those
aiming to excel in the international fashion industry and foster cross-cultural understanding
through fashion. As this cultural field continues to evolve, it reinforces the idea that fashion
transcends borders and serves as a powerful medium for cultural exchange and appreciation.
4
Annotated Bibliography
Arrigo, E. (2021). Collaborative consumption in the fashion industry: A systematic literature
review and conceptual framework. Journal of Cleaner Production, 325, 129261.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2021.129261
This article explores the concept of collaborative consumption within the fashion
industry through a systematic literature review and presents a conceptual framework. The
study critically examines the growing trend of collaborative consumption, shedding light
on its relevance in the context of sustainable fashion practices. Arrigo discusses how
collaborative consumption, which involves sharing and renting fashion items, aligns with
the global shift towards more sustainable and eco-friendly fashion choices. The resource
contributes to the understanding of my culture’s history and politics by highlighting the
importance of sustainability in the fashion industry. It underscores the role of fashion
enthusiasts, such as those in the Chinese fashion market, in promoting and adopting
sustainable practices. As the article delves into global fashion trends, it indirectly supports
the idea of cultural exchange through fashion and emphasizes the need for individuals like
me, who aspire to work in the international fashion industry, to be cognizant of sustainable
practices that resonate with diverse cultures. Arrigo’s work provides valuable insights into
the evolving landscape of fashion consumption and its connection to broader cultural and
environmental contexts.
Lang, C., Seo, S., & Liu, C. (2019). Motivations and obstacles for fashion renting: A cross-cultural
comparison. Journal of Fashion Marketing and Management: An International Journal,
23(4), 519-536. https://doi.org/10.1108/JFMM-05-2019-0106
5
This study delves into the motivations and obstacles surrounding fashion renting,
presenting a cross-cultural comparison. The article explores how different cultural
backgrounds influence individuals’ decisions to engage in fashion renting, shedding light
on the factors that drive or hinder this practice. By conducting a comparative analysis of
consumers from various cultural contexts, including the Chinese market, the research
contributes to the understanding of the cultural dynamics at play in the fashion industry.
This resource is highly relevant to my cultural field as it offers insights into the preferences
and behaviors of individuals who are part of the international fashion landscape. It
highlights how cultural influences impact choices related to fashion consumption and
sustainability. For someone like me aspiring to work in the global fashion industry,
understanding the motivations and obstacles faced by consumers from diverse cultures is
vital for effective marketing and brand promotion. This research serves as a valuable
reference for gaining cultural intelligence within the context of fashion consumption.
Li, G., Lim, M. K., & Wang, Z. (2020). Stakeholders, green manufacturing, and practice
performance: Empirical evidence from Chinese fashion businesses. Annals of Operations
Research, 290, 961-982. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10479-019-03157-7
This empirical study investigates the relationship between stakeholders, green
manufacturing practices, and performance in Chinese fashion businesses. The research
provides valuable insights into the sustainability practices and performance outcomes of
fashion businesses in the Chinese context. It examines how stakeholders, including
consumers and regulatory bodies, influence the adoption of environmentally friendly
manufacturing practices in the fashion industry. The resource is directly relevant to my
cultural field as it underscores the significance of sustainability within the Chinese fashion
6
market. It reinforces the idea that individuals aspiring to work in the international fashion
industry must navigate the complex landscape of stakeholder influence and environmental
considerations. Understanding the dynamics of green manufacturing and its impact on
practice performance is crucial for those aiming to promote sustainable fashion and engage
with culturally diverse consumer bases. This research provides empirical evidence that
supports the cultural field’s commitment to sustainable fashion practices and highlights the
role of stakeholders in shaping the industry’s trajectory.
Su, J., Watchravesringkan, K., Zhou, J., & Gil, M. (2019). Sustainable clothing: Perspectives from
US and Chinese young Millennials. International Journal of Retail & Distribution
Management, 47(11), 1141-1162. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJRDM-09-2017-0184
This research by Su et al. (2019) explores the perspectives of young Millennials
from both the United States and China regarding sustainable clothing. The study delves
into the attitudes, behaviors, and motivations of these young consumers in relation to
sustainable fashion choices. By conducting a cross-cultural analysis, the authors provide
insights into how cultural backgrounds influence the perception and adoption of
sustainable clothing practices among Millennials. This resource significantly contributes to
my cultural field by highlighting the cultural nuances in the perception of sustainability
within the fashion industry. It underscores the importance of considering cultural factors
when promoting sustainable fashion, especially when targeting diverse age groups and
markets like the Chinese and American Millennials. Aspiring professionals in the
international fashion industry can benefit from this study by understanding the variations
in sustainability preferences among consumers from different cultural backgrounds. Su et
al.’s research support the field’s commitment to sustainability and cross-cultural
7
understanding through fashion, emphasizing the need to tailor strategies to specific cultural
contexts.
Zou, Y., & Peng, F. (2019, June). Key opinion leaders’ influences in the Chinese fashion market. In
International Conference on Fashion communication: between tradition and future digital
developments (pp. 118-132). Cham: Springer International Publishing.
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-15436-3_11
This study investigates the influential role of key opinion leaders (KOLs) in the
Chinese fashion market. Focusing on the dynamics of fashion communication, this
research sheds light on how KOLs shape consumer perceptions, preferences, and behaviors
in the context of the Chinese fashion industry. The study explores the impact of KOLs’
endorsements and digital presence on consumers’ fashion choices and provides valuable
insights into the role of social media influencers. This resource aligns with sheds insights
into my cultural field by emphasizing the significance of KOLs in the promotion of
fashion, trends, and cultural exchange within the Chinese market. It underscores the role of
digital communication channels in shaping consumer behavior and preferences,
particularly in the fashion domain. As individuals aiming to work in the international
fashion industry, understanding the influence of KOLs and the power of digital
communication is crucial for effective marketing and brand promotion in diverse cultural
contexts. This research provides valuable insights into the cultural dynamics of fashion
communication and the role of influencers in bridging cultural gaps through fashion.
Hi,
You have a deep understanding of the Chinese international
fashion industry, providing comprehensive insights into its
trends, key players, and emerging markets. Your slides
include well-designed visuals, which help us gain a solid grasp
of the subject matter. What’s more, you have a great ability to
articulate ideas and concepts clearly.
The question for you would be:
What specific strategies has the Chinese international fashion
industry adopted to expand into global markets, and how do
these differ from those of Western fashion industries?
What are the sustainability and ethical considerations within
the Chinese fashion industry, and how do these align with
global sustainability trends in the fashion sector?
Best,
Hi ,
I found your presentation on Chinese fashion lovers, their
challenges accessing international fashion and navigating
political constraints, and the power they actually have now
through social media platforms to transcend cultural borders
fascinating. Your ability to intertwine and present so many
facets of information was well done and left me longing to
know and understand this cultural field even
more! Additional strengths were your ability to help us see
the challenges of tensions in international trade policies and
internal restrictions could hinder access for Chinese fashion
lovers. I was further intrigued by these fashion influencers
that you mention after reading about how these influencers,
including friends and peers are more powerful than advertisers
(Sun, 2022). An additional strength you have is your voice
rhythm and tone. You have a warm and engaging voice and
your pace kept me interested and wanting to know more.
Two questions I had for your presentation:
1. Can you show us an example of how an influencer or
how fashion lovers through social media are able to
navigate through political restraints and/or trade policy
restriction in order to get fashion through and/or to create
change/influence in the fashion arena?
2. Your slide choice is so lovely and delicate, I hesitate to
mention any additions because of this BUT could there be
a way to integrate some images of today’s Chinese youth
fashion influencers and some of this fashion? It might be
fun to see some of the fashion influencers throughout time
too (but I do realize there is a time constraint on this).
Nice work Jiayi! I really look forward to seeing your final
presentation and learning more!
Warm regards,
Sun, Y., Wang, R., Cao, D., & Lee, R. (2022). Who are social
media influencers for luxury fashion consumption of the
Chinese Gen Z? Categorisation and empirical examination.
Journal of Fashion Marketing and Management: An
International Journal, 26(4), 603-621
Script
Slide 1: Introduction
Hello everyone, and welcome to this presentation on the unique cultural confluence in the
international fashion industry. In this presentation, we explore the interplay of traditional
Chinese values, contemporary aspirations, and the global fashion landscape.
Slide 2: Cultural Field Overview
To begin, let’s take a quick look at the Chinese cultural landscape. It’s like a mix of traditional
Chinese values, modern aspirations, and the ever-changing global fashion scene. As explained by
Zou and Peng (2019), people who love fashion in this field are all about connecting Chinese and
international cultures and breaking down cultural barriers. Social media plays a big role, helping
people from all over the world connect.
Slide 3: Cultural Field Outcomes
It’s crucial to understand that the results of this cultural field are significant. It means that
Chinese and international cultures blend harmoniously through clothing and style, breaking
down cultural barriers. Additionally, those who love fashion become like cultural ambassadors,
promoting cross-cultural understanding and appreciation (Su et al., 2019).
Slide 4: Historical Evolution
Our next point delves into the history of this cultural field. The late 20th century marked a
turning point when China opened its doors to the world. As explained by Liu and Zhang (2019),
this introduced Chinese youth to global fashion trends and ignited their global fashion
aspirations. This historic shift set in motion a journey that continues to shape the fashion world
we see today.
Slide 5: Greatest Cultural Impact
In this slide, we’ll examine the most significant cultural impact on the Chinese field, which came
with the rise of social media. During this digital revolution, Chinese youth used platforms not
only to showcase their fashion knowledge but also to connect with like-minded individuals
worldwide. The impact of this technology cannot be emphasized enough, as it expanded the
reach and influence of participants and gave them a global stage to share their visions.
Slide 6: Political Dimensions
In Slide 6, we’ll explore the complex political factors in our cultural field. Both local and global
factors are important. Locally, Chinese government rules about social media significantly
influence the reach and influence of individuals involved in fashion promotion via digital
platforms (Sun et al., 2022). This means that participants have to navigate a complicated
landscape shaped by government policies. Internationally, trade policies and diplomatic tensions
play a crucial role. They can either make it easier or harder for foreign fashion brands to enter
the Chinese market, directly affecting the experiences and opportunities of fashion enthusiasts in
our field.
Slide 7: Synthesis and Conclusion
In conclusion, the Chinese cultural field represents a dynamic blend of traditional Chinese
values, global dreams, and a rich history. The most significant impact on this field came with the
rise of social media, providing a global platform for fashion enthusiasts. The political landscape
emphasizes the need for cultural awareness and adaptability in the worldwide fashion industry.
This cultural field reinforces the idea that fashion transcends borders, promoting cross-cultural
understanding and appreciation.
South Street Seaport is a regenerated area in New York. a. Define the term urban regeneration. (2 marks)b. Discuss the role of cities as tourist destinations. (3 marks)c. Identify an area in New York City that you believe has great potential for urban regeneration and justify your choice. (10 marks)d. Outline the steps you would take to plan an urban regeneration tourism-led initiative for the area you have identified in (c) above. (9 marks)Source not needed and professor asked us to use our own word.
After reading the assigned readings from Massacre of the Dreamers, Borderlands/La Frontera, When God Was a Woman, the ending of Erased Faces, and watching the documentaries, how do these readings and visual sources change or reaffirm your view of women as spiritual figures that are strong and capable? As Catholics and Christians and in the Judeo-Christian tradition, “God” has always been male and women are either non-existent or marginalized? How do these sources shift this viewpoint? Cite each source from Weeks 4-7 at least once. 750 words minimum. Use standard essay format (MLA or APA), your choice.
Kim and Park (2011) argue that corporate social responsibility (CSR) activities not only have value for benefitting social causes but can also be regarded as recruiting tools for attracting potential employees who perceive the organization and its CSR activities as an ethical fit. The foundation of this argument comes from an organizational perspective that views employees as important assets for a corporation. Coming from this perspective would mean that corporations would be cognizant about the imperative to have an active CSR program that matches corporate values, missions, and cultures.
Conduct research to identify the top ten companies to work for last year. Choose one of these companies and further research its CSR activities.
In your posting, respond to the following, supporting your perspectives with scholarly resources:
What is the company you chose?
What are the company’s CSR activities?
What do these activities communicate about the company?
Assess whether these activities are cause beneficial or cause exploitative? Give evidence for your answer.
Would you consider working for this company?
Support your answers with appropriate research and reasoning and initiate comments on the postings of at least two of your peers.
Reference:
Kim, S., & Park, H. (2011). Corporate social responsibility as an organizational
attractiveness for prospective public relations practitioners. Journal of
Business Ethics, 103(4), 639–653. doi:10.1007/s10551-011-0886-x
Assignment Instructions for Part-I: Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”From the list find and click on EBSCO database.In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article: Title: “Become More Comfortable Making Bold Decisions” Author: Cheryl Strauss Einhorn Date of Publication: March 06, 2023 Published: Harvard Business Review Assignment Question(s): Part-I Read the article titled as “Become More Comfortable Making Bold Decisions” by Cheryl Strauss Einhorn published in Harvard Business Review, and answer the following Questions: Summarize the article and explain the main issues discussed in the article. (500 words)According to the author, what is Bold Decision Barometer (BDB). How do the five steps of Bold Decision Barometer (BDB) help you improve decision-making and problem-solving skills? Explain with an example. Use additional references to support your argument. (500 words)
A customer’s journey through the decision process is complex and influenced by many internal and external factors. A sound marketing strategy requires an understanding of the full journey a customer takes and how to engage the customer at each stage. This week you will be mapping a customer journey for a product of your choosing. Begin by selecting a product that engages your curiosity about why it has been successful or uses an intriguing marketing strategy.
After selecting your product, complete an analysis that includes the following:
Describe the product and marketing strategy you have selected, and what distinct properties or elements inspired your choice
Explain a customer’s journey with this product, beginning with the information search and the decision process leading to a purchase. Be specific about the type(s) of choice processes the customer is engaging in and what evaluative criteria they are using to predict satisfaction.
What marketing strategies can you identify at each stage of the customer journey with this product?
How do these strategies seem to be addressing the internal and external factors influencing the customer’s decision process?
Recommend at least two additional strategies the company could consider. Explain what part of the customer journey they would influence and how.
In your assignment, use the textbook and integrate at least one additional peer-reviewed source along with their citations and references. Your assignment must be a Word doc, APA formatted, and include at least 1500 words.
Question 2
Think of two purchases you have made, one involving an extensive pre-purchase information search, and another that involved very little pre-purchase searching to discuss the following:
Describe each one using insights from your reading, describing the nature of the search, types of information sought, and evaluation processes.
What factors caused the differences in purchase search styles?
How did the product marketing strategies impact your information search levels and decision process leading to each of these purchases?
Describe your satisfaction levels with each of these purchases and share conclusions you can draw from your satisfaction levels to the pre-purchase decisions you made.
Post an initial response of 500 words that includes at least one APA citation and the associated reference
Advanced Financial Accounting
Chapter 5 Assignment to Turn In
Due no later than 11:59 pm CDT, Sunday, October 22. This is an individual activity. Upload your solution
as an Excel file to your Assignments. Late submissions will not be accepted.
1. S is an 80% owned subsidiary of P, Inc. P accounts for S using the equity method. The following facts
apply:
On January 2, 2021, S purchased a machine with a cost of $160,000 and accumulated depreciation of $60,000
from P for $120,000. The machine had a 5-year remaining life on January 2, 2021, and is being depreciated by
the straight-line method.
In 2024 P reported net income of $180,000 without including income from S. S reported net income of
$100,000.
Required:
a. From the foregoing information, prepare the required consolidation entries for the 2024
consolidated worksheet in general journal form. For any debit or credit to retained
earnings or to an income statement account, indicate whether it is the parent’s or the
subsidiary’s retained earnings or income statement account.
b. Determine the consolidated net income for 2024, along with the Noncontrolling Interest in income
and the Controlling Interest in income.
2. This is independent of Problem 1. S is an 80% owned subsidiary of P, Inc. The following facts apply to
2024:
•
On January 1, 2024, S held $60,000 of merchandise sold to it from P.
•
P made sales to S during 2024 totaling $150,000.
•
On December 31, 2024, S had $80,000 of such goods purchased from P in its ending inventory.
•
P always sells to S at a 25% gross profit.
In 2024 P reported net income of $500,000 without including income from S. S reported net income of
$200,000. P accounts for S using the equity method.
Required:
a. From the foregoing information, prepare the required consolidation entries for the 2024
consolidated worksheet in general journal form. For any debit or credit to retained
earnings or to an income statement account, indicate whether it is the parent’s or the
subsidiary’s retained earnings or income statement account.
b. Determine the consolidated net income for 2024, along with the Noncontrolling Interest in
income and the Controlling Interest in income.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1.Describe the basic steps of the organizational development process.
2.Evaluate the strategic role of change in the organization and its impact on organizational performance.
3.Analyze the human, structural and strategic dimensions of organizational development.
Assignment Question(s):
You are a management consultant at Miri & Co Partners; you receive an email from one of your long-term clients stating as follows:
“Following an overhaul of the company and a shift from the conventional model to telecommuting, several challenges have emerged. First, the majority of the departments are not meeting their monthly targets. This follows an introduction of a policy that the most productive employees will receive a monthly bonus. Secondly, numerous conflicts are emerging from the finance departments. We need an urgent solution to increase the productivity of this department.” Answer the following questions:
1.How can the company improve group awareness in the company? (2 marks)
2.What are the disadvantages of restructuring based on functional structure? (2 marks)
3.Should the reward system be individual-based, or group based? (2 marks)
4.What is the role of executive leadership in transformational change? (2 marks)
5.Finally, provide a workable solution to the client in not more than 200 words. (2 marks)
Note:
Use the concepts developed in this course in your answers.
hello. please follow the instructions and most importantly, no plagiarism.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ECOM 322: Social Media Marketing
1st Semester/2023-2024
Discussion Question
Write a report discussing the following points:
1. Two of the most creative/successful social media marketing campaigns in Saudi
Arabia (In 2022-2023). For each campaign:
▪ Give the reasons behind their success?
▪ What
is
the
added
value
of
this
marketing
campaign
for
the
company/organization?
2. Two social media marketing campaign in Saudi Arabia that failed (Last two
years). For each campaign:
▪ Why did the social media marketing campaign fail?
▪ And what can we learn from them?
Notes:
▪
For each case, provide the following information: Company Name, Campaign Name
and Social media platforms used.
▪
Examples can be a profit or non-profit organization.
Presentation:
▪
Prepare a presentation answering the previous questions and what are the criteria that
guide you to evaluate the campaigns?
Assignment Guidelines:
▪
This assignment is an individual assignment.
▪
All students are encouraged to use their own word.
▪
Your Assignment must include:
▪
Cover page and make sure to include the cover page with all information required.
One mark will be deducted if there is no cover page.
▪
A title that well represents the content of your report.
▪
A “References” section listing all sources included. And ensure that you follow
the APA style in your report.
▪
An opening paragraph.
▪
The main body of your report.
▪
Use Times New Roman, 12 font size, 1.5 line space and adjusted text.
▪
A mark of zero will be given for any submission that includes copying from other
resource without referencing it.
▪
Your report length should be between 600 to 800 words.
▪
Assignment must be in word format only no PDF.
▪
Your file should be saved as: Your name – CRN – ECOM322- Discussion.doc
▪
You must check the spelling and grammar mistakes before submitting the
assignment.
▪
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor structure of
assignment. Structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and
grammar mistakes, referencing and word count.
▪
The suggested duration for the presentation is 10 minutes with 5 minutes followed
by Q&A.
▪
You are free to choose any slide format and you should make sure having a proper
number of slides; so that you are able to finish on time (Template is attached in the
blackboard).
Submission:
Type
Due date
Point covered
Marks
Report
28/10/2023
@11:59 P.M.
All
10
Presentation
During week 10 &
11
Submission: due on
29/10/2023
at 3:00 PM.
All
5
Note: Submission will be through the Blackboard.
This case study is focused on the potential disruption of supply chains created by product recalls.
Pratt and Whitney conducted a recall of engines serving the commercial airline industry. The purpose of this assignment is to discuss supply chain challenges created by product recalls.
Wall Street Journal: “RTX Engine Recall to Cut Profit by Up to $3.5 Billion,” Link:
Please address the following topics for Pratt & Whitney (P&W):
Discuss how product recalls could jeopardize sales of P&W products in the future.
Explain how P&W can use supplier selection and evaluation to improve the supplier base for new products in the future.
Design a supplier development strategy using Deming’s 14 points of quality that could be used by P&W to prevent product recalls in the future.
Discuss the benefits and challenges of worldwide sourcing for the new hybrid-electric engines being developed at P&W.
Detailed Notes and Citation of References in Power Point:
The “Notes” section in PowerPoint should include detailed information and references whenever possible. The notes serve as the details that would be included in a written report. This is critical for maintaining the knowledge developed for your project. You or someone else in the organization may refer to this document in the future, and detailed notes are extremely valuable.
References should be identified in the Notes section for each page that refers to the sources of information used to develop the report. A complete reference list should also be included at the end of the presentation.
The textbook and the articles included with this assignment should be used as references, which count toward the minimum requirement.
10-25 slides.
Use the same organization as in previous weeks’ projects. Research the ethical challenges regarding employees (i.e., diversity, discrimination, sexual harassment, privacy, employee theft, bad leadership, etc.) that your chosen organization has faced over the past five to ten years and that they should prepare to face in the next five to ten years. Once you have developed a list of challenges, consider how having faced those challenges (or knowing that you will be facing them) will impact and be impacted by the social cause you’ve selected.Tasks:Propose your findings on the ethical challenges faced by your organization in recent history and the near future. Be sure to:Analyze ways in which each challenge was (and/or could be) appropriately handled and areas for improvement.Evaluate the ethical/moral aspects of your organization that protected it from ethical challenges in the past and could protect it in the future.Assess how ethical challenges and handling of ethical challenges could positively or negatively impact the charitable cause you’ve selected and how the selection of your social cause could positively or negatively impact the organization and its employees.
Read the following article that assesses different social media platforms: The Exploration of Social Media Platforms Using Multicriteria Assessment Method (AHP) to Improve Organizational Performance
Companies must embrace the full potential of a digital environment, providing tools that empower team members to execute job tasks with a higher degree of knowledge and sociotechnical processes. This advanced level of human–computer interaction begins with examining the inherent characteristics of a robust sociotechnical system. Sociotechnical system design requires careful analysis in determining what is needed to fulfill the human–computer interaction.
Creating an interaction process that empowers organizational cultures to embrace technical utilization in daily tasks is the focus of this learning. Companies use an abundance of technical processes and systems to efficiently execute daily work tasks. A formula of success will embrace the basic needs for people to be motivated and create sense and meaning in all they do.
Based on your research and experience, please respond to the following questions:
What 2 social or professional media sites (e.g., LinkedIn, Facebook, Microsoft Teams, YouTube, and Instagram) would you recommend? Briefly describe your selected platforms.
Compare and contrast one platform versus the other to determine strengths and weaknesses and pros and cons for each platform based on your research and experience.
How could the introduction of these technologies in a company impact diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI)?
Include a minimum of 3 references and corresponding citations in your Individual Project each week.
Please submit the assignment using the following assignment template: Unit 2 IP Template.
Individual Project Rubric
The Individual Project (IP) Grading Rubric is a scoring tool that represents the performance expectations for the IP. This Individual Project Grading Rubric is divided into components that provide a clear description of what should be included within each component of the IP. It’s the roadmap that can help you in the development of your IP.
Expectation Points Possible Points Earned Comments
Assignment-Specific: Described and recommended current social/professional media applications
35
Assignment-Specific: Compared and contrasted each social or professional media application to determine strengths and weaknesses and pros and cons of each application
30
Assignment-Specific: Discussed how suggested media application introduction supports and impacts diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives
25
Assignment-Specific: Minimum of three references (peer-reviewed preferred).
25
Professional Language: Assignment contains accurate grammar, spelling, and/or punctuation with few or no errors. (APA formatting is required or style specified in assignment).
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
You are a business analyst at Financial Charm Bank. You have been asked to submit a report to your vice president (VP) analyzing the characteristics of customers who have left and are no longer using the banking services. You have been given a customer churn data set that contains details regarding current and past customers, such as their demographics, financial details, and their use of banking services.
You need to analyze this data, generate visualizations for customers who are not using the banking services, and summarize their key characteristics, such as their credit score, salaries, and demographics.
For this report, you will create visual representations of the data in Power BI and analyze the results.
Prompt
Create a report to summarize your findings of customer churn. Using visualization methods of your choice, create three graphs that show the credit scores, salaries, and demographics of those customers who have left your banking institution. Be sure to include the relevant screenshots in your report.
In the report to the VP, include the following criteria:
Create appropriate visualizations to help answer questions about customer characteristics. Use Power BI to create three data visualizations to show the credit scores, estimated salaries, and demographics.
Choose the graphs or charts you believe are best suited to represent the given data.
Use proper labels and include any descriptive statistics.
Include a screenshot of each visualization in your final analysis
Justify your choice of visualization method.
Describe the purpose and benefit of using each visualization method.
Summarize your conclusions from each visual.
Describe patterns and trends for each customer characteristic within the data set.
What to Submit
Submit a 2- to- 3-page Microsoft Word report using double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and one-inch margins. This report should include references cited in APA format. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
RowNumberCustomerIdSurname CreditScoreGeography Gender
1 15634602 Hargrave
619 France
Female
2 15647311 Hill
608 Spain
Female
3 15619304 Onio
502 France
Female
4 15701354 Boni
699 France
Female
5 15737888 Mitchell
850 Spain
Female
6 15574012 Chu
645 Spain
Male
7 15592531 Bartlett
822 France
Male
8 15656148 Obinna
376 Germany Female
9 15792365 He
501 France
Male
10 15592389 H?
684 France
Male
11 15767821 Bearce
528 France
Male
12 15737173 Andrews
497 Spain
Male
13 15632264 Kay
476 France
Female
14 15691483 Chin
549 France
Female
15 15600882 Scott
635 Spain
Female
16 15643966 Goforth
616 Germany Male
17 15737452 Romeo
653 Germany Male
18 15788218 Henderson
549 Spain
Female
19 15661507 Muldrow
587 Spain
Male
20 15568982 Hao
726 France
Female
21 15577657 McDonald
732 France
Male
22 15597945 Dellucci
636 Spain
Female
23 15699309 Gerasimov
510 Spain
Female
24 15725737 Mosman
669 France
Male
25 15625047 Yen
846 France
Female
26 15738191 Maclean
577 France
Male
27 15736816 Young
756 Germany Male
28 15700772 Nebechi
571 France
Male
29 15728693 McWilliams
574 Germany Female
30 15656300 Lucciano
411 France
Male
31 15589475 Azikiwe
591 Spain
Female
32 15706552 Odinakachukwu 533 France
Male
33 15750181 Sanderson
553 Germany Male
34 15659428 Maggard
520 Spain
Female
35 15732963 Clements
722 Spain
Female
36 15794171 Lombardo
475 France
Female
37 15788448 Watson
490 Spain
Male
38 15729599 Lorenzo
804 Spain
Male
39 15717426 Armstrong
850 France
Male
40 15585768 Cameron
582 Germany Male
41 15619360 Hsiao
472 Spain
Male
42 15738148 Clarke
465 France
Female
43 15687946 Osborne
556 France
Female
44 15755196 Lavine
834 France
Female
45 15684171 Bianchi
660 Spain
Female
46 15754849 Tyler
776 Germany Female
Age
Tenure
42
41
42
39
43
44
50
29
44
27
31
24
34
25
35
45
58
24
45
24
41
32
38
46
38
25
36
44
43
29
39
36
41
42
29
45
31
33
36
41
40
51
61
49
61
32
Balance
2
1
8
1
2
8
7
4
4
2
6
3
10
5
7
3
1
9
6
6
8
8
4
3
5
3
2
9
3
0
3
7
9
6
9
0
3
7
7
6
4
8
2
2
5
4
0
83807.86
159660.8
0
125510.8
113755.8
0
115046.7
142051.1
134603.9
102016.7
0
0
0
0
143129.4
132602.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
136815.6
0
141349.4
59697.17
0
85311.7
110112.5
0
0
134264
145260.2
76548.6
0
70349.48
0
122522.3
117419.4
131394.6
155931.1
109421.1
47 15602280 Martin
48 15771573 Okagbue
49 15766205 Yin
50 15771873 Buccho
51 15616550 Chidiebele
52 15768193 Trevisani
53 15683553 O’Brien
54 15702298 Parkhill
55 15569590 Yoo
56 15760861 Phillipps
57 15630053 Tsao
58 15647091 Endrizzi
59 15623944 T’ien
60 15804771 Velazquez
61 15651280 Hunter
62 15773469 Clark
63 15702014 Jeffrey
64 15751208 Pirozzi
65 15592461 Jackson
66 15789484 Hammond
67 15696061 Brownless
68 15641582 Chibugo
69 15638424 Glauert
70 15755648 Pisano
71 15703793 Konovalova
72 15620344 McKee
73 15812518 Palermo
74 15779052 Ballard
75 15770811 Wallace
76 15780961 Cavenagh
77 15614049 Hu
78 15662085 Read
79 15575185 Bushell
80 15803136 Postle
81 15706021 Buley
82 15663706 Leonard
83 15641732 Mills
84 15701164 Onyeorulu
85 15738751 Beit
86 15805254 Ndukaku
87 15762418 Gant
88 15625759 Rowley
89 15622897 Sharpe
90 15767954 Osborne
91 15757535 Heap
92 15731511 Ritchie
93 15809248 Cole
829 Germany
637 Germany
550 Germany
776 Germany
698 Germany
585 Germany
788 France
655 Germany
601 Germany
619 France
656 France
725 Germany
511 Spain
614 France
742 Germany
687 Germany
555 Spain
684 Spain
603 Germany
751 Germany
581 Germany
735 Germany
661 Germany
675 France
738 Germany
813 France
657 Spain
604 Germany
519 France
735 France
664 France
678 France
757 Spain
416 Germany
665 France
777 France
543 France
506 France
493 France
652 Spain
750 Spain
729 France
646 France
635 Germany
647 Spain
808 France
524 France
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
27
39
38
37
44
36
33
41
42
43
45
19
66
51
35
27
33
56
26
36
34
43
35
21
58
29
37
25
36
21
55
32
33
41
34
32
36
34
46
75
22
30
46
28
44
45
36
9
9
2
2
10
5
5
8
1
1
5
0
4
4
5
9
1
8
4
6
1
10
5
8
2
6
0
5
9
1
8
9
5
10
1
2
3
4
4
10
3
9
4
3
5
7
10
112045.7
137843.8
103391.4
103769.2
116363.4
146051
0
125562
98495.72
125211.9
127864.4
75888.2
0
40685.92
136857
152328.9
56084.69
78707.16
109166.4
169831.5
101633
123180
150725.5
98373.26
133745.4
0
163607.2
157780.8
0
178718.2
0
0
77253.22
122189.7
96645.54
0
0
90307.62
0
0
121681.8
0
0
81623.67
0
118626.6
0
94 15640635 Capon
769 France
95 15676966 Capon
730 Spain
96 15699461 Fiorentini
515 Spain
97 15738721 Graham
773 Spain
98 15693683 Yuille
814 Germany
99 15604348 Allard
710 Spain
100 15633059 Fanucci
413 France
101 15808582 Fu
665 France
102 15743192 Hung
623 France
103 15580146 Hung
738 France
104 15776605 Bradley
528 Spain
105 15804919 Dunbabin
670 Spain
106 15613854 Mauldon
622 Spain
107 15599195 Stiger
582 Germany
108 15812878 Parsons
785 Germany
109 15602312 Walkom
605 Spain
110 15744689 T’ang
479 Germany
111 15803526 Eremenko
685 Germany
112 15665790 Rowntree
538 Germany
113 15715951 Thorpe
562 France
114 15591100 Chiemela
675 Spain
115 15609618 Fanucci
721 Germany
116 15675522 Ko
628 Germany
117 15705512 Welch
668 Germany
118 15698028 Duncan
506 France
119 15661670 Chidozie
524 Germany
120 15600781 Wu
699 Germany
121 15682472 Culbreth
828 France
122 15580203 Kennedy
674 Spain
123 15690673 Cameron
656 France
124 15760085 Calabresi
684 Germany
125 15779659 Zetticci
625 France
126 15627360 Fuller
432 France
127 15671137 MacDonald
549 France
128 15782688 Piccio
625 Germany
129 15575492 Kennedy
828 France
130 15591607 Fernie
770 France
131 15740404 He
758 France
132 15718369 Kaodilinakachukwu795 Germany
133 15677871 Cocci
687 France
134 15642004 Alekseeva
686 France
135 15712543 Chinweike
789 Germany
136 15584518 Arthur
589 Germany
137 15802381 Li
461 Germany
138 15610156 Ma
637 France
139 15594408 Chia
584 Spain
140 15640905 Vasin
579 Spain
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
29
42
35
41
29
22
34
40
44
31
36
65
46
32
36
33
35
30
39
42
36
28
30
37
41
31
34
34
39
39
48
28
42
52
56
41
24
34
33
38
25
39
50
34
40
48
35
8
4
10
9
8
8
9
6
6
9
7
1
4
1
2
5
9
3
7
2
9
9
9
6
1
8
4
8
6
6
10
3
9
1
0
7
9
3
9
9
1
7
5
5
2
2
1
0
0
176274
102827.4
97086.4
0
0
0
0
82674.15
0
0
107073.3
88938.62
99806.85
150092.8
92833.89
90536.81
108055.1
100238.4
106190.6
154475.5
132351.3
167864.4
0
107818.6
185173.8
129433.3
120193.4
0
126384.4
0
152603.5
0
148507.2
0
101827.1
0
130862.4
122570.9
0
124828.5
144895.1
63663.93
133463.1
213146.2
129490.4
141 15698932 Groves
756 Germany
142 15724944 Tien
663 France
143 15628145 Forwood
682 France
144 15713483 Greeves
793 Spain
145 15612350 Taylor
691 France
146 15800703 Madukwe
485 Spain
147 15705707 Bennelong
635 Spain
148 15754105 Olisanugo
650 France
149 15703264 Chukwufumnanya 735 France
150 15794413 Harris
416 France
151 15650237 Morgan
754 Spain
152 15759618 Alexeeva
535 France
153 15811589 Metcalfe
716 Spain
154 15689044 Humphries
539 France
155 15709368 Milne
614 France
156 15679145 Chou
706 Spain
157 15655007 Li
758 France
158 15623595 Clayton
586 Spain
159 15589975 Maclean
646 France
160 15804017 Chigolum
631 Germany
161 15692132 Wilkinson
717 Spain
162 15641122 Wei
684 France
163 15630910 Treacy
800 France
164 15680772 Hu
721 Spain
165 15658929 Taverner
683 Spain
166 15585388 Sherman
660 Germany
167 15724623 Taubman
704 Germany
168 15588537 Robinson
615 Spain
169 15574692 Pinto
667 Spain
170 15611325 Wood
682 Germany
171 15587562 Hawkins
484 France
172 15613172 Sun
628 Germany
173 15651022 Yost
480 Germany
174 15586310 Ting
578 France
175 15625524 Rowe
512 France
176 15755209 Fu
484 Spain
177 15645248 Ho
510 France
178 15790355 Okechukwu
606 Germany
179 15762615 Campbell
597 Spain
180 15625426 Ashbolt
754 Germany
181 15716334 Rozier
850 Spain
182 15789669 Hsia
510 France
183 15621075 Ogbonnaya
778 Germany
184 15810845 T’ang
636 France
185 15719377 Cocci
804 France
186 15654506 Chang
514 France
187 15771977 T’ao
730 France
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
44
34
43
52
31
21
29
37
44
32
32
48
42
37
43
57
33
28
73
33
22
30
49
36
29
31
24
41
39
24
29
27
44
30
40
35
30
36
40
55
45
65
45
42
50
32
39
10
7
5
2
5
5
8
5
9
0
7
9
8
2
6
7
7
2
6
4
6
2
7
2
0
9
7
9
2
9
4
5
10
4
5
7
0
5
8
3
2
2
1
2
4
8
1
137452.1
0
125851.9
0
40915.55
113157.2
138296.9
106967.2
120681.6
0
0
0
0
127609.6
0
0
0
0
97259.25
123246.7
101060.3
0
108007.4
0
133702.9
125189.8
113034.2
109013.2
0
57929.81
130114.4
95826.49
129608.6
169462.1
0
133868.2
0
190479.5
101993.1
161608.8
122311.2
0
162150.4
0
0
0
99010.67
188 15708710 Ford
189 15726676 Marshall
190 15587421 Tsai
191 15726931 Onwumelu
192 15771086 Graham
193 15756850 Golovanov
194 15702741 Potts
195 15679200 Crawford
196 15594815 Aleshire
197 15635905 Moran
198 15777892 Samsonova
199 15656176 Jenkins
200 15811127 Volkov
201 15604482 Chiemezie
202 15622911 Jude
203 15600974 He
204 15727868 Onuora
205 15627801 Ginikanwa
206 15773039 Ku
207 15755262 McDonald
208 15679531 Collins
209 15684181 Hackett
210 15612087 Dike
211 15752047 Trevisano
212 15624592 Tan
213 15573152 Glassman
214 15594917 Miller
215 15785542 Kornilova
216 15723488 Watson
217 15680920 Marchesi
218 15786308 Millar
219 15659366 Shih
220 15774854 Fuller
221 15725311 Hay
222 15787155 Yang
223 15727829 McIntyre
224 15733247 Stevenson
225 15568748 Poole
226 15699029 Bagley
227 15774393 Ch’ien
228 15676895 Cattaneo
229 15637753 O’Sullivan
230 15605461 Lucas
231 15808473 Ringrose
232 15627000 Freeman
233 15787174 Sergeyev
234 15723886 Fiore
525 Spain
616 Spain
687 Germany
715 France
512 France
479 France
601 France
580 Spain
807 France
616 Spain
721 Germany
501 France
521 France
850 Spain
759 France
516 Spain
711 France
512 Spain
550 France
608 Spain
618 France
643 France
671 France
689 Germany
603 France
620 France
676 France
572 Germany
668 Germany
695 France
730 Spain
807 France
592 France
726 France
514 Spain
567 France
850 France
671 Germany
670 France
694 France
547 Germany
751 Germany
594 Germany
673 France
610 France
512 France
767 Germany
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
37
30
34
41
36
40
32
29
35
32
37
57
35
30
42
50
38
33
37
41
34
45
45
33
31
41
34
26
47
46
33
43
54
31
30
42
33
45
37
30
39
50
29
72
40
37
20
0
5
7
8
3
1
8
9
3
6
3
10
6
2
4
5
2
3
3
3
5
5
2
2
8
9
1
4
7
7
9
1
8
9
7
2
10
6
4
9
6
2
3
1
0
1
3
0
0
111388.2
56214.85
84327.77
0
93012.89
61710.44
174790.2
0
107720.6
0
96423.84
141040
105420.2
0
129022.1
176666.6
0
89763.84
134954.5
0
106376.9
161814.6
0
0
63095.01
118287
106854.2
49512.55
0
105799.3
0
114722.1
0
0
0
99564.22
170557.9
0
74596.15
96888.39
130830.2
0
0
0
119714.3
235 15704769 Smith
585 France
236 15772896 Dumetochukwu 763 Germany
237 15711540 Pacheco
712 France
238 15764866 Synnot
539 Germany
239 15794056 Johnston
668 France
240 15795149 Stevens
703 France
241 15812009 Grant
662 Spain
242 15651001 Tsao
725 Germany
243 15813844 Barnes
703 France
244 15596175 McIntosh
659 Germany
245 15576269 Madison
523 Spain
246 15797219 Ifesinachi
635 France
247 15685500 Glazkov
772 Germany
248 15599792 Dimauro
545 France
249 15657566 Wieck
634 Germany
250 15772423 Liao
739 Germany
251 15628112 Hughes
771 Germany
252 15753754 Morrison
587 Spain
253 15793726 Matveyeva
681 France
254 15694717 Ku
544 Germany
255 15665834 Cheatham
696 Spain
256 15765297 Yao
766 Spain
257 15636684 Kirkland
727 France
258 15592979 Rose
671 Germany
259 15750803 Jess
693 France
260 15607178 Welch
850 Germany
261 15713853 Ifeajuna
732 Germany
262 15673481 Morton
726 Spain
263 15686776 Rossi
557 France
264 15673693 Reppert
682 France
265 15700696 Kang
738 Spain
266 15813163 Ch’iu
531 Spain
267 15653857 Wallis
498 France
268 15777076 Clark
651 France
269 15717398 Fielding
549 Spain
270 15799217 Zetticci
791 Germany
271 15787071 Dulhunty
650 Spain
272 15619955 Bevington
733 Germany
273 15796505 Boyle
811 Germany
274 15725166 Newton
707 France
275 15800116 Bowman
712 Germany
276 15758685 Dubinina
706 Spain
277 15694456 Toscani
756 France
278 15767339 Chiazagomekpere 777 France
279 15683562 Allen
646 France
280 15782210 K’ung
714 France
281 15668893 Wilsmore
782 France
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
67
42
29
43
46
28
38
39
37
67
34
40
26
26
24
54
36
34
79
37
28
41
34
34
30
38
42
48
32
26
31
36
34
36
39
35
41
34
34
30
28
37
62
53
35
46
39
5
6
2
3
2
2
4
5
8
6
7
10
7
1
8
8
5
1
0
2
8
0
10
6
6
3
9
6
6
0
9
9
2
7
7
7
9
3
1
8
4
7
3
10
6
1
8
113979
100160.8
0
116220.5
0
81173.83
0
116803.8
105961.7
117411.6
0
123497.6
152400.5
0
103097.9
126418.1
77846.9
0
0
79731.91
0
0
0
37266.67
127992.3
54901.01
108748.1
99906.19
184686.4
110654
79019.8
99240.51
0
0
0
52436.2
0
100338
149297.2
0
145605.4
0
0
0
84026.86
0
0
282 15669169 Hargreaves
283 15643024 Huang
284 15699389 Ch’ien
285 15708608 Wallwork
286 15626144 Chu
287 15573112 Kang
288 15790678 Davidson
289 15727556 O’Donnell
290 15697307 Nnachetam
291 15652266 Chidiebele
292 15607098 Ahmed
293 15655774 Booth
294 15590241 Chuang
295 15785819 Shao
296 15723654 Tsao
297 15774510 Tien
298 15684173 Chang
299 15650068 Johnson
300 15811490 French
301 15803976 Efremov
302 15682541 Hartley
303 15695699 Calabrese
304 15624188 Chiu
305 15812191 Brennan
306 15636673 Onwuatuegwu
307 15594898 Hewitt
308 15660211 Shih
309 15773972 Balashov
310 15746726 Doyle
311 15712287 Pokrovskii
312 15702919 Collins
313 15674398 Russo
314 15797960 Skinner
315 15631868 Robertson
316 15581539 Atkinson
317 15662736 Doyle
318 15666252 Ritchie
319 15677512 McEncroe
320 15626114 Pearson
321 15810834 Gordon
322 15678910 Ts’ai
323 15694408 Lung
324 15585215 Yuan
325 15682757 Pardey
326 15736601 Tai
327 15601848 Scott
328 15736008 Hunter
775 Spain
479 Germany
807 France
799 France
675 France
602 Spain
475 France
744 Spain
588 Spain
703 Germany
747 Spain
583 France
750 Spain
681 France
773 France
714 France
687 Spain
511 France
627 France
694 France
616 Spain
687 France
712 France
553 France
667 France
731 France
629 Germany
614 France
438 Germany
652 France
729 Germany
642 France
806 Germany
744 Spain
474 Spain
559 France
706 Spain
628 Spain
429 France
525 Spain
680 France
749 France
763 France
734 France
716 France
594 France
644 France
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
29
35
42
22
40
29
32
26
34
42
41
27
34
38
25
31
44
58
33
31
36
35
33
33
31
43
35
50
31
80
30
38
59
36
37
49
42
22
24
57
30
40
31
30
35
35
46
10
4
7
8
7
5
8
5
10
9
5
7
9
3
2
4
7
0
5
10
6
8
6
4
1
2
7
4
8
4
6
3
0
2
3
2
9
3
4
2
8
1
4
3
4
2
9
0
138718.9
118274.7
174186
113208.9
103907.3
119023.3
166297.9
0
63227
94521.17
0
112822.3
0
135903.3
125169.3
0
149117.3
0
0
132311.7
0
0
118082.9
119266.7
0
156847.3
137104.5
78398.69
0
63669.42
0
135296.3
153804.4
0
147069.8
0
0
95741.75
145965.3
141441.8
139290.4
0
0
144428.9
0
95441.27
329 15669064 Mazzanti
330 15624528 L?
331 15598493 Beach
332 15601274 Hsieh
333 15702669 Faulkner
334 15728669 Knowles
335 15742668 Day
336 15697441 Hsueh
337 15740476 Tsao
338 15648064 Kennedy
339 15636624 Nwabugwu
340 15807923 Young
341 15745844 Kerr
342 15786170 Tien
343 15681081 Marrero
344 15684484 White
345 15785869 Pisano
346 15763859 Brown
347 15658935 Freeman
348 15747358 Russell
349 15735203 Seleznyov
350 15576256 Yusupova
351 15659420 Foley
352 15593365 Shih
353 15777352 Ikedinachukwu
354 15812007 Power
355 15625461 Amos
356 15739438 Reed
357 15611759 Simmons
358 15661629 Ricci
359 15633950 Yen
360 15592386 Campbell
361 15803716 West
362 15696674 Robinson
363 15706365 Bianchi
364 15745088 Chen
365 15676715 Madukaego
366 15613085 Ibrahimova
367 15633537 Nolan
368 15594720 Scott
369 15684042 Blair
370 15583303 Monaldo
371 15611579 Sutherland
372 15774696 Cole
373 15694506 Briggs
374 15688074 Gregory
375 15759537 Bianchi
671 Germany
664 Germany
656 France
667 Spain
663 Germany
584 Germany
626 Spain
485 France
659 Germany
649 France
805 Spain
716 Germany
642 Germany
659 France
545 Spain
543 France
718 France
840 France
630 Germany
643 Germany
654 Germany
582 France
659 Spain
762 Spain
568 Spain
670 Spain
613 France
539 France
850 Spain
522 Spain
737 France
520 France
706 Spain
643 Germany
648 France
443 Germany
640 France
628 Spain
540 Germany
460 Germany
636 Germany
593 France
801 Spain
640 Germany
611 Germany
802 Germany
717 Germany
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
35
26
50
40
44
30
37
29
32
33
39
39
40
31
47
22
25
43
34
59
32
39
32
39
32
25
45
30
57
34
41
58
28
45
50
29
68
33
42
35
34
29
42
75
31
31
35
1
7
7
1
2
8
6
7
3
2
5
10
6
4
5
8
7
7
9
3
1
5
3
2
7
6
1
0
8
9
1
3
3
2
9
9
9
3
9
8
2
2
4
1
0
1
7
144848.7
116244.1
0
146502.1
117028.6
112013.8
108269.4
182123.8
150923.7
0
165272.1
115301.3
129502.5
118342.3
0
0
0
0
106937.1
170331.4
114510.9
0
107594.1
81273.13
169399.6
0
187842
0
126776.3
126436.3
101960.7
0
0
150842.9
102535.6
99027.61
0
0
87271.41
102742.9
40105.51
152265.4
141947.7
106307.9
107884.8
125013.7
58469.37
376 15758449 Angelo
377 15583456 Gardiner
378 15667871 Kerr
379 15677371 Ko
380 15629677 Distefano
381 15713578 Farrell
382 15591509 Milano
383 15568240 Ting
384 15622993 Boyd
385 15689294 Onyemaechi
386 15720910 Black
387 15721181 Oliver
388 15776433 Greco
389 15748936 Whitehead
390 15717225 Ikemefuna
391 15685226 Morrison
392 15785611 Onyeoruru
393 15573456 Cunningham
394 15684548 Demidov
395 15620505 Celis
396 15807432 Cheng
397 15584766 Knight
398 15612187 Morin
399 15762218 Mills
400 15646372 Outhwaite
401 15690452 Tung
402 15747795 Pai
403 15781589 Carpenter
404 15732674 Fennell
405 15642291 Fontaine
406 15692761 Pratt
407 15578045 Mitchell
408 15745354 Franklin
409 15701376 K’ung
410 15691625 Ko
411 15566594 McKenzie
412 15760431 Pino
413 15686302 Fisk
414 15801559 Chiang
415 15810432 Moseley
416 15809616 Hsiung
417 15720559 Heath
418 15695632 Dellucci
419 15659843 Li
420 15615624 De Salis
421 15810418 T’ang
422 15716186 Richardson
769 France
745 Germany
572 Spain
629 Spain
687 Spain
483 France
690 France
492 Germany
709 Germany
705 Germany
560 France
611 Spain
730 Spain
709 Spain
544 France
712 Germany
752 Germany
648 Spain
556 Spain
594 Spain
645 Germany
557 France
547 Germany
701 France
616 France
605 France
593 Germany
751 Spain
443 Spain
685 France
718 France
538 Spain
611 Spain
668 Germany
537 Germany
709 Spain
850 France
745 Spain
693 Germany
795 Spain
626 Spain
487 Germany
556 France
643 France
605 France
756 Germany
586 France
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
39
45
35
30
39
50
36
30
28
44
66
46
62
45
21
29
38
46
38
24
37
33
32
39
66
52
38
52
36
23
36
49
37
37
41
23
38
31
41
35
26
61
39
46
28
60
38
8
10
4
2
2
9
7
10
8
3
9
6
2
2
10
7
3
9
8
0
2
3
8
9
1
1
4
8
6
8
9
9
4
10
3
10
1
3
9
8
8
5
9
6
6
3
2
0
117231.6
152390.3
34013.63
0
0
101583.1
77168.87
124695.7
105935
0
0
0
0
161526
147199.1
183102.3
127209
0
97378.54
136925.1
54503.55
155726.9
0
135842.4
63349.75
129499.4
0
70438.01
0
0
141434
0
152958.3
138306.3
0
0
124328.8
181461.5
0
0
110368
89588.35
0
0
115924.9
0
423 15674551 Fitch
424 15622834 Stevenson
425 15566111 Estes
426 15784597 Lattimore
427 15652883 Chung
428 15806964 Utz
429 15576313 Wei
430 15806467 Boyle
431 15597602 Nwachinemelu
432 15743040 Kuznetsova
433 15705521 Pisani
434 15595039 Manna
435 15799384 Collier
436 15581197 Ricci
437 15693737 Carr
438 15624623 Hs?
439 15783501 Findlay
440 15690134 Hughes
441 15782735 Chukwuemeka
442 15611088 Genovese
443 15672145 Swift
444 15732628 Ugoji
445 15787470 Parkinson
446 15803406 Ross
447 15730460 Oleary
448 15644572 Turnbull
449 15694860 Uspensky
450 15658169 Cook
451 15794396 Newbold
452 15785798 Uchechukwu
453 15710825 Ch’en
454 15668444 He
455 15726631 Hilton
456 15733797 Sal
457 15747960 Eluemuno
458 15634632 Titus
459 15707362 Yin
460 15662976 Lettiere
461 15732778 Templeman
462 15718443 Chibuzo
463 15670039 Sun
464 15773792 Evans
465 15613786 Ogbonnaya
466 15726032 Enyinnaya
467 15663252 Olisanugo
468 15593782 Brookes
469 15633283 Padovano
535 Germany
678 France
596 France
648 France
492 Germany
702 France
486 Germany
568 Germany
619 Germany
724 Germany
548 Germany
545 Germany
683 France
762 France
627 Germany
516 France
800 France
464 Germany
626 France
790 France
534 France
745 France
553 Spain
748 France
722 France
501 France
675 France
778 Spain
494 Germany
850 France
592 Spain
590 Spain
758 France
506 France
733 France
711 France
514 Germany
637 Spain
468 Germany
539 France
509 Spain
662 France
818 Spain
608 France
850 Spain
816 Germany
536 France
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
40
35
39
26
39
45
40
40
57
41
33
37
33
51
30
35
38
42
35
31
34
46
47
26
37
40
38
47
38
40
31
44
39
36
33
38
43
37
29
39
25
32
26
33
32
38
35
7
4
9
9
10
0
9
1
3
2
0
8
8
3
4
10
2
3
3
9
7
2
3
1
2
4
6
6
7
9
7
3
6
5
3
3
1
8
1
3
3
4
4
9
9
5
8
111756.5
0
0
162923.9
124576.7
80793.58
71340.09
99282.63
137946.4
127892.6
101084.4
114754.1
0
99286.98
79871.02
104088.6
168190.3
85679.25
0
0
121551.6
122220.2
116528.2
77780.29
0
125832.2
68065.8
127299.3
174937.6
0
110071.1
139432.4
127357.8
0
0
0
95556.31
0
111682
0
108738.7
133950.4
0
89968.69
0
130878.8
0
470 15749167 Fisk
471 15759298 Shih
472 15683625 Hare
473 15635367 Muir
474 15681705 Fanucci
475 15603156 Elewechi
476 15591986 Johnston
477 15798888 Pisano
478 15809722 Ankudinov
479 15677538 Nwokike
480 15797736 Smith
481 15695585 Atkins
482 15744398 Burns
483 15750658 Obiuto
484 15578186 Pirozzi
485 15676519 George
486 15637954 Lewis
487 15758639 Moran
488 15613772 Dalrymple
489 15731744 Carslaw
490 15807709 Kirby
491 15714689 Houghton
492 15699005 Martin
493 15624170 Tan
494 15725679 Hsia
495 15585865 Westerberg
496 15804256 Hale
497 15662403 Kryukova
498 15733616 Sopuluchukwu
499 15591995 Barry
500 15677020 Selezneva
501 15727688 Chizuoke
502 15715941 Lueck
503 15714485 Udinese
504 15730059 Udobata
505 15715527 Freeman
506 15576623 Outlaw
507 15805565 Obiuto
508 15677307 Lo
509 15773890 Okechukwu
510 15598883 King
511 15568506 Forbes
512 15761043 Macleod
513 15782236 Gibbs
514 15593601 Isayev
515 15682048 Pisano
516 15746902 Belstead
753 France
631 Spain
703 France
774 France
785 France
571 France
621 Germany
605 Germany
611 France
569 France
658 France
788 Spain
525 France
798 France
486 Germany
615 Spain
730 France
641 France
542 France
692 France
714 Germany
591 Spain
710 France
639 France
531 France
673 France
765 Germany
622 France
806 France
757 Germany
570 France
555 Spain
692 France
774 France
638 Spain
543 Spain
584 France
691 Germany
684 Germany
733 France
599 Spain
524 Germany
632 Germany
735 Spain
734 France
605 France
793 Spain
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
35
27
37
26
28
33
46
31
40
38
29
34
23
37
37
61
35
37
39
30
55
29
41
38
47
38
36
32
40
26
58
32
54
60
44
41
31
30
40
22
37
31
38
34
34
51
38
3
10
1
2
8
1
6
1
8
7
4
6
5
8
9
9
0
7
3
2
9
1
2
4
6
2
8
6
5
8
8
4
5
5
9
4
5
7
6
5
2
10
6
5
6
3
9
0
134169.6
149762.1
93844.69
0
0
141078.4
117992.6
100812.3
0
80262.6
156478.6
0
0
115218
0
155470.6
0
135096.8
0
180075.2
97541.24
156067.1
81550.94
0
170061.9
92310.54
169089.4
80613.93
121581.6
0
0
0
85891.55
77637.35
0
0
116927.9
137326.7
0
0
67238.98
86569.76
0
133598.4
136188.8
0
517 15752081 Vassiliev
468 France
518 15781307 Schneider
779 Germany
519 15775912 Mazzanti
698 France
520 15745417 Knipe
707 France
521 15671256 Macartney
850 France
522 15653547 Madukwe
850 France
523 15595766 Watts
527 Spain
524 15742358 Humphreys
696 Germany
525 15763274 Wu
661 France
526 15786063 Chin
776 France
527 15600258 Chesnokova
701 France
528 15573318 Kung
610 France
529 15653849 Lu
572 Germany
530 15694272 Nkemakolam
673 France
531 15736112 Walton
519 Spain
532 15749851 Brookes
702 Spain
533 15663478 Baldwin
729 France
534 15592300 Mai
543 Spain
535 15567832 Shih
550 France
536 15776780 He
608 France
537 15592846 Fiorentini
639 Germany
538 15739803 Lucciano
686 Spain
539 15794142 Ferreira
564 Germany
540 15762729 Ukaegbunam
745 Germany
541 15667896 De Luca
833 France
542 15626578 Milne
622 France
543 15776223 Davide
597 France
544 15705953 Kodilinyechukwu 721 Spain
545 15802593 Little
504 France
546 15615457 Burns
842 Spain
547 15708916 Paterson
587 France
548 15720187 Han
479 Germany
549 15595440 Kryukova
508 France
550 15600651 Ijendu
749 France
551 15750141 Reichard
721 Germany
552 15657284 Day
674 Germany
553 15763063 Price
685 Spain
554 15709324 Bruce
417 France
555 15711309 Sumrall
574 Germany
556 15775318 Lu
590 Spain
557 15705515 Lazarev
587 Germany
558 15634844 Miller
598 Germany
559 15717046 Wentworth-Shields741 Spain
560 15571816 Ritchie
850 Spain
561 15670080 Mackenzie
584 Germany
562 15800440 Power
650 Spain
563 15665678 Tan
607 Spain
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
56
37
48
58
35
56
37
32
48
31
43
26
48
30
57
26
32
35
40
59
35
34
62
28
37
26
42
51
49
44
38
30
49
24
36
47
25
34
33
51
40
41
53
70
29
61
36
10
7
4
6
1
7
5
8
3
2
2
8
3
1
2
4
6
10
7
1
10
9
5
1
8
9
4
0
7
2
0
7
7
1
3
6
10
7
3
3
5
3
3
5
7
1
8
0
120092.5
101238.2
89685.92
211774.3
131317.5
93722.73
101161
120320.5
0
0
0
152828
64097.75
119035.4
135219.6
93694.42
59408.63
114355
0
128173.9
0
114931.4
111071.4
151226.2
0
64740.12
169312.1
0
112652.1
0
143964.4
122451.5
0
65253.07
106901.9
128509.6
0
129834.7
154963
138241.9
91536.93
0
0
105204
152968.7
158261.7
564 15665956 Pendergrass
509 France
565 15788126 Evans
689 Spain
566 15811773 Hsia
543 France
567 15651674 Billson
438 Spain
568 15689614 Teng
687 Spain
569 15795564 Moretti
737 Germany
570 15706647 Jordan
761 France
571 15728505 Ts’ao
601 France
572 15730076 Osborne
651 France
573 15622003 Carslaw
745 France
574 15607312 Ch’ang
648 Spain
575 15644753 Hung
848 Spain
576 15653620 Gordon
546 France
577 15761986 Obialo
439 Spain
578 15633922 Gray
755 France
579 15734674 Lin
593 France
580 15658032 Hopkins
701 France
581 15692671 Dobson
701 Spain
582 15737741 McKay
607 Spain
583 15576352 Revell
586 Spain
584 15753719 Rickards
547 Germany
585 15803689 Begum
647 Germany
586 15718057 Onyinyechukwuka760 France
587 15722010 Zuyev
621 Spain
588 15680998 Nwankwo
725 France
589 15614782 Hao
526 France
590 15591047 Ma
519 Spain
591 15788291 Okwuadigbo
713 Germany
592 15604044 Mitchell
700 France
593 15679587 Chan
666 France
594 15775153 Buchi
630 Spain
595 15603925 Greco
779 Spain
596 15680970 Lombardi
611 Germany
597 15697183 Uchenna
685 Spain
598 15567446 Coffman
646 Germany
599 15637476 Alexandrova
683 Germany
600 15714939 Fallaci
484 Germany
601 15683503 Hudson
601 France
602 15645569 Mai
762 Spain
603 15782569 Stout
687 France
604 15592387 Burke
566 France
605 15609286 Chadwick
702 France
606 15814035 Lawrence
601 France
607 15661249 Bellucci
699 France
608 15629117 Harper
584 France
609 15607170 Boyle
699 France
610 15586585 Duncan
698 Germany
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
46
38
36
54
63
31
31
44
45
35
49
40
27
32
30
41
39
36
33
57
30
51
51
53
44
36
47
38
38
34
32
26
41
43
39
57
34
43
26
72
30
37
29
53
28
35
51
1
6
4
2
1
5
7
1
1
9
10
3
8
3
4
6
2
8
2
3
9
1
2
9
5
1
6
7
8
9
4
4
2
9
9
5
4
8
7
9
5
10
9
4
10
5
2
0
121021.1
0
0
137715.7
121192.2
0
100486.2
0
92566.53
0
110930
0
138901.6
123217.7
0
0
0
108431.9
0
72392.41
119741.8
100946.7
170491.8
0
0
157296
144606.2
134811.3
115897.1
82034
174318.1
114206.8
0
111574.4
162448.7
148249.5
0
123709.5
0
0
150525.8
0
0
0
0
111019
611 15686611 Moss
612 15603203 Avdeyeva
613 15619857 Crawford
614 15805062 Lynton
615 15660271 Duncan
616 15745295 Gether
617 15719352 Davidson
618 15766575 Larionova
619 15594594 Loggia
620 15646161 Steinhoff
621 15682585 Guerra
622 15603134 Pai
623 15636444 Craig
624 15773456 Lazareva
625 15745307 Ch’iu
626 15604119 Alderete
627 15626900 Kung
628 15605447 Palermo
629 15589030 Ts’ai
630 15692463 Rahman
631 15712403 McMillan
632 15811762 Pickering
633 15718673 Mirams
634 15724282 Tsao
635 15738181 Douglas
636 15633648 Jideofor
637 15603323 Bell
638 15583725 Mairinger
639 15588350 McIntyre
640 15798398 Pagnotto
641 15784844 K’ung
642 15580684 Feng
643 15809663 Donaldson
644 15640078 Chambers
645 15698786 Marcelo
646 15569807 Ejimofor
647 15730830 Dale
648 15805112 Pokrovsky
649 15633064 Stonebraker
650 15703119 Liang
651 15730447 Anderson
652 15813850 Christian
653 15711889 Mao
654 15664610 Campbell
655 15751710 Ginikanwa
656 15692926 Toscani
657 15813741 Nnachetam
495 France
650 France
605 France
667 Spain
688 Germany
727 Spain
754 Spain
612 Germany
546 Spain
673 Spain
593 France
656 Spain
535 Germany
678 Germany
477 Spain
850 Spain
427 France
752 France
649 France
799 Spain
589 France
583 Germany
839 Spain
540 Germany
850 France
696 Spain
660 Spain
682 France
744 France
785 France
752 Spain
706 France
583 France
660 Germany
819 France
673 France
752 France
578 France
438 France
652 France
629 France
720 France
668 France
459 Germany
729 Spain
498 Germany
549 Spain
Male
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Male
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Female
Male
Female
Male
Female
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
Male
30
27
64
38
26
31
39
62
42
37
35
40
53
36
48
35
29
49
47
28
61
54
33
44
31
51
33
48
43
36
48
29
27
39
39
34
30
38
36
38
49
52
42
48
31
25
25
10
6
2
1
8
0
6
8
7
8
9
10
5
3
2
7
1
2
1
3
1
6
10
3
6
5
1
1
10
4
5
5
1
5
9
8
3
7
4
6
4
7
3
4
8
8
6
129756
0
129555.7
87202.38
146133.4
0
170185
140745.3
139070.5
0
114193.2
167878.5
141616.6
145747.7
129120.6
110349.8
141325.6
78653.84
0
142253.7
0
115988.9
75592.43
164113
67996.23
0
0
138778.2
147832.2
135438.4
116060.1
112564.6
125406.6
135135
133102.9
42157.08
0
82259.29
0
0
0
0
150461.1
133994.5
164870.8
121702.7
193858.2
658 15698474 Sagese
659 15568595 Fleming
660 15603065 Grubb
661 15592937 Napolitani
662 15699637 Anenechi
663 15667215 Chandler
664 15788659 Howells
665 15763218 Akeroyd
666 15645772 Onwumelu
667 15725511 Wallace
668 15575024 Uwaezuoke
669 15640825 Loyau
670 15662397 Small
671 15576368 Bledsoe
672 15674991 Kao
673 15721024 Wickens
674 15745621 Wertheim
675 15642394 He
676 15754605 Jarvis
677 15607040 P’an
678 15715142 Repina
679 15810978 Pugliesi
680 15668886 Blakey
681 15780804 Nucci
682 15613880 Higinbotham
683 15775238 Achebe
684 15786905 Russo
685 15747867 Trevisani
686 15600337 Dobie
687 15801277 Maccallum
688 15579334 Watkins
689 15802741 Mitchel
690 15720649 Ferdinand
691 15589493 Otitodilinna
692 15688251 Mamelu
693 15665238 Beneventi
694 15740900 Perrodin
695 15681068 Chinagorom
696
Choose one of the following statements and argue your position (are you in favor or opposed to the statement). You should use at least three credible sources from texts or journals to support your argument.We can become more ethical leaders by examining cases of unethical leadership.The most important quality a leader should have is authenticity.Incompetent leaders can’t be ethical leaders.It is possible to use transformational leadership strategies to reach unethical objectives.An action or a decision cannot be ethical unless a leader reaches it using ethical processes.Traditional leadership theories and moral standards are not adequate to help employees solve complex organizational issues.
2 PARRAGRAM ABOUT THIS TOPICThis week our topic is cognitive neuroscience, a fascinating area of study that looks at the biological processes involved in our thoughts and our learning.
There is 2 parts to this assignment:
1. You have to create an inventory matrix based on teaching how to calculate discounts, tips, sales tax, commissions, etc.. You are using the template at the end of the Funds of Knowledge reading.
2. You have to complete the Funds of Knowledge Assignment. This is the paper that is required based on the reading and calculating discounts, tips, sales tax, commissions, etc. Attached is a template to follow for this assignment.
Here is a video also to help:
There is two parts to this assignment. 1st part is the inventory matrix located on the toolkit and it should be based on the topic of discounts, sales taxes, tips, and commissions. 2nd part is a paper. The template is attached 3 pages
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Funds of Knowledge Toolkit
The funds of knowledge concept was originally applied by Vélez-Ibáñez and Greenberg (1992)
to describe the historical accumulation of abilities, bodies of knowledge, assets, and cultural
ways of interacting that were evident in U.S.-Mexican households in Tucson, Arizona. Although
these funds of knowledge were demonstrated as culturally, socially, and cognitively complex, it
was pointed out that educators were not using them as a resource to enhance their students’
academic progress. Gonzalez, Moll, and Amanti’s (2005) work on teachers engaging families
outside of school contexts provided rich examples of how to recognize particular funds of
knowledge and apply them in a school setting. In the past decade, many scholars have extended
the funds of knowledge concept in a variety of different ways (see Hogg, 2011, and Rodriguez,
2013 for reviews of the literature). From a more practical perspective, a student’s funds of
knowledge can be described as:
•
•
•
•
academic and personal background knowledge,
accumulated life experiences,
skills and knowledge used to navigate everyday social contexts, and
world views structured by broader historically and politically influenced social forces.
How do funds of knowledge apply to teaching and learning?
Gaining a better understanding of a student’s funds of knowledge can enhance classroom
practices for both teachers and students. Using a funds of knowledge approach to
understanding students’ overall sets of abilities and experiences can help teachers draw on
these skills in classrooms to enrich their understanding of academic content while also
motivating them during classroom activities. Developing curricular content around the personal
contexts, skills, and experiences of students helps scaffold their understanding of academic
material.
The fundamental premise here is that most school-based practices, curricula, and behaviors are
based on mainstream, middle class norms and perspectives. By integrating patterns of learning,
knowing, and doing that are familiar to culturally and economically diverse students, academic
content becomes easier to connect to their lives and is understood on a deeper level. This
approach is especially relevant for English Language Learners. In fact, the funds of knowledge
concept has been adopted as one the “guiding principles” for working with ELL students in the
Washington state.
How can educators identify their students’ funds of knowledge?
There are many ways for educators to identify their students’ funds of knowledge. Many
teachers apply strategies that can be done in class that involve having the students write essays
about their backgrounds, do presentations about their interests, or create projects that
represent their family heritage. Those types of assignments are very meaningful and help
teachers learn a lot about their students. That said, much more can be learned about students
by engaging with them and their families outside of the classroom. By visiting with families
during home or community visits, teachers can gain a much wider understanding of their
students’ funds of knowledge.
One strategy that can help teachers connect their students’ funds of knowledge to classroom
content is to take note of specific experiences their students have had and/or the different home
or community practices in which their students are involved. Once particular practices and
experiences are noted (e.g., having immigrated from another country), teachers can categorize
them in terms of funds of knowledge categories (e.g., geography and/or politics). Once teachers
have this information recorded, they can brainstorm potential classroom applications (e.g.,
designing a social studies unit around immigration policies, or a math lesson around
immigration demographic data).
How can educators integrate their students’ funds of knowledge
into classroom practices?
Integrating students’ funds of knowledge into classroom lessons can be done across all content
areas and easily be applied to standards-based instruction. Below are multiple examples of how
fantastic teachers from across Washington described how they apply their students’ funds of
knowledge into their classroom lessons. The first group of examples demonstrates the range of
funds of knowledge that can be gleaned from community contexts. The second group illustrates
individual lessons based on specific content areas.
•
Community Contexts and Funds of Knowledge
•
Classroom Lessons
o
Cherry Farming in Mattawa
o
Boxing in Kennewick
o
Making Kimchi in Tukwila
For a more detailed description of how to connect student’s funds of knowledge to classroom
lessons, home visits, and student designed activities, read Johnson & Johnson (2016), Enhancing
Academic Investment through Home–School Connections and Building on ELL Students’
Scholastic Funds of Knowledge.
Recording Students’ Funds of Knowledge
To make this process easier to document, the following Funds of Knowledge Inventory
Matrix can help teachers record their observations and potential classroom ideas. Information
for this particular instrument can be accumulated over longer periods of time for specific
students, or it can be filled out after completing a home/community visit so that the information
is still fresh in the teacher’s memory. Record your observations of a student’s interests, activities,
and skills that s/he is involved in outside of school. Once you note what a student is doing (e.g.,
selling vegetables at a flea market), you can then identify what type of funds of knowledge
academic category best applies (e.g., “economics” or “mathematics” for the flea market context).
Then brainstorm ways to integrate the skills involved in that particular context to an academic
lesson (e.g., Math: figuring out how to maximize profit margins for selling corn by the pound vs.
by the ear). Since this is a cumulative document, multiple examples can be added to any
particular category. Although it is easier to use one matrix per student, multiple students’
information could be included on one document. The idea is to have a reservoir of information
and examples available to help guide lesson development when needed. Below is an example of
a Funds of Knowledge Inventory Matrix that a teacher assembled after conducting a home visit
with her 1st grade ELL student from El Salvador:
Funds of
Knowledge
Home/Community Practices
Classroom Application
Economics
When Ruby’s parents lived in El
Salvador the currency was different.
They had saved their old money in a
small box.
We could use this in math, money in
math is very common but using
different currencies would bring in their
funds of knowledge, especially if we
have other cultures in our classroom
that we may not know about.
Geography
There were a lot of maps around their
home. I saw a large world map of South
and North America. I also saw small
maps on key chains of El Salvador.
Ruby’s mother also brought out a towel
that resembled the Salvadorian flag.
This could be used in social studies. We
could look at cities in Washington and
take it a step farther and move from
each continent and have table groups
look closer at cities in specific
continents or regions.
Politics
Ruby’s family has Direct TV so they got
to watch news that came right out of El
Salvador. Her mother and father even
recorded the news so they would not
miss it when it came on.
We could use this in social studies,
young students most likely will not be
very interested in the news but they
could have an assignment that has
them work with their parents to choose
a topic or find a story in the news
together that is relent to today’s dates.
Funds of
Knowledge
Home/Community Practices
Classroom Application
Agriculture
In the back yard Ruby shows me where
her father would be planting tomatoes
this summer.
We could use this idea to create a
classroom garden or talk about plant
growth in science.
Technology
Ruby’s home was full of technology.
They had a TV in almost every room,
and they had lots of computers
throughout the home as well.
We could use technology during math
with online math games. We could also
have the students begin typing their
own stories on the computers. I do
think we should start off with a typing
lesson beforehand.
Or we could even find sorting games to
introduce the different kinds of
technology.
Religion
Ruby’s family is Catholic. Throughout
the home there were a lot of paintings
and portraits of Jesus Christ. They also
had gold jewelry with angels and other
figures on them. In Ruby’s room she
had showed me a Rosario she and her
mother had wrote down together from
the Bible.
For social studies, we could compare
Christianity with other prominent
religions around the world and
research different religions and places
of worship in our city.
For math, we could compare numbers
of practicing members of the different
religions around the world.
Language
The home is Spanish dominant, but her
mother does speak a bit of English and
her brothers and sisters speak English
fluently. In one photo of her mother
and sister it has a heading which says
“Mi Familia”. Most of the home
posters/ writing/ pictures are in
Spanish. She did explain to me that the
accent or dialect in el Salvador is
different than your usual Mexican
accent.
For language arts, we could compare
different dialects of Spanish and read
texts from different regions of Latin
America to see how those dialects are
represented. I could invite Ruby’s mom
to talk about El Salvador and her
experiences with Spanish in the U.S.
Cooking
Ruby’s mother was cooking while I
visited. She was in the process of
making platanos con frijoles y crema. I
had never tried this before, so I knew it
was one of their family’s favorite
recipes.
I could work on procedural vocabulary
by having students work with their
parents to write their favorite recipes.
This would also apply to math by
pointing out quantity words in addition
to measurements.
Funds of Knowledge Inventory Matrix
Funds of
Knowledge
Home/Community Practices
Classroom Application
Economics
Geography
Politics
Agriculture
Sports
Technology
Religion
Language
Health
Childcare
Art
Cooking
Entertainment
References
González, N., Moll, L.C., & Amanti, C.. (2005). Funds of knowledge: Theorizing practices in households,
communities, and classrooms. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Hogg, L. (2011). Funds of knowledge: An investigation of coherence within the literature. Teaching and
Teacher Education, 27, 666-677.
Johnson, E.J., & Johnson, A.B. (2016). Enhancing academic investment through home-school connections.
Journal of Language & Literacy Education, 12(1), 104-121.
Rodriguez, G. (2011). Power and agency in education: Exploring the pedagogical dimensions of funds of
knowledge. Review of Research in Education, 37(1), 87-120.
Vélez-Ibáñez, C.G., & Greenberg, J.B. (1992). Formation and transformation of funds of knowledge among
U.S. Mexican households. Anthropology & Education Quarterly, 23(4), 313-335.
FOK Assignment
Template
-Introduction (4-5 sentences): Define “Funds of Knowledge”. Properly use and cite quotes from
the reading or video from this week (as well as other sources you review). Discuss the concept
in your own words and explain why is this relevant to your teaching practice. Overview the 2-3
different FOK that you will focus on throughout the next few paragraphs.
-FOK #1 (8-10 sentences): Identify the fund of knowledge. Discuss how you became aware of
this. Many teachers use surveys at the start of the school year to find out about students’
backgrounds, experiences, interests, etc. Explain how this fund of knowledge stems from the
students’ culture (keep in mind that we are using the term “culture” in a broader sense, as a
representation of students’ lived experiences related to belonging to specific groups). Finally,
explain how you will incorporate this FOK in a lesson or unit. Be specific about identifying a
particular topic in which this FOK will be relevant and describe how you will draw this
knowledge from your students during class.
-FOK #2 (8-10 sentences): (Follow the guidelines for FOK #1)
-Optional-FOK #3 (8-10 sentences): (Follow the guidelines for FOK #1)
-Conclusion (4-5 sentences): Conclude by summarizing the importance of using FOK as teachers
(and specific to your content area) and discussing how students benefit from these practices.
FOK Assignment
Template
-Introduction (4-5 sentences): Define “Funds of Knowledge”. Properly use and cite quotes from
the reading or video from this week (as well as other sources you review). Discuss the concept
in your own words and explain why is this relevant to your teaching practice. Overview the 2-3
different FOK that you will focus on throughout the next few paragraphs.
-FOK #1 (8-10 sentences): Identify the fund of knowledge. Discuss how you became aware of
this. Many teachers use surveys at the start of the school year to find out about students’
backgrounds, experiences, interests, etc. Explain how this fund of knowledge stems from the
students’ culture (keep in mind that we are using the term “culture” in a broader sense, as a
representation of students’ lived experiences related to belonging to specific groups). Finally,
explain how you will incorporate this FOK in a lesson or unit. Be specific about identifying a
particular topic in which this FOK will be relevant and describe how you will draw this
knowledge from your students during class.
-FOK #2 (8-10 sentences): (Follow the guidelines for FOK #1)
-Optional-FOK #3 (8-10 sentences): (Follow the guidelines for FOK #1)
-Conclusion (4-5 sentences): Conclude by summarizing the importance of using FOK as teachers
(and specific to your content area) and discussing how students benefit from these practices.
To measure the financial performance of any company, it is important to analyze its four key financial statements: balance sheets, income statements, cash flow statements, and shareholders’ equity statements. In this assignment, you will:
Visually present the balance sheet to depict what each company owns and what it owes over the past three years.
Visually present the income statement to depict how much money a company made and spent over the past three years.
The visual presentation and analysis will help you understand and compare the performance of both the companies to be acquired and eventually will help you build your recommendation for the acquisition.
Prompt
Use the provided data sets of Company A and Company B to create data visualizations of their financial performance in Power BI. Then, based on the visualizations, write an executive summary interpreting the financial performance of Company A and Company B. Include screenshots from your data visualizations as needed in your summary. Follow the directions in the Power BI Executive Summary Assignment User Manual.
To complete this assignment, you will use Power BI software that is located within the virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI).
Specifically, you must address the following criteria:
Assets, Liability, and Equity: Summarize how the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity have changed over three years for Company A and Company B. Include screenshots of your data visualization as follows:
Company A: In Power BI, use the provided Company A Financials and construct a set of three clustered column charts, representing:
The assets of Company A as represented in the data during each of the three years
The liabilities and owners’ equity over the same three years
Once the column charts are created, summarize the insights about how the assets, liability, and equity have changed over three years, as presented in the visualizations using Power BI
Company B: In Power BI, use the provided Company B Financials and construct a set of three clustered column charts, representing:
The assets of Company B as represented in the data during each of the three years
The liabilities and owners’ equity over the same three years
Once the column charts are created, summarize the insights about how the assets, liability, and equity have changed over three years, as presented in the visualizations using Power BI
Revenue and Earnings: Use the provided income statements to summarize the gross revenue and net earnings for Company A and Company B over three years. Include screenshots of your data visualization as follows:
Company A: In Power BI, use the provided Company A Financials document and construct a line chart illustrating the visual relationship of revenue, gross profit, total expenses, earnings before tax, net earnings, and taxes.
Company B: In Power BI, use the provided Company B Financials document and construct a line chart illustrating the visual relationship of revenue, gross profit, total expenses, earnings before tax, net earnings, and taxes.
Conclusion: Summarize your observations about the financial performance of both companies. Include any insights you may have about their performance trends or how they have performed compared to each other over the past three years.
What to Submit
Submit a 2- to 3-page Word document using double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and one-inch margins. Sources should be cited according to APA style. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MBA 620 Module Five Power BI Executive Summary Assignment User Manual
Introduction …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2
Accessing Power BI Via the Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) …………………………………………………….. 2
Accessing and Cleaning the CSV File ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Importing CSV Files to Power BI ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7
Working on the Module Five Visualization of Financial Performance Assignment ……………………………14
Creating Clustered Column Charts …………………………………………………………………………………………….14
Creating a Line Chart ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….20
Exporting Files From Power BI …………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
Uploading Image Files to OneDrive ……………………………………………………………………………………………26
1
Introduction
Power BI is a tool that enables its users to visualize and present data in a manner that is easy to
understand and analyze.
Accessing Power BI Via the Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI)
1. In Brightpsace, select Course Menu at the top of the page. Select the VDI module on the left
side. Select VDI Access and log in with your SNHU username and password. See the VDI
Instructions in the VDI Module for more information if needed.
2. Select Apps from the top navigation bar. Click Student Lab 1. Wait for VDI to load.
2
3. On the VDI home screen, select Power BI Desktop. The Power BI homepage is displayed.
3
Accessing and Cleaning the CSV File
We should clean the CSV file before we import it into Power BI. For example, to plot charts as per the
prompt in the assignment guidelines, we will use data from the Balance Sheets section of the supplied
comma-separated values (CSV) file, which is a delimited text file that uses a comma to separate values.
Each line of the file is a data record. The other data sections, such as Income Statement, Cash Flow
Statement, and Supporting Schedules, are not required and will be removed before we conduct the
analysis.
To open and clean the data set CSV file, locate the file MBA620_Module five_Assignment two_Company
A Financial within the MBA 620 folder.
1. On the VDI home screen, open the Business Analytics Course Content folder on the VDI desktop.
2. Click on the file MBA620_Module five_Assignment two_Company A Financial CSV to open it in
the Microsoft Excel application within the virtual desktop.
4
3. In the file, we can remove the following data to clean the CSV file for creating the specific chart
in the assignment:
• Remove columns A, C, and D, as they are empty and not required in analysis.
• Remove rows 1, 2, 3, and 4, as that data is not required to plot the charts in PowerBI.
• In section 1 of the prompt, in guiding question 1, you are asked to analyze the datain the
balance sheet section of the CSV file, which is starting from row 18 and extends to row
35. This makes all other data irrelevant. Therefore, we can remove all the other data
rows.
After removing the above-mentioned columns and rows, we will have the following data.
5
4. Now we move the text in row 2 to row 1 to make it a header of the CSV file. The sheet will now
have the text Balance Sheet, 2017, 2018, and 2019 in row 1.
6
This is now a cleaned data sheet and will enable you to complete the first sub-task of section 1 in the
assignment. Similarly, clean the data sheet as per the requirement before solving the other question given
in the assignment.
Ensure you save your work before proceeding to the next step. Remember the location on the virtual
desktop and the name you give this file, as you’ll be importing it into Power BI in the next step.
Importing CSV Files to Power BI
NOTE: Once Power BI opens, close out of any message windows that may pop up. Do not use the
“Import data from excel” button shown below.
7
1. Click on File, then Get Data, and then Text/CSV.
Note: For the steps to access the Power BI tool via the VDI, refer to Accessing Power BI Via the
VDI.
The Open window is displayed. You may need to open the drop-down box in the lower right corner to
change the file type to “All Files.”
8
2. Go to the location you where you saved your cleaned CSV file, select it, and click Open to begin
importing. The preview window with the data set content is displayed. If you do not see your
CSV file where you expect it, be sure that “ALL FILES” is selected in the file type drop-down
menu.
9
In the imported CSV file, we see that the headers for the data are Column1, Column2, Column3, and
Column4. We need the sheet to have the headers labeled Balance Sheet, 2017, 2018, and 2019.
10
If you come across an error, refer to the steps below. If the headers are displayed correctly, proceed to
step 3.
To resolve the error of incorrect headers:
i.
In the preview window, on the bottom right side, select Transform Data.
11
ii.
In the top ribbon, under the Home tab, in Transform, select Use First Row as Headers.
12
iii.
In the upper right corner of the window, click the cancel icon
window is displayed.
. The Power Query Editor
iv.
Click Yes. The changed headers are applied, and the data is imported into thePower BI home
page.
3. Click Load. The data has been imported in Power BI. You can now perform your analysis.
13
Working on the Module Five Visualization of Financial Performance Assignment
In MBA 620, you will access Power BI using the VDI for the Module Five Visualization of Financial
Performance assignment. In this assignment, you will create a clustered column charts and line and
column charts (also called combo charts) for your analysis.
Creating Clustered Column Charts
1. Access Power BI and import the CSV files.
Note: To learn the process for importing files into Power BI, refer to Importing CSV Files to Power BI.
2. In the displayed right pane, under Visualizations, click the clustered column chart icon.
14
3. In the center pane, the line chart placeholder is displayed.
NOTE: To view the name of the icon, place your cursor over the icon. For example, to view the
name Clustered column chart, place your cursor over the following icon.
15
4. Using the re-sizing tool, resize the clustered column chart placeholder so that it fits the screen.
5. The placeholder is re-sized. You can now move ahead and plot the clustered column chart per
the required attributes.
6. To add an attribute, in the right pane under Fields, drag an attribute and place it under
Visualizations and Axis/Legend/Values/Tooltips.
a. For example, let’s move the attributes Balance Sheets, 2017, 2018, and 2019 from
Fields to Axis and Values in Visualizations. This will provide us with the graph for
analyzing the balance sheet for the years 2017, 2018, and 2019.
16
b. The fields are then displayed in the boxes under the Axis and Values, under
Visualizations.
17
7. After moving the three attributes, the clustered column chart is displayed in the centerpane.
In the assignment prompt, we have been asked to analyze Company A’s assets, liabilities, and equity.We
have the graph with all attributes. To get a graph with only these three values (assets, liabilities, and
equity) we will apply filters. To apply filters:
8. On the right side of the clustered column chart, under Filters, point your cursor towards Balance
Sheets.
9. Click the arrow icon
18
The expanded list with a checklist of attributes under Balance Sheet are displayed.
10. In the displayed list, select the options Total Assets and Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity. The
graph is filtered and will display information for only Total Assets and Total Liabilities & Owners’
Equity.
You can now perform your analysis.
19
Creating a Line Chart
1. Access Power BI and import the required CSV file
Note: To learn the process for importing files into Power BI, refer to Importing Files to Power BI.
2. In the displayed right pane, under Visualizations, click the line chart icon.
3. In the center pane, the line chart placeholder is displayed.
20
Note: To view the name of the icon, place your cursor over the icon. For example, to view the name
Line and clustered column chart, place your cursor over the following icon.
4. Using the re-sizing tool, resize the line and clustered column chart placeholder so that it fitsthe
screen.
5. The placeholder is re-sized. You can now move ahead and plot the line and clustered column
chart per the required attributes.
21
6. To add an attribute, in the right pane under Fields, drag an attribute and place it under
Visualizations and Legend/Details/Values/Tooltips.
For example, let’s move the attributes Income Statement, 2017, 2018, and 2019 from Fields to
Axis and Values respectively in Visualizations. This will provide us with the graph for analyzing
the income statement for Company A for the years 2017, 2018, and 2019.
7. The fields are then displayed in the boxes under Axis and Values, under Visualizations.
22
8. After moving the four attributes, the line chart is displayed in the center pane.
You can now perform your analysis by analyzing the different attributes in the line chart.
23
Exporting Files From Power BI
Note: Power BI doesn’t allow to export individual chart or graph files to the VDI. All charts or graphs can
be exported at once. You can later take the screenshot from the downloaded file to add them
individually to your assignment submission.
1. In the upper left corner of the virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) screen, click File.
2. In the displayed list, select Export, and in the right pane select Export to PDF.
3. All the charts are opened in one PDF document.
24
4. Take a screenshot of an individual chart page and save it in the VDI. Once the screenshots are
taken, you can upload them onto OneDrive.
25
Uploading Image Files to OneDrive
1. In the VDI, open the OneDrive-SNHU application.
2. A browser will open, and the OneDrive login page is displayed.
26
3. Enter your SNHU login ID email and click Next. The Password page is displayed.
4. Enter your SNHU password and click Sign in. The OneDrive user homepage is displayed.
27
5. In the top pane, click + New.
6. In the displayed list, click Folder. The Create a folder dialog box is displayed.
7. Enter a name for the folder and click Create. The new folder is created and displayed in
OneDrive.
8. Open the new folder.
28
9. In the top pane, click Upload.
10. In the displayed options, select Files. The Open window is displayed.
11. Navigate to the saved graphs image files. Select them and click Open.
12. The image files are uploaded to OneDrive. A success message indicating the successful upload of
the files is displayed.
29
Read the case study “Travel Solutions” at the end of Chapter 7 of your textbook, follow the following directions and then respond to the case study questions
A case study is a puzzle to be solved, so before reading and answering the specific questions, develop your proposed solution by following these five steps:
(Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.)This is very important
Read the case study to identify the key issues and underlying issues. These issues are the principles and concepts of the course module, which apply to the situation described in the case study.
Record the facts from the case study which are relevant to the principles and concepts of the module. The case may have extraneous information not relevant to the current module. Your ability to differentiate between relevant and irrelevant information is an important aspect of case analysis, as it will inform the focus of your answers.
Describe in some detail the actions that would address or correct the situation.
Consider how you would support your solution with examples from experience or current real-life examples or cases from textbooks.
Complete this initial analysis and then read the discussion questions. Typically, you will already have the answers to the questions but with a broader consideration. At this point, you can add the details and/or analytical tools required to solve the case.
Case Study Questions:
What is your assessment of the situation at Travelink at the end of the case? What are the underlying problems in the organization?
If you found yourself in Will or Robert’s situation, what would you do? Why?
If Will and Robert both decide to stay and try to advance needed changes, what changes would you recommend they focus on and how would you recommend they go about it? Would you, for example, share Will’s documentation of the problems within the company? Why or why not?
Have you ever been in a situation where you were a recipient of change and things went poorly? How did it affect you and others in the organization?
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 4-5 pages in length, which does not include the title and reference pages, which are never a part of the content minimum requirements.
Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.
It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the Turnitin Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for grading. If you are unsure how to submit an assignment into the Originality Check tool, review the Turnitin Originality Check – Student Guide for step-by-step instructions.
Review the grading rubric to see how you will be graded for this assignment.
Congratulations! You are off to a good start. You successfully completed an analysis of the company’s internal business environment.
To quickly recap, as the director of strategic planning, you are creating a new strategic planning proposal to help the company explore at least one new growth opportunity and increase its revenue or market share in the industry.
As you continue creating your proposal, in this assignment you will analyze your company’s external business environment and explain its influence on revenue or market share.
Prompt
Perform an external environment analysis of your company to identify the company’s competitive environment and find an opportunity the company can utilize to grow its revenue or market share in the industry. Use resources such as the company website, which will have pertinent information including its most recent sustainability report, and other relevant sources to help complete this presentation. You can also use the resources in the MBA Library Research Guide to conduct further research about your company.
Create a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation to show the results of your analysis. Use both on-screen text and speaker notes to convey your information effectively. For example, you can use brief bulleted lists summarizing the highlights of your analysis on the slides, and include more detailed explanations where needed in your speaker notes.
Specifically, you must address the following rubric criteria:
Competitors (slide 1): Identify at least two of your company’s top competitors and explain how they compete with your company.
Competitive advantages (slides 2–7): Evaluate your company’s competitive advantages.
Summarize the unique skill sets, products, location, and values of your company.
Use Porter’s five forces to analyze your company’s competitiveness and growth potential in its industry. Assign a rating to your company for each of Porter’s five forces as very high (VH), high (H), low (L), or very low (VL). Justify your ratings.
Area of opportunity (slides 8–9): Identify one area of opportunity that will help your company increase its revenue or market share over the next five years. Explain how this opportunity can lead to an increase in revenue or market share.
What to Submit
Create a PowerPoint presentation with 9–12 slides. Sources should be cited according to APA style. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
Milestone Two Rubric
Criteria Exemplary (100%) Proficient (90%) Needs Improvement (70%) Not Evident (0%) Value
Competition Exceeds proficiency in an exceptionally clear, insightful, sophisticated, or creative manner Identifies two or more of the company’s top competitors; explains how they compete with the company Shows progress toward proficiency, but with errors or omissions; areas for improvement may include identifying at least two top competitors or explaining how they compete with the company using sound reasoning and relevant data Does not attempt criterion 25
Competitive Advantages Exceeds proficiency in an exceptionally clear, insightful, sophisticated, or creative manner Summarizes the unique skill sets, products, location, and values of the company; assigns a credible rating to the company for each of Porter’s five forces with relevant justification Shows progress toward proficiency, but with errors or omissions; areas for improvement may include summarizing the skill sets, products, and values correctly or assigning credible ratings using sound reasoning Does not attempt criterion 30
Area of Opportunity Exceeds proficiency in an exceptionally clear, insightful, sophisticated, or creative manner Identifies one area of opportunity that will help increase revenue or market share over the next five years; explains how this opportunity can lead to an increase in revenue or market share Shows progress toward proficiency, but with errors or omissions; areas for improvement may include identifying a valid area of opportunity or explaining the impact on revenue or market share appropriately Does not attempt criterion 30
Articulation of Response Exceeds proficiency in an exceptionally clear, insightful, sophisticated, or creative manner Clearly conveys meaning with correct grammar, sentence structure, and spelling, demonstrating an understanding of audience and purpose Shows progress toward proficiency, but with errors in grammar, sentence structure, and spelling, negatively impacting readability Submission has critical errors in grammar, sentence structure, and spelling, preventing understanding of ideas 10
Citations and Attributions Uses citations for ideas requiring attribution, with few or no minor errors Uses citations for ideas requiring attribution, with consistent minor errors Uses citations for ideas requiring attribution, with major errors Does not use citations for ideas requiring attribution 5
Total: 100%
So basically the complete 3500 words proposal has already written by me. Now the student has requested some changes in my proposal. i’m attaching the files so you see them and help in making the adjustments.
Answer all of the following questions for full credit (using full sentences):What is your takeaway after reading the experts’ predictions?What is your favorite quote?Do you think Excel going to be replaced anytime soon, why or why not?What do you think it takes to become an Excel expert such as these people?Create a post and reply to (2) other posts for full credit. 27 Excel Experts Predict The Future of Excel and BI (investintech.com)200
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
To start this assignment, choose an organization from the list provided by your instructor.
Visit the MERGENT library database to conduct research on your chosen organization. Become very familiar with this library database. You will need it.
Analyze the details, latest annual report, latest news, review competitor information, etc. about your chosen organization.
You may also want to visit the website of your chosen organization for more information and observation.
Scenario:
You are the director of strategy and business intelligence for your chosen organization. You are conducting an evaluation of your chosen organization for an upcoming annual report. Your goal is to demonstrate skill and expertise in the evaluation of the strategic success of your organization. You will be submitting this report to C-level executives for review. Use the following criteria to evaluate your chosen organization to determine how successful its strategy is in achieving competitive advantage over its competitors.
Assignment Requirements: In this assignment, you will assess the strategy of your chosen organization. Address each of the following inquiries in your deliverable:
Strategy Principles and Concepts Overview
Assess the purpose and benefits of a strategy.
Break down and explain the components of a strategy.
Examine how strategy is used by organizations to build competitive advantage.
Explain the three levels of strategy.
Examine how policy relates to the strategy of an organization.
Organizational Overview
Provide detailed background information about your chosen organization.
Include its name, industry sector in which the organization operates, its products, and target market. Elaborate and use research.
Evaluate the brand of your chosen organization.
Identify and explain the industry and sector in which your chosen organization operates.
Assess the business model of your chosen organization.
Assess the design of your chosen organization.
Identify and explain the product offering of your chosen organization.
Identify and explain the target market of your chosen organization.
Assessing Strategy
Assess the strategy of your chosen organization.
Assess the value proposition of your chosen organization.
Assess the competitive advantages of your chosen organization.
Assess the mission, vision, and values of your chosen organization.
Assess the objectives of your chosen organization.
Conclusive Remarks
Draw overall conclusions and make recommendations based on the evaluation of your chosen organization.
Summarize the process of evaluating an organization’s strategy.
Identify and explain three major areas of concern or interest based on the findings of your strategy evaluation.
Provide recommendations or solutions to address the three areas of concern or interest that you identified. Provide reasoning.
APA Style
Correctly apply APA style to in-text citations.
Correctly apply APA style to references.
Writing Conventions
Use a minimum of three peer-reviewed, academic research resources (including MindTools and Library materials) to substantiate your critical thinking and to provide viable reasoning for your perspectives.
Use headings to segment the topics in your writing in order to create a flow of ideas for your reader.
Use diagrams, images, and charts to give context to your writing.
Use reasoning skills to support your statements, thoughts, opinions, and ideas.
Write in third person to develop your business report.
Your paper must have a highly developed viewpoint and purpose, be in Standard English, and demonstrate superior organization.
Communication should be highly ordered, logical and unified. Your paper must also have exceptional content, organization, style, and mechanics.
You are the professional and will need to determine how many words and pages your strategic analysis report should be to meet the requirements of this assignment. You are capable of doing professional research and making strategic decisions at this level of your degree program. Take the initiative to be the problem solver and strategic decision-maker.
Directions for Submitting Your Assignment
Before you submit your assignment, you should save your work on your computer in a location and with a name that you will remember.
Make sure your assignment is in the correct file format (Microsoft® Word® .doc or .docx).
Submit your completed document to the Unit 2 Assignment Dropbox
This assignment will require intensive interpretation skills. Be sure to use the grading rubric as a checklist.
international Growth in Multinational EnterprisesWhat are some of the factors that limit the international growth of multinational enterprises?How do regulations and rules varying from nation to nation affect multinational corporations?What are some advantages and disadvantages of multinational enterprises? Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.Your initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit.APA STYLE, last edition with text citation and references .
1. This is an individual project. You will review an article and summarize it as well as
present your review to the class.
2. Select an interesting scientific article from an academic journal that discusses
operations management (OM) with direct links to journal publishers.
3. The selecting article must be published during the past five years and should have
approximately 6-10 pages and contain: 1. real-world problem(s) 2. OM method(s)
used 3. real (or anticipating) result(s).
4. Review the article and write a short summary of 2 pages (A4 / Times New Roman /
single space / approx. 1200 words) without figure. If necessary, put the figure on a
separate page, which is not counted. Written summary is to be turned in online on
the day it is due.
5. Prepare for a brief presentation (10 minutes) – please provide notes to read on the presentation too.
Areas/Topics to be selected for Project 1:
• Project Management
• Design of Goods and Services
• Quality Management
Project 1 Grading (10 points)
1.Quality of the selected paper (1.5 points)
2. Executive Summary
2.1 Easy to read (1 point)
2.2 Clarity and depth of problem/method/result discussion (2 points)
2.3 Correctness and completeness of the report (1 point)
3. Presentation
3.1 Demonstrate the understanding the topics and methods (2.5 points)
3.2 Readiness and mechanics of presentation (2 points)
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1.State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2.Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3.Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1-Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle Waters. (2.5 marks)
2-Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3-How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4-Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: –
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.……
2.…….
3.……
4.……
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Quality Management (MGT 424)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Quality Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 424
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN: 11843
Academic Year: 2023/24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Salem Alanizan
Students’ Grade:
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions –PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources
without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures
containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
•
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
• The Assignment`s learning Outcomes:
In the 2nd assignment, the students are required to read thoughtfully the “ Nestlé Waters Unifying
real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study , and answer the related questions, upon
successful completion of the assignment the student should be able to:
1. State the importance of standardization and quality standards (CLO2)
2. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve the
organizational change and transformation (CLO3)
3. Develop analytical skills of identifying pitfalls, or quality concerns through assimilated
and strategic planning. (CLO4)
• Instructions to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study
Access below link to read the case study:
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories”
case study
This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters
Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged
its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by
using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions:
1- Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle
Waters. (2.5 marks)
2- Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office
Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks)
3- How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)
4- Describe the management role in the change process? (2.5 marks)
Important Notes: •
•
•
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook
and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1. ……
2. …….
3. ……
4. ……
Cheating occurs in different forms. In the case study, Tracy and Denise need to provide a recommendation on a stocking fee for large and small Breweries. Create a PowerPoint presentation which addresses the following:
Describe the ethical dilemma for Denise and Tracy.
What was Denise’s and Tracy’s ethical justification to go along with stocking fee?
What could “fixing the data” have done to foster and create an ethical environment?
What might be the cheating signal in the company that would make deontology or utilitarianism ethical theories effective?
What might be the duty to the client that Denise and Tracy have?
Requirements:
Your presentation must answer the questions with notes in the slides. The presentation should be five slides (one slide for each question) not including title and reference pages.
You need to cite at least three sources for this assignment.
Your references must be formatted according to APA guidelines
Reference: Russel, G. & Kennedy, D. (n.d.). A small matter of trimming. University of Waterloo. https://uwaterloo.ca/centre-for-accounting-ethics/resources/ethics-teaching-cases/small-matter-trimming
Assume for this assignment that you are being highly considered for a director-level HR management position for a best-in-class national retailer. You are in the final phase of the interview process and must respond to the interview panel regarding specific questions and scenarios that will help them determine if you are a good fit for the new role. The company’s culture is centered on the effective development of strategy, plans, and selection criteria aimed at building and sustaining a competitive and profitable organization. It will be extremely important that you respond with a strategic mindset in order to convince the organization you are able to help them ensure the execution of the business strategy.
Instructions
Write a six- to seven-page paper in which you do the following:
Analyze different types of strategies (cost leadership, differentiation, and focus or niche) and select which one you would deem more appropriate for an “efficiency-minded” retail organization and explain your rationale. How would the selected strategy ultimately affect how HR does its job?
Examine the four approaches to job design or redesign and provide an example (not a definition) of each. Then, make a case to the interviewing panel on the importance of effective job design applications in supporting the overall strategic goals of the organization.
Consider challenges and constraints associated with recruiting workers and identify and discuss at least two issues. What advice would you give to ease your selected issues? Be specific.
List and describe 2-3 candidate selection process ideas that might add value and overall effectiveness to the process.
Example: 5 Tips for Designing an Effective Employee Selection SystemLinks to an external site..
Also, what problems should HR and management teams avoid during the selection process?
Use at least four quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: You may only use the resources listed in the Course Guide and those that are specifically provided by the professor.
This course requires the use of Strayer Writing Standards (SWS). The library is your home for SWS assistance, including citations and formatting. Please refer to the Library site for all supports. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
Use the Strayer University Library to locate additional sources to support your work.
The specific course outcome associated with this assignment is:
Determine strategies for providing effective human resource management within an organization, including how to support competitive advantage, approaches to job design and redesign, and recruitment and selection.
Please review the Executive Summaries of other students, providing an objective assessment and constructive feedback that will help strengthen the effectiveness of their efforts and the quality of the finished report.Executive Summary:The consolidated evaluation of pursuing a company in the European Union or outside of the European Union is a measure of opportunity and overall benefits for the firm. To make this decision the firm will need to evaluate the technology advancements that are compatible with the United States infrastructure. It is important to understanding the pros, cons, risks, historical events, and current events surrounding the European Union. At this time the evaluation is representing the firm’s best interests to pursue a company outside of the European Union.Global Business Complexity Index (GBCI) and the Index of Global Economic Policy Uncertainty are discussed to capture the relevance of the Brexit referendum in June 2016, and the overall understanding of taxes and processes that will be a concern for effective business practices. The uncertainty of the Ukraine and Russia conflict will have a long term affect on the surrounding European Union jurisdictions and their reliability to grow a business investment reliably.The European Union has 27 countries, and 24 of them are ranked within the GBCI. In the top 10 most complex jurisdictions the European Union has France in second, Greece in sixth, Italy in eighth, and Poland in tenth for the report published in 2022. Some of these jurisdictions have common issues that relate to tax and accounting requirements such as International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and labor laws being difficult to adhere to due to local language and the numerous tax reports to be filed. Environmental, social, and corporate governance (ESG), anti-money laundering (AML), and Ultimate Beneficial Owner (UBO) laws that limit transition for foreign businesses to adopt. Some of them are also undergoing many changes in legislations and technological advancements pushed during the Covid-19 pandemic that the jurisdictions have not fully adjusted to (TMF Group, 2022).The European Union also has one jurisdiction, Denmark, in the least complex jurisdictions. The main reason for their ease is due to the ‘one stop shop’ aspect of their digitalization incorporated in 2020. Denmark also implemented adequate reimbursement process for employees that endured the hardship of Covid-19, alleviating companies of administration issues or burdens. It also allowed for more flexibility for companies to postpone deadline, loans, and reimbursements that lead to a faster recovery from the pandemic (TMF Group, 2022).Despite the tax and accounting or heavier labor laws and regulations, the ability for European Union jurisdictions to keep up with the digital age and the challenges of the Russian Ukraine conflicts is too much risk for a foreign business to endure. There are many other jurisdictions outside of the European Union that will have less risks. In 5 years, the situation in the European Union might change and the firm will reevaluate at that time.ReferencesTMF Group. (2022, June 28). Global Business Complexity Index 2022. Retrieved from TMF Group: https://www.dianeosis.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/06/280622-TMF-Group-GBCI-2022.pdf
for this assignment we have to use the submission rubric to analyze the speech
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Speech Analysis Paper
Description:
In this paper, you will choose a speech you wish to analyze. The speech must be on
video (no audio only speeches) and can be any public speech. Once you have
watched the speech a few times, you will answer the question, “Was this a good
speech or a bad speech?” Once you have chosen your side, construct a paper
demonstrating your argument. You must choose a side even if there are good and
bad elements in the speech.
Format:
1. 2-3 pages (Do not use a cover page to extend the paper length)
Sample Outline (Use this as a guideline)
1. Intro
A. Topic sentence (introduce the speech to the reader)
B. Context (give a brief explanation of the context surrounding the speech.
Where it was given, what were the events that caused the speech to be
given, and who was the audience at the speech)
C. Thesis: In this part of the introduction, you will tell the reader if you
thought it was a good or bad speech.
2. Body: Minimum of 2 body points (repeat this format for each body point you
have)
A. Topic sentence (introduce your argument regarding the speech)
B. Support (give examples from the speech that support your main
argument)
C. Analysis (analyze why your observations from the speech prove your
central thesis)
3. Conclusion
A. Restate your thesis
B. Summarize your body points
C. End with a closing sentence
Prepare a scholarly reflection paper describing the artifacts in the portfolio and how they demonstrate skills, knowledge, real-world application, and mastery of the program objectives.
Explain professional growth attained during the master’s program or explain your professional skills to a potential employer.
Prompt
Write a reflection paper that:
Reflects on your professional growth during the master’s program–
What were your strengths at the beginning of the program and how did you leverage them to succeed? (List at least 3)
What were your weaknesses when you started the program (List at least 3)
How did you address them?
Are they still weaknesses?
What additional professional development can you do to continue growing in these areas?
Describes each of your artifacts presented in your profile, the associated skills demonstrated, and how those skills would be beneficial to the employer.
Instructions:
Write a 2,500-2,800 word APA formatted paper.
The document should include:
Title Page
Introduction
Self-Assessment
Personal Development Plan
Reflection on the Course (what should we stop doing, what should we continue doing, and what should we start doing?)
Conclusion
References – 5 or more references using APA format
my daughter is having trouble with her finance homework. i will share the log in to the website. The problems sets to be completed are PS 24, PS 25, PS 26, and PS 27. once you click on the link you’ll click on the professors name which is FIN3300 – 92697 – Nguyen then once you click on that you click on assignments.link to homework : https://www.csepub.com/users/karen-duarteUsername : kduarte2@student.gsu.edupassword: Duarte2003
This assignment is an opportunity for our health communication community to share challenges and struggles, as well as provide and receive social support.
Due Dates:
Original comment is due by Saturday @ 11:59 PM.
A response to at least ONE classmate is due by Sunday @ 11:59 PM
Word Requirement:
None for this assignment. Share as much or as little as you would like.
Topic:
Submit a Discussion Board Post on any challenges you are facing this semester that are impacting your mental health, physical health, happiness, or other aspects of your overall well-being.
This can be anything ranging from stress or anxiety related to balancing school and work; to a personal or family struggle you are managing; the events that unfolded last weekend; or anything else.
You do not need to mention your health directly if you are not comfortable doing so. You can simply share something that is stressful or causing you anxiety that you have to balance while you also attend to your school obligations. I just want to get a fuller picture of what you all are dealing with and provide a forum for you to share your stories and support one another.
Once you send me my response i will send you the other classmates post so you can respond plz
LMZ Company has solicited your assistance in developing a Total Rewards Program. The company was started 30 years ago by a husband and wife who are now transitioning into retirement and transferring the company in six months to their oldest son of five children. The company was positioned to allow several departments to transition to remote work due to COVID-19. They still maintain a small office within the local town that has approximately 40 employees that continue to work on-site. The new owner (son) is concerned about re-branding and possible competition. The owners (couple) will still be a part of the company as senior advisors and play a role in decision-making and are concerned about the role of their other children who also work within the company in various roles and total compensation including benefits once their son pays for re-branding and new marketing efforts. Your primary role will be to develop a Total Rewards Strategy Program (see Figure 1.3, Total rewards strategy, in The WorldatWork Handbook of Total Rewards) for this company while keeping its structure and potential family values in mind.
Instructions
Write a 4-6 page Total Rewards Strategy in which you:
Design an original total rewards strategy (Figure 1.3, Chapter 1, “The Power of Total Rewards” in the textbook) for LMZ Company.
Identify the first steps that the consultant needs to take to develop a total rewards program for the LMZ Company.
Outline how compensation, well-being, benefits, development, and recognition will be implemented.
Identify at least three concerns or problems that could impact the Total Rewards Strategy.
Identify at least three advantages of a total rewards approach and provide an example of how the identified advantage can be beneficial for both the organization and the employee.
Discuss how the new Total Rewards Plan will be monitored and reviewed for potential changes and identify the personnel involved in this process.
Use 3-5 quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other websites do not quality academic resources.
This course requires the use of Strayer Writing Standards (SWS). The library is your home for SWS assistance, including citations and formatting. Please refer to the Library site for all support. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
Create a strategy for maximizing the advantages of a total rewards program, including how it’s communicated.
Assess the effectiveness of a total rewards program in motivating employees.
Review how employers and employees can benefit from the Health Plans and Benefit
Links to an external site. section of the United States Department of Labor website
Merit Pay System: Is it Right for your Business? https://www.fool.com/the-ascent/small-business/human-resources/articles/merit-pay/Links to an external site.Links to relevant articles – Topic: Merit Based Payhttp://libdatab.strayer.edu/login?url=https://search.ebscohost.com/login.aspx?direct=true&db=heh&AN=162431085&site=eds-live&scope=sitePros and Cons of Merit Pay: https://cws-software.com/the-pros-and-cons-of-merit-pay/Links to an external site.The Advantages & Disadvantages of Merit Pay: https://www.thebalancemoney.com/the-advantages-and-disadvantages-of-merit-pay-1919083Links to an external site.SHRM: Employers Seek Better Approaches to Pay for Performance: https://www.shrm.org/ResourcesAndTools/hr-topics/compensation/Pages/better-pay-for-performance.aspxLinks to an external site. (this article is a little dated but still very good information)I put together this video to help explain Assignment 2 and my expectations of your paper. It is lengthy but is full of information that should help you do your very best with this assignment: https://strayer-edu.zoom.us/rec/share/sI7tVj8YhY0a731IqI2KgKasrlkH8l4aNqqfu-ah5bimixx0Ehkp8NA_u6e_qnZi.7hIAmwC2pZDwjw26Links to an external site.Passcode: !0h&gavmTotally awesome articles for your assignment 2:https://www.aihr.com/blog/total-rewards-strategy/Links to an external site.https://www.indeed.com/career-advice/career-development/total-rewards-strategyLinks to an external site.https://www.mercer.com/en-us/insights/total-reward…Links to an external site.
What does it mean if two variables have a positive correlation?
Question 1 options:
The correlation between the two variables is greater than 1.0
The correlation between the two variables is 0
As one variable increases, the other decreases
As one variable increases, so does the other
Question 2
How can we determine if a test has good validity?
Question 2 options:
It produces the same result when it is given at different times to the same group of people
All of the questions on it can be answered accurately by the subject
It measures what it is supposed to measure
It produces the same result no matter which version of the test is used
Question 3
What is the variable called that a researcher manipulates in an experiment?
Question 3 options:
Extraneous variable
None of the above
Dependent variable
Independent variable
Question 4
Which of the following is a research method that allows a researcher to get information about a large number of subjects relatively inexpensively and easily?
Question 4 options:
Laboratory observation
Naturalistic observation
Case study
Survey
Question 5
What is a common way of controlling extraneous variables in an experiment?
Question 5 options:
Double-blind procedure
Using animal subjects
Random assignment
Single-blind procedure
Question 6
When doing research involving deception with human subjects, researchers have an obligation to do which of the following?
Question 6 options:
Tell subjects the truth about the study’s purpose and methods after the study is completed
Let subjects withdraw from the study at any time if they don’t want to keep participating
Prevent mental and physical harm to subjects
All of the above
Question 7
Good scientific research must have precise hypotheses, replicability, falsifiable theories and hypotheses, and parsimonious explanations.
Question 7 options:
True
False
Question 8
Self-report data can be misleading, and therefore not reliable in research. Why?
Question 8 options:
All of the above
People may not always understand the questions asked
People may sometimes give answers based on wishful thinking
People sometimes intentionally lie
Question 9
We can always draw cause-and-effect conclusions about correlative data.
Question 9 options:
True
False
Question 10
If a result is statistically significant, it is probably not due to chance.
Question 10 options:
True
False
Question 11
Researchers use inferential statistics to determine the likelihood that a result is due simply to chance.
Question 11 options:
True
False
Question 12
Scientific method is a standardized way of making observations, gathering data, forming theories, testing predictions, and interpreting results.
Question 12 options:
True
False
Question 13
A positive correlation means that when one variable increases, the other one decreases.
Question 13 options:
True
False
Question 14
Content validity is a test’s ability to measure all the important aspects of the characteristic being measured.
Question 14 options:
True
False
Question 15
Experimenter bias occurs when researchers’ preferences or expectations influence the outcome of their research.
Question 15 options:
True
False
Question 16
How can we determine if a test has good validity?
Question 16 options:
It produces the same result no matter which version of the test is used
It produces the same result when it is given at different times to the same group of people
All of the questions on it can be answered accurately by the subject
It measures what it is supposed to measure
Question 17
All things being equal, which design is more likely to result in a statistically significant effect?
Question 17 options:
Independent groups
Repeated measures
Question 18
A study conducted outside the confines of a standard laboratory/classroom is called a:
Question 18 options:
field experiment
meta-analysis
mundane experiment
Question 19
A study that uses different procedures for manipulating and measuring variables from another study is called a conceptual replication.
Question 19 options:
True
False
Question 20
When you discuss the extent to which your results would apply to other people or settings, you are concerned with:
Reflection: Assess leadership theories and approaches to support organizational change.
This reflection activity is comprised of two sections, collectively totaling a minimum of 500 words. Complete your reflections by responding to all prompts.
Leadership Styles in Action
Review the reading “A Case of Servant Leadership” in Chapter 8. Compare the servant leadership style to that of the participative and situational leadership styles. Think about a leader you know who embodies one of these leadership styles. Consider his or her actions and impact on people.
How is this leadership style reflected in your leadership assessment?
How could you, as a leader, fulfill this role? What leadership qualities do you need to develop?
High Performance
Recall an experience you’ve had as a member of a high performing team in the workplace.
What steps did that team, or its leadership, take to ensure the team performed well?
Could the team have used any of the strategies discussed in this module’s reading to help improve its performance even more?
Can you think of an experience with a team that did not perform well, and what strategies could it have used to help improve its success?
Assume you have decided to stage a 5K mud run. Mud runs are races through trails, hills, and other assorted obstacles (especially mud). There is no standard course; each event host plans unique and creative obstacles to challenge competitors’ stamina and mental discipline. Further, mud run organizers usually add ancillary events such as awards ceremonies and post-event parties to create an exciting event. Respond to the questions below and outline your event. Use the readings to help you complete the assignment.
Who would be the key stakeholders? What would be the primary purpose of the event?
Identify relevant stakeholders and an appropriate purpose for an event. The stakeholders you choose may be different depending on the type of purpose you have identified.
Assess the event’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (you may have to do some research to complete this task). This is a SWOT analysis.
Identify internal strengths that can be exploited and internal weaknesses that need to be minimized. Opportunities and threats should be mentioned as external factors that can either enhance or endanger the event’s success.
What would be some appropriate goals and objectives for an event such as this?
Goals should be broad and related to the purpose. Objectives should be specific, related to the goal, and quantifiable.
If you were to host an event like this, what would you call it? What would you do to make it unique?
Be creative here. The idea is to create an event that will catch the attention of potential consumers and stand out against the competition.
What could go wrong with this event? What contingency plans would you have to make?
Identify what could go wrong and identify how you could prepare to deal with those contingencies.
use this link https://eds.s.ebscohost.com/eds/detail/detail?vid=… and the article name that the one page paper should be on is Teamwork 9.0: Successful Workgroup Problem Solving Using the Enneagram
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Individual Reflection Report 1 Instructions
Note: Written assignments should be typed in Word, single-spaced, and with 12-point Times
New Roman font and 1 inch margins. Provide your answers in paragraphs, not bullets.
Appropriately cite any readings and external ideas you reference.
Follow the 3 steps below to complete this 1-page report. This report focuses on your team
processes in the Mt. Everest simulation, so work on this AFTER your team has completed
the Everest simulation. Submit individually before the deadline.
FIRST, select 1 external practitioner or academic article on effective teamwork. In choosing
your article, you should use a reputable source (e.g., not a personal blog). Here’s an
example: https://hbr.org/2016/06/the-secrets-of-great-teamwork. Select a different article from
this example. At the end of this page, you will find additional reputable academic and
practitioner outlets.
SECOND, in your report, identify 1 strategy recommended in the article that would have
helped your team processes in the Everest simulation, and answer these questions:
1) What is this strategy? How does it relate to your team processes during the Everest
simulation? How is it similar or different from what your team did in the Everest
simulation?
2) Why would it be effective for your team if you are doing the simulation again? How can
your team implement this strategy? How can you personally do differently?
3) Provide a link to the article or clearly identify its name and the publication outlet.
Example Academic Outlets
•
•
•
•
•
•
Academy of Management Journal
Academy of Management Review
Administrative Science Quarterly
Journal of Applied Psychology
Journal of Management
Personnel Psychology
Example Practitioner Outlets
•
•
•
•
•
•
Harvard Business Review
Forbes
Fortune
Insights by Stanford Business
MIT Sloan
Fast Company
Mitigation for Continuity and Disasters
Extremely fast recovery is expensive, so it is important to
maintain a balance between affordability and desired perfection.
These decisions should never lie within the technology area but
in the functional departments of an organization.
When considering an organization’s requirements, review best
practices regarding threats to continued operations from all
sources. Consider all the critical infrastructures, even
employees’ daily requirements. For example, what would be the
outcome of an Ebola outbreak or a hurricane that destroys
power stations across a significant area?
Figure 9. Common Grouping of Dependencies
The request for Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery from
an organization is likely to be an iterative process, as it seeks
instant resolution for all items. This week, you consider how to
mitigate the risks and that would allow you to establish costs.
An organization is likely to alter its request once specific costs
and implications are updated for the original requests.
To establish costs, you need to consider how you might
overcome significant problems. This course emphasizes the
solutions that exist within information technology. What
solutions might you elect to overcome the various risks? Could
there be ice storms? What is implied? You would ask the same
questions regarding other events caused by nature, or any other
source. A common response would be to build an infrastructure
that could restore operations. These could be centralized and
decentralized. You might need to backup user data from user
computers, and some of these might be located elsewhere. You
also need to consider data volumes and how you can move them
around, including cloud options. How can you restore an
exabyte of data (consider that it is likely to take years for so
much data to be restored)? A few years ago, Amazon offers a
service that would allow you to transfer an exabyte in much less
than 20 years (Amazon Web Services, 2016). There are many
organizations that have a lot more than an exabyte of data.
The assignment for this week requires you to consider potential
technical solutions, approaches such as centralized and
decentralized options, and the need to define the extent of
continuity and recovery. Do you have multiple locations? Would
you need to include workstations? Is there a distributed system
that includes third parties like public cloud computing? Is there
an international element in terms of offices, processing, or
storage?
Review the weekly resources (and previously provided resources,
as needed) to prepare for this week’s assignments. The
resources may include textbook reading assignments, journal
articles, websites, links to tools or software, videos, handouts,
rubrics, etc.
References
Amazon Web Services. (2016). AWS Snowmobile. Retrieved from
https://aws.amazon.com/snowmobile/
Assignment: Explore Mitigation Options for Continuity and Recovery
REFERENCE
•
Tucker, E. (2015). Business continuity from preparedness to
recovery: A standards-based approach. Oxford, UK:
Butterworth-Heinemann.
•
Alqahtani, A., Abhishek, R., Tipper, D., & Medhi, D. (2018).
Disaster recovery power and communications for smart
critical infrastructures…
•
Anderson, S., & Williams, T. (2018). Cybersecurity and
medical devices: Are the ISO/IEC 80001-2-2 technical
controls up to the challenge? Computer…
•
Khan, T., Ghosh, S., Iqbal, M., Ubakanma, G., & Dagiuklas,
T. (2018). Rescue: A resilient cloud based IoT system for
emergency and disaster recovery.
•
Oliveira, D., Crichigno, J., Siasi, N., Bou-Harb, E., & Ghani,
N. (2018). Joint mapping and routing of virtual network
functions for improved…
•
Shahzadi, S., Ubakanma, G., Iqbal, M., & Dagiuklas, T.
(2018). Autonomous, seamless and resilience carrier cloud
brokerage solution for business…
•
Taguchi, Y., & Yoshinaga, T. (2018). System resource
management to control the risk of data-loss in a cloudbased disaster recovery…
•
Instructions
For this assignment, you must write a short report describing the mitigation options for issues
relating to continuity and recovery. Your report should be written to share important insights
with key personnel before meeting to discuss the options. You may fabricate specific
organizational details.
Your technical report should:
1. Include a title page with the name of the organization and a brief introduction stating
the objective.
2. Explain how you would provide key infrastructure that would be relevant to all items.
Among others, include centralized and decentralized solutions, all application data,
user data, and how you should recover the data.
3. Identify the key systems that will allow your selected organization to operate and how
you might achieve the current required protection and restoration. Consider using a
table or a series of numbered bullets, each containing a few short sentences to provide
the detail.
4. Provide a brief conclusion.
Length: 7page technical paper
References: Cite a minimum of 5 recent resources
The completed assignment should demonstrate thoughtful consideration of the ideas and
concepts presented in the course by providing new thoughts and insights relating directly to
this topic. The content should reflect scholarly writing and current APA standards
CR002_BUSM1321Driving Innovation in Organisations_A3_1500 words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency
Reflection
Start Assignment
Due 27 Oct by 23:59
Points 30
Submitting a text entry box or a file upload
Available 17 Jul at 0:00 – 18 Dec at 23:59
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency
Reflection
Type:
Essay
Weighting: 30%
Length:
Report 1,500 words (+/- 10%)
Due date:
Week 14 – 27th October, 23:59 AEST
Overview
In this assessment, students will reflect on their learning by contextualizing it within a real-world
job application. They will identify a current job in the field of innovation, align their course-acquired
skills with the job’s requirements, and strategize how to further develop and demonstrate any
missing competencies.
Learning Outcomes
The targeted Course Learning Outcomes for this assessment are:
CLO2: Critically analyse and synthesise information to foster innovation in organizations.
CLO3: Collaboratively examine organisational problems and opportunities, and suggest
strategies to initiate change and to achieve goals.
CLO4: Undertake reflexive practice regarding behavioural capabilities that support
collaborative work on innovation projects
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：1/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Assessment Details
1. Research:
Start by exploring various job platforms to find a position that resonates with your career
aspirations and aligns with your academic background in innovation.
Recommended platforms include:
LinkedIn
(https://www.linkedin.com/)
Seek
(https://www.seek.com.au/)
Indeed
(https://au.indeed.com/)
Feel free to explore other job search platforms that you’re familiar with or that are
relevant to your geographical or sectoral preferences.
2. Selection Criteria:
Ensure the job is suitable for a graduate student, meaning it should ideally require a
bachelor’s degree (or be in the process of obtaining one) and not demand extensive years
of experience.
The job should be related to the field of innovation, encompassing roles such as innovation
consultant, product developer, R&D specialist, or similar positions.
3. Documentation:
Once you’ve identified a suitable job, document the key details:
Job title
Company name
Job description (a brief summary)
Key responsibilities
Required qualifications and skills
You must include a direct link to the job listing at the beginning of your submission. Ensure
the link is accessible, so avoid links that might require a login or subscription to view.
Note:
While the primary focus is on the field of innovation, you’re encouraged to find a job that not only
fits the criteria but also genuinely interests you. This will make the subsequent sections of the
essay more meaningful and personally relevant.
Demonstrating Competencies for Key Selection Criteria
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：2/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Objective:
To align your academic and professional experiences with the key selection criteria or
competencies outlined in the job listing, demonstrating your suitability and preparedness for the
role.
Instructions:
1. Identification:
Carefully review the job listing to pinpoint the key selection criteria or competencies the
employer is seeking. List these criteria for reference.
2. Reflection and Mapping:
For each identified criterion or competency, reflect on your experiences within this course,
other courses, or any relevant work experiences you’ve had.
3. Articulation
For each competency, provide a brief description of your relevant experience, ensuring you
clearly link the experience to the specific competency. Use concrete examples to
strengthen your claims. Where possible, include any tangible evidence or artifacts (e.g.,
excerpts from your innovation project, feedback received, or other relevant materials) to
further substantiate your assertions.
Note: While it’s essential to showcase your strengths and experiences, ensure your
reflections are genuine and accurate. Authenticity will make your essay more compelling
and credible to potential employers.
Competency Development Plan
Objective:
To identify areas of growth and chart a path forward for personal and professional development in
the field of innovation.
Instructions:
Reflect on the competencies required for the job you’ve identified and pinpoint areas where you
feel you could further develop. For each of these competencies, outline a structured plan detailing
how you might acquire or strengthen them.
Job Acquisition Strategies
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：3/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Objective:
Develop and articulate informal strategies that could enhance your visibility and increase your
chances of securing the identified job.
Instructions:
Reflect on the nature of the job and the company’s profile. What unique approaches might make
you stand out as a candidate for this role? Remember, while formal qualifications and experiences
are crucial, sometimes it’s the informal, proactive, and unique strategies that can set you apart in
the job market.
Note: Your approach should be genuine and tailored to your personal strengths and the specific
nature of the job. Think outside the box and be creative in your strategies.
Presentation
Objective:
To ensure your essay is presented in a clear, coherent, and professional manner.
Instructions:
Review your essay to ensure it’s well-organized and free of grammatical or syntactical errors.
Ensure your arguments and reflections are articulated clearly, concisely, and persuasively.
Use a consistent format and style throughout, ensuring easy readability and a professional
appearance.
4. Referencing & Attribution
Objective:
To give credit to sources of information and ensure academic integrity.
Instructions:
Ensure you appropriately reference any sources you’ve used, including the job listing, course
materials, or external resources.
Adhere to the RMIT Harvard referencing style for all citations.
Maintain a consistent and organized reference list at the end of your essay.
The word limit of the essay is 1,500 words. The essay is due to be submitted on the Friday of
Week 14 before 11.59 pm. Students must adhere to the requirements of assignment submission
as outlined in your course guide.
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：4/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Assessment Criteria
This assessment will measure your ability to:
CLO2: Critically analyse and synthesise information to foster innovation in organizations.
CLO3: Collaboratively examine organisational problems and opportunities, and suggest
strategies to initiate change and to achieve goals.
CLO4: Undertake reflexive practice regarding behavioural capabilities that support
collaborative work on innovation projects
Referencing Guidelines
Use RMIT Harvard
(https://www.rmit.edu.au/library/study/referencing/referencing-guides-for-
printing) referencing style for this assessment.
You must acknowledge all the courses of information you have used in your assessments.
Refer to the RMIT Easy Cite
(https://www.lib.rmit.edu.au/easy-cite/) referencing tool to see
examples and tips on how to reference in the appropriated style. You can also refer to the library
referencing page for more tools such as EndNote, referencing tutorials and referencing guides for
printing.
Academic Integrity and Plagiarism
Academic integrity
(https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/student-essentials/assessment-and-
results/academic-integrity) is about honest presentation of your academic work. It means
acknowledging the work of others while developing your own insights, knowledge and ideas.
You should take extreme care that you have:
Acknowledged words, data, diagrams, models, frameworks and/or ideas of others you have
quoted (i.e. directly copied), summarised, paraphrased, discussed or mentioned in your
assessment through the appropriate referencing methods
Provided a reference list of the publication details so your reader can locate the source if
necessary. This includes material taken from Internet sites
If you do not acknowledge the sources of your material, you may be accused of plagiarism
because you have passed off the work and ideas of another person without appropriate
referencing, as if they were your own.
RMIT University treats plagiarism as a very serious offence constituting misconduct.
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：5/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
2023/10/18 15)26
Plagiarism covers a variety of inappropriate behaviours, including:
Failure to properly document a source
Copyright material from the internet or databases
Collusion between students
For further information on our policies and procedures, please refer to the University website
(https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/student-essentials/assessment-and-results/academic-integrity) .
Assessment Declaration
When you submit work electronically, you agree to the assessment declaration
(https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/student-essentials/assessment-and-results/how-to-submit-yourassessments) .
Assessment 3: Professional Competency Reflection
Criteria
Clear and succinct introduction to the chosen job, its
requirements, and the company
Ratings
2.5 Pts
Excellent
1.5 Pts
Adequate
Pts
0 Pts
No
marks
Effective alignment of course experiences with job
4 Pts
2 Pts
0 Pts
competencies and clear examples provided
Excellent
Adequate
No
marks
Insightful reflection on one’s contributions, choices, and
4 Pts
2 Pts
0 Pts
experiences in team projects
Excellent
Adequate
No
marks
Clear connection between course ideas and their application
4 Pts
2 Pts
0 Pts
or relevance to the chosen job or past projects
Excellent
Adequate
No
marks
Thoughtful strategies for personal and professional growth in
areas of identified need.
4 Pts
2 Pts
0 Pts
Excellent
Adequate
No
marks
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
2.5 pts
4 pts
4 pts
4 pts
4 pts
⻚页码：6/7
Assessment Task 3: Professional Competency Reflection
Innovative and actionable strategies to enhance job
acquisition chances.
2023/10/18 15)26
4 Pts
Excellent
2 Pts
Adequate
0 Pts
No
marks
Well-organized, clear, and persuasive articulation.
2.5 Pts
Excellent
1.5 Pts
Adequate
0 Pts
No
marks
Error-free and professional language use.
2.5 Pts
1.5 Pts
0 Pts
Excellent
Adequate
No
marks
Proper citation of sources, including job listings and course
2.5 Pts
1.5 Pts
0 Pts
materials, using RMIT’s recommended Harvard style where
Excellent
Adequate
No
appropriate.
marks
4 pts
2.5 pts
2.5 pts
2.5 pts
Total points: 30
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109371/assignments/859120
⻚页码：7/7
Investments come with different levels of potential risk and return. Generally, most investors are only willing to take a higher risk if there is a potential for higher financial returns. An asset’s return is a key variable in the investment decision because it indicates how rapidly an investor can build wealth. In this discussion, we will explore the relationship between risk and reward.
Explain the relationship between risk and return in investment.
Describe how you can maximize your investment return with less risk.
Explain two key sources of risk that might affect potential investments.
Investors benefit from holding portfolios of securities rather than just one or two investments. Without necessarily sacrificing returns, investors who hold portfolios can reduce risk.
Explain two key benefits that international diversification can offer the individual investor.
Describe the difference between a growth-oriented portfolio and an income-oriented portfolio.
Explain one technique used to evaluate the financial assets of an investment.
Explain why a model portfolio of investments should include stocks, bonds, mutual funds, options, and futures contracts.
For this assignment, pick a health care organization of your choice. It could be a hospital, large clinic, or care facility.
Read these articles before you begin the assignment:
The COSO Framework in Emerging Technology Environments: An Effective In-Class Exercise on Internal Control. Journal of Emerging Technologies in Accounting.
COSO Internal Control – Integrated Framework: An Implementation Guide for the Healthcare Provider IndustryLinks to an external site..
Instructions
Write a 4-5-page paper in which you:
Identify at least three of the five different 2013 framework elements that focus on internal control. Make sure that elements connected are related to financial reporting of the organization. Provide your rationale on the reasoning that the selected elements are tied to the financial reporting process in the organization. These are located in Chapter 3 in your textbook.
Design a method in AIS where it can be integrated in the health care industry that will improve the efficiency of its operations.
Design a method in AIS where it can be integrated in the health care industry that will improve the communication of the chosen health care organization.
Draft a one-page recommendation at the end of the document directed to the CEO explaining the findings, recommendations, and benefits of installing an accounting information system. Make sure you are specific in your recommendations.
Use at least 3 quality resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar websites do not qualify as quality resources.
This course requires the use of Strayer Writing Standards (SWS). The library is your home for SWS assistance, including citations and formatting. Please refer to the Library site for all supports. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
The specific course learning outcome associated with this assignment is:
Establish the proper control environment to oversee and control processes using an accounting information system.
Instructions: Please Read them carefully
-No Plagiarism , No Matching will be acceptable .clear and presented using APA
Style Reference
-All answers must be typed using Times New Roman ( Size12 , Double-space)font
.
-No pictures containing text will be acceptable and will be considered plagiarism.
– proper examples and explanations for each questions.
– No short answer as it’s not acceptable for this assignment
– the reference must be 4 and more.
– the answer should be sufficient
-Please read and follow the instructions in the attached file.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission
making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a
developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of
each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company,
Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was
money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving
on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts
chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale
food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my
grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions
being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the
obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew
ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people
reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was
able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into.
We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So,
when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw
how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky
Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I
didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought
we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first
store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name
after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the
lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to
AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone
in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been
a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity.
We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through
as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with
electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our
objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices
in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying
our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores.
When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20%
on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80%
of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful.
Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does
AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the
company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss
briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
ANSWERS:
Research Paper #1 – The Public Relations Department (100 points) ~ Due Tuesday, Week 2
How should a public relations department ideally be set up? What functions are required? How does it differ from marketing, journalism, and advertising? Using your textbook, the online course modules, conference topics, and any appropriate outside resources, write six-page paper (double-spaced) based on the following scenario.
Scenario
You work for a small company in Bellingham, Wash., that expanded quickly after developing transportation management system software for ferry operators. It now services light fleet managers and urban mobility solution providers. Your goal is to work in public relations at a big firm one day, but you’re still a student at UMGC. Nevertheless, when the company’s COO announces plans to add a public relations person to the staff, you decide to apply for the job.
This is the first time the COO has considered expanding the staff to include a public relations function. Up until now, he has seen no need for it. However, the company has recently won a number of awards for its inventory management software. It is trying to secure local government contracts in competition with Axopjn, Descartes, Onfleet, and Salesforce, to name a few.
The COO has the idea that the new public relations person will write two to four press releases per week and send them to local newspapers and broadcasters, business reporters, and technology writers. He believes those should set the record straight. He’s looking for someone with strong writing skills. He tells you that he plans to hire a journalist or an advertising professional because those people have the same skills that a public relations technician needs, and he figures there’s no such thing as a “true public relations professional.”
When there are no news releases to write, the new staffer will work on marketing the company’s software and wrap-around services. The job title will be “public relations writer,” and the new employee will report to the COO’s assistant, who also serves as the company’s office manager.
The COO is surprised to discover how much you have already learned from JOUR 330 and decides to consider you for the job, even though you do not yet have a college degree.
He says all he wants is someone to write press releases and get marketing information out to the public, so therefore a degree is not essential.
Is the COO on the right track for the job search? Your response should address:
The job the COO plans to assign to the new public relations person, compared with the role of the public relations practitioner at firms that use that talent most effectively.
The supervisor and job title of the public relations practitioner. Discuss the rank of the person in the eyes of this COO compared with the actual practice in the field.
The education and experience requirements for the new job and of the candidates being considered. Be clear about the differences among communications jobs.
The COO’s plan to have the new person write press releases and marketing material. What is this kind of communication called? What’s missing?
Your recommendations to the COO. Make them at the expense of losing the job yourself. Comment on the parameters of the job, the ideal job candidate, the job description, and the work the new staffer will do.
This assignment can be in the form of the actual letter, a detailed outline of what would be said in a letter you would propose to write, or some combination of the two. Neither format carries more weight than the other, but the questions above should be answered in either format. Also, if you only submit an outline — be sure it is clear phrases or sentences, not just lists of words. “Etc.” is NOT an answer. Don’t assume the instructor knows what you are thinking.
Write and edit carefully; excellent style, grammar, and mechanics are absolutely essential to the PR practitioner. Consult the library’s digital copy of the official Associated Press Stylebook for guidance.
This assignment is worth 100 points toward your final grade.
Hide Rubrics
Rubric Name: 2023 Copy of Research Paper #1 – The Public Relations Department
Print
Criterion 1 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
States a thesis or draws a conclusion about whether the COO of the hypothetical firm is on the right track with his hiring plan.
Score of States a thesis or draws a conclusion about whether the COO of the hypothetical firm is on the right track with his hiring plan.,
/ 10
Criterion 2 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Compares the job that the COO plans to assign to the new public relations person, with the role of the public relations practitioner at firms that use that talent most effectively.
Score of Compares the job that the COO plans to assign to the new public relations person, with the role of the public relations practitioner at firms that use that talent most effectively.,
/ 10
Criterion 3 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Addresses the supervisor and job title of the public relations practitioner. Discusses the rank of the new person in the eyes of this management executive compared with the actual practice in the field.
Score of Addresses the supervisor and job title of the public relations practitioner. Discusses the rank of the new person in the eyes of this management executive compared with the actual practice in the field.,
/ 10
Criterion 4 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Explains the education and experience requirements needed for the new job and by the candidates being considered. Clearly describes the differences among communications jobs.
Score of Explains the education and experience requirements needed for the new job and by the candidates being considered. Clearly describes the differences among communications jobs.,
/ 10
Criterion 5 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Assesses the COO’s plan to have the new person write press releases and marketing material. Explains what this kind of communication is called. Accurately describes what’s missing from the plan.
Score of Assesses the COO’s plan to have the new person write press releases and marketing material. Explains what this kind of communication is called. Accurately describes what’s missing from the plan.,
/ 10
Criterion 6 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Makes recommendations to the COO that explain the appropriate parameters of the job, the ideal job candidate, the job description, and the work the new staffer will do.
Score of Makes recommendations to the COO that explain the appropriate parameters of the job, the ideal job candidate, the job description, and the work the new staffer will do.,
/ 10
Criterion 7 Exceeds Standards
20 points
Meets Standards
17 points
Needs Improvement
13 points
Does Not Meet Standards
10 points
Criterion Score
Writing is clear and fluidly organized, with proper spelling, punctuation, grammar, and syntax.
Score of Writing is clear and fluidly organized, with proper spelling, punctuation, grammar, and syntax.,
/ 20
Criterion 8 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Writer supports analysis with credible sources that are properly documented with in-text citations and end-of-text references according to American Psychological Style rules.
Score of Writer supports analysis with credible sources that are properly documented with in-text citations and end-of-text references according to American Psychological Style rules.,
/ 10
Criterion 9 Exceeds Standards
10 points
Meets Standards
8.5 points
Needs Improvement
6.5 points
Does Not Meet Standards
5 points
Criterion Score
Meets minimum page length (4-6 pages).
Score of Meets minimum page length (4-6 pages).,
/ 10
TotalScore of 2023 Copy of Research Paper #1 – The Public Relations Department,
Full information inside the file· The solution is in the same fileI want your solution to be in the same file that I sentPlease solve with the same file without deleting anything from the filePlease put the reference
Unformatted Attachment Preview
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
Form Number 3 – PERIODIC REPORT
Start Date:
Student’s Name:
Internship Student Report | Month 1
/ / 2023
End Date:
Mohammed Alnassar
Training Organization:
General Authority of Civil
/
/ 2023
Student’s ID Number: S190117024
Trainee Department: Quality& Passenger
Aviation
Experience
Trainee Supervisor Name: Mohammed Alqhtani
Faculty Member: Dr. Ahmed Almamy
Course: MGT 430
CRN: 12009
Academic Year/Semester: 1st semester 2023 / 2024
(Instructions)
⮚ This report must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.
⮚ Email submission will not be accepted.
⮚ Your work should be clearly and completely presented; marks may be reduced for poor
presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
⮚ Assignment will be evaluated through BB Safe Assign tool.
⮚ Late submission will result in ZERO marks being awarded.
⮚ This work should be your own, copying from students or other resources will result in ZERO
marks.
⮚ Use Times New Roman font 12 for all your answers.
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
(Report Components)
What are the activities and tasks given to you during this
month?
Task(s)
What skills did you learn through the month?
New skill(s)
How many meetings did you attend?
Meeting(s)
What are the difficulties you had this month?
Difficulty/ Challenge(s)
How did you overcome these difficulties?
Difficulty/ Challenge(s)
What did you learn from completing the tasks
Learning
College of Administration and Finance Sciences
What did you want to learn more?
*Note:
1. This report is a summary of the training activities performed.
2. You may attach additional pages if needed. And students can attach any extra note to this form.
Name:
Signature: ___________________________
Do the 5. 6. One and half or two pages. We choose the ” ientils “. The data need to find in online.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Paper Formatting Instructions for Case Report
Barry E. Prentice, University of Manitoba
Abstract
This is a short summary of the topic and key issues or conclusions in about 150 words.
Introduction
The instructions for formatting papers are designed to give a uniform look to the case study reports. You
can use this document as the basis to create your paper in Microsoft Word.
Format Directions
Paper Size
8.5 x 11 (21.59cm x 27.94cm)
1” (2.54 cm)
1” (2.54 cm)
Bottom 1” (2.54 cm)
Right 1” (2.54 cm)
Margins
Top
Left
Footer
0.5” (1.24cm) from the bottom edge of paper
Header
0.5” (1.24 cm) for header
Paper title
As illustrated above, Capitalize the First Letter of the Important Words,
BOLD, 12pt Times New Roman, centred.
Author Names
Centred under the title. Name and course number only. 11pt Times New Roman,
as above.
Layout
Portrait only
Font
11 pt. Times New Roman (full justification)
Page #
Centred at the bottom of each page (11 pt. font)
Title Line
Begin on the first page after 2 ‘single spaced’ returns as in the example above
Footnotes
No footnotes
Endnotes
9 pt. font
Paper Length
Maximum 12 pages including text, tables, graphics, references and endnotes, plus
up to 5 pages of appendices.
Page Width
No ‘colouring outside the lines! Figures and tables must fit within the given
margins of the page.
References
The references list should only contain references cited in the text. Reference style
is APA – see examples at the end.
1
Graphics
Colour pictures and graphs should be saved in “gray scale” rather than left in colour
unless the paper is submitted in colour. To change a picture to greyscale within
Word, click on the picture and “Picture Tools Format” will appear at the top.
Compare the appearance of these two pictures. Figure 1 was a colour picture
printed in black and white, while Figure 2 was converted first to grayscale.
Figure 1 Colour picture printed in black and white
Figure 2 Colour picture converted to gray scale
References
AAFC. (2022a) Statistical Overview of the Canadian Fruit Industry 2021. Crops and Horticulture
Division, Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada.
https://agriculture.canada.ca/en/sector/horticulture/reports/statistical-overview-canadian-fruitindustry-2021 Accessed June 1, 2023.
Neal, Craig and Tay Koo. (2020) “Demand for cargo airships: An analysis of mode choice decision
making in the freight transport industry.” Journal of Air Transport Management. Volume 83,
March 2020. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jairtraman.2019.101741
Smith, Alisa and J.B. MacKinnon. (2007) The 100-Mile Diet: A Year of Local Eating. Toronto: Ontario,
Random House of Canada Ltd.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Table 1 Guidelines for effective presentations
DO
DON’T
use the presentation as a chance to emphasize
× don’t merely read passages from the paper
the highlights of the paper
practice your presentation to ensure you’ll be
× don’t ignore the 2-minute warning from the
within your allotted time
Chair
use colours that contrast well (e.g. yellow print
× don’t use multiple projection methods for the
on a dark blue background)
presentation – this is often distracting
keep slides very simple – they should amplify a
× don’t extract tables or figures directly from the
message, not convey it – try to stay under 30
paper (almost always need to simplify and
words
enlarge)
use a large, bold font in both upper & lower
× don’t use slides merely to present passages of
case. Enlarge text to fill the slide’s window
text
2
Write a concise annotation that summarizes the central theme and scope of ONE of the articles provided each week. Please include the reference at the top of the page of your article summary. Include one or more sentences for each of the following and separate your responses using the title headings listed below:Title of the article (5%)Purpose of the article (20%)Important findings of the article (25%)What you found most interesting (25%)How you will use this information in the future (25%)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
A Generic Concept of Marketing
Philip Kotler
Journal of Marketing, Vol. 36, No. 2. (Apr., 1972), pp. 46-54.
Stable URL:
http://links.jstor.org/sici?sici=0022-2429%28197204%2936%3A2%3C46%3AAGCOM%3E2.0.CO%3B2-Q
Journal of Marketing is currently published by American Marketing Association.
Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of JSTOR’s Terms and Conditions of Use, available at
http://www.jstor.org/about/terms.html. JSTOR’s Terms and Conditions of Use provides, in part, that unless you have obtained
prior permission, you may not download an entire issue of a journal or multiple copies of articles, and you may use content in
the JSTOR archive only for your personal, non-commercial use.
Please contact the publisher regarding any further use of this work. Publisher contact information may be obtained at
http://www.jstor.org/journals/ama.html.
Each copy of any part of a JSTOR transmission must contain the same copyright notice that appears on the screen or printed
page of such transmission.
The JSTOR Archive is a trusted digital repository providing for long-term preservation and access to leading academic
journals and scholarly literature from around the world. The Archive is supported by libraries, scholarly societies, publishers,
and foundations. It is an initiative of JSTOR, a not-for-profit organization with a mission to help the scholarly community take
advantage of advances in technology. For more information regarding JSTOR, please contact support@jstor.org.
http://www.jstor.org
Wed Jul 25 16:30:21 2007
A Generic Concept
PHlLlP KOTLER
The proposal that marketing is relevant
to all organizations having customer
groups was advanced in the January, 1969
issue of this journal.
It is now stated that the original broadening
proposal should be broadened still further
to include the transactions between an
organization and all of its publics. The author sees marketing as the disciplined task
of creating and offering values to others for
the purpose of achieving a desired response.
The generic view of marketing is defined
by a set of four axioms and leads to new
marketing typologies and views of the
tasks of marketing management.
ABOUT THE AUTHOR.
Philip Kotler is A. Montgomery Ward Professor of
Marketing at the Graduate School of Management,
Northwestern University, Evanston, Illinois.
Journal of Marketing, Vol. 36 (April, 19721, pp. 46-54.
0NE
of the signs of the health of a discipline is its
willingness to reexamine its focus, techniques, and
goals as the surrounding society changes and new problems require attention. Marketing has shown this aptitude in the past. It was originally founded as a branch
of applied economics devoted t o the study of distribution channels. Later marketing became a management
discipline devoted to engineering increases in sales.
More recently, i t has taken on the character of an applied behavioral science that is concerned with understanding buyer and seller systems involved in the marketing of goods and services.
The focus of marketing has correspondingly shifted
over the years. Marketing evolved through a commodity
focus (farm products, minerals, manufactured goods,
services) ; an institutional focus (producers, wholesalers,
retailers, agents) ; a functional focus (buying, selling,
promoting, transporting, storing, pricing) ; a managerial focus (analysis, planning, organization, control) ;
and a social focus (market efficiency, product quality,
and social impact). Each new focus had its advocates
and its critics. Marketing emerged each time with a
refreshed and expanded self-concept.
Today marketing is facing a new challenge concerning
whether its concepts apply in the nonbusiness as well as
the business area. I n 1969, this author and Professor
Levy advanced the view that marketing is a relevant
discipline for all organizations insofar as all organizations can be said to have customers and pr0ducts.l This
“broadening of the concept of marketing” proposal received much attention, and the 1970 Fall Conference of
the American Marketing Association was devoted to
this theme.
Critics soon appeared who warned that the broadening
concept could divert marketing from its true purposes
and dilute its content. One critic did not deny that
marketing concepts and tools could be useful in fund
raising, museum membership drives, and presidential
campaigns, but he felt that these were extracurricular
applications of an intrinsical business technology.2
‘Philip Kotler and Sidney J. Levy, “Broadening the Concept of Marketing,” JOURNAL 01″ MARKETING,
V01. 33
(January, 1969), pp. 10-15.
*David Luck, “Broadening the Concept of MarketingTOOFar, ” JOURNAL O P MARKETING, V O ~33
. (July, 1969),
pp. 53-54.
A Generic Concept of Marketing
Several articles have been published which describe
applications of marketing ideas to nonbusiness areas
such as health services, population control, recycling of
solid wastes, and fund raising.3 Therefore, the underlying issues should be reexamined to see whether a more
generic concept of marketing can be established. This
author concludes that the traditional conception of marketing would relegate this discipline to an increasingly
narrow and pedestrian role in a society that is growing
increasingly post-industrial. I n fact, this article will
argue that the broadening proposal’s main weakness was
not that it went too f a r but that it did not go far
enough.
This article is organized into five parts. The first distinguishes three stages of consciousness regarding the
scope of marketing. The second presents an axiomatic
treatment of the generic concept of marketing. The
third suggests three useful marketing typologies that
are implied by the generic concept of marketing. The
fourth describes the basic analytical, planning, organization, and control tasks that make u p the logic of
marketing management. The fifth discusses some interesting questions raised about the generic concept of
marketing.
Three Stages of Marketing Consciousness
Three different levels of consciousness can be distinguished regarding the boundaries of marketing. The
,present framework utilizes Reich’s consciousness categories without his specific meanings.4 The traditional
consciousness, that marketing is essentially a business
subject, will be called consciousness one. Consciousness
one is the most widely held view in the mind of practitioners and the public. I n the last few years, a marketing consciousness two has appeared among some marketers holding that marketing is appropriate for all organizations that have customers. This is the thrust of
the original broadening proposal and seems to be gaining adherents. Now it can be argued that even consciousness two expresses a limited concept of marketing.
One can propose consciousness three that holds that marketing is a relevant subject for all organizations in their
relations with all their publics, not only customers. The
future character of marketing will depend on the particular consciousness that most marketers adopt regarding the nature of their field.
Consciousness One
Consciousness one is the conception that marketing is
essentially a business subject. It maintains that marketing is concerned with sellers, buyers, and Neconomic”
products and services. The sellers offer goods and services, the buyers have purchasing power and other resources, and the objective is an exchange of goods for
money or other resources.
The core concept defining marketing consciousness one
a J O I J R N A L O F MARKETING, V01. 35
(July, 1971).
4Charles A. Reich, The Greening of America (New York:
Random House, 1970).
Organisath
Product
Customer C7011p
Museum
National Safety
Council
Political
candidate
Family Planning
Foundation
Police
department
Church
University
Cultural appreciation
Safer driving
Driving public
Honest government
Voting public
Birth control
Fertile public
Safety
General public
Religious experience
Education
Church members
Students
General public
is that of market transactions. A market transaction
involves the transfer of ownership or use of an economic good or service from one party to another in
return for a payment of some kind. For market transactions to occur in a society, six conditions are necessary: (1) Two or more parties; (2) a scarcity of
goods ; (3) concept of private property; (4) one party
must want a good held by another; (5) the “wanting”
party must be able to offer some kind o{ payment for
i t ; and (6) the “owning” party must be willing to
forego the good for the payment. These conditions
underlie the notion of a market transaction, or more
loosely, economic exchange.
Market transactions can be contrasted with nonmarket
transactions. Nonmarket transactions also involve a
transfer of resources from one party to another, but
without clear payment by the other. Giving gifts, paying taxes, receiving free services are all examples of
nonmarket transactions. If a housekeeper is paid for
domestic services, this is a market transaction; if she is
one’s wife, this is a nonmarket transaction. Consciousness one marketers pay little or no attention to nonmarket transactions because they lack the element of
explicit payment.
Consciousness Two
Consciousness two marketers do not see payment as
a necessary condition to define the domain of marketing
phenomena. Marketing analysis and planning are relevant in all organizations producing products and services for an intended consuming group, whether or not
payment is required.
Table 1 lists several nonbusiness organizations and
their “products” and “customer groups.” All of these
products, in principle, can be priced and sold. A price
can be charged for museum attendance, safe driving
lessons, birth control information, and education. The
fact that many of these services are offered “free” should
not detract from their character as products. A product
is something that has value to someone. Whether a
charge is made for its consumption is an incidental
rather than essential feature defining value. I n fact,
most of these social goods are “priced,” although often
Journal of Marketing, April, 1972
not in the normal fashion. Police services are paid f o r
by taxes, and religious services are paid f o r by donations.
Each of these organizations faces marketing problems
with respect to its product and customer group. They
must study the size and composition of their market and
consumer wants, attitudes, and habits. They must design
their products to appeal to their target markets. They
must develop distribution and communication prograins
that facilitate “purchase” and satisfaction. They must
develop customer feedback systems to ascertain market
satisfaction and needs.
Thus consciousness two replaces the core concept of
market transactions with the broader concept of organization-client transactions. Marketing is no longer restricted only to transactions involving parties in a twoway exchange of economic resources. Marketing is a
useful perspective f o r any organization producing products f o r intended consumption by others. Marketing
consciousness two states that marketing is relevant in
all situations where one can identify an organization, a
client group, and products broadly defined.
Consciousness Three
The emergence of a marketing consciousness three is
barely visible. Consciousness three marketers do not
see why marketing technology should be confined only
to an organization’s transactions with its client group.
A n organization-or
inore properly its managementmay engage in marketing activity not only with its customers but also with all other publics in its environment.
A management group has to market to the organization’s
supporters, suppliers, employees, government, the general public, agents, and other key publics. Marketing
consciousness three states that marketing applies to an
organization’s attempts to relate to all of its publics,
not just its consuming public. Marketing can be used
in multiple institutional contexts to effect transactions
with multiple targeta.
Marketing consciousness three is often expressed in
real situations. One often hears a marketer say that
his real problem is not outside marketing but inside
marketing; for example, getting others in his organization to accept his ideas. Companies seeking a preferred
position with suppliers or dealers see this as a problem
of marketing themselves. I n addition, companies try to
market their viewpoint to congressmen in Washington.
These and many other examples suggest that marketers
see the marketing problem as extending f a r beyond
customer groups.
The concept of defining marketing in terms of function rather than structure underlies consciousness three.
To define a field in terms of function is to see it as a
process o r set of activities. To define a field in ternis
of structure is to identify i t with some phenomena such
as a set of institutions. Bliss pointed out that many
sciences are facing this ~ h o i c e .I~n the field of political
5Perry Bliss, Marketing Management and the Behavioral
Environment (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall,
Ine., 1970), pp. 106-108, 119-120.
science, f o r example, there are those who adopt a struetural view and define political science in terms of political institutions such as legislatures, government agencies,
judicial courts, and political parties. There are others
who adopt a functional view and define political science
as the study of power wherever it is found. The latter
political scientists study power in the family, in labormanagement relations, and in corporate organizations.
Similarly, marketing can be defined in terms of functional rather than structural considerations. Marketing
takes places in a great number of situations, including
executive recruiting, political_campaigning, church membership drives, and lobbying. Examining the marketing
aspects of these situations can yield new insights into
the generic nature of marketing. The payoff may be
higher than from continued concentration in one type
of structural setting, that of business.
I t is generally a mistake to equate a science with a
certain phenomenon. F o r example, the subject of matter does not belong exclusively to physics, chemistry, o r
biology. Rather physics, chemistry, and biology are
logical systems that pose different questions about matter. Nor does human nature belong exclusively to psychology, sociology, social psychology, o r anthropology.
These sciences simply raise different questions about the
same phenomena. Similarly, traditional business subjects should not be defined by institutional characteristics. This would mean that finance deals with banks,
production with factories, and marketing with distribution channels. Yet each of these subjects has a set of
core ideas that are applicable in multiple institutional
contexts. An important means of achieving progress
in a science is to try to increase the generality of its
concepts.
Consider the case of a hospital as an institution. A
production-minded person will want to know about the
locations of the various facilities, the jobs of the various
personnel, and in general the arrangement of the elements to produce the product known as health care. A
financial-minded person will want t o know the hospital’s
sources and applications of funds and its income and
expenses. A marketing-minded person will want to know
where the patients come from, why they appeared a t
this particular hospital, and how they feel about the
hospital care and services. Thus the phenomena do not
create the questions to be asked; rather the questions are
suggested by the disciplined view brought to the phenomena.
What then is the disciplinary focus of marketing? The
core concept of marketing is the transaction. A transaction is the exchange of values between two parties. The
things-of-values need not be limited to goods, services,
and money; they include other resources such as time,
energy, and feelings. Transactions occur not only between buyers and sellers, and organizations and clients,
but also between any two parties. A transaction takes
place, f o r example, when a person decides to watch a
television program; he is exchanging his time for entertainment. A transaction takes place when a person
A Generic Concept of Marketing
votes for a particular candidate; he is exchanging his
time and support for expectations of better government.
A transaction takes place when a person gives money
to a charity; he is exchanging money for a good conscience. Marketing is specifically concerned with how
transactions are created, stimulated, facilitated, and
valued. This is the generic concept of marketing.
The Axioms of Marketing
The generic concept of marketing will now be more
rigorously developed. Marketing can be viewed as a
category of human action distinguishable from other
categories of human action such as voting, loving, consuming, or fighting. As a category of human action, it
has certain characteristics which can be stated in the
form of axioms. A sufficient set of axioms about marketing would provide unambiguous criteria about what
marketing is, and what i t is not. Four axioms, along
with corollaries, are proposed in the following section.
Axiom 1. Marketing involves two or more social units,
each consisting of one or more human actors.
Corollary 1.1. The social units may be individuals,
groups, organizations, communities, or nations.
Two important things follow from this axiom. First,
marketing is not an activity found outside of the human
species. Animals, for example, engage in production
and consumption, but do not engage in marketing. They
do not exchange goods, set u p distribution systems, and
engage in persuasive activity. Marketing is a peculiarly human activity.
Second, the referent of marketing activity is another
social unit. Marketing does not apply when a person
is engaged in an activity in reference to a thing or
himself. Eating, driving, and manufacturing are not
marketing activities, as they involve the person in an
interactive relationship primarily with things. Jogging,
sleeping, and daydreaming are not marketing activities,
as they involve the person in an interactive relationship
primarily with himself. An interesting question does
arise as to whether a person can be conceived of marketing something to himself, as when he undertakes
effort to change his own behavior. Normally, however,
marketing involves actions by a person directed toward
one or more other persons.
Axiom 2. At least one of the social units is seeking a
specific response from one or more other units concerning some social object.
Corollary 2.1. The social unit seeking the response is
called the marketer, and the social unit whose
response is sought is called the market.
Corollary 2.2. The social object may be a product, service, organization, person, place, or idea.
Corollary 2.3. The response sought from the market
is some behavior toward the social object, usually
acceptance but conceivably avoidance. (More specific descriptions of responses sought are purchase, adoption, usage, consumption, or their
negatives. Those who do or may respond are
called buyers, adopters, users, consumers, clients,
or supporters.)
Corollary 2.4. The marketer is normally aware that
he is seeking the specific response.
Corollary 2.5. The response sought may be expected
in the short or long run.
Corollary 2.6. The response has value to the marketer.
Corollary 2.7. Mutual marketing describes the case
where two social units simultaneously seek a response from each other. Mutual marketing is the
core situation underlying bargaining relationships.
Marketing consists of actions undertaken by persons
to bring about a response in other persons concerning
some specific social object. A social object is any entity
or artifact found in society, such as a product, service,
organization, person, place, or idea. The marketer
normally seeks to influence the market to accept this
social object. The notion of marketing also covers attempts to influence persons to avoid the object, as in a
business effort to discourage excess demand or in a
social campaign designed to influence people to stop
smoking or overeating.6 The marketer is basically trying to shape the level and composition of demand for
his product. The marketer undertakes these influence
actions because he values their consequences. The market may also value the consequences, but this is not a
necessary condition for defining the occurrence of marketing activity. The marketer is normally conscious
that he is attempting to influence a market, but it is
also possible to interpret as marketing activity cases
where the marketer is not fully conscious of his ends and
means.
Axiom 2 implies that “selling” activity rather than
“buying” activity is closer to the core meaning of marketing. The merchant who assembles goods for the purpose of selling them is engaging in marketing, insofar
as he is seeking a purchase response from others The
buyer who comes into his store and pays the quoted
price is engaging in buying, not marketing, in that he
does not seek to produce a specific response in the seller,
who has already put the goods up for sale. If the
buyer decides to bargain with the seller over the terms,
he too is involved in marketing, or if the seller had been
reluctant to sell, the buyer has to market himself as an
attractive buyer. The terms “buyer” and “seller” are
not perfectly indicative of whether one, or both, of the
parties are engaged in marketing activity.
Axiom 3. The market’s response probability is not fixed.
Corollary 3.1. The probability that the market will
produce the desired response is called the market’s
response probability.
Corollary 3.2. The market’s response probability is
greater than zero; that is, the market is capable
of producing the desired response.
Corollary 3.3. The market’s response probability is
less than one; that is, the market is not internally
compelled to produce the desired response.
69ee Philip Kotler and Sidney J. Levy, “Demarketing,
Yes, Demarketing,” Harvard Business Review, Vol. 49
(November-December, 1971), pp. 71-80.
Journal of Marketing, April, 1972
Corollary 3.4. The market’s response probability can
be altered by marketer actions.
Marketing activity makes sense in the wntext of a
market that is free and capable of yielding the desired
response. If the target social unit cannot respond to
the social object, as in the case of no interest o r no
resources, i t is not a market. I f the target social unit
must respond to the social object, as in the case of
addiction o r perfect brand loyalty, that unit is a market
but there is little need f o r marketing activity. I n cases
where the market’s response probability is fixed in the
short r u n but variable in the long run, the marketer may
undertake marketing activity to prevent o r reduce the
erosion in the response probability. Normally, marketing activity is most relevant where the market’s response
probability is less than one and highly influenced by
marketer actions.
Axiom 4. Marketing is the attempt to produce the desired response by creating and ojfering values to
the market.
Corollary 4.1. The marketer assunles that the market’s
response will be voluntary.
Corollary 4.2. The essential activity of marketing is
the creation and offering of value. Value is
defined subjectively from the market’s point of
view.
Corollary 4.3. The marketer creates and offers value
mainly through configuration, valuation, symbolization, and facilitation. (Configuration is the
act of designing the social object. Valuation is
concerned with placing terms of exchange on the
object. Symbolization is the association of meanitigs with the object. Facilitation consists of
altering the accessibility of the object.)
Corollary 4.4. Efective marketing means the choice
of marketer actions that are calculated to produce the desired response in the market. Efficient
marketing means the choice of least cost marketer
actions that will produce the desired response.
Marketing is an approach to producing desired responses in another party that lies midway between coercion on the one hand and brainwmhing on the other.
Coercion involves the attempt to produce a response
in another by forcing or threatening him with agentinflicted pain. Agent-inflicted pain should be distinguished from object-inflicted pain in that the latter may
be used by a marketer as when he symbolizes something
such as cigarettes as potentially harmful to the smoker.
The use of agent-inflicted pain is normally not a marketing solution t o a response problem. This is not to
deny that marketers occasionally resort to arranging a
“package of threats” to get o r keep a customer. F o r
example, a company may threaten to discontinue purchasing from another company if the latter failed to
behave in a certain way. But normally, marketing consists of noncoercive actions to induce a response in
another.
Brainwashing lies a t the other extreme and involves
the attempt to produce a response in another by pro-
foundly altering his basic beliefs and values. Instead of
trying to persuade a person to see the social object as
serving his existing values and interests, the agent tries
to shift the subject’s values in the direction of the social
object. Brainwashing, fortunately, is a very difficult
feat to accomplish. It requires a monopoly of communication channels, operant conditioning, and much patience. Short of pure brainwashing efforts are attempts
by various agents to change people’s basic values in connection with such issues as racial prejudice, birth control, and private property. Marketing has some useful
insights to offer to agents seeking to produce basic
changes in people, although its main focus is on creating
products and messages attuned t o existing attitudes and
values. I t places more emphasis on preference engineering than attitude conditioning, although the latter
is not excluded.
The core wncern of marketing is that of producing
desired responses in free individuals by the judicious
creation and offering of values. The marketer is attempting to get value from the market through offering
value to it. The marketer’s problem is to create attractive values. Value is completely subjective and exists
in the eyes of the beholding market. Marketers must
understand the market in order to be effective in creating value. This is the essential meaning of the marketing concept.
The marketer seeks to create value in four ways. H e
can try to design the social object more attractively (configuration) ; he can put an attractive terms on the social
object (valuation) ; he can add symbolic significance in
the social object (symbolization) ; and he can make it
easier f o r the market to obtain the social object (facilitation). H e may use these activities in reverse if he
wants the social object to be avoided. These four activities have a rough correspondence to more conventional statements of marketing purpose, such as the use
of product, price, promotion, and place to stimulate
exchange.
The layman who thinks about marketing often overidentifies it with one o r two major component activities,
such as facilitation o r symbolization. I n scarcity economies, marketing is often identified with the facilitation
function. Marketing is the problem of getting scarce
goods to a marketplace. There is little concern with
configuration and symbolization. I n affluent economies,
marketing is often identified with the symbolization
function. I n the popular mind, marketing is seen as
the task of encoding persuasive messages to get people
to buy more goods. Since most people resent persuasion attempts, marketing has picked u p a negative
image in the minds of many people. They forget or
overlook the marketing work involved in creating values
through configuration, valuation, and facilitation. I n
the future post-industrial society concern over the quality of life becomes paramount, and the public understanding of marketing is likely to undergo further
change, hopefully toward an appreciation of all of its
functions to create and offer value.
51
A Generic Concept of Marketing
General P u b l i c
Support
Publics
U
al
m
0
4
M
0
r(
a
1
I3nployee
Publics
—
.
*
ORGANIZATION
.-I
* Agent
Publics
A
Consumer
Publics
m
a
0
4
4
0
rl
a
a
7
a
7
&
m
ch
(3
Publics
Competitor P u b l i c s
Typologies of Marketing
The new levels of marketing consciousness make it
desirable to reexamine traditional classifications of marketing activity. Marketing practitioners normally describe their type of marketing according tb the target
market or product. A target-market classification of
marketing activity consists of consumer marketing, industrial marketing, government marketing, and international marketing.
A product classification consists of durable goods
marketing, nondurable goods marketing, and service
marketing.
With the broadening of marketing, the preceding
classifications no longer express the full range of marketing application. They pertain to business marketing,
which is only one type of marketing. More comprehensive classifications of marketing activity can be formulated according to the target market, product, or
marlwter.
Target Market Typology
A target-market classification of marketing activity
distinguishes the various publics toward which an organization can direct its marketing activity. A public is
ally group with potential interest and impact on an
organization. Every organization has u p to nine distinguishable publics (Figure 1). There are three input
publics (supporters, employees, suppliers), two output
publics (agents, consumers), and four sanctioning publics (government, competitors, special publics, and general public). The organization is viewed as a resource
conversion machine which takes the resources of sup-
porters (e.g., stockholders, directors), employees, and
suppliers and converts these into producta that go directly to consumers or through agents. The organization’s basic input-output activities are subject to the
watchful eye of sanctioning publics such as government,
competitors, special publics, and the general public. All
of these publics are targets for organizational marketing activity because of their potential impact on the
resource converting efficiency of the organization. Therefore, a target-market classification of marketing activity
consists of supporter-directed marketing, employee-directed marketing, supplier-directed marketing, agentdirected marketing, consumer-directed marketing, general public-directed marketing, special public-directed
marketing, government-directed marketing, and competitor-directed marketing.
Product Typology
A typology of marketing activity can also be constructed on the basis of the product marketed. Under
the broadened concept of marketing, the product is
no longer restricted to commercial goods and services.
An organization can try to market to a public u p to
six types of products or social objects. A product classification of marketing consists of goods marketing, service marketing, organization marketing, person marketing, place marketing, and idea marketing.
Goods and service marketing, which made u p the whole
of traditional marketing, reappear in this classification.
I n addition, marketers can specialize in the marketing of
organizations (e.g., governments, corporations, or universities), persons (e.g., political candidates, celebrities),
Journal of Marketing, April, 1972
places (e.g., real estate developments, resod areas, states,
cities), and ideas (e.g., family planning, Medicare, antismoking, saf e-driving) .
Marketer Typology
A typology can also be constructed on the basis of
the marketer, that is, the organization that is carrying
on the marketing. A first approximation would call for
distinguishing between business and nonbusiness organization marketing. Since there are several types of nonbusiness organizations with quite different products and
marketing tasks, it would be desirable to build a marketer classificqtion that recognizes the different types of
organizations. This leads to the following classifications :
Business organization marketing, political organization
marketing, social organization marketing, religious organization marketing, cultural organization marketing,
and knowledge organization marketing.
Organizations are classified according to their primary
or formal character. Political organizations would include political parties, government agencies, trade
unions, and cause groups. Social organizations would
include service clubs, fraternal organizations, and private welfare agencies. Religious organizations would include churches and evangelical movements. Cultural
Full information inside the file· The solution is in the same fileI want your solution to be in the same file that I sentPlease solve with the same file without deleting anything from the filePlease put the reference
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name: Mohammed Alnassar
Semester: 1st
CRN: 11813
Student’s ID Number: S190117024
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Shahid Alam
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
For this post, you will share your own example of group conflict. Remember, there should be at least three people in the group you’ve picked for the video.
1. Share a link to an episode of a TV show or a short clip of a film that features a group conflict. (If you can’t find a link, then you can describe it in a few sentences.)
2. Using the model of the conflict process in the textbook, describe stage 1 of the conflict.
3. Describe stage 2.
4. Describe stage 3 using at least one of the five modes of resolving conflict.
Mitigation and Controls
Having established the exposures that are represented by risks, your task moves to reduce the
probability of occurrence and the impact should there be an occurrence. Reducing both or eliminating
one implies that the risk is neutralized. Your criticality rating together with the risk determination will
lead to a prioritization of the most important areas demanding maximum protection.
You attempted mitigation to reduce risks, and you would do so in important areas as the first priority.
You would break down mitigation as a process of avoiding exposure to threats or by not establishing
vulnerabilities. Controls are frequently viewed as methods of preventing a threat establishing a
foothold, thereby not enabling a risk.
Any control or procedure will make use of specific security plans to achieve a safe outcome. NIST
provides copious details that are important and relevant to C&A. The increased adoption and relevance
of the risk management framework (RMF) by extended areas within the federal government has
changed the nature of C&A practices in many areas. Add to that the adjustments resulting from cloud
computing, and you find that C&A has changed significantly—even though there are few comprehensive
publications. The reason for this is that the renewal in cloud computing and the RMF are garnering
attention, while the integrated nature of C&A receives less focus. It is important for you to synthesize
the different influences provided within this course. Anchor yourself in the textbook and synthesize
important shifts by integrating the articles.
Be sure to review this week’s resources carefully. You are expected to apply the information from these
resources when you prepare your assignments. In addition, notice the linkage back to risk and the
forward-looking links to processes and procedures next week.
Assignment: Select Appropriate Mitigation Options and Controls
REFERENCE
•
•
•
•
•
Official (ISC)2 guide to the CAP CBK (2nd ed.).
CIO Council & Chief Acquisition Officers Council. (2012). Creating
effective cloud computing contracts for the federal government:
Best practices…
Granneman, J. (2013). FEDRAMP: Auditing cloud service
providers. Information Security, 15(5), 25-29.
National Institute of Standards and Technology. (2002). NIST
special publication 800-47: Security guide for interconnecting
information technology….
National Institute of Standards and Technology. (2015a). NIST
special publication 800-53 revision 4: Security and privacy
controls for federal…..
•
National Institute of Standards and Technology. (2017). Draft
NIST special publication 800-53 revision 5: Security and privacy
controls for…
.
Instructions
Having recognized risk, you must consider responses and how you can defend against those
risks. The selection of appropriate methods to reduce or eliminate both the impact and
probability of a loss requires actions at both technical and human levels. Your focus this week
includes mitigation and, especially, controls. Because of the integrated nature, you will have
noticed the need to go back and forth between the different areas. Your learning also requires
you to go across the boundaries because of the linkage between C&A, risk, mitigation, and
controls. For this week’s assignment, create a single assignment with one introduction,
conclusion, and reference list. Between the introduction and conclusion, provide clear
headings to identify each of the two parts (control, mitigation) that you need to address for
this assignment.
For this assignment, construct a paper to validate the applicability of the minimum set of
controls and mitigation options for a specific system. Carefully determine whether the
applicability of the minimum set of controls for the system are enough for the purpose of
certification and accreditation. Analyze and evaluate the security risk to select the appropriate
level of controls. There will be situations where there are multiple options, so compare and
contrast at least one set of options. In making a choice, reference a minimum level as opposed
to best practices for those options.
Length: 5-7 pages, not including the cover page, title page, and reference section.
References: a minimum of 5 resources from the course and add at least 2 others from the NCU
Library
Your assignment should demonstrate thoughtful consideration of the ideas and concepts
presented in the course and provide new thoughts and insights relating directly to this topic.
Your response should reflect scholarly writing and current APA standards.
This assignment is an individual assignment.Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
When you open portfolio 1 and portfolio 2 home work, second you can write portfolio 3, the portfolio 3 you just only write 1 pager only. Second you can do the PPT only 8 slides.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BM115: Business Ethics – Portfolio Project Presentation
Portfolio Presentation Description:
For your Portfolio Presentation, using what you prepared for Portfolio Project Part 1 and Part 2, you will create
a presentation that summarizes the results of your work. You will do this by showing your completed portfolio
website to the class while explaining each part.
At the time of your presentation, your portfolio website on Mahara must include all of the following
sections:
• Profile: About me > Introduction
• Your completed Portfolio Project Part 1 and Part 2 webpages on Mahara (submitted to Moodle)
• A short summary webpage (2 paragraphs) on Mahara that addresses the goal of the BM115 Portfolio
Projects and how you developed the code of conduct and corporate social responsibility practices to be
implemented by your online vegetarian catering company.
For the class presentation, you have the option to present to the class in one of two ways:
1) Give a live presentation to the class of your Mahara website and portfolio webpages.
2) Play a narrated recording (with your voice) to the class. See the following links on how to do this:
Deliver an informative and well-prepared presentation that covers all topics below. The overall length of the
presentation should be 5-7 minutes.
1. The Code of Conduct of your vegetarian catering business, including:
o Mission statement and your company’s values
o Workplace policies and procedures
o Industry compliance and regulations
o Disciplinary actions
2. The blog about how Corporate Social Responsibility is to be implemented in your small business:
o Explain why you consider it important for your small business to adapt CSR
o Describe the practices implemented by your company to be socially responsible
Page 1 of 3
Submit your portfolio summary webpage in Mahara to Portfolio Presentation in Moodle. Make sure to
check your writing for spelling, grammar, and punctuation before posting.
FOR INSTRUCTOR USE ONLY
Grading Rubric
Grading accepts a start value of 100. Points will be deducted for failure to fully complete or meet the stated requirements.
Grading: 90-100 = Represents work of superior quality (A); 80-89 = Represents work of good to very good quality (B); 7079 = Represents adequate command of class content (C); 69 and below = Represents work that shows a need for
development or improvement (F); 0 = Represents plagiarized work (F).
BM115: Business Ethics (BFN)
Student:
Instructor:
Date:
STUDENT LEARNING OUTCOMES
SLO-1. Describe and evaluate concepts in ethics and morality as it relates to business management,
employee management, and customer relationships.
SLO-2. Explain how functional departments within an organization can manage the challenge of building and
maintaining an ethical culture.
SLO-3. Identify situations in the workplace where ethical dilemmas can occur, and provide strategies and
standards to prevent unethical conduct.
SLO-4. Define corporate social responsibility, how it affects profitability, and how internal and external
forces drive an organization’s CSR initiatives.
SLO-5. Explain how corporate social responsibility practices, reflecting the company’s mission, can be
implemented into a business.
SLO-6. Outline how an organization should interact with its stakeholders in an ethical manner, develop
policies and procedures to ensure company activities are conducted ethically, and state the consequences
for unethical conduct.
SLO-8. Develop an organizational framework to enforce ethical conduct that acts as a standard so that
employees know what is expected from them in order to make the business efficient.
SLO-9. Create a code of conduct that serves as an internal guideline for employees, and an external
statement of corporate values and commitments for the organization.
Page 2 of 3
Portfolio Presentation
Possible
Points
Description of requirements
At the time of your presentation, your portfolio website in Mahara included all of
the following sections:
• Profile in Mahara: About me > Introduction (shown during presentation).
• Your Portfolio Part 1 and Part 2 webpages on Mahara (shown during presentation).
20
SLO-1, SLO-2, SLO-4, SLO-5, SLO-6, SLO-8, SLO-9. A short summary page (2 paragraphs)
on Mahara that addresses the goal of the BM115 Portfolio Projects and how you
developed the code of conduct and corporate social responsibility practices to be
implemented by your online vegetarian catering company (shown during presentation).
30
Class Presentation (live or recorded) included the following information:
SLO-1, SLO-2, SLO-3, SLO-6, SLO-8, SLO-9. The Code of Conduct of your vegetarian
catering business: Mission statement and your company’s values, Workplace policies and
procedures, Industry compliance and regulations, Disciplinary actions.
25
Class Presentation (live or recorded) included the following information:
SLO-1, SLO-2, SLO-4, SLO-5. The blog about how Corporate Social Responsibility is
implemented in your small business: Explained why you consider it important for your
small businesses to adapt CSR; Described the practices implemented by your company to
be socially responsible.
TOTAL
YOUR SCORE: ________
Instructor Comments:
Page 3 of 3
25
100
Your
Points
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud alJohnai
Students’ Grade: Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
SCM 7040 G01 A01 FALL 2023 SESSION
LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT
BRIEFING ANALYSIS #2: Grid Method to Locate Centralized Prairie Fresh-Produce Warehouse/DC
Background: As part of Lecture 2, we went through the procedures involved with the “Grid Method.”
This is a form of a heuristic model. It is not necessarily intended to be super-accurate nor optimal, but
rather involves techniques that are sufficiently simple that people can quite easily use themselves, e.g.,
without sophisticated computer technologies, etc. Their intended use is for first-cut estimations, that
can allow for a better understanding, and also help hone into be able to undertake more detailed
evaluations.
Rather than just letting the Grid Method sit on a “theoretical” shelf, we are going to put the method to
use in a somewhat more practical way, to undertake a preliminary evaluation regarding what might be
the best centralized starting point to locate a warehouse / distribution centre (DC) handling large
quantities of fresh produce for grocery stores in larger urban centres across the Prairie region that
ultimately are sourced from the U.S. The method attempts to identify a suitable first-cut site, based on
seeking to reduce transportation costs. For anyone who might happen to be an international student and
relatively unfamiliar, Canada is a major food production and exporting country, but what we eat is not
necessarily what we actually make. This is particularly true of fresh produce (fruits and vegetables), that
all overwhelmingly come to Prairie consumers from ultimate sources in the U.S. Some in Canada suggest
reliance on such imports is a serious policy concern, however, they reflect our current taste preferences.1
In order to permit use of a “square grid” we will set an arbitrary “origin” point as Florida City in Florida.
All other sites are located West and North of Florida City, hence how the grid will be set up. In the Prairie
Region, there are five major urban customer destinations, with populations as follows:
• Edmonton, Alberta (1,151,635)
• Calgary, Alberta (1,305,550)
• Saskatoon, Saskatchewan (264,637)
• Regina, Saskatchewan (224,996)
• Winnipeg, Manitoba (758,515)
Agriculture and Agrifood Canada confirms that Canadians indeed import a lot of fresh produce. The total
population of these major urban centres is 3,705,333, which incidentally represents about 10% of the
population of Canada as a whole, so this is not trivial. Based on this, and assuming roughly 40% of imports
originate from the U.S., we will set a reasonable total annual quantity of about 100,000 tonnes. For
Western Canada, including the Prairies, most of this material comes from California. For our purposes we
will assume 92% is from California, with Fresno, California assumed as the main central source point. A
further portion comes from the Florida/Georgia area on the east coast of the U.S., which we will assume
to be approximately 8%. The central source point for the latter is assumed as Lakeland in Polk County.
For a variety of good reasons, costs to move products in Canada are more expensive, in part in this case
because of LTL versus TL. Transportation costs are to be assumed as follows:
1
York University. 2023. Food Policy in Canada: Reliance on Exports
1
•
•
Transportation of produce from source points in U.S. to warehouse/DC of $2.50 per tonne-km; and
Transportation of produce from warehouse/DC to Prairie urban centres of $5.00 per tonne-km.
The source and final destination locations on the cartesian grid and associated quantities involved for
each are summarized in the following table (latitude/longitude data are also provided for reference):
Location and Quantity Data for Grid Method Analysis of Centralized Produce Distribution Centre
Site
Quantity
X-Grid (E-W)
Y-Grid (N-S)
Longitude
Latitude
Origin site
Florida City, FL
n/a
0.0 km
0.0 km
80.48 deg W
25.45 deg N
Source sites
Transportation costs from these are all set uniformly at $2.50 per tonne-km
Fresno, CA
92,000 tonnes 4,372.8 km W
1,257.7 km N
119.77 deg W
36.75 deg N
Lakeland, FL
8,000 tonnes
163.6 km W
289.9 km N
81.95 deg W
28.06 deg N
Destinations
Transportation costs to these are all set uniformly at $5.00 per tonne-km
Edmonton, AB 31,000 tonnes 3,674.1 km W
3,126.1 km N
113.49 deg W
53.53 deg N
Calgary, AB
35,000 tonnes 3,738.3 km W
2,849.6 km N
114.07 deg W
51.05 deg N
Saskatoon, SK
7,000 tonnes 2,916.7 km W
2,970.9 km N
106.69 deg W
52.14 deg N
Regina, SK
6,000 tonnes 2,685.2 km W
2,783.3 km N
104.61 deg W
50.45 deg N
Winnipeg, MB 21,000 tonnes 1,854,8 km W
2,719.8 km N
97.15 deg W
49.88 deg N
You will note that some of the grid location numbers may not appear to work out quite properly (i.e.,
compared to roadway travel distances), but we will use these for our initial approximation. Part of the
complexity is that the grid employed is flat, whereas the world is actually spherical. (Approximation
employed is based on using circumference of Earth as 40,075 km, representing 360 degrees, or hence
about 111.3 km per change in degree). Remember for Grid Method, you do two sets of calculations: firstly,
for the X-Grid; and secondly, for the Y-Grid.
Assignment: You are to prepare a two-page Briefing Analysis, including summary. You are to:
•
•
•
Utilize the Grid Method to identify the approximate location for a produce warehouse/DC to handle
all fresh produce from the U.S. going to Canadian Prairie cities, based on data as provided.
Recommend, based on the Grid Method results, where more precisely you would locate the facility,
this given identified site may not necessarily be in an entirely suitable location, e.g., in the middle of
water, not near any road links or not in proximity to any urban or practical locations.
Provide reasons for your final recommended location, including Grid Method results.
You will need to justify your answers, and are required to include at least three additional cited
references beyond those listed here in this document.
Due Date: This Briefing Analysis submission is due at the beginning of the Lecture on Monday, October
23rd, 2023. An “Assignment Folder” will be open on UM Learn. This is the preferred method for you to
upload and submit your assignment document. The Assignment Folder will close automatically. You can
also send via email to the instructor with postmark no later than 6:15 PM, October 23rd, 2023:
robertvparsons@gmail.com or Robert.Parsons@umanitoba.ca. Because of time sensitivity of the
information involved, the Assignment Folder will close, and electronic submissions after that time will
not be accepted. The marks involved are small so missing one is not a major concern.
2
In-Class Discussion: We will discuss this assignment briefly as part of the lecture, including thoughts on
broader context. The in-class discussions are part of the active participation assessment metric.
Briefing Analysis Format: The Briefing Analysis format is described in the course outline, and involves
two-page maximum length (12-point font minimum), including three reference citations that are not
included in the page count, with the indicated format of three sections:
•
•
•
Summary section including recommendations;
Background section describing any critical background factors that are essential for making your
case; and lastly
Analysis section presenting your analysis that makes the case for what you are recommending.
References can be placed on a third page. As noted, the references do not count as part of the tw0-page
limit. A “template” for Briefing Analysis assignments will be available on UM Learn. Students are strongly
reminded to pay close attention to the above format! It is different from what you may normally
undertake. Not adhering to the required format has been noted as a significant source of deductions for
students taking this course in earlier sessions. Importantly, the synoptic approach employed is much
closer to reporting expectations you will encounter in real business organizations.
Reference Format Style: As described in the course outline, you are permitted to use any reference
format style you wish (e.g., APA, MLA, Chicago, etc.), but with the provision that a consistent format
must be used throughout the entire document, and must involve a proper reference, not just a URL.
Scoring and Grade Contribution: For the purposes of feedback, the assignment is scored out of 30, with
the score posted on UM Learn under the Grades section. The rubric employed for marking is based on:
15 for content; 9 for references; and 6 for technicalities, including grammar, punctuation, formatting, etc.
This assignment is worth up to 3% of your final grade, with thus the grade contribution you receive will
be the score out of 30 divided by 10.
Last Clarification
One last clarification, in that we are talking costs per “tonne-km.” When you see this, it means per
“tonnes times kms.” You do not divide. For example, if it were say 100 tonnes and 2,000 km, it would
represent 100 tonnes × 2,000 km, or 200,000 tonne-km
3
SCM 7040 G01 A01 (Logistics Management) – Fall 2023
Briefing Analysis # [Enter Briefing Number and Title Here – delete this]
Student Name:
Student Number:
[Enter Name Here – delete this]
[Enter Student ID Number Here – delete this]
Summary
Background
Analysis
[Maximum length of 2 pages (12 point font, single spaced) – excludes references
– delete this]
References
[References should start on a separate page, and do NOT count in terms of
maximum length of two pages – use consistent citation format – delete this]
SCM 7040 G01/A01:
Logistics Management
Robert V. Parsons, PhD, MBA
Sessional Instructor
Email contacts:
robert.parsons@umanitoba.ca
robertvparsons@gmail.com
October 16th, 2023 – Week #3
fi
Slide Set 5: Brie ng Assignment #2 Application of Grid Method Analysis
Brie ng Assignment #2
ffi
fi
fi
• Logistics focuses signi cantly on
enhancing operational e ciency and
reducing costs
• A variety of quantitative methods are
employed, including relatively simple
heuristic models, such as Grid Method
• Rather than just letting this sit on a
“theoretical” shelf, we will use the Grid
Method to assess a potentially more
practical application
Brie ng Assignment #2
• Fresh Produce Imports from U.S.
fi
Graphic from site:
https://ecomercioagrario.com/en/spainimported-2-less-fruits-and-vegetablesuntil-october/
Brie ng Assignment #2
• Canada is a major food production
country, and indeed a major exporter
• But … what we eat is not necessarily
what we produce
fi
• In particular it turns out Canadians
import most of our fresh produce from
the U.S., this includes on the Prairies
Brie ng Assignment #2
• Based on a quick review
– Upwards about 100,000 tonnes annually of
fresh produce comes to major Prairie cities
– If we were to enhance overall e ciency by
having a single major warehouse to handle
and redistribute these food products,
where likely should be roughly the right
location to put this?
ffi
fi
• Hence why we would want to look at
using the Grid Method model
Brie ng Assignment #2
• There are ve major destinations:
– Edmonton (31,000 tonnes)
– Calgary (35,000 tonnes)
– Saskatoon (7,000 tonnes)
– Regina (6,000 tonnes)
– Winnipeg (21,000 tonnes)
• Two major source locations
fi
fi
– California (using Fresno) (92,000 tonnes)
– Florida (using Lakeland) (8,000 tonnes)
Brie ng Assignment #2
• We are assuming shipments to central
warehouse from U.S. source locations
are more e cient and less costly:
– $2.50 per tonne-km
• We are assuming that nal-leg
shipments from warehouse within
Canada to destinations are more costly:
fi
ffi
fi
– $5.00 per tonne-km
– For example, these likely will be LTL rather
than LT shipments
• In order to set up a grid-matrix, we also
need to select an “origin” point
– This is Florida City in Florida
– Set as 0 km W, 0 km N on the grid
• In the assignment document you will
nd all the grid location data
fl
– Note that distances in some cases might
appear a bit out – because the Earth is
spherical and not actually at
– Roughly 1 degree change = 111.3 km
fi
fi
Brie ng Assignment #2
Brie ng Assignment #2
• You are to set up the Grid Method and
use this to identify approximately point
where warehouse should be located
– Calculations are shown in textbook and
– Are also in Lecture 2 notes
– Remember, you have to do calculations
twice: once for X-axis and once for Y-axis
fi
• Grid Method will just give you some
arbitrary spot, you need to recommend
what likely would be good real site
Brie ng Assignment #2
• Prepare a two-page brie ng:
fi
fi
– Outline based solely on the Grid Method,
where would be the likely spot to locate a
major central warehouse/DC
– Then given this spot is likely pretty
arbitrary and unrealistic, recommend
based on analysis where practically you
would recommend siting the warehouse
– And justify your selections based on citing
at least three independent references
Brie ng Assignment #2
• Written brie ng analysis due:
fi
fi
– Start of Class on Monday, October 23,
2023 at 6:15 PM
– Folder for submissions will be open on UM
Learn and is likely best way to submit
– Given the time sensitivity of information,
late submissions cannot be accepted,
except for a valid problem, in which case
please consult instructor!
Brie ng Assignment #2
• You are to use an inverted pyramid
format for this 2-page brie ng
fi
fi
– Summary to identify selected SCM issue;
then Background and Analysis to explain
why these issue important, and example,
with template provided on UM Learn
– Need to cite three (3) references using a
consistent reference format – your choice
– References don’t count for the 2-page limit
Brie ng Assignment #2
• You can certainly work together … but
• Assignment MUST be your own work
– Just “copy and paste” is plagiarism
– University treats this VERY seriously
• Very easy in this case for me to see
• Some real and unexpected paradoxes
ff
fi
ff
fi
– Too much information for just 2-pages and
too many references
– Very easy for everyone to nd di erent
references with slightly di erent slants
Brie ng Assignment #2
• But how will this be assessed?
– Useful to ask and for me to answer
• You are asked to:
– Identify the approximate spot suggested
through the Grid Method model
– Identify what actual location you would
select based on this, but being realistic
– Justify your selection with three
independent reference sources
fi
• Meet requests and will get good score!
Brie ng Assignment #2
• For feedback will provide a score out of
30 marks on UM Learn
– 15 marks based on content
– 9 marks based on references
– 6 marks based on technicalities, like
grammar, punctuation, format, etc.
• Score translates to out of 3% for grade
fi
fi
– i.e, Score out of 30 as presented on UM
Learn divided by 10 to get percent
contribution to nal grade
Brie ng Assignment #2
• In-class discussion
– We will try to talk about ndings on the
due date or shortly after
– Try to compile an overall list of ndings
– We will quickly try to assemble everyone’s
results
• Active participation
fi
fi
fi
fi
– Further, voluntarily discussing ndings and
what they may mean more broadly does
help toward active participation score!
SCM 7040 G01/A01:
Logistics Management
Robert V. Parsons, PhD, MBA
Sessional Instructor
Email contacts:
robert.parsons@umanitoba.ca
robertvparsons@gmail.com
September 25th, 2023 – Week #2
Slide Set 3: Chapter 3/4 Analysis
Bases, Perspectives and Grid Method
Analyzing logistics systems
• Quickly go back to Appendices 3A and
3B to look at details of analyses:
– Short-run versus long-run
– Four analysis perspectives
• Will then go on to Appendix 4A to look
at Grid Method:
– Warehouse location selection; and
– Sensitivity analysis
Bases for cost logistics analyses
• Short-run versus long-run translates to
• Static versus dynamic analysis
– Fixed-point situation (or given-year) versus
– Considering variability over time or
considering changes in quantity or others
• Text goes through useful example (p83)
– Powdered bulk-solid bagged for market
– System 1 bag and palletize at plant
– System 2 sends bulk via rail to warehouse
near market, then bags and palletizes
Bases for cost logistics analyses
• Powdered product bagged and palletized
Static analysis for powder product
• Based on current costs and ~23,000 kg output
Cost Item
Plant: Packaging
Plant: Storage/handling
Plant: Inventory carrying
Plant: Administration
Plant: Fixed cost
Warehouse: Packaging
Warehouse: Storage/handling
Warehouse: Inventory carrying
Warehouse: Administration
Warehouse: Fixed cost
Transport to warehouse
Transport to customer
Overall Total Cost
System 1
500
150
50
75
4,200
0
0
0
0
0
0
800
$5,775
System 2
0
50
25
25
2,400
500
150
75
75
2,400
150
100
$5,950
Static analysis for powder product
• This analysis is obviously static
– Based on current year cost estimates
– Based on xed output of ~23,000 kg
– (Note they use 50,000 lb for U.S. case,
but I am converting roughly to SI units)
• Based on this static analysis, including
all costs for both options, which one
would you chose? System 1 or System 2
fi
– But, what might be missed in doing such a
simplistic analysis?
Dynamic analysis for same product
• Critical obvious factor to consider in
this case is “how much product?”
– It is highly unlikely product throughput or
customer demand remains absolutely xed
• Case identi es “ xed” costs but there
are other costs obviously “variable”
fi
fi
fi
– Packaging, storage and handling, inventory
carrying and administration plus transport!
– Note in the example presented, all are
assumed to vary linearly with throughput
Dynamic analysis for same product
• We end up with total logistics costs
being a linear function of throughput for
both cases
– Becomes doable mathematical problem
Total Cost = Fixed Cost + Variable Cost/Unit × Throughput Units
Or Y = b + m X as mathematical equation form
fi
– Fixed costs are given directly but variable?
– Leave you to work out but they are correct
– Easiest to take total costs less xed costs
(given) and then divide by 50,000 units
Dynamic analysis for same product
• We now end up with two equations for
total logistics costs and can compare
results as a function of throughput
System 1: Y = $4,200 + $0.0315 X
System 2: Y = $4,800 + $0.0230 X
ff
fi
– What you see is trade-o where System 2
has 14% higher xed costs but has 27%
lower variable costs
– Result depends on throughput
– See same application in “make or buy” or
production location selection cost analysis
Dynamic analysis for same product
• We can now plot this up to see results
• Have to “gee-whiz” a bit to properly see
Dynamic analysis for same product
• We can now plot this up to see results
Can easily see breakeven here at just over 70,000 units value
Dynamic analysis for same product
• We can now plot this up to see results
Can even show a “low-cost” envelop with optimal solutions
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Four major perspectives to consider
assessing logistics systems
– Materials management versus physical
distribution
– Cost centres
– Nodes versus links
– Logistics channels
– We will go through each individually
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Materials management versus physical
distribution
fl
ff
– Materials management = in-bound
– Physical distribution = out-bound
– Useful to consider that how raw materials are
handled is often very di erent from products
– Give example of drywall manufacturing
– Gypsum input/handling involves basic bulk
solids, whereas product drywall loaded
inside, special railcars or atbed, with critical
need to protect from getting wet
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Materials management versus physical
distribution – example output drywall product
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Cost centres
ff
ff
– Logistics involves transportation, packaging,
warehousing, materials handling, etc.
– By examining these as “cost centres” we can
assess trade-o s and assess to determine
lowest overall costs or highest service, etc.
– On the next pages examine two examples
– Firstly looking di ering transportation modes
– Secondly looking at increasing the number of
warehouses involved
Cost centres example analyses
• First involves change of transport mode
Cost Centres
Via Rail
Motor Carrier
Transportation
300
430
Inventory
500
375
Packaging
350
320
Warehousing
150
75
Cost of Lost Sales
200
100
Total Cost
$1,500
$1,300
Cost centres example analyses
• First involves change of transport mode
Cost Centres
Via Rail
Motor Carrier
Transportation
300
430
Inventory
500
375
Packaging
350
320
Warehousing
150
75
Cost of Lost Sales
200
100
Total Cost
$1,500
$1,300
Analysis shows that seeming more expensive transport mode
produces lower overall logistics costs and is advantageous!
Cost centres example analyses
• Second involves more warehouses
Cost Centres
3 Warehouses
5 Warehouses
Transportation
850,000
500,000
Inventory
1,500,000
2,000,000
Warehousing
600,000
1,000,000
Cost of Lost Sales
350,000
100,000
Total Cost
$3,300,000
$3,600,000
Cost centres example analyses
• Second involves more warehouses
Cost Centres
3 Warehouses
5 Warehouses
Transportation
850,000
500,000
Inventory
1,500,000
2,000,000
Warehousing
600,000
1,000,000
Cost of Lost Sales
350,000
100,000
Total Cost
$3,300,000
$3,600,000
Analysis shows that while can reduce transportation and cost
of lost sales, the overall costs are higher suggesting not viable
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Nodes and links
fi
ff
– Nodes are xed spacial points where good
stop, whether for storage or for processing
(.e.g., manufacturing/assembly)
– Links represent the transportation network
and connect nodes in the overall system
– Di erent modes of transportation may be
used, including combinations and variations
– Node-link analysis is particularly useful for
identifying improvements
– Example diagrams – one shown last week
Nodes and links analysis
• Logistics node/link general layout
Nodes and links analysis
• Diagram showed input points and plants
Nodes and links analysis
• Can also add in warehouses (◉ = W) too
◉
◉
Perspectives for logistics analyses
• Logistics channels
fl
ffi
– Channels are the network of organizations
involved in transfer, storage, handling,
communications and other functions that
contribute to e cient ow of goods
– Channels can range from being relatively
simple, increasingly complex involving multiechelon to being highly complex
– Example diagrams illustrate complexity
– Management and control become
increasingly harder with increased complexity
Logistics channels analysis
• Simple logistics channel
Logistics channels analysis
• Multi-echelon logistics channel
Logistics channels analysis
• Complex logistics channel
Grid analysis methods
• Grid analysis is one of what are termed
heuristic models
– These involve practical methods allowing
individuals to gure out solutions for
themselves, although not necessarily
guaranteed to be optimal
– Represent useful rst-cut evaluations
• Grid analysis is used as a means to
geographically locate sites
fi
fi
– Warehouse or plant, ensuring it remains
proximal to multiple sources and markets
Grid analysis methods
• Very similar to “centre of gravity”
calculations in technical disciplines
– But our interests are in the distances and
transportation costs to sources and
markets, weighted based based on the
proportion of supply or market involved
with those individual sites
• It is possible to use a simple cartesian
grid coordinate system
fi
– We can apply X-axis and Y-axis map
coordinates to simply de ne centre point
Grid analysis methods
• Can start simple
– Sum of just volumes × distances for
sources and markets divided by volumes
– Note distance is to arbitrary origin, but
results are still valid – a “centre of cost”
Grid analysis methods
• Can further add costs
– Sum of volumes × distances × rates for sources
and markets divided by volumes × rates
Grid analysis methods
• Example using X-axis and Y-axis useful
– Langley provides example involving three
main sources and ve main markets
• The technique requires you to run through
calculations twice, once for X-axis and
once for Y-axis but once you know the
formula approach, this is relatively simple
to accomplish using a spreadsheet
fi
– Grid layout and source/market coordinates
on next pages for proposed plant location
Grid analysis methods – example
• Grid layout for example
Grid analysis methods – example
• Coordinate locations
Grid analysis methods – example
• Calculation for plant X- and Y-coordinates
Grid analysis methods – example
• Resulting suggested plant site location
“Centre of cost”
located at
X = 655 and
Y = 826
◉
Grid analysis methods – sensitivity
• Technique further can be used to assess
sensitivity
• First case
– Rail to truck mode Jacksonville (cost +50%)
– Impact on calculations and location in next
slides
• Second case
ff
– Elimination of supply source at Bu alo
– Impact on calculations and location in next
subsequent slides
Grid analysis methods – sensitivity
• Sensitivity of changing rail to truck mode
Grid analysis methods – example
• Resulting suggested plant site location
“Centre of cost”
located at
X = 664 and
Y = 795
fi
Relatively insigni cant
change in location
◉
Grid analysis methods – sensitivity
• Sensitivity of changing rail to truck mode
Grid analysis methods – example
• Resulting suggested plant site location
“Centre of cost”
located at
X = 597 and
Y = 719
fi
Somewhat more
signi cant
change in location
◉
Grid analysis methods – pros/cons
• Advantages of method:
– Key strength is in its simplicity
– Also provides a useful starting point for
location decision(s)
• Disadvantages of method:
– Inherently assumes static conditions
– Assumes straight-line distances, and does
not consider topology
– Assumes linear transport rates, whereas
actual rates can increase with distance
Move on to Chapter 4 materials
• With this bit of background on analysis
techniques we will now proceed to look
at supply chain and “omni-channel”
network design
fi
– We have touched already on interactions
between logistics and supply chains
– Omni-channel is an interesting and
relatively new term we will better de ne
Reference Source:Textbook:-Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.Case Study: -Case: U.S. MARINE CORPSPlease read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability”Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions
Please answer these 4 questions. paragraph each. #10To what extent does sexuality or gender relate to the production and consumption of cultural texts?Is it possible to ignore feminist responses to cultural theory and popular culture?Is feminism just for women?Do we read and consume texts solely on the basis of gender or sexuality?
Electronic versions of Paper and Presentation submitted via Canvas to Professors by 4 p.m. on October 19, 2023.
3-4 page paper. Papers are expected to be of high quality and will be graded on content, organization and presentation of key points and strategies in a pitch to industry leaders (“two minute elevator speech”). All written work is to be typed, double-spaced, with a 12-point font and one-inch margins.
PAPER TOPIC: You are a Cause Marketing consultant and you have been tasked with developing a cause-marketing campaign partnering the Washington Nationals Youth Baseball Academy with a corporate organization. The strategy needs to include both a pitch and a clear plan for how the cause-marketing campaign partnership will be successful and meet the needs of both organizations. The initiative should be strategic, taking into consideration current existing relationships (i.e. Washington Nationals and its partners) and desired outcomes. Draft a 3-4 page “concept paper” to be presented to Executives of the Academy (played by Professors Sclafani and Fanning). Your paper should articulate the mission of your program, the specific desired outcomes, costs and the strategies you will employ to achieve those outcomes.
PRESENTATION: In Class on October 19, you will present your concept. Prepare no more than four PowerPoint slides.
You will give a pitch – an “elevator speech” no longer than two minutes, where you will communicate the most persuasive and illustrative elements of your concept verbally to the class. Two minutes will be the cut-off, and we will use a timer. Your goal in this portion is to practice fluency in conveying important ideas concisely and in a way that grabs the attention of the listener and includes key elements of the strategy and intended outcomes.
Guidance for your paper
The sections in your paper should include:
Introduction: Who are you? What is your organization? Define your community and its needs?
Concept: Cause Marking Campaign? Organizations? What is your idea? How will it benefit your organization?
Target Audience: What group of people will benefit most? Why? What value do they have to your organization? Who are your key stakeholders?
What corporate entity will you partner with? How does their target audience and brand complement your cause and target audience?
Execution: What steps will you take to bring this concept to life? What forms of media will you choose? Why? What is your message? What is your call to action? How much will your program cost and how will you pay for it? What’s the return?
Conclusion: Why will this work? How will you measure success?
It is a valuable skill to write concisely. The short page limit is designed to challenge you to make a crisp and compelling written argument. Make the most of each and every word. You are encouraged to draw from the readings and class discussion, but you are also highly encouraged to present innovative approaches to your task. Spelling errors, grammar errors, incomplete sentences and general poor writing will significantly impact your grade. Multiple rounds of proof-reading and editing are highly encouraged.
Guidance for your “Pitch/Elevator Speech”
While great concepts can take many pages to explain in detail, in the “real world” sometimes you only have a brief moment – the time it would take to ride in an elevator from the lobby to the penthouse of a skyscraper – to entice an executive to allow you to pursue the idea further and give you full attention. The presentation should be brief, informative and most importantly, compelling. The goal of the pitch/elevator speech is to leave the listener knowing just enough and wanting to pursue more information. The pitch is not the whole concept, but the core of the idea. You will get two minutes to address the class and Academy Executives (Professors Sclafani and Fanning). Draft it, rehearse it and then tailor it to convince us. Make sure to consider the following:
What is the problem/need and how/why do you have the best answer to solve it?
How does it meet needs of both organizations?
Why it will be successful?
What is your competitive advantage – your “hook”? (…why should your concept be selected?)
What is your takeaway/ask to who you are pitching?
How passionate are you about your pitch?
No more than four PowerPoint slides
The information and details of the assignments are in the attached documents below.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
YOUR NAME HERE
Discount Table:
Discount for ‘Platinum’ Shoppers:
Discount for ‘Gold’ Shoppers:
Customer First Customer Last
Name
Name
Christopher
Taylor
Jennifer
Andrea
Dan
Heidi
Russell
Adam
David
Jessica
Jon
Tyler
Josh
Linda
Stephen
Sabra
Amy
James
Scott
Tyler
Blake
Megan
Delvin
Heath
Cat
Keith
Steve
Rico
Jessica
Jen
Kortney
Paul
Nicole
Declan
Ahrens
Lipsett
Armbruster
Woodson-Smith
Monzo
Jo
Wolfe
Page
Wagner
Long
Rydberg
Burdick
Sweeney
Mastandrea
Welch
Hawkes
Purdy
Stuck
Winkler
Carron
Leeper
Harmon
McMillian
Calhoun
Bouwkamp
Gabel
Cash
Roman
Galli
Lee
Clemons
Schaus
Roundy
Farmer
Status
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Taylor
Jeremy
Danelle
Bradley
Dan
Ileana
Katy
Greg
Kevin
Anjali
Mike
Josh
Nikko
Brody
Amy
Kari
Evan
Patrick
Dartanyon
Rudy
Evan
Mary
Tommy
Allison
Lisa
Mallory
Jeff
Myles
Cheri
Asya
Greta
Wendy
Brent
Eric
Mackenzie
Alana
Andy
Cristina
Andy
Lex
Paul
Tatyana
Chace
Wagner
Umstead
Snyder
McCoy
Rodriguez
Sullivan
Shaw
McKee
Forber-Pratt
Shea
Pauls
Landeros
Roybal
Purdy
Miller
Strong
McDonald
Crockett
Garcia-Tolson
Strong
Stack
Chasanoff
Jones
Czechowski
Weggemann
Fabry
Porter
Blauwet
Miller
Neimanas
Fryke
Rasmussen
Hollen
Soldan
Nichols
Yohe
Albert
Soule
Gillette
Schulte
McFadden
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Discount Table:
nt for ‘Platinum’ Shoppers:
count for ‘Gold’ Shoppers:
Level
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Gold
20.50%
16.25%
Discount
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Gold
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Gold
Gold
Gold
Gold
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Platinum
Level
Discount Table:
Discount for ‘Bronze’ Customers:
Discount for ‘Gold’ Customers:
Discount for ‘Platinum’ Customers:
Discount for ‘Regular’ Customers:
Discount for ‘Silver’ Customers:
Bronze
Gold
Platinum
Regular
Silver
Customer First
Name
Level
Christopher
Cristina
Jennifer
Cheri
Cat
Tyler
Heath
Tyler
Steve
Taylor
Tommy
Kortney
Dartanyon
Lisa
Jeff
Declan
Anjali
Wendy
Keith
Jessica
Rudy
Lex
Megan
Sabra
Eric
Heidi
Allison
Nikko
Jen
Blake
Customer Last
Name
Ahrens
Albert
Armbruster
Blauwet
Bouwkamp
Burdick
Calhoun
Carron
Cash
Chace
Chasanoff
Clemons
Crockett
Czechowski
Fabry
Farmer
Forber-Pratt
Fryke
Gabel
Galli
Garcia-Tolson
Gillette
Harmon
Hawkes
Hollen
Jo
Jones
Landeros
Lee
Leeper
Silver
Gold
Regular
Silver
Bronze
Platinum
Gold
Platinum
Bronze
Silver
Silver
Bronze
Regular
Bronze
Bronze
Regular
Gold
Bronze
Silver
Regular
Gold
Platinum
Gold
Regular
Bronze
Bronze
Platinum
Gold
Bronze
Regular
Taylor
Jessica
Linda
Dan
Patrick
Tatyana
Kevin
Delvin
Asya
Kari
Dan
Greta
Alana
Adam
Josh
Myles
Amy
Amy
Brent
Ileana
Rico
Nicole
Brody
Jon
Paul
Paul
Greg
Mike
Bradley
Mackenzie
Andy
Mary
Evan
Evan
James
Katy
Josh
Danelle
David
Jeremy
Mallory
Stephen
Scott
Russell
Lipsett
Long
Mastandrea
McCoy
McDonald
McFadden
McKee
McMillian
Miller
Miller
Monzo
Neimanas
Nichols
Page
Pauls
Porter
Purdy
Purdy
Rasmussen
Rodriguez
Roman
Roundy
Roybal
Rydberg
Schaus
Schulte
Shaw
Shea
Snyder
Soldan
Soule
Stack
Strong
Strong
Stuck
Sullivan
Sweeney
Umstead
Wagner
Wagner
Weggemann
Welch
Winkler
Wolfe
Gold
Regular
Regular
Gold
Silver
Bronze
Bronze
Gold
Silver
Bronze
Silver
Platinum
Bronze
Gold
Platinum
Silver
Regular
Gold
Silver
Silver
Regular
Bronze
Regular
Silver
Gold
Platinum
Regular
Bronze
Silver
Platinum
Regular
Silver
Gold
Gold
Regular
Silver
Bronze
Gold
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Regular
Bronze
Bronze
Andrea
Andy
Woodson-Smith
Yohe
Bronze
Bronze
Discount
4.25%
1.75%
7.25%
17.50%
5.00%
Discount
5.00%
1.75%
17.50%
5.00%
4.25%
7.25%
1.75%
7.25%
4.25%
5.00%
5.00%
4.25%
17.50%
4.25%
4.25%
17.50%
1.75%
4.25%
5.00%
17.50%
1.75%
7.25%
1.75%
17.50%
4.25%
4.25%
7.25%
1.75%
4.25%
17.50%
The VLOOKUP() formula in cell E3 is
=VLOOKUP(D10,D$3:E$7,2) and is used here to
match the Level in cell D10 with the Level in
column D3 to D7. When VLOOKUP() finds a match,
in this case ‘Silver’ in cell D7, it returns the value in
the cell immediately to the right of D7, in this case
‘5.50%.’ Note that VLOOKUP can do A LOT more this is the most basic example.
1.75%
17.50%
17.50%
1.75%
5.00%
4.25%
4.25%
1.75%
5.00%
4.25%
5.00%
7.25%
4.25%
1.75%
7.25%
5.00%
17.50%
1.75%
5.00%
5.00%
17.50%
4.25%
17.50%
5.00%
1.75%
7.25%
17.50%
4.25%
5.00%
7.25%
17.50%
5.00%
1.75%
1.75%
17.50%
5.00%
4.25%
1.75%
4.25%
4.25%
4.25%
17.50%
4.25%
4.25%
4.25%
4.25%
here to
a match,
value in
this case
T more –
YOUR NAME HERE
Use this table with
VLOOKUP() to determine
which ‘Department’ each
student is in based on their
‘Major.’ (Do not change
this table)
Student
ID#
Year
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
First Name
Steven
Jonathan
Jay
Lorin
Michael
Glenford
Joshua
Kathryn
Travis
Hillary
Brandi
William
Addison
Daniel
Robert
John-Michael
Daniel
Miles
William
Last Name
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Classification
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Robert
Timothy
Edward
Emily
Taylor
Destiny
Whitney
Delane
Brenda
David
Brandon
Brandon
Matthew
Sirena
Evers
Lee
Teresa
Devarrio
Daniel
William
Taylor
Sanford
Christopher
Natalie
Milankumar
Kendrick
John
Robert
Mitchell
Zachary
Jonathan
Andrew
John
Juntao
Benjamin
John-Michael
Andrew
Matthew
Mark
Justin
Dustin
Ryan
Jesse
John
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Daniel
Matthew
James
Faustino
Charlotte
Patrick
Wesley
Robert
Leigh
Stacey
Mark
William
Trevor
Michael
Laurie
John
Cordero
James
Johan
Andrew
Larissa
Terry
Noah
Zachary
Dustin
Evan
Hampton
Dwight
Eliza
Brady
Eric
Patrick
Ryan
Anderson
Megan
Koun
Anna
Richard
Laura
Dwight
Myles
Richard
Whitney
John
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Freshman
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Unclassified
Junior
Freshman
Freshman
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Freshman
Senior
Sophomore
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Myles
Judson
Christopher
Cody
Anderson
Kimberly
Jeffrey
Stacey
Marshall
Robert
Alexandra
George
William
William
Constance
Anderson
Carolyn
James
Edward
Jay
Jessica
Brian
Richard
Ashby
Bonner
Ashleigh
Robin
Griffin
Brian
Hannah
Alexandros
Nicholas
Joshlin
Eric
Matthew
Frank
Hannah
John
Lorin
Haley
Erin
Jeremy
Bonner
Adrieka
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Senior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Unclassified
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Jeremy
Wan Yee
Blaine
Cameron
Katarzyna
Keiarron
William
Parker
Erin
Ross
John
Andrew
Ethan
Austin
Ronald
Clark
Roderrick
Jacob
Jordan
Samuel
William
John
John
Adam
Ross
Joseph
James
Chelsea
Mark
John
Elizabeth
Michael
Reid
Bruce
Elizabeth
Nathan
Lewis
Kristin
Andrew
Julia
Matthew
Matthew
Forrest
William
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Freshman
Senior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Wolfgang
John
Bailey
Katandra
Blake
Jonathan
Trey
Nathan
Jonathan
William
Christopher
Keeana
Lindsey
Todd
Robert
Christine
Jonathan
Kevin
John
Walter
Bryson
Frank
Farris
Lindsey
Clay
Judson
Ashton
Justin
Jesse
David
Roy
Ashley
Alexander
Caroline
Garrett
Ben
Lisa
Blake
Nicholas
Hannah
Lee
Philip
Jay
Tiffany
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Freshman
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Unclassified
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Richard
Miles
Casey
Thomas
Caleb
Robert
Michael
Thomas
Martin
Clay
Jacob
Kenneth
Robert
Naomi
Jackie
Jacob
Rosemarie
Francisco
Carman
George
Jacob
Gregory
Rodrigo
Nicholas
Ryan
Kathryn
Ben
Scott
Sidney
Keven
Jared
Christopher
Emily
Anna
Alexandra
Vincent
Harry
Gray
Terrell
Makita
Luke
Anna
Kyndal
Sidney
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Freshman
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Connor
Keeana
Ashby
Robert
Michael
Jacob
Paul
Sean
Callender
Harry
Forrest
Nicole
Christopher
Elizabeth
Tyler
Robert
Matthew
Alexander
Leland
Edward
Luke
Chance
Felesia
Jamie
Philip
Nicholas
Austin
Rebecca
Lacy
John
Robin
Nicole
Julianna
Jonathan
Sheldon
Mitchel
Joshua
Griffin
Mitchell
Carlos
James
Carlos
Austin
Sidney
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Junior
Senior
Unclassified
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Freshman
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Johntarrio
Naomi
Christa
Amanda
Joseph
Robert
Amber
Caleb
Antonie
Kurt
Andrew
Laura
Sunday
Kyle
Drayton
Alyssia
Jordan
Carlotta
Andrew
William
Bryton
Demarcus
Lacy
Lawrence
Eric
Walter
Frederick
Hillary
Sean
Joseph
Joseph
Megan
Valarie
Ryan
Blaine
Bryton
Andrew
Justin
Eric
George
Robert
Macy
John
Frank
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
N/A
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Evan
Charles
Maria
Laura
David
Erika
Katandra
William
Tiffeny
Adam
Jayson
Joshlin
Andre
Wendy
Hannah
Janet
Jaquetta
Kevin
Michael
Derickson
Jake
Kyle
Jonathan
Walter
James
Dwight
Jake
Austin
Randi
Mary-Margaret
Jimo
Matthew
Austin
Tre’
Spencer
Delane
Garrett
Benjamin
Taylor
Lee
Erin
Frank
Tiffeny
Juntao
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Freshman
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Freshman
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Parker
Rebecca
Kevin
Francisco
Demarcus
William
Shannon
Felesia
Brittany
Julia
Hill
Matthew
Megan
Christopher
Brandon
William
Matthew
Kevin
William
Sekyoung
Jonathan
Knista
Keven
Andrew
Forrest
Makita
Thomas
David
Bryson
Caitlin
Clark
Ryan
Chelsea
Samuel
Jordan
John
Christopher
Keyanna
Michael
Quortisha
Cameron
Michael
Ryan
Elizabeth
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Freshman
Sophomore
Freshman
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Senior
Freshman
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Matthew
Garrett
Nathan
Daniel
Thomas
Randy
Thomas
John
Chase
William
Caroline
Thomas
Kenneth
Willie
Matthew
Mark
William
Kevin
Matthew
Kenneth
Adam
Dyllan
Travis
John
Jordan
Jordan
Jared
George
James
Christopher
Roderrick
Miles
Walter
Jackson
Stefan
James
Samuel
William
William
Cordero
Knista
Harris
Chase
Daniel
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Unclassified
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Unclassified
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Freshman
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Damien
Alexander
Steven
Faustino
William
Gray
Haley
John
Kristin
Matthew
Mario
Junae
Crystal
Forrest
Kody
Christopher
Gregory
Andrew
Charles
Randi
Evers
Norman
Tyler
John
Patrick
John
Hill
John
Amanda
Cameron
Corey
Katarzyna
Amy
Haley
Lisa
Preston
Sekyoung
John
Andrew
Norman
Sanford
Robert
William
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Unclassified
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Visiting
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Thomas
Keyanna
Ebonie
Kathryn
Jayson
Gavin
Destiny
Derek
Robert
Callender
Samuel
Sara
Cameron
Ethan
William
Reid
Elizabeth
Jackie
Jaclyn
Robert
Gregory
Christopher
Patrick
Benjamin
Dwight
Andrew
Trey
Caroline
Paige
Tanner
Andrew
Glenford
Koun
Wolfgang
Samuel
Travis
Nicholas
Matthew
Janet
Justin
Robert
Teresa
Rodrigo
Barrett
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Freshman
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Visiting
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Freshman
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Travis
Austin
Hollis
Timothy
Ashleigh
Ryan
Timothy
Timothy
William
Emily
Evan
Edward
Whitney
Danielle
Charlotte
Joshua
Gregory
Stefan
Cody
Robert
Brady
William
James
Austin
Colt
Sidney
Kyle
Jordan
William
Chris
Jackson
William
Samuel
Zachary
James
John
William
Wesley
Dyllan
Aneisha
Andrew
Justin
Alexandros
Martin
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Junior
Junior
Junior
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Sophomore
Freshman
Senior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Senior
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Sophomore
Senior
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
2015
Jessica
Haley
Sarah
William
Patrick
Christopher
Nicholas
Trevor
Allison
Derickson
Trevor
Tiffany
Meghann
Christopher
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Jones
Junior
Junior
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Sophomore
Junior
Sophomore
Senior
Junior
Senior
Senior
Senior
Senior
DEPARTMENT – MAJOR TABLE
Major
Banking & Finance
Business Undeclared
Economics
Management Information Systems
Management-Behavioral
Management-Human Resources
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Real Estate
Risk Management & Insurance
Department
Finance
Undeclared
Economics
MIS
Management
Management
Finance
Marketing
Marketing
Finance
Finance
PUT YOUR VLOOKUP() FORM
In this column you will use
DEPARTMENT-MAJOR TABLE
‘Department’ each student is in
Major
Management Information Systems
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Real Estate
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Economics
Real Estate
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Economics
Managerial Finance
Management-Human Resources
Business Undeclared
Managerial Finance
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Management-Behavioral
Banking & Finance
Department
Advising
Term
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Last Submision
Date
9/10/2014
9/10/2014
9/10/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Economics
Banking & Finance
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Marketing
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Management Information Systems
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Economics
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Banking & Finance
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Banking & Finance
Risk Management & Insurance
Business Undeclared
Management-Human Resources
Risk Management & Insurance
Business Undeclared
Marketing
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Managerial Finance
Business Undeclared
Managerial Finance
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Marketing
Marketing
Banking & Finance
Risk Management & Insurance
Management-Human Resources
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/11/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
Business Undeclared
Management Information Systems
Risk Management & Insurance
Management-Behavioral
Banking & Finance
Banking & Finance
Banking & Finance
Banking & Finance
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Marketing
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Marketing
Marketing
Marketing
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Management Information Systems
Economics
Managerial Finance
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Business Undeclared
Risk Management & Insurance
Marketing
Risk Management & Insurance
Banking & Finance
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Economics
Banking & Finance
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Economics
Management-Human Resources
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/12/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/13/2014
9/14/2014
9/14/2014
9/14/2014
9/14/2014
9/14/2014
9/16/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
Banking & Finance
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Risk Management & Insurance
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Managerial Finance
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Management-Human Resources
Business Undeclared
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Managerial Finance
Managerial Finance
Management Information Systems
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Business Undeclared
Marketing
Marketing
Banking & Finance
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Management-Behavioral
Business Undeclared
Management-Human Resources
Marketing
Management-Human Resources
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Marketing
Marketing
Managerial Finance
Managerial Finance
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Managerial Finance
Risk Management & Insurance
Banking & Finance
Marketing
Marketing & Corporate Relations
Marketing
Managerial Finance
Business Undeclared
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
Spring – 2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
9/17/2014
Banking & Finance
Marketing
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Marketing
Marketing
Business Undeclared
Business Undeclared
Marke
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable.(2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation.(2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason.(2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons.(2MM)
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable.(2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation.(2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason.(2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons.(2MM)
Read the Villanova Law Review article, A Long Climb: Led Zeppelin’s Stairway to Heaven Prevails in Copyright LawsuitRespond to the following prompt:Many people are able to identify musical compositions or songs by hearing just the smallest fragment of the piece. Does the 9th Circuit’s decision (as described in the Villanova note) do enough to protect lesser known artists? (i.e. Led Zeppelin prevailed in the case brought by the lesser known Spirit, but consider whether the Court’s change in the way it analyzes for infringement is more or less likely to benefit a lesser known artist in other cases)
New Perspectives Excel 2019 | Module 1: SAM Project 1a
Tabula Insurance Agency
ENTER AND UPDATE COMPANY DATA
Author: Samuel Abebe
Note: Do not edit this sheet. If your name does not appear in cell B6, please download a new copy of the
file from the SAM website.
w copy of the
Tabula Insurance Agency
Personnel: April 4-10, 2021
Employee Name
Salary
Albert Luna
####
Trish Marchan
####
Doreatha Blair
####
Rosario Sprung
####
Christopher Hernandez####
Isaac Grosso
####
Annabell Watkins
####
Garnett Moody
####
Elvin Degen
####
Christopher Starr
Wynell Petree
Lillian Powers
####
Commission
$86.32
$90.45
$8.86
$153.31
$33.05
$0.00
$26.98
$90.31
$16.04
Email
Tabula Insurance Agency
April 4-10, 2021
Auto
Home
Life
Sales
$
35,243.48 $
25,380.45 $
78,567.41
Expenses
$
31,014.26 $
23,603.82 $
63,639.60
Profit
Last edited April 10, 2021
Total
Note: All calculations are done weekly.
New Perspectives Excel 2019 | Module 1: SAM Project 1a
Tabula Insurance Agency
ENTER AND UPDATE COMPANY DATA
GETTING STARTED
•
Open the file NP_EX19_1a_FirstLastName_1.xlsx, available for download from the
SAM website.
•
Save the file as NP_EX19_1a_FirstLastName_2.xlsx by changing the “1” to a “2”.
o
•
If you do not see the .xlsx file extension in the Save As dialog box, do not type it.
The program will add the file extension for you automatically.
With the file NP_EX19_1a_FirstLastName_2.xlsx still open, ensure that your first
and last name is displayed in cell B6 of the Documentation sheet.
o
If cell B6 does not display your name, delete the file and download a new copy
from the SAM website.
PROJECT STEPS
1.
As the office administrator, you use Excel to maintain personnel data and summarize
cash flow. You are finalizing the Personnel and Cash Flow worksheets for the current
week.
Begin on the Personnel worksheet by cutting the contents of the range B1:B2 and
pasting them into the range A1:A2.
2.
Adjust the width of column A using AutoFit.
3.
Change the width of column B to 16.00.
4.
Enter the values shown in Table 1 into the corresponding cells in the range B14:C16.
Table 1: Data for the Range B14-C16
B
C
14
846.15
23.22
15
846.15
5.19
16
923.08
0.00
5.
Enter albert.luna@cengage.com in cell D5. Select the range D5:D16, and then use
the Flash Fill button (using the Fill drop-down arrow in the Editing group on the Home
tab) to automatically enter codes into the remaining cells in the range. (Hint: You must
use the Flash Fill button to properly receive credit for this step.)
6.
Change the width of column D to 36.00.
7.
Enter the word Total in cell A17.
8.
In cell B17, create a formula using the SUM function to determine the total salary paid
by Tabula Insurance Agency by totaling the values in the range B5:B16. Copy the
formula you created in cell B17 to cell C17.
New Perspectives Excel 2019 | Module 1: SAM Project 1a
9.
Enter Number of Employees in cell A19.
10.
In cell B19, create a formula using the COUNT function to determine the number of
people employed by Tabula Insurance Agency by counting the values in the range
B5:B16.
11.
Enter the text Average Commission in A21.
12.
Switch to the Cash Flow worksheet. Change the orientation of the Cash Flow worksheet
to Landscape.
13.
In cell A2, change the cell content to Cash Flow: April 4-10, 2021 (instead of just
reading “April 4-10, 2021”).
14.
Select the range A4:E4 and the nonadjacent cell G8, and then increase the font size of
the cells to 12 point.
15.
To better display the content, manually change the height of row 3 to 8.00. (Hint: Do
not use AutoFit.)
16.
In cell B7, enter a formula without using a function to determine the profit generated
from auto insurance policies by subtracting auto expenses (cell B6) from auto sales (cell
B5) for the week of April 4-10, 2021. Copy the formula you created in cell B7 to the
range C7:D7.
17.
After determining the total profits generated by each store, you are now interested in
calculating the total sales, expenses, and profits across all types of insurance sold.
Select the range E5:E7, and then apply AutoSum to calculate the totals for these
categories across all three types of insurance.
18.
Since you just edited the worksheet, the content in cell A9 is no longer accurate. Click
on cell A9 and clear its contents.
19.
Apply the Wrap Text formatting to cell G8.
20.
Adjust the Zoom level of the Cash Flow worksheet to 130%.
21.
After reviewing the Personnel and Cash Flow worksheets, you typically generate some
additional data for accounting. To create a placeholder worksheet for this data, insert a
new worksheet in the workbook, rename the worksheet Accounting, and if necessary,
move the new worksheet after the Cash Flow worksheet.
Your workbook should look like the Final Figures on the following pages. Save your changes,
close the workbook, and then exit Excel. Follow the directions on the SAM website to submit your
completed project.
New Perspectives Excel 2019 | Module 1: SAM Project 1a
Final Figure 1: Personnel Worksheet
Final Figure 2: Cash Flow Worksheet
Please don’t use plagiarism nor an AI to do this paper.Instructions are simple : profile a company of interest (e.g., Amazon, Disney, etc.) from the academic literature in a professional business periodical/publication or other published sources (Internet (web) sites, textbooks, articles, or interviews. The paper will summarize the company’s management concepts as reflected in published literature. Papers are to be 3 – 4 pages maximum length, double spaced, and saved using Microsoft Word format. Cover page should include Course Info (BUS 3501-04, Your Name, the Name of Company Reviewed, and Primary Publication Source.Its really simple and basic but my writing skills are bad so i need help.
The intention is to develop critical thinking by looking into the two sides of an issue in Non-Profit Marketing. So, you will have to search on your own for an additional source to cite, and in 400 words, no less, answer the following questions:What is (or are) the main message(s)? Be thorough and professional.How does he/she/they support his/her/their arguments?Pinpoint facts, stats, references, cite, if possibleWhat are the opposing views?Cite and analyzeWhat are your views on the matter?Balance the two positions.In your own words, discuss the applicability of the piece.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
PAUL N. BLOOM &WILLIAM D. NOVELLI
Numerous problems can arise in attempting to use conventional, textbook approaches in social marketing programs.
This article contains a review of these problems and draws
on the experiences of the authors for supporting arguments
and examples.
PROBLEMS AND CHALLENGES
IN SOCIAL MARKETING
Introduction
M
UCH has been written about social marketing
since Kotler and Zaltman (1971) introduced
the concept a decade ago. The literature has contained extended discussions about the definition of
social marketing (Lazer and Kelley 1973, Sheth and
Wright 1974), the ethics of social marketing (Laczniak, Lusch, and Murphy 1979), the appropriateness
of broadening the marketing discipline to include
social marketing (Luck 1974), and the potential of
applying various social science theories in social
marketing contexts (Swinyard and Ray 1977). In
addition, several case studies of social marketing
efforts have been reported (Blakely, Schutz, and
Harvey 1977, Gutman 1978). However, there have
been few attempts (Rothschild 1979) to move beyond
the reporting of case studies toward the development
of general knowledge about social marketing, including knowledge about the problems most organizations tend to find in applying conventional marketing approaches in social programs.
This article identifies a set of general problems
that confront practitioners who attempt to transfer
Paul N. Bloom is 1980-81 Visiting Research Professor,
Marketing Science Institute, and Associate Professor of
Marketing, University of Maryland. William D. Novelli
is President, Porter, Novelli & Associates, Inc., Washington, DC. The authors would like to thank Alan Andreasen,
Gerald Zaltman, Patrick Murphy, and Susan Watson for
their comments and suggestions.
Journal of Marketing
Vol. 45 (Spring 1981), 79-88.
the marketing approaches used to sell toothpaste
and soap to promote concepts like smoking cessation, safe driving, and breast self-examination. An
awareness of these problems should allow social
agency administrators or their marketing advisors
to formulate more workable and effective social
marketing programs. While the authors believe
strongly in the contribution marketing can make
to social programs, they feel compelled to temper
the enthusiasm that many have shown for social
marketing by pointing out the difficulties and challenges associated with its practice.
Note that the term social marketing is used
throughout this article to mean “the design, implementation, and control of programs seeking to
increase the acceptability of a social idea or practice
in a target group(s)” (Kotler 1975, p. 283). Consequently, social marketing is treated as an endeavor
that can be engaged in by profit making organizations (e.g., a liquor company program encouraging
responsible drinking), as well as by nonprofit and
public organizations. It is also treated as an endeavor
that generally encourages people to do something
that will be beneficial to more than just themselves
(Lovelock 1979).For example, responsible drinking,
safe driving, and smoking cessation can all reduce
health hazards for others or lower the insurance
premiums of others. This article is concerned with
the marketing of social ideas and behaviors by any
organization to any target group.
The problems discussed here have come to the
Problems and Challenges in Social Marketing / 79
attention of the authors through work they have
done with numerous social agencies and organizations. Problems are identified in eight basic decision
making areas: market analysis, market segmentation, product strategy development, pricing strategy
development, channel strategy development, communications strategy development, organizational
design and planning, and evaluation. In each area
an effort has been made to point out several problems encountered by social marketers that typically
do not face the large commercial marketers who
are the focus of most textbook examples. Admittedly, many of the cited problems may also confront
small businesses and other less conventional marketers. But the discussion here will concentrate on
how these problems manifest themselves for social
marketers.
Market Analysis Problems
A basic tenet of marketing is that an organization
builds its marketing program using research it has
gathered on the wants, needs, perceptions, attitudes,
habits, and satisfaction levels of its markets. The
good marketer is supposed to examine previous
research on his or her consumers and, if necessary,
conduct original consumer research in order to
design maximally effective marketing strategies.
Although large commercial marketers surely have
difficulty accumulating valid, reliable, and relevant
data about their consumers, the data gathering
problems facing the social marketer tend to be far
more serious. Social marketers typically find that:
• They have less good, secondary data available
about their consumers. Social marketers can
rarely go to the shelf to get fast, inexpensive
guidance from reports on previous consumer
studies. Most social organizations have done
little consumer research, and what has been
done has been weakened by small budgets
and, consequently, poor samples and simplistic analysis procedures. Moreover, there are
no syndicated services or panels available
that can provide reasonably priced data on
health behavior, safety behavior, conservation behavior, etc. Perhaps the best source
of secondary data is the academic or scholarly
literature. Journals such as the Journal of
Health and Social Behavior, American Journal of Public Health, Health and Society, and
Social Service Review can sometimes be helpful. But many academic works tend to be
narrowly focused and hard to tap for action80 / Journal of Marketing, Spring 1981
able marketing ideas (especially by people
with limited research backgrounds). Unfortunately, marketing academics-who have the
capability of producing consumer studies that
could be more readily used by social marketing planners-have given only limited attention to how consumers deal with social ideas
and behaviors (Rothschild 1979, Swinyard
and Ray 1977).
• They have more difficulty obtaining valid,
reliable measures ofsalient variables. In doing
primary data collection, social marketers
must ask people questions about topics such
as smoking, sickness, sex, and charitytopics that touch people’s deepest fears,
anxieties, and values. While people are generally willing to be interviewed about these
topics, they are more likely to give inaccurate,
self-serving, or socially desirable answers to
such questions than to questions about cake
mixes, soft drinks, or cereals. A recent study
on how to ask questions about drinking and
sex suggests that “threatening questions requiring quantified answers are best asked in
open-ended, long questions with respondentfamiliar wording” (Blair et al. 1977, p. 316).
Using such methods can be extremely timeconsuming and expensive.
• They have more difficulty sorting out the
relative influence of identified determinants
of consumer behavior. Social behaviors tend
to be extremely complex and usually hinge
on more than just one or two variables. The
reasons patients drop out of antihypertensive
drug therapy, for instance, may be related
to an individual’s limited self-discipline, lack
of family support, drug side effects, physician/patient miscommunication, or any combination of these and other factors. It is
extremely difficult for respondents to sort
out these contributing variables in their own
minds, and articulate them to a researcher
in such a way that they can be recorded and
analyzed for marketing planning. Furthermore, asking physicians to untangle patient
behavior is often no more enlightening than
asking the patients themselves. A recent
study of physicians revealed, for example,
that the reason patients were not on antihypertensive therapy was because they were
not following the regimen that had been
prescribed for them (U.S. Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare 1979). This
may be logical, in a self-evident sort of way,
but not very helpful to the marketing planner.
• They have more difficulty getting consumer
research studies funded, approved, and completed in a timely fashion. Social agencies
typically have very limited funds, and the
intangible output of a research study is often
more difficult to justify to donors (e.g.,
Congress) than the more tangible output of
a new program or publication. Furthermore,
if the federal government is involved in some
way in the proposed research, lengthy delays
often will occur while the questionnaire and
research design are approved by the agency
doing the study, its Department, the Office
of Management and Budget, and other parties. For example, the Office of Cancer
Communications of the National Cancer
Institute began the paperwork on a straightforward three stage study of knowledge,
attitudes, and reported behavior related to
breast cancer in April 1977. Red tape and
the system delayed the completion of the
analysis of the full study until July, 1980.
As a final comment on market analysis problems,
it should be pointed out that the red tape that chokes
and delays consumer studies can lead to some very
unsound but highly original research tactics. One
ploy is to conduct focus groups, always with fewer
than nine respondents. This gets around the letter,
if not the spirit, of the OMB clearance regulations
concerning what constitutes a survey. However,
this tactic, while it may provide some useful research
hypotheses, can lead to misleading conclusions and
poor planning. This is because the focus groups
are often not followed by larger scale studies to
quantify the preliminary findings and assess the
hypotheses. The misuse of qualitative research as
a substitute, rather than a precursor, to more definitive research appears to be a common problem
among many social agencies.
Market Segmentation Problems
The process of dividing up the market into homogeneous segments and then developing unique marketing programs for individual target segments
(while perhaps ignoring certain segments) is fundamental to modern marketing. Market segmentation
is generally viewed as being more productive than
treating the entire market in an undifferentiated
manner. Although market segmentation is widely
utilized and accepted by most profit making and
many nonprofit (e.g., universities, hospitals) marketers, social marketers find that:
• They face pressure against segmentation, in
general, and especially against segmentation
that leads to the ignoring of certain segments.
The notion of treating certain groups differently or with special attention while perhaps ignoring other groups completely, is not
consistent with the egalitarian and antidiscriminatory philosophies that pervade many
social agencies (particularly those within
government). The social marketer is, therefore, frequently asked to avoid segmenting
or to try to reach an unreasonably large
number of segments (Lovelock and Weinberg
1975). If a marketing plan has only a few
target markets identified, requests will be
made to add to the list of targets until, with
the limited funds that usually are available,
only a very broad and very shallow marketing
effort is authorized. This will produce the
opposite of the rifle approach the marketer
normally attempts to bring to bear.
An example of this problem occurred in
a multiagency federal effort in 1978-79 to
increase public understanding of the health
risks of exposure to asbestos, and to persuade
those exposed to get regular medical checkups, stop smoking, and seek prompt medical
treatment for respiratory illness. The serious
diseases associated with asbestos take from
15 to 35 years to develop, and workers
exposed during World War II (especially ship
yard workers) were identified as the primary
target segment for the program. However,
due to the mandates of some of the agencies
involved, it became necessary also to target
the effort to current workers. The characteristics of this segment differed substantially
from the other, and throughout the planning
and implementation of the program, there was
a constant problem about whether to divide
limited resources or simply take a general
audience route.
• They frequently do not have accurate behavioral data to use in identifying segments. The
data collection problems alluded to earlier
impede segmentation attempts by making it
difficult to separate users from nonusers.
Utilizing self reports on behaviors like breast
self-examination and contraceptive usage can
be very misleading, and it may be impossible
to obtain other behavioral measures (e.g.,
observational data).
• Their target segments must often consist of
those consumers who are the most negatively
Problems and Challenges in Social Marketing / 81
predisposed to their offerings. Social marketers often segment on the basis of risk to
the consumer. They will target their efforts
at drivers who tend to avoid using seat belts,
sexually active teenagers who tend to avoid
using contraceptives, heavy smokers, etc.
They may sometimes even target their efforts
at segments facing greater legal risk, such
as in a program recently formulated by William Novelli to persuade sheet metal contractors to recruit and accept more women into
their field. This segmentation approach
creates situations where social marketers face
target markets having the strongest negative
dispositions toward their offerings-the
exact opposite of the situation faced by most
commercial marketers. Moreover, as Rothschild (1979) has pointed out, these target
markets are frequently highly involved with
their negative feelings, making them much .
more resistant to changing their views than
people who have negative attitudes toward
low involved products like soap or bread.
Product Strategy Problems
Once the marketer has analyzed the market and
determined target segments, he or she should then
develop an offering that conforms closely to the
desires of the target segments. Conventional marketers will typically adjust product characteristics,
packaging, the product name, the product concept,
and the product position to increase the likelihood
of a sale to the target segments. However, social
marketers find:
• They tend to have less flexibility in shaping
their products or offerings (Kotler 1975,
Lovelock and Weinberg 1975). They often find
themselves locked into marketing a given
social behavior that cannot be modified or
changed. This could occur because the government might approve of only one way of
doing the behavior. For example, social
marketers may be able to market only one
way to get a home insured against floods
or one way to get a child immunized. On
the other hand, they may be able to market
several ways of quitting smoking, getting
physically fit, or conserving energy.
• They have more difficulty formulatingproduct
concepts. They frequently find that the product they are selling is a complex behavior
which may, in some cases, have to be repeat82 / Journal of Marketing, Spring 1981
ed over a considerable period of time. It
therefore becomes difficult to formulate a
simple, meaningful product concept around
which a marketing and communications program can be built. Effective concepts like
a squeezably soft toilet paper and an extra
thick and zesty spaghetti sauce do not come
readily to mind when thinking about selling
behaviors such as drug therapy maintenance
or use of an in-home colon-rectal cancer
detection test (i.e., the hemocult test). In
addition, the problems associated with doing
consumer research (discussed above) tend to
hinder product concept development.
• They have more difficulty selecting and implementing long-term positioning strategies. Assuming the social marketer has some ability
to shape the offering and to formulate a
relatively simple product concept, he or she
may still have major problems selecting a
product position that will be attractive and / or
acceptable to the extremely diverse publics
that impact on the typical social agency. The
current dilemma of the Asthma and Allergy
Foundation of America (AAF A) illustrates
this problem. The new executive director
wants to revitalize the agency at the national
headquarters level, to strengthen the existing
13 chapters, and to add new chapters
throughout the country. She sees several
positioning options open to help AAFA
achieve these objectives, including presenting
AAF A as a service organization, a research
organization, or a public education organization. The best positioning approach is not
clear, as each position has a positive appeal
for some publics and a negative appeal for
other publics. For instance, projecting a service position will probably help AAF A in
its exchange relationships with patients and
local chapter volunteers and personnel (who
apparently favor this stance), but it might
not be the best approach for attracting funds
from donors or for generating public clamor
for more congressional funding of research
and public education.
Even if the social marketer can settle on
a preferred positioning strategy, the implementation of this strategy over a lengthy
period of time may be impossible. Social
marketers frequently do not have the ability
to communicate persistently and present a
position-like Avis did with “We Try
Harder”-for more than a few months. The
result is often consumer confusion about what
it is an agency or program is trying to accomplish. The short life of many positioning
strategies is caused (in government agencies
at least) by frequent budget shifts, sudden
personnel changes, a desire to show that
something new and different is being tried,
and other forces. For example, the government rarely concentrates funds and effort on
a single problem for an extended period,
producing instead what seems like a disease
of the month approach; A notable exception
is the National High Blood Pressure Education Program, which has been unerring in
its positioning for eight years and has made
substantial progress in contributing to hypertension control in the United States (Ward
1978).
Because doing anything in the product strategy
is difficult for social marketers, many will ignore
this aspect of marketing planning and, instead,
concentrate their efforts on developing advertising
and promotion strategies for the product they have
been told to sell. However, social marketers should
recognize that although they may be unable to adjust
the performance characteristics of their products,
they may be able to adjust the perception characteristics of their products and achieve significant
results. Through minimal amount of product testing
research with consumers, and some creative concept
development and positioning, social marketers can
gain confidence that the signals being transmitted
by their offerings are favorable. They can also avoid
making the kind of product strategy mistake made
by the Agency for International Development in
a program designed to persuade Nicaraguan mothers
to give their babies the proper treatment for diarrhea
(a major cause of infant mortality). Problems occurred with this program because of lack of in-home
product testing of the super lemonade (a rehydration
solution) the program promoted. It was discovered
after the program had begun, that the solution may
not have been administered in some cases because
some mothers who sampled it before giving it to
their babies, thought it tasted bad. In addition, there
was evidence that some women had difficulty measuring the ingredients and concocting the solution.
The solution also caused the diarrhea to increase
for a short time after first being administered,
providing mothers with a potential signal that the
product was ineffective or perhaps even harmful.
In a new program in Honduras, extensive formative
research, including product testing, is being applied
(Smith 1980).
Pricing Strategy Problems
Marketers of most products and services find that
the development of a pricing strategy involves
primarily the determination of an appropriate (i.e.,
goal satisfying) monetary price to charge for an
offering. On the other hand:
• Social marketers find that the development
of a pricing strategy primarily involves trying
to reduce the monetary, psychic, energy, and
time costs incurred by consumers when engaging in a desired social behavior. Social
marketers generally have much more complex
objective functions than commercial marketers. They are primarily concerned with shifting birth rates, death rates, pollution levels,
and the like, and are concerned with the
financial consequences of their actions only
to the extent that they want to insure their
organization’s financial viability. They do not
price their offerings to maximize financial
returns but instead try to price offerings to
minimize any barriers that might be preventing consumers from taking desired actions.
This task is made difficult because consumer
research data are often not available to provide social marketers with information about
the psychic, energy, and time costs consumers perceive as being associated with a
particular action. In other words:
• Social marketers have difficulties measuring
their prices (Rothschild 1979). In addition,
the pricing task is made difficult because:
• Social marketers tend to have less control
over consumer costs. Unlike commercial
marketers who can readily change consumer
costs by essentially adjusting monetary
prices, social marketers often can do little
to change the time costs involved with carpooling, the embarrassment costs involved
with getting an examination for cervical
cancer, or other nonmonetary costs. In some
cases, all the social marketer can do is try
to make sure that consumers perceive the
various costs accurately and do not inflate
them in their minds. In other cases, however,
the social marketer may at least be able to
cut some red tape or eliminate other inconveniences to lower the price. This last strategy
is being employed in the food stamp program
of New York State. They have made it easier
to become enrolled and have eliminated the
necessity of putting up any money with food
stamps in the retail stores. Additional strateProblems and Challenges in Social Marketing / 83
gies for lowering time costs are discussed
in a recent paper by Fox (1980).
Channels Strategy Problems
Developing a channels strategy usually gets an
organization involved with selecting appropriate
intermediaries through which to distribute its products or offerings, and formulating ways to control
these intermediaries to make sure they behave in
a supportive manner. Social marketers typically
must distribute the idea of engaging in a social
behavior and/ or a place to engage in such behavior,
rather than a tangible product. However, they find
that, relative to more conventional marketers:
• They have more difficulty utilizing and controlling desired intermediaries. Social marketers often find that they cannot convince
desired intermediaries, such as doctors or the
television news media, to pass along and
support an idea, nor can they control effectively what these intermediaries might say
if they choose to cooperate. Control over
clinics, community centers, government field
offices, or other places where a social behavior might be performed or encouraged is also
frequently lacking. Unfortunately, social
marketers usually cannot provide incentives
to desired intermediaries to get cooperation,
as a business marketer would do, and they
generally cannot afford to build their own
distribution channels. To achieve a smoothly
functioning distribution system of basically
volunteers, they must rely primarily on the
attractiveness of their offerings, the creativity
of their appeals for assistance, and the quality
of their intermediary training programs.
ran up against the problem that, although the
physicians wanted to cooperate, they did not
know the most effective quitting skills, or
benefits, or how to communicate them. It,
therefore, became necessary to teach physicians how to teach patients-a task that was
complicated by the beliefs held by many
physicians that they are adept at all facets
of patient management.
Communications Strategy Problems
There are several approaches that marketers use
to communicate with their target markets. These
include advertising, public relations, sales promotion, personal contact, and atmospherics. Social
marketers, however, often find that their communications options are somewhat limited. As discussed
in the previous section, social marketers sometimes
find channels of distribution for their ideas unavailable or difficult to control. For instance:
• The federal flood insurance program has had
difficulty getting insurance companies’ agents
to add flood insurance to their product line.
The agents have seen this insurance as being
hard to learn about, hard to sell (with government forms and regulations to worry about),
and low in profitability.
• They usually find paid advertising impossible
to use. This problem may arise because of
advertising’s cost or because of media fears
of offending certain advertisers or audiences
by carrying messages about controversial
social issues. In addition, many voluntary
organizations may see paid advertising as
impossible to use because they fear the effects on all voluntary organizations. If the
American Cancer Society pays for an antismoking campaign, then the media might ask
the American Lung Association and others
to pay for their campaigns also. Furthermore,
government agencies may see paid advertising as impossible to use because they fear
criticism about wasting taxpayer money and
about having the media overly populated with
government sponsored advertisements (e.g.,
military recruitment). Questions could arise
about who controls the media if the government became the largest total advertiser.
An inability to use paid advertising restricts many social marketers to the use of
public service announcements. Since the
competition for PSA time and space is heated,
social marketers often find they cannot control the reach and frequency of their messages
among their target segments. Audience coverage, therefore, becomes much more uncertain.
• A program designed to motivate physicians
to teach their patients how to quit smoking
Social marketers face several other communications problems:
The problems associated with establishing, utilizing, and controlling distribution channels produce
a major difference between social and more conventional forms of marketing. The following two
examples illustrate just how serious these problems
can be.
84 / Journal of Marketing, Spring 1981
• They often face pressure not to use certain
types of appeals in their messages (Houston
and Homans 1977, Lovelock and Weinberg
1975). Donors and other influential parties
may not want to see a social change organization cheapened by the use of hard sell, fear,
or humor appeals. The use of hard sell and
fear appeals may also be unwise when target
audiences are strongly predisposed against
a social behavior. These appeals could backfire and solidify a person’s feelings against
behaviors such as seat belt usage, smoking
cessation, or responsible drinking. In general,
an audience reaction of they can’t tell me
how to run my life is much more likely to
confront a social marketer than a more conventional marketer.
• They usually must communicate relatively
large amounts of information in their messages. Social marketers typically need to say
more to consumers in a media message than
commercial marketers. A complex social behavior may need to be described, along with
the benefits of the behavior (i.e., a reason
why) and a time and a place for acting.
Particular emphasis must be given to presenting benefits, since the benefits of behaviors
like reducing salt in the diet or lowering one’s
thermostat might not be as obvious or personal to people as the benefits of buying a
new car or piece of clothing (Rothschild 1979).
Equally important is a message conclusion,
which tells in specific terms what (and where
and when) the consumer should do next. The
social marketer cannot be like most commercial marketers and assume that consumers
know this (e.g., pick up a six pack at the
store and drink it). Unfortunately, the need
to provide large amounts of information
forces many social marketing messages to
close with the old standby, For more information, please call or write . . . .
The need to communicate large amounts
of information makes it imperative for social
marketers to look beyond the use of public
service announcements toward the use of
nonadvertising channels of communication
(Rothschild 1979, Mendelsohn 1973). One
program that has clearly recognized this necessity is the breast cancer education program
of the National Cancer Institute. They have
recognized that communicating the benefits
of doing breast selfexamination is very problematical, since unlike many other preventive
health behaviors (e.g., exercise, taking blood
pressure medication), the payoff is perceived
by many women as the discovery of sickness
rather than the improvement of one’s health.
This program has, therefore, shifted its
emphasis away from media messages toward
more personal forms of communication using
health care professionals and other credible
intermediaries.
• They have difficulty conducting meaningful
pretests of messages. Given the problems
social marketers tend to have with selecting
appeals and communicating desired behaviors, it would seem essential for careful
pretesting to be done on social media messages. However, pretests of social messages
run up against the same funding and measurement problems discussed earlier. For
example, in a recent test of a message on
the need to take mental patients out of institutions and accept them into our communities, few respondents gave expected (but
socially unacceptable) comments such as: “I
don’t like the message. These people are
dangerous and unpredictable and I don’t want
them in my neighborhood.”
Pretesting is also made less meaningful
by the lack of any norms or standards against
which newly tested social messages can be
compared. Clearly, it would be instructive
to the social marketer to know how his / her
message performed compared to previously
tested messages on measures of comprehension, recall, believability, personal relevance,
etc. Fortunately, social marketers working
in the health area can now get comparison
data on pretest performances by using the
newly established Health Message Testing
Service. This service, funded and administered by the National Heart, Lung, and Blood
Institute, National Cancer Institute, and several other Federal agencies, has now tested
more than thirty-five television and radio
messages with samples of up to 300 individuals. The service invites randomly selected
subjects from specified target audiences to
view pilot television programs that have
health messages and other commercials
appearing within them. During an experimental period that is still underway, the service
has been conducting pretests for public and
nonprofit organizations at no charge. The data
accumulated by the service is also available
at no charge. A print. testing capability is
Problems and Challenges in Social Marketing / 85
now being added to the service (Novelli 1978,
Bratic and Greenberg 1980).’
Organizational Design and Planning
Problems
The well-managed marketing organization has a
marketing person in a key position at the top of
the organization chart and numerous well-trained
marketing individuals throughout the organization.
This organization has a carefully drawn marketing
plan developed annually, with procedures set up
to make sure the plan is implemented and monitored.
However, social marketers typically find that while
social organizations usually know something about
management and organizational design, they rarely
have an interest in setting up responsive marketing
organizations with marketing planning and control
procedures. Social marketers typically find that:
• They must function in organizations where
marketing activities are poorly understood,
weakly appreciated, and inappropriately located. Social organizations have a tendency
to adopt marketing in small doses. The management may decide to try marketing by hiring
a few employees or consultants with marketing backgrounds. These persons are generally
assigned to work with public affairs or public
information offices because management
generally equates marketing with communications or promotion. The results the marketers can achieve in these positions are quite
limited, since they have little influence over
program development and administration
Include all JASP output for reliability and validity in the Appendix.
Include a .csv file with your cleaned survey data.
With your dissertation topic in mind, design a survey that could be used to gather data to answer a possible research question. The survey should include ONLY TWO subscales and include 8 Likert scale questions. Consider the length of the survey, the number of questions, and the scale that could be used. The assignment requirements include:
Design a survey with 8 Likert scale questions (10 at most) and TWO subscales. Each subscale needs at least four questions.
Have at least 10 individuals complete the survey. The more people that complete your survey, the better. Also, feel free to create an online survey for easier distribution.
Using JASP and the collected survey data, determine your survey instrument’s validity (Exploratory Factor Analysis) and reliability (Cronbach’s Alpha).
In your write-up, include the following:
Research topic and name of the survey you created
Explain the two survey subscales and what they should be measuring.
Provide a list of all survey questions and answer options (in Appendix)
Which questions go with which survey subscale.
Survey Methods
How did you collect your data? Online, Face-to-face?
Who did you collect your data from?
How many people did you collect data from?
Cronbach Alpha reliability results in APA format. What would you do to improve the reliability? Try to get the highest Cronbach’s Alpha value you can.
Exploratory Factor Analysis (EFA) validity results in APA format. What would you do to improve the validity?
What are your thoughts on the survey/process?
Include all JASP output for reliability and validity in the Appendix.
Include a .csv file with your cleaned survey data.
Have at least one citation (peer-reviewed and/or textbook) to support your discussion.
NOTE: For this assignment, you are doing an EXPLORATORY Factor Analysis, not a Confirmatory Factor Analysis.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
Expatriate Teachers’ Sense of Cultural Belonging
James Riley
University of the Cumberlands
DSRT 834: Advanced Statistics
Doctor Kona Jones
June 18, 2023
1
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
2
Expatriate Teachers’ Sense of Cultural Belonging
Introduction
The research being conducted for the approved dissertation will investigate the
relationship between transformational leadership and cultural belonging. This survey instrument,
“Expatriate Teachers’ Sense of Belonging,” endeavors to measure expatriate teachers’ sense of
cultural belonging. This survey was developed with two subscales, group membership (GP) and
national privilege (NP). The four questions in the group membership subscale should measure
the extent to which expatriate teachers feel that they are part of and identify with the target
culture. The initial four questions in the national privilege scale endeavor to measure the extent
to which expatriate teachers feel they are treated the same and enjoy the same privileges as local
teachers. The complete eight question survey is listed in appendix A. The survey was
electronically distributed through email, social media, and WhatsApp to friends and former
colleagues. The survey was sent to fourteen people, and ten people completed the survey (71.4%
response rate).
Reliability
Cronbach’s alpha coefficient was checked for the “Group Membership” subscale. For the
“Group Membership” subscale, Cronbach’s α = 0.839. While there is no universally accepted
minimum reliability level, a Cronbach’s alpha greater than 0.70 is considered acceptable in many
fields of research (Bonett & Wright, 2014). Therefore, the “Group Membership” subscale was
found to have high internal consistency based on α = 0.839. JASP did indicate that the internal
consistency could be improved by removing question GM7, which would raise Cronbach’s α to
0.857. However, removing any additional questions would lower Cronbach’s alpha score, and
thus lower the measure of internal consistency.
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
3
Cronbach’s alpha coefficient was also checked for the “National Privilege” subscale. For
the “National Privilege” subscale, Cronbach’s α = 0.6. Since a Cronbach’s alpha greater than
0.70 is considered acceptable in many fields of research (Bonett & Wright, 2014), the “National
Privilege” subscale was not found to have high internal consistency. However, JASP did indicate
that the internal consistency could be improved by removing question NP4, which would raise
Cronbach’s α to 0.845. However, removing any additional questions would lower Cronbach’s
alpha score, and thus lower the measure of internal consistency.
Validity
An exploratory (EFA) was done to check the validity of the “Teachers’ Sense of Cultural
Belonging” survey subscales. The initial model with all eight questions was not significant ( p =
0.579). Further, Bartlett’s test showed that these questions were not a good fit for factor analysis
(p = 0.07). A parallel analysis based on factor analysis in JASP indicated one factor for this
survey. The survey was developed with two subscales (GM and NP), and this was confirmed
through a scree plot. Based on this scree plot, a manual analysis with two factors was performed
in JASP. All questions were loading on the appropriate factor, with the exception of NP4, which
did not load on either factor. As a result, question NP4 was removed, and a final test was run.
Bartlett’s test revealed that these questions (without NP4) were a good fit for factor analysis (p =
0.015). This two-factor model was not found to be significant X2 (8) = 9.038, p = 0.339.
As shown in the factor loading table below, each question loaded on the appropriate
subscale. Questions NP2 and NP6 had low scores indicating that they were not a good fit with
that factor. To increase the validity of the survey, these two questions could be removed.
However, that would reduce the survey only one question on national privilege (NP). Further,
this dramatic decrease in the number of questions could impact the reliability of the survey.
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
4
Therefore the questions and their intended purpose should be reviewed to see how they can be
adjusted to best measure national privilege.
Discussion
I am pleasantly surprised by the results of this survey and the data. I am disappointed that
the Chi squared analysis did not come back as significant. However, I was happy that all the
questions loaded based on their assigned factor. Further, I only needed to drop one question. As I
was designing the survey, I had a bad feeling about that question (NP4). I see the value in going
back to previously developed and tested survey instruments. For my own study, nothing that has
been previously created is a perfect fit. However, I can adapt certain measures from pre-existing
surveys and develop research instruments that fit my unique needs.
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
5
References
Bonett, D. G., & Wright, T. A. (2014). Cronbach’s alpha reliability: Interval estimation,
hypothesis testing, and sample size planning. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 36(1),
3–15. https://doi.org/10.1002/job.1960
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
6
Appendix A
Expatriate Teachers’ Sense of Cultural Belonging Survey Instrument
Each of the following each questions was administered in a 5-point Likert scale format.
1 = Strongly Disagree
2= Disagree
3 = Neutral
4= Agree
5 = Strongly Agree
1. I feel at home working in my school. (group membership)
2. As an expatriate teacher, my input is highly valued. (national privilege)
3. In my school, I am part of a team. (group membership)
4. I experience more restrictions as a foreign teacher. (national privilege)
5. Teaching at this particular school is important to me. (group membership)
6. The opinions of local teachers are more highly valued than my own. (national
privilege)
7. I expect to be part of this school for a long time. (group membership)
8. I am treated the same as local teachers. (national privilege)
The following questions address the subscale of “group membership:”
Question 1, 3, 5, and 7.
The following questions address the subscale of “national privilege:”
Question 2, 4, 6, and 8.
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
Appendix B
JASP Output for Reliability
This initial test for group membership showed that GM7 could be removed to enhance
reliability.
After removing GM7, no further adjustments would improve survey validity.
7
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
This initial test for national privilege showed that NP4 could be removed to enhance
reliability.
After removing NP4, no further adjustments would improve survey validity.
8
EXPATRIATE TEACHERS’ SENSE OF CULTURAL BELONGING
9
Exploring the Impact of Promoting Awareness on Purchasing Behavior:
Promoting Awareness and Purchasing Behavior Survey Study
Yujia Bai
University of the Cumberlands
DSRT-834-A01 Advanced Statistical Application
Dr. Kona Jones
06/18/2023
Introduction
Marketers have never made less effort to find a way to drive consumer demand and
change purchasing behavior. Among many marketing strategies, offering promotion seems the
most efficient way to change customer behavior. The price and quality of the products customers
perceive are essential factors in purchase decisions (Haghighatnia et al., 2018). But will the
promotion work equally for the customers with different awareness levels of promotion
activities? Thus, this survey explores the impact of promoting awareness of purchasing behavior.
Methods
To explore the relationship between promoting awareness and purchasing behavior, this
research uses a questionnaire to collect data on people’s promoting awareness and purchase
behavior based on promotions. An online survey powered by SurveyMonkey was used, and
some Excel questionnaires were sent via online message platforms. As a result, there are total 16
valid responses collected. The participants are a young-age group ranging from 20 to 35 years
old and mixed gender.
There are two subscales (A – Promoting Awareness and B – Purchasing Behavior) with
four questions in each subscale. For each question, the participant needs to choose from multiple
options based on a 5-point Likert scale (1 – Strongly disagree, 2 – Disagree, 3 – Neither agree nor
disagree, 4 – Agree, 5 – Strongly agree).
Survey questions (SurveyMonkey link):
•
Subscale 1: Promotion Awareness (A)
A1. I’m always aware of promotion information.
A2. I usually subscribe and review the promotions from store/retailer.
1
A3. I think knowing potential promotions before purchasing is important.
A4. I search for potential discounts before placing an order.
•
Subscale 2: Purchasing Behavior (B)
B1. Whether there is a discount or not will determine my purchasing decisions.
B2. When there’s a promotion, I tend to purchase more than I need.
B3. I tend to purchase unnecessary things because of promotions.
B4. Stuff in discount makes me feel it is lower quality.
Results
Reliability test
Cronbach’s alpha coefficient was checked for the “Purchase Behavior and Promoting
Awareness Survey” survey’s “Promotion Awareness (A)” and “Purchasing Behavior (B)”
subscales. For “Promotion Awareness (A)” subscale (A1, A2, A3 and A4), Cronbach’s α = .729
(see Appendix 1). For “Purchasing Behavior (B)” subscale (B1, B2, B3 and B4), Cronbach’s α
= .656 (see Appendix 2). A Cronbach’s alpha greater than .70 is considered acceptable, so the
“Promotion Awareness (A)” subscale of “Purchase Behavior and Promoting Awareness Survey”
survey was found to have high internal consistency while “Purchasing Behavior (B)” subscale
was not.
Even though “Promotion Awareness (A)” subscale has high internal consistency, JASP
indicated that Cronbach’s alpha could be improved to as highest as .917 if A1 and A2 removed
(see Appendix 3). Besides, to improve the internal consistency of “Purchasing Behavior (B)”
subscales, JASP indicated that if B1 and B4 were removed, the internal consistency would
2
improve to α = .832 (see Appendix 4). Since the improved Cronbach’s alpha of “Purchasing
Behavior (B)” subscale is greater than .70, this subscale will have high internal consistency if B1
and B4 removed.
Validity test
An exploratory factor analysis (EFA) was done to check the validity of the “Purchase
Behavior and Promoting Awareness Survey” survey subscales. The model was found not to be
significant, χ2(28) = 55.957, p = 0.527, indicating the model is not significant. Bartlett’s test
showed a significant p-value (p = 0.001), indicating that the survey questions were a good fit for
factor analysis. The survey was developed with two subscales, but the EFA indicated that A2
cannot fit into any subscales while other factors could fit into 2 subscales. See below for the
factor loadings of each subscale.
As shown on the Factor Loading table, some of the questions had low scores, indicating
that they weren’t a good fit with that factor. These questions included B1, B4, and A2. To
increase the validity of the survey, it is recommended that these three questions are removed. In
addition, in looking at the loading results, Factor 2 is loading with the B subscale, indicating a
good fit. Factor 1 has questions loading from both A and B subscales. This seems to indicate that
the questions are not different enough to warrant separate subscales. It is important to review the
3
questions and intended purpose of the questions to see if they need adjusted. Another potential
issue is with the sample size for the survey, Gorsuch (1983) recommended 100 response
minimum sample size for Factor Analysis. This survey only included 16 participants, which is
well under the recommended minimum number.
Conclusion
In summary, this survey is reliable but needs a better validity result. Moreover, the large
p-value of chi-square indicates the model is not significant, which means the research question
needs to be re-evaluated since the observed result differs from the expected results. Besides, the
question A2 “I usually subscribe and review the promotions from store/retailer”, B1 “Whether
there is a discount or not will determine my purchasing decisions”, and B4 “Stuff in discount
makes me feel it is lower quality” impact both reliability and validity results negatively. Thus,
those three questions need to be considered to be revised or removed from the current two
subscales. However, as mentioned above, the insufficient sample size might be the root cause of
all problems, and a larger sample size needs to be collected to make the final decision.
4
Reference
Gorsuch, R. L. (1983). Factor analysis (2nd ed.). Lawrence Erlbaum.
Haghighatnia, Abdolvand, N., & Rajaee Harandi, S. (2018). Evaluating discounts as a dimension
of customer behavior analysis. Journal of Marketing Communications, 24(4), 321–336.
https://doi.org/10.1080/13527266.2017.1410210
5
Appendix
Appendix 1: JASP reliability results of subscale A
Appendix 2: JASP reliability results of subscale B
6
Appendix 3: JASP reliability results of subscale A (A1, A2 removed)
Appendix 4: JASP reliability results of subscale B (B1, B4 removed)
Appendix 5: JASP EFA validity results
7
Hi please answer these 3 questions below using real sources. Paragraph for each. #9Why is popular culture a site of class struggle?In what way does the problem of class connect with cultural studies?How can we think of class distinction in terms of a daily experience?
Butler, J. (1988). Performative acts and gender constitution: An essay in phenomenology and feminist theory. Theatre Journal,40(4), 519-531.
-Introduce the article
-3 cited quotations that stood out to you, what did the text say that you found insightful or important
-What did you learn?
1 Point- if any of the above components are missing
0 Points- You don’t turn anything in, no late assignments
Quote to pay attention to:
“In this sense, gender is in no way a stable identity or locus of agency from which various acts proceede; rather, it is an identity tenuously constituted in time -an identity instituted through a stylized repetition” (p. 519).
PreviousNext
everything u need is below here the reading and how to do it
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
CMST 1700 Nature of Theory
APA Citation Unpacking the Basics
EVERY In Text Citation must have these THREE components.
•
•
•
Author(s) Name(s)
Year of Publication
Page Number
Option 1- Set Ups
Option 1 is great for setting up the articles you choose to use in your papers. It provides the reader with all the
pertinent information as well as the required information for a proper APA citation.
For an example lets say I’m working on a lecture about theory and I remember a quote about theory that would
be useful:
You can’t live in the world without an idea of the world, but it’s living that makes the ideas. You
can’t wait for a theory, but you have to have a theory.
The first thing to do is locate the text. I own a copy of this play, it is absolutely my most favorite piece of
literature ever written (it has been stated that it is the most prolific piece of literature written in the 20th century),
and because I am a huge nerd, I have tactile read the piece (several dozen times if I’m being honest) and am
able to find the quote fairly easily.
I format the quote by noting the page number AND then I immediately create an APA reference citation (see
top of page 3):
“You can’t live in the world without an idea of the world, but it’s living that makes the ideas. You can’t wait for
a theory, but you have to have a theory” (p. 144).
Kushner, T. (1993). Angels in America: A gay fantasia on national themes. New York: Theatre
Communications Group.
Setting up a quotation requires adding the authors name, year of publication, and other important identifying
information like that this was a play a rather significant one actually:
Kushner (1993) wrote in his prolific masterpiece Angels in America: A Gay Fantasia on National
Themes, “You can’t live in the world without an idea of the world, but it’s living that makes the ideas. You
can’t wait for a theory, but you have to have a theory” (p. 144).
Option 1 works well to set up quotes you choose to cite throughout your papers. It allows you to be precise,
name the significance of the piece, the author, or the quotation itself. It also allows the reader to be able to
locate the work should they want to read and learn more on the subject.
2
Option 2- Additional quotes from the same text
Let’s say that as I continue to expand on Kushner’s work and I think of another quote from his piece that would
help make another necessary point:
Nothing’s lost forever. In this world there is a kind of painful progress. Longing for what we’ve
left behind, and dreaming ahead.
Stylistically I could format the quotation differently because I already introduced the author and the piece.
Using additional portions of the text I can expand my arguments or review of the literature.
When examining how theory is applied to living life, Angels In America provides a melancholic yet empowered
notion capturing what it feels like living in a world that is rapidly changing. “Nothing’s lost forever. In this
world there is a kind of painful progress. Longing for what we’ve left behind, and dreaming ahead” (Kushner,
1993, p. 142). The text allows for the reader to further distinguish between the notion of theory and praxis;
theory being ideas about living in the world, while praxis is the action of living.
Properly citing the selected quote using Option 2 gives you the ability to stylistically engage with the material in
a way that isn’t focused on setting it up.
Option 3- Long Quotation
When you conduct research and locate a beautiful quote that perfectly argues an important point you are trying
to make. For all quotes that are over 40 words you will utilize a block quotation:
As the characters trudge through the realities of a modern plague, living life while dying the
simultaneous and dichotomous juxtaposition of theory and praxis
Together we organize the world for ourselves, or at least we organize our understanding of it; we reflect
it, refract it, criticize it, grieve over its savagery and help each other to discern, amidst the gathering
dark, paths of resistance, pockets of peace and places from whence hope may be plausibly expected.
(Kushner, 1993, p.155)
Number of Authors
• One author:
o (Field, 2005)
• Two authors:
o (Gass & Varonis, 1984)
• Three to five authors:
o First citation requires: (Tremblay, Richer, Lachance, & Cote, 2010)
o Subsequent citations: (Tremblay et al., 2010)
• Six or more authors:
o (Norris-Shortle et al., 2006)
3
Works Cited
Kushner, T. (1993). Angels in America: A gay fantasia on national themes. New York:
Theatre Communications Group.
Your Works Cited sheet needs to have the following components:
• Needs to be in alpha order
• Double Spaced
• Subsequent lines are indented
IMPORTANT WARNING- DO NOT RELY ON CITATION GENERATORS. LEARN HOW TO
PROPERLY CITE EACH TYPE OF TEXT. If you cannot memorize them, then create or find a cheat
sheet that is accurate and reliable, and have it handy so you can be consistent, and more importantly
precise. Academic Dishonesty is not predicated on if you intended to plagiarize, the focus of the inquiry
will be did you plagiarize. This is incredibly important. Works Cited sections are often patched together
in states of panic when work is done last minute.
Video Resources
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JobZQoQiszk
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY EXAMPLE
1
Kushner, T. (1993). Angels in America: A gay fantasia on national themes. New York:
Theatre Communications Group.
In the prolific masterpiece Angels in America: A Gay Fantasia on National
Themes playwright Kushner (1993) wrote, “You can’t live in the world without an idea
of the world, but it’s living that makes the ideas. You can’t wait for a theory, but you
have to have a theory” (p. 144). The incredibly dense play is typically performed over
the course of two evenings is postmodern and critical to say the least; the typical two- and
half-hour blocks standard for Broadway productions are performed each night. The play
situates the real life of Roy Cohn among six other fictional characters in 1985-1986 in
AIDS ravaged New York. The piece provides a significant deconstruction of Reagan
Neo-Conservative politics, liberal activism, a thorough look at the history of the Mormon
Church, mental illness, religion, forgiveness, and feminism to name a few of the central
themes.
This play is important when examining the connection between theory and praxis,
answering the central question how does the text set up and explore the differences
between the two?
When examining how theory is applied to the praxis of living, Angels In America
captures life in a rapidly changing world living and dying through a plague. Kushner sets
up an epic paradigm shift and for the first time frames the notion of someone living with
AIDS. “Nothing’s lost forever. In this world there is a kind of painful progress.
Longing for what we’ve left behind, and dreaming ahead” (Kushner, 1993, p. 142). The
text allows for the reader to distinguish between the notion of theory and praxis; theory
being ideas about living in the world, while praxis is the action or summation of the
actions of the living.
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY EXAMPLE
2
As the characters trudge through the realities of a modern plague, living life while
dying, the audience is asked to weigh simultaneous and dichotomous juxtaposition of
theory and praxis,
Together we organize the world for ourselves, or at least we organize our
understanding of it; we reflect it, refract it, criticize it, grieve over its savagery
and help each other to discern, amidst the gathering dark, paths of resistance,
pockets of peace and places from whence hope may be plausibly expected.
(Kushner, 1993, p.155)
Kushner empowers the audience to consider residing in a liminal space, the small
doorframe between theory and praxis. A space where one can consider inherited
histories, contextualize problematics, deconstruct nuance while negotiating hostile
dehumanizing institutions, navigating choice, and residing and relying on communities.
The play as text (theory), and the play as production (praxis) introduced the idea that
people afflicted with AIDS were people, and people living with AIDS were living With
AIDS; as were we all.
When theory is performed in praxis it poetically transforms to take on new life as
it did in the HBO Miniseries (2003) of the same name. Actress Meryl Streep played:
Hannah Pitt, Ethel Rosenberg, The Rabbi, The Continental Principality Oceania would go
onto summarize the intersection of theory and praxis by saying of Tony Kushner, “the
bravest thing in the world is that writer that sits alone in a room and works out his grief,
his rage, his imagination, and his deep desire to make people laugh, and he makes a work
of art that then transforms the world, with the truth, because that’s all we want, that’s all
we need.”
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY EXAMPLE
3
Works Cited
Costas, C. (Producer). Nichols, M. (Director). (2003). Angels In America. New York,
NY: HBO Video.
Kushner, T. (1993). Angels in America: A gay fantasia on national themes. New York:
Theatre Communications Group.
Mischer, D. (Producer). (2004, September 19). 56th Prime Time Emmy Awards. Los
Angeles, CA.
Annotated Bibliographies
Summarize the source based on the question “what does the field of Communication
Studies say about…”
What are the main arguments, thesis, findings?
If someone asked what this article is about, how would you explain it to them?
Every article is different so focus on explaining why this article helps you situate the
research. Outline the method, and provide details about the study.
o
o
o
o
o
crucial historical information
operational definitions
information that currently situates the article
important context about the article
important facts or data; statistical information, qualitative information, critical
claims
o use quotes to justify your summary
Be sure to only cite the authors. There are no secondary citations allowed in this paper.
If you like a quote from the literature review by another author you need to find the
citation in the workds cited and locate the article. Tactile read it so you are properly
citing the atricle. If you
ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY EXAMPLE
4
What to Look for:
The research question for my fictional paper was, “what does the field of Communication
Studies say about putting theory to practice?” Notice my use of the phrase “this work” as
opposed to “I think…” Do not use “I” you are sumarizing and synthesizing a research
article.
The Text
Action
The author*
focused on
The research
found
The study
showed
*These might be plural, be as accurate as possible.
Explain what they did
2 Page Synthesis, 5 Paragraph Structural Outline
Paragraph #1- Introduction
Introduce the article: name it, name the authors- last names only (no need for first names), it is a
strong choice to put the thesis of the article here. This helps lay the foundation of your synthesis
right off the bat.
Paragraph #2- First Quote
Set up the quote. “Give me the quote” (Last name, Year, pp#). Explain the quote. (Repeat)
Paragraph #3- Second Quote tell me what it means
Paragraph #4- Third Quote tell me what it means
Paragraph #5- Conclusion, restate your main point and throw in a few sentences about what you
learned
Things to Consider
• in a 2-page synthesis, you do not have room for fluff; this isn’t creative writing eloquent
prose isn’t the goal, the goal here is to be direct and accurate
• if you don’t know which quotes to choose here is a list of informational pieces that you might
want to consider focusing on:
o thesis sentence
o operational definitions, key terms, vocabulary words
o historical/foundational information
o theories used in the research
o key findings
o conclusions and considerations for future research
o quotations that blew you away, that scrambled your world view, a brilliant thought
that made you pause
• remember the point of this synthesis is for you to be able to discuss the article using the text
of the article
• in this class we use the language of the article to discuss the article, I want to be very clear
about this next part so there is no confusion. I am not interested in if you like, or do not like
the readings, films, or podcasts. This is not a restaurant, these papers are not Yelp reviews.
This a serious college course that you are paying $7500 for, if not accruing massive amounts
of debt to take.
• APA if you are new to APA and do not know the format remember the simple formulaSet up the quote. “Give me the quote” (Last name, Year, pp#). Explain the quote.
a 4-6 page paper in which you:Examine the manner in which Walmart’s business philosophy has impacted its perception of being unethical toward supply and employee stakeholders.Provide one example of Walmart in an ethical situation.Determine the major effects that Walmart’s business philosophy has had on its human resource practices and policies.Analyze two of the legal mandates that workers and the U.S. government have accused Walmart of violating.Provide an explanation as to why these legal mandates were violated, citing specific violations.Evaluate the efficiency of the structure of the ethical decision-making framework that Walmart has used in making its decisions.Provide a rationale for your response.Recommend two actions that Walmart’s human resources department should take in order to improve the employees’ perspectives of Walmart’s human resources policies.Provide a rationale for your recommendations.
I would like this project to be about museums in Oklahoma Cit, OK,USA
data collection will be from Twitter, using APIFY, and data analyses will be using tableau.
itle of the project
• A clear and concise title that is no more than 15 words
Introduction
• Background information (What is the context?)
• Synthesis of the relevant literature (What has been done? What is the gap?)
• Research questions or research purpose (What do you plan to do to shorten the gap?)
• Justification for the project (Why is it worth investigating?)
Proposed Methods
• Sample selection (What is the sampling criteria?)
• Data collection (What is the platform? What will you do to collect the data?)
• Data analysis (What are the types of analysis you plan to perform?)
Expected Outcomes
• Theoretical implications/business insights (2-3 points; What are the most critical findings?)
• Practical implications (2-3 points; Are the practical implications realistic and actionable?)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
HTM-5503 Big Data Analytics in Hospitality and Tourism Management (Fa23)
Proposal for Final Project
*Please ensure your proposal includes the following essential elements. The maximum page
limit is two (2), excluding references. Please submit this assignment in the MS Word format to
Canvas by the deadline of Oct. 23, 2023. Formatting: Typed, single spaced; Times New Roman,
12-point font; and 1” margins on top, bottom and sides.
**After submission, you will present the proposal of final project in an “elevator pitch1” format
(5 minutes) in class to seek feedback and refine the ideas. Visual aids, such as slides and info
graphics during your presentation are optional. You will decide what helps you convey the
message. Presentation date: Oct. 25, 2023.
Title of the project
• A clear and concise title that is no more than 15 words
Introduction
• Background information (What is the context?)
• Synthesis of the relevant literature (What has been done? What is the gap?)
• Research questions or research purpose (What do you plan to do to shorten the gap?)
• Justification for the project (Why is it worth investigating?)
Proposed Methods
• Sample selection (What is the sampling criteria?)
• Data collection (What is the platform? What will you do to collect the data?)
• Data analysis (What are the types of analysis you plan to perform?)
Expected Outcomes
• Theoretical implications/business insights (2-3 points; What are the most critical findings?)
• Practical implications (2-3 points; Are the practical implications realistic and actionable?)
References
• APA 7th style
(https://owl.purdue.edu/owl/research_and_citation/apa_style/apa_formatting_and_style_
guide/index.html)
1
See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Elevator_pitch for more information.
In academic or business literature find a case of successful large data mining that has benefited a business. The example should specifically address both the problem and the analytical methods. Either cluster analysis, hash functions, feature extraction, indexing, or machine learning should have be used in the example. The publication should not be older than 3 years.Describe the data that has been used, what analysis techniques they have conducted, and what results have been received. Discuss the limitations of the analysis. Come up with at least one idea on how this or similar study can be improved (combined with other data, explored additional relations, etc.).APA format
Introduction: 100 words (Antarc) (Background + Purpose + structure)
background phenomenon
Purpose: Why do we do this survey? What are the similarities and differences in the marketing strategies of two brands belonging to the same company?
structure
Nowadays, beauty brands use targeted marketing strategies according to different market segments to influence the purchase decision-making process of target consumers. For example, NYX uses a price strategy of keeping prices low to attract young consumers (Mangurali, 2022). Given the dynamics and diversity of consumer groups, how to use marketing strategies to remain competitive has become the primary challenge facing beauty brands.
The purpose of this report is to explore the similarities and differences in the marketing strategies adopted by two beauty brands affiliated with Estee Lauder – Maybelline and LA MER for different market segments by analyzing three real-life examples. difference.
This report is divided into 5 parts, namely Introduction; Aggregation and description of examples; Preliminary and in-depth analysis of examples; Recommendation and Conclusion.
Among them, the part I am responsible for is In-depth analysis of the examples 500 words
outline：
(Two brands) Similarities and differences
How effective is one method in different brands?
Does the same brand use different strategies for different people (consumer segments) and different scenarios?
Critical Thinking: Effectiveness, Ethics
Effectiveness and limitations: Is it effective in different scenarios?
For the report, please use 12-point font, at least 2cm margin spacing throughout, 1.5 line spacing, and full justification. Remember to insert page numbers.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
In the current state, beauty brands use targeted marketing strategies based on different
market segments to influence the purchasing decision process of their target consumers. For
example, NYX uses a low-price strategy to attract younger consumers (Mangurali, 2022).
Given the dynamic and diverse nature of consumer segments, the use of marketing
strategies to remain competitive has become a primary challenge for beauty brands.
This report aims to analyse three real-life examples to explore the similarities and
differences between the marketing strategies adopted by two Estée Lauder beauty brands,
Maybelline and LA MER, in targeting different market segments.
This report is divided into five sections: Introduction; Aggregation and description of
examples; Preliminary and in-depth analysis of examples; Recommendation; and
Conclusion.
Aggregation and description of examples 400 字 （YANG)
Example 1: (anchoring)
Maybelline often runs promotions, discounts and special offers. As a consumer who often
goes to Chemist Warehouse, I often see the entire shelf covered with special price tags in
Maybelline display cabinets. As shown in the picture, the label clearly shows the discount
percentage. The “40% off” on the label is very conspicuous, as well as the original price and
the discounted price. I always stop by when I see these discount tags. These specials offer
lower prices that give me the perception of saving money, and the fear of missing out on the
opportunity drives me to shorten my decision-making time. Also, because they are cheap,
there are some new products that I haven’t tried that I’m willing to take the plunge and buy.
(Critical; impulsive spending, over-reliance on discounts)
Example 2: (scarcity)
And La Mer is expensive and doesn’t usually offer very deep discounts. But there are still
many consumers who are keen on this brand. From time to time, La Mer launches limited
edition products in different packaging or formulations. When it was new, I saw many
classmates and friends on social media buying this limited edition, as if more people would
be happy because they bought the limited edition (herd mentality). When I first went to the
counter, the salesperson said they were sold out. When I was shopping for the second time,
the salesperson told me that the stock was currently low. I bought the product immediately
after hearing what she said.
(Critical: Insufficient supply may lead to consumer dissatisfaction, so we need to control it
carefully)
Although it is expensive, I don’t do too much searching about the ingredients because I
always believe that the more expensive something is, the better. (Stereotype)
Example 3:(the sunk-cost)
I found that whether it’s Maybelline or La Mer, during certain holidays, there will be free small
gifts for every dollar spent. Brands sometimes do cross-selling (can you give me a specific
example of which brand does these two brands cross-sell with something, and then mention
boundling). I originally bought liquid foundation, but I got a discount on lipstick. . Even if
many consumers have already purchased the product they want, they will still purchase
other products to reach the amount required by the promotion. (For impulsive spending,
salespeople may encourage unnecessary waste)
Maybelline often conducts promotional activities, discounts, and special offers. As a frequent
consumer who goes to the chemist warehouse, I often find Maybelline display cabinets filled
with special price labels on the entire shelf. As shown in the figure, the label clearly shows
the percentage of discount. The “40% off” on the label is very prominent, in addition to the
original price and discounted price. I always stop because I see these discount labels. These
special offers offer lower prices, which makes me feel like I’ve saved money and afraid of
missing out on this opportunity, thereby shortening my decision-making time. In addition,
there are some new products that I have not tried before, and I am also willing to take risks
to purchase. (Impulsive consumption, excessive reliance on discounts)
The sea blue puzzle is expensive and usually does not offer very large discounts. But there
will still be many consumers who are passionate about this brand. Sea Blue Mystery
occasionally launches limited edition products in different packaging or formulas. When I first
started my new year, I saw many classmates and friends purchasing this limited edition on
social media, as if more people would be happy to buy it. When I first went to the counter,
the salesperson said it was already sold out. On the second shopping trip, the salesperson
told me that the inventory was already low, and I immediately purchased the product upon
hearing what she said.
(Critical: Insufficient supply may lead to dissatisfaction)
Although it is expensive, I don’t do too many searches about ingredients because I always
believe that the more expensive something is, the better. (Stereotypes)
I found that whether it’s Maybelline or La Mer, during certain holidays, there will be free small
gifts for every dollar spent. Brands sometimes do cross-sells, and I originally purchased the
liquid foundation, but I got a discount on the lipstick. Even if many consumers have already
purchased the product they want, they will still purchase other products to reach the amount
required by the promotion.
LA MER SCARCITY
MAYBELLINE ANCHORING
Preliminary and in-depth analysis of examples
Preliminary analysis of individual examples 500 字 (Bella)
Example 1: Maybelline usually emphasizes affordable prices and popular products to
attract price-sensitive consumers (Chen et al., 2022). Popular marketing strategies use
anchoring traps to attract customers who are first attracted by discount information
and affordable prices. Causes cognitive bias, which attracts the attention of
consumers at the cognitive stage. Another study shows that Maybelline’s social
strategy relies on the development of visual content (Thomas, 2023). Maybelline’s
success lies in utilizing a mixed marketing strategy. Maybelline mainly relies on thirdparty retailers, such as pharmacies, supermarkets and online channels. This
dependency may limit a company’s independent control over product placement,
pricing strategies and promotions, potentially impacting sales performance and
customer experience. Maybelline has limited involvement in leveraging direct-to-end
consumer channels such as independent retail stores and private label e-commerce
platforms. This situation may cause restrictions on the brand’s customer relationship
establishment and personalized consumption experience (Admin, 2023). Therefore,
Maybelline uses eye-catching low-price information to grab customers’ attention,
and price-sensitive customers tend to Decision stage to choose Maybelline products.
As one of the global cosmetic brands, Maybelline takes a significant market position
in the beauty industry.
Purchasing affordable products can bring a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment
as consumers feel they are getting great value for money when shopping. This sense
of psychological reward can enhance brand loyalty.
Example 2: The story of La Mer begins with Dr. Max Huber’s burn accident in the
laboratory. After more than 6,000 experiments over 12 years, Miracle Broth was
adopted as the soul ingredient of the brand. Its products miraculously repaired the
skin. Anti-aging effect (La Mer, 2023).
“We’re not a brand that does things broadly,” said Kendal Ascher, vice president and
general manager of La Mer North America. “It’s not ‘cater to the masses and try to
get share of market and volume,’ it’s ‘love the customers you have and really spoil
and pamper them so they feel like they’re part of a club.'” (Collins, 2019).
Lamer pays more attention to conveying brand value, making customers feel that
skin care is a kind of enjoyment, and injecting a sense of ritual into skin care. Making
them more inclined to pursue luxury goods, focus on sensory experiences, and satisfy
social and higher self-care needs. In addition, the World Oceans Day launched by the
United Nations was promoted and established by La Mer (Eksouzian, 2021). For
consumers who care about environmental protection, this move will improve the
brand image of La Mer in the information search and evaluation of alternatives
stages. Compared with other brands of liquid foundation, which only strive to
improve the basic functions of liquid foundation, La Mer adds skin-nourishing
ingredients into the liquid foundation, advocating that it can also nourish the skin
during the wearing make-up period (INCI, 2023), distinctiveness and brand name
But the price is high (for comparison, on Amazon’s official website in Australia, 30ml
of Maybelline liquid foundation: the discount is $13, while the price of 30ml of La
Mer liquid foundation is $228). It will make consumers easily fall into Representative
heuristic and stereotype. With low production and low inventory, La Mer wants to
enhance the product’s appeal by maintaining its rarity and creating scarcity.
Moreover, La Mer has a higher price, and limited production is a common behavior in
the high-end market, which can maintain price stability and maintain brand value.
Example 3: Cross-selling and bundling behaviors take advantage of the sunk-cost
trap and framing trap in consumer cognitive traps. This has changed the consumer
psychology. The strategy in this case may encourage customers to get greater
discounts by purchasing more products, thereby obtaining additional value and
causing consumers to over-consumption. Ignoring actual purchase needs and
objective purchase costs tends to avoid making informed purchasing decisions.
Without this strategy, customers may purchase the specified products they need.
However, after launching this activity, customers may choose to continue purchasing
products they do not need because of the resources they have already invested in
the same brand products, thereby receiving what the merchant calls a greater
discount.
For merchants, it can speed up the customer’s decision-making process and make
purchasing decisions faster. The act of sending samples can attract new customers at
low cost, promote products, and increase brand awareness. But for La Mer, the
brand’s image uses scarcity caused by limited quantities and low production to
attract customers. However, providing samples means increasing inventory, which is
contrary to the brand value.
In-depth analysis of the examples 500 字 (Yutong)
outline：
(Two brands) Similarities and differences
How effective is one method in different brands?
Does the same brand use different strategies for different people (consumer segments) and
different scenarios?
Critical Thinking: Effectiveness, Ethics
Effectiveness and limitations: Is it effective in different scenarios?
Recommendation 300 字 （Yi)
Role: As a consumer, what should you do to avoid falling into the trap?
How to use it as a marketer
Stage: current environment + how to do in future environment (trend)
Conclusion：200 字(Antarc)
Control and autonomy of the subsidiaryHow autonomous is the subsidiary? How helpful are
the home market stakeholders overall in
supporting the subsidiary?
References
Admin. (2023, April 24). Maybelline SWOT analysis – The strategy story. The Strategy
Story – Simplifying Business Strategies. https://thestrategystory.com/blog/maybellineswot-analysis/
Brand Story. La Mer. (2023). https://www.lamer.com.cn/brand-story
Chen, Y., Feng, X., He, Z., & Liu, Y. (2022, April 29). The strategy of Maybelline to
increase consumers’ purchase intentions. The Strategy of Maybelline to Increase
Consumers’ Purchase Intentions | Atlantis Press. https://www.atlantispress.com/proceedings/icssed-22/125973967
Collins, A. (2019, February 21). La Mer Marketing Heritage Brand to millennials – and
Hollywood. WWD. https://wwd.com/feature/la-mer-is-marketing-heritage-brand-tomillennials-and-hollywood-1203027658/
Eksouzian, A. (2021, June 7). Vogue Australia.
https://www.vogue.com.au/culture/features/la-mer-world-oceans-day-2021/newsstory/f6d9eebc9d59a28495eac128cd6a0ff7
La mer the Soft Fluid Long Wear Foundation. Ingredients explained. (2023).
https://incidecoder.com/products/la-mer-the-soft-fluid-long-wear-foundation
Mangurali, H. (2022, February 9). NYX Professional Makeup Case Study – The
Accessible Pro Brand – 440 Industries. 440industries.com.
https://440industries.com/nyx-professional-makeup-case-study-the-accessible-probrand/
Thomas, S. (2023). Maybelline Marketing Strategy & ADS – the biggest cosmetics
brands. Avada. https://avada.io/resources/maybelline-marketing-ads.html
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
What is the present worth of an income producing property which receives a net operating income of $30,000 during year 1, $32,000 in year 2, $40,000 in year 3, and $43,000 in year 4? Assume the property is sold at the end of year 4 for $50,000 net of selling expenses and the discount rate is 15%.
Question#2
How many months does it take to amortize a loan with an outstanding balance of $200,000, monthly payments of $1,245, and an interest rate of 3%?
Question#3
A retail shopping center was purchased in 2016 for $2.1 million in cash. During the next four years the property appreciated at 4 percent per year. Annual depreciation allowance is $16,000 per year. At the end of year 4, the property is sold; selling expenses are 8 percent. What is the after-tax equity reversion for an investor with an income tax rate of 28 percent, a capital gains tax rate of 20 percent and a deprecation recapture of tax rate of 25 percent?
Question#4
An office building situated on a 1-acre parcel of land has an expected gross income of $106,000 per year with a vacancy rate of 7.5 percent. What is the value of the property and improvements assuming a gross income multiplier of 6.5? If the land area is worth $45,000 what is the value of the building?
Question#5
The owner of a financially distressed property in Texas can dispose of it at a $2 million loss today. If the period of recovery for the project is expected to be three years, with annual before tax carrying costs of $1,000,000, $800,000 and $600,000 respectively, should the property be sold? Assume that the market value of the property immediately before the downturn in the Texas market was $10,000,000. Today the market value of the property is estimated to be $8,000,000. In three years, the market value of the property is expected to again be $10,000,000. The appropriate discount rate is 15%. Selling expenses are assumed to be zero. Should the property be sold if the discount rate is now 20%?
The dataset ToyotaCorolla.cv contains data on used cars on sale during the late summer of 2004 in the Netherlands. It has 1436 records containing details on 38 attributes, including Price, Age, Kilometers, HP, and other specifications. We plan to analyze the data using various machine learning techniques described in future chapters.a. The dataset has two categorical attributes, Fuel_Type and Color. Describe how you would convert these to binary attributes. Confirm this using RapidMiner’s operators to transform categorical data into dummies. What would you do with the attribute Model?b. Prepare the dataset (as factored into dummies) for machine learning techniques of supervised learning by creating partitions using RapidMiner’s Split Data operator.Select attributes, and use default values for the random seed and partitioning percentages for training (50%), validation (30%), and holdout (20%) sets. Describe the roles that these partitions will play in modeling.
Agile Project
management
Lean Workhop:5S and
DMAIC
Define
● Defining the problem and identifying the waste: How does the disorganized digital workspace
lead to inefficiency?
● Goal setting: Clarify the goal of creating an organized and efficient digital workspace. (Set in
order)
● Identifying stakeholders: Determine who is affected by the current disorganization and who
will benefit from the improvements.
● Breakdown of current folder structure: Identify redundant or unnecessary files and folders.
● Defining success metrics: Set metrics to measure the success of the organized workspace.
Measure
● Quantifying the problem: Measure the time spent searching for files to quantify the
●
●
●
●
inefficiency.
Inventory of digital assets: Create an inventory of all files and folders to understand the
extent of disorganization.
Access patterns: Identify frequently accessed files to prioritize their organization.
User feedback: Gather feedback on pain points related to digital organization.
Benchmarking against best practices: Compare the current state to industry standards and
best practices.
Analyse
● Root cause analysis: Identify the root causes of digital disorganization. (Sort)
● Categorization analysis: Analyze patterns to determine how files should be categorized. (Set in
order)
● User behavior analysis: Understand how users interact with the digital workspace. (Shine identifying areas for improvement)
● Impact analysis: Assess the negative impact of disorganization on productivity and
collaboration.
● Visualization of pain points: Use visual aids to highlight the challenges in the current structure.
Improve
● Proposed folder structure: Develop a new folder structure based on the analysis.
●
●
●
●
(Set in order)
Naming conventions: Establish clear and consistent naming conventions for files
and folders. (Standardize)
Tagging and metadata: Implement metadata and tagging for improved searchability.
(Shine)
Automation opportunities: Explore automation tools to streamline organization
tasks. (Shine)
User training: Prepare user training materials for the new system. (Standardize)
Control
● Implementation plan: Plan the phased implementation of the new folder structure.
●
●
●
●
(Standardize)
Monitoring and feedback loop: Create a mechanism to gather feedback and
continuously improve. (Sustain)
Change management: Address resistance to change and encourage adoption of the
new system. (Sustain)
Role assignments: Define responsibilities for maintaining the organized system.
(Sustain)
Contingency plan: Prepare for potential challenges during and after
implementation. (Control)
Assignment
● Define
○ Current State/Problem: what, where, how often, impact (why?)
○
Future state/ Goal
● Measure
○
show metrics
● Analyse
○ What’s the root cause/ Current patterns (Sort)
● Improve
○
○
Implement (Set in Order, Shine, Standardize)
Your results, Before/After
● Control
○ Sustain- Plan/Structure for moving forward
Yulia’s PC Downloads folder
● Define:
Problem: multiple purpose folder, used for
storage, hard to find files when I need them
Current State
Future State: organized files with a system for
personal, work, business.
0 files (LTA)
● Measure
● Break-down by file type
○ PDF 186
○ Excel 55
○ Zip 37
○ Word 25
○ Powerpoint 20
○ Pictures (JPEG, PNG,JPG) 17
○ Txt 7
○ Calendar 4
○ Folder 3
○ Other
– Email 1
– Book Epub 1 (LTA)
– Set Up 1 (LTA)
● Analyse (Sort)
● Improve (Set in Order, Shine, Standardize)
Sorted: 238 files
Waste (duplicates, old, not used) :
25 files (27.3MB)
Control
● Learning:
– Sorting takes more time than expected
(238 files in 45 min)
–
Not clear from name what each file is, need
to open it.
–
Sorting by file type vs by file size
● Next steps
○
○
Complete the remaining files – set time
Identify files by renaming them as soon as
they are downloaded
■ Exs, for bills : Date- Company
o
Move to appropriate location
5S Audit Bi-monthly
– Archive all remaining files into appropriate
locations, if needed
– How many files are LTA? ( should be 0)
Throughout this course, you will have the opportunity to apply project management concepts to your Integrative Project (selected in PROJ-610). In this workshop, you will create a resource management plan, including a roles and responsibilities chart.
Upon successful completion of this assignment, you will be able to:
Evaluate tools and techniques for resource planning.
Create a Resource Management Plan.
Resources
Textbook: Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Video & Transcript: Resource Planning in Project Management
Video & Transcript: PMP Human Resource Management Theories, Organizational Theories, Tools and Techniques (Plan Resource Management)
Web page: Project HEADWAY Resource Management Plan
Note: The inclusion of publicly-accessible video links in your courses and program should neither be considered a recommendation or endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.
Background Information
Now that you have a solid understanding of resource management planning, you will create a resource management plan for your Integrative Project (selected in PROJ-610) assignment. Your plan will include components such as a roles and responsibilities chart, project organizational chart, recognition plan, methods for identifying and acquiring resources, and strategies for developing and managing your team. Also, write a brief summary/introduction for your resource management plan outlining any development methods, assumptions, or relevant points of interest for your stakeholders.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the following resources, as needed:
PMP Exam Prep, Chapter 9: Resources
Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
Watch the videos:
Resource Planning in Project Management (4:32 min)
Transcript of the “Resource Planning…” video.
PMP Human Resource Management Theories, Organizational Theories, Tools and Techniques (Plan Resource Management) (3:51)
Transcript of the “PMP Human…” video.
The web page, Project HEADWAY Resource Management Plan Template. Choose Log in using your PMI. You will use the PMI Log in information you set up in PROJ-610.
In this assignment, you will:
Create a Resource Management Plan for your integrative project using the “Resource Management Plan Template” provided. This template is a recommendation, but you may include alternative or additional components to your plan.
Create a roles and responsibilities chart for your project. This should include at least four project resources.
Write a summary/brief introduction for your resource management plan to provide stakeholders an overview of aspects of the plan and how your plan was completed.
Clearly label all sections of your plan, including your introduction and your roles and responsibilities chart.
Note: You will build upon your Resource Management Plan with deliverables in Workshop Three (Talent development) and Workshop Five (Team management).
Your submission should be a minimum of 350 words.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
When you’ve completed your assignment, save a copy for yourself and submit a copy to your instructor by the end of the workshop using the quick link or the Activities button.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
10/15/23, 3:01 AM
Preview Rubric: PROJ640 1.4/2.3/2.4 Dropbox 2(C) x 4(L) (50 Pt) – 4FA2023 Talent Management (PROJ-640-01B) – Indiana Wes…
PROJ640 1.4/2.3/2.4 Dropbox 2(C) x 4(L) (50 Pt)
Course: 4FA2023 Talent Management (PROJ-640-01B)
Criteria
Content
Quality
Grammar,
Spelling,
Length, and
Citation
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Criterion Score
40 points
39 points
20 points
10 points
/ 40
(40 points
possible)
(21-39 points
possible)
(11-20 points
possible)
(0-10 points
possible)
You
demonstrate
clear, insightful
critical thinking
in the
application of
the project
management
concepts,
provide
sufficient
specific
examples, and
show all your
work.
You
demonstrate
competent
critical thinking
in the
application of
the project
management
concepts,
provide limited
specific
examples, and
show some of
your work.
You
demonstrate
limited critical
thinking in the
application of
the project
management
concepts,
provide no
examples, and
fail to show
your work.
You
demonstrate
little to no
critical thinking
in the
application of
the project
management
concepts,
provide no
examples, and
fail to show
your work.
10 points
9 points
6 points
3 points
(10 points
possible)
(7-9 points
possible)
(4-6 points
possible)
(0-3 points
possible)
You have
minor sentence
structure
errors
(fragments,
run-ons), with
correct
spelling,
punctuation,
and
capitalization,
but limited
You have
several errors
in sentence
fluency, with
multiple
fragments or
run-ons and
poor spelling,
punctuation,
and/or word
choice.
You have
serious and
persistent
errors in
sentence
fluency,
sentence
structure,
spelling,
punctuation,
and/or word
choice.
You use
complete
sentences with
correct
spelling,
punctuation,
and
capitalization,
as well as
Overall Score varied diction
and word
choices.
Total Points Your
assignment
0 points minimum
length is
correct and
you follow APA
formatting.
diction and
word choices.
Your
assignment
length is
correct and
Your
assignment
length is
inadequate
and/or you
follow APA
formatting, but
you follow APA your writing
formatting
contains
with only
several errors.
minor errors.
Total
/ 10
Your
assignment
length is
inadequate
and/or you do
not follow APA
formatting.
/ 50
https://brightspace.indwes.edu/d2l/lp/rubrics/preview.d2l?ou=212093&rubricId=672779&originTool=quicklinks
1/2
10/15/23, 3:01 AM
Preview Rubric: PROJ640 1.4/2.3/2.4 Dropbox 2(C) x 4(L) (50 Pt) – 4FA2023 Talent Management (PROJ-640-01B) – Indiana Wes…
capitalization,
spelling,
poor spelling,
structure,
as well as
punctuation,
punctuation,
spelling,
Overall Score varied diction and
and/or word
punctuation,
and word
capitalization,
choice.
and/or word
choices.
but limited
choice.
Your
diction and
assignment
Your
Total Points Your
word choices.
assignment
length is
assignment
0 points minimum
length is
Your
inadequate
length is
correct and
assignment
and/or you
inadequate
you follow APA length is
follow APA
and/or you do
formatting.
correct and
formatting, but not follow APA
you follow APA your writing
formatting
contains
with only
minor errors.
Total
formatting.
several errors.
/ 50
https://brightspace.indwes.edu/d2l/lp/rubrics/preview.d2l?ou=212093&rubricId=672779&originTool=quicklinks
2/2
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain management of these business become more and more competitive, the customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures, images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain, describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process that is applicable.(2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation sustainable and new modes of transportation.(2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason.(2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons.(2MM)
Throughout this course, you will be provided with many opportunities to synthesize the project management theories and practices you’ve learned about and to apply them to a specific business scenario or challenge. These cases will also require you to reflect upon your experiences that are relevant to project management competencies and processes.
Upon successful completion of this assignment, you will be able to:
Apply creative thinking and problem-solving skills in resource planning and team acquisition.
Evaluate tools and techniques for acquiring project resources.
Resources
Textbook: Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Article: Battling the Resource Curse
Video & Transcript: Planning Human Resources and Acquiring the Project Team
Note: The inclusion of publicly-accessible video links in your courses and program should neither be considered a recommendation or endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.
Background Information
Now that you have examined the process of acquiring resources, you will reflect upon a specific project scenario that requires you to apply the project management concepts and best practices you have learned about in this workshop. Submit a brief analysis of the tools and techniques needed to acquire resources based upon the project characteristics described in this scenario. Discuss how each tool will be utilized and how it will benefit the project. Additionally, share the project management skills, such as negotiation, that will be critical for successful resource acquisition based upon the organizational structure and nature of the project.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the following resources, as needed:
PMP Exam Prep, review Chapter 9: Resources
Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, review Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
Read the article Battling the Resource Curse.
Watch the video Planning Human Resources and Acquiring the Project Team
Watch from 7:15 to 19:00 for the Planning HR process overview.
Watch from 19:00 to the end for the Acquiring Project Team overview.
Transcript of the videos.
Write a business letter to your project sponsor describing your planned approach to acquire resources (build a team) to work on an upcoming project.
Assume that you are in a project leadership position in a medium sized Specialty Coffee Distribution company, named “CafeLatte”.
You have been asked to launch a new project, to establish a storefront/coffee shop where the coffee you distribute will be available to retail customers, by the pound for home brewing or by the cup in the coffee shop setting.
You need to determine the necessary resourcing to get the project done.
Here are some assumptions:
Some of the team will come from within CafeLatte’s current staff, and they report to functional managers throughout the company. Other members of your new team will be contracted from external sources.
You will need a construction team, interior designers, a Human Resource Partner to staff the new team, and product planners to establish the marketing strategy.
Assess the overall resource needs for the work (note: you do not need to plan each individual role/person for the construction work- limit your overall plan to no more than 15 resources/people).
Compose a letter to the business owner in which you explain your recommendation for building the team.
Discuss which roles should be internally filled- how many people you need in each role and the level of expertise/experience is required
Explain which roles you recommend contracting outside of CafeLatte, and provide reasoning for each of your recommendations.
Your submission should be a minimum of 350 words.
Review the rubric your instructor will use to evaluate the quality of your work and make improvements as needed to meet the expectations outlined.
Final PDF to printer
22
CHAPTER 1
What Is Organizational Behavior?
1.2 Think again about the worst coworker you’ve ever had—the one who did some of the things
listed in Table 1-1. Think about what that coworker’s boss did (or didn’t do) to try to
improve his or her behavior. What did the boss do well or poorly? What would you have
done differently, and which organizational behavior topics would have been most relevant?
1.3 Which of the individual mechanisms in Figure 1-1 (job satisfaction; stress; motivation; trust,
justice, and ethics; learning and decision making) seems to drive your performance and
commitment the most? Do you think you’re unique in that regard, or do you think most
people would answer that way?
1.4 Create a list of the most successful companies that you can think of. What do these compa-
nies have that others don’t? Are the things that those companies possess rare and inimitable
(see Figure 1-2)? What makes those things difficult to copy?
1.5 Think of something that you “know” to be true based on the method of experience, the
method of intuition, or the method of authority. Could you test your knowledge using the
method of science? How would you do it?
Case: Levi’s
Clearly the end goal behind the Improving Worker Well-Being initiative is laudable. The
stickier question is how to achieve that goal in 72 different factories. A natural temptation
would be to focus on interventions with universal appeal and to roll out those same interventions in all 72 places. That sounds both efficient and consistent, doesn’t it? Levi’s is
taking the opposite approach. It offers funding and guidance but lets the specifics vary by
supplier and by region. For example, the company connected one of its suppliers—Apparel
International—with a nonprofit to help it identify need areas. The resulting feedback led to
better water fountains, better overhead fans, microwaves and griddles in the cafeteria, and a
new soccer field.
The feedback also led Apparel International to improve its managers—who had a reputation
for being disrespectful and authoritarian. Explains Oscar González French, the president of the
supplier, “We had lots of people complaining their supervisors didn’t have the right leadership
style—they were too strong, too blunt, they didn’t treat them well.”* An additional nonprofit
was then brought in to design a 10-week training and team-building program tailored to Apparel
International’s needs. Supervisors are trained to learn employees’ idiosyncratic circumstances,
listen to their opinions, and foster open two-way communication. As González French summarizes, “We’re teaching them to be better leaders.”* How important is having better leaders
to Apparel International’s employees? Well, it showed up as a need area more frequently than
higher wages, despite the fact that Mexico’s minimum wage for apparel workers is only $5 a day.
Indeed, González French believes bad managers is a key reason why the annual turnover rate in
his plant tends to be in the 30–40 percent range.
In reflecting on the bottom-up structure of the Improving Worker Well-Being initiative, Kim
Almedia notes, “We needed to step back and listen to vendors.”* Offers Bergh, “If this is going
to be sustainable over time, we have to prove to the factory owners that this is good for their business . . .”* Still, the question remains how to measure whether the initiative is helping, especially
if it takes on different shapes and sizes across suppliers and regions. After all, Levi’s is offering
funding, even if the suppliers themselves are sharing the responsibility. How exactly will the
company measure the success of the initiative? Much like it did with the design and execution of
the Apparel International program, it found help. The company has asked the Harvard School of
Public Health to design a rigorous scientific study to assess the impact of the Worker Well-Being
initiative.
*Fortune Media IP Limited
coL61557_ch01_001-025.indd
22
12/10/19 03:32 PM
Final PDF to printer
11
Teams: Characteristics
and Diversity
ORGANIZATIONAL
MECHANISMS
Organizational
Culture
Organizational
Structure
INDIVIDUAL
MECHANISMS
GROUP
MECHANISMS
Job
Satisfaction
Leadership:
Styles &
Behaviors
Leadership:
Power &
Negotiation
Teams:
Processes &
Communication
Teams:
Characteristics &
Diversity
Stress
INDIVIDUAL
OUTCOMES
Job
Performance
Motivation
Trust, Justice,
& Ethics
Organizational
Commitment
Learning &
Decision Making
INDIVIDUAL
CHARACTERISTICS
Ability
Personality &
Cultural Values
LEARNING GOALS
After reading this chapter, you should be able to answer the following questions:
11.1 What are the five general team types and their defining characteristics?
11.2 What are the three general types of team interdependence?
11.3 What factors are involved in team composition?
11.4 What are the types of team diversity, and how do they influence team functioning?
11.5 How do team characteristics influence team effectiveness?
11.6 How can team compensation be used to manage team effectiveness?
334
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
334
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
WHOLE FOODS
W
hich grocery store chain comes to mind when you
think of high-quality natural and organic foods?
Chances are the answer to this question is Whole
Foods. Founded in 1980, Whole Foods is now a Fortune
500 company, with sales of nearly $15 billion generated
from its 460 stores and 87,000 employees. Even if there’s
not a Whole Foods market located near you, or you could
care less about whether your food has hydrogenated fats
or artificial colors and preservatives, you may be familiar
with the company because of accolades and coverage from
news and business publications. As examples, the company has been named to Fortune’s list of the “100 Best
Companies to Work For” each year since the list’s inception
in 1998. It’s also one of Fortune’s “World’s Most Admired
Companies” and has appeared on Newsweek’s list of “Top
Green Companies in the U.S.,” and Forbes’ list of “100 Most
Trustworthy Companies in America.”
So, what accounts for Whole Foods’ tremendous growth
and reputation? To sum it up in one word, the answer may be
“teams.” The original idea behind Whole Foods was that the
world was ready for a natural foods supermarket. However,
Brooks Kraft/Contributor/Getty Images
the company’s success has been driven largely by a strong
set of values that are enacted through teams and supportive
team practices. The company believes that teams not only
result in the type of collective learning and intelligence that
promotes incremental progress, but also that teams reinforce a sense of community and dedication to the company,
customers, and other stakeholders in society.
Although many companies claim that they value and rely
on teams, Whole Foods’ belief in teams is all-encompassing.
Each store is structured around 8 to 10 teams, and because
these teams are largely self-managed, they are teams in
the true sense of the word. Team members not only work
together to carry out the responsibilities of their department,
but they also meet regularly to discuss issues, make decisions, and solve problems. Team members are also given
feedback about how well their team is performing relative to
historical standards and to other teams, and their compensation is tied to the performance of their team as well. Because
the fate of team members is shared at Whole Foods, employees are motivated to work cooperatively, and this maximizes
the chance that the interests of everyone are satisfied.
335
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
335
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
336
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TEAM CHARACTERISTICS AND DIVERSITY
The topic of teams is likely familiar to almost anyone who might be reading this book. In fact,
you’ve probably had firsthand experience with several different types of teams at different points
in your life. As an example, most of you have played a team sport or two (yes, playing soccer in
gym class counts). Most of you have also worked in student teams to complete projects or assignments for courses you’ve taken. Or perhaps you’ve worked closely with a small group of people
to accomplish a task that was important to you—planning an event, raising money for a charity,
or starting and running a small cash business. Finally, some of you have been members of organizational teams responsible for making a product, providing a service, or generating recommendations for solving company problems.
But what exactly is a team, and what is it that makes a team more than a “group”? A team
consists of two or more people who work interdependently over some time period to accomplish
common goals related to some task-oriented purpose.1 You can think of teams as a special type of
group, where a group is just a collection of two or more people. Teams are special for two reasons.
First, the interactions among members within teams revolve around a deeper dependence on one
another than the interactions within groups. Second, the interactions within teams occur with a
specific task-related purpose in mind. Although the members of a friendship group may engage
in small talk or in-depth conversations on a frequent basis, the members of a team depend on
one another for critical information, materials, and actions that are needed to accomplish goals
related to their purpose for being together.
The use of teams in today’s organizations is widespread. National surveys indicate that teams
are used in the majority of organizations in the United States, regardless of whether the organization is large or small.2 In fact, some researchers suggest that almost all major U.S. companies are
currently using teams or planning to implement them, and that up to 50 percent of all employees
in the United States work in a team as part of their job.3 Thus, whereas the use of teams was limited to pioneers such as Procter & Gamble in the 1960s, teams are currently used in all types of
industries to accomplish all the types of work necessary to make organizations run effectively.4
Why have teams become so widespread? The most obvious reason is that the nature of today’s
work requires them. As work has become more complex, interactions among multiple team
members have become more vital. This is because interactions allow the team to pool complementary knowledge and skills. As an example, surgical teams consist of individuals who received
specialized training in the activities needed to conduct surgical procedures. The team consists of
a surgeon who received training for the procedure in question, an anesthesiologist who received
A surgical team consists of
specialized members who
depend on one another to
accomplish tasks that are
both complex and important. Why might you not
want to have surgery conducted by a surgical team
that functions like a group?
Photodisc Collection/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
336
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
337
training necessary to manage patient pain, and an operating room nurse who was trained to provide overall care for the patient.
Teams may also be useful to organizations in ways beyond just accomplishing the work itself.
For example, one study revealed that problem-solving teams composed primarily of rank-and-file
workers could boost productivity in steel mills by devising ways to increase the efficiency of production lines and quality control processes.5 Although implementing teams often makes sense in
settings such as these, for which the nature of the work and work-related problems are complex,
teams vary a great deal from one another in terms of their effectiveness. The goal of this chapter,
as well as the next, is to help you understand factors that influence team effectiveness. Fortunately,
there has been over a century of research on this topic that we can refer to in this effort.6
WHAT CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE USED TO
DESCRIBE TEAMS?
This is the first of two chapters on teams. This chapter focuses on team characteristics—the task,
unit, and member qualities that can be used to describe teams and that combine to make some
teams more effective than others. Team characteristics provide a means of categorizing and examining teams, which is important because teams come in so many shapes and sizes. Team characteristics play an important role in determining what a team is capable of achieving and may
influence the strategies and processes the team uses to reach its goals. As you will see, however,
there’s more to understanding team characteristics than meets the eye. Team characteristics such
as diversity, for example, have many meanings, and its effect on team functioning and effectiveness depends on what type of diversity you’re concerned with as well as several additional complicating factors. Chapter 12 will focus on team processes and communication—the specific actions
and behaviors that teams can engage in to achieve synergy. The concepts in that chapter will help
explain why some teams are more or less effective than their characteristics would suggest they
should be. For now, however, we turn our attention to this question: “What characteristics can be
used to describe teams?”
TEAM TYPES
One way to describe teams is to take advantage of existing taxonomies that place teams into various types. One such taxonomy is illustrated in Table 11-1. The table illustrates that there are five
general types of teams and that each is associated with a number of defining characteristics.7 The
most notable characteristics include the team’s purpose, the length of the team’s existence, and
the amount of time involvement the team requires of its individual members. The sections to follow review these types of teams in turn.
11.1
What are the five general
team types and their defining
characteristics?
WORK TEAMS Work teams are designed to be relatively permanent. Their purpose is to produce
goods or provide services, and they generally require a full-time commitment from their members.
As an example of a work team, consider how cars and trucks are manufactured at Toyota.8 Teams
are composed of four to eight members who do the physical work, and a leader who supports the
team and coordinates with other teams. Although the teams are responsible for the work involved
in the assembly of the vehicles, they are also responsible for quality control and developing ideas
for improvements in the production process. Team members inspect each other’s work, and when
they see a problem, they stop the line until they are able to resolve the problem.
MANAGEMENT TEAMS Management teams are similar to work teams in that they are designed
to be relatively permanent; however, they are also distinct in a number of important ways. Whereas
work teams focus on the accomplishment of core operational-level production and service tasks,
management teams participate in managerial-level tasks that affect the entire organization.
Specifically, management teams are responsible for coordinating the activities of organizational
subunits—typically departments or functional areas—to help the organization achieve its long-term
goals. Top management teams, for example, consist of senior-level executives who meet to make
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
337
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
338
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TABLE 11-1
Types of Teams
TYPE OF TEAM
PURPOSE AND
ACTIVITIES
LIFE SPAN
MEMBER
INVOLVEMENT
SPECIFIC
EXAMPLES
Work team
Produce goods or
provide services.
Long
High
Self-managed
work team
Production
team
Maintenance
team
Sales team
Management
team
Integrate activities
of subunits across
business functions.
Long
Moderate
Top management team
Parallel team
Provide recommendations and resolve
issues.
Varies
Low
Quality circle
Advisory council
Committee
Project team
Produce a onetime output (product, service, plan,
design, etc.).
Varies
Varies
Product design
team
Research group
Planning team
Action team
Perform complex
tasks that vary in
duration and take
place in highly visible or challenging
circumstances.
Varies
Varies
Surgical team
Musical group
Expedition
team
Sports team
Sources: Cohen, S. G., and D. E. Bailey. “What Makes Teams Work: Group Effectiveness Research from the Shop Floor to
the Executive Suite.” Journal of Management 27 (1997): pp. 239–290; and Sundstrom, E., K. P. De Meuse, and D. Futrell.
“Work Teams: Applications and Effectiveness.” American Psychologist 45 (1990): pp. 120–133.
decisions about the strategic direction of the organization. It may also be worth mentioning that
because members of management teams are typically heads of departments, their commitment to
the management team is offset somewhat by the responsibilities they have in leading their unit or
teams in their unit.
A Toyota work team is
responsible for vehicle
assembly and quality
control.
Toru Yamanaka/AFP/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
338
PARALLEL TEAMS Parallel
teams are composed of members from various jobs, and
other teams, who provide recommendations to managers
about important issues that run
“parallel” to the organization’s
production processes.9 Parallel
teams require only part-time
commitment from members,
and they can be permanent or
temporary, depending on their
aim. Quality circles, for example, consist of individuals who
normally perform core production tasks, but who also meet
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
regularly with individuals from
other work groups to identify
production-related
problems
and opportunities for improvement. As an example of a more
temporary parallel team, committees often form to deal with
unique issues or issues that arise
only periodically. Examples of
issues that can spur the creation
of committees include changes
to work procedures, purchases
of new equipment or services,
and non-routine hiring.
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
339
The Rolling Stones, an
English rock band formed
in 1962, is an example of
an action team that has
stayed together for an
extended period of time.
Sebastian Gollnow/picture alliance/Getty Images
PROJECT TEAMS Project teams are formed to take on “one-time” tasks that are generally complex and require a lot of input from members with different types of training and expertise.10
Although project teams exist only as long as it takes to finish a project, some projects are quite
complex and can take years to complete. Members of some project teams work full-time, whereas
other teams demand only a part-time commitment. A planning team comprised of engineers,
architects, designers, and builders, charged with designing a suburban town center, might work
together full-time for a year or more. In contrast, the engineers and artists who constitute a design
team responsible for creating an electric toothbrush might work together for a month on the project while also serving on other project teams.
ACTION TEAMS Action teams perform tasks that are normally limited in duration. However, those
tasks are quite complex and take place in contexts that are either highly visible to an audience or of
a highly challenging nature.11 Some types of action teams work together for an extended period of
time. For example, sports teams remain intact for at least one season, and musical groups like the
Rolling Stones, ZZ Top, Aerosmith, Kiss, and AC/DC sometimes stick together for decades. Other
types of action teams stay together only as long as the task takes to complete. Surgical teams and
aircraft flight crews may only work together as a unit for a single two-hour surgery or flight.
SUMMARY So how easy is it to classify teams into one of the types summarized in Figure 11-1?
Well, it turns out that teams often fit into more than one category. As an example, consider the
teams at Pixar, the company that has produced many computer-animated hit films, such as Toy
Story, Monsters Inc., Finding Nemo, Cars, Wall-E, Up, Brave, Monsters University, Inside Out, Finding
Dory, and Coco. On the one hand, because the key members of Pixar teams have mostly remained
together for each film the company has produced, it might seem like Pixar uses work teams.12 On
the other hand, because the creation of each film can be viewed as a project, and because members are likely involved in multiple ongoing projects, it might seem reasonable to say that Pixar
uses project teams. It’s probably most appropriate to say that at Pixar, teams have characteristics
of both work teams and project teams.
FIGURE 11-1
Types of Teams
• Work teams
• Management teams
• Parallel teams
• Project teams
• Action teams
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
339
Team
Types
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
340
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
As you read the descriptions of the different team types, it may have occurred to you that
it’s possible that employees find themselves working in a variety of teams and team types. This
situation arises naturally with parallel teams; however, it occurs often with project, management,
and action teams as well. In fact, estimates are that between 65 percent and 95 percent of people
employed in knowledge-intensive jobs work in multiple teams—often three or four at a time.13
Research on this type of work arrangement, referred to as multiple team membership, indicates
that employees do not identify with each team equally and that these differences have important
implications as to how much effort and commitment employees bring to each of their teams.14
As an example that may be familiar to you, consider your experience as a student. During any
given semester, you may have had membership in two or more teams as part of the requirements
of the courses you were taking. If this is the case, you may have noticed that you did not experience the same type of satisfaction with each team. With some teams, you might have been fully
engaged in the team’s work and with the other team members, while in other teams, you may have
put forth less effort and limited your involvement with your teammates. Regardless of whether
these differences in your attitude and behavior were due to the meaningfulness of the teams’
projects, the time and level of involvement required to complete the teams’ tasks, or perhaps the
drama and stress members of some of these teams created for you, it’s likely these differences
had an influence on how well each team did on projects and assignments and, quite possibly,
the grades you earned in those courses. It turns out that this process unfolds the same way in
the workplace. However, instead of grades, the consequences of how team members’ divide their
attention and effort may be the success of a multimillion-dollar project, and following from this,
whether the team members receive sizable year-end bonuses.
At this point, we should point out that multiple team membership is not necessarily conducive
to organizational effectiveness, especially in complex work contexts where it is critical that members of teams develop tight interpersonal bonds and specialized work routines that can deal with
the unique challenges they face.15 Although employees might like the variety of working in multiple
teams and can learn from their experiences working with different teams and teammates, it takes a
great deal of time and effort to coordinate meeting times with different teams and to switch between
teams and tasks when the time comes. Given these challenges, researchers have begun to consider
actions that managers could take to enhance how employees feel about the various teams in which
they work, particularly those teams that are most crucial to organizational success. As an example,
one recent study found that team leaders who share authority, encourage self-management, and bolster confidence tend to inspire positive team behavior from members, and that, remarkably, these
positive team behaviors carry over to benefit other teams in which the team members also work.16
VARIATIONS WITHIN TEAM TYPES
The Pixar team, shown
here at the Cannes Film
Festival, has characteristics
of both work teams and
project teams. Trying to
characterize this team is
even more complicated
when you consider that
key members are involved
in the management of
the company, and their
involvement in the films
runs parallel to these other
responsibilities.
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
340
Even knowing whether a team is a project team, an action team, or some other type of team
doesn’t tell you the whole story. In fact, there are important variations within those categories
that are needed to understand
a team’s functioning.17 As one
example, teams can vary with
respect to the degree to which
they have autonomy and are
self-managed.18 If you’ve ever
been on a team where members
have a great deal of freedom
to work together to establish
their own goals, procedures,
roles, and membership, you’ve
worked on a team where the
level of autonomy and selfmanagement is high. You may
also have worked on a team
where the level of autonomy
Venturelli/Contributor/Getty Images
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
341
and self-management is low. In these teams, there are strict rules regarding goals, procedures,
and roles, and team leaders or managers make most of the decisions regarding management of
the team with respect to membership. Research has shown that although people generally prefer
working in teams where the level of autonomy and self-management is high, the appropriate level
of self-management with regard to overall team effectiveness may depend on a variety of factors.19
For example, researchers have concluded that high levels of self-management may be most advantageous for teams where team members have high levels of team-relevant knowledge obtained
from outside experts and others in their social networks.20
Another way that teams can vary relates to how the members typically communicate with each
other. Virtual teams are teams in which the members are geographically dispersed, and interdependent activity occurs through electronic communications—primarily e-mail, instant messaging,
group calendars, web conferencing, social media, and other meeting tools.21 Although communications and group networking software is far from perfect, it has advanced to the point that it’s
possible for teams doing all sorts of work to function virtually, and it’s also true that many teams
do at least some of their work virtually even if the members are colocated. In fact, there has been
an 800 percent increase in the number of virtual employees over the last decade or so, and it’s
likely that there are tens of millions of virtual teams operating today.22 Companies such as Con
Edison, New York’s giant electric and gas utility, have invested significant resources in technology and training to help these teams function and perform more effectively.23 The same is true at
IBM, where at least 40 percent of the employees work virtually.24 At TRW, one of the world’s largest automotive suppliers, virtual teams provide an efficient way to accomplish work on projects
when members are geographically separated.25 In fact, many companies in high-tech industries
are leveraging virtual teams to make continuous progress on work tasks without members having
to work 24/7. For example, Logitech, the Swiss company that makes things such as computer
mice and keyboards, universal remotes for home entertainment systems, and gaming controllers,
attributes its success to teams of designers and engineers who are located in different places
around the world.26 Although you might be inclined to believe that time-zone differences would
be a hindrance to this sort of team, Logitech turned it into a competitive advantage by letting the
work follow the sun.27 Specifically, work at Logitech is accomplished continuously because members of a team who have finished their workday in one country electronically hand off the work
to team members in another country who have just arrived at the office. Because these electronic
hand-offs occur continuously, product development and other work needed to bring innovative
products to the market can be completed much more quickly.
In addition to varying in their “virtuality,” teams of any type can differ in the amount of experience they have working together. One way to understand this point is to consider what occurs in
teams at different stages of their development as they progress from a newly formed team to one
that’s well-established. According to the most well-known theory, teams go through a progression
of five stages shown in the top panel of Figure 11-2.28 In the first stage, called forming, members
orient themselves by trying to understand their boundaries in the team. Members try to get a feel
for what is expected of them, what types of behaviors are out of bounds, and who’s in charge. In
the next stage, called storming, members remain committed to ideas they bring with them to the
team. This initial unwillingness to accommodate others’ ideas triggers conflict that negatively
affects some interpersonal relationships and harms the team’s progress. During the next stage,
norming, members realize that they need to work together to accomplish team goals, and consequently, they begin to cooperate with one another. Feelings of solidarity develop as members work
toward team goals. Over time, norms and expectations develop regarding what different members
are responsible for doing. In the fourth stage of team development, which is called performing,
members are comfortable working within their roles, and the team makes progress toward goals.
Finally, because the life span of many teams is limited, there’s a stage called adjourning. In this
stage, members experience anxiety and other emotions as they disengage and ultimately separate
from the team.
But does this sequence of forming, storming, norming, performing, and adjourning apply to
the development of all types of teams? Chances are that you’ve had some experience with teams
that would lead you to answer this question with an emphatic “no.” In fact, although this theory
of group development is intuitively appealing and identifies things that may occur as teams gain
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
341
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
342
CHAPTER 11
FIGURE 11-2
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
Two Models of Team Development
Some teams develop in a predictable sequence . . .
Forming
Storming
Norming
Performing
Adjourning
Time
. . . whereas many develop in a less linear fashion.
Process
Revision
Inertia
Punctuated Equilibrium
Forming and
Pattern
Creation
Inertia
Time
Midpoint
Time
experience working together, there are factors in work organizations that can significantly alter
what occurs during a team’s life.29 One situation in which this developmental sequence is less
applicable is when teams are formed with clear expectations regarding what’s expected from the
team and its members. With many action teams, for example, there are established rules and
standard operating procedures that guide team members’ behaviors and their interactions with
one another. As a specific example, an aircraft flight crew doesn’t have to go through the forming, storming, norming, and performing stages to figure out that the pilot flies the plane and the
flight attendant serves the beverages. As another example, though the adjourning stage only happens once for each type of team, the implications are likely to be more significant for team types
with longer life spans that require high member involvement. Dissolving a work team that’s been
together for four years is likely to trigger greater anxiety and stronger emotions among members
than a situation in which a committee that meets briefly once a month for a year is disbanded. For
an example of an action team that developed very quickly, see our OB on Screen feature.
Another situation in which the development sequence is less applicable may be in certain
types of project teams that follow a pattern of development called punctuated equilibrium.30 This
sequence appears in the bottom panel of Figure 11-2. At the initial team meeting, members make
assumptions and establish a pattern of behavior that lasts for the first half of its life. That pattern
of behavior becomes a matter of habit for members and creates an inertia that continues until
roughly the midway point of the project. Then something remarkable happens: Members realize
that they have to change their approach to the task to complete it on time. Teams that take this
opportunity to plan a new approach during this transition tend to do well, and the new framework
dominates their behavior until task completion. However, teams that don’t take the opportunity to
This is a DBA research class. There are 6 task that has to be
completed and 6 discussions . Each task is
individual. You can’t do TASK 2 if you haven’t received a passing grade
on TASK 1, and you can’t move on to TASK 3, if you haven’t received a
passing grade on TASK 1 and TASK 2.
This is an 8 weeks course. However, there are only 6 TASK. There is also a change matrix. Whatever correction that are mentioned by the teacher, the corrections has to be made and the work has to be resubmitted. I would like to continue with the same person once the work has begun.
I need someone who understands the requirement and is willing to do the work, put in the time, and follow the instructions precisely. I’ve attached the instructions. Please make sure you’re always available for the 8 weeks once the class has begun. The change matrix is important and has to be completed as well during the course.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Doctor of Business Administration
Liberty University
School of Business
BUSI 885
DBA Research Concept Guide
V2.0
1971 University Boulevard
Lynchburg, VA 24515-2269
BusinessDoctoralPrograms@liberty.edu
434-582-3000
March 10, 2020
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Table of Contents
Overview ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
General Guidance……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Study Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Research Paradigms …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4
Methodology ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
Concept Alignment in a Research Project……………………………………………………………………….. 8
Where to Study & Sample Size ……………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Assignment Instructions…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline ……………………………………………………………………………… 10
Task 2: Research Questions ………………………………………………………………………………………… 12
Task 3: Methodology …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14
Task 4: Research Framework Outline …………………………………………………………………………… 16
Task 5: Draft Research Concept…………………………………………………………………………………… 18
Task 6: Final Research Concept …………………………………………………………………………………… 21
March 10, 2020
Page 2 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Overview
You have reached this point because you have passed all DBA core classes and you are ready to
develop a research concept for your Applied Doctoral Research Project (ADRP). As you work
your way through this course you will conduct research and develop the key elements of a viable
doctoral level research project, culminating in an approved ADRP Concept Paper. While your final
research concept will be approved by your Research Chair once you start your ADRP courses, the
work you put in here will give you a solid starting point and help ensure that you are able to hit
the ground running.
You are no longer a student – This course marks the start of your transition from student to
doctoral candidate. This is a significant milestone that shifts the burden from a professor in a course
teaching you things you do not know to you applying what you have already learned! Your
professor is here to evaluate your work and point out areas for improvement, not teach you how to
accomplish each task. You are responsible for reviewing the guidelines provided and submitting
work that is compliant them. When you hit a roadblock or do not understand a particular aspect of
your research project you need to be able to work your way through the issue by studying the
problem, conducting further research, and determining the best solution.
The DBA ADRP Research Concept Paper will be developed incrementally. Each task listed below
allows you to focus on one aspect of the research concept and then use the approved tasks to build
up to the completed document. It is important that you use approved tasks when you start
combining them into a single document. If you do need to make changes to a previously approved
document, you need to coordinate that with your professor. Finally, do not move to the next task
in the sequence until the current one is approved. As described, these build upon each other so
working ahead could result in significant revisions!
The following tasks will be completed in this course:
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Task 2: Research Questions
Task 3: Methodology
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
Task 5: Draft Research Concept
Task 6: Final Research Concept
Submitting your work – This course is self-paced and you must complete all tasks in order to pass
and move on to the ADRP. Only work on one task at a time and do not move to the next task until
the current one has been approved (Grade of ‘1’ Posted). You can submit your work as soon as
you complete it, just be sure to email your instructor to let them know that you have submitted a
task for review.
March 10, 2020
Page 3 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
General Guidance
This section provides general guidance related to research paradigms, research study type,
methodology, research framework, study location, and sample size. Please review this information
carefully. There are specific research types and methods associated with the degree plan you are
pursuing.
Research Study Type
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990, the Research Study type is a Dissertation
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890, the Research Study type can be either a Case
Study Project or a Consulting Project
Note: Students wishing to conduct the consulting project should be sure to include BUSI 830,
Case Study Research Methods and Consulting Techniques, in their degree plan to gain a better
understanding of the Lean Six Sigma tools that must be used in the research project.
With the dissertation or case study project approach, the student begins by researching the
literature to find a problem, develops a research proposal to study the problem, and then finds an
organization within which to study the problem. With the consulting project approach, the student
begins with an organization with a problem, researches the literature to better understand the
problem, and then develops a proposed solution to the problem. In all three cases, a problem
statement based upon the current literature must be developed.
Research Paradigms
A research paradigm is essentially a worldview that a researcher brings to their study. It represents
the researcher’s view of reality or truth. While there is ongoing discussion regarding which
paradigms exist in the modern research community, it is useful to focus on Positivism, PostPositivism, Constructivism, and Pragmatism for most researchers. Researchers should conduct
independent research on this topic to understand what their research paradigm is as it will shape
how the researcher approaches the problem being studied. It is also important to note that while
some paradigms lend themselves better to certain methodologies, the choice of methodology does
not change the paradigm. This is part of who the researcher is and how they view the world. For
this course and the research project, the researcher should identify which of the following best
describes their view of the world and reality. The researcher should also be able to describe why
that is the case:
Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover.
Post-Positivism – Single objective reality that we seek to discover with the knowledge
that we never will fully understand it.
Constructivism – Reality is determined by the individual and the researcher seeks to
understand that view of reality.
Pragmatism – Focus on the ‘problem’ rather than the view of reality, using any tools
available to understand the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 4 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Methodology
The methodology is how the researcher will study the problem at a very high level, all research
will be conducted using one of the following research approaches. The researcher will need to be
able to explain the application and benefits of each type of research:
Fixed Design using Quantitative Methods
Flexible Design using Qualitative Methods
Mixed-Methods Design using Quantitative and Qualitative Methods
Fixed Designs are fully defined (fixed) as part of the research proposal and following the proposal,
the researcher executes the research and analysis using quantitative tools as described in the
research proposal. Flexible designs on the other hand are defined in a general sense as part of the
research proposal and following the proposal, the researcher is free to adjust (flexible) the research
as is necessary using qualitative tools as described. Mixed-Methods Designs as the name implies,
use a combination of both in relatively equal amounts. This should not be confused with a Flexible
Design that might use a small number of quantitative methods to provide for triangulation of the
data found through the primary qualitative methods, such as the use of descriptive statistics to
show demographics or other relevant numerical data. The choice of research approach is guided
by the research problem, purpose, and research questions.
Within each research approach, there are specific methods (the research tool) that can be employed.
The table below lists the most common methods employed in the three research types of research
designs. Once selected, the method becomes the methodology or specific ‘research design’ for the
study. Please note that the options for conducting your research are limited based upon the track
that you are in (ADRP vs. Dissertation) and by the nature of the DBA degree (Applied Research
vs. Pure Research).
Fixed Design Methods
Flexible Design Methods
Mixed-Methods Design Methods
Experimental
Narrative
Convergent parallel
Quasi-experimental
Phenomenology
Explanatory Sequential
Nonexperimental
Grounded Theory
Exploratory Sequential
Transformative
Descriptive
Case Study
Correlational
Single Case Study
Causal-Comparative
Multiple Case Study
Ethnography
Common Methods for fixed, flexible, and mixed research designs.
March 10, 2020
Page 5 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
For DBA students taking BUSI 987 – 990 (DBA Dissertation Track) the following designs &
methods can be used:
Fixed Designs
Flexible Designs
Mixed-Methods Designs
Correlational
Case Study
Convergent parallel
Causal-Comparative
Single Case Study
Multiple Case Study
Phenomenology
Ethnography
For DBA students taking BUSI 887 – 890 (DBA Project Track) the following designs can be
used:
Consulting Project – Single Case Study with Lean Six Sigma Framework
Case Study Project – Single Case Study
Note: For the Consulting Project, the Lean Six Sigma Framework provides qualitative and
quantitative tools to be used in the DMAIC process. For the Case Study Project, quantitative tools
will be used for triangulation and descriptive statistics.
An effective way to begin the discussion of methodology is to start with the sentence: “This study
will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design
will be used”
Examples:
This study will be conducted with a flexible design using qualitative methods specifically, a single
case study design will be used.
– Or This study will be conducted with a fixed design using quantitative methods specifically, a causalcomparative design will be used.
When deciding on a methodology, pay attention to the words used in the research questions.
Qualitative research questions are those that seek to understand or explain while quantitative
research questions seek to relate or measure. The goal here is to ensure that there is alignment from
the problem statement to the research questions to the methodology. You will be required to
substantiate your choice of methodology with multiple citations. The bar is high to substantiate
Phenomenology or Ethnography.
March 10, 2020
Page 6 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Research Framework
The researcher should think of the research framework as the ‘word picture’ for the specific
problem statement. Once a person reads the framework and examines the diagram it should be
very clear what the conditions surrounding the problem are as well as how the study is connected
to the literature. Not all studies will have both concepts and theories, and flexible designs such as
a case study will typically rely more on concepts than theories.
Diagram – The research framework diagram should allow the reader to ‘see’ the problem and its
outcomes. The diagram should show 1) the inputs (constructs or variables) and how they relate to
the actors, 2) how action/information/influence flows between the actors, 3) how the actors are
influenced by concepts and theories, and 4) how the outputs (constructs or variables) are
determined. Additional research on Conceptual Frameworks and Theoretical Frameworks will
provide a better understanding of this important part of the research project.
Concepts – These are commonly held views that are not as formally defined as theories that can
be found in the literature that are central to your research problem. The researcher should be able
to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the concept. An example descriptor could be Higher Job
Satisfaction Leads to Higher Productivity. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the concept
and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will typically have
concepts.
Theories – These are formal theories that can be found in the literature that are central to the
research problem. They will have a researcher or researchers connected with them. Examples
include Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, Transformational Leadership Theory, Servant Leadership,
etc. The researcher should be able to provide the formal name of the theory, and then a discussion
of the theory and how it relates to the problem supported by citations. Flexible studies will not
always have a theory or theories associated with them. Theories are developed as our
understanding of a problem matures and often flexible studies will be looking at relatively new
research problems.
Actors – These are the key people groups such as leaders, followers, or customers central to the
research problem, as well as the organizations such as the specific business, government entity, or
school that are central to the research problem. The researcher should be able to provide a short
‘descriptor’ for the actor followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the
problem. An example descriptor could be Executive Leaders, Project Team Members, or even
ABC University. Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the actor supported by citations.
Constructs & Variables – These are the constructs and independent, mitigating, and dependent
variables found in the research study. Constructs are the broad concepts or topics in a study while
variables are measurable and vary. Independent variables can be thought of as inputs such as
leadership style, level of intrinsic motivation, or even revenue from product sales. Mitigating
variables can be used to group and could include things like gender, age, employment status.
Finally, dependent variables can be thought of as outputs such as job satisfaction, extrinsic
motivation, or productivity. The researcher should be able to provide a short ‘descriptor’ for the
construct or variable followed by a description and a discussion of how it relates to the problem.
March 10, 2020
Page 7 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
An example descriptor could be Leadership Effectiveness, Leadership Style, or Gross Profit.
Follow the descriptor with a discussion of the construct or variable supported by citations.
Concept Alignment in a Research Project
The reader must be able to visualize a straight line connecting the general problem, the specific
problem, the purpose statement, the research questions, and the nature of the study:
General Problem – Overarching business problem related to the candidate’s cognate with the
existence of the problem supported by current literature (less than five years).
Specific Problem – Narrowly focused market(s) / industry (s) / region(s) / organization(s) being
studied to provide insight into the general problem.
Purpose Statement – To study the specific problem, thereby giving insight into the general
problem. In a flexible design, the goal is generally to explore or to understand. In a fixed design,
the goal is generally to measure, compare, or relate.
Research Questions – The broad questions that need to be answered to provide meaningful insight
into the specific problem. These are not interview questions, they are questions that guide the
overall study. In a flexible design, these questions will seek to explain or understand and will
typically include words such as how, why, and what. In a fixed design, these questions will
generally seek to describe, measure, compare or relate variables.
Nature of the Study – The nature of the study describes the researcher’s paradigm, the research
design, and the research method. The researcher will need to be able to describe why the chosen
design and method are the best choice for the research being conducted.
Alignment exists when:
The specific problem is a subset of the general problem
The purpose statement describes a research goal that addresses the specific problem
The research questions address the specific problem and its consequences
The nature of the study identifies a design and method that is consistent with the action
word choices in the purpose statement and the word choices in the research questions
Where to Study & Sample Size
Selecting where to conduct your research study and how many participants will be guided by
several factors:
Fixed Design Dissertations – to provide for statistically significant results that can be generalized
to the overall population, you will need to use a sample size calculator (not gPower which is a
great post hoc test) to determine the right number. For large populations (over 5000) this is going
to be around 380 for each group within the sample based upon a Confidence Level (CL) of 95%
March 10, 2020
Page 8 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
and a Confidence Interval (CI) of 5%. How you define the population determines what you would
like to be able to generalize your results to, which in turn determines the sample size.
Flexible Design Dissertations – The goal here is to reach saturation which is the point at which
you are no longer gaining new information from participants. While various authors will provide
varying ranges for this, the common ground is that saturation will be reached within 25 to 30
interviews for a group.
Consulting Project or Case Study Project – Since the results are not intended to generalize (relate)
to the entire population, a single organization can be used. However, the size of the organization
will need to allow the researcher to interview between fifteen and thirty participants.
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: The researcher may contact an organization
to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study once the problem and research questions
have been approved. See Task 2.
March 10, 2020
Page 9 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Assignment Instructions
Task 1: Problem Statement Outline
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions as a guide,
develop a bullet point outline for the problem statement. Each bullet should be a single sentence.
Following the specific problem sentence include a short sentence describing how this problem is
related to your cognate. Finally, add APA formatted references for the supporting reference
sentences. Following the outline, you will provide an annotated bibliography for each reference
provided. You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Problem Statement Bullet Outline
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years)
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (< 5 years, optional bridge
supporting references sentence, see problem statement white paper)
Specific Problem Sentence
Relationship to Cognate (Not part of the problem statement)
References
Annotated Bibliography for each Reference
APA formatted reference (250 words for each reference)
Description of why this is a credible source (author(s), publication, date)
Summary of the article
Discussion of how this reference supports the existence of the general problem and the
consequences of the problem identified in the general problem sentence.
March 10, 2020
Page 10 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title your word
document as follows: LastName_Task 1 Bullet Point Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 1 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 11 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 2: Research Questions
Using the White Paper titled Effective Problem Statements and Research Questions and your
approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1 as a guide, develop three to four open
ended research questions that cannot be answered with a yes or no response. Good research
questions are exploratory and not leading that presuppose a cause, outcome, or relationship. Where
appropriate, develop sub-questions that address facets of the overall research questions. Following
the list of research questions, you will discuss how each research question (and sub-questions)
addresses aspects of the specific problem sentence to include the resulting consequences. Finally,
you will discuss how taken together, the research questions (and sub-questions) fully address the
specific problem statement. Include an APA formatted reference section.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Approved Problem Statement Bullet Outline from Task 1
General Problem Sentence
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation
o Supporting Reference Sentence with Current Citation (Optional)
Specific Problem Sentence
Research Question 1, use labels RQ1, RQ1a, etc.
Sub question 1a (optional)
Sub Question 1b (optional)
Research Question 2
Sub question 2a (optional)
Sub Question 2b (optional)
Research Question 3
Sub question 3a (optional)
Sub Question 3b (optional)
Research Question 4 (optional)
Sub question 4a (optional)
March 10, 2020
Page 12 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Sub Question 4b (optional)
Discussion of Research Questions
Research Question 1
Research Question 2
Research Question 3
Research Question 4 (optional)
Specific Problem Statement Coverage
Reference Section
Note for Consulting Project or Case Study Project: Once this task is approved, you may contact
an organization to gauge their interest in being part of your proposed study. You may not begin to
interview any participants or gather any data until you have the approval to do so in the ADRP
courses. Use the Permission Request Template found in Course Content. You will be submitting
your Permission Request Template in Task 6.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment tab as a word document. Title your word document as
follows: LastName_Task 2 Research Questions_DDMMMYY.docx
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by you in a
Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the changes made will be
added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once you have made the necessary
revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following in your
email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 2 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal to submit
the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 13 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 3: Methodology
This is a narrative assignment rather than a bullet point outline. You will post your submission as
a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
Outline for this assignment:
Introductory paragraph – For this methodology paper, including the specific problem
sentence.
Discussion of Research Paradigm
Discussion of Methodology
Summary – For this methodology paper
Reference Section
Discussion of Research Paradigm:
Begin with a theme sentence: “My research paradigm is XXX” Then discuss your research
paradigm and how this is likely to guide your study.
Discussion of Methodology:
Begin with a theme sentence: “This study will be conducted with a XXXXX design using XXXXX
method(s) specifically, a XXXXX design will be used”. Then discuss why this is the appropriate
methodology for your study.
Provide multiple citations from multiple authors to support factual assertions about the function of
the design and research paradigm. Reference your problem statement and research questions in
demonstrating why this is the correct methodology and how it fits with your research paradigm.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Methodology_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 14 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 3 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 15 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 4: Research Framework Outline
You will post your submission as a word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, First Name
Cognate
Research Project Track (Dissertation or Project)
Research Paradigm
Planned Research Design
Proposed Topic
The body of the document will include:
Concepts – The concepts (i.e. higher productivity is related to higher job satisfaction) that
are related to your research study and are found in the literature. Use a separate sub-point
for each concept. Lead with a descriptor (short name for the concept), and then one to two
sentences that describe how the concept is related to the specific problem.
Theories – The formal theories (i.e. Maslow’s Motivational Theory, Transformational
Leadership Theory, etc.) that are related to your research study and are found in the
literature. Use a separate sub-point for each theory. Lead with the formal name of the theory
and then one to two sentences that describe how the theory is related to the specific
problem.
Actors – The people groups (i.e. leaders, followers, accountants, etc.) or organizations that
are related to your research study. Lead with a descriptor and then one to two sentences
that describe how the actor is related to the specific problem.
Constructs & Variables – The constructs and variables found in your research study (i.e.
profit, leadership style, intrinsic motivation, etc.). Lead with a descriptor and then one to
two sentences that describe how each construct or variable is related to the specific
problem. Include the type for each variable (independent, dependent, mitigating).
References – Include a reference section for citations supporting all factual assertions.
Provide citations for each factual assertion in each category.
Submitting your Document:
You will post your submission in the assignment link as a word document. Title the word document
as follows: Last Name_Research Framework Outline_DDMMMYY.docx
March 10, 2020
Page 16 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the submission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 4 Submitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your chair will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Once your document is reviewed by your instructor, any comments received will be collected by
you in a Change Matrix document. As the comments are addressed, a brief description of the
changes made will be added to the Change Matrix document for review by the instructor. Once
you have made the necessary revisions, resubmit the document using the same format described
above along with the Change Matrix.
Send an email to your instructor indicating that the resubmission was made. Include the following
in your email:
Last Name, First Name
Task 4 Resubmitted
Course and Section (i.e. BUSI 885-B01)
Your instructor will provide comments in Canvas within six days of receiving your email.
Your instructor will post a ‘1’ in Canvas once the document is approved. That will be your signal
to submit the next task.
March 10, 2020
Page 17 of 22
Liberty University School of Business
DBA Research Concept Guide
Task 5: Draft Research Concept
This is a narrative assignment. You will post your submission as a word document.
Use APA formatting for the word document.
Your submission will include the following:
Title Block
Last Name, Fir
You have been provided an output for a factor analysis, with a three and a four-factor solution with a rotated component matrix for each , and a questionnaire. a) Completely analyze the three-factor output , and b) compare the three and four factors structure and indicate which you feel is more accurate and why.
This activity requires the use of the Class Survey Data File. Access by clicking on the Class Survey Data File link on the Home Page. You must download the file to edit, copy, and use the data. You must use your sdsu.edu account to access the class survey data file.Below are 2 Word and 1 Excel files: follow the Directions (1) to complete the assignment, copy the Z Data and t data from the Class Survey Data Set into the 1 Sample HT Calculator (2) and then submit your work using the Assignment Submission Form (3) via the appropriate link
Hint: Both fact patterns are based on a recently decided tax case
Fact Pattern #1
The legislature in the State of Red enacted a new law requiring out-of-state sellers to collect and remit sales tax on the retail sales of goods and services in the State. Sellers are required to collect and remit the tax to the State, but if they do not then in-state consumers are responsible for paying a use tax at the same rate. The Act covers only sellers that, on an annual basis, deliver more than $150,000 of goods or services into the State or engage in 200 or more separate transactions for the delivery of goods or services into the State. Your client is a B-etsy online retailer with no employees or offices in the State of Red and, therefore, has not collected any sales tax under the new Act. Your client has received a notice from the State of Red requiring your client to register for a license to collect and remit the sales tax. A refusal to do so will result in your client being prohibited from online sales of any goods or services in the State. Your client wants to know if the business must comply with the sales tax requirements of the State of Red. Also, what implications might this have in other states where your client does business online?
Prepare a tax memorandum for use in advising your client. State the issue(s) to be resolved and make sure to identify the specific authorities (code, statutes, case law etc.) that address your client’s tax issues. Make sure to weigh authorities both for and against your client’s position.
The memo should be 2 pages, double spaced, one-inch margins, 12pt.
Hint: search engine words “online seller” “sales tax” “court decision”
Fact Pattern #2
Your client, Smartbucks, a U.S. corporation conducts a major part of its coffee business through its wholly owned international subsidiary, Trader Jobs, located on the Turks and Caicos Island. As Smartbuck’s accountants, your firm does the tax planning for these two related companies to minimize or avoid the payment of taxes by Smartbucks in the US which is a higher tax jurisdiction than Turks and Caicos jurisdiction.
In the past Smartbucks sold industrial coffee equipment to Trader Jobs. Trader Jobs then sold the same equipment for profit. The profits from those sales were reported and taxed in the Turks and Caicos, which resulted in significant tax savings for Smartbucks. Your firm explained to your client that this transaction, known as “transfer pricing,” allows Smartbucks to shift profits
that would otherwise be subject to U.S. tax offshore to avoid tax. Your firm wants to use the same method to identify and shift costs between Smartbucks and Trader Jobs.
Specifically, Smartbucks has formulated a new latte coffee recipe with Trader Jobs and both companies would benefit taxwise if the research and development costs could be shared between them. To document the transaction, Smartbucks and Trader Jobs entered into a research and development (“R&D”) cost-sharing agreement which allows Trader Jobs the authority to license the new recipe internationally. You previously advised your client that the interplay of cost and income allocation between the two companies in this transaction will result in significantly reduced taxes for Smartbucks.
You also advised your client that there is some risk in engaging in multinational corporate tax
avoidance because the tax laws grant the IRS authority to allocate income and costs between related parties if it determines that any particular transaction fails to satisfy the arm’s length standard. As part of the R&D cost sharing agreement, your firm did not share the cost of certain employee stock options resulting in a substantial tax savings to Smartbucks in association with over $100 million in income. The IRS has reviewed the transaction and contends that the allocation of stock compensation costs between the companies must be appropriate to reflect
economic reality and that the allocation of the employee stock compensation costs under the cost sharing arrangement fails the arm’s length standard. On behalf of Smartbucks, your firm contends that the IRS has exceeded its authority under the arm’s length standard because the cost sharing methodology used in the R&D cost sharing agreement established “parity with uncontrolled taxpayers” and the actual results or economic reality is irrelevant under the arm’s length standard. Methodology controls over result.
Prepare a tax memorandum for use in advising your firm’s managing partner assigned to Smartbucks. State the issue(s) to be resolved and make sure to identify the specific authorities (code, statutes, case law etc.) that address your client’s tax issues. Make sure to weigh authorities both for and against your client’s position.
The memo should be 2 pages, double spaced, one-inch margins, 12pt.
Tax Research Memo
Sample Format
Your Firm
Your Town and State
Date
Relevant Facts
Specific Issues
Conclusions
Support
Actions to Be Taken
________ Discuss with client. Date discussed ________
________ Prepare a memo or letter to the client
________ Explore other fact situations
________ Other action. Describe:___________________________
_______________________________________________________
Preparer ________
Reviewer ________
Partner ________
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Abdulelah Alnafisah
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges
of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ”
Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance
and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson,
M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number
of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks)
(Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a
large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02
Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of
the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02
Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational
Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an
organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical.
What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words
200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually
increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might
explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Training is an important aspect of developing people, whether you are on a project or otherwise. Technical skills like programming can be acquired in a short-term course. Mentoring is another approach for more long-term development of skills. Practice in a non-critical project can provide useful opportunities to build confidence.
Successful management of project timelines depends on access to resources that can perform the work assigned. If a person needs skill development, that is not a bad thing. For the company, it is an investment in the capability of that person. More skills mean a more valuable employee. If your company does not wish to develop or maintain a particular skill, then outsourcing may be an option.
Upon successful completion of this discussion, you will be able to:
Apply a biblical perspective to skills development.
Resources
Website: Bible Gateway
Website: Academic Writer
Website: OCLS Evaluating Sources Page
Background Information
Skills (both technical skills and people skills) are found in almost all human resources in varying measures. Some people have a gift for accounting, some for human resources, and some for producing documentation. No one person can have all the skills needed for a major project. In many cases, internal resources must manage external resources or outsourced resources. Having flexibility and the ability to learn helps meet any situation.
In 1 Peter 4:10, we learn that we each have gifts and should use them to help each other and be good stewards of God’s grace. The lesson in 1 Corinthians 12 states that members of the church have different roles to play. It is true that a project team suffers together and rejoices together.
As each has received a gift, use it to serve one another, as good stewards of God’s varied grace.
1 Peter 4:10
One Body with Many Members –
12For just as the body is one and has many members, and all the members of the body, though many, are one body, so it is with Christ. 13For in one Spirit we were all baptized into one body—Jews or Greeks, slaves or free—and all were made to drink of one Spirit.
14For the body does not consist of one member but of many. 15If the foot should say, “Because I am not a hand, I do not belong to the body,” that would not make it any less a part of the body. 16And if the ear should say, “Because I am not an eye, I do not belong to the body,” that would not make it any less a part of the body. 17If the whole body were an eye, where would be the sense of hearing? If the whole body were an ear, where would be the sense of smell? 18But as it is, God arranged the members in the body, each one of them, as he chose. 19If all were a single member, where would the body be? 20As it is, there are many parts, yet one body.
21The eye cannot say to the hand, “I have no need of you,” nor again the head to the feet, “I have no need of you.” 22On the contrary, the parts of the body that seem to be weaker are indispensable, 23 and on those parts of the body that we think less honorable we bestow the greater honor, and our unpresentable parts are treated with greater modesty, 24 which our more presentable parts do not require. But God has so composed the body, giving greater honor to the part that lacked it, 25 that there may be no division in the body, but that the members may have the same care for one another. 26If one member suffers, all suffer together; if one member is honored, all rejoice together.”
1 Corinthians 12:12–26
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
Review the Getting Started and the Background Information sections.
Navigate to the discussion thread and respond to the following prompts:
Do you respond better to hands-on training? Why or why not?
Give an example of when Jesus practiced hands-on training for his disciples. How can that example correlate to your job today?
In contrast to some of your prior courses, your initial post is due Day Three of the workshop, not Day Four.
Your initial post should be a minimum of 200 words and one reference.
Properly cite and reference one or more of the workshop’s sources in your original post.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format a paper properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
Read and respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings, as well as follow-up instructor questions directed to you, by the end of the workshop. Responses should be at least 100 words.
Your postings also should:
Be well developed by providing clear answers with evidence of critical thinking.
Add greater depth to the discussion by introducing new ideas.
Provide clarification to classmates’ questions and provide insight into the discussion.
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability”Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines involved in cyber-security? (02Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these abilities?(02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3.How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative. (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13carefully and then give your answers on the basis of your understanding.
4.Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks, goals,and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task, goal,and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
5.Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdulaziz Nasser Albatli
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Throughout this course, you will have the opportunity to discuss project management concepts, such as the skills and traits most pertinent for successful project managers, with your classmates and your instructor. In this workshop, you will submit a discussion post sharing your individual resource management competencies and your plan to develop these skills.
Upon successful completion of this discussion, you will be able to:
Consider individual skills needed to plan and acquire project resources.
Determine personal development needs to enhance resource management skills.
Resources
Textbook: Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach
Textbook: PMP Exam Prep
Article: The Five Stages of Team Development and the Role of the Project Manager
Video & Transcript: Project Management Requires Skill Development
Video & Transcript: Building Project Management Skills
Video & Transcript: Good vs. Bad Project Managers
Note: The inclusion of publicly-accessible video links in your courses and program should neither be considered a recommendation or endorsement of any products or services mentioned within them.
Background Information
Now that you have explored the skills that are valuable for project managers as they are planning and acquiring project resources, you will reflect upon your own individual competencies that aid you in resource planning. You will discuss how your individual skills align with tools and techniques for resource planning processes, as well as how those skills contribute to your resource planning abilities. Finally, you will share how you plan to further develop these skills to aid you in managing future projects.
Instructions
Review the rubric to make sure you understand the criteria for earning your grade.
In PMP Exam Prep, read Chapter 9:Resources
In Agile Fundamentals: A Comprehensive Guide to Using an Agile Approach, read Chapter 7: High Performing Teams
The Five Stages of Team Development and the Role of the Project Manager.
Transcript of the “Project Management Requires…” video
Watch the following videos:
Building Project Management Skills (4:01 min)
Transcript of the “Building Project Management…” video.
Good vs. Bad Project Managers (9:58 min)
Transcript of the “Good vs. Bad…” video.
Navigate to the threaded discussion and respond to the following prompts:
While project managers plan for resources and acquire resources for their projects, they make critical decisions and solve problems by using creativity, interpersonal skills, and project management expertise.
Describe your individual skills and traits that will enable you to plan and acquire project resources effectively.
Describe at least two tools and techniques in either process (resource planning or acquiring resources) and how your skills align with the techniques.
Describe how you can further develop these skills to propel your success in managing projects into the future.
In contrast to some of your prior courses, your initial post is due Day Three of the workshop, not Day Four.
Your initial post should be a minimum of 200 words and at least one reference.
Properly cite and reference one or more of the workshop’s sources in your original post.
All references and citations should be in APA format.
For information on how to cite sources and format citations and references properly, review the Academic Writer website or the OCLS APA Style Page.
You may also review the OCLS Evaluating Sources Page to see the criteria for credible Internet research websites.
Read and respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings, as well as follow-up instructor questions directed to you, by the end of the workshop. Responses should be at least 100 words.
Your postings also should:
Be well developed by providing clear answers with evidence of critical thinking.
Add greater depth to the discussion by introducing new ideas.
Provide clarification to classmates’ questions and provide insight into the discussion.
Project: Development of Chicago Bears New Stadium 1. Describe the organizational structure of the project/program team of “Development of Chicago Bears New Stadium”2. What are the roles and responsibilities of project/program team members of the project-Development of Chicago Bears New Stadium
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability”Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines involved in cyber-security? (02Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these abilities?(02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3.How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative. (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13carefully and then give your answers on the basis of your understanding.
4.Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks, goals,and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task, goal,and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
5.Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
ر
اإللكتونية
الجامعة السعودية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud AlJohani
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges
of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ” Page:
– 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and
commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J.
(2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number
of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks)
(Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement
for a large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach?
(02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of
the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02
Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational
Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an
organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical.
What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words
200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually
increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment
might explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Abdulaziz Nasser Albatli
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. I sent you a case study for the assignment I sent you chapters 11 & 13, the second part
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud AlJohani
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 10
Ability
325
10.5 General cognitive ability has a strong positive relationship with job performance, due
primarily to its effects on task performance. In contrast, general cognitive ability is only
weakly related to organizational commitment.
10.6 Many organizations use cognitive ability tests to hire applicants with high levels of general
cognitive ability. One of the most commonly used tests is the Wonderlic Cognitive Ability
Test.
Key Terms
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ability
Cognitive ability
Verbal ability
Quantitative ability
Reasoning ability
Spatial ability
Perceptual ability
General cognitive ability
Emotional intelligence
Self-awareness
p. 304
p. 307
p. 308
p. 308
p. 308
p. 309
p. 309
p. 310
p. 311
p. 311
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Other awareness
Emotion regulation
Use of emotions
Strength
Stamina
Flexibility
Coordination
Psychomotor ability
Sensory abilities
Wonderlic Cognitive Ability Test
p. 311
p. 312
p. 312
p. 315
p. 315
p. 315
p. 318
p. 318
p. 318
p. 322
Discussion Questions
10.1 What roles do learning, education, and other experiences play in determining a person’s
abilities? For which type of ability—cognitive, emotional, or physical—do these factors play
the largest role?
10.2 Think of a job that requires very high levels of certain cognitive abilities. Can you think of
a way to redesign that job so that people who lack those abilities could still perform the
job effectively? Now respond to the same question with regard to emotional and physical
abilities.
10.3 Consider your responses to the previous questions. Are cognitive, emotional, and physical
abilities different in the degree to which jobs can be redesigned to accommodate people
who lack relevant abilities? What are the implications of this difference, if there is one?
10.4 Think of experiences you’ve had with people who demonstrated unusually high or low
levels of emotional intelligence. Then consider how you would rate them in terms of their
cognitive abilities. Do you think that emotional intelligence “bleeds over” to affect people’s
perceptions of cognitive ability?
10.5 What combination of abilities is appropriate for the job of your dreams? Do you possess
those abilities? If you fall short on any of these abilities, what could you do to improve?
Case: U.S. Marine Corps
The U.S. Marine Corps is a large organization with a highly recognizable culture that values
mental and physical toughness, pride, and character. However, with emerging technologies and
other geopolitical trends, the battlefield is changing in ways that have a number of important
implications for the type of individual who is recruited and trained to become a Marine. The
challenge confronting U.S. military leadership is how to cope with these changes in a way that
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
325
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
326
CHAPTER 10
Ability
facilitates accomplishment of an evolving Marine Corps mission and, at the same time, preserves
the Marine Corps’ rich tradition.
There are new technologies and tasks needing to be accomplished for which there is little
expertise in the Marine Corps, so creating new positions to deal with these tasks—and filling
these positions with the appropriate personnel—is a top priority. Perhaps the best example is the
growing need for cyber-security personnel who have knowledge of computers and electronics,
network monitoring software, development environment software, transaction security and antivirus software, operating systems, and web platforms. Cyber-security personnel are needed not
only to work in offices and computer laboratories for support and administrative purposes, but
also for forward deployment in the field to ensure computer information can be used for operational purposes. Regardless of the context in which they work, cyber-security personnel need to
have a keen sense of when things are going wrong, or when there’s likely to be a problem. They
also need to be able to apply general rules to solve problems, and to combine various pieces of
seemingly unrelated information to form conclusions.
The need for cyber-security personnel is so immediate that there has been talk of allowing for
lateral entry into the Marine Corps. This means that those with the requisite cyber-security skills
and abilities may be allowed to join the Marine Corps, at an advanced rank, without having to go
through boot camp. One concern with this idea is that boot camp weeds out recruits who do not
have the mental and physical abilities necessary to be a “true” Marine. The obvious alternative
is to recruit and train individuals who have the complete mix of abilities needed to excel as both
a Marine warrior and as a cyber-security specialist. However, it may be difficult to find the right
individuals, and the process of training them may take too long. By the time new recruits make
their way through boot camp and cyber training, altogether new cyber threats may emerge.
10.1
Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security?
10.2 Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities?
What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these
abilities?
10.3 How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
Sources: Marine Corps Recruiting Website, https://www.marines.com (accessed March 20, 2019); A.R. Millett, Semper
Fidelis: The History of the United States Marine Corps (New York: The Free Press, 1991); J. Schogol, “Every Marine a Rifleman
No More,” Marine Corps Times, May 7, 2017, https://www.marinecorpstimes.com/news/your-marine-corps/2017/05/07/
every-marine-a-rifleman-no-more/.
Exercise: Emotional Intelligence
The purpose of this exercise is to help you become more aware of your emotions and the emotions of others, as well as to see how emotions can be regulated and used in your daily life. This
exercise uses groups, so your instructor will either assign you to a group or ask you to create your
own group. The exercise has the following steps:
10.1 Think about situations in which you’ve experienced each of the following four emotions:
• Joy
• Anxiety
• Sadness
• Anger
10.2 In writing or in discussion with your group, answer the following questions about each
situation:
a. What, exactly, triggered your emotion in this situation?
coL61557_ch10_302-332.indd
326
12/10/19 03:47 PM
Final PDF to printer
11
Teams: Characteristics
and Diversity
ORGANIZATIONAL
MECHANISMS
Organizational
Culture
Organizational
Structure
INDIVIDUAL
MECHANISMS
GROUP
MECHANISMS
Job
Satisfaction
Leadership:
Styles &
Behaviors
Leadership:
Power &
Negotiation
Teams:
Processes &
Communication
Teams:
Characteristics &
Diversity
Stress
INDIVIDUAL
OUTCOMES
Job
Performance
Motivation
Trust, Justice,
& Ethics
Organizational
Commitment
Learning &
Decision Making
INDIVIDUAL
CHARACTERISTICS
Ability
Personality &
Cultural Values
LEARNING GOALS
After reading this chapter, you should be able to answer the following questions:
11.1 What are the five general team types and their defining characteristics?
11.2 What are the three general types of team interdependence?
11.3 What factors are involved in team composition?
11.4 What are the types of team diversity, and how do they influence team functioning?
11.5 How do team characteristics influence team effectiveness?
11.6 How can team compensation be used to manage team effectiveness?
334
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
334
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
WHOLE FOODS
W
hich grocery store chain comes to mind when you
think of high-quality natural and organic foods?
Chances are the answer to this question is Whole
Foods. Founded in 1980, Whole Foods is now a Fortune
500 company, with sales of nearly $15 billion generated
from its 460 stores and 87,000 employees. Even if there’s
not a Whole Foods market located near you, or you could
care less about whether your food has hydrogenated fats
or artificial colors and preservatives, you may be familiar
with the company because of accolades and coverage from
news and business publications. As examples, the company has been named to Fortune’s list of the “100 Best
Companies to Work For” each year since the list’s inception
in 1998. It’s also one of Fortune’s “World’s Most Admired
Companies” and has appeared on Newsweek’s list of “Top
Green Companies in the U.S.,” and Forbes’ list of “100 Most
Trustworthy Companies in America.”
So, what accounts for Whole Foods’ tremendous growth
and reputation? To sum it up in one word, the answer may be
“teams.” The original idea behind Whole Foods was that the
world was ready for a natural foods supermarket. However,
Brooks Kraft/Contributor/Getty Images
the company’s success has been driven largely by a strong
set of values that are enacted through teams and supportive
team practices. The company believes that teams not only
result in the type of collective learning and intelligence that
promotes incremental progress, but also that teams reinforce a sense of community and dedication to the company,
customers, and other stakeholders in society.
Although many companies claim that they value and rely
on teams, Whole Foods’ belief in teams is all-encompassing.
Each store is structured around 8 to 10 teams, and because
these teams are largely self-managed, they are teams in
the true sense of the word. Team members not only work
together to carry out the responsibilities of their department,
but they also meet regularly to discuss issues, make decisions, and solve problems. Team members are also given
feedback about how well their team is performing relative to
historical standards and to other teams, and their compensation is tied to the performance of their team as well. Because
the fate of team members is shared at Whole Foods, employees are motivated to work cooperatively, and this maximizes
the chance that the interests of everyone are satisfied.
335
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
335
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
336
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TEAM CHARACTERISTICS AND DIVERSITY
The topic of teams is likely familiar to almost anyone who might be reading this book. In fact,
you’ve probably had firsthand experience with several different types of teams at different points
in your life. As an example, most of you have played a team sport or two (yes, playing soccer in
gym class counts). Most of you have also worked in student teams to complete projects or assignments for courses you’ve taken. Or perhaps you’ve worked closely with a small group of people
to accomplish a task that was important to you—planning an event, raising money for a charity,
or starting and running a small cash business. Finally, some of you have been members of organizational teams responsible for making a product, providing a service, or generating recommendations for solving company problems.
But what exactly is a team, and what is it that makes a team more than a “group”? A team
consists of two or more people who work interdependently over some time period to accomplish
common goals related to some task-oriented purpose.1 You can think of teams as a special type of
group, where a group is just a collection of two or more people. Teams are special for two reasons.
First, the interactions among members within teams revolve around a deeper dependence on one
another than the interactions within groups. Second, the interactions within teams occur with a
specific task-related purpose in mind. Although the members of a friendship group may engage
in small talk or in-depth conversations on a frequent basis, the members of a team depend on
one another for critical information, materials, and actions that are needed to accomplish goals
related to their purpose for being together.
The use of teams in today’s organizations is widespread. National surveys indicate that teams
are used in the majority of organizations in the United States, regardless of whether the organization is large or small.2 In fact, some researchers suggest that almost all major U.S. companies are
currently using teams or planning to implement them, and that up to 50 percent of all employees
in the United States work in a team as part of their job.3 Thus, whereas the use of teams was limited to pioneers such as Procter & Gamble in the 1960s, teams are currently used in all types of
industries to accomplish all the types of work necessary to make organizations run effectively.4
Why have teams become so widespread? The most obvious reason is that the nature of today’s
work requires them. As work has become more complex, interactions among multiple team
members have become more vital. This is because interactions allow the team to pool complementary knowledge and skills. As an example, surgical teams consist of individuals who received
specialized training in the activities needed to conduct surgical procedures. The team consists of
a surgeon who received training for the procedure in question, an anesthesiologist who received
A surgical team consists of
specialized members who
depend on one another to
accomplish tasks that are
both complex and important. Why might you not
want to have surgery conducted by a surgical team
that functions like a group?
Photodisc Collection/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
336
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
337
training necessary to manage patient pain, and an operating room nurse who was trained to provide overall care for the patient.
Teams may also be useful to organizations in ways beyond just accomplishing the work itself.
For example, one study revealed that problem-solving teams composed primarily of rank-and-file
workers could boost productivity in steel mills by devising ways to increase the efficiency of production lines and quality control processes.5 Although implementing teams often makes sense in
settings such as these, for which the nature of the work and work-related problems are complex,
teams vary a great deal from one another in terms of their effectiveness. The goal of this chapter,
as well as the next, is to help you understand factors that influence team effectiveness. Fortunately,
there has been over a century of research on this topic that we can refer to in this effort.6
WHAT CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE USED TO
DESCRIBE TEAMS?
This is the first of two chapters on teams. This chapter focuses on team characteristics—the task,
unit, and member qualities that can be used to describe teams and that combine to make some
teams more effective than others. Team characteristics provide a means of categorizing and examining teams, which is important because teams come in so many shapes and sizes. Team characteristics play an important role in determining what a team is capable of achieving and may
influence the strategies and processes the team uses to reach its goals. As you will see, however,
there’s more to understanding team characteristics than meets the eye. Team characteristics such
as diversity, for example, have many meanings, and its effect on team functioning and effectiveness depends on what type of diversity you’re concerned with as well as several additional complicating factors. Chapter 12 will focus on team processes and communication—the specific actions
and behaviors that teams can engage in to achieve synergy. The concepts in that chapter will help
explain why some teams are more or less effective than their characteristics would suggest they
should be. For now, however, we turn our attention to this question: “What characteristics can be
used to describe teams?”
TEAM TYPES
One way to describe teams is to take advantage of existing taxonomies that place teams into various types. One such taxonomy is illustrated in Table 11-1. The table illustrates that there are five
general types of teams and that each is associated with a number of defining characteristics.7 The
most notable characteristics include the team’s purpose, the length of the team’s existence, and
the amount of time involvement the team requires of its individual members. The sections to follow review these types of teams in turn.
11.1
What are the five general
team types and their defining
characteristics?
WORK TEAMS Work teams are designed to be relatively permanent. Their purpose is to produce
goods or provide services, and they generally require a full-time commitment from their members.
As an example of a work team, consider how cars and trucks are manufactured at Toyota.8 Teams
are composed of four to eight members who do the physical work, and a leader who supports the
team and coordinates with other teams. Although the teams are responsible for the work involved
in the assembly of the vehicles, they are also responsible for quality control and developing ideas
for improvements in the production process. Team members inspect each other’s work, and when
they see a problem, they stop the line until they are able to resolve the problem.
MANAGEMENT TEAMS Management teams are similar to work teams in that they are designed
to be relatively permanent; however, they are also distinct in a number of important ways. Whereas
work teams focus on the accomplishment of core operational-level production and service tasks,
management teams participate in managerial-level tasks that affect the entire organization.
Specifically, management teams are responsible for coordinating the activities of organizational
subunits—typically departments or functional areas—to help the organization achieve its long-term
goals. Top management teams, for example, consist of senior-level executives who meet to make
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
337
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
338
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
TABLE 11-1
Types of Teams
TYPE OF TEAM
PURPOSE AND
ACTIVITIES
LIFE SPAN
MEMBER
INVOLVEMENT
SPECIFIC
EXAMPLES
Work team
Produce goods or
provide services.
Long
High
Self-managed
work team
Production
team
Maintenance
team
Sales team
Management
team
Integrate activities
of subunits across
business functions.
Long
Moderate
Top management team
Parallel team
Provide recommendations and resolve
issues.
Varies
Low
Quality circle
Advisory council
Committee
Project team
Produce a onetime output (product, service, plan,
design, etc.).
Varies
Varies
Product design
team
Research group
Planning team
Action team
Perform complex
tasks that vary in
duration and take
place in highly visible or challenging
circumstances.
Varies
Varies
Surgical team
Musical group
Expedition
team
Sports team
Sources: Cohen, S. G., and D. E. Bailey. “What Makes Teams Work: Group Effectiveness Research from the Shop Floor to
the Executive Suite.” Journal of Management 27 (1997): pp. 239–290; and Sundstrom, E., K. P. De Meuse, and D. Futrell.
“Work Teams: Applications and Effectiveness.” American Psychologist 45 (1990): pp. 120–133.
decisions about the strategic direction of the organization. It may also be worth mentioning that
because members of management teams are typically heads of departments, their commitment to
the management team is offset somewhat by the responsibilities they have in leading their unit or
teams in their unit.
A Toyota work team is
responsible for vehicle
assembly and quality
control.
Toru Yamanaka/AFP/Getty Images
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
338
PARALLEL TEAMS Parallel
teams are composed of members from various jobs, and
other teams, who provide recommendations to managers
about important issues that run
“parallel” to the organization’s
production processes.9 Parallel
teams require only part-time
commitment from members,
and they can be permanent or
temporary, depending on their
aim. Quality circles, for example, consist of individuals who
normally perform core production tasks, but who also meet
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
regularly with individuals from
other work groups to identify
production-related
problems
and opportunities for improvement. As an example of a more
temporary parallel team, committees often form to deal with
unique issues or issues that arise
only periodically. Examples of
issues that can spur the creation
of committees include changes
to work procedures, purchases
of new equipment or services,
and non-routine hiring.
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
339
The Rolling Stones, an
English rock band formed
in 1962, is an example of
an action team that has
stayed together for an
extended period of time.
Sebastian Gollnow/picture alliance/Getty Images
PROJECT TEAMS Project teams are formed to take on “one-time” tasks that are generally complex and require a lot of input from members with different types of training and expertise.10
Although project teams exist only as long as it takes to finish a project, some projects are quite
complex and can take years to complete. Members of some project teams work full-time, whereas
other teams demand only a part-time commitment. A planning team comprised of engineers,
architects, designers, and builders, charged with designing a suburban town center, might work
together full-time for a year or more. In contrast, the engineers and artists who constitute a design
team responsible for creating an electric toothbrush might work together for a month on the project while also serving on other project teams.
ACTION TEAMS Action teams perform tasks that are normally limited in duration. However, those
tasks are quite complex and take place in contexts that are either highly visible to an audience or of
a highly challenging nature.11 Some types of action teams work together for an extended period of
time. For example, sports teams remain intact for at least one season, and musical groups like the
Rolling Stones, ZZ Top, Aerosmith, Kiss, and AC/DC sometimes stick together for decades. Other
types of action teams stay together only as long as the task takes to complete. Surgical teams and
aircraft flight crews may only work together as a unit for a single two-hour surgery or flight.
SUMMARY So how easy is it to classify teams into one of the types summarized in Figure 11-1?
Well, it turns out that teams often fit into more than one category. As an example, consider the
teams at Pixar, the company that has produced many computer-animated hit films, such as Toy
Story, Monsters Inc., Finding Nemo, Cars, Wall-E, Up, Brave, Monsters University, Inside Out, Finding
Dory, and Coco. On the one hand, because the key members of Pixar teams have mostly remained
together for each film the company has produced, it might seem like Pixar uses work teams.12 On
the other hand, because the creation of each film can be viewed as a project, and because members are likely involved in multiple ongoing projects, it might seem reasonable to say that Pixar
uses project teams. It’s probably most appropriate to say that at Pixar, teams have characteristics
of both work teams and project teams.
FIGURE 11-1
Types of Teams
• Work teams
• Management teams
• Parallel teams
• Project teams
• Action teams
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
339
Team
Types
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
340
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
As you read the descriptions of the different team types, it may have occurred to you that
it’s possible that employees find themselves working in a variety of teams and team types. This
situation arises naturally with parallel teams; however, it occurs often with project, management,
and action teams as well. In fact, estimates are that between 65 percent and 95 percent of people
employed in knowledge-intensive jobs work in multiple teams—often three or four at a time.13
Research on this type of work arrangement, referred to as multiple team membership, indicates
that employees do not identify with each team equally and that these differences have important
implications as to how much effort and commitment employees bring to each of their teams.14
As an example that may be familiar to you, consider your experience as a student. During any
given semester, you may have had membership in two or more teams as part of the requirements
of the courses you were taking. If this is the case, you may have noticed that you did not experience the same type of satisfaction with each team. With some teams, you might have been fully
engaged in the team’s work and with the other team members, while in other teams, you may have
put forth less effort and limited your involvement with your teammates. Regardless of whether
these differences in your attitude and behavior were due to the meaningfulness of the teams’
projects, the time and level of involvement required to complete the teams’ tasks, or perhaps the
drama and stress members of some of these teams created for you, it’s likely these differences
had an influence on how well each team did on projects and assignments and, quite possibly,
the grades you earned in those courses. It turns out that this process unfolds the same way in
the workplace. However, instead of grades, the consequences of how team members’ divide their
attention and effort may be the success of a multimillion-dollar project, and following from this,
whether the team members receive sizable year-end bonuses.
At this point, we should point out that multiple team membership is not necessarily conducive
to organizational effectiveness, especially in complex work contexts where it is critical that members of teams develop tight interpersonal bonds and specialized work routines that can deal with
the unique challenges they face.15 Although employees might like the variety of working in multiple
teams and can learn from their experiences working with different teams and teammates, it takes a
great deal of time and effort to coordinate meeting times with different teams and to switch between
teams and tasks when the time comes. Given these challenges, researchers have begun to consider
actions that managers could take to enhance how employees feel about the various teams in which
they work, particularly those teams that are most crucial to organizational success. As an example,
one recent study found that team leaders who share authority, encourage self-management, and bolster confidence tend to inspire positive team behavior from members, and that, remarkably, these
positive team behaviors carry over to benefit other teams in which the team members also work.16
VARIATIONS WITHIN TEAM TYPES
The Pixar team, shown
here at the Cannes Film
Festival, has characteristics
of both work teams and
project teams. Trying to
characterize this team is
even more complicated
when you consider that
key members are involved
in the management of
the company, and their
involvement in the films
runs parallel to these other
responsibilities.
coL61557_ch11_333-373.indd
340
Even knowing whether a team is a project team, an action team, or some other type of team
doesn’t tell you the whole story. In fact, there are important variations within those categories
that are needed to understand
a team’s functioning.17 As one
example, teams can vary with
respect to the degree to which
they have autonomy and are
self-managed.18 If you’ve ever
been on a team where members
have a great deal of freedom
to work together to establish
their own goals, procedures,
roles, and membership, you’ve
worked on a team where the
level of autonomy and selfmanagement is high. You may
also have worked on a team
where the level of autonomy
Venturelli/Contributor/Getty Images
10/23/19 07:13 PM
Final PDF to printer
CHAPTER 11
Teams: Characteristics and Diversity
341
and self-management is low. In these teams, there are strict rules regarding goals, procedures,
and roles, and team leaders or managers make most of the decisions regarding management of
the team with respect to membership. Research has shown that although people generally prefer
working in teams where the level of autonomy and self-management is high, the appropriate level
of self-management with regard to overall team effectiveness may depend on a variety of factors.19
For example, researchers have concluded that high levels of self-management may be most advantageous for teams where team members have high levels of team-relevant knowledge obtained
from outside experts and others in their social networks.20
Another way that teams can vary relates to how the members typically communicate with each
other. Virtual teams are teams in which the members are geographically dispersed, and interdependent activity occurs through electronic communications—primarily e-mail, instant messaging,
group calendars, web conferencin
Answer the question in the word docs， If there is a calculation problem, write the formula and the calculation process
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Do try to be brief – questions have maximum answer lengths. Long, rambling answers will NOT
receive full credit even if the correct answer can be found within them. If you’re not sure, give me
your best guess, rather than trying to “hedge your bets”.
Microsoft Corporation:
The questions on this exam can be answered using the attached
information from Microsoft’s 10-K from 2023 (pages 6-8). All information needed to answer these
questions can be found in our course materials or in this exam.
1a. Comute Total Asset Turnover for Microsoft, for the year ended June 30, 2023. Show your
computations. (5 points)
Total Asset Turnover
Computations:
1b. This ratio has declined significantly over the past ten years. Provide one hypothesis (possible
explanaton) as to why that might occur and then name a ratio which one could use to test your
hypothesis. Be brief (one sentence for each portion of the question should be sufficient), but be as
specific as possible. (8 points)
Hypothesis:
Ratio:
2. Assume that Microsoft’s Operating ROA (OPROA) for the year ended June 30, 2023 is 51.6%.
Using this number, compute our measure of financial performance (as distinct from operating
performance) for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. You can find the formula for this on
slide 2 of Notes 6. Hint: All balance sheet numbers here should be averages even though the
formula doesn’t show this. Show your computations. (5 points)
Financial Performance:
Computations:
3a. Compute Days in Accounts Payable for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. Use “Total
Cost of Revenue” for Cost of Goods Sold. Show your computations. (5 points)
Days A/P
Computations:
3b. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Net Operating
Assets? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain. (5 points)
Explanation:
Circle Answer:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
3c. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Total Cost of
Revenue? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain. (5 points)
Explanation:
Circle Answer:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
4. Assume that Microsoft decided to increase leverage by issuing debt and using the cash received to
pay a dividend. How would this affect ROA and Operating ROA? Please circle the correct
answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain. (10 points)
Effect on ROA
Effect on Operating ROA
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
5. Currently Microsoft reports research and development as an expense. If (contrary to accounting
rules) they were to treat these as a capital expenditures, how would this affect current operating
cash flow and current NOPAT in the short term? Assume that there is NO tax effect. Please
circle the correct answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain. (10 points)
Effect on Operating cash flow
Effect on NOPAT
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
6. Using the attached information, what was the change in cash for Microsoft during the year ended
June 30, 2021? Show your computations. (5 points)
Change in cash
Computations:
7. Using the attached information, what were “accruals” for Microsoft for the year ended June 30,
2021? Show your computations. (5 points)
Accruals
Computations:
8. Using the attached information, did Microsoft’s inventory increase or decrease during the year
ended June 30, 2021? Briefly (one sentence) explain. (5 points)
Circle Answer: Increase Explanation:
Decrease
Cannot determine
9. Using the attached information, how is Microsoft generating cash during the year ended June 30,
2023? How is it using its cash? (6 points)
Main source of cash
Two primary uses of cash
10a. Microsoft’s balance sheet contains two liabilities labeled as ‘unearned revenue’ – some of this
is current (“payable” within one year) and some is non-current (“payable” after one year). For
purposes of this question, don’t worry about the distinction. Footnote 1 (not included here)
explains that the bulk of this liability represents license fees paid to Microsoft in advance of
Microsoft delivering services. Assuming that all of Microsoft’s service revenue is paid for in
this manner, use the balance sheet and income statement information to compute the cash that
Microsoft received during the year ended June 30, 2023 for service revenues. (5 points)
Cash received for
Computation:
services:
10b. Assume that Microsoft overstates the short-term unearned revenue liability account as of June 30,
2023, but correctly estimates the account as of June 30, 2024. (4 points)
Increase / decrease
/
cannot determine
What is the effect
on income for the
year ended June 30,
(Circle one)
2023?
What is the effect
on income for the
year ended June 30,
2024?
Increase
/
decrease
/
cannot determine
(Circle one)
10c. How might one assess whether the appropriate level of unearned revenue is deferred in 2023? (4
points)
Explanation:
End of Questions
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
INCOME STATEMENTS
(In millions, except per share amounts)
Year Ended June 30,
Revenue:
Product
Service
2023
$
Total revenue
64,699
147,216
2022
$
72,732
125,538
2021
$
71,074
97,014
211,915
198,270
168,088
17,804
48,059
19,064
43,586
18,219
34,013
Total cost of revenue
65,863
62,650
52,232
Gross margin
Research and development
146,052
135,620
115,856
Sales and marketing
27,195
22,759
24,512
21,825
20,716
20,117
General and administrative
7,575
5,900
5,107
Operating income
88,523
83,383
69,916
Interest Income, net
788
333
1,186
Income before income taxes
89,311
83,716
71,102
Provision for income taxes
16,950
10,978
9,831
Cost of revenue:
Product
Service
Net income
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
72,361
$
72,738
$
61,271
BALANCE SHEETS
(In millions)
June 30,
2023
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents
$
34,704
2022
$
13,931
Short-term investments
76,558
90,826
Total cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $650 and $633
Inventories
111,262
48,688
2,500
104,757
44,261
3,742
Other current assets
21,807
16,924
184,257
95,641
14,346
9,879
67,886
9,366
30,601
169,684
74,398
13,148
6,891
67,524
11,298
21,897
Total current assets
Property and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation of $68,251 and $59,660
Operating lease right-of-use assets
Equity investments
Goodwill
Intangible assets, net
Other long-term assets
Total assets
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable
Current portion of long-term debt
Accrued compensation
Short-term income taxes
Short-term unearned revenue
$
411,976
$
364,840
$
18,095
5,247
11,009
4,152
50,901
$
19,000
2,749
10,661
4,067
45,538
Other current liabilities
14,745
13,067
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Long-term income taxes
Long-term unearned revenue
Deferred income taxes
Operating lease liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
104,149
41,990
25,560
2,912
433
12,728
17,981
95,082
47,032
26,069
2,870
230
11,489
15,526
Total liabilities
205,753
198,298
93,718
118,848
(6,343)
86,939
84,281
(4,678)
206,223
166,542
Commitments and contingencies
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock and paid-in capital – shares authorized 24,000; outstanding 7,432 and 7,464
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
Total stockholders’ equity
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
411,976
$
364,840
CASH FLOWS STATEMENTS
(In millions)
Year Ended June 30,
Operations
Net income
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash from operations:
Depreciation, amortization, and other
Stock-based compensation expense
Net recognized losses (gains) on investments and derivatives
Deferred income taxes
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable
Inventories
Other current assets
Other long-term assets
Accounts payable
Unearned revenue
Income taxes
Other current liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
2023
$
72,361
2022
$
72,738
2021
$
61,271
13,861
9,611
196
(6,059)
14,460
7,502
(409 )
(5,702)
11,686
6,118
(1,249)
(150 )
(4,087)
1,242
(1,991)
(2,833)
(2,721)
5,535
(358 )
2,272
553
(6,834)
(1,123)
(709 )
(2,805)
2,943
5,109
696
2,344
825
(6,481)
737
(932 )
(3,459)
2,798
4,633
(2,309)
4,149
1,402
87,582
89,035
78,214
Financing
Cash premium on debt exchange
Repayments of debt
Common stock issued
Common stock repurchased
Common stock cash dividends paid
Other, net
0
(2,750)
1,866
(22,245 )
(19,800 )
(1,006)
0
(9,023)
1,841
(32,696 )
(18,135 )
(863 )
(5,754)
(3,750)
1,693
(27,385 )
(16,521 )
(769 )
Net cash used in financing
(43,935 )
(58,876 )
(52,486 )
(28,107 )
(23,886 )
(20,622 )
(1,670)
(37,651 )
33,510
14,354
(3,116)
(22,038 )
(26,456 )
16,451
28,443
(2,825)
(8,909)
(62,924 )
51,792
14,008
(922 )
(22,680 )
(30,311 )
(27,577 )
Net cash from operations
Investing
Additions to property and equipment
Acquisition of companies, net of cash acquired, and purchases of intangible
and other assets
Purchases of investments
Maturities of investments
Sales of investments
Other, net
Net cash used in investing
Refer to accompanying notes.
Determining the Statute of Limitations: While the statute of limitations for examination is generally three years from the date a return is filed, the statue can be automatically extended, can be voluntarily extended, or tolled under various provisions provided in the code, regulations, rulings and court cases. Your job is to advise your clients as to the applicable statute of limitations based on the fact pattern to be provided to you below. Remember: the date a return is deemed filed is a question of both fact and law. It is October 1, 2021. The clients have not filed their joint current year’s tax return. No extension has been filed. Your clients have filed timely in the past and there is no reason to suspect that there is unreported income (once the return is filed). They live in Florida and have been unaffected by a hurricane or other severe weather event. Your team must write a memorandum to the client explaining when a tax return filing will be deemed sufficient to start the statute of limitations for both examination and assessment purposes. In addition, the clients have asked if they should file a joint tax return under the facts above. You should cite, as appropriate, the code, regulations, rulings, court cases… etc. Make sure that the memo addresses all the following questions for both types of returns:What are the elements of a complete return?What is the general limitation on assessment?What are the exceptions to the general statute of limitations on Assessment?When is a return deemed sufficient to start the statute of limitations?What happens if IRS files a return on behalf of taxpayer?Under what circumstances will a statute not start?If the statute is not deemed to start, because of not being deemed to be a complete return, what curative actions may be necessary in order to start the statute of limitations?When is the statutes of limitations tolled from running? For how long?
Please upload a personal statement. It should be no less than a one-page letter indicating applicant’s motivation for seeking entrance to the program. The statement should comment upon applicant’s personal and career goals, the expectations s/he has for the program in relation to the achievement of his/her goals, and the strengths the applicant feel s/he can bring to the program. While it is not necessary, the applicant can also include potential thesis interests and potential thesis sponsor.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ELAHEH
BOYERAHMADI
CONTACT
+98 9307875-620
Elahehboyerahmadi00@gmail.com
Basir Apt ,9th West St., Phase 3, Kianpars,
Khuzestan Province,Ahvaz,Iran
Date of Birth: 21 September 1987
Passport No.: E52834309
S K I L L
• Possesses an ability to provide colleagues and
friends with honest, constructive criticism
• Collaborative and creative mindset, with an
affinity for problem-solving
• In-depth knowledge of specific industries or
markets
• Demonstrated knowledge of international
trade principles and practices
• Solid understanding of business processes and
procedures
• Highly motivated to learn new skills,optimistic,
and passionate about problem-solving through
application of skills and knowledge
• Able to work independently and with a team
• Proven track record of successful sales and
negotiation in an international setting
• Excellent communication, presentation, and
writing skills
• Possesses an ability to grasp new concepts
quickly, eg technical terms
• Outstanding verbal and written
communication skills in English, including
presenting analytical results and presentations
• Relationship management skills and openness
to feedback
Experienced,effective and motivated professional brings a combination of
strong leadership skills and the ability to motivate team workers. Resultoriented business expert with strong history of leading high-performance
teams to meet and exceed objectives. An energetic communicator with
proven ability to capture opportunities for growth . Also a great teacher
skilled in leading groups of teachers and helping them conduct their duties
while increasing their productivity.
EDUCA T I ON
Sep 2006_July 2010
Islamic Azad University, Abadan Branch
Bachelor of Arts: English Language Translation
WORK EXPERIENCE
IRACO Company || Jan 2014_ Present
International Business Team lead ||Aug 2019_Present
• Providing and leading business development and soft skills
support to all areas of the business
• Working with executive management to create new business
opportunities and develop strategies to capitalize on them
• Analyzing the risk involved in new ventures and developing
appropriate risk management strategies
• Acting as a business team leader and delegating tasks to team
members
International Business Expert ||Jan 2014_Aug 2019
• Meeting with business clients to discuss operational
challenges, evaluating business data to identify areas of
opportunity, and helping clients to optimize business strategies
• Providing support to senior managers by researching data and
preparing reports
• Analyzing data to identify trends that can be used to improve
business performance
Rokhshid Language Academy, Mahshahr || Jul 2018_ Jul 2023
Lead Teacher & English Instructor_ Part-Time
• Setting goals for performance and deadlines in ways that comply
with academy’s plans and visions
• Supporting, guiding, reviewing other members of teaching staff
• Monitoring teacher productivity and providing constructive
feedback and coaching
• Execute lessons efficiently using different styles of teaching
depending on the content
• Implementing strategies to improve any identified shortcomings
Diara Language Academy || Jun 2010_ Jul 2018
Supervisor & English Teacher
LANGUAGE
100%
Persian(Native)
• Evaluated and improved the planning process
• Evaluated lesson plans and observed classes on a
regular basis
• Promoted, supported, and monitored the alignment of
curriculum, instruction, and assessment in the
achievement of goals and standards
• Ensured that all teachers had the right textbooks and
supporting materials
85%
English: IELTS 6
Certifications
• Teaching English to Kids (certificate): TTC
• Computer : Word, Excel, PowerPoint
• Gymnastics Coach
VOLUNTARY ACTIVITY
• Volunteered in teaching English to
underprivileged young people to help overcome
educational inequality
APPReCIATION
• Dedicated and hardworking employee, Rokhshid
Language Academy/Mar 2022
• Letter of appreciation for acting as a consultant
and recommending strategies for completing
international process,IRACO Company Aug 2021
• Superior marketing employee of the year, IRACO
Company /Apr 2018
• Letter of appreciation for presenting excellent
technical support,IRACO Company /Dec 2015
COURSE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Social Media Marketing for Businesses/Jun 2018
Training of professional business manager/May 2017
International Marketing: Challenges and Opportunities/Apr 2016
Principles of international commercial contracts/Mar 2016
Principles of international business negotiation techniques/Dec
2015
Global Marketing/Feb 2015
Business skills and international trade/Sep 2014
Global Cultural Relations/Mar 2014
Communication and information technology/Nov 2013
International business relations/Jul 2013
Writing Principles & Administrative Correspondence/Jan 2013
Contract conclusion and order registration training/Aug 2012
HOBBY & INTERESTS
Spending time with
family
Reading books
Music
Participating in
different business
seminars
Following industry
trends
Visiting Historical
places
Hiking
Gym
The a-s-s-e-s-s-m-e-n-t willIntroduction (approximately 400 words)Body of Analysis: Developing an intervention plan (approximately 1500 words, 500 for each component)Conclusion (approximately 100 words)Please see the questions shown in the screenshot. I will send you all the info after being hired, eg PPTs, student access etc. Please send a draft in 12hrs -1 day time, day 2, and day 3 as well. + Will need to draft some questions to ask the teacher and revise base on feedback (Send bk ard in 1 day max)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assessment 3
Assignment- Design a Social Marketing Intervention Plan
Purpose:
Design a Social Marketing Intervention Plan to address one of the social problems that you discussed
in the earlier assessments (assignment 1 or 2). This individual assessment being a major assignment
contributes 40% to your overall grade and it is equivalent to 2000 words.
Expectations:
Look into the details provided in the assessment instruction below and demonstrate your ability in
designing an intervention plan by applying behaviour change wheel.
Instructions
Design an intervention plan by using behaviour change wheel (BCW) approach that discussed in
Week 8. Select only one intervention from the 9 intervention functions. Kindly use the following
outlines as your assignment structure:
Title page
Executive Summary
The Executive Summary should provide an overview of the contents of the Report Portfolio.
and should have its own page.
Table of Contents
Introduction (approximately 400 words)
Brief background about the problem, target audience and target behaviour change.
Body of Analysis: Developing an intervention plan (approximately 1500 words, 500 for each
component). Students are required to
(a) Explain why the intervention is needed to change the behaviour.
(Needs Analysis)
(b) Identify what the intervention will achieve.
(Describe the clear outcomes)
(c) Explain how the intervention will achieve the desired outcomes.
(Describe the plausible path using behaviour change wheel. Additionally, you can
also use any existing theory or logic model to support your thoughts). See week 5 for
existing theories. You may select one theory from there or use any other relevant
behaviour change theory.
Conclusion (approximately 100 words)
The Conclusion should succinctly encapsulate the important points of your assignment.
Reference List
Resource
Recommend watching the following two videos.
Video 1 – Developing a good theory of change: 10 steps for evaluation success in early intervention,
step 1
Video 2 – Developing a Theory of Change
Recommended reading resources:
Check Week 8 ‘Week in Review’ for reading resources.
Refer to ‘Assessment Task 3’ – rubric
Submission Guidelines
You should submit using the LMS submission link for this assignment. Remember
that, the report should:
a) Provide title of the assignment (state the social problem), student full name and student number,
subject code and title, and name of the tutor.
b) Write approximately 2,000 words (+/- 10%).
c) You are encouraged to include relevant tables, graphs, and figures (whichever is applicable). Each
illustration should have a caption stating the source, date and brief description of what is shown.
d)Executive summary, table of content, references and appendices not included in the word limit.
e) Use Calibri 12 point font, 1.5 line spacing
f) Reference carefully using the APA 7 referencing system. Students must use at least 5 academic
references, then may use any number of other resources (e.g. industry/company reports).
g) Include an in-text citation when you refer to, summarize, paraphrase, or quote from
another source.
h) Start a new paragraph when a new or different point/topic/issue is to be discussed.
i) Avoid writing lengthy sentences and large paragraphs.
j) You are required to write critically rather than descriptively.
K ) Demonstrate ability to present a well written and well-structured report.
Text similarity:
You can submit your draft twice to check the Turnitin score but this has to be done 24 hours
prior to the deadline. Please keep the Turnitin text similarity score at a minimum
(recommend below 15%). Assignments with poor referencing, or 25% similarity score or
higher may be penalized and referred to Academic Integrity team.
Extensions:
Teaching staff will not be able to grant extensions to students. Students can seek extensions
using the Special Consideration link. Link information available on the subject learning guide.
MKT3SEM Rubric – Assessment Task 3 [Social Marketing Intervention Plan] 40%
*an overall rating out of 100 will be assigned.
Criteria
1. Description of the
problem
(10 marks)
2.Target audience &
target behavior change
(10 marks)
3. Key risk factors
(Intervention Needs
Analysis)
(20 marks)
4. Outcomes
(What the intervention
will achieve).
(20 marks)
5. Feasible Analysis
(How the intervention
will achieve the desired
outcomes)
(20 marks)
Scale
High Distinction
Distinction
Credit
Pass
Fail
Systematic and
Clear
Reasonable
Problem described Poor description of
clear identification identification and identification
partially. Impact of problem, or absent.
and definition of definition of
and definition of problem discussed Impact of problem
problem.
problem.
problem.
with sufficient
not described
Impact of problem Impact of
Impact of
information
sufficiently
widely described problem well
problem fairly
(health, economic, described (health, described
social and other
economic, social (health,
relevant effects)
and other
economic, social
relevant effects) and other
relevant effects)
Population clearly Population clearly Population
Only few population Population not or
specified with
specified with
reasonably
characteristics
poorly specified and
critical evidence
detailed evidence described but
specified and
evidence targeting
targeting behavior targeting
some lack of
evidence targeting for behavior change
change
behavior change specificity or
for behavior change missing.
missing some
lacking
important
factors for target
purpose
Risk factors
Risk factors
Risk factors
Risk factors
Few if any, or
critically/systematic comprehensively reasonably
somehow identified erroneous, risk
ally identified and identified and
identified and
and fairly connected factors described.
thoroughly
precisely
practically
to intervention
Poor connection to
connected to
connected to
connected to
intervention
intervention
intervention
intervention
Advantages of
Advantages of
Advantages of Advantages of
Few dimensions of
intervention and intervention and intervention and intervention and
advantages
prevention
prevention
prevention
prevention
addressed and done
strategies critically strategies
strategies
strategies not fully poorly.
and systematically somehow
reasonably
described.
discussed.
critically and
described.
Specific outcomes systematically
Basic but incomplete Outcomes poorly
Specific
statement of
stated, unclear.
stated
discussed.
systematically,
outcomes fairly outcomes.
clearly, succinctly, Specific outcomes stated with
and
stated clearly,
adequate
supporting
comprehensively. succinctly, and
comprehensively. rationale.
Thorough critical Thorough
Mostly relevant Some important
Inadequate coverage
literature review of literature review and timely
literature missing. of the literature,
current
of current
literature review Analysis of the
intervention plan
intervention and intervention and of current
literature and of
and prevention
prevention
prevention
intervention and other programs, and strategies
strategies and
strategies and
prevention
interventions
programs,
program.
strategies.
satisfactory
systematically
Somewhat lack of
presented
systematic
analysis
6. Conceptual
Framework (BCW) and
theory of change
(10 marks)
7. Acknowledging
resources (In-text
citation & referencing)
(APA style)
(10 marks)
Conceptual
Conceptual
Conceptual
Some elements of
framework or
framework or
framework or
BCW present but
model of BCW
model of BCW
model of BCW overall incomplete,
comprehensively convincingly
convincingly
unsound parts
presented, sound presented, and presented, and
and consistent with consistent with consistent with
the literature and the literature and the literature
theory of change theory of change
Excellent reference Good reference Reasonable
Reference list is
list which contains list which
reference list but limited and needs
a wide range of
contains an
needed more
wider range of
sources. Citation adequate range of sources.
sources. Several
presented
sources. Odd
Some
citation errors.
correctly.
error in citation referencing
errors.
style
Absent, too brief
and/or faulty
Lack or no evidence
of referencing.
i want you more and good explanation the answer please
Loong answering please This assignment is an individual assignment
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question numbers clearly in their answers.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
i want you more and good explanation the answer please
Loong answering please
Make sure read all instruction, please
I wanna the true answer and good explanation
without plagiarism please❤️
My professor is soooo accurate please do all ur best ❤️
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Noof Aldossary
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Please provide an answer that is 100% original and do not copy the answer to this question from any other website since I am already well aware of this. I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure that the answer comes up with way less than 18% on Studypool’s internal plagiarism checker since anything above this is not acceptable according to Studypool’s standards. I will not accept answers that are above this standard.
No AI or Chatbot! I will be sure to check this.
Requirements: Please be sure to carefully follow and address all of the requirements listed in the attached document
Please provide an answer that is 100% original and do not copy the answer to this question from any other website since I am already well aware of this. I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure that the answer comes up with way less than 18% on Studypool’s internal plagiarism checker since anything above this is not acceptable according to Studypool’s standards. I will not accept answers that are above this standard.
No AI or Chatbot! I will be sure to check this.
Please be sure to carefully follow the instructions.
No plagiarism & No Course Hero & No Chegg. The assignment will be checked for originality via the Turnitin plagiarism tool.
Please upload a personal statement. It should be no less than a one-page letter indicating applicant’s motivation for seeking entrance to the program. The statement should comment upon applicant’s personal and career goals, the expectations s/he has for the program in relation to the achievement of his/her goals, and the strengths the applicant feel s/he can bring to the program. While it is not necessary, the applicant can also include potential thesis interests and potential thesis sponsor.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Nasrin Nasrabadi
Graduate Student,University Lecturer and BI Analyst
Contact Information
LinkedIn
nasrinnasrabadi@gmail.com
n_nasrabadi@tabrizu.ac.ir
About
Multi-faceted and results-driven professional with advanced analytical, reasoning, and time
management skills. Proven track record in data analysis, opinion mining, business intelligence,
business process improvement and market research. Demonstrated ability to motivate and
build cohesive teams that achieve results. Adept problem solver, employing creativity and
innovation to overcome challenging and complex issues.
Educational Background
•
PhD candidate, Computer Science, University of Tabriz, Tabriz, Iran – (2013-Not complete)
Department of Computer Science, Faculty of Mathematics, Statistics and Computer Science
❖ Thesis: Authorship Attribution
❖ Supervisor: Dr. Shahriar Lotfi
❖ Not complete
• M.Sc., Computer Science- Intelligent Systems, Amir Kabir University of Technology, Tehran,
Iran – (2011-2013)
Faculty of Computer Science
❖ Thesis: Design and implement intelligent transportation Systems in the BRT of Tehran
❖ Supervisor: Dr. Mehdi Ghatee
❖ Total GPA: A (16.26/20 in Iranian scale)
• B.Sc., Computer Engineering- Software, Azad University of Karaj, Alborz, Iran -(2006-2010)
Faculty of Computer Engineering
❖ Thesis: Design and Implement Business Intelligence in a company
❖ Advised by: Dr. Ali Ali Jamaat
❖ Total GPA: A (16.79/20 in Iranian scale)
•
Research Interests
• Data Science
• NLP
• Business Intelligence & Data mining
• Data Security
Publications
➢ Journal Papers
•
•
Zefreh, E., Didehvar, F., & Nasrabadi, N. (2015). A Hybrid Iterative Algorithm For
Reconstruction Of X-Ray Computed Tomography. Malaysian Journal of Computer
Science, 28(1), 46–58.
Nasrabadi N., Lotfi Sh., Razmara J., Izadkhah H. (2023). A novel method for Authorship
Attribution using Association Rules. Neural Computing and Applications, Under review
➢ Book Chapters
–
Information Security
Academic Experience
➢ Lecturer, University of Applied Science and Technology (Several branches),
Karaj, Iran (2013_Present) for undergraduate students
• Various Courses Including:
Artificial Intelligence, Expert Systems,
Algorithms Design, Database Management, Electronic Services, Information
Technology Management, Web Design Principles, Introduction to
Programming, Programming Fundamentals, Machine Language, Computer
Networks, Introduction to Cryptography, Secure Software Engineering,
Database Security, Operating System Security, Data Structures, Internet
Privacy and Security, Introduction to Linux, Others.
➢ Lecturer, Technical and Vocational University, Karaj, Iran (2015-2017) for
undergraduate students
• Logic circuits, Introduction to programming
➢ Lecturer, University of Tabriz, Tabriz, Iran (2014-2015) for undergraduate
students
• Introduction to Programming, Algorithm Design, Artificial Intelligence,
Database Management
Work Experience
➢ BI programmer and Analyst, Azinkhodro Co.||Since April 2022
• Analyzing and synthesizing data and sing automated tools to extract
data from primary and secondary sources
• Researching, developing and implementing data-gathering methods
• Identify opportunities to improve processes and strategies with
technology solutions
• Preparing reports for the management stating trends, patterns, and
predictions using relevant data
➢ Manager, Nasr Institute||Since 2012
Proactively identify performance problems and drive the team to
remediate them
• Developing data science projects by defining objectives and
establishing timelines
•
➢ Teacher, Nasr Institute||Since 2012
• Planning lessons and activities that facilitate students’ acquisition of
basic and advanced computer skills
• Tracking and communicating students’ advancement throughout
the course
➢ Website Developer, Iran Avandfar Co.||2020-2022
• Responsible for planning and developing software solutions and web
applications, supporting and maintaining a company’s websites and
digital products
• Write well designed, testable, efficient code by using best software
development practices
➢ Executive Manager, Ferdowsi Institute||2011-2013
• Providing leadership for an organization by setting goals and making
strategic decisions for the long term success of the business
• Developing department wide reports on progress
➢ Database Programmer, EIT co.||2010-2011
• Gathering all salient information regarding the intended functions of each
database
• Configuring databases such that they are able to withstand attacks and
the loss of information
• Providing practical guidance on the use and migration of each database
Specialized Software Skills
➢ Power BI
➢ SQL Server
➢ SSIS
➢ SSRS
➢ SSAS
➢ Visual Studio for
programming, Python, C#
➢ Introductory Linux
➢ MATLAB
➢ Excel Solver
➢ Office Tools
➢ Photoshop
➢ Illustrator
➢ WordPress
➢ HTML & CSS
skills
Advanced analytical, leadership, and problem-solving skills
Exceptional organizational skills and attention to detail
In-depth knowledge of database technologies, architecture, and data security
Strong analytical skills with the ability to collect, organize, analyze, and
disseminate significant amounts of information with attention to detail and
accuracy
• Firm understanding of statistics and databases
• Possesses an ability to work in a fast-paced, deadline-driven environment
• Able to contribute both independently and as part of a team
•
•
•
•
Language Proficiency
• English
• Duolingo – 125
• IELTS Academic 7
• French
• Chinese
Selected Specialized Courses
• Effective team member to motivate and inspire staff,Azinkhodro Co./Mar 2023
• Dedicated Employee,Nasr Institute/Sep 2019
• Best engineer of the month in Iran Avandfar Co./ Nov 2021
Selected Specialized Courses
•
•
•
•
•
Artificial Intelligence
Expert Systems
Security
Database Management
Business Intelligence
Section 1: A brief summary of the key facts of the case – this should be no longer than a paragraph (or one slide for
presenting groups).
Section 2: A list of the professional standards applicable to the case. Each of your listings should include the codification
number and title of the standard as well as a reference to the pertinent paragraph(s) within the standard if appropriate.
E.g. PCAOB AS 2401: Consideration of Fraud in a Financial Statement Audit paragraphs .13-.52
Section 3: Responses to all the questions required for the case study. Be sure to support your response with cites of
applicable standards (which you would have listed above) as appropriate. Organize your responses in the same order the
questions are asked in the case study. Start each response by first restating the question.
Section 4: Reflect on all of the questions/responses in section three. Given your critical analysis of the case materials,
think about any other relevant questions about the case you would like to have answers to that weren’t asked as part of
the required case study questions. List 1-3 questions you would like to pose to the group leading the case study
presentation in class. Posing your questions live during our case discussions in class will help stimulate further
discussion of case issues and contribute to your participation grade in the class.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
CASE 1.13
ZZZZ Best Company, Inc.
On May 19, 1987, a short article in the Wall Street Journal reported that ZZZZ Best
Company, Inc., of Reseda, California, had signed a contract for a $13.8 million insurance restoration project. This project was just the most recent of a series of large
restoration jobs obtained by ZZZZ Best (pronounced “zee best”). Located in the San
Fernando Valley of southern California, ZZZZ Best had begun operations in the fall of
1982 as a small, door-to-door carpet cleaning business. Under the direction of Barry
Minkow, the extroverted 16-year-old who founded the company and initially operated it out of his parents’ garage, ZZZZ Best experienced explosive growth in both
revenues and profits during the first several years of its existence. In the three-year
period from 1984 to 1987, the company’s net income surged from less than $200,000
to more than $5 million on revenues of $50 million.
When ZZZZ Best went public in 1986, Minkow and several of his close associates
became multimillionaires overnight. By the late spring of 1987, the market value
of Minkow’s stock in the company exceeded $100 million, while the total market
value of ZZZZ Best surpassed $200 million. The youngest chief executive officer in
the nation enjoyed the “good life,” which included an elegant home in an exclusive
suburb of Los Angeles and a fire-engine red Ferrari. Minkow’s charm and entrepreneurial genius made him a sought-after commodity on the television talk show circuit
and caused the print and visual media to tout him as an example of what America’s
youth could attain if they would only apply themselves. During an appearance on
The Oprah Winfrey Show in April 1987, Minkow exhorted his peers with evangelistic
zeal to “Think big, be big” and encouraged them to adopt his personal motto, “The
sky is the limit.”
Less than two years after appearing on Oprah, Barry Minkow began serving
a 25-year prison sentence. Tried and convicted on 57 counts of securities fraud,
Minkow had been exposed as a fast-talking con artist who swindled his closest
friends and Wall Street out of millions of dollars. Federal prosecutors estimate that,
at a minimum, Minkow cost investors and creditors $100 million. The company that
Minkow founded was, in fact, an elaborate Ponzi scheme. The reported profits of the
firm were nonexistent and the large restoration contracts, imaginary. As one journalist reported, rather than building a corporation, Minkow created a hologram of a corporation. In July 1987, just three months after the company’s stock reached a market
value of $220 million, an auction of its assets netted only $62,000.
Unlike most financial frauds, the ZZZZ Best scam was perpetrated under the
watchful eye of the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). The SEC, a large
and reputable West Coast law firm that served as the company’s general counsel, a
prominent Wall Street brokerage firm, and an international public accounting firm
all failed to uncover Minkow’s daring scheme. Ultimately, the persistence of an indignant homemaker who had been bilked out of a few hundred dollars by ZZZZ Best
resulted in Minkow being exposed as a fraud.
How a teenage flimflam artist could make a mockery of the complex regulatory
structure that oversees the U.S. securities markets was the central question posed by
a congressional subcommittee that investigated the ZZZZ Best debacle. That subcommittee was headed by Representative John D. Dingell, chairman of the U.S. House
167
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
168
SECTION ONE
COMPREHENSIVE CASES
Committee on Energy and Commerce. Throughout the investigation, Representative
Dingell and his colleagues focused on the role the company’s independent auditors
played in the ZZZZ Best scandal.
The ZZZZ Best prospectus told the public that revenues and earnings from insurance
restoration contracts were skyrocketing but did not reveal that the contracts were
completely fictitious. Where were the independent auditors and the others that are
paid to alert the public to fraud and deceit?1
Like many other daring financial frauds, the ZZZZ Best scandal caused Congress to
reexamine the maze of rules that regulate financial reporting and serve as the foundation of the U.S. system of corporate oversight. However, Daniel Akst, a reporter for
the Wall Street Journal who documented the rise and fall of Barry Minkow, suggested
that another ZZZZ Best was inevitable. “Changing the accounting rules and securities laws will help, but every now and then a Barry Minkow will come along, and
ZZZZ Best will happen again. Such frauds are in the natural order of things, I suspect,
as old and enduring as human needs.”2
The Early History of ZZZZ Best Company
Barry Minkow was introduced to the carpet cleaning industry at the age of 12 by his
mother, who helped make ends meet by working as a telephone solicitor for a small
carpet cleaning firm. Although the great majority of companies in the carpet cleaning industry are legitimate, the nature of the business attracts a disproportionate
number of shady characters. There are essentially no barriers to entry: no licensing
requirements, no apprenticeships to be served, and only a minimal amount of startup
capital is needed. A 16-year-old youth with a driver’s license can easily become what
industry insiders refer to as a “rug sucker,” which is exactly what Minkow did when
he founded ZZZZ Best Company.
Minkow quickly learned that carpet cleaning was a difficult way to earn a livelihood. Customer complaints, ruthless competition, bad checks, and nagging
vendors demanding payment complicated the young entrepreneur’s life. Within
months of striking out on his own, Minkow faced the ultimate nemesis of the small
businessperson: a shortage of working capital. Because of his age and the fact that
ZZZZ Best was only marginally profitable, local banks refused to loan him money.
Ever resourceful, the brassy teenager came up with his own innovative ways to
finance his business: check kiting, credit card forgeries, and the staging of thefts to
fleece his insurance company.
Minkow’s age and personal charm allowed him to escape unscathed from his
early brushes with the law that resulted from his creative financing methods. The
ease with which the “system” could be beaten encouraged him to exploit it on a
broader scale.
Throughout his tenure with ZZZZ Best, Minkow recognized the benefits of having an extensive social network of friends and acquaintances. Many of these
relationships he developed and cultivated at a Los Angeles health club. After
1. This and all subsequent quotations, unless indicated otherwise, and each of the exhibits appearing
in this case were taken from the following source: U.S. Congress, House Subcommittee on Oversight
and Investigations of the Committee on Energy and Commerce, Failure of ZZZZ Best Co. (Washington,
D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1988).
2. D. Akst, Wonder Boy, Barry Minkow—The Kid Who Swindled Wall Street (New York: Scribner,
1990), 271.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
CASE 1.13
ZZZZ BEST COMPANY, INC.
becoming a friend of Tom Padgett, an insurance claims adjuster, Minkow devised
a scheme to exploit that friendship. Minkow promised to pay Padgett $100 per
week if he would simply confirm over the telephone to banks and any other
interested third parties that ZZZZ Best was the recipient of occasional insurance
restoration contracts. Ostensibly, Minkow had obtained these contracts to clean
and do minor remodeling work on properties damaged by fire, storms, or other
catastrophes. Minkow convinced the gullible Padgett that the sole purpose of the
confirmations was to allow ZZZZ Best to circumvent much of the bureaucratic
red tape in the insurance industry.
From this modest beginning, the ZZZZ Best fraud blossomed. Initially, Minkow
used the phony insurance restoration contracts to generate the paper profits and
revenues he needed to convince bankers to loan him money. Minkow’s phony
financial statements served their purpose, and he expanded his operations by
opening several carpet cleaning outlets across the San Fernando Valley. Minkow
soon realized that there was no need to tie his future to the cutthroat carpet cleaning industry when he could literally dictate the size and profitability of his insurance restoration “business.” Within a short period of time, insurance restoration,
rather than carpet cleaning, became the major source of revenue appearing on
ZZZZ Best’s income statements.
Minkow’s “the sky is the limit” philosophy drove him to be even more innovative.
The charming young entrepreneur began using his bogus financial statements to
entice wealthy individuals in his ever-expanding social network to invest in ZZZZ
Best. Eventually, Minkow recognized that the ultimate scam would be to take his
company public, a move that would allow him to tap the bank accounts of unsuspecting investors nationwide.
Going Public with ZZZZ Best
Minkow’s decision to take ZZZZ Best public meant that he could no longer control his firm’s financial disclosures. Registering with the SEC required auditors,
investment bankers, and outside attorneys to peruse ZZZZ Best’s periodic financial
statements.
ZZZZ Best was first subjected to a full-scope independent audit for the 12 months
ended April 30, 1986. George Greenspan, the sole practitioner who performed
that audit, confirmed the existence of ZZZZ Best’s major insurance restoration
contracts by contacting Tom Padgett. Padgett served as the principal officer of
Interstate Appraisal Services, which reportedly contracted the jobs out to ZZZZ
Best. By this time, Padgett was an active and willing participant in Minkow’s fraudulent schemes. Minkow established Interstate Appraisal Services and Assured
Property Management for the sole purpose of generating fake insurance restoration contracts for ZZZZ Best.
In testimony before the congressional subcommittee that investigated the ZZZZ
Best scandal, Greenspan insisted that he had properly audited Minkow’s company.
Greenspan testified that while planning the 1986 audit he had performed various
analytical procedures to identify unusual relationships in ZZZZ Best’s financial data.
These procedures allegedly included comparing ZZZZ Best’s key financial ratios
with industry norms. Regarding the insurance contracts, Greenspan testified that he
had obtained and reviewed copies of all key documents pertaining to those jobs.
However, Greenspan admitted that he had not inspected any of the insurance restoration sites.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
169
170
SECTION ONE
COMPREHENSIVE CASES
Congressman Lent: Mr. Greenspan, I am interested in the SEC Form S-1 that ZZZZ
Best Company filed with the SEC. . . . You say in that report
that you made your examination in accordance with generally
accepted auditing standards and accordingly included such tests
of the accounting records and other auditing procedures as we
consider necessary in the circumstances. . . . You don’t say in that
statement that you made any personal on-site inspections.
Mr. Greenspan: It’s not required. Sometimes you do; sometimes you don’t. I was
satisfied that these jobs existed and I was satisfied from at least
six different sources, including payment for the job. What could
you want better than that?
Congressman Lent: Your position is that you are an honest and reputable accountant.
Mr. Greenspan: Yes, sir.
Congressman Lent: You were as much a victim as some of the investors in this
company?
Mr. Greenspan: I was a victim all right. . . . I am as much aghast as anyone.
And every night I sit down and say, why didn’t I detect this
damned fraud.
Retention of Ernst & Whinney by ZZZZ Best
Shortly after Greenspan completed his audit of ZZZZ Best’s financial statements for
fiscal 1986, which ended April 30, 1986, Minkow dismissed him and retained Ernst &
Whinney to perform the following year’s audit. Apparently, ZZZZ Best’s investment
banker insisted that Minkow obtain a major accounting firm to enhance the credibility of the company’s financial statements. At approximately the same time, and for
the same reason, Minkow retained a high-profile Los Angeles law firm to represent
ZZZZ Best as its legal counsel.
The congressional subcommittee asked Greenspan what information he provided
to Ernst & Whinney regarding his former client. In particular, the subcommittee
wanted to know whether Greenspan discussed the insurance restoration contracts
with the new auditors.
Congressman Wyden: Mr. Greenspan, in September 1986, Ernst & Whinney came
on as the new independent accountant for ZZZZ Best. What
did you communicate to Ernst & Whinney with respect to the
restoration contracts?
Mr. Greenspan: Nothing. I did—there was nothing because they never got in
touch with me. It’s protocol for the new accountant to get in
touch with the old accountant. They never got in touch with
me, and it’s still a mystery to me.
Representatives of Ernst & Whinney later testified that they did, in fact, communicate with Greenspan prior to accepting ZZZZ Best as an audit client. However,
Ernst & Whinney did not comment on the nature or content of that communication.
(Greenspan was not recalled to rebut Ernst & Whinney’s testimony on this issue.)3
Exhibit 1 contains the engagement letter signed by Ernst & Whinney and Barry
Minkow in September 1986. The engagement letter outlined four services that the
3. After a lengthy investigation, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants ruled in 1998
that there was no “prima facie evidence” that Greenspan had violated the organization’s Code of
Professional Conduct during the time that ZZZZ Best was his client. A similar conclusion was reached by
two state boards of accountancy with which Greenspan was registered to practice public accounting.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
CASE 1.13
ZZZZ BEST COMPANY, INC.
171
EXHIBIT 1
September 12, 1986
ERNST &
WHINNEY’S ZZZZ
BEST ENGAGEMENT
LETTER
Mr. Barry Minkow
Chairman of the Board
ZZZZ Best Co., Inc.
7040 Darby Avenue
Reseda, California
Dear Mr. Minkow:
This letter is to confirm our understanding regarding our engagement as independent
accountants of ZZZZ BEST CO., INC. (the Company) and the nature and limitations of the
services we will provide.
We will perform the following services:
1. We will review the balance sheet of the Company as of July 31, 1986, and the related
statements of income, retained earnings, and changes in financial position for the three
months then ended, in accordance with standards established by the American Institute of
Certified Public Accountants. We will not perform an audit of such financial statements, the
objective of which is the expressing of an opinion regarding the financial statements taken as
a whole, and, accordingly, we will not express an opinion on them. Our report on the financial
statements is presently expected to read as follows:
“We have made a review of the condensed consolidated balance sheet of ZZZZ BEST
CO., INC. and subsidiaries as of July 31, 1986, and the related condensed consolidated
statements of income and changes in financial position for the three-month period ended
July 31, 1986, in accordance with standards established by the American Institute of
Certified Public Accountants. A review of the condensed consolidated financial statements
for the comparative period of the prior year was not made.
A review of financial information consists principally of obtaining an understanding of
the system for the preparation of interim financial information, applying analytical review
procedures to financial data, and making inquiries of persons responsible for financial and
accounting matters. It is substantially less in scope than an examination in accordance
with generally accepted auditing standards, which will be performed for the full year
with the objective of expressing an opinion regarding the financial statements taken as a
whole. Accordingly, we do not express such an opinion. Based on our review, we are not
aware of any material modifications that should be made to the condensed consolidated
interim financial statements referred to above for them to be in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles.”
Our engagement cannot be relied upon to disclose errors, irregularities, or illegal acts,
including fraud or defalcations, that may exist. However, we will inform you of any such
matters that come to our attention.
2. We will assist in the preparation of a Registration Statement (Form S-1) under the
Securities Act of 1933 including advice and counsel in conforming the financial statements
and related information to Regulation S-X.
3. We will assist in resolving the accounting and financial reporting questions which will arise
as a part of the preparation of the Registration Statement referred to above.
4. We will prepare a letter for the underwriters, if required (i.e., a Comfort Letter), bearing in
mind the limited nature of the work we have done with respect to the financial data.
(continued)
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
172
SECTION ONE
EXHIBIT 1—
continued
ERNST &
WHINNEY’S ZZZZ
BEST ENGAGEMENT
LETTER
COMPREHENSIVE CASES
5. We will examine the consolidated financial statements of the Company as of April 30,
1987, and for the year then ended and issue our report in accordance with generally accepted
auditing standards approved by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.
These standards contemplate, among other things, that (1) we will study and evaluate the
Company’s internal control system as a basis for reliance on the accounting records and for
determining the extent of our audit tests; and (2) that we will be able to obtain sufficient
evidential matter to afford a reasonable basis for our opinion on the financial statements.
However, it should be understood that our reports will necessarily be governed by the findings
developed in the course of our examination and that we could be required, depending upon
the circumstances, to modify our reporting from the typical unqualified opinion. We will advise
you, as our examination progresses, if any developments indicate that we will be unable to
express an unqualified opinion. Because our examination will be performed generally on a test
basis, it will not necessarily disclose irregularities, if any, that may exist. However, we will
promptly report to you any irregularities which our examination does disclose.
Our fees will be derived from our customary rates for the various personnel involved plus outof-pocket expenses. Certain factors can have an effect on the time incurred in the conduct
of our work. Among these are the general condition of the accounting records, the amount of
assistance received from your personnel in the accumulation of data, the size and transaction
volume of business, any significant financial reporting issues that arise in connection with
the SEC’s review of the S-1, as well as unforeseen circumstances. Based upon our current
understanding of the situation, the amount of our proposed billing for the various services
which we will be providing are estimated to be:
Review of the July 31, 1986 financial statements
Assistance in the preparation of the Registration Statement
Comfort Letter
Audit of financial statements as of April 30, 1987
$ 5,000-$7,500
8,000-30,000
4,000-6,000
24,000-29,000
We will invoice you each month for the time charges and expenses incurred in the previous
month and such invoices are due and payable upon presentation.
Larry D. Gray, Partner, is the Client Service Executive assigned to the engagement. Peter
Griffith, Audit Manager, and Michael McCormick, Tax Manager, have also been assigned.
We greatly appreciate your engagement of our firm; if you have any questions, we shall be
pleased to discuss them with you. Please indicate your acceptance of the above arrangements
by signing and returning the enclosed copy. This letter constitutes the full understanding of
the terms of our engagement.
Very truly yours,
Ernst & Whinney
By Larry D. Gray, Partner
ACCEPTED:
ZZZZ BEST CO., INC.
Barry J. Minkow, Chairman of the Board (signed)
9/16/86
audit firm intended to provide ZZZZ Best: a review of the company’s financial statements for the three-month period ending July 31, 1986; assistance in the preparation
of a registration statement to be filed with the SEC; a comfort letter to be submitted to ZZZZ Best’s underwriters; and a full-scope audit for the fiscal year ending
April 30, 1987. Ernst & Whinney completed the review, provided the comfort letter
to ZZZZ Best’s underwriters, and apparently assisted the company in preparing the
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
CASE 1.13
ZZZZ BEST COMPANY, INC.
registration statement for the SEC; however, Ernst & Whinney never completed the
1987 audit. The audit firm resigned on June 2, 1987, amid growing concerns that
ZZZZ Best’s financial statements were grossly misstated.
The congressional subcommittee investigating the ZZZZ Best fraud questioned
Ernst & Whinney representatives at length regarding the bogus insurance restoration
contracts—contracts that accounted for 90 percent of ZZZZ Best’s reported profits.
Congressional testimony disclosed that Ernst & Whinney repeatedly insisted on visiting several of the largest of these contract sites and that Minkow and his associates
attempted to discourage such visits. Eventually, Minkow realized that the auditors
would not relent and agreed to allow them to visit certain of the restoration sites,
knowing full well that none of the sites actually existed.
To convince Ernst & Whinney that the insurance restoration contracts were authentic,
Minkow plotted and carried out a series of sting operations that collectively cost millions
of dollars. In the late fall of 1986, Larry Gray, the engagement audit partner for ZZZZ Best,
told client personnel that he wanted to inspect a restoration site in Sacramento on which
ZZZZ Best had reported obtaining a multimillion-dollar contract. Minkow sent two of his
subordinates to Sacramento to find a large building under construction or renovation
that would provide a plausible site for a restoration contract. Gray had visited Sacramento
a few weeks earlier to search for the site that Minkow had refused to divulge. As chance
would have it, the building chosen by the ZZZZ Best conspirators was the same one Gray
had identified as the most likely site of the insurance restoration job.
Minkow’s two confederates posed as leasing agents of a property management
firm and convinced the supervisor of the construction site to provide the keys to
the building one weekend on the pretext that a large, prospective tenant wished to
tour the facility. Prior to the arrival of Larry Gray and an attorney representing ZZZZ
Best’s law firm, Minkow’s subordinates visited the site and placed placards on the
walls at conspicuous locations indicating that ZZZZ Best was the contractor for the
building renovation. No details were overlooked by the two co-conspirators. They
even paid the building’s security officer to greet the visitors and demonstrate that he
was aware in advance of their tour of the site and its purpose. Although the building had not been damaged and instead was simply in the process of being completed, the sting operation went off as planned. Exhibit 2 presents the memorandum
Gray wrote describing his tour of the building—a memorandum included in Ernst &
Whinney’s ZZZZ Best workpapers.
Congressional investigators quizzed Gray regarding the measures he took to confirm that ZZZZ Best actually had a restoration contract on the Sacramento building.
They were particularly concerned that he never discovered the building had not suffered several million dollars in damages a few months earlier, as claimed by ZZZZ
Best personnel.
Congressman Lent: . . . Did you check the building permit or construction permit?
Mr. Gray: No, sir. That wouldn’t be necessary to accomplish what I was
setting out to accomplish.
Congressman Lent: And you did not check with the building’s owners to see if an
insurance claim had been filed?
Mr. Gray: Same answer. It wasn’t necessary. I had seen the paperwork
internally of our client, the support for a great amount of detail.
So, I had no need to ask—to pursue that.
Congressman Lent: You understand that what you saw was not anything that was real
in any sense of the word? . . . You are saying you were duped, are
you not?
Mr. Gray: Absolutely.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
173
174
SECTION ONE
EXHIBIT 2
ERNST & WHINNEY
INTERNAL MEMO
REGARDING VISIT
TO ZZZZ BEST
R ESTORATION
PROJECT
COMPREHENSIVE CASES
TO: ZZZZ Best Co., Inc. File
FROM: Larry D. Gray
RE: Visit to Sacramento Job
At our request, the Company arranged for a tour of the job site in Sacramento on November
23rd [1986]. The site (not previously identified for us because of the confidentiality
agreement with their customer) had been informally visited by me on October 27. I knew
approximately where the job was, and was able to identify it through the construction
activity going on.
On November 23, Mark Morse accompanied Mark Moskowitz of Hughes Hubbard & Reed and
myself to Sacramento. We visited first the offices of the Building Manager, Mark Roddy of
Assured Property Management, Inc. Roddy was hired by the insurance company (at Tom
Padgett’s suggestion according to Morse) to oversee the renovation activities and the leasing
of the space. Roddy accompanied us to the building site.
We were informed that the damage occurred from the water storage on the roof of the
building. The storage was for the sprinkler systems, but the water was somehow released in
total, causing construction damage to floors 17 and 18, primarily in bathrooms which were
directly under the water holding tower, then the water spread out and flooded floors 16 down
through about 5 or 6, where it started to spread out even further and be held in pools.
We toured floor 17 briefly (it is currently occupied by a law firm) then visited floor 12 (which
had a considerable amount of unoccupied space) and floor 7. Morse pointed out to us the
carpet, painting and clean-up work which had been ZZZZ Best’s responsibility. We noted some
work not done in some other areas (and in unoccupied tenant space). But per Mark, this was
not ZZZZ Best’s responsibility, rather was work being undertaken by tenants for their own
purposes.
Per Morse (and Roddy) ZZZZ Best’s work is substantially complete and has passed final
inspection. Final sign-off is expected shortly, with final payment due to ZZZZ Best in early
December.
Morse was well versed in the building history and in the work scope for ZZZZ Best. The tour
was beneficial in gaining insight as to the scope of the damage that had occurred and the
type of work that the Company can do.
Before allowing Ernst & Whinney auditors to visit a bogus restoration project,
Minkow insisted that the firm sign a confidentiality agreement. Exhibit 3 presents
a copy of that agreement. Members of the congressional subcommittee were troubled by the following stipulation of the confidentiality agreement: “We will not make
any follow-up telephone calls to any contractors, insurance companies, the building owner, or other individuals involved in the restoration contract.” This restriction
effectively precluded the auditors from corroborating the insurance restoration contracts with independent third parties.
Resignation of Ernst & Whinney
Ernst & Whinney resigned as ZZZZ Best’s auditor on June 2, 1987, following a series
of disturbing events that caused the firm to question Barry Minkow’s integrity. First,
Ernst & Whinney was alarmed by a Los Angeles Times article in mid-May 1987 that
revealed Minkow had been involved in a string of credit card forgeries as a teenager.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Copyright 2022 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. WCN 02-200-203
CASE 1.13
ZZZZ BEST COMPANY, INC.
Mr. Barry Minkow, President
ZZZZ Best Co., Inc.
7040 Darby Avenue
Reseda, California
Dear Barry,
In connection with the proposed public offering (the Offering) of units consisting of common
stock and warrants of ZZZZ Best Co., Inc. (the Company), we have requested a tour of the site
of the Company’s insurance restoration project in Sacramento, California, Contract No. 18886.
Subject to the representations and warrant
Think about your personal definition of leadership. How does this definition from ChatGPT compare to your own experience with leadership, good or bad? How have your views on leadership shifted over time or with experience?Critique the ChatGPT output, and support your response with information from your reading and/or electronic sources – preferably from peer-reviewed sources.Here’s what ChatGPT says about leadership:”Leadership is the process of inspiring, guiding, and influencing individuals or groups towards a common goal or vision, often through effective communication, decision-making, and the demonstration of integrity and empathy. It involves setting a positive example, fostering collaboration, and adapting to various circumstances while motivating and empowering others to achieve their best potential, ultimately driving progress, innovation, and positive change within an organization, community, or any context where it is exercised.”
to get to the homework you need login to my school account how you do this is by searching up umaine portal click on the first link and login to my school portal with the login information belowusername: tyshawn.sewartcrystal password: Number10!next click on the orange B it will take you to my bright space account where you then click on accounting 201 next click on content at the top of the screen in the blue strip and on the lefthand side click on chapter 5 and scroll down until you see chapter 5 assignment. I am willing to up the initial price for you completing this assignment
You will be creating an export business plan. Work must be original to this class, otherwise a grade of zero will be given. If no paper is submitted, a course grade of zero points will be given. Papers that do not contain detailed research will be severely penalized. No Wikipedia references are allowed.
You do not need to submit work in progress. However you are welcome to approach your instructor with questions.
Business Plan Requirements
Business Plan Page recommendations Section header Summary
Part I: Purpose
1
Purpose
Why has the plan been written?
Part II: Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents
Table of contents
Part III: Executive Summary
1
Executive Summary
This is short and concise. It covers the principal points of the report, and is prepared after the plan has been written.
Part IV: Research
≥7 pages
Introduction
Introduction – what product and foreign country did you select and why
Situational Analysis
Describe the product to be exported
Present a brief history of the country as it relates to its origins and trade history
Cultural Overview
The norms, practices, social structure, etc. that may aid (or hinder) the reception of your product
Consumer attitudes toward product
Educational levels; ability to comprehend instructions, ability to use product
Languages; labels, instructions
Political Environment
An overview of the governance structure of the country along with any legal-political forces
Certain required or prohibited features
Label and packing requirements
Export Marketing Plan
Long and short-term goals, characteristics of an ideal target market for your product given the country selected, market screening
Economic Decelopment
How developed the country is, and how this will influence the success of your product
Purchasing power
Wages
Infrastructure
Summary Summary
Part V: References 1 to 2 References References
Note: For further details regarding the components of your Export Business Plan, please see pages 486-487 of your textbook.
Formatting Requirements
Your paper must be in APA format to include:
The use of headings and subheadings
Times New Roman 12-point font
1 inch margins
Paragraphs with a minimum of at least 5 sentences
The first line of each paragraph should be indented 1/2 inch
Anything less than the content length stated above is not sufficient coverage of content and will result in a substantial reduction in grade.
At least one to two reference pages.
References must be no older than 5 years.
Your paper should be well-organized with excellent flow and excellently formatted. Check that your headings and sub-headings are correct.
Spell-check and proofread before submission.
Due Date
Due by 11:59 p.m., Sunday, CT, Unit 7.
Tasks
Select a product of which you will export to a foreign country.
After your product is chosen, decide on a foreign country to which you will export.
Develop an Export Business Plan.
FOR THIS WEEK’S INSTRUCTIONS: Week 4 assignment will be based on content taken from the course materials. These may be questions, or a topic taken from this week’s reading. All arguments must be supported by course materials, research or experience-based examples.
Assignment:
Create a PowerPoint Presentation with at least five slides (include introduction and summary slides) describing four of the differentiators and four RAMP Components (use bulleted list in the slides to capture key points but use the note pages in PowerPoint to explain your points).
Submission Instructions:
Your completed presentation must be submitted as an MS PowerPoint (work with your professor for an alternative option if MS PowerPoint is a challenge). Students are encouraged to read/understand the Basics.
Due on Oct 29, 2023 11:55 PM
Available on Oct 23, 2023 12:05 AM. Submission restricted before availability starts.
Create a PowerPoint Presentation with at least five slides (include introduction and summary slides) describing four of the differentiators and four RAMP Components (use bulleted list in the slides to capture key points)
30 points
The presentation engages the reader with an original approach to the subject. It may encompass conflicting ideas and inspires the reader to contemplate the relationship of complex ideas
25.5 points
The presentation clearly goes beyond the minimum requirements of the assignment. It attempts to engage the reader through originality and presentation of complex ideas.
22.5 points
The presentation meets the minimum requirements of the assignment. It offers insight into the subject through basic logic and the presentation of ideas based on some evidence.
19.5 points
The presentation fails to meet the minimum requirements of the assignment. It offers little insight into the subject and has serious flaws in logic and omissions in evidence.
0 points
Student failed to address this item.
Score of Create a PowerPoint Presentation with at least five slides (include introduction and summary slides) describing four of the differentiators and four RAMP Components (use bulleted list in the slides to capture key points),
/ 30
Support (5 or more slides containing note pages to explain points)
30 points
The presentation has a clearly articulated original thesis and subordinate ideas supported by reliable and relevant evidence based on original research.
25.5 points
The presentation has a clearly articulated thesis supported by appropriate evidence and sound logic. Minor gaps in logic and argument may appear.
22.5 points
The presentation has a clear thesis and related subordinate ideas supported by clear thinking and appropriate evidence. Logical arguments may be one sided or incomplete.
19.5 points
The presentation may need a more clearly articulated thesis and/or appropriate related subordinate ideas. Fuzzy logic may be evident and adequate supporting evidence is lacking.
0 points
Student failed to address this item.
Score of Support (5 or more slides containing note pages to explain points),
/ 30
Organization
20 points
The presentation flows smoothly and logically from a well-defined thesis. It contains an appropriate introduction, conclusion, and smooth transitions.
17 points
The presentation is organized logically and flows well. An introduction and conclusion are evident, but transitions may be smoother.
15 points
The presentation demonstrates rudimentary organization and logical structure, but ideas may be more fully developed and supported by more appropriate evidence.
13 points
The presentation is noticeably lacking in organization. There is no clear introduction nor conclusion and ideas are neither carefully nor fully developed. Supporting evidence is clearly lacking.
0 points
Student failed to address this item.
Score of Organization,
/ 20
Mechanics: Grammar, Punctuation, & Spelling
10 points
The presentation is free of grammatical, proofreading, and stylistic errors. All quoted material is properly documented and cited.
8.5 points
The presentation may exhibit a few minor errors in grammar or style but do impair the flow of the reading. Most quoted material is properly documented and cited.
7.5 points
The presentation could benefit from additional proofreading, as some errors impede the flow of the reading. Sources are documented and cited but need to show greater consistency.
6.5 points
The presentation exhibits substantial errors in grammar and style so that the basic ideas are lost. Sources are overly quoted and not adequately documented nor cited.
0 points
Student failed to address this item.
Score of Mechanics: Grammar, Punctuation, & Spelling,
/ 10
Presentation Style
10 points
The presentation engages the reader through an original prose style appropriate to the subject. Language is precise. Sentences are varied but not noticeably so. Active voice is apparent.
8.5 points
The presentation keeps the reader’s attention through a carefully crafted prose style. Language chosen is appropriate to the subject but may call attention to itself in minor ways.
7.5 points
The presentation is clear but could be expressed in a style more appropriate to the subject. It is jargon-free but may require a more complete explanation of some terms used.
6.5 points
The presentation lacks clarity and is sometimes confusing. The language chosen is not appropriate to the subject nor the assignment.
0 points
Student failed to address this item.
Score of Presentation Style,
/ 10
TotalScore of ITMG421 WK4 – Assignment 3 Rubric (JAN 2023),
This research proposal requires you to 1) identify your topic, 2) offer a preliminary thesis statement, and 3) create an annotated bibliography of primary and secondary sources for your paper.
The purpose of this proposal is to:
Demonstrate that you have located appropriate sources for your paper
Demonstrate that you have read those sources and thought aboutthem in the context of your essay topic
Help you make progress on your research essay
Give you an opportunity to practice skills like locating primary andsecondary sources
Provide you with feedback before you submit your research essayYour research essay that you submit later in the term should be in line with the project outlined in your research proposal, but it is normal and acceptable for a project shift somewhat after you get deeper into the research.CONTENT OF RESEARCH PROPOSALLocate, read, and assess your primary and secondary sources. Your proposal should be organized along the following subheadings, answering the associated questions/challenges:A. TOPIC (1-2 paragraphs)
What is your topic? Establish a brief narrative.
What do you want readers of your essay to know and understand aboutthe topic?
If you have chosen Essay Topic 1 or Essay Topic 2, define the geographicand temporal (time) period of your essay as well. B. PRELIMINARY THESIS STATEMENT (1-3 sentences)
What are you going to argue about your topic? 1
C. ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY
An annotated bibliography is a list of the sources (e.g. books, journal articles, etc.) that you use to research a topic in preparation for writing a research essay. In an annotated bibliography, each source in the list is followed by a brief descriptive and evaluative paragraph of 4-5 sentences (approx. 150 words) which can also include its relevance to your paper topic. An annotated bibliography should inform the reader by providing a clear indication of each source’s relevancy, accuracy and quality.
Divide your annotated bibliography into two sections – Primary Sources and Secondary Sources. Within each section, the entries should be arranged alphabetically by authors’ last names.
1. Primary Sources
Create a bibliography entry for each of your primary sources (minimum one primary source). You can find examples of how to cite primary sources in CMOS (note/bibliography format here.
Below each primary source bibliography entry, write one paragraph that addresses the following questions:
Who is the source written/created by? When? Where?
What is the source about?
Why was the source created? Who is the intended audience?
What is the historical context for the source?
What information, argument, or perspective(s) in the source will bekey to your essay? You may use specific examples or short quotations as needed. Cite your sources with footnotes.Include a digital copy of your primary source(s) with your Research Essay Proposal as a link, photo, pdf, etc.2. Secondary Sources
Create a bibliography entry for each secondary source (minimum 3 scholarly secondary sources).Below each secondary source, write one paragraph that addresses the following questions:
What is the topic?
Who is the author? What is their positionality?
What is the author’s main argument?
What are the author’s key primary sources? (eg. newspaperarticles, diaries, etc. – you do not need to list individual citations)
What information, argument, or perspective(s) in the source will be key to your essay? You may use specific examples or short quotations as needed. Cite your sources with footnotes.
Hello. I was hoping that you would be able to assist me with this weeks assignment. I have attached the assignment and requirements, chapters and the Long Lake Community Center Background, Last Years Strategic Communication Plan, and the Job Placement Services Research Data presentation. Thank you
Unformatted Attachment Preview
BSCOM/480: Applied Communication Capstone
Week 1 – Apply: Summative Assessment: Communication Plan Analysis
Textbook
Shires, J. (2021). Applied communication capstone. MyEducator.
Course Tools
MyEducator™
You are the newly hired communications manager at the Long Lake Community Center (LLCC).
The center offers multiple services to the community, including a food bank, mental
health services, social services, and job placement services. Recent data shows that Job
Placement Services are grossly underused and under supported, with a decrease in the number
of clients it serves and the number of volunteers who support it. The problem, the board
concluded, was the current strategic communication plan (SCP), written by the previous
communications manager. You are expected to analyze the research and identify what went
wrong.
The material you prepare this week will support your final SCP due in Week 5. You will have an
opportunity to adjust your plan with feedback from your instructor each week.
Analyze the following resources:
• Long Lake Community Center Background to learn more about the community center’s
services and role in the community.
• Job Placement Services Research Data presentation to learn about the primary and
secondary audiences your communication plan will need to reach.
• Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan to review the previous communications
manager’s plan which may help inform your work and identify the weaknesses of the
plan.
Note: Long Lake Community Center case study used with permission from MyEducator.
Write a 250- to 350-word email to the director of the community center as you begin to draft
your SCP.
Complete the following in your email:
• Summarize relevant information about the organization and the situation to be
addressed by the new SCP.
• Identify the priority audience segments you will target.
•
•
•
Identify the 3 largest weaknesses you found in your analysis of last year’s SCP. Relate
where the recommendations appear to contradict the research data.
Develop 3 recommendations to shift direction and achieve greater job placement
services utilization.
Support your recommendations with data and provide a rationale for each. Be sure to
clearly indicate how your recommendations support the community center’s goals.
Format your citations and references according to APA guidelines.
BSCOM/480 v2
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
Introduction
The Long Lake Community Center (LLCC) was founded in 1977 with the mission to serve the members of
Long Lake and surrounding neighborhoods. The LLCC initially was a meeting place for civic groups and
an educational resource for parents with school-aged children. In 1981, LLCC joined in with local faith
communities and began distributing food to area families in need. LLCC started by serving 20 families a
week and by 1990 had grown to serving 200 families a week. In 1995, LLCC expanded by offering mental
health services. Licensed clinical social workers who live locally provided services pro bono. The mental
health services served around five clients per week. By 2010, the service had expanded to 10
psychologists and psychiatrists, providing a total of 40 hours per week of counseling services for reduced
fees, 15 licensed clinical social workers providing 90 hours per week of counseling services, and 135
clients being served per week.
In 1995, LLCC started hosting social service agencies to help individuals sign up for unemployment,
Medicare and Medicaid, food stamps, and Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) programs. By 2010, LLCC
was seeing an average of 200 individuals per week visiting the center to utilize the service. Funding was
provided by individual donors, corporate donors, public–private partnerships, and grants.
In 2019, the LLCC Board of Directors, in the face of rising unemployment, voted to expand to include Job
Placement Services. The new service is to provide résumé help, hold mock interviews, offer advice about
how to conduct a job search, offer skills refresher courses, and provide a place for local businesses to
interview potential candidates. Job Placement Services served 1,000 individuals during its first year and
the board anticipates that it will see an increase of at least 15% for 2020.
Analysis and Research
Situation Analysis
Unemployment rates are high in the communities served by LLCC.
Unemployment Rates in the Communities Served by LLCC
Race/Eth
nicity
Age 18–
19
Age 20–
24
Age 25–
34
Age 35–
44
Age 45–
54
Age 55–
64
Age 65+
White
Male
Black or
African
American
Male
17.10%
11.90%
8.80%
5.70%
5.40%
6.10%
6.30%
27.00%
25.50%
14.30%
12.10%
8.80%
11%
11%
Hispanic
or Latino
Male
24.40%
13.30%
11.30%
7.40%
7%
11.00%
9.70%
Asian or
Asian
American
Male
26.30%
19.30%
9.50%
4.40%
9.10%
11.50%
13.40%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 2 of 20
White
Female
Black or
African
American
Female
14.60%
13.30%
9.10%
6.70%
7.20%
7.50%
9.40%
19.60%
23.40%
14.70%
8.50%
10.50%
10.80%
10.70%
Hispanic
or Latina
Female
16.40%
15.30%
10.10%
7.40%
7.90%
8.30%
9.80%
Asian or
Asian
American
Female
28.90%
19.60%
11.20%
9.00%
10.20%
11.80%
13.90%
Black or African American males and females 18–24, Hispanic/Latinx males and females 18–24, and
Asian or Asian American males and females 18–24 are populations with the most people who are
unemployed. Black or African American males and females 25–44 are also populations with people who
are unemployed.
The population in the LLCC communities is nearly 100,000 people divided into the following demographic
categories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
White: 49.44%
Black or African American: 30.12%
Hispanic or Latinx: 10.94%
Asian ancestry or Asian American: 6.44%
Two or more races/ethnicities: 2.73%
Native American: 0.30%
Native Hawaiian or Pacific Islander: 0.03%
Females make up 51.4 percent of the population while males make up the remaining 48.6 percent. The
age distribution shows that 35% of the population is between 20 and 39 years old.
Age Distribution of Communities Served by LLCC
Percentage of
Population
Age Range
0–9
11%
10–19
11%
20-29
18%
30–39
17%
40–49
12%
50–59
60–69
12%
70–79
6%
80+
3%
10%
Educational attainment for the region shows that 38.4% have a high school education or less while 28.4
percent have an associate or bachelor’s degree. Educational attainment is a long-term problem. Once we
get the job placement service established, we may want to look into starting a GED assistance program
and offering community college courses on-site.
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 3 of 20
Education Level of Communities Served by LLCC
Education Level
Percentage of Population
Less Than 9th Grade
7.82%
9th to 12th Grade
7.64%
High School Graduate
22.89%
Some College
17.58%
Associate Degree
5.67%
Bachelor’s Degree
22.74%
15.65%
Graduate Degree
People who identify as Hispanic/Latinx and Black or African Americans are the groups most likely to have
less than a high school education. White males and females are the groups that have the highest level of
education attainment.
Individuals With Less Than a High School Education
Race/Ethnicity
Percentage of
Males
Percentage of
Female
White
4.9%
5.8%
Black or African
American
18.1%
15.40%
Hispanic or
Latino
10.8%
14.1%
37.4%
35.3%
38.4%
35.4%
Asian or Asian
American
Other/NonHispanic
White males and females and Asian or Asian American males and females have similar numbers in
attainment of a bachelor’s degree while fewer Black or African American males and females and
Hispanic/Latinx males and females have a bachelor’s degree.
Individuals With a Bachelor’s Degree
Race/Ethnicity
Percentage of
Males
Percentage of
Female
White
59.8%
60.6%
Black or African
American
16.8%
21.4%
Hispanic or Latinx
60%
58.2%
Asian or Asian
American
12.8%
16.1%
Other/NonHispanic
13.8%
18.3%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 4 of 20
Educational attainment directly ties into median income and the federal poverty threshold. People who
have attained a high school degree or less account for 49.2% of those with incomes below the federal
poverty threshold. White people and Asian Americans or people of Asian ancestry, who have the highest
levels of educational attainment, have the highest median salaries. People who identify as Hispanic or
Latinx and Black or African Americans are more likely to have incomes below the federal poverty
threshold while people who are White are least likely.
Income of Individuals
Race/Ethnicity
Income
Non-Hispanic
White
$75.4K
All White
$66.6K
Asian or Asian
American
$60.7K
All
$50.4K
Mixed
$50.3K
Hispanic or Latinx
$43.5K
Other
$41.9K
Hawaiian Native
$41.3K
Native American
$37.4K
Black or African
American
$30.2k
Less Than High
School
28.84%
High School
20.35%
Some College
15.99%
Bachelor’s or
Greater
6.50%
Individuals With Incomes Below the Federal Poverty Threshold by
Educational Attainment
Education Level
Percentage of
Population
Less Than High
School
28.84%
High School
20.35%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 5 of 20
Some College
15.99%
Bachelor’s or
Greater
6.50%
Individuals With Incomes Below the Federal Poverty Threshold by Ethnicity
Race/Ethnicity
Percentage of
Population
Black or African
American
30.69%
Hispanic or Latinx
19.69%
White
9.29%
Other
20.61%
Asian or Asian
American
Multiple
Races/Ethnicities
18.91%
18.02%
Native American
19.01%
Hawaiian Native
23.81%
Not surprisingly, employment status correlates strongly with incomes below the federal poverty threshold.
Females who are unemployed are the group most likely to have incomes below the federal poverty
threshold while males who are unemployed are close. Those who are employed are very unlikely to find
themselves with incomes below the federal poverty threshold.
Employment Status
Gender
Percentage of
Population
Female
Unemployed
43.31%
Male Unemployed
35.40%
Female Employed
9.38%
Male Employed
6.76%
The decline in employment levels has hit regional industries. Leisure and entertainment services have the
highest rates of unemployment, which affects around 8% of the LLCC region’s economy. Transportation
and utilities also have high rates of unemployment, but they affect a small part of the region. Construction
has a 7.1% unemployment rate but accounts for roughly 3% of the economy. Wholesale sales, which
accounts for 8% of the region, also is seeing rising unemployment.
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 6 of 20
Industries and Percentage of Unemployment in Regional Economy
Table shows unemployment data from pie chart.
Industry
Percentage of
Unemployment
Real Estate
14%
Manufacturing
12%
Finance and
Insurance
10%
Professional
Services
10%
Government
8%
Wholesale
8%
Health Care
7%
Retail
5%
T&L
4%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 7 of 20
Construction
3%
Administration
4%
Information
4%
Accommodation,
Leisure, and
Hospitality
3%
Management
2%
Other Services
2%
Education
2%
Utilities
1%
Entertainment
1%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 8 of 20
Problems
There are some problems that we can point out from this data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unemployment rates across each demographic are high.
Unemployment is higher for younger population and for Black or African American and
Hispanic/Latinx populations.
Prior to rising unemployment, incomes below the federal poverty threshold was an issue.
Increased unemployment will lead to more individuals with incomes below the federal poverty
threshold.
Median income for the Black or African American and Hispanic/Latinx populations are below the
overall median.
Educational attainment is lower for the Black and African American and Hispanic/Latinx
populations.
Those with less education have a higher likelihood of being unemployed and having incomes
below the federal poverty threshold.
The main problem is unemployment, which leads to incomes below the federal poverty threshold.
Increasing employment should help to raise the median income and lift families out of the federal poverty
threshold.
PESTLE Analysis
As part of the situational analysis, LLCC conducted a PESTLE study to look at the overall environment of
our region.
Political Factors
•
•
•
Economy is in recession so funding from the state and federal governments may be limited
Effects of increased unemployment is nationwide, so pressure will be on Congress to do
something
Officials up for re-election will want to be seen as proposing legislation to help with
unemployment benefits/job training
Economic Factors
•
•
•
•
See above charts for unemployment and federal poverty threshold rates
Reduced business revenue may result in reduced monetary and in-kind donations
Increased layoffs due to reduced revenue give less opportunity for job shadowing, internships,
and job placement
More people will need services
Social Factors
•
•
•
•
•
More strain on household budgets will lead to more household stress
Increased needs for mental health and social services programs
Increased demand on food banks
Lower social-economic groups will be unable to move to where open jobs are located
Possible increase in social unrest
Technological Factors
•
More human resource and job application functions moved online
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 9 of 20
•
Increased need for access to computers and internet
Legal Factors
•
•
•
Possible increase in theft of food
Possible increase in grey market cash-paying jobs
Increased scrutiny of immigration status
Environmental Factors
•
None
Conclusions from PESTLE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
People in LLCC region will need a wider range of services.
More people may need to update their technological skills to search and apply for jobs.
More people will need access to technological infrastructure.
Possible loss of donations to LLCC with the declining economy.
Increased possibility of social disruptions.
Priority Audience
Unemployment rates are the highest among young Black or African Americans, Asian Americans or
people of Asian ancestry, and people who identify as Hispanic/Latinx. However, are these the groups that
need services the most? Let us set up some criteria for whom we should target.
•
•
•
•
Primary wage earners for their families: We want to keep families out of the federal poverty
threshold. Therefore, it makes sense to try and reach those who are likely to need the income to
support children.
Relatively high rate of unemployment: Those with the highest rates of unemployment tend to be
younger and lower education attainment. Therefore, they will be best served by job training
services. Since we are not offering any kind of formal training, we will not be providing the
services the younger members of our community need. We will be better served by targeting
those areas that fulfill other criteria than by relying strictly on statistics.
Employed in industries with high current unemployment: The areas hardest hit by unemployment
are leisure and hospitality, transportation and utilities, information, construction, and business and
professional services. These are fields that tend to employ those in the 35- to 44-year-old groups
and not those in the 18- to 24-year-old age group. Therefore, we should target our messaging to
those in the former age group.
Make use of other LLCC services: It will be easiest to draw in those who are already familiar with
or utilize other LLCC services. Therefore, we should focus on transitioning these community
members to a new service.
Usage of LLCC Services by Age Group (January 2018–January 2019)
Age Group
Food Bank
Mental Health
Services
Social Services
18–20
5.1%
4.2%
8.1%
21–24
10.2%
9.3%
14.3%
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 10 of 20
25–34
31.8%
12.2%
16.2%
35–44
28.1%
25.9%
12.1%
45–55
12.1%
34.2%
22.1%
55–64
7.1%
11.2%
20.2%
65+
5.0%
3.1%
6.9%
Relative high risk of having incomes below the federal poverty threshold: The age group of 25–44 is 21%.
Therefore, if we target this age group, we will be able to lift a significant percentage of the population
above the federal poverty threshold.
Individuals With Incomes Below the Federal Poverty Threshold by Age
Age
Percentage of
Population
Under 18 years
16.2%
18 to 24 years
15.0%
25 to 34 years
10.9%
35 to 44 years
10.1%
45 to 54 years
8.4%
55 to 59 years
9.7%
60 to 64 years
10.8%
65 years and over
9.7%
Ranking of Unemployment Rates by Race/Ethnicity and Age
Higher Rate of Unemployment, Ranked from High to Low
Males (Race/Ethnicity and
Age)
Black or African American, 18–
19
Females (Race/Ethnicity and
Age)
Asian or Asian American, 18–
19
Asian or Asian American, 18–
19
Black or African American, 20–
24
Black or African American, 20–
24
Black or African American, 18–
19
Hispanic/Latino, 18–19
Asian or Asian American, 20–
24
Asian or Asian American, 20–
24
Hispanic/Latina, 18–19
White, 18–19
Hispanic/Latina, 20–24
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 11 of 20
Black or African American, 25–
34
White, 18–19
Asian or Asian American, 65+
Black or African American, 25–
34
Hispanic/Latino, 20–24
Asian or Asian American, 65+
Black or African American, 35–
44
White, 20–24
Lower Rate of Unemployment, Ranked from High to Low
Males (Race/Ethnicity and
Age)
Females (Race/Ethnicity and
Age)
White, 20–24
Asian or Asian American, 55–
64
Asian or Asian American, 55–
64
Asian or Asian American, 25–
34
Hispanic/Latino, 25–34
Black or African American, 55–
64
Black or African American, 55–
64
Black or African American, 65+
Black or African American, 65+
Black or African American, 45–
54
Hispanic/Latino, 55–64
Asian or Asian American, 45–
54
Hispanic/Latino 65+
Hispanic/Latina, 25–34
Asian or Asian American, 25–
34
Hispanic/Latina, 65+
Asian or Asian American, 55–
64
White, 65+
White, 25–34
White, 25–34
Black or African American, 45–
54
White, 35–44
Based upon our research, we propose to create the following as the priority audience segment:
Unemployed White males 25–44, Black or African American males and females 25–44, and
Hispanic/Latino males 25–44 with a high school diploma or less.
There may be some confusion as to why we chose this priority audience segment. White males who are
25–44 years old and are unemployed find themselves at a crossroads. They need updated skills to be
competitive in the job market. This group lacks access to the tools and resources they need to get back
into the job market. This group tends to be the main source of income for their families. This age group
also tends to make use of LLCC services. The quicker we can get members of this demographic back
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 12 of 20
into the workforce the more likely we can keep their families’ from having household income below the
federal poverty threshold.
Black or African American males and females who are 25–44 years old and are unemployed find
themselves in similar situations. Educational attainment for these demographics is low and these
community members have less access to resources and tools needed for a job search. We can provide
skills courses, which should make the members of this demographic more attractive in the job market.
Working with our industry partners, we may be able to do some limited job shadowing. These
demographics are likely to already have incomes below the federal poverty threshold. The sooner we are
able to transfer their knowledge into skills, the more opportunities they will have in the job market.
Hispanic/Latino males who are 25–44 years old and are unemployed have a slightly different set of
problems. This group tends to be hired for seasonal jobs that have no future potential for growth. Like the
other groups, this group needs to develop more job skills to be marketable. They can complete skills
courses at LLCC and do some limited job shadowing. This group also utilizes other LLCC services, so we
can easily transition them to the new services.
Audience Analysis
We have conducted an audience analysis of our priority audience segment. Our findings are as follows:
All groups are concerned about their families. White males and Black or African American males and
females expressed they feel anxiety over having lost their jobs. All men in the priority audience segments
have an interest in sports. Hispanic/Latino men and Black or African American women list religion as
important to them. All groups expressed similar sentiments in wanting to be in control of their lives and
they feel that it is something hard to accomplish.
The channels of communication for the priority audience are somewhat diverse. All groups have a
preference for getting information from Facebook. All males express a preference for cable. Black or
African American males and females and Hispanic/Latino males are open to receiving information
through text messages. White males, Black or African American females, and Hispanic/Latino males all
use radio for information. Black or African American males and females use YouTube to gather
information.
Secondary
Audience
Media
Preferences
Message
Preferences
Information
Needs
Concerns and
Issues
Resistance Points
White
Females,
age 25–44
Radio,
Facebook,
Newsletters,
SMS
Time away from
family, finding time,
times programs
offered
SMS,
YouTube,
Instagram,
TikTok,
Facebook
Services
offered,
children’s
services,
childcare, skills
improvement
Job training
programs,
educational
opportunities,
job shadowing
Children,
children’s
education,
planning for
future
Black or
African
American
Males, age
18–24
Focused,
short
messages,
informative,
targeted on
family
Short
messages,
entertaining,
shareable,
Targeted to
interests
Getting first job,
unemployment,
meeting financial
needs
Programs not in field
of interest, education
not needed, worried
about low-paying
jobs
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 13 of 20
Black or
African
American
Females,
age 18–24
SMS,
Instagram,
TikTok
Facebook,
YouTube
Short
messages,
entertaining,
informative,
targeted to
culture,
shareable
Job training
programs,
educational
opportunities,
job shadowing
Meeting financial
needs, getting
first job, deadend jobs
Day/times programs
offered, length of
time to complete
programs, job will be
unsatisfying, unsure
of goals
Hispanic or
Latino
Males, age
18–24
SMS,
Instagram,
TikTok,
YouTube
Entertaining,
Spanish text,
memes,
brief,
targeted to
culture
SMS,
Instagram,
TikTok
Facebook,
YouTube
Short
messages,
entertaining,
informative,
targeted to
culture,
shareable
Getting first job,
meeting financial
needs,
Being selfsufficient,
maintaining
reputation
Meeting financial
needs, getting
first job, selfsufficient
Programs not in field
of interest, education
not needed, worried
about low-paying
jobs, unsure if job is
needed
Hispanic or
Latino
Females,
age 18–24
Educational
programs, job
training
programs, job
shadowing,
career
counseling
Job training
programs,
educational
opportunities,
job shadowing
Amount of time to
complete program,
costs, unsure what
education will lead
to, programs not in
field of interest
The main channels for communication are Facebook and Twitter. Targeted messages can be sent
through text messages, radio, and YouTube videos. Additionally, buying spots during cable sports
programming will help us reach males. We should also repurpose YouTube videos to air on local
television stations in the area to expand the priority audience segment.
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 14 of 20
Social Media Channels of Communication
Level
Channel
Reason
Primary
Facebook
Listed by all demographics as
a media preference
Primary
Twitter
Roughly the same
functionality as Facebook
Secondary
Text messages
Target messages to three of
the demographic groups
Secondary
Radio
Buying spots on adult
contemporary radio will help
to reach audience
Secondary
YouTube
African Americans list this as
a media preference
Program Analysis
SWOT Analysis
Here are the results of the SWOT analysis:
Strengths
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Center is well connected in the community
Committed volunteer corps
Large number of community partners
Partnerships with nonprofits and productive businesses
Serving a larger number of community members
Professionalism
Community outreach
Reputation
Strong board support
Weaknesses
•
•
•
•
•
Not all programs are equally healthy
Poor advertising of all services—limited to newspapers, radio, and television PSAs
Not many activities outside of Center
Budgets do not support growing programs (Food Bank)
Outreach is not targeted to groups who need it most
Opportunities
•
•
•
•
•
Growing partnerships
Increased community service
Word-of-mouth advertising
Social media promotion
Integration of services
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 15 of 20
Threats
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rising unemployment
Partner businesses not hiring entry-level positions
Decreasing donations
Decreasing community funding
Number of clients rise to unsustainable levels
Decline in volunteers
Lack of strategic communication plan
Discussion of SWOT Findings
LLCC is strong when it comes to partnerships with a good reputation in the region. Our professionalism
and dedicated staff and volunteers allow us to provide a great deal of services in the community.
However, we have poor advertising and our programs tend to rely on word-of-mouth. Our programs could
be more efficient in reaching groups needing our services. Not all of our programs have enough funding
and have started to show some decline.
We have the opportunity to integrate services and become a “one stop shop” where clients get many of
their needs addressed. We have growing partnerships with community nonprofits and business, which
has led to increased services. Our partnerships give us many outlets where we can advertise the service
to the priority audience segment. The threats to LLCC are many. Funding from donors is decreasing as is
the number of volunteers. The decrease is very problematic since volunteers are important in
administering services. While donations and volunteers dwindle, the need for services has increased.
What is needed is a strategic communication plan for the whole of LLCC.
Conclusions Drawn from SWOT
Partnerships and relationships with businesses are strong. Overall, our reputation is strong. However, we
are not doing a particularly good job in advertising (1) our programs, (2) what good we have
accomplished, or (3) what projects we are currently working on. While we are identifying priority
audiences, our message to the community seems inconsistent and we are not reaching the correct
priority audience segments. This could be due to not having a center-wide strategic communication plan.
We have a professional staff and volunteer crew that helps us to provide service to the community. Costs
are increasing while donations are going down, which will lead to a financial crunch. While LLCC
programs have funding issues and we have declining volunteers, LLCC is still strong enough to begin a
job placement program.
In short, LLCC is committed to starting the job placement service and has the necessary staffing to
conduct it. The job placement service is a project that the board has enthusiastically supported and the
board is the driving force behind implementing it. Funding will need to be drawn from increased donations
and reduction in the budgets of the other services offered by the LLCC. Staff is professional and has the
expertise to implement the service and the strategic communication plan. Volunteers may need to be
reassigned from other services to help us get the message out to the priority audience segment about the
service. All in all, LLCC will have the resources necessary to successfully start the service and achieve
the strategic communication plan.
Goal Statement
Our goal statement needs to be based upon the problem statement: “The main problem is
unemployment, which leads to having incomes below the federal poverty threshold. Increasing
employment should help to raise median income and lift families’ household incomes above the federal
poverty threshold.”
The goal statement is as follows: To increase the number of individuals in our priority audience segment
(unemployed White males 25–44, Black or African American males and females 25–44, and
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 16 of 20
Hispanic/Latino males 25–44) utilizing the Long Lake Community Center job placement services to 1,200
individuals per year by the end of December 2021.
We will count “utilizing job placement services” as a visit that involves the individual using at least one of
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Job placement with local industry partners
Career counseling services
Career brainstorming services
Résumé writing help
Job search help
Job skills refresher courses
Clothing bank for professional wear
Utilization Benchmarks for the Job Placement Service in 1 Year
Mont
h
Janu
ary
Febr
uary
Marc
h
April
May
June
July
Augu
st
Sept
embe
r
Octo
ber
Nove
mber
Dece
mber
numb
er of
visits
each
mont
h
cumu
lative
visits
25
50
100
150
125
75
75
125
150
150
100
75
25
75
175
325
450
525
600
725
875
1025
1125
1200
The top line of numbers is the number of visits each month. The bottom line of numbers is the cumulative
visits.
January and February are set at a low level because these two months will be right after the strategic
communication program begins. Since we will not have the plan fully in place, those two months will have
fewer visits. March and April will build, but we will begin to see a decline in visits from May to August due
to the summer lag. September and October will increase while the holiday months will cause fewer
individuals to use the job placement services. Added together, the timeline gets us to the goal.
Partners
Internal Partners
Our internal partners will be the agency staff:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Program Director
Program Manager
Communications Office
Donor Affairs
Visual Effects
Social Media Department
Accounting
Volunteers
Copyright 2023 by MyEducator. Reprinted with permission.
Last Year’s Strategic Communication Plan
BSCOM/480 v2
Page 17 of 20
•
Office Staff
Everyone will be assigned a task to complete during the course of the strategic communication plan.
External Partners
Our external partners will involve the following businesses and offices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
State job placement service
Local office for Department of Health and Human Services
Local office for Department of Family Services
St. Joseph Catholic Church
First Baptist Church
St. Paul Lutheran Church
First Street Bank
Johnson’s Building Maintenance
Schwab Investment Services
The Gap
Christo’s Fine Dining
Johnson Contracting
NRM Insurance Company
We Create Media
Penny’s
Each of the partners will bring something different to the team. The local churches will provide
announcements to their congregations. The Department of Health and Human Services and the
Department of Family Services will help to identify programs that can help our priority audience segments.
The state job placement center will send job postings, as they become available, that we can push out to
members of the priority audience segment. The businesses will either work with us in placing candidates
or provide in-kind donations. For example, We Create Media will provide low-cost video production
facilities. Penny’s will provide us with clothing for the clothing bank.
Communication Theory
The theory which will underpin our objectives, strategies, and tactics is Cognitive Dissonance. As we can
see from the audience analysis, our priority audience segment members already say they feel they are in
a state of dissonance. There is a break between how they see themselves (strong, in control, good
reputation, taking care of family) and their actual state (unemployed, needing help). We need to offer
objectives, strategies, tactics, and messages that return the priority audience segment members back to
a state of consonance. Consonance, we wi
Length: Your responses should each be at least two paragraphs (4 sentences in length) for question one. For questions two and three, the response should be one paragraph (3 sentences in length) per question.
For total points: Respond to two class members – (2 to 3 sentences in length for each response.)
Be respectful: Please be respectful; otherwise, your post will be deleted, and you will not receive credit.
Please do the following and then respond to the questions below. Once you respond to the questions, post your responses. After you post your answers, you can respond to your classmates.
Before responding to the discussion questions, please complete the steps below:
Step 1 – Read the Article – You Cannot Not Communicate.
Step 2 – Watch the Videos – What is Nonverbal Communication and Codes?
Step 3 – Watch the TED Talk – How to Show Confidence with Your Body Language.
Step 4 – Take the test – Facial Expressions – Test Your Emotional Intelligence (access through an outside link.)
Step 5 – Watch the TED Talk – The Hidden Power of Smiling.
QUESTIONS:
In Step 1, you read an article; You Cannot Not Communicate. Please explain how this statement is true. (Please provide one example from each of the resources below material to help illustrate your response.) Your response should each be at least two paragraphs (4 sentences in length.)
The Article – You Cannot Not Communicate.
The videos What is Nonverbal Communication and Codes.
The TED Talk – How to Show Confidence with Your Body Language.
Facial Expressions – Test Your Emotional Intelligence.
TED Talk – The Hidden Power of Smiling.
For questions two and three the response should be one paragraph (3 sentences in length) per question.
2. In Step 2, you saw a video on nonverbal communication. Briefly define Nonverbal Communication and how can understanding nonverbal communication enhance your communication.
3. Share your score from the Facial Expression test.
a) Were you surprised at the results?
b) What facial expressions were the easiest? What were the most challenging?
You are hosting a large dinner party. What are two possible risks you would encounter? Identify at least one trigger condition for each. Minimum 200 words
You see a coworker harassing another employee, or a supervisor harassing or bullying a subordinate – What Would You Do?
I have been put in this position numerous times and from my experiences, I would first pull my coworker that’s being bullied aside. I would let them know that I am on their side and that the bully is not in the right, I would help make them feel better in that moment and encourage them to stand up for themselves. If nothing changes and the bullying continues I would step in and let the bully know that what they are doing is not right and they are being rude. This either causes them to feel embarrassed and stop or causes them to get defensive. If the person turns defensive and aggressive, I will have to involve management. This would be an example of my values, something chapter 1 goes over (Kinicki).
A coworker is consistently late and you know it is because of their home situation, however, they continue to slide into work unnoticed. Do you say something or not?
I would not get involved in this situation. Everyone goes through troubles in life and it is understandable. However, I can see problems arising from this, and might cause other employees to slack as well. It might also create an animosity between coworkers. If this coworker was my friend I would communicate with them and advise them to let managers know about what was going on.
You are in a group setting and everyone is asked to give a verbal vote or show of hands. You do not agree, but you do not want to be the only one to disagree. Do you go along or not?
I would like to show my disagreement with confidence however I think the safer option would be to not go along and suggest a more anonymous vote. This would avoid any discouragement or hesitation from anyone in the group.
Post 2
In order to succeed in the workplace everyone must work together and partake in group activities to reach the overall common goal. Employees must put aside their personal differences and see their coworkers as collaborative individuals. With that being said if a coworker was to harass another employee you should feel the need to speak up and bring this to the attention of HR. It doesn’t matter if that employee is your friend at the end of the day this is a business and its part of your ethical responsibility to make things right. If it is a supervisor harassing a subordinate this is an example of exploitation of power and needs to be handled correctly.
A coworker that is constantly late to work due to their home situation is an example of a situational factor that can we worked around. The textbook states that “Situation factors are all the elements outside us that influence what we do, the way we do it, and the ultimate results of our actions” (Kinicki, n.d.). This should be brought to managements attention so that they can find a way to work this out. In this case managers need to be understanding and try to find a compromise with their subordinate. As long as the employee is able to come into work late and not disrupt the workflow this should be ok.
Being in a group setting where one must share their view point can be scary especially when everyone sides against you. It is important for the work environment to encourage people to speech out on their opinions. If one person disagrees with a crowd it can be intimidating, but that person can bring up valid points in reference to the topic that may cause others to end up agreeing with them. If that one person doesn’t speak out once the changes get rolled out there will probably be many more that also disagree. Problems like these can be resolved easily with the proper work environments.
I’m a doctoral student in “Doctoral of Business Administration” , I’m in the phase of preparing my doctoral dissertation and I have to submit my dissertation proposal.
I’m interested in healthcare sector where I want from my research to find an efficient solution to facilitate the access to healthcare services and to drive the policy makers to make their decision based on scientific. I want to make my research around the virtual care and how the virtual care can contribute to patients and healthcare professional experience by examining their perspective. In addition, how can we optimize the virtual care and make it cost effective. Lastly, how can virtual car improve health outcome. (My research focus will be in Saudi Arabia)
I want my proposal to be well convincing to the examination panel. They are getting the attention to the research methodology and how the methodology can contribute to the research objectives. I want the research questions to be well written so all further steps will be connected to the research question.
I have attached many documents from my previous work during the first year of my doctoral degree. all the assignments were well written so you can use it to build the final proposal.
I also attached the college requirements and tips to build the proposal as expectation. The proposal should be 3500 words and each section should has minimum number of word (attached in the assignment direction).
Please, don’t hesitate to contact me via email if you have any question.
You will find the proposal direction in the following documents:
1-Assessment – Module 7 & 8
2- Research_proposal_tips
3-Writing techniques and pointers
4-research proposal direction
You will find the previous work in the following documents:
1page answer for each question (1 pages total): you need to do question 1 and 3 only. Topics for Discussion and ActionDiscussion
Why is It Important for managers to understand the forces in the global evironment that are acting on them and their orgarizations? [LO6-1]–…The population is aging because of declining birth rates, declining death rates, and the aging ofthe Baby Boomer generation. What might some of the implications of this demographic trend be for
(a) a pharmaceutical company and (b) the home construction industry? [LO6-1, 6-2, 6-3]
Using figure 10.4 in the Koller text as a guide, identify a decision you faced, are currently facing or might face in the future, and analyze it using a 3 variable decision tree with 27 leaf nodes. Topic: Use of Power BI vs Tableau as a strategic tool for Data analysis.. Include APA references and in-text citations.
The company must be a Public American Company
The final research paper will be a 2000 – 2500-word paper (not including the title and reference page)
Your paper must have an APA title page, and reference page.
Title page,
Body (content)
Reference page.
Paper must be written according to American Psychological Association (APA) guidelines (https://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/560/01/)
Paper must be written in Times New Roman font and double spaced.
Cover Page: Name, course name, CRN, Title of paper
Page numbers should be in the upper right-hand corner of the paper.
Margins: 1” top, bottom, left, and right.
Headings within your paper
You must use at least five peer-reviewed scholarly resources. Points will be deducted if you only use internet sources, Wikipedia or other encyclopedias does not count scholarly peer-reviewed resources. Consult Key Tools of Writing and Research to learn how to properly use Wikipedia.
Limit the use of websites. Use scholarly research from ProQuest, EBSCO, and Google Scholar
Use Turnitin to check for Plagiarism. Keep plagiarism below 10%
Develop and Write a 2000-2500-word paper that does the following:
Give introduction and background on Management Planning
Write an overview on chosen public organization
Analyze factors that influence each of the following: the company’s strategic planning, tactical planning, operational planning, and contingency planning.
Analyze the influence that legal issues, ethics, and corporate social responsibility have had on management planning. Provide at least one example for each.
Evaluate the planning function of management as it relates to the organization’s goals and strategies
Exercise 18-11 (Algo) Retirement of shares [LO18-5]
In 2024, Borland Semiconductors entered into the transactions described below. In 2021, Borland had issued 215 million shares of its $1 par common stock at $47 per share.
Required:
Assuming that Borland retires shares it reacquires, record the appropriate journal entry for each of the following transactions:
Note: If no entry is required for a transaction/event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field. Enter your answers in millions (i.e., 10,000,000 should be entered as 10).
On January 2, 2024, Borland reacquired 11 million shares at $45.00 per share.
On March 3, 2024, Borland reacquired 11 million shares at $50 per share.
On August 13, 2024, Borland sold 1 million shares at $55 per share.
On December 15, 2024, Borland sold 2 million shares at $50 per share.
Milton Friedman’s (1970) essay on “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits” has long been cited by managers, politicians, and business scholars alike to argue against various forms of social responsibilities of businesses. (1) Engage with Friedman’s arguments by reading his famous essay and summarize his main lines of argument: Why, according to Friedman, should the social responsibility of business be to increase its profits? (You can find the original essay in the Library Resource Organizer Week 1 or on the Internet: https://timesmachine.nytimes.com/timesmachine/1970/09/13/223535702.html?pageNumber=379)Links to an external site. In the 50 years since the publication, the public debate as well as our understanding of society and business has moved on. On the 50th anniversary of Friedman’s essay, in Sep. 2020, The New York Times published a piece with a series of responses to Friedman. (2) Engage with these thoughts to collect and systematically arrange arguments: Why might businesses have other responsibilities than increasing their profits? (You can find the responses here: https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedman-doctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html)Links to an external site. Make use of supplemental material as well as examples/cases, to demonstrate your arguments.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Milton Friedman’s (1970) essay on “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase
Its Profits” has long been cited by managers, politicians, and business scholars alike to
argue against various forms of social responsibilities of businesses.
(1) Engage with Friedman’s arguments by reading his famous essay and summarize his
main lines of argument:
Why, according to Friedman, should the social responsibility of business be to
increase its profits?
(You can find the original essay in the Library Resource Organizer Week 1 or on the
Internet: https://timesmachine.nytimes.com/timesmachine/1970/09/13/223535702.ht
ml?pageNumber=379)Links to an external site.
In the 50 years since the publication, the public debate as well as our understanding of
society and business has moved on. On the 50th anniversary of Friedman’s essay, in
Sep. 2020, The New York Times published a piece with a series of responses to
Friedman.
(2) Engage with these thoughts to collect and systematically arrange arguments:
Why might businesses have other responsibilities than increasing their profits?
(You can find the responses
here: https://www.nytimes.com/2020/09/11/business/dealbook/milton-friedmandoctrine-social-responsibility-of-business.html)Links to an external site.
Make use of supplemental material as well as examples/cases, to demonstrate your
arguments.
Submission Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maximum = 2 pages. If you create more than two pages, your grade will
deducted by 5%. References are not counted in this page limit.
Single-spaced within paragraphs and double-spaced between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch margins and 12-point font (enforced). Smaller/Larger
fonts and margins will be deducted 10%.
Click “Submit Assignment” located at the top right-hand corner to upload your
assignment.
Cite your relevant sources in APA citation and referencing format (this refers
only to the citations/references, not the paper writing style)
This assignment uses TurnitIn, a plagiarism checker to help you verify the
authenticity of your work.
For writing and tutoring resources, see the Student Resources module for more
information.
Beware: it is obvious when students only do a portion of the readings and try to develop
a paper around that portion. You should read all of the assigned materials and
demonstrate this in your analysis by integrating the different concepts.
Papers that demonstrate students’ superior ability to integrate the readings and draw
conclusions that are important to managers and/or policymakers will receive a score of
an A, whereas a D score will be awarded to papers that have weak analytical form and
construction.
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
Ratings
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
5
2.
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeSynthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeKey
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.
5
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeApplication
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeFormatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
OutcomeCitations &
References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Ratings
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.
Paper 1 Rubric
Criteria
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
Outcome Synthesis
Summarize the main
take-aways in a
concise and clear
manner
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
Outcome Key
Findings
Discuss key
takeaways across the
readings
Ratings
Pts
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
5 to >4.25 pts
Excellent
Thoughtfully addresses all
required elements and makes
explicit connections with
supplementary evidence,
references, or resources.
Demonstrates skillful use of
high-quality, credible,
relevant sources to develop
ideas.
4.25 to >3.75 pts
Good
Thoughtfully
addresses all
required elements.
Demonstrates
consistent use of
credible, relevant
sources to support
ideas.
3.75 to >2.5 pts
Fair
Cursory. Does
not address all
required
elements.
Sources are
missing or the
majority cited
not relevant or
credible
2.5 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Incomplete. Does
not address most
of the required
elements. The
majority cited not
relevant or
credible
2.5 pts
5 pts
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
Outcome
Application
Integrate the
different concepts;
draw conclusions
that are important to
organizations
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
Outcome Formatting
and grammar
be no more than two
pages; be singlespaced within and
double-spaced
between paragraphs.
No less than 1-inch
margins and 12point font are
acceptable.
This criterion is
linked to a Learning
Outcome Citations
& References
Citations are utilized
correctly. A
formatted reference
list is provided.
Total Points: 15
Previous
Paper 1 Rubric
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Uses appropriate,
relevant, and
compelling content
to illustrate mastery
of the topic.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Clear and logical flow,
no errors in grammar
or typos.
2.5 to >2.13 pts
Excellent
Citations and references
used appropriately.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Uses mostly appropriate,
relevant, and compelling
content to explore ideas
but may lack full
development of ideas.
1.88 to
>1.25 pts
Fair
Development of
topic may be
lacking.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Thoughtfully addresses all required
elements. Clear and logical flow, few or
no errors in grammar or typos.
2.13 to >1.88 pts
Good
Some citations or references missing or
not appropriately utilized
1.25 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Development of topic
is lacking,
underdeveloped or not
directly related to topic.
2.5 pts
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
Disorganized, many
errors in grammar or
typos.
2.5 pts
1.88 to >0 pts
Incomplete
No citations or
references used.
2.5 pts
Previous
Complete the Leader’s Self-Insight 4.3. From Leader’s Self-Insight 4.3, identify four or five values (instrumental or end values) that could be a source of conflict between leaders and followers. Explain in 500 words. Use your text and other elements from this unit as a resource.
This work is important to me. Solve it correctly, without mistakes, withoutplagiarism. Follow the instructions. There is no chance to repeat it.Therefore, you must do a complete and correct work 100%.If you are sure you can do it, accept it
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:12510
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Moin Uddin
Students’ Grade: / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
The goal of the self-narrated executive summary is for you to demonstrate and summarize your knowledge of the development of your business to this point. Use all the assignments you have completed to this point in order and create a presentation that shows your findings and how you plan to proceed.
The executive summary should serve as an introduction to the entire business venture keying on the important aspects from previous assignments that would excite an investors. It should include meaningful and significant data and facts that differentiate or leverage your business plans success.
The presentation should address the following points:
Appropriateness of Working Name to Overall Concept.
Clearly identifies; What is it?
Clearly identifies; Who it is for?
Clearly identifies; What is being sold? Specifically, how and why?
Clearly identifies; Where it is located and why?
Clearly identifies; What it looks like and why; operationally?
Clearly identifies; Unique aspects and activities that differentiate the concept from competitors?
Read or display each question in your presentation before you start answering it. This enables you to be as visual as you can be in your explanations.
Congratulations on the work you completed for your Course Project. The next step is to create a Course Project Report for senior leadership, because they want to understand your efforts, especially as it relates to the organization’s overall strategy. When completing each of the following sections, assume you have completed the project and project deliverable. The deliverable is worth 100 points.
The main focus of the report is to incorporate the project assignments you completed into a comprehensive document. In addition to the sections that discuss work you completed in previous weeks, there are additional sections that require your reflection and project management expertise.
Section I: Executive Overview (one half to three quarters of a page)
Describe the project, including the intended project deliverables.
Discuss how your project meets needs of the organization and how the project is aligned to the business’ strategic objectives.
Use your project charter to help you explain your position
Section II: Project Management Discipline Alignment (No more than one page)Explain how your project work aligns with modern project management disciplines. Focus on how all project work is integrated to understand the overall impact of a project.
Hint: Use the PMBOK® Guide (seventh edition) to help your argument
Section III: Effects of Sociocultural Factors (No more than one page)
Identify and define sociocultural factors in your project. Describe the benefits and challenges working with individuals from different backgrounds (educational level, language, nationality, religion, ethnicity, culture, ethics, etc.).
Include how the sociocultural factors you identified might dictate your ethical and social responsiveness actions as it relates to the effectiveness of your project.
Section IV: Leadership and Professional Conduct (No more than two pages)Research and describe a leadership style you would use in your project. Include how you motivate team members to deliver a competitive advantage with the completed project.
Make sure you take into account the organizational structure and the RAM/RACI efforts you conducted to help you determine the best approach.
In addition to the leadership you have learned throughout your project efforts and studies in this course, there is a need for professional accountability by the project manager.
Describe specifically the professional conduct and accountability necessary for your project to be successful.
Make sure you focus on the role of the project manager, the project team, and stakeholders.
Section V: Conclusion (No more than three quarters to one page)
Conclude your report by discussing the lessons learned for the project.
Identify the top three lessons learned as it relates to your project.
Include any strengths identified and areas for improvement for future projects similar to your project.
Make sure you explain what you would do differently in the next project and what you would continue to do.
DOCUMENT FORMAT
The Course Project Report should follow APA guidelines for the body of your paper and references.
Include a title page in APA format that contains the following required information.
Name of your project
Student name
Course name (i.e., PROJ586 Project Management Systems)
Instructor name
Due date
Table of Contents
Each of the sections
References
Appendix
Report Content (each of the five sections)
Section I: Executive Overview
Section II: Project Management Discipline Alignment
Section III: Effects of Sociocultural Factors
Section IV: Leadership and Professional Conduct
Section V: Conclusion
References
Appendix
(Make sure you add a title for each item. You already created each item, so it is just a matter of labeling them and making sure the information is in the Table of Contents under the Appendix section.)
Project Charter
Scope Statement
WBS (cut and paste in document if necessary)
Project Schedule (cut and paste content; using an image might be less complicated)
Communications Management Plan
RAM or RACI matrix (use whichever tool you created for the Week 2 Assignment)
Once you complete your report, upload your document.
I am writing a project report about Disney’s 10 year $60Billion investment for their theme parks and cruises. But I could not find much informationabout that Disney new project team. Please help to collect data, answer these two questions in paragraphs. 1. Describe the organizational structure of the project/program team. (Disney plan to invest in their theme parks and cruises) 2. What are the roles and responsibilities of project/program team members? (Disney plan to invest in their theme parks and cruises)
I have an online test in about 3 hours from now. So I need someone who has writing skills which can help me. I do not know about the topic yet but the subject is about Business Management. I need someone who is very expert in writing.
You are to look at the creative briefs in the attachments and find one that sounds interesting. Pay close attention to the Challenge or Assignment listed on the creative brief.you will create a campaign that solves the challenge for the client/brand on the creative brief.
You have secured a position as a fund manager for a well known investment banking house. You have been given $25 million to manage/invest in a single stock. The fund is a pension/retirement fund so its perspective is long term with moderate risk of loss of capital and a required return of 9% per annum. Your assignment is to determine if the fund you are managing should invest $25 million dollars in the stock of the company you have selected for your first analysis/investment decision. Select a publicly traded US based company. Do not select a bank or financial intermediary (i.e Investment Bank, Insurance Company, Brokerage House etc). Your decision to invest or not invest will be supported by the research paper and a Power Point Presentation.
NOTE: Most of the data needed for this assignment can be found in Yahoo/finance. Go to Yahoo/finance, select your company, and view the table of contents on the left side of the page.
Your analysis will address each of the following:
Business Strategy Analysis: Develop an understanding of the business and competitive strategies of the company. Which of the three generic competitive strategies does the company utilize (low cost provider, differentiation, focus)?This should be covered in not more than three paragraphs. Do not spend time writing a history of the company. This is an analysis, not a history lesson.
Accounting Analysis: Do the accounting practices adopted by the company generally reflect an accurate picture of the economic performance of the company? Did your research find any public announcements of restatement of earnings or other financial statements that would indicate that the financial statements may be of dubious value? This can be done by reviewing the company’s 8K filings with the SEC (a mandatory requirement for this paper).These filings can generally be found on the company’s website under Investor Relations – SEC filings.
Financial Analysis: Analyze financial ratios and cash flow measures of the company relative to its historical performance. For purposes of this research paper a 2 year look back is sufficient and required. You must use at least 10 of the ratios noted on page 119 of the text including all four of the profitability ratios.
Prospective Analysis: Develop forecasted performance measures and list the assumptions associated with your forecast. List your assumptions and reasons for your forecast. You may also cite the works of other analysts who have published forecasted earnings for the time frame you are addressing.(Hint: take a look at Yahoo/finance – analysts opinion.
Conclusion: Will you or will you not invest $25 million in this particular Company? Support your conclusion? Remember a negative conclusion is just as valid and valuable as a positive conclusion.
The most vital part of a business is communication. Communication is how leaders and employees coordinate actions to meet the organization’s goals. Effective communication will garner employee satisfaction, gain profits, and cause the organization to thrive. When an organization thrives in communication, they typically employ coordination, transmis¬sion of information, and sharing emotions and feelings. Poor communication leads to lawsuits, poor employee satisfaction, inconsistent turnover, and company failure.
BARRIERS TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
There are many barriers to the communication process. Leaders who fail to communicate have barriers such as filtering, selective perception, information overload, emotional disconnects, lack of source credibility, workplace gossip, gender differences, and semantics. In the communication process, the message is often not received as the sender intended it to be. This is where the communicator must seek feedback to ensure their message is correctly understood.
ETHICS IN COMMUNICATION
There are many barriers to the communication process. Leaders who fail to communicate have barriers such as filtering, selective perception, information overload, emotional disconnects, lack of source credibility, workplace gossip, gender differences, and semantics. In the communication process, the message is often not received as the sender intended it to be. This is where the communicator must seek feedback to ensure their message was correctly understood.
Reading Assignment
As you read through the resources and watch the videos consider the following:
How is the communication process supposed to work in an organization?
What are the different methods of communication practices?
What are the barriers to effective communication?
Are all communication practices truthful, responsible, and concise?
Did you ever question an e-mail, order, policy, message, or direction from a leader due to their poor communication practices?
READ
Read the following from your textbook, Organizational behavior.
Chapter 8
Chapter 8.1: You’ve Got Mail…and You’re Fired! The Case of RadioShack
Chapter 8.2: Understanding Communication
Chapter 8.3: Communication Barriers
Chapter 8.4: Different Types of Communication and Channels
Chapter 8.5: The Role of Ethics and National Culture
Chapter 8.6: Employee Satisfaction Translates to Success: The Case of Edward Jones
Chapter 8.7: Conclusion
WATCH
What are the barriers to communication? | Oral Communication in Context-SHS
Communication cycle
REFERENCES
Organizational behavior. (2017). University of Minnesota Libraries Publishing. https://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/organizational-behavior. Licensed under CC BY-NC-SA.
Teachlearning English (2020, August 23). What are the barriers to communication? | Oral Communication in Context-SHS [Video]. YouTube.
Harmon, D. (2018, June 2). Communication cycle [Video]. YouTube.
Discussion Assignment
In the discussion forum, you are expected to participate often and engage in deep levels of discourse. You are required to post an initial response to the question/issue presented in the Forum by Sunday evening and then respond to at least 3 of your classmates’ initial posts. You should also respond to anyone who has responded to you.
Communication is a critical aspect of all organizations. It’s how we coordinate actions and achieve goals. Culture and communication are closely interlinked, and each employee and leader must know the importance of communication practices through various cultures.
To enhance the class’s understanding of culture and communication, describe the communication practices that enhance your culture in or out of your organization. Be sure to include the practices that enhance your culture and those that do not.
Your Discussion should be a minimum of 200 words in length and a maximum of 500 words. Please include a word count. Following the APA standard, use references and in-text citations for the textbook and any other sources used.
Written Assignment
Communication can be more challenging than one may think for various reasons, such as language, vagueness, and poor writing skills. These types of challenges are known as communication barriers. You have been introduced to several types of communication barriers in this unit. Many barriers block, change or diminish the communication process. Here are a few examples of types of communication barriers.
Filtering
Selective perception
Information overload
Emotional disconnects
Lack of source familiarity or credibility
Workplace gossip, semantic
Gender differences
Choose three of the barriers. Describe how each barrier blocks, changes, or diminishes the communication process within an organization. Provide examples for each one.
Prepare a double-spaced one- to two-page informative essay using Times New Roman 12-point font. Use and cite at least two sources which may be material in our textbook or additional sources from the internet, the LIRN, or other sources to which you have access.
Cite references to material that you use in preparing the essay using the American Psychological Association (APA) style.
For assistance with APA format, refer to the LRC: Academic Writing.
To access LIRN refer to the LRC: Online Library
You will be peer-assessed on the following criteria:
Provides a clear description of how three different barriers block, change or diminish the communication process
Cites a minimum of two sources (APA format) and includes a reference page
The paper is well-written and free of grammatical and spelling errors.
Group Activity
BUILDING A CROSS-FUNCTIONAL TEAM
To build a team, you must understand the behaviors of employees. When selecting a team, leaders should consider all individuals as valuable assets, even those who are not selected for the team. Leaders need to understand the behaviors of the individuals that are in the selection process for a team. Identifying learning, leadership, and behavioral styles is critical for effective leadership. When building a team, you do not want all of the same personality types. Leaders should want teams to be able to ascend through the stages of group development (forming-storming-norming-performing model) and not just agree on everything. Consider the following example to select a team for a fictional organization.
GROUP ACTIVITY INSTRUCTIONS
Global Logistics and Business Solutions is a company based out of San Angelo, California (USA). The organization’s primary focus is the import and export of goods worldwide. They can ship anything from cars and boats to dog collars and potato chips. The organization has partner organizations all over the world that have 250 stakeholders involved with the decision-making of the future of the company.
Eugene M. is the CEO of Global Logistics and Business Solutions. He is an innovative thinker that seeks humor and learning from everyday situations. Even when times are hard for the employees of the organization, Eugene knows how to motivate the team. He is optimistic and believes in and trusts in the organization and its employees.
Eugene wants to develop a cross-functional team of no more than five personnel from his partners throughout the world. He wants to build a team that is a cohesive coalition of people working together to achieve a mutual goal of how to improve employee satisfaction and increase productivity. Cross-functional teams enable businesses to be far more efficient in solving complex issues. With five members on the team, the team member will be able to work through differences and agree on a common plan of action faster than a team of ten.
Your objective as a team in BUS 4402, Organizational Behavior, is to help Euguene by selecting five individuals out of the ten candidates utilizing lessons learned from Unit 1 through Unit 6.
YOUR TASKS INCLUDE:
1. A 1-page introduction to building a team and why understanding organizational behavior is important to the matter. Provide details and examples.
2. Write one to two paragraphs for each of the selected candidates on why they were chosen. Explain why each member selected is a valuable part of the team and why they were selected with the profiles provided. Use the Candidates for Cross-functional Team document to choose the team members.
3. Write one to two paragraphs for each of the non-selected candidates on why they were not chosen. Explain why each of the members not selected was not the best fit for your team with the profiles provided.
4. As a team, write a one-page draft report on why the selected 5 will make a great cross-functional team.
5. (Team Lead) Build a rank order matrix from 1-10 for the candidates. Each employee is listed in the first column, and your team members are listed as headings in the first row. See the example below:
Example Rank Order Matrix
Employee
UoP Student 1
UoP Student 2
UoP Student 3
UoP Student 4
Patrick M.
1
3
1
3
Leah S.
2
1
3
2
River C.
3
2
2
1
6. Do NOT solve the issues of the company or give recommendations on how to improve employee satisfaction or increase productivity. Only provide information on why the candidates were and were not selected to solve the problem.
7. Working as a team, you will produce a final recommendation report for the best candidates for the team and why the others were not chosen and explain why the selected 5 will make a great cross-functional team. This report will combine all of the components you created in steps 1 through 5. Be sure your report is cohesive. Your report will draw from the resources covered in Units 1-6.
FINAL NOTES
Include a conclusion stating how your team selected the five individuals for a team. Share how the collaboration process was important to your final product in your conclusion in a 1-2 page, double-spaced, document using Times New Roman 12-point font. In addition to course learning resources, please include a minimum of 3 outside sources to justify your recommendations. Check all content for grammar and spelling. Be sure that you have properly cited all resources (in APA format) used and include a title page and reference page. The group activity will be introduced at the beginning of Unit 4 and will be turned in at the end of Unit 7. Each Team member will submit a copy of the report to the instructor in Unit 7.
ASSESSMENT
You will be assessed by your instructor using the Group Activity Rubric. In Unit 8, you will complete and submit the Group Project Evaluation Form, where you will rank each member of your team using criteria based on their performance for completing this activity
Your project report Building a Cross-functional Team is due by the end of this unit. Each Team membermust submit a copy of the final report. In Unit 8, you will complete and submit the Group Project Evaluation Form, where you will rank each member of your team using criteria based on their performance for completing this activity. Your instructor will assess you by using the rubric located on the course main page for this activity (Group Activity Unit 7). The rubric is located at the bottom of the page.
GROUP ACTIVITY READING RESOURCES
These resources will help you complete your group assignment.
How the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator works
What are the big 5 personality traits?
Organizational behavior
Unformatted Attachment Preview
GROUP PROJECT EVALUATION FORM
Team #
Please enter your teammate’s name in the top series of boxes and rate them on each of the listed criteria. Rate yourself and highlight
your name. Use the following rating scale:
1= Minimal Participation, 2= Hit & Miss, 3= OK, 4= Above Average, 5=One of the Best
TEAM MEMBERS
Cooperation & collaborative spirit
Initiative taken
Insights provided about the information
Work load shared
Drive to deliver the best end product
Use of knowledge and learning
Use of active listening & interactive
skills
Resourcefulness
TOTAL SCORES
Note: Anonymous evaluation results will be shared with each student. Each of you will see how you were evaluated, but no
names will be associated with the source of the ratings. I encourage you to be honest and candid in your ratings and any
related comments.
Comments and other points to consider:
Group Activity Rubric
All assignments should be worth a total of 100-points.
Element 1: Introduction – The group must provide an understanding of why
organizational behavior is important to building teams.
20 pts = The introduction was clear and insightful with ample details and examples.
15 pts = The introduction was clear and to the point with relevant examples.
10 pts = The introduction was vague and had few examples.
5 pts = The introduction was vague and had no examples.
0 pts = No references to OB were made, lacked any direction, and was off-topic.
Element Weight: 20%
Element Grading Scale: Score Out Of 20 Points
Element 2: Foundation of Knowledge – The group included foundational knowledge
and used concepts from the reading on why the candidates were/were not selected for the
team along with reference to cross-functional team.
40 pts = The explanation is clearly written with ample details on why the candidates
were/were not selected for the team. The explanation on why the selected candidates will
make a great team and the matrix is detailed, clear, and insightful.
30 pts = The explanation is clearly written with minimal details on why the candidates
were/were not selected for the team. The explanation on why the selected candidates will
make a great team and the matrix is clear.
20 pts = The explanation is vague, and no details were provided on why the candidates
were/were not selected for the team. The explanation on why the selected candidates will
make a great team and the matrix is vague or incomplete.
10 pts = The explanation is inaccurate or errors in the assignment are present. There are
no details provided on why the candidates were/were not selected for the team. The
explanation on why the selected candidates will make a great team and the matrix is
inaccurate.
0 pts = No explanation on why the candidates were/were not selected for the team. There
was no explanation on why the selected candidates will make a great team and the matrix.
Element Weight: 40%
Element Grading Scale: Score Out Of 40 Points
Element 3: Mechanics and Grammar, and APA Guidelines: The essay is very
persuasive and presented in a logical format with a clear introduction, body, and
conclusion. There is a clear statement of ideas and smooth transitions. The team has
stated the main idea clearly and has provided relevant details. The team provides
evidence of thoughtful input. Details are rich and appropriate. Spelling, punctuation, and
capitalization are virtually always correct.
•
•
•
•
•
25= Excellent
20 = Very Good (few errors)
14= Good (some errors, but still readable)
8 = Poor (many errors, sometimes affecting to readability)
0 = No organization or attention to grammar is apparent
Element Weight: 25%
Element Grading Scale: Score Out Of 25 Points
Element 4: Format – The team used a minimum of three outside resources with proper
APA citations.
•
•
•
•
•
15= Includes a minimum of three resources using correct APA citation and
reference
11 = Includes a minimum of three resources using APA citation and reference
with few consistent errors.
7= Includes a minimum of three resource using APA citation and references with
several errors.
3 = Includes less than three citations and references or not attempt to use APA
format on existing reference.
0 = No APA citations are included.
Element Weight: 15%
Element Grading Scale: Score Out Of 15 Points
Candidates for Cross-functional Team
Build a team of five team members out of the ten below:
1) Patrick M. (male)
Learning Style: Kinesthetic Learner
Age: 40
Patrick is from Georgia, United States.
Loves woodworking and working with his hands.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ENTJ
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
2) Leah S. (female)
Learning Style: Visual Learner
Age: 19
Leah is from St. John’s, Canada.
Love to play sports and go camping.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ESTP
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
3) River C. (male)
Learning Style: Auditory Learner
Age: 49
River is from Johannesburg, South Africa.
Loves dancing and gymnastics.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ESFP
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
4) Jonny C. (male)
Learning Style: Auditory Learner
Age: 23
Jonny is from Nevada in the United States.
Loves reading and solving complex math problems.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ISTP
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
5) Gaynelle R. (female)
Learning Style: Kinesthetic Learner
Age: 57
Gaynelle is from Barbados, Caribbean.
Love the beach and surfing.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ISFJ
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
6) Melissa (female)
Learning Style: Visual Learner
Age: 32
Melissa is from New Jersey, United States.
Loves to watch movies and play sports.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ENFP
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
7) Mick (male)
Learning Style: Kinesthetic Learner
Age: 22
Ariel is from London, England
Enjoys writing articles for local newspaper.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: INFJ
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
8) Chilesha (female)
Learning Style: Visual Learner
Age: 30
Chilesha is from Zambia, Sub-Sahara Africa.
Enjoys dancing and reading.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ENTP
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
9) Philomene P. (female)
Learning Style: Visual Learner
Age: 45
Philomene is from Yaounde, Cameroon.
Enjoys organization and process improvement.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: ENFJ
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
10) Ogar O. (male)
Learning Style: Kinesthetic Learner
Age: 52
Ogar is from Lagos, Nigeria.
Enjoys being an actor and doing improve for a local theater.
Myers-Briggs Type Indicator: INTJ
Big Five-Personality Traits Results:
I need help with my 12000 word dissertation, what I need now is the chapter 1 – 3 comprising of 4500 word.
I have a review with by supervisor in less than 24hrs, so I need someone that can get it to me as soon as possible. I will invite the same tutor starting this work for other chapters and work regarding the dissertation until it’s completion.
The details of the Dissertation has been attached below.
The referencing style is Havard and should be no less than 45 references for these chapters.
Please go through the proposal before you begin and apply them to the work. please don’t forget to discuss about the retail organisation(ASDA) we’re focusing on in the Literature Review Chapter.
Also discuss about working capital management in the introduction section.
Please make sure there is a background information on the themes we’re explore in the research question and objectives in the ‘Introduction’ section.
I want an excellent work and will also need the details for my ethical clearance. Please go through the attachments before beginning.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
The format of your project may well vary dependent on the topic of your research and
discussions with your supervisor will be extremely helpful in this aspect of the
decision-making process. It is likely that your report will be made up of several key
sections.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Executive summary
Statement of originality and authenticity (see section 13 of this handbook)
Title page
Contents
Lists of figures and tables
Chapter 1: Introduction and context of the study
Chapter 2: Literature review
Chapter 3: Methodology
Chapter 4: Presentation of research findings
Chapter 5: Discussion of findings
Chapter 6: Conclusions and recommendations
Chapter 7: Reflections on developing your personal competence.
Reference list – Harvard Referencing Style
Appendix (to include evidence to support reflections)
For further guidance:
There should be an Executive Summary (approximately 200 words) at the beginning
which should review what has been covered and the main outcome proposed.
Chapter 1, Introduction, and context of the study. This should cover a strategic
overview developing and enhancing the first section of the proposal covering the
rationale for the project and its importance to an organisation or business sector. This
may be expressed in terms of sustaining competitive position or improving that position.
This section might usefully consider the subject from the threats, opportunities, and
business contextual factors. It should avoid too broad a scope. This might discuss
improvement to internal business processes: customer care, service quality,
improvement in skills and or organisation of resources etc. It might include better
service delivery, marketing strategies or identification of new markets and or products or
services to the external business environment. These are illustrative only.
(Approximately 500 words)
Chapter 2, Literature Review The work will include a robust and critical literature
review. The main purpose is to establish the important areas of research and enquiry
such that the project objectives can be achieved. It serves an important purpose in
expanding the body of knowledge that we have with which to understand current
performance and as a secondary base to build better informed practices for the future. It
should review both the academic literature and the empirical practices that
organisations operate. Your ability to shape the ideas and practices is one of the key
skills. It is not just a question of presenting other authors ideas without comment. The
better marks are to be achieved whereby you identify areas of difference and
consensus and from these works draw a strong conclusion as to what is important in
managing the area under review. The outcome is likely to have not much more than 4-6
key ideas and principles in the conclusions and will be framed around the question
‘what makes this a successful strategic business practice- and how can it be managed
effectively in practice’. These will be the areas you will further examine in your research.
This needs to be written in logical and coherent chapters that flow together. It should be
clear as to what is being covered and it should avoid extending into too many areas
otherwise critical depth is lost. The number of primary sources will vary. We expect a
good range of relevant and contemporary sources but the treatment of them is more
important than shear number. (Approximately 2000 words).
Chapter 3 Research Methodology The project must include a critical review of both
primary and secondary research methods that are possible but more importantly those
deployed in the project from the perspective of such things as selecting valid and
reliable sources of information against the objectives. Discussion of sample sizes and
drawing reliable conclusions). It should address specific tools used (interviews,
questionnaires, case studies etc.) and the various strengths of these and how they can
be best designed and used for the designated project. (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 4 Presentation of Research findings There must be a strong section which
presents and discusses the research findings from both primary and secondary sources
but emphasising new material collected specifically for the project. This section is
important as this is the area where you engage with new and original material that you
have collected, and the skills deployed here are definitive in terms of the scope final
assessment grade together with the recommendations. Data must be presented
systematically and structured clearly around tables – if appropriate- or in terms of
outcomes against the areas identified from the literature and linked back to project
objectives. (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 5 Discussion of Findings Having presented the data descriptively you will be
expected to interrogate the findings by asking questions of your information such as:
what is significant here, where is there key agreements between participants /sources
what the main areas of disagreement are, how does this information reflect the
outcomes (confirm or deny) from the literature review etc. What does this say about
important ideas to shape policy /strategy and its implementation. (Approximately 2000
words)
Chapter 6 Conclusion and Recommendations You will need a conclusion which
draws together the findings from your research and the literature review and start to
feedback and comment on the possibilities that now arise in terms of meeting the
objectives. It should shape the agenda and start to define what it is you now think can
be done. It should summarise main points and decide what stance you are taking with
respect to the practice /policies under review. It should flow naturally from the earlier
work. This section should not introduce new ideas or new debates even if you have
discovered new information! If this is the case earlier chapters need reworking.
(Approximately 1000 words)
Recommendations should follow the conclusions. At this stage you move away from a
research stance and adopt a leadership stance. Here you will advocate a possible
direction for the organisation or sector. It can be specific as to future strategy and policy
or it might offer an alternative view and scenario depending on particular future
contexts. It should be carefully presented in management terms. Imagine you are
presenting to a body of interested organisational managers with different levels of
commitment to what you are proposing! It should clearly state what issue / opportunity
is being addressed and the impact desired. It should state what should be done and it
should say something on the implementation around, resources, barriers, risk,
timescales, and organisation of the changes. It should not overly direct to further work
or decisions otherwise the project is likely to be overly ‘contextual ‘and general and not
solution driven. Again, no new ideas should be introduced here, and it should be clear
how the recommendations can be derived from the foregoing work. (Approximately 500
words).
Chapter 7 Reflections on developing your personal competence. This chapter
provides the opportunity for you to reflect on your programme experience and the
learning which has impacted on the development of your professional identity. Drawing
on evidence you have collated throughout the module you are to write a reflective
commentary which addresses the following: what were your initial motivations for
undertaking an MBA and what were the central components of your professional
identity during semester 1? What did you learn about yourself as a developing business
professional and how that learning will shape your future professional self?
(Approximately 2000 words)
The dissertation/project should be approximately 12000 words. However, the exact
make-up of the sections may vary. It is unlikely you will be able to meet the learning
outcomes in terms of depth and range of analysis in a study of less than 12000 words.
The remainder of the dissertation/project should comprise your research proposal (final)
and the reference list and appendices which evidence content in the main body of your
report. Appendices should be carefully selected. They should be referenced in the main
body of the study and should clearly relate to and provide further important reference for
the reader. They should not be included if they have no central bearing on the study or
simply a catalogue of all organisational information you can find.
Suggested Reading
The following is an indicative reading list for the module which can also be accessed
through the https://canvas.sunderland.ac.uk/courses/60205/external_tools/91537 link in
Canvas.
Bassot, B. (2016) The Reflective Journal. London: Palgrave.
Bolton, G. (2018) Reflective practice: writing and professional development. 5th edition.
London: SAGE.
Bell, E., Bryman, A. & Harley, B. (2019) Business Research Methods. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
Bradbury, H., Kilminster, S, Zukas, M. & Frost, N. (2010) Beyond Reflective Practice:
new approaches to professional lifelong learning. London: Routledge.
Collis, J. & Hussey, R. (2017) Business Research: a practical guide for undergraduate
and postgraduate students. 4th edition. London: Palgrave.
Denscombe, M. (2010) Ground rules for social research: guidelines for good practice.
2nd edition. Maidenhead: Open University Press.
Denscombe, M. (2017) The good research guide: for small-scale social research
projects. 6th edition. London: Open University Press.
Maylor, H. (2010) Project Management. Harlow: Financial Times Prentice Hall.
Maylor, H. (2017) Researching Business and Management. London: Palgrave.
Saunders, M, & Lewis, P. (2018) Doing research in business and management: an
essential guide to planning your project. 2nd edition. Harlow: Pearson.
Saunders, M.N.K., Lewis, P. & Thornhill, A. (2019) Research methods for Business
students. 8th edition. Harlow: Pearson.
Watson, G. & Reissner, S. (eds) (2014) Developing Skills for Business Leadership, 2nd
edition. London: Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development.
Williams, K., Woolliams, M. and Spiro, J. (2012) Reflective writing. Basingstoke,
Palgrave Macmillan.
In addition, it is expected that relevant journals will be consulted by students depending
upon the area of study and chosen topic.
Student Name/ID
Project Title
Supervisor Name
PGBM161 MBA Project Marking & Student Feedback – June 2023
Submission Date
Tasks/Expected marks
Presentational issues: [Mark 5%] Title page; Table of Contents; Abstract/Executive Summary (200 words) – what has been covered and the main
outcome(s); etc. Wordcount/12000 words. Reference list; Appendices including Research proposal (final version), Research Ethics approval letter.
Chapter 1, Introduction: [Mark 10%/500 words] context of the study; a strategic overview; rationale; importance to an organisation or business
sector; appropriate scope – key question(s) and objectives.
Chapter 2, Literature Review: [Mark 20%/2000 words]: robust, critical depth, logical, coherent, and focused; main purpose; important areas of
research and enquiry; project key question(s) and objectives; expanding the body of knowledge; review both the academic literature and the
empirical practices that organisations operate; areas of difference and consensus; conceptual framework based on 4-6 key ideas and principles; good
range of relevant and contemporary sources.
Chapter 3 Methodology: [Mark 15%/2000 words]: a critical review; primary and secondary research methods that are possible and deployed; valid
and reliable sources of information against objectives; sample sizes; research instruments (interviews, questionnaires, case studies etc.).
Chapter 4 Data analysis/presentation of findings: [Mark 15%/2000 words]: evidence of data analysis; presents and discusses the research findings
from both primary and secondary sources; emphasising new material collected specifically for the project; engaging with new and original material
collected; Data presented systematically and structured clearly around tables – if appropriate – or in terms of outcomes against the areas identified
from the literature and linked back to project objectives.
Chapter 5 Discussion of Findings: [Mark 15%] interrogates the findings by asking questions: what is significant? where is there key agreements
between participants /sources? what are the main areas of disagreement? how do the findings reflect the outcomes (confirm or deny) from the
literature review etc.? what does this say about important ideas to shape policy /strategy and its implementation? (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 6 Conclusion and Recommendations: [Mark 10%] 1/Conclusions (1000 words) draws together findings to answer key research
question(s)/objectives; defines what now can be done; summarises main points; decides what stance to be taken with respect to practices /policies;
avoids introducing new ideas/debates which would need reworking earlier chapters. 2/Recommendations (500 words) moves from a research stance
to a leadership stance; advocates a possible direction for the organisation/sector; carefully presented in management terms; clearly states what
issue / opportunity is being addressed and the impact desired; states what should be done and says something on implementation; resources,
barriers, risk, timescales, and organisation of changes; is solution driven; no new ideas introduced and is derived from the actual work done.
Chapter 7 Reflections on developing your personal competence: [Mark 10%/2000 words] programme experience/learning; professional identity;
evidence collated throughout the module; a reflective commentary: initial motivations for undertaking an MBA; central components of professional
identity during Semester 1; learning about self as a developing business professional; how the learning will shape future professional self.
Overall Marks/Comments [Mark 100%.]
First Marker Comments/Name/Date:
09 June 2023
Marker Comments
Marks %
Overall Module Mark (%)
Second Marker Comments/Name/Date:
Module Team: Yannis Smirnis; Yasshar Salamzadeh; Peter Coleman; Ryan Williams; Philip Arthur; Brian Ross; Steve Wharton; Iris Ren; Konstantinas Biginas; Elaine Crawford; Peter Asuata; Austin Okeke. Module
Leader: Dr Augustus Osseo-Asare.
2022-23 University of Sunderland, FBLT, Sunderland Business School.
Dear all,
I hope you are doing well. I deeply apologise about the feedback delay. I was unwell last week
and I have only recovered few days ago. Apologies in advance, this is a lengthy email. Please I
advise you all read thoroughly.
I am glad that I have provided feedback on everyone’s work. Well done everyone! I am glad that
you have made a good start with your research proposals and chapters.
While I read your proposals, I noticed some flaws which I want to highlight.
Research Topic: Everyone please review your research topic and make sure it is specific, clear
and concise. Some research topics are too broad and not properly crafted.
Research questions and objectives: Some of you had many research questions which were not
really relevant to your research topic. Some research objectives were also poorly formulated.
I have attached a link to a YouTube video which explains how to formulate Research aims,
objectives and questions:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9d3JOmCzfw&pp=ygU1aG93IHRvIHdyaXRlIHJlc2VhcmNoIHF1ZXN0aW9ucywgYWltcyBhbmQgb2Jq
ZWN0aXZlcyA%3D
Here is another link to a site which explains how to formulate Research questions, aims and
objectives:
https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=2
ahUKEwjitqKen_2BAxWGQkEAHXhMBMoQFnoECCUQAQ&url=https%3A%2F%2Fresearchmethodology.net%2Fresearch-methodology%2Fresearch-aims-andobjectives%2F&usg=AOvVaw3eNWsyzatt9dePmcAekYGz&opi=89978449
Please make sure you watch the YouTube video and read the article on research objectives
formulation. They will really help.
In order to write an excellent dissertation, you have to be knowledgeable. And so, it is important
to read so you can enhance your understanding and skills. I have attached a reading list to help
with this. The reading list is in the Dissertation Structure Word Document. I know I have sent it
before. Please look at it again and make sure you read at least one of these text books.
Referencing, Typographical and Grammatical errors: As I read through your proposals, I noticed
there were some in-text citation errors, typo and grammatical errors. Please always make sure
that you proof-read your work before submitting for review. Also, make sure that you follow the
Harvard Style of referencing. I have attached a PDF document of the referencing guide for your
use.
Methodology: I realised that some student’s methodology section was under-developed and
was not clear. There was no clarity regarding the appropriate choice of methodology, sampling
technique, method of data collection and data analysis techniques.
According to the MBA Dissertation Supervision Timeline, you should have started writing your
Literature Review and Methodology chapters. Also, you should be getting ready to apply for
ethical clearance. In order to apply for ethical clearance, you should know clearly your
methodological approach, sample population, sample size, method of data collection and data
analysis. Your method of data collection instrument (questionnaire or interview guide) should
also be ready.
Guidance on how to apply for ethical clearance is below. I have attached the links to the site.
Research ethics | The University of Sunderland
https://www.sunderland.ac.uk/more/research/research-governance-integrity/ethics/apply-ethicalreview/
A link to the template of a Consent Form and Participant information sheet is attached below:
https://www.sunderland.ac.uk/images/external-websites/www/research/helpsheets/RevisedConsent-and-PI-Sheet.pdf
Our next Supervision meeting will be on Microsoft Teams on Friday 20th October from 2-5pm. It
is a block meeting. I will spend 25 mins with each student. Please let us keep this in our
calendars and make sure we are available. If you will not be able to make it, please let me know
ahead of time. With respect to this meeting, please I want to see everybody’s Methodology
Chapter latest by 12 noon on Friday 20th October. Please submit this chapter to me via email.
I will send the Microsoft Teams invite soon. Please endeavour to accept the invite.
Thank you all for your cooperation and patience.
Looking forward to our meeting on Friday.
Kind regards,
1
UNIVERSITY OF SUNDERLAND
PGBM161
Project Proposal
The Role of Business Analytics in Enhancing Financial DecisionMaking within the Retail Sector: A Study of Working Capital
Analytics at ASDA
2
Introduction
This project proposal’s introduction explores business analytics’s crucial role in improving
financial decision-making procedures. In today’s dynamic and data-driven corporate
environment, businesses looking to maximize their financial plans must harness the power of
business analytics (Bayrak. T, 2015). The capacity to draw meaningful conclusions from massive
datasets has emerged as a critical success factor as the global business environment becomes
more complicated and competitive (Bennett et al., 2019). To increase profitability, risk
management, and strategic planning, this proposal intends to highlight the enormous impact of
skilled business analytics on financial decision-making (Chu and Yong, 2021).
Business analytics has the potential to provide valuable insights into various aspects of retail
operations, including working capital management which plays a crucial role in a retail
organization’s financial health. Working capital management encompasses factors such as
accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventory turnover, and the cash conversion cycle, all of
which are fundamental to the financial decision-making process in the retail sector.
In light of these factors, the proposal points out a significant research gap as indicated by recent
studies. Aaser and McElhaney (2021) emphasized the requirement for a thorough investigation
of how business analytics might be used to enable more informed and efficient financial
decisions in the retail industry. Their findings highlighted the need for further research in this
area, forming the basis for the proposed study. This proposal aims to address this research gap by
conducting a comprehensive research study in the area of business analytics and its impact on
financial decision-making within the retail industry. Through this research, I intend to make a
significant contribution to the existing literature. Additionally, it describes the project’s aim to
offer a nuanced comprehension of the complex connection between corporate analytics and
3
financial decision-making. The objectives, methodology, and anticipated contributions of this
research will be covered in detail in the following sections, giving a thorough overview of the
proposed study’s breadth and structure.
Background/brief literature review
The retail sector is at the cutting edge of a corporate environment that is continually changing
due to technological breakthroughs and shifting consumer habits. The profitability and longevity
of a retail business depend critically on its capacity to make knowledgeable and wise financial
decisions in this dynamic environment (Wang et al., 2020, p.387). Business analytics, which uses
predictive modelling, data visualization, and data-driven insights, has become essential for
improving financial decision-making in the retail industry.
Across industries, there has been a discernible transition over the past ten years from
conventional intuition-based decision-making to a more data-centric approach. This change has
particularly affected the retail industry because there are now unheard-of opportunities to gain a
deeper understanding of customer preferences, supply chain dynamics, inventory management,
pricing strategies, and overall performance metrics (Niu et al., 2021, p. 26). Due to this change,
business analytics are now critical in driving financial decision-making.
The growth of e-commerce and the digitization of consumer interactions have been critical
factors in the retail industry’s transition (Johnson et al., 2019). Vast volumes of data are produced
as customers interact with shops more frequently through online and mobile platforms, capturing
helpful information about browsing preferences, past purchases, and even sentiment analysis
through social media (Ain et al., 2019). Traditional brick-and-mortar stores have also embraced
technology, using tools like customer loyalty programs and point-of-sale systems that provide a
4
lot of data. As a result, merchants must now overcome the difficulty of deriving actionable
insights from multiple data sources, making business analytics essential.
Business analytics are used in many different areas of the retail industry. Understanding and
segmenting consumer demographics, behaviours, and preferences requires customer analytics.
With this data, retailers can customize their marketing plans, enhance their product lines, and
enhance the shopping experience, all of which impact their bottom lines. Supply chain analytics
improve demand forecasting accuracy while streamlining inventory management and lowering
operating expenses. Retailers can reduce the risk of stockouts or excess inventory by usin g
historical data and predictive modelling to make more educated decisions about purchasing,
warehousing, and distribution.
Additionally, pricing analytics allows businesses to improve pricing plans based on rival pricing,
customer sensitivity, and previous sales information. Real-time price adjustments can be made
using dynamic pricing algorithms to increase sales and profit margins. Business analytics also
assists in risk management and fraud detection by spotting odd transaction patterns and potential
holes in the payment system. The enormous influence of business analytics on financial decisionmaking within the retail industry has been highlighted by numerous studies. According to
Ahmad et al.’s study (2020, p. 26), a big retail chain’s sales revenue increased by 15% due to
customer analytics. The same may be said about Chaudhary and Alam’s (2022) discussion of
how supply chain analytics lowered inventory holding costs by 12% while upholding high
service levels. These findings underline the potential of business analytics to drive tangible
financial benefits.
In conclusion, technology breakthroughs and changing consumer dynamics are driving a
transformational period in the retail industry. Retailers may now harness the power of data for
5
insights that cover customer behaviour, supply chain management, pricing strategies, and risk
mitigation, thanks to the development of business analytics (Lee et al., 2020, p. 287). Leveraging
business analytics offers retailers a competitive advantage that can result in increased financial
performance and long-term growth as they strive to succeed in a market that is becoming
increasingly competitive. Focusing on its procedures, difficulties, and ability to change financial
results, this research project attempts to look deeper into the varied role of business analytics
within the retail industry.
Research questions and objectives
Research Question:
1.
How does the integration of data analytics in working capital management impact the
financial decision-making of retail organisations?
Research Objectives:
1.
To examine the impact of data analytics on ASDA’s working capital management and its
influence on financial decision-making in the retail sector.
2.
To identify and evaluate the methods and techniques employed by ASDA in integrating
data analytics to enhance working capital management.
3.
To identify the main trends and patterns revealed by data analytics in working capital
components, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventory turnover, and the cash
conversion cycle in the retail industry.
6
4.
To employ data analytics approaches, specifically focusing on variables related to
working capital components such as accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventory turnover,
and the cash conversion cycle, to assess trends, connections, and potential areas for improvement
within these working capital elements in the retail industry.
5.
To evaluate the financial and operational performance of ASDA before and after
implementing data analytics in their working capital management.
Methodology
Research Design: This study will primarily utilize a quantitative data analysis approach.
Secondary data sources will be the primary focus for gathering quantitative information related
to working capital components, financial performance, and data analytics integration within the
retail industry. This approach will streamline the research process, allowing for more efficient
data analysis. The study will rely on publicly available financial reports, annual reports, and
relevant databases to gather numerical data related to working capital components, as mentioned
in the research objectives with a specific focus on ASDA. These sources will provide the
necessary quantitative data to analyze working capital components, financial performance, and
other relevant variables.
Quantitative analysis will involve statistical techniques, such as regression and trend analysis, to
investigate the relationships between data analytics and working capital management in the retail
sector.
Data Collection: Data Collection for this study will primarily involve the utilization of
quantitative data analysis methods with a specific focus on ASDA within the retail industry. The
gathered data will be subjected to rigorous statistical analysis, including regression and trend
7
analysis. This quantitative data analysis will allow us to identify patterns, correlations, and trends
related to working capital management and financial decision-making. As a retail organization,
ASDA provides a wealth of financial and operational data that can be extracted from publicly
available sources, including financial reports, annual reports, and pertinent databases. The
quantitative analysis will center around examining working capital measurements and their
relationship to data analytics integration, with ASDA as the primary case study.
This approach ensures the efficient use of available data sources and aligns with the research’s
focus on working capital management, data analytics, and their impact on financial decisionmaking within the retail sector.
Time scale-Gantt chart:
Tasks
1. Literature Review
2. Research Design &
Month 1
✓
Month
Month
Month
Month
Month
2
3
4
5
6
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Framework
3. Ethics Approval (if
✓
applicable)
4. Quantitative Data
Collection
5. Qualitative Data
Collection
✓
8
✓
6. Data Analysis
✓
(Quantitative)
✓
7. Data Analysis
(Qualitative)
✓
8. Integration &
Synthesis
9. Writing Draft
✓
✓
✓
Chapters
10. Review & Revision
✓
11. Final Editing &
✓
Proofreading
12. Submission of
Research Project
The Gantt chart above shows a thorough timeline for the various stages of the research proposal.
The timetable covers vital activities, including literature reviews, study designs, data collection
(quantitative and qualitative), data analysis, synthesis, and the final preparation and submission
of the research proposal over six months. The tasks are arranged and sequentially scheduled in
the timetable to guarantee that the research proposal is successfully finished within the allotted
time.
Resources
9
Given the reliance on quantitative analysis and secondary data, resource allocation will focus on
data access and the acquisition of hardware and software resources. The allocation of resources
will be streamlined as follows:
Data Access: Securing access to pertinent primary and secondary data sources is critical.
Resources will be directed towards procuring and licensing data sets, ensuring a robust
foundation for quantitative analysis.
Hardware and Software: Adequate hardware and software resources will be essential for data
analysis. This includes the acquisition of statistical tools, data analysis software, and computing
equipment to support the quantitative analysis process.
10
11
References
Aaser, M. and McElhaney, D., 2021. Harnessing the power of external data. McKinsey Digital.
Ain, N., Vaia, G., DeLone, W.H. and Waheed, M., 2019. Two decades of research on business
intelligence system adoption, utilization and success–A systematic literature review. Decision
Support Systems, 125, p.113113.
Ahmad, S., Miskon, S., Alabdan, R. and Tlili, I., 2020. Towards sustainable textile and apparel
industry: Exploring the role of business intelligence systems in the era of industry 4.0.
Sustainability, 12(7), p.26.
Bayrak, T., 2015. A review of business analytics: A business enabler or another passing fad.
Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 195, pp.230-239.
Bennett, R., Smith, H., Van Lieshout, C., Montebruno, P. and Newton, G., 2019. The age of
entrepreneurship: Business proprietors, self-employment and corporations since 1851.
Routledge.
Chaudhary, K. and Alam, M., 2022. Big data analytics: applications in business and marketing.
Auerbach Publications.
Chu, M.K. and Yong, K.O., 2021. Big data analytics for business intelligence in accounting and
audit. Open Journal of Social Sciences, 9(9), pp.42-52
Johnson, D.S., Muzellec, L., Sihi, D. and Zahay, D., 2019. The marketing organization’s journey
to become data-driven. Journal of Research in Interactive Marketing, 13(2), pp.162-178.
Lee, M., Cai, Y.M., DeFranco, A. and Lee, J., 2020. Exploring influential factors affecting guest
satisfaction: Big data and business analytics in consumer-generated reviews. Journal of
Hospitality and Tourism Technology, 11(1), pp.137-153.
12
Niu, Y., Ying, L., Yang, J., Bao, M. and Sivaparthipan, C.B., 2021. Organizational business
intelligence and decision making using big data analytics. Information Processing &
Management, 58(6), p.10-25.
Wang, Z., Wang, N., Su, X. and Ge, S., 2020. An empirical study on business analytics
affordances enhancing the management of cloud computing data security. International Journal
of Information Management, 50, pp.387-394.
Citing and Referencing:
Harvard Style
Contents
1.
What is referencing?
1
2.
Why should I reference?
1
5.9 Citing from works with no obvious author
6
3.
What should I reference?
2
5.10 Citing from multimedia works
6
4.
What is a citation?
2
5.11 Citing from an interview or personal communication
6
5.
How do I write citations using
the Harvard style?3
5.12 Tips on good quotation practice
7
6.
How do I write a reference?
9
How do I write a reference list?
12
5.8 Citing an image/illustration/table/diagram/
pho
ASSIGNMENT #
PROCUREMENT PROCESS
October 3, 2023
OVERVIEW
1. Assignment Background and Description
In assignment 2, you should have created the required documentation to conduct procurements for the Punta Cana Pier Project.
The documentation could be in the form of a RFP, RFQ, or RFI, or a combination of these documents. The documents created
would depend on the resource that needs to be procured, and the technical details available.
For this assignment, you will map out the process for conducting the procurements. You will use MS Project to create a detailed
WBS of the tasks required to conduct the procurements, control the procurements, and close the procurements.
2. Procurement Strategy
As your organization (True North Construction) does not have a clearly defined procurement process, you will use the Punta Cana
Pier Project as an opportunity to define the process. The process you define will become the organizations initial procurement
process and will be used for procurements on future projects. It will become an organizational process asset, and will be subject to
updates and revision in future projects
Senior management has also requested that you track any costs associated with defining the procurement process, as well as the
costs associated with executing the process.
3. Deliverables
•
•
•
•
•
•
A title page that include the names of all group members.
An MS Project file that details all the steps required to complete and close the procurements.
Supporting procurement documents for each procurement. This may include RFP, RFQ, RFI, PSOW, checklists, and
performance reports. Please review the book of forms for any documents that may assist you in your procurement
process.
A group activity log that clearly outlines which team members contributed to the assignment, how much time it took, and
any tools & techniques used.
All resources posted on the course Moodle page (PRM1006) are consider organizational process assets, and can be
freely used in your assignment
Please ensure you cite the sources of information in your assignment. You can use this site as a guide on how to properly
cite your sources: http://www.plagiarism.org/article/how-do-i-cite-sources
4. Due Tuesday, October 17th, 2023
Your team’s assignment needs to be submitted in MS Word and MS Project.
Please note that your assignment submission may be used as a resource in a future assignment (excluding the title page and
anything that would identify the authors)
If you have not submitted your individual signed Student Academic Integrity form, you will not be given your grade for the
assignment in eGrades.
1
Hancock Village
789 units
Average rent of $2,655 per unit per month
Loss to Lease (2.5%)
Vacancy (4.75%)
Other Income $1,172 per unit (annual figure)
Expenses PER UNIT (Annual)
Real Estate Taxes
Property Insurance
Natural Gas
Electricity
Water & Sewer
Trash Removal
Administrative & General
Repairs & Maintenance
Painting & Decorating
Grounds
Management Fee
Admin Payroll
Maintenance Payroll
Employee Taxes & Benefits
Advertising & Leasing
Replacement Reserves
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
2,823
300
729
120
760
150
175
850
300
400
615
300
600
100
350
250
Determine NOI. Based on the info below (which is not much) determine the value using the
income capitalization approach.
Using information from the sales comparison approach, determine a value for the property.
Pick a manufacturing corporation that is listed on a major stock exchange such as Dubai Stock Exchange, Abu Dhabi Stock Exchange, New York Stock Exchange, London Stock Exchange, etc……. Download the most recent financial statements for two consecutive years (2021 and 2022). Conduct a financial statement analysis for the company using the financial information for years 2021 and 2022. The analysis should cover the following categories of ratios: Liquidity, Long Term Solvency, Turn Over (Asset Management), Profitability, Market Value and Du-Pont Analysis.The report should cover the following points: Business description. 300 words Industry overview and competitive positioning. 400 words Comparative Financial analysis for the two consecutive years (2021 and 2022) in relation to the industry average or main competitor. (Conduct a financial statement analysis for the company using the financial information for years 2021 and 2022. The analysis should cover the following categories of ratios: Liquidity, Long Term Solvency, Turn Over (Asset Management), Profitability, Market Value and Du-Pont Analysis) Summary. 300 words References (15 refs)
As a leader in your field(limo service), you will likely be involved in diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) efforts in your organization. This will have implications for how you behave as a leader.
Write a 350- to 525-word analysis discussing the leadership implications of embracing diversity, equity, and inclusion in the workplace. In your analysis, explain how you will establish yourself as a leader of DEI efforts using the Scholar-Practitioner-Leader model.
Note: A well-structured scholarly paragraph contains 3–5 sentences. Please refer to the MEAL Plan as a guide. Avoid the use of first-person language. You will be writing this analysis from a third-person perspective.
Incorporate feedback from previous weeks.
Include APA-formatted in-text citations and references. Include a minimum of three peer reviewed articles.
Format your analysis according to current APA guidelines. Use the attached APA pre-formatted template template.
APA-Paper-Template-Doctoral-Level7-11-23.docx
Note: Remember to proofread your document, including grammar, punctuation, citations, and formatting.
View the attached rubric prior to submitting your assignment.
RubricWk6Assign9-5-23.docx
Submit your assignment as a Microsoft Word document.
Please see the attached document and solve the questions:- APA format.- 400 words for each question. – Be sure to cover and answer all the parts of the question.
By: Group 4
z
Non-Compete
Agreements are
positive…
(for business)
z
What is it?
▪
Non-Compete agreements are clause
contracts that specify that an employee
cannot enter in competition with that firm
after the employment period.
▪
(These vary depending on state)
▪
This includes working for competitors of the
same market and or starting a business in
the same market.
▪
It gives business the power of a former
employee’s next work destination by limiting
the fields he or she can work for.
z
Why it’s
positive for
Business?
▪
It gives business the power
to control the former
employee’s choice of work
post employment.
▪
It reduces the risk of
competition from potential
threats.
▪
Since the employees know
the ins and outs of your
business, this reduces
threats heavily!
z
About NCAs
▪
Overall, they are uncommon with
only 18% of employees being
subject to a NCA within the last 2
years
▪
38% of employees have
said they have dealt with
a NCA throughout their working
career
▪
On average 70% of
companies that used
NCAs required employees to
sign them
z
Why could it be bad?
▪
Noncompete agreements typically ▪
are worse for the employee
comparatively to the business
Only 11.4% of employees currently
are under noncompete
agreements
▪
This can stop employees from
▪
potentially searching for other jobs
or from even starting their own
businesses
▪
Overall, non-compete agreements
are bad for employees because of
the fact they can limit their wages
along with making it difficult to find
a job after the previous
The FTC estimates that by
banning NCAs from businesses
they can increase wages by
upwards of $300 billion per year
z
z
z
WORKS CITED
▪
https://www.shrm.org/resourcesandtools/legal-and-compliance/employmentlaw/pages/states-restrictnoncompetes.aspx#:~:text=Eighteen%20percent%20of%20U.S.%20workers,Gove
rnment%20Accountability%20Office%20(GAO).
▪
https://www.gao.gov/products/gao-23-103785
▪
https://www.ftc.gov/news-events/news/press-releases/2023/01/ftc-proposes-ruleban-noncompete-clauses-which-hurt-workers-harm-competition
This assignment is about a case study, so please answer the questions after reading it.There are 5 questions and under question number 2 there are multiple parts related to them.All answers don’t have a limited number, but I expect you to write exhaustively and please check the grammar constantly while writing.Also, the references should exist, and the similarity ratio must be Zero percent, I order you to copy and paste the references properly, so they don’t have hyperlinks.The Assignment file and the Case Study are below.If there is a problem, you can ask me.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
Case Study
When the CEO Dies,
What Comes First:
His Company or His
Family?
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
HBR’s fictionalized case studies present problems faced
by leaders in real companies and offer solutions from
experts. This one is based on the Xavier Institute of Business
Administration Case Study “The Turnaround of Café Coffee
Day,” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha, which is available on SSRN.com.
144
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
I N THE B OARD RO OM , Priya
Gowda greeted four men in
suits—the creditors of her
husband, Partha, who had died
suddenly of a heart attack 10
days earlier. She felt numb and
exhausted—but also strangely
reassured by the setting. The past
week 1 had been spent dealing
with the funeral home, lawyers,
the media, and grieving family
members. She had barely slept or
eaten. But here, in the headquarters of Splendid Ice Cream, the
business she’d watched Partha
build from a small dairy farm into
a major Indian conglomerate, she
felt his energy animating her.
As sole heir to his majority
stake in the private company,
Priya was now its de facto CEO
and chairperson, responsible for
a diverse portfolio that included
hotels, real estate, and venture
capital investments as well as
dairies and ice-cream shops.
However, she’d learned only the
day before from Splendid’s lead
accountant that the company
was in a precarious financial
position owing to huge debts her
late husband had hidden from
his investors and from her. Over
the past year he’d been taking out
short-term, high-interest loans in
the form of debentures to pay off
Illustrations by ANUJ SHRESTHA
EXPERIENCE
long-term debt. Stress over the
firm’s finances had contributed to
his death, she suspected.
“Thank you all for coming
today,” Priya ventured cautiously.
“I wish we were visiting under
different circumstances,” replied
Vijay Gupta, the president of a
local bank. “We were all shocked
by Mr. Gowda’s death. 2 He was a
visionary entrepreneur. He was
also our friend and partner. But
he left behind a lot of debt, which
is why we’re here today.”
Priya opened the document
the creditors had prepared.
She had seen the figures the
day before, but they were still
shocking. While Splendid’s core
ice-cream business had been
growing steadily and profitably,
thanks to young urban Indian
consumers with global tastes and
disposable income, the broader
company now encompassed
more than 40 subsidiaries,
many of which were in the red.
Partha had clearly been trying to
channel funds from his cash cow
into unrelated ventures, but he’d
taken on excess leverage, and the
company now faced a liquidity
crisis and was struggling to find
the money to cover high interest
payments, taxes, and legal fees.
It had a net debt to EBITDA
ratio of seven—well above the
four considered a threshold for
concern. And loans worth more
than 40 million rupees would
soon come due.
“Priya, I’m sorry to be the one
to tell you this, but we must face
the music,” Vijay said. “You need
to find new sources of capital,
sell Splendid to a buyer willing to
take on the debt, or liquidate the
business.”
Coming into the meeting,
Priya hadn’t been sure what she
wanted to do. So it surprised
her when she blurted out, “No.
I’m not willing to give up my
husband’s legacy. I can save
this company. If you push me to
liquidate it, you’ll get pennies on
the dollar. Give me time, and I’ll
pay off 85% of the debt. All I ask is
that you freeze interest payments
for 24 months.”
Vijay leaned back. “Would
you give us a few moments?” he
asked. Priya nodded but didn’t
budge. This was Splendid’s boardroom—she had no intention
of vacating it. Vijay smiled and
signaled to the other executives
that they should leave the room
with him. A few moments later
the group returned. “We agree
in principle,” said Vijay. “We just
ask to see your plan in writing
and that you keep us regularly
updated on your progress.”
After showing the men out,
Priya sat down at the conference
table. She felt a steely resolve
building inside her. Opening
her laptop, she began typing her
first memo to Splendid’s 25,000
employees as their leader.3
“Dear colleagues,” she wrote.
“Splendid has a legacy worth
preserving….”
THE FAMILY’S PLEA
After all the heartache, today
was to be a happy day. Three
months after Partha’s death, his
and Priya’s younger daughter,
Anjali, was getting married. As
Priya and her older daughter,
Garima, watched, Anjali sat on
the hotel bed while a makeup
artist attended to her Solah
Shringar, the Indian beautifi
cation ritual.
When a mobile ringtone
sounded, the sisters looked up
in alarm. “Ah, this is our PR
firm,” Priya said. “It’s about that
article on our turnaround in
Business Today. I know I said no
work today, but I really should
take this, since it will go to press
tomorrow, and I need to make
sure they have all the facts
straight. It will just take a min—”
Suddenly, Anjali stood, tears
welling up in her eyes. “Garima,
please take the phone from Mom.”
Case Study
Classroom
Notes
1. Some argue
that demands
on grieving
workers are
unrealistic and
that firms don’t
make enough
allowances for
mourning. In
2016, for example, U.S. employees received,
on average, four
days of bereavement leave.
2. Grief.com’s
David Kessler
says to avoid
these phrases
with colleagues
who have lost
loved ones: “She
lived a long life.”
“I know how you
feel.” “Aren’t you
over him yet?
He’s been dead
a while.” “You can
still have another
child/remarry.”
“Be strong.”
3. While 20% of
all businesses in
India are owned
by women, they
are overwhelmingly singleperson enterprises, and many
are in fact controlled by men.
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
145
4. At what point
is it irresponsible
to continue a
doomed business? Should
an entrepreneur
always fight to
keep a business
alive?
5. In 2012, an
Australian
palliative care
nurse published
a book about
the five most
common regrets
her patients
expressed at
the end of their
lives. In the top
five was “I wish
I hadn’t worked
so hard.”
146
Her sister sighed, reached
over, and hit dismiss on the
screen.
Confused, Priya looked back
and forth between them. Now
Anjali was crying.
“Mom, I’ve hardly seen you for
months. I know how much you
want to save Splendid—and dad’s
legacy. But it’s all you’ve thought
or talked about since he passed.
You’re running yourself ragged.
Today is my wedding day, so for
once could we focus on something other than the company?”
Priya felt herself stiffen. “I’m
just trying to keep the business
going, to honor your father…”
“We know, Mom,” Garima
chimed in, with more melancholy
than anger. “But Anjali is right.
And liquidating the business
would give you more than enough
to retire and even an inheritance
to pass on to us and your grandkids 4 one day.” Garima had two
sons in preschool, and Anjali had
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
long joked that she planned to
get pregnant on her honeymoon.
“There’s no guarantee that you
can rescue Splendid, and if you
do, it will take years and years,”
Garima continued. “Do you
really want to spend your sixties
in business meetings instead
of with family and friends? 5
How much have you seen your
grandsons lately? Have you done
any walking with your neighborhood ladies? Are you sleeping
at all? We’re worried about your
health. And we can’t lose another
parent.” Now tears dripped down
her face, too.
“You’re not going to lose me,”
Priya said, pulling both daughters into a hug. “Don’t cry, my
sweeties. You’re right that the
business can and should wait
for today—and other days, too.
I’ll try to be less single-minded
going forward. But don’t discount your old mom, either. I’m
tougher than you think.” She
untangled one arm and flexed it
like a bodybuilder to get Anjali
and Garima to smile. When they
did, she patted them each on
the back. “OK, now. Let’s not
keep our guests and the groom
waiting!”
THE COO’S UPDATE
Priya sat in her office and looked
at the financial documents
in front of her. In her 40-year
marriage to Partha, the pattern
had always been the same. He
would charm everyone he met
and regularly bring new friends
home for dinner, staying up into
the small hours of the morning
eating, drinking, and laughing
with them. Then, when they were
gone and Partha slept, Priya and
her household staff would do the
cleaning up.
And now it seemed he had left
her another mess to deal with at
Splendid. So what was driving
her to mop it up? Love for her
husband? Marital duty? Resentment? The need to tie things off
and move on from him?
She heard a knock at the door.
It was Tasneem Rangwala,
Splendid’s long-standing COO,6
who had been increasingly
sidelined in the last few years of
Partha’s tenure—something that
should have been a warning sign
to Priya and the board. Talented
and honest, Tasneem wouldn’t
have signed off on the highinterest debt.
Now, however, she was Priya’s
right-hand woman, having
helped articulate the turnaround
vision and begun to execute on
it with enthusiasm. The duo
had worked tirelessly to sell
off noncore assets, cut costs,
renegotiate debt, and streamline
operations while also trying to
reinvigorate the company’s core
business by opening new stores,
replacing displays, and launching
a campaign to reaffirm Splendid’s
position as India’s favorite icecream brand. Tasneem had also
brought some new ideas to the
table, such as diversifying into
cold chain logistics—the transport of temperature-sensitive
products—which could not only
create a new revenue stream
for Splendid but also help solve
India’s food waste problem.
“Is now still a good time to
discuss the latest financial statements?” Tasneem asked.
“Of course,” Priya said. “Let’s
sit together on the sofa.”
Tasneem opened her laptop
and pulled up a spreadsheet.
There was some good news.
The net debt to EBITDA ratio
had dropped from seven to
five. Revenue had increased by
8%. Customer satisfaction had
improved by 20%. However, the
company’s operating margin
had decreased by 2% because of
higher costs associated with the
turnaround, and cash reserves
were dwindling.
Priya sighed, thinking back
to Garima’s questions about how
long it would take to turn around
Splendid—and if it could even be
saved. “Tasneem, what do you see
as our next steps?”
“I think we’re making slow
but steady progress, so we should
keep on our path. We still have a
few more real estate holdings and
noncore interests to sell off—we
just need to wait for the right
buyers. We can set up meetings
with the bankers to walk them
through our thinking, and I think
they’ll see that we’re nearly on
track to meet your 85%-in-twoyears promise. In the meantime
I wonder whether it’s time for us
to work up a pitch deck for the
cold chain idea, 7 organize a road
show, and drum up some fresh
capital.”
Priya’s phone dinged with
a text message. It was Garima.
6. In 2000,
48% of S&P 500
companies had
a COO; by 2018
only 32% did.
But COOs are
making a comeback. As of 2022,
40% of leading
companies had
one, and the
role has become
bigger and more
transformative,
according to
McKinsey.
7. Should a
struggling business continue
to try to innovate
and invest
in R&D?
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
147
EXPERIENCE
“Can you still babysit tonight?
We need to leave for our dinner
in a half hour.”
Priya looked at her watch and
felt a surge of guilt. She’d lost
track of time and would have to
leave within the next 10 minutes
to get to her daughter’s house
when she’d promised to. “On my
way!” she texted back.
“Tasneem, I’m so sorry. Can we
pick this up tomorrow?”
“Sure,” the COO responded.
“Shall I go ahead and set up a
meeting with Vijay for later this
week? And with the REIT that was
interested in acquiring the technology park? And start putting
together that pitch deck?”
Priya felt a wave of exhaustion
wash over her but mustered a
smile as she responded, “Yes,
please do. Thank you.”
After the COO left, Priya
hastily gathered her things from
her desk but then found herself
pausing to stare at a framed
picture of Partha. She realized
she hadn’t wept since he’d died—
not even tears of joy at Anjali’s
wedding.
“I’m still mad at you, but I love
you and miss you,” she said to
the photo, a sob catching in her
throat. “So tell me, Partha: What
do you want me to do?”
C. MARIA REX SUGIRTHA is
an assistant professor of
finance and HR at Xavier Institute
of Business Administration (XIBA),
St. Xavier’s College (Autonomous),
in Tirunelveli, India.
148
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
Should Priya try to save
Splendid, let it go, or find
a third way?
The experts respond.
CHARLES READ
is the president and
CEO of GetPayroll.
Priya faces a hard choice:
liquidate or sell the firm,
which could make her
relatively wealthy, or strive
to save it and upset her
daughters.
Liquidation seems like the easy choice,
but it would have its own set of repercussions. In India bankruptcy has a
significant social stigma and often
leads to personal and professional
ostracism. But more than that, I sense
that saving the company is Priya’s true
calling. Too often talented women opt
out of leadership roles because of family
responsibilities or societal expectations.
If Priya steps away from the company, it
will be a loss not only for her personally
but also for the business world.
That isn’t to say her journey will be
easy. I’ve faced the profound grief of
surviving the loss of both my wife and
my daughter while running a company.
I also know the stress of managing a
cash-strapped business. Navigating all
that at once requires immense strength
and resilience. I cannot emphasize
enough the importance of self-care in
this context. For instance, I know from
my own experience that Priya is likely
to find dates like Partha’s birthday and
their wedding anniversary overwhelming, so it might be best to avoid being in
the office on such days. The good news
is that it does get easier. The sun continues to rise. Life overtakes mourning.
In addition, as a widow Priya might
be able to open hearts and doors for
Splendid that would otherwise be
closed. Her creditors are human and
not impervious to her situation. Their
sympathy could translate into increased
patience, giving her an advantage in
the quest to save the company. Priya
should set up regular meetings or calls
with them—perhaps weekly or monthly.
You want to overcommunicate with
creditors; never hide from them.
Most important, Priya needs to have
an open and honest conversation with
her daughters. They may yearn for her
to assume the role of doting nani
(grandmother), but she seems drawn
to a different path. She needs to explain
to them that she has chosen to be a
warrior. She loves them dearly and will
make time for them on Diwali, birthdays, and other special occasions, but
for now she is primarily focused on the
business. This is not a negation of her
affection for them but a testament to her
strength and determination to carry on
her late husband’s legacy.
SARAHJANE SACCHETTI
is the chief business
officer of Cleo.
Priya’s focus on firefighting
to save Splendid, while
commendable, is causing
her to neglect the task of
reforming its governance,
the most important step to
getting it back on track.
To start with, a detailed report that
exposes the root causes of the company’s missteps is needed. Unanswered
questions, such as how Partha’s actions
went unchecked and why his COO felt
voiceless, must be addressed. That will
pave the way for an environment with
greater transparency and accountability
and a “no surprises” rule.
Second, it’s vital for Priya to avoid
the myth of a corporate savior, which
led Partha (and Splendid) astray and
could recur if she’s not careful. Instead
of heroics, she should invest in building
a strong team that can work to prevent
misconduct and ensure higher levels of
transparency. Private companies that
let charismatic founders run unchecked
often become cautionary tales, as
Theranos and FTX illustrate.
She should also consider a co-CEO
model. That approach was instrumental
for me when I had to step back from my
CEO role and become a caregiver for a
parent with ALS. I’d recommend that
the co-CEO be an external hire—someone from industry who can bring a fresh
perspective and dilute the cult of personality that grew up around Partha and
could be re-created with Priya. While
this move may risk alienating Tasneem,
it will prepare the organization for
future contingencies and transitions.
Last, Priya’s determination to shoulder the burden of Splendid’s survival
is not only damaging to her health and
family but also potentially detrimental
to the company. Traditional perspectives might suggest that she should just
lean in to the work and let her mental
INCLUDES CUSTOMIZABLE TOOLS AND
and family healthTEMPLATES
suffer, but
soFORMATS
IN doing
MULTIPLE
can be unsustainable for her and risky
for the business. The fact is, about
70% of U.S. caregivers are women, and
the percentage is even higher in other
countries. Rethinking the executive
team with a sustainable model is a
solution that can help all leaders—not
just female ones—balance competing
demands and future-proof a company.
At Splendid it might better ensure longterm success.
HBR Reprint R2305M
Reprint Case only R2305X
Say Goodbye
to Boring
Presentations
special
collection
How good are your charts?
HBR’s Good Charts for
Persuasive Presentations
Set helps you turn plain
charts into smart, effective
visualizations that engage
your audience and convey
your ideas. Building good
charts is a must-have skill
for managers.
Good Charts for Persuasive
Presentations Set: How to Use
the Best Data Visualizations
for Great Presentations
PRODUCT #1083BN • 3 EBOOKS + TOOLS
$115 • DIGITAL FORMAT
A savings of more than 10% off the
individual components!
Reprint Commentary only R2305Z
AVAILABLE EXCLUSIVELY AT:
store.hbr.org
1-800-988-0886 OR +1-617-783-7500
Copyright 2023 Harvard Business Publishing. All Rights Reserved. Additional restrictions
may apply including the use of this content as assigned course material. Please consult your
institution’s librarian about any restrictions that might apply under the license with your
institution. For more information and teaching resources from Harvard Business Publishing
including Harvard Business School Cases, eLearning products, and business simulations
please visit hbsp.harvard.edu.
Summarize and Reaction the readings (1,2,3,4,) Grant, A. M., & Pollock, T. G. (2011). From the Editors_Publishing in AMJ-Part 3: Setting the Hook. Academy of Management Journal, 54(5), 873-879. https://journals.aom.org/doi/epub/10.5465/amj.2011.4000The craft of research: chapter 16 (Page: 196 – 208)https://www.sagepub.com/sites/default/files/upm-binaries/48274_ch_3.pdfLinks to an external site.https://libguides.usc.edu/writingguide/theoreticalframeworkLinks to an external site. ***There are two main parts to the summary: *** 1. Summary of each chapter/article: Includes Title of Article, Author(s), Source, and Date of Article using APA style. In your OWN WORDS describe what the article is about, with major details or points, and should be easy to read (i.e. interesting and flow well!) 2. Reaction: Briefly describe the implications to scholars in academia (so what? in what ways you can utilize the ideas in the readings in your professional development as a scholar). ***Use easy words and easy Sentence***
Explain the research design and methods that will be used to address the business problem you identified in Milestone One (Attached, please keep in mind the information that was lacking), justifying why they are appropriate for your research study. To support your research design, describe the methods you will use, the key variables, and ethical considerations involved in using the research design. (Rubric Attached) Here is a link to better understand the dependent and independent variables: https://www.khanacademy.org/math/pre-algebra/pre-algebra-equations-expressions/pre-algebra-dependent-independent/a/dependent-and-independent-variables-reviewCiting Author(s)/Sources: It is essential that you provide attribution to the materials you use in the discussion posting. When you use other people’s work, you must cite the authors/sources in the text and provide a reference(s) in the APA 7th edition format. When you summarize or rephrase other people’s work then you must cite the authors/sources making sure that the meaning of what the authors/sources describe is maintained. If the text you are writing is verbatim from other people’s work then it must be in double quotation marks.Referencing: References must be in the APA 7th edition format. Do not assume that someone who referenced an article has correctly used the APA 7th edition format. For assessment of references, refer to the grading criteria for “Writing” as described in the weekly discussion rubrics.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1=11 ►
Guidelines and Rubric
Overview
Explain the research design and methods that will be used to address the business problem you identified, justifying why they are appropriate for your research study. To support your
research design, describe the methods you will use, the key variables, and ethical considerations involved in using the research design.
Prompt
Explain how you will carry out your research. Remember that your business problem should be able to be addressed using action research.
Specifically the following critical elements must be addressed:
Research Design:
A. Explain the research design and methods you will use, justifying why they are appropriate for your research study.
B. Describe the key variables from primary and/or secondary data sources that you will use to analyze your research problem.
C. Explain the key dependent and independent variables. In other words, how would the independent variables predict, explain, or prove the dependent variable?
D. Explain the key ethical considerations for using these data sources, including how they meet legal and professional standards.
What to Submit
Your milestone must be submitted as a 5- to 7-page Microsoft Word document with double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, one-inch margins, and at least three sources cited in APA
format.
Milestone Two Rubric
Criteria
Proficient (100%)
Needs Improvement (75%)
Not Evident (0%)
Value
Research Design: Research
Design and Methods
Explains the research design and methods
that will be used, including justification of
why this is appropriate for the study
Explains the research design and methods
that will be used, but explanation is cursory,
contains issues of clarity, or does not justify
why this is appropriate for the study
Does not explain the research design and
methods that will be used
20
1
LACKED:
Analysis of Maruti Suzuki India Business Problem and Literature Review
Name
Institution
Course
Instructor
Date
2
Introduction
The Indian automotive industry has witnessed unprecedented growth and transformation
in the past decades, with Maruti Suzuki ranking top among the dominant automobile
manufacturers in the A-segment, which is made up of small and compact vehicles. Nevertheless,
the company’s longstanding market dominance has been challenged in recent years by new
entrants as well as existing competitors. The changing competitive landscape and consumer
preferences, particularly in the A-segment, are responsible for Maruti Suzuki’s declining market
supremacy in India. As such, the company needs an immediate reassessment of its business
strategies to maintain and enhance its market dominance.
Context and Problem Statement
In retrospect, Maruti Suzuki’s journey in the Indian automotive industry dates back to
1983, when the company, together with the Indian government, agreed to a joint venture.
Consequently, Maruti Suzuki’s market dominance and subsequent supremacy have soared over
the years, particularly in the A-segment, enjoying over a 50 percent market share in India
(Becker-Ritterspach, 2009). However, recent developments within the A-segment of India’s
automotive industry, marked by the rapidly changing competitive landscape as well as changing
consumer preferences, have threatened Maruti Suzuki’s market dominance. Notably, the broader
A-segment Indian automotive market has witnessed a surge in competition as domestic and
international automobile manufacturers introduce new attractive models (Borthakur, 2023).
Similarly, there has been a paradigm shift in consumer preferences, as design, connectivity, and
safety have replaced earlier customer preferences such as fuel efficiency and subsequent
affordability. Altogether, these underlying factors have significantly threatened Maruti Suzuki’s
3
market dominance and raised concerns regarding the company’s future, particularly in the Asegment.
Stakeholders
Maruti-Suzuki India runs within a complex and multifaceted network of stakeholders
who have a vested interest in its performance and market supremacy, particularly in the Asegment of India’s automotive industry. Among these critical stakeholders include Maruti
Suzuki’s customers, who constitute the end-users and whose satisfaction levels, expectations,
and subsequent preferences significantly impact Maruti Suzuki’s market share as well as
profitability. Thus, failure by the company to meet its customer demands will inevitably risk
market share loss to competitors.
Employees account for another critical group of Maruti Suzuki’s stakeholders, as their
commitment and skills are directly related to product quality as well as customer experience.
With the changing competitive landscape in India’s A-segment automotive market, Maruti
Suzuki’s employees are primarily concerned about their job security and morale.
Shareholders also make up another critical segment of Maruti Suzuki’s stakeholders, as
they possess a financial stake in the company, which is dependent upon Maruti Suzuki’s
performance. Accordingly, Maruti Suzuki’s inherent business problem affects the shareholders’
return on their investments, as any decline in market share may affect dividends and stock prices.
Suppliers constitute another key stakeholder segment within Maruti Suzuki, as the
company’s relationship with them affects production efficiency and subsequent cost controls.
Given the changing automotive landscape, it may be necessary for suppliers to switch to new
materials and technologies. Consequently, this will affect the suppliers’ relationship with the
company.
4
The government and regulators form another key stakeholder group impacted by Maruti
Suzuki’s business problem. They enact and enforce standards and regulations that affect India’s
automotive industry. They may lose on the revenue generated through taxes and levies paid by
Maruti Suzuki because of the company’s declining market share.
Lastly, competitors form another integral stakeholder group impacted by Maruti Suzuki’s
business problem. As such, both domestic and international competitors stand to gain as the
competitive landscape gives them a competitive edge over Maruti Suzuki.
Other potential stakeholders that Maruti Suzuki’s business problem may impact include
local communities and financial institutions. Notably, local communities in India will stand to
lose in the face of Maruti Suzuki’s declining market share because of low engagement in the
company’s corporate social responsibilities as a result of the decline in the company’s
profitability. Similarly, financial institutions will lose as a result of Maruti Suzuki’s declining
market share and subsequent profitability, adversely impacting the company’s liquidity and
ability to repay and access loans.
Research Objectives
The following are the study’s research objectives:
1. To identify and explain the underlying challenges responsible for Maruti Suzuki India’s
declining market dominance and share in the A-segment of the country’s automotive
market.
2. To analyze changing customer preferences and their impact on the company’s product
offering and market share.
3. To explore probable strategies available to Maruti Suzuki India for maintaining and
strengthening its market dominance in the A-segment.
5
4. To analyze the subsequent benefits of the strategy implementation to Maruti Suzuki and
its stakeholders.
Accordingly, achieving the abovementioned research objectives stands to benefit the key
stakeholders in several ways:
Customers: Maruti Suzuki’s comprehension of the changing customer preferences will result in
enhanced customer product offerings best matching their expectations to enrich customer
satisfaction.
Employees: Maruti Suzuki will identify challenges facing their employees and create effective
strategies for enhancing job security as well as other career growth opportunities in the face of
the company’s adaption to the changing industry landscape.
Shareholders: Maruti Suzuki India will understand how to successfully implement strategies to
boost their market position in the A-segment and ensure financial returns for shareholders.
Suppliers: Maruti Suzuki India’s implementation of collaborative strategies will impact stronger
supplier relations, guaranteeing a steady supply chain as well as cost controls.
Government and Regulators: research insight will help policymakers understand the intricate
dynamics and nature of the A-segment automotive industry and, in so doing, craft effective
regulations.
Competitors: Maruti Suzuki’s implementation of effective strategies will help it gain a
competitive advantage over competitors by maintaining and boosting its market leadership in
India’s A-segment automotive market.
Research Question
6
What strategies can Maruti Suzuki India adopt to maintain and strengthen its market leadership
in the A-segment of the Indian automotive market, considering evolving consumer preferences
and increasing competition?
Ethical Considerations
Several ethical considerations are essential in conducting this research study and
necessitate their understanding and addressing:
Data collection and protection: Maruti Suzuki will need to ensure strict compliance with data
protection regulations to enhance data security and privacy as the study entails collecting
sensitive data such as consumer preferences as well as market strategies.
Human subjects: the study will require informed consent as well as the ethical treatment of
survey participants as it entails surveys and interviews. Therefore, it is imperative to follow
ethical guidelines in data collection to protect participants’ human rights and their well-being.
Transparency: researchers must maintain transparency in their methodologies, accurately report
findings, and avoid bias for self-interest.
Conflict of interest: researchers must declare any potential conflict of interest, including
affiliation with the company or stakeholders, that may jeopardize their research’s integrity.
Literature Review
This section of the literature review provides a critical foundation for conceptualizing the
intricacies of Maruti Suzuki India’s business problem and, subsequently, the challenges faced by
the company in maintaining and boosting its market leadership, especially within the A- segment
of India’s automotive market. To this end, the literature review provides an in-depth discussion
of Maruti Suzuki India’s business problem, accentuating their nuances and subsequent
7
implications. In addition, this section also delineates the potential biases as well as limitations of
the existential literature.
Management Theories
Accordingly, studies by Barney (1991) on the Resource-Based View (RBV) theory
satisfy that a company’s inherent competitive advantage stems from its inimitable and valuable
resources. As such, Maruti Suzuki India’s longstanding market supremacy stems from the
company’s resource portfolio, such as manufacturing capabilities, brand reputation, and
distribution network (Becker-Ritterspach, 2009). Consequently, these resources offer Maruti
Suzuki India a sustainable advantage relating to quality, cost-efficiency, and market reach. For
instance, Maruti Suzuki India’s extensive dealer network is inimitable, providing the company
with a distinct advantage relating to customer service and subsequent market share (BeckerRitterspach, 2009). Therefore, leveraging these underpinned unique and valuable resources holds
enormous potential as a strategy for maintaining and boosting Maruti Suzuki India’s market
leadership in the A-segment automotive market.
Studies by Teece, Pisano, and Shuen (1997) elucidate the dynamic capabilities theory,
suggesting that companies’ continuous innovation improvement in response to dynamic market
circumstances. In retrospect, Maruti Suzuki India’s challenges stem from the fast-changing Asegment Indian automotive market due to the changing competitive landscape and evolving
consumer preferences (Borthhakur, 2023). For instance, Maruti Suzuki India’s foray into electric
vehicles accentuates its efforts to build and foster dynamic capabilities in view of the changing
automotive industry landscape and consumer preferences (Ray & Miglani, 2018). Adopting
continuous innovation improvement, particularly by focusing more on Maruti Suzuki India’s
switch to electric vehicles, holds enormous potential as a strategy set to address the evolving
8
customer preferences as well as the dynamic competitive A-segment automotive industry in
India.
Behavioral Theories
Studies also accentuate the pivotal role of consumer behavior theories in conceptualizing
changing consumer preferences, particularly in the A-segment of India’s automotive industry.
According to Borthhunar (2023), in the Indian context, there has been a paradigm shift in
consumer preferences marked by a shift from fuel efficiency and affordability to sustainability,
connectivity, and safety. Sonar et al. (2023) further resonates that Indian consumers growing
demand for electric vehicles is fueled customers’ environmental consciousness, underpinning the
essence of automotive manufacturers to align their product offering to these subsequent
consumer preferences. The company’s ability to align its product offerings to these evolving
customer preferences holds enormous potential as a strategy to maintain and boost its market
leadership in the A-segment automotive market in India.
Social theories
In addition, studies also accentuate the centrality of social theories, particularly corporate
social responsibility theory, in understanding Maruti Suzuki India’s business problem. Carroll
(1979) introduces the corporate social responsibility theory, articulating a company’s
responsibility to focus on its operations’ broader societal implications. Becker-Ritterspach
(2009) notes Maruti Suzuki’s resolve to promote road safety as well as environmental
sustainability, and these aspirations, to no small extent, align not only with CSR principles but
also resonate with regulators and consumers and hold enormous potential in maintaining and
boosting the company’s market leadership in the A-segment automotive industry in India. That
said, Carroll (1978) satisfies that sustainable manufacturing practices, community engagement,
9
and safety standards should be at the art of every firm’s CSR principles. Subsequently, adoption
and compliance with these CSR principles hold enormous potential in enhancing Maruti Suzuki
India’s market leadership in the A-segment automotive market in India.
Business Related Theories
Porter (1980) introduces the competitive strategy theory as part of Porter’s Five Forces,
which are critical in analyzing an industry’s competitive landscapes. The competitive strategy
theory explores Maruti Suzuki India’s business problem from the competitors’ perspective to
establish and maintain a competitive advantage over the company through exercising cost
leadership, strategic partnerships, and product differentiation. In this regard, the competitive
strategy theory necessitates that Maruti Suzuki India leverages its cost-efficient manufacturing
practices, as well as its economies of scale, to ensure product offerings with competitive prices to
ensure maintaining and strengthening its market leadership in the A segment Indian automotive
market.
Bias and Limitations in the Literature Review
Although the theories mentioned above offer valuable insight into understanding Maruti
Suzuki India’s business problem, it is prudent to acknowledge their potential biases and
limitations. Fundamentally, the existing literature is subject to bias as the research elucidates
vested interests. Most of the literature is industry-funded research, pointing to a high tendency to
downplay the underlying challenges causing Maruti Suzuki India’s business problem.
In terms of limitations, regional focus is a crucial limitation facing the study as some
studies are limited to some geographical regions in India. As such, they do not capture the entire
market dynamics spectrum. In addition, time sensitivity elucidates as a critical limitation given
the automotive industry’s highly dynamic nature, making research findings susceptible to fast
10
outdating, particularly with the increased focus on electric vehicle studies. Lastly, data
availability also accentuates as another crucial study limitation owing to the access restrictions to
proprietary company data, thus hindering a comprehensive analysis of the most current
developments.
11
References
Barney, J. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage. Journal of
management, 17(1), 99-120. https://doi.org/10.1177/014920639101700108
Becker-Ritterspach, F.A.A. (2009). The Case of Maruti—Suzuki India. In: Hybridization of MNE
Subsidiaries. Palgrave Macmillan, London. https://doi.org/10.1057/9780230233492_5
Borthakur, P. (2023, July 3). Evolution of Car Purchasing Behaviour and the Reasons Behind it
among Indian Consumers: A Comprehensive Analysis from 2010 to Present. Preprints.
https://doi.org/10.20944/preprints202307.0069.v1
Carroll, A. B. (1979). A three-dimensional conceptual model of corporate performance. Academy
of management review, 4(4), 497-505. https://doi.org/10.5465/amr.1979.4498296
Ray, S., & Miglani, S. (2018). Upgrading in the Indian automobile sector: The role of lead
firms. Available at SSRN 3204258. https://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.3204258
Sonar, H., Belal, H. M., Foropon, C., Manatkar, R., & Sonwaney, V. (2023). Examining the
causal factors of the electric vehicle adoption: A pathway to tackle climate change in
resource-constrained environment. Annals of Operations Research, 1-27.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10479-023-05519-8
Teece, D. J., Pisano, G., & Shuen, A. (1997). Dynamic capabilities and strategic
management. Strategic management journal, 18(7), 509-533.
https://doi.org/10.1002/(SICI)1097-0266(199708)18:7%3C509::AIDSMJ882%3E3.0.CO;2-Z
RESEARCH RECOMMENDATIONS
Research has three traditional methodologies (we include action research and design science)
–Qualitative
–Quantitative
= Recommended Consideration
–Mixed Methods
–Action Research
–Design Science
Each methodology has several design options
Qualitative Designs
Mixed Methods Designs
–Phenomenology
–Triangulation
–Case Study
–Explanatory
–Ethnography
–Exploratory
–Exploratory
–Grounded Theory
Quantitative Designs
Action Research / Design Science
–Correlational
–Variation of Traditional
–Experimental
–Quasi Experimental
19
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND DESIGN
Professional use tools to perform their work in an effective and efficient manner
Tools vary depending upon the discipline (e.g., a plumber’s tools are similar yet different
from a surgeon’s tools)
A research tool is a mechanism or strategy to collect, manipulate, or interpret data (Leedy &
Ormrod, 2013)
A research methodology is a general approach a researcher takes to conduct a research
project (Leedy & Ormrod, 2013)
▪
The approach determines the kind of tools that are needed
A research design is the plan to conduct the research project (Creswell, 2013)
▪
Identifies the specific tools and actions to be performed
18
In this chapter we talked about the implications of different pay-level strategies for costs and revenues. We Saw examples both of employers seeking to control/reduce pay levels and of employers increasing pay levels. Here, we continue our earlier discussion on how U.S. automakers have used two-tier wage structures to control labor costs and consider what might happen going forward. Also important is their use of profit sharing as a way to keep fixed labor costs under control and to make labor costs move more in line with profitability, so that labor costs decline when profits decline and labor costs increase when profits increase. That reduces the problem of having high, fixed labor costs when the company is under financial duress.
As we noted earlier, automobile production in the United States has declined over time. Employment has too. At the beginning of this century (January 2000), the motor vehicle and parts manufacturing industry (including both domestic and overseas owned U.S. producers) employed about 1,300,000 in the United States. That number bottomed out at 660,000 in 2009 during the recession and bankruptcies of that era. As of January 2020, it was back up to 976,000, or about 25% less than in January 2000. (We use January 2020 here to avoid the temporary effect on employment of the pandemic in 2020. For example, employment was down as low as 627,000 in April 2020.) Looking only at motor vehicle manufacturing (without parts), employ-
ment in January 2000 was 292,000, hitting its low of 123,000 in 2009, and growing to 235,000 by January 2020.74 Consider that, according to Bloomberg, in the late 1970s, GM alone had U.S. employment of labor costs, proximity to the large U.S. market, and access to export markets elsewhere, has, by contrast, grown its production and employment significantly over time.
As we saw earlier in this chapter, a two-tier wage structure allows a company to pay new hires at a lower wage. That is a major tool in reducing labor costs. At the Big Three (GM, Ford, Fiat Chrysler), as a result of their most recent contract agreements with the United Automobile Workers (UAW), the hourly wage for Tier 1 workers is $32.32 (up from $28 previously). In contrast, the wage for Tier 2 workers is up to $17 to $29.94, up from the previous $17 to $28. New hires start at $17 and progress through higher wage rates over time. For already employed Tier 2 employees at GM, under the previous contract, it took 8 years for a Tier 2 employee to progress to the top $28 rate. Under the new contract at GM (https://uaw.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/10/56100-UAW_hourly-1.pdf) that runs through 2023, in contrast, it will take already employed GM 20% and 45% of Big Three hourly employees, depending on the company, are on the Tier 2 wage scale. Thus, the savings are substantial.
In the GM-UAW contract, there are also separate wage rates for “GMCH” (GM Components Holdings) employees and for “CCA” (GM’s Customer Care and Aftersales) employees. The GMCH rate starts at $16.25 and tops out (after 8 years on the job) at $22.50. The CCA wage rate starts at $17.00 and tops out (again, it appears after 8 years) at $31.57. There are also “supplemental” (temporary) employees at the GM (and the Big Three). These employees also have lower wages ($16.67) and have the least job security, offering the company a way to easily reduce headcount when demand declines. In addition, there are flex temps and part-time temps. 77 Finally, it appears that, except for Tier 1 employees, the retirement plan is switched from a defined benefit to defined contribution plan (a 401k-discussed in Chapter 13) and there is no retiree health care benefit.
Discussion Question
(pick and answer one of the three questions below):
Besides Tier 1 employees, what are the other categories of hourly workers at GM? How many categories are there? How does the wage rate of each compare to that of Tier 1 employees?
How much more would it cost if all Tier 2 employees at GM were paid the same as Tier 1 employees are paid today? How much more will it cost in each of the four years of the recent contract to implement the contract agreement to move current Tier 2 employees to Tier 1 wage levels over time? Hint: Use the information on the percentage of employees who are Tier 1 and Tier 2. Compute the average wage in each year and multiply it times the number of employees in each Tier and multiply by 2,080 hours per year.
Refer back to our earlier exhibit (Exhibit 7.1) and use the difference in average hourly compensation (which includes benefits costs) between GM and Toyota/Honda to compute the labor cost difference between them.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Compensation
(Chapter 07: Defining Competitiveness)
Jie (Jasmine) Feng, Ph.D.
Associate Professor in Human Resource Management
Rutgers | School of Management and Labor Relations
Compensation Strategy: External Competitiveness
• External competitiveness refers to the pay relationships among
organizations—the organization’s pay relative to its competitors.
• Pay level refers to the average of the array of rates paid by an
employer.
• (base + bonuses + benefits + value of stock holdings) / number of
employees.
– Pay mix is the various types of payments, or pay forms, that make up total
compensation.
• Pay level and pay mix decisions focus on two objectives.
– Control costs and increase revenues.
– Attract and retain employees.
2
Control Costs and Increase Revenues
• Labor costs = (pay level) times (number of employees).
• The higher the pay level relative to competitors, the greater the
relative costs to provide similar products or services.
• Paying above the market depends on employer returns and if the
return translates into revenues that exceed the cost of the strategy.
• Higher labor costs are sustainable only when the product is better or
when the product better matches consumer preferences.
• Examples:
– American Airlines went through bankruptcy and merged with USAir in 2014 and
now competes against Southwest Airlines.
– There is growing concern that Southwest’s labor costs are or may become a
problem.
3
Attract and Retain the Right Employees
• Different employers set different pay levels; that is, they deliberately
choose to pay above or below what others are paying for the same
work.
• One company’s pay comparisons differ when looking at base wage or
total compensation.
4
Exhibit 7.4 – Two Companies: Same Total Compensation,
Different Mixes.
This shows that
organizations can and do
vary in how closely they
match the “going rate.”
5
What Shapes External Competitiveness?
• These factors act in concert to influence pay-level and pay-mix
decisions.
6
Labor Market Factors
• Economists describe two basic types of markets:
– The quoted-price market (Amazon).
– And the bourse (eBay).
• In both the bourse and the quoted market, employers are the buyers
and the potential employees are the sellers.
• If the inducements offered by the employer and the skills offered by
the employee are mutually acceptable, a deal is struck.
7
Labor Market Factors How Labor Markets Work
• Theories of labor markets usually begin with four basic assumptions.
–
–
–
–
Employers always seek to maximize profits.
People are homogeneous and therefore interchangeable.
The pay rates reflect all costs associated with employment.
The markets are competitive, so there is no advantage for a single employer to pay
above or below the market rate.
• Understanding how markets work requires analysis of the demand and
supply of labor.
– The demand side focuses on the actions of employers – how many they are hiring
and what they are willing to pay.
– The supply side looks at potential employees – their qualifications and what pay
they are willing to accept.
8
Exhibit 7.6: Supply and Demand for Business School
Graduates in the Short Run
9
Labor Market Factors Labor Demand
• If $60,000 is the market-determined rate for business graduates, how
many business graduates will a specific employer hire?
• The answer requires an analysis of labor demand.
– In the short term, an employer cannot change any other factor of production other
than human resources.
– Under such conditions, a single employer’s demand for labor coincides with the
marginal product of labor.
• The marginal product of labor is the additional output associated
with the employment of one additional person, with other production
factors held constant.
• The marginal revenue of labor is the additional revenue generated
when the firm employs one additional person, with other production
factors held constant.
10
Labor Market Factors Marginal Product
• Assume a consulting firm provides services to 10 clients.
• The firm hires a third person, who brings in four more clients.
• The marginal product is the change in output associated with the
additional unit of labor.
– The marginal product of the third person is four clients.
– But adding a fourth employee generates only two new clients.
• Diminishing marginal productivity results from the fact that each
additional employee has a progressively smaller share of the other
factors of production with which to work.
• In the short term, the other factors of production are fixed. Until those
factors change, each new hire produces less than the previous hire.
• The amount each hire produces is the marginal product.
11
Labor Market Factors Marginal Revenue
• Marginal revenue is the money generated by the sale of the marginal
product, the additional output from the addition of one more person.
• An employer will hire until the marginal revenue generated by the last
hire is equal to the costs associated with employing that person.
12
Labor Market Factors Labor Supply
• The behavior model (of potential employees) assumes:
– Many people are seeking jobs.
– They possess accurate information about all job openings.
– And no barriers to mobility exist.
• As the assumptions change, so does the supply.
– If unemployment is low, offers of higher pay may not increase supply.
– If competitors quickly match offers of higher pay, the employer may face a higher
pay level but no increase in supply.
– Some firms find lowering the job requirements and hiring less-skilled workers a
better choice than raising wages.
13
Modifications to the Demand Side Compensating
Differentials
• Adam Smith argued that individuals make decisions based on the
alternative with the greatest “net advantage.”
• If a job has negative characteristics then employers must offer higher
wages to compensate for these negative features.
• Such compensating differentials explain the presence of various
pay rates in the market.
– Although the notion is appealing, it is hard to document.
– Due to the difficulties in measuring and controlling all factors that go into a netadvantage calculation.
14
Modifications to the Demand Side Efficiency Wage
• According to efficiency-wage theory, high wages may increase
efficiency and actually lower labor costs if they:
– Attract higher-quality applicants, lower turnover, increase worker effort, reduce
shirking behavior, and reduce the need for monitoring.
• The underlying assumption is that pay level determines effort.
• Utility theory can help compare the costs and benefits of different pay
level policies.
• Research shows that higher wages actually do attract more qualified
applicants – but also attracts more unqualified applicants.
• An organization’s ability to pay is related to the efficiency wage
model.
• Rent is a return (profits) received from activities that are in excess of
the minimum (pay level) needed to attract people to those activities.
15
Modifications to the Demand Side Sorting and Signaling
• Sorting is the effect that pay strategy has on the composition of the
workforce—who is attracted and who is retained.
• Signaling is a closely related process that underlies the sorting effect.
– Signaling theory says employers design pay levels and mix as a strategy that
signals to prospective/current employees the behaviors sought.
• An employer that combines lower base pay with high bonuses may be
signaling that it wants employees who are risk takers.
– A study of college students approaching graduation found that both pay level and
mix affected their job decisions.
• Both pay level and pay mix send a signal, which results in sorting
effects – who joins and who stays with the organization.
• Signaling works on the supply side of the model, too, as suppliers of
labor signal to potential employers.
16
Modifications to the Demand Side Reservation Wage
• Economists describe pay as “noncompensatory.”
• What they mean is that job seekers have a reservation wage level
below which they will not accept a job offer.
• No matter how attractive the other job attributes.
• A reservation wage may be above or below the market wage.
• The theory seeks to explain differences in workers’ responses to
offers.
– Reservation levels exist for pay forms too, particularly for health insurance.
– A young graduate may require health care insurance to take a job.
17
Modifications to the Demand Side Human Capital
• The theory of human capital holds that higher earnings flow to those
who improve their potential productivity by investing in themselves.
• It assumes people are paid at the value of their marginal product.
• In general, the value of an individual’s skills and abilities is a function
of the time, expense, and effort to acquire them.
• A number of additional factors affect the supply of labor.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Geographic barriers to mobility among jobs.
Union requirements.
Lack of information about job openings.
The degree of risk involved.
The degree of unemployment.
Nonmonetary aspects of jobs.
18
Product Market Factors and Ability to Pay
• The supply and demand for labor are major determinants of an
employer’s pay level.
– An employer’s pay level is constrained by its ability to compete in the
product/service market.
– Product market conditions to a large extent determine what the
organization can afford to pay.
• The two key product market factors that affect the ability of an
organization to change what it charges for its products and services
are:
– Product demand.
– Degree of competition.
19
Product Market Factors and Ability to Pay Product
Demand
• Labor market conditions (and legal requirements) put a floor on the
pay level required to attract sufficient employees.
– The product market puts a lid on the maximum pay level that an employer
can set.
• If the employer pays above the maximum, it must either:
– Pass on higher costs to the consumers.
– Or hold prices fixed and allocate a greater share of total revenues to cover
labor costs.
20
Product Market Factors and Ability to Pay Degree of
Competition
• Employers in highly competitive markets are less able to raise prices
without loss of revenues.
• At the other extreme, single sellers of a highly demanded product can
set any price they choose.
• Other factors besides product market conditions affect pay level and
compensation decisions.
– The productivity of labor.
– The technology employed.
– The level of production relative to plant capacity available.
• These factors vary more across than within industries.
21
Product Market Factors and Ability to Pay A Different
View: What Managers Say
•
•
•
•
In one study, managers were asked to make wage adjustment recommendations
for several positions under various scenarios.
Level of unemployment made almost no difference.
Company profitability was considered a factor for higher management, but not
when managers considered individual pay adjustments.
Managers believed that problems attracting and keeping people were the result o
poor management rather than inadequate compensation.
•
•
When the unemployment rate is high, companies make pay cuts.
Either outright or with furloughs, pay freezes, and/or reducing 401k
contributions.
•
A national survey found pay was the most often cited reason among highperforming employees for leaving a job.
Employers did not feel the role of pay was as meaningful.
•
22
Product Market Factors and Ability to Pay Segmented
Supplies of Labor and (Different) Going Rates
• Consider how a hospital staffs and pays its nursing positions.
•
The segmented supply results in nurses working the same jobs on the same shift,
but earning significantly different pay and/or benefits.
•
This is a case of people flowing to the work.
Relative
Hourly
Wage
Benefits?
Fee Paid by
Hospital to
Agency?
Nurse Type
Description
Regular
Full-time employees
100%
Yes
No
Pool
On call, part-time employees
132%
No
No
Registry
Agency employees who can work for
multiple area hospitals. Benefits
paid by agency.
150%
Yes
Yes
Travelers
Agency employees from outside the
area who are sent on extended
assignments (e.g., six months) to
hospitals around the country.
Benefits paid by agency.
150%
Yes
Yes
23
Organization Factors Industry, Employer Size, and
People’s Preferences
• The industry in which an organization competes influences the
technologies used.
• Qualifications and experience tailored to particular technologies is
important in the analysis of labor markets.
• There is consistent evidence that large organizations tend to pay more
than small ones.
• The relationship between organization size, ability to pay, and pay
level is consistent with economic theory.
• Better understanding of employee preferences of pay forms is
increasingly important in determining external competitiveness.
• However, there are substantial difficulties in reliably measuring
preferences.
24
Organization Factors: Organization Strategy
• A variety of pay-level and mix strategies exist.
– Some employers adopt a low-wage, no-service strategy.
– Others select a low-wage, high-services strategy.
– Still other employers use a high-wage, high-services approach.
• A variety of pay-level strategies may exist within some organizations.
• Efficiency wage argues that some firms have
efficiency reasons to pay higher wages.
• Observable benefits of higher wages may be
higher pay satisfaction, improved retention,
and higher quality and/or performance.
• Ultimately, higher
wages must bring
something in
return, such as
higher productivity
and/or innovation.
25
Relevant Markets
• Defining the relevant markets is a big part of figuring out how and
how much to pay.
• Every organization operates in many labor markets, each with unique
demand and supply.
• Managers must define the markets that are relevant for pay purposes
and establish the appropriate competitive positions in these markets.
• Three factors are commonly used to determine the relevant labor
markets.
– Occupation (skill/knowledge required).
– Geography (willingness to relocate, commute, or be a virtual employee).
– Competitors (other employers in the same product/service and labor markets).
26
Defining the Relevant Market
• Little is known about how employers choose their relevant markets,
but, if the markets are incorrectly defined:
• The estimates of competitors’ pay rates will be incorrect.
• And the pay level and pay mix inappropriately established.
• The data from product market competitors (as opposed to labor
market competitors) are likely to receive more weight when:
–
–
–
–
Employee skills are specific to the product market.
Labor costs are a large share of total costs.
Product demand is responsive to price changes.
The supply of labor is not responsive to changes in pay.
27
Globalization of Relevant Labor Markets: Offshoring
and Outsourcing
• Work flowing to lower wage locations is not new.
• Improved communication and connectivity accelerated the trend.
• Characteristics of some jobs lend themselves to offshoring.
• While large differences in labor costs cannot simply be ignored,
there are other factors to consider in deciding where jobs will be.
• Countries with lower average labor costs also tend to have lower
average productivity.
• There may be other risks, such as intellectual property theft.
• Agency theory tells us that companies must devote resources to
systems that monitor worker effort or output.
• Customers’ reactions must be considered.
28
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives What Difference
Does the Pay-Level Policy Make?
•
Compensation theories help understanding the variations in pay levels,
but are less helpful in understanding the mix of pay forms.
•
Three conventional pay-level policies are to lead, to meet, or to follow
competition – Newer policies emphasize flexibility.
29
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives Pay with
Competition (Match)
• The most common policy is to match rates paid by competitors.
• A pay-with-competition policy tries to ensure that an organization’s
wage costs are approximately equal to those of product competitors.
– And that its ability to attract applicants will be approximately equal to its labor
market competitors.
• Classical economic models predict that employers meet competitive
wages.
• While this avoids placing an employer at a disadvantage in pricing
products, it may not provide a competitive advantage in its labor
markets.
30
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives Lead Pay-Level
Policy
• A lead pay-level policy maximizes the ability to attract and retain
quality employees and minimizes employee dissatisfaction with pay.
• It may also offset less attractive features of the work.
• An entire industry may pass high pay rates on to consumers.
• A number of researchers have linked high wages to ease of attraction,
reduced vacancy rates and training time, and better-quality
employees.
• Pay satisfaction helps explain the influence of pay level on quits.
• A lead policy can also have negative effects.
– It may force the employer to increase wages of current employees too, to avoid
internal misalignment and murmuring.
– It may mask negative job attributes that contribute to high turnover later on, such as
boring assignments or hostile colleagues.
31
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives Lag Pay-Level Policy
• A policy of paying below-market rates may hinder a firm’s ability to
attract potential employees – called a lag pay-level policy..
• But if coupled with the promise of higher future returns, it may
increase commitment, foster teamwork, and increase productivity.
• How long this promise works, in the face of flat or declining stock
markets, is unknown.
• Unmet expectations probably have negative effects.
• Additionally, it is possible to lag competition on pay level but to lead on
other returns from work.
32
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives Different Policies
for Different Employee Groups
• In practice, many employers go beyond a single choice among the
three policy options.
•
They may vary the policy for different occupational families.
•
Or vary the policy for different forms of pay.
•
Or they may adopt different policies for different business units that face very
different competitive conditions.
33
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives Not by Pay Level
Alone: Pay-Mix Strategies
•
Alternative pay-mix
policies include
performance driven,
market match, work/life
balance, and security.
•
How managers position
their organization’s pay
against competitors is
changing.
•
Emerging alternatives
focus on total returns
(beyond financial
returns) and offering
choices among these
returns.
34
Consequences of Pay-Level and Pay-Mix Decisions:
Guidance from the Research
• External competitiveness has two major consequences which affect:
• Operating expenses, employee attitudes and work behaviors.
35
Consequences of Pay-Level and Pay-Mix Decisions:
Efficiency
• A variety of theories make assumptions about the effects of relative
pay levels on an organization’s efficiency.
•
Research on the effect of pay-level policies is difficult because companies’ stated
policies often do not correspond to reality.
•
Beyond opinions, there is minimal evidence of the consequences of different policy
alternatives.
•
In the absence of satisfactory evidence, the least-risk approach may be to set both
pay level and pay mix to match competition.
36
Consequences of Pay-Level and Pay-Mix Decisions:
Fairness and Compliance
• Satisfaction with pay is directly related to the pay level—more is
better.
– But employees’ sense of fairness is also related to how others are paid.
• Provisions of prevailing wage laws and equal rights legislation must
also be met.
• Pensions and health care are considered economic security and are
regulated to some degree in most countries.
• Employers must use caution when sharing salary information to avoid
antitrust violations.
• No matter the competitive pay policy, it needs to be translated into
practice – the first step is to use a salary survey (Chapter 08).
37
During Week 6 your assignment is to develop an initial proposal for your own action learning change project that you will seek to initiate and implement during the remainder of the semester. Your project should meet the AL criteria: it should be a “problem, project or challenge, the resolution of which is of high importance” to you, your work group or your organization. The problem, project or challenge you select should be one that you have the power to take action on or reason to believe that your recommendations would be implemented. In Week 7 the Members of your Action Learning Team and I will provide you feedback that will help you reflect on your idea. Make sure to read the protocol below. If you are not working send me an email on the Canvas system and we’ll figure something out. The AL project is an individual assignment not a team assignment. Post your draft proposal here by Tuesday night. Post it in the assignment tab – do not attach a separate file.Special note to our colleagues from Korea who are in the Bloustein certificate program. Since you are here on campus in residence with your families and on a break from your jobs you will not be able to implement a change project during the semester. So your focus will need to be a plan for when you return to your job. You will only be able to complete 1-4 below. I will have a different additional assignment for you in later weeks to substitute for numbers 5 and 6. Protocol for the AL projectYour proposal should include items 1-4 of the protocol. (Your completed Project paper due the last day of class should add the remaining sections):For the proposalDescription of the Problem, Project or Challenge that you wish to try to influence.Explanation of why you think it is an important change; what is your role and level of authority to initiate or implement a change? Will it require permission from your supervisor?Background and Context (brief description of the organization and work group) Your initial Change Action Plan – Describe the change and what steps you propose to take? This should include at least a preliminary DVF>R analysis as well as a force-field analysis. In my experience doing a Force Field Analysis provides a much better understanding of the elements of the DVF>R context.
INSTRUCTIONS
PurposeThe purpose of this assignment is to enhance your ability to identify marketing concepts and strategies in the real world.
READ: How to Write a Product Report.pdf (walks you through step-by-step using an example)
READ: Written Assignment – Directions.pptx (slide presentation from class; edited Oct. 12th)
READ: Report Option Scoring Rubric.pdf (this is what we use to score each report)
The report is due on October 2oth, 2023 at or before 11:59pm CT. It is worth 80 points. Late work will be penalized.Directions
Choose a single product or service sold in U.S. consumer markets found on the Mintel database (via UIC library) — some products are NOT allowed (see below)
Answer the questions in the next section
NO reports on products from any companies on the Interbrand list of “Best Global Brands” in the top 20 (see image or link)
NO reports on Ritz Crackers (I use that as an example in “How to Write a Product Report”)
Interbrand Best Global Brands(No assignments on products from these companies)
***Choosing a ProductEvery report must utilize the Mintel database and properly cite at least one of its reports. The Mintel report may be about your focal product (e.g., Kraft American Cheese) but is more likely to be about the product category/industry (e.g., food). So, start with Mintel, especially if you are looking for product ideas.Companies spend thousands annually to subscribe to the Mintel database. Students have free access, but only through the UIC library. So, students must access Mintel through the library. (Go to the UIC library’s “Databases” page and search “Mintel”) Students may need to create a Mintel account using their uic.edu address. Mintel analysts write reports mostly about product categories but they usually spotlight specific products. To search on Mintel for your product. On the Mintel homepage find the search bar (magnifying glass icon/lower left in yellow)
Search by product category (e.g., beauty and personal care) by moving your cursor over “Category” on the search bar (best approach to start)
Search by product name or search by company name and sift through products (enter it at “I’m looking for…”)
Specify Region as North America (remember, the product must be available in the U.S. and/or Canada)
You will likely need to access other information sources to complete the assignment, such as the product’s website***What To DoRespond to each numbered prompt about an item (a specific version of a product) or service using concepts drawn from lecture materials and readings that cover strategy and segmentation. Justify each answer using proper concepts from lecture and text and properly citing any external sources.
Identify a single product (and the organization) 10pts
Identify the SBU level strategy for the product 20pts
Identify the organization’s segmentation strategy 25pts
Identify the primary target segment(s) for the focal item 10pts
Use professional quality writing throughout 15pts. This involves completeness, logical flow, spelling, grammar, required formatting, and proper citation/reference formatting.FormattingSubmissions may NOT exceed 650 total words (including references). This is approximately 2.5 double-spaced pages. (I care about word count, not page count) This is a miniature report. It should be thorough but brief. Every submission must include a “References” section that is part of the word count. Include a separate citation for each consulted source, listed alphabetically by author’s last/family name. Each report must include at least three high-quality sources and one must be a Mintel report.
Exception. Students may refer to textbook, lectures, and the focal product website without a formal citation. (Other websites and all other sources must be cited formally)
Students may include optional appendices that include supplemental materials. Appendices do NOT count towards the 650-word limit. However, these materials cannot be necessary to understand and engage the report. Students will NOT be credited for any responses that rely on appendicized materials. (They are extra, by definition)Other Required Formatting
Line spacing. Choose single- or double-spacing. The 650 word limit is what matters. But use the same line spacing throughout.
Font and font size. Use a common font style (Times New Roman, Arial, Courier, etc.) in 12pt size throughout (headings and subheadings can be larger)
Headings and subheadings. Include them where they would be useful to assist the reader
References. Use Chicago style citations and referencing (i.e., author-date NOT footnotes/endnotes)
Example of citation (in the body of the report) When you write your report, any information or ideas that came from anyone other than you are NOT yours. So, I would cite a Mintel report about U.S. Hispanic payment preferences in my report by author’s last name and year of the report (e.g., Kundakjian 2022). Note that I do not need to include the title of the report. I am just referring to the fact that this report exists and I am informing the reader of author and date.Then I must properly cite Stefanie Kundakjian’s report in a list of sources that appears at the end of the report, called a “References” section. Note that this style of parenthetical references in the body of the report and a list of sources at the end replaces footnotes and endnotes. It saves space because each source is listed in the references section once. However, I must cite that report on Hispanic payment preferences in the body wherever I use the author’s ideas or information (Kundakjian 2022). Example of references sectionAppau, Samuelson and David Crockett. “Wealth in People and Places: Understanding Transnational Gift Obligations.” Journal of Consumer Research, June 30, https://doi.org/10.1093/jcr/ucac028.Kundakjian, Stefanie (2022), “Hispanic Payment Preferences, U.S. 2022,” Mintel.com, accessed September 7, https://reports.mintel.com/display/1099967/?fromSearch=%3Ffilters.category%3D167%26last_filter%3Dcategory%26resultPosition%3D1.
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability”Page: – 326 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines involved in cyber-security? (02Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants with these abilities?(02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3.How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative. (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13carefully and then give your answers on the basis of your understanding.
4.Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks, goals,and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task, goal,and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
5.Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
# You should not copy from any website# References must be written# The assignment must be delivered on time# The agreed number of words must be adhered to# Give examples and write a perfect answer
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
FIN401 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 28/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Banks Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: I
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Umme hani
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment questions: Total grade – 10 points
Question:
Q.1. How are the balance sheets and income statements of finance companies,
insurers, and securities firms similar to those of banks, and in what ways are they
different? What might explain the differences you observe? Points-5
Q.2. Depositor’s Savings association has a ratio of equity capital to total assets of
7.5%. In contrast, Newton Savings reports an equity capital-to-asset ratio of 6%.
What is the value of the equity multiplier for each of these institutions? Suppose that
both institutions have an ROA of 0.85%. What must each institution’s return on
equity capital be? What do your calculations tell you about the benefits of having as
little equity capital as regulations or the marketplace will allow? Points-5
Answers:
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
INVESTMENTS (FIN403)
Course Name: Investments
Student’s Name:
Course Code: FIN403
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 2 is 30/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 2 Questions: Week 5,6 and 7
Assignment 2
Submission Date by students: 30/10/2023
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre via blackboard.
Weight: 10 Marks
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
CLO-3. Demonstrate investment arrangements as part of the process for implementing an
investment strategy. ( PLO-2.2)
CLO-4. Demonstrate the valuation methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt,
equity, property and derivative securities.( PLO-2.3).
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10 )
Q-1. Explain the efficient market hypothesis and the different forms it can take. Relate the
efficient market hypothesis to fundamental and technical analyses. ( 2.5 Marks )
Q-2. Explain the relationship between the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash
flows. Break down and analyse ratios in six major categories. Explain how the ratios can be
applied to a specific company.
( 2.5 Marks )
Q-3. Describe the characteristics of other forms of fixed-income securities such as preferred stock,
money market funds, etc. Develop an investment strategy for investing in bonds. ( 2.5 Marks )
Q-4. Explain the differences among various concepts of yield such as yield to maturity, yield to
call, and anticipated realized yield. Describe the techniques for anticipating changes in interest
rates.
( 2.5 Marks )
*****************************************************************************
Answer:
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Shahid Alam
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Public Management (MGT 324)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Public Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 324
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Ganesh Dash
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs):
1. Describe the simple and complex issues pertaining to public management
2. Demonstrate different management and leadership styles for different situations
Assignment Questions:
Discuss the following questions:
Q1. “Leaders are born, not made.” In light of this statement, briefly explain the concept of
leadership and its role in organizational development in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Q2. “Leadership strategy is essential for the growth and success of an organsiation”. In light
of this statement, discuss the different leadership approaches to leading an organization and
analyze work and their relevance in the present-day context in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Answers
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
UGM UNIT 5
1. Listen to BIZBASH MASTER SERIES JAGERMEISTER
BizBash Masters talk Cliff Rigato from Jägermeister as director of culture
content and experience design 2 pts
https://www.bizbash.com/home/video/22031218/bizbash-event-mastersdocuseries-episode3?utm_medium=Email&utm_campaign=2/3/2022_ME1_CliffRigano_02032022&utm
_source=
Listen to this session. What did you learn from Cliff and his approach to his job
in brand and event marketing as most important to represent his brand??
Make Some notes for discussion and submit them 1.5 pts
2 . Explore this study on Marketing Budget Spending Allocations areas.
Google Article by title to read
What surprised you in decisions marketers need to consider in developing a truly
strategic budget process annually. We will discuss in class breakout next week.
Take notes and submit them 1.5 pts
Help write an internship evaluation paper.(single-space, block paragraphs, 12-point font). Details in the word doc attached.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Internship evaluation at a restaurant chain (Management internship)
Each response should be no more than one page (single-space, block paragraphs, 12-point font). Ensure
that you use headings and sub-headings to guide the reader. You should compile all responses in one
Word document.
INTRODUCTION
Identify your internship employer, supervisor, and type of internship (Marketing, Accounting etc.)
Part 1:
Some suggestions on what to discuss and then write about:
•
•
•
•
•
Discuss your progress in completing the tasks. What steps have you taken to complete your
tasks? (Be sure to identify each task in your response.)
What resources do you need? What steps will you need to take to obtain the resources?
Are you having difficulties or setbacks? Have you encountered any obstacles (anticipated or
otherwise) that should be addressed?
Are you on track toward completing the goals successfully by the end of the semester?
Are the tasks still valid, or should they be revised?
Part 2
•
In what ways does your employer motivate employees to work harder or more
effectively? Are there strategies used that you think are particularly helpful in
motivating people? What strategies might you suggest to improve employee morale?
This is copy of what I do in my internship.
Please read the article below that appeared in the printed edition of the The Washington Post on March 26, 2023. Then answer the following prompt(s) in your initial post Gordon Moore Intel co-founder obituary in The Washington Post (March 26, 2023) Gordon Moore Intel co-founder obituary in The Washington Post (March 26, 2023) – Alternative Formats a) How is the article related to the conceptual material from Chapter 6? Elaborate in 50-75 words.b) How is the article related to the conceptual material from Chapter 8? Elaborate in 50-75 words.c) How is the article related to the conceptual material from any one of the chapters from 1 through 5? Elaborate in 50-75 words.d) What did you learn from the article that you can use in your career going forward? You can draw upon any aspect of the article; your answer may have zero connection to the material from MGMT 471. Elaborate in 50-75 words.Organize your answer neatly to make it easy for the reader: a) Use a separate paragraph for each sub-question and leave a single-line spacing between paragraphs. Avoid writing your entire answer as one long paragraph. b) Reference the line numbers from the article in each sub-question.
Instructions: Search for scholarly journal articles using Google Scholar and Carleton’s Omni catalog. Then select two sources tied to your topic in assignment one.
So this assignment is linked to the first one you did. I will link the finished assignment that you did because they are related to each other. I will also share the feedback for the first assignment in order to see where the mistakes happened.
I will attach the assignment pdf instructions along with a rough template and some other citation instructions. Please let me know if you have any questions and make sure all work is 100% plagiarism free and AI free since it will be run through multiple machines.
Below is the feedback for assignment 1 that you also did 🙂
Assignment 1 was the “Find credible sources assignment” completed by you.
“Thank you for your work! You chose a very interesting topic, and narrowed it down through your search, which is great! Your assignment is missing in-text citations. Please review the assignment guidelines and the APA citation crash course on BrightSpace. We were expecting you’d reference the publishers in question 2 for example. Moreover, while you do reference the CRAAP criteria, your analysis is surface level. For example, the “currency” criterion is not just in reference to the date of the news article publication. It is also about the currency of the links and sources the journalist draws from. Again, you did not cite the CRAAP test as a resource in this answer either. As for your answers more broadly, you did great! Your search process is clearly outlined and makes sense. You clearly understand what peer-review means and why it is important for your research. The sources you chose were interesting. Overall, good work! I look forward to reading more of your work as you continue exploring and narrowing down this topic further.”
Links:
Google scholar
https://scholar.google.com
https://library.carleton.ca
Unformatted Attachment Preview
0
Source Analysis
Sana Al-Barakat
101122437
Coms 2004
Prof. Emily Hiltz
TA Aseel Qazzaz
October 2,2023
1
The Sources
Book-Earl, J., & Rohlinger, D. A. (Eds.). (2017). Social movements and media. Emerald
Publishing Limited.https://doi.org/10.1108/S2050-206020170000014013.
News Article-Pearce, M. (2022, August 16). American media wants to save democracy. Is
it helping? Los Angeles Times. https://www.latimes.com/entertainment-arts/story/202207-29/la-ent-american-media-democracy
Scholarly Journal Article-Şener, G., Yücel, H., & Yedikardeş, U. (2019). Youth and
Party Politics in Digital Era: Social Media Practices of Young Members of Political Parties
in Turkey. Global Media Journal (İstanbul), 10(19), 1–
.http://globalmediajournaltr.yeditepe.edu.tr/sites/default/files/01_gulum_sener_hakan_yuce
l_umur_yedikardes.pdf
Source Credibility Analysis
Question 1: Explaining the topic and search process
My initial topic choice was “Political movements and mass media,” emphasizing young
people. I began by using the library’s search feature and combining keywords and Boolean
search techniques. My main search terms were “Political movements,” “mass media,” and
“Youths.” In order to ensure that all three terms were contained in the sources, I used the
Boolean operator “AND” to whittle down the results. The original search produced many results,
demonstrating the topic’s vast range. I decided to concentrate on the connection between youth
media use and political activism to sharpen my focus. I focused on “Youth involvement in
political movements through mass media.” In order to do this more focused search, I changed
2
my terms. I included terms like “Youth political participation,” “Media influence on youths in
politics,” and “Youth engagement in political movements.” This made it easier to find sources
that dealt, especially with how young people participated in political movements mediated by the
media. I used the library catalog’s search filters to locate the needed sources. I used the peerreviewed sources filter to narrow my choices for the scholarly journal article. I chose one point
of focus: “Youth and Party Politics in the Digital Era: Social Media Practices of Young Members
of Political Parties.” I went to the news area and picked a recent story from the Los Angeles
Times titled “American media wants to save democracy. Is it helping?” for the news article.
Finally, I performed a separate search for the book using the keywords “Social movements and
media,” leading me to a book titled “Social Movements and Media,” edited by J. Earl and D.A.
Rohlinger, which provided comprehensive insights into the topic.
Question 2: Confirming types of sources
The three sources I selected for my assignment encompass diverse perspectives on the
intersection of political movements and mass media. The sources also have a particular emphasis
on youth involvement. The scholarly journal article is one of the reliable sources. It was
published in the Global Media Journal (Istanbul), specifically in Volume 10, Issue 19, spanning
pages 1-13. To substantiate its scholarly nature, I examined the Global Media Journal (Istanbul)
official website. This helped to authenticate its academic standing. The source is also credible
because it is peer-reviewed. A peer review is where other reliable experts review the research
article to ensure it reflects the truth (O’Neil et al., 2022). Moreover, the authors’ affiliations with
academic institutions further confirmed the scholarly credibility of the work. The authors are
well-qualified individuals who have the authority in this field. They are qualified experts who
can offer reliable insights on the topic. The journal is also other sources which shows that it has
3
been used to inform other research endeavours. The fact that other researchers on the field trust
shows that it can be relied on. The news article was published in the Los Angeles Times on
August 16, 2022, showing that it is a reliable source. The article’s authenticity was assured when
accessed via the Los Angeles Times’ official website. I also double-checked the author’s
credentials and discovered that Michael Pearce was affiliated with the Los Angeles Times. The
book was written by J. Earl and D.A. Rohlinger and released by Emerald Publishing Limited,
provided a thorough investigation of the topic. I carefully examined the book information to
confirm that it was published as a book. Emerald Publishing Limited, a well-regarded company
recognized for producing academic works, published it. Multiple book retailers’ websites and
library catalogs also listed this work as a book, further reinforcing its status. The author is also an
expert in this field with much experience. An International Standard Book Number (ISBN) also
confirmed its categorization as a book. This shows that the book is reliable and that its
information can help research the topic.
Question 3: Assessing the credibility of the news source
After subjecting the news source to the CRAAP Test criteria, I believe it to be reliable.
Since the article was published in August 2022, it satisfies the “currency” requirement since it is
current and pertinent to the ongoing discussion about the role of media in democracy. Regarding
“relevance,” the paper immediately addresses a significant issue regarding the efficiency of
American media in upholding democracy, which is consistent with the subject of my research.
The Los Angeles Times is a reputable news source with a long history of distributing accurate
information, so the “Authority” requirement is satisfied. The author further increases the report’s
legitimacy; Michael Pearce is a well-known journalist who works for the Los Angeles Times.
The article presents several points of view on the subject while providing factual information,
4
which is what ” Accuracy ” means. It does not have any glaring mistakes or false information.
Finally, the “Purpose” requirement is satisfied because the article aims to inform and analyze
rather than advance a particular viewpoint or agenda. It presents a fair analysis of how the media
affects democracy. The article offers several viewpoints without displaying any blatant
prejudice. I believe the chosen news source from the Los Angeles Times to be credible based on
the results of the CRAAP Test. It satisfies all the requirements listed in the CRAAP Test rubric
and demonstrates currency, relevance, authority, correctness, and purposefulness. This
assessment reinforces my confidence in the article’s reliability and suitability for inclusion in my
research on political movements and mass media, particularly in democracy preservation. The
Los Angeles Times is also a reputable and longstanding news organization, adding credibility to
the article. Michael Pearce is also an established journalist, thus providing a balanced analysis of
the media’s role in democracy, enhancing the article’s credibility. The fact that the news article is
current, written by credible journalist and published by a reliable press company makes it a good
source.
References
Earl, J., & Rohlinger, D. A. (Eds.). (2017). Social movements and media. Emerald Publishing
Limited.https://doi.org/10.1108/S2050-206020170000014013.
5
O’Neil, J., Eisenmann, M., & Holman, M. (2022). A mixed methods examination of how people
assess the credibility of sources used by public relations practitioners. Journal of Promotion
Management, 26(1), 75-96.https://doi.org/10.1080/10496491.2018.1536619
Pearce, M. (2022, August 16). American media wants to save democracy. Is it helping? Los
Angeles Times. https://www.latimes.com/entertainment-arts/story/2022-07-29/la-entamerican-media-democracy
Şener, G., Yücel, H., & Yedikardeş, U. (2019). Youth and Party Politics in Digital Era: Social
Media Practices of Young Members of Political Parties in Turkey. Global Media Journal
(İstanbul), 10(19), 1–
.http://globalmediajournaltr.yeditepe.edu.tr/sites/default/files/01_gulum_sener_hakan_yuce
l_umur_yedikardes.pdf
Prof. Emily Hiltz, COMS 2004A Fall 2023
COMS 2004A – Assignment two: Reading and Discussing Literature Reviews
Due: Oct. 19 (Oct. 20) if using the automatic extension option)
Objective: Students will learn how to access and use scholarly literature review
sections of journal articles as part of their ongoing research on a COMS-related topic.
Instructions: Search for scholarly journal articles using Google Scholar and
Carleton’s Omni catalog. Select two sources tied to your topic in assignment one.
Answer the questions below. A paper template is available here.
Formatting: Please include a title page following APA style and double-space your
paper, use 12-point font, Times New Roman. An introduction or conclusion is not
needed for this assignment, and you may use ‘I.’ Save your file as a Word file (.docx).
——————————————————————————————————————–Key Questions to ask in reading and reviewing the selected scholarly sources:
1) Finding Sources: Which two journal articles did you select and how did you find
them? What are their topics and arguments?
Introduce each source and provide a short summary of the topics and arguments the
scholars make in each journal article. Explain how you searched for the sources using
both Omni and Google Scholar. Provide details so someone could replicate your search.
*Approx. answer length: 250-350 words
2) Consulting the authors’ literature reviews: What literature (existing scholarship)
did the authors consult?
Refer to the literature review sections of both articles. If there isn’t a designated literature
section, see parts of the work that refer to other scholarly sources.
What literature or secondary sources do the authors review for their research?
Describe the literature that was consulted by referring to particular disciplines, concepts,
and other scholars that the authors refer to. Please include evidence from the sources
(and cite) to illustrate. *Approx. answer length: 250 words.
3) Reflection: In general, what is the purpose of researchers reviewing literature?
More specifically, in your selected articles, how did the researchers’ review of the
literature shape their work?
Refer to relevant lecture and reading material regarding the purpose of literature
reviews. Refer to evidence from your selected articles to show how the scholars used
the literature to inform their own research practices. Answer: 250-350 words.
Title of Your Assignment: Subtitle If You Have One
Student Name
School of Journalism & Communication, Carleton University
COMS 2004A: Introduction to Communication Research
Prof. Emily Hiltz
TA Name:
Date submitted:
Question 1: Summarizing both sources, explaining the search process
Insert your answer here in complete sentences.
Question 2: Literature the authors consulted
Insert your answer here in complete sentences.
Question 3: How the authors’ literature review shaped their research
Insert your answer here in complete sentences.
1
References
2
How to cite a citation
Some tips!
COMS 2004A – by Grace Goldbaum, Aseel Qazzaz & Emily Hiltz
Step by Step Tips:
• Step 1: The author of your selected article that you’ve chosen is Author A
E.g., Jiwani, 2021
• Step 2: The in-text cited work in Author A’s scholarly article is Author B
E.g., In Jiwani’s (2021) article, she refers to Chao’s (2015) research
• Step 3: To cite other sources that are cited in your article by Author A, use the
following in-text citation: (Author B, Year, as cited in Author A, Year, p. #)
E.g., (Chao 2015, as cited in Jiwani, 2021, p. 54)
• Step 4: Author A’s article must be listed in your reference list*
E.g., Jiwani, Y. (2021). Gendered Islamophobia in the Case of the Returning ISIS
Women: A Canadian Narrative. Islamophobia Studies Journal, 6 (1): 52-77.
*A reminder that two scholarly journal articles are required for this paper. The second article
should also appear in your reference list.
Another example of using indirect citations:
• “For example, suppose you are reading an article by Brown (2014) that cites information from an
article by Snow (1982) that you would like to include in your essay.
For the Reference list, you will only make a citation for the secondary source (Brown). You
do not put in a citation for the primary source (Snow) in the Reference list.
For the in-text citation, you identify the primary source (Snow) and then write “as cited in”
the secondary source (Brown). If you know the year of the publication of the primary source,
include it in the in-text citation. Otherwise, you can omit it. See below for examples.
• According to a study by Snow (1982, as cited in Brown, 2014), 75% of students believe that
teachers should not assign nightly homework.”
From: https://libguides.capilanou.ca/apa/secondary_citation
watch this video for instructions on project https://youtu.be/9SJhVUFQ0qQ?feature=shared
For this project, you will be using the data provided in this module entitled “Container Analysis Data.” The purpose of this analysis is to teach you pivot tables, real world data examples, and for you to understand how to “tell a story with data!”
This is a project that I had to complete while working in the industry and is very relevant to data that would be handed to you in a real-world scenario.
When submitting this assignment, be sure to WORK ALONE, submit both the excel sheet and your word document with screen shots if necessary.
You will need the following information to complete this assignment.
Max Weight and Cube and shipping container sizes
Container Size
Tare (Container) Weight
Max Weight
Max Cube in Meters
Max Cube in Feet
20DV
5220
66430
33.2
1172
40DV
8885
62765
67.7
2390
40HC
8840
62810
76.3
2694
45HC
11130
60520
86.1
3041
*These numbers can vary but this is a good scale to go by as they will not be much different across different ocean carriers.
These are the headers that you will use to complete the project.
FEASIBLE MAX WEIGHT
FEASIBLE MAX CFT
FEASIBLE MAX CBM
CUBE UTILIZATION PCT
WEIGHT UTILIZATION PCT
You will answer the following questions:
1. What is the average cube utilization in percentage?
2. What is the average weight utilization in percentage?
3. Are we utilizing the container cube and weight efficiently?
4. Are there any areas that look particularly inefficient at container utilization?
5. What would cause the weight percentage to be high but the cube percentage to be low?
6. What would cause the cube percentage to be high and the weight percentage to be low?
What area of business are you interested in pursuing? If you are not interested in pursuing a business, how are you planning to monetize your brand to take your brand to the next level?
Explain (please do not list alone, vou have to explain to get your full points) how the Management Functions and Resources will assist you to master and improve your brand, so it can take you to your next level?
What do you need to make your brand pop?
What are your specific “next” steps (within the next 2-3 months) to master additional management skills and move forward in your field to demonstrate your mastery? – (list three (3) next steps and also three management skills (3) needed to master your brand)
Who are the people you will need to reach out to for help with your “next steps above” (list 3 people and explain how they will assist you to get to your next level)?
Write a letter to one of the people who is part of your “next steps” and request a meeting. Your letter will contain:
A brief introduction of yourself
Explain to this person why you selected them as someone you would like to connect with
Explain to this person why you feel this person can help you (What do you want to meet for? What do you want from this person?)
Ask for the meeting time and date.
Close the letter with your conclusion statement.
What is your plan with timeline to connect your brand with your next steps?
How do you plan to connect with these 3 people (you listed above) who can get you to your next… what 3 questions will you ask them?
Create a timeline for the next 2-3 months with specific points of reference for how you will get “from here to there” with respect to one or more goals for your “next step”
NO AI All requirements in the attachment Similarity should be less than 10% plagrisim reports is needed For any clarification please ask
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Module Code
Module Title
Module Credits
GSP6000
Strategic Management
20
Academic Year and
Semester
Examination Board
Level & Block
2023-24, 1st Semester
January 2024
L6B1
Method of Assessment
Term
Weighting
Coursework
Midterm
50%
Module Leader
Module Leader email
Dr. Gina G. Jocson
gina@gulfcollege.edu.om
Additional Information (if any)
Module Tutor: Mr. Nabil Makki
Version 1
Page 1 of 11
Assessment Details
Assessment title
Abr.
Weighting
Coursework
PORT1
50%
Pass marks for undergraduate work is 40%, unless stated otherwise.
Task/assessment brief:
This coursework will be submitted to Turnit-in for originality report. The contexts covered in Strategic
Management module are the bases of this assessment. Read and understand carefully the required
contents to answer all compulsory tasks required below.
The Portfolio: Video Situation
This is a web-link based courseware. Refer to the link below. It is a video in which you can pattern your
writing tasks in this portfolio.
An online short case is presented in the given web link above, you are to view the video as often as you
want to create an academic write-up based on the scenarios presented.
Portfolio Tasks
Based on the online case, complete the required tasks specified as follows:
1. Analytically evaluate the strategic competitive advantage used by Netflix to outperform its
competitors. Specifically ponder on the following: Channel Innovation and Value Proposition
2. Critically analyse the vertical integration strategic model applied by Netflix.
implications to: Movie Goers or subscribers, Competitors, Netflix Organisation
Consider
3. Logically explain the risk of Netflix’s strategic option in disrupting delivery channels and escaping
intermediaries.
4. Write an in-depth conclusion that is reasonably and clearly developed from the preceding
thoughts.
Note: Analyses, evaluation, explanation recommendation should be presented with relevant theories
and convincing concepts to support the answer. ‘In-text’ citations that are consistent to the reference
list should be necessarily provided. The format should be well organised and easy to follow based on
the structured marking criteria specified below.
Version 1
Page 2 of 11
Additional instructions:
Write the number of words used, excluding references, at the end of your assignment. Provide the list of sources
you used at the last page of your assignment with proper label ‘References’. You may include diagrams, figures
etc. without word penalty. The number of words will be + or – 10% of the total words allowed.
A work declaration must be included just after the reference page of your assignment. This ensures that you
prepare your work in good faith. Any form of collusion and/or academic unfair practice will be dealt with
according to the pertinent rules and regulations of the partner university. Please read carefully the plagiarism
guide.
*************
Word count (or equivalent):
2,000
This is a reflection of the effort required for the assessment. Word counts will normally include any text,
tables, calculations, figures, subtitles and citations. Reference lists and contents of appendices are
excluded from the word count. Contents of appendices are not usually considered when determining
your final assessment grade.
Academic or technical terms explained:
Submission Details
Submission
Deadline:
2nd Nov 2023 (Midterm)
After the result
announcement (10
working days) – January
2024 EB
Estimated
Feedback
Return Date
Submission
Time:
9:00 PM
Turnitin:
Any assessments submitted after the deadline will not be marked and will be
recorded as a non-attempt unless you have had an extension request agreed or have
approved mitigating circumstances. See the Gulf College website for more
information on submission details and mitigating circumstances.
File Format:
The assessment must be submitted as a word document and submit through the
Turnitin submission point.
Your assessment should be titled with your:
Student ID number, Module code and Assessment ID,
e.g. 1610200 GAC3000 WRIT1
Version 1
Page 3 of 11
Feedback
Feedback for the assessment will be provided electronically via Turnitin / MS Teams
/ Face to Face. Feedback will be provided with comments on your strengths and the
areas which you can improve. Module tutors give students two types of assessment
feedback: formative, which is given when the student is working on the completion
of an assignment or coursework, and summative, which is given upon completion of
the module. A comprehensive assessment feedback on your performance will be
given after the announcement of the results. (10 Working Days)
Assessment Criteria
Learning outcomes assessed
On successful completion of the module, a student should be able to:
Obtain a systematic understanding of the key aspects of strategy. This will be gained through the
acquisition of coherent and detailed knowledge of relevant aspects of strategy, which will range from
classical theories to the latest thinking in the subject.
Develop the ability to accurately deploy established strategy techniques and approaches, as well as the
latest thinking, regarding analysis, enquiry and application to strategy related concepts and practical
situations.
Gain a conceptual understanding which enables them to devise, contribute to and sustain strategy
related arguments and discussions, whether concerning classical aspects of strategy, or the latest thinking
on strategy and its environments.
Develop a range of problem solving techniques and approaches which can be used to understand and
resolve theoretical and practical situations.
Demonstrate appreciation of the areas of uncertainty, incompleteness, ambiguity, contradictions and the
limits of knowledge relating to strategy and its environments.
Apply the methods, techniques and approaches learnt to review, consolidate extend and apply their
knowledge of strategy and related areas to initiate strategy related tasks and projects, from theoretical
or practitioner perspectives.
Demonstrate understanding of and critically evaluate arguments, assumptions, abstract concepts,
uncertainties and data relating to strategy, which will enable them to frame questions, make judgements
and develop solutions to theoretical and practical problems relating to strategy and its environment.
Demonstrate appropriate skills and knowledge which will allow them to enquire, make decisions and
resolve problems in the complex, ambiguous, incomplete and unpredictable world of strategy and related
areas.
Exercise their own initiative and responsibilities regarding undertaking further training and learning in
strategy and related areas.
Develop and manage their own approaches to learning and training, identifying appropriate research
articles and data, as well as identifying their future training needs in areas relating to strategy
In addition, the assessment will test the following learning outcome:
Develop the ability to accurately deploy established strategy techniques and approaches, as well as the
latest thinking, regarding analysis, enquiry and application to strategy related concepts and practical
situations.
Develop a range of problem solving techniques and approaches which can be used to understand and
resolve theoretical and practical situations.
Be able to apply the methods, techniques and approaches learnt to review, consolidate extend and apply
their knowledge of strategy and related areas to initiate strategy related tasks and projects, from
theoretical or practitioner perspectives.
Version 1
Page 4 of 11
Understand and critically evaluate arguments, assumptions, abstract concepts, uncertainties and data
relating to strategy, which will enable them to frame questions, make judgements and develop solutions
to theoretical and practical problems relating to strategy and its environment.
Marking/Assessment Criteria
Criteria
No. of
Marks
Words
Allocated
Required
(%)
Descriptions
Title: Netflix Strategic Business Model
Brief background of the case in the video
Introduction
Objectives of the portfolio (refer to the tasks)
Analytical evaluation of strategic
competitive advantage used by
Netflix to outperform its
Task
competitors.
1
Specific considerations:
o Channel Innovation
o Value Proposition
Critical analyses of vertical
integration model applied by Netflix
Portfolio
Task Considering implications to:
Contents
2
o Movie Goers or subscribers,
o Competitors,
o Netflix Organisation
Logical explanation about the
risks of Netflix’s strategic option.
Task Focus on disrupting:
3
o Disrupting Delivery Channels
o Escaping Intermediaries
Conclusion
Substantial summary of the portfolio with
emphases on key points that are reasonably
Total
Version 1
and clearly developed from the preceding
thoughts
200
10
500
25
600
30
500
25
200
10
2,000
100
Page 5 of 11
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder. Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. Students must mention question number clearly in their answer. Late submission will NOT be accepted. Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism). Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of week 11, 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 13884
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr Karim Garrouch
Students’ Grade:
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
Case Study
When the CEO Dies,
What Comes First:
His Company or His
Family?
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
HBR’s fictionalized case studies present problems faced
by leaders in real companies and offer solutions from
experts. This one is based on the Xavier Institute of Business
Administration Case Study “The Turnaround of Café Coffee
Day,” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha, which is available on SSRN.com.
144
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
I N THE B OARD RO OM , Priya
Gowda greeted four men in
suits—the creditors of her
husband, Partha, who had died
suddenly of a heart attack 10
days earlier. She felt numb and
exhausted—but also strangely
reassured by the setting. The past
week 1 had been spent dealing
with the funeral home, lawyers,
the media, and grieving family
members. She had barely slept or
eaten. But here, in the headquarters of Splendid Ice Cream, the
business she’d watched Partha
build from a small dairy farm into
a major Indian conglomerate, she
felt his energy animating her.
As sole heir to his majority
stake in the private company,
Priya was now its de facto CEO
and chairperson, responsible for
a diverse portfolio that included
hotels, real estate, and venture
capital investments as well as
dairies and ice-cream shops.
However, she’d learned only the
day before from Splendid’s lead
accountant that the company
was in a precarious financial
position owing to huge debts her
late husband had hidden from
his investors and from her. Over
the past year he’d been taking out
short-term, high-interest loans in
the form of debentures to pay off
Illustrations by ANUJ SHRESTHA
EXPERIENCE
long-term debt. Stress over the
firm’s finances had contributed to
his death, she suspected.
“Thank you all for coming
today,” Priya ventured cautiously.
“I wish we were visiting under
different circumstances,” replied
Vijay Gupta, the president of a
local bank. “We were all shocked
by Mr. Gowda’s death. 2 He was a
visionary entrepreneur. He was
also our friend and partner. But
he left behind a lot of debt, which
is why we’re here today.”
Priya opened the document
the creditors had prepared.
She had seen the figures the
day before, but they were still
shocking. While Splendid’s core
ice-cream business had been
growing steadily and profitably,
thanks to young urban Indian
consumers with global tastes and
disposable income, the broader
company now encompassed
more than 40 subsidiaries,
many of which were in the red.
Partha had clearly been trying to
channel funds from his cash cow
into unrelated ventures, but he’d
taken on excess leverage, and the
company now faced a liquidity
crisis and was struggling to find
the money to cover high interest
payments, taxes, and legal fees.
It had a net debt to EBITDA
ratio of seven—well above the
four considered a threshold for
concern. And loans worth more
than 40 million rupees would
soon come due.
“Priya, I’m sorry to be the one
to tell you this, but we must face
the music,” Vijay said. “You need
to find new sources of capital,
sell Splendid to a buyer willing to
take on the debt, or liquidate the
business.”
Coming into the meeting,
Priya hadn’t been sure what she
wanted to do. So it surprised
her when she blurted out, “No.
I’m not willing to give up my
husband’s legacy. I can save
this company. If you push me to
liquidate it, you’ll get pennies on
the dollar. Give me time, and I’ll
pay off 85% of the debt. All I ask is
that you freeze interest payments
for 24 months.”
Vijay leaned back. “Would
you give us a few moments?” he
asked. Priya nodded but didn’t
budge. This was Splendid’s boardroom—she had no intention
of vacating it. Vijay smiled and
signaled to the other executives
that they should leave the room
with him. A few moments later
the group returned. “We agree
in principle,” said Vijay. “We just
ask to see your plan in writing
and that you keep us regularly
updated on your progress.”
After showing the men out,
Priya sat down at the conference
table. She felt a steely resolve
building inside her. Opening
her laptop, she began typing her
first memo to Splendid’s 25,000
employees as their leader.3
“Dear colleagues,” she wrote.
“Splendid has a legacy worth
preserving….”
THE FAMILY’S PLEA
After all the heartache, today
was to be a happy day. Three
months after Partha’s death, his
and Priya’s younger daughter,
Anjali, was getting married. As
Priya and her older daughter,
Garima, watched, Anjali sat on
the hotel bed while a makeup
artist attended to her Solah
Shringar, the Indian beautifi
cation ritual.
When a mobile ringtone
sounded, the sisters looked up
in alarm. “Ah, this is our PR
firm,” Priya said. “It’s about that
article on our turnaround in
Business Today. I know I said no
work today, but I really should
take this, since it will go to press
tomorrow, and I need to make
sure they have all the facts
straight. It will just take a min—”
Suddenly, Anjali stood, tears
welling up in her eyes. “Garima,
please take the phone from Mom.”
Case Study
Classroom
Notes
1. Some argue
that demands
on grieving
workers are
unrealistic and
that firms don’t
make enough
allowances for
mourning. In
2016, for example, U.S. employees received,
on average, four
days of bereavement leave.
2. Grief.com’s
David Kessler
says to avoid
these phrases
with colleagues
who have lost
loved ones: “She
lived a long life.”
“I know how you
feel.” “Aren’t you
over him yet?
He’s been dead
a while.” “You can
still have another
child/remarry.”
“Be strong.”
3. While 20% of
all businesses in
India are owned
by women, they
are overwhelmingly singleperson enterprises, and many
are in fact controlled by men.
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
145
4. At what point
is it irresponsible
to continue a
doomed business? Should
an entrepreneur
always fight to
keep a business
alive?
5. In 2012, an
Australian
palliative care
nurse published
a book about
the five most
common regrets
her patients
expressed at
the end of their
lives. In the top
five was “I wish
I hadn’t worked
so hard.”
146
Her sister sighed, reached
over, and hit dismiss on the
screen.
Confused, Priya looked back
and forth between them. Now
Anjali was crying.
“Mom, I’ve hardly seen you for
months. I know how much you
want to save Splendid—and dad’s
legacy. But it’s all you’ve thought
or talked about since he passed.
You’re running yourself ragged.
Today is my wedding day, so for
once could we focus on something other than the company?”
Priya felt herself stiffen. “I’m
just trying to keep the business
going, to honor your father…”
“We know, Mom,” Garima
chimed in, with more melancholy
than anger. “But Anjali is right.
And liquidating the business
would give you more than enough
to retire and even an inheritance
to pass on to us and your grandkids 4 one day.” Garima had two
sons in preschool, and Anjali had
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
long joked that she planned to
get pregnant on her honeymoon.
“There’s no guarantee that you
can rescue Splendid, and if you
do, it will take years and years,”
Garima continued. “Do you
really want to spend your sixties
in business meetings instead
of with family and friends? 5
How much have you seen your
grandsons lately? Have you done
any walking with your neighborhood ladies? Are you sleeping
at all? We’re worried about your
health. And we can’t lose another
parent.” Now tears dripped down
her face, too.
“You’re not going to lose me,”
Priya said, pulling both daughters into a hug. “Don’t cry, my
sweeties. You’re right that the
business can and should wait
for today—and other days, too.
I’ll try to be less single-minded
going forward. But don’t discount your old mom, either. I’m
tougher than you think.” She
untangled one arm and flexed it
like a bodybuilder to get Anjali
and Garima to smile. When they
did, she patted them each on
the back. “OK, now. Let’s not
keep our guests and the groom
waiting!”
THE COO’S UPDATE
Priya sat in her office and looked
at the financial documents
in front of her. In her 40-year
marriage to Partha, the pattern
had always been the same. He
would charm everyone he met
and regularly bring new friends
home for dinner, staying up into
the small hours of the morning
eating, drinking, and laughing
with them. Then, when they were
gone and Partha slept, Priya and
her household staff would do the
cleaning up.
And now it seemed he had left
her another mess to deal with at
Splendid. So what was driving
her to mop it up? Love for her
husband? Marital duty? Resentment? The need to tie things off
and move on from him?
She heard a knock at the door.
It was Tasneem Rangwala,
Splendid’s long-standing COO,6
who had been increasingly
sidelined in the last few years of
Partha’s tenure—something that
should have been a warning sign
to Priya and the board. Talented
and honest, Tasneem wouldn’t
have signed off on the highinterest debt.
Now, however, she was Priya’s
right-hand woman, having
helped articulate the turnaround
vision and begun to execute on
it with enthusiasm. The duo
had worked tirelessly to sell
off noncore assets, cut costs,
renegotiate debt, and streamline
operations while also trying to
reinvigorate the company’s core
business by opening new stores,
replacing displays, and launching
a campaign to reaffirm Splendid’s
position as India’s favorite icecream brand. Tasneem had also
brought some new ideas to the
table, such as diversifying into
cold chain logistics—the transport of temperature-sensitive
products—which could not only
create a new revenue stream
for Splendid but also help solve
India’s food waste problem.
“Is now still a good time to
discuss the latest financial statements?” Tasneem asked.
“Of course,” Priya said. “Let’s
sit together on the sofa.”
Tasneem opened her laptop
and pulled up a spreadsheet.
There was some good news.
The net debt to EBITDA ratio
had dropped from seven to
five. Revenue had increased by
8%. Customer satisfaction had
improved by 20%. However, the
company’s operating margin
had decreased by 2% because of
higher costs associated with the
turnaround, and cash reserves
were dwindling.
Priya sighed, thinking back
to Garima’s questions about how
long it would take to turn around
Splendid—and if it could even be
saved. “Tasneem, what do you see
as our next steps?”
“I think we’re making slow
but steady progress, so we should
keep on our path. We still have a
few more real estate holdings and
noncore interests to sell off—we
just need to wait for the right
buyers. We can set up meetings
with the bankers to walk them
through our thinking, and I think
they’ll see that we’re nearly on
track to meet your 85%-in-twoyears promise. In the meantime
I wonder whether it’s time for us
to work up a pitch deck for the
cold chain idea, 7 organize a road
show, and drum up some fresh
capital.”
Priya’s phone dinged with
a text message. It was Garima.
6. In 2000,
48% of S&P 500
companies had
a COO; by 2018
only 32% did.
But COOs are
making a comeback. As of 2022,
40% of leading
companies had
one, and the
role has become
bigger and more
transformative,
according to
McKinsey.
7. Should a
struggling business continue
to try to innovate
and invest
in R&D?
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
147
EXPERIENCE
“Can you still babysit tonight?
We need to leave for our dinner
in a half hour.”
Priya looked at her watch and
felt a surge of guilt. She’d lost
track of time and would have to
leave within the next 10 minutes
to get to her daughter’s house
when she’d promised to. “On my
way!” she texted back.
“Tasneem, I’m so sorry. Can we
pick this up tomorrow?”
“Sure,” the COO responded.
“Shall I go ahead and set up a
meeting with Vijay for later this
week? And with the REIT that was
interested in acquiring the technology park? And start putting
together that pitch deck?”
Priya felt a wave of exhaustion
wash over her but mustered a
smile as she responded, “Yes,
please do. Thank you.”
After the COO left, Priya
hastily gathered her things from
her desk but then found herself
pausing to stare at a framed
picture of Partha. She realized
she hadn’t wept since he’d died—
not even tears of joy at Anjali’s
wedding.
“I’m still mad at you, but I love
you and miss you,” she said to
the photo, a sob catching in her
throat. “So tell me, Partha: What
do you want me to do?”
C. MARIA REX SUGIRTHA is
an assistant professor of
finance and HR at Xavier Institute
of Business Administration (XIBA),
St. Xavier’s College (Autonomous),
in Tirunelveli, India.
148
Harvard Business Review
September–October 2023
Should Priya try to save
Splendid, let it go, or find
a third way?
The experts respond.
CHARLES READ
is the president and
CEO of GetPayroll.
Priya faces a hard choice:
liquidate or sell the firm,
which could make her
relatively wealthy, or strive
to save it and upset her
daughters.
Liquidation seems like the easy choice,
but it would have its own set of repercussions. In India bankruptcy has a
significant social stigma and often
leads to personal and professional
ostracism. But more than that, I sense
that saving the company is Priya’s true
calling. Too often talented women opt
out of leadership roles because of family
responsibilities or societal expectations.
If Priya steps away from the company, it
will be a loss not only for her personally
but also for the business world.
That isn’t to say her journey will be
easy. I’ve faced the profound grief of
surviving the loss of both my wife and
my daughter while running a company.
I also know the stress of managing a
cash-strapped business. Navigating all
that at once requires immense strength
and resilience. I cannot emphasize
enough the importance of self-care in
this context. For instance, I know from
my own experience that Priya is likely
to find dates like Partha’s birthday and
their wedding anniversary overwhelming, so it might be best to avoid being in
the office on such days. The good news
is that it does get easier. The sun continues to rise. Life overtakes mourning.
In addition, as a widow Priya might
be able to open hearts and doors for
Splendid that would otherwise be
closed. Her creditors are human and
not impervious to her situation. Their
sympathy could translate into increased
patience, giving her an advantage in
the quest to save the company. Priya
should set up regular meetings or calls
with them—perhaps weekly or monthly.
You want to overcommunicate with
creditors; never hide from them.
Most important, Priya needs to have
an open and honest conversation with
her daughters. They may yearn for her
to assume the role of doting nani
(grandmother), but she seems drawn
to a different path. She needs to explain
to them that she has chosen to be a
warrior. She loves them dearly and will
make time for them on Diwali, birthdays, and other special occasions, but
for now she is primarily focused on the
business. This is not a negation of her
affection for them but a testament to her
strength and determination to carry on
her late husband’s legacy.
SARAHJANE SACCHETTI
is the chief business
officer of Cleo.
Priya’s focus on firefighting
to save Splendid, while
commendable, is causing
her to neglect the task of
reforming its governance,
the most important step to
getting it back on track.
To start with, a detailed report that
exposes the root causes of the company’s missteps is needed. Unanswered
questions, such as how Partha’s actions
went unchecked and why his COO felt
voiceless, must be addressed. That will
pave the way for an environment with
greater transparency and accountability
and a “no surprises” rule.
Second, it’s vital for Priya to avoid
the myth of a corporate savior, which
led Partha (and Splendid) astray and
could recur if she’s not careful. Instead
of heroics, she should invest in building
a strong team that can work to prevent
misconduct and ensure higher levels of
transparency. Private companies that
let charismatic founders run unchecked
often become cautionary tales, as
Theranos and FTX illustrate.
She should also consider a co-CEO
model. That approach was instrumental
for me when I had to step back from my
CEO role and become a caregiver for a
parent with ALS. I’d recommend that
the co-CEO be an external hire—someone from industry who can bring a fresh
perspective and dilute the cult of personality that grew up around Partha and
could be re-created with Priya. While
this move may risk alienating Tasneem,
it will prepare the organization for
future contingencies and transitions.
Last, Priya’s determination to shoulder the burden of Splendid’s survival
is not only damaging to her health and
family but also potentially detrimental
to the company. Traditional perspectives might suggest that she should just
lean in to the work and let her mental
INCLUDES CUSTOMIZABLE TOOLS AND
and family healthTEMPLATES
suffer, but
soFORMATS
IN doing
MULTIPLE
can be unsustainable for her and risky
for the business. The fact is, about
70% of U.S. caregivers are women, and
the percentage is even higher in other
countries. Rethinking the executive
team with a sustainable model is a
solution that can help all leaders—not
just female ones—balance competing
demands and future-proof a company.
At Splendid it might better ensure longterm success.
HBR Reprint R2305M
Reprint Case only R2305X
Say Goodbye
to Boring
Presentations
special
collection
How good are your charts?
HBR’s Good Charts for
Persuasive Presentations
Set helps you turn plain
charts into smart, effective
visualizations that engage
your audience and convey
your ideas. Building good
charts is a must-have skill
for managers.
Good Charts for Persuasive
Presentations Set: How to Use
the Best Data Visualizations
for Great Presentations
PRODUCT #1083BN • 3 EBOOKS + TOOLS
$115 • DIGITAL FORMAT
A savings of more than 10% off the
individual components!
Reprint Commentary only R2305Z
AVAILABLE EXCLUSIVELY AT:
store.hbr.org
1-800-988-0886 OR +1-617-783-7500
Copyright 2023 Harvard Business Publishing. All Rights Reserved. Additional restrictions
may apply including the use of this content as assigned course material. Please consult your
institution’s librarian about any restrictions that might apply under the license with your
institution. For more information and teaching resources from Harvard Business Publishing
including Harvard Business School Cases, eLearning products, and business simulations
please visit hbsp.harvard.edu.
Open a blank MS Excel spreadsheet and create manually a mini dataset of two university systems. The dataset should include 23 CSU Campuses and 11 Senior CUNY Colleges (34 rows total)
Create the following variables by collecting data from CSU Links to an external site and CUNY Wikipedia Links to an external site. Here you can also find further Wiki links to individual campuses/colleges. Where data is not available leave the cell blank.
Variables (10 columns in Excel):
Name of the university system (CSU or CUNY)
Location (state)
Name of the college/campus
Date (year) of establishment
Endowment (latest available year)
Number of students (latest available year)
Number of undergraduates (latest available year)
Number of postgraduates (latest available year)
Number (full time & + part time) of academic staff (latest available data)
Number (full time & + part time) of administrative staff (latest available data)
Price escalation is a major pricing problem for the international marketer. How can this problem be counteracted? Discuss.
What kinds of training would be most useful for international business negotiators?
Do value added taxes discriminate against imported goods?
Discuss the major problems facing a company that is countertrading.
What is meant by “laws are the markers of past behavior that society has deemed unethical or socially irresponsible?”
Discuss the evolution of world trade that has led to the formulation of the WTO.
Does widespread unemployment change the economic logic of protectionism?
Your response to each of the seven questions above should be between 150-to-200-words. The content taken from textbook or any other source should be paraphrased (written in own words). Write in complete sentences and use good grammar, double-spacing, 12 point font, with one inch margins. Be sure to cite your resources and use APA format for the entire assignment. You are required to cite 6 sources.
Do number 9 which is perform appropriate sensitivity analysis
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Normal Probablity Calculator
Mean
Std Dev
Prob. X < x
x
z- score
z-score
x
Prob. X < x
x
z- score
z- score
x
ity Calculator
Prob. X > x
x1
Prob. x1 to x2
x2
Prob. X > x
x1
Prob. x1 to x2
x2
Mean
Std Dev
Mean
Std Dev
Key West Electronics
Key West Electronics was just ten years old in early 2018, with sales expected to pass the $500
million and net income just beginning to turn positive after years of losses or near break-even.
After nine years of operations, the combined losses totaled close to $20 million, and only a
fresh infusion of capital and a new CEO kept the company in business.
The industry was changing so rapidly that the initial product line lost its market eighteen
months after its introduction and start of production. Key West had planned for new products
to come on line, but the philosophy of making products compatible with all systems held back
introduction. Although the company had begun to recover from some of its early difficulties, a
new strategy had to be developed if the growth in sales that brought the company to a half
billion-dollar level was going to become profitable.
The new CEO of the company, George Ramos, came from outside the computer manufacturing
area. Ramos was hired at the insistence of the venture-capital company that controlled Key
West Electronics. Ramos realized that characterizing market uncertainty was a key factor in
helping shape a long-term plan of action.
Key West, because of its technical expertise, had been considered to be a leader in the market,
but a new company, Allied Enterprises, had recently been started. Ramos was uncertain as to
exactly what markets Allied would enter, but the consequences for Key West Electronics would
be significant if Allied were to enter into similar markets. If their products were to compete,
profit margins for both companies would be reduced, and neither would make a reasonable
rate of return.
A final concern for Ramos was in the area of production. Cost estimates were notoriously
unreliable for new products.
Ramos and Key West Electronics need to decide on production of a new memory expansion
system (MES). This system, as proposed, would expand the memory and capability of a wide
range of computer platforms. Based on an initial evaluation, it appeared the product would
offer significant profits over its expected six-year life. It was known that none of the major
manufacturers had plans for development of similar products and only Allied had the potential
for development and marketing of a competing product. If successful, the new line, would lead
Key West into a period of sustained profitability. Data on the proposed system is shown in the
following table:
•
•
•
•
Plant Cost $60 million
Life 6 years
Tax Rate 40%
Salvage $0/Depreciated on straight-line basis over life of 6 years
The uncertainty in the project revolved around three areas: market size, market share, and cost
of production. Excerpts from the project proposal concerning risk were as follows.
•
The market size is expected to be either $300 million or $200 million each year for the
next six years.
•
The major threat is whether or not Allied will bring out a competing product at the same
time as the introduction of the Key West Electronics MES line. Based on the current
competition, it would appear that in the absence of Allied coming into the game, Key West
market share would be 30 per cent for each of the next six years. In the event that Allied does
introduce a product, that product would take 10 points from our share and leave us with 20 per
cent of the market for the next six years. Our estimate is that the probability of this occurring is
50 per cent.
•
The production of the MES will require a costly manual assembly process. There is an
automated system that can be licensed but may not work for the quantities that are needed. In
the absence of that system the estimate is that costs, exclusive of depreciation, will be 70 per
cent of sales. If the new production system can be used the will be reduced to 60 per cent of
sales. Our estimate is that the probability of the system being applicable is 50 per cent. There
are no savings in the initial outlay, because our cost of the new system is based solely on our
use of it.
Ramos wanted risk taken into account in all capital projects and had developed the following
criteria for any project to be acceptable.
•
•
The NPV of the expected value of the after-tax cash flows had to be positive at the 16
per cent discount rate.
The NPV of the cash flows, using the worst case, had to be no less a loss than 20 per
cent of the project outlay.
Stefanie Murphy, the president of Key West Electronics, evaluated the MES following the
recommendations of Ramos.
•
The venture showed a positive net present value on its expected cash flows. This meets
the first of the Ramos decision criteria.
•
The second criterion was a risk under a worst-case scenario. The project’s NPV under
this situation could not be less than a loss of 20 per cent of the project cost. After
conducting this test, it seemed that the MES was a ‘No Go’ because it failed the worstcase scenario standard.
However, Murphy ultimately decided that the worst-case scenario should not be used alone in
evaluation of any project. As an alternative, Murphy proposed that all possible outcomes be
computed for the project. From this set of outcomes, a mean and standard deviation could be
calculated. Using these statistics an estimate could be made regarding the probability that the
project would have a positive NPV.
Ramos agreed that the project should be reevaluated using the following revised criteria
proposed by Murphy:
•
•
•
The expected value of the NPV must be positive.
The probability that the NPV was zero or greater must be at least 60%.
The probability that the loss would be no more than 20% of the project cost would be
no more than 10%.
Go or No-Go for MES??
Case Objectives and Questions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Compute the net cash flows for year’s 1-6.
Compute the NPV on the expected value of the net cash flows.
Compute the net cash flows for the worst-case scenario.
Compute the NPV on the cash flows for the worst-case scenario.
Evaluate the risk criteria that Ramos uses.
Compute the NPV for each of the eight possible sets of conditions from the data.
Compute the mean and standard deviation of the project NPV’s using the eight values.
Evaluate the risk criteria that Murphy uses.
a.
Is the expected value of the NPV’s greater than zero?
b.
Is the probability that the NPV is equal to or greater than zero 60 per cent or
more?
c.
Is the probability that the loss would be no more than 20% of the project
investment less-than-or-equal-to10%?
d.
If the answer to part c is no then what is the potential loss associated with a
probability of 10% or less?
Perform appropriate sensitivity analysis.
What is a revised approach to making this decision that you think Ramos and Murphy
would accept but would also lead to ‘Go’ decision for the MES?
Investment
60
Before Tax Profit
Depreciation
Taxable Cash
Tax (40%)
After Tax
PV Cash Flows
NPV
1
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
22.07
34.33
2
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
19.02
3
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
16.40
4
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
14.14
Key West best case scenario NPV for the memory expansion system (MES)
300 Market cap (mil)
30% Large share
90 Sales (mil)
54 Low Cost (mil)
36 Cash flow
Discount Rate
16%
5
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
12.19
6
36
10
26
10.4
25.6
10.51
2X2X2
Decision Tree
Pay
Payoffs
Company Name, Product, and New Target Audience
Market Research Memo #2 – Know Your Beachhead Market
To: The Executive Committee
Follow instructions in grey
text, replace blue font with
required information, and
review checklist on page 3.
Delete this text box when all
instructions are completed.
From: Yu Han
CC: Implementation Team
Due Date: October 22, 2023
Re: Know Your Beachhead Market
Out of all the potential target audiences we have reviewed, we have chosen to target ______________
as our initial entry into this industry. Below is an End-User Profile of our Beachhead Audience
describing their demographic information, psychological and emotional profile, and finally, their primary
“needs” and “wants.”
We have also included a market size analysis via our TAM, SAM, and SOM table below to assess how
big our beachhead market will be. Please note that the TAM (Total Addressable Market) is the total
size of the industry. In contrast, SAM (the Serviceable Addressable Market) is the size of our beachhead
market after applying demographic and geographic criteria to the TAM. Our SOM is our target Share
of the Market that we are confident in acquiring with our product launch.
I.
End-User Profile of Our Beachhead Market
Describe your beachhead market with an end-user profile using guidance from the class presentation.
What are their psychological profile and personal values? What label would you give them? Come up
with more psychological details of your audience and validate them with research. Don’t make up stuff.
It is easy to see.
Where do you think they exist? What part of the US do you think you will find them? What are their
values? Please do not use personas for this section, as these often become fake and overly ideal
audiences.
Try to use the beachhead market as your search terms within NYU Bobst Library’s business, marketing,
psychology, and sociology databases to figure out who they are and how they think. Focus on the
search terms to help you find exactly what you want.
You may use age brackets and income ranges, but… you must be realistic and validate them as what
you think people can afford is not truly what they can afford. You must remember that the costs of
living in the US are very high vs. salaries. Salaries have not kept up with food prices, rent, health care,
or even basic transportation costs. Once again, do not use averages! They are misleading and
can easily be skewed by a higher number. Use income ranges instead.
1
II.
TAM, SAM, and SOM Table
In Excel, build out a lovely, professional-looking table with your beachhead market’s TAM, SAM, and
SOM formatted professionally and efficiently with calculations for each step from TAM to SAM.
1. TAM is the total size of your industry or the size of your product category. Look under the Statista
database to find this number, or research your industry size under marketing databases within
Bobst Library.
2. SAM is your calculating the size of the beachhead market using the criteria you spelled out in
the End-User Profile. Seek out those data points of the End-User Profile to help you narrow the
TAM to the SAM by multiplying that % by your TAM to help narrow and come up with the size of
the beachhead market.
3. SOM is based on your research and confidence in your product or service design; estimate a
Share of the Market (SOM) that you want to target. This % share will translate into a $ share
that you will use as a revenue target between 3 and 5 years from now in the forecasting
assignment later in the class.
Make sure that Excel table lines have been deleted by coloring the cells with white color. Also, make
sure titles are clear to read and centered. All business formatting requirements also apply to this table,
including font, centering the table in this document, and using footnotes to describe where the data
came from.
Examples from prior classes have been shown to help you design the table.
III.
TAM, SAM, and SOM Analysis
Describe the assumptions and calculations found in the table above. Use bullet points to describe
where the data came from and the analysis. Does your SAM emulate the details in the end-user profile
of the beachhead market?
2
Memo Checklist and Instructions:
1.
Use only this Word document template to complete the assignment.
document.
Do not start a new
2.
Replace the blue font text with the required text mentioned.
3.
Answer the questions in grey font under each section, then delete the grey text after you have
completed that section.
4.
Convert grey font into black font text for your content and paragraphs.
5.
Format this memo to business writing requirements:
a. Helvetica Neue / Arial, 12-point font, single spacing, short paragraphs.
b. One line space between paragraphs, full justified, with no indents.
6.
Write complete sentences for each section. Use bullet points, when necessary, in this memo.
7.
Use the Grammarly app to check and review your writing and grammar.
8.
Do a spell check in Word to catch spelling and format errors.
9.
Keep paragraphs for each section short (and easy to read) and not excessively long.
10. Convert the memo to PDF using the Print function to “printing to PDF” for submission.
11. Make sure you use EndNote to create folders to organize your research, as it will help you with
the MLA format bibliography you need to produce at the end of this document.
12. The bibliography should start on a separate page at the end of this memo.
13. You must have at least 25 sources for this memo in MLA format. Each source must be
single-spaced, with a blank line between each listed source.
14. Delete each bullet point in this checklist as you complete it.
15. Make sure the whole checklist is deleted before submission.
16. Submit on Brightspace after edited, spell-checked, used Grammarly, and converted to PDF.
17. Finally, talk out your memo in a private room to catch errors and make quality edits.
3
Bibliography
1.
2.
3.
4.
4
About This AssignmentIn this assignment, you will reflect on your values, strengths, areas of improvement, and experiences that capture who you are and how they connect to the 10 Skills and your personal, academic, and professional goals by sharing your thoughts in the template below.There are three parts of this template for you to complete:Reflect on Your Goals, Strengths, and Growth Opportunities.Share Two Experiences.Reflection.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.Use APA style for reference.Please follow the instructions as described in the assignment
Research the TOPIC.Present 1 page-long write-up on the topic (not more); Font size = 12; No doubling spacing.In your write-up, please provide insights on how the TOPIC item can be used for/in business.Please, provide your REFERENCE sources (any style will do).Write your name and section at the end of the work. My topic is drone
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Malak Alghamdi
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges
of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ”
Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance
and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson,
M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number
of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks)
(Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a
large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02
Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of
the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02
Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational
Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an
organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical.
What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words
200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually
increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might
explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
This week you will complete your strategic marketing plan for your selected business by identifying customer segments, developing an implementation plan, evaluating communication channels, and determining metrics. You will submit all 3 parts of your strategic marketing plan you have worked on in this course in 1 document.Complete Wk 6 – Part C: Market Strategy, Marketing Channels, Implementation, and Monitoring of the Strategic Marketing Plan in the same document that contains your completed Parts A and B.I have attached the file, the items highlighted are the ones that need to be completed. The file is Part A and Part B Strategic Marketing Plan Template. Please complete part CAlso attached is the Week 5 for reference and assistance for this.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Outline for Nike Brand
2
Nike is a global leader in sportswear and athletic equipment. The company has always
been at the forefront of innovative marketing strategies, setting the benchmark for how brands
communicate with their audience. Nike’s prowess extends beyond just crafting premium
products; it’s about building a narrative, a movement, and an emotional connection with
consumers across the globe. In an era where attention spans are dwindling, and competition is
fiercer than ever, Nike recognizes the paramount importance of selecting and leveraging the right
communication channels. The company combines traditional mediums with contemporary digital
platforms to cater to its diverse demographic. These traditional or digital channels are tailored to
resonate with Nike’s brand ethos and ensure consumer engagement.
1. Television Advertising
•
Functionality: Television remains one of the most influential mediums to
captivate a widespread audience. The marketing communication strategy
possesses visual and auditory combinations, which provide a canvas for brands
like Nike to paint compelling narratives (Bruce et al., 2020).
•
Application for Nike: Major sporting events, such as the Olympics, World Cup,
or the NBA Finals, are prime opportunities for Nike. During these times, millions
tune in, making it the perfect platform to launch new products or campaigns.
Through evocative storytelling – showcasing the journey of an underdog athlete
or the innovations behind a new shoe line – Nike leverages TV advertising to tap
into the viewers’ emotions.
•
Key Message: “Find your greatness” – a call to individuals to break barriers and
achieve personal bests. On the other hand, the “Just Do It” television advert is a
3
marketing communication strategy that is a call for action that urges viewers to
overcome challenges, both in sports and life, embodying the spirit of triumph.
2. Social Media Marketing
•
Functionality: The digital age demands a robust presence on platforms where
consumers spend significant time.
•
Application for Nike: Platforms like Instagram, Twitter, TikTok, and Facebook
allow Nike to engage directly. Through these platforms, Nike can showcase
behind-the-scenes looks into product development, share user-generated content,
and even run interactive campaigns (Karra, 2023).
•
Key Message: “Nike as a lifestyle” – weaving sports into the fabric of everyday
life.
3. Influencer Partnerships
•
Functionality: Tapping into the reach of popular personalities to build brand
credibility and widen reach.
•
Application for Nike: Collaborating with athletes, celebrities, and influential
figures on social media can create authentic product endorsements (Schouten et
al., 2019). This strategy allows Nike to leverage these influencers’ trust with their
audience.
•
Key Message: Authenticity in every stride and leap.
4. Retail Experience
•
Functionality: Merging the tangible with the intangible, creating memorable instore experiences.
4
•
Application for Nike: Nike’s flagship stores, immersive pop-up events, and AR
integrations can transform traditional shopping. Customers can physically engage
with products, experience the brand’s ethos, and understand Nike’s commitment to
innovation (Chandukala et al., 2022).
•
Key Message: Every visit is a journey through Nike’s world.
5. Email Marketing
•
Functionality: A direct line to Nike’s loyal customer base, offering tailored
content.
•
Application for Nike: In the crowded world of digital communication, email
marketing, when executed with precision, stands out as a direct and personalized
bridge to consumers (SABBAGH, 2021). For Nike, this channel represents an
opportunity to engage their loyal fanbase with tailored content that resonates.
Leveraging sophisticated data analytics, Nike segments its subscribers to send
targeted emails. The company can subsequently utilize AI-driven insights to
ensure content relevance.
•
Key Message: A personal touch from the world’s leading sportswear brand.
Conclusively, Nike’s holistic approach to marketing communication showcases the
brand’s deep understanding of its diverse and evolving audience. The company harmoniously
blends traditional channels like TV advertising with contemporary mediums such as social media
and influencer partnerships. The utilization of diverse marketing communication mediums
demonstrates Nike’s adaptability and vision. The retail experiences further echo their
commitment to tangible interactions, while email marketing underscores their value on
individual relationships. In an ever-competitive market, it’s more than just having quality
5
products but also effective storytelling and audience engagement. Nike excels in both these
arenas. Their communication strategies are testimonies to their mission of inspiring everyone,
whether athletes or casual consumers, to embrace the mantra: “Just Do It.
6
References
Bruce, N. I., Becker, M., & Reinartz, W. (2020). Communicating brands in television
advertising. Journal of Marketing Research, 57(2), 236–256.
https://doi.org/10.1177/0022243719892576
Chandukala, S. R., Reddy, S. K., & Tan, Y. C. (2022, March 31). How augmented reality can and can’t – help your brand. Harvard Business Review. https://hbr.org/2022/03/howaugmented-reality-can-and-cant-help-yourbrand#:~:text=Based%20on%20our%20recently%20published,%2C%20customer%20be
havior%2C%20and%20sales.
Karra, S. (2023, January 20). Council post: How social media is changing business strategies.
Forbes. https://www.forbes.com/sites/forbesbusinesscouncil/2023/01/19/how-socialmedia-is-changing-business-strategies/?sh=710e81802f5f
SABBAGH, F. (2021). Email marketing: The most important advantages and disadvantages.
Journal of Economics and Technology Research, 2(3).
https://doi.org/10.22158/jetr.v2n3p14
Schouten, A. P., Janssen, L., & Verspaget, M. (2019). Celebrity vs. Influencer endorsements in
advertising: The role of identification, credibility, and product-endorser fit. International
Journal of Advertising, 39(2), 258–281. https://doi.org/10.1080/02650487.2019.1634898
MKT/574 v2
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
Use the business you selected in Week 1 and complete the prompts provided for Parts A, B, and C in
the weeks they correspond to. Delete the provided prompts from each section when you finish each part.
Complete the References section as you progress through Parts A, B, and C.
Include your name in the document’s file name when you submit it.
Wk 2 – Part A: Environmental Analysis and SWOT
Analysis
Use the information you researched in your Week 1 assignment for the sections they correspond to in this
part.
For additional resources that may be helpful with components in Part A, refer to the resources provided
on the Week 2 University Library page.
Business Description
Describe the business you are designing the plan for. Include the mission statement, vision statement,
product line description, and business information (such as the size of the business).
Nike, Inc. has undergone a transformative journey since its inception in 1964. Originating as Blue Ribbon,
co-founded by Philip Knight and Bill Bowerman, the enterprise initially operated as an importer of Japan’s
Tiger Company, now recognized as Asics (Meyer, 2019). After a commercial dispute in 1971, the
company rebranded itself as Nike. Its roots were laid in an era dominated by Adidas and Puma. Currently
headquartered in Oregon, Nike has expanded its presence with over 1,000 physical outlets globally and a
robust online retail network encompassing third-party platforms and its proprietary e-commerce site (Nike,
Inc., 2023a). The brand’s ascendancy is notably attributed to its strategic association with controversial
athletes such as Joe McEnroe and Michael Jordan. Moreover, their mission, “To bring inspiration and
innovation to every athlete in the world,” coupled with their vision, “To do everything possible to expand
human potential,” resonates with their commitment to fostering human potential (Nike, Inc., 2023b). Nike’s
diversified product portfolio encompasses six primary lines: Nike Basketball, Jordan Brand, Football,
Running, Training, and Sportswear. Although beginning as a shoe manufacturer, Nike’s modern-day
operations are primarily in research & development, marketing & distribution.
Environmental Analysis
Analyze the forces that affect the business and marketing efforts.
Nike, Inc., the world’s foremost athletic apparel, footwear, and accessories company, has navigated an
intricate web of environmental forces since its inception as Blue Ribbon in 1964 (Meyer, 2019). These
forces are pivotal in shaping its business strategies and marketing efforts. Firstly, the socio-cultural force
is evident in Nike’s longstanding commitment to aligning with prominent and sometimes controversial
athletes. From McEnroe’s rebellious spirit in tennis to Jordan’s audacious colored shoes in basketball,
Nike has historically capitalized on the cultural zeitgeist, resonating deeply with its audience. Their
association with figures like Kaepernick signals their continued engagement with socio-political
discussions, reflecting societal values and ideals. Economically, Nike’s substantial presence in diverse
regions, from North America to the Asia Pacific, underlines the need to adapt to varying economic
conditions. While North America is its largest market, accounting for 42.2% of annual revenues (Nike,
Inc., 2023a), emerging markets present opportunities and challenges. These regions’ economic
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 2 of 13
dynamics, purchasing power, and consumer preferences necessitate tailored marketing strategies.
Technologically, Nike is at the forefront of innovation. Its emphasis on research & development ensures
that the company stays ahead of its competitors in introducing cutting-edge designs and technologies.
This focus on innovation aligns seamlessly with its mission to inspire every athlete and expand human
potential (Nike, Inc., 2023b). Competitively, the athletic wear market is intensely contested. While Nike is
a dominant player in North America with a 21.1% market share (CSIMarket, 2023), it faces stiff
competition globally from brands like Adidas. Their diversified product lines and target markets and iconic
branding efforts like the swoosh have maintained this leadership.
Competitive Forces
Analyze the business’s key competitors. You may choose to use a BCG matrix or attribute checklist to
compare your selected business against its competitors. Describe any strategic moves the competition
has recently made. Estimate the business’s market share. Identify key competitive advantages against
your selected business’s competitors.
Nike’s primary competitors include Adidas, Puma, and newer entrants in the sportswear industry.
According to data from CSIMarket (2023), Nike dominates the North American market with a 21.1%
share, significantly overshadowing Adidas at 5%. This dominance can be attributed to Nike’s relentless
innovation, strategic athlete partnerships, and iconic brand elements like the swoosh. A valuable tool for
comparative analysis is the BCG matrix, positioning Nike as a star – high market share in a high-growth
market.
Economic Forces
Analyze the economic environment in the areas affecting your selected business. Consider differences
within their industry and the economic impact on suppliers.
As a global entity, Nike is susceptible to economic fluctuations in various regions. Economic downturns
influence consumers’ purchasing power, whereas surges could enhance sales. Additionally, the economic
health of suppliers, primarily in Asian markets, significantly influences Nike’s production and distribution.
As a global entity, Nike is susceptible to economic fluctuations in various regions. A nuanced
understanding of the economic environment, both globally and in specific regional markets, is paramount
for the brand’s sustained growth.
Global Economic Landscape: The broader global economic trends impact consumer purchasing power. In
times of economic prosperity, consumers are more likely to invest in premium brands like Nike.
Conversely, discretionary spending might be curtailed during economic downturns, potentially affecting
sales.
Regional Economic Disparities: Nike’s sales data reveals its dependency on different geographic regions.
North America, for instance, contributes to over 42% of its revenues (Tighe, 2023). Therefore, economic
fluctuations in this region could have a pronounced impact on Nike’s bottom line. Similarly, economic
growth and expanding middle classes in regions like China and the Asia Pacific offer lucrative market
penetration and expansion opportunities.
Industry-Specific Economics: The athletic wear industry is marked by fierce competition. Brands
constantly innovate, not just in product design but also in manufacturing processes, to reduce costs and
enhance product appeal. For instance, economic forces that influence the cost of raw materials can
impact profitability.
Economic Impact on Suppliers: Nike’s decision to outsource most of its production means it is intrinsically
linked to the economic health of its suppliers. Factors like wage inflation in manufacturing hubs or
geopolitical issues affecting trade can disrupt supply chains or inflate costs.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 3 of 13
Political Forces
Analyze relevant political forces. Examples may include an election year or a law to drastically reduce or
eliminate plastic waste in a county that would affect your selected business.
Political forces invariably influence business operations, and for global behemoths like Nike, Inc.,
understanding and navigating this terrain is vital for sustained success. A couple of political
considerations are especially pertinent. Firstly, as a multinational company, Nike operates in various
political environments (Khoo, 2017). In countries where Nike has significant operations or sales, different
election cycles could lead to policy shifts affecting trade tariffs, import-export regulations, or labor laws.
For instance, protectionist policies in a major market could increase operational costs or impede market
access. Thus, Nike must remain politically astute, anticipating policy changes and devising strategies to
mitigate potential risks. Secondly, there’s a growing global emphasis on sustainability, with many
countries legislating against environmental degradation. For example, laws aimed at reducing plastic
waste could directly impact Nike’s production processes, especially its footwear and apparel packaging
(Khoo, 2017). Moreover, regulations promoting eco-friendly manufacturing practices might necessitate
modifications in Nike’s supply chain, urging the brand to adopt more sustainable raw materials or
production techniques. Incorporating these political considerations into Nike’s marketing plan is crucial.
Emphasizing sustainability in marketing campaigns, not just as a reaction to political pressures but as a
core brand value, can resonate deeply with eco-conscious consumers.
Legal, Regulatory, and Ethical Issues
Analyze the legal, regulatory, and ethical issues that may affect your selected business. Considerations
may include local laws such as a ban on the use of plastic bags, the ability to post billboards, or a
possible increased regulation on direct mail.
In the intricate milieu of global commerce, enterprises like Nike, Inc. are continuously navigating a web of
legal, regulatory, and ethical complexities. Based in Oregon, U.S., Nike must adhere to multifaceted legal
frameworks, both domestically and internationally. The adherence to the law must especially be present
in light of past controversies over working conditions in offshore manufacturing units, which are
particularly salient. U.S. laws, such as the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, can impact how Nike oversees
its operations abroad (SEC.gov, 2020). Environmental regulations, such as those governing waste
reduction in states with bans on single-use plastics, can significantly impact Nike’s packaging
methodologies. Besides, as a significant importer, Nike’s operations are influenced by U.S. customs laws,
tariffs, and trade agreements. Equally crucial are advertising standards that ensure companies like Nike,
known for their robust marketing strategies, maintain transparency and avoid misleading consumers. U.S.
regulations govern truth in advertising, ensuring companies do not mislead consumers. With Nike’s
aggressive marketing campaigns, ensuring compliance is crucial.
Ethical considerations further complicate this landscape. The global emphasis on sustainability places an
onus on Nike to adopt and promote eco-friendly production practices. Additionally, ethical imperatives
require Nike to guarantee fair wages and safe working conditions. The company must also rigorously
oppose child labor throughout its vast supply chain. Navigating these challenges, especially in marketing,
demands a multi-pronged approach. Nike can further engender consumer trust by emphasizing
transparency in its operations. Embracing sustainable initiatives can position the brand as a trailblazer in
eco-conscious production and resonate with environmentally aware consumers.
Technological Forces
Analyze whether your selected business will be affected by emerging technologies or trends in hardware
and software industries.
In an era of rapid technological progression, Nike, Inc., a brand synonymous with athletic excellence,
finds itself navigating the tumultuous waters of emerging technologies. Given its position as the world’s
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 4 of 13
premier apparel, footwear, and accessories company (CSIMarket, 2023), it is paramount to understand
the impact of technological forces. The retail sector, where Nike prominently operates, is witnessing a
seismic shift due to advancements in e-commerce and digital technologies. Nike’s online retailing
presence on third-party platforms and its own e-commerce site (Nike, Inc., 2023a) is a testament to its
early adaptation. However, as augmented reality (A.R.) and virtual reality (V.R.) technologies mature,
there’s potential for a more immersive online shopping experience, allowing users to “try on” products
virtually or engage with them in novel ways. Furthermore, the rise of wearable technology and the Internet
of Things (IoT) offers tantalizing prospects for Nike. Smart footwear or apparel that tracks athletic
performance, offers feedback, or adjusts to weather conditions could align seamlessly with Nike’s mission
of “bringing inspiration and innovation to every athlete” (Nike, Inc., 2023b). Moreover, in manufacturing,
technologies like 3D printing present opportunities for customized product offerings, allowing consumers
to tailor designs to their preferences. This could revolutionize Nike’s approach to production, reducing
lead times and bringing some manufacturing processes closer to the consumer.
Social Forces
Analyze social trends and how they may affect your selected business. Considerations may include if the
business will be affected by demographic trends or a growing dependence on computers, or whether
interest in your product might be affected by growing preferences in the way things are done or changing
social values.
Several prevailing social trends could profoundly influence the brand’s trajectory. Firstly, demographic
shifts are paramount. As emerging markets, particularly in Asia, witness burgeoning middle classes and
increased disposable incomes, there’s an expanding clientele for premium brands like Nike. The age
demographic is equally pivotal; younger generations, driven by digital connectivity and influenced by
global pop culture, are potential consumers of Nike’s diverse product lines, from basketball to sportswear.
Furthermore, Nike’s historical associations with global athletes, such as Michael Jordan and Cristiano
Ronaldo, resonate deeply with this demographic, enhancing its market outreach. Secondly, the escalating
reliance on technology, especially computers and mobile devices, cannot be overstated. Nike’s strong
online presence, encompassing third-party e-commerce platforms and its proprietary site (Nike, Inc.,
2023a), places it advantageously to leverage this trend. However, this digital shift also necessitates
robust cyberinfrastructure, enhanced user experience designs, and agile digital marketing strategies to
remain competitive. Lastly, changing social values, particularly those emphasizing sustainability,
inclusivity, and social responsibility, reshape consumer preferences. Brands are increasingly evaluated
on product quality and their broader societal impact. Nike’s association with controversial yet influential
figures, like Collin Kaepernick, signals its alignment with progressive social discourse. However, evolving
consumer consciousness also mandates transparent supply chains, sustainable manufacturing practices,
and holistic corporate responsibility.
Current Target Markets
Define the business’s current target markets. Describe the demographic, geographic region,
psychographics, and product usage of these targets.
Nike’s target market is vast and varied, catering to athletes, urban consumers, and working parents alike.
Their market diversification strategy has ensured no single consumer segment dominates their sales.
Geographically, North America emerges as a dominant player, contributing to 42.2% of Nike’s annual
revenues. Nike further has customers in regions like Europe, the Middle East, and Africa at 26.2%. China
and the Asia Pacific, including Latin America, also form significant portions of Nike’s market with 14.2%
and 12.6% respectively.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 5 of 13
Current Marketing Tactics
Review their current marketing tactics. Summarize how people find out about the product, how they get
information about the product or service, what might be involved in the buying process, and what money
is available for marketing. If your selected business is a start-up, describe their competitors’ current
marketing.
Nike’s marketing prowess is evident in its strategic alliances with top-tier athletes, paving the way for
brand recognition and loyalty. The company’s innovative designs are underpinned by cutting-edge
technology. The designs further help Nike differentiate themselves in a saturated market. Despite limiting
its offerings to three brands – Nike, Jordan, and Converse, Nike’s emphasis on brand recognition,
epitomized by the iconic swoosh, fortifies its global identity.
SWOT Analysis
Assess your selected business’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats. Then, evaluate how
to address these in your marketing plan.
Strengths
Strong brand recognition: Worldly, Nike brands (Nike, Jordan, and Converse) dominate various sports
fields. This recognition has helped the company retain customers and attract top athletes such as Eliud
Kipchoge and Michael Jordan. Its association with these legends cements customer loyalty.
Wide market coverage: The Company’s global presence in more than 190 nations has allowed it to take
advantage of customer segments and diverse markets (Nike, Inc., 2023b).
Weaknesses
Dependence on Suppliers: Nike relies on suppliers such as Pou Chen, PT Pan Brothers, and Fulgent
Sun International (Zhao & Zhou, 2023). During supply chain disruptions, the company becomes
vulnerable to slowed production or breakdown of the whole process due to a lack of essential supplies
from suppliers facing the disruptions.
Counterfeiting: Counterfeited Nike products have damaged the brand recognition, leading to a loss of
customer trust. For instance, ABC News revealed fake Nike shoes worth $5 to $200 on the counterfeit
market. Fake Louis Vuitton bags ranged from $5 to $1,500 (Hermawan, 2023).
Opportunities
Digital Transformation: The development of AI and data analytics presents a crucial opportunity for Nike
to invest in these digital technologies to improve customer experience and satisfaction. For instance, the
company can build an AI-enabled App to solve the challenge of ordering incorrect shoe sizes (Iyer, 2021).
Sustainability: The trend towards a sustainable environment implies that Nike can invest in waste
recycling and eco-friendly raw materials that appeal to environmentally conscious customers.
.
Threats
Competition: Adidas, Puma, and Reebok present stiff competition for sportswear products. This
competition erodes Nike’s market coverage.
Economic Downturn: Economic crises resulting from events such as the COVID-19 outbreak slow down
Nike’s progress. The recessions imply limited expenditure on non-basic things such as sportswear.
Trends
Athleisure: Athletic clothing is worn for daily activities. Thus, it continues to gain momentum.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 6 of 13
Health and Wellness Focus: The increasing global emphasis on health, wellness, and physical fitness is
a significant tailwind for Nike. Most fitness trainers and health enthusiasts advocate for lightweight,
comfortable sportswear for optimal performance (Di Domenico et al., 2022).
Tech-Infused Apparel: With the rise of wearable technology, there’s a growing demand for clothing and
accessories that incorporate smart features. The convergence of fashion and technology is an emerging
trend manifested in garments that monitor physical health metrics to shoes that adjust fit in real-time
(Perkovic, 2022).
Sustainable Fashion: Consumers increasingly seek eco-friendly products as environmental concerns
become mainstream. This trend extends to the fashion industry, with a growing demand for sustainable
materials and ethical production practices (Kumar, 2023).
Personalization and Customization: Modern consumers seek products that resonate with their identities.
Customized designs, personalized product recommendations, and bespoke experiences are becoming
integral to the shopping experience (Roggeveen et al., 2021).
Converting Weaknesses and Threats to Strengths & Converting
Strengths to Opportunities
Nike can embrace supplier base diversification to improve its negotiating power and eliminate
vulnerability to supply chain breakdowns. Likewise, the company can introduce anti-counterfeiting
technologies such as QR codes to authenticate its products to win customer trust and loyalty (Chen et al.,
2020). In utilizing competition as a strength, the company should invest in product innovation to develop
brands that stand out in the market. Primarily, competition should be a motivating factor for innovation.
Due to economic downturns, Nike can create its financial reserves during peak periods to provide a
cushion in case of economic downturns. This strategy will enable the company to sustain its financial
position to support its business operations irrespective of the economic situation. In changing strengths to
opportunities, Nike needs to utilize its wide market coverage to expand into untapped markets. Also, the
company can rely on its strong brand recognition to innovate and launch new products under the same
brand line.
Marketing Objectives
i.
ii.
Remain adjusted to sportswear trends in the dynamic market to expand the potential of
sportspeople by 15% over the next two years. The success of this objective will be measured by
the number of awards a sportsperson has won compared to previous performances.
Leverage the company’s expertise in sportswear to align with the health and wellness trend by
Nike’s brands that meet the desire of fitness enthusiasts, aiming for a 5% sales increase over the
next 12 months. An increase in sales of active-wear (Nike’s sports shoes and tracksuits) by more
than 5% worldwide will imply the objective’s success.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 7 of 13
For example: The business will expand its marketing efforts to include a new market segment of 21- to
29-year-olds. This will entail the development of a customized product by June 2024 that will address the
specific psychographic and technological needs of this age group. This strategy is expected to attain a
20% growth in overall sales by January 2025. Customer loyalty (i.e., willingness to recommend the
product) will increase by 30%.
Wk 4 – Part B: Marketing Data Analysis
Internal Data
Evaluate internal data sources for information that would be available to you if you were employed by the
business and what information you will receive from each source.
Identify 3 to 6 sources of internal data and list them in the Source column of the Internal Data Table. For
each source, input what it measures, data, and potential data usage in the respective columns. Insert or
remove rows, as needed. Row 1 contains a completed example for reference.
Internal Data
Internal Data Table
Potential Data
Usage
Source
What it Measures
Data Type
Quarterly and Annual
Reports (10 Qs and 10
Ks)
Financial performance
Financial performance
including segment sales
and profits.
Trend analysis.
Operating reports
Operational performance
and event management
Provides information
about the company’s
latest activities and
events
Latest product
launches, marketing
campaigns, and
operational
performance
Nike’s website
including store
Provides updated
information about the
company
New product launches,
prices, promotions
Understand the
company’s sales
promotions
Nike’s ESG reports
Provides information
about the company’s
ESG and CSR activities
Company’s efforts to
reduce carbon footprint,
increase diversity and
inclusion, etc.
Consumers pay
attention to a
company’s
sustainability efforts
and Nike already
suffered severely
from bad publicity in
the past regarding
child labor.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 8 of 13
Primary Data
Primary Data Table
Potential Data
Usage
Source
What it Measures
Data Type
Online surveys or
social media surveys
Can be used to measure
several factors including
brand loyalty, customer
satisfaction, opinions, etc.
Qualitative and
quantitative data about
Nike’s brands
Understand strong
and weak points
Interview professional
and amateur athletes
What do they like most
about Nike’s products?
Why they choose Nike’s
products? Etc.
Qualitative and
quantitative data about
why athletes prefer
Nike’s products
Promotional
campaign aimed at
athletes
Interview consumers
that are not
professional or
amateur athletes
What do they like most
about Nike’s products?
Why they choose Nike’s
products? Etc.
Qualitative and
quantitative data about
why they prefer Nike’s
products
Promotional
campaign aimed at
customers that are
not professional or
amateur athletes
Interview store
managers
Customer preferences
and what promotions are
more effective (or least
effective)
Qualitative and
quantitative data about
Nike’s sales and
promotional activities
Improve current
promotional activities
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Strategic Marketing Plan Template
MKT/574 v2
Page 9 of 13
Secondary Data
Secondary Data Table
Source
What it Measures
Data Type
Potential Data
Usage
Yahoo Finance
Market expectations
about Nike, Inc.
Financial expectations
about Nike’s
performance
Understand what
investors believe
about Nike’s
performance
Semrush
Statistics about Nike’s
website and online store
How many people visit
Nike’s websites?
Conversion rates?
Repeat visitors? Etc.
Learn about the
effectiveness of
Nike’s online
strategies
HubSpot
Statistics about Nike’s
social media presence
How many people visit
Nike’s social media?
Conversion rates?
Repeat visitors? Etc.
Learn about the
effectiveness of
Nike’s social media
strategies
CSI Market
Market data and
competitive analysis
Nike’s competitive
position vs its industry
peers
Nike’s market
performance
Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
CRM Touchpoint Table
CRM Touchpoint
Purpose and CRM
Objective
Data Type
Potential Data
Usage
Nike Digital Sport
(NDS)
Nike’s CRM system
Consumer preferences,
surveys, FAQs,
complaints, etc.
Customer data and
preferences
Nike+
Part of NDS
Allows customers to
keep record of their IoT
devices linked to Nike
Plus
Customer data about
how they use Nike’s
products
Nike Connect
Specific CRM app for
basketball fans
Allows customers to
keep record of their IoT
devices linked to Nike
Connect
Customer data about
how they use Nike’s
basketbal
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10) [20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools, procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that field)?
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks? (provide pictures)
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible tool?
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the team meetings at different times)
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
How did you create a virtual office?
oWhat are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
oGive some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
oSpecify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication process.
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and how customers (target audience) can be reached.
oThe report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in Arabic, translate them).
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the report (one or two comments)
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in the future.
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score. It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template is not used.
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your answer will not be valid.
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
Use the footer function to insert page number.
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing, and format.
Answer:
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10) [10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the project). Please refer to the following criteria:
Create 10 slides maximum
The slides should contain the following:
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
A brief description of the virtual team
A brief description of the virtual tool
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
A brief description of the proposed reports
Suggestions for future teams.
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group members.
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Presentation Slides
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Group Grade:
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
out of 10
ECOM 201 Group Presentation
Group Presentation (due by Week 10)
[10 marks)
This is a group presentation and must be done in-class or virtually using Power Point or any
other tool. The presentation should reflect your answers and experience in Assignment 2 (the
project). Please refer to the following criteria:
•
Create 10 slides maximum
•
The slides should contain the following:
o
Group members names, IDs, and CRN
o
A brief description of the virtual team
o
A brief description of the virtual tool
o
A brief description of the Virtual work dynamics
o
A brief description of the proposed reports
o
Suggestions for future teams.
•
Support your presentation with pictures from your virtual teamwork.
•
Each group has 10m (8 minutes presentation + 2 minutes Q & A).
•
Each student presents for ~2 minutes to divide the time equally between group
members.
•
The presentation should be written and presented in English.
•
Upload the slides to Blackboard under the Assignment 3 tab by the specified due date.
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Student Names:
Student IDs:
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
Course Title: Introduction to Virtual
Management
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/2024 _1st
Term
6.
Course Code: ECOM 201
Instructor Name:
Assignment: 3 Project Presentation- GROUP X
Student Grade:
out of 10
CRN: XXXXXX
Grade Level: High/ Middle / Low
2
The Virtual Team
1. Name:
2. Roles:
3. Collective goal:
3
The Virtual Tool
1.
2.
3.
The Virtual Work Dynamics
1. Virtual Office:
2. Virtual communication:
3. Challenges:
4
5
The Proposed Reports
1.
2.
3.
General Suggestions for Future Teams
1.
2.
3.
6
7
Pictures of Your Virtual Team Process
8
Thank You!
Questions & Feedback
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
I need to write an assignment containing 5 questions.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own wordsAll answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.Citation of necessary references is required APA7 styleResource TextbookWheelen, T. L., Hunger, D., Hoffman, A. N., & Bamford, C. E. (2014). Concepts in strategic management and business policy (14th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall. ISBN-13: 9780133126129 (print), 9780133126433 (e-textPlease also follow the instructions in the attachment
tomorrow i’m having a midterm and the professor let us take 1 paper of notepaper, so i need you help me put all the notes u think is important or useful for exam on the notepaper, and make sure all of them i in on 1 paper(can be double sided)
Reply to 3 students 90 words each.Book Reading: Chapters 6 & 11BOOK: Applying Communication Theory for Professional Life: A Practical Introduction, 4th Editionhttps://books.google.com/books?id=ho5EDwAAQBAJ&printsec=frontcover&source=gbs_ge_summary_r&cad=0#v=onepage&q&f=false
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Hofstede’s Dimensions of Culture
Your textbook presents Hofstede’s dimensions of culture and describes US culture in several
of the subsections. Do you agree with these descriptions? Please explain why you agree or
disagree.
1. Hofstede’s Dimensions of Culture is understanding of cultural differences in societies across the world. All
of which provide insight into how different cultures approach things like freedom, tolerance, orientation,
and authority to name a few. Now in the text there is a table that breaks down the ranking of the countries
based off Hofstede’s dimensions. The US is on the table which highlights it from Individualism Collectivism, Uncertainty Avoidance, Power Distance, Masculinity-Femininity, and Long-Term and ShortTerm.
In terms of Individuals and collectivism, in the US I would agree with the assertion that Individualism ranks
high, however some could make a case for collectivism. Based in certain areas of the country you generally
live in would determine that assertion. If we are speaking on the uncertainty, then clearly I would have to
agree with that assertion of low uncertainty. This would be based solely on experience. I am not sure whether
I agree or disagree with the moderate label for the power. I could see it go either way, again based solely on
location within the United States. The last two, there is no question as both masculinity and short term are
agreeable. Every day highlights the short term with those on social media posting on a simple life with all
the amenities that normal individuals do not have.
2. From my understanding of Hofstede’s descriptions of U.S. culture, I agree with all of them. As per Hofstede’s
research, which was cited in Dainton & Zelley (2018), the United States is an individualistic cu lture, which
means that it values independence over dependence and uniqueness over sameness. In such cultures,
individual achievements are rewarded, and merit pay and employee recognition programs are often used by
organizations to recognize and elevate the performance of certain individuals above their peers.
Additionally, competition is highly valued in individualistic cultures, and it is often seen as a driving force
behind individual achievement. The United States is known for its individualistic cultur e, particularly when
it comes to child-rearing. It is the only culture that encourages young adults to leave home at the age of 18.
The proverb “every man for himself” is often used to describe American culture. In a collectivistic culture,
the needs and goals of a group take precedence over those of an individual. This is why family is highly
valued in collectivistic cultures. Some examples of countries with high collectivism are Mexico, Arab
countries, South Korea, and Venezuela (Dainton & Zelley, 2018). On the other hand, Italy, Sweden, and the
United States are known for high individualism. I can appreciate both individualism and collectivism in
culture, believing that each can provide valuable benefits to an individual throughout their life.
3. Hofstede’s cultural dimensions can act as a framework for how we understand a society’s culture based on
five categories: power distance, individualism versus collectivism, masculinity versus femininity,
uncertainty avoidance, and long term and short term orientation (Dainton and Zelley, 2018). Power distance
is defined as the degree to which members in a society recognize and accept power imbalances, and our
textbook cites that the United States aligns with a culture of low power distance (Dainton and Zell ey, 2018).
While I do agree that one of the core pillars of US culture is equal opportunity to achieve success, I would
argue there are many social factors that come into play that do not necessarily guarantee success as a product
of hard work. The dimension of individualism versus collectivism refers to the values members of society
hold with regards to those around them (Dainton and Zelley, 2018). Individualistic cultures value the
individual over the whole social group, while collectivist cultures value group membership (Dainton and
Zelley, 2018). The United States is labeled as an individualistic culture, which I strongly agree with, as our
society praises individual achievement, independence, and in general, putting yourself and your needs above
all else. Masculinity/ femininity discusses how biological sex and gender expression relate to each other
(Dainton and Zelley, 2018). The United States is categorized as a masculine culture, which emphasizes
traditional gender roles based on biological gender (Dainton and Zelley, 2018), which I both agree and
disagree with. I would argue that the elements of masculine culture are the prevailing norm, but the LGBTQ+
community has also made significant strides in redefining gender and sexuality, which can be seen in the
legalization of same sex marriage or the emerging number of working women in powerful professional
positions. Uncertainty avoidance explains how members of a society react and respond to uncertain/
ambiguous social situations (Dainton and Zelley, 2018). Our textbooks describes the US as a lowuncertainty-avoidance culture, which means that we do not rely on structure and are more inclined to
embrace uncertainty (Dainton and Zelley, 2018). I would argue this is context -dependent, as there are some
organizations, such as the military or hospitals, for example, that rely on rigid structure in order to be able
function appropriately. The final element is long-term or short term-orientation refers to whether cultures
value “thrift, savings, and perseverance” or instant gratification (Dainton and Zelley, 2018). The United
States is recognized as a short-term oriented culture, which I strongly agree with as members of our society
tend to gravitate toward promises of rapid results or immediate gratification, whi ch we can see through the
success of businesses such as Amazon Prime, which offers overnight or next-day shipping on their inventory
for a monthly fee. In conclusion, the United States is a diverse society, so while these dimensions create a
basic framework for studying cultural differences, it is also important to understand how different subgroups
deviate from the established norm.
focused on the potential disruption of supply chains created by product recalls.
Pratt and Whitney conducted a recall of engines serving the commercial airline industry. The
purpose of this assignment is to discuss supply chain challenges created by product recalls.
Wall Street Journal: “RTX Engine Recall to Cut Profit by Up to $3.5 Billion,” Link:
https://www.wsj.com/business/airlines/rtx-engine-recall-to-cut-profit-by-up-to-3-5-billion-
73f5f41e
Industry Week: “RTX Engine Issue to Hit Profit by Up to $3.5 Billion,” Link:
https://www.industryweek.com/leadership/companies-executives/article/21273466/rtx-engine-
issue-to-hit-profit-by-up-to-35-billion
Industry Week: “Pratt & Whitney Engine Issue Adds to Airline Challenges,” Link:
https://www.industryweek.com/operations/article/21…71626/pratt-whitney-engine-issue-adds-to-
airline-challenges
Pratt & Whitney: Link: https://www.prattwhitney.com/en/newsroom/news/2023…-
advances-hybrid-electric-propulsion-demonstrator-with-1mw-motor-rated-power-m
Pratt & Whitney Supplier Requirements: https://www.prattwhitney.com/en/our-
company/about/doing-business-with-us
————————————————————————————————————-
Please address the following topics for Pratt & Whitney (P&W):
• Discuss how product recalls could jeopardize sales of P&W products in the future.
• Explain how P&W can use supplier selection and evaluation to improve the supplier base
for new products in the future.
• Design a supplier development strategy using Deming’s 14 points of quality that could be
used by P&W to prevent product recalls in the future.
• Discuss the benefits and challenges of worldwide sourcing for the new hybrid-electric
engines being developed at P&W
Detailed Notes and Citation of References in PowerPoint:
• The “Notes” section in PowerPoint should include detailed information and
references whenever possible. The notes serve as the details that would be included in
a written report. This is critical for maintaining the knowledge developed for your
project. You or someone else in the organization may refer to this document in the
future, and detailed notes are extremely valuable.
• References should be identified in the Notes section for each page that refers to the
sources of information used to develop the report. A complete reference list should
also be included at the end of the presentation.
Hi, this is connected to the last task you just did for me. Could you please fill out the rest of the chart 🙂 I will attach everything again
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Platform Business Model of Spotify
Customer
Value received from
others
– $ in bold
Value received from
Platform
– $ in bold
Value provided to
other customers
– $ in bold
Premium Paid subscribers
/Listeners / Users
-Advertisement-free
Music Content (Artist)
-Advertisement- free
Premium Streaming
access to content
-Play lists
Interactions (Users)
-Audience (Users)
-$ Content (Artists)
Primary Payer –Main
source of revenue
-Free Streaming
access to content
-Play lists
Interactions (Users)
-Audience (Users)
-$ Content (Artists)
Sweetener
-Playlists (Users)
Free-subscribers /
Listeners / Users
-Music Content (Artists)
-Playlists (Users)
Advertisers /
Brands
Artists / Content
creators /
Podcasters/
Record labels
-Audience, promoting
their brand
(Both type of Users)
-$ Audience- Streaming
(Users)
-Reach the right
audience
-Engage wide range
of audience around
the world
Value provided to
Platform
– $ in bold
Customers they
attract
Profile
Payer
N/A
-Audio Content
(Artists)
Linchpin
1
Spotify Customer Dynamics
Student Name
Professor
Course
Date
2
Spotify Customer Dynamics
5. Spotify, as a platform, generates a considerable amount of revenue from various client
demographics. First and foremost, a significant portion of Spotify’s income comes from individual
users who pay for premium services (Vonderau, 2019). These users receive ad-free music
streaming and frequently choose premium subscription plans, directly boosting the platform’s
income. Also, Spotify gives its marketers access to a sizable audience, opening up a new revenue
stream. Additionally, musicians and content producers increase the platform’s financial value
because they receive royalties based on the number of listens, which encourages them to keep
creating content only for Spotify. Last but not least, Spotify gains from app developers that build
different plugins and integrations within the system, improving the user experience and, as a result,
boosting user retention and income.
6. Certain demographics are drawn to Spotify by each sort of user. Artists, bands, and
podcasters are the main demographics drawn by individual subscribers who pay for premium
services (Chatsri, 2021). These content producers perceive Spotify as a successful platform to
reach a global audience with their work. High-quality material also draws listeners who are
interested in various podcasts and music genres. Additionally, Spotify’s large user base attracts
advertisers because it enables them to target particular demographics based on users’ musical
choices and listening patterns. Ads are likely to reach the proper audience thanks to the exact
targeting, which increases their impact. Innovating music-related apps like playlist makers and
music analysis tools that respond to the interests and preferences of music lovers are also attracted
to Spotify by app developers, further enhancing the user experience.
7. Based on their jobs and contributions to the platform, Spotify’s user base may be clearly
described. Individual customers are Spotify’s main source of income because they pay for premium
3
services, providing the bulk of the company’s revenue in the form of subscription fees. By funding
specialized advertising campaigns, advertisers act as payers and help Spotify’s revenue stream. By
producing great content that draws paying members and advertisers, artists and content creators
serve as sweeteners, indirectly boosting revenue through higher user engagement. Additionally,
app developers serve as secondary sweeteners by developing distinctive programs that improve
the user experience and, by keeping users, indirectly boost income. This particular breakdown
emphasizes the distinctive roles played by each client category within the Spotify ecosystem,
emphasizing their contributions and significance to the platform’s success.
4
References
Chatsri, T. (2021). Strategic marketing analysis: a case study of Spotify.
Vonderau, P. (2019). The Spotify effect: Digital distribution and financial growth. Television &
New Media, 20(1), 3-19.
IMC Written Report Guidelines (Assessment Task 2)
Structure
Follow structure in the textbook (Waller 2012). For
more information for each section, please refer to
the book.
1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
2. INTRODUCTION
3. SITUATION ANALYSIS
•
Marketing Mix Analysis
•
Company Analysis
•
Customer Analysis
•
Competitor Analysis
•
Environmental Analysis
4. OBJECTIVES
5. BUDGET
6. TARGET AUDIENCE
7. COMMUNICATION STRATEGY
8. CREATIVE STRATEGY
9. MEDIA PLANNING
10. MEDIA STRATEGY
•
Advertising
•
Public relations
•
Sales promotion
•
Direct marketing
•
Personal selling
11. CAMPAIGN EVALUATION
12. CONCLUSION
Report Size
The final report should be between 20 – 25 pages in length (double-spacing, Times New
Roman 12pt) excluding references and appendices. It is fine if you are slightly over or under
these page limits.
1
Note: Copies of ads should be included in the appendix
Referencing
The aim of the group project is to provide an opportunity to apply the knowledge and skills
being studied. Therefore, recommendations must be supported by reference to relevant
theories, concepts and frameworks.
You should use APA (American Psychological Association) referencing style. For more
information, please refer to the UTS Library website.
https://www.lib.uts.edu.au/referencing/apa
2
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st Semester
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Njoud AlJohani
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour. (CLO2).
Assess challenges of effective organizational communication and share information
within the team in professional manner. (CLO4).
2 Examine the differences and similarities between leadership, power, and
management. (CLO5).
Assignment 2
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: U.S. MARINE CORPS
Please read the case “U.S. MARINE CORPS” from Chapter 10 “Ability” Page: – 326 given
in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in
the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and
Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Identify and describe the types of abilities that historically have been most relevant to
Marine effectiveness. Which additional abilities appear to be important for Marines
involved in cyber-security? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.
Why might it be difficult to find new recruits that possess the appropriate mix of
abilities? What could the Marine Corps do to increase the size of the pool of applicants
with these abilities? (02 Marks) (Min words 200-300)
3. How might the Marine Corps be able to use their existing workforce to deal with their
need for cyber-personnel? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of such an initiative.
(02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion questions: – Please read Chapter’s 11,13 carefully and then give your
answers on the basis of your understanding.
4. Think about a highly successful team with which you are familiar. What types of tasks,
goals, and outcome interdependence does this team have? Describe how changes in task,
goal, and outcome interdependence might have a negative impact on this team. (02 Marks)
(Min words 200-300)
5. Who is the most influential leader you have come in contact with personally? What
forms of power did they have, and which types of influence did they use to accomplish
objectives? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
Important Notes: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
Start Assignment
Due 27 Oct by 23:56
Points 50
Submitting a file upload
Assignment type: Individual, written
Value: 50%
Link to CLOs: 1,2,3,4
Length: 2,500 words (+/-10%)
Due date: 23:55, Friday, October 27
Overview
The purpose of this assessment is to ensure students have a broad understanding of the theories / concepts covered in the
course, and that they meet the necessary academic requirements in terms of conducting effective research, application of
theories and concepts, problem solving skills and academic writing.
Assessment criteria
Students will be assessed on;
identification of key issues in the case;
understanding of key theories / concepts covered in the course;
quality of analysis;
quality, relevance and sufficiency of research; and
writing technique including appropriate structure, referencing, format and presentation.
Course learning outcomes
This assessment is relevant to the following course learning outcomes:
CLO1
Articulate core concepts and theories concerning the global business environment
and multinational enterprises that engage in international operations.
CLO2
Critically analyse current events in the global business environment, and strategy
and operations of multinational enterprises by applying relevant conceptual
frameworks and theories.
CLO3
Demonstrate improved skills in research, teamwork, problem solving and
communication.
CLO4
Enhance readiness to practise management beyond your specific national
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：1/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
contexts.
Assessment details
For this assignment, you need to choose one multinational enterprise (MNE) from the 2023 Global 500 list
(https://fortune.com/ranking/global500/2023/search/) operating in one of the following industries*.
Apparel
Computers, Office Equipment
Household and Personal Products
Internet Services and Retailing
Tobacco
You must use the 2023 GLOBAL 500 list at https://fortune.com/global500/2023/search
(https://fortune.com/global500/2022/search/) and also use the “INDUSTRY” filter (not sectors) to choose your MNE. You may
also download the Global 500 list.pdf (https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/files/33776344?wrap=1)
(https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/files/33776344/download?download_frd=1)
N.B. You are encouraged to conduct preliminary data search about the potential MNE to ensure that you can obtain
relevant and recent information enabling you to conduct well-supported analysis.
Based on the choice of your MNE, answer the following questions. Please note that you need to demonstrate
understanding of the theories and concepts covered in the course. You are also expected to meet the necessary academic
requirements in terms of conducting effective research, application of theories and concepts, problem solving skills and
academic writing. Your essay must include at least 10 academic journal references and 10 non-scholarly references to
inform your key ideas.
Part A: Introduction and your chosen MNE (approx. 600 words)
Q 1. Write the introduction to you essay. You should include the purpose, main findings, and the scope and the structure
of your essay in the introduction. (You should write your introduction after you know the key findings and the structure of
your paper. It is strongly recommended that you write the introduction when you have completed the main body).
Q 2. Provide a brief profile of your MNE. Information such as its country of origin, company history, its main
products/services, countries of operation etc., should be included.
Part B: Host country analysis & MNE’s strategy (approx. 1,650 words)
For this part, you need to select one foreign market (the host country) your chosen MNE is operating in. You
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：2/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
may not choose the country your group selected for the Group Report Assessment (Assessment Task 2)
(https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/92060/assignments/729028) of this course.
Q 3. Based on your understanding of course topics (i) Global Information Economy and (ii) Stakeholders in Global
Business and Responsible Management, analyse the business environment of the host country for your MNE. Discuss
opportunities and/or challenges the business environment creates for your chosen MNE’s operation in the country.
Q 4. Based on your understanding of the course topics, Strategy and Structure of MNEs and Entering Global
Markets, analyse strategy and entry mode choices your MNE adopted as it entered and operates in the host country.
Evaluate the benefits and pitfalls of the company’s decisions. If you were given the responsibility of managing your chosen
MNE’s operations in your selected host country, what additional or alternative actions would you undertake? Provide
justifications for your answer.
Part C: Conclusion (approx. 250 words)
Q 5. Write the conclusion to your whole paper. Your conclusion should include a summary of key findings and an
evaluation of the importance of your case.
Assessment cover sheet
Please complete and attach the Individual Essay Cover Sheet. (https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/files/33776358?
wrap=1)
(https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/files/33776358/download?download_frd=1)
Guidelines
Make sure that you meet all of the assessment requirements. Failure to meet the requirements may result in:
loss of marks
re-marking, excluding the section of work which does not meet the requirement
resubmitting all or part of the work.
This is an academic writing assignment. You need to demonstrate your ability to investigate GB issues from real world
situations, and present your analysis and arguments based on evidence. For this, it is important that relevant theories
and concepts, and examples from the case, are integrated in your analysis.
You are expected to consult newspapers and popular press, and grey literature, such as trade/industry/government
reports and periodicals.
You also need to use academic journals as sources for your analysis.
Your essay must include at least 10 academic journal references and 10 non-scholarly references to inform your key
ideas.
Format
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：3/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
Your essay must be formatted as per the requirements below:
Cover sheet (available for download in the course Canvas page)
Use 12pt font
5 line or double-spacing
Leave a line between each paragraph.
Use Harvard method for referencing.
Clearly indicate the question numbers. Use headings and subheadings where appropriate, but do not include the full
questions in your essay as it will distort the word count.
The title page and the reference list are excluded from the word count.
Your final submission must be in MS Words “.docx” or “.doc” format. If you use Mac, make sure that you convert the
“.pages” file into one of the above formats before submission.
Referencing guidelines
Use RMIT Harvard (https://www.rmit.edu.au/library/study/referencing/referencing-guides-for-printing) referencing style for this
assessment.
You must acknowledge all the courses of information you have used in your assessments.
Refer to the RMIT Easy Cite (https://www.lib.rmit.edu.au/easy-cite/) referencing tool to see examples and tips on how to
reference in the appropriated style. You can also refer to the library referencing page for more tools such as EndNote,
referencing tutorials and referencing guides for printing.
Submission format
The assessment will be submitted in Canvas as a file upload.
Extension of time and special consideration
Extension of time up to seven calendar days may be approved by the Course Coordinator in certain circumstances. To
apply for the extension, you must complete online application
(https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109314/external_tools/132366?wrap=1) with any supporting documents.
Extension of time beyond seven calendar days or a request for an extension after the original submission due date is
available only by approval from Special Consideration. (https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/my-course/assessmentresults/special-consideration-extensions/special-consideration)
Academic integrity and plagiarism
Academic integrity is about honest presentation of your academic work. It means acknowledging the work of others while
developing your own insights, knowledge and ideas.
You should take extreme care that you have:
Acknowledged words, data, diagrams, models, frameworks and/or ideas of others you have quoted (i.e. directly
copied), summarised, paraphrased, discussed or mentioned in your assessment through the appropriate referencing
methods
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：4/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
Provided a reference list of the publication details so your reader can locate the source if necessary. This includes
material taken from Internet sites
If you do not acknowledge the sources of your material, you may be accused of plagiarism because you have passed off
the work and ideas of another person without appropriate referencing, as if they were your own.
RMIT University treats plagiarism as a very serious offence constituting misconduct.
Plagiarism covers a variety of inappropriate behaviours, including:
Failure to properly document a source
Copyright material from the internet or databases
Collusion between students
For further information on our policies and procedures, please refer to the University website.
(https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/student-essentials/rights-and-responsibilities/academic-integrity)
Assessment declaration
When you submit work electronically, you agree to the assessment declaration. (https://www.rmit.edu.au/students/studentessentials/assessment-and-exams/assessment/assessment-declaration)
Individual Essay – AOL v.3
Criteria
Problem
Definition /
Ratings
Pts
8 to >6.32 Pts
Outstanding
6.32 to >5.52 Pts
Superior
5.52 to >4.72 Pts
Good
4.72 to >3.92 Pts
Acceptable
3.92 to >0 Pts
Unsatisfactory
Shows
outstanding
knowledge of the
Shows superior
knowledge of the
issues, key
Shows adequate
understanding of
relevant issues,
Shows some
understanding of
relevant issues,
Relevant issues,
key problems,
and the
issues, key
problems, and the
problems, and the
company’s
key problems, and
the company’s
key problems, and
the company’s
company’s
present situation
company’s
present situation
present situation
and strategic
present situation
and strategic
present situation
and strategic
and strategic
issues are
and strategic
issues.
issues.
issues.
issues.
poorly identified.
12 to >9.48 Pts
Outstanding
9.48 to >8.28 Pts
Superior
8.28 to >7.08 Pts
Good
7.08 to >5.88 Pts
Acceptable
5.88 to >0 Pts
Unsatisfactory
Analysis is
Provides
Uses evidence
Shows some
Too descriptive.
sophisticated and
nuanced,
persuasive
analysis of the
drawn from a
range of sources
evidence of what
is required in
Lack of a central
argument and
Uses theory and
evidence to
evaluates
competing ideas
issue at hand to
develop a clear
to support claims,
but does not
quality analysis.
Unsubstantiated
clarity in analysis.
Specific data or
address
questions, test
from a number of
standpoints.
and robust
argument.
critically engage
with the evidence.
assertions are
made at times.
evidence
necessary to
Identification
Quality of
analysis and
recommendations
(#AoL6 Critically
Engaged)
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
8 pts
⻚页码：5/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
hypotheses and
Persuasive and
Substantial
There may be
Arguments need
support the
evaluate claims
and solutions.
insightful
recommendations,
evidence of critical
thought. Well-
some gaps in
reasoning. Some
further
development.
analysis and
conclusions was
solutions, and/or
plans of action
supported
recommendations,
effective
recommendations
Some adequate
recommendations
not provided.
Effective
were provided
that are supported
solutions, and/or
plans of action
and/or plans of
action were
and/or plans of
actions were
recommendations
and/or plans of
by compelling
evidence.
were provided.
provided.
made.
action not
provided.
12 to >9.48 Pts
9.48 to >8.28 Pts
8.28 to >7.08 Pts
7.08 to >5.88 Pts
5.88 to >0 Pts
Outstanding
Superior
Good
Acceptable
Unsatisfactory
Demonstrates
Demonstrates
Demonstrates
Has some
Does not
accurate and
elaborated
breadth and depth
of understanding of
good
understanding of
understanding of
key theories and
demonstrate
adequate
breadth and depth
of understanding
of key theories
key theories and
concepts. Can apply
accurately and has
key theories and
concepts. Has
adequate
concepts but has
over-reliance on
quotations or poor
understanding
of key theories
and concepts.
and course
concept in the
transformed the
ideas so that they
breadth, but
limited depth of
paraphrases.
Definition or
discussion of
knowledge
domain. Knows
can express them
appropriately in their
understanding of
the theories and
key concepts is
heavily relying
how particular
facts came to be.
own words.
concepts.
on direct
quotes or
Understanding of
key theories and
concepts
12 pts
12 pts
improperly
paraphrased.
Quality, relevance
and sufficiency of
research
8 to >6.32 Pts
6.32 to >5.52 Pts
5.52 to >4.72 Pts
4.72 to >3.92 Pts
3.92 to >0 Pts
Outstanding
Superior
Good
Acceptable
Unsatisfactory
Meets the scholarly
Meets the
Meets the
Meets the
Does not meet
reference
scholarly
reference
reference
the reference
requirement .
Demonstrates a
reference
requirement .
requirements.
Shows evidence
requirements but
shows limited
requirements.
No or little
thorough and
Evidence of
of engagement
evidence of
evidence of
critically reflective
independent
with relevant
independent
engagement
approach to source
selection appropriate
research.
Employs relevant
literature but does
not always
research. Use of
literature and
with relevant
literature. Does
to the task.
literature on the
discriminate
additional
not meet the
Demonstrates high
level of independent
topic effectively.
Shows a good,
effectively
between sources
materials is very
limited and/or
minimum
scholarly
thought in locating
sound knowledge
of information.
largely irrelevant.
reference
required information.
of the literature
Is selective and
discriminates
and good
research skills.
8 pts
requirement.
between sources of
information in an
appropriate and
critical manner for
the task.
Appropriate
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：6/7
Assessment 3: Individual Essay
2023/10/18 19)51
structure (logical
5 to >3.95 Pts
3.95 to >3.45 Pts
3.45 to >2.95 Pts
2.95 to >2.45 Pts
2.45 to >0 Pts
sequence;
transitions
Outstanding
Superior
Good
Acceptable
Unsatisfactory
Text is well‐
Clear structure.
Text is structured
Some attempt is
Messy and
between parts;
structured and
Links between
with clearly
made to organise
illogical
well-developed
coherent. Each
sections and
defined parts,
the essay into
structure.
paragraphs
paragraph serves a
purpose in
paragraphs are
clear. Each
although these
could be
discrete sections
but some sections
Sections are
disjointed and
advancing the
paragraph is well
developed more
seem irrelevant
disconnected
argument.
Paragraphs draw
developed.
effectively / be
more coherent.
and/or their links
with others are
with one
another.
together the strands
Transition
unclear. Some
Paragraphs
of arguments
between
paragraphs were
were poorly
effectively while also
reflecting on the
paragraphs is
mostly logical.
poorly organised.
organised or
unfocused.
implications of the
Paragraphs
arguments
generally
presented. Logical
links between the
coherent.
5 pts
different sections.
Format and
5 to >3.95 Pts
3.95 to >3.45 Pts
3.45 to >2.95 Pts
2.95 to >2.45 Pts
2.45 to >0 Pts
presentation
Outstanding
Superior
Good
Acceptable
Unsatisfactory
Sophisticated, clear
Clearly written
Consistent
Spelling and
Too difficult to
and fluent writing.
Correct spelling and
and free from
grammatical
referencing with
minor errors of
grammar require
editing. Some
read due to too
many errors in
grammar used
errors. Consistent
style or
sentences require
expression,
effectively
throughout. Highly
academic writing
style, with well-
presentation.
Occasional
rewriting for clarity
and/or paragraph
grammar, or
spelling. Lack
effective academic
structured
grammatical or
structure is poor in
of proper
writing style, with
sentences and
spelling errors.
places. Writing
referencing.
clear and consistent
links to arguments
paragraphs.
Appropriate and
Frequent
awkward
style may be
choppy in places
Demonstrates an
in the thesis. Use of
correct
expressions.
and/or poor flow-
ability to
academic
referencing
Perhaps some
on from one idea
effectively
exchange
conventions such
as referencing and
throughout the
thesis
unexplained
jargon
to the next. Lack
of consistency in
information and
citation is both
shape ideas
through the
consistent and
appropriate.
including clarity of
expression and
grammar, correct
format of in-text
citations and
bibliography, and
meeting the word
limit requirement
(#AoL2a
Connected)
5 pts
referencing.
written word.
Total points: 50
https://rmit.instructure.com/courses/109416/assignments/857029
⻚页码：7/7
Online Discussions
Post to Emerging Project Management Technology and reply to classmates.
Locate outside/external resources and references to research an emerging technology that will (similarly) find new applications to modernize the project management process. Imagine that you are bidding for a new project and see what would make you want to jump out to fund a new piece of technology for your project managers. Identify 3 new technologies you think are helpful and explain why they would be an asset to a project manager.
• Your initial post (approximately 200-250 words) should address each question in the discussion directions and is due by 11:59 PM Central Time on Wednesday.
• Your two response posts (approximately 125-150 words each) are due by 11:59 PM Central Time on Sunday.
• Please remember to take ownership of your original post and answer all questions posed to you by other course participants.
• Use outside/external resources and references to post at least two direct quotes to support your claim. This means that you cannot use the text to support the claim from your original post.
• Please refer to the Discussion Topic rubric for detailed guidance about expectations and grading for discussions.
• To submit your post to the Discussion Topic, select “Start a New Thread”, type or paste your posting in the fields, and click “Post”. To respond to your peer’s post, click “Reply to Thread”.
Project 4
Submit: Project Budget and Risks to the Assignment Submission Folder.
Create a budget identifying all the costs associated with your project. The key here is in the details, you don’t want to miss any prices. Your WBS can be helpful in helping identify cost areas.Create a list of all potential risks with your project and create a contingency plan for each risk.Your assignment should be submitted in Excel and/or word documents.
• Your assignment should include a title page and a reference list page, and be completed in Times New Roman 12-point font, double-spaced, with appropriate header, page numbers, one-inch margins, and meet all other requirements of APA Stylebook.
• An abstract is not required.
• Please refer to the rubric associated with your project for detailed guidance about expectations and grading.
Quizzing
Submit the Module 4 quiz.
Assess the implication and relevance of theoretical concepts and theories of leadership within healthcare settings.
Scenario
Due to increased turnover at Wynn Regional Medical Center (WRMC), analysis from the exit interview questionnaires was reviewed in a Board of Directors meeting. While reviewing the study, it was noted that “communication concerns” were common areas of dissatisfaction among the employees who resigned. The employees felt that:
– Managers did not hold regular staff meetings
– Employees were often not informed about changes in the organization.
– Managers did not ask employees for their input or feedback in decision-making
– Employees were unable to voice their concerns without retaliation.
– Managers should have communicated more respectfully.
You have been tasked with creating a presentation to address these communication concerns.
Instructions
The CEO of WRMC has asked you to create a PowerPoint presentation proposing a revised communication process for the board of directors. The presentation should contain speaker notes for each slide or voiceover narration. Based on the specific concerns listed in the scenario, your presentation should address how you will change the communication processes and include the following key points:
– What are some of a multicultural healthcare facility’s possible communication barriers and challenges? Could you include recommendations for addressing these barriers and challenges?
– What communication processes and practices will you implement to address the following employee concerns?
– Staff meetings
– Organizational updates
– Employee input in decision-making
– Employee concerns
– Respectful communication
– What recommendations do you have for increasing departmental communication?
– Please include a minimum of two references (at least one reference from the module readings)
Grading Criterion
– A clear and thorough explanation of possible communication barriers and challenges in a multicultural healthcare facility includes comprehensive recommendations for addressing these barriers and challenges with multiple supporting examples.
– A clear and thorough discussion of communication processes and practices for managing employee concerns, including comprehensive descriptions with multiple supporting examples for each sub-bullet point.
– Comprehensive recommendations for increasing departmental communication. Includes multiple supporting examples for each recommendation.
Cheating occurs in different forms. In the case study, Tracy and Denise need to provide a recommendation on a stocking fee for large and small Breweries. Create a PowerPoint presentation which addresses the following:
Describe the ethical dilemma for Denise and Tracy.
What was Denise’s and Tracy’s ethical justification to go along with stocking fee?
What could “fixing the data” have done to foster and create an ethical environment?
What might be the cheating signal in the company that would make deontology or utilitarianism ethical theories effective?
What might be the duty to the client that Denise and Tracy have?
Requirements:
Your presentation must answer the questions with notes in the slides. The presentation should be five slides (one slide for each question) not including title and reference pages.
You need to cite at least three sources for this assignment.
Your references must be formatted according to APA guidelines
Reference: Russel, G. & Kennedy, D. (n.d.). A small matter of trimming. University of Waterloo. https://uwaterloo.ca/centre-for-accounting-ethics/resources/ethics-teaching-cases/small-matter-trimming
Assignment Question(s): You are a management consultant at Miri & Co Partners; you receive an email from one of your long-term clients stating as follows: “Following an overhaul of the company and a shift from the conventional model to telecommuting, several challenges have emerged. First, the majority of the departments are not meeting their monthly targets. This follows an introduction of a policy that the most productive employees will receive a monthly bonus. Secondly, numerous conflicts are emerging from the finance departments. We need an urgent solution to increase the productivity of this department.” Answer the following questions: How can the company improve group awareness in the company? (2 marks)What are the disadvantages of restructuring based on functional structure? (2 marks)Should the reward system be individual-based, or group based? (2 marks)What is the role of executive leadership in transformational change? (2 marks)Finally, provide a workable solution to the client in not more than 200 words. (2 marks) Note: Use the concepts developed in this course in your answers.You must include at least 5 references.Format your references using APA style.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Organization Design and Development (MGT 404)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT404
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained:
Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the basic steps of the organizational development process.
2. Evaluate the strategic role of change in the organization and its impact on
organizational performance.
3. Analyze the human, structural and strategic dimensions of organizational
development.
Assignment Question(s):
You are a management consultant at Miri & Co Partners; you receive an email from one
of your long-term clients stating as follows:
“Following an overhaul of the company and a shift from the conventional model to
telecommuting, several challenges have emerged. First, the majority of the
departments are not meeting their monthly targets. This follows an introduction of
a policy that the most productive employees will receive a monthly bonus.
Secondly, numerous conflicts are emerging from the finance departments. We need
an urgent solution to increase the productivity of this department.” Answer the
following questions:
1. How can the company improve group awareness in the company? (2 marks)
2. What are the disadvantages of restructuring based on functional structure? (2
marks)
3. Should the reward system be individual-based, or group based? (2 marks)
4. What is the role of executive leadership in transformational change? (2 marks)
5. Finally, provide a workable solution to the client in not more than 200 words. (2
marks)
Note:
•
•
•
Use the concepts developed in this course in your answers.
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
This is an individual assignment, and will be an extension of our activity in class in which we begin formulating your personal life vision. The written version should include a 1-3 page write-up that includes all 25 of your life goals, organized into whatever order you best see fit. At the top of the paper, you should include a “headline version” of your vision: a 6- to 10-word statement of your life vision that captures as best you can the essence of who you will be. Secondly, produce a “paragraph” version of your vision, 3 to 4 lines that provide an overall description of your vision. Third, provide a more detailed list of your goals. It’s okay to organize your goals as bullet points or in some other format, but if you do, you should still have written text that explains and ties together the different groups of goals you have. Finally, please provide a paragraph that summarizes your reflections on your vision (e.g., “this is definitely what I want to be”, or “I notice I’m missing family-related goals”, etc.).
Read transportation article and answer the questions. Please do it in APA format. There is question in the pdf.https://www.wsj.com/articles/walmart-raises-pay-to…
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Walmart Dangles $110,000 Starting Pay to
Lure Truck Drivers
The retailer has also started training workers from other
departments to become truck drivers to grow its in-house
fleet
Walmart aims to add hundreds of drivers through its truck-driver training program by the end of
the year.Photo: George Frey/Bloomberg News
By Sarah Nassauer
Updated Apr. 7, 2022 7:07 pm ET
Walmart Inc. is raising starting pay for in-house truck drivers to as much as $110,000 a year and
expanding a program that trains its existing workers to become drivers.
The company, in a bid to keep its supply chain running smoothly, is setting starting salaries for
its truck drivers between $95,000 and $110,000 a year, up from an average starting salary of
$87,000, said a Walmart spokeswoman. The internal training program will offer workers in other
Walmart roles a 12-week course to become certified truck drivers and join the company’s
internal fleet, the company said.
The push comes as the trucking industry continues to grapple with challenges in recruiting
drivers even as wages for truck drivers have risen steadily throughout the Covid-19 pandemic,
though some data shows freight demand may be cooling. Last month, the trucking industry lost
4,900 jobs, the first monthly decline in nearly two years, federal labor statistics show. The
decline was in contrast with job gains in the service industry, including the travel sector, and
other parts of the logistics industry such as warehousing.
Walmart and other large retailers have grown significantly by revenue during the pandemic as
demand for items including household goods and building materials soared, creating the need for
more supply-chain workers. At the same time, the higher levels of demand, production
bottlenecks and port delays have resulted in supply-chain snarls. And so far, large retailers have
been able to push up wages for hourly workers and other roles without denting their profits.
Related Video
Help Wanted: Truck Drivers to Unclog the Supply Chain
Help Wanted: Truck Drivers to Unclog the Supply ChainPlay video: Help Wanted: Truck
Drivers to Unclog the Supply Chain
The trucking industry has long been dealing with a shortage of drivers and high job turnover, but
supply-chain bottlenecks have underscored the need for new recruits. Here’s how some
companies are trying to get them behind the wheel. Photo: Robyn Beck/AFP via Getty Images
“We want to make sure we continue to attract drivers, but also retain” existing drivers, said
Karisa Sprague, a senior vice president in Walmart’s human resources department. Walmart
hired 7,000 drivers for its internal fleet during the past two years, last year hiring 4,500, the most
in company history, said a spokeswoman. It employs around 12,000 truck drivers total.
“You can pull up job postings and there are lots of sign-on bonuses and shiny objects out there,
and we want to make sure our associates are taken care of,” Ms. Sprague said.
Walmart’s efforts to build out its trucking fleet illustrate how companies are taking on more
responsibilities within their supply chains and, in some cases, taking over tasks once handled by
third parties. Big-box retailers are adding drivers to ensure goods reach stores or consumers’
homes.
Target Corp. is building new regional distribution centers and a network of sorting sites to speed
goods through its supply chain. BJ’s Wholesale Club Holdings Inc. reached a deal in January to
buy four distribution centers and the trucking fleets tied to the sites from a closely held logistics
company.
Walmart, the country’s largest retailer by revenue, has long been known for paying its truck
drivers more than the industry average, a holdover from the early days of the company when
executives believed a large internal fleet helped Walmart move freight more efficiently. In job
postings on Walmart’s website, the company said it offers quarterly safety bonuses in addition to
sign-on bonuses of $8,000 or more for new truck drivers in some locations.
In the U.S., median annual pay for heavy-truck and tractor-trailer drivers was $47,130 in 2020,
the most recent annual data available, according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, and has
increased by about 3% to 4% annually since 2016. Truckers hauling complex loads like wind
turbines or hazardous materials are often paid above the industry average.
The announcement from Walmart reflects pressure that has been building over several decades in
the market for over-the-road truckers, with pay lagging other logistics roles, said Jonathan
Starks, chief intelligence officer at FTR Transportation Intelligence. He said it was likely other
firms would follow Walmart’s approach to lift pay for drivers, including for-hire carriers that try
to match their capacity with market demand for hauling goods.
“There’s a lot of need for moving freight, and they’ve got to figure out ways of making that
happen,” he said, referring to Walmart. “I think it probably signals that some of the inflation
pressures that are coming from transportation are now built in.”
Advertisement – Scroll to Continue
Earlier in the pandemic, U.S. trucking companies scrambled to hire drivers and get more people
into training programs as freight demand surged. Some companies pitched prospective drivers on
an opportunity to make salaries upwards of $60,000 in their first year. Acquiring a commercial
driver’s license is a relatively easy process, but trucking companies typically face high turnover,
Mr. Starks said.
More than a year ago, Walmart decided it needed to train drivers internally to keep up with the
pace of the business and add new opportunities for internal promotion, Ms. Sprague said.
Walmart has moved 17 workers from its warehouse operations through its truck-driver training
program so far, she said, and it aims to add hundreds of drivers through the program by the end
of the year.
It can cost around $4,500 to become a truck driver independently, she said. “We know that the
industry isn’t necessarily building more drivers, but we want to be able to continue the growth of
our private fleet,” she said. “We need to find multiple ways to do it.”
Lydia O’Neal contributed to this article.
Write to Sarah Nassauer at sarah.nassauer@wsj.com
Appeared in the April 8, 2022, print edition as ‘Walmart Lures Drivers With $110,000 in Pay’.
Questions:
1. What actions is Walmart taking to deal with the shortage of truck drivers?
2. When is it better to develop talent from within versus hire from the external labor
market?
3. What factors contribute to high turnover for truck drivers?
4. Walmart has long been known for paying its truck drivers more than the industry
average, often referred to using a lead compensation strategy. What are the
advantages and disadvantages of using a lead compensation strategy?
5. What actions should be taken by the retail industry or others to ensure the nation
has enough truck drivers?
****** I have attached the other assignments you have helped me with that is a continuation of this assignment. The purpose of this assignment is to identify your target customer, create a graphical document to introduce your product or service to potential consumers, build customer interest, and encourage customer engagement.Complete the “Target Market Worksheet” which will describe the demographics of your target customer, explain how you would expand into other global markets, create a graphic to appeal to your customer, and include a brief journey map to describe the consumer’s process.
Step 1: Download and complete the Week 3 Assignment Template [DOCX] Download Week 3 Assignment Template [DOCX].
Step 2: Save the template as, YourName_WRK100_Week3_Reflection and submit it in Canvas in Week 3.
Step 3: Submit your completed template by clicking the Week 3 Assignment – Reflecting on Your Skills, Goals, and Experiences link above.
Review the Week 3 Assignment Rubric in the Course Guide.
The specific course learning outcome associated with this assignment is:
Reflect on one’s skills to begin the process of self-monitoring progress.
Note about this assignment: To ensure students are properly placed into English courses that will best set them up for successful college writing, it is customary for students to have their writing skills assessed. For students without transfer credit for college-level English courses, the writing you provide in the Week 3 Assignment will be assessed to determine whether you should be placed into ENG090 or into ENG116. This review of your writing will not affect your grade on the assignment or the overall course; your instructor will grade the Week 3 Assignment based on the rubric for the course, which is separate from the writing review.
About This Assignment
In this assignment, you will reflect on your values, strengths, areas of improvement, and experiences that capture who you are and how they connect to the 10 Skills and your personal, academic, and professional goals by sharing your thoughts in the template below.
There are three parts of this template for you to complete:
Reflect on Your Goals, Strengths, and Growth Opportunities.
Share Two Experiences.
Reflection.
After completing this assignment, you will have a document you can bring to the Strayer University Career Center, where counselors can help you further develop your career strategy. You may also use this information in the Week 8 Assignment to create an action plan for developing skills that will help you reach your future goals.
write research title, purpose statement, and research questions (for your future research report and short presentation)please help me write a research title, purpose statement, and research questions for my future assignment. please make it about sustainability in the Hospitality felled
reading the ppt and articles, write a test in the below time:
Due on Oct 20, 2023 9:55 AM
Available on Oct 20, 2023 8:30 AM until Oct 20, 2023 9:55 AM
Time zone：GMT-4
The test will consist of two parts: a multiple-choice question component, and a long answer question component. There will be ten (10) multiple-choice questions, each worth one (1) mark; and one (1) long answer question, worth fifteen (15) marks. The test will be graded out of twenty-five (25) marks.
The long answer question will itself consist of three (3) parts, each asking you to explain a particular set of ideas or perspective (worth five (5) marks), compare and contrast it with another (worth five (5) marks), and finally, offer your opinion or critical reflection (five (5) marks). Long answers won’t be graded for spelling or grammar (though if your answer is simply unintelligible or difficult to parse due to issues with grammar or syntax, that will not help your cause), and no introduction or conclusion is necessary. You may use paragraph breaks, headings, bullets, or numbers to separate the different parts of your answer, but point-form replies are discouraged. Citations and a works cited page are only necessary if you quote substantially from either the lectures or readings (to discourage students from simply copying and pasting large blocks of text from the slides or readings).
There is no strict word length requirement for the long answer, but I would recommend you aim for anywhere from three to five (3-5) sentences for each of the three parts – so ten to fifteen (10-15) sentences in total – since each part is worth five (5) marks.
You must reference specific content from the course, i.e., from the lectures and/or readings, to earn marks; generic answers or examples that were not used in the course will not be awarded marks.
Group Project
On October 1, 2018 Abdullah formed Accounting Consulting Co. to
provide accounting services. The following are September 30th, 2019
balances from its ledger (Saudi Riyal):
Cash 50,000, Accounts Receivable 20,000 , Office Supplies 5,000 , Office
Equipment 15,000, Accumulated Depreciation – Office Equipment 1,500 ,
Accounts Payable 8,500 , Owner capital 80,000
During the last quarter of the year 2019, the following transactions
occurred:
Oct 1, 2019
Oct 1, 2019
Oct 1, 2019
Oct10, 2019
Oct 20, 2019
Oct 31, 2019
Nov 15, 2019
Nov28
Nov30, 2019
December 2,
2019
December 31,
2019
December 31,
2019
hired 2 accountants for a weekly salary of S.R 2,000
each, payable monthly.
Paid S.R 24,000 to Alnabil Realtors for 6 month’s rent,
paid in advance.
Paid insurance for one year for S.R12,000
Conducted accounting services for customers, S.R
15,000, and only one-third of the amount was received.
Purchased a new computer for S.R 3,500 cash.
Paid employee’s salaries of S.R 40,000.
Signed a contract regarding Alburj’ bookkeeping work
and received S.R 100,000 cash from client as an advance
payment for services to be completed at the end of
January 2020
Received cash from clients on account, S.R 8000.
Paid employee’s salaries of S.R 35,000.
Received cash S.R 40,000, furniture S.R 20,000, car S.R
80,000 as an additional investment from the owner.
Withdrew S.R 3000 by the owner for personal use
Paid telephone bill and electricity bill for the period, S.R
1500, SR. 3000, respectively.
In addition to data mentioned on above transactions, Other data to be used
in adjustment:
– Office equipment depreciates annually on basis of 10% of its cost.
– The December salaries, S.R 25,000, have not been paid or recorded.
The office performs adjusting entries quarterly. Closing entries are
performed annually on December 31.
Instructions:
a. Show the effect of the above transactions on the Basic Accounting
Equation (chapter one)
b. Journalize and post quarter transactions.
c. Prepare December 31st, 2019 trail balance
d. Use the work sheet.
e. Journalize and post the necessary adjustments on December 31st, 2019.
f. Prepare an adjusted trail balance at December 31st, 2019.
g. Prepare the following financial statements:
1. Income statement.
2. Owner’s equity statement.
3. Classified balance sheet
h. Journalize and post-closing entries at December 31st, 2019.
i. Prepare post-closing trail balance at December 31st, 2019.
The goal of the strategy term project is to give you practical experience with the elements of strategic management. The strategy term project comprises 25 questions—1 to 3 per chapter. Each chapter (question set) requires some data collection about (and analysis of) the firm you select for this study, and relating that research to the concepts discussed in each chapter. By the end of the final module of this project, you will have gained practice in using key strategic management concepts and processes, increased your understanding of the material, and developed real experience in conducting a complete strategic management analysis of a company.
Procedures:
Pick one of these 10 public companies: Alphabet, Costco, AT&T, Microsoft, Home Depot, General Electric, Netflix, Starbucks, Tesla, or Walmart. *** My Firm is Home Depot **
Answer each of the 25 questions in orderly fashion (For the same company you picked in item 1).
Follow this specific format (Check the attached Example):
State chapter number (e.g., Chapter 1…).
State answer number (e.g., Q1, Q2…Q25).
Provide ONLY answer (at least 100-150 words answer per each question) to that question explicitly including how it relates to the information from that chapter while including the page number from the textbook in parenthesis. (Do not copy and paste the questions, just provide answers. Question not included in word count).
Reference your sources (APA style) for each chapter. (References not included in word count)
3. To retrieve the necessary information, you may use the company’s website and any of these sites:
*CMU library also has sites and databases you can access for information – e.g., ProQuest One Business. Be sure to use the “Writing Resources” found in the left menu to aid you in your writing.
4. Formatting Stylistics: APA format (Check ‘Writing Resources’ tab for APA format guideline), Microsoft Word, Double-spaced; 1-inch margins; 12-point Times New Roman font; Word count (at least 100-150 words answers per each question). It takes 2500-3750 words to complete the report, excluding the title page and references.
Deliverable: 25 answers as specified in the procedures submitted in MS Word file.
Deadline: 11:59 PM Friday, Week 8
Evaluation Criteria: Up to 120 points, Answer quality (70 points, Thoroughness and Clarity, whether there is enough textbook content and originality; Word counts per each question), Evidence/Sources (20 points: Whether submission offered compelling and accurate evidence; sources are highly relevant, accurate, and reliable), Format (15 points, Whether the submission followed the APA 7th edition format guideline; MS Word, Double-space, etc.), and Readability/Grammar (15 points, Whether the submission is readable and free of grammatical and punctuational errors and typos).
I need the book for my course strategic management by Ben Rothearmal and the company website as sources used. Thank You, I’m sorry for the short time limit. If I can tip the tutor on this after I will.
A. Mr. and Mrs. Smith, an elderly couple, had no relatives. When Mrs. Smith became ill, the Smiths asked a friend, Henrietta, to help with various housekeeping chores, including cleaning and cooking. Although the Smiths never promised to pay her, Henrietta performed the chores for eighteen months. Henrietta claimed that she was entitled to the reasonable value of the services performed. Argue either side.1.B. Assume instead that the Smiths asked Mrs. Smith’s sister, Caroline, who lived nearby, to help with the housekeeping. After eighteen months, Caroline claimed she was entitled to the reasonable value of the services performed. Argue either side.Joan called Devon Sand & Gravel and ordered two “boxes” (dump-truck loads) of gravel to be spread on her rural driveway by the “shoot and run” method: the tailgate is partially opened, the dump-truck bed is lifted, and the truck moves down the driveway spreading gravel as it goes. The driver mistakenly graveled the driveway of Joan’s neighbor, Watson, instead of Joan’s. Would Devon be entitled to payment by Watson? Argue either side.On November 26, Joe wrote to Kate offering to purchase a farm that she owned. Upon receiving the letter on November 28, Kate immediately sent Joe a letter of acceptance. However, shortly after mailing the letter, Kate had second thoughts and called Joe to advise him that she was rejecting his offer. The call was made before Joe received the letter of acceptance. The issue is whether a contract has been formed and if it has, what kind of contract was formed.Duke decided to sell his car. The car’s muffler had a large hole in it, and as a result, the car made a loud noise. Before showing the car to potential buyers, Duke patched the hole with muffler tape to quiet it. Perry bought the car after test-driving it. He later discovered the faulty muffler and sought to avoid the contract, claiming fraud. Duke argued that he had not committed fraud because Perry had not asked about the muffler and Duke had made no representation of fact concerning it. The issue is whether Duke had committed fraud.Joseph Hoffman alleged that Red Owl Stores promised him that it would build a store building in Chilton, Wisconsin, and stock it with merchandise for Hoffman to operate in return for Hoffman’s investment of $18,000. The size, cost, design, and layout of the store building was not discussed, nor were the terms of the lease as to rent, maintenance, and purchase options. Nevertheless, in reliance on Red Owl’s promise, the Hoffmans sold their bakery and grocery store business, purchased the building site in Chilton, and rented a residence there for the family. The deal was never consummated: a dispute arose, Red Owl did not build the store, and it denied liability to Hoffman on the basis that its promise to him was too indefinite with respect to all details for a contract to have resulted. The issue is whether Hoffman was entitled to some relief? On what theory?the file is the example of the irac method
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10) [20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools, procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that field)?
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks? (provide pictures)
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible tool?
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the team meetings at different times)
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
How did you create a virtual office?
oWhat are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
oGive some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
oSpecify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication process.
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and how customers (target audience) can be reached.
oThe report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in Arabic, translate them).
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the report (one or two comments)
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in the future.
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score. It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template is not used.
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your answer will not be valid.
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
Use the footer function to insert page number.
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing, and format.
Answer:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
E-commerce Department
Group Project
Group Names:
Group IDs:
Course Title: Introduction to EManagement
Course Code: ECOM 201
Academic Year/ Semester: 2023/20241st Term
Instructor Name:
CRN:
Student Grade: out of 20
Grade Level: Low/ Mid/ High
ECOM 201 Project
Overview
Suppose your group works as a virtual team in a Saudi company that deals with local and global
clients. The company mainly aims to provide digital marketing services and solutions in one
field (e.g., cars, real estate, perfumes, fashion, flowers, healthy food, medicines, etc.). A task has
been given to you by the CEO. The task includes connecting with a Chinese brand that wants to
open an office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia. The task is considered completed when the team
proposes a strategy to the Chinese company representative and receives their feedback.
Requirements
The group needs to be divided as follows: one team manager, one representative from the
Chinese brand, one technical support expert, and one or two general members.
Write a reflection on your group work process in creating the team, choosing the tools, working
on the tasks, and reporting the strategy to the client.
Reflection (due by Week 10)
[20 marks]
The reflection should be written after you establish a successful virtual team. The reflection
should describe the process of 4 main components of virtual management: team building, tools,
procedures, and task management. Please use these guidelines on how to do so:
1. Virtual Team: (4 marks- 200 words)
In this section, you need to describe the virtual team.
•
Name your team and specify the field you will focus on.
•
Who are your team members, and what are their roles?
•
What are the personal objectives of each member (why you joined the team)?
•
What is the collective goal for your team (how will your team be successful in that
field)?
•
How the team experienced Bruce Tuckman’s four different stages of team building?
2. Virtual Tool (5 marks- 700 words)
In this section, you describe choosing a tool for your virtual team.
•
What are the main and complimentary virtual tools did you use to manage the tasks?
(provide pictures)
•
Describe the features of these tools that were useful to your teamwork (provide pictures).
•
Why did you choose these tools? What are the other options?
•
Suppose your budget was SAR 10k; how did you use that budget to get the best possible
tool?
•
How frequently does the team meet? How long is each meeting? (Provide photos of the
team meetings at different times)
•
How the meeting minutes helped your team stay focused? (Provide an example of your
team meeting minutes).
3. Virtual work dynamics (5 marks- 700 words)
•
How did you create a virtual office?
o What are the technical challenges that you faced in your work?
o Give some examples of work ethics/ culture in China.
•
How did you utilize vacation time and holiday time?
•
What are the challenges that your team faced in communication?
o Specify how space, time, and cultural differences affected the communication
process.
•
How did you overcome those challenges? (discuss from different roles’ perspectives).
4. Reports and presentations (5.5 marks- 500 words)
•
Provide an example of a proposed strategy your team worked on to make the marketing
campaign successful for the Chinese company in the chosen field.
•
The report should be 300 words describing the status and statistics of the chosen field and
how customers (target audience) can be reached.
o The report should have an introduction, a brief strategy, and a conclusion.
•
Include graphs and statistics to support your report (use local resources. If they were in
Arabic, translate them).
•
The Chinese company representative in your team should provide his/her feedback on the
report (one or two comments)
•
The rest of the team should address those comments.
5. Conclude your reflection (0.5 mark- 100 words)
•
Tell us how your teamwork was, what you would do better, and how you will thrive in
the future.
Useful links:
•
http://www.nottingham.ac.uk/studentservices/documents/planning-and-preparing-towrite-assignments.pdf
•
APA reference system https://student.unsw.edu.au/apa
•
About plagiarism http://wts.indiana.edu/pamphlets/plagiarism.shtml
•
About plagiarism https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plagiarism
Guidelines for the assignment:
•
This is a group project (4-5 students in each group), which is part of your course score.
It requires effort, collaboration and critical thinking.
•
Use the given template below. One mark will be deducted if there is this template
is not used.
•
Your assignment must be supported by evidence and resources. Otherwise, your
answer will not be valid.
•
Use at least 3 different references from the SDL including the Textbook
•
Use font Times New Roman, Calibri or Arial.
•
Use 1.5 or double line spacing with left Justify all paragraphs.
•
Use the footer function to insert page number.
•
Ensure that you follow the APA style in your project.
•
Your project report length should be between 2000 to 2500 words.
Up to 20% of the total grade will be deducted for providing a poor assignment structure. The
structure includes these elements paper style, free of spelling and grammar mistakes, referencing,
and format.
Answer:
ر
الجامعة السعودية االلكتونية
ر
االلكتونية
الجامعة السعودية
FACULTY OF ADMINISTRATIVE AND FINANCIAL SCIENCES
DEPARTMENT OF E-COMMERCE
INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL MANAGEMENT
ECOM 201
26/12/2021
Manager’s Guide to Virtual Teams
Chapter 6: Starting Up (or Refocusing) a Virtual
Team
2
Selecting Virtual Team Members
• Many managers are not able to select the members of their
team.
• The effectiveness of a virtual team depends heavily on its
membership.
• Working virtually can be both exciting and challenging.
• Tools to create a functional cultural in virtual teams:
• Charters
• Role clarification
• Operating guidelines
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 61-62
3
Selecting Virtual Team Members
• Criteria for choosing the right person to work virtually:
• Works independently with minimal supervision
• Enjoys working on a team
• Is a self-starter
• Demonstrates self-discipline
• Gets good results
• Demonstrates competence with both work and communication technologies
• Demonstrates good judgment
• Demonstrates good interpersonal skills (such as collaborating effectively, listening,
giving and receiving feedback, resolving conflict, etc.)
• Demonstrates willingness to take accountability
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 62
4
Selecting Virtual Team Members
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 65
5
Orientation for New Virtual Team Members
• A comprehensive orientation process helps ensure a smooth
transition and long-term success:
• Provide training that paints a realistic picture of what it will be like working remotely
• Include a thorough discussion of the organization’s culture
• Review the team’s charter and operating guidelines.
• Review the team’s communication protocols and preferences
• Set aside sufficient time for the new employee to get up to speed on the
technologies the team uses.
• If this is a project team, provide current status and history of the project.
• Build in some face-to-face time with the team as soon as possible
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 65
6
Creating a Team Charter
Charter: A brief statement that clarifies the purpose of the team.
• It normally includes things like key deliverables, deadlines, customers, and
priorities.
• It includes: the overall purpose statement, clarification of customer
requirements, and an inclusion of key deliverables.
• The written team charter document is less important than the discussion it
represents (how & why? )
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 66-67
7
Creating a Team Charter
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 68
8
Practical Tips for Chartering
• Make sure you involve key people outside the team as you develop
the charter.
• Agree on a tight timeline for completing the chartering process.
• Strive for practicality, not perfection.
• Live by your charter.
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 68-69
9
Role Clarification
A visual indicator that helps understand the distinct assignments and responsibilities of each team
member.
• Virtual employs tend to collaborate more with others when they
responsibilities.
have clear, and shared
• Tools
• RACI or RASCI diagram (Responsible, Approval, Support, Consult, or Inform)
• List each person on the team with corresponding information about his or her role on
particular project parameters
• Done at the beginning of the fiscal year
• Post it on the team Web site along with the project calendar
• Changes are made as project progress
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 69-70
10
Figure 6.1. A RASCI role clarification form
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 70
11
Operating Guidelines
Agreements for group interaction that are created and supported by all team members.
• Substitute for the fragmented and ineffective culture that is common in virtual teams
• Refocus a less-than-ideal homogenous culture
• Ideally, established while the team is still forming and then continually revised and
updated as the team progresses
• Identify acceptable and unacceptable team behavior.
• Prevents existing norms or habits from becoming the guidelines by default
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 71-73
12
Technology-Use Protocols
Jointly created agreements on how to use collaboration technologies.
• Agreements increase productivity and reduce the conflict that can
occur from violated expectations.
• Addressing issues like these below must be included in the protocols:
• “Why does part of the team answer e-mails on weekends while part does not?”
• “How quickly do we have to respond to instant messages?”
• “When should we use the telephone instead of e-mail?”
• “Is it okay to discuss work on my social networking pages?”
• “Why doesn’t part of the team write a salutation in work messages?”
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 73
13
Setting Technology Protocols
• The process of creating technology protocols allows team members to
acknowledge and incorporate technology preferences into the way they
work.
• The protocols needn’t be long, but should be detailed enough to provide
clear direction
• Help everyone understand the best ways to contact each other.
• Help people reduce stress and ensure more effective work/home life balance
Fisher, K., & Fisher, M. (2011). Manager’s guide to virtual teams. McGraw-Hill Education, pp 75
14
Saudi Case: Crisis Management and Adapting The Unexpected
Changes
A case study of Tawakkalna
• In your opinion, what were the most
important criteria for selecting team
members to work on developing
Tawakkalna application?
• If the app was built by a traditional
team, would the criteria be different?
tawakalna, ا., 2022. Tawakkalna. [online] Ta.sdaia.gov.sa. Available at: [Accessed 4 April 2022].
1
5
Notes: Do not use big words. Keep it simple to understand. Excellent papers are based on originality and genuine discussion of the idea. I also have attached the few example the ideal paper.
Write an Idea Paper in 1000 words, single spaced, centered on a concept or philosophical concern raised in the readings or class discussions on the economics, history, or philosophy of work.
Content:
The idea should be your original perspective that poses a question or issue for the reader to consider and explores it in depth connecting your prior knowledge in this class and other classes.
It also can draw from your experiences in which you analyze in-depth some matter related to the history, economics, and philosophy of work. However, this is not a general reflection in which you write conversationally and informally. Continue to draw from your formal knowledge and understanding.
1000 words is short, so it’s good to lead with your main idea early in your paper (deductive reasoning) rather than building up to it in a conclusion (inductive reasoning).
Make specific connections or references to outside aspects of the idea you’re exploring.
Excellent papers are based on originality and genuine discussion of the idea.
Self-Review:
On a separate page, give yourself a percentage grade out of 100%.
Then, write a few bullets of what you did well and what you could have done better (compliment and critique).
Tip: Read your work after your finish it to revise it for clarity and precision.
Guidelines:
No headings at the top left.
Add a creative title, and your name, on two lines, bold and centered at the top of page one.
Use regular font, size, and margins – clean and professional looking.
Only Ideal paper has to be 1000 words, but self review can be short with legit response.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Is Anyone Self-Made?
Alison Krolopp
What constitutes a self-made person? There are many features that characterize a self-made
person’s story, like a humble beginning, determination, big dreams, gained wealth, and significant
influence. Some self-made people’s lifetimes have possessed all of these features, and some only have a
few. “Self-made” is a commonly used descriptor for those who are successful; there is no shortage of
varying definitions, and plenty of individuals are said to be self-made, deemed this either by themselves
or others. Many Americans share a hope that anyone can “pull themselves up by their bootstraps” to
create whatever life they dream of, and stories of these individuals serve as inspiration. However, there is
a spectrum of backgrounds of those who are thought to be self-made, and “self-made” is an ambiguous
term used to fit a variety of stories.
By simple definition, “self-made” is “having achieved success or prominence by one’s own
efforts,” according to the Mirriam-Webster dictionary (“Self-made”). The common narrative of the selfmade man is of a person with humble beginnings who, “through sheer hard work and determination,
[ammasses] great wealth and success” in theory (Williams). It enforces the idea that the United States is a
meritocracy where anyone has the ability to create the life they desire, an idea that is exemplified by 77%
of Americans believing that rich people are rich due to their work ethic (Williams). However, when
delving into stories of commonly known “self-made” magnates, there is a quieter story about the people
and resources that allowed them to achieve their success. We rarely “hear about the significant
investments and contributions by some if not all of the following people: family, friends,
associates….advisors, teachers, authors, mentors,” and other inspirational, supportive influences in their
lives (Williams). Furthermore, as Daniel Markovits alludes to in his presentation The Meritocracy Trap,
there are plenty of capable people from lower-income backgrounds that never become as influential as
some of the “self-made” people who started off rich, though they also are hard-working and determined
(Markovitz). There isn’t a formula, rule book, or definition to follow that creates a self-made person.
Self-made people have dynamic stories that aren’t necessarily just about rags-to-riches. Donald
Trump, a billionaire businessman and former President is know by many to be self-made, and even
perpetuates the label through his own words. He has said that “rich men are less likely to like me, but the
working man likes me because he knows I worked hard and didn’t inherit what I’ve built” in an interview
with Playboy. He has encouraged others to think as he says he does, and to escape poverty by their own
bootstraps by saying “if I had been the son of a coal miner, I would have left the damn mines” (the irony
is that a person cannot physically pull themselves up by their bootstraps, but that would take a whole
other thought paper to get into) (Mosbergen). His story of building a multi-billion dollar real estate and
business empire with his own two hands would be inspiring if it were true. However, he started his
empire with help from his father, a wealthy real estate investor who gave him “small loan of a million
dollars” (which was actually multiple millions of dollars) (Breuninger). In Trump’s case, the self-made
man story is a lie. Another self-made man, Mark Zuckerberg, didn’t have particularly well-connected or
highly wealthy family members like Trump, but he did have an upper-middle-class upbringing and
prestigious education (Grossman). He and his roommates started Facebook as a project in college, and
Facebook eventually scored a half-million-dollar investment from Peter Thiel that helped launch the site
and business on a national scale (Elkins). Another example, Oprah Winfrey, is one of the most wellknown self-made women, as she grew up in poverty and in unstable circumstances and now is an
influential billionaire. She earned a scholarship to attend university, and from there she worked her way
up as a reporter (“Oprah goes national”). Then she scored her own morning news show in Chicago which
eventually received nationwide syndication due to her magnetic personality, skilled storytelling, and
groundbreaking content (“Oprah goes national”). She acknowledges herself as self-made (Mejia).
The vast variation in understandings and uses of the term “self-made” pose the question, is
anyone self-made? The term “self-made” doesn’t have one usage or situation, and it’s an ambiguous term.
With some, such as Donald Trump, “self-made” might seem ingenuine and ill-fitting. With others, such as
Oprah, it is easier to say that a person is self-made due to a humble upbringing and lack of wealth early
on. Even going deeper, Oprah was aided in her success early on by attending a magnet high school that
taught mainly honors classes (“Oprah Winfrey”). In the early days of her career, she was mentored by and
networked with acclaimed professionals like Roger Ebert (“A Date With Destiny”). How few resources
and little support does a person need to have early on in order to qualify them as self-made? If a person
grew up in an affluent area, like Zuckerberg, are they self-made? If their parents helped pay for college,
are they self-made? If a person is strongly mentored by an industry professional, are they still self-made?
After all, they did not create these opportunities all by themself.
I don’t have an answer about what self-made truly is, and I had hoped to land on a solid
conclusion while preparing for and writing this essay. More questions about the nature of “self-made”
arise than answers when reflecting on more stories. The term “self-made” is, in practical usage, a
shapeshifter. It’s a compelling attention grabber that has no exact meaning, which leads to confusion and
disillusionment. However, a logical conclusion when examining various stories of the self-made person is
that no one “makes” themself completely on their own.
Understanding the spectrum of self-made individuals sheds perspective onto the conversation
about meritocracy, hard work, and success. Individuals described to be self-made come from varying
backgrounds and have taken many different paths to success, and true rags-to-riches stories are incredibly
uncommon. Some began with some wealth and grew it, others innovated and branched into a new
industry. Also, the fact that many well-known self-made people started with wealth is very important to
recognize in order to allow for a realistic worldview. People should not feel like failures because they
aren’t the next wildly rich businessperson or inventor like Jobs or Bezos; enormous amounts of wealth
and recognition are not the only measures of success. As with many stories of upward mobility, a
person’s success comes down to two things: money and luck. Furthermore, examining the nuance of
being self-made is also a testament to the importance of asking for and accepting help from others when
the opportunity arises. A person does not have to be entirely independent in order to bring about personal
success, and aid from others does not diminish the value of a person’s efforts.
Works Cited
Breuninger, Kevin. “Trump Claimed He Turned a ‘Small’ $1 Million Loan from His Father into an
Empire. The New York Times Says It Was More like $60.7 Million in Loans.” CNBC, CNBC, 2
Oct. 2018, https://www.cnbc.com/2018/10/02/trumps-small-loan-from-his-father-was-more-like60point7-million-nyt.html.
Elkins, Kathleen. “Mark Zuckerberg Shares the Best Piece of Advice Peter Thiel Ever Gave Him.”
CNBC, CNBC, 28 Aug. 2016, https://www.cnbc.com/2016/08/25/mark-zuckerberg-shares-the-bestpiece-of-advice-peter-thiel-ever-gave-him.html.
Grossman, Lev. “Person of the Year 2010 – TIME.” TIME.com, TIME, 15 Dec. 2010,
https://web.archive.org/web/20130817081156/http://www.time.com/time/specials/packages/article/
0,28804,2036683_2037183_2037185,00.html.
Markovitz, Daniel, director. Daniel Markovits: National Book Festival 2020. The Library of Congress,
Congress.gov, 26 Sept. 2020, https://www.loc.gov/item/webcast-9419/. Accessed 12 Oct. 2021.
Mejia, Zameena. “Oprah Winfrey Googled Herself for the First Time and Learned 2 New Things.”
CNBC, CNBC, 8 July 2018, https://www.cnbc.com/2018/07/06/oprah-googled-herself-and-learned2-new-things.html.
Mosbergen, Dominique. “8 Times Trump Claimed He Was a Self-Made Man.” HuffPost, HuffPost
Politics, 3 Oct. 2018, https://www.huffpost.com/entry/trump-self-made-manmyth_n_5bb46528e4b028e1fe38ebaf.
“Oprah Goes National.” Edited by History.com Editors, History.com, A&E Television Networks, 13 Nov.
2009, https://www.history.com/this-day-in-history/oprah-goes-national.
“Oprah Winfrey Biography.” Oprah Winfrey – Biography on Bio.,
https://web.archive.org/web/20121105073013/http://www.thebiographychannel.co.uk/biographies/
oprah-winfrey.html.
Person. “A Date with Destiny.” Oprah.com, Oprah.com, 23 Nov. 2005,
https://www.oprah.com/oprahshow/a-date-withdestiny_1/all#:~:text=A%20Date%20With%20Destiny,until%20today!&text=Roger%20says%20si
nce%20that%20show,dates%20back%20in%20the%20’80s.
“Self-Made.” Merriam-Webster, Merriam-Webster, https://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/selfmade.
Williams, Ray. “The American Myths of the ‘Self-Made Man,” The American Dream and Meritocracy.”
Ray Williams, Ray Williams, 15 July 2020, https://raywilliams.ca/the-american-myths-of-the-selfmade-man-the-american-dream-and-meritocracy/.
“Wealth” is our happiness.
Vangjush Pappa
Nowadays, how much “wealth” we have determines feeling accomplished and happy. The
contradiction is that we still need to learn how much wealth is enough, and we still need to
build a ceiling as a limit. The desire for infinitive wealth comes with its consequences. While we
chase to claim material goods, we forget to define our values. Values generate happiness.
Wealth does not define an individual’s personality; values do. Unless we agree that “wealth”
does not represent our values, we are far from reaching happiness.
The nature of society drives individuals to increase their leisure instead of finding a balance
between values and good and needs. Instead of appreciating the accumulation of “wealth,” we
must appreciate the process. Life is a “process” with ups and downs, whose primary purpose is
to teach us, but if we don’t reflect within us, this “process” outcome is a material good with no
values. Becoming wealthy, it’s a process, too, a process that requires knowledge, skills, and
effort. Acquisition of knowledge it’s an infinitive process; we never will stop learning because
that’s the nature of life. Education is the primary source of “raw materials” in this process.
However, nowadays, the idea that education is just an expensive piece of paper is rapidly
spreading. “School is a scam” is a quote that many so-called influencers use to get attention and
drive the young generation in the wrong direction. However, we are the ones who decide what
is valuable to us, and we should take control of that. Adams cites in his epilogue, “Unless we
settle on the values of life, we are likely to attack in a wrong direction and burn the barn to find
out a penny in the hay.” We should stop defining wealth as a personality trait because we will
have to burn the barn to find our penny in the hay. We are so focused on wealth, and our
values are becoming worth a penny.
We live in a bubble where we want things handed to us by putting in the minimum number of
skills and effort. We argue that education should be free, corporates should pay for education,
health care should be free, or work only 15 hours a week. Considering we received all these
goods, are we satisfied? The answer will be a simple “nope.” The more we get, the more we
want. The idea of getting or having as much as we can takes over us. The greed to have “a lot”
in our life is a consequence of comparison. We keep comparing ourselves with others about
what they have while we should compare the process that took them there. For example, we
argue that we should work 15 hours and get paid the same amount of money as 40 hours, but
Elion Musk is a billionaire and does not work 15 hours a week. If anyone can give a logical
explanation to this, society will get the answer to many questions raised. Instead of comparing
what we and others have, we should compare what we had and what we have, who we were,
and who we are. If we can think this way, we will be halfway to reaching happiness. The next
step is who we want to be and what we want to do.
If we were to stop comparing ourselves with others, we would facilitate the process of what we
want to do and who we will become. The American dream provides opportunities, and there is
an opportunity for us to “draw” our dreams into reality. “Our dreams” not other’s dreams. If we
look up at others, we drive ourselves towards a labyrinth where the “get-away” path comes
with several consequences. Most of us get lost in this labyrinth, we feel tired, dissatisfied, and
disappointed with ourselves, and we start blaming the circumstances, which is wrong. We
decided to take that path, and we should take responsibility. Unfortunately, taking
responsibility is becoming rare because we always try to find the easy way out, such as the
desire to become wealthy with fewer skills and effort or quit from the process.
However, it happens to be in a labyrinth not because of us, but of factors we cannot control.
Life is not fair sometimes, but if we focused on our “dream” and “process” that would make us
wealthy, we would be more robust regardless of the circumstances. Assuming life puts us on
that labyrinth, the get-away path wouldn’t make us feel tired or disappointed; it would make us
feel accomplished and satisfied. Not all events in a lifetime indeed depend on us, but the way
out does. Everyone has an opportunity to find his/her way. Knowledge, skills, and efforts
combined provide a solution for our problems. If we were to focus more on these elements the
wealth gets accumulated in the process.
Focusing in becoming great at one set of skills at a time, it’s our “wealth”. An individual
generates his/her wealth due to their knowledge, skills and efforts, nothing it handed in this
life. Someone may assume that wealth can be inherited which is true. Would a person with no
certain skills or knowledge be able to manage it probably, most likely no. The idea of wealth its
deeper than the material goods we see. Wealth it’s a whole set of skills, values and knowledge
that build a personality. It is personality that takes us far away, gives us status, better life, and
more wealth. Wealth it’s not about the quantity, it’s about quality. Digging for diamonds its
exhausting, takes time, energy, and wisdom. However, one diamond worth million, and it’s a
tiny object that we would need a full bag of cash to purchase. If we were put the efforts into
digging this “diamond” within ourselves, we would be wealthy and happy.
Why Measuring Human Capital is Implausible
Max Schertler
Upon reading Theodore Schultz’ Investment in Human Capital (1961), I found myself
intrigued with the idea of being able to put a value on the intrinsic happenings of any given
person’s life. Shultz holds the belief that many purchases are done so with both the ideas of
consumption and investment in human capital in mind. The fact that some nonrandom portion of
any arbitrary decision is likely influenced by both ideologies is just so hard to measure, though.
Schultz also claims in the paper that the yield of these expenditures would ultimately determine
their worth, but I would have to disagree with this notion. While I do subscribe to the thought
that purchases often have multiple purposes in mind (ex: utility, function, fashion, etc.) in just
about every context, this alone makes measuring the value of strictly the human investment
portion of said purchase near impossible (if not simply impossible).
A perfect example of explaining my reasoning for why the yield, specifically, of an
investment cannot accurately determine the value of human capital amassed in any given
investment would be the purchasing of a house by a family. For the sake of this example, this
family (say, 2 adults and 1 child) is moving because one of the adults received a new job. If the
yield of the purchase were to be the primary determinant of the human capital invested in oneself
(and thus, the economy), then would it be argued that the sum of the net income achieved at said
job would be the return on investment? In my opinion, it certainly wouldn’t be fair to label this as
“correct”. If the dollar were to ever be used to attempt and make such a measurement, the
amount of human capital generated per dollar spent would be far lower than it actually should be,
or at the very least, the magnitude of each dollar would be inaccurately represented. Again, this
is due to part of this house purchase by the family being for strictly consumption.
Yet, the ratio of consumption to human capital in any investment would likely differ from
person to person. What may be considered a necessity to one person would be considered largely
expendable to another. If the family in the aforementioned example purchased a swimming pool
along with their house, one could argue that it is more of an investment in human capital than
consumption if the relaxation or exercise-related benefits of owning a swimming pool are
utilized efficiently. Another analyst could argue that it is a purchase consisting of mainly
consumer-based motives, where it isn’t ‘necessary’ for the family. The only way for this yield
method to even generate a conceivable estimate would be to standardize the percentages related
to human capital and percentages related ‘pure consumption’ for any given purchase. This feat
alone, is once again, nearly impossible. Every thing (whether tangible or intangible) bought with
even the slightest perceived notion of being utilized to better oneself would need to be given
these percentage values! Doesn’t that seem absurd? This line of work (valuing human capital
“things”) would also align itself with that of real estate and home appraisals too, which analyze
minute and nuanced differences in properties, from square footage and number of bathrooms to
distance from XYZ location and demographics of an area.
Not to mention that the child in this example problem will also have their educational
journey changed by the need to switch schools. Would this change be measured in a month-overmonth analysis of GPA average per dollar spent on school? If this whole idea sounds far-fetched,
I suppose that’s the point. Trying to calculate the worth in human capital of a decision seems like
a rather butterfly effect-esque situation. As depicted in the article, Schultz talks about how
companies commit to human capital investment when training new hires. In changing the hires
Finally, the last point that I thought was interesting was how “extra food in some poor
countries has the attribute of a ‘producer good’. This attribute of food, however, diminishes as
the consumption of food rises, and there comes a point at which any further increase in food
becomes pure consumption. Clothing, housing, and perhaps medical services may be similar.”
Essentially, Shultz describes how the theory of diminishing returns would play into the
predicament of allocating the aforementioned “percentages” of consumption vs. investment to a
purchase. This is actually a rather introspective comment that I would agree with in this scenario.
Food is certainly more productive in countries that have less of it. This brings the specification of
geography into the conversation if one were to standardize what is considered human capital.
Unfortunately, although Schultz makes this awesome point, it further proves that investment in
human capital, aside from ‘less descriptive’ and qualitative measures (such as money spent on
training, skills learned, money towards education) is just too hard to measure to make an
accurate, quantitative measurement recording it.
In conclusion, while measuring how much of each dollar goes into a purchase is no
challenge at all, but finding out how much of that purchase is considered human capital vs pure
consumption is extremely difficult. Perhaps it is acceptable to say that it is possible to determine
the amount of human capital that is invested for a niche category of a single purchase, but scaling
and standardizing methodology to consistently measure any and all forms of combined
consumption/human capital purchases would take an obscene amount of time and is nearly
impossible. The true scope of any single decision also effects far more than just the person
making the decision, and may indirectly make either a positive or a negative investment into
another person(s) as well, as seen in the family example mentioned earlier. This measurement
simply cannot happen!
Visit the Department of Transportation (DOT) website at U.S. Department of Transportation (a) Briefly compare and contrast two (2) of the DOT’s Executive Actions. (b) List and describe the DOT Operating administrations and their areas of focus.
You have to analysis a travel firm that provides holidays bookings.. So you have to write their beneficials and services and other stuff.. I have upload a pDF named CRM asb.. Everything has describe in the pdf.
For the indigenous awareness, you have to write an 4-5 pages essay with the source not very hard actually. Based to a text book.
Here is the description
You will complete this assignment individually.
Review the Truth and Reconciliation Commission’s 94 Calls to Action- choose two Calls to Action and describe how you will respond to these in your work, family, and/or social settings. For example, if you currently work in education or aspire to be an educator, you may find the educational Calls to Action (#6-12) most relevant to choose from. If you plan to work in healthcare, you may be choosing from Health Calls to Action (#18-24).
You can use the personal pronoun “I” for this assignment.
Questions to consider: What are the consequences (good and bad) of you implementing the Calls to Action? How will you overcome the challenges that you will/might face? What resources do you need to implement a response to the Calls to Action?
Length:
5-page double-spaced (not including title page and references page). You must include a minimum of 5 scholarly sources. These are 5 separate books, articles, papers etc. which you are referencing. You will cite the TRC’s report, so you need to add at least 4 more sources to your paper.
Please dont use CHATGPT because they have special tools to check the answers .. Please.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Truth and Reconciliation
Commission of Canada:
Calls to Action
Truth and Reconciliation
Commission of Canada:
Calls to Action
This report is in the public domain. Anyone may, without charge or request for
permission, reproduce all or part of this report.
2015
Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada, 2012
1500–360 Main Street
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3C 3Z3
Telephone: (204) 984-5885
Toll Free: 1-888-872-5554 (1-888-TRC-5554)
Fax: (204) 984-5915
E-mail: info@trc.ca
Website: www.trc.ca
1
Calls to Action
In order to redress the legacy of residential schools and
publish annual reports on the number of Aboriginal
advance the process of Canadian reconciliation, the Truth
children (First Nations, Inuit, and Métis) who are in
and Reconciliation Commission makes the following calls to
care, compared with non-Aboriginal children, as well
action.
as the reasons for apprehension, the total spending on
preventive and care services by child-welfare agencies,
and the effectiveness of various interventions.
Legacy
3.
Child welfare
1.
We call upon the federal, provincial, territorial, and
Jordan’s Principle.
4.
We call upon the federal government to enact Aboriginal
Aboriginal governments to commit to reducing the
child-welfare legislation that establishes national
number of Aboriginal children in care by:
standards for Aboriginal child apprehension and
custody cases and includes principles that:
i. Monitoring and assessing neglect investigations.
i. Affirm the right of Aboriginal governments to
ii. Providing adequate resources to enable Aboriginal
establish and maintain their own child-welfare
communities and child-welfare organizations to
agencies.
keep Aboriginal families together where it is safe to
do so, and to keep children in culturally appropriate
ii. Require all child-welfare agencies and courts to take
environments, regardless of where they reside.
the residential school legacy into account in their
decision making.
iii. Ensuring that social workers and others who
conduct child-welfare investigations are properly
iii. Establish, as an important priority, a requirement
educated and trained about the history and impacts
that placements of Aboriginal children into
of residential schools.
temporary and permanent care be culturally
appropriate.
iv. Ensuring that social workers and others who
conduct child-welfare investigations are properly
5.
We call upon the federal, provincial, territorial,
educated and trained about the potential for
and Aboriginal governments to develop culturally
Aboriginal communities and families to provide
appropriate parenting programs for Aboriginal families.
more appropriate solutions to family healing.
v. Requiring that all child-welfare decision makers
consider the impact of the residential school
Education
6.
We call upon the federal government, in collaboration
with the provinces and territories, to prepare and
We call upon the Government of Canada to repeal
Section 43 of the Criminal Code of Canada.
experience on children and their caregivers.
2.
We call upon all levels of government to fully implement
7.
We call upon the federal government to develop
with Aboriginal groups a joint strategy to eliminate
2 | Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada
educational and employment gaps between Aboriginal
and non-Aboriginal Canadians.
8.
We call upon the federal government to eliminate the
discrepancy in federal education funding for First
9.
14. We call upon the federal government to enact an
Aboriginal Languages Act that incorporates the
following principles:
i. Aboriginal languages are a fundamental and valued
Nations children being educated on reserves and those
element of Canadian culture and society, and there
First Nations children being educated off reserves.
is an urgency to preserve them.
We call upon the federal government to prepare and
publish annual reports comparing funding for the
education of First Nations children on and off reserves,
as well as educational and income attainments of
Aboriginal peoples in Canada compared with nonAboriginal people.
10. We call on the federal government to draft new
Aboriginal education legislation with the full
participation and informed consent of Aboriginal
ii. Aboriginal language rights are reinforced by the
Treaties.
iii. The federal government has a responsibility to
provide sufficient funds for Aboriginal-language
revitalization and preservation.
iv. The preservation, revitalization, and strengthening
of Aboriginal languages and cultures are best
managed by Aboriginal people and communities.
peoples. The new legislation would include a
v. Funding for Aboriginal language initiatives must
commitment to sufficient funding and would
reflect the diversity of Aboriginal languages.
incorporate the following principles:
15. We call upon the federal government to appoint, in
i. Providing sufficient funding to close identified
consultation with Aboriginal groups, an Aboriginal
educational achievement gaps within one
Languages Commissioner. The commissioner should
generation.
help promote Aboriginal languages and report on the
ii. Improving education attainment levels and success
rates.
iii. Developing culturally appropriate curricula.
iv. Protecting the right to Aboriginal languages,
including the teaching of Aboriginal languages as
credit courses.
v. Enabling parental and community responsibility,
adequacy of federal funding of Aboriginal-languages
initiatives.
16. We call upon post-secondary institutions to create
university and college degree and diploma programs in
Aboriginal languages.
17. We call upon all levels of government to enable
residential school Survivors and their families to reclaim
names changed by the residential school system by
control, and accountability, similar to what parents
waiving administrative costs for a period of five years
enjoy in public school systems.
for the name-change process and the revision of official
vi. Enabling parents to fully participate in the education
of their children.
identity documents, such as birth certificates, passports,
driver’s licenses, health cards, status cards, and social
insurance numbers.
vii. Respecting and honouring Treaty relationships.
11. We call upon the federal government to provide
adequate funding to end the backlog of First Nations
students seeking a post-secondary education.
12. We call upon the federal, provincial, territorial,
and Aboriginal governments to develop culturally
appropriate early childhood education programs for
Aboriginal families.
Language and culture
13. We call upon the federal government to acknowledge
that Aboriginal rights include Aboriginal language
rights.
Health
18. We call upon the federal, provincial, territorial, and
Aboriginal governments to acknowledge that the current
state of Aboriginal health in Canada is a direct result
of previous Canadian government policies, including
residential schools, and to recognize and implement
the health-care rights of Aboriginal people as identified
in international law, constitutional law, and under the
Treaties.
19. We call upon the federal government, in consultation
with Aboriginal peoples, to establish measurable goals
to identify and close the gaps in health outcomes
Calls to Action| 3
between Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal communities,
Royal Canadian Mounted Police to investigate crimes in
and to publish annual progress reports and assess long-
which the government has its own interest as a potential
term trends. Such efforts would focus on indicators such
or real party in civil litigation.
as: infant mortality, maternal health, suicide, mental
health, addictions, life expectancy, birth rates, infant
and child health issues, chronic diseases, illness and
injury incidence, and the availability of appropriate
health services.
20. In order to address the jurisdictional disputes
concerning Aboriginal people who do not reside on
reserves, we call upon the federal government to
recognize, respect, and address the distinct health needs
of the Métis, Inuit, and off-reserve Aboriginal peoples.
21. We call upon the federal government to provide
26. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
governments to review and amend their respective
statutes of limitations to ensure that they conform to the
principle that governments and other entities cannot
rely on limitation defences to defend legal actions of
historical abuse brought by Aboriginal people.
27. We call upon the Federation of Law Societies of Canada
to ensure that lawyers receive appropriate cultural
competency training, which includes the history
and legacy of residential schools, the United Nations
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, Treaties
sustainable funding for existing and new Aboriginal
and Aboriginal rights, Indigenous law, and Aboriginal–
healing centres to address the physical, mental,
Crown relations. This will require skills-based training
emotional, and spiritual harms caused by residential
in intercultural competency, conflict resolution, human
schools, and to ensure that the funding of healing
rights, and anti-racism.
centres in Nunavut and the Northwest Territories is a
priority.
22. We call upon those who can effect change within the
28. We call upon law schools in Canada to require all law
students to take a course in Aboriginal people and the
law, which includes the history and legacy of residential
Canadian health-care system to recognize the value
schools, the United Nations Declaration on the Rights
of Aboriginal healing practices and use them in the
of Indigenous Peoples, Treaties and Aboriginal rights,
treatment of Aboriginal patients in collaboration with
Indigenous law, and Aboriginal–Crown relations.
Aboriginal healers and Elders where requested by
This will require skills-based training in intercultural
Aboriginal patients.
competency, conflict resolution, human rights, and anti-
23. We call upon all levels of government to:
i. Increase the number of Aboriginal professionals
working in the health-care field.
ii. Ensure the retention of Aboriginal health-care
providers in Aboriginal communities.
iii. Provide cultural competency training for all healthcare professionals.
24. We call upon medical and nursing schools in Canada
to require all students to take a course dealing with
racism.
29. We call upon the parties and, in particular, the federal
government, to work collaboratively with plaintiffs not
included in the Indian Residential Schools Settlement
Agreement to have disputed legal issues determined
expeditiously on an agreed set of facts.
30. We call upon federal, provincial, and territorial
governments to commit to eliminating the
overrepresentation of Aboriginal people in custody over
the next decade, and to issue detailed annual reports
Aboriginal health issues, including the history and
that monitor and evaluate progress in doing so.
legacy of residential schools, the United Nations
31. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, Treaties
governments to provide sufficient and stable funding
and Aboriginal rights, and Indigenous teachings and
to implement and evaluate community sanctions that
practices. This will require skills-based training in
will provide realistic alternatives to imprisonment for
intercultural competency, conflict resolution, human
Aboriginal offenders and respond to the underlying
rights, and anti-racism.
causes of offending.
Justice
25. We call upon the federal government to establish a
written policy that reaffirms the independence of the
32. We call upon the federal government to amend the
Criminal Code to allow trial judges, upon giving reasons,
to depart from mandatory minimum sentences and
restrictions on the use of conditional sentences.
4 | Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada
33. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
40. We call on all levels of government, in collaboration
governments to recognize as a high priority the need to
with Aboriginal people, to create adequately funded
address and prevent Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder
and accessible Aboriginal-specific victim programs and
(FASD), and to develop, in collaboration with Aboriginal
services with appropriate evaluation mechanisms.
people, FASD preventive programs that can be delivered
in a culturally appropriate manner.
34. We call upon the governments of Canada, the provinces,
41. We call upon the federal government, in consultation
with Aboriginal organizations, to appoint a public
inquiry into the causes of, and remedies for, the
and territories to undertake reforms to the criminal
disproportionate victimization of Aboriginal women and
justice system to better address the needs of offenders
girls. The inquiry’s mandate would include:
with Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder (FASD),
including:
i. Providing increased community resources and
powers for courts to ensure that FASD is properly
diagnosed, and that appropriate community
supports are in place for those with FASD.
ii. Enacting statutory exemptions from mandatory
minimum sentences of imprisonment for offenders
affected by FASD.
iii. Providing community, correctional, and parole
i. Investigation into missing and murdered Aboriginal
women and girls.
ii. Links to the intergenerational legacy of residential
schools.
42. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
governments to commit to the recognition and
implementation of Aboriginal justice systems in a
manner consistent with the Treaty and Aboriginal
rights of Aboriginal peoples, the Constitution Act, 1982,
and the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of
resources to maximize the ability of people with
Indigenous Peoples, endorsed by Canada in November
FASD to live in the community.
2012.
iv. Adopting appropriate evaluation mechanisms to
measure the effectiveness of such programs and
ensure community safety.
Reconciliation
barriers to the creation of additional Aboriginal healing
Canadian Governments and the United Nations
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous People
lodges within the federal correctional system.
43. We call upon federal, provincial, territorial, and
35. We call upon the federal government to eliminate
36. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
governments to work with Aboriginal communities to
provide culturally relevant services to inmates on issues
municipal governments to fully adopt and implement
the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of
Indigenous Peoples as the framework for reconciliation.
such as substance abuse, family and domestic violence,
44. We call upon the Government of Canada to develop
and overcoming the experience of having been sexually
a national action plan, strategies, and other concrete
abused.
measures to achieve the goals of the United Nations
37. We call upon the federal government to provide more
supports for Aboriginal programming in halfway houses
and parole services.
38. We call upon the federal, provincial, territorial, and
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.
Royal Proclamation and Covenant
of Reconciliation
45. We call upon the Government of Canada, on behalf of
Aboriginal governments to commit to eliminating the
all Canadians, to jointly develop with Aboriginal peoples
overrepresentation of Aboriginal youth in custody over
a Royal Proclamation of Reconciliation to be issued by
the next decade.
the Crown. The proclamation would build on the Royal
39. We call upon the federal government to develop a
Proclamation of 1763 and the Treaty of Niagara of 1764,
national plan to collect and publish data on the criminal
and reaffirm the nation-to-nation relationship between
victimization of Aboriginal people, including data
Aboriginal peoples and the Crown. The proclamation
related to homicide and family violence victimization.
would include, but not be limited to, the following
commitments:
Calls to Action| 5
i. Repudiate concepts used to justify European
47. We call upon federal, provincial, territorial, and
sovereignty over Indigenous lands and peoples such
municipal governments to repudiate concepts used to
as the Doctrine of Discovery and terra nullius.
justify European sovereignty over Indigenous peoples
ii. Adopt and implement the United Nations
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples as
the framework for reconciliation.
and lands, such as the Doctrine of Discovery and terra
nullius, and to reform those laws, government policies,
and litigation strategies that continue to rely on such
concepts.
iii. Renew or establish Treaty relationships based on
and shared responsibility for maintaining those
Settlement Agreement Parties and the United
Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples
relationships into the future.
48. We call upon the church parties to the Settlement
principles of mutual recognition, mutual respect,
iv. Reconcile Aboriginal and Crown constitutional
and legal orders to ensure that Aboriginal peoples
are full partners in Confederation, including the
recognition and integration of Indigenous laws and
legal traditions in negotiation and implementation
processes involving Treaties, land claims, and other
constructive agreements.
46. We call upon the parties to the Indian Residential
Schools Settlement Agreement to develop and sign
a Covenant of Reconciliation that would identify
principles for working collaboratively to advance
Agreement, and all other faith groups and interfaith
social justice groups in Canada who have not already
done so, to formally adopt and comply with the
principles, norms, and standards of the United Nations
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples as a
framework for reconciliation. This would include, but
not be limited to, the following commitments:
i. Ensuring that their institutions, policies, programs,
and practices comply with the United Nations
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.
ii. Respecting Indigenous peoples’ right to self-
reconciliation in Canadian society, and that would
determination in spiritual matters, including
include, but not be limited to:
the right to practise, develop, and teach their
i. Reaffirmation of the parties’ commitment to
own spiritual and religious traditions, customs,
reconciliation.
ii. Repudiation of concepts used to justify European
sovereignty over Indigenous lands and peoples,
such as the Doctrine of Discovery and terra nullius,
and the reformation of laws, governance structures,
and policies within their respective institutions that
continue to rely on such concepts.
iii. Full adoption and implementation of the United
Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous
and ceremonies, consistent with Article 12:1 of
the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of
Indigenous Peoples.
iii. Engaging in ongoing public dialogue and actions to
support the United Nations Declaration on the Rights
of Indigenous Peoples.
iv. Issuing a statement no later than March 31, 2016,
from all religious denominations and faith groups,
as to how they will implement the United Nations
Peoples as the framework for reconciliation.
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples.
iv. Support for the renewal or establishment of
49. We call upon all religious denominations and faith
Treaty relationships based on principles of
mutual recognition, mutual respect, and shared
responsibility for maintaining those relationships
into the future.
groups who have not already done so to repudiate
concepts used to justify European sovereignty over
Indigenous lands and peoples, such as the Doctrine of
Discovery and terra nullius.
Agreement to sign onto the Covenant of
Equity for Aboriginal People
in the Legal System
Reconciliation.
50. In keeping with the United Nations Declaration on
v. Enabling those excluded from the Settlement
vi. Enabling additional parties to sign onto the
Covenant of Reconciliation.
the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, we call upon the
federal government, in collaboration with Aboriginal
organizations, to fund the establishment of Indigenous
law institutes for the development, use, and
6 | Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada
understanding of Indigenous laws and access to justice
iv. Promote public dialogue, public/private
in accordance with the unique cultures of Aboriginal
partnerships, and public initiatives for
peoples in Canada.
reconciliation.
51. We call upon the Government of Canada, as an
54. We call upon the Government of Canada to provide
obligation of its fiduciary responsibility, to develop a
multi-year funding for the National Council for
policy of transparency by publishing legal opinions it
Reconciliation to ensure that it has the financial, human,
develops and upon which it acts or intends to act, in
and technical resources required to conduct its work,
regard to the scope and extent of Aboriginal and Treaty
including the endowment of a National Reconciliation
rights.
Trust to advance the cause of reconciliation.
52. We call upon the Government of Canada, provincial
55. We call upon all levels of government to provide annual
and territorial governments, and the courts to adopt the
reports or any current data requested by the National
following legal principles:
Council for Reconciliation so that it can report on the
i. Aboriginal title claims are accepted once the
Aboriginal claimant has established occupation over
a particular territory at a particular point in time.
ii. Once Aboriginal title has been established, the
burden of proving any limitation on any rights
arising from the existence of that title shifts to the
party asserting such a limitation.
National Council for Reconciliation
53. We call upon the Parliament of Canada, in consultation
and collaboration with Aboriginal peoples, to
enact legislation to establish a National Council for
Reconciliation. The legislation would establish the
council as an independent, national, oversight body
progress towards reconciliation. The reports or data
would include, but not be limited to:
i. The number of Aboriginal children—including Métis
and Inuit children—in care, compared with nonAboriginal children, the reasons for apprehension,
and the total spending on preventive and care
services by child-welfare agencies.
ii. Comparative funding for the education of First
Nations children on and off reserves.
iii. The educational and income attainments of
Aboriginal peoples in Canada compared with nonAboriginal people.
iv. Progress on closing the gaps between Aboriginal and
with membership jointly appointed by the Government
non-Aboriginal communities in a number of health
of Canada and national Aboriginal organizations, and
indicators such as: infant mortality, maternal health,
consisting of Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal members.
suicide, mental health, addictions, life expectancy,
Its mandate would include, but not be limited to, the
birth rates, infant and child health issues, chronic
following:
diseases, illness and injury incidence, and the
i. Monitor, evaluate, and report annually to Parliament
availability of appropriate health services.
and the people of Canada on the Government of
v. Progress on eliminating the overrepresentation of
Canada’s post-apology progress on reconciliation
Aboriginal children in youth custody over the next
to ensure that government accountability for
decade.
reconciling the relationship between Aboriginal
vi. Progress on reducing the rate of criminal
peoples and the Crown is maintained in the coming
victimization of Aboriginal people, including
years.
data related to homicide and family violence
ii. Monitor, evaluate, and report to Parliament and the
victimization and other crimes.
people of Canada on reconciliation progress across
vii. Progress on reducing the overrepresentation of
all levels and sectors of Canadian society, including
Aboriginal people in the justice and correctional
the implementation of the Truth and Reconciliation
systems.
Commission of Canada’s Calls to Action.
iii. Develop and implement a multi-year National
56. We call upon the prime minister of Canada to formally
respond to the report of the National Council for
Action Plan for Reconciliation, which includes
Reconciliation by issuing an annual “State of Aboriginal
research and policy development, public education
Peoples” report, which would outline the government’s
programs, and resources.
plans for advancing the cause of reconciliation.
Calls to Action| 7
Professional Development and
Training for Public Servants
ii. Community-controlled culture- and language-
57. We call upon federal, provincial, territorial, and
iii. Community-controlled education and relationship-
municipal governments to provide education to public
servants on the history of Aboriginal peoples, including
the history and legacy of residential schools, the United
Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples,
Treaties and Aboriginal rights, Indigenous law, and
Aboriginal–Crown relations. This will require skillsbased training in intercultural competency, conflict
resolution, human rights, and anti-racism.
revitalization projects.
building projects.
iv. Regional dialogues for Indigenous spiritual leaders
and youth to discuss Indigenous spirituality, selfdetermination, and reconciliation.
Education for reconciliation
62. We call upon the federal, provincial, and territorial
governments, in consultation and collaboration with
Church Apologies and Reconciliation
Survivors, Aboriginal peoples, and educators, to:
58. We call upon the Pope to issue an apology to Survivors,
i. Make age-appropriate curriculum on residential
their families, and communities for the Roman Catholic
schools, Treaties, and Aboriginal peoples’ historical
Church’s role in the spiritual, cultural, emotional,
and contemporary contributions to Canada a
physical, and sexual abuse of First Nations, Inuit, and
mandatory education requirement for Kindergarten
Métis children in Catholic-run residential schools. We
to Grade Twelve students.
call for that apology to be similar to the 2010 apology
issued to Irish victims of abuse and to occur within one
year of the issuing of this Report and to be delivered by
the Pope in Canada.
59. We call upon church parties to the Settlement
Agreement to develop ongoing education strategies
to ensure that their respective congregations learn
about their church’s role in colonization, the history
ii. Provide the necessary funding to post-secondary
institutions to educate teachers on how to integrate
Indigenous knowledge and teaching methods into
classrooms.
iii. Provide the necessary funding to Aboriginal schools
to utilize Indigenous knowledge and teaching
methods in classrooms.
and legacy of residential schools, and why apologies to
iv. Establish senior-level positions in government at the
former residential school students, their families, and
assistant deputy minister level or higher dedicated to
communities were necessary.
Aboriginal content in education.
60. We call upon leaders of the church parties to the
63. We call upon the Council of Ministers of Education,
Settlement Agreement and all other faiths, in
Canada to maintain an annual commitment to
collaboration with Indigenous spiritual leaders,
Aboriginal education issues, including:
Survivors, schools of theology, seminaries, and other
i. Developing and implementing Kindergarten to
religious training centres, to develop and teach
Grade Twelve curriculum and learning resources
curriculum for all student clergy, and all clergy and
on Aboriginal peoples in Canadian history, and the
staff who work in Aboriginal communities, on the need
history and legacy of residential schools.
to respect Indigenous spirituality in its own right, the
history and legacy of residential schools and the roles
of the church parties in that system, the history and
legacy of religious conflict in Aboriginal families and
communities, and the responsibility that churches have
to mitigate such conflicts and prevent spiritual violence.
61. We call upon church parties to the Settlement
Agreement, in collaboration with Survivors and
representatives of Aboriginal organizations, to establish
permanent funding to Aboriginal people for:
i. Community-controlled healing and reconciliation
projects.
ii. Sharing information and best practices on teaching
curriculum related to residential schools and
Aboriginal history.
iii. Building student capacity for intercultural
understanding, empathy, and mutual respect.
iv. Identifying teacher-training needs relating to the
above.
64. We call upon all levels of government that provide
public funds to denominational schools to require
such schools to provide an education on comparative
religious studies, which must include a segment on
8 | Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada
Aboriginal spiritual beliefs and practices developed in
collaboration with Aboriginal Elders.
65. We call upon the federal government, through the Social
Sciences and Humanities Research Council, and in
collaboration with Aboriginal peoples, post-secondary
institutions and educators, and the National Centre for
Truth and Reconciliation and its partner institutions, to
establish a national research program with multi-year
funding to advance understanding of reconciliation.
Youth Programs
66. We call upon the federal government to establish multiyear funding for community-based youth organizations
to deliver programs on reconciliation, and establish
i. Determine the level of compliance with the United
Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous
Peoples and the United Nations Joinet-Orentlicher
Principles, as related to Aboriginal peoples’
inalienable right to know the truth about what
happened and why, with regard to human rights
violations committed against them in the residential
schools.
ii. Produce a report with recommendations for full
implementation of these international mechanisms
as a reconciliation framework for Canadian archives.
Missing Children and Burial Information
71. We call upon all chief coroners and provincial vital
a national network to share information and best
statistics agencies that have not provided to the Truth
practices.
and Reconciliation Commission of Canada their
Museums and Archives
67. We call upon the federal government to provide funding
to the Canadian Museums Association to undertake, in
collaboration with Aboriginal peoples, a national review
of museum policies and best practices to determine the
level of compliance with the United Nations Declaration
on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples and to make
recommendations.
68. We call upon the federal government, in collaboration
with Aboriginal peoples, and the Canadian Museums
Association to mark the 150th anniversary of Canadian
Confederation in 2017 by establishing a dedicated
national funding program for commemoration projects
on the theme of reconciliation.
69. We call upon Library and Archives Canada to:
i. Fully adopt and implement the United Nations
records on the deaths of Aboriginal children in the
care of residential school authorities to make these
documents available to the National Centre for Truth
and Reconciliation.
72. We call upon the federal government to allocate
sufficient resources to the National Centre for Truth
and Reconciliation to allow it to develop and maintain
the National Residential School Student Death
Register established by the Truth and Reconciliation
Commission of Canada.
73. We call upon the federal government to work with
churches, Aboriginal communities, and former
residential school students to establish and maintain
an online registry of residential school cemeteries,
including, where possible, plot maps showing the
location of deceased residential school children.
74. We call upon the federal government to work with the
Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples and
churches and Aboriginal community leaders to inform
the United Nations Joinet-Orentlicher Principles, as
the families of children who died at residential schools
related to Aboriginal peoples’ inalienable right to
of the child’s burial location, and to respond to families’
know the truth about what happened and why, with
wishes for appropriate commemoration ceremonies
regard to human rights violations committed against
and markers, and reburial in home communities where
them in the residential schools.
requested.
ii. Ensure that its record holdings related to residential
schools are accessible to the public.
iii. Commit more resources to its public education
materials and programming on residential schools.
75. We call upon the federal government to work with
provincial, territorial, and municipal governments,
churches, Aboriginal communities, former residential
school students, and current landowners to develop
and implement strategies and proced
After listening to this lesson, respond to the following questions:Crenshaw, D. (2022, Jul 19). Improving Your Focus. LinkedIn Learning. What will you do to avoid distractions from your IDP? How will you organize your priorities?Who have you identified to be your coach?In response to at least two of your peers, provide any feedback you have for your classmate.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
After listening to this lesson, respond to the following questions:
• Crenshaw, D. (2022, Jul 19). Improving Your Focus. LinkedIn Learning.
1. What will you do to avoid distractions from your IDP?
2. How will you organize your priorities?
3. Who have you identified to be your coach?
In response to at least two of your peers, provide any feedback you have for your classmate.
CLASSMATE 1
Class ,
To avoid distractions and stay focused on my intended tasks and goals, I employ several strategies and
techniques. These approaches can be applied to both individuals and organizations when creating an
Individual Development Plan (IDP) to maximize productivity and effectiveness:
1. Goal Clarity: Ensure that the IDP has clear and specific goals. Having a well-defined sense of purpose
and direction can help reduce distractions as you have a clear path to follow.
2. Prioritization: Use techniques like the Eisenhower Matrix to categorize tasks by urgency and
importance. This helps in focusing on high-priority tasks first and minimizing distractions from lowerpriority ones.
3. Time Management: Create a schedule or set specific time blocks for working on your IDP. Stick to
these time slots and avoid distractions during these periods.
4. Designated Workspace: Create a dedicated and organized workspace for working on your IDP. This
minimizes physical distractions and sets the stage for productive work.
5. Digital Distraction Control: Use apps or software to block or limit access to distracting websites or
social media during your work hours. You can also turn off non-essential notifications on your devices.
6. Single-Tasking: Avoid multitasking as it can reduce overall productivity and increase distractions.
Focus on one task at a time.
7. Mindfulness and Meditation: Practicing mindfulness can help you become more aware of your
distractions and improve your ability to stay on task.
8. Breaks: Schedule regular breaks to recharge your focus. Short, planned breaks can actually improve
productivity by preventing burnout and mental fatigue.
Remember, distractions are a common challenge, and it’s important to be patient with yourself as you
work on minimizing them. Regularly review and update your strategies to ensure you’re making progress
toward your IDP goals.
Organizing my priorities involves a structured approach of first setting SMART goals, categorizing them,
and assessing their importance and urgency. Once categorized, I rank these goals and attach
timeframes, ensuring a balance between personal and professional aspects. Regular review and flexibility
are essential, enabling me to adapt to changing circumstances while maintaining accountability through
support networks. This prioritization is translated into daily to-do lists, helping me allocate specific time
blocks in my schedule for the most critical tasks. Saying no when necessary and prioritizing self-care are
also important components, recognizing that a healthy work-life balance is crucial for sustained
productivity and fulfillment.
My previous supervisor was more than just a manager; they played a pivotal role in my career growth and
personal development. Their guidance and mentorship were instrumental in helping me navigate the
challenges and complexities of the workplace. Here are some specific ways in which they served as a
coach:
1. Feedback and Performance Improvement: My supervisor consistently provided constructive feedback
on my work. They not only pointed out areas for improvement but also highlighted my strengths. This
feedback loop allowed me to continuously develop and excel in my role.
2. Goal Setting: Together with my supervisor, I set clear and achievable goals that were aligned with the
organization’s objectives. These goals served as a roadmap for my career progression and gave me a
sense of purpose in my work.
3. Opportunities for Skill Development: My supervisor recognized my potential and proactively offered
opportunities for skill development. Whether through on-the-job training, workshops, or additional
responsibilities, they helped me acquire new skills and knowledge that were valuable for both my current
role and future career prospects.
4. Resolution and Problem-Solving: In times of challenges or conflicts, my supervisor provided valuable
insights and guidance on how to address these issues. Their experience and wisdom in handling
workplace dynamics were invaluable in finding effective solutions.
5. Career Guidance: My supervisor took a keen interest in my long-term career aspirations. They provided
advice on potential career paths, how to navigate organizational politics, and strategies for advancement.
This helped me chart a course for my professional future.
6. Networking and Exposure: They encouraged me to expand my professional network and gain
exposure to different aspects of the organization. This exposure not only broadened my horizons but also
opened up new opportunities for growth and development.
In sum, my previous supervisor’s mentorship and coaching were instrumental in my career development.
Their guidance helped me achieve my goals, develop new skills, and navigate the complexities of the
professional world. This experience reinforced the importance of having a trusted mentor or coach in
one’s career journey, as their insights and support can be transformative.
Crenshaw, D. (2022, Jul 19). Improving Your Focus. LinkedIn Learning.
Bailey, C. (2018, October 29). 4 Strategies for overcoming Distraction. Harvard Business
Review. https://hbr.org/201
CLASSMATE 2
After listening to Dave Crenshaw again from Week 6, after weeks of moving towards building
an Individual Development Plan (IDP), my outlook on improving myself has changed to become
solely focused on the protection and growth of my focus (Crenshaw, 2022). The purpose of an
IDP is for a person to improve their current performance while building on strengths related to
their current job. The IDP identifies strengths and weaknesses so that a person or company can
improve to meet their goals (Watson, 2022). To protect and grow a focus, tactical techniques
must be employed to remain focused for a long time. By creating an IDP, I can stay focused and
prepared for my future, regardless of the career I am currently in or the job I am planning. Three
factors that are the central nerve to my focus are avoiding distractions, organizing priorities, and
establishing a coach to strengthen my knowledge, skills, and abilities.
As mentioned in week 6, the 4 P’s process establishes the beginning steps for avoiding
distractions. The 4 P’s are planning, prioritizing, processes, and pace. Determining and recording
my methods for each aligns the 4 P’s to provide assistance and guidelines that protect against
distractions while prioritizing what is urgent and essential to me.
1. Planning: A function of personal or organizational management that involves setting
objectives and determining a course of action for achieving those tasks. The objectives
should be broken down into smaller tasks to establish more manageable steps to progress
along a timeline (Radojicic, 2023).
•
Protect Against Distractions (Dugan, 2023):
i.
Clarify the Goals – Developing a clear understanding of the objectives through
short-term and long-term goals recognizes which influences align with the focus.
ii.
Develop a Solid Plan – A plan should be treated as a roadmap, a structured
approach to follow a timeline in which the goals are broken down into smaller
manageable tasks that align with the focus.
1. Prioritizing: Organize your goals into an order of importance, which can be done in four
steps, also known as the Eisenhower Principle. First, the highest priority will be tasks
considered important and urgent. Second, the next set of tasks is considered important but
not urgent. Third, tasks are considered urgent but not important. Fourth, the last group of
tasks should be identified as neither important nor urgent. Prioritizing tasks allows one to
focus on time-crucial or critical tasks to avoid less important ones (Radojicic, 2023).
•
Protect Against Distractions (Dungan, 2023):
Prioritize the Goals – Prioritize the tasks based on urgency and relevance for
long-term goals.
ii.
Cultivate Self-awareness – Understanding a person’s strengths and weaknesses
will allow them to remain self-aware of situations and influences that will protect
them against distractions.
i.
1. Processing: Building a checklist, timetable, or set of instructions will eliminate the
factors of human error (Moogan, 2019). Ensuring everything is needed before execution
is vital to saving time and minimizing the risk of distractions from unexpected obstacles
and interruptions.
•
Grow Against Distractions (Dugan, 2023):
i.
Set Boundaries – Protect your goals against external influences and distractions
that don’t contribute towards your goals.
ii.
Supporting Connections – Surround yourself with individuals who encourage,
provide guidance, and keep your aspirations. They should be willing to respect
and protect your goals from outside distractions.
1. Pacing: Establish a baseline to determine your tasks’ progress, including how much time
you can spend on each task. Working at a regular pace will help maintain motivation and
morale while adjusting to obstacles and distractions (Moogan, 2019).
•
Grow Against Distractions (Dugan, 2023):
i.
Learn from Setbacks – Do not dwell on the setbacks and distractions that will
occur; instead, utilize them as opportunities for growth. By analyzing what went
wrong and adapting, you can advance along your timeline with a newer
knowledge of the task.
ii.
Celebrate Milestones – Acknowledge your progress along the way builds a sense
of accomplishment, making it easier to resist distractions.
When a person is looking for a coach, they are looking for someone who can benefit their
life by identifying challenges and seeking opportunities (Cogan, 2023). A coaching style that I
look towards has the characteristics of a positive, enthusiastic, supportive, trusting, and goaloriented communicator. My current first-line supervisor, Gregory Stone, has pushed me toward
my goals considerably. He is a family-focused, educationally motivated individual who enjoys
watching others around him strive for higher standards. As a retired Major in the United States
Army, he has no obligation to coach me in any aspect outside of the corporate environment. The
three qualities that he brings to our work environment are (Cogan, 2023):
• Expansive – My coach can identify the bigger picture of investing in the workforce.
Instead of limiting, he chooses to remember that investment in others increases
longevity in the organization.
•
Care – As a coach, he can see that my success is his to share. Asking numerous
questions about the progress of my education, my family’s upcoming purchase and
move to a house, and my progress as the lead contractor of an exercise shows his
care. He could limit our conversations to focus strictly on work, but he recognizes
that a positive environment promotes productivity.
•
Professionalism & Experience – Having a coach who used to perform the same role
in the organization is beneficial since he has all the knowledge to perform my job. He
is not guessing through the procedures and can reference any questions. He holds me
to a higher standard than most because I am self-driven and determined. Qualities that
I believe he sees in himself. Through our one-on-one conversations, he provides
feedback to ensure my goals remain on track while providing career guidance that
will benefit my progression.
Reference:
Cogan, K. (2023, March 24). How to Help Your Athletes Through Uncertainty.
Athlete365. https://olympics.com/athlete365/well-being/how-to-help-your-athletesthrough-uncertainty/
Cook, J. (2021, May 17). 5 Key Qualities to Look for in a
Coach. Forbes. https://www.forbes.com/sites/jodiecook/2021/05/17/5-key-qualitiesto-look-for-in-a-coach/?sh=2ea0a3545f17
Crenshaw, D. (2022, July 19). Improving Your Focus. LinkedIn
Learning. https://www.linkedin.com/learning/improving-your-focus/learning-toimprove-your-focus
Dugan, L. (2023, September 6). Stay focused! How to Avoid Outside Influences Distracting You
from Your Goals. LinkedIn. https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/stay-focused-howavoid-outside-influences-distracting-laurie-dugan/
Moogan, P. (2019, November 29). Principles of Smart Business Growth. State of
Digital. https://www.stateofdigital.com/principles-smart-business-growth/
Radojicic, B. (2023, May 5). What are the 4 P’s in Time Management? Time
Analytics. https://timeanalyticssoftware.com/what-are-the-4-ps-in-timemanagement/
Watson, B. (2022, September 15). Individual Development Plan: How & Why to Create One.
Eddy. https://eddy.com/hr-encyclopedia/individual-development-plan/
Understanding the market and what drives competition in the industry will greatly impact making informed decisions for an organization’s pay system. This analysis will lead to ensuring financial resources are considered and evaluated as well as working to ensure effectiveness with recruitment and retention of employees.
In your paper,
Evaluate the concept of market competitiveness in relation to an organization’s pay system, particularly when it is unable to offer its employees market competitive salaries due to a lack of financial resources.
Propose at least three alternative approaches for organizations which have limited financial resources.
Identify at least three specific steps that could be taken to minimize the impact that implementing these alternative approaches could have on the firm’s success. Justify why these steps would be the most appropriate in this situation.
must be 3 to 5 double-spaced pages in length (not including title and references pages) and formatted according to APA
Title of Market Competitiveness in bold font
Space should appear between the title and the rest of the information on the title page.
Student’s name
Name of institution (The University of Arizona Global Campus)
Course name and number
Instructor’s name
Due date
must utilize academic voice
must use at least 2 scholarly and/or credible sources in addition to the course text
Your introduction paragraph needs to end with a clear thesis statement that indicates the purpose of your paper.
Examine regulatory and ethical issues related to the use and management of health information technology.
Scenario
The HIT Innovation Steering Committee within an organization is proactively looking at data breaches of other organizations to assist them with minimizing the risk to their data security and privacy. As an intern at this organization, you are to investigate and select a recently publicized data breach. Use information from the module readings, lectures and your own research. Create a Proposal for this Committee describing the identified data breach and strategies the organization can use to minimize security and privacy risks.
Instructions
Create a written Proposal that includes:
Description of the data breach, including outcomes for the affected organization (e.g., regulatory and financial)
Discussion of the security, privacy, confidentiality, and ethical issues resulting from this breach
A final proposal discussion that describes methods that can be implemented in an organization to minimize risk for a data and security breach
Reference page of resources utilized.
Grading Criterion
– A clear and thorough description of the data breach and outcomes for the affected organization, including multiple examples and supporting details.
– Comprehensive discussion of the security, privacy, confidentiality, and ethical issues resulting from this breach, including at least one example or supporting details.
– A clear and thorough final proposal discussion describes methods that can be implemented in an organization to minimize the risk of a data and security breach, including multiple examples and supporting details.
– The reference page contains almost no formatting errors; all sources are scholarly and academic.
Case study: Wirecard’s Billion-Dollar Accounting Fraud
Read the transcripts or listen to the podcast titled “Behind the Scenes of Wirecard’s Billion-Dollar Accounting Fraud” (linked in references below)
Evaluate the actions and ethical breach of the Wirecard’s leadership.
Describe how the tone at the top contributed to this fraudulent activity.
Describe how various stakeholders (employees, stockholders, and the community) were affected by the actions of Wirecard leadership.
How did the Audit Committee and Board fail in their responsibilities?
Audit regulation requires the audit team to assess the fraud risk associated with each engagement. What characteristics of Wirecard might have caused it to be identified as a high-risk audit? Consider the incentives, rationale, and opportunities for fraud in the assessment.
Requirements:
Your written paper should be 3-4 pages in length not counting the title and reference pages, which you must include.
You need to cite at least three sources for this assignment, outside of the podcast itself.
Your paper must be formatted according to APA guidelines
Reference:
Wilder, M. (Host). (2020, September 29). Behind the scenes of Wirecard’s billion-dollar accounting fraud [No. 100]. ACFE. https://www.acfeinsights.com/acfe-insights/fraud-talk-behind-the-scenes-of-wirecards-billion-dollar-accounting-fraudLinks to an external site.
In Chapters 8 and 9, we reviewed several types of global expansion strategies a company can undertake when entering new markets. For this assignment, you will read a case study about Starbucks’ expansion into the Indian market (p. 413 in the textbook).
A case study is a puzzle to be solved, so before reading and answering the specific questions, develop your proposed solution by following these five steps:
Read the case study to identify the key issues and underlying issues. These issues are the principles and concepts of the course module, which apply to the situation described in the case study.
Record the facts from the case study which are relevant to the principles and concepts of the module. The case may have extraneous information not relevant to the current module. Your ability to differentiate between relevant and irrelevant information is an important aspect of case analysis, as it will inform the focus of your answers.
Describe in some detail the actions that would address or correct the situation.
Consider how you would support your solution with examples from experience or current real-life examples or cases from textbooks.
Complete this initial analysis and then read the discussion questions. Typically, you will already have the answers to the questions but with a broader consideration. At this point, you can add the details and/or analytical tools required to solve the case.
Respond to, and make decisions, based on the following questions:
What inspired Starbucks to venture into India? What were some of the company’s early concerns and other obstacles?
How would you describe Starbucks’ approach to entering India and how Starbucks was influenced by cultural differences to adapt its offerings for the Indian market?
Why did Starbucks want to enter India through a joint venture? Specifically, what benefits did Starbucks and the Tara Group both gain by partnering with one another? What synergies were present? What conflicts occurred and how were they resolved?
Now, assume the role of the Director of Starbucks’ Indian strategic planning team. You have been tasked to explore the benefits and challenges of expansion into foreign countries through joint-venture partnerships. Describe the opportunities, benefits, and concerns that Starbucks might face by doing so. Summarize the cultural environment, choose an entry strategy from the text, and describe how you would implement this entry strategy. Make sure you are very detailed in your explanation.
Based on the lessons learned from Starbucks case study, what lessons would you apply to those implementing Saudi Vision 2030 as the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia embarks on this multi-year strategy to attract multinational corporations?
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 5-6 pages in length, which does not include the title page, abstract, or required reference page, which is never a part of the content minimum requirements.
Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA (7th ed) style guidelines.
Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
Review the grading rubric to see how you will be graded for this assignment.
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to International Business (MGT 321)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to International
Business
Course Code: MGT-321
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
Knowledge:
1.1: Identify and evaluate the significant trade agreements affecting global commerce
Skills:
2.1: Analyse the effects of culture, politics and economic systems in the context of
international business
Values:
3.1 : Carry out effective self-evaluation through discussing economic systems in the
international business context
Case study
Please read Case 3: “Economic Development in Bangladesh” available in your ebook (International business: Competing in the global marketplace (13th ed.), at
page no.629, and answer the following questions:
Case study Question(s):
1. What were the principal reasons for the economic stagnation of Bangladesh after
its war for independence? Discuss.
(Minimum words: 400, marks: 2)
2. Explain how the liberalization program in the 1990s enabled Bangladesh to start
climbing the ladder of economic progress. What are the main lessons here that can
be applied to economic development in other nations?
(Minimum words: 500,
marks: 4)
3. Bangladesh is dependent for its prosperity upon agriculture and textile exports.
What are the risks here? How might Bangladesh diversify its industrial and
commercial base?
(Minimum words: 500, marks: 4)
Important Notes:
• This is an individual assignment.
• All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text
citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
• Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All
papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and
plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for
the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
The questions on this sheet should be answered using the attached information from Microsoft’s 10-K from 2023 (pages 6-8). I want to understand the details and process of each question so that I can use this sheet to prepare for my exam, so please show all processes and calculations. Since the length of answers for each question is limited, please try to keep your answers as brief as possible. You can use any book you want if that is helpful for solving the problem, and please let me know the name of the book you use so that I can review it. Please do not use Chatgpt, I have already used it to double-check my answer, but I think they are not completely right. Please let me know if there is any problem or any relative note you need. Thank you!
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1a. Comute Total Asset Turnover for Microsoft, for the year ended June 30, 2023. Show your
computations.
Total Asset Turnover
Computations:
1b. This ratio has declined significantly over the past ten years. Provide one hypothesis (possible
explanaton) as to why that might occur and then name a ratio which one could use to test your
hypothesis. Be brief (one sentence for each portion of the question should be sufficient), but be as
specific as possible.
Hypothesis:
Ratio:
2. Assume that Microsoft’s Operating ROA (OPROA) for the year ended June 30, 2023 is 51.6%.
Using this number, compute our measure of financial performance (as distinct from operating
performance) for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. You can find the formula for this on
slide 2 of Notes 6. Hint: All balance sheet numbers here should be averages even though the
formula doesn’t show this. Show your computations.
Financial Performance:
Computations:
3a. Compute Days in Accounts Payable for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. Use “Total
Cost of Revenue” for Cost of Goods Sold. Show your computations.
Days A/P
Computations:
3b. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Net Operating
Assets? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain.
Circle Answer:
Explanation:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
3c. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Total Cost of
Revenue? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain.
Circle Answer:
Explanation:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
4. Assume that Microsoft decided to increase leverage by issuing debt and using the cash received to
pay a dividend. How would this affect ROA and Operating ROA? Please circle the correct
answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain.
Effect on ROA
Effect on Operating ROA
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
5. Currently Microsoft reports research and development as an expense. If (contrary to accounting
rules) they were to treat these as a capital expenditures, how would this affect current operating
cash flow and current NOPAT in the short term? Assume that there is NO tax effect. Please
circle the correct answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain.
Effect on Operating cash flow
Effect on NOPAT
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
6. Using the attached information, what was the change in cash for Microsoft during the year ended
June 30, 2021? Show your computations.
Change in cash
Computations:
7. Using the attached information, what were “accruals” for Microsoft for the year ended June 30,
2021? Show your computations.
Accruals
Computations:
8. Using the attached information, did Microsoft’s inventory increase or decrease during the year
ended June 30, 2021? Briefly (one sentence) explain.
Circle Answer: Increase Explanation:
Decrease
Cannot determine
9. Using the attached information, how is Microsoft generating cash during the year ended June 30,
2023? How is it using its cash?
Main source of cash
Two primary uses of cash
10a. Microsoft’s balance sheet contains two liabilities labeled as ‘unearned revenue’ – some of this
is current (“payable” within one year) and some is non-current (“payable” after one year). For
purposes of this question, don’t worry about the distinction. Footnote 1 (not included here)
explains that the bulk of this liability represents license fees paid to Microsoft in advance of
Microsoft delivering services. Assuming that all of Microsoft’s service revenue is paid for in
this manner, use the balance sheet and income statement information to compute the cash that
Microsoft received during the year ended June 30, 2023 for service revenues.
Cash received for
Computation:
services:
10b. Assume that Microsoft overstates the short-term unearned revenue liability account as of June 30,
2023, but correctly estimates the account as of June 30, 2024.
What is the effect
Increase / decrease
/ cannot determine
on income for the
year ended June 30,
2023?
(Circle one)
What is the effect
on income for the
year ended June 30,
2024?
Increase /
decrease
/
cannot determine
(Circle one)
10c. How might one assess whether the appropriate level of unearned revenue is deferred in 2023?
Explanation:
End of Questions
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
INCOME STATEMENTS
(In millions, except per share amounts)
Year Ended June 30,
Revenue:
Product
Service
2023
$
Total revenue
64,699
147,216
2022
$
72,732
125,538
2021
$
71,074
97,014
211,915
198,270
168,088
17,804
48,059
19,064
43,586
18,219
34,013
Total cost of revenue
65,863
62,650
52,232
Gross margin
Research and development
146,052
135,620
115,856
Sales and marketing
General and administrative
27,195
22,759
7,575
24,512
21,825
5,900
20,716
20,117
5,107
Operating income
Interest Income, net
88,523
788
83,383
333
69,916
1,186
Income before income taxes
Provision for income taxes
89,311
16,950
83,716
10,978
71,102
9,831
Cost of revenue:
Product
Service
Net income
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
72,361
$
72,738
$
61,271
BALANCE SHEETS
(In millions)
June 30,
2023
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
$
34,704
76,558
2022
$
13,931
90,826
Total cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $650 and $633
Inventories
Other current assets
111,262
48,688
2,500
21,807
104,757
44,261
3,742
16,924
Total current assets
Property and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation of $68,251 and $59,660
Operating lease right-of-use assets
Equity investments
Goodwill
Intangible assets, net
Other long-term assets
184,257
95,641
14,346
9,879
67,886
9,366
30,601
169,684
74,398
13,148
6,891
67,524
11,298
21,897
Total assets
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable
Current portion of long-term debt
Accrued compensation
Short-term income taxes
Short-term unearned revenue
Other current liabilities
$
411,976
$
364,840
$
18,095
5,247
11,009
4,152
50,901
14,745
$
19,000
2,749
10,661
4,067
45,538
13,067
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Long-term income taxes
Long-term unearned revenue
Deferred income taxes
Operating lease liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
104,149
41,990
25,560
2,912
433
12,728
17,981
95,082
47,032
26,069
2,870
230
11,489
15,526
Total liabilities
205,753
198,298
93,718
118,848
(6,343)
86,939
84,281
(4,678)
206,223
166,542
Commitments and contingencies
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock and paid-in capital – shares authorized 24,000; outstanding 7,432 and 7,464
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
Total stockholders’ equity
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
411,976
$
364,840
CASH FLOWS STATEMENTS
(In millions)
Year Ended June 30,
Operations
Net income
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash from operations:
Depreciation, amortization, and other
Stock-based compensation expense
Net recognized losses (gains) on investments and derivatives
Deferred income taxes
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable
Inventories
Other current assets
Other long-term assets
Accounts payable
Unearned revenue
Income taxes
Other current liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
2023
$
72,361
2022
$
72,738
2021
$
61,271
13,861
9,611
196
(6,059)
14,460
7,502
(409 )
(5,702)
11,686
6,118
(1,249)
(150 )
(4,087)
1,242
(1,991)
(2,833)
(2,721)
5,535
(358 )
2,272
553
(6,834)
(1,123)
(709 )
(2,805)
2,943
5,109
696
2,344
825
(6,481)
737
(932 )
(3,459)
2,798
4,633
(2,309)
4,149
1,402
87,582
89,035
78,214
Financing
Cash premium on debt exchange
Repayments of debt
Common stock issued
Common stock repurchased
Common stock cash dividends paid
Other, net
0
(2,750)
1,866
(22,245 )
(19,800 )
(1,006)
0
(9,023)
1,841
(32,696 )
(18,135 )
(863 )
(5,754)
(3,750)
1,693
(27,385 )
(16,521 )
(769 )
Net cash used in financing
(43,935 )
(58,876 )
(52,486 )
(28,107 )
(23,886 )
(20,622 )
(1,670)
(37,651 )
33,510
14,354
(3,116)
(22,038 )
(26,456 )
16,451
28,443
(2,825)
(8,909)
(62,924 )
51,792
14,008
(922 )
(22,680 )
(30,311 )
(27,577 )
Net cash from operations
Investing
Additions to property and equipment
Acquisition of companies, net of cash acquired, and purchases of intangible
and other assets
Purchases of investments
Maturities of investments
Sales of investments
Other, net
Net cash used in investing
Refer to accompanying notes.
7
You have been asked to conduct a survey of your fellow colleagues to gauge their response to the possibility of introducing a holiday pay scheme. Explain the significance of the following: a) Population b) Sampling techniques You must draw upon relevant theory, concepts and models and appropriate organisational examples. In order to complete this task, you will need to consider as a first step the factors outlined in the course materials, referring as a start to the lesson on Quantitative Research and add relevant academic sources to your answer. 1200 words
Question 2 In respect of primary and secondary data compare and contrast: 1) The main differences between primary and secondary data 2) The advantages and disadvantages of primary and secondary data You must draw upon relevant theory, concepts and models and appropriate organisational examples. 1200 words
question 3
Drawing upon examples from either the case study organisation, your own organisation, or one with which you are familiar select an appropriate quantitative measure (such as turnover, profit, available from annual reports etc) and having obtained values over a number of equal time periods calculate the following: a) the mean b) mode c) the standard deviation You must include all your manual calculations. Use an Excel spread sheet to verify your calculations and embed a copy of this spreadsheet in your answer. In order to complete this task, you will need to consider as a first step the factors outlined in the course materials, referring as a start to the lesson on Quantitative Analysis: Coding and Descriptive Statistics and add relevant external sources to your answer. 400 words
Question 4 When it comes to making sound decisions an effective management information system acts as an important part of the process. To what extent would you agree with this perspective and why? You must draw upon relevant theory, concepts and models and appropriate organisational examples. In order to complete this task, you will need to consider as a first step the factors outlined in the course materials, referring as a start to the lessons on Introduction and the Role of Business Analysis in Organisations and add relevant external academic sources to your answer. 1200 words
Examine the role and impact of regulatory and accrediting agencies in delivering healthcare services in the U.S.
Student Success Criteria
View the grading rubric for this deliverable by selecting the “This item is graded with a rubric” link, which is located in the Details & Information pane.
Scenario
You are the risk manager for a local community hospital. You have just attended a Joint Commission Resources conference. Part of your role is to educate employees of the organization on practical solutions and implementation tips to maintain accreditation.
The Joint Commission requires that organizations seeking accreditation provide education and training to staff on areas such as populations served, team communications, coordination of care, reporting unanticipated adverse events, fall reduction programs, and early warning signs of change in patients’ conditions.
As an independent, not-for-profit organization, the Joint Commission accredits and certifies nearly 21,000 healthcare organizations and programs in the United States. Joint Commission accreditation and certification is recognized nationwide as a quality symbol reflecting an organization’s commitment to meeting specific performance standards.
Instructions
You must create an infographic that addresses at least one key initiative involving patient safety. Your infographic may highlight practices that mitigate risks specific to patient falls, infection control to reduce hospital-acquired infections or medication safety procedures. Your infographic should address the following:
Design a plan to mitigate the risk associated with your chosen topic.
Include examples of potential risks, explain the possible root cause, and propose a preventive strategy.
Your infographic should incorporate figures, graphs, and/or charts.
Grading Criterion
– The infographic provides a fully developed plan to mitigate the risk associated with the appropriately chosen topic.
– Provides specific examples of potential risks with thorough and detailed reasoning at an appropriate level for an infographic.
– Explains the possible root cause of the selected risk with specific examples, with detailed reasoning at an appropriate level for an infographic.
– Proposes a preventive strategy that is fully developed and supported.
– infographics are professional in appearance, with accurate graphs, figures, charts, and/or images to further explain the message.
pleas need your help to solve the assignment as usual we do !
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment 2
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
•
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
•
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation.
•
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
•
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
•
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
•
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe decision making process for complex issues pertaining to business
environment both internally and externally. (C.L.O :1.1)
2. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
3. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First: His Company
or His Family?”
Author:
by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha
Date of Publication:
September 1, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Read the case study titled as “Case Study: When the CEO Dies, What Comes First:
His Company or His Family?” by C. Maria Rex Sugirtha published in Harvard
Business Review, and answer the following Questions:
1. Identify the main problem and subproblems of the case?
[Mark 2]
2. Identify the causes of problem based on the following techniques?
a. Cause of the problem- 5 Why Technique
a. Why-1
b. Why-2
c. Why-3
d. Why-4
[Marks 3]
e. Why-5
b. Develop a Cause-and-Effect Diagram
3. Develop a mind map for decision making,
[2 Marks]
4. Write all the alternative choices of your decision.
[Mark 1]
5. Make a decision and write the conclusion.
[Marks 2]
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer5. Answer6. Answer7. Answer8. Answer-
Curtis Bell has just been hired by the Whitewater Inn to be the new front desk manager. Curtis is moving from another town, so the general manager of the Whitewater Inn is allowing him to stay a few nights until he can find permanent housing. Curtis arrives at the inn about 6 P.M. on the night before he is to start work. There are several guests at the front desk and several front desk agents. Before approaching the desk to check in, Curtis takes a few moments to listen and observe what is going on.
The first guest he observes is asking for a key to a room. The front desk agent, Jim, asks the guest for his name and verifies it in the computer system before handing over the key.
The second guest has a complaint. He is upset that his room is not made up and he has an important dinner appointment. The desk agent, Nancy, tells the guest that housekeeping is closed and she doesn’t know what to do.
The third guest, Mr. Jones, is trying to check in. However, the front desk agent, who is not wearing a name badge, claims he cannot find any reservation for Mr. Jones.
The next guest asks to use a safe deposit box. Nancy tells the guest that the hotel is out of safe deposit boxes because some of the boxes do not have keys.
Finally, a fourth guest approaches Jim and asks where a good place is to have dinner. The Whitewater Inn is known for its fresh fish and beautiful view of the river and woods beyond. Jim recommends a steak house down the street.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic
University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Strategic Management (MGT 401)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Strategic Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT401
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained
/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment No. 2: Case Study
Learning Outcomes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
Describe the different issues related to environmental scanning, strategy formulation, and strategy
implementation in diversified organizations- CLO2
Explain the contribution of functional, business, and corporate strategies in the competitive advantage
of the organization-CLO3.
Distinguish between different types and levels of strategy and strategy implementation-CLO4
Communicate issues, results, and recommendations coherently, and effectively regarding appropriate
strategies for different situations-CLO6
Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc:
Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following
questions:
1. Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company
(draw a SWOT matrix). 2pts
2. What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. 2pts
3. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful?
Justify 2pts
4. What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its
competitive advantage? 2pts
5. Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive
advantage. 2pts
Notes:
✓ Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable. You must use your own
words.
✓ Using the terminology developed in the course of strategic Management is highly
valued.
ANSWERS
Instructions:Read the following articles:https://spectrumlocalnews.com/tx/south-texas-el-paso/politics/2023/07/13/gov–abbott-wants-to-end-property-taxes–but-is-that-realistic-https://www.kxan.com/news/texas/your-property-tax-relief-questions-answered-how-much-when-you-could-benefit/What are your thoughts or opinions on property tax revenues? Try to consider more than one side of the issue and think through implications. The post should be approximately 250 to 500 words. Please respond to at least two of your classmates posts.
The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company, Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into. We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So, when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity. We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores. When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20% on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80% of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful. Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
ANSWERS:
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB anytime in Week 8)
Course Name: Principles of
Management
Course Code: MGT101
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 11225
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445 H (2023-2024)1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Noorjahan Sherfudeen
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions: Please Read them carefully
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission
making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a
developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of
each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company,
Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was
money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving
on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts
chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale
food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my
grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions
being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the
obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew
ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people
reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was
able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into.
We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So,
when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw
how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky
Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I
didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought
we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first
store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name
after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the
lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to
AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone
in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been
a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity.
We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through
as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with
electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our
objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices
in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying
our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores.
When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20%
on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80%
of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful.
Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does
AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the
company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss
briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ANSWERS:
I need some recommendations for this case on how the firm can solve this issue. make it simple and effective. The tutor must be very knowledgeable about the material and have experience. preferably from USA or Canada
In this week’s case study, the class will review a technology outsourcing company that has staff skills and training concerns on different levels. The class will consider the human resource factors that are relevant to making a sound strategic decision.
Reading Assignment
The reading assignments from: Strategic Management, Training Skills, Understanding Personality Types, and What HR People Do provide conceptual overviews while the case study provides the substantive content for this week’s activity.
Strategic Management, by N. Ritson, pages 47-50. Available directly from the course homepage.
Training Skills, by E. Garner, pages 41-43. Available for reading from the course homepage.
Understanding Personality Types, by E. Garner, pages 47-50. Available for reading directly from the course homepage.
What HR People Do, by T. Greener, pages 57-70. Available for reading directly from the course homepage.
Leadership Skills, by MTD Training, pages 47-51. Available for reading directly from the course homepage.
Digital Divide Data, a case study by Mathew, A., Rod, G., Villalobos, J. & Yates, D., pages 1-12. Available as a free Attachment
Discussion Assignment
After studying the Digital Divide Data (DDD) case study, describe DDD’s business goal and the strategic choices available to it.
Written Assignment
After reading the case study and other available information carefully, prepare a two page (double-spaced) essay addressing the following questions. When composing your essay, do not simply list the question and provide an answer, but rather compose a narrative essay that responds to the questions.
What are the current human resources (HR) challenges facing DDD?
What is the business goal and strategic choices facing DDD?
What skills does DDD require of its rank-and-file staff?
What skills does DDD require of its management staff?
What barriers prevent DDD from recruiting the management staff it needs?
What HR-related advantage is there for entering into a joint venture with a partner organization?
Cite references to material that you use in preparing the essay.
Learning Journal
The Learning Journal is a space where you should reflect upon what was learned during the week and how it applies to your daily life and will help you with your life (career) goals. For this week’s reflection, please write an essay of complete and well composed paragraphs (200 word minimum for the entire essay) where you identify a company in your community and describe the human resources challenges facing it.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Late submission will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. References include at least five
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. please no plagiaism at all .
All references must be cited using APA format. This includes both in-text citations and the reference list at the end of the document.
Originality, Similarity and Plagiarism Check: Your work must be original. All papers will be submitted through SafeAssign software to check for similarity and plagiarism. Any instance of academic dishonesty will result in a grade of zero for the assignment. No exceptions and no second chances!
The answer to each question should be no less than 300-400 words
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
Their Main functions
Motivational Factors /Drivers
Any local example
Reasons with suitable Examples
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
Assignment – CEO Report – Global Business Analysis
Several companies are very successful at conducting business in various countries and regions of the world. Your CEO has asked you to select one of the global companies from the list below and provide a report on what general knowledge and “lessons learned” can be gained from the other company relative to how they conduct global business.
Select one of the companies below and provide some background information on them focused on their global presence. Additionally, analyze (both good and not so good) aspects of their global business such as their overall business strategy, how they market, their supply chain, key partnerships, and other relevant aspects that make them successful in the global market. Key findings and recommendations for your CEO are also to be included based on your analysis.
Global Companies: (select one)
Apple – U.S. – technology
Tesla – U.S. – automotive/technology
Coca-Cola – U.S. – consumer goods
Honda – Japanese – industrial
Tata – India – conglomerate
Unilever – U.K. – consumer goods
Saudi Aramco – Saudi Arabia – energy
Tencent – China – technology
Suggested Outline of the report (you are not required to use this outline, but all the topics below must be addressed)
Executive Summary (2-3 sentences only) – what is report about and what were your findings
Part 1 – Description/Background
Part 2 – Analysis of global business operations
Part 3 – CEO Recommendations
Format
Minimum 2000 words/maximum 2200 words (excludes references); graphs, figures, tables acceptable and are encouraged
PDF document, 12-point Times New Roman font, double-spaced
Minimum of 7 credible references (in paper citations, and full citations at end of paper in APA 7th edition format; encyclopedia, blogs, or textbook are not to be used)
No first person to be used
Grading Rubric
15% – paper length, number & quality of references, organization and flow, presentation format, and grammar
20% – completeness & quality of content for background content – Have you thoroughly informed the CEO of the key aspects of your selected company? Did you use historical data?
50% – completeness & quality of content for analysis – Did you look at various global business aspects? Did you identify both good and not so good strategies/decisions made by the company relative to global business? Did you identify challenges the businesses are facing? Did you apply critical thinking/analysis and not just state the obvious?
15% – completeness & quality of content for recommendations/findings – Are your recommendations succinct and specific? Did you provide a range of recommendations? Are your recommendations supported by facts?
Tips for Success
Writing should be succinct and to the point – do not include superfluous or meaningless information
Use more than 7 references – it will help you understand the material and provide you a broader view of the subject matter
Include a few graphics (tables, charts, etc.) – this is helpful to the reader
Concentrate on the analysis part of this project – exercise critical thinking
Provide actionable recommendations – be as specific as possible
“ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study Access below link to read the case study: https://www.advantive.com/case-studies/nestle-waters/ “ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study Read This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters Company. In addition, it discusses the company’s need for quality improvement which encouraged its engineers to search for alternative systems to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, and by using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions: Explain the driving reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle Waters. (2.5 marks)Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office Manufacturing units. (2.5 marks) How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (2.5 marks)Describe the management role in the change process. (2.5 marks) Important Notes: – For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc. Use APA style for writing references.
Situation: Walmart would like to expand their organic food section. They hired you as their Strategic planner. So, tell us how would you create strategic objectives and help Walmart in reaching their goal.
Instructions
How do you intend to help the company to transition from the current state to a future one?
What are you going to do to bring about that change?
Typical Format to follow:
a) Fill the Company’s present state and precise their future state
b) Then you can follow the typical format below to create the strategic objective of Walmart in order to make that change a reality
c) Conclude the strategic objective:
Verb + Adjective + Noun = Strategic Objective
Output details:
Each learner will individually follow steps a), b) and c).
They will fill their answers in the typical formats. The learners can propose several strategical objectives as long as it will help the company to expand their organic products. The strategic objective should be concise (no more than 2 lines per objective).
QMB 3200
Homework #6
Instructions:
1) Solve all the problems. Each problem carries 20 points. Maximum score possible for
this Homework is 140 points. When both p-value and critical-value approaches are
asked, you have to use both as points are allocated to various sections and questions
posed in a problem.
2) Presenting only the final answer is not sufficient to get complete credit. Show the steps in
solution approach. That way partial credit can be earned to various steps in final solution.
It is your responsibility to demonstrate mastery of the subject matter through your
answers.
3) Submit your report as an Excel file. Solve each problem on a separate tab (worksheet). No
Exceptions. Organize your solutions on the Excel worksheet properly. Show where your answers
are for each problem and the sections of the problem. Use proper formatting. You must submit
only a single Excel file. Name Your File to show your Full Name and the HW Number.
4) Upload your report file on Canvas and verify if everything is fine by opening up the uploaded
file. It is your responsibility to ensure your report is uploaded properly.
5) Do not wait until the last minute. The deadline is strictly enforced by Canvas. No hardcopy
submissions are accepted. No e-mail submissions are accepted. If your file does not appear on
Canvas by the deadline, zero points will be recorded for you for that HW. No exceptions are
entertained for any reason under any circumstance in this regard.
HW Problems:
1. Data from the U.S. Shopper Database provided the following percentages for women
shopping at each of the various outlets. The other category included outlets such as Target,
Kmart, and Sears as well as numerous smaller specialty outlets. No individual outlet in this
group accounted for more than 5% of the women shoppers.
Outlet
Percentage
Other
35
Wal-Mart
25
Department Stores
10
Mail Order
15
Kohl’s
10
J.C. Penney
5
A recent survey using a sample of 200 women shoppers in Tampa, FL found 60 Wal-Mart,
29 traditional department store, 11 JC Penney, 14 Kohl’s, 30 mail order, and 56 other outlet
shoppers. Does this sample suggest that women shoppers in Tampa differ from the
preferences expressed in the U.S. Shopper Data-base? What is your conclusion based on both
the p-value and critical-value approaches? Use α = .01.
1
2. The Wall Street Journal’s Shareholder Scoreboard tracks the performance of 1000 largest
U.S. companies. The performance of each company is rated based on the annual total return,
including stock price changes and the re-investment of dividends. Ratings are assigned by
dividing all 1000 largest U.S. companies into four groups of equal size Group A (top rating),
B (second best rating), C (third best rating), and D (bottom most rating). Shown here are the
one- year ratings for a sample of 50 largest U.S. companies. Does the sample data provide
evidence that the ratings are equally likely for the largest U.S. companies based on both the
p-value and critical-value approaches? Use α = .025.
A
B
C
D
22
9
14
5
3. With double- digit annual percentage increases in the cost of health insurance, more and
more workers are likely to lack health insurance coverage. The following sample data
provide a comparison of workers with and without health insurance coverage for small,
medium, and large companies. For the purposes of this study, small companies are
companies that have fewer than 100 employees. Medium companies have 100 to 999
employees, and large companies have 1000 or more employees. Sample data is reported as
follows:
Health Insurance
Size of Company
Yes
No
Total
Small
Medium
Large
50
25
75
80
20
100
115
10
125
Total
245
55
300
a. Conduct a test of independence using critical-value approach to determine whether
employee health insurance coverage is independent of the size of the company. State
the Hypotheses and the conclusion. Use α = .005.
b. What is the p-value? What is your conclusion based on p-value approach?
c. The USA Today article indicated employees of small companies are more likely to
lack health insurance coverage. Use percentages based on the preceding data to
support this conclusion.
4. FlightStats, Inc., collects data on the number of flights scheduled and the number of flights
flown at major airports throughout the United States. FlightStats data showed 56% of flights
scheduled at Newark, La Guardia, and Kennedy airports were flown during a three-day
snowstorm. All airlines say they always operate within set safety parameters— if conditions
are too poor, they don’t fly. The following data show a sample of 600 scheduled flights
during the snowstorm. Use the chi- square test with a .10 level of significance to determine
whether or not flying/ not flying in a snowstorm is independent of Airliner. State the
Hypotheses. What is your conclusion based on Critical-Value test? Is it any different from
conclusion based on a p-value approach? Sample data follows:
2
Flight
Yes
No
American
70
80
Continental
105
55
Delta
95
85
United
45
65
5. The number of incoming phone calls defined by a Random Variable X at a company
switchboard during 1- minute intervals is believed to have a Poisson distribution. Use a .05
level of significance and the following data to test the assumption that the incoming phone
calls follow a Poisson distribution. State the Hypotheses as well as the conclusion.
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Observed Freq.
14
33
48
44
30
15
9
6
1
6. A salesperson makes four calls per day. A sample of 100 days gives the following
frequencies of sales volumes.
Number
of Sales
0
1
2
3
4
Observed
Frequency
(Days)
30
40
20
8
2
Records show sales are made to 30% of all sales calls. Assuming independent sales calls, the
number of sales per day should follow a binomial distribution. Assume that the population
has a binomial distribution with n = 4, p =.25, and x = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
a. Compute the expected frequencies for x = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 by using the binomial
probability function. Combine categories if necessary to satisfy the requirement that
the expected frequency is five or more for all categories.
b. Use the goodness of fit test to determine whether the assumption of a binomial
distribution should be rejected. State the Hypotheses and the conclusion. Use α = .10.
Note: Because no parameters of the binomial distribution were estimated from the
sample data, the degrees of freedom are k-1 where k is the number of categories.
3
7. A lending institution supplied the following data on loan approvals by four loan officers.
Conduct an appropriate Hypothesis test to determine whether the loan approval decision is
independent of the loan officer reviewing the loan application.
Loan Officer
Sean
Bruce
Debbie
Susie
Total
Loan Approval Decision
Rejected
Approved
14
12
14
18
16
34
16
26
60
90
Total
26
32
50
42
150
a) State the Null and Alternate Hypotheses.
b) Determine the value of the test statistic. Show all the steps in your solution.
c) Determine p-value. Conduct Hypothesis test using p-value approach with α = .025. What
is the test decision?
d) Determine Critical-Value. Conduct Hypothesis test using Critical-Value approach with α
= .05. What is the test decision?
e) Do the results in parts c) and d) lead to different conclusions? Why or Why not?
f) Based on test decisions under parts c) and d), what conclusion would you draw?
4
Master’s degree in management research Human resources management and its impact on achieving institutional excellence.I have attached the research objectives and final project template Please do not repeat Other Subject
Unformatted Attachment Preview
جامعة ميدأوشن
كلية اإلدارة
قسم /تخصص…………….
العنوان باللغة العربية
إعداد الطالب/
إشراف/
العام الدراس ي:
2023
فهرس املحتوى:
قائمة الجداول :
Abstract : املستخلص
الفصل األول
املقدمة:
-
مشكلة الدراسة.
-
أهمية الدراسة.
-
أهداف الدراسة.
-
تساؤالت الدراسة (الفروض).
-
الدراسات السابقة.
-
املنهجية وطرق البحث.
-
أدوات الدراسة ( أدوات جمع البيانات).
-
مجاالت الدراسة ( بشري ،مكاني ،زماني).
Summary :امللخص
التوصيات:
املراجع واملصادر:
Midocean University
College of Management
Department of………….
Title in English
Prepared by:
Supervised by:
Year:2023
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words.All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.Use APA style for reference.Please follow the instructions as described in the assignment
I am working on a project but need someone to review and add to what I’ve done so far for questions 1, 3 and 4 and answer completely questions 2 and 5.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Business Analytics – BA 728 ONLS 01
Fatma Abdel-Raouf
Homework Set # 2
Fall I, 2023
Due on September 16, 2023
1. Data Visualization: A researcher is interested in examining whether there is a difference in negotiation
by gender. The researcher collected data on the prices men and women pay for new cars. These are the
prices they pay after the discount they get from the dealer as a result of negotiation. The “Car Discounts
Data” file posted on Canvas has data on the discount the customer receives, the gender of the customer
along with other variables. Present the data in a more useful way, what conclusions can you draw about
the car discount customers receive?
2. COVID-19 Pandemic: During COVID-19 pandemic, many workers lost their jobs. The Bureau of Labor
Statistics (BLS) provides a weekly publication about the number of people who file for unemployment
insurance (UI). The report comes out every Thursday morning at 8:30 AM. Get data about the number of
workers who filed for initial unemployment insurance during the pandemic and present it graphically.
Comment on the data and the graph.
For your convenience, the website for the report is https://www.dol.gov/ui/data.pdf
3. Dashboard: “Credit Risk Data” file posted on Canvas contains data on loan applications and measures
of credit risk for the applicants. The database contains the purpose of the loan, the balance of checking
and savings accounts, the length of time the applicant has been a customer and other demographic
data. Your supervisor asks you to create a useful dashboard to present this data to the board of
directors to convey information about the loan applicants, their demographic, and credit risk. How
would you present it?
4. Data Summary Measure: “Home Market Value Data” file posted on Canvas contains data on the home
value, size, and age for a sample of 42 houses on the market.
a. Summarize this data set using different data summary measures.
b. Check for outliers in the data and make sure you identify the outliers in each variable.
BA728 HW#2
Page 1 of 2
c. Is there any correlation between the home value and its size? How about home value and its
age?
5. Descriptive Analytics in Business:
Find an article in any business publications such as the Wall Street Journal, Financial Times, Business
Week, Bloomberg, CNN, CNBC, … The article should include different methods of data summary
measures. Read the article and summarize your findings. Make sure you address the following points:
–
What data summary measures does the article include? What information can you conclude
from there? Are there any outliers in the data?
BA728 HW#2
Page 2 of 2
Count of Gender Column Labels
Row Labels
F
M Grand Total
Business
9 35
44
Education
12 11
23
Furniture
37 48
85
Large Appliance
1
3
4
New Car
34 70
104
Other
1
5
6
Repairs
4
8
12
Retraining
2
2
Small Appliance
32 73
105
Used Car
5 35
40
Grand Total
135 290
425
Count of Gender
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
Loan Purpose
Gender
M
F
Count of Gender
Count of Gender Column Labels
Row Labels
F
M Grand Total
High
78 133
211
Low
57 157
214
Grand Total
135 290
425
Low
Credit Risk
High
0
Credit Risk by Gender
157
57
Gender
M
F
133
78
50
100
150
200
Row Labels
Sum of Checking Sum of Savings
Business
77647
62560
Education
16714
30760
Furniture
62903
162879
Large Appliance
0
18222
New Car
141417
157949
Other
2275
5878
Repairs
4078
9042
Retraining
644
603
Small Appliance
122609
251299
Used Car
17119
71147
Grand Total
445406
770339
Sum of Checking Sum of Savings
300000
250000
200000
150000
100000
50000
0
Loan Purpose
um of Savings
Values
Sum of Checking
Sum of Savings
Credit Risk Data File
Loan Purpose
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
Furniture
Education
Furniture
New Car
Business
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
New Car
Business
New Car
New Car
Used Car
Furniture
New Car
Repairs
Education
Furniture
Furniture
Furniture
Furniture
New Car
Business
Used Car
Used Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Education
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
Business
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
Other
Used Car
Small Appliance
Checking Savings
$0
$0
$0
$638
$963
$2.827
$0
$0
$6.509
$966
$0
$0
$322
$0
$396
$0
$652
$708
$207
$287
$0
$101
$0
$0
$0
$141
$0
$2.484
$237
$0
$335
$3.565
$0
$16.647
$0
$0
$0
$940
$0
$0
$218
$0
$16.935
$739
$1.230
$389
$347
$4.754
$0
$229
$533
$493
$0
$989
$3.305
$578
$821
$228
$129
$732
$683
$0
$12.348
$17.545
$3.871
$0
$485
$10.723
$245
$0
$0
$236
$485
$1.708
$0
$407
$895
$150
$490
$162
$715
$323
$128
$0
$109
$189
Months Customer Months Employed Gender Marital Status
13
25
19
13
40
11
13
14
37
25
49
11
10
25
13
31
49
13
28
7
34
13
25
37
11
22
19
49
37
19
37
31
13
16
49
5
25
9
49
13
49
25
37
12 M
0M
119 M
14 M
45 M
13 M
16 M
2M
9M
4F
0M
15 M
14 M
63 M
26 M
8M
4F
33 M
116 M
2F
16 F
5F
23 M
23 F
15 M
33 M
58 M
46 M
24 M
12 M
7M
32 M
2F
34 M
46 F
41 M
1M
40 F
42 M
74 M
0M
26 M
60 M
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Married
Married
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Single
Single
Single
Single
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
Business
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
Business
New Car
Used Car
Education
Furniture
New Car
New Car
Furniture
New Car
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
Used Car
Furniture
Furniture
New Car
Small Appliance
Business
Furniture
Small Appliance
New Car
Business
Business
Repairs
Business
New Car
Education
New Car
Education
New Car
Small Appliance
Used Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
$664
$150
$0
$216
$0
$0
$0
$265
$4.256
$870
$162
$0
$0
$0
$461
$0
$0
$0
$580
$0
$0
$0
$0
$758
$399
$513
$0
$0
$565
$0
$0
$0
$166
$9.783
$674
$0
$15.328
$0
$713
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$303
$900
$0
$537
$6.520
$138
$0
$660
$724
$897
$947
$0
$917
$595
$789
$0
$746
$140
$659
$717
$667
$0
$763
$1.366
$552
$14.643
$2.665
$0
$442
$8.357
$0
$863
$322
$800
$656
$922
$885
$2.886
$626
$0
$904
$784
$806
$3.281
$759
$680
$104
$899
$1.732
$706
31
12
7
19
17
25
19
25
16
28
22
25
37
13
19
19
37
29
11
13
19
25
16
13
31
7
25
22
10
28
13
37
13
13
49
43
25
12
61
19
19
16
25
37
13
37
31
33 M
1F
119 M
3F
75 M
8M
5M
5M
36 F
6M
10 M
28 M
114 M
16 F
32 M
5F
60 M
10 M
8M
46 F
17 M
4M
115 M
31 M
0F
0M
5M
9M
81 M
28 M
69 M
85 M
2F
3F
32 M
0M
9M
6M
17 M
3F
20 F
59 M
3F
25 M
3M
11 F
14 M
Single
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Married
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Married
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Education
Small Appliance
Repairs
Business
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
New Car
Retraining
Furniture
New Car
Education
Business
Furniture
New Car
Used Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
Business
Used Car
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Used Car
Large Appliance
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Business
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Other
Business
Repairs
$1.257
$0
$273
$522
$0
$0
$0
$0
$514
$457
$5.133
$0
$644
$305
$9.621
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$6.851
$13.496
$509
$0
$19.155
$0
$0
$374
$0
$828
$0
$829
$0
$0
$939
$0
$889
$876
$893
$12.760
$0
$0
$959
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$576
$904
$194
$710
$5.564
$192
$637
$405
$318
$698
$369
$0
$492
$308
$127
$565
$12.632
$116
$178
$901
$650
$241
$609
$131
$544
$10.853
$0
$409
$391
$322
$583
$12.242
$479
$496
$466
$1.583
$1.533
$0
$4.873
$0
$717
$7.876
$4.449
$0
$104
$897
10
7
7
25
25
25
46
13
49
19
19
10
13
19
25
13
19
16
49
13
13
19
25
37
25
19
25
25
49
9
13
7
25
19
19
25
37
31
16
13
13
22
28
25
25
25
19
65 F
14 F
2M
79 M
1F
93 M
13 M
21 F
13 F
108 M
14 M
16 M
88 M
1F
41 M
22 M
14 M
9F
45 M
89 M
21 F
20 M
14 M
6M
24 M
15 F
81 F
14 M
15 M
12 F
9F
18 F
53 M
0M
56 M
42 M
79 M
21 F
94 M
73 M
94 M
10 F
20 M
87 M
54 M
23 M
2F
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
New Car
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
Business
Repairs
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
New Car
Used Car
New Car
Used Car
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Used Car
Education
Furniture
Large Appliance
Furniture
Furniture
Business
Used Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Used Car
Small Appliance
Repairs
Furniture
Used Car
New Car
New Car
New Car
Repairs
Furniture
Used Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Business
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
Furniture
$698
$0
$0
$0
$12.974
$0
$317
$0
$0
$0
$192
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$942
$0
$3.329
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$339
$0
$0
$0
$105
$0
$216
$113
$109
$0
$0
$8.176
$0
$468
$7.885
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$4.033
$945
$836
$325
$19.568
$803
$10.980
$265
$609
$1.851
$199
$500
$509
$270
$457
$260
$3.036
$643
$0
$6.345
$922
$909
$775
$979
$948
$2.790
$309
$762
$970
$320
$861
$262
$692
$540
$470
$192
$12.230
$772
$14.186
$6.330
$18.716
$886
$750
$3.870
$3.273
$406
$461
16
13
25
19
13
13
13
13
31
12
25
28
16
25
13
25
25
19
19
25
37
25
19
25
19
22
49
10
13
28
13
37
11
37
13
7
7
25
22
16
19
22
37
25
13
6
13
20 M
6M
99 M
13 F
7F
89 M
17 M
10 F
3M
0F
5F
7F
3M
25 M
63 M
78 M
36 M
6M
15 M
19 M
9F
3M
8M
48 M
2F
55 M
37 M
1F
14 F
54 M
111 M
2M
14 M
1M
0F
2M
5M
19 M
24 M
14 M
93 M
96 M
2M
11 F
4M
35 M
48 F
Married
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Married
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Single
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Single
Divorced
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
Used Car
Business
New Car
New Car
Furniture
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
Business
Small Appliance
New Car
Education
New Car
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Business
Other
Small Appliance
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Furniture
Business
Used Car
Used Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Education
Small Appliance
Large Appliance
Education
Furniture
Business
New Car
Repairs
Furniture
Small Appliance
New Car
Small Appliance
Business
$0
$0
$734
$0
$0
$172
$644
$0
$617
$0
$586
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$522
$585
$5.588
$0
$352
$0
$2.715
$560
$895
$305
$0
$0
$0
$8.948
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$483
$0
$0
$0
$663
$624
$0
$0
$152
$0
$0
$498
$340
$6.490
$348
$506
$14.717
$0
$1.571
$0
$411
$544
$0
$835
$823
$5.180
$408
$821
$385
$2.223
$0
$605
$7.525
$3.529
$1.435
$887
$243
$4.553
$418
$771
$463
$110
$10.099
$13.428
$208
$552
$3.105
$415
$1.238
$238
$127
$0
$785
$718
$493
$757
$9.125
$364
$598
19
19
7
25
28
25
19
25
31
25
13
19
25
22
16
48
10
16
22
37
13
14
49
25
13
7
19
25
11
31
16
7
13
13
16
19
13
13
31
19
37
19
13
49
13
13
37
4M
85 M
100 M
3F
7M
36 M
1F
19 F
3M
0F
0M
42 F
47 M
4M
12 M
5F
66 M
0M
10 F
20 F
4F
0F
14 M
20 M
4M
2F
4M
0M
13 M
90 M
108 M
0F
23 M
15 F
19 F
6M
0F
2F
35 F
57 M
9F
0F
21 M
45 M
24 F
12 F
14 M
Married
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
New Car
Small Appliance
Used Car
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
Used Car
Business
Furniture
Used Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
New Car
Used Car
Small Appliance
Business
Education
Furniture
Business
Other
Furniture
New Car
New Car
Business
Used Car
Business
Small Appliance
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Repairs
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
Furniture
Furniture
Furniture
Other
Education
Small Appliance
New Car
$0
$156
$1.336
$0
$0
$0
$2.641
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$887
$0
$0
$0
$0
$18.408
$497
$0
$946
$986
$8.122
$0
$778
$645
$0
$682
$19.812
$0
$0
$859
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$795
$0
$0
$0
$0
$852
$0
$0
$425
$374
$0
$0
$508
$956
$636
$0
$1.519
$922
$180
$701
$296
$519
$800
$736
$11.838
$364
$212
$888
$999
$0
$578
$136
$734
$861
$855
$4.486
$2.017
$0
$500
$859
$3.305
$1.218
$9.016
$11.587
$8.944
$807
$867
$16.804
$347
$836
$142
$169
$3.613
$403
$836
$0
10
13
37
13
25
22
13
40
19
5
22
16
7
49
13
7
5
13
16
25
16
28
22
37
49
25
10
37
25
25
31
25
13
49
22
25
25
31
49
16
16
7
19
61
7
25
19
19 M
58 F
11 M
3M
4F
41 F
71 F
74 M
29 M
2F
108 M
8M
42 M
2F
6F
70 M
35 M
9F
3F
0M
83 M
1F
4M
111 M
21 M
17 M
3F
85 M
37 M
1M
89 M
26 M
38 M
22 M
46 F
66 M
75 M
27 F
40 M
5F
4M
53 F
6M
83 F
5F
0M
7F
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Business
Business
Education
New Car
Used Car
Used Car
New Car
New Car
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Retraining
New Car
Education
Education
Furniture
New Car
Small Appliance
Business
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Furniture
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
New Car
New Car
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
Repairs
New Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
Used Car
New Car
Other
$0
$0
$0
$11.072
$0
$219
$8.060
$0
$0
$0
$0
$1.613
$757
$0
$0
$977
$197
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$256
$296
$0
$0
$0
$298
$0
$8.636
$0
$0
$19.766
$0
$0
$0
$0
$4.089
$0
$271
$949
$0
$911
$0
$0
$0
$0
$11.481
$3.285
$164
$891
$0
$841
$607
$486
$108
$0
$113
$0
$208
$603
$343
$463
$0
$299
$490
$6.628
$859
$750
$954
$591
$13.970
$857
$5.857
$3.326
$726
$214
$207
$713
$2.141
$483
$127
$367
$813
$0
$102
$759
$0
$503
$823
$693
$973
$648
$523
25
7
13
61
37
43
19
12
25
43
25
25
25
13
19
10
37
19
13
37
19
13
10
37
13
11
19
73
19
11
13
13
11
19
7
37
43
7
7
19
49
13
46
19
49
15
37
18 M
21 M
65 F
17 M
49 M
0M
71 F
22 M
52 M
28 F
31 F
118 M
36 M
35 M
22 F
61 F
17 M
11 M
15 F
65 M
23 M
14 M
13 M
103 M
24 F
34 M
20 M
15 M
7F
3F
119 M
29 M
54 F
90 F
13 M
22 M
28 M
14 M
0F
0F
36 F
62 M
4M
28 M
81 F
57 M
0M
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Used Car
Small Appliance
Used Car
New Car
Furniture
New Car
Business
Small Appliance
New Car
Education
Education
Furniture
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Business
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
Furniture
Education
Repairs
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Repairs
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
New Car
Small Appliance
New Car
Business
Small Appliance
Used Car
New Car
Furniture
New Car
Used Car
Small Appliance
Used Car
$271
$0
$0
$0
$0
$4.802
$177
$0
$0
$996
$705
$0
$0
$5.960
$0
$759
$0
$651
$257
$955
$0
$8.249
$0
$956
$382
$0
$842
$3.111
$0
$0
$2.846
$231
$0
$17.366
$0
$332
$242
$0
$929
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$646
$7.090
$596
$904
$541
$154
$0
$0
$337
$716
$837
$0
$7.710
$531
$129
$941
$596
$987
$0
$460
$0
$798
$0
$959
$1.482
$883
$12.721
$0
$0
$302
$538
$0
$702
$2.688
$0
$425
$214
$0
$272
$124
$17.124
$612
$862
$146
$14.190
$396
$519
$0
25
13
49
19
37
37
49
25
19
49
25
25
13
13
13
10
37
37
49
49
25
31
11
46
31
37
37
13
10
25
13
10
10
16
13
25
19
7
9
13
49
49
25
37
49
31
25
2F
67 M
119 M
13 M
2F
12 M
9M
107 M
33 M
83 M
24 F
114 M
5M
16 M
111 M
18 F
101 M
102 M
75 F
29 M
42 M
77 M
21 M
19 M
20 F
31 F
9M
27 F
30 M
59 M
14 M
99 M
89 M
21 M
10 M
2M
6M
90 M
1M
95 M
32 M
62 M
46 M
92 M
73 M
23 F
9M
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Married
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Married
Married
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Furniture
Small Appliance
New Car
Used Car
New Car
New Car
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Furniture
Furniture
Small Appliance
Small Appliance
Business
New Car
New Car
New Car
Furniture
Small Appliance
Education
Business
Business
New Car
Used Car
Used Car
Large Appliance
Furniture
Business
Furniture
New Car
Education
Used Car
New Car
Furniture
Furniture
Used Car
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
Furniture
Used Car
Used Car
Education
New Car
$538
$0
$0
$0
$0
$135
$2.472
$0
$10.417
$211
$16.630
$0
$642
$0
$296
$898
$478
$315
$122
$0
$0
$0
$670
$444
$3.880
$819
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$0
$161
$0
$0
$789
$765
$0
$0
$983
$0
$0
$798
$0
$344
$204
$148
$435
$914
$0
$0
$412
$19.811
$822
$0
$3.369
$0
$707
$818
$177
$4.071
$466
$460
$991
$17.653
$497
$4.014
$921
$0
$0
$607
$15.800
$369
$4.973
$0
$761
$471
$674
$547
$524
$815
$0
$989
$10.406
$957
$770
$950
$160
$276
$137
$579
13
31
43
19
19
37
37
25
13
8
11
25
13
7
19
22
10
13
37
7
22
41
31
28
23
13
37
16
7
25
40
25
7
37
13
13
19
11
31
10
19
37
13
13
25
25
22
40 M
5M
2M
16 F
0F
7M
41 M
22 M
27 M
5F
47 M
17 M
65 F
26 M
93 M
105 F
40 M
3M
109 M
3F
4F
24 M
21 F
51 F
37 F
23 M
17 M
40 M
23 M
17 M
30 M
92 M
52 F
69 M
40 M
106 M
13 M
4F
0M
24 F
11 F
3F
5F
7M
91 M
25 F
70 M
Married
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Married
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Single
Divorced
Single
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Married
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Divorced
Married
Single
Divorced
Married
New Car
Small Appliance
Furniture
New Car
New Car
New Car
$193
$497
$0
$0
$0
$0
$2.684
$0
$0
$0
$712
$912
13
7
31
25
16
7
5F
51 M
53 M
103 F
6F
39 M
Divorced
Single
Single
Divorced
Divorced
Single
Age
Housing Years
23 Own
32 Own
38 Own
36 Own
31 Rent
25 Own
26 Own
27 Own
25 Own
43 Own
32 Rent
34 Rent
26 Own
44 Own
46 Own
39 Own
25 Own
31 Own
47 Own
23 Rent
22 Own
26 Rent
19 Own
27 Own
39 Rent
26 Own
50 Other
34 Other
23 Rent
23 Own
46 Other
35 Own
28 Own
25 Rent
36 Rent
41 Own
54 Own
43 Own
33 Own
34 Own
39 Other
34 Own
30 Own
Job
3 Unskilled
1 Skilled
4 Management
2 Unskilled
3 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Unskilled
1 Unskilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Management
2 Unskilled
1 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Unskilled
4 Management
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Management
2 Unskilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Unskilled
1 Skilled
2 Unskilled
1 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Unemployed
3 Unskilled
2 Skilled
Credit Risk
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
48 Own
19 Own
29 Rent
26 Rent
42 Rent
30 Rent
38 Own
21 Own
32 Rent
35 Own
46 Own
37 Own
39 Own
29 Own
27 Rent
22 Rent
40 Own
44 Own
26 Own
57 Own
34 Own
47 Own
46 Own
38 Own
52 Own
34 Own
29 Other
39 Own
36 Own
25 Own
59 Own
27 Own
24 Rent
25 Own
29 Own
64 Own
31 Own
38 Own
41 Other
22 Own
29 Own
32 Rent
34 Own
23 Own
21 Own
49 Other
31 Own
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Unskilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Management
4 Management
3 Skilled
3 Unskilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
3 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Unskilled
1 Management
1 Management
4 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
1 Unemployed
2 Skilled
4 Unemployed
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
2 Unskilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
Low
40 Rent
28 Own
21 Own
30 Own
37 Own
33 Own
22 Other
23 Own
21 Own
40 Own
36 Own
29 Own
37 Own
26 Own
37 Other
39 Rent
27 Own
19 Rent
45 Other
34 Other
43 Rent
33 Own
35 Own
31 Other
25 Own
27 Own
56 Rent
45 Own
53 Own
23 Own
25 Own
63 Own
34 Own
24 Own
35 Own
30 Own
29 Other
20 Rent
49 Own
56 Rent
48 Rent
24 Own
22 Own
30 Own
39 Own
20 Own
22 Own
4 Unskilled
1 Skilled
1 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Unskilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Unskilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Unskilled
1 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
2 Management
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Management
4 Management
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Unemployed
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Management
2 Unskilled
4 Skilled
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
High
24 Rent
41 Own
32 Own
23 Own
41 Rent
52 Other
65 Own
26 Own
33 Own
56 Own
24 Own
20 Rent
35 Own
34 Own
38 Own
34 Own
37 Own
31 Other
67 Rent
26 Own
24 Own
21 Other
46 Own
22 Rent
20 Rent
60 Rent
25 Own
21 Rent
22 Own
29 Own
56 Own
32 Rent
30 Own
27 Rent
37 Own
39 Own
26 Own
32 Own
31 Own
35 Own
31 Own
64 Own
27 Own
31 Own
32 Own
73 Own
30 Own
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Management
3 Unskilled
2 Skilled
1 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
3 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Management
4 Management
3 Skilled
2 Management
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Management
1 Skilled
3 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Unskilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Management
4 Unskilled
1 Unskilled
2 Unskilled
4 Management
2 Unemployed
4 Unskilled
2 Unemployed
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Management
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Unskilled
3 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
42 Own
45 Own
27 Own
22 Rent
26 Own
33 Own
27 Own
24 Rent
21 Own
28 Rent
51 Own
21 Own
27 Own
40 Own
34 Other
34 Own
63 Own
33 Own
28 Own
24 Own
18 Rent
63 Own
37 Own
38 Own
22 Rent
31 Own
31 Own
42 Other
24 Rent
65 Own
22 Rent
22 Rent
51 Own
23 Own
30 Own
32 Own
21 Own
52 Own
22 Rent
41 Own
53 Rent
54 Other
37 Own
27 Own
25 Own
34 Own
29 Own
1 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Unemployed
1 Management
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Skilled
1 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
2 Management
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Management
1 Skilled
1 Unskilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Management
4 Skilled
2 Unemployed
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Unemployed
3 Unskilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Management
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
27 Own
32 Own
29 Own
32 Own
28 Rent
25 Rent
51 Other
44 Own
33 Own
22 Rent
35 Own
30 Own
27 Own
23 Rent
19 Rent
44 Own
41 Own
35 Own
25 Rent
28 Other
34 Own
31 Own
32 Rent
41 Own
22 Own
28 Own
21 Rent
41 Own
36 Own
26 Own
37 Other
35 Rent
34 Own
43 Other
30 Own
31 Rent
43 Other
24 Own
26 Own
45 Rent
26 Own
48 Own
43 Own
59 Other
55 Own
29 Own
32 Own
3 Unskilled
3 Unskilled
2 Management
1 Unskilled
2 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Management
2 Management
1 Skilled
3 Unskilled
4 Management
2 Skilled
3 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
1 Unskilled
2 Skilled
1 Unemployed
2 Management
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Management
4 Skilled
4 Management
2 Unskilled
2 Skilled
4 Management
4 Management
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Management
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Unskilled
1 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Management
2 Skilled
2 Management
2 Skilled
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
53 Own
33 Own
56 Other
33 Other
46 Other
54 Other
22 Own
35 Rent
46 Own
29 Own
22 Rent
53 Own
42 Own
20 Rent
35 Own
33 Own
26 Own
46 Other
28 Own
38 Own
35 Own
47 Own
23 Own
56 Other
28 Rent
48 Own
27 Own
23 Own
24 Rent
22 Own
42 Rent
25 Own
47 Other
32 Rent
25 Rent
36 Own
25 Own
26 Own
53 Own
66 Own
23 Own
25 Own
24 Own
31 Other
57 Other
44 Own
42 Own
3 Management
2 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Management
2 Management
2 Skilled
4 Unskilled
3 Management
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Management
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Unemployed
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Management
3 Management
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
High
High
Low
27 Rent
51 Own
23 Other
31 Own
22 Rent
35 Own
37 Other
35 Own
30 Own
49 Other
32 Own
52 Own
45 Own
23 Own
41 Own
28 Own
30 Own
50 Own
58 Rent
36 Own
23 Rent
48 Own
37 Own
20 Rent
23 Own
39 Own
34 Other
22 Own
21 Own
38 Rent
36 Other
26 Own
47 Own
38 Other
27 Rent
25 Own
28 Own
67 Own
25 Own
34 Own
38 Other
41 Other
26 Own
35 Own
45 Other
32 Own
47 Other
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
1 Management
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Management
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Management
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Management
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
4 Skilled
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
High
Low
High
Low
Low
24 Own
30 Own
33 Own
23 Rent
21 Rent
36 Other
30 Own
52 Other
27 Own
44 Own
26 Own
24 Own
24 Own
50 Own
31 Own
38 Own
28 Own
48 Own
56 Other
31 Own
28 Own
26 Own
25 Rent
41 Other
24 Rent
29 Own
25 Own
35 Own
35 Own
26 Own
29 Own
59 Own
34 Other
41 Other
35 Own
27 Rent
41 Own
30 Rent
27 Own
65 Own
19 Rent
33 Own
24 Rent
40 Rent
62 Own
33 Other
29 Own
3 Unskilled
4 Unskilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Management
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
1 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Unskilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
3 Unskilled
2 Management
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Unskilled
4 Management
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Skilled
2 Unskilled
3 Unskilled
4 Management
4 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Management
3 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
3 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
4 Unskilled
3 Skilled
High
High
High
High
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
High
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Low
High
Low
22 Own
35 Other
30 Own
28 Own
28 Own
44 Own
2 Unskilled
4 Skilled
4 Skilled
2 Skilled
2 Skilled
3 Management
High
Low
High
High
High
Low
Count of Gender
Count of Gender
120
Credit Risk by Gender
100
80
157
Low
60
57
Gender
Credit Risk
40
M
F
133
35
20
9
0
High
78
0
50
100
150
Loan Purpose
200
Sum of Checking Sum of Savings
Account Amounts by Loan Purpose
300000
250000
200000
150000
100000
50000
0
Business
Education
Sum of Checking
77647
16714
Sum of Savings
62560
30760
Loan Purpose
Large
Appliance
New Car
Other
62903
0
141417
2275
162879
18222
157949
5878
Furniture
Job
Count of Gender
Management
Skilled
Unemployed
70
Unskilled
73
48
Gender
Housing
M
F
35
11
9
37
12
34
35
Own
5
Rent
32
5
1
3
1
8
4
2
Other
Marital Status
Divorced
Married
Loan Purpose
Single
ts by Loan Purpose
Values
Sum of Checking
Sum of Savings
Repairs
Retraining
Small
Appliance
Used Car
4078
644
122609
17119
9042
603
251299
71147
Job
Management
Skilled
Unemployed
Unskilled
Housing
Other
Own
Rent
Marital Status
Divorced
Married
Single
Row Labels
Frequency
131-630
631-1130
1131-1630
1631-2130
2131-2630
Grand Total
Relative Frequency
12
30
29
23
6
100
Frequency
Row Labels
131-630
631-1130
1131-1630
1631-2130
2131-2630
Grand Total
Column Labels
F
Frequency
Row Labels
131-630
631-1130
1131-1630
1631-2130
2131-2630
Grand Total
Column Labels
F
0.00%
5.00%
18.00%
17.00%
6.00%
46.00%
5
18
17
6
46
12%
30%
29%
23%
6%
100%
M
12
25
11
6
54
M
12.00%
25.00%
11.00%
6.00%
0.00%
54.00%
Cumulative
Cumulative relative
Frequency
frequency
12
12.00%
42
42.00%
71
71.00%
94
94.00%
100
100.00%
Grand Total
12
30
29
23
6
100
Grand Total
12.00%
30.00%
29.00%
23.00%
6.00%
100.00%
Frequency
Chart Title
35.00%
% of Car Buyers
30.00%
25.00%
11.00%
20.00%
6.00%
Gender
25.00%
15.00%
M
F
10.00%
5.00%
18.00%
17.00%
12.00%
0.00%
6.00%
5.00%
0.00%
0.00%
131-630
631-1130
1131-1630
1631-2130
2131-2630
Discount
Discount
Conclusions:
– Cumulatively, females receive more discount than males.
– 58% of customer received a discount over $1,130. 41% of those customers were
females.
– Most males received a discount between $631 and $1,130.
Gender
M
F
ustomers were
Discount Age
$998
1422
2520
1649
1354
1525
1400
676
919
1431
1838
1376
950
1472
2147
1538
988
1164
131
564
1827
1075
1334
1526
1844
2375
1679
945
1116
1538
532
2133
1918
1743
648
990
1766
1948
1557
800
339
569
1138
1968
1273
1657
27
41
21
46
27
43
55
34
39
19
46
34
35
39
19
29
43
35
38
40
52
46
41
21
28
42
43
37
44
38
53
18
36
33
43
48
46
39
31
35
44
41
25
31
57
26
Income
Gender
$47,645 F
32253 F
28650 F
29190 M
37997 F
25400 M
30282 M
45671 M
46477 M
27826 F
31731 F
20293 F
32655 M
35605 F
25801 F
20930 F
49336 M
39360 F
40623 M
47474 M
36371 F
37546 M
31734 M
21903 F
30568 M
21020 F
28799 F
50837 F
41937 M
30610 F
48257 M
20689 F
32626 F
27015 F
41184 M
43452 M
29314 F
38072 F
21022 F
33224 M
61025 M
46329 M
28018 M
23280 F
47204 F
26161 F
Female
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Discount
Gender
Discount of the car price the shopper receive
1 for Female, 0 for male
1852
2137
673
2162
1733
1821
336
884
892
801
1495
1014
1574
1048
1057
785
1541
1990
804
361
1490
1655
597
1735
189
697
692
1642
859
2110
1233
419
1982
1791
1487
877
1203
410
997
727
1321
864
786
421
1832
1382
679
25
29
43
25
42
39
30
33
30
37
37
31
40
35
41
42
30
51
50
54
21
57
27
56
54
39
38
31
52
38
35
42
20
24
23
25
57
29
40
22
37
51
23
35
23
33
55
28876 F
21388 F
54008 M
27396 F
38142 F
33869 F
38950 M
32990 M
37660 F
45593 M
20758 M
28605 M
33357 F
33795 M
48092 F
40369 M
20610 F
24734 M
44085 M
60448 M
20912 F
40701 F
37258 M
34783 F
43000 M
41004 M
43955 M
28891 M
45577 M
19016 F
36357 F
64663 M
27712 F
21559 M
28597 F
36041 M
50666 F
47653 M
47659 F
38710 M
36310 M
51353 M
29645 M
42593 M
26356 M
28056 M
55157 M
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1342
1266
1460
1621
1181
784
1690
33
41
39
33
45
41
27
27594 M
42611 F
32851 M
30493 M
42076 M
41515 M
22180 F
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
f the car price the shopper receives, measured as the amount in $ below the listed price of the car
Row Labels
27
28
32
33
Grand Total
Count of House Age
9
13
14
6
42
Sum of Market Value
829500
1103100
1372900
561400
3866900
Count of House AgeSum of Market Value
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
27
House Age
28
32
33
1600000
1400000
1200000
1000000
800000
600000
400000
200000
0
Values
Count of House Age
Sum of Market Value
Home Market Value
House Age
House Age Square Feet
Market Value
33
1.812
$90
Make sure you provide an analysis of each area on the slides and proceed with the following topics.
Overall message design strategy of the new annual plan.
Message content
Message structure
Message format/execution format
Message Source
Budget and Ad Development
Include a title page, table of contents for part 2, creative brief, and part 2 references.
Template of part 2 provided
Part one of this project provided bellow
Unformatted Attachment Preview
PART 2 IMC STRATEGY
RECOMMENDATIONS
• The Goal of Part 2 is to provide direction on the overall
creative message design and structure. This is called the
Creative Brief.
PART 2.1 COMMUNICATIONS STRATEGY
RECOMMENDATIONS:
OVERALL MESSAGE DESIGN
What is the key “Big Idea” you want integrated in all the
messages?
What is the key promise and supporting reasons why.
What call to action do you want used, example: go to website
URL, phone #, etc.
What are the mandatories, or constraints that need to be
included in the messages; such as logo, tag lines, warning
labels, drug interactions, etc.
PART 2.A. COMMUNICATIONS STRATEGY
RECOMMENDATIONS:
MESSAGE CONTENT
This is where you say what you want to say about the product,
for example:
• What specific product information is critical
• What differentiates this product from its competitors
• What appeals should be used (emotional, rational, sex, ethical,
etc.)
• What buyer readiness stage is your target audience in
• What disclaimers need to be used (put this detailed/legal
information in the Exhibits
PART 2.B. COMMUNICATIONS STRATEGY
RECOMMENDATIONS:
MESSAGE STRUCTURE
Provide strategic direction on how to deliver the key message
to the copywriter and art director.You are not writing copy
for the ads; that is for the creative team, for ex:
• What message strategy will you employ?
• Which advertising appeals will be most effective?
• If you want comparative messages used, need to provide
competitors & products.
PART 2.C.COMMUNICATIONS STRATEGY
RECOMMENDATIONS:
FORMAT/EXECUTIONAL FRAMEWORK
2-parts to this analysis need to be provided:
• Identify what formats the ad message should be in (search
or display ads, 30 or 60 sec. TV spot, full page or partial
print ads, etc.)
• What executional framework you believe will work best
(animation, storytelling, authoritative, testimonial,
demonstration, slice-of-life, fantasy, informative)
PART 2.D. COMMUNICATIONS
RECOMMENDATIONS:
THE MESSAGE SOURCE
• Offer direction on whether it should be a celebrity, man/woman
on the street, etc. and why.
• What source characteristics do you want, such as; trustworthy,
credible, expert, etc.
• What kind of voice talent do you want used, if you specify radio,
YouTube, etc.
• State if you want a spokesperson who has never been used by a
competitor, etc.
PART 2.E. COMMUNICATIONS
RECOMMENDATIONS:
BUDGET AND AD DEVELOPMENT
• Specify what type of budget methodology you would use
and your rationale. Provide a ballpark budget based on
your research
• Would you complete the work with an internal team or
outsource the work to an advertising agency? Provide your
rationale.
CREATIVE BRIEF TEMPLATE
END OF PART 2
• Be sure the Endnotes and References have been updated.
• Review for any editing errors
• Double check to be sure all the required content is
provided
IMC PLAN FOR SAMSUNG
SMARTPHONES
SAMSUNG SMARTPHONES
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Prepare this slide last and submit it with the final plan at the end
of the semester.
Contents of this slide should include:
• Summary of the key findings of your analysis, including new
communications objectives.
• Briefly state your promotion mix recommendations for
coming year.
• Identify any corporate policy items that will be impacted with
new recommendations.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• IMC plan for Samsung smartphones (Title)……………………………1
• Student’s Identity……..…………………………………………………..2
• Executive Summary……………………………………………………..3
• Current Marketing Situation ………………………………..………..4
• Product Marketing Strategies …………………………………………7
• Marketing Overview of the Product & its Role in the Market…………8
• Cont.………………………………………………………………………9
• Cont.………………………………………………………………………10
• Marketing Overview and Role in the Market…………………………………..11
• Market Role & IMC Strategy…………………………………………..12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Market Share, Competitors, and their Strategies………………………………13
• Product’s Market Position…………………………………………………………14
• Niche & Follower……………………………….…………………………………15
• Product Description: Value Proposition …………………………………….16
• Product Primary target market characteristics……………………………17
• Product Description: Target Market Buyer’s Decision Process………..…..18
• Product Review: Brand Strategy of the product/service……………….…..19
• Type of product/service lifecycle & benefits/features analysis …………….20
• Communications Objectives: First-year communications objective………21
• Issues impacting the attainment of the objectives……………………….….22
• SWOT Analysis Template……………………………………………………………..23
• Competitive Analysis Template………………………………………………………..24
✓ PART 1
CURRENT MARKETING SITUATION
Samsung is a recognized market leader in the smartphone industry, competing with major
players such as Apple and Huawei.
Samsung offers a broad range of smartphones with distinct features and specifications,
catering to diverse consumer preferences.
Competition is intense, particularly with companies like Apple and Huawei. Competitor
analysis is crucial for staying ahead.
There is a noticeable trend in the market for 5G-capable smartphones, driven by the
increasing demand for enhanced connectivity and faster internet speeds.
Consumers are showing a growing interest in environmentally friendly production. There’s a
rising emphasis on sustainable and eco-friendly practices in smartphone manufacturing.
PART 1
CURRENT MARKETING SITUATION
PRODUCT MARKETING STRATEGIES
Enhanced 5G messaging- Strengthen marketing messages around 5G capabilities to position
Samsung as a leader in cutting-edge technology.
Customer Education- Develop educational content to inform consumers about Samsung
smartphones’ benefits and unique features, fostering a deeper understanding and appreciation of
the brand.
Data-Driven Decision Making- Implement data analytics to track and analyze customer behavior,
enabling more informed and targeted marketing strategies.
Partnership Collaborations- Seek strategic partnerships with influencers, tech experts, or
environmental advocates to amplify brand messaging.
Global Market Expansion- Expand marketing efforts to reach new global markets and
demographics, capitalizing on emerging opportunities.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
MARKETING OVERVIEW OF THE PRODUCT & ITS
ROLE IN THE MARKET
Product: Samsung Smartphones, including models like Galaxy S and Note series.
Its Features:
• High-resolution AMOLED displays.
• Powerful processors for seamless performance.
• Advanced camera systems with multiple lenses.
• 5G connectivity for faster data speeds.
• Sleek design and build quality.
• Integrated software ecosystem (e.g., Samsung One UI).
• Customer Needs the Product Serves
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
MARKETING OVERVIEW OF THE PRODUCT & ITS
ROLE IN THE MARKET
Customer Needs the Product Serves:
Physical Needs:
High-performance hardware meets the need for efficient and reliable mobile computing.
Quality display and camera address the desire for visually appealing and advanced multimedia experiences.
Social Needs:
Connectivity features and social media integration fulfill the need for staying connected and sharing
experiences.
Premium design contributes to social status and aesthetic preferences.
Individual Needs:
Customizable software and personalization options cater to individual preferences.
Advanced features like secure biometric authentication meet the need for privacy and security.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
MARKETING OVERVIEW OF THE PRODUCT & ITS
ROLE IN THE MARKET
Type of Product:
Convenience Product:
• Samsung smartphones can be considered convenience products as they are frequently purchased with
minimal effort.
• Widely available through various retail channels, including online and offline stores.
Shopping Product:
• It also fits the shopping product category due to the consideration and comparison involved in the purchase
decision.
• Consumers may research and compare features before making a decision. Specialty Product:
• Some high-end Samsung models, known for unique features, can be categorized as specialty products.
These cater to specific needs and preferences and may have a dedicated customer base.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
MARKETING OVERVIEW OF THE PRODUCT & ITS
ROLE IN THE MARKET
Marketing Overview and Role in the Market:
Market Positioning:
• Positioned as a premium and innovative brand in the smartphone market.
Direct competition with other leading brands like Apple and Huawei.
Value Proposition:
• Offers cutting-edge technology, superior design, and a comprehensive ecosystem.
Provides a balance between performance, style, and functionality.
Target Audience:
• Broad target audience but with specific models catering to different demographics.
• Appeals to tech enthusiasts, professionals, and individuals seeking a premium mobile experience.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
MARKETING OVERVIEW OF THE PRODUCT & ITS
ROLE IN THE MARKET
Market Role:
Plays a pivotal role in driving technological advancements and trends in the smartphone industry.
Influences market standards through innovation in hardware, software, and design.
Brand Loyalty and Repeat Purchases:
Aims to foster brand loyalty through a combination of quality, features, and customer experience.
Expects repeat purchases as consumers upgrade to newer models for the latest technology.
IMC Strategy:
Focuses on communicating the value of the product as a solution to various consumer needs.
Utilizes a mix of digital marketing, retail experiences, and strategic partnerships to reach and engage
target audiences effectively.
PART1.B. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
CURRENT PRODUCT’S COMPETITIVE POSITION
• Market Share:
• Samsung is one of the leading players in the global smartphone market.
• The exact market share can vary by region and specific models but typically ranks
among the top competitors.
Competitors and Their Strategies:
• Apple:
• Pricing: Premium pricing strategy for high-end models like the iPhone Pro.
• Advertising: Emphasis on sleek design, innovative features, and the Apple ecosystem.
• Position: Strong market presence with a focus on innovation and user experience.
PART1.B. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
CURRENT PRODUCT’S COMPETITIVE POSITION
•
Huawei:
•
Pricing: Offers a range from mid-range to premium models with competitive pricing.
•
Advertising: Highlights advanced camera technology and 5G capabilities.
•
Position: Global player, solid in the Asian market, known for technological advancements.
•
Product’s Market Position:
•
Market Leader:
•
Samsung is generally considered a market leader in the smartphone industry.
•
Has a substantial global market share and is often at the forefront of technological innovations.
•
Challenger:
•
While a market leader, Samsung faces challenges from competitors like Apple and Huawei.
•
Constantly innovates to maintain and improve its position in the market.
PART1.B. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
CURRENT PRODUCT’S COMPETITIVE POSITION
• Niche:
• Some high-end Samsung models with unique features may be considered niche products.
• These cater to specific needs and preferences, attracting a more selective customer base.
• Follower:
• While a leader, Samsung also adapts to industry trends set by competitors.
• Observe and respond to changes in consumer preferences and technological advancements.
PART1.C. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
VALUE PROPOSITION
Current Value Proposition:
• More for Same: Samsung smartphones typically offer advanced features and high-quality
specifications at a comparable or slightly lower price than direct competitors like Apple.
Rationale:
• The value proposition focuses on delivering a premium user experience without the premium
price tag, making it an attractive option for consumers seeking top-tier technology at a
competitive cost.
Set of Benefits to Satisfy Consumers’ Needs:
• Cutting-Edge Technology
• Versatility and Customization
• Integrated Ecosystem:
PART1.D. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
PRIMARY TARGET MARKET CHARACTERISTICS
Target Audiences:
• Young Professionals:
Tech Enthusiasts and Early Adopters:
• Accessible
• Measurable
• Profitable
• Distinguishable
Market Targeting Strategy:
• Strategy
• Rationale
PART 1.E. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
TARGET MARKET BUYER’S DECISION
PROCESS
Complex Buying Process:
• Scenario: A customer wants a flagship smartphone with advanced features and specifications.
Process:
• Problem Recognition: The customer realizes the need for a new smartphone with cutting-edge technology, perhaps
driven by the desire for the latest camera capabilities or 5G connectivity.
• Information Search: The customer conducts extensive research, comparing smartphone brands, models, and
reviews. They might visit online forums, read tech blogs, and watch video reviews to gather comprehensive
information.
• Evaluation of Alternatives: The customer compares the features, performance, design, and prices of several flagship
smartphones, creating a shortlist of potential options.
• Purchase Decision: After careful consideration, the customer makes a purchase decision, selecting the smartphone
that best meets their needs and preferences.
• Post-Purchase Evaluation: The customer assesses their satisfaction with the chosen smartphone and shares feedback
online or with peers.
PART 1.F. PRODUCT REVIEW:
BRAND STRATEGY OF THE
PRODUCT/SERVICE
• Samsung smartphones are considered a national and global brand with significant brand equity.
• Samsung smartphones are part of a diverse product line.
• Inclusion in Product Line: The product line includes various series and models such as the Galaxy S
series, Galaxy Note series, Galaxy A series, and others.
• The brand is generally well-represented in packaging, reflecting its positioning strategy.
• Samsung’s packaging typically features the brand logo prominently. The packaging often showcases
key features and specifications of the specific model.
• Samsung positions itself as a premium and innovative brand, and this is often reflected in the
packaging.
PART 1.G. PRODUCT REVIEW:
TYPE OF PRODUCT/SERVICE LIFECYCLE &
BENEFITS/FEATURES ANALYSIS
• Samsung smartphones are likely in the growth stage of the product lifecycle.
• The growth stage is characterized by increasing sales, expanding market share, and rising
profitability.
• Samsung has a broad product line, and its smartphones continue to gain market acceptance and
adoption.
Benefits and Features to Target Audiences:
• Offers the latest technological advancements and innovative features.
• Provides options for a wide range of consumer preferences and needs.
• Seamless integration with other Samsung devices for a holistic user experience.
• Consistent quality and reliability associated with the Samsung brand.
PART 1 COMMUNICATIONS OBJECTIVES:
FIRST-YEAR COMMUNICATIONS
OBJECTIVES
Broad Measurable Communications Objectives
• Increase Brand Awareness
• Enhance Product Knowledge
• Boost Brand Preference
ISSUES IMPACTING THE OBJECTIVES
ATTAINMENT
Issues to Address Before Achieving Communications Objectives
• Inadequate budgets may limit the scope and effectiveness of marketing campaigns.
• Delays in budget approval can impede the timely launch of marketing campaigns.
• If creative materials require pre-testing, delays in obtaining results may affect campaign timelines.
• Inadequate resources, including personnel and technology, may hinder the execution of planned
marketing strategies.
• Unclear or improperly defined performance metrics can hinder the assessment of campaign success.
• Failure to comply with legal and regulatory requirements can result in setbacks and legal issues.
SWOT ANALYSIS TEMPLATE
Strengths:
• Brand Reputation
• Diverse Product Line
• Technological Innovation
Weaknesses:
• Premium Pricing
• Overdependence on Android
• Intense Competition
Opportunities:
• 5G Technology Adoption
• Increasing Environmental Awareness
• Expanding Emerging Markets
Threats:
• Intensifying Competition
• Supply Chain Disruptions
• Economic Downturn
COMPETITIVE ANALYSIS TEMPLATE
Your Company
Competitor 1
Competitor 2
Factor 1 – Pricing
Offers a diverse range of
smartphones catering to
different price points, from
budget-friendly to high-end
flagship models.
Typically positions itself as a
premium brand with a focus
on high-quality products.
Offers a range of
smartphones spanning
different price segments,
including budget-friendly
options and premium flagship
devices.
Factor Competition
Competes globally and holds a
significant market share.
Strong global presence with
a loyal customer base.
Known for offering featurerich smartphones, strong
camera capabilities, and
competitive pricing.
Factor Technology
Known for technological
innovation, offering features
like high-resolution displays,
advanced camera systems, and
5G connectivity.
Focuses on a seamless
ecosystem with devices like
iPhones, iPads, and Macs.
Recognized for advanced
camera technologies,
particularly in collaboration
with Leica.
Marco Rivas had been employed by the investment brokerage firm Big Bucks in New York for 20 years when he died on June 21, 2022. At that time, he was working under a yearly employment contract entitling him to an annual salary of $416,000. In addition, if he was still in the firm’s employ on September 30, 2022, the end of its fiscal year, he was entitled to an additional amount equal to .55% of the firm’s net profits.During the latter part of his employment Marco had required hospitalization more than 20 times and had undergone seven major operations. On many of these occasions partners of Big Bucks called Juanita Rivas, Marco’s spouse, to offer financial assistance. The couple always declined, preferring to manage on their own. Most of the Big Bucks partners attended Marco Rivas’s funeral, including two having flown in from Chicago despite a blizzard. Some of the Big Bucks partners later suggested that the Rivas’ son, Jimmy, come to work for the firm, which he did for a while.In 2022, Big Bucks was managed by an administrative committee consisting of seven of the general partners. At a meeting of this committee held shortly after Marco’s death, the committee decided to pay Juanita Rivas what her spouse would have earned under his contract if he had lived until the end of the firm’s fiscal year. These payments amounted to $160,000, of which $8,000 would be paid in 15 weekly checks and constituted what would have been Marco Rivas’s salary. The remaining $40,000 was what would have been his .55% share of the firm’s profits.While no minutes were kept of the administrative committee meeting at which the payments to Juanita Rivas were authorized, two members of the committee stated that they agreed that at the time of Marco Rivas’s death, Big Bucks had no established plan or policy with respect to payments to the survivors of valued employees; indeed, Marco Rivas was the first employee to have died. Both attested to the affection and esteem in which Marco Rivas was held. William J. Biggs, the managing partner, stated that he felt sympathy for the widow, but that this did not enter into the particular decision since “we would be sympathetic to any widow,” but that, on the other hand, he doubted whether the payment would have been made if Marco Rivas had not been survived by a wife and son. He said further that, as was fairly obvious, Marco Rivas’s past services were a factor in arriving at the decision.Juanita originally assumed the payments were taxable income, but a friend told her they sounded more like a gift. She has hired you to research this issue regarding how to handle the payments for federal tax purposes.
A mindset, in decision theory refers to a set of assumptions, methods, or notations held by one or more employees which also creates a powerful incentive within these employees to continue to adopt or accept prior behaviors, choices, or tools (Hitt, 2016).1. Identify how Boeing could have engaged stakeholders in the strategic planning process to avoid the 737 Max problems before they happened. Was this a breakdown in the strategic management processes at Boeing, or just pure greed? Explain?Source: Hitt, M. A. (2016). Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases: Competitiveness and Globalization. Retrieved from: https://phoenix.vitalsource.com/#/books/9781305217…2. In strategic planning, you analyze the effectiveness by conducting an internal assessment that focuses on how members inside the organization interpret their mission statement. The external assessment — which includes all of the business stakeholders — is valuable since it offers different perspectives. The discrepancies between these two assessments can give insight into the organization’s mission statement effectiveness (Hitt, 2016). Which is the most important? Why? ExplainSource: Hitt, M. A. (2016). Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases: Competitiveness and Globalization. Retrieved from: https://phoenix.vitalsource.com/#/books/9781305217…
Hospitality and tourism industry professionals will be invited as guest speakers throughout the semester. Students are expected to ask them questions related to their expertise. The core purpose of this assignment is to give students an opportunity to learn what they would like to know more about within the course topic and help them to gain a better understanding of the industry.The topic and names of the guest speakers will be provided in advance by the course instructor. Students should develop 2-3 questions and submit them to Assignments by the designated course schedule time. Questions may be related to the guest speaker’s industry journey, key learnings, future opportunities, advice, etc.Interview Questions should be submitted to Assignments on Canvas. Please adhere to the formatting points below and refer to the class schedule for submission deadline
BID IF YOU KNOW MORE ABOUT SPORTS MANAGEMENT- OPEN ATTACHMENT PLEASE.Fill the document.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Football Project Part 2
Name:
Team:
Conference:
I.
General
a. First Date of Practice Permitted
b. Official Travel Party Size
c. Complimentary Passes (Players / Staff)
II.
Scheduling Policies
a. Home/Away
b. First Date of Competition
c. Game Times
d. No Shows
III.
Game Services
a. Statistical Services
b. Game Film Policies / Exchange
c. Crowd Control
d. Equipment / Ball Crew
e. Hospitality
IV.
Game Protocol
a. Tiebreaker Procedure – end of regulation game
b. Appeal Procedures
c. Instant Replay
d. Pre-Game Length & Protocol
d. Halftime
e. Official Ball
f. Official Uniforms – Commercial Logo Restrictions
V.
Awards
a. Determining Conference Champions
b. Determining All Conference Selections
c. Determining Additional Conference Awards:
VI.
Health & Safety Policies
a. Drug Testing Protocol (who and when)
b. Concussion Protocol
c. Unsportsmanlike Conduct on the Field (Penalties)
Football Project Part 2
Name:
Team:
Conference:
VII.
Revenue Sharing Policies
a.
Television Revenue Sharing Plan
b.
Guarantees Revenue Sharing Plan
Home Game Budget Worksheet Information
Average Attendance: _____________
___% Students
___ % General Seating
Ticket Prices: $___ Students / $___ General Seating
Ticket Income per Game: STUDENTS $ ________
GENERAL $ __________
TOTAL $
__________
No. Suites _______ Price per Suite $_______ Total Income per Game for Suites: $ ___________
Security Fee per Game: ___________________
Medical Fee per Game: ____________
Concession Vendor:
Percentage of Concession Sales to Institution: _____
(No inventory expenses!)
Concession Sales: $______ per person average X Attendance ____ = $________ per game
Net Concessions/Game: per game $________ X ____ % to institution = $__________
Merchandise Sales: $___ per person average X 25% Attendance ____ = $________ per game
Parking Prices: Price per vehicle $_________ X 33% of Attendance _____ = $____ per game
WORKER POSITION
NUMBER
RATE/PER
PERSON
TOTAL
Away Game Budget Worksheet Information
Travel Party Size: Players ______ Staff ______ Total _______
Per Diem (Meals) $ ______ Breakfast
$ ______ Lunch
$______ Dinner
Total
Football Project Part 2
Name:
Team:
Conference:
# Persons per Hotel Room:___ Total Rooms ____
Night $______
Hotel Cost/Night: $_____ Total Hotel /
Commercial Air Travel Price Locator (Expedia / Priceline)…
Cost Per Person per Flight
Game: _____________
Price: _________
X ___
Total $ _________
Game: _____________
Price: _________
X ___
Total $ _________
Game: _____________
Price: _________
X ___
Total $ _________
Ground Transportation (Charter Bus) Mileage Fee:
Ground Transportation (Charter Bus) Driver Fee:
INDIVIDUAL TEAM WORKSHEET – SALARIES, SCHOLARSHIPS, OPERATING
EXPENSES
Scholarships (EADA)
Salaries (EADA or Website)
#
Price Per Unit
Total
Head Coach
Assistant Coaches Salaries
Grad Assistant Tuition &
Stipend
Operations Manager
Rental Cars
Benefits
Total
Non-Game Day Operating Expenses
Operating Expense Categories
Recruiting Expenses (EADA)
Insurance
Pre-Season Meals
Pre-Season Housing
Helmets
Pads
#
Price Per Unit
Total
Football Project Part 2
Name:
Team:
Conference:
Away Uniforms
Home Uniforms
Game Shoes
Practice Shoes
Cross Trainers
Sweats
Practice Apparel
Work Out Apparel
Travel Apparel
Refurbishing
Miscellaneous Apparel
Footballs
Game Balls
Tees
Blocking Equipment
New Weights
Miscellaneous Equipment
Printing
TOTAL
Read article and answer questions https://socio.events/blog/latest-event-technology-trendsQuestionsWhich of the eight trends listed do you vonsider the most impoprtant and WHY?What are the challenges to implement those event technolgies? And is there any specific event types that have more challenges and WHY? JUST BE SIMPLE AND USE INFORMATION FROM THE LINK DO NOT USE ANY DIFFERENT SOURCES
In your own words, explain the efficient market hypothesis. Do you agree that the market is efficient? Why or why not?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Schroeder, R.G., M.W. Clark, and J.M. Cathey. 2020. Financial Accounting Theory and Analysis. Text and Cases.
13th ed. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
An Empirical Evaluation of Accounting Income Numbers
Author(s): Ray Ball and Philip Brown
Source: Journal of Accounting Research , Autumn, 1968, Vol. 6, No. 2 (Autumn, 1968),
pp. 159-178
Published by: Wiley on behalf of Accounting Research Center, Booth School of
Business, University of Chicago
Stable URL: http://www.jstor.com/stable/2490232
JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide
range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and
facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact support@jstor.org.
Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at
and Wiley are collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Journal of
Accounting Research
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
An Empirical Evaluation of Accounting
Income Numbers
RAY BALL* and PHILIP BROWNt
Accounting theorists have generally evaluated the usefulness of accounting practices by the extent of their agreement with a particular analytic
model. The model may consist of only a few assertions or it may be a
rigorously developed argument. In each case, the method of evaluation has
been to compare existing practices with the more preferable practices implied by the model or with some standard which the model implies all
practices should possess. The shortcoming of this method is that it ignores
a significant source of knowledge of the world, namely, the extent to which
the predictions of the model conform to observed behavior.
It is not enough to defend an analytical inquiry on the basis that its
assumptions are empirically supportable, for how is one to know that a
theory embraces all of the relevant supportable assumptions? And how does
one explain the predictive powers of propositions which are based on unverifiable assumptions such as the maximization of utility functions?
Further, how is one to resolve differences between propositions which arise
from considering different aspects of the world?
The limitations of a completely analytical approach to usefulness are illustrated by the argument that income numbers cannot be defined sub-
stantively, that they lack “meaning” and are therefore of doubtful utility.’
The argument stems in part from the patchwork development of account* University of Chicago. t University of Western Australia. The authors are
indebted to the participants in the Workshop in Accounting Research at the University of Chicago, Professor Myron Scholes, and Messrs. Owen Hewett and Ian Watts.
1 Versions of this particular argument appear in Canning (1929); Gilman (1939);
Paton and Littleton (1940); Vatter (1947), Ch. 2; Edwards and Bell (1961), Ch. 1;
Chambers (1964), pp. 267-68; Chambers (1966), pp. 4 and 102; Lim (1966), esp. pp. 645
and 649; Chambers (1967), pp. 745-55; Ijiri (1967), Ch. 6, esp. pp. 120-31; and Sterling
(1967), p. 65.
159
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
160 JOURNAL OF ACCOUNTING RESEARCH, AUTUMN, 1968
ing practices to meet new situations as they arise. Accountants have had to
deal with consolidations, leases, mergers, research and development, pricelevel changes, and taxation charges, to name just a few problem areas.
Because accounting lacks an all-embracing theoretical framework, dissimilarities in practices have evolved. As a consequence, net income is an aggregate of components which are not homogeneous. It is thus alleged to be
a “meaningless” figure, not unlike the difference between twenty-seven
tables and eight chairs. Under this view, net income can be defined only as
the result of the application of a set of procedures { X1, X2, … } to a set of
events { Y1, Y2, -.. } with no other definitive substantive meaning at all.
Canning observes:
What is set out as a measure of net income can never be supposed to be a fact in
any sense at all except that it is the figure that results when the accountant has
finished applying the procedures which he adopts.2
The value of analytical attempts to develop measurements capable of
definitive interpretation is not at issue. What is at issue is the fact that an
analytical model does not itself assess the significance of departures from its
implied measurements. Hence it is dangerous to conclude, in the absence
of further empirical testing, tha~t a lack of substantive meaning implies a
lack of utility.
An empirical evaluation of accounting income numbers requires agreement as to what real-world outcome constitutes an appropriate test of usefulness. Because net income is a number of particular interest to investors,
the outcome we use as a predictive criterion is the investment decision as it
is reflected in security prices.3 Both the content and the timing of existing
annual net income numbers will be evaluated since usefulness could be impaired by deficiencies in either.
An Empirical Test
Recent developments in capital theory provide justification for selec
the behavior of security prices as an operational test of usefulness. An impressive body of theory supports the proposition that capital markets are
both efficient and unbiased in that if information is useful in forming capital
asset prices, then the market will adjust asset prices to that information
quickly and without leaving any opportunity for further abnormal gain.4
If, as the evidence indicates, security prices do in fact adjust rapidly to new
information as it becomes available, then changes in security prices will re2 Canning (1929), p. 98.
8 Another approach pursued by Beaver (1968) is to use the investment decision,
as it is reflected in transactions volume, for a predictive criterion.
4 For example, Samuelson (1965) demonstrated that a market without bias in its
evaluation of information will give rise to randomly fluctuating time series of prices.
See also Cootner (ed.) (1964); Fama (1965); Fama and Blume (1966); Fama, et al.
(1967); and Jensen (1968).
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
EMPIRICAL EVALUATION OF ACCOUNTING INCOME NUMBERS 161
fleet the flow of information to the market.’ An observed revision of stock
prices associated with the release of the income report would thus provide
evidence that the information reflected in income numbers is useful.
Our method of relating accounting income to stock prices builds on this
theory and evidence by focusing on the information which is unique to a
particular firm.6 Specifically, we construct two alternative models of what
the market expects income to be and then investigate the market’s reactions when its expectations prove false.
EXPECTED AND UNEXPECTED INCOME CHANGES
Historically, the incomes of firms have tended to move together. One
study found that about half of the variability in the level of an average
firm’s earnings per share (EPS) could be associated with economy-wide
effects.7 In light of this evidence, at least part of the change in a firm’s in-
come from one year to the next is to be expected. If, in prior years, the income of a firm has been related to the incomes of other firms in a particular
way, then knowledge of that past relation, together with a knowledge of the
incomes of those other firms for the present year, yields a conditional ex-
pectation for the present income of the firm. Thus, apart from confirmation
effects, the amount of new information conveyed by the present income
number can be approximated by the difference between the actual change
in income and its conditional expectation.
But not all of this difference is necessarily new information. Some changes
in income result from financing and other policy decisions made by the firm.
We assume that, to a first approximation, such changes are reflected in the
average change in income through time.
Since the impacts of these two components of change-economy-wide
and policy effects-are felt simultaneously, the relationship must be estimated jointly. The statistical specification we adopt is first to estimate, by
Ordinary Least Squares (OLS), the coefficients (aijt, a2pt) from the linear
regression of the change in firm j’s income (AIlj,t) on the change in the
average income of all firms (other than firm j) in the market (AMj,tT)8
using data up to the end of the previous year (r = 1, 2, … , t – 1):
ljt- = dljt + 42itAMj,t-r + U3,t-T r = 1, 2, … , t – 1, (1)
5 One well documented characteristic of the security market is that useful sources
of information are acted upon and useless sources are ignored. This is hardly surprising since the market consists of a large number of competing actors who can gain from
acting upon better interpretations of the future than those of their rivals. See, for
example, Scholes (1967); and footnote 4 above. This evaluation of the security market
differs sharply from that of Chambers (1966, pp. 272-73).
6 More precisely, we focus on information not common to all firms, since some industry effects are not considered in this paper.
7Alternatively, 35 to 40 per cent could be associated with effects common to all
firms when income was defined as tax-adjusted Return on Capital Employed. [Source:
Ball and Brown (1967), Table 4.]
8 We call M a “market index” of income because it is constructed only from firms
traded on the New York Stock Exchange.
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
162 RAY BALL AND PHILIP BROWN
where the hats denote estimates. The expected income change for firm j in
year t is then given by the regression prediction using the change in the,
average income for the market in year t:
AIit = dlit + 42jtAMjt
The unexpected income change, or forecast error (pjt), is the actual income
change minus expected:
Uit =Ijt – At . (2)
It is this forecast error which we assume to be the new information conveyed by the present income number.
THE MARKET’S REACTION
It has also been demonstrated that stock prices, and therefore rates of
return from holding stocks, tend to move together. In one study,’ it was
estimated that about 30 to 40 per cent of the variability in a stock’s monthly
rate of return over the period March, 1944 through December, 1960 could
be associated with market-wide effects. Market-wide variations in stock
returns are triggered by the release of information which concerns all firms.
Since we are evaluating the income report as it relates to the individual
firm, its contents and timing should be assessed relative to changes in the
rate of return on the firm’s stocks net of market-wide effects.
The impact of market-wide information on the monthly rate of return
from investing one dollar in the stock of firm j may be estimated by its
predicted value from the linear regression of the monthly price relatives of
firm i’s common stock’0 on a market index of returns:”1
9 King (1966).
10 The monthly price relative of security j for month m is defined as dividends
(dim) + closing price (pjmpi), divided by opening price (pjm):
PRim = (pi,m+i + djm)/pim.
A monthly price relative is thus equal to the discrete monthly rate of return plus
unity; its natural logarithm is the monthly rate of return compounded continuously.
In this paper, we assume discrete compounding since the results are easier to interpret in that form.
11 Fama, et al. (1967) conclude that “regressions of security on market returns over
time are a satisfactory method for abstracting from the effects of general market
conditions on the monthly rates of return on individual securities.” In arriving at
their conclusion, they found that “scatter diagrams for the [returns on] individual
securities [vis-A-vis the market return] support very well the regression assumptions
of linearity, homoscedasticity, and serial independence.” Fama, et al. studied the
natural logarithmic transforms of the price relatives, as did King (1966). However,
Blume (1968) worked with equation (3). We also performed tests on the alternative
specification:
In. (PRim) = b1i + b2In6 (L.) + vim (3a)
where Ine denotes the natural logarithmic function. The results correspond closely
with those reported below.
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
EMPIRICAL EVALUATION OF ACCOUNTING INCOME NUMBERS 163
[PRim – 11 = bij + b2j[Lm – I] + VjmX (3)
where PRjm is the monthly price relative for firm j and month m, L is the
link relative of Fisher’s “Combination Investment Performance Index”
[Fisher (1966)], and vjm is the stock return residual for firm j in month m
The value of [Lm – 1] is an estimate of the market’s monthly rate of return.
The m-subscript in our sample assumes values for all months since January,
1946 for which data are available.
The residual from the OLS regression represented in equation (3) meas-
ures the extent to which the realized return differs from the expected return
conditional upon the estimated regression parameters (bj, b2J) and the
market index [Lm – 1]. Thus, since the market has been found to adjust
quickly and efficiently to new information, the residual must represent the
impact of new information, about firm j alone, on the return from holding
common stock in firm j.
SOME ECONOMETRIC ISSUES
One assumption of the OLS income regression model
are uncorrelated. Correlation between them can take at least two forms,
namely the inclusion of firm j in the market index of income (Mj), and the
presence of industry effects. The first has been eliminated by construction
(denoted by the j-subscript on M), but no adjustment has been made for
the presence of industry effects. It has been estimated that industry effects
probably account for only about 10 per cent of the variability in the level
of a firm’s income.’3 For this reason equation (1) has been adopted as the
appropriate specification in the belief that any bias in the estimates aljt and
a2jt will not be significant. However, as a check on the statistical efficiency
of the model, we also present results for an alternative, naive model which
predicts that income will be the same for this year as for last. Its forecast
error is simply the change in income since the previous year.
As is the case with the income regression model, the stock return model, as
presented, contains several obvious violations of the assumptions of the OLS
regression model. First, the market index of returns is correlated with the
residual because the market index contains the return on firm j, and because of industry effects. Neither violation is serious, because Fisher’s index
is calculated over all stocks listed on the New York Stock Exchange (hence
the return on security j is only a small part of the index), and because industry effects account for at most 10 per cent of the variability in the rate
12 That is, an assumption necessary for OLS to be the minimum-variance, linear,
unbiased estimator.
13 The magnitude assigned to industry effects depends upon how broadly an industry is defined, which in turn depends upon the particular empirical application being
considered. The estimate of 10 per cent is based on a two-digit classification scheme.
There is some evidence that industry eff ects might account for more than 10 per cent
when the association is estimated in first differences [Brealey (1968)].
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
164 RAY BALL AND PHILIP BROWN
of return on the average stock.’4 A second violation results from our predic-
tion that, for certain months around the report dates, the expected values
of the v/s are nonzero. Again, a~ny bias should have little effect on the results, inasmuch as there is a low, observed autocorrelation in the Vj’s,’5 and
in no case was the stock return regression fitted over less than 100 observations.16
SUMMARY
We assume that in the unlikely absence of useful information about a
particular firm over a period, its rate of return over that period would re-
flect only the presence of market-wide information which pertains to all
firms. By abstracting from market effects [equation (3)] we identify the
effect of information pertaining to individual firms. Then, to determine if
part of this effect can be associated with information contained in the firm’s.
accounting income number, we segregate the expected and unexpected
elements of income change. If the income forecast error is negative (that is,
if the actual change in income is less than its conditional expectation), we
define it as bad news and predict that if there is some association between
accounting income numbers and stock prices, then release of the income
number would result in the return on that firm’s securities being less than
14 The estimate of 10 per cent is due to King (1966). Blume (1968) has recently
questioned the magnitude of industry effects, suggesting that they could be somewhat
less than 10 per cent. His contention is based on the observation that the significance
attached to industry effects depends on the assumptions made about the parameters
of the distributions underlying stock rates of return.
15 See Table 4, below.
16 Fama, et al. (1967) faced a similar situation. The expected values of the stock
return residuals were nonzero for some of the months in their study. Stock return
regressions were calculated separately for both exclusion and inclusion of the months
for which the stock return residuals were thought to be nonzero. They report that
both sets of results support the same conclusions.
An alternative to constraining the mean v; to be zero is to employ the Sharpe Capi-
tal Asset Pricing Model [Sharpe (1964)] to estimate (3b):
PRjm-RFm- 1 = b’i + b;j [Lm-RFm- 1] + vm (3b)
where RF is the risk-free ex ante rate of return for holding period m. Results from
estimating (3b) (using U.S. Government Bills to measure RF and defining the abnor-
mal return for firm j in month m now as b’1 + v’m) are essentially the same as
results from (3).
Equation (3b) is still not entirely satisfactory, however, since the mean impact
of new information is estimated over the whole history of the stock, which covers at
least 100 months. If (3b) were fitted using monthly data, a vector of dummy variables
could be introduced to identify the fiscal year covered by the annual report, thus
permitting the mean residual to vary between fiscal years. The impact of unusual
information received in month m of year t would then be estimated by the sum of the
constant, the dummy for year t, and the calculated residual for month m and year t.
Unfortunately, the efficiency of estimating the stock return equation in this particular form has not been investigated satisfactorily, hence our report will be confined
to the results from estimating (3).
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
EMPIRICAL EVALUATION OF ACCOUNTING INCOME NUMBERS 165
TABLE 1
Deciles of the Distributions of Squared Coefficients of Correlation, Changes in Firm
and Market Income*
Decile
Variable
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
(1) Net income .03 .07 .10 .1-5 .23 .30 .35 .43 .52
(2) EP S .02 .05 .11 .16 .23 .28 .35 .42 .52
* Estimated over the 21 years, 1946-1966.
would otherwise have been expected.17 Such a result (a2 < 0) would be evidenced by negative behavioi in the stock return residuals (P < 0) around
the annual report announcement date. The converse should hold for a
positive forecast error.
Two basic income expectations models have been defined, a regression
model and a naive model. We report in detail on two measures of income
[net income and EPS, variables (1) and (2)] for the regression model, and
one measure [EPS, variable (3)] for the naive model.
Data
Three classes of data are of interest: the contents of income reports; th
dates of the report announcements; and the movements of security prices
around the announcement dates.
INCOME NUMBERS
Income numbers for 1946 through 1966 were obtained from St
and Poor's Compustat tapes.18 The distributions of the squared c
of correlation' between the changes in the incomes of the indivi
and the changes in the market's income index20 are summarized
For the present sample, about one-fourth of the variability in t
17 We later divide the total return into two parts: a "normal return," d
the return which would have been expected given the normal relationship b
stock and the market index; and an "abnormal return," the difference
actual return and the normal return. Formally, the two parts are given by: b i +
b2s [Lm - 1]; and vim.
18 Tapes used are dated 9/28/1965 and 7/07/1967.
19 All correlation coefficients in this paper are product-moment correlation coefficients.
20 The market net income index was computed as the sample mean for each year.
The market EPS index was computed as a weighted average over the sample members,
the number of stocks outstanding (adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends)
providing the weights. Note that when estimating the association between the income
of a particular firm and the market, the income of that firm was excluded from the
market index.
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
166 RAY BALL AND PHILIP BROWN
TABLE 2
Deciles of the Distributions of the Coefficients of First-Order Autocorrelation in the
Income Regression Residuals*
Decile
Variable
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
(1) Net income... -.35 -.28 -.20 -.12 -.05 .02 .12 .20 .33
(2)EPS.......... -.39 -.29 -.21 -.15 -.08 -.03 .07 .17 .35
* Estimated over the 21 years, 1946-1966.
in the median firm's income can be associated with changes in the market
index.
The association between the levels of the earnings of firms was examined
in the forerunner article [Ball and Brown (1967)]. At that time, we referred
to the existence of autocorrelation in the disturbances when the levels of
net income and EPS were regressed on the appropriate indexes. In this
paper, the specification has been changed from levels to first differences
because our method of analyzing the stock market's reaction to income
numbers presupposes the income forecast errors to be unpredictable at a
minimum of 12 months prior to the announcement dates. This supposition
is inappropriate when the errors are autocorrelated.
We tested the extent of autocorrelation in the residuals from the income
regression model after the variables had been changed from levels to first
differences. The results are presented in Table 2. They indicate that the
supposition is not now unwarranted.
ANNUAL REPORT ANNOUNCEMENT DATES
The Wall Street Journal publishes three kinds of annual report a
ments: forecasts of the year's income, as made, for example, by co
executives shortly after the year end; preliminary reports; and the com-
plete annual report. While forecasts are often imprecise, the preliminary
report is typically a condensed preview of the annual report. Because the
preliminary report usually contains the same numbers for net income and
EPS as are given later with the final report, the announcement date (or,
effectively, the date on which the annual income number became generally
available) was assumed to be the date on which the preliminary report
appeared in the Wall Street Journal. Table 3 reveals that the time lag
between the end of the fiscal year and the release of the annual report has
been declining steadily throughout the sample period.
STOCK PRICES
Stock price relatives were obtained from the tapes const
Center for Research in Security Prices (CRSP) at the Univer
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
EMPIRICAL EVALUATION OF ACCOUNTING INCOME NUMBERS 167
TABLE 3
Time Distribution of Announcement Dates
Fiscal year
Per cent of
firm s- _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _
1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965
25 2/07a 2/04 2/04 2/03 2/02 2/05 2/03 2/01 1/31
50 2/25 2/20 2/18 2/17 2/15 2/15 2/13 2/09 2/08
75 3/10 3/06 3/04 3/03 3/05 3/04 2/28 2/25 2/21
a Indicates that 25 per cent of the income reports for the fiscal year ended 12/31/
1957 had been announced by 2/07/1958.
TABLE 4
Deciles of the Distributions of the Squared Coefficient of
Return Regression, and of the Coefficient of First-Order
Autocorrelation in the Stock Return Residuals*
Decile
Coefficient
name
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Return re-
gression r2... .18 .22 .25 .28 .31 .34 .37 .40 .46
Residual autocorrelation.. -.17 -.14 -.11 -.10 -.08 -.05 -.03 -.01 .03
* Estimated over the 246 months, January, 1946 thr
cago.2' The data used are monthly closing prices on the New York Stock
Exchange, adjusted for dividends and capital changes, for the period January, 1946 through June, 1966. Table 4 presents the deciles of the distributions of the squared coefficient of correlation for the stock return regression
[equation (3)], and of the coefficient of first-order autocorrelation in the
stock residuals.
INCLUSION CRITERIA
Firms included in the study met the following criteria:
1. earnings data available on the Compustat tapes for each of the years
1946-1966;
2. fiscal year ending December 31;
3. price data available on the CRSP tapes for at least 100 months; and
4. Wall Street Journal announcement dates available.22
Our analysis was limited to the nine fiscal years 1957-1965. By beginning
the analysis with 1957, we were assured of at least 10 observations when
21 The Center for Research in Security Prices at the University of Chicago is sponsored by Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner and Smith Incorporated.
22 Announcement dates were taken initially from the Wall Street Journal Index,
then verified against the Wall Street Journal.
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
168 RAY BALL AND PHILIP BROWN
estimating the income regression equations. The upper limit (the fiscal
year 1965, the results of which are announced in 1966) is imposed because
the CRSP file terminated in June, 1966.
Our selection criteria may reduce the generality of the results. The sub-
population does not include young firms, those which have failed, those
which do not report on December 31, and those which are not represented
on Compustat, the CRSP tapes, and the Wall Street Journal. As a result,
it may not be representative of all firms. However, note that (1) the 261
remaining firms23 are significant in their own right, and (2) a replication of
our study on a different sample produced results which conform closely
to those reported below.24
Results
Define month 0 as the month of the annual report announcement, and
APIM , the Abnormal Performance Index at month M, as:
1N M
APIM = -Z II (1 + Vnm).
Nn m=-11
Then API traces out the value of one dollar invested (in equal amounts) in
all securities n (n = 1, 2, * *, N) at the end of month -12 (that is, 12
months prior to the month of the annual report) and held to the end of
some arbitrary holding period (M = -11, -10, * * * , T) after abstracting
from market affects. An equivalent interpretation is as follows. Suppose
two individuals A and B agree on the following proposition. B is to construct a portfolio consisting of one dollar invested in equal amounts in N
securities. The securities are to be purchased at the end of month -12
and held until the end of month T. For some price, B contracts with A to
take (or make up), at the end of each month M, only the normal gains (or
losses) and to return to A, at the end of month T, one dollar plus or minus
any abnormal gains or losses. Then APIM is the value of A's equity in the
mutual portfolio at the end of each month M.25
Numerical results are presented in two forms. Figure 1 plots APIm
first for three portfolios constructed from all firms and years in which the
income forecast errors, according to each of the three variables, were positive
(the top half); second, for three portfolios of firms and years in which the
income forecast errors were negative (the bottom half); and third, for a
single portfolio consisting of all firms and years in the sample (the line
which wanders just below the line dividing the two halves). Table 5 includes the numbers on which Figure 1 is based.
23 Due to known errors in the data, not all firms could be included in all years. The
fiscal year most affected was 1964, when three firms were excluded.
24 The replication investigated 75 firms with fiscal years ending on dates other
than December 31, using the naive income-forecasting model, over the longer period
1947-65.
25 That is, the value expected at the end of month T in the absence of further abnormal gains and losses.
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
EMPIRICAL EVALUATION OF ACCOUNTING INCOME NUMBERS 169
1.12
1.10
Variable 2
1.08
1.08 'tVariable I
1.06
1.04
-S1.02
E 1.00
0
i
?j< _ To~ai sampie r . . .". . . . . . . . . . .". . . . .Total a
a 0.98
0.9
s Variable 1
0.92
0.90 Variable
Variable. 2
0.88
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
Month Relative to Annual Report Announcement Date
FIG. 1 Abnormal Performance Indexes for Various Portfolios
Since the first set of results may be sensitive to the distributions of th
stock return disturbances,26 a second set of results is presented. The third
column under each variable heading in Table 5 gives the chi-square statistic
for a two-by-two classification of firms by the sign of the income forecast
error, and the sign of the stock return residual for that month.
OVERVIEW
As one would expect from a large sample, both sets of results convey
essentially the same picture. They demonstrate that the information contained in the annual income number is useful in that if actual income differs
26 The empirical distributions of the stock return residuals appear to be described
well by symmetric, stable distributions that are characterized by tails longer than
those of the normal distribution [Fama (1965); Fama, et al. (1967)].
This content downloaded from
173.89.208.153 on Tue, 23 Jun 2020 21:06:08 UTC
All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms
170 RAY BALL AND PHILIP BROWN
TABLE 5
Summary Statistics by Month Relative to Annual Report Announcement Date
Month rela- Regression model Naive model
tive
to
annuali
Total
report an- Net income EPS EPS sample
nouncement
date
d()a (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
-11 1.006 .992 16.5 1.007 .992 20.4 1.006 .989 24.1 1.000
-10 1.014 .983 17.3 1.015 .982 20.2 1.015 .972 73.4 .999
-9 1.017 .977 7.9 1.017 .977 3.7 1.018 .965 20.4 .998
-8 1.021 .971 9.5 1.022 .971 12.0 1.022 .956 9.1 .998
-7 1.026 .960 21.8 1.027 .960 27.1 1.024 .946 9.0 .995
-6 1.033 .949 42.9 1.034 .948 37.6 1.027 .937 19.4 .993
-5 1.038 .941 17.9 1.039 .941 21.3 1.032 .925 21.0 .992
-4 1.050 .930 40.0 1.050 .930 39.5 1.041 .912 41.5 .993
-3 1.059 .924 35.3 1.060 .922 33.9 1.049 .903 37.2 .995
-2 1.057 .921 1.4 1.058 .919 1.8 1.045 .903 0.1 .992
-1 1.060 .914 8.2 1.062 .912 8.2 1.046 .896 5.7 .991
0 1.071 .907 28.0 1.073 .905 28.9 1.056 .887 35.8 .993
1 1.075 .901 6.4 1.076 .899 5.5 1.057 .882 9.4 .992
2 1.076 .899 2.7 1.078 .897 1.9 1.059 .878 8.1 .992
3 1.078 .896 0.6 1.079 .895 1.2 1.059 .876 0.1 .991
4 1.078 .893 0.1 1.079 .892 0.1 1.057 .876 1.2 .990
5 1.075 .893 0.7 1.077 .891 0.1 1.055 .876 0.6 .989
6 1.072 .892 0.0 1.074 .889 0.2 1.051 .877 0.1 .987
a Column headings:
(1) Abnormal Performance Index-firms and years in which the income forecast
error was positive.
(2) Abnormal Performance Index-firms and years in which the income forecast
error was negative.
(3) Chi-square statistic for two-by-two classification by sign of income forecast
error (for the fiscal year) and sign of stock return residual (for the indicated month).
Note: Probability (chi-square > 3.84 2= 0) = .05, for 1 degree of freedom.
Probability (chi-square > 6.64 x2 = 0) = .01, for 1 degree of freedom.
from expected income, the market typically has reacted in the same direction. This contention is supported both by Figure 1 which reveals a marked,
positive association between the sign of the error in forecasting income and
the Abnormal Performance
Craft a message to a client that relays bad news. Decide what the bad news should be and then write the message using formal communication. Next, rewrite the message using informal communication. Which message is better suited to relaying bad news? Why?Although no minimum word count is specified for this assignment, you should approach it as you would any essay or paper. Your answers should have great depth and detail to show that you understand and can apply the content from the unit.
1-please use your own words don’t copy and paste (no plagiarism), Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable 2- Please use keyboard (don’t use handwriting) 3-All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) No pictures containing text will be accepted 4- I want answer with APA reference, References at least 7 5- The Answer should be with total of 1500 words Read carefully case study No. 24 from your textbook (Best Buy Co. Inc: Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?) and answer the following questions: Identify opportunities and threats as well as strengths and weaknesses of the company (draw a SWOT matrix). What is the competitive strategy used by Best Buy? Justify your answer. What are the main functional strategies used by this company? Are they successful? Justify What are the different difficulties faced by the company to maintain and reinforce its competitive advantage?Suggest some recommendations or solutions to Best Buy to improve its competitive advantage.
– provide me with a script after you finish, so I can use it in my presentation.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MKT434 Global Marketing Management
Fall 2023
Group Project Guidelines
In groups of not more than 3 students, you and your team are to develop a Market Entry Plan
for the introduction of a new UAE-product e.g., skincare, local perfume, dates, camel milk,
Emirati restaurant etc. to a foreign country of your group choice. You can choose any
brand existing or hypothetical, but make sure the product is not yet globalized.
What do you need to do:
1. Describe the product chosen and present your reasons of choosing it. This is an
introduction of your assignment, (500 words) 10%
2. Analyze marketing environments of the chosen country by the following: 30%
2.1 Economic environment (1 page)
2.2 Political risk and legal environment (1 page)
2.3 Cultural environment (1 page)
3. Present a market entry plan (1.5 page): 30%
–
Describe how would your chosen product fit the country economic and cultural
environments.
–
Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning: Describe segment(s) you will target and
how you will position your brand.
–
Based on the results in the preceding sections, specify whether the exporting
(indirect or direct), licensing, strategic alliance, or joint venture market entry
strategy will be used and provide concrete details of how the strategy will work in
practice. Justify your choice of market entry strategy.
–
Identify main competitors and analyze the competitive situation (e.g., market
dominance and rivalry). Identify the main competitive advantages of your brand
over its competitors.
4. Explain if your proposed product resulted as a good idea for the chosen market. In both
cases (yes/no) present facts (not opinions) to defend your selection. Not necessarily it
will result as a perfect product for the selected country. This is why we do an analyzes
before starting a business in another country. 20%
1
MKT434 Global Marketing Management
Fall 2023
Your work should be guided by the suggested outline, and it is important that you make use
of the material discussed in class with sources presented in the class when you analyze the
three environments (ex. Country rankings, scores of specific environments, …) and presenting
the market entry strategy. You can use any other relevant material you find online to enrich
your report.
–
Use 12-point font and 1.5 line spacing.
–
All sources need to be included in-text and referred at the end in References list.
–
If you use charts, tables or similar, they need to be your creation, not a copy-paste
from a web page or other sources. Still, you need to cite the source.
10%
Your report should be uploaded as PDF document to Blackboard no later than November 9,
2023. One student submit as it is a group work.
2
The purpose of this assignment is to analyze how businesses interact with their internal and external environments. Students will also apply their knowledge of decision-making models, technology and innovation challenges, management theories, and goal setting.Write a paper (1,600-1,800 words) in which you address the following based on the information provided in the “West Chester Private School Case Study” resource.Review how organizations interact with their external environment (as open systems). Evaluate the effectiveness West Chester Private School (WCPS) as an open system at the time of the closure. Review the readings provided for this topic on the internal environment of organizations. Evaluate the organizational culture at the time the decision to close two campuses was made.Evaluate the decision made by Dr. Murphy and Educations Management Services (EMS) in terms of the process of going about the closure. Explain how the behavioral decision-making model was applied in the WCPS’s decision to shut down its campuses.Analyze one major technology and innovation challenge that WCPS faced and propose a solution that would make WCPS more competitive in meeting the needs of the three primary stakeholders affected.Provide an explanation, using appropriate management theories, for how the administration could have handled the closure effectively with stakeholders. Include one theory from each of the following: the classical approach, the human relations approach, and the modern management approach.Provide a suggestion of two goals: one long-term and one short-term goal for the future direction of WCPS. Include a justified rationale of the suggestions.Concluding statement: Integrate the four functions of management as a means to revamp management at WCPS and meet the recommended goals.You are required to use at least two external scholarly sources in addition to the textbook and the case study resource.
# You should not copy from any website# References must be written# The assignment must be delivered on time# The agreed number of words must be adhered to# Give examples and write a perfect answer
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Macroeconomics (ECON 201)
Release Date is 01/10/2023
Course Name: Macroeconomics
Student’s Name:
Course Code: ECON201
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-Ist
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 / 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
The due date for Assignment 1 is 28/10/2023.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the
cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment 1 Questions: Week 4, 5 & 6
Q1: Illustrate an example of your choice and discuss consumer surplus, producer surplus, Total
surplus, and deadweight loss with the help of the graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q2: Calculate the consumer surplus, producer surplus, and total surplus in a market of airplane
tickets if the Equilibrium price per ticket is SAR 160, the equilibrium Quantity is 80 tickets, the
upper intercept of the demand curve on the y-axis is SAR 400 and lower intercept of the supply
curve on the y-axis is zero. What will be the dead weight loss if the government imposes a tax of
SAR 80 per ticket and the buyer and sellers share the tax of 50 percent each?
[2.5 Marks]
Q3: What do you mean by import tariff and import quota? Take an example and discuss the
difference between tariffs and quotas with the help of graphs.
[2.5 Marks]
Q4: Provide the equation to calculate the GDP of a nation. Explain all four factors that contribute
to the GDP calculation in detail.
[2.5 Marks]
YOU ARE WRITING THE PAPER ABOUT THE “HOLIDAY TREE SERVICES” BUT MUST USE “AGUILAR AND RICHMOND CASE / KIDS WORLD AND LABS CASE” AS REFERENCES
Memo (normally 1/2 page – Not part of 10 pages) based off Holiday Tree Services case
Executive Summary (no more than a page – page break after and written last) based off entire 8 page analysis portion and Holiday Tree Services case
Introductions/facts (1/2 page – Bullets ok) based off Holiday Tree Services case
Analysis (with sub-headings depending on each case, i.e. Statistical analysis, Legal analysis, (8 pages)
Recommendation/Conclusion (1/2 Page) based off based off entire 8 page analysis portion and Holiday Tree Services case
Appendix (includes figures/tables that can’t fit in 1⁄2 page – must be tittled and referenced in the body of the analysis)
References (MLA)
Follow these guidelines when writing the paper:
– be sure to not answer the questions separately as individual answers but rather include them in the analysis portion of the paper ( ex. question one and three are part of the legal analysis, question 2 is part of the statistical analysis, question 4 can be its own page referencing the rest of the paper)
– have referencing only from the three cases ( no outside sources)
– be sure to reference the cases in the analysis (all 3 cases)
– the executive summary should include numbers and statistics from the holiday case
– in the legal analysis make sure to write about contract law and contract breach (can look at text for reference)
– no repetition of information ( keep it as simple as possible)
– refer to the coaching slides for more explanation and if there is any confusion on how the information needs to be written
– have all the math graphs (labeled as ex. table 1 or figure 1) and refer to them in the text
– absolutely no usage of AI it is checked
– all sub sections must be in bullet points
– 12 point times new roman double spaced
–
Unformatted Attachment Preview
HOLIDAY TREE SERVICES, INC.
Memo
To:
Kevin Kareem, Manager of Risk Management Department
From:
Jennifer Baron, Supervisor, Sales Department
Date:
February 20, 2020
Re:
Delish Burger
__________________________________________________________________________________
As you may remember, Holiday Tree Services, Inc. (HTS) has recently entered into a contract with Delish
Burger (Delish), whereby HTS is to supply and decorate a Christmas tree in each of Delish Burger’s one
hundred and thirty-seven fast food restaurants in Gould each year in December. The first year of the
contract was 2019.
You undoubtedly remember the December 6, 2019’s disaster. On that day one of the Christmas trees that
we had delivered and decorated in early December to one of Delish Burger’s restaurants in Lakeview,
Gould caught on fire. The fire then severely damaged the restaurant’s premises, including the kitchen and
dining areas. Earlier today, I received an angry call from Duran Austin, the president of Delish, updating
me on the recent calculations of losses from the disaster.
Our records indicate that the Christmas tree was delivered to Delish Burger’s Lakeview site on time and in
good order on the morning of Friday, December 6th, 2019. As the manager on site requested our delivery
crew, they placed the tree inside the restaurant in an area next to the ordering counter. The crew then
spent the next two hours, as they routinely do, decorating the tree to the satisfaction of the on-site
manager, Leon Grant. Mr. Grant then initialed the receipt provided to him by our delivery crew,
acknowledging receipt and full satisfaction with the decorated tree. Mr. Grant then fully paid for the tree
and the services with a company check.
The fire broke out inside the Lakeview restaurant just as the last employee was leaving at approximately
11:37 p.m. on December 2nd. Fortunately, there were no customers in the restaurant at that time as the
store generally closes at 11:00 p.m. on weekdays. Mr. Austin indicated to me during the phone
conversation that a report he received yesterday from the local fire department tentatively concluded that
the fire originated from the Christmas tree. He went on to say that the report indicates that the lights on
the tree required too much power for the one outlet they were plugged into, causing an electrical short.
The spark from this instantly ignited the tree. The employee, who had been about to unplug the tree and
turn off the lights in the restaurant, was so shocked that he instantly ran out of the restaurant. He then
searched for a phone to call the fire department (in his haste he had left his cell phone inside). It took a
few minutes to find a phone, giving the fire a chance to spread.
Mr. Austin also said that as a result of the fire, the restaurant has been completely shut down for the past
three months and that he does not expect the restaurant to be open for at least another three months
pending complete renovation of the damaged areas.
Mr. Austin then demanded compensation for the losses that Delish’s restaurant sustained as a result of
the fire. He faxed me a copy of the construction bid Delish’s restaurant accepted to reconstruct the
premises, which came out to $575,000. In addition to the reconstruction costs, he also demands
compensation for the potential profits the restaurant could have generated during the downtime. I am
attaching the documents I asked him to fax me, which include some of Delish Burger’s financial data
regarding revenues and expenses during 2018 and 2019.
I told Mr. Austin that I sympathize with the lost profits sustained by Lakeview Delish Burger, but that
according to our agreement, Delish Burger agreed to waive all claims against us for any consequential
damages. After he quickly looked at the Purchase Order Acknowledgment, he said that while there was
such a clause in the document, it was not part of the contract since Delish Burger never agreed to it or
signed it. I replied that I would look it over and get back to him soon.
Required
In addition to the financial data provided by Mr. Austin below, please read parts of the Gould Commercial
Code and the cases attached in the legal library. Before Ms. Henry replies to Mr. Austin, write an
objective report to her (refer to the report guidelines on the Gateway website). (Assume that the
applicable precedent is from the fictional jurisdiction of the state of Gould).
In preparing your report you may wish to review business law concepts 1, 2 and 10 and statistics
concepts 1, 2, 3 and 9.
PURCHASE ORDER
Number: 756
Hill City, Gould 83400
(787) 788-2122
Date: September 20, 2019
_______________________________________________________________________
SELLER: Holiday Tree Services, Inc.
65324 3rd Avenue
Lakeview, Gould 75356
SHIP TO: See Instructions below
_______________________________________________________________________
Per our discussion from earlier today, Delish Burger orders one hundred thirty seven (137)
Christmas Trees – Evergreen style.
The trees are to be delivered before December 12, 2019, to each of Delish Burger’s 137
restaurants (attached please find a list). HTS delivery crew shall decorate each tree on the
site per sample shown by your sales representative, Ms. Miller.
Price: $150 per tree, all-inclusive, per quote from Madeline Oakley. Payable net upon
delivery and decoration.
General Conditions
Seller warrants all goods are of merchantable quality and fit for the intended purpose. Seller warrants that all goods are free and clear of
all liens and claims by third party and that Seller possesses all rights to sell said goods free and clear.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Authorized Signature:
___________________
Nicolas Cooper
PURCHASE ORDER ACKNOWLEDGMENT
65324 3rd Avenue
Lakeview, Gould 75356
(789) 123-4567
September 25, 2019
Buyer: Delish Burger, Inc.
36 View Boulevard
Lakeview, Gould 60615
(878) 625-4141
Ship To: Per instructions
Contact: Nicolas Cooper
We have received your purchase order number 976 dated September 20,
2019.
-137 Christmas trees-Evergreen style;
-Decorations to be added upon delivery;
-unit price $250
-We will ship the first unit to your store in Lakeview, Gould.
-Payable net upon delivery.
____________________
Sophia Martinez
Department of Procurement
CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL SALES:
Late charges at 10% per month for past due payments; minimum late charge $10. Shipment travel at the risk and cost of Buyer. Risk of
loss passes to Buyer at the time of identification. Seller warrants that all goods are of merchantable quality and fit for the intended
purpose. To the extent defect is identified in any tree delivered, Seller shall promptly deliver a replacement tree to Buyer. Buyer waives
any claims for consequential damages arising out of this purchase order, including, but not limited to lost profits.
4
DELISH BURGER FINANCIAL DATA FROM THE PRIOR YEAR OF OPERATION*
Week
Expenses
Revenues
Of
($)
($)
3-Dec-18
10-Dec-18
17-Dec-18
24-Dec-18
31-Dec-18
7-Jan-19
14-Jan-19
21-Jan-19
28-Jan-19
4-Feb-19
11-Feb-19
18-Feb-19
25-Feb-19
4-Mar-19
11-Mar-19
18-Mar-19
25-Mar-19
1-Apr-19
8-Apr-19
15-Apr-19
22-Apr-19
29-Apr-19
6-May-19
13-May-19
20-May-19
27-May-19
$134,009
$129,459
$123,417
$130,984
$133,557
$123,326
$125,005
$126,117
$127,135
$138,210
$119,999
$116,900
$130,710
$129,051
$128,222
$130,355
$130,008
$137,190
$120,606
$134,120
$137,532
$128,094
$126,716
$133,240
$136,884
$129,532
$159,293
$170,347
$179,157
$148,844
$156,753
$236,759
$179,378
$136,068
$153,149
$205,056
$189,391
$168,685
$169,835
$111,664
$163,792
$147,152
$165,372
$149,127
$189,108
$197,547
$89,210
$164,431
$126,100
$157,755
$178,196
$198,366
Week
Expenses
Revenues
Of
($)
($)
3-Jun-19
10-Jun-19
17-Jun-19
24-Jun-19
1-Jul-19
8-Jul-19
15-Jul-19
22-Jul-19
29-Jul-19
5-Aug-19
12-Aug-19
19-Aug-19
26-Aug-19
2-Sep-19
9-Sep-19
16-Sep-19
23-Sep-19
30-Sep-19
7-Oct-19
14-Oct-19
21-Oct-19
28-Oct-19
4-Nov-19
11-Nov-19
18-Nov-19
25-Nov-19
* All figures are after tax
5
$131,561
$129,644
$125,068
$131,141
$129,271
$124,198
$136,960
$116,866
$118,634
$136,078
$121,181
$132,969
$135,147
$127,170
$127,095
$140,442
$131,863
$125,512
$121,284
$130,295
$127,239
$133,881
$130,129
$132,919
$133,059
$137,554
$199,122
$177,117
$131,316
$202,976
$163,237
$201,371
$166,971
$151,769
$219,231
$193,318
$184,193
$184,443
$138,956
$220,126
$164,771
$201,146
$211,349
$180,259
$206,296
$175,715
$145,912
$154,575
$184,311
$209,435
$182,294
$173,040
HOLIDAY TREE SERVICES, INC. LIBRARY
Library of Legal Information
1.
AGUILAR MANUFACTURING, INC., Plaintiff and Appellant, v. RICHFIELD, INC., Defendant and
Respondent
2.
KIDS’ WORLD INC., Plaintiff and appellant v. LABS ETC. INC., Defendant and respondent.
3.
GOULD Commercial Code
6
AGUILAR MANUFACTURING, INC.,
Plaintiff and Appellant, v. RICHFIELD, INC.,
Defendant and Respondent
damages, for damages for loss of good will and
reputation according to proof, for attorney’s fees
in the action, plus costs and other proper relief.
Civ. No. 87546
In defendant’s answer to the complaint, it
pleaded 16 affirmative defenses, one of which
alleged “. . . that plaintiff failed to commence the
within action within the one-year limitation period
expressly agreed to by the parties in writing.”
Court of Appeal of Gould, Third
Appellate District, Division Three
April 24, 1998 filed
After the case was at issue, the parties
stipulated in writing “that the question of
whether, as a matter of law, plaintiff’s claims are
barred by the applicable statute of limitations on
contractual limitations period may, and should,
be determined in advance of impaneling a jury to
determine the remaining factual issues in
respect of the trial set for January 30, 1984. The
reason for this stipulated order of proceeding is
that if, as defendant contends but plaintiff
disputes, the action is time-barred as a matter of
law, defendant would be entitled to judgment
without the need for further proceedings.”
PRIOR HISTORY:
Superior Court of San Dimes County, No. SD
9563466, Elizabeth Westbrook, Judge.
DISPOSITION: The judgment is affirmed.
COUNSEL: Warren & Warren for Plaintiff and
Appellant.
Gibson & Anderson for Defendant and
Respondent.
OPINION BY: KAUFMAN
With reference to the agreed upon issue of fact,
the pretrial conference order included recitations
that:
OPINION: This appeal presents for the first time
in this state an occasion to interpret section
2207 of the Commercial Code (infra) as it
operates to permit an offeree seller to accept an
offer to purchase on terms not contained in the
offer, which are yet binding on the offeror buyer,
provided such terms do not represent a “material
alteration” of the contract. Here the offeree
seller’s invoices contained a printed limitation of
one year within which the buyer could
commence an action “under this contract” after
such action had accrued. On the facts before it,
the trial court ruled that a suit brought by the
buyer twenty-one months after all of its causes
of action had accrued, including those for breach
of warranty fraud and negligent
misrepresentation, was barred by this one-year
limitation provision which had become a term of
the contract in the manner noted. In our view,
the trial court properly ruled on the issues before
it, and the judgment of dismissal will be affirmed.
“3. The procedure for all sales of emulsions
purchased by plaintiff from [defendant], including
all sales of Polyco 2151, was as follows: A
representative of plaintiff would telephone
[defendant’s] facility and place an oral order for a
quantity of emulsion at [defendant’s] standard
price for delivery at plaintiff’s facilities in Colton.
On several occasions plaintiff would also
thereafter send to [defendant] a written purchase
order identifying the product to be purchased,
stating the quantity required and the place and
means of shipment, the price per pound, the
date and place of requested delivery.
“4. Plaintiff made at least seventeen purchases
of Polyco 2151 between May 1976 and July
1977, inclusive.
“5. Plaintiff’s oral and/or written offers to
purchase Polyco 2151 did not limit acceptance
to their terms.
Synopsis of the Trial Court Proceedings:
Aguilar Manufacturing, Inc., a Nebraska
corporation (plaintiff) filed its initial complaint in
the underlying action on March 30, 1979 for
breach of warranty, fraud, and negligent
misrepresentation. The suit was brought against
Richfield Inc. a Gould corporation (defendant).
The prayer asked for $ 2 million in general
“6. [Defendant’s] sales documents in respect of
the shipments of Polyco 2151 to plaintiff
contained the following limitation of action
provision, which constituted a proposal for
addition to the contract: “‘2. . . . Any action
7
by Buyer hereunder shall be commenced within
one year after receipt of said products.’
On the material alteration issue, comment 4 to
section 2-207 provides in pertinent part:
“Examples of typical clauses which would
normally ‘materially alter’ the contract and so
result in surprise or hardship if incorporated
without express awareness by the other party
are: a clause negating such standard warranties
as that of merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose in circumstances in which
either warranty normally attaches . . . [to] a
clause requiring that complaints be made in a
time materially shorter than customary or
reasonable or to a provision which require
arbitration, or otherwise contain terms limiting
remedies.” However, Comment 5 to section 2207 provides in pertinent part: “Examples of
clauses which involve no element of
unreasonable surprise and which therefore are
to be incorporated in the contract unless notice
of objection is seasonably given are: . . . a
clause fixing a reasonable time for complaints
within customary limits.”
“8. On each occasion that plaintiff ordered a
shipment of Polyco 2151, [defendant] sent to
plaintiff sales documents containing the
limitation of action provision discussed in
paragraph 6 at the same time or shortly after
each shipment of Polyco 2151. Plaintiff received
each of the foregoing sales documents in due
course.
“9. Plaintiff at no time notified [defendant] of an
objection to the one-year limitation of action
provision contained in [defendant’s] sales
documents for the sale of Polyco 2151.
Discussion
Defendant’s motion was brought and granted
on the grounds that the one-year limitation
periods in the sales documents were additional
terms which became part of the contracts,
pursuant to Gould’s Commercial Code section
2207. Section 2207 provides in relevant part:
“(1) A definite and seasonable expression of
acceptance or a written confirmation which is
sent within a reasonable time operates as an
acceptance even though it states terms
additional to or different from those offered or
agreed upon, unless acceptance is expressly
made conditional on assent to the additional or
different terms. (2) The additional terms are to
be construed as proposals for addition to the
contract. Between merchants such terms
become part of the contract unless: (a) The offer
expressly limits acceptance to the terms of the
offer; (b) They materially alter it; or (c)
Notification of objection to them has already
been given or is given within a reasonable time
after notice of them is received.”
On the issue of whether, between merchants, a
one-year limitation period is normal, customary,
or reasonable, there seem to be no Gould cases
directly on point. However, the Gould
Commercial Code section 2725, subdivision (1)
provides that the parties to a sales contract may
reduce the statutory four-year period of
limitations to one year. A district court in New
York has recently found that a one-year
limitation provision is not an unreasonable or
material alteration of a contract pursuant to
Uniform Commercial Code section 2-207.
(Aceros Industrials, S.A. de C.V. v. Florida Steel,
supra, 528 F.Supp. 1156, 1158.)
In view of all the above, particularly comment 5
under the corresponding section of the Gould
Commercial Code, we hold that the trial court
correctly determined that the limitation periods
here in question were not material alterations of
the contracts, and further in view of section
2725, subdivision (1) of the Gould Commercial
Code, that the one-year period was not
unreasonable. As a consequence, the provisions
are legally enforceable.
The trial court ruled that limiting the period
contained in the sales documents was not a
material alteration, and further that the one-year
period of such limitation was not unreasonable.
Plaintiff does not dispute the applicability of
section 2207, and concedes, as to subdivision
(2) thereof, that its own offers to purchase did
not limit acceptance to the terms of the offers,
and that it did not object to the one-year
limitation provisions. Plaintiff argues, however,
that those provisions materially altered the
contracts, and therefore did not become part of
the contracts.
Plaintiff’s attempts to distinguish Aceros, and to
analogize defendant’s one-year limitation
provisions to provisions which require
arbitration, disclaim warranties, or otherwise
contain terms “limiting remedies” ( Album
Graphics, Inc. v. Beatrice Foods Co. (1980) are
8
without merit. The one-year limitation provisions
here do not limit plaintiff’s remedy, but limit the
time within which it may pursue that remedy,
and, moreover, do so in a way which is
statutorily and judicially acceptable.
The judgment is affirmed.
9
KIDS’ WORLD INC., Plaintiff and appellant v.
LABS ETC. INC., Defendant and respondent.
had five employees, only one of whom had a
sales position.
EZ7868765
Kids’ World had started a Web site in the spring
of 1995. Howard described the Web site as a
“test” site; a way to learn about the internet and
e-commerce; to experiment with Web designs
and to “debug” the internet Web page. Howard
stated the online business originally was not
intended to be profitable. In fact, the online
business generated less than $ 500 per year
with the exception of one order for
approximately $17,000. Between 1995 and
1997, Kids’ World repeatedly revised its Web
site.
COURT OF APPEAL OF GOULD,
FOURTH APPELLATE DISTRICT, DIVISION
NINE
February 3, 2000, filed
PRIOR HISTORY: APPEAL from a judgment of
the Superior Court of San Ramon County No.
DE287345. Timothy
L. Barr, Judge.
Plaintiff presented evidence that by November
1997, when the flood occurred, the Rudzkis had
developed a sophisticated Web site. As
described by Lew, the new Web site “had one of
the first online ‘shopping carts’ on the Web (this
was the beginning of ‘e-commerce’), a state of
the art navigational system, and was a full
functioning site.” Plaintiff had incurred significant
time and expense in drafting the programming
code for and designing their “state of the art”
Web site. They had hired a Web site design
company and a development programmer. The
new Kids’ World Web site was “very similar” to
the eToys site. The new Web site was
scheduled to go online on Thanksgiving Day
1997, the start of the holiday shopping season
and the most profitable time of year in the toy
business.
DISPOSITION: Affirmed.
COUNSEL: Law Offices of James A. Davidson,
for Plaintiff and Appellant.
Maria Helfing for Defendant and Respondent
OPINION BY: MARCUS
OPINION:
I. FACTS
The material facts are undisputed. Two brothers,
Howard and Lew Rudzkis, founded Kids’ World
in 1992. Kids’ World is a retailer of toys,
educational products, and computer training
services for children. Kids’ World operates a
retail store in Beverly Rolls.
In addition, prior to the flood, plaintiffs had
signed a one-year contract with MindSpring,
described as one of the “fastest growing”
Internet service providers with “a relatively
wealthy base of subscribers.” Plaintiffs
presented evidence of an agreement between
MindSpring and Kids’ World. Under the terms of
the agreement, MindSpring’s 200,000
subscribers would have direct, one-click access
from its homepage to three toy Web sites-eToys, F.A.O. Schwartz, and Kids’ World.
According to Howard: “This was a key place to
be because Kids’ World would be highly visible
to people who entered the site. Just as location
has always been critical for a retail business, the
same holds true for the internet.” Further, Kids’
World would not have been required to
make any upfront payment to MindSpring.
Instead, Kids’ World would have paid
commissions to MindSpring “based on a
Defendant leased office space directly above the
Kids’ World store. On November 18, 1997, one
of defendant’s employees left water running in a
sink overnight, causing a flood in plaintiff’s store.
The store remained closed due to flood damage
for two weeks. When the store reopened, many
of its shelves were empty. Further, computer
classes, an important factor in the store’s
profitability, could not be resumed until January
1998. The store was not operating at its
previous level until April 1998. Defendant,
through its insurer, paid plaintiffs $200,000 for
damage to the retail store.
Defendant presented evidence that Kids’ World
had no line of credit available to it during 1997
and 1998. Kids’ World had never attracted any
investors. At the time of the flood, Kids’ World
10
percentage of sales made from the MindSpring
placement.”
World] as a result of the flooding incident . . . .” It
is apparent the analysis was prepared for
settlement purposes. Dr. Hanson opined in
pertinent part: “At the present time, eToys is far
and away the industry leader. This is due to its
early positioning that would have been identical
to Kids’ World. . . . eToys recently filed for an
Initial Public Offering (IPO) expected to draw $
115 million. This implies that the market predicts
long-term annual profit in the $15 million per
year range. This is a reasonable forecast for a
firm with annual revenue currently at just under
$30 million that is expected to double or triple
every year for the next three to five years.
Assuming that eToys and Kids’ World would
have been roughly equal competitors, the capital
value of Kids’ World could have been in excess
of $50 million. This is therefore an estimate of
the present value of lost profits to Kids’ World
from the possibility that the market will have
grown sufficiently to foreclose effective market
presentation.” Dr. Hanson concluded if no
settlement was reached between the parties to
this action “by the time Toys ‘R’ Us or Mattel
makes the expected entry into e-commerce,”
Kids’ World’s loss would probably be valued at $
50 million. Dr. Hanson cautioned: “This latter
estimate is preliminary, however. If the market
continues to astound, market valuations may
argue for even larger damages in the near
future.” Dr. Hanson relied on news articles as
the source of his information about eToys.
At the time of the flood, Kids’ World was also
negotiating an arrangement with
WeatherChannel.com to establish a link similar
to the MindSpring link. WeatherChannel.com
was then one of the “highest trafficked sites” on
the Internet. Howard opined, “For Kids’ World to
have placement on the Weather Channel site
would assuredly guarantee a very high number
of visitors to the Kids’ World [Web site].”
Kids’ World also intended to market its Web site
through contacts at magazines as well as radio
and television stations. Kids’ World was
prepared to fill orders placed over the Internet. It
had “drop shipment” agreements with numerous
suppliers, i.e. the manufacturers agreed to ship
products directly to Kids’ World’s customers. In
addition, Kids’ World was prepared to ship
products directly from the retail store.
However, the flood caused extensive damage to
the retail store. The Rudzkis were forced to
devote their time to rebuilding and restocking the
store. For a variety of reasons, they were unable
to both rebuild the store and launch the Web
site. Unable to launch their new Web site,
plaintiffs withdrew their contract with MindSpring
and did not follow through on the Weather
Channel agreement.
Prior to the flood, plaintiffs were able to obtain
revenue sharing agreements with Web site
portals such as MindSpring without paying
money up-front. According to Lew, this was
because “the [Web site] portals had not yet
recognized their value.” In March 1998, the Kids’
World retail store was reestablished and
plaintiffs once again set their sights on ecommerce. By that time, however, revenue
sharing Web portal arrangements were no
longer available. Following the success of ecommerce retailers like eToys and Amazon,
large amounts of cash up-front were demanded
in return for access to Web site portals. The fees
often exceeded $ 1 million. Plaintiffs were
financially unable to proceed; the Web portal
costs were “exorbitant.” Without links on popular
Web site portals, plaintiffs were unable to attract
customers to the Kids’ World Web site.
Two years after the flood, plaintiffs brought this
action against defendants to recover profits lost
not from the operation of the retail store, but
because of the inability to launch the Web site at
an optimal time. Plaintiffs alleged one cause of
action for negligence. The trial court entered a
judgment in favor of the defendant.
II. DISCUSSION
The Supreme Court set forth the law concerning
lost profits as damages in Grupe v. Glick (1945)
as follows: “Where the operation of an
established business is prevented or interrupted,
as by a tort or breach of contract or warranty,
damages for the loss of prospective profits that
otherwise might have been made from its
operation are generally recoverable for the
reason that their occurrence and extent may be
ascertained with reasonable certainty from the
past volume of business and other provable data
relevant to the probable future sales. On the
other hand, where the operation of an
In March 1999, Richard X. Hanson, a forensic
economist, prepared at plaintiffs’ request a
“preliminary analysis of losses suffered by [Kids’
11
unestablished business is prevented or
interrupted, damages for prospective profits that
might otherwise have been made from its
operation are not recoverable for the reason that
their occurrence is uncertain, contingent and
speculative. But although generally
objectionable for the reason that their estimation
is conjectural and speculative, anticipated profits
dependent upon future events are allowed
where their nature and occurrence can be
shown by evidence of reasonable reliability. All
of these cases recognize and apply the general
principle that damages for the loss of
prospective profits are recoverable where the
evidence makes reasonably certain their
occurrence and extent.” (Italics added; accord,
e.g., Shade Foods, Inc. v. Innovative Products
Sales & Marketing, Inc. (2000) Resort Video,
Ltd. v. Laser Video, Inc. (1995) Maggio, Inc. v.
United Farm Workers (1991); Gerwin v.
Southeastern Gould Assn. of Seventh Day
Adventists (1971). In Natural Soda Prod. Co. v.
City of L. A. (1943), the Supreme Court held:
“The award of damages for loss of profits
depends upon whether there is a satisfactory
basis for estimating what the probable earnings
would have been had there been no tort. A
satisfactory basis for an existing basis may
include reliance on specific economic or
statistical models based on past financial
records. If no such basis exists, as in cases
where the establishment of a business is
prevented, it may be necessary to deny such
recovery. If, however, there has been operating
experience sufficient to permit a reasonable
estimate of probable income and expense,
damages for loss of prospective profits are
awarded.” Contrary to plaintiff’s assertion, the
rule regarding proof of lost profits from a
business applies in tort as well as contract
cases. (Grupe v. Glick, supra, at pp. 692-693;
Piscitelli v. Friedenberg (2001)) Uncertainty as
to the amount of profits is not fatal to such a
claim. (Continental Car-Na-Var Corp. v. Moseley
(1944); Berge v. International Harvester Co.
(1983); Fisher v. Hampton (1975);
Engle v. City of Oroville (1965) As the Court of
Appeal explained in S.C. Anderson, Inc. v. Bank
of America (1994) “Lost anticipated profits
cannot be recovered if it is uncertain whether
any profit would have been derived at all from
the proposed undertaking. But lost prospective
net profits may be recovered if the evidence
shows, with reasonable certainty, both their
occurrence and extent. It is enough to
demonstrate a reasonable probability that profits
would have been earned except for the
defendant’s conduct.” Moreover, the court held,
a plaintiff is “not required to establish the amount
of its damages with absolute precision, and [is]
only obliged to demonstrate its loss with
reasonable certainty.” (Id. at pp. 536-537;
accord, Natural Soda Prod. Co. v. City of L. A.,
supra, at p. 200 [“Since defendant made it
impossible for plaintiff to realize any profits, it
cannot complain if the probable profits are of
necessity estimated”]; Sanchez-Corea v. Bank
of America (1985); Rest.2d Torts, § 912, com.
a.) The Restatement Second of Torts provides in
this regard: “It is desirable . . . that there be
definiteness of proof of the amount of damage
as far as is reasonably possible. It is even more
desirable . . . that an injured person not be
deprived of substantial compensation merely
because he cannot prove with complete
certainty the extent of harm he has suffered.
Particularly is this true in situations . . . where
the harm is of such a nature as necessarily to
prevent anything approximating accuracy of
proof, as when anticipated profits of a business
have been prevented.” (Rest.2d Torts,
§ 912, com. a.)
When the operation of an unestablished
business is prevented, as here, prospective
profits may be shown in various ways. The
Restatement Second of Contracts, section 352,
comment b, provides, “If the business is a new
one or if it is a speculative one . . .,damages
may be established with reasonable certainty
with the aid of expert testimony, economic and
financial data, market surveys and analyses,
business records of similar enterprises, and the
like.” Similarly, the Restatement Second of
Torts, section 912, comment d states, “When the
tortfeasor has prevented the beginning of a new
business . . . all factors relevant to the likelihood
of the success or lack of success of the
business or transaction that are reasonably
provable are to be considered, including general
business conditions and the degree of success
of similar enterprises.”
Our Courts of Appeal have held, consistent with
the Restatement Second of Torts, that the
experience of similar businesses is one way to
prove prospective profits. (Resort Video, Ltd. v.
Laser Video, Inc., supra, at p. 1699.
We turn to the case before us. Given Kids’
World’s state-of-the-art Web site, and its
expected favorable one-click Web portal
12
placement on the fast-growing MindSpring site,
and perhaps the “highly trafficked” Weather
Channel Web site as well, it would have
attracted a very high number of relatively
wealthy potential customers to its online store.
Kids’ World was prepared to meet customers’
online orders through drop-shipment
agreements with manufacturers as well as direct
shipments from its Beverly Hills retail store.
Once the Rudzkis proved they could significantly
attract customers and had a viable online
business, the Kids’ World Web site would have
attracted significant venture capital, i.e., “funds
invested in a new enterprise that has high risk
and the potential for a high return.” (Black’s Law
Dict. (7th ed. 1999) Westlaw, Blacks.) Further,
given the timing of the venture, both in terms of
the approaching holidays, and the emerging
Internet business, coupled with the availability of
Web portal placement without any up-front fees,
Kids’ World would have been in a position to be
a financially successful leader in the ecommerce sale of toys. Finally, based on a
comparison with eToys’ status in 1999 and
assuming Kids’ World and eToys would have
been roughly equal competitors, Kids’ World’s
capital value money or assets invested, or
available for investment, in the business (Black’s
Law Dict. (7th ed. 1999)) could have been in
excess of $ 50 million.
one. Further, the whole scenario presented by
plaintiffs is rife with speculation. The following
undisputed contingencies existed so as to bar
the computation of potential lost profits: Kids’
World would be competing with two other toy
retailers on the MindSpring portal; it would be
necessary for Kids’ World to attract not only
sufficient viewers from the MindSpring portal but
customers who actually made purchases; the
amount of purchases would have to be of
sufficient quantity to make the site financially
viable; venture capital in an u
Identify a company. It may be in any industry, private, public, or non-profit. Either speak with the manager or research the company online to learn about the company’s culture and to gauge employee engagement. 1) describe the business; 2) perform an in-depth analysis of the internal conflict in the company you selected (i.e., what’s causing morale to decline); 3) discuss management theories that could be utilized to increase the organization’s efficiency and effectiveness; 4) how does the culture of the organization contribute to employee engagement; and 5) using the top 3 bad boss behaviors from your list, what recommendations would you make to the owner about resolving conflict between bosses and employees.
Describe and assess qualitative risk assessment measures taken in the project as described in the case studyDescribe and apprise the steps taken in risk assessment and quantification (as outlined in the case study) Please dont submit AI generated work. also two scholarly articles4 pages and apa7 formatinclude introduction and conclusion
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Available online at www.sciencedirect.com
International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
www.elsevier.com/locate/ijproman
Project risk management practice: The case of a South African
utility company
Riaan van Wyk a, Paul Bowen b,*, Akintola Akintoye c
b
a
Electricity Supply Commission of South Africa (ESKOM), South Africa
Department of Construction Economics and Management, University of Cape Town, Private Bag, Rondebosch 7700, South Africa
c
School of the Built and Natural Environment, Glasgow Caledonian University, Cowcaddens Road, Glasgow, Scotland, UK
Received 26 October 2006; received in revised form 26 February 2007; accepted 20 March 2007
Abstract
This paper documents the risk management practice of a utility company for its Recovery Plan project to address the risks of power
interruptions due to a shortfall of supply and increasing electricity demand. The company’s corporate risk management process and its
practice at divisional and project levels are discussed. The key role of stakeholders in risk identification, analysis, mitigation, monitoring
and reporting is emphasised by the company and this drives its risk management practice. Despite the level of resources available within
the company to use more sophisticated risk management tools, the company adopts simple risk management methods suggesting that a
large size company does not necessarily use ‘state of the art’ risk management techniques. Recommendations for improved practice are
made.
2007 Elsevier Ltd and IPMA. All rights reserved.
Keywords: Risk management; Utility; Case study; Stakeholder; Electricity; South Africa
1. Introduction
Risk management continues to be a major feature of the
project management of large construction, engineering and
technological projects in an attempt to reduce uncertainties
and to achieve project success. Miller and Lessard [1] have
argued why large engineering projects should be carefully
managed given that they are ‘‘high stakes games’’ characterised by substantial irreversible commitments, skewed
reward structures in case of success, and high probabilities
of failure. In addition, they categorised the risk associated
with different types of projects ranging from oil platform
projects, nuclear-power projects, hydro-electric-power projects, urban transport projects, road and tunnel systems,
and research and development projects. They are of the
opinion that power projects possess moderate risks in so
far as engineering is concerned, but are very difficult in
*
Corresponding author. Tel.: +27 21 650 3445; fax: +27 21 689 7564.
E-mail address: bowenpa@eng.uct.ac.za (P. Bowen).
0263-7863/$30.00 2007 Elsevier Ltd and IPMA. All rights reserved.
doi:10.1016/j.ijproman.2007.03.011
terms of social acceptability. Elkingston and Smallman
[2] examined project risk management practices of British
utility companies given that the utilities sector (comprising
water, power, telecommunications) is associated with less
predictable projects which are perceived to be riskier than
day-to-day business activities. They argued that risk management is an integral part of project management in this
sector; hence, most large companies put substantial
resources into the management of their business risk.
The current paper presents the risk management of a
Recovery Plan project of the Eskom Holdings Ltd. power
company in South Africa. Eskom Holdings Ltd. is wholly
owned by the South African government. The company
is a vertically-integrated operation that generates, transmits, and distributes electricity to industrial, mining, commercial, agricultural, re-distributors and residential users.
It is also involved in the purchase and sale of electricity
to and from South African Development Community
(SADC) countries, comprising Botswana, Mozambique,
Namibia, Zimbabwe, Lesotho, Swaziland and Zambia.
150
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
The company’s business is divided into a number of divisions: Generation, Transmission and Distribution;
Resource and Strategy; Finance, Key Sales and Customers
Services; Enterprises; Human Resources; and Corporate
and External Relations. The group has many main subsidiaries, with the core businesses including non-regulated electricity supply industry activities, the provision of electricity
supply and related services outside South Africa, the granting of home loans to employees, the management and
insurance of perceived risks to Eskom, and social investment initiatives. The company’s revenue in the 12 months
of the 2005/2006 financial year was R36,607m
(US$4947m or £2662m)1 and employed some 29,697 persons (excluding contract and temporary workers). This
paper does not add to the theory of risk management.
Rather, the purpose is to document rich case study material
indicating the practice of risk management and the extent
to which practice and theory converge/diverge. One of
the authors is currently employed by Eskom in a project
management capacity, thus facilitating access to the case
material presented here.
The case study has been structured into four parts: Part
1 describes the corporate risk management process of the
holding company. Part 2 presents the risk management
process of a division of the company; the distributive division being used for this purpose. Part 3 presents the case
study of a Recovery Plan project of the division to address
the risks of power interruptions due to a shortfall of supply
and increasing electricity demand. Part 4 documents the
conclusions emanating from the study. The lesson from
the case study is that a (very) large company with an appropriate level of resources may not necessarily use sophisticated risk management tools; rather, simple methods that
enable the company to mitigate the risks faced by the business are adopted.
2. Corporate risk management within Eskom Holdings Ltd.
Risk management within Eskom is an important and
integral element of the business. Given the importance of
risk management, the company has a dedicated Risk Management Committee (RMC) as one of its seven primary
committees (the other committees are the Board committee, audit committee, tender committee, human resources
committee, remuneration and ethics committee, sustainability committee, and executive management committee).
The RMC comprises three non-executive directors, the
finance director and the managing director (Generation
division). The RMC is chaired by an independent, nonexecutive director. The committee is tasked with ensuring
that the company’s risk management strategies and processes are aligned with best practice. It also deals with
1
Exchange rates as at 7th September 2006: R7.40 SA Rands = US$1;
R13.75 SA Rands = £1.
the company’s integrated risk management strategy and
processes, these embracing risk tolerance and appetite, risk
accountably, major risk exposures, and emerging risk
issues.
Eskom practices an integrated risk management strategy
and process by identifying risks and opportunities against
business objectives during risk assessments throughout
the organisation, from both a line and functional perspective. Risk integration between divisions and subsidiaries is
reviewed by the RMC to ensure a coordinated approach to
risk mitigation measures. Key risk management ‘‘buzz
words’’ feature prominently in the company’s risk management process, as depicted in the company’s 186 page 2006
annual report (http://www.eskom.co.za/annreport06/).
The risk prefixes that are contained in the annual report
include: exposure, assessment, accountability, internal control, matrix, categories, mitigation measures, tolerance levels, categories, identification, evaluation, appetite, profile,
audit, financing, issues, process, ownership, etc. A content
analysis of the annual report shows that the word ‘risk’ is
mentioned 206 times whilst the term ‘risk management’ is
mentioned 56 times; these being explicit indicators of the
importance that the company attaches to the risks to which
it is exposed. Risk categories that the company faces are
defined in the company’s risk matrix, and include: finance,
technical, environmental, legal, human resources, information, stakeholders, regulatory and strategic.
The remit of the company’s Risk Management Committee (RMC) is to ensure that Integrated Risk Management
(IRM) is applied throughout the Eskom business. It
reviews the risk processes and all major risks within the
business and reports back to the Board. Integration
between the various Eskom divisions and subsidiaries is
ensured via the interaction of the different risk (or riskrelated) committees. Each division within the company
handles its own Risk Management System and may have
slightly different risk approaches within each of the six
regions: Western; Eastern; Northern; North-West; Southern; and Central. This diversity is allowed as long as it supports the strategy and milestones set by the RMC which
encourages a coordinated and common approach for the
business as a whole.
Eskom has adopted the Code of Practice published by
the Institute of Risk Management of South Africa. In
addition, it has developed its own methodology for determining the ‘value’ or weighting for specific risks faced by
the company. These weightings are used to assist the
organisation to better identify which risks should receive
priority and also show the value of risk mitigation measures. Aligned to this valuation methodology there are
risk tolerance levels for each division and main subsidiaries, together with risk appetite parameters for each functional risk area. Being a South African utility company
with a wider remit for the sale and purchase of electricity
from neighbouring countries, the company has identified
some risks that it considers it faces. These are depicted
in Table 1.
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
Table 1
A list of key risks faced by the company
Key risks
1. Regulatory risk that encompasses the need for clear regulatory
framework and adequate price increases to ensure long-term
sustainability
2. Future capacity, where the following needs to be addressed:
a. The availability of capacity in the long-term
b. The impact of new capital projects on the overall business
c. The ongoing ability to maintain consistent supply
d. Aging plant and increasing plant performance indicators
3. Debt management of small power users
4. Non-technical energy losses where the theft of conductors results in
the lack of supply of power and the potential for injuries to the
public
5. The ability to respond to changes in the industry arising from the
proposed new Electricity Supply Industry in South Africa while
meeting the shareholder’s objective for the company
6. Shareholder relationships with the focus on the ability to manage
the different expectations of the shareholder and government
departments in terms of Eskom’s business objectives
7. Information security, management of the outsourced information
technology service contract, lack of skills and resources, and information technology business continuity management
8. Availability of the skills required for the future business needs
including skills retention, training and succession planning. The
impact of HIV/AIDS is also addressed as a component of this
key risk area
3. Risk Management System within the Distribution Division
Given that each Division and each region within the
company handles its own Risk Management System, risk
management within the Distribution (Western Region)
Division forms part of the responsibilities of the Business
Planning and Integrated Risk (BPIR) Committee which is
led by the BPIR Manager. BPIR is therefore a subcommittee of the Regional (Western) Executive Committee
(REC). BPIR duties focus on a holistic business planning
and integration function, which includes all associated
risks. The REC appoints the members and chairperson
of the BPIR committee, who, in return, report back
and advise on all Region’s business risk-related matters.
Membership of BPIR consists of REC members, subject
matter experts and other Eskom officials. They manage
the entire Risk Management Process at regional level
and include issues around process deadlocks and emergency preparedness.
The BPIR committee meets once a month and has identified the following attributes of its approach to the overall
Eskom Integrated Risk Management (IRM):
assists with business decision-making as more information becomes available from the risk process being
executed;
facilitates learning from and incorporating lessons from
the past;
allows for an external view on matters which could lead
to more issues being identified;
151
provides for integration between the different functional
departments leading to the optimal addressing of risk
issues;
allows identification of any opportunities arising from
the matters at hand;
ensures focus on objectives, keeping in line with the
regional objectives and those set by the Risk Management Committee at Board level;
ensures a proper audit trail for all risk-related matters:
the origin, owner, actions decided upon and taken,
and progress;
assists with decision making, by providing input into the
continuous business planning which is also a function of
this committee;
very importantly, it strives to protect against any impact
to the region’s financial results and image; and
meets the requirements of the King II2 report.
4. Case study of the Western Cape Recovery Plan project
One of the projects of the Western Region Distribution
Division is Eskom’s Recovery Plan for the Western Cape.
The project was developed to address the current risk of
power interruptions due to a shortfall of supply and increasing electricity demand during the winter period. To understand the reasons for the shortfall in supply, it is necessary
to understand how the Western Cape is supplied with electricity and the existing constraints surrounding this.
The Western Cape requires up to 4250 MegaWatt (MW)
of power supply daily over peak periods during the winter
months. This is supplied from four power stations that provide a combined total of 4780 MW as follows:
2 · Nuclear reactors at the Koeberg Nuclear
Station (900 MW · 2)
Coal power stations in Mpumalanga
Palmiet hydro-electric pump station
Steenbras hydro-electric pump station
Total
1800 MW
2400 MW
400 MW
180 MW
4780 MW
However, there are peak periods in this region when
there is a surge in power consumption and these usually
occur between 5am and 8am, and 6pm and 8pm during
week days as shown in Fig. 1.
During routine maintenance on Unit 1 at the Koeberg
Nuclear Station in late 2005 serious damage was done to
the generator and its cooling system for this Unit. How2
The King Reports on Corporate Governance (King I and King II),
published by the King Committee on Corporate Governance, aimed at
promoting the highest standards of corporate governance in South Africa.
More specifically, the King I Report dealt with financial and regulatory
aspects of corporate governance and, in addition, advocated an integrated
approach to good governance in the interests of a wide range of
stakeholders. With the publication of the King II Report, in terms of
which risk management received official consideration for the first time in
South Africa, companies are now required to audit risk exposure on an
annual basis and disclose it to their shareholders. In addition, King II
acknowledged that a company’s activities are more than profit to
shareholders, embracing economic, environmental and social aspects.
152
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
Fig. 1. Demand for electricity as shown in the peak periods.
ever, the nuclear reactor was not affected. The time for
repairing the generator and cooling system was set for at
least three months from January 2006. The repair programme was focused on minimizing the period for Unit 1
to be out of service. This meant that various options had
to be considered which included obtaining replacement
parts (i.e. stator and rotor), acquiring spare parts, and
repairing the damaged parts. The dismantling of the Unit
1 generator is considered a slow process due to the cool
down period required (5 days) and separation of the rotor
and stator (10 days). After the assessment of the extent of
the damage, it was decided to start repairs to the stator and
rotor and obtain a spare rotor from a company in France.
This particular company had been the original advisors to
the Koeberg plant some 20 years ago.
During this time, Koeberg Unit 2 continued to provide
the required electricity to the Western Cape. However, a
number of power interruptions were experienced during
the month of February 2006 due to a variety of reasons,
including:
1. Unit 6 of the Kendal Power Station in Mpumalanga
tripped causing a large fluctuation on the National Network. As a safety precaution, Koeberg’s Unit 2 was
removed from the grid and placed in a controlled shut
down. After the stabilisation of the network, it took
Unit 2 about a week to start up and increase generation
to full capacity. Due to the shortage of supply during
this period, load shedding (controlled black-outs) were
required and implemented. Public opinion was vociferous in its condemnation of Eskom.
2. Flash-overs between transmission lines due to high pollution from veld fires and unexpected fog caused various
power lines to trip; interrupting the power flow from the
north and forcing Koeberg’s Unit 2 to remove itself
from the grid once again. This led to more load shedding
to manage the power shortage. This served only to
increase public condemnation.
Another risk was identified from the scheduled refuelling of Unit 2 which was scheduled for March 2006. However, the repairs to Unit 1 had to be completed in time so
that Unit 2 could be shut down for approximately two
months to complete the refuelling and routine maintenance
procedures. In normal circumstances both units would then
have been ready to provide power for the winter months.
The rotor from France was only expected (and delivered)
during April 2006 and the repairs to the local rotor and stator were still underway at that time. It was impossible to
remove Unit 2 before Unit 1 was repaired as there was
no means to provide for the shortfall in electricity supply.
The economic impact of the February power outages was
estimated to be in excess of R500 million (about US$68m
or £36m) and was subject of discussion at provincial and
national governmental levels. To remove Unit 2 from the
grid would immediately mean a shortfall of another
900 MW and would force further load shedding to occur
with its associated economic impact.
The Western Cape Recovery Plan was an effort to do
the following: (1) explain the electricity supply problem;
(2) forecast the power demand and expected shortfall for
the winter months; (3) provide the timelines for Koeberg
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
An Eskom Recovery Team was established which was
headed by the Managing Director of the Transmission
Division. The team structure is shown in Fig. 2. The team
reported into a bigger operating model made up of various
stakeholders headed by the Energy Risk Management
Committee (ERMC) as shown in Fig. 3. The Eskom
Recovery Team (ERT) met at least once every two weeks
where progress on the Recovery Plan was given. The feedback was consolidated and forwarded to the Integrated
Recovery Team and finally to ERMC. A weekly status
Unit 1 to be repaired and Unit 2 to be refuelled; (4) identify all risks that could impact on the project plan; (5)
develop mitigating actions for the identified risks; (6) identify other energy saving options to minimize the impact of
the shortfall; (7) provide load shedding principles and
guidelines; and (8) provide stakeholder and communication guidelines.
This plan was a combined effort between Eskom, the
City of Cape Town (electricity department) and RED
ONE (the recently formed regional electricity distributor).
National Recovery Sponsor
Transmission Managing Director
Regional Recovery Sponsor
Recovery Programme Manager
Western Region General Manager
Western Region Risk Manager
Recovery Programme PMO
Load Shedding
Streamlead
Corporate Communications & Stakeholder Manager
KSACS Streamlead
Corporate Communications/ERD Streamlead
DSM Streamlead
Customer Services
Streamlead
WR Communications & Stakeholders Streamlead
Grid and National
Control Streamlead
Human Resources
Streamlead
Koeberg/Generation
Streamlead
Corporate Finance
Streamlead
Eskom Enterprises
Streamlead
Other Corporate
Functions
Corporate Spokesperson
Key
PMSO – Programme Management Office
DSM – Demand Side Management
ERD – External Relations Dept.
WR – Western Region
Fig. 2. Team structure for the Western Cape Recovery Plan project.
Dept of
Public
Enterprises
Dept of
Provincial
&Local
Government
Provincial
Government
Dept of
Minerals
& Energy
Municipal
Eskom
Holdings
Energy Risk
Management
Committee
Eskom
Executive
Eskom
Recovery
Team
ERMC
Recovery
Team
Integrated
Recovery Team
153
Municipal
Recovery
Team
RED1
Other
Stakeholders
Fig. 3. Stakeholder structure for risk management of the Recovery Plan project.
154
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
report was also compiled by ERT and published internally
within Eskom and externally to the general public.
5. Risk management of the Recovery Plan project
There are typically five stages associated with risk management, namely: (1) risk management planning, (2) risk
identification, (3) qualitative and quantitative risk analysis,
(4) risk response planning, and (5) risk monitoring and control [3]. However, Edwards and Bowen [4] state that the process of risk management should include evaluation and
reporting and they have as a result categorised the process
of risk management into nine stages: Identification; Classification; Allocation; Analysis; Response; Recording; Monitoring; Control; and Evaluation. Chapman [5] identified
nine phases of the generic risk management process
(RMP), comprising: define; focus; identify; structure, ownership; eliminate; evaluate; plan and manage. Practically, however, it is possible to classify all these stages into a four-stage
risk management cycle: risk identification; risk analysis; risk
response; and risk reporting. The risk identification stage
includes classification and allocation, while risk reporting
includes monitoring, control and evaluation. The risk management practice of the Recovery Plan project within the
Eskom integrated risk management protocol is presented
below along the lines of this four-stage framework.
5.1. Risk identification (and classification and allocation) of
the Recovery Plan project
The role of stakeholders in the RMP is emphasised by
Loosemore et al. [6]. According to them, effective and frequent involvement of stakeholders at all stages of the RMP
will ensure that more risks are identified and commitment
obtained in managing them. Stakeholder management
becomes very critical in the risk identification process given
that they can have conflicting interests and the risks identified could be biased towards those interests or limited to their
own experiences. The possibility that the stakeholder mix
could change over time also has an impact on project objectives and its associated risks. Furthermore, stakeholders
might be unable to express their objectives clearly or limit
the sharing of valid information due to confidentiality or
inter-stakeholder politics. Hence, they have suggested that
the risk manager or risk management service provider should
encourage stakeholders to balance their objectives with one
another, be flexible where possible, and understand the pressures and background under which objectives are created.
It is generally accepted that companies with organic
structures allow for more creative and imaginary
approaches to identify risks, though it is still easier for
mechanistic structured companies to implement those
approaches [4]. This is because the latter could provide
backing in the form of authority sources, addressing possible resistance. Hence, companies’ management should be
committed to the risk management process, identifying
leaders with a strong personal passion for the subject.
The classification of risks creates a common framework
for grouping risks, although different cultures could classify
the same risk differently. Edwards and Bowen [4] suggest
two primary categories for classifying risks: Natural and
Human Risks. Natural risks are those from systems ‘‘beyond
human agency’’ which include risks from weather, geological, biological and extraterrestrial systems. Risks from
human systems are more difficult to categorise due to their
overlapping nature. These include risks from social, political,
cultural, health, legal, economic, financial, technical and
managerial systems. Baber [7] refers to internally and externally generated risks. The Project Management Institute [8]
classifies risk into internal and external. Examples of internal
risk in project development are issues relating to labour,
materials, site conditions, cash flow, etc., while external risks
include governmental regulations, vandalism, sabotage,
environmental factors, market forces, inflation, etc.
It is generally accepted as a good risk management practice that a risk should be allocated to the party who can best
manage it that risk. To avoid duplication it is suggested that
continuous investigations are undertaken during the process of risk management to ensure that another stakeholder
has not already taken up the control of a risk [6].
Eskom, in general, is very risk aware and has invested
considerable resources into this project management practice within the company. Many processes are in place to
identify and manage potential risks in its various functional
areas. Within its Distribution Division the foci of operations are customer services, engineering (safety standards
– occupational safety and health requirements); finance;
human resources; information management; and commercial. All of these functional departments are represented
on the BPIR Committee where risks are raised and managed. At this level risks are categorized as follows: finance;
technical operation and performance; legal audit and compliance; people; strategic acquisitions, divestitures and projects; strategy; transformation; pricing; regulatory (NER);
stakeholders; information; subsidiaries, associates and joint
ventures.
In this particular case, the main reason for the inadequate supply capacity to meet the needs of the Western
Cape within the normally envisaged risk possibility of a
loss of generation at Koeberg was aggravated by decisions
by central government that limited the capacity of Eskom
to build new power stations or transmission lines. Arising
from the White Paper on Energy Policy [9], government
decided it was necessary to proceed with ‘the unbundling
of Eskom’s generation and transmission groups’ and ‘separate the power stations into a number of companies’ to
‘create the opportunity for private sector and Black Economic Empowerment investment opportunities in the generation sector’. Later, the Intergovernmental Fiscal Review
[10] stated ‘The ESI restructuring involves three key
aspects: the sale of 30 per cent of Eskom’s generating
capacity to private investors, with a black empowerment
equity stake of at least 10 per cent of capacity; the separation of Eskom into several generation clusters and a sepa-
R. van Wyk et al. / International Journal of Project Management 26 (2008) 149–163
rate transmission company; and the introduction of an
electricity market, which will ensure competition between
the different electricity generators. These reforms will begin
during the course of 2003.’ The central government had
taken responsibility to manage the investment decisions
of the supply industry, and it was only in late 2004, with
looming insufficient capacity, that the decision was made
to return the responsibility for electricity sufficiency to
Eskom [11]. Thus, Eskom was constrained by external
forces in its ability to respond to identified risk. Most subsequent risk was a consequence of this external risk.
The identified risks are usually assigned to the BPIR
Committee members for mitigation. Although the committee members remain accountable, they could subsequently
delegate the risk mitigation actions and management to relevant staff within the establishment.
The Eskom Recovery Team panel of experts responsible
for addressing the Western Cape Recovery Plan project
comprised senior managers drawn from the following
departments and/or divisions: National Recovery Sponsor
(this is represented by the Managing Director of the Transmission Division who has overall accountability for executing the Recovery Plan); Regional Recovery Sponsor
(represented by the General Manager of Distribution –
Western Region); and Programme Manager (Risk Manager
– Distribution (Western Region), responsible for driving the
Recovery Team from a project and risk management
perspective). Other functions represented on the panel are
Project Managers and Consultants; Load Shedding stream,
Demand Side Management stream; Grid and National
Control stream, Koeberg stream (represented by the
Production Manager for Generation – Nuclear Cluster –
who is responsible for all activities happening at the
Koeberg Nuclear Power Station, i.e. repairing of Unit 1,
shutting down of Unit 2 for refuelling, and managing the
output capacities of the separate units); Eskom Enterprises
stream; Key Sales and Customer Services stream; Customer
Services stream; Human Resources stream, Finance stream;
Other Corporate Functions (Managers from Legal, Audit
and Security at corporate level); External Relations Department stream; and Communication and Stakeholder stream.
This is a comprehensive stakeholder panel to ensure that
no function within Eskom that may contribute to the solution to resolve the risks associated with the Recovery Plan
project is left out. This panel compiled an extensive list of
risks and mitigating actions based on their individual expertise and input from their respective teams and business environments. Some risks were identified based on previous
experience, whilst others were based on documented rules
and regulations (especially in the nuclear environment).
The panel also identified risk ownership and reporting
mechanisms around these risks as shown in Table 2.
Many of the risks listed in Table 2 have arisen as a result
of the mitigation strategies for others. For example, the
risk of not being able to supply the demand for electricity
(Risk No. 20) is mitigated by Demand Side Management
(DSM) initiatives like providing an exchange programme
155
for Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs).3 Provision of
enough lights (Risk No. 23) and the public’s take-on of
the programme (Risk No. 21) became additional risks to
manage as a result mitigating Risk No. 20.
In addition, there were a couple of unidentified risks
which arose as time went by: (i) a faulty valve at Koeberg
was discovered after Unit 1 was returned to service; (ii) a
pinhole leak was discovered in Koeberg Unit 1, though it
posed no threat to operations; and (iii) a problem with
the electrical supply boards at Koeberg was discovered
which forced Unit 1 to shut down after it had been recommissioned.
The risk identification matrix (Table 2) also indicates
whether Eskom or the City of Cape Town (or both) is
responsible to action the risks. The relevant Recovery
Team’s members are identified as accountable for particular risks and they are able to delegate such risks to the relevant staff as appropriate.
Despite the involvement on the panel of various stakeholders in the risk identification, classification and allocation processes, certain shortcomings became apparent,
including: (1) a weak relationship between Eskom and
the City of Cape Town (the two key ownerships – internal
and external respectively – of the various risks) leading to
each blaming the other and miscommunications to the
public, i.e. customers; (2) lack of an integrated Recovery
Plan between the different stakeholders (probably due to
an excessive number of members on the panel); and (3)
the risks were not necessarily categorised according to
Eskom standards i.e., they were grouped according to the
business areas identified for the Recovery Plan (i.e., Load
Shedding, Koeberg, Communication, etc.). The excuse
given for these shortcomings in the risk management process at the identification stage is the crisis situation under
which these risks were identified.
5.2. Risk analysis of the Recovery Plan project
It is important for per
. These responses should be 700 – 900 words in length (no more, no less, please).Do not just summarize the readings. Rather, think of these weekly responses as a chance to present your analysis on a question or issue from the week’s readings. Use the following prompts as guides for these written assignments:Succinctly state the authors’ main arguments.What are the key points/themes/concepts linking these readings?What is compelling or intriguing to you about these readings? How do they relate to the world around you? Feel free to draw from your own experiences, from current events, and current cultural moments/products.please make the summarize analytical I have also attached the readings by order I will attach more of the reading
Go to GALILEO or other online health sites and perform a Quality Improvement Project Topic Search. Provide a one-page summary on your topic. Please cite your references in APA style (7th edition).You may use Galileo to find the information. The link (below) can also be found on the ASU website.Galileo website:http://www.galileo.usg.edu/scholar/asurams/subjects
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted. You must include at least 5
references.·
Format your references using APA
style.
·
Each answer must not be less than
300 words
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Introduction to Operations
Management
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s Name:
Semester: First
CRN: 12501
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Mir Satar
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Understand fundamental supply chain management concepts.
Apply knowledge to evaluate and manage an effective supply chain.
Understand the foundational role of logistics as it relates to transportation and
warehousing.
How to align the management of a supply chain with corporate goals and
strategies.
Go through the given case scenario
Choose an organization operating in any part of the globe (preferably a super
market, hyper market chain (or) a fast-food industry or an electronics
equipment manufacturer/distributor, automobile manufacturer or automotive
parts or retail products / services.
The organization that you choose should either manufacture or market or
distribute some products / services. The competition in these businesses
majorly depends upon price, quality, timely delivery and service (which are
core aspects of Supply Chain Management). Hence there is immense pressure
on all the organizations in these businesses to keep the four aspects mentioned
to their supreme best.
As these businesses are the most emerged industries in the recent past, the
supply chain has seen huge transformations. These businesses are getting to
the maturing stage and so as the transformations in the supply chain
management of these business become more and more competitive, the
customer gets only the best products / service.
Note: In case your chosen organization is operating in many countries
and deals with many products, it is enough you consider the operations
in any one country and indicate some materials that are part of the
business and select 2 or 3 materials out of them for providing answers to
the questions given below.
Students can make use of graphs, tables, illustrations, maps, pictures,
images to add clarity to your answers.
1. Examine and evaluate your chosen organization’s Supply Chain,
describe its basic working, strategy used by them, key drivers for
achieving an integrated supply chain. What is the SCM model used?
(2MM)
2. Go through the typical Working of the chosen Organization’s logistics
process, Is there a role for reverse logistics for your chosen
organization’s products / services ? If there is a role, explain the process
that is applicable. (2MM)
3. Analyse and understand the different modes of transportation employed
by your chosen organization. Indicate whether the current arrangements
are effective. Suggest improvements for making the transportation
sustainable and new modes of transportation. (2MM)
4. What is the Warehouse design used by the chosen organization and
provide your idea on the appropriate warehouse design that will be
suitable for the future. Justify your choice with proper reason. (2MM)
5. Given the nature of the products that you have selected for your chosen
organization, what is the type of Inventory management control that
your chosen organization should adopt? Give reasons. (2MM)
Note:
•
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Each answer must not be less than 300 words
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer4. Answer-
5. Answer-
Complete an analysis of Southwest. Assess the organizational layout, performance metrics, and the technology that is used to measure performance and connect with consumers.
Instructions
Using the Southwest case study, write a 6–7 page paper in which you:
Evaluate Southwest’s operations strategy and explain how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
Analyze how operation management activities affect the customer experience. Select two operation management challenges and provide the solutions for confronting them.
Examine Southwest’s value chain and evaluate its effectiveness to operations in terms of quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
Determine the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Select at least two types that can be applied and provide justifications for the selection.
Examine the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and evaluate how the technologies strengthen the value chain.
Use at least two quality resources in this assignment that do not include the initial case study. Note: Wikipedia and similar websites do not qualify as quality resources.
This course requires the use of Strayer Writing Standards (SWS). The library is your home for SWS assistance, including citations and formatting. Please refer to the Library site for all support. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
Analyze the impact of operational strategies and practices on a business.
View Rubric
Week 4 Assignment – Southwest Research Assignment
Week 4 Assignment – Southwest Research Assignment
Criteria Ratings Pts
Evaluate Southwest’s operations strategy and explain how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
view longer description
33.75 to >30.37 pts
Exemplary
Evaluated Southwest’s operations strategy and explained how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
30.37 to >26.99 pts
Competent
Described Southwest’s operations strategy and identified how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
26.99 to >23.62 pts
Satisfactory
Described Southwest’s operations strategy and identified how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage but did not specifically address sustainability.
23.62 to >20.24 pts
Needs Improvement
Described Southwest’s operations strategy but did not explain how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
20.24 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
Did not submit or did not evaluate Southwest’s operations strategy and explain how the organization seeks to gain a competitive advantage in terms of sustainability.
/ 33.75 pts
Analyze how operation management activities affect the customer experience. Select two operation management challenges and provide the solutions for confronting them.
view longer description
45 to >40.49 pts
Exemplary
Analyzed how operation management activities affect the customer experience. Selected two operation management challenges and provided the solutions for confronting them.
40.49 to >35.99 pts
Competent
Analyzed how operation management activities affect the customer experience. Selected one operation management challenge and provided the solution for confronting it.
35.99 to >31.49 pts
Satisfactory
Analyzed how operation management activities affect the customer experience. Selected one to two operation management challenges but did not provide the solutions for confronting them.
31.49 to >26.99 pts
Needs Improvement
Analyzed how operation management activities affect the customer experience but did not select any operation management challenges.
26.99 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
Did not submit or did not analyze how operation management activities affect the customer experience.
/ 45 pts
Examine Southwest’s value chain and evaluate its effectiveness to operations in terms of quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
view longer description
33.75 to >30.37 pts
Exemplary
Examined Southwest’s value chain and evaluated its effectiveness to operations in terms of quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
30.37 to >26.99 pts
Competent
Examined Southwest’s value chain and evaluated its effectiveness to operations in terms of two of the three following components: quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
26.99 to >23.62 pts
Satisfactory
Examined Southwest’s value chain and evaluated its effectiveness to operations in terms of one of the three following components: quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
23.62 to >20.24 pts
Needs Improvement
Examined Southwest’s value chain and evaluated its effectiveness to operations in general but did not address any of the following components: quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
20.24 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
Did not submit or did not examine Southwest’s value chain and evaluate its effectiveness to operations in terms of quality, value creation, and customer satisfaction.
/ 33.75 pts
Determine the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Select at least two types that can be applied and provide justifications for the selection.
view longer description
45 to >40.49 pts
Exemplary
Determined the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Selected at least two types that can be applied and provide justifications for the selection.
40.49 to >35.99 pts
Competent
Determined the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Selected at least two types that can be applied but did not provide justifications for the selection.
35.99 to >31.49 pts
Satisfactory
Determined the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Selected less than two types that can be applied and provided justifications for the selection.
31.49 to >26.99 pts
Needs Improvement
Determined the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design. Selected less than two types that can be applied but did not provide justifications for the selection.
26.99 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
Did not submit or did not determine the different types of performance measurements that can be used to measure Southwest’s service-delivery system design.
/ 45 pts
Examine the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and evaluate how the technologies strengthen the value chain.
view longer description
33.75 to >30.37 pts
Exemplary
Examined the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and evaluated how the technologies strengthen the value chain.
30.37 to >26.99 pts
Competent
Examined the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and listed the ways the technologies strengthen the value chain.
26.99 to >23.62 pts
Satisfactory
Listed the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and summarized how technology can help strengthen the value chain but did not make connections to the specific technologies listed.
23.62 to >20.24 pts
Needs Improvement
Listed the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations but did not evaluate how the technologies strengthen the value chain.
20.24 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
Did not submit or did not examine the different types of technologies applied to Southwest’s service operations and evaluate how the technologies strengthen the value chain.
/ 33.75 pts
References. Use at least two quality resources in this assignment that do not include the initial case study. Cite sources properly.
view longer description
11.25 to >10.12 pts
Exemplary
Used at least two quality resources and cited sources properly.
10.12 to >8.99 pts
Competent
Used at least two quality resources but did not cite sources properly.
8.99 to >7.87 pts
Satisfactory
Did not meet the required number of resources or some resources were of poor quality. Did not cite all sources properly.
7.87 to >6.74 pts
Needs Improvement
Did not meet the required number of resources and all resources were or poor quality and were not cited properly.
6.74 to >0 pts
Unacceptable
No references provided.
/ 11.25 pts
Clarity, writing mechanics, and formatting requirements.
Week 7: Assignment 1 – Demand-side Policies and the Great Recession of 2008
Instructions
Assignment 1: Demand-side Policies and the Great Recession of 2008
Macroeconomic analysis deals with the crucial issue of government involvement in the operation of “free market economy.” The Keynesian model suggests that it is the responsibility of the government to help to stabilize the economy. Stabilization policies (demand-side and supply-side policies) are undertaken by the federal government to counteract business cycle fluctuations and prevent high rates of unemployment and inflation. Demand side policies are government attempts to alter aggregate demand (AD) through using fiscal (cutting taxes and increasing government spending) or monetary policy (reducing interest rates). To shift the AD to the right, the government has to increase the government spending (the G-component of AD) causing consumer expenditures (the C-component of AD) to increase. Alternatively the Federal Reserve could cut interest rates reducing the cost of borrowing thereby encouraging consumer spending and investment borrowing. Both policies will lead to an increase in AD.
Develop an essay discussing the fiscal and the monetary policies adopted and implemented by the federal during the Great Recession and their impacts on the U.S. economy. Complete this essay in a Microsoft Word document, and in APA format. Note your submission will automatically be submitted through “TurnItIn” for plagiarism review. Please note that a minimum of 1500 words for your essay is required.
Your paper should be structured as follows
1. Cover page with a running head
2. Introduction: What is the economic meaning of a recession?
· A brief discussion of fiscal policies
· A brief discussion of monetary policies
3. Conclusions: Discuss the extent to which the use of demand side policies (fiscal policy and monetary policy) during the Great Recession of 2008 has been successful in restoring economic growth and reducing unemployment
4. References
Include in your essay analyzing the advantages and disadvantages of deficit spending and the effects of federal government borrowing on the economy i.e., the “crowding out” effect.
1. Ability to communicate orally and in writing to facilitate individual and group discussions, set work expectations, coordinate
work, and document events such as customer responses, grievances, and accident investigations.
2. Knowledge of delivery operations, policies and procedures, including route evaluations, delivery services, mail dispatch
and delivery, sufficient to explain to others and answer questions about the operation. 3. Knowledge of retail window operations, policies and procedures, including window services, retail supplies and equipment,
sufficient to explain to others and answer questions about the operation.
4. Knowledge of the provisions of local and national bargaining unit agreements related to retail and delivery operations,
including job bidding, overtime and grievance arbitration, sufficient to recognize and reinforce actions that facilitate
compliance.
5. Ability to investigate, troubleshoot and respond to customer inquiries related to retail and delivery products and services. 6. Knowledge of Postal policies and procedures related to scheduling, leave usage and time and attendance sufficient to
recognize and reinforce actions that facilitate compliance.
7. Skill using computers sufficient to access data and generate reports.
8. Ability to read and interpret data reports and perform basic math computations sufficient to understand and explain how
the reports relate to day-to-day operations. 9. Ability to maintain composure, de-escalate potentially contentious situations and foster positive work relationships in the
midst of stressful conditions, disagreements and interpersonal conflicts. 10. Ability to adhere to applicable safety and health policies and practices and recognize potential safety issues sufficient to
identify and reinforce actions to mitigate risks.
The details of the assignment has been attached below.
The referencing style is Havard and should be 25 references above.
Pls I want the front page, table of content, executive summary, introduction, reference ( Harvard style), page numbering, conclusion and recommendation, Limitation to be included in the work along with others.
I’ll also need to get an outline or step by step arrangement of how the work would be arranged and what content you would discuss in sections with all the above included before you begin. I want an excellent report.
Lastly you should indicate where the above questions asked are answered in the report.
So please itemise where the answers to the questions are in the report. Either with different colours or something.
This can be about you, your hobbies, or some topic of interest. The purpose of this infographic is that it is to be used on your website.
CanvaLinks to an external site. and PiktochartLinks to an external site. are free options and easy to use.
Article to help: What is an Infographic? Example, Templates & Design Tips.Links to an external site.
Definition of infographic: a visual image such as a chart or diagram used to represent information or data.
Make sure to create more substantially visuals than words. Visual elements should dominate.
Make it visually appealing and add appropriate detail. Make sure to proofread and check your spelling.
Submit as a JPEG, PNG, or PDF
INFOGRAPHIC DIRECTIONS VIDEO (REQUIRED)
Watch the video below to learn more about the Infographic assignment.
GRADING DETAILS
75%+ is writing with very few images -6
50%+ is writing with very few images -4
Not actually an infographic but rather a single image style ad -6
This assignment will be submitted to Turnitin™.
Instructions
Research an emergency incident of your choice that has occurred in the past twenty years and describe how the incident was handled in regard to incident command.
Did they follow the ICS system? What were some mistakes? Make some recommendations.
With as much detail as possible answer the following questions as they apply to that event. Be sure to include a summary of the event.
Describe the Command and Control Process.
Describe the role of the Incident Commander.
Define the term “Span of Control.”
(If you are having trouble finding an emergency incident to use, think of something like the Graniteville, South Carolina train derailment and chlorine leak, or the Howard Street Tunnel Fire in Baltimore.)
For this assignment, write a 2 page APA formatted paper and submit in Microsoft Word (no other formats are acceptable). Use your textbook, the internet as well as professional journals, articles and other academically recognized sources. You must use a minimum of two sources. All sources used must be properly cited. Your references should be formatted in APA style.
2. Then see the pryzm-primier map in the Resources to see all the types of people that live there,
3. Determine a product you can market to them, and discuss how you would market that.
4. List all data from PRIZM, list zip code , map of area, product, rationale why this product, marketing approach
MUST BE BRAND NAME.
Examples of completed homework from previous semesters are attached.
the zipcode assigned to me is :11209
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Homework: Claritas Assignment
Name: Jiaqi Che
zip code: 11226
Population: 101,267
Median Age: 37.2
Median Income: $63,492
Five main segments by lifestyle:
The top five segment of zip code 11226 are 63 Low-Rise Living, 40 Aspiring A-Listers, 43 City
Roots, 17 Urban Elders, 45 Urban Modern Mix.
Urbanicity
Income
Age Ranges
Presence of Kids
63
Low-Rise Living
Urban
Lower Midscale
* Use this link to access the book; https://www.oreilly.com/library-access/?next=/library/view/common-data-sense/9781000514117/
* Next, click institution not listed?
* Enter the email wilson.kan@northeastern.edu and that should give you access to the book needed for this assignment titled “Common Sense for Professionals” by Rajesh Jugulum.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Write a 2- 3 page report covering the aspect numbered below.
1. Importance of problem formulation
– Problem definition & project objectives
2. Steps in data science(analytics) problem solving approach
– Explain basic steps & important aspects
3.Relate to topics you learnt in this course
-List topics & elaborate on them
Topics learnt in course include:
A) Data Analytic Application(Machine Learning Applications).- During this project we used analytics to assess different models in the context of a firm’s business strategy and recommended an analytical approach.
B) Business Strategy-
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
This project is all about determining a Business Strategy for the company Wawa Inc., a chain of convenience stores and gas stations with locations along the East Coast of the U.S. Wawa is exploring a contactless ordering and pick-up feature for the prepared food offerings in its stores, and is seeking guidance on if and how to deploy this capability.
PROJECT OBJECTIVES:
Use the SWOT Framework to perform a rigorous analysis of a firm’s internal and external environments and identify core competencies and sources of competitive advantage.
Make a business recommendation that demonstrates an understanding of cost and differentiation strategies and how a firm’s value chain supports and enables the pursuit of those strategies.
Apply the value chain framework to develop a targeted analytics strategy that supports broader firm objectives.
4. Describe core message of the book
-Explain the core messages of the book &how it compares with other analytics books.
I need a 300-word discussion post and 75-word peer response
Week 3 Discussion – Service Positioning versus Product Process
Please respond to the following:
Examine the role of Customer Relationship Management (CRM) in business. Determine how CRM systems can play a critical role in managing value chains.
How does LaRosa’s Pizzeria use this technology in order to improve the supply chain and value chain operations? Determine the ways this technology has helped to deliver quality to the customer. Assess the challenges that LaRosa’s Pizzeria might face when trying to implement these types of technologies.
Be sure to respond to at least one of your classmates’ posts.
Peer Response:
Melissa Wheeler
MondayOct 16 at 10:12pm
Manage Discussion Entry
Hello everyone,
Customer Relationship Management role in business by helping to manage customer interactions and improve profitability. It enables the building and management of the relationship between the customer and the company. Customer Relationship Management systems help identify the value of customers and the marketing efforts of the consumer. CRM system improves the value chain by automating various tasks like processing, customer services, and sales.
The value chain is a process in a company that adds value to its materials to produce products that are eventually sold to consumers. The supply chain represents the steps required to get the product to the customer. The value chain gives companies an advantage in the industry, and the supply chain leads to overall customer satisfaction.
Using ERP and CRM systems allows businesses to pursue both avenues. Together, both methods can help a business grow efficiently. ERP helps save money, Boost efficiency, improve decision-making and encourage collaboration.
LaRosa uses customer relationship management to help gather information and customer data to automate customer desires into its structure. LaRosa figures out what the consumer needs and understands ways to please the customers. One way is to hire and train her employees. Learn and understand technology, like what customers expect for hygiene in quality product distribution. Recruit new employees and train old staff to satisfy the expectations that could be expensive. It could be costly with the latest technology, but it will help LaRosa company grow.
Week 4 Discussion – Layouts and Approaches
Please respond to the following:
Facility Design must be integrated into and support both Job and Process Design. From the list below, which design would best fit your work environment and why? Provide a summary about how your selection applies.
Process Layout
Cellular Layout
Fixed-Position Layout
Facility Layout in Service Organizations
Designing Product Layouts
Assembly-Line Balancing
Line-Balancing Approaches
Designing Process Layouts
Workplace Design
Be sure to respond to at least one of your classmates’ posts.
Respond to Professor:
DOUGLAS BRISTOW
Sep 30, 2023Sep 30 at 10:59pm
Manage Discussion Entry
Greetings Dr. Guevarez and students,
Welcome to week 4 in this course on Operations Management (OM). This week we will be learning about and exploring Facility Design that includes the elements of job and process flow (in the design). A major component of process is determining the facility and process design (layout).
Facility layouts are an important aspect of operations management. In fast food, the idea is to be able to create a sellable finished good (hamburger, sandwich, salad etc) with quality, accuracy, and speed in mind. The layout, as we will discuss this week, is about how the facility is designed to enable customer flow into, through and out of the business. The goal is to accomplish customer satisfaction while delivering the product fast, fresh, and accurate. A company might opt for a U-shaped production line, for example, rather than a long, straight one, to allow products and workers to move more quickly from one area to another. The complexity of the tasks being performed will determine the best type of layout for kitchen/production area. The other important aspect of facility design is ensuring proper circulation and movement of the restaurant staff as well as the customers in the restaurant. The restaurant layout should be designed in a manner that allows customers to find their way inside the restaurant easily, and then to the dining area.
Operations Management is about designing, managing, and improving the set of activities that create products and services and deliver them to customers. We call these activities, the people, the resources (including technology and knowledge), and the procedures that dictate how work is organized the operating system. The basic building block of operating systems is the process. Most operating systems consist of multiple processes. A process takes inputs (in the form of raw materials, labor, capital [equipment /technology], knowledge, and energy), and creates outputs that are of greater value to customers (and, thereby, of greater value to the organization itself).
For an organization to have an effective and efficient manufacturing unit, it is important that special attention is given to facility layout. Facility layout is an arrangement of different aspects of manufacturing in an appropriate manner as to achieve desired production results. Facility layout considers available space, final product, safety of users and facility and convenience of operations. An effective facility layout ensures that there is a smooth and steady flow of production material, equipment, and manpower at minimum cost. Facility layout looks at physical allocation of space for economic activity in the plant. Therefore, main objective of the facility layout planning is to design effective workflow as to make equipment and workers more productive.
As you read from the textbook this week, there are several design options centered Operations Management and improving work flows along with efficiency. Assembly line, Fixed-Position, Process layout, and Cellular layout are just a few examples from the textbook. I am a manufacturer of finished goods within the health and wellness industry. My facility design includes assembly line, cellular and process layouts. I can complete jobs in large batches from start to finish (assembly line), isolate work into “steps” where each step is repeated multiple times to mass produce products (cellular) and even rearrange equipment/personnel to meet the needs of the product being made at that time (process). By having the capability to implement any or all of these functions of my facility design, I am able to keep my production costs lower.
References:
Carpenter, M. A., & Sanders, W. G. (2009). Strategic Management. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Heizer, J., & Render, B. (2011). Operations Management. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
After reading chapter one of Brewer and Westerman (2018), provide and defend your working definition of organizational communication. This definition should be your definition based on experience, knowledge, and the chapter content, not a replication of someone else’s definition. After providing and defending your definition, answer, in formal paragraphs, #3 and #4 Review and Discussion Questions on page 11 of Brewer and Westerman. 3. What examples of effective (or not so effective) communication have you observed in the workplace, at church, in school, or at home?4. How would you describe the communication expectations of your ideal workplace?Instructions:Your original post should be 350-400 words. Two responses to peers. Each response to peers posts should be 100-150 words.All References should be in correct APA Format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Chapter 1:
Organizational Communication
and Contextual Realities
Introduction
• Effective communication is essential to the success of
organizations
• Today’s organizational landscape increases the
potential for:
• Global reach of organizations
• Being a productive organizational employee and
leader
• Understanding human behavior within organizations
Case Study: Twitter and Social Shaming
• In 2013, Justine Sacco, senior director of corporate
communications at IAC, posted an inappropriate tweet
before she flew to Africa
• The tweet became the No. 1 worldwide trend on Twitter,
as thousands of angry tweets responded to her post
• Justine was fired from her job at IAC soon after the
incident occurred
• What are the major issues in this case?
Defining Organizational Communication
• The modern study of organizational communication dates
back to the Hawthorne studies
• Charles Redding is generally given credit as the ‘father’
of organizational communication
• According to Wofford, Gerloff, and Cummins (1977),
communication is considered a binding agent within all
social systems and subsystems
• According to the textbook authors, organizational
communication is “the study of the process of creating and
understanding through the coordination of verbal and
nonverbal communication within and between
organizations” (p. 5)
Diversity in the Workplace
• In this technological and global economy, you will likely
be working with a more diverse group of people than
did your parents, regardless of who is working in your
office building or department
• Diversity needs to be both respected and appreciated
for its power to:
• Contribute new ideas to organizations
• Understand new potential markets
• Enhance individual understanding and the overall
human condition
Organizing in a Global Marketplace
• Successful organizations embrace cultural differences
• Growth and efficiency is related to the successful
incorporation of cultural differences and creative
strategies
• Developing an understanding of culture can:
• Greatly improve workplace interactions
• improve relationships with diverse suppliers,
customers, and employees
Ethical Issues
• Ethics is an interpretation of what
is good and right
• Can vary from person to person,
department to department,
organization to organization
• Ethical issues are not only relevant
considerations at the individual
level of analysis but are also
important at higher-order levels
of analysis
Critical Thinking Questions: Ethics
How important is honesty for effective communication?
Does an organization need to be honest and ethical to be
a competent or effective organization?
Is the ultimate result of the instantaneous nature of global
communication enabled by our modern technology
creating a repressive, conservative, and conformist society?
Or do the benefits of today’s power of communication
more than offset these risks?
Task and Maintenance Roles
• Duncan (1978) defined role as, “a pattern of behavior
that is expected of a person when he or she interacts
with others” (p. 184)
• Organizations are also more effective when they attend
to both task roles and maintenance roles
• Task roles involve communication about the tasks at
hand – what needs to be accomplished
• Maintenance roles involve communication about the
relationships
• Communication is more effective when there is role
clarity, and less effective when there is role ambiguity
Forms of Communication:
Oral, Written, Non-Verbal
• Communication can take many forms; it can be oral,
written, or non-verbal
• Communication is a process
• A communication act does not occur in isolation; it is a
part of a larger context of interaction
Critical Thinking Questions: Communication
• Think about each form of communication. Can you ever
not communicate? Why is this important to consider from
an organizational perspective?
Communication Networks
• The web of interaction within the organizational
environment is also impacted by the connections – both
formal and informal – that link employees together
• In a formal chain of command, communication follows a
preplanned sequence of information flow
• Sometimes, the leader plays the key role for the entire
group
• A single strand chain of command features information
flowing in a linear pattern, with the leader as the source
• A team approach requires communication to be an allchannel process, allowing group members to communicate
across the organization freely
Communication Network Charts
Context Matters
For-Profit Organizations
• Clear structures and hierarchies, more formalized
culture
Nonprofit Organizations
• Often guided by a specific value, includes volunteers
Family Entrepreneurship
• Less formal structure and communication expectations
Government Sector
• Communication often impacted by political changes
Critical Thinking Question – Context
Matters
• In what ways might non-profit, for profit, family
entrepreneurship, and government sector organizations
differ in the way they might handle a social media issue
like Justine Sacco’s?
1-please use your own words don’t copy and paste (no plagiarism), Copy/paste the phrases from the text is not acceptable 2- Please use keyboard (don’t use handwriting) 3-All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) No pictures containing text will be accepted 4- I want answer with APA reference, References at least 5 5- The Answer should be total word as specified for each question Instructions to read the case study: “ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study Access below link to read the case study: https://www.advantive.com/case-studies/nestle-waters/ “ Nestlé Waters Unifying real-time visibility across 26 factories” case study This case study demonstrates the application of change management inside Nestle Waters Company. In addition, it discusses the company need for quality improvement which encouraged its engineers to search for alternative system to collect and analyze their data. Read the case, by using your critical thinking skills answer the following questions: Explain the driven reasons for changing the quality documentation system in the Nestle Waters. (200 – 220 words)Outline the change objectives for both Retail Manufacturing and Home and Office Manufacturing units. (200 – 220 words) How the InfinityQS® ProFicient™ system can control the operation processes? (200 – 220 words)Describe the management role in the change process?(200 – 220 words)
Analyze the document. Your analysis should consist of the following elements:
Introduction (provide a brief overview of the purpose and significance of the study)
• Explain the methodology of the study
• Research Questions
• Quantitative or Qualitative
• Instruments used
• Participants (population, sample size)
• Explain the findings
• Explain the document’s contribution to research
• Discuss what should be done to extend this research
Submit your post directly to the discussion board and be sure to provide a reference list. Also, attach the dissertation so that others can download the document and review the work. The post should be 500-800 words in length.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Walden University
College of Management and Human Potential
This is to certify that the doctoral study by
Ebony Phillips
has been found to be complete and satisfactory in all respects,
and that any and all revisions required by
the review committee have been made.
Review Committee
Dr. Elisabeth Musil, Committee Chairperson, Doctor of Business Administration Faculty
Dr. Denise Land, Committee Member, Doctor of Business Administration Faculty
Dr. Theresa Neal, University Reviewer, Doctor of Business Administration Faculty
Chief Academic Officer and Provost
Sue Subocz, Ph.D.
Walden University
2023
Abstract
Strategies to Reduce Employee Turnover in the Insurance Industry
by
Ebony Phillips
MBA, Walden University 2010
BS, Friends University, 2008
Doctoral Study Submitted in Partial Fulfillment
of the Requirements for the Degree of
Doctor of Business Administration
Walden University
April 2023
Abstract
Employee turnover continues to increase in the insurance industry because no minimum
skill or education level is required to enter the U.S. insurance industry. Insurance leaders
are concerned with reducing employee turnover, as it creates a risk to employee
productivity and profitability. Grounded in Herzberg’s two-factor theory of motivation,
the purpose of this qualitative multiple-case study was to explore strategies five insurance
leaders from central Kansas used to reduce employee turnover. Data were collected using
semistructured virtual interviews and a review of company records. Data were analyzed
using Yin’s five-step approach, and three themes emerged: (a) supportive leadership, (b)
incentives/benefits, and (c) training strategy. A key recommendation is that insurance
leaders build relationships with employees and openly communicating with employees.
The implications for positive social change include the possibility of a lower
unemployment rate, creating stability for more families, and more money circulating
within the community.
Strategies to Reduce Employee Turnover in the Insurance Industry
by
Ebony Phillips
MBA, Walden University 2010
BS, Friends University, 2008
Doctoral Study Submitted in Partial Fulfillment
of the Requirements for the Degree of
Doctor of Business Administration
Walden University
April 2023
Table of Contents
List of Tables…………………………………………………………………………………………………… iv
Section 1: Foundation of the Study ………………………………………………………………………. 1
Background of the Problem……………………………………………………………………………. 1
Problem and Purpose ……………………………………………………………………………………. 2
Population and Sampling ………………………………………………………………………………. 2
Nature of the Study ………………………………………………………………………………………. 2
Research Question ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Interview Questions ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4
Conceptual Framework …………………………………………………………………………………. 4
Operational Definitions …………………………………………………………………………………. 5
Assumptions, Limitations, and Delimitations ……………………………………………………. 6
Assumptions …………………………………………………………………………………………..6
Limitations ……………………………………………………………………………………………..6
Delimitations ………………………………………………………………………………………….6
Significance of the Study ………………………………………………………………………………. 7
Contribution to Business Practice ……………………………………………………………….7
Implications for Social Change ………………………………………………………………….8
A Review of the Professional and Academic Literature ………………………………………. 8
Literature Review Search ………………………………………………………………………….9
Herzberg’s Two Factor Theory ……………………………………………………………….. 10
Supporting and Rival Theories ………………………………………………………………… 13
i
Job Satisfaction …………………………………………………………………………………….. 18
Results of Job Dissatisfaction ………………………………………………………………….. 19
Employee Motivation …………………………………………………………………………….. 20
Employee Engagement…………………………………………………………………………… 22
Employee Turnover……………………………………………………………………………….. 25
Employee Turnover Reduction in the Insurance Industry …………………………….. 30
Transition …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 32
Section 2: The Project ………………………………………………………………………………………. 34
Purpose Statement ……………………………………………………………………………………… 34
Role of the Researcher ………………………………………………………………………………… 34
Participants ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 36
Research Method and Design ……………………………………………………………………….. 37
Research Method ………………………………………………………………………………….. 37
Research Design …………………………………………………………………………………… 38
Population and Sampling …………………………………………………………………………….. 40
Ethical Research ………………………………………………………………………………………… 42
Data Collection Instruments …………………………………………………………………………. 43
Data Collection Technique …………………………………………………………………………… 44
Data Organization Technique……………………………………………………………………….. 47
Data Analysis ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 48
Reliability and Validity ……………………………………………………………………………….. 50
Reliability ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 50
ii
Validity ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 51
Transition and Summary ……………………………………………………………………………… 52
Section 3: Application to Professional Practice and Implications for Change …………….. 54
Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 54
Presentation of the Findings …………………………………………………………………………. 54
Theme 1: Supportive Leadership ……………………………………………………………… 55
Theme 2: Incentives/Benefits Plan …………………………………………………………… 58
Theme 3: Training Strategy …………………………………………………………………….. 60
Applications to Professional Practice …………………………………………………………….. 63
Implications for Social Change …………………………………………………………………….. 64
Recommendations for Action ……………………………………………………………………….. 64
Recommendations for Further Research …………………………………………………………. 66
Reflections ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 66
Conclusion ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 68
References ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 69
Appendix: Interview Protocol ………………………………………………………………………….. 100
iii
List of Tables
Table 1. Literature Review Content ……………………………………………………………………. 10
Table 2. Emerging Themes ………………………………………………………………………………. 55
Table 3. Theme 1: Supportive Leadership …………………………………………………………… 55
Table 4. Theme 2: Incentive/Benefits Plan ………………………………………………………….. 58
Table 5. Theme 3: Training Strategy ………………………………………………………………….. 60
iv
1
Section 1: Foundation of the Study
Employee turnover has attracted researchers, practitioners, and business owners
(Arif, 2018). Organizations need to consider necessary strategies during daily operations
to avoid excessive employee turnover and retain talented employees (Wandabwa &
Makokha, 2021). Influential leaders can use good strategies to build employees, have
higher levels of employee engagement, and reduce employee turnover (Visvanathan et
al., 2018). Through this qualitative multiple case study, I interviewed insurance leaders
and managers to explore strategies to reduce employee turnover. This section includes a
discussion about the background of the problem, problem and purpose statements, nature
of the study, research question, and interview questions. Section 1 also contains a
discussion about the theory that will serve as the conceptual framework and the
operational definitions, assumptions, limitations, delimitations, the significance of the
study, and professional and academic literature review.
Background of the Problem
Losing employees with talents and knowledge harms businesses by altering their
functions (Al Mamun & Hasan, 2017; Ladson, 2019), making employee turnover a
phenomenon worthy of consideration. Turnover at any level, from tenured employees to
entry-level, negatively affects group performance (Rajan, 2019). Voluntary and
involuntary turnover negatively affect the finances of any industry.
Service industry leaders deal with employee turnover plans daily (Ferreira et al.,
2017). Since no minimum skill or education level is required to enter the U.S. insurance
industry, there is already a potential threat to the growth of insurance companies (Martin,
2
2016). Leaders should strive to reduce employee turnover to run a steady organization
and remain competitive. Leaders require successful retention strategies to prevent the cost
associated with staffing, teaching, and placement of new workers (Al Mamun & Hasan,
2017). Further study on employee turnover could enhance awareness of how insurance
leaders can apply useful tactics for lowering employee turnover.
Problem and Purpose
The specific business problem was that some insurance leaders lacked strategies
to reduce employee turnover. Therefore, this qualitative multiple case study was
conducted to explore insurance leaders’ strategies to reduce employee turnover. The
participants were five central Kansas insurance companies’ insurance leaders who have
successfully reduced employee turnover.
Population and Sampling
The target population consisted of five purposively sampled central Kansas
insurance companies’ insurance leaders who have successfully reduced employee
turnover. I interviewed insurance leaders using a semistructured interview process to
stimulate their lived experience of successfully reducing employee turnover. I also
reviewed public company documents for relevant information.
Nature of the Study
The three study methods are qualitative, quantitative, and mixed method (Park &
Park, 2016). A qualitative approach is acceptable when researchers can explore the
phenomenon in their natural setting (Saunders et al., 2016). A qualitative method was
proper for this study because it allowed me to explore the research problem in the
3
participant’s natural environment. In quantitative research, the researcher uses numeric
collection techniques, such as questionnaires, surveys, or data analysis procedures, such
as graphs or statistics (Saunders et al., 2016). I did not select a quantitative method, as I
did not intend to use surveys or statistical relationships to examine a relationship between
variables. A mixed-method research design includes quantitative and qualitative
methodology and logical procedures to understand a research problem (Manzoor, 2020).
This method was not selected as the plan does not use both approaches to understand the
phenomenon.
I chose a multiple case study design for this research. A case study is a qualitative
research design that scholars use to investigate and understand complex issues in a realworld setting (Smith, 2018a). I selected a case study design over other qualitative
research designs, such as ethnography and phenomenology research. The goal was to
explore and understand complex issues in real-world settings. Ethnography involves
studying a group’s culture or social world (Saunders et al., 2016). I did not choose
ethnographic design as I did not focus on the cultural aspects of insurance companies. A
researcher who conducts a phenomenological study focuses on participants’ recollections
and interpretations of lived experiences (Kordes & Demsar, 2018). A phenomenological
method would not serve this study’s purpose because it does not pertain to participants’
recollections and interpretations of their lived experiences.
Research Question
The study’s research question was “What strategies do insurance leaders use to
reduce employee turnover?”
4
Interview Questions
1. What techniques have you used to reduce voluntary employee turnover in
your organization?
2. How did your employees respond to those strategies?
3. Based on your organization’s experience, how has employee turnover
affected your organization as a whole?
4. What strategies were most effective in reducing turnover?
5. What strategies, if any, were least effective in reducing employee turnover
in your organization?
6. What techniques have you used to monitor employees’ reasons for leaving
your organization?
7. What additional information would you like to share regarding your
strategies to reduce employee turnover?
Conceptual Framework
The theory that served as the conceptual framework of this study was Herzberg’s
two-factor theory. Herzberg (2003) introduced the two-factor theory, also known as the
motivator-hygiene, in 1959. Herzberg et al. (1959) developed the theory to understand
why employees become dissatisfied or satisfied with their jobs. Herzberg et al. asserted
that motivators are aspects of the job that provide workers with positive satisfaction,
which arises from essential employment conditions such as recognition, achievement, or
personal growth. The eight motivators included in the theory are (a) a sense of personal
achievement, (b) status, (c) recognition, (d) promotion, (e) growth, (f) opportunity for
5
advancement, (g) responsibility, and (h) challenging work. Herzberg (1987) mentioned
that implementing these eight motivating factors promotes high motivation, high
satisfaction, and strong job commitment (Grigaliunas & Herzberg, 1971). Hygiene
factors are aspects of the job that influence workers to do their jobs, such as incentives or
punishment threats (Herzberg, 2003). The five hygiene factors are (a) company policy,
(b) income, (c) benefits, (d) workplace conditions (e) personal relationships (Harder &
Hughes, 2022). Herzberg’s two-factor theory provided a lens to explore the participants’
approach and experiences to improve employee turnover.
Operational Definitions
Dissatisfiers: Dissatisfiers, also known as hygiene factors, are aspects of the job
that influence workers to do their jobs (Herzberg, 2003).
Employee productivity: Employee productivity is a person’s performance on the
job or the entire organization’s output (Lohela-Karlsson et al., 2022).
Motivation: Motivation makes an individual act and behave a certain way
(Maryani et al., 2021).
Satisfiers: Satisfiers, also known as motivators, are aspects of the job that
provides workers positive satisfaction (Herzberg et al., 1959).
Turnover intention: The turnover intention is employees’ willingness to leave
their existing position or company (Lazzari et al., 2022).
6
Assumptions, Limitations, and Delimitations
Assumptions
An assumption is what the scholar believes to be accurate but cannot verify
(Levitt et al., 2021). I made two assumptions. The first assumption was that the study
members would answer the research questions truthfully. The researcher cannot verify
the responses’ truthfulness since qualitative research is open-ended, leaving the
participants more control over the integrity of the data collected (Das, 2021). The second
assumption was that those interview responses would provide helpful information to help
resolve the underlying research question.
Limitations
Limitations are influences, shortcomings, or conditions out of the researcher’s
control that could affect the study’s outcome (Morgado et al., 2018). The first limitation
was that one of the data collection sources for this study was self-reported data, such as
interviews. Using interviews as a data collection source created an area for improvement
for the study, as the participants might need to provide more accurate information that
could positively affect the findings’ dependability and credibility. The second limitation
was transferability in that the research study findings may not transfer to other insurance
agencies. Results from qualitative studies are not transferable to other industries (Smith,
2018a).
Delimitations
Delimitations are elements of a research study that limits the research scope
(Theofanidis & Fountouki, 2018). In this study, there were several delimitations. The first
7
delimitation was the industry type. I explored the effective strategies of leaders in the
insurance industry. Another delimitation of the study was the location. The selected
companies were in central Kansas. The third delimitation pertained to participants who
implemented successful strategies for reducing employee turnover.
Significance of the Study
The study’s significance was rooted in identifying successful approaches to lessen
employee turnover, which may lead to improved organizational performance and
contribution to positive social change. Reducing employee turnover is critical because
losing skilled employees disrupts organizational performance, both directly and indirectly
(De Winne et al., 2018). Reducing employee turnover is crucial to an organization’s
longevity because keeping skilled employees help ensure profitability (Kazimoto, 2016).
A profitable company may bring positive social change by investing in the community
through payments, gifts, and employment openings.
Contribution to Business Practice
The study focused on recognizing strategies that may reduce employee turnover
in the insurance industry. Organizations with a high employee turnover rate might have
productivity challenges (De Winne et al., 2018). The study’s findings may contribute to
business practice because they reveal strategies for reducing employee turnover and
increasing profitability, productivity, and customer satisfaction. Productivity, customer
satisfaction, savings costs, and profitability increase when organizations minimize staff
turnover and absenteeism (Kazimoto, 2016). The findings could also contribute to leaders
8
of other businesses with strategies that may mitigate financial losses because of the cost
of turnover, such as new hiring, advertising, selecting, and training new employees.
Implications for Social Change
The implications for positive social change exist because leaders can apply
strategies suitable for reducing employee turnover. Businesses can create opportunities
such as sustainable income and job creation that encourage social change for the people
they serve (Steiner & Atterton, 2015). Decreasing the turnover rates could reduce
unemployment, creating more stable communities since employees may have a
sustainable income to spend in their local communities. Therefore, organizations in the
local area may improve the communities and environment by creating more jobs and
activities in the local area for positive social change.
A Review of the Professional and Academic Literature
This qualitative multiple case study was focused on practical strategies insurance
leaders used to reduce employee turnover. Researchers perform literature reviews to
locate and explore the diverse perspectives and themes related to the study topic (Ali et
al., 2022). This study’s overreaching research question was “What strategies do insurance
leaders use to reduce employee turnover?” The literature review included employee
turnover in the insurance industry and other organizations in other sectors. This literature
review contains the conceptual framework and other rival theories. Primary themes from
the literature on employee turnover included in this review are employee turnover,
potential causes of employee turnover, the effect of employee turnover on the
organization’s success, and several known strategies to reduce employee turnover.
9
Literature Review Search
The literature review involved conducting content searches using the Walden
University Library and Google Scholar. I searched for peer-reviewed journal articles and
books on employee turnover in the following databases: Business Source Complete,
Academic Search Complete, Dissertation and Thesis at Walden University, ProQuest,
SAGE, Google Scholar, U.S. Government agency websites, and search engines. In my
database searches, I used the following key terms: Herzberg’s two-factor theory,
employee turnover, employee turnover strategies, retention strategies, and employee
turnover in the insurance industry. I used a variety of sources, including peer-reviewed
journal articles, books, and government websites. The literature included 194 references,
of which 182 were peer-reviewed articles, and 129 were published within the past 5 years
(2019–2023). The literature also included six books, three government websites, and five
non-peer-reviewed articles (see Table 1).
10
Table 1
Literature Review Content
Literature review content
Total
5 Years
%>5 Years
Peer-reviewed articles
190
50
140
74%
Books
6
4
2
33%
Government websites
3
1
2
67%
Non-peer-reviewed articles
4
1
3
75%
Total sources by year
203
56
147
72%
I started my research by exploring insurance leaders’ strategies to reduce
employee turnover. I researched theories that involved motivation and job satisfaction. Of
the recommended theories, Herzberg et al. (1959) was the theory that related closely to
the conceptual framework for this research study. Other motivational theories included
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory and job embeddedness theory.
Herzberg’s Two Factor Theory
To better understand the research question, I used Herzberg’s two-factor theory as
the study’s conceptual framework. I also used Herzberg’s theory to see how workers’
satisfaction related to achievement, growth, and work quality (Herzberg et al., 2010).
Researchers use Herzberg’s theory to explore strategies for insurance leaders to decrease
11
employee turnover (Robinson, 2020). Researchers use Herzberg’s theory to explore
employees’ motivation to work.
Herzberg’s theory consists of two factors: motivation and hygiene factors.
Motivation factors are associated with satisfiers, and hygiene factors are associated with
dissatisfiers (Artaya et al., 2021). Understanding the two factors of Herzberg’s theory
may help explain why employees leave a job. These factors, intrinsic/motivation, and
extrinsic/hygiene, help leaders understand employee behavior (Riyanto et al., 2021). The
intrinsic (motivation) factors, also known as satisfiers, are components of the job that
positively affect the employees’ level of satisfaction and include achievement,
recognition, growth, responsibility, and an opportunity for why advancement (Herzberg
et al., 1959). Motivation factors can enhance motivation, but the absence of motivation
factors does not mean dissatisfaction (Artaya et al., 2021). Motivating factors include
achievement, responsibility, advancement, recognition, autonomy, promotion, and work
(Kok et al., 2018).
The second factor in Herzberg’s theory is the hygiene factor. Hygiene factors, or
dissatisfiers, relate to working conditions, salary, benefits, job security, quality of
supervision, relationship with peers, company policy, and work-life balance. The absence
of hygiene factors could cause employees to dislike the organization (Lee et al., 2022).
Hygiene factors are necessary, although it is not enough to create employee satisfaction
(Kok et al., 2018). Motivation factors affect long-term job satisfaction, and hygiene
factors affect short-term pleasure (Herzberg et al., 1959).
12
Further, the performance of an employee develops from physiological and
psychological satisfaction. The physiological aspect relates to a need for monetary
rewards to employees in the workplace, and the psychological need relates to acceptance,
empathy, and achievement (Kumar, 2019). An employee’s physiological needs
correspond to extrinsic factors, and an employee’s psychological needs relate to intrinsic
factors (Herzberg et al., 1959). Employees who are satisfied with their job are more likely
to meet job demands (Paais & Pattiruhu, 2020). As the conceptual framework for this
study, Herzberg’s two-factor theory provided a lens to explore participants’ approaches
and experiences to improve employee turnover.
Criticisms Against the Two-Factor Theory
Herzberg’s’ two-factor theory has worked in most cases, yet there is criticism as
some might not agree with how the theory works. According to Yadav (2019), the theory
has several complaints. Yadav identified that Herzberg assumed that satisfiers are the
same for all people. According to researchers, the two-factor theory cannot explain the
similarities between motivation and satisfaction. The methodology, according to
researchers, is biased because the interviewers reported exceptionally good or horrible
experiences. The theory’s development included accountants and engineers, making the
study findings inconclusive from other fields (Ozsoy, 2019). Most studies I have
reviewed revealed that Herzberg et al.’s (1959) two-factor theory is often used as the
framework in studies about turnover.
13
Supporting and Rival Theories
This section will cover three theories I considered but did not choose as my
study’s conceptual framework. My analysis focused on how motivation and satisfaction
affect employee turnover. Researchers use Maslow’s theory, job embeddedness, and
expectancy of motivation as the framework for studies on employee turnover often but
not over how motivating and satisfying factors affect the employee turnover of an
organization.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Theory
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory is another theory that researchers use to
understand employee turnover. Maslow (1943) noted that managers only sometimes try
to satisfy the employees’ needs by reducing employee turnover. Nevertheless, there is an
association between employee motivation and the leader’s adaptation to the employees’
changing needs to keep the employees engaged (Zhao & Sheng, 2019). Maslow’s theory
identifies five needs to help reduce employee turnover. Starting at the bottom, the five
needs identified in a pyramidal form are physiological/basic, safety/security, social/love,
esteem, and self-actualization (Maslow, 1943). Maslow suggested that as lower-level
needs are satisfied, the higher-level needs take over as motivating forces (Hardin, 2020).
As the needs of the pyramid are complete, a new condition replaces the one that has been
satisfied (Djallel & Rahim, 2020). The physiological groups include food, air, water, and
shelter (Maslow, 1943). The second level, safety/security, means a person is free from
harm or threats (Maslow). The next level is the need for social/love, which involves
belonging, associating with others, friendship, and affection (Maslow). The fourth need is
14
esteem, which consists of others’ appreciation, respect, and approval (Maslow). Lastly,
the pyramid’s tip is self-actualization (Maslow), which includes developing to the fullest
of one’s potential.
To enable employees to meet their full potential, employers must understand
which hierarchy of needs an employee belongs to (Kuranchie-Mensah & AmponsahTawiah, 2016). Both Maslow’s and Herzberg’s theories suggest that motivation depends
on certain factors essential in reducing employee turnover (Essel, 2019). Although both
theories relate to motivation and how the satisfaction of needs helps reduce employee
turnover, Maslow’s is unsuitable for this study; leaders cannot control employees’ needs
to motivate them not to leave. Unlike Maslow’s theory and Herzberg, job embeddedness
theory explains why employees stay in an organization.
Job Embeddedness Theory
Job embeddedness theory is another theory that explains how to reduce employee
turnover. The job embeddedness theory explains why employees stay in organizations
(Fuchs, 2022). Job embeddedness offers an understanding of the factors that keep
individuals from withdrawing (Qian et al., 2022). Job embeddedness is one strategy
business leaders adopt to inspire workers to continue in an organization (Burrows et al.,
2022). Job embeddedness is a collection of different forces that keep employees in their
organization (Alola et al., 2019). Job embeddedness consists of three dimensions (a) link,
(b) fit, and (c) sacrifice, which are significant on and off the job (Ampofo & Karatepe,
2022; Liu, 2018). On-the-job embeddedness is related to employee performance and
15
turnover, and off-the-job embeddedness relates to influences outside the workplace that
might lead to employee turnover (Porter et al., 2019).
The three dimensions of the theory are essential for the theory to work. The first
dimension in the job embeddedness theory links. Links can be formal or informal
between employees and colleagues, teams, and jobs (Gonzalez, 2016; Liu, 2018). Study
findings show that the more connections or links an employee has, the greater the sense
of attachment, promoting employee retention and reducing employee turnover while
increasing employee performance (Liu, 2018). Employees with strong relationships with
their teammates or associates might continue to work for the organization (Mohammed,
2020). Additionally, employees engaged in the area they work or live in are not prone to
leave their current job (Ayuningtyas et al., 2020). Community links or an employee’s
connection with community members, programs, and cultural relations can influence an
employee to stay in an organization (Faisal, 2022a). The different links can help
employees strengthen their relationships at work and in the community.
The second dimension in the job embeddedness theory is fit. Fit is an employee’s
closeness or comfort level with the company and its atmosphere (Liu, 2018). An
environment that provides comfort and compatibility can help an employee stay at an
organization. An employee’s fit to an organization relates to attachment; a better fit
makes it more likely to feel professionally and personally attached to the organization
(Liu, 2018). Employees who are fitter with their job and organization become more
attached (Mohammed, 2020). Organizational fit refers to how employees feel about their
organization’s compatibility (Faisal, 2022b). Community fit also
This assignment will help you to develop a well-organized and effective project proposal.
Case Scenario
Aspire International Corporation is a multinational corporation based in Sweden. Aspire is now looking to
diversify its portfolio by expanding its business through the following three projects:
1. Aspire Hometown Food Market, an all organic natural food store.
2. Aspire Pharmacy and Village Market, a pharmacy and a convenience store.
3. Aspire Fitness Club and Spa, a membership-based fitness and health center.
You are the lead project manager who has been asked to choose one of the three projects. You need to
create a project proposal that encompasses the project manager job from start to finish. You have a starting
budget of €2 million euros and will be allocated with more funds if the project requires it.
Assignment Instructions
1. Create a project proposal for Aspire Corp. which must include the following: (65%)
a. Project Budget
b. Risk Analysis
c. Projected Competition Times
d. Quality Control Measures
e. Team Member Breakdown
f. Additional Funds Request (if needed)
2. Thailand is planning to establish a high-speed railway to connect Bangkok to Chiang Mai in the
North of Thailand. They are negotiating with a Japanese company to build this railway, however, the
prime minister, Gen. Prayut wants the project to be cost efficient and does not want the train tickets
to exceed 1,200 baht. The estimated cost of this project is 100 billion baht. You are asked as a
project consultant whether this project is viable or not. Create a project viability analysis, the
proposal must include the following: (35%)
a. State if you believe that the railway should be built.
b. What are the additional ways for the proposed railway to earn income?
Requirements
1. 3,500 – 4,000 words with APA Format – Titles, Sub-titles, Table of Content and References are NOT included in the word count.
2. Double-spaced (2.0) or One and a Half (1.5) spaced
3. 12 pt. Times New Roman font
4. Page Number (footer, right bottom corner)
5. 4 major sections: Table of Content, Title Page, Main Body, References
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MGT580: Project Management
Module Assignment: Project Proposal
The Purpose and Context
This assignment will help you to develop a well-organized and effective project proposal.
Case Scenario
Aspire International Corporation is a multinational corporation based in Sweden. Aspire is now looking to
diversify its portfolio by expanding its business through the following three projects:
1. Aspire Hometown Food Market, an all organic natural food store.
2. Aspire Pharmacy and Village Market, a pharmacy and a convenience store.
3. Aspire Fitness Club and Spa, a membership-based fitness and health center.
You are the lead project manager who has been asked to choose one of the three projects. You need to
create a project proposal that encompasses the project manager job from start to finish. You have a starting
budget of €2 million euros and will be allocated with more funds if the project requires it.
Assignment Instructions
1. Create a project proposal for Aspire Corp. which must include the following: (65%)
a. Project Budget
b. Risk Analysis
c. Projected Competition Times
d. Quality Control Measures
e. Team Member Breakdown
f. Additional Funds Request (if needed)
2. Thailand is planning to establish a high-speed railway to connect Bangkok to Chiang Mai in the
North of Thailand. They are negotiating with a Japanese company to build this railway, however, the
prime minister, Gen. Prayut wants the project to be cost efficient and does not want the train tickets
to exceed 1,200 baht. The estimated cost of this project is 100 billion baht. You are asked as a
project consultant whether this project is viable or not. Create a project viability analysis, the
proposal must include the following: (35%)
a. State if you believe that the railway should be built.
b. What are the additional ways for the proposed railway to earn income?
Requirements
1. 3,500 – 4,000 words with APA Format
2. Double-spaced (2.0) or One and a Half (1.5) spaced
3. 12 pt. Times New Roman font
4. Page Number (footer, right bottom corner)
5. 4 major sections: Table of Content, Title Page, Main Body, References
AFM 131 ONLINE – Introduction to Business in North America
Fall 2023
MIDTERM ASSIGNMENT
PEST and SWOT analyses
In the first half of AFM 131 ONLINE, we’ve examined the business environment, tools to analyze
a business, and explored various company examples through course readings and activities.
This assignment gives you the opportunity to take a closer look at a company of your choice to
assess how they’re impacted by the business environment.
Your task
In your individual assignment submission, select a company and integrate knowledge from
professional sources (unit readings, professional websites, etc.) to discuss the following:
• Part 1) Conduct a PEST analysis for the company
o
•
Helpful tip – You can review PEST in Unit 3: Scanning the business environment (Section 2 – PEST)
Part 2) For the same company, conduct a SWOT analysis
o
Helpful tip – You can review SWOT in Unit 3: Scanning the business environment (Section 4 –
Building on your toolkit to assess an organization: SWOT)
Reminders on completing and submitting your assignment
Make sure to review the Midterm Assignment description page in LEARN for an overview of
this assignment, grading, and submission details.
To complete your assignment, you can use the template on page 2 of this document as a start
to organize your responses. As stated in LEARN, use 12-point font, 1.5 or 2 pt spacing, and
reasonable margins. The body of your paper may be no more than 5 pages in length. In addition
to the 5 pages of analyses, you can have additional pages with your references in APA style
format.
You can upload your completed assignment to the Midterm Assignment dropbox found in
LEARN at Submit → Dropbox. Per the Course Schedule, the Midterm Assignment is due on
Friday, October 27 at 11:55pm.
We look forward to seeing how you can showcase what you’ve learned so far in AFM 131
ONLINE as you integrate your knowledge to analyze the business environment ☺
AFM 131 ONLINE – Introduction to Business in North America
Fall 2023 Midterm Assignment – Submission Template
Name:
Student ID#:
NOTE – For each section, you can structure your responses in paragraphs or point form. If using point form, make
sure your thoughts are fully expressed.
Company: (Name and brief description of what they do)
1) PEST Analysis
2) SWOT Analysis
Using information from the web like FEDSTATS and the U.S. Census Bureau, predict the population of the U.S. for the years 2030, and 2060 and specifically answer the following questions:a) What is the demographic makeup of the US in these years? b) What is the age dispersion in the US in these years and c) What industries do you see benefiting/losing within the US because of these population figures.Minimum two page essay. Minimum two reference sources with corresponding citations.All papers must be written in APA style with cover page, topic headings (to identify sections of paper), reference page and properly listed reference sources.
The objective of this assignment is to design a comprehensive governance structure for the chosen company-BlackRock based on defined parameters. The governance structure should address the organization’s leadership, decision-making processes, roles and responsibilities, and accountability mechanisms, etc.
Part 1.Describe the Management Leadership and Board of Directors acceptance of ESG
Part 2.Define ESG leadership roles and responsibilities: ESG cross-business/cross-functional working groups/committees, ESG Management committee(s) and Board sub-committee(s)
Part 3.Describe how to integrate social and environmental issues into business operations with positive impact on society, brand reputation, customers, employees, and investors
ONLY Part 3 NEEDED!!!
Chosen company: Black rock
Unformatted Attachment Preview
ESG and ERM
Session 6
Agenda
Assignment #2
Corporate Governance Factor
•
ESG Governance
•
Board of Directors’ Role
•
Board of Directors Considerations
•
Executive Management’s Role
•
Corporate Social Responsibility
•
Exercise – Assignment #3
2
Assignment #2
Each group presents Assignment #2 results.
Group 1: BP
Group 2: BlackRock
Group 3: Boeing
Group 4: Hilton
Group 5: Unilever
3
ESG Governance
A proper ESG Governance structure is required for an effective ESG program.
•
Regulators have issued guidance on ESG governance
−
FDIC Principles for Climate-Related Financial Risk Management: “The expectations is for
Boards of Directors and senior management of financial institutions to develop and implement
sound governance frameworks that appropriately incorporate the assessment and
management of climate related financial risks”
−
The Principles are intended for the largest financial institutions, those with over $100 billion
in total consolidated assets.
4
ESG Governance
•
Weaknesses in how financial institutions identify, measure, monitor, and control the financial risks
associated with a changing climate could adversely affect a financial institution’s safety and
soundness, as well as the overall financial system.
•
The principles would provide a high-level framework for the safe and sound management of
exposures to climate-related financial risks, consistent with the existing risk management
framework described in existing FDIC rules and guidance.
•
The principles will help financial institution management make progress toward addressing key
questions as they consider incorporating climate-related financial risks into their institutions’
risk management frameworks.
•
The FDIC encourages financial institutions to consider climate-related financial risks in a manner that
allows them to prudently meet the financial services needs of their communities.
5
ESG Governance Framework
A successful ESG Governance framework includes the following key components:
•
Management leadership and Board of Directors acceptance of ESG issues
•
Defined ESG leadership roles and responsibilities
•
Established ESG cross-business / cross-functional working groups / committees
•
Defined ESG Management committee(s) and Board sub-committee(s)
6
ESG Governance Structure
•
ESG Governance includes Board of Directors and Executive Management.
− Board of Directors
➢ Strategy
➢ Decision Making
➢ Oversight
− Executive Management
➢ Implementation
➢ Monitoring
➢ Escalation
➢ Reporting
•
ESG Governance includes Corporate Social Responsibility
•
Long-term stakeholder interests
− Accountability
− Transparency
7
Board of Directors’ Role (1 of 2)
The Board of Directors should consider:
•
Triple Bottom Line (Profit, People, Planet)
•
Sustainability: operating a business in a way that meets the economic, social and
environmental needs of the present without compromising the ability of future
generations to meet their own needs
•
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR): corporate engagement, lowering carbon
footprint, charities
•
Social License to Operate (SLO): perception by stakeholders that a business or
industry is acting in a way that is fair, appropriate, and deserving of trust
8
Board of Directors’ Role (2 of 2)
The Board’s key responsibilities / areas to be aware of include:
•
Define ESG goals that align with business strategy
•
Incorporate ESG into the overall Board agenda
•
Provide oversight for ESG program
•
Communicate with stakeholders on ESG priorities
•
Monitor compliance with regulatory requirements
•
Assess ESG program maturity
9
Board of Directors Considerations (1 of 4)
In order to effectively manage the ESG program expectations, the Board of Directors
should consider the following:
•
•
Define ESG Governance structure
−
Board responsibilities
−
Committee responsibilities
−
Reporting process
Establish ESG Management structure
−
Leadership role / responsibilities
−
Management committee responsibilities
−
Reporting process
10
Board of Directors Considerations (2 of 4)
In order to effectively manage the ESG program expectations, the Board of Directors
should consider the following:
•
Integrate ESG into business strategy
−
ESG Strategy (examples include reducing greenhouse gas emissions, creating more
responsible and sustainable supply chains, implementing climate adaptation measures and
adopting a circular economy model)
−
Company culture (environment a company creates for its employees through programs,
behaviors and hiring processes guiding principles for business decisions, actions and company
behaviors)
•
−
Company values (guiding principles for business decisions, actions and company behaviors
−
Employee communications
Incorporate ESG risk into ERM
−
Board risk infrastructure
−
ESG risks
11
Board of Directors Considerations (3 of 4)
In order to effectively manage the ESG program expectations, the Board of Directors
should consider the following:
•
•
Assess ESG program
−
ESG Strategy
−
ESG goals
−
ESG reporting / disclosures
Monitor compliance with ESG standards
−
International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB)
−
Climate Disclosure Standards Board (CDSB)
−
Task Force on Climate related Financial Disclosures (TCFD)
−
Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB)
−
Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG)
−
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI)
12
Board of Directors Considerations (4 of 4)
In order to effectively manage the ESG program expectations, the Board of Directors
should consider the following:
•
Define and monitor ESG disclosure
−
ESG disclosure strategy (what? how? and why)
−
ESG program assurance (service that qualified and independent professionals provide to
assess the quality of the ESG information reported; limited vs reasonable assurance)
−
ESG reporting and disclosures
➢ ESG processes and controls (who oversees the reporting process?)
➢ ESG risks / Corruption risks
➢ Cybersecurity
➢ Corporate ethics (principles that guide decision-making)
➢ Corporate culture
➢ Environmental matters
13
Executive Management’s Role
Executive Management plays a key role in executing the ESG program.
•
Implement the ESG program
•
Provide ESG training and awareness
•
Hire ESG professionals
•
Implement DEIA initiatives
•
Focus on innovation
•
Monitor and report on ESG program implementation plan, status, risks and issues
•
Embed ESG related risks into the enterprise ERM framework and risk assessment
process and controls
•
Establish Chief Sustainability Officer role (if needed)
14
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)
Integration of social and environmental issues into business operations with
positive impact on society.
•
Brand reputation / Customers
•
Employees
•
Investors
15
Exercise – Assignment #3
Design governance structure for case study company.
16
Homework
•
Readings
–
•
Environmental social governance – Chapters 2,3, pp.15-50 (35 pages)
Case Study
–
Each group to submit Assignment #3 in Canvas: One Day Prior to Session 7
17
Thank you
Saha, S., Beach, M. C., & Cooper, L. A. (2008). Patient centeredness, cultural competence and healthcare quality. Journal of the National Medical Association, 100(11), 1275–1285. Retrieved from https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC28245…
From the South University Online Library, read the following:
From Human Ability to Ethical Principle: An Intercultural Perspective on Autonomy
Before beginning work on this assignment, please review the expanded grading rubric for specific instructions relating to content and formatting.
In this assignment, you will analyze the concept of diversity, autonomy, and bioethics.
There exists a crossroads between diversity, autonomy, and bioethics, which must be identified and respected. The enigma of patient-centered care exercising patient autonomy with an overlay of cultural diversity and bioethics is highly complex. The right choice rests within the patient, and the health professional must provide the necessary information to allow the patient to make the best suitable choice based on his or her personal values.
This assignment will require you to read the articles listed below and prepare a three- to five-page response highlighting the challenges of diversity, autonomy, and bioethics for the healthcare professional and a best practice approach to how healthcare delivery can best accommodate the diverse population of the United States.
From the Internet, read the following:
Hanssen, I. (2004). From human ability to ethical principle: An intercultural perspective on autonomy. Medicine, Health Care and Philosophy, Nursing Ethics, 7(3), 269–279.
Saha, S., Beach, M. C., & Cooper, L. A. (2008). Patient centeredness, cultural competence and healthcare quality. Journal of the National Medical Association, 100(11), 1275–1285. Retrieved from https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC28245…
To support your work, use your course and textbook readings and also use the South University Online Library. As in all assignments, cite your sources in your work and provide references for the citations in APA format.
Submission Details:
Submit this topic as a 3- to 5-page Microsoft Word document. Use APA standards for citations and references.
Cite a minimum of three outside peer-reviewed sources to support your assertions and save it as SU_HCM3046_W4_Project_LastName_FirstName. Submit the document to the Submissions Area by the due date assigned.
Cite any sources using correct APA format on a separate page.
Please identify three most important lessons learned from this course, and explain how you will apply them at your current workplace or your long-term career.
DQ2
Choose one of the following for your main post:
Compare and contrast strategic planning with managerial, operational, and disaster planning.
Explain the interrelationships between planning, organizing, directing, controlling, and leading.
Compare and contrast specialized management theories.
The Consultative Report (per team) must be in the
range of 2,000 words in length excluding references.
You must reference using the APA referencing style.
Reflective Piece: A further 300 – 500 words reflection
paper should be submitted per student.
A. on your experience and learning in this exercise
and how this may be applied in your own organisation.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
sl
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Quarter
Sep-16 $
Dec-16 $
Mar-17 $
Jun-17 $
Sep-17 $
Dec-17 $
Mar-18 $
Jun-18 $
Sep-18 $
Dec-18 $
Mar-19 $
Jun-19 $
Sep-19 $
Dec-19 $
Mar-20 $
Jun-20 $
Sep-20 $
Dec-20 $
Mar-21 $
Jun-21 $
Sep-21 $
Dec-21 $
Mar-22 $
Jun-22 $
Sep-22 $
Revenue
Research and Development
Expenses
Operational Expenses
3,290,188.00
3,477,541.00
3,636,635.00
3,785,464.00
3,984,859.00
4,285,755.00
4,700,856.00
4,907,270.00
4,999,374.00
5,186,841.00
5,520,992.00
5,923,116.00
6,244,905.00
6,467,434.00
6,767,691.00
7,148,286.00
7,435,637.00
7,644,442.00
8,163,282.00
8,341,777.00
8,483,467.00
8,709,318.00
8,867,767.00
9,188,384.02
9,451,995.60
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
297,506.00
305,912.00
333,871.00
342,484.00
330,223.00
347,132.00
382,310.00
399,095.00
408,620.00
431,789.00
472,764.00
483,233.00
479,776.00
509,376.00
553,817.00
535,045.00
553,802.00
586,936.00
625,207.00
637,321.00
663,887.00
747,470.00
757,530.00
719,086.55
738,210.38
91,861.00
93,532.00
108,943.00
122,317.00
117,324.00
122,459.00
144,612.00
161,524.00
178,628.00
185,530.00
211,952.00
234,657.00
243,174.00
264,586.00
262,087.00
287,236.00
281,624.00
285,539.00
307,196.00
344,845.00
331,790.00
407,790.00
407,928.00
390,525.20
404,050.51
Total Number of
Employees
Total Number of Paid
Memberships
5,339.76
5,700.00
5,888.37
6,084.29
6,288.06
6,500.00
6,903.41
7,336.40
7,801.16
8,300.00
8,605.31
8,923.38
9,254.76
9,600.00
9,793.38
9,991.11
10,193.28
10,400.00
10,842.73
11,306.31
11,791.72
12,300.00
12,832.22
12,721.29
13,048.51
93,280.00
99,090.00
104,360.00
109,040.00
114,020.00
120,640.00
128,900.00
134,350.00
140,420.00
149,260.00
158,860.00
161,560.00
168,330.00
177,090.00
192,860.00
202,950.00
205,150.00
213,660.00
217,640.00
219,180.00
223,560.00
231,840.00
231,640.00
246,223.60
252,932.22
Revenue
Mean
Standard Error
Median
Mode
Standard Deviation
Sample Variance
Kurtosis
Skewness
Range
Minimum
Maximum
Sum
Count
Confidence Level(95.0%)
Research an
6264531.065
398235.1298
6244905
#N/A
1991175.649
3.96478E+12
-1.372044597
0.059877942
6161807.6
3290188
9451995.6
156613276.6
25
821916.9116
Research and Development Expenses
Mean
505696.1171
Standard Error
29701.21813
Median
483233
Mode
#N/A
Standard Deviation
148506.0906
Sample Variance
22054058959
Kurtosis
-1.133171708
Skewness
0.288192577
Range
460024
Minimum
297506
Maximum
757530
Sum
12642402.93
Count
25
Confidence Level(95.0%) 61300.30137
Operational Expenses
Mean
Standard Error
Median
Mode
Standard Deviation
Sample Variance
Kurtosis
Skewness
Range
Minimum
Maximum
Sum
Count
Confidence Level(95.0%)
239668.3884
20939.94427
243174
#N/A
104699.7213
10962031647
-1.167072438
0.180073029
316067
91861
407928
5991709.711
25
43217.92085
Total Number of Employees
Mean
Standard Error
Median
Mode
Standard Deviation
Sample Variance
Kurtosis
Skewness
Range
Minimum
Maximum
Sum
Count
Confidence Level(95.0%)
Number of Employees
9109.81778
487.8003651
9254.761947
#N/A
2439.001825
5948729.904
-1.190233755
0.056374707
7708.753803
5339.761007
13048.51481
227745.4445
25
1006.770472
Total Number of Paid Memberships
Mean
Standard Error
Median
Mode
Standard Deviation
Sample Variance
Kurtosis
Skewness
Range
Minimum
Maximum
Sum
Count
Confidence Level(95.0%)
171873.4326
10128.62044
168330
#N/A
50643.1022
2564723800
-1.391307965
-0.0249023
159652.2154
93280
252932.2154
4296835.815
25
20904.44516
Metrics
Total
Revenue
$ 156,613,276.62 $
Research and Development Expenses
$
12,642,402.93 $
Operational Expenses
$
5,991,709.71 $
Total Number of Employees
227,745
Total Number of Paid Memberships
4,296,836
Operating Profit
$ 137,979,163.98
Mean
6,264,531.06
505,696.12
239,668.39
9,110
171,873
$
$
$
Median
6,244,905.00
483,233.00
243,174.00
9,255
168,330
Task: increase revenue by 20%
Current revenue:
$
Target revenue:
$
9,451,995.60
11,342,394.72
Model 1 – Increase Operational expenses
General and administrative expenses
Intercept
Operational Expenses
$
Revenue
$
1,763,636.47
18.78 $
510,060
11,342,395
510,060 in general expenses to increase revenue by 20%
$
Model 2 – Increase total number of employees
Total number of employees
Intercept
Total number of employees
-$
Revenue
$
1,123,137.66
810.96
15,371.39
11,342,395
15,371 employees to increase revenue by 20%
Model 3 – Increase total number of paid memberships
Total number of paid memberships
Intercept
Total number of paid
memberships
-$
Revenue
$
470,814.47
39.19
301,451.02
11,342,395
301,451 memberships required to increase revenue by 20%
Model 4 – Increase R & D development expenses and total number of paid memberships
Technology and development
expenses
Intercept
Research and Development
expenses
Number of memberships
-$
Revenue
$
$
2,041,682
509,773.23 $
505,696.12
3.31
29.69
16,420,258 $
in technology and
development expenses and
2,041,682.35
342,917
mberships
Number of
membersh
ips
171,873 Mean
342,917
total paid
membersh
ips
required
Millions
Revenue ($) by Quarter
$10.00
$9.00
$8.00
Revenue
$7.00
$6.00
$5.00
$4.00
$3.00
$2.00
$1.00
Jun-22
Mar-22
Dec-21
Sep-21
Jun-21
Mar-21
Dec-20
Sep-20
Jun-20
Mar-20
Dec-19
Sep-19
Jun-19
Mar-19
Dec-18
Sep-18
Jun-18
Mar-18
Dec-17
Sep-17
Jun-17
Mar-17
Dec-16
Sep-16
$-
Quarter
Correlations with Revenue
$700.00
$600.00
$500.00
y = 0.0736x + 44776
R² = 0.9732
$400.00
$300.00
$200.00
$100.00
Thousands
$800.00
Operational Expences
Thousands
Research and Development Expences
Research and Development Expenses
$450.00
$400.00
$350.00
$300.00
$250.00
$200.00
$150.00
$100.00
$-
Thousands
Revenue
14,000.00
12,000.00
10,000.00
8,000.00
6,000.00
4,000.00
2,000.00
–
y = 0.0012x + 1487.4
R² = 0.9867
Total Number of Paid Memberships
Total Number of Employees
Total Number of Employees
300,000.00
250,000.00
200,000.00
150,000.00
100,000.00
50,000.00
Total Number
Revenue
Thousands
Sep-22
Jun-22
Thousands
Operational Expenses ($)
$450.00
$400.00
$350.00
y = 0.0519x – 85605
R² = 0.9751
$300.00
$250.00
$200.00
$150.00
$100.00
$50.00
$-
Thousands
Revenue
Total Number of Paid Memberships
300,000.00
250,000.00
y = 0.0253x + 13070
R² = 0.9934
200,000.00
150,000.00
100,000.00
50,000.00
–
Thousands
Thousands
Revenue
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Revenue ($)
3,290,188.00
3,477,541.00
3,636,635.00
3,785,464.00
3,984,859.00
4,285,755.00
4,700,856.00
4,907,270.00
4,999,374.00
5,186,841.00
5,520,992.00
5,923,116.00
6,244,905.00
6,467,434.00
6,767,691.00
7,148,286.00
7,435,637.00
7,644,442.00
8,163,282.00
8,341,777.00
8,483,467.00
8,709,318.00
8,867,767.00
9,188,384.02
9,451,995.60
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Operational Expenses
91,861.00
93,532.00
108,943.00
122,317.00
117,324.00
122,459.00
144,612.00
161,524.00
178,628.00
185,530.00
211,952.00
234,657.00
243,174.00
264,586.00
262,087.00
287,236.00
281,624.00
285,539.00
307,196.00
344,845.00
331,790.00
407,790.00
407,928.00
390,525.20
404,050.51
Predicted Revenue ($)
Residuals
$
3,488,756.26 -$ 198,568.26
$
3,520,137.09 -$
42,596.09
$
3,809,550.68 -$ 172,915.68
$
4,060,710.06 -$ 275,246.06
$
3,966,943.14 $
17,915.86
$
4,063,376.77 $ 222,378.23
$
4,479,402.92 $ 221,453.08
$
4,797,004.80 $ 110,265.20
$
5,118,212.37 -$ 118,838.37
$
5,247,829.69 -$
60,988.69
$
5,744,026.28 -$ 223,034.28
$
6,170,418.82 -$ 247,302.82
$
6,330,365.31 -$
85,460.31
$
6,732,475.73 -$ 265,041.73
$
6,685,545.32 $
82,145.68
$
7,157,835.38 -$
9,549.38
$
7,052,443.84 $ 383,193.16
$
7,125,966.27 $ 518,475.73
$
7,532,677.71 $ 630,604.29
$
8,239,713.71 $ 102,063.29
$
7,994,545.05 $ 488,921.95
$
9,421,800.39 -$ 712,482.39
$
9,424,391.99 -$ 556,624.99
$
9,097,573.05 $
90,810.97
$
9,351,574.00 $ 100,421.60
Regression Analysis
Co-efficients
$
Operational Expenses
18.78 $
Intercept
1,763,636.47
Revenue vs Predicted Revenue – Model 1
$10,000,000.00
$9,000,000.00
$8,000,000.00
$
$7,000,000.00
$6,000,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$4,000,000.00
$3,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
$1,000,000.00
$1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425
Revenue ($)
Predicted Revenue ($)
Axis Title
Axis Title
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Revenue ($)
3,290,188.00
3,477,541.00
3,636,635.00
3,785,464.00
3,984,859.00
4,285,755.00
4,700,856.00
4,907,270.00
4,999,374.00
5,186,841.00
5,520,992.00
5,923,116.00
6,244,905.00
6,467,434.00
6,767,691.00
7,148,286.00
7,435,637.00
7,644,442.00
8,163,282.00
8,341,777.00
8,483,467.00
8,709,318.00
8,867,767.00
9,188,384.02
9,451,995.60
Total Number of Employees
5,339.76
5,700.00
5,888.37
6,084.29
6,288.06
6,500.00
6,903.41
7,336.40
7,801.16
8,300.00
8,605.31
8,923.38
9,254.76
9,600.00
9,793.38
9,991.11
10,193.28
10,400.00
10,842.73
11,306.31
11,791.72
12,300.00
12,832.22
12,721.29
13,048.51
Predicted Revenue ($)
Residuals
$
3,207,177.87 $
83,010.13
$
3,499,316.13 -$
21,775.13
$
3,652,076.02 -$
15,441.02
$
3,810,958.34 -$
25,494.34
$
3,976,208.45 $
8,650.55
$
4,148,081.57 $ 137,673.43
$
4,475,227.30 $ 225,628.70
$
4,826,368.09 $
80,901.91
$
5,203,263.92 -$ 203,889.92
$
5,607,803.82 -$ 420,962.82
$
5,855,394.73 -$ 334,402.73
$
6,113,340.61 -$ 190,224.61
$
6,382,074.52 -$ 137,169.52
$
6,662,047.67 -$ 194,613.67
$
6,818,869.85 -$
51,178.85
$
6,979,218.33 $ 169,067.67
$
7,143,172.39 $ 292,464.61
$
7,310,813.12 $ 333,628.88
$
7,669,846.72 $ 493,435.28
$
8,045,790.36 $ 295,986.64
$
8,439,440.49 $
44,026.51
$
8,851,631.05 -$ 142,313.05
$
9,283,235.27 -$ 415,468.27
$
9,193,275.77 -$
4,891.75
$
9,458,644.23 -$
6,648.63
Regression Analysis
Total Number of Employees
$
810.96 -$
Co-efficients
Intercept
1,123,137.66
Revenue vs Predicted Revenue – Model 2
$10,000,000.00
$
$9,000,000.00
$8,000,000.00
$7,000,000.00
$6,000,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$4,000,000.00
$3,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
$1,000,000.00
$1
3
5
7
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
Revenue ($)
Predicted Revenue ($)
Axis Title
Axis Title
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
Revenue ($) Total Number of Paid MembershipsPredicted Revenue ($)
Residuals
3,290,188.00 $
93,280.00 $
3,184,625.60 $ 105,562.40
3,477,541.00 $
99,090.00 $
3,412,306.84 $
65,234.16
3,636,635.00 $
104,360.00 $
3,618,826.67 $
17,808.33
3,785,464.00 $
109,040.00 $
3,802,225.67 -$
16,761.67
3,984,859.00 $
114,020.00 $
3,997,381.03 -$
12,522.03
4,285,755.00 $
120,640.00 $
4,256,804.41 $
28,950.59
4,700,856.00 $
128,900.00 $
4,580,495.82 $ 120,360.18
4,907,270.00 $
134,350.00 $
4,794,069.46 $ 113,200.54
4,999,374.00 $
140,420.00 $
5,031,939.54 -$
32,565.54
5,186,841.00 $
149,260.00 $
5,378,359.89 -$ 191,518.89
5,520,992.00 $
158,860.00 $
5,754,562.98 -$ 233,570.98
5,923,116.00 $
161,560.00 $
5,860,370.10 $
62,745.90
6,244,905.00 $
168,330.00 $
6,125,671.66 $ 119,233.34
6,467,434.00 $
177,090.00 $
6,468,956.98 -$
1,522.98
6,767,691.00 $
192,860.00 $
7,086,948.94 -$ 319,257.94
7,148,286.00 $
202,950.00 $
7,482,354.06 -$ 334,068.06
7,435,637.00 $
205,150.00 $
7,568,567.27 -$ 132,930.27
7,644,442.00 $
213,660.00 $
7,902,055.64 -$ 257,613.64
8,163,282.00 $
217,640.00 $
8,058,023.17 $ 105,258.83
8,341,777.00 $
219,180.00 $
8,118,372.42 $ 223,404.58
8,483,467.00 $
223,560.00 $
8,290,015.08 $ 193,451.92
8,709,318.00 $
231,840.00 $
8,614,490.25 $
94,827.75
8,867,767.00 $
231,640.00 $
8,606,652.69 $ 261,114.31
9,188,384.02 $
246,223.60 $
9,178,152.21 $
10,231.81
9,451,995.60 $
252,932.22 $
9,441,048.24 $
10,947.36
Regression Analysis
Total Number of Paid Memberships
$
39.19 -$
Co-efficients
Intercept
470,814.47
$
Revenue vs Predicted Revenue – Model 3
$10,000,000.00
$9,000,000.00
$8,000,000.00
$7,000,000.00
$6,000,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$4,000,000.00
$3,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
$1,000,000.00
$1
3
5
7
9
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
Revenue ($)
Predicted Revenue ($)
Axis Title
Axis Title
Revenue ($)
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
3,290,188.00
3,477,541.00
3,636,635.00
3,785,464.00
3,984,859.00
4,285,755.00
4,700,856.00
4,907,270.00
4,999,374.00
5,186,841.00
5,520,992.00
5,923,116.00
6,244,905.00
6,467,434.00
6,767,691.00
7,148,286.00
7,435,637.00
7,644,442.00
8,163,282.00
8,341,777.00
8,483,467.00
8,709,318.00
8,867,767.00
9,188,384.02
9,451,995.60
Research and Development
Expenses
$
297,506.00
$
305,912.00
$
333,871.00
$
342,484.00
$
330,223.00
$
347,132.00
$
382,310.00
$
399,095.00
$
408,620.00
$
431,789.00
$
472,764.00
$
483,233.00
$
479,776.00
$
509,376.00
$
553,817.00
$
535,045.00
$
553,802.00
$
586,936.00
$
625,207.00
$
637,321.00
$
663,887.00
$
747,470.00
$
757,530.00
$
719,086.55
$
738,210.38
Total Number of Paid
Memberships
93,280.00
99,090.00
104,360.00
109,040.00
114,020.00
120,640.00
128,900.00
134,350.00
140,420.00
149,260.00
158,860.00
161,560.00
168,330.00
177,090.00
192,860.00
202,950.00
205,150.00
213,660.00
217,640.00
219,180.00
223,560.00
231,840.00
231,640.00
246,223.60
252,932.22
Predicted Revenue
($)
$
3,243,019.36
$
3,443,293.92
$
3,692,178.03
$
3,859,589.93
$
3,966,900.12
$
4,219,331.95
$
4,580,847.47
$
4,798,134.88
$
5,009,827.54
$
5,348,860.95
$
5,769,322.32
$
5,884,088.60
$
6,073,644.98
$
6,431,563.82
$
7,046,655.98
$
7,284,144.84
$
7,411,466.88
$
7,773,646.97
$
8,018,324.85
$
8,104,091.78
$
8,321,948.77
$
8,844,081.61
$
8,871,401.75
$
9,177,262.33
$
9,439,647.00
$
$
-$
-$
$
$
$
$
-$
-$
-$
$
$
$
-$
-$
$
-$
$
$
$
-$
-$
$
$
47,168.64
34,247.08
55,543.03
74,125.93
17,958.88
66,423.05
120,008.53
109,135.12
10,453.54
162,019.95
248,330.32
39,027.40
171,260.02
35,870.18
278,964.98
135,858.84
24,170.12
129,204.97
144,957.15
237,685.22
161,518.23
134,763.61
3,634.75
11,121.69
12,348.60
Regression Analysis
Total Number of Paid Memberships
$
29.69
Co-efficients
Revenue vs Predicted Revenue
$
Residuals
$10,000,000.00
$9,000,000.00
$8,000,000.00
$7,000,000.00
$6,000,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$4,000,000.00
$3,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
$1,000,000.00
$1
3
5
7
9 11 13 15 17 19
Revenue ($)
Predicted Revenue ($)
Research and Development Expenses Intercept
$
3.31 -$ 509,773.23
icted Revenue – Model 4
19 21 23 25
Predicted Revenue ($)
Axis Title
Individual Case Study of Target Group – Australia
MBA5004
Managing Decision Making Processes
Assessment 2
Student Name
: S A D S Nathasha Senaratna
Student ID
: 55647
Company
: Target Group
Lecturer
: Dr Priyantha Bandara
Submission Date
: 17th of October 2023
Executive Summary
The primary objective of this initiative was to create a versatile data analysis platform that could
support Target’s strategic goals. Our specific target was to achieve a 20% increase in revenue.
The initial step was selecting and preparing the data that would drive the decision-making
process. An array of variables, including Research and Development Expenses, Operational
Expenses, Total Number of Employees, and Total Number of Memberships, were considered to
enable precise adjustments aimed at achieving the target. The heart of our platform lies in a
robust regression model, thoughtfully constructed within Microsoft Excel. This model, once
provided with the current revenue data, calculates the adjusted values of the relevant variables,
paving the way for informed decision-making.
While our data analysis platform is a powerful tool, it does come with certain limitations. It is
optimized to handle a maximum of 25 entries for Target. Moreover, its accuracy is contingent
upon the quality and reliability of the input data. Therefore, maintaining accurate and up-to-date
data is paramount.
In summary, the development of this data analysis platform empowers our decision-makers with
the insights needed to drive 20% increase in revenue task while providing a comprehensive view
of our organization’s current status.
1
Table of Contents
Executive Summary …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1
1.0 Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3
Aims and Objectives …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Scope of the report ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3
2.0 Methodology and Data selection …………………………………………………………………………………. 4
3.0 Data Analysis and Interpretation …………………………………………………………………………………. 6
4.0 Development of MS Excel Platform ……………………………………………………………………………. 10
4.1 Datasheet ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10
4.2 Graphical Interpretation ………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
4.3 Regression model for Model 1 – Operational Expenses …………………………………………….. 11
4.4 Regression model for Model 2 – Total Number of Employees…………………………………….. 13
4.5 Regression model for Model 3 – Total Number of Paid Memberships …………………………. 14
4.6 Regression model for Model 4 – Research and Development Expenses and Total Number of
Paid Memberships ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 15
4.7 Models ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 16
5.0 Decision Making Outcomes ………………………………………………………………………………………. 19
Conclusion ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 20
References ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 21
2
1.0 Introduction
The primary objective of this initiative was to create a versatile data analysis platform that could
support Target’s strategic goals. Our specific target was to achieve a 20% increase in revenue.
The objective of this report is twofold: firstly, to provide an account of how this data analysis
platform was created, including insights into data selection, preparation, and analysis techniques;
and secondly, to illustrate the practical application of this platform in addressing one Target’s most
pressing goals.
In the following sections, the methodology employed to build this platform within Microsoft Excel
will be delivered, explore the data set selected for analysis, justify the choice of this specific data,
and elucidate the types of data analysis and interpretation employed to extract meaningful
insights.
The decisions made within this assessment revolve around the key objective of Target, which is
20% increase in revenue. Each decision will be meticulously analyzed, and recommendations
provided, ensuring that the management team is well-equipped with the data and insights
required for effective decision-making.
Aims and Objectives
The purpose of this research is to examine Target’s existing marketing strategy, identify areas for
improvement, and make concrete recommendations to strengthen our market presence and
competitiveness. The goals include conducting a thorough review of our existing marketing
campaigns, analyzing their effectiveness through data analysis, and leveraging this analysis to
develop targeted marketing strategies aimed at increasing brand visibility, customer engagement,
and, ultimately, revenue growth.
Scope of the report
The scope of this study is to give a thorough examination of Target Corporation’s financial and
operational strategies in the context of attaining a 20% revenue increase from its present revenue
of $9,451,995.60. To provide specific suggestions, the paper employs four separate models: by
focuses on reducing operational expenses , Model 2 discusses about the workforce, Model 3
emphasizes operational expenses and Model 4 emphasizes on technology and development
expenses and the goal of increasing total paid memberships This study is intended to assist Target
in making decisions that will improve revenue growth and overall financial performance.
3
2.0 Methodology and Data selection
The data was gathered quarterly, considering the period of September 2016 to September 2022.
The data contained Revenue in AUD, Research & Development Expenses in AUD, Operational
Expenses in AUD, Total number of Employees, and Total number of paid memberships. The
considered data set is shown in Table 2.1
Table 2.1: Dataset
For the analysis, following computational equations were used in calculations.
= – –
Operating Profit
= $ 156,613,276.62 – $ 12,642,402.93 – $ 5,991,709.71
= $ 137,979,163.98
And also, the mean, median was calculated as follows to identify the characteristics of the
dataset.
4
Table 2.2: Initial Analysis
Metrics
Revenue
Research and Development Expenses
Operational Expenses
Total Number of Employees
Total Number of Paid Memberships
Operating Profit
$
$
$
$
Total
156,613,276.62 $
12,642,402.93 $
5,991,709.71 $
227,745
4,296,836
137,979,163.98
Mean
6,264,531.06 $
505,696.12 $
239,668.39 $
9,110
171,873
Median
6,244,905.00
483,233.00
243,174.00
9,255
168,330
5
3.0 Data Analysis and Interpretation
An initial Data Analysis was conducted to have a brief idea of the status of the organization.
Sep-22
Jun-22
Mar-22
Sep-21
Dec-21
Jun-21
Mar-21
Dec-20
Jun-20
Sep-20
Mar-20
Dec-19
Sep-19
Jun-19
Mar-19
Dec-18
Sep-18
Jun-18
Dec-17
Mar-18
Sep-17
Jun-17
Mar-17
Dec-16
$10.00
$9.00
$8.00
$7.00
$6.00
$5.00
$4.00
$3.00
$2.00
$1.00
$-
Sep-16
Revenue
Millions
Revenue ($) by Quarter
Quarter
Figure 3.1: Revenue by Quater
According to figure 3.1, the revenue has increased the over the time.
And, as the ultimate objective of the model is to increase the revenue by 20%, it is much
needed to check the variation of the variables with the revenue. Thus, the correlations were
plotted and analyzed as follows.
Thousands
Research and Development Expences
Research and Development Expenses
$800.00
$700.00
$600.00
$500.00
y = 0.0736x + 44776
R² = 0.9732
$400.00
$300.00
$200.00
$100.00
$-
Thousands
Revenue
Figure 3.2: Correlation between Revenue ($) and the Research and Development Expenses ($)
6
As a result, the An R-squared value of 0.9732 indicates that variations in Research and
Development Expenses ($) can explain roughly 97.32% of the variability in Revenue ($). In
layman’s words, this suggests that these two variables have a strong and positive link. In practice,
this means that changes in Research and Development Expenses ($) are a strong predictor of
changes in Revenue ($) in the dataset given. This data can be useful for making business choices
since it reveals that spending more in R&D may result in higher revenues, while cutting such costs
may result in fewer revenues, depending on the type of the data and the context of your study.
Thousands
Operational Expences
Operational Expenses ($)
$450.00
$400.00
$350.00
y = 0.0519x – 85605
R² = 0.9751
$300.00
$250.00
$200.00
$150.00
$100.00
$50.00
$-
Thousands
Revenue
Figure 3.3: Correlation between Revenue ($) and the Operational Expenses ($)
An R-squared (R²) value of 0.9751 suggests an exceptionally strong positive correlation between
Revenue ($) and Operational Expenses. This indicates that operational expenses significantly
influence and explain approximately 97.51% of the variation in revenue.
7
Total Number of Employees
Total Number of Employees
14,000.00
y = 0.0012x + 1487.4
R² = 0.9867
12,000.00
10,000.00
8,000.00
6,000.00
4,000.00
2,000.00
–
Thousands
Revenue
Figure 3.4: Correlation between Revenue ($) and Total Number of Employees
The correlation research demonstrates a remarkably significant and positive relationship
between Revenue ($) and Total Employees (R2 = 0.9867). This suggests that the total number of
workers accounts for about 98.67% of the variation in revenue. In practice, changes in worker
size have a significant impact on revenue outcomes.
Total Number of Paid Memberships
Total Number of Paid Memberships
300,000.00
250,000.00
y = 0.0253x + 13070
R² = 0.9934
200,000.00
150,000.00
100,000.00
50,000.00
–
Thousands
Revenue
Figure 3.5: Correlation between Revenue ($) and Total Number of Paid Memberships
8
The exceptionally (R²) value of 99.34% indicates an extremely strong and positive correlation
between Revenue ($) and the Total Number of Paid Memberships. This suggests that the number
of paid memberships has a profound and almost complete explanatory power, accounting for
approximately 99.34% of the variability in revenue.
Thus, this can be observed that there’s a high positive correlation between the revenue and the
all the other variables (Research and Development Expenses, Operational Expenses, Total
Number of Employees and Total Number of Memberships).
9
4.0 Development of MS Excel Platform
The tool was developed using Microsoft 365. The tool contains following pages Datasheet,
Models, Graphical Representations, Regression model for model 1, Regression model for model
2, Regression model for model 3, and Regression model for model 4. In the chapter it is shown
how the tool is built in the Excel platform.
4.1 Datasheet
Figure 4.1: Datasheet Interface
In here the organization update this table by inserting their data. When it is inserted the graphical
representations and regression model automatically change. linear regression, the intercept
coefficient is an integral part of the equation that defines the relationship between variables. It
represents the initial value of the dependent variable when all independent variables are zero,
while regression as a whole helps quantify how changes in independent variables affect the
dependent variable. In order to get the date calculated automatically we have used LINEST
function if excel to calculate the intercept and co-efficient in regression equation.
4.2 Graphical Interpretation
In the graphical interpretation sheet, if interprets Time vs Revenue plot as well as the correlations
of variables with Revenue plots. These help the decision maker to have and overall idea about
their organization’s current status.
10
Figure 4.2: Time vs Revenue plot
Figure 4.3: Correlation plots
4.3 Regression model for Model 1 – Operational Expenses
In here it is shown the Regression Analysis for the model 1. These values are automatically
updated with any change of the datasheet and calculates the respective coefficients and
residuals. By using the LINEST option on excel.
11
Figure 4.4: Regression Analysis for Model 1
12
4.4 Regression model for Model 2 – Total Number of Employees
In here it is shown the Regression Analysis for the model 2. These values are automatically
updated with any change of the datasheet and calculates the respective coefficients and
residuals.
Figure 4.5: Regression Analysis for Model 2
13
4.5 Regression model for Model 3 – Total Number of Paid Memberships
In here it is shown the Regression Analysis for the model 3. These values do automatically updated
with any change of the datasheet and calculates the respective coefficients and residuals.
Figure 4.6: Regression Analysis for Model 3
14
4.6 Regression model for Model 4 – Research and Development Expenses and Total Number of
Paid Memberships
In here it is shown the Regression Analysis for the model 4. These values do automatically updated
with any change of the datasheet and calculates the respective coefficients and residuals.
Figure 4.7: Regression Analysis for Model 4
15
4.7 Models
In the model there are 4 models which adjust automatically when the datasheet gets updated.
The user must input their current revenue. With that input tool calculated and display the
outcome values of the variables which need to be changed in order to achieve the task.
Figure 4.8: User inputs
Figure 4.9: Model 1 Interface
Using the interception and the coefficient calculated in Figure 4.4 are as follows.
Operational expenses coefficient = $ 18.78
Intercept = $ 1,763,636.47
Using that, the regression model for revenue can be built as,
Revenue = $ 1,763,636.47 + $ 18.78 x Operational Expenses
When calculating the required Operational Expense to increase revenue up to $ 9,451,995.60,
$ 9,451,995.60 = $ 1,763,636.47 + $ 18.78 x Required Operational Expenses
Thus, the required operational expenses = $ 510,060
16
Figure4.10: Model 2 Interface
Using the interception and the coefficient calculated in Figure 4.5 are as follows.
Total number of employees coefficient = 810.957
Intercept = – $ 1,123,137.66
Using that, the regression model for revenue can be built as,
Revenue = – $ 1,123,137.66 + 810.957x Total number of employees
When calculating the required Total number of employees to increase revenue up to $
9,451,995.60,
$ 9,451,995.60 = – $ 1,123,137.66 + 810.957x Total number of employees
Thus, the required Total number of employees = 15,371
Figure 4.11: Model 3 Interface
Using the interception and the coefficient calculated in Figure 4.6 are as follows.
Total number of paid memberships coefficient = 39.188
Intercept = – $ 470,814.47
17
Using that, the regression model for revenue can be built as,
Revenue = – $ 470,814.47+ 39.188 x Total number of paid memberships
When calculating the required Total number of paid memberships to increase revenue up to $
9,451,995.60,
$ 9,451,995.60 = – $ 470,814.47 + 39.188x Required Total number of paid memberships
Thus, the required Total number of paid memberships = 301,451
Figure 4.12: Model 4 Interface
Using the interception and the coefficient calculated in Figure 4.7 are as follows.
Number of memberships coefficient = $29.69
Technology and development expenses coefficient = $3.31
Intercept = – $ 509,773.23
Using that, the regression model for revenue can be built as,
Revenue = -$509,773.23 + 3.31 x Research & Development Expenses + 29.69 x Number of
Memberships
When calculating the required amounts to increase revenue up to $ 9,451,995.60,
$11,342,394.72 = -$509,773.23 + 3.31 x Research & Development Expenses + 29.69 x Number
of Memberships
Where; mean of Research & Development Expenses and Number of Memberships are
$505,696.12 and 171,873 respectively. (Table 2.2).
18
5.0 Decision Making Outcomes
Thus, according to the model sheet , the results are shown to the user. By considering this the
user can make decisions on behalf of their organization. For example, as the current revenue of
Target is $ 9,451,995.60, expected revenue should be $ 11,342,394.72 when the revenue
increases by 20%. When the user inputs the current revenue into the model. It outputs as follows.
To increase the revenue by 20%,
Model 1: Operational Expenses should be $ 510,060, suggests saving $510,060 in operating
expenditures by optimizing supply chain logistics, simplifying retail operations, or discovering
cost-effective procurement alternatives.
Model 2: Total number of Employees should be 15,371, indicates that Target may need to
consider increasing its workforce to 15,371 individuals to support revenue growth, highlighting
prospective recruiting requirements in various categories such as sales associates, warehouse
personnel, or technology specialists.
Model 3: Operational Expenses should be $301,451, which 3 recommends a $301,451 decrease
in operational expenditures, highlighting the need of cost control and efficiency improvements in
areas such as inventory management and retail operations.
Model 4: Technology and development expenses should be = $ 2,041,682 & total paid
memberships = 342,917. emphasizes the need to invest in technology and development costs,
notably a $2,041,682 increase. This might include improving Target’s e-commerce platform,
establishing novel consumer interaction techniques, and remaining competitive in the everchanging retail industry. It also advises increasing total paid memberships to 342,917, which may
be accomplished through Target’s reward programs, marketing campaigns, or customer retention
measures.
19
Conclusion
In conclusion, this model sheet offers the user with significant insights and suggestions relevant
to Target Corporation, allowing them to make educated decisions on behalf of the business. Using
Target’s current sales of $9,451,995.60 as a starting point, the model offers a strategy for
increasing revenue by 20% to $11,342,394.72. Target may use these ideas to help it meet its sales
target and make strategic decisions that will lead to long-term development and success in the
highly competitive retail business.
20
References
1. Orlov, M. L. (1996). Multiple linear regression analysis using Microsoft Excel. Chemistry
Department.
2. K
The purpose of this assignment is to explain core concepts related to corporate valuation and governance and to identify strategies for conducting business with personal and professional integrity.Read the Chapter 13 Mini Case in Financial Management: Theory and Practice. Complete Parts 1 and 2.Part 1: Using complete sentences and academic vocabulary, please answer questions a through d.Part 2: Using the mini case information, write a 250-500-word letter of intent discussing specific strategies for how you will conduct your start-up business with personal and professional integrity.While APA style is not required for the body of this assignment, solid academic writing is expected, and documentation of sources should be presented using APA formatting guidelines.
The purpose of this assignment is to demonstrate your ability to identify and present
a compelling “pitch” for an idea for a potential venture.
Each student is required to prepare a maximum of 6 Presentation Slides with up to
250-words of written presentation notes per slide to “pitch” (explain/justify/test)
their idea to their student colleagues and consultant
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Some Hints of
How to come up with
Great Ideas
Rules
1. There are no bad ideas!
2. For Ideation purposes there are no limitations to
consider.
3. You don’t need to have expertise in the area.
4. Let your mind go wild!
5. Don’t forget your PASSION!
SOME GOOD IDEAS? ..Really??
WAYS TO GENERATE IDEAS
Develop a totally new product or service
• Where demand is unknown
Use your areas of passion, established skills or
knowledge
Identify something that needs improvement ,
innovation or invention.
Identify a niche that has not been addressed or a
problem that needs solving.
WAYS TO GENERATE IDEAS
1. Brainstorm
2. Word association (each student thinks of a word (match 2
words to develop a new idea)
3. Make my day better ( something that drives you crazy)
4. Mood board
5. Mind map
6. Pinterest research.
7. CANDO
James Bannerman’s CANDO exercise
GENERATING A BUSINESS IDEA
CREATE OPPORTUNITY
➔
Product / market innovation:
Incremental to radical
MARKET NEED
Burns (2014)
SPOT OPPORTUNITY
◆ Changes in
technology, law and
regulation, market
and industry
structures,
demographics,
culture, moods and
fashion
◆ Product / service
deficiencies
◆ Unmet demand
NEW IDEA TOOL USING “NEW VENTURE TYPOLOGY”
RADICAL
PRODUCT /
SERVICE
INNOVATION
INCREMENTAL
PRODUCT /
SERVICE
INNOVATION
EXISTING
PRODUCT /
SERVICE
Burns (2014)
New-to-theworld
industries
Disruptive
innovation
Incremental
innovation
Copy-cat
EXISTING
MARKET
Market
expansion
Market
paradigm shift
INCREMENTALLY
NEW MARKET
RADICALLY NEW
MARKET
NEW IDEAS and THE COMPETITION?
• When thinking about your idea, you must decide how
you will satisfy your customers.
• Do you need to offer them something new or enhanced
at the best price, the best product, or the best service?
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 14504
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Moin Uddin
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges
of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ”
Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance
and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson,
M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number
of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks)
(Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a
large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02
Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of
the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02
Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational
Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an
organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical.
What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words
200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually
increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might
explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For a good business case analysis, you must closely examine the issues with which the company is confronted. You must then articulate well-thought-out solutions with supporting quantified benefits that meet the Company’s strategic objectives and help drive Profitable Revenue Growth. A case analysis is not an essay or a report:
Case = A statement of quantified facts and reasons used to support an argument.
Analysis = A careful and methodical investigation of the component parts of a whole and their relationships in making up the whole. This requires critical thinking.
Your Assignment
Using the provided “SMB Case” material plus additional information that you have researched, write a Case Analysis that provides a solidly considered IT/IS digital transformation strategy recommendation to Janice (Senior Director of IT) that will help accelerate the growth of the business by improving the efficiency and effectiveness of marketing, sales, inventory, and accounting functions. As you consider the elements of the case, think about the implications of the Digital Ecosystem Model as well as the IT Portfolio Model covered in class. These are your tools to make sure all relevant bases/topics are covered appropriately. The market opportunity is good so there is growing competition in the region from other larger, more technically savvy companies. You may want to do research to see what other industrial distributors are doing to stay competitive.
NB: You are writing this analysis for Janice (not me). As with all business writing, assume other people in the organization not directly addressed on the cover page may read your analysis. Be very careful what you say and how you say it. In this instance, assume all the senior executives will read your analysis.
Grading Rubric
Typical “A” cases are over 20 single spaced pages (about 8000 words). Grading will be on a point system based on content, clarity, and writing fundamentals. Points will be assigned as follows (For specific levels, consult the Canvas Assignment Rubric):
Points (100 Total possible points):
Critical thinking broken down as follows:
5 points – Executive Summary
40 points – Answer the questions thoroughly with clear supporting facts and in a business “voice”
10 points – Illustrative graphs and tables that prove your points
10 points – Go above and beyond (do extra research, citing respected sources) and/or exemplar writing (well-formed business/analysis style solid compare and contrast for proposed solutions and excellent business voice)
15 points – Proper Format
15 points – Authoritative references cited properly as endnotes (not footnotes) that prove the points in your analysis
Do enough research and use the references necessary to cover the topic adequately. You will probably have more than 15 references. Be sure to use respected sources – Avoid Blogs and Use the CRAP test.
Citing Wikipedia, CourseHero, Chegg or the like is not allowed. 15 points will be deducted for every citation instance.
5 points – A well thought out Network diagram (You must construct this diagram. A “clip art’ diagram is worth “0” zero points.)
Unformatted Attachment Preview
SMB Case – Rock Solid
Industrial Parts, Inc.
(The Case Detail for: Case Analysis, Presentation, and
Briefing)
The Case
Your Situation
You work for a family-owned industrial parts distribution business (Rock Solid Industrial Parts, Inc.)
located in San Jose, California. Your uncle, David Simpson, got you a summer job last year working at
RSIP as an IT Support Tech. They liked you enough to hire you right after graduation. The hours are
good, and the pay is outstanding allowing you to pay off your student loan quicker than most of your
friends. You are currently the only IT person at the company. They are even providing you with golf
lessons.
Your background and education (MIS
from SJSU) have made you the go-toperson for all technology related issues in
the company. As the only individual in the
company with “some” technical background, the Owner/CEO of the company, Philip Hurd, has come to
you for advice on what IT/IS systems the company should be thinking about implementing to enable
continued profitable revenue growth by improving the efficiency and effectiveness of the business
overall. He understands it will be difficult to scale the business without implementing some process
changes supported by technology. You know the company is in the process of hiring a Senior Director of
IT, Janice Drake, who is very experiences but a relative newcomer to the industry. She may not be
onboard before the business analysis is due.
The Opportunity
The Executives have agreed on a 3-year strategic plan to grow the business by expanding into other
territories covering the entire west coast and mountain states. Current sales of $33 Million/year are
expected to more than double to $72 Million in that timeframe. Currently at about 36 employees, they
expect to increase their staff to over 70 employees to support sales growth. This is your big opportunity
to show what you can do to help drive the strategic growth plan as well as ensure the solutions you pick
today will continue to scale with the business over the next decade. A successful implementation might
get you a raise and will definitely look good on your resume.
Background
In the late 1930’s Philip Hurd’s grandfather, Hugh Hurd, started an industrial parts distribution company
in Sunnyvale California close to the Joshua Hendy Iron Works. Upon returning from the Pacific after
WWII, Hugh’s son Jack took over the business and moved it to its current location in South San Jose.
Throughout their high school years his sons Philip and Tim worked in various roles within the company
gaining extensive working knowledge of the industry. In 1970 Jack retired, leaving the business to Philip
and Tim.
Today, Philip (61 years old) and his brother Tim (59 years old), CEO and COO respectively, run the
company. Their high school buddy Don McCloud (60 years old) is the CFO. David Simpson has been with
the company for over 25 years, moving up the ranks to VP of Sales. The four C-level executives are
steadfast golf buddies, playing almost every Sunday at the Silver Creek Valley Country Club. Tom Smith,
Regional Sales Manager for the Pacific states is married to Tim’s daughter Becky. When David retires, he
will most likely become the VP of Sales. Philip’s son, Phil Jr, is planning to leave his finance job at
Northrup Grumman to join the business as CFO when Don McCloud retires in 5 years.
Having worked outside the family business for many years, Phil Jr. sees the potential for a significant
increase in revenue for Rock Solid and is the main strategic architect for growing the business. Being in
finance at Grumman, driving profitable revenue growth is his primary objective. His operation is heavily
supported by IT/IS, so he knows the potential benefits of technology use in a business. When his father
retires in 7 years, he will likely become CEO. He has counseled his father on what technologies might be
needed to expand the business. In one of their conversations, he explained to his father: “Digital
initiatives must not be confused with the real business transformation needed for Rock Solid to succeed
in the digital age. The former is mostly about enabling business as usual and ‘staying in the game,’ while
the latter is about building real, long-term competitive advantage.” He also commented: “Because we
are expanding our product/support offering to our customers with our MRO initiative as well as
expanding our reach into other regions, whatever we do must be scalable.”
The Strategic Plan Details
The strategic plan is to grow the company from current sales of $33 Million/year to $72 Million in three
years by aggressively expanding into southern California and the Mountain states. Jim Donner, a 27-year
veteran employee and rising sales star, has been chosen to lead the effort in the Mountain States. A
mixed model of direct and independent sales representatives supported by inside sales has worked well
for the company over many years, so the intent is to continue the model. The Field Salespeople are on
the road most of the time. They also work from home and may come into the office several times during
the week. Southern California will have a small satellite office in LA or San Diego and the new Mountain
States Region will have a regional office in Denver.
Functional Group
Expansion Year
C- Level Executives
Operations
Finance &
Accounting
HR
Marketing
Admin
Sales
IT
Current Staffing
Headquarters Office
San Jose
Current (Year 1)
4
5
4
1
1
3
Field Sales 10 + 1 RSM
Inside Sales 4
Apps Engineers 2
1 Technician (addition of 1
senior manager and 2 staff
planned)
3 Year Expansion Plan
Southern California
Mountain States
LA or San Diego
Denver
Year 2
Year 3
0
0
0
0
1 (Doubles as Office
1 (Doubles as Office
Manager)
Manager)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Field Sales 10
Field Sales 10 + 1 RSM
Inside Sales 4
Inside Sales 4
Apps Engineers 2
Apps Engineers 2
0
0
In this type of business, long-term personal relationships are particularly important. Sales reps tend to
bring their best customers with them as they move from distributor to distributor. Rock Solid is
intending to leverage this fact to grow very quickly by hiring experienced sales representatives from
competing distributors. Year two they will open the San Diego office followed by The Denver office in
year three.
Sales Staffing Table
Revenue
Sales Headcount
Accounting/Office Manager
Year 1
$40 Million
17
2
Year 2
$55 Million
33
2
Year 3
$72 million
50
2
The company plans to use technology to minimize operating overhead as they grow and to keep the
organization as flat as possible by improving the efficiency and effectiveness of the organization.
The Organization
The Headquarters’ organizational structure and operational functions are very typical of an old-line
industrial distributor. (Blue = Existing Organization Green = New Positions being added)
Advised by Phil Jr., Philip Sr. is driving the change. Having read about the benefits of CRM automation,
David, acknowledges the need for better technology as the sales force grows in number and territory
reach. Don McCloud, CFO, has serious reservations about changing anything. His tight control of the
financials has kept the company very profitable even during the “great recession” of 2007/2009.
Everyone in the company is making good money. His view: “Why change what isn’t broke?” Don is not
technical (he is an Apple user and gets his technical information from the Geek Squad). He does not
appreciate the importance of technology’s role in helping companies scale. Tim Hurd, COO, is on the
sidelines with a wait and see attitude. As an executive team, they have all agreed to give the Strategic
Philip Hurd
CEO
David Simpson
VP Sales &
Marketing
Marketing
Tom Smith
RSM
Pacific States
Don McCloud
CFO
Jim Donner
RSM Mountain
States
Tim Hurd
COO
Finance &
Accounting
Shipping and
Receiving
Inside Sales
Inside Sales
Janice Drake
Sr. Director of IT
Inventory
Management
Outside Sales &
Field Applications
Outside Sales &
Field Applications
Human
Resources
Facilities
Growth Plan a shot and on the advice of Phil Jr. they have hired Janice Drake as Senior Director of IT
from a small technology company in San Jose to manage the new IT/IS implementation. You will report
to her with a promotion if things go well. They are even thinking about remodeling the office space to
make it look more modern and inviting.
The company is not very technologically oriented. Today, almost everything is being done with older
desktop computers, paper forms, Excel and Quicken. The company has only a rudimentary online
presence and an antiquated Plain Old Telephone System (POTS). Most of the workers are conservative,
older (average age 55) and have been with the company for more than 25 years. They are comfortable
with computers but do not generally use Facebook or Text Messaging. Many do not even have
smartphones. In short – they are not very technically savvy and will likely be very resistant to change.
The current Field Sales Operation is very local. Even though the salespeople are on the road most of the
time, they generally work from home when needed. They come into the office every Monday morning
for a weekly sales update meeting (issues, resolutions, sales forecasting) that sometimes includes
training by key product vendors. During a brief conversation with David (VP of Sales and Marketing) you
discovered vendors often require both a whiteboard on which to draw diagrams and a projector for
PowerPoint slides during training meetings. Provisions must be made to continue these meetings to
include salespeople who are in remote locations or working from home. He also expressed concerns
about going ‘Digital’ when his people are on the road because Wi-Fi hotspots are not always readably
available in more remote areas.
The Warehouse Operations is automated to the degree that they use barcode scanners, however, there
is no automated inventory control and no LAN in the building except in the front office. Everything is
handled with Excel spreadsheets that are PDF’d and emailed weekly to the sales reps. Inventory
management is becoming an issue. Today there are 100K SKUs of record in inventory (some may be old
and no longer physically in stock or available). The number of SKU will grow by as much as 10% as they
expand into new maintenance and repair operation (MRO) service areas.
The communication utility point of
presence is in a small room toward the
front right of the building. AT&T
consumer ADSL plus consumer grade
switches are currently supporting the
company’s connection to the internet A
high-speed commercial grade fiber
internet termination is available but unused. There is no cable connection. An
old PC is being used as both an FTP and
a print server. The desktop PCs are old
and running Windows 7 – some still use
CRT monitors. The PCs are running
various older versions of MS Office and
Quicken is being used for the
accounting software. HR is completely paper based with payroll outsourced to ADP.
Your Task
There are many moving parts to a Digital Transformation. Your task is to understand the issues involved
and to apply new/modern IT/IS solutions to marketing, sales (mobile workers supported by an inside
sales desk), inventory & warehouse management and accounting to support the Strategic Growth plan.
To keep overhead expense growth to a minimum the entire business must become more effective and
efficient as it expands. Your budget is $250K to $750K. What do you recommend doing? How are you
going to implement the chosen technologies considering that the workforce is old and not tech savvy?
Knowing up to 80% of all IT/IS initiatives fail, what are you going to do to make sure you are the 20%
that succeed?
OMG – This is not Business Process Redesign or a Digital Transformation – This is a Digital Revolution!
Within about a month you must analyze the situation and develop solution recommendations in a
written format. After a review by the executives, you and your team will be expected to make a
presentation to the staff and answer tough questions about your recommendations. As is often
common, you can also expect there will be follow-up briefings with various executives on key points.
###
Specific Questions/Topics to be Considered in your
Written Case and Presentation.
There are several questions that you must consider in your analysis. Note: At some point early in your
analysis, you should consider which digital transformation design choice the company should use:
automation, information, re-design or paradigm shift? Look for best-in-class examples and major
competitors to inform and support your choice.
In your analysis, please address the following elements in the order given based upon your digital
transformation design choice [See the Expectations, General Guidelines, and Example documentation in
Module C for more specifics]:
1. Major Areas to Consider: Cover the four primary areas* in the exact following order:
a) Processes to be Redesigned [Put your quantified benefits here]
b) Technology (Software, Hardware, Data, Supporting Infrastructure)
Note: A case specific Infrastructure diagram is required. To describe the Infrastructure
requirements in this section you should use a more generalized diagram (Point-of-Presence
to the Access Points) so non-technical readers can gain a basic understanding of what is
required. Put the detailed Infrastructure diagram in an Appendix. The Network Diagrams in
the appendix must be complete enough so a third party (e.g., Network VAR) could use them
to implement a workable solution. Use the symbols provided at the end of this document
plus any other standard ‘Cisco’ network icons/symbols as required.
c) People (Non-tech savvy – How are you going to manage this?)
d) Structure [Write: “No structure changes anticipated.”]
2. What will the most difficult Technical (not People or Process) implementation task be? [Hint: It
is not the Infrastructure.]
3. What are the top 3 to 5 risks of your IT/IS digital transformation strategy recommendation? How
will you mitigate them? Do your research to discover what the experts say about digital
transformation/business process redesign success/failure. And remember, if you highlight a
Risk, you must always propose a solution to Mitigate the Risk. Cite your sources.
4. Timeline for the Implementation. Must cover the 3-year expansion plan. [Note: Is not possible
to do a budget unless the implementation timeline is complete/accurate.]
5. High-level Budget for the implementation (presented in a table). Costs for infrastructure
elements are often hard to get. Use the pricing provided at the end of this document as a
time/effort-saving aid. Warning – The pricing table is not exhaustively complete. It is not an
indication of all of the Infrastructure required. You will still need to do research on the other
costs as required. Cite your sources. Place a 3 Year Summery Budget table in the body of your
document. Put the detailed Budget Table in an Appendix. Break your budget into sections:
Technology (Software, Hardware, Data, Infrastructure) and Other. Avoid breaking tables across
page boundaries.
[Note: For your budget, Data Direct Costs are things like data sourcing (including legacy data
conversion), data governance, and data consumption/analysis. Think – you are
“touching/manipulating/controlling/securing” the data – that is a direct data cost. In general,
servers on- or off-premises are considered Infrastructure because they are general usage and
only “hold” the ones and zeros of the data. Careful: Some software apps come with their own
data repositories that you do not own or directly manage/control – This is part of the Software
Budget because you cannot separate it out.]
Some Helpful Information
SMB Overview
Over the past decade, the small business market has become a popular and increasingly contested
market for technology companies. While there are many definitions of what constitutes an SMB, the
most common are based on the number of employees. Generally, businesses with fewer than 100
employees are classified as small and those with between 100 and 250 are classified as medium. The
opportunity in the SMB market is significant; however, the large number of small businesses and the
low IT spend per business makes it a difficult market to penetrate. For example, according to Compass
research, there are 2.4 million businesses with fewer than 1,000 employees in the US and 2.3 million of
those have fewer than 100 employees.
Small businesses constitute the majority of businesses worldwide and they are growing at a faster rate
than large enterprises. In a market research study conducted by Compass, small business owners
identified their most important IT needs as: attracting new customers, serving existing customers
better, increasing employee productivity, lowering operating expenses, and improving collaboration
among workers. Now, more than ever, hardware and software technology companies are focusing on
providing SMBs the products they need to meet these challenges.
All businesses, regardless of size,
are organized into functional
structures.
In
smaller
businesses, individuals may take
on multiple roles. For example,
in a start-up, the CEO, CTO and
Director of HR may be the same
person, or a CFO may also do all
the accounting as well as mange
the financials. Functional groups
may report to different C-Level
Executives depending on a wide
variety of factors. For example,
IT/IS may report to the CEO, CFO
or COO. If the IT/IS department is big enough, it may be headed up by a CIO. In large enterprises, the
roles and titles are generally very well defined. Regardless, the various business tasks must be
accomplished, and, in a modern digitally savvy business, IT/IS generally supports these tasks.
HQ Operations
Headquarters (commonly referred to as HQ) is the location where most, if not all, of the important
functions of an organization are coordinated such as corporate management (C-level executives),
strategic planning, corporate communications, tax, legal, business development and M&A, marketing,
sales, engineering, research and development, finance, human resources, information technology,
corporate security, logistics and procurement.
Warehouse Operations
A warehouse is a building for storing goods. They
are generally large plain spaces with metal racks or
shelving to organize the goods for easy inventory
storage and picking for shipment. A warehouse has
loading docks to load and unload goods from
trucks. Larger operations may have cranes and
forklifts for moving goods, which are usually placed
on pallet racks. In very large operations, very
sophisticated robotics may be used (think Amazon).
To improve efficiency, most modern warehouses
will have inventory management system (IMS)
automation software with barcode scanners or RFID for tracking goods through receiving, storing, and
shipping. These automated systems are often tied directly to accounting and CRM systems to allow for
further automation of supporting processes as well as to allow salespeople better access to sailable
inventory.
Sales (Field Sales or ‘the field’)
B2B salespeople sell products and services to other businesses (not consumers as in B2C). B2B
salespeople often sell to professional buyers who are trained to get the best possible deal, they also
often sell to teams of decision makers, all of whom must be convinced that this product is the best
solution for their needs. Today, successful salespeople are experts in their customers’ businesses and
function more as consultants – strong personal relationships are particularly important.
B2B sales come in two general types. The first type is selling products that meet a business’s needs, like
office supplies or computer equipment. The second type of B2B sales is selling components that the
business will then use to manufacture its own products or to repair/replace their own equipment.
Sales operations can be complex and organized in several ways. Salespeople can be:
Direct – Directly employed and compensated by the company.
Representative (Rep.) – Independent (not an employee) of the company they are ‘representing.’
Usually paid on a commission plan of some type. Generally, representatives may sell other noncompeting, synergistic products as part of their product portfolio. In particular cases, a
representative might be considered “captive” in that they only sell one company’s
products/services.
The tools salespeople use today are more complex including CRM systems for tracking opportunities as
well as websites and social media for generating leads and communicating information to potential
buyers and specifiers. As a result, salespeople need a variety of supporting hardware (some combination
of Laptops, tablets, smart phones, even smart watches) and software (the most common being MS
Office, email, TXT messaging, pdf readers, video conferencing, CRM, and Malware protection) as well as
supporting technology infrastructure (Wi-Fi, cellular data and VPN connections) to do their jobs
effectively. Salespeople are often mobile (traveling by car, rail, plane) to visit customers requiring
consistent, always available, secure communications capability.
Industrial Distributor
An Industrial Distributor is an independent company that acts as a supply chain intermediary. They buy
products in bulk from various manufacturers, stock (warehouse) them and then sell/supply them to
businesses that then use the products in manufacturing or maintenance/repair operations. In general,
they do not sell direct to consumers or retail stores. In addition to carrying stock, they offer credit and
provide delivery services. Distributors may use direct and/or representative (in-direct) salespeople.
Industrial Products
Industrial Products are the products which are not
directly used by the end customers. They are
mostly used in Business to Business (B2B)
scenarios. Product types include raw materials,
machinery, electrical equipment, wire and cable,
repair parts, tools, and supplies.
Technology Software
Software refers to the software (e.g. MS Office, Adobe, Skype, Google, utilities, VPN, anti-virus….) used
on the Hardware employed by individual users to perform tasks using electronic technology. Note:
Software used by IT to control/manage/maintain/secure the Infrastructure (e.g. remote/cloud
management, security, privacy, helpdesk…) should be detailed in the Infrastructure section.
Technology Data Overview
Data is considered the data itself as well as the direct activities associated with the data: data sourcing
(including legacy data conversion), data governance, and data consumption/analysis. From a budget
standpoint “touching/manipulating/controlling/securing” the data – that is a direct Data Cost. In general,
servers on- or off-premises are considered Infrastructure and are part of the Infrastructure Budget
because they are general usage and only “hold” the ones and zeros of the data. Careful: Some software
apps come with their own data repositories that you do not own/control – This is part of the Software
Budget because it is employed by individual users and is difficult to separate it out.
Technology Infrastructure Overview
Technology infrastructure generally refers to the
enterprise’s entire collection of hardware, software,
networks, data centers, facilities and related
equipment used to develop, test, operate, transport
the data, monitor, manage and/or support
information technology services. Infrastructure does not refer to the hardware (e.g., Laptops, tablets,
smartphones….)
Note: As the complexity of the infrastructure requirement grows so does the complexity of its design
and implementation. Most SMBs do not have the required knowledge or skills so they generally use
Value-Added Resellers (VAR) to help. A VAR takes software, hardware and/or infrastructure technology
and implements it for a customer. The VAR is not the manufacturer of the equipment, however, is
expected to have a thorough knowledge to properly customize, install, test, and sometimes maintain
them for the customer.
As a business’s networking needs expand, the need for managed switches increases. A switch works
in the data link layer, connects nodes of the same subnet together and forwards packets to the correct
port by analyzing the MAC address. Managed switches are essential for larger networks and those with
voice or video traffic (video conferencing) which needs to be prioritized above data traffic to ensure
high quality feeds. Another important feature on managed switches is Power over Ethernet (PoE) used
to supply power to devices such as wireless access points or IP phones so that these devices can be
installed in locations that lack easy access to a power outlet. Power over Ethernet is injected onto the
cable at typically 48 volts DC. This voltage allows efficient power transfer along the cable, while still
being low enough to be regarded as safe. One of the additional benefits of PoE is that it does not require
a certified electrician to install unlike a 110V power outlet thus potentially reducing instillation costs.
The furthest distance a PoE switch can transmit simple data over Ethernet is 100 meters (the Ethernet
standard). A PoE Ethernet Extender, however, can lengthen that span up to 4000 feet.
Routers work in the network layer are used to connect to the internet and to send traffic between
Local Area Networks (LANs). A router analyses the IP addresses and routes a packet to the correct
destination through the proper gateway. Hence, routers are used for interconnecting networks rather
than connecting nodes in a subnet (use a switch for this). Routers connect physically separate networks
into one seamless network for the end users. Routers also provide additional security and protect
against denial-of-service attacks and other security threats.
Wireless networks consist of Wireless LAN controllers and access points (APs). Wireless products range
in complexity from simple standalone access points that are easily installed and require little or no
setup to more complex networks consisting of multiple APs integrated into a seamless m an a g ed
network.
In an industrial setting, AP specifications,
placement and antenna design become more
critical to maintain speed and connectivity than in
a consumer application, particularly in buildings
with reinforced concrete and/or metallic structures
causing interference and multipath reflections.
Warehouse and manufacturing spaces can be even
more problematic because of both signal blocking
structures and electrical interference issues. A standard consumer AP will not perform well in these
types of environments. To help solve this problem, APs with MIMO and beam forming technologies use
multipath reflections to gain significant signal strength, avoid dead spots and improve reliability.
Improved reliability translates to a greater coverage area for a given data rate.
Warning: Too many Access Points can cause serious cross-interference. While it is possible to implement
by trial and error, generally a certified installer experienced with industrial implementations will need to
be corrected to do a wireless survey. If you are not sure what this mimplies – Google it.
More advanced infrastructure technologies include security, Unified Communications, and wireless
technologies:
Security – Most vendors today build security features into every product they sell. In addition, many
vendors also sell other security products such as spam blockers, firewalls, and identity management
software. With the growing prevalence of BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) systems to address threats
that lie within the perimeter of the firewall are required. ALL devices connected to the network must be
protected. This includes PCs, Macs, and smartphones.
For the past few decades, a corporate virtual private network (VPN) has been the go-to answer for
connecting to work when away from the office. It is simple, affordable, and relatively secure. However,
the discussion now has a new wrinkle – zero-trust. Zero trust network access operates by assuming that
the device or user is not authorized for access, and then authenticating each connectivity request. This
approach limits the attack surface area and provides scalability. The security debate often focuses on
which method to choose: VPN or zero-trust. However, another option is to combine both technologies.
Deploying a VPN in the short term is helpful while moving to a zero-trust approach later in a secure
infrastructure buildout.
Unified Communications – Unified Communications (UC) is a broad category that refers to applications
that combine voice, data, and video over the same network. Combining voice and data networks
generally saves businesses money because they only must maintain one network and allow for new
productivity features such as accessing voice mail on the desktop. Most UCs have the ability to redirect
incoming IP calls to different designated phones, such as cellular phones. Users can also transition active
calls between their desktop and mobile phone without interruption.
Historically, PBX (public branch exchanges) were used as the network to carry voice traffic. However,
with UC, voice traffic can be converted into packets and passed over an IP network and reassembled on
the other end. The most popular UC products for SMBs are IP telephony solutions, such as Cisco’s
Smart Business Communication System that combines a network foundation with security, wireless,
and voice applications all in one system. Cisco is the worldwide leader in Unified Communications
followed closely by Microsoft. Some UCs are Cell Phone based. Today, more CRM providers are
integrating UC into their offerings. One of the barriers to adoption of UC has been the upfront capital
cost, which many SMBs are not willing to undertake even though UC will save money over time through
lower telecom and network maintenance costs.
Infrastructure Hardware Help
Finding pricing and infrastructure symbols can be frustrating and time consuming. Please use the
symbols and costs listed below as starters for the required Infrastructure diagram. (Yes – There is more
to it than you think!) You are not expected to be an expert, however, you must demonstrate a basic
understanding of the infrastructure requirements. You will need to do some research/reading about
SMB Networking. It is suggested that you check out what Cisco has to say on the subject before you
start. Remember, Rock Solid is a ‘small’ business but not a consumer or an enterprise level company.
Keep it simple and easy to manage.
Note: Be careful with your Budget – Firewalls, Cloud Management, and other Infrastructure services
often require subscriptions. You must include them in your Budget.
Warning: Below is a “starter” cheat sheet. The “cheat sheet” is designed to help you with the case. It is
only a “starter” not the entire network. It may not have or be the appropriate elements of the
Infrastructure required. There is more to the network infrastructure you must consider. You must think
through the complete end-to-end network requirements before you start using any of the symbols or
you may layout a network that will not work. If your network does not at least get a signal all the way
from the Internet to an Access Points (AP) in the building – You will get a “0” (zero) for the Network
Infrastructure. I would suggest you consider the Hardware first and how it will connect to the network.
Then consider the Internet connection at the Point of Presence (PoP) and what infrastructure equipment
must be in the “server room”. Simply stating: …. “ATT services” or “Comcast Business” will not cut it.
You must specify what equipment is in the Server Room.
Symbols And Costs As Starters For The Required Infrastructure Diagram
Type
Modem
Description
High Speed ADSL
Network Symbol
Avg. Cost
$200
High Performance 1Gig DOCIS
$270
High Performance DOCIS Modem/Router w/WiFi 6 & Firewall)
$600
Firewall
High Performance Managed Commercial Grade
w/VPN
$1000
Router
Standard Unmanaged
$2500
Managed w/Firewall & VPN
$300
Managed w/Firewall, Wi-Fi 6 & VPN
$500
Unmanaged 8 Port
$140
Unmanaged 24 Port
$250
Cloud Managed 8 Port w/PoE
$1500
Cloud Managed 24 Port w/PoE
$2000
Unmanaged
$200
Cloud Managed
$350
Switch
Access
Point
####
Business Case Analysis
Expectations, General Guidelines, and Example
Updated Fall 2023
Submission of a Case Analysis is required for successful completion of this course. It is part of
your Capstone experience. Read and understand the Expectations and Guidelines very carefully –
Your grade will depend upon it. A Case Example has been provided at the end of this document.
This document is broken into four main topics:
I
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1
Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2
Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction, personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:-
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ” Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1.Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2.What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4.Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical. What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Now that you know all about Earned Value Management (EVM) For this assignment, you will review
the Cost Management Plan developed in Assignment 1 and specifically the Rules of Performance
Measurement and Cost Reporting Format sections. You will modify these sections based on your
learnings.
Based on your new advanced knowledge, you have decided to use the following four EVM concepts
in your project:
Cost Variance (CV)
Schedule Variance (SV)
Cost Performance Index (CPI)
Schedule Performance Index (SPI)
For groups that want to exceed my expectations, your group can also additionally use the following
concept:
To Complete Performance Index (TCPI)
2. High-Level Requirements
Create a copy of your final Assignment # 1 submission and update the Rules of Performance
Measurement and Cost Reporting Format sections.
Rules of Performance Measurement section:
Describe Earned Value Management and describe EVM in terms a regular manager would
understand. Note: You can use AI for this but keep the descriptions short!
Write a description for each of the four EVM concepts listed above. (ie. CV, SV, CPI, SPI)
Cost Reporting Format section:
Design a report using Excel that will document these calculations by week (or month). Don’t
forget to include columns for the data that generates these metrics. (ie. EV, AC, PV)
Create a graph of the CPI and SPI, by week
Create an example of the report and the graph using at least 10 data points. (10 weeks or
10 months).
Include a screen cap of both in the Cost Management Plan.
Note you can use made-up numbers… you don’t need to calculate EV, AC and PV from any
of your cost estimates) I just want to see the formulas work and you have a nice trending
graph. (Trending up or down, your choice, just make it reasonable)
Include the Excel worksheet in your assignment submission.
Page 2
3. Deliverables
MS Word document with a revised Cost Management Plan with updated Rules of
Performance Measurement and Cost Reporting Fo
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Assignment 2
PRM1003 – Project Cost Management
Group Number: 8
Group Name: Pros
Submitted to: Kevin Bryanton
Submitted on: September 15, 2023
Table of Contents
Define Activities ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Work Breakdown Structure…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4
DURATION ESTIMATES …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
DURATION ESTIMATING WORKSHEET …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6
ACTIVITY COST ESTIMATES ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7
COST ESTIMATING WORKSHEET…………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9
BOTTOM-UP ESTIMATING WORKSHEET………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
Assumption log …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 11
REFERENCES ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 12
Define Activities
Project: City Park Renovation
1. Project Initiation
1.1. Project Charter Development
1.2. Stakeholder Identification and Analysis
1.3. Project Approval
2. Planning
2.1. Project Management Plan Development
2.2. Budget and Cost Management Plan Development
2.3. Scope Definition and Requirements Gathering
2.4. Detailed Park Renovation Planning and Designing
3. Execution
3.1. Playground Renovation
3.1.1. Installation of New Equipment and Safety Surfaces
3.2. Park Lighting Upgrade
3.3. Landscaping Improvements
3.3.1. Planting Native Trees and Shrubs
3.4. Installation of Picnic Areas, Benches, and Trash Receptacles
3.5. Walking Paths and Trails Improvement
3.6. Addition of Eco-friendly Amenities
3.6.1. Rain Gardens and Recycling Stations
3.7. Community Engagement Activities
3.7.1. Surveys and Public Meetings
3.8. Quality Control and Inspection
3.9. Cost Management
3.9.1. Cost Data Collection
3.9.2. Cost Reporting and Communication
4. Closure
4.1.1. Final Inspection and Acceptance
4.1.2. Project Completion Report
4.1.3. Handover to the Greater Sudbury City Council
5. Contingency Planning
5.1.1. Allocation and Management of Contingency Budget
Work Breakdown Structure
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date: 11-10-2023
0
City Park Renovation
1
2
3
4
5
Project Initiation
Planning
Execution
Closure
Contingency Planning
1.1
2.1
3.1
4.1
Project Charter
Development
Project Management
Plan Development
Playground
Renovation
Final Inspection and
Acceptance
1.2
2.2
Stakeholder
Identification and
Analysis
Budget and Cost
Management Plan
Development
1.3
Scope Definition and
Requirements
Gathering
2.23
Project Approval
3.2
Park Lighting Upgrade
3.3
Landscaping
Improvements
2.4
I3.4
Detailed Park
Renovation Planning
and Designing
istallation of Picnic
Areas, Benches, and
Trash Receptacles
3.5
Walking Paths and
Trails Improvement
3.6
Addition of Ecofriendly Amenities
3.7
Community
Engagement Activities
3.8
Quality Control and
Inspection
3.9
Cost Mana3.gement
4.2
Project Completion
Report
4.3
Handover to the
Greater Sudbury City
Council
5.1
Allocation and
Management of
Contingency Budget
DURATION ESTIMATES
Project Title: City Park Renovation
WBS ID
Activity Description
1.1
Project Charter Development
1.2
Stakeholder Identification and
Analysis
1.3
Project Approval
2.1
Project Management Plan
Development
2.2
Budget and Cost Management Plan
Development
2.3
Scope Definition and Requirements
Gathering
2.4
Detailed Park Renovation Planning
and Designing
3.1.1
Installation of New Equipment and
Safety Surfaces
Date Prepared: 11-10-2023
Effort Hours
Duration
Estimate
32
4 day
16
2 day
8
1 day
24
3 day
16
2 day
16
2 day
32
4 day
184
23 day
3.2
Park Lighting Upgrade
144
18 day
3.3.1
Planting Native Trees and Shrubs
104
13 day
3.4
Installation of Picnic Areas, Benches,
144
18 day
120
15 day
and Trash Receptacles
3.5
Walking Paths and Trails
Improvement
3.6.1
Rain Gardens and Recycling Stations
112
14 day
3.7.1
Surveys and Public Meetings
48
6 day
3.8
Quality Control and Inspection
24
3 day
3.9.1
Cost Data Collection
16
2 day
3.9.2
Cost Reporting and Communication
8
1 day
4.1.1
Final Inspection
16
2 day
DURATION ESTIMATING WORKSHEET
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date Prepared: 11-10-2023
Parametric Estimates
Resource
% Available
Performance
Duration
Factor
Estimate
WBS ID
Effort Hours
3.1.1
184
6
100%
1.0
30.66
3.2
144
4
80%
1.1
40.90
3.3.1
104
5
80%
1.0
26
3.4
144
7
100%
0.9
22.85
Previous
Previous
Current
Activity
Duration
Activity
Multiplier
Duration Estimate
1.1
Similar project
7 day
1.2
8.4 day
2.1
Similar project
13 day
1.2
15.6 day
2.4
Similar project
6 day
1.2
7.2
3.6.1
Similar project
16 day
1.2
19.2
Quantity
Analogous Estimates
WBS ID
For this
project
For this
project
For this
project
For this
project
Note: Took multiplier 1.2 as this project is 20% bigger than the similar project
Three-Point Estimates
Optimistic
Most Likely
Pessimistic
Weighting
Expected Duration
Duration
Duration
Duration
Equation
Estimate
3.5
48
28
56
Equation A
42
3.7.1
56
70
82
Equation A
70
3.8
14
21
28
Equation A
21
3.9.1
14
21
28
Equation A
21
3.9.2
14
14
21
Equation A
15.12
WBS ID
Note: Equation A: Optimistic + 4 x Most Likely + Pessimistic) / 6
ACTIVITY COST ESTIMATES
WBS
ID
1.1
Project
Manager
12000
NA
NA
12000
Parametric A full-time
project manager.
Estimate
Basis of
Estimates
Historical
data
1.2
Stakeholder
Analyst
4500
NA
NA
4500
Parametric A part-time
stakeholder
Estimate
analyst.
2.4
Planning
Team,
Engineer
and
Landscape
Architect
14000
NA
700
14700
4.1.1
Safety
Inspector
2000
NA
NA
3.0
Labour
65000
NA
NA
Resource
Playground
equipment
and Safety
3.1.1
surface
materials
Surfaces
3.2
Electrician
Lighting
fixtures and
Labour Physical
Reserve Estimate
Costs
Costs
Method
NA
20000
2200
Assumptions/
Constraints
4000
200
Confidence
Level
-5%/+10%
High
Historical
data
-5%/+10%
High
Parametric A small planning
team.
Estimate
Historical
data
-5%/+10%
Medium to
high
2000
Parametric The involvement
of a safety
Estimate
inspector
Historical
data
-5%/+10%
High
65000
Parametric Able to find
cheap labour
Estimate
Historical
data
-5%/+10%
Medium
22200
Parametric
Estimate
Moderate
investment in
playground
equipment.
6700
Parametric of lighting
fixtures and
Estimate
The replacement
2500
Range
bulbs.
Industry
standards
Medium to
and
10%/+25% high
market
value
Industry
standards
10%/+25% High
and
market
bulbs
3.3.1
3.4
Native Trees
and Shrubs
Picnic tables
Benches
Trash
receptacles
Pavement
materials,
Gravel or
3.5
pebbles for
trails
Plants for
rain gardens
3.6.1 and
Recycling
bins
Meeting
materials
3.7.1
(chairs,
tables, etc.)
NA
3750
350
4100
Parametric The planting of
native trees and
Estimate
shrubs
NA
8000
400
8400
Parametric The installation
of picnic tables.
Estimate
NA
21500
2100
23500
Parametric
Estimate
The use of
quality
pavement
materials.
NA
1200
120
1320
Parametric The planting of
plants for rain
Estimate
gardens
1500
NA
NA
150
Parametric Expenses for
meeting
Estimate
materials.
value
Industry
standards
Medium to
and
10%/+25% high
market
value
Industry
standards
and
10%/+25% Medium
market
value
Industry
standards
and
10%/+25% High
market
value
Industry
standards
Medium to
and
10%/+25% high
market
value
Industry
standards
and
-5%/+10% Medium
market
value
COST ESTIMATING WORKSHEET
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date Prepared: 11-10-2023
Parametric Estimates
WBS ID
3.1.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.3.1
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.5
3.6.1
3.6.1
Material
Safety Surface Materials
Playground Equipment
Lighting Fixtures and
Bulbs
Native Trees and Shrubs
Picnic Tables
Benches
Trash Receptacles
Pavement Materials
Gravel or Pebbles for
Trails
Plants for Rain Gardens
Recycling Bins
Cost
Variable
feet
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Feet
Cubic yard
Plant
Unit
Cost per
Unit (CAD)
15 per Sqft.
2000 /U
200 per
fixture
75 per plant
300/U
200/U
100/U
10/Sqft.
50 cubic
yard
25/P
75/U
Number of
Units
800 Sqft
4
Cost Estimate
(CAD)
12000
8000
20
4000
50
10
15
20
2000 Sqft
3750
3000
3000
2000
20000
30 cubic yard
1500
20
10
500
750
BOTTOM-UP ESTIMATING WORKSHEET
Project Title: City park renovation
Date prepared: 11-10-2023
WBS
ID
Labour
Hours
Labour
rate
Total
labour
Other direct
costs
Indirect
costs
Reserves
Estimate
1.1
32
$50/hour
$1,600
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$1,600
1.2
16
$45/hour
$720
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$720
1.3
8
$40/hour
$320
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$320
2.1
24
$60/hour
$1,440
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$1,440
2.2
16
$40/hour
$640
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$640
2.3
16
$40/hour
$640
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$640
2.4
32
$70/hour
$2,240
–
–
–
–
–
–
$700
$2,940
3.1.1
184
$30/hour
$5,520
$22,200
–
–
–
–
–
–
$27,720
3.2
144
$40/hour
$5,760
$6,700
–
–
–
–
–
–
$12,460
3.3.1
104
$50/hour
$5,200
$4,100
–
–
–
–
–
–
$9,300
3.4
144
$60/hour
$8,640
$8,400
–
–
–
–
–
–
$17,040
3.5
120
$50/hour
$6,000
$23,500
–
–
–
–
–
–
$29,500
3.6.1
112
$30/hour
$3,360
$1,320
–
–
–
–
–
–
$4,680
3.7.1
48
$40/hour
$1,920
$150
–
–
–
–
–
–
$2,070
3.8
24
$30/hour
$720
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$720
3.9.1
16
$40/hour
$640
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$640
3.9.2
8
$40/hour
$320
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$320
4.1.1
16
$40/hour
$640
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
$640
Materials Supplies Equipment Travel
Total = 113,390
Assumption log
Due
Date
Actions
Project Manager
Ongoing
Regular check-ins and
communication to ensure
project manager availability.
The involvement of a landscape
architect.
Project Manager
Ongoing
General
The involvement of a safety
inspector.
Project Manager
Ongoing
4
General
Labor costs are estimated based
on the availability of cheap labor.
Project Manager
Ongoing
Continuously monitor labor
availability and costs.
Open
5
Playground
Equipment
There will be a moderate
investment in playground
equipment.
Project Manager
Ongoing
Verify the budget allocated for
playground equipment.
Open
6
Surface and
pavement
Materials
High-quality surface materials will
be used.
Construction team and
architect
Ongoing
7
Native Trees
and Shrubs
Native trees and shrubs will be
planted.
Project Manager
Ongoing
8
Picnic Tables,
Benches and
Trash
Receptacles
Goods will be installed.
Construction team and
architect
Ongoing
ID
Category
Assumption/Constraint
1
General
A full-time project manager will
be available throughout the
project.
2
General
3
Responsible
Party
Maintain regular
communication with the
landscape architect.
Ensure the safety inspector
remains engaged throughout
the project.
Regularly check the quality
and specifications of the
materials.
Coordinate with the landscape
architect and verify the
plantings.
Check the status of the all the
material installation.
Status Comments
Open
Open
Open
Open
A project manager’s
availability may change;
close monitoring is
required.
The architect’s schedule and
availability should be
tracked.
Monitor the safety
inspector’s ongoing
involvement.
Labor market conditions can
change; regular monitoring
is vital.
The budget should be
checked to ensure it aligns
with the assumption.
Quality should align with
the assumption; inspection
is needed.
Open
Ensure that plantings
adhere to the assumption.
Open
Ensure that installation
aligns with the project plan.
REFERENCES
•
•
(2017). A guide to the project management body of knowledge (PMBOK guide) / Project Management Institute. Other titles: PMBOK
guide (6th ed., pp. 231-238). Project Management Institute.
OpenAI. “How to estimate Cost for project Chat with GPT-3.5.” OpenAI Chatbot, September 28, 2023. How to estimate Cost for
project (openai.com).
ASSIGNMENT # 4
MANAGE COSTS
October 16, 2023
OVERVIEW
1. Control Costs
Now that you know all about Earned Value Management (EVM) For this assignment, you will review
the Cost Management Plan developed in Assignment 1 and specifically the Rules of Performance
Measurement and Cost Reporting Format sections. You will modify these sections based on your
learnings.
Based on your new advanced knowledge, you have decided to use the following four EVM concepts
in your project:
• Cost Variance (CV)
• Schedule Variance (SV)
• Cost Performance Index (CPI)
• Schedule Performance Index (SPI)
For groups that want to exceed my expectations, your group can also additionally use the following
concept:
• To Complete Performance Index (TCPI)
2. High-Level Requirements
Create a copy of your final Assignment # 1 submission and update the Rules of Performance
Measurement and Cost Reporting Format sections.
Rules of Performance Measurement section:
• Describe Earned Value Management and describe EVM in terms a regular manager would
understand. Note: You can use AI for this but keep the descriptions short!
• Write a description for each of the four EVM concepts listed above. (ie. CV, SV, CPI, SPI)
Cost Reporting Format section:
• Design a report using Excel that will document these calculations by week (or month). Don’t
forget to include columns for the data that generates these metrics. (ie. EV, AC, PV)
• Create a graph of the CPI and SPI, by week
• Create an example of the report and the graph using at least 10 data points. (10 weeks or
10 months).
• Include a screen cap of both in the Cost Management Plan.
• Note you can use made-up numbers… you don’t need to calculate EV, AC and PV from any
of your cost estimates) I just want to see the formulas work and you have a nice trending
graph. (Trending up or down, your choice, just make it reasonable)
• Include the Excel worksheet in your assignment submission.
Page 1
3. Deliverables
• MS Word document with a revised Cost Management Plan with updated Rules of
Performance Measurement and Cost Reporting Format sections
• Excel spreadsheet with report example and graph.
4. Due Friday, October 20th, 2023 @ 11:59PM
Page 2
Assignment 1: Cost Management Plan
PRM1003 – Project Cost Management
Submitted to: Kevin Bryanton
Submitted on: October 1, 2023
Table of Contents
PROJECT CHARTER ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1
COST MANAGEMENT PLAN…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3
ASSUMPTION LOG……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5
REFERENCES ……………………………………………………………………………………… Error! Bookmark not defined.
PROJECT CHARTER
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Project Sponsor: Greater Sudbury City Council
Date Prepared: 9/27/2023
Project Manager: Amandeep
Project Customer: Residents of Sudbury
Project Purpose:
The purpose of the Project is to provide the state-of-the-art modern Central Park with modern
facilities to enhance customer/residents experience of the facility.
High-Level Project Description:
Renovation of the Central City Park, which includes the addition of new play areas, jogging tracks,
and landscaping.
Key Deliverables:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Detailed Park renovation plans and designs.
Upgraded playground equipment and safety surfaces.
Improved Park lighting.
Landscaping and greenery enhancements.
New picnic areas, benches, and trash receptacles.
Enhanced walking paths and trails.
Installation of eco-friendly amenities.
Community engagement reports and feedback summaries.
High-Level Requirements:
1. The renovation of the city park must meet all technical construction requirements for the
Province of Ontario and follow all health and safety requirements for the province.
Project Objectives
1.Renovation of existing playgrounds, including
installation of new equipment and safety
surfaces.
2.Upgrading Park lighting for improved safety
during evening hours.
3.Landscaping improvements, including planting
native trees and shrubs.
Page |1
Due Date
7/30/2024
6/30/2024
9/30/2024
4.Installation of picnic areas, benches, and trash
receptacles.
5.Improvement of walking paths and trails.
6.Addition of eco-friendly amenities such as rain
gardens and recycling stations.
7.Community engagement activities, including
surveys and public meetings.
10/25/2024
7/26/2024
9/27/2024
3/30/2024
Preapproved Financial Resources:
This project has pre-approved funding of CAD 500,00.00
Project Exit Criteria:
The project must be completed to the satisfaction of the customer, must meet quality
expectations. It must also pass all required inspections by various levels of the Canadian
government and City of Greater Sudbury Agencies.
Page |2
COST MANAGEMENT PLAN
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Units of Measure:
Canadian Dollars
Date Prepared: 9/27/2023
Level of Precision:
Nearest whole Dollar
Level of Accuracy:
+/- 5%
Organizational Procedure Links:
The cost management procedures for this project will follow the guidelines outlined in the
“City Park Renovation Project Management Plan” dated 9/1/2023.
Control Thresholds:
•
•
Cost Overrun Threshold: Any cost overrun exceeding 5% of the approved budget
will trigger an immediate review and approval process.
Change Order Threshold: Any proposed change orders with a cost impact
exceeding $10,000 will require approval from the Project Sponsor.
Rules of Performance Measurement:
•
•
Cost Performance Measurement: Cost performance will be measured using
Earned Value Analysis (EVA), comparing planned vs. actual costs, and analyzing the
Cost Performance Index (CPI) regularly.
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs): KPIs will include CPI, Cost Variance (CV), and
Estimate at Completion (EAC).
Cost Reporting and Format:
•
•
•
•
Page |3
Cost Data Collection: Costs will be tracked and collected through project
accounting software and verified through invoices and receipts.
Reporting Frequency: Monthly cost reports will be generated and distributed to
the Project Manager and stakeholders.
Cost Reports Format: Reports will include a summary of actual vs. budgeted costs,
cost breakdown by category (labor, materials, equipment, etc.), and a narrative
explaining any significant cost variances.
Stakeholder Communication: Any significant cost variances exceeding 10% will be
communicated to stakeholders within one week of identification.
Additional Details:
•
•
•
•
Page |4
Cost Estimation Methodology: Cost estimates are based on historical data from
similar park renovation projects, adjusted for inflation. Any changes to estimates
will be documented and communicated to stakeholders.
Procurement Strategy: We will follow a competitive bidding process for major
contracts and procure materials from approved suppliers to ensure costeffectiveness.
Contingency Plan: A 10% contingency budget has been allocated to cover
unforeseen expenses. Any withdrawals from the contingency budget will require
approval from the Project Sponsor.
Cost Tracking Responsibility: The Project Accountant will be responsible for
tracking costs, and the Project Manager will oversee cost management.
ASSUMPTION LOG
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date Prepared: 9/27/2023
ID
Category
Assumption/Constraint
001
Project Scope
We assume that the
project scope and
requirements are
accurately defined.
Project
Manager
3/5/2024
002
Resource
Availability
We assume that
adequate skilled
labour and equipment
will be available.
Project
Manager/
Contractor
3/13/2024
003
Budget
We assume that the
approved project
budget (C$500,000) is
sufficient for
procurement.
Project
Manager
4/9/2024
Page |5
Responsible
Party
Due Date
Actions
Status
Comments
Get the scope
baselined
Open
Identify the
required skilled
labour resources
and equipment
suppliers for the
project.
Keep
monitoring and
controlling the
budget.
Open
Reviewed the
scope baseline
with the
project
stakeholders
and got their
approval.
The initial
assessment of
resource
availability is
underway.
Open
The cost
management
plan is
finalized.
Budget review
will be initiated
on the go
according to
the cost
management
plan.
004
Legal
We assume that all
Requirements necessary permits and
approvals will be
obtained.
Project
Manager/
Contractor
2/29/2024
1. Compile a
Open
list of all
required
permits and
approvals for
the project.
2. Reach out to
the
respective
parties to
obtain the
permits.
005
Page |6
Supplier
Selection
We assume that
suitable suppliers for
pylons, erosion
barriers, and decking
are available.
Project
Manager/
Contractor
4/17/2024
1. Conduct
thorough
market
research to
identify
potential
suppliers in
the region or
industry
specializing
in pylons,
Open
Legal
requirements
are listed and
planning to
contact the
authorities
such as the
local
government,
Maritime
Authority,
Environmental
Protection
Agency,
Building and
Construction
Authority and
Building and
Construction
Authority
Initial research
has identified
several
potential
suppliers in the
region.
However,
responses to
the Request for
Information
(RFI) are yet to
erosion
barriers, and
decking
materials.
be received
from multiple
suppliers.
2. Send out
RFIs to the
identified
suppliers to
gather
detailed
information
about their
products,
services,
pricing, lead
times, and
capacity.
3. Issue RFQs or
RFPs to a
selected list
of suppliers
that meet
the
qualification
criteria.
006
Page |7
Weather
Conditions
We assume that the
weather conditions
Project
Manager/
Contractor
10/31/2024
1. Conduct a
detailed
weather risk
Open
A
comprehensive
weather risk
will be favourable for
the construction.
assessment
to identify
potential
weather
related risks
and their
impacts on
construction
activities.
2. Develop a
flexible
construction
schedule
that allows
for
adjustments
based on
weather
forecasts.
3. Develop a
flexible
construction
schedule
that allows
for
adjustments
based on
weather
forecasts.
Page |8
assessment has
been
conducted,
identifying
potential risks
and mitigation
strategies.
Also, A flexible
construction
schedule has
been
developed,
allowing for
adjustments
based on
weather
forecasts.
Furthermore,
Contingency
plans have
been drafted,
outlining
specific actions
to be taken in
response to
adverse
weather
conditions.
008
Safety
Regulations
We assume that all
Project
safety regulations and Manager/
protocols will be
Contractor
followed to ensure the
safety of the beach
walkers as same as the
labour.
11/4/2023
1. Ensure that
Open
all project
stakeholders,
including
labour and
contractors,
are familiar
with local
and national
safety
regulations
and
standards.
2. Conduct
safety
training and
orientation
sessions for
all project
personnel,
emphasizing
the
importance
of adhering
to safety
regulations.
Page |9
Comprehensive
safety
protocols and
procedures
development is
in progress.
Project Charter
City Park Renovation Project
Project Overview
Project Name: City Park Renovation Project
Project ID: CPRP-2023
Project Sponsor: [JOHN SMITH]
Project Manager: [AMANDEEP SINGH]
Project Start Date: [1 OCT 2023]
Project End Date: [26 DEC 2023]
Project Objectives
1. Enhance Park Facilities: Improve and upgrade the existing park facilities to provide a safer and more enjoyable experience for park
visitors.
2. Environmental Sustainability: Integrate eco-friendly design and materials to reduce the park’s environmental footprint.
3. Community Engagement: Foster community involvement in the planning and design phases of the project to ensure the park meets the
needs and desires of local residents.
4. Budget Adherence: Complete the renovation within the allocated budget and timeline.
5. Compliance: Ensure all renovations meet local regulations, safety standards, and accessibility guidelines.
P a g e | 10
Project Scope
In Scope
1. Renovation of existing playgrounds, including installation of new equipment and safety surfaces.
2. Upgrading park lighting for improved safety during evening hours.
3. Landscaping improvements, including planting native trees and shrubs.
4. Installation of picnic areas, benches, and trash receptacles.
5. Improvement of walking paths and trails.
6. Addition of eco-friendly amenities such as rain gardens and recycling stations.
7. Community engagement activities, including surveys and public meetings.
Out of Scope
1. Construction of new buildings or structures.
2. Extensive excavation or ground disturbance.
3. Major changes to the park layout or design that significantly alter the park’s character.
P a g e | 11
Project Stakeholders
1. Project Sponsor: [JOHN SMITH]
2. Project Manager: [AMANDEEP SINGH]
3. City Council Representatives: [JASON]
4. Park Visitors: Local residents, families, and community members.
5. Environmental Agencies: [SUDBURY ECO]
6. Local Businesses: [CONSTRUCTION COMPANY]
7. Contractors and Suppliers: [WILSON]
Project Deliverables
1. Detailed Park renovation plans and designs.
2. Upgraded playground equipment and safety surfaces.
3. Improved Park lighting.
4. Landscaping and greenery enhancements.
5. New picnic areas, benches, and trash receptacles.
6. Enhanced walking paths and trails.
7. Installation of eco-friendly amenities.
8. Community engagement reports and feedback summaries.
P a g e | 12
Project Milestones
1. Project Initiation: [1 OCT – 15 OCT]
2. Design and Planning Phase: [16 OCT – 25 OCT]
3. Community Engagement: [27OCT – 1 NOV]
4. Construction Phase: [2 NOV-29 NOV]
5. Quality Assurance and Testing: 1 DEC – 10 DEC]
6. Project Closure: [12 DEC -16 DEC ]
Project Constraints
1. Budget: The project budget is set at [Insert Budget Amount] and must not be exceeded.
2. Timeline: The project must be completed by [Insert End Date].
3. Regulatory Compliance: All renovations must adhere to local building codes, safety standards, and environmental regulations.
4. Weather: Weather conditions may impact construction schedules and outdoor work.
5. Community Feedback: The project must incorporate input from park visitors, which may lead to scope adjustments.
Assumptions
1. Funding for the project will be secured as planned.
2. Environmental assessments will not reveal any significant obstacles.
3. Community engagement efforts will result in constructive feedback.
4. Contractors and suppliers will perform their work satisfactorily.
5. The project team will effectively manage and communicate project progress.
P a g e | 13
Risks
1. Unforeseen weather events could delay construction.
2. Budget constraints may require scope reductions.
3. Community disagreements could impact project progress.
4. Supply chain disruptions may affect the availability of materials.
5. Regulatory changes could impact project compliance.
Project Approval
This City Park Renovation Project Charter is hereby approved and accepted by the undersigned parties.
Project Sponsor: [JOHN SMITH]
Project Manager: [AMANDEEP SINGH]
City Council Representatives: [TOM DAVIS]
Date: [1 SEP2023]
P a g e | 14
REFERENCES
1. OpenAI. “Project Cost Management Chat with GPT-3.5.” OpenAI Chatbot, September 28, 2023. Cost Management Plan
(openai.com).
2. (2017). A guide to the project management body of knowledge (PMBOK guide) / Project Management Institute. Other titles:
PMBOK guide (6th ed., pp. 231-238). Project Management Institute.
P a g e | 15
Assignment 3
PRM1003 – Project Cost Management
Group Number: 8
Group Name: Pros
Amandeep Singh –
Lovepreet Singh –
Richard Andrew Appiah –
Submitted to: Kevin Bryanton
Submitted on: September 16, 2023
Table of Contents
Define Activities …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Work Breakdown Structure……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4
DURATION ESTIMATES ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
DURATION ESTIMATING WORKSHEET ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 6
ACTIVITY COST ESTIMATES ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 8
COST ESTIMATING WORKSHEET……………………………………………………………………………………………… 10
BOTTOM-UP ESTIMATING WORKSHEET…………………………………………………………………………………… 11
Assumption log ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 12
COST BASELINE …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13
COST BASELINE GRAPH …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 14
FUNDING REQUIREMENTS …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15
COST BASELINE WITH FUNDING REQUIREMENTS GRAPH ………………………………………………………….. 16
REFERENCES ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 16
Define Activities
Project: City Park Renovation
1. Project Initiation
1.1. Project Charter Development
1.2. Stakeholder Identification and Analysis
1.3. Project Approval
2. Planning
2.1. Project Management Plan Development
2.2. Budget and Cost Management Plan Development
2.3. Scope Definition and Requirements Gathering
2.4. Detailed Park Renovation Planning and Designing
3. Execution
3.1. Playground Renovation
3.1.1. Installation of New Equipment and Safety Surfaces
3.2. Park Lighting Upgrade
3.3. Landscaping Improvements
3.3.1. Planting Native Trees and Shrubs
3.4. Installation of Picnic Areas, Benches, and Trash Receptacles
3.5. Walking Paths and Trails Improvement
3.6. Addition of Eco-friendly Amenities
3.6.1. Rain Gardens and Recycling Stations
3.7. Community Engagement Activities
3.7.1. Surveys and Public Meetings
3.8. Quality Control and Inspection
3.9. Cost Management
3.9.1. Cost Data Collection
3.9.2. Cost Reporting and Communication
4. Closure
4.1.1. Final Inspection and Acceptance
4.1.2. Project Completion Report
4.1.3. Handover to the Greater Sudbury City Council
5. Contingency Planning
5.1.1. Allocation and Management of Contingency Budget
Work Breakdown Structure
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date: 11-10-2023
0
City Park Renovation
1
2
3
4
5
Project Initiation
Planning
Execution
Closure
Contingency Planning
1.1
2.1
3.1
4.1
Project Charter
Development
Project Management
Plan Development
Playground
Renovation
Final Inspection and
Acceptance
1.2
2.2
Stakeholder
Identification and
Analysis
Budget and Cost
Management Plan
Development
1.3
Scope Definition and
Requirements
Gathering
2.23
Project Approval
3.2
Park Lighting Upgrade
3.3
Landscaping
Improvements
2.4
I3.4
Detailed Park
Renovation Planning
and Designing
istallation of Picnic
Areas, Benches, and
Trash Receptacles
3.5
Walking Paths and
Trails Improvement
3.6
Addition of Ecofriendly Amenities
3.7
Community
Engagement Activities
3.8
Quality Control and
Inspection
3.9
Cost Mana3.gement
4.2
Project Completion
Report
4.3
Handover to the
Greater Sudbury City
Council
5.1
Allocation and
Management of
Contingency Budget
DURATION ESTIMATES
Project Title: City Park Renovation
WBS ID
Activity Description
1.1
Project Charter Development
1.2
Stakeholder Identification and
Analysis
1.3
Project Approval
2.1
Project Management Plan
Development
2.2
Budget and Cost Management Plan
Development
2.3
Scope Definition and Requirements
Gathering
2.4
Detailed Park Renovation Planning
and Designing
3.1.1
Installation of New Equipment and
Safety Surfaces
Date Prepared: 11-10-2023
Effort Hours
Duration
Estimate
32
4 day
16
2 day
8
1 day
24
3 day
16
2 day
16
2 day
32
4 day
184
23 day
3.2
Park Lighting Upgrade
144
18 day
3.3.1
Planting Native Trees and Shrubs
104
13 day
3.4
Installation of Picnic Areas,
144
18 day
120
15 day
112
14 day
Benches, and Trash Receptacles
3.5
Walking Paths and Trails
Improvement
3.6.1
Rain Gardens and Recycling
Stations
3.7.1
Surveys and Public Meetings
48
6 day
3.8
Quality Control and Inspection
24
3 day
3.9.1
Cost Data Collection
16
2 day
3.9.2
Cost Reporting and Communication
8
1 day
4.1.1
Final Inspection
16
2 day
DURATION ESTIMATING WORKSHEET
Project Title: City Park Renovation
Date Prepared: 11-10-2023
Parametric Estimates
Resource
% Available
Performance
Duration
Factor
Estimate
WBS ID
Effort Hours
3.1.1
184
6
100%
1.0
30.66
3.2
144
4
80%
1.1
40.90
3.3.1
104
5
80%
1.0
26
3.4
144
Write a 6-8 page paper on a topic within the study of management.
As discussed in class, at least 10 academic, peer reviewed sources should be cited within your paper using parenthetical citations per APA format and in a works cited list at the end of your paper.
This should be the topic you researched in your Annotated Bibliography unless you professor approved a new topic since you submitted your Annotated Bibliography.
The 6-8 required pages are the body of your paper and do not include the title page or your works cited. Do not include any charts, graphs, figures or images in your paper. The 6-8 required pages should be text only and should be formatted according to APA – double spaced, in 12 pt Times New Roman font. The section lengths suggested below are only suggestions and should be adjusted based on your research and your topic.
The paper should be written in Third person, past tense throughout (except for the future research section which should be written in future tense).
Your paper should be written using the following headings which will help you develop the paper into logical sections. Brief descriptions of each sections are offered below the headings:
Introduction (half page to a page)
A brief description of the topic you have chosen for your paper. A brief summary of your paper, including: your thesis statement, how you have supported that thesis with evidence,
Review of Extant Literature (a page to a page and a half)
A brief review of existing literature, made up of: an introductory paragraph explaining the main phases in the history of the topic; followed by a series of paragraph each explaining one of those phases.
Findings (two to three pages)
This section is the most important! This is the section where you will report the conclusions you came to based on what you found in your research. What can you actually say based on what you found?
Implications (half to one page)
A brief statement as to the implications to managers if the conclusions you have come to in your paper are true.
Future Research (half to one page)
A suggestion of what should be studied next, based on what you found as you were writing your paper.
2. You will write persuasively, including responding to challenges to your ideas
3. The plan will reflect substantial research and rigorous thinking
4. You will develop your business concept and Capstone plans as if you were fully intending to
launch it and to seek funding
5. The question you should continuously ask yourself as you develop your business plan is “Have I provided the compelling evidence needed for an angel investor or venture capital firm to back me?”
6. Financials Assumptions section (with an emphasis on the key revenue and expense assumptions.
7. The focus on this section is to tell your story with numbers. If you are asking for an investment from investor’s they want to see ROI, cash flow, cost considerations, and is idea scalable to warrant their initial investment.
After reading the assigned articles this week and the Robbins chapter on performance appraisal and considering our discussion of The Great Resignation in Discussion Question # 2, think about the relationship of performance appraisal to employee retention and satisfaction before and after the Covid pandemic. Answer the following questions. citing at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed references in each answer.Note that the Gabris and Ihrke article “Does performance appraisal contribute to heightened levels of employee burnout” The results of one study” was erroneously listed in our weekly schedule as a 2021 publication when it is actually a 2001 publication. For more recent articles on the performance appraisal/job satisfaction connection, read Dasanayaka, C. H., Abeykoon, C., Ranaweera, R. A. A. S. & Koswatte, I. (2021). The impact of the erformance appraisal process on job satisfaction of the academic staff in higher educational institutions. Education Sciences, 11(10), 623. https://doi.org/10.3390/educsci111006231. How does performance appraisal relate to employee job satisfaction?2. During the pandemic, the nature of work changed drastically with the majority of employees being unable to work from “the office.” What effects did this have on how performance appraisal could be done? What new techniques of performance appraisal arose and do you feel these will be lasting changes? 3. What is emotional intelligence? How does it relate to those who are conducting performance appraisals? To those who are being appraised? Use APA 7 format for all questions. No AI
Hope you can review my requirements in detail. First you need to complete the questions in the document. Secondly, you will see that there are three photos, which are also titles. Completing these questions requires answering questions and drawing pictures. I need the complete answer process. I will also provide some image photos based on which you will find the image I need.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Innovations in communications can cause shifts in the supply and/or demand for
transportation because they can be complementary, competitive, or cause changes
in consumer behaviour.
Explain how these communication innovations have affected transportation
markets, using an appropriate supply and/or demand model(s),
a) Videoconferencing e.g., Zoom
b) Online shopping e.g., Amazon
c) Synchronized traffic lights
d) Ride-sharing smartphone apps e.g., UBER
e) GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
Videoconferencing e.g., Zoom
P
S
D
D’
Q
Competitive: Airplane/Bus/Rail and Car Markets
Online shopping e.g., Amazon
P
P
S
S
D
D
D’
D’
Q
Complementary: Courier Delivery Market
Q
Competitive: Private Auto Market
Synchronized traffic lights
P
S’
S
D
D’
Q
Complementary: Urban Traffic Market
Ride-sharing smartphone apps e.g., UBER
P
S’
S
D
Q
Transformative: Taxi Market
GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
P
S’
S
D
Q
Complementary: Aviation Market
GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
P
S’
S
D
Q
Complementary: Trucking Market
Changing market conditions may allow trucking firms to make above normal
economic profits occasionally. This is not productivity efficient, but market forces
ensure that such inefficiency is not permanent. On the other hand, the railways can
make above normal economic profits on a regular basis, and they are neither
productively efficient, not allocatively efficient.
a) Use appropriate economic models to explain why economic profits in trucking
are temporary, while in the railways economic profits are typical.
b) Explain why the economic profits made by monopolies may not be so bad,
depending on their use, but the social welfare losses that they create are a real
problem.
Canada is an important exporter of wheat. This year the international markets have
been affected by the Russian blockade of the Ukraine wheat exports.
a) Use an appropriate model to explain how this blockade could change Canadian
wheat prices and exports.
b) The Russian invasion has also caused oil prices to rise which is a major input cost
for ocean shipping. Illustrate and explain whether this would impact Canadian
wheat prices and export. (You may use the same model, or to draw a second one.)
Canada
ROW
P
P
P
S
P
ES
S
P
Ed
D
D
Qd
Qs
Q
Q
P
Interregional Trade and
Transportation Demand Model
Qs
S
D
Q
Q
Qd
Q
Pea protein is the main ingredient used to produce “veggie burgers,” like Beyond
Beef. This week Beyond Beef announced layoffs. Analysts are suggesting that
consumers are switching to cheaper protein sources because inflation is cutting
into their food budgets.
a) Use an appropriate model to illustrate the impact that consumer behaviour is
having on the supply and demand for meat alternatives, and the peas that
farmers sell to make them.
b) Wage inflation and higher energy prices have made all supply chains more
expensive. Illustrate how this could be affecting the “veggie burger” and pea
prices. (You may use the same model, or to draw a second one.)
Price
DS
Retail
Pb
P’b
PD
PS
Farm
Pw
P’w
DD
Q’ Q
Veggie Burgs/Peas
Quantity
Price
DS
Retail
Pb
P’b
PD
PS
Farm
Pw
P’w
P’’w
DD
Q”Q’ Q
Veggie Burgs/Peas
Quantity
1. The elasticity of supply for Truckload (TL) trucking behaves differently during
economic expansions (boom periods) than it does during economic contractions
(recessionary periods).
a) Using an appropriate model explain how the TL trucking industry operates as if it
had a “kinked” supply curve, and why this occurs.
b) During a severe recession, some of the TL trucking companies will leave the
industry permanently. Using the model of a representative truckload trucking
company explain the conditions that could cause truckers to leave the industry.
c) Explain why the less-than-truckload (LTL) sector is less affected by these periods
of booms and recessions than the TL sector.
P
S shortrun
B
A
E
S longrun
C
GDP
F
D2
0
$
D
D1
Trucking
Rates
Q
Time
Rapid delivery of new trucks permits gradual expansion from A to C, while during recession, truckers take lower returns to ride
out the cycle, by moving down the shortrun supply curve from A to F. They do this because trucking is both their job, and in
many cases, their store of wealth. If the recession lasts too long, eventually some truckers are forced to leave and they end up at
point E. The industry adjusts to the size of the market because there is no alternative use for their assets.
Less-thanTruckload
Trucking
Productio
n
Possibility
Frontier
Truckload Trucking
As a recession progresses and freight rates fall,
the TL carriers are force to move down their
marginal cost curve. When they reach the point
that rates only cover the average variable costs,
they park the trucks. This is the shutdown point
where they are no longer making any contribution
to fixed costs.
The LTL carriers are less affect by the recession because they have
some market power, operating in a monopolistic competition
environment. There are fewer players, and less competition
because of the larger barrier to entry. Also, the LTL carriers have
economies of scope. They can operate some of their idle fleet of
trucks in the TL market. Finally, their customer base is much broader
with a myriad of small shippers, whereas the TL carriers may be
more dependent on one or two large shippers.
This figure illustrates five sizes of bulk
oil shipping tankers. Their capacities are
measured in dead-weight tons (DWT)
and their lengths are reported in metres.
a) Using an appropriate model(s), describe the economies size with respect to the
construction, operations and routing that determine these different sizes of ships.
b) Choose any two of these ships and explain with a model(s) the economies of
distance with respect to ship size.
c) How is it possible for small companies with only a few ships to compete with
big companies that have large fleets of ships. Use an appropriate model and
explain the economies of scale.
Using an appropriate model(s), describe the economies size with respect to the construction, operations and routing
that determine these different sizes of ships.
Construction follows the cube-square rule, in that
a ship twice as large does not require twice the
materials to build. In some cases, e.g., the bridge,
there may be no change at all.
Operations – A larger ship will have a similar crew
size and consume less fuel/t-km because water
resistance is not proportional to tonnage carried.
However, a larger ship will have a longer stay in
port loading and unloading.
Routing – Ships must observe minimum air and
water draft in order to use ports. Consequently,
their size prohibits them from certain ports, canals
and rivers.
Choose any two of these ships and explain with a model(s) the economies of distance with respect to ship size.
The cost of transport with respect to
distance can be divided into terminal
costs and linehaul costs. Smaller ships
have lower terminal costs because they
load and unload faster, while large ships
have lower linehaul costs because they
have lower fuel consumption per tonnekilometer. The heavy lines represent the
larger ships.
How is it possible for small companies with only a few ships to compete with big companies that have large fleets of
ships. Use an appropriate model and explain the economies of scale.
This answer applies to bulk shipping that
moves mainly full loads from port to port.
They have very low fixed costs other than
the ship, and no network economies.
Consequently they operate according to
constant economies of scale. The model
represents the impact of adding additional
ships to the fleet. Larger carrier make more
money in total, but not more per ship. Also,
it takes less effort to reach full utilization
with a smaller fleet than a large fleet, so they
can compete effectively with only a few
ships.
Innovations in communications can cause shifts in the supply and/or demand for
transportation because they can be complementary, competitive, or cause changes
in consumer behaviour.
Explain how these communication innovations have affected transportation
markets, using an appropriate supply and/or demand model(s),
a) Videoconferencing e.g., Zoom
b) Online shopping e.g., Amazon
c) Synchronized traffic lights
d) Ride-sharing smartphone apps e.g., UBER
e) GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
Videoconferencing e.g., Zoom
P
S
D
D’
Q
Competitive: Airplane/Bus/Rail and Car Markets
Online shopping e.g., Amazon
P
P
S
S
D
D
D’
D’
Q
Complementary: Courier Delivery Market
Q
Competitive: Private Auto Market
Synchronized traffic lights
P
S’
S
D
D’
Q
Complementary: Urban Traffic Market
Ride-sharing smartphone apps e.g., UBER
P
S’
S
D
Q
Transformative: Taxi Market
GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
P
S’
S
D
Q
Complementary: Aviation Market
GPS-Google Maps navigation systems
P
S’
S
D
Q
Complementary: Trucking Market
Changing market conditions may allow trucking firms to make above normal
economic profits occasionally. This is not productivity efficient, but market forces
ensure that such inefficiency is not permanent. On the other hand, the railways can
make above normal economic profits on a regular basis, and they are neither
productively efficient, not allocatively efficient.
a) Use appropriate economic models to explain why economic profits in trucking
are temporary, while in the railways economic profits are typical.
b) Explain why the economic profits made by monopolies may not be so bad,
depending on their use, but the social welfare losses that they create are a real
problem.
Canada is an important exporter of wheat. This year the international markets have
been affected by the Russian blockade of the Ukraine wheat exports.
a) Use an appropriate model to explain how this blockade could change Canadian
wheat prices and exports.
b) The Russian invasion has also caused oil prices to rise which is a major input cost
for ocean shipping. Illustrate and explain whether this would impact Canadian
wheat prices and export. (You may use the same model, or to draw a second one.)
Canada
ROW
P
P
P
S
P
ES
S
P
Ed
D
D
Qd
Qs
Q
Q
P
Interregional Trade and
Transportation Demand Model
Qs
S
D
Q
Q
Qd
Q
Pea protein is the main ingredient used to produce “veggie burgers,” like Beyond
Beef. This week Beyond Beef announced layoffs. Analysts are suggesting that
consumers are switching to cheaper protein sources because inflation is cutting
into their food budgets.
a) Use an appropriate model to illustrate the impact that consumer behaviour is
having on the supply and demand for meat alternatives, and the peas that
farmers sell to make them.
b) Wage inflation and higher energy prices have made all supply chains more
expensive. Illustrate how this could be affecting the “veggie burger” and pea
prices. (You may use the same model, or to draw a second one.)
Price
DS
Retail
Pb
P’b
PD
PS
Farm
Pw
P’w
DD
Q’ Q
Veggie Burgs/Peas
Quantity
Price
DS
Retail
Pb
P’b
PD
PS
Farm
Pw
P’w
P’’w
DD
Q”Q’ Q
Veggie Burgs/Peas
Quantity
1. The elasticity of supply for Truckload (TL) trucking behaves differently during
economic expansions (boom periods) than it does during economic contractions
(recessionary periods).
a) Using an appropriate model explain how the TL trucking industry operates as if it
had a “kinked” supply curve, and why this occurs.
b) During a severe recession, some of the TL trucking companies will leave the
industry permanently. Using the model of a representative truckload trucking
company explain the conditions that could cause truckers to leave the industry.
c) Explain why the less-than-truckload (LTL) sector is less affected by these periods
of booms and recessions than the TL sector.
P
S shortrun
B
A
E
S longrun
C
GDP
F
D2
0
$
D
D1
Trucking
Rates
Q
Time
Rapid delivery of new trucks permits gradual expansion from A to C, while during recession, truckers take lower returns to ride
out the cycle, by moving down the shortrun supply curve from A to F. They do this because trucking is both their job, and in
many cases, their store of wealth. If the recession lasts too long, eventually some truckers are forced to leave and they end up at
point E. The industry adjusts to the size of the market because there is no alternative use for their assets.
Less-thanTruckload
Trucking
Productio
n
Possibility
Frontier
Truckload Trucking
As a recession progresses and freight rates fall,
the TL carriers are force to move down their
marginal cost curve. When they reach the point
that rates only cover the average variable costs,
they park the trucks. This is the shutdown point
where they are no longer making any contribution
to fixed costs.
The LTL carriers are less affect by the recession because they have
some market power, operating in a monopolistic competition
environment. There are fewer players, and less competition
because of the larger barrier to entry. Also, the LTL carriers have
economies of scope. They can operate some of their idle fleet of
trucks in the TL market. Finally, their customer base is much broader
with a myriad of small shippers, whereas the TL carriers may be
more dependent on one or two large shippers.
This figure illustrates five sizes of bulk
oil shipping tankers. Their capacities are
measured in dead-weight tons (DWT)
and their lengths are reported in metres.
a) Using an appropriate model(s), describe the economies size with respect to the
construction, operations and routing that determine these different sizes of ships.
b) Choose any two of these ships and explain with a model(s) the economies of
distance with respect to ship size.
c) How is it possible for small companies with only a few ships to compete with
big companies that have large fleets of ships. Use an appropriate model and
explain the economies of scale.
Using an appropriate model(s), describe the economies size with respect to the construction, operations and routing
that determine these different sizes of ships.
Construction follows the cube-square rule, in that
a ship twice as large does not require twice the
materials to build. In some cases, e.g., the bridge,
there may be no change at all.
Operations – A larger ship will have a similar crew
size and consume less fuel/t-km because water
resistance is not proportional to tonnage carried.
However, a larger ship will have a longer stay in
port loading and unloading.
Routing – Ships must observe minimum air and
water draft in order to use ports. Consequently,
their size prohibits them from certain ports, canals
and rivers.
Choose any two of these ships and explain with a model(s) the economies of distance with respect to ship size.
The cost of transport with respect to
distance can be divided into terminal
costs and linehaul costs. Smaller ships
have lower terminal costs because they
load and unload faster, while large ships
have lower linehaul costs because they
have lower fuel consumption per tonnekilometer. The heavy lines represent the
larger ships.
How is it possible for small companies with only a few ships to compete with big companies that have large fleets of
ships. Use an appropriate model and explain the economies of scale.
This answer applies to bulk shipping that
moves mainly full loads from port to port.
They have very low fixed costs other than
the ship, and no network economies.
Consequently they operate according to
constant economies of scale. The model
represents the impact of adding additional
ships to the fleet. Larger carrier make more
money in total, but not more per ship. Also,
it takes less effort to reach full utilization
with a smaller fleet than a large fleet, so they
can compete effectively with only a few
ships.
This presentation consists of analyzing and discussing a journal article of
your choice from only the Journal of International Business Studies, International Business Review, Journal of International
Marketing, International Marketing Review, or Journal of International Management or Management International Review
published after 2000. These journals are available free of cost in the databases of our library. Your presentation must
include the objective(s) of the journal article, theory, hypotheses, and methodology used to test the hypotheses, results, and recommendations for international marketing managers. Please do not choose an article that does not have
hypotheses or propositions. Please prepare the assignment in
PowerPoint software for 15 minutes (including PowerPoint setup time).Your presentation must include academic journal citations. Please attach a copy of the journal article (please attach
the .pdf copy, but not a weblink as it may be password protected) on which the presentation is based. Please note that you must not show a video clip during the presentation, no matter how short the
clip is. Please note that you will get a C in
your presentation (and the class evaluation of your presentation will not be taken into account) if you (1) do not take an
article from either of the journals mentioned on this page; (2) do not discuss/show the theory on which the article is
based; (3) take article that is based on Hofstede’s old dimensions; (4) show video clips; (5) base your presentation on a
brand name, company, country, specific product, specific industry, case study; (6) do not show source of the article on
your slide; and, (7) speak too short or too long. Do not choose an article for presentation which does not have an explicit
theory or is based on a case study.
Assignment must be written in APA format, double spaced.
Section 7: Competitive Analysis
List who your major competitors are, and describe how they market their products. Your analysis should cover the competition’s size, market share (and growth), comparative quality, brand image, target markets and marketing strategies, and any other features that are relevant.
(STP) Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning
Identify your target market for your line and how you intend to fill the needs of this target market. Describe the target market using demographic, psychographic and behavioral information. Explain why you chose this particular market. Describe your position in the marketplace. Write a 3-4 page report describing this target market, how you chose this segment and your position in the market relative to competitors.
Section 8: Positioning Strategy
Based on what the major product attributes are and how your product and your competitors’ product are situated relative to these attributes, determine a strategy for positioning your product in the marketplace and in the minds of your consumers.
Section: 9 Product Strategy
The product or service is the central piece of your marketing plan, especially when your marketing plan is proposing a new product/service. This section should contain a detailed description of what is being offered – size, shape, design, structure, etc. Provide sketches or photos if possible (you can be put in an Appendix). Flesh out the product’s features (durability, reliability, etc.). Remember that all the characteristics of the product should stem from a deep understanding of what the customer needs and wants are. Describe the product that you intend to market. Describe fabrication, style and how this product differs from competitors’ products. How will the product meet the needs of your target market?
Your product strategy should describe the product/service as an entire package that you offer to the consumer. In addition to the core benefits outlined in prior sections, describe your augmented and potential product offerings (which will tie in with the Product Description section). Describe your product assortments, packaging, warranties and guarantees, customer service etc. If your marketing plan is focused on innovative service, describe the category of service and service-quality management strategies.
Section 10: SWOT
SWOT is an acronym for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats. This four part analysis is meant to succinctly outline the following points:
The internal strengths of your organization/product/service (e.g., strong brand name)
The internal weaknesses of your organization/product/service (e.g., inefficient distribution channels)
The external opportunities open to your organization/product/service (e.g., growing market)
The external threats (mainly, ones that your organization is not likely to have any control over) your organization/product/service may encounter (e.g., strong competitors)
This section can be written in bullet-point form; as long as you make sure each point is sufficiently explained.
Please use this link to get all of information, data, reference : https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1GQADCq69zc…Before you start the update #1, please check the project requirements again, make sure on the right way.For update #1, we only need the slides to show what have done, which focus on more details about project, like data, Econometric Methods, Empirical Results, Evaluation (relevant mostly for forecasting projects)The slides can not more than 7 mins. 6 mins is fine
First, choose of a dividend-paying, publicly-traded company. The objective is to:
Prepare a financial analysis of the company;
Develop financial projections for this company, explicitly projecting future dividends and compare those to projections produced by Value Line;
Prepare a valuation of this company utilizing two of the following three methods: the dividend discount model, the free-cash flow model or the P/E model;
Justify your valuation relative to current valuations of your company and broader market valuations; and
Produce an investment recommendation for your company.
Content of your report:
Based on class discussions, please complete the following sections within your report:
Description: describe your company, the industry it operates in, and your company’s position (i.e. leadership) in the industry;
Financial Statement Analysis: prepare all the financial ratios in a separate exhibit, and within this section, evaluate the company’s profitability, efficiency and financial stability based upon the relevant measures applicable to this firm;
Financial Projections: based on the information from your financial statement analysis, prepare financial projections (hint: limit your horizon to 3-5 years), making assumptions regarding the dividend payout ratio to project future dividends and/or cash flows to equity holders;
Valuation: based on your dividend projections, prepare a valuation of your company utilizing two of the three valuation methods identified above; compare and justify this valuation relative to Value Line, Bloomberg valuations and other methodologies (P/E, Price/Book).
Recommendation/Conclusion: present your recommendation for your company, interpreting your results and present your recommendation (i.e. overvalued, undervalued, or in equilibium) along with a discussion any limitations of your study.
Prepare a word-processed report (maximum of 5 pages written excluding tables and other supporting material, and all supporting tables, balance sheets, income statements, graphs, computations, and copies of data sources and detailed bibliography).
Evaluation:
This paper will be evaluated based upon:
the application of the concepts discussed in Chapters 7, 8, 13 and 14; and
the approach toward developing this security analysis that is consistent with your conclusions.
Be sure to include the Value Line report for each of the firms analyzed.First, choose of a dividend-paying, publicly-traded company. The objective is to:
Prepare a financial analysis of the company;
Develop financial projections for this company, explicitly projecting future dividends and compare those to projections produced by Value Line;
Prepare a valuation of this company utilizing two of the following three methods: the dividend discount model, the free-cash flow model or the P/E model;
Justify your valuation relative to current valuations of your company and broader market valuations; and
Produce an investment recommendation for your company.
Content of your report:
Based on class discussions, please complete the following sections within your report:
Description: describe your company, the industry it operates in, and your company’s position (i.e. leadership) in the industry;
Financial Statement Analysis: prepare all the financial ratios in a separate exhibit, and within this section, evaluate the company’s profitability, efficiency and financial stability based upon the relevant measures applicable to this firm;
Financial Projections: based on the information from your financial statement analysis, prepare financial projections (hint: limit your horizon to 3-5 years), making assumptions regarding the dividend payout ratio to project future dividends and/or cash flows to equity holders;
Valuation: based on your dividend projections, prepare a valuation of your company utilizing two of the three valuation methods identified above; compare and justify this valuation relative to Value Line, Bloomberg valuations and other methodologies (P/E, Price/Book).
Recommendation/Conclusion: present your recommendation for your company, interpreting your results and present your recommendation (i.e. overvalued, undervalued, or in equilibium) along with a discussion any limitations of your study.
Prepare a word-processed report (maximum of 5 pages written excluding tables and other supporting material, and all supporting tables, balance sheets, income statements, graphs, computations, and copies of data sources and detailed bibliography).
Evaluation:
This paper will be evaluated based upon:
the application of the concepts discussed in Chapters 7, 8, 13 and 14; and
the approach toward developing this security analysis that is consistent with your conclusions.
Be sure to include the Value Line report for each of the firms analyzed.
This activity requires the use of the Class Survey Data File. You must download the file to edit, copy, and use the data. Below are 2 Word and 1 Excel files: follow the Directions (1) to complete the assignment, copy the Z Data and t data from the Class Survey Data Set into the 1 Sample HT Calculator
1. Complete literature review on the article that is attached.2. Complete an 8-10 PowerPoint presentation. The presentation will focus on an overview of the literature discussed in the literature review that you wrote. The presentation should last no more than 10 minutes.
To successfully complete a research project in the field, you’ll need to understand the research of the field, and to analyze and synthesize it. In this assignment, you’ll take the first step by analyzing the research component of articles for a topic of your choice.
Preparation
You will be using these resources as part of your literature review in Week 7 and to help support a proposed research study of your choosing in Week 9. Note that the assignments in this course build on one another. It is a good idea to look ahead to the assignments in Weeks 5, 7, and 9, and begin to think about a topic you might be interested in researching. This is also a good time to select articles for this assignment that will help support your ideas for the Weeks 7 and 9 assignments. Keep the same topic for your Week 5 assignment, but choose different articles—this will ensure you start work on your Week 7 assignment with enough articles.
Neurobiology of Ecstasy (MDMA) abuse.
Progression of reading ability in a child diagnosed with autism.
Effectiveness of a new drug to treat depression.
You are not limited to these topics but may choose one of these if you are interested. These are listed to help give you an idea of types of appropriate topics.
Use the APA Paper Template [DOCX] Download APA Paper Template [DOCX]to format your paper.
Use the following organization:
Introduction:
Describe the topic of the paper.
Describe the search strategy you used to include: keywords, library databases, and why you chose these.
For each article, provide the following:
The research method(s) used in the articles reviewed.
Key variables in the hypothesis or phenomena of interest.
Description of how the hypothesis was supported (or not) and how questions were answered (or not).
Determination and explanation of whether the study was (or was not) conducted safely and ethically by the authors.
Paper Requirements
Number of Resources: 5–7 peer-reviewed journal articles.
Length: 3–5 pages.
Format: Formatted using the APA Paper Template [DOCX] Download APA Paper Template [DOCX]. Use current APA style and formatting.
Submit the Analysis of Articles assignment by Sunday of Week 2.
Competencies Measured
By successfully completing this assignment, you will demonstrate your proficiency in the following course competencies and grading criteria:
Competency 1: Analyze research methods used in the study of biological psychology.
Describe which of four research methods were used to analyze a chosen topic.
Identify key variables of existing research.
Describe how hypotheses were supported or not supported.
Competency 3: Apply scholarly research findings to topics in biological psychology.
Use appropriate information-gathering techniques to identify peer-reviewed journal articles.
Competency 4: Apply theory and scholarly research findings to inform professional and personal ethics, values and behavior.
Analyze studies to determine whether they were conducted safely and ethically by the authors.
Competency 5: Communicate in a manner that is scholarly, professional, and consistent with expectations for professionals in the field of psychology.
Address assignment purpose in a well-organized text, incorporating appropriate evidence and tone in grammatically sound sentences.
Use APA format and style with headings consistently and with few errors.
Capella LIBRARY https://campus.capella.edu/library/home
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Note: The explanatory text in this paper template is provided to help you understand the
different parts of an APA paper. After reading the information, please delete it, and use the
paper as a template for your own papers. In the various areas of the paper, such as the
titles, you may wish to edit the text with your own information for your paper instead of
deleting it, in order to keep the correct format. Save this template in a file for future use
and information.
Page 1 begins on the cover page. The entire document should be double-spaced, have 1-inch
margins on all sides, and use 12-point, Times New Roman font.
Full Title of Your Paper
Learner’s Full Name
School, Capella University
Course Number and Name
Instructor Name
Due Date
2
Abstract
NOTE: An Abstract is only required when the instructions of the assignment specifically
direct you to create one. An abstract is a brief, comprehensive summary of the contents of a
paper. It allows readers to quickly review the key elements of a paper without having to read the
entire document. This can be helpful for readers who are searching for specific information and
may be reviewing many documents. The abstract may be one of the most important paragraphs
in a paper because readers often decide if they will read the document based on information in
the abstract. An abstract may not be required in some academic papers; however, it can still be
an effective method of gaining the reader’s attention. The following sentences serve as an
example of what could be composed as an abstract for this paper: The basic elements of APA
style will be reviewed, including formatting of an APA-style paper, in-text citations, and a
reference list. Additional information will address the components of an introduction, how to
write effective paragraphs using the MEAL plan, and elements of a summary and conclusion
section of a paper.
3
APA Style Paper Template: A Resource for Academic Writing
(Please change the titles in this document to fit your paper.)
American Psychological Association (APA) style is most commonly used to cite sources
within the social sciences. APA style is used when writing papers in the psychology programs
offered at Capella University. This document serves as an APA style template for you to use
when writing your own papers, as well as a resource containing valuable information that can be
used when writing academic papers. For more information on APA style, refer to the Publication
Manual of the American Psychological Association (American Psychological Association
[APA], 2020).
In the first section of this paper, the author demonstrates how an introduction effectively
introduces the reader to the topic of the paper. In APA style, an introduction never gets a
heading. For example, this section does not begin with a heading titled “Introduction,” unlike the
following section, which is titled “Writing an Effective Introduction.” The following section will
explain in greater detail a model that can be used to effectively write an introduction in an
academic paper. The remaining sections of the paper will continue to address APA style and
effective writing concepts including section headings, organizing information, the MEAL plan,
the conclusion, and the reference list.
Writing an Effective Introduction
An effective introduction often consists of four main components, including (a) the
position statement, thesis, or hypothesis, which describes the author’s main position; (b) the
purpose, which outlines the objective of the paper; (c) the background, which contains general
information needed to understand the content of the paper; and (d) the approach, which is the
process or methodology the author uses to achieve the purpose of the paper. This information
4
will help readers understand what will be discussed in the paper. It can also serve as a tool to
grab the reader’s attention. Authors may choose to briefly reference sources that will be
identified later in the paper, as in this example (APA, 2020; APA, 2010; Walker, 2008).
In an introduction, the writer often presents something of interest to capture the reader’s
attention and introduce the issue. Adding an obvious statement of purpose helps the reader know
what to expect while helping the writer to focus and stay on task. For example, this paper will
address several components necessary to effectively write an academic paper, including (a) how
to write an introduction, (b) how to write effective paragraphs using the MEAL plan, and (c) how
to properly use APA style.
Level 1 Section Heading Is Centered, Bold, Upper, and Lowercase
Using section headings is an effective method of organizing an academic paper. Section
headings can significantly improve the quality of a paper. This is accomplished because section
headings help both the reader and the author with the organization of ideas and flow of the work.
Level 2 Section Heading is Flush Left, Bold, Upper, and Lowercase
The heading style recommended by APA consists of five levels (APA, 2020). This
document contains two levels to demonstrate how headings are structured according to APA
style. Immediately before the previous paragraph, a Level 1 Section Heading was used. That
section heading describes how a Level 1 Heading should be written, which is centered and bold,
using upper- and lowercase letters. For another example, see the section heading “Writing an
Effective Introduction,” on page 3 of this document. A Level 2 heading is used when there are
subcategories under a Level 1 topic. For example, you may have a Level 1 heading of Theories,
and then subcategories (Level 2 sections) of Behavioral Theory, Cognitive Theory, and
Psychodynamic Theory. You made not always need Level 2 headings in your work.
5
Section Headings Help the Reader
Section headings serve multiple purposes, including (a) helping the reader understand
what is being addressed in each section, (b) helping readers, who may be more likely to maintain
an interest in the paper, and (c) helping readers choose what they want to read. For example, if
the reader of this document wants to learn more about writing an effective introduction, the
previous section heading clearly states that is where information can be found. When subtopics
are needed to explain concepts in greater detail, different levels of headings are used according to
APA style.
Section Headings Help the Author
Section headings do not only help the reader but also can help the author organize the
document during the writing process. Section headings can help arrange topics in a logical order,
and they can help an author manage the length of the paper. In addition to an effective
introduction and the use of section headings, each paragraph of an academic paper can be written
in a manner that helps the reader stay engaged. Capella University promotes the use of the
MEAL plan to serve this purpose.
The MEAL Plan
The MEAL plan is a model used by Capella University to help learners effectively
compose academic discussions and papers. Each component of the MEAL plan is critical to
writing an effective paragraph. The acronym MEAL is based on four components of a paragraph
(M = Main point, E = Evidence or Example, A = Analysis, and L = Link). The following section
includes a detailed description and examples of each component of the MEAL plan.
When writing the content sections of an academic paper (as opposed to the introduction
or conclusion sections), the MEAL plan can be an effective model for designing each paragraph.
6
A paragraph begins with a description of the main point, which is represented by the letter “M”
of the MEAL plan. For example, the first sentence of this paragraph clearly states that the main
point is a discussion of the MEAL plan. Once the main point has been made, evidence and
examples are provided.
The second component of a paragraph contains evidence or examples, which are
represented by the letter “E” in the MEAL plan. An example of this component is actually this
sentence, which provides an example of an example. Evidence can be in the form of expertopinion and findings from research. For example, evidence shows that plagiarism can occur even
when it is not intended if sources are not properly cited (Marsh et al., 1997; Walker, 2008). The
previous sentence provides evidence supporting why evidence is used in a paragraph.
Analysis, which is represented by the letter “A” of the MEAL plan, should be based on
the author’s interpretation of the evidence. An effective analysis might include a discussion of the
strengths and weaknesses of the arguments, as well as the author’s interpretations of the evidence
and examples. If a quote is used, the author should provide an analysis of the quote and the
specific point it makes for the author’s position. Without an analysis, the reader might not
understand why the author discussed the information that the reader just read. For example, the
previous sentence is an analysis by the author of why an analysis is performed when writing
paragraphs in academic papers. Even with the first three elements of the MEAL plan, it would
not be complete without the final component.
The letter “L” of the MEAL plan refers to information that links the current and the
subsequent paragraphs. The link helps the reader understand what will be discussed in the next
paragraph. It summarizes the author’s reasoning and shows how the paragraph fits together and
leads (that is, links) to the next section of the paper. For example, this sentence might explain
7
that once the MEAL plan has been effectively used when writing the body of an academic paper,
the final section is the summary and conclusion section.
Summary and Conclusion
A summary and conclusion section, which can also be the discussion section of an APAstyle paper, is the final opportunity for the author to make a lasting impression on the reader. The
author can begin by restating positions and summarizing the most important points that have
been presented in the paper. It is not a place to introduce new information that was not presented
previously in the paper. For example, this paper was written to demonstrate to readers how to
effectively use APA style when writing academic papers. Various components of an APA-style
paper that were discussed or displayed in the form of examples include a title page, introduction
section, levels of section headings and their use, in-text citations, the MEAL plan, a conclusion,
and the references list.
8
References
American Psychological Association. (2020). Publication manual of the American Psychological
Association (7th ed.). Author.
American Psychological Association. (2010). Ethical principles of psychologists and code of
conduct. http://www.apa.org/ethics/code/index.aspx
Marsh, R. L., Landau, J. D., & Hicks, J. L. (1997). Contributions of inadequate source
monitoring to unconscious plagiarism during idea generation. Journal of Experimental
Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 23(4), 886–897. doi:10.1037/02787393.23.4.886
Walker, A. L. (2008). Preventing unintentional plagiarism: A method for strengthening
paraphrasing skills. Journal of Instructional Psychology, 35(4), 387–395.
http://search.proquest.com/docview/213904438?accountid=27965
Always begin a reference list on a new page. Use a hanging indent after the first line of each
reference. The reference list is in alphabetical order by the author’s last name. A reference list
contains only sources that are cited in the body of the paper, and all sources cited in the body of
the paper must be contained in the reference list.
When a digital object identifier (DOI) is available for a journal article, it should be placed at the
end of the citation. If a DOI is not available, a uniform resource locator (URL) should be used.
The Marsh, Landau, and Hicks (1997) reference is an example of how to cite a source using a
DOI. The Walker (2008) reference is an example of how to cite a source using a URL.
REMINDER: Delete all unneeded placeholder text from your paper. This may include
unnecessary headings and explanatory content such as the paragraphs above.
Given the Corona crisis, what do you think should be added to the perceptual and executive principles of change management? What will change management change before and after COVID-19?
As complementary resources, you can read these articles:
First read these articles:
1. “Guiding Principles for Ethical Change Management”
2. “Lewin’s Theory of Change: Applicability of its Principles in a Contemporary Organization”
PROFESSOR’S GUIDANCE FOR THIS WEEK’S LE:
In the human history. some temporal courses like Renaissance (after the Medieval), World War II and of course COVID-19 have been known as the critical cut-off points in the developmental course of human attitude, especially individually and socially. Life style and mind-set of general population will not be the same as before that crisis. Now you know the principals and guideline of assessment, creating and maintaining the desirable organizational/personal changes. Base upon these principles, discuss the future changes needed to change management.
Be sure to proofread carefully (Use Grammarly – the premium version! Make sure your writing score is more than 90) and cite your sources (APA 7.0 ed).
NOTE:
Post your 300-400 word answers by Wednesday 11:55 pm to earn a maximum of 14 points.
Offer at least two 200-300 word comments (replies) to posts from your peers’ discussions by Sunday 11:55 pm to earn a maximum of 8 points each.
When using credible academic/scientific sources for your learning engagement (LE), be sure to include a section at the end of your main LE as “personal analysis” to comment based on what you have learned from your textbooks, classes, and previous academic/professional experiences. As an MBA student, your personal analysis is very important to me. You should be able to reach a personal conclusion by summarizing your knowledge and experience in scientific and professional situations.
Of the four theorists reviewed in this chapter (Freud, Erikson, Piaget, and Vygotsky) which theorist’s ideas about development most closely match your own beliefs about how people develop and why?
Your response is to be 1 to 2 pages long. This means having complete paragraphs. A paragraph is defined as having 5 to 7 sentences. Please use 1 to 2 cited references in your written manuscript. All written work in this class must be in APA style. Include a “Title” and “Reference” Page.
Eric Erikson’s Psychosocial Theory Eight Stages:
Trust vs. mistrust (0-1) – The infant must have basic needs met in a consistent way in order to feel that the world is a trustworthy place.
Autonomy vs. shame and doubt (1-2) – Mobile toddlers have newfound freedom they like to exercise and by being allowed to do so, they learn some basic independence.
Initiative vs. Guilt (3-5) – Preschoolers like to initiate activities and emphasize doing things “all by myself.”
Industry vs. inferiority (6- 11) – School aged children focus on accomplishments and begin making comparisons between themselves and their classmates.
Identity vs. Role Confusion (12-18) – The adolescent develops a well-defined and positive sense of self in relationship to others.
Intimacy vs. Isolation (young adulthood) – In our 20s and 30s we are making some of our first long-term commitments in intimate relationships.
Generativity vs. stagnation (middle adulthood) – The 40s through the early 60s we focus on being productive at work and home and are motivated by wanting to feel that we’ve made a contribution to society.
Integrity vs. Despair (late adulthood)- We look back on our lives and hope to like what we see-that we have lived well and have a sense of integrity because we lived according to our beliefs.
Chapter 4 – Development of Social Groups – Key Concepts
1. Urie Bronfenbrenner (Ecological Systems Theory) – provides a framework for understanding and studying the many influences on human development.
Microsystems – people with whom the child interacts such as parents, peers, and teachers.
Mesosystems – are interactions between those surrounding the individual. The relationship between parents and schools.
Exosystem – one or more settings that do not involve the developing person as an active participant.
Macrosystems – the overarching beliefs and values of the culture within which the developing individual exists.
Chronosystem – considers hhow and when major events occur and how the timing of these events can influence a person’s life.
2. Family Systems Theory – family is understood best by conceptualizing it as a complex, dynamic, and changing collection of parts, subsystems and family members.
Functionalism – family and its members perform certain functions that facilitate the prosperity and development of society.
3. Conflict Theory – highlights the role of power in family life and contends that the family is often not a haven but rather an arena where power struggles can occur.
Read the case study “Travel Solutions” at the end of Chapter 7 of your textbook, follow the following directions and then respond to the case study questions
A case study is a puzzle to be solved, so before reading and answering the specific questions, develop your proposed solution by following these five steps:
Read the case study to identify the key issues and underlying issues. These issues are the principles and concepts of the course module, which apply to the situation described in the case study.
Record the facts from the case study which are relevant to the principles and concepts of the module. The case may have extraneous information not relevant to the current module. Your ability to differentiate between relevant and irrelevant information is an important aspect of case analysis, as it will inform the focus of your answers.
Describe in some detail the actions that would address or correct the situation.
Consider how you would support your solution with examples from experience or current real-life examples or cases from textbooks.
Complete this initial analysis and then read the discussion questions. Typically, you will already have the answers to the questions but with a broader consideration. At this point, you can add the details and/or analytical tools required to solve the case.
Case Study Questions:
What is your assessment of the situation at Travelink at the end of the case? What are the underlying problems in the organization?
If you found yourself in Will or Robert’s situation, what would you do? Why?
If Will and Robert both decide to stay and try to advance needed changes, what changes would you recommend they focus on and how would you recommend they go about it? Would you, for example, share Will’s documentation of the problems within the company? Why or why not?
Have you ever been in a situation where you were a recipient of change and things went poorly? How did it affect you and others in the organization?
Your well-written paper should meet the following requirements:
Be 4-5 pages in length, which does not include the title and reference pages, which are never a part of the content minimum requirements.
Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style guidelines.
Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the Turnitin Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for grading. If you are unsure how to submit an assignment into the Originality Check tool, review the Turnitin Originality Check – Student Guide for step-by-step instructions.
Review the grading rubric to see how you will be graded for this assignment.
BOOK: Goldstein, E. B. (2019). Cognitive psychology: Connecting mind, research, and everyday experience (5th ed.). Cengage
Overview
In this course, you’ll practice applying science and theory to making evaluations of conditions and also bringing audiences, like the public, along in action steps. First, you’ll want to hone your analytical skills. It’s also good to see the kind of information that’s out there in the world. So in this assignment, you’ll try distinguishing valuable information from less reliable sources.
Preparation
If you haven’t located one already, find a popular video or website that covers a topic from your course text. The topic must be related to cognition or learning. Our textbook is a good way to search for concepts or topics relevant to cognitive psychology. You can use the CRAAP Test Worksheet from Week 2 to help you determine whether you consider the media valid and what additional questions you have about the topic.
Instructions
Use the Popular Versus Scholarly Sources Worksheet Template [DOCX] Download Popular Versus Scholarly Sources Worksheet Template [DOCX]to complete this assignment.
Select a popular media source like a video or a website that covers a topic from your course text.
Provide the full reference for the source.
Summarize the content of the source using bullet points in complete sentences or a 5–8 sentence paragraph.
Identify at least three peer-reviewed journal articles on the topic covered in the source and explain their relevance to the topic. Provide the full references for the articles in APA format.
Compare and contrast information provided in the source with the three articles by answering the following questions:
What information provided by the popular source is supported by research or information provided in the articles? Provide enough specifics so that you are citing each of the sources in this area.
What, if any, information in the articles conflicts with the popular source?
Do you consider the media source you selected to be valid? Why or why not?
What questions do you have about the topic based on your analysis?
Explain how the topic you reviewed can be applied to solve problems in the real world. Once you have provided a narrative on application, to reach distinguished, illustrate with examples, which may include personal examples.
Provide a self-evaluation of each criterion for the assignment with a level of performance and a rationale for your selection. In this section it is okay to write in first person since you are evaluating your own work.
Important: Prior to submission, conduct a self-evaluation of your performance on the worksheet using the rubric and identifying what you believe to be your proficiency level for each criterion. (The scores are Nonperformance, Basic, Proficient, or Distinguished.)
Additional Requirements
Your assignment should also meet the following requirements:
Written communication: Written communication is free of errors that detract from the overall message.
Resources: Use your course resources and at least three peer-reviewed and scholarly resources (no more than five years old).
APA formatting: Resources and citations are formatted according to current APA style and formatting guidelines. Refer to Evidence and APALinks to an external site. page on Campus for guidance.
Template: Use the Popular Versus Scholarly Sources Worksheet Template [DOCX] Download Popular Versus Scholarly Sources Worksheet Template [DOCX]to complete the assignment.
Font and font size: Times New Roman, 12 point.
Competencies Measured
By successfully completing this assignment, you will demonstrate your proficiency in the following course competencies and grading criteria:
Competency 2: Apply research findings to topics in human learning and cognition.
Summarize the content of a popular media source.
Identify a sufficient number of peer-reviewed journal articles on the topic covered in a popular media source.
Competency 4: Analyze theory and research to solve problems and inform professional behavior in human learning and cognition.
Compare and contrast information provided in a popular media source with peer-reviewed journal articles.
Describe how the topic of a popular media source can be applied to the real world.
Competency 5: Apply metacognitive strategies to self-assess performance quality.
Conduct a self-evaluation using established scoring criteria and identifying the proficiency level for each criterion.
Competency 6: Communicate in a manner that is scholarly, professional, and consistent with expectations for professionals in the field of psychology.
Address assignment purpose in a well-organized text, incorporating appropriate evidence and tone in grammatically sound sentences.
Apply current APA style, including in-text citations and full references for sources.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Popular Versus Scholarly Sources Worksheet
Directions:
•
Select a popular media source like a video or a website on a cognitive psychology topic
in your course text.
•
Provide the full reference for the source.
•
Summarize the content of the source using bullet points in complete sentences or a 5–8
sentence paragraph.
•
Identify at least three peer-reviewed journal articles on the topic covered in the source
and explain their relevancy to the topic. Provide the full references of the articles in APA
format.
•
Compare and contrast information provided in the source with the three articles by
answering the following questions:
•
o
What information provided by the popular source is supported by research or
information provided in the articles?
o
What if any information in the articles conflicts with the popular source?
o
Do you consider the media source you selected to be valid? Why or why not?
o
What questions do you have about the topic based on your analysis?
How can the topic you reviewed be applied to the real world? Feel free to also illustrate
with examples.
Then complete all pages of this worksheet, including the self-evaluation. Be sure to use full
sentences (grammar counts), evidence from relevant sources, and APA-style citations.
Media Evaluation
Directions
Responses
Name your selected
topic.
Provide the full
reference for the
source, and include
the link to the video or
website.
1
Directions
Responses
Summarize the
content of the source
using complete
sentences in a
paragraph of 5–8
sentences.
List three peerreviewed journal
articles on the topic
providing and explain
the relevance of each
of the articles to the
topic.
Provides the full
references in APA
format.
Compare and contrast
information provided
in the source with
each of the three
articles by answering
these questions and
citing the sources:
•
What information provided by the popular source is
supported by research or information provided in the articles?
•
What if any information in the articles conflicts with the
popular source?
•
Do you consider the media source you selected to be valid?
Why or why not?
•
What questions do you have about the topic based on your
analysis?
Explain how the topic
can be used to help
solve problems in the
real world.
Then illustrate with
personal or
professional
examples.
2
Self-Evaluation
Conduct a self-evaluation using established scoring criteria and identifying the proficiency level
for each criterion. The distinguished levels of the criteria are listed.
Identify the level of your performance: nonperformance, basic, proficient, or distinguished.
Provide some rationale as to why you selected that level.
Criterion
Level
Rationale
(Nonperformance,
Basic, Proficient,
or Distinguished)
Summarizes the content of a
popular media source,
conveying the implications of
the topic.
Identifies three peer-reviewed
journal articles on the topic
covered in a popular media
source and describes relevancy
of the articles. Provides the full
references of the articles in APA
format.
Compares and contrasts
information provided in a
popular media source with
peer-reviewed journal articles,
making a clear case for the
validity or lack of validity of the
media source.
Describes how the topic of a
popular media source can be
applied to the real world,
providing examples.
3
Criterion
Level
Rationale
(Nonperformance,
Basic, Proficient,
or Distinguished)
Conducts a self-evaluation
using established scoring
criteria and identifying the
proficiency level for each
criterion, including comments
for each criterion.
Presents a focused purpose
through strong organizational
skills. Presents evidence
through strong paraphrasing or
summarizing and appropriate
tone and sentence structure.
Applies current APA style,
including in-text citations and
full references for sources with
few errors.
4
Assignment #2 (Target Market and Offering)Minimum 2 pages, double-spaced, 12-point font.• Describe the target market (see pages 250-251).• Describe your client’s product or service.
This assignment is continuing from the Amazon Case.
Questions:
Given Amazon’s overall performance domestically and globally, the outbreak of COVID-19, and the company mission, vision, and strategic plan, what step should it take next?
Should Amazon continue global expansion into new markets? What should Amazon do with its less successful international operations?
4.) Identify four (4) questions that you still have on social enterprises after watching the video. Research the answers to those answers and present them in the assignment. Ensure that you have the correct citations and research to support your research and analysis.
5.) Research a Canada-based company in the social enterprise sector and write a profile of this company and the entrepreneur. Complete the Social Business Model Canvas for this company.
You can look at Buy Social Canada www.buysocialcanada.com for a directory of businesses. Ensure that your description answers the question as to why this company is a social enterprise – clearly state the mission statement, community reinvestment and social innovation; along with other elements of the BMC.
Total Assignment Submission length: 8-12 pages (double spaced), excluding bibliography/references.
Include references to citations, graphs, etc. used.
Report must include a separate pages for title page, table of contents and references used. Submission length of 8-12 pages does NOT include title page, TOC and references.
You will create an Infographic using Canva https://www.canva.com/ to create a Resource Guide for your nonprofit. Do not create a premium account, you can do this assignment with a free account. An infographic is a digital poster. The website has templates available for you, so please don’t stress about being a graphic designer, everything is already laid out for you, all you need to do is fill it in with images and text. You will also include a mini-essay that explains the symbols used in the resource guide based on two rhetorical theories from Unit 2.
Purpose:
This assignment is designed to introduce you to a visual infographic tool as a way to represent information using rhetorical theory and to allow you to be creative while providing information to the public about what resources your nonprofit has to offer. The assignment also assesses your understanding of 2 rhetorical theories and their application to the resource guide. Be sure to use the same nonprofit organization because you will include both the grant proposal and infographic in the Showcase Portfolio Presentations at the end of the semester.
You may use any two theories and/or concepts below from Unit 2:
Symbolic action (aka Identification)
Index, Icon, Symbol
Metaphor (include vehicle and tenor)
Dramatistic Life cycle (order, pollution, guilt, purification, redemption) *use at least 2-3 of these elements
Pentad (act, agent, agency, scene, purpose) *use at least 2-3 of these elements
Purification includes (mortification, victimage, and transcendence) *pick 1
Terministic Screens
Narrative theory
Visual rhetoric
Tasks & Criteria:
Familiarize yourself with Canva https://www.canva.com/
Be sure to save your projects so you can download the pdf for submission.
You should know what resources your nonprofit offers. Now think about 1) what symbols, narratives, visual rhetoric, terministic screens, metaphors, or dramatism can you use to identify with the community who could use the resources from your nonprofit and persuade them to utilize this free service. In addition to images or a sign that is a symbolic representation of something, you MUST be thinking about textual (words) symbols that you can use (symbolic action) to convince someone to go out and use the resources that your nonprofit has to offer. What can you say that will make your audience identify with your resource guide and then take action? Be thinking about the following:
What can you say that will make your audience identify with your resource guide and then take action?
Are you telling a particular type of narrative or using a particular metaphor?
Are you using dramatism? If so, what elements? Did you focus on a particular terministic screen? Did you use a particular ratio?
3. With 2 rhetorical theories in mind, create the infographic to visually display the resources the nonprofit offers. You should be thinking about this resource guide being used on social media and/or as a printed flier we can hang up around campus. The main objective of this assignment is for you to encourage the audience to utilize the services of your nonprofit. Imagine that nonprofit handing out your infographic as a flier to encourage community members to come to them for the services they offer (e.g., housing, food, etc.). This assignment is not about convincing people to volunteer or donate money to your nonprofit.
4. Finally, in less than one page double-spaced, you will write a mini-essay where you will define each rhetorical theory you used to create the resource guide and demonstrate your knowledge and application of each with an APA in-text citation from course readings.
5. You MUST use a minimum of 4 APA in-text citations from the academic course readings in the mini-essay. Include a reference page. No sources are needed in the infographic, remember this could be used for distribution to the public.
6. In your submission you must include: 1) Resource Guide Infographic 2) Mini-essay with an APA reference page. You can have both of these items in one file if you wish.
7. If you fail to use rhetorical theories from Unit 2 there will be an automatic 15% deduction from your overall grade for this assignment.
What to submit:
CANVA is a simple download, all you have to do is click “download” and then click the dropdown arrow for download type and click “PDF PRINT” to get the best quality download.
don’t forget to also include your mini-essay and reference page in a pdf or word document.
Resource Guide Infographic
Resource Guide Infographic
Criteria Ratings Pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeClear description of what resources are offered. Use of two rhetorical theories in the resource guide are evident.
15 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeStrength and understanding of rhetorical theory #1. In the mini-essay, the theory is defined, described, and there is a demonstrated understanding of its application in the resource guide.
15 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeStrength and understanding of rhetorical theory #2. In the mini-essay, the theory is defined, described, and there is a demonstrated understanding of its application in the resource guide.
15 pts
This criterion is linked to a Learning OutcomeCreativity and effort used to create the resource guide. Overall writing and organization. Mini-essay includes a minimum of four APA in-text citations from course readings.
Post a brief desсrіption of a compensation issue in a government or non-profit organization. Explain how the issue might impact the pay system of Girl Scouts of America.
the doc below me word 2019 PDF in that doc there is detail on what to doand after seeing the word 2019 PDF you should do the work on maximum heart rate doc.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
American River Cycling Club
WHAT IS MAXIMUM HEART RATE?
The maximum heart rate is the highest your pulse rate can get. To calculate your predicted maximum
heart rate, use this formula:
(Example: a 40-year-old’s predicted maximum heart rate is 180.)
Your actual maximum heart rate can be determined by a graded exercise test. Please note that some
medicines and medical conditions might affect your maximum heart rate. If you are taking medicines or
have a medical condition (such as heart disease, high blood pressure, or diabetes), always ask your
doctor if your maximum heart rate/target heart rate will be affected.
TARGET HEART RATE
You gain the most benefits and decrease the risk of injury when you exercise in your target heart rate
zone. Usually this is when your exercise heart rate (pulse) is 60 percent to 80 percent of your maximum
heart rate. Do not exercise above 85 percent of your maximum heart rate. This increases both
cardiovascular and orthopedic risk and does not add any extra benefit.
When beginning an exercise program, you might need to gradually build up to a level that is within your
target heart rate zone, especially if you have not exercised regularly before. If the exercise feels too
hard, slow down. You will reduce your risk of injury and enjoy the exercise more if you don’t try to overdo it.
To find out if you are exercising in your target zone (between 60 percent and 80 percent of your
maximum heart rate), use your heart rate monitor to track your heart rate. If your pulse is below your
target zone (see the chart below), increase your rate of exercise. If your pulse is above your target zone,
decrease your rate of exercise.
Age
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Target Heart Rate (HR) Zone (60-85%)
120-170
117-166
114-162
111-157
108-153
105-149
102-145
99-140
96-136
93-132
90-128
Predicted Maximum Heart Rate
200
195
190
185
180
175
170
165
160
155
150
10/16/23, 5:36 PM
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided Project 4-2 – SIMnet
Print Info
Student Name: Siddiqi, Ali
Student ID: ali.siddiqi@tulsacc.edu
Username: ali.siddiqi@tulsacc.edu
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided
Project 4-2
COURSE NAME CSCI 1203 Glenda Seiter | F23 CSCI 1203 937 12181 Glenda Seiter
Guided Project 4-2
In This Project, You Modify A Document
About Maximum And Target Heart Rate
For The American River Cycling Club.
You Arrange Text In A Table And Insert
And Modify SmartArt And A Picture.
[Student Learning Outcomes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 4.6]
File Needed: MaximumHeartRate-04.docx and HeartRate-04.png (Available from the Resources link)
Completed Project File Name: [First Name.Last Name]-MaximumHeartRate-04.docx
Skills Covered in This Project
Insert and resize WordArt.
Position and modify WordArt.
Convert text to a table.
Apply a table style.
Modify table and text alignment.
Change cell margins in a table.
Insert and add text to a SmartArt graphic.
Resize, position, and format SmartArt.
Insert, resize, and position a picture.
Insert a caption.
Align and group graphic objects.
This image appears when a project instruction has changed to accommodate an update to Microsoft 365
Apps. If the instruction does not match your version of Office, try using the alternate instruction instead.
Steps to complete This Project
Mark the steps as checked when you complete them.
1.
Open the MaximumHeartRate-04.docx start file. If the document opens in Protected View, click the Enable Editing
button so you can modify it.
2.
The file will be renamed automatically to include your name. Change the project file name if directed to do so by your
instructor, and save it.
https://tulsacc.simnetonline.com/sp/assignments/projects/details/8248566
1/5
10/16/23, 5:36 PM
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided Project 4-2 – SIMnet
3. Insert WordArt as the title of the document and modify the WordArt
a.
Select the title of the document, “American River Cycling Club” (including the paragraph mark).
b.
Click the WordArt button [Insert tab, Text group].
c.
Select the third option in the first row from the WordArt gallery (Figure 4-104).
d.
Change the Shape Width [Shape Format tab, Size group] to 6.5″.
Change the Shape Width [Drawing Tools Format tab, Size
group] to 6.5″.
e.
Click the Position button [Shape Format tab, Arrange group] and select
More Layout Options. The Layout dialog box opens (Figure 4-105).
Click the Position button [Drawing Tools Format tab,
Arrange group] and select More Layout Options. The Layout dialog box
Figure 4-104 Insert WordArt
opens (Figure 4-105).
f.
Change Alignment in the Horizontal area to Centered
relative to Margin.
g.
Change Absolute position in the Vertical area to 0.2″
below Page.
h.
Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.
i.
Click the Text Effects button [Shape Format tab,
WordArt Styles group], select Reflection, and select the
first option in the first row of the Reflection Variations
area (Tight Reflection: Touching) (Figure 4-106).
Click the Text Effects button [Drawing
Tools Format tab, WordArt Styles group], select
Reflection, and select the first option in the first row of
Figure 4-105 Adjust position of WordArt
the Reflection Variations area (Tight Reflection: Touching) (Figure 4-106).
4. Convert text into a table and format the table.
a.
Select all the tabbed text at the bottom of the document (including the last
paragraph mark).
b.
Click the Table button [Insert tab, Tables group] and select Convert Text
to Table. The Convert Text to Table dialog box opens.
c.
Click the AutoFit to contents radio button in the AutoFit behavior area.
d.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
e.
Click the Table Design tab.
Click the Table Tools Design tab.
f.
Check the Header Row and Banded Rows boxes [Table Style Options
group] (if necessary) and deselect the other check boxes.
Figure 4-106 Apply Reflection option
g.
Click the More button in the Table Styles group to display the Table Styles gallery.
h.
Select Grid Table 4 – Accent 2 in the Grid Tables section (Figure 4-107).
i.
Place the insertion point before “Zone” in the second column in the first row, press
Backspace to delete the space between words, and press Enter.
j.
Place the insertion point before “Heart” in the third column in the first row, press
Backspace to delete the space between words, and press Enter.
5. Adjust the size and alignment of the table.
a.
Use the table selector handle to select the entire table.
b.
Click the Align Center button [Table Layout tab, Alignment group] (Figure 4-108). All
Figure 4-107 Table Styles
gallery
text in the table is centered vertically and horizontally.
Click the Align Center button [Table Tools Layout tab, Alignment group] (Figure 4-108). All text in the
table is centered vertically and horizontally.
c.
Click the Properties button [Table Layout tab, Table group].
Click the Properties button [Table Tools Layout tab, Table group].
d.
Click the Table tab, select Center in the Alignment area, and click OK to close the
dialog box. The entire table is centered horizontally on the page.
e.
Click the Cell Margins button [Table Layout tab, Alignment group]. The Table
Options dialog box opens.
Figure 4-108 Align Center
the text in the table
Click the Cell Margins button [Table Tools Layout tab, Alignment
group]. The Table Options dialog box opens.
f.
Change the Top and Bottom cell margins to 0.03″ and the Left and Right cell margins to 0.1″.
g.
Click OK to close the Table Options dialog box.
https://tulsacc.simnetonline.com/sp/assignments/projects/details/8248566
2/5
10/16/23, 5:36 PM
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided Project 4-2 – SIMnet
6. Insert and modify a SmartArt graphic.
a.
b.
Place the insertion point at the end of the second body paragraph, “(Example: . . .),” in the first section.
Click the SmartArt button [Insert tab, Illustrations group]. The Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box opens (Figure
4-109).
c.
Click Process in the list of SmartArt types.
d.
Select Continuous Block Process and click OK to
insert the SmartArt. If the Text pane displays on the left of
the SmartArt graphic, click the X in the upper-right corner
to close it.
e.
Click the placeholder text ([Text]) in the first rectangle
graphic, type 220, space once, and type – (hyphen or
minus).
f.
g.
Click the next placeholder text, type Your Age, space
once, and type =.
Figure 4-109 Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box
Click the last placeholder text, type Predicted
Maximum Heart Rate.
7. Format, resize, and position the SmartArt.
a.
Click the outside frame of the SmartArt graphic to select the entire SmartArt graphic. Note: Select the entire
SmartArt and not an object within the graphic.
b.
Change the Shape Height to 1.5″ and the Shape Width to 2.6″ in the Size group [SmartArt Tools Format tab].
c.
Click the Wrap Text button [SmartArt Format tab, Arrange group] and select Square.
Click the Wrap Text button [SmartArt Tools Format tab, Arrange group] and select Square.
d.
Click the Position button [SmartArt Format tab, Arrange group] and select More Layout Options. The Layout dialog
box opens (Figure 4-110).
Click the Position button [SmartArt Tools Format tab, Arrange group] and select More Layout
Options. The Layout dialog box opens (Figure 4-110).
e.
Change the Absolute position in the Horizontal area
to 4.5″ to the right of Margin.
f.
Change Absolute position in the Vertical area to 0.4″
below Margin.
g.
Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.
h.
Select the SmartArt (if necessary), select Intense
Effect from the SmartArt Styles gallery [SmartArt Design
tab, SmartArt Styles group] (Figure 4-111).
Select the SmartArt (if necessary),
select Intense Effect from the SmartArt Styles gallery
[SmartArt Tools Design tab, SmartArt Styles group]
(Figure 4-111).
i.
Figure 4-110 Adjust SmartArt position
Click the edge of the first text box (“220 -”) to select it and press Ctrl+B to apply bold
format. Repeat this format on the other two text boxes.
j.
Select the last text box (if it is not already selected) and click the SmartArt Format
tab.
Select the last text box (if it is not already selected) and click the
Figure 4-111 Apply
SmartArt Tools Format tab.
k.
SmartArt style
Click the Shape Fill button and select sixth color in the first row of the Theme
Colors (Red, Accent 2) as the fill color (Figure 4-112).
8. Insert a picture and resize and position the graphic.
a.
Place the insertion point at the end of the second section heading (“Target Heart
Rate”).
b.
Click the Pictures button [Insert tab, Illustrations group] and then choose This
Device to open the Insert Picture dialog box.
Click the Pictures button [Insert tab, Illustrations group] to open the
Insert Picture dialog box.
c.
Figure 4-112 Change Shape
Fill color
Locate the HeartRate-04 picture downloaded from the resources link and click
Insert.
d.
Change the Height [Picture Format tab, Size group] to 1″ (the width adjusts automatically).
Change the Height [Picture Tools Format tab, Size group] to 1″ (the width adjusts automatically).
e.
Click the Wrap Text button [Picture Format tab, Arrange group] and select Tight.
Click the Wrap Text button [Picture Tools Format tab, Arrange group] and select Tight.
https://tulsacc.simnetonline.com/sp/assignments/projects/details/8248566
3/5
10/16/23, 5:36 PM
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided Project 4-2 – SIMnet
f.
Click the Align button [Picture Format tab, Arrange group] and select Align Right.
Click the Align button [Picture Tools Format tab, Arrange group] and select Align Right.
9. Format the picture and insert a caption.
a.
Select the picture (if necessary), click the More button in the Pictures Styles group [Picture Format tab] to display the
gallery of styles.
Select the picture (if necessary), click the More button in the Pictures Styles group [Picture Tools
Format tab] to display the gallery of styles.
b.
Select the Bevel Rectangle picture style (Figure 4-113).
c.
Right-click the picture and select Insert Caption from the context menu. The Insert
Caption dialog box opens.
d.
e.
f.
Click OK to insert the caption.
Select and delete the caption placeholder text, and type Know your target heart
rate as the caption text.
Select the caption text, click the Text Fill button [Shape Format tab, WordArt Styles
group], and select the sixth color in the first row of the Theme Colors (Red, Accent 2)
as the text color.
Figure 4-113 Apply Picture
Style
Select the caption text, click the Text Fill button [Drawing Tools Format
tab, WordArt Styles group], and select the sixth color in the first row of the Theme Colors (Red, Accent 2) as the text
color.
g.
Change the caption Height to 0.2″ and the Width to 1.5″ in the Size group [Shape Format tab].
Change the caption Height to 0.2″ and the Width to 1.5″ in the Size group [Drawing Tools Format tab].
h.
Press the Ctrl key and click the picture. Both the caption and picture should be selected.
i.
Click the Align button [Shape Format tab, Arrange group] and select Align Center.
Click the Align button [Drawing Tools Format tab, Arrange group] and select Align Center.
j.
Click the Group button [Arrange group] and select Group. The picture and caption are grouped into one object.
10. Edit the alt text on the graphics in the document.
11.
a.
Select the border of the SmartArt to select the entire SmartArt graphic.
b.
Right-click the SmartArt graphic and select Edit Alt Text from the context menu. The Alt Text pane opens.
c.
Type Graphic of predicted maximum heart rate in the text box in the Alt Text pane.
d.
Select the picture of a heart, type Picture of a heart in the text box in the Alt Text pane, and close the Alt Text pane.
Save and close the document (Figure 4-114).
Figure 4-114 Word 4-2 completed
12.
Upload and save your project file.
https://tulsacc.simnetonline.com/sp/assignments/projects/details/8248566
4/5
10/16/23, 5:36 PM
Word 2019 In Practice – Ch 4 Guided Project 4-2 – SIMnet
13.
Submit project for grading.
https://tulsacc.simnetonline.com/sp/assignments/projects/details/8248566
5/5
GUIDELINE WORD COUNT AND EXPECTATIONS is attached The questions are 9
Your word count allowance is specified against each task. There is a +/-10% allowance on this word count and you must not exceed this (an information sheet of approximately 2500 words +/- 10%) . If you exceed the word count, your work will be returned to you. The bibliography or list of references is not included in the total word count.
You must demonstrate within the submitted evidence (through headings and sub-headings) which learning outcomes and assessment criteria have been cited. CIPD will be unable to moderate your work if this is not included.
Expectations are set out in the marking descriptor grid which you will find at the end of this document. You must pass all learning outcomes to successfully achieve this unit.
Your evidence must consist of
– an information sheet of approximately 2500 words +/- 10%
– Please make it clear in your evidence which question and assessment criteria you are addressing, for example, Q1 – AC 1.1.
– Plagiarism of answers is not accepted
– Use references and use APA style and be mentioned in each paragraph.
– Explain all questions in detail.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
3CO01
Business, culture and change in
context
Learner Assessment Brief
Assessment ID / CIPD_3CO01_23_01
Level 3
Foundation Certificate in
People Practice
▪
Version 1 – Released June 2023
▪
Expires June 2024
▪
Study Centre information only: Last moderation window is September 2024
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
3CO01
Business, culture and change
in context
This unit assignment considers the impact of external influences and how the digital and
commercial environment shapes businesses and the culture within which they operate. It considers
the importance of people’s behaviour on organisational culture and its ability to manage change
effectively.
CIPD’s insight
Organisational climate and culture (October 2022)
Organisational culture is an important aspect of organisational life and a term that has become a
mainstay among business leaders. The work of HR, L&D and OD influences and is influenced by
organisational culture because every organisation is made up of human relationships and human
interactions. Despite its dominance, the language of culture is often unclear and difficult to define,
making it hard to measure. Consequently, real culture change is almost impossible if we fail to pin
down what we need to change. Rather than focusing on culture, concentrating on organisational
climate – the meaning and behaviour attached to policies, practices and procedures that
employees experience – is a much more specific, tangible way to positively influence the
workplace. This factsheet explores why organisational culture is a popular but limited construct,
and why shifting to changing organisational climate is much more effective for employers.
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/culture/working-environment/organisationculture-change-factsheet
Organisation development (April 2022)
In the evolving world of work, it’s important that organisations adapt to ensure optimal business
performance. This factsheet explains what organisation development (ODV) is, what areas of
focus and expertise it involves, and explores what ODV looks like in practice. There are many
ways to describe organisation development (ODV), all of which share common features despite
their varied meanings. In this factsheet we will use the abbreviation ODV rather than OD to
distinguish organisation development from organisation design.
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/organisational-development/factsheet
Please note that the purpose of this insight is to link you to CIPD’s research and evidence within
the subject area, so that you can engage with the latest thinking. It is not provided to replace the
study required as part of the learning or as formative assessment material.
CIPD L3 CO01 AB v3
June 2023
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Task – Information sheet
Your manager has asked you to prepare an information sheet about the organisation and its
environment to support the onboarding of a new member of the People Team. You decide that to
be effective in their role, the new team member needs an appreciation of the organisation’s
activities, goals and how the external environment impacts these. As organisational culture and
change are essential to achieving business goals and responding to the external environment you
decide to add points about these too.
Your information sheet can be based on your own organisation or one(s) with which you are
familiar, and must include the following:
1. An examination of three key external influences impacting or likely to impact the
organisation’s activities. (AC 1.1)
2. A discussion of at least two of the organisation’s business goals and why it is important for
organisations to plan for how they will achieve these. (AC 1.2)
3. A discussion of the organisation’s products and/or services and main customers. (AC 1.3)
4. A short review of information and communication technologies available to people
professionals and how these can be, or are, used to improve working practices and
collaboration. (AC 1.4)
5. A definition of what is meant by organisational culture and an explanation of why it is
important to foster an appropriate and effective workplace culture. (AC 2.1)
6. An explanation of how organisations are whole systems, within which aspects such as
structure, systems and culture are all inter-related, and how people professionals’ work and
actions could impact elsewhere in the organisation. (AC 2.2)
7. An explanation of why it is important that organisational change is planned, and effectively
managed. (AC 3.1)
8. An explanation of the importance and role that can be played by people professionals
within change. You might consider roles such as: gatekeeper, champion, facilitator, critical
friend or record-keeper. (AC 3.2)
9. A discussion of how organisational change can impact people in different ways, such as
changing their role or status or financial situation. (AC 3.3)
Your evidence must consist of
▪
an information sheet of approximately 2500 words +/- 10%
Please make it clear in your evidence which question and assessment criteria you are
addressing, for example, Q1 – AC 1.1.
CIPD L3 CO01 AB v3
June 2023
Level 3 Foundation Certificate in People Practice
Assessment Criteria Evidence Checklist
You may find the following checklist helpful to make sure that you have included the required
evidence to meet the task. This is not a mandatory requirement as long as it is clear in your
submission where the assessment criteria have been met.
Task – Information sheet
Assessment criteria
Evidenced
Y/N
Evidence reference
1.1 Examine the key external influences that
impact on business environments.
1.2 Discuss organisational goals and why it is
important for organisations to plan.
1.3 Discuss the products and/or services the
organisation delivers, including who the
main customers are.
1.4 Review the range of technology available
within the people profession, including
how it can be utilised to improve working
practices and collaboration.
2.1 Define workplace culture in
organisational settings and the
importance of fostering positive
approaches towards it.
2.2 Explain how organisations are whole
systems, and how work and actions as a
people professional could impact
elsewhere in the organisation.
3.1 Explain the importance of planning and
managing change within the workplace.
3.2 Consider the importance and role that
people professionals play within change.
3.3 Discuss how change can impact people
in different ways.
CIPD L3 CO01 AB v3
June 2023
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
Foundation Certificate in
People Practice
Business, culture and change in context
1
1
BUSINESS, CULTURE AND
CHANGE IN CONTEXT
Assessment Guidance
Business, culture and change in context
2
Business, culture and change in context
3
2
ABOUT THIS UNIT
This unit assignment considers the impact of
external influences and how the digital and
commercial environment shapes businesses and
the culture within which they operate. It considers
the importance of people’s behaviour on
organisational culture and its ability to manage
change effectively.
3
1
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
UNIT LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Understand the business environment in
which the people profession operates,
including the key issues that affect it.
2. Understand how people’s behaviour in the
workplace affects and shapes culture.
3. Understand the importance of effective
management of change.
Business,
Business,
culture
culture
and and
change
change
in context
in context
4
4
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA
LEARNING OUTCOME 1
1
Understand the business environment in which the people profession operates, including
the key issues that affect it.
1.1 Examine the key external influences that impact on business environments.
1.2 Discuss organisational goals and why it is important for organisations to plan.
1.3 Discuss the products and/or services the organisation delivers, including who the main
customers are.
1.4 Review the range of technology available within the people profession, including how it can be
utilised to improve working practices and collaboration.
Business, culture and change in context
5
5
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA
LEARNING OUTCOME 2
2
Understand how people’s behaviour in the workplace affects and shapes culture.
2.1 Define workplace culture in organisational settings and the importance of fostering positive
approaches towards it.
2.2 Explain how organisations are whole systems, and how work and actions as a people
professional could impact elsewhere in the organisation.
Business, culture and change in context
6
6
2
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
ASSESSMENT CRITERIA
LEARNING OUTCOME 3
3
Understand the importance of effective management of change.
3.1 Explain the importance of planning and managing change within the workplace.
3.2 Consider the importance and role that people professionals play within change.
3.3 Discuss how change can impact people in different ways.
Business, culture and change in context
7
7
ASSESSMENT TASK
INFORMATION SHEET
Your manager has asked you to prepare an information sheet about the organisation and its
environment to support the onboarding of a new member of the People Team. You decide that to be
effective in their role, the new team member needs an appreciation of the organisation’s activities,
goals and how the external environment impacts these. As organisational culture and change are
essential to achieving business goals and responding to the external environment you decide to add
points about these too.
Business, culture and change in context
8
8
ASSESSMENT TASK
INFORMATION SHEET (CONTINUED)
Your information sheet can be based on your own organisation or one(s) with which you are
familiar, and must include the following:
1. An examination of three key external influences impacting or likely to impact the organisation’s
activities. (AC 1.1)
2. A discussion of at least two of the organisation’s business goals and why it is important for
organisations to plan for how they will achieve these. (AC 1.2)
3. A discussion of the organisation’s products and/or services and main customers. (AC 1.3)
4. A short review of information and communication technologies available to people professionals
and how these can be, or are, used to improve working practices and collaboration. (AC 1.4)
5. A definition of what is meant by organisational culture and an explanation of why it is important
to foster an appropriate and effective workplace culture. (AC 2.1)
Business, culture and change in context
9
9
3
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
ASSESSMENT TASK
INFORMATION SHEET (CONTINUED)
6. An explanation of how organisations are whole systems, within which aspects such as structure,
systems and culture are all inter-related, and how people professionals’ work and actions could
impact elsewhere in the organisation. (AC 2.2)
7. An explanation of why it is important that organisational change is planned and effectively
managed. (AC 3.1)
8. An explanation of the importance and role that can be played by people professionals within
change. You might consider roles such as: gatekeeper, champion, facilitator, critical friend or
record-keeper. (AC 3.2)
9. A discussion of how organisational change can impact people in different ways, such as changing
their role or status or financial situation. (AC 3.3)
Your evidence must consist of
• an information sheet of 2,500 words +/-10%
Business, culture and change in context
10
10
QUESTIONS TO ASK YOURSELF
What is the assessment specifically asking you to cover?
How will you structure your work?
How will you manage and monitor your word count?
What examples of work (theory and research) from your study could you use towards this assessment?
How can you integrate your learning with your organisational context?
How will you ensure your assessment requirements are met (the learning outcomes)?
Business, culture and change in context
11
11
ASSESSMENT FORMAT
Word document
• You must use the Learner assessment submission template to complete your
assessment
• Add your assessment to this document (not separate documents)
• You must have signed the declaration on this document – it will be returned unmarked if it
hasn’t been signed
• You must include your word count at the end of each task completed
Assessment
• Information sheet (2,500 words +/- 10%)
• Reference list
• Bibliography
Business, culture and change in context
12
12
4
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
SUBMISSION TEMPLATE AND
DECLARATION OF AUTHENTICATION
You will be provided with the Learner assessment submission template to use to submit your
assessment. You will find this in your assessment focus area.
Please ensure you sign the learner declaration as CIPD will not accept your submission for
moderation if this is not signed and this will delay feedback and results.
DECLARATION OF AUTHENTICATION
Declaration by the learner (this box must be signed–not typed–or your assessment will not be accepted)
Learner name
Learner statement of
authenticity
I can confirm that this assessment is all my own work and, where I have used materials from other
sources, they have been properly acknowledged.
Standardisation
I am aware my assessment may be chosen for standardisation purposes on the understanding that the
content will be anonymised.
Signed
Date
Business, culture and change in context
13
13
COMMAND WORDS
Explain: Make plain,
interpret, and account for,
enlighten, give reasons for
a specific decision.
Define: Give the exact
meaning of. Where relevant,
show you understand how
the definition may be
problematic.
Examine: Look closely
into something.
Consider: to what extent is
something true, or contribute
to a final outcome. To what
extent is this not true.
Discuss: Investigate or
examine by argument; sift
and debate; give reasons for
and against; examine the
implications.
Review: Ignoring minor
details, investigate a
variety of options in order
to make a case.
Business, culture and change in context
14
14
CIPD GRADE DESCRIPTORS
You will receive a Low Pass/Pass/High Pass or Refer/Fail result at unit level. Assessors will provide a
mark from 1 to 4 for each of the assessment criteria in the unit. The marking descriptor grid is provided
here as guidance. This will provide you with feedback that is developmental. To pass the unit
assessment, you must achieve a 2 (Low Pass) or above for each of the learning outcomes/assessment
criteria.
Mark
Range
Descriptor
1
Refer/Fail
Insufficient demonstration of knowledge, understanding or skills (as appropriate) required to meet the AC.
Insufficient examples included, where required, to support answers.
Presentation and structure of assignment are not appropriate and do not meet the assessment brief.
2
Low Pass
Demonstrates an acceptable level of knowledge, understanding or skills (as appropriate) required to meet the AC.
Sufficient and acceptable examples included, where required, to support answers.
Required format adopted but some improvement required to the structure and presentation of the assignment.
Answers are acceptable but could be clearer in responding to the task and presented in a more coherent way.
3
Pass
Demonstrates good knowledge, understanding or skills (as appropriate) required to meet the AC.
Includes confident use of examples, where required, to support each answer.
Presentation and structure of assignment are appropriate for the assessment brief.
Answers are clear and well expressed.
4
High Pass
Demonstrates a wide range and confident level of knowledge, understanding or skill (as appropriate).
Includes strong examples that illustrate the point being made, that link and support the answer well.
Answers are applied to the case organisation or an alternative organisation.
Answers are clear, concise and well-argued, directly respond to what has been asked.
The presentation of the assignment is well-structured, coherent and focusses on the need of the questions.
Includes clear evidence of the use of references to wider reading to help inform answer.
Business, culture and change in context
15
15
5
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
CITING, REFERENCE LIST
AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
• Referring to a published piece of work in the
main body/text is called citing
• A citation is thus nothing more than an in-text
reference
• Citations are referenced in full in the reference
list at the end of the report/essay/project, etc
Reference list
A reference list relates directly to the citations
used within your text/writing.
Bibliography
A bibliography list refers to work that is read by
the writer but not used within the text/writing.
Sources should not be listed in both.
Business, culture and change in context
16
Business, culture and change in context
17
Business, culture and change in context
18
16
WHAT IS PLAGIARISM?
Plagiarism is using the words of others without
acknowledgement.
Plagiarism includes the following.
1. Copying text directly
2. Using others’ ideas or theories
3. Paraphrasing what you have read or heard
4. Using mainly quotations in your work without
any original ideas
17
HOW TO AVOID PLAGIARISM
• Write your notes in your own words
• Note exactly where you have sourced them
from
• In your text, make sure you use Anglia Ruskin
Harvard referencing
• Only use quotations when really needed; you
should have very few direct quotes in your
work
Further explanation and guidance on Anglia
Ruskin Harvard referencing is available on the
VLE: CIPD Resource zone – Help with
assessments – How to Harvard reference –
Using the Harvard referencing system.
18
6
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
ANGLIA RUSKIN HARVARD REFERENCING
REFERENCE LIST
Textbook
Martin, M. and Whiting, F., 2020. Human resource practice. London: CIPD/Kogan Page.
CIPD Factsheet
D’Souza, D., 2020. Change management. London: CIPD. [Online]. Available at:
[Accessed 15 August 2021].
PDF report found online
CIPD, 2020. People Profession Survey 2020: UK and Ireland. London: CIPD. [PDF]. Available at:
[Accessed 30 January 2022].
CIPD Profession Map
CIPD, 2021. Profession map: specialist knowledge: learning and development. London: CIPD. [Online].
Available at: [Accessed 10 March 2022].
Business, culture and change in context
19
19
ANGLIA RUSKIN HARVARD REFERENCING
REFERENCE LIST
Put references in alphabetical order
CIPD, 2021. Profession map: specialist knowledge: learning and development. London: CIPD. [Online].
Available at: [Accessed 10 March 2022].
CIPD, 2020. People Profession Survey 2020: UK and Ireland. London: CIPD. [PDF]. Available at:
[Accessed 30 January 2022].
D’Souza, D., 2020. Change management. London: CIPD. [Online]. Available at:
[Accessed 15 August 2021].
Martin, M. and Whiting, F., 2020. Human resource practice. London: CIPD/Kogan Page.
Mosadeghrad, A. and Ansarian, M., 2014. Why do organisational change programmes fail? International
Journal of Strategic Change Management. 5(3). pp.189-218.
Business, culture and change in context
20
20
ANGLIA RUSKIN HARVARD REFERENCING
IN TEXT CITATIONS
The year of publication is given after the name of the author
In a recent factsheet (CIPD, 2021) it was suggested that…
If there are two authors
Martin and Whiting (2020, pp.50-52) outline a range of ways in which…
If there are more than two authors
Ulrich et al (2017) suggest that…
Where you need to cite more than one work published in the same year by the same author,
you can indicate this as follows
In a recent factsheet (CIPD, 2020a)
In a recent report (CIPD, 2020b) etc.
Business, culture and change in context
21
21
7
CIPD L3 CO01 Assessment guidance v3
AN EXAMPLE OF USING CITATIONS IN YOUR WORK
…Transformational leaders are often described as charismatic (Bass and Avolio, 2000, p.10),
providing inspiration, motivation and a shared vision for those within the organisation. However,
this vision is thought to do more than simply inspire and motivate the workgroup; it is seen by
many as a means of creating a mechanism through which knowledge management can be
introduced (Nonaka and Takeuchi, 1995, pp.45-52). Where people share in a vision, they share
a vested interest in seeing that vision become a reality. According to Argyris and Schon (1996),
transformational leaders encourage people to share both their explicit and their tacit knowledge,
helping people to contribute more effectively to the organisations goals…
Business, culture and change in context
22
22
NEXT
STEPS
Principles of analytics
23
23
IS THIS YOUR LAST UNIT?
Keep growing your career. Speak to us about your future study plans.
Did you know after completing your Level 3 qualification, you
can sign up for the following qualifications?
• CIPD Associate Diploma in People Management (Level 5)
or
• CIPD Associate Diploma in Organisational Learning
and Development (Level 5)
We also offer other management (CMI) and project
management (APM) qualifications.
For further information please call 0345 203 2103
Principles of analytics
24
or email enquiries@mollearn.com
24
8
To Accept or Reject a Client
[WLOs: 1, 2] [CLOs: 1, 3, 4]
Prior to beginning work on this assignment, read Chapters 3 and 4 in the textbook and the article Crisis Communication and Ethics: The Role of Public Relations, and then watch the video Protecting a Company’s Public Relationship in Times of White Collar Criminal CrisisLinks to an external site..
A well-known professional baseball player is suspected of having used steroids and other performance-enhancing drugs. He has not been charged. His agent asks you to advise and assist him in handling the intense media interest in the case. He wants you to try to place favorable stories about the baseball star in the media and create a positive environment for him. If formally accused, it could mean irreparable damage to his baseball career.
You are not asked to do anything unethical. The money is quite good, and you know the publicity from working on the case will probably help your public relations consulting career, especially if the athlete is exonerated. The agent tells you confidentially that the athlete has admitted that he took some substance that was unknown to him, but that may have been steroids. Consider the following in your proposal:
Would you take the account?
Does the athlete’s unawareness of taking steroids affect your decision?
What are the ethics of the situation as you see them?
Write a proposal to your business partners regarding the situation. Answer all questions brought up in the case and compare the case to at least one similar case with a well-known ballplayer found through your research. Use the Public Relations News Research in the UAGC LibraryLinks to an external site. guide to find a similar case to support this assignment.
Finally, provide a recommendation to your partners as to whether you should accept the contract.
In your paper,
Analyze the case.
Determine if you should take the case.
Does the information that the athlete may have unwittingly taken steroids affect your decision to take the case?
What are the ethics of the situation as you see them?
Write a proposal to your business partners regarding the situation.
Assess all questions brought up in the case.
Compare the case to at least one similar case with a well-known ballplayer found through research.
Provide a recommendation as to whether you should accept the contract.
Must be two to three double-spaced pages in length (not including title and references pages) and formatted according to APA StyleLinks to an external site. as outlined in the Writing Center’s APA Formatting for Microsoft WordLinks to an external site..
Must include a separate title page with the following:
Title of paper in bold font
Space should appear between the title and the rest of the information on the title page.
Student’s name
Name of institution (The University of Arizona Global Campus)
Course name and number
Instructor’s name
Due date
Must utilize academic voice. See the Academic VoiceLinks to an external site. resource for additional guidance.
Must include an introduction and conclusion paragraph. Your introduction paragraph needs to end with a clear thesis statement that indicates the purpose of your paper.
For assistance on writing Introductions & ConclusionsLinks to an external site. and Writing a Thesis StatementLinks to an external site., refer to the Writing Center resources.
Must use at least one scholarly source in addition to the course text.
The Scholarly, Peer-Reviewed, and Other Credible SourcesLinks to an external site. table offers additional guidance on appropriate source types. If you have questions about whether a specific source is appropriate for this assignment, please contact your instructor. Your instructor has the final say about the appropriateness of a specific source.
To assist you in completing the research required for this assignment, view Quick and Easy Library ResearchLinks to an external site. tutorial, which introduces the University of Arizona Global Campus Library and the research process, and provides some library search tips.
Must document any information used from sources in APA Style as outlined in the Writing Center’s APA: Citing Within Your PaperLinks to an external site..
Must include a separate references page that is formatted according to APA Style as outlined in the Writing Center. See the APA: Formatting Your References ListLinks to an external site. resource in the Writing Center for specifications.
The To Accept or Reject a Client paper
Assignment: Community Event Essay Learning Objective: Highlights and evaluates a community event. Assignment Instructions: Students will apply theories and principles of communication studies by examining a communication event such as the Communication Studies Speaker Event, Public Deliberations, or other forms of public communication. Your essay should be a minimum of 600-700 words and should use APA formatting and citations. Pay attention to grammar and sentence structure. Provide an introduction, proper thesis, support for the thesis in the body of the paper and a conclusion that proves or disproves your thesis. https://uhdowntown-my.sharepoint.com/personal/kod_…Your goal is to apply the relevance of the community issue (work/life balance) to the concepts discussed in this class. In your reflection, discuss the following questions: What was the community issue that was discussed at the event? What are the various viewpoints and approaches to consider when discussing this issue? What are some theories that we have discussed in this class that relate to the community issue? Did you see any patterns or repeated themes between all three speakers at the event? If so, what were those themes? Where do you see this community issue leading? What research could be done to further analyze this issue? How do you see the issue progressing in the future? What limitations are there to pursuing more information about the topic?Just so you know- essays will be graded on your ability to address all of the points noted above, as well as adhering to correct grammar, punctuation, and spelling. 5 4 3 2 1 Identified/discussed community issue Discussed relevant theories Considered various viewpoints and identified patterns/themes Discussed future progression & limitations of the topic Grammatically correct/MLA or APA Formatting
Exam Content
Identifying the needs of an organization is commonly done because the global business environment is constantly changing. While it seems like a miniscule business administration task, it is actually an involved and detailed task that leads the way to change. By identifying the needs, managers at each level of the organization can analyze the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) to develop potential strategies that will best position the company to achieve its mission and goals in the changing global business environment.
Scenario
Congratulations! You’ve been hired as a general manager and tasked with proposing a plan that will update the alignment of the organization’s business strategies to address the impact of the changing global environment. This plan will be presented to C-suite employees in a few weeks. The first step to proposing a plan like this is to review the organization’s annual report and other documents then develop an organizational analysis.
Preparation
Use the organization and SWOT analysis you selected in Week 1 for this summative assessment.
Analyze your selected organization’s SWOT analysis and other available sources to evaluate the current business strategies and strategic needs of the organization within a changing global environment. Determine a competitive business initiative that will address the unmet needs of the organization, based on your analysis
Assessment Deliverable
Write a 700- to 1,050-word proposal that analyzes the current business strategies and the needs of the organization. Include the following in your organizational analysis:
Name of organization and industry
Mission and vision
Current organizational initiatives and what’s being done to support these initiatives
Internal and external factors from SWOT analysis
Alignment evaluation
1 or more unmet needs that is not limited to product or service (e.g., can be new demographic, new mode of delivery)
Competitive advantages based on SWOT analysis
Proposal of global competitive business initiative to address the unmet need(s)
High-level outline with timelines and operational steps necessary to implement competitive business initiative
Format citations and references for any sources used according to APA guidelines.
Submit your assessment
Assessment Support
Review the rubric for guidance on deliverable expectations.
Review the Wk 2 University Library for guidance on locating annual reports.
Looking Ahead
You will continue using the information from this summative assessment in the other summative assessments in this course.
Copyright 2023 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved.
Please diagram a supply chain of a well know companyCreate your diagram in Powerpoint. Make an effort to present a “picture” of the supply chain that could be used to communicate with the colleagues at your company about an issue of importance in SCM at your firm.In the same Powerpoint file (on a separate slide or two), briefly describe the supply chain that you are diagramming and present one significant strategic challenge that the supply chain is facing. Write a minimum of 300 words. Clearly state the situation, give examples, facts, statistics, and/or quotes to aid the reader. Cite the text book, lecture content, or an outside reference. Use proper grammar and spelling.
Bad debts for accounts receivables are something that every organization needs to prepare for and also understand how to estimate and record the uncollectible accounts receivables for a certain period. Generally Accept Accounting Principles (GAAP) allows businesses two option to write off bad debts: 1.) Direct Write-Off Method or 2.) Allowance Method.
Based on the information that you have learned in the module, you have been asked to create a PowerPoint presentation that provides the procedures for using both of the methods. In addition, you should provide your reasoning for which method that you believe the organization should use. Providing specific examples of how the methods are completed is also required. Please review the rubric for specific information on how the PPT presentation will be graded. Your presentation should be a minimum of slides that does not include the cover slide or the references slide.
Length/Formatting Instructions
Font 12 point, Times New Roman or Calibri Font
Program/File Type Submit in Word
Attachments Should be pasted into the Word document if possible.
Referencing system
APA referencing system is necessary in assignments, especially material copied from the Internet.
For examples of correct citations, visit the following links:
File Name Lastname_firstname_[Course Code]_M[Module #] Assignment
M6 Assignment Grading Rubric
Your work will be evaluated on the following criteria:
CATEGORY Exemplary Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Unacceptable
Overview of the Methods (20 points) 20 points
The presentation contains a comprehensive overview of the two bad debt reporting methods.
16 points
The presentation has an adequate overview of the two bad debt reporting methods but is not comprehensive.
8 points
The presentation does not include a comprehensive overview of the two bad debt reporting methods.
0 points
The presentation does not meet the requirements.
Comparison/Contrast of Bad Debt Reporting Methods (20 points) 20 points
The presentation contains a comprehensive comparison between bad debt methods.
16 points
The presentation has an adequate comparison but is not comprehensive.
8 points
The presentation does not include a comprehensive comparison.
0 points
The presentation does not meet the requirements.
Specific Steps of the Bad Debt Reporting Methods (20 points) 20 points
The presentation contains a comprehensive overview of how each method is recorded in the accounting ledgers.
16 points
The presentation has an adequate overview of how each method is recorded in the accounting ledgers, but is not comprehensive.
8 points
The presentation does not include a comprehensive overview of how each method is recorded in the accounting ledgers.
0 points
The presentation does not meet the requirements.
Summary/Recommendations (20 points) 20 points
The presentation contains comprehensive recommendations of which bad debt reporting method should be used by the organization.
16 points
The presentation has an adequate summary on which bad debt reporting method should be used by the organization, but is not comprehensive.
8 points
The presentation does not include a comprehensive summary on which bad debt reporting method should be used by the organization.
0 points
The presentation does not meet the requirements.
Writing Style—Organization, Transitions, Tone (10 points) 10 points
The assignment is written with excellent organization, thoughtful transitions, and the appropriate tone.
8 points
This writing assignment is adequately organized, but has some errors in the transitions or the tone.
4 points
This writing assignment is poorly organized, or it contains ineffective transitions and/or inappropriate tone.
0 points
This writing assignment displays little to no organization or transitions, and/or does not use the appropriate tone.
APA Format—Citations and References (10 points) 10 points
All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited, and the references and in-text citations are all properly formatted. Each reference has an in-text citation and in-text citation has a reference.
8 points
All sources used for quotes and facts are credible and cited, but slight errors are present in the format of the in-text citations or references. Or there may be one in-text citation or reference missing.
4 points
Some sources used for quotes and facts are either not credible or there are significant errors in the in-text citations and/or references. Or there are multiple missing in-text citations or references.
0 points
The sources used for quotes and facts are not credible and/or not cited. The in-text citations and/or references are not present.
For this assignment, you will develop an EFE matrix for the Coca Cola Company.
Steps
1. Complete the assigned readings for this unit: David and David, Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts and Cases, 17 Edition: Chapters 1, 2, and 3. Please use the exact book as its shown on the pptx.
2. Research Coca Cola using the Cohesion Case in David and David, Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts and Cases, as well as using outside readings. Consider the following in your research:
Make sure the factors you include are both specific and actionable.
Use the information in the S&P Industry Surveys that you can copy from Chapter 1: Assurance of Learning.
Do NOT include strategies as opportunities, but DO include as many monetary amounts, percentages, numbers, and ratios as possible.
3. Create a weighted EFE Matrix with total weighted scores on the chart.
4. Also, write a one page paper in which you discuss your total score and provide your rationale for the weights. Submit the paper, including the EFE Matrix, below.
Choose a topic that enables you to tell a short, interesting personal narrative essay. Your narrative can be funny, suspenseful, meaningful, or exciting, but it must focus on one event. For example, if you decide to write about traveling to Washington DC, you should not write about the entire trip. Choose one event (e.g., an afternoon you spent visiting the National Portrait Gallery, or shopping in Georgetown, or taking a tour of the White House) and tell a detailed story that focuses on that single event.
The following are some ideas that can help you to select a topic for your story:
Firsts: Think of a “first” in your life and describe that moment in detail.
Proud moment: Choose a moment when you felt proud about an accomplishment.
Adversity: Describe a time when you had to think or act quickly to overcome a challenge.
Travel: Recall a memorable experience you had while visiting an interesting place.
Topic Choice Guidance: We encourage you to choose any one event from your life that you feel comfortable sharing in an academic context with a classroom audience in mind.
B. THINK ABOUT YOUR WRITING
Below your completed narrative, include answers to all of the following reflection questions:
1. Which narrative techniques did you use to bring your narrative to life? (2-3 sentences) Sophia says: Did you use vivid description, sensory details, and/or dialogue to engage readers? Provide two examples from your essay in which you “show” readers rather than “tell” them. EXAMPLE: A sentence such as “I glanced at the clock, grabbed my briefcase, and sprinted for the elevator” uses more descriptive language than simply saying, “I was running late for the meeting.”
2. How did your purpose and audience shape the way in which you wrote your narrative? (3-4 sentences) Sophia says: Your hypothetical audience extends beyond the people who will evaluate your narrative. Which individuals or groups were you addressing when you wrote your narrative, and how did consideration of your audience and your purpose influence the way in which you wrote it?
3. Provide a concrete example from your narrative that shows how you have written specifically for this audience and purpose. (3-5 sentences) Sophia says: Consider including a quotation from your essay and explaining how it was written to appeal to your audience and to accomplish your purpose. Alternatively, you might describe a theme, tone, or narrative technique that you used and explain how it was intended to appeal to your audience and achieve your purpose.
C. NARRATIVE GUIDELINES
DIRECTIONS: Refer to the checklist below throughout the writing process. Do not submit your Touchstone until your essay meets all of the guidelines.
NARRATIVE FOCUS AND FLOW
❒ Have you written about a single event over a short period of time rather than several events over an extended period of time?
❒ Are all of the details in your story relevant to your purpose?
❒ Is the narrative action presented in a logical order that is easy to follow?
❒ Is your narrative 500-800 words in length? If not, which details do you need to add or subtract?
NARRATIVE STRUCTURE
❒ Is there an opening paragraph that introduces the setting, characters, and situation?
❒ Are there middle paragraphs that describe the progression of narrative action?
❒ Is there a closing paragraph that provides a thorough resolution to the event or experience?
NARRATIVE LANGUAGE AND TECHNIQUES
❒ Have you incorporated narrative language and techniques (e.g., figurative language, concrete and sensory details, dialogue, and vivid description)?
❒ Can examples of narrative language and techniques be found throughout your narrative essay, or are they only evident in some places?
CONVENTIONS
❒ Have you double-checked for correct grammar, punctuation, spelling, formatting, and capitalization?
❒ Have you proofread to find and correct typos?
BEFORE YOU SUBMIT
❒ Have you included your name, date, and course in the top left corner of the page?
❒ Have you answered all of the “Think About Your Writing” questions?
❒ Is your essay between 500 and 800 words in length (2-3 pages)?
Group Presentation(DueWeeks 4-7)(100points)(45-60minutes, about 15-25
slides). Each student will be assigned to a group or partner that will be responsible for presenting
on a selected topic related to OD. Topics could include appreciative inquiry, emotional
intelligence, diversity, change management, polarity management, transorganizational change,
performance management, organization structure, team building, etc. Cases from the text could
also be used to complement the presentation. To produce a great presentation additional reading
other than the text is required. Do cite your resources.
The presentation will consist of directing a full class discussion and activities for the assigned
day on a set of organization development interventions or case study. Presentations must include
a critical analysis of the case study or topic selected with adequate attention placed on
organizational development theory, practice, and resource management.
The purpose of this assignment is to foster your learning about OD and leadership and develop
your case analysis, knowledge of topic area, and presentation skills. These are key skills of a
leader. This assignment will give you direct experience in doing so, while also fostering learning
within your group.
For this assignment, you will work with two to three participants and the instructor, if needed, in
designing and delivering a “facilitation” designed to add to the learning of the participants in the
class. There are many ways you can do this. You are encouraged to solicit ‘pre-work’ from your
classmates before the class and active engagement them during your ‘presentation.’
You could work with the instructor in designing these presentations and activities. Your group
will be granted 50 minutes of a class period in which you will be ‘in charge’ of the learning process. The minutes can go very fast, so you will need to budget your time wisely.
Presentation and questions must be within the allotted time frame.
Participants and the instructor will provide you with feedback on the above criteria.
Your goal is to create “new learning” for the participants in the class. Thus, it is critical to make
links to materials from class and text, but you are expected to go well beyond these materials. It
will be good for you to have some reference to “additional materials to learn more” on your
case/topic. SLOs 1, 2, 3, 4
Preparing for your Presentation
You and your team members should carefully plan and rehearse your slide show to maximize
impact and minimize distractions. The slide show should include all of the pizzazz necessary to
garner the attention of the audience, but not so much that it distracts from the content of what
group members are saying to the class.
You should remember that the role of slides, video clips, etc. is to help you communicate your
points to the audience. Too many graphics, images, colors, and transitions may divert the
audience’s attention from what is being said or disrupt the flow of the presentation. Keep in mind
that visually dazzling slides rarely hide a shallow or superficial or otherwise flawed case analysis
from a perceptive audience. Please pay attention to grammar, spelling, design, format, flow, etc.
Most audiences will tell you that first-rate slides will definitely enhance a well-delivered
presentation, but that impressive visual aids, if accompanied by weak analysis, limited
supporting data, and poor oral delivery, still adds up to a substandard presentation of little value.
SLOs 1, 2, 3, 4
All written assignments should be formatted using a standard 12-point font and 1 inch margins, including your full name in a header at the upper right, and using your full name as part of the file name (e.g., “Business&Society_Week 1_MattStatler).
Analytical Reflections
For each class meeting, you will be required to write a 1200 to 1400 word analytical reflection. Each reflection will address the four plenary videos for that unit, analyzing what the speakers said using concepts or information from the readings or other materials for that unit. You must draw on or reference each one of the readings or other materials for that unit at least once. Try to give equal space to each plenary.
The goal of this writing assignment is to give you the opportunity to identify the significance of the material other than the plenaries, to think about the ideas presented in the plenaries, and, quite simply, to do the work required to prepare for class discussion. (“Work,” in this case, means that your job is not only to read or watch the material in advance but to understand and begin to think about the material, in relation to other material we are reading or watching, in relation to what you see in the world, and in relation to what you, yourself, have experienced.)
In these assignments, you need to consider each speaker’s significant arguments and ideas (unless the “speaker” was functioning only as an interviewer or moderator), and reflect and analyze them by 1) considering what they mean in reference to contemporary business practice, 2) considering how the ideas in the other materials support or contradict what the speaker said, and 3) reflecting on what it all means for you and your professional development in business school.
Please note:
1. Thesearenotsummaries.Whileyoumayneedtoexplainparticulararguments or ideas that you are going to analyze, the majority of the written assignment should be comprised of your own thoughts about how the argument works or how sound the idea is, what assumptions the speaker or writer depends upon, what perspective the argument comes from, etc., and then your reflection on those points.
2. Thesearenotevaluationsorreviews.Youshouldnotstatewhetheryou like/dislike, agree/disagree with these texts. It is not opinion that matters here; it is analysis although you may criticize an argument, idea, or assumption.
3. These assignments are NOT group projects. While you may certainly discuss the materials with your peers, these written assignments constitute your preparation for class discussion and, more importantly, represent your own analysis and ideas about the material. As such, you should not use another student’s paper to write your own, nor should you ever give your written work to another student to use.
Some questions you might ask and address:
● How do the ideas in the plenary add to or conflict with the ideas in another plenary or in the other material?
● How might the concepts from the material be illustrated by events in our contemporary world?
● How might you apply the ideas from the readings to experiences in your own life?Some questions you might ask and address:
● How do the ideas in the plenary add to or conflict with the ideas in another plenary or in the other material?
● How might the concepts from the material be illustrated by events in our contemporary world?
● How might you apply the ideas from the readings to experiences in your own life?
Rubric for Analytical Reflection
5 Every reflection demonstrates exceptional thoughtfulness and intellectual understanding of the topic. Demonstrably important ideas are identified from the materials. Analysis or reflections are interesting and compelling, adding significant interpretations of the ideas through specific comparisons to the arguments of other materials or to real-world examples.
4 Reflections demonstrate insightful responses to the content of the materials. Discussions highlight important arguments from the materials. Analysis or reflections reveal careful thought and understanding through specifics.
3 Reflections demonstrate good comprehension of the materials. Analysis or reflections show some thought about the materials, but discussion of the ideas is broad or shallow.
2 Reflections are entirely summary, demonstrating reading or watching the materials but not demonstrating further thought about the material presented.
1 Reflections are predominantly incomplete or incorrect. 0 Failure to turn in the assignment on Brightspace.
Unit 1 Videos
● Introduction to Business and Society, Dr. Matt Statler, Clinical Professor of Business and Society, Richman Family Director of Business Ethics and Social Impact Programming, NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Markets, Professor Aswath Damodaran, Professor of Finance, NYU Stern & Prof. Scott Galloway, Clinical Professor of Marketing, NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Human Rights, Leigh Anne DeWine, Director of Social Responsibility, Amazon, in dialogue with Michael Posner, Director, Center for Business and Human Rights, Jerome Kohlberg Professor of Ethics and Finance, NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Privacy, Charlton McIlwain, Vice Provost for Faculty Engagement and Development; Professor of Media, Culture, and Communication, NYU Steinhardt, in dialogue with Anil Dash
● Excerpts from Adam Smith, The Theory of Moral Sentiments (1759) and An
Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of The Wealth of Nations (1776).
● Wiesenfeld, Professor Batia. “The Three-Sector Model.” Learning Science Lab, 20 Dec. 2017, (video with transcript).
Annotation: Wiesenfeld describes how markets/corporations fit within society. Since this piece is older, note that, (1) you do not have to watch part 2 about Colombia and (2) you can mentally replace references to the course titled, “Business and its Publics” to our current course, “Business & Society,” which you of course are taking in an intensive form.
● Herzog, Lisa. “Markets.” Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy, Stanford University, 30 Aug. 2021.
● Friedman, Milton. “The Social Responsibility of Business is to Increase its
Profits.” The New York Times Magazine, 13 Sep. 1970.
● Freeman, R. Edward. “Managing for Stakeholders.” Jan. 2007
● “Social Contract Theory.” Ethics Unwrapped.
● Rousseau, Jean-Jacques. “The Social Contract & Discourses by Jean-Jacques
Rousseau.” Project Gutenberg, 19 July 2014.
● Jacoby, James, et al. “Amazon Empire: The Rise and Reign of Jeff Bezos”, PBS Frontline, Public Broadcasting Service, 18 Feb. 2020.
Annotation: (~2 hours).
Unformatted Attachment Preview
All written assignments should be formatted using a standard 12-point font and 1 inch
margins, including your full name in a header at the upper right, and using your full
name as part of the file name (e.g., “Business&Society_Week 1_MattStatler).
Analytical Reflections
For each class meeting, you will be required to write a 1200 to 1400 word analytical
reflection. Each reflection will address the four plenary videos for that unit, analyzing
what the speakers said using concepts or information from the readings or other
materials for that unit. You must draw on or reference each one of the readings or other
materials for that unit at least once. Try to give equal space to each plenary.
The goal of this writing assignment is to give you the opportunity to identify the
significance of the material other than the plenaries, to think about the ideas presented
in the plenaries, and, quite simply, to do the work required to prepare for class
discussion. (“Work,” in this case, means that your job is not only to read or watch the
material in advance but to understand and begin to think about the material, in relation
to other material we are reading or watching, in relation to what you see in the world,
and in relation to what you, yourself, have experienced.)
In these assignments, you need to consider each speaker’s significant arguments and
ideas (unless the “speaker” was functioning only as an interviewer or moderator), and
reflect and analyze them by 1) considering what they mean in reference to
contemporary business practice, 2) considering how the ideas in the other materials
support or contradict what the speaker said, and 3) reflecting on what it all means for
you and your professional development in business school.
Please note:
1. These are not summaries. While you may need to explain particular arguments
or ideas that you are going to analyze, the majority of the written assignment
should be comprised of your own thoughts about how the argument works or
how sound the idea is, what assumptions the speaker or writer depends upon,
what perspective the argument comes from, etc., and then your reflection on
those points.
2. These are not evaluations or reviews. You should not state whether you
like/dislike, agree/disagree with these texts. It is not opinion that matters here; it
is analysis although you may criticize an argument, idea, or assumption.
3. These assignments are NOT group projects. While you may certainly discuss
the materials with your peers, these written assignments constitute your
preparation for class discussion and, more importantly, represent your own
analysis and ideas about the material. As such, you should not use another
student’s paper to write your own, nor should you ever give your written work to
another student to use.
Some questions you might ask and address:
● How do the ideas in the plenary add to or conflict with the ideas in another
plenary or in the other material?
● How might the concepts from the material be illustrated by events in our
contemporary world?
● How might you apply the ideas from the readings to experiences in your own life?
Rubric for Analytical Reflection
5
Every reflection demonstrates exceptional thoughtfulness and intellectual
understanding of the topic. Demonstrably important ideas are identified
from the materials. Analysis or reflections are interesting and compelling,
adding significant interpretations of the ideas through specific comparisons
to the arguments of other materials or to real-world examples.
4
Reflections demonstrate insightful responses to the content of the
materials. Discussions highlight important arguments from the materials.
Analysis or reflections reveal careful thought and understanding through
specifics.
Reflections demonstrate good comprehension of the materials. Analysis or
reflections show some thought about the materials, but discussion of the
ideas is broad or shallow.
3
2
1
0
Reflections are entirely summary, demonstrating reading or watching the
materials but not demonstrating further thought about the material
presented.
Reflections are predominantly incomplete or incorrect.
Failure to turn in the assignment on Brightspace.
Unit 1 Videos
● Introduction to Business and Society, Dr. Matt Statler, Clinical Professor of
Business and Society, Richman Family Director of Business Ethics and Social
Impact Programming, NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Markets, Professor Aswath Damodaran, Professor of Finance, NYU
Stern & Prof. Scott Galloway, Clinical Professor of Marketing, NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Human Rights, Leigh Anne DeWine, Director of Social
Responsibility, Amazon, in dialogue with Michael Posner, Director, Center for
Business and Human Rights, Jerome Kohlberg Professor of Ethics and Finance,
NYU Stern.
● Amazon and Privacy, Charlton McIlwain, Vice Provost for Faculty Engagement
and Development; Professor of Media, Culture, and Communication, NYU
Steinhardt, in dialogue with Anil Dash
Unit 1 Readings
● Henderson, Rebecca. “Reimagining Capitalism.” MBR Journal, 15 Nov. 2021.
● Excerpts from Adam Smith, The Theory of Moral Sentiments (1759) and An
Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of The Wealth of Nations (1776).
● Wiesenfeld, Professor Batia. “The Three-Sector Model.” Learning Science Lab,
20 Dec. 2017, (video with transcript).
Annotation: Wiesenfeld describes how markets/corporations fit within society.
Since this piece is older, note that, (1) you do not have to watch part 2 about
Colombia and (2) you can mentally replace references to the course titled,
“Business and its Publics” to our current course, “Business & Society,” which you
of course are taking in an intensive form.
● Herzog, Lisa. “Markets.” Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy, Stanford
University, 30 Aug. 2021.
● Kowal, Rachel, 2021, Market Failure Teaching Notes.
● Friedman, Milton. “The Social Responsibility of Business is to Increase its
Profits.” The New York Times Magazine, 13 Sep. 1970.
● Freeman, R. Edward. “Managing for Stakeholders.” Jan. 2007
● “Social Contract Theory.” Ethics Unwrapped.
● Rousseau, Jean-Jacques. “The Social Contract & Discourses by Jean-Jacques
Rousseau.” Project Gutenberg, 19 July 2014.
● Jacoby, James, et al. “Amazon Empire: The Rise and Reign of Jeff Bezos”, PBS
Frontline, Public Broadcasting Service, 18 Feb. 2020.
Annotation: (~2 hours).
The plenary video explains the course goal is to get students to gain analytic skills to
truly understand the complex relationship between business and society from different
perspectives.
Analyze the role of business and society from those different perspectives.
Jeff bazos, the richest person on the planet, unveiled his latest invention.
His work with amazon has revolutionized commerce.
Bazos demonstrate that consumerism is an example of how todays society lives better
than past generations. His goal is for future generations to continue to have increasingly
better lifestyles.
Amazon is building all of the invisible infrastructure for our futures
Jeff bazos choose books as the first best product to sell online
Amazon and markets video :
Aswath Damodaran, professor of finance
Scott galloway
Professor Aswath Damodaran, known as Dean of evaluation,
He tries to visualize
He describes evaluation as a bridge between stories and numbers. He gives a simple
example of how he thinks of evaluation, he visualizes something that I think stands in
for the company. Example in Netflix he visualizes a hamster on a wheel , because this
company is caught in a vicious cycle. The market is getting saturated and there’s not
that much room to grow. But this company historically had a simple proposition to push
up their company to grow its market price which is to create content and in fact they
change the content in the entertainment business on its head, traditionally companies
were careful with the content they created. However, Netflix changed that model and
throws a hundred shows on the wall and hopes it sticks, shows with different
languages.There way is creating many shows a day, to get more people to subscribe.
However eventually there is only so much the subscribers can increase. There is a
hamster on a wheel because if subscribers start to decrease they can’t bring down
content cost quickly. Facebook he thinks of a peeping tom, you let people into your
home but then you complain about facebook taking your privacy. You can’t complain
Amazon, the vision he used to get was a field of dreams, builds a field in the middle of
nowhere with two farmers who are neighbors and ask what they’re doing in the middle
of nowhere. “IF YOU BUILD IT THEY WILL COME” , this was amazons model for a long
time, if we build revenue the profits will eventually come. For 13 years he valued them
as a field of dreams company which meant revenue will come first and margins will
come after. About a decade ago he realized they were going through reincarnation, they
were going back to being a young company, they were reinventing themselves as a
disruption machine. What business is it in, whatever business it feels has soft spots.
The day amazon enters a business, example whole foods, other companies lose
money. When amazon enters your business, they might not figure out a way to make
money in that business but they will ensure that you will make less money from this day
on. Amazon to him is the most fascinating business story, it’s a company where its told
the same consistent story for the bulk of its existence, has acted consistently with that
story, not lots of companies do that. If you go on google and see the story Jeff basos
wrote in 1997 on what amazon is doing and it stayed true, this is an example he uses of
why ceos of companies need not to just tell a great story of their company but act
consistently with that story. The source of that power to act consistent with their story he
says is patience. Example : he asks how many people in the audience have prime,
amazon prime was created in 2004, the first 6 years they lost money and people were
asking why is amazon giving away this service its a huge money loss. But they stuck
with it today there are millions of prime members. The benefit for amazon to have these
members is they spend 3x as more on amazon then regular customers. They are
overdependent on the company, we go first to amazon prime we do it because if we
change our mind and we want to return it we can go drop it off a block away and a drop
off. Their disruption machine with an army , the army is amazon prime. Different
bussiness were asking who were their potential competitors, they will say amazon. 47
out of the top 50 companies choose amazon as their biggest competitors.whether we
like it or not , amazon is in every CEO’s head. What could be softer than the
universities. Is coming for universities, will do it in lesser time and less money
Asks Scott galloway what could be wrong with that?
Professor Scott Galloway says amazon trained the marketplace to replace profits with
growth . He now says the number one core competence of any CEO, he or she has to
be a great story teller. Because your ability to outpace the competition enlarged part
comes down to not having a better product, not having better distribution channels but
having access to cheaper capital for longer. Amazon overwhelms the competition with
cheap capital because for a couple decades, the market replaced profits with growth.
The only other company that was able to do that is Netflix. With amazon you have a
company that’s managed to convince the marketplace to replace profits with growth,
has access to cheaper capital so they could push the future forward. More than just a
disruption maching, he says the most impressive thing about amazon is that they’ve
taken their cost and asked what are their bigger cost, they realized there spending alot
of their money on fulfillment and instead of trying to reduce the cost of fulfillment,
created a platform where they started to leasing out our fulfillment other people in and
charging them for it. They took their biggest cost fulfillment into a profit center. Look at
all there bigger costs, invested in it and rented it out to other people. In a couple years
he thinks amazon will go into health care and ask would you like to cut your health
insurance costs in half if yes they’ll tell you about amazon health. The softest tissue in
America is health care which could be best described as expensive but bad. He argues
they would come for health care before education. When something becomes elite or
theres an illusion of scarcity, you develop margin power.
antitrust has been lost in america to breakup companies that have become monopolies
and taken over specific industries.
The arguments against amazon or monopolies right now, whether its google or apple,
that theres a network effects, that they have the capital to make these staggering
investments. All of these arguments were made about at&t back in the eighties, once
they broke up at& t into other smaller companies they found out that fiber data analytics
cells were all lying formant in the bell laboratories because they didn’t want to eat their
young and all of a sudden when these technologies were unleashed and theres more
competition. Those smaller seven companies, each of them within ten years, were more
valuable than the original at&t. We should break up google, most of these companies
should be broken up and regulated. We have found out that the best way to oxygenate
the economy and create jobs growth and create shareholder value is that when a
company is impossible to keep up with and is becoming a monopoly, we break it up.
How do you decide whether a company is a monopoly ?
The problem we have with technology companies is the traditional rule up that
monopolies are bad because they hurt consumers does not work at least in the near
term. If amazon increases amazon prime by a significant amount and if theres no other
company to turn to. In the past they were designed to combat a different kind of
monopolies than the ones we have with the big tech companies. There are companies
on top of the world one day like blackberry and ten years later fall down by a significant
amount. He says a far more effective way in dealing with these companies is letting
their own arrogance be their downfall. There going to overreach
Scott agrees that the antitrust laws go with if the consumer is harmed but it’s harmful to
apply those laws when the products are free. With a company like amazon, the biggest
part of their business is a third party platform where retailers sell their goods on their
platform and have to use their fulfillment and amazon to charge for the marketing and
their fulfillment.
Professor Galloway states A monopoly itself is not illegal, however a monopoly abuse
that is illegal. It’s when you’re in predator pricing when you’re losing so much money
that no one can compete with you, and then you start clearing out companies and
raising prices. Or you acquire companies just to take them off the market.
It’s easy to talk about breaking up these companies but the very actions of actually
doing it will create a major backlash
Let’s say they somehow with antitrust statutes break up amazon are consumers of
amazon prime can be harmed so much they’re going to rise up.
Video 3: Amazon and human rights :
Mike posner – executive director for the center for business and human rights
Leigh Anne dewine: director of social responsibility amazon
As the director of social responsibility at amazon what are your responsibilities in a day
to day basis?
Central team focuses on the entire enterprise of amazon. Social responsibility is how we
do business as a company and understanding what unintended impacts we can have in
the way we’re doing business, how we think about doing business responsibly.
In a practical sense, a big piece of her teams work is responsible sourcing, how do we
procure the goods we are selling and services that are supporting of our enterprise in a
way that is responsible of protecting our human rights of our workers.ensures that they
have high labor standards, ensuring they dont have danerougous working positions.
Human rights due diligence as a company and what that means is how do we broad
perspective what are risks are and build a program that strategies and minimizes those
risks.
Alot of smaller companies dont have the resources to have entire team for social
responsibility. Even for these big companies there is a cost, so we need to recognize,
they need to make those investments its important.
For companies like amazon what are the realistic limits to its abilities to monitor and
impact the sustainability behaviors of supplies ?
Dewine says it’s a challenge we invest a ton of resources in it to be present on the
ground, being in touch with auditing but there’s still more we can do in better
understanding the risks of the factory level. We implemented a voicer works program
where one of the best ways to understand and to get on the ground issues at an early
stage. From the workers themselves who are in those factories, that allow them to raise
those issues, not once a year but everyday we see that as a solution for future issues
across the supply chain. Biggest challenges is beyond the first year factories which is
where most companies are auditing and engaging, the biggest risk are further down the
supply chain, something amazon is investing alot of resources in and creating a lot of
partnerships around solving that problem
Company: Lululemon
Please write a presentation report (2 pages) about – Explore actionable solutions to tap the opportunity or mitigate the challenge.
This presentation will consist of your background, major findings, analysis, and recommendations in a concise presentation of 5 to 7 slides
——————
Do these in order:
Please Write a presentation report (need 2 pages content, not included citations)
– In correct APA format.
– please submit the paper on time and make sure NO PLAGIARISM!!!
For this assignment, develop a 4- to 6-page response containing written narrative, figures, and charts.
Provide general discussion on predetermined variable overhead criterion and its possible dependence on the activity for which it is used. Provide a variable costing income statement in which variable overhead is divided among different activities, and that each activity has its own predetermined variable overhead criterion.
The following is a partially completed lower section of a departmental expense allocation for Cozy Bookstore. It reports the total amounts of direct and indirect expenses allocated to its five (5) departments. Allocate the expenses of the two service departments (advertising and purchasing) to the three operating departments and provide the complete income statement.
Advertising and purchasing department expenses are allocated to operating departments on the basis of dollar sales and purchase orders, respectively. Information about the allocation bases for the three operating departments follows.
Phoenix Company’s 2019 master budget included the following fixed budget report. It is based on an expected production and sales volume of 15,000 units.
Classify all items listed in the fixed budget as variable or fixed.
Also determine their amounts per unit or their amounts for the year, as appropriate.
Identify the unit variable costs in the format of variable costing, according to your findings in part a
Organize a template for variable costing income statements in which the sales volume is a variable.
Test your template for 15,000 units sales volume to see if you get the same income as stated above
Find the breakeven point and provide the income statement at break even
Provide income statement at sales volume 12,000, 14,000, 16,000, and 18,000
——————
Do these in order:
Please Write a Comprehensive Learning Assessment (need 4 pages content, not included citations)
– In correct APA format.
– please submit the paper on time and make sure NO PLAGIARISM!!!
Please write the answers with an accurate explanation (in detail )and accurate description without copying and plagiarism, taking into account the number of words for each question and without copying, pay attention not to copying and plagiarism. each question includes a reference at the end of the assignment. I want to write the references in APA format. Please follow the instructions in the assignment file.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Management of Technology (MGT 325)
Due Date:14 Oct 2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Management of Technology
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT325
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Layla Nasser
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
➢ Recognize the dynamics and the importance of managing technological innovation
strategically. (LO 1)
Reference Source:
Textbook:Schilling M.A (2020),Strategic Management of Technology Innovation (6th Edition). McGraw Hill Education. Electronic Version: ISBN-13: 978-1260087956 ISBN-10:
1260087956, Printed Version: ISBN-13: 978-1260087956 ISBN-10: 1260087956
Weight: 10 Marks
Students are required to refer to chapter 1 ‘Introduction’ of their textbook.
Clear understanding of the chapter along with continuous critical analyzation of each
topic and subtopic is highly recommended.
Based on the knowledge and information gathered by referring to the textbook and the
students own thorough research write an essay on “The Significance of Technological
Innovation in Industries”
Introduction (1 Mark)
✓ Provide a brief overview of the importance of technological innovation in today’s
world.
Body (7 Marks)
1-Definition of Technological Innovation (1 Mark)
✓ Define what technological innovation is and why it matters to businesses and
industries.
2-Importance of Technological Innovation (2 Marks)
✓ Discuss why technological innovation is crucial for the growth and competitiveness of
industries.
✓ Explain how it can lead to increased productivity, cost reduction, and improved
quality of products or services.
3. Role of Technological Innovation in Different Industries (2 Marks)
✓ Choose two specific industries (e.g., healthcare, automotive, information technology)
and explain how technological innovation has impacted them.
✓ Provide real-world examples of innovative technologies that have transformed these
industries.
4. Benefits and Challenges of Innovation in Industries (2 Marks)
✓ Analyse the benefits that industries can reap from successful technological innovation.
✓ Discuss the challenges and risks that organizations may face when implementing new
technologies.
Conclusion (1 Mark)
✓ Summarize the key points made in the assignment.
✓ Reiterate the significance of technological innovation for industries.
References (1 Mark)
✓ Cite at least three reputable sources to support your arguments and claims.
✓ Use proper citation formatting.
Formatting and Presentation.
✓ Ensure proper formatting, grammar, and spelling.
✓ Use clear headings and subheadings to organize the content.
✓ Include cover page with your name, student ID and course title.
Directions:
✓ All students are encouraged to use their own words.
✓ The assignment should be approximately 800-1000 words in length.
✓ Use Saudi Electronic University academic writing standards and APA style
guidelines.
✓ Use proper referencing (APA style) to reference, other styles will not be accepted.
✓ Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles unless the
assignment calls for more.
✓ It is strongly encouraged that you submit all assignments into the safe assignment
Originality Check prior to submitting it to your instructor for grading and review the
grading rubric to understand how you will be graded for this assignment.
The assignment is served as two purposes: a) to assess students’ knowledge about contemporary issue of marketing and b) act as a diagnostic test of the students’ writing and referencing skills. This contributes to learning outcomes a, b ande.
Assessment topic:
“Some companies are accused of shortening the life cycle of their product and deliberately making their product obsolete to push consumers to buy or adopt their new product. This practice is known as planned obsolescence”. Discuss
Task Details:
The students are required to respond to the statement above and write the responses in
an essay format.
Marks out of 30 will be awarded based on how well the following criteria is addressed:
Criteria
Mark allocation Appropriate Respons 20
Organisation of the essay 20
Mechanical (spelling, grammar, punctuation) 20
Citation : the use of in-text citation in the body of the essay 20
References (minimum 8 references) 20
Total 100
Scale down to 30 marks
Submission Details:
o You need to state the word count of the assessment on the cover page.
o The response should be professionally presented in Arial 10pt or Times New Roman 12pt, single space. Harvard style referencing.
o Softcopy to be uploaded Turnitin via Moodle
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Level 10 & 11
233 Castlereagh Street
Sydney
NSW 2000
AUSTRALIA
ASSESSMENTS BRIEF MKT002
Assignment 1 – Forum Disucssion Portfolio
Due date:
Group/individual:
Word count / Time provided:
Weighting:
Subject Learning Outcomes:
Week 3, 5, 7 and 9
Individual
300 – 400 words/post
20% (5% each)
LO1, LO2, LO3 and LO4
Task Description
You task is to choose response to each task below and post the answer in the forum discussion of
the associated week.
Week 3 :
Describe how you go about putting together a new product development strategy for a luxury sports
car. Include all steps and provide supporting justification. Also, identify the target market for your
product. (300 – 400 words)
Week 5:
Describe your plan to do a concept testing research for a new robotic vacuum cleaner. Include all
steps and provide supporting justification. Also, identify who are the respondents for this concept
testing (300 – 400 words)
Week 7
Identify and recommend some possible new products Hershey Chocolate Company could offer to
make themselves more successful in the market. Justify your answer. Also, identify the target market
they will aim at (300 – 400 words).
Week 9:
Hungry Jack introduce new range of healthy burger and named them “A not so hungry Bare Jack” – this
is a burger without a bun targeted for those who are on a carb diet. Develop a launching strategy for this
new burger and Justify your answer (300 – 400 words)
The respond should be presented in forum discussion of associated week in 300 – 400 words
Page 1 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Assessment Criteria
Criteria
Mark allocation
40
40
20
100
5 marks.
Appropriate Response
Organisation of the report
Mechanical (spelling, grammar, punctuation)
Total
Scale down to
Rubric Assessment 1 – Forum Portfolio
Criteria
Fail
Pass
Credit
Distinction
Appropriate
Response (30
mark)
The
response to
the essay
topic and
the main
ideas are
not clear.
There is one
argument to
the topic,
however the
main ideas are
somewhat
unclear.
There is more
than one
argument to
the topic and
the main ideas
are
Organisation
of the report
(30 mark)
There is not
clear
introduction
to the topic,
discussion
or
conclusion
Mechanical :
spelling,
grammar &
punctuation
(20 marks)
The report
illegible due
to very poor
grammar,
spelling and
punctuation
errors
The
introduction
addresses the
topic of the
report, the
discussion and
the conclusion
are aligned
with topic but
very limited
detail is
provided.
Sentences are
reasonably
constructed.
However,
there are
significant
errors in
grammar,
mechanics
and/or spelling
that interfere
with
understanding
The
introduction
addresses the
topic of the
report, the
discussion
and the
conclusion
are aligned
with topic and
good
details are
Most
sentences are
well
constructed,
but they have
similar
structure.
There are
several errors
in grammar,
mechanics
and/or spelling
There are
more than one
clear wellcrafted
arguments but
are not well
supported by
detailed
information.
The
introduction
addresses the
topic of the
report, the
discussion and
the conclusion
are aligned
with topic and
comprehensiv
e details are
provided
Most
sentences are
well
constructed
and have
varied
structure and
length. There
are few errors
in grammar,
mechanics
and/or spelling
but they do not
interfere with
understanding
High
Distinction
There are
more than one
clear wellcrafted
arguments,
main ideas are
clear and are
well supported
by.
The
introduction is
inviting, the
main topic is
clearly state,
the discussion
and conclusion
are strong with
excellent
details
All sentences
are wellconstructed
and have
varied
structure and
length. The
author makes
no errors in
grammar,
mechanics
and/or spelling
Page 2 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Assignment 2 – Essay
Due date:
Group/individual:
Word count / Time provided:
Weighting:
Subject Learning Outcomes:
Week 6
Individual
2500 words
30%
LO1, LO2 , LO3 and LO4
Task Description
Purpose: The assignment is served as two purposes: a) to assess students’ knowledge about
contemporary issue of marketing and b) act as a diagnostic test of the students’ writing and
referencing skills. This contributes to learning outcomes a, b and e.
Assessment topic:
“Some companies are accused of shortening the life cycle of their product and deliberately making their
product obsolete to push consumers to buy or adopt their new product. This practice is known as
planned obsolescence”. Discuss
Task Details: The students are required to respond to the statement above and write the responses in
an essay format.
Marks out of 30 will be awarded based on how well the following criteria is addressed:
Criteria
Appropriate Response
Organisation of the essay
Mechanical (spelling, grammar, punctuation)
Citation : the use of in-text citation in the body of the essay
References (minimum 8 references)
Total
Scale down to
Mark allocation
20
20
20
20
20
100
30 marks.
Submission Details:
o You need to state the word count of the assessment on the cover page.
o The response should be professionally presented in Arial 10pt or Times New Roman 12pt,
single space. Harvard style referencing.
o Softcopy to be uploaded Turnitin via Moodle
Page 3 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Marking Rubric Assessment 2: Essay – 30%
Criteria
Appropriate
Response (20
marks
Organisation of the
essay (20 marks)
Mechanical:
Spelling, Grammar
& Punctuation
(20 marks)
Citation: the use of
in-text citation in the
body of assignment
(20 marks)
Trimester 3, 2023
Fail
(0 –
49%)
Pas
s (50
64%)
Credit (65
– 74%)
High
Distin
ction
(85 –
100%
)
The response There is one
There is more
There are
There are
to the essay
argument to
than one
more than
more than
topic and the the topic,
argument to the one clear
one clear
main ideas
however the
topic and the
well-crafted well-crafted
are not clear. main ideas are main ideas are arguments but arguments,
somewhat
clear.
are not well main ideas
unclear.
supported by are clear and
detailed
are
information. well
supported
by
detailed
informatio
n.
There is not
The
The introduction The
The
clear
introduction
addresses the introduction introduction
introduction
addresses the topic of the
addresses the is inviting,
to the topic,
topic of the
essay, the
topic of the
the main
discussion or essay, the
discussion and essay, the
topic is
conclusion
discussion and the conclusion discussion
clearly state,
the conclusion are aligned with and the
the
are aligned
topic and good conclusion are discussion
with topic but details are
aligned with and
very limited
provided.
topic and
conclusion
detail is
comprehensiv are strong
provided.
e details are with excellent
provided.
details
The essay
Sentences are Most sentences Most
All
illegible due to reasonably
are well
sentences are sentences
very poor
constructed.
constructed, but well
are wellgrammar,
However,
they have similar constructed, constructed
spelling and
there are
structure. There and have
and have
punctuation
significant
are several
varied
varied
errors
errors in
errors in
structure and structure
grammar,
grammar,
length. There and length.
mechanics
mechanics
are few errors The author
and/or spelling and/or spelling in grammar, makes no
that interfere that interfere
mechanics
errors in
with
with
and/or spelling grammar,
understanding understanding but they do
mechanics
not interfere and/or
with
spelling
understanding
The essay has The essay
The essay has a The essay
The essay
no in- text has fewer
least eight in-text has at least has at least
citations
than eight in- citation with
eight in-text eight in-text
(please note, text citation
significant
citation with citation
this results in a
formatting errors minor
formatted
Page
4 of 7
fail
of
formatting
correctly
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Distin
ction
(75 –
84%)
assessment)
errors.
References:
The essay has The essay has The essay has at The essay has The essay
submission of at least less than eight at least eight least eight
at least eight has at least 8
8 references
references
references with references with references
references
major
few formatting with minor
formatted
formatting
errors
formatting
correctly
(20 marks)
errors.
errors
Total marks out of 100
Page 5 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Assignment 3 – New Product Marketing Plan
Due date:
Group/individual:
Word count / Time provided:
Weighting:
Unit Learning Outcomes:
Week 10
Group (3 to 4 students)
3500 words
30%
LO1, LO2, LO3, LO4
Task Description
The groups are expected to act as team from marketing agency located in Sydney and they have been
asked by the client to help them with a new product idea for their company. The group don’t need to
build or make the product, but rather come up with an idea which suits your target market and describe
it. The group must use the 7 Steps for A New Product Development Process. The group should also
explain how the group went through the steps, and what was considered and decided in each step.
The group should also present their idea in a 10 minutes presentation. Prepare a PPT slides
with voice over and submit the file along with the report.
The client list is as follow (choose one client ONLY and the students need to consult with their tutors
before finalizing their choice).
1. Frank Green : https://www.frankgreen.com.au
2. TDE daily edited : https://www.thedailyedited.com/
3. Luna Park : https://www.lunapark.com.au/
The students are required to include the following information in the proposal.
Executive Summary
Table of Content
1. A brief business background: including the location, the industry, and the market it operates and
the brief description of current products.
2. Situational Analysis: analysis of macro and microenvironments of the client and generate
SWOT Analysis
3. Proposed New Product – explain how the process of this proposed product development is
3.1 Name of the new product
3.2 Product development process
3.2.1 Idea generation
3.2.2 Idea screening
3.2.3 Concept Development
3.2.4 Business Analysis
3.2.5 Product Development (Prototype)
3.2.6 Market Testing
3.2.7 Commercialisation
4. Target Market for this new proposed product: develop customer profile based on four
segmentation basis (demographics, geographics, psychographics and behaviour)
Page 6 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
References
Include at least 8 academic references with corresponding full references in your List of References.
For the presentation, the students should prepare power point presentation for 10 minutes duration
consist :
1. SWOT Analysis
2. Proposed New Product
3. Process of new product development
4. Target market for this new proposed product
Assessment Criteria
Criteria
Situational Analusis – SWOT Analysis
Proposed new product and the process of new product development
process
Target Marketing
Written communication including references
Total
Scale down to
Mark allocation
30
40
20
10
100
30 marks.
Rubric A3 – New Product Marketing Plan
Criteria
Situational
environment
analysis
(30 marks)
Proposed
new
product
and the
process
of new
product
developm
ent
(40
marks)
Fail
(0 –
49%)
High
Distinctio
n (85 –
100%)
Demonstrated
Demonstrated
Demonstrated Demonstrated Demonstrated
limited coverage average
above average good coverage excellent
of marketing
coverage of
coverage of
of marketing
coverage of
environmental
marketing
marketing
environmental marketing
analysis
environmental
environmental analysis with
environmental
analysis with
analysis with most aspects
analysis with all
only few aspects some aspects are analysed
aspects are
are analysed
are analysed
analysed
Poor attempt at
Just adequate
Good attempt Convincing
Superior
describing the new attempt at
at describing attempt at
attempt at
product and no
describing the
the new
describing the describing the
discussion on the new product and product and
new product
new product
7 steps of product limited
good
and convincing and existing
development
discussion on the discussion on discussion on discussion on
7 steps of
the 7 steps of the 7 steps of the 7 steps of
product
product
product
product
development
development development
development
Pass (50 –
64%)
Credit
(65 –
74%)
Distinct
ion (75
– 84%)
Page 7 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Target
Market
(20
marks)
Limited description Sufficient
Adequate
Good
Excellent
on recommended description on
description on description on description on
target market by recommended recommended recommended recommended
using segmenting target market by target market target market by target market by
variables and do using
by using
using
using
not specify any
segmenting
segmenting
segmenting
segmenting
recommended
variables and do variables and variables and do variables and do
target market.
not specify any do not specify not specify any not specify any
recommended any
recommended recommended
target market.
recommended target market. target market.
target market.
Written
Poorly organised, Basic structure Basic
Very good,
Superior
communication lacks cohesion,
followed,
structure
coherent
report
: Quality of
hard to navigate cohesion &
elaborated
report – wellstructure &
Executive
and understand, navigability just upon, mostly structured,
visual
Summary;
frequent spelling adequate, clarity coherent,
navigable,
presentation,
Organization
and grammatical is developing,
writing
is clear and
seam- less,
(structure, use errors, absence of adequate
mostly
relevant, easy always clear
of links, ease pertinent visuals spelling &
relevant
& to read, very
& accurate,
of navigation,
grammar with
clear,
good spelling
highly
coherence),
occasional
satisfactory
and grammar, articulate,
writing style
errors, some
spel-ling
& pertinent
impeccable
(clarity,
pertinent visuals grammar,
visuals well
spelling
&
readability,
pertinent
explained
gram- mar, a
consistent),
visuals
pleasure to
spelling and
referred to
read/review
grammar,
visuals (10
marks)
Total Mark out
of 100
Page 8 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Assignment 4 – Pitch Presentation
Due date:
Group/individual:
Word count / Time provided:
Weighting:
Unit Learning Outcomes:
Week 12
Group – the same group as in A3
15 minutes
20%
LO3
Task Description
The students are expected to present their new product marketing plan as pitch
presentation.
Assessment Criteria
Criteria
Mark allocation
20
30
20
20
10
100
20 marks.
Presentation Structure
Accuracy of information
Communication and presentation skills
Visual aids and presentation slides format
Presentation duration
Total
Scale down to
A4 – Presentation Pitch
Crit
eria
Presentation
structure
(20 marks)
Accuracy of
the
information
presented
(30 marks)
High
Distinctio
n (85 –
100%)
Not all the
All required
All required
All required
All required
required
elements are
elements are elements are
elements are
elements are
presented,
presented.
presented. The presented. The
presented. The however, the
The sequence sequence of the sequence of the
structure and
sequence of the of the
information is
information is
sequence of
information is
information is easy to follow,
easy to follow,
information is
hard to follow
easy to follow, good details are excellent details
hard to follow
however,
provided.
are provided.
limited details
are
provided.
The information The information The
The information The information
provided in each provided in each information
provided in each provided in each
required element required element provided in
required element required element
are inaccurate
are accurate,
each required are accurate and are accurate and
and do not align however, it does element are
it is aligned with it is aligned with
with the
not align with the accurate and it the proposal, and the proposal, and
proposal.
proposal.
is aligned with good details are excellent details
the proposal, provided
are provided
however,
limited details
are provided
Page 9 of 7
Trimester 3, 2023
Fail
(0 – 49%)
Pass
(50 –
64%)
Credit
(65 –
74%)
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Distinct
ion (75
– 84%)
Communica
tion and
Presentatio
n skills
(20 marks)
Visual aids
and
presentation
slides format
(20 marks)
Presentation
duration
(10 marks)
Inaudible and
Mostly audible
spoken too
and reasonably
quickly or too
well-paced
slowly and many speech, some
unnecessary
unnecessary
pauses.
pausing
Consistently
audible an
clear voice,
well- paced
speech and
some good
use of pausing
No or lack of
visual aids,
presentation
slides are poorly
formatted.
Basic use of
Mostly good
visual aids,
use of visual
presentation
aids,
slides are
presentation
readable but
slides are
need
appropriately
improvement.
formatted.
Presentation is Presentation is
Presentation
longer than 15
longer than 15
is on time (5
minutes and only minutes and only minutes) and
able to present 2 able to present 3 all the
out of 4 required out of the 4
required
information.
required
information
information.
are presented
with limited
details.
Interesting and An excellent
effective delivery, delivery, wellwell-paced and paced and
good use of
effective. Speaker
voice (tone and is entertaining
diction) and
and stimulating,
pausing
confident and in
throughout
control.
Very good use of Outstanding use
visual aids,
of visual aids,
presentation
presentation
slides are
slides are
effectively
professionally
formatted.
formatted.
Presentation is
on time (15
minutes) and all
the required
information are
presented with
reasonable
details.
Presentation is on
time (15 minutes)
and all the
required
information are
presented with
excellent details.
Total marks
out of 100
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Page 10 of
7
Trimester 3, 2023
MKT002 Marketing New Products
Page 11 of
7
1
DEFINING MARKETING FOR THE NEW REALITIES
THE VALUE OF MARKETING
• Financial success often depends on marketing ability.
• Successful marketing builds demand for products and services, which, in turn, creates jobs.
• Marketing builds strong brands and a loyal customer base, intangible assets that contribute heavily to the value of a firm.
• In an Internet-fueled environment where consumers, competition, technology, and economic forces change rapidly and consequences
quickly multiply, marketers must choose features, prices, and markets and decide how much to spend on advertising, sales, and online and
mobile marketing.
Meanwhile, the economic downturn that began globally in 2008 and the slow recovery since, have brought budget cuts and intense
pressure to make every marketing dollar count.
• There is little margin for error in marketing.
THE SCOPE OF MARKETING
WHAT IS MARKETING?
• Marketing is about identifying and meeting human and social needs.
One of the shortest good definitions of marketing is “meeting needs profitably.”
American Marketing Association (AMA) formal definition:
Marketing is the activity, set of institutions, and processes for creating, communicating, delivering, and exchanging offerings
that have value for customers, clients, partners, and society at large.
• Marketing management is the art and science of choosing target markets and getting, keeping, and growing customers
through creating, delivering, and communicating superior customer value.
WHAT IS MARKETED?
Marketers market 10 main types of entities:
1. Goods
Physical goods constitute the bulk of most countries’ production and marketing efforts.
2. Services
As economies advance, a growing proportion of their activities focuses on the production of services.
Services include the work of airlines, hotels, car rental firms, and accountants, bankers, lawyers, engineers, doctors, software programmers, and
management consultants. Many market offerings mix goods and services, such as a fast-food meal.
3. Events
Marketers promote time-based events, such as major trade shows, artistic performances, and company anniversaries.
4. Experiences
By orchestrating several services and goods, a firm can create, stage, and market experiences.
5. Persons
Artists, musicians, CEOs, physicians, high-profile lawyers and financiers, and other professionals often get help from marketers.
6. Places
Cities, states, regions, and whole nations compete to attract tourists, residents, factories, and company headquarters.
Place marketers include economic development specialists, real estate agents, commercial banks, local business associations, and advertising
and public relations agencies.
7. Properties
Properties are intangible rights of ownership to either real property (real estate) or financial property (stocks and bonds). They are bought and
sold, and these exchanges require marketing..
8. Organizations
Museums, performing arts organizations, corporations, and nonprofits all use marketing to boost their public images and compete for audiences
and funds.
Some universities have created chief marketing officer (CMO) positions to better manage their school identity and image.
9. Information
Information is essentially what books, schools, and universities produce, market, and distribute at a price to parents, students, and communities.
10. Ideas
Every market offering includes a basic idea.
WHO MARKETS?
A marketer is someone who seeks a response (attention, a purchase, a vote, a donation) from another party, called the prospect.
If two parties are seeking to sell something to each other, we call them both marketers.
Marketers are skilled at stimulating demand for their products, but that’s a limited view of what they do.
They also seek to influence the level, timing, and composition of demand to meet the organization’s objectives.
Eight demand states are possible:
1. Negative demand
Consumers dislike the product and may even pay to avoid it.
2. Nonexistent demand
Consumers may be unaware of or uninterested in the product.
3. Latent demand
Consumers may share a strong need that cannot be satisfied by an existing product.
4. Declining demand
Consumers begin to buy the product less frequently or not at all.
5. Irregular demand
Consumer purchases vary on a seasonal, monthly, weekly, daily, or even hourly basis.
6. Full demand
Consumers are adequately buying all products put into the marketplace.
7. Overfull demand
More consumers would like to buy the product than can be satisfied.
8. Unwholesome demand
Consumers may be attracted to products that have undesirable social consequences.
In each case, marketers must identify the essential cause(s) of the demand state and decide a plan of action to shift demand to a more
desired state.
Markets
Market → a collection of buyers and sellers who transact over a particular product or product class.
Five basic markets and their connecting flows are shown in Figure 1.1.
–
Manufacturers go to resource markets (raw material markets, labor markets, money markets), buy resources and turn them into
goods and services, and sell finished products to intermediaries, who sell them to consumers.
Consumers sell their labor and receive money with which they pay for goods and services.
The government collects tax revenues to buy goods from resource, manufacturer, and intermediary markets and uses
these goods and services to provide public services.
Each nation’s economy, and the global economy, consists of interacting sets of markets linked through exchange processes.
Marketers view sellers as the industry and use the term market to describe customer groups.
They talk about need markets (the diet-seeking market), product markets (the shoe market), demographic markets (the “millennium”
youth market), geographic markets (the Chinese market), or voter markets, labor markets, and donor markets.
Figure 1.2 shows how sellers and buyers are connected by four flows.
–
Sellers send goods and services and communications such as ads and direct mail to the market;
in return they receive money and information such as customer attitudes and sales data.
–
The inner loop shows an exchange of money for goods and services;
the outer loop shows an exchange of information.
Key customer markets
Consider the following key customer markets:
Consumer Markets
Companies selling mass consumer goods and services, establish a strong brand image by developing a superior product or service,
ensuring its availability, and backing it with engaging communications and reliable performance.
Business Markets
Companies selling business goods and services often face well-informed professional buyers skilled at evaluating competitive
offerings.
Global Markets
Companies in the global marketplace navigate cultural, language, legal, and political differences while deciding which countries to
enter, how to enter each, how to adapt product and service features to each country, how to set prices, and how to communicate
in different cultures.
Nonprofit and Governmental Markets
Companies selling to non-profit organizations with limited purchasing power such as churches, universities, charitable organizations,
and government agencies need to price carefully.
Much government purchasing requires bids; buyers often focus on practical solutions and favor the lowest bid, other things equal.
CORE MARKETING CONCEPTS
NEEDS, WANTS, AND DEMANDS
Needs: the basic human requirements such as for air, food, water, clothing, and shelter.
Wants: specific objects that might satisfy the need.
Demands: wants for specific products backed by an ability to pay.
Companies must measure not only how many people want their product, but also how many are willing and able to buy it.
Marketers do not create needs: needs pre-exist marketers.
Some customers have needs of which they are not fully conscious or cannot articulate. We can distinguish 5 types of needs:
1. Stated needs
(The customer wants an inexpensive car.)
2. Real needs
(The customer wants a car whose operating cost, not initial price, is low.)
3. Unstated needs
(The customer expects good service from the dealer.)
4. Delight needs
(The customer would like the dealer to include an onboard GPS system.)
5. Secret needs
(The customer wants friends to see him or her as a savvy consumer.)
To gain an edge, companies must help customers learn what they want.
TARGET MARKETS, POSITIONING, AND SEGMENTATION
Marketers identify distinct segments of buyers by identifying demographic, psychographic, and behavioral differences between them.
They then decide which segment(s) present the greatest opportunities.
For each of these target markets, the firm develops a market offering that it positions in target buyers’ minds as delivering
some key benefit(s).
OFFERINGS AND BRANDS
Companies address customer needs by putting forth a value proposition, → a set of benefits that satisfy those needs.
The intangible value proposition is made physical by an offering, which can be a combination of products, services,
information, and experiences.
A brand is an offering from a known source.
MARKETING CHANNELS → To reach a target market, the marketer uses 3 kinds of marketing channels:
Communication channels deliver and receive messages from target buyers and include newspapers, magazines, radio, television, mail,
telephone, smart phone, billboards, posters, fliers, CDs, audiotapes, and the Internet.
Distribution channels help display, sell, or deliver the physical product or service(s) to the buyer or user.
These channels may be direct via the Internet, mail, or mobile phone or telephone or indirect with distributors, wholesalers, retailers, and agents as
intermediaries.
To carry out transactions with potential buyers, the marketer also uses service channels that include warehouses, transportation
companies, banks, and insurance companies.
Marketers clearly face a design challenge in choosing the best mix of communication, distribution, and service channels for
their offerings.
PAID, OWNED, AND EARNED MEDIA
The rise of digital media gives marketers a host of new ways to interact with consumers and customers.
– Paid media allow marketers to show their ad or brand for a fee, include TV, magazine and display ads, paid search, and
sponsorships.
–
Owned media are communication channels marketers actually own, like a company or brand brochure, Web site, blog,
Facebook page, or Twitter account.
–
Earned media are streams in which consumers, the press, or other outsiders voluntarily communicate something about
the brand via word of mouth, buzz, or viral marketing methods.
The emergence of earned media has allowed some companies to reduce paid media expenditures.
IMPRESSIONS AND ENGAGEMENT
Marketers now think of three “screens” or means to reach consumers: TV, Internet, and mobile.
Surprisingly, the rise of digital options did not reduce the amount of TV viewing, in part because 3 of 5 consumers use two screens at once.
Impressions, which occur when consumers view a communication, are a useful metric for tracking the scope or breadth of a
communication’s reach that can also be compared across all communication types.
The downside is that impressions don’t provide any insight into the results of viewing the communication.
Engagement is the extent of a customer’s attention and active involvement with a communication.
It reflects a much more active response than a mere impression and is more likely to create value for the firm.
VALUE AND SATISFACTION
The buyer chooses the offerings he/she perceives to deliver the most value, the sum of the tangible and intangible benefits and costs.
Value is primarily a combination of quality, service, and price (qsp), called the customer value triad.
Value perceptions increase with quality and service but decrease with price.
We can think of marketing as the identification, creation, communication, delivery, and monitoring of customer value.
Satisfaction reflects a person’s judgment of a product’s perceived performance in relationship to expectations.
If performance falls short of expectations, → the customer is disappointed.
If it matches expectations, → the customer is satisfied. If it exceeds them, → the customer is delighted.
SUPPLY CHAIN
The supply chain is a channel stretching from raw materials to components to finished products carried to final buyers.
Each company in the chain captures only a certain percentage of the total value generated by the supply chain’s value delivery system.
When a company acquires competitors or expands upstream or downstream, its aim is to capture a higher percentage of
supply chain value. Problems with a supply chain can be damaging or even fatal for a business.
COMPETITION
Competition includes all the actual and potential rival offerings and substitutes a buyer might consider.
MARKETING ENVIRONMENT
The marketing environment consists of the task environment and the broad environment.
– The task environment includes the actors engaged in producing, distributing, and promoting the offering.
These are the company, suppliers, distributors, dealers, and target customers.
In the supplier group are material suppliers and service suppliers, such as marketing research agencies, advertising agencies, banking and
insurance companies, transportation companies, and telecommunications companies. Distributors and dealers include agents, brokers,
manufacturer representatives, and others who facilitate finding and selling to customers.
–
The broad environment consists of six components: demographic environment, economic environment, social-cultural
environment, natural environment, technological environment, and political-legal environment.
Marketers must pay close attention to the trends and developments in these and modify their marketing strategies as needed.
New opportunities are continuously emerging that await the right marketing knowledge and creativity.
THE NEW MARKETING REALITIES
The marketplace is dramatically different from even 10 years ago, with new marketing behaviors, opportunities, and challenges emerging.
1. TECHNOLOGY
With the rapid rise of e-commerce, the mobile Internet, and Web penetration in emerging markets, the Boston Consulting
Group believes brand marketers must enhance their “digital balance sheets.”
Massive amounts of information and data about almost everything are now available to consumers and marketers.
Even traditional marketing activities are profoundly affected by technology.
2. GLOBALIZATION
The world has become a smaller place. New transportation, shipping, and communication technologies have made it easier for
us to know the rest of the world, to travel, to buy and sell anywhere.
By 2025, annual consumption in emerging markets will total $30 trillion and contribute more than 70 percent of global GDP growth.
A staggering 56 percent of global financial services consumption is forecast to come from emerging markets by 2050, up from 18 percent in 2010.
Demographic trends favor developing markets such as India, Pakistan, and Egypt, with populations whose median age is below 25.
In terms of growth of the middle c
I need these questions from the attachment answered The last questions on the buttom that highlight with (YELLOW) which are ;COMPARED TO AMAZON, HOW IS THEIR OVERALL ‘START TO FINISH’ PROCESS? HASSAN 5. LIVABILITY: HASSAN DO THEY PROMOTE RECYCLING? SUSTAINABIITY?ENDORSING/PARTNERSHIPS WITH CHARITIES, NON-PROFIT ORGANIZATIONS?
my company: Finish Line. the competitors: dick’s sporting goods and Foot locker
. Analyze the Digital Advertising 1 of your company and its two competitors. Include the following:
• A summary of the key points from your analysis.
• Insights into ad the ad placement strategy for your company and its competitors from the
“Advertiser Profile” section of Adbeat.com (i.e.: number of ads, size, type, etc.).
• Examples of advertisements from your company and its competitors from the “Advertiser Ads”
section of AdBeat.com. Are there common themes/messages? What is the level of creativity in
the ads?
• Insights into the impact of digital ads on site traffic for your company and its competitors from
SimilarWeb.com. Identify and compare traffic sources – what % comes from Display?
• Specific strengths and weaknesses (S/W) of your company’s digital advertising. Note: the tools
above provide additional analytics that you should consider.
• Recommendation(s) for what your company should do to improve its digital advertising. Provide
rationale for why they are important to the success of your company’s Digital Marketing efforts.
A manager wants to know how many units of each product to produce on a daily basis in order to
achieve the highest contribution to profit. Production resource and material requirements for the
products are shown in the following table.
Product
A
B
C
Material 1
(pounds)
Material 2
(pounds)
Labor
(hours)
Equipment
(hours)
2.5
3
4
3
5
0
2.5
1.4
1.75
2
1.6
1.5
Material 1 costs $8.50 a pound, material 2 costs $6.25 a pound, and labor costs $12 an hour.
Management considers equipment hours as overhead and chooses to not include it in product costing
(the wisdom of that decision is up for debate). Product A sells for $90 a unit, product B sells for $100 a
unit, and product C sells for $78 a unit. Available resources each day are 1200 pounds of material 1,
1,400 pounds of material 2, 1,000 hours of labor and 700 hours equipment time.
The manager must satisfy certain output requirements:
The output of product A should be at least ¼ of the total number of units produced
There is a standing order for 50 units of product B each day.
We can sell no more than 75 units of product C each day.
a. Formulate an LP model for this problem (i.e. the standard table format from PowerPoint and in
class.) Define your decision variables, create the objective function formula in terms of your
decision variables, and create and label your constraints. Just type this into Sheet 1 of your Excel
file in a text box or use Equation Editor. (3 points)
e.g. something like:
Decision Variables:
• x1 = the number of product X to make
• x2 = the number of product Y to make
• and so on . . . .
Constraints:
•
max 2 x1 + 3 x2 + x3 + 4×4
• subject to:
•
x1 + 3 x2 + 5 x3 + x4
Purchase answer to see full
attachment
New simulation, not sure how to work it…. my team is unresponsive and I need help
The 1st assignment (Market Attractiveness Analysis) is teamwork and should be completed within the simulation platform (not Folio). Just one copy needs to be turned in and anyone on the team can submit the finished work by midnight 10/22.
Reilly Fain, welcome to
CountryManager!
MKTG 4136 – International Marketing
CountryManager teaches you the fundamentals of business within your MKTG 4136 – International Marketing course at Georgia Southern University in Fall 2023.
GETTING STARTED
01
Login to CountryManager
01
Click on the Login button below & enter your login information
Login
 
02
Register CountryManager account
02
Login to your account. Click on Register and Order Selected Items.
Credit/Debit Card
Select the Debit/Credit card button or Alternate Payment Processor button.
PayPal
Select the PayPal button (PayPal account not always required).
Access Code
Enter the 11-character code purchased from bookstore (#####-XXXXX)
*Violating our Terms of Use may result in restricted/removed access
03
Review Getting Started Materials
03
The key to your success in CountryManager is using all of the tools available to you.
Start with your Getting Started Materials. The Quick Start Guide is found within Resources in your account.
Need Technical Support? Reply to this email or email support@interpretive.com.
CountryManager, an International Marketing Simulation.
please follow the instruction in the attached doucmment and complete the project.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Excel 1 Tutorial Assignment – ISM3011
Ask before/after/during class or come into office/online hours if you have questions on any of this. Refer to the syllabus on
Academic Dishonesty and group/individual work and allowable help for all projects – also remember it’s your responsibility to protect
your work.
Before you start — read this whole assignment and use an optional text and/or review the tutorials as necessary. A project overview
is also available.
Part 1 – Create / Download
• Open a blank workbook (this must be started with a BLANK, NEW workbook). Name it using your Last name followed by your
initials and _ 1EX (underscore then 1EX). For Example: WarnerBL_1EX .xlsx or xls. Either extension is fine
• Copy/paste the data from Excel 1- Music Data.docx , into the 2nd worksheet in your workbook. Name the tab MUSIC.
• Adjust the YTD Units Sold (this represents current sales) and Prior Year Units Sold columns so that their titles are wrapped onto
2 or 3 lines within one cell. Adjust the Title column so that titles can be wrapped on 2 or more lines within one cell as needed
(so titles are not cut-off). See the sorted example below.
• Sort the data (do not sort or remove the title/heading rows) by Code. Check the sort to be sure all is correct.
• Add conditional
formatting to this
Music worksheet
that highlights any
selling prices of $9
or more with a
green background.
If the selling prices
is lowered below
$9, the formatting
should change
automatically.
• Using the named
range feature of
Excel, name all the
cells in this
worksheet,
MusicData.
• No additional data/formulas should be added to the worksheet.
➔ Part 1 Video: https://youtu.be/HwbXhRIeHOI
Part 2 – Set up your 1st
worksheet
•
Name the tab for the
first worksheet,
LookUp. To the right is
a sample of how I set
up my worksheet. Use
your own color scheme
for your project – but
include borders and
backgrounds and
include all of the steps,
as shown below.
Step #1 – Title
o Include a title with your name and any other information you think is appropriate. Merge and center it across all
columns with data.
o Below the title add the current date formula. Be sure you use the appropriate formula so that whenever your
worksheet is opened, the current date is displayed (will change as the date changes). Again use the merge and center
feature.
o Add a colored border to the title and date rows (not black/ blue) & be sure the border is visible on all 4 sides (put a
blank row above the title and a blank column to the left of the title so the whole border can be seen). Include a
background color and font color (besides black/ blue).
o Add a comment or note (using the comment or note feature) to your title and add your name and your email address.
Step #2 – Input Area
o Add an area to enter a music code. Try to make it obvious to the user that this is the data entry area. Use placement,
borders, and/or background colors to distinguish it from the rest of the worksheet.
o Include an arrow in this section; make it a color other than black. Use the SHAPE feature in Excel to create the arrow.
➔ Part 2, Steps 1-2 Video: https://youtu.be/2L0fLYcTzLY
Step #3 – Music Lookup Information
o Use the VLOOKUP function/formula and search the Music worksheet for the code that the user entered in Step 2.
o Display the information for the Code selected – use the same layout as in the example above.
o Note that in the video link below, cell C12 is displayed as currency, it should not be currency.
o Correctly use your named range (MusicData) and absolute cell referencing in your VLOOKUP formulas
Step #4 – Calculations
o Calculate and display the following in the LookUp worksheet (cell references match my example). Don’t add any new
formulas to the Music worksheet.
o C16: ‘Gross Margin (Markup $)’ – profit per unit
o C17: ‘Markup %’ – profit per unit compared to the cost, displayed as a % with one decimal place
o C20: ‘% Increase for this year’: enter 15% into this cell
o C21: ‘This Year’s Goal in Units’ – displays a 15% increase (use C20 in your formula) from the ‘Prior Year Units
Sold’ (C19) . NOTE: You can’t sell partial units, so don’t display decimal places – use the INT function to round
down to the nearest integer. You can use Excel help or Google to see how the INT function works.
o C22: ‘Units Needed to Meet Goal’ . How many units need to be sold to meet this year’s goal? Look at this year’s
goal (C21) and the YTD Units Sold (C18) . Use an IF function/formula so that no negative numbers are displayed if
the goal has been met or exceeded.
o B23:C23, merged: Using another IF statement to display a message if the sales goal has been met. Use a bright
colored font for this message. If the sales goal has not been met, do not display anything.
o Display the lookup information & calculations in the same order as the example above.
➔ Part 2, Steps 3-4 Video: https://youtu.be/O_KuPhXGPG4
Step #5 – Graph/Chart
o Create the column chart displayed from the video and to the
right:
▪ Select only the data needed for the chart (don’t select all
data & delete items from the chart). Do not display any
additional fields.
▪ Display the data values for each column
▪ The title should include the music title and should change
each time new information is displayed. It should also be
a larger font (greater than 12) and be a color other than
blue or black.
▪ Place the chart on your LookUp worksheet.
▪ Format your chart & include:
▪ a 2-color gradient to format the columns
▪ a colored background on the chart
▪ colored fonts
▪
Do not use dark blue/black for these colors.
➔ Part 2, Step 5 Video: https://youtu.be/ZsX116SlauI
Part 3 – Pivot worksheets
• Using the data in the Music worksheet, create 2 pivot worksheets
o The first should be a pivot table showing each Event Name and the average Selling Price. Format the table so that your
numbers have a dollar sign, two decimal places. Add a title and format it so it looks nice. Name the tab Pivot 1.
o The second should be a pivot table and chart showing each grade level code and the units sold for both years. The numbers
should have commas and no decimal places and include data labels. Add a title and format it so it looks nice. Name this tab
Pivot 2.
o Add one more Pivot worksheet that shows some interesting analytics. Add a textbox to the worksheet to explain what you
are showing. Include a title and nice formatting. Name this tab Pivot 3.
➔ Part 3 Video: https://youtu.be/4308_XVOCYU
Part 4 – Filtering
• Create 3 worksheets and name their tabs Filter1, Filter2 and Filter 3.
• Copy the Music worksheet data into each one of the filter worksheets.
• Filter 1 – display all publishers with the letter K in their code and any events with the word ‘Brass’ in the event name.
• Filter 2 – display Tuba music for grades of 3 or higher.
• Filter 3 – show some interesting analytics. Add a textbox to the worksheet to explain what you are showing.
➔ Part 4 Video: https://youtu.be/OrK2FGK0ubE
Part 5 – Finishing Up
• **Use the IFERROR function and if a user enters a MUSIC Code that doesn’t exist, display ‘Code Not Found’ for the title and
blanks for the rest of the cells below. You can let the 15% display, if you’d like (cell C20 in my example).
•
•
•
•
**Protect the LookUp worksheet so that the only change a user can make is to enter a different MUSIC Code. They shouldn’t be
able to change any other cells in the worksheet. Don’t use a password, just leave that blank. Don’t guess how to do this, if you
don’t know – watch the Tips on it. Test it when you’re done to be sure we can open the worksheet and enter a new MUSIC
Code and be sure we can’t change any other cells in the worksheet.
Your worksheets should be in the following order: LookUp, Music, your 3 pivots and then your 3 filter worksheets.
Once a user enters a new MUSIC Code in the LookUp worksheet, all of the data and chart should automatically change.
Check your worksheet and be sure there are no errors or error symbols in your finished worksheet. If you don’t have this
feature, come into the lab to do this step.
•
•
Check your formatting – currency should have a $ and 2 decimal places, percentages should be formatted with a % sign and 1
decimal place.
Check your formulas, be sure they are correct and make sense. For example, if you are subtracting 2 numbers don’t use the
SUM formulas (sum is for adding). Excel may figure out what you mean, but we want the formulas to be used correctly (show
that you understand how to use them).
➔ Part 5 Video: https://youtu.be/QMrjPD4hPHA
Project Submission Instructions / Notes:
• Office/online hours get busy as deadlines approach. If you procrastinate and wait until the last days to work on your project,
you may not be able to get all the help you want.
•
The only way we can fairly grade the projects is if we check for each requirement. Please go through the instructions before you
submit & be sure you have done each one correctly so you don’t miss out on points. Compare your solution to the project
overview.
•
Submitting:
•
o
Remember to leave all of the internal file properties intact for your project, if they are modified or deleted, you project
won’t be accepted (see syllabus for more on this).
o
Read and follow the instructions in the Assignments section of Canvas on uploading and checking your upload. If you
follow these instructions, you can ensure that your project is uploaded correctly (and is the correct project). Be sure
that Access / Excel are closed before you try to upload your project files.
o
If your project doesn’t upload correctly before the due date, it will be considered late and be assessed the late penalty
– even it was finished on time. This is the only way we can ensure that students check their Canvas submissions.
Technology problems relating to your home computer (Windows based or Mac), internet connection or slow Canvas access are
not valid excuses for late/missing work, unless Canvas is down for 6+ hours on the due date. Computers at USF computer labs
and the library are available; leave enough time to access them as needed. Also give yourself enough time that if a TA can’t
answer a question, you’ll have time to contact me during office hours or online hours & I can either help you or make an
allowance in your grade. If you wait until the last weekend, I may not be able to do either.
I need help with my dissertation, what I need now is my chapter 1 – 3 comprising of 4500 word.
I have a review with by supervisor, so I need someone that can get it to me within 2 days. I will invite the same tutor starting this work for other chapters and work regarding the dissertation until it’s completion.
The details of the Dissertation has been attached below.
The referencing style is Havard and should be no less than 45 references.
Please go through the corrections of the proposal before you begin and apply them to the work.
I’ll also need to know the specific topic chosen via the suggested corrections. I want an excellent work.
And also correction to the proposal and details for my ethical clearance.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
UNIVERSITY OF SUNDERLAND
PGBM161
Project Proposal
The Role of Business Analytics in Enhancing Financial DecisionMaking in Retail Industry
Introduction
This project proposal’s introduction explores business analytics’s crucial role in improving
financial decision-making procedures. Businesses looking to maximize their financial plans must
now use business analytics in today’s dynamic and data-driven corporate environment. The
capacity to draw meaningful conclusions from massive datasets has emerged as a critical success
factor as the global business environment becomes more complicated and competitive. To
increase profitability, risk management, and strategic planning, this proposal intends to highlight
the enormous impact of skilled business analytics on financial decision-making.
In light of these factors, our proposal points out a significant research gap: the requirement for a
thorough investigation of how business analytics might be used to enable more informed and
efficient financial decisions. This proposal aims to fill this research gap by outlining the
conceptual framework, techniques, and potential conclusions of such an examination.
Additionally, it describes the project’s aim to offer a nuanced comprehension of the complex
connection between corporate analytics and financial decision-making. The objectives,
methodology, and anticipated contributions of this research will be covered in detail in the
following sections, giving a thorough overview of the proposed study’s breadth and structure.
Background/brief literature review
The retail sector is at the cutting edge of a corporate environment that is continually changing
due to technological breakthroughs and shifting consumer habits. The profitability and longevity
of a retail business depend critically on its capacity to make knowledgeable and wise financial
decisions in this dynamic environment (Wang et al., 2020, p.387). Business analytics, which uses
predictive modelling, data visualization, and data-driven insights, has become essential for
improving financial decision-making in the retail industry.
Across industries, there has been a discernible transition over the past ten years from
conventional intuition-based decision-making to a more data-centric approach. This change has
particularly affected the retail industry because there are now unheard-of opportunities to gain a
deeper understanding of customer preferences, supply chain dynamics, inventory management,
pricing strategies, and overall performance metrics (Niu et al., 2021, p. 26). Due to this change,
business analytics are now critical in driving financial decision-making.
The growth of e-commerce and the digitization of consumer interactions have been critical
factors in the retail industry’s transition. Vast volumes of data are produced as customers interact
with shops more frequently through online and mobile platforms, capturing helpful information
about browsing preferences, past purchases, and even sentiment analysis through social media.
Traditional brick-and-mortar stores have also embraced technology, using tools like customer
loyalty programs and point-of-sale systems that provide a lot of data. As a result, merchants must
now overcome the difficulty of deriving actionable insights from multiple data sources, making
business analytics essential.
Business analytics are used in many different areas of the retail industry. Understanding and
segmenting consumer demographics, behaviours, and preferences requires customer analytics.
With this data, retailers can customize their marketing plans, enhance their product lines, and
enhance the shopping experience, all of which impact their bottom lines. Supply chain analytics
improve demand forecasting accuracy while streamlining inventory management and lowering
operating expenses. Retailers can reduce the risk of stockouts or excess inventory by using
historical data and predictive modelling to make more educated decisions about purchasing,
warehousing, and distribution.
Additionally, pricing analytics allows businesses to improve pricing plans based on rival pricing,
customer sensitivity, and previous sales information. Real-time price adjustments can be made
using dynamic pricing algorithms to increase sales and profit margins. Business analytics also
assists in risk management and fraud detection by spotting odd transaction patterns and potential
holes in the payment system. The enormous influence of business analytics on financial decisionmaking within the retail industry has been highlighted by numerous studies. According to
Ahmad et al.’s study (2020, p. 26), a big retail chain’s sales revenue increased by 15% due to
customer analytics. The same may be said about Chaudhary and Alam’s (2022) discussion of
how supply chain analytics lowered inventory holding costs by 12% while upholding high
service levels. These findings underline the potential of business analytics to drive tangible
financial benefits.
In conclusion, technology breakthroughs and changing consumer dynamics are driving a
transformational period in the retail industry. Retailers may now harness the power of data for
insights that cover customer behaviour, supply chain management, pricing strategies, and risk
mitigation, thanks to the development of business analytics (Lee et al., 2020, p. 287). Leveraging
business analytics offers retailers a competitive advantage that can result in increased financial
performance and long-term growth as they strive to succeed in a market that is becoming
increasingly competitive. Focusing on its procedures, difficulties, and ability to change financial
results, this research project attempts to look deeper into the varied role of business analytics
within the retail industry.
Research questions and objectives
Research Questions:
1.
How can the retail sector’s working capital management be improved through data
analytics techniques?
2.
In the retail market, what are the main trends and patterns that data analytics have shown
to affect working capital components, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, inventory
turnover, and cash conversion cycle?
3.
How does the use of data analytics for working capital management affect how retail
businesses make financial decisions?
4.
How do businesses in the retail sector that have integrated data analytics into working
capital management compare financially and operationally to those that haven’t?
Research Objectives:
1.
How data analytics may help the retail sector with working capital management and
financial decision-making.
2.
To investigate the valuable methods and procedures for incorporating data analytics to
enhance working capital management in the retail sector.
3.
To use data analytics approaches in the retail industry to assess trends, connections, and
potential areas for improvement within working capital components.
4.
To evaluate and comprehend how data analytics affects financial decision-making
procedures, clarifying how data-driven insights influence strategic decisions within the retail
sector.
5.
To evaluate and contrast the financial success and operational effectiveness of businesses
in the retail sector that have implemented data analytics for working capital management with
those that have not.
Methodology
Research Design: This study’s research design employs a mixed-methods methodology that
combines quantitative analysis with qualitative observations. A dual approach has been chosen to
thoroughly examine the incorporation of data analytics into working capital management and its
effect on financial decision-making within the retail business. Using both quantitative and
qualitative methodologies enables a comprehensive knowledge of the intricate dynamics and
varied results related to data analytics.
The quantitative component is gathering and analyzing numerical data from retailers’ businesses.
A sample of companies will be used to collect financial and operational KPIs such as accounts
receivable, accounts payable, inventory turnover, and cash conversion cycle. Rigid statistical
analysis will be performed on these data points using regression and trend analysis. The
quantitative component allows for spotting statistical correlations, patterns, and trends that shed
light on how data analytics affect working capital and financial performance.
The qualitative component, which supports the quantitative research, comprises interviewing and
surveying industry professionals, financial managers, and executives from businesses involved in
the retail sector. With this qualitative method, I aim to fully capture the complex insights,
viewpoints, and contextual information that quantitative statistics may not be able to convey
correctly. Interviews and surveys will probe the qualitative effects of enhanced working capital
management, integration problems, and decision-making processes driven by data analytics. The
qualitative stage offers a greater comprehension of adopting data analytics’s organizational and
human aspects.
Data Collection: The retail industry, which includes a wide range of businesses operating in the
manufacturing, retail, and technology sectors, will be the focus of the study. The following
crucial steps will make up the data collection procedure:
1.
Quantitative Data Collection: A purposive sampling method will be used to choose a
representative sample of businesses from the retail industry. I will extract financial and
operational information from business financial reports, annual reports, and pertinent databases.
The analysis of working capital measurements and their relationships to data analytics
integration will start with this quantitative dataset as a base.
2.
Qualitative Data Collection: A purposeful sample of business leaders, finance
managers, and industry experts will be interviewed if available. These semi-structured interviews
aim to obtain qualitative information about using data analytics in working capital management.
Participants will be encouraged to share their experiences, difficulties, and viewpoints regarding
the influence of data analytics on financial decision-making through open-ended questions. The
qualitative information will give the quantitative findings more perspective and depth.
The research’s dual goals to qualitatively comprehend the complex dynamics of data analytics
integration and its impact on financial decision-making and to quantitatively analyze the effects
of data analytics on working capital metrics—have influenced the choice of this mixed-methods
approach. This strategy allows for a thorough examination of the study topics. It offers a
comprehensive viewpoint on the interactions between data analytics, working capital
management, and financial decision-making in the retail industry.
In sum, the technique chosen for this study represents a purposeful and strategic approach to
addressing the research objectives. The integration of data analytics into working capital
management in the retail business is thoroughly investigated thanks to the combination of
quantitative analysis and qualitative insights. This study’s conclusions are more credible,
legitimate, and comprehensive thanks to the research methodology and data collection method,
which also allow for a thorough examination of the intricate connection between data analytics
and financial decision-making procedures.
Time scale-Gantt chart:
Tasks
Month 1
Month 2
Month 3
Month 4
Month 5
Month
6
1. Literature Review
2. Research Design &
✓
✓
✓
✓
Framework
3. Ethics Approval (if
✓
applicable)
4. Quantitative Data
✓
✓
Collection
✓
5. Qualitative Data
Collection
✓
6. Data Analysis
✓
(Quantitative)
✓
7. Data Analysis
(Qualitative)
✓
8. Integration & Synthesis
9. Writing Draft Chapters
✓
✓
✓
10. Review & Revision
✓
11. Final Editing &
✓
Proofreading
12. Submission of Research
Proposal
The Gantt chart above shows a thorough timeline for the various stages of the research proposal.
The timetable covers vital activities, including literature reviews, study designs, data collection
(quantitative and qualitative), data analysis, synthesis, and the final preparation and submission
of the research proposal over six months. The tasks are arranged and sequentially scheduled in
the timetable to guarantee that the research proposal is successfully finished within the allotted
time.
Resources
Resources must be carefully allocated for the research, falling into three key categories: funding,
data access, and hardware. Financial arrangements are necessary to pay for data collection,
processing, and prospective travel for interviews or surveys. For thorough analysis, it is essential
to have access to pertinent primary and secondary data sources. To enable efficient study
execution, adequate equipment is necessary. That includes software for data analyses, statistical
tools, and interview recording. A thorough investigation of the integration of data analytics in
working capital management will be made possible by balancing these resource considerations,
providing insightful information for improved financial decision-making in the target industry.
References
Ahmad, S., Miskon, S., Alabdan, R. and Tlili, I., 2020. Towards sustainable textile and apparel
industry: Exploring the role of business intelligence systems in the era of industry 4.0.
Sustainability, 12(7), p.26.
Chaudhary, K. and Alam, M., 2022. Big data analytics: applications in business and marketing.
Auerbach Publications.
Lee, M., Cai, Y.M., DeFranco, A. and Lee, J., 2020. Exploring influential factors affecting guest
satisfaction: Big data and business analytics in consumer-generated reviews. Journal of
Hospitality and Tourism Technology, 11(1), pp.137-153.
Niu, Y., Ying, L., Yang, J., Bao, M. and Sivaparthipan, C.B., 2021. Organizational business
intelligence and decision making using big data analytics. Information Processing &
Management, 58(6), p.10-25.
Wang, Z., Wang, N., Su, X. and Ge, S., 2020. An empirical study on business analytics
affordances enhancing the management of cloud computing data security. International Journal
of Information Management, 50, pp.387-394.
11
Student Name/ID
Project Title
Supervisor Name
PGBM161 MBA Project Marking & Student Feedback – June 2023
Submission Date
Tasks/Expected marks
Presentational issues: [Mark 5%] Title page; Table of Contents; Abstract/Executive Summary (200 words) – what has been covered and the main
outcome(s); etc. Wordcount/12000 words. Reference list; Appendices including Research proposal (final version), Research Ethics approval letter.
Chapter 1, Introduction: [Mark 10%/500 words] context of the study; a strategic overview; rationale; importance to an organisation or business
sector; appropriate scope – key question(s) and objectives.
Chapter 2, Literature Review: [Mark 20%/2000 words]: robust, critical depth, logical, coherent, and focused; main purpose; important areas of
research and enquiry; project key question(s) and objectives; expanding the body of knowledge; review both the academic literature and the
empirical practices that organisations operate; areas of difference and consensus; conceptual framework based on 4-6 key ideas and principles; good
range of relevant and contemporary sources.
Chapter 3 Methodology: [Mark 15%/2000 words]: a critical review; primary and secondary research methods that are possible and deployed; valid
and reliable sources of information against objectives; sample sizes; research instruments (interviews, questionnaires, case studies etc.).
Chapter 4 Data analysis/presentation of findings: [Mark 15%/2000 words]: evidence of data analysis; presents and discusses the research findings
from both primary and secondary sources; emphasising new material collected specifically for the project; engaging with new and original material
collected; Data presented systematically and structured clearly around tables – if appropriate – or in terms of outcomes against the areas identified
from the literature and linked back to project objectives.
Chapter 5 Discussion of Findings: [Mark 15%] interrogates the findings by asking questions: what is significant? where is there key agreements
between participants /sources? what are the main areas of disagreement? how do the findings reflect the outcomes (confirm or deny) from the
literature review etc.? what does this say about important ideas to shape policy /strategy and its implementation? (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 6 Conclusion and Recommendations: [Mark 10%] 1/Conclusions (1000 words) draws together findings to answer key research
question(s)/objectives; defines what now can be done; summarises main points; decides what stance to be taken with respect to practices /policies;
avoids introducing new ideas/debates which would need reworking earlier chapters. 2/Recommendations (500 words) moves from a research stance
to a leadership stance; advocates a possible direction for the organisation/sector; carefully presented in management terms; clearly states what
issue / opportunity is being addressed and the impact desired; states what should be done and says something on implementation; resources,
barriers, risk, timescales, and organisation of changes; is solution driven; no new ideas introduced and is derived from the actual work done.
Chapter 7 Reflections on developing your personal competence: [Mark 10%/2000 words] programme experience/learning; professional identity;
evidence collated throughout the module; a reflective commentary: initial motivations for undertaking an MBA; central components of professional
identity during Semester 1; learning about self as a developing business professional; how the learning will shape future professional self.
Overall Marks/Comments [Mark 100%.]
First Marker Comments/Name/Date:
09 June 2023
Marker Comments
Marks %
Overall Module Mark (%)
Second Marker Comments/Name/Date:
Module Team: Yannis Smirnis; Yasshar Salamzadeh; Peter Coleman; Ryan Williams; Philip Arthur; Brian Ross; Steve Wharton; Iris Ren; Konstantinas Biginas; Elaine Crawford; Peter Asuata; Austin Okeke. Module
Leader: Dr Augustus Osseo-Asare.
2022-23 University of Sunderland, FBLT, Sunderland Business School.
Dear all,
I hope you are doing well. I deeply apologise about the feedback delay. I was unwell last week
and I have only recovered few days ago. Apologies in advance, this is a lengthy email. Please I
advise you all read thoroughly.
I am glad that I have provided feedback on everyone’s work. Well done everyone! I am glad that
you have made a good start with your research proposals and chapters.
While I read your proposals, I noticed some flaws which I want to highlight.
Research Topic: Everyone please review your research topic and make sure it is specific, clear
and concise. Some research topics are too broad and not properly crafted.
Research questions and objectives: Some of you had many research questions which were not
really relevant to your research topic. Some research objectives were also poorly formulated.
I have attached a link to a YouTube video which explains how to formulate Research aims,
objectives and questions:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9d3JOmCzfw&pp=ygU1aG93IHRvIHdyaXRlIHJlc2VhcmNoIHF1ZXN0aW9ucywgYWltcyBhbmQgb2Jq
ZWN0aXZlcyA%3D
Here is another link to a site which explains how to formulate Research questions, aims and
objectives:
https://www.google.com/url?sa=t&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=web&cd=&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=2
ahUKEwjitqKen_2BAxWGQkEAHXhMBMoQFnoECCUQAQ&url=https%3A%2F%2Fresearchmethodology.net%2Fresearch-methodology%2Fresearch-aims-andobjectives%2F&usg=AOvVaw3eNWsyzatt9dePmcAekYGz&opi=89978449
Please make sure you watch the YouTube video and read the article on research objectives
formulation. They will really help.
In order to write an excellent dissertation, you have to be knowledgeable. And so, it is important
to read so you can enhance your understanding and skills. I have attached a reading list to help
with this. The reading list is in the Dissertation Structure Word Document. I know I have sent it
before. Please look at it again and make sure you read at least one of these text books.
Referencing, Typographical and Grammatical errors: As I read through your proposals, I noticed
there were some in-text citation errors, typo and grammatical errors. Please always make sure
that you proof-read your work before submitting for review. Also, make sure that you follow the
Harvard Style of referencing. I have attached a PDF document of the referencing guide for your
use.
Methodology: I realised that some student’s methodology section was under-developed and
was not clear. There was no clarity regarding the appropriate choice of methodology, sampling
technique, method of data collection and data analysis techniques.
According to the MBA Dissertation Supervision Timeline, you should have started writing your
Literature Review and Methodology chapters. Also, you should be getting ready to apply for
ethical clearance. In order to apply for ethical clearance, you should know clearly your
methodological approach, sample population, sample size, method of data collection and data
analysis. Your method of data collection instrument (questionnaire or interview guide) should
also be ready.
Guidance on how to apply for ethical clearance is below. I have attached the links to the site.
Research ethics | The University of Sunderland
https://www.sunderland.ac.uk/more/research/research-governance-integrity/ethics/apply-ethicalreview/
A link to the template of a Consent Form and Participant information sheet is attached below:
https://www.sunderland.ac.uk/images/external-websites/www/research/helpsheets/RevisedConsent-and-PI-Sheet.pdf
Our next Supervision meeting will be on Microsoft Teams on Friday 20th October from 2-5pm. It
is a block meeting. I will spend 25 mins with each student. Please let us keep this in our
calendars and make sure we are available. If you will not be able to make it, please let me know
ahead of time. With respect to this meeting, please I want to see everybody’s Methodology
Chapter latest by 12 noon on Friday 20th October. Please submit this chapter to me via email.
I will send the Microsoft Teams invite soon. Please endeavour to accept the invite.
Thank you all for your cooperation and patience.
Looking forward to our meeting on Friday.
Kind regards,
The format of your project may well vary dependent on the topic of your research and
discussions with your supervisor will be extremely helpful in this aspect of the
decision-making process. It is likely that your report will be made up of several key
sections.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Executive summary
Statement of originality and authenticity (see section 13 of this handbook)
Title page
Contents
Lists of figures and tables
Chapter 1: Introduction and context of the study
Chapter 2: Literature review
Chapter 3: Methodology
Chapter 4: Presentation of research findings
Chapter 5: Discussion of findings
Chapter 6: Conclusions and recommendations
Chapter 7: Reflections on developing your personal competence.
Reference list – Harvard Referencing Style
Appendix (to include evidence to support reflections)
For further guidance:
There should be an Executive Summary (approximately 200 words) at the beginning
which should review what has been covered and the main outcome proposed.
Chapter 1, Introduction, and context of the study. This should cover a strategic
overview developing and enhancing the first section of the proposal covering the
rationale for the project and its importance to an organisation or business sector. This
may be expressed in terms of sustaining competitive position or improving that position.
This section might usefully consider the subject from the threats, opportunities, and
business contextual factors. It should avoid too broad a scope. This might discuss
improvement to internal business processes: customer care, service quality,
improvement in skills and or organisation of resources etc. It might include better
service delivery, marketing strategies or identification of new markets and or products or
services to the external business environment. These are illustrative only.
(Approximately 500 words)
Chapter 2, Literature Review The work will include a robust and critical literature
review. The main purpose is to establish the important areas of research and enquiry
such that the project objectives can be achieved. It serves an important purpose in
expanding the body of knowledge that we have with which to understand current
performance and as a secondary base to build better informed practices for the future. It
should review both the academic literature and the empirical practices that
organisations operate. Your ability to shape the ideas and practices is one of the key
skills. It is not just a question of presenting other authors ideas without comment. The
better marks are to be achieved whereby you identify areas of difference and
consensus and from these works draw a strong conclusion as to what is important in
managing the area under review. The outcome is likely to have not much more than 4-6
key ideas and principles in the conclusions and will be framed around the question
‘what makes this a successful strategic business practice- and how can it be managed
effectively in practice’. These will be the areas you will further examine in your research.
This needs to be written in logical and coherent chapters that flow together. It should be
clear as to what is being covered and it should avoid extending into too many areas
otherwise critical depth is lost. The number of primary sources will vary. We expect a
good range of relevant and contemporary sources but the treatment of them is more
important than shear number. (Approximately 2000 words).
Chapter 3 Research Methodology The project must include a critical review of both
primary and secondary research methods that are possible but more importantly those
deployed in the project from the perspective of such things as selecting valid and
reliable sources of information against the objectives. Discussion of sample sizes and
drawing reliable conclusions). It should address specific tools used (interviews,
questionnaires, case studies etc.) and the various strengths of these and how they can
be best designed and used for the designated project. (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 4 Presentation of Research findings There must be a strong section which
presents and discusses the research findings from both primary and secondary sources
but emphasising new material collected specifically for the project. This section is
important as this is the area where you engage with new and original material that you
have collected, and the skills deployed here are definitive in terms of the scope final
assessment grade together with the recommendations. Data must be presented
systematically and structured clearly around tables – if appropriate- or in terms of
outcomes against the areas identified from the literature and linked back to project
objectives. (Approximately 2000 words)
Chapter 5 Discussion of Findings Having presented the data descriptively you will be
expected to interrogate the findings by asking questions of your information such as:
what is significant here, where is there key agreements between participants /sources
what the main areas of disagreement are, how does this information reflect the
outcomes (confirm or deny) from the literature review etc. What does this say about
important ideas to shape policy /strategy and its implementation. (Approximately 2000
words)
Chapter 6 Conclusion and Recommendations You will need a conclusion which
draws together the findings from your research and the literature review and start to
feedback and comment on the possibilities that now arise in terms of meeting the
objectives. It should shape the agenda and start to define what it is you now think can
be done. It should summarise main points and decide what stance you are taking with
respect to the practice /policies under review. It should flow naturally from the earlier
work. This section should not introduce new ideas or new debates even if you have
discovered new information! If this is the case earlier chapters need reworking.
(Approximately 1000 words)
Recommendations should follow the conclusions. At this stage you move away from a
research stance and adopt a leadership stance. Here you will advocate a possible
direction for the organisation or sector. It can be specific as to future strategy and policy
or it might offer an alternative view and scenario depending on particular future
contexts. It should be carefully presented in management terms. Imagine you are
presenting to a body of interested organisational managers with different levels of
commitment to what you are proposing! It should clearly state what issue / opportunity
is being addressed and the impact desired. It should state what should be done and it
should say something on the implementation around, resources, barriers, risk,
timescales, and organisation of the changes. It should not overly direct to further work
or decisions otherwise the project is likely to be overly ‘contextual ‘and general and not
solution driven. Again, no new ideas should be introduced here, and it should be clear
how the recommendations can be derived from the foregoing work. (Approximately 500
words).
Chapter 7 Reflections on developing your personal competence. This chapter
provides the opportunity for you to reflect on your programme experience and the
learning which has impacted on the development of your professional identity. Drawing
on evidence you have collated throughout the module you are to write a reflective
commentary which addresses the following: what were your initial motivations for
undertaking an MBA and what were the central components of your professional
identity during semester 1? What did you learn about yourself as a developing business
professional and how that learning will shape your future professional self?
(Approximately 2000 words)
The dissertation/project should be approximately 12000 words. However, the exact
make-up of the sections may vary. It is unlikely you will be able to meet the learning
outcomes in terms of depth and range of analysis in a study of less than 12000 words.
The remainder of the dissertation/project should comprise your research proposal (final)
and the reference list and appendices which evidence content in the main body of your
report. Appendices should be carefully selected. They should be referenced in the main
body of the study and should clearly relate to and provide further important reference for
the reader. They should not be included if they have no central bearing on the study or
simply a catalogue of all organisational information you can find.
Suggested Reading
The following is an indicative reading list for the module which can also be accessed
through the https://canvas.sunderland.ac.uk/courses/60205/external_tools/91537 link in
Canvas.
Bassot, B. (2016) The Reflective Journal. London: Palgrave.
Bolton, G. (2018) Reflective practice: writing and professional development. 5th edition.
London: SAGE.
Bell, E., Bryman, A. & Harley, B. (2019) Business Research Methods. Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
Bradbury, H., Kilminster, S, Zukas, M. & Frost, N. (2010) Beyond Reflective Practice:
new approaches to professional lifelong learning. London: Routledge.
Collis, J. & Hussey, R. (2017) Business Research: a practical guide for undergraduate
and postgraduate students. 4th edition. London: Palgrave.
Denscombe, M. (2010) Ground rules for social research: guidelines for good practice.
2nd edition. Maidenhead: Open University Press.
Denscombe, M. (2017) The good research guide: for small-scale social research
projects. 6th edition. London: Open University Press.
Maylor, H. (2010) Project Management. Harlow: Financial Times Prentice Hall.
Maylor, H. (2017) Researching Business and Management. London: Palgrave.
Saunders, M, & Lewis, P. (2018) Doing research in business and management: an
essential guide to planning your project. 2nd edition. Harlow: Pearson.
Saunders, M.N.K., Lewis, P. & Thornhill, A. (2019) Research methods for Business
students. 8th edition. Harlow: Pearson.
Watson, G. & Reissner, S. (eds) (2014) Developing Skills for Business Leadership, 2nd
edition. London: Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development.
Williams, K., Woolliams, M. and Spiro, J. (2012) Reflective writing. Basingstoke,
Palgrave Macmillan.
In addition, it is expected that relevant journals will be consulted by students depending
upon the area of study and chosen topic.
Citing and Referencing:
Harvard Style
Contents
1.
What is re
Answer the question in the word docs， If there is a calculation problem, write the formula and the calculation process.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Do try to be brief – questions have maximum answer lengths. Long, rambling answers will NOT
receive full credit even if the correct answer can be found within them. If you’re not sure, give me
your best guess, rather than trying to “hedge your bets”.
Microsoft Corporation:
The questions on this exam can be answered using the attached
information from Microsoft’s 10-K from 2023 (pages 6-8). All information needed to answer these
questions can be found in our course materials or in this exam.
1a. Comute Total Asset Turnover for Microsoft, for the year ended June 30, 2023. Show your
computations. (5 points)
Total Asset Turnover
Computations:
1b. This ratio has declined significantly over the past ten years. Provide one hypothesis (possible
explanaton) as to why that might occur and then name a ratio which one could use to test your
hypothesis. Be brief (one sentence for each portion of the question should be sufficient), but be as
specific as possible. (8 points)
Hypothesis:
Ratio:
2. Assume that Microsoft’s Operating ROA (OPROA) for the year ended June 30, 2023 is 51.6%.
Using this number, compute our measure of financial performance (as distinct from operating
performance) for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. You can find the formula for this on
slide 2 of Notes 6. Hint: All balance sheet numbers here should be averages even though the
formula doesn’t show this. Show your computations. (5 points)
Financial Performance:
Computations:
3a. Compute Days in Accounts Payable for Microsoft for the year ended June 30, 2023. Use “Total
Cost of Revenue” for Cost of Goods Sold. Show your computations. (5 points)
Days A/P
Computations:
3b. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Net Operating
Assets? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain. (5 points)
Explanation:
Circle Answer:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
3c. Assume that Microsoft changes its policy and tells its suppliers it will now take 30 days longer to
pay them than what you computed in 3a. What would be the expected effect on Total Cost of
Revenue? Briefly (no more than one or two sentences) explain. (5 points)
Explanation:
Circle Answer:
Increase
Decrease
Cannot determine
4. Assume that Microsoft decided to increase leverage by issuing debt and using the cash received to
pay a dividend. How would this affect ROA and Operating ROA? Please circle the correct
answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain. (10 points)
Effect on ROA
Effect on Operating ROA
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
5. Currently Microsoft reports research and development as an expense. If (contrary to accounting
rules) they were to treat these as a capital expenditures, how would this affect current operating
cash flow and current NOPAT in the short term? Assume that there is NO tax effect. Please
circle the correct answers and briefly (one sentence each) explain. (10 points)
Effect on Operating cash flow
Effect on NOPAT
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
increase decrease unclear no_effect
Explanation:
6. Using the attached information, what was the change in cash for Microsoft during the year ended
June 30, 2021? Show your computations. (5 points)
Change in cash
Computations:
7. Using the attached information, what were “accruals” for Microsoft for the year ended June 30,
2021? Show your computations. (5 points)
Accruals
Computations:
8. Using the attached information, did Microsoft’s inventory increase or decrease during the year
ended June 30, 2021? Briefly (one sentence) explain. (5 points)
Circle Answer: Increase Explanation:
Decrease
Cannot determine
9. Using the attached information, how is Microsoft generating cash during the year ended June 30,
2023? How is it using its cash? (6 points)
Main source of cash
Two primary uses of cash
10a. Microsoft’s balance sheet contains two liabilities labeled as ‘unearned revenue’ – some of this
is current (“payable” within one year) and some is non-current (“payable” after one year). For
purposes of this question, don’t worry about the distinction. Footnote 1 (not included here)
explains that the bulk of this liability represents license fees paid to Microsoft in advance of
Microsoft delivering services. Assuming that all of Microsoft’s service revenue is paid for in
this manner, use the balance sheet and income statement information to compute the cash that
Microsoft received during the year ended June 30, 2023 for service revenues. (5 points)
Cash received for
Computation:
services:
10b. Assume that Microsoft overstates the short-term unearned revenue liability account as of June 30,
2023, but correctly estimates the account as of June 30, 2024. (4 points)
Increase / decrease
/
cannot determine
What is the effect
on income for the
year ended June 30,
(Circle one)
2023?
What is the effect
on income for the
year ended June 30,
2024?
Increase
/
decrease
/
cannot determine
(Circle one)
10c. How might one assess whether the appropriate level of unearned revenue is deferred in 2023? (4
points)
Explanation:
End of Questions
ITEM 8. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
INCOME STATEMENTS
(In millions, except per share amounts)
Year Ended June 30,
Revenue:
Product
Service
2023
$
Total revenue
64,699
147,216
2022
$
72,732
125,538
2021
$
71,074
97,014
211,915
198,270
168,088
17,804
48,059
19,064
43,586
18,219
34,013
Total cost of revenue
65,863
62,650
52,232
Gross margin
Research and development
146,052
135,620
115,856
Sales and marketing
27,195
22,759
24,512
21,825
20,716
20,117
General and administrative
7,575
5,900
5,107
Operating income
88,523
83,383
69,916
Interest Income, net
788
333
1,186
Income before income taxes
89,311
83,716
71,102
Provision for income taxes
16,950
10,978
9,831
Cost of revenue:
Product
Service
Net income
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
72,361
$
72,738
$
61,271
BALANCE SHEETS
(In millions)
June 30,
2023
Assets
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents
$
34,704
2022
$
13,931
Short-term investments
76,558
90,826
Total cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts of $650 and $633
Inventories
111,262
48,688
2,500
104,757
44,261
3,742
Other current assets
21,807
16,924
184,257
95,641
14,346
9,879
67,886
9,366
30,601
169,684
74,398
13,148
6,891
67,524
11,298
21,897
Total current assets
Property and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation of $68,251 and $59,660
Operating lease right-of-use assets
Equity investments
Goodwill
Intangible assets, net
Other long-term assets
Total assets
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable
Current portion of long-term debt
Accrued compensation
Short-term income taxes
Short-term unearned revenue
$
411,976
$
364,840
$
18,095
5,247
11,009
4,152
50,901
$
19,000
2,749
10,661
4,067
45,538
Other current liabilities
14,745
13,067
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Long-term income taxes
Long-term unearned revenue
Deferred income taxes
Operating lease liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
104,149
41,990
25,560
2,912
433
12,728
17,981
95,082
47,032
26,069
2,870
230
11,489
15,526
Total liabilities
205,753
198,298
93,718
118,848
(6,343)
86,939
84,281
(4,678)
206,223
166,542
Commitments and contingencies
Stockholders’ equity:
Common stock and paid-in capital – shares authorized 24,000; outstanding 7,432 and 7,464
Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
Total stockholders’ equity
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Refer to accompanying notes.
$
411,976
$
364,840
CASH FLOWS STATEMENTS
(In millions)
Year Ended June 30,
Operations
Net income
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash from operations:
Depreciation, amortization, and other
Stock-based compensation expense
Net recognized losses (gains) on investments and derivatives
Deferred income taxes
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Accounts receivable
Inventories
Other current assets
Other long-term assets
Accounts payable
Unearned revenue
Income taxes
Other current liabilities
Other long-term liabilities
2023
$
72,361
2022
$
72,738
2021
$
61,271
13,861
9,611
196
(6,059)
14,460
7,502
(409 )
(5,702)
11,686
6,118
(1,249)
(150 )
(4,087)
1,242
(1,991)
(2,833)
(2,721)
5,535
(358 )
2,272
553
(6,834)
(1,123)
(709 )
(2,805)
2,943
5,109
696
2,344
825
(6,481)
737
(932 )
(3,459)
2,798
4,633
(2,309)
4,149
1,402
87,582
89,035
78,214
Financing
Cash premium on debt exchange
Repayments of debt
Common stock issued
Common stock repurchased
Common stock cash dividends paid
Other, net
0
(2,750)
1,866
(22,245 )
(19,800 )
(1,006)
0
(9,023)
1,841
(32,696 )
(18,135 )
(863 )
(5,754)
(3,750)
1,693
(27,385 )
(16,521 )
(769 )
Net cash used in financing
(43,935 )
(58,876 )
(52,486 )
(28,107 )
(23,886 )
(20,622 )
(1,670)
(37,651 )
33,510
14,354
(3,116)
(22,038 )
(26,456 )
16,451
28,443
(2,825)
(8,909)
(62,924 )
51,792
14,008
(922 )
(22,680 )
(30,311 )
(27,577 )
Net cash from operations
Investing
Additions to property and equipment
Acquisition of companies, net of cash acquired, and purchases of intangible
and other assets
Purchases of investments
Maturities of investments
Sales of investments
Other, net
Net cash used in investing
Refer to accompanying notes.
prepare a draft of a comparative systems report. Compare and contrast electronic data processing (EDP) systems used by Trinity Industries with those in the marketplace. Using substantive testing, audit the transaction flow and determine whether financial information is accurately reflected in the system transactions. This will allow for an assessment and recommendation as to the effectiveness of the company’s internal control processes, including changes in transaction processing if necessary. Compose a short memorandum that communicates the results of the first year of testing along with recommendations as to what Trinity should do differently in subsequent years, including recommendations for reducing SOX-related expenses.
Prompt
Assess the compliance approach implemented by Trinity Industries in order to recommend a cost efficient software system.
Specifically, the following critical elements must be addressed:
Bottom-Up Approach
What were the strengths and weaknesses of Trinity’s practice-based bottom-up approach? How effective was it?
What would you recommend it should have done differently in Year 1? Defend your response.
Compare and contrast the strengths and weaknesses of a bottom-up versus a top-down risk approach to compliance.
Which approach is more appropriate in completing a compliance project successfully for Trinity’s first year?
How does each approach affect a company’s internal control structure?
Identify the chief insights from the pilot project. How does the pilot project for the EDP system compare to SOX requirements?
Identify the testing processes Trinity performed and whether Trinity took the appropriate approach in designing their controls.
Based on the substantive tests, which testing process proved to be most useful in assessing Trinity’s accounting system?
Compose a short memorandum that communicates the results of the first year of testing along with recommendations as to what Trinity should do differently in subsequent years.
SOX-Related Expenses
Formulate recommendations for how Trinity could further reduce SOX-related expenses in 2008. Be sure to consider the barriers the company may encounter with each of your recommendations.
What are the major sources of cost in Trinity’s compliance maintenance and testing?
Rank each of the major sources of cost in terms of value.
Compare the choice of Oracle as the selected software system against two other systems of comparable size and scope. Evaluate each software system’s advantages and disadvantages.
If you determine that another software system would have been a better choice through your analysis, defend the decision. If Oracle is the choice after analysis, defend that decision.
Week 1 – Assignment
Change Stories
[WLOs: 1, 2, 3, 4] [CLOs: 1, 2] [NACE: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8]
Prior to beginning work on this assignment,
•
•
•
Read Chapters 1 and 2 in the course textbook.
Read Week 1 Lecture Notes.
Reviewing the Accelerate!Links to an external site. article may also be helpful.
Weekly Learning Objectives Covered
In this assignment, you will:
•
•
•
•
Analyze the reasons that change initiatives succeed or fail within
organizations.
Assess the role that change images play in the change process.
Develop techniques to manage resistance to organizational change.
Examine your leadership style.
| Prepare
In your paper,
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Add an introduction that includes a statement informing your reader what
topics and subtopics the assignment will discuss.
Describe the researched change story and the one selected from Chapter 1 of
the text.
Research another workplace change story and compare it with one of the
stories from the beginning of Chapter 1 of the course textbook.
o Ensure the researched change story focuses on a failed change
initiative and not a failure to change.
Discuss the common issues and lessons present in both the stories.
Identify and discuss the embedded lesson found in the three change stories
from Chapter 1.
o The stories must include The Starbucks Story, The Sears Story, and
The Detroit Story.
Describe how you might use the lessons as a solutions template for future
change strategies.
Add a summary conclusion paragraph.
| Write
The Change Stories paper
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
must be 3 to 4 double-spaced pages in length (not including title and
references pages) and formatted according to APA StyleLinks to an external
site. as outlined in the Writing Center’s APA Formatting for Microsoft
WordLinks to an external site. resource.
must include a separate title page with the following in title case:
o title of the paper in bold font
▪ Space should appear between the title and the rest of the
information on the title page.
o student’s name
o name of institution (The University of Arizona Global Campus)
o course name and number
o instructor’s name
o due date
must utilize academic voice. See the Academic VoiceLinks to an external
site. resource for additional guidance.
must include an introduction and conclusion paragraph.
o Your introduction paragraph needs to end with a clear thesis
statement that indicates the purpose of your paper.
o For assistance on writing Introductions & ConclusionsLinks to an
external site. and Writing a Thesis StatementLinks to an external
site., refer to the Writing Center resources.
must use at least two credible sources in addition to the course text.
o The Scholarly, Peer-Reviewed, and Other Credible SourcesLinks to
an external site. table offers additional guidance on appropriate
source types. If you have questions about whether a specific source
is appropriate for this assignment, please contact your instructor.
Your instructor has the final say about the appropriateness of a
specific source.
o To assist you in completing the research required for this
assignment, review the Quick and Easy Library ResearchLinks to an
external site. tutorial, which introduces the University of Arizona
Global Campus Library and the research process and provides some
library search tips.
must document any information used from sources in APA Style as outlined in
the Writing Center’s APA: Citing Within Your PaperLinks to an external
site. guide.
must include a separate references page that is formatted according to APA
Style as outlined in the Writing Center.
o
See the APA: Formatting Your References ListLinks to an external
site. resource in the Writing Center for specifications.
| Competencies Learned
This activity will help you practice the following skills:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Broad Tech Skill/Software
Microsoft Office
Creativity/Innovation
Written Skills
Problem Formation/Solving
Analytical Skills
Time Management
Ethics
Confidence
Responsibility
Leadership/Independence
Determination/Motivation
Initiative
Job Hiring Skills
Carefully review the Grading RubricLinks to an external site. for the criteria that will be
used to evaluate your assignment.
Using Analytic Tools for Strategic Decision-Making, Articulate the current state of your chosen organization and its competitive environment.Use the SOAR analysis framework to identify opportunities and set results-oriented aspirations based on the strengths of your chosen organization. Formulate an innovative new product idea to develop competitive advantages for your chosen organization.Formulate a vision, mission, and values statement for your innovative new product idea that increases the competitive advantage of your chosen organization.Choose an appropriate strategic approach to support the vision for an innovative new product idea that increases the competitive advantage of your chosen organization.Design one strategic goal and three strategic objectives that drive the implementation of a strategy for a new idea that increases the competitive advantage of an organization.Produce a concise and persuasive pitch to convince the C-level executives of your chosen organization to fund the development of your innovative new product idea.
Word Count:Minimum 1000 words, Times in New romans, double spacing
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Lockheed Martin
Product: A sophisticated aerial sensor that can identify and monitor new dangers as
they emerge is one approach
Scenario:
You are the director of strategy and business intelligence for your chosen organization. You are
developing a strategic plan for your chosen organization for an upcoming meeting with the C-level
executives of your organization. They loved your idea for an innovative new product and would like
you to develop a strategic plan for further consideration. Use the following criteria to develop the
strategic plan for your innovative new product idea.
Assignment Requirements: In this assignment, you will develop a strategic plan for your chosen
organization. Address each of the following inquiries in your deliverable:
Product Offering Analysis
1. Articulate the current state of your chosen organization and its competitive environment.
1. In a business letter, articulate the strategic position of your chosen organization
within the industry in which it operates.
2. Provide a detailed overview of the product mix of your chosen organization.
3. Analyze the product mix of your chosen organization against its rivals.
Organizational Competencies
2. Use the SOAR analysis framework to identify opportunities and set results-oriented
aspirations based on the strengths of your chosen organization.
1. Analyze your chosen organization to identify a minimum of three strengths that may
result in competitive advantages.
2. Based on your chosen organization’s competitive advantages, determine a minimum
of three business expansion opportunities.
3. Develop a minimum of three aspirational product ideas that may result from
organizational expansion opportunities.
4. Explain any expected results from the successful implementation of each
aspirational product idea that you propose.
Innovative New Product Idea
3. Formulate an innovative new product idea to develop competitive advantages for your
chosen organization.
1. Introduce the innovative new product idea that you developed in the Unit 5
Assignment for your chosen organization.
2. Explain the problem or opportunity your innovative new product idea is intended to
solve.
3. Explain how your product is intended to meet customer expectations.
4. Explain the strategic direction of your innovative new product.
5. Develop and tell a story about your new product idea.
1. Explain how the branding and new product idea will impact and/or interact
with existing branding and product lines or items offered within the product
mix of organization.
Vision, Mission, & Values
4. Formulate a vision, mission, and values statement for your innovative new product idea that
increases the competitive advantage of your chosen organization.
1. Formulate a vision statement for your innovative new idea.
1. Explain how your vision statement increases the competitive advantage of
your chosen organization.
2. Explain how the mission statement for your chosen organization will support the
vision for your innovative new product idea that increases the competitive
advantage of your chosen organization.
1. Revise the mission statement of your chosen organization if necessary.
3. Explain how the values statement of an organization supports the vision for a new
idea that increases the competitive advantage of an organization.
1. Explain how the values statement of the organization supports the mission
statement of the organization.
2. Revise the values statement of your chosen organization if necessary.
Strategic Approach
5. Choose an appropriate strategic approach to support the vision for an innovative new
product idea that increases the competitive advantage of your chosen organization.
1. Analyze various strategic approaches that can lead to the development of
competitive advantages for an organization.
2. Choose one generic strategy to use in the launch of your innovative new product
idea that will result in competitive advantages for your chosen organization.
3. Explain how employing your chosen strategic approach can lead to the development
of competitive advantages for your chosen organization.
4. Explain whether implementing a strategic approach as a first mover, a fast follower,
or a late mover is most advantageous for your organization.
Strategic Goals, Objectives, & Initiatives
6. Design one strategic goal and three strategic objectives that drive the implementation of a
strategy for a new idea that increases the competitive advantage of an organization.
1. Identify critical success factors to ensure the success of organizational objectives.
2. Develop an objective that adheres to corporate social responsibility and
environmental sustainability standards while balancing these duties with economic
responsibilities to shareholders.
3. Develop innovative projects to drive the implementation of a strategy for a new idea
that increases the competitive advantage of an organization.
Strategic Alternatives & Contingencies
7. Identify strategic alternatives that may increase efficiency, and contingency plans to
mitigate risks.
1. Decide if an organization should consider outsourcing, mergers, or acquisitions to
increase its competitive advantage.
2. Develop a contingency plan to counter or mitigate risks and threats to a strategic
plan using the assumption-based planning technique.
Conclusive Remarks
8. Produce a concise and persuasive pitch to convince the C-level executives of your chosen
organization to fund the development of your innovative new product idea.
Word Count: Minimum 1000 words
Okay, I kind of messed up and forgot to submit the first part which is 6 A below: For this assignment, you will begin Assignment 7a: Final Project which I’ve attached!
To make it clear, for this here is just the start of the project, attached is the ACTUAL assignment which is very important!
1. Complete the assigned readings for this unit. Review the directions for Assignment 7a: Final Project.
2. Begin your final presentation as listed in Unit 7. Read the guidelines on presenting a case study and read the final outline as listed in the assessment of Unit 7.
3. You are to begin your paper and provide a rough draft of slides 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 namely:
Company Overview
Key Dynamics from External Analysis
Key dynamics from Internal Analysis
SWOT Analysis
Key Strategic Implications of Analysis
Conclusion
You may change these in your final paper/presentation, but it is to be your best analysis to this point in your research. Spend appropriate time and effort and provide your preliminary slide for this assignment
The ACTUAL Assignment is the continuous of ^the above assignment: Attached!
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Francis Marion University
BUSI – 458: Strategic Management
Dr. Fred R. David
Students:
Rabea Graessner
Michael Ward
Company: Colgate-Palmolive
“The small soap and candle business that William Colgate began in New York City early in the
19th century is now, more than 200 years later, a truly global company serving hundreds of millions
of consumers worldwide. Throughout this history, Colgate people and Colgate values have been at
the heart of [their] success.”
(https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/about/history, 08/28/2018; 08:24 pm)
Table of Content
Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4
1.
Old Vision Statement……………………………………………………………………………………………. 4
2.
Revised Vision Statement……………………………………………………………………………………… 4
3.
Old Mission Statement …………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
4.
Proposed Mission Statement ………………………………………………………………………………… 7
5.
External Factor Evaluation Matrix (EFE Matrix, EFEM) ……………………………………………… 7
6.
The Competitive ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9
6.1 The Competitors ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9
6.1.1 The Unilever company …………………………………………………………………………………. 9
6.1.2 The P & G company ……………………………………………………………………………………… 9
6.2 Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM) ………………………………………………………………………. 10
7.
The Financial Statement ……………………………………………………………………………………… 11
7.1 Income Statement ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 11
7.2 Balance Sheet ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 11
8.
Historical Ratios …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 12
9.
Internal Factor Evaluation Matrix (IFE Matrix, IFEM) ……………………………………………… 14
10. Strategy Analysis ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 16
10.1. Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats Matrix (SWOT) ……………………………. 16
10.2 Boston Consulting Group Matrix (BCG)……………………………………………………………… 17
10.3 Internal-External Matrix (IE)…………………………………………………………………………….. 18
10.3.1 Internal-External Matrix by product segments …………………………………………….. 18
10.3.2 Internal-External Matrix by region ……………………………………………………………… 19
10.4 Strategic Position and Action Evaluation Matrix (SPACE) …………………………………….. 20
10.5 Grand Strategy Matrix (GRAND) ………………………………………………………………………. 22
10.6 Quantitative Strategic Planning Matrix (QSPM) …………………………………………………. 23
10.7 Strategy conclusion ………………………………………………………………………………………… 26
11. Recommendations …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 27
12. Organizational Structure …………………………………………………………………………………….. 28
12.1 Old organizational structure ……………………………………………………………………………. 28
12.2 Improved organizational structure …………………………………………………………………… 29
13. Perceptual Map …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 30
13.1 Soap industry …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 30
13.2 Toothpaste industry ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 31
13. EPS/EBIT Analysis ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 32
14. Company Valuation ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 34
15. The Projected Financial Statements……………………………………………………………………… 34
16.1 Projected Income Statement …………………………………………………………………………… 34
16.2 Projected Balance Sheet …………………………………………………………………………………. 35
16. Projected Financial Ratios …………………………………………………………………………………… 36
17. Retained Earnings Table ……………………………………………………………………………………… 37
18. Executive Summary ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 38
Sources ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 40
Introduction
In 1806, William Colgate established a starch, soap and candle business on Dutch Street in Manhattan, New York City. The first advertisement for the business appeared in a newspaper in 1817
and in 1820 the company later established a starch factory in New Jersey City. In 1857, William
Colgate died, but the company was reorganized as Colgate & Company under his son, Samuel
Colgate, who became the new manager. Since then the company has grown drastically. Today,
the company takes the name Colgate Palmolive and now operates globally in Africa, Asia Pacific,
Eurasia, Europe, Latin America, North America with over 38,000 individuals employed around the
globe recently. The company has also expanded is product line tremendously with 31 brands now
and with a focus in other product categories too such as tooth paste.
1. Old Vision Statement
“Taking our sustainability goals and turning them into actionable policies that keeps us, and our
global team of innovators, accountable.”
Source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/our-policies; 08/28/2018, 01:44
pm
•
“As a leading consumer products company, we are also deeply committed to advancing
technology that can address changing consumer needs throughout the world. In fact, our
goal is to use our technology to create products that will continue to improve the quality
of life for our consumers where they live.”
Source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/about; 08/28/2018, 01:53 pm
• “As a successful business, we are focused on achieving the consistent growth required to
continue our global success and to make us an even stronger company. We believe this is
the best way to benefit our consumers, our people and our shareholders.”
Source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/about; 08/28/2018, 01:53 pm
Source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values 08/28/2018, 04:52 pm
2. Revised Vision Statement
We strive to be the best global household and personal care products company that takes our
values of care, global teamwork and continuous improvement and turning them into actionable
policies that keeps us, and our global team of innovators, accountable.
3. Old Mission Statement
Colgate Palmolive provides numerous information on their corporate website on its goals of sustainability but does not provide a written mission statement.
1. Customers: everybody around the global should be costumer
2. Products or services: toothpastes, soap, shampoo, shower gel, deodorant, nutrients for
pets, detergents, dish soap, after shaves, degreasers, cleaners, cleansers, bathroom cleaners, disinfectants, dish detergent (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/enus/brands; 08/28/2018, 01:58 pm)
3. Markets: Africa, Asia Pacific, Eurasia, Europe, Latin America, North America
4. Technology: “Science is at the core of Colgate-Palmolive’s commitment to making safe
and effective products that improve the health and well-being of people around the
world.” (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/science-innovation; 08/28/2018, 02:16 pm), Colgate is one of the World’s Most Innovative Companies
•
i.e. Commitment to safety, innovation
5. Concern for survival, growth and profitability: “Colgate-Palmolive continues to be recognized for efforts in sustainability, social responsibility, diversity, innovation and workplace
balance.” (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/about/awards; 08/28/2018,
02:11 pm)
“We’re committed to grow the business with innovative, more sustainable products that
make the lives of consumers healthier and more enjoyable.” (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/sustainability, performance; 08/28/2018, 02:08
pm)
•
i.e. new products, product updates, $250 million for process innovation, increasing
recyclability of packaging
6. Philosophy: Values: Caring, Global Teamwork, Continuous Improvement (source:
https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values; 08/28/2018, 01:48 pm)
“As part of our initiative to make Colgate-Palmolive a leader in sustainability and innovation, we’ve designed a set of policies that ensures we stick to our promise. From the people we serve, to the performance of our products, and the impact we have on our environment, we are dedicated to doing the right thing, while making the lives of our consumers healthier.” (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/our-policies; 08/28/2018, 02:18 pm)
•
i.e. Ethics Line, Code of Conduct
7. Distinctive Competence: Colgate is listed as one of the 50 Best US Manufacturers (source:
https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/science-innovation; 08/28/2018,
02:18 pm)
The company cares about people: “Colgate-Palmolive people, customers, shareholders
and business partners. Colgate-Palmolive is committed to act with compassion, integrity,
honesty and high ethics in all situations, to listen with respect to others and to value differences. The Company is also committed to protect the global environment, to enhance
the communities where Colgate-Palmolive people live and work, and to be compliant with
government laws and regulations.” (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/enus/core-values, caring; 08/28/2018, 02:34 pm)
All Colgate people are part of a global team, committed to working together across countries and throughout the world. Only by sharing ideas, technologies and talents can the
Company achieve and sustain profitable growth. (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values, global teamwork; 08/28/2018; 02:31 pm)
Colgate-Palmolive is committed to getting better every day in all it does, as individuals and
as teams. By better understanding consumers’ and customers’ expectations and continuously working to innovate and improve products, services, and processes, Colgate-Palmolive will become the best. (source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values,
continuous improvement; 08/28/2018, 02:29 pm)
8. Concern for public image: “A cleaner, healthy environment is important to Colgate not
only because it’s the right thing to do, but also because it makes good business sense.”
(source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/sustainability, planet;
08/28/2018, 02:02 pm)
•
i.e. reducing manufacturing water, taking care for water around the world, taking
care for forests, promote using of renewable energy, reducing manufacturing energy, partner with key suppliers, customers and consumers to reduce energy,
greenhouse gas emissions and waste
•
i.e. reaching children with $1.3 billion, investing in the improvement of health, education and environment for people around the globe, partner with animal shelters, handwashing education for 60 million people annually
•
different community programs around the global
9. Concern for employees: “Colgate people, consumers, communities, business partners,
shareholders and other stakeholders are vital to Colgate’s success and future growth.”
(source: https://www.colgatepalmolive.com/en-us/core-values/sustainability, people;
08/28/2018, 02:04 pm)
•
i.e. improving employee health, reducing health risk, encourage healthier living for
Colgate people and their families, ensuring a safe and healthy work environment,
providing education and tools to Colgate people to elevate financial awareness and
planning
4. Proposed Mission Statement
Colgate Palmolive is a global (3) household and personal care products company (2) that is shaped
by a firm commitment to integrity and sustainability (5) due to its core values (6, 7) of care, global
teamwork and continuous improvement. Colgate cherishes its stakeholders, (1, 8, 9), works globally as team to share ideas, technologies (4) and talents, and constantly improves everything that
it does. (64 words)
(1) Customers
(2) Product or services
(3) Markets
(4) Technology
(5) Survival, growth and profitability
(6) Philosophy
(7) Self-Concept
(8) Public image
(9) Employees
5. External Factor Evaluation Matrix (EFE Matrix, EFEM)
Primary Implications from EFEM (Opportunities)
The EFEM for Colgate-Palmolive presents major opportunities for the company going into the
future. The brand value of Colgate is currently 2nd in the world and tooth paste, soap and cleaning
industries are growing immensely with even a huge expected increase of dentists in the dental
industry. Also, with over half of the rural Indian population without a dentist, this puts another
great opportunity at the forefront along with the expected massive growth of IP data for 2018 to
2021.
Primary Implications from EFEM (Threats)
The EFEM for Colgate-Palmolive also reveals major threats the company will soon face. One is
increased consumer awareness of dangerous chemicals in products, which poses a threat to the
company because some of its products contain a harmful chemical to the human body known as
triclosan. The company will even experience some heavy financial hits in the future due to the
rising cost of raw materials such as oil. Also, with difficult trading policies and politics with countries such as China, Europe and Russia with developing and emerging markets, Colgate-Palmolive’s expansion will be hindered greatly.
6. The Competitive
6.1 The Competitors
6.1.1 The Unilever company
The Unilever company originated in 1872 when Dutch merchant and industrialist, Antoon Jurgens,
founded the first margarine factory in Oss, Netherlands. Later in 1888, soap and margarine manufacturer, Samuel van den Bergh opened another margarine factory in Kleve, Germany. Both companies later merged in 1927 and became the “Margarine Unie”. However, in 1929 the company
later merged with soap company Lever & Co and became officially established as Unilever in 1930.
The company is headquartered in Rotterdam, Netherlands and focuses on selling products such
as food, beverages, and cleaning and personal care products in 190 countries with over 400
brands. Unilever values integrity, responsibility, respect and pioneering and has a mission to make
sustainable living commonplace.
Source: https://www.unilever.com/about/who-we-are/our-vision/; 09/03/2018, 11:25 pm
6.1.2 The P & G company
The Procter and Gamble Company was founded in 1837 in Cincinnati, Ohio by established English
candle maker, William Procter, and James Gamble, a soap maker from Ireland. The company focuses on selling house, cleaning and personal care products and operates in nearly 70 countries
around the globe with 65 brands intact. Procter and Gamble values integrity, leadership, ownership and a passion for winning and trust. The company also hopes to be recognized as the best
consumer products and services company in the world and strive to provide brands that make
everyday life easier by being sustainable and showing social responsibility for the environment,
population and animals.
Source: https://www.pg.com/translations/pvp_pdf/english_PVP.pdf ; 09/03/2018, 11:26pm
6.2 Competitive Profile Matrix (CPM)
P&G
Unilever
Colgate-Palmolive
Critical Success Factors
Product Variety
Weight
Rating
Score
Rating
Score
Rating
Score
0.17
2
0.34
3
0.51
4
0.68
Top Management
0.12
3
0.36
2
0.24
4
0.48
Advertising
0.10
3
0.30
2
0.20
4
0.40
Product Quality
0.10
2
0.20
4
0.40
3
0.30
Employee Dedication
0.09
4
0.36
3
0.27
2
0.18
Price Competitiveness
0.09
4
0.36
2
0.18
3
0.27
Domestic Market Penetration
0.08
4
0.32
2
0.16
3
0.24
Financial Profit
0.08
2
0.16
3
0.24
4
0.32
Customer Service
0.05
4
0.20
3
0.15
2
0.10
Market Share
International Market
Penetration
Customer Loyalty
0.05
2
0.10
3
0.15
4
0.20
0.04
2
0.08
4
0.16
3
0.12
0.03
3
0.09
2
0.06
4
0.12
Totals
1.00
2.87
2.72
3.41
Primary Implications from CPM
From viewing the competitive profile matrix, Colgate-Palmolive ranks the lowest out of its two
main competitors Unilever, and Proctor & Gamble in its total critical success factors. The company’s low-ranking stems from falling behind in penetrating the international market, weaker financial profit and lower product quality and variety. However, Colgate-Palmolive still dominates
its two competitors over market penetration domestically, customer service, employee dedication, and price competitiveness. The company even ranks evenly with its competitors in areas
such as top management, customer loyalty and market share.
7. The Financial Statement
7.1 Income Statement
Income Statement overview
From viewing Colgate Palmolive’s income statement, net income dropped by over $400 million
from 2016 to 2017. Revenues for the company increased but the cost of goods, operating, interest
and tax expenses went up along with it.
Note: The net income attributable to non-controlling interests is the difference between net income including non-controlling interests and the net income attributable to Colgate-Palmolive.
The attributable income is in the table above as “net income” designated.
Income Statement
Revenues
Cost of Goods Sold
Gross Profit
Operating Expenses
EBIT
Interest Expense
EBT
Tax
Non-Recurring Events
Net Income
31.12.2016
$15,195,000,000
6,072,000,000
9,123,000,000
5,286,000,000
3,837,000,000
99,000,000
3,738,000,000
1,152,000,000
(145,000,000)
2,441,000,000
31.12.2017
$15,454,000,000
6,174,000,000
9,280,000,000
5,691,000,000
3,589,000,000
102,000,000
3,487,000,000
1,313,000,000
(150,000,000)
2,024,000,000
Percent Change
2%
2%
2%
8%
-6%
3%
-7%
14%
3%
-17%
7.2 Balance Sheet
Balance sheet overview
Colgate Palmolive’s total assets experience major increase by over $500 million from 2016 to
2017. Every asset category seemed to grow expect for the company’s current assets and longterm assets which took a drop. As for the company’s liabilities, it also experienced an increase of
over $300 million during the time period with accounts payable, current liabilities, long term debt
and other long-term liabilities contributing to the increase. Last is Colgate Palmolive’s equity
which increased by over $200 million due to the rise in retained earnings, larger purchases of
treasury stock and smaller purchases of capital.
Balance Sheet
31.12.2016
Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $1,315,000,000
Accounts Receivable
1,411,000,000
Inventory
1,171,000,000
Other Current Assets
441,000,000
Total Current Assets
4,338,000,000
Property Plant & Equipment
3,840,000,000
Goodwill
2,107,000,000
Intangibles
1,313,000,000
Other Long-Term Assets
525,000,000
Total Assets
12,123,000,000
31.12.2017
Percent Change
$1,535,000,000
1,480,000,000
1,221,000,000
403,000,000
4,639,000,000
4,072,000,000
2,218,000,000
1,341,000,000
406,000,000
12,676,000,000
17%
5%
4%
-9%
7%
6%
5%
2%
-23%
5%
Liabilities
Accounts Payable
Other Current Liabilities
Total Current Liabilities
Long-Term Debt
Other Long-Term Liabilities
Total Liabilities
1,124,000,000
2,181,000,000
3,305,000,000
6,520,000,000
2,281,000,000
12,106,000,000
1,212,000,000
2,196,000,000
3,408,000,000
6,566,000,000
2,459,000,000
12,433,000,000
8%
1%
3%
1%
8%
3%
Equity
Common Stock
Retained Earnings
Treasury Stock
Paid in Capital & Other
Total Equity
1,466,000,000
19,922,000,000
(19,135,000,000)
(2,236,000,000)
17,000,000
1,466,000,000
20,531,000,000
(20,181,000,000)
(1,573,000,000)
243,000,000
0%
3%
5%
-30%
1329%
Total Liabilities and Equity
12,123,000,000
12,676,000,000
5%
8. Historical Ratios
Historical Ratios overview
Colgate Palmolive seems to be in a good position in paying its current and short-term liabilities
from the growth in its current and quick ratio between 2016 and 2017. The company also had a
decrease in its Total Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio and Total Debt-to-Equity Ratio between the years
to further prove its ability to meet its obligations since it is using less debt and credit to finance
its assets and growth. However, there should be worry for the company in being able to handle
its interest payments from looking at the decrease of its Times-Interest-Earned Ratio. Not only
that, but the drop in Colgate Palmolive’s assets and receivable turnover, reveals that sales are
dropping, inventory is becoming excess and that the company is taking longer in collecting its
credit, which is also shown by the increase of the company’s average collection period. Gross
profit margin has not changed much although, operating profit margin has decreased quite a bit
along with the company’s return on assets and equity revealing the company has not been doing
a good job of generating profit.
Current Ratio
Quick Ratio
Total Debt-to-Total-Assets Ratio
Total Debt-to-Equity Ratio
Times-Interest-Earned Ratio
Inventory Turnover
Fixed Assets Turnover
Total Assets Turnover
Accounts Receivable Turnover
Average Collection Period
Gross Profit Margin %
Operating Profit Margin %
ROA %
ROE %
Historical Ratios
31.12.2016
31.12.2017
1.31
1.36
0.96
1.00
1.00
0.98
712.12
51.16
39
35
5.19
5.06
3.96
3.80
1.25
1.22
10.76895819
10
33.89
34.96
60%
60%
25%
23%
20%
16%
14359%
833%
9. Internal Factor Evaluation Matrix (IFE Matrix, IFEM)
Strengths
Weight
Rating
Weighted Score
1 Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year increased between
2015 and 2017 by 58%.
0.10
4
0.40
2 The total goodwill of the company grew from 2016 to 2017 by
$111 million.
0.07
4
0.28
3 Since its inception in 1991, the Colgate “Bright Smiles, Bright
Futures®” oral health education program has reached over 950
million children in 80 countries, thereof over 50 million in 2017.
0.07
4
0.28
4 Colgate-Palmolive won many awards for sustainability, social
responsibility, diversity, innovation and workplace balance in
2018.
0.06
4
0.24
5 Net sales increased in Latin America between 2016 and 2017 by
6.5%.
0.06
4
0.24
6 2017: Colgate reduced their water consumption by 47% and its
green gas emission by approximately 28% compared to 2002.
0.04
3
0.12
7 78% of packages from Colgate is recyclable and 41% come from
recycled materials.
0.03
2
0.06
8 In the last five years over 60% of the Colgate employees have
participated at the company’s Global Healthy Activity Challenge.
0.03
2
0.06
9 The worldwide net sales volume increased between 2016 and
2017 by approximately 0.5%.
0.03
2
0.06
0.01
1
0.01
10 Since 2002, Hill’s Pet Nutrition has helped over nine million
animals find a forever home.
Primary Implications from IFEM (Strengths)
Major internal strengths for Colgate Palmolive has been its increase in liquidity by its cash and
cash equivalents going up 58% and the increase of its goodwill by $111 million, which has raised
its value greatly. The company has even received a major increase in its net sales by 6.8% in Latin
America. Also, from seeing how Colgate has been gaining public recognition with awards for activities similar to establishing successful programs like its “Bright Smiles, Bright Futures”, taking
care of the environment by reducing its water consumptions and its green gas emission, increasing employee participation, it provides evidence that Colgate has been enforcing its cultural values which presents another internal strength for the company.
Weaknesses
Weight
Rating
Weighted Score
0.08
4
0.32
0.06
4
0.24
0.06
3
0.18
4 Net cash used in investing activities decreased from 2015 to 2017
by approximately 31%.
0.07
3
0.21
5 Net sales in North America decreased between 2016 and 2017 by
2.0%.
0.05
3
0.15
6 Operating profit in Asia Pacific decreased by $887 million to
$841 million from 2016 to 2017.
0.04
3
0.12
7 The organic sales for Europe decreased in the second quarter of
2018 by 1.0%.
0.04
1
0.04
8 The operating profit of Hill’s Pet Nutrition decreased in the
second quarter of 2018 by 2.0% to $165 million.
0.04
2
0.08
9 For the last five years, there was no change in the global sales
distribution for oral care, personal care, home care and pet
nutrition.
0.03
1
0.03
0.03
1
0.03
1 Net cash provided by operations fell by $87 million from 2016 to
2017.
2 Number of employees fell from 2010 to 2017 by 3300 employees.
3 The value of the treasury stock fell from -$18102 million in
December 2015 to -$20181 million in December 2017.
10 In Asia Pacific, the unit volume decreased by 1.0% in the second
quarter of 2018.
Total IFE Score
1.00
3.15
Primary Implications from IFEM (Weaknesses)
Internal weaknesses for Colgate Palmolive have been major fall offs in net cash being provided
from operations by $87 million and fewer net cash being used for investing activities with a decrease of 31%. The company’s treasury stock has also dropped by $19 million and the company
has had a 3,300 decrease in employees from 2010-2017. Not only that, but sales and operating
profits in North America, Asia Pacific and Europe have been decreasing with North America experiencing a drop-in net sale by 2.0% and Asia Pacific having a fall of in operating profit by $46 million
from 2016-2017. Even the sales for Europe and its profit of the Hill’s Pet Nutrition brand decreased in the second quarter of 2018 by 1.0% and 2.0%.
10.
Strategy Analysis
10.1. Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats Matrix (SWOT)
This matrix shows possible strategies for the company. Condition was a comprehensive analysis
of internal and external factors and their influence on the company.
SO Strategies
1 Partner with Indian Oral Care organizations such as Indian Dental Association and
HealthyMouth, HealthyBody to spread awareness of oral health and care in rural
Indian markets. (S1, O4)
2 Maintain the project “Bright Smiles, Bright Futures®” in 80 countries and expand it to
20 other countries by 2020 to raise social intelligence as well as oral health
behavior. (S3, O8)
3 Hire a Chief Data Officer (CDO) to assist in managing company data. (S4, O6)
ST Strategies
1 Invest $15M in research and development for elimination of Triclosan from the
Colgate toothpaste. (S4, T1)
2 Continue implementing programs for reduction in oil consumption, reducing oil
consumption by 10% by 2024. (S4, S6, T2)
3 Continue to enforce the Supplier diversity program to maintain long lasting relations
with suppliers. (S4, T8)
4 Maintain and drive customer loyalty by continuing the use of combined marketing
communication tools across mixed media such as informative websites, promotional
events, and media containing consumer testimonials to connect with customers. (S3,
S4, S10, T5)
WO Strategies
1 Offer training courses for employees to keep them in the topic of digitalization
updated. (W2, O6)
2 Increase research and development spending of soap and cleaning products by $35M
and also increase marketing and sales by 3%. (W9, O5, O7)
3 Increase marketing and sales of pet food by 10% each in the United States. (W8, O9)
4 Create an incentive plan in the employee retention program that offers employees
pay bonuses for completing quarterly goals. (W2, O4, O7)
WT Strategies
1 Negotiate with Chinese dental service organizations such as Arrail Dental, Bybo
Dental Group, or TC medical to form a partnership in order to penetrate the Chinese
dental market. (W6, W10, T3, T10)
2 Invest 10% into marketing and sales for emerging markets (China, India, Central and
Eastern Europe). (W9, T10)
3 Increase marketing for organic products in Europe by 3%. (W7, T4)
10.2 Boston Consulting Group Matrix (BCG)
Relative Market Share Position
High 1.0
Low 0.0
Question Marks
Stars
Industry Sales Growth Rate
High 0.20
2
1
4
5
3
Low -0.20
Cash Cows
Legend:
1 Orange:
2 Red:
3 Green:
4 Purple:
5 Blue:
Dogs
Oral, Personal and Home Care North America (OPHC NA)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Latin America (OPHC LA)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Europe (OPHC EU)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Asia Pacific, Africa, Eurasia (OPHC APAEA)
Hill’s Pet Nutrition (HPN)
Data Table:
Division
Oral, Personal and Home Care North America
Oral, Personal and Home Care Latin America
Oral, Personal and Home Care Europe
Oral, Personal and Home Care Asia Pacific, Africa, Eurasia
Hill’s Pet Nutrition
Your Firm’s
Division
Revenues
Top Firm in
Industry
Division
Revenues
$3,117,000,000 $29,392,000,000
$3,887,000,000 $4,676,000,000
$2,394,000,000 $16,032,000,000
$3,764,000,000 $16,700,000,000
$2,292,000,000 $17,224,400,000
Industry
Sales
Growth
Rate
Relative
Market
Share
Position
2%
4%
1%
5%
5%
0.10604927
0.83126604
0.14932635
0.22538922
0.13306704
Note:
Main competitor in all regions, except Hill’s Pet Nutrition, is Procter & Gamble with more brands
and therefore, higher sales. Hill’s Pet Nutrition is also just a small part of Colgate-Palmolive and
not as much developed as pet nutrition at Mars Petcare, Inc. Therefore, Colgate-Palmolive should
concentrate more on market penetration, especially in Latin America and maintain a strong market position there. However, for the regions North America, Europe, Asia Pacific, Africa and Eurasia as well as for Hill’s Pet Nutrition Colgate-Palmolive has to decide if they want to strengthen
their presence in these regions or retreat from there.
10.3 Internal-External Matrix (IE)
10.3.1 Internal-External Matrix by product segments
THE IFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
Strong
4.0
Weak
1.0
THE EFE WEIGHTED SCORES
High
4.0
4
1
2
3
Low
1.0
Legend:
1 Red:
2 Green:
3 Purple:
4 Blue:
Oral Care
Personal Care
Home Care
Hill’s Pet Nutrition
Data Table:
Division
Percent of
Estimated Estimated
Firm’s Division
IFE Score EFE Score
Revenues
Oral Care $6,317,760,000
Personal Care $2,500,780,000
Home Care $2,369,160,000
Hill’s Pet Nutrition $2,292,000,000
3.7
3.1
2.8
2.3
2.5
2.3
2.4
3.5
Note:
Oral Care, Personal Care, Hill’s Pet Nutrition in region 1: The strategy is to grow and build in an
intensive and integrative way, using market penetration, market development, product development as well as backward, forward, and horizontal integration. So, Colgate-Palmolive should concentrate in getting a higher market share in these product segments as well as being more present
on the market and improving their current products. However, for horizontal integration, ColgatePalmolive should expand to more international markets, buy new production plants to increase
its capacity and also begin to produce products without the use of its brand name. An example of
this is from the company Aldi, which has its own house brand, but products such as its toothpaste
have to be produced and Colgate-Palmolive could be the producer for the company.
Home Care in region 2: Colgate-Palmolive should use hold and maintain strategies like market
penetration and product development. Thus, the Home Care products of Colgate-Palmolive
should be more present on the market.
10.3.2 Internal-External Matrix by region
THE IFE TOTAL WEIGHTED SCORES
Strong
4.0
Weak
1.0
THE EFE WEIGHTED SCORES
High
4.0
5
4
3
1
2
Low
1.0
Legend:
1 Red:
2 Green:
3 Purple:
4 Blue:
5 Orange:
Oral, Personal and Home Care North America (OPHC NA)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Latin America (OPHC LA)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Europe (OPHC EU)
Oral, Personal and Home Care Asia Pacific, Africa, Eurasia (OPHC APAEA)
Hill’s Pet Nutrition (HPN)
Data Table:
Percent of
Estimated Estimated
Firm’s Division
IFE Score EFE Score
Revenues
Division
OPHC NA $3,117,000,000
OPHC LA $3,887,000,000
OPHC EU $2,394,000,000
OPHC A
PLEASE AVOID plagiarism ALL ANSWERS MUST BE WITH YOUR OWN WORDS. REQUIRED ARE BELOW
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3:Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Discussion 1Provide a recommendation on the best ways to attract qualified candidates. You might begin with an example organization. Then, provide strategies that organization could use to find and attract the best and brightest to fulfill their vacancies.Discussion 2Recruitment is not the only activity that affects an organization’s ability to attract applicants. What are some of the other important factors (both internal and external to the organization) that impact the recruitment function? In your initial response, identify at least three factors and their potential impact on the organization.
Assignment 3: Analyze the Measures of Central Tendency and the Measures of Variability
Hide Folder Information
Instructions
This assignment includes four variables that indicate the students’ performances on an SPSS exam. You will find the information in the SPSS file named SPSSExam.sav. The four variables measured were:
exam (first-year SPSS exam score as a percentage)
computer (measure of computer literacy as a percentage)
lecture (percentage of SPSS lectures attended)
numeracy (a measure of numerical ability out of 15)
In the data, there is a variable called Uni. This variable indicates the university the students attended. The four universities are World University, Universe University, Planet University, and Cosmos University.
The goal of this assignment is to explore the concepts related to central tendency and variability for both categorical and continuous variables. Furthermore, another goal is for you to explore the various tools for data analysis in the SPSS software.
Split the file by gender. Calculate the mean and standard deviation of exam and lectures for males and females. Hint: use Explore found under the ANALYSIS => Descriptive tabs, exam and lectures will be the dependent variable and sex will be the factor.
Compute the mean, median, and mode for computer (computer literacy).
What value is the most representative measure of the central tendency for this variable and why?
Calculate the range and the standard deviation for computer (computer literacy).
What does the range tell you about the data?
What does the standard deviation tell you about the data?
Create a frequency distribution table and a graph for Uni (university).
What is the most appropriate measure of central tendency?
Please provide a rationale for why you selected this measure of central tendency for this variable.
Remember that there are additional resources available in the Supplemental Resources under Course Resources from the course home page.
Length: There is not a set number of pages required for this assignment. All questions in the assignment need to be answered. In addition to the answers to the assignment questions, also submit the output (.spv) file. (Note. SPSS automatically generates the .spv file as you work in SPSS. When you close your SPSS main window, SPSS will ask you if you want to save the output file. Click ‘yes’, then save to your computer and upload with your assignment.)
References: No references are required, though any sources used other than those provided within the assignment should be cited and referenced in APA format
Your answers should demonstrate thoughtful consideration of the ideas and concepts presented in the course and provide new thoughts and insights relating directly to this topic. Your response should reflect scholarly writing and current APA standards. Be sure to adhere to National University’s Academic Integrity Policy.
Upload your document and click the Submit to Dropbox button.
will attach more info to be helpful also add referncesi will also be adding powerpoint doc which is include in the assignment
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Student Name
Cohort
Unit Code/s & Name/s
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales – SHBXPSM003/SHBXPSM002
Assessment Name
Task 4 – Salon training session
Assessment Task
No.
4
ASSESSMENT REQUIREMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS
Description of Task:
This is a group activity. Your educator will allocate you into groups of 2-3 people to conduct a salon training
session of 15 to 30 minutes covering the following elements:
● Plan, allocate and maintain adequate resources and stock for optimum sales and service
● What to do if stock is low or run out
● How to ensure treatment products are used responsibly to ensure waste minimisation for profitability
and environmental sustainability.
● Demonstrate product quantities to ensure understanding
● Effects on staff and clients when products are not available
● Share a resource that will prompt staff to remember to practise sustainability
A slide show template is provided in Stella to add your information. Use the slides when presenting your
information to the salon team.
You must gather evidence of participation from your team mates (at least two) on your record of participation
form
This assessment task has been designed to inform the assessor of your knowledge level. Based on this
assessment task, a judgement can be made on whether you have achieved a satisfactory level, or if further
review of this unit is necessary for the parts you have not answered satisfactory.
Instructions to Students:
●
●
●
●
●
There are two files that must be submitted for this assessment task 1. This completed task sheet
2. Your google slide file
In addition to the above two submissions, you must upload your record of participation (minimum 2) to
the module “Provide work skill instruction” – Observation three.
You can re-submit your presentation responses once after receiving feedback from your assessor on
the unsatisfactory elements
Written and verbal feedback will be provided within 10 working days from the submission date unless
otherwise specified by your assessor
You are required to submit your assessment on, or before the due date as advised by your assessor and
written in your own words.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 4 – Training session
Your role responsibilities as Salon Manager of Le Bar a Beaute is to train all staff on how to
reduce wastage of products to ensure profitability of the salon and to practise sustainability.
The training covers a considerable amount of information so you have decided to create a
powerpoint presentation that covers the key points of your training session.
Part 1 – Research and write your script
Research each of the topics listed below and write a script to train and inform your assistant
salon managers.
1. How you ensure there is enough stock on hand to perform services in the salon.
2. What should staff do if stock is low or has run out? What can they do in the scope of
their job role?
3. Ways all staff can ensure they use products responsibly and sustainably.
4. Explain how you will demonstrate how to measure out products for one treatment
service.
5. Effects on staff and clients when products are not available.
6. Share a resource that will prompt staff to remember to practise sustainability (you
may use the poster you have created in the unit Develop Workplace Policies and
Procedures for Sustainability or create a new one if the unit has not been
completed).
Part 2 – Create your presentation
Use the google slides template provided and add your information to each slide. Remember
to make your text brief on the page.
Use bullets or short sentences, and try to keep each to one line. You want your audience to
listen to you present your information, rather than read the screen.
Use graphics to help tell your story. Don’t overwhelm your audience by adding too many
graphics to a slide, however.
To earn and maintain the respect of your audience, always check the spelling and grammar
in your presentation.
You may add more slides as required but do not remove any slides.
Required slides:
Overview of training session – What will be covered.
What is expected of the viewers – How long the session is, can they take a break, complete
the participation form at the end of the session.
How you ensure there is enough stock on hand to perform services in the salon.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 4 – Training session
What should staff do if stock is low or has run out?
Ways all staff can ensure they use products responsibly and sustainably.
Explain how you will demonstrate how to measure out products for one treatment service.
Effects on staff and clients when products are not available.
Share a resource that will prompt staff to remember to practise sustainability (you may use
the poster you have created in the unit Develop Workplace Policies and Procedures for
Sustainability or create a new one if the unit has not been completed).
Part 3 – Present your training
1. Delivery your training session to the salon team. Ensure each member of your team
is participating in the presentation. Your presentation must go for a minimum of 15
minutes and maximum 30 minutes. You may need to practise several times to ensure
your presentation has the appropriate pace and meets the time limitations.
2. At the end of the training session, record the names of all participants.
END OF ASSESSMENT
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 4 – Training session
Le Bar A Beaute – Marketing Plan
Complete all sections with red text. Ensure you change the text to black before submission.
Business Profile and Objectives:
La Bar A Beaute aims to become the premier beauty salon in the area, offering luxurious and personalised
beauty treatments in a serene environment. This marketing plan outlines our strategies to enhance brand
visibility, attract a wider clientele, and increase sales in the upcoming year. Our objectives include
strengthening customer loyalty, launching new products and services, and maximising our online presence.
Vision Statement:
“Our vision is to be the premier beauty salon in our community, known for providing exceptional services,
creating a warm and welcoming atmosphere, and fostering a culture of beauty and wellness for all.”
Mission Statement:
Our mission is to provide a welcoming and comfortable atmosphere where our customers can escape the
stress of daily life and enjoy a little pampering. We believe that everyone deserves to feel confident and
beautiful, and we are committed to making that a reality for each and every one of our clients.
Products and Services Range and Product Mix:
La Bar A Beaute offers a range of beauty treatments, including:
List the additional products and services the salon is planning on introducing include price, description and
time of service.
Market Analysis:
Industry Overview: The beauty and aesthetics industry is thriving, with a growing demand for premium beauty
services and products. La Bar A Beaute’s reputation for excellence positions us as a leading choice for
discerning clients seeking luxurious experiences.
Target Audience: Our primary target audience includes professionals aged 18-60 who appreciate premium
beauty and skincare treatments. We also cater to individuals seeking aesthetic enhancements and self-care
indulgence.
Customer Demographics:
Age Range:
● 18 – 25: Young adults and college students seeking various beauty treatments to target skin
concerns
● 26 – 40: Professionals and working individuals looking for skincare treatments, anti-aging
solutions, and relaxation.
●
41 – 60: Mature clients interested in specialised skincare services, holistic wellness treatments,
and beauty enhancements.
Gender:
● Primarily female clients, with a growing number of male clients seeking grooming and skincare
services.
Income Level:
● Varied income levels, including middle to upper-middle-income clients who are willing to invest
in quality beauty treatments and products.
Occupation:
● Diverse range of occupations, including office professionals, entrepreneurs, students, and
homemakers.
Lifestyle:
● Students: Seeking low cost treatments that target enhance natural beauty.
● Busy Professionals: Seeking efficient treatments during lunch breaks or after work to maintain
their appearance.
● Beauty Enthusiasts: Clients interested in staying updated with the latest beauty trends and
trying new treatments.
● Wellness Enthusiasts: Seeking holistic beauty treatments that target both internal and external
health and wellbeing.
Preferences:
● Skincare Enthusiasts: Clients interested in in-depth skincare routines, anti-aging treatments,
and personalised consultations.
● Wellness and Relaxation Seekers: Clients looking for relaxing spa experiences, massages, and
stress-relief treatments.
Location:
Primarily local residents within the salon’s vicinity, along with occasional tourists seeking beauty
treatments during their visit.
Analysis of Client Groups and Target Group Selection:
Identifiy and list the four main client groups from the demographics presented above and explain the target
group/s the salon will target in their marketing efforts.
Competitive Analysis: While facing competition from other high-end salons, our unique strengths lie in our
skilled team, premium product partnerships, and personalised services.
SWOT Analysis:
Strengths:
Weaknesses:
● Limited online presence and engagement
● Experienced and dedicated team of beauty
professionals
● Strong partnerships with renowned beauty
brands
● Established reputation for exceptional
treatments
● High-quality customer service
Opportunities:
● Growing trend towards organic and
sustainable beauty products
● Expansion into holistic wellness services
● Collaborations with beauty influencers
● Underutilisation of social media platforms
● Need to diversify service offerings
Threats:
● Intense competition in the premium beauty
segment
● Economic fluctuations impacting consumer
spending
● Negative online reviews affecting brand
perception
Marketing Objectives:
1. Achieve a 10% growth in overall revenue within a year.
Add specific marketing objectives relevant to the introduction of the new services and products. Ensure these
objectives are written following the SMART format – Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant and Time
Bound. Objectives should include what you want to achieve, how you will achieve it and when you expect to
achieve it.
Include at least one objective for each new treatment and one objective for each new product.
Marketing Strategies:
List the types of marketing strategies you will focus on to achieve the marketing objectives based on the client
groups identified.
Budget and Resource Allocation:
● Digital marketing and advertising: 40%
● Product and service development: 20%
● Customer loyalty programs: 15%
● Website and social media management: 15%
● Collaborations and influencer partnerships: 10%
Action Plan:
Outline the implementation plan to achieve the objectives. Answer the following questions:
● How long will the marketing campaign run for?
● What specific marketing activities will be implemented?
● Who will be responsible for the implementation of the marketing campaign?
Performance Metrics:
Outline what performance metrics you will use to measure the effectiveness of the marketing campaign.
Monitoring and Reporting:
Outline what strategies you will implement to monitor the effectiveness of the marketing campaign and how
you plan to obtain customer feedback about the new treatments and products?
Student Name
Cohort
Unit Code/s & Name/s
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales – SHBXPSM003/SHBXPSM002
Assessment Name
Task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Task
No.
2
ASSESSMENT REQUIREMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS
Description of Task:
Your task is to work on defining sales targets and objectives for the upcoming month at La Bar A Beaute.
Consider the unique strengths and attributes of each employee while developing these targets. In addition,
you’ll need to propose a motivating staff incentive scheme that aligns with the sales targets and encourages
exceptional performance.
Background Information: La Bar A Beaute
La Bar A Beaute is a high-end salon specialising in beauty and aesthetics services. The salon is renowned for its
exceptional treatments and products, catering to a diverse clientele seeking premium experiences. As the salon
manager, you oversee a dedicated team of professionals who contribute to the salon’s success.
Practical Examples:
● Pricing and Profit Margin: Calculate the selling price for new products and services offered at La Bar A
Beaute, factoring in hourly expenses, treatment time, and profit margin objectives.
● Resource Allocation: Allocate staff members to various beauty treatments based on their expertise and
availability to maximise client satisfaction and efficient service delivery.
● Sales Performance Analysis: Analyse the sales performance of employees over the past month,
calculate their target achievement percentages, and provide constructive feedback to each employee.
● Incentive Scheme Development: Design a staff incentive scheme that rewards exceptional sales
performance while considering the individual roles and capabilities of employees.
This assessment aims to evaluate your ability to apply your knowledge of business objectives, pricing strategies,
resource allocation, and staff management within the context of La Bar A Beaute. Your thoughtful analysis and
decisions will contribute to the salon’s success and growth.
Instructions to Students:
●
●
●
You can re-submit your assessment responses once after receiving feedback from your assessor on the
unsatisfactory elements
Written and verbal feedback will be provided within 10 working days from the submission date unless
otherwise specified by your assessor
You are required to submit your assessment on, or before the due date as advised by your assessor and
written in your own words.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Assessment Instruction: Salon Management Performance Evaluation
As the manager of La Bar A Beaute Salon the owner has asked you to help them introduce
two new products and services to the salons treatment menu. The business conducted
informal customer polls to determine the most requested treatments and have received the
following results:
Based on the results you and the owner have outlined the new services and products below:
Service
Product
Lash Tint
i-Revive Lash Growth Serum
Omnilux LED
Biologi Hydrating Serum
Hydrafacial
Vida Glow Collagen Drink
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
You must price the new services and products ensuring the pricing accounts for hourly
expenses, treatment time and target profit margin.
You have been provided with information from the owner regarding the cost of delivering
these proposed products and services and the target profit margin the business would like
to achieve.
Service/
Product
Time
Associated Costs
Lash Tint
30 mins Product Cost: $5 (Lash tint solution and developer)
Labour Cost: $10 (Therapist average wage – 30 mins)
Equipment and Supplies: $2 (Dish and brush)
Consumables: $1 (Cotton pads/tips, tissues)
Utilities: $0.50 (Lighting and Water)
Subtotal Cost: $18.50
Target
Profit
Margin
35%
Plus Overheads: $3.70 (20% of subtotal)
Total Cost: $22.20
Omnilux LED 45 mins Product Cost: $2 (Cleansing product)
Labour Cost: $15 (Therapist average wage – 45 mins)
Equipment and Supplies: $5 (Disposable goggles)
Consumables: $1 (Cotton pads/tips, tissues)
Utilities: $0.50 (Lighting and Water)
Subtotal Cost: $23.50
75%
Plus Overheads: $4.70 (20% of subtotal)
Total Cost: $28.20
Hydrafacial
45 mins Product Cost: $5 (Cleansing product)
Labour Cost: $15 (Therapist average wage – 45 mins)
Equipment and Supplies: $5 (Machine hire)
Consumables: $1 (Cotton pads/tips, tissues)
Utilities: $0.50 (Lighting and Water)
Subtotal Cost: $26.50
250%
Plus Overheads: $5.30 (20% of subtotal)
Total Cost: $31.80
i-Revive
N/A
Lash Growth
Serum
$35
100%
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Biologi
Hydrating
Serum
N/A
$55
100%
Vida Glow
Collagen
Add On
N/A
$1 per sachet
500%
Q1. Based on the information above, how much will you price the new services and
products?
Service/Product
Cost (Rounded)
Lash Tint
Omnilux LED
Hydrafacial
Lash Growth Serum
Hydrating Serum
Vida Glow Collagen
Q2. The owners would like to see an increase in average client bills and therapist sales.
What are some strategies that you could implement to increase the total amount of
products and services being sold and maximise total profit?
Q3. The owner has specified that they would like to see the average client bills increase to a
minimum of $100 including the purchase of at least one product and one service.
How would you promote and cross/upsell the new services and products to achieve this?
Service
Accompanying Product
Total Client Bill $
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Resource Allocation and Profitability
With the introduction of the new treatments and products to La Bar A Beaute you must
allocate your resources to efficiently deliver the new services.
You currently have two employees available who are skilled and capable of delivering the
new services:
Employee Profiles:
Emma Thompson: Emma is a full-time senior beauty therapist at La Bar A Beaute.
She is 32 years old and has 10 years of experience in the industry. Emma is known
for her expertise in advanced facials and skincare treatments and has a loyal client
base. Emma works 38 hours per week across Monday – Saturday.
Olivia Lee: Olivia is a part-time junior therapist at the salon. She is 18 years old and
completed her beauty therapy diploma within the last 12 months. Olivia is
enthusiastic and eager to learn, focusing primarily on waxing, facials and lash and
brow services. Olivia works 30 hours a week Tuesday – Saturday.
Your business operates for 8 hours each day. Both staff members must have breaks
throughout the day.
Q4. Access the Hair and Beauty Award to determine each therapist’s hourly rate and what
the minimum break requirements are.
Employee
Status
Hours
Worked
Emma
Thompson
Full Time
– Level 6
8am-4pm
= 7.25
hours
Olivia Lee
Part Time
– Beauty
Therapy
Graduate
9am-4pm
= 6.25
hours
Minimum
Hourly
Rate
Daily
Wage
Unpaid
Meal Break
45 mins
Paid Rest
Break
10 mins
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Q5. Determine the optimal allocation of staff members to each treatment type to maximise
client services while considering treatment times and available resources.
Treatment
Equipment Availability
Treatment Time
Hydrafacial
1 Machine
45 mins
Omnilux
1 Machine
45 mins
Lash Tint
Multiple Tints and Products
30 mins
Therapist’s must allow 15 minutes between each service to reset rooms and consult with
clients on retail products.
Olivia has 4 x Lash Tints and 3 x Omnilux Treatments booked
Emma has 2 x Lash Tints and 5 x Hydrafacial Treatments booked
Time
Treatment Room 1 – Olivia
8:00 – 8:30am
OFF
8:30- 9:00am
OFF
Treatment Room 2 – Emma
9:00-9:30am
9:30-10:00am
10:00-10:30am
10:30-11:00am
11:00-11:30am
11:30-12:00pm
12:00-12:30 pm
12:30-1:00pm
1:00-1:30pm
1:30-2:00pm
2:00-2:30pm
2:30-3:00pm
3:00-3:30pm
3:30-4:00pm
ROOM RESET – 15 MINS
SALON CLEAN AND TIDY
ROOM RESET – 15 MINS
SALON CLEAN AND TIDY
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Q6. Based on the allocation of resources and services performed above forecast the
projected gross service profits for the day in the salon:
Employee
Lash Tint – $30
Omnilux $50
Olivia
4
3
Emma
2
Hydrafacial – Total Gross
$112
Service Profit
5
Q7. Based on the allocation of resources and services performed above forecast the
potential gross products sales profits for the day in the salon:
Employee
i-Revive Lash
Growth Serum$70
Biologi
Luminosity
Serum – $110
Vida Glow
Collagen
Drink – $5
Olivia
4
3
7
Emma
2
5
7
Potential Gross
Product Sales
Profit
Staff Sales Targets and Incentives
Q8. Based on the potential figures calculated for each employee above, determine and
present staff retail product sales targets for Emma and Olivia over a one-month period.
Develop a clear table showcasing these targets.
Calculation Hint:
Divide the “total hours worked per week (38)” by the “number of hours worked per day
(7.25)” and times by “potential gross product sales profit ($?)” = Weekly Sales Target.
Staff
Member
Week 1
Product
Sales Target
($)
Week 2
Product
Sales Target
($)
Week 3
Product
Sales Target
($)
Week 4
Product
Sales Target
($)
Monthly
Retail
Product
Sales Target
($)
Emma
Thompson
Olivia Lee
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Q9. Monitor the sales data and performance of Emma and Olivia over a week. Use the sales
reports to analyse the performance of Emma and Olivia. Calculate their achieved sales as a
percentage of their targets.
Sales Report: Emma Thompson and Olivia Lee
Date Range: July 1st – July 7th, 2023
Staff Member
Total Sales
Emma Thompson
$2175.17
Olivia Lee
$936
Week 1 Product
Sales Target ($)
Achievement (%)
Identify areas where improvements can be made and suggest strategies to enhance their
sales approach to reach the salon target of 80% retailing.
Staff Member
Feedback
Emma Thompson
Olivia Lee
Q10. Create a staff incentive scheme for La Bar A Beaute that encourages increased sales of
specific products and services. Ensure the scheme is aligned with the salon’s turnover and
profit objectives.
Monthly Sales Performance Analysis
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Staff Member
Total Sales ($)
Emma Thompson
$13732.41
Olivia Lee
$10272
Target Sales ($)
Achievement (%)
Q11. After the implementation of the incentive program and suggested strategies from
feedback assess Emma and Olivia’s sales performance for the past month and give feedback
where improvements have been made.
END OF ASSESSMENT
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 2 – Budgeting for Profitability
Assessment Template
Student Name
Cohort
Unit Code/s & Name/s
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales – SHBXPSM003/SHBXPSM002
Assessment Name
Task 3 – Marketing Strategy
Assessment Task
No.
3
ASSESSMENT REQUIREMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS
Description of Task:
The owner of La Bar A Beaute has made the decision to implement three new treatments/services and products
into the salon. You have assisted them in pricing these services in the Budgeting for Profitability task and have
now been asked by the salon marketing team to assist with developing marketing strategies to promote these
new services and products.
You will assist the marketing team develop an updated marketing plan by analysing the businesses objectives,
key products and services and customer demographics to produce specific marketing objectives and strategies
that align with the target market to increase sales.
You will need to plan, implement and monitor promotional activities and evaluate the effectiveness of these
activities based on the data provided and recommend new targets based on performance.
This assessment task has been designed to inform the assessor of your knowledge level. Based on this
assessment task, a judgement can be made on whether you have achieved a satisfactory level, or if further
review of this unit is necessary for the parts you have not answered satisfactory.
Instructions to Students:
●
●
●
There are two files that must be submitted for this assessment task 1. This completed task sheet
2. Updated Marketing Plan Template
Written and verbal feedback will be provided within 10 working days from the submission date unless
otherwise specified by your assessor
You are required to submit your assessment on, or before the due date as advised by your assessor and
written in your own words.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
PART 1: The salon marketing team has shared the salons current marketing plan with you.
You need to review and make recommendations of areas that need to be improved and
updated based on the introduction of the three new treatments and products.
Download the Marketing Plan Template provided and complete the areas that require
additional information and upload with this assessment.
PART 2: Based on the four target groups identified in the marketing plan determine the
marketing mix for each of the new products and services:
Product/Service
Product
Price
Place
Promotion
Omnilux LED
Lash Tint
Hydrafacial
Lash Growth
Serum
Vida Glow
Collagen Drink
Biologi Hydrating
Serum
Understanding the range of marketing strategies and promotional activities, along with their
associated benefits and risks, is crucial for businesses to effectively engage their target
audience, adapt to changing trends, and transform potential threats into new opportunities.
Provide an overview of at least three marketing strategies including traditional, new, and
emerging promotional methods, detailing their purposes, benefits and challenges.
Marketing Strategy
Benefits
Challenges
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
PART 3: Roles and Responsibilities
Who is responsible for the implementation of the marketing campaigns identified in the
marketing plan?
Access the relevant job description from the Salon Intranet and outline five of the key roles
and responsibilities of this employee:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
PART 4: Develop and Implement Promotional Activities
Product/
Service
Promotional
Activity
Frequency
Platform
Person
Responsible
Omnilux LED
Lash Tint
Hydrafacial
Lash Growth Serum
Vida Glow Collagen
Drink
Biologi Hydrating
Serum
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
Budget
Target Audience
Measure
PART 5: Monitor, Evaluate and Improve Marketing Activities
At the completion of the marketing campaign you access the salons sales data for the new
products and treatments.
Product/
Service
Number of
Transactions
Average Sale
Price
Total Sales
Omnilux LED
25
$50
$1250
Lash Tint
100
$30
$3000
Hydrafacial
50
$112
$5600
Lash Growth Serum
30
$70
$2100
Vida Glow Collagen Drink
(Add On)
80
$5
$400
Biologi Hydrating Serum
40
$110
$4400
Based on the sales data you identify that one service under performed significantly
compared to the other services. What was the lowest performing service?
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
You review the salon IMs and notice that you have received the following questions
repeatedly from customers relating to the service:
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
The insights on the original marketing post for the Omnilux LED reveal that the majority of
clients interacted and engaged with the Instagram post 50% more than the TikTok which
showed limited interaction.
Based on the questions received and post insights you and the marketing manager discuss
the need to develop a new post that addresses the common questions and improve
engagement.
Insert a copy of the new post here.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
Analyse the demographics outlined in the insights across the salons platforms and compare
to the target market of the salon and suggest how to improve customer reach.
Platform
Audience Age Range:
Audience Interests:
Tiktok
16 – 24 year olds
Makeup, Fashion, Trends
Instagram
18-35 year olds
Beauty, Skincare, wellness
Facebook
30 – 55 year olds
Beauty, lifestyle, updates
Outline and justify which platform you will post on to improve the performance of this
service based on the demographic it best aligns with.
Platform
Justification
PART 6: Market Changes and Opportunities
Competitors are a common threat in the world of business. It’s important to understand
how to transform potential threats into new opportunities. Recently a new salon opened
down the street from La Bar A Beaute and you notice a sudden decline in bookings.
Identify and explain a minimum of three strategies La Bar A Beaute can implement to
combat this and improve/increase the salon booking rate?
1.
2.
3.
END OF ASSESSMENT
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment Task 3 – Marketing Strategy Template
Student Name
Cohort
Unit Code/s & Name/s
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales – SHBXPSM003/SHBXPSM002
Assessment Name
Task 1 – Customer service policy
Assessment Task
No.
1
ASSESSMENT REQUIREMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS
Description of Task:
Your role as Salon Manager is to develop and communicate a customer service policy for your salon. Use the
provided template to create a unique policy that meets the needs of your salon. To demonstrate your
understanding of salon management duties you must answer questions relating to the following topics:
● Ways to communicate customer service standards
● How to gather and use customer feedback for continuous improvement
● Teamwork for effective running of the salon
● Problem solving for cleaning, maintenance and resource allocation
● Role of mentoring in salon training
● Service procedures
● Supplier education and training resources for salon training
This assessment task has been designed to inform the assessor of your knowledge level. Based on this
assessment task, a judgement can be made on whether you have achieved a satisfactory level, or if further
review of this unit is necessary for the parts you have not answered satisfactory.
Instructions to Students:
●
●
●
●
Submit this completed assessment task sheet to Stella.
You can re-submit your assessment after receiving feedback from your assessor on the unsatisfactory
elements
Written and/or verbal feedback will be provided within 10 working days from the submission date
unless otherwise specified by your assessor
You are required to submit your assessment on, or before the due date as advised by your assessor and
written in your own words.
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 1 – Customer service policy
p.1
1. Your role as Salon Manager of Le Bar a Beaute is to develop a customer service policy
for your staff to ensure consistency and client satisfaction. Use the template below to
help you write your policy. There are useful resources in the learning material to help
you along with example policy documents.
Customer Service Policy for Le Bar A Beaute
Complete all sections with red text. Ensure you change the text to black before submission.
Our Vision
Outline Le Bar a Beaute’s vision. It is published on their intranet.
What does this document outline?
Scope
This customer service policy applies to (who does this apply to?) and (through what channels?
I.e. face to face, online etc)
Goals
What is your priority?
How will you try to meet your goals?
Why is customer service important to Le Bar a Beaute?
Our Services and Products
Find the welcome statement on Le Bar a Beaute’s intranet that outlines the team skills and the
products they use.
Procedures
1. Tone – What tone should all employees use?
2. Response time – What is your standard length of time to respond to a client enquiry?
What happens if a solution is not available immediately?
3. Active listening – What is active listening and why do your staff use this skill? This website
may be useful https://www.mindtools.com/az4wxv7/active-listening
4. Resolve issues – How will staff resolve issues? What measures are in place to allow staff to
try and resolve issues? What is the procedure if a staff member is not able to resolve a
client issue?
5. Respect and dignity – How does the salon ensure all clients are treated with respect and
dignity? How will staff conduct themselves even with difficult clients?
Salon Marketing, Promotion and Sales SHBXPSM003_SHBXPSM002 – Assessment task 1 – Customer service policy
p.2
6. Privacy of information – What is the salon’s policy for protecting client information? How
do you ensur
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT322 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Logistics Management
Course Code: MGT322
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 14245
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445-46 H (2023-2024) 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Farrukh R. Ahmad
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via the allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well-presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention the question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
• Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Logistics Management
ASSIGNMENT -2
Submission Date by students: Before the end of Week- 11th
Place of Submission: Students Grade Centre
Weight:
10 Marks
Learning Outcome:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how global competitive environments are changing supply chain
management and logistics practice.
2. Apply essential elements of core logistic and supply chain management principles.
3. Analyse and identify challenges and issues pertaining to logistical processes.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Outsourcing and offshoring initiatives can help an organization fine-tune its business model to
become more resilient and profitable. At the same time, these initiatives present challenges.
In today’s highly competitive, extremely variable, and dynamic environment, many firms are
seeking solutions. Supply chain management becomes more sophisticated and the difference
between what firms want to achieve and what they can do in-house continues to grow, firms
begin to realize that doing the right thing becomes more interesting than doing everything.
Accordingly, they are becoming better focused and more specialized by outsourcing and offshoring
activities that are far from their core businesses. In many cases firms decide to outsource this
function in whole or in part to agents or third-party logistics firms.
Using this concept of offshoring and outsourcing answer the following questions by taking any Saudi
Local company or any Multinational company.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Questions: Each Question Carrying 2.5 Marks.
1. Define the working procedure of third-party logistics firms. (300-400 Words)
2. Explain the different motivational factors for going internationally. (300-400 Words)
3. On what ground do companies choose developing country’s location for offshoring? Use examples.
(Mention the country and decisive factors). (300-400 Words)
4. Why do companies outsource? (Use the example of any Saudi company along with its objective
and scope for outsourcing). (300-400 Words)
The Answer must follow the Keyword/ outline points below:
•
Outsourcing, offshoring, Third Party Logistics
•
Their Main functions
•
Motivational Factors /Drivers
•
Any local example
•
Reasons with suitable Examples
•
Reference
Note: You can support your answer by reading chapter 4 of your book.
You can use secondary sources available on the internet. Please use APA-style referencing.
Answer 1.
Answer 2.
Answer 3.
Answer 4.
please use your own words don’t copy and paste (no plagiarism)- Please use keyboard (don’t use handwriting)- All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)- I want answer with APA reference, references at least 4- The answer should be total 1200TO 11400 w##The assignment should not contain sexual orientation or the like
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
Hello,please I need full answer to my assigment and please complete it and follow all the requirments which is givien, also please do the answering in same file and dont answer in external sheet sheetThanks,Yazan
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT101 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB anytime in Week 8)
Course Name: Principles of
Management
Course Code: MGT101
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN: 12481
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 1445 H (2023-2024)1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Farrukh R. Ahmad
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions: Please Read them carefully
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 2 is 11/11/2023.
• The Assignment must be submitted on BB only in WORD format via allocated
folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Assignment Purposes/Learning Outcomes:
After completion of Assignment-2 students will able to understand the
CLO 4: Employ knowledge and techniques of strategic planning, problem solving, decission
making and change management.
CLO 5: Use management function effectively on teamwork activities, and skills to create a
developmental plan.
Assignment-2 Please go through the Case and answer the questions that follows. (Length of
each answer should not be less then 200 words except for the Answer 1)
Putting AutoZone into Drive
Joseph “Pitt” Hyde III, 70, knew nothing about cars. But after turning his grandfather’s company,
Malone & Hyde, into the nation’s third-largest wholesale food distributor, he figured there was
money to be made under the hood. Touting low everyday prices (a strategy he learned from serving
on the board of Walmart), he founded AutoZone, which is now the nation’s largest retail auto parts
chain….
I was born in Memphis and grew up here. My grandfather started Malone & Hyde, a wholesale
food distributor, in 1907. He ran it, my father ran it, and I ran it. From the time I was 4 or 5, my
grandfather would take me to visit the stores, and my father always discussed the big decisions
being made with me. I was always told that I had the opportunity to run Malone & Hyde, and the
obligation to do it better than my grandfather and father did. I never knew I had a choice.…
After I graduated from the University of North Carolina with an economics degree, my father grew
ill. So, in 1968, at 26, I had to take over. It was the ultimate baptism by fire. Most of the people
reporting to me were twice my age. That year, we had $240 million in sales. Fortunately, I was
able to continue to grow the company.
In the mid-1970s I had concerns about the long-term outlook and looked for areas to diversify into.
We had a successful drug chain [called Super D] and felt comfortable with specialty retailing. So,
when this small company, Checker Auto Parts in Phoenix, came up for sale, I checked it out. I saw
how it was growing with auto parts geared to the do-it-yourself market. We passed, and Lucky
Supermarkets bought it. We started looking at chains like Pep Boys.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
I could see the auto parts business was growing rapidly and wasn’t as price sensitive as food. I
didn’t see anyone doing a superior job of customer service, and most were not well kept. I thought
we could bring a lot to the table. We decided to start a company from scratch. We opened our first
store in Forrest City, Arkansas, on July 4, 1979, and called it Auto Shack. We changed the name
after we were sued by RadioShack [for trademark infringement]. Auto Shack initially won the
lawsuit, but RadioShack successfully appealed. Rather than fight it, we changed the name to
AutoZone.
In 1988 we sold Malone & Hyde, which by then had $3.3 billion in sales. We had set up AutoZone
in its own corporate structure, so when we sold the base business, I kept AutoZone. I’d never been
a do-it-yourselfer and didn’t know the auto parts business, but I knew there was an opportunity.
We worked on small margins and were very tight operators, so that discipline helped us through
as we learned the business. We started with four stores and were the first auto parts store with
electronic catalogues, so customers could instantly look up parts and warranty information. Our
objective was to build a culture around superior customer service, and to have everyday low prices
in good-looking stores.
In 1991 we went public, and the competition saw how well we were doing. They started copying
our store layout and pricing. But none of them could copy our culture. Today we have 5,000 stores.
When you’re running a big business, you spend 80% of the time addressing small things and 20%
on the big things that really make a difference. It took me 35 years to figure out if you spend 80%
of the time on the big things, and 20% on the small things, life will be much more meaningful.
Money is a small part of the equation for success. Sweat equity is what makes things work.
QUESTIONS
Q1. Briefly describe AutoZone’s strategy in two sentences. (1 Mark)
Q2. Based on Michael Porter’s discussion of the characteristics of an effective strategy, does
AutoZone have a good strategy for growth? Explain. (2 Marks)
Q3. To what extent is AutoZone following the five steps of the strategic-management process?
(2 Marks)
Q4. Conduct a SWOT analysis of AutoZone’s current reality and recommend whether the
company’s current strategy is poised to succeed. (3 Marks)
Q5. Which of Michael Porter’s four competitive strategies is AutoZone trying to follow? Discuss
briefly. (2 Marks)
Source:
Management: A Practical Introduction, by Angelo Kinicki.
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ANSWERS:
Book name https://scholar.flatworldknowledge.com/books/34758…Read Chapter 1. After reading chapter 1. in chapter 1 there will be” 1.7 Case in Point: The Power of the People at Cayuga Collection read” that and then finish Case Discussion Questions which is below 1.7 case
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Case in Point Chapter Case Studies Assignment
Purpose
Case studies are descriptions of situations which you could likely encounter, at some point, within your chosen
discipline. They may be presented as short essays of very specific organizational scenarios (such as you will
see in your text, at the end of the chapters), or in more detailed and comprehensive reports, or in specific
templates provided to you. Regardless, you will need to carefully analyze the task you have been given and
look at the requirements of your assignment. The purpose of case study analysis is to provide you with the
opportunity to:
• think about the complexities of real-life situations that you may face in the workplace.
• make connections between the theory you have learned to real-life practice.
• provide realistic, reasonable, and practical solutions to real-life problems.
Lesson Outcomes
Your professor is looking for you to demonstrate an ability to think critically and analytically. This includes:
•
•
•
•
•
methodically and systematically analyzing the situation
identifying all the issues
exploring all aspects of the issues in depth
analyzing potential implications, outcomes, or relevant considerations, read between the lines.
making connections between the case and the theory presented in the chapter.
To do this successfully, you need a step-by-step process to think about the possibilities connected to each
element of the case.
Five Steps to Complete the Task
How do you prepare and complete a case study?
Step 1: Choose your case.
Throughout the semester, each student will choose three (3) case studies. Student will submit their choices as
follows:
•
•
•
•
Unit 1 – Case in Point #1 – (choose one Case in Point from Chapters 1, 2, or 3)
Unit 2 – Case in Point #2 – (choose one Case in Point from Chapters 4, 5, 6, or 7)
Unit 3 – Case in Point #3 – (choose one Case in Point from Chapters 8, 9, 10, or 11)
Unit 4 – Case in Point #4 – (choose one Case in Point from Chapters 12, 13, 14 or 15)
At the end of each chapter there is a chapter-specific “Case Study” along with subsequent discussion
questions. For example, let’s say for Unit 1, you choose Chapter 3 – Personality, Attitudes, and Work
Behaviors. In Chapter 3, at the end of the chapter you will find the 3.6 Case in Point: Hiring for Match at
Netflix on pages 108 – 109. It could show up on a different page for you if you are reading it online.
Nonetheless, it is at the end of the chapter. You will read the case scenario and then answer the three to six
(this varies per case) subsequent Case Discussion Questions (of course supporting your answers via the
correlating chapter text material you have just read).
Step 2: Analyze the case (Main Element)
Reading the case and then re-reading it is not sufficient as an analytical process. To really examine in-depth all
the possible issues included in the case, you need to read and think at the same time. Brainstorming all the
possibilities at this stage may help you ensure that you have not missed some important information. Some
things to consider when analyzing a case are:
•
•
•
•
What are the definite facts? – listing any definite information is a useful starting point
What is happening / has happened? – list any definite actions that have occurred
Who is involved? – brainstorm all the people or organizations who could possibly be involved
What is their role? – what do these actors do and how are they affecting the case
Step 3: Explore in more detail (Inquiry & Analysis)
Refer to your specific task and be clear about what you are being asked to do. What is the purpose for
analyzing the case? You may need to:
• make recommendations.
• identify solutions.
• consider potential actions required.
• devise a plan considering all the issues.
These will most likely be connected to real-lifework situations. Exploring the case in more detail will help you
to:
• find any details which may not be explicitly stated
• identify what extra information is needed to complete the task
Step 4: Making connections to theory (Integration & Application)
Understanding the links between the theoretical content in your course, overall text, the specific chapters, and
the practical realities of the case is an essential element of any case study. Once you have a detailed analysis of
the case, it will be important to:
• interpret the case and solve the issues by creating a plan or recommendations.
• search for literature to support your actions, decisions or choices and justify your plans or solutions.
• demonstrate how you have developed your ideas by referring to reliable sources.
Step 5: Completing the case (Critical Thinking & Research)
This is about your ability to analyze a management scenario, just as described in the previous steps.
Therefore, ANALYSIS is what I am looking for from you. Reading between the lines, changing your
perspective, up-close, in-depth, and detailed examination of the case. Doing your best to identify key issues,
key players, and the most pertinent facts, not just from the case itself, but also the pertinence and correlative
perspectives of the chapter-specific content. There is a reason the case is tied to the chapter wherein it resides.
Being analytical, not descriptive! You absolutely MUST support your discussion in these questions with cited
text support and, if applicable, outside research with subsequent appropriate in-text citation (i.e., MLA or APA
I do not care, whichever format you are familiar with — see attached guides for assistance). These are not
simply one sentence and done types of questions, I want you to think critically about each. Your
comprehensiveness and thoroughness is vital. Your task is to answer these questions that may be posed or
implied, reading between the lines and answering the “whys?” and “so whats”.
Submitting the Assignment – the Deliverables
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You will complete the Case Study on one document,
You must have a header or title page,
The header or title page, must include the following:
o Indicator of which Unit, which Chapter, the title of the Case, date, and indication of ownership
of the paper
First, in 150-200 words, briefly summarize the key points of the case.
Then, in 2-3 well-developed paragraphs per question (each), address the three to six questions at the
end of the case. The number of questions vary depending on the case.
Be sure to use specific terminology and concepts from the text chapters with proper in-text citation as
directed throughout (MLA or APA…see Step 5 above)
Finally, in 150-200 words, conclude the case analysis with any other recommendations or suggestions
that you would consider if you were the manager in the scenario (i.e., put yourself in the shoes of the
person making the decisions). For additional details, please refer to the Case in Point Case Study
Analysis Grading Rubric document below.
then submit it via the link (CiP #*) in the Assignments tab.
See schedule below for exact times for posting and due dates:
Case in Point Case Study due dates:
•
•
•
•
Unit 1 – CiP #1 (choose from Chapters 1, 2, or 3) ………………….. due 11:59 p.m. 08/21/2022
Unit 2 – CiP #2 (choose from Chapters 4, 5, 6, or 7) ………………. due 11:59 p.m. 09/01/2022
Unit 3 – CiP #3 (choose from Chapters 8, 9, 10, or 11) …………… due 11:59 p.m. 09/15/2022
Unit 4 – CiP #4 (choose from Chapters 12, 13, 14, 15) …………… due 11:59 p.m. 09/29/2022
Criteria for Success
You will be given some latitude on your responses from the first assignment on Unit 1, after that I will give
you all feedback per the below rubric and you will need to adjust your responses appropriately, as I will grade
them more stringently.
Case in Point Case Study Analysis Grading Rubric – 100 pts.
Guidelines for Submission: Papers should use double spacing, 12-point Times New Roman font, and one-inch
margins. Sources should be cited according to a discipline-appropriate citation method (i.e., MLA or APA).
In 150-200 words, briefly summarize the key points of the case. Then, in 2-3 well-developed paragraphs each,
address the three to six questions at the end of the case. Be sure to use specific terminology and concepts from
the text chapters. Finally, in 150-200 words, conclude the case analysis with any other recommendations that
you can suggest. For additional details, please refer to the Short Paper/Case Study Rubric document in the
Assignment Guidelines and Rubrics section of the course.
Criteria for Case in
Point Case Study
Main Elements
20 pts.
Inquiry & Analysis
25 pts.
Integration &
Application
20 pts.
Critical Thinking
20 pts.
Research
10 pts.
Exemplary
100 – 90 pts.
Includes all the
main elements &
deliverables and
cites multiple
examples to
illustrate each
element
Provides indepth,
comprehensive,
well-thought-out
analysis that
demonstrates
complete
understanding of
multiple concepts
from the chapter
and text
All the course
concepts are
correctly applied
with a minimum
of two (2)
chapter-specific
citations (CAN
NOT include the
case itself), must
be properly cited
IN-TEXT
Draws insightful
conclusions that
are thoroughly
defended with
evidence and
examples
Incorporates
additional
scholarly
resources
effectively that
Proficient
Needs
Improvement
90 – 80 pts.
80 – 70 pts.
Includes most Includes some
of the main
of the main
elements and elements and
deliverables
deliverables
and cites
many
examples to
illustrate each
element
Provides
Provides
some analysis minimal
that
analysis that
demonstrates demonstrates
understanding minimal
of some of
understanding
the chapter
of few
concepts
concepts
Most of the
course
concepts are
correctly
applied with
at least one
(1) chapter
specific
citations
(CANNOT
include case
itself), Must
be properly
cited INTEXT
Draws
informed
conclusions
that are
justified with
some
evidence
Incorporates
some
scholarly
resources
effectively
Not Evident
70 – 0 pts.
Does not
include any
of the main
elements and
deliverables
Does not
provide any
analysis or
demonstrates
any
understanding
of the
concepts
Some of the
course
concepts are
correctly
applied with
zero (0)
chapter
specific
citations.
Does not
correctly
apply any of
the course
concepts
Draws logical
conclusions,
but does not
defend with
minimal
evidence
Does not
draw logical
conclusions
Incorporates
very few
scholarly
resources that
reflect depth
Does not
incorporate
any scholarly
resources that
reflect depth
Criteria for Case in
Point Case Study
Exemplary
100 – 90 pts.
reflect depth and
breadth of
research – at least
two (2) additional
scholarly
citations beyond
the text with
proper citation
Writing
No errors related
(Mechanics/Citations) to organization,
grammar and
5 pts.
style, and
citations
Proficient
90 – 80 pts.
that reflect
depth and
breadth of
research with
proper
citation
Minor errors
related to
organization,
grammar and
style, and
citations
Needs
Not Evident
Improvement
80 – 70 pts.
70 – 0 pts.
and breadth of and breadth
research with of research
proper
citation
Some errors
related to
organization,
grammar and
style, and
citations
Major errors
related to
organization,
grammar and
style, and
citations
Summarize the attached slides and presentation in 4-5 pages with an Introduction and Conclusion and also references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Fostering
Collaboration
LDR500 – Organizational Leadership
Leadership is a relationship, and how leaders act to
facilitate collaboration makes a difference in how
people behave
•
Leaders make the commitment to Foster Collaboration by engaging in these essentials:
•
– Create a climate of trust
•
– Facilitate relationships
•
As organizations become increasingly diverse and globally dispersed, collaborative skills are
essential to navigating the conflicting interests and natural tensions that arise.
2
Create a Climate of Trust
Trust is the central issue in human relationships
Without trust, you
cannot lead
There IS NO
RELATIONSHIP
without trust
Trust must be
reciprocal and
reciprocated
3
Invest in Trust
• Studies demonstrate that trust
strongly predicts personal, team,
a n d o rg a n i z a t i o n a l p e r f o r m a n c e .
• People who are trusting are more
likely to be happy and
psychologically adjusted than are
those who view the world with
suspicion and distrust.
• Tr u s t e d c o m p a n i e s s i g n i f i c a n t l y
outperform their counterparts in
achieving key business goals —
including customer loyalty and
retention, competitive market
position, ethical behavior and
actions, predictable business and
financial results, and profit growth
• This motivates to go beyond
compliance and inspires to reach for
the best in themselves.
4
Be the First to Trust
•Building trust is a process that begins when someone (either you or the other party)
is willing to risk being the first to open up, to show vulnerability, and to let go of
control.
•Leaders go first.
•Trust cannot be forced.
•Humans are hardwired to trust, and without it would be unable to function
effectively in the world
5
Show Concern for Others
•The concern you show for others is one of the clearest and most unambiguous
signals of your trustworthiness.
•However, people need to see in your actions—actions such as listening, paying
attention to their ideas and concerns, helping them solve their problems, and being
open to their influence.
•Demonstrating empathy goes a long way in building trust
•When people believe that you have their interests at heart—that you care about
them—they’re more likely to be open to your influence.
6
Share Knowledge and Information
Competence is a vital
component of trust and
confidence in a leader
People want to know that their
leaders are individuals they
believe know what they are
talking about and what they are
doing
You can convey your insights and know-how,
share lessons learned from experience, and
connect team members to valuable resources and
people
This leads to team members’ trust in one another
and the increase of their performance
However, if you display a reluctance to trust, and
withhold information—or if you’re overly
concerned about protecting your turf and keeping
things to yourself—you’ll dampen their trust and
their performance
Managers who create
distrustful environments
tend to take self-protective
postures
They are directive and
hold tight to the reins of
power
7
People work together most effectively when they trust one
another
Setting a common goal becomes almost instinctive
Facilitate
Relationships
To create conditions in which people know they can count
on each other, a leader needs to develop cooperative goals
and roles, support norms of reciprocity, structure projects to
promote joint efforts, and encourage face-to-face
interactions.
8
Develop
Cooperative Goals
and Roles
•A team, by definition, must have shared goals that provide a specific reason for being together
•Common purpose binds people into cooperative efforts
•Without the sense that “we’re all in this together”—that the success of one depends on the success of the
other—it is virtually impossible to create the conditions for positive teamwork
•If you want individuals or groups to work cooperatively, you have to give them a good reason to do so,
such as a goal that can be accomplished only by working together.
9
Develop Cooperative
Goals and Roles
Developing Cooperative Relationships Raises Leadership Effectiveness Ratings
10
Support Norms
of Reciprocity
There must be a sense of reciprocity. If one partner always gives and the other
always takes, the one who gives will feel taken advantage of, and the one who
takes will feel superior
11
Structure Projects to Promote Joint Effort
People are more likely to
cooperate if the payoffs for
working together are greater
than those associated with
working by themselves
Many people who grow up in Westernized
countries that emphasize individualistic or
competitive achievement have the perception
that they will do better if everyone is
rewarded solely based on his or her
individual accomplishments.
They are wrong
You need to get people to
realize that by working
together they can complete a
project faster than by thinking
about any short-term (or
individual) victories resulting
from doing their own thing,
complaining, blaming, or
competing with others for
scarce resources
12
Encourage Face-to-Face and Durable Interactions
•Group goals and roles, shared identity, reciprocity, and promoting joint effort are all essential for
collaboration to occur
•Also vital are positive face-to-face interactions
•Durable relationships make the impact of today’s actions on tomorrow’s dealings that much more
pronounced
13
•“You can’t do it alone” is the mantra of exemplary leaders—and for
good reason
Foster
Collaboration
•Exemplary leaders Foster Collaboration by building trust and
facilitating relationships
This means you must:
Extend trust to others, even if they haven’t already extended it to you
Spend time getting to know your people and find out what makes them tick
Show concern for the problems and aspirations others have
Listen, listen, and listen some more
Structure projects so that there is a common goal that requires cooperation,
making sure that people understand how they are interdependent with one another
Find ways to get people together face to face and increase the durability of their
relationship
14
Leadership Styles
Which style is best?
15
What the heck does leadership look like these days?
Leadership style is the manner and approach of
providing direction, implementing plans, and
motivating people.
From the perspective of employees, it is both
explicit and implicit patterns of behavior
performed by their leader
16
Kurt Lewin – 1939
authoritarian or autocratic – the leader tells his or her
employees what to do and how to do it, without
getting their advice
participative or democratic – the leader includes one
or more employees in the decision making process,
but the leader normally maintains the final decision
making authority
delegative or laissez-faire- the leader allows the
employees to make the decisions, however, the leader
is still responsible for the decisions that are made
17
Bad Leadership Style
Although good leaders use all three
styles, with one of them normally
dominant, bad leaders tend to stick with
the one style, normally autocratic.
18
Authoritarian or Autocratic Leadership
This style is used when leaders tell their employees what
they want done, how to accomplish it without waiting for
advice.
Use only when you have all the information to solve the
problem, you are short on time, and/or your employees are
well motivated.
Yelling or being demeaning is not authoritarian, it is just
bossing around and has no place in a leader’s repertoire.
Authoritative should be used on rare occasions.
19
Participative or Democratic Leadership
This style includes one or more employees in the decision
making process. The leader maintains the final decision making
authority.
Using this style is not a sign of weakness, rather it is a sign of
strength that your employees will respect.
Normally used when you have part of the information, and
your employees have other parts. A leader is not expected to
know everything—this is why you employ knowledgeable and
skilled people.
Even if you have all the answers, gaining different perspectives
and diversity of opinions normally provide greater creativity
than insularity.
20
Delegative or Laissez-faire Leadership
In this style, the leader allows the employees to make the
decisions. Again, leader is still responsible for the decisions
that are made.
Used when employees are able to analyze the situation and
determine what needs to be done and how to do it. You
cannot do everything! You must set priorities and delegate
certain tasks.
This is not a style to use so that you can blame others when
things go wrong-it is a style to be used when you fully trust
and have confidence in the people below you. Do not be
afraid to use it, however, use it wisely!
21
A good leader uses all three styles, depending on what
forces are involved between the followers, the leader,
and the situation.
Using an authoritarian style on a new
employee who is just learning the job.
The leader is competent and a good
coach.
The employee is motivated to learn a
new skill.
The situation is a new environment
for the employee.
22
Using a participative style with
a team of workers who know
their jobs.
The leader knows the problem,
but does not have all the
information.
The employees know their jobs
and want to become part of
the team.
23
Using a delegative style with a worker who knows more
about the job than you.
You cannot do everything and the employee needs to
take ownership of her job! In addition, this allows you to
be more productive.
24
Using the three styles…….
Using all three:
Telling your employees that a procedure is not working correctly and a new one
must be established (authoritarian).
Asking for their ideas and input on creating a new procedure (participative).
Delegating tasks in order to implement the new procedure (delegative).
25
Transformational Leadership
The leadership frameworks discussed so far are all useful in different
situations, however, in business, transformational leadership is often
the most effective style to use.
Transformational leaders have integrity and high emotional
intelligence. They motivate people with a shared vision of the future,
and they communicate well. They’re also typically self-aware,
authentic, empathetic and humble.
26
Positive and Negative Approaches
Positive leaders use rewards, such as education, independence, etc. to
motivate employees, while negative employers emphasize penalties.
The negative approach has a place in a leader’s repertoire of tools in
certain situations, however, it must be used carefully due to its high
cost on the human spirit.
27
Positive and Negative Approaches
Negative leaders act domineering and superior with people. They
believe the only way to get things done is through penalties, such as
loss of job, days off without pay, reprimanding employees in front of
others, etc.
They believe their authority is increased by frightening everyone into
higher levels of productivity. Yet, what normally happens when this
approach is used is that morale falls, which leads to lower
productivity.
28
People who continuously work out of the negative are bosses,
while those who primarily work out of the positive are considered
great leaders.
29
It’s not a “one size fits all”
You must adapt your approach to fit the situation.
This is why it’s useful to develop a thorough
understanding of other leadership frameworks and
styles; after all, the more approaches you’re familiar
with, the more flexible you can be.
30
WHILE THERE ARE MANY TRAITS THAT MAKE UP A
STRONG LEADER, SOME OF THE KEY
CHARACTERISTICS ARE:
Honesty & Integrity: are crucial to get your people to believe you and buy in to the journey you are
taking them on
Vision: know where you are, where you want to go and enroll your team in charting a path for the
future
Inspiration: inspire your team to be all they can by making sure they understand their role in the
bigger picture
Ability to Challenge: do not be afraid to challenge the status quo, do things differently and have
the courage to think outside the box
Communication Skills: keep your team informed of the journey, where you are, where you are
heading and share any roadblocks you may encounter along the way
31
SOME OF THE COMMON TRAITS SHARED BY STRONG
MANAGERS ARE:
Being Able to Execute a Vision: take a strategic vision and break it down
into a roadmap to be followed by the team
Ability to Direct: day-to-day work efforts, review resources needed and
anticipate needs along the way
Process Management: establish work rules, processes, standards and
operating procedures
People Focused: look after your people, their needs, listen to them and
involve them
32
THE 5 BASES OF POWER HISTORY
• IN 1959, SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGISTS JOHN FRENCH AND BERTRAM RAVEN IDENTIFIED
FIVE BASES OF POWER:
• LEGITIMATE
• REWARD
• EXPERT
• REFERENT
• COERCIVE
COERCIVE
• COERCIVE POWER IS CONVEYED THROUGH FEAR OF LOSING ONE’S JOB, BEING DEMOTED,
RECEIVING A POOR PERFORMANCE REVIEW, HAVING PRIME PROJECTS TAKEN AWAY, ETC.
• THIS POWER IS GOTTEN THROUGH THREATENING OTHERS. FOR EXAMPLE, THE VP OF SALES WHO
THREATENS SALES FOLKS TO MEET THEIR GOALS OR GET REPLACED.
• OR, A PERSON ACHIEVES COMPLIANCE FROM OTHERS THROUGH THE THREAT OF PUNISHMENT. A
MILITARY DICTATOR HAS COERCIVE POWER.
REWARD
• REWARD POWER IS CONVEYED THROUGH REWARDING INDIVIDUALS FOR
COMPLIANCE WITH ONE’S WISHES. THIS MAY BE DONE THROUGH GIVING BONUSES,
RAISES, A PROMOTION, EXTRA TIME OFF FROM WORK, ETC.
• FOR EXAMPLE, THE SUPERVISOR WHO PROVIDES EMPLOYEES COMP TIME WHEN THEY
MEET AN OBJECTIVE HE/SHE SETS FOR A PROJECT. OR, A PERSON IS ABLE TO
COMPENSATE ANOTHER – FINANCIALLY OR OTHERWISE – FOR COMPLYING WITH HIS
OR HER DEMANDS. A PARENT HAS REWARD POWER OVER HIS CHILDREN.
LEGITIMATE
• LEGITIMATE POWER COMES FROM HAVING A POSITION OF POWER IN AN
ORGANIZATION, SUCH AS BEING THE BOSS OR A KEY MEMBER OF A LEADERSHIP
TEAM. THIS POWER COMES WHEN EMPLOYEES IN THE ORGANIZATION RECOGNIZE
THE AUTHORITY OF THE INDIVIDUAL.
• THE CEO OF YOUR COMPANY, FOR EXAMPLE, HAS LEGITIMATE POWER.
PERSONAL POWER – EXPERT
• EXPERT POWER COMES FROM ONE’S EXPERIENCES, SKILLS OR KNOWLEDGE. AS WE GAIN
EXPERIENCE IN PARTICULAR AREAS, AND BECOME THOUGHT LEADERS IN THOSE AREAS, WE
BEGIN TO GATHER EXPERT POWER THAT CAN BE UTILIZED TO GET OTHERS TO HELP US MEET OUR
GOALS.
• FOR EXAMPLE, THE PROJECT MANAGER WHO IS AN EXPERT AT SOLVING PARTICULARLY
CHALLENGING PROBLEMS TO ENSURE A PROJECT STAYS ON TRACK. A PERSON HAS THE
KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS TO OUTPERFORM OTHERS; HER GOOD JUDGMENT IS RESPECTED AND
RELIED UPON. A SPECIALIST PHYSICIAN HAS EXPERT POWER.
PERSONAL POWER – REFERENT
• REFERENT POWER COMES FROM BEING TRUSTED AND RESPECTED. WE CAN GAIN REFERENT POWER
WHEN OTHERS TRUST WHAT WE DO AND RESPECT US FOR HOW WE HANDLE SITUATIONS.
• FOR EXAMPLE, THE HUMAN RESOURCE ASSOCIATE WHO IS KNOWN FOR ENSURING EMPLOYEES ARE
TREATED FAIRLY AND COMING TO THE RESCUE OF THOSE WHO ARE NOT.
• OR, A PERSON IS STRONGLY LIKED AND ADMIRED BY OTHERS AND OFTEN EXERTS A CHARMING
INFLUENCE. A CELEBRITY HAS REFERENT POWER.
PERSONAL POWER VS. GIVEN POWER
• THE MOST RESPECT IS GARNERED ON THOSE WHO HAVE PERSONAL SOURCES OF
POWER. THERE IS MORE RESPECT FOR THESE INDIVIDUALS THAN FOR THOSE WHO
HAVE POWER SIMPLY BECAUSE THEY ARE THE BOSS IN THE BUSINESS.
• IT HAS BEEN SHOWN THAT WHEN EMPLOYEES IN AN ORGANIZATION ASSOCIATE
THE LEADERSHIP’S POWER WITH EXPERT OR REFERENT POWER, THEY ARE MORE
ENGAGED, MORE DEVOTED TO THE ORGANIZATION AND THEIR ROLE WITHIN IT.
POWER IN SUMMARY
• IN TODAY’S BUSINESS WORLD, THE MOST EFFECTIVE LEADERS MOSTLY USE A MIX
OF EXPERT AND REFERENT POWER, THOUGH MANY HAVE LEGITIMATE AND
REWARD POWER AS WELL.
• AND THINKING ABOUT YOUR OWN SOURCES OF POWER STRATEGICALLY IS
IMPORTANT IF YOU WANT TO INFLUENCE YOUR COLLEAGUES, CLIENTS, AND OTHER
CONSTITUENTS IN A POSITIVE WAY.
POWER IN SUMMARY
• A RELIABLE FORM OF POWER IS EXPERT, BECAUSE IT AFFORDS THE INDIVIDUAL THE
MOST CONTROL.
• YOU DON’T HAVE TO WAIT AROUND TO BE HANDED A TITLE (AS IN LEGITIMATE),
AND YOU DON’T HAVE TO RELY ON FLUCTUATING CIRCUMSTANCES (AS IN
REFERENT).
• EXPERT POWER CAN BE SECURED PURELY THROUGH HARD WORK ON YOUR PART.
What causes you to trust or distrust someone else? Using this answer, what would you do as a manager to cause your employees to trust you?An employee who works for you confronts you with a formal grievance concerning another employee being promoted over him. What initial actions will you take in order to address this grievance?
1. What is Leverage? What is Usury? What is an Alienation Clause?
2. Describe the three types of promissory notes. What are their differences?
3. What is hypothecation? What is a deficiency judgment?
4. Name the three parties to a Deed of Trust. Describe each party (who are they)? Why do lenders in California prefer Deeds of Trust over Mortgages? Be specific.
5. Explain all of the steps that a lender must take to initiate a foreclosure once the borrower defaults.
6. each of the questions above must be replied to in 8 sentences and labeled
(3 Discussion Board Replies) (150 words per reply) (400 words total) (2 apa citations) (in-text citations are a must) Discussion Topic For the past year, you have been working as a secretary/processor for a local construction company, XYZ Homes, which specialixes in the building of low-cost limited-option homes. You left a comfortable, good-paying job to work for XYZ because it was family-owned and operated by long-time friends. Soon after you began working for XYZ, you noticed questionable behavior on the part of Mr. and Mrs. XYZ’s two sons, who are company salesmen. In fact, you are positive that they are falsifying documents to increase their commissions and to trick local banks into approving mortgages to customers who don’t meet credit standards. You are trying to decide how to handle the situation when one of the sons approaches you and asks you to produce and sign a memo to a bank, falsely stating that a certain potential home buyer is creditworthy. You refuse to do so and after much consideration, approach Mr. XYZ about the situation. to your surprise, he simply brushes of your comments as unimportant and laughingly states that “boys will be boys.” What would you do in this situation? Is the fact that you correctly refused to produce and sign a false memo enough, or are you obligated to report these crimes to the banks and proper authorities? Discuss the options, responsibilities, and implications you are facing. Would this change if you were a CPA? Reply to these 3 posts 1. I would not write or sign a memo falsifying information to a bank or any other entity in any situation. Providing a memo with false information would be against my morals and ethics, and I would not perform the task under any circumstance. This activity would be fraudulent in that I would be writing it with the intent to mislead the bank to lend money to someone who is not creditworthy. This would also be a form of bank fraud and would fall under criminal law for violating Title 18, U.S. Code §1344 (Albrecht et al., 2019, p. 12). I would inform the son that I would not write the memo and that the next step would depend on his reaction or response. I agree that alerting a manager or, in this case, the company’s owner is the next step in alerting someone of more authority of the concerns and issues. In this scenario, the report was made to the owner of the company, who did not give importance to the claim. It is unclear if the owner is playing an active part in the fraudulent memos or isn’t taking the claim seriously. As an employee, I did my ethical duty to report it to someone of higher management. Once this is done, I would face the decision of whether or not this has only happened one time or if it continues to be an issue. I would decide whether to continue working for XYZ Homes or find other employment. If I am confident and have proof that they have been falsifying multiple documents and know that the owner is involved, I would contact an attorney to find the best course of action. If there are investors or stakeholders that the report could be made to, this might be an option to hold the owner accountable. However, to pursue anything legally would be costly and time-consuming (Albrecht et al., 2019, p. 81). As an employee, I would want to resign from the company and find another place of employment. I do not wish to work in an unethical and illegal environment. As a CPA, I would still refuse to write or sign any memo falsifying financial information. I would still follow the same steps of reporting the concern to someone in upper management and then base my future actions on their response. I would also get legal counsel before discussing any activity with any other party outside of the company due to the complexity of ethical and legal requirements that a CPA is bound to in terms of confidentiality (Arman, 2023). I had a similar situation happen during my employment right after high school. I was asked to hold invoices for cash payment to the manager for expenses that he had paid for personally or on account. The corporate office became suspicious and asked me why we were holding over so much daily cash. I explained that the branch manager requested the funds and had invoices he needed to pay. It was unusual but not against policy to have larger invoices that needed to be paid through petty cash. After some time, the invoices continued, and I became suspicious. I discovered the invoices were not legitimate because they were from a company I was positive did not provide invoices and only receipts. I confirmed that the company did not provide the invoices and reported them to my supervisor. The manager discovered that I had made the discovery and tried to fire me for being unable to perform job duties that were not in my job description. Thinking back, it was pretty comical that the job duties he required me to do involved lifting heavy machinery. I was hired as an office person and not a warehouse employee. I requested a witness to be present during the discussion, and the manager refused to bring the assistant manager or anyone else in the room. Due to my inability to lift the amount of equipment he was requiring of me, he informed me I was terminated. A manager in human resources contacted me quickly later that day and asked for a full disclosure of what had transpired. I reported the entire situation and provided copies of the fraudulent activity. Due to my impeccable work history and annual review reports, they did offer me my job back. The manager informed them that he did not fire me and that it was a misunderstanding. I was assured that the information I provided was confidential and would not receive any repercussions from the manager. However, due to the time it would take them to investigate, I decided to leave my job. At the time, being very young and inexperienced, I did not want any conflict in the workplace and did not know how to handle the situation. After several months, they finally terminated the employment of the manager. 2. This is always a tough scenario especially when working with friends and/or family. Even though you are friends with the owners this can’t be something that can continue and needs to be reported. When the first step of notifying the business owner was unsuccessful shows that the tone at the top is not a good one. I would feel obligated to notify the proper authorities or entities that were being lied to. This is probably just the start of more you will eventually find out that they are doing to cook the books. I would also be looking for another job and maybe even look to go back to my old employer. Even though you refused to be a apart of the actual fraud you still have an obligation to report weather you are a CPA or not. Eventually they are going to get caught and you don’t want to have any contribution or turning a blind eye to it for it will come to hurt you as well. 3. This is an ethically challenging situation. As an employee of XYZ Homes, I have a responsibility to act with integrity even if it means reporting misconduct within the company. I would Schedule a meeting with Mr. XYZ to clearly explain the severity of the falsified documents and potential fraud. I’d appeal to his ethics and avoid sweeping it under the rug as “boys will be boys.” As well as stress the legal risks to the company and employees if caught. Another option would be to consult an attorney to understand my legal obligations. As an employee, I likely have a duty to report criminal actions that harm others, despite company leadership downplaying it. I would even consider anonymously reporting the misconduct to proper authorities – the banks being defrauded, regulators overseeing lending practices, etc. This could be done confidentially through a whistleblower tip line. As a last resort, I would resign from my position and report the unethical practices. This may be necessary if the company does not act internally. As a CPA, I would have enhanced ethical and legal duties to report financial fraud or falsified records. CPAs must comply with a professional code of conduct and have a responsibility to act in the public interest above employer loyalty. Remaining at a company engaged in illegal actions could jeopardize my CPA license. In this case, reporting to authorities would likely be obligatory sooner. Overall, I have a moral obligation not to enable unethical behavior that harms others, regardless of my position. Though uncomfortable, reporting misconduct is vital to protect the public from predatory and fraudulent practices. I would pursue all internal options first, but ultimately must be ready to disclose the truth externally if necessary, accepting potential professional consequences.
Assignment 4 – Marketing Channel Strategy
What is your brand and product?
Make a list of retail outlets where this product is commonly sold. (Retail outlets, Ecommerce Sites, Website). Paste images or links for each source.
List three segments that buy your product. For each segment, fill in the following:
Segment 1:
Geographic – How far will they travel to get the product?
Atmosphere – What are the needs and expectations for the point of purchase?
Frequency – How often do they buy the product?
Complementary Products – What other types of products are expected to be available
Customer Service – What customer service needs will they have and how would they like to contact customer service?
Segment 2:
Geographic – How far will they travel to get the product?
Atmosphere – What are the needs and expectations for the point of purchase?
Frequency – How often do they buy the product?
Complementary Products – What other types of products are expected to be available
Customer Service – What customer service needs will they have and how would they like to contact customer service?
Segment 3:
Geographic – How far will they travel to get the product?
Atmosphere – What are the needs and expectations for the point of purchase?
Frequency – How often do they buy the product?
Complementary Products – What other types of products are expected to be available
Customer Service – What customer service needs will they have and how would they like to contact customer service?
due date is 10/17/2023 10:00 P.M. EDT
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
Assignment 2 Product Design Strategy
Jinlin Chen
Kent State University
MKTG 35030
Michael Lyndall
09/20/2023
2
iPhone 13 Product Analysis
Product
The product selected for this analysis is Apple iPhone 13. This product targets tech-savvy
consumers who value high-quality smartphones that have advanced features. It also targets
customers who are willing to pay premium prices.
Major Competing Products
iPhone 13 has a range of competing products. Some of these products are mobile phones
with similar features or similar prices. The competing products include:
● Samsung Galaxy S21
● Google Pixel 6
● OnePlus 9 Pro
● Xiaomi Mi 11
Product Lifecycle
The Apple iPhone 13 is in the growth stage of the product life cycle. It was launched in
September 2021, the product became increasingly popular because of the new features
introduced from the iPhone 12 Pro (Hooson, 2021). The model continues to have strong sales
even though it is not in the introduction stage and cannot be considered a new product. This
mobile phone is characterized by its adoption because of the high demand by customers who
seek mobile phones with advanced technology. Its innovative features also account for the
spiraling adoption as the company introduces new qualities (Phelan, 2021). During this stage,
there is increased profitability and market share.
Product Line
3
The Apple iPhone product line is characterized by diversity, offering customers a range
of models and choices. For example, the iPhone 13 product line comprises the iPhone 13 Mini,
iPhone 13, iPhone 13 Pro, and iPhone 13 Pro Max. Each of these products caters to different
customer preferences for device functionality and size. This is a strategy to extend the product
line by introducing different models that address consumer needs. It not only satisfied the needs
of customers seeking budget-friendly options but also those who want higher quality models at
premium prices. Expanding the product line for iPhone 13 allows the company to gain more
market share and maintain its competitive advantage.
Bundling and Similar Products
Apple strategically bundles iPhones with accessories such as protective cases, charging
cables, and earphones. This bundling approach has two benefits, including completing their need
to offer a holistic, convenient user experience. It ensures customers have all the necessary
accessories needed to make iPhone 13 and other products work better. Another benefit of this
approach is enhancing the overall value proposition. The approach makes the products more
attractive and compelling to purchase.
General Product Benefit Ranking
Apple iPhone 13 leads in multiple aspects when the general benefits are analyzed
compared to competing products. This can be illustrated as follows:
● Performance: 1. Apple iPhone 13; 2. Samsung Galaxy S21; 3. Google Pixel 6; 4.
OnePlus 9 Pro; 5. Xiaomi Mi 11
● Software updates: 1. Samsung Galaxy s21; 2. Apple iPhone 13; Google Pixel 6;;
5. OnePlus 9.
4
● Ecosystem Integration: 1. Apple iPhone 13; 2. Samsung Galaxy S21; 3. Google
Pixel 6; 4. OnePlus 9 Pro; 5. Xiaomi Mi 11.
● Camera Quality: 1. Apple iPhone 13; 2. Google Pixel 6; 3. Samsung Galaxy S21;
4. Xiaomi Mi 11; OnePlus 9 Pro.
Product Features and Response Function Description:
I.
Face ID and Biometric Security: The response function is that consumers prefer more
advanced and reliable biometric security, such as Apple’s Face ID.
II.
High Refresh Rate Display: The response function is that higher refresh rates offer
smoother interactions and improved visuals.
III.
Battery Life: The response function is that consumers prefer longer battery life up to a
point where the device can last a full day of use (Nicas, 2021).
Product Packaging
Figure 1: Apple Packaging retrieved from https://wallpapers.com/wallpapers/original-iphone-5-new-yls2ah03lqnm4gu1.html
The Apple iPhone 13 is packed in a sleek and minimalist white box with the product
image on the front. Inside the package includes the iPhone, a charging cable, and a user manual.
Some of the packaging benefits to consumers include information about the product and its
5
features. It also ensures the safety of the device during transportation and maintains the premium
brand image of Apple.
6
References
Hooson, M. (2021, September 17). Apple iPhone 13: Improved cameras, battery and processor
alongside new iPads and Apple watch. Forbes.
https://www.forbes.com/uk/advisor/personal-finance/2021/09/15/apple-iphone-13product-details/.
Nicas, J. (2021, September 14). Apple’s new iPhone 13 is better, but not by much. The New York
Times. https://www.nytimes.com/2021/09/14/technology/how-good-is-apple-iphone13.html.
Phelan, D. (2021, September 5). Apple iPhone 13 promises jaw-dropping feature upgrade.
Forbes. https://www.forbes.com/sites/davidphelan/2021/09/05/apple-iphone-13promises-jaw-dropping-feature-upgrade-release-date/.
Visual Promotions Analysis & Themes
Jinlin Chen
Kent State University
MKTG 35030
Michael Lyndall
10/10/2023
Visual Promotions Analysis & Themes
Promotion 1: Samsung Website Ad
Website Ad (Samsung Ads, n.d.)
Image analysis and associations reveal that the website banner on the Samsubg Ads Life
page shows the dynamics of different products. The page features a collage of Samsung products
in different real-life scenarios. The most relevant part of the image is the collection of Samsung
products, including smartphones and home appliances. It conveys associations with the seamless
integration of technology into everyday life.
The interpretation and tone of the promotion to the consumers are formal but graphical. It
communicates how Samsung’s product ecosystem fits different aspects of modern life. The
promotion communicates the diversity that Samsung offers through its products. The tone of the
communication is also customer-centric and versatile.
An evaluation of the marketing objective shows that the promotion targets consideration
of the state of the consumer journey. It is to provide potential customers with a comprehensive
view of Samsung product ranges. The ad communicates to this target audience who needs
convincing about the products. It guarantees the customers that Samsung’s product range can
improve the various aspects of their lives.
The promotional channel analysis further indicates that the Samsung Ads Life page is an
appropriate channel for this promotion. This is because it allows the consumers to explore the
Samsung products ecosystem in detail. Other than the captivating pictures, it provides textual
context that makes the ad comprehensive.
Promotion: Instagram Post
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip Instagram Post (Samsung, 2023)
In the second advertisement, the Instagram post features the folded Samsung Galaxy Z
flip smartphone. It showcases the sleek innovation and design of the product by using a
minimalistic approach. The most relevant part of the picture is the folding and unfolding action
of the phone. It evokes associations with modernity, cutting-edge technology, and elegance.
The message from this promotion communicates to consumers about the modernity of the
company’s newest innovation. It highlights the features of the Samsung Galaxy Z Flip, making
the product a symbol of modernity and style. The ad emphasizes innovative designs and features
of the phone. The tone of the communication is trendy, targeting tech-savvy customers.
The marketing objective of the promotion is to target the awareness stage of the customer
journey. It is informative and comprehensive, even though it uses a minimalistic approach to
advertising. This promotion aims to make potential customers aware of the Samsun Galaxy Z
Flip. It showcases the standout features of the phone, making it unique because of its foldable
display.
Analysis of the promotional channel finds Instagram to be an ideal platform for sharing
the visual content of the smartphone. The Instagram user base is engaged with visuals that make
it an effective channel for creating awareness. The excitement matches the innovation around the
products like the Galaxy Z Flip.
Promotion 3: Billboard Ad
Samsung Galaxy Z Flip billboard (Iris, 2022)
The folding features Samsung Galaxy Z Flip smartphone displayed on a billboard
structure. It showcases the phone’s folding on a large scale and creates a memorable visual
experience. The ad can be associated with innovation and excitement around the new
technology.
The message communicated in this promotion is that the Samsung Galaxy Z Flip is not
just a smartphone. It showcases the innovation that captivated the audience by emphasizing the
folding feature. The tone of this communication is attention-grabbing because of the extension of
the technology to billboards.
The promotion targets the decision stage of the customer journey. It aims to create a
lasting impression on the viewers. It drives consumer interest in the Galaxy Z Flip by
showcasing its remarkable features on a large scale. Further analysis of the promotional channel
shows the ad is effective because it reaches more audiences. It captured their interest because of
the foldable uniqueness of the display.
In sum, the common theme of the advertisements on different platforms is innovation and
modernity. This theme runs through all three promotions, with two of them focusing on the
unique features of Galaxy Z flip. The promotions integrate this theme to captivate the audience
who demand cutting-edge technology. They create a lasting impression of a modern and stylish
device and brand.
References
Iris. (2022, October 18). Samsung’s folding billboard flips the script to celebrate launch
of galaxy Z Flip4. Little Black Book. https://www.lbbonline.com/news/samsungsfolding-billboard-flips-the-script-to-celebrate-launch-of-galaxy-z-flip4.
Samsung Ads. (n.d.). Samsung Electronics America. Retrieved 10 October 2023, from
https://www.samsung.com/us/business/samsungads/.
Samsung [@samsungmobile]. (2023, July 26). Instagram. Instagram.
https://www.instagram.com/p/CvKH9S5LpqX/?utm_source=ig_web_copy_link.
“The Junior Accountant” Case
Background Information:
After graduating with an undergraduate from business school, Sabrita received a job offer
from a large accounting firm to work as a junior accountant. She was ranked in the top 10 of
her graduating class and could not have been happier.
During the first six months, however, Sabrita began to question her decision to join a large
firm. This is how she described her job: She had to come into the office every day for her
supervisor to give her several files to audit. He told her exactly in what order to do them and
how to plan her day and work. At the end of the day, the supervisor would return to pick up
the completed files. She was required to stay in the office beyond the end of a “normal day”
any time the supervisor needed more done. Then the supervisor collected the files from
several other junior accountants and put them all together and completed the audit himself.
The supervisor would then meet the client to review and discuss the audit. Sabrita did not
ever meet the clients, and her supervisor never talked about this meeting with the team of
junior accountants or the final report.
Questions:
1. Using the Job Characteristics Model (“JCM”);
a. Describe the degree of each of the five characteristics for Sabrita’s job
(i.e., as low or high level). Provide evidence directly from the case
information to show how you know this.
b. Based on this assessment, how will this likely impact Sabrita’s
motivation AND other job attitudes/behaviours?
2. Provide two (2) concrete examples of ways you could redesign Sabrita’s job by
changing the current job characteristics.
3. Aside from job characteristics, provide one (1) more recommendation to
Sabrita or her supervisor to further enhance motivation based on other
concepts presented in the textbook.
Greetings I need your help to work on the second part of the accounting project its due on October 23, but I want us to get it done by Oct 22, its the same format as the first part you assisted me with.
The term project is accessible through the e-book. Follow these steps to access your term project:
1. Logon to e-book through the eClass pairing link
. Click on the “Assignment” icon on the center of the page
3. Scroll down the assignments until you reach the assignment labelled “Term Project Part II”
4. Click on “Term Project- Part II” and a new window will open showing the document.
5. Question 1 has the case of the term project on which you have to work on, while Question 2 offer some guidelines on how to approach it.
Submission step 1: First complete all requirements as described in the Term Project material available in Connect, at the same time you can open the quiz to see how the questions look like in the actual quiz. Once you have solved it you can complete the quiz by answering each question. The quiz can remain open during days until you click to submit.
Submission step 2: Answer the questions of this quiz using the numbers you have reported in the financial statements you have prepared in step 1 and click “submit”. Each answer to this quiz will be marked according to the last digit of your student number.
Format of your answers is essential to get marks. The term project quizzes are automatically graded, if proper format is not used the mark is a zero.
Each answer to this quiz will be marked according to the company assigned to you. When the answer required is a number please input the number with two decimal places and the negative sign when the answer is less than zero (a loss of 500 is reported as -500). Do not type dollar signs ($) or commas but please be mindful of decimal places according to the text of each question in the quiz.
I have uploaded the questions that you would answer once you have finished the requirements in the connect book.
For this assignment, first carefully review the required background materials. Make sure you are highly familiar with the main steps involved in action research and organizational development discussed in the readings. When you are finished reviewing the background materials, take a close look at the scenario in the Case Assignment below.
Case Assignment
Action research is the process of inquiry that is used to assist an individual or organization in solving a problem or improving a situation. For each scenario below, think about the reasons why things did not work out well for the company and more specifically, think about action research in terms of developing a plan for action.
Your task for this assignment is to explain what steps the organization should take by reviewing the standard action research and organizational development steps covered in the background materials. Try to assess which key step is missing in the scenario below.
Then write a 4- to 5-page paper using three scholarly sources from the required and optional readings list addressing the following for the scenario below:
The Perils of XYZ Widget Company
Sales have gone down at the XYZ Widget Company and nobody in the organization, including the CEO, seems to know why. They decide to hire you, an organizational development consultant, to do some action research. You and the CEO spend a lot of time discussing how to proceed and create a contract. The contract specifies that you will limit the scope to finding factors that led to the decrease in sales, come up with a plan of action within one month, and answer the following questions using the background data from the scenario below.
Scenario:
XYZ Widget Company has lost 20% of its market share over the past two years resulting in a sales loss of 1.5 million in 2017 and 2 million in 2018 for a total of $3.5 million. Each widget costs the consumer $29.99 to purchase, and the average customer will purchase three widgets annually. Each XYZ widget is produced for $8 dollars and is of higher quality than the competition.
One competitor (Jim’s Widgets) in the widget industry with a similar product has increased market share by 12% due to a lower production cost of $4 per unit and price to the consumer of $9.99.
The CEO of XYZ Widget Company is reluctant to lower prices and has had to eliminate commissions and bonuses of sales employees who exceed goals. In addition, seven of the 21-member sales team were laid off for non-performance of sales goals.
Develop an Action Research Strategy Plan covering the following Action Research Phases in a report to the CEO.
Data gathering and Diagnosis
Feedback
Planning Change
Intervention
Evaluation
What are the reasons behind the decrease in sales?
What actions or strategy (data/sales/changes) should be taken to turn sales around and regain market share?
What strategy should be taken to increase employee morale?
How long should this strategy take to complete?
Assignment Expectations
Answer the assignment questions directly.
Stay focused on the precise assignment questions; don’t go off on tangents or devote a lot of space to summarizing general background materials.
Make sure to use reliable and credible sources as your references. Articles published in established newspapers or business journals/magazines are preferred. If you use articles from the Internet, make sure they are from credible sources.
Case Assignments are to be prepared in Microsoft Word and should be 4-5 pages in length, in addition to a cover page (course name and number, module number, session name, student name, and date prepared) and reference list (double-spaced, 12 pt. type, Times New Roman font). The paper should include a 2- to 3-sentence introduction, body, and 2- to 3-sentence conclusion in addition to Trident University International’s cover page and a reference list page in APA format.
Support your research with three references that include at least one reference from a peer-reviewed academic journal or textbook found in Trident University’s online library.
Report content should include a brief introduction to the assignment, background information about the organization being studied, the organizational chart, and your discussion of organizational structure in terms of the concepts or theories being applied in the assignment.
Use subtitles, bullets, and tables to improve presentation values.
Attention is to be given to citing sources of information in-text as well as in the reference list at the end of reports. Citation and reference style instructions are available here.
Submit your report in the Case Dropbox for this module on or before the date due, as indicated in the TLC Homepage.
Reference your sources of information with both a bibliography and in-text citations. Citation and reference style instructions are available at Trident University’s Introduction to APA. Another resource is the “Writing Style Guide,” which is found under My Resources in the TLC Portal.
Since you are engaging in research, be sure to cite and reference the sources in APA format. The paper should be written in the third person; this means words like “I,” “we,” and “you” are not appropriate. For more information, see Differences Between First and Third Person.
Submit the presentation through the appropriate Dropbox by the due date. Your submission will be graded with the assignment’s grading rubric.
Grading Note: Students’ Quantitative Reasoning skills were assessed in the Signature Assignment in Case 3 of MGT301 at the Introduction Level. In MGT401, they were assessed in a second Signature Assignment at the Reinforced Level of Quantitative Reasoning. This assignment is the Signature Assignment at the Emphasized Level of Quantitative Reasoning.
Your submission for this Signature Assignment will be assessed on the criteria found in the grading rubric for this assignment to assess Quantitative Reasoning at the Emphasized Level.
Citation and reference style instructions are available here and Trident University’s Introduction to APA.
You will find the following useful as you critique sources:
Cornell University. (2015). Critically analyzing information sources: Critical appraisal and analysis. Retrieved from http://olinuris.library.cornell.edu/ref/research/s…
Cornell University. (2014). Evaluating Web sites: Criteria and tools. Retrieved from http://olinuris.library.cornell.edu/ref/research/w…
Covers: Chapters 9In this assignment, you will complete a questionnaire to provide some insight on your Listening Skills. It is not intended to capture fully accurate results. The assignment responses are not posted or shared with other class members; they appear only in the instructor’s system. Please do not report or share your actual numeric score with the instructor.To approximate your Listening Skills, answer the questions in “Leader’s Self-Insight 9.2”.Score your responses according to the instructions.In a MS Word document, write one paragraph describing any insights you discovered about yourself and how you might use this information in future leader-follower relationships.DO NOT include the filled-out questionnaire with your submission. ONLY submit the paper with a paragraph addressing your insights and future use.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Leader’s Self-Insight 9.2 Listening and Asking Questions
Instructions: Think about how you communicate during a typical day at school or work. Respond to the
following statements based on whether they are Mostly False or Mostly True for you. There are no right or
wrong answers, so answer honestly.
Mostly False
Mostly True
1. I am extremely attentive to what others say.
2. I deliberately show people that I am listening to them.
3. I really enjoy listening very carefully to people.
4. My mind does not wander when someone is talking.
5. I often restate what the person said and ask if I got it right.
6. I usually think about a response while a person is still talking.
7. I often ask people to clarify what they mean.
8. I ask questions in every conversation.
9. I am genuinely curious in conversations about what
other people think.
10. During a conversation, I frequently probe for deeper information.
11. I inquire about others’ points of view on topics.
12. I don’t hesitate to ask what may appear to be dumb questions.
Scoring and Interpretation
Compute two scores from your answers and insert them below. For your listening score, sum 1 point for
each Mostly True answer for items 1–5 and for a Mostly False answer to item 6. For your asking questions
score, sum 1 point for each Mostly True answer to items 7–11. Insert your two scores below.
Listening score ___________________
Asking Questions score ____________
Your first score reflects your listening habits. Managers face many distractions, which makes it hard to pay
attention when someone is speaking. Listening attentively can prevent many communication mistakes.
Your second score reflects your habit of inquiry, which means asking questions to learn more about
something or to confirm your understanding. Asking questions is an important part of an effective leader’s
communication repertoire, as described in the text. Scores of 5–6 reflect excellent communication habits.
Scores of 0–2 suggest that you may need to work on your communication practices. Scores of 3–4 imply
that you are doing okay but have room for improvement.
Source: Partially based on William B. Snavely and John D. McNeill, “Communicator Style and Social Style: Testing a Theoretical
Interface,” Journal of Leadership and Organizational Studies 14, no. 1 (February 2008), pp. 219–232.
Lightbulb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Lifetime
840.08
960.00
953.38
981.14
938.66
1051.14
907.84
1000.10
1073.20
1150.66
1010.57
791.59
896.24
955.35
937.94
1113.18
1108.81
773.62
1038.43
1126.55
950.23
1038.19
1136.67
1031.55
1074.28
976.90
1046.30
986.54
1014.83
920.73
1083.41
873.59
902.92
1049.17
998.58
1010.89
1028.71
1049.92
1080.95
1026.41
958.95
985.17
988.49
1012.99
1070.82
1063.13
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
948.57
1156.42
973.79
845.85
1025.35
931.60
931.69
1063.00
971.95
689.52
999.63
966.65
1022.77
1041.44
987.74
887.28
975.27
904.52
937.41
964.32
1047.56
1109.78
1053.21
1091.02
1114.46
967.33
1131.02
920.96
983.79
972.49
1001.50
811.08
1035.06
1001.30
970.45
1111.68
955.20
920.79
941.75
937.89
1024.13
952.33
879.74
866.77
1080.00
1002.06
1038.74
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
1017.37
988.42
893.74
1022.92
1081.83
1154.07
827.85
Box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Amount
140
310
276
174
136
272
376
324
252
84
176
250
177
89
254
185
186
94
94
221
211
308
169
217
363
123
259
110
102
134
295
171
94
331
218
158
213
244
166
216
156
360
198
217
246
256
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
258
374
338
276
212
216
168
376
245
252
373
270
245
108
190
208
231
206
QMB 3200
Homework #5
Instructions:
1) Solve all the problems. Each problem carries 10 points. Maximum score possible for this
Homework is 110 points.
2) Presenting only the final answer is not sufficient to get complete credit. Show the steps in solution
approach. That way partial credit can be earned to various steps in final solution. It is your
responsibility to demonstrate mastery of the subject matter through your answers.
3) Submit your report as an Excel file. Solve each problem on a separate tab (worksheet). No
Exceptions. Organize your solutions on the Excel worksheet properly. Show where your answers are for
each problem and the sections of the problem. Use Proper formatting
4) Name Your File to show your Full Name and the HW Number
5) Upload your report file on Canvas and verify if everything is fine by opening up the uploaded file. It is
your responsibility to ensure your report is uploaded properly.
6) Do not wait until the last minute. The deadline is strictly enforced by Canvas. No hardcopy
submissions are accepted. No e-mail submissions are accepted. If your file does not appear on Canvas
by the deadline, zero points will be recorded for you for that HW. No exceptions are entertained for
any reason under any circumstance in this regard.
HW Problems:
1) The manager of the Danvers- Hilton Resort Hotel stated that the mean guest bill for a week-end is
$600 or less. A member of the hotel’s accounting staff noticed that the total charges for guest bills
have been increasing in recent months. The accountant will use a sample of future weekend guest bills
to test the manager’s claim.
a) Which form of the hypotheses should be used to test the manager’s claim? Explain.
b) What conclusion is appropriate when H0 cannot be rejected?
c) What conclusion is appropriate when H0 can be rejected?
2) A production line operation is designed to fill cartons with laundry detergent to a mean weight of 32
ounces. A sample of cartons is periodically selected and weighed to determine whether under-filling
or overfilling is occurring. If the sample data lead to a conclusion of under-filling or overfilling, the
production line will be shut down and adjusted to obtain proper filling.
a) Formulate the null and alternative hypotheses that will help in deciding whether to shut down and
adjust the production line.
b) Comment on the conclusion and the decision when H0 cannot be rejected.
c) Comment on the conclusion and the decision when H0 can be rejected.
1
3) CarpetPlace salespersons average $5,000 per week in sales. Steve Jobs, the firm’s vice president,
proposes a new compensation plan with selling incentives. Steve hopes that the results of a trial
selling period will enable him to conclude that the new compensation plan increases the average sales
per salesperson.
a) Develop the appropriate null and alternative hypotheses.
b) What is the Type I error in this situation? What are the consequences of making this error?
c) What is the Type II error in this situation? What are the consequences of making this error?
4) Department of Labor reported the average hourly earnings for production workers to be $15.23 per
hour in 2001. A sample of 75 production workers during 2003 showed a sample mean of $15.86 per
hour. Assuming the population standard deviation is $1.50, can we conclude that an increase occurred
in the mean hourly earnings since 2001? Use α = .05.
5) ABC Securities Firm paid out record year-end bonuses of $150,000 per employee for 2005. Suppose
we would like to take a sample of employees at the ABC Securities firm to see whether the mean
year-end bonus is different from the reported mean of $150,000 for the population.
a) State the null and alternative hypotheses you would use to test whether the year-end bonuses paid
by ABC Securities were different from the population mean.
b) Suppose a sample of 40 employees showed a sample mean year-end bonus of $130,000. Assume a
population standard deviation of $30,000 and compute the p- value.
c) With a .05 as the level of significance, what is your conclusion?
d) Repeat the preceding hypothesis test using the critical value approach.
6) Find the data for the problem in the first worksheet named LightbulbLife of the data file QMB3200Homework#5Data.xlsx. It gives the data on the lifetime in hours of a sample of 100 lightbulbs. The
company manufacturing these bulbs wants to know whether it can claim that its lightbulbs typically
last more than 1000 burning hours. So it did a study.
a. Identify the null and the alternate hypotheses for this study.
b. Can this lightbulb manufacturer claim at a significance level of 5% that its lightbulbs typically
last more than 1000 hours? What about at 1%? Test your hypothesis using both, the critical
value approach and the p-value approach. Clearly state your conclusions.
c. Under what situation would a Type-I error occur? What would be the consequences of a
Type-I error?
d. Under what situation would a Type-II error occur? What would be the consequences of a
Type-II error?
7) A manufacturer of raisin bran cereal claims that each box of cereal has more than 200 grams of
raisins. The firm selects a random sample of 64 boxes and records the amount of raisin (in grams) in
each box. The data is provided on the second worksheet named Raisins in the data file QMB3200Homework#5Data.xlsx.
a. Identify the null and the alternate hypotheses for this study.
b. Is there statistical support for the manufacturer’s claim at a significance level of 5%? What
about at 1%? Test your hypothesis using both, the critical value approach and the p-value
approach. Clearly state your conclusions.
c. Under what situation would a Type-I error occur? What would be the consequences of a
Type-I error?
d. Under what situation would a Type-II error occur? What would be the consequences of a
Type-II error?
2
8) At Western University the historical mean of scholarship examination score for freshman applications
is 1000. Population standard deviation is known to be 200. Each year, the assistant dean uses a sample
of applications to determine whether the mean examination score for the new freshman applications
has changed. A sample of 100 applications provided a mean of 1050.
a) State the hypotheses to test whether the mean examination score for the new freshman applications has
changed.
b) What is the 95% confidence interval estimate of the population mean examination score?
c) Use the 95% confidence interval to conduct a hypothesis test. What is your conclusion?
d) Assuming α = .05, conduct p-value based hypothesis test. What is the conclusion?
e) Assuming α = .05 conduct a critical-value based hypothesis tests. What is the conclusion?
f) How do the results compare in all the three cases?
9) Refer “Summary on Excel functions for Continuous Probability Distributions and Sampling
Distributions.docx”. Use Excel functions and find the t-values for the following cases.
a) Area in the upper tail = 0.025 and Sample Size = 101
b) Area in the upper tail = 0.01 and Sample Size = 83
c) Area in the upper tail = 0.05 and Sample Size = 67
d) Area in the lower tail = 0.005 and Sample Size = 18
e) Area in the lower tail = 0.10 and Sample Size = 26
10) Refer “Summary on Excel functions for Continuous Probability Distributions and Sampling
Distributions.docx”. Use Excel functions and find the chi-square values for the following cases. The
area values indicated as the subscript for χ2 are the areas in the upper tail.
a) χ20.005 with Sample Size = 101
b) χ20.10 with Sample Size = 30
c) χ20.05 with Sample Size = 16
d) χ20.995 with Sample Size = 19
e) χ20.99 with Sample Size = 96
11) Refer “Summary on Excel functions for Continuous Probability Distributions and Sampling
Distributions.docx”. Use Excel functions and find the F upper critical values. Alpha (the area in the
upper tail) and Sample Sizes are as follows:
a) α = .05 with n1 = 6 and n2 = 11
b) α = .025 with n1 = 21 and n2 = 26
c) α = .01 with n1 = 61 and n2 = 61
d) α = .10 with n1 = 9 and n2 = 25
e) α = .025 with n1 = 31 and n2 = 23
3
I want the task within three hours from the time the request is accepted (do not pay attention to the time listed in the task, I want it after three hours)
Proper referencing in APA format is must
Text size 12-Times New Roman only.
Avoid plagiarisms
Avoid copying from any source
Avoid using another teacher’s solution or a similar previous student’s solution because it is a university whose system can access even the solutions published on the study pool website
You must give 100/100 correct solution
Avoid using paraphrasing programs or websites
You must provide a correct answer 100/100
You must do the solution in the same attached file
You must do the solution in the same attached file
Use APA style for writing references.
You must provide a full explanation for each questio
TEXTBOOK
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Decision Making and Problem Solving (MGT 312)
Due Date: End of Week 7, 14-10-2023
Course Name: Decision Making and Problem Student’s Name:
Solving
Course Code: MGT312
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24; FIRST SEMESTER
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: Dr. Ganesh Dash
Students’ Grade:
/ 15
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Define different perspectives and concepts of problem solving in diverse contexts
and business situations. (C.L.O :1.2)
2. Demonstrate decision tools and employ appropriate analytical business models to
break down complex issues. (C.L.O :2.2)
3. Explain and apply critical thinking and cognitive psychology as it pertains to
analyze and synthesize information for problem solving and decision making.
(C.L.O :2.1)
Assignment Instructions for Part-I:
• Log in to Saudi Digital Library (SDL) via University’s website
• On first page of SDL, choose “English Databases”
• From the list find and click on EBSCO database.
• In the search bar of EBSCO find the following article:
Title:
“Become More Comfortable Making Bold Decisions”
Author: Cheryl Strauss Einhorn
Date of Publication:
March 06, 2023
Published:
Harvard Business Review
Assignment Question(s):
(Marks 10)
Part-I
Read the article titled as “Become More Comfortable Making Bold Decisions” by
Cheryl Strauss Einhorn published in Harvard Business Review, and answer the
following Questions:
1. Summarize the article and explain the main issues discussed in the article. (In 400500 words)
(Marks 5)
2. According to the author what is Bold Decision Barometer (BDB). How the five
steps of Bold Decision Barometer (BDB) help you in improving decision-making
and problem-solving skills? Explain with example. Use additional reference to
support your argument. (400-500 words)
(Marks 5)
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer-
The Supply Chain Council defined supply chain management as Managing supply and demand, sourcing raw materials and parts, manufacturing and assembly, warehousing and inventory tracking, order entry and order management, distribution across all channels, and delivery to the customer.
In accordance with the above-mentioned definition, write a detailed report about the sustainability in the supply at one of the following topics:
Companies:
Sustainable Supply chain management (SSCM)
Green Supply chain management
Reverse logistics
Close loop supply chain
Sustainable procurement
Green procurement
Green logistics
Sustainable distribution
Supply chain CSR
Lean supply chain
You can tackle the above topic from different perspective.
Keys for writing: (example)
Definition, enablers, barriers, motives, strategy, example of the success company, describing the link between those topics with the company performance.
Writing Instructions:
– Use font 12, single space, times new roman, minimum of 10 pages
– Plagiarism check (Less than 20%)
– Prepare PowerPoint presentation summarizing the report.
Bounce will be given based on including all the required elements, plagiarism check, references and on your creativity.
The newly merged company JEANSTYLE needs to create a new Mission, Vision, and Values statement for the new company. You have been asked you to work on this project. You will create a document that will establish the foundation for the success of JEANSTYLE. The document will help to support unity in the newly merged company.
Review the scenario for this course, this article on mission vision and values statements, and prepare the following for your assignment:
Write a mission statement for the new company.
Write a vision statement for the new company.
Write a values statement for the new company.
How can JEANSTYLE communicate these three statements to its employees to establish unity across the merged organization?
Assignment Template
Please submit your assignment.
For assistance with your assignment, please use your textbook, all course resources, and any external research and resources you have gathered.
Reference
Mitchell, M., Chawla, K., Kappen, J., & Culek, C. (2021, February 19). How to write mission, vision, and values statements – 100 examples to help guide you through the process. Bâton Global. https://www.batonglobal.com/post/how-to-write-mission-vision-and-values-statements-with-examples
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Unit 3 IP 1
Student Name
Assignment Title
Colorado Technical University
Date
Unit 3 IP 2
Introduction
Introduce the topics that you will cover in your paper. Use 12-pt., Times New Roman,
double space, and indent each paragraph throughout your assignment. Each paragraph should
answer assignment questions. Include a topic sentence, at least 2 qualifier sentences, and a
transition, for a total of 4 sentences. Use APA in-text citations where your references are used.
Do not change the document margins. The assignment should be 4–6 pages (plus a title page and
a reference page). The paper should be written to the CEOs. (NOTE: The newly merged
company name going forward is changing to JEANSTYLE. Prepare your Vision, Mission and
Values Statements referring to the newly merged company name.)
Write a mission statement for the new company, and analyze how it helps to serve
customers.
Explain the purpose and value of a mission statement and cite supporting documentation
from the text or from articles found in the CTU Library.
Provide an example of a mission statement the new company could use.
Write a vision statement for the new company, and analyze how it guides leaders.
Explain the purpose and value of a vision statement and cite supporting documentation
from the text or from articles found in the CTU Library.
Provide an example of a vision statement the new company could use.
Write a values statement for the new company, and analyze how it shapes employee
behavior.
Explain the purpose and value of a values statement and cite supporting documentation
from the text or from articles found in the CTU Library.
Provide an example of a values statement the new company could use.
Unit 3 IP 3
How should the CEOs communicate the statements to establish alignment across the
merged organization?
List and explain communications theories and how a communications plan should be
used to address communicating to company stakeholders. Please use supporting documentation
from the text as well as from the CTU library and cite the sources used.
Describe how the new company can communicate these three statements to its combined
employees to establish unity across the merged organization?
Conclusion
Summarize the main points of your paper. Be sure to proofread your assignment for
organization, grammar, punctuation, and APA style.
References
Cite 3–5 sources in APA format. Here are some examples of references cited in APA
format:
Gliddon, D. G., & Rothwell, W. J. (2018). Innovation leadership. Routledge.
https://login.proxy.cecybrary.com/sso/skillport?context=137758
Khan, M. A., Ismail, F. B., Altaf, H., & Basheer, A. (2020). The interplay of leadership styles,
innovative work behavior, organizational culture, and organizational citizenship
behavior. Sage Open, 10(1).
http://dx.doi.org.proxy.cecybrary.com/10.1177/2158244019898264
Kmec, J. (2012, March 13). Where’s the boss? And what counts as “work”? The Society Pages.
https://thesocietypages.org/socimages/2012/03/13/wheres-the-boss-and-what-counts-aswork/
Unit 3 IP 4
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
Note: All character and company names are fictional and are not intended to
depict any actual person or business.
Knowing that mergers may require a dramatic change in company culture,
you realize that you need to meet with the human resources (HR) and
leadership teams because they will play important roles in the merger. The
leadership team will drive the change, and the HR team will be charged with
managing the change. You have scheduled a meeting with Steve Maine, your
vice president at ALTAP consulting, to consult with him on this project.
“Thanks for meeting me today, Steve,” you begin. “I need to talk through
some of the issues before meeting with the HR and leadership teams at
UWEAR and PALEDENIM. The merger is going well, but it is becoming
apparent that there are some significant change issues that need to be
addressed.”
“I’ve heard good things about your work on this project,” Steve answers. “I’m
sure you have it under control, but I’ll be happy to help where I can.”
“We are dealing with the issues of joining together two very disparate
companies,” you explain. “On the one hand, UWEAR is public and has 100
employees; on the other hand, PALEDENIM is private with only 15
employees. They basically provide the same type of service, but they are
completely different businesses in how they operate inside and outside of the
company.”
You continue, “Yes, and both the employees and managers of each company
have different philosophies and expectations. PALEDENIM employees and
managers have a kind of ‘one-for-all and all-for-one’ attitude. They all chip in
to get the job done. The UWEAR employees and managers look at things
differently. They’re more apt to do their jobs, get them done, and go home
without consideration for what else the rest of the team needs to complete.”
“That is definitely a culture issue,” Steve agrees. “In fact, that is the classic
definition of a culture issue. I’m sure they’re also dealing with the typical
power struggles. I bet everyone is worried about whether their department
will be headed by a UWEAR manager or a PALEDENIM manager.”
1
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
“Exactly,” you say. “I know the intention of the merger is to benefit both
companies, but there are unintended consequences as well. We need to do
whatever we can to help the employees of both companies get through this
with the fewest glitches possible.”
2
I want a solution that is not duplicated or copied, has zero similarity, and adheres to the terms of the file, number of words, and adding references
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment-2
MGT 402-Entrepreneurship and small business
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Entrepreneurship and
small business
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT402
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year: 2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
XXXXX
/ 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
• The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via
allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be
reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover
page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students
or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No
exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced)
font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered
plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted
• Place of Submission is Blackboard.
• Weight 10 Marks
Learning Outcomes:
1. Describe the place of small business in history and explore the strengths and weaknesses of
small business.
2. Design a solid projected financial plan and conduct a breakeven analysis for a small company.
3. Demonstrate the ability to deliver and communicate marketing massages in coherent and
professional manner.
4. Illustrate the ability to think independently and systematically on developing a viable business
model.
Assignment Workload:
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Critical Thinking
Students are supposed to read the attached Case -Panda Sunglasses. Based on your understanding
of the case and basic concepts of Entrepreneurship.
Answer the following question:
1. How can social entrepreneurs such as the founders of Panada Sunglasses use their companies’
social missions to attract customers and promote their business? (2 marks)
2. How should the founders of Panada Sunglasses define a unique selling proposition for their
company that resonate with customers? (2 marks)
3. Write a brief memo to the founders of Panda Sunglasses outlining a bootstrap marketing plan
for the company? (2 marks)
4. Use the business model canvas to illustrate Panda Sunglasses business model. Can you identify
other revenue streams that could support the company? How can the company strengthen its
relationships with customers? (2marks)
5.How should the founders of Panda Sunglasses use social media to market their company and its
products? What can they do to increase the traffic to and generate more sales from their
company’s Web site? (2 marks)
The Answer must follow the outline points below:
• Each answer should be within the range of 300 to 350-word counts.
• Reference
Note: You can support your answer with the course book.
You can use secondary sources available on internet.
Answer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the allocated folder.Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.Late submissions will NOT be accepted.Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions. All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2
Public Management (MGT 324)
Due Date: 11/11/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Public Management
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 324
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name: XXXXXX
Students’ Grade:
/10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via the
allocated folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling in your information on the cover page.
Students must mention the question number clearly in their answers.
Late submissions will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Course Learning Outcomes (CLOs):
1. Describe the simple and complex issues pertaining to public management
2. Demonstrate different management and leadership styles for different situations
Assignment Questions:
Discuss the following questions:
Q1. “Leaders are born, not made.” In light of this statement, briefly explain the concept of
leadership and its role in organizational development in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Q2. “Leadership strategy is essential for the growth and success of an organsiation”. In light
of this statement, discuss the different leadership approaches to leading an organization and
analyze work and their relevance in the present-day context in about 500 words. (5 Marks)
Answers
The purpose of this assignment is to explain core concepts related to the U.S. financial system.Read the Chapter 1 Mini Case in Financial Management: Theory and Practice. Complete Parts 1 and 2.Using complete sentences and academic vocabulary, please answer questions a through d.While APA style is not required for the body of this assignment, solid academic writing is expected, and documentation of sources should be presented using APA formatting guidelines.This assignment uses a rubric. Please review the rubric prior to beginning the assignment to become familiar with the expectations for successful completion.
You will need to submit a 2-3 page reflection paper with your thoughts regarding the life skill programs your group reviews. You reflection paper should include which life skill program seemed most effective and why, how you can implement some of the programs content into your own work, your reactions to how the programs are evaluated, and any questions you have about the programs and how they are implemented. You do not need a title page.The life skill programs are: The First Tee – https://firsttee.org/Todd Martin Youth Leadership – https://www.tmyl.org/ Life Sports – https://lifesports.osu.edu/Detroit Police Athletic League – https://detroitpal.org/
Please create a workbook called Answer and all results should be presented in the first sheet of it. You can find the Problem and Data you may need in the following attachment. I want to understand the details (function and theory, etc) that may need to be used in this question. So please write your process and answer as specifical as possible you can.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Computations for each ticker (TSLA, SP500 and EURUSD) should be performed
on different sheets to be placed after the results. You can put the data on a different
sheet or together with the computations of the corresponding ticker. All sheets should
be formatted professionally. Use titles when necessary, format numbers to an
appropriate number of decimals, use borders to delimitate blocks of computations like
a binomial tree for the stock or the call.
The data for the problem can be found in the following attach. The file contains
daily values for the price of TSLA, the level of the S&P 500 and the EUR/USD
exchange rate for the 3 months prior to 9/26/2023. Note that the dates for which we
have data for the EUR/USD might differ from the ones for the S&P 500 or TSLA.
Here’s the problem:
Date
TSLA
27-Jun-23
250.21
28-Jun-23
256.24
29-Jun-23
257.5
30-Jun-23
261.77
3-Jul-23
279.82
5-Jul-23
282.48
6-Jul-23
276.54
7-Jul-23
274.43
10-Jul-23
269.61
11-Jul-23
269.79
12-Jul-23
271.99
13-Jul-23
277.9
14-Jul-23
281.38
17-Jul-23
290.38
18-Jul-23
293.34
19-Jul-23
291.26
20-Jul-23
262.9
21-Jul-23
260.02
24-Jul-23
269.06
25-Jul-23
265.28
26-Jul-23
264.35
27-Jul-23
255.71
28-Jul-23
266.44
31-Jul-23
267.43
1-Aug-23
261.07
2-Aug-23
254.11
3-Aug-23
259.32
4-Aug-23
253.86
7-Aug-23
251.45
8-Aug-23
249.7
9-Aug-23
242.19
10-Aug-23
245.34
11-Aug-23
242.65
14-Aug-23
239.76
15-Aug-23
232.96
16-Aug-23
225.6
17-Aug-23
219.22
18-Aug-23
215.49
21-Aug-23
231.28
22-Aug-23
233.19
23-Aug-23
236.86
24-Aug-23
230.04
25-Aug-23
238.59
28-Aug-23
238.82
29-Aug-23
257.18
30-Aug-23
256.9
31-Aug-23
1-Sep-23
5-Sep-23
6-Sep-23
7-Sep-23
8-Sep-23
11-Sep-23
12-Sep-23
13-Sep-23
14-Sep-23
15-Sep-23
18-Sep-23
19-Sep-23
20-Sep-23
21-Sep-23
22-Sep-23
25-Sep-23
26-Sep-23
258.08
245.01
256.49
251.92
251.49
248.5
273.58
267.48
271.3
276.04
274.39
265.28
266.5
262.59
255.7
244.88
246.99
244.12
Date
S&P 500
27-Jun-23 4,378.41
28-Jun-23 4,376.86
29-Jun-23 4,396.44
30-Jun-23 4,450.38
3-Jul-23 4,455.59
5-Jul-23 4,446.82
6-Jul-23 4,411.59
7-Jul-23 4,398.95
10-Jul-23 4,409.53
11-Jul-23 4,439.26
12-Jul-23 4,472.16
13-Jul-23 4,510.04
14-Jul-23 4,505.42
17-Jul-23 4,522.79
18-Jul-23 4,554.98
19-Jul-23 4,565.72
20-Jul-23 4,534.87
21-Jul-23 4,536.34
24-Jul-23 4,554.64
25-Jul-23 4,567.46
26-Jul-23 4,566.75
27-Jul-23 4,537.41
28-Jul-23 4,582.23
31-Jul-23 4,588.96
1-Aug-23 4,576.73
2-Aug-23 4,513.39
3-Aug-23 4,501.89
4-Aug-23 4,478.03
7-Aug-23 4,518.44
8-Aug-23 4,499.38
9-Aug-23 4,467.71
10-Aug-23 4,468.83
11-Aug-23 4,464.05
14-Aug-23 4,489.72
15-Aug-23 4,437.86
16-Aug-23 4,404.33
17-Aug-23 4,370.36
18-Aug-23 4,369.71
21-Aug-23 4,399.77
22-Aug-23 4,387.55
23-Aug-23 4,436.01
24-Aug-23 4,376.31
25-Aug-23 4,405.71
28-Aug-23 4,433.31
29-Aug-23 4,497.63
30-Aug-23 4,514.87
31-Aug-23
1-Sep-23
5-Sep-23
6-Sep-23
7-Sep-23
8-Sep-23
11-Sep-23
12-Sep-23
13-Sep-23
14-Sep-23
15-Sep-23
18-Sep-23
19-Sep-23
20-Sep-23
21-Sep-23
22-Sep-23
25-Sep-23
26-Sep-23
4,507.66
4,515.77
4,496.83
4,465.48
4,451.14
4,457.49
4,487.46
4,461.90
4,467.44
4,505.10
4,450.32
4,453.53
4,443.95
4,402.20
4,330.00
4,320.06
4,337.44
4,273.53
Date
EUR/USD
26-Jun-23
1.091
27-Jun-23
1.0957
28-Jun-23
1.0916
29-Jun-23
1.0868
2-Jul-23
1.0908
3-Jul-23
1.0913
4-Jul-23
1.0885
5-Jul-23
1.0857
6-Jul-23
1.0891
9-Jul-23
1.097
10-Jul-23
1.1006
11-Jul-23
1.1014
12-Jul-23
1.1145
13-Jul-23
1.1223
16-Jul-23
1.1228
17-Jul-23
1.1238
18-Jul-23
1.1229
19-Jul-23
1.1205
20-Jul-23
1.1137
23-Jul-23
1.1125
24-Jul-23
1.1063
25-Jul-23
1.105
26-Jul-23
1.1078
27-Jul-23
1.0979
30-Jul-23
1.1024
31-Jul-23
1.0998
1-Aug-23
1.1008
2-Aug-23
1.0944
3-Aug-23
1.0952
6-Aug-23
1.1003
7-Aug-23
1.1003
8-Aug-23
1.0959
9-Aug-23
1.0978
10-Aug-23
1.0982
13-Aug-23
1.0944
14-Aug-23
1.091
15-Aug-23
1.0904
16-Aug-23
1.0875
17-Aug-23
1.0875
20-Aug-23
1.0876
21-Aug-23
1.0898
22-Aug-23
1.0847
23-Aug-23
1.0866
24-Aug-23
1.0799
27-Aug-23
1.0797
28-Aug-23
1.0826
29-Aug-23
30-Aug-23
31-Aug-23
3-Sep-23
4-Sep-23
5-Sep-23
6-Sep-23
7-Sep-23
10-Sep-23
11-Sep-23
12-Sep-23
13-Sep-23
14-Sep-23
17-Sep-23
18-Sep-23
19-Sep-23
20-Sep-23
21-Sep-23
24-Sep-23
25-Sep-23
26-Sep-23
1.0869
1.0933
1.0844
1.0776
1.0794
1.0726
1.0724
1.0698
1.0718
1.075
1.0753
1.0734
1.0637
1.0668
1.0693
1.0682
1.0653
1.0662
1.0648
1.0592
1.0522
MANAGEMENT IN THE 21ST CENTURY
Assignment Overview
Assessing your Leadership Skills
In this week’s Case Assignment, you researched essential management concepts. Critically assessing managerial skills throughout your career allows for continued growth. For the SLP, you will complete a self-evaluation which will include a plan for growth/development and skill-building based on the following Managerial Skill Assessment Categories of Planning, Organizing, Leading, and Controlling:
Planning: A manager’s role in supporting the company’s vision and mission and how managers establish and track goals and objectives for themselves and their teams.
Organizing: Organization Design, including individual job responsibilities, and maintaining Corporate Culture and Social Networks.
Leading: Leadership and Decision-Making, Working in Groups or Teams, Motivating subordinates, or managing a Diverse Workforce.
Controlling: Systems/Processes (Establishing and tracking performance standards), or Strategic Human Resources: having the right people in positions.
SLP 1 Resources: Use the following Sources to help fill out the attached template.
What Do Managers Do? (2020)
The Roles Managers Play (2020)
Is Planning Important? (2020)
Formal Organizational Planning in Practice (2020)
Group Decision-Making (2020)
Contingency and System Management (2020)
Team Diversity (2020)
SLP Assignment Expectations
Management & Leadership Self-Assessment
Using the provided template Self-Appraisal Form (MGT280 SLP1), complete the following written Appraisal and Plan for each area:
Fill out the top section with your name, years of experience, date, and a narrative overview of your Managerial or Supervisory Experience. (50-word minimum).
Check the skill level box for each section to determine your skill level on each category (10):
I have experience with this attribute or have mastered this skill.
I am developing this attribute or have basic knowledge of this skill.
I have little to no experience or knowledge of this attribute or skill.
Evaluate your attribute or skills for each Category of Planning, Organizing, Leading, and Controlling on the template using the following scale (2-3 sentences each):
Self Assessment (2-3 sentences): Example: Apply to your real-life experiences within the work environment.
Growth & Development Plan (2-3 sentences): Example: My goal is to move into xx position, and I need to learn how to use xx software to track goals. Example: It is necessary to be more effective in leading a team or group because xx.
Training Opportunities: (2-3 Sentences): Look at upcoming classes, education at work, and online opportunities for training to enhance your skillset. Provide links to training if applicable.
Upload the template to the SLP Dropbox.
Discussion Board
We have all known supervisors or co-workers who think they were bosses; some displayed admirable leadership traits, and others may have needed a refresher course on how to manage people. Pursuing an undergraduate degree at Trident could open up doors for you to supervise a team or find yourself at a higher level of management. Based on your experience and course module readings, what leadership traits would you like to embrace, and which ones should have no part in your repertoire ?
Module 1 Discussion Resources
Managerial Roles (2021)
Managerial Skills (2021)
Trends in Management and Leadership (2021)
Habits of Highly Successful Managers (2021)
Qualities of a Successful Manager (2020)
The Six Common Characteristics of Successful Managers (2019) Module 1 Discussion
Share at least two leadership characteristics that are appealing to you and provide a rationale or background as to why you believe these traits will be beneficial to you and your future employees. (Research Support Required)
On the flip side, share a supervisory nightmare you may have experienced or heard about. Make sure we understand why you deem it a negative experience for workers. (No Research Required)
Assignment ExpectationsTo receive full credit for the discussion, you must complete the following:
Enter a minimum of 3 quality posts: Your initial/original post of 150 words or more and responses of at least 100 words to 2 classmates.
Also, be sure to cite at least one source in your initial post.
Provide a References section at the bottom of your original post in APA 7 style.
Write and develop an APA formatted, 4- to 6-page paper that includes:
Introduction
Explanation of the three to four of the most important leadership concepts you have learned in this course. Use examples from your own experience and use research along with in-text citations that provide a foundation of validity to your analysis.
A detailed personal Leadership Improvement plan. Identify the key elements of your plan to strengthen your practice of leadership (e.g., what, when, how, resources, and so forth).
Conclusion
The following are formatting guidelines, which are expected to be used for the written assignment:
– APA style formatting is required for each written assignment. Please use the APA 7th edition.
– All papers are to consist of original composition, double spaced, 12 type font in Times New Roman.
– The page length requirement does not include the title page, abstract or reference pages.
– Papers should begin with an introduction and should end with a conclusion.
– The body of the paper must include citations according to the APA style format.
– The assignment should contain at least six references.
Read the attached case study. Answer the questions below in a Word file and attached the file to this assignment.
This case study is around dram shop laws which basically states that a restaurant/bar/ or any establishment may be held libel for any damages when they intentionally sell alcoholic beverages to a known intoxicated person. This is most often a major problem in restaurant or bars. But in this case study it is centered on a football staduim, which creates more challenges.
Questions:
1) In your own words describe the dram shop laws in the state you are currently living in.
2) What actions should stadium administrators have taken when they found concession managers were not always enforcing the three-drink maximum policy?
3) How should employees of the stadium determine if someone is too inebriated to operate a vehicle?
4) What could stadium administrators do to ensure accountability of the alcoholic products available at each concession stand?
5) If it is discovered that employees at the concession stand with higher than normal consumption rates had tampered with the control system how should managers and stadium administration rectify the problem? Would this instance be considered employee theft?
The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Primary Task Response: Within the Discussion Board area, write 400–600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. This will be the foundation for future discussions by your classmates. Be substantive and clear, and use examples to reinforce your ideas:
Theresa and Mike want to create a merged company called JEANSTYLE that is defined by a culture of integrity, thus aiding employees in making ethical decisions, such as in Joe’s ethical dilemma. They will begin by understanding the methods of embedding ethical decision making and behaviors into the culture, including their responsibilities as leaders. You, the consultant, are asked to provide recommendations and guidance to help them shape the culture they are intending. This discussion is about values, a culture of integrity, and the role of leaders in creating and maintaining it.
Review the scenario for this course, and discuss the following with your classmates:
What ethical theories can be used to create a values-driven culture of integrity?
What organizational programs or processes can help achieve a values-driven culture of integrity?
In this type of culture, what decision-making processes can the CEOs use to make ethical decisions?
Include any insights from your professional experience.
Responses to Other Students: Respond to at least 2 of your fellow classmates with at least a 200-word reply about their Primary Task Response regarding items you found to be compelling and enlightening. To help you with your discussion, please consider the following questions:
What did you learn from your classmate’s posting? What additional questions do you have after reading the posting?
What clarification do you need regarding the posting?
What differences or similarities do you see between your posting and other classmates’ postings?
For assistance with your assignment, please use your textbook and all course resources.
Discussion Board Rubric
Expectation Points Possible Points Earned Comments
Application of Learning Material Content: Post demonstrates understanding of Learning Material content.
25
Application of Course Knowledge: Post contributes unique perspectives or insights gleaned from text/learning resources, or specified by assignment.
25
DB Responses: Responds substantively to two posts. Responses encourage interaction in the Discussion Board and classroom community.
10
Organization: Post presents information logically and is clearly relevant to discussion topic.
8
Professional Language: Posts contain accurate grammar, spelling, and/or punctuation with few or no errors. Any resources should be cited in APA format or style specified in the assignment.
7
Total Points
75
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
Note: All character and company names are fictional and are not intended to
depict any actual person or business.
Knowing that mergers may require a dramatic change in company culture,
you realize that you need to meet with the human resources (HR) and
leadership teams because they will play important roles in the merger. The
leadership team will drive the change, and the HR team will be charged with
managing the change. You have scheduled a meeting with Steve Maine, your
vice president at ALTAP consulting, to consult with him on this project.
“Thanks for meeting me today, Steve,” you begin. “I need to talk through
some of the issues before meeting with the HR and leadership teams at
UWEAR and PALEDENIM. The merger is going well, but it is becoming
apparent that there are some significant change issues that need to be
addressed.”
“I’ve heard good things about your work on this project,” Steve answers. “I’m
sure you have it under control, but I’ll be happy to help where I can.”
“We are dealing with the issues of joining together two very disparate
companies,” you explain. “On the one hand, UWEAR is public and has 100
employees; on the other hand, PALEDENIM is private with only 15
employees. They basically provide the same type of service, but they are
completely different businesses in how they operate inside and outside of the
company.”
You continue, “Yes, and both the employees and managers of each company
have different philosophies and expectations. PALEDENIM employees and
managers have a kind of ‘one-for-all and all-for-one’ attitude. They all chip in
to get the job done. The UWEAR employees and managers look at things
differently. They’re more apt to do their jobs, get them done, and go home
without consideration for what else the rest of the team needs to complete.”
“That is definitely a culture issue,” Steve agrees. “In fact, that is the classic
definition of a culture issue. I’m sure they’re also dealing with the typical
power struggles. I bet everyone is worried about whether their department
will be headed by a UWEAR manager or a PALEDENIM manager.”
1
Problem B: Regulatory Compliance
“Exactly,” you say. “I know the intention of the merger is to benefit both
companies, but there are unintended consequences as well. We need to do
whatever we can to help the employees of both companies get through this
with the fewest glitches possible.”
2
https://www.loom.com/share/4e757cfd6528478db6aea6a69e69230d?t=3 for the activity 5 word document convert and rewrite/elaborate base on the screenshot feedback thanks and for activity 3 can you convert and rewrite it to SMART format and elaborate according to the screenshot of the feedback please. Thanks
To review and correct the research (From point 1 to Point 7, highlighted in yellow). Make sure don’t make major changes or extra paragraph in each point rather than to make sure the written answer is correct and understandable for each point, because this is for postgraduate student and as per the course requirements.To complete point # 8&9 (SUMMARY of FINDINGS & RECOMMENDATIONS) Summary of findings no more half a page and the same for recommendations. Recommendations should be linked with Pie charts.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How satisfied are you with variety of dishes in the menu?
Soups
Salads
Appetizers
Main dishes
Beverages
Very dissatisfied
8.00%
8.00%
7.69%
7.69%
7.69%
2
2
2
2
2
Soups
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
8.00%
0.00%
4.00%
12.00%
76.00%
Salads
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
8.00%
4.00%
12.00%
20.00%
56.00%
Dissatisfied
0.00%
4.00%
3.85%
0.00%
0.00%
0
1
1
0
0
Average
4.00%
12.00%
3.85%
0.00%
7.69%
SOUPS
8%
Beverages
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
Dissatisfied
0.00%
Average
7.69%
Satisfied
23.08%
0%
4%
76%
Very dissatisfied
Appetizers
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
Dissatisfied
3.85%
Average
3.85%
Satisfied
3.85%
Very satisfied
80.77%
Main dishes
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
Dissatisfied
0.00%
Average
0.00%
Satisfied
11.54%
Very satisfied
80.77%
1
3
1
0
2
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
APPETIZERS
7%
4%
4%
4%
81%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
61.54%
Very dissatisfied
Satisfied
12.00%
20.00%
3.85%
11.54%
23.08%
3
5
1
3
6
Very satisfied
76.00%
56.00%
80.77%
80.77%
61.54%
Total
19
14
21
21
16
25
25
26
26
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.48
4.12
4.46
4.58
4.31
26
0
SALADS
8%
4%
4%
12%
12%
56%
20%
Satisfied
Very dissatisfied
Very satisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
MAIN DISHES
8% 0%
11%
4%
81%
Very dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
BEVERAGES
8%
0%
8%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
23%
61%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How satisfied are you with ambience of the restaurant?
Very dissatisfied
3.85%
1
Dissatisfied
3.85%
1
Average
3.85%
1
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH AMBIENCE
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
3.85%
3.85%
3.85%
26.92%
61.54%
4%
61%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
26.92%
7
Very satisfied
61.54%
D ARE YOU WITH AMBIENCE OF THE RESTAURANT?
4%
4%
4%
27%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Total
16
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.38
26
0
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How satisfied are you with the dishes and beverages prices?
1
Very dissatisfied
3.85%
1
Dissatisfied
3.85%
1
Average
11.54%
3
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH THE DISHES
BEVERAGES PRICES?
4%
61%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
19.23%
5
Very satisfied
61.54%
D ARE YOU WITH THE DISHES AND
EVERAGES PRICES?
4%
12%
19%
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Total
16
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.31
26
0
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How would you evaluate the quality of food?
1
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
2
Dissatisfied
0.00%
0
Average
3.85%
1
HOW WOULD YOU EVALUATE TH
81%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
7.69%
2
Very satisfied
80.77%
W WOULD YOU EVALUATE THE QUALITY OF FOOD?
7%
0%
4%
8%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Total
21
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.54
26
0
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How would you evaluate the cleanliness of the restaurant?
1
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
2
Dissatisfied
0.00%
0
Average
3.85%
1
HOW WOULD YOU EVALUATE TH
77%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
11.54%
3
Very satisfied
76.92%
W WOULD YOU EVALUATE THE CLEANLINESS OF THE
RESTAURANT?
8%
0%
4%
11%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Total
20
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.5
26
0
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
How satisfied are you with working hours?
1
Very dissatisfied
7.69%
2
Dissatisfied
3.85%
1
Average
7.69%
2
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH WORK
65%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
15.38%
4
Very satisfied
65.38%
ISFIED ARE YOU WITH WORKING HOURS?
8%
4%
8%
15%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Total
17
26
Answered
Skipped
Weighted Average
4.27
26
0
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
What is your age?
Answer Choices
Under 18
18-24
25-34
35-44
45-54
55-64
65+
Responses
3.85%
3.85%
38.46%
34.62%
15.38%
3.85%
0.00%
Answered
Skipped
1
1
10
9
4
1
0
26
0
15%
35%
Under 18
18-24
WHAT IS YOUR AGE?
4%
0%
4%
4%
15%
38%
18-24
25-34
35-44
45-54
55-64
65+
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
With whom do you visit the restaurant?
Answer Choices
Alone
Family
Kids
Friends
Responses
3.85%
84.62%
0.00%
11.54%
Answered
Skipped
1
22
0
3
26
0
WITH WHOM DO YOU V
WITH WHOM DO YOU VISIT THE RESTAURANT?
11%
4%
0%
85%
Alone
Family
Kids
Friends
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant
Services
Sunday, October 15, 2023
Powered by
26
Total Responses
Date Created: Tuesday, September 26, 2023
Complete Responses: 26
Powered by
Q1: How satisfied are you with variety of dishes in the menu?
Beverages
20%
Soups
20%
Salads
19%
Main dishes
21%
Appetizers
20%
Soups
Powered by
Salads
Appetizers
Main dishes
Beverages
Q1: How satisfied are you with variety of dishes in the menu?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
Soups
8.00%
2
0%
0
4.00%
1
12.00%
3
76.00%
19
25
4.48
Salads
8.00%
2
4.00%
1
12.00%
3
20.0%
5
56.00%
14
25
4.12
Appetizers
7.69%
2
3.85%
1
3.85%
1
3.85%
1
80.77%
21
26
4.46
Main
dishes
7.69%
2
0%
0
0%
0
11.54%
3
80.77%
21
26
4.58
Beverages
7.69%
2
0%
0
7.69%
2
23.08%
6
61.54%
16
26
4.31
Q2: How satisfied are you with ambience of the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Very dissatisfied Dissatisfied
4% Average
4%
4%
Satisfied
27%
Very satisfied
61%
Very dissatisfied
Powered by
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Q2: How satisfied are you with ambience of the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
3.85%
1
3.85%
1
3.85%
1
26.92%
7
61.54%
16
26
4.38
Q3: How satisfied are you with the dishes and beverages prices?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Very
satisfied
61%
Very dissatisfied Dissatisfied
4%
4%
Average
12%
Satisfied
19%
Very dissatisfied
Powered by
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Q3: How satisfied are you with the dishes and beverages prices?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
3.85%
1
3.85%
1
11.54%
3
19.23%
5
61.54%
16
26
4.31
Q4: How would you evaluate the quality of food?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Very satisfied
81%
Very dissatisfied…Dissatisfied
0%
Average…
Satisfied…
Very dissatisfied
Powered by
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Q4: How would you evaluate the quality of food?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
7.69%
2
0%
0
3.85%
1
7.69%
2
80.77%
21
26
4.54
Q5: How would you evaluate the cleanliness of the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Very satisfied
77%
Very dissatisfied
Powered by
Very dissatisfied Dissatisfied
Average
8%
0%
4%
Satisfied
11%
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Q5: How would you evaluate the cleanliness of the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
7.69%
2
0%
0
3.85%
1
11.54%
3
76.92%
20
26
4.5
Q6: How satisfied are you with working hours?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
8%
4%
Average
8%
Very satisfied
65%
Satisfied
15%
Very dissatisfied
Powered by
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Q6: How satisfied are you with working hours?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Powered by
VERY
DISSATIS
FIED
DISSATIS
FIED
AVERAGE
SATISFIE
D
VERY
SATISFIE
D
TOTAL
WEIGHTE
D
AVERAGE
7.69%
2
3.85%
1
7.69%
2
15.38%
4
65.38%
17
26
4.27
Q7: What is your age?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
55-64
4%
45-54
15%
65+ Under 18
0%
4%
18-24
4%
25-34
38%
35-44
35%
Under 18
Powered by
18-24
25-34
35-44
45-54
55-64
65+
Q7: What is your age?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
ANSWER CHOICES
Under 18
3.85%
1
18-24
3.85%
1
25-34
38.46%
10
35-44
34.62%
9
45-54
15.38%
4
55-64
3.85%
1
65+
0%
0
TOTAL
Powered by
RESPONSES
26
Q8: With whom do you visit the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
Kids
0%
Friends
11%
Alone
Powered by
Alone
4%
Family
Kids
Friends
Family
85%
Q8: With whom do you visit the restaurant?
Answered: 26 Skipped: 0
ANSWER CHOICES
Alone
3.85%
1
Family
84.62%
22
0%
0
11.54%
3
Kids
Friends
TOTAL
Powered by
RESPONSES
26
Customer Satisfaction in Restaurant Services
1. MARKETING DASHBOARD
SOUPS
SALADS
8%
8%
0%
4%
12%
4%
76%
12%
56%
20%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Average
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
APPETIZERS
MAIN DISHES
7%
4%
8%
4%
4%
0%
11%
81%
81%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH THE DISHES
AND BEVERAGES PRICES?
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH AMBIENCE OF
THE RESTAURANT?
4%
Average
4%
4%
4%
4%
12%
27%
61%
19%
61%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
HOW WOULD YOU EVALUATE THE QUALITY
OF FOOD?
7%
81%
0%
Average
HOW WOULD YOU EVALUATE THE
CLEANLINESS OF THE RESTAURANT?
4%
8%
0%
4%
8%
11%
77%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
WHAT IS YOUR AGE?
HOW SATISFIED ARE YOU WITH WORKING
HOURS?
4%
8%
4%
0%
4%
4%
15%
8%
38%
15%
65%
35%
Very dissatisfied
Dissatisfied
Satisfied
Very satisfied
Average
Under 18
WITH WHOM DO YOU VISIT THE
RESTAURANT?
11%
4%
0%
85%
Alone
Family
Kids
Friends
18-24
25-34
35-44
45-54
55-64
65+
2. RESEARCH OJECTIVES
The objectives of this research are:
1. To analyze the customers’ level of satisfaction towards restaurant services.
2. To study various features that restaurant should possess to satisfy the customers.
3. RESEARCH DESIGN
A research design is to target a number of customers with specific questions that we believed
would satisfy our research objectives. To expedite the date collection process, we used an
online survey, delivered via email or Short Message Service (SMS).
4. SAMPLING DESIGN
Simple random sampling designs were used to select twenty-six (26) customers. Five (5) points
Likert scale and multiple-choice questions were used to prepare a questionnaire.
5. RESEARCH INSTRUMENT DESIGN
A questionnaire instrument was developed based on the group discussion. A self-administrated
survey was used for Indian restaurant in Khobar city. The questionnaire consisted of two parts.
The first part was targeted to identify customers’ perceptions about variety of dishes in the
menu, food quality, ambience, cleanliness, and price. The second part was designed to measure
demographic information included age and with whom did you visit?
6. DATA COLLECTION
The research is based on both primary and secondary data. A total of twenty-six (26)
respondents were asked to participate. The respondents were filled-out the online survey. All
of respondents have had experiences with the restaurant services.
7. DATA ANALYSES
Data was processed and analyzed by the Microsoft Excel software.
8. SUMMARY of FINDINGS
•
Satisfaction of dish varieties in the menu
There were 19 respondents (76%) very satisfied with soups, 14 respondents (56%) very
satisfied with salads, 21 respondents (80.77%) very satisfied with appetizers, 21 respondents
(80.77%) very satisfied with main dishes and 16 respondents (61.54%) very satisfied with
beverages.
To be Completed
9. RECOMMENDATIONS
To be Completed
Exploring Full-Service Grant Consulting Companies in Canada
Description:
The purpose of this assignment is to research and write a one-page document on “full-service grant consulting companies” in Canada. The goal of this assignment is to give an overview of what these companies are, what they do, how they are important, and what they contribute to organizations in securing grants. Moreover, you should provide some examples of such companies operating in Canada.
Instructions:
The first step is to research what full-service grant consulting companies are and why they are relevant to grant acquisition in Canada.
Discover what these companies typically offer in terms of services and functions. Is there any specific assistance they provide to grant-seeking organizations?
Describe the importance of grant consulting companies that offer full-service grants. Describe how they contribute to the success of grant applications and the impact on communities and organizations.
Provide brief profiles of at least two Canadian full-service grant consulting companies. Include their names, locations, areas of expertise, and any notable achievements or projects they have worked on.
Incorporate any relevant statistics, case studies, or examples that illustrate how these companies are helping Canada acquire grants.
Make sure your one-page write-up is clear, concise, and well-structured. Include external sources with proper citations and grammar.
A standard font and margin should be used throughout the assignment, which should be one page in length.
Make sure your assignment is submitted electronically by the deadline.
Grading Criteria:
Based on the following criteria, your assignment will be evaluated:
An understanding of the concept of a full-service grant consulting firm.
Coherence and clarity of the writing.
The accuracy of the information and the use of examples that are relevant.
Ensure proper grammar and style in your writing.
A 500-word essay must be no longer than one page.
Read the article The Future of Fast-Food Drive Thru Arrives Early Answer the following questions in a post and respond to at least one other student to get full credit. Your comment to another student must be of substance and not simply “I agree”.Question 1: In the article it notes that “according to QSR magazine’s Drive-Thru Study, more consumers in 2021 were open to placing drive-thru orders with an employee walking alongside their car (like Chick-fil-A) versus through a speaker/pay window. Thirty-five percent of respondents agreed or completely agreed with the notion. That was 28 percent last year. ” Do you think other fast-food restaurant will follow this trend? Why or why not?Question 2: The article discusses Chick-Fil-A, Taco Bell, and KFC and other fast food brands’ different technology and approaches to drive through service, which ones do you think will click with consumers and which do you think wont’? Why?Question 3: What is the biggest surprise / take away to you in the article? Why?
Exercise 18-5 (Algo) Issuance of shares; noncash consideration [LO18-4]
During its first year of operations, Eastern Data Links Corporation entered into the following transactions relating to shareholders’ equity. The articles of incorporation authorized the issue of 10 million common shares, $1 par per share, and 3 million preferred shares, $50 par per share.
February 12 Sold 4 million common shares, for $9 per share.
February 13 Issued 43,000 common shares to attorneys in exchange for legal services.
February 13 Sold 70,000 of its common shares and 8,000 preferred shares for a total of $1,055,000.
November 15 Issued 440,000 of its common shares in exchange for equipment for which the cash price was known to be $4,068,000.
Required:
Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record each transaction.
Define ethnocentrism and discuss how it impacts the way you view the world, particularly in a business environment.How can ethnocentrism negatively affect multicultural communication in the business world?
I want a solution that is not duplicated or copied, has zero similarity, and adheres to the terms of the file, number of words, and adding references
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 2 MGT403 (1st Term 2023-2024)
Deadline:11/11/2023 @ 23:59
(To be posted/released to students on BB in Week 8)
Course Name: Knowledge Management
Course Code: MGT-403
Student’s Name:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Student’s ID Number:
Academic Year: 2023 – 2024 1st Term
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
This assignment is an individual assignment.
Due date for Assignment 1 is by the end of Week 11 (11/11/2023)
• The Assignment must be submitted only in WORD format via allocated folder.
• Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
• Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
• Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
• Late submission will NOT be accepted.
• Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or
other resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
• All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font.
No pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
ASSIGNMENT-2
Knowledge Management (MGT-403)
First Semester (2023-2024)
Course Learning Outcomes-Covered
Define the different Knowledge types and explain how they are addressed by knowledge
management in different business environments.
Identify and analyse role of communities of practice in knowledge management and the challenges
and issues pertaining to community of practice.
Demonstrate effective knowledge management skills to utilize knowledge management tools for the
benefits of the organization.
The focus of the assignment is to evaluate the understanding level of students related to communities
of Practice, learning organization, and various techniques used to capture tacit and explicit knowledge.
Assignment Questions
Q.1: Write a detailed note on the “Three forms of knowledge” Explained by K. Wiig in
his knowledge management model. Briefly describe the four types of knowledge
explained by K. Wiig. (2 Marks)
Q.2: Discuss in detail the following techniques of capturing tacit Knowledge? (3 Marks)
a. Learning History.
b. Storytelling.
c. Interviews.
Q. 3: Why are “Communities of practice” Important? How can organizations cultivate
communities of practice? How can these communities of practice contribute towards the
knowledge needs of the organization? (2.5 Marks)
Q. 4: Compare and contrast some different types of communities of practice. Describe
how they would differ with respect to their goals. (2.5 Marks)
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Answer:
The topic selected is Costs of the EuroAfter your topic selection, research your selected topic in the university’s electronic library from only academic (refereed) journals. You will need at least three journal references and the textbook. Start your research with the textbook so it always grounds your topic. When your research is complete post it in the discussion forum below. Structure your paper as follows:Cover pageOverview describing the importance of the research topic to current business and professional practice in your own words.Purpose of Research should reflect the potential benefit of the topic to the current business and professional practice and the larger body of research.Review of the Literature summarized in your own words. Note that this should not be a “copy and paste” of literature content, nor should this section be substantially filled with direct quotes from the article. A literature review is a summary of the major points and findings of each of the selected articles (with appropriate citations). Direct quotations should be used sparingly. Normally, this will be the largest section of your paper (this is not a requirement; just a general observation).Practical Application of the literature. Describe how your findings from the relevant research literature can shape, inform, and improve current business and professional practice related to your chosen topic.Conclusion in your own wordsReferences formatted according to APA style requirements
Please IRAC Paciaroni v. Crane using the following rubric
ISSUE Written in the form of a question, with a question mark. Includes both parties’ names, includes the claim.
0.7 pts
RULE(S) Written in the form of a list, using complete sentences and punctuation. contains the claim stated in the issue and its elements.
0.7 pts
APPLICATION Written in paragraph, using complete sentences. No bullet points or numbering. At least one paragraph for each of plaintiff and defendant, making arguments, not telling a story. Applies the facts to the case to the rules listed in the Rules section.
2 pts
CONCLUSION Written in a complete sentence (just a couple). Answers the Issue. On the exam, should not say “I think,” “I feel” or “I believe.”
Question 1. Please explain how the video demonstrates marketing as presented in the chapter. Please list 2 takeaways. Bullet points or a number listing is OK to use.
Question 2. Please explain how the video demonstrates marketing as presented in the chapter. Please list 2 takeaways. Bullet points or a number listing is OK to use.
“13 Gearhead Social Media” https://drive.google.com/file/d/1NPQrrv3SGjgkv8CzW…
Question 3. Please explain how the video demonstrates marketing as presented in the chapter. Please list 2 takeaways. Bullet points or a number listing is OK to use.
Instructions: This assignment designed to assess your knowledge and assimilation of the course objectives. The assignment rubric is included for your review. Grading will be based on the rubric. Make sure you follow AMU’s writing policies and the Chicago writing style guide (cover page, page numbering, double space, headings/subheadings, etc). Your essay should be 4-6 pages in length, not counting the cover page and bibliography.
Essay Question: We are a highly technical society. Our everyday lives revolve around the Internet: we benefit from the Internet, but we can also be victims of cyber criminals. To understand how criminals use the Internet to their advantage, one must understand how we communicate on the Internet. In this paper, you are required to describe in detail how we communicate on the Internet, based upon your readings. Discuss the major networking building blocks and their functions. Secondly, discuss software applications’ vulnerabilities, such as those found in web browsers.
General Requirements
1. Document Format.
a. MS Word document
b. One-inch (1”) margins
c. Times New Roman font
d. Twelve (12) pitch
e. Not including your title page, this assignment should be 4-6 pages.
f. Double space, except for your bibliography’s citations.
g. You must use 5 scholarly sources in supporting this assignment.
2. Citation Format: The Chicago Manual of Style. As stated in the Academic Integrity Briefings, information taken directly from another source must be placed in quotations and cited following the Chicago format contained in the week one “lessons” folder. You must cite all other information from your sources, even if you do not quote directly. DIRECT QUOTING SHOULD BE KEPT TO A MINIMUM.
3. Submit no later than Sunday, 11:55 PM of the week due.
Decision-making refers to making choices among alternative courses of action—which may also include inaction., such as the relational decision-making model, bounded rationality model, and intuitive decision-making model that help leaders make decisions. Each one can be just as important as the other, but what works best for the organization, the employees, and the leaders is up to the leader to decide based on the situation.
ETHICAL DECISION MAKING
Almost every decision made by leaders comes with an ethical component. When making decisions as a leader, understanding the ethical guidelines behind the decision is paramount. There are many decisions made by leaders that can be between a right and a wrong decision, a right and right decision, and a wrong and wrong decision. Not every decision made by leaders is perfect or easy. Sometimes it is picking the greater of two bad paths.
LEADING PEOPLE AND MAKING DECISIONS
What characteristics identify a leader? Should they all be the same no matter where you are in the world? There are five big personality traits that can be used to identify leaders. Leaders are rated at Openness to experience, Conscientiousness, Extraversion, Agreeableness, and Neuroticism. The theory was developed in 1949 by D. W. Fiske. This model helps people understand leaders and helps leaders make decisions that are best for their employees, heightening job satisfaction. Understanding why leaders make their decisions starts with knowing the employee-leader relationship.
Reading Assignment
As you read through the resources and watch the videos, consider the following:
Have you ever seen a leader break down the decision-making process for a decision made in an organization?
How do you feel about a decision made by leaders that do not go as planned?
What would you do if a leader asked you to alter documents to make the company look better?
Do you think that all leaders try to make the best decision for the organization and the employees?
READ
Read the following from your textbook Organizational behavior.
Chapter 11
Chapter 11.1: Decision-Making Culture: The Case of Google
Chapter 11.2: Understanding Decision Making
Chapter 11.3: Faulty Decision Making
Chapter 11.4: Decision-Making in Groups
Chapter 8.5: The Role of Ethics in National Culture
Chapter 11.5: The Role of Ethics and National Culture
Chapter 11.6: Empowered Decision-Making: The Case of Ingar Skaug
Chapter 11.7: Conclusion
Chapter 11.8: Exercises
Chapter 12
Chapter 12.2: Who Is a Leader? Trait Approaches to Leadership
Chapter 12.3: What Do Leaders Do? Behavioral Approaches to Leadership
WATCH
High context and low context communication
This video provides three scenarios of individuals conversing who are from high context and low context cultures.
What is the difference between a high-context and low-context culture?
This video clearly explains the difference between high-context and low-context cultures in reference to the language of behavior.
REFERENCES
Collins, S. (2021, May 19). High context and low context communication [Video]. YouTube.
Organizational behavior. (2017). University of Minnesota Libraries Publishing. https://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/organizational-behavior Licensed under CC BY-NC-SA.
Tero Trainers. (2016, November 8). What is the difference between a high-context and low-context culture? [Video]. YouTube.
Discussion Assignment
In the discussion forum, you are expected to participate often and engage in deep levels of discourse. You are required to post an initial response to the question/issue presented in the Forum by Sunday evening and then respond to at least 3 of your classmates’ initial posts. You should also respond to anyone who has responded to you.
Leadership is a very difficult role to fill. The right balance between management and encouragement must be present. Leaders must ensure that objectives are met, productivity rises, and people are happy. This puts leaders under immense pressure. Leaders must make ethical decisions regarding the pros and cons of the task and the people involved.
For this discussion assignment, refer to Chapter 12.3 What Do Leaders Do? Behavioral Approaches to Leadership of your textbook and focus on people and task-oriented behaviors.
Explain a professional or personal situation where an individual was distinctly people-oriented.
Provide another situation where an individual was task-oriented.
For each example, explain if they were right or wrong and if they were ethical in their behavior.
Your Discussion should be a minimum of 200 words in length and not more than 500 words. Please include a word count. Following the APA standard, use references and in-text citations for the textbook and any other sources.
Written Assignment
You work for Cooks and Clothing, an International Cultural non-profit organization that provides food and clothing to over 25 countries worldwide. You were selected to host a global meeting with many other like-minded individuals, and a member from every organization represents each country. Some of the members on the board are from high context cultures that put a high value on establishing relationships before working with others and tend to take longer to negotiate deals. The other members are from low context cultures and get down to business, and tend to negotiate quickly.
Based on the scenario, predict what would happen in this environment’s decision-making process.
Make a logical and well-reasoned description of the ethical decision-making processes you would go through in the international organizations, Cooks and Clothing.
Would declining decision-making from low-context members be ethical even if the suggestions benefit the organization? Explain and provide examples.
Write a two- to three-page persuasive essay, double-spaced, using Times New Roman 12-point font. Use and cite at least two sources from your textbook or additional sources from the internet, LIRN, or other sources to which you have access.
Cite references to material that you use in preparing the essay using the American Psychological Association (APA) style.
For assistance with APA format, refer to the LRC: Academic Writing.
To access LIRN refer to the LRC: Online Library.
You will be peer-assessed on the following criteria:
Makes a logical and well-reasoned description of the ethical decision-making processes
Provides a clear description of how ethical decision-making processes impact others in different cultures with details and examples.
Cites a minimum of two sources (APA format) and includes a reference page.
The paper meets the number of page requirements.
The paper is well-written and free of grammatical and spelling errors.
Discuss the importance of evaluating variances from standard costs in managerial accounting. What are some reasons for variances, and how can they be addressed?Directions:Discuss the concepts, principles, and theories from your textbook. Cite your textbooks and cite any other sources if appropriate.Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least three scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articlesYour initial post should address all components of the question with a 500 word limit
The details are in the attached pdf – Capstone Project Outline (Please Pay attention to the part labeled project deliverables) Also, the attached sample is for reference. You ought to pick a data source from the Excel sheet for this assignment.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
FINANCIAL ANALYSIS CS™
Sample Reports
version 2008.x.x
TL 19887
(10/14/2008)
Copyright Information
Text copyright 2004 – 2008 by Thomson Reuters/Tax & Accounting. All rights reserved.
Video display images copyright 2004- 2008 by Thomson Reuters/Tax & Accounting. All rights reserved.
Thomson Reuters hereby grants licensees of CS Professional Suite® software the right to reprint this document solely for their
internal use.
Trademark Information
The trademarks used herein are trademarks and registered trademarks used under license.
All other brand and product names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
.
Contents
Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 1
Quick Analysis Financial Reports ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3
Liberty Medical Group, 2010 (title page) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
Firm Statement ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5
Two-Year Comparison Reports ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7
Balance Sheet – Two-Year Comparison ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 7
Statement of Income – Two-Year Comparison ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 8
Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison ………………………………………………………………………………….. 11
Industry Comparison Reports …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 27
Balance Sheet – Industry Comparison ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 27
Statement of Income – Industry Comparison………………………………………………………………………………………… 28
Ratio Analysis – Industry Comparison …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 29
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Industry Comparison …………………………………………………………………………………….. 31
Group Comparison Reports …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 41
Balance Sheet – Group Comparison …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 41
Statement of Income – Group Comparison ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 42
Ratio Analysis – Group Comparison ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 43
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Group Comparison……………………………………………………………………………………….. 45
Five-Year Trend Analysis Reports……………………………………………………………………………………………………………61
Balance Sheet – Five-Year Trend Analysis …………………………………………………………………………………………..61
Statement of Income – Five-Year Trend Analysis ………………………………………………………………………………….63
Ratio Analysis – Five-Year Trend Analysis ……………………………………………………………………………………………64
Ratio Formulas ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..65
Definitions of Categories ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..67
Balance Sheet ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….67
Statement of Income …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………69
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
iii
Contents
iv
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Introduction
The Financial Analysis CS™ module within the Creative Solutions Accounting® (CSA) software includes
many pre-defined financial reports that you can use and customize in the Financial Analysis CS Report
Designer to meet your clients’ financial reporting needs. You can generate sample reports included here
from the File / Quick Analysis dialog in Financial Analysis CS. They include two-year and five-year
comparisons, industry and group comparisons, and detailed ratio analysis reports for all standard ratios or
for selected ratio types. The detailed ratio analysis reports include charts depicting several key ratios that
are available to incorporate into your client reports or to customize to fit your client’s specific needs.
Note: You can use the programs Report Designer to copy and modify any of the standard reports or to
create new ones from scratch.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
1
Introduction
2
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Quick Analysis Financial Reports
The collection of reports included in this document is based on the sample client data that has been
transferred from CSA for the FACS01 Sample Client, with FACS02 and FACS03 set up as industry peers,
as outlined in the Financial Analysis CS Getting Started guide. The provided reports include two-year
comparison reports, five-year trend analysis reports, industry and group comparison reports, definitions,
of categories, and ratio formulas.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
3
Quick Analysis Financial Reports
4
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Prepared by:
Parnes, Velano, Martinez
7322 Newman Blvd
Dexter, MI 48130
800-968-0600
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
5
We at Parnes, Velano, Martinez have compiled the enclosed report for Liberty Medical Group based
on financial data compiled through December 31, 2008.
Each report has been customized for your business to give you the information you need to compare
your annual business performance to comparable businesses within the Offices of Physicians (except
Mental Health Specialists) industry (NAICS: 621111). This information can help you to determine if
your business strategy is competitive within your industry and to pinpoint your company’s strengths
and weaknesses. It will also enable you to benchmark your firms performance over time, allowing you
to chart the progress of your business, to analyze your business performance more effectively, and to
make more informed decisions about your company’s direction.
Please review each report carefully as it is important that you fully understand the data presented here.
Please be aware that the analysis presented is based on historical figures. It is not a prediction of the
future but rather a tool for monitoring the progress of your business over time. This information should
factor into your decision making, but it should certainly not be the only factor in your business
decisions. Be sure to consult all appropriate resources and professionals before making any decisions
that may affect the financial health of your company.
If you have any questions, please contact our office at 800-968-0600 at your earliest convenience. It is
a privilege to provide you with services and tools to help you manage your business successfully.
Your commitment to Parnes, Velano, Martinez is greatly appreciated!
6
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Balance Sheet – Two-Year Comparison
2008
2007
$ Variance
% Variance
Other Current Assets
$336,818
$134,569
$12,985
$98,323
$319,978
$127,841
$13,657
$94,325
$16,840
$6,728
-$672
$3,998
5.3%
5.3%
-4.9%
4.2%
Total Current Assets
$582,695
$555,801
$26,894
4.8%
Long-Term Investments
Net Fixed Assets
Intangible Assets
$81,197
$412,458
$61,874
$78,390
$77,137
$383,750
$58,780
$74,471
$4,060
$28,708
$3,094
$3,919
5.3%
7.5%
5.3%
5.3%
$1,216,614
$1,149,939
$66,675
5.8%
Accounts Payable
Notes Payable
Accrued Liabilities
Income Taxes Payable
Current Portion of Long-Term Debt
Total Current Liabilities
$42,787
$88,247
$532,506
$10,014
$111,238
$784,792
$32,658
$83,835
$530,190
$9,115
$115,676
$771,474
$10,129
$4,412
$2,316
$899
-$4,438
$13,318
31.0%
5.3%
0.4%
9.9%
-3.8%
1.7%
Long-Term Debt
Other Long-Term Liabilities
$281,809
$55,000
$263,352
$36,000
$18,457
$19,000
7.0%
52.8%
Total Long-Term Liabilities
$336,809
$299,352
$37,457
12.5%
Total Liabilities
$1,121,601
$1,070,826
$50,775
4.7%
Retained Earnings
$95,013
$95,013
$79,113
$79,113
$15,900
$15,900
20.1%
20.1%
$1,216,614
$1,149,939
$66,675
5.8%
Assets
Cash & Equivalents
Trade Accounts Receivable
Inventory
Other Non-Current Assets
Total Assets
Liabilities
Total Equity
Total Liabilities and Equity
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
7
Liberty Medical Group
Statement of Income – Two-Year Comparison
2008
2007
Cost of Sales
$8,079,445
$0
$7,756,268
$0
$323,177
$0
4.2%
0.0%
Gross Profit
$8,079,445
$7,756,268
$323,177
4.2%
Operating Expenses
$7,945,326
$7,620,193
$325,133
4.3%
Operating Profit
$134,119
$136,075
-$1,956
-1.4%
Other Income
Other Expenses
$0
$16,360
$0
$15,542
$0
$818
0.0%
5.3%
Earnings Before Interest and Taxes
$117,759
$120,533
-$2,774
-2.3%
Interest Expense
$72,301
$68,439
$3,862
5.6%
Earnings Before Taxes
$45,458
$52,094
-$6,636
-12.7%
Provision for Income Taxes
$21,877
$21,070
$807
3.8%
Net Income
$23,581
$31,024
-$7,443
-24.0%
$2,853,654
$122,001
$0
$2,796,581
$115,901
$0
$57,073
$6,100
$0
2.0%
5.3%
0.0%
Sales
$ Variance
%
Additional Information
Owners’ Compensation
Depreciation Expense
Selling Expenses
8
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
2008
2007
% Variance
0.7
0.6
22.3
-0.7
-0.1
-1.7
-40.0
0.7
0.6
22.1
-0.6
-0.1
-1.4
-36.0
0.0%
0.0%
0.9%
16.7%
0.0%
21.4%
11.1%
60.0
6.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.1
6.6
19.6
25.2
14.8
4.3
60.7
6.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.0
6.7
20.2
25.8
14.7
4.9
-1.2%
1.7%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0%
1.7%
-1.5%
-3.0%
-2.3%
0.7%
-12.2%
100.0
0.6
3.7
47.8
0.0
0.0
100.0
0.7
4.5
65.8
0.0
0.0
0.0%
-14.3%
-17.8%
-27.4%
0.0%
0.0%
0.9
7.8
12.8
11.8
1.3
1.6
0.0
0.9
6.9
14.5
13.5
1.3
1.8
0.0
0.0%
13.0%
-11.7%
-12.6%
0.0%
-11.1%
0.0%
1.5
35.3
1.5
36.1
0.0%
-2.2%
Liquidity Ratios
Current Ratio
Quick Ratio
Defensive Interval Days
Accounts Receivable to Working Capital
Inventory to Working Capital
Long-Term Liabilities to Working Capital
Sales to Working Capital
Activity Ratios
Accounts Receivable Turnover
Days Sales in Receivables
Inventory Turnover
Days Cost of Sales in Inventory
Accounts Payable Turnover
Days Cost of Sales in Payables
Operating Cycle Days
Sales to Assets
Sales to Net Fixed Assets
Percent Depreciation Expense to Fixed Assets
Percent Accumulated Depreciation to Fixed Assets
Net Fixed Assets to Equity
Profitability Ratios
Percent Gross Profit
Percent Profit Margin on Sales
Percent Rate of Return on Assets
Percent Rate of Return on Equity
Price Earnings Ratio
Earnings Per Share
Coverage Ratios
Debt to Total Assets
Percent Owners’ Equity
Equity Multiplier
Debt to Equity
Cash Flow to Current Maturities Long-Term Debt
Times Interest Earned
Book Value Per Share
Expense to Sales Ratios
Percent Depreciation to Sales
Percent Owners’ Compensation to Sales
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
9
Quick Analysis Financial Reports
10
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
Liquidity ratios measure a company’s ability to meet its maturing short-term obligations. In other words,
can a company quickly convert its assets to cash without a loss in value if necessary to meet its
short-term obligations? Favorable liquidity ratios are critical to a company and its creditors within a
business or industry that does not provide a steady and predictable cash flow. They are also a key
predictor of a company’s ability to make timely payments to creditors and to continue to meet
obligations to lenders when faced with an unforeseen event.
Current Ratio
Current Assets / Current Liabilities
This ratio reflects the number of times short-term assets cover short-term liabilities and is a fairly
accurate indication of a company’s ability to service its current obligations. A higher number is preferred
because it indicates a strong ability to service short-term obligations. The composition of current assets
is a key factor in the evaluation of this ratio. Depending on the type of business or industry, current
assets may include slow-moving inventories that could potentially affect analysis of a company’s liquidity
how long could it potentially take to convert raw materials and inventory into finished products? (For this
reason, the quick ratio may be preferable to the current ratio because it eliminates inventory and
prepaid expenses from this ratio for a more accurate gauge of a company’s liquidity and ability to meet
short-term obligations.)
The current ratio for Liberty Medical
Group is 0.74, which compared to the
baseline of 0.72 indicates the
company’s ability to service short-term
obligations is satisfactory. However the
value of the quick ratio will provide a
clearer indication of the company’s
success in this area.
Quick Ratio
(Cash + Marketable Securities + Trade Accounts Receivable) / Current Liabilities
This ratio, also known as the acid test ratio, measures immediate liquidity – the number of times cash,
accounts receivable, and marketable securities cover short-term obligations. A higher number is
preferred because it suggests a company has a strong ability to service short-term obligations. This
ratio is a more reliable variation of the Current ratio because inventory, prepaid expenses, and other
less liquid current assets are removed from the calculation.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
11
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The quick ratio for Liberty Medical
Group is 0.60, which compared to the
baseline of 0.58 indicates the
company’s ability to service short-term
obligations is favorable.
Defensive Interval Days
(Cash + Marketable Securities + Trade Accounts Receivable) / ((Operating Expenses – Other Expenses
– Interest Expense – Provision for Income Taxes – Depreciation Expense) / Days)
This ratio gauges the threat of insolvency for investors by calculating the number of days a company
can operate without any cash returns while meeting its basic operational costs. In general, this number
should be between 30 to 90 days.
Defensive interval days for Liberty
Medical Group is 22.31 days that
indicates that the company’s degree of
protection against insolvency may not be
ideal.
Altman Z score Retail
(((Current Assets – Current Liabilities) / Total Assets) * 6.6) + ((Total Equity / Total Assets) * 3.3) +
((Earnings before Interest and Taxes / Total Assets) * 6.7) + ((Total Equity / Total Liabilities) * 1.0)
This ratio represents a numerical ranking that predicts the potential for bankruptcy of a retail company.
In general, the lower the score, the higher the odds of bankruptcy. Companies with Z-Scores above 3
are considered to be healthy and therefore, unlikely to enter bankruptcy.
12
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The Altman Z score for Liberty Medical
Group is -0.11 that indicates the
company may have a relatively low
degree of protection against bankruptcy.
Altman Z score Manufacturing
(((Current Assets – Current Liabilities) / Total Assets) * 0.717) + ((Total Equity / Total Assets) * 0.847) +
((Earnings before Interest and Taxes / Total Assets) * 3.107) + ((Total Equity / Total Liabilities) * 0.42) +
((Sales / Total Assets) * 0.998)
This ratio represents a numerical ranking that predicts the potential for bankruptcy of a manufacturing
company. In general, the lower the score, the higher the odds of bankruptcy. Companies with Z-Scores
above 3 are considered to be healthy and therefore unlikely to enter bankruptcy.
The Altman Z score for Liberty Medical
Group is 6.91 that indicates the company
has a relatively high degree of protection
against bankruptcy.
Accounts Receivable to Working Capital
Trade Accounts Receivable / (Current Assets – Current Liabilities)
This ratio measures the dependency of working capital on the collection of receivables. A lower number
for this ratio is preferred, indicating that a company has a satisfactory level of working capital and
accounts receivable makes up an appropriate portion of current assets.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
13
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The accounts receivable to working
capital ratio for Liberty Medical Group is
-0.67, which compared to the baseline
of -0.59 indicates that the company’s
performance is sufficient in this area.
Inventory to Working Capital
Inventory / (Current Assets – Current Liabilities)
This ratio measures the dependency of working capital on inventory. A lower number for this ratio is
preferred indicating that a company has a satisfactory level of working capital and inventory makes up a
reasonable portion of current assets.
The inventory to working capital ratio for
Liberty Medical Group is -0.06, which
compared to the baseline of -0.06
indicates this ratio is in line with
company goals.
Long Term Liabilities to Working Capital
Long Term Liabilities / (Current Assets – Current Liabilities)
This ratio measures the degree to which a company’s long-term debt has been used to replenish
working capital versus fixed asset acquisition.
The long-term liabilities to working
capital ratio for Liberty Medical Group is
-1.67, which compared to the baseline
of -1.39 indicates the value of this ratio
is meeting the company’s expectations.
14
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
Sales to Working Capital
Sales / (Current Assets – Current Liabilities)
This ratio measures a company’s ability to finance current operations. Working capital (current assets current liabilities) is another measure of liquidity and the ability to cover short-term obligations. This
ratio relates the ability of a company to generate sales using its working capital to determine how
efficiently working capital is being used. In general, a lower number is preferred because it indicates a
company has a satisfactory level of working capital. However, an exceptionally low number may
indicate inadequate sales levels are being generated.
The sales to working capital ratio for
Liberty Medical Group is -39.98, which
compared to the baseline of -35.96
reveals that the company’s level of
working capital is strong. The company
may want to make an effort to generate
additional sales using the available
working capital.
The following list includes several suggestions Liberty Medical Group should consider to improve the
liquidity ratios:
Reduce days in accounts receivable to improve current assets by evaluating accounts receivable on a
more frequent basis and take a more assertive stance in the collection of accounts receivable and
delinquent accounts.
Prepare thorough cash forecasts and evaluate the company’s ability to meet goals on a regular basis.
Consider paying off short-term obligations if the cash position of the company is favorable.
Consider converting short-term debt to long-term debt.
Reduce levels of non-moving inventory.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
15
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
Activity ratios provide a useful gauge of a company’s operations by determining, for example, the
average number of days it takes to collect on customer accounts and the average number of days to
pay vendors. A key point to keep in mind when evaluating these ratios is that seasonal fluctuations are
not necessarily reflected in the numbers that are derived from these calculations based on an account
balance on one single day.
Accounts Receivable Turnover
Sales / Trade Accounts Receivable
This ratio measures the number of times receivables turn over in a year and reveals how successful a
company is in collecting its outstanding receivables. A higher number is preferred because it indicates
a shorter time between sales and cash collection.
The accounts receivable turnover for
Liberty Medical Group is 60.04, which
compared to the baseline of 60.67
suggests this ratio may not be on target
with company objectives.
Days Sales in Receivables
Trade Accounts Receivable / (Sales / Days)
This ratio measures the average number of days a company’s receivables are outstanding. A lower
number of days is desired. An increase in the number of days receivables are outstanding indicates an
increased possibility of late payment by customers. Companies should attempt to reduce the number of
days sales in receivables in order to increase cash flow. The general rule used is that the time allowed
for payment by the selling terms should not be exceeded by more than 10 or 15 days.
The days sales in receivables for Liberty
Medical Group is 6.08 days that indicates
the company is effective in collecting
outstanding receivables.
Operating Cycle Days
(Inventory / (Cost of Sales / Days)) + (Trade Accounts Receivable / (Sales / Days))
16
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
This ratio calculates the total conversion period for a company, or in other words, the average number
of days it takes to convert inventory into cash from sales. It is calculated by adding together the days
cost of sales in inventory to the days sales in receivables. Evaluating this ratio can be helpful in
gauging the effectiveness of marketing, determining credit terms to extend to customers, and collecting
outstanding accounts.
The operating cycle days for Liberty
Medical Group is 6.08 days, which
compared to the baseline of 6.02 days
indicates the company may not be
successfully minimizing the amount of
time it takes to convert products and
services into cash.
Sales to Assets
Sales / Total Assets
This ratio measures a company’s ability to produce sales in relation to total assets to determine the
effectiveness of the company’s asset base in producing sales. A higher number is preferred, indicating
that a company is using its assets to successfully generate sales. This ratio does not take into account
the depreciation methods employed by each company and should not be the only measure of
effectiveness of a company in this area.
Sales to assets for Liberty Medical
Group is 6.64, which compared to the
baseline of 6.74 indicates the
company’s performance in this area is
lacking and management should
consider taking measures to improve
this ratio.
Sales to Net Fixed Assets
Sales / (Property and Equipment – Accumulated Depreciation)
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
17
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
This ratio measures a company’s ability to effectively utilize its fixed assets to generate sales. This ratio
is similar to the sales to assets ratio, but it excludes current assets, long-term investments, intangible
assets, and other non-current assets. A higher number is desired, indicating that a company
productively uses its fixed assets to produce sales. This ratio does not take into account the
depreciation methods employed by each company and should not be the only measure of effectiveness
of a company in this area. In addition, fixed assets that are almost fully depreciated, and labor-intensive
operations may interfere with the interpretation of this ratio.
Sales to net fixed assets for Liberty
Medical Group is 19.59, which
compared to the baseline of 20.21
indicates the company is not making
use of its fixed assets to effectively
generate sales.
Percent Depreciation Expense to Fixed Assets
Depreciation Expense / Property and Equipment * 100
This ratio measures the reasonableness and consistency of a company’s depreciation expense over
time.
The percent depreciation expense to
fixed assets for Liberty Medical Group is
25.20%, which compared to the
baseline of 25.76% indicates the value
of this ratio is meeting the company’s
expectations.
Percent Accumulated Depreciation to Fixed Assets
Accumulated Depreciation / Property and Equipment * 100
This ratio measures the cumulative percentage of productive asset costs a company has allocated to
operations.
18
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The percent accumulated depreciation
to fixed assets for Liberty Medical Group
is 14.80%, which compared to the
baseline of 14.70% indicates this ratio
may not be on target with company
objectives.
Net Fixed Assets to Equity
(Property and Equipment – Accumulated Depreciation) / Total Equity
This ratio measures the extent to which investors’ capital was used to finance productive assets. A
lower ratio indicates a proportionally smaller investment in fixed assets in relation to net worth, which is
desired by creditors in case of liquidation. Note that this ratio could appear deceptively low if a
significant number of a company’s fixed assets are leased.
Net fixed assets to equity for Liberty
Medical Group is 4.34, which compared
to the baseline of 4.85 indicates the
company’s performance is adequate in
this area.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
19
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
Profitability ratios measure a company’s ability to use its capital or assets to generate profits. Improving
profitability is a constant challenge for all companies and their management. Evaluating profitability
ratios is a key component in determining the success of a company. It is important to note that all
profitability ratio calculations are based on earnings before taxes.
Percent Gross Profit
((Sales – Cost of Sales) / Sales) * 100
This ratio measures the gross profit earned on sales and reports how much of each sales dollar is
available to cover operating expenses and contribute to profits.
The percent gross profit for Liberty
Medical Group is 100.00%, which
compared to the baseline of 100.00% is
a good indication of financial health for
the company.
Percent Profit Margin on Sales
Earnings before Taxes / Sales * 100
This ratio measures how much profit a company makes on each sales dollar received and how well a
company could potentially deal with higher costs or lower sales in the future.
The percent profit margin on sales for
Liberty Medical Group is 0.56%, which
compared to the baseline of 0.67%
indicates sales may not be contributing
enough to the company’s bottom line.
Percent Rate of Return on Assets
Earnings before Taxes / Total Assets * 100
This ratio measures how effectively a company’s assets are being used to generate profits. It is one of
the most important ratios when evaluating the success of a business. A higher number reflects a well
managed company with a healthy return on assets. Heavily depreciated assets, a large number of
intangible assets, or any unusual income or expenses can easily distort this calculation.
20
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The percent rate of return on assets for
Liberty Medical Group is 3.74%, which
compared to the baseline of 4.53%
indicates there is a need for
improvement in this area to ensure the
company can remain competitive and
continue to operate successfully.
Percent Rate of Return on Equity
Earnings before Taxes / Total Equity * 100
This ratio expresses the rate of return on equity capital employed and measures the ability of a
company’s management to realize an adequate return on the capital invested by the owners in a
company. A higher number is preferred for this commonly analyzed ratio.
The percent rate of return on equity for
Liberty Medical Group is 47.84%, which
compared to the baseline of 65.85%
indicates management may not be
effectively managing the profits earned
based on the owners investment in the
company.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
21
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
Coverage ratios assess a company’s ability to meet its long-term obligations, remain solvent, and avoid
bankruptcy. It measures how well a company’s cash flow covers its short-term financial obligations.
Lenders evaluate coverage ratios to determine the degree to which a company could become
vulnerable when faced with economic downturns. A company with a high level of debt poses a higher
risk to long-term creditors and investors.
Debt to Total Assets
Total Liabilities / Total Assets
This ratio measures what proportion of debt a company is carrying relative to its assets. A ratio value
greater than one indicates a company has more debt than assets. Naturally, companies and creditors
prefer a lower number.
The debt to total assets ratio for Liberty
Medical Group is 0.92, which compared
to the baseline of 0.93 indicates the
company should be able to withstand
losses without harming creditor interests
or could obtain additional financing if
desired.
Percent Owners Equity
Total Equity / Total Assets * 100
This ratio measures what proportion of total assets was provided by the owners equity. The higher the
number the more total capital has been contributed by owners and the less by creditors.
The percent owners’ equity ratio for
Liberty Medical Group is 7.81%, which
compared to the baseline of 6.88%
indicates the company owns an
adequate portion of its asset base.
Equity Multiplier
Total Assets / Total Equity
This ratio measures the extent to which a company uses debt to finance its assets. The higher the
number is, the more a company is relying on debt to finance its assets.
22
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The equity multiplier for Liberty Medical
Group is 12.80, which compared to the
baseline of 14.54 indicates a reasonable
portion of the company’s assets are
owned versus financed.
Debt to Equity
Total Liabilities / Total Equity
This ratio measures the financial leverage of a company by indicating what proportion of debt and equity
a company is using to finance its assets. A lower number suggests there is both a lower risk involved
for creditors and strong, long-term, financial security for a company.
The debt to equity ratio for Liberty
Medical Group is 11.80, which
compared to the baseline of 13.54
indicates a solid performance in this
area for the company.
Cash Flow to Current Maturities Long Term Debt
(Net Income + Depreciation Expense) / Current Portion of Long Term Debt
This ratio measures how well cash flow from operations covers current maturities. Since cash flow is
necessary for debt retirement, this ratio reveals a company’s capability to repay existing debt and to
take on additional debt. A higher number for this ratio is desired.
Financial Analysis CS: Sample Reports
23
Liberty Medical Group
Detailed Ratio Analysis – Two-Year Comparison
The cash flow to current maturities
long-term debt ratio for Liberty Medical
Group is 1.31, which compared to the
baseline of 1.27 indicates the company
is in a strong position to meet its current
obligations on long-term debt based on
its current cash flow.
Times Interest Earned
Earnings before Interest and Taxes / Interest Expense
This ratio measures a company’s ability to meet interest payments. A higher number is preferred,
suggesting a company can easily meet interest obligations and can potentially take on additional debt.
Note that this particular ratio uses earnings before interest and taxes because this is the income amount
available to cover interest.
The times interest earned ratio for
Liberty Medical Group is 1.63, which
compared to the baseline of 1.76
indicates the company’s interest
coverage may not be sufficient.
The following list includes several suggestions Liberty Medical Group should consider
HRM 310 Project Two Guidelines and Rubric
Competency
In this project, you will demonstrate your mastery of the following competencies:
Assess an organization’s adherence to employee and labor relations laws and policies
Apply various techniques to address employee and labor relation challenges
Scenario
In Project One, your company went through a union campaign and a majority of employees voted in favor of union representation. Subsequently, union leadership and company management negotiated a collective bargaining agreement. The presence of represented (union) and non-represented (nonunion) employees means that Human Resources must work to ensure all employees receive fair and similar treatment within the guidelines of applicable laws and the provisions negotiated in the collective bargaining agreement.
As the HR analyst you received a complaint from the union representative that alleges a member of the company’s management team violated the negotiated progressive discipline process when handling a recent HR incident. The specifics of the complaint are as follows:
The company manager suspended the union employee for one day with no pay because the union employee left the shift early without permission from the manager. The union representative claims the suspension was not necessary. The company manager claims that the suspension was appropriate because all nonunion employees would be suspended for the same issue.
The union representative claims the union employee was not given an opportunity to have another employee present at the conversation in the manager’s office. The manager claims the union employee was offered the opportunity to have representation and the employee said no. There were no other witnesses in the manager’s office.
The union representative claims the company manager did not allow the union employee to explain the reason for leaving early. The company manager disagrees and states that 30 minutes were spent listening to the employee’s story as would be the case for any employee in the company.
The company manager claims that everyone in the department is treated the same way if an employee leaves the shift early without permission. Leaving a shift early impacts all other members of the team because work is not completed and may fall on nonunion employees to complete, creating overtime and possibly creating the need for nonunion employees to complete union employee work.
The director of Human Resources, who is your manager, has requested that you research the complaint in preparation for HR’s meeting with the union representative and recommend an initial course of action.
Directions
In the first part of this project, you will look at the employee complaint and draft a memo to management that outlines the issues and your recommendations for resolution. Refer to the Management Memo Guidelines located in the Supporting Materials section for guidance. Consider the scenario to begin your work. Identify key issues in the complaint and determine how the situation may differ for union and nonunion employees. Discuss the ramifications for the company from both a union perspective and a general employee-confidence perspective. Describe any risks that the company might face if they do not address the complaint.
In the second part of this project, the investigation of the complaint is underway. To begin, you will need to identify the role that HR will play in the process. Your next step would be to draft questions for use in interviews with management to get the right information about complaints. Discuss how your questions would promote the intended outcome as well as the ramifications if the right questions are not asked. Next, describe ways in which your questions may need to differ depending on the level of management you are interviewing. Lastly, provide your recommendation for appropriate communication methods to demonstrate that union and nonunion employees are being treated fairly and equitably. Refer to the Investigation Process Guidelines located in the Supporting Materials section to guide your submission.
Specifically, you must address the following rubric criteria:
Union Grievance
Key Concerns: Identify the key concerns of the employee complaint.
Union vs. Nonunion: Discuss how this situation differs in a union and nonunion environment.
Employee Confidence: Describe the potential impact that the complaint situation will have on employee confidence. Provide examples to support claims.
Employee Relations: Explain the impact on employee relations in other areas of HR within the organization.
Risk Potential: Discuss the risk potential for the company for failure to address this complaint.
Investigation Process
Role of HR: Explain the role of HR in the complaint-resolution process.
Interview Questions: Develop 4–5 interview questions used in employee complaint resolution issues.
Consider questions that would make the most efficient use of interview time.
Consider the use of open-ended vs. closed questions.
Stakeholder Communication: Explain how interview questions may differ for supervisors, managers, and executives.
Determine who should ask questions and when conflicts of interest are a factor?
Discuss the importance of asking the right questions to the right audience providing specific examples to support your claims.
Employee Communication: Recommend the appropriate communication method for all employees to demonstrate fairness among union and nonunion employees.
What to Submit
To complete this project, you must submit the following:
Management Memo – Union Grievance
Your submission should be a 1- to 2-page Word document with 12-point Times New Roman font, double spacing, and one-inch margins. Any sources should be cited according to APA style.
Investigation Process
Your submission should be a 1- to 2-page Word document with 12-point Times New Roman font, double spacing, and one-inch margins. Any sources should be cited according to APA style.
Supporting Materials
The following resource(s) may help support your work on the project:
Resource: Management Memo Guidelines
Use this guide to help you draft your communication with your manager.
Resource: Investigation Process Guidelines
Use this guide to help you draft your communication with your manager.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
HRM 310 Management Memo Guidelines
Directions: Use this document to outline the issues in the employee/labor complaint and provide your
recommendations for resolution. Your memo will have three parts: in part one, you will summarize the
employee/labor complaint; in part two, you will describe the impact of the complaint to employees, the
union, and the organization; and in part three, you will recommend a resolution to the complaint.
When completing this assignment, use the following elements for your memo:
1. Memo Heading
a. Your memo is written to your supervisor, the director of Human Resources.
b. The memo is from you, the HR analyst. Use your name and the title HR Analyst.
c. The subject of the memo is Employee/Labor Complaint.
d. Date the memo.
2. Memo Elements
a. In the first part of your memo, summarize the complaint and explain the situation.
Include the following:
i. Describe the complaint
ii. Identify who filed the complaint
iii. Explain why the complaint was filed
iv. State who from management was identified in the complaint.
v. Explain how the situation might differ for union and nonunion employees.
b. In the second part of your memo, describe the impact of the complaint.
i. What is the impact to the employee?
ii. What is the impact to the relationship with the union?
iii. What is the impact to the organization?
c. In the third part of your memo, discuss the risk potential to your employer.
1
HRM 310 Investigation Process Guidelines
Directions: Use this document to respond to the assignment in Project Two. Your process will have four
parts. In part A, you will identify the steps to be used in your investigation and discuss the role of human
resources in the investigation process. In part B, you will write interview questions that would be used in
your investigation. In part C, you will identify how interview questions will differ for different
interviewees and discuss why it is important to assign the right question to the right person. In part D,
you will recommend a communication approach to communicate the outcome of the investigation to
both union and nonunion employees.
When completing this assignment use the following elements for your process:
1. Process Heading and First Paragraph
a. Your process heading should read: Investigation Process.
b. Your first paragraph should summarize the issue of your investigation and discuss the
major steps you will use to conduct the investigation (e.g., gather information that led
to the complaint, identify interviewees, review contract or policies, etc.).
c. You will also explain why your investigation should be followed and identify the
importance of HR’s involvement in the investigation process.
2. Second Paragraph
a. In your second paragraph, you will identify the key questions HR will ask in the
investigation process.
b. Offer an explanation about why the questions you chose will help you find out more
about the complaint and assist you in the investigation process.
3. Third Paragraph
a. In your third paragraph, you will explain how the interviews were conducted, identifying
who will be asking the questions, how you determined the type of questions to be
asked, and how you will track and retain the notes from the investigation.
b. You will offer an explanation about the importance of asking the right questions to the
right audiences and provide examples to support your decisions regarding the design of
your questions and the selection of interviewees.
4. Fourth Paragraph
a. In your final paragraph, you will discuss how the results of the investigation will be
communicated to employees who were part of the original complaint, to union
leadership who brought the complaint, and to all other union and nonunion employees.
b. You will need to show your director of Human Resources that you understand how to
demonstrate fairness through your communication approach so that union and
nonunion employees receive a consistent message about the results of the
investigation.
1
1
HRM 310 Project One
Cherelle Pratt
HRM 310- Employee and Labor Relations
September 17, 2023
2
Campaign Steps Table
Union Campaign Steps
Management Prohibited activities
Union Prohibited activities
Organizing Campaign
• Spy on the workers or appear to use
• Contact workers during
unapproved ways to obtain information
working hours if the
not volunteered.
employer has prohibited it.
• Coercive questioning of employees to
• Restrain or coerce workers
gain information on unionization
from practicing their labor
processes.
rights (Cornell Law school,
• Threaten disciplinary actions to workers,
2023).
such as termination of employment or any
penalization (Cornell Law school, 2023).
Authorization
• Bribe the workers to influence them to
• Collude with the employer
refrain from signing the cards to authorize
to discriminate against
union representation.
employees practicing their
• Spy on the employees to find out who has
unionization rights.
signed up for unionization and who has
• Distribute union literature or
not yet.
other documents during
• Discriminate employees based on union
work hours if the employer
activity, such as signing the cards
has prohibited it.
(Cornell Law school, 2023).
3
Union Files for Election
• Coerce employees against voting a certain
• Coerce or harass employees
way.
into voting for unionization
• Restrict employees from soliciting others
(Cornell Law school, 2023).
to vote even during their free time.
• Ask for financial support
• Make promises to employees to persuade
from the employer to
them to vote a certain way (SHRM, n.d.).
finance union activities.
Employees with Union
• Refrain from negotiating in good faith
• Show bad faith in bargaining
Representation and
with the union.
with the employer (Cornell
Management Create a
• Threaten employees with more
Law school, 2023).
Contract
challenging tasks or other discriminatory
• Collude with the employer
actions such as transfers or employment
to get unfavorable contract
termination.
terms for the employees.
• Threaten to shut down the business to
gain bargaining power during contract
negotiations (SHRM, n.d.).
Common Provisions for Collective Bargaining
Benefits
The collective bargaining agreement puts negotiation mechanisms the employer can use
to negotiate with the employees in pivotal matters, which helps make the process much more
straightforward (International Labor Organization, n.d.). For instance, section 1 of Article 4 of
the agreement puts union representation for employee interests in place. Another benefit is that
4
the employer is made aware of the employees’ expectations (International Labor Organization,
n.d.). A good example is Article 5 of the agreement, which highlights employee rights. The
agreement helps keep the employees committed to maintaining a conducive work environment,
as stated in Section 1 of Article 9, The labor-management relationship. The agreement provides a
straightforward way of engaging employees, making them more predictable. For instance, in
Section 4 of Article 4, the channels the employer could follow to notify the employee of changes
in conditions of employment.
Drawbacks
The agreement provides room for dragging on the negotiation process. Section 2(B) of
Article 4, which falls under union rights, necessitates the union’s involvement in negotiation, and
a meeting can not be set without unanimous agreement between the parties (Jacobs & Münder,
2022). The agreement does not preclude the participation of a labor organization in internal
matters such as employee grades, as stated in Article 8 Section 1 A (B) (1), which falls under
management rights. The agreement also limits the involvement of upper management to a human
resource designee on labor relation matters, as stated in Article 8 Section 1 C, which points to the
limitation of management rights. In Article 4 Section 2, A, the agreement calls for a cooperative
working relationship, which is a union right that interferes with management responsibilities in
policy formation.
Rights Conflicts
From the Collective Bargaining Agreement excerpt, the management is given the
organization’s rights within its premises. Organization in a work environment may include
ranking and job classification, which entails employee grading. However, the agreement also
5
requires the involvement of a union representative in employee grading activities, which may
spell out a conflict. The management may discuss and state grading activities that may not
require union representatives’ input and those that need the same. Putting this agreement in
writing would help prevent future conflicts on the matter.
6
References
Cornell Law school. (2023). Unfair Labor Practices (ULPs). LII / Legal Information Institute.
https://www.law.cornell.edu/wex/unfair_labor_practices_(ulps)
International Labor Organization. (n.d.). Benefits of the Collective Bargaining Agreement.
https://www.ilo.org/beirut/projects/WCMS_222595/lang–en/index.htm
Jacobs, M., & Münder, M. (2022). A Worthy Import? Examining the Advantages and
Disadvantages of Sectoral Collective Bargaining in Germany – International Center for
Law & Economics. International Center for Law & Economics.
https://laweconcenter.org/resources/a-worthy-import-examining-the-advantages-anddisadvantages-of-sectoral-collective-bargaining-ingermany/?doing_wp_cron=1694971095.4047079086303710937500
SHRM. (n.d.). What can management do during a union campaign?
https://www.shrm.org/resourcesandtools/tools-and-samples/hrqa/pages/unioncampaigns.aspx
Final Project: The project will be 8 power point slides (no written report).
Select a consumer product or brand. Analyze the following:
Part 1: Background
Give some introductory information about your product/brand. Include: A description of the company and its history. Discuss its target market.
Part 2: Marketing Strategy
Discuss the company’s overall marcom (marketing communications) strategy. Include examples of their:
Advertising, public relations and publicity, sponsorship, cross promotion, social media presence, product placement, to name a few.
Part 3: Consumer Influences
Identify and analyze relevant aspects of consumer influences and their effect on the adoption process for the brand. Provide reasoning why you believe the influence is relevant.
Examples of what might be included:
Age, gender, regional, ethnic, religious, family, culture, social class, social pressure, peers
Part 4: Recommendations:
Provide your recommendation on any potential improvements for the brand based on consumer experiences/behavior.
In Week 2 there are two choices for discussion based on this week’s readings and material.
Course Objectives: CO 1 and CO2
Description:
Option 1: Watch the four TED talks on how the brain processes different kinds of information. Using one or more, discuss something you believe you learned and how that information can help you become a better thinker and decision-maker.
Option 2: Considering what Bowell and Kemp write about Rhetoric and Rhetorical Devices, first discuss the difference between such devices and Fallacies (to be covered in-depth later). Then pick out a form of advertising and discuss the named rhetorical device used and how you believe it was intended to mislead you toward a faulty conclusion. Keep in mind Rhetoric is not the same as logical Arguments.
Bowell, Tracy, and Gary Kemp. Critical Thinking: A Concise Guide, 4th ed. Routledge, 2014.
Discussion Guidelines & Grading Rubric
Discussion 2
Goal: Explore both inductive and deductive logic and the use of diagrams to better understand arguments
Course Objectives: CO3 & CO4
Description: Choose from the options below:
Option 1: Discuss the differences between deductive validity and inductive force and how each relates to the notion of truth. Discuss as well whether using argument trees, Venn diagrams, argument maps or any other visual tool would help you better understand the flow of logic.
Option 2: Do research for either “Argument mapping” or “Diagramming Arguments” and present your findings on how they work, when they should be used, and whether you see any value in using the tool(s) in your real-life activities/problem-solving.
Select a segment of the hospitality industry that you want to focus on for this project. It helps to be specific. For example, examining the restaurant industry is excellent, but focusing on the fast food restaurants (Quick Service Restaurants is what the industry calls it) helps to focus on specific trends in that segment. Research and list the trends you want to develop in your project.Prepare a list of references that you will use to support your project. At least three sources should support each trend. Please keep the sources from the last three years.Indicate your top choice and whyThe progress report should showcase your ideas for the project and contain references to the articles supporting the development of such statements. However, suppose you discover other more impactful or engaging trends throughout your work on the project. In that case, you may include those trends in the final presentation upon the approval of the instructor.It is important to note that I am not looking for a history report. This is to research current or emerging trends in the hospitality industry. Do not cover COVID-19’s impact on the hospitality industry.
Continuing with the company you have developed a marketing plan and marketing strategy for (chosen in your previous Assignment : TENCENT), describe the main data – focusing on budgeting and operations forecast – of how the firm will meet the new demand for your company that can be used to develop the marketing strategy and implement the production to fulfill expected demand. The budget outlines the cost of achieving the marketing goals (within a certain timeframe) plus a description of what funds will be committed to the marketing strategy and how those funds will be spent. Support your views with appropriate evidence. Your answer should be at least 700 words in length. Your posts on the discussion board must be presented in a professional manner (proper spelling, grammar, word usage, thoughts grouped by paragraph, etc.) with sources properly cited using APA style.Summarize your thoughts in a MS Word (or similar application) document. Compose a 700-word essay (minimum)
Evaluate the challenges facing the esports industry in order to propose solutions
Evaluate the technology used in the esport industry, including hardware and software
identify one major problem facing esports and propose a solution(s) to improve this situation using current or next-generation technology. Your proposal should include any technological aspects to said solution(s) or explain why the technology would not benefit this proposal and provide alternative solution(s).
Your proposal will be 2000 words minimum.include supporting material such as graphics, diagrams, or statistics. Still, any material that is not the person’s original work is expected to be properly cited (APA)
Clear Identification of the Problem
What is the issue?
Who does it affect?
Region
Players, Teams, Investors, Fans, etc
What are the consequences if this issue continues?
Proposal
What is the technology (or alternative method)
Who provides this technology/service(s)
How viable is this solution across all levels of esports (amateur to pro)
What changes would be needed to current policies/practices to incorporate your solution?
What are the implications of this proposal? (How will it help)
Why is your proposal better than what the current system has to offer?
QSO 340 Project Three Guidelines and Rubric
Competency
In this project, you will demonstrate your mastery of the following competency:
Analyze and reflect on factors that commonly lead to the success or failure of a project
Scenario
You have reached the end of Release One of the XYZ Business Workflow project, and your team has faced some challenges during the development process.
One software tester and one developer from your team resigned. You found replacements for both of them. But, the new developer had to be trained by one of your other team members. This affected the team’s productivity.
Also, during one of your status meetings with the client stakeholders, their product owner requested a change in a feature that was almost complete. They were also very resistant to give any additional time for the first release. As a result, you had to add extra hours to your development time.
To accommodate these changes, your team worked extra hours and even some weekends to complete the project. Finally, you managed to deliver the first release according to schedule.
Although the release goes fairly smoothly, after a few days, the customer reports that their users are facing some issues with the software. They also have a list of changes and two new features they would like to see in the software before your final rollout in Release Two.
Directions
Analysis and Recommendations
Your executive team has asked you to prepare a report summarizing your analysis of the first release of the XYZ Business Workflow software and recommendations for how you think Release Two of the project should be planned.
Think about the project charter, the initial project plan you created in Project One, and the challenges the project team has faced so far. What steps did you take to manage these challenges? In retrospect, can you think of some other strategies you could have used during project planning and/or risk mitigation for better results? Specifically, your report should include the following:
Reflect on the project so far and provide your analysis of what went well and what could have been better.
Outline what you think were the successes and failures of the project.
Identify major challenges your team faced in completing this project and describe how you handled them.
List some alternate strategies you could have used during project planning and/or during risk mitigation for better results.
Based on your experience with Release One, provide some recommendations for managing the second release of the XYZ Business Workflow software, including the methodology, change management, and quality control strategies.
Use information from the scenario, Project One and Project Two, and make reasonable assumptions as you complete these tasks. Be sure to explain your assumptions.
What to Submit
To complete this project, you must submit the following:
Project Analysis Recommendations
Write a short paper with your analysis of the first phase of the software development project and your recommendations for the second phase. Your paper should be 750 to 1,250 words in length; cite any references using the APA format.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
1
QSO 340 Project One
Cherelle Pratt
QSO 340- Project Management
September 17, 2023
2
QSO 340 Project One
Stakeholder Register
This entails a project management document with the relevant information regarding the
respective project stakeholders (Usmani, 2021). Therefore, the stakeholder register in this case is
as follows.
Name
Cherelle Pratt
Role
Project Manager
Michael Lee
Software Architect
[UI Designer]
User Interface
Designer
UI Developer
[UI Developer]
[Technical Team
Leads]
[Software
Developers]
[Software Testers]
Technical Team
Leads
Software Developers
Julia Smith
Product Manager
Ryan Hernandez
Team Lead (ABC
Workflow)
Software Testers
Influence on Project
High – Responsible for project planning and
execution.
High – Responsible for the technical aspects of the
project.
High – Critical for the UI redesign aspect of the
project.
Medium – Responsible for implementing the UI
changes.
Medium – Coordinate the development teams and
provide technical guidance.
Medium – Responsible for developing software
features and customizations.
Medium – Ensure software quality through testing and
validation.
Medium – Represents ABC Workflow v3.0 and
provides insights into requirements.
Low – Provides insights into the existing ABC
Workflow v3.0.
Risk Register
This entails a project risks table allowing project managers to easily track the pinpointed
risks and related information about them (Uzulāns, 2016). Therefore, the risk register in this case
is as follows.
Risk
ID
Description
of Risk
R1
Software
Compatibility
R2
Resource
Availability
Probability
of
Occurrence
Medium
Impact
on the
Project
High
Medium
High
Response Plan
Person
Responsible
Status
Conduct thorough
compatibility testing.
Adapt or replace
incompatible
components.
Ensure resource
allocation and backup
plans. Consider
outsourcing if
necessary.
Software
Architect
Open
Project
Manager
Open
3
R3
Scope Creep
Low
High
R4
Stakeholder
Conflicts
Low
Medium
Clearly define and
document project
scope. Implement
strict change control
procedures.
Establish effective
communication
channels. Mediation
if conflicts arise.
Project
Manager
Open
Project
Manager
Open
Description of Risks:
❖ Software Compatibility (R1): The new software may not work with some XYZ Financial
Services systems, causing integration issues.
❖ Resource Availability (R2): Other projects may limit full-time software developers, testers,
and UI designers, affecting project timelines.
❖ Scope Creep (R3): Uncontrolled project scope changes that delay and increase development.
❖ Stakeholder Conflicts (R4): Stakeholder disagreements can undermine project decisionmaking and progress.
Work-Breakdown Structure (WBS)
This entails a project management tool which uses a stepwise approach to deal with large
projects containing numerous moving pieces (Organ, 2023).
The Tasks and Milestones
Project Initiation
➢ Define Project Scope
➢ Create Project Charter
➢ Identify Stakeholders Requirements Analysis
Requirement Analysis
➢ Review ABC Workflow v3.0
➢ Get XYZ Financial Services Requirements
➢ Software Requirements document Design Phase
Design Phase
➢
➢
➢
➢
UI Design
Create UI
Architecture Design
Database Design
Development Phase
➢ Feature 1 Development
➢ Feature 2 Development
➢ Feature 3 Development
4
➢
➢
➢
➢
➢
Feature Customization 1
Feature Customization 2
Feature Customization 3
Feature Customization 4
Feature Customization 5
Testing Phase
➢
➢
➢
➢
Unit Testing
Integration Testing
System Testing
User Acceptance Testing
Issue Resolution
➢ Fix Software Issues
➢ Fixing Testing Issues
➢ Client Feedback Incorporation
Prototype Delivery
➢ Prototype Preparation for release
➢ Release 1: XYZ Business Workflow 1.0 (Milestone One)
Deployment
➢ Prototype deployment at two customer locations
➢ Testing and Validation
Feedback and refinement
➢ Get User Feedback
➢ Implement Refinements
➢ Release 2: XYZ Business Workflow 1.1 (Milestone Two)
Worldwide Rollout
➢ Deployment of XYZ Business Workflow 1.1 at All Customer Locations (Milestone Three)
Dependencies
On dependencies, it should be noted that from task 1-10, the current task is a prerequisite
for next one and thus precedes it as shown in the networking diagram for the work breakdown
structure below:
Networking Diagram of the WBS
[1. Project Initiation]
5
[2. Requirements Analysis]
[3. Design Phase]
[4. Development Phase]
[5. Testing Phase]
[6. Issue Resolution]
[7. Prototype Delivery]
[8. Deployment]
[9. Feedback and Refinement]
[10. Worldwide Rollout]
Responsibility Assignment Matrix
RACI Chart for Project Tasks:
Task
1. Define
Project Scope
Project
Software UI
UI
Technical Software
Software
Manager Architect Designer Developer Team
Developers Testers
Leads
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
6
2. Develop
Project Charter
R
A
I
I
I
I
I
3. Identify
Stakeholders
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
4. Requirements R
Analysis
I
C
I
I
C
C
5. Design Phase
R
A
R
A
C
I
C
6.Development
Phase
R
A
C
I
R
R
C
7. Testing Phase R
I
C
I
R
C
R
8. Issue
Resolution
9. Prototype
Delivery
10. Deployment
R
A
C
I
R
R
C
R
I
I
I
C
C
C
R
C
C
C
C
C
C
11. Feedback
and Refinement
R
A
R
A
C
R
C
12. Worldwide
Rollout
R
A
C
I
R
R
C
Consulted
C
C
A
C
C
C
C
A
A
Informed
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RACI Chart for Stakeholders
Stakeholder
Project Manager
Software Architect
UI Designer
UI Developer
Technical Team Leads
Software Developers
Software Testers
Julia Smith (Product Manager)
Ryan Hernandez (Team Lead)
Responsible
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Accountable
A
A
C
A
A
A
A
C
C
RACI Roles Explanation
❖ Responsible (R): A person or team in charge of a task or role.
❖ Accountable (A): The person responsible for completing the task. This usually involves one
person.
❖ Consulted (C): This entails those offering input and are consulted before decision making.
❖ Informed (I): Those who are informed of the task’s progress or outcome but don’t participate.
7
Generally, the RACI chart improves project team and stakeholder communication and
responsibility (Miranda, 2022).
8
References
Miranda, D. (2022, March 25). What Is A RACI Chart? How This Project Management Tool Can
Boost Your Productivity. Forbes Advisor. https://www.forbes.com/advisor/business/racichart/#:~:text=A%20RACI%20chart%2C%20also%20called
Organ, C. (2023, March 23). Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) In Project Management. Forbes
Advisor. https://www.forbes.com/advisor/in/business/what-is-work-breakdownstructure/#:~:text=A%20work%20breakdown%20structure%20(WBS
Usmani, F. (2021, August 24). Stakeholder Register in Project Management. PM Study Circle.
Uzulāns, J. (2016). Project Risk Register Analysis Based on the Theoretical Analysis of Project
Management Notion of Risk. Economics and Business, 29(1), 43–48.
https://doi.org/10.1515/eb-2016-0020
Project Status Report
•Subtitle: XYZ Business Workflow Project
•Date: 10/01/2023
•Presenter: Cherelle Pratt
Introduction
• Welcome to the status report for the XYZ Business
Workflow Project.
• The project is at week 10 and this report will give an
overview of its development, as well as the project’s
current timeline, risk register, and any other pertinent
information.
Project Goal and Objectives
• The XYZ Business Workflow project’s
objective is to create a system that would
simplify processes and offer the features
required to boost business productivity.
• The project’s goals include the following:
• Create the first feature, the second, the third,
and the system testing.
• Ensure the project is delivered on time, within
budget, and to the agreed-upon quality
(Wijaya et al. 2022).
• Identify and manage any risks related to the
project.
Team Information
• The XYZ Business Workflow project is led by
Cherelle Pratt and consists of the following
team members and their roles:
• Cherelle Pratt: Project Manager
• Software architect—Michael Lee
• Technical team lead—To be decided (TBD)
• Software developers—TBD
• Software testers—TBD
• UI design and development team—TBD
• Julia Smith—Product Manager (ABC
Workflow v3.0)
• Ryan Hernandez—Team Lead (ABC Workflow
v3.0)
Initial Schedule
with Milestones
and End Dates
Current
Project Status
• The project’s state as of right now
is as follows:
• First Feature: 5 Weeks (1 Week
Delayed)
• Second Feature: 10 Weeks
• Feature Customization 3: 5 Weeks
• System Testing: 1.5 Weeks
• The project’s current anticipated
completion date is 28/12/2023
Gantt Chart For Project’s Progress And
Current Schedule
Task
First Feature
Second Feature
Feature
Customization
System Testing
Project Completion
Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week Week
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The following is the most recent risk/issues
registry for the XYZ Business Workflow
project:
Updated
Risk/Issues
Register
➢ Risk 1: A delay in receiving client
approvals
➢ Risk 2: A one-week overrun in UI design
and development
➢ Risk 3: A three-day increase in Feature 1
development effort due to a problem with
resource availability.
➢ Problem 1: The wait for client approvals
➢ problem 2: UI design and development
are taking a week longer than expected.
➢ Problem 3: A problem with resource
availability extends the development effort
for Feature 1 by three days.
Project
Summary
Project Summary
Continuation
• Action items to keep the project on schedule
include:
➢ Ensure that all parties involved are aware of
any delays
➢ Regularly check on progress and update
parties involved
➢ Determine potential hazards and create
mitigating strategies
Closing
• We appreciate you reading this project status
report. Please do not hesitate to contact us if
you have any questions.
Reference
➢
Wijaya, S., Sari, M. H. R. S. R., & Supriatna, Y.
(2022). Integrated Information System of Material
Resource Planning and Supply Chain Procurement:
A Case Study of XYZ Company. CommIT
(Communication and Information Technology)
Journal, 16(2), 183-193.
https://doi.org/10.21512/commit.v16i2.7945
This assignment asks you to synthesize the readings from this week and put them into conversation with a segment from KPBS’s Midday Edition.
https://www.kpbs.org/podcasts/kpbs-midday-edition/the-threat-of-white-christian-nationalismLinks to an external site.
In 500 words, answer the following questions. Be sure to cite readings from Week 8 with page numbers to exhibit your engagement with course materials. Please include an APA formatted reference list as well.
1. How do the guests in this segment of Midday Edition echo the history of colonialism, imperialism, and constructions of identity and subjectivity that we have discussed and read about?
2. Connect each of the guest’s segments to the following two quotes on discourse. What can you cite from their interviews that exemplifies what is being said in quotes A and B?
A. Analyzing discourses reveals how we come to take a certain phenomenon or an entire social reality for granted, and what kind of effects it has to naturalize that reality rather than another (Dunn & Neumann, 2016, p. 2).
B. Knowledge linked to power, not only assumes the authority of ‘the truth’ but has the power to make itself true. All knowledge, once applied in the real world, has effects, and in that sense at least, ‘becomes true.’ (Foucault 1977, 27).
MAKE SURE IT IS WRITTEN IN APA FORMAT
Unformatted Attachment Preview
14
dictionary Colonial American English does not include a
definition for the word “colonial,” it does define “colony” as “a government in which the governor is elected
Colonial
by the inhabitants under a charter of incorporation by
David Kazanjian
the king, in contrast to one in which the governor is appointed” (Lederer 1985, 54). Here, we can see how far
this usage strays from the word’s roots in conquest by
suggesting that “colonial” signifies a kind of democracy.
“Colonial” has very old roots. The Latin word colonia
was used during the Roman Empire to mean a
nial period,” and “colonial literature” in the US context
settlement of Roman citizens in a newly conquered
have often invoked images of plucky settlers fleeing per-
territory. Often these citizens were retired soldiers
secution in Europe, overthrowing their oppressive Eu-
who received land as a reward for their service and
ropean rulers, establishing rich new states and cultures
as a display of Roman authority to the conquered
against all odds through hard work, and founding a free,
inhabitants. For Roman writers, colonia translated the
democratic, and unified nation. The word “colonial”
Greek word apoikia, which meant a settlement away
thus oddly comes to connote resistance to the violence
from one’s home state, as opposed to the polis, meaning
and power of conquest.
one’s own city or country as well as a community of
In 1847, influential political economist Henry
citizens, or the metropolis, literally one’s mother city or
Charles Carey (1967, 345) extended this usage in a way
mother country.
Despite these etymological ties to the violence and
56
Indeed, “colonials,” “American colonists,” “the colo-
that links it to a history of American exceptionalism:
“The colonization of the United States differs from that
power of conquest, the English word “colony” was until
of the two countries we have considered [Britain and
the eighteenth century as likely to mean simply a farm
France], in the great fact that they [the United States]
or a country estate as a settlement in conquered land
desire no subjects. The colonists are equal with the peo-
subject to a parent state. The cognate “colonial” was
ple of the States from which they sprang, and hence the
not coined until the late eighteenth century (it is not
quiet and beautiful action of the system.” While Britain
in Samuel Johnson’s 1755 dictionary), when it was used
and France send their citizens to the far corners of the
as an adjective to mean “of a colony” and as a noun to
world to conquer territory and subjugate native inhab-
mean “a person from a colony,” most often referring to
itants, Carey tautologically claims, the United States
Europeans who conquered and settled in North Amer-
was founded by colonists who colonized themselves. As
ica and the West Indies.
he goes on to argue, the resulting nation is both excep-
This eighteenth-century usage acquired an impor-
tional, or unique in the history of the world, and exem-
tant and odd wrinkle in the United States, one that is
plary, or destined to be emulated by the rest of the world.
particularly relevant to US variants of cultural stud-
This US understanding of colonization expresses a
ies: “colonial” and “colonist” have often been used as
deeply nationalist mythology that continues to thrive
if they were simple descriptors for early Americans and
today: the United States was founded exclusively on
unrelated to conquest. For instance, while the popular
the just and noble principles of freedom, equality, and
democracy, and it continues to spread those principles
thus be linked with other histories of settler colonial-
around the world. This mythology has been challenged
ism across the Caribbean, Latin America, and Canada,
from a number of directions. Scholars and activists in
as well as in South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand
African American and Native American studies have
(Wolfe 2006; Black Hawk [1833] 2008; Goldstein and
shown how the “quiet and beautiful action” that Carey
Lubin 2008; Andrea Smith 2010; Byrd 2011; Morgensen
describes actually involved some of the most brutal
2011b; Goldstein 2012). The concept of settler coloniza-
systems of dispossession that the modern world has
tion has also been used to link more recent examples
known: the conquest of Native American lands, the en-
of dispossession, such as the black settler coloniza-
slavement and genocide of native peoples and Africans,
tion of Liberia and the Zionist project in Israel, to this
and the establishment of a vast transatlantic and trans-
long history of capitalism’s rise to hegemony (Massad
continental system of race-based chattel slavery. Much
2006; Afzal-Khan and Seshadri 2000; Pedersen and El-
of this scholarship has argued that these practices were
kins 2005; Kazanjian 2011, 2012). Indeed, accumulation
not simply aberrations from or exceptions to the history
by dispossession has been extended to contemporary
and culture of the United States but rather constitutive
neoliberal policies throughout the globe, policies that
of all that it was to become.
have managed waves of economic crisis from the 1970s
Forms of dispossession in which colonists take up
forward, including the privatization of public assets,
permanent residence in the territories they appro-
seizures of indigenous lands, and the rise of so-called
priate are called “settler colonialism.” As Karl Marx
financialization (Harvey 2003).
([1867] 1976) explained in the first volume of Capital,
Attention to histories of settler colonialism unsettles
such dispossession—along with the enclosure of the
the myth of the North American colonial as a “quiet
agricultural commons throughout Europe, the expro-
and beautiful,” even heroic actor. Take as an instance
priation of peasants from those expropriated lands,
of this myth the text that can be said to have founded
and the transformation of those peasants into wage
it: the Declaration of Independence. The Declaration
laborers, global migrants, and settler colonials—was a
represents North American colonials as innocent vic-
central means by which capitalists, starting in the six-
tims of British tyranny (“Such has been the patient
teenth century, accumulated the wealth they needed to
sufferance of these Colonies”) as well as harmless wit-
increase the productive efficiency of agricultural and
nesses to violence against Native Americans by blam-
industrial production and to extract ever-increasing
ing both the Crown and Native Americans themselves
rates of surplus value from peasants, the poor, and in-
for resistance to colonization (“the present king of Great
digenous and enslaved populations. Mythologized as
Britain . . . has endeavored to bring on the inhabitants
“primitive accumulation” by classical political econo-
of our frontiers the merciless Indian savages”; Jeffer-
mists, accumulation by dispossession was in fact the
son [1776] 1984, 19, 21). Even as white settlers were en-
brutal condition of possibility for modern global capi-
gaged in these battles, they paradoxically drew on their
talism and its attendant political form, the nation-state
fantasies about “Indians” to fashion their own identi-
(Emmanuel 1972). The white settler foundations of the
ties as American colonials distinct from their British
United States—in which European settler colonials vio-
brethren. Sometimes they “played Indian,” as Philip
lently expropriated lands from Native Americans—can
J. Deloria (1998) has carefully recounted, in private
ColoniAl
DaviD kazanJian
57
societies and at protests such as the Boston Tea Party.
58
the Declaration of Independence is not simply a list
At other times, they combed through Native American
of heroic rebels; it is a list of elites. Their declaration
graves to show that America had its own ancient his-
would have had no force behind it had poor people
tory to rival that of Europe (Jefferson [1787] 1984). And
throughout the colonies not been struggling for de-
increasingly after the Revolution, white US American
cades against exploitation at the hands of wealthy
writers depicted Native Americans in order to distin-
and powerful colonials as well as British authorities.
guish “American” from “English” literature. Performed
The North American colonial looks neither innocent
alongside violence against Native Americans, this fash-
nor uniform from the perspective of an early dissident
ioning of a US American identity helped generate the
such as Stephen Hopkins, who helped organize a re-
mythology of the innocent North American colonial
bellion and then a furtive utopian community after
who became a heroic rebel and eventually an excep-
a Virginia Company vessel shipwrecked on Bermuda
tional US citizen.
in 1609 (Strachey [1610] 1964); or Richard Frethhorn,
While the Declaration of Independence does not
an indentured servant who was transported to Virginia in
mention slavery directly, in an early draft, it did include
1623 and wrote back to his parents of the brutal condi-
a passage that both criticized slavery and perpetuated
tions he faced (Jehlen and Warner 1997, 123); or Anne
the mythology of North American colonials as innocent
Bonny and Mary Read, two cross-dressing women pi-
victims of conquest. The passage personified the entire
rates who worked with the predominantly male pirate
transatlantic slave trade in the king (“He has waged
population of the early eighteenth century to disrupt
cruel war against human nature itself”) and equated en-
the social and cultural norms, and the emerging impe-
slaved Africans with free white settlers as fellow victims
rial state, of the British Empire (Hogeland et al. 2004,
(“he is now exciting those very people [slaves] to rise in
98–106); or rural colonial rebels who challenged the
arms among us, and to purchase the liberty of which he
British colonial elite for control over land and politi-
has deprived them, by murdering the people on whom
cal decision-making before the American Revolution
he also obtruded them” [Jefferson (1776) 1984, 22]). By
and then took on the early social and political elite in
suppressing the alliance between Europeans and North
the Shays Rebellion of 1786 (Alfred Young 1976, 1993;
American colonials in the system of chattel slavery, this
Zinn 1980; G. Nash 1986; New Social History Project
passage transforms the latter from conquerors to con-
1989–92; Raphael 2001).
quered. Unabashedly proslavery colonials found even
In the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, African
this argument too threatening to their interests and
Americans and Native Americans took the lead in chal-
fought successfully for its deletion.
lenging the mythology of the North American colo-
By recovering and reinterpreting early colonial
nial. In 1829, a free black tailor and activist from Boston
and national texts that were crucial in their day but
named David Walker published a pamphlet that exco-
had long been excluded from disciplinary canons,
riated whites for their systematic racism and called on
twentieth-century scholars traced histories and prac-
blacks to claim the land that slavery had forcibly made
tices of dissent that challenged the mythological
their own, effectively recalling the etymological roots
conception of the American colonial. New social his-
of “colonial” in the violence and power of conquest
torians reminded us that the list of men who signed
as well as disrupting analogies between white settler
ColoniAl
DaviD kazanJian
colonials and slaves ([1829] 1995, 74–76). William Apess,
of thinking about the keyword “colonial” in an interna-
a Pequot born in 1798, published an 1833 essay in which
tional context.
he charged that US Christians failed to live up to the
Such international thinking took place in the early
Revolutionary ideals of freedom and equality as well as
United States as well: Walker’s Appeal, for instance, is ad-
the spirit of Christianity: “By what you read, you may
dressed to “the coloured citizens of the world.” And it
learn how deep your principles are. I should say they
continues today: in an echo of the Declaration of Inde-
were skin-deep” ([1833] 1992, 160). Even in the title of
pendence’s claim that white North American colonials
his essay (“An Indian’s Looking-Glass for the White
are victims of imperialism along with slaves and “sav-
Man”), Apess reverses the dynamic of “playing Indian”;
ages,” some contemporary scholars have suggested that
he claims a European technology, the looking glass, and
the United States should be considered a postcolonial
turns it on white men so that they may see themselves
nation (Ashcroft, Griffiths, and Tiffin 1989; Buell 1995).
not as innocent colonials but as violent colonizers.
In contrast, others have picked up on the implications
This minority tradition of challenging the mythol-
of the internal colonization thesis and insisted on the
ogy of the US American colonial was renewed after
differential relations among variously racialized mi-
the US-Mexico War of 1846–48 by Mexicanos, Tejanos,
norities and whites (Spivak 1993; Sharpe 1995; Saldaña-
and, in the twentieth century, Chicanos who insisted
Portillo 2001). The latter scholarship relies on rich his-
that it was US imperialism— not innocent, plucky
torical understandings of the differences among modes
settlers—that made them as well as the entire geogra-
of imperialism, particularly white settler colonialism,
phy of the Southwest and California part of the United
comprador capitalism, and neocolonialism.
States. Chicanos in the second half of the twentieth
Contemporary scholars have also shown how a
century collaborated with African Americans, Asian
historical understanding of these differences requires
Americans, and Native Americans to appropriate the
a close attention to gender and sexuality. Indeed, we
word “colonial” by situating their own histories in
can hear an echo of gender and sexuality in the very
the context of third world liberation movements (“Al-
word “colonial.” As noted earlier, the Latin colonia was
catraz Reclaimed” [1970] 1971; Valdez and Steiner [1969]
a translation of the Greek word apoikia (literally, “away
1972; Ho 2000). Black activists Stokely Carmichael and
from the domestic sphere”), which itself was opposed
Charles Hamilton (1967, 5–6) exemplify this mode of
in Greek to the polis and the metropolis, “the city” and
analysis in their book Black Power: The Politics of Libera
“the mother country.” This distinction survives in
tion in America: “Black people are legal citizens of the
English in the opposition between “metropole” and
United States with, for the most part, the same legal
“colony.” If the home or domestic sphere is figured as
rights as other citizens. Yet they stand as colonial sub-
maternal, then the colonial sphere is readily figured
jects in relation to the white society. Thus institutional
as public, political, and masculine, which makes the
racism has another name: colonialism. Obviously, the
word “colonial” subject to the vast feminist scholar-
analogy is not perfect.” By acknowledging the imper-
ship on the separation— or inseparability— of pub-
fections of this “internal colonization” argument at the
lic and private spheres (Kerber 1980; Isenberg 1998;
very moment of formulating it, Carmichael and Hamil-
Davidson and Hatcher 2002). One aspect of this schol-
ton foreground both the difficulty and the importance
arship is exemplified by studies of North American
ColoniAl
DaviD kazanJian
59
colonial women such as Anne Hutchinson, who chal-
The complex history of the word “colonial” indexes
lenged the male dominance of mainstream Puritan-
the equally complex politics that have characterized US
ism in seventeenth-century New England (Kerber and
imperialism. In the first decades of the twenty-first cen-
De Hart 2004, 25–120). Other studies suggest that the
tury, debates about colonialism—and settler colonial-
very concept of the domestic invokes the process of do-
ism, in particular—remain at the forefront of research in
mestication, the incorporation and subjection of that
American studies and cultural studies. As struggles over
which is not yet fully domesticated (A. Kaplan 2002).
the future of the US empire proliferate, it is all the more
It is thus not surprising to see early champions of
urgent for cultural studies to take stock of the history of
women’s work in the domestic sphere, such as Catha-
such a contested keyword.
rine Beecher (1841), imagine in imperial terms the ordering and unifying of the home as an ever-expanding
2007/2014
process destined to encompass the entire world. In
addition, black women who were enslaved in the
Americas, as well as contemporary black feminist critics, have shown how the gendering of the colonial
had deep racial implications (A. Davis 1983; H. Wilson
[1859] 1983; Hartman 1997; Prince [1831] 2000; Spillers
2003). Eighteenth-century laws that based a black person’s status as free or enslaved on that of the mother
encouraged the sexual exploitation of black women by
white men. Consequently, the black domestic sphere
became, to white men, a breeding ground for slavery.
To further complicate matters, feminist postcolonial
scholars have shown how the colony as such is often
figured as feminine in order to make it subject to the
power and authority of the metropole, while others
have complicated this general model by tracking the
uneven deployments of gender across the postcolonial
world (Mohanty, Russo, and Torres 1991; McClintock
1995; Yuval-Davis 1997; Spivak 1999). Queer studies has
also opened up the study of sexuality in the colonial
context, examining closely the ways heterosexuality
was made culturally and legally normative among early
North American colonists, and in turn revealed the
challenges that sexually dissident cultures presented
to this normativity (Jonathan Goldberg 1992; Burgett
1998).
60
ColoniAl
DaviD kazanJian
8 ‘Race’, racism and
representation
In this chapter I will examine the concept of ‘race’ and the historical development of
racism in England. I will then explore a particular regime of racial representation,
Edward Said’s analysis of Orientalism. I will use Hollywood’s account of America’s war
in Vietnam, and its potential impact on recruitment for the first Gulf War as an example
of Orientalism in popular culture. The chapter will conclude with a brief discussion of
cultural studies and anti-racism.
‘Race’ and racism
The first thing to insist on in discussions of ‘race’ is that there is just one human race.
Human biology does not divide people into different ‘races’; it is racism (and sometimes its counter arguments) that insists on this division. In other words, ‘race’ is a
cultural and historical category, a way of making difference signify between people of a
variety of skin tones. What is important is not difference as such, but how it is made to
signify; how it is made meaningful in terms of a social and political hierarchy (see
Chapters 4 and 6). This is not to deny that human beings come in different colours and
with different physical features, but it is to insist that these differences do not issue
meanings; they have to be made to mean. Moreover, there is no reason why skin colour
is more significant than hair colour or the colour of a person’s eyes. In other words,
racism is more about signification than it is about biology. As Paul Gilroy observes,
Accepting that skin ‘colour’, however meaningless we know it to be, has a strictly
limited basis in biology, opens up the possibility of engaging with theories of signification which can highlight the elasticity and the emptiness of ‘racial’ signifiers as
well as the ideological work which has to be done in order to turn them into signifiers
in the first place. This perspective underscores the definition of ‘race’ as an open
political category, for it is struggle that determines which definition of ‘race’ will
prevail and the conditions under which they will endure or wither away (2002: 36).
This should not be mistaken for a form of idealism. Difference exists whether it
is made to signify or not. But how it is made to signify is always a result of politics
and power, rather than a question of biology. As Gilroy points out, ‘“Race” has to be
168
Chapter 8 ‘Race’, racism and representation
socially and politically constructed and elaborate ideological work is done to secure
and maintain the different forms of “racialization” which have characterized capitalist
development. Recognizing this makes it all the more important to compare and evaluate the different historical situations in which “race” has become politically pertinent’
(35). Working from this perspective, analysis of ‘race’ in popular culture would be the
exploration of the different ways in which it has and can be made to signify.
As Stuart Hall points out, there are three key moments in the history of ‘race’ and
racism in the West (Hall 1997c). These occur around slavery and the slave trade, colonialism and imperialism, and 1950s immigration following decolonization. In the
next section I will focus on how slavery and the slave trade produced the first detailed
public discussions around ‘race’ and racism. It was in these discussions that the basic
assumptions and vocabulary of ‘race’ and racism were first formulated. It is important
to understand that ‘race’ and racism are not natural or inevitable phenomena; they
have a history and are the result of human actions and interactions. But often they are
made to appear as inevitable, something grounded in nature rather than what they
really are, products of human culture. Again, as Paul Gilroy observes,
For those timid souls, it would appear that becoming resigned both to the absolute status of ‘race’ as a concept and to the intractability of racism as a permanent
perversion akin to original sin, is easier than the creative labour involved in invisioning and producing a more just world, purged of racial hierarchy . . . Rather
than accepting the power of racism as prior to politics and seeing it as an
inescapable natural force that configures human consciousness and action in ways
and forms that merely political considerations simply can never match, this ongoing work involves making ‘race’ and racism into social and political phenomena
again (xx).
According to Gilroy, there needs to be a reduction in ‘the exaggerated dimensions
of racial difference to a liberating ordinary-ness’, adding that ‘“race” is nothing special,
a virtual reality given meaning only by the fact that racism endures’ (xxii). In other
words, without racism there would be little meaning to the concept of ‘race’. It is racism
that keeps the concept alive. What needs to be recognized is ‘the banality of intermixture and the subversive ordinariness of this country’s [the United Kingdom] convivial cultures in which “race” is stripped of meaning and racism just an after-effect of
long gone imperial history’ (xxxviii).
The ideology of racism: its historical emergence
While it is possible to argue that xenophobia, deriving from ignorance and fear, has
perhaps existed as long as different ethnic groups have existed, ‘race’ and racism have
a very particular history. Racism first develops in England as a defence of slavery and
The ideology of racism: its historical emergence
the slave trade. As Peter Fryer (1984) points out, ‘Once the English slave trade, English
sugar-producing plantation slavery, and English manufacturing industry had begun to
operate as a trebly profitable interlocking system, the economic basis had been laid for
all those ancient scraps of myth and prejudice to be woven into a more or less coherent racist ideology: a mythology of race’ (134). In other words, racism first emerges as
a defensive ideology, promulgated in order to defend the economic profits of slavery
and the slave trade.
A key figure in the development of the ideology of racism is the planter and judge
Edward Long. In his book History of Jamaica (1774) he popularized the idea that black
people are inferior to white people, thus suggesting that slavery and the slave trade
were perfectly acceptable institutions. His starting position is the assertion that there is
an absolute racial division between black and white people:
I think there are extremely potent reasons for believing, that the White and the
Negroe are two distinct species. . . . When we reflect on . . . their dissimilarity to the
rest of mankind, must we not conclude, that they are a different species of the same
genus? . . . Nor do [orang-utans] seem at all inferior in the intellectual faculties to
many of the Negroe race; with some of whom, it is credible that they have the most
intimate connection and consanguinity. The amorous intercourse between them
may be frequent . . . and it is certain, that both races agree perfectly well in lasciviousness of disposition (quoted in Fryer 1984, 158–9).
Charles White, writing in 1795 made similar claims, ‘The white European . . . being
most removed from brute creation, may, on that account, be considered as the most
beautiful of the human race. No one will doubt his superiority in intellectual powers;
and I believe it will be found that his capacity is naturally superior also to that of every
other man’ (168).
Edward Long’s own racism is clearly underpinned by sexual anxieties. In a pamphlet
published in 1772, in which racism is mixed with his contempt for working-class
women, he claims that
[t]he lower class of women in England, are remarkably fond of the blacks, for
reasons too brutal to mention; they would connect themselves with horses and
asses if the law permitted them. By these ladies they generally have a numerous
brood. Thus, in the course of a few generations more, the English blood will
become so contaminated with this mixture, and from the chances, the ups and
downs of life, this alloy may spread extensively, as even to reach the middle,
and then the higher orders of the people, till the whole nation resembles the
Portuguese and Moriscos in complexion of skin and baseness of mind (157).
Similarly, in Considerations on the Negroe Cause (1772), Samuel Estwick argued that
black people should be prevented from entering the country in order to ‘preserve the
race of Britons from stain and contamination’ (156). Philip Thicknesse, writing in
1778, makes similar points:
169
170
Chapter 8 ‘Race’, racism and representation
in the course of a few centuries they will over-run this country with a race of men
of the very worst sort under heaven. . . . London abounds with an incredible number of these black men . . . and [in] every country town, nay in almost every village
are to be seen a little race of mulattoes, mischievous as monkeys and infinitely
more dangerous. . . . A mixture of negro blood with the natives of this country is
big with great and mighty mischief (162).
Linking this concern directly to the abolition of slavery, John Scattergood, writing in
1792, argued that if slavery is allowed to end, ‘the Negroes from all parts of the world
will flock hither, mix with the natives, spoil the breed of our common people, increase
the number of crimes and criminals, and make Britain the sink of all the earth, for
mongrels, vagrants, and vagabonds’ (164).
A letter published in the London Chronicle in 1764, which finds an insidious echo in
contemporary debates on immigration, is concerned that too many black servants are
coming into Britain:
As they fill the places of so many of our own people, we are by this means depriving so many of them of the means of getting their bread, and thereby decreasing
our native population in favour of a race, whose mixture with us is disgraceful, and
whose use cannot be so various and essential as those of white people . . . They
never can be considered as a part of the people, and therefore their introduction
into the community can only serve to elbow as many out of it who are genuine
subjects, and in every point preferable. . . . It is . . . high time that some remedy be
applied for the cure of so great an evil, which may be done by totally prohibiting
the importation of any more of them (155).
Given that slavery and the slave trade were of economic benefit to many people not
directly involved with its practice, the new ideology of racism spread quickly among
those without a direct economic interest in slavery and the slave trade. Scottish
philosopher David Hulme, for example, was quite clear about the difference between
whites and non-whites. Writing in 1753, he observed,
I am apt to suspect the negroes, and in general all the other species of men (for
there are four or five different kinds) to be naturally inferior to the whites. There
never was a civilised nation of any other complexion than white. . . . Such a uniform and constant difference could not happen, in so many countries and ages, if
nature had not made an original distinction betwixt these breeds of men. . . . In
Jamaica indeed they talk of one negroe38 as a man of parts and learning; but ’tis
likely he is admired for very slender accomplishments, like a parrot, who speaks a
few words plainly (152).
By the nineteenth-century, it was widely taken for granted that the human race was
divided into superior whites and inferior others. With such natural gifts, it would seem
only right that white Europeans should establish colonies across the globe. Moreover,
Orientalism
as Fryer points out, ‘racism was not confined to a handful of cranks. Virtually every scientist and intellectual in nineteenth-century Britain took it for granted that only people
with white skin were capable of thinking and governing’ (1984: 169). In fact, it was
probably only after the Second World War that racism finally lost its scientific support.
In the nineteenth-century racism could even make colonial conquest appear as if
directed by God. According to Thomas Carlyle, writing in 1867, ‘The Almighty Maker
appointed him [“the Nigger”] to be a Servant’ (quoted in Fryer, 1984: 172). Sir Harry
Johnston (1899), who had worked as a colonial administrator in South Africa and
Uganda, claimed that ‘The negro in general is a born slave’, with the natural capacity
to ‘toil hard under the hot sun and in unhealthy climates of the torrid zone’ (173).
Even if the hot sun or the unhealthy climate proved too much, the white Europeans
should not overly concern themselves with possibilities of suffering and injustice.
Dr Robert Knox, for example, described by Philip Curtin as ‘one of the key figures in
the general Western . . . pseudo-scientific racism’ (1964: 377), was very reassuring on
this point: ‘What signify these dark races to us? . . . [T]he sooner they are put out of the
way the better. . . . Destined by the nature of their race, to run, like all other animals, a
certain limited course of existence, it matters little how their extinction is brought
about’ (quoted in Fryer, 1984: 175).
Knox is certainly extreme in his racism. A less extreme version, justifying imperialism on grounds of a supposed civilising mission, was expressed by James Hunt.
Founder of the Anthropological Society of London in 1863, Hunt argued that although
‘the Negro is inferior intellectually to the European, [he or she] becomes more humanised when in his natural subordination to the European than under any other circumstances’ (177). In fact, as he makes clear, ‘the Negro race can only be humanised and
civilised by Europeans’ (ibid.). Colonial secretary Joseph Chamberlain (1895) offers a
wonderful summary of this argument: ‘I believe that the British race is the greatest of
governing races the world has ever seen. I say this not merely as an empty boast, but as
proved and shown by the success which we have had in administering vast dominions
. . . and I believe there are no limits accordingly to its future’ (183).
Orientalism
Edward Said (1985), in one of the founding texts of post-colonial theory, shows how
a Western discourse on the Orient – ‘Orientalism’ – has constructed a ‘knowledge’ of
the East and a body of ‘power–knowledge’ relations articulated in the interests of the
‘power’ of the West. According to Said, ‘The Orient was a European invention’ (1).
‘Orientalism’ is the term he uses to describe the relationship between Europe and the
Orient, in particular, the way ‘the Orient has helped to define Europe (or the West) as
its contrasting image, idea, personality, experience’ (1–2). He ‘also tries to show that
European culture gained in strength and identity by setting itself off against the Orient
as a sort of surrogate and even underground self’ (3).
171
172
Chapter 8 ‘Race’, racism and representation
Orientalism can be discussed and analysed as the corporate institution for dealing
with the Orient – dealing with it by making statements about i
In this essay, you will research and write a 1500-word essay that explores a case of financial
misconduct by one of the following companies: Revolution Lighting Technologies, Inc. Sequential Brands Group, Inc. Weatherford International Assisted Living Concepts, Inc. Broadwind Energy Inc. Bally Total Fitness Holding Corp.Your essay should delve into the details of the company’s financial misconduct and also identify why the auditors failed to detect it.Assignment Instructions: Part 1: Research and Analysis
1. Select one of the specified companies with a history of financial misconduct. 2. Use SEC Litigation Releases, Complaints, and Accounting and Auditing Enforcement Releases (AAERs)
to gather information about the case, focusing on the financial misconduct itself and the role of the
auditor. 3. Identify key factors that contributed to the financial misconduct and the auditor’s failures in this
context. Part 2: Essay Composition
1. Write a 2500-word essay addressing the following components: Introduction to the selected company and an overview of the financial misconduct. An explanation of the auditor’s role in auditing and oversight. A discussion of how the auditor’s inaction or shortcomings contributed to the financial misconduct. Use relevant data, evidence, and examples to support your analysis. Include proper citations and references to SEC documents as sources
Part of being a good manager is staying up to date on the latest news, trends, laws, financial happenings, and international situations impacting business. If you look at your newsfeed, you will see many articles that directly relate to the material we study every week. Make it part of your daily habits to check in and review the top business-related articles.Identify an article in the media within the last six weeks that relates to a topic from this week’s assigned reading. You can look at reputed newspapers, journals, online publications, and other sources. The APSU library is an excellent resource. Once you identify an article, submit it along with a paragraph that addresses the following.How do you relate this article to the material we covered in the course?
Please read the Case-2.1 “Hector Gaming Company.”from Chapter 2 “Organization strategy and Project Selection” given in your textbook – Project Management: The Managerial Process 8th edition by Larson and Gray page no: 61 also refer to specific concepts you have learned from the chapter to support your answers.Answer the following questions with 500 Words limit. Peters has hired you as a consultant. She has suggested the following format for your consulting contract. You are free to use another format if it will improve the effectiveness of the consulting engagement. Provide a detailed action plan that attacks the problem. Be specific and provide examples that relate to HGC. 1. What is our major problem? 2. Identify some symptoms of the problem. 3. What is the major cause of the problem? Discussion Question: What impact will artificial intelligence (AI) have on the field of project management?How are projects linked to the strategic plan?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Patentometrics,” Journal of Technology Management Innovation, vol.
7, no. 3 (2012).
Raskin, P., et al., Great Transitions: The Promise and Lure of the Times
Ahead, www.gtinitiative.org/documents/Great_Transitions.pdf.
Accessed 6/3/08.
Schwartz, Peter, and Doug Randall, “An Abrupt Climate Change
Scenario and its Implications for United States National Security,”
Global Business Network, Inc., October 2003.
Shenhar, A., “Strategic Project Leadership: Focusing Your Project on
Business Success,” Proceedings of the Project Management Institute
Annual Seminars & Symposium, San Antonio, Texas, October 3–10,
2002, CD.
Swanson, S., “All Things Considered,” PM Network, February 2011,
pp. 36–40.
Case 2.1
Hector Gaming Company
Hector Gaming Company (HGC) is an educational gaming company
specializing in young children’s educational games. HGC has just
completed their fourth year of operation. This year was a banner year for
HGC. The company received a large influx of capital for growth by issuing
stock privately through an investment banking firm. It appears the return on
investment for this past year will be just over 25 percent with zero debt!
The growth rate for the last two years has been approximately 80 percent
each year. Parents and grandparents of young children have been buying
HGC’s products almost as fast as they are developed. Every member of the
56-person firm is enthusiastic and looking forward to helping the firm grow
to be the largest and best educational gaming company in the world. The
founder of the firm, Sally Peters, has been written up in Young
Entrepreneurs as “the young entrepreneur to watch.” She has been able to
develop an organizational culture in which all stakeholders are committed
to innovation, continuous improvement, and organization learning.
Last year, 10 top managers of HGC worked with McKinley Consulting
to develop the organization’s strategic plan. This year the same 10 managers
had a retreat in Aruba to formulate next year’s strategic plan using the same
process suggested by McKinley Consulting. Most executives seem to have
page 61
a consensus of where the firm should go in the intermediate
and long term. But there is little consensus on how this should
be accomplished. Peters, now president of HGC, feels she may be losing
control. The frequency of conflicts seems to be increasing. Some
individuals are always requested for any new project created. When
resource conflicts occur among projects, each project manager believes his
or her project is most important. More projects are not meeting deadlines
and are coming in over budget. Yesterday’s management meeting revealed
some top HGC talent have been working on an international business game
for college students. This project does not fit the organization vision or
market niche. At times it seems everyone is marching to his or her own
drummer. Somehow more focus is needed to ensure everyone agrees on
how strategy should be implemented, given the resources available to the
organization.
Yesterday’s meeting alarmed Peters. These emerging problems are
coming at a bad time. Next week HGC is ramping up the size of the
organization, number of new products per year, and marketing efforts.
Fifteen new people will join HGC next month. Peters is concerned that
policies be in place that will ensure the new people are used most
productively. An additional potential problem looms on the horizon. Other
gaming companies have noticed the success HGC is having in their niche
market; one company tried to hire a key product development employee
away from HGC. Peters wants HGC to be ready to meet any potential
competition head on and to discourage any new entries into their market.
Peters knows HGC is project driven; however, she is not as confident that
she has a good handle on how such an organization should be managed—
especially with such a fast growth rate and potential competition closer to
becoming a reality. The magnitude of emerging problems demands quick
attention and resolution.
Peters has hired you as a consultant. She has suggested the following
format for your consulting contract. You are free to use another format if it
will improve the effectiveness of the consulting engagement.
What is our major problem?
Identify some symptoms of the problem.
What is the major cause of the problem?
Provide a detailed action plan that attacks the problem. Be specific and
provide examples that relate to HGC.
Case 2.2
Film Prioritization
The purpose of this case is to give you experience in using a project priority
system that ranks proposed projects by their contribution to the
organization’s objectives and strategic plan.
COMPANY PROFILE
The company is the film division for a large entertainment conglomerate.
The main office is located in Anaheim, California. In addition to the feature
film division, the conglomerate includes theme parks, home videos, a
television channel, interactive games, and theatrical productions. The
company has been enjoying steady growth over the past 10 years. Last year
total revenues increased by 12 percent to $21.2 billion. The company is
engaged in negotiations to expand its theme park empire to mainland China
and Poland. The film division generated $274 million in revenues, which
was an increase of 7 percent over the past year. Profit margin was page 62
down 3 percent to 16 percent because of the poor response to three
of the five major film releases for the year.
1) Open the Chapter 7 & 8 Practice Questions document below. 2) Read through the document and write down the answers to your practice questions. 3) Check your answers against the answer key at the end of the document. 4) Post a comment in this discussion thread about what you learned from the practice questions.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
7/20/2015
Practice for Chapters 7 & 8
Write down your answers to the practice questions and then check
them against the answer key at the end.
Survey Invite/Introduction
Dear FIU community member:
shopFIU would like to hear from you regarding
your experiences with our on campus services.
Below is a link to our customer service survey.
Your answers will help us identify areas for
improvement in the services we provide for you.
Please click HERE to take the survey. It should
take between 3-5 minutes to complete.
Thank you for your time. We highly value your
feedback and will use it to continue to improve
our services.
• Look at slide 15 from the Ch. 8
notes and look for the following
intro components:
• Survey sponsor
• Survey purpose
• Request for participation
The Office of Business Services
DC 123
305.348.2187
shop.FIU.edu
1
7/20/2015
Question Evaluation Sequence
• When looking at evaluating survey questions you should ask yourself
the questions below in the following order:
• Is the survey question categorical, metric, or open-ended?
• If it’s a metric question, is it natural or synthetic?
• If it’s a categorical question, is it dual choice or multiple choice?
• What type of scale is used in the question? (i.e. Likert, Semantic Differential,
Stapel)
Now, let’s practice…
Write down your answers to the practice questions and then check
them against the answer key at the end.
2
7/20/2015
1) Identify the question type.
a) Categorical
b) Metric
c) Open-ended
2) Is the top question…?
a) Dual Choice
b) Multiple Choice
3) Is the bottom question…?
a) Dual Choice
b) Multiple Choice
3
7/20/2015
4) Identify the question type.
a) Categorical
b) Metric
c) Open-need
5) What type of scale is being used
in this metric question?
a) Natural scale
b) Synthetic scale
4
7/20/2015
6) What type of scale is being
used in this question?
a) Semantic Differential
b) Stapel
c) Likert
d) Graphical
7) Would you call this a …?
a) 3-point scale
b) 4-point scale
c) 5-point scale
What if the survey asks the respondents age?
• Is that a categorical or a metric
question?
• The answer is … it depends on how
the question was written.
• In the top question, the
respondent would write their age
in the text box provided. In the
bottom question, they would select
the range or category that their age
falls into.
• Please provide your age.
___ years old
• Which of the following best describes
your age?
• Under 18
• 18-24
• 25-34
• 35-44
• 45-54
• 55+
5
7/20/2015
• Please provide your age.
___ years old
• Which of the following best describes
your age?
• Under 18
• 18-24
• 25-34
• 35-44
• 45-54
• 55+
8) The top question would be
classified as?
a) Categorical
b) Metric
c) Open-ended
9) The bottom question would
be classified as?
a) Categorical
b) Metric
c) Open-ended
What if the survey asks a question like this?
10) Identify the question type.
a) Categorical
b) Metric
c) Open-need
11) If it is a metric question,
would you classify it as….?
a) Natural scale
b) Synthetic scale
• On a scale of 1 to 5, how
important is it that the food on
campus tastes good?
• 1 ……Extremely important
• 2 ……Very important
• 3 ……Somewhat important
• 4 ……Not very important
• 5 ……Not at all important
6
7/20/2015
Answer Key
1. A
2. A
3. B
4. C
5. A
6. C
7. C
8. B
9. A
10. B
11. B
7
Descriptive statistics describes a data set. It is used to summarize and organize the data into something more manageable, actionable, and ready for presentation. It can also help organize data and present a business problem in an understandable manner. You can use descriptive statistics to understand and analyze the data for your organization.
The employees in your company report struggling with burnout (being overworked). You have been asked to analyze the situation and recommend solutions to reduce employee burnout. You have access to an employee survey with employee responses related to the situation.
This week you will analyze the employee survey data and create bar graphs to represent the data visually. Based on your analysis, you will then create an executive summary targeted to a non-technical audience unfamiliar with statistics. See the document Module Four Survey Response Key for the responses that were available on the survey.
Prompt
Part 1: Burnout Analysis: Bar Graphs
To complete this assignment, you will use Tableau software that is located within the virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI).
Follow the directions in the User Manual: Working With Tableau document to import these employee survey responses into Tableau and conduct a burnout analysis. Use Tableau to create bar graphs that will answer the following questions. Take screenshots of your bar graphs to include in your executive summary document.
Which gender is experiencing the burnout level “Pretty wiped out almost every day” most?
Which male age group is experiencing the stress level, “A little stress that would be expected with the ups and downs of life” at home the most?
Which leadership level strongly agrees with the fact that they love what they do?
Which gender with a tenure of 5+ years had the lowest number of responses for the burnout level “I feel great! Energy to spare!”?
Part 2: Executive Summary
Create an Executive Summary of your results addressing the following criteria:
Purpose and respondents: Explain the purpose of the executive summary and briefly describe the survey respondents.
Results: Summarize your bar graph analyses and answer the questions they represent. Add corresponding bar graphs to relevant sections of the summary to illustrate your analyses.
Recommendations: Based on your analysis, recommend two areas the company can focus on to reduce employee burnout.
What to Submit
To complete this assignment, you must submit the following:
Executive Summary: Submit a 2-to 3-page Word document with 12-point Times New Roman font, double spacing, and one-inch margins. Include the screenshots of the graphs you generated in Tableau. Sources should be cited according to APA style. Consult the Shapiro Library APA Style Guide for more information on citations.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Part 1: Burnout Analysis: Bar Graphs
To complete this assignment, you will use Tableau software that is located within the virtual desktop
infrastructure (VDI).
Follow the directions in the User Manual: Working With Tableau document to import these employee
survey responses into Tableau and conduct a burnout analysis. Use Tableau to create bar graphs that will
answer the following questions. Take screenshots of your bar graphs to include in your executive
summary document.
1. Which gender is experiencing the burnout level “Pretty wiped out almost every day” most?
Female
2. Which male age group is experiencing the stress level, “A little stress that would be expected
with the ups and downs of life” at home the most? 50+
3. Which leadership level strongly agrees with the fact that they love what they do? Managers
4. Which gender with a tenure of 5+ years had the lowest number of responses for the burnout
level “I feel great! Energy to spare!”? Female
Part 2: Executive Summary
Create an Executive Summary of your results addressing the following criteria:
1. Purpose and respondents: Explain the purpose of the executive summary and briefly describe
the survey respondents.
2. Results: Summarize your bar graph analyses and answer the questions they represent. Add
corresponding bar graphs to relevant sections of the summary to illustrate your analyses.
3. Recommendations: Based on your analysis, recommend two areas the company can focus on to
reduce employee burnout.
4 credible sources in APA format. Make sure to include a draft policy or process not just steps but the actual policy or process. all information included in the attachments
Requirement: In this case study, you can choose one case which shall be related to the leading topics covered from week 7 to week 11 (which include ICT for gender (dis)empowerment, ethical AI, digital social movement from below, cyber-fascism, and the manipulation industry). Please combine the theory taken from week 1 to week 5 with an in-depth analysis of one case selected based on your research interest.Suggested structure:Introduction (200 words) – Provide a sense of direction for your case study. To the readers of your case study, provide sufficient information about the context, argument, broad topic, and narrow topic. Literature review (1000 words) – This section can contain overlaps with the prior literature review, but don’t just copy and paste from the previous assignment. This is a case study and the purpose is different. You have a specific, narrow topic that you are exploring, which may require literature that is connected to the topic area. Don’t just list your literature; avoid the shopping-list style. Provide critical evaluations of the literature. There should be at least 8 pieces of literature. Literature here means peer reviewed sources like journal articles, books, book chapters. News articles are NOT permitted. Feel free to use literature from the weekly readings or lecture slides as well as those you have found from your own research. [You can use news articles, industry reports, websites to provide background to the topic; but those are not sources for reviewing in the lit review]. Case study (1500 words) – Provide an analysis of your case study by examining its background, relevant theories. Focus on narrowing down to a particular context (i.e. MeToo in China; Foxconn case of the iPhone factory). Synthesise with literature you have reviewed. Discussion & Conclusion (600 words) – Discuss the case through the lens of your chosen theory (for example: technological determinism in the Foxconn case). Make an argument that is informed by the chosen theory. Synthesise with literature you have reviewed. Don’t just write opinion! References (200 words) – 200 words here is allocated from your writing in the essay as a general word limit: include all the pieces you use in the essay in your reference list. It is okay if this section exceeds the 200 words. Make sure there are at least 8 references. Reference style is APA/Harvard and be consistent with what style you use.
Instructions for this Assignment For this assignment, the student will be responsible for creating their personal brand and designing a marketing plan to support their brand. The assignment should have the following components:1. Personal Brand (4 pts) a) Brand Name / Logo / Slogan b) Identify five positive qualities that describe you c) Describe your audience or potential customer2. Sport Marketing Plan a) External Contingencies: (1pt) a. Competition / Legal / Political / Demographics / Technology / Culture / Environmental / Economyb) Internal Contingencies: (3 pts) a. Mission b. Vision c. Org. Objectives (Financial: Growth in revenue, increase profit margin, improve return on investment. Strategic: increase market share, enhanced community relations.) d. Marketing Goals (Specific, measurable, attainable, reachable, timely)c) Planning a. Market Selection: (understand your customer) (3 pts) • Segmentation (who?) • Targeting (why?) • Positioning (how?) b. Marketing Mix • Product (description and image) (2 pts) • Place (1 pt) • Price (1 pt) • Promotion strategy: (content marketing: website, blog posts, videos, social media, email newsletters, podcasts, whitepapers, presentations, posters, etc..) (5 pts)
or the assignment company, please provide a two page history of the company. Do NOT repeat the founder’s biography. Use inline source citations. Provide a bibliography. No more than two direct quotations are allowed! Read the syllabus for the list of common writing errors. The syllabus also contains directions for finding sources of information. Do not rely solely on Google searches! and i need an outline on a 3 by 5 card on and it doesn’t have to be tow pages for the first one just will explained.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Midterm Exam Study Guide
BUS 305: Workforce Diversity in the 21st Century
Dr. Ashley Alteri
This is a list of all possible questions that could appear on your exam. I will include 3 long and 3
short essay questions on the exam and you will be able to pick 2 long and 2 short essays to
answer (for a total of 4 essay questions). The exam will cover the material your textbook that we
covered before the midterm and the materials posted on Brightspace.
Long Essays (max. length: 2 pages single spaced)
1. The book discusses two different theories of discrimination and affirmative action: the
neoclassical economic approach and the equal opportunities theory. Describe each theory
and explain the difference between them.
2. James, a light-complexioned African American, has worked as a waiter at a restaurant
for over a year. His manager, a brown-complexioned African American, has frequently
made offensive comments and jokes about James’s skin color, causing him to lose sleep
and dread coming in to work. James’s requests that the conduct stop only intensified the
abuse.
• What employment discrimination claims, if any does James have?
• What are the potential basis and issue types?
• Please describe the strengths and weaknesses of his claim.
3. Eliza works at Tots Day Care Center. Tots is run by a religious organization that believes
that, while women may work outside of the home if they are single or have their
husband’s permission, men should be the heads of their households and the primary
providers for their families. Believing that men shoulder a greater financial responsibility
than women, the organization pays female teachers less than male teachers.
• What employment discrimination claims, if any does Eliza have?
• What are the potential basis and issue types?
• Please describe the strengths and weaknesses of his claim.
4. An employer is interviewing applicants for a computer programmer position. The
employer determines that one of the applicants, Arnold, is the best qualified, but is
reluctant to hire him because he disclosed during the interview that he is a divorced
father and has sole custody of his son, who has a disability. Because the employer
concludes that Arnold’s caregiving responsibilities for a person with a disability may
have a negative effect on his attendance and work performance, it decides to offer the
position to the second best qualified candidate.
• What employment discrimination claims, if any does Arnold have?
• What are the potential basis and issue types?
• Please describe the strengths and weaknesses of his claim.
5. Julia, a salesperson took five months of leave as a reasonable accommodation. The
company compares the sales records of all salespeople over a one-year period, and any
employee whose sales fall more than 25% below the median sales performance of all
employees is automatically terminated. The employer terminates Julia because she had
fallen below the required performance standard. The company did not consider that the
reason for her lower sales performance was her five-month leave of absence; nor did it
assess her productivity during the period she did work (i.e., prorate her productivity).
• What employment discrimination claims, if any does Eliza have?
• What are the potential basis and issue types?
• How should the company have handled the situation? Explain how they could
extend the reasonable accommodation for Julia into the calculation of their
performance standards.
Short Essays (max. length: 1 page single spaced)
1. Define affirmative action. Please describe how affirmative action impacts hiring and
selection and the popular misconceptions about affirmative action
2. What is employment discrimination? What is the difference between covert and overt
discrimination. What is the difference between intentional and unintentional
discrimination. Please provide examples of each.
3. What are the characteristics of an inclusive workplace (hint, the book mentions 5)?
4. The Americans With Disabilities Acts protects people who are considered disabled
according to the law. According to this law, what are the ways in which a person is
considered disabled (protected by the law)?
5. Under the Age Discrimination Act, the law allows you to waive your rights to a claim.
What must you receive in order to waive your rights? In order for the waiver to be valid,
what must be included in the waiver?
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction, personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:-
Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL: McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ” Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02 Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02 Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical. What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words 200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: –
1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Organizational Behaviour (MGT 301)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name: Organizational Behaviour
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT301
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: 1st
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade: 00 /10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
CLO-Covered
1 Recognize the fundamental concepts, theories and principles, examine challenges
of organizational behaviour. (CLO1).
2 Describe management issues such as diversity, attitudes and job satisfaction,
personality, and values in organizational behaviour (CLO2).
Assignment 1
Reference Source:
Textbook:Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson, M. J. (2021). Organizational behaviour:
Improving performance and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). Burr Ridge, IL:
McGraw-Hill Irwin.
Case Study: –
Case: LEVI’S
Please read the case “ LEVI’S ” from Chapter 1 “What is organizational Behaviour ”
Page: – 23 given in your textbook – Organizational behaviour: Improving performance
and commitment in the workplace (7th ed). by Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A., & Wesson,
M. J. (2021) and Answer the following Questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. Initiatives like Improving Worker Well-Being could increase Levi’s costs in a number
of different respects. Shouldn’t that harm the profitability of the company? (02 Marks)
(Min words 150-200)
2. What are the potential strengths of a bottom-up approach to supplier improvement for a
large company like Levi’s? Would be the advantages to a more top-down approach? (02
Marks) (Min words 150-200)
3. How exactly should Harvard’s School of Public Health go about studying the effects of
the Improving Worker Wellbeing initiative? What would an ideal study look like? (02
Marks) (Min words 200)
Part:-2
Discussion Questions: – Please read Chapter 2&3 “Job Performance —Organizational
Commitment” carefully and then give your answers based on your understanding.
4. Describe a job in which citizenship behaviours would be especially critical to an
organization’s functioning, and one in which citizenship behaviours would be less critical.
What is it about a job that makes citizenship more important? (02 Marks ) (Min words
200-300)
5. Can you think of reasons the increased diversity of the workforce might actually
increase organizational commitment? Why? Which of the three types of commitment might
explain that sort of result? (02 Marks ) (Min words 150-200)
Important Note: 1. Support your submission with course material concepts, principles, and theories from
the textbook and at least two scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles.
2. References required in the assignment. Use APA style for writing references.
Answers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Especially on using a competitive matrix. And focus only on Apple Inc. Samsung can be its competitor.
This assignment has two major parts. The first part is a Situation Analysis in which you will examine the competitors and customers in your marketplace and discover the challenges and opportunities that exist in your target market. The second part involves the creation of your Value Proposition.
Assignment Steps
Part I
Conduct a Situation Analysis for your selected business opportunity. Include the following details in your analysis:
Analyze competitors by using the Competitive Matrix and applying appropriate variables for your business.
Analyze the customers that you wish to attract including current and future customers.
Compare the specific attributes of your product with those of competitors in your market niche.
Describe aspects of your product/service that will attract your targeted customers.
Evaluate similarities and differences between your target market and that of your competitors.
500 words
Part II
The results of your Situation Analysis provide the basis for a distinct Value Proposition for your product/service that can help to generate brand and name identity.
Write your Value Proposition as a 750- to 1,050-word paper that includes the following:
Define your Value Proposition.
Explain the Value Proposition for your product or service.
Discuss the major elements necessary for building a brand.
Identify 5 action steps that you will take to build the brand for your company and/or product.
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Running head: SITUATION ANALYSIS
1
Situation Analysis
Name
Date
SITUATION ANALYSIS
2
PART 1
Situation Analysis
Introduction
A competitive matrix proves crucial in the establishment and continued development of a
product line. The primary objective of having a competitive pattern is to ensure that the
marketing plan can be in place and also create better brands than what competitors have.
Additionally, a competitive matrix allows the organisation to learn about the marketing segment
which enables the management to differentiate its products from the competition. There are
several matrices used to analyse and get facts right regarding race. It is essential to concentrate
on their strengths, opportunities and weaknesses in a bid to critically deal with competition on a
particular target market. It is for the same reason that the following analysis seeks to provide a
competitive matrix applying the feature comparison matrix in investigating the fierce
competition exhibited by Apple and Samsung on technological development.
Analysing competitors using the matrix and applying appropriate variables to the study
The feature comparison matrix comes out as the best in having a perfect market analysis
in the phone industry as listed. The method ensures that every product by the competitor is listed.
Then, the marketing department in charge of comparison looks at features exhibited by a player
yet lacked by the competitor. The android phones, in this case, would provide a perfect analogy
at any particular juncture. Both Samsung and iPhone have the latest technology when it comes to
improved settings and phone technology with each releasing the newest technology with regards
to Android versions that meet market demands. However, there are unique factors which makes
iPhone users enjoy their services as compared to Samsung. iPhone has security features which
SITUATION ANALYSIS
3
ensure customers get the best out of their safety concerns. On the other hand, Samsung may only
boast of having access to almost all parts of the world due to its prompt marketing strategies
(Newton et al 2015).
Customers attracted/former or current
Currently, the phone industry has become highly competitive targeting a myriad market
and concern area. Both Samsung and iPhone target all android users with interest in getting vast
technological activities and associations at any given juncture. The other target group would
include those who like to have their services aligned to phone gadgets and improve the best out
of the target market. The future market would involve a target to the low-income earners within
the society. The industry players must get the best-priced gadgets as opposed to the costly ones
in the market. It would make the same access in future and bet the improved target market for
that matter.
Comparison of the product to the ones of the competitor
There are particular features that iPhone poses which lacks in Samsung. Competition has
become stiff with regards to the use of smartphones. However, some situations make it possible
to prefer the former. The competition has narrowed down to now include customers need for
guaranteed security. Since the iPhone offers the above, it is vital to signify and choose it at the
Expense of the other. Another factor and feature which makes iPhone the better choice look at
the robust features and network coverage ability especially in the domestic market. The phone is
tailor-made to suit the need of the American network user. The feature is profoundly opposite to
that of Samsung which has stronger network coverage developed to satisfy the Korean market.
Aspects of iPhone that meet target customers demand
SITUATION ANALYSIS
4
It is tricky to pinpoint a feature that consumers like in a product. Once a company can
vividly stop at a function and analyse it as the reason why it enjoys success, then the competition
would be already eliminated. Our case in point looks at the security features provided to the
wealthy members of the society. The two classes-the rich and the middle-income earners are in
dire need of safe phone usage. So, the iPhone provides this and other vital features worth noting.
The other factor related to security points to the end-to-end encryption which highly guards
against unauthorised access by unintended users for that matter.
Similarities and differences between the target market and the competitors
The smartphone consumer has a plethora of market destinations to choose from. In the
case, it is not able to conclude that the market selected to draw a comparison with our competitor
has similarities at the expense of the differences witnessed. The similarities point to the fact that
the consumer’s taste and preferences have continued to align with phone consumption needs. The
market allows the interaction and the exchange of competitive analysis for that matter.
Additionally, the similarities go on to include the pricing policies analysed. Both phone
companies provide a perfect start and marketing analysis getting the best out of the available
channel of marketing.
PART 11
The value proposition is a critical marketing tool used by companies to ensure the
organisation implements a robust, vibrant and articulate marketing strategy. The value
proposition for the company may be defined as an attractive outfit and innovative enterprise to
get and improve the marketing approach by any company. Therefore, the smartphone industry
would add value to the market by innovating and continually improving technology in the
SITUATION ANALYSIS
5
smartphone industry. Improving smartphones would involve engaging artificial intelligence thus
get the best out of the phones. Our target market-the high-income earners and the middle-class
income personnel would ensure that marketing reaches the great and guarantee customer
satisfaction at that level.
Elements relevant for building a brand
There are some features and components that marketers use to make a brand at any given
entity. The first element of brand creation looks at identifying a relevant target market. The B2C
environment dictates that the researchers come up with a satisfactory model that meets specified
products for the market recognised. The next element looks at the Brand positioning element.
Just as the strategic positioning forms the best place in planning and rolling out a product, brand
positioning gets the best out of the said individuals and products at hand. The leadership and
design team must at all times locate phone products in places that they can quickly get accessed.
Another characteristic point to the brand values attached to the services offered at any market.
Brand value requires business leaders to get the best product out there continually. The product
must have value and produce tangible results when tested in the market at any given level (Ko &
Aiello, 2016).
Steps for building a company’s brand
The first step in creating a brand for any particular company includes conducting market
research. The questions asked revolves around identifying the awareness of the company brand
to the customers, the perception of the brand to the market and the characteristics of the product
that makes it unique to consumers at any given level. The next step points at focusing on a
product with a single value proposition. The product chosen must stand out and guarantee the
SITUATION ANALYSIS
6
best-case outcome in terms of quality and decision-making outcomes at any given juncture. The
third step includes selecting a brand name that passes the message revolving around the perfect
letter sent and value addition at any provided level and decision-making articulations. The name
must be unique and then perform in line with the valuable actions as aligned to the proposition at
all levels. Another stage in developing a brand points to the emotional connection tied to the
product. Attaching emotions to the outcome highlights the significance of the whole performance
levels and meeting individual customer needs for that level. Eventually, communicating brand
awareness issues makes it possible to tie strategic implementation and formulation by making it
perform, and the best case makes it possible to create viable options regarding communication
(Ramaswamy & Ozcan, 2016).
SITUATION ANALYSIS
7
References
Newton, N. J., Persellin, J. S., Wang, D., & Wilkins, M. S. (2015). Internal control opinion
shopping and audit market competition. The Accounting Review, 91(2), 603-623.
Ko, E., Phau, I., & Aiello, G. (2016). Luxury brand strategies and customer experiences:
Contributions to theory and practice. Journal of Business Research, 69(12), 5749-5752.
Ramaswamy, V., & Ozcan, K. (2016). Brand value co-creation in a digitalized world: An
integrative framework and research implications. International Journal of Research in
Marketing, 33(1), 93-106.
I need a job interview script written out for me please i will be having to give someone the questions while i resoond at minimumum in a 20 min videoBASED OFF MY COVER LETTER AND RESUMEKeep in mind, that your interview can be conducted with someone via Zoom. *If this is done, obviously there can be no physical “handshake”, but instead ensure that “your” initial greeting is really positive, enthusiastic, and verbally expresses gratitude to the Interviewer for taking the time for the interview. MINE WILL BE ONLINEThe time limit requirement for this interview is 20 – 40 mins. You will be significantly penalized in the amount of 20 points (if your time is 19:59 mins or below. (The intent is to ensure that you take the time to elaborate on your “behavioral questions”). https://youtu.be/HG68Ymazo18https://youtu.be/DHDrj0_bMQ0
Unformatted Attachment Preview
Fundamentals of
Professional Interview Project (PIP)
Practice & Actual – Packet
MAN 3301
Interviewing
Resources provided by: The Career Center at Berkeley, University of California
O
nce you get to the interview stage of the application process, you have succeeded in convincing an employer
to invest time in meeting you. When you developed your resume and cover letter, you already:
• analyzed the job description;
• identified and conveyed your skills and accomplishments most relevant to the position;
• researched the employer; and
• explained what attracted you to the organization.
But there is more to do before the interview so you are prepared to answer questions on the spot and articulate what
makes you a truly compelling candidate.
Preparing for an Interview
Don’t let your first interview be your first time actually answering interview questions! Consider the following strategies
when preparing:
• Write out answers to questions you think the employer will ask. See samples in this chapter.
• Practice saying your responses out loud. Answering potential questions in front of a mirror can make you more aware
of your facial expressions and gestures.
• Practice with friends or family, or schedule an appointment with a Career Counselor at the Career Center.
• Ask for feedback on the content and organization of your answers (completeness, level of detail, how easy to follow)
and your presentation style (pace, voice quality/tone, energy, posture, eye contact, hand gestures).
• Film or record your responses and review your performance. Ask yourself, “Did I look/sound confident, relaxed, and
enthusiastic?” “What does my body language say?” “How were my pace and volume?”
Find out what type of interview you will have. Types of interviews include:
• One-on-one: Just you and one interviewer, the most common type of interview
• Panel: You are interviewed by more than one person at the same time
• Group: A group of candidates is interviewed by a panel or one interviewer
• Meal: You are interviewed while eating, usually over lunch
• Working: You are put to work and observed
• Phone or Video: Often used as a screening tool before inviting you to an on-site interview
• On-Site or Second Round: After you have made it through a screening interview, this is a more extended interview
at the employer site that may include a series of different types of interviews, a site tour, and a meal.
Feeling Nervous?
It is normal to feel nervous about interviews. In fact, being a little nervous can motivate you to prepare
and do your best. But worrying about being nervous usually just makes you more nervous! Try focusing
instead on being self-confident. To harness your nervous energy, think about five things (qualities, skills or
experiences) you would like the employer to know about you and practice presenting these points.
1
Preparing for a Phone or Video Interview
In a screening interview, an employer is generally looking for clear interest, a positive attitude, solid communication skills,
and evidence that your qualifications and experience make you a good fit for the position.
General Tips:
• Schedule the interview for when you can give 100 percent of your attention and take the call in a quiet place with good
reception/wifi.
• Be prepared with lists of points you want to make, your skills and accomplishments with specific examples, and
questions to ask.
• Keep a copy of your resume and the position description nearby.
• Have your calendar available in case you need to set up another interview.
• Listen actively and avoid interrupting the interviewer; ask for clarification if you need it, and think out your responses
before answering.
• Speak clearly and slowly enough so that the interviewer can understand you without difficulty.
• Project enthusiasm in your voice to show you are excited about the possibility of getting the position and appreciate
being considered.
Phone Tips:
• Stand up during your phone interview; this will help with your energy.
• Show enthusiasm for the position—be sure to smile—it will come through in your voice.
• Avoid saying “uh,” “um,” “er,” or “you know.” These fillers are more noticeable on the phone.
• Dress in business casual attire to help put you in an interview mindset.
• Have the company website open on your computer to reference.
Video Tips:
• Look directly at the camera, not the screen, to maintain eye contact with the interviewer.
• Dress from head to toe as though you were having an in-person interview.
• Pick a place with a neutral, uncluttered background.
• Run through a practice video interview with a friend to get used to the technology.
• Pay attention to your body language – maintain good posture and relax your shoulders.
Preparing for a Second Round Interview
Getting a second round interview means you are being considered seriously for a position. The employer will have
a chance to gain a more complete picture of what you offer. They will also see how well you fit in with the company
culture and with other team members.
Begin preparing by reviewing how you did in your first interview. Which aspects did you handle well, and which did
you struggle with? Use this information to plan what you will continue to do and what you will try to improve in the
second one.
Also, gather new information you can bring into the second interview by continuing to research the company and
industry. If you haven’t done so yet, consider setting up informational interviews (see p. 2) with staff members who aren’t
on the hiring committee. You may have the best luck if you can find alumni working at the company.
Before the Interview:
• Confirm the date, time, location, and name of the person you should ask for when you arrive.
• Allow plenty of time to get to the interview site and arrive at least 10 minutes early.
• Make any necessary travel arrangements. If traveling out of the area, ask whether the company will make reservations
for you.
• Keep any receipts. Some medium and large sized companies may help with expenses.
• Try to find out in advance what the agenda will be and with whom you will be interviewing.
• Have ready extra copies of your resume, transcripts, references, and all employer forms that you have been asked
to complete.
• Come up with at least five questions to ask the employer; see p. 36 for sample questions.
• Alert references that they may be contacted.
2
What to Wear to Interviews
• How you should dress will vary somewhat depending on the industry and specific company culture, but it’s
better to dress up than to be too casual.
• Unless otherwise directed, dress conservatively. Men should wear a dark suit and conservative tie. Women
should wear a dark suit. Avoid miniskirts, trendy outfits, or loud colors.
• Make sure your clothes are cleaned and pressed.
• Wear dark polished conservative shoes with closed toe and heel. Men should wear long, dark socks and women
should wear dark or nude colored nylons or trouser socks.
• Minimize jewelry, makeup and fragrance. Women should wear no more than one pair of small earrings. Men
and women should wear no additional body piercings.
• Style your hair neatly and keep it off your face.
• Search the Career Center website for “Interview Attire” to see samples of appropriate attire.
At the Interview:
• Turn off your cell phone, and do not chew gum.
• Be respectful to everyone. Job offers have been denied based on how applicants have treated administrative staff.
• Build rapport in the first 5 seconds. When your interviewer comes into the waiting room and calls your name, walk
toward that person with confidence, make eye contact, extend your hand for a handshake, and say, “Hello, I’m (insert
your name here).” This should help set the tone for a successful interview.
• Do not put your belongings on the interview desk.
• If a panel interview is part of the second-round interview, be sure to maintain eye contact with everyone on the
panel as you answer questions.
• Be prepared to answer the same question several times since you will probably meet with several people over the
course of the day. Stay enthusiastic and consistent in your responses.
• Remember that you are always being evaluated. In group activities and during meals, your ability to work with people
and your “fit” in the organization are being assessed.
• Keep in mind that the interview is a two-way street. Be observant. What is the atmosphere like? Are employees friendly?
• Be sure to ask when you can expect to hear from the employer again.
• If you receive a verbal offer on the spot, it’s usually better to think about the offer before accepting or declining. If
you are not ready to make a decision, ask for written confirmation and tell the employer when you expect to make
a decision.
After the Interview:
• Within two days of the interview, send a thank-you note/email to the person in charge of the interview process with
copies to the others involved. Mention what you appreciated from the day’s activities and reiterate your interest in
the position and the organization.
• A week after sending the thank-you, you may contact the employer to show your continued interest and ask if there
is any additional information you can provide.
• If the employer does not respond within the expected time frame, you may phone or email the person who
interviewed you to ask about your status.
Thank You Letter: How to Say It
Dear Mr. Brown:
Thank you for the opportunity to spend last Thursday at your manufacturing facility in Sunnyvale. The discussion we had was very
informative, and I really enjoyed the tour of your plant and the informal conversation with your engineering staff. I was impressed
with the effective manner in which Consolidated Engineering has adapted the management-by-objective system to their technical
operations. This philosophy aligns well with my interests and training.
The entire experience has confirmed my interest in joining the team at Consolidated Engineering, and I look forward to hearing from
you soon.
Sincerely,
James S. Moore
3
Types of Interview Questions
Depending on the position you apply for, you may be asked questions from any of three different categories:
• Traditional Questions
• Behavioral Questions
• Technical or Case Questions
Since most interviews consist of a mix of different question types, practice responding to questions from both the
traditional and behavioral categories, and add in some technical or case questions if you are entering a field that is
known to use them.
Traditional Questions
Straightforward questions about your experience, background, and personal qualities.
Examples:
• Tell me about yourself.
• Why are you interested in this position/industry/
organization? (What do you know about us?)
• Why should we hire you? (What can you offer us?)
• Describe your ideal job.
• What are your greatest strengths and weaknesses?
• Tell me about an accomplishment that you are proud of.
• What have you learned from your failures?
• What motivates you to do good work?
• How do you prefer to be supervised?
• How would a former supervisor describe you? How
about your friends?
• Why did you decide to attend UC Berkeley?
• Why did you choose your major?
• Which classes did you enjoy most/least and why?
• What do you see yourself doing in five years?
• Do you plan to return to school for further education?
• What other positions are you interviewing for?
Behavioral Questions
Frequently used questions based on the premise that past behavior is the best predictor of future behavior. For
example, if you have shown initiative in a club or class project, you are likely to show initiative in a job or internship.
Examples:
Interpersonal Skills
• When working on a team project, have you ever dealt with
a strong disagreement among team members or a team
member who didn’t do their part? What did you do?
• Tell me about the most difficult or frustrating individual
that you’ve ever had to work with and how you approached
the situation.
• Tell me about a time when you had to be assertive.
Communication Skills
• Tell me about a time when you had to present complex
information. How did you get your point across?
• Describe a time when you used persuasion to convince
someone to see things your way.
• Tell me about a time when you used written
communication skills to convey an important point.
Initiative
• Provide an example of when you had to go above and
beyond the call of duty to get a job done.
• Tell me about a project you initiated.
Creativity/Innovation
• Describe a time when you provided a creative solution
to a problem.
• What is the most creative thing you have done?
Leadership
• Tell me about a time when you influenced the outcome of a
project by taking a leadership role.
• Describe your leadership style and provide an example of a
situation where you successfully led a group.
• Provide an example that demonstrates your ability to motivate
others.
Planning & Organization
• Tell me about an important goal of yours. How did you reach it?
• Describe a situation when you had many assignments or projects
due at the same time. What steps did you take to finish them?
• Provide an example of what you’ve done when your time
schedule or plan was upset by unforeseen circumstances.
Flexibility
• Describe a situation in which you overcame a “personality
conflict” in order to get results.
• Describe a time where you were faced with issues that tested
your coping skills.
• Describe a time when you received constructive criticism.
Decision-making
• Provide an example of when you had to make a difficult decision.
How did you approach it? What kinds of criteria did you use?
• Describe a time when you had to defend your decision.
• Summarize a situation where you had to locate relevant
information, define key issues, and determine the steps to get
a desired result.
4
Behavioral Questions: Planning Your Responses
Respond to these questions with a specific example where you have demonstrated the skill the interviewer is seeking. It’s
helpful to remember “CAR” to compose a thoughtful response. Here’s how it works:
CONTEXT: What was the problem, need, or concern? Include obstacles you had to overcome.
ACTIONS: Describe steps you took, incorporating skills you employed. Focus on what you did as an individual rather than
the group as a whole. Own your accomplishments.
RESULTS: Quantify the results you achieved if possible and relate them, your skills, and actions to the organization’s needs.
Show up to interviews ready with several stories that demonstrate your relevant skills and accomplishments. Develop
them by anticipating the skills that are important for the position and reviewing your past experiences. Accomplishments
can be found in all parts of your life:
• Academics, such as class projects (How did you work with others? Lead others?)
• Sports (Will your goal-orientation transfer to your career? What did you learn about being a team player?)
• Activities (Have you published a story, given a speech, or marched in the Cal Band? Were you a leader?)
• Volunteer, work, or internship experiences (When did your performance exceed expectations? Achieve something
new? Make things easier? Save or make money?)
Behavioral Questions: How to Say It
Question: Describe a time when you worked in a team. What role did you play?
CONTEXT: Last semester, I was part of a team of five people for a group project in my Introduction to Marketing
class. We were given an assignment to develop a marketing strategy for a new line of toys for Mattel. As part of the
project, we were required to create a 15-page marketing plan by the end of the last day of class.
ACTION: I was the team leader, in charge of coordinating all of the group meetings and delegating tasks. I took
the initiative to create a meeting schedule so that our group met every Wednesday afternoon, emailed the agenda
to each group member prior to our meetings, and kept an Excel spreadsheet of all of the tasks. I also worked on
making the team cohesive and supportive of each other by mediating conflicts. To do so, I facilitated discussions,
listening to each member, and helping them to work towards a compromise.
RESULT: As a result of my efforts, we finished the project one week ahead of schedule and were chosen as the
group with the “most innovative” marketing plan. Also, the number of conflicts between members significantly
decreased and we were able to agree upon a marketing plan that satisfied everyone.
Case and Technical Questions
Case and technical questions are especially common in business fields such as finance, consulting, and accounting, as
well as in engineering, physical science, and computer science fields. Technical questions ask about discipline-specific
knowledge; they may be related to concepts that you learned from your coursework, industry knowledge (e.g., familiarity
with financial markets), or specific skills (e.g., programming languages).
Because both technical and case questions can vary so widely from one setting to the next, the best approach to
effectively prepare for them is not to “learn” a particular set of interview questions and then hope that your interviewers
ask you them. Instead, aim to get really good at answering strategy-based questions you’ve never seen before. This can
be attained through lots of PRACTICE. Explore our “Case Interview Resources” on the Career Center website for further
tips and tools.
A general principle that applies to case questions, however, is this: often, you won’t know the answer, but you need to
make an attempt. The interviewer is evaluating how you approach a problem just as much as your answer. Logical and
reasonable thinking is preferred over a one-line response. Keep in mind that there is often no RIGHT or WRONG answer;
each candidate has their opinion and perspective on a question.
You can also log in to Handshake to access sample questions in the Vault Guides for consulting and try asking company
representatives, alumni, or peers who have had interviews in your target field about the types of questions you can
expect. For more in-depth information about case interviews, it would be wise to review case interview books (e.g., Case
in Point) and consulting-focused websites, and look for opportunities to participate in case competitions on campus
through student organizations.
5
Difficult Questions
When encountering a difficult question, pause for a moment and ask yourself, “What is the interviewer really hoping to
learn about me?” Examples of questions that students often find tricky:
What are your salary expectations?
Tell me about yourself.
If you are asked this question during an interview, assume that
This commonly asked question seems so broad. Keep in mind
the employer is deciding whether or not they can afford you,
your audience and purpose. Keep your comments focused
or wondering if you will undersell yourself. Research locationon information that will help the employer determine your
appropriate industry salaries. See “Offers & Negotiations,” p. 37,
qualifications and/or interest in the position. This can include
so you can quote your findings and say, “I’m comfortable with a
what you have gained from your education and/or experiences,
salary that’s in this range.” If the interviewer persists, make sure
your future career aspirations, and your enthusiasm for
that they name a figure first. You can do this by saying, “I’m sure
beginning a job in your field of interest.
you have a range in mind. What are you willing to offer?”
What are your greatest strengths and weaknesses?
View this as an opportunity to point out strengths that relate to Tell me about your participation in this religious/political/
cultural/LGBT activity?
being successful in the position for which you are interviewing.
Employers may inquire about anything that appears on your
Back up your statements with examples of experiences in
resume, so if you do include information about being affiliated
which you have demonstrated your strengths. Strategies for
with religious, political, cultural, or LGBT activities, be prepared
addressing a weakness (only mention one) include choosing
to talk about them. While it is important to be honest about
one you have overcome, or selecting an area/skill that you
your experiences, you should also be cautious, and if possible,
have not had much time to develop or an area that is not that
avoid discussing controversial topics during your interview.
important to the demands of the work. Be genuine with your
Before answering these types of questions, be sure to spend
answers and avoid cliché answers such as “I work too hard” or
some time researching the company’s culture to determine
“I’m a perfectionist.” Employers are impressed by people who
can be honest, recognize areas for improvement, and overcome what would be an appropriate response and if the employer
is a good fit for your values; discuss what you gained from the
personal challenges.
experience rather than your personal beliefs or opinions.
Difficult Question: How to Say It!
Question: What is your greatest weakness?
Sample Answer (make sure to use your own weakness and your own words!):
One area that I have been working on is feeling more comfortable with public speaking. While I have given presentations in
class on several occasions, I noticed that I do get more nervous than I would like when speaking in front of large groups of
people. For this reason, I took the initiative to join the Debate Society at Cal to get more experience with public speaking. I
recently participated in a regional debate competition where I helped my team win second place. Because of my experience
in the Debate Society I have felt less nervous and more confident about speaking in public and feel that this position would
be a good fit for me because I could continue to develop my communication skills.
Questions to Ask Employers
Bring at least five questions to all interviews to ask employers. Asking thoughtful questions shows your interest in the
position and demonstrates that you have researched the company. Avoid questions that you can find the answers to on the
company’s website; focus instead on questions that show you have gone above and beyond to learn about the employer
through news articles, company reports, talking to company representatives, etc. It is usually appropriate to ask questions
at an interview, and typically the interviewer will invite questions at the end of the interview. Here are some questions to
consider as you develop your list:
• What are some typical first-year assignments?
• What kind of training do you offer new employees?
• How does this position fit into the overall organizational
• When and how are employees evaluated?
structure?
• What are the best/most difficult aspects of working in
• Always ask: May I have your business card(s)? This
this group/organization?
will give you proper contact information for thank-you
• What’s the biggest challenge facing this group/
letters and follow-up communications.
organization right now?
• Always ask: What are the next steps in the hiring
• How would you describe the culture of this organization?
process? This will give you a timeline, peace of mind,
• What do you see as unique about your organization
and clues for any possible follow-up actions.
compared with your major competitors? What are your
• Don’t ask: As a general rule, questions about salary and
plans for expansion in terms of product lines, services,
benefits are best left until an offer has been extended.
new branches, etc.?
See Offers & Negotiaton chapter for more information.
• How would you describe this organization’s management
style? How are decisions made?
6
Professional Interview Project
Interview Rating Sheet
Professional Presentation (50 pt max)
-Demonstrates appropriate nonverbal communication (eye contact, posture, facial expressions, body
language, smile)
-Demonstrates a strong introduction (smile and handshake) and closing (thanks interviewer)
-Demonstrates self-confidence, takes initiative, and is enthusiastic
-Demonstrates professionalism
Interview (50 pt max)
-Demonstrates the ability to understand and respond to Traditional Questions (p.4; PIP Packet)
-Demonstrates the ability to understand and respond to Behavioral Questions (p.4-5; PIP Packet)
-Participant asks questions (at the end) that demonstrate interest in organization (p.6; PIP Packet)
-Demonstrates effective communication skills and uses appropriate grammar
-Possess knowledge about the position. Connects previous experience/activities with position’s
duties and skills/ Interview time limit
Duly note, that while this rubric may appear simple, if even
(1) of the following corresponding criteria is NOT met,
then you automatically fall into a lower corresponding
rating-category. This activity requires acute attention to detail
and exemplary efforts. In essence, it is an “all or nothing”
merit-based graded assignment.
SUMMARY
To Do Or Not To Do, That Is The Difference
DO
! Prepare a complete, attractive résumé that stresses your qualifications in a
positive manner.
! Get permission from people you plan to use as references.
! Write an effective cover letter that really sells “you.”
! Fill out the application completely, accurately, and legibly.
! Use the completed résumé as a reference for filling out the application.
! Arrive for the interview a few minutes early.
! Dress appropriately for the interview.
! Go to the interview alone.
! Bring résumé, social security card, work permits and licenses to the interview.
! Greet the receptionist and the interviewer courteously.
! Present yourself with confidence.
! Research the company.
! Be prepared to answer questions about yourself and your qualifications.
! Be prepared to ask questions about the company.
! Smile.
! Follow the interview with a thank-you letter.
DO NOT
” Do not present a résumé that was hastily put together or has typographical
errors and smudges.
” Do not use a general, all-purpose résumé.
” Do not give inaccurate information.
” Do not present an application that is unreadable or incomplete.
” Do not arrive late for an interview.
” Do not wear jeans, wrinkled clothing, or outrageous jewelry to an interview.
” Do not overdo perfume or aftershave.
” Do not take friends or family to an interview.
” Do not act as if the receptionist and interviewer are doing themselves a favor by
seeing you.
” Do not forget your manners.
8
MOST COMMON REASONS WHY PEOPLE ARE NOT HIRED
!
Bad personal appearance
!
Too aggressive
!
Unable to express self clearly
!
Poor interest and enthusiasm
!
No career planning, no goals
!
Overly nervous, under confident
!
Too much emphasis on money
!
Not willing to start at the bottom
!
Discourteous
!
Immature
!
Speaks ill of former employers
!
Cannot make eye contact with interviewer
!
Messy application form
!
Late arrival for interview
!
Did not show appreciation for interviewer’s time
!
Asked no questions about the company
!
Could not give direct answers when questioned
9
RYAN CALL
HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGER
123 Park Avenue, Florida
ryancall16@gmail.com
(123) 456 7899
29 September 2020
Beasley Media Group
Recruitment Officer, LLC
Florida, 4023
Re: Human Resource Manager
I am writing to express my strong interest in the Human Resource
Manager position at Beasley Media Group, as advertised. My
background as a student, combined with internship experiences at
the Red Cross and Worley Company, has equipped me with a
comprehensive skill set that aligns perfectly with the requirements
of the role.
During my time at Red Cross, I honed my skills in Recruitment,
Talent Acquisition, and Onboarding processes, gaining valuable
insights into the importance of selecting the right talent. At Worley
Company, I further developed expertise in Performance
Management, Employee Relations, and Conflict Resolution, playing a
key role in fostering positive work environments.
My proficiency in Data Analysis ensures data-driven decisionmaking, while my understanding of Employment Law and strong
communication abilities guarantee policy compliance and effective
communication. My negotiation skills, coupled with adaptability and
time management, have equipped me to handle HR challenges
efficiently.
What attracts me to Beasley Media Group is its commitment to
diversity and inclusion, reflecting my own passion for creating
thriving workplace cultures. I am excited about the opportunity to
leverage my skills in talent acquisition, employee performance
improvement, and HR operations enhancement to contribute to
your continued success.
Thank you for considering my application. I am excited about the
opportunity to discuss how my skills and experiences align with
your organization’s goals during an interview. Please find my
resume attached for your reference. I look forward to the possibility
of contributing to the Human Resources team at Beasley Media
Group and furthering my career aspirations in HR management.
Yours sincerely,
Ryan Call
RYAN CALL
123 Park Avenue, Florida
ryancall16@gmail.com
(123) 456 78 99
Human Resources Manager
EDUCATION
WORK EXPERIENCE
2023 to 2019
May 2022 – August 2022
Bsc. Human Resources
Florida Atlantic University
Florida, Naples
WORLEY COMPANY
RELATED SKILLS
Human Resource Intern
▪
▪
▪
Recruitment and Talent Acquisition
Performance Management
Employee Relations
Date Analysis
Employment Law
OTHER SKILLS
▪
Assisted in the recruitment process by screening resumes,
conducting initial phone screenings, and coordinating
interviews.
Helped create job descriptions and job postings that attract
top talent.
Assisted in designing and improving the employee onboarding
process to ensure a smooth transition for new hires.
Gathered feedback from new hires to identify areas for
improvement in the onboarding process and make
recommendations for enhancements.
June 2021 – August 2021
RED CROSS
Human Resource Intern
Communication
Negotiation
Conflict resolution
Adaptability
Time management
▪
▪
▪
Assisted in the recruitment process by screening resumes and
conducting initial phone screenings.
Contribute ideas for enhancing diversity and inclusion in the
recruitment process.
Participated in career fairs or virtual recruitment events to
represent the organization and engage with potential
candidates.
How do business leaders plan for the long-term future of their businesses? After the long-term decisions are made, how do business leaders track, monitor, and assess day-to-day, week-to-week, and month-to-month progress? Chapters Eight: How is Capital Budgeting Used to Make Decisions and Chapter Nine: How are Operating Budgets Created address these questions.
Reading Assignment
Chapter Eight, How is Capital Budgeting Used to Make Decisions provides a description of one of the most used models in managerial accounting and in finance: Net present values. This chapter begins by discussing how to compute the time value of money. It then presents how this is used to analyze long-term projects. Two major models used to assess long-term projects are: (1) Net present values (NPV) and (2) Internal rate of return (IRR).
Chapter Nine, How are Operating Budgets Created, describes a major model: The master budget, which is used by business managers and leaders to monitor the operation of their business (which is why it’s called an operating budget). The master budget is consists of an array of other, smaller budgets which report on specific segments of the business.
Chapters 8 & 9 End-Of-Chapter Questions
*Please scroll down to the bottom section of this page to see last week’s end-of-chapter answers.
Discussion Assignment
SportsMax sells sporting goods equipment at 100 stores throughout North America. Robert Manning is the manager of one SportsMax retail store in Chicago. The company is in the planning phase of establishing its operating budget for this coming year and has asked that all store managers submit their estimates of sales revenue, costs, and resulting profit. During the control phase, each store manager is evaluated by comparing budgeted profit with actual profit. Store managers who exceed budgeted profit are given a bonus equal to 10 percent of actual profit in excess of budgeted profit.
Required:
a. Describe the ethical conflict that Robert Manning is facing.
b. As the president and CEO of SportsMax, how might you motivate Robert Manning to provide an accurate operating budget?
Accounting Assignment
Net Present Value Analysis. Architect Services, Inc., would like to purchase a blueprint machine for $50,000. The machine is expected to have a life of 4 years, and a salvage value of $10,000. Annual maintenance costs will total $14,000. Annual savings are predicted to be $30,000. The company’s required rate of return is 11 percent.
Required:
a. Ignoring the time value of money, calculate the net cash inflow or outflow resulting from this investment opportunity.
b. Find the net present value of this investment using the format presented in Figure 8.2.
c. Should the company purchase the blueprint machine? Explain.
Learning Journal
The Learning Journal is a space where you should reflect upon what was learned during the week. How it applies to your daily life and will help you with your life (career) goals. For this week’s reflection, please describe the components of an operating budget and how the different components contribute to the overall budget.
Required Textbook and Materials: UoPeople courses use open educational resources (OER) and other materials specifically donated to the University with free permissions for educational use. Therefore, students are not required to purchase any textbooks or sign up for any websites that have a cost associated with them. The main required textbooks for this course are listed below, and can be readily accessed using the provided links. There may be additional required/recommended readings, supplemental materials, or other resources and websites necessary for lessons; these will be provided for you in the course’s General Information and Forums area, and throughout the term via the weekly course Unit areas and the Learning Guides.
Heisinger, K., & Hoyle, J. B. (2012). Managerial Accounting. Creative Commons by-nc-sa 3.0. https://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/managerial-accounting
tudents will write a 5-7 page paper analyzing and applying managerial skills, concepts, and theories to a real-world company and job
posting/description. Students will choose and study a company that they are or can become familiar with thorough research to understand the
details about the culture and structure of the organization. Furthermore, students will identify connections between the organization and the
functions of management by referencing a current job description from this same organization.
this is the first one and second one, i have ten total, i will send to you once a week. please back to me first two in 3 hours! thank you!
Discussion Board
A discussion board will accompany this module. Each week a topic will be posted by the lecturing team. Students are required to comment on a minimum of 5 topics and to respond to a minimum of 5 peer posts. Each post will be approximately 100 words. Therefore, at the end of the module students will have contributed 10 x 100 words – 1,000 words in total. Students will be awarded up to 10% for every contribution that they make.
Please note that marks will only be awarded for genuine contribution to the topic under discussion not just the fact that something has been written. We encourage students to exercise creativity and their opinion in a professional way, please be mindful that any contribution can be seen by your peers, the lecturing team, the CMI and staff in the School of Management. Professional and courteous responses are therefore required. Contributions to the discussion board must be completed by 2pm on Friday 1st of December and will be marked by mid-January.
Key Marking criteria will include:
• Level of critical analysis
• Quality of Writing: Readability and ability to convey key message(s) concisely.
• Insightfulness of your analysis: Interest and usefulness of thoughts and findings.
first week question:
What are the key trends that have influenced the development of change management over time?
second week question:
What does the move towards a focus on neuroscience within change management suggest is happening within the profession and more widely?
Unformatted Attachment Preview
MN-2009 CHANGE MANAGEMENT
Academic Year 2023-24
MODULE HANDBOOK
Module Co-ordinator:
Dr Samantha Burvill
Office: Bay Campus, School of Management Building, Third Floor, Room
319
On-line Consultation Hour via Zoom: Wednesdays 1.30-2.30
https://swanseauniversity.zoom.us/j/4605086421
On-campus Consultation Hour in person: Tuesdays 10.30-11.30
Email: s.m.burvill@swansea.ac.uk
Teaching Staff:
Mr Alan Price
Office: Bay Campus, School of Management Building, Third Floor, Room
332
On-line Consultation Hour via Zoom: Friday 1.30pm-2.30pm
On-campus Consultation Hour in person: By Appointment
Email: a.h.price@swansea.ac.uk
Date of Issue: 19.09.2023
School of Management
MN-2009 Change Management
Module Overview
Introduction
This module is all about the theory and the practical application of change in a business
environment. The module has been co-designed and will be partly co-delivered with colleagues
and collaborators from Industry. The content encompasses all of the aspects involved in taking
an organisation, a project or people from a current state to a future desired state. Students will
gain knowledge of the theory and practice of organisational change so that they understand how
to both help drive change within an organisation and how to manage this change effectively.
The module will expose students to a wide range of theories, case studies and practical tools to
give a broad basis on which to build knowledge. The module is highly multi-disciplinary and is
extremely relevant to business practice in modern society, which is characterised by the need for
constant change and development. As such, change is recognised as being one of the most
critical aspects of modern organisations.
Change Management has a long history and a large amount of research has been conducted
in this field. However, change is something which is used in practice throughout the world and
different walks of life, therefore it is not just an academic issue but also a practical one. The
module encourages students to engage by considering change in industry in the context of their
own experiences.
This booklet contains:
• an introduction to the module
• details of all learning interactions
• details of the core textbooks via the reading list
• information on assessment and feedback, including the coursework brief
• an overview of the entire module
Module Delivery
Lectures will be delivered in person on campus. The lecture for this module is timetabled on:
Wednesdays 9-11am in Y Twyni 108
A recording will be posted on Canvas within 48 hours following the lecture.
Seminars
All students will have on-campus seminars for this module during weeks 2, 5 and 8 ONLY. This
means you will have a seminar week commencing 9th October, 30th October and 20th November.
Seminars will be delivered in person on campus.
Group A – Tuesday 9-11 in SoM 102
Group B – Tuesday 1-2 in SoM 102
Group C – Tuesday 2-3 in SoM 103
Group D – Tuesday 3-4 in SoM 108
2
Students will be automatically allocated to seminar groups. Students who need to change their
seminar group, for good reason, should e-mail studentsupport-management@swansea.ac.uk.
Seminar times may change in the first two weeks of term. Please check Canvas announcements
and the timetable data displayed on Publish/mytimetable for regular updates.
Optional Drop in Sessions
During the weeks where you have no seminar you will have an optional drop in session instead.
This will be face to face on campus 9-10am in SoM 239. The purpose of these is for them to be
student led. You can use these sessions to ask us any questions you may have, to discuss certain
topics of the module or to discuss assignments. They will not be pre-prepared seminar tasks and
will be student as opposed to lecturer driven. If you have other teaching at this time please utilise
office hours instead.
Communication
All information related to the module will be conveyed to students via Canvas through the
Announcements feature which will also send an e-mail notification to student accounts.
Learning Outcomes
On completion of this module students should be able to:- identify the need for change
– Explain theories of change management in depth.
– Critically apply approaches to change management to different contexts.
– Evaluate change programmes in practice
– Illustrate the application of theory to practice of humanistic elements of change management.
Transferrable Skills
Awareness of effects of culture on different aspects of life
Presentation skills
Communications skills
The ability to critically analyse complex materials
Decision making in complex and unpredictable situations
Teamworking
Reading Material
Every effort has been made to provide the books and journals featured in the reading list for this
module in digital and hard copy format via the library. For more details of the resources available to
support your studies please consult the Library Services Guide for Management or watch this short
recording by Subject Librarian, Naomi Prady.
The full reading list for this module is available via Canvas
The core textbooks for the module are:
•
The Theory and Practice of Change Management (Fifth Edition). Professor John
Hayes. Palgrave Macmillan
3
Other Resources:
• CMC Partnership
• Change Management Institute
• PROCI
• McKinsey
• Journal of Change Management
• Harvard Business Review
• OECD
• Nesta
Previous versions of the textbooks are available online and these are not fundamentally different so
can be purchased as alternatives.
A core textbook is only a starting point and provides introductory and background information only.
Supplemental reading will be identified at each lecture. To achieve high marks in this module
students will need to do background and supplemental reading as well as conduct their own
independent research, for instance through the reading of academic journals, into the topics
identified.
Assessment
The assessment for the module is structured as follows:
•
•
20% Discussion Board contribution
80% Poster and Supporting explanatory brief.
o The poster element of the assessment will make up 45% of the marks
o 5% of the marks will be awarded for attendance at the second seminar where
students will be expected to bring a draft version of their poster for feedback and
discussion
o The 1000 word supporting explanatory brief will make up 30% of the marks
•
Resit – 2500 word essay covering a topic of the students choice from the module worth
100% of the overall module mark.
If you fail this module you will be required to submit a piece of coursework during the supplementary
assessment period in early August 2024. The resit coursework will be weighted as 100% of the
overall module mark – the initial assessment weightings do not apply for resits
Submission in Welsh
Any written work submitted as part of any assessment or examination may be submitted in Welsh,
and that work submitted in Welsh will be treated no less favourably than written work submitted by
you in English as part of an assessment or examination.
Canvas – Digital Learning Platform
To ensure that students have everything they need to get the most out of Canvas, the University has
produced a comprehensive guide called “Passport to Canvas”, which can be accessed via this
Passport to Canvas link.
4
“Passport to Canvas” will always be available to students, meaning that they can go through the
material in one go, or dip in and out of it as required. Students can access the platform via this
Canvas Platform link or from within the university apps and the MyUni webpages.
Canvas Support is available 24/7 365 days a year in the following ways:
•
•
•
Canvas Support Hotline
Canvas Chat
Report a problem
Students can also access these avenues of support via the Canvas Help icon in the navigation menu
on the Canvas Platform. The Canvas Student Guides and Canvas Online Community may also be
helpful.
Note on Terminology
For the purpose of all information, regulations and policies associated with Swansea University, we
use the terms ‘Module’ and ‘Programme’ when making reference to students’ studies. Modules are
discrete educational components of a programme which, when considered collectively, make up the
required credit for students to complete each level of a programme.
However, in Canvas, your Digital Learning Platform, the term ‘Modules’ has a different meaning – it
is used to describe where all of the learning resources are stored. For this reason, students will see
the term ‘Course’ used in Canvas instead, but it means the same as Module (above).
5
School of Management
MN-2009 Change Management
Individual Coursework Assignment 1
The first coursework assignment for this module is a discussion board worth 20% of the overall
module mark due by the 1st of December.
Coursework Brief
Discussion Board
A discussion board will accompany this module. Each week a topic will be posted by the lecturing
team. Students are required to comment on a minimum of 5 topics and to respond to a minimum of
5 peer posts. Each post will be approximately 100 words. Therefore, at the end of the module
students will have contributed 10 x 100 words – 1,000 words in total. Students will be awarded up
to 10% for every contribution that they make.
Please note that marks will only be awarded for genuine contribution to the topic under discussion
not just the fact that something has been written. We encourage students to exercise creativity and
their opinion in a professional way, please be mindful that any contribution can be seen by your
peers, the lecturing team, the CMI and staff in the School of Management. Professional and
courteous responses are therefore required. Contributions to the discussion board must be
completed by 2pm on Friday 1st of December and will be marked by mid-January.
Key Marking criteria will include:
• Level of critical analysis
• Quality of Writing: Readability and ability to convey key message(s) concisely.
• Insightfulness of your analysis: Interest and usefulness of thoughts and findings.
Word Count
The maximum suggested word limit for this assignment (excluding references,
tables, contents page, footnotes, charts, graphs, figures) is 1000 words. This is
expected to be delivered in 10 x 100 word comments.
Submission and feedback
This assignment must be completed by 2pm on Friday the 1st of December via the discussion
board. Marks will be provided by mid-January.
6
School of Management
MN-2009 Change Management
Individual Coursework Assignment 2
The coursework is a poster with a 1000 word explanation worth 75% of the mark due by the 27th
November.
Coursework Brief
You will produce a poster (size A3) and supporting explanatory brief of 1000 words on a topic of
the students choice from the module. To be submitted Monday 27th November. The poster will be
expected to:
• Convey an understanding of the chosen topic
• Convey the latest thinking and research in the area (through the use of both academic and
practitioner citations)
• Utilise figures/tables and images to express pertinent points
• Utilise case studie/s to highlight the topic in practice
• Communicate the way in which that topic links with other topics in the module
• Correctly cite robust academic and practitioner sources
Although this may at face value seem like a short number of words the marks are awarded for your
ability to share complex knowledge in an engaging and accurate way. This is similar to how you
will be expected to convey information in the workplace and therefore aims to develop your
employability skills.
The poster will be submitted through Turnitin on the 27th November but will be presented during an
interactive seminar in week 8 of teaching (week commencing 20th November). Students will be
required to bring their poster to this session (printed in either A4 or A3) and the paper versions will
be collected during the seminar. Please ensure you also bring a digital copy if needed. Students
will be able to look at each other posters and discuss these with students and staff. 5% of the
module marks will be awarded to students who attend this seminar and present their draft
poster. This will enable students to gain feedback on their poster prior to final submission.
Students will be expected to submit the final version of their poster along with a 1000 word
supporting explanatory brief covering key points conveyed in the poster in more detail by 2pm on
Monday the 27th November. It is important that you submit these in the same document. No matter
what software you use to create your poster you will need to present this in a single document with
the poster image and explanatory text together. This can be submitted into Turnitin in word or PDF
format.
Seminars in week 5 of teaching will be focussed on how to create a poster and what is expected
from an explanatory brief. Students who need to re-sit this assessment will do so via a 2500 word
essay covering a topic of their choice from the module.
Key Marking Criteria
•
•
•
•
•
Presentation/Use of visual aids (in relation to the topic)
Evaluation of chosen topic
Referencing
Use of organisational examples
Structure/Presentation (in relation to the topic)
7
Submission and feedback
The poster and explanatory brief will be submitted through Turnitin by 2pm on the 27th November
but the poster will be presented during an interactive seminar in week 8 of teaching (week
commencing 20th November).
Please note:
•
The maximum file size that can be uploaded is 20mb. If the file is larger than this, it is usually
because it includes a lot of images – these should either be removed, if possible, or converted
to a more efficient format to reduce the file size (e.g. .png or .gif).
•
Students should ensure that their student number is part of the title of the filename for the
work submitted/uploaded.
•
IMPORTANT: Any student submitting an assessment past the published deadline without
submitting a request for Extenuating Circumstances (in line with the Extenuating
Circumstances Policy) will be deemed to have not submitted, and receive a mark of 0% for
the assessment.
Students who are likely to be prevented from meeting the assessment deadline due to
extenuating circumstances should notify the School by emailing extenuatingmanagement@swansea.ac.uk as soon as possible before the assessment deadline. Please
refer to the Extenuating Circumstances Policy for further information.
Digital Submission of Coursework Instructions for Turnitin Submissions and instructions for
the Digital Submission of Media Files via Canvas can be found on the Canvas Module page –
Coursework and Submission Information (in the Assessment and Feedback section).
Please direct any assessment submission queries to: somsubmit@swansea.ac.uk
Notes on Style and Word Count
Assignments are a critical part of the learning experience and development for scholars at Swansea
University. Practice will pay dividends when it comes to honing your skills in report and essay writing.
Students are therefore encouraged to submit the highest quality work they can, to reach their
maximum potential. Students with concerns about how to present their work can consult with the
Module Co-ordinator for guidance in addition to the notes listed below:
The maximum word limit for the explanatory brief (excluding tables, charts, graphs, figures, reference
lists but including in-text references) is 1000 words. The word count must be stated in the assignment
cover sheet.
Students are required to adhere to the maximum word limits and should note their final
assignment/examination word count in the space provided on the accompanying cover sheet.
Students will incur a 5-mark penalty for exceeding the word limit. Please note that word counts should
not include cover sheets, bibliographical footnotes, or bibliographies.
Students who submit work that is below the word limit will not be penalised. This is because
students will not have taken full advantage of the word limit available to them, which in itself may
constitute a penalty.
Full academic referencing using the Harvard APA (7th Edition) referencing style should be used
throughout the assignment. The APA Referencing Guide provides guidance on how to reference
using the APA style and this short recording by Subject Librarian, Philippa Price.
8
To gain higher marks, students are required to show analysis and reflection rather than simple
description. They should use multiple sources of academic literature to frame and justify their
analysis. All sources should be correctly identified – students are reminded the University enforces
strict penalties for plagiarism (up to and including withdrawal from the University).
Correct English spelling and grammar should be used at all times. Students who have been formally
diagnosed with specific learning difficulties (SpLD) will be contacted by the disability office and will
be supplied with a specific cover sheet.
Video, Audio or other Assessment Types
For some assessments, students may be required to submit a video, audio or other digital media
item. The University’s overarching privacy policy advises students that the University will collect
photographs and video recordings for the purpose of recording lectures, student assessment and
examinations. This processing and storage of this information is lawful as it is necessary for the
performance of a contract with the student and will apply to any personal data that we process for
the purposes of administering and delivering their course of study.
Student Privacy Notice – Swansea University.
Proof Reading
Please be aware of the University’s Proofreading policy which sets out what the University considers
to be good academic practice in relation to proof reading. Further information can be found by
accessing the proof reading policy.
Good Academic Practice
Academic integrity is fundamental to the values promoted by Swansea University. Academic integrity
reflects a shared set of principles which include honesty, trust, diligence, fairness and respect and
is about maintaining the integrity of a student’s work and their award. Academic integrity is based on
the ethos that how you learn is as important as what you learn.
Academic misconduct is to commit any act whereby a student may attempt to obtain for themselves,
or for another student, an unpermitted advantage. This shall apply whether students act alone or in
conjunction with another/others. This can relate to any form of assessed work. There are different
types of academic misconduct including plagiarism, collusion and commissioning.
The University takes academic misconduct very seriously and it can have a detrimental effect on
your results. If academic misconduct is found to have taken place, penalties will be applied.
Students should note that a claim of ignorance of the University’s expectations on good academic
practice is not an acceptable defence to an allegation of academic misconduct.
Self-plagiarism is the copying of work that was originally completed and submitted by a student and
resubmitted for another purpose, without acknowledgement. While self-plagiarism is not considered
as academic misconduct by the University, it is treated as poor academic practice by the School and
this is reflected in the marks awarded.
How can students learn about good academic practice?
Help with correct referencing is available from the School’s Library Subject Team – you can make
an appointment with a subject librarian for help with referencing. Access the library online
referencing guide for the School of Management. At the start of term, the library offers induction
sessions for new and continuing students and targeted sessions throughout the academic year. You
9
can also access information on good academic practice through the Swansea Centre for Academic
Success. More information on their services can be found on their web pages.
The Centre for Academic Success also provides a short online course on good academic practice
which can be access through the Academic Success pages.
Full information on Academic Misconduct can be found in the Academic Misconduct Procedure.
See also these useful guides on academic integrity and academic misconduct and understanding
plagiarism.
10
School of Management
MN-2009 Change Management
Module Schedule
Teaching
Week
Topic
Lecture Contents
Seminar Contents
Key Readings
1
w/c
02/10
Module and
Assessment
Overview
Introduction to the module
an overview of the
assessment and an
introduction to what exactly
change management is.
No seminar or drop
in session this week
– please utilise
office hours
Tondem, R. 2005. Organisational change management: A critical review. Journal of
Change Management, Vol 5, No.4, pp.369-380
Introduction
to Change
Management
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 4 and 5
CMI Global Insights Report 2022
CIPD People Profession 2030 future trends | CIPD
Change Management with APMG Practitioner | Agile Change Management | UK
Dr Samantha
Burvill
Dag Naslund & Andreas Norrman (2022) A Conceptual Framework for
Understanding the Purpose of Change Initiatives, Journal of Change Management,
22:3, 292-320, DOI: 10.1080/14697017.2022.2040571
2
w/c
9/10
The Human
Element of
Change
Dr Samantha
Burvill
This lecture will explore the
role of people in the change
process – from the start of a
change process to the
implementation of a change
process
Guest session by alumni
Daniel Hall-Jones
Seminar – Case
Study enabling an
in depth
understanding of
what change
management is
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 22
•
•
•
•
•
•
Neuroscience and Change Management, With Vijay Chander
(changemanagementreview.com)
http://www.crowe-associates.co.uk/wpcontent/uploads/2013/08/WilliamBridgesTransitionandChangeModel.pdf
Innovation on Education and Social Sciences (oapen.org)
ERT21360_eOffprint-with-cover-page-v2.pdf (d1wqtxts1xzle7.cloudfront.net)
11
Teaching
Week
Topic
Lecture Contents
Seminar Contents
Key Readings
3
w/c
16/10
Radical vs
Incremental
Change
This lecture will explore what
radical vs incremental
change is and the
implications of this for
organisations
Optional Drop in
session Tuesday 910
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 3
This lecture will be a guest
lecture delivered by Jamie
Methuen who was
responsible for the change
management process that
Severn pathology labs went
through. Jamie will be taking
you through this process of
implementation
Optional Drop in
Session Tuesday 910
This session will look at the
various ways in which
change can be diagnosed
within a firm and the role
consultancy can play in this
.
Seminar –
ASSESSMENT
focus. How to
produce a poster
Mr Alan Price
4
w/c
23/10
Change
Management
in Practice:
Jamie
Methuen
“Senior
Business
Development
Manager for
UKHSA”
Mr Alan Price
5
w/c
30/10
Diagnosing
Change
Dr Samantha
Burvill
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 8 and 9
•
•
•
•
Burke, W.W, and Litwin, G.H. 1992. A causal model of organisational
performance and change, Journal of Management, 18(3), pp.523-545
Weisbord, M.r. 1976. Organisational diagnosis: Six places to look for trouble
with or without a theory, Group and Organisation Studies, 1(4), pp430-447
Burnes, B. 2004a. Kurt Lewin and the planned approach to change: A reappraisal, Journal of Management Studies, 41(6), pp.977-1002
Hanafizadeh, P., and Ravasan, A.Z. 2011. A McKinsey 7S Model-Based
Framework for ERP Readiness Assessment. International Journal of
Enterprise Information Systems, 7(4), pp.23-63
12
Teaching
Week
Topic
Lecture Contents
Seminar Contents
6
w/c
06/11
Change
Management
in Practice:
Undertaking
change
projects in
reality – the
case of a BCorp
This session will be taken by
Dr Ben Reynolds owner of
the B-Corp Urban Foundry.
He will take you through his
extensive experience of
undertaking change projects
in reality and the key role of
these in the workplace.
Optional Drop in
Session Tuesday 910
This session will
introduce the concept of
stakeholders and power
during a change
programme. The various
ways in which people
can be persuaded to
change or champion
change will be covered
Optional Drop in
Session Tuesday 910
Key Readings
Guest
session by
Dr Ben
Reynolds
7
w/c
13/11
Dr Samantha
Burvill
Change with
people
Mr Alan Price
8
w/c
20/11
Overcoming
resistance
Mr Alan Price
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 15 and 17
This session will introduce
Seminar – Peer and The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 20 and 21
some of the ways in which
staff review and
resistance to change can be
discussion of
overcome within an
posters prior to
organisation.
submission
Poster and 1000 word explanatory brief to be submitted by 2pm on Monday 27th November
13
Teaching
Week
Topic
Lecture Contents
Seminar Contents
Key Readings
9
w/c
27/11
Leading
strategic
change
This lecture will examine the
role of leadership in change
management
Optional Drop in
Session Tuesday 910
The theory and practice of change management – Chapter 16
This lecture will examine
what has been covered on
the course and look at future
change management trends
Optional Drop in
Session Tuesday 910
Insert key readings.
Mr Alan Price
10
w/c
04/12
Module
Summary
Dr Samantha
Burvill
NB: Discussion Board contributions need to be complete by Friday 1st December
Note: I reserve the right to alter the above module schedule as the course progresses so that I can maintain some flexibility in the event that we want/need to spend more/less time in a given
area. Therefore, you should follow the enclosed outline in setting your study plan, but along the way I will always clarify ahead of time where we are or any changes in the dates of the
readings or questions to be done if needed.
14
15
0-39
Fail
Presentation of
draft poster at
seminar 5%
Poster Element
45% overall:
40-49
Pass
50-59
2:2
60-69
2:1
70-79
1st
80-100
Higher 1st
The full 5% of the marks will be given if the student attends the seminar with a complete poster to showcase to others and to gain feedback on
Very good use of tables,
figures and images to
convey relevant
information with very good
aesthetics
Excellent use of tables,
figures and images to
convey relevant
information with excellent
aesthetics
Presentation/Use of
visuals
15%
Very poor use of
tables, figures
and images to
convey relevant
information with
poor aesthetics
Evaluation of chosen
topic
10%
Very poor
Basic evaluation of the
evaluation of the chosen topic area
chosen topic area
Satisfactory evaluation of the Good evaluation of the
chosen topic area
chosen topic area
Very good evaluation of the Excellent evaluation of
chosen topic area
the chosen topic area
Referencing
10%
Very poor
reading and
referencing –
read more
widely. Follow
the APA 7th style
convention
Basic reading and
referencing – read
more widely. Follow
the APA 7th style
conventions
Satisfactory reading and
referencing – read more
widely. Follow all the APA
7th Style conventions
Good reading and
referencing – some errors
with the referencing
Very good reading and
referencing
– minor errors with the
referencing
Excellent use of
academic books and
journals. APA 7th style
followed.
Use of organisational
examples
10%
Very poor
examples that
do not link to
your points or
the chosen topic
area
Poor examples, too
descriptive –
summarise the key
points and provide
stronger links
Satisfactory examples but
use less description and link
to your points
Good examples though rely
less on description and link
to the question
Very good examples that
are mostly relevant
Excellent variety that link
to the points being
made. Highly relevant to
the chosen topic area
Basic use of tables,
figures and images to
convey relevant
information with basic
aesthetics
Satisfactory use of tables,
figures and images to convey
relevant information with
satisfactory aesthetics
Good use of tables, figures
and images to convey
relevant information with
good aesthetics
1000 word supporting
explanatory brief
worth 30% overall:
16
Evaluation of chosen
topic
10%
Referencing
10%
Very poor
Basic evaluation of the
evaluation of the chosen topic area
chosen topic area
Very poor
reading and
referencing –
read more
widely. Follow
the APA 7th style
convention
Structure/Presentation Very poor
structure /
10%
presentation
not following
best practice.
Many gaps in
the explanatory
brief
Satisfactory evaluation of the Good evaluation of the
chosen topic area
chosen topic area
Very good evaluation of the Excellent evaluation of
chosen topic area
the chosen topic area
Basic reading and
referencing – read
more widely. Follow
the APA 7th style
conventions
Satisfactory reading and
referencing – read more
widely. Follow all the APA
7th Style conventions
Good reading and
referencing – some errors
with the referencing
Very good reading and
referencing
– minor errors with the
referencing
Poor structure /
presentation not
following best practise
Quite a few gaps in the
Explanatory brief
Satisfactory structure /
Presentation. Some gaps in
the explanatory brief.
Good structure /
presentation a few gaps in
the explanatory brief
Very good clear structure / Excellent structure /
Presentation. Most areas
presentation addressing
covered to a good standard all areas
Excellent use of
academic books and
journals. APA 7th style
followed.
17
Week 1 – An introduction to change management
MN-2009 Change
Management
Dr Samantha Burvill
Getting to know me
Bay Campus, SoM room 319
S.m.burvill@swansea.ac.uk
Office Hours: Tuesday 10.30-11.30 (f2f)
and Wednesdays 1.30-2.30 (online)
Research Focus
Regional development
Well-Being of Future
Generations Act Wales
(2015)
Ecosystems – Evolution to
Purposeful Ecosystems
SMEs
Pedagogic – Employability
Faculty Employability Lead
• Faculty Employability
Strategy
• Graduate Outcomes
• Industry and external
relations
• Year in industry
• Placements
• Employability projects
• Entrepreneurship and
enterprise
Swansea Uni Connect – Swansea University
HUB: Employability – Management (swansea.ac.uk)
Swansea Employability Academy – Swansea University
Module Team
What is CM?……
slido.com
#3328076
Module Overview
• Change Management is a term that encompasses all of the aspects involved in taking an
organisation or people from a current state to a future desired state
• You will gain knowledge of the theory and practice of organisational change so that you
understand how to both implement change within an organisation and how to manage this
change effectively
• The module will expose you to a wide range of theories and practical tools so that you have
both a theoretical and practical base from which to apply your knowledge
• The module is highly multi-disciplinary and is extremely relevant to business practice in the
modern economic society, one that is characterised by the need for constant change and
development
Lecture Topics
1.An introduction to change
2.The human element of change
3.Radical vs incremental
4.Change Management in Practice
5.Diagnostic modelling
6.Change Management in Practice
7.Change through persuasion
8.Overcoming resistance
9.Leadership
10.Module Summary
Collaborators
Urban Foundry
Jamie Methuen
Alumni – prior student
Teaching Approach
Lectures
• 2 hour lecture per week
• Available on canvas
• Posted each week
Seminars
• Three one hour seminars taking place in weeks 2, 5 and 8
• Based on discussion so engagement is crucial to your success
• You may be required to read a short case study in advance
• Content may vary to reflect current issues
• Used to help with coursework assessment
• Drop in sessions in all other weeks
Assessment
• 20% Discussion Board contribution
• 80% Poster and Supporting explanatory brief.
o The poster element of the assessment will make up 45% of the marks
o 5% of the marks will be awarded for attendance at the second seminar (on 21st
November) where students will be expected to bring a draft version of their
poster for feedback and discussion
o The 1000 word supporting explanatory brief will make up 30% of the marks
• The coursework brief is set out in the module handbook.
• Completion of discussion boards is 1st December 2pm on canvas and
hand in for poster and 1000 word explanatory brief is November 27th.
Assessment – Poster and Brief
Coursework Brief
You will produce a poster (size A3) and supporting explanatory brief of 1000 words on a topic of the
students choice from the module. To be submitted Monday 27th November. The poster will be
expected to:
• Convey an understanding of the chosen topic
• Convey the latest thinking and research in the area (through the use of both academic and
practitioner citations)
• Utilise figures/tables and images to express pertinent points
• Utilise case studie/s to highl
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented; marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question numbers clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answers must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. Use quality improvement tools and practices for continuous improvement to achieve
the organizational change and transformation. (2.2)
2. Implement quality improvement efforts using teams for organizational assessment and
quality audits. (3.1)
•Instructions to search the article:
Via your student services page, log in to the Saudi Digital Library. After your login
with your student ID, search for the following article:
CUSTOMER-FOCUSED ENVIRONMENT: ORGANIZATIONS MUST EXTEND
THEIR DEFINITION OF CUSTOMERS.
ISSN: 03609936
In this article, the author discusses the different definition of customers either internal
or external and how satisfying all customers’ needs helps the organization in term of
accomplishing its quality objectives. Read the article, and answer the following
questions:
Assignment Question(s):
1. In your own words, summarize the article. (150 – 200 words) (3 marks)
2. To which extent do you agree or disagree with the author’s point of view “that internal
customers’ needs are important as externals to create a true quality environment” and
why? (150 – 200 words) (4 marks)
3.
Discuss the tools needed to operate within the new environment as indicated by the
author. (150 – 200 words) (3 mark)
Important Notes: •
For each question, you need to answer not in less than 150 Words.
•
•
Support your answers with course material concepts, principles, and theories from the
textbook and scholarly, peer-reviewed journal articles etc.
Use APA style for writing references.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
Exam Content
As a manager, whether you’re a store, facilities, or a general manager in any type of environment, your teams work to meet the strategic direction of the organization. As strategic initiatives are adopted, you and your team may need to adapt to new directions. Change can be hard, and your team and your organization rely on your understanding of the organizational culture to support change.
In this assessment, you will use your experience and the organizational change chart you completed in Week 1 to assess the organization’s culture to improve alignment among the culture, mission, vision, values, and strategies using Kotter’s 8-step change management model. You provide your assessment including how proposed decisions for improvements align to the organization’s mission, vision, values, and strategies to the leadership team.
Assessment Deliverable
Create a 7- to 10-slide presentation to the leadership of the organization you chose to explore in Week 1. Refer to your Organizational Change Chart from Week 1 and include the following:
Describe your assessment of the current culture within the organization at the time of your experience. Refer to the organizational change chart you completed in Week 1 to describe your assessment.
Develop a Change Management Plan using Kotter’s 8-Step model for the change goal you identified. Refer to the suggested actions for improvement you included in the Organizational Change Chart.
Determine the desired outcome as a result of the proposed change.
Analyze the alignment among the organization’s mission, vision, values, strategies, and the proposed Change Management Plan.
Include speaker notes to provide additional details not already present on each slide.
المملكة العربية السعودية
وزارة التعليم
الجامعة السعودية اإللكترونية
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Education
Saudi Electronic University
College of Administrative and Financial Sciences
Assignment 1
Introduction to Operations Management (MGT 311)
Due Date: 14/10/2023 @ 23:59
Course Name:
Student’s Name:
Course Code: MGT 311
Student’s ID Number:
Semester: First
CRN:
Academic Year:2023-24-1st
For Instructor’s Use only
Instructor’s Name:
Students’ Grade:
Marks Obtained/Out of 10
Level of Marks: High/Middle/Low
General Instructions – PLEASE READ THEM CAREFULLY
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Assignment must be submitted on Blackboard (WORD format only) via allocated
folder.
Assignments submitted through email will not be accepted.
Students are advised to make their work clear and well presented, marks may be reduced
for poor presentation. This includes filling your information on the cover page.
Students must mention question number clearly in their answer.
Late submission will NOT be accepted.
Avoid plagiarism, the work should be in your own words, copying from students or other
resources without proper referencing will result in ZERO marks. No exceptions.
All answered must be typed using Times New Roman (size 12, double-spaced) font. No
pictures containing text will be accepted and will be considered plagiarism).
Submissions without this cover page will NOT be accepted.
Learning Outcomes:
1. To understand the global nature of supply chain.
2. To explain the demand and supply side of Supply chain.
3. To understand the completive advantage in the business.
Assignment Question(s):
Go through the case study and answer the questions that follow
The Benetton supply chain:
One of the best-known examples of how an organization can use its supply chain to achieve
a competitive advantage is the Benetton Group. Founded by the Benetton family in the
1960s, the company is now one of the largest garment retailers, with stores which bear its
name located in almost all parts of the world. Part of the reason for its success has been the
way it has organized both the supply side and the demand side of its supply chain.
Although Benetton does manufacture much of its production itself, on its supply side the
company relies heavily on ‘contractors’. Contractors are companies (many of which are
owned, or part-owned, by Benetton employees) that provide services to the Benetton
factories by knitting and assembling Benetton’s garments. These contractors, in turn, use
the services of sub-contractors to perform some of the manufacturing tasks. Benetton’s
manufacturing operations gain two advantages from this. First, its production costs for
woollen items are significantly below some of its competitors because the small supply
companies have lower costs themselves. Second, the arrangement allows Benetton to
absorb fluctuation in demand by adjusting its supply arrangements, without itself feeling
the full effect of demand fluctuations.
On the demand side of the chain, Benetton operates through a number of agents, each of
whom is responsible for their own geographical area. These agents are responsible for
developing the stores in their area. Indeed, many of the agents actually own some stores in
their area. Products are shipped from Italy to the individual stores where they are often put
directly onto the shelves. Benetton stores have always been designed with relatively limited
storage space so that the garments (which, typically, are brightly coloured) can be stored
in the shop itself, adding colour and ambience to the appearance of the store.
Because there is such limited space for inventory in the stores, store owners require that
deliveries of garments are fast and dependable. Benetton factories achieve this partly
through their famous policy of manufacturing garments, where possible, in greggio, or in
grey, and then dyeing them only when demand for particular colours is evident. This is a
slightly more expensive process than knitting directly from coloured yarn, but their supplyside economies allow them to absorb the cost of this extra flexibility, which in turn allows
them to achieve relatively fast deliveries to the stores.
Questions:
1. Brief your understanding about Benetton Supply Chain operations.
(3MM)
2. In your understanding, what is the specialty of Benetton’s contractors?
(3MM)
3. Does this method provide Benetton competitive advantage over their competitors?
Is this method sustainable in the long term?
(4MM)
Note:
•
•
You must include at least 5 references.
Format your references using APA style.
Answers
1. Answer2. Answer3. Answer-
You will individually do a “deep reading” of a promotional text and write a promotional analysis about that text. The text can be any advertisement promoting a product, service, organization, person, etc. This analysis requires each student to select their own example of existing advertising content (e.g., podcast, TikTok influencer video, online commercial). Overall, the goal is to have a critical approach to how another person, group, service, etc. has advertised content.
Please include some way for the instructor to access the chosen promotional piece (e.g., website link, pasted image in word doc, etc.).
Analysis Components:
Your analysis will require answering the following four questions:
1. What is the producer’s promotional objective(s)? (How do you know this?)
2. Who is the promotion’s intended audience and how might they respond to the promotion?
3. What audio, visual, and or written tactics does the promotion employ that makes it un/successful in its objective?
4. What could be done to improve this promotional content to reach its objective (perhaps even more)? (E.g., certain visual, written, or audio techniques?)
*When answering, think about how economic, social, cultural, political, etc. might work with and against one another in the promotion’s creation, transmission, and consumption. For each question, always explain your reasoning, which should be grounded in theory/literature.
Answers to and arguments about the above questions should be grounded in class concepts or other scholarship. Thus, you are required to refer to at least three academic readings (can be from the course or elsewhere) to help you analyze your selected promotion.
Some Examples (for context):
Example 1: You could do an analysis of how a car has been promoted through a specific medium. Based on this promotion, you might use Stuart Hall’s encoding/decoding model to suggest what the promotion’s intended audience is and how they might respond (question 2). You might use Power and Greenwell’s study on branding lifestyles to argue about what tactics the promotion employs in relation to its objective (question 3).
Example 2: You could do an analysis of an existing influencer who promoted content about a hospitality venue. Based on this social media influencer promotion, you might use Theodor Adorno’s “culture industry” theory to suggest what tactics the social media influencer uses that makes the promotion successful (question 3). Perhaps this influencer uses the same images and words commonly associated with promoting a hospitality venue or how consumers think of hospitality venues. You might use Becker et al.’s study on authentic advertising to explain how the social media influencer could have improved their promotional content by appearing more authentic using the “four dimensions of authenticity” (question 4).
Topic Choice:
Any advertising content can be analyzed.
Grading:
To achieve the maximum grade, students must answer all 4 questions noted above in their analysis.
